JP2020036640A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of increasing a player's interest in a game.SOLUTION: A state of a specific element related to a player's advantage is set to one of a plurality of states including at least a first state corresponding to a first advantage by specific element setting means and a second state corresponding to a second advantage higher than the first advantage. One game state is set by game state setting means out of a plurality of game states including at least a first game state on the basis of satisfaction of a predetermined setting condition and a second game state more advantageous to a player than the first game state. The second game state is configured to be more advantageous to the player when the specific element is set to the first state than when the specific element is set to the second state. Thereby, a player's interest in a game can be increased.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 273

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

  Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, shift to a winning state when a result of a lottery performed based on winning of a game ball in a starting winning opening is a winning. Some of such gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of winning types having different numbers of rounds. Some types of gaming machines aim to improve the interest in winning by making different game values obtainable.

Japanese Patent No. 2514417

  However, there was a demand for further improvement in interest.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's interest in playing a game.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the state of the specific element relating to the player's advantage is higher than the first state corresponding to the first advantage and the first advantage. A specific element setting means that can be set to one of a plurality of states including at least a second state corresponding to a second advantage degree; a first game state based on establishment of a predetermined setting condition; Game state setting means for setting one of a plurality of game states including at least a second game state which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, wherein the second game state is the specific element Is set to be more advantageous to the player when set to the first state than when set to the second state.

  According to a second aspect of the present invention, there is provided the gaming machine according to the first aspect, wherein the determination unit performs the determination based on the satisfaction of the determination condition, and the determination result of the determination unit becomes a predetermined specific determination result. Bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the fact that the first state is less likely to be the specific determination result than the second state. ing.

  According to a third aspect of the present invention, there is provided the gaming machine according to the second aspect, wherein the first position where the game ball can easily enter the entering ball means, the first position where the game ball can easily enter the entering ball means, A variable means that can be changed to a second position where the game ball is harder to enter than the one position, and based on a result of the determination by the determination means being a second determination result different from the specific determination result A variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period; and a predetermined game based on a game ball having entered the ball entry means. And a privilege granting means for granting a privilege, wherein the second gaming state is configured such that the predetermined privilege is more easily provided by the privilege providing means than the first gaming state.

  According to a fourth aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to the second or third aspect, the gaming state setting means determines the first gaming state based on the specific determination result in the second gaming state. The state can be set.

  According to a fifth aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to any one of the second to fourth aspects, the second game state can be maintained until the specific determination result is obtained.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the state of the specific element relating to the player's advantage is set to the first state corresponding to the first advantage, and the second advantage is higher than the first advantage. , A specific element setting means that can be set to one of a plurality of states including at least a first state, a first game state based on establishment of a predetermined setting condition, and the first game state. A game state setting means for setting one of a plurality of game states including at least a second game state that is more advantageous to the player, wherein the specific element is the second state The case where the first state is set is more advantageous to the player than the case where the first state is set.

  As a result, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of the first aspect, the determining means for performing the determination based on the satisfaction of the determining condition and the determination result of the determining means are predetermined. A bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player based on a specific determination result, wherein the first state is more likely to be the specific determination result than the second state. Is low.

  Thereby, in the advantageous second game state, it is possible to realize an extremely novel game property in which the lower the probability of being a specific determination result is, the more advantageous the gameplay is, so that the player's interest in the game is further improved. There is an effect that can be.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of the second aspect, a ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, and a game ball easily entering the ball entry means. A variable means that can be changed to a first position and a second position where a game ball is less likely to enter than the first position; and a second determination result that is different from the specific determination result obtained by the determination result of the determination means. A variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the change of the game ball; And a privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege on the basis of the above, wherein the second game state is configured to be more easily provided with the predetermined privilege by the privilege granting means than the first game state. .

  Accordingly, in the second game state, a predetermined privilege is easily provided, and thus, when the second game state is set, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine of the fourth aspect, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine of the second or third aspect, the gaming state setting means is configured to perform the determination based on the specific determination result in the second gaming state. Thus, the first game state can be set.

  Thus, when a specific determination result is obtained in the second gaming state, the first gaming state having a lower degree of advantage than in the second gaming state may be set. Therefore, in the second gaming state, the specific determination result is obtained. Rather than the second determination result, it is possible to make the user want the bonus to be continuously provided. Therefore, a novel game property that expects no specific discrimination result can be realized, and thus, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  According to the gaming machine of the fifth aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of any one of the second to fourth aspects, the second gaming state can be maintained until the specific determination result is obtained. It is configured.

  Accordingly, the second game state is maintained until the specific determination result is obtained, so that the first state having a low probability of being the specific determination result is longer and the second game state is more likely to be continued. In other words, the result of the second discrimination is more likely to be obtained, so that the number of times the predetermined privilege is provided tends to be increased. Therefore, in a state other than the second gaming state, it is possible to expect the second state, while in the second gaming state, the disadvantageous first state can be expected. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is the elements on larger scale of the game board in 1st Embodiment, and is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the general winning a prize apparatus. It is the elements on larger scale of the game board in 1st Embodiment, and it is the schematic diagram which showed the flow which the ball | ball which won in the general winning a prize apparatus flows into an out port. It is the elements on larger scale of the game board in 1st Embodiment, and it is the schematic diagram which showed the flow which the ball | ball which won in the general winning a prize apparatus flows into a special power operation port. It is the elements on larger scale of the game board in 1st Embodiment, and is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the V winning device. It is a partial enlarged view of a game board in a 1st embodiment, and is a schematic diagram showing a ball flow in a V winning device when a storage valve is in a storage state in a game per accessory. FIG. 3 is a partially enlarged view of the game board in the first embodiment, and shows a ball flow in a case where a storage valve shifts from a storage state to a release state and a first movable valve is located at a guidance position in a game per accessory. FIG. FIG. 4 is a partially enlarged view of the game board in the first embodiment, and shows a ball flow in a case where a storage valve shifts from a storage state to a release state and a first movable valve is located at a passing position in a game per accessory. FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. (A) is a figure which showed typically the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, and (b) is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode according to the embodiment. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode at the time of the big hit ending displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, and (b) is a third symbol display device in the first embodiment. FIG. 12C is a diagram showing an example of a display mode at the start of the V rush displayed on 81, and FIG. 12C shows the holding status of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 12A is displayed. FIG. 12D is a schematic diagram showing a holding status of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 12B is displayed. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode in the case of a normal symbol hit in a V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, and (b) is a first embodiment. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in a case of hitting an accessory during a V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. 13 (c) shows the display screen shown in FIG. 13 (a). FIG. 14D is a schematic diagram showing the holding status of each symbol in a case where the display screen shown in FIG. 13B is displayed. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the case of a V prize per V rush medium character displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, and (b) is a first embodiment. FIG. 15C is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the case of a loss per V rush medium character displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the embodiment, and FIG. 14C shows the display screen shown in FIG. FIG. 14D is a schematic diagram showing the holding status of each symbol in the case where it is performed, and FIG. 14D is a schematic diagram showing the holding status of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 14B is displayed. . (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode in the case of the big hit ending in the V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the first embodiment. 15C is a diagram illustrating an example of a display mode of adding a timer during a V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. 15C illustrates each of the display modes when the display screen illustrated in FIG. 15A is displayed. FIG. 15D is a schematic diagram showing the holding status of symbols, and FIG. 15D is a schematic diagram showing the holding status of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 15B is displayed. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode at the end of V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, and (b) is a third symbol display in the first embodiment. FIG. 17C is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the V lash is extended displayed on the device 81, and FIG. 16C shows the holding status of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 16A is displayed. FIG. 16D is a schematic diagram showing the holding status of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 16B is displayed. (A) is a figure which showed an example of the display aspect of the special screen at the time of the big hit ending displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 in 1st Embodiment, (b) is 3rd in 1st Embodiment. FIG. 17C is a diagram illustrating an example of a display mode in the heaven mode displayed on the symbol display device 81. FIG. 17C illustrates holding of each symbol when the display screen illustrated in FIG. 17A is displayed. FIG. 17D is a schematic diagram showing the situation, and FIG. 17D is a schematic diagram showing the holding status of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 17B is displayed. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode of a chance-per-principle effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the third embodiment in the first embodiment. FIG. 19C is a diagram illustrating an example of a display mode in the case of a normal symbol stop during the V rush displayed on the symbol display device 81, and FIG. 18C illustrates a case where the display screen illustrated in FIG. FIG. 18D is a schematic diagram showing the holding status of each symbol, and FIG. 18D is a schematic diagram showing the holding status of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 18B is displayed. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode in the case of a special figure stop during V rush displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 in a 1st embodiment, and (b) is a 1st embodiment. FIG. 19 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a lucky time effect during a V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. 19C shows a case where the display screen shown in FIG. FIG. 19D is a schematic diagram showing the hold status of each symbol in FIG. 19D, and FIG. 19D is a schematic diagram showing the hold status of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 19B is displayed. It is the model which showed typically the game flow of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating a counter and the like provided in a RAM 203 of a main control device 110. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a first random number table in the first embodiment. FIG. 3C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a second random number table in the first embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a first hit type selection table in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special figure big hit type selection table in the first embodiment. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the V jackpot type selection table in the first embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a normal table in the first embodiment. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the time saving table in the first embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of various operation scenario tables in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the per-accessory operation scenario table in the first embodiment. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a first movable valve operation scenario table in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of a per-drawing operation scenario table in the first embodiment. FIG. 3C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a scenario per ordinary ordinary drawing in the first embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the time-saving general-purpose per-scenario scenario in 1st Embodiment. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating a configuration of a RAM of the main control device according to the first embodiment. FIG. 2A is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating a configuration of a ROM of the audio ramp control device according to the first embodiment, and FIG. 2B is a schematic diagram illustrating a configuration of a RAM of the audio ramp control device according to the first embodiment. FIG. (A)-(i) is a timing chart showing the flow of a game when a per-figure-per-game is executed in the normal state in the first embodiment. (A)-(i) is a timing chart showing a flow of a game when a per-figure-per-game is executed in the time saving state in the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a block diagram of an electrical configuration of the display control device according to the first embodiment. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the image at the time of power-on. (A) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface A, (b) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface BD. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display data table typically. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of a transfer data table. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change start processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol big hit determination processing performed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change pattern selection processing performed by MPU in a main control device in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation execution process performed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change stop processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a prefetch process executed by an MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a through gate passage process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special power start opening winning process performed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a V entrance passage process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a V-pass process performed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. 4 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit control process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prize-winning process performed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows control processing per accessory performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 1st embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. 4 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure fluctuation | variation start process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart showing a winning command process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a status command receiving process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating stop-related processing executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a general-purpose-related process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed a hit related process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 1st embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a jackpot-related process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the big hit ending processing which is executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in 1st execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the accessory hit related process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the effect update process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating main processing executed by an MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interruption process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a V interrupt process. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by an MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. 9 is a flowchart showing a stop type command process. (A) is a flowchart showing an opening command process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the round number command process. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an ending command process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a fluctuation stop command process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a notification command process. (A) is a flowchart showing a rear image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing an error command process to be performed. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a display setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a resident image transfer setting process. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a normal image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. It is the elements on larger scale of the game board in 2nd Embodiment, and is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the general winning a prize apparatus. It is the elements on larger scale of the game board in a 2nd embodiment, and is the mimetic diagram showing the state where the ball which won the general winning a prize device can flow down to the 2nd special electricity operation port. (A) is a state in which the regular figure long hitting game and the accessory hitting game are repeatedly executed during the time saving state (V rush) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the second embodiment. FIG. 14B is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of FIG. 14B. FIG. 14B is a diagram illustrating a general figure long fluctuation during a time saving state (V rush) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the second embodiment, and a game per accessory. FIG. 90 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in a state in which the symbols are executed in an overlapping manner. FIG. 90 (c) shows the holding status of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 90 (a) is displayed. FIG. 90D is a schematic diagram showing the holding status of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 90B is displayed. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the remaining period of the interrupted special symbol change displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the second embodiment is shorter than a predetermined period; (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in a case where the remaining period of the interrupted special symbol change displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the second embodiment is longer than a predetermined period, ) Is a schematic diagram showing the holding status of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 91 (a) is displayed, and (d) shows the display screen shown in FIG. 91 (b). FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram showing the holding status of each symbol in the case where the symbol is held. (A), (b) is a timing chart showing the flow of the game in the case where the end condition of the per-accessory game executed during the regular long hit in the second embodiment is changed. (A), (b) is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when the end condition of the per-accessory game executed during the normal figure long fluctuation in the second embodiment is changed. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the pachinko machine in a 2nd embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the second embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the general figure hit type selection table in the second embodiment. FIG. 9C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a general-purpose variation pattern selection table according to the second embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of various operation scenario tables in the second embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the second per-principal operation scenario table in the second embodiment. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a configuration of a per-figure-period operation scenario table in the second embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of two scenarios per time-saving general-purpose figure in the second embodiment. FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of three scenarios per time-saving time drawing in 2nd Embodiment. It is the model which showed typically the structure of RAM of the sound lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special power start opening winning process 2 performed by the MPU in the main control device in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the general map related process 2 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the general figure fluctuation | variation start process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the per-principal-item related process 2 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start processing per accessory performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows production update processing 2 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special figure residual change suggestion processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the general figure related time update process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. (A), (c) is a figure which showed an example of the display mode at the time of entering the danger time during V rush displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 in 3rd Embodiment, (b), (b) FIG. 11D is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a big hit is discarded at the danger time during the V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the third embodiment. (A), (b) is a figure showing an example of a display mode when a big hit is interrupted at the danger time during the V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the third embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the V jackpot type selection 3 table in the third embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the danger time selection table in the third embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special power starting opening winning process 3 performed by the MPU in the main control device in the third embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows production update processing 3 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the danger time setting process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is the model which showed typically the counter etc. provided in RAM of the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the main control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the small hit random number table in 4th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing 4 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special design change start processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol big hit determination processing performed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special design change pattern selection processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special design change execution processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special design change stop processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving update process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special design change start processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol big hit determination processing performed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 deviation | change process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special design change pattern selection processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special design change in-execution processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special design change stop processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special figure 2 departure stop processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows starting winning processing 4 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st prefetching processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd prefetch processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows V passage processing 4 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is the elements on larger scale of the game board in a modification, and is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the general winning a prize apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows special design change start processing 5 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 5th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change stop processing 5 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 5th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows normal symbol change processing 5 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 5th embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed special figure change start processing 5 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 5th embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed stop related processing 5 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 5th embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 6th Embodiment. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode at the time of a jackpot ending displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the sixth embodiment, and (b) is a third symbol display device in the sixth embodiment. 145 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of an end condition selection screen displayed at 81, and (c) shows a hold status of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 145 (a) is displayed. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is a figure which showed an example of the display mode after the end condition selection displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 in 6th Embodiment, (b) is 3rd symbol display in 6th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the display aspect of the V rush start screen displayed on the apparatus 81, (c) shows the holding | maintenance situation of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 146 (b) is displayed. FIG. It is the model which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is the model which showed typically the structure of RAM of the sound lamp control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the timer interruption process 6 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special power start opening winning process 6 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the switching process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot control processing 6 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the end condition setting process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. 15 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process 6 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the sixth embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed end condition related processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 6th embodiment. (A), (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode during a V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the second modification. It is the front view which showed typically the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in 7th Embodiment. (A), (b) is the fragmentary perspective view which showed typically the structure of the right electric accessory in 7th Embodiment. It is the top view which showed typically the opening / closing lid of the right electric accessory in 7th Embodiment. (A), (b) is the elements on larger scale which showed a part of right area in 7th Embodiment typically. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode in a probable change state displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a third symbol display device in the seventh embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a display mode at the time of shifting from a probability change state displayed on 81 to a latent state. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode at the time when the second special symbol change is not started in the latent state displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 13B is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the second special symbol change is started in the latent state displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the seventh embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a display mode during a RUSH game performed during a latent state displayed on third symbol display device 81 in a seventh embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the case where the special figure holding ball is changed during the RUSH game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is It is a figure showing an example of a display mode when a special figure reservation ball reaches a specific number during a RUSH game displayed on a third symbol display device 81 in a seventh embodiment. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode during a super RUSH game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a third symbol display in the seventh embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a display mode suggesting the end of the super RUSH game displayed on device 81. It is a figure showing an example of a display mode which shows the end of the super RUSH game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the seventh embodiment. It is a transition diagram showing typically the flow of the game in a 7th embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device according to the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the first random number 7 table in the seventh embodiment. It is the schematic diagram shown, (c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the small random number 7 table in 7th Embodiment, (d) is 2nd random number 7 in 7th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed the structure of the table typically. It is the model which showed typically the content of the big hit type selection table which the ROM of the main control apparatus in 7th Embodiment has. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 7 tables for normal which the ROM of the main control apparatus in 7th Embodiment has. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a seven-step variable table included in a ROM of the main control device according to the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a diagram illustrating the ROM of the main control device according to the seventh embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the seven tables for latents which have. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a small hitting type selection 7 table held in the ROM of the main control device according to the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the main control device according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a general-purpose variation pattern selection table included in a ROM. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is the model which showed typically the structure of RAM of the sound lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special design change stop processing 7 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 7th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows time saving update processing 7 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 7th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special design change start processing 7 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 7th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol big hit determination processing 7 performed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection processing 7 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 7th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special design change stop processing 7 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 7th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special figure 2 departure stop processing 7 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 7th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows small hit processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 7th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process 7 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed stop related processing 7 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 7th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the preparation state setting process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in 7th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure discard setting process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed variable display setting processing 7 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 7th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the production | presentation mode setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the ceiling effect setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 7th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the variable display setting process 7 for special figure 2 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the seventh embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the setting process during the probable change performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the setting process 7 during RUSH performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is the front view which showed typically the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the modification of 7th Embodiment. It is an exploded perspective view showing the structure of the V winning device in a modification of the seventh embodiment. (A)-(c) is a partial sectional view of a V winning device in a modification of the seventh embodiment. (A), (b) is a partial sectional view of the V winning device in a modification of the seventh embodiment. (A), (b) is a partial sectional view of the V winning device of the pachinko machine in the second modified example of the seventh embodiment. It is a transition diagram showing typically the flow of the game in the modification of a 7th embodiment. (A), (b) is a figure which showed an example of the display mode in the latent state displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 in the modification of 7th Embodiment. FIGS. 21A and 21B are diagrams showing an example of a display mode in a latent state displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a modification of the seventh embodiment. It is the front view which showed typically the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in 8th Embodiment. It is a mimetic diagram showing typically the composition of ROM of the main control unit in an 8th embodiment. It is a transition diagram showing typically contents of small hit random number table 202ga performed by main control device 110 in an 8th embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the big hit type selection 8 table which ROM of the main control apparatus in 8th Embodiment has. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 8 tables for probable change which ROM of the main control device in 8th Embodiment has. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 8 tables for latents which ROM of the main control apparatus in 8th Embodiment has. It is the model which showed typically the content of the small hit type selection 8 table which ROM of the main control apparatus in 8th Embodiment has. It is a mimetic diagram showing typically the composition of RAM of the main control unit in an 8th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol big hit determination processing 8 performed by the MPU in the main control device in the eighth embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special figure 1 deviation change processing 8 performed by MPU in a main control unit in an 8th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special design change pattern selection processing 8 performed by MPU in the main control unit in an 8th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special figure 1 deviation variation pattern selection processing 8 performed by MPU in a main control unit in an 8th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special design change stop processing 8 performed by MPU in the main control unit in an 8th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special figure 1 departure stop processing 8 performed by MPU in a main control unit in an 8th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows small hit processing 8 performed by MPU in a main control unit in an 8th embodiment. (A), (b) is a figure which showed an example of the display mode in the latent state displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 in 9th Embodiment. (A), (b) is a figure which showed an example of the display mode in the latent state displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 in 9th Embodiment. (A), (b) is a figure which showed an example of the display mode in the latent state displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 in 9th Embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a display mode in a latent state displayed on 3rd symbol display device 81 in a 9th embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the big hit type selection 9 table which ROM of the main control apparatus in 9th Embodiment has. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a small hit type selection 9 table held in the ROM of the main control device in the ninth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the main control device in the ninth embodiment. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a normal figure variation pattern selection 9 table included in a ROM. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device according to the ninth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a configuration of an icon display number selection table included in the ROM of the audio lamp control device according to the ninth embodiment, and (b) is an audio lamp control device according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a configuration of a continuous effect selection table included in a ROM of FIG. It is a flow chart which showed winning a prize command processing 9 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 9th embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed big hit end processing 9 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 9th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the preparation state setting process 9 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in 9th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the RUSH mid-stage production setting process 9 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the ninth embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed big hit related processing 10 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a modification of a 9th embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 10th Embodiment. (A) is a figure which showed typically the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 in 10th Embodiment, (b) is 10th Embodiment. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in FIG. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode when reach is established at the normal time displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the tenth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing a display mode in the tenth embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during a normal symbol fluctuation displayed on a three-symbol display device 81; (A) is a figure which showed an example of the display mode which is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 in the 10th Embodiment at the time of normal time, and (b) is a 10th Embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a display mode in a case where a chance zone in which a second special symbol lottery (variation) is executed at the normal time displayed on the three symbol display device 81 is set. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode when the third symbol is temporarily stopped during the special fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the tenth embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a display mode when the third symbol is restarted during the special fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the tenth embodiment. The figure which showed an example of the display mode when a 3rd symbol restarts in the special fluctuation effect performed in the state which has not acquired the special figure 2 hold | maintenance displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 in 10th Embodiment. It is. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode when the first special symbol change is executed in a state where the probable change state displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set in the tenth embodiment. (B) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the second special symbol change is executed in a state where the probable change state displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set in the tenth embodiment. is there. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display mode displayed in the first half of the ending period of the normal jackpot game in the tenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram in the tenth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the display mode displayed in the first half period in the ending period of a probability change big hit game, and (c) is the latter half in the ending period of a normal big hit game in 10th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the display mode displayed in a period, and (d) shows an example of the display mode displayed in a latter half period among the ending periods of a probability change big hit game in 10th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically. (A) is a timing chart showing a game flow in the case of a non-reach variation pattern in the tenth embodiment, and (b) shows a game flow in the case of a reach variation pattern in the tenth embodiment. It is a timing chart. (A)-(c) is the timing chart which showed the flow of the effect performed during the ending period of the big hit game in the tenth embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the tenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main control device in the tenth embodiment. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a special symbol jackpot random number 10 table included in the ROM of the main control device according to the tenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the main control device according to the tenth embodiment. It is the model which showed typically the content of the random number 10 table which ROM has. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a configuration of a 10 jackpot type selection table in the tenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special figure 1 big hit 10 table in the tenth embodiment. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 big hit 10 table in the tenth embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection ten table in the tenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a normal ten table in the tenth embodiment. It is a mimetic diagram, and (c) is a mimetic diagram showing typically contents of 10 tables for probability change and time saving in a 10th embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device according to the tenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the normal middle special figure 2 effect selection table which ROM of the sound lamp control apparatus in 10th Embodiment has. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the effect change selection table during the probability change which ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 10th Embodiment has. It is a transition diagram showing typically the flow of the game in a 10th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing 10 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 10th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows update processing 10 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 10th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows normal symbol change processing 10 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 10th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the through gate passage processing 10 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 10th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows jackpot control processing 10 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 10th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot operation setting process performed by the MPU in the main control device in the tenth embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows jackpot end processing 10 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 10th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows winning processing 10 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 10th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows abnormal processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 10th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process 10 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 10th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed winning a prize command processing 10 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 10th embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed general map related processing 10 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 10th embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed big hit related processing 10 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 10th embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed ending processing 10 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 10th embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed variable display setting processing 10 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 10th embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed special figure 1 production mode setting processing 10 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 10th embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed special figure 2 production mode setting processing 10 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 10th embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 11th Embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in the eleventh embodiment. (A) to (d) are schematic diagrams schematically showing a procedure for performing setting change in the eleventh embodiment, and (e) to (g) perform setting confirmation in the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a procedure for performing the above. It is a timing chart which showed transition of the production mode in the case where the setting change state was ended and the normal game was enabled in the eleventh embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the eleventh embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main control device in the eleventh embodiment. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a first random number 11 table in the eleventh embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small random number 11 table in the eleventh embodiment. FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the big hit type selection 11 table in 11th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the eleventh latent use table in the eleventh embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM clearing table in the eleventh embodiment. FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the fluctuation pattern scenario table in 11th Embodiment. It is a transition diagram showing typically the flow of the game in an 11th embodiment. It is the model which showed typically the structure of ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 11th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the setting suggestion effect selection table in 11th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing 11 performed by MPU in a main control unit in an 11th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special design change start processing 11 performed by MPU in the main control unit in an 11th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol big hit judgment processing 11 performed by the MPU in the main control unit in the eleventh embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special figure 1 deviation change processing 11 performed by MPU in a main control unit in an 11th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special design change pattern selection processing 11 performed by MPU in the main control unit in an 11th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows game state update processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in an eleventh embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special design change stop processing 11 performed by MPU in the main control unit in an 11th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special figure 1 departure stop processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in an eleventh embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special design change start processing 11 performed by the MPU in the main control unit in the eleventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol big hit determination processing 11 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 11th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special figure 2 deviation change processing 11 performed by MPU in a main control unit in an 11th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special design change pattern selection processing 11 performed by the MPU in the main control unit in the eleventh embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special design change stop processing 11 performed by MPU in the main control unit in an 11th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special figure 2 departure stop processing 11 performed by MPU in the main control unit in an 11th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows starting processing 11 performed by MPU in a main control unit in an 11th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows set value control processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in an eleventh embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows jackpot control processing 11 performed by MPU in a main control unit in an 11th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 11 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 11th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the status command receiving process 11 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display setting process 11 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows production mode setting processing 11 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in an eleventh embodiment. (A) In the twelfth embodiment, a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a continuous departure effect displayed on the third symbol display device when a lottery of a first special symbol is lost during a latent state. (B) is displayed on the third symbol display device in the twelfth embodiment when a continuous departure effect is executed and the departure cannot be continued until a chance zone is set. FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display mode. In the twelfth embodiment, it is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in a case where the lottery of the first special symbol is lost three consecutive times during the latent state. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a first random number 12 table in the twelfth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small random number 12 table in the twelfth embodiment. FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the big hit type selection 12 table in 12th Embodiment. It is the model which showed typically the content of 12 tables for latents in 12th Embodiment. It is the model which showed typically the structure of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 12th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 departure stop process 12 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 12th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows production mode setting processing 12 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a twelfth embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special figure 1 production setting processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 12th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an out-of-stage effect setting processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a twelfth embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 13th Embodiment. It is the elements on larger scale of the game board in 13th Embodiment, and is the schematic diagram which showed typically the internal structure of the lottery apparatus. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a case where a plurality of game balls enter the inside of the lottery device in a state where both the ball discharge door and the ball stopper are closed in the thirteenth embodiment. Yes, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a case where the ball discharge door is opened in a state where the game ball is parked inside the lottery device in the thirteenth embodiment. It is a top view of the distribution rotation body in a 13th embodiment. It is the timing chart which showed the time-dependent change of the state of each part at the time of the small win in 13th Embodiment. (A) is a timing chart showing an example of a temporal change in the arrangement (rotation position) of the distribution rotator immediately after the end of the chance zone in the thirteenth embodiment, and (b) is a timing zone in the thirteenth embodiment. It is a timing chart showing transition of the game after the end. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode of a charge time effect displayed on a third symbol display device when a lottery of a second special symbol is lost in a time-saving state in the thirteenth embodiment. (B) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in a case where a game ball enters the second entrance and the number of reserved balls increases in the thirteenth embodiment during the execution of the charge time effect. . (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the thirteenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main control device in the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number 13 table in the thirteenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small random number 13 table in the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 21C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second random number 13 table in the thirteenth embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the big hit type selection 13 table in the thirteenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the direct hit table in the thirteenth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram, (c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the table for V hitting in 13th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 13 tables for time saving in 13th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing 13 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 13th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change start processing 13 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 13th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the small hit start processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 13th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows normal symbol change processing 13 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 13th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows main processing 13 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 13th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows big hit control processing 13 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 13th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows small hit control processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 13th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows V passage detection processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 13th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows variable display setting processing 13 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 13th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows production mode setting processing 13 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 13th embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 14th Embodiment. It is a front perspective view of the operation unit in a 14th embodiment. It is an exploded front perspective view of an operation unit in a 14th embodiment. It is a front view of the operation unit in the state where an upright part moved to a projection position in a 14th embodiment. It is a front view of the operation unit in the state where the tilting role object moved to the overhang position in the fourteenth embodiment. (A), (b) is a figure which showed an example of the display aspect of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 during execution of a winning rate suggestion effect in 14th Embodiment. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode when a winning rate at which the setting 6 is determined in the winning rate suggestion effect in the fourteenth embodiment is notified, and (b) is a diagram in the fourteenth embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode when the setting suggestion effect corresponding to the fluctuation | variation type of a high setting confirmation super reach is performed. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the fourteenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main control device in the fourteenth embodiment. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a first random number 14 table in the fourteenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the big hit type selection 14 table in the fourteenth embodiment. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special hit table in the fourteenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special hit table in the fourteenth embodiment. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection 14 table in the fourteenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the left-handed state table in the fourteenth embodiment. FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the distribution of the winning random number in 14th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the table for the right-handed state in 14th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the time saving provision table in 14th Embodiment. It is a transition diagram showing typically the flow of the game in a 14th embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the fourteenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the RAM configuration of the audio ramp control device in the fourteenth embodiment. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a configuration of a winning rate suggestion effect lottery table in the fourteenth embodiment, and (b) is a special symbol low probability state and a probable change state in the fourteenth embodiment. It is the figure which showed the correspondence of the jackpot probability and the winning rate within 100 games for every set value. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the effect type selection table in 14th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a power return operation table in the fourteenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the accessory operation setting table in the fourteenth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing 14 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 14th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change start processing 14 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 14th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows set value control processing 14 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 14th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows main processing 14 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 14th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows big hit control processing 14 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 14th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows big hit end processing 14 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 14th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows starting processing 14 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 14th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows origin return processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 14th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows main processing 14 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 14th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the accessory control process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 14th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows initial operation processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 14th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows command judgment processing 14 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 14th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows status command receiving processing 14 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 14th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal state setting process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourteenth embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows big hit related processing 14 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 14th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows variable display setting processing 14 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 14th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows production mode setting processing 14 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 14th embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the pachinko machine in a 15th embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a first random number 15 table in the fifteenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a random number range setting table in the fifteenth embodiment. FIG. It is a flow chart which shows start winning processing 15 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 15th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows set value control processing 15 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 15th embodiment. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode of a 3rd symbol display device when a reach symbol selection effect is performed in a modification of a 14th embodiment, and (b) is a 14th embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the 3rd symbol display device in case the reach symbol prefetch effect was performed in the modification of FIG. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 16th embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 16th Embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in 16th Embodiment. (A) is a figure which showed typically the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen in a 16th embodiment, and (b) is a figure which illustrated the actual display screen in a 16th embodiment. is there. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the pachinko machine in a 16th embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the main control device in a 16th embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of the various counter in the 16th embodiment, the holding ball storage area, and the holding ball execution area. (A) is a figure which showed typically an example of the big hit random number table in 16th Embodiment, (b) is a figure which showed typically an example of big hit type table in 16th Embodiment, (C) is a figure which showed typically an example of the fluctuation | variation pattern table for big hits when the number of reserved balls in the 16th embodiment is 2, and (d) is 2 which is 2 in the 16th embodiment. It is a figure which showed typically an example of the variation | change_pattern (normal) fluctuation | variation pattern table for the case of (1), (e) of the variation | variation table for deviation (probability) when the number of holding | maintenance balls is 2 in 16th Embodiment It is the figure which showed an example typically. It is a figure showing typically an example of a prize ball number table in a 16th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the timer interruption processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 16th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows switch reading processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 16th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows starting winning processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 16th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows fluctuation processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 16th embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed change starting processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 16th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 16th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows starting processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 16th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows main processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 16th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the accessory ratio management main process performed by the accessory ratio management chip in the main control device in a 16th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows a part of setting information reception processing performed by the accessory ratio management chip in the main control device in the sixteenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows a part of setting information reception processing performed by the accessory ratio management chip in the main control device in the sixteenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the accessory ratio calculation process performed by the accessory ratio management chip in the main control device in the sixteenth embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an inspection result output processing performed by an accessory ratio management chip in a main control unit in a 16th embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed starting processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 16th embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed main processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 16th embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed a command judging processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 16th embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed change display processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 16th embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the sixteenth embodiment, and (b) shows a command interruption process executed by the MPU in the display control device. FIG. 33C is a flowchart illustrating a V interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the sixteenth embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the main control device in a 17th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prize information saving process performed by the accessory ratio management chip in the main control device in the seventeenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the test | inspection result output process performed by the accessory ratio management chip in the main control apparatus in 17th Embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the pachinko machine in an 18th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the timer interruption processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in an 18th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a winning combination process performed by MPU in a main control unit in an 18th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a winning combination main process performed by MPU in a main control unit in an 18th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a winning combination process performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 19th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a winning combination main process performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 19th embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the pachinko machine in a 20th embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the base display device in the twentieth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents of the base display device in the twentieth embodiment. . (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing information necessary for displaying a base value, which is stored in an external work area of a RAM in an MPU of a main control device according to the twentieth embodiment, and () Is a schematic diagram schematically showing a configuration of each base value data in the twentieth embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows starting processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 20th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows base value processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 20th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a base value calculation processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 20th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a part of base value display processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 20th embodiment. FIG. 39 is a flowchart illustrating the remaining part of the base value display process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the twentieth embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in a 21st embodiment. (A) is a front view of the setting key in the twenty-first embodiment when the setting key is in an off state, and (b) is a case where the setting key in the twenty-first embodiment is in an on state. It is a front view of a setting key. The start-up mode of the pachinko machine in the twenty-first embodiment, and the respective states of the RAM erase switch, the setting key, and the door open switch when the power of the pachinko machine is turned on for the start-up mode for each start-up mode FIG. (A) is a diagram showing the role of the RAM erase switch and the setting key in the setting change mode in the twenty-first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the role of the setting key in the setting confirmation mode in the twenty-first embodiment. FIG. It is the model which showed typically the various examples of the display content of the base display device of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode in 21st Embodiment. FIG. 41 is a schematic diagram schematically showing various examples of display contents when displaying an error history on a base display device in the twenty-first embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the arrangement of the LEDs of the first symbol display device in the twenty-first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the maximum number of rounds in the round number notification LED of the twenty-first embodiment. 2, a lighting pattern for notifying that the maximum number of rounds is 15, a lighting pattern for notifying that the setting is being changed, and a setting confirmation display FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a lighting pattern when notifying that the lighting is performed. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the pachinko machine in a 21st embodiment. FIG. 41 is a schematic diagram schematically showing data stored in an external work area of a RAM in an MPU of a main control device according to a twenty-first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows starting processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 21st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows setting change processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 21st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows setting check processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 21st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows base display processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 21st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the timer interruption processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 21st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows setting change processing performed by MPU in a main control unit of a pachinko machine in a 22nd embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the pachinko machine in a 23rd embodiment. FIG. 41 is a schematic diagram schematically showing data stored in an internal work area of a RAM in an MPU of a main control device according to a twenty-third embodiment. FIG. 51 is a diagram for describing a start-up mode set in response to each start-up operation when the power is turned on after the power is turned off during the setting change or the setting confirmation in the twenty-third embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows starting processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 23rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows setting change processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 23rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the setting check processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 23rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the timer interruption processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 23rd embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in a 24th embodiment. (A) is a left front perspective view of the protection cover in the twenty-fourth embodiment as viewed from the left front, and (b) is a right rear perspective view of the protection cover in the twenty-fourth embodiment as viewed from the right rear. It is a right side view of the pachinko machine in a 24th embodiment. It is a left front perspective view for explaining the attachment method of the protective cover member to the outer frame in the 24th embodiment. It is a front view of an outer frame in a 24th embodiment, and a protection cover member attached to the outer frame. It is a front view of the board box of the main control unit in a 24th embodiment. It is sectional drawing of the pachinko machine in the AA line of FIG. 335. FIG. 445 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the main control device and the protective cover member in a region B in FIG. 441. It is a left front perspective view showing an inner frame and a front frame expanded to an outer frame to which a protective cover member according to a twenty-fourth embodiment is attached. The start mode of the pachinko machine in the twenty-fifth embodiment and information on each of the RAM erase switch and the setting key when the power of the pachinko machine is turned on for starting in the start mode for each start mode are shown. FIG. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the pachinko machine in a 25th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows starting processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 25th embodiment. The following describes the start-up modes of the pachinko machine in the twenty-sixth embodiment, and information on each of the RAM erase switch and the setting key when the power of the pachinko machine is turned on for each start-up mode. FIG. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the pachinko machine in a 26th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows starting processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 26th embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in the 27th embodiment. It is a right side view of the pachinko machine in a 27th embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine of the twenty-eighth embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the pachinko machine of a 28th embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of the various counter of each of 28th Embodiment, each reserved ball storage area, and each reserved ball execution area. (A) is a figure showing typically an example of the big hit random number table of special figure 1 of a 28th embodiment, and (b) is a figure showing an example of big hit random number table of special figure 2 of a 28th embodiment. FIG. (A) is a figure showing typically an example of the big hit type table of special figure 1 of a 28th embodiment, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a big hit type table of special figure 2 of a 28th embodiment. FIG. FIG. 41 is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a hold number table according to a twenty-eighth embodiment. (A) is a figure showing typically an example of A table of a stop pattern table of a 28th embodiment, and (b) is a figure showing typically an example of B table of a stop pattern table of a 28th embodiment. FIG. 47C is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the C table of the stop pattern table according to the twenty-eighth embodiment. (A) is a figure showing typically an example of D table of a stop pattern table of a 28th embodiment, and (b) is a figure showing typically an example of E table of a stop pattern table of a 28th embodiment. FIG. (A) is a figure which typically showed an example of the fluctuation pattern table for loss of special figure 1 of the 28th embodiment, and (b) is for big hits and small hits of the special figure 1 of the 28th embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a fluctuation pattern table. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the loss variation pattern table of the special figure 2 in the “normal game state” of the twenty-eighth embodiment, and (b) is a “normal game state” of the twenty-eighth embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the fluctuation | variation pattern table for big hits / small hits of the special figure 2 in a "state." (A) is a figure which typically showed an example of the loss fluctuation pattern table of the special figure 2 in the "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state" of the 28th embodiment, and (b) is the 28th embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the variation pattern table for big hits / small hits of special figure 2 in "probability change state" or "time reduction state" in embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a random number table per ordinary figure according to the twenty-eighth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a general figure change table according to the twenty-eighth embodiment. (C) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the electrical activity opening table of the twenty-eighth embodiment. (A) is a figure showing typically an example of a big hit opening table of a 28th embodiment, and (b) is a figure showing typically an example of a small hit opening table of a 28th embodiment. . It is a flow chart which shows setting change processing performed by MPU in a main control unit of a 28th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the timer interruption processing performed by MPU in the main control unit of a 28th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows external output processing performed by MPU in a main control unit of a 28th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows starting winning processing performed by MPU in a main control unit of a 28th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the gate passage processing performed by MPU in the main control unit of a 28th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special figure change processing performed by MPU in a main control unit of a 28th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special figure 1 change start processing performed by MPU in the main control unit of a 28th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special figure 2 change processing performed by MPU in the main control unit of a 28th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special figure 2 change start processing performed by MPU in the main control unit of a 28th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special figure 1 change processing performed by MPU in a main control unit of a 28th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows fluctuation stop processing performed by MPU in a main control unit of a 28th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the general-purpose variation process performed by the MPU in the main control device of the twenty-eighth embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a hit processing performed by MPU in a main control unit of a 28th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special winning opening opening / closing control processing performed by the MPU in the main control device of the twenty-eighth embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the processing during opening of a special winning opening performed by the MPU in the main control device of the twenty-eighth embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows big hit end processing performed by MPU in a main control unit of a 28th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small winning opening opening / closing control processing performed by the MPU in the main control device of the twenty-eighth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal electric-power combination control process performed by the MPU in the main control device of the 28th embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine of the 29th embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the pachinko machine of a 29th embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of various counters, each reserved ball storage area, and each reserved ball execution area of the 29th embodiment. (A) is a figure showing typically an example of the big hit random number table of special figure 1 of a 29th embodiment, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a big hit random number table of special figure 2 of a 29th embodiment. FIG. (A) is a figure showing typically an example of the big hit type table of special figure 1 of a 29th embodiment, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a big hit type table of special figure 2 of a 29th embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically, (c) is the figure which showed typically an example of the small hitting type table of the special figure 2 of 29th Embodiment. It is a figure showing typically an example of the held number table of a 29th embodiment. (A) is a figure showing typically an example of A table of a stop pattern table of a 29th embodiment, and (b) is a figure showing typically an example of B table of a stop pattern table of a 29th embodiment. FIG. (A) is a figure showing typically an example of D table of a stop pattern table of a 29th embodiment, and (b) is a figure showing typically an example of E table of a stop pattern table of a 29th embodiment. FIG. (A) is a figure which showed typically an example of the variation pattern table for loss of the special figure 1 of a 29th embodiment, (b) is a fluctuation pattern table for big hits of the special figure 1 of a 29th embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the above. (A) is a figure which showed typically an example of the fluctuation | variation table for a loss of the special figure 2 of the 29th embodiment, and (b) is for big hits and small hits of the special figure 2 of a 29th embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a fluctuation pattern table. (A) is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a per-figure random number table of the twenty-ninth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a perpetual figure variation table of the twenty-ninth embodiment. (C) is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the electrical activity opening table according to the twenty-ninth embodiment. (A) is a figure showing typically an example of a big hit opening table of a 29th embodiment, and (b) is a figure showing typically an example of a small hit opening table of a 29th embodiment. . It is a flow chart which shows starting winning processing performed by MPU in a main control unit of a 29th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special figure change processing performed by MPU in a main control unit of a 29th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special figure 2 change start processing performed by MPU in a main control unit of a 29th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special figure 1 change start processing performed by MPU in a main control unit of a 29th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows time saving subtraction processing performed by MPU in a main control unit of a 29th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a hit processing performed by MPU in a main control unit of a 29th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows big hit end processing performed by MPU in a main control unit of a 29th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small winning opening opening / closing control processing performed by the MPU in the main control device of the 29th embodiment. (A) is a figure showing typically an example of the jackpot random number table of special figure 1 of a 30th embodiment, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a big hit random number table of special figure 2 of a 30th embodiment. FIG. (A) is a figure showing typically an example of the big hit random number table of special figure 1 of a 31st embodiment, and (b) is a figure showing an example of big hit random number table of special figure 2 of a 31st embodiment. FIG. (A) is a figure showing typically an example of the big hit random number table of special figure 1 of a 32nd embodiment, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a big hit random number table of special figure 2 of a 32nd embodiment. FIG. It is a perspective view showing the pachinko machine in a 33rd embodiment. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view showing a main configuration of the pachinko machine. It is a front view showing the composition of a game board. It is an explanatory view for explaining a configuration related to discharge of a game ball flowing down a game area. It is a front view of a main control device. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of various counters used for a success / failure lottery. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various tables stored in a main ROM. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by a main CPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a setting value update process executed by a main CPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process executed by a main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric power control processing performed by a main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure fluctuation | variation start process performed by a main side CPU. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram for describing a configuration in which a detection result of a ball-input detection sensor is input to a main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the incoming ball detection process performed by the main side CPU. It is a block diagram for explaining an electrical configuration of a payout control device and various devices that communicate with the payout control device. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by a payout side CPU. FIG. 3 is a block diagram for describing an electrical configuration of a management IC. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for describing a configuration of an input port of a management-side I / F. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for describing a configuration of a correspondence memory. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for describing a configuration of a history memory. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a recognition process executed by a main CPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a management process executed by the management CPU. (A)-(d) is a time chart showing a state in which information on the correspondence between the first to fifteenth buffers and the types of signals is stored in the correspondence memory. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a management output process executed by a main CPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a history setting process executed by the management CPU. (A)-(e) is a time chart which shows a state that history information is stored in a history memory. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a process of outputting a set value update signal executed by a main CPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a setting update recognition process executed by a management CPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a display output process executed by the management CPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a display process executed by the management CPU. (A) is a flowchart showing a data output process executed by the main CPU, and (b) is a flowchart showing an external output process executed by the management CPU. FIG. 59 is an explanatory diagram for describing various tables stored in the main ROM according to the 34th embodiment. FIG. 41 is an explanatory diagram for describing a configuration of a separate storage memory according to a thirty-fifth embodiment. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a setting update recognition process executed by a management CPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a repetitive change monitoring process executed by a management CPU. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing a repetitive change monitoring process executed by the main CPU according to the 36th embodiment. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing a setting update recognition process executed by the management CPU according to the 37th embodiment. FIG. 51 is an explanatory view illustrating the configuration of a history memory according to a thirty-eighth embodiment. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a history setting process executed by the management CPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a setting update recognition process executed by a management CPU. FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram for describing a configuration of a history memory according to a thirty-ninth embodiment. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a setting update recognition process executed by a management CPU. FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the configuration of a history memory according to a fortieth embodiment. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a setting update recognition process executed by a management CPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a history setting process executed by the management CPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a display output process executed by the management CPU. FIG. 41 is an explanatory diagram for describing a configuration of an input port of the management-side I / F in the forty-first embodiment. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a recognition process executed by a main CPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a management process executed by the management CPU. (A)-(h) is a time chart showing how the information on the correspondence between the first to twelfth buffers and the types of signals is stored in the correspondence memory. It is a block diagram for explaining the composition of the signal path which transmits the detection result of each ball entry detection sensor to the main CPU and the management IC in the 42nd embodiment. It is a front view of the main control unit in a 43rd embodiment. FIG. 5 is a block diagram for explaining an electrical configuration for performing various displays on first to fourth notification display devices based on control of an MPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a display process executed by the management CPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a setting value update process executed by a main CPU. (A) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display mode of the 1st-4th notification display apparatus when the management result of a game history is displayed, (b) is a setting state of a pachinko machine changing. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a display mode of the first to fourth notification display devices when the display is performed. (A)-(h) is a time chart which shows a mode that the 1st-4th information display devices are in a display state. (A) is an explanatory view for explaining the configuration of the first notification display device in the forty-fourth embodiment, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the second notification display device. . A first notification display device for displaying the management result of the game history on the first to fourth notification display devices and displaying a changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine can be changed. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining display contents of a second notification display device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a setting value update process executed by a main CPU. It is an explanatory view for explaining the composition of the abnormal display area in a 45th embodiment. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an abnormality setting process executed by the main CPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an abnormality display process executed by the main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the output process for management performed by the main side CPU in 46th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by the main CPU in another form. FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram for describing a setting mode of a program and data of the main ROM in the 47th embodiment. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a setting mode of each area in a main RAM. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process executed by a main CPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating management processing executed by a main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the management execution process performed by the main CPU. It is an explanatory view for explaining various areas of a work area for non-specific control used for managing a game history. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a check process executed by a main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the normal ball entry management process performed by the main CPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a result calculation process executed by a main CPU. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a display process executed by a main CPU. It is a flow chart which shows the processing for management performed by the main side CPU in a 48th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows management execution processing performed by the main side CPU in a 49th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the management execution process performed by the main CPU in 50th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows management execution processing performed by main side CPU in a 51st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the processing for management performed by the main side CPU in a 52nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the management execution process performed by the main CPU. FIG. 59 is an explanatory diagram for describing an electrical configuration according to a 53rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by the main side CPU in a 54th embodiment. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a setting value update process executed by a main CPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process executed by a main CPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a setting confirmation process executed by a main CPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a RAM monitoring process executed by a main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by the main CPU in another form. It is a flowchart which shows the setting value update process performed by the main side CPU in another form. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by the main side CPU in a 55th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the RAM monitoring processing performed by the main CPU in the 56th embodiment. 55 is a flowchart illustrating RAM monitoring processing executed by a main CPU according to a fifty-seventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the management execution process performed by the main CPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating another monitoring process executed by the main CPU. It is a flow chart which shows the processing for management performed by the main side CPU in a 58th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the processing for management performed by the main side CPU in a 59th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the processing for management performed by the main side CPU in a 60th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the processing for management performed by the main side CPU in a 61st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by the main side CPU in a 62nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the power failure information storage processing performed by the main CPU. (A) is a block diagram for explaining a configuration of an MPU, and (b) is a time chart showing a state of output of a reset signal by a reset signal output unit. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process executed by a main CPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a setting monitoring process executed by a main CPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating management processing executed by a main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the management execution process performed by the main CPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating another monitoring process executed by the main CPU. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by the main side CPU in a 63rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the clear process at the time of abnormality performed by a main side CPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a clear process for non-specific control executed by a main CPU. It is a flow chart which shows power failure information storage processing performed by the main side CPU in a 64th embodiment. 9 is a flowchart showing a checksum monitoring process executed by the main CPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a clear process for non-specific control executed by a main CPU. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by the main side CPU in a 65th embodiment. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a setting confirmation process executed by a main CPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a setting value update process executed by a main CPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a first timer interrupt process executed by a main CPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a setting monitoring process executed by a main CPU. FIG. 3 is a block diagram for describing a configuration for controlling display of various display circuits by a main CPU. (A) is an explanatory view for explaining various buffers provided in a work area for specific control, and (b) is a diagram for explaining various storage areas provided in a work area for non-specific control. FIG. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for describing an electrical configuration of a display IC. (A) to (g) show that the type data and the display data are transmitted from the main CPU to the display IC, and the display data transmitted from the display IC is received by the first display circuit or the second display circuit. FIG. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a second timer interrupt process executed by the main CPU. (A) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of the 1st-4th notification display apparatus in the situation in which a setting value is updated, (b) is 1st in the situation in which a setting value is confirmed. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of the 4th alerting display device. It is a flow chart which shows the setting value update processing performed by the main side CPU in a 66th embodiment. FIG. 59 is an explanatory diagram for describing an electrical configuration of a calculation result storage area in the 67th embodiment. (A)-(d) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of the display apparatus for 1st-4th information. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of the 1st-4th notification display apparatuses. (A)-(e) is a time chart which shows a mode that the base value of various areas is notified by the 1st-4th information display. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a result calculation process executed by a main CPU. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a display process executed by a main CPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by a main CPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a first timer interrupt process executed by a main CPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a second timer interrupt process executed by the main CPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a normal setting process executed by a main CPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a setting confirmation process executed by a main CPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a setting value update process executed by a main CPU. 7A to 7F are time charts for explaining display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices when supply of operating power to the main CPU is started. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by the main side CPU in a 68th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by the main side CPU in a 69th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process at the time of the normal time performed by the main CPU in 70th Embodiment. (A)-(d) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the setting correspondence storage area provided in the main ROM in 71st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the reading process of the success / failure table performed by the main CPU. 15 is a flowchart illustrating a setting process for a fifth display data buffer during a setting update performed by the main CPU. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the setting correspondence storage area provided in the main ROM in 72nd Embodiment. (A) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the various display parts provided in the area | region which becomes visible from the pachinko machine front through the window panel in 73rd Embodiment, (b) is the display content of a round display part. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the method. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by the main side CPU in a 74th embodiment. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a first timer interrupt process executed by a main CPU. It is a flow chart which shows the result operation processing performed by the main side CPU in a 75th embodiment. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a display process executed by a main CPU. (A)-(g) is a time chart which shows a mode that the base value of various areas is alert | reported by the 1st-4th alerting | reporting display devices. (A)-(g) is a time chart which shows a mode that the base value of various areas is alert | reported by the 1st-4th alerting | reporting display apparatuses in 76th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by the main side CPU in a 77th embodiment. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram for describing the contents of a storage area related to set values provided in a work area for specific control. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a setting confirmation process executed by a main CPU. 15 is a flowchart illustrating a setting process for a fifth display data buffer during a setting check performed by a main CPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a setting value update process executed by a main CPU. 15 is a flowchart illustrating a setting process for a fifth display data buffer during a setting update performed by the main CPU. Description for explaining the contents of the processing executed in the main processing when the power supply interruption processing is executed in the situation where the setting value update processing or the setting confirmation processing is being executed and the supply of the operating power is resumed thereafter FIG. (A)-(e) is a time chart which shows the end timing of the setting value update processing and the setting confirmation processing in relation to the operation state of the setting key insertion unit. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by the main side CPU in an 78th embodiment. Description for explaining the contents of the processing executed in the main processing when the power supply interruption processing is executed in the situation where the setting value update processing or the setting confirmation processing is being executed and the supply of the operating power is resumed thereafter FIG. When the power failure process is performed in the situation where the setting value update process or the setting confirmation process is being performed in the seventy-ninth embodiment, the content of the process performed in the main process when the supply of the operating power is resumed thereafter It is an explanatory view for explaining. If the power failure process is performed in the situation where the setting value update process or the setting confirmation process is being performed in the 80th embodiment, the content of the process performed in the main process when the supply of the operating power is resumed thereafter It is an explanatory view for explaining. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by the main side CPU in an 81st embodiment. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a setting confirmation process executed by a main CPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a setting value update process executed by a main CPU. (A)-(h) is a time chart showing a state in which interrupts of the first timer interrupt process and the second timer interrupt process are permitted in a state where the process at the start of supply of the operating power is being executed. (A)-(g) is a time chart which shows the progress of a process when abnormality regarding a power failure flag, a checksum, or a set value occurs. (A)-(g) is a time chart which shows the display content of the 1st-4th alerting | reporting display devices when supply of the operation electric power to a main side CPU is started. Description for explaining the contents of the processing executed in the main processing when the power supply interruption processing is executed in the situation where the setting value update processing or the setting confirmation processing is being executed and the supply of the operating power is resumed thereafter FIG. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for describing an electrical configuration of a sound emission control device. It is a flowchart which shows the production control process performed by the sound light side CPU. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an operation corresponding to the content of a process executed in a process at the start of supply of operating power in the main CPU. It is a flow chart which shows production control processing performed by the sound light side CPU in an 82nd embodiment. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an operation corresponding to the content of a process executed in a process at the start of supply of operating power in the main CPU. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by the main side CPU in an 83rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by the main side CPU in an 84th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by the main side CPU in an 85th embodiment. (A)-(g) is a time chart showing a state of a subsequent process when supply of operating power to the main CPU is stopped in a situation where the set value updating process is being executed. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a setting value update process executed by a main CPU. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram for describing contents of a storage area provided in a work area for specific control. (A)-(f) is a time chart which shows a mode in which the set value to be updated is updated. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by the main side CPU in an 86th embodiment. 85 is a flowchart illustrating main processing executed by a main CPU according to the 87th embodiment. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a clear target area and a non-clear target area provided in a work area for specific control. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a display start process executed by a main CPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a second timer interrupt process executed by the main CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of the special figure display part corresponding to the situation at the time of the start of supply of operation electric power, and a general figure display part. It is an explanatory view for explaining each area provided in the clear target area of the work area for specific control in the 88th embodiment. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a display start process executed by a main CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of the special figure display part corresponding to the situation at the time of the start of supply of operation electric power, and a general figure display part. It is a flow chart which shows the display start processing performed by the main CPU in an 89th embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of the special figure display part corresponding to the situation at the time of the start of supply of operation electric power, and a general figure display part. It is an explanatory view for explaining each area provided in a clear target area and a non-clear target area of the work area for specific control in the 90th embodiment. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a first timer interrupt process executed by a main CPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a display start process executed by a main CPU. (A) is an explanatory view for explaining an off-display lottery table for a special figure, and (b) is an explanatory view for explaining an off-display lottery table for a general figure. It is a flow chart which shows display start processing performed by the main side CPU in a 91st embodiment. (A) is an explanatory view for explaining an initial display lottery table for a special figure, and (b) is an explanatory view for explaining an initial display lottery table for a general figure. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of the special figure display part corresponding to the situation at the time of the start of supply of operation electric power, and a general figure display part. It is a flow chart which shows the display start processing performed by the main side CPU in a 92nd embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of the special figure display part corresponding to the situation at the time of the start of supply of operation electric power, and a general figure display part. It is a flow chart which shows the display start processing performed by the main side CPU in a 93rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the setting value update processing performed by the main side CPU in a 94th embodiment. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a display start process executed by a main CPU. (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a first display distribution table for a special figure, (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a second display distribution table for a special figure, (C) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a first display distribution table for ordinary drawing, and (d) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a second display distribution table for ordinary drawing. It is a flow chart which shows the display start processing performed by the main side CPU in a 95th embodiment. It is a front view of the game board in a 96th embodiment. (A) is a longitudinal section of a 2nd operation part in a non-guidance state, and (b) is a longitudinal section of the 2nd operation part in a guidance state. (A), (b) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of a symbol display device when a game round is performed. (A)-(j) is an explanatory view for explaining a main symbol and a sub symbol which are variably displayed in each symbol column. It is a longitudinal section for explaining an internal configuration of a distribution winning device. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the electrical structure for performing various lotteries in a main CPU. (A) is an explanatory view for explaining a win / fail table of a first special figure, and (b) is an explanatory view for explaining a win / fail table of a second special figure. (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a type table for a big hit, (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the content of each of a plurality of types of big hit results, and (c) is a small diagram. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a winning type table, (d) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of each of several types of small hit results. It is a flowchart which shows the general-purpose power control process performed by the main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric power control processing performed by a main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure fluctuation | variation start process performed by a main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure finalizing process performed by a main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the distribution process performed by the main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special power ending process performed by the main CPU. It is an explanatory view for explaining each area provided in a clear target area of a work area for specific control. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a second timer interrupt process executed by the main CPU. (A) is a flowchart showing a setting process to the first display data buffer during setting update executed by the main CPU, and (b) is a flowchart showing a setting process executed by the main CPU during setting confirmation. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a setting process for a display data buffer. (A)-(g) is a time chart which shows a mode that the display contents of a 1st special figure display part, a 2nd special figure display part, and a special display part change according to the state of a pachinko machine. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd timer interruption processing performed by the main side CPU in a 97th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd timer interruption processing performed by the main side CPU in a 98th embodiment. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a setting value update process executed by a main CPU. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd timer interruption processing performed by the main side CPU in a 99th embodiment. (A) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the special display part in 100th Embodiment, (b) is 15R display part in the situation in which the setting value update process or the process for setting confirmation is performed, It is a time chart which shows the display content of a 6R display part and a small hit display part. It is a front view of the game board in a 101st embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the electrical structure for performing various lotteries in a main CPU. (A) is an explanatory view for explaining a first success / failure table at the time of low probability, (b) is an explanatory view for explaining the first success / failure table at the time of high probability, and (c) is an explanatory view. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a second hit / failure table at the time of a low probability, and FIG. 8D is an explanatory diagram for explaining a second hit / failure table at the time of a high probability. (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a type table, (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the content of each of a plurality of types of big hit results and one type of small hit results, (C) is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of the support mode. It is an explanatory view for explaining a setting mode of a display continuation period of game times. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special figure special electric power control processing performed by a main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special figure special electric power control processing performed by a main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure fluctuation | variation start process performed by a main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure finalizing process performed by a main side CPU. (A) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the 1st success / failure table at the time of low probability in the 102nd embodiment, (b) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the 1st success / failure table at the time of high probability. , (C) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a second probability table at the time of low probability, and (d) is an explanatory diagram for describing the second success / failure table at the time of high probability. (A) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the 1st success / failure table at the time of low probability in 103rd Embodiment, (b) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the 1st success / failure table at the time of high probability. , (C) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second hit / failure table at the time of low probability, and (d) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second hit / failure table at the time of high probability. It is a front view of the game board in a 104th embodiment. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for describing an electrical configuration of a main control device and a sound emission control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by a main CPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a setting confirmation process executed by a main CPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a setting value update process executed by a main CPU. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a setting mode of each area in a main RAM. (A) is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of the address counter, and (b) to (e) explain how the carry flag is set to "1" as a result of updating the target address. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the RAM clear process performed by the main CPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a process of adding target addresses executed by a main CPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a clear process for non-specific control executed by a main CPU. 9 is a flowchart showing a checksum calculation process executed by a main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the production control process performed by the sound light side CPU. (A) to (f) show that when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU and the sound light CPU is started, the display for checking is executed on the first to fourth notification display devices and the movable body is displayed. 5 is a time chart showing a state in which an initial operation is executed in FIG. It is a flow chart which shows production control processing performed by sound light side CPU in a 105th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by the main side CPU in a 106th embodiment. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a setting confirmation process executed by a main CPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a setting value update process executed by a main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the RAM clear process performed by the main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the opening / closing monitoring processing performed by the main CPU. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for describing an electrical configuration of a sound emission control device. It is an explanatory view for explaining contents of a notice table after confirmation. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a relationship between various notification tables and types of execution areas to be read. (A)-(h) is a time chart which shows the relationship between the notification after confirmation and the body closing notification, and the relationship between the notification after clearing and the body closing notification. It is a flowchart which shows the production control process performed by the sound light side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the task process performed by a sound light side CPU.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. 1 to 87. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIGS. FIGS. 6 to 9 are schematic diagrams showing the structure of a general winning award device 640 provided in a lower region, and FIGS. 6 to 9 show a special variable winning device provided in an upper left region of the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 when viewed from the front. FIG. 10 is a schematic view schematically showing a structure of the pachinko machine 65, and FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having ball entrances 63, 64, 640 and the like into which a large number of nails and balls can enter is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. When a ball (game ball) flows down in front of the game board 13, a ball game is performed. In the inner frame 12, a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 21) for firing a ball to the front area (game area) of the game board 13 and a ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a are provided in the front area of the game board 13. A firing rail (not shown) or the like that guides the user is provided. The contents of the many entrances provided in the game board 13 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower plate unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is provided with a decorative resin component, an electric component, and the like, and is provided with a window 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 is visible on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing a ball is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes toward the front side and has an open upper surface, and prize balls, loaned balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 21) by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect of the super reach. You.

  Light emitting means such as various lamps is provided around the front frame 14 (for example, at a corner). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or at a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. On the periphery of the window 14c, there are provided illuminations 29 to 33 in which light-emitting means such as LEDs are incorporated. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and at the time of a big hit or a reach effect, etc., each of the illumination parts 29 to 33 is lit by turning on or blinking a built-in LED. Or, it flashes to notify that a jackpot is in progress or that the player is reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and which can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error has occurred.

  Further, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized below the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball lending operation unit 40 is provided below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, and the like are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is slid according to the operation. Lending is done. More specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED is turned on, and the balance is displayed as a number as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a remaining amount. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, a so-called cash machine, the ball-lending operation unit 40 becomes unnecessary. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part to make the parts configuration common. The pachinko machine using the card unit and the cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be completely stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape having an open upper surface at the center thereof. I have. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is provided.

  Inside the operating handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing of the ball during a pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51 A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electric resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired at an intensity (firing intensity) corresponding to, and the ball is hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

  At the lower front part of the lower plate 50, a ball release lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball pulling lever 52 is constantly urged rightward, and is slid leftward against the urging, so that a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a “thousand boxes”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is mounted on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a number of ball guide nails (not shown), a windmill, rails 61 and 62, and a general insert. The ball entrance 63, the special figure entrance 64, 640, the variable winning device 65, the V winning device 650, the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, the variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled. It is attached to the back side of the frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that a player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the rear surface side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general ball entrance 63, the special figure entrance 64, the general winning device 640, the V winning device 65, the variable winning device 650, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. And is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with a tapping screw or the like.

  The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is erected on the front of the game board 13, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is provided inside the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front of the game board 13, and the front and rear of the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back of the game board 13. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails, which is the front of the game board 13 (a winning opening or the like is provided and fired). The area where the falling ball flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 9) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to a tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent a situation in which a ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired at a predetermined momentum strikes the return rubber 69 and momentum. Is rebounded toward the center while being attenuated.

  The first symbol display device 37 is provided on the upper left side of the return rubber 69. The first symbol display device 37 is disposed so as to be covered by the back surface (the surface opposite to the surface forming the game area) of the game board 13 formed of a transparent resin (for example, ABS). The configuration is such that the shot ball does not collide with the first symbol display device 37.

  The first symbol display device 37 includes a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a seven-segment display. The first symbol display device 37 performs a display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 21), and mainly displays a game state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display device 37 is configured to operate when the ball enters the special figure entrance 64 (wins). That is, the first symbol display device 37 is a display unit for displaying a lottery result of a lottery (special figure lottery) executed when a ball enters the special figure entrance 64. In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 has one special symbol type, so that the first symbol display device 37 displays one type of special figure lottery result. In the case of the pachinko machine 10 having two types of (the first special symbol and the second special symbol), the first symbol display device 37 may be provided with a display area corresponding to the type of each special symbol.

  In addition, the first symbol display device 37 uses an LED to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a game state (for example, a normal state, a time saving state, or the like) by a lighting state, or the special symbol (first symbol) fluctuates. (In dynamic display for stopping and displaying a combination of symbols for indicating a lottery result) is indicated by a lighting state, or the stopped symbol is a symbol corresponding to a jackpot which is advantageous to the player or a disadvantaged symbol. A lighted state indicates whether the symbol corresponds to a big hit or a missed symbol, the number of reserved balls is indicated by a lighted state, and the number of rounds during a big hit and an error are displayed on a seven-segment display device. In addition, it is configured to be able to indicate in a lighting state that the change of the special symbol is temporarily stopped (interrupted). The plurality of LEDs are configured such that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the LEDs are different, and various game states of the pachinko machine 10 can be indicated with a small number of LEDs by a combination of the emission colors. In the present embodiment, various game states are notified by a combination of light emission colors of the light-emitting means (seven-segment display device). However, any configuration may be used as long as the player can identify the various game states. For example, various game states may be notified by changing the length (blinking mode) of a period during which the light emitting unit is turned on and a period during which the light emitting unit is turned off.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery (lottery of special symbols) is performed in response to a ball entry (prize) in the special figure entrance 64. Then, in the lottery of the special symbol, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery). Here, based on the determination that the jackpot has been won, a jackpot game that is in a privilege gaming state advantageous to the player is executed.

  When the jackpot game is executed, the special winning opening 650a of the variable winning device 650 is in an open state in which a ball can be easily won, and a large number of winning balls are short-lived by causing the specific winning opening 650a to win a ball. Is executed. This jackpot game is executed (in a case) after the lottery result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (fixed display), and an opening period of a predetermined time (for example, one second) (specific winning port of the variable winning device 650). A period in which a closed state in which it is difficult for a ball to enter the ball 650a), a round game period in which an open state is set, and a predetermined period from the end of one round game period until the start of the next round game A period (for example, 0.5 seconds), an interval period in which the closed state is set, and an ending period in which the closed state is set for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) after the end of the last round game period. A big jackpot game period is set.

  In this way, after the lottery result of the special symbol indicating the jackpot winning is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), the opening period is set, so that the ball can be adjusted in accordance with the timing when the specific winning port 650a is opened during the jackpot game. Can be prepared for firing in any direction, so that the jackpot game can be smoothly performed. In addition, since the opening period can be used as a period for notifying the player of the game content of the current jackpot game, a game that is easy to understand can be provided.

  Also, by setting the ending period as the last period of the jackpot game, it is possible to suppress the execution of a new special symbol lottery immediately after the end of the last round game. Since it is possible to prepare for firing the ball in an arbitrary direction for the game to be executed, it is possible to smoothly switch the game.

  Note that the length of each jackpot game (opening period, round period, ending period) executed when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery is determined by the gaming state at the time of jackpot winning and the type of jackpot won. May be set in accordance with, for example, as a game content to be executed after the jackpot game, if the game content is different from the game content at the time of winning the jackpot, if the winning is set, The ending period of the jackpot game (for example, 10 seconds) is set to be longer than the ending period of another jackpot game (for example, 2 seconds), and the jackpot game is ended for the player during the ending period. It is preferable that an effect for guiding in advance game contents to be executed later is executable. This makes it possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

  On the other hand, when the game content at the time of the jackpot winning and the game content executed after the jackpot game end are won, the ending period of the jackpot (for example, 1 second) is changed to another jackpot game. It is preferable to set so as to be shorter than the ending period (for example, 2 seconds). This allows the player to play the game efficiently.

  Also, without using a configuration to actually determine the game content at the time of the jackpot winning and the game content executed after the jackpot game, for example, based on the type of the jackpot won and the game state at the time of the jackpot winning Then, the game state set after the end of the jackpot game may be defined in advance, and the ending period of each jackpot game may be set in advance in accordance with the specified contents.

  Although a specific description will be given later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game to be executed by a player when the game state is a normal state (a special symbol low probability state, a normal symbol low probability state) In the time reduction state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol), the game to be executed by the player is configured to be different from that in the time reduction state, compared to the game to be executed in the normal state. Is configured to be more advantageous to the player (the jackpot game is more easily executed).

  In other words, the jackpot game is won in the state where the normal state is set, and the time-saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game executed based on the jackpot winning. The content of the jackpot game (operation scenario) is defined so as to be longer than the ending period of the jackpot game in which the time-saving state is set again after the jackpot game executed based on the jackpot winning in the state where the jackpot is won. You should leave it. Thus, the ending period suitable for the player can be set only by executing the jackpot game in accordance with the predetermined content.

  It should be noted that the period other than the ending period may be defined in advance in accordance with the type of the winning jackpot or the game state at the time of the winning, and the opening period and the interval period may be different. Further, even if the type of the winning jackpot is the same, the length of each period during the jackpot game may be made different depending on the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. This allows the player to be interested not only in the jackpot type in which the jackpot was won (special symbol lottery result), but also in the game state at the time of the jackpot winning, thereby improving the interest of the game. be able to.

  Further, when a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery, the type of the jackpot is also determined. As will be described in detail later, as the jackpot type to be determined, a time-saving state (a low probability state of a special symbol, a high probability state of a normal symbol) is given after the jackpot game is completed with four rounds of the jackpot game. As a 4R time-saving jackpot, a jackpot type in which the duration of the time-saving state is varied (after the time-saving state is set, the time-saving state continues until the special symbol lottery is executed four times without winning the jackpot) There are provided a number of times (4 times) and a time saving big hit (15 times of time saving) in which the time saving state continues until the lottery of the special symbol is executed 15 times without winning the big hit.

  In this embodiment, if a special symbol lottery does not win a jackpot, it is determined to be off, and a bonus is not given to the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a jackpot lottery In some cases where it is determined that the hit is not a jackpot as a result of the lottery, the privilege given to the player is smaller than the jackpot described above (for example, a privilege to open the V winning device 65 only for one round). The winning game may be configured to be executed. The first symbol display device 37 not only indicates whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot (whether or not it is a small jackpot) as a stop symbol after the change, but also indicates a jackpot type if the jackpot is a jackpot. Is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, one of the “normal state” and the “time reduction state” is set as the gaming state. The normal state is a gaming state in which the special symbol big hit probability is set to a low probability (1/100) and the normal symbol hit probability is set to a low probability (1/1000) (hereinafter, a special symbol low probability state, In the time saving state, the jackpot probability of a special symbol is set to a low probability (1/100) and the hit probability of a normal symbol is set to a high probability (300/1000). It is a game state (hereinafter, referred to as a special symbol low probability state and a normal symbol high probability state).

  Here, “4R jackpot (4 time savings)” refers to a jackpot game with a maximum number of rounds of 4 (a jackpot game in which the variable winning device 650 is opened for 4 rounds), followed by a time saving state (low probability state of special symbol). , A normal symbol high probability state), and a time saving state in which the number of time savings is four after the jackpot game is set.

  The “4R jackpot (15 time savings)” means a jackpot game with a maximum number of rounds of 4 (a jackpot game in which the variable winning device 650 is opened for 4 rounds), followed by a time saving state (low probability state of special symbol, ordinary symbol) (A high probability state), which is a jackpot that can be shifted to a high probability state where the number of time savings is 15 after the end of the jackpot game.

  In the present embodiment, the game state is changed from the time saving state to the normal state when a predetermined end condition (time saving end condition) is satisfied after the time saving state is set. The number of times indicates a time saving end condition. In other words, the time saving frequency of four times means that the special symbol lottery is executed four times (the fourth special symbol change is stopped and displayed) without winning the jackpot after the time saving state is set. Is established, and the time reduction number of times is 15 times when the lottery of the special symbol is executed 15 times (the 15th special symbol change is stopped and displayed) without winning the jackpot after the time reduction state is set. It is defined that the termination condition is satisfied.

  In other words, “4R jackpot (4 time savings)” is a type of jackpot in which the time saving end condition that is more easily established is defined than “4R jackpot (4 time savings)” than “4R jackpot (15 time savings)”. )), The "4R jackpot (15 time savings)" is a jackpot type in which the time saving state is easy to continue, and a jackpot type that is advantageous to the player.

  In the present embodiment, a condition relating to the number of special symbol lotteries during the time reduction state (time reduction number) is defined as the time reduction termination condition for terminating the time reduction state. For example, the time saving termination condition that is satisfied when the result of the special symbol lottery is other than the big hit and the number of times of the specific lottery result (specific loss) reaches a predetermined number (for example, three times). Also, a time saving end condition that is satisfied when a predetermined time (for example, 100 seconds) has elapsed since the time saving state was set, or a specific ball entry port (for example, a general entry port) during the time saving state An end condition that is satisfied when the number of balls entered in 63a) reaches a predetermined number (for example, five) may be set.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. On the lower left side of the game area formed on the surface of the game board 13, there are provided a plurality of left general entrances 63a from which ten balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 has a liquid crystal display that performs a variable display of the third symbol while synchronizing with the variable display on the first symbol display device 37, triggered by a ball entering the special figure entrance 64 (start winning). (Hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”), and a normal symbol (second symbol) is variably displayed by passing a ball to a normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 as a trigger. And a second symbol display device (not shown) composed of LEDs. Further, a center frame 86 is provided in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large liquid crystal display having a size of 15 inches, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 21). One symbol column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols). These third symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (dynamically). Mark). In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, while the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 21) is performed by the first symbol display device 37, the first symbol display is performed. A decorative display corresponding to the display of the device 37 is performed. Note that the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel or the like instead of the display device.

  The second symbol display device displays a symbol “O” and a symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) each time the ball passes through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67. The variable display for alternately lighting for a predetermined time is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed the ordinary symbol starting port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. If the result of the winning lottery is a winning, the symbol "O" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. If the result of the winning lottery is off, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

  In the case of the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol of “○”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the general winning award device 640 is operated for a predetermined time. It is configured such that a hit game (a normal game per game) that is only activated (open state) is executed.

  The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is configured to be always constant (3 seconds) regardless of the result of the ordinary symbol lottery and the ordinary symbol probability state (low probability state, high probability state). . With such a configuration, for example, during the low probability state of the ordinary symbol (during the ordinary state), it is difficult to execute the game per ordinary symbol. In the pachinko machine 10 configured to be longer in the normal state than in the time-saving state, the normal game (low-probability state of the normal symbol) is shifted from the normal state (low-probability state of the normal symbol) in which the normal symbol hit game (normal symbol hit game) is hardly executed. When the gaming state shifts to a time-saving state in which a winning game is easily executed (normally high probability state of a symbol), a long-term ordinary symbol change executed during the normal state (a disadvantage to the player compared to the time-saving state). It is assumed that the period during which the normal time lottery is not executed during the time-saving state is set for a long time even though the time-saving state is set during the execution of Curb Door can be.

  In the present embodiment, the game content (opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a) of the game to be executed per ordinary figure is changed between the normal state and the time reduction state without changing the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol. ing. More specifically, the game per day drawing performed during the time reduction state is more advantageous for the player than the game per day drawing performed during the normal state. The mouth 643 is configured to be easily won. Specifically, when the normal state is set, after the opening period of 4.1 seconds (the closing period of the electrically-powered accessory 640a), the opening game period of 0.1 second is set, and the per-figure game ( When the time saving state is set, a three-second opening period is set after an opening period of 0.1 second (a closing period of the electric accessory 640a). A winning game (short-time public figure winning game) is executed.

  As described above, by executing the per-figure game in which the period during which the electric accessory 640a is in the open state is changed in accordance with the probability state of the ordinary symbol, the time is shorter than in the ordinary state (the ordinary symbol low-probability state). In the state (normal symbol high probability state), it is possible to make it easier for a ball to be won in the general electric winning device 640 during the game per ordinary figure.

  Further, although a detailed description will be given later, in the present embodiment, the ratio of the ball that has won the general winning award device 640 during the game per ordinary drawing in the normal state and the time saving state during the normal game and the time saving state enters the special power operating port 643. It is configured to be different. Specifically, a ball that has won the general winning a prize device 640 during the game per hour shortened general figure is better than a ball that has won the general prize winning device 640 during the normal normal figure winning game executed during the normal state, It is configured to make it easier to enter the special power operation port 643. With this configuration, when the normal state is set, it is difficult for the ball to win the general winning award device 640, and even if the ball wins the general winning award device 640, the special power operating port 643 When the time saving state is set, it is easy to make the ball win the general winning award device 640, and when the ball wins the general winning award device 640, the ball is moved to the special power operation port 643. This makes it easy to enter the ball.

  That is, in the present embodiment, in a plurality of processes until the fired ball enters the special power operating port 643, a state in which the ball is allowed to enter the special power operating port 643 and a state in which the ball is restricted are set. Since it is variable according to the game state to be played, the ease of entry of the ball into the special power operation port 643 can be reliably changed according to the set game state.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 2, in the present embodiment, the gaming method that is advantageous to the player is the same in both the gaming state in which the normal state is set and the gaming state in which the time reduction state is set ( (Left-handed game). In the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above, even in the normal state, a random symbol lottery opportunity is established (a ball passes to the through gate 67), and a normal symbol lottery is executed. Then, as a result of the normal symbol lottery, if a win is won, the electric accessory 640a provided in the game area in which the ball fired by the left-handed game can be reached is controlled to be opened. Also, there is a risk that the ball may be awarded to the general-purpose winning device 640 during the execution of a normal per-game game in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the general-purpose winning device 640.

  On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment allows the winning prize ball to be transmitted to the special power operation port 643 even if the ball wins the general prize winning device 640 during the general game played during the normal state. It is configured to make it difficult to enter the ball. With this configuration, in the pachinko machine 10 having a configuration in which a game is executed by the same game method in the normal state (the low probability state of the ordinary symbol) and the time reduction state (the high probability state of the ordinary symbol), Even if a ball enters the general winning award device 640 during the normal state, it is possible to suppress the ball from entering the special power operation port 643.

  In the present embodiment, the same fluctuation time (3 seconds) is set as the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol in the normal state (low probability state of the normal symbol) and the time reduction state (high probability state of the normal symbol). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the case where the game state is a low probability state (normal state) of a normal symbol and in the case of a high probability state (time saving state) of a normal symbol, a normal symbol is used. The high probability state (time saving state) may be configured such that the fluctuation time of the symbol is generally shorter. Further, in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol (in the ordinary figure high probability), other methods such as increasing the opening probability and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a for one hit are used to increase the winning probability of the ordinary symbol. When the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set to a state in which the ball easily enters the general winning device 640 than the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set regardless of the gaming state. It may be constant. On the other hand, when the time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol is set shorter than the normal state during the normal figure high accuracy, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, and The opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is mounted on the game board 13 in the left area (left area) of the variable display device unit 80, and flows down the left area of the game board 13 among the balls fired on the game board. Most of the spheres (about 100%) pass through. When the ball passes through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery of the second symbol, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device. If the result of the winning lottery is a hit, a symbol of “○” is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and the winning lottery is displayed. If the result is out of order, a symbol "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

  The number of times the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is retained up to a maximum of one time in total, and the number of retained balls is displayed on the second symbol retaining lamp 84 described above. The second symbol holding lamp 84 is provided for one of the maximum number of holdings, and is symmetrically disposed below the third symbol display device 81.

  The variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, and is also performed by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b and the third symbol display device. This may be performed using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for passing the ball through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is not limited to one, but may be set to two or more (for example, eight). Further, the number of the normal symbol starting ports (through gates) 67 is not limited to one, but may be plural (for example, two). In addition, the position where the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is assembled is not limited to the left side of the variable display unit 80, but may be the right side of the variable display unit 80, for example. Further, in the present embodiment, most of the balls flowing down the left area of the game board 13 by the left-handed game are configured to pass through the through gate 67. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only some balls are used. It may be configured to pass through the through gate 67.

  Next, a description will be given of a structure of the general winning award device 640 which is opened when a normal symbol lottery is won. As shown in FIG. 2, the general winning award device 640 is provided below the variable display device unit 80, and has an open state in which a ball can be awarded therein, and a closed state that is harder to win than the open state. An electric accessory 640a that can be changed to a state is electrically operated at a position where a ball flowing down a left area (an area on the left side in front view of the variable display device unit 80) of the game area formed on the game board 13 reaches. An accessory 640a is provided. In the present embodiment, the ball fired by the left-handed game reaches the general winning award device 640 at a ratio of one ball of about three balls (if the electric accessory 640a is in the open state, the general winning award device 640). (To reach a winning position).

  The electric accessory 640a is normally maintained in a closed state, and when a normal symbol lottery is won, the electric accessory 640a is variably moved to an open state for a predetermined period in a predetermined variable pattern. The game per day is executed. In other words, in the present embodiment, a normal symbol lottery is performed to win a win, and a normal win per game is executed, so that a state in which a ball can easily be won in the general win device 640 can be provided to the player.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, by continuously executing the left-handed game, it is possible to establish a lottery opportunity of a normal symbol (allow a ball to pass to the through gate 67) and to execute a normal symbol. It is configured so that a ball can be won in the general winning prize device 640 which is opened when a win is made in the lottery. Furthermore, it is configured so that a chance to win a special symbol lottery can be established by the left-handed game. In addition, a variable winning device 650 that is variably operated by a jackpot game executed when a jackpot is won by a special symbol lottery is also provided at a position where a ball fired by a left-handed game can win.

  With this configuration, regardless of the game state, the player can always play the same game method (left-handed game), so that it is not necessary for the player to change the game method. The game can be smoothly performed without giving.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 3 to FIG. 5, the configuration of the general winning a prize device 640 and the flow of the sphere winning in the general winning prize device 640 will be described in detail. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the internal configuration of the general winning a prize device 640, and FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram showing a flow in which a ball that has won inside the general prize winning device 640 flows into the out port 644. FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram showing a flow in which a ball that has won the general winning award device 640 enters the special power operation port 643.

  In the present embodiment, the ordinary symbol lottery is executed in response to the ball passing through the through gate 67, and when the normal symbol lottery is won, the electric accessory 640a is opened in a predetermined variable pattern. A game per day is executed. Then, when the electric accessory 640a is changed to the open state in the game per ordinary drawing, the ball is brought into a state in which the ball can enter the ordinary electric winning device 640.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a second movable valve 642 is provided in the general winning award device 640. The second movable valve 642 is a second flow path that connects the ball that has flowed into the general winning award device 640 and has flowed down the first flow path 641a to the special power operation port 643 upon execution of the game per game. It is configured to be variable in a predetermined variable pattern between a first state that can be guided to the 641 b and a second state that can be guided to the third flow path 641 c communicating with the out port 644. The ball that has won the general winning a prize device 640 is detected by the ball detection sensor 640 s, and the number of prize winning balls to the general prize winning device 640 in one game per general figure can be measured. Although a detailed description is omitted, in the present embodiment, when the number of balls that have won the general winning a prize device 640 in one game per general figure reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10), the time is determined. The game is configured to end the game. In the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which a prize ball (four) is paid out when a ball enters the special power operation port 643, and a prize ball is not paid out when the ball enters the out port 644. ing.

  In this general winning a prize device 640, a cover body is formed of an acrylic resin having transparency so that a player can visually recognize the ball flow in the general prize winning device 640, and the cover body is attached to the game board 13. ing. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the flow of the ball in the general winning a prize device 640, so that the player can enjoy the behavior of the ball that has won the general prize winning device 640.

  The electric accessory 640a provided in the general winning award device 640 is provided with the upper end side of the second partition 640k2 serving as a base for rotation, and a closed state in which a ball is unlikely to win the general winning award device 640 (FIG. 3) and an open state (see FIG. 4) in which the ball is more likely to win the general winning award device 640 than in the closed state (see FIG. 4). As shown in FIG. 3, the electric accessory 640 a in the closed state is configured to be stored in the general winning award device 640, and more specifically, on the left side of the vertical line of the second partition 640 k 2 ( The distal end of the first partition 640k1 is configured to protrude to the left (from the viewpoint of FIG. 3), and the closed motorized accessory 640a is positioned below the distal end of the first partition 640k1. ing. With this configuration, it is possible to make it hard for the closed electric powered object 640a to come into contact with the ball fired by the left-handed game. it can.

  Although a detailed description will be given later, in the present embodiment, the ball won in the general winning prize device 640 wins in the special power operation port 643 according to the game state set at the time of performing the game per ordinary figure. The probability of winning (ease of winning) is configured to be different. Specifically, the period from the execution of the per-figure-period game to the opening control of the electric accessory 640a in the predetermined release pattern (opening-per-figure-period) is made different during the normal state. The ball that has won a prize in the prize winning device 640 in the game of the per-figure per game is placed in the special power operation port 643 more than the ball that has won in the prize-winning apparatus 640 in the per-figure game executed during the time saving state. It is configured to make it difficult to win.

  With this configuration, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment in which a game is played in the same game method (left-handed game) in both the normal state and the time-saving state, the ball is moved to the special power operation port 643 during the normal state. Winning can be suppressed. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the per-figure per game executed during the normal state is more difficult to win a ball in the per-prize winning apparatus 640 than the per-figure perforation game executed during the time saving state. Is configured to be executed. Also according to this configuration, it is possible to prevent the ball from winning in the special power operation port 643 during the normal state. That is, in the present embodiment, in addition to measures to make it harder for a ball to enter the general power winning device 640 during the normal state than during the time saving state, when a ball wins in the general power winning device 640 during the normal state. Has a countermeasure to make it harder for a ball to enter the special power operating port 643 than when a ball is entered in the normal electricity winning device 640 during the time saving state. As described above, by providing the configuration for suppressing the winning of the ball to the special power operation port 643 in the normal state in a plurality of stages, the configuration can be more reliably suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 4, a description will be given of a ball flow when a ball has won a prize in the prize winning device 640 in a per-figure game executed when the normal state is set. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram showing a flow of a ball that has won the general winning a prize device 640 in a general game per game in a normal state. In the present embodiment, in order to avoid giving the player the trouble of changing the game method, the game is configured to be always playable in the left-handed game. Therefore, even during the normal state, which is the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, a lottery opportunity of the ordinary symbol is established (the ball passes to the through gate 67), and when the game per ordinary symbol is executed, the general winning a prize device. There was a risk that the ball would win within 640.

  That is, in the normal state (the low probability state of the ordinary symbol), a ball is awarded in the ordinary winning prize device 640 as compared with the time saving state in which the ball is easily awarded in the ordinary prize winning device 640 (the high probability state of the ordinary symbol). Although the game state is difficult to play, in the present embodiment, the same game method (left-handed game) is executed in the normal state and the time-saving state. There was a possibility that the ball would win.

  As described above, the special electric winning opening 643 is provided in the general winning award device 640, which is a trigger for executing a game (game per accessory) for opening the V winning device 65, and the ball is in a normal state. If the player hits the special power operation port 643 and the game per hit is executed, there is a problem that an excessively advantageous game is provided to a player who is playing a game in a normal state.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the ratio of the balls that have won the general power winning device 640 during the normal state to the special power operation port 643 and the balls that have won the general power winning device 640 during the time saving state are the special It is configured such that the ratio of entering the working port 643 is different from the ratio of entering the working port 643. Specifically, in the case where the per-figure per game is executed in the normal state, the electric accessory 640a is opened after the per-figure per game is started, as compared with the case where the per-figure per game is executed in the time reduction state. (A first open state) is set to be long, and the second movable valve 642 that moves based on the start of the game per ordinary drawing moves the ball that has won the second state (the general electric winning device 640) out. The ball is configured to be able to win the general winning award device 640 only at the timing of maintaining the state in which the ball can be guided to the mouth 644).

  In other words, as shown in FIG. 4, when the ball wins the general winning award device 640 during the general game per game executed during the normal state, the first ball with the ball flowing down period of about 0.5 second is designed. The sphere flows down the flow path 641a, is guided to the third flow path 641c by the second movable valve 642 located in the second state, and enters the out port 644 (to reach the second movable valve 642). The period from when the ball reaches the out port 644 is designed to be about 0.3 seconds). With such a configuration, even if a ball wins in the general-purpose winning device 640 during the normal state, it is possible to suppress the ball from entering the special power operating port 643, so that the game in the normal state It is possible to suppress providing an excessively advantageous game to a player who plays the game.

  In addition, in order to prevent the ball from entering the special power operation port 643 during the normal state, the ball is prevented from winning in the general electricity winning device 640 by the per-figure game executed during the normal state. Since there is no need to use a special configuration, the degree of freedom in designing the game board 13 can be increased.

  Further, as will be described in detail later, in the game-per-game executed during the normal state, the timing of changing the second movable valve 642 to the second state (at the start of the game-per-game) is determined by the electric accessory. The timing at which the 640a is in the open state (4.1 seconds after the start of the per-figure game), for example, the per-figure game is started in a state where the second movable valve 642 is located in the first state. However, the configuration is such that the sphere does not reach the second movable valve 642 while the second movable valve 642 is variably operating. With such a configuration, the second movable valve 642 during the variable operation comes into contact with the ball that has won the general winning prize device 640, and the ball may be clogged in the general winning prize device 640. In addition, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the second movable valve 642 breaks down.

  In the present embodiment, when a ball enters the special power operation port 643 provided in the general winning award device 640, four balls are paid out as prize balls and the ball enters the out port 644. When a ball is hit, a prize ball is not paid out. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a ball hits the out port 644, the ball enters the special power operation port 643. A larger number of prize balls (for example, 10) may be paid out than in the case where they are performed. With such a configuration, it is possible to change the privilege given to the player based on the lottery of the ordinary symbols according to the gaming state. Specifically, in the state where the normal state is set, more prize balls are given as a privilege to the player than in the time reduction state, and in the state where the time reduction state is set, In addition to the prize balls that are less than in the normal state, it is possible to provide as a bonus a per-accessory game that is not (or hardly) given in the normal state. Therefore, regardless of which game state is set, the player can be interested in the result of the normal symbol lottery.

  The same number of prize balls (four) may be paid out when a ball enters the special power operation port 643 and when a ball enters the out port 644. In this case, The configuration may be such that it is difficult to determine whether the ball that has won the general winning award device 640 has entered the special power operation port 643 or the out port 644. This makes it impossible for the player to know which ball entrance (special power operation port 643, out port 644) the ball has entered based on the number of paid out prize balls. After causing the device 640 to win a ball, it is possible to execute an effect that makes it seem as if it is determined by a lottery whether or not a hitting game (game per role) for opening the V winning device 65 is performed. It is possible to enhance the production effect. Further, in this case, when the ball detection sensor 640s detects a ball, it is preferable to pay out a prize ball (four), whereby the player wins the ball to the general winning award device 640. , The prize ball given to the player can be paid out quickly.

  As shown in FIG. 4, when the electric accessory 640a is in the open state, the distal end side of the first partition 640k1 and the electric accessory 640a are substantially parallel, and a spherical flow path is formed therebetween. Therefore, when the electric accessory 640a positioned in the open state receives the ball, it is possible to prevent the ball from bouncing out of the ordinary winning award device 640 due to the impact.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 5, a description will be given of a ball flow when a ball has won a prize in the general electric prize winning device 640 in a general per-game game executed when the time saving state is set. FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram showing a flow of a ball that has won the general winning a prize apparatus 640 in a game per general figure during the time saving state. As shown in FIG. 5, when the per-figure per game is executed during the time-saving state, the electric accessory 640a is started after the per-figure per-game is started, rather than the per-figure per game performed during the normal state. Since the period until the opening state (opening state first) is set to be short, the second movable valve 642 can guide the ball that has won the first state (general prize winning device 640) to the special power operation port 643. State), the electric accessory 640a is opened.

  Therefore, when the ball that has won the general winning award device 640 flows down the first flow path 641a and reaches the second movable valve 642 (0.5 seconds after the ball wins the general winning award device 640). ), Since the second movable valve 642 is located in the first state, the second movable valve 642 flows down the second flow path 641b communicating with the first flow path 641a (the flow-down period is designed to be about 0.2 seconds). The ball enters the working port 643. Then, based on a detection means (proximity sensor) (not shown) detecting the entry of a ball into the special power operating port 643, a bonus game in which the V winning device 65 is opened is started.

  As shown in FIG. 5, when the second movable valve 642 is located in the first state, a sphere flowing down the first flow path 641a (flowing vertically downward from the viewpoint of FIG. 5) is formed by the second movable valve 642. The second movable valve 642 is configured to be variable up to a position where contact with the second movable valve 642 becomes difficult. Thus, it is possible to prevent the ball from frequently contacting the second movable valve 642 and causing the second movable valve 642 to break down. As will be described in detail later, when the game per game is executed during the time saving state, the electric accessory 640a is opened 0.1 second after the game per game is started, A ball can enter the winning prize device 640. Therefore, the shortest period from the time when the game per game is executed to the time when the ball reaches the position of the second movable valve 642 is 0.6 seconds (the electric accessory 640a is in the open state after the game per game is started. (The sum of 0.1 seconds until the ball reaches the second movable valve 642) and 0.1 seconds until the ball wins the universal winning device 640).

  The second movable 642 performs a variable operation at the same time as the start of the per-game game, and a variable operation period thereof (a period required for changing from the first state to the second state (the second state to the first state)). Is set to 0.1 second. Also, since the second movable valve 642 is configured to be variably operated one second after the electric accessory 640a is closed in the normal game, the electric accessory 640a is changed to the closed state. The second movable valve 642 is changed when a period (1 second) that is twice as long as the period (1 second) until the ball that has won the prize winning device 640 immediately before reaching the second movable valve 642 has elapsed. It is configured to work. Therefore, even in the normal time per game executed during the time saving state, it is possible to make it difficult for the ball to contact the second movable valve 642 during the variable operation.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. A V winning device 65 is provided on the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (left side in the viewpoint of FIG. 2) so that a ball which is fired by a left-handed game and flows down the left region can win. Here, with reference to FIG. 6 to FIG. 9, a specific configuration of the V winning device 65 and a flow of a ball winning in the V winning device 65 will be described. In the present embodiment, when a ball enters the special power operation port 643 provided in the general winning award device 640, a game per accessory that opens the V winning device 65 is executed. ing. Then, the configuration is such that a jackpot game (V jackpot game) is executed when a ball wins in a V winning port 165 provided in the V winning device 65.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, in addition to the execution timing of the jackpot game (special figure jackpot game) which is established when the jackpot is won by the special symbol lottery, when the ball wins the specific winning opening (V winning opening 165). There is an opportunity to execute the jackpot game that is established (V jackpot game). Thus, by providing a plurality of occasions for executing the jackpot game, it is possible to provide the player with a game that does not get tired.

  First, the configuration of the V winning device 65 will be described with reference to FIG. The V winning device 65 is provided with an opening / closing door 65a that can be changed between an open state in which balls easily enter the V winning device 65 and a closed state in which balls are less likely to win than in the open state. The opening / closing door 65a is provided at a position (see FIG. 2) to which a ball flowing down the left area of the game board 13 can reach, and is changed to an open state when a game per accessory is executed.

  In the V winning device 65, a first flow path 65b through which a ball passing through the open / close door 65a in the open state flows is formed in a space between the first partition 65k1 and the second partition 65k2. A storage valve 66a is provided at a position where the ball (flowing period 0.5 seconds) flowing down the path 65b reaches. A storage portion capable of storing one ball is formed on the upper surface of the storage valve 66a, so that the ball that first wins the V prize device 65 during the game per accessory is temporarily stored in the storage portion. Make up. A storage sensor 65s is provided above the storage valve 66a, and is configured to be able to detect that a ball is stored in the storage unit. Further, a ball detection sensor 65s2 for detecting a ball that has won the V prize device 65 is provided on the upstream side of the first flow path 65b, and based on the fact that the ball detection sensor 65s2 has detected a ball, an accessory During the winning game, the number of balls that have won the V prize device 65 is counted, and prize ball payout control for the winning ball is executed. As described above, by providing the ball detection sensor 65s2 at a position where the ball that has won the V winning device 65 immediately flows down, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a specified number or more balls win the V winning device 65. At the same time, it is possible to immediately give the player a prize ball being played per role.

  Further, a second flow path 65c is formed so as to communicate with the first flow path 65b, and a first out port 163a is provided downstream of the second flow path 65c. As shown in FIG. 6, the second flow path 65c does not directly flow the sphere flowing down the first flow path 65b, but stores the first flow in a state where the sphere is stored in the storage portion of the storage valve 66a. The following sphere flowing down the path 65b is configured to come into contact with the sphere stored in the storage portion of the storage valve 66a and to be guided to the second flow path 65c. The first out port 163a provided on the downstream side of the second flow path 65c is a ball entry port for discharging the entered ball to the outside of the pachinko machine 10, and flows down the second flow path 65c ( After a falling period of 0.1 second), the ball that has entered the first out port 163a flows down a ball discharging path (not shown) and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10.

  As will be described in detail later, the storage valve 66a is configured to store a ball in accordance with the progress of the per-accompaniment game (corresponding to an operation scenario in which the per-accompaniment game is executed), and a storage state where the ball can be stored. It is configured to be variably operated between a released state in which the ball is less likely to be stored than the state. When the storage valve 66a is in the release state, the first flow path 65b and the third flow path 65d communicate with each other and are stored in the sphere flowing down the first flow path 65b or in the storage section of the storage valve 66a. The moving ball flows down the third flow path 65d. The third flow path 65d is a flow path formed in a space between the lower end of the first partition 65k1 and the third partition 65k3 and having a width of about 15 mm and formed linearly in the vertical direction.

  A first movable valve 66b is provided at a position facing the downstream side of the third flow path 65d. The first movable valve 66b has a guide position (projection position) capable of receiving a ball flowing down the third flow path 65d in a predetermined movable pattern when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, The ball is configured to be movable between a passage position (burial position) where the ball flowing down the third flow path 65d cannot be received. Specifically, the first movable valve solenoid 209d, which is connected to the input / output port 205 of the main controller 110 and is driven and controlled by the main controller 110, is configured to be movable in accordance with the operation of the first movable valve solenoid 209d. When the valve solenoid 209d is set to ON (when energized), the first movable valve 66b is moved to a passage position (a position buried in the game board 13) where the first movable valve 66b is retracted from the V winning device 65, and the first movable valve 66b is moved to the first position. When the movable valve solenoid 209d is turned off (when electricity is cut off), the first movable valve 66b moves to the guiding position (the position projecting from the game board 13) to project into the V winning device 65. It is configured as follows.

  The first movable valve 66b located at the guidance position (projection position) is configured such that a sphere can flow down the upper surface thereof. As shown in FIG. 6, the downstream end of the upper surface of the first movable valve 66b is the fourth flow valve. It is configured to incline downward toward the road 65e. Therefore, the ball (downflow period of 0.2 seconds) flowing down the third flow path 65d in a state where the first movable valve 66b is located at the guide position (projection position) moves the upper surface of the first movable valve 66b to the fourth flow path. It will flow down to 65e. A second out port 163b is provided on the downstream side of the fourth flow path 65e, and the ball flowing down the fourth flow path 65e (flowing period of 0.2 seconds) enters the second out port 163b. The second out port 163b is a ball entry port for discharging the entered ball to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 similarly to the first out port 163a described above. The dropped ball flows down a ball discharge path (not shown) and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10.

  On the other hand, in a state where the first movable valve 66b is located at the passage position, the third flow path 65d and the fifth flow path 65f communicate with each other, and the sphere flowing down the third flow path 65d (flowing period 0.2 Second) flows into the fifth flow path 65f (flow-down period of 0.1 second). A V winning opening 165 is provided downstream of the fifth flow path 65f. The V winning opening 165 is a winning opening that can be a trigger for executing the jackpot game. When a ball wins the V winning opening 165 in a state where the jackpot game is not executed, the jackpot game is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 6, inside the V winning device 65, a first out port 163a and a second out port 163b are provided. With such a configuration, a ball that has won the V prize device 65 when the storage valve 66a is in the storage state can pass through the flow path (third flow) through which the ball can pass when the storage valve 66a is in the release state. The flow into the path 65d, the fourth flow path 65e, and the fifth flow path 65f) can be reliably prevented. In addition, without being limited to the configuration of the present embodiment, for example, the first out port 163a is eliminated, the second flow path 65c is communicated with the fourth flow path 65e, and the storage valve 66a is in the storage state. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which a sphere flowing down the second flow path 65c enters the second out port 163b. In this case, the third partition 65k3, which is provided linearly in the vertical direction in FIG. 6, is inclined downward and to the right from the viewpoint of FIG. 6 from the upper end to the lower end, that is, the lower end of the partition 65k3. It is preferable to provide the fourth partition wall 65k4 on the right side (the right side in the viewpoint of FIG. 6) on the extension line toward the direction. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the sphere flowing down the second flow path 65c flows into the fifth flow path 65f.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, there are two occasions for executing the jackpot game, that is, the case where the jackpot game is executed when the jackpot is won by the special symbol lottery, and the case where the ball is V There is a case where a jackpot game is executed when a winning is made to the winning opening 165. Hereinafter, when explaining the jackpot game by classifying the execution trigger, the jackpot game executed when the player wins the V winning port 165 is also referred to as a V jackpot game.

  As described above, the V prize device 65 of the present embodiment is in an open state where balls can be won by executing a game per accessory, and only one ball stored in the storage valve 66a is in the third flow path. 65d, the ball flows in the V winning opening 165 according to the operating state of the first movable valve 66b when the ball flowing down the third flow path 65d reaches the first movable valve 66b. Or not.

  As will be described in detail later, the first movable valve 66b is located at the passage position (time when the ball is not located in the V winning opening 165) (the time when the ball cannot enter the V winning opening 165). Since the ball is constantly moving in a movable pattern in which the ball can enter the V winning opening 165) in a movable pattern of 0.5 seconds, the ratio of the ball flowing down the third flow path 65d to the V winning opening 165 is , About 1/11.

  In addition, even if a plurality of balls are won in the V winning device 65 in one game per role, the operation of the storage valve 66a is controlled so that the number of balls flowing down the third flow path 65d is one. Therefore, the configuration is such that, when the game per accessory is executed 11 times, the rate at which one big hit game is executed is obtained.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 7 to FIG. 9, a description will be given of the content of the ball flow that has won the V prize device 65 during the execution of the per-bonus game. First, with reference to FIG. 7, the ball flow in the first half period (period in which the storage valve 66a is in the storage state) of the per-prize game will be described. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram showing a ball flow in the V winning device 65 when a storage valve 66a is in a storage state in a game per bonus item. As will be described in detail later, the storage valve 66a is configured to be operated and controlled so as to be in the storage state from the time when the bonus game is executed to the time when the V winning device 65 is closed. ing. Then, when a plurality of balls win the V prize device 65 while the storage valve 66a is in the storage state, the first winning ball P1 is stored in the storage portion formed in the storage valve 66a, and the next prize is won. The ball P2 comes into contact with the ball P1 stored in the storage valve 66a, flows down the second flow path 65c, and enters the out port 163a.

  As described above, when the storage valve 66a is in the storage state, the winning spheres (for example, the ball P2) other than the ball P1 stored in the storage portion of the storage valve 66a all enter the out port 163a. Therefore, a plurality of balls do not stay in the V winning device 65. Further, since the storage valve 66a is released from the storage state after the V opening / closing door 65a of the V winning device 65 is closed (after executing the operation control for closing the V state), the storage valve 66a is operated once. It is possible to reliably reduce the number of balls to flow down the third flow path 65d to one per game.

  With such a configuration, the ease with which a ball can be awarded to the V winning opening 165 can be changed according to the timing at which the ball is awarded to the V winning device 65 during the per game play and the number of winnings. Since there is no game, a fair game can be provided to all players.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 8, a description will be given of the contents of the ball flow (the latter half period of the game per accessory) when the storage valve 66a shifts from the storage state to the release state. FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram showing a ball flow when the storage valve 66a shifts from the storage state to the release state in the game per accessory. As shown in FIG. 8, after the V opening / closing door 65a is closed and a new ball cannot enter the V winning device 65, the storage valve 66a is released (shown by a dotted line in the figure). Upon shifting, the ball P1 (see FIG. 7) stored in the storage section of the storage valve 66a flows down the third flow path 65d. In the state shown in FIG. 8, since the first movable valve 66b is located at the guide position, the ball P1 rolls on the downward slope formed on the upper surface of the first movable valve 66b, and the fourth flow path 65e is closed. The ball flows down and enters the second out port 163b.

  On the other hand, when the ball P1 (see FIG. 7) stored in the storage section of the storage valve 66a flows down the third flow path 65d and reaches the first movable valve 66b, the first movable valve 66b is moved to the passing position. Will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram showing a ball flow when the storage valve 66a shifts from the storage state to the release state in the game per accessory. As shown in FIG. 9, at the timing when the ball flowing down the third flow path 65d reaches the first movable valve 66b, when the first movable valve 66b is located at the passage position, the fifth flow path 66f is switched to the fifth flow path 66f. It flows down and wins the V winning opening 165.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. A special figure entrance 64 into which a ball can enter is provided below the variable display device unit 80. When a ball enters the special figure entrance 64, a special figure entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the special figure entrance switch is turned on. A jackpot lottery is performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 21), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37a. When a ball enters the special figure entrance 64, four prize balls are paid out as a privilege. In the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which, out of the balls fired by the left-handed game, approximately one in 15 balls can enter the special figure entrance 64.

  As shown in FIG. 10, on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), a sound lamp control board (sound lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is mounted as a unit on which a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 and a payout unit 93 forming a protective cover unit are unitized. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for controlling each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are mounted as needed.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are stored.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) are connected to the box base and the box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (the caulking structure). Consolidation). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to a connection portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is peeled to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102 or if the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electric configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 21). ing. The balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and the payout device 133 pays out a required number of balls as needed. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a clogged ball of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 21). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing an electric configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  The main control device 110 has an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built therein. In the main controller 110, the MPU 201 performs major processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display device 37a, 37b and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of a display result on the second symbol display device. Execute

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit to instruct the sub-control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 includes, in addition to various areas, counters, and flags, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, and I / Os. A work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is cut off (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power supply, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. It should be noted that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When an input is made, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the second symbol display device, and the second symbol holding lamp are connected to the input / output port 205. In addition, when the jackpot game is executed, the specific winning opening solenoid 209a for driving the opening / closing door for changing the specific winning opening 650a of the variable winning device 650 between the open state and the closed state, and the V winning device 65 A V winning opening solenoid 209b for opening and closing the opening / closing door, a storage solenoid 209c for variably driving a storage valve 66a provided in the V winning device 65, and a first movable provided in the V winning device 65 as well. The first movable valve solenoid 209d for variably driving the valve 66b, the second movable valve solenoid 209e for variably driving the second movable valve 641 provided in the ordinary winning device 640, and other various devices are driven. MPU 201 is connected through an input / output port 205. Et to send various commands and control signals.

  The input / output port 205 includes various switches (not shown) such as a switch for detecting that a ball has entered each entrance and a switch for detecting that the ball is located at a specific position. The switch 208 and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115 are connected, and the MPU 201 performs various operations based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasure signal SG2 output from the RAM erasure switch circuit 253. Execute the process.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 includes a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply unit 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launching strength of the ball according to the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, turns on and off lights in a lamp display device (such as the illuminated units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a fluctuation effect (fluctuation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the display control device 114, such as the display) and the announcement effect. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, other devices 228, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. The other devices 228 include various drive motors for operating a drive for performance provided in the pachinko machine 10.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and outputs the determined display mode as a command. (Display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors an input from the frame button 22 and, when the player operates the frame button 22, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or performs super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content at the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the rear surface image is an image displayed on the rear surface side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In addition, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, an accessory driving command is transmitted to the other device 228 in order to drive an unillustrated production accessory, and the operation corresponding to the operation content of the frame button 22 is performed. A voice output command for outputting a voice to the voice output device 226 is set, and a lamp output command for causing the lamp display device 227 to emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the operation content of the frame button 22 is set. May be configured.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81. Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 and, based on a command received from the audio lamp control device 113, performs a variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. It controls the display. In addition, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The sound lamp control device 113 outputs the sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 10). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt processing. Note that, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 10) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data and also controls the payout control device 111 to execute a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 11A and 11B are schematic diagrams schematically showing display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment. The third symbol display device 81 is configured by a 15-inch size liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 described later, so that, for example, three symbol columns of upper, middle, and lower ( L1 to L3) are displayed (see FIG. 11B). The third symbol (special symbol) that is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is a decorative symbol that fluctuates in response to the variable display, and identification information imitating the numbers “0” to “9” is added. Each of the ten types of main symbols.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the main symbols are formed using different types of display modes according to identification information that imitates numbers. In this way, by using the display mode corresponding to each identification information, it is possible to visually inform the player of the result of the lottery of the special symbol, so that the player can play the game easily. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a lottery result by the main control device 110 described later is a big hit, the same main symbols are aligned (for example, “777”), and the variable display is performed. Is configured to generate a jackpot after the game is over. In other words, the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a symbol for indicating the result of the lottery of the special symbol by the main control device 110.

  In the main display area Dm, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 for left, middle, and right are displayed. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in ascending or descending numerical order, and the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are scrolled up and down periodically to perform variable display.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 11A, the main display area Dm has one effective line L1 formed in the left-right direction, and in a state where the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed, If all three symbols are stopped on the activated line L1 in a combination of big hit symbols (in the first embodiment, the same combination of main symbols), a big hit video is displayed as a big hit.

  In addition, the mode of the variable display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary. The number of symbol columns, the direction of the variable display of the symbol in the symbol column, each symbol The number of symbols in the columns can be changed as appropriate. The symbols variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are not limited to those described above. For example, a symbol that combines an image of a figure or a character with a numeral may be configured as the third symbol. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the area in which the third symbol is variably displayed is variable. For example, when a specific effect is performed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the variable display area of the third symbol is displayed. Or by moving the variable display area to a position (for example, a corner of the display screen) where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize, so that it is difficult for the player to determine whether the third symbol is fluctuating. You may make it. Further, during the period in which the special symbol is changing, the change of the third symbol may be temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) and may be changed again.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the third symbol corresponding to the change of the special symbol is configured to be displayed in a variable manner (dynamic display). However, the present invention is not limited to this. May be configured to perform variable display (dynamic display). In this case, the player determines whether the variation display of the third symbol executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 corresponds to the variation of the special symbol or the variation of the normal symbol. The notification may be configured to be difficult to understand. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult to understand what kind of privilege is given to the player according to the result of the variable display of the third symbol executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, if the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to execute both the variable display corresponding to the change of the special symbol (lottery) and the variable display corresponding to the change of the ordinary symbol (lottery), the game content to be executed ( The target of the third symbol may be switched according to the (game state), for example, during the normal state, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation (lottery) of the special symbol is executed, and the time reduction state is executed. In the middle, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation (lottery) of the ordinary symbol may be executed. In this case, the third symbol may be variably displayed in accordance with the symbol type in which a lottery (a lottery on which the player more closely looks at the lottery result) performed for the player is performed. On the other hand, the display mode and the display area of the third symbol may be changed so as to correspond to the type of the symbol that is changing. Thereby, an easy-to-understand game can be provided to the player.

  As shown in FIG. 11A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is largely divided into upper and lower parts, and a lower two-thirds is a main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed. The upper third is a sub-display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, center, and right, and three symbol arrays Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in ascending or descending numerical order, and the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are scrolled from top to bottom with a periodicity to perform variable display. In particular, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, third symbols are displayed in three stages of upper, middle, and lower for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the activated line L1, and in each game, the third symbol is stopped on the activated line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2. Is displayed. This stop display state is maintained for at least one second. In this way, by displaying the stopped third symbol for a certain period (1 second or more), the player can determine whether the combination is the third symbol corresponding to the big hit (the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit). Overlooked or not) can be suppressed. Also, if the combination of the big hit symbols (in the present embodiment, the same combination of the main symbols) is aligned on the activated line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, the big hit is determined, the big hit game is started, and the big hit video (opening effect) ) Is displayed.

  In addition, when the combination of the third symbols stopped and displayed is a combination corresponding to the departure and there is a reserved ball, after a stop display (confirmation display) for one second, a variable display corresponding to a lottery based on the reserved ball. Is started. When there are a plurality of reserved balls, the lottery is executed based on the reserved ball corresponding to the oldest incoming ball in time.

  On the other hand, when the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the departure of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) for one second in the state where the reserved ball does not exist, the state where the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. . This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses or until a new game ball enters the special figure entrance 64. When a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed, a demonstration effect indicating that the game was not executed is displayed. In spite of the fact that the player has continuously fired the game ball for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds), it is rare that there is no ball entering the special figure entrance 64, and the third symbol is stopped. In many cases, the displayed state continues for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) because the player has quit the game and the pachinko machine 10 does not play the game at all. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed since the stop display of the third symbol, it is determined that the player is not playing a game, and the demonstration effect is started. I do. Thereby, the player who is trying to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily determine whether or not the game is being performed based on whether or not the demonstration effect is displayed. On the other hand, when a new game ball enters the special figure entrance 64 before the predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses, the fluctuation display of the third symbol corresponding to the new entry is displayed. Be executed.

  The sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is equally divided in the left-right direction into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3. Among these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of game balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the game balls entered into the special figure entrance 64 and the through gate 67. And the small areas Ds2 and Ds3 are areas for displaying a notice effect image.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 11B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the right small area Ds3, and it is suggested to the player that the transition to the big hit is easier than usual. In the central small area Ds2, normally, a predetermined character 710 (a boy with a beeper in this embodiment) performs a predetermined operation, and sometimes performs a special operation different from the predetermined operation, or another character may perform a predetermined operation. A notice effect is performed by appearing.

  On the other hand, if the ball enters the special figure entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37), the number of times of ball entry is up to four. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, and is also indicated in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. Further, when the ball enters the through gate 67, the number of times of ball entry is held up to a maximum of one time, and the number of held balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. . In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed for each reserved ball number, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the number of displayed reserved ball number symbols. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is one ball, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number is reduced. Indicates four balls. When the reserved ball number symbol is not displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball. The left half of the small area Ds1 displays a reserved ball count design indicating the number of retained balls based on the entry into the special figure entrance 64, and the right half of the small area Ds1 has a through ball. The configuration is such that a reserved ball count symbol indicating the number of reserved balls based on the entry into the gate 67 is displayed. In the example of FIG. 11 (b), while four reserved ball count symbols are displayed in the left half of the small area Ds1, no reserved ball count symbol is displayed in the right half. This shows a state in which there are four reserved balls, but there are normally no reserved balls.

  In the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the ball entering the special figure entrance 64 is held up to four times, and the ball entering the through gate 67 is held up to one time. Although configured, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to this, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). In addition, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is changed by a number on a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of retained balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls for the maximum number of holding balls, and displaying the number of holding balls according to the number of the holding lamps in the lighting state.

  Further, in the display screen shown with reference to FIG. 11, the sub-display area Ds is formed above the main display area Dm. However, the display area may be formed in other forms. The sub-display area Ds may be formed below the area Dm. In this case, the display area of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 may be variably formed according to the set game state. Thus, the player can easily grasp that the game has shifted to a different game state only by looking at the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Further, a state in which the player pays close attention to the display mode of the main display area Dm, such as a state in which a variable display of the third symbol indicating that the degree of expectation that the special symbol lottery result has been won is high is being executed. In such a case, the display area of the sub display area Ds may be reduced, or the sub display area Ds may be hidden.

<About the effect contents on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 12 to FIG. 19, a description will be given of the effect contents executed by the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery (special symbol lottery), a time saving state (a low probability state of a special symbol, a high probability state of a normal symbol) is set after the end of the jackpot game. This time saving state is continued until the number of special symbol lotteries reaches the specified number of times (until a predetermined condition for terminating the time saving state is satisfied). Is established, and the normal state is set.

  The time-saving state is a state in which a high probability state of a normal symbol is set, and an open state in which a ball can enter the general electric prize winning device 640 by a game per general figure compared to a case where the gaming state is a normal state. It is configured to be easily set.

  When the player wins the normal symbol and the ball enters the special power operation port 643 in the general winning award device 640, the game for a role is executed, and the ball enters the V winning port 165 provided in the V winning device 65. Is executed for winning the prize.

  Here, in the present embodiment, a game ball fired aiming at the left area of the game board 13 is configured to pass through the through gate 67 with a probability of 100%. In a normal symbol lottery executed when a game ball passes through the through gate 67, if a time saving state is set, it is designed to win with a probability of 3/10. In the case of winning in the lottery of, the regular winning game in which the electric accessory 640a is in the open state is executed.

  Most games (about 100%) of the per-figure game executed during the time-saving state can be performed by continuously executing the left-handed game so that the ball can be awarded to the general electric winning device 640 (3 seconds). ) The ordinary winning game in which the electric accessory 640a is opened is executed.

  Further, in the general game per game executed during the time saving state, most of the balls which have won the general electric winning device 640 are configured to enter the special power operation port 643, and the balls enter the special power operation port 643. A game per accessory is executed when the ball is hit. Then, when the game per role is executed, the V winning device 65 is opened, and the ball that has won the V winning device 65 wins the V winning opening 165 at a rate of about 1/11, and the V winning opening 165. The big hit game (V big hit game) is configured to be executed when the ball is won.

  In other words, during the time-saving state, a game (special electric game) aiming at a big hit by making a game ball win (V winning) in the V winning opening 165, rather than executing a game (special figure game) aiming at a big hit by a special symbol lottery. Since the (game) can easily execute the jackpot game, the player executes the game while requesting a V prize (V jackpot game) based on the special hit game in the special electric game.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the left side area of the game board 13 is used as a special electric game in order to allow the general winning award device 640 to win a ball (to pass the ball through the through gate 67 which is usually a trigger for executing a symbol lottery). It is necessary to fire a ball aiming at. Further, in the present embodiment, when a game (left-handed game) is executed aiming at the left area of the game board 13, the ball also enters the special figure entrance 64, so that the special figure Both the figure game (game for performing a lottery of special symbols) and the special electric game (game for performing a lottery of ordinary symbols) are executed.

  The time-saving state in which the special electric game is more advantageous to the player than the special figure game is the time required for the special symbol lottery executed by the special figure game to reach the specified number of times (that is, the fluctuation of the special symbol for the specified number of times). Time) elapses, so when the gaming state shifts to the time reduction state, the special symbol fluctuation time that triggers the time reduction state to end and shift to the normal state elapses Executing a game while expecting a V prize by a special electric game is a basic game method during the time saving state in the present embodiment.

  Various effects are executed on the third symbol display device 81 in order to inform the player of the state of the time-saving game in an easy-to-understand manner. As will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS. 12 to 19, the jackpot game is executed, and at the end of the jackpot, a V rush mode for indicating that the gaming state is a time saving state which is an advantageous state for the player. To notify that the time saving state has been set. Then, various effects during the V rush will be described. Hereinafter, for the sake of simplicity, the time reduction state is referred to as “V rush”.

  First, with reference to FIG. 12A, a jackpot ending screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 12A is a diagram illustrating an example of the ending screen of the big hit (game). When the last round of the jackpot game is over, as shown in FIG. 12 (a), in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81, a character "V rush starts after the jackpot is over!" Is displayed. This indicates to the player that the game shifts to the V rush mode, which indicates that the time saving state is set after the end of the big hit game. Then, in the main display area Dm, a comment “V rush period 40 seconds get” of “40 seconds” is displayed in the remaining time reduction period mode 801 for indicating a period in which the time reduction state set after the end of the jackpot game is continued. Is done.

  Here, the display contents of the remaining short time mode 801 will be described. In the present embodiment, as described above, an end condition that is satisfied when the number of times of drawing a special symbol reaches a specified number of times (for example, four) is set as the end condition of the time saving state. Therefore, the time-saving state is continued until the time required for the special symbol lottery to reach the specified number of times (that is, the time obtained by adding the fluctuation times of the special symbols for the specified number of times) elapses. In the remaining time reduction mode 801, a display mode indicating a total time obtained by adding the fluctuation times of the special symbols until the end condition of the time reduction state is satisfied is displayed.

  Next, the holding status of each symbol in the state shown in FIG. 12A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12C is a schematic diagram showing the hold status of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 12A is displayed. In the present embodiment, up to four special symbols can be stored and up to one normal symbol can be stored. In FIG. 12 (c), the running special figure th0 for explaining the state of the running special symbol fluctuation, and the special figure first holding th1 to special for explaining the winning information of the special symbol stored and stored. FIG. 4th hold th4, a running general symbol fh0 for explaining the situation of the running normal symbol fluctuation, a general figure first hold fh1 for explaining the winning information of the normal symbol stored and stored, Is used to explain the situation of each symbol.

  FIG. 12C shows a state in which four special symbols with a variation pattern of 10 seconds are stored in the first special figure first hold th1 to the special figure fourth hold th4. In other words, in this period of the time saving state, 40 seconds which is a value obtained by adding the fluctuation times of four special symbol lotteries is set. Therefore, the character "40 seconds" is displayed in the remaining short time display mode 801 for indicating the duration of the gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to easily inform the user how long the V rush period will continue. it can.

  Note that, as described above, in the present embodiment, the duration of the V rush that is advantageous to the player is displayed in a specific number of seconds as shown in the remaining short time display mode 801. The remaining period may be known, and the player may be notified using an indicator or the like. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a game with a more exciting feeling to the player.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12A, the remaining short time period mode 801 is displayed in a display mode showing all of “40 seconds” calculated as the duration of the V rush. Not limited to this, at the time of notifying that the vehicle will enter the V rush, only a part (for example, 30 seconds) of the value (for example, 40 seconds) calculated as the duration of the V rush is notified. Alternatively, a value corresponding to an unreported minute (for example, 10 seconds) may be additionally reported during the execution of the V rush.

  In this case, for example, when the number of times saved is set to four, the fluctuation times of the special symbols corresponding to three special symbol holdings among the four special symbol holdings already acquired (special symbol holdings) are added. In the case of FIG. 12 (c), the value “30 seconds” which is the sum of the special figure first hold th1 to the special figure third hold th3 may be displayed when the V rush enters. With this configuration, it is possible to simplify the processing for notifying only a part of the value calculated as the duration of the V rush.

  As shown in FIG. 12 (a), in the present embodiment, the duration of the V rush is displayed by adding the fluctuation times of a plurality of special symbol lotteries executed until the time saving state ends. ing. Further, in order to make it difficult for the player to grasp the current number of special figure reservations, a display mode for indicating the number of special figure reservations is not displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. This makes it difficult for the player to understand how many times the value of the remaining short time period mode 801 displayed as the duration of the V rush is the sum of the variable times corresponding to the suspension of special figures. Further, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the fluctuation time of each special symbol lottery.

  Therefore, for example, even in the case of the pachinko machine 10 in which the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time is set differently depending on whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit or not, according to the display mode of the remaining short time mode 801, It is possible to prevent the player from knowing in advance the lottery result in the special figure reservation (whether or not winning information corresponding to the jackpot winning is included in the special figure reservation).

  In addition, for example, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time of 50 seconds is configured to be selected, and when the lottery result of the special symbol is off, the fluctuation time is 10 seconds, 20 seconds. A pachinko machine 10 configured to select any one of the fluctuation patterns of second and thirty seconds, the special figure first reservation th1 is “10 seconds”, the special figure second reservation th2 is “30 seconds”, and the special figure second reservation th2 is “30 seconds”. If the third hold th3 in FIG. 3 is “20 seconds” and the fourth hold th4 in the special figure is “10 seconds”, “50 seconds” is set as the display mode of the remaining short time mode 801 indicating the duration of the V rush. It is good to constitute so that it may be displayed. With this configuration, the period is shorter than “90 seconds” (the sum of the fluctuation times for four special figure reservations), which is the duration of the V rush, and is executed during the time reduction state. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the special symbol lottery has won a jackpot (the first special symbol lottery for a reduced time has won the jackpot and the fluctuation time is set to 50 seconds).

  That is, when displaying only a part of the period, not the entire period in which the V rush continues, a value corresponding to the fluctuation time (50 seconds) set when the big hit is won as described above is displayed. In addition to the configuration described above, for example, a display mode of “60 seconds” that makes the player think that the first time saving time is a deviation fluctuation (fluctuation time of 10 seconds) and the second time reduction is a big hit fluctuation (fluctuation time of 50 seconds). The remaining short time period mode 801 may be displayed. In other words, a value that is smaller than the value indicating the duration of the actual V rush and that is calculated when a variation time that can be selected at least for the jackpot variation and a variation time that can be selected for the outlier variation is displayed. Just do it.

  In the present embodiment, the acquired special figure reservation number is not displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The mode may be displayed. Even in this case, the display mode for indicating the number of special figure reservations is displayed in a display mode that makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize the contents, so that the number of special figure reservations currently acquired for the player can be determined. Can be difficult.

  Next, the V-rush start screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12B is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in which the jackpot ending period ends and the V rush starts. FIG. 12D shows the display screen shown in FIG. It is a figure showing each symbol situation at the time of being displayed. That is, FIG. 12B shows a display screen at the time when the special figure reservation indicated by the special figure first reservation th1 at the time of the jackpot ending starts to fluctuate. The special figure reservation that was the first reservation th1 is shifted to the running special figure th0, the special figure second reservation th2 is the special figure first reservation th1, and the special figure third reservation th3 is the special figure second reservation In the figure th2, the special figure fourth reservation th4 is a display screen in a state shifted to the special figure third reservation th3, respectively. In addition, there is no new ball in the special figure entrance port 64 since the start of the V rush, and the special figure fourth reserve th4 is empty. Then, as shown in the ordinary figure fh0 during execution, the lottery of the ordinary symbol has also started to change, and the state is in a state where the reserve is accumulated in the first figure first reserve fh1 (see FIG. 12D).

  When the V rush is started, the character "V rushing" is displayed in the main display area Dm as a game status notification mode indicating that the current time is the V rush period. A character 810 imitating a rabbit is dynamically displayed on the side of the main display area Dm as if the character 810 is trying to take something out of the bag 810a. This indicates that the symbol is usually changing.

  Then, in the center of the main display area Dm, a timer 812 for indicating the remaining period of the V rush period which is advantageous to the player is displayed. The timer 812 displays a value obtained by adding the fluctuation times of the specified number of special symbols up to the end of the time saving state. In FIG. 12B, the number of lotteries of the special symbol during the time saving state is defined as four times, and the fluctuation time of the running special figure th0 is 10 seconds, and the special figure first hold th1 is changed to the special figure third. “40.0 seconds” which is the sum of the fluctuation times up to the hold th3 is indicated in the timer 812. This timer 812 is displayed so that the value is subtracted each time the fluctuation time of the running special figure th0 is subtracted, so that the player can easily understand that the V rush period is in progress. it can.

  Further, in the sub-display area Ds, the characters "V rush end when the timer reaches 0!" Are displayed, and when the value of the subtracted timer 812 becomes 0, the V rush ends. This is notified to the player. As described above, during the V rush period, the game is executed for the purpose of causing the ball to enter the V winning opening 165. Therefore, the player can easily understand the period (remaining period) until the advantageous period ends by visually recognizing the displacement state of the value displayed on the timer 812.

  Then, in the upper left display area HR1 of the main display area Dm, the characters of "first series" are shown, and the jackpot is won from the normal state (so-called first hit), and the game state is changed after the V rush is started. It shows what number of V rush periods it is without shifting to the normal state. Further, “0pt” is displayed in the display area HR2 shown below the display area HR1, and the number of prize balls acquired in the jackpot won during the V rush period is displayed. In this way, by displaying the number of times that the V rush continues in the display area HR1 and the number of award balls obtained in the jackpot during the V rush in the display area HR2, the player can use The game history can be confirmed, and the convenience of the game can be improved.

  In the main display area Dm, a V rush fluctuation area 811 is displayed, and a symbol fluctuates (dynamic display) in each of a left area 811a, a middle area 811b, and a right area 811c of the V rush fluctuation area 811. The display mode is displayed. In this V rush fluctuation area 811, information for suggesting a game situation during the V rush to the player is displayed. FIG. 12B shows that the special figure and the ordinary figure are currently fluctuating, and the V rush fluctuation area 811 indicates that the V rush period has elapsed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 13A, a display screen in the case where a win is made per ordinary figure during a V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 13A is a diagram showing an example of a display screen in a case where a winning is made per ordinary figure during a V rush, and FIG. 13C shows the display screen shown in FIG. 13A. It is a figure showing each symbol situation in the case of. In the present embodiment, as described above, when the normal symbol lottery is won, the electric accessory 640a attached to the general winning award device 640 is opened so that the game ball can enter.

  As shown in FIG. 13 (c), during the execution, the ordinary drawing hold fh0 is indicated by “○” indicating that the winning has been achieved by the ordinary symbol lottery. At the top right of the main display area Dm, at the start of the V rush (see FIG. 12 (b)), the character 810 searching for something from the bag 810a has won the lottery of the ordinary symbol and obtained the privilege. An animation for taking out the ticket 810b on which the character "lucky" is written, which is a notification mode for indicating, is displayed. Then, in the display area HR3 at the lower right of the main display area Dm, an image schematically showing the general winning award device 640 is displayed, a normal symbol lottery is won, and the electric accessory 640a is open. Is displayed in. Further, in the sub-display area Ds, the characters "V chance to get V!" These display contents allow the player to understand that the player plays the game while aiming at the electric chew, so that the player can be guided to the correct game method. That is, the above-described display mode of the display area HR3 and the display mode of the sub-display area Ds are guidance notification modes for guiding the player to the content of the game to be executed.

  The timer 812 displayed in the center of the main display area Dm displays 30.9 seconds as its value. In the game situation of FIG. 13A, the remaining fluctuation time of the running special figure change shown in the running special figure th0 is 0.9 seconds, and the special figure first holding th1 to the special figure third holding th3. The special drawing lottery until is the period of V rush. Therefore, the total value of 30.9 seconds is displayed on the timer 812. In FIG. 13A, the special figure fourth reservation th4 that has not been stored at the start of the V rush (see FIG. 12B) is reserved. Since the special figure lottery is executed after the elapse of the period, the fluctuation time of the special figure fourth hold th4 is not added. Therefore, "-" is indicated in the special figure fourth reservation th4 (see FIG. 13C).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 13B, a display screen when a character hits during a V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 13B is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen when the game per hit is executed during the V rush, and FIG. 13D illustrates the display screen illustrated in FIG. It is a figure showing each symbol situation at the time of being displayed. In the present embodiment, as described above, when a game ball wins in the special power operation port 643 in the general winning award device 640, the V opening / closing door 65a attached to the V winning device 65 is opened. The game is executed.

  FIG. 13B is a display screen when a game ball wins in the special power operation port 643 in the general winning a prize device 640 according to the general figure shown in FIG. 13A. In FIG. 13A, the reserved ball that has been reserved in the first special figure th1 is shifted to the active special figure th0 in FIG. 13B. Then, "?" Indicating that the remaining fluctuation time is 9.9 seconds and the fluctuation is temporarily stopped is shown (see FIG. 13D). In the present embodiment, when a bonus hit game or a big hit game is executed, the subtraction of the variation time of the special symbol change being executed is interrupted (temporarily stopped) until each hit game ends. are doing.

  Then, in the main display area Dm, the subtraction display of the value of the timer 812, which has been decreasing with the fluctuation time of the special figure, is displayed until the change of the special figure (subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation) until FIG. Is interrupted and displayed at the interrupted time (that is, the time when the special power operation port 643 is won). Further, the characters "STOP !!" are displayed to indicate that the subtraction display of timer 812 is suspended. From these display contents, the player can grasp that the elapse of the V rush period is interrupted. Then, in the display area HR3, the V winning device 65 in a state where the V opening / closing door 65a is opened is schematically displayed, and is displayed together with the characters “Aim!”.

  Thereby, the player can understand that the V opening / closing door 65a of the V winning device 65 is open (the execution of the game per accessory) by visually recognizing the third symbol display device 81. it can. That is, the display mode of the display area HR3 and the display mode of the sub-display area Ds in FIG. 13B include the function of the game status notification mode for notifying the player of the game status during the V rush, and the accessory. And a guidance notification mode for guiding a player to a game to be executed during a winning game.

  In the V rush fluctuation area 811, the character “V” is stopped and displayed in the left area 811a and the right area 811c, and is displayed in a so-called reach display mode. Further, in the sub-display area Ds, the characters "Big hit if you enter V!" Are displayed, and by these display contents, the player can make the V-winning opening 165 almost finish the game ball. The game can be executed with the expectation that the game can be performed.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 11B, a general game in the pachinko machine 10, that is, a lottery of a special symbol is executed, and a game (special game) executed while expecting that the lottery result is a jackpot win. In the game game), a plurality of identification information (each symbol (third symbol) dynamically displayed on the third symbol display device 81) for indicating a lottery result is displayed in a variable manner in a plurality of columns (for example, three columns). Reach display mode (for example, a combination of the same identification information) in which a plurality of symbol columns excluding one of the symbol columns are a combination of identification information for indicating a jackpot winning. ) Is configured to execute a reach effect that increases the expectation of the jackpot winning when the stop display is performed.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game (special electric game) executed during the time saving state (V rush) is not a special symbol lottery, but is finally a V prize through various processes based on a normal symbol lottery. Since a jackpot game (V jackpot game) is executed by causing a ball to enter the mouth 165, there is a problem that it is difficult for the player to understand the specific game content of the special electric game. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the left area 811a of the V rush fluctuation area 811 and the middle area in accordance with the progress of the special electric game having the above-mentioned complicated gaming properties (various processes until the jackpot game is executed). In the area 811b and the right area 811c, the variable display mode (characters) of the variable display (dynamic display) is changed so that the effect mode is executed as if a special figure game is being executed. Make up. With such a configuration, the player can grasp each display mode displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 without grasping the specific game contents in the special electric game. It is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game to the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 14 (a), a description will be given of a V winning screen during a game per hit during a V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment. FIG. 14 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen in a case where a gaming ball wins in the V winning opening 165 during a bonus hit game during a V rush and a big hit is given, and FIG. 14) is a diagram showing each symbol situation when the display screen shown in FIG. 14A is displayed. In the present embodiment, as described above, during the V rush, the game per bonus is executed, and when a ball is won in the V winning opening 165 during the game per bonus (when a V is won), the big hit ( V jackpot game) is given.

  FIG. 14A is a display screen when a ball wins in the V winning opening 165 during the bonus game shown in FIG. 13B. As described above, the special symbol th0 is temporarily stopped with the fluctuation time remaining for 9.9 seconds because the fluctuation of the special symbol is interrupted during the per-game play. The special figure first hold th1 and the special figure second hold th2 are held within a specified number of times of the current V rush, and the variation time is set to 10 seconds. Therefore, the remaining period of the V rush period is “29.9 seconds” without changing from the time point shown in FIG. 13B (see FIG. 14C).

  If it is determined that the ball wins V and the jackpot game (V jackpot game) is executed, the V rush period is not subtracted for a predetermined period (jackpot game period). The display mode of “29.9 seconds” displayed by the timer 812 shown in FIG. 13B is displayed in the display area HR4 that is less noticeable than the timer 812. "Time stock 29.9 seconds" is displayed in the display area HR4.

  In the present embodiment, if a V prize (V jackpot game) occurs during temporary stop of a special figure, a special symbol lottery executed after the temporary stop of the temporarily stopped special figure change is executed this time. The time saving state is configured to continue until the number of time savings set in accordance with the jackpot type of the jackpot game is executed. That is, the information (the number of times of saving time) for establishing the time saving end condition is not updated (subtracted) by the interrupted special symbol change (resume special figure change) executed after the end of the big hit game.

  That is, in the state shown in FIG. 14 (c), if the number of time savings is set to four after the end of the jackpot game, the special figure hold 4 is set in the remaining period of the suspended special symbol change (9.9 seconds). The sum of the special figure fluctuation times for the individual pieces is the duration of the next V rush. With this configuration, the special figure game is performed in the normal state, and the jackpot game (V jackpot game) is performed during the V rush against the time-saving state (when the V rush enters for the first time) set by winning the jackpot. The time-saving state (when the V rush is continued) that is executed and set again after the end of the big hit game can set the V rush continuation time longer by the change time (remaining change time) of the restart special figure change, It is easier to provide a V rush advantageous to the player when the V rush continues than when the V rush enters for the first time. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play the game while further expecting the V rush to continue.

  It should be noted that another method may be used to set a time saving state in which the V rush continuation is more advantageous to the player than the V rush first entry, for example, the execution condition of the jackpot game is satisfied during the normal state. (Special drawing lottery win), the time-saving state is set after the jackpot game, and the execution condition of the jackpot game is satisfied in the time-saving state (V winning in special electric game), and after the jackpot game ends When the state is set, a different variation pattern may be selected as the variation pattern of the special symbol. Specifically, the execution condition of the jackpot game is established during the normal state (special figure lottery). The jackpot is won at the end of the jackpot game, and the execution condition of the jackpot game is established in the time reduction state (V prize in the special electric game), and the end of the jackpot game is smaller than when the time reduction state is set after the end of the jackpot game After it may be configured to more is easily selected movement pattern of long fluctuation time when time reduction state is set. With such a configuration, the variation time of the special symbol variation executed during the time saving state can be easily made longer during the V rush continuation than at the time of the first rush V rush entry, and as a result, the V rush Can be extended. Therefore, an added value can be given to the player who has continued the V rush, and the player's willingness to play can be increased.

  On the other hand, as a technical idea opposite to that of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the information (the number of times of saving) for establishing the time saving ending condition is updated (subtracted) by executing the restart special figure change. It may be configured such that the special symbol change with a longer change time is more easily performed at the time of the first rush of the V rush than at the time of the continuation of the V rush. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the V rush from continuing excessively and to execute the V rush without executing the jackpot game (V jackpot game) in the special electric game executed during the V rush. Is ended and the willingness to play is reduced.

  Further, in the case of using a configuration in which the interruption timing of the special figure change during execution greatly affects the duration of the V rush after the end of the big hit game (V big hit game) as in the present embodiment, In a state where it is possible to interrupt the special figure change (for example, in a state where the normal winning game is won), the information to indicate the remaining change time of the special figure change being executed is notified to the player. Alternatively, the player may be configured to select whether or not to suspend the special figure change. In other words, when the remaining fluctuation time of the running special figure change is longer than a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), a game for interrupting the special figure change (a special power operation port 643 during the game per ordinary drawing). A game in which a ball is won and a game per role is executed), a game aiming for a V-prize is selected, and the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation during execution is shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds). In some cases, it may be possible to select a game that does not interrupt the special figure change.

  In addition, when a jackpot game (V jackpot game) is awarded due to a V prize, the fluctuation time of the temporarily stopped special symbol and the special symbol within the specified number of times of the V rush held at that time are determined. The variation time is displayed as a preset period of the next V rush. The time is displayed in the H display area HR4 of the main display area Dm. Therefore, the player can confirm the period of stocking in the next V rush by confirming the display area HR4.

  Then, in the V rush fluctuation area 811 for indicating the gaming state during the V rush in the main display area Dm, “V” is stopped and displayed in the middle area 811b that has changed in FIG. 13B. When the hitting of the left area 811a and the right area 811c is executed, the character “V” is stopped and displayed. Therefore, the “VVV” Is displayed, indicating that the jackpot has been won. In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, the character "Congratulations !!" is displayed. With these display contents, a game ball is won in the V winning opening 165 during the hitting of the bonus, and the player is clearly shown that the big hit has been given.

  In the present embodiment, the V rush fluctuation area 811 stops and displays the left area 811a and the right area 811c when the hitting of the accessory is performed, and the middle area 811b when the V prize is hit during the hitting of the accessory. Although the stop display is configured, the present invention is not limited to this, and the left area 811a is displayed when a hit is performed per ordinary figure, the right area 811c is displayed when a bonus hit is executed, and the middle area is displayed when a V prize is won. 811b may be configured to be stopped and displayed. In this way, by establishing a staged effect triggered by the establishment of the game condition or the like, when the player visually recognizes the V fluctuation region 811, it is possible to instantaneously determine which stage the game stage is. it can. Therefore, more information can be provided to the player. Further, the character to be stopped may be any one that indicates that a big hit is given and the player can obtain the privilege, and may be displayed as “hit” or “V prize”. By configuring such that a plurality of characters indicating the jackpot is displayed, it is possible to provide a more varied effect to the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 14B, a description will be given of a screen that is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the present embodiment and is in the middle of hitting an accessory during a V rush. FIG. 14B is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when a game ball does not win in the V winning opening 165 while hitting a bonus during a V rush. In the present embodiment, when the execution is performed per accessory, the change of the special symbol that has been executed is temporarily stopped. The change of the special symbol that had been started is resumed.

  FIG. 14B is a display screen in a case where a gaming ball does not win in the V winning opening 165 from the case where the hitting of an accessory is executed in FIG. 13B. In the V fluctuation area 811 of the main display area Dm that indicates a gaming situation during a V rush, a character “x” indicating that no V prize was won is displayed in the middle area 811b. Therefore, the V rush fluctuation area 811 displays the outlying display mode of “V × V”. Thereby, the player can understand that the game ball could not be won in the V winning opening 165 during the hit of the present role.

  Then, in the main display area Dm, the character “Resume !!” is displayed to indicate that the change of the temporarily stopped special figure is resumed. Then, the display mode for indicating the remaining period of the V rush indicated by the timer 812 starts to decrease again with the resumption of the change of the special figure shown in the executing special figure th0 (see FIG. 14D). Thus, the player can easily understand that the player must execute the game with the aim of winning the V within the time indicated by the timer 812.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 15A, a description will be given of the big hit ending screen during the V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment. FIG. 15A is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen of a jackpot ending during a V rush, and FIG. 15C is a diagram illustrating each symbol when the display screen illustrated in FIG. 15A is displayed. It is a figure showing a situation. In the present embodiment, during a V rush period, when a jackpot is won or a V prize is won, the V rush period (time saving state) is set again.

  FIG. 15A is a diagram showing a big hit ending screen awarded from the V prize shown in FIG. 14A. As described above, when the jackpot is awarded during the V rush, the fluctuation time from the temporarily stopped running special figure th0 to the special figure second hold th2, which is the specified number of times of the previous V rush period, is given. Are displayed as a time stock in the display area HR4, and the character of "time stock 29.9 seconds" is displayed. Then, in the special figure reservation corresponding to the special figure third reservation th3 in FIG. 15C, that is, during the V rush before the jackpot game is executed, the special figure not added as the V rush period (time saving period). The figure fluctuating time is calculated.

  As described above, when the big hit is given during the V rush, the V rush is set again at the end of the big hit game. In the V rush period, a value is set which is the sum of the remaining time of the change of the special figure temporarily stopped during the big hit and the change time of the number of lotteries of the special figure given by the big hit type. In FIG. 15A, as shown in the display area HR4, the time stock is 29.9 seconds, that is, the remaining period of the suspended special figure change (9.9 seconds) and the time during the previous V rush. , The total number of seconds (total 20 seconds) of the special figure hold corresponding to the special figure first hold th1 and the special figure second hold th2 already displayed on the timer 812 is already displayed as the time stock. At the end of the jackpot game, this time-stocked seconds is a value that can be newly added to the V-rush period, and the special-figure hold fluctuation time corresponding to the special-figure third hold th3 (15 seconds) Is added.

  In the example shown in FIG. 15A, the ending screen of the jackpot game in which four time savings are given after the end of the jackpot game is shown. Up to the hold th2 (for two special figure reservations), the fluctuation time of the remaining two special figure reservations can be added and displayed on the timer 812 as the current V rush period, but in FIG. Since there is only one special figure hold that can be added and displayed on the timer 812 (because no special figure hold is stored in the fourth special figure hold th4), the fluctuation of the special figure hold corresponding to the third special figure hold th3 Only the time is added and displayed.

  In the present embodiment, if a jackpot is given during the V rush and the number of special figure reservations that are time-stocked at that time is less than the specified number of time savings (V rush) to be given this time (the number of time savings), An effect of adding the fluctuation time corresponding to the special figure hold stored and held until after the end of the big hit game to the value of the time stock is executed. In FIG. 15 (a), the special figure third hold is performed. The character “+15 seconds GET” is displayed in the additional period display mode 802 corresponding to the special figure suspension in which the 15-second deviation fluctuation pattern shown in th3 is executed. As a result, the player can enjoy the joy that the period advantageous to the player has been further extended. Further, in the present embodiment, the effect of adding the V rush period is executed during the ending period of the jackpot game, so that the expected period may be extended at the time of ending the jackpot game. Since the player can execute the game while holding the game, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the production during the jackpot.

  In addition, the character of "second series" indicating that the V rush has been continued twice is displayed in the display area HR1 of the main display area Dm, and the display area HR2 has been obtained with a jackpot during the V rush. "670P" which is the number of award balls is displayed. As described above, the game result is displayed at a position where the player can easily view the game, and the value is increased each time the jackpot is executed and the privilege is obtained, so that the player can be more satisfied. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, the character “Continue Vlash” indicating that the Vlash has been set again is displayed. Thereby, the player can easily understand that the V rush which is advantageous to the player is continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 15B, a description will be given of the timer addition screen during V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment. FIG. 15B is a diagram showing an example of the display contents of the timer addition screen during the V rush. As described above, in the present embodiment, the special figure holding newly won at the time of the jackpot ending executed during the V rush or the special symbol fluctuating time outside the specified number of times of the V rush before the jackpot is obtained. Perform additional production. If the number of reserved balls for the specified number of V rushes is not reserved at the end of the jackpot, the number of balls newly increased during the V rush period until the special figure reservation for the specified number of V rushes is accumulated. Perform additional production for the number of pending balls.

  FIG. 15 (b) is a diagram showing a display screen when a game progresses from the end of the jackpot shown in FIG. 15 (a) and a new game ball wins the special figure entrance 64. FIG. 15D is a diagram showing each symbol situation when the display screen shown in FIG. 15B is displayed. In the main display area Dm, a variation display mode indicating that the V rush variation area has passed the V rush period is displayed. 15B, as shown in FIG. 15D, the running special figure th0 resumes the fluctuation, the remaining fluctuation time becomes 3.2 seconds, and the special figure first reservation th1 and the special figure second reservation In th2, a hold in which 10 seconds are set as the fluctuation time is stored. Then, the special figure third hold th3 is a state in which a hold ball having a change time of 15 seconds is stored. Therefore, the timer 812 displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 displays "38.2" seconds in which these values are added.

  The state of FIG. 15A is a state in which the fluctuation time for two new special figure reservations can be added as a V rush period as described above, but only one new special figure reservation is acquired. This is the state (only the special figure third reservation th3). In this case, as shown in FIG. 15B, when a new special figure reservation is acquired next, the acquired fluctuation time of the special figure reservation is added and displayed.

  Specifically, it is shown that the special drawing fourth hold th4 has an additional prize, and a fluctuation time of 20 seconds is set in this new special figure hold. Therefore, an effect in which 20 seconds are added to the current V rush period is performed. Then, the character 810 displayed in the main display area Dm adds a V rush period, and throws a ticket 810b for indicating an extension of the advantageous period to the timer 812 for indicating the remaining period of the V rush. Is displayed. After this effect is executed, the fluctuation time of the special figure which has been additionally won this time is added to the remaining period of the V rush to the remaining period displayed on the timer 812, and the value “58.2 seconds” is added to the timer 812. Is displayed. In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, a character of “add a timer !!” is displayed to inform the user that the V rush period has been extended (added) in an easy-to-understand manner.

  Next, a V-rush end screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16A is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen indicating the end of the V rush, and FIG. 16C is a diagram illustrating the state of each symbol when the display screen illustrated in FIG. 16A is displayed. FIG. In the present embodiment, during the V rush period, when a game ball cannot be won in the V winning opening 165, or when a jackpot is not won by lottery of a special symbol, the V rush period ends, The gaming state shifts to the normal state.

  As shown in FIG. 16 (c), a display of "x" indicating that the running special figure th0f, which is the final variation of the current V rush, has stopped due to deviation has been shown. The reserved balls are stored from the first special figure reserved th1 to the third special figure reserved th3, but these reserved balls are those that are out of the specified number of times of the V rush. During the execution, the general figure fh0 is in a fluctuating state, and the general figure first reservation fh1 general figure holding ball is accumulated.

  Then, in the main display area Dm, a character “VGET × 2” indicating how many times the V rush has been continued this time is displayed. Characters are displayed to show how much you gained. As a result, the player is notified of the result of the current V-rush game in an easily understandable manner. In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, a character "V rush end" for notifying that the advantageous period has ended is displayed. According to these display modes, it is possible to inform the player that the V rush period has ended in an easy-to-understand manner.

  Next, the V rush extension screen will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16B is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen indicating that the V rush period has been extended, and FIG. 16D illustrates a case where the display screen illustrated in FIG. 16B is displayed. It is a figure showing each symbol situation in.

  In this embodiment, when the time saving state is set, a V rush effect is performed. Then, the time saving state is configured to end when the special symbol change of a predetermined number of times ends. Specifically, when the number of times of saving time is set to four times, when the special symbol change for the fourth time is stopped and displayed (determined display) after the time saving state is set, the time saving state is ended and returns to the normal state. And it is configured to shift. Here, since the special symbol lottery (fluctuation) and the normal symbol lottery (fluctuation) are executed independently, immediately before the end of the V rush period (the final fluctuation of the special symbol in the time-saving state is stopped). In the case where the game per day is executed immediately before the display (just before the display), after the time-saving state ends (after the state is shifted to the normal state), the game per accessory may be executed in some cases.

  In this case, if the V rush effect ends at the timing when the gaming state shifts from the time saving state to the normal state, a situation in which the per-accessory game starts even though the V rush effect ends. This may be confusing to the player. Therefore, in the present embodiment, if the per-figure-per-game is executed at the end timing of the V-rush period (the final fluctuation stop timing of the special symbol in the time-saving state), until the per-figure-per-game ends, Alternatively, the V-rush effect is configured to be extended until the per-bonus game executed upon the regular-per-game is completed. Thereby, the V rush effect can be executed in correspondence with the special electric game period aiming at the V jackpot game, so that an effect that can be easily understood by the player can be executed.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 16 (d), a state in which a character of “○” indicating that the player has won the game in the running figure tf0 is shown, that is, the final fluctuation of the time reduction state during the game in the figure drawing When the special symbol fluctuation is stopped (the special symbol change during execution is stopped with "x" indicating that the special symbol th0 is off), the third symbol is displayed as shown in FIG. 16 (b). In the main display area Dm of the device 81, the left area 811a, the middle area 811b, and the right area 811c of the V rush fluctuation area 811 for indicating the game situation during the V rush are displayed in a state of being changed. That is, it indicates to the player that the V rush is continuing.

  Then, the timer 812 displays “00.0 seconds” indicating that all the fluctuations of the special figure for the specified number of times in the time saving state have ended. However, above the main display area, the character "V lash is being extended" is displayed. By being displayed in this manner, the player can know that the V rush which has been finished has been extended, and obtain unexpected joy. Then, the character "Last Chance !!" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. The player can easily understand that the V rush has ended.

  In the state shown in FIG. 16B, that is, when the ball is made to enter the special power operation port 643 during the extended display of the V rush, the game per accessory is performed as in the normal V rush period. Is executed. In this case, the display screen during the game per bonus game shown in FIG. 13B is displayed, and the character “Last Chance !!” is continuously displayed in the sub display area Ds. As a result, it is possible to inform the player that the V rush period ends if no ball wins in the V winning opening 165 in the current per-game game. Then, when the ball wins in the V winning opening 165 in the bonus game with "Last Chance !!" displayed, the same V jackpot game as during the normal V rush period is executed. On the other hand, if the ball has not won the V winning opening 165, the V rush end screen shown in FIG.

  As described above with reference to FIGS. 16 (a) and 16 (b), in the present embodiment, not a transition state of a gaming state, but a series of times during which a special electric game can be executed as a V rush period. It is configured to execute a V rush effect. With this configuration, it is possible to provide an effect that is easy for the player to understand. The display timing of the end screen indicating the end of the V rush period shown in FIG. 16A is not limited to after the final change of the special symbol of the V rush period is stopped and displayed, for example, the final change of the special symbol. Is started when the remaining period becomes a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the final change of the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the display of the end screen is ended at the timing when the next special figure change is started. It may be configured as follows. In this case, the V rush period displayed on the timer 812 may be calculated as a period until the end screen of the V rush is displayed.

  With this configuration, since the end screen can be displayed using a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) after the value of the timer 812 becomes 0, the game result during the V rush period is displayed to the player. Can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner. When such a configuration is used, for example, at the time of displaying the end screen of the V rush, the lottery status of the ordinary symbols is preliminarily determined, and the general pattern is displayed within a period in which the end screen of the V rush can be displayed. If it is determined in advance that the winning game is to be executed, the extended screen shown in FIG. 16B may be displayed at the timing of displaying the V rush end screen, or may be temporarily ended. After the screen is displayed, the end screen may be switched to the extension screen when the game per day is executed. By using the configuration in which the end screen is switched to the extended screen in this way, it is possible to leave the possibility of aiming for the V jackpot game even after the end screen is displayed. The game can be performed with a feeling. In the present embodiment, the normal state is set as the gaming state when the extended screen shown in FIG. 16B is displayed. When such a configuration is used, for example, a jackpot game that is more advantageous to the player when the V jackpot game is executed during the normal state than when the V jackpot game is executed during the time reduction state is executed. It is good to be constituted so that. Accordingly, the period during which the extension screen is displayed is a period indicating that the V rush period is about to end, and indicates a period in which an advantageous jackpot game can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to cause a player who is playing a game during the V rush period to play a game having a sense of expectation until the end. In addition, in this case, the state in which the normal state is set as the game state is configured to be manageable by being divided into a special normal state in which the V rush period is extended and a normal normal state. Is set only when is set, so that a jackpot game advantageous to the player is provided, and when the V jackpot game is executed during the normal state, almost a prize ball can be obtained as a penalty. Instead, it is preferable that the disadvantageous jackpot game in which the normal state is set after the end of the jackpot game is executed. Also, without being limited to this, for example, if the display condition of the extension screen is satisfied at the time when the final change of the special symbol in the V rush period is stopped and displayed, the time saving state is not ended and the extension screen display is performed. May be configured to end the time saving state when the end condition is satisfied. Thus, the timing at which the time reduction state ends is variable, so that it is difficult for the player to understand at which timing the time reduction state ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 17A, a special screen at the end of the big hit game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 17A is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of a special screen at the time of the ending of the jackpot game, and FIG. 17C shows a case where the display screen shown in FIG. 17A is displayed. It is the figure which showed each symbol situation. In the present embodiment, as described above, when the jackpot game is executed during the V rush, the V rush period is set again based on the number of reserved balls of the special symbol and the fluctuation time after the end of the jackpot game. However, if there is a pending ball in which the variation time of 200 seconds is executed in the retaining ball at the end of the jackpot game, a heaven mode effect is executed which indicates that the jackpot is always won after a predetermined period has elapsed. .

  FIG. 17A is a display screen in a case where a hit change of 200 seconds is suspended at the end of the big hit game. As shown in FIG. 17 (c), as for the holding status of each symbol at the time of the ending of the big hit game shown in FIG. Not. Further, “↓” indicating that the running figure fh0 is fluctuating is shown, and it is shown that the figure first holding fh1 is stored. It is shown that the special figure first hold th1 and the special figure second hold th2 each store a reserved ball on which a variation pattern of 10 seconds is executed.

  And, in the special figure third holding th3, a holding ball on which the hit variation pattern of 200 seconds is executed is shown. In the present embodiment, as will be described in detail later, as a special symbol fluctuation pattern during a time reduction game (during a V rush), if the result of the hit determination is a hit, the fluctuation time is 200 seconds per hit long fluctuation (hereinafter, special May be executed. Furthermore, in the jackpots (jackpot A, jackpot B) to be won in the special symbol lottery, the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends. Therefore, until the fluctuation of the special hit stops (in the heaven mode), even if it is not possible to win the V winning opening 165 in the special electric game, the big hit game won by the special hit always makes the big hit. Since the V rush period is set again after the game is over, the special electric game can be executed with confidence. As shown in FIG. 17 (c), the special figure fourth reservation th4 indicates that there is a reserved ball, but since the big hit game is executed in the special figure third reserved th3, the special figure third reserved Since the time period is set as the V rush period set after the end of the jackpot game executed by the holding ball of th3, the fluctuation time is indicated by "-".

  Then, as shown in FIG. 17 (a), when there is a special hit in the hold at the time of the ending of the jackpot game, it is determined that there is a special hit in the hold in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. The character "entering heaven mode" is displayed. Also, a first lucky character 820a and a second lucky character 820b that are not displayed when the gaming state is the normal state or during the V rush where there is no special hit in the hold are displayed. In addition, the character “Ultra lucky !!” is displayed in the sub display area Ds. As described above, the first lucky character 820a and the second lucky character 820b, which are not displayed during the normal state or during the V rush with no special hit in the hold, are displayed. It is possible to have a sense of expectation that the game may be performed, and to continue the game while being excited. That is, the first lucky character 820a and the second lucky character 820b are in a special game situation suggestion mode for suggesting that the current game situation is a special game situation for the player.

  In the center of the main display area Dm, a special period display mode 803 written as “220 seconds” is displayed. The value displayed in the special period display mode 803 is the time until the fluctuation of winning a special hit in the special symbol lottery stops, that is, the value set as the period of the heaven mode. In other words, a special game period notification mode for indicating a special game period to be executed is provided. Therefore, the value displayed in the special period display mode 803 is a value obtained by adding the fluctuation time of 200 seconds, which is the fluctuation time per special hit, and the fluctuation time corresponding to the number of reserved balls until winning the special hit. In FIG. 17 (c), the special figure first hold th1 and the special figure second hold th2 each have a variable time of 10 seconds. Further, since the fluctuation time per special shown in the special figure third hold th3 is 200 seconds, “220 seconds” which is the sum of the fluctuation times from the special figure first hold th1 to the special figure third hold th3 is calculated. , Heaven mode is set.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the period of the time saving state (V rush) is configured to notify the player on the third symbol display device 81 at the time of the ending of the jackpot game, but the special symbol fluctuation time in the time saving gaming state Is configured to execute a fluctuation pattern in which at most 50 seconds is set as the longest fluctuation time except for 200 seconds which is a special hit fluctuation (see FIG. 25C). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 17A, when an extremely long time exceeding 200 seconds is displayed in the special period display mode 803, the player must understand that the time saving state is always set again. It is possible to execute a special electric game with peace of mind.

  In the present embodiment, at the time of the ending of the jackpot game, it is determined whether there is a special hit variation in the holding ball, and if there is a special hit, the player is notified at the time of the ending of the big hit game. However, the notification mode is not limited to this. For example, if there is a special hit in the hold, at the time of the ending of the big hit, the time until the special hit change is executed is configured to be notified, and when the change of the special hit is started, “200 seconds” is set. The player may be notified that the period has been extended. With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with the unexpected joy that the period of the V rush that seems to have ended is suddenly extended for a long period.

  Next, the screen in the heaven mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17B is a diagram showing an example of the display screen in the heaven mode, and FIG. 17D shows the state of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 17B is displayed. FIG. In the present embodiment, when there is a special hit in the holding ball at the end of the big hit, the time until the change of the special hit stops is referred to as a heaven mode, and the player can execute the special electric game with peace of mind. The period is set to be as long as possible. FIG. 17B is an example of a display screen in a case where the game progresses after shifting to the heaven mode shown in FIG. 17A.

  As shown in FIG. 17B, the display area HR1 of the main display area Dm indicates that the gaming state is the tenth V rush period after the transition from the normal state to the time saving state (V rush). The character "10th station" is displayed. Then, in a display area HR2 provided below the display area HR1, characters of "6000 pt" indicating the number of prize balls acquired by the jackpot game executed after shifting to the V rush are displayed. Above the main display area Dm, the characters “during heaven mode” are displayed to indicate that the player can instantly judge the current game state. In the same manner as during the V rush, a V rush fluctuation area 811 is displayed, and in each of the left area 811a, the middle area 811b, and the right area 811c, a lottery of a normal symbol is executed, and the special electric game progresses. Is displayed. Further, as in the V rush, an animation in which the character 810 is searching for something from the bag 810a is displayed at the upper right of the main display area Dm. This indicates that a lottery of a normal symbol is being executed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 17D, in the running special figure th0, the fluctuation of the special symbol with the remaining fluctuation time of 30 seconds is executed. In the running special figure th0, in the game situation shown in FIG. 17C, the reserved ball in which the special hit shown in the special figure third reserved th3 is started to change. Therefore, the remaining period of the heaven mode executed in FIG. 17B is 30 seconds, which is the remaining fluctuation time of this executing special figure th0. In addition, although the reserved ball exists in the special figure first hold th1 to the special figure third hold th3, it is a special figure lottery executed outside the heaven mode being executed. , And the fluctuation time is indicated by "-". In addition, “↓” indicating that the general drawing lottery is being executed is shown in the general drawing fh0 during execution, and the reserved ball is also stored in the general drawing first reservation fh1.

  The timer 812 in the main display area Dm is displayed so as to be decremented in accordance with the remaining period of the fluctuation of the running special figure th0. As shown in FIG. 17D, since the remaining fluctuation time of the running special figure th0 is th0, the character “30.0 seconds” is displayed on the timer 812 (see FIG. 17B). . In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, a character “Timer 0 may be good” is displayed. Suggests. That is, in the sub-display area Ds, a suggested effect notification mode for suggesting a future game situation to the player is displayed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a part of the display mode in the heaven mode, which is a period until a special symbol is won and the symbol is stopped, is configured to be the same as the V rush mode. With such a configuration, it is a basic game method that is advantageous to the player to execute the special electric game and make the game prize in the V winning opening 165 during the heaven mode as in the V rush. It is possible to guide the player to something. Therefore, an easy-to-understand game can be provided to the player.

  Note that the display mode is not limited to this, and an effect dedicated to the heaven mode may be executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a variety of effect types, and it is possible to further enhance the effect.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 18A, a chance effect screen in which a third character is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 18 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of a chance effect during the hitting of an accessory, and FIG. 18 (c) is a diagram showing each display when the display screen shown in FIG. 18 (a) is displayed. It is a figure showing a symbol situation. In the present embodiment, as described above, when a normal symbol is won and a game ball is awarded in the special power operation port 643, a bonus hit is executed, and a V winning in the V winning device 65 is performed during execution of the bonus. When a game ball wins in the mouth 165, a big hit is given. In FIG. 18 (a), a timing at which a game ball is likely to be awarded in the V winning opening 165 while a character is being hit is notified to a player as a chance effect from the gaming situation shown in FIG. 13 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 18 (c), the pending status of each symbol in FIG. 18 (a) indicates that the running special figure th0 is hitting a character, so that the change is temporarily stopped. It is shown. Each of the reserved balls from the first special figure holding th1 to the second special figure second holding th2 shows a change of 10 seconds. In addition, the special figure third hold th3 is a special figure change executed outside the period of the currently executed V rush, and thus the change time indicates “−”. Furthermore, the special figure fourth reservation th4 indicates that the reservation is not reserved. In addition, “普” indicating that a winning has been achieved in the general drawing lottery is shown in the running general drawing fh0.

  FIG. 18A is a notification screen for notifying a player that a game ball is likely to win in the V winning opening 165 during the hitting of the role illustrated in FIG. 13B. In the present embodiment, as described above, the gaming balls that have won the V prize device 65 during the hitting of the accessory are stored in the storage valve 66a. The storage valve 66a is configured to be open such that the game ball flows down the third flow path 65d (see FIG. 7) for 1.5 seconds out of the 3 second period. The first movable valve 66b disposed above the V winning opening 165 causes the gaming ball to flow to the V winning opening 165 for 0.5 second within 5.5 seconds regardless of the playing state. It is configured to be in an open state in which it can flow down a road (see FIG. 27A).

  In other words, in order for the game ball to win in the V winning opening 165, the game ball flowing down the third flow path 65d after the storage valve 66a is opened while the first movable valve 66b is set in the open state. It is necessary to make the ball enter the V winning hole 165. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether the first movable valve 66b is in the open state within 2 seconds after the storage valve 66a is set to the open state, and the first movable valve 66b is determined to be in the open state within 2 seconds. If it is determined that the V rush change is made, as shown in FIG. 18A, the emphasis mode 811z is displayed around the V rush fluctuation area 811 displayed in the main display area Dm. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a character "V prize great chance!" Is displayed. In other words, the emphasis mode 811z is a timing notification mode for notifying the player of a timing at which the player easily transitions to an advantageous game state. With such a configuration, the player can understand the timing at which the V winning is easy, and the game is easily executed.

  In the present embodiment, the timing at which the V winning is easy is notified by the highlighting mode 811z and the comment of the sub display area Ds. However, the present invention is not limited to this. You may. With this configuration, a more kind game can be provided to the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 18B, a general-purpose stop screen during the V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 18B is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen when the lottery of the ordinary symbols is stopped during the V rush, and FIG. 18D is a view illustrating the display screen illustrated in FIG. It is a figure showing each symbol situation when is displayed. In the present embodiment, as described above, during the V rush (time saving state), it is possible to win a lottery of a normal symbol, cause a special ball to win a special ball in the special power operation port 643, and execute a special power game aiming for a V winning. This is the most advantageous game method for the player. Therefore, during the V rush, when the lottery of the ordinary symbols is not executed, the special symbol game cannot be executed, and the effect of prompting the firing of the game ball is executed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As shown in FIG. 18D, the holding status of each symbol during the V rush in FIG. 18A indicates that the running special figure th0 is changing, and the remaining change time is 2 seconds. ing. In addition, the reserved ball for which the deviation is executed for 10 seconds is stored in each of the special figure first reservation th1 and the special figure second reservation th2. The special figure third reservation th3 and the special figure fourth reservation th4 are in a state where the reserved ball is not stored. Therefore, the remaining period of the V rush shown in FIG. 18B is 22.2 seconds, which is the sum of the remaining fluctuation time of the running special figure th0 and the fluctuation time of the special figure first reservation th1 and the special figure second reservation th2. It is. In addition, “−” indicating that the general drawing lottery is not executed is shown in the running general drawing fh0. Further, normally, the reserved ball is not stored in the first reserved fh1.

  As shown in FIG. 18D, during the V rush, when the normal symbol lottery is not executed and stopped, the electric accessory 640a attached to the normal winning device 640 is not set to the open state. It is impossible to allow a game ball to enter the special power operation port 643. In other words, it is not possible to execute the special electric game, which is the basic game method during the V rush, and the special figure lottery is executed. Ends. Further, in the present embodiment, in order to cause the special figure entrance 64 or the normal prize device 640 to enter a game ball, a left-hit game in which the game ball is fired at the left area of the game board 13 is executed. It is necessary that, when a left-handed game is executed, 100% of the game balls pass through the through gate 67, which is a trigger for a normal symbol lottery. That is, the game situation in which the special figure lottery shown in FIG. 18B is being executed but the general figure lottery is not being executed is a situation in which the game ball is not fired. Therefore, in the third symbol display device 81, an effect for prompting the player to fire the game ball is executed.

  In the main display area Dm, the characters "V rushing" are displayed, and further, the timer 812 displays "22.2 seconds" indicating the remaining period of the V rush as if it had been subtracted over time. are doing. From these display contents, the player can easily understand that the V rush game is being executed and the remaining period is decreasing. In addition, in the V fluctuation region 811 in which the fluctuation display has been performed when the lottery of the ordinary symbol is executed, “strike” is performed in the left region 811a, “tsu” is displayed in the middle region 811b, and “V” is displayed in the right region. The character "hit" along with "te" is indicated to the player by the animation guided by the character 810. That is, the V fluctuation area 811 is a warning display mode for indicating that the lottery of the ordinary symbols is not executed, and for indicating to the player that the V rush is finished.

  In addition, characters "Please start a game" are displayed in the sub display area Ds. By these display contents, it is possible to inform the player that the normal symbol lottery is not executed and the special electric game cannot be executed, and since the special figure lottery is executed, It is possible to warn that the V rush period, which is an advantageous period, will end. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the advantageous period from ending unexpectedly for the player.

  Note that the above-described effect of prompting the launch of the game ball is not limited to this display mode. In other words, it is only necessary to inform the player that the normal symbol lottery has not been executed, and characters indicating a danger such as "WARNING" may be displayed on the entire third symbol display device 81. With such a configuration, it is possible to further warn that the player may lose.

  Next, the special figure stop screen during the V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19A is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when a special symbol lottery is not executed during the V rush, and FIG. 19C is a view showing the display screen shown in FIG. 19A. It is a figure showing each symbol situation when is displayed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the time reduction state (V rush) continues until the lottery of the special symbol is executed for the specified number of times, and the value obtained by adding the fluctuation time for the specified number of times is defined as the V rush. The period is configured to notify the player. Therefore, when the special symbol lottery is not executed, the specified period is not determined, and an effect is performed to make the player expect the V rush to last.

  As shown in FIG. 19 (c), in the holding status of each holding symbol in the game status shown in FIG. 19 (a), the running special figure th0 is indicated by "-" indicating that the special symbol lottery is not being executed. It is shown. In addition, the special figure first reservation th1 to the special figure fourth reservation th4 indicate that the reserved ball is not stored. On the other hand, “普” indicating that the general drawing lottery is being executed is shown in the general drawing fh0 during execution, and the general drawing first hold fh1 is also stored.

  As described above, when the special figure lottery is not executed during the V rush, the special electric game can be executed until the special symbol lottery for the specified number of times is executed. As shown in FIG. 19A, the characters “??? second” indicating that the special symbol lottery has not been executed and the specified period has not been reached are displayed on the timer 812. In the V fluctuation area 811, a fluctuation display of “↓↓↓” indicating that a lottery of a normal symbol is being executed is displayed. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a notification mode for indicating that the specified period of the V rush has not been reached, that is, "How long does it last?" Is displayed. With these display contents, the player can execute the special electric game because the lottery of the special symbol is not executed and the remaining period of the V rush is not reduced because the lottery of the normal symbol is executed. I can understand that With such a configuration, it is possible to execute a game while the player is excited to see how long a game state advantageous to the player, in which the special electric game can be executed without the elapse of the V rush, continues. In other words, the display content shown in FIG. 19A is a suggestion notification content for indicating that the player is in an advantageous state.

  In addition, as described above, when the reserved ball of the special symbol disappears during the V rush period, it is notified that the period of the V rush has ended once, and then the game ball is inputted to the special figure entrance 64. May be executed when the ball has entered the ball. With such a configuration, the player can think that the V rush period, which seems to have ended, is restored, and can obtain unexpected joy.

  Next, a lucky time screen during a V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19B is a diagram showing an example of a lucky time screen during the V rush, and FIG. 19D shows the state of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 19B is displayed. FIG. In the present embodiment, as described above, when the V jackpot game is executed during the time saving state (V rush), the remaining time of the special symbol change during suspension and the number of time savings set after the V jackpot game ends (4 The special symbol fluctuation time for the number of times) is set as a time reduction period (V rush period) after the end of the V jackpot game.

  Therefore, the longer the remaining period of the special symbol change suspended at the time of executing the V jackpot game, the longer the next V rush period can be. However, on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, the V rush period is displayed using the display mode of the timer 812 (subtraction display), but the remaining period of the special symbol change being executed is not displayed. Each time the special symbol change is interrupted, the player needs to play the game while expecting the remaining period of the special symbol change being executed to be long.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the length of the remaining period of the special symbol change being executed satisfies a predetermined condition, an effect for notifying the player to that effect is executed. Specifically, when the remaining time of the special symbol change is longer than a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), or the remaining time of the special symbol change being executed is longer than the changing time of the next special symbol change. Is long, the lucky time effect can be executed. With this configuration, when the game per V is executed during the lucky time, the next V rush period can be lengthened, so that the player can actively play the game. Can be.

  When the lucky time effect is executed, the characters "Lucky time entry" are displayed in the main display area Dm, and "10 seconds" is displayed as the period display mode 851. On the display screen shown in FIG. 19B, a lucky time effect indicating that the remaining period of the special symbol change being executed is longer than the change time of the next special symbol change is executed. As shown in FIG. 19D, when the remaining period of the special symbol change being executed is 20 seconds and the change time of the next special symbol change is 10 seconds, the difference is 10 Seconds are displayed in the period display mode 851. The number of seconds displayed in the period display mode 851 is subtracted and displayed in accordance with the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation, and when 0 second is displayed, the lucky time effect ends.

  Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment of “a chance of hitting an accessory during a lucky time” is displayed as a guide display mode for guiding a bonus during a lucky time to a player. Thereby, the player can be motivated to play the game during the lucky time. Although illustration is omitted in detail, in the present embodiment, when the remaining period of the special symbol change being executed is less than a predetermined time (for example, less than 5 seconds), an effect that can notify the player to that effect. It is configured to be able to perform unlucky effects. That is, when the V jackpot game is executed while the unlucky effect is being executed, the player can be made aware that the V rush period set next is likely to be short. .

  By executing the unlucky effect in this way, the player can actively perform the special electric game during the unlucky effect in order to execute the V jackpot game during the V rush period, Will be subtracted, but it will be possible to select whether to aim for a longer V rush period after the end of the V jackpot game without performing the special electric game until the end of the unlucky production, Can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the lucky time effect and the unlucky effect described above are configured to be executed when the fluctuation time of the special symbol satisfies a predetermined condition. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In this case, it may be configured to determine whether or not to perform the effect by lottery, or to determine whether or not to perform the effect based on the operation result on the operation means (frame button 22) operable by the player. May be configured. Furthermore, the execution frequency of the effect may be varied according to the length of the period that can be displayed as a lucky time effect or an unlucky effect. If the remaining period of the special symbol fluctuation during execution exceeds 50 seconds, the effect is high. You may comprise so that a lucky time effect may be performed with a probability.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 19B, during the period in which the lucky time effect is being executed, a period that is advantageous to the player is notified to the player using the period display mode 851. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only the display mode indicating the lucky time may be displayed without displaying the period display mode 851. This makes it difficult for the player to grasp the degree of advantage, so that it is possible to provide a pleasure of predicting the length of the V rush period set after the end of the V jackpot game.

  Further, as a condition for executing the lucky time effect or the unlucky effect, the remaining period of the V rush period, that is, the total period of the special symbol change until the time saving state ends, is a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) or more. It may be provided as an execution condition, or the lucky time effect or the unlucky effect may not be executed during the final change of the special symbol during the V rush period.

<Transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 20, transition contents of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 20 is a transition diagram showing a flow of a game state set by the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment.

  In the first embodiment, the gaming state includes a normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state of ordinary symbol), a time reduction state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of ordinary symbol), and 2 It is configured to be able to set three game states, regardless of the game state, the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, and during that time saving state, the time saving end condition (for example, the special symbol lottery The normal state is set when a predetermined number of times (four times) are satisfied and a condition that is satisfied) is satisfied.

  First, the case where the normal state is set as the gaming state will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a state in which the processing when it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 10) is operated in the initial state (the start-up processing of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 54)) is executed. In), the normal state is set as the game state. This normal state is a game state in which it is difficult to win a ball in the general winning prize device 640 since it is a low probability state of a normal symbol (harder to win than a high probability state of a normal symbol). A left-handed game for letting the ball enter the mouth 64 is executed.

  In the normal state, if a special pattern (special figure) lottery (special figure lottery) is won, the big hit type is set to either big hit A or big hit B, and the big hit game is executed. You. Although a detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. 24, in the present embodiment, as a jackpot type, "Spot jackpot A (4R (round), four times shortened four times) at a rate of 99% of the jackpot in the special figure lottery ) "Is set, and" big hit B (4R (round), 15 time savings) "is set as the big hit type at a rate of 1%.

  In other words, if a jackpot is won during the normal state, the time-saving state is set after the jackpot game is completed, and the end conditions of the time-saving state differ according to the set jackpot type. ing. More specifically, the jackpot type (small jackpot A) that is easy to be set is set to be shorter than the hard jackpot type (small jackpot B) that is hard to be set. With such a configuration, in addition to the game aiming to win a jackpot by special drawing lottery, a jackpot type that is set to the player (a jackpot B ) Can be made to play while expecting to be.

  Although detailed description is omitted, a dynamic display (effect display) for indicating the lottery result of the special figure lottery is executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 while the normal state is set. Then, by grasping the dynamic display mode (effect mode) executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, the player can predict the result of the special figure lottery being executed. . Also, as described above, during the normal state, the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, so that it is difficult for the ball to win in the ordinary winning prize device 640 by the ordinary symbol lottery (the ordinary symbol lottery). On the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, the effect display for suggesting the result of the general figure lottery to the player is not executed, or the dynamic display mode for suggesting the result of the special figure lottery, It is configured to execute in an inconspicuous display mode.

  With this configuration, during the period in which the normal state is set, the effect performed based on the result of the special figure lottery is given to the player, rather than the effect performed based on the result of the general figure lottery. Since it is possible to gaze, during the normal state, it is possible to visually recognize that a game (special figure game) mainly performing a special figure lottery is executed. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

  Then, when the time-saving state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of ordinary symbol) is set after the end of the jackpot game, the general electricity winning device 640 is easily opened based on the general figure lottery, and A game (special electric game) aiming at a jackpot game (V jackpot game) in the per-character game executed by letting a ball into the special power operation port 643 based on the lottery is a big hit game based on the special figure lottery. It is configured to be a game more advantageous to the player than a game (special figure game) aimed at (special figure jackpot game).

  In this way, by changing the execution timing of the jackpot to be aimed at by the player according to the set game state, it is possible to cause the player to execute a different game according to the set game state. Can be prevented from getting tired of the game early. In this embodiment, during the normal state, the special figure game aiming at the special figure lottery is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the special figure game aiming at the general figure lottery. By configuring the game to be more advantageous to the player than the special figure game aiming for the special figure lottery, the content of the game to be executed by the player differs according to the game state, but it is not limited to this In addition, a plurality of special symbol types are provided (first special symbol, second special symbol), and the type of the special symbol corresponding to the special symbol lottery to be executed by the player is made different according to the set game state. For example, when the normal state is set, the first special figure game aiming at the special figure lottery of the first special symbol is the second special figure game aiming at the special figure lottery of the second special symbol To be more advantageous to the player than the normal state (for example, When the short state is set, the second special figure game aiming at the special figure lottery of the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the first special figure game aiming at the special figure lottery of the first special symbol. It may be configured as follows.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 2, the game board is configured to execute the same game method (left-handed game) both when executing the special figure game and when executing the special electric game. By configuring 13, the player is not inconvenienced to change the game method every time the game state changes, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game is performed according to the set game state. The method may be made different. For example, during a normal state, a left-handed game (a game aiming at a game area (left area) formed on the left side of the variable display device unit 80) is executed. May be configured to execute a right-handed game (game aimed at a game area (right area) formed on the right side of the variable display device unit 80). In this case, a special figure entrance 64 is provided as a configuration for executing a special figure game in the left area, and a through gate 67, a general winning award device 640, V The winning device 65 may be provided, and a variable winning device 650 that is opened as a jackpot game may be provided in a game region (a lower region) in which a ball flowing down the left region or the right region can reach.

  With this configuration, the game method (left-handed game, right-handed game) can be made different depending on the game content (special figure game, special electric game) mainly executed by the player. Thus, it is possible to provide a pleasure of changing a game method.

  In this way, when the game method (left-handed game, right-handed game) is made different according to the game content (special figure game, special electric game) mainly executed by the player, the game is executed for the player. It is configured to execute guidance information (for example, a display mode of “right-handed” displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81) for guiding a game method to be performed (left-handed game, right-handed game). Good.

  Furthermore, when the game method (left-handed game, right-handed game) is made different according to the game content (special figure game, special electric game) mainly performed by the player, the ball flowing down the left area or the right area reaches By providing the variable winning device 650 that is opened as a jackpot game in a possible game area (lower area), even when the jackpot game is executed based on the special figure game, the jackpot game is executed based on the special electric game. Also in this case, it is not necessary to change the game method when the big hit game is executed, and the game can be smoothly performed.

  Returning to FIG. 20, the description will be continued. In the present embodiment, it is configured such that the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied based on the number of times of the change of the special symbol (number of times of the special figure lottery). In addition, the lottery of ordinary symbols (general figure lottery) is configured to be independently executable without being involved in the lottery of special symbols (special figure lottery). In other words, the execution timing of the regular figure lottery is established regardless of the situation of the special figure lottery.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, when a ball wins in the special power operation port 643 provided in the special symbol change (special figure change) general electric prize winning device 640 and a game per accessory is executed, the special executed is executed. The design change is interrupted, and the special symbol change that has been interrupted is restarted when the bonus game has ended. In addition, when the ball wins the V winning opening 165 during the bonus game and the jackpot game (V jackpot game) is executed, the interrupted special symbol change is restarted when the jackpot game ends. It is configured to be.

  In the present embodiment configured as described above, when the time-saving state is set, until the time-saving state end condition (time-saving end condition) that can be satisfied based on the special figure lottery is satisfied, Until the special figure lottery (for example, four times) is executed, a special electric game aiming at a large number of V jackpot games is executed. As a specific example, when four special figure lotteries are set as the time saving end condition, a period until the fourth special figure lottery ends, that is, for each of the four special figure lotteries, If the fluctuation time of 10 seconds is set, the time saving state set this time will continue until 40 seconds later (the timing when the fourth special drawing lottery ends).

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 12A, if there are four special figure reservations at the end of the jackpot game, “40 seconds” is set as the period until the time saving state set after the jackpot game ends. Is displayed.

  Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the fluctuation time of the running special figure fluctuation is not subtracted during the execution of the bonus hit game or the jackpot game (V jackpot game) during the time reduction state. Therefore, the period in which the time saving state is actually set is the sum of the special figure fluctuation time until the time reduction end condition is satisfied and the suspension time in which the subtraction of the special figure fluctuation time is suspended. Become. As described above, the interruption time during which the subtraction of the special figure change is interrupted corresponds to the period in which the winning game (game per item, big hit game) is executed, and the execution period of the winning game is the game period of the player. Since the length of the period varies depending on the content, the interruption time cannot be accurately notified to the player.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the remaining time (the special figure fluctuation time) until the time saving state ends is displayed (see FIG. 13A), and when the subtraction of the special figure fluctuation time is interrupted, the subtraction is performed. Until the time is resumed, a display mode (see FIG. 13B) is displayed to indicate that the subtraction display of the remaining time (special figure fluctuation time) until the time saving state ends is interrupted. are doing.

  With this configuration, the display contents of the display mode (remaining short time display mode 801 in FIG. 12A) indicating the period until the time saving state displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 ends. And the period until the time saving state is actually ended can be provided without any difference, and a game that is easy for the player to understand can be provided.

  The normal symbol lottery (normal symbol lottery) executed during the time-saving state (normal symbol high probability state) is configured so that the winning probability is about 33%, and the normal symbol lottery (low symbol probability of the normal symbol) is performed. It is configured such that it is easier to win per regular figure than the winning probability (1%) of ordinary symbol lottery (regular figure lottery) executed during (state). Further, in the present embodiment, a variation time of 3 seconds is set as a variation pattern of a normal symbol regardless of the set game state. Therefore, by continuously executing the left-handed game during the time-saving state, the game is executed once every 10 seconds and the general winning award device 640 is opened.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 3 to FIG. 5, when a game per a general figure is executed during the time saving state, the ball that has won the general electric winning device 640 easily enters the special power operating port 643 ( It is configured so that it is easier to enter the ball than the per-figure-period game executed during the normal state), and the per-proxy-peripheral game can be executed approximately the same number of times as the per-figure-per-game execution. . Then, as described above with reference to FIGS. 6 to 9, the probability that the ball wins the V winning opening 165 and the jackpot game (V jackpot game) is executed in one time is about 1/11, in one role game. It is configured to be.

  That is, in the first embodiment, during the time-saving state, a game per accessory which is a chance to make the ball win the V winning opening 165 is executed at a rate of about once every 10 seconds. . If the game result of the bonus per game is that the ball can be won in the V winning opening 165 (in the case of V winning), after the bonus per game, the jackpot game (the jackpot type of the jackpot C is the jackpot game (10R ( Round) and four times) are executed, and the time saving state is set again after the end of the big hit game. That is, if a V jackpot game (a jackpot game executed by causing a ball to enter the V winning opening 165) is executed during the time saving state, the time saving state is always set after the end of the jackpot game. are doing. Therefore, once the time-saving state is set, the time-saving state does not end as long as the jackpot game is continuously executed in the special electric game, so that it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and execute the special electric game. it can.

  In addition, as will be described in detail later, if a jackpot game is executed by a special jackpot game, the suspended special figure change will be resumed after the jackpot game ends. The number of special figure lotteries (special figure fluctuations) for establishing the time saving end condition is not updated by the figure fluctuation. In other words, the configuration is such that the time saving state is continued until the special figure change is executed four times after the special figure change after the restart is completed.

  That is, when the remaining time of the special figure change is a long time (for example, 30 seconds), the game per accessory is executed, and when the V jackpot game is executed by the per game, the setting is performed after the jackpot game. When the remaining time period of the special figure change is a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds) while the period of the reduced time saving state is “30 seconds + four times the special figure change”, the game per accessory is performed. Is executed, and the V jackpot game is executed by the accessory hit game, the period of the time saving state set after the jackpot game is “0.5 seconds + four special figure fluctuations”.

  With such a configuration, in the case of executing a special electric game aiming at a V jackpot game during a time-saving state in which the termination condition is satisfied based on the elapsed time, it is advantageous to the player that the V jackpot game is executed earlier. Rather, it is possible for the player to be more advantageous if the V jackpot game is executed in a state where the remaining period of the running special figure change is long. Therefore, even if the V jackpot game is not executed after a predetermined period has elapsed since the time saving state was set, it is possible to cause the player to continue playing while giving a sense of expectation. It becomes possible.

  In the present embodiment, the number of time savings (the number of times of the special figure fluctuation updated to satisfy the time saving end condition) is not updated (subtracted) based on the special figure fluctuation restarted after the end of the big hit. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of time savings (the number of changes in the special figure updated to satisfy the time saving ending condition) may be updated based on the special figure fluctuation restarted after the end of the big hit. . Even in the case of such a configuration, the longer the special figure fluctuation period (remaining fluctuation period) after resumption, the more advantageous the player can be, so that a predetermined period has elapsed since the time reduction state was set. Even when the V jackpot game is not executed in this state, it is possible to cause the player to continue playing the game while having a sense of expectation.

  Returning to FIG. 20, the description will be continued. In the case where the game result of the per-accessory game executed during the time reduction state does not allow the ball to enter the V winning opening 165 (in the case of the non-V winning), the special electric game is repeated until the time reduction state ends. Is executed.

  In addition, when the special symbol change (special figure change) ends in the time saving state, it is determined whether the time saving end condition is satisfied, that is, whether the special figure change for the number of times set as the time save end condition has ended. When the time saving end condition is satisfied, the game state shifts to the normal state, and the special figure game is executed. On the other hand, when the time saving end condition is not satisfied, the next special figure change is executed. Although a detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. 25 (c), in the present embodiment, the result of the special figure lottery is a win (1/100) as a fluctuation pattern of the special figure lottery executed during the time saving state. In the case of, a fluctuation pattern in which a fluctuation time of 50 seconds or 200 seconds is set is selected, and in the case where the result of the special figure lottery is out (99/100), the fluctuation time of 10 seconds to 50 seconds is set. It is configured such that a variation pattern to be performed is selected. In other words, the special figure lottery executed until the time saving end condition is satisfied (or four special figure lotteries executed after the end of the jackpot game if four time savings are set as the time saving end condition). In this case, it is possible to make it easier to continue the time-saving state for a longer period. Furthermore, when a special jackpot is won during the time reduction state, the time reduction state is set again after the end of the big hit game. Therefore, it is possible to provide a player with an added value in the case of winning a jackpot by a special figure lottery within a limited period in which the time saving state is set, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol acquired at the end of the big hit game has the big hit information in which the fluctuation time of 200 seconds is set in the hold storage, a special notification for notifying the fact is provided. An effect is configured to be performed (see FIG. 17A).

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, as the end conditions of the time-saving state set after the end of the jackpot game, a time-saving end condition that is easy to be satisfied (four times) and a time-saving end condition that is difficult to be satisfied (15 times) can be set. It is composed. Here, if 15 time savings are set, the time saving state will continue until the fifteenth special figure lottery executed during the time saving state is completed, and accordingly, the increase in the number of times of the special figure change will occur. As a result, the probability of winning a jackpot during the time reduction state can be increased, and the time reduction period can be further extended by the long-term fluctuation pattern set at the time of winning the jackpot.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 2, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment causes the same game method (left-handed game) to be played all in the normal state, in the time saving state, and in the big hit game. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress occurrence of a situation in which the special figure lottery is not executed during the time saving state. In the present embodiment, the change pattern of the special figure change is configured to be selected regardless of the number of special symbol reservations (special figure reservation number). However, the present invention is not limited to this. If it is set, it is preferable to configure so that the fluctuation pattern in which the longer fluctuation time is set becomes easier to select as the number of reserved special figures increases.

  With this configuration, at the stage before the time saving state is set (for example, during a jackpot game), it is possible to enthusiastically play a game to reach the upper limit (four) of the special figure reservation. . Further, it is possible to suppress occurrence of a state in which the special figure change is not executed during the time reduction state (a state in which the time reduction termination condition is not satisfied).

  Further, although detailed description is omitted, in the present embodiment, during the period in which the time saving state is set, that is, during the period until the predetermined number of special symbol changes (special symbol changes) is completed, the normal symbols are not changed. The lottery is executed, and a special electric game in which a ball is won in the V winning port 165 in the V winning device 65 is finally executed. The V prize device 65 is configured so that a ball can easily be won during a game per role, and is configured such that a fluctuation time of a special figure change is not subtracted (interrupted) during a game per role. Furthermore, the game per accessory has a plurality of termination conditions, and more specifically, is established when the number of balls that have won the V prize device 65 during the game per accessory reaches a predetermined number (three). A first ending condition (ball prize ending condition), and a second ending condition (time lapse ending condition) that is satisfied when an elapsed period from the execution of the bonus per game reaches a predetermined period (3 seconds). , And when one of the first end condition or the second end condition is satisfied, the game per accessory is ended. Also, during the fluctuation period of the ordinary symbol and during the execution period of the game per ordinary symbol, a lottery of a new ordinary symbol (nominal drawing lottery) is not executed, but the ball is moved to the special power operation port 643 during the game per ordinary symbol. During the period in which the game has been won and the bonus-per-game is being executed, a new general-purpose drawing can be executed.

  In the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above, by executing the per-accessory game during the time saving state, the special electric game is executed with the aim of executing more per-accessory games while interrupting the special figure change. Done. However, a period during which a normal symbol fluctuates until the result of the normal symbol lottery is stopped and displayed, or a period during which a ball cannot be awarded to the general electric winning device 640 during the execution period of the game per ordinary symbol (the electric accessory 640a The period in which the per-accessory game cannot be executed, such as a period in which the player is in the closed state, is a period in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol in the time-saving state is wastefully subtracted. It will be a disadvantageous short working period.

  Therefore, for example, as a variation pattern of the ordinary symbol set during the time saving state, a general figure short variation pattern (variation time of 3 seconds) and a general figure length variation pattern (variation time of 15 seconds) having a long variation time are used. In the case where is configured to be selectable, a game is played while expecting that the normal figure short fluctuation pattern is selected so that the above-mentioned disadvantageous short time period is shortened. Further, in the case of using a configuration in which the special figure change is interrupted during the execution period of the per-accessory game (the process of subtracting the change time of the special figure change) is used, as in the present embodiment, the disadvantageous time reduction By increasing the period in which the period and the suspension period of the special figure change overlap, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation time of the special symbol from being subtracted during the disadvantageous short time period.

  Therefore, in order to shorten the disadvantageous shortened time period during the time reduction state, when the game per accessory is executed during the time reduction state, the remaining time of the ordinary figure change during execution is determined, and the remaining time is determined by a predetermined time (for example, If the time is longer than (10 seconds), it may be configured to execute an effect that promotes that it is better not to end the game per character by the ball prize but to elapse after a lapse of time. With such a configuration, it is possible to lengthen the execution period of the game per accessory, and thereby shorten the disadvantageous short time period.

<Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10 in First Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  The main control device 110 has an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built therein. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit to instruct the sub-control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  In the main control device 110, a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81 are set. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, a counter and the like provided in RAM 203 of main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a counter and the like provided in RAM 203 of main controller 110. These counters and the like are used for special symbol lottery, ordinary symbol lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 37, display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and display setting on the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform such operations.

  In order to select the special symbol lottery and the display setting of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol big hit type are selected. , A stop type selection counter (not shown) used to select an outage stop type in a special symbol, and a second type used to set an initial value of the first random number counter C1. One initial value random number counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used.

  A random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the ordinary symbols, a second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4, and the variation used for selecting the variation pattern of the ordinary symbol. The type counter CS1 is used. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value each time the counter is updated.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main processing (see FIG. 55). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a corresponding to a ball entering the special figure entrance 64 consisting of four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 are stored in the storage area 203a in accordance with the timing of entering the special figure entrance 64. Each is stored.

  When the special symbol starting condition (fluctuation condition) is satisfied, the various values stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a are shifted to the special symbol execution area, and the various stored values are shifted. A special symbol change based on the value is started.

  In the present embodiment, one type of special symbol is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more types of special symbols may be provided. In this case, for example, in order to establish a lottery condition of one special symbol type (for example, the first special symbol) based on the ball entry into the special symbol entrance 64 (first entrance), The above-described values are stored in the 1 special symbol holding ball storage area, and the ball enters a ball entrance (for example, the second ball entrance) different from the special figure entrance 64 (first entrance). In order to establish the lottery condition of another special symbol type (for example, the second special symbol) based on the above, the above-described values are stored in the second special symbol holding ball storage area different from the first special symbol holding ball storage area. What is necessary is just to comprise so that it may store.

  When the start condition (variation condition) of the first special symbol or the start condition (variation condition) of the second special symbol is satisfied, the reserved first area of the special symbol holding ball storage area of the corresponding special symbol type. May be shifted to the special symbol execution area, and a special symbol change based on the various values stored may be started. With this configuration, even with the pachinko machine 10 using a plurality of special symbol types, it is possible to smoothly execute each of the special symbol changes.

  Furthermore, if the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of special symbol types (first special symbol, second special symbol), the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol are executed simultaneously (in parallel). In this case, each special symbol holding ball storage area (first special symbol holding ball storage area, second special symbol holding ball storage area) may have a special symbol execution area. good. Thereby, when the starting condition of each special symbol is satisfied, the next special symbol change can be promptly executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the lottery result of the special symbol is configured to be only a big hit and a miss, but is not limited to this, for example, in a case where the lottery result of the special symbol is a miss, A configuration may be made such that a smaller number of benefits than those at the time of winning the jackpot (an advantage different from that at the time of winning the jackpot) can be won for the small hit that can be given to the player. With such a configuration, even if the jackpot has not been won, it is possible to provide an opportunity to grant a privilege to the player, so that the interest of the game can be improved. In this case, when the small hit type counter is provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the acquired small hit type counter value is configured to be stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area, and when the special symbol lottery is executed. What is necessary is just to comprise so that it may refer.

  In addition, if the special symbol lottery is configured to be able to win a small hit, for example, it is configured so that the content of the transition of the gaming state based on the big win and the content of the transition of the gaming state based on the small hit are different. For example, if a big hit is won, the game state is shifted to the normal state at the start of the big hit game, and further, based on the set big hit type, a new game state can be set after the big hit game ends. When the small hitting is won, the small hitting game may be executed while maintaining the gaming state at the time of the small hitting winning, and the gaming state may not be shifted after the small hitting game is finished.

  With this configuration, the presence / absence of the transition of the gaming state and the content of the transition can be made different according to the winning type (big hit, small hit) which has been won, so that a variety of games can be provided. it can.

  Further, the RAM 203 according to the present embodiment is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b corresponding to a ball entering (passing through) the through gate 67 formed of one holding area (holding first area). The normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203b stores the values of the second random number counter C4 and the general figure variation type counter CS2 in accordance with the timing of entering the through gate 67.

  When the start condition (variation condition) of the ordinary symbol is satisfied, the various values stored in the first reserved area of the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203b are shifted to the ordinary symbol execution area, and the various stored values are shifted. Normal symbol fluctuation based on the value is started.

  Next, each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399), and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 399). It returns to the structure. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 55).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and the special symbol in the RAM 203 is reserved at the timing when the ball enters the special figure entrance 64. It is stored in the ball storage area 203a. Then, the value of the random number which is a special symbol jackpot is set by the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is set to the first random number table. When it matches the value of the random number which becomes the jackpot set by 202a, it is determined that the jackpot is a special symbol.

  Here, the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first random number table 202a. This first random number table 202a is a table in which random number values (judgment values) determined to be a big hit in a special symbol lottery are defined.

  Specifically, in the first random number table 202a, a determination value for determining a jackpot is defined within a predetermined range, and a determination value for a predetermined range is defined. As shown in FIG. 23 (b), among the values of the first random number counter C1, “0 to 3” is defined as the jackpot determination value, and other values (“4 to 399”) are determined to be out. Specified as a value.

  In the present embodiment, the probability of winning a jackpot is configured to be the same regardless of the game state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot probability is configured to be different depending on the game state. May be. Also, in that case, the jackpot probability of the special symbol may be two types, that is, a high probability state and a low probability state, or three or more types. In this case, for example, the special symbol state and the ordinary symbol state may be configured so as to make the special symbol jackpot probability different for each of up to four types of gaming states set by combining the special symbol states, Simply, three or more types of special symbol states such as a high probability state, a normal probability state, and a low probability state may be set, and a different big hit probability may be set for each state.

  In the case where the special symbol lottery result is set so that "small hit" can be won, the value of the first random number counter C1 corresponding to "small hit" is defined in the first random number table 202a. What is necessary is just to configure. With such a configuration, the big hit lottery and the small hit lottery of the special symbol can be executed by the same process, so that the main control lottery and the small hit lottery are executed in different processes. The processing load on the device 110 can be reduced. In addition, in one special symbol lottery, it is possible to prohibit the winning of a large hit and a small hit.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol hits, and adds one by one in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). Then, after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and the special value of the RAM 203 is set at the timing when the ball enters the special figure entrance 64. It is stored in the symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

  The value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. In the present embodiment, using the acquired value of the first hit type counter C2, the first hit type selection table 202c is referred to to determine the big hit type when a big hit is won. Here, the contents of the first hit type selection table 202c will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 24A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first hit type selection table 202c. As shown in FIG. 24 (a), the first hit type selection table 202c includes a special figure jackpot type selection table 202c1 which is referred to when a jackpot is won by a special symbol lottery, and a V winning opening 165. And a V jackpot type selection table 202c2 which is referred to when the ball wins (V win).

  First, the contents of the special figure jackpot type selection table 202c1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24B is a schematic diagram showing the contents specified in the special figure jackpot type selection table 202c1. As described above, this special figure jackpot type selection table 202c1 is a data table for selecting a jackpot type set when a jackpot is won by lottery of a special symbol, and includes a value of the acquired first hit type counter C2. Different jackpot types are defined accordingly.

  Specifically, "big hit A" is defined in the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 from "0 to 98", and "big hit B" is defined in the value of "99". I have.

  Here, the content of the jackpot game executed corresponding to each jackpot type and the content of the game state set after the end of the jackpot game will be described. In the present embodiment, the operation content of the jackpot game executed in accordance with each jackpot type (round game content), that is, the operation content (opening timing, An opening operation scenario in which the number of times of opening is defined in a time series is stored in advance in various operation scenario tables 202e of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

  Then, the opening operation scenario corresponding to the jackpot type set when the jackpot is won is read from the various operation scenario table 202e and stored in the running scenario storage area (not shown) in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Is done. When the opening operation scenario is stored in the executing scenario storage area (not shown), the content of the scenario is updated every time the main process (see FIG. 55) of main controller 110 is executed (every 4 milliseconds). In the jackpot control process (see S1804 in FIG. 56) for executing control during a jackpot game, the current scenario content is determined, and a process based on the determination result is executed.

  With this configuration, for example, when a plurality of movable members are moved by one opening operation control, by using an opening operation scenario in which the operation content of each movable member is defined in a time series, a plurality of movable members Can be centrally managed. Therefore, the operation timing of each movable member can be set appropriately, and the other movable members can be set when one movable member fails. The operation processing for the member can be smoothly performed.

  The "big hit A" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds (the number of times the round game is executed) is four rounds as the big hit game, and the big hit game in which the variable winning device 650 is opened for four rounds is executed. The round game is a game in which 10 balls are awarded to the variable winning device 650 or the first attacker 650 is continuously opened until the opening period elapses 30 seconds. In other words, in the “big hit A” in which the four round games are executed, a big hit game in which a maximum of 40 balls can be won in the variable winning device 650.

  Further, the "big hit A" is defined so that a time saving state (a low probability state of a special symbol, a high probability state of a normal symbol) is set after the end of the big hit game. Times ", that is, the time-saving period until the special symbol lottery is executed four times during the time-saving state without winning a jackpot (until the fourth special symbol lottery result is stopped (confirmed)). Have been.

  The "big hit B" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds (the number of times the round game is executed) is four rounds as the big hit game, and the big hit game in which the variable winning device 650 is opened for four rounds is executed. Then, it is defined that a time saving state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is set after the end of the jackpot game, and "15 time reductions", that is, In the state, a time-saving period is defined until the lottery is executed 15 times without winning a special jackpot in the special symbol lottery (until the 15th special symbol lottery result is stopped (confirmed display)).

  That is, in the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won by a lottery of a special symbol, a jackpot game of four rounds is always executed, and a time saving state is set after the jackpot game is completed. When the set jackpot type is “big hit A” (99% of the big hit), when the number of times of saving “4 times” is “big hit B” (1% of the big hit) It is configured such that the number of time savings “15” is set.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, during the time reduction state, a special hit game (a game in which a ball is thrown into the special figure entrance 64 and the aim is to win a jackpot by a special symbol lottery) during the normal state is a big hit. It is configured such that a special electric game (a game aiming for a big hit by causing a ball to be won (V winning) in the V winning opening 165 based on a lottery of a normal symbol as a starting point) is easily executed, and is configured to be executed more easily than in the normal state. The time saving state is configured to be a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player. Therefore, the "big hit B" in which the time saving state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, is difficult to end (the condition for ending the time saving state is hard to be satisfied) is a big hit type more advantageous to the player than the "big hit A". .

  In the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won by a special symbol lottery, the jackpot game of the same number of rounds is executed in all jackpots, but the present invention is not limited to this. A different number of round games may be executed according to the jackpot type. Further, in the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won by a special symbol lottery, the time saving state is set after the jackpot game is completed in all jackpots, and the number of time savings (time saving termination condition) is set according to the jackpot type. It is configured to be different, but without being limited to this, a jackpot type in which the time saving state is set at the end of the jackpot game according to the selected jackpot type and a jackpot type in which the normal state is set are provided. May be.

  Next, the contents of the V jackpot type selection table 202c2 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the V jackpot type selection table 202c2. The V jackpot type selection table 202c2 is a data table in which the game content of the jackpot game (V jackpot game) executed when the ball has won the V winning port 165 (V jackpot) is defined. Specifically, "big hit C" is defined in the entire range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 99".

  The “big hit C” is a big hit type in which the number of rounds (the number of times the round game is executed) is 10 rounds as the big hit game and the big hit game in which the variable winning device 650 is opened for 10 rounds is executed. . Then, it is defined that a time saving state (a low probability state of a special symbol, a high probability state of a normal symbol) is set after the end of the jackpot game. During the state, a time-short period is defined until the special symbol lottery is executed four times without winning a jackpot (until the fourth special symbol lottery result is stopped (confirmed)).

  That is, in the present embodiment, the jackpot game executed based on the V prize (the jackpot executed in the special electric game) is more than the jackpot game executed based on the special figure lottery (the jackpot game executed in the special figure game). (Game) is configured to execute a jackpot game with a larger number of rounds. In other words, in terms of the bonus amount (the number of prize balls) given during the jackpot game, the gaming state is more advantageous for the player in the time reduction state than in the normal state.

  In the present embodiment, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is configured to be acquired based on the fact that a ball has been won in the special power operation port 643, and the process is executed based on the fact that a V-win has been achieved during the per-accessory game. The big jackpot game (V jackpot game) is a V jackpot type selection based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired at the time of winning the ball in the special power operation port 643 which triggered the execution of the V-prize winning per-game game. It is configured to be executed based on the jackpot type selected with reference to the table 202c2.

  In the present embodiment, since there is only one jackpot type (small jackpot C) defined in the V jackpot type selection table 202c2, the same content is obtained even when a V prize has been won for any of the per-game hits. Although the big hit game is executed, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of big hit types may be defined in the V big hit type selection table 202c2 according to the acquired value of the first hit type counter C2. Further, a plurality of special power operation ports may be provided in the general power winning device 640, and the jackpot type may be set in correspondence with the special power operation port where the ball has won among the plurality of special power operation ports. Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is acquired based on the fact that the ball has won the V winning opening 165 during the execution of the bonus hit game, and the acquired value of the first hit type counter C2 is obtained. You may be comprised so that a big hit type may be selected based on it.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the gaming state after the jackpot game is selected regardless of the gaming state set at the time of winning the jackpot or at the time of the ball winning the V winning opening 165. However, without being limited to this, the game state set after the jackpot game is variable according to the game state set at the time of winning the jackpot or at the time of the ball winning the V winning opening 165. In this case, for example, immediately before the end of the time-saving state (immediately before the stop of the final change of the special symbol in the time-saving state), a game per ordinary drawing is executed, and after the time-saving state ends, After the big hit game is completed only when the player wins the V-prize during the bonus game executed in the state where the state is set, that is, only when the player wins the V in the special state game during the normal state. Short termination condition is satisfied difficult time reduction state (e.g., the time-shortening number 20 times time reduction state) may be configured to be set.

  In the present embodiment, three types of jackpot types are used. However, the number of types is not limited thereto, and two or less types may be provided, or four or more types may be provided. In addition, the same jackpot type may be set in a case where a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery and in a case where a V prize is won in a special electric game. Furthermore, the selection ratio and the type of the jackpot type selected this time may be made different based on the information on the jackpot type selected in the past (for example, the content of the jackpot game or the transition of the game state). . With this configuration, the player can be interested in past game histories (big hit histories). In this case, it is preferable to execute a suggestion effect that can indicate to the player a jackpot type that is likely to be set at the next jackpot based on the past jackpot history. This makes it easier for the player to continue playing the game.

  The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The rough display mode (variable time) such as so-called short-time deviation, long-time deviation, normal reach, super reach, or the like is determined by the variation type counter CS1. The determination of the display mode is, specifically, the determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. You. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 55) described below is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process. A variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 25) that stores a random value that determines one symbol variation time from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random value) is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. Have been.

  Here, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d. As shown in FIG. 25A, the variation pattern selection table 202d includes a normal table 202d1 used when the normal state is set as the gaming state and a time table used when the time reduction state is set. Table 202d2. Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the data table used to select the variation pattern according to the game state is different, so that the variation pattern (variation time) selected according to the game state is different. be able to.

  Next, detailed contents of each table defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. 25B and 25C. FIG. 25B is a schematic diagram illustrating the contents defined in the normal table 202d1. The normal table 202d1 is a data table that is referred to when the normal state is set as the gaming state, and has a longer fluctuation time when the special symbol lottery result is a big hit than when the special symbol lottery result is lost. Is defined so that the variation pattern of the pattern can be easily selected.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 25B, the lottery result of the special symbol (special figure) is “big hit”, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 50”. Various types of normal reach with a variation time of 20 seconds are defined in association with each other, and a super reach with a variation time of 60 seconds to 120 seconds is defined in the range of "51 to 198". In FIG. 25 (b), the value of the variation type counter CS1 is shown as "60 seconds to 120 seconds" in the range of "51 to 198" in order to simplify the description of the variation pattern of the hit super reach. Actually, predetermined fluctuation times (for example, fluctuation time of 60 seconds, fluctuation time of 100 seconds, and fluctuation time of 120 seconds) are respectively defined in the corresponding range of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. That is, if the lottery result of the special symbol is “big hit” and the obtained value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “51 to 198”, “60 seconds to” corresponding to the obtained value is obtained. A variation pattern in which any variation time of “120 seconds” is set.

  When the lottery result is “out of range”, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is defined in a range of “0 to 179” in association with a short range of 8 seconds in the fluctuation time, and in the range of “180 to 194”. A fluctuation time of 20 seconds is specified in association with a normal reach, and a range of "195 to 198" is defined in association with a super reach of fluctuation time of 60 to 120 seconds. Note that the content of the lottery result being “out of place” and the value of the variation type counter CS1 being in the range of “195 to 198” has the same purpose as the above-described case where the lottery result is “big hit (hit)”. Yes, the explanation is simplified.

  That is, in the present embodiment, regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery executed during the normal state, the types of the variable time that can be selected are made the same, and only the rate at which each variable time is selected is made different. ing. Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit (hit), the ratio of selecting a longer fluctuation time is higher than in the case of a loss. Therefore, the longer the special symbol change during execution becomes, the higher the expectation of the jackpot win can be raised. Therefore, when a special symbol change with a long change time is executed, the player is required to change the special symbol change before the change time elapses. Can be prevented from getting tired of the game.

  In the present embodiment, that is, in this embodiment, as the fluctuation time set for the special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, the longer the fluctuation time is set as the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is smaller. It is configured to be. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a period in which the lottery of the first special symbol is not executed frequently occurs. When the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol has reached the upper limit, a short fluctuation time is set, so that the ball enters the special figure entrance 64 with the number of reserved balls reaching the upper limit. It is possible to suppress a situation in which the ball is thrown.

  Also, in the present embodiment, the length of the set variable time is set by configuring the type of the variable time that can be selected to be the same regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery executed during the normal state. By grasping, it is configured so that the lottery result of the special symbol can be prevented from being exposed to the player in advance, but without being limited to this, the lottery result of the special symbol is The variation time selected only in the case or the variation time selected only in the case of the departure may be partially settable.

  As shown in FIG. 25 (b), in the present embodiment, a variation pattern is selected based on a special symbol lottery result (win / fail determination result) and the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a variation pattern may be selected based on a jackpot type set when a jackpot is won.

  Next, the contents of the time saving table 202d2 provided in the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the time saving table 202d2. As shown in FIG. 25C, the symbol type, the lottery result, and the range of the value of the variation type counter CS1 are associated with the variation pattern in the time reduction table 202d2.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 25 (c), when the result of the determination of the success or failure (lottery result) is "hit (big hit)", the value of the variation type counter CS1 varies within the range of "0 to 99". A “hit short” with a time of 50 seconds is defined, and a “hit long” with a variation time of 200 seconds is defined in the range of “100 to 198”. In the case of "out", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 149", "short out A" with a variation time of 10 seconds is defined, and in the range of "150 to 169", "Short off B" with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds is defined, "Short off C" with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds is defined in the range of "170 to 189", and the fluctuation time is set in the range of "190 to 196". Is defined as "long out A" of 30 seconds, and "197, 198" is defined as "long out B" with a variation time of 50 seconds.

  As described above, during the time reduction state, unlike the normal state, the type of the fluctuating time that can be selected is different depending on whether the special symbol lottery result is winning or not. , The fluctuation time that can be selected when a jackpot is won is longer than the fluctuation time that can be selected in the case of a loss.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the period in which the time reduction state is set is a gaming state advantageous to the player, and in that time reduction period, the special electric game is executed based on the lottery of the ordinary symbols. In addition, as an end condition of the time saving state (time saving end condition), an end condition (the number of time savings) based on the number of times of changing the special symbol (the number of lotteries) is set.

  Therefore, when the special fluctuation is executed during the time reduction state, the longer fluctuation time is selected, the longer the period during which the time reduction state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, is set. Then, in the special symbol lottery executed during the time reduction state, for example, when four time reductions are set, the special symbol lottery executed four times after the time reduction state is set is a jackpot winning (1 / 100), a variation pattern with a long variation time is selected as the added value. With such a configuration, when a special symbol jackpot is won within a limited period of time reduction, a more advantageous game can be provided to the player. Can be performed.

  In addition, even when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the fluctuation time selected as "10 seconds to 50 seconds" is provided with a maximum of five times the difference, so that the deviation fluctuation with a longer fluctuation time is selected. The player can play the game while expecting the player to perform the game.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12A, the remaining time reduction period mode 801 for indicating the length of the time reduction state period (V rush period) is displayed on the big hit game end screen. The remaining time reduction period mode 801 is within the range until the time reduction end condition is satisfied, and is determined in advance based on the winning information included in the special symbol hold already acquired. Is configured to be displayed.

  With such a configuration, whether the number of seconds displayed as the remaining short time period mode 801 is a display mode obtained by adding the fluctuation times of a plurality of out-of-place fluctuations, or a display corresponding to the fluctuation time of one single jackpot fluctuation It is possible to provide a pleasure for the player to predict whether the mode is an aspect.

  Returning to FIG. 22, the description will be continued. The second hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by one, for example, in the range of 0 to 999, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 999). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically at each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39), and it is detected that the ball has passed the normal starting port (through gate) 67. And stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  Then, the value of the random number which is a hit for the ordinary symbol is set by the second random number table 202b stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is set to the second random number table 202b. Is determined to be a normal symbol (second symbol) when the value matches the random number value which is set as a hit. Further, the second random number table 202b is divided into two types, one for low probability of a normal symbol and the other for high probability of having a higher probability of hitting a symbol than the low probability. The number of jackpot random numbers is set differently. In this way, by making the number of winning random numbers different, the probability of winning is changed between a low probability of a normal symbol and a high probability of a normal symbol.

  The contents specified in the second random number table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the second random number table 202b. As shown in FIG. 23 (c), in the case of the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, the acquired second random number counter C4 is set to the value of “0”, the ordinary symbol is determined, and in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol. In some cases, the obtained per-random number is set in the range of the acquired second random number counter C4 of “0 to 299”.

  That is, in the present embodiment, when the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, the probability (1/1000) of winning in the ordinary symbol lottery is set to the low probability. Thereby, in the present embodiment in which the same game method (left-handed game) is executed in the normal state, which is the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, and the time reduction state, which is the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, in the normal state, Since it is possible to make it harder to win per ordinary figure, it is possible to prevent a situation where a game per ordinary figure is executed during a normal state and a ball wins in the ordinary electric winning device 640. On the other hand, when the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, the probability (300/1000) of winning in the ordinary symbol lottery is set to the high probability. As a result, it is possible to facilitate the execution of the regular symbol winning game based on the winning of the ordinary symbol during the time reduction state.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, in the game per game performed during the normal state, the ball is less likely to win the general game winning device 640 than the game per game performed during the time saving state. In addition, even if a ball wins in the normal electricity prize winning device 640 during the normal state, the winning ball is unlikely to enter the special power operation port 643. In other words, in the present embodiment, it is difficult to win a per-figure during the normal state, and even if the game is won per peri-figure, the ball will be awarded to the per-prize winning device 640 during the per-figure game. It is configured such that even if the ball wins the general electricity prize winning device 640, the winning ball does not easily win the special power operation port 643.

  As described above, in a plurality of processes (three processes) from the execution of the normal symbol lottery to the winning of the ball to the special power operation port 643, it is more difficult to progress the game in the normal state than in the time reduction state. With such a configuration, it is possible to reliably prevent a ball from winning in the special power operation port 643 upon a lottery of a normal symbol executed during the normal state and a game per accessory being executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the above-described three processes, instead of controlling the winning of the ball to the special power operation port 643 based on the execution of the normal symbol lottery during the normal state, the normal state is not set. Even in the middle, a short variation time (3 seconds as in the time reduction state) is set as the variation time of the normal symbol. In other words, even if it is configured such that the lottery of ordinary symbols is easily executed in a short period of time, the ball is restricted from winning in the special power operation port 643 by the regulation in the above three processes. As a result, the ball wins in the special power operation port 643 when the lottery of the ordinary symbol is executed, and the execution of the game per accessory can be surely prevented.

  In this way, by setting the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the normal state to be short, at the timing when the gaming state is switched, for example, at the timing when the time reduction state is set after the end of the big hit game, the normal state (the low probability state of the ordinary symbol) ) The normal symbol fluctuation of the long fluctuation time executed during is executed across the transition timing of the gaming state, and the special symbol fluctuation during the time reduction state is started, but the normal symbol fluctuation during the time reduction state is started. It is possible to suppress occurrence of a situation where a lottery cannot be executed. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the time saving state is managed for a period, it is possible to provide a game (special electric game) that effectively uses the limited time saving period to the player.

  In the present embodiment, the above-described three processes (probability of winning a normal symbol, winning rate of a ball to the general winning prize device 640 in a general winning game, and a ball winning the general winning prize device 640 are performed by the special power operating port 643. (A prize rate of winning a prize), it is configured to restrict the prize of a ball to the special power operation port 643 during the normal state, but is not limited to this, and is configured to regulate in two or less processes. You may. Further, in the present embodiment, when the ball that has won the general winning award device 640 does not win in the special power operation port 643, the ball enters the out port 644 so that a privilege (for example, a prize ball) is not given to the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a ball enters the out port 644, more prize balls are paid out than when a ball enters the special power operation port 643. You may.

  With this configuration, it is possible to suppress a ball from winning in the special power operation port 643 during the normal state, and to provide a different privilege (principle for executing a game per role) when the general winning device 640 is won. Can be provided to the player, so that a surprising game can be provided to the player. In addition, in a state where the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, it is possible to provide the player with an added value in the case of winning per ordinary symbol.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 999), and is updated once every timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 55).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs a jackpot lottery and a display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the values of the counters and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  The ordinary figure variation type counter CS2 is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The value of the normal figure fluctuation type counter CS2 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 55) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process. Then, the variation time of the ordinary symbol is determined by the value of the ordinary symbol variation type counter CS2. Specifically, it is configured such that the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is determined using the acquired value of the ordinary symbol fluctuation type counter CS2.

  Returning to FIG. 21, the description will be continued. The ROM 202 has various data tables and the like defined corresponding to the various counters shown in FIG. Here, the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 23A, the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes a first random number table 202a, a second random number table 202b, a big hit type selection table 202c, a variation pattern selection table 202d and at least various operation scenario tables 202e. The first random number table 202a, the second random number table 202b, the jackpot type selection table 202c, and the variation pattern selection table 202d have been described when describing the various counters illustrated in FIG. .

  The various operation scenario table 202e is a data table having an operation scenario in which the operation contents of various movable members for which the main control device 110 manages operation control are specified in a time series in advance. Are read when the operation of the movable member is controlled. In the present embodiment, when controlling the operation of the movable member, an operation scenario that matches the current operation control condition is read from the various operation scenario tables 202e, and the read operation scenario is temporarily stored in the storage area of the RAM 203. Remember. Then, in the main processing (see FIG. 55) executed at intervals of 4 milliseconds, the contents of the operation scenario stored in the storage area are periodically updated (in units of 4 milliseconds) and correspond to the updated values. When there is an operation scenario for variably operating the movable member in the area, an operation control based on the operation scenario is executed. Further, each operation scenario table is not provided for each movable member, but is set in units of one event (big hit game, general per-game, per-accessible game) for controlling the operation of the movable member. Therefore, in the operation scenario table corresponding to an event (for example, a game per ordinary drawing) in which the operation of a plurality of movable members needs to be controlled within one event, the operation control contents to be executed for the plurality of movable members are defined. Have been.

  Here, the contents of the various operation scenario tables 202e will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 26A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the various operation scenario tables 202e. As shown in FIG. 26A, the various operation scenario tables 202e include a jackpot operation scenario table 202e1, an accessory operation scenario table 202e2, a public figure operation scenario table 202e3, and a first movable valve scenario table 202e4. ing.

  First, with reference to FIG. 26B, the contents of the per-principal operation scenario table 202e2 will be described. FIG. 26B is a schematic diagram schematically showing various contents defined in the per-prize action scenario table 202e2. The per-government operation scenario table 202e2 is a data table in which the per-government scenario in which the operation content during the per-government game is set is defined. From the start until the V winning device 65 is opened (until the V winning opening solenoid 209b is set to ON)), the round period (the maximum period during which the V winning device 65 is opened), the ending period (the V winning device 65). (The grace period from when the storage solenoid 209c is turned off) is set, and is set when a per-accessory game is started, and is periodically (main processing of the main control device 110). The operation control corresponding to the value of a scenario counter (not shown) to which the value is incremented by 1 each time (a) is executed.

  Specifically, when the bonus game is started, the value of the scenario counter is set to “1”. In the scenario counter “1”, an operation scenario for setting the storage solenoid 209c to ON is defined as a corresponding operation scenario, so that the storage solenoid 209c is set to ON at the same time as the start of the per-bonus game, and the storage valve is set. The storage valve 66a is moved to a state where the ball can be stored in the storage portion formed on the upper surface of the 66a. Then, the value of the scenario counter is added every 4 milliseconds, and the scenario counter “25”, that is, the opening period ends 0.1 seconds after the start of the per-game game, At the timing when the value becomes "26", the V winning opening solenoid 209b is set to ON, and the V opening / closing door 65a (V attacker) is opened. That is, in the present embodiment, the storage valve 66a is configured to be changed to the storage state using a period from the start of the game per accessory to the opening of the V winning device 65. With this configuration, even if the ball vigorously wins the V prize device 65 immediately after the V prize device 65 is opened, the storage valve 66a is already set at the timing when the V prize device 65 is opened. Is changed to the storage state, so that it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from passing through the storage valve 66a and winning in the V winning opening 165.

  Next, at the timing when the value of the scenario counter is “375”, that is, at the timing when 1.6 seconds have elapsed since the start of the per-prize game, the V winning opening solenoid 209b is turned off, and the V opening / closing door 65a (V (Attacker) is closed. Then, after the closing control of the V opening / closing door 65a (V attacker) is executed, that is, at the timing when the value of the scenario counter is “376”, the ending period of the per-accessory game is set, and the storage solenoid 209c is set to off. It is stipulated that Then, until the value of the scenario counter reaches “750”, the closed state (ending period) of the game per accessory is set.

  That is, in the per-accessory game executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the V winning device 65 is configured to be opened after the storage valve 66a is shifted to the storage state. The scenario is defined so that the storage solenoid 209c is set to be turned off after the timing of closing the V winning device 65 (scenario counter “375”). With this configuration, it is possible to prevent an unexpected situation from occurring at the time of starting or ending the game per accessory, and suppressing the execution of the game per accessory at an unintended timing.

  Next, the content of the first movable valve operation scenario 202e4 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27A is a schematic diagram illustrating the contents of the scenario defined in the first movable valve scenario 202e4. The first movable valve 66b of the present embodiment is controlled so as to move in a predetermined operation pattern while the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. The operation of the first movable valve 66b is set in the start-up process (see FIG. 54) of the main control device 110 executed in the case where it is performed (see S1715 in FIG. 54). The configuration is such that the value of the scenario counter is updated (1 added) by a process executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 55).

  As shown in FIG. 27 (a), the first movable valve 66b in the present embodiment is in a V winning possible state in which a ball can be awarded to the V winning opening 165, and a ball can be awarded in the V winning opening 165. It is configured to be located in any of the V winning difficult state where it is difficult to make the winning. In the first movable valve operation scenario 202e4, the first movable valve solenoid 209d is turned on (the ball moves to the V winning opening 165 in the first movable valve 66b) when the value of the scenario counter is in the range of “1” to “1500”. An operation scenario in which the first movable valve solenoid 209d is turned off (a state in which the ball cannot easily enter the V winning opening 165 with the first movable valve 66b) is defined.

  Specifically, the value of the scenario counter is in the range of "1" to "1250", that is, the first movable valve solenoid 209d is turned off until 5 seconds elapse after the first movable valve operation scenario 202e4 is set. When the value of the scenario counter is in the range of “1251” to “1500”, that is, for 5 seconds to 5.5 seconds after the first movable valve operation scenario 202e4 is set, the first movable valve solenoid 209d is turned on. An operation scenario is defined to be set. Then, when the value of the scenario counter reaches the upper limit value “1500”, the value of the scenario counter is switched from “1500” to “1” when the next main process (see FIG. 55) is executed. Thereafter, the operation control based on the first movable valve operation scenario 202e4 is repeatedly executed until the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the first movable valve 66b, which is a variable member for permitting or prohibiting the winning of the ball into the V winning opening 165, is set for 0.5 second for 5.5 seconds. It is configured to perform a variable operation so as to switch to a state in which a ball can be won in the V winning opening 165. Thus, when a ball arrives at the first movable valve 66b at random timing, the probability that the ball passes through the first movable valve 66b and wins the V winning opening 165 is 1/11. Make up. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know which bonus game to win the ball at the V winning opening 165, and it is possible to enthusiastically play the game in all the bonus games.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, even if a plurality of balls wins in the V winning device 65 during one game per accessory, the number of balls that can reach the first movable valve 66b is not increased. It is configured to be one. As a result, the jackpot probability (probability that the ball wins the V winning opening 165) in the per-principal game becomes approximately 1/11, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with the jackpot game excessively. be able to.

  In the present embodiment, the operation content of the first movable valve 66b is configured such that the same operation content is always set during the period when the power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10, but is not limited thereto. The first operation pattern may be a predetermined operation pattern, for example, a first operation pattern defined as an off period (5.5 seconds) and an on period (0.5) seconds of the first movable valve solenoid 209d; An operation scenario in which an off period (3 seconds), an on period (0.2 seconds), an off period (2 seconds), and a second operation pattern defined as an on period (0.3 seconds) is set in order is set. May be.

  In the present embodiment, the same operation scenario is repeatedly set after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the power of the pachinko machine 10 may be turned on. It is also possible to provide a measuring means for measuring the elapsed time from the time, and to switch to a different operation scenario based on the measurement result by the measuring means. In this case, only when the measurement result of the measuring means is a specific measurement result (for example, within one hour after power-on, or 3 hours to 3 hours and 10 minutes after power-on), the first operation scenario is compared with the normal operation scenario. It is preferable that the ratio of the period in which the movable valve solenoid 209d is set to ON be higher than the ratio of the period in which the movable valve solenoid 209d is set to OFF. With such a configuration, the jackpot game (V jackpot game) can be easily executed during the time-saving game only for a specific period, and the player can play the game for the period. Operation can be improved.

  Further, the control content of the operation scenario may be made different depending on the game situation. For example, the first movable valve operation scenario 202e4 is set to an initial state (scenario counter) at a timing when a specific jackpot game is executed and when it ends. From the value “1” of the pachinko machine, or the result of the special symbol lottery continuously deviates for a predetermined number of times (for example, 300 times which is the reciprocal of the jackpot probability of the pachinko machine 10). In this case, a special operation scenario in which the ratio of the period in which the first movable valve solenoid 209d is turned on is higher than the ratio of the period in which the first movable valve solenoid 209d is turned off is set as compared with the normal operation scenario. May be configured. Then, once the special operation scenario is set, it is preferable that the time-saving state is set thereafter, and the time-saving state is set continuously until the time-saving state ends. Thereby, the special operation scenario is set, so that the player can continuously play the game. In this case, it is preferable to provide a notifying unit for notifying the player that the special operation scenario has been set. With this configuration, it is possible to easily notify the player that the special action scenario is set.

  Next, the contents of the per-figure-per-operation scenario table 202e3 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27B is a schematic diagram showing the contents specified in the per-figure-per-operation scenario table 202e3. The per-figure-period operation scenario table 202e3 is a data table in which a per-figure per-figure game operation pattern that is executed when a win is made in the ordinary symbol lottery is stored. An operation scenario corresponding to the set game state is set.

  Specifically, the per-figure per-figure operation scenario table 202e3 includes a per-figure per-figure per-figure scenario 202e31 in which a per-figure per-figure game operation scenario to be executed during the normal state is executed, and is executed during the time-saving state. A time-saving general-purpose per-scenario scenario 202e32 in which an operation scenario of a general-purpose per-game is defined.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 27 (c), the contents of the normal general-purpose per-scenario scenario 202e31 will be described. FIG. 27C is a schematic diagram showing the scenario contents defined in the normal general-purpose per-scenario scenario 202e31. In the normal symbol winning scenario 202e31, in the normal symbol variation process (see S106 in FIG. 48), it is determined that the gaming state at the time when the winning winning ordinary symbol variation is stopped (confirmed) is the normal state ( This is an operation scenario to be set (S1118 in FIG. 48: No).

  The normal per-drawing scenario 202e31 includes a general-purpose solenoid for controlling the operation of the electric accessory 640a of the general-purpose winning award device 640 and a general-purpose winning award device for a scenario counter value in a range of “1” to “1050”. An operation scenario for turning on and off the second movable valve solenoid 209e that controls the operation of the second movable valve 642 that distributes the flow destination of the winning ball to 640 is defined.

  Specifically, after the value of the scenario counter is in the range of “1” to “1025”, that is, after the normal general-purpose per-scenario scenario 202e31 is set (after the general-purpose per-figure game in the normal state is executed), 4 Until one second elapses, the general-purpose solenoid is off (the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state), the second movable valve solenoid 209e is off (the ball is allowed to flow down to the out port 644), and thereafter, When the value of the scenario counter is in the range of “1026” to “1050”, that is, for 0.1 second between 4.1 and 4.2 seconds after the execution of the scenario 202e31 per normal general-purpose figure, the general-purpose solenoid is turned on. The operation scenario is defined such that the ON state (the electric accessory 640a is open) and the second movable valve solenoid 209e is ON (the ball flows down to the special power operation port 643).

  In other words, when the game is executed in the normal state, the game in the closed state (4.1 seconds) and the open state (0.1 seconds) are executed. Further, even if the ball wins the general winning award device 640 during the open state for 0.1 second, at that time the second movable valve 643 causes the winning ball to flow down to the out port 644 (see FIG. 4). , It is possible to reliably prevent the ball from winning into the special power operation port 643.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the contents of the time-saving general-purpose per-scenario scenario 202e32 will be described. FIG. 28 is a schematic diagram showing the scenario contents defined in the time-saving general-purpose per-scenario 202e32. In this time saving general symbol winning scenario 202e32, when the normal symbol variation process (see S106 in FIG. 48) determines that the gaming state at the time when the winning normal symbol variation stops (confirms) is the normal state ( This is an operation scenario to be set (S1118 in FIG. 48: Yes).

  For the time saving general-purpose scenario 202e32 and the value of the scenario counter in the range of “1” to “1025”, a general-purpose solenoid that controls the operation of the electric accessory 640a of the general-purpose winning device 640, and a general-purpose winning device 640 An operation scenario for turning on and off the second movable valve solenoid 209e for controlling the operation of the second movable valve 642 for distributing the flow destination of the winning ball is defined.

  More specifically, the value of the scenario counter is in the range of “1” to “25”, that is, 0 after the normal general-purpose per-scenario scenario 202e31 is set (after the per-normal-period game in the normal state is executed). Until one second elapses, the state in which the general-purpose solenoid is set to off (the electric accessory 640a is closed) and the second movable valve solenoid 209e is set to be on (state in which the ball flows down to the special electric operation port 643). After that, the value of the scenario counter is in the range of “26” to “775”, that is, three seconds between 0.1 seconds and 3.1 seconds after the scenario 202e32 per time saving general figure is set, The general-purpose solenoid is set to ON (the electric accessory 640a is open), the second movable valve solenoid 209e is continuously set to ON, and the value of the scenario counter is in the range of “776” to “1024”, that is, Until 3.1 seconds to 4.1 seconds have elapsed since the setting of the time saving per-day scenario 202e32, the general-purpose solenoid is turned off (the electric accessory 640a is closed) and the second movable valve solenoid 209e is turned on. (A state in which the ball is caused to flow down to the special power operation port 643), and when the value of the scenario counter becomes “1025”, that is, the upper limit value specified in the scenario 202e32 per time saving general drawing, the second movable state An operation scenario is defined such that the valve solenoid 209e is turned off (a state in which the ball flows down to the out port 644).

  In other words, when the per-figure-period game is executed in the time-saving state, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a in the per-figure-period game is immediately executed for 3 seconds through a short-time closed state (0.1 second). Is done. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to win the general winning award device 640 than in the normal game per game in the normal state.

  Furthermore, in the time-saving general-purpose per-scenario scenario 202e32, during the period in which the ball can enter the general-purpose winning device 640, the position where the second movable valve 643 can allow the ball to enter the special power operation port 643 (FIG. 5). ) Can be set, so that a ball can be easily won to the special power operation port 643 during a game per ordinary drawing.

  In addition, the above-described normal scenario per figure 202e31 and the time-saving general figure per scenario 202e32 specify that the operation scenario for the second movable valve solenoid 209d is the same. The operation control contents can be unified, and the process of controlling the variable members can be simplified.

  Although a detailed description is omitted, the game per game drawing includes a time ending condition that is established based on the passage of time (a condition that the scenario per game drawing is updated to the upper limit value) and a game winning device. A winning ending condition that is established when the winning number of balls to 640 reaches the upper limit (for example, five) is set. When a normal game is being played, the winning ending condition is set so that the time ending condition is satisfied first. Thereby, for example, in a per-figure game, it is possible to suppress an act of illegally winning a large number of balls into the general-purpose winning device 640.

  Returning to FIG. 21, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 includes, in addition to the various counters illustrated in FIG. 22, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which the value is stored.

  The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is cut off (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power supply, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by a main process (see FIG. 55), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 54). It should be noted that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When NMI is input to the NMI, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 53) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  As shown in FIG. 29, the RAM 203 stores a special symbol retaining ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol retaining ball storage area 203b, a special symbol retaining ball number counter 203c, a normal symbol retaining ball number counter 203d, a winning number counter 203e, and an operation. Counter group 203f, gaming state storage area 203g, time saving counter 203h, big hit flag 203i, time saving end flag 203j, bonus per hit flag 203k, special figure temporary stop flag 203m, special figure fluctuation time counter 203n, V flag 203p, other memory area 203z.

  The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a stores various counter values obtained based on the fact that a ball has entered the special figure entrance 64 (start winning) up to the upper limit number (four in the present embodiment). This is a storage area for storing.

  The special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is a storage area for storing various counter values for starting the variable display of the special symbol, and when the special symbol stops changing, the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. This is a storage area in which, when various counter values are stored in the memory, the various counter values are shifted and stored.

  The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a and the special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) include a first random number counter C1 obtained from a counter buffer (see FIG. 22) upon detection of a winning start, and a first hit type. The values of the counter C2 and the variation type counter CS1 are stored. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has entered the special figure entrance 64 (start winning) in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39), the counters C1 to C2 and CS1 from the counter buffer. Is obtained and stored in the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a.

  When the MPU 201 detects that it is the timing to start the execution of the special symbol change (lottery), the MPU 201 executes a process such as a jackpot lottery or setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81. Of the data (each value of the counters C1 to C2 and CS1) corresponding to each start winning stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to one starting winning is stored in the special symbol holding ball. Shift to the execution area. Note that the shift in the present embodiment indicates that data stored in one area is moved to another area.

  The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b includes a second random number counter C4 obtained from the counter buffer (see FIG. 22) in accordance with the detection of the passage of the ball to the through gate 67 (start winning), and a general figure variation type counter CS2. This is a storage area in which values are stored. When detecting that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (start winning) in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39), the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 reads the value of the second random number counter C4 from the counter buffer. , The value of the ordinary symbol change type counter CS2 is acquired and stored in the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203b. The ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b has one holding area so that data (values of the counters C4 and CS2) corresponding to one start winning can be stored (held) up to one time. In the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b, the data of the holding balls are stored in the order of passing through the through gate 67 (start winning), from the holding area where the data is vacant, in the order of the earliest digestion. .

  In addition, when the normal symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) detects that it is the timing to start the execution of the fluctuation display effect of the normal symbol based on the winning start, each counter value is stored, and the normal symbol hitting lottery is performed. And a memory for storing data (values of the counters C4 and CS2) to be referred to in processing such as setting of a display (variation pattern) of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81.

  When the MPU 201 detects that it is the timing to start the execution of the fluctuation display effect of the normal symbol, the MPU 201 executes the above-described normal symbol hold to execute processes such as winning lottery and display setting of the second symbol display device 83. Of the data (the value of the second random number counter C4 and the value of the ordinary figure variation type counter CS2) corresponding to each starting prize stored in the ball storage area 203b, the data corresponding to one starting prize is set to the normal Shift to the symbol holding ball execution area (not shown). Note that the shift in the present embodiment indicates that data stored in one area is moved to another area.

  Based on the winning in the special figure entrance 64 detected in the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203c and the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39) periodically executed every 2 milliseconds, It is a counter that counts up to four times the number of pending balls (the number of standby times) of the variable display effect performed by the one symbol display device 37 (the variable display effect performed by the third symbol display device 81). The special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is set to zero as an initial value by an initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (see S1701 in FIG. 54). Then, each time a start winning is detected and the number of balls to be changed for display is increased, one is added to the maximum value of four. On the other hand, the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is decremented by one every time the variable display effect is executed.

  Also, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (that is, the number of reserved balls) is stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a based on the fact that a ball has entered the special special figure entrance 64 (start winning). When the counter value is stored, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by a special symbol holding ball number command output from the main control device 110. The special symbol holding ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 each time a start winning is detected and the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is incremented by one.

  When the values of the counters C1 to C2 and CS1 obtained from the counter buffer are stored in a special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown), the MPU 201 stores the special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown). In the special symbol change start processing (see S205 in FIG. 41), the data stored in the special symbol change processing is referred to, a jackpot lottery is performed based on the reference data, and a change pattern and a stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. I do. In the first symbol display device 37, under the control of the main control device 110, a fluctuation display is performed based on the determined fluctuation pattern and stop type.

  Further, the determined variation pattern and stop type are notified to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by a special figure variation pattern command and a stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variation display effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

  In the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d, the ball passes through the through gate 67 detected in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39) periodically executed every 2 milliseconds (hereinafter referred to as "start winning"). ) Is a counter for counting the number of balls to be held (the number of times of standby) of the variable display performed by the second symbol display device 83 up to one time. The ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is a counter that stores the total number of retaining balls stored based on the fact that the ball has passed through the through gate 67. In the initialization process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (see S1701 in FIG. 54), zero is set as an initial value. Then, every time the start winning is detected and the number of balls to be changed displayed is increased, 1 is added to the maximum value (see S1204 in FIG. 49). On the other hand, the ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 every time the ordinary symbol change display is executed (see S1105 in FIG. 48).

  The winning number counter 203e is a counter for counting the number of balls that have won the V winning device 65 or the number of balls that have won the specific winning opening 650a of the variable winning device 650 during the round game in the bonus game. Specifically, based on the detection that the ball has passed through the detection port (not shown) provided in the V winning device 65, it is updated by being added one by one. On the other hand, when one round is completed, a detecting means capable of detecting the number of winnings in the V winning device 65 (the value of the winning number counter 203e) and the number of discharged (the number of passing balls provided in each winning opening). Is determined, the number is reset to the initial value “0”. The value of the winning number counter 203e is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

  The operation counter group 203k is a counter for measuring (updating) the progress of various operation scenarios that have been set, and includes a scenario counter corresponding to each of the scenarios stored in the various operation scenario tables 202e. When any one of the operation scenarios in the various operation scenario tables 202e is set, a counter value update process is executed as a process executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 55). Is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the scenarios stored in the various operation scenario tables 202e may be executed in duplicate. For example, a scenario relating to a per-figure game and a scenario relating to a per-accessory game are configured to be simultaneously executable. Therefore, the scenario counters are provided corresponding to the scenarios stored in the various operation scenario tables 202e. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the scenario counters for the upper limit number of scenarios that can be executed simultaneously may be provided. In this case, when the scenario counter is provided with a type and a new operation scenario is set, an unused scenario counter type is determined, and a scenario counter is set based on the determination result. The use information for indicating which operation scenario is used may be set, and the use information set in the storage unit of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 may be set. Further, the storage unit in which the usage information is set may be provided with a backup function capable of holding the stored information even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, similarly to various configurations of the RAM 203. . With this configuration, even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like during the operation control based on the operation scenario, the operation control after the power is restored is continued from the state before the power failure. Becomes possible.

  The game state storage area 203g is a storage area for temporarily storing the currently set game state, and is a game state corresponding to the game state (set state of the time reduction counter 203h) set after the end of the big hit game. Is stored. Specifically, when the value of the time reduction counter 203h is 0, the normal state is stored, and when the value of the time reduction counter 203h is a value larger than 0, the time reduction state is stored.

  Furthermore, in the state where the big hit game and the per-item game are being executed, a hit game state (a big-hit state and a per-item game state) indicating that each hit game is being executed is executed. Type information indicating a jackpot type corresponding to the jackpot game is also stored. In addition, the game-per-figure-per-game information indicating that the game per game-per-figure is being executed is also stored.

  Then, a status command is set based on the information stored (stored) in the game status storage area 203g, and the status command is output to the sound lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 receives the output status command and temporarily stores it in the slave status setting area 223g.

  The information stored in the gaming state storage area 203g is configured to be able to hold the information even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and is executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. In the startup process (see FIG. 54) performed, a state command corresponding to the information stored in the gaming state storage area 203g is set.

  Thus, even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, the audio lamp control device 113 can determine the current game state.

  The time reduction counter 203j is a counter for indicating a state in which the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, and a value corresponding to the case where the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set is set. After the big hit game ends, a value corresponding to the won big hit type is set in the time-saving counter 203j (S1914 and 1915 in FIG. 56). And when the big hit game is won, it is cleared to 0. Thereby, since the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is not set during the jackpot game, it is possible to suppress giving an excessive privilege to the player during the jackpot game.

  In this embodiment, when the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, the value of the time reduction counter 203j is set, and the value of the time reduction counter 203j is subtracted based on the special symbol lottery (fluctuation). When the value of becomes zero, the time saving state ends and the state shifts to the normal state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, until the next big hit game is executed, You may be comprised so that the high probability state of a symbol may continue. In this case, the value of the time reduction counter 203j may be set to "10000".

  In the present embodiment, only the condition for terminating the time-saving state and the condition for subtracting the value of the time-saving counter 203j are the conditions for subtracting the value of the time-saving counter 203j based on the number of special symbol lotteries (changes). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when an end condition that can be satisfied by the content of various processes executed by the main control device 110 is satisfied, the value of the time reduction counter 203j is subtracted. May be. Specifically, when the lottery result of each symbol lottery executed in a state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set is a predetermined lottery result (for example, a special out-of-order lottery), or Even when the result is a predetermined lottery result (for example, winning for a special public figure), the value of the time saving counter 203j may be subtracted, or when the ball wins the special power operation port 643. Alternatively, the value of the time reduction counter 203j may be subtracted.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the value of the time reduction counter 203j is configured to be decremented by one. However, a plurality of values of the time reduction counter 203j are grouped (for example, 2) according to the type of the end condition that is satisfied. The subtraction may be performed, or the subtraction may be performed such that the value of the time reduction counter 203j becomes “0” regardless of the current value of the time reduction counter 203j. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how long the time reduction state continues, and to interest the player in the game during the time reduction state.

  Furthermore, the conditions for terminating the time-saving state may be changed depending on the content of the condition (small jackpot type) for setting the time-saving state. Thereby, not only can the player execute the jackpot game, but also the player can be interested in the jackpot type corresponding to the executed jackpot game, and the interest of the game can be improved. .

  The jackpot flag 203i is set to ON when the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired is determined to be a jackpot at the start of the fluctuation based on the fact that the ball has entered the special figure entrance 64. Is a flag to be executed. In addition, when the big hit game ends, it is set to off.

  The time saving end flag 203h is a flag for indicating that the time saving ending condition is satisfied, and is set to ON when the time saving ending condition is satisfied. The time-saving end flag 203h indicates that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 1 in the special symbol variation starting process (see S205 in FIG. 41) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, that is, the current special figure variation is in the time-saving state. Is set to ON when it is determined that this is the final fluctuation (see S311 in FIG. 41). Then, it is referred to in the special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see S208 in FIG. 45) (see S802 in FIG. 45), and when it is determined that the switch is ON, the value of the time reduction counter 203j is reset to “0” and the time reduction state is set. A process for terminating the process is executed (see S803 in FIG. 45) and set to off (see S804 in FIG. 45).

  In addition, during a special symbol change executed during a state in which the time reduction end flag 203j is set to ON (during a final change in the time reduction state), when a ball wins in the V winning opening 165 and a V jackpot game is executed. Is also set to off (see S1508 in FIG. 52).

  That is, in the present embodiment, the subtraction process of the time-saving counter 203h is performed at the start timing of the change of the special symbol, and the end process for determining the end of the time reduction is performed at the stop timing of the change of the special symbol. I have. Then, when the special symbol change is interrupted by the special hit game during the change of the special symbol, and the big hit game (V big hit game) is executed in response to the special hit game, the time reduction end flag 203h is turned off. It is configured to be set.

  Therefore, for example, even if the V jackpot game is executed in a state where the time reduction end flag 203h is set to ON and the special symbol change interrupted after the end of the jackpot game is resumed, the restarted special symbol change is not performed. It is possible to prevent the time saving state from ending at the fluctuation stop timing. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the subtraction process of the time-saving counter 203h is executed at the start of the change of the special symbol, so that the subtraction process of the time-saving end flag 203h may be executed at the restart of the special symbol change. There is no. Therefore, when the time reduction state is set after the end of the big hit game, a process of subtracting the value of the time reduction counter 203j from the time when the next special symbol change after the restart of the special symbol change is started is executed. .

  With this configuration, the player can play the game for a longer time in the set time saving state, and the player's willingness to play can be increased. In the present embodiment, the process of updating the time-saving state only for the final fluctuation of the time-saving state is performed when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Also in the case of ()), the process for updating the time saving state may be performed at the time of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol.

  The accessory hit flag 203k is a flag for indicating that the accessory hit game is executed, and is set to ON when the accessory hit game is executed. The bonus per hit flag 203k is turned on when a ball that has won the general winning a prize device 640 during the general per hit game wins the special power operating port 643 and the per hit special game is not executed at that time. (See S1307 in FIG. 50). Then, in various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, it is referred to when determining whether or not a game per accessory is performed, and is set to off when the game per accessory is finished. In this embodiment, when the accessory hit flag 203k is set to ON, the special symbol change is interrupted.

  The special figure temporary stop flag 203m is a flag indicating a period in which the update (subtraction) of the fluctuation time of the special figure is stopped, and when set to ON, stops the update (subtraction) of the fluctuation time and turns ON. When the setting is turned off from the set state, the updating (subtraction) of the stopped fluctuation time is restarted.

  The special figure temporary stop flag 203m is for indicating that the special symbol change is temporarily stopped (interrupted), and is set to ON when the special symbol change is temporarily stopped (interrupted). Things. In the present embodiment, when a ball is won in the special power operation port 643, a game per role is configured to be executable, and when the game per role is executed, the fluctuation of the special symbol being executed is stopped. It is configured to be.

  The special figure fluctuation time counter 203n is a counter for measuring the fluctuation time of the special symbol, and the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern selected in the special symbol fluctuation pattern selection processing (see S307 of S6 in FIG. 43). Is set (see SS509 in FIG. 43). Then, the value is updated (subtracted) every time the special symbol change execution process (see S206 in FIG. 44) is executed. In the special symbol change process (see S104 in FIG. 40), it is determined whether the value is 0 (see S204 in FIG. 40). Here, when it is determined that the value of the special figure variation time counter 203a is 0 (S204: No in FIG. 40), a special symbol variation stop process for stopping the special symbol that is changing (see S287 in FIG. 45). ) Is executed.

  Further, when a special hit game or a big hit game is executed, the special figure fluctuation time counter 203n is configured to interrupt the processing for subtracting the value. Therefore, the value of the special figure variation time counter 203n is not subtracted during the bonus hit game or the big hit game.

  The V flag 203p is a flag for indicating that the ball has won the V winning opening during the per game play, and is set to ON when the ball has won the V winning opening during the per game play. Is what is done. The setting status of this V flag 203p is referred to in the accessory hit control process (see S1805 in FIG. 58) (see S2008 in FIG. 58), and when it is set to ON, the start of the big hit game (V big hit game) is started. This is set (see S2010 in FIG. 58). Thereafter, it is set to off (see S2011 in FIG. 58).

  In the other memory area 203z, other data necessary for the game, a counter, a flag, and the like are set (stored).

  Returning to FIG. 9, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp, and a lower side of the open / close plate 650b of the specific winning opening 650a. A special winning opening solenoid 209a for opening and closing forward and closing, a V winning opening solenoid 209b for opening and closing the opening and closing door 65a of the V winning device 65, and a storage valve 66a provided in the V winning device 65 are provided. The storage solenoid 209c for driving, the first movable valve solenoid 209d for driving the first movable valve 66b, and the second movable valve solenoid 209e for driving the second movable valve 643 in the general winning award device 640. Also, a solenoid 209 including a solenoid (other solenoid 209z) for driving the electric accessory 640a is connected. MPU201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the output port 205.

  In addition, the input / output port 205 includes a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) (for example, a storage sensor 65 s for detecting a ball stored in a storage unit formed in a storage valve 66 a in the V winning device 65) and the like. The various switches 208 and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115 are connected. The MPU 201 outputs a signal output from the various switches 208 and a RAM erasure signal SG2 output from the RAM erasure switch circuit 253. Various processes are executed based on the above.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 includes a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply unit 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 53) as a process during a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so as to have a launching strength of the ball according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when a command to launch the ball is issued by the main control device 110. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation handle 51 is turned off (not operated) on the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is turned off. The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, turns on and off lights in a lamp display device (such as the illuminated units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a fluctuation effect (fluctuation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the display control device 114, such as the display) and the announcement effect. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225.

  The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22 and, when the player operates the frame button 22, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or performs super-reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect content, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the third image display device 81 displays a rear image corresponding to the changed stage. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and controls display of an error command including the type of the error. Transmit to device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  As shown in FIG. 30A, the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 stores at least a fluctuation pattern selection table 222a and an operation scenario table 222b.

  In the variation pattern selection table 222a, the variation pattern of each variation pattern type (outside, out of reach, various types of reach, etc.) is set in a variation value selection counter value (not shown). The sound ramp control device 113 selects a detailed change pattern based on the change pattern type indicated by the change pattern command received from the main control device 110, the result of the pass / fail determination, and the acquired counter value for selection. Accordingly, the sound lamp control device 113 can select various kinds of change modes while strictly observing rough information such as the change time and the type of the change pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode or the like from being frequently displayed, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired early.

  In the present embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, a variation effect in which the third symbol is variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in correspondence with the special symbol variation to be executed is executed. . In this fluctuation effect, the detailed fluctuation pattern is determined based on the fluctuation pattern type, the result of the determination of success / failure indicated by the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the acquired counter value for selection. By visually recognizing the fluctuating effect performed by the third symbol display device 81, a game (special figure game) can be performed while predicting whether or not the current special symbol fluctuation has won a big hit.

  On the other hand, when the time reduction state is set, the special effect that the variable effect for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery is not executed on the third symbol display device 81 and the regular symbol lottery is aimed at the V-hit game. The effect (V rush effect) for guiding the game content is executed. Therefore, in the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a, various fluctuation patterns are defined as the fluctuation patterns that are referred to when the gaming state is the normal state, and the fluctuation patterns that are referred to when the gaming state is the time saving state. Absent. In the case where the third symbol is displayed small on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in the time reduction state in accordance with the special symbol variation, the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 What is necessary is just to comprise so that only the fluctuating display mode corresponding to (fluctuating time) may be specified.

  The operation scenario table 222b is a data table for the voice lamp control device 113 to grasp the status of operation control for various devices executed on the main control device 110 side. It is formed from the same data table as the operation scenario table 202e. When the operation scenario table 222b receives a command indicating the start of operation control (for example, a command indicating the start of a hit game) from the main control device 110, the operation scenario table 222b is used to set an operation scenario corresponding to the received command. Referenced. The operation scenario set here is controlled to be updated so as to synchronize with the update operation on the main control device 110 side.

  With this configuration, only the command indicating the start of operation control is output from the main control device 110, and the operation status of various devices and future operation development can be easily grasped on the sound lamp control device 113 side. It becomes possible. In the present embodiment, the operation scenario table 222b is provided on the sound lamp control device 113 for the purpose of reducing the processing load on the main control device 110. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The progress status of various operation scenarios included in the various operation scenario table 202e may be set as a command and output to the audio lamp control device 113 side.

  Next, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 30 (b), the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 has a command storage area 223a, a winning information storage area 223b, a special symbol holding ball counter 223c, a special figure change start flag 223d, and a stop type selection flag. 223e, effect counter 223f, slave state setting area 223g, look-ahead counter 223h, saving time period counter 223i, unreported period storage area 223j, unreported pending number storage area 223k, interruption flag 223m, special hit flag 223n, extension flag 223p, V At least a rush flag 223q, a fluctuation time counter 223r, a notification pending number storage area 223s, and another memory area 223z are provided.

  The command storage area 223a is an area in which various commands output from the main control device 110 to the sound ramp control device 113 are temporarily stored until processing for the command is executed. To be more specific, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 61) of the sound ramp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a is read out, and the command determination process is performed. , The command is analyzed, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  The winning information storage area 223b has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area) for special symbols, and each of these areas stores winning information. You. Based on the information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the result of the lottery of the reserved ball before the start of the change.

  The special symbol retaining ball number counter 223c is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the special symbol retaining ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. A counter that counts up to four times the number of suspended balls (the number of standbys) of the variable effect that is suspended in the main controller 110. That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from main controller 110.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the reserved ball number with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. Has become.

  Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls of the variable display is added by entering the special figure entrance 64, or the variable display in the special symbol is executed in the main control device 110, When the number of reserved balls is decremented, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  When receiving the reserved ball count command transmitted from the main control device 110, the sound ramp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203c of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball count command, and It is stored in the symbol holding ball number counter 223c. As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. The value can be updated while synchronizing with 203c.

  The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol. That is, in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command, the sound lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, and also stores the stored special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. Is transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify the display control device 114 of the value.

  When the display control unit 114 receives the display reserved ball count command, the value of the reserved ball count indicated by the command, that is, the reserved ball count corresponding to the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 223c of the voice lamp control unit 113, is displayed. Is displayed in the sub-display area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 11B). As described above, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is changed in synchronization with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. Accordingly, the number of the reserved ball count symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203c of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of the reserved balls for which the variable display is suspended.

  The special figure variation start flag 223d is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is set to ON when a special figure variation pattern command for notifying a variation pattern of a special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received. . On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display in the third symbol display device 81 is set.

  The special figure stop type selection flag 223e is set to ON when a stop type command for notifying the special symbol change stop type output from the main control device 110 is received. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display in the third symbol display device 81 is set.

  The effect counter 223f is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, and the like, and is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 98. Each time the main process is executed, it is incremented by one and updated.

  In the slave state setting area 223g, data corresponding to the state command output from the main controller 110 is set. Based on the data set in the slave state setting area 223g, the current game state can also be determined by the sound lamp control device 113. The state setting command is output from the main controller 110 even when the power is turned on, and the backed up game state can be determined by the sound lamp controller 113.

  The look-ahead counter 223h is a counter for measuring the number of special figure reservations in which the fluctuation time is read ahead of the number of time savings set as the time saving state, and the number of time savings set when the time saving state is set. Is set, and the value is decremented in accordance with the number of special figure reservations in which the pre-reading of the variable time is executed. Then, it is referred to when the value of the time-saving period counter 223i described later becomes 0, and when the value of the look-ahead counter 223h is not 0, it becomes a state in which the special symbol change is executed despite the time saving state. , A special effect (see FIG. 19A) is displayed.

  The time reduction period counter 223i is a counter that indicates the time of the special symbol fluctuation (the special figure fluctuation time) until the time reduction state ends, and a plurality of times until the special symbol fluctuation that satisfies the condition for ending the time reduction state ends. A value obtained by accumulating the special figure fluctuation time is set. The value of the time reduction counter 223i is referred to and subtracted from the effect update process (S4111 in FIG. 72) executed every millisecond in the main process (see FIG. 60) of the audio ramp control process 113 (see FIG. 60). 72 (S5303, S5304).

  The value indicated by the time reduction period counter 223i is used when setting the display mode of the timer 812 to indicate the remaining time of the V rush in the V rush effect performed during the time reduction state (see FIG. 12C)). . In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, the game is performed by the same game method (left-handed game) as during the normal state, during the jackpot game, and during the time saving state, and is set after the jackpot game ends. The value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223c is configured to easily reach the upper limit (4) at the timing when the time saving state is started.

  Therefore, on the ending screen of the jackpot game in which the number of time savings is set to four (see FIG. 12A), the special symbol holding information (the special symbol stored in the winning information storage area 223b) acquired at that time is displayed. Based on the prize information, the fluctuation time until the end of the time saving state (the cumulative value of the fluctuation times for four special figure fluctuations) is displayed.

  In addition, even if the number of time savings is a value larger than the upper limit (4) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223c, or if the number of time savings is set to four, the special symbol holding number at the end of the big hit game ( If the number of special figure reservations does not reach four, the value of the time reduction period counter 223i is set according to the special symbol reservation information acquired at that time, and the time reduction period is calculated from the value of the look-ahead counter 223h. The number of special symbol reservations added to the counter 223i is subtracted. Then, when new special symbol hold information is obtained, the special symbol change time is added to the time reduction counter 223i based on the obtained special symbol hold information, and the value of the look-ahead counter 223h is subtracted.

  The unreported period storage area 223j is in a state where the fluctuation time can be added to the time reduction period counter 223i, that is, when the value of the look-ahead counter 223h is 1 or more, despite the reception of the winning command, When the value of the special figure fluctuation time according to the included special symbol holding information cannot be added to the time reduction period counter 223i (for example, during a jackpot game or a bonus game), the special symbol holding information included in the received winning command is received. This area is used to temporarily store the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to.

  The value (special figure fluctuating time) stored in the unreported period storage area 223j is read out when the time saving period can be added, and is referred to when adding to the time saving period counter 223i. With this configuration, regardless of whether the time saving period can be added or not, when a winning command is received, it is only necessary to execute a process of reading the special figure variation time included in the winning command, The processing load on the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  The unreported number-of-reservations storage area 223k is a storage area for temporarily storing the number of winning commands in which the special figure fluctuation time is stored in the above-described unreported period storage area 223j, that is, the number of special symbol reserved balls. Thus, when the time saving period can be added, it is read out, and the value of the look-ahead counter 223h is decremented in accordance with the read value.

  The interruption flag 223m is a flag for indicating that the value of the time reduction period counter 223h is not subtracted, and is a state in which the value of the time reduction period counter 223h is not subtracted, that is, the game per bonus item and the big hit game are executed. It is set to ON when it is turned on.

  The special hit flag 223n is a flag that is set to ON when winning information indicating a special hit ("big hit B") is included in the special symbol stored and stored. The special hit flag 223n is set to ON when it is determined in the big hit end processing (see S4914 of FIG. 69) that the winning storage indicating the special hit is included in the hold storage (see S5013 of FIG. 69). ).

  In the present embodiment, when a special win is present in the special figure hold obtained at the end of the big hit game, only the period until the end of the special symbol change corresponding to the special win is reduced during the V rush. It is configured to be displayed as a period, and further configured to execute an effect (heaven mode) for notifying a player that a special hit exists in the special map reservation (FIG. 17 (a)).

  With such a configuration, after a predetermined period of time (after a short period of time displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81), a jackpot game (a jackpot won by the special figure lottery) is given to the player. Since the execution of the game can be notified in advance, the player can play the game with peace of mind. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the heaven mode is set, the period until the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation corresponding to the special winning ends is notified as a shortened period, so that the big hit is achieved. The remaining period of time and short-term at the time of the game (special hit) can be set to 0 seconds. Therefore, since it is possible to easily inform the player how many seconds the jackpot game will be executed, the V jackpot during the time-saving period of the heaven mode (during the time until the jackpot game of the special jackpot is executed). The game can be performed while the player can enjoy how many times the game can be executed.

  Further, when the heaven mode is set, the period until the change time of the special symbol change corresponding to the special hit is finished is notified as a shortened time period. The special figure fluctuating time corresponding to the special figure hold acquired after the figure hold can be prevented from being determined in advance by the player. Thereby, for example, when the jackpot game corresponding to the special hit is executed in a stage where the time saving period is 10 seconds remaining, the fluctuation time of the next special symbol change to be executed is 10 seconds in advance. It is possible to suppress that the player's willingness to play is reduced.

  The extension flag 223p is a flag that indicates that the time-saving state game is being executed at the timing when the time-saving state end condition is satisfied, and is executed at the time when the time-saving state end condition is satisfied. It is set to on when it is set. In the present embodiment, as the operation scenario of the per-figure game, the per-figure per-scenario 202e31 corresponding to the per-figure game in the normal state, and the And a scenario 202e32, and is configured to variably set the game content of the per-figure game based on the game state set at the per-figure-per-game execution timing.

  Therefore, for example, when the game per game is executed just before the end of the time reduction state, the game per game in the time reduction state may be executed even after the game state is shifted to the normal state. When such a state occurs, an effect is produced in which the end timing of the V rush effect indicating the game mode during the time reduction state is extended to the end timing of the game per ordinary figure (FIG. 16). (C)). This makes it possible to inform the player of the period in which a V prize is to be aimed (V rush period) in an easy-to-understand manner.

  The V rush flag 223q is a flag for indicating that it is a V rush period, and is set to ON when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery (special figure lottery) in a normal state, and a condition for terminating a time-saving state. Is set to off when the condition is satisfied. The V rush flag 223q is configured to be continuously set to ON even when a jackpot game is executed during a time reduction period (during V rush). This makes it possible to easily set a period in which various types of accumulated information (information for indicating the number of acquired V jackpot games and the number of acquired balls during the V rush period) in the V rush period are calculated.

  The fluctuation time counter 223r is a counter for measuring the fluctuation time of the special symbol. When a fluctuation pattern command of the special symbol is received, the fluctuation time corresponding to the received fluctuation pattern command is set, and the voice lamp control is performed. In the effect update processing (S4111 in FIG. 72) executed every 1 millisecond in the main processing of the processing 113 (see FIG. 60), reference and subtraction are performed (see S5303 and S5304 in FIG. 72). The value of the fluctuation time counter 223h is referred to when determining the remaining period of the special symbol fluctuation being executed at the timing when the special symbol fluctuation can be interrupted, and is used to set a different effect mode according to the remaining period. Can be

  The notified pending number storage area 223s is an area for storing the number of special figure reservations corresponding to the fluctuation time already added to the value of the time reduction counter 223i, and the value of the unreported pending number storage area 223k is updated. In this case, the updated value is stored, and the value is subtracted when the special symbol change ends. Then, at the end of the jackpot game in which the new number of time savings is set, a new time saving state is set by subtracting the value stored in the notified pending number storage area 223s from the value set in the look-ahead counter 223h. In this case, the number of special symbol reserved balls already notified as the remaining period of the time reduction state is subtracted, and the number of special symbol reserved balls that can newly add and display the time reduction period corresponds to the value of the look-ahead counter 223h. Used for

  The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-described data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the present embodiment, the effect that suggests the fluctuation time corresponding to the special figure hold acquired in the normal state to the player is not executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. You may be comprised so that the production | presentation aspect may be changed according to the special figure reservation content.

  For example, the special symbol stop type (combination of the third symbols indicating the jackpot) may be variably set based on the fluctuation time corresponding to the acquired special figure hold, and the total of the special figure hold fluctuation times is If a big hit is won in a state where the time exceeds 100 seconds, a combination of the third symbols in which odd numbers are stopped and displayed at the same time may be displayed.

  In addition, the display mode of the reserved symbol displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 during the normal state is configured to be variably set based on the length of the fluctuation time in addition to the presence or absence of the jackpot winning by the special figure lottery. You may.

  In the present embodiment, when the vehicle enters the V-rush, all the variable times based on the acquired special figure reservation are notified, but the present invention is not limited to this. The player may be notified of only a part of the fluctuating time based on the hold, or the player may operate the operating means, so that the duration of the V rush (a period until the time-saving state ends). May be configured to be selectable for a game in which the change time of the special symbol for indicating is not notified.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the fluctuation times corresponding to a plurality of special figure fluctuations executed until the time saving end condition is satisfied are added and reported, but the present invention is not limited to this. May be configured so that the technician can identify the fluctuating time corresponding to the special figure reservation. In this case, for example, a special figure suspension display mode corresponding to a special figure change executed until the time saving end condition is satisfied is displayed in a display mode imitating a character, and the display mode is imitated according to the type of the displayed character. The configuration may be such that the player can roughly grasp the length of the change time of the special figure change corresponding to the special figure reservation.

  In this embodiment, since the time saving state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, is always set after the big hit game is executed, the V rush flag is set when the big hit game is executed. However, for example, if the time reduction state and the normal state are set at a specific ratio after the end of the jackpot game, the jackpot game is executed. Even so, there is a possibility that the time saving state is not set after the end of the big hit game. In this case, after the big hit game ends (during the ending period of the big hit game), it is determined whether or not the time saving state is set after the big hit game ends based on the set big hit type, and the time saving state is set. , It can be changed after the suspension of the special figure acquired at that time.

  Next, the contents of the game executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment triggered by the ordinary symbol lottery will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 31 is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when the per-chart game is executed in the normal state, and FIG. 32 is the timing chart of the game when the per-chart game is executed in the time-saving state. 6 is a timing chart showing a flow.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 31, the flow of the game in the case where the game per ordinary figure is executed in the normal state will be described. In the present embodiment, a game (special electric game) that can proceed in the order of a general game per game, a game per character, and a jackpot game (V jackpot game) can be executed in response to a win in a normal symbol lottery. Make up. That is, the big hit game can be executed without performing the special symbol lottery.

  First, in the normal state, when a win is made by the ordinary symbol lottery, a general per-game game based on the normal general-purpose per-game scenario 202e31 (see FIG. 27C) is executed, and the general-electric winning device 640 controls the opening. Is done. As shown in FIG. 27C, in the per-figure-period game executed during the normal state, it takes 4 seconds (t1) from the start of the per-figure-period game to the opening of the electric accessory 640a. Then, after the opening state for 0.1 second (t2) and the closing state for 1 second (t3), the game per ordinary drawing ends. Then, during the four seconds (t4) from the start timing of the game per day, the second movable valve solenoid 209e is set to the ON state so that the ball can enter the special power operating port 643 with the second movable valve 643. Thereafter, the second movable valve solenoid 209e is turned off so that the ball is guided to the out port 644.

  Therefore, in the per-figure game executed during the normal state, it is difficult for the ball to enter the general-electric winning device 640, and even if the ball is won, the winning ball is guided to the out port 644. Will be. Thus, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from winning in the special power operation port 643 during the normal state and the game per hit is executed. With this configuration, during the normal state in which the special figure game aiming at the execution of the big hit game by the lottery of the special symbol is executed, and in the time reduction state in which the special electric game aiming to execute the big hit game by the lottery of the normal symbol is executed. Even if it is configured to execute the same game method in the middle and the middle, it is possible to suppress the execution of the jackpot game by the special electric game during the normal state, and to provide the player with the jackpot game excessively. Can be suppressed.

  In this embodiment, the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (four times or fifteen times) during the time reduction state, so that the special symbol lottery is completed. Must be prevented from being executed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the normal state, the jackpot game state, and the time reduction state are configured to execute the same game method. This can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, the operation content of the per-figure game is set so as to prohibit the execution of the special electric game during the normal state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The same operation scenario as the per-figure game executed during the time reduction state may be selected in a part of the per-figure per-game. As a result, it is possible to cause the player to play a surprising game.

  Returning to FIG. 31, the description will be continued. As described above, in the case where the game is performed per normal map during the normal state, the ball that has won the general power prize device 640 does not win the special power operation port 643. There is no execution of a per-prize game that is executed in response to a prize, and a per-prize game in which the V-prize device 65 is opened and a jackpot game in which the variable prize device 650 is opened are not executed. Then, a new normal symbol change (normal figure change) is executed based on the end of the game per normal figure. The first movable valve 66b (FIG. 31 (h)) is set to an operation scenario in which the pachinko machine 10 is constantly driven while the power is turned on. , Are driven in an operation pattern based on the first movable valve operation scenario 202e4 (see FIG. 27A).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the flow of the game in the case where the big hit game (V big hit game) is executed among the flow of the game in the case where the ordinary figure hit game is executed in the time saving state will be described. .

  First, in the time saving state, when a normal symbol lottery has been won, a game-per-game game based on the time-saving general-purpose figure scenario 202e32 (see FIG. 28) is executed, and the general-purpose winning device 640 is controlled to be opened. In the per-figure-period game executed during the time-saving state, as shown in FIG. 28, it takes 0.1 seconds (t1) from the start of the per-figure-period game to the opening of the electric accessory 640a. After that, the game ends in the open state of 3 seconds (t2) and the closed state of 1 second (t3), and then the game ends. Then, during the four seconds (t4) from the start timing of the game per day, the second movable valve solenoid 209e is set to the ON state so that the ball can enter the special power operating port 643 with the second movable valve 643. Thereafter, the second movable valve solenoid 209e is turned off so that the ball is guided to the out port 644.

  Therefore, in the game per game performed during the time-saving state, the ball can easily enter the general-purpose winning device 640 (easier to win than the game per normal map in the normal state), and the winning ball can be activated by the special electric power. The mouth 643 is configured such that it is easy to win a prize (it is easier to win a prize than a normal game per game in a normal state). As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the special-powered operation port 643 to win a ball and to easily execute the role-winning game in the normal-time-period game executed during the time-saving state.

  The passing of the ball (winning) is detected by the special winning opening switch (FIG. 32 (e)) (not shown) and the ball that has won the special operating opening 643, and the detection result triggers the opening operation of the V winning device 65. A hit game is executed. When the game per role is started, after a standby period of 0.1 second (t5) has elapsed, the V winning opening solenoid 209b is set to ON for 1.5 seconds (t6) to open the V opening / closing door 65a. After that, during the 1.4 seconds (t7), a bonus hit game in which the V winning opening solenoid 209b is turned off is executed. In addition, at the start of the per-principal game, the storage solenoid 209c is set to ON for 1.6 seconds (t8) to position the storage valve 66a in the storage state. In other words, during the period in which the ball can enter the V-prize device 65 by the per game play, the storage valve 66a is maintained in the storage state (see FIG. 7). It is possible to prevent a plurality of balls from reaching the V winning opening 165.

  When the storage solenoid 209c is turned off after the elapse of the period t8, one ball stored in the storage section of the storage valve 66a flows down to the first movable valve 66b. The first movable valve 66b is driven based on the first movable valve operation scenario 202e4 so as to be alternately switched between a closed state of 5 seconds (t10) and an opened state of 0.5 seconds (t9). When the ball stored at the valve 66a reaches the first movable valve 66a, if the first movable valve 66b is in the closed state, the ball flows down toward the second out port 163b, and the first movable valve 66b Is open, the ball flows down to the V winning opening 165. When a ball wins in the V winning opening 165, the passage of the ball is detected by a V winning switch (not shown) (FIG. 32 (i)), and a jackpot game (V jackpot game) is started based on the detection result.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the case where the game per game is executed during the time reduction state, it is easy to make the general electric winning device 640 win a ball (rather than the game per game in the normal state). In the case where the winning ball executes a game per ordinary figure which is easy for the winning ball to enter the special power operation port 643 and the game per ordinary figure is executed during the normal state, the general electric winning device 640 is used. Even if it is difficult to win the ball (it is harder to win than the game in the time-saving state), and even if the ball has won the general-purpose winning device 640, the winning ball goes to the special power operation port 643. It is configured to execute a game that is difficult to win.

  With this configuration, in order to continuously execute the special symbol change during the time saving state, a game method aiming at the special entrance 64 serving as a special symbol lottery trigger, and a through pattern serving as a normal symbol lottery trigger. Even if the game method for aiming at the gate 67 is the same as the game method, the probability that the game per accessory will be executed can be greatly different depending on the game state. In addition, in a per-figure game in a normal state, an act of illegally winning a ball to the general-purpose winning device 640 (for example, a ball is stopped by a magnet in the vicinity of the electric accessory 640a, and the ball is synchronized with the opening timing). Is performed, the winning ball can be prevented from winning in the special power operating port 643, so that a fair game can be provided to the player.

  Further, in the present embodiment, not only a game for establishing a special symbol lottery trigger or a normal symbol lottery trigger, but also a general hit per game, a hit per role item, and a hit per hit game are executed in a left-handed game. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly play the game without causing the player to feel troublesome to change the game method.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the audio lamp control device 113, displays a variation (variation) of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Direction) and a notice effect. The details of the display control device 114 will be described later.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 10). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt processing. Note that, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 53).

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 10) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data and also controls the payout control device 111 to execute a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to the device 111.

<Electrical Configuration of Display Control Device According to First Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 33 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the audio lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. The third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model having a different special lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot and a different number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce the cost.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches an instruction code stored at an address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to perform a system reset from the power supply 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies to the following). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231 a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided in a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. Instead, the character data is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a that can be increased in capacity with a small area. Thus, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure rate due to the increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, in general, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed is reduced particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages, high-speed reading of data on the second and subsequent pages is possible, but an address is specified for reading data of the first page. It takes a long time from when the data is output. In addition, when data that is not continuous is read, a large amount of time is required each time the data is read. As described above, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is low, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporarily storing various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at a high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed by the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240. The image controller 237 stores image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, and the like. The data is transferred to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a nonvolatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as the images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. As described above, the control program and the fixed value data are provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on an address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like is read. And outputs it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) occur during data writing, and a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and reads and writes the data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a defective data block. Performs the data address translation of

  Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error is corrected based on the erroneous data. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  Further, the bad data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b, and access to the bad data block is avoided, so that the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 use different bad data for each NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even when the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complexity of controlling access to the character ROM 234.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is specified from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b operates for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the specified address. Is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or the NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. I do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction process, and outputs data corresponding to the specified address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one bank of data of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Accordingly, the ROM controller 234b outputs data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or specifies the data from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is stored in the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the response in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the programs not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 first stores the program after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. After the system reset is released, the MPU 231 executes the boot program first. Thus, the display control device 114 can be set to a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the boot program, and should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored from the instructions. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be smaller than the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and specifies the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” is specified on the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

  When fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds one to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects from among the programs previously set from the NOR-type ROM 234d to the buffer RAM 234c. , And reads the instruction code at the corresponding address from the buffer RAM 234c and outputs it to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing the entire control program in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released from the NOR type ROM 234d in the boot program. Is stored for the following reason. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a requires a long time from the address designation to the data output in reading the first page of data, which is unique to the NAND flash memory. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a great amount of time is required from the reading thereof to the setting to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address “0000H” and then executes the instruction corresponding to the address “0000H”. Spend a lot of time waiting to receive the code. Therefore, the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory from which data can be read at a high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. When the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program is stored in a program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, one page capacity of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. The MPU 231 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, and sets the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the setting, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is used. The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 moves the instruction pointer 231a into the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a moves to the first predetermined position in the program storage area 233a. The address is set.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetches the instruction, but reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, so that a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1 include the remaining boot programs in the control programs transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. The program is programmed so as to include the instruction pointer 231a with the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Execute the remaining boot program included in the control program.

  In the remaining boot programs, all of the remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) used in the control programs are stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 73) executed after the boot process by the boot program (see S6001 in FIG. 73) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed by the MPU 231 to the end, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high read speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, without storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored, and for the remaining boot programs, Even when the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR-type ROM 234d having a very small capacity. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time. Can be.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 38) transmitted from the MPU 231 to be described later, and selects one of a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs this one-frame image drawing process and one-frame image display process for one frame of image display time (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment) on the third symbol display device 81. In parallel.

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering process of the image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 75 (b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing processing of the image for the next one frame, and executes the processing of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing or the display processing is not completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image during drawing of the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed according to a new drawing instruction.

  The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 based on a transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  Note that drawing of an image is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, the NAND flash memory generally facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, but has a slower reading speed than other ROMs (such as a mask ROM and an EEPROM). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to be. Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thereby, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data to be used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed when drawing an image. The time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Particularly, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114 are resident. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  When drawing an image using nonresident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 needs to perform drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image. However, at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. It is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of, and the time required for reading out the image data can be omitted. Therefore, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  In addition, since the image data is also stored in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data reside in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data, which is performed by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction and the transfer data information of the drawing list, includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of the transfer destination (the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a in accordance with the various information of the transfer instruction, and temporarily stores the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used. Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction to the storage source end address is transferred.

  As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing processing. In addition, it is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being delayed.

  Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine a period that is not used for display processing on the device 81, and to simplify the processing.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is maintained without being overwritten during power-on. The power-on main image area 235a, the back image area 235c, and the character design area 235e, an error message image area 235f, and at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d.

  The power-on main image area 235a stores a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on to when all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. An area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, a game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a ball entering the special figure entrance 64 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image that displays the result of the lottery performed by the main control device 110 in a fluctuation effect when performed.

  The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 73).

  Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 shows the power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the display control device 114 is turned on and while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

  The display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Then, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the transfer of the remaining image data is being performed, the display control device 114 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a first and uses the power-on main image shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when the display control unit 114 receives the display change pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control unit 113 based on the change pattern command from the main control unit 110, which is the change start instruction command, the display control unit 114 switches to the state illustrated in FIG. As shown in FIG. 34, on the display screen of the power-on main image, a power-on fluctuation image of a symbol “○” is provided at the lower right position toward the screen, and as shown in FIG. At the same position as the symbol, a power-on variation image of an “X” symbol is alternately and repeatedly displayed during the variation period. Then, based on the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110, the display fluctuation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 are used for the lottery performed by the main control device 110. The result is judged, and if it is “special symbol jackpot”, the image shown in FIG. 34 (b) is displayed for a certain period of time after stopping the fluctuation effect, and if it is “special symbol loss”, the image shown in FIG. 34 (c) is displayed. The image shown is displayed for a certain period after the fluctuation effect is stopped.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a to the image controller 237 until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs the main image to be drawn at power-on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall can check the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display controller 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. In addition, the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the remaining images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are displayed. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the user must wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has not stopped. Can be.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 can be started without any problem by turning on the power. Can be immediately confirmed, and the use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed as the character ROM 234 can prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

  In addition, when the player starts the game while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the ball is detected at the special figure entrance 64, the power-on fluctuation image is displayed. The power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in the area 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 34 (b) and (c) are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to display it. Thus, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image. Therefore, even when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can reliably confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple variable effect.

  Also, at the stage when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. If a ball is detected in the special figure entrance 64 while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding fluctuation effect is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can be.

  Returning to FIG. 33, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the rear image and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is an explanatory diagram for explaining four types of back images and the range of the back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each of the back images. FIG. 35B shows the back surface A corresponding to the “town stage” and the back surfaces B to D corresponding to the “forest stage”, “river stage”, and “sky stage”, respectively. . FIG. 28 illustrates the back surface E corresponding to the “island stage”.

  As shown in FIG. 35, as the back images corresponding to the back surfaces A to D, images that are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are prepared in the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws the image such that the rear image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

  The images prepared on each of the rear surfaces A to D (hereinafter, referred to as “scroll images”) are configured such that the rear images are continuous at positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a ′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and are images between the position c and the position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display region, and then the image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display region. The back image is scrolled and displayed with a proper connection.

  When the change of the back type is determined based on the back type selection table (not shown) and the stage is changed to “city stage”, “forest stage”, “river stage”, or “sky stage”, the MPU 231 First, the position between the position a and the position a 'of the corresponding rear image is set as the initial position of the display area, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Then, as time passes, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the region reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display region is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as the image from the position a to the position a ′. Therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, the image between the positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with a smooth connection so as to flow toward the left.

  On the other hand, the back image on the back E is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) →. Specifically, the back E is a third pattern in which the image of the mountain towering over the island, the image of the sandy beach spreading at the foot of the mountain, and the image of the sea surrounding the island are fixed in the displayed position. It is displayed on the display device 81. On the other hand, the color of an image of the sky spreading over the mountain changes over time.

  When the stage is changed to the “island stage”, an orange sky indicating dawn is displayed as the initial back image of the back E. Then, as the time elapses, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to bright blue, and after a lapse of a predetermined time, a bright blue sky indicating the day is displayed. Next, as the time elapses, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from vivid blue to black, and after the elapse of a predetermined time, a black sky indicating night is displayed. Thereafter, as the time elapses, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from black to white and then changes to orange. Then, after a lapse of a predetermined time, the back image which repeatedly returns to the back image showing the dawn is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c in each back image will be described. As shown in FIG. 35 (a), the rear surface A corresponding to the street stage which is the initial stage has the entire range of the rear surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the positions a to d are the rear surfaces of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. Normally, the game is often performed without changing the stage while the initial stage “town stage” is displayed, so the image data of the back A corresponding to the “city stage” displayed frequently is displayed. By making them all resident in the back image area 235c, the number of times of data access to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, the back surface B corresponding to the “forest stage”, the back surface C corresponding to the “river stage”, and the back surface D corresponding to the “sky stage” are, as shown in FIG. That is, only the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. The image data corresponding to the back surface E corresponding to the island stage is stored and resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 during the startup processing after power is turned on.

  Here, in order to immediately change the rear image, it is ideal that the entire range of image data for all the rear images is resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, a very large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

  On the other hand, in the present pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is fixed in the range from the position a to the position a ', and the position is shifted from the position a including the initial position to the position a'. Since the image data corresponding to the image between b and b is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the fluctuation starts. When the stage change is determined by the lottery at the time, by using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the initial positions of the back BD are immediately displayed in the third symbol. The display 81 can be displayed on the display 81 while scrolling or changing the color tone over time. Rukoto can. In addition, since only the image data corresponding to the partial range of the images is stored for the rear surfaces B to D, an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

  After the image at the initial position is displayed, the rear surfaces BD use the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to move the range from position a to position b from left to right. The range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b 'to the position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 during scrolling. As a result, the image data from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while scrolling the range from the position a to the position b, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. After scrolling the range from the position a to the position b using the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from the position b ′ to the position d is scrolled. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  Similarly, after the image at the initial position is displayed, while the image is displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the image data of the remaining image is displayed. The range of the image data is set so that the transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 can be completed. This allows the image data corresponding to the remaining images to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the image is being displayed, so that the image is displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. After that, the remaining images can be sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the lapse of time using the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  On the rear sides B to E, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the rear image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 33) of the normal video RAM 236. Thereby, the rear image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the rear image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the rear image can be displayed reliably.

  In the backsides B to D, the image data stored in the backside image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 correspond to the image between the position b ′ and the position b. Image data to be duplicated is stored. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b ′ on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the rear image is scroll-displayed with a smooth connection to the third symbol display device 81. ing.

  Further, when the MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so as to display the image between the position c and the position d as a display area on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data of the normal video RAM 236, The MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a 'is displayed as a display area on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data of the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. I do. This allows the third symbol display device 81 to repeatedly scroll and display the images between the positions a to c so as to flow in the leftward direction.

  Returning to FIG. 33, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area where the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is resident. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned ten types of main symbols with numbers “0” to “9”, which are the third symbols, are resident. Thus, when performing a fluctuation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read out image data from the character ROM 234 every time. A fluctuating effect can be started quickly. Therefore, the third symbol display device is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 after the ball entry to the special figure entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 occurs, even though the variable effect has been started. In 81, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the fluctuation effect is not immediately started.

  Further, in the third symbol area 235d, as a main symbol without numbers “0” to “9”, a main symbol including a rear symbol such as a wooden box, or a character such as a rear symbol such as a plane, a furoshiki, a helmet, or the like. The image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating the symbol is also resident. These image data are used for a demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next fluctuation effect associated with the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of one fluctuation effect. Can be Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Accordingly, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbol without a number from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the present pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy", "old man", and "girl" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is displayed in the character design area 235e. By being resident, when changing the character design based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but uses By reading out image data resident in the character design area 235e of the video RAM 235 in advance, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the character pattern can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of the vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Also, when the occurrence of another error is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to, when receiving the error command, display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error, from the viewpoint of preventing the player from cheating and protecting the player from the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 determines the error message in the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data previously resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

  The MPU 231 transfers the image data necessary for drawing the subsequent image data among the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236. , And instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data specified by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  Note that the transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including the transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. Accordingly, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, and thus can reduce the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing the image for one frame into the frame buffer. While the image is being developed, while the image is being developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame that has been previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. Then, by transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process of displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 simultaneously develops one frame of the image drawn in one frame buffer while developing the image. The image for one frame that has been developed first is read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame for displaying the image on the third symbol display device 81 are different from each other. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of FIG. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. You.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. You. Thereafter, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. Be composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and stored image data determination. It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a rear image change flag 233w, a rear image discrimination flag 233x, a demonstration display flag 233y, and a confirmed display flag 233z.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads out the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 , It is possible to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table that describes display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

  These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in a second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to a boot program executed by the MPU 231 after a system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from character ROM 234 to work RAM 233, and stored in data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114. Using 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect, an opening effect A display data table corresponding to a round effect, an ending effect, and a demo effect is prepared.

  The fluctuation effect is an effect started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display fluctuation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the variation effect stop type is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is off, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is the jackpot A, the jackpot B In any case, the stop symbols indicating the respective jackpots are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in the variable effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  The opening effect is an effect for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will be shifted to a special game state from now on and the large opening which is normally closed will be repeatedly opened, and the round effect will start from now on. This is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be performed. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player of the end of the special game state.

  Note that, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning prize is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of one variable effect. The third symbol consisting of the main symbol without numbers “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the back image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person related to the hall can recognize that the game is not performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to each of the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. In addition, as for the variable display data table which is a display data table for the variable effect, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variable effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is defined as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  In the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucency, Drawing information, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, for drawing a sprite on the third symbol display device 81 is defined.

  The sprite type is information for specifying a sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 at which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement factor is information for specifying an enlargement factor for a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement factor. When the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed with being enlarged from a standard size. When the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced with respect to the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucent value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite is displayed. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing a superimposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for specifying a color tone of a sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information is information for specifying an image filter to be applied to a specified sprite when drawing the specified sprite.

  In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), And one light image in the image are defined as one frame of rendering content defined corresponding to each address. For each address, drawing information for each sprite such as an effect expressing insertion of characters and characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters is defined. Note that one or more pieces of information on effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are set with respect to the passage of time. Since it is assumed to be constant, only the rear type, which is information for specifying the type of the rear image, is specified in the variable display data table. The back type corresponds to the stage selected by the player (one of the “town stage”, “forest stage”, “river stage”, “sky stage”, and “island stage”). Information specifying whether to display any one of them or to display a back image different from the back images A to E is described. In the case of specifying that a back image different from the back A to E is to be displayed, the back type also includes information for specifying which back image is to be displayed.

  When it is specified by the back type that any of the backs A to E is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies a back image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery among the backs A to E as a drawing target, In addition, the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified as time passes. On the other hand, when it is specified that a back image different from the back A to E is to be displayed, the back image to be displayed is specified based on the back type.

  In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which only the back type is defined as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table. Instead, the back type and the range of May be defined as position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating an elapsed time from when the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time from when the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time since drawing of an image based on the display data table (or display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third symbol display device 81).

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and drawing of an image based on the display data table according to the rear type (or the third symbol display device 81). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of the display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. This is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may be information indicating an address at which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of the information indicating the elapsed time.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers given to the respective third symbols. Rather than directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and the offset information from the stop symbol of the immediately preceding variation effect is described in the symbol offset information from the start of the variation until a predetermined time has elapsed. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop symbol in the preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set in accordance with the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113. Provide information. Thus, the variable effect can be stopped at a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since each 3rd symbol is given a unique number, a variation symbol in the immediately preceding variation effect and a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110 are displayed in the 3rd symbol. , And the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols, whereby the third symbol to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information.

  In the symbol offset information, the predetermined time in which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed this time, the third symbol fluctuates at a high speed. It is set to be the time displayed. While the third symbol is being displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the stop effect of the variable effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time, even if the continuity of the numeral of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is not made aware of the discontinuity of the continuity of the numeral. be able to.

  “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the start address of the display data table, and the data table is stored in the last address (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 37) of the display data table. "End" information indicating the end of the process is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and selects the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, every time the rendering processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is used to add The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 33) described later is created. By transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is issued. As a result, the drawing content is specified in the order specified in the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233f, and the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the present pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and the like. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

  Here, when a program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, as in a conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. A large load is applied to the processing of starting and executing a complicated and enormous program, which may limit the processing capability of the display control device 114 and limit the diversification of controllable effect images. there were. On the other hand, in the present pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, a variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Also, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each of the rendering modes, a display data table buffer corresponding to the rendering mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason why it can be created is that in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning start. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation, so that the display content cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the presentation mode. As described above, the display data table is prepared corresponding to each rendering mode, the display data table buffer is set according to the rendering mode to be displayed, and the drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized for the first time based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning start.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, the resident one of the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table. The transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

  If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thus, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and is transfer data information of image data of a sprite to be transferred at a time indicated by the address (hereinafter, referred to as “transfer target image data”). (Corresponding to addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 37). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (address “0002H” in FIG. 37 corresponds).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 where the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) Is included.

  Note that, as in the display data table, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in the start address “0000H” of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 37, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table. Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 33) described later is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite at which transfer is to be started at that time is obtained, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 37, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified at the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, since null data is defined at the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the transfer data table is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays the display data according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110 or the like. At the same time as setting the table in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thus, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and transfers transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address. Since the data information is specified, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236. Thus, the transfer start timing can be instructed, so that even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, various effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c determines whether or not to display the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIGS. 34 (a) to (c) on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to indicate. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. Is set to ON in the main processing (see FIG. 73) executed by the MPU 231 (see S6005 in FIG. 73). Then, at the stage when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, the third symbol display device 81 displays an image other than the power-on image. It is set to off (see S7605 in FIG. 85 (b)).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 75 (b)). When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 75B) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 75B) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 75 (b) of S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed in accordance with a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 76 to 81) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 82 to 84) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during the V interrupt process (see S7501 in FIG. 85A), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 85 (b)) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because there is resident target image data not stored in the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 86) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. This is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and stores a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. Then, the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one, and, based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, increments the image controller 237 for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 33) described below, which describes the contents of the image drawing instruction for the. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d while adding the pointer 233f to the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f. A drawing list described later (see FIG. 38) that describes the contents of the drawing instruction is generated. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e stores a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is a buffer for storing. When storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. The data is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the image data of the sprite used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f to the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while defining the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f. If this is the case (that is, if no Null data is described), the transfer data information is stored in a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 38) that describes the contents of an image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Accordingly, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw a predetermined sprite in accordance with the display data table. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. Is to be specified. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 at the same time that the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed from the image controller 237 (FIG. 75 (b) ), The pointer update process (see S7205 in FIG. 84) is performed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time such an update of the pointer 233f is performed, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, (See FIG. 38), transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to start transfer at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data Add the information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effects can be displayed.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn before the drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing the image can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is used by an image controller to draw an image for one frame, which is generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. 237 is an area for storing a drawing list instructed by 237.

  Here, the drawing list will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 38, the back image used for the image of one frame and the third symbol (the symbol 1, ..., effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball number design 1, reserved ball number design 2, ..., error) For each sprite such as a pattern, detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (displayed object) is stored. The image controller 237 obtains image data of the sprite from a memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to a scaling process according to a magnification ratio, a rotation process according to a rotation angle, and a translucent process according to a translucent value. Subject to alpha blending information, perform synthesis processing with other sprites, perform color tone correction processing according to color information, and perform filtering processing according to the method specified by that information according to filter specification information. Then, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the rendered image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the rendering target buffer flag 233j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, a hold Based on the image and a warning image notifying that an error has occurred, detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, in the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and the address of the data of the sprite (display object) correspond to the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from other image contents. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored, or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 responds to the sprite type. Thus, the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  Further, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Also, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged from the rearmost side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image of one frame, and obtains detailed drawing information for each sprite. (Detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, first, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described, and then, the third design (design 1, design 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite in accordance with the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the frontmost side.

  Further, when the transfer data information is described in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transmits the transfer data information (the character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source top address and the storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination top address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes the transfer data information, the image controller 237 reads an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating an effect time of an effect to be displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. The time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

  Then, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering processing and the display processing of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 75 (b) Each time the display setting process is performed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S7207 in FIG. 82). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the operation in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processings to be performed.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i indicates that, for all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to that sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. This is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is any.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 74) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to “OFF” indicating that the storage states for all sprites are not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 86) executed by the MPU 231. Will be In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprite to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as that of the one sprite is always in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to the other sprite is set to “off”.

  The MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i when transferring image data of a sprite for which image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines the transfer target sprite. It is determined whether the image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7713 in FIG. 86). If the storage state corresponding to the transfer target sprite is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S7714 in FIG. 86). The image controller 237 causes the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, since the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as a “drawing target buffer”) that develops an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). If the rendering target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the rendering target buffer, and if it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is designated. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7802 in FIG. 87).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the rendered image information already developed from a frame buffer different from the rendering target buffer in parallel with the rendering process, and sends the read image information to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated at the same time that the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done by Thus, the drawing buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. The process is performed every time the drawing process (see S6306 in FIG. 75B) is executed.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of FIG. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. You.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. You. Thereafter, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

  The back image change flag 233w is a flag for determining whether or not to change the type of the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If the back image change flag 233w is on, it means that the type of the back image is changed, and if it is off, it means that no change is made. The rear image change flag 233w is set to ON when a rear image change command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 is received (see S7001 in FIG. 81A). The rear image change flag 233w is referred to in the normal image transfer setting process (see S7709 in FIG. 86), and is turned off when the rear image change process is executed (see S7710 in FIG. 86). Thereby, the rear image corresponding to the rear image change command or the effect mode change command received from the audio lamp control device 113 can be displayed.

  The back image determination flag 233x is a flag indicating the set back image type. This flag is composed of, for example, one byte, and each back type is associated with each bit. If any of the bits of the back image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the back type corresponding to the on bit is set as the current back type. For example, if the 0th bit of the rear image determination flag 233x is on, it means that the rear surface A is set. When a back image change command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received, a bit corresponding to the back image notified by the command is set to on in the back image determination flag 233x (see FIG. 81 (a) ) Of S7002). At this time, all other bits are set to off. With the back image determination flag 233x, the back type currently set can be easily specified.

  The demonstration display flag 233y is a flag indicating whether or not a demonstration is being performed. If the demonstration display flag 233y is on, it means that the demonstration is being performed, and if it is off, it means that the demonstration is not being performed. The demonstration display flag 233y is set to ON when the demonstration display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 82) (see S7221 in FIG. 82), and the demonstration display data table is displayed. If any other display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d, it is turned off (S6505 in FIG. 77A, S6705 in FIG. 78A, and S6805 in FIG. 78B). 79 of FIG. 79). With the demonstration display flag 233y, it can be easily determined whether or not the demonstration is currently being performed.

  The fixed display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not the fixed display effect is being executed. Here, the fixed display effect is an effect in which the stop symbol is stopped (fixed display) for a predetermined period (for example, one second) after the fluctuation pattern. When the confirmed display flag 233z is on, it means that the confirmed display effect is being performed, and when it is off, it means that the confirmed display effect is not being performed. The confirmed display flag 233z is set to ON when the confirmed display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 82) (S7214 in FIG. 82), and the other than the confirmed display data table is set. It is turned off when another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d (S6505 in FIG. 86 (a), S6705 in FIG. 78 (a), S6805 in FIG. 78 (b), FIG. 79, S6905). With the final display flag 233z, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the final display effect is currently being produced.

<Control Process Executed by Main Controller in First Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process started upon power-on, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer started periodically (at an interval of 2 ms in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process started by input of a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, first, a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process will be described, and then a start process will be described. And the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of the various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined to store the detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches a maximum value (399 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches a maximum value (999 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). More specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, and the second random number counter C4 are each incremented by one, and their counter values are maximum values (in the present embodiment, 399, 99, respectively). 999), each is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1, C2, C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

  Next, in addition to the processing for displaying on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). After that, a start winning process is executed in accordance with the ball entry (start winning) in the special figure entrance 64 and the ball entry (start winning) in the general electric winning device 640 (S105). The details of the special symbol change process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106). A gate passing process is performed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. After executing the through gate passing process, the special power starting opening winning process is executed (S108), and then the V entrance passing process (S109) and the V passing process (S110) are executed. The details of the special power starting port winning process, the V entrance passing process, and the V passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. After the V-pass process is executed, a launch control process is executed (S111), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S112), and the timer interrupt process ends. Note that the firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a and, on condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing is not operated. This is a process for determining on / off of firing. When the launch of the ball is on, main controller 110 instructs launch control device 112 to launch the ball.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 40, a special symbol change process (S104), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (S104). The special symbol variation process (FIG. 40, S104) performs various determinations (acceptance / non-permission determination) and determinations on the special symbol based on each of the acquired counter values, and performs a predetermined display in the variation display mode determined by the predetermined control. The first symbol display device 37 is controlled to enable variable display, the third symbol display device 81 is used to set various commands for executing the third symbol and fourth symbol variable display effects, and the determination result (whether or not the result is determined). The control for stopping the display in the display mode indicating (determination result) is executed. Hereinafter, the special symbol change process (FIG. 40, S104) will be described.

  In the special symbol change process (FIG. 40, S104), first, it is determined whether a big hit game is being played (during a big hit) or a bonus game is being played (a big hit is being played) (S201). Here, based on the information stored in the gaming state storage area 203g, it is determined whether the current game is a big hit game (during a big hit) or a game being played per an accessory (during a hit).

  In the process of S201, when it is determined that the big hit or the bonus is hit (S201: Yes), it is next determined whether or not the special figure temporary stop flag 203m is set to ON (S202). Is determined (S202: Yes), the display of the first symbol display device 83 corresponding to the temporarily stopped special figure is updated (S203), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S202, when it is determined that the special figure temporary stop flag 203m is not set to ON (S202: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

  Here, the special figure temporary stop flag 203m is set to ON when the game per bonus is executed. In the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the fluctuation time set in the fluctuation display (special figure fluctuation display) for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol is not updated (subtracted) during the execution of the bonus per game. During the period, a temporary stop display mode for indicating that the special symbol change display is temporarily stopped on the first symbol display device 83 is displayed.

  With this configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the change display of the special symbol that has been being executed along with the start of the bonus-per-game is temporarily stopped. It is possible to prevent the player from having a distrust of the special symbol change having disappeared. In addition, as a display mode for indicating that the variable display of the special symbol is temporarily stopped, for example, a display mode for indicating that the normal variable display is being performed (for example, lighting at intervals of 0.2 seconds, The display mode may be the same as the display mode that repeats turning off, or may be a display mode in which the flashing interval is slower than the display mode for indicating that variable display is being performed (for example, switching on and off at 0.5 second intervals) Blinking display mode). Further, when the first symbol display device 83 is configured to be able to display a plurality of colors as a display mode, a blinking display mode using a dedicated color that can be displayed only when the vehicle is temporarily stopped is used. Is also good.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S201, when it is determined that the present is not a big hit or a hit, (S201: No), the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 203n is larger than 0, that is, a special symbol. Is determined to be in a variable display (S204). If it is determined that the special symbol change is being displayed (the value of the special figure change time counter 203n is larger than 0) (S204: Yes), the special symbol change execution process is executed (S206).

  In the special symbol change execution process (S206), a process for changing (updating) the change display mode of the special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 83 during the period when the special symbol is changing is executed. Is done. This special symbol change execution process (S206) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  After finishing the process of S206, it is next determined whether or not the value of the special figure variation time counter 203n updated in the special symbol variation execution process (S206) is 0 (S207). If it is determined that the special figure fluctuation time counter 203n is 0 (S207: Yes), the special symbol fluctuation stop processing is executed (S208), and then this processing is ended.

  In the special symbol change stop process (S208), when the change time specified for the special symbol during the change display has elapsed, a process of stopping the change display with the symbol indicating the special symbol lottery result is executed. Details of the special symbol change stop processing (S208) will be described later with reference to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S207 that the special figure fluctuation time counter 203n is not 0 (S207: No), the present processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S204 that the special figure fluctuation time counter 203n is not larger than 0 (is 0) (S204: No), that is, if it is determined that the special figure fluctuation is not present, Next, a special symbol change start process is executed (S205). In the special symbol change start process (S205), a process for executing a new lottery (fluctuation) of a special symbol is performed, and it is determined whether or not a new lottery (fluctuation) can be executed. If it is in a state where a new lottery (fluctuation) can be executed, a process of performing a new lottery (fluctuation) is executed. This special symbol change start process (S205) will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS. After executing the special symbol change start process (S205), the present process ends.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 40, in this embodiment, in a configuration in which a special symbol lottery (fluctuation) can be executed, a variation process related to a special symbol in one special symbol variation process (S204 to S208). Is configured to be executed. Therefore, when it becomes possible to execute a new lottery (change) for a special symbol, the change process can be executed without delay, and a smooth game can be provided.

  Next, the special symbol change start process (S205), which is one of the special symbol change processes (S104 in FIG. 40), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change start process (S205).

  In the special symbol change start process (S205 in FIG. 41), first, the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is acquired (S301), and the acquired value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set to 0. It is determined whether it is greater than (S302). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is 0 (S302: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is larger than 0 (S302: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 (S303).

  Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the number of reserved balls after the subtraction is set (S304), and the data stored in the reserved areas 1 to 4 of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is sequentially transmitted to the execution area side. A shift process is performed (S305). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: holding area 1 → execution area, holding area 2 → holding area 1, holding area 3 → holding area 2, holding area 4 → holding area 3.

  Next, a special symbol big hit determination process is executed (S306). The details of the special symbol jackpot determination process (S306) will be described later with reference to FIG. 42, but using the value of the first random number counter C1 shifted to the special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown). The big hit determination is performed based on the set gaming state.

  Next, a special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (S307). The special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307), which will be described in detail later, is performed based on the result of the hit / fail determination based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown). Is a process for selecting based on each counter value.

  After executing the processing of S307, it is next determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203h is larger than 0 (S308). When it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 0 (S308: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203h is larger than 0 (S308: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the time reduction counter 203h is 1 (S309). When it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203h is not 1 (S309: No), the value of the time reduction counter 203h is decremented by 1 (S310), and thereafter, the present process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is 1 (S309: Yes), the time saving end flag 203j is set to ON (S311), and thereafter, the present process is ended.

  That is, in the present embodiment, during the time reduction state, a process for updating the number of time savings at the start timing of the change of the special symbol is executed, and if the current special symbol change is the final fluctuation in the time saving state, the time Is configured to execute a process of setting the time-saving end flag 203j to ON without updating. Although the details will be described later, the setting status of the time-saving end flag 203j is referred to when the special symbol change is stopped, and when the special symbol is stopped, the setting of the time-saving counter 203h is set. The value is set to 0 to end the time saving state. When the special symbol game is executed while the special symbol is fluctuating, the special hit game is executed, and when the V big hit game is started, the processing for setting the time reduction end flag 203j to off is executed.

  With such a configuration, for example, when the special symbol change is interrupted based on the fact that the special jackpot game is executed during the final change of the special symbol in the time saving state, the interrupt is performed after the jackpot game ends. The special symbol change corresponding to the remaining period of the special symbol change that has been performed is restarted, but when the special symbol change after the restart is stopped and displayed, the time reduction end flag 203j is set to off, The time-saving state never ends. Further, when the special symbol change is restarted, the special symbol change start process (see S205 in FIG. 41) is not executed, so that the value of the time reduction counter 203h is not subtracted.

  Thereby, when the jackpot game (V jackpot game) is executed during the time saving state, the special symbol change interrupted in the number of time savings (four times) corresponding to the jackpot type (jackpot C) corresponding to the jackpot game Is set as the time reduction period in which the time reduction state is set. Therefore, the special figure game is executed during the normal state, and the special electric game is executed during the time saving state, and the ball is transferred to the V winning opening 165, rather than the duration of the time saving state set when the special symbol lottery is won. When the jackpot game (V jackpot game) is executed with the prize, it is easy to increase the duration of the time-saving state that is advantageous to the player because the remaining period of the suspended special symbol change is added. Can be.

  That is, when the time-saving state is set again based on the game during the time-saving state, the duration of the set time-saving state is made longer than when the time-saving state is set based on the game during the normal state. Since the game can be easily performed, the player can be motivated to play the game while expecting a more advantageous game state to be set.

  Further, when the special symbol change is restarted at the special symbol change timing, a process for updating the number of time savings and a process for ending the time saving state are used. Since the start process (see S205 in FIG. 41) is not executed, the value of the time saving counter 203h is not subtracted, but since the gaming state during the last special symbol fluctuation period in the time saving state becomes the normal state, There has been a problem that it is not possible to provide the game during the time reduction state to the player to the maximum.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the processing for updating the number of times saved and the processing for ending the time saving state can be executed at different timings. Specifically, it is configured to execute a process for updating the number of time savings at a special symbol change start timing and to execute a process for ending the time saving state at a special symbol change stop timing. . With this configuration, the time saving number is not updated when the special symbol change is restarted, and the time saving state can be set as the gaming state during the last special symbol change fluctuation period in the time saving state. In addition, it is possible to provide the player with the maximum number of games during the reduced working hours.

  In the present embodiment, the processing for terminating the time saving state is performed at the special symbol change stop timing. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Is established and the process of S305 is executed in the special symbol change start process (see S205 in FIG. 41) until the next special symbol change lottery is executed, and the process of S306 is executed. The processing for terminating the time saving state may be executed at a timing before the processing is performed.

  In addition, as will be described later in detail, in the present embodiment, the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to manage the number of remaining working hours during the time saving state. That is, based on the reception of the information indicating the game state (information indicating that the time saving state is set, information indicating the number of time savings) included in the state command set at the end of the big hit game, By storing the state information and updating the remaining time reduction number based on the reception of the special figure variation pattern command indicating that the special symbol variation is started, the game of the time reduction state is performed on the voice lamp control device 113 side. It is configured to manage the situation.

  With such a configuration, in the control processing of main controller 110, a command for indicating the number of remaining working hours or a command for indicating the final change of the working hours state (setting that working hours end flag 203j is set to ON). Without setting, the sound lamp control device 113 can manage the game situation in the time saving state and set the effect mode corresponding to the current game situation. Therefore, control processing in main controller 110 can be simplified.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the special symbol jackpot determination process (S306), which is one process of the special symbol change start process (S205 of FIG. 41), will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the special symbol jackpot determination process (S306).

  In the special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 42), first, each counter value stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is obtained (S401). Then, based on the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 23B), it is determined whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S401 matches the big hit determination value, and the lottery is performed. A result (determination result) is obtained (S402).

  After finishing the process of S402, it is next determined whether or not the current lottery result is a jackpot (S403). If it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot (S403: Yes), the jackpot is shown to indicate the special symbol jackpot winning. The flag 203i is set to ON (S404). In the present embodiment, the jackpot flag 203i is configured to be able to store (set) information indicating the presence or absence of a jackpot winning.

  Then, the special symbol lottery result is set to a big hit (S405), and based on the obtained value of the hit type counter C2, a special symbol big hit symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S406). The process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S403 that the current lottery result is not a big hit (S403: No), a special symbol departure symbol is set on the first symbol display device 37 (S407), and the process is terminated.

  Next, a special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307), which is one process of the special symbol variation start process (S205 in FIG. 41), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation pattern selection processing (S307).

  In the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307 in FIG. 43), first, in the special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 42), it is set whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot, that is, the special symbol jackpot is set. It is determined whether or not it has been performed (S501). Here, the determination as to whether or not a big hit is made based on whether or not the big hit flag 203i is turned on for the special symbol. This big hit flag 203i is set to ON in the processing of S404 in the above-mentioned special symbol big hit determination processing (see FIG. 42).

  In the process of S501, when it is determined that the special symbol big hit is set (S501: Yes), the big hit type selection table 202c (see FIG. 24) and the acquired first hit type counter C2 are set. The jackpot type is determined based on the value (S502). Next, the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the special symbol execution area is obtained (S503), and the current gaming state (normal state, latent state, probable change) corresponding to the information stored in the gaming state storage area 203g. The variation pattern selection table 202d corresponding to (state) is read (S504).

  Then, a variation pattern is selected based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 acquired in the process of S503 and the variation pattern selection table 202d read in the process of S504 (S505), and based on the variation pattern selected in the process of S505. Then, a special figure variation pattern command is set (S506). The special figure variation pattern command set here includes information indicating the result of the special symbol lottery and the variation time of the special symbol. The external output processing (FIG. 55) of the main processing of the main controller 110 (FIG. 55). In step S1801 in FIG. 55), the sound is output to the sound lamp control device 113.

  Next, a special symbol stop type command indicating a special symbol stop symbol is set (S507), the first symbol display device 37 sets a special symbol change start (S508), and indicates the change time of the selected change pattern. The value is set to the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 203n (S509), and this processing ends. The special figure stop type command set in the process of S507 includes the type of the stop symbol indicating the result of the current special symbol change, that is, information indicating a rough type such as out of reach or out of reach. Then, it is output to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output process (see S1801 in FIG. 55) of the main process (FIG. 55) of the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S501, when it is determined that the special symbol lottery result is out of place (that is, the jackpot flag 203i for the special symbol is off) (S501: No), the processing of S502 is skipped and S503 is skipped. Move to the processing of.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the special symbol variation executing process (S206), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 40), will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change execution process (S206). In the special symbol variation executing process (S206), a process for updating the variation time of the special symbol variation being executed is executed.

  In the special symbol change execution process (S206), first, it is determined whether the special figure temporary stop flag 203m is set to ON (S701).

  In the process of S701, when it is determined that the special figure temporary stop flag 203m is set to ON (S701: Yes), a special figure change restart command is set (S702), and the special figure temporary stop flag 203m is turned off. It is set (S703), the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 203n is decremented by 1 (S704), the display of the special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S705), and this processing ends.

  In the present embodiment, in the special symbol change process (see S104 in FIG. 40) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39) executed every 2 milliseconds, the special symbol change execution process (see FIG. 44) (See S206) is executed, and the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 203n is updated (subtracted by 1) in the special symbol fluctuation execution processing (see S205 of FIG. 44). I have. Therefore, for example, when the fluctuation time of 30 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the special symbol, “15000” is set as the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 203n, and the value is decremented by 1 every 2 milliseconds. It is configured as follows.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S701 that the special figure temporary stop flag 203m is not set to ON (S701: No), the processing of S702 and S703 is skipped and the processing shifts to the processing of S704.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45, a special symbol change stop process (S208), which is one of the special symbol change processes (S104 in FIG. 40), will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change stop processing (S208). This special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S208) is executed when the value of the special symbol fluctuation time counter 203n is determined to be "0", that is, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol (special symbol) has elapsed. This is the process to be performed.

  When the special symbol change stop processing (S208 in FIG. 45) is executed, it is first determined whether the big hit flag 203i is set to ON (S801). If it is determined that the big hit flag 203i is set to ON (S801: Yes), then a big hit scenario won by the special symbol change this time is set (S806), and the big hit flag 202i and the time reduction counter 203h are set. The value is reset (S807), information indicating that the current gaming state is a big hit (big hit game) is stored in the gaming state storage area 203g (S808), and the process proceeds to S809. The gaming state storage area 203g is configured to be able to store a gaming state (normal state, time-saving state) relating to a lottery game and a gaming state relating to a winning game. At this time, the game state (normal state, time saving state) related to the lottery game and the game state indicating that the big hit is in progress are stored.

  With this configuration, at the end of the jackpot game, the gaming state set at the timing of winning the jackpot can be determined.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S801, when it is determined that the big hit flag 203i is set to off, that is, when the result of the current special symbol lottery is out of order (S801: No), the time reduction end flag It is determined whether or not 203j is set to ON (S802). If it is determined that the time reduction end flag 203j is set to ON (S802: Yes), that is, if it is determined that the special symbol variation that has been stopped this time is the final variation in the time reduction state, the time reduction counter 203h Is reset to 0 (S803), the time saving end flag 203j is set to off (S804), and information indicating that the current gaming state is the normal state is stored in the gaming state storage area 203g (S805). The process moves to S809. In the processing of S802, when it is determined that the time-saving end flag 203j is set to OFF (S802: No), the processing of S803 to S805 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S809.

  In the processing of S809, a special figure determination command for instructing the voice lamp control device 113 to finalize and stop the special symbol is set (S809), and the special symbol which is variably displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set. Is executed (S810), and the present process is terminated.

  As described above, in the special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S208), the processing (S809, S810) of stopping the fluctuation display with the symbol indicating the result of the special symbol lottery (lottery game) is executed.

  In addition, in this embodiment, when the ball wins in the special power operation port 643 and the game per bonus is executed, the special symbol change being executed is interrupted. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, based on the result of the predetermined determination performed when the ball wins in the special power operating port 643, the special symbol change being executed may be discarded instead of being interrupted. With this configuration, the case where the special symbol change indicating the duration of the time reduction state is interrupted and the case where it is discarded can be made to appear, so the duration of the time reduction state is suddenly subtracted ( (End), and an effect with a sense of tension can be executed for the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the start winning process (S105), which is one of the timer interrupt processes (FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). In the start winning process (S105 in FIG. 46), it is determined whether or not a ball has entered the special figure entrance 64 (start winning). This is a process of storing each acquired counter value up to a maximum of four in the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a.

  When each counter value obtained based on the reserved ball is stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, based on each counter value stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, Processing (so-called pre-reading processing) for predicting the result of the determination of the success or failure, the selected fluctuation pattern, and the like is performed in advance. Hereinafter, the start winning process (S105 in FIG. 46) will be described.

  In the start winning processing (S105 in FIG. 46), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the special figure entrance 64 which is the starting port (start winning) (S901). Here, the entry of a ball into a ball detection switch (not shown) provided in the special figure entrance 64 is detected. If it is determined that the ball has entered the special figure entrance 64 (there is a start winning) (S901: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is acquired (S902). It is determined whether the obtained value (N1) is less than 4 (S903).

  That is, it is determined whether or not the number of reserves for the special figure entrance 64 is less than the upper limit of four at the present time (that is, whether the number of reserves is not stored up to the upper limit). When it is determined that the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S903: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is incremented by 1 (904). In step S905, a reserved ball number command for notifying the reserved number of start ports (the number of reserved special lottery rights) is set.

  Then, each value of various counter values (first random number counter C1, first collision type counter C2, fluctuation type counter CS1) is read out (obtained) from the counter buffer, and corresponding to the special symbol holding ball execution area of the RAM 203. Each of them is held (stored) in the storage area of the number of held balls (S906).

  Next, a pre-read process is performed (S907), and thereafter, the present process ends. The pre-reading process (S907) will be described later with reference to FIG. 47. However, based on each counter value newly stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a hit / no-go determination result, a fluctuation pattern to be determined, a stop type, and the like. Is determined. In the present embodiment, it is configured to execute the process of determining the result of determination as to whether or not to perform the determination, the variation pattern to be determined, the type of stop, and the like based on each of the newly stored counter values. For example, when there is a new start winning, for example, the result of the determination of the rejection, the determined fluctuation pattern, and the type of stop for all the reserved memories stored (stored) in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. May be executed.

  In the present embodiment, when new information (winning information) is stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, that is, when a special symbol lottery right is newly acquired, the special symbol lottery right (winning information) is obtained. ) Is determined in advance, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a ball passes through the through gate 67, or according to the result of lottery of a normal symbol, a lottery right for a special symbol (prize information). May be determined in advance.

  Also, if it is determined in the processing of S901 that the ball has not entered the special figure entrance 64 (S901: No), or in the processing of S903, the number of reserves for the special figure entrance 64 at present is the upper limit. If it is determined that the value is the value (S903: No), the process of adding the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is skipped, and the present process ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is added, the prefetching process (S907) based on the added information on winning (winning information) is executed. The configuration is not limited to this. For example, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is the upper limit number (4) in the process of S903 (S903: No), The prefetching process (S907) may be configured to execute a pre-reading process (S907) when a ball is inserted into the special figure entrance 64 with the number of reserved special symbols reaching the upper limit. Thereby, even in the state where the number of reserved balls of the special symbol has reached the upper limit, it is possible to cause the player to continue playing the game in order to execute the pre-reading process. Further, when a ball is inserted into the special figure entrance 64 in a state where the number of reserved balls of the special symbol has reached the upper limit, an added value can be given, so the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is limited to the upper limit. Can be suppressed from decreasing the willingness to play when a ball enters the special figure entrance 64 in the state where the ball has reached.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the prefetching process (S907), which is one process of the start winning process (S105 in FIG. 46), will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the prefetching process (S907).

  In the pre-reading process (S907 in FIG. 47), first, a random number counter per first C1, a counter per first type C2, and a variation type counter which are various counter values from the storage area newly stored in the special symbol holding storage area 203a. Each value of CS1 is read (S1001). Then, the read data is stored in an area having the smallest winning order among the empty storage areas of the prefetch pending storage area (S1002).

  Next, based on each counter value newly stored in the pre-reading suspension storage area, the result of the rejection determination is determined. In this case, both the determination as to whether the special symbol is in the low-probability state and the determination as to whether the special symbol is in the high-probability state are determined. This is because the jackpot determination is executed based on the timing at which a new hold is generated (the timing at which a new hold (winning information) is stored in the special symbol holding storage area 203a) and the winning information newly held this time. Since a time lag occurs at the timing of the game, it is difficult to predict the gaming state (probability state of the special symbol) set at the timing when the jackpot determination based on the winning information newly held this time is executed. It is.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the determination is a jackpot (S1003). If it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot (S1003: Yes), a winning command indicating a jackpot winning condition (game state set at the time of lottery) and a jackpot type when the jackpot is won is set (S1004). After that, this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the result of the determination in the processing of S1003 is not a big hit (S1003: No), a winning command indicating a loss is set (S1005), and then this processing is terminated.

  Here, the winning command set in the processing of S1004 or S1005 includes, in addition to the information for indicating the above-described determination result of the above-mentioned result (information giving a different meaning based on the determination result of the success or failure), as well as common information of S1001 The information is also set to include information for indicating the values of the various counter values read by the processing. Then, the winning command set in this process is output to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S1801) executed in the main process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 55).

  When receiving the winning command, the sound lamp control device 113 changes the display mode of the holding ball based on various information included in the winning command (for example, changing the color of the holding ball to a color different from the normal color). An effect (pre-reading effect) of displaying (variably) or displaying a notice symbol or the like before the start of the change and suggesting the result of the determination to the player can be executed.

  In the present embodiment, since there is only one special symbol probability state (special symbol low probability state), information (win / fail judgment result) set in the winning command can be set regardless of the gaming state. For example, in a gaming machine having a plurality of special symbol probability states (a special symbol high probability state and a special symbol low probability state), a winning / failing determination result in the case of a special symbol high probability state and a special symbol low probability It may be configured to determine the winning / failing determination result in the case of the state, and to set the winning command based on the result of each determination, or even if the special symbol is in the high probability state, it is in the low probability state. Also, a determination value (value of the first random number counter C1) determined to be a jackpot may be defined, and a winning command indicating a special symbol jackpot may be set only when the determination value is read.

  With such a configuration, a winning command indicating a jackpot is output to the sound lamp control device 113 only when it is determined in advance that the jackpot is a specific jackpot. It is possible to give a sense of expectation of winning a jackpot to the fluctuation.

  Further, the game state at the time of performing the special symbol lottery based on the hold storage (winning information) stored (stored) in the special symbol hold storage area 203a is accurately determined, and the hit / fail determination is performed based on the game state. May be executed. In this case, the selection of the variation pattern is not made variable depending on the number of reserved balls, but can be determined by selecting a fixed variation pattern regardless of the number of reserved balls at the start of the variation. When performing the pre-reading, the game state at the start of the change can be determined by determining the order of the change until the reserved ball starts to change based on the information stored and stored.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a new hold storage (winning information) is stored (stored) in the special symbol holding storage area 203a, a prefetching process based on the winning information is executed, and in the prefetching process, a pass / fail judgment is made. Although the configuration for predicting the determination is used in advance, the present invention is not limited to this. In the pre-reading process of the main control device 110, the winning information (holding storage) newly stored (stored) in the special symbol holding storage area 203a is stored. Information indicating the content (each counter value) may be set as a winning command, and the result of the determination as to whether or not the winning is determined based on information included in the winning command received by the sound lamp control device 113 may be configured.

  With such a configuration, the processing load on main controller 110 can be reduced. Further, the sound lamp control device 113 executes a process of determining whether or not to execute a prefetch effect, and when it is determined that the prefetch effect is to be executed, information included in the winning command received from the main control device 110 is determined. It may be configured to perform analysis (prediction of the result of determination of success or failure). As a result, when the pre-reading effect is not performed, a specific pre-reading process (prediction of the result of the determination of success / failure) is not performed, so that it is possible to suppress execution of useless control in the pachinko machine 10. In addition, it is possible to suppress a problem in which the result of the prefetching process executed untitled is illegally obtained by the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 48, a description will be given of the ordinary symbol variation process (S106), which is one of the timer interrupt processes executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the ordinary symbol change processing (S106). The normal symbol variation process (S106) is a process for controlling the variation display of the second symbol (normal symbol), the opening time of the electric accessory 640a, and the like.

  In the ordinary symbol variation process (S106 in FIG. 48), first, it is determined whether or not the present is hitting an ordinary symbol (second symbol). (S1101). As for the hit during the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 640a is performed after the display indicating the hit is made on the second symbol display device 83 (after the hit symbol is stopped and displayed). Up to the middle (until the winning game ends) is included. When it is determined that a normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S1101: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S1101: No), it is determined whether the normal symbol of the second symbol display device 83 is being displayed in a variable manner (S1102). When it is determined that the normal symbol variation display is not being performed, that is, when it is determined that the current normal symbol variation (lottery) can be executed (S1102: No), the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is next activated. The value (M) is obtained (S1103), and it is determined whether the value is greater than 0 (S1104).

  If it is determined in step S1104 that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S1104: No), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S1104: Yes), the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S1105). That is, if it is determined in the process of S1104 that the condition for executing a new normal symbol change (the winning information for use in the normal symbol change is stored on hold) is satisfied, the hold is stored. In order to execute the ordinary symbol change using the winning information, the value of the ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203d is decremented by one.

  Next, the data stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted (S1106). In the process of S1106, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the ordinary symbol hold 1 to the ordinary symbol hold 4 in the ordinary symbol hold ball storage area 203b to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted, such as the normal symbol hold 1 → the execution area. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is acquired (S1107).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the time reduction counter 203h is turned on, that is, whether or not the current time is in a high probability state of a normal symbol (S1108), and it is determined that the time reduction counter 203h is set to on. (S1108: Yes), the winning / non-judgment result (lottery result) is acquired based on the hit judgment value of the second hit random number table 202b for high probability (see FIG. 23C), and the process shifts to S1111. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time reduction counter 203h is off (S1108: No), the hit determination result is based on the hit determination value of the second random number table 202b for low probability time (see FIG. 23C). Is acquired (S1110), and the routine goes to the process of S1111.

  In the process of S1111, it is determined whether or not the current ordinary symbol change (lottery) is a hit (S1111). If it is determined that the hit is a hit (S1111: Yes), the display mode of the hitting time “当 た り” is determined. The display mode is set (S1112), and the variation time of the ordinary symbol is determined based on the ordinary pattern variation pattern using the value of the ordinary figure variation type counter (S1114). On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1111 that the current ordinary symbol change (lottery) is not a hit (is a loss) (S1111: No), the display mode of "X" which is a display mode at the time of the loss is set. Then (S1113), the flow shifts to the process of S1114 described above.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the variation time is always set to 3 seconds regardless of the set game state. With this configuration, at the timing at which the gaming state is switched, specifically, from the normal state in which generally a long fluctuation time is likely to be set (the low probability state of a normal symbol), the time reduction in which a short fluctuation time is likely to be set At the end of the jackpot game in which the gaming state switches to the state (high probability state of the ordinary symbol), the ordinary symbol fluctuation for a long fluctuation time is executed, and the time reduction state is set even though the time reduction state is set. It is possible to suppress a situation in which the normal symbol lottery is not executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a special electric game (V rush) aiming at a jackpot game (V jackpot game) is executed in response to an ordinary symbol lottery during the time reduction state. ) Is configured such that an effect based on a normal symbol lottery is also displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, when performing an effect based on the ordinary symbol lottery (change), the amount of effect data can be reduced by unifying the change time.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, even if the game is performed in the normal state and the ball is won in the general winning award device 640, the special power operation port 643 which is a trigger for the execution of the game per accessory is provided. The ball is configured to be difficult to win. Therefore, even if only the same fluctuating time (3 seconds) is set, it is possible to eliminate the advantage of performing the game by measuring the execution timing of the game per ordinary figure.

  In addition, the setting method of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is not limited to the configuration of the present embodiment, the fluctuation time is varied according to the game state, the fluctuation time is varied according to the number of balls reserved for the general symbol, The variation time may be varied according to the acquired predetermined value. For example, in the present embodiment, the variation time of the ordinary symbol variation is changed to the set ordinary symbol probability state (high probability state, low probability state ) And the value of the ordinary symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of reserved ordinary symbols) may be variably set. Furthermore, the ease with which a ball can enter the general winning award device 640 may be configured to vary depending on the set fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol.

  In this way, by changing the degree of the ball entering the general winning award device 640 in accordance with the length of the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol that is set, the ball can enter the general winning award device 640. Since the ease of entering a ball can be easily changed according to the game state, various game properties can be created.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1102, when it is determined that the ordinary symbol (second symbol) is not in the variable display mode (S1102: No), the variation time of the ordinary symbol executed in the second symbol display device 83 elapses. It is determined whether or not the processing has been performed (S1115). If it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S1115: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1115 that the fluctuating time has elapsed (S1115: Yes), stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S1116). In the process of S1116, when the current lottery of the ordinary symbol is a win, the second symbol display device 83 is set so that the symbol “○” is stopped (lit). On the other hand, when the lottery of the normal symbol is out of order, the “X” symbol is stopped (lit) on the second symbol display device 83. That is, the setting for stopping and displaying the display mode set in the processing of S1112 or S1113 is performed.

  When the stop display is set by the process of S1116, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, and the stop symbol (the second symbol) is changed to the second symbol in the display mode set in the process of S1112 or the process of S1113. A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the symbol display device 83.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol this time is a win (S1117). When it is determined that the result of the lottery of the ordinary symbol this time is a win (S1117: Yes), a process for setting an opening / closing control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the result of the lottery of the ordinary symbol of crying is not a hit (is out of range) (S1117: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

  Next, an opening / closing control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a according to the present embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, based on the ordinary symbol probability states (high-probability state, low-probability state) set at the timing of determining whether or not the ordinary symbol is correct (the timing of performing the processing of S1108 to S1111). The probability of the ordinary symbol set at the timing (period at which it is determined that the fluctuation time has elapsed in the processing of S1115) for determining whether the ordinary symbol is correct or not and setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a. The opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a is set based on the state (high-probability state, low-probability state).

  That is, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation process (lottery process) relating to the ordinary symbol and the fluctuation process (lottery process) relating to the special symbol are configured to be executed independently. The probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the ordinary symbol is configured to be variable based on the result of the lottery process. Therefore, depending on the result of the variation process (lottery process) relating to the special symbol, which is performed in parallel during the period in which the variation process (lottery process) relating to the ordinary symbol is being executed, the timing at which the determination of whether or not the ordinary symbol is successful is made at the timing of the ordinary symbol Is set at the timing when the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a is set, a case where the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set may occur.

  In such a situation, for example, based on the ordinary symbol probability state (high probability state, low probability state) set at the timing of determining whether or not the ordinary symbol is accepted, the opening control mode (opening) of the electric accessory 640a is set. When the pattern is set, the opening pattern executed when the electric accessory 640a is long opened (when the normal pattern is in the high probability state) while the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set. ).

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the probability state (high-probability state, low-probability state) of the ordinary symbol at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a is determined, and the electric combination is determined based on the determination result. The opening control mode (opening pattern) of the object 640a is set. Thereby, the electric accessory 640a can be opened in an opening pattern according to the set gaming state.

  In the processing of S1117, if it is determined that the current lottery result of the ordinary symbol is a win (S1117: Yes), then the current ordinary symbol probability state (high probability state, low probability state) is determined. Next, it is determined whether or not the hour-saving counter 203h is on (S1118), and if it is determined that the hour-saving counter 203h is not on (is off), that is, it is in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol (S1118: No), a scenario operation per ordinary drawing is set (S1119).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1118 that the hour-saving counter 203h is set to ON (S1118: Yes), a time-saving general-purpose per-scenario operation is set (S1120).

  Next, based on the scenario set in the processing of S1119 or S1120, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is set to start (S1121), and this processing ends.

  In the present embodiment, the open / disabled mode of the electric accessory 640a that is executed based on the probability state of the normal symbol at the timing of performing the normal symbol win / fail determination and that is moved in the normal symbol hit game. The configuration is such that the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a is set based on the probability state of the ordinary symbol at the timing of setting the (opening pattern). However, the present invention is not limited to this. The high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set at the timing, and the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is also set at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a to be moved in the hit game of the ordinary symbol. The electric accessory 640a may be configured to be long opened only when the symbol is in the normal state, or the timing of determining whether the symbol is correct or not may be determined. Based on the game state is set, it may be configured to set the opening pattern of the electric won game 640a.

  Although detailed description is omitted, various kinds of information (the result of the ordinary symbol lottery, the variation time of the ordinary symbol variation, the scenario per ordinary symbol, etc.) determined in the ordinary symbol variation process (see S106 in FIG. 48) are described below. Commands indicating the contents of various types of information are set, and are output to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output process (see S1801 in FIG. 55) of the main process (FIG. 55) of the main control device 110.

  Next, referring to FIG. 49, a through gate passage process (S107) executed in the first embodiment is executed. This processing is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39), and it is determined whether or not a ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67. This is a process for acquiring the value indicated by the random number counter C4 and storing it in the execution area.

  In the through gate passage process (S107 in FIG. 49), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed the ordinary symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S1201). Here, the passage of the ball through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S1201: Yes), the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is obtained (S1202), and then Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the acquired ordinary symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 1 (whether the reserved symbol number of the ordinary symbol has not reached the upper limit value) (S1203).

  In the process of S1203, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 1 (is the upper limit value of 1) (S1203: No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is not larger than 1 (it is 0) (S1203: Yes), the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is set to 1 Is added (S1204), a normal figure reserved ball number command (a command for indicating the value (M) of the ordinary symbol reserved ball number counter 203d) is set (S1205), and the value of the second random number counter C4 is set to the ordinary pattern. The ball is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b (S1206), and the process ends.

  Next, the special power starting port winning process (S108) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the special power starting port winning process (S108) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39). As shown in FIG. 2, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has a special power operation port 643 in the general power prize apparatus 640, and makes the V prize apparatus 65 by winning a ball in the special power operation port 643. A predetermined variable pattern is configured to execute a game per accessory to be released. In this special power starting port winning process (S108), various processes when a ball wins in the special power operating port 643 are executed.

  When the special power starting port winning process (S108) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won the special power operating port 643 (S1301). In the process of S1301, it is determined whether or not a detection signal indicating that a ball has been detected has been output from a detection switch (not shown) capable of detecting the ball that has won the special power operating port 643. In the processing of S1301, if it is determined that the gaming ball has not won the special power operating port 643 (S1301: No), the processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that a game ball has won the special power operating port 643 (S1301: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the current game is a regular symbol hit game (S1302). If it is determined that the current game is not a normal symbol hit game (S1302: No), an error command is set (S1309) because a ball cannot be won in the special power operation port 643 (S1309). To end. By performing the processing of S1309, a state in which the game ball has won the special power operating port 643 outside the per-game time period, that is, when a game in which the game ball is illegally won in the special power operating port 643 is performed, or It is possible to promptly notify the outside when a malfunction of a member (for example, the electric accessory 640a, the second movable valve 642) attached to the special power operating port 643 has occurred.

  In the process of S1302, if it is determined that the current game is a normal symbol hit game (S1302: Yes), then it is determined whether the current is a special electric power operation (game of a special character game) (S1303). If it is determined that the special power operation is currently being performed (the game is being played per role) (S1303: Yes), the process is terminated as it is not possible to execute a new game per role. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special electric power is not currently being operated (the game is being played per accessory) (S1303: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently changing (S1304). If it is determined that the special symbol is currently changing (S1304: Yes), the special figure temporary stop flag 203m is set to ON (S1305), a special figure temporary stop command is set (S1306), and The hit flag 203k is set to ON (S1307), and the process proceeds to S1308.

  That is, if it is determined in the process of S1304 that the special symbol is currently fluctuating, the processes of S1305 and S1306 are executed in order to interrupt the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the running special symbol. As a result, the special symbol change that is being executed is interrupted when the accessory-based game is executed. Further, the temporary stop command set in the process of S1307 is output to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output process (see S1801 in FIG. 55) of the main process (FIG. 55) of the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1304 that the special symbol is not currently fluctuating (S1304: No), the process of S1305 and S1306 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1307. In the process of S1308, a special power operation command is set (S1308), and then, the process ends.

  As described above, the special power starting port winning process (S108) is based on the determination processing means for determining whether or not the winning is a normal one when the ball wins in the special power operating port 643 and the winning. Processing for determining whether or not a new special symbol change can be executed, and processing for a special symbol change (processing for interrupting the special symbol change being executed, no new special symbol change is executed during the special hit game) And a means for executing a per-bonus game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the V entrance passage processing (S109) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the V entrance passage process (S109) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39).

  In the V entrance passage process (S109), first, it is determined whether or not the storage sensor 65s (see FIG. 6) is on (S1401). If the storage sensor 65s is not on (storage sensor 65s01: No), this process is performed as it is. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the storage sensor 65s is on (S1401: Yes), it is determined whether the V winning opening is in the open period, that is, whether the game is in the per-accessory game (S1402). In the processing of S1402, if it is determined that it is during the V winning opening opening period (during a per-game play) (S1402: Yes), a V entrance passage command is set (S1403), and this processing ends. If it is not during the V winning opening opening period (S1402: No), an error command is set (S1404) because a game ball has entered the V winning device 65 despite the fact that the game is not being played per character. ), End this processing.

  The V entrance passage command set in the processing of S1403 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output processing (S1801) of the main processing (see FIG. 55) executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the V-entrance passage command, the sound ramp control device 113 counts the game balls that have passed through the V-entrance and transmits a command for executing an effect based on the V-entrance passage to the display control device 114. Thereby, it is possible to execute an effect during the game per hit based on the entry of the ball into the V winning device 65.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the V passing process (S110) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the V-pass process (S110) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39).

  When the V passing process (S110) is executed, first, it is determined whether there is a V passing, that is, whether a game ball has won the V winning opening 165 (S1501), and the game ball has won the V winning opening 165. If it is determined that there is no data (S1501: No), the process ends. If it is determined that a game ball has won the V winning opening 165 (S1501: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the current V period is in effect (S1502). In the processing of S1502, it is determined that the period in which the operation scenario relating to the per-prize game is set is during the V-valid period, and otherwise, it is determined that it is not during the V-valid period.

  In the process of S1502, when it is determined that the V validity period is in progress (S1502: Yes), next, it is determined whether or not the game is currently being played per character (S1503). (S1503: Yes), the big hit type value at the time of V passage corresponding to the current per hit game is acquired (S1504), the V flag corresponding to the big hit type is set to ON (S1505), and the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set. The value is set to 0 (S1506), and the process proceeds to S1507.

  In other words, in the processes of S1504 to S1506, a process for executing the big hit game is executed based on the fact that the game ball has won the V winning opening 165 during the hit game. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1503 that the game is not being performed as a bonus hit (S1503: No), there is no need to perform a new jackpot game, and the processing of S1504 to S1506 is skipped. Then, the process shifts to S1507.

  In the processing of S1507, a V-pass command is set (S1507), and this processing ends. The V-pass command set here is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the same manner as other commands set in the control processing of the main control device 110. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the V passing command, for example, when receiving the V passing command during the per-game game, the effect during the V rush executed during the per-game game is successful, Following the hit game, an effect for indicating that the big hit game is executed is executed. When a V-pass command is received during the big hit game, the same effect as when a V-pass command is received during the bonus hit game is executed.

  On the other hand, if the V passing command is not received at the predetermined timing during the per hit play, a disappointing effect to indicate that the V challenge has failed is executed, and the V passing command is transmitted at the predetermined timing during the big hit game. If not received, a resurrection effect from a disappointing effect is executed, and the player is notified that the jackpot game will be continuously executed.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, a configuration is shown in which only a command (V passing command) for indicating that a game ball has won the V winning opening 165 has been set, but no gaming ball has won the V winning opening 165. A command (for example, a V non-passing command) for indicating the fact may be set. In this case, for example, in the present embodiment, the game balls that can enter the V winning opening 165 are only the game balls (for example, one) retained by the storage valve 66a, and thus are stored in the storage valve 66a. Number discriminating means for discriminating presence / absence (number) of game balls present, and detecting means for detecting passage of game balls to the hemorrhoid 2-out height 163b are provided, and the number of game balls discriminated by the number discriminating means is provided. May be configured to set the above-mentioned V non-passing command when is detected by the detecting means. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 113 can execute an appropriate effect, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. Further, by using the above-described configuration, it is possible to quickly determine that a game ball is clogged in the V winning device 65.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1502 that the current time is not within the V validity period (S1502: No), an error command is set (S1508), and this processing ends. By performing the processing of S1508, a state in which the game ball has won the V winning opening 165 outside the V validity period, that is, a game in which the game ball is illegally won in the V winning opening 165, or the V winning is achieved. It is possible to promptly notify the outside when a problem has occurred in a member attached to the port 165 (for example, the V opening / closing door 65a, the storage valve 66a, and the first movable valve 66b).

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 26 (b), the operation scenario is defined such that the timing at which the ball can enter the V winning opening 165 in the per-accessory game is the ending period of the per-accessory game. Therefore, the processing of S1506 to S1508 is performed in the V passing processing (S110), that is, the processing is executed at the timing when the ball wins the V winning opening 165. Without limitation, for example, if the operation scenario of the game per role is defined so that the ball can always win in the V winning opening 165 during the game per role, the V passing process (S110) , S1505 only are executed, and the processing of S1506 to S1508 is performed when the V flag is set to ON in the accessory hit control processing (see S1805 in FIG. 58). It may be configured to run as a process to be rows. Thus, even if the ball wins in the V winning opening 165 immediately after the execution of the bonus game, the time-saving state can be continued until the jackpot game is started, which gives a sense of incongruity to the player. The game can be performed without any trouble.

  Next, the NMI interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt process (S1601). I do.

  Note that the above-described NMI interrupt processing is executed in the same manner by the payout and departure control device 111, and the power-off information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

  Next, referring to FIG. 54, a description will be given of a startup process executed by MPU 201 in main control device 110 when power is applied to main control device 110. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the start-up process.

  This start-up process is started by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process (FIG. 54), first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1701). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (one second in the present embodiment) is executed in order to wait until the sub-side control devices (the peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) are in an operable state. (S1702). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1703).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 10) provided on the power supply 115 is turned on (S1704). If it is turned on (S1704: Yes), the process proceeds to S1712. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S1704: No), it is further determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1705), and if not, it is not stored (S1705: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown may not have been completed normally, the process also proceeds to S1712 in this case.

  If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1705: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1706). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1707: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, the backed-up data has been destroyed, and the process also proceeds to S1712 in such a case. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S1712, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1712). Upon receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start the payout control of the game balls. After transmitting the pay-out initialization command, main controller 110 executes an initialization process of RAM 203 (S1713, S1714).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is opened, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is pressed at the time of executing the startup processing, the initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S1713, S1714) is executed.

  Similarly, the initialization process of the RAM 203 (S1713, S1714) is executed also when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the initialization processing of the RAM (S1713, S1714), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1713), and thereafter, the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1714). After the execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process shifts to the process of S1710.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S1704: No), power-off occurrence information is stored (S1705: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) is normal (S1705: Yes), S1707: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S1708). Next, a payout return command at the time of power restoration for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of drive power cutoff is transmitted (S1709), and the process proceeds to S1710. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 enters a state in which the payout control of the game balls can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  Next, an effect permission command for permitting execution of various effects is output to the sound lamp control device 113 (S1710). Thereafter, the interruption is permitted (S1711), and the operation based on the first movable valve operation scenario is set (S1715). Then, the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the start-up process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In the main processing, roughly, a counter updating processing and a power-off processing are executed.

  In the main processing (see FIG. 55), first, in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39), output data such as commands stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223 is controlled by each sub-side control. An external output process to be transmitted to the device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1801). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, the payout control device 111 is given a prize corresponding to the number of obtained balls. Send a ball command. In addition, the command for transmitting the reserved ball number set in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 40) and the start winning process (see FIG. 46) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output process (S1801 in FIG. 55), various commands set in various processes of the main control device 110 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and various commands displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted. This is information for setting an effect (a fluctuating effect, a decorative effect, etc.). Further, the opening command, the number of rounds command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 56) are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. Further, various commands set in other control processing are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1802). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches a maximum value (198 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the change type counter CS1 is updated, the winning ball counting signal and the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1803). A command for executing a jackpot effect is set, and a jackpot control process for opening a specific winning port (large opening port) 650a of the variable winning device 650 is executed (S1804).

  The details of the jackpot control process (S1804) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 56 to 57. In the jackpot control process (S1804), the specific winning port 650a (hereinafter, winning port) is set for each round of the jackpot state. It is determined whether the maximum opening time of the winning opening or the like (specific winning opening 650a) has elapsed or whether a predetermined number of balls have won the winning opening or the like (specific winning opening 650a). Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the winning opening and the like (specific winning opening 650a) are closed. The opening and closing of the winning opening and the like (specific winning opening 650a) are repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1804) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, an accessory hit control process related to an accessory hit game which is executed when the ball has won the special power operating port 643 (S1805). In this accessory hit control process (S1805), the scenario in which the V opening / closing door 65a is opened and closed for the V winning device 65 that is opened during the hit-game is determined in advance. A process for setting based on (per-principal operation scenario) is executed. In addition. The details of the accessory hit control process (S1805) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, an electric auditors accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening and closing of the electric auditors accessory 640a attached to the ordinary winning prize device 640 is executed (S1806). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started when the start of the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is set by the process of S1121 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 48). The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the period set by the processing of S1119 and the processing of S1120 in the normal symbol variation processing ends.

  Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S1807). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the special symbol variation start process (S205 in FIG. 41), the variation display according to the variation pattern is started in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. . In the present embodiment, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are red until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation is started. Is turned off and the green LED is turned on. If the green LED is turned on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned on. Is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds. However, if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted every time the main processing is executed so that the player can confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display update process, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B execute the process when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 41) ends. The variation display is ended, and the stopped symbol is displayed in the first symbol display in the special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S307 in FIG. 43) in the display mode set in S507 by the special symbol variation stopping process (see S208 in FIG. 45). A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the devices 37A and 37B.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when one special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode (big hit symbol) indicating a big hit, the other special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode (missing symbol) indicating a slip. The stop display for that purpose is also executed.

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1808). In the second symbol display updating process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S1114 of the ordinary symbol variation start process (see FIG. 48), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device. As a result, in the second symbol display device, a variable display in which the symbol “O” and the symbol “X” as the second symbol are alternately turned on is performed. In the second symbol display update process (S1808), when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S1116 of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 48), the process is executed in the second symbol display device. The changed symbol display is terminated, and the stopped symbol (the second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device in the display mode set by the process of S1112 or the process of S1113 of the ordinary symbol variation start process (see FIG. 48). (Lit display).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1809). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1809: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 sends a power failure signal. SG1 is not output, and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current main process (S1810). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S1810: Yes), the process proceeds to S1801, and the processes from S1801 onward are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main processing this time (S1810: No), the first time, ie, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is reached, is reached. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1811, S1812).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1811). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by one, and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (479, 232 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1811 (S1812). In the process of S1812, similarly to the value of the variation type counter CS1, the value of the general-purpose variation type counter CS2 is also updated.

  Here, since the execution time of each processing of S1801 to S1808 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the updating of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4), and similarly, the values of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the ordinary figure fluctuation type counter CS2 are also randomly updated. can do. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the processing content for updating the determination value regarding the lottery of the special symbol and the ordinary symbol, and that the illegal game aimed at the timing at which the determination value corresponding to the hit is obtained is executed. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, in the process of S1809, if the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1809: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power-off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 53 has been executed, the processing at the time of power shutdown after S1813 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1813), and a power-off command indicating that the power is turned off is sent to another control device (a peripheral control device such as the payout control device 111 or the sound lamp control device 113). (S1814). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S1815), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1816), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area of the RAM 203 to be backed up.

  The processing in S1809 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1801 to S1808, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1811 and S1812 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main control device 110, the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the startup processing is completed. The processing can be started from the processing of S1801. That is, the processing can be started from the processing of S1801 as in the case where the initialization is performed in the startup processing. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not stored, the stack pointer is not reset in the initialization process (S1701). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1801. Therefore, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without erroneous operation or runaway of main controller 110.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1804) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1804). The jackpot control process (S1804) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 55), and information (command) for executing various effects according to the jackpot when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of the special symbol. ) And opening or closing a winning port or the like (specific winning port (large opening port) 650a).

  In the big hit control process (S1804), first, it is determined whether it is time to start the big hit of the special symbol (S1901). Specifically, the process of S806 of the special symbol change stop process (refer to S208 of FIG. 45) is executed, and the start of the special symbol big hit is set, or the accessory hit control process (S1805 of FIG. 58). If the start of the jackpot is set, the operation counter is set corresponding to the jackpot operation scenario table 202e1 of the various operation scenario tables 202e. Then, when the value of the operation counter matches the jackpot start timing specified in the jackpot operation scenario table 202e1, it is determined that the jackpot is started. If it is determined in the processing of S1901 that it is the timing to start the special symbol big hit (S1901: Yes), an opening command is set (S1902), and this processing ends.

  Note that the opening command may be configured to be transmitted with a delay (variable) according to the gaming state or the jackpot type. Specifically, an opening counter that is updated periodically (every 4 ms) is provided. Then, when a special symbol jackpot or accessory hit is started, the opening counter is initialized to 0, and then the opening counter is set to a predetermined value (for example, 2500 for jackpots A and B, and 2500 for jackpot C). 5000), an opening command may be transmitted. By doing so, for example, in the case of a left-handed game and a jackpot in a special figure lottery, the time until the start of the jackpot (the specific winning opening 650a is opened) is shortened, and the left-handed In the case of a game, in the case of a jackpot per game as a result of the special electric game, the time until the start of the jackpot (specific winning opening 650a is opened) can be lengthened. With such a configuration, it is possible to secure a period in which the player who has watched the ball flow state during the game per accessory is prepared for the big hit game.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1901 that it is not the big hit start timing (S1901: No), it is next determined whether or not the present is a big hit (S1903). In the process of S1903, the game information related to the hit game stored in the game state storage area 203g is read and the discrimination is performed.

  During the big hit, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 display a special symbol big hit (including a special symbol big hit game), and a predetermined time after the big hit game is over. Including mid-hour. This also includes the case where a display indicating that the ball has won is displayed in the V winning port 165. If it is determined in the process of S1903 that the game is not in a big hit (S1903: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that a big hit is occurring (S1903: Yes), it is next determined whether it is a start timing of a new round (S1904).

  If it is determined in the processing of S1904 that it is the start timing of a new round, that is, if it is determined that the obtained value of the operation counter is the start timing of the round game specified in the jackpot operation scenario table 202e1 (S1904) : Yes), the specific winning opening solenoid 209a is set to ON (S1905), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1906), and thereafter, the present process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1904 that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1904: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the round (S1907). If it is determined that it is the end timing of the round, that is, if it is determined that the acquired value of the operation counter is the end timing of the round game specified in the jackpot operation scenario table 202e1 (S1907: Yes), The special winning opening solenoid 209a is turned off (S1908), and the value of the winning number counter 203e is cleared to 0 (S1909). After that, this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1907 that it is not the timing to end the round (S1907: No), it is determined whether it is the timing to start the ending effect (S1910). The start timing of the ending effect is the standby time (the present embodiment) in which the final round (the fourth round in the case of the jackpot A) in the jackpot game ends, the specific winning opening 650a is closed, and the ball is played. When 3 seconds have elapsed, it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect. If it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect (S1910: Yes), an ending command indicating the start of the ending is set (S1911), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1910 that it is not the ending effect start timing (S1910: No), it is next determined whether or not it is the jackpot end timing (S1912). Note that the jackpot end timing is specifically the end timing of the jackpot game in which the value of the acquired operation counter is defined in the jackpot operation scenario table 202e1. In the process of S1912, if it is determined that it is the jackpot end timing (ending timing of the ending effect) (S1912: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the jackpot type is the jackpot B (S1913). If it is determined that it is the jackpot B (S1913: Yes), the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to 15 (S1914), and the process shifts to S1916. In the process of S1913, when it is determined that the type of the jackpot is not the jackpot B (the jackpot A or the jackpot C) (S1913: No), the process shifts to the process of S1915.

  In the processing of S1915, the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to 4 (S1915), and then a state command corresponding to the gaming state after the big hit is set (S1916), and the big hit end for setting the big hit end is set. This is set (S1917), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1912, when it is determined that it is not the timing of the end of the big hit (S1912: No), the winning process is executed (S1918), and thereafter, the present process is ended. Here, the winning process (S1918) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the content of the winning process (S1918).

  In the winning process (S1918 in FIG. 57), first, it is determined whether or not the round is valid (S2001). The round valid period is a period in which a round game is set, that is, a period in which the specific winning opening 650a is open. If it is determined that the current time is outside the round validity period (S2001: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is within the round validity period (S2001: Yes), then it is determined whether the ball has passed the specific winning opening 650a (S2002). If it is determined that the ball has passed the specific winning opening 650a (S2002: Yes), the value of the winning number counter is updated by adding 1 (S2003), and a command indicating the number of winning balls after the addition is set (S2003). S2004). On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball has not passed through the specific winning opening 650a (S2002: No), the present process is ended as it is.

  After executing the processing of S2004, it is determined whether the value of the winning number counter is 10 (S2005). When it is determined that the value of the winning number counter is 10 (S2005: Yes), the value of the operation counter is updated to one immediately before the value indicating the end of the current round (S2006), and thereafter, the present process is ended. I do. In the process of S2005, when it is determined that the value of the winning number counter is not 10 (S2005: No), the process of S2006 is skipped, and the process ends.

  With this configuration, as the end condition of the round game, an end condition that is established when time elapses (30 seconds have elapsed) and an end condition that is established when a ball is won (10 wins) are obtained. In the case of providing, regardless of which end condition is satisfied, it is possible to execute the operation control of the big hit game based on the same operation scenario. Therefore, the control process of main controller 110 can be simplified.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 58, the control processing per accessory performed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 (S1805) will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the accessory hit control process (S1805). This accessory hit control process (S1805) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 55), and the special hit flag 203k is turned on in the special power starting opening winning process (see S108 in FIG. 50). Various control processes are executed based on the update status (acquired value of the operation counter) of the operation scenario (the operation scenario defined in the per-principal operation scenario table 202e2) which is set in response to the setting.

  In the accessory hit control process (S1805), first, it is determined whether it is time to start a hit with an accessory (S2101). Here, it is determined whether or not the value of the action counter corresponding to the accessory-based action scenario table 202e (see FIG. 26B) is 1. If it is determined that it is the start timing for the accessory (S2101: Yes), the opening command for the accessory is set (S2102), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2101, if it is determined that it is not the timing of starting the hit of an accessory (S2101: No), next, it is determined whether or not the present is a hit of an accessory (S2103). If it is determined that the character is not hit (S2103: No), the present process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the character is hitting (S2103: Yes), it is next determined whether it is the timing of the opening operation (S2104). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the operation counter corresponding to the accessory-based operation scenario table 202e is 26. If it is determined that it is the timing of the opening operation (S2104: Yes), the opening solenoid (V winning opening solenoid 209b) is set to ON (S2105), and thereafter, the present process is terminated. Although not shown in the drawings, the opening solenoid (V winning opening solenoid 209b) is closed (set to off) in accordance with the value of the operation counter corresponding to the per-principal operation scenario table 202e of the V winning device 65 or Then, a process of turning on the storage solenoid 209c is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2104 that it is not the timing of the opening operation (S2104: No), it is next determined whether or not it is the timing of ending the hit of an accessory (S2106). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the operation counter corresponding to the per-principal operation scenario table 202e is 750. If it is determined that it is the timing of ending the hit for the accessory (S2106: Yes), the hit flag 203k is set to off (S2107), and then it is determined whether or not the V flag 203p is on. (S2108). If it is determined that the V flag 203p is off (S2108: No), the process ends. If it is determined that the V flag 203p is on (S2108: Yes), the start of the jackpot is set (S2110), the V flag 203p is set off (S2111), and then the present process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2106, if it is determined that the timing is not the timing of ending the accessory (S2106: No), the V-pass detection process is executed (S2112), and then the process ends.

<Regarding Control Process Executed by Voice Lamp Control Device in First Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processes of the MPU 221 are roughly classified into a start-up process started when the power is turned on, and a main process executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 59, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S4001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Thereafter, depending on whether the power-off processing flag is on or not, the current startup processing is caused by a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”), and the power-off processing in S4117 (see FIG. 60). ) Are determined to be started during the execution (S4002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 60, upon receiving the power-off occurrence information from main controller 110 (see S4114 in FIG. 60), audio lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process in S4117. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S4117 is being performed can be determined based on the state of the power-off processing flag.

  If the power-off processing flag is off (S4002: No), this startup processing is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure, and the power-off processing in S4117 is performed. It is started after the execution of the process is completed, or started only by resetting the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S4003).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S4006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, the data is not destroyed in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data is destroyed in the RAM 223. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S4003: Yes), the process proceeds to S4004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S4003: No), the process moves to S4008.

  If the current startup process is started after the power is completely shut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the storage in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off. ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S4003: Yes), and the flow shifts to S4004. On the other hand, this startup process is started after an instantaneous power failure occurs and after the execution of the power-off process in S4117 is completed, or is reset only to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Is started, the keyword of “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so that the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S4003: No), and the flow shifts to S4008.

  If the power-off processing flag is on (S4002: Yes), this startup processing is performed after a momentary power failure, and during the execution of the power-off processing in S4117, the sound lamp control device 113 Of the MPU 221 has been reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being performed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, since control cannot be continued, the process proceeds to S4004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the processing of S4004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S4004). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and read out for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined that the data is normal. Such writing and checking for each byte is performed in the order of "55h", "0AAh", and "00h" after "0FFh". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written to the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S4006). By confirming the keyword of “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not data is destroyed in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality of the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S4007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the sound may be output from the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message. It may be.

  In the processing of S4008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S4008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process is performed in S4117 (see S4116 in FIG. 60). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S4117 is executed, the process of S4008 in the state where the power-off flag is turned on is that the current startup process is instantaneous. This is a case where the process is started after the occurrence of the power failure and in a state where the execution of the power-off process in S4117 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the audio ramp control device 113 (S4009), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S4010). The permission is set (S4011), and the process proceeds to the main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the reason why the process of step S4008 is reached in a state where the power-off flag is turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after, for example, the power is completely shut off, and thus the process of step S4008 is performed via steps S4004 to S4006. This is the case where the processing has been reached or the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 has been reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like and started. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: No), the process skips S4009, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, shifts the process to S4010, and sets the initial value of the RAM 223 (S4010).

  The reason why the clearing process in S4009 is skipped is that when the process from S4004 to S4006 is performed via the process in S4006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S4004. When the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, thereby saving the sound lamp control device 113. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the main processing. When the main processing is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has elapsed since the main processing was started or since the previous processing of S4101 was executed (S4101). If the above has not elapsed (S4101: No), the process proceeds to S4112 without performing the processes of S4102 to S4111. In the process of S4101, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed. The process in S4102 to S4111 is a process related to display (staging), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination processing in S4112 and the variable display setting processing in S4113 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S4112 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of a command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the processing of S4112 in a short cycle, a command received by the command determination processing can be prevented. , The setting relating to the variable display effect can be performed without delay.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S4101, (S4101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set in the processes of S4103 to S4113 are transmitted to the display control device 114. An output process is performed (S4102). Next, the output mode of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S4108 described later (S4103), and then execute the power-on notification processing (S4104). The power-on notification processing is to provide notification that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be In addition, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S4105 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S4105, a customer waiting effect is executed, and thereafter, a held number display updating process is executed (S4106). In the customer waiting effect, when the pachinko machine 10 has not been played by the player for a predetermined time, a setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is performed as a command by the display control device. Sent to 114.

  After that, a frame button input monitoring / production process is executed (S4107). In this frame button input monitoring / production process, an input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the production effect is monitored, and a case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is dealt with. This is a process for setting to perform an effect. In this process, when an operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  Upon completion of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing, a lamp editing processing is executed (S4108), and then a sound editing / output processing is executed (S4109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the processing of S4109, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S4110), and then an effect update process is executed (S4111). Details of the effect update processing (S4111) will be described later with reference to FIG. After performing the process of S4111, the process shifts to the process of S4112. In the liquid crystal effect execution management processing, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S4108 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output processing in S4109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  After the process in S4111, a command determination process (S4112) for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is executed, and the flow shifts to a process in S4113. Details of the command determination processing (S4112) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S4113, a variation pattern command for display is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 to display the variation display effect on the third symbol display device 81, and the command is displayed on the display control device 114. A variable display setting process, which is a process set for transmitting to the user, is executed. Details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Upon completion of the process in S4113, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4114). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S4114 (S4114: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S4116), and the power-off processing is executed (S4117). After the execution of the power-off process, the power-off process-in-progress flag is turned off (S4118), and then the process is in an infinite loop. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off, and the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 is turned off. Further, the storage of the information of the occurrence of the power interruption is also deleted.

  On the other hand, if the power-off information is not stored in the process of S4114 (S4114: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S4115), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S4115: No), the process returns to S4101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S4115: Yes), the processing is executed in an infinite loop to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main processing is not executed, and thereafter the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, the player can call the store clerk of the hall or the like and request the repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 has been destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM breakdown.

  Next, the command determination process (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S4112). This command determination processing (S4112) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. . Hereinafter, the details of the command determination processing (S4112) will be described.

  In the command determination process (S4112), first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main control device 110 is read and analyzed from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223. It is determined whether a movable valve operation command has been received (S4201). If it is determined that the first movable valve operation command has been received (S4201: Yes), an operation scenario update is set based on the received first movable valve operation command (S4202). finish.

  That is, in the present embodiment, in order to update the operation scenario without delay when a command (first movable valve operation command) related to the operation control of the first movable valve 66b executed when the power is turned on in the pachinko machine 10 is received. In addition, a process for determining reception of the first movable valve command is provided in the highest priority determination order of the command determination process. With this configuration, it is possible to easily synchronize the operation control content on the main control device 110 side and the situation grasp content on the audio lamp control device 113 side.

  In the present embodiment, the operation scenario (the first movable valve 66b) is performed only when a command (first movable valve operation command) relating to the operation control of the first movable valve 66b executed when the power is turned on in the pachinko machine 10 is received. (Operation scenario for grasping the operation state of the main controller 110 on the side of the sound lamp controller 113), but is not limited to this, and for example, the main controller 110 may be set at predetermined intervals (every hour). It may be configured to output a command indicating the operation control content of the first movable valve 66b from the side or to output a command indicating the operation control content of the first movable valve 66b every time a jackpot game is executed. good. Then, a process of comparing the content of the received command with the content of the updated operation scenario and correcting the updated content of the operation scenario may be executed. This makes it possible to further enhance the accuracy with which the sound lamp control device 113 grasps the operation control content of the main control device 110. Further, the operation scenario updating process on the voice lamp control device 113 may be executed in consideration of a time lag required until a command output from the main control device 110 is received.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4201, if it is determined that the first movable valve operation command has not been received (S4201: No), it is determined whether or not a special figure variation pattern command has been received from the main controller 110. (S4203). Here, the special figure variation pattern command is a command for notifying a variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol. In the process of S4203, if it is determined that the special figure change pattern command has been received (S4203: Yes), the special figure change start processing is executed (S4204), and this processing ends. Details of the special figure change start processing (S4204) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4203 that the special figure variation pattern command has not been received (S4203: No), it is determined whether a special figure stop type command has been received (S4205). If it is determined that the special figure stop type command has been received (S4205: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is set to ON (S4206), and the stop type is extracted from the received special figure stop type command (S4207). After that, the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4205 that the special figure stop type command has not been received (S4205: No), it is next determined whether or not the pending ball count command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4208). Here, when it is determined that the command of the number of reserved balls has been received (S4208: Yes), the symbol type (special symbol, ordinary symbol) of the received number of retained balls command is analyzed and stored in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113. The value of the provided counter is updated (S4209). Specifically, when the special ball number command is received, the value of the special symbol number counter 203c of the main controller 110 included in the special ball number command (that is, the special symbol fluctuation display is held) The number of balls is extracted, and the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223c provided in the RAM 223 of the sound ramp control device 113 is updated in accordance with the extracted counter value.

  When the command for retaining the number of ordinary symbols is received, the value of the ordinary symbol retained number of balls counter 203d of the main controller 110 included in the retained number of balls command (that is, the number of retained balls for the variable display of the ordinary symbol) is included. Is extracted, and the value of the ordinary symbol holding ball number counter provided in the RAM 223 of the sound ramp control device 113 is updated in accordance with the extracted counter value.

  Here, the reserved ball number command is issued when the ball enters the various entrances (special figure entrance 64, through gate 67) (start winning) and the value of the various retained ball number counter is added, or Since the main control device 110 transmits the value when the value of the number of retained balls counter is decremented at the time of executing the various variation start processing, the process of S4209 is performed every time a winning start or a variation display is set. By the processing, the values of the special symbol retaining ball number counter 223c and the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter of the voice lamp control device 113 are changed to the values of the special symbol retaining ball number counter 203c and the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. Can be matched.

  Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol retaining ball number counter 223c of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is shifted from the value of the various retaining ball number counters 203c and 203d of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, At the time of the start winning, when the variable display is set, that is, when the number of retained balls command is notified based on the change of the number of retained balls, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the audio lamp control device 113 is corrected. The number of various reserved ball counters of the main controller 110 can be adjusted to the values of the various reserved ball counters 203c and 203d.

  If it is determined in the processing of S4208 that the command for holding balls has not been received (S4208: No), it is determined whether or not a winning command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4210). In the processing of S4210, when it is determined that the winning command has been received (S4210: Yes), the winning command processing is executed (S4211), and this processing ends. This winning command processing (S4211) analyzes the symbol type (special symbol, normal symbol) corresponding to the winning information included in the received winning information command, and stores the storage area (of the sound lamp control device 113) corresponding to the analysis result. It performs processing for storing (storing) in the prize information storage area 223b) in the RAM 223 and processing for executing an effect (prefetch effect) based on the received prize information. The details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If it is determined in the processing of S4210 that no winning command has been received (S4210: No), it is next determined whether a status command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4212). If it is determined that the status command has been received (S4212: Yes), a status command receiving process is executed (S4213), and this process ends. The details of the status command reception processing (S4213) will be described later with reference to FIG. 64. However, based on the status command output from main controller 110, the gaming state of pachinko machine 10 (normal state, time reduction state) and the like. Then, a process of setting the winning game state (during a big hit or during a hit) in the slave state setting area 223g is executed.

  Next, in the process of S4212, when it is determined that a status command has not been received (S4212: No), it is determined whether a stop-related command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4214). If it is determined in the processing of S4214 that a stop-related command has been received (S4214: Yes), stop-related processing is executed (S4215), and this processing ends. A detailed description of this stop-related processing (S4215) will be described later with reference to FIG. 65, but a third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on various stop commands output from the main controller 110. And a process for setting the display mode of the variable effect using the fourth symbol are executed.

  In the present embodiment, the variation pattern (variation time) is set in advance when executing the special symbol variation as a period during which the special symbol variation display is performed. While the special symbol change is being executed based on the special symbol change, a process of forcibly stopping the special symbol change may be executed according to the result of another special symbol change. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 executes the stop-related process (S4215), and stops the variation display (fluctuation effect) of the third symbol and the fourth symbol corresponding to the timing when the special symbol variation is stopped. It is configured to be able to. This makes it possible to synchronize the fluctuation state of the special symbol with the fluctuation effect state displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and to provide a display mode that is easy for the player to understand.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4214 that the stop-related command has not been received (S4214: No), it is determined whether a general-purpose related command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4216). Is received (S4216: Yes), general-purpose-related processing is executed (S4217), and this processing ends. Details of the general figure-related processing (S4217) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S4216, when it is determined that the general-purpose related command has not been received (S4216: No), it is determined whether or not a hit-related command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4218), and the hit-related command has been received. If it is determined that the processing has been performed (S4218: Yes), the hit-related processing is executed (S4219), and this processing ends. The details of the hit-related processing (S4219) will be described later with reference to FIG. 67. However, as a result of the special symbol lottery, an effect corresponding to a big hit game or a small hit game executed when a big hit or a small hit is won. This is a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute the display.

  In the process of S4218, when it is determined that the hit-related command has not been received (S4218: No), a process according to another command is executed (S4220), and this process ends. In the process of S4220, if the other command is a command used by the sound lamp control device 113, a process corresponding to the command is performed, a processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the other command is a command used by the display control device 114, the command is executed. Is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  The command determination process (S4112 in FIG. 61) executed by the voice lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment has been described above. In the command determination process (S4112), the order of determining whether or not various commands are received is described. An order other than the order shown in the present embodiment may be used.For example, the process of determining whether or not a status command has been received may be performed more than the process of determining whether or not a special figure variation pattern command has been received. The determination order may be defined so as to be executed first.

  With this configuration, when the fluctuation pattern command and the status command are output from the main controller 110 at the same time, that is, in the special symbol fluctuation start process (see S205 in FIG. 41) of the main controller 110, Even if the special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S307 in FIG. 43) is executed, a special symbol variation pattern command is set, and then a status command indicating that the gaming state has been changed is set, the voice lamp control is performed. The game state currently set on the device 113 side can be determined before the special figure change pattern command.

  Next, the special figure change start process (S4204) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the special figure change start processing (S4204). The special figure change start processing (S4204) is executed in the command determination processing (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113, and is performed according to the set game state. Then, a process of setting the display mode (variation pattern for main variation, variation pattern for sub-variation) corresponding to the special symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  Then, the display control device 114 performs the third symbol based on the display mode (display command) set here and the display variation pattern command set in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 71) described later. The display mode displayed in the display area of the display device 81 is set. Hereinafter, the details of the special figure change start processing (S4204) will be described.

  First, when the special figure change start processing is set. The special figure change start flag 223d is set to ON (S4301), a change pattern is extracted from the received special figure change pattern command (S4302), and a detailed display mode is selected using the change pattern selection table 222a (S4303). .

  Next, information (information indicating the current game state) set (stored) in the slave state setting area 223g is read, and it is determined whether the current game state is the time reduction state (S4304). In the process of S4304, if it is determined that the current time is not the time reduction state (normal state) (S4304: No), a display command during the normal state is set (S4305), and the present process ends. When a display command is set in the process of S4305, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114 in the command output process (S4102 in FIG. 60) of the main process (see FIG. 60) of the sound lamp control device 113, and is executed as shown in FIG. In the main display area Dm as shown in b), an effect mode for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4304 that the current gaming state is the time saving state (S4304: Yes), a command for displaying the time saving state is set (S4306), and the value of the notified suspended number storage area 223s is set. Is subtracted by 1 (S4307), a value (fluctuation time) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern received this time is set in the fluctuation time counter 223r (S4308), and this processing ends.

  Next, the winning command processing (S4211) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the winning command processing (S4211). The winning command processing (S4211) is executed in the command determination processing (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and is a type of the received winning command (special symbol, ordinary symbol). A process for setting an effect to be executed when a winning command is received (a so-called pre-reading effect) is executed according to the symbol and the current game state.

  When the winning command processing (S4211) is executed, first, it is analyzed which symbol type corresponds to which symbol type based on the information included in the received winning command, and is set (stored) in the corresponding winning information storage area 223b. (S4401). Then, it is determined whether or not the V rush flag 223q is set to ON (S4402). If it is determined that the V rush flag 223q is not set to ON (S4402: No), the process proceeds to S4412, and thereafter, the process ends. I do. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is set to ON (S4402: Yes), the variable time information included in the received winning command is extracted (S4403).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the prefetch counter 223h is 1 or more (S4404). If it is determined that the value of the look-ahead counter 223h is smaller than 1 (it is 0) (S4404: No), the variation time (variation time of the special symbol) included in the winning information received this time is set as the remaining period of the V rush. Since it is in a state where additional notification cannot be made, the extracted fluctuation time is stored in the unreported period storage area 223j (S4410), the value of the unreported reserved number storage area 223k is incremented by 1 (S4411), and the processing of S4412 is performed. Move to.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4404 that the value of the prefetch counter 223h is 1 or more (S4404: Yes), the fluctuation time (the fluctuation time of the special symbol) included in the winning command received this time is changed to the V rush time. Since it is in a state where additional notification can be made as the remaining period, it is determined whether or not the interruption flag 223m is ON (S4405). In the process of S44405, it is determined whether or not the present time is the timing at which the additional notification can be executed. In the present embodiment, during the V rush, during the bonus per game period and during the jackpot game period, the remaining period of the V rush is not added to inform. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to concentrate on various hit games and play the game.

  If it is determined in the processing of S4405 that the interruption flag 223m is off (S4404: No), it is next determined whether or not the special hit flag 223n is on (S4406). If it is determined that the special hit flag 223n is off (S4406: No), since the additional notification can be executed at present, the value of the time reduction counter 223i corresponds to the fluctuation time extracted in the process of S4403. (S4407), add 1 to the value of the notified suspended number storage area 223s, and shift to the process of S4409.

  Although illustration is omitted, when the fluctuation time is added in the process of S4407, a display command corresponding to the added value is set, and an additional notification effect is provided on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. a) is executed. In the present embodiment, as the additional notification effect, all values added in the process of S4407 are configured to be notified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be divided into a plurality of times with the added value as an upper limit. May be configured to execute an additional notification effect. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand what triggers the addition of the remaining period of V rush (short time remaining), so that the player does not get bored early. Can be performed.

  In addition, the value added in the process of S4407 is reported until the value added in the process of S4407 reaches a predetermined value or the value of the counter 223i for time reduction is reduced to the predetermined value. It is also possible to configure so as not to notify the user by summing the fluctuation times (variation times of special symbols) included in a plurality of winning commands. As a result, it is possible to make the length of the remaining short period added in one additional information notification effect surprising. Further, in this case, for example, when the time is added to the time reduction period counter 223i for the same fluctuation time as the fluctuation time (for example, 50 seconds) of the length set at the time of winning the special symbol jackpot, the additional notification effect is provided. It is preferable that an additional notification effect be performed for 50 seconds. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player think that the special symbol jackpot has been won, and it is possible to enhance the staging effect.

  On the other hand, when the interruption flag 223m is determined to be ON in the processing of S4405 (S4405: Yes), and when the special hit flag 223n is determined to be ON in the processing of S4406 (S4406: Yes), the extraction is performed. The obtained fluctuation time is stored in the unreported period storage area 223j (S4410), and the flow shifts to the process of S4411 described above.

  When the process of S4411 is completed, the value of the look-ahead counter 223h is decremented by 1 (S4409), and then other processes are executed (S4412), and thereafter, the present process ends.

  Next, the state command receiving process (S4212) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the status command receiving process (S4212). This state command reception processing (S4212) is executed in the command determination processing (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113, and is performed according to the set game state. This is to execute processing for setting different display modes displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Hereinafter, the details of the status command receiving process (S4213) will be described.

  When the state command receiving process (S4213) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the currently set gaming state is changed (S4501). Here, it is determined whether or not the gaming state set in the slave state setting area 223g is different from the gaming state indicated by the currently received state command. In the processing of S4501, if it is determined that there is no change in the gaming state (S4501: No), the processing of S4502 to S4508 is skipped, and the processing shifts to the processing of S4509. If it is determined that there is a change in the gaming state (S4501: Yes), it is determined whether the changed gaming state is the normal state (S4502).

  In the processing of S4502, when it is determined that the changed gaming state is the normal state (when the status command received this time is a command indicating the normal state) (S4502: Yes), then, the current symbol is the normal symbol. It is determined whether or not a hit is made (S4503). If it is determined that the normal symbol is not hit (S4503: No), a display command indicating the normal mode is set (S4504), and the information indicated by the status command received this time is stored (set) in the slave status setting area 223g. ) (S4509), and terminates this process.

  Here, when the command set in the process of S4504 is notified to the display control device 114, the variable effect display during the normal state is executed. As described above, in the present embodiment, the type of various display modes displayed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81 by the sound lamp control device 113 based on the status command output from the main control device 110 ( Mode and background), and a command indicating the type is output to the display control device 114.

  With such a configuration, for example, it is possible to eliminate the need to set the display mode of the variable effect display for each of the game states set on the audio lamp control device 113 side. That is, a command (type command) indicating the type of various display modes corresponding to the currently set game state and a variation pattern command (common command) corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol are output to the display control device 114. Only on the basis of the type command received on the display control device 114 side and the common command, display data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a display mode corresponding to the current game state and the received fluctuation pattern is displayed. Can be set. Therefore, the processing load on the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  As described above, in the case where the display data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set by combining a plurality of commands received from the sound lamp control device 113 on the display control device 114 side, The display controller 114 is configured to output information (confirmation information) indicating the contents of the display data after setting from the display controller 114 to the audio lamp controller 113, and the confirmation information received by the audio lamp controller 113 is appropriate. A determination means is provided for determining whether or not there is, and when it is determined that the determination result is not appropriate, a simple display variation pattern command indicating appropriate information is set, and the content of the display data that has already been set is set. It is preferable to rewrite the display data into simple display data.

  With such a configuration, when appropriate display data is not set for various commands received from the main control device 110 by the audio lamp control device 113, simple display data indicating appropriate information is set. , And a variable effect display based on the simple display data can be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress that the variable effect display having the content different from the actual game result (the lottery result of the special symbol) is executed and the player's willingness to play is reduced. The simple display data described above includes, for example, display data for displaying a special mode (for example, a black background mode) that does not correspond to any game state, and display data for executing a variable display of the fourth symbol. For example, display data having a smaller data amount than display data used in normal fluctuation effect display may be used.

  In the present embodiment, the above-described configuration is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the audio lamp control device 113 sets a display variation pattern command based on the current game state and the received variation pattern. May be configured.

  Returning to FIG. 64, the description will be continued. In the process of S4502, if it is determined that the changed gaming state is not the normal state (if the status command received this time is not the command indicating the normal state) (S4502: No), then the changed gaming state is changed to the normal state. It is determined whether the game is in the time reduction state (S4507), and when it is determined that the gaming state is the time reduction state (the currently received state command is a command indicating the time reduction state) (S4507: Yes), the V rush mode is indicated. A display command is set (S4508), and the flow shifts to the process of S4509 described above. If it is determined that the gaming state is not the time reduction state (S4507: No), the process of S4508 is skipped, and this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4503, when it is determined that the present is a normal symbol (S4503: Yes), a display command indicating the extension mode is set (S4505), and the extension flag 223p is set to ON (S4503). S4506), and proceeds to the process of S4509 described above. When the display command is set in the process of S4505, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114 in the command output process (S4102 in FIG. 60) of the main process (see FIG. 60) of the sound lamp control device 113, and is executed as shown in FIG. The display mode indicating the extension screen shown in b) is set.

  Next, a stop-related process (S4215), which is one of the command determination processes (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stop-related processing (S4215). The stop-related processing (S4215) sets a display mode when a stop-related command (a command set when stopped and displayed based on the result of another special symbol lottery) from the main control device 110 is set. Is executed.

  When the stop-related processing (S4215) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the stop-related command received this time is a special figure determination command (S4601). If it is determined that the command is a special figure fixing command (S4601: Yes), a display command for fluctuation stop is set (S4602), and the flow shifts to the processing of S4603. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure determination command has not been received (S4601: No), the process of S4602 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4603.

  In the processing of S4603, it is determined whether the stop-related command received this time is a special figure temporary stop command (S4603). If it is determined that the special figure temporary stop command has been received (S4603: Yes), the suspension flag 223m is set to ON (S4604), and a display command indicating the temporary stop mode of the special symbol is set (S4605). Move on to processing. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure temporary stop command has not been received (S4603: No), the processing of S4604 and S4605 is skipped, and the processing shifts to S4606.

  When the display command indicating the temporary stop mode of the special symbol is set in the processing of S4605, the display mode (character of “STOP”) indicating that the temporary stop is being performed is displayed as shown in FIG. At the same time, the subtraction display of the timer 812 for indicating the remaining period of the special symbol change is interrupted.

  In the process of S4606, it is determined whether or not the stop-related command received this time is a special figure change restart command (S4606). This special figure change restart command is a command which is set when the change of the special symbol is restarted in the special symbol change execution process (see S206 in FIG. 44) of the main controller 110 (see S702 in FIG. 44). . When it is determined that the special figure change restart command has been received (S4606: Yes), the interruption flag 223m is set to off (S4607), and a display command indicating the change restart of the special symbol is set (S4608).

  Then, it is determined whether the unreported information has been updated during the period in which the suspension flag 223m is set to ON (S4609). In this process, it is determined whether or not information indicating a new variable time has been stored in the unreported period storage area 223j and the unreported reserved number storage area 223k. In the process of S4609, if it is determined that there is no update (S4609: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is an update (S4609: Yes), the value of the time reduction period counter 223i is added in accordance with the update content (S4610), and the unreported period storage area 223j, unreported pending number storage area 223k, The information in the notified suspended count storage area 223s is updated, and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure change restart command has not been received (S4606: No), the present process ends.

  The value added by the processing of S4610 is the value of the timer 812 displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing when the interruption flag 223 is set to OFF, that is, when the special figure change is restarted. Are added and notified at the timing of starting the subtraction. With such a configuration, in the state where the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special symbol is stopped, various pay games are watched, and after the completion of the various play games, a collective addition notification effect is executed. Even after the end of the game, the player can be expected to add a large amount of the remaining period of the V rush.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 66, the general-purpose-related processing (S4217) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 66 is a flow chart showing the general map related processing (S4217). This general figure related processing (S4217) is executed in the command determination processing (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. Hereinafter, the details of the ordinary figure-related processing (S4217) will be described.

  When the general figure related processing (S4217) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the general figure related command received this time is a general figure change pattern command (S4701). If it is determined that the received command is a normal figure variation pattern command (S4701: Yes), a small hit start command for display is set (S4702), and then the present process is terminated.

  If it is determined in the process of S4701 that the received command is not the general-figure variation pattern command (S4701: No), then it is determined whether or not the general-figure-related command received this time is a general-figure start command. (S4703). If it is determined that the received command is a general-drawing start command (S4703: Yes), a small win winning command for display is set (S4704), and then the present process is terminated.

  If it is determined in the process of S4703 that the received command is not the per-figure-period start command (S4703: No), then it is determined whether or not the currently-received per-figure-related command is a special power operation command (S4705). ). If it is determined that the received command is a special power operation command (S4705: Yes), a winning command per display V is set (S4706), and then it is determined whether the extension flag 223p is set to ON (S4707). ), When it is determined that the game is set to ON, that is, in the game per bonus game executed by the ball winning to the special power operation port 643 in the general game per game being executed at the end timing of the time saving state. If it is determined that there is any data (S4707: Yes), the extension flag 223p is set to off (S4708), and then the present process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the extension flag 223p is not turned on in the process of S4707 (S4707: No), the process of S4708 is skipped and the present process ends.

  In the process of S4705, if it is determined that the received command is not a special power operation command (S4705: No), it is then determined whether or not the current received general-purpose related command is a general-purpose end command (S4709). ). If it is determined that the received command is not the end command per ordinary figure (S4709: No), the process ends as it is. If it is determined that the received command is the end command per ordinary figure (S4709: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the extension flag 223p is on (S4710). If it is determined that the extension flag 223p is on (S4710: Yes), the extension flag 223p is set to off (S4711), a display command indicating the end of the V rush is set (S4712), and the V rush flag 223q is set. It is set to off (S4713), and thereafter, the present process is terminated.

  In the processing of S4710, if it is determined that the extension flag 223p is off (S4710: No), a display command indicating the end of the ordinary drawing is set (S4714), and then this processing is ended.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the case where the per-figure-per-game is executed in a state where the final change of the special symbol in the time saving state is stopped, the extension flag 223p is set to extend the V rush effect. Set to on. Then, the end timing of the V-rush effect is made different depending on the progress of the special electric game executed based on the normal per-game. Specifically, when the ball does not win in the special power operation port 643 in the per-figure game, the V rush effect is terminated at the end timing of the per-figure game, and the ball is moved to the special power operation port 643. When a prize is won and a per-game per-game is executed, the V-rush effect is terminated at the end timing of the per-game per-game. In addition, when a ball wins to the V winning opening 165 in the per-prize game, the effect based on the big hit game (V big hit game) is executed with priority.

  With such a configuration, a period in which the player can aim for the V jackpot game can be notified to the player regardless of the game state, so that a game that is easy for the player to understand can be provided.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the hit-related process (S4219) which is one of the command determination processes (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the content of the hit-related processing (S4219). In the hit-related processing (S4219), the effect display corresponding to the big hit game or the special hit per game which is executed when the special hit is won or the hit per bonus as a result of the lottery of the special symbol is executed on the third symbol display device 81. The main control device 110 executes a process corresponding to various commands transmitted when a jackpot or an accessory is won.

  In addition, when a prize ball number command for indicating the number of prize balls acquired during a hit game (big hit game, game per role) is received, the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball number command is accumulated, A process of setting a display prize ball number command based on the accumulation result is executed.

  In the hit-related processing (S4219), first, it is determined whether the command received by the command determination processing (see FIG. 61) is a big-hit-related command (S4801). If it is determined that the received command is a jackpot-related command (S4801: Yes), a jackpot-related process is executed (S4802), and this process ends.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 68, the jackpot-related process (S4802), which is one of the hit-related processes (S4219 in FIG. 67) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the content of the jackpot-related processing (S4802). In the jackpot-related process, a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won is performed. Processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from 110 is executed.

  In the jackpot-related process (S4802), first, it is determined whether or not the hit-related command received in the hit-related process (S4801 in FIG. 67) is a jackpot start command (S4901). If it is determined that the command is a jackpot start command (S4901: Yes), a display jackpot start command is set (S4902). The display jackpot start command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. When receiving the display jackpot start command, the display control device 114 displays an effect indicating the start of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the V rush flag 223q is on (S4903). If it is determined that the V rush flag 223q is ON (S4903: Yes), it is determined whether the current big hit is a special hit (big hit B) (S4911), and it is determined that it is a special hit (big hit B). In this case (S4911: Yes), the special hit flag 223n is set to off (S4912), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4911 that the current big hit is not a special hit (big hit B) (S4911: No), the process of S4912 is skipped, and the present process is terminated as it is.

  In the process of S4903, when it is determined that the V rush flag 223q is off (S4903: No), the number of time savings given in the big hit executed this time is extracted (S4904) and stored in the winning information storage area 223b. The special figure prize information is read out (S4905), an object is selected up to the number of time savings extracted from the read special figure prize information (S4906), and the number of the selected special figure prize information is stored in an unreported reserved number storage area 223k. (S4907), calculate the fluctuation time included in the selected special figure winning information (S4908), store the calculated fluctuation time in the unreported period storage area 223j (S4909), and turn on the V rush flag 223q. This is set (S4910), and then the present process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4901 that the jackpot start command has not been received (S4901: No), it is next determined whether a round number command has been received (S4913). If the round number command has been received (S4913: Yes), the display round number command is set based on the round number (S4914), and the process ends. In the present embodiment, since the information indicating the number of rounds is transmitted from the main control device 110 as the number of rounds command, the display round number command is set based on the received round number command. In order to reduce the amount of command data transmitted from the control device 110, when the main control device 110 is configured to transmit information indicating that a new round has been started as a round update command, the audio ramp control device When a round update command is received in the RAM 223 of the RAM 113, a round number accumulation counter for accumulating the number of received round update commands is provided, and the sound lamp control device 113 side determines the current round based on the value of the round number accumulation counter. Calculate the number and configure the display round number command Good.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4913 that the round number command has not been received (S4913: No), it is determined whether a jackpot end command has been received (S4915). If it is determined that the jackpot end command has not been received (S4915: No), the present process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot end command has been received (S4915: Yes), the jackpot end process is executed (S4916), and this process ends.

  Here, the jackpot termination process (S4919), which is one of the jackpot-related processes (S4802 in FIG. 68) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the content of the jackpot ending process (S4919).

  In the jackpot ending process (S4919), the number of time savings given in the jackpot executed this time is set in the look-ahead counter 223h (S5001), and the value of the notified suspended number storage area 223s is subtracted from the value of the look-ahead counter 223h ( Then, the value stored in the unreported pending number storage area 223k is read (S5003). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the unreported reserved number storage area 223k is 1 or more (S5004). If it is determined that the value of the unreported reserved number storage area 223k is smaller than 1 (it is 0) (S5004: No), an additional notification effect is executed on the ending screen of the jackpot game (see FIG. 15A). Since it is in a state where it is not possible to do so (because there is no change time information to be added), a display no-addition command is set (S5014), and then this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5004, when it is determined that the value of the unreported pending number storage area 223k is 1 or more (S5004: Yes), that is, information indicating a variable time in which additional notification is possible (used for additional notification). If there is no special symbol fluctuation time information), the value of the look-ahead counter 223h is subtracted in accordance with the read value (S5005), and among the values stored in the unreported pending number storage area 223k, the value of S5005 The value corresponding to the value subtracted in the processing is cleared (S5006), and the fluctuation time stored in the unreported period storage area 223j is read (S5007).

  After that, it is determined whether or not the winning information (special figure reservation information) included in the winning information storage area 223b includes the winning information indicating the winning of the special hit (big hit B) (S5008). If it is determined that there is no change (S5008: No), an additional command for display corresponding to the read fluctuation time is set (S5009), and among the fluctuation times stored in the unreported period storage area 223j, The period corresponding to the fluctuation time used for the additional effect is cleared (S5010), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5008, when it is determined that the winning information indicating the winning of the special winning (big hit B) is included in the winning information storage area 223b (S5008: Yes), the change until the special winning change is completed. A display command corresponding to the fluctuation time is set (S5011). In other words, when the special symbol change executed one after another is the special symbol change corresponding to the special winning, the state in which the change time for four special symbol holdings can be added and notified as an additional notification effect is provided. Even if it is, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation time of the next special symbol fluctuation, the fluctuation time of the next special symbol fluctuation, and the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation (special winning fluctuation) corresponding to the special winning win only Is used for additional information production.

  Further, a display command indicating the special mode (heaven mode) is set (S5012), the special hit flag 223n is set to ON (S5013), and the process shifts to the above-described process of S5010.

  With this, if the winning information indicating the winning of the special hit (big hit B) exists in the special symbol holding at the end of the big hit game, the special mode (heaven mode) is entered as shown in FIG. And a change time “220 seconds” until the special hit change ends is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to inform the player of the period until the special hit game (the big hit game in which the big hit B is set) is executed. Further, after the end of the special winning game, the time saving state is set again, so that the player can play the game in the heaven mode with peace of mind. Furthermore, since the fluctuation time of the special symbol held and stored after the special hit change is not notified to the player, the period of the time saving state (V rush) set after the big hit game is ended until the big hit game ends. It can be difficult for the player to understand.

  Referring back to FIG. 67, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S4801 that the received command is not a jackpot-related command (S4801: No), it is determined whether the received command is a accessory-related command (S4803). If it is determined that the received command is an accessory-related command (S4803: Yes), an accessory-related process (S4804) is executed, and this process ends.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 70, the accessory hit-related process (S4804), which is one of the hit-related processes (S4219 in FIG. 67) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the content of the accessory hit-related process (S4804). In the accessory hitting related process, a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to a bonus hit game executed when the hit hit is executed is performed. Is executed, processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from main controller 110 is executed.

  In the hit-related process (S4804), first, it is determined whether the hit-related command received in the hit-related process (S4219 in FIG. 67) is a hit-start command (S5101).

  In the processing of S5101, if it is determined that the start command per accessory has been received (S5101: Yes), the start command per accessory is set for display (S5102), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5101 that the received command is not the accessory hit start command (S5101: No), then it is determined whether the received command is a V entrance passage command (S5103). .

  In the processing of S5103, if it is determined that the V entrance passage command has been received (S5103: Yes), a winning command per display accessory is set (S5104), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5103 that the received command is not the V-entry passing command (S5103: No), it is next determined whether the received command is the V-passing command (S5105).

  In the process of S5105, if it is determined that the V-pass command has been received (S5105: Yes), the display V-hit command is set (S5106), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5105 that the received command is not a V-pass command (S5105: No), it is next determined whether the received command is an ending command (S5107). If it is determined that the received command is not the ending command (S5107: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the received command is the ending command (S5107: Yes), the ending command for display is set (S5108), and the process ends.

  Referring back to FIG. 67, the description will be continued. In the process of S4803, when it is determined that the received command is not the accessory hit related command (S4803: No), it is determined whether a prize ball command has been received (S4805). If it is determined that the received command is not a prize ball command (S4805: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the received command is a prize ball command (S4805: Yes), a value corresponding to the received command is added to a value of a prize ball counter (not shown) (S4806). The display prize ball number command corresponding to the value of the prize ball counter after the addition is set (S4807), and this processing ends.

  Although detailed description is omitted, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the number of prize balls corresponding to the prize ball number command received during the period in which the V rush flag 223q is set to ON (advantageous continuation period). Is accumulated by the award ball number counter. Then, during a win game (big hit game, role hit game) or during a V rush effect, information indicating the number of prize balls according to the accumulated value of the prize ball counter is displayed (FIG. 12). (Refer to the display area HR2 of (c)).

  With this configuration, the total number of balls acquired during the period from the time saving state (V rush) to the end of the V rush (advantageous continuation period) is notified to the player in an easily understandable manner. Can be.

  In the present embodiment, the accumulated value of the number of prize balls acquired during the advantageous continuation period is configured to be displayed during the advantageous continuation period, but the number of award balls acquired during the advantageous continuation period can be notified to the player. For example, during the advantageous continuation period, the number of prize balls obtained in the jackpot game and the number of prize balls obtained in the game per accessory may be displayed separately. . In this case, the winning game state (during the big hit or hitting the accessory) at the time of receiving the prize ball command is determined based on the information set in the dependent state setting area 223g, and the number of prize balls is accumulated for each determination result. It is preferable to provide a means for performing this. As a result, the number of prize balls acquired during the advantageous continuation period can be easily classified.

  Further, the number of prize balls acquired in one game period (a period in which the jackpot game period and the latent state period until the next jackpot game is executed) within the advantageous continuation period is accumulated and displayed. It may be configured as follows. In this case, it is preferable to provide a storage unit for storing the cumulative number of prize balls acquired in one game period as history information, and to display the information stored in the storage unit in history.

  In the present embodiment, the number of times of the V jackpot game executed based on the special electric game during the V rush period is configured to be cumulatively displayed (see the display area HR1 in FIG. 12C). In the case of using a configuration in which the number of prize balls acquired during the advantageous continuation period is cumulatively displayed as described above, the number of times the special symbol lottery result becomes a lottery result (big hit) that is advantageous to the player, as described above. May be displayed, or the lottery probability that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a lottery result (big hit) advantageous to the player may be displayed.

  With this configuration, it is possible for the player to analyze the result of the special symbol lottery executed during the advantageous continuation period and the number of prize balls acquired during the advantageous continuation period. Can be performed.

  Next, the variable display setting process (S4113) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S4113). The variable display setting process (S4113 in FIG. 71) is one of the main processes (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. As described above, the variable display setting process (S4113 in FIG. 71) performs the special symbol display based on the variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to display the variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81. A process for setting a display variation pattern command and transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. Further, based on the extracted stop types (big hit A to big hit C), a process of setting a display special figure stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is executed.

  In the variation display setting process (S4113), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S5201). If it is determined that the special figure change start flag 223d is off (S5201: No), the special figure change pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, and the process proceeds to S5205. . On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure change start flag 223d is on (S5201: Yes), the special figure change start flag 223d is set to off (S5202).

  Then, in the process of S4302 of the special figure variation start process (see S4204 of FIG. 62) executed in the command determination process (see S4112 of FIG. 61), the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110. A variation pattern command for displaying a special symbol is set based on the variation pattern related to (S5203), the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223c is decremented by 1 (S5204), and the process proceeds to S5205.

  The display variation pattern command set in the process of S5203 is output to the display control device 114 in the command output process (S4102 in FIG. 60) executed in the main process (see FIG. 60) of the sound lamp control device 113. You. The display control device 114 creates display data to be displayed in the display area (display screen) of the third symbol display device 81 based on the received display variation pattern command and various display commands for indicating a gaming state.

  In the process of S5205, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e is set to ON (S5205). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not set to ON (S5205: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type is set to ON (S5205: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is set to OFF (S5206), the extracted stop type is set as it is (S5207), and the display special figure stop is performed. The type command is set (S5208), and the process ends.

  Next, the effect update process (S4111) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the effect update processing (S4111). This effect update process (S4111) is one of the main processes (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and updates the values of various counters set during the V rush period. , To execute a process for setting the effect mode based on the updated counter value.

  In the effect update processing (S4111), first, it is determined whether or not the suspension flag 223m is set to ON (S5300). If the suspension flag 223m is set to ON (S5300: Yes), the process proceeds to S5309. Then, the present process ends. On the other hand, when the interruption flag 223m is not set to ON, that is, when the special symbol change is not interrupted (S5300: No), it is next determined whether or not the value of the change time counter 223r is larger than 0. (S5301). If it is determined that the value of the fluctuation time counter 223r is not greater than 0 (it is 0) (S5301: No), the process proceeds to S5309. If it is determined that the value of the fluctuation time counter is greater than 0 (S5301: Yes), the value of the fluctuation time counter is updated (S5302), and then it is determined whether the value of the time reduction period counter 223i is greater than 0. (S5303). When it is determined that the value of the time reduction period counter 223i is 0 (S5303: No), the present process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5303, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction period counter 223i is greater than 0 (S5303: Yes), the value of the time reduction period counter 223i is updated (S5304), and then the updated time reduction period counter 223i. It is determined whether or not the value of is equal to 0 (S5305). When it is determined that the value of the updated time reduction counter 223i is not 0 (S5305: No), a display command corresponding to the value of the time reduction counter 223i is set (S5306). The display command set here is sent to the display control device 114 in the command output process (see S4102 in FIG. 60) of the main process (see FIG. 60) of the sound lamp control device 113, like the other display commands. Is output. Then, image data is created by the display control device 114 and displayed as a display mode of the timer 812 displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 during the V rush (see FIG. 13A).

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the fluctuation time counter is a value indicating the remaining period of 5 seconds (S5307). In the process of S5307, if the value of the fluctuation time counter 223r is determined to be a value indicating the remaining period of 5 seconds (S5307: Yes), a display command indicating that the remaining fluctuation time is small is set (S5308). The flow shifts to S5309. When the display command is set in the process of S5308, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114 in the command output process (S4102 in FIG. 60) of the main process (see FIG. 60) of the sound lamp control device 113, and is transmitted to the player. On the other hand, an effect mode (for example, an unlucky effect) for indicating that the remaining time of the special symbol change during execution is small is set. Thereby, the player can play the game while selecting whether or not to execute the special electric game for executing the V jackpot game.

  In the present embodiment, when the remaining period of the special symbol change being executed becomes 5 seconds (S5307: Yes), a display command indicating that the remaining change time is short is set. However, without being limited to this, for example, before executing the process of S5308, a lottery process for determining whether to set a display command indicating that the remaining fluctuation time is short is executed, and the lottery process is performed. The display command indicating that the remaining fluctuation time is short may be set only when it is determined that the result of (1) sets the display command. With this configuration, an effect mode (for example, unlucky effect) for indicating that the remaining time of the special symbol change during execution is short is not set (unlucky effect on the third symbol display device 81). Is not executed), it is difficult for the player to determine whether the remaining period of the special symbol change being executed is long or short.

  Further, in the processing of S5307, when it is determined that the value of the fluctuation time counter 223r indicates the remaining period of 5 seconds and is not a value (S5307: No), the fluctuation time of the next fluctuation is calculated from the winning information storage area 223b (the next fluctuation time). Is read (S5313), and the value obtained by adding 10 seconds to the number of seconds indicated by the value of the fluctuation time counter 223r (the number of remaining seconds of the special symbol fluctuation being executed) is the value obtained in the processing of S5313. It is determined whether it is longer (longer) than the number of seconds indicating the fluctuation time of the read next fluctuation (S5314).

  In the process of S5314, the value obtained by adding 10 seconds to the number of seconds indicated by the value of the variation time counter 223r (the number of remaining seconds of the special symbol variation being executed) indicates the variation time of the next variation read in the process of S5313. If it is determined that it is longer (longer) than the number of seconds (S5314: Yes), the current situation is advantageous to the player, that is, if the V jackpot game is executed, the V set after the end of the V jackpot game A display command indicating a lucky time for notifying the player that the rush period is likely to be long is set (S5315), and the flow shifts to the process of S5309. On the other hand, in the process of S5314, the value obtained by adding 10 seconds to the number of seconds indicated by the value of the variation time counter 223r (the number of remaining seconds of the special symbol variation being executed) is the variation time of the next variation read in the process of S5313. If it is determined that the time is not longer (shorter) than the number of seconds indicating (S5314: No), the process skips S5315 and shifts to the process of S5309.

  When the display command is set in the process of S5315, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114 in the command output process (S4102 in FIG. 60) of the main process (see FIG. 60) of the sound lamp control device 113, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 in FIG. The display mode of the lucky time effect shown in b) is set. With such a configuration, the player can grasp a period that is more advantageous to the player in the V rush period, so that the game during the V rush period can be prevented from becoming monotonous. In the present embodiment, the case where the remaining period of the special symbol variation being executed is longer than the variation time of the next special symbol variation by 10 seconds or more is set as the execution opportunity of the lucky time effect. Without limitation, it is only necessary to be able to notify the player of the period during which the remaining fluctuation time is longer when the special symbol fluctuation is interrupted by the lucky time effect, for example, regardless of the fluctuation time of the next special symbol fluctuation, The determination that the remaining period of the special symbol change is equal to or longer than a predetermined number of seconds (for example, 50 seconds) may be used as an opportunity to execute the lucky time effect.

  In the present embodiment, in the process of S5314, the value obtained by adding 10 seconds to the number of seconds indicated by the value of the variation time counter 223r (the number of remaining seconds of the special symbol variation being executed) is read out in the process of S5313. Although the processing of S5315 is always executed when the time is longer (longer) than the number of seconds indicating the fluctuation time of the next fluctuation, the invention is not limited to this. For example, before executing the processing of S5315, A lottery process is performed to determine whether to set a display command indicating that the remaining fluctuation time is long, and the remaining fluctuation time is long only when the result of the lottery process determines to set the display command. May be configured to set a display command that indicates that. With this configuration, the effect mode (for example, lucky time effect) for indicating that the remaining time of the special symbol change during execution is long is not set (the lucky time effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81). Is not executed), it is difficult for the player to determine whether the remaining period of the special symbol change being executed is long or short.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5305, when it is determined that the value of the updated time-saving period counter 223i is 0 (S5305: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the look-ahead counter 223h is greater than 0 (S5310). When it is determined that the value of the look-ahead counter 223h is larger than 0 (S5310: Yes), the special symbol change is not executed even though the end condition of the time saving state is not satisfied. A display command indicating continuation “???” is set (S5311), and the flow shifts to the step S5309. The display command set in the process of S5311 is the same as the other display commands in the command output process (see S4102 in FIG. 60) of the main process (see FIG. 60) of the sound lamp control device 113. 114. Then, image data is created by the display control device 114, and a display mode (see FIG. 19A) indicating that the time saving end condition is not updated during the V rush is displayed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5310, if it is determined that the value of the prefetch counter 223h is 0 (S5310: No), a display command indicating the end of the V rush is set (S5312), and the V rush flag 223q is set to off. Then, the flow shifts to the processing of S5309. In the processing of S5309, other effect update processing is executed (S5309), and this processing ends.

<Regarding the control processing of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly classified into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interruption processing that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and a one-frame processing performed by the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes a main process, and executes a command interrupt process or a V interrupt process in accordance with reception of a command or detection of a V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the detection of the V interrupt signal are performed simultaneously, the command reception processing is executed with priority. Thus, the V interrupt processing can be executed by quickly reflecting the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the main processing. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  The activation of the main processing is specifically performed according to the following flow. When the power is supplied from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” according to the hardware configuration. , An address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is “0000H”, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 starts the main processing by fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starting the execution of the processing corresponding to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a great deal of time is required from the reading to the setting to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” after designating the address “0000H”. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the first to be processed by the MPU 231 of the boot program after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d, so that the NOR ROM can operate at high speed. Since the memory is a memory from which data can be read, when the address “0000H” is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main process is executed as described above, first, a boot process executed by a boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 performs various controls on the third symbol display device 81. Start

  Here, the boot process (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the boot process (S6001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine but stored in the third symbol display device 81. The image data to be displayed is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing the data. Since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a small area and a large capacity, not only image data but also a control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure rate due to the increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is particularly low when random access is performed, the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even when a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be degraded. Therefore, in this boot processing, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by the DRAM. The processing of transferring and storing the data to the storage area 233b is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned hardware operation of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c is used. Of the control programs stored in the two program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101.

  Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6102, the MPU 231 executes various processing while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetches the instruction, but reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute a process for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S6102, the instruction pointer 231a is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program started to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs not yet transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S6103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. The data is transferred to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 73). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process to be performed (see S6002 in FIG. 73) (S6105), the execution of the boot program is completed, and the boot process is completed.

  By executing the boot process (S6001) in this manner, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM. The data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. And execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high readout speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect unit.

  On the other hand, without storing all the boot programs in the NOR ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR-type ROM 234d having a very small capacity. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time. Can be.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 74, the predetermined amount of the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although the configuration is not limited to this, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S6102. It may be a part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and furthermore, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is changed to the instruction pointer. 231a may be executed. Then, the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  The boot program transferred by the processing of S6101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the start of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a Processing for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently transfers the part to the program storage area 233a. The processing for setting the head address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S6101. After repeating the processing a plurality of times including the processing of S6102 and S6102, the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed.

  Thus, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. By using the boot program, the data can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released from the boot program is stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process is started, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 which can be performed after the boot process can be started more quickly.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is completed, an initial setting process is executed in accordance with the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and an initial value is set for each flag. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag, unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after performing the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, first, an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thus, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 can check whether or not an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the activation can be started normally.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). The transfer instruction includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, information of the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main power of the resident video RAM 235 by the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving the transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating the end of the transfer in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a partial area of the built-in memory. You may write it. The MPU 231 reads out the information in the register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects that the image controller 237 has written the transfer end information, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has been completed. You may do so.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a ends based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S6003, the power-on fluctuation image Is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to the image data is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S6004). The transfer instruction includes the start address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, the data size of the image data, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235). And the start address of the power-on variation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, and the image controller responds to this transfer instruction and transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The data is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transmission instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the processing of S6004, the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 85A) described later, all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to perform the transfer is executed (see S7502 in FIG. 85A).

  Also, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It is kept on until it ends. Thereby, in the meantime, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 75 (b)), a simple image at power-on (a main image at power-on and a fluctuation image at power-on) (not shown) is drawn. Command determination processing (see S6308 in FIG. 75B) and simple display setting processing (see S6309 in FIG. 75B) are executed.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, first, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third video RAM 235. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall operates at the time of turning on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display controller 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some sort of initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the time of power-on, so that the player is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying that the operation has not stopped.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 can be started without any problem by turning on the power. Can be immediately confirmed, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, since the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on, the power-on main image is displayed in the third symbol. When the player starts the game while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball entry (start winning prize) in the special figure entrance 64, and the start instruction of the variable effect is issued by the main controller 110 by the sound lamp control. If the change pattern command is received via the device 113, that is, if the display change pattern command is received, the power-on change image can be displayed immediately during the change effect period, and a simple change effect can be performed. Therefore, even when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can reliably confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple variable effect.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. Is constituted by a NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, and its transfer takes a long time, so that after power-on, the time during which the main image is displayed at power-on is also long. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Immediately after, for example, while the main image is displayed at the time of power-on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing in S6005, interruption permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main processing executes an infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interruption permission is set by the processing of S6006, the command interruption processing and the V interruption processing are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interruption signal.

  Next, a command interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interruption process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in a command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing are read out by a command determination processing or a simple command determination processing of a V interrupt processing described later, and processing according to the command is performed.

  Next, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of the V interrupt processing is started when a V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal generated every 20 milliseconds in the image controller 237 when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed, and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing or the display processing is not completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image during drawing of the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed according to a new drawing instruction.

  Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then, details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 75 (b), it is first determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. A command determination process (S6302) is executed to display the image on the display device 81, and then a display setting process (S6303) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S6302), the contents of the command from the audio ramp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interruption process are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the display data table for demonstration or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination processing, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the processing is executed. This is because the command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds during which the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined in the main controller 110, there is a high possibility that the display fluctuation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode of the variable effect and the type of stop selected by the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 are quickly grasped, and the effect image according to the mode is obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of the command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S6303), an image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) and the like. Specify the contents of In addition, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in accordance with a processing situation or the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is executed (S6304). In this task process, the image is formed based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S6303) or the simple display setting process (S6309). The type of sprite (display object) to be specified is specified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is sent from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, the image controller 237 also receives a continuous notice command or a rear image change command from the audio lamp control device 113. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the rear face image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S6306). In this drawing processing, the type of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S6304), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting processing (S6305) are used. 38 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thus, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list (S6306). The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, an update process of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by the process of S6307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt processing is executed. Then, in the command determination processing, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type (big hit A, big hit B, reach out of front / rear, reach other than front / rear out, reach out) is indicated by the display stop type command. The corresponding stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), it means that transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S6308) is executed, then the simple display setting process (S6309) is executed, and the flow shifts to the process of S6304.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 76 to 81, details of the above-described command determination process (S6302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 76, first, it is determined whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401). If there is no unprocessed new command (S6401: No), The command determination processing ends, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), a new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S6303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S6402). The type of each unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S6403).

  Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404). If there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: Yes), a variation pattern command process is executed (S6405), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the variation pattern command processing (S6405) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 77A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing (S6405). The fluctuation pattern command processing (S6405) executes processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6501).

  Here, since the determination of the start of the fluctuation in the main controller 110 is always made at least several seconds apart, no more than two display fluctuation pattern commands are received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area. However, part of the command changes due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command is incorrectly displayed. It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of step S6501, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is prepared for such a case. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a fluctuation effect having a fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, and there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, in practice, the fluctuation display data table longer than the set display data table is set. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as described later, after the fluctuation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is finished, the main control device 110 Until the pattern command is received, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed. You can keep watching the fluctuations of the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer is set. 233f is initialized to 0 (S6504). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S6505), the variation pattern command ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing the fluctuation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S6505, the display data table buffer 233d set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501 is updated. , The drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 is specified. At the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the processing of S6502. The transfer data information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the variable ROM display data table, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 from the normal video R. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  In the display setting process, the time of the fluctuation effect specified in the fluctuation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S6503, and when the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S6404, when it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among unprocessed commands (S6406). If there is a display stop type command (S6406: Yes), stop type command processing is performed (S6407), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S6407) will be described with reference to FIG. 77 (b). FIG. 77 (b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. The stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the stop type command process (S6407), first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (any of jackpots A to G, small hits A to C, out of reach, or completely out of reach) indicated by the stop type command for display. (S6601), and compares the stop type table with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 75 (b)) is executed. The stop symbol after the fluctuation effect displayed on 81 is finally set (S6602).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is set. It is set to ON (S6603), and returns to the command determination process.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variation based on the data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the processing of S6602. In the above-described task processing (S6304), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S6602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set in S6603, and the specified stop is determined. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information obtained by the display setting process to the symbol. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  In addition, since the main control device 110 always determines the start of the change at a distance of several seconds or more, the main control device 110 does not receive two or more display stop type commands within 20 milliseconds. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands change due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command is erroneously stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S6601, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, the stop type is assumed to be completely out of order and the stop type is determined. Determine the table. Thereby, a stop symbol corresponding to complete departure is set by the processing of S6602.

  If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 displays the "special symbol" even if it is actually "missing the special symbol". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" is displayed, and the player misunderstands that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol big hit", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete departure as in the present embodiment, in fact, if the “special symbol jackpot” is reached, the stop of the complete departure is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Even if a symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "special symbol jackpot", so that the player can be pleased.

  Referring back to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among unprocessed commands (S6408). If there is an opening command for use (S6408: Yes), an opening command process is executed (S6409), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the opening command processing (S6409) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 78A is a flowchart showing the opening command processing. The opening command process executes a process corresponding to the opening command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the opening command processing, first, an opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). After that, a transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (S6703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6704). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S6705), the opening command ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Referring back to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6408, if it is determined that there is no opening command for display (S6408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S6410). If there is a round number command for use (S6410: Yes), round number command processing is executed (S6411), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the round number command processing (S6411) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 78B is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. The round number command process executes a process corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the number of rounds indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6802).

  Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6801, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6804). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are both set to off (S6805), the round number command process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. In the process of S6410, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S6410: No), then it is determined whether an unprocessed command includes a display ending command (S6412), and the display is performed. If there is an ending command for use (S6412: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S6413), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the ending command processing (S6413) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the ending command processing. The ending command process executes a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the ending command process, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6901). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6902).

  Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6901, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6903). S6904). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are both set to off (S6905), the ending command process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Referring back to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S6412 that there is no ending command for display (S6412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a fluctuation stop command for display among unprocessed commands (S6414), and the display is performed. If there is a variation stop command for use (S6414: Yes), a variation stop command process is executed (S6415), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the fluctuation stop command processing (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 80A is a flowchart showing the fluctuation stop command processing. This fluctuation stop command process executes a process corresponding to the display fluctuation stop command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  The display variation stop command is the end timing of the display variation pattern command set in the variation display setting process (see S4112 in FIG. 73) of the audio lamp control device 113, that is, the special symbol of the special symbol in the main control device 110. At the end timing of the fluctuation pattern (variation time) set in the process of setting the fluctuation pattern (timing at which the main control device 110 sets the stop command), the display stop command (output from the sound lamp control device 113) 7 shows the normal stop command) and various display commands set in the fluctuating stop process (see S4217 in FIG. 70) of the audio lamp control device 113.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to execute the lottery (fluctuation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (fluctuation) of the second special symbol independently (in parallel). When one special symbol is stopped (confirmed) and displayed with a symbol indicating a specific lottery result (for example, a jackpot), the other special symbol being changed is changed to the end of a predetermined variation pattern (variation time). Regardless of the presence or absence, the stop display is forcibly performed with a symbol indicating the detachment.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command set when forcibly stopping the change of the special symbol from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 executes the change stop process (see S4217 in FIG. 70). A display command (variable display) for variably displaying the display mode of the third symbol or the fourth symbol corresponding to the special symbol change (variable display so as to correspond to the display mode of the special symbol forcibly stopped and displayed). Stop command).

  In the present embodiment, even if the above-described normal stop command has already been received, if the third symbol or the fourth symbol is not stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, The stop display based on the forced stop command received later is configured to be executed. That is, the forced stop command is processed prior to the normal stop command. Thus, the third symbol and the fourth symbol can be reliably displayed in a display mode corresponding to the control content of the main control device 110.

  In addition, the display fluctuation stop command also includes a display command indicating a temporary stop set in the fluctuation stop processing (see S4217 in FIG. 70) of the sound lamp control device 113, and the display command indicating the temporary stop. When (temporary stop command for display) is received, the data table in which the display data in which the pattern to be stopped and displayed slightly fluctuates is determined as the fluctuation stop display data is configured.

  In the fluctuation stop command processing, first, the fluctuation stop data table indicated by the display fluctuation stop command is determined, the determined fluctuation stop data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and is set in the display data table buffer 233d ( S6931). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6932).

  Next, based on the fluctuation stop data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6931, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6933), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6933). S6934). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to off (S6935), the fluctuation stop command processing ends, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  Referring back to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. In the process of S6412, if it is determined that there is no fluctuation stop command (S6414: No), then, it is determined whether there is a display notification command among the unprocessed commands (S6416), and the display notification is performed. If there is a command (S6416: Yes), display notification command processing is executed (S6417), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the additional effect command processing (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 80B is a flowchart showing the notification command processing. This notification command process executes a process corresponding to the (display) notification command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  This notification command is output to the display control device 114 among various notification commands set when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command for indicating various abnormal states set by the main control device 110. This is a process executed when the display control device 114 receives the display notification command.

  In the notification command processing, first, a display (notification) data table corresponding to the notification mode indicated by the notification command is determined, and the determined display (notification) data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table buffer is read. 233d (S6951). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6952).

  Next, based on the display (notification) data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6951, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6953), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6954). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to off (S6955), the notification command processing ends, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  In the present embodiment, the display control device 114 determines only the display command indicating that the notification target is the third symbol display device 81 (display device) among the various notification commands set by the sound lamp control device 113. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other related commands such as a light emitting command other than a display command, a voice output command, and a command for driving an accessory are temporarily received, and the processing of the display control device 114 is performed. A configuration may be such that the related command is output to the corresponding control device in a state in which information for indicating the data content (display mode) set in step (1) is added.

  Referring back to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. In the process of S6416, when it is determined that there is no display notification command (S6416: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6418). If there is a change command (S6418: Yes), a back image change command process is executed (S6419), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the back image change command processing (S6419) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing. The rear image change command process executes a process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the rear image change command processing, first, the rear image change flag 233w that notifies the normal image transfer setting processing (S7503) of the change of the rear image due to the reception of the rear image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S7001). ). Then, among the bits of the rear image discrimination flag 233x provided for each of the rear image types (back A and B), the bit corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image change command is set to ON, and other bits are set. The bit corresponding to the rear image type is set to off (S7002), the rear image change command processing ends, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag 233w set in the process of S7001 is turned on, the rear image type after change is determined from the rear image determination flag 233x set in the process of S7002. Identify.

  Also, in the task processing, if it is specified to display either the back A or B according to the back type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag 233x set in S7002 is used. The type of the back image to be displayed at that time is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified in accordance with the passage of time, and the type of the RAM storing the image data corresponding to the range of the back image ( Resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for less than 20 milliseconds, the player does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds. In this case, there should be no case where two or more rear image change commands are stored in the command buffer area. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S7002, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image determination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, one arbitrary back image change command may be extracted, and the back image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set the change according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S6418, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S6418: No), then, it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6420). If it is (S6420: Yes), an error command process is executed (S6421), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the error command processing (S6421) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81B is a flowchart showing the error command processing. This error command process executes a process corresponding to the error command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S7101). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S7102). The process ends, and returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set in the process of S7101, the type of error generated from the error determination flag set in the process of S7102 is determined, and the corresponding error type is determined. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S7102, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by each error command are set to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a person related to the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence state of the error.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S6416, when it is determined that there is no error command (S6420: No), a process corresponding to another unprocessed command is executed (S6422), and the process returns to S6401.

  In the processing of S6401 executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes) ), And execute the processing of S6402 to S6422 again. Until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, the processing of S6401 to S6422 is repeatedly executed. If it is determined in the processing of S6401 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this command determination is performed. The process ends.

  The simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75B) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary for displaying the image at power-on, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. Extraction and execution of the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 77 (a)) and the stop type command processing (see FIG. 77 (b)), which are the processing corresponding to each command, are performed. A process for discarding the command without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 77A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on variation image is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S6501. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image which are set and necessary in this case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S6502, a process of writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents is performed.

  Next, details of the above-described display setting process (S6303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 82, first, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7201), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, off (S7201: No) ), It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the previously executed command determination process, and the process of S7202 to S7204 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S7205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S7201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination process, the new command flag is set to off (S7202), and then S7203 to S7204. The processing corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S7203, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S7203). If the error occurrence flag is on (S7203: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S7204).

  Here, the warning image setting process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, referring to the error determination flag, all error determinations for which ON is set are performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S7301).

  In the task processing (S6304), based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified, and the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, And various parameters required for drawing.

  Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S7301, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S7302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S7204) or in the process of S7203, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S7203: No), the process proceeds to S7205.

  In S7205, a pointer update process is performed (S7205). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the pointer update processing. This pointer update process acquires the corresponding drawing content or the transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is processing for updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address to be set.

  In this pointer update processing, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7401). That is, the pointer 233f is updated in principle such that it is incremented by one each time the V interrupt processing is executed. As described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described at the address “0000H”, and the entity of each data is defined after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the value stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer updating process. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the process of S7401, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information or not. Is determined (S7402). As a result, if it is End information (S7402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S7403). If the display data table is a demonstration display data table (S7403: Yes), the display data table is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S7404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S7405), and the process ends. Then, the process returns to the display setting process. Thus, in the display setting process, the drawing content can be developed in order from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7403 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S7403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( In step S7406, the process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process. Accordingly, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the address immediately before the End information is described. Is always developed, so that the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7402, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S7402: No), the process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the pointer update processing, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update processing is acquired from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7206). In the task process (S6304), the type of the sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content expanded in the process of S7206 together with the previously expanded warning image and the like. , Various parameters required for drawing, such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle.

  Next, the value of the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S7207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7208). If the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S7208: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S7208: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the confirmed display flag is on. (S7209).

  As a result, if the finalized display flag is off (S7209: No), the finalized display effect has not yet been performed, and it is time to perform the finalized display effect. First, the finalized display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The setting is made (S7210), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7211). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time in the confirmed display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7213). Then, after setting the final display flag indicating that the final display effect is being performed in the ON state (S7214), the contents of the stop symbol determination flag are directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7215), and returns to the V interrupt processing.

  Thus, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Further, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the confirmed display data table, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect. Compared with the case where the display contents are changed by activating another program as in the related art, the program is not complicated and bloated, so that no great load is applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, a variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The previously stopped symbol discrimination flag set by the process of S7215 is used for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variable effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before. In the variable display data table, the change based on the data table is not changed. Until a predetermined time elapses from the start, symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before is described. In the task process (S6304), a stop symbol of the immediately preceding variation effect is specified from the last stop symbol determination flag set in S7215 until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, and A third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stopped symbol. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop symbol in the preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S7209, if the confirmed display flag is on (S7209: Yes), it is determined whether the demonstration display flag is on (S7216). If the demonstration display flag is off (S7216: No), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the fixed display effect, and a certain time has elapsed since the end of the fixed display effect. Thereafter, processing for displaying the demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

  First, the demo display data table is obtained and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7217), and the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7218). Then, time data corresponding to the effect time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7222), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S7221), and the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  Thereby, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. , The content of the drawing can be set.

  In the process of S7216, if the demonstration display flag is ON (S7216: Yes), the demonstration effect is performed after the finalized display effect ends, and this means that the demonstration effect has ended, so the display setting process ends as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt processing. In this case, as described above, various settings are performed by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process so that the demonstration effect is started again. Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the same processing as the display setting processing is also performed in the simple display setting processing (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 75B). However, in the simple display setting process, after the production time of the fluctuation effect by the power-on fluctuation image ends, a predetermined time, one of the power-on fluctuation images according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command. A process of setting a display data table defining that the image is stopped and displayed in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86, details of the above-described transfer setting processing (S6305), which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 85A is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501: Yes), since all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the resident image transfer setting is performed. The processing is executed (S7502), the transfer setting processing ends, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing. As a result, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The resident image transfer setting process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S7501, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S7501: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is read from the character ROM 234 from the resident video. The data has been transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7503), the transfer setting process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thus, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S7502), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 85B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S7502).

  In the resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer untransferred image data (S7601), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S7601: Yes) ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S7602). In the process of S7602, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, when receiving a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S7602 (S7602: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S7602: Yes), the process moves to S7603. Also, as a result of the process of S7601, if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S7601: No), the process proceeds to S7603.

  In the process of S7603, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S7603). If there is an untransferred resident target image data (S7603: No), A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so that the resident target image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7604), and the process ends.

  As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing processing includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer data described in the drawing list. The resident object image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the data information. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, the information of the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (the transfer is performed here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the read image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores the image data in the unused period of the resident video RAM 235. At the specified address of the resident video RAM 235. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  As a result of the processing in S7603, if all the resident target image data has been transferred (S7603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S7605), and this processing ends. Thus, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 75 (b)), the command is not the simple command determination processing (see S6308 in FIG. 75 (b)) and the simple display setting processing (see S6309 in FIG. 75 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 76 to 81) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 82 to 84) are executed, the drawing of the image in the normal state is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 86) (see S7501: No in FIG. 85A).

  By executing the resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 performs all the resident operations to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be retained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 during power-on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. Can perform image drawing processing. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed when drawing an image. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. After the display is determined by, for example, the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed at an arbitrary timing by the player can be performed. In addition, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, a normal image transfer setting process (S7503), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S7503).

  In the normal image transfer setting processing, first, the pointer 233f updated from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the pointer update processing (S7205) of the previously executed display setting processing (S6303). The information described at the indicated address is obtained (S7701). Then, it is determined whether or not the obtained information is transfer data information (S7702). If the obtained information is transfer data information (S7702: Yes), the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data is determined from the transfer data information. (The storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( (S7703) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S7704), and the flow shifts to the processing of S7705.

  If the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S7702: No), the process of S7703 and S7704 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S7705. In the process of S7705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set to the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer has been completed (S7705), and the transfer instruction is set. If the transfer has been completed (S7705: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S7706).

  In the process of S7706, after setting a transfer instruction of the image data to the image controller 237 and receiving a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S7706 (S7706: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S7706: Yes), the process proceeds to S7707. Also, as a result of the processing in S7705, if the image data transfer instruction has not been set to the image controller 237 after the previous transfer processing is completed (S7705: No), the processing shifts to S7707.

  In the process of S7707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7707). If the transfer start flag is on (S7707: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is set. Is turned off (S7708), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S7703 is set as the transfer target image data, and then the flow proceeds to the processing of S7713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S7707: No), then it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag 233w is on (S7709). If the rear image change flag 233w is not on but off (S7709: No), there is no image data to be transferred, and the normal image transfer setting process ends as it is.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag 233w is on (S7709: Yes), it means that the back image is changed, so the back image change flag 233w is set to off (S7710) and provided for each back image type. Among the rear image determination flags 233x, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image determination flag 233x in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S7711). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag 233x in the ON state, and the transfer destination ( The head address of the normal video RAM 236) is obtained (S7712), and the flow shifts to the process of S7713.

  In the process of S7713, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713). The determination in the process of S7713 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite set as the transfer target image data is read out from the storage image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage state is “ON”, the image data of the transfer target sprite is the normal video data. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is “off”, it is determined that the image data of the transfer target sprite is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing in S7713 (S7713: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S7713, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S7714). As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing processing includes the transfer data information of the transfer target image data, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the transfer target image is stored, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, the transfer The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the designated video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the processing in S7714, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S7715), and the normal transfer setting processing ends. As described above, the storage image data determination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “ON”, and by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite in the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is performed by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer processing, the processing corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination processing, and as a result, the display stop type command When the indicated stop type information is determined to be the jackpot stop type, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. If the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination process, the back image of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in the back image is used. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is set to the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting processing, and sends the image data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be.

  Here, by the time the drawing of a predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the predetermined data is specified in accordance with the display data table. When rendering a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for rendering the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thus, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 87, details of the above-described drawing process (S6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing processing, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S6304) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information A drawing list (FIG. 38) is generated from the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305) (S7801). That is, in the process of S7801, the type of the storage RAM and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of the various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304). Then, the parameters necessary for the sprite determined in the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of the sprite to be arranged from the rearmost side to the front side in the image of one frame, and the sprites after the rearrangement are arranged in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the type and address of a storage RAM in which image data of the sprite is stored as detailed drawing information (detailed information) and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the leading address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

  As described above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored, or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S7802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information indicating that the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b is expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing to develop an image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and expands the images by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the frontmost side.

  If transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the last address (storage source last address) of the character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored are determined from the transfer data information. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) is extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source end address is sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information, and stores the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the drawing process and the display process are simultaneously performed in parallel. be able to.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S7802, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S7803). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to “1” when the value is “0” and by setting it to “0” when it is “1”. Done. Thus, the drawing buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed every time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 75B) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are performed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the minute is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately designating, one frame of image display processing can be performed continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while one frame of image rendering processing is performed.

<Second embodiment>
Next, a second embodiment of the present pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. In the second embodiment, a part of the configuration of the game board 13, a part of the configuration of the main control device 110, and a part of the configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 are different from the first embodiment. are doing.

  In the above-described first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, a special power operation port 643 and an out port 644 are provided as ball entrances into which a ball that has won the general winning award device 640 can enter. I was Then, when the ball wins in the special power operating port 643, the game per accessory is executed. However, in the above-described first embodiment, there is only one operating port for executing the game per accessory, and it is not possible to give a variation to the game per accessory, so that the game is monotonous. In addition to getting tired of the game at an early stage, since the game per bonus is executed with the same operation pattern every time, the bonus game is executed at a timing that allows the ball to easily win the V winning opening 165 (Tokuden) There is a problem that a game is easily executed (a ball is won in the operating port 643).

  On the other hand, in the second embodiment, a second special power activating port 1643 is newly provided in the general power prize winning device 640, and a ball winning the general power prize winning device 640 is provided by the special power operating port 643 and the second special power operating port. 1643 or the out opening 644.

  Furthermore, it is configured so that the game per hit with an open pattern different when the ball has won the special power operating port 643 and when the ball has won the second special power operating port 1643 is executed. The game per bonus executed when a ball wins in the second special power operation port 1643 is more effective than the game per bonus executed when the ball wins, and the ball wins during the game per bonus. 165 (see FIG. 6).

  With such a configuration, the player can be more interested in the flow-down state of the ball that has won the prize winning device 640 during the per-game game. In addition, when the ball wins in the special power operating port 643 and when the ball wins in the second special power operating port 1643, a game with a different action pattern is executed, so that the ball wins in the V winning port 165. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to execute the accessory game with easy timing (to make the special power operation port 643 win a ball).

  Further, in the second embodiment, the various fluctuations performed in the first embodiment described above are compared with the remaining fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol being executed in the case where the game per bonus is executed during the time saving state. A first game method suggestion effect that is executed based on the remaining time of a special symbol change (special figure change) that is interrupted when a game per role is executed during a time-saving state. 2 is different from the game method suggestion effect in that it is configured to be newly executable.

  In the first embodiment described above, as described above with reference to FIGS. 12 to 19, as an effect for indicating the game content of the game (special electric game) during the time reduction state, the remaining duration of the time reduction state, The effect for notifying the lottery result, the execution status of the game per ordinary figure, the execution status of the game per accessory, is configured to be displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. It was an easy-to-understand notification to the player.

  However, in the effect contents executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above, it is possible to inform the player of the game situation during the time-saving state (during the V rush), but it is possible to inform the player of the situation. , It was not possible for the player to select a game method in order to allow the player to execute a better game. In other words, if the per-character game that interrupts the subtraction of the remaining change time of the special symbol change, which is the remaining period of the V rush (the period until the special symbol change that satisfies the time saving end condition is completed), is executed, However, by causing the V winning device 65 to win a plurality of balls, it is better to end the game per role as soon as possible with the aim of winning the ball to the V winning opening 165. It was not possible to give (notify) to the player whether it was better to give up the ball and continue the game per role as long as possible.

  On the other hand, in the second embodiment, since the first game method suggestion effect and the second game method suggestion effect described above are configured to be executable, various suggestions executed for the player are provided. It is possible to select a game method of a game per role based on the effect contents of the effect. Therefore, the game during the V rush is executed by the game method arbitrarily selected by the player, and the advantage during the V rush can be varied according to the selection result of the game method. On the other hand, the player can be interested. Further, since the degree of advantage during the V rush can be varied according to the result of the selection by the player, the player can actively participate in the game, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  First, the configuration of the general winning award device 640 used in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 88 is a schematic view schematically showing the configuration of the general winning award device 640 in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment. FIG. 89 is a schematic diagram of the general winning award in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed the state which the ball which won the apparatus 640 can flow down to the 2nd special electric power operation port 1643. The configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment is different from the above-described pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that the configuration in the general winning award device 640 is different. Are identical. The same components are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 88, the universal winning award device 640 of the second embodiment is different from the universal winning award device 640 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 3) in the lower end side of the second partition 640k2 (see FIG. 88). A notch is provided below the position divided by the movable valve 642), and a second partition 640k2 is formed in order to form a fourth flow path 641d into which a ball can flow through an opening formed by the notch. The fourth embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that a fourth partition 640k4 connected to the lower end of the second partition is provided.

  The second flow path 641b and the fourth flow path 641b are used to cause the second flow path 641b to flow down to the special power operation port 643 without causing the sphere flowing down the first flow path 641a to flow into the fourth flow path 641d. The normal position (see FIG. 88) for blocking the path 641d and the flow path in which the sphere flowing down the first flow path 641a flows down the second flow path 641b and enters the special power operation port 643 are closed. The difference is that a third movable valve 1643 that can be changed is provided at an operating position (see FIG. 89) for guiding to the flow path 641d.

  Although described in detail later, the third movable valve 1643 is configured to be variably operated by driving a third movable valve solenoid 209f connected to the input / output port 205 of the main controller 110. When the operation control of the per-figure game by the control device 110 is started, the normal operation and the operation position are variably operated in a predetermined variable pattern. The third movable valve 1643 is located at the operating position when the third movable valve solenoid 209 is set to ON (when energized), and when the third movable valve solenoid 209d is set to OFF (when not energized). ) Is configured to be located at the normal position. Therefore, in the state where the game per day drawing is not executed, it is located at the normal position. In the second embodiment, when the ball is won in the special power operation port 643 and when the ball is won in the second special power operation port 1643, the game content (operation) The pattern is made different so that the ball is more easily awarded to the V winning opening 165 during the game per accessory than when the ball is awarded to the second special power operating port 1643. Therefore, when the third movable valve solenoid 209d is set to the off position, the third movable valve 1642 is positioned at the normal position where the ball cannot enter the second special power operation port 1643 to thereby illegally move the ball. It is possible to suppress the act of winning the second special power operation port 1643.

  Further, the movable range of the third movable valve 1643 is located in the second state (the state where the sphere flowing down the first flow path 641a is guided to the third flow path 641c (see FIG. 88)). It is designed to be in a range that does not come into contact with the movable valve 642. With this configuration, the third movable valve 1642 can be moved without considering the movable state of the second movable valve 642.

  When the second movable valve 642 is located in the first state and the third movable valve 1642 is located in the operating position, as shown in FIG. 89, the ball that has won the general winning award device 640 becomes the third movable valve. It is received on the upper surface of the valve 1642 and guided to the second special power operation port 1643. As will be described in detail later, the third movable valve 1642 is variably operated in a predetermined variable pattern when the game per game is started, and the operation position (see FIG. 89) is changed. A variable operation of maintaining 0.2 seconds and maintaining the normal position (see FIG. 88) for 1.5 seconds is repeatedly executed. In other words, about 85% of the balls passing through the second movable valve 642 located in the first state win the prize in the special power operation port 643, and about 15% prize in the second special power operation port 1643. are doing. Therefore, during the regular game per game, the special power operation port 643 is an operation port in which a ball is more likely to win than the second special power operation port 1643.

  Further, when the ball wins in the second special power operating port 1643, the ball can easily win in the V winning opening 165 in the executed per-proxy game, when the ball wins in the special power operating port 643 than when the ball wins. It is configured as follows. Therefore, in the second embodiment, unlike the above-described first embodiment, in the special electric game aiming at the V jackpot game triggered by the ordinary symbol lottery, the game result during the regular game per game (the ball is in any operating port) The victory of the ball in the V winning opening 165 during the game per role is different depending on whether the player wins the game or not. It will be closely watched, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, in the per-figure game executed during the time saving state, whether the operation port where the ball wins is the special power operation port 643 or the second special power operation port 1643 is determined by the third movable state. Since it is determined by the variable operation of the valve 1642, the operating port where the ball is easy to win does not change due to the game per game executed, and it is expected that the ball always wins to the second special power operating port 1643. While it is possible for the player to enthusiastically execute the game per ordinary drawing, the present invention is not limited to this. About 85% of the balls that have passed through the second movable valve 642 located in the state enter the special power operating port 643, and about 15% win the second special power operating port 1643. Be communicated It is now possible to set a per-figure per-figure type and a per-figure per-figure per-type in which a per-figure per-figure game in which the ratio of a ball winning to the second special power operation port 1643 is higher than the normal per-figure per-game is performed. You may comprise.

  By configuring in this way, for a player who aims for a V jackpot game by a special electric game, a lottery result of a normal symbol (set per type of general figure), a game per general figure, and a game per role item, The player can be watched closely, and the special electric game can be more eagerly played.

<Production contents performed in the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 90 and 91, characteristic contents of various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 90 (a) shows a state in which the remaining time period of the regular game long hit game is predetermined in the state in which the regular game long hit game and the special character hit game are executed in an overlapping manner during the time saving state (V rush). FIG. 90B is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of display content displayed when the time is less than a period (less than 15 seconds), and FIG. 90B illustrates a general figure long hitting game and a role in a time-saving state (V rush). A schematic diagram showing an example of display contents displayed when the remaining time of a general long game is longer than a predetermined period (15 seconds or more) in a state in which a game with a hit is repeatedly executed. It is. Note that the same display modes as the display modes displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 described in the above-described first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted. I do.

  In this embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment described above, the time-saving state is configured to continue until the special symbol change that satisfies the condition for ending the time-saving state is completed. When the game per bonus is executed (middle), the special symbol change being executed is interrupted (the process of subtracting the change time of the special symbol change is interrupted). In other words, during the execution of the per-principal game, there is a period in which the remaining period of the time reduction state is not subtracted. Therefore, the game can be performed without worrying about the remaining period of the time saving state from the time when the game per accessory is executed to the time when the ball is awarded in the V winning opening 165 (V winning).

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in order to execute many jackpot games (V jackpot games) during the time reduction state (during the V rush), a long variation time is required as a special symbol variation executed during the time reduction state. By setting, the method of lengthening the period of the time reduction state (the period until the time reduction end condition is satisfied) and the method of executing the game per character are shortened so that the remaining period of the time reduction state is reduced as much as possible. There are ways to interrupt. The former method is based on the result of the special symbol lottery and is set regardless of the skill of the player. Therefore, when a short fluctuation time is set as the special symbol fluctuation executed during the time saving state, the game of the player is performed. There was a risk that the willingness would decrease.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the length of the period in which the remaining period of the time saving state is subtracted can be changed depending on the skill of the player, It is possible to play the game eagerly.

  Here, a description will be given of a method of shortening the interval at which the per-accompaniment game is executed so that the subtraction of the remaining period of the time saving state is interrupted as much as possible. The game in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment during the time reduction state is the same as that of the first embodiment described above. First, the lottery of the ordinary symbols is executed, and the game per the ordinary figure is executed based on the winning per the ordinary figure. . Then, during the per-game per game, the ball is made to win in the special power operation port 643 and the second special power operation port 1643 in the general power prize winning device 640, and the per game is executed, and the V prize device is executed during the per game. A game (special electric game) in which a ball is won (V win) in the V winning opening 165 in 65 and a jackpot game (V jackpot game) is aimed at.

  Then, the lottery of the ordinary symbol, which is a trigger for starting the special electric game, is configured such that the lottery of the ordinary symbol has already been executed or that the lottery of the ordinary symbol is not newly executed during the per-game game. In other words, it is configured such that the per-accessory game and the normal symbol lottery can be executed in an overlapping manner. Further, a plurality of termination conditions are set in the per game play, and when a predetermined number (three) of balls are won in the V winning device 65 during the per game play, or for a predetermined period (per play The configuration is such that the per-accessory game is terminated by the elapse of a period in which the operation scenario of the game is updated up to the end timing of the per-accessory game.

  Therefore, by increasing the lottery period (fluctuation period) of the ordinary symbols, that is, the execution period of the per-actor game that is executed in an overlapped manner with the period in which the per-fix game is not executed, the per-fix game is executed. It is possible to shorten the execution period of the special symbol change in the period in which no special symbol is changed. This makes it possible to prevent the execution interval of the per-accompaniment game from being lengthened by performing the special symbol change during the normal symbol lottery period (during the change period).

  Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of opening operation patterns are configured to be executable as a per-figure game, and an open state in which a ball can be awarded to the per-prize winning device 640 during the per-figure game (an electric accessory) (The state in which 640a is opened) is configured to be able to execute the advantageous per-figure per game in which the open state is set shorter than the advantageous per-figure per game. I have. Furthermore, in the disadvantageous game per game, after an open state in which a ball can be made to enter the universal winning device 640 is set, a closed state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the universal winning device 640 is set for a long time ( (15 seconds).

  Even in the long-term closed state in this disadvantageous per-game, it is substantially impossible to execute a new per-game as in the above-described period of fluctuation of the ordinary symbol. In the case where the game and the disadvantageous per-game are executed in an overlapping manner, by executing the per-accessory-period game for a longer period, the special symbol change is performed during a period in which a new per-accessory game is not executed. The period can be shortened. This makes it possible to prevent the execution interval of the game per accessory from being lengthened by executing the special symbol change during the closed period during the game per ordinary figure.

  As described above, during the V rush, a disadvantageous period in which a new per-accompaniment game is not executed (it is difficult to perform) is determined, and the disadvantageous period and the special figure fluctuation are determined. If the game period per role where the subtraction is interrupted overlaps, the execution period of the special symbol change during the disadvantageous period can be shortened by lengthening the execution period of the game per role currently being executed. In the present embodiment, when the disadvantageous period overlaps with the per-accessory game, the player can be notified of that fact.

  In other words, by the effect contents displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, the player can visually recognize the game status of the per-figure per game during the per-bonus game. And it is comprised so that the production | presentation aspect may be changed according to the game situation of the per-figure per game in the per-proxy play. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 90 (a), while the per-accompaniment-per-game is being executed (the special-figure change is interrupted), the long-time (15-second) If the closed period is in progress, the display area HR10 indicates “10 seconds until the end of the per-figure figure” as information indicating the remaining period until the end of the disadvantageous game per game (remaining period until the close period ends). Is displayed. In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment of "continue STOP with no winning per item" is displayed as a notification mode for notifying the player of the advantage of extending the playing period of the game per item. Other display elements are the same as those in FIG. 13B of the above-described first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In this way, by allowing the player to grasp the display mode of the display area HR10 and the display mode of the sub-display area Ds, the player can move the ball to the V winning device 65 for the per-principal game being executed. A game aiming for a V prize by making a prize, that is, a condition for ending a game per role based on a ball prize is likely to be satisfied, and a game period per role is easily shortened. The first game that can be aimed at is executed or the execution of the jackpot game (V jackpot game) based on the V prize is abandoned, and the condition for terminating the game per accessory based on the lapse of time is established to extend the game period per item. It is possible to select whether to execute two games (games in which a ball is not fired).

  Also, as shown in FIG. 90 (b), even in the case where the game per accessory and the long-term fluctuation of the ordinary symbol overlap, the player is provided with a game method ( Information for selecting the first game and the second game) is displayed. Specifically, when the per-accompaniment game is being executed (the special figure change is suspended), and the remaining period of the ordinary symbol change being executed is equal to or longer than a predetermined period (15 seconds), In the display area HR11, a comment of "15 seconds until the end of the ordinary symbol change" is displayed as information indicating the remaining period of the ordinary symbol change. In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment of "continue STOP with no winning per item" is displayed as a notification mode for notifying the player of the advantage of extending the playing period of the game per item. Other display elements are the same as those in FIG. 13B of the above-described first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  With this configuration, it is possible to vary the length of the period in which the special symbol change is interrupted depending on the skill (the content of the game to be executed) of the player. (During the state) can be actively executed. In addition, regardless of which game is selected by the player, a game result that can be advantageous to the player at different points can be generated. The game results can be greatly different, and the game method can be more positively selected.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as the operation pattern of the per-figure-period game executed during the time-saving state, at least the advantageous per-figure per-game and the disadvantageous per-figure per game are configured to be executable, and are executed during the time-saving state. The fluctuation time of the normal symbol can be set to a long time fluctuation or a short time fluctuation. Then, in the case where the game per role is executed during the game per advantageous figure, and in the case where the game per role is executed during a short-time fluctuation of the ordinary symbol, the ball is won during the game per role. The configuration is such that a player who wins a game (first game) that wins the device 65 is more advantageous.

  As described above, the timing (the presence or absence of a disadvantageous period) that is a disadvantageous period (a period during which a new per-accessory game cannot be executed) during the time reduction state (during the V rush) is made variable in accordance with the result of the normal symbol lottery. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game during the time reduction game (during the V rush) from becoming monotonous.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as a per-accessory game, a ball pertaining to the V-prize device 65 is more likely to win a prize (V-prize) into the V-prize port 165 than the ball per V-prize device 165. The game per disadvantageous disadvantage is configured to be executable, and when the game per advantage is executed, it is possible to make the ball V-prize at a rate of approximately 100% of the game per the privilege. It is possible that the probability of winning a V-prize is about 1/11 when the game per disadvantageous object is executed.

  Therefore, in the case where the per-bonus game executed overlapping with the above-mentioned disadvantageous period is the per-advantage bonus game, the effects shown in FIGS. 90 (a) and (b) are not executed. ing. With such a configuration, a game (second game) that does not aim at the execution of the V jackpot game is executed despite the situation in which the player can easily acquire the V jackpot game. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from executing an excessively disadvantageous game.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 91 (a) and 91 (b), a description will be given of an effect performed based on the length of the remaining period (remaining variation time) of the special symbol variation interrupted in the per-bonus game. I do. FIG. 91A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display content on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 when the remaining period of the suspended special symbol change is shorter than a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds). FIG. 91 (b) schematically shows the display contents of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 when the suspended special symbol fluctuation remaining period is longer than a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds). FIG.

  In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, when the jackpot game (V jackpot game) is executed during the time saving state (during the V rush), the time saving state set after the end of the jackpot game Is configured such that the period obtained by adding the remaining period of the special symbol fluctuation during suspension to the number of time savings (for example, four time savings) set in accordance with the jackpot type of the jackpot game to be executed is set as the period of are doing. That is, after the end of the special symbol change restarted after the end of the jackpot game (special symbol change interrupted at the time of executing the jackpot game), the reduction of the number of working hours is started.

  Therefore, even if a jackpot game (V jackpot game) in which the same jackpot type is set is executed, after the jackpot game ends, according to the remaining period of the special symbol change during the jackpot game (V jackpot game) The period of the new time saving state to be set will be different. Like the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game different from the special symbol lottery during the time reduction state has a playability aiming for a big hit, and an element for terminating the special symbol lottery during the time reduction state. In the pachinko machine 10 used as (an element for setting the duration of the time saving state), it is desirable to execute the big hit game (V big hit game) in a state where the remaining period of the special symbol change is long. However, as in the first embodiment described above, the remaining short time period mode 801 indicating the duration of the time reduction state (see FIG. 12A) does not indicate the remaining time period of each special symbol change, and the time reduction state of the time reduction state is not indicated. Information corresponding to the total time until the end of the special symbol change in which the end condition is satisfied is displayed, and the timer 812 (see FIG. 12 (b)) indicates until the end of the special symbol change in which the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied. Is configured to be displayed as a countdown.

  In other words, in the effect mode described in the first embodiment, the player cannot grasp the remaining period of the special symbol change that is interrupted by the execution of the per-accessory game for the player. Was something. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in addition to the effect mode of the above-described first embodiment, an effect corresponding to the remaining period of the suspended special symbol change can be executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 91 (a), when the remaining period of the suspended special symbol change during the per-game play is 0.1 second (see FIG. 91 (c)), In the display area Ds, a comment of “It is better to make a VGET for the next role” is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 91B, the remaining period of the suspended special symbol change during the game for the role is reduced. In the case of 20.1 seconds (see FIG. 91 (d)), a comment of “Large chance if VGET is performed per present character” is displayed in the sub display area Ds.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the remaining period of the special symbol change during suspension is determined, and if the determination result is shorter than a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds), the game is executed in the current per-accessory game. When a ball is won in the V winning port 165 and a V jackpot game is executed, an effect indicating that the period of the time reduction state (V rush period) set after the V jackpot game is likely to be shortened. If the remaining period of the executed special symbol change is longer than a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds), the ball is won in the V winning opening 165 in the current per-game game, and the V jackpot game is executed. When executed, it is configured to execute an effect indicating that the period of the time saving state (V rush period) set after the V jackpot game is likely to be long. Therefore, it becomes possible for the player to make a selection (selecting whether or not to win the ball in the V winning opening 165) based on the contents of the effect of executing the game method during the V jackpot game, and It is possible to greatly differ the game results during the V rush period based on the game method arbitrarily selected.

  Although detailed description is omitted, in order to execute the effect shown in FIG. 91 (a), other effect execution conditions are also provided. The first condition that is satisfied when the winning information that has been won is included in the winning information of the finished ordinary symbol), and the special symbol change (where the suspended special symbol change establishes the time saving end condition). The second condition that is satisfied in the case of not being a time-saving final change). By setting the performance execution conditions in this way, the time saving state is immediately terminated after selecting a game that does not allow the ball to win a V during the game per active character, according to the comment displayed in the sub-display area Ds. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation that occurs.

  It should be noted that the execution conditions of the effects shown in FIGS. 91 (a) and 91 (b) may be the execution conditions used in the present embodiment. For example, the remaining period of the special symbol change during suspension and the next execution A comparison means is provided for comparing the fluctuation time of the special symbol change to be performed, and when the comparison result determines that the remaining period of the interrupted special symbol change is longer, the V during the current per-accessory game. An effect for prompting a prize (see FIG. 91 (b)) is executed, and if it is determined that the remaining period of the suspended special symbol change is shorter, an effect for suppressing the V prize during the current per-accessory game ( Fig. 91 (see (a)) may be configured to execute the special symbol fluctuation period (the next special symbol fluctuation period to be executed) during interruption. Since it is possible to relatively determine the remaining period of the special symbol change, Can perform highly accurate presentation (set) to person, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect.

  As described above with reference to FIGS. 90 and 91, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation state of the ordinary symbol, the gaming state of the per-regular game, and the per-proxy game during the V rush (during the suspension of the special symbol fluctuation) And, based on the remaining period of the change of the special symbol that has been interrupted, by performing an effect that suggests a game method that can be advantageous to the player, the player is allowed to select a game method. It is configured to be able to provide fun, but without being limited to this, for example, the fluctuation state of the ordinary symbol during the game per role, the game state of the game per general figure, and the interruption An effect that suggests each of the remaining periods of the special symbol change may be executed, that is, only a situation suggestion effect that suggests various situations during the V rush period may be executed. With this configuration, it is possible for the player who has grasped the situation suggestion effect to analyze the game situation during the V rush period, to provide a pleasure of predicting the most advantageous game method by himself and selecting the game method. Can be.

<About the flow of the game during the time saving state in the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 92 and FIG. 93, a description will be given of a flow of a game during a time saving state in the second embodiment. In the second embodiment, as a per-figure game to be executed when a win is made in the ordinary symbol lottery during the time reduction state, the per-figure per game, in which the per-figure per game period is short, and the per-figure per game period It is configured to be able to execute a long regular game per game. In addition, the game with the long game period per figure is opened more than the game with the game figure with the short game time per day, and the general winning award device 640 for the length of the whole game time per game is opened. It is configured such that the ratio of the length of the period to be in the state becomes low. In other words, in a game with a short time per game, a ball can be won to the general electricity winning device 640 during the game with a normal time, and the game can be played in a short time (about 3.5 seconds). The per-figure-per-game, which ends the per-figure-per-game, and the per-figure-per-game is longer in the per-figure-per-game, the ball can be won to the p-prize winning device 640 during the per-figure per game. The period until the end of the per-drawing game is long (about 17.5 seconds).

  Furthermore, although the detailed description will be described later, the above-mentioned disadvantageous per-winning game is the same as the advantageous per-winning game, after the general-purpose winning award device 640 is opened and the general-purpose winning award device 640 is closed. Is a game per ordinary symbol set for 15 seconds, and the 15 seconds is a disadvantageous period in which the remaining period of the special symbol change is wastefully subtracted.

  Therefore, the timing at which the above-mentioned disadvantageous period is set and the game content of the bonus per game will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 92 is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when the disadvantageous game per game (per game B) is executed. When the normal symbol lottery is won and the unfavorable winning game is executed, the general winning device 640 is opened for 1 second, closed for 0.5 seconds, opened for 1 second, closed for 15 seconds, and opened for 0.1 seconds. The game per figure is executed. Then, when the ball that has won the general winning award device 640 during the first one-second opening period wins in the special power operation port 643, the winning is triggered to execute a game per accessory.

  Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 96 (b), as shown in FIG. 92 (a), the ball does not win the V winning device 65 during the special power operation (game per role). If the game is ended after a lapse of time, the game per item is terminated 8.1 seconds after the game per item is started, so that the special figure variation (special symbol variation) is maintained for 8.1 seconds. Variation time subtraction is interrupted. Therefore, a part of the disadvantageous period set when the disadvantageous per-game (per-period B) is executed can be overlapped with a state in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation is not subtracted. The variation time of the special symbol variation to be subtracted can be reduced.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 92 (b), during the special power operation (game per role), a predetermined number (three) of balls are awarded to the V winning device 65, and the game per role is terminated based on the ball winning. In this case, the period of the game per accessory (the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special symbol change is interrupted) is compared to the case where the game per accessory is ended after the time shown in FIG. Period), the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation subtracted during the disadvantageous period increases.

  In such a situation, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 90 (a), a period until the end of the game per ordinary figure is displayed in the display area HR10, and the special symbol variation is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. Since the game method for continuously interrupting the subtraction of the fluctuation time is displayed, the player can easily select the game method in which the game is being played per bonus. In addition, when the ball wins in the V winning opening 165 during the bonus game and the V jackpot game is executed, the jackpot game period and the unfavorable game per game (B per game drawing) are executed. In this case, the disadvantageous period set in the case of the overlap is duplicated, so that setting the disadvantageous period does not disadvantage the player.

  Therefore, the player is required to select a game method to prevent the execution of the special-period change of the special symbol fluctuation from being performed by ending the game per the currently-executed game with the lapse of time, or It is possible to provide a pleasure of allowing a ball to be won in the V winning opening 165 by a hit game (prize winning probability is about 1/11) and selecting a game method aiming at the V jackpot game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 93, a description will be given of the flow of the game when a long-term variation (15 seconds) disadvantageous to the player is selected as the variation time of the ordinary symbol variation executed during the time saving state. I do. FIG. 93 is a timing chart schematically showing a flow of a game when a long-term variation (15 seconds) disadvantageous to the player is selected as the variation time of the ordinary symbol variation executed during the time saving state. is there.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a short variation of 1 second and a long variation of 15 seconds are selected as the variation time of the normal symbol variation executed during the time saving state. . Here, during the fluctuation period of the normal symbol in the time saving state, the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation is performed, and the game is not performed per the general symbol, so it is disadvantageous for the player. . Therefore, similar to the closed state period during the per-regular game described with reference to FIG. 92, the per-accessory per game period, that is, the period during which the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation is interrupted, and If the variation period of the symbol variation is overlapped so that the variation time of the special symbol variation is not subtracted unnecessarily during the disadvantageous period, the game during the time saving state can be efficiently executed.

  Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 96 (b), as shown in FIG. 93 (a), a specified number (three) balls are won to the V winning device 65 during the special power operation (game per character). In this case, when the game per role is terminated based on the ball winning, the period of the game per role (compared to the case where the game per role is terminated after the time shown in FIG. Since the period during which the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation is interrupted becomes shorter, the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation subtracted during the disadvantageous period becomes longer.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 93 (b), when the ball is ended after a lapse of time without causing the V prize device 65 to win during the special power operation (game per role), the game per role Is started 8.1 seconds after the start of the game, the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation (special symbol fluctuation) is suspended for 8.1 seconds. Therefore, the fluctuation period of the long normal symbol fluctuation (15 seconds) can be overlapped with the state in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation is not subtracted, and the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation subtracted during the disadvantageous period is reduced. be able to.

  In such a situation, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 90 (b), a period until the fluctuation per ordinary figure ends is displayed in the display area HR11, and further, the special symbol fluctuation is displayed in the sub display area Ds. Since the game method for continuously interrupting the subtraction of the fluctuation time is displayed, the player can easily select the game method in which the game is being played per bonus. In addition, when the ball wins in the V winning opening 165 during the bonus per game and the V jackpot game is executed, the big jackpot game period and the fluctuation period of the long normal symbol fluctuation (15 seconds) are set. Are not disadvantageous to the player due to the setting of the disadvantage period.

  Therefore, the player is required to select a game method to prevent the execution of the special-period change of the special symbol fluctuation from being performed by ending the game per the currently-executed game with the lapse of time, or It is possible to provide a pleasure of allowing a ball to be won in the V winning opening 165 by a hit game (prize winning probability is about 1/11) and selecting a game method aiming at the V jackpot game.

<Electrical Configuration in Second Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the second embodiment, a part of the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 and a part of the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device 113 are different from the first embodiment described above. The same components are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Here, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 94 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment. In the second embodiment, a part of the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 and the RAM of the audio lamp controller 113 are different from the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 21). Is different from that of the first embodiment in that a new solenoid is added to the solenoid 209 connected to the input / output port 205 of the main controller 110, and the other configuration is the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same elements, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the second embodiment, as described above with reference to FIGS. 88 and 89, the third movable valve 1642 is provided in the general winning award device 640, and the third movable valve 1642 for driving the third movable valve 1642 is provided. The difference is that a three-movable valve solenoid 209f is added. As will be described in detail later, the third movable valve solenoid 209f is controlled to be switched between an on state and an off state at predetermined intervals at the time of execution of a per-drawing game. As a result, the third movable valve 1642 is changed between the normal position (see FIG. 88) and the operating position (see FIG. 89) during the normal hitting game. Therefore, when the second movable valve 642 is operated during the per game drawing, and the ball that has won the general electric winning device 640 flows down toward the special power operating port 643, the state of the third movable valve 1642 depends on the situation. , The ball switches to the special power operation port 643 or the second special power operation port 1643. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the flowing state of the ball that has been won in the general electric winning device 640.

  Next, the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 95 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the second embodiment. In the second embodiment, various operation scenario 2 tables 202aa are provided in the ROM 202 (see FIG. 23) in the first embodiment described above in place of the various operation scenario tables 202e, and a new general-purpose type selection table 202ab is newly provided. , A normal pattern variation pattern selection table 202ac is provided. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the ordinary figure hit type selection table 202ab will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 95 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the per-figure type selection table 202ab. The second embodiment differs from the first embodiment described above in that a plurality of types of per-figure per-game executed during the time saving state are provided, and a per-figure per-game with a different operation pattern can be executed. ing. Although a specific description is omitted, in the ordinary symbol variation process (see S106 in FIG. 48), when the ordinary symbol variation winning per ordinary symbol stops (S1117: Yes), the ball passes through the through gate 67. On the basis of the value of the second hit type counter C9 (0 to 99) acquired at this time and the set gaming state, the hit type selection table 202ab is referred to, and the hit type is selected. It is configured as follows.

  The contents defined in the ordinary symbol type selection table 202ab will be specifically described. The set gaming state is a time reduction state (a low probability state of a special symbol, a high probability state of a normal symbol), and is acquired. In the range where the value of the second hit type counter C9 is “0 to 89”, “Ultra figure hit A” is defined as the general figure hit type, and in the range of “90 to 99”, “Ultra figure hit type” "B per ordinary figure" is defined. Although the specific operation contents of the per-figure game will be described later, when “per-figure per A” is selected (selection rate 90%), a plurality of times (two times) are performed over the entire per-figure game period. ), The electric accessory 640a is in an open state, and a per-figure-period game in which the ball is relatively easy to win a prize in the general-purpose winning device 640 is executed. On the other hand, when “per-figure-per-B” is selected (selection rate 10%), after the same per-figure-per-game as “per-figure-per-A” is executed (in the latter half of the per-figure-per-game period), A per-drawing game in which the period during which the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state is set for a long time (15 seconds) is executed.

  As described above, since the per-figure game is executed without interruption of the special symbol change, the "per-figure A" is a special electric operation port 643 or It is possible to execute a game aiming at a game per an accessory by making a prize to the second special power operation port 1643, but the “Purple per game B” is to make a ball to the prize winning device 640 in the latter half of the per game game. Is set for a long period of time, the remaining period of the special symbol change is unnecessarily subtracted, resulting in a disadvantageous game per disadvantageous figure which is disadvantageous for the player.

  In the present embodiment, in the case where such a per-figure game that is disadvantageous to the player is executed, if the player is executing the per-accessory game, the per-attribute game is continued for a long time. And an effect that allows the player to select a game that reduces the remaining period of the special symbol that is subtracted during the execution period of the disadvantageous game (see FIG. 90 (a)). I have. This makes it possible to vary the period during which the time-saving state continues based on the skill of the player, thereby increasing the player's willingness to play.

  Next, the contents of the ordinary figure variation pattern selection table 202ac will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 95 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the ordinary figure variation pattern selection table 202ac. The ordinary symbol variation pattern selection table 202ac is a data table for selecting an ordinary symbol variation pattern that is executed when a ball passes through the through gate 67, and includes an ordinary symbol variation process (S106 in FIG. 48). ) Is usually referred to when selecting the fluctuation time of the symbol.

  In the above-described first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48, since the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is unified to 3 seconds, the process of selecting the fluctuation pattern of the ordinary symbol (see S1114 in FIG. 48) takes 3 seconds. Only the change time (change pattern) is set. On the other hand, in the second embodiment, a different variation pattern can be selected based on the set gaming state and the value of the variation type counter CS2 referred to when selecting the variation type of the ordinary symbol. It is composed.

  Specifically, when the gaming state is the normal state, the normal fluctuation of the fluctuation time of 3 seconds is selected for the entire range (0 to 198) of the obtained fluctuation type counter CS2. . That is, in the normal state, the normal symbol fluctuation for the same three seconds as in the first embodiment is executed. On the other hand, when the gaming state is the time saving state, the short fluctuation is defined as a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is 1 second in the range of the fluctuation type counter CS2 in the range of “0 to 179”. The long variation is defined as a variation pattern in which the variation time is 15 seconds in the range of “180 to 197”.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the length of the period during which the ordinary symbol fluctuates greatly differs depending on the ordinary symbol variation pattern selected during the time saving state. During the normal symbol fluctuation period during the time reduction state, it is a period in which the game per ordinary symbol is not executed, and furthermore, the remaining period of the special symbol fluctuation is a period in which the subtraction process is performed. , Resulting in a normal figure fluctuation pattern that is disadvantageous to the player.

  In the present embodiment, in the case where the ordinary symbol fluctuation is executed in such a disadvantageous ordinary figure fluctuation pattern that is disadvantageous to the player, if the player is executing the per-attribute game, the per-attribute game is executed. An effect (see FIG. 90 (c)) that allows the player to select a game that reduces the remaining period of the special symbol that is subtracted during the execution period of the unfavorable figure fluctuation by performing the operation for a long time (see FIG. 90 (c)). It is composed. This makes it possible to vary the period during which the time-saving state continues based on the skill of the player, thereby increasing the player's willingness to play.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 96 (a), the contents of each operation scenario table 202e that are different from those of the above-described first embodiment will be described. FIG. 96A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of each operation scenario table 202e in the second embodiment. In the second embodiment, a part of the per-figure per-operation scenario table 202e3 is changed from each of the operation scenario tables 202e (see FIG. 26) of the first embodiment described above, The difference is that a scenario table 202e5 is added. Otherwise, they are the same, and the same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 96 (b), the contents of the second accessory-per-operation scenario table 202e5 will be described. FIG. 96 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the second accessory-per-operation scenario table 202e5. The second per-accessory operation scenario table 202e5 is a data table in which a per-accessory per-game operation scenario to be executed when a ball wins in the second special power operation port 1643 in the per-drawing per-game game is defined. .

  Specifically, the timing when the value of the scenario counter is “1”, that is, immediately after execution of the bonus game, the storage solenoid 209c is set to off, and the storage solenoid 209c is in the off state. Is stipulated to continue until the end. Then, the value of the scenario counter is "25", that is, the opening period (the period in which the V opening / closing door 65a is in the closed state) continues until 0.1 seconds after the start of the game per role, and thereafter, the value of the scenario counter is changed. An operation scenario is defined in which the V winning opening solenoid 209b is set to ON (a round period is set) for a range of values from "26" to "400", that is, for 1.5 seconds. When the V winning port solenoid 209b is set to ON, the V opening / closing door 65a is opened, and the ball can enter the V winning device 65. The ball that has won the V prize device 65 during this round passes through the storage valve 66a that is moving to the ball non-storage state (retreat state), and reaches the first movable valve 66b. Therefore, a plurality of balls can be caused to flow into the first movable valve 66b during a single game per role, so that the V winning probability during the game per role can be increased.

  Then, when the value of the scenario counter reaches “400”, the V winning opening solenoid 209 b is turned off, and the state in which the V opening / closing door 65 a is in the closed state until the value of the scenario counter reaches “1650”, that is, The operation scenario is defined to last for 5 seconds. Thereafter, when the value of the scenario counter reaches “1650”, the value of the scenario counter becomes “2025” until “1675”, that is, for 0.1 second, after the V winning opening solenoid 209b is set to ON. During this time, the V winning opening solenoid 209b is turned off.

  In the present embodiment, the operation scenario for the storage valve 66a defined in the above-described per-cascade operation scenario table 202e2 and the operation scenario for the storage valve 66a defined in the second per-cascade operation scenario table 202e5 are described. Although the operation content of the storage valve 66a is different, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the per-accessory game to be executed, the operation content of the storage valve 66a is unified, and the V winning opening during the per-accessory game. 165 may be different in the winning ratio of the ball.

  Specifically, the operation scenario of the storage solenoid 209c is set such that the storage solenoid 209c is turned off for three seconds after the start of the per-game play, the storage solenoid 209c is turned on for two seconds, and then the storage is performed again. The solenoid 209c is set to be turned off, and when a ball wins in the second special power operation port 1643, the opening period (the period in which the V opening / closing door 65a is in the closed state) is 0.1 second, and the round period (V opening / closing). An operation scenario is defined so that a game per accessory is executed in which the door 65a is open for 1.5 seconds and the ending period (V opening and closing door 65a is closed) is 1.5 seconds.

  On the other hand, when the ball wins in the special power operation port 643, the opening period (the period in which the V-opening door 65a is closed) is 3.1 seconds, and the round period (the period in which the V-opening door 65a is open) is 1.5 seconds. In this case, the operation scenario may be defined so that a game per accessory is executed for an ending period (a period in which the V opening / closing door 65a is closed) of 1.5 seconds. With such a configuration, in the per-principal game executed based on the ball winning in the second special power operating port 1643, the storage valve is set in a period in which the ball can be won in the V winning device 65. Since the ball 66a is in a retreat state in which the ball cannot be stored (ball non-reserved state), a plurality of balls that have won the V prize device 65 flow into the first movable valve 66b, and the prize enters the V winning port 165. Can be increased.

  Also, in a per-principal game executed based on a ball winning in the special power operating port 643, the storage valve 66a is a protrusion capable of storing the ball in a period in which the ball can be awarded to the V winning device 65. Since the ball is in the state (ball storage state), only the ball stored in the storage portion of the storage valve 66a flows into the first movable valve 66b among the balls that have won the V winning device 65, and the V winning is achieved. The probability of winning to the mouth 165 can be reduced.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to vary the ease of winning of a ball (V winning rate) to the V winning opening 165 during the per game play according to the type of the per game play to be executed. Of the opening pattern of the V-opening / closing door 65a and the operation pattern of the storage valve 66a, the V winning ratio can be varied only by changing the length of the period (opening period) until the V-opening / closing door 65a is first opened. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the operation control in the game per accessory. In other words, an operation scenario is set for each type of game per role only during the period from the start of the game per role to the end of the opening period, and thereafter, the operation control of various devices is performed based on the common operation scenario. Can be executed, so that the operation control can be simplified.

  In addition, according to the above-described example, a per-accessory game that is advantageous to the player (a per-accessible game that is executed when a ball wins in the second special power operation port 1643) is disadvantageous to the player. Making the V prize device 65 win the ball earlier than the game per role (starting from the game when the ball wins in the special power operation port 643). It is configured to be able to. This allows the player to efficiently execute a favorable game. In addition, as an operation content of the storage valve 66a, an operation that is advantageous to the player (operation of turning off the storage solenoid 209c) is performed, and a ball is won to the V prize device 65 by a per-accessory game that is disadvantageous to the player. Since it is set before the timing at which it is possible, the ball that has won the V prize device 65 during the per-accessible game disadvantageous to the player is clogged in the V prize device 65, or Even if the ball is intentionally stayed, since an operation advantageous to the player (an operation of turning off the storage solenoid 209c) is not executed thereafter, it is possible to suppress an act of illegally winning a ball to the V winning opening 165. Can be.

  Although detailed description is omitted, in the present embodiment, the operation scenario defined in the per-property operation scenario table 202e2 is different from that of the first embodiment described above. As in the case of the second-per-accessory action scenario table 202e5 described with reference to FIG. 96 (b), a 15-second closing period and a 0.1-second opening period are defined in the latter half period of the per-accessory game. They differ in that they do.

  That is, in the present embodiment, when the game per role is executed, the game per role is terminated based on the ball winning and the case where the game per role is terminated based on the passage of time. It is configured so that the game period of the hit game can be greatly different. Thereby, it becomes possible to make the game result in the time-saving state greatly different according to the result of the selection of the game method in the per-game play, and it is possible to motivate the player to play the game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 97 (a), differences between the per-figure per-figure operation scenario table 202e3 of the second embodiment and the above-described first embodiment will be described. FIG. 97 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the per-figure-per-figure operation scenario table 202e3 of the second embodiment. The second embodiment is different from the above-described first embodiment in that the operation content of the per-figure-per-game executed during the time-saving state is different, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. As shown in FIG. 97 (a), in the second embodiment, the operation scenario of the game-per-game performed during the time reduction state is different from that of the first embodiment described above. It has a scenario 202e33 and three scenarios 202e33 per time-saving general-purpose map.

  First, with reference to FIG. 97 (b), the contents of two scenarios 202e33 per time-saving general-purpose map will be described. FIG. 97 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the two scenarios 202e33 per time-saving general-purpose map. In this time-saving two-time-per-figure-period scenario 202e33, the operation scenario of the per-figure-per-game executed when the "per-figure-per-A" is selected as the per-figure-per-type is defined. The operation scenario defined in a three-time-period-for-time-saving-time-scenario 202e34, which will be described later, is a ratio of a period in which the electric accessory 640a is in an open state to the entire game period per 3.6-hour period in the entire game period per time-of-day drawing. A higher game per day is executed.

  Specifically, an operation scenario in which the second movable valve solenoid 209e is set to ON is defined for a scenario counter value of "1", and an operation scenario in which the third movable valve solenoid 209f is set to ON is defined. Stipulated. The ON state of the second movable valve solenoid 209e is set until the game per game ends (the value of the scenario counter becomes “900”). That is, in the per-figure game executed in response to “per-figure A”, the ball that has won the electric accessory 640 a must always be awarded to the special power operation port 643 or the second special power operation port 1643. Make up.

  Further, the third movable valve solenoid 209f has an ON period of 0.2 seconds (a period during which the third movable valve 1642 is positioned at an operating position where a ball can enter the second special power operating port 1643) and 1.5 seconds. (A period in which the third movable valve 1642 is positioned at a normal position where a ball can enter the special power operation port 643) is repeatedly set. That is, the ratio of the ball passing through the second movable valve 642 to the second special power operating port 1643 is about 11%, and the ratio of the ball passing through the second movable valve 642 to the special power operating port 643 is about 11%. It is configured to be 89%.

  Then, the value of the scenario counter is "25", that is, the opening period (the period in which the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state) continues until 0.1 seconds after the start of the per-figure game. The value is in the range from "26" to "274", that is, for one second, the full-power solenoid is set to ON (the electric accessory 640a is in the open state), and the range is from "275" to "400". That is, for 0.5 seconds, the general-purpose solenoid is set to off (the electric accessory 640a is closed). Then, the general-purpose solenoid is turned on again for a range from "401" to "649", that is, for one second, and thereafter, a general-purpose solenoid is set for a range from "650" to "900", that is, for one second. An operation scenario in which the electric solenoid is set to off is defined. In other words, when the game per game based on the operation scenario defined in the two scenarios 202e33 for time-saving time reduction is executed, the opening operation of opening the electric accessory 640a for one second is performed twice. The game is executed, and a total of two seconds of the open state period of the electric accessory 640a in which the ball can enter the general winning award device 640 for the period of the entire game per ordinary figure (3.6 seconds). For this reason, approximately 40% of the game period per day is advantageous to the player (the special electric game can be advanced (the special electric operation port 643 or the second special electric operation port 1643 can receive a ball) ) Period).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 98, the contents of the three scenarios 202e34 per time-saving general-purpose map will be described. FIG. 98 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in three scenarios 202e34 per time-saving general-purpose figure. In this case, the time-saving three-time per-figure scenario 202e34 defines an operation scenario of a per-figure-per-game to be executed when “per-figure-per-B” is selected. The contents specified in the three scenarios 202e34 per time-saving general-purpose map are the same as the two scenarios 202e33 per time-saving general-purpose figure described above until the value of the scenario counter reaches “650”. Detailed description is omitted.

  The value of the scenario counter is in the range of “650” to “3500”, that is, the normal power solenoid is set to OFF for 15 seconds, and then the value of the scenario counter is in the range of “3501” to “3524”, that is, During 0.1 seconds, the general-purpose solenoid is set to ON, and thereafter, when the value of the scenario counter becomes “3525”, the general-purpose solenoid is set to OFF.

  In other words, the game per day map defined by the three scenarios per day map for time saving 202e34 has a length of the whole game period per day of 17.7 seconds, and the ball is played during the game per day map. The total period in which the device 640 can be awarded is 2.1 seconds. Therefore, the total of the open state period of the electric accessory 640a in which the ball can enter the general winning award device 640 is 2.1 seconds for the period of the entire game per regular figure (17.7 seconds). Approximately 12% of the game period per day is advantageous to the player (a special electric game can be advanced (a ball can be awarded to the special electric operation port 643 or the second special electric operation port 1643). Period). Further, when the second electric accessory 640a opening operation is completed, the electric accessory 640a is closed for 15 seconds thereafter.

  Therefore, when the three scenarios 202e34 per time saving time drawing are set during the time saving state, the period during which the ball cannot enter the general power winning device 640 is set to be long, so that it is disadvantageous for the player. Become a game. Further, in the present embodiment, similarly to the above-described first embodiment, when the special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, four times) (the fourth special symbol change ends). In this case, the time saving state is terminated, and the remaining period of the special symbol change is subtracted during the normal per-game game. In other words, even during the closed state for 15 seconds, the remaining period of the special symbol change is subtracted, so that the game per ordinary figure becomes more disadvantageous for the player.

  Next, the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 99 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 99, in the second embodiment, a general-purpose variation time counter 223aa, a general-purpose time counter 223ab, and a prohibition of firing are stored in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the first embodiment. The difference is that the suggestion flag 223ac and the effect setting completed flag 223ad are added. Other elements are the same, and the same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The general figure fluctuation time counter 223aa is a counter for measuring the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol, and when a general figure fluctuation pattern command is received, the fluctuation time corresponding to the received command is set, and the voice lamp control device is used. In the main processing 113 (see FIG. 60), the counter value set in the effect update processing executed periodically (every millisecond) is decremented. It is configured such that various effects are executed based on the counter value, which are referred to when a per-government game is executed.

  The per-figure-period time counter 223ab is a counter for measuring a game period in which the per-figure-per-game is executed, and when a per-figure-period start command is received, the per-figure-per-game time corresponding to the received command. Is set, and the value of the counter set in the effect update process executed periodically (every millisecond) in the main process (see FIG. 60) of the audio lamp control device 113 is subtracted. are doing.

  The firing prohibition suggestion flag 223ac is set to ON when performing a punctuation suggestion effect for puncturing a game per role (terminating the game per role over time), and in a state where the flag is set to ON, It is set to off when the hit game ends. When the per game play ends, the display mode of the ending screen of the per game play is changed based on the setting status of the flag and the end conditions of the established per game play (winning end, time lapse end). Will be referred to.

  The effect setting completed flag 223ad is a punk suggestion effect indicating that the game per role is ended based on the passage of time, or an effect suggesting that a ball is to be awarded to the V winning device 65 during the game per role. This is for indicating that the setting has been made, and is set to ON when a dedicated effect is set during the per-accessory game.

<Control processing executed by main controller in second embodiment>
The second embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in that the game per bonus item is different depending on the operating port (special power operating port 643, second special power operating port 1643) in which the ball wins during the general figure game. Is greatly different in that it is configured to be executable. Although detailed illustration is omitted, in the ordinary symbol lottery, the ordinary symbol variation time is determined based on the gaming state and the acquired value of the variation type counter CS2, based on the ordinary symbol variation pattern selection table 202ac (FIG. 95 (c)). Reference), and is different in that it is configured to be able to execute a per-figure game with a different operation content as the per-figure game executed during the time saving state. The control processing executed by main controller 110 is the same except for the contents described above, and the same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 100, the contents of the special power starting opening winning process 2 (S108) will be described. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special power starting opening winning process 2 (S108). This special power starting port winning process 2 (S108) is different from the special power starting port winning process of the first embodiment (see S108 in FIG. 50) in that the operation port (special power operating port 643, second The difference is that the hit type corresponding to the special power operation port 1643) can be set, and the other configurations are the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same control contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 101 to FIG. 107, regarding the control processing executed by the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, the control executed by the audio lamp control device 113 in the above-described first embodiment will be described. The description will focus on differences from the processing. The control process executed by the audio ramp control device 113 of the second embodiment is different from the control process executed by the audio ramp control device 113 of the first embodiment in that a command determination process (S4112 in FIG. 61) is performed. (See S4217 in FIG. 66) instead of the general figure-related processing (see S4217 in FIG. 66) executed in the hit-related processing (S4219 in FIG. 67). The hit object related process 2 (see S4851 in FIG. 103) is replaced with the hit hit related process (S4804 in FIG. 70), and the effect update process 2 (S4151 in FIG. 105) is replaced with the effect update process (see S4111 in FIG. 72). ) Is executed. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 101, the contents of the general figure related processing 2 (S4217) will be described. FIG. 101 is a flow chart showing the contents of the general figure related processing 2 (S4217). This general figure related processing 2 (S4217) is different from the general figure related processing of the first embodiment (see S4217 of FIG. 66) in that the general figure related processing is executed when a general figure variation pattern command is received. The processing that is executed when a per-figure start command is received is different in that the processing is changed, and the other processing is the same.

  When the general-figure-related processing 2 (S4217) is executed, first, it is determined whether a general-figure fluctuation pattern command has been received (S4701). If it is determined that the command has been received (S4701: Yes), the general-figure fluctuation start processing is performed. Is executed (S4751), and then the present process is terminated. The details of the ordinary figure change start processing (S4751) executed in the processing of S4751 will be described later with reference to FIG. 102, but processing for measuring the change time of the ordinary symbol change is executed. In the present embodiment, a plurality of fluctuation times can be selected as the fluctuation pattern of the ordinary symbol (see FIG. 95 (c)), and the advantage of the game executed during the time-saving state according to the selected fluctuation pattern is provided. The degree is variable.

  In the process of S4701, if it is determined that the general figure change pattern command has not been received (S4701: No), it is determined whether a general figure start command has been received (S4703). S4703: Yes), based on the received command, sets the time per ordinary figure (END time of the corresponding game operation scenario per ordinary figure) in the ordinary time per time counter (S4752), and sets the display ordinary time per start command. This is set (S4704), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4703 that the start command for the general figure has not been received (S4703: No), the process of S4705 to S4714, which is the same as the general figure related process of the first embodiment (see FIG. 66), is performed. The process is executed, and the process ends.

  Next, the contents of the ordinary figure change start process (S4751) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ordinary figure change start processing (S4751). When the normal figure change start process (S4751) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current time is during the time reduction (in the time reduction state) (S4771), and if it is determined that the current time is not during the time reduction (S4771: No), The display general-purpose change command is set (S 4771), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S 4771 that it is not during the working hours reduction (S 4771: Yes), the general figure fluctuation time is extracted from the received general figure fluctuation pattern command (S 4772), and the extracted value is used as the general figure fluctuation time counter 223aa. (S 4773), execute the above-described process of S 4774, and terminate the present process.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 103, the content of the accessory-related processing 2 (S4851) will be described. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the contents of the accessory hit related process 2 (S4851). This per-accessory-related process 2 (S4851) is different from the above-described per-accessory-related process (S4804) in that the content of the process executed when a per-accessory start command is received and when an ending command is received is received. The difference is in the changed points, and the other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the accessory hit related processing 2 (S4851) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not a hit hit command is received (S5101). If it is determined that the hit command is received (S5101: Yes), the hit hit is started. The processing is executed (S5151), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5101 that no ending command has been received (S5101: No), the same processing of S5103 to S5107 as in the above-described accessory hit related processing (S4804) is executed, and the ending command is executed in the processing of S5107. If it is determined that it has been received (S5107: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the firing prohibition flag 223ac is set to ON (S5152).

  In other words, in the process of S5152, it is determined whether or not a state in which an effect is being performed to suggest that it is advantageous to prohibit the player from firing the ball is in an advantageous state. If it is determined in the processing of S5152 that the firing prohibition suggestion flag 223ac is not on (S5152: No), the same processing as S5108 to S5109 as the above-described accessory hitting related processing (S4804) is executed, and this processing ends. I do. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5152 that it is set to on (S5152: Yes), the firing prohibition suggestion flag 223ac is set to off (S5153), and the end condition of the current per-figure-per-game is time-lapsed. It is determined whether there is (S5154).

  If it is determined that the game based on the passage of time is ended (S5154: Yes), a display command indicating “success” is set (S5155), and the game based on the passage of time is not ended. In other words, when it is determined that the game for the ordinary figure based on the ball winning has ended (S5154: No), a display command indicating "sorry" is set (S5156). As described above, it is predicted whether it is more advantageous or disadvantageous to fire the ball based on the content of the game per day map during the time reduction state, and the player is provided with a game based on the prediction result. When an effect that suggests a method is executed, it is determined whether or not the per-figure-per-game is completed based on the suggestion content, and the display mode of the per-figure-per-game end screen is changed based on the determination result. With this configuration, it is possible to easily notify the player whether or not the current game method has been correctly selected.

  Unlike the present embodiment, for example, it is predicted whether it is advantageous or disadvantageous to launch the ball to the player based on the game content of the game per game during the time saving state, and the prediction result In the case of performing an effect that suggests a game method to a player based on the effect, in order to predict and select a game method that is really advantageous for the player, an effect that suggests a game method different from the actual prediction result (so-called, If the game is configured to be able to execute (Gase production), it is determined in the process of S5154 whether or not the game (time lapse, ball prize) corresponding to the actual predicted result has ended the game per ordinary drawing, and the determination result The display mode of the end screen may be configured to be variable based on this. This makes it possible to execute a surprising effect for the player.

  In this case, in addition to the above-described effect that suggests a game method to the player, a situation notification effect (for example, an effect that suggests a type of game per ordinary map) for causing the player to predict an actual game situation is executed. Good. Thus, it is possible to provide a pleasure for the player to predict whether or not the effect suggesting the game method is a gaseous effect. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the per-figure-per-game and the per-accessible-peripheral game are executed in an overlapping manner, the effect that suggests the game method to the player is executed, but is not limited thereto. Alternatively, if the player can select the game method, an effect suggesting the game method to the player may be executed by the same method.

  Next, the contents of the accessory hit start process (S5151) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the contents of the accessory hit start process (S5151). In the bonus hit start process (S5151), various processes for varying the effect mode to be executed are executed according to the game situation at the start timing of the hit bonus game.

  When the accessory hit start process (S5151) is executed, first, the type of the winning special power operation port is extracted based on the received command (S5301). Then, it is determined whether or not the current game per hit is a special hit game executed when a ball wins in the special power operating port 643 (special power operating port 1) (S5302). If it is determined that it is not based on a winning (S5302: No), a display command for indicating a winning hit is set (S5303), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5301 that the result is based on the winning of the special power operation port 1 (S5301: Yes), then the value of the ordinary figure fluctuation time counter is read (S5304), and the read value is It is determined whether the value indicates 10 seconds or more (S5305). If it is determined that the value indicates 10 seconds or more (S5305: Yes), a display command for suggesting the end of time per accessory is set (S5306), and the firing prohibition suggestion flag 223ac is set on. (S5307), and proceeds to the process of S5310. Based on the display command set in the process of S5306, a display mode (corresponding to a comment in the sub display area Ds) for suppressing (prohibiting) the launch of a sphere, as shown in the display screen of FIG. ) Is displayed.

  If it is determined in the processing of S5305 that the value does not indicate 10 seconds or more (S5305: No), then it is determined whether the value read in the processing of S5304 is a value indicating 5 seconds or less ( (S5308) When it is determined that the time is 5 seconds or less (S5308: Yes), the game per bonus item is terminated early, and the game per bonus item can be executed again by the next game per regular figure. In this state, a display command for indicating the end of winning per bonus is set (S5309), and the flow shifts to the process of S5310. Here, based on the display command set by the processing of S5309, a display mode that prompts the launch of a sphere (for example, “Break the ball early, When the game is finished, a chance is displayed.

  If it is determined in step S5308 that the value does not indicate 5 seconds or less, that is, the value indicates 5 to 10 seconds, the display for indicating the hit of the accessory is performed without setting a dedicated display command. The command is set (S5310), the effect setting completed flag 223ad is set to ON (S5311), and the process ends.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, since the first game method suggestion effect and the second game method suggestion effect are configured to be executable, the second embodiment is executed for the player. It is possible to select a game method of a game per role based on the effect contents of various suggestive effects. Therefore, the game during the V rush is executed by the game method arbitrarily selected by the player, and the advantage during the V rush can be varied according to the selection result of the game method. On the other hand, the player can be interested. Further, since the degree of advantage during the V rush can be varied according to the result of the selection by the player, the player can actively participate in the game, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the second embodiment, the player can select the game method of the per-government game in accordance with the ordinary symbol fluctuation and the situation of the per-regular game executed during the per-gap game. Although it is configured to execute the suggestion effect, it may be configured to execute the same suggestion effect in a case where a plurality of games are executed in addition to the above, for example, the jackpot game end In the case where the time saving state is set later, the end effect of the jackpot game is configured to execute a suggestive effect that allows the player to select the end timing based on the length of the remaining period of the ordinary symbol change being executed. You may. With this configuration, when the time-saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the normal symbol fluctuation executed during the normal state (the normal symbol low-probability state) is executed for a long time. It is possible to suppress a situation in which the period during which the normal symbol change is not executed becomes longer and the willingness to play decreases.

<Third embodiment>
Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the above-described first and second embodiments, based on the fact that a ball has won a special power operating port (special power operating port 643 or second special power operating port 1643), a game per accessory is executed, It was configured to suspend the subtraction of the special symbol change during execution. In other words, the more the per game play, the more advantageous the player is. Therefore, the game method during the time reduction state (during the V rush) becomes monotonous, and the player may be bored with the game.

  On the other hand, the third embodiment differs from the first embodiment and the second embodiment in that the processing content for the special symbol change during execution in the case where the bonus game is executed is different. Specifically, in accordance with the game type per role to be executed (set), the process of interrupting the special symbol variation being executed, and discarding (discarding the remaining variation time, Either a process of forcibly stopping due to a lottery regardless of the lottery result), or a process of terminating the time saving state in addition to discarding, is executed.

  With this configuration, it is possible to greatly change the game situation during the time saving state based on the execution of the game per accessory, and thus it is possible to provide the player with a tireless game.

  Furthermore, based on the effect performed during the time-saving state (V rush), an effect is provided that allows the player to select whether or not to execute the game per accessory. Thus, for example, when a game per role that ends the time-saving state is executed, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the time-saving state ends suddenly and gives a sense of mistrust to the player. it can. In addition, the player himself / herself can select whether or not to execute the game per role based on the content of the effect to be performed, so that the player can enthusiastically participate in the game and improve the interest of the game. Can be done.

<Production contents in the third embodiment>
First, with reference to FIGS. 108 and 109, among the effects performed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in the third embodiment, the contents of the characteristic effects will be described. The effect performed in the present embodiment is different from the above-described embodiments in that the duration of the time reduction state (the duration of the V rush) is displayed in addition to the timely subtraction display of the value displayed on the timer 812. A reduction display in which the value displayed on the timer 812 is greatly reduced when the special symbol change being executed is discarded by the execution of the hit game, It is greatly different in that the disappearance display for ending the state is configured to be executable.

  Furthermore, in the case where the special symbol change being executed has won a jackpot (during the jackpot change), a suggestion effect that suggests that the executed jackpot change will be discarded by executing the per-accessory game. It is greatly different in that it is configured to execute. Other display contents are the same, except that the size and position of the display area are changed in order to display the above-mentioned differences. The same reference numerals are given to the same display contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 108 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents executed when the remaining period of the special symbol big hit fluctuation reaches a predetermined period (10 seconds). FIG. 108 is a schematic diagram showing the holding status of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 108 (a) is displayed. As shown in FIG. 108 (a), when the remaining period of the jackpot fluctuation reaches 10 seconds, a display mode of “danger time entry” is displayed, and until the danger time ends (the jackpot fluctuation is stopped and displayed). “10 seconds” is displayed as the period display mode 851 indicating the period. In the same manner as the value displayed on the timer 812, the period display mode 851 is periodically reduced (countdown display) by the effect update processing of the sound lamp control device 113.

  Further, in the V rush fluctuation region 811, in addition to the symbol simulating “V” corresponding to the success of the game during the V rush (execution of the V jackpot game), the “skull” indicating the game result disadvantageous to the player Is variably displayed. In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, the character “The hits during the danger time is large pinch” is displayed.

  In other words, when entering the danger time, it is suggested to the player that the jackpot fluctuation may stop (execution of the jackpot game based on the special figure lottery) after a predetermined time (after 10 seconds). On the other hand, although the details will be described later, the danger time is configured to be executed even in a case where the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order.

  Therefore, when the player enters the danger time, the player does not execute the special electric game aiming at a per-accessory game until the end of the danger time (does not fire the ball) or executes the special electric game even during the danger time. Then, the player willingly chooses whether to go for the game per V.

  In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the remaining period of the special change during the execution of the danger time entry condition reaches a predetermined period (10 seconds). However, the present invention is not limited to this. The entry condition of the danger time may be different depending on whether the lottery result is a big hit or not, and during the change of the big hit, the remaining period is “27 seconds”, “17 seconds”, “10 seconds”, The configuration may be such that the danger time can be entered when "7 seconds", and the danger time can be entered only when the remaining period is "10 seconds" during the deviation. This allows the player to predict the lottery result of the special symbol change being executed based on the display of the remaining time of the danger time displayed when the danger time enters.

  Also, in the above-described example, an example was given in which a special danger time entry condition was set during a jackpot change. However, the present invention is not limited to this. May be configured to be able to enter the danger time when the remaining period of “14 seconds” becomes “14 seconds”. This makes it possible for the player who understands that the player is in the departure change to play the game without firing the ball.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 108 (b), the display contents when the bonus hit game is executed during the danger time and the big hit change is discarded will be described. FIG. 108 (b) is a schematic diagram showing a display content when a bonus hit game is executed during the danger time and the big hit change is discarded. As shown in FIG. 108 (b), when the accessory hit is executed during the danger time, the character “End” is displayed in the period display mode 851 to notify that the danger time has ended. Then, a symbol imitating a “skull” is stopped and displayed in the V-rush variation area 811 in order to indicate that the jackpot variation being executed has been discarded. Further, a comment "Sorry ... retreat" is displayed in the sub display area Ds.

  On the other hand, since the per-prize game is being executed, a display mode for aiming at the V prize in the role game is displayed.

  Further, since the special symbol change being executed is discarded, only “10 seconds” which is the change time of the next change is displayed in the display area HR4 indicating the remaining period of the time saving state (V rush). By displaying such a display screen, it is possible to inform the player of the fact that the jackpot fluctuation has been discarded in a manner that is easy to understand.

  In addition, in the case where the per-proxy game in which the jackpot fluctuation is interrupted is executed during the danger time, as shown in FIG. 109, the danger time is continued, and the fact that the V-jackpot game is executed is notified. An effect is performed.

<Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10 in Third Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The third embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the value of the first hit type counter C2 is obtained when a ball wins in the special power operation port 643, and the obtained first hit value is obtained. Based on the value of the type counter C2, the type (big hit type) of the big hit game (V big hit game) executed when the player wins the V winning opening 165 can be selected. Is partially different from the above. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the contents of the V jackpot type selection 3 table 202c3 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 110A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the V jackpot type selection 3 table 202c3. As shown in FIG. 110 (a), three jackpot types are defined in the V jackpot type selection 3 table 202c3, and the game content of the V jackpot game to be executed, V The game state (number of times reduced) set after the end of the big hit game and the influence on the special symbol being executed at the time of executing the bonus hit game are configured to be different.

  Specifically, the jackpot C is defined in the range of the acquired first hit type counter C2 of “0 to 79”, the jackpot D is defined in the range of “80 to 94”, and “95 to 99”. Is defined as a jackpot E.

  The "big hit C" (selection rate 80%) has the same content as the V big hit game executed in each of the above-described embodiments, and is a 10 round (R) big hit game, four times reduction in time, a special symbol being executed. Has been set to suspend. The "big hit D" (selection rate 15%) is set to a content of discarding the special symbol change during the 10-round (R) big hit game, four time saving times, and the running special symbol. "Big hit E" (selection rate 5%) is set so as to discard 15 rounds (R) of big hit games, 15 times of time saving, special symbol fluctuations being executed, and end the time saving state.

  As described above, when the “big hit E”, which is the most disadvantageous to the player during the special symbol change during execution, is set, if the player wins a V during the per-game game, the player is most advantageous to the player. Since the jackpot game and the game state (number of times saved) after the end of the jackpot game are set, the last chance can be given to the player. Also, for example, if the final fluctuation of the time-saving state is out of range and immediately before the end of the fluctuation, that is, if the time-saving state ends in a few seconds after doing nothing, the “big hit” "E" may be the jackpot type most advantageous to the player.

  Next, the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 110B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 110B, this embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that a danger time selection table 222ca is added. The other parts are the same, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The danger time selection table 222ca is a data table that is referred when determining whether to actually execute a danger time effect when the danger time entry condition is satisfied, and includes a lottery result of a special symbol change being executed. It is configured to make the execution probabilities different based on the execution probability.

  Here, the contents of the danger time selection table 222ca will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 110 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the danger time selection table 222ca. As shown in FIG. 110 (c), the configuration is such that the danger time effect is more easily executed when the special symbol change being executed is a jackpot change than when it is a loss change. Thereby, when the danger time effect is executed, it is possible to play the game while expecting that the big hit is changing.

  Specifically, when the special symbol lottery result (special figure determination result) is a big hit, the execution of danger time is selected regardless of the value of the obtained effect counter 223f, and the special symbol lottery result (special figure determination) is selected. If the determination result is out of order, it is selected not to execute the danger time effect when the value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of “0 to 89”, and to execute the danger time effect in the range of “90 to 99”. Is configured to be selected.

  With this configuration, even if the result of the special figure lottery being executed is out of order, the danger time effect can be executed. Since it can be held, the interest of the game can be improved.

<Regarding control processing contents in the third embodiment>
Next, control processing contents according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The present embodiment is different in that the content of the control process executed by main controller 110 and the content of the control process executed by voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed. Are the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 111, the special power starting port winning process 3 (S158) executed by the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special power starting opening winning process 3 (S158). This special power starting port winning process 3 (S158) is different from the special power starting winning process of the first embodiment (see S108 in FIG. 50) in that a different jackpot type is selected when a ball wins in the special power operating port 643. The difference is that the configuration is made possible and the process corresponding to the selected jackpot type is executed, and the rest is the same. The same components are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the special power starting winning process 3 (S158) is executed, the same processes as S1301 to S1303, S1305 to S1309, which are the same as the special power starting winning process described above (see S108 in FIG. 50), are executed. Then, in the process of S1303, it is determined that the special power is being operated (playing a special hit), and if it is determined that the special power is being operated, the jackpot type selected this time is “big hit E”. Is determined (S1371), and when it is determined to be "big hit E" (S1371: Yes), the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to 0 (S1373), and a special symbol change stop process is executed (S1374). , To S1375. Note that the content of the special symbol change stop processing (S1374) is the same as the content of the special symbol change stop processing (see S208 in FIG. 45) of the above-described first embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1371, if it is determined that the hit is not "big hit E" (S1371; No), then it is determined whether it is "big hit D" (S1372), and if it is determined to be "big hit D". (S1372: Yes), executes the process of S1374, and shifts to the process of S1375. If it is determined in the process of S1372 that it is not “big hit D”, that is, it is “big hit C” (S1372: No), the processes of S1305 and S1306 are executed, and the process shifts to the process of S1375.

  In the process of S1375, the accessory hit flag is set to ON (S1375), a command corresponding to the current hit type ("big hit C" to "big hit E") is set (S1376), and a special power operation command is set. (S1308), this process ends.

  Next, the effect update process 3 (S4171) executed by the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing the contents of effect update processing 3 (S4171). The effect update process 3 (S4171) is different from the effect update process 2 of the second embodiment (see S4151 in FIG. 105) in that the danger time setting process (S5371) related to the setting of the danger time effect is performed in the process of S5306. And the other is the same. The same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Here, the contents of the danger time setting processing (S5371) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 113 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the danger time setting process (S5371). In the danger time setting process (S5371), when the execution condition of the danger time effect is satisfied, it is determined whether or not the danger time is to be actually executed, and the process for setting the danger time effect is performed based on the determination result. Is done.

  When the danger time setting process (S 5371) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the fluctuation time counter 223 r is a value indicating the remaining period of 10 seconds (S 5601), and it is determined that the value is not a value indicating the remaining period of 10 seconds. If it has been done (S5601: No), it means that the execution condition of the danger time has not been satisfied, and thus this processing is ended as it is.

  In the processing of S5601, when it is determined that the value indicates the remaining period of 10 seconds (S5601: Yes), the lottery result of the special symbol variation being executed (the special figure lottery result) and the value of the acquired effect counter 223f are determined. And whether to execute the danger time effect is selected with reference to the danger time selection table 222ca based on the information (S5602).

  In the processing of S5603, it is determined whether to execute the danger time effect based on the processing result (selection result) of S5602 (S5603). If it is determined that the effect is to be executed (S5603: Yes), a display indicating the danger time effect is performed. The command is set (S5604), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5603, if it is determined that the danger time effect is not to be performed (S5603: No), the process ends.

  According to the display command set in the process of S5604, the danger time effect shown in FIG. 90A is executed.

<Fourth embodiment>
Next, a fourth embodiment of the present pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. In the fourth embodiment, the configuration of the game board 13 and the configuration of the main control device 110 are different from those of the first embodiment.

  In the first embodiment described above, as shown in FIG. 2, in the normal game state, the special figure game in which the player enters the special figure entrance 64 is executed. Is easy to open, so that a special ball game is aimed at letting a game ball enter the special power operation port 643 in the general winning award device 640 and allowing a game ball to enter the V winning port 165 in the V winning device 65. It is configured to be a game method that is advantageous to the player. On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, instead of the special power operation port 643, an entrance (second entrance 1645) serving as a chance for a lottery of the second special symbol is provided (see FIG. 114). The V opening / closing door 65a is configured to be opened when a specific lottery result (small hit) is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol. That is, in the fourth embodiment, the opening timing of the V opening / closing door 65a attached to the V winning device 65 is not a hit by a ball entering the special power operation port 643 but a ball entering the second ball entry port 1645. Is a chance to win a small hit by a lottery of the second special symbol executed in response to The small hit is a kind of miss, and is a lottery result that allows a predetermined winning device (V winning device 65) to be operated without changing the game state.

  Further, in the fourth embodiment, the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol are simultaneously executed (so-called simultaneous fluctuation). Then, during the time saving state, the lottery of the second special symbol is set to have a shorter fluctuation time than the lottery of the first special symbol, so that the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed. I have.

  In addition, when the total number of lottery times of the first special symbol (number of fluctuations) and the number of lottery times of the second special symbol (number of fluctuations) is 100 as the time reduction termination condition for ending the time reduction state. , And the special figure 1 time saving end condition that is satisfied when the number of lotteries (the number of fluctuations) of the first special symbol reaches four, is set, and the cumulative time saving end condition or special figure 1 is set. It is configured that the time saving state ends when the time saving end condition is satisfied.

  In the fourth embodiment having the above-described configuration, the variation pattern of the first special symbol set during the time reduction state is the variation of the special symbol set during the time reduction state in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above. It is configured to have the same content as the pattern, and the playability during the time saving state (during the V rush) is different from that of the above-described first embodiment in that a ball is inserted into the special power starting port 643, Instead of a game in which a game (a winning game for opening the V winning device 65) is executed, a ball is thrown into the second entrance 1645, and a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery to win a small hit game (V Before the point of using the game for executing the game for opening the winning device 65) and the number of times of variation (number of lotteries) of the first special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, four times), the cumulative time saving end condition is satisfied. Time savings There a point using the game to end, in different.

  That is, in the fourth embodiment, a period for indicating a lottery result of the second special symbol (a fluctuation period of the second special symbol) can be variably set as compared with the first embodiment described above. For example, as a fluctuation period of the second special symbol, a short fluctuation period (for example, a fluctuation time of 0.1 second) and a long fluctuation period (for example, a fluctuation time of 10 seconds) can be set. In addition, the interval of the small hitting game executed during the time saving state can be made to vary greatly depending on the fluctuation period of the set second special symbol. Therefore, the variation of the game during the time reduction state can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, since the cumulative time-saving ending condition can be satisfied based on the execution of the lottery of the second special symbol, it is possible to set an upper limit on the number of small hit games executed during the time-saving state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the privilege (V jackpot game) from being excessively given to the player during the time saving state. Furthermore, by configuring a short variation period (for example, 0.1 second) to be hardly set as the variation period of the second special symbol set during the time reduction state, the small hit game is frequently executed during the time reduction state. Can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the bonus (prize ball) from being excessively given to the player in a short time.

  Hereinafter, the characteristic configuration and playability of the fourth embodiment will be mainly described. First, a description will be given of the update timing of the number of time savings and the determination processing timing for ending the time saving state in the fourth embodiment. As in the fourth embodiment, in the simultaneous fluctuation type gaming machine in which the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, the fluctuation of the special symbol executed during the time saving state In order to prevent the number of times from exceeding a specified number of times (for example, 100 times), an update process of the number of time savings and a determination process for ending the time saving state are executed at the start timing of the change of each special symbol. I was Thus, the time saving state can be ended at the timing when the specified number of special symbol changes is executed, so that the 101st special symbol change exceeding the specified number of times (for example, 100 times) is reliably performed in the normal state. It can be executed, and it has been suppressed that a privilege (special symbol change in a time-saving state) is excessively given to the player. However, before the final change of the time reduction state (the 100th special symbol change) is stopped and displayed, specifically, immediately after the 100th special symbol change is started, the time reduction state ends. There is a problem that depending on the special symbol determination (fluctuation) timing, the time period in which the time saving state is set is shortened, giving a player an unpleasant feeling.

  More specifically, for example, immediately after the 100th rotation (the last time of the number of time savings) as the determination (fluctuation) of the first special symbol, the second special symbol is determined (fluctuation), that is, When the special figure change at the 101st rotation is executed, the time saving state can be ended at the timing when the 100th special figure change is executed (immediately before the special figure change at the 101st rotation). In the case where the special figure change of the 101st rotation is not executed in a state where the special figure change of the 100th rotation (the last time of the number of time savings) is performed, for example, the 100th rotation If the special figure change at the 101st rotation is started after the special figure change at the 100th rotation is completed, the time saving state ends at the timing when the special figure change at the 100th rotation is executed. The state of the ordinary symbol during the change of the special figure There is a problem that uncomfortable feeling to the player for.

  On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, when the number of times of the special figure change (for example, 100) is set as the time saving end condition for ending the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, the time saving end condition is satisfied. Timing of the special figure fluctuation (for example, the special figure fluctuation at the 100th rotation) and the start timing of the special figure fluctuation (for example, the special figure fluctuation at the 101st rotation) executed after the time saving end condition is satisfied. Is determined, and the time saving state is ended based on the timing executed earlier among the timings.

  With such a configuration, the high probability state (time saving state) of the ordinary symbol is maintained until the timing at which the special symbol change at the specified number of times is stopped or displayed, or the timing at which the special symbol change at the number of times exceeding the specified number is executed. It can be set, and the maximum time period and the time reduction state can be provided to the player, and the player's willingness to play can be increased.

  Further, in the fourth embodiment, the timing at which the condition for enabling the execution of the special figure change at the 101st rotation can be determined as the timing at which the special figure change at the 101st rotation is executed. The time saving state is configured to end before the special symbol is determined. Accordingly, it is possible to reliably prevent the time reduction state from being set in a range exceeding the predetermined number of time reductions and executing the lottery of the special symbol in the time reduction state.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, among the end timing of the special figure change in which the time saving end condition is satisfied, and the timing in which the special figure change is executed next to the special figure change in which the time saving end condition is satisfied, the condition is satisfied first. The time saving state is configured to end based on the timing. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the time saving time may be reduced based on only the timing at which the special figure change is executed after the special figure change in which the time saving end condition is satisfied. The state may be terminated.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the fluctuation of the first special symbol (the process of subtracting the fluctuation time of the first special symbol) is temporarily stopped (interrupted). Make up. Then, when a V prize (a prize of a ball into the V prize opening 165) occurs during the small hit game and a big hit is given, the temporarily stopped special symbol change is restarted after the big hit game is finished. It is configured so that: Then, in the fourth embodiment, the timing of the reduction of the number of time savings is configured to be subtracted when the change of the special symbol whose change has been started during the time saving game is stopped.

  With such a configuration, the temporarily stopped special symbol change is a change started before the jackpot game, so if the temporarily stopped special symbol change restarts and stops, Time savings are not subtracted. In other words, in the present embodiment, when a jackpot is awarded due to the V winning, in addition to the number of time savings provided by the jackpot, the period until the fluctuation of the temporarily stopped special symbol is also reduced. Set as a gaming state. With this configuration, the time saving state that is most advantageous for the player can be set as long as possible.

  Here, the fourth embodiment is a big hit due to the playability of the pachinko machine 10 (the special symbol lottery and the winning of the ball to the special power operation port 643) described in the first embodiment to the third embodiment. It is shown as an example for realizing (gaming ability aiming for a game) by another method, and the respective technical ideas described in the above-described first to third embodiments, the effect contents to be executed, and the like are appropriately determined. It may be diverted. It should be noted that detailed descriptions of the respective technical ideas and effect contents used in the same manner as in the above-described first to third embodiments will be omitted.

<About the game board configuration of the pachinko machine in the fourth embodiment>
First, the configuration of the game board 13 used in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment is different from the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the above-described first embodiment in that a second ball entry unit 1640 is provided instead of the general winning award device 640. The present embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that a second entrance 1645 is provided instead of the special power operation port 643.

  In the above-described first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, by executing the left-handed game, the lottery of the first special symbol is executed based on the fact that the ball has entered the special figure entrance 64, and the through-game is performed. By passing through the gate 67, a lottery of a normal symbol is executed, and when the winning is won, the electric accessory 640a is configured to be in an open state in which the game ball can enter the general winning award device 640. Then, when a game ball enters the special power operating port 643, a hitting of a bonus is executed, and the V opening / closing door 65a attached to the V winning device 65 is configured to be opened.

  On the other hand, the fourth embodiment is greatly different in that a second entrance 1645 serving as a chance for a lottery of a second special symbol is provided instead of the above-described special power operation port 643. Therefore, in this embodiment, the small opening is won by the lottery of the second special symbol based on the entry into the second entry opening 1645, not the winning in the special power operation port 643, but the opening timing of the V opening / closing door 65a. This triggers the opening of the V opening / closing door 65a.

  When the game state is the normal state, the player fires a game ball toward the left area of the game board 13 as in the first embodiment described above, and makes the ball enter the special figure entrance 64, The game is executed while desiring to win a big hit in the first special symbol lottery. Then, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the gaming state shifts to the time-saving gaming state (the high probability state of the special symbol and the low probability state of the ordinary symbol) at a rate of 100%.

  In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, if a game is executed while aiming at the left area of the game board 13, the game ball can pass through the through gate 67 at a rate of 100%. In the case where the lottery of the ordinary symbol executed when the game ball passes through the through gate 67 is won, the second electric accessory 1640a attached to the second ball entry unit 1640 is in the open state (the game ball is A state in which the ball can enter the second ball entry unit 1640) is set.

  In the second ball entry unit 1640, a second ball entry port 1645 is provided, and when a game ball enters, a lottery of the second special symbol is executed. And in this embodiment, it is configured to win a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol. When the small winning is won, the V opening / closing door 65a in the V winning device 65 is set to the open state, and when the game ball wins the V winning opening 165, the big winning is given.

  In the present embodiment, as will be described in detail later, it is defined that the probability of winning a small hit in the second special symbol lottery is 396/400 (about 9/10). The time-saving state in which the game ball easily enters the second ball entrance 1645 is a state in which the V winning is likely to occur, and is the most advantageous state for the player.

<Electrical Configuration of Fourth Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the fourth embodiment, the special symbol lottery method is different from that of the first embodiment described above, and if the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 have a partially different configuration corresponding to the difference described above. I'm making it.

  First, a counter provided in RAM 203 of main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 115 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a counter and the like provided in RAM 203 of main control device 110. These counters and the like are used for special symbol lottery, ordinary symbol lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 37, display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and display setting on the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform such operations.

  In order to select the special symbol lottery and the display setting of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol big hit type are selected. , A stop type selection counter (not shown) used to select an outage stop type in a special symbol, and a small type used to select a small hit type of a special symbol. A hit type counter C5, a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting an initial value of the first random number counter C1, and a change type counter CS1 used for selecting a change pattern are used.

  A random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the ordinary symbols, a second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4, and the variation used for selecting the variation pattern of the ordinary symbol. The type counter CS1 is used. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value each time the counter is updated.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main processing (see FIG. 55). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. In the RAM 203, a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da corresponding to a ball entering the special figure entrance 64 including four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and four holding areas (holding). And a second special symbol retaining ball storage area 203db corresponding to the entry into the second entrance 1645 comprising the first to fourth areas), and is provided in the first special symbol retaining ball storage area 203da. Stores the respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 in accordance with the timing of entering the special figure entrance 64. .

  Then, when the start condition (variation condition) of the first special symbol is satisfied, various values stored in the reserved first area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da are shifted to the first special symbol execution area. The special symbol change based on the stored various values is started.

  Similarly, in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203db, the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the like in accordance with the timing of entering the second entrance 1645. Each value of the small hit type counter C5 and the change type counter CS1 is stored.

  Then, when the start condition (variation condition) of the second special symbol is satisfied, various values stored in the reserved first area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db are shifted to the second special symbol execution area. The special symbol change based on the stored various values is started.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to execute the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery simultaneously (in parallel), each special symbol is selected. The reserved ball storage areas (the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db) each have an execution area. Thereby, when the starting condition of each special symbol is satisfied, the next special symbol change can be promptly executed.

  In the present embodiment, since only the second special symbol has a small win as a result of the lottery, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is not stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da. However, for example, it is configured to have a small hit as a lottery result of the first special symbol, and the value of the small hit type counter C5 is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da. You may comprise.

  In addition, as in the present embodiment, the small hits also occur in the reserved ball storage area (first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da) corresponding to the special symbol type (first special symbol) having no small hit as a lottery result. The configuration may be such that the value of the type counter C5 is stored. In this way, regardless of the specification of the special symbol lottery (whether or not there is a small hit), the ball enters the starting port (special figure entrance 64, second entrance 1645) which is a special symbol lottery trigger. Is configured to store all the obtained counter values, and when a special symbol starting condition (variation condition) is satisfied, a special symbol lottery is performed by using only necessary values among the obtained counter values. , The same configuration can be used for a plurality of gaming machines having different special symbol lottery specifications (presence or absence of small hits), so that parts and technology can be shared. And cost can be reduced.

  Further, in the RAM 203 of the present embodiment, similar to the special symbol described above, a normal symbol holding corresponding to a ball entering (passing through a ball) into the through gate 67 including four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). A ball storage area 203dc is provided, and the values of the second random number counter C4 and the ordinary figure variation type counter CS2 are stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203dc in accordance with the timing of entering the through gate 67. Each is stored.

  When the starting condition (variation condition) of the ordinary symbol is satisfied, the various values stored in the first reserved area of the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203dc are shifted to the ordinary symbol execution area, and the various stored values are shifted. Normal symbol fluctuation based on the value is started.

  In this embodiment, each counter value acquired based on the ball entering the second entrance 1645 is stored and stored, and each counter value acquired based on the ball passing through the through gate 67 is provided. It has a configuration in which the values are held and stored, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a function (holding storage function) for storing each counter value acquired for each symbol (special symbol, ordinary symbol) is not provided. It may be configured as follows.

  With this configuration, in order to execute an advantageous lottery in a gaming machine in which a lottery that is advantageous to a player and a disadvantageous lottery are switched as a lottery of one special symbol type according to a set gaming state. In the state where a lot of reserved memories of one special symbol are acquired, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a different game state is set and a disadvantageous lottery is executed in one special symbol.

  Next, a configuration of the ROM 202 included in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The ROM 202 of the main control device 110 according to the fourth embodiment is different from the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the first embodiment described above, in place of the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 24A). The difference is that the big hit type selection 4 table 202db is replaced with a change pattern selection table 202e and a change pattern selection 4 table 202dc is provided, and a new small hit random number table da is provided. Since the other components are the same, the same components are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, a small random number table 202da provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 117 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the small hit random number table 202da. The small hit random number table 202da is a table in which random numbers (judgment values) determined to be small hits in the second special symbol lottery are defined.

  Specifically, in the small hit random number table 202da, a judgment value to be judged as a small hit is defined for each special symbol type (first special symbol, second special symbol), and the state of the special symbol (low Regardless of the probability state or the high probability state), a determination value in a predetermined range is defined. As shown in FIG. 117 (a), when the symbol type is the first special symbol, the value of the first random number counter C1 corresponding to the small hit is not defined, and the small symbol is selected by lottery of the first special symbol. It is stipulated that there will be no winning.

  On the other hand, when the symbol type is the second special symbol, the value of the first random number counter C1 corresponding to the small hit is defined in the range of “4 to 399”. That is, in this embodiment, the probability of winning a small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol is 0 (no winning), and the probability of winning a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol is 396/400 (about 9/10). ).

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the value of the first random number counter C1 that wins the big hit is configured to be different from the value of the first random number counter C1 that wins the small hit, and the special symbol lottery is performed. Is performed (process of determining the presence or absence of a hit) in a single process (a process of determining the presence or absence of a hit), and the determination of the success or failure of a large hit is continuously (simultaneously) performed.

  With this configuration, a lottery or a small lottery can be executed on one acquired counter value (first random number counter C1 value) with a predetermined probability.

  In this embodiment, when a small win is won, the V opening / closing door 65a attached to the V prize device 65 is opened for a certain period (a state in which game balls can enter the V prize device 65). It is configured so that: During the period in which the V opening / closing door 65a is open, the game ball is made to enter the V winning opening 165 in the V winning device 65, thereby giving a big hit. Therefore, the player executes the game while desiring to win many small hits.

  In the present embodiment, the V opening / closing door 65a is configured to be opened for a predetermined period when a small hit is won. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The period in which the V opening / closing door 65a is opened may be made different based on the hit type. In such a configuration, a small hit type table may be provided, and the small hit type may be determined with reference to the table. With such a configuration, the player can be interested in not only winning the small hit but also the type of the small hit to be won, and the small hit in which the V opening / closing door 65a is opened for a longer period. The game is executed while the player wants to win. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the probability of winning a small hit is defined differently in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery. With such a configuration, the privilege given to the player can be different between the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol. In addition, the player can be motivated to play the game in order to execute more advantageous special symbol lottery. As described above, in the present embodiment, unless a specific game state (time saving state) is set, the lottery of the second special symbol that is advantageous to the player is configured not to be executed frequently. On the other hand, it is possible to enthusiastically play a game so that a specific game state is set.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a table (first random number table 202a) referred to when executing the big hit lottery and a table (small random number table 202da) referred to when executing the small hit lottery are described. Although they are configured separately, the present invention is not limited to this, and one table may be used to execute a jackpot lottery and a small jackpot lottery. In this case, for example, the first hit random number table 202a may be configured so that the range of the counter value for winning a small hit is specified for each type of special symbol. With this configuration, the number of data tables in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the jackpot is determined in accordance with the determination value that is predetermined according to the acquired value of the first random number counter C1, the type of the special symbol, and the state of the special symbol. Although it is configured to execute the determination of the winning or the small hit winning, without being limited to this, for example, according to the number of big hits and the number of small hits in a specific period until a predetermined condition is satisfied, The value of the first random number counter C1 defined as a big hit or a small hit may be configured to be variable, or a big lottery, a small hit executed in a state where a predetermined abnormal condition is satisfied. A data table in which the judgment value corresponding to the big hit or the judgment value corresponding to the small hit is not specified as the data table for the abnormal time referred to in the lottery It may be provided.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to execute the lottery (fluctuation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (fluctuation) of the second special symbol simultaneously (in parallel), and to execute both special symbols. However, there is a limit so that the jackpot cannot be won at the same time (in parallel) (so that the jackpot game is not executed). In the pachinko machine 10 having such a restriction, for example, during a period until a jackpot is won by a lottery of one special symbol and a jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot is executed, a lottery of the other special symbol is performed. In order not to win the jackpot, the judgment value corresponding to the big hit is not specified, and the lottery of the special symbol is executed by referring to the dedicated data table that defines only the judgment value corresponding to the small hit You may comprise.

  Next, the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 118 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 118, the RAM 203 of the fourth embodiment is different from the RAM 203 of the above-described first embodiment in that a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da, a second special symbol holding ball storage area 203db, and a normal symbol Reserved ball storage area 203dc, first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd, second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de, special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203cf, small hit flag 203dg, special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh, special figure 1 The difference is that a fluctuation time counter 203di, a special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj, a special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk, a special figure 2 subtraction flag 203dl, and a time saving end standby flag 203dm are added. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da has various counter values acquired based on the fact that a ball has entered the special figure entrance 64 (start winning) up to the upper limit number (four in the present embodiment). Is a storage area for storing. In addition, the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203db is obtained based on the number of game balls having entered the second entrance 1645 (starting prize) up to the upper limit number (four in this embodiment). This is a storage area for storing the various counter values obtained.

  The first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is a storage area in which various counter values for starting variable display of the first special symbol are stored. When various counter values are stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da, this is a storage area in which the various counter values are shifted and stored. The second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is a storage area in which various counter values for starting the variable display of the second special symbol are stored. For details, the first special symbol holding ball execution area ( (Not shown).

  The first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da, the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db, the first special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown), and the second special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) are started. The respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the small hit type counter C5 obtained from the counter buffer (see FIG. 115) with the detection of the winning are stored. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has entered the special figure entrance port 64 (start winning) in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39), the counters C1 to C2, C5 from the counter buffer. , CS1 are acquired and stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da. On the other hand, when it is detected that the ball has entered the second entrance 1645 (start winning), similarly to the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da, each of the counters C1 to C2, C5 and CS1 is read from the counter buffer. The values are obtained and stored similarly in each corresponding area (not shown).

  When the MPU 201 detects that it is the timing to start the execution of the special symbol change (lottery), the MPU 201 executes a process such as a jackpot lottery or setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81. One of the data (each value of the counters C1 to C2, C5, and CS1) corresponding to each starting winning stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da and the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203db described above. Is shifted to the special symbol holding ball execution area. Note that the shift in the present embodiment indicates that data stored in one area is moved to another area.

  The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203dc includes a second random number counter C4 obtained from the counter buffer (see FIG. 115) in accordance with the detection of the passage of the ball to the through gate 67 (start winning), and a general figure variation type counter CS2. This is a storage area in which values are stored. When detecting that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (start winning) in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39), the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 reads the value of the second random number counter C4 from the counter buffer. , The value of the ordinary symbol change type counter CS2 is acquired and stored in the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203dc. The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203dc has four holding areas so that data (values of the counters C4 and CS2) corresponding to one starting winning can be stored (held) up to four times. In the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203dc, the data of the holding balls are stored in the order of passing through the through gate 67 (start winning) from the holding area where the data is vacant, in the order of the earliest digestion. .

  In addition, when the normal symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) detects that it is the timing to start the execution of the fluctuation display effect of the normal symbol based on the winning start, each counter value is stored, and the normal symbol hitting lottery is performed. And a memory for storing data (values of the counters C4 and CS2) to be referred to in processing such as setting of a display (variation pattern) of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81.

  When the MPU 201 detects that it is the timing to start the execution of the fluctuation display effect of the normal symbol, the MPU 201 executes the above-described normal symbol hold to execute processes such as winning lottery and display setting of the second symbol display device 83. Of the data (the value of the second random number counter C4 and the value of the ordinary figure variation type counter CS2) corresponding to each starting winning stored in the ball storage area 203dc, the data corresponding to one starting winning is set to the normal Shift to the symbol holding ball execution area (not shown). Note that the shift in the present embodiment indicates that data stored in one area is moved to another area.

  The first special symbol holding ball number counter 203dd and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203de are each a special figure input detected in a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39) periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. The number of pending balls (variable display effects performed by the third symbol display device 81) based on the winning in the ball opening 64 or the second entrance 1645 (the number of standby times) ) Is a counter for counting up to four times each. The first special symbol retaining ball number counter 203dd and the second special symbol retaining ball number counter 203de are set to zero as initial values by an initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (see S1701 in FIG. 54). Then, each time a start winning is detected and the number of balls to be changed for display is increased, one is added to the maximum value of four. On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de are decremented by one each time a variable display effect is executed.

  The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd (that is, the number of reserved balls) is based on the fact that a ball has entered the special figure entrance 64 (start winning) and stored in the first special symbol reserved ball. When the counter value is stored in the area 203da, the sound lamp control device 113 is notified by the first special symbol holding ball number command output from the main control device 110. The first special symbol holding ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 each time the start winning is detected and the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203dd is incremented by one. It is.

  The value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de (that is, the number of reserved balls) is based on the fact that a ball has entered the second entrance 1645 (start winning) and stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage. When the counter value is stored in the area 203db, the sound lamp control device 113 is notified by the second special symbol holding ball number command output from the main control device 110. The second special symbol holding ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the start winning is detected and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203de is incremented by one. It is.

  The MPU 201 stores the values of the counters C1 to C2, C5, and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer in the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) or the second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown). Is stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) or the second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown), the first special symbol change start processing is performed. (See S255 in FIG. 123) or in the second special symbol variation start process (S260 in FIG. 126), a jackpot lottery is performed based on the reference data, and a variation pattern and a stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. I do. In the first symbol display device 37, under the control of the main control device 110, a fluctuation display is performed based on the determined fluctuation pattern and stop type.

  Further, the determined variation pattern and the stop type are notified to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the first or special figure 2 variation pattern command and the stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variation display effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

  The special figure 2 change stop flag 203df is a flag indicating that the jackpot of the first special symbol is executed during the change display of the second special symbol, and the first special symbol is changed during the change display of the second special symbol. This is set to ON when a symbol jackpot is executed. This special figure 2 change stop flag 203df is set to ON in S852 of the first special symbol change stop processing (see S257 in FIG. 124) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. In the process of S952 of the second special symbol change start process (see S260 of FIG. 126), it is set to OFF.

  This prevents the second special symbol, which has been forcibly removed and stopped and displayed in the symbol, from being re-executed in the lottery when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery and the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed. be able to.

  In the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, after executing the process for the first special symbol in one special symbol variation process 4 (see S151 in FIG. 119), the main controller 110 for the second special symbol is executed. By configuring so as to execute the processing, the fluctuation processing for each special symbol is executed without delay.

  Then, in the special symbol variation process 4 (see S151 in FIG. 119), if any of the special symbols is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the big hit, the big process is controlled by the main process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 55). The processing (S1804 in FIG. 56) is configured to be executed. In addition, the special symbol variation process 4 (see S151 in FIG. 119) is a variation process for each special symbol (S254 in FIG. 119) when the current state is the big hit state or the small hit status (S251: Yes in FIG. 151). To S263) are skipped.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, a new special symbol change (lottery) is not executed while the big hit game or the small hit game is executed based on the special symbol lottery result. In the special symbol variation process 4 (see S151 in FIG. 119), the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode for indicating that the lottery result is a big hit by the variation process for the first special symbol executed earlier. In this case, a new variation process for the second special symbol is performed in the special symbol variation process 4 (see S151 in FIG. 119).

  In the present embodiment configured as described above, by using the special figure 2 change stop flag 203df, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode for indicating that the lottery result is a big hit, It is possible to suppress the execution of a new variation process for the second special symbol in the special symbol variation process 4 (see S154 in FIG. 119).

  The small hit flag 203dg is a flag indicating that the result of the hit determination of the second special symbol is a small hit, and is set to ON when the small hit is won. The small hit flag 203dg is set to ON when the result of the determination of the second special symbol is a small hit (see S1151 in FIG. 128), and when the special symbol change in which the winning result is the small hit is stopped and displayed. Is set to off (see S1655 in FIG. 128).

  The special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is a flag indicating a period in which the update (subtraction) of the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is stopped, and stops the update (subtraction) of the fluctuation time when it is set to ON. When the state is set from on to off, the updating (subtraction) of the stopped fluctuation time is restarted.

  This special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to ON when stopping the fluctuation of the second special symbol (special figure 2) in which the lottery result is a small hit (S1652 in FIG. 133), and the special symbol fluctuation processing 4 ( 119 (refer to FIG. 119) (S252 in FIG. 119). If it is set to ON in the process of S252, a process of updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the first special symbol (the special symbol 1) in the same manner as during the change is executed (FIG. 119). S253). That is, while the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to ON, the updating (subtraction) of the fluctuation time is stopped, but the first symbol display device is in a state where the fluctuation display is continuously executed. Become. Thus, the fact that the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is not forcibly stopped can be notified by setting the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh to ON. Then, when it is determined in the first special symbol variation executing process (see FIG. 123) that the flag is set to on (S751: Yes in FIG. 123), the flag is set to off (S753 in FIG. 123).

  In the present embodiment, only the lottery of the second special symbol is configured to be able to win the small hit, so the special symbol for which the variable display is temporarily stopped based on the win of the small hit is the first special symbol. In the case where the lottery of the first special symbol can be won with a small hit, the special symbol 2 temporary stop flag may be provided to temporarily stop the variable display of the second special symbol. good.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a big hit, the one special symbol is stopped in a combination indicating the big hit (based on the fact that the big hit game is executed). T), the process of forcibly stopping the fluctuation display of the other special symbol, and if the result of the lottery of one special symbol is a small hit, one special symbol is stopped with a combination indicating the small hit. Based on this, the variable display of the other special symbol is temporarily stopped (stopped until the small hitting game ends).

  That is, the variable display of the other special symbol can be processed in various modes according to the lottery result of the one special symbol. With such a configuration, the lottery result of one special symbol becomes a game result (for example, a jackpot) that is most advantageous to the player, and while the variable display for indicating the game result is being executed, the other is displayed. The special symbol (the lottery result is a small hit) is stopped and displayed, and the big hit can be suppressed from being erased by the small hit.

  The special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is a counter for measuring the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, and corresponds to the fluctuation pattern selected in the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection processing (see S357 in FIG. 122). A value indicating the fluctuating time is set (see S559 in FIG. 122). Then, the value is updated (subtracted) every time the first special symbol variation executing process (see S255 in FIG. 123) is executed, and the value is 0 in the special symbol variation process 4 (see S151 in FIG. 119). Is determined (see S256 in FIG. 119). Here, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is 0 (S256 in FIG. 119: Yes), the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing for stopping the changing first special symbol) Step S257 in FIG. 119) is executed.

  Further, the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is cleared to 0 when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a big hit (see S1555 in FIG. 132). Thereby, when the first special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the departure during the big hit stop display of the second special symbol, the value of the special figure 1 variable time counter 203di remains, and the forcible display is forcibly performed. After the stop display, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation of the first special symbol from being restarted again based on the value left in the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj.

  The special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj is a counter for measuring the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, and corresponds to the fluctuation pattern selected in the second special symbol fluctuation pattern selection processing (see S956 in FIG. 129). A value indicating the changing time is set (see S1260 in FIG. 129). The value is updated (subtracted) every time the second special symbol variation executing process (see S261 in FIG. 131) is executed, and the value is 0 in the special symbol variation process 4 (see S151 in FIG. 119). Is determined (see S262 in FIG. 119). Here, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj is 0 (S262: Yes in FIG. 119), the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing for stopping the changing second special symbol ( Step S263 in FIG. 119) is executed.

  Further, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj is cleared to 0 when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the big hit (see S855 in FIG. 124). As a result, when the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the departure at the time of the big special stop display of the first special symbol, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj remains, and the second symbol is forcibly displayed. After the stop display, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation of the second special symbol from restarting again based on the value left in the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj.

  The special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is a flag indicating whether or not the fluctuation of the first special symbol is a fluctuation to be subtracted from the value of the time reduction counter 203h when the fluctuation is stopped. This special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is used when the value of the time reduction counter 203h is determined to be a value larger than 0 in the first special symbol change start processing (see S258 in FIG. 120) (S358 in FIG. 120: Yes). Is set to ON (S359 in FIG. 120), and the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is ON in the time saving update processing (see S863 in FIG. 125) of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see S257 in FIG. 124). (S2101: Yes in FIG. 125), the value of the time reduction counter 203h is subtracted (S2102), and the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is set to off (S2103).

  In addition, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, it is set to off in the first special symbol change stop processing (see S257 of FIG. 124). Similarly, when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, it is set to off in the second special symbol change stop processing (see SS263 in FIG. 132). In addition, by setting the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk to OFF when the special symbol lottery is won, if the fluctuation of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped after the big hit game, the fluctuation is changed. At the time of the fluctuation stop after the restart, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is off (S2101 in FIG. 125). If it is determined that the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is off (FIG. 125). S2101: No), the process of subtracting the value of the time reduction counter 203h (see S2102 of FIG. 125) is skipped, and the process of stopping the change is executed.

  With this configuration, the jackpot game ends, the temporarily stopped first special symbol resumes a change, and when the change stops, the remaining working hours are not updated (subtracted). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the time-saving game after the end of the jackpot game awarded by the V-prize is based on the remaining variation of the first special symbol temporarily stopped, in addition to the number of special symbol lotteries determined by the jackpot. The time is also reduced to the time reduction game state. With this configuration, it is possible to set the time-saving gaming state, which is a period that is advantageous for the player, longer.

  The special figure 2 subtraction flag 203dl is a flag for indicating whether or not the fluctuation of the second special symbol is a fluctuation in which the value of the time reduction counter 203h should be subtracted when the fluctuation stops. In the second special symbol change start process (see S260 in FIG. 126), it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (see S960 in FIG. 126), and the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0. When it is determined that the value is a value (that is, during working hours) (S960: Yes), it is set to ON (see S961 in FIG. 126). Then, it is referred to in the time saving update processing (S1661) of the special figure 2 departure stop processing (S1564), and when it is on, the value of the time saving counter 203h is subtracted, and the special figure 2 subtraction flag 203dl is set to off. . In addition, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, it is set to off (see S860 of FIG. 124) in the first special symbol change stop process (see S257 of FIG. 124), and the second special symbol is turned off. When the jackpot is won in the lottery, it is set to off in the second special symbol change stop processing (see S263 in FIG. 132) (see S1560 in FIG. 132).

  In the present embodiment, in the lottery of the first special symbol, when a big hit is won, if the second special symbol fluctuates, the fluctuation is forcibly stopped outside the fluctuation. As described above, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the special figure 2 subtraction flag 203dl is configured to be turned off. In addition, the processing for updating the value of the time reduction counter 203h can be skipped. Therefore, the processing load can be reduced.

  The time-saving end standby flag 203dm is a flag indicating that the special figure fluctuation that satisfies the condition for ending the time-saving state has been started. Specifically, in the present embodiment, after the end of the jackpot game, the special symbol is changed four times or 15 times as a prescribed period of the time-saving state, and the time-saving state is ended. This indicates that the final change of the time saving is started, and the time saving state is a standby state to be ended.

  The time-saving end standby flag 203dm determines whether or not the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 1 in the first special symbol variation start process (see S258 of FIG. 120) (that is, the final variation of the specified number of times in the time-saving state). (S360), when it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203h is 1 (S360: Yes), it is set to ON (see S361 in FIG. 120). Also, in the second special symbol variation start process (see S260 in FIG. 126), if the value of the time reduction counter 203h is 1 (S962: Yes), it is set to ON (see S963 in FIG. 126).

  Then, when the time saving update process (see S862 in FIG. 125), which is the timing to stop the change of the special symbol, is executed, or when a new special symbol is determined (the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 121) It is referred to in the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see S955 in FIG. 127)), and when the time reduction end standby flag 203dm is set to ON, the time reduction end standby flag 203dm is set to OFF. .

  With such a configuration, in a state where the time-saving end standby flag 203dm is set to ON (that is, a standby state), if any time-saving end timing has arrived, it is ensured according to each timing. Can execute the time-saving ending process.

<Control Process Executed by Main Controller in Fourth Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 119 to 136. In the fourth embodiment, the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol overlap (in parallel with) the control process of the main controller 110 in the first embodiment described above. The present embodiment is different in that it is configured to be executable, and the contents of the control processing corresponding to the above-described difference are different. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 119, a special symbol variation process 4 (S151), which is one process of a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process 4 (S151). The special symbol variation process 4 (S151 in FIG. 119) performs various determinations (win / fail determination) and determinations on the first special symbol and the second special symbol based on the acquired counter values, and performs predetermined control. Various commands for controlling the first symbol display device 37 to enable variable display in the determined variable display mode, and for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute variable display effects of the third symbol and the fourth symbol. Is set, and control is performed to stop and display in a display mode indicating a determination result (whether the result is a pass / fail determination result). Hereinafter, the special symbol variation process 4 (S151 in FIG. 119) will be described.

  In the special symbol variation process 4 (S151 in FIG. 119), first, it is determined whether a big hit game is being performed (big hit) or a small hit game is being made (small hit) (S251). Here, based on the information stored in the gaming state storage area 203g, it is determined whether the current game is a big hit game (a big hit) or a small hit game (a small hit).

  In the process of S251, when it is determined that a big hit or a small hit is being made (S251: Yes), it is next determined whether or not the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to on (S252). Is determined (S252: Yes), the display of the first symbol display device 83 corresponding to the temporarily stopped special figure (the first special symbol (special figure 1) in this embodiment) is displayed. Update (S253), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S252, when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is not set to ON (S252: No), the process ends as it is.

  Here, the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to ON when the second special symbol is stopped (fixed display) in a display mode indicating a small hit winning. In the present embodiment, during the execution of the small hitting game, the fluctuation time set in the fluctuation display (special figure fluctuation display) for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol is not updated (subtracted). During this period, the first symbol display device 83 is configured to display a temporary stop display mode for indicating that the variable display of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped.

  With this configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the variable display of the first special symbol, which was being executed along with the start of the small hit game, is temporarily stopped. It is possible to prevent the player from having a mistrust when the first special symbol change in the middle has disappeared. In addition, as a display mode for indicating that the variable display of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped, for example, a display mode for indicating that normal variable display is being performed (for example, at intervals of 0.2 seconds) The display mode may be the same as the display mode that repeats lighting and extinguishing, or may be the display mode in which the flashing interval is slower than the display mode for indicating that variable display is being performed (for example, lighting and extinguishing at 0.5 second intervals) May be used. Further, when the first symbol display device 83 is configured to be able to display a plurality of colors as a display mode, a blinking display mode using a dedicated color that can be displayed only when the vehicle is temporarily stopped is used. Is also good.

  On the other hand, in the process of S251, when it is determined that the present is not a big hit or a small hit (S251: No), the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is larger than 0, that is, the first It is determined whether or not the special symbol is being changed and displayed (S254). If it is determined that the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (the value of the special figure 1 variable time counter 203di is greater than 0) (S254: Yes), the first special symbol changing process is executed (S254: Yes). S255).

  In the first special symbol change execution process (S255), the variable display mode of the special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 83 is changed (updated) while the first special symbol is changing. Is performed. Then, when the process of S255 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the value of the first variation time counter 203a2 updated in the first special symbol variation execution process (S255) is 0 (S256). If it is determined in the processing that the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is 0 (S256: Yes), the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing is executed (S257), and the processing shifts to the processing of S259 described later.

  In the first special symbol change stop process (S257), when the change time specified for the first special symbol during the change display has elapsed, the change display is stopped at the symbol indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol. Is executed. Further, in the first special symbol change stop process (S257), when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit, the process of forcibly stopping and displaying the second special symbol being executed in a display mode indicating a detachment is performed. Is executed. Further, when the second special symbol being executed has won a jackpot, a process for deleting information on the jackpot is executed. Details of the first special symbol change stop processing (S257) will be described later with reference to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S256 that the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is not 0 (S256: No), the process of S257 is skipped and the process proceeds to S259.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S254 that the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is not larger than 0 (is 0) (S254: No), that is, if it is determined that the current state is that the special figure 1 is not changing. Executes the first special symbol change start process (S258). In the first special symbol variation start process (S258), a process for executing a new lottery (variation) of the first special symbol is performed, and a new lottery (variation) can be executed. If it is determined that a new lottery (fluctuation) can be executed, a process of performing a new lottery (fluctuation) is executed. The first special symbol change start process (S258) will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS.

  After executing the first special symbol change start process (S258), after determining that the special figure 1 is changing in the process of S256 (S256: No), or performing the first special symbol change stop process (S257). After the execution, next, a fluctuation process (S259 to S263) relating to the second special symbol is executed.

  First, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj is larger than 0 (S259). That is, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol (special figure 2) is currently being displayed in a fluctuating manner. If it is determined in the processing of S259 that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj is not larger than 0 (is 0) (S259: No), it means that the current state is that the special figure 2 is not changing. Next, a second special symbol change start process for executing a new lottery (change) of the second special symbol is executed (S260), and this process ends.

  In the second special symbol variation start process (S260), if the reserved data (various counter values) is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball count storage area 203b, a jackpot determination or a variation pattern selection based on the retained data is performed. The processing is executed. In the second special symbol change start process (S260), if the lottery result is a big hit (or a small hit), the big hit flag 203i (or the small hit flag 203y) is set to ON.

  On the other hand, in the process of S259, if the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj is larger than 0, that is, if it is determined that the special figure 2 is changing now (S259: Yes), then the second A special symbol change execution process is executed (S261). The contents of the second special symbol change executing process (S261) will be described later with reference to FIG. 131. However, the same process as the above-described first special symbol change executing process (S255) is performed. Is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol and executed.

  Then, when the second special symbol variation executing process (S261) is completed, it is determined whether the current value of the special figure 2 variation time counter 203dj is 0 (S262), and if it is determined that the value is 0 (S262). : Yes), the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing is executed (S263), and then the present processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj is not 0 in the process of S262 (S262: No), the process of S263 is skipped and the present process ends.

  The second special symbol change stop processing (S263) will be described later with reference to FIG. 132, but is specified for the second special symbol during the change display, as in the first special symbol change stop processing (S257). When the fluctuating time has elapsed, a process of stopping the fluctuating display with the symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol is executed. In the second special symbol change stop process (S263), when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit, the first special symbol change being executed is forcibly stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a detachment. The processing is executed. Further, when the second special symbol being executed has won a jackpot, a process for deleting information on the jackpot is executed. In addition, in the present embodiment, since it is configured to be able to win a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, if the lottery result of the second special symbol is not a big hit, it corresponds to a small hit or a miss. Is performed.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 119, in this embodiment, the lottery (fluctuation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (fluctuation) of the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously (in parallel). , A variation process (S254 to S258) for the first special symbol and a variation process (S259 to S263) for the second special symbol are executed within one special symbol variation process. Therefore, when it becomes possible to execute a new lottery (change) for each special symbol, the change process can be executed without delay, and a smooth game can be provided.

  In this embodiment, in one special symbol variation process, the variation process relating to the first special symbol is executed (prioritized) before the variation process relating to the second special symbol. In this way, by clearly setting the processing order of each special symbol, even if the fluctuation stop timing of the first special symbol and the fluctuation stop timing of the second special symbol become the same, the second symbol is prioritized. One special symbol fluctuation stop processing is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the variation process related to the first special symbol is configured to be executed prior to the variation process related to the second special symbol. However, the variation process related to the second special symbol is not limited to this. The processing may be configured to be executed prior to the fluctuation processing relating to the first special symbol.

  In addition, in the set game state, a variation process for a special symbol type in which a lottery that is advantageous to the player is executed may be preferentially executed, and the player may be changed according to the set game state. In the case of the pachinko machine 10 in which the special symbol type in which the lottery which is advantageous to the game is executed is switched, it is preferable to provide a means for switching the order of the special symbol type in which the fluctuation process is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the lottery result of the lottery that is advantageous to the player from being erased (discarded) by the lottery result that is disadvantageous to the player.

  Next, the first special symbol change start process (S258), which is one of the special symbol change processes 4 (S151 in FIG. 119), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol change start process (S258).

  In the first special symbol change start process (S258 in FIG. 120), first, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is acquired (S351), and the acquired first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is acquired. It is determined whether the value (N1) is larger than 0 (S352). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol retaining ball number counter 203dd is greater than 0 (S352: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol retaining ball number counter 203dd is decremented by 1 (S353). ).

  Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the reserved ball number after the subtraction is set (S354), and the data stored in the reserved areas 1 to 4 of the first special symbol reserved ball number storage area 203a is transferred to the execution area. The processing for sequentially shifting to the side is performed (S355). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: holding area 1 → execution area, holding area 2 → holding area 1, holding area 3 → holding area 2, holding area 4 → holding area 3.

  Next, a first special symbol big hit determination process is executed (S356). The first special symbol big hit determination process (S356 in FIG. 120) will be described later in detail, but using the value of the first random number counter C1 shifted to the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown), A jackpot determination is performed to determine whether or not a jackpot is based on the set gaming state.

  Next, a first special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (S357). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S357), which will be described in detail later, is based on the result of the hit determination based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown). This is a process for selecting a fluctuation pattern based on each counter value.

  The first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S357) is executed, and then it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203h is greater than 0, that is, whether or not the current gaming state is during the time reduction (S358). ). When it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203h is greater than 0 (S358: Yes), the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is set to ON (S359), and the process proceeds to S360. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S358 that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is not a value larger than 0 (S358: No), this processing ends as it is because the gaming state is the normal state. As described above, when the value of the time reduction counter 203h is a value larger than 0, that is, when the time reduction is being performed, the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is set to ON to start the time reduction when the fluctuation stops. It is possible to determine whether the change is a fluctuation, and to update the time-saving termination condition (subtract the value of the time-saving counter 203h) when the fluctuation stops.

  After executing the above-described processing of S359, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203h is 1 (S360). That is, it is determined whether or not the final change is the end condition of the time saving state. If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 1 (S360: Yes), the time-saving end standby flag 203dm is set to ON (S361), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203h is not 1 in the processing of S360, this processing is terminated as it is not the final fluctuation of the time reduction gaming state.

  Next, a first special symbol jackpot determination process (S356), which is one process of the first special symbol change start process (S258 in FIG. 120), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol big hit determination process (S356).

  In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S356 in FIG. 121), first, each counter value stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is obtained (S451). Then, in order to determine whether or not the time reduction termination condition is satisfied and the state is in a standby state, that is, whether or not the final variation of the time reduction is being executed in the lottery of the second special symbol, the time reduction is ended. It is determined whether the standby flag 203dm is set to ON (S452). When it is determined that the time-saving end standby flag 203dm is on (that is, the second special symbol is undergoing the final fluctuation of the time saving) (S452: Yes), the period of the currently set time-saving state ends. Therefore, the normal state is set in the gaming state storage area 203g (S453), and the time saving end standby flag 203dm and the special figure 2 subtraction flag 203dl are set to off (S454). Next, the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to 0 (S455), a state command indicating that the gaming state has been switched to the normal state is set (S456), and the process proceeds to S457. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S452 that the time-saving end standby flag 203dm is not on (S452: No), the process is not in a state in which the final variation of the time-saving status is being executed, and the processes of S453 to S456 are skipped. The process proceeds to S457.

  As described above, in a state of waiting for the end of the time reduction state (a state in which the final variation of the time reduction state has started in the other special symbol), the game is performed before the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained. By setting the state to the normal state, even though the time-saving game state has ended, until the change of the special symbol in which the final change of the time-saving state is executed ends, the time-saving game state with the other special symbol ends The problem of executing a game based on the game can be eliminated. Therefore, an appropriate game can be provided to the player.

  When the processing of S452 or S453 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the big hit determination value based on the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 23B). Then, the lottery result (determination result) is obtained (S457). Then, it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is a jackpot (S458), and if it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot (S458: Yes), the jackpot flag 203i is set to ON to indicate the jackpot winning of the first special symbol. (S459). In the present embodiment, the jackpot flag 203i is configured to be able to store (set) information indicating the type of the special symbol having won the jackpot in addition to the information indicating the presence or absence of the jackpot. Information indicating the presence or absence of a big hit can be set for each symbol type. Therefore, in the processing of S459, information indicating the big hit is set for the area corresponding to the first special symbol in the big hit flag 203i.

  Then, the lottery result of the first special symbol is set to a big hit (S460), and the big hit symbol of the first special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set based on the value of the acquired hit type counter C2 ( S461), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S458 that the current lottery result is not a jackpot (S458: No), a symbol that is out of the first special symbol is set on the first symbol display device 37 (S462), and the process ends. I do.

  Next, a first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S357), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (S258 in FIG. 120), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S357).

  In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S357 in FIG. 236), first, in the first special symbol big hit determination process (S356 in FIG. 121), it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit, ie, It is determined whether or not the first special symbol jackpot has been set (S551). Here, the determination as to whether or not a big hit is made is based on whether or not the big hit flag 203i is turned on for the first special symbol. The big hit flag 203i is set to ON in the processing of S459 in the first special symbol big hit determination processing (see FIG. 121).

  In the process of S551, when it is determined that the big hit of the first special symbol is set (S551: Yes), the big hit type selection 4 table 202db, the value of the first hit type counter C2 that has been acquired, and Is determined on the basis of (S552). Next, the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the first special symbol execution area is obtained (S553), and the current gaming state (normal state, hiding state) corresponding to the information stored in the gaming state storage area 203g. , And the fluctuation pattern selection 4 table 202dc corresponding to the probability change state) is read (S554).

  Then, a variation pattern is selected based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 acquired in the process of S553 and the variation pattern selection 4 table 202dc read in the process of S554 (S555), and the variation pattern selected in the process of S555 is selected. Based on this, a special figure 1 variation pattern command is set (S556).

  Next, a special figure 1 stop type command indicating a stop symbol of the first special symbol is set (S557), and the start of change of the first special symbol is set on the first symbol display device 37 (S558). Is set to the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di (S559), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S551 that the lottery result of the first special symbol is out of place (that is, the big hit flag 203i for the first special symbol is off) (S551: No), the processing of S552 is performed. The process skips to step S553.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 123, the first special symbol variation executing process (S255) which is one process of the special symbol variation process 4 (S151 in FIG. 119) will be described. FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol change executing process (S255). In the first special symbol variation executing process (S255), a process for updating the variation time of the special symbol variation being executed and a special symbol interrupted by winning a small hit in the second special symbol lottery. A process for restarting the symbol change is executed.

  In the first special symbol change execution process (S255), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to ON. The special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to ON when a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol. In the present embodiment, when one special symbol wins a small hit, if the other special symbol is in a variable display, the other special symbol is changed for a predetermined period (from the small hit winning to the small hit game). (The period until the end of the small hit game), and after the predetermined period elapses (after the end of the small hit game), the other special symbol change is restarted.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a situation in which one special symbol change ends during one small hit game and a game that is difficult for the player to understand is executed. Furthermore, based on the fact that one of the special symbol lottery has won the small hit game, the lottery result of the other special symbol lottery will not be discarded. It is possible to prohibit (suppress) the occurrence of a situation in which the lottery result (the lottery result that is more advantageous to the player than the small win) is discarded.

  In the process of S751, if it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to ON (S751: Yes), a special figure 1 change restart command is set (S752), and the special figure 1 temporary stop flag is set. It is set to off (S753), the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is decremented by 1 (S754), the display of the first special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S755), and this processing ends. .

  In the present embodiment, in the special symbol variation process 4 (see S151 in FIG. 119) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39) executed every 2 milliseconds, the first special symbol variation execution process (See S255 in FIG. 119), and the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is updated (1 subtraction) in the first special symbol fluctuation execution process (see S255 in FIG. 123). It is configured to be. Therefore, for example, when the fluctuation time of 30 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, “15000” is set as the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di, and the value becomes 1 every 2 milliseconds. It is configured to be subtracted.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S751 that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is not set to ON (S751: No), that is, when it is determined that the small special lottery is not won in the lottery of the second special symbol Skips the processing of S752 and S753 and shifts to the processing of S754.

  Next, a first special symbol change stop process (S257), which is one of the special symbol change processes 4 (S151 in FIG. 119), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol change stop process (S257). The first special symbol change stop process (S257) is performed when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 variable time counter 203di is “0”, that is, the change time of the first special symbol (special figure 1). This is a process executed when the time has elapsed.

  When the first special symbol change stop process (S257 in FIG. 124) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 203i is set to ON for the first special symbol (Special Figure 1) (S851). If it is determined that the big hit flag 203i is set to ON for the first special symbol (S851: Yes), then the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df is set to ON (S852), A special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating that the 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df has been turned on is set (S853).

  Next, the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed with a deviated symbol (S854), and the value of the special figure 2 variable time counter 203dj is set to 0 (S855). Thereby, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the jackpot, the variable display of the second special symbol (the special symbol 2) being executed is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the departure (the departure symbol). (Fixed display).

  After the processing of S855, it is determined whether the big hit flag 203i for the second special symbol is set to ON (S856), and if it is determined that the big hit flag 203i is set to ON (S856: Yes), In order to adapt the lottery result of the second special symbol to the second special symbol forcibly stopped and displayed in the process of S854, the big hit flag 203i for the second special symbol is set to OFF (S857). ), Delete the storage information for the special figure 2 jackpot (S858), and shift to the processing of S859. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S856 that the jackpot has not been won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the processes of S857 and 808 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S859.

  In the process of S859, first, the jackpot scenario won in the special symbol fluctuation is set (see 809). Then, the jackpot flag 203i, the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk, and the special figure 2 subtraction flag corresponding to the first special symbol are set. 203dl, the time-saving end standby flag 203dm is turned off, and the value of the time-saving counter 203h is reset (S860). Then, information indicating that the current game state is a big hit (during a big hit game) is stored in the game state storage area 203g (S861). The gaming state storage area 203g is configured to be able to separately store a gaming state (normal state, time saving state) related to a lottery game and a gaming state (big hit middle, small hit middle) related to a hit game, By executing the process of S861, the gaming state (normal state, time-saving state) relating to the lottery game at the timing of winning the big hit and the gaming state indicating that the big hit is being performed are stored.

  With this configuration, at the end of the jackpot game, the gaming state set at the timing of winning the jackpot can be determined.

  When the processing of S861 is completed, a special figure 1 determination command for instructing the sound lamp control device 113 to determine and stop the first special symbol is set (S863), and the first special symbol display device is set. A process for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol which is displayed in a variable at 37 is executed (S864), and the present process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S851 that the big hit flag 203i has not been set to ON for the first special symbol (S851: No), the time saving update processing (S862) is executed, and the above-described processing of S863 is performed. Move on to processing. A detailed description of the time saving update process (S862) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  As described above, in the first special symbol change stop process (S257), the process (S859 to S864) of stopping the variable display with the symbol indicating the result of the first special symbol lottery (first lottery game) is executed. If the current lottery result is a jackpot (S851: Yes), the changing second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed such that the lottery result is out (S854). In this way, in the process of stopping and displaying (fixing display) one special symbol with a symbol indicating a big hit, by executing the process of forcibly stopping the other special symbol that is changing, it is possible to simultaneously execute Appropriate processing can be executed for a plurality of special symbol changes to be executed.

  That is, as in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in a configuration in which the variation process related to the first special symbol and the variation process related to the second special symbol are sequentially executed, the variation process is performed based on the lottery result of the first special symbol. The second special symbol variation process (forced stop process) is executed within the variation process related to the first special symbol, so that the second special symbol is forcibly stopped at a timing when the variation process related to the second special symbol is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the processing relating to the second special symbol from being duplicated, and to smoothly execute the processing.

  In this embodiment, at the timing when one of the special symbols is stopped and displayed with the symbol indicating the big hit, the other special symbol is configured to perform the process of forcibly stopping with the symbol indicating the separation. For example, when it is determined that one special symbol has won a jackpot, that is, when it is determined that the current lottery result is a jackpot in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S356 in FIG. 121) ( In S458 of FIG. 121: Yes), the change of the other special symbol may be forcibly removed and stopped at the symbol. In this case, it is preferable to execute a special change that does not win a jackpot for the other special symbol that is forcibly removed and stopped until the jackpot change of one special symbol ends. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the change in the other special symbol has been forcibly stopped when one special symbol has won a jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to determine that the other special symbol change has been forcibly stopped and displayed, and to prevent the player from knowing whether or not the big hit has been won.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when one special symbol is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a big hit, the lottery result for the other special symbol change being executed is discarded. Without limiting, for example, until the jackpot game based on one special symbol ends, the other special symbol change is interrupted, and after the big hit game ends, the interrupted special symbol change may be restarted. good. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the player from having a mistrust of the pachinko machine 10 due to the discard of the game result of the lottery game executed by the player.

  In addition, in the case of controlling the other special symbol variation being executed based on the lottery result of one special symbol, the variation control content is made different according to the lottery result of the other special symbol being executed. For example, at the timing when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed at the big hit symbol, when the lottery of the second special symbol is out of order (out of change), the lottery is performed. During the fluctuation (hit fluctuation) for indicating that the lottery result of the second special symbol is a hit (big hit, small hit) by executing a forced stop process for discarding the result and forcibly stopping the deviation change. In some cases, after the jackpot game of the first special symbol ends, the interruption process may be executed so that the fluctuation of the second special symbol can be resumed.

  In this case, after the jackpot game of the first special symbol ends, the player is interested in whether a new second special symbol change is executed or the interrupted second special symbol change is resumed. A game can be played. Further, when such a configuration is used, a configuration in which a suggestion effect for suggesting to the player the status of the second special symbol (whether or not interrupted) during the jackpot game of the first special symbol is executed. Good.

  Next, referring to FIG. 125, one of the special symbol change stop processing (first special symbol change stop processing (see S151 in FIG. 119) and second special symbol change stop processing (see S263 in FIG. 132)) Is described (S862 (S1661)). FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing the contents of the time saving update process (S862 (S1661)). In this time saving update process (S862 (S1661)), when the gaming state is the time saving state, the value of the time saving counter 203h is updated when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, and when the end condition is satisfied, the gaming state is changed to the normal state. Execute the process of transitioning to the state. In the following description, a process in the case where the change of the first special symbol is stopped will be described. However, a similar process is executed when the target is the second special symbol.

  When the time saving update process (S864 (S1661)) is executed, first, whether the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is on, that is, the variation of the special symbol executed this time starts to vary during the time saving game. It is determined whether or not it has been performed (S2101). If it is determined that the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is ON, that is, it is determined that the fluctuation has started during the time saving game (S2101: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203h is subtracted (S2102). Then, the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is set to off (S2103), and the processing shifts to S2104. On the other hand, in the processing of S2101, if it is determined that the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is not on (S2101: No), the processing of S2102 to S2106 is skipped because it is not a fluctuation stop that triggers updating of the time saving state. Then, the process proceeds to S2107.

  As described above, at the start of the change of the special symbol, if the gaming state is the time saving state, the subtraction flag of the corresponding symbol type is set to ON to subtract the value of the time reduction counter 203h when the change is stopped. Can be. Therefore, the time-saving game state can be set until the final change of the time-saving game state stops. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a time-saving gaming state that is advantageous to the player as a maximum period.

  Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, when a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the fluctuation of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped, and the fluctuation is not changed until the small hitting game ends. It is configured not to restart. Then, during the small hit game, a V prize is generated, a big hit is awarded, and after the big hit game ends, the temporarily stopped first special symbol restarts to change. Further, as will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 137, the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is set to OFF before the jackpot game is started. Since the subtraction flag 203dk in FIG. 1 is off, the value of the time reduction counter 203h is not subtracted. That is, when the special symbol, which has been temporarily stopped after the end of the big hit game due to the V winning, stops fluctuating, the remaining short time is not subtracted. With such a configuration, in addition to the prescribed time period set by the jackpot type, the remaining fluctuation time of the temporarily stopped special figure is also set as the time reduction game, which is an advantageous period for the player. The time saving state can be set to be as long as possible. Therefore, the interest of the game is improved.

  In the processing of S2104, it is determined whether or not the time reduction end standby flag 203dm is on (S2104). When it is determined that the time saving end standby flag 203dm is ON (S2104: Yes), that is, the change of the special symbol of this time is the final change of the time saving, and in the second special symbol (the other special symbol), If the next change has not been started since the last change of the game, it is the timing to shift the game state to the normal state, so that the time reduction end standby flag 203dm is set to OFF (S2105), and the game state is stored. The normal state is set in the area 203g (S2106). Then, the flow shifts to the process of S2107.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2104 that the time-saving end standby flag 203dm is not on (S2104: Yes), the state in which the final change of the time-saving game is not executed, that is, the state where the time-saving state is continued Therefore, the processing in S2105 to S2106 described above is skipped, and the processing shifts to S2107. As described above, in the simultaneous fluctuation type gaming machine, when the fluctuation that becomes the final fluctuation of the time reduction game is stopped, the fluctuation (the final fluctuation to the next fluctuation) exceeding the specified number of the time reduction gaming state is executed in the other special symbol. It is determined whether or not the game has been executed, and if not executed, the game state is shifted. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a game without a sense of incongruity to the player.

  When any of S2101, S2104, and S2106 ends, the process moves to S2107. In the processing of S2107, a command indicating the value of the time reduction counter 203h and the game state is set (S2107), and this processing ends.

  Next, the second special symbol change start process (S260), which is one of the special symbol change processes 4 (S151 in FIG. 119), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol change start process (S260).

  When the second special symbol change start process (S260) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 change stop flag 203df is set to ON (S951). That is, the lottery of the first special symbol (the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S356 in FIG. 121) executed immediately before this process is executed (within the same special symbol variation process 4 (see S151 in FIG. 119)). )) To determine whether or not a jackpot has been won.

  In the process of S951, when it is determined that the special figure 2 change stop flag 203df is set to ON (S951: Yes), various kinds of processing for starting the change of the second special symbol are skipped, and the special figure 2 The fluctuation stop flag 203df is set to off (S952), and this processing ends. That is, in the present embodiment, by using the special figure 2 change stop flag 203df, in the first special symbol big hit determination process (see S356 in FIG. 121), the first special symbol is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol and the second special symbol big hit symbol is displayed. After the special symbol is released and the stop symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed, execution of a new second special symbol change is prohibited. Thereby, even if the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in the variation process relating to the first special symbol, the control process can be executed without any trouble.

  In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df is set to ON in the processing of S951 (S951: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df is set to OFF. Therefore, by setting the special figure 2 change stop flag 203df, the second special symbol change start processing (S260 in FIG. 126) can be skipped only once.

  This is because the lottery (first special) of the first special symbol executed immediately before the second special symbol variation start process (S260) is executed (within the same special symbol variation process 4 (see S151 in FIG. 119)). Only when the jackpot is won in the symbol jackpot determination process (see S356 in FIG. 121), if the second special symbol change start process (S260 in FIG. 126) executed immediately after is skipped, the first special symbol is thereafter obtained. The big hit game is started based on the big hit information (big hit scenario) set in the big hit determination processing (see S356 in FIG. 121), and the big hit game is executed by the processing of S251 in the special symbol change processing 4 (see S151 in FIG. 119). This is because the second special symbol change start process (S260 in FIG. 119) is not executed until the process is completed.

  With this configuration, it is possible to simplify the process of skipping the variation process of the other special symbol based on the result of the lottery of one special symbol, and thus the control process executed by the main control device 110 Can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a predetermined lottery result (big hit winning), the other special symbol is forcibly displayed (stopped with a missing symbol) and the other special symbol is displayed. Until the jackpot game based on the symbol lottery result is executed, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df is set to prevent the new fluctuation (lottery) of the other special symbol from being executed, and the other special symbol fluctuation processing is performed. Is skipped once, but other configurations may be used.

  In other words, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a predetermined lottery result (big hit lottery), the other special symbol lottery (variation) does not win a big hit until the big hit game based on the big lottery is completed. For example, when a jackpot control process (see S1804 in FIG. 56) for executing a jackpot game is executed in a main process (see FIG. 55) of the main control device 110 described later, FIG. The fluctuation stop flag 203df may be set to be off.

  With this configuration, even if the timing for turning on the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df is set before the timing when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol, the big hit game is executed. The execution of the change (lottery) of the new second special symbol can be prohibited.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the second special symbol variation start process (see S260 in FIG. 126) is executed in a state where the special figure 2 variation stop flag 203df is set to ON, the variation of the second special symbol is performed. The processing is skipped, that is, a new fluctuation is not started (the second special symbol is kept stopped), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df is turned on. If it is set, it may be configured to execute the variable display of the second special symbol for exclusive use.

  In this case, the second special symbol lottery is performed using a special lottery that does not win the jackpot, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed during a period corresponding to the variation pattern determined based on the result of the special lottery. A period until the jackpot game based on the jackpot winning of the first special symbol is executed, and a period until reaching a specific timing during the jackpot game without executing the lottery of the second special symbol may be configured. Alternatively, the second special symbol may be displayed in a variable manner until the jackpot game ends. This makes it difficult for the player to understand that the special symbol change has been forcibly stopped.

  The content of the above-mentioned variation processing for each special symbol is configured to be appropriately output to the sound lamp control device 113 side by setting a command indicating the content, and the third symbol display device is provided. The variable display of the third symbol and the fourth symbol displayed in the 81 main display area Dm can be synchronized with the display mode of each special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 described above. However, while the second special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is forcibly stopped, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command indicating that the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. In such a case, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to execute the variable effect during the forced stop using the third symbol or the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is also good.

  In this manner, the actual second special pattern is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 which is easy for the player to visually recognize, by using the symbols (the third symbol and the fourth symbol) which are displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. Even in the case where the fluctuation effect is executed while the symbol is forcibly stopped, it is difficult for the player to understand that the special symbol fluctuation has been forcibly stopped.

  In the process of S951, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df is not set to ON, that is, the first special symbol is not stopped and displayed as the big hit symbol (S951: No in FIG. 126), The processing of S953 to S959 is performed, and the process proceeds to S960 described later. The processing of S953 to S959 is different from the processing of S351 to S357 of the first special symbol variation start processing (S258 of FIG. 120) by the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203dd and the first special symbol holding. The value of the ball number counter (N1), the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S355), the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S356), the second special symbol holding ball number The counter 203de, the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter, the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S958), and the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S959) Since they are the same except for the changed points, the description is omitted.

  Furthermore, after executing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S909), the processes of S960 to S963 are executed, and this process ends. In the processing of S960 to S963, the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is changed to the special figure 2 subtraction flag 203dl with respect to each processing of S358 to S361 of the first special symbol change start processing (S258 in FIG. 120). Except for the point described above, the description is omitted because it is the same.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, since the variation of the first special symbol and the variation of the second special symbol are performed at the same time, the same processing is executed at the start of the variation of both special symbols. Thus, in the other special symbol, it is possible to prevent such a problem that the number of remaining working hours is not subtracted.

  Next, the second special symbol big hit determination process (S955), which is one process of the second special symbol change start process (S260 in FIG. 126), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S955). The second special symbol jackpot determination process (S955) is different from the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S356 in FIG. 121) in that the type of the target special symbol is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol. And some other processing was added.

  The second special symbol big hit determination process (S955 in FIG. 127) is different from the first special symbol big hit determination process (S356 in FIG. 121) in the following points. That is, in the processing of S1051 corresponding to the processing of S451, the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is changed to the second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown), and S452 to S461. In the processing of S1052 to S1061 corresponding to the processing of the above, when the target is changed from the special figure 1 (first special design) to the special figure 2 (second special design) and the lottery result of the special design is out of order The difference is that the executed processing is changed. Since other points are the same, the description is omitted.

  In the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S955 in FIG. 127), when it is determined that the current lottery is not a jackpot (S1058: No), the special figure 2 departure variation process is executed (S1062), and this process ends. I do.

  This special figure 2 departure variation processing (S1062) is processing executed when the lottery result of the second special symbol is other than a big hit, that is, a small hit or a departure. Although detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. 128, if the lottery result is out of order, the same processing as the processing of S462 of the above-described first special symbol big hit determination processing (S356 of FIG. 121) is executed, If the lottery result is a small hit, a process corresponding to the small hit winning is executed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 128, the details of the special figure 2 deviation variation processing (S1062) will be described. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 deviation change processing (S1062).

  In the special figure 2 deviation fluctuation processing (S1062), first, it is determined whether or not the current lottery result (the lottery result acquired in the processing of S1057 of the second special symbol big hit determination processing (see S955 in FIG. 127)) is a small hit. (S1151).

  If it is determined in the processing of S1151 that the small hit has been won (S1151: Yes), the small hit flag 203dg is set to ON (S1152), and the lottery result of the second special symbol is set to the small hit (S1153). ) Then, the small hit symbol of the second special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S1154), and this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1151, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small hit, that is, it is out of place (S1151: No), the out of place of the second special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is displayed. It is set (S1155), and this processing ends.

  As described above, the special figure 2 departure fluctuation processing (S1062 in FIG. 128) executed as one of the second special symbol fluctuation start processing (see S260 in FIG. 126), that is, the fluctuation of the special symbol (lottery) When it is determined that the small hit is won in the processing executed at the timing of starting the small hit, the small hit flag 203dg is set to ON, and the setting status of the small hit flag 203dg at the timing of stopping the fluctuation of the second special symbol , It is possible to easily execute the processing corresponding to the small hit winning.

  Next, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S959), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (S260 in FIG. 126), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection processing (S959).

  The second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S959 in FIG. 129) differs from the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S357 in FIG. 122) in the following points. In the process of S1251 corresponding to the process of S551, the special figure 1 lottery result (lottery result of the first special symbol) is changed to the special figure 2 lottery result (lottery result of the second special symbol), and S552 to S559. The special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command (the fluctuation pattern command of the first special symbol) is changed to the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command in each processing of S1252 to S1256 and S1258 to S1260 corresponding to each processing of FIG. 2 is different from that shown in FIG. 2 in that the processing of the variation pattern selection processing (S1257) is added. Since other points are the same, detailed description is omitted.

  Next, referring to FIG. 130, the special figure 2 deviation fluctuation pattern executed in the second special symbol fluctuation pattern selection processing (S959), which is one of the second special symbol fluctuation start processing (S260 in FIG. 126). The contents of the selection process (S1257 in FIG. 130) will be described.

  When the second special symbol change start process (S260 in FIG. 126) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the current lottery result is a small hit (S1351). In the process of S1351, a determination is made based on the lottery result acquired in the process of S1057 of the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see S959 of FIG. 127).

  In the processing of S1351, if it is determined that the current lottery result is a small hit (S1351: Yes), then the value of the small hit type counter C5 is acquired (S1352), and the acquired small hit type counter C5 is obtained. The small hit type is selected based on the value (S1353). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since there is only one small hit type, different small hit types are not set based on the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5. In the case of the pachinko machine 10 configured to be able to set the small hit type, a small hit type selection table in which different small hit types are defined with respect to the range of the acquired small hit type counter C5 is provided, and S1352 and S1353. May be configured so as to select a different small hit type by the above processing.

  As described in the present embodiment, by using the processing of S1352 and S1353 in spite of the fact that there is only one small hit type, for example, during the development period of the pachinko machine 10, the specification of the game is changed. Even if it is changed, it is possible to easily respond to the change.

  When the process of S1353 is completed, a variation pattern selection table corresponding to the current game state is read out (S1354), and a small hit is determined based on the read variation pattern selection table and the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1. Is selected (S1355). Then, a special figure 2 variation pattern command indicating the small hit variation pattern selected in the process of S1355 is set (S1356), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1351 that the current lottery result is not a small hit (is out of place) (S1351: No), the process in which the lottery result is out of place (S1357 to S1359) is executed. In the process of S1357, first, a variation pattern selection table corresponding to the game state is read (S1357), and a variation pattern is selected based on the acquired value of the variation type counter CS2 (S1358), and a variation pattern is selected based on the selected variation pattern. FIG. 2 sets the fluctuation pattern command (S1359), and terminates this processing.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 131, the content of the second special symbol change execution process (S261), which is one of the special symbol change processes 4 (S151 in FIG. 119), will be described. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol change executing process (S261). In the present embodiment, since the first special symbol lottery is configured not to win a small hit, in the second special symbol variation executing process (S261), the above-described first special symbol variation executing process (S261) is performed. With respect to (see S255 in FIG. 123), is the flag (special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh) set when a small hit is won (the small hit game executed) in the other special symbol set to ON? The difference is that the process of determining is omitted, and the other points are the same except that the processing target is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol, so that the detailed description is omitted. .

  In the case of the pachinko machine 10 configured to be able to win the small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol, it is determined that the small hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (the small hit game is executed). A flag (for example, special figure 2 temporary stop flag) for indicating is provided, and in the second special symbol variation executing process, the same process as the above-described first special symbol variation executing process (see S255 in FIG. 123). Should be executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 132, a description will be given of the second special symbol variation stop process (S263), which is one of the special symbol variation processes 4 (S151 in FIG. 119). FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol change stop processing (S263). In the second special symbol change stop processing (S263), the processing target is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol in the first special symbol change stop processing (see S257 in FIG. 124). The difference is that the content of the process executed when the lottery result is other than the jackpot is changed, and the process of setting a flag for stopping the change of the other special symbol is omitted.

  That is, the point that the process of S852 in the first special symbol change stop process (see S257 of FIG. 124) is deleted, and the process target of S851 and S853 to S864 are changed to the second special symbol (S1551 and S1553 to S1513). And that when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a jackpot (S1551: No), the special figure 2 departure stop processing (S1558) is executed. Since other points are the same, detailed description is omitted.

  Next, the details of the special figure 2 departure stop processing (S1564) executed in the second special symbol change stop processing (see FIG. 132) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 departure stop processing (S1564). This special figure 2 departure stop processing (S1564) is a special symbol corresponding to the case where the lottery result acquired in the second special symbol big hit determination processing (see S955 in FIG. 127) is other than the big hit (small hit or miss). This is to execute the fluctuation stop processing.

  When the special figure 2 departure stop processing (S1564) is executed, first, it is determined whether the small hit flag 203dg is set to ON (S1651), and if it is determined that the small hit flag 203dg is set to ON, (S1651: Yes), the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to ON (S1652), and a special figure 1 temporary stop command for indicating that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to ON is set (S1652). S1653). The special figure 1 temporary stop command set here is output to the sound lamp control device 113 by an external output process (S1801) executed in the main process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 55). Then, when the special lamp 1 temporary stop command is received on the voice lamp control device 113 side, a temporary stop mode for indicating that the first special symbol (special map 1) has been temporarily stopped (doing) is set. A display command to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set and output to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 executes a process for displaying the temporary stop mode display of the special figure 1 on the third symbol display device 81 based on the received display command. With such a configuration, the player can easily recognize that the first special symbol is temporarily stopped.

  Returning to FIG. 133, the description will be continued. When the process of S1653 is completed, a small hitting scenario (small hitting opening operation scenario) corresponding to the small hitting game is set (S1654), and the small hitting flag 203dg is set to off (S1655). The hit information indicating that the small hit is being played (small hit) is stored in the storage area 203g (S1656), and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed (fixed display) with the symbol indicating the small hit (small hit symbol). Is set (S1657), and the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 stops changing (fixed display) with a small hit symbol (S1658). Then, a time saving update process (S1661 (S863)) for performing a process such as subtraction of the number of remaining working hours is executed, and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if the small hit flag 203dg is set to OFF in the process of S1651 (S1651: No), this indicates that the second special symbol is to be stopped (fixed display) with a symbol indicating a deviation (a deviation symbol). Is set (S1659), and the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is deviated and stopped at the symbol (fixed display) (S1660). Then, the time saving update process is executed (S1661 (S863)), and this process ends.

  It should be noted that the time saving update process (S1661 (S863)) uses the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk referred to in the processing of S2101 and S2104 of the time saving update processing (S863 (S1661)) described above with reference to FIG. The only difference is that the subtraction flag is changed to the 2 subtraction flag 203dl, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the control of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed independently and in parallel, the first The special symbol and the second special symbol can be simultaneously changed and displayed. Therefore, a lottery game of more special symbols can be executed within a predetermined time, and the probability that a big hit is given to the player within the predetermined time can be increased. Therefore, the player can play the game efficiently.

  In addition, even if the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed in a variable manner at the same time and a lottery game is executed, if a jackpot game occurs in one of the first or second special symbols, the other one is used. Since the change display of the special symbol is stopped, the player can concentrate on the big hit game.

  In the present embodiment, when a symbol indicating a big hit (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed in one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the other special symbol is forcibly removed and stopped at the symbol. Although the display is configured to be displayed, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the other special symbol may be variably displayed while being temporarily stopped or the measurement of the fluctuation time is interrupted. In such a case, since the special symbol that has been temporarily stopped is stopped in a display mode or a notification mode in which the player can know that the temporary stop is being performed, the player loses the lottery game in the middle of the variable display. Can be grasped that it is not, you can play a jackpot game with confidence.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 134, a description will be given of the start winning process 4 (S152), which is one of the timer interrupt processes (FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the start winning process 4 (S152). In the start winning process 4 (S152 in FIG. 134), it is determined whether a ball has entered (start winning) the special figure entrance 64 or the second entrance 1645. The acquired counter values are stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da or the second special symbol holding ball storage area up to the upper limit number of holdings (up to four for each of the special figure entrance 64 and the second entrance 1645). This is a process of storing the data in each of 203 db.

  When the respective counter values obtained based on the reserved balls are stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db, respectively, the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da. Alternatively, based on each counter value stored in each of the second special symbol holding ball storage areas 203db, processing (so-called pre-reading processing) of predicting the result of the determination of the success or failure, the selected variation pattern, or the like is performed in advance. . Hereinafter, the start winning process 4 (S152 in FIG. 134) will be described.

  In the start winning process 4 (S152 in FIG. 147), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered (start winning) the special figure ball opening 64 which is the first starting port (S1751). Here, the entry of a ball into a ball detection switch (not shown) provided in the special figure entrance 64 is detected. It is determined that the ball has entered the special figure entrance 64 (there is a start winning) (S1751: Yes), and the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is obtained (S1752). It is determined whether the obtained value (N1) is less than 4 (S1753).

  That is, it is determined whether or not the number of reserves for the special figure entrance 64 is less than the upper limit of four at the present time (that is, whether the number of reserves is not stored up to the upper limit). When it is determined that the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1753: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is added by 1 (S1754), and the sound lamp control device 113 A reserve ball number command for notifying the reserved number of special figure entrances 64 (the number of lottery rights reserved for the first special symbol) is set for the special figure entrance port 64 (S1755).

  Then, each value of various counter values (first random number counter C1, first hit type counter C2, variation type counter CS1) is read out (obtained) from the counter buffer, and the first special symbol holding ball execution area of the RAM 203 is read out. Each of them is held (stored) in the storage area corresponding to the number of held balls 203a (S1756).

  Next, a first prefetching process is executed (S1775). The first pre-reading process (S1757) will be described later with reference to FIG. 135. However, based on the counter values newly stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da, the result of the hit / fail determination and the variation pattern to be determined. , A process of determining a stop type and the like is executed. In the present embodiment, it is configured to execute the process of determining the result of determination as to whether or not to perform the determination, the variation pattern to be determined, the type of stop, and the like based on each of the newly stored counter values. For example, when there is a new start winning, for example, the result of determining whether or not all the reserved memories stored (stored) in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da, the determined fluctuation pattern, A process for determining the type of stop or the like may be performed.

  In the present embodiment, when new information (winning information) is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da, that is, when a lottery right for the first special symbol is newly acquired, the first special symbol is obtained. The content of the lottery right (winning information) is determined in advance. However, the present invention is not limited to this. If the lottery right of the first special symbol is newly acquired, the lottery right of the second special symbol (winning information) is obtained. ) May be determined in advance.

  Then, after executing the process of S1775, the process of S1758 is executed next. When it is determined in the processing of S1751 that the ball has not entered the special figure entrance 64 (S1751: No), or in the processing of S1753, the number of reserves for the special figure entrance 64 at present is the upper limit. If it is determined that the value is a value (S1753: No), the process of adding the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1758.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is added, the first look-ahead process (S1775) based on the added information on winning (winning information) is performed. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, when it is determined in the process of S1753 that the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203dd is the upper limit number (4) (S1753) : No), that is, when a ball is thrown into the special figure entrance 64 with the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol reaching the upper limit, the first look-ahead processing (S1775) can be executed. You may comprise so that it may be possible. Thereby, even in the state where the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol has reached the upper limit, the player can continue to play the game in order to execute the pre-reading process. In addition, when a ball is inserted into the special figure entrance 64 with the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol reaching the upper limit, an added value can be given. It is possible to prevent the willingness to play when the ball enters the special figure entrance 64 with the number of balls reaching the upper limit.

  Next, the processes in S1758 to S1764 are the same as the processes performed for winning the ball to the first starting port (special figure entrance 64) performed in the processes in S1751 to S1775. The only difference is that the process is performed on the second entrance 1645, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, in the present embodiment, since it is configured that the small hit can be won by the lottery of the second special symbol, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is also acquired in the process of S1763.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 135, a description will be given of the first prefetching process (S1775), which is one process of the start winning process 4 (S152 of FIG. 134). FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing the first prefetching process (S1775).

  In the first look-ahead process (S1775 in FIG. 135), first, a random number counter C1 per first, a counter type C1 per first, which are various counter values from the storage area newly stored in the first special symbol holding storage area 203a. Then, each value of the variation type counter CS1 is read (S1821). Then, the read data is stored in an area having the smallest winning order among the empty storage areas in the prefetch pending storage area (S1822).

  Next, based on each counter value newly stored in the pre-reading suspension storage area, the result of the rejection determination is determined. In this case, both the determination as to whether the special symbol is in the low-probability state and the determination as to whether the special symbol is in the high-probability state are determined. This is because the jackpot determination is based on the timing when a new hold is generated (the timing when a new hold (winning information) is stored in the first special symbol holding storage area 203a) and the winning information newly held this time. Since a time lag occurs at the execution timing, it is possible to predict the gaming state (probability state of the special symbol) set at the timing at which the jackpot determination based on the winning information newly held this time is executed. Because it is difficult.

  Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol are executed simultaneously (in parallel). And the fluctuation time set in accordance with the result of the lottery of each special symbol is set so as to be variable depending on the number of reserved memories (number of reserved symbols) at the time of the special symbol lottery. This is because it is difficult to determine in advance the timing at which the fluctuation (lottery) of the game starts.

  If it is determined that the result of the determination in the process of S1823 is a jackpot (a jackpot only in the low-probability state, a jackpot only in the high-probability state, a jackpot in any of the low-probability state and the high-probability state) (S1823: Yes), A first winning command indicating a winning condition (a gaming state set at the time of a lottery) and a jackpot type in the case of winning is set (S1824), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the determination result in the processing of S1823 is not a big hit (the special symbol is out of the high probability state or the low probability state) (S1823: No), the first winning command indicating the out is set. (S1825), this process ends.

  Here, the first winning command set in the process of S1824 or S1825 includes common information as information in addition to the information for indicating the above-described determination result of the above-mentioned result (information giving a different meaning based on the determination result of the success or failure). The information is also set to include information for indicating the values of the various counter values read by the processing of S1821. Then, the winning command set in this process is output to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S2401) executed in the main process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 54).

  When receiving the winning command, the sound lamp control device 113 changes the display mode of the holding ball based on various information included in the winning command (for example, changing the color of the holding ball to a color different from the normal color). An effect (pre-reading effect) of displaying (variably) or displaying a notice symbol or the like before the start of the change and suggesting the result of the determination to the player can be executed.

  In the present embodiment, when the pre-reading process is executed, the result of the determination is determined by determining whether or not the special symbol is in the high probability state and the result of the determination in the low probability state of the special symbol. Is configured to set the winning command based on the determination value. For example, the determination value (for example, whether the special symbol is in the high probability state or the low probability state is determined to be the big hit, (A value of the first random number counter C1), and a winning command indicating a special symbol big hit may be set only when the determination value is read.

  With such a configuration, a winning command indicating a jackpot is output to the sound lamp control device 113 only when it is determined in advance that the jackpot is a specific jackpot. It is possible to give a sense of expectation of winning a jackpot to the fluctuation.

  Further, the game state at the time of performing a special symbol lottery based on the hold memory (winning information) stored (stored) in the first special symbol hold storage area 203a is accurately determined, and based on the game state. You may be comprised so that execution / non-permission judgment may be performed. In this case, the selection of the variation pattern is not made variable depending on the number of reserved balls, but can be determined by selecting a fixed variation pattern regardless of the number of reserved balls at the start of the variation. When performing the pre-reading, the game state at the start of the change can be determined by determining the order of the change until the reserved ball starts to change based on the information stored and stored.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a new hold storage (winning information) is stored (stored) in the first special symbol holding storage area 203a, a prefetching process based on the winning information is executed. In the pre-reading process of the main control device 110, the winning information newly stored (stored) in the first special symbol holding storage area 203a is not limited to this. Information indicating the contents (each counter value) of the (pending storage) is set as a winning command, and the result of the hit determination is predicted based on the information included in the winning command received by the voice lamp control device 113 side. good.

  With such a configuration, the processing load on main controller 110 can be reduced. Further, the sound lamp control device 113 executes a process of determining whether or not to execute a prefetch effect, and when it is determined that the prefetch effect is to be executed, information included in the winning command received from the main control device 110 is determined. It may be configured to perform analysis (prediction of the result of determination of success or failure). As a result, when the pre-reading effect is not performed, a specific pre-reading process (prediction of the result of the determination of success / failure) is not performed, so that it is possible to suppress execution of useless control in the pachinko machine 10. In addition, it is possible to suppress a problem in which the result of the prefetching process executed untitled is illegally obtained by the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 136, a description will be given of the second prefetching process (S1764), which is one of the startup winning processes 4 (S152 of FIG. 134). FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing the second prefetching process (S1764). The second prefetching process (S1764 in FIG. 134) is based on the fact that the first prefetching process (S1775 in FIG. 133) enters a ball (starting prize) in the first starting port (special figure entrance port 64). The processing is to determine (read ahead) the pending data (prize information) in advance and perform various determinations. On the other hand, the target to be determined is determined to be the second start from the prize information based on the fact that the first start port has won the prize. Only the point is changed to the winning information based on the start winning at the mouth (the second ball entrance 1645), and the other processes are the same, so that the detailed description is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 137, details of the V passage processing 4 (S153) in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing the contents of the V passage processing 4 (S153). In the V passing process 4 (S153) in the fourth embodiment, a small hit is won by the lottery of the second special symbol in the V passing process (see S153 in FIG. 52) in the first embodiment. When a V prize occurs during a game, a process of setting the time-saving end standby flag 203dm and the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk to off is added. Since other processes are the same, the same reference numerals are given and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the V passing process 4 (S153), first, the processes of S1501 to S1502 described above are executed, and when it is determined that the V validity period is in progress (S1502: Yes), it is determined whether a small hit is occurring (S1571). ). If it is determined that the small hit is occurring (S1571: Yes), the above-described processes of S1504 to S1506 are executed, and the flow shifts to the process of S1572. On the other hand, if it is determined that the small hit is not occurring (S1571: No), the processing of S1504 to S1506 and S1572 to S1575 is skipped, and the processing shifts to S1509.

  In the processing of S1572, it is determined whether or not the time reduction end standby flag 203dm is on (S1572). If it is determined that the time-saving end standby flag 203dm is ON (S1572: Yes), a new time-saving state period is set after the end of the jackpot game awarded from the V winning, so the time-saving end standby flag is set. 203dm is turned off (S1573). As described above, when a small hit is won in the final fluctuation of the time saving game and a V prize is generated and a big hit is given, a new time saving period is given. Therefore, when a V prize is won, it is possible to prevent a problem that the game is immediately shifted to the normal game state after a new time-saving period is set by setting the time-saving end standby flag 203dm to off.

  After executing the processing of S1572 or S1573, the flow shifts to the processing of S1574. In the process of S1574, it is determined whether the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is on (S1574). That is, it is determined whether the first special symbol has been changed in parallel with the current change of the second special symbol, and the change of the first special symbol has not been stopped yet but has been temporarily stopped. . When it is determined that the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is on (S1574: Yes), the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is set to off (S1575), and the process shifts to S1509. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is off (S1574: Yes), the process of S1575 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1509.

  In the present embodiment, it is configured to win a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol. Then, when the lottery of the first special symbol is being executed at the time of winning the small hit, the change of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped. Then, the special symbol that has been temporarily stopped after the small hit game is finished is configured to resume the change, but in the present embodiment, there is a case where a V prize is won during the small hit game and a big hit is awarded. The lottery of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped during the jackpot game. Then, the fluctuation of the special symbol that has been temporarily stopped after the end of the jackpot game is resumed. However, in the present embodiment, the number of remaining time reductions is subtracted when the fluctuation is stopped. However, there is a problem that the number is reduced.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the V prize occurs during the small hit, the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is set to OFF, so that the time reduction period is not reduced when the temporarily stopped fluctuation is stopped. Therefore, in addition to the period in which the time reduction is specified, the remaining fluctuation time of the temporarily stopped symbol can be set as the time reduction period for the player. With such a configuration, it is possible to set a longer time reduction period that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to provide joy for a longer period.

  In the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the other special symbol, the variation of the other special symbol is forcibly stopped (discarded) outside the fluctuation. In addition, when a small win is won, the change of the other special symbol is temporarily stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the small win is won, the change of the other special symbol is changed. May be configured to be discarded. With this configuration, after a jackpot game is awarded due to a V prize, it is possible to prevent the player from winning a jackpot due to the temporarily stopped fluctuation and giving an excessive privilege to the player.

  In addition, when one of the special symbols wins a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player, the other special symbol wins a small jackpot, whereby the disadvantageous jackpot fluctuation can be discarded. Therefore, more various game characteristics can be provided to the player.

  As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the gaming machine is such that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changed in parallel, and when the small hit is won, the other symbol is temporarily stopped. Then, if a V prize occurs during the small hit game and a big hit is awarded, the symbol temporarily stopped after the end of the big hit game resumes the change. Further, in the present embodiment, when the game state is the time reduction state at the start of the fluctuation, the flag indicating that the value of the time reduction counter is to be subtracted at the start of the fluctuation is set to ON, and the fluctuation is set. When stopped, the value of the time reduction counter 203h is updated.

  Therefore, by setting the subtraction flag to OFF when the V winning occurs, the fluctuation of the special symbol that has been temporarily stopped is restarted. When the fluctuation is stopped, the time reduction counter is not decremented. That is, when the symbol that has been temporarily stopped resumes fluctuation and stops, the shortened time period is not updated. Therefore, in addition to the previously set short time period, the player is required to save the temporarily stopped special symbol. A fluctuation period can also be set. Therefore, it is possible to set the time shortening period that is advantageous to the player as long as possible.

  In the present embodiment, the type of the jackpot to be awarded by the V prize is set to one. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of jackpots may be provided. In such a configuration, it is preferable to provide a jackpot type that is advantageous for the player and a jackpot type that is disadvantageous for the player. With this configuration, the player can execute the game while not only determining whether or not the V prize is generated but also being interested in the type of the jackpot to be provided.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the configuration is such that one small hit type is won. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of small hit types may be provided. Further, the lottery of the first special symbol may be configured to win the small hit. By providing a plurality of small hit types in this manner, a player can execute a game while expecting a small hit that is more likely to generate a V winning.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to be changed in parallel. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured to be executed (so-called winning order change). In addition, when comprised in this way, it is good to comprise so that the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol may differ in the degree of advantage of the big hit type to be won. With such a configuration, the player can execute the game while desiring to win the jackpot when the lottery of the special figure that is more advantageous is being performed, so that the player is nervous. Games can be offered.

  In the present embodiment, in the lottery of the second special symbol, the fluctuation of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped when a small hit is won. However, by providing a plurality of small hit types, the first special symbol is provided. The small hit which discards the fluctuation of the symbol (forcibly stops due to the deviation) and the small hit which is temporarily stopped may be set separately. In the case of such a configuration, when a change in the other special symbol wins a jackpot that is disadvantageous for the player, it is good to execute an effect that prompts the player to discard it. . With such a configuration, various game properties can be provided to the player.

  In the present embodiment, two types of game states are set (normal state, time reduction state), but three types (normal state, time reduction state, probability change state) may be set, or four types (normal state, time reduction state, (Probable change state, latent state). Also, two or less types may be used.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the game is executed so that the game ball flows down the left area of the game board 13 irrespective of the game state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the right area of the game board 13 is not limited to this. May be executed. Then, the switching of the game method may be set based on the game state. Further, in the case of such a configuration, it is preferable to execute a guidance display mode for indicating a current game method to a player. By this guide display mode, the player can grasp not only the game method but also the current game state.

  As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the update timing of the time saving state, that is, the timing of subtracting the number of times of saving time, and the timing of determining whether the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied are made different. As a configuration, after the time-saving state is updated, a configuration for determining whether the end condition of the time-saving state is satisfied is used.However, without being limited to this, for example, it is first determined whether the end condition of the time-saving state is satisfied. It is also possible to configure so as to execute the time-saving state update process when the determination is made and the termination condition is not satisfied. In addition, although the process of subtracting the number of time savings is performed after the special figure lottery is executed, the special figure lottery may be executed after the number of time savings is subtracted.

  Further, in the fourth embodiment, even if a small hit is won in the special symbol final variation in the time saving state (the special symbol variation executed in a state where the time saving ending condition is satisfied), the special symbol variation is achieved. Is configured to end the time saving state at the timing when the stop display is performed. However, without being limited to this, for example, if a small hit is won in the final fluctuation of the special symbol, the time saving until the small hitting game ends. The configuration may be such that the state does not end. That is, in the state where the time saving end condition is satisfied, at the timing of determining whether the time saving end condition is satisfied, if the switching condition (the result of the special symbol lottery is a small win), the time saving end condition is satisfied. It is preferable to switch the timing of determining the establishment (delay at the end of the small hitting game). Accordingly, the period during which the time reduction state is continued can be varied based on the result of the special symbol lottery during the time reduction state, so that the player can play the game with a sense of expectation until the end. .

  It should be noted that other than the above-described contents (small winning) may be used as the above-described switching condition. For example, in a state where the time-saving end condition is satisfied, at the timing of determining whether the time-saving end condition is satisfied, the normal symbol fluctuation The execution condition or the fact that the game per game is being executed may be set as the switching condition, and at the timing of determining the establishment of the time reduction end condition, the special symbol reservation or the ordinary symbol stored and stored. The fact that the winning information included in the hold includes specific information (winning information) may be set as the switching condition. By providing a plurality of switching conditions in this manner, it is possible to make it difficult for a player to understand the timing at which the time saving state ends, and to improve the interest of the game.

<Combination modification of the Puden winning device 640>
Next, a modified example will be described with reference to FIG. In the above-described first embodiment, a special power operation port 643 is provided in the general power winning apparatus 640, and when a ball that has won the general power prize apparatus 640 during the per-game drawing wins in the special power operation port 643, an accessory is provided. Configure to run a hit game. Further, in the second embodiment described above, in order to solve the problem that can occur in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, that is, the problem that the game motivation is reduced due to the monotonization of the game during the time reduction state, A plurality of special power operation ports (special power operation port 643, second special power operation port 1643) are provided in the general power winning device 640, and according to the special power operation port where the ball has won, a V jackpot game is easily executed. The game and the big hit game, in which the V jackpot game is hardly executed, can be executed.

  Furthermore, in the first embodiment or the second embodiment described above, the special symbol change being executed is interrupted (the process of subtracting the change time of the special symbol change is interrupted) when the execution of the bonus game is executed. However, since the period of the time reduction state is configured to be longer, it is advantageous for the player to execute a lot of games per character during the time reduction state, and the game during the time reduction state becomes monotonous. Was. On the other hand, in the above-described third embodiment, the V jackpot type is configured to be selected based on the fact that the ball has won the special power operation port 643, and the bonus hit type is determined according to the selected V jackpot type. Any one of a pattern for interrupting a special symbol change being executed at the time of playing a game, a pattern for discarding, and a pattern for discarding and also terminating the time saving state is executed, and in the time saving state, By providing a new playability that allows a player to select whether or not to execute a winning game, the game during the time reduction state is prevented from becoming monotonous.

  In addition, in the above-described first to third embodiments, the special power prize device 640 is provided with the special power operation port 643, and when a ball wins in the special power operability port 643, a game per accessory is executed. On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, a second entrance 1645 serving as a trigger for executing the second special symbol lottery is provided in the general winning award device 640, and the first embodiment to the third embodiment described above are different from the first embodiment. The same playability is configured to be realized by a so-called simultaneous fluctuation type specification in which the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol are executed in parallel.

  On the other hand, in the present modified example, as shown in FIG. 138, based on the configuration of the general winning award device 640 included in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment described above (see FIG. 88), the second special power operating port is used. A second ball entrance 1645 is provided in place of the 1643 so that a ball won in the general winning device 640 can enter the special power operation port 643 or the second ball entrance 1645. Is different from the other embodiments.

  Then, a small hitting game executed when a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery executed based on the ball entering the second entrance 1645, and a ball wins in the special power operation port 643. The V winning device 65 is configured to be opened with the same content in the bonus game executed based on this.

  With such a configuration, when the V winning device 65 is opened by the small hitting game, the second special symbol lottery is executed, so that the end condition of the time saving state is the same as in the above-described fourth embodiment. In contrast, when the V winning device 65 is opened for the bonus per game, the element relating to the time saving end condition is not updated. Therefore, the number of times the V winning device 65 has been opened and the number of times that the element that satisfies the time saving end condition is updated no longer match, so that the player is made aware of the period until the time saving state ends. Can be difficult.

  In this modification, an example in which the same end condition as that of the above-described fourth embodiment is set as the end condition of the time saving state is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The time saving termination condition may be satisfied even when the number of times reached reaches a specific number (for example, 50 times). With this configuration, it is determined whether the time reduction termination condition is satisfied first based on the lottery of the second special symbol, or whether the time reduction termination condition is satisfied based on the execution of the bonus per game. Can be played while the player is predicted.

  In this case, as an effect performed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, based on the time saving end condition that is established based on the lottery of the second special symbol and the execution of the per-accessory game. A suggestion effect for suggesting to the player which of the time reduction end conditions to be satisfied is a situation in which the time reduction end condition is likely to be satisfied (for example, an effect indicating the number of times until each time reduction end condition is satisfied). It is good to be constituted to perform. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to know the period until any of the time-saving end conditions is satisfied, so that it is possible to make the player feel excited about the flow destination of the ball that has won the general winning award device 640.

  As shown in FIG. 138, in the present modification, the special power operation port 643 and the second ball entry port 1645 are provided in the general power winning device 640, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the second special power operation port 1643 is also provided. A configuration may be adopted in which the ball that has won the general winning award device 640 wins any one of the above-described three.

  Further, in the case of using the configuration of the present modified example, the small hit game is executed based on the ball entering the second entrance 1645, and the ball wins in the special power operation port 643. The process for the special symbol change during execution may be different from the case where the per-accessory game is executed on the basis of, for example, when the small hit game is executed, the per-accessory game is executed. It is easier to discard the running special symbol fluctuation than in the case, and to make it easier to interrupt the running special symbol fluctuation when the small hitting game is executed than when the small hitting game is executed. It is good to configure.

  In this modification, a ball may be won to the special power operation port 643 in a state where the first special symbol change and the second special symbol change are being executed. In this case, both the first special symbol fluctuation and the second special symbol fluctuation are interrupted. Then, after the bonus game per end, the suspended first special symbol change and the second special symbol change are restarted. If the second special symbol change after the resumption is a small hit, if the small hit game is executed based on the small hit, the running first special symbol change is interrupted, or , It is configured to be discarded.

  As described above, the first special symbol change (lottery), the second special symbol change (lottery), the ball prize in the special power operation port 643, and three types of games can be simultaneously executed. It is possible to interrupt the first special symbol change in which the change time longer than the second special symbol change is easily selected in a plurality of times. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a surprising game about the timing and the period during which the first special symbol change is interrupted during the time saving state.

  Further, in the present modification, the ball winning in the general winning award device 640 is configured to be able to win in the special power operation port 643 or the second ball opening port 1645, but is not limited thereto. Alternatively, the configuration of the game board 13 may be changed so that the player can play the game aiming at the second ball entrance 1645 or the special power operation port 643. Specifically, the special power activation device 640 includes a special power activation device. An opening 643 may be provided, and a second entrance 1645 may be provided in the right area (see FIG. 2) of the game board 13. With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with a pleasure of selecting a game method.

<Fifth embodiment>
Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 139 to 143. The fifth embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that a method of setting various commands for outputting the contents of control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 is described. The difference is that they are different and that a part of the control processing executed when the voice lamp control device 113 receives various commands output from the main control device 110 has been changed. is there. The same control contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the first embodiment described above, the production mode of the effect (V rush) according to the special symbol change in the time reduction state (the low probability state of the special symbol, the high probability state of the ordinary symbol) is changed to the remaining period of the time reduction state (the time reduction). In order to variably set according to the special symbol change executed during the state), the sound lamp control device is set based on information (state command) output from the main control device 110 when the time saving state is set. The period until the time saving state ends on the 113 side, that is, the number of time savings (the number of times the special symbol fluctuates) set as the end condition of the time saving state is stored, and information (fluctuation pattern command) indicating the start of the special symbol fluctuating is stored. When received, by executing a process of updating the number of times saved, the voice lamp control device 113 can determine the remaining period of the time saved state.

  With such a configuration, the first embodiment in which the timing of updating the number of times saved (at the start of the special symbol change) and the timing of determining whether the time saving condition is satisfied (at the time of stopping the special symbol change) are different. In the above, without setting a dedicated command on the main control device 110 side, that is, a special symbol lottery such as a status command to be set when the game status is changed or a variation pattern command to be set when the variation of the special symbol is started. By using only the command indicating the content of the game using, the remaining period of the time reduction state can be grasped on the voice lamp control device 113 side, and the effect according to the lapse of the period during the time reduction state can be set. Was something.

  However, in the control contents used in the above-described first embodiment, the update state of the gaming state in the time saving state is managed (temporarily stored) in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 having no backup function. Therefore, for example, when the power supplied to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off during a period in which the time saving state is set (a power failure occurs), and then the power supply is restarted, the audio lamp control device Various kinds of information temporarily stored in the RAM 223 on the 113 side are cleared (initialized), and there is a problem that the voice lamp control device 113 cannot determine the update state of the gaming state in the time saving state. .

  On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, when the main control device 110 executes the process of starting the special symbol variation (the process of setting the variation pattern command), the command indicating the update result of the number of time savings (the time saving command is executed). ) Can be set, and a command (time saving continuation command) for indicating the end determination result of the time saving state is set when executing the process of stopping the special symbol change during execution (the process of setting the fixed command). It is configured as follows.

  Then, the variation pattern command and the number of times saved command are configured to be output at the same timing, and the fixed command and the time saving continuation command are configured to be output at the same timing. Further, when the fluctuation pattern command is received on the voice lamp control device 113 side, it is determined whether or not a time saving command is also received, and the current time saving situation can be determined based on the determination result. When a command is received, it is determined whether or not a time saving continuation command is received, and the current time saving status can be determined based on the determination result.

  With this configuration, the status of the time saving state can be determined on the side of the sound lamp control device 113 by the combination of the commands set by the main control device 110 and received by the sound lamp control device 113. Even when a power failure occurs during the symbol change display, the voice lamp control device 113 can determine the status of the time saving state based on the command output from the main control device 110.

  In addition, since the configuration is such that the status of the time saving state is determined based on the combination of the commands received at the same timing, the main control device 110 side sets each command to indicate the status of the time saving state. Also, the types of commands set in main controller 110 can be reduced, and the processing load of control processing in main controller 110 can be reduced.

<About the control processing contents of the main control device in the fifth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 139 to 141, of the control processing contents of the main control device 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, points different from the above-described first embodiment will be described. In the fifth embodiment, a special symbol start process 5 (see S235 in FIG. 139) is replaced with a special symbol start process (see S235 in FIG. 139) in place of the special symbol change start process (see S205 in FIG. 41). The special symbol variation stop process 5 (see S238 in FIG. 140) is replaced with the normal symbol variation process 5 (see S106 in FIG. 48) instead of the process (see S208 in FIG. 45). (See FIG. 2), and otherwise the same. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the first embodiment described above, when the time reduction state (the low probability state of the special symbol, the high probability state of the ordinary symbol) is set, when the variation of the special symbol is started, the number of times of reduction (the value of the time reduction counter 203h) is set. ) Is executed (see S205 in FIG. 139) to determine whether the condition for terminating the time-saving state is satisfied when stopping the change of the special symbol (FIG. 45). (See S208).

  Further, in the first embodiment described above, in order to manage the status of the time saving state on the sound lamp control device 113 side, the status command output from the main control device 110 (the status command set in the process of S1916 in FIG. 56). ) And a fluctuation pattern command (the special figure fluctuation pattern command set in S506 of FIG. 43).

  On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, when the special symbol starts to change or when the special symbol stops changing, in addition to the commands indicating the start and stop of the special symbol change, the state of the time reduction state (remaining time reduction) ) Is set, and the information for managing the state of the time saving state stored on the side of the sound lamp control device 113 is deleted (for example, the sound lamp control device due to a power failure or the like). Even if the information stored in the RAM 223 of the CPU 113 is erased), the status of the time reduction state (the number of remaining working hours) on the sound lamp control device 113 side based on various commands output from the main control device 110 side. Is configured to be able to be grasped.

  First, the contents of the special symbol change start process 5 (S235) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol change start process 5 (S235). In the special symbol change start process 5 (S235), a process for updating the time reduction state at the start of the special symbol change is different from the special symbol change start process (see S205 in FIG. 41) of the above-described first embodiment. Are different, and the others are the same. The same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As described above, in the above-described first embodiment, information indicating the processing content (update result) of the processing for updating the time saving state executed by the main control device 110 is output to the sound lamp control device 113. Since there is no need to perform this process, a process (time saving) for temporarily storing whether or not the current special symbol variation is the final variation in the time saving state (until the special symbol variation executed this time is stopped and displayed) is performed. The processing of updating the value of the counter 203h and the processing of setting the time reduction end flag 203j) are executed.

  On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, a command for indicating the number of times of special symbols (remaining number of times reduced) is set and output to the audio lamp control device 113.

  The processing content of the special symbol change start process 5 (S235) will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 139. First, the same as the special symbol change start process of the first embodiment (see S205 of FIG. 41). The processing from S301 to S308 is executed. If the value of the time-saving counter 203h is larger than 0 in the process of S308, that is, if it is determined that the current time is in the time-saving state (S308: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 203h is subtracted (S371). ), It is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203h after the subtraction is 0 (S372).

  If it is determined in the process of S372 that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is not 0 (is 1 or more), the value of the time-saving counter 203h after subtraction, that is, a time-saving number command indicating the remaining number of working hours is set (S373). Then, the present process ends. The time reduction command set in the process of S373 is executed by the main control at the same timing as the special figure variation pattern command (see S506 in FIG. 43) set in the special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S307 in FIG. 43). An external output process (see S1801 in FIG. 55) executed in the main process of the device 110 (see FIG. 55) is output to the sound lamp control device 113.

  Although a detailed description will be given later, in the fifth embodiment, in the control processing of the sound ramp control device 113, a time-saving number command is also issued when a fluctuation pattern command (a special figure fluctuation pattern command) is received during the time-saving state. It is configured to determine whether or not it is received, and to determine the number of time savings (remaining time savings) corresponding to the current special symbol change based on the determination result.

  Further, in the fifth embodiment, in the process of S372 in FIG. 139, if the value of the time saving counter 203h after the update (after the subtraction) is determined to be 1 or more (S372: No), the command of the number of times In the control processing of the sound ramp control device 113, when the variation pattern command (special figure variation pattern command) is received during the time reduction state, the time reduction command is not received in addition to the variation time command. Can be determined to be the final fluctuation of the special symbol in the time saving state.

  Returning to FIG. 139, the description will be continued. In the process of S372, when it is determined that the value of the updated time-saving counter 203h is 0 (S372: Yes), that is, when the special symbol variation executed this time is the final variation of the time-saving state, the above-described process is performed. As in the first embodiment, the time saving end flag 203j is set to ON (S311), and the process ends.

  Although a detailed description will be given later, in this embodiment, in addition to the case where the value of the time reduction counter 203h is larger than 0 (more than 1), even if the value of the time reduction counter 203h is 0, the time reduction end flag As long as 203j is set to ON, a normal symbol high probability state is set. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 139, when the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0 at the special symbol change start timing (S308: Yes), the process of always subtracting the value of the time-saving counter 203h is executed. Control processing can be shared.

  Further, as described above, in the fifth embodiment, when the value of the time saving counter 203h after the subtraction (after the update) is larger than 0 (1 or more), the command for the number of time savings is set, and after the subtraction (after the update). When the value of the time reduction counter 203h is 0, the time reduction number command is not set. In addition, the time reduction command is set in the same process (special symbol variation start process) as the process of setting the special symbol variation pattern command (special symbol variation pattern command) (see S506 in FIG. 43). In the external output process (S1801 in FIG. 55) executed in the main process (refer to FIG. 55) of the main controller 110, the main controller 110 is configured to output to the sound lamp controller 113 at the same timing. .

  With such a configuration, when the variation pattern command is received in a state where the time saving state is set, the voice lamp control device 113 also determines whether or not a time saving number command has been received. This makes it possible to determine whether or not the special symbol change executed this time is the final change in the time saving state. In addition, when the time reduction command is received, it is possible to determine the remaining time (remaining time reduction) of the time reduction state updated by executing the special symbol change this time.

  Further, when the value of the updated time saving counter 203h becomes 0, that is, when the special symbol variation executed this time is the final variation in the time saving state, the configuration is such that the number of time savings commands is not set. If the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command in a state where the time reduction state is set and also does not receive the time reduction number command, it determines that it is the final fluctuation of the time reduction state. Thus, an effect mode corresponding to the final fluctuation of the time saving state is set. As described above, when the final variation of the special symbol in the time reduction state (the final variation of the time reduction) is executed, the time reduction number command is not set as the time reduction number command instead of setting the time reduction number command indicating 0 remaining time reduction times. With this configuration, when the command for the number of time savings set by the main control device 110 cannot be received, for example, when the command cannot be received normally due to noise or the like, the time saving final change Will be performed.

  Therefore, without using the special effect data when the command output from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 cannot be normally received, and less than the actually set remaining working hours. Since it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the number of remaining working hours of 0, it is possible to execute an effect that does not give the player a sense of discomfort while reducing the processing load of the pachinko machine 10.

  In the present embodiment, as a time-saving ending condition for ending the time-saving state, the time-saving ending that is satisfied when the number of times of the change of the special symbol executed during the time-saving state reaches a predetermined number (for example, four times). Although only the condition is provided, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the end condition that is established based on the number of times the special symbol is changed, the end condition that is established based on the result of the special symbol lottery (specified by the special symbol lottery An end condition that is established when a predetermined number of times (for example, twice) is won for the lottery result (for example, a small hit) of (i).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 having a plurality of end conditions for terminating the time saving state, which of the plurality of end conditions is satisfied varies depending on the game content of the player. It is necessary to determine the update status until the end condition is satisfied with respect to the end condition. However, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the final change of the time saving state is executed, the time saving number command is not set. Therefore, regardless of which of the plurality of time-saving termination conditions that can be satisfied, even if any of the time-saving termination conditions are satisfied, it is easy for the voice lamp control device 113 to determine that the current special symbol variation is the final variation of the time-saving state. Can be.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 140, the contents of the special symbol change stop processing 5 (S238) will be described. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol change stop processing 5 (S238) in the fifth embodiment. This special symbol variation stop processing 5 (S238) differs from the special symbol variation stop processing (see S208 in FIG. 45) in the first embodiment in the content of updating the time saving state when the special symbol variation is stopped. And the other points are the same. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the special symbol variation stop process 5 (S238) is executed, first, the same processes of S801 and S802 as the special symbol variation stop process (see S208 of FIG. 45) in the first embodiment are executed, and the process of S802 is executed. If it is determined in the processing that the time reduction end flag 203j is not on (S802: No), it is next determined whether the value of the time reduction counter 203h is greater than 0 (1 or more) (S871). Is large, that is, if it is determined that the special symbol change stopped and displayed this time is not the final change in the time reduction (S871: Yes), a time reduction continuation command indicating that the time reduction state is continued is set (S872), and the above-described operation is performed. The same processing of S809 and S810 as the special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see S208 of FIG. 45) in the first embodiment is executed, and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S871, if it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203h is not larger than 0 (S871: No), that is, if the current gaming state is the normal state, the processing of S872 is skipped and S809 is performed. Move to the processing of. Also, in the processing of S802, when it is determined that the time saving end flag 203j is set to ON, that is, when it is determined that the special symbol variation stopped and displayed this time is the final variation of the time saving (S802: Yes), The same processing as S804 and S805 is executed as in the special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see S208 in FIG. 45) in the first embodiment described above, and then the processing in S809 and S810 is executed, followed by terminating the present processing.

  In the processing of S801, when it is determined that the big hit flag 203i is set to ON (S801: Yes), the processing of S806 to S810 is executed, and this processing ends.

  As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the special figure change command is set in the special design change stop processing 5 (see S238 in FIG. 140) for stopping and displaying (fixing display) the special pattern change. At the same time, it is configured to set a time saving continuation command. Then, the special figure confirmation command and the time saving continuation command set in the special symbol fluctuation stop processing 5 (see S238 in FIG. 140) are output to the external output executed in the main processing of the main controller 110 (FIG. 55). In the process (refer to S1801 in FIG. 55), it is output to the sound lamp control device 113 at the same timing. When receiving the special figure determination command in a state where the time saving state is set, the sound ramp control device 113 determines whether a time saving continuation command has been received, and based on the determination result, the current stop display is performed. It is determined whether the special symbol variation is the final variation in the time reduction state (the final variation in the time reduction), and the effect form is set.

  More specifically, if the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure confirmation command and the time saving continuation command at the same timing in a state where the time saving state is set, it indicates that the time saving state is continued. In the case where only a special figure confirmation command is received, an effect mode for indicating that the time saving state is ended is set. In this way, by configuring the voice lamp control device 113 to be able to grasp the current status of the time saving state by combining a plurality of commands output from the main control device 110 at the same timing, the main control device 110 The types of commands set by main controller 110 can be reduced as compared with the case where individual commands are set to indicate the status of the time saving state.

  In the present embodiment, a special figure determination command and a time saving continuation command are set in the special symbol change stop processing 5 (see S238 in FIG. 140). Any command may be output at the same timing in the external output process (see S1801 in FIG. 55) executed in the process (FIG. 55), and the main process of main controller 110 (see FIG. 55). , A special figure determination command and a time saving continuation command can be set within an interval of 4 milliseconds at which the external output processing (S1801) is executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the external output process (see S1801 in FIG. 55) executed in the main process (FIG. 55) of the main control device 110 is executed, since the previous external output process is executed, Although various commands set during the interval (4 milliseconds) are configured to be output to the audio lamp control device 113 at one time (to be output as serial data), the present invention is not limited to this. When the special figure determination command is set, the output of the special figure determination command may be waited until the external output process (see S1801) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, three times). With this configuration, it is possible to output the special figure determination command and the time saving continuation command to the audio lamp control device 113 at the same timing without setting them in the same process.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 141, the contents of the ordinary symbol variation process 5 (S136) will be described. FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ordinary symbol variation process 5 (S136). This normal symbol change process 5 (S136) determines whether or not the current gaming state is a normal symbol high-probability state with respect to the above-described normal symbol change process (S106 in FIG. 48) of the first embodiment. Are different from each other in that the processing is changed, and the rest is the same. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the fifth embodiment, the state in which the value of the time-saving counter 203h is larger than 0 (the state in which the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 1 or more) and the state in which the time-saving end flag 203j is set to ON are ordinary symbols. It is configured to be managed as information indicating the high probability state, and only the state where the value of the time reduction counter 203h is larger than 0 (the state where the value of the time reduction counter 203h is 1 or more) indicates the high probability state of the ordinary symbol. This is different from the first embodiment that is managed as information.

  That is, unlike the first embodiment in which the process of subtracting the value of the time-saving counter 203h is skipped when the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 1, in the fifth embodiment, the special symbol change start process 5 (see FIG. In S235 of 139), the processing for updating the time-saving counter 203h is simplified by configuring the time-saving counter 203h to be decremented until the value becomes 0, and the value of the time-saving counter 203h is reduced to 0. However, the difference is that the time reduction end flag 203j is set to ON to continue the high probability state of the ordinary symbol until the special symbol change is stopped and displayed. .

  Therefore, when the normal symbol variation process 5 (S136 in FIG. 141) is executed, first, the processes of S1101 to S1108, which are the same as the above-described ordinary symbol variation process of the first embodiment (see S106 in FIG. 48), are executed. If it is determined in the processing of S1108 that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not larger than 0 (it is 0) (S1108: No), the time saving end flag 203j is set to ON, that is, the time saving final time of the special symbol It is determined whether or not it is fluctuating (S1171), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S1171: Yes), it is in the high probability state of the normal symbol, so the normal symbol variation of the first embodiment described above. The process in S1109, which is the same as the process (see S106 in FIG. 48), is executed, then the processes in S1111 to S1114 are executed, and this process ends.

  If it is determined in the processing of S1171 that the time-saving end flag 203j is not set to ON (S1171: No), the current state is the low probability state of the ordinary symbol (normal state), and thus the first embodiment described above is performed. The same processing as S1110 to S1114 in the normal symbol variation processing (see S106 in FIG. 48) is executed, and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1102, when it is determined that the normal symbol is changing (S1102: Yes), the process of S1115 to S1118 is the same as the normal symbol change process of the first embodiment (see S106 of FIG. 48). The process is executed, and in the process of S1118, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203h is larger than 0 (1 or more) (S1118: Yes), a scenario operation per time reduction general time is set (S1120). Then, the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set (S1121), and this processing ends.

  In the processing of S1118, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203h is not larger than 0 (it is 0) (S1118: No), it is next determined whether or not the time reduction end flag 203j is set to ON ( If it is determined that it is set to ON (S1172) (S1172: Yes), since the current state is the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, the ordinary symbol variation process of the first embodiment described above (see S106 of FIG. 48). ), The same processes in S1120 and S1121 are executed, and this process ends. In the process of S1172, when it is determined that the time-saving end flag 203j is not set to ON (S1172: No), the current state is the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, and thus the ordinary symbol of the first embodiment described above is used. The same processing of S1119 and S1121 as the fluctuation processing (see S106 in FIG. 48) is executed, and this processing ends.

  That is, in the fifth embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the length of the period (dynamic display period) for stopping and displaying the lottery results of the ordinary symbols (the length of the dynamic display period), Alternatively, the contents (opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a) of the game per ordinary symbol executed when a winning is achieved in the ordinary symbol lottery (regular symbol lottery) are set to be different depending on the probability state of the ordinary symbol. In order to determine the probability state of a normal symbol, the setting of the time reduction end flag 203j is referred to in addition to the value of the time reduction counter 203h. With this configuration, it is possible to appropriately determine the probability state of the ordinary symbol.

<Regarding the control processing of the voice lamp control device in the fifth control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 142 and FIG. 143, a control process of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. The control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment is the same as the control executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. In the processing, the special figure change start processing 5 (see S4254 in FIG. 142) is replaced with the special figure change start processing (see S4204 in FIG. 62), and the stop related processing is replaced with the stop related processing (see S4215 in FIG. 65). The difference is that the process 5 (see S4265 in FIG. 143) is executed, and the rest is the same. A detailed description of the same processing content is omitted.

  In the fifth embodiment, the types of commands output from the main control device 110 are added to the first embodiment described above, and the time reduction state based on various commands output from the main control device 110 is added. It is configured so that the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the middle situation (remaining working times). With such a configuration, the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like during the time reduction state, and the data temporarily stored in the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is erased. Even in such a case, after the power supply is restored, it is possible to set an appropriate effect mode according to the actual situation of the time saving state (the number of remaining working hours).

  First, the contents of the special figure change start process 5 (S4254) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure change start process 5 (S4254). The special figure change start processing 5 (S4254) is a processing executed when a special figure change pattern command is received in the command determination processing (see S4112 in FIG. 61), and is a processing of the first embodiment described above. It differs from the diagram change start process (see S4204 in FIG. 62) in that the content of the process during the time saving state is changed, and is otherwise the same. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the special figure change start processing 5 (S4254) is executed, the same processing as S4301 to S4305, which is the same as the special figure change start processing of the first embodiment (see S4204 in FIG. 62), is executed, and this processing ends. I do. In the process of S4304, if it is determined that the current gaming state is the time saving state, that is, if a special figure variation pattern command is received while the time saving state is set (S4304: Yes), the current reception is performed. It is determined whether or not the received command includes a command for reducing the number of times (S4351).

  In the present embodiment, in the external output process (see S1801 in FIG. 60) executed in the main process (see FIG. 60) of main controller 110, audio ramp control is performed using serial data capable of storing a plurality of commands. It is configured to output a command to the device 113. Therefore, in the special symbol variation start process 5 (see S235 in FIG. 139) executed by the main control device 110, when the special symbol variation pattern command and the time reduction command are set within the same process. In the same serial data, at least the special figure variation pattern command and the time reduction command are stored and output to the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the process of S4351, it is determined whether or not the command received this time includes a time saving command, that is, whether the serial data in which the special figure variation pattern command is stored includes the time saving command (S4351). When it is determined that the number-of-times command is included (S4351: Yes), the time saving state is set, and the special symbol variation corresponding to the special figure variation pattern command received this time is the final variation of the time reduction state. Since this is not (time saving final change), a display command for indicating that the vehicle is in the time saving state is set (S4306), and the special figure change start process of the first embodiment described above (see S4204 in FIG. 62). ) Are executed, and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4351 that the received command does not include the command for reducing the number of time savings (S4351: No), the special symbol change corresponding to the current special figure change pattern command is the time change final change. A display command indicating the final change is set (S4352), and after the process proceeds to the above-described process of S4307, the process of S4308 is executed, and this process ends.

  With this configuration, when the special figure variation pattern command is received during the time reduction state, the type of the command received at the same time as the received special figure variation pattern command is determined, so that the state of the time reduction state (remaining time reduction) The number of times can be easily determined on the sound lamp control device 113 side.

  Next, the content of the stop-related process 5 (S4265) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 143 is a flowchart illustrating the content of the stop-related process 5 (S4265). This stop-related processing 5 (S4265) is different from the stop-related processing of the first embodiment described above (see S4215 in FIG. 65) in that the processing executed when a special figure determination command is received is changed. Are different. The other processing contents are the same, and the same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the stop-related process 5 (S4265) is executed, first, it is determined whether a special figure fixing command has been received (S4601). If it is determined that the special figure fixing command has not been received (S4601: No), The same processes from S4602 to S4611 as the stop-related process of the first embodiment (see S4215 in FIG. 65) are executed, and this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4601, if it is determined that the special figure confirmation command has been received (S4601: Yes), it is next determined whether a time saving continuation command has been received (S4631), and it is determined that the time saving continuation command has been received. If this has been done (S4631: Yes), a display command for fluctuation stop indicating continuation of working hours is set (S4632), and the flow shifts to the processing of S4602.

  In the processing of S4631, if it is determined that the time-saving continuation command has not been received, then it is determined whether a time-saving ending command has been received (S4633), and if it has been determined that a time-saving ending command has been received (S4633: yes). ), A display command for fluctuation stop indicating the end of the time saving state is set.

  As described above, when the special figure confirmation command is received, the time saving continuation command or the time saving end command is configured to be able to be received at the same time. Therefore, by executing the stop-related processing 5 (see S4265 in FIG. 143), The display mode (effect mode) displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 depends on whether a time saving continuation command is received, a time saving end command is received, or no command is received. It can be set to be variable. Therefore, a process for setting a display mode for fluctuation stop executed when a special figure determination command is received, a process for setting a display mode for indicating the status of the time reduction state (remaining time reduction), Can be executed in the same process, and the processing load of the control process can be reduced.

<Sixth embodiment>
Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 144 to 155. In the above-described first embodiment, a game per an accessory is triggered by a game per a general figure executed when a win is made by a lottery of a normal symbol (in the general electric winning device 640 opened in a game per a general figure). While aiming for a ball to enter the special power operation port 643 provided), during the game per play (within the period during which the V winning device 65 is opened), the player goes to the V winning port 165 provided in the V winning device 65. And the ball is won, so that the player can execute a game (special electric game) aiming to execute a jackpot game (V jackpot game).

  Then, the time saving state in which the special electric game is executed is reached until the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (four times or fifteen times) (until the special symbol change of the predetermined number is stopped and displayed) or reaches the predetermined number Until the special symbol lottery wins the jackpot (the special symbol for indicating that the lottery result is a big hit is stopped and displayed), and the special symbol is changed during the time saving state The longer the time, the longer the period in which the time reduction state is set (the time reduction period) can be increased, and the number of ordinary symbol lotteries executed during the time reduction period can be increased.

  Further, if the game per bonus is executed in response to a ball winning to the special power operation port 643 during the normal per game, the special symbol change being executed is interrupted (the fluctuation time of the special symbol change is subtracted). The process for interrupting the special symbol change (the process for subtracting the change time of the special symbol change) is performed after the end of the per-proxy game or the jackpot game ( After the end of the “V big hit game”, that is, when a condition for executing a new special symbol change is satisfied, the game is restarted.

  In the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above, the length of the execution period (time saving period) of the special electric game is variable depending on the fluctuation time of the special symbol change and the interruption period of the special per game, so that the special electric game is performed. It was possible to make the middle player wish to select as long a fluctuation time as possible as a special symbol fluctuation, and to perform the game enthusiastically so as to execute many games per character. .

  However, during the special electric game, for example, during a period in which a normal symbol fluctuates, or during a game per ordinary figure, a ball cannot be awarded to the universal electric prize winning device 640 (it is difficult to win) (the electric auditors' role 640a). The closing period) is a period in which the game per role cannot be executed and the variation time of the special symbol variation is subtracted, so that the ball can be awarded to the electric accessory 640a. The opening period of the electric accessory 640a during the hitting game, that is, the period in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol change is subtracted, but the disadvantageous period that is more disadvantageous to the player than the period in which the game per hit can be executed. Becomes

  In addition, the special-game fluctuation in which the special symbol change is interrupted is an end condition (winning end condition) that is satisfied when the number of winning balls in the V winning device 65 reaches a predetermined number (three), or The end condition (time end condition) that is satisfied when a predetermined period (1.6 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the hit game is configured to end when any one of the end conditions is satisfied. In addition, according to the content of the game (whether the ball is fired) by the player during the per-accessory game, the per-accessory game ends when any one of the end conditions is satisfied.

  In other words, in the first embodiment described above, in consideration of the fluctuation state of the ordinary symbols during the special electric game and the game state of the per-regular game, it is determined which one of the termination conditions is satisfied for the currently-per-accessible per-game. It had a game to select. With such a configuration, the disadvantageous period during the above-described special electric game (the period in which the ordinary symbol is fluctuated, the period in which the electric accessory 640a is closed for the game per ordinary figure), and the execution period of the game per accessory are determined according to the skill of the player. Can be varied, and the player can be motivated to play the game.

  However, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the above-described first embodiment, since a plurality of ending conditions are set, for example, even if the player plays a game to satisfy the prize ending condition, the V prize device 65 Although the ball does not win as expected and the time end condition is satisfied, or even though the player plays a game to satisfy the time end condition, the ball previously fired is transferred to the V winning device 65. A prize may be won and the prize ending condition may be satisfied, so that there is a problem that the ending condition desired by the player cannot be satisfied.

  On the other hand, in the sixth embodiment, the player is able to select either the prize winning condition or the time ending condition as the condition for ending the game per role. In other words, when the prize ending condition is selected, the time ending condition is not satisfied even if a period in which the time ending condition can be satisfied has elapsed. Is configured such that the prize ending condition is not satisfied even when the number of prizes reaches the number at which the prize ending condition can be satisfied. With this configuration, when the termination condition desired by the player is satisfied, the game per accessory can be terminated, so that the player can more positively perform the game during the special electric game. .

  In the sixth embodiment, when the prize ending condition is selected, if the time ending condition is selected without terminating the game per role based on the elapsed time during the game per role, Although it is configured that the game per role is not terminated based on the number of balls won to the V-prize device 65 during the game per role, the present invention is not limited to this. In this case, a forced time end condition or a time end condition that is satisfied when a time (for example, 10 seconds) longer than an elapsed time (for example, 1.6 seconds) set as a normal time end condition has elapsed. When is selected, the compulsory prize ending condition that is established when the number of prizes (for example, 10) is larger than the number of prizes (for example, 3) set as the normal prize ending condition is set. May be configured. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a long-period game per accessory from being executed.

  First, with reference to FIG. 144, a characteristic configuration of the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 144 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, operation means (a switching button 22za, a first selection button 22zb, and a second selection button 22zb) that can be operated by a player are different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment (see FIG. 2). The difference is that a two-selection button 22zc) is newly provided, and the rest is the same. About the same structure, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 144, in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, a switching button 22za is provided on the right side (right side in front view of FIG. 144) of the return button 43 provided on the ball lending operation unit 40. In addition, a first selection button 22zb and a second selection button 22zc are provided on the right side of the upper plate 17 (the right side when viewed from the front in FIG. 144). The switching button 22za, the first selection button 22zb, and the second selection button 22zc (hereinafter, also referred to as an end condition switching button group 22z) are pressed by a detection switch (not shown) when the player performs a pressing operation. Is output to the input / output port 205 of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 21).

  Specifically, when the switch button 22za is pressed, a switch button detection switch (not shown) detects that the switch button 22za is pressed, and when the first selection button 22zb is pressed, the switch button 22za is pressed. When the detection switch for the first selection button (not shown) detects that the first selection button 22zb is pressed and the second selection button 22zc is pressed, the detection switch for the second selection button (not shown) is turned on. The second selection button 22zc is configured to detect pressing, and each detection switch is configured to output a detection result to the main control device 110.

  That is, the switch detection switch, the first selection button detection switch, and the second selection button detection switch are included in the various switches 208 described above with reference to FIG.

  In the sixth embodiment, the end condition switching button group 22z described above is provided at a distance of about 10 cm from the frame button 22. With such a configuration, in order to make the player interested in various effects performed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, an operation effect using the frame button 22 is executed, and the game is executed. When the player operates the frame button 22, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously operating the end condition switching button group 22z.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 has an operation device for effect (frame button 22), an operation device that affects game performance (end condition switching button group 22z), and Is provided, so that the player can arbitrarily select the content in both the production aspect and the game performance aspect. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to participate in the game.

<Production contents in the sixth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 145 and FIG. 146, a description will be given of the characteristic effect content executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment. In the sixth embodiment, as compared to the first embodiment described above, a selection effect for causing the player to operate the end condition switching button group, and a switching for indicating the operation result of the player with respect to the end condition switching button group. Direction and are configured to be executable.

  First, the display contents of the ending screen in the jackpot game will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 145 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display contents displayed on the big hit ending screen in the sixth embodiment. The display screen shown in FIG. 145 (a) is different from the jackpot ending screen (see FIG. 12 (a)) in the first embodiment described above in that the display mode for prompting the player to operate the switch button 22za is displayed. The difference is in the added points, and the others are the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same display contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 145 (a), in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81, a character "V rush starts after the end of the big hit!" Is displayed, and the time saving state is set after the end of the big hit game. It is shown to the player that the game is shifted to the V rush mode, which indicates that the game is to be performed. Then, in the main display area Dm, a comment “V rush period 40 seconds get” of “40 seconds” is displayed in the remaining time reduction period mode 801 for indicating a period in which the time reduction state set after the end of the jackpot game is continued. Is done. When the display screen of FIG. 145 (a) is displayed, the storage status of the special symbol (see FIG. 145 (c)) is displayed on the display screen of FIG. 12 (a) of the first embodiment described above. This is the same as the special symbol holding storage status (see FIG. 12 (c)) at the time of execution, so that detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In addition, a display area HR20 is formed on the lower left side of the main display area Dm (the lower left side when viewed from the front in FIG. 145), and the display mode for prompting to operate the switch button 22za is “selection of end condition by button PUSH”. And an icon imitating the switching button 22za are displayed.

  In the sixth embodiment, the player can operate (press) the switching button 22za during the period in which the ending screen of the big hit game is displayed, so that the end condition of the bonus hit game can be selected. . In other words, in the sixth embodiment, when the big hit game is executed, the end condition of the hit game is configured to be selectable, and during the time-saving state (V rush) set after the end of the big hit game, the hitting The game end condition cannot be switched.

  With this configuration, the end condition of the per-accessory game is frequently switched in accordance with the game situation during the V rush, that is, the special symbol fluctuation state and the normal symbol fluctuation state, and the It is possible to suppress providing a gaming situation that is advantageous to the player. In addition, since the game in which the variable prize device 650 wins the ball in the jackpot game ends at the timing before the special electric game is executed, it is possible to select the end condition of the per-accessory game at the timing before the special electric game is executed. Therefore, a game in which a ball is fired and an action of selecting an end condition do not overlap, and a game which is easy for the player to understand can be provided.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 145 (a), it is configured such that the condition for ending the game per accessory can be selected in a state in which the period (40 seconds) of the time saving state set after the end of the big hit game is notified. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to select the termination condition of the per-accessory game while grasping the remaining short time mode 801 displayed on the big hit ending screen. Specifically, when a display mode indicating that the period of the time reduction state is short (for example, 40 seconds) is displayed as the display mode of the remaining time reduction mode 801, the prize ending condition is set as the ending condition of the per-accessory game. By selecting and arbitrarily adjusting the game period of the per-government game, a special time game in which the period during which the special symbol change is interrupted is efficiently set is aimed at. If a display mode indicating that the display mode indicates (for example, 200 seconds) is displayed, the time ending condition is selected, and the number of balls to be awarded to the V prize device 65 in a single game per game is increased by increasing the number of balls. It is possible to aim for a special electric game in which the privilege amount (the number of prize balls) per time is increased.

  In the sixth embodiment, a configuration in which the player can select the termination condition of the per-prize game during the period in which the ending screen of the big hit game is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example, At any time during the big hit game, the end condition of the special hit game may be selectable.

  In addition, even when a standby screen (demo screen) which is displayed when the special symbol change is not executed during the time reduction state is displayed, it is possible to select an end condition of the per-accessory game. Alternatively, it may be configured such that a condition for ending a game per accessory can be selected during a period in which the game per accessory is being executed. Even in such a case, it is possible to select the termination condition of the per-accessory game at a timing at which the remaining time (hours reduction period) of the time reduction state is not subtracted. The end condition of the winning game can be selected.

  On the other hand, different from the technical idea of the sixth embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which the termination condition of the per-accessory game can be selected only during a period in which the remaining time in the time reduction state (time reduction period) is subtracted. With such a configuration, during the special power game in which the remaining time (time reduction period) of the time reduction state is subtracted, the game is performed by concentrating on only the special power game or selecting an end condition of the game per accessory. Can be selected by the player, and the player can play the game while predicting the contents of the game in the future, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  When the player presses the switch button 22za while the screen shown in FIG. 145 (a) is displayed, the display screen shown in FIG. 145 (b) is displayed. Next, with reference to FIG. 145 (b), the display contents of the selection screen for allowing the player to select the termination condition of the per-prize game will be described. FIG. 145 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents displayed as an end condition selection screen.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the switch button detection switch (not shown) detects that the switch button 22za has been pressed, the detection result is output to the main control device 110. The main controller 110 sets a command (switching command) indicating that the switch button 22za has been pressed, and executes the external output process (see FIG. 55) by executing the set command (switching command). It is configured to output to the audio lamp control device 113 in S1801 in FIG. 55). Then, the sound lamp control device 113 sets the display mode of the display screen shown in FIG. 145 (b) based on the reception of the switching command.

  The display contents of the end condition selection screen for selecting the end condition of the hit per game will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 145 (b). Please select the ending condition. " By visually recognizing the comment, the player can easily understand that the currently displayed screen is a screen for selecting the termination condition of the per-accessory game.

  In the main display area Dm, display areas (HR21, HR22) corresponding to a plurality of end conditions that can be selected by the player are defined, and the contents of the plurality of end conditions (winning end conditions, time end conditions) are defined. (Contents for satisfying the end condition) is displayed. More specifically, the display area HR21 is displayed in association with a prize ending condition as an end condition for a per-game, and the display area HR22 is displayed in association with a time ending condition as an end condition for a per-game. .

  In the display area HR21, a comment "I will end when three balls enter the V attacker" is displayed as a requirement for establishing the prize ending condition, and a "win ending" for indicating the target ending condition is displayed. It is displayed in the display area HR21a. Further, as a guide display mode 871 for guiding a selection button to be operated by the player when selecting a winning end condition, an icon (a circle with a numeral 1) imitating the first selection button 22zb is provided. Is displayed.

  On the other hand, in the display area HR22, as a requirement for satisfying the time end condition, a comment "I will end 1.6 seconds after the start of hitting the accessory" is displayed, and "an end condition for the target" is indicated. "Time end" is displayed in the display area HR22a. Further, as a guide display mode 872 for guiding the selection button to be operated by the player when selecting the time end condition, an icon (a circle with a numeral 2) imitating the second selection button 22zc is provided. Is displayed.

  Further, a display area HR23 is formed on the lower right side of the main display area Dm, and characters of "time" for indicating the type of the end condition currently set as the end condition of the game per accessory are displayed. Have been. That is, FIG. 145 (b) shows a state in which the time end condition is set as the end condition of the game per accessory. Note that when a winning ending condition is set as the ending condition of the per-prize game, the character “winning” is set in the display area HR23. In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment “Please select with a button” as a guidance display mode for guiding an operation to be performed by the player in order to select an end condition of the per-accessory game, An icon indicating that the first selection button 22zb or the second selection button 22zc is operated (pressed) is displayed.

  By displaying such a selection screen, it becomes possible for the player to easily select the game while grasping the contents of the end condition of the game per accessory. In the display screen shown in FIG. 145 (b), when a selection screen capable of selecting the termination condition of the bonus hit game is displayed, a period of the time reduction state set after the end of the big hit game (time reduction period). 145 (a), the information suggesting the length (for example, the remaining short time period mode 801 shown in FIG. 145 (a)) is not displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. May be configured so that the remaining short time mode 801 is displayed. Thereby, it is possible to easily select the termination condition of the per-accessory game while referring to the length of the period of the time saving state set immediately after.

  When the first selection button 22zb is operated (pressed) while the end condition selection screen (see FIG. 145 (b)) is displayed, the fact that the first selection button 22zb is operated (pressed) is indicated by the first selection button. The detection is detected by the detection switch, and the detection result is output to the input / output port 205 of the main controller 110. Then, in the control processing executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110, processing based on the operation of first selection button 22zb (processing for storing the selected end condition) is performed, and the first processing is performed. A command (operation command) for indicating that the selection button 22zb has been effectively operated is set.

  When an operation command is set in the control process of the main control device 110, the sound lamp control device is used in the external output process (see S1801 in FIG. 55) executed in the main process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 55). An operation command is output to 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 sets a display mode after the end condition is selected based on information (information indicating the type of the operated selection button) included in the received operation command. You. Here, an example of the display screen displayed after the end condition is selected will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 146 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents displayed after a winning ending condition is selected as an ending condition of a per-prize game.

  When the first selection button 22zb corresponding to the winning end condition is operated (pressed) in a state where the end condition selection screen shown in FIG. 145 (b) is displayed, as shown in FIG. 146 (a). A display area corresponding to the selected ending condition (winning ending condition) is formed on the entire surface of the main display area Dm, and the word “OK” indicating that the selection of the ending condition is completed is displayed above the main display area Dm. Is done. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, as a guidance mode for guiding the player to the timing at which the result of the current selection is reflected, a comment “I will finish prize winning from the next character hit” is displayed and displayed. In the area HR23, the characters "winning" indicating that the currently set end condition is the winning end condition are displayed.

  Although a detailed description is omitted, in the present embodiment, it is configured such that the end condition of the game per character can be selected a plurality of times within a period in which the end condition of the game per character can be selected. The end condition selected at the time when a period in which the end condition of the game per object can be selected has elapsed is set as the end condition of the game per item. Therefore, even if the player mistakenly selects the end condition, the end condition can be selected again as long as the period in which the end condition of the per-accessory game can be selected elapses.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, when the first selection button 22zb or the second selection button 22zc is operated in a state in which the end condition of the per-accessory game can be selected, the fact that the selection button has been operated is described. And an operation command indicating the type of the operated selection button, and when the ending period of the jackpot game ends, that is, at the end of the period in which the end condition of the per-game game can be selected, the final It is configured to set a command (end condition command) indicating the end condition of the specially selected per-game.

  In other words, during the period in which the end condition of the per-accessory game can be selected, since the player may select the end condition a plurality of times, only the operation of each selection button is output to the audio lamp control device 113. The display mode according to the operation of the selection button is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, and only the end condition finally selected is output to the audio lamp control device 113. are doing. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress output of unnecessary commands from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113.

  Then, when the jackpot game ends and the time saving state is set, as shown in FIG. 146 (b), a display mode indicating that the V rush has started is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. Is done. FIG. 145 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents displayed during the V rush. The display screen shown in FIG. 146 (b) is the same as the situation (see FIG. 12 (c)) where the display screen shown in FIG. 12 (b) of the first embodiment is displayed (see FIG. 12 (c)). 146 (c)), and a display area HR23 for indicating the currently set end condition of the per-principal-game is different from the first embodiment described above. The differences are in the points, and the others are the same. The same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 146 (b), the display screen during the V rush displays the characters "winning" indicating that the winning ending condition is set as the ending condition of the per-accessory game. With such a configuration, it is possible to inform the player of the end condition of the per-accessory-per-game executed during the V rush in an easy-to-understand manner. Although not shown, the display area HR23 is configured to be always displayed during the V rush period. Is configured to be easily grasped. When the end condition is displayed during the per-accessory game, an element for satisfying the end condition (or a V attacker (V winning device 65) when the winning end condition is set) is used. When the number of winning balls and the time ending condition are set, the update status of the elapsed time from the start of the game per character) and the value at which the ending condition is satisfied are displayed on the display surface. It is good to configure. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the game per accessory is suddenly ended and the player is confused.

<Electrical Configuration of Main Controller in Sixth Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration of main controller 110 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 147 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating the contents of the RAM 203 included in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 147, the RAM 203 of the sixth embodiment adds an end condition storage area 203ea, a switchable flag 203eb, and a switching flag 203ec to the RAM 203 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 29). The difference is that they are the same, and the others are the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The ending condition storage area 203ea is a storage area for storing the ending condition of the per-accessory game selected by the player. In the switching process (see S171 in FIG. 151), the selection button (the first selection button 22zb, When it is determined that the second selection button 22zc) has been operated, an end condition corresponding to the operation content is stored. Then, the end condition stored when the big hit game ends is read out, and is referred to when setting an end condition command corresponding to the read out end condition. In addition, the game is read out in the case of executing the bonus game, and the bonus game is executed based on the read end condition.

  In the sixth embodiment, information indicating a winning end condition is stored as initial data in the end condition storage area 203ea. More specifically, when it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 10) has been operated in the start-up process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 54) (S1704 in FIG. 54: Yes), the process proceeds to S1714. As a part of the processing, information for indicating a winning end condition is stored in the end condition storage area 203ea.

  In this way, by configuring such that at least any one of the end conditions as the end condition of the per-accessory game is stored as initial data in the end condition storage area 203ea, a function capable of selecting the end condition of the per-accessory game is provided. In the pachinko machine 10 having the above, it is possible to reliably prevent a situation in which none of the end conditions of the game per accessory is set. In the present embodiment, information corresponding to the prize-winning condition is stored (stored) in the ending condition storage area 203ea as initial data of the ending condition of the end of the per game play. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, at least the prize ending condition and the time ending condition may be set as the initial data of the ending condition of the game per bonus.

  The switchable flag 203eb is a flag for indicating that it is a period in which the end condition of the per-accessory game can be selected, and is set to ON when the ending period of the big hit game is started, and the ending period of the big hit game Is set to off when is completed.

  In the sixth embodiment, when the switch button 22za is operated in a state where the switchable flag 203eb is not set to ON, the operation on the switch button 22za is invalidated. With this configuration, even if the player erroneously operates the first selection button 22zb or the second selection button 22zc in a state where the switchable flag 203eb is not set to ON, processing based on the operation is performed. Execution can be suppressed.

  The switching flag 203ec indicates that the switching button 22za is operated (pressed) during the period in which the termination condition of the per-government game can be selected (the period in which the switchable flag 20eb is set to ON), and the first selection button 22zb Or a flag indicating that the end condition can be selected by operating the second selection button 22zc, and operating the first selection button 22zb or the second selection button 22zc. Is set to on when a period in which the end condition can be selected is set.

  This switching flag 203ec is determined when the switching button 22za is operated in the switching process (see S171 in FIG. 151) while the switchable flag 203eb is set to ON (see S2201: Yes in FIG. 151). That is, when the switching button 22za is operated during the ending period of the big hit game (S2203 in FIG. 151: Yes), it is set to ON (see S2204 in FIG. 151).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the setting status of the switching flag 203ec is a period during which the operation on the first selection button 22zb and the second selection button 22zc can be effectively determined in the switching process (see S171 in FIG. 151). (S2202 in FIG. 151), and is set to OFF when the end condition is selected based on the operation on the first selection button 22zb and the second selection button 22zc (see S2206 in FIG. 151) (FIG. 151). S2209). If the selection operation by the player is not performed while the switching flag 203ec is set to ON, the selection operation is set to OFF at the end timing of the jackpot game (see S2303 in FIG. 153).

<Electrical Configuration of Voice Lamp Control Device in Sixth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 148, the contents of the RAM 223 included in the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 148 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 148, in the sixth embodiment, the end storage area 223ea is set in the RAM 223 (see FIG. 30B) of the audio ramp control device 113 in the first embodiment of the first embodiment. The difference is in the added points, and the rest is the same. The same components are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The end storage area 223ea is a storage area for storing the end condition of the selected per-game play, and when an operation command is received in the end condition-related processing (see S4272 in FIG. 156), the operation is performed. Based on the operation information (information indicating whether the first selection button 22zb or the second selection button 22zc was operated) included in the command, the corresponding end condition is stored (see S5706 and S5707 in FIG. 155). ). Then, when the end condition command output at the end of the jackpot game is received (S5709 in FIG. 155: Yes), the content of the received end condition command (the type of the set end condition) and the end storage area 223ea are stored. The stored information (the type of the end condition stored in advance based on the operation command) is compared (S5710 in FIG. 155). If the comparison result is different, the content of the end condition command is added. The corresponding end condition is stored.

  That is, when an operation command indicating that the selection button (the first selection button 22zb, the second selection button 22zc) is operated by the player is received, the end storage area 223ea is based on the received operation command. The end condition is stored, and the display mode of the switching effect executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 can be set based on the end condition stored in the end storage area 223ea. When an end condition command for indicating the finally selected end condition is received, the end condition set on the sound lamp control device 113 side based on the operation command, the end condition actually set, Are compared, and if the comparison results are not the same, an end condition corresponding to the content of the end condition command is stored.

  With this configuration, the pachinko machine 10 using a configuration in which a command (end condition command) for indicating the finally selected end condition is set at the end of the jackpot game receives the end condition command. At an earlier stage, it is possible to predict an end condition selected by the player based on the operation command, set an effect mode based on the result of the prediction, and execute an effect that does not make the player feel uncomfortable. In the present embodiment, the setting timing of the end condition command is set as the end timing of the jackpot game. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the player may select a selection button (first selection button 22zb, second selection button 22zc). When operated, an end condition command may be set in addition to the operation command. In the case of such a configuration, a display mode to be executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is selected based on the received end condition command, that is, based on the actually set end condition. Can be.

<Control Process of Main Controller in Sixth Embodiment>
With reference to FIGS. 149 to 153, control processing of the main control device 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment will be described. In the sixth embodiment, a timer interruption process 6 (see FIG. 149) is replaced with a special power starting opening winning process (see FIG. 50) in place of the timer interruption process (see FIG. 39) in the first embodiment. The special power starting port winning process 6 (see S178 in FIG. 150) is performed instead of the special jackpot winning process 6 (see S178 in FIG. 56), and the jackpot control process 6 (see S1854 in FIG. 152) is performed instead of the big hit control process (see S1804 in FIG. 56). Different, otherwise identical. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the contents of the timer interrupt processing 6 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing the contents of the timer interrupt processing 6. This timer interrupt processing 6 is different from the above-described timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39) in that the special power starting port prize processing (see S108 in FIG. 50) is replaced with the special power starting port prize processing 6 (see S178 in FIG. 150). ) Is performed, and a switching process (see S171) is added. The other processes (S101 to S107, S109 to S112) are the same as the above-described timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39). Detailed description is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 150, the contents of the special power starting opening winning process 6 (S178) will be described. FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special power starting opening winning process 6 (S178). In the special power starting port winning process 6 (S178), the processing executed when the execution condition of the per-accessory game is satisfied is changed from the special power starting port winning process (see S108 in FIG. 50). The differences are in the points, and the others are the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same processing contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the special power starting port winning process 6 (S178) is executed, first, the processes of S1301 to S1307, which are the same as the special power starting port winning process of the first embodiment (see S108 in FIG. 50), are executed. The end condition stored in the end condition storage area 203ea is read (S1381), and the read end condition is set (S1382). After that, a special power operation command is set (S1308), and the process ends. If it is determined in the processing of S1302 that it is not in the ordinary drawing (S1302: No), an error command is set (S1309), and this processing ends.

  As described above, in the sixth embodiment, when the execution condition of the per-accessory game is satisfied, the information stored in the end condition storage area 203ea is read, and the end condition corresponding to the read information is set. The setting is made so that the end condition of the game per accessory is made variable. As a result, when the termination condition selected by the player is satisfied, it is possible to terminate the game per accessory, so that the player can select the size of the privilege given during the special electric game, Motivation can be increased. In the present embodiment, the end condition of the executed per-game is set every time the execution condition of the per-game is established. In the case of the pachinko machine 10 configured so that the end condition of the per-accessory game can be selected only at the time of the end of the jackpot game, or the first execution condition of the per-accessory game after the end of the jackpot game, When the condition is established, the end condition stored in the end condition storage area 203ea is read, and the operation scenario per accessory corresponding to the end condition is set, and the setting is performed until the next big hit game is executed. It may be configured to execute a per-accessory game based on the performed per-accessory operation scenario.

  With such a configuration, each time the execution condition of the per-accompaniment game is satisfied, it is not necessary to execute the process of reading the information from the end condition storage area 203ea, and the accessory corresponding to the end condition selected by the player. A winning game can be executed.

  Also, unlike the sixth embodiment, even in the case of the pachinko machine 10 in which the end condition of the per-accessory game can be selected during the special electric game (during the time saving state), for example, the A flag (end condition switch flag) indicating that the end condition has been switched is provided, and only when the end condition switch flag is set to ON, the information stored in the end condition storage area 203ea is read and the combination is read. It is preferable to switch the end condition of the hit game. As a result, when a new per-game game is executed under the same end condition as the previous per-game game, the process of reading the information stored in the end condition storage area 203ea can be skipped. It is possible to simplify the control processing when executing the game per accessory.

  Next, the contents of the switching process (S171) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing the contents of the switching process (S171). This switching process (S171) is a control process executed in the timer interrupt process 6 (see FIG. 149), and a process based on a player's operation on the end condition switching button group 22z is executed.

  When the switching process (S171) is executed, first, it is determined whether the switchable flag 203eb is set to ON (S2201), and when it is determined that the switchable flag 203eb is not set to ON, that is, the ending of the current big hit game is performed. If it is determined that it is not during the period (S2201: No), the operation on the end condition switching button group 22z is in a period in which the operation is invalid, and thus this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2201 that the switchable flag 203eb is set to ON, that is, if it is determined that the present is during the ending period of the jackpot game (S2201: Yes), then the switching is being performed. It is determined whether the flag 203ec is set to ON (S2202).

  In the process of S2202, when the switching flag 203ec is not set to ON, that is, during the ending period of the jackpot game, the switching button 22za is not operated (the display screen of FIG. 145 (a) is displayed). (S2202: No), it is determined whether or not an operation has been performed on the switch button 22za (S2203). If it is determined that the switch button 22za has not been operated (S2203: No), this processing is performed as it is. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the switching button 22za has been operated (S2203: Yes), the switching flag 203ec is set to ON (S2204), and the switching command is set (S2205). To end.

  Here, the determination process in S2203 will be described. In the present embodiment, when the player operates (presses) the switch button 22za, the switch button detection switch detects the pressed switch button 22za and sends the detection result to the input / output port 205 of the main control device 110. Is configured to be output. In the determination process of S2203, it is determined whether a detection signal is output from the above-described switch button detection switch.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2202, when the switching flag 203ec is set to ON, that is, during the ending period of the jackpot game, the switching button 22za has already been operated (display of FIG. 145 (b)). If the screen is being displayed (S2202: Yes), it is determined whether any of the selection buttons (first selection button 22zb, second selection button 22zc) is being operated (S2206). In the discriminating process of S2206, when the first selection button 22zb is operated (pressed), the pressed first selection button 22zb is detected by the first selection button detection switch, and the detection result is determined by the main control device. Since the signal is output to the input / output port 205 of 110, it is determined whether the detection signal is output from the first selection button detection switch. When the second selection button 22zc is operated (pressed), the pressed second selection button 22zc is detected by the second selection button detection switch, and the detection result is input / output port of the main control device 110. Since it is output to 205, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is being output from the second selection button detection switch.

  In the process of S2206, when it is determined that either the first selection button 22zb or the second selection button 22zc has been operated (S2206: Yes), information indicating that the selection button has been operated and the operation of the selected button have been performed. An operation command including the information indicating the type of the selected button is set (S2207), the end condition selected by the processing of S2206 is stored in the end condition storage area 203ea (S2208), and the switching flag 203ec is turned off. This is set (S2209), and this process ends.

  Also, in the process of S2206, when it is determined that neither the first selection button 22zb nor the second selection button 22zc has been operated, that is, from the detection switch for the first selection button to the detection switch for the second selection button, If it is determined that the detection signal has not been output (S2206: Yes), the present process is terminated.

  As described above, in the switching process (see S171 in FIG. 151), at the timing when the operation on the selection buttons (the first selection button 22zb and the second selection button 22zc) is determined to be valid, any one of the selection buttons When the (first selection button 22zb, second selection button 22zc) is operated, information indicating the selected end condition is stored in the end condition storage area 203ea, and a command indicating the selected end condition is set. Without setting, an operation command including information indicating that the selection button (first selection button 22zb, second selection button 22zc) has been operated and information indicating the type of the operated selection button is set. are doing. In addition, in order to set the switching flag 203ec to OFF in the processing of S2209, during the ending period of the jackpot game, the end condition switching button group 22z is operated to select the end condition again. ing.

  That is, until the ending period of the jackpot game ends, the end condition is not determined, so that a command (end condition command) indicating the selected end condition is not output to the audio ramp control device 113. ing. With this configuration, when the end condition command is received on the voice lamp control device 113 side, the information (end condition type) included in the received end condition command until the next jackpot game is executed. The effect can be set according to. Therefore, the control process on the audio lamp control device 113 side is simplified as compared with the case where the end condition command is set every time the player operates the selection button (the first selection button 22zb, the second selection button 22zc). be able to.

  Further, an operation command indicating that the selection button (the first selection button 22zb, the second selection button 22zc) has been operated in a state where the switching flag 203ec is set to ON can be set. During the ending period of the game, an effect based on the received operation command can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect without giving a sense of incongruity to the player who operates the selection buttons (the first selection button 22zb and the second selection button 22zc).

  Next, the content of the jackpot control process 6 (S1854) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing the content of the jackpot control process 6 (S1854). In the jackpot control process 6 (S1854), the process executed at the start timing of the ending period and the end timing of the jackpot game are different from the jackpot control process of the first embodiment (see S1804 in FIG. 56). Is different from the process executed by the other processes, and the other processes are the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same processing contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the jackpot control process 6 (S1854) is executed, first, the same processes of S1901 to S1911 as the jackpot control process of the above-described first embodiment (see S1804 in FIG. 56) are executed, and the process of S1911 ends. Thereafter, the switchable flag 203eb is set to ON (S1951), and the process ends. That is, in the present embodiment, when the ending period set after the last round game is completed in the jackpot game is set, the switchable flag 203eb is set to ON, and the player operates the switch button 22za. Is configured to be effectively determined.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1910, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending period (S1910: No), it is next determined whether it is the timing of the end of the big hit, that is, the end timing of the ending period (S1912), If it is determined that it is the timing of ending the jackpot (S1912: Yes), the same processes of S1913 to S1917 as the above-described jackpot control process of the first embodiment (see S1804 in FIG. 56) are executed. A setting process is executed (S1952), and this process ends. If it is determined in the process of S1912 that it is not the timing of ending the big hit (S1912: No), the same process of the big hit control of the first embodiment (see S1804 in FIG. 56) is executed, and the process of S1918 is executed. This processing ends.

  Next, the contents of the end condition setting process (S1952) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing the contents of the end condition setting process (S1952). This end condition setting processing (S1952) is executed in the big hit control processing 6 (see S1854 in FIG. 152), and selection of the end condition selection of the per-accessory game executed during the ending period of the big hit game is selected. The processing based on the result is executed.

  When the end condition setting process (S1952) is executed, first, the switchable flag 203eb is set to off (S2301), and then it is determined whether the switching flag 203ec is set to on (S2302), and the switch is turned on. If it is determined that it is set, that is, if the big hit end timing is reached while the selection screen for selecting the end condition (see FIG. 145 (b)) is displayed (S2302: Yes), the switching flag 203ec is set. Is turned off (S2303), the information (finally selected termination condition type) stored in the termination condition storage area 203ea is read (S2304), and the termination condition is determined based on the information read from the termination condition storage area 203ea. The command is set (S2305), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2302 that the switching flag 203ec has not been set to ON, that is, if the switching button 22za has not been operated on the big hit ending screen (see FIG. 145 (a)), or the process ends. If a desired selection button (first selection button 22zb, second selection button 22zc) is operated (pressed) on the condition selection screen (see FIG. 145 (b)) (S2302: No), the processing of S2303 is skipped. Then, control proceeds to the process of S2304.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the end condition setting process executed at the end timing of the jackpot game (see S1952 in FIG. 153), only the end condition finally selected is set as the end condition command. Is configured to be set. Furthermore, it is configured such that the period in which the end condition of the per-accompaniment game can be selected is only during the big hit game. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the number of end condition commands output to the sound ramp control device 113 side to one at the time of one big hit game, and to set the end condition included in the end condition command. Is applied at least until the next big hit game is executed.

  Therefore, on the side of the sound lamp control device 113, the effect based on the received end condition command can be continuously executed at least until the next big hit game is executed. In the case where the effect mode is changed accordingly, it is possible to suppress the processing for changing the effect mode from becoming complicated.

<Regarding the control processing of the sound lamp control device in the sixth embodiment>
Next, the contents of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 154 and 155. The sixth embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that a command determination process 6 (S4172 in FIG. 154) is executed instead of the command determination process (S4102 in FIG. 61). Are the same. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the content of the command determination processing 6 (S4172) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 154 is a flowchart illustrating the content of the command determination process 6 (S4172). This command determination processing 6 (S4172 in FIG. 154) is different from the command determination processing in the above-described first embodiment (S4102 in FIG. 61) in that it is determined whether a command related to the end condition of the per-bonus game has been received. And a process executed based on the result of the determination process are different in that an additional process is added, and the other processes are the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the command determination process 6 (S4172 in FIG. 154) is executed, first, the same processes in S4201 to S4219 as the command determination process in the first embodiment described above (see S4102 in FIG. 61) are executed. If it is determined in the processing of S4218 that no hit-related command has been received (S4218: No), it is next determined whether an end condition-related command has been received (S4271). Here, as the termination condition-related command, the switching command and the operation command set in the switching process (see S171 in FIG. 151) of the main controller 110, and the termination condition setting process (see S1952 in FIG. 153). The set end condition command corresponds to this.

  If it is determined in the processing of S4271 that the termination condition related command has been received (S4271: Yes), then the termination condition related processing is executed (S4272), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4271, if it is determined that the termination condition related command has not been received (S4271: No), a process corresponding to another command is executed (S4220), and this process ends.

  Next, the contents of the termination condition related processing (S4272) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing the contents of the termination condition-related processing (S4272). In the end condition-related processing (S4272), when the player executes a selection operation for selecting an end condition of a per-government game, various processing for setting an effect mode corresponding to the selection operation is executed. You.

  When the end condition-related processing (S4272) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot game is currently being played (S5701). If it is determined that a jackpot game is not being played (S5701: No), this processing is performed as it is. finish. In other words, in the present embodiment, the end condition of the per-accessory game can be selected only during the jackpot game, so that when the end condition-related command is received other than during the jackpot game, the received command corresponds to the received command. The effect is not set. Therefore, when an incorrect command is received due to noise or the like, it is possible to suppress an effect not intended by the player from being executed.

  In the process of S5701, if it is determined that the current game is a jackpot game (S5701: Yes), next, a switching command is received, that is, the player operates the switch button 22za during the jackpot ending period. It is determined whether (pressed) (S5702). If it is determined in step S5702 that the switching command has been received (S5702: Yes), a display command indicating a selection screen is set (S5703), and the process ends.

  When the processing of S5703 is executed, the jackpot ending screen (see FIG. 145 (a)) is switched to a selection screen (see FIG. 145 (b)) for selecting the end condition of the per-bonus game. The display command is set. The display command set here is sent to the display control device 114 in the command output process (see S4102 in FIG. 60) of the main process (see FIG. 60) of the sound lamp control device 113, like the other display commands. Is output. Then, when the display control device 114 receives the display command set in the processing of S5703, it creates image data for displaying an end condition selection screen (see FIG. 145 (b)), and displays the third symbol display device. A selection screen is displayed at 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5702, when it is determined that the switching command has not been received (S5702: No), it is determined whether an operation command has been received (S5704). This operation command is issued when it is determined that the player has operated (pressed) the selection button (the first selection button 22zb, the second selection button 22zc), that is, during the ending period of the jackpot, 22za, a command to be set when a selection button (the first selection button 22zb, the second selection button 22zc) is operated in a state where the selection screen of the end condition is displayed, and which is set by the player. This command includes information for indicating the type of the selection button.

  If it is determined in the processing of S5704 that the operation command has been received (S5704: Yes), it is determined whether the operation command received this time is the operation command corresponding to the first selection button 22zb, that is, the information included in the operation command includes It is determined whether or not information indicating that the first selection button 22zb has been operated is included (S5705). If it is determined that the selected button is the first selection button 22zb (S5705: Yes), the first selection button 22zb is displayed. A display command indicating a winning end (condition) as a corresponding end condition is set (S5706). When the display command is set in the processing of S5706, an end condition determination screen (FIG. 146 (a)) indicating that the player has selected the winning end condition from the end condition selection screen (see FIG. 145 (b)). Is displayed. After that, the set end condition (winning end condition) is stored in the end storage area 223ea, and the process ends.

  In the process of S5705, if it is determined that the operation command received this time is not the operation of the first selection button 22zb (S5705: No), the operation command received this time is the operation of the second selection button 22zc. Therefore, a display command indicating the time end (condition) is set (S5707), and this processing ends. When the display command is set in the process of S5707, an end condition determination screen indicating that the player has selected the time end condition is displayed from the end condition selection screen (see FIG. 145 (b)). Specifically, on the display screen described above with reference to FIG. 146 (a), display area HR22 (see FIG. 145 (b)) is enlarged and displayed instead of display area HR21, and "time" "End" is displayed, and the characters "time" are displayed in the display area HR23. After that, the set end condition (time end condition) is stored in the end storage area 223ea, and the process ends.

  If it is determined in the processing of S5704 that an operation command has not been received (S5704: No), it is next determined whether an end condition command has been received (S5709), and it has been determined that an end condition command has not been received. If this has been done (S5709: No), the present process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the end condition command has been received (S5709: Yes), the information indicating the end condition stored in the end storage area 223ea is compared with the information included in the end condition command received this time. It is determined whether the same end condition is indicated (S5710).

  In the process of S5710, when it is determined that the end conditions are the same, that is, when the end condition set based on the received operation command and the end condition indicated by the end condition command indicate the same end condition. (S5710: Yes), the process ends. If the end condition set based on the received operation command and the end condition indicated by the end condition command do not indicate the same end condition (S5710: No), the end condition that is actually set, Since the selection result displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is different, the display mode displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 corresponds to the end condition indicated by the end condition command. A display command for switching to the display mode to be displayed is set (S5711), and this processing ends.

  When the display command is set in the processing of S5711, the comment corresponding to the end condition indicated by the end condition command is displayed in the display region HR23 while displaying the comment “ending condition is being switched” in the center of the main display region Dm. The mode is displayed.

  As described above, in the sixth embodiment, the player can select any one of the prize ending condition and the time ending condition as the ending condition of the bonus per game. In other words, when the prize ending condition is selected, the time ending condition is not satisfied even if a period in which the time ending condition can be satisfied has elapsed. Is configured such that the prize ending condition is not satisfied even when the number of prizes reaches the number at which the prize ending condition can be satisfied. With this configuration, when the termination condition desired by the player is satisfied, the game per accessory can be terminated, so that the player can more positively perform the game during the special electric game. .

  In the sixth embodiment, when the prize ending condition is selected, if the time ending condition is selected without terminating the game per role based on the elapsed time during the game per role, Although it is configured that the game per role is not terminated based on the number of balls won to the V-prize device 65 during the game per role, the present invention is not limited to this. In this case, a forced time end condition or a time end condition that is satisfied when a time (for example, 10 seconds) longer than an elapsed time (for example, 1.6 seconds) set as a normal time end condition has elapsed. When is selected, the compulsory prize ending condition that is established when the number of prizes (for example, 10) is larger than the number of prizes (for example, 3) set as the normal prize ending condition is set. May be configured. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a long-period game per accessory from being executed.

  Further, in the sixth embodiment, the player can operate (press) the switching button 22za while the ending screen of the big hit game is displayed, so that the end condition of the per hit game can be selected. ing. In other words, in the sixth embodiment, when the big hit game is executed, the end condition of the hit game is configured to be selectable, and during the time-saving state (V rush) set after the end of the big hit game, the hitting The game end condition cannot be switched.

  With this configuration, the end condition of the per-accessory game is frequently switched in accordance with the game situation during the V rush, that is, the special symbol fluctuation state and the normal symbol fluctuation state, and the It is possible to suppress providing a gaming situation that is advantageous to the player. In addition, since the game in which the variable prize device 650 wins the ball in the jackpot game ends at the timing before the special electric game is executed, it is possible to select the end condition of the per-accessory game at the timing before the special electric game is executed. Therefore, a game in which a ball is fired and an action of selecting an end condition do not overlap, and a game which is easy for the player to understand can be provided.

  Furthermore, since the end condition of the game per bonus is selectable in a state in which the period of the time-saving state (40 seconds) set after the end of the big hit game is notified, the remaining time displayed on the big hit ending screen is selected. In a state where the time reduction period mode 801 is grasped, it is possible to allow the player to select the termination condition of the game per accessory. Specifically, when a display mode indicating that the period of the time reduction state is short (for example, 40 seconds) is displayed as the display mode of the remaining time reduction mode 801, the prize ending condition is set as the ending condition of the per-accessory game. By selecting and arbitrarily adjusting the game period of the per-government game, a special time game in which the period during which the special symbol change is interrupted is efficiently set is aimed at. If a display mode indicating that the display mode indicates (for example, 200 seconds) is displayed, the time ending condition is selected, and the number of balls to be awarded to the V prize device 65 in a single game per game is increased by increasing the number of balls. It is possible to aim for a special electric game in which the privilege amount (the number of prize balls) per time is increased.

  In the sixth embodiment, a configuration in which the player can select the termination condition of the per-prize game during the period in which the ending screen of the big hit game is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example, At any time during the big hit game, the end condition of the special hit game may be selectable.

  In addition, even when a standby screen (demo screen) which is displayed when the special symbol change is not executed during the time reduction state is displayed, it is possible to select an end condition of the per-accessory game. Alternatively, it may be configured such that a condition for ending a game per accessory can be selected during a period in which the game per accessory is being executed. Even in such a case, it is possible to select the termination condition of the per-accessory game at a timing at which the remaining time (hours reduction period) of the time reduction state is not subtracted. The end condition of the winning game can be selected.

  On the other hand, different from the technical idea of the sixth embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which the termination condition of the per-accessory game can be selected only during a period in which the remaining time in the time reduction state (time reduction period) is subtracted. With such a configuration, during the special power game in which the remaining time (time reduction period) of the time reduction state is subtracted, the game is performed by concentrating on only the special power game or selecting an end condition of the game per accessory. Can be selected by the player, and the player can play the game while predicting the contents of the game in the future, and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Second modification>
Next, a second modification example of each of the above embodiments will be described with reference to FIG. In each of the above-described embodiments, when the normal state is set, when the time-saving state is set, in all the games such as the hit game (game per part, small hit, big hit), the game board 13 Of the game area formed on the left side (left side of the variable display unit 80), a game in which the ball is fired so that the ball flows down (left-handed game) is executed.

  As a result, the game area in which the ball is fired to the player is not changed, so that the player can easily understand the game. Further, in each embodiment, as described above, it is not necessary to change the game method in the middle of the game (for example, when the winning game is executed). a)), or even when a per-accessory game is executed (see FIG. 18A), a guidance notification for changing the game method (for example, a comment display of “right-handed”) is provided. In the display area HR3, a device that is opened during a hit game to be executed (for example, a general winning device 640, a V winning device 65, etc.) is notified to the player without being executed.

  However, in the display region HR3 (see FIG. 13A) in each of the above-described embodiments, an image display schematically showing a prize device (general power prize device 640) corresponding to a hit game to be executed is simply displayed. There is a problem that it is only displayed and becomes unnecessary display for a player who understands the content of the hit game to be executed. In addition, since the area of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 provided in the pachinko machine 10 is limited, when an unnecessary display is displayed in the display area HR3 (see FIG. 13A), other display is performed. There is a problem that the effect display area is narrowed and the effect of the pachinko machine 10 is reduced. On the other hand, if each display area on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is set for the purpose of enlarging the area for executing another effect display and enhancing the effect of the effect, the display area of the display area HR3 is changed. There has been a problem that the game becomes narrow and a game that is difficult to understand is provided to the player.

  On the other hand, in the second modified example, the guide display mode (in the display area HR3) indicating the prize device (the ordinary prize device 640, the V prize device 65, and the variable prize device 650) that the player should aim for during the win game. This embodiment is different from the above-described embodiments in that the display mode (display mode of the displayed image) can be variably set based on various conditions. Other contents are the same as those of the above-described embodiments, and the same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Here, an example of a display screen displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the second modified example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 156 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display content displayed when a per-figure-per-game is executed during the V rush period, and FIG. 156 (b) is a schematic diagram of FIG. A schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display screen displayed when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means (frame button 22) while the display screen shown in (a) is displayed. FIG.

  In the second modified example, similarly to the above-described first embodiment, when a game per ordinary drawing is executed, a ball can enter the general winning award device 640. A special power operation port 643 is provided inside the general power winning device 640, and when a ball wins in the special power operation port 643, a game per hit which enables the ball to win in the V winning device 65 is provided. It is configured to be executed. Further, a V winning opening 165 is provided in the V winning device 65, and when a ball wins in the V winning opening 165, a jackpot game (V jackpot) in which a ball can win on the variable winning device 650 is provided. (Game). That is, it is configured such that a plurality of possible hit games can be executed based on one hit game (general-purpose hit game).

  In the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above, for example, when the ball enters the special power operation port 643 during the game for the general figure, the game for the role is continuously executed as the game for the general figure. become. In this case, if the guidance display mode is displayed in accordance with the type of the hit game being executed, the guide display mode displayed in the display area HR3 is synchronized with the timing of switching from the per-figure-period game to the per-acquisition-per-game. , There is a problem that the timing at which the guidance display mode for guiding the player to the prize device (V prize device 65) corresponding to the bonus per game is delayed. Also, in consideration of the delay in the timing at which the guidance display mode is displayed, for example, when the hit game is switched from the per-figure per game to the per-acquisition per game, specifically, the per-figure per game is terminated. It is also conceivable to set a waiting period (for example, 3 seconds) until the game per bonus is executed (after the ball has entered the special power opening 643), but the waiting period is set. As a result, there is a problem that the sense of speed of a special electric game aiming at a jackpot game (V jackpot game) in a series of flows is reduced, and it is not possible to improve the interest of the game.

  On the other hand, in the present second modified example, as shown in FIG. 156 (a), an image display which is a game per ordinary drawing and imitates the ordinary winning award device 640 as a guide display mode in the display area HR3 is displayed. In the running state, a hit game that can be executed next, that is, a hit game (game per role) executed when a ball is inserted into the special power operation port 643 in a running general hit game ), A second guidance display mode for guiding the player to the winning device (the V winning device 65) to be aimed at in advance is displayed in the display area HR30.

  With such a configuration, if the game result of the current general-purpose hit game is a specific game result (a game result in which a ball is won to the special power operation port 643), the next hit game is executed. Since the winning device to be aimed at can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner, a game easy to understand for the player can be provided. In addition, by notifying in advance the game contents of the per-accessory game that can be executed next during the per-figure per game, during the period from the end of the per-figure per game to the execution of the per-accessory game, This eliminates the need to provide a waiting period for the player to know the game content of the hit game (prize device to be aimed) (the length of the waiting period can be shortened). Therefore, the interest in the game can be improved by smoothly performing the special electric game aiming at the big hit game (V big hit game) in a series of flows.

  In addition, as described above, since the game per bonus item is executed when the game result of the current per-figure game is a specific game result, the display area during the per-figure per game is displayed. The comment of “Aim” is not displayed in the second guidance display mode displayed on the HR 30. In addition, in a state where the execution of the per-accompaniment game has not been determined, that is, in a state where the per-drawing game is being played and the ball has not entered the special power operation port 643, a display imitating the V winning device 65 is displayed. The configuration is such that only a part of the image (for example, the image displayed in the display area HR3 in FIG. 18A) is displayed. With this configuration, the player can easily understand the first guidance display mode indicating the game content of the hit game being executed and the second guidance display mode indicating the game content of the hit game that can be executed next. Since the identification can be performed, for example, it is possible to suppress the execution of the game aiming at the V winning device 65 during the game per ordinary drawing.

  In the example shown with reference to FIG. 156 (a), as the first guidance display mode and the second guidance display mode, an image display imitating a winning device that is opened in a corresponding hit game is used. The first guidance display mode and the second guidance display mode may be set only by displaying characters, or may be set using both characters and images.

  In addition, as an image display imitating the prize device displayed as the first guidance display mode and the second guidance display mode, photographing data obtained by actually photographing each prize device provided in the pachinko machine 10 may be used. . Thus, an image obtained by actually photographing the winning device can be used as an image displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, so that an effect that is easier for the player to understand can be achieved.

  Conversely, a simple display that displays only the minimum necessary display information among the winning devices corresponding to the winning games may be used. In this case, since the simple display can be diverted to the plurality of pachinko machines 10, the cost of developing the gaming machine can be reduced.

  Although a detailed description is omitted, in the second modified example, when the first guidance display mode and the second guidance display mode are displayed in the display area HR3, a hit game currently being executed (for example, It is configured to also display a past history information mode for enabling notification of the type of the hit game that has triggered the execution of the (big hit game).

  With this configuration, when a jackpot game (V jackpot game) is executed, it is possible to look back on the contents of the past game. Therefore, the jackpot game executed this time has won the jackpot in the special symbol lottery. Inform the player in a clear manner whether it is a jackpot game executed based on the above or a jackpot game executed based on the fact that a ball has entered the V winning opening 165 during the bonus game. Can be.

  Further, in the second embodiment, the second guidance display mode displayed during the per-figure game is changed according to the progress of the per-figure game, that is, the special power operation port 643 in the per-figure per game being executed. Is configured to be variably set in accordance with a change in the degree of expectation that a ball will win. Specifically, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command indicating the start of the per-figure game from the main control device 110, the first image data to be displayed as the first guidance display mode (the general power winning award) A display command indicating image data of the device 640 and a display command indicating second image data (image data of the V winning device 65) to be displayed as the second guidance display mode. Is set, and transmitted to the display control device 114.

  The display control device 114 creates the image display data of the first guidance display mode and the image display data of the second guidance display mode shown in FIG. 156 (a) based on the reception of the display command described above. , On the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. That is, the display screen shown in FIG. 156 (a) is displayed immediately after the start of the regular-drawing game. Then, when a prize command indicating that the prize sensor 640s detects that the ball has entered the prize winning device 640 during the per-game game is output from the main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 A command indicating the progress of the game per game is output to the display control device 114.

  As a result, an image imitating the V prize device 65 is displayed as the second guidance display mode as shown in FIG. The image display data (image display data in which about 3/4 of the image imitating the V winning device 65 is displayed) exposed more than the display mode shown in FIG. To be displayed. Similarly, it indicates that a state in which it is determined that the ball wins the special electric operation port 643, for example, a state in which the ball passes through the second movable valve 642 and flows down toward the special electric operation port 643, is detected. When the command is output from the main control device 110, the entire image imitating the V winning device 65 is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 as a second guidance display mode.

  With this configuration, it is possible to change the display mode (second guide display mode) of the guide display for the next hit game that can be executed according to the progress of the hit game being executed. As the degree of expectation that a ball will win in the special power operation port 643 in the running regular winning game increases, the guidance display for guiding the next possible winning game can be more clearly displayed.

  The example shown with reference to FIG. 156 (a) is merely an example, and in a gaming machine capable of executing a plurality of winning games in a series of flows, during a period in which one winning game is executed, It is only necessary to be able to guide the game method of the hit game that can be executed next, and, for example, the next hit game (for example, an accessory) according to the type of the hit game to be executed (for example, a regular game per game) In the case of using a configuration in which the probability of executing the per-figure game is different, the first guidance display mode displayed during the per-figure game or the The two-guidance display mode may be changed. Specifically, the display color and the size of the first guidance display mode are configured to be changed to a mode that is more noticeable to the player as the probability that the next winning game (for example, a game per role) is executed is higher. Good. In addition, the display mode of the second guidance display mode displayed at the start of the regular winning game may be changed. For example, a disadvantage that the probability of executing the next winning game (for example, a bonus game) is low. When the game per figure is executed, a display mode in which about half of the image of the V winning device 65 is displayed as the second guide display mode, and the advantage per game is more easily executed than the per game figure per game. It is preferable that the horse where the per-game is executed is configured to display a display mode in which 3/4 of the image of the V winning device 65 is displayed as the second guidance display mode.

  With this configuration, by visually recognizing the first guidance display mode and the second guidance display mode, it is possible to not only easily understand the game method of the hit game to be executed, but also to determine whether the hit game being executed is a player. Since it is possible to make the player predict whether or not a winning game is advantageous, the effect of the first guidance display mode and the second guidance display mode can be enhanced. Further, as described above, the display mode is configured to be changed in a stepwise manner according to the game result and the degree of expectation that are advantageous to the player. By configuring so that the stage of the display mode initially set is different, that is, by changing the timing of displaying the display mode indicating that the degree of expectation is high, the execution is performed while using the common image data. Since the player can be notified of the degree of advantage of the winning game, the capacity of image data can be reduced.

  In addition, in the above-mentioned contents, the example in which the per-figure-per-game and the per-accessory-per-game are executed as one example of the hit game is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Naturally, it may be used in all cases.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 156 (b), the display contents displayed when the player operates the operation means (the frame button 22) during the game per ordinary drawing will be described. When the player operates (presses) the frame button 22 once while the display screen shown in FIG. 156 (a) is displayed, the display area HR3 for guiding the game method of the per-usual-per-game being executed is displayed. Enlarged display. Thereby, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game to a player who wants to know a game method of the hit game being executed. When the frame button 22 is operated twice, the display area HR3 is displayed smaller than the size shown in FIG. 156 (a). When the frame button 22 is operated three times, the display area HR3 is deleted from the display screen, When the button 22 is operated four times, the display returns to the display screen shown in FIG. 156 (a).

  As described above, by changing the size of the guide display mode (first guide display mode) for guiding the game method of the hit game being executed, based on the operation of the player, the size desired by the player is provided. To display the guidance display mode. When the guidance display mode is reduced or deleted, the display area of other effect displays (effect displays such as reference numerals 811, 812, etc.) displayed on the display screen overlapping the display timing of the guide display mode. Is configured to be large. Further, there is an effect display that is executed only when the display area of the other effect display is enlarged. This allows the player to positively operate the frame button 22.

  In addition, without being limited to this, for example, by enlarging and displaying the first guidance display mode, a detailed display location of the first guidance display mode, for example, the second movable valve 642 in the general winning award device 640 is imitated. The display mode is configured to be visually recognized by the player to be a specific display mode different from the normal mode, and the specific display mode is configured to be easily displayed when a hit game advantageous to the player is being executed. Good. Thereby, even the player who has already understood the game method can be interested in the display mode displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81.

  In the example described above, the guidance display mode is configured to be able to be enlarged or reduced by the player operating the operation unit (frame button 22). However, the guidance display mode is performed based on the operation on the operation unit. For example, if the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a directional operation means (cross switch) capable of performing at least an operation in the left-right direction or the up-down direction as the operation means, the directional operation By operating the means, an area other than the target prize apparatus of the guide display mode (near the area where the target prize apparatus is provided on the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10) is displayed. The guide display mode may be changed, or the guide display mode may be changed so that the winning device to be the target of the guide display mode is rotated (horizontal rotation, vertical rotation). In this case, the display control device 114 previously stores image data indicating the entire game area of the game board 13 and three-dimensional image data (3D data) of the winning device, and stores the operation content for the direction operation means. When a command corresponding to the indicated operation signal is received, image data corresponding to the command may be created and displayed. Furthermore, in this case, it is preferable that information that is advantageous to the player is displayed in the displayable area only when the direction operation means is operated. This allows the player to enthusiastically operate the operation means.

  As described above, in the second modified example described above, as in the first embodiment described above, all games are configured to be able to be executed as left-handed games, but, for example, a plurality of hit games are performed as a series of games. In the case of an executable gaming machine, in a case where one hit game is executed as a left-hit game and the next hit game is executed as a right-hit game, a display area HR3 in which the first guidance display mode is displayed is designated by a third symbol. The display area HR30 formed on the left side of the display surface of the display device 81 and displaying the second guidance display mode may be formed on the right side of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. With such a configuration, it is possible to suggest a game method to the player also by the position of the display area formed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. In this case, the player may operate the position where the display area HR3 or the display area HR30 is displayed by operating the above-described direction operation means.

  As described above, in the second modified example described above, the case where a plurality of winning games are executed as a series of games has been described. However, even in the case where a specific winning game is executed alone, the effect of the above-described content can be obtained. Can be applied. For example, a special symbol change period and a jackpot game are set as a series of games, and during the special symbol change period, an image aiming at the special figure entrance 64 is displayed as a first guidance display mode, and a second guidance display mode is performed. May be applied so as to display an image showing the variable winning device 650. In this case, the first guidance display mode that does not require the player to be guided to the game method may be deleted, and only the second guidance display mode may be displayed. In the case of a gaming machine provided with a plurality of variable prize devices 650 that are opened when a special symbol lottery is won, which variable prize device 650 is finally displayed as the second guidance display mode. May be configured to be able to execute an effect that inspires the player.

  In the above-described second modified example, the guide display mode in the case where the per-figure per game is executed has been described. However, for example, a per-prize is won by a lottery of a normal symbol, and the per-figure per game is executed. In the period up to, only the first guidance display mode may be displayed. In addition, at that timing, the guide display mode is sequentially switched and displayed so as to sequentially show the flow of the game in the case where all of the examples of the game have succeeded, that is, the flow of the game per ordinary figure, the game per the accessory, and the flow per the big hit. It may be configured as follows.

  Furthermore, the variable content of the guidance display mode displayed during the hit game may be appropriately set. For example, the guidance display mode may be varied using blinking or discoloration in addition to enlargement, reduction, and rotation. Alternatively, the guidance display mode may be changed by causing a character to appear near the guidance display mode. Further, the game structure may be guided by combining a decorative structure imitating an actual winning device and the display surface of the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, in each of the above-described second modified examples, the image display using the image imitating the real thing is executed in order to guide the player to a game method that is easy to understand and is playing. For example, in which position of the target prize device is disposed in the game area, a portion of the prize device where the ball can enter, and an area where the ball can pass through the prize device In the case where a region advantageous to the gaming machine and a disadvantageous region are provided, the display image is simplified to such an extent that the player can grasp at least one of the advantageous region and the location of the advantageous region. May be used. With this configuration, the minimum required information can be provided to the player, and the common image data can be used for different pachinko machines 10. Therefore, the development cost of the pachinko machine 10, Manufacturing costs can be reduced.

  In the above-described first embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, or when the ball enters the specific area (V winning opening 165) during the game per bonus game, the big hit game Is executed, and a time-saving state (a low probability state of a special symbol, a high probability state of a normal symbol) is set after the end of the big hit game. In addition, as an end condition of the time reduction state, a time reduction end condition (time reduction number) which is established based on the fact that a predetermined number of times (for example, four times) of special symbol lottery is executed without winning the special symbol lottery. It is configured to be set. Furthermore, if a per-accessory game is executed during a dynamic display period (a special symbol fluctuation period) from the execution of the special symbol lottery to the stop display of the lottery result, the dynamic display period is subtracted. Is interrupted on the basis of the termination of the game per role, or the termination of the jackpot game executed based on the fact that the ball has passed (entered) the specific area during the game per role. The processing for subtracting the dynamic display period is restarted.

  Furthermore, in the first embodiment, a process of updating the number of times of the special symbol lottery executed during the time reduction state (a process of subtracting the number of remaining hours reduced) is executed based on the execution of the special symbol lottery. Specifically, the special symbol lottery is executed during a period from the execution of the special symbol lottery to the execution of the special symbol change, and after the special symbol change is stopped and displayed, it is configured to determine whether the time reduction end condition is satisfied. I have.

  With such a configuration, during the execution of the special symbol change, the process for subtracting the dynamic display period based on the execution of the per-accessory game is interrupted, and thereafter, the interrupted dynamic When the process for subtracting the display period is restarted, the number of times saved can be prevented from being updated when the dynamic display period after the restart has elapsed and the special symbol is stopped and displayed. Therefore, for example, when the time-saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the remaining dynamic display period of the suspended dynamic display is extremely short, and the number of time savings set after the end of the jackpot game is changed by the special symbol change after resumption. With the stop display of, it is possible to suppress the instantaneous subtraction.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the timing at which it is determined whether or not the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied is the timing at which the dynamic display period of the special symbol has elapsed. Therefore, the time saving state can be continued until the lottery result of the special symbol lottery in which the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied is displayed, so that the gaming state that is advantageous to the player is made as long as possible. Can be continued. Furthermore, during the dynamic display period of the special symbol, it is not determined whether or not the end condition of the time reduction state is satisfied. There is no. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

  The contents described above may be used for the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment is provided with a plurality of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol), a lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and a lottery (variation) of the second special symbol. ) Is configured to be executable. When the result of one special symbol lottery is a predetermined lottery result (small hit, big hit), when the lottery result is stopped and displayed, the other special symbol variation (the special symbol change The processing for subtracting the target display period is interrupted or discarded. Specifically, if one special symbol lottery wins a big hit, the other special symbol change being executed is discarded, and if a small hit is won, the other special symbol change being executed is interrupted. Is configured.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, when the time saving state is set, the cumulative number of lotteries obtained by adding the number of lotteries of the first special symbol and the number of lotteries of the second special symbol is a predetermined number (for example, 100 ), Or when the number of lotteries for the first special symbol reaches a specific number (for example, four), the time-saving end condition is satisfied.

  The pachinko machine 10 of the above-described fourth embodiment performs the process of updating the number of times of the special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state (the process of subtracting the number of remaining short hours) based on the execution of the special symbol lottery. The timing to execute and determine whether the time saving end condition is satisfied, the timing to execute the determination whether the time saving state end condition is satisfied, or the timing when the special symbol dynamic display period has elapsed, or one of As a processing result of the process of subtracting the number of remaining hours saved during the special symbol change, during the execution of the special symbol change (the special symbol change in which the number of reduced hours becomes 0 after the subtraction) in which the time saving end condition can be satisfied, the other This is the timing when the condition for executing the special symbol lottery is satisfied and before the special symbol lottery is executed.

  With this configuration, even in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the special symbol lottery (fluctuation) more than the specified number of times is not executed during the time saving state, and it is advantageous for the player. Can be continued as long as possible.

  In the first embodiment and the fourth embodiment described above, the processing for determining whether the end condition of the time-saving state is satisfied, and the time-saving state is ended based on the processing result (transition to the normal state) The processing is defined as the timing at which the special symbol is stopped and displayed (the timing at which the special symbol is stopped and displayed). However, other timings may be used. For example, the stop display of the special symbol elapses for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second). If a special symbol change (the final change in the time saving state) that satisfies the time saving end condition is a win (small hit or big hit), the hit game is performed. Is executed, a predetermined timing during the hit game (for example, one second after the start of the hit game), and an end timing of the hit game. . In other words, a process of updating the number of special symbol lotteries executed during the time reduction state (a process of subtracting the number of remaining symbol reductions) is executed, and the special symbol variation that has been executed is stopped and displayed, and then the next special symbol is changed. Any period may be used until the lottery is executed.

  Furthermore, in the above-described first embodiment, as the time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state, the time-saving end condition that is satisfied when the number of times of drawing the special symbol reaches a specific number (for example, four) is provided. The number of times the lottery result of the special symbol is a specific lottery result (for example, a lottery result other than the jackpot winning, and a part of the lottery result in the case of losing the winning) is not limited to this, and a predetermined number of times (for example, , Five times), a time saving end condition that is satisfied when the number of balls passing through a specific end area in the time saving state reaches a specific number (for example, 10), The time saving termination condition that is satisfied when the elapsed time from the setting of the time saving state exceeds a predetermined time (for example, 200 seconds) may be settable. Further, as in the above-described fourth embodiment, if the gaming machine is configured to be able to execute a hit game (small hit game) different from the big hit game, the number of times the small hit game is executed reaches the specific number. It is also possible to configure so that the time-saving end condition that is satisfied in the case of being set can be set.

  Further, in the case where it is possible to set an end condition of the time saving state that is satisfied under various conditions, it is preferable to set a different time saving end condition according to a trigger when the time saving state is set. Specifically, if the time-saving state is set after the jackpot game, the time-saving termination condition may be set based on the gaming state at the time of the jackpot winning or the jackpot type set at the time of the jackpot winning, The time-saving termination condition may be set based on the number of special symbol lotteries executed until the jackpot is won. Further, the time-saving termination condition may be set based on the number of times that a game state (time-saving state) advantageous to the player is continuously set over the big hit game. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a pleasure of predicting the time-saving end condition set for the player.

  In addition, a configuration may be made so that a player can select a time-saving end condition set for the current time-saving state from a plurality of time-saving end conditions that can be set as the time-saving end condition. With this configuration, it is possible to cause the player to play a game while predicting which time-saving ending condition is selected to execute the most advantageous game.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of each of the above-described embodiments, when the special symbol change is interrupted during the time saving state, the number of time savings is not reduced when the restarted special symbol change is stopped and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured such that the number of time savings is reduced when the restarted special symbol change is stopped and displayed. The processing of updating (subtracting) the number of times may be executed. Even in the case of using such a configuration, the length of the short time period after resumption will be different depending on the length of the remaining fluctuation period of the special symbol fluctuation at the time of interruption, so that the player At which timing the special symbol change is interrupted (whether the jackpot game is executed) or not, it is possible to give an interest.

  Furthermore, in each of the above-described embodiments, the processing of updating (subtracting) the number of times saved is performed during the period from the execution of the special symbol lottery to the start of the special symbol change. The present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to be executed, for example, after a lapse of a predetermined period (after 5 seconds) from the start of the special symbol change. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a case where the number of time savings is updated (subtracted) based on the special symbol change after resumption and a case where the number of time savings is not performed, depending on the timing when the special symbol change is interrupted. Specifically, when the special symbol change is interrupted two seconds after the start of the special symbol change, the update process of the number of times saved is executed three seconds after the special symbol change is restarted. On the other hand, when the special symbol change is interrupted 10 seconds after the start of the special symbol change, the update process of the number of times reduced after the special symbol change is restarted is not executed. Therefore, immediately after the special symbol change is started, that is, even when the special symbol change is interrupted in a state where the remaining change time is long, a disadvantageous state may occur for the player, On the other hand, the player can be interested in the game after the restart (game during the time reduction state). In addition, when configured to execute the update (subtraction) processing of the number of times saved during the period when the special symbol is changing, the change pattern of the selected special symbol (change time, jackpot lottery result, stop type, etc.) ), The timing of executing the update (subtraction) processing for the number of times saved may be made different. With this configuration, the special symbol variation is advantageous to the player (the number of time savings is not updated by the special symbol variation after resumption, or the time saving state set at the time of resumption can be continued for a long time). Can be made difficult for the player to understand, so that the player can play the game while predicting the content of the game to be executed later, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, when the length of the remaining period of the special symbol change being executed satisfies a predetermined condition, an effect for notifying the player to that effect is executed. I have. Specifically, when the remaining time of the special symbol change is longer than a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), or the remaining time of the special symbol change being executed is longer than the changing time of the next special symbol change. Is long, the lucky time effect can be executed. With this configuration, when the game per V is executed during the lucky time, the next V rush period can be lengthened, so that the player can actively play the game. Can be.

  Also, when determining the length of the remaining period of the special symbol change being executed, a method of determining whether the remaining period is longer than a predetermined length (for example, 30 seconds) (absolute determination) And a method (relative determination) of determining whether or not it is longer than the change time of the next special symbol change is configured to be executable. Thereby, the player can grasp the timing at which the special symbol change is advantageously interrupted.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the effect that can notify the player of the remaining period of the special symbol change being executed is configured to be executable, but the special symbol change that is advantageous to the player is interrupted. The effect may be any effect as long as the effect can be predicted by the player, and the effect may be executed under conditions other than the length of the remaining period of the special symbol change. For example, in the case of the pachinko machine 10 using a configuration in which the update process of the number of times reduced in the special symbol is executed during the change of the special symbols, an effect indicating that the update process of the number of times reduced is executed is configured. May be.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, when a specific winning game (game per accessory, small hitting game, big hitting game) is executed during execution of the special symbol change, the special symbol change being executed is interrupted or discarded. The present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to interrupt or discard the special symbol change being executed when conditions other than the winning game are satisfied.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the general symbol winning lottery device 640 is provided so that the ball can be easily won when the general symbol game is executed. When the ball passes through (enters) a specific area (special power operation port 643, special power operation port 1643, second entrance port 1645), a game advantageous to the player (game per accessory, small hit game), that is, Depending on the game result, a game in which a jackpot game can be executed can be executed. Further, a game state (time saving state) in which the ball winning the general electricity winning device 640 easily passes through the above-described specific area and a game state (normal state) in which the ball hardly passes are settable.

  With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the ball from entering the specific area even if the ball has won the general winning a prize device 640 during the general game executed during the normal state. Therefore, it is possible to suppress providing an excessively advantageous game to a player who is playing a game in a normal state.

  In addition, in order to prevent the ball from entering the specific area during the normal state, a special game for preventing the ball from winning in the general electric winning device 640 by the game per game performed during the normal state. Since it is not necessary to provide the configuration on the game board 13, the design flexibility of the game board 13 can be increased. In each of the above-described embodiments, among the balls that have won the general winning award device 640, the balls that have not passed (entered) the specific area are configured to enter the out mouth, and the However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to provide a first privilege (a game that can be a trigger for a jackpot game) to be granted when passing (entering) a specific area. ) May be configured to provide a second privilege (prize ball) different from the above.

  With this configuration, it is possible to vary the type of privilege given to the player by the ball that has won the general winning prize device 640 according to the set game state. Sexual games can be provided.

  Further, in the above-described second embodiment, a game state (time saving state) in which the ball winning the general electricity winning device 640 easily passes through the above-described specific area and a game state (normal state) in which the ball is difficult to pass are set. After being configured as possible, the specific area in which the ball that has won the prize winning device 640 during the time saving state enters the first specific area for executing the per-accessory game in which the opportunity to execute the jackpot game is easily established. (The second special power operation port 1643) and the second specific area (the special power operation port 643) for executing the hitting game, in which the chance of executing the jackpot game is less likely to be established than the first specific area. Switching means for switching (third movable valve 1642) is provided.

  With this configuration, the ratio (ease of passing) of the sphere that has won the general winning a prize device 640 passing through the specific area is made different depending on the set game state, and then the ball easily passes through the specific area. In the state where the gaming state (time saving state) is set, the ball which has won the general winning a prize device 640 is either a first specific area which is advantageous to the player or a second specific area which is more disadvantageous than the first specific area. Can be passed through. Therefore, even in a state where it is determined that the first privilege is given to the player by the ball that has won the general winning award device 640 (a state in which the first privilege is easily given), the ball enters (passes) any specific area. ) Can be interested. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player interested in the game performed during the time-saving state.

  In the above-described second embodiment, the ease with which a ball can be awarded to the V winning opening 165 in the per-proxy game executed in accordance with the type of the specific region (special power operation port) in which the ball enters is described. Different. In other words, the execution probability of the V jackpot game executed via the per-principal game is made different. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the V jackpot game executed when a ball wins in the V winning opening 165. (The number of rounds, the game state (number of times saved) set after the end of the big hit game) may be made different depending on the type of the specific area (special power operation port) where the ball enters.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first and second embodiments described above, when the ball has won the special power operating port 643, the special symbol change being executed is interrupted (interruption processing of the change time is interrupted). However, as in the third embodiment described above, the special symbol change that is being executed is discarded according to the condition that is satisfied when the ball wins the special power operation port 643 (the special symbol change is forcibly applied). May be stopped), or the time saving state may be terminated after being discarded.

  Further, as in the above-described fourth embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 configured to execute a plurality of kinds of special symbol lotteries (first special symbol lottery and second special symbol lottery) in an overlapping manner. The technical idea of the second embodiment described above may be applied. In the above-described fourth embodiment, the second winning opening 1645, which is a trigger for executing the lottery of the second special symbol, is provided in the general winning award device 640, and the ball wins in the general winning award device 640 during the normal state. The configuration is such that, when the ball wins in the general winning arrangement device 640 during the time saving state, the winning ball can easily enter the second entrance 1645 than in the case. In addition, a right first ball entry opening serving as a chance for a lottery of the first special symbol is provided in the general winning award device 640, and a ball that has won the general award winning device 640 during the time saving state is a second entrance 1645 or Switching means may be provided so as to enter any one of the right first entrance holes. In this case, a lottery that is more advantageous to the player when the ball enters the second entrance 1645 than in the right first entrance which is a chance for the first special symbol that can be executed even in the normal state. May be configured to be executed.

  With this configuration, it is possible for the player to enjoy the result of the per-figure-per-game executed during the time-saving state to the end. In the case where the number of lotteries of the first special symbol (the number of times of change) is defined as an end condition of the time saving state, as in the above-described embodiments, the lottery of the first special symbol during the time saving state (variation). ) Can be prevented from occurring. Further, in this case, the operation of the switching means provided in the general winning award device 640 may be configured to be variable based on the execution status of the first special symbol lottery and the number of balls retained in the first special symbol. If the time saving state is set and the first special symbol lottery is not executed, or if the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is small (for example, one), a general electric winning prize The switching means may be operated and controlled so that the ball that has won the device 640 can easily enter the right first entrance. With this configuration, it is possible to more reliably execute the first special symbol lottery during the time saving state.

  Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, the operation of each movable valve provided in the general winning a prize device 640 is configured to be executed at the start of the game per general figure, but is not limited thereto. For example, it may be configured to be executed based on the timing at which the ordinary symbol indicating the winning of the per-figure is stopped or the timing at which the stop display period has elapsed, or a predetermined time after the per-figure-per-game starts. It may be configured to be executed at a timing when a period (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed, or may be executed at any timing as long as it operates according to a predetermined rule.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, when the time-saving state is set, the specific game (the game per character) before the time-saving state ends (until the special symbol change that satisfies the condition for ending the time-saving state ends). Or, the pachinko machine 10 having a game ability aiming at the big hit game (V big hit game) via the small hit game has been described.

  In the pachinko machine 10 having such a playability, the longer the fluctuation time of the special symbol during the time reduction state, the longer the period in which the time reduction state is set (time reduction period), and the identification during the time reduction period The number of executions of the game can be increased.

  Furthermore, when the specific game is executed, the special symbol change being executed is interrupted (the process for subtracting the change time of the special symbol change is interrupted), and the interrupted special symbol is changed. The change (the process for subtracting the change time of the special symbol change) is performed after the end of the specific game or the big hit game (V big hit game), that is, when a condition that can execute a new special symbol change is satisfied. It is configured to restart.

  In the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above, the length of the short-term time is variable depending on the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation and the interruption period of the specific game, so that the special symbol fluctuation is provided to the player as much as possible. While wishing to select a long fluctuation time, it was possible to make the player play a lot of specific games.

  However, for example, a game period for executing a specific game (a period during which a ball cannot be awarded to the general winning award device 640 during a normal symbol fluctuation period or during a general game per game (it is difficult to win)) ( The electric accessory 640a is closed during the period in which the specific game cannot be executed and the change time of the special symbol change is subtracted. Although the open period of the electric accessory 640a during the per-game per game where the ball can be awarded to the electric accessory 640a, that is, the period in which the change time of the special symbol change is subtracted, (Period during which execution is possible).

  In addition, the specific game in which the special symbol change is interrupted is performed when the number of winning balls in the variable ball entry means (V winning device 65) released during the specific game reaches a predetermined number (for example, three). Either the ending condition that is satisfied (winning ending condition) or the ending condition that is satisfied when a predetermined period (for example, 1.6 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the game per bonus, (time ending condition) Is configured to be terminated when the termination condition is satisfied, and when one of the termination conditions is satisfied in accordance with the game content (whether the ball is fired) by the player during the game per role, the role is determined. The hit game was over.

  On the other hand, in each of the above-described embodiments, when the state in which the specific game is being executed and the above-described disadvantage period overlap, the effect of the specific game can be changed based on the length of the disadvantage period. Make up. This allows the player to select the content of the game during the specific game (the ending condition to be established), so that the player can enthusiastically play the game.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, as shown in FIG. 3, FIG. 88, or FIG. 89, the special power operation port 643 which is a trigger for interrupting the special symbol change being executed is provided in the general winning award device 640. Also, in the above-described fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 114, a second ball entrance 1645 serving as a trigger for interrupting a special symbol change being executed is provided in the general winning award device 640. With this configuration, in the gaming machine, the period until the ball that has won the general winning award device 640 enters the special power operation port or the second entrance port (flowing period of the ball) is randomized (delayed). It is preferable to provide delay means.

  That is, in each of the above-described embodiments, a period until a plurality of special symbol changes is completed is configured to be a time-saving period, and a time-saving state (the number of time-savings) is newly set by executing a jackpot game. In such a case, the remaining period of the suspended special figure change is added without decrementing the number of time savings. Therefore, in the state where the number of remaining hours is remaining, and in the state where the number of remaining hours is reduced, and the number of remaining In the case where the remaining period of the figure fluctuation is long, it is configured such that a case where the jackpot game is executed (a case where the jackpot game is executed after the time reduction period is shortened) is advantageous to the player.

  This may be advantageous to the player by providing a delay unit in the general winning award device 640 and delaying the timing at which the ball enters the special power operation port or the second entrance port. Thereby, it is possible to enjoy at what timing the ball that has won the general winning award device 640 enters the special power operation port or the second ball input port. In addition, it is possible to prevent a game in which a ball enters the special power operation port or the second entrance when the remaining time of the special figure change is long, being intentionally performed.

  In this case, as the delay means, a croon member on which the ball can roll is provided, and when a plurality of balls flow into the clune member, the ball easily flows into a passage provided in the central portion of the clune member. And the ball passing through the passage opening may flow into the special power operation opening or the second entrance opening. With such a configuration, the sphere is provided with a special power operation port or a second ball entry port in accordance with the content of the game being played per ordinary figure (degree of winning of the ball into the ordinary power winning device 640) while providing delay means. It is possible to control the timing of entering the ball. Therefore, it is possible to enthusiastically play a game so that the ball enters the special power operation port or the second entrance at an arbitrary timing.

  In addition, when the ball has flowed into the delay means (cloon member), a suggestion effect that suggests to the player a period that is advantageous to the player (a period during which the remaining time of the special figure change is long) is executed. A result notifying means may be provided for notifying whether or not the timing of entering the special power operating port or the second entrance is a timing that is advantageous to the player (the remaining period of the special figure change is long). Further, in the above-described example, the example in which the cloon member is used as the delay unit has been described. However, any device that can change the falling period of the ball that has entered the general winning award device 640 may be used. A plurality of flow paths having different periods (flow-down periods) from the time the ball enters the winning device 640 to the time the ball enters the special power operation port or the second ball entrance are provided, and any one of the plurality of flow paths is provided. Distributing means for distributing the balls may be provided.

<Seventh embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 157 to 192. As in the pachinko machine 10 used in the above-described fourth embodiment, the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1 lottery) and the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2 lottery) are repeatedly executed. By changing the length of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol and the length of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol selected according to the set game state, the configuration is made possible (so-called simultaneous fluctuation specification). Among the two types of special symbol lotteries that can be executed in an overlapping manner, there is a type in which the special symbol type in which the lottery is easily executed is changed according to the gaming state. Specifically, when one game state (for example, a normal state) is set, a short fluctuation time (for example, 5 seconds to 60 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, and the second special symbol is selected. A long variation time (for example, 10 minutes) is selected as the symbol variation time, and when a specific game state (for example, a latent state) different from the normal state is set, the first special state is set. A long variation time (for example, 10 minutes) is selected as the variation time of the symbol, and a short variation time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is selected as the variation time of the second special symbol. There is a configuration in which the first special symbol lottery is easily executed and the second special symbol lottery is easily executed during the latent state.

  Furthermore, in the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, the small special lottery is configured to win the small hit with a high probability (for example, about 1/1) in the second special symbol lottery, and the small hit executed based on the small hit win In some cases, a latent state in which a game is frequently executed is set as a gaming state advantageous to a player.

  In the above-described gaming machine, a game (advantageous game) in which small hitting games are frequently performed can be executed only in a specific gaming state (probable state), so that the player is expected to shift to the gaming state. It was possible to play the game while. However, since the fixed fluctuation time (0.5 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol fluctuation executed during the latent state, the small hitting game during the latent state is performed. It is not possible to make a large difference in the execution frequency, that is, in the above-described gaming machine, when the second special symbol lottery is executed, a small win is almost won. Since the difference is provided in the frequency, there is a fear that the game in the latent state becomes monotonous.

  On the other hand, in the seventh embodiment, the range that can be selected as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is changed according to the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol. Specifically, the configuration is such that the smaller the number of reserved balls in the first special symbol, the easier it is to select a short variation time as the variation time of the second special symbol variation.

  Further, in the seventh embodiment, by executing the game in the latent state (right-handed game), the start winning of the first special symbol (holding storage) and the starting winning of the second special symbol are both performed. Depending on the small hit type that is set when a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, the running of the first special symbol change is interrupted, or forced stop (discard) with the lottery result indicating departure It is possible to make it. Then, by forcibly stopping the change of the first special symbol during execution, the number of reserved first special symbols can be positively reduced. This makes it possible to reduce the number of retained special symbols in the first special symbol based on the result of the lottery of the second special symbol executed mainly during the latent state.

  The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment is different from that of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment in that the board configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 is different. , The configuration of the RAM 203 is partially changed, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the sound ramp control device 113 is partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed. And that the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the following. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the fourth embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, the gaming state according to the seventh embodiment will be briefly described. In the seventh embodiment, the gaming state includes a normal state (a low probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol), a probable change state (a high probability state of a special symbol, a high probability state of a normal symbol), and a latent state. A certain state (a high probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol) can be set. The detailed state will be described later, but the latent state is configured as a gaming state that is most advantageous to the player. Then, the normal state is configured as the most disadvantageous game state for the player. Further, the probable change state is configured as a gaming state having a higher degree of advantage than the normal state. In the following description, the game state may be indicated by using the name of the effect mode executed during each game state. In some cases.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 157, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 157, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment is different from the board configuration of the game board 13 in the above-described fourth embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see FIG. 2). The V winning device 65 and the motor-operated accessory 640 are deleted, and instead, a right variable winning device 1650, a right motor-operated accessory 164, and a right second ball entrance 645 are provided. Further, the difference is that the positions of the variable winning device 650 and the through gate 67 are different. The other configurations are the same, and the same components are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 157, in the seventh embodiment, each of a left area (left area) and a right area (right area) of the variable display unit 80 in the game area formed on the game board 13 A prize port (ball entry port) is provided so that a ball can be awarded (ball entry). Therefore, unlike the board surface configuration of the game board 13 of the above-described first embodiment, a game in which the ball flows down to the left area (left-handed game) and a game in which the ball flows down to the right area (right-handed) Game).

  Although a detailed description will be described later, in the seventh embodiment, the game is configured to allow the player to execute a different game according to the set game state, and when the normal state is set, In order to allow the ball to enter the first entrance 64, a left-handed game is executed. If the certainty-change state is set, a right-handed game is executed in order for the right motor-operated role product 164 to win the ball. In the case where the latent state is set, a right-handed game is executed in order to make the ball enter the right second entrance 645. In addition, even when a hit game (big hit game, small hit game) is executed, a right-handed game is executed.

  That is, when a game advantageous to the player is executed, a right-handed game is performed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player know whether the current situation is advantageous or not by the game method, so that an easy-to-understand game can be provided. Although details will be described later, during a gaming state (probable state, latent state, and various hit states) in which a right-handed game is executed, a right-handed game is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed so as to display a guidance display mode for executing This makes it possible to provide a game that is easier for the player to understand.

  As shown in FIG. 157, the first ball entrance 64 (center first ball entrance 64c) and the ball that has flowed down the left region by the left-hitting game is the first ball entrance 64 (central first ball entrance 64c). The ratio of entering the ball and the ratio of the ball flowing down the right area by the right-handed game entering the first entrance 64 are determined by nails and various structures planted on the board of the game board 13. Specifically, one out of about 15 balls that have flowed down the left region by the left-handed game enters the first entrance 64 (center first entrance 64c). The configuration is such that one out of about 250 balls that have flowed down the right region by the right-handed game enters the first entrance 64 (center first entrance 64c). Therefore, in the normal state in which the ball is inserted into the first entrance 64 (the center first entrance 64c), the lottery of the first special symbol is executed, it is most likely that the player performs the left-handed game. It becomes an advantageous game method.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 157, in the right area of the game board 13 (the area on the right side of the variable display unit 80), a right variable winning device 1650 and a through gate 67 provided downstream of the right variable winning device 1650 are provided. A right motorized accessory 164 having a right first entrance 164r provided downstream of the through gate 67 and an opening / closing door 164r1 capable of opening and closing the upper surface of the right first entrance 164r; In a state where the opening / closing door 164r1 is closed, the ball that has flowed (passed) on the upper surface thereof can enter the second right ball entry port 645 and the above-mentioned respective ball entry ports without entering the ball. A variable winning device 650 is provided in a downstream area where the ball flowing down the right area reaches.

  As shown in FIG. 157, only the game balls that have passed through the through gate 67 in the state where the right electric accessory 164 is closed (the state where the opening / closing door 164r1 is closed) are in the right second entrance 645. A flow-down route of the game ball is set so as to be reachable. In other words, even if a right-handed game is performed in a high probability state (probable change state) of a normal symbol in which the right electric auditors product 164 is likely to be opened, almost all the game balls passing through the through gate 67 are in the right first entry. Since the ball enters the ball entrance 164r, the game ball cannot enter the right second entrance 645. With this configuration, it is possible to perform a game by right-handed game even in a probable change state (probability change mode).

  In the seventh embodiment, the variable member (opening / closing door) 1650a is configured to be variable so that almost all the balls flowing down the right area by the right-handed game can win the open right variable winning device 1650. I have. The right variable winning device 1650 is a variable winning device (variable winning means) that is opened in a small hit game executed when a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery.

  In a state where the right variable winning device 1650 is closed (a state in which the small hitting game is not executed), about a half of the ball flowing down the right region is an area where the through gate 67 is provided (right variable winning). Of the left and right areas defined by the nails implanted on the left side of the device 1650, it flows down the right side area (first path), and the remaining half is left side area (second path). Flow down. The ball flowing down the left area (second path) flows down to the variable winning device 650 without entering the right motorized accessory 164 and the right second ball entrance 1645.

  On the other hand, all of the balls flowing down the right area (first path) where the through gate 67 is provided flow down toward the upstream side of the right electric accessory 164 (the upstream end side of the door 164r1). Then, the upper surface of the opening / closing door 164r1 flows down from the upstream side to the downstream side. Then, about ／ of the balls ejected from the upper surface of the right electric accessory 164 enter the right second entrance 645, and about 約 of the remaining balls enter the right electric accessory 164 and the right second It passes through a gap formed between the ball and the entrance 645 and flows down to the variable winning device 650.

  That is, in the seventh embodiment, a plurality of paths are provided for the ball fired to the right area by the right-handed game to reach the variable winning device 650, and each of the paths is different so that the period required for the ball to flow down is different. A path has been formed. Specifically, the sphere in the right region (first path) has a falling period of about 2 seconds, and the sphere in the left region (second path) has a falling period of about 1 second. With this configuration, a ball fired at a different timing (a ball fired by a right-handed game), specifically, a plurality of balls fired at 0.6 second intervals can be changed at the same timing. It is possible to reach the winning device 650. Therefore, during the period in which the variable prize device 650 is in the open state (during the jackpot game), a plurality of balls can be easily made to enter the variable prize device 650 at the same time. Interesting behavior of the sphere.

  The right electric accessory 164 is opened when a winning is achieved in a normal symbol lottery (a general drawing lottery) in which a lottery condition can be satisfied when a ball passes through the through gate 67 (when a general figure hitting game is executed). It is a variable ball entry means to be operated. Here, the contents of the ordinary symbol lottery (general figure lottery) and the game per general figure lottery in the seventh embodiment will be briefly described.

  In the seventh embodiment, even when the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, the ball is able to enter the right electric accessory 164 by the right-handed game although the probability is low, although the probability is low. For example, when a right-handed game is performed during the normal state, the ball can be awarded to the right electric auditors product 164 at a ratio of about 1 in 50 balls. This ball entry ratio is set to be lower than the ratio of balls entering the first entry opening 64 (the ratio of one ball per 20 balls) when a left-hitting game is performed in the normal state. The ball that has entered the right motorized accessory 164 is configured to always enter the first right entry opening 164r. Then, when a ball is made to enter the right electric accessory 164, the lottery right for the first special symbol is acquired (satisfies the lottery condition), as in the case where the ball is made to enter the first entry opening 64. ).

  Furthermore, when a ball is made to enter the first entrance opening 64, prize balls (four) are given in addition to the lottery right of the first special symbol as a privilege of having the ball enter. On the other hand, when a ball is made to enter the right electric auditors product 164, a prize ball (one) is awarded as a privilege of having made the ball enter, in addition to the lottery right of the first special symbol. In other words, when the normal state (normal symbol low probability state) is set as the gaming state, the lottery of the first special symbol is performed when the left-handed game is executed rather than the right-handed game. It is configured such that the number of prize balls awarded when the ball is thrown into the entrance where the ball is thrown in in order to easily acquire the right and to obtain the lottery right for the first special symbol is increased. ing. Therefore, during the normal state, the left-handed game is more advantageous to the player than the right-handed game.

  When a right-handed game is played in the normal state, about one third of the balls flowing down the right area enter the second right entrance 645. When a ball enters the right second entrance 645, a lottery right for executing a lottery of the second special symbol is given, and one prize ball is given. As will be described in detail later, the second special symbol lottery executed during the normal state is configured to set a long time (10 minutes) as the fluctuation time. In the present embodiment, the lottery right for the second special symbol is not stored (reserved). Therefore, even if a right-handed game is performed during the normal state, the second special symbol lottery is not performed smoothly.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 157, when the jackpot game is executed, a game in which a right-handed game is performed and a ball is won to the variable prize device 650 is executed. Since the normal state of the ordinary symbol is set during the execution of the jackpot game, a ball enters the first right entrance 164r of the right motorized accessory 164 during the jackpot game, and the jackpot game ends. Later, the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol (the number of reserved balls) becomes the upper limit.

  Accordingly, when the latent state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the game is started with the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol being the upper limit. In the present embodiment, when the latent state is set, a short variation (0.5 seconds, 10 seconds) is selected as the variation time of the second special symbol, and a long time (10 minutes) is selected as the variation time of the first special symbol. ) Is selected. Then, a game (small hit RUSH) of acquiring many prize balls while frequent small hits are won in the second special symbol lottery is executed.

  Further, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol in the latent state has reached a predetermined number (one or two), the number of balls is not more than the predetermined number (0, 3, or 4). It is configured such that a short variation time is easily selected as the variation time of the second special symbol variation. In other words, a period in which the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol becomes a predetermined number during the latent state is a period in which the number of small hit games executed per unit time tends to be the largest, and a game period advantageous to the player Becomes

  As described above, since the present embodiment does not have the hold storage function of storing the lottery right of the second special symbol, it is necessary to continuously execute the right-handed game during the latent state. The first special symbol fluctuates in the latent state for a long time (10 minutes). Therefore, in the latent state, it is difficult to reach the predetermined number (one or two) of the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol after the elapse of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol change being executed is forcibly stopped (discarded) in a part of the case where a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery. This allows the player to perform a game for reducing the number of reserved balls in the first special symbol while performing a game aiming for a small win in the lottery of the second special symbol during the latent state.

  In the present embodiment, the advantage period of the second special symbol lottery (fluctuation) in the latent state is set based on the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol, and further, the second special symbol lottery is performed. When the game to be executed (right-handed game) is executed, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol can be increased. Therefore, when the advantageous period of the second special symbol lottery (fluctuation) is set, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know how long the advantageous period will continue.

  In addition, since the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment does not have the hold storage function of storing the lottery right of the second special symbol, the pachinko machine 10 changes the second special symbol based on the number of hold memories of the first special symbol. Is selected, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the second special symbol may be selected based on a value obtained by adding the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol and the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol. May be selected.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the long variation time is always selected for the variation time of the first special symbol selected during the latent state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured such that the fluctuation time of the short fluctuation (for example, 20 seconds) is selected with a probability of about 1/10 as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol fluctuation in the latent state. With such a configuration, it is possible to include the lapse of the variation time of the first special symbol in a realistic method of causing the storage of the first special symbol to be held during the latent state. Therefore, it is possible to substantially have a plurality of triggers for reducing the number of reserved memories (the number of reserved balls) of the first special symbol in the latent state.

  In addition, as will be described later in detail, in the present embodiment, when the discarding condition is satisfied in a part of the case of winning a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, the first special symbol variation being executed is discarded. Although it is configured as described above, a discard condition that can be satisfied regardless of the result of the lottery of the second special symbol may be used. For example, the number of balls that have entered the right variable winning device 1650 during the execution of the small hit game May be set based on a predetermined winning condition (for example, 11 winnings), or may be provided in any of the game areas (right area) of the game board 13. Discarding conditions that may be satisfied when a ball enters the ball opening may be set. As described above, the discarded state of the first special symbol is established due to various factors, so that it is difficult for the player to understand at what timing the advantageous period is set.

  Next, the configuration of the right electric accessory 164 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 158 and 159. FIG. 158 (a) is a front perspective view schematically showing a closed state of the right electric accessory 164 (a state in which the opening / closing door 164r1 is closed), and FIG. It is the front perspective view which showed typically the open state (state in which the opening / closing door 164r1 was open).

  As shown in FIG. 158 (a), convex portions 164r1a to 164r1c are provided on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 164r1 so as to prevent the game balls from flowing down. Since the game ball flowing down the upper surface of the door 164r1 is prevented from flowing down by the convex portions 164r1a to 164r1c, it flows down on the door 164r1 from the left side to the right side along the outer periphery of the convex portions 164r1a to 164r1c. That is, on the opening / closing door 164r1, a serpentine flow path is formed by the respective convex portions 164r1a to 164r1c. For this reason, as compared with a case where the respective convex portions 164r1a to 164r1c are not provided (that is, a case where the game ball flows down linearly from the left direction to the right direction as viewed from the front on the opening / closing door 164r1), the opening / closing door 164r1 is provided. The time required to completely flow down the upper surface can be increased. Thereby, while one ball is flowing down the upper surface of the door 164r1, a plurality of balls (subsequent balls) can be easily made to reach the upper surface of the door 164r1. Therefore, the period during which the ball passing through the through gate 67 flows down on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 164r1 can be lengthened, and the ball can easily be awarded to the right electric auditors product 164 when the game per game is executed. can do.

  Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 160, in the present embodiment, when a high probability state (probable change state) of a normal symbol is set as a game state, most of the balls passing through the through gate 67 are rightward. In order to enter the electric accessory 164, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the operation content of the game per ordinary symbol, and the path of the ball passing through the through gate 67 are designed. With such a configuration, the probability change state increases the probability of winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery from the normal state, and executes the right-handed game, thereby performing the lottery of the first special symbol than in the normal state. Can be easily executed. In addition, during the probable change state, it becomes difficult to perform the lottery of the second special symbol, so that it is possible to suppress the execution of a game that is excessively advantageous to the player playing the game during the probable change state. it can. In the present embodiment, if a ball enters the right second entrance 645 during the probable change state and the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, the fluctuation time (60) shorter than the normal state is used. Second) is selected.

  With this configuration, during the execution of the second special symbol change for a long time (for example, 10 minutes), the state shifts from the probable state to the latent state, and the state shifts to the latent state. Nevertheless, the occurrence of a situation where the lottery of the second special symbol cannot be executed for a long time is suppressed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as a transition condition for transitioning the gaming state from the probable state to the latent state, the number of executions of the special symbol lottery (variation) executed during the probable state is a predetermined number (50 times). A first transition condition that is satisfied when the vehicle has arrived and a second transition condition that is satisfied when a specific small hit (small hit C) is won in the second special symbol lottery executed during the probability change state are set. are doing. That is, in the probable change state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is difficult to be executed, when a specific small hit (small hit C) is won in the lottery of the second special symbol (when the second shift condition is satisfied), the certainty change is performed. Even if the number of executions of the special symbol lottery (variation) executed during the state has not reached the predetermined number (50 times), it is possible to shift to the latent state.

  FIG. 158 (b) is a diagram showing a state where the opening / closing door 164r1 is opened. As shown in FIG. 158 (b), the opening / closing door 164r1 slides from the front side in the front view to the rear side in the front view, and moves inside the game board 13 through an opening provided in the game board 13. Is stored. As a result, the right first entrance 164r is opened. Although not described in detail, the opening / closing door 164r1 is connected to a solenoid (not shown) that can be switched between an on state and an off state based on an instruction from the main control device 110. When a current is supplied to the solenoid, the solenoid is turned on and the door 164r1 is opened. In other words, the structure is such that current flows to the solenoid only when a normal symbol lottery is won and a normal symbol win game is executed. This eliminates the need for power during the period when the power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 and the opening and closing door 164r1 occupying a large proportion is in the closed state, so that the power consumption of the pachinko machine 10 can be suppressed. .

  When the first entrance 164r is opened (when the opening / closing door 164r1 is opened), the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 can win the right electric accessory 164. Further, since the interval in the height direction of the opening for accommodating the opening / closing door 164r1 is sufficiently small with respect to the diameter of the game ball, the upper surface of the opening / closing door 164r1 is moved when the sliding movement of the opening / closing door 164r1 is started. When the game ball that has flowed down is not stored inside the game board 13 together with the door 164r1, and the door 164r1 slides into the game board 13, it is located on the upper surface of the door 164r1. The ball can be dropped from the door 164r1 toward the first entrance 164r.

  In the seventh embodiment, by providing three convex portions 164r1a to 164r1c on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 164r1, the game balls bypass the convex portions 164r1a to 164r1c, and the game balls pass through the opening / closing door 164r1. Although the passage period is configured to be long, it is not limited to this. For example, instead of or in addition to providing the convex portions 164r1a to 164r1c, the material of the upper surface of the opening / closing door 164r1 has a higher coefficient of friction than other portions (the surface of the game board 13, the inner surface of the variable winning device 65, and the like). It may be made of a large material (for example, an elastic body or the like), or may be processed to make the game ball difficult to roll (for example, to provide irregularities on the surface).

  FIG. 159 is a plan view of the opening / closing door 164r1 viewed from the vertical upper surface side. As shown in FIG. 159, passage detection sensors 228a to 228f capable of detecting passage of a sphere are embedded in a zigzag path along which the sphere can roll (easy) on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 164r1. These passage detection sensors 228a to 228f are arranged at a distance from each other at least exceeding the diameter of the game ball in a path formed on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 164r1. The known outputs of these passage detection sensors 228a to 228f become H (high) when a game ball is arranged above them, and output L (low) when there is nothing obstructing the above. It is composed of an optical sensor. In the seventh embodiment, a combination of the outputs of the passage detection sensors 228a to 228f is monitored on the sound lamp control device 113 side. Then, the passing state of the ball on the opening / closing door 164r1 is calculated based on the combination of the outputs of the passing detection sensors 228a to 228f, and the ball passing state notification based on the calculation result can be executed.

  With this configuration, it is possible for the player to know how close the ball fired by the right-handed game has approached the right second entrance 645 during the probable change state. Therefore, by shifting the execution timing of the right-handed game in the probable change state based on the content of the ball passing situation notification to be executed, the interest of the game in the probable change state can be improved. In the seventh embodiment, as shown in FIG. 159, the passage detection sensors 228a to 228f are provided only on the opening / closing door 164r1, but the invention is not limited thereto. A passage detection sensor is provided in an area after passing through to reach the door 164r1 or in an area after passing through the upper surface of the door 164r1, and the number of balls reaching the door 164r1 and the upper surface of the door 164r1 are determined. The number of passed balls may be configured to be detectable.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 160, a description will be given of a flowing state when a ball fired by a right-handed game flows down the right region. FIG. 160 (a) is a latent state (a high probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol), and schematically shows a ball flowing state when the ball enters the second right entrance 645. FIG. 160 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a ball flowing down state when the small hitting game is being executed in the latent state.

  In the seventh embodiment, when a latent state (a high probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol) is set, a ball is inserted into the right second entrance 645 by a right-handed game. The game to be balled is configured to be the most advantageous game for the player. When the right-handed game is executed during the latent state, as shown in FIG. 160 (a), the ball passing through the through gate 67 flows down the upper surface of the opening / closing door 164r1 of the right electric accessory 164 in the closed state. 2 Enters the ball entrance 645.

  As will be described in detail later, in the latent state, which is a low probability state of the ordinary symbol, the probability of winning in the ordinary symbol lottery executed based on the ball passing through the through gate 67 is reduced to ２. It is configured such that 30 seconds is set as a period (variation time) from the execution of the normal symbol lottery to the stop display (fixed) of the lottery result. In other words, when a right-handed game is performed in a game state in which a low probability state of a normal symbol is set (a normal state, a latent state, and a big hit game state), the through gate 67 is set at a ratio of one ball to two balls. Is passed, one ball per four balls is won per regular figure, and the game per regular figure is executed once every 60 seconds.

  Further, in the seventh embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 158, a meandering spherical flow path (passing period 1.. 3 seconds), by continuously executing the right-handed game, it is possible with a high probability that a plurality of balls can stay on the open / close door 164r1 of the right electric accessory 164 in the closed state. Make up.

  Therefore, even when the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, it is possible to cause one or two balls to be awarded to the right electric accessory 164 in one minute. In addition, since the ball is easily made to stay on the opening / closing door 164r1 of the right electric auditorium 164, even if the game period per game is set to a short period (for example, 0.2 seconds open), The ball can easily be awarded to the right electric auditors product 164 during the normal game.

  By setting the game period of the per-figure per game to be short in this manner, when it is determined that the per-figure per-game is to be executed based on the normal symbol stop display mode, the right-handed game is executed. By the time the player reaches the right electric combination 164, it is possible to end the game per day drawing. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the execution of the game in which the right hitting game is executed after it is determined that the result of the lottery of the ordinary symbol is a hit, and the ball is efficiently won to the right electric auditors product 164.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 160 (b), in the seventh embodiment, a right variable winning device (second attacker) that is opened during a small hit game is provided above (upstream) the through gate 67. Is provided. Therefore, even in the state where the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, if the second special symbol lottery can be smoothly executed in the gaming state (the latent state), the small hitting game is executed. It is possible to suppress the ball from reaching the through gate 67 and the right electric accessory 164.

  With this configuration, even when the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, it is more difficult for the right electric accessory 164 to win a ball in the latent state than in the normal state or during the jackpot game. can do. Therefore, in the right-handed game executed during the jackpot game, by making the right electric auditors 164 win a ball, it is possible to acquire the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol (special figure 1 reserved ball number) up to the upper limit. However, it is possible to suppress an excessive increase in the number of special figure 1 reserved balls due to the right-handed game executed during the latent state.

<Production contents in the seventh embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 161 to FIG. 165, among the various effect contents executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, characteristic effect contents will be described. Specifically, the flow of the effect from the setting of the probable state as the gaming state to the setting of the latent state and the flow of the effect executed during the latent state will be described.

  First, with reference to FIG. 161 and FIG. 162, a description will be given of the flow of the effect from the setting of the probable state as the gaming state to the setting of the latent state. In this embodiment, a part of the case where the big hit is won in the special symbol lottery is configured so that a probable change state (high probability state of the special symbol, high probability state of the ordinary symbol) is set after the end of the jackpot game. I have. When the predetermined transition condition is satisfied in the state where the probable change state is set, the game state is changed from the probable change state to the latent state. Specifically, as the probability change state, the high probability state of the special symbol continues until the next jackpot winning, and the high probability state of the ordinary symbol continues until the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times. That is, when the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times without winning a big hit after the probability change state is set, the game state is changed from the probability change state to the latent state. Thus, in the present embodiment, when the probable change state is set, an effect is performed to indicate a period until the latent state that is most advantageous to the player is set. This makes it possible to notify the player of the conditions until the latent state is set in an easily understandable manner.

  FIG. 161 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display contents displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in a state in which a probable change state (probability change mode) is set. 161 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display contents displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 when the condition for shifting to the latent state is satisfied in the probability change mode. .

  As described above, the seventh embodiment is configured to directly shift to the most advantageous latent mode (latent state) by elapse (addition) of the number of time savings in the probable change state. Therefore, in the probable state (probable mode), an effect aiming at the latent state is executed. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 161 (a), an effect is performed in which a character 811 imitating a rabbit climbs a rocky mountain. In addition, in the display area HR1 formed above the character 811 climbing the rocky mountain, the character “Aim at the top!” Is displayed, and in the display area HR2 formed on the right side of the character 811, the probability change mode Is displayed, indicating the remaining number of times of change (number of lotteries) until the end of the period (the number of time savings passes a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times)). The example of FIG. 161 (a) illustrates a case where the character “remaining 50 m” is displayed in the display area HR2. The remaining meter display up to the top is decremented and displayed by 1 m each time the variable display (variable display of the third symbol) is executed once. ) Can be easily understood to be the remaining number of fluctuations before shifting to the latent mode.

  In the present embodiment, the display mode of the meter display displayed in the display area HR2 is changed (subtracted) every time the variable display of the third symbol is executed, and the meter display after the change (subtraction) is performed. When the display mode is a specific transition display mode (for example, “0 m remaining”), the game state is configured to shift from the probable state to the latent state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Is configured so as to be added each time the variable display of the third symbol is executed, and the latent mode is set when the display mode (numerical value) of the meter display is added to a specific numerical value. You may. Further, it is not always necessary to change the display mode of the meter display every time the variable display of the third symbol is executed. For example, when the variable display of the third symbol is executed a plurality of times, the display mode of the meter display is changed. It may be configured to be variable. With this configuration, the timing at which the display mode of the meter display changes can be made different from the variation display timing of the third symbol. By performing the effect of greatly reducing the display mode (numerical value) of the meter display at a time while recognizing the approximate period until is set, an unexpected effect can be provided.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as a display mode of the meter display displayed in the display area HR2, it is assumed that the period until the latent mode is set is short (the timing at which the transition condition is satisfied is approaching). In order to notify the player, only the effect of subtracting the display mode (numerical value) of the meter display is executed, but a specific transition display mode (for example, "Remaining 0 m" may be displayed, and for example, an effect of temporarily increasing the display mode (numerical value) of the meter display may be executed while the probable change state is set. This makes it difficult for the player to predict when the latent state is set, so that the player can play the game while always expecting the latent state to be set.

  In this case, at least a plurality of transition conditions, specifically, a jackpot type that triggered the setting of the probability change state, and a transition condition for the transition to the latent state from the probability change state to the latent probability state, A first shift condition (e.g., 20 times reduced) that is likely to be satisfied and a second shift condition that is less easily satisfied than the first shift condition (e.g., 20 time reductions) as the time-save ending condition for ending the time-save state according to the gaming state. (For example, the number of times of saving time is 50 times), and any one of the time saving ending conditions is set, and when the probable change state is set, a display indicating a period until the first transition condition that is likely to be satisfied is satisfied. An effect in which the mode (for example, “remaining 20 m”) is displayed in the display area HR2, and when the actually set time saving end condition is the first transition condition, the display mode of the meter display is directly subtracted. When the execution is completed and the actually set time saving end condition is the second shift condition, while increasing the display mode of the meter display based on the number of remaining working hours, a specific timing is established at the timing when the second shift condition is satisfied. What is necessary is just to comprise so that a transition display mode may be displayed. With this configuration, in the case where the probable change state is set after the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand what the time reduction end condition set for the current probable change state is.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of time-saving end conditions are set in a probable change state set after the execution of a specific jackpot game. More specifically, the first time-saving end condition that is satisfied when the number of executions of the special symbol change (lottery) executed during the probable change state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50 times), and the execution during the probable change state. The second time reduction ending condition that is established when the result of the special symbol change (lottery) performed is a specific result (for example, a small hit C win), is set. The display area HR2 is configured to display a meter display based on the first time-saving end condition capable of calculating the timing at which the time-saving end condition is satisfied in advance. That is, during the probable change state, the meter display is decremented each time the special symbol change is executed, and when the meter display becomes a specific transition display mode (for example, “0 m remaining”), the latent display state is set. The effect of notifying that the operation is performed is executed. On the other hand, before the first time saving end condition described above is satisfied (before the display mode of the meter display changes to a specific transition display mode), if the second time saving end condition is satisfied, the display of the meter display is displayed. As a shortened effect in which the mode (numerical value) rapidly decreases, an effect in which the meter display is in a specific transition display mode (for example, “0 m remaining”) is performed after the effect in which the character 811 climbs the mountain vigorously.

  In this way, by configuring the meter display displayed in the display area HR2 to be variable in various modes, it is possible to make it difficult to understand at what timing the transition to the latent state is made, so that Can be played while always expecting the player who is playing the game to shift to the latent state. In addition, even if any of the time saving end conditions is satisfied, the transition to the latent state can be notified to the player by displaying the specific transition display mode as the display mode of the meter display, An easy-to-understand effect can be provided to the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 161 (b), a description will be given of the contents of the effect that is executed when the time saving end condition is satisfied in the probable change state. FIG. 162 (a) is a diagram showing an example of display contents in a case where the number of time savings has been elapsed (a time saving end condition has been satisfied) in the probable change mode (probable change state). As shown in FIG. 162 (a), when the time reduction end condition (for example, a special symbol change of a predetermined number of times) is satisfied, the effect that the character 811 reaches the top of the rocky mountain is executed, and the display area HR1 is displayed. The character "Arrive at the top!" Is displayed. In addition, a character “0 m remaining” is displayed in the display area HR2. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the state has shifted to the latent state (latency mode).

  Here, in the present embodiment, when the latent state is set, by executing the right-handed game, the lottery of the second special symbol is performed more than when the gaming state other than the latent state is set. Is configured to be easily executed, and a small hit is won with a high probability (higher probability than the lottery of the first special symbol) in the lottery of the second special symbol. Then, by executing the second special symbol lottery frequently, the small hitting game is frequently executed, and the player is allowed to execute a game capable of acquiring many benefits (prize balls). . Hereinafter, a game in which the small hit game is frequently executed by the second special symbol lottery in the latent state will be referred to as “RUSH”, and the effect performed during the RUSH game will be referred to as “RUSH effect”.

  FIG. 162 (a) shows the state from the transition to the latent state (latency mode) to the state in which a prize ball can be actually obtained (until the small win is won in the second special symbol lottery). It is a figure showing a display mode in an interim state (preparation state). As shown in FIG. 162 (a), in the preparatory state, the character "Right-handed" is displayed in the small area Dm3, and "Rush is started by right-handed!" In the display area HR1. Is displayed. In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, the characters “RUSH in preparation” are displayed. With these display contents, the player can easily understand that the player enters a RUSH state in which a prize ball can be acquired by performing a right-handed game.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, the latent state is set when the time saving end condition is satisfied in the probability change state, but the second special symbol lottery is executed immediately after the latent state is set. You may not be able to. Specifically, when the second special symbol change is executed during the probable change state, and the time saving end condition is satisfied based on the execution of the first special symbol change while the second special symbol change is being executed, Means that the gaming state shifts from the probable state to the latent state while the second special symbol change is being executed. In this case, a situation occurs in which the second special symbol change in the latent state is not executed until the currently executed second special symbol change (the second special symbol change whose change started in the probable change state) is stopped and displayed. .

  As described above, when a period during which the second special symbol lottery cannot be newly performed occurs after the latent state is set, the display screen (RUSH preparation) shown in FIG. By displaying the (screen), it is possible to notify the player that the RUSH game will be executed later, so that even when the latent state is set, the RUSH game is not executed. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, at the timing when the gaming state shifts from the probable state to the latent state, the remaining fluctuation time of the second special symbol fluctuation being executed is longer than a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds or longer). In the case of, the RUSH preparation period display shown in FIG. 162 (a) is configured to be executed. However, after the game state in which the advantageous game that is advantageous to the player can be executed is set, the actual advantage is set. If the length of the period until the execution condition of the game is satisfied is a predetermined period, it may be configured to notify that the advantageous game will be executed later. For example, during the disadvantageous game (probable change state), In a pachinko machine 10 in which a game method (for example, left-handed game) to be executed by a player and a game method (for example, right-handed game) to be executed by a player during an advantageous game (probable state) are different, Latent state is set Using the period until the second special symbol variations are actually executed by the right-handed player since the, it may be configured to perform RUSH preparing display shown in FIG. 162 (a).

  Further, for example, in the disadvantageous game state that is disadvantageous to the player, it is easier to win a miss in the normal symbol lottery than in the advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player, and the selected variable time is longer. A pachinko machine 10 that is configured to be easily configured, and that is configured so that the second special symbol lottery is easily executed during a general symbol per game that is executed when a normal symbol lottery is won. Then, when the advantageous game state is set, the RUSH preparation period display shown in FIG. 162 (a) is executed during the period until the normal symbol change executed during the disadvantageous game state is stopped and displayed. May be configured. In this case, with respect to the display screen shown in FIG. 162 (a), the display mode of “right-handed” displayed in the guidance display area Dm3 is not displayed (displayed so as to be hard to see), or “preparation” is displayed in the display area HR1. Please wait for a while. " That is, although the latent state is set, the player is notified that the second special symbol lottery cannot be executed (is difficult to execute) even if the right-handed game is executed. The RUSH preparation period display may be displayed as described above. Thus, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the RUSH game is not executed in spite of the execution of the right-handed game, and the player is not distrusted.

  Then, when the second special symbol change (lottery) is executed during the latent state, the display screen shown in FIG. 162 (b) is displayed, and the RUSH effect is executed. FIG. 162 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents displayed when the RUSH game is executed. As shown in FIG. 162 (b), when the ball enters the second right entrance 645 during the latent state and the second special symbol change in which the small hit is won is executed, the display area HR1 is displayed. The character "RUSH START" is displayed in the sub display area Ds, and the character "RUSH rush !!" Further, an icon (treasure box 812) imitating a treasure box is displayed in the main display area Dm. Thereby, during the RUSH game, the effect (RUSH effect) using the icon (the treasure box 812) imitating the treasure box can be notified to the player in an easily understandable manner.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 163, the display contents of the RUSH effect executed during the RUSH game in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 163 is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents displayed during the RUSH effect. As shown in FIG. 163, when the RUSH effect is executed, an effect in which the character 811 opens the treasure box 812 is executed. Then, from the opened treasure box 812, an effect is executed in which a lottery result display mode indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery this time is displayed. As the lottery result display mode, for example, when the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery is a small hit, a display mode imitating "V" is displayed, and when the lottery result is a big hit, the character "" is displayed. Is displayed, and if it is off, a display mode imitating a "cross" is displayed. As described above, the effect of opening the treasure box 812 and the effect of displaying the contents of the treasure box 812 can be displayed on the constantly displayed treasure box 812, so that the lottery result of the second special symbol can be displayed. And the effect of displaying the treasure box 812, the effect of opening the treasure box 812, and the effect of displaying the contents of the treasure box 812, in which the variation time of the second special symbol is set shorter. Also, since the number of effects to be executed can be reduced, it is possible to execute effects that are easy for the player to understand.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 164 and FIG. 165, an effect performed during a super RUSH game, which is advantageous to a player during a RUSH game, during another RUSH game will be described. In the present embodiment, the variation time of the second special symbol executed during the latent state is configured to be variable based on the number of special figure reservations stored (the number of first special symbol storages). Specifically, in the second special symbol change executed when the number of special figure reservations is a specific number (for example, 1), the second special symbol change executed when the number of special figure reservations is other than the specific number is performed. It is configured such that a shorter change time is more easily selected than the special symbol change. As described above, while the latent state is set, an effect of giving a bonus (prize ball) to the player is performed by frequent occurrence of small hit games based on the small hit winning of the second special symbol lottery. .

  Therefore, the shorter the fluctuation time of the second special symbol fluctuation during the latent state, the larger the ratio of the small hitting game period to the unit period can be, so that the game state can be set to be more playable by the player. it can. Hereinafter, during the RUSH game, the RUSH game during the period in which the number of special figure reservations becomes a specific number and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol fluctuation becomes short will be referred to as a super RUSH game, and will be described.

  First, a description will be given of the effect contents executed when the RUSH game is switched to the super RUSH game. FIG. 164 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect contents executed in a state where the special figure reservation number is easily subtracted during the RUSH game. In the present embodiment, when a specific small hit (for example, small hit B) is won in the second special symbol lottery executed during the latent state, the first special symbol change being executed is forcibly removed. Is configured to stop display. Further, a long variation time (for example, 10 minutes) is easily selected for the first special symbol variation executed during the latent state. Furthermore, it is configured such that a reserved ball of the first special symbol (special figure 1 reserved ball) can be acquired by a right-handed game executed during the latent state. In other words, it is configured such that it is difficult to reduce the number of special figure 1 reserved balls based on the elapse of the fluctuation time while executing the RUSH game during the latent state.

  Therefore, in order to reduce the number of reserved special figure 1 balls until the condition for executing the super RUSH game is satisfied, it is necessary to win a specific small hit in the second special symbol lottery. Then, when the second special symbol variation that has won the specific small hit is executed, as shown in FIG. 164 (a), the character "Aim for more customers" is displayed in the sub display area Ds, and the main In the display area Dm, an effect for the character 811 to aim at a higher position is executed.

  Specifically, a display mode indicating a stage corresponding to a difference between the currently acquired special figure 1 number of reserved balls and the number of special figure 1 reserved balls that is a condition for executing the super RUSH game is displayed. In the display area HR71 formed on the right side of the main display area Dm, a guidance suggestion display for suggesting a situation until the super RUSH game is executed to the player is displayed.

  Then, when a specific small hit is won a plurality of times during the RUSH game and the number of reserved special figure 1 balls reaches the specific number (2), the display mode shown in FIG. 164 (b) is displayed. FIG. 164 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of display contents displayed when the execution condition of the super RUSH game is satisfied. When the execution condition of the super RUSH game (for example, the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 becomes 2) is established, the character 811 reaches the top, and the display mode for notifying that the execution condition of the super RUSH game is established is manually set. The effect taken is executed. Then, in the display area HR71, a display mode “2” indicating that the current special figure 1 reserved ball count has the execution condition of the super RUSH game is displayed.

  164 (a) and (b) are displayed, that is, after the effect mode indicating the super RUSH entry is set in the special figure discarding setting process (see S4643 in FIG. 186) described later, When the special figure 1 suspension is acquired, the super RUSH game may not be executed when the first special symbol change being executed is discarded. Therefore, in a state where FIGS. 164 (a) and (b) are displayed, a process of determining whether or not a special figure 1 reservation has been newly executed is performed. Is executed. For example, when the special figure 1 reservation is newly acquired, an effect is executed in which the peak shown in FIG. 164 (a) moves away in accordance with the number of the newly acquired special figure 1 reservations. Thus, even if the super RUSH entry trigger disappears during the execution of the effect suggesting the super RUSH entry, it is possible to execute an effect that does not give the player a sense of discomfort.

  Further, in FIGS. 164 (a) and (b), the effect contents when the super RUSH game is executed by reducing the number of special figure 1 reserved balls has been described. Even when the super RUSH game is executed by increasing the number of balls, an effect indicating super rush entry is executed. In this case, a process is performed to determine whether or not the present time is in a state in which an advantageous period (a period during which a super RUSH game is executed) is set by increasing the number of special figure 1 reservations by one (increasing advantageous state). If it is determined that the game is in the increase advantage state, it is determined whether or not the game per ordinary drawing is executed. In this determination, the lottery result of the ordinary symbol fluctuation being executed and the prefetching process based on the information held in the ordinary symbol (the same process as the prefetching process for the special symbol executed in each of the above-described embodiments is performed by the ordinary symbol) Is determined based on the result of pre-determination (pre-reading result) as to whether or not the information for winning the public figure is included in the information processing. Then, when it is determined that the game per ordinary drawing is to be executed, a super RUSH entry effect for indicating that an opportunity to increase the number of special figure 1 reservations will come soon.

  As a production mode of this super RUSH entry performance, the player is notified that the super RUSH game is to be executed by increasing the number of special figure 1 reservations (by making the right electric role 164 win a ball). The notification mode is set. As a result, it is possible to easily establish a condition for causing the player to execute the super RUSH game. In the present embodiment, the player can grasp the conditions for executing the super RUSH game, that is, the case where the super RUSH game is executed by reducing the number of special figure 1 reserved balls, and the case where the special figure 1 reserved In the case where the super RUSH game is executed by increasing the number of balls, an effect that enables the player to identify the super RUSH game is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the super RUSH game is executed. A configuration in which the player is notified only that it is in a state in which the condition for making it easy to be satisfied is established, and the player is allowed to select whether to execute a game for increasing the number of special figure 1 reservations or to execute a game for decreasing the number. You may.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 165, the contents of the effect performed during the super RUSH will be described. FIG. 165 is a diagram showing an example of the effect screen during the super RUSH. When the super RUSH game is executed, the second special symbol change having a shorter change time than the normal RUSH game is easily executed, and as a result, the execution interval of the small hit game is shortened, and the small hit game is executed in a unit time. The number of times can be made larger than in a normal RUSH game. Therefore, during the super RUSH game, a game period that is more advantageous to the player than during the normal RUSH game is provided. Then, during the Super RUSH game, as shown in FIG. 165 (a), the character "Super RUSH" is displayed in the main display area Dm, and a plurality of treasure boxes 812a to 812c are displayed. Then, the letters "speed up" are displayed in the sub display area Ds.

  In other words, during the Super RUSH game, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol change becomes short (for example, 0.5 seconds), and the lottery of the second special symbol lottery is performed using one fluctuation period of the second special symbol change. Because it is difficult to execute the effect that suggests the result (the effect of displaying the treasure box) and the effect of informing the lottery result (the effect of opening the treasure box and display the contents), it is difficult to execute the The treasure boxes 812a to 812c are displayed, and an effect of opening the treasure box based on the lottery result is executed as appropriate.

  Specifically, a plurality of treasure chests having different display modes (for example, colors and designs) are displayed in advance, and an effect of opening a treasure chest according to the result of the lottery of the second special symbol to be executed is executed. Is configured. In this case, as a lottery result in which the lottery result of the second special symbol is advantageous to the player, for example, when a jackpot in which the latent state is set again after the end of the jackpot game is won, a rainbow or gold As a lottery result that opens a luxurious treasure chest and is disadvantageous to the player, for example, a jackpot in which the normal state is set after the end of the jackpot game, that is, if a winning is completed in a RUSH game, a tattered An effect to open the treasure chest is executed.

  In this way, by displaying a plurality of treasure boxes having different display modes in advance, the lottery result can be changed without executing an effect of changing the display mode of the treasure box displayed according to the result of the second special symbol lottery. (An effect of changing the display mode of the open treasure chest) can be easily executed.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, since the second special symbol mainly executed during the RUSH game (super RUSH game) does not have the hold storage function, for example, the winning information of the second special symbol stored and stored is stored. It is determined in advance, and based on the result of the preliminary determination, an effect (so-called look-ahead effect) indicating a lottery result cannot be executed from a period before the second special symbol change based on the winning information is executed. It is composed. Therefore, since it is difficult to set a long period for performing the effect indicating the lottery result of each second special symbol lottery, it is possible to further enhance the effect of displaying a plurality of treasure chests having different display modes in advance. it can.

  When a configuration in which a plurality of treasure boxes having different display modes are displayed in advance as in the present embodiment is used, the number of treasure boxes displayed simultaneously and the display mode may be set at random, The display mode may be configured to be variable according to the number of games (the number of executions of the special symbol lottery) in the state. In addition, the current special figure reserved ball number (reserved ball number of the first special symbol) is read, and it is determined whether or not the super RUSH game is easy to end based on the read result. May be configured to change the display mode and the number of displays. With this configuration, not only the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery but also the super RUSH game status can be grasped by the player using the display mode and the number of display of the treasure chest. Can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 165 (b), a description will be given of the effect contents of the effect indicating the end of the super RUSH game during the super RUSH game. FIG. 165 (b) is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen displayed in an end suggestion effect indicating the end of the super RUSH game. As described above, in the present embodiment, the super RUSH game is executed when the number of special figure reserved balls (the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol) is a specific number (one or two). The right side area of the game board 13 is configured so that the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol (the number of reserved balls 1) can be increased by a game (right-handed game) executed during the super RUSH game. (See FIG. 157).

  Therefore, during the Super RUSH game, the number of special figure 1 reserved balls may increase, that is, the number of special figure 1 reserved balls may increase from two to three, and the super RUSH game may end. In such a case, an end suggestion effect as shown in FIG. 165 (b) is executed. In the state shown in FIG. 165 (b), the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is two, and during the Super RUSH game, a normal symbol is won (winning probability 1/30), and the right electric accessory 164 is This is an end suggestion effect that is executed when the game is released, and a display mode indicating that the super RUSH game is ended is displayed in the main display area Dm, indicating that the character 811 is crouching down. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, the character “Pinch to end” is displayed.

  By executing the end suggestion effect in this manner, a ball is awarded to the right electric auditors product 164 during the super RUSH game, and the super RUSH game shifts to a normal RUSH game due to an increase in the number of reserved special figure 1 balls. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. In the example shown in FIG. 165 (b), in the state where the Super RUSH game ends, that is, in a state where the Super RUSH game ends due to an increase in the special figure 1 pending ball number, the special figure 1 pending ball number is increased. Although it is configured not to notify the player that the state is likely to increase (a state in which the game is executed per day), the present invention is not limited to this. A guide message may be displayed to display a comment of "Sasero" and make it difficult for the ball to win the right electric accessory 164 during the per-game game. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the super RUSH game from ending based on the increase in the number of reserved special figure 1 balls, and to display the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 to the player during the super RUSH game. Can be watched, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  The execution timing of the end suggestion effect shown in FIG. 165 (b) may be the start timing of a per-figure game, or the normal symbol fluctuation (variation time of 10 to 30 seconds) that has been won per per-figure. The start timing, the timing when the remaining variation time of the ordinary symbol variation reaches a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the information included in the ordinary symbol holding ball is determined in advance, and a predetermined value set based on the result of the preliminary determination is determined. Timing (for example, 30 seconds before the game per day is executed) may be used.

  Furthermore, when the above-described guidance notification (the guidance notification that interrupts the right-handed game to make it difficult for the ball to win the right electric auditorium 164 during the per-game game) is executed, the notification content of the guidance notification is performed. When the right-handed game is interrupted after grasping, the ball fired by the right-handed game executed before the interruption is guided to the right electric auditorium 164 in such a period that the ball cannot be won. The notification may be executed, for example, the guide notification may be executed 10 seconds before the game per day is executed. This allows the player who has grasped the guidance notification to reliably execute a game without increasing the number of special figure 1 reserved balls. In addition, in the case where the game per ordinary figure is not actually executed, or in the case where, for example, the information included in the ordinary symbol holding ball is determined in advance, and the case in which the game per ordinary figure is executed after 60 seconds is determined in advance, that is, the right The end suggestion effect (so-called gaseous effect) described above may be executed at a timing when the number of reserved special figure 1 reserved balls cannot increase without interrupting the betting game.

  In FIG. 165 (b) described above, the special figure 1 reserved ball number is increased and the special figure 1 reserved ball number is no longer a specific number (1 or 2), and the super RUSH game can be ended. Conversely, the effect of the end suggestion was explained, but conversely, as the number of special figure 1 reserved balls decreases, the number of special figure 1 special figure 1 reserved balls no longer becomes a specific number (one or two), and the Super RUSH game ends. In some cases, you can.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 166, an end suggestion effect that is executed when the super RUSH game ends when the number of reserved special figure 1 balls decreases will be described. FIG. 166 is a diagram illustrating an example of the effect screen of the end suggestion effect performed when the super RUSH game ends when the number of reserved special figure 1 balls decreases. The state shown in FIG. 166 is a state where the number of reserved special figure 1 balls is one and the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol fluctuation being executed is 1.5 seconds. As shown in FIG. 166, an end suggestion effect is executed in the main display area Dm on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in a display mode similar to the display mode shown in FIG. 165 (b) described above. .

  In this case, the first special symbol change is stopped and displayed after 1.5 seconds, and the next special symbol change is started, so that the number of reserved special figure 1 balls becomes 0 and the super RUSH game ends. Become. Therefore, in the sub-display area Ds, the characters “Pinch to end! By executing the end suggestion effect in this way, it is possible to easily inform the player that the Super RUSH game will end unless the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is increased.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of occasions for decreasing the number of special figure 1 reserved balls are provided. As shown in FIG. 166, in addition to the case where the first special symbol change being executed is stopped and displayed after the change time elapses, the second There is a case where a special small lottery is won in a special symbol lottery (small hit B), and the first special symbol change being executed is forcibly stopped (discarded). In any state where the opportunity is established (can be established), by executing the end suggestion effect shown in FIG. 166, the game is provided to the player when the super RUSH game shifts to the normal RUSH game. It is possible to suppress giving a strange feeling to the person.

  As the timing for executing the end suggestion effect shown in FIG. 166, the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol fluctuation being executed or the remaining fluctuation time of the second special symbol fluctuation winning the small hit B is determined. It is also possible to calculate the remaining period until the number of special figure 1 reserved balls becomes 0 based on the determination result, and execute the calculation at the timing when the calculation result becomes a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). Alternatively, the configuration may be such that the execution is performed at a predetermined interval (for example, at an interval of 30 seconds) from the timing when the number of reserved balls in special figure 1 is reduced from two to one. In other words, the state in which the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is one is a state in which the super RUSH game continues even if the number of special figure 1 reserved balls increases by one, so the number of special figure 1 reserved balls becomes zero. The end suggestion effect may be executed in order to reduce the number of reserved special figure 1 spheres to two without determining the timing of obtaining.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the super RUSH game is configured to be able to end even when the number of special figure 1 reserved balls increases or decreases. Up to now, it is possible to execute a game in which the Super RUSH game is continued by increasing the number of special figure 1 reserved balls and a game in which the super RUSH game is continued without increasing the special figure 1 reserved number. It can provide a novel gaming ability that is not available.

  It should be noted that the effect content is different from the effect content of the present embodiment, and for example, an end suggestion effect executed in a state where the end condition for ending the super RUSH game is easily satisfied by increasing the number of reserved special figure 1 balls (FIG. 165) (See FIG. 166) and the end suggestion effect (see FIG. 166) executed in a state in which the end condition for ending the super RUSH game is likely to be satisfied by reducing the number of reserved special figure 1 balls is made the same. Alternatively, an effect may be performed in which the player is allowed to select whether or not to continue the right-handed game in the sub display area Ds. As a result, the game method selected by the player, that is, the game method of continuing the super RUSH game by executing the right-handed game to increase the number of special figure 1 reserved balls, and increasing the number of special figure 1 reserved balls The duration of the Super RUSH game can be made different depending on the game method of continuing the Super RUSH game by interrupting the right-handed game so as not to allow the player to actively play the game. Can be. In addition, when the player selects an incorrect game method, the game method is a game method that makes it easier to satisfy the end condition of the super RUSH game, so that the game method selected by the player is changed to a later game result. The effect can be increased.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the period in which the super RUSH game is executed is configured to be in a specific range (one or two) in which the special figure 1 reserved ball number is continuous. Without limitation, for example, the special figure 1 reserved ball number in which the super RUSH game is executed may be set in a discontinuous range. For example, the special figure 1 reserved ball number may be one and three. In such a case, a super RUSH game may be executed. In this case, as the end suggestion effect, when the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 can be changed from 1 to 0 or when the number of reserved balls can be changed from 3 to 4, as shown in FIG. 165 (b) and FIG. When a similar end suggestion effect is performed and the special figure 1 reserved ball number can be changed from 1 to 2 or from 3 to 2, instead of suggesting the end of the super RUSH, the super RUSH game It is preferable to configure so as to execute a standby effect as an effect indicating that the state shifts to the standby state. That is, according to the above-described example, when the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is two, even if the number of special figure 1 reserved balls decreases or increases, the super RUSH game is executed, Compared to the case where the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is zero or four, the super RUSH game is more likely to be executed (standby state), so by executing the standby effect, the player is informed that effect. It can be informed clearly. Also, in this case, the first special symbol change executed when the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is 2 (special figure 1 reserved ball in a state where the special figure 1 reserved ball used in the first special symbol lottery this time is subtracted) The variation time selected in the first special symbol variation when the number of balls is two) is configured to be shorter than when the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is zero or four. May be. This makes it easy to shift from the standby state to the super RUSH game, and makes it possible for the player who has shifted to the standby state to enthusiastically play the game.

  Next, a game flow in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 167 is a transition diagram schematically showing transition contents of a gaming state in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 167, in the present embodiment, the normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state of ordinary symbol) and the probable state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of ordinary symbol) as the gaming state in this embodiment. , The latent state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) can be set. The amount of privilege given to the player playing the game is different depending on the set game state. Specifically, when the latent state is set, the most privilege is given to the player, and then, the amount of privilege given to the player in the order of the probability change state and the normal state is reduced. Make up.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, a normal state is set as the initial state of the pachinko machine 10 (a state in which the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch 122). Then, during the normal state, a special symbol lottery is easier to perform when the left-handed game is executed than when the right-handed game is executed, and therefore, the left-handed game aiming for the ball to enter the first entrance 64. Is executed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64 during the normal state, a first special symbol lottery in which a jackpot is won with a probability of 1/200 is executed. When the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the jackpot type (jackpot A7) in which the normal state is set again after the jackpot game is completed at a rate of 35% is set, and after the jackpot game is completed at a rate of 45% The jackpot type (jackpot B7) in which the state is set is set, and the jackpot type (jackpot C7) in which the latent state is set after the jackpot game is completed is set at a rate of 20%.

  That is, in the seventh embodiment, when the special symbol lottery in the normal state wins the jackpot, it is most likely to shift to the probable change state, and then to the normal state, and to shift to the latent state most. It is configured to be difficult. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a playability in which a latent state that is most advantageous to the player is set by passing through a plurality of game states.

  Next, when the probability change state is set, the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, so that the right electric accessory 164 is more easily opened than the low probability state of the normal symbol, and the first ball entry is performed by the left-handed game. Rather than letting the ball enter the mouth 64, it is easier for the ball to enter the right first entry opening 164r by the right-handed game, so that a game for executing the first special symbol lottery by the right-handed game is executed. . Further, during the probable change state, the special symbol is in a high probability state, and a first special symbol lottery in which a jackpot is won with a probability of 1/60 is executed. If the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery executed during the probable change state, the jackpot type (jackpot A7) in which the normal state is set after the jackpot game is completed at a rate of 35%, and the jackpot game is set at a rate of 45% The jackpot type (jackpot B7) for which the latent state is set after the end is set, and the jackpot type (jackpot C7) for which the probability change state is set again after the end of the jackpot game is set at a rate of 20%.

  That is, in the seventh embodiment, the probable change state is configured to be more easily shifted to the latent state when the jackpot is won than in the normal state which is the initial state. With this, when the jackpot is won during the normal state and the state shifts to the probable state, the state of the probable change can be set to a state that is more easily shifted to the latent state than the normal state, so that the player It is possible to make it easy to continue playing the game.

  Also, if the special symbol change is executed 50 times without winning the jackpot in the state where the probability change state is set, the condition for terminating the high probability state of the ordinary symbol (time saving termination condition) is satisfied. , So as to shift to a latent state. In other words, when the probability change state is set, the first transition condition (the probability of establishment is approximately 35%) that is satisfied when the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times without the jackpot winning (the winning probability of 1/60), When the jackpot is won during the state and the jackpot B7 is set, the latent state is set when any of the second shift conditions (satisfaction probability is about 30%) is satisfied. Will be. The first transition condition described above is one in which the probability of establishment varies according to the remaining period of the probable change state. For example, if the special symbol change is performed 49 times during the probable change state, the first transfer condition is executed next. The first transition condition is satisfied (the probability of establishment is about 90%) when the winning is achieved in the 50th special symbol change (winning probability 59/60).

  As described above, in the case where a plurality of transition conditions for transitioning the gaming state from the probability change state to the latent state are provided, a transition condition (first transition condition) in which the establishment probability varies according to the number of executions of the special symbol change. And a transition condition (second transition condition) in which the probability of establishment does not vary according to the number of times of execution of the special symbol change, a player playing a game in a certain change state is provided with a game The desired game result can be changed according to the progress of. Therefore, the probability that the latent state is set based on the establishment of the second transition condition is shorter than the probability that the latent state is set based on the establishment of the first transition condition immediately after the probable change state is set. During the period in which the second transition condition is higher, an effect is performed to inspire the player to determine whether the second transition condition is satisfied. If a predetermined period has elapsed since the probable change state was set, that is, the first transition condition was satisfied. The first transition condition is established for the player during a period in which the probability that the latent information is set based on the second transition condition is higher than the probability that the latent state is set based on the establishment of the second transition condition. It is possible to perform an effect that inspires whether or not.

  Next, the flow of the game in the latent state will be described. When the latent state is set, as described above, the RUSH game corresponding to the number of special figure reservations (the number of special figure 1 reserved balls) is executed. Specifically, when the number of reserved special figures (number of reserved special figure 1 balls) is 0, 3, or 4, a normal length is easily selected as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol fluctuation during the latent state. When the RUSH game is executed and the number of special figure reservations (the number of special figure 1 reserved balls) is one or two, a shorter time than usual is selected as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol fluctuation during the latent state. It is configured such that an easy super RUSH game is executed. In this way, by changing the variation time of the second special symbol change according to the game situation (special figure 1 number of reserved balls), the number of executions of the second special symbol lottery per unit time, and thus the small hit game Can be varied, so that the player can perform a game in the latent state while expecting a more advantageous RUSH game to be performed.

  Both the RUSH game and the super RUSH game described above are games executed during the latent state, and the winning probability of the special symbol (winning in the second special symbol) is set to common (1/60). ing. In the present embodiment, the probability of winning a small hit in the second special symbol lottery is set to be a high probability (59/60). If a jackpot is won during the latent state, a jackpot type (jackpot D7) in which the normal state is set after the end of the jackpot game is set at a rate of 35%, and the latent state is set at the end of the jackpot game at a rate of 65%. Is set again. On the other hand, when the small hit is won during the latent state, the gaming state does not change. That is, once the latent state is set, the RUSH game (game in the latent state) can be continued until the jackpot D7 (35% of the jackpot winning) is set.

<Electrical Configuration in Seventh Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 168 to 174. The pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described fourth embodiment in that a part of the ROM 202, a part of the RAM 203, and the sound lamp control provided in the main control device 110. The difference is that a part of the RAM 223 provided in the device 113 is changed, and the rest is the same. The same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 168 to 172. First, the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 168 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 168, the ROM 202 of the present embodiment is different from the ROM 202 of the above-described fourth embodiment (see FIG. 116) in that the first random number 7 table 202fa is replaced with the first random number table 202a. The small random number table 7 instead of the random number table 202de, the second random number table 202fc instead of the second random number table 202b, and the large type selection 7 table 202fd instead of the large type selection 4 table 202db are changed. The difference is that a variation pattern selection seven table 202fe is provided in place of the pattern selection four table 202dc, and a small hit type selection seven table 202ff and a normal figure variation pattern selection seven table 202fg are newly provided. ing. Further, although not shown, the seventh embodiment differs from the fourth embodiment in that the range in which the value of the first random number counter C1 can be updated ranges from “0 to 399” to “0 to 599”. The difference is that the range in which the value of the second random number counter C2 can be updated is changed from "0-999" to "0-299". The other configurations are the same, and therefore are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description will be omitted.

  First, the first random number 7 table 202fa will be described with reference to FIG. 168 (b). FIG. 168 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first random number 7 table 202fa. The first random number 7 per hit table 202fa is determined to be a hit based on the symbol type of the special symbol and the probability state of the special symbol with respect to the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 23B). The difference is that the value of the first random number counter C1 is defined.

  Specifically, regardless of the type of the special symbol for which the special symbol lottery has been executed (the first special symbol and the second special symbol), if the low probability state of the special symbol is set, the jackpot determination value (special The range of the value of the first random number counter C1 “0 to 2” is defined as a value determined to be a big hit in a symbol lottery, and if the special symbol high probability state is set, the first hit random value is set as the big hit determination value. A range of the value “0 to 9” of the random number counter C1 per one is defined. That is, in the seventh embodiment, a jackpot is won with a probability of about 1/200, regardless of which type of special symbol lottery is executed in a state where the special symbol low-probability state is set. Regardless of which type of special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state in which the high probability state is set, the jackpot is won with a probability of about 1/60. In the present embodiment, the value of the first random number counter C1 determined to be a big hit for each special symbol type is commonly defined. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The value of the random number counter C1 per one may be defined to be the jackpot determination value, or the number of values of the first random number counter C1 that becomes the jackpot determination value for each special symbol type may be different. .

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the value (“0 to 2”) of the first random number counter C1 determined to be a big hit when the low probability state of the special symbol is set is set to the special symbol. Even when the high probability state is set, the value of the first random number counter C1 determined to be a big hit is configured. With this configuration, the first prefetching process (see S1775 in FIG. 135) executed in the start winning process 4 (see S152 in FIG. 134) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and the second prefetching In the process (see S1764 in FIG. 136), for example, when the value of the first random number counter C1 determined to be a big hit in the low probability state of the special symbol is acquired, a special symbol lottery corresponding to the winning information is executed. It is possible to predict in advance that the winning information includes the information for winning the jackpot without executing the process of determining (predicting) the gaming state at a certain point in time. In addition, without being limited to this, at least a part or all of the value of the first random number counter C1 determined to be a big hit in the low probability state of the special symbol is not determined to be a big hit in the high probability state of the special symbol. The contents of the first random number table 202fa may be defined. With this configuration, when the same value of the first random number counter C1 is obtained, the value is set when the jackpot determination is performed using the obtained value of the first random number counter C1. The determination result can be made different depending on the game state. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an illegal act of acquiring the value of the specific first random number counter C1.

  Next, the contents of the small hit random number 7 table 202fb will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 168 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the small hit random number 7 table 202fb. The small hit random number 7 table 202fb is different from the small hit random number table 202da (see FIG. 117) in the fourth embodiment in that the range of possible values of the first random number counter C1 is changed. The type is different only in that the range of the small hit determination value in the second special symbol is changed to “10 to 599”, and other types are the same. Therefore, detailed description thereof is omitted. That is, the seventh embodiment is configured such that a small hit is won with a high probability (590/600) in the lottery of the second special symbol without winning the small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol.

  Next, the contents of the second random number 7 table 202fc will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 168 (d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the second random number 7 table 202fc. As shown in FIG. 168 (d), this second random number 7 table 202fc indicates that the acquired second random number counter C4 has a value of “0” when the ordinary symbol is in a low probability state, as shown in FIG. In the case where the normal symbol is in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, the ordinary symbol hit is specified in the range of the acquired second random number counter C4 of “0 to 299”.

  That is, in the present embodiment, when the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, the probability (1/299) of winning in the ordinary symbol lottery is set to the low probability. As a result, it is possible to make the execution probability of the game per ordinary symbol different between the ordinary state and the latent state which are the low probability state of the ordinary symbol and the probable state which is the high probability state of the ordinary symbol.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the same game method (right-handed game) is executed in the probable state in which the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set and the latent state in which the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set. It is configured so that: Then, in the right-handed game executed during the latent state, a game in which the second special symbol lottery is executed by causing a ball to enter the right second entrance 645 (see FIG. 157) is performed. In the right-handed game executed in the first step, a game in which the first special symbol lottery is executed by causing the right electric accessory 164 to enter a ball is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 169, details of the big hit type selection 7 table 202fd in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 169 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the big hit type selection 7 table 202fd. Like the big hit type selection table 202d in the first embodiment, the big hit type selection 7 table 202fd is a data table in which a determination value for determining the big hit type is stored for each special symbol type.

  As shown in FIG. 169, in the big hit type selection 7 table 202fd in the seventh embodiment, three big hits of "big hit A7" to "big hit C7" are set as the big hit types of the first special symbol (special figure 1). The type is specified. On the other hand, as the jackpot types of the second special symbol, two jackpot types of "jackpot D7" to "jackpot E7" are defined.

  As shown in FIG. 169, as the big hit type of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 34”, while the big hit type is “big hit A7”. It is defined in association. The "big hit A7" is a type of big hit (8 rounds (R) normal big hit) in which the number of rounds of the big hit is 8 rounds and the special symbol is set to the normal state after the big hit is completed. In addition, depending on the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, whether or not the high probability state (saving time state) of the ordinary symbol is set varies. More specifically, when the "big hit A7" is won in the normal state, the probable change state, and the latent state, the time reduction state of the ordinary symbol is not set (0 is set to the value of the time reduction counter 203f). That is, when the "big hit A7" is won in the normal state, the probable state, and the latent state, the most disadvantageous normal state is set again.

  Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with “big hit A7” is 35, so the first special symbol lottery In the case of a jackpot, the rate at which the "small jackpot A7" is determined is 35% (35/100).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 169, "big hit B7" is defined as the big hit type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "35 to 79". The “big hit B7” is a type of big hit (eight round positive change big hit) in which the number of rounds of the big hit is 8 rounds and the special symbol is set to the special change state after the big hit end. In addition, when the "big hit B7" is won in the normal state, 50 is set to the value of the time saving counter 203h, while when the "big hit B7" is won in the probable state and the latent state, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set. The value is set to 0.

  That is, when the "big hit B7" is won in the normal state, the state shifts to the relatively advantageous probability change state (50 times). On the other hand, if the "big hit B7" is won in the probability change state or the latent state, the number of times saved is set to 0, so that the gaming state after the end of the big win is the most advantageous latent state. Therefore, if the "big hit B7" is won in the normal state, it is a big hit type that is relatively advantageous in terms of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the winning is performed in a gaming state other than the normal state, the winning type is the most advantageous in the gaming state.

  Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with “big hit B7” is 45, so the first special symbol lottery In the case of a jackpot, the rate at which the "big hit B7" is determined is 45% (45/100).

  Also, as shown in FIG. 169, "big hit C7" is defined as the big hit type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "80 to 99". The “big hit C7” is a type of big hit (8 round positive change big hit) in which the number of rounds of the big hit is 8 rounds and the special symbol is set to the special change state after the end of the big hit. In addition, when the "big hit C7" is won in the probability change, 50 is set to the value of the time saving counter 203h, while when the "big hit C7" is won in the normal state and the latent state, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set. Is set to 0.

  That is, during the normal state, it is more advantageous for the player to win the "big hit C7" than to win the "big hit B7". The player who wins is more advantageous to the player. Further, during the latent state, the degree of advantage does not change between the case where the "big hit B7" is won and the case where the "big hit C7" is won.

  Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "big hit C7" is 20, so the first special symbol lottery In the case of a jackpot, the rate at which the "jackpot C11" is determined is 20% (20/100).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, according to the gaming state when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the rate of transition to the gaming state (latent state) that is most advantageous to the player is determined. The latent state is set at 20% during the normal state, 45% during the probable state, and 65% during the latent state, so that the latent state is set after the end of the jackpot game. . By configuring in this way, when the gaming state transitions, for example, if the jackpot is won during the normal state, and if the probable change state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the state shifts to the latent state than the normal state. Since it is possible to provide an easy advantageous state, it is possible to enthusiastically continue the game for a player for whom the latent state has not been set.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 169, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 34”, and the jackpot type is “jackpot D7”. Is associated and defined. The “big hit D7” is a big hit type in which the same content as the above “big hit A7” is defined, the number of rounds of the big hit is eight, and the type after the big hit is set to the normal state of the special symbol. Jackpot (8 rounds (R) normal jackpot). In addition, depending on the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, whether or not the high probability state (saving time state) of the ordinary symbol is set varies. More specifically, when the "big hit D7" is won in the normal state, the probable change state, and the latent state, the time reduction state of the normal symbol is not set (the value of the time reduction counter 203f is set to 0). That is, when the "big hit D7" is won in the normal state, the probable state, and the latent state, the most disadvantageous normal state is set again.

  Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "big hit D7" is 35, so the first special symbol lottery In the case of a jackpot, the rate at which the "big hit D7" is determined is 35% (35/100). In the present embodiment, the second special symbol lottery is configured to be easily executed in a case where the most advantageous gaming state (latent state) is set for the player. This is an end opportunity to end the gaming state (probable state) that is most advantageous to the player.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 169, "big hit E7" is defined as the big hit type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "35 to 99". The "big hit E7" is a type of big hit (8 rounds big change big hit) in which the number of rounds of the big hit is 8 rounds, and the special symbol is set to the certain change state after the big hit end. In addition, when the "big hit E7" is won in the normal state, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 100. On the other hand, when the "big hit E7" is won in the probable state and the latent state, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set. The value is set to 0.

  That is, when the "big hit E7" is won in the normal state, the state shifts to a relatively advantageous probability change state (100 times). On the other hand, when the "big hit E7" is won in the probability change state or the latent state, the number of times saved is set to 0, so that the gaming state after the end of the big win is the most advantageous latent state. Therefore, if the "big hit E7" is won in the normal state, the big hit type is relatively advantageous in terms of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the winning is performed in a gaming state other than the normal state, the winning type is the most advantageous in the gaming state.

  Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with “big hit E7” is 65, so the first special symbol lottery In the case of a jackpot, the rate at which the "big hit E7" is determined is 65% (65/100).

  As described above, in the seventh embodiment, in the gaming state (latent state) most advantageous to the player, the jackpot is won mainly in the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 lottery) executed mainly. Is configured such that the latent state loops at a rate of 65% and the latent state ends (the normal state is set) at a rate of 35%. Therefore, in the state where the latent state is set, the player obtains the prize ball by the small hit game executed with a high probability (59/60) and wishes not to win the “big hit E7”. Will be executed.

  Next, details of the variation pattern selection table 202fe in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The fluctuation pattern selection table 202fe determines the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the fluctuation display from the value (random number value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1, similarly to the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 25) in the first embodiment. It is a data table for performing. In the seventh embodiment, the content of the data table referred to when the gaming state is the normal state is partially changed from the first embodiment described above as the variation pattern selection table 202fe. Is different in that a 7-table for probability change 202fe2 referred to in the case of the probable change state and a 7-table for latent search 202fe3 referred to in the case of the probable change state are added.

  First, the contents of the normal 7 table 202fe1 referred to when the gaming state is the normal state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 170 is a diagram showing the contents defined in the normal 7-table 202fe1. The normal 7 table 202fe1 is different from the normal table 202d1 (see FIG. 25) of the first embodiment described above in that the variation pattern corresponding to the first special symbol (special figure 1) as the symbol type and the second special symbol It is greatly different in that a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a symbol (special figure 2) is defined.

  Specifically, as a fluctuation pattern determined when a large hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 falls within a range of “0 to 99” and a normal fluctuation (10000 milliseconds (10 seconds) )), And the super fluctuation (15000 milliseconds (15 seconds)) in the range of “100 to 179”, and the special fluctuation (20,000 milliseconds (20 seconds)) in the range of “180 to 198” Are associated.

  In FIG. 170, the length of the variation time specified for each variation pattern is shown in millisecond units (1/1000 second unit). Is described in units of seconds.

  As a variation pattern determined when a lottery is lost in the first special symbol lottery, a variation pattern of a short variation (1 second) out of the range of “0 to 180” is associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1. , "181 to 197" are associated with out-of-place middle fluctuations (10 seconds), and out of range "197, 198" are associated with out-of-range super fluctuations (15 seconds).

  On the other hand, in the second special symbol lottery, a long fluctuation (hit long fluctuation, out-of-long fluctuation) (600 seconds) is associated with the entire range “0 to 198” of the fluctuation type counter CS1 regardless of the lottery result. Have been.

  In the present embodiment, when a variation pattern of the special symbol variation is selected, the variation pattern is selected with reference to the total value of the number of reserved memories of all the special symbols. In the present embodiment, since only the first special symbol is configured to have the hold storage function, the variation pattern of the first special symbol is substantially changed based on the number of hold storage (the number of reserved balls) of the first special symbol. , And the variation pattern of the second special symbol are selected. Here, the process of selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol (see S307 of FIG. 139) is executed at a later stage than the process of subtracting the reserved ball of the first special symbol (see S303 of FIG. 139). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 170, the variation pattern is not selected when the number of special figure reserved balls is four. On the other hand, the process of selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol (see S1277 of FIG. 179) is executed independently of the first special symbol lottery, as in the above-described fourth embodiment. The variation pattern may be selected in a state where the number of balls (number of reserved special figure 1 balls) is four.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 171 (a), a description will be given of the contents of the 7-table for probable variation 202fe2 which is referred to when the variation pattern of the special symbol variation in the probable variation state is selected. FIG. 171 (a) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the probable change seven table 202fe2. In the present embodiment, as described above, in the state in which the probable change state is set, a game in which a ball is made to win in the right electric accessory 164 by a right-handed game and the first special symbol lottery is executed more efficiently than in the normal state is performed. Done. For the first special symbol change during the probable change state, a change pattern having the same content as that of the above-described normal seven-table 202fe1 is defined. On the other hand, for the second special symbol variation, a variation pattern in which a variation time (60 seconds) shorter than the variation pattern defined in the normal 7-table 202fe1 is defined. The other elements are the same as those in the above-described normal seven-table 202fe1, and thus detailed description is omitted.

  That is, in the present embodiment, in the probable state in which the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, the right electric accessory 164 is opened with a high probability to make it difficult for the ball to enter the right second entrance 645. It is configured to be. In other words, the configuration is such that it is more difficult to make the ball enter the right second entrance 645 when the right-handed game is executed in the probable change state than when the right-handed game is executed in the normal state. . Furthermore, when the normal state is set, the game in which the ball is thrown into the first ball entrance 64 by the left-handed game is an appropriate game method, and when the probable change state is set, the game is performed by the right-handed game to the right. It is configured such that a game in which a ball enters the electric accessory 164 is an appropriate game method.

  In the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above, when a right-handed game is performed during the normal state, the ball can be easily made to enter the right second entrance 645, so that the normal state is achieved. By setting a variation pattern in which a long variation time (10 minutes) is defined as a variation pattern of the second special symbol variation executed during the right special game during the normal state, the second special symbol is executed. The act of executing a lottery is suppressed.

  On the other hand, when the right-handed game, which is an appropriate game method, is executed during the probable change state, as described above with reference to FIGS. Although the ball enters the object 164, the ball flowing down the right area has an irregular behavior, for example, if the balls flowing down the right area collide with each other and jump over the open door 164r1, the right second entry. There is a case where the ball enters the ball opening 645.

  In the present embodiment, in the case where the appropriate game method is executed as described above, when the ball flows down in an unpredictable manner and enters the right second entrance 645, When a ball enters the right second ball entrance 645 during the state and the second special symbol lottery is executed, the fluctuation time is shorter than when the second special symbol lottery is executed during the normal state ( (60 seconds). Furthermore, although details will be described later, when a specific small hit (small hit C) is won in the second special symbol lottery, the probability change state is set to the latent state regardless of the number of special symbol changes executed during the probability change state. It is configured so that it can be shifted to.

  This allows the player executing the game in the probable change state to closely watch the behavior of the ball flowing down the right area, and to actively play the game while expecting the second special symbol lottery to be executed. Can be done.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 171 (b), the content of the latent seven table 202fe3 that is referred to when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol variation during the latent state will be described. FIG. 171 (b) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the seven tables for latent accuracy 202fe3. In the present embodiment, as described above, in the state in which the latent state is set, the ball is made to enter the second entrance 645 by the right-handed game, and the second special symbol lottery is executed more efficiently than in the normal state. A game to be performed is performed. Then, by executing a long variation (10 minutes) with respect to the first special symbol change executed during the latent state, the number of stored special symbols (first special symbol) during the latent state is determined. (The number of reserved balls in FIG. 1) is the upper limit number. Further, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern of the second special symbol set during the latent state is made different according to the number of reserved memories (the number of reserved special balls 1) of the special symbol (first special symbol). Make up.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 171 (b), the variation pattern determined in response to the first special symbol lottery includes the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1. Regardless of this, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 600 seconds (super long fluctuation per hit, super long fluctuation out of range) is associated. That is, the first special symbol variation executed during the latent state is configured such that a variation time of 600 seconds is always set.

  On the other hand, when the lottery of the second special symbol is a winning (big hit), the fluctuation pattern is determined when the number of reserved special figures (number of reserved special figures 1) is “0 to 3”, The long variation (10 seconds) is associated with the entire range of the counter CS1 “0 to 198”, and when the number of special figure reservations (the number of special figure 1 reservations) is “4”, the total of the variation type counter CS1 is A short variation (1 second) corresponds to a range of “0 to 198”.

  In addition, as a variation pattern determined when a lottery of the second special symbol is lost (including small hits A and C), the number of special figure reservations (special figure 1 reservation number) is “1, 2” Is associated with a short variation (0.5 seconds) outside the entire range “0-198” of the variation type counter CS1, and the special figure reserved number (special figure 1 reserved number) is “0, 3, 4”. In this case, the entire range “0 to 198” of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with the middle variation (10 seconds).

  Further, as the fluctuation pattern determined when the small hit B is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol, when the number of reserved special figures (number of reserved special figures 1) is “0, 1, 2”, The small hit middle fluctuation (10 seconds) is associated with the entire range “0 to 198” of the type counter CS1, and when the number of special figure reservations (the number of special figure 1 reservations) is “3, 4”, the fluctuation type counter Small hit short fluctuation (0.5 seconds) is associated with the entire range “0 to 198” of CS1.

  That is, in the present embodiment, as a variation pattern (variation time) set for the second special symbol variation executed during the latent state, the variation pattern (variation time) is set when a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery. The variation pattern is configured such that a short variation of 0.5 seconds and a long variation of 10 seconds are set, and the small hits A and B set at about 95% of the small hits are won. In this case, if the number of reserved special figures is a specific number (1, 2), a game (super RUSH game) in which a short fluctuation (0.5 seconds) is set is executed, and other than the specific number (0, 3, 4) ), A game (RUSH game) in which a long variation (10 seconds) is set is executed.

  With this configuration, the number of small hit games per unit time can be varied according to the number of special figure reservations in the latent state (special figure 1 number of reserved balls). The amount of privilege (number of prize balls) that can be obtained by the player can be made different. Therefore, the player who is executing the RUSH game during the latent state can be motivated to play the super RUSH game which is more advantageous to the player.

  On the other hand, if the small hit B is won, that is, if the small hit type in which the process of discarding (forcibly stopping) the first special symbol change that is being executed is executed, the number of special figure reservations (special figure 1 reservation) When the number of balls is larger than the specific number (1, 2), a short fluctuation (0.5 seconds) is set for (3, 4), and the number of reserved special figures (number of reserved special figure 1 balls) is equal to the specific number (1). , 2) or less (0, 1, 2), the length variation (10 seconds) is set. In other words, if the small hits that can reduce the number of special figure 1 reserved balls are won, if the number of special figure 1 reserved balls (number of special figure reserved) is larger than the specific number, the number of special figure 1 reserved balls It is configured such that the fluctuation time is shorter than when the (special figure reservation number) is smaller than the specific number.

  With this configuration, when the special figure 1 reserved ball number (special figure reserved number) is larger than the specific number and the small hit B is won, the first special symbol change being executed is immediately discarded. Therefore, the number of special figure 1 reserved balls (special figure reserved number) can be easily set to a specific number. On the other hand, if the small hit B is won in a state where the number of special figure 1 reserved balls (the number of special figure reserved) is smaller than the specific number, a long-term fluctuation time is set as the small hit fluctuation, so The period required until the first special symbol change is discarded can be lengthened, so that the number of special figure 1 reserved balls (number of reserved special figure) can be suppressed from decreasing below the specific number. .

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern (variation) of the second special symbol variation is greater when the number of special figure reserved balls is “0”, which is the lower limit value, than when the number of special figure reserved balls is other than the lower limit value. It is configured to easily set a long-term fluctuation (10-second fluctuation) as the time. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 171 (b), when the number of special figure reserved balls is “0”, which is the lower limit value, a long-term fluctuation (10 seconds (Fluctuation) is set.

  In this way, by imposing a penalty that the long-term fluctuation is likely to be executed when the number of special figure reserved balls is “0”, which is the lower limit value, the special figure 1 reserved ball number after the latent state is set. The game is interrupted until the (special figure reservation number) becomes "0", specifically, the game is executed until the first special symbol change in the latent state in which the change time of 10 minutes is set is executed four times. After the interruption, the act of executing the game in the latent state can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, a configuration is used in which the degree of advantage during the latent state is divided into two stages according to the number of reserved special figures. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The medium advantage may be divided into three or more stages. In this case, for example, as the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol set when the number of special figure reserved balls is “0” which is the lower limit, a fluctuation time longer than the above-described long-term fluctuation (10-second fluctuation) (for example, , 30 seconds) can be set, and the penalty that long-term fluctuation is likely to be executed when the number of special figure reserved balls is “0”, which is the lower limit value, can be made larger, or special figure reserved Among the specific numbers (1, 2), the special figure reservation number of one (for example, 1) has a shorter fluctuation time (for example, 0.1 second) than the special figure reservation number of the other (for example, 2). It may be configured to be settable, and may be able to execute an advantageous game that is more advantageous to the player.

  In addition, when the latent state is set, i.e., when the jackpot is won after the jackpot game is completed, and when the latent state is set via the probability change state, It is configured to refer to a different variation pattern table, and when one of the triggers (for example, the trigger for setting the latent state after the end of the jackpot game) is established, the one for which the latent state is set is determined by the other trigger ( For example, an advantageous game (second special symbol variation) that is more advantageous to the player during the latent state than when the latent state is set due to the establishment of the latent state via the probability changing state (A game in which a short variation time is easily selected as the variation pattern) may be easily executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern of the special symbol is selected (determined) with the same specified content regardless of the number of times of the special symbol variation executed during the latent state. Without limitation, for example, the regulation content of the variation pattern selected in the first period (first half period) after the latent state is set and the second period (second half period) after the elapse of the first period 171 may be changed. In this case, for example, the number of times of the special figure change (first number) after the latent state has been set in the latent table 7fe 202 shown in FIG. Different fluctuation patterns are defined in accordance with the special symbol fluctuation and the number of times the second special symbol fluctuation is added, and the advantageous game (the second special symbol fluctuation) in which the second period is more advantageous to the player than the first period is Short fluctuation time is selected as the fluctuation pattern of Which is likely to game) may be configured so is easily performed. With such a configuration, the latent state can be maintained for a long time, that is, the longer the period in which the jackpot is not won during the latent state (the so-called “harry period”), the more advantageous the player can be. It is possible to provide a novel game.

  In addition, when the probability change state is set, the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, and based on the fact that the small hit C is won, the latent symbol is not executed without executing the special symbol change of a specified number of times (50 times). When the state is shifted to, the advantageous game (the game in which the short variation time is easily selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation) that is most advantageous to the player may be executed. In this case, for example, with respect to the probability change 7 table 202fe2 which is referred to when the probability change state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the variation pattern data referred to during the probability change state is changed to the special symbol variation a specified number of times (50 times). It suffices to specify the period corresponding to the execution, and also specify the special variation pattern data to be referred to when the state shifts to the latent state within the specified number of times. In other words, the special symbol variation table executed in the certain variation count within the defined variation count is stored in the probability variation 7 table 202fe2 in which the variation pattern data is defined for the range of the special symbol variation count of the defined count (50 times). And the variation pattern data for the special symbol variation executed during the latent state may be defined in advance.

  With this configuration, it is possible to cause the player to play a game while further expecting the second special symbol change (lottery) to be executed during the probable change state. Note that, in this case, after the number of times of execution of the special symbol change executed after the end of the jackpot game reaches the specified number (50 times), the change is performed with reference to the seven-level latent table 202fe3 shown in FIG. 171 (b). The pattern may be set, and even after the number of times of the special symbol change executed after the end of the big hit game reaches the specified number (50), the state is shifted to the latent state within the specified number. The special variation pattern data referred to in such a case may be set continuously.

  The variation patterns (variation times) set corresponding to each game state have been described above with reference to FIGS. 170 and 171, but are not limited to the example described in the present embodiment, and may be set. The variation time of each variation pattern that is set based on the game state being performed, the symbol type of the special symbol, and the result of the determination of success or failure is within a range that does not deviate from the technical idea of the present embodiment (compared to other variation patterns). A range that does not relatively deviate from the technical idea) may be used. Further, in this embodiment, in order to simplify the description, an example in which a specific fluctuation pattern (variation time) is determined under various specific conditions is shown. A different variation pattern (variation time) may be selectable according to the value of the counter CS1. In this case, it is specified that the selection ratio of each variation pattern that can be latent and the average value calculated based on the variation time of each variation pattern are within a range that does not deviate from the technical idea of the present embodiment. For example, as a variation pattern for the special figure 1 defined in the seven-level latent table 202fe3, the variation pattern is executed with a small probability (for example, when the value of the variation type counter CS1 is “1”) during the latent state. The variation time (for example, 1 second) may be set shorter than the variation pattern (fluctuation time) that can be set for the second special symbol variation.

  With this configuration, it is possible to rarely provide the player with unexpected games without changing the flow of main games executed during the latent state, and It can improve the interest of the people. In the example described above, the variation pattern selected for the latent state is taken as an example. However, based on the same technical idea, the variation pattern selected when another game state is set is described. It goes without saying that a similar technical idea may be applied.

  Next, the contents of the small hit type selection 7 table 202ff will be described with reference to FIG. The small hit type selection 7 table 202ff is a data table that is referred to when a small hit type is selected in a special symbol lottery and is then selected when the small hit type is selected. It is defined that three types of small hits, "small hit A7", "small hit B7", and "small hit C7" are selected.

  If the special symbol lottery wins, the small hit operation, symbol confirmation time (period required to finalize the special symbol stop display), and special symbol in execution according to the selected small hit type The configuration is such that the processing content for the fluctuation can be made different. In the present embodiment, as described with reference to the small hit random number 7 table 202fb (refer to FIG. 168 (c)), the small hit random number is determined only by the lottery of the second special symbol. In the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process 7 (see S1277 in FIG. 179) executed by the control device 110, when it is determined that the small hit has been won, the small hit type selection 7 table 202ff is referred to.

  The content specified in the small hit type selection 7 table 202ff will be specifically described. When the value of the small hit type counter C5 is in the range of “0 to 74”, “small hit A” is associated with the value. , “75-79” is associated with “small hit B7”, and “80-99” is associated with “small hit C”. Since the range of values that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5 is 100 from "0 to 99", the rate at which "small hit A" is selected at the time of small hit winning is 75% (75/100), The rate at which "small hit B" is selected is 5% (5/100), and the rate at which "small hit C" is selected is 20% (20/100).

  When "small hit A" is selected, a small hit game in which the right variable winning device (second attacker) 650 is opened for 1.5 seconds is executed. Also, “0.2 seconds” is selected as the symbol determination time of the special symbol, and a process of interrupting the first special symbol (the special symbol 1) being executed is executed. Here, when the process of interrupting the currently executing first special symbol (special figure 1) is executed, the process of interrupting the process of measuring the change in elapsed time of the currently executed first special symbol change is performed. Be executed. Specifically, when the small hitting game is executed, the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to on, and the first special symbol (special) is set while the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203d is set to on. A process of skipping the process of updating the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di indicating the fluctuation time (remaining fluctuation time) in FIG. 1) is executed. Then, upon the end of the small hitting game, the restart condition is satisfied (the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to off), and the interrupted processing of updating the value of the special figure 1 variable time counter 203di is restarted. . With such a configuration, it is possible to prohibit the remaining change time of the first special symbol change being executed from decreasing while the small hit game is being executed (while the interruption condition is satisfied). Therefore, while the small hit game is being executed, for example, the first special symbol change that has been won is stopped and displayed, and the win game (big hit game, small hit game) is executed repeatedly. Can be banned. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

  In addition, since the process of measuring the elapsed time of the special symbol change during execution is only interrupted (skipped), the first special symbol change executed before the small hit game after the restart condition is satisfied. Can be resumed. Therefore, the result of the already executed special symbol lottery can be reliably notified to the player. In addition, in this embodiment, when the interruption condition is satisfied triggered by the winning of the small hit, the processing for interrupting the special symbol change being executed is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the special symbol fluctuation during execution may be continuously performed, and the stop display of the first special symbol fluctuation may be interrupted after the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation has elapsed. In other words, even when the interruption condition is satisfied, the update processing for updating the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation is continuously executed, and when the update processing is executed until the predetermined fluctuation time elapses, the interruption is performed. It may be configured such that it is determined whether or not the condition is satisfied, and if it is determined that the interruption condition is satisfied, the stop display of the special symbol change is not executed until the restart condition is satisfied. This eliminates the need to interrupt the update process for updating the variation time of the special symbol variation, so that the processing load can be reduced.

  Although a detailed description is omitted, in a state where the interruption condition is satisfied and the special symbol change is interrupted, that is, in a state where the process of updating the value of the special figure 1 change time counter 203di is skipped, On the display surface of the three-symbol display device 81, the interruption effect in which the variation display of the special symbol variation (the first special symbol variation) is interrupted, and the game state that the first special symbol variation is being interrupted as the current game situation. A notification display for notifying a player and a guidance display for indicating that the suspended special symbol change is resumed after a predetermined period has elapsed (after the small hitting game has ended) can be displayed. Thereby, when the special symbol change is interrupted, it is possible to inform the player of the fact easily.

  Further, as the above-described interrupted effect, for example, an effect mode of a variable display effect (a variable display effect using a third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol) executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. It is good to be configured to be able to execute different interruption effects according to, for example, when the interruption condition is satisfied and the special symbol change is interrupted, the third symbol changes at high speed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, That is, when the third symbol is fluctuating at a speed at which it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the fluctuating third symbol, an effect of continuing the high-speed fluctuation of the third symbol until the restart condition is satisfied is executed as an interrupted effect. When the third symbol fluctuates at a low speed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, that is, when the third symbol fluctuates at a speed at which the player can visually recognize the fluctuating third symbol. Is a low-speed fluctuation of the third symbol as a pause effect It may be configured to perform the production to continue until the resumption condition is satisfied. In this way, by changing the variable production mode (interruption production mode) during the period in which the interruption condition is satisfied, depending on the variation production mode of the third symbol at the time when the interruption condition is satisfied, The interruption effect can be executed without giving a feeling of strangeness.

  Further, when the interruption condition is satisfied immediately before the fluctuation stop of the third symbol, for example, out of a plurality of symbols, other symbols except one symbol are stopped in a combination indicating a big hit (a combination of symbols indicating the same number). The interruption condition during the variable production (so-called reach production) that is displayed and inspires whether or not the remaining one symbol stops at the combination indicating the jackpot winning (whether or not all the symbols stop at the same number) Is established, the interruption effect of continuing the variable display for the remaining one of the above-described symbols may be executed, or one symbol in the variable display may be displayed to indicate that the interruption condition has been satisfied. The stop display may be performed in a mode (for example, “once a break!”) To end the reach effect. Then, after the resumption condition is satisfied, the character of "End of break!" Is displayed, and the result of the reach effect executed before the interruption is stopped and displayed without executing the reach effect. good. Accordingly, various effects can be executed in accordance with the timing at which the interruption condition is satisfied, so that it is possible to diversify the effect performed based on the satisfaction of the interruption condition, and to enhance the effect of the effect. Can be.

  Returning to FIG. 172 (a), the description will be continued. When "small hit B" is selected, a small hit game in which the right variable winning device (second attacker) 650 is opened for 1.5 seconds is executed. Further, “0.5 seconds” is selected as the symbol determination time of the special symbol, and a process of discarding the first special symbol (the special symbol 1) being executed is executed. Here, when the process of discarding the running first special symbol (special figure 1) is performed, the first special symbol variation is performed regardless of the lottery result of the running first special symbol variation and the remaining variation time. Is performed in a display mode indicating that the lottery result is out of order. Specifically, when the small hitting game is executed, a process of clearing the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di indicating the fluctuation time (remaining fluctuation time) of the first special symbol (special figure 1) to 0 is performed. Execute and set a forced stop command indicating that the first special symbol change has been stopped and displayed. Further, when the first special symbol change to be forcibly stopped is a big hit, the information indicating the big hit set at the start timing of the first special symbol change is cleared (special figure 1 big hit flag) 203i is turned off).

  When the forced stop command is set and the voice lamp control device 113 receives the forced stop command (when the forced stop display condition is satisfied), the third symbol change during execution (the third symbol display corresponding to the first special symbol change). A forced stop effect for switching the variation display mode of (the third symbol variation) displayed on the display surface of the device 81 is executed.

  Although detailed description is omitted, the forced stop condition is satisfied based on winning of the "small hit B", the special symbol change is forcibly stopped, and the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The special symbol change (first special symbol change) is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that the lottery result has been forcibly stopped due to a deviation. Further, according to the timing at which the forcible stop condition is satisfied, the effect form of the forcible stop effect for forcibly stopping and displaying the third symbol change being executed is configured to be different.

  Specifically, in the state where the third symbol fluctuates at a high speed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, that is, in a state where the third symbol fluctuates at a speed that makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize the changing third symbol. When the forcible stop display condition is satisfied, as the forcible stop effect, an effect in which the forcible stop display is executed in a short period (first period) with respect to the third symbol change display during high-speed fluctuation is executed, and the third symbol is displayed. When the third symbol fluctuates at a low speed on the display surface of the display device 81, that is, when the third symbol fluctuates at a speed at which the player can visually recognize the fluctuating third symbol, the low speed fluctuation is performed as a forced stop effect. It is configured to perform an effect in which the forced stop display is executed using the second period longer than the above-described first period for the middle third symbol change display.

  In other words, during the high-speed fluctuation of the third symbol, it is difficult for the player to identify the fluctuation-displayed third symbol, and therefore, even if the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating sudden departure, In order not to give a sense of incongruity to the player, the third symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in a short period (first period) for the purpose of immediately informing the player that the forced stop condition has been satisfied. On the other hand, during high-speed fluctuation of the third symbol, since the player is able to identify the variable symbol displayed in the third symbol, if the forced stop effect is suddenly executed in that state, the third symbol is executed. If the effect of the third symbol change in the middle is suddenly changed, the player will feel uncomfortable. In addition, since the forced stop effect is to stop and display the third symbol in a display mode finally indicating that the result of the special symbol lottery is out of order, the effect mode of the third symbol change being executed is suddenly switched. After that, the third symbol is displaced and displayed, and the player's willingness to play is reduced.

  On the other hand, when the third symbol fluctuates at a low speed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, that is, when the third symbol fluctuates at a speed at which the player can visually recognize the fluctuating third symbol. As a forced stop effect, an effect in which a forced stop display is executed using a second period longer than the above-described first period for a third symbol change display during a low speed change is configured to be executed. The effect form of the forced stop effect to be executed during the second period is set according to the content of the third symbol change display, and finally the off display is executed. Therefore, according to the variation effect mode of the third symbol at the time when the forced stop condition is satisfied, the time from when the forced stop condition is satisfied until the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. By making the effect mode and the effect period different, the forced stop effect can be executed without giving a sense of incongruity to the player.

  When "small hit C" is selected, a small hit game in which the right variable winning device (second attacker) 650 is opened for 1.5 seconds is executed. In addition, "1.5 seconds" is selected as the symbol determination time of the special symbol, and a process of discarding the first special symbol (the special symbol 1) being executed is executed in the same manner as the "small hit A" described above. Further, when "small hit C" is selected during the high probability state (probable change state) of the ordinary symbol, a process of shifting the ordinary symbol high probability state to the low probability state is executed. That is, "small hit C" is set as a time saving end condition for shifting the high probability state of the ordinary symbol to the low probability state.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, if the processing to be executed for the first special symbol variation being executed is different according to the small hit type selected when the small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery. I'm making it. With this configuration, the player can be interested in which small hit type is selected when the small hit is won. Further, according to the content of the processing (interruption, discarding) executed for the first special symbol change, the degree of advantage of the game executed later can be made different.

  Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, when the small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, the special symbol determination time is made different depending on the small hit type selected. Thereby, the period from the stop display of the special symbol indicating the small hit winning until the small hit game is executed can be made different depending on the selected small hit type. Therefore, it is possible to predict the timing at which the small hit game is executed and to make it difficult to execute the game in which the ball is fired.

  In addition, in this embodiment, it is configured that the small hitting game is executed with the same open contents regardless of which small hitting type is selected. Depending on the small hit type, the type of the attacker to be opened in the small hit game may be different, or the content of the opening operation (open time, number of times of opening) may be different.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 172 (b), the contents of the ordinary figure variation pattern selection table 202fg will be described. FIG. 172 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the ordinary figure variation pattern selection table 202fg. The normal figure fluctuation pattern selection table 202fg is a data table referred to when selecting a fluctuation pattern of a normal symbol lottery, and stores the acquired value of the second fluctuation type counter CS3 and the set game state. Each data is defined so that a different variation pattern (variation time) is selected depending on the data.

  Specifically, when the game state is the normal state, the value of the second variation type counter CS3 is set in the range of “0 to 198” and the variation time is set in the range of 10 to 30 seconds. Each variation pattern (long variation) is defined. More specifically, a variation pattern of “10 seconds” is in a range of “0 to 99”, a variation pattern of “20 seconds” is in a range of “100 to 149”, and “30 seconds” is in a range of “150 to 198”. Are associated with each other. In this way, by configuring the variation patterns of different variation times to be selectable according to the value of the second variation type counter CS3 acquired when the same game state is set, the player is provided with a normal The stop display timing of the symbol change, and thus the normal symbol change is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the normal symbol hit, so that it is difficult to predict the timing at which the general symbol hit game is executed.

  Further, during the probable change state, a change pattern (short change) of “0.8 seconds” is associated with the entire range in which the acquired value of the second change type counter CS3 is “0 to 198”. With such a configuration, a ball that has passed through the through gate 67, which is a trigger for executing a normal symbol lottery in a right-handed game executed during the probable change state, is likely to enter the right electric accessory 164 with a high probability. Can be.

  On the other hand, when the latent state is set, the variation pattern of “0.1 second” is associated with the acquired value of the second variation type counter CS3 in the range of “0 to 169”, and “170 to 198”. Is associated with a fluctuation pattern of “10 seconds”. With this configuration, it is possible to make it harder for the ball to enter the right motorized object 164 during the latent state than during the probable change state, and to appropriately move the ball during the latent state. The ball can be entered into the object 164.

  Next, contents specified in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 173 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating the contents defined in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 according to the seventh embodiment. The RAM 203 of the seventh embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 203 of the above-described fourth embodiment in that a probable change flag 203fa for storing a high probability state of a special symbol is added. is there. The same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. As described above, in the seventh embodiment, the types and numbers of game states that can be set are different from those in the above-described fourth embodiment. For example, the game states can be stored in the game state storage area 203g. Although the type and number of the information are different, the role of the gaming state storage area 203g and the processing content for updating the stored information are the same, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The probability change flag 203fa is a flag for indicating that the gaming state has changed to the probability change state, and is set to ON when it is determined that the probability change state is set. Then, when the end condition of the probable change state is satisfied, it is set to off.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 174 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113. In this embodiment, as compared with the above-described fifth embodiment, the special figure 2 change start flag 223fa, the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223fb, the change number counter 223fc, the preparation state flag 223fd, and the special figure 1 change time counter 223fe The difference is that the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203ff, the RUSH flag 223fg, the ceiling effect execution flag 223fh, and the super RUSH flag 223fi are added, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same elements, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the special figure 2 change start flag 223fa and the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223fb will be described. The special figure 2 change start flag 223fa and the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223fb are different from the special figure change start flag 223d and the stop type selection flag 223e in that the target is changed to the second special symbol. are doing. Therefore, in the special figure 2 change start flag 223fa and the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223fb, the process of determining whether the flag is set to ON and the process of determining the setting status of the flag are the first special process. While the special figure 2 change start flag 223fa and the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223fb are set based on the pattern change, the flag is turned on in the processing performed based on the second special pattern change. A process of determining whether or not to set the flag and a process of determining the setting status of the flag are executed. The other elements are the same, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The change number counter 223fc is a counter for measuring the number of changes in the special symbol change, and the counter value is updated based on the execution of the special symbol change.

  The preparation state flag 223fd is a flag for indicating whether or not the apparatus is in the preparation state. When the flag is on, it means that the apparatus is in the preparation state (see FIG. 162 (a)). Means no. In the latent state, the preparation state flag 223fd is referred to to determine whether the preparation state has already been completed (switched to the display of RUSH) and whether to perform the effect of the preparation state. , RUSH state is determined.

  The RUSH flag 223fg is a flag for indicating whether or not a RUSH game is in progress (rensou mode). This means that the game is not in the RUSH game (in the extended play mode). In the latent state, the preparation state flag 223fd and the RUSH state flag 223fg are referred to to determine which state of the effect mode to set.

  The ceiling effect execution flag 223fh indicates whether or not the effect (top reaching effect) of the effect mode in which the character 811 reaches the top of the rock mountain, which is executed in the state where the number of probable changes or the number of time savings is 1, is remaining. Is a flag indicating If this ceiling effect execution flag 223fh is on, it means that the top reaching effect (see FIG. 161 (b)) is being executed, and if it is off, it means that the top reaching effect is not being executed. I do. When the symbol stop timing is reached in a state where the ceiling effect execution flag 223fh is turned on, the mode shifts to the extended-villa mode and enters a preparation state. In the present embodiment, even if the number of remaining times of the probability change (time reduction) in the probability change state is not 1, if the result of the special symbol lottery is a specific result (small hit C), the time reduction ends. The condition is established, and the ceiling effect execution flag 223fh is set to ON. In this case, the staging mode is gradually changed in accordance with the state of subtraction of the number of probable changes, and the top reaching effect is suddenly executed as compared with the case where the top reaching effect is executed. The warp effect may be executed as a dedicated top arrival effect based on the information indicating that C has been won and the setting status of the ceiling effect execution flag 223fh. As a result, the effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 can be performed without a sense of incongruity, and the player reaches the top at an earlier timing than expected (the latent state has been set). Can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

  The super RUSH flag 223fi is a flag for indicating that the number of special figure reserved balls becomes a specific number in a state where the RUSH game is being executed and a RUSH game advantageous to the player is being executed. If it is off, it means that a Super RUSH game is in progress, and if it is off, it means that it is not in a Super RUSH game. The super RUSH effect (see FIG. 165) is executed by setting the super RUSH in-flag 223fi to ON.

<Main Control Process in Seventh Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 175 to 182, the contents of control processing executed by main controller 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, similarly to the above-described fourth embodiment, a lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and a lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2). (Special drawing 2 lottery) is configured to be able to be executed in an overlapping manner, and the function (temporary storage function) of temporarily storing the lottery right of the second special symbol is deleted from the above-described fourth embodiment. And the point where the high probability state of the special symbol can be set, and the case where the small hit is won in the special drawing 2 lottery, the type of the small hit type to be set is increased, and the small hit type to be set is set. That the processing to be executed for the first special symbol change (special figure 1 change) being executed is made different according to the game, and that the small hit type to be set is a specific small hit type. Transition state (normally transition from high-probability state to low-probability state) And the point was sea urchin configuration, in are different. Also, as described above with reference to FIGS. 168 to 172, the contents are different in that the contents specified in various data tables referred to in the control processing executed by main controller 110 are different. . Otherwise, the fourth embodiment is the same as the above-described fourth embodiment, and the same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description is omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 175, the contents of the first special symbol change stop processing 7 (see S278 in FIG. 175) will be described. The first special symbol change stop process 7 (see S278 in FIG. 175) is different from the first special symbol change stop process (see S258 in FIG. 124) of the fourth embodiment in that the special figure 1 big hit flag 203i is set. When it is determined that it is not set to ON (S581: No), that is, when the first special symbol change that is stopped and changed this time is a deviation change, the time saving update process (see S862 in FIG. 124) is executed. The point changed to the time saving update process 7 (see S882 in FIG. 175) and the case where it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit flag 203i is set to ON (S581: Yes), that is, the first special symbol that is fluctuated and stopped this time Among various processes executed when the fluctuation is a jackpot fluctuation, a process of clearing various flags and various counters based on the stop of the jackpot fluctuation (start of the big hit game) To S860) in FIG. 124, and differs in that executes a process to add the probability variation flag 203fa (S870 in FIG. 175), but is otherwise identical. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and the detailed description is omitted.

  Next, the contents of the time saving update process 7 (see S882 in FIG. 176) executed in the first special symbol change stop process 7 (see S278 in FIG. 175) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing the contents of the time saving update process 7 (see S882 in FIG. 176). In this time saving update process 7 (see S882 in FIG. 176), it is determined that the time saving end standby flag 203dm is set to ON with respect to the above-described time saving update process in the fourth embodiment (see S862 in FIG. 125). The difference is that the game state set in the case (S2104 in FIG. 125: Yes) is changed, and the rest is the same. The same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the seventh embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 167, as the gaming state, a normal state (a low probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol) and a probability change state (a high probability state of a special symbol, a normal state) It is configured to be able to set three types of game states: a high probability state of a symbol) and a latent state (a high probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol). When the time reduction end standby flag 203dm is set to ON, the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is shifted to the low probability state. The state shifts from the state in which the probable change mode is set to the state in which the latent mode (RUSH game) is executed.

  Next, the contents of the second special symbol change start process 7 (see S280 in FIG. 177) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol change start processing 7 (see S280 in FIG. 177). The seventh embodiment is different from the above-described fourth embodiment in that the second special symbol is not provided with a holding function of the second special symbol. The content of the information referred to when the start condition for starting the special symbol change is satisfied is determined.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 177, when the second special symbol change start processing 7 (see S280 in FIG. 177) is executed, it is determined whether the special figure 2 change stop flag 203df is set to ON. (S951) If it is determined that the flag is set to on (S951: Yes), the special figure 2 change stop flag 203df is set to off (S952), and the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S951 that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df is set to ON (S951: Yes), the ball is then moved to the second entrance (right second entrance 645). It is determined whether the ball has entered (S974). In the present embodiment, since the second special symbol does not have the reserved memory function (because it does not have the second special symbol reserved ball number counter and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area), the second special symbol. In the state where the fluctuation start processing 7 (S280) is executed, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the right second entrance 645 and has acquired the execution right of the second special symbol lottery.

  Although a detailed description is omitted, when a detection switch (not shown) detects that the ball has entered the right second entrance 645, the second special symbol change start process 7 is performed in the control process of the main control device 110. The configuration is such that the detection signal is output during a period in which (S280) is executed a plurality of times, and is shorter than the shortest variation time set in the second special symbol variation, The configuration is such that the detection signal indicating that the ball has entered the right second entrance 645 is not lost due to the processing timing of various control processes executed by the main controller 110. Here, in the process of S974, when a winning of a ball is detected once, a process for starting the second special symbol change is executed, and the second special symbol change is executed for a predetermined change time. Therefore, even if the detection signal is output for the length of the period during which the second special symbol change start processing 7 (S280) is executed a plurality of times in the control processing of main controller 110, one detection is performed. Based on the output of the signal, it is possible to prevent the second special symbol change from being executed a plurality of times. The present invention is not limited to this, and a flag is set so that the currently output detection signal becomes invalid when a process for starting the second special symbol change is performed based on the reception of the detection signal. Processing may be added. With this configuration, it is possible to more reliably suppress the second special symbol change from being executed a plurality of times based on one output of the detection signal.

  In the process of S974, when it is determined that the ball has entered the second entrance (right second entrance 645) (S974: Yes), the second special symbol jackpot determination process 7 is executed. (S978) Thereafter, the same processes as S959 to S963 as the above-described second special symbol variation start process (see S260 in FIG. 126) are executed, and this process ends. In addition, in the process of S974, when it is determined that the ball has not entered the second entrance (right second entrance 645) (S974: No), the process is terminated as it is.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 178, the contents of the second special symbol big hit determination process 7 (see S978 in FIG. 178) executed in the second special symbol change start process 7 (see S280 in FIG. 177) will be described. I do. FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing the content of the second special symbol big hit determination process 7 (see S978 in FIG. 178). The second special symbol big hit determination process 7 (see S978 in FIG. 178) is different from the second special symbol big hit determination process (see S955 in FIG. 127) of the fourth embodiment described above. The difference is that the jackpot determination corresponding to the probability state is executed, and the other points are the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 178, when the second special symbol jackpot determination process 7 (see S978 in FIG. 178) is executed, the same S1051, S1052 as the above-described second special symbol jackpot determination process (see S955 in FIG. 127) are performed. If it is determined in the process of S1052 that the time-saving end standby flag 203dm is set to ON (S1052: Yes), the processes of S1053 to S1056 are performed, and the process proceeds to the process of S1071. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1052 that the time-saving end standby flag 203dm has not been set to ON (S1052: No), the process directly proceeds to the process of S1071.

  In the process of S1071, it is determined whether the probability change flag 203fa is set to ON, that is, whether the current state is the special symbol high probability state (S1071), and it is determined that the probability change flag 203fa is set to ON. (S1071: Yes), the lottery result (win / fail judgment result) with reference to the data defined in the high probability state of the first random number table (first random number 7 table) 202fa (see FIG. 168 (b)). To get. On the other hand, in the processing of S1071, if the probability change flag 203fa is not set to ON, that is, if it is determined that the special symbol is in the low probability state (S1071: No), the first random number table (first random number 7) The lottery result (win / fail judgment result) is acquired with reference to the data defined in the low probability state of the table 202fa (see FIG. 168 (b)).

  After the lottery result is obtained in the process of S1073 or the process of S1072, the processes of S1058 to S1062, which are the same as the above-described second special symbol big hit determination process (see S955 in FIG. 127), are executed. The process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 179, the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection processing 7 (S1277) will be described. The special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection processing 7 (S1277) is executed in the second special symbol variation pattern selection processing (see S956 in FIG. 129) for selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation. Yes, this is a process that is executed when a variation pattern is selected when the result of the target second special symbol lottery is not a large hit (is a small hit including a small hit).

  FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection processing 7 (S1277). As shown in FIG. 179, the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection processing (see S1257 of FIG. 130) is performed. On the other hand, when the variation pattern is selected, the processing content for selecting (deciding) the small hit type for the small hit which has been won this time is different, and the other is the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection processing 7 (S1277) is executed, first, the same processing as S1371 as the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection processing (see S1257 in FIG. 130) is executed, and the second special If it is determined that the symbol lottery result (special figure 2 lottery result) is not a small hit (S1371: No), the processing of S1377 to S1379, which is the same as the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection processing (see S1257 of FIG. 130). Is executed, and the present process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1371 that the small hit is a small hit (S1371: Yes), the value of the small hit type counter C5 is acquired (S1372), and the small hit type is determined based on the acquired value of the small hit type counter C5. The small hit type is selected with reference to the selection 7 table 202ff (S1391). Next, the same processing as S1374 to S1376 as the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection processing (see S1257 in FIG. 130) is executed, and this processing ends.

  In the present embodiment, in the process of selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol, the process of selecting the small hit type is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When it is determined that the current lottery result is a small hit in the determination process (the second special symbol big hit determination process 7 (see S978 in FIG. 178)), a process of selecting a small hit type is executed. Alternatively, a different small hit determination value may be defined for each small hit type, and correspond to the small hit determination value (the value of the first random number counter C1) used when it is determined that the small hit has been won. It may be configured such that the small hit type is determined. As a result, the types of counters can be reduced, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

  Next, the contents of the second special symbol change stop processing 7 (S283) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 180 is a flowchart showing the content of the second special symbol change stop processing 7 (S283). The second special symbol change stop process 7 (S283) is a process executed when the change time of the second special symbol change has elapsed and the changing second special symbol change is stopped. The difference from the special symbol change stop process (see S263 in FIG. 132) is that a part of the process executed when the second special symbol change to be processed is the jackpot change is changed. Are the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the second special symbol change stop process 7 (S283) is executed, first, the same processes from S1551 to S1559 as the above-described second special symbol change stop process (see S263 in FIG. 132) are executed. FIG. 2 The jackpot flag (the flag corresponding to the second special symbol lottery among the jackpot flags 203i), the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk, the special figure 2 subtraction flag 203dl, the time saving end standby flag 203dm, and the probability change flag 203fa are set to off. The value of the time reduction counter 203h is reset to 0 (S1580).

  In other words, when one special symbol change is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the jackpot, the lottery result for the other special symbol change being executed, the remaining change time is completely discarded, and the stop display is performed. All the information on the playing state (probable change flag 203fa, time saving counter 203h, time saving end standby flag 203dm) is also reset. Therefore, since the normal state is set during the jackpot game, a bonus other than the bonus (prize ball) obtained by causing the variable ball entry means (first attacker 1650) opened by the jackpot game to win a ball is provided. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to acquire, and it is possible to suppress a situation in which the privilege is excessively given to the player.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the simultaneous variation specification, the special symbol change executed before the big hit game is resumed after the big hit game is ended, or the number of times of shortening is reduced by the information based on the special symbol change executed before the big hit game. Since the game is not played, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand. After the processing of S1580 is completed, the processing of S1561 to S1563, which is the same as the above-described second special symbol variation stop processing (see S263 of FIG. 132), is executed, and this processing ends.

  Next, the details of the special figure 2 departure stop processing 7 (S1584) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 181 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 departure stop processing 7 (S1584). This special figure 2 departure stop processing 7 (S1584) is a case where it is determined that the small hit flag 203dg is set to ON with respect to the above-described special figure 2 departure stop processing (see S1564 in FIG. 133) (S1651: The difference is that the small hit processing (S1671) is executed in the case of "Yes". Since the other processing contents are the same, detailed description is omitted. Here, the content of the small hit processing (S1671) executed in the special figure 2 departure stop processing 7 (S1584) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 182 is a flowchart showing the content of the small hit processing (S1671). This small hit processing (S1671) is executed when the second special symbol having the small hit is stopped and displayed. The small hit processing (S1671) corresponds to the selected small hit type (interruption processing, forced stop ( Discarding process) is performed for the first special symbol change that is being executed.

  When the small hitting process (S1671) is executed, first, in the small hitting type set for the current second special symbol change (special figure 2 deviation change pattern selection process 7 (see S1277 in FIG. 179)). The selected small hit type is read (S1682), and it is determined whether the read small hit type is “small hit A” (S1683). If it is determined that it is "small hit A" (S1683: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present time is changing the special figure 1 (changing the first special symbol) (S1684), and the special figure 1 is changing. If it is determined (S1684: Yes), the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to on (S1685), and the special figure 1 temporary stop command indicating that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is turned on is set (S1686). Then, the present process ends. In the process of S1684, when it is determined that the special figure 1 is not changing (S1684: No), the processes of S1685 and S1686 are skipped, and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1683 that it is not “small hit A” (S1683: No), then it is determined whether the read small hit type is “small hit C” (S1687), If it is determined that it is "small hit C" (S1687: Yes), it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203h is larger than 0, that is, whether or not the present time is in the probable change state (in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol). (S1688). If it is determined that the current state is in the probable change state (S1688: Yes), that is, the second special symbol change that has been won as the "small hit B" in the second special symbol lottery executed during the probable change state is the current processing. If it is the target, then it is determined whether the time-saving end standby flag 203dm is set to ON (S1689), and if it is determined that the time-saving end standby flag 203dm is not ON (S1689: No), If it is determined that the state is not the final change, the time-saving end standby flag 203dm is set to ON (S1690), and the flow shifts to S1684. If the value of the time-saving counter 203h is not larger than 0 in the process of S1688, that is, if it is determined that the present time is not in the probable change state (S1688: No), or the time-saving end standby flag 203dm is set in the process of S1689. If it is set to ON, that is, if it is determined that it is the final variation of the probable variation state (S1689: Yes), the process of S1690 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the above-described process of S1684.

  In other words, when the "small hit C" is won during the probability change state, the time reduction end standby flag 203dm is forcibly set to ON even if the value of the time reduction counter 203h is not reduced to 0. Before executing the special symbol change (lottery) a predetermined number of times (50 times), it is possible to shift the gaming state from the probable state to the latent state. Therefore, the "small hit C" winning is set as an end condition for ending the probable change state (normal symbol high probability state). In the present embodiment, since the latent state is a gaming state more advantageous to the player than the probable state, a state in which the number of special symbol lotteries executed during the probable state is small, that is, a jackpot is won during the probable state. By setting the value of the time-saving counter 203h to 0, the potential is shifted to the latent state in a state where the possibility of the transition to the normal state is low without shifting to the latent state. The end condition that is established by winning the "small hit C" is an end condition that is more advantageous to the player than the end condition that shifts to. In addition, when the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0 (in the case of the low probability state of the ordinary symbol), that is, in the normal state or the latent state, the processing for terminating the time saving state is not executed. , The same processing is executed when “small hit C” is won and when “small hit A” is won.

  In the process of S1687, if it is determined that the small hit is not “small hit C”, that is, if it is determined that the read small hit type is “small hit B” (S1687: No), the special figure 1 is currently changing. (S1691), and if it is determined that the special figure 1 is changing (S1691: Yes), a special figure 1 change stop command indicating the stop of the special figure 1 change. Is set (S1692), the first special symbol of the first symbol display device is deviated and stopped and displayed with a symbol (S1693), and the value of the special figure 1 variable time counter 203di is set to 0 (S1694).

  Then, it is determined whether the special figure 1 big hit flag (the flag corresponding to the first special symbol of the big hit flag 203i) is set to ON, that is, whether the first special symbol change being executed is a big hit change ( If it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit flag (the flag corresponding to the first special symbol among the big hit flags 203i) is set to ON (S1695: Yes), the special figure 1 big hit flag (big hit flag 203i) The flag corresponding to the first special symbol is set to off (S1696), the storage information for the special figure 1 big hit is deleted (S1697), and the present process ends. In the process of S1691, if it is determined that the special figure 1 is not fluctuating (S1691: No), the present process is terminated as it is. Also, in the process of S1695, the special figure 1 big hit flag (the flag corresponding to the first special symbol of the big hit flag 203i) is not set to ON, that is, the first special symbol variation being executed is a deviation variation. If it is determined (S1695: No), the processing of S1696 and S1697 is skipped, and this processing ends.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the seventh embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 183 to FIG. 192, a description will be given of the control processing contents of the sound lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment. First, the contents of the command determination processing 7 (S4192) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 183 is a flowchart showing the content of the command determination processing 7 (S4192). This command determination process 7 (S4192) is a control process executed in place of the command determination process (S4112 in FIG. 61), and received from the main controller 110 in the same manner as the command determination process 7 (S4192) described above. It executes processing corresponding to various commands.

  When the command determination process 7 (S4192) is executed, first, it is determined whether a status command has been received (S4231). If it is determined that a status command has been received (S4231: Yes), a status command reception process is performed (S4232). Then, the present process ends. This reception command processing (S4232) executes the same processing as the reception command processing (see S4213 in FIG. 64) executed in the above-described command determination processing (S4112 in FIG. 61). Although a detailed description is omitted, a state command indicating the current game state is received, a mode effect mode according to the game state is set, and a corresponding effect mode (for example, on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81) is set. , A back image) is set. For example, when a status command indicating a probable state is received, a display command corresponding to the effect mode in which the character 811 shown in FIG. 161 climbs a mountain is set, and when a status command indicating a latent status is received, A display command corresponding to an effect mode for indicating the preparation state shown in FIG. 162 or the RUSH game state shown in FIG. 163 is set. The details of the control of the switching of the presentation mode during the latent state will be described later.

  In the command determination process 7 (S4192), the order of determining whether or not a status command has been received is different from the above-described command determination process (S4112 in FIG. 61). Specifically, it is configured to determine whether a status command has been received before determining whether a special figure variation pattern command has been received. With this configuration, it is possible to reliably execute the processing based on the special figure variation pattern command after determining the current game state. The present invention is not limited to this, and various command determinations may be performed in the same order as the above-described command determination processing (S4112 in FIG. 61).

  If it is determined in the process of S4231 that no status command has been received (S4231: No), then it is determined whether a special figure variation pattern command has been received (S4203), and if it has been determined that it has been received (S4203). : Yes), the change start flag (special figure change start flag 223d, special figure 2 change start flag 223fa) corresponding to the received special figure change pattern command is set to ON (S4233), and the change pattern command is changed from the received command. It is extracted (S4234). Then, the present process ends.

  If it is determined in the processing of S4203 that the special figure variation pattern command has not been received (S4203: No), then it is determined whether a special figure stop type command has been received (S4205), and it has been determined that it has been received. (S4205: Yes), turns on the stop type selection flag (stop type selection flag 223e, special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223fb) corresponding to the received special figure stop type command (S4235). The stop type is extracted (S4236). Then, the present process ends.

  If it is determined in the processing of S4205 that the special figure stop type command has not been received (S4205: No), the same processing of S4208 to S4214 as the above-described command determination processing (S4112 of FIG. 61) is executed. If it is determined in the processing that a stop-related command has been received, stop-related processing 7 is executed (S4236), and this processing ends. The details of the stop-related process 7 (S4236) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If it is determined in the processing of S4214 that the stop-related command has not been received (S4214: No), then the same processing of S4216 to S4218 as the above-described command determination processing (S4112 of FIG. 61) is executed. If it is determined that the stop-related command has been received in the process (3), the hit-related process 7 is executed (S4237), and this process ends. Although the detailed description of the hit-related process 7 (S4237) is omitted, the above-described hit-related process (see S4219 in FIG. 67) is based on the reception of the small hit-related command instead of the accessory hit-related command. Is executed. The small hit related command is a small hit start command indicating the start of the small hit game, and indicates the start of the round game opened by the prize device to be operated during the small hit game, similarly to the above-described accessory hit related command. At least a round command and an ending command indicating the end of the small hit game are included, and processing for setting a display command corresponding to each received command is executed. Thus, an effect mode corresponding to the small hit game executed by the main control device 110 can be executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81.

  Then, in the process of S4218, when it is determined that the hit-related command has not been received (S4220: No), this process ends as it is.

  Next, the content of the stop-related process 7 (S4236) executed in the command determination process 7 (see S4192 in FIG. 183) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 184 is a flowchart showing the content of the stop-related process 7 (S4236). This stop-related process 7 (S4236) is a preparation state setting process (S4641 in FIG. 184) when the special figure determination command is received (S4601: Yes) with respect to the stop-related process described above (see S4215 in FIG. 65). (See step S4642), and a process of determining whether a special figure discard command has been received is executed (S4642). If it is determined in step S4642 that a special figure discard command has been received (S4642: Yes), the difference is that a process of executing the special figure discard setting process (S4643) is added, and the rest is the same. The same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Here, the contents of the preparation state setting processing (S4641) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 185 is a flowchart showing the contents of the preparation state setting process (S4641). This preparation state setting processing (S4641) is processing for setting the preparation state (see FIG. 162 (a)) as described above. In this preparation state setting processing (S4641), first, it is determined whether or not the ceiling effect execution flag 223fh is on (S8001). If it is determined that it is off (S8001: No), the process proceeds to the preparation state. Since there is no possibility that the processing is performed, the present processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S8001 that the ceiling effect execution flag 223fh is ON (S8001: Yes), the ceiling effect execution flag 223fh is set OFF (S8002), and the display mode during RUSH preparation ( 162 (a) are set (S8003). Next, both the RUSH flag 223fg and the ready flag 223fd are set to ON (S8004), and the process ends.

  By executing the preparation state setting processing (see FIG. 185), the display state of the preparation state can be set from the time when the mode is shifted to the extended play mode (RUSH game).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment, the latent state is changed to an advantageous gaming state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed and the small hitting game is frequently executed (the extended play mode). And the normal state was configured as the most disadvantageous normal mode. By terminating the number of times of probable change (50 times) in the probable change state, the mode is shifted to the most advantageous extended-villa mode. In other words, it is configured to be able to shift from the probable change state to the most advantageous game state directly without going through the jackpot. With such a configuration, it is possible to cause the player to play a game in the probable change state with one goal being to elapse the number of probable changes.

  Here, heretofore, there has been known a gaming machine that sets a latent state to a most advantageous gaming state and enables the latent state to be set after a jackpot winning. However, in such a conventional gaming machine, since the latent state is not set unless the jackpot is won, the ball is held while the player stays in the normal state (that is, until the jackpot is won). Since a disadvantageous state which is easy to decrease is formed, the player is not satisfied, and there is a problem that it is difficult to improve the interest of the player.

  On the other hand, in the seventh embodiment, the number of probable changes is ended (elapsed) in the probable change state that is more disadvantageous than the latent state, so that the most advantageous extended play mode (the latent state ). In other words, it is configured to shift to an advantageous state where the prize ball can be easily and intermittently obtained simply by continuing the right-handed game without winning the jackpot. With this configuration, when the number of probable changes can be ended, the player can have a greater sense of satisfaction and a sense of accomplishment, thereby improving the interest of the player in the game. Can be.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the special symbol lottery result is a specific lottery result (small hit C) in a state where the probability change state is set, the most advantageous consecutive play mode without elapse of the probability change count. (Latent state). Thereby, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation even for a lottery result other than the jackpot winning during the probability change state.

  In addition, the above-mentioned lottery result (small hit C) is configured to be able to be won only by the lottery of the special symbol (second special symbol) which is hard to be executed in the probable change state. Therefore, in a case where the game ball fired by the right-handed game in the probable change state enters the right second entrance 645 with an irregular behavior and the second special symbol lottery is executed, the player has an expectation. Can be provided.

  Further, in the present embodiment, since there is no hold memory of the second special symbol, the small hit C cannot be won unless the ball enters the second entrance 645 during the probable change state. Make up. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to gaze at the behavior of the ball in the probable change state. Note that only a part of the configuration of the present embodiment described above may be employed. For example, a second special symbol holding function may be provided, and for example, the second special symbol acquired during a jackpot game in which a probable change state is set. The second special symbol lottery based on the special symbol reservation storage may be executed during the probable change state. With this configuration, it is possible to execute the second special symbol change a plurality of times immediately after the probable change state is set. In this case, as an effect during the period in which the second special symbol change is executed, for example, as a stage before the effect mode in which the character 811 shown in FIG. 161 (a) aims at the top, an effect to inspire whether or not to enter a helicopter. When the character 811 gets into the helicopter and performs the effect of reaching the top shown in FIG. 161 (b) when the result of the lottery effect of the second special symbol is “small hit C” by performing good.

  As a result, immediately after the probable change state is set, it is possible to inform the player of the fact that the period in which the transition to the latent state is easy is set. Further, in this case, as the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation executed during the probable change state, when the number of special symbol changes executed after the probable change state is set is less than a predetermined number (for example, less than 10 times) It is preferable that the short fluctuation (the fluctuation time is 5 seconds) is easily selected. This makes it possible to smoothly execute the second special symbol lottery based on the special figure 2 reservation acquired during the jackpot game.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the right electric accessory 164 is frequently opened during the probable change state, so that the ball fired by the right-handed game is unlikely to enter the right second entrance 645. However, for example, a variation pattern of a long variation time (for example, 10 seconds) is selected with a small probability (for example, a probability of 1/100) as a variation pattern of a normal symbol, and the right pattern is temporarily set. It may be configured so that a state where a ball easily enters the second ball entrance 645 can be formed. This makes it easy to temporarily execute the second special symbol lottery during the probable change state. Therefore, in the state where the probable change state is set, the result of the special symbol lottery becomes a specific lottery result (small hit C), and the chance of shifting to the latent state can be increased, and the interest of the game is improved. be able to. Further, in the present embodiment, the "small hit C", which is a trigger for shifting from the probable state to the latent state, can be won only by the second special symbol lottery. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Also in the special symbol lottery, it may be configured to be able to win with a small probability (for example, 1/200) lower than the second special symbol lottery.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment, a configuration in which a transition from the shift to the extended-shelf mode (latent state) to the first win of the small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol is notified as a preparation state. When a situation in which a prize ball can be actually acquired is reached (that is, when a small hit change is started), it is configured to notify that an advantageous state (RUSH state) has been achieved. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a prize ball cannot be acquired for a long time even though the RUSH state is notified, and the player is not satisfied.

  In the seventh embodiment, the probability of a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol is set to about 1/1 (59/60). However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be arbitrarily determined. For example, the small hit probability may be reduced.

  Next, the contents of the special figure discarding setting processing (S4643) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 186 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure discarding setting process (S4643). This special figure destruction setting processing (S4643) is executed when a special figure destruction command is received in the stop-related processing 7 (see S4236 in FIG. 184). In the present embodiment, by executing the right-handed game during the latent state, the lottery of the second special symbol is mainly executed while the reserved ball of the first special symbol (special figure 1 reserved ball) is secured. RUSH game is executed to execute the small hit game.

  Then, during the latent state, the variation time set as the first special symbol variation is configured to easily become a long time (600 seconds). Further, the variation time of the second special symbol variation executed during the latent state is configured to be different according to the number of special figure 1 reserved balls. Specifically, the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is The configuration is such that the smaller the number is (the number of the special figure 1 reserved balls is 1 or 2), the shorter the fluctuation time is selected as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol fluctuation. In addition, when a specific lottery result (“small hit B”) is won in the second special symbol lottery, the first special symbol variation being executed is discarded (forced stop).

  In other words, in the present embodiment, during the latent state, while the small hitting game is frequently executed in the second special symbol lottery, and the number of the reserved balls of the first special symbol is reduced by the specific small hit winning, A game aiming at an efficient game (a game that increases the number of small hit games executed within a unit time) is executed.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the RUSH game executed during the latent state is a normal RUSH game, and a super RUSH game in which the number of small hits executed in a unit time is larger than that of the normal RUSH game, To the player, and when a specific lottery result (“small hit B”) is won in the second special symbol lottery, a suggestion effect suggesting a shift to a super RUSH game (see FIG. 164). ) Is configured to be executable. This allows the player executing the game in the latent state to be informed clearly that there is a more advantageous state (super RUSH game) and the situation until the super RUSH game is executed. And the player's willingness to play can be further increased.

  When the special figure discard setting process (S4643) is executed, first, it is determined whether the RUSH flag 223fg is set to ON (S8101), and if it is determined that the RUSH flag 223fg is not set to ON (S8101: No). Since the current state is not the latent state (RUSH game), the processing skips steps S8102 to S8107 to be described later and shifts to the processing in S8108.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8101 that the RUSH flag 223fg is set to ON (S8101: Yes), the value of the special figure reserved ball number counter (first special symbol reserved ball number counter) 203dd is read. It is determined whether the current number of special figure reserved balls is three. That is, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is three and the ball is forcibly stopped (S8103). Here, if it is determined that the number of special figure reserved balls is 3 (S8103: Yes), an effect mode indicating super rush entry (see FIG. 164 (b)) is determined, and the super RUSH medium flag is set to ON. Then, the forced stop mode of the first special symbol is determined (S8108), a display command for indicating the determined various modes is set (S8109), and the process ends.

  Here, the process of S8108 will be described. In the present embodiment, the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are configured to be executed in parallel (overlapping). The timing at which the second special symbol change won in the win B7) is stopped and displayed is determined independently of the change timing of the first special symbol change. Therefore, the first special symbol change may be forcibly stopped (discarded) immediately after the start, or may be forcibly stopped (discarded) at a timing immediately before the stop display of the first special symbol change. Then, the variation mode of the third symbol (decorative symbol that is variably displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81) variably displayed in response to the first special symbol variability is variable based on the elapse of the variation time. If the pachinko machine 10 is operated, for example, immediately after the start of the fluctuation, the player executes a high-speed fluctuation display to the extent that it is difficult for the player to identify the third symbol. In general, a low-speed fluctuation display is executed in which the fluctuation speed is reduced to such an extent that a player can identify the fluctuation.

  In the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above, based on the fact that the first special symbol change is forcibly stopped, the third symbol change being executed is changed to the third symbol display device at the timing of receiving the command indicating the forced stop. If stop display is performed with the display mode displayed on the display surface 81, for example, when the third symbol is displayed at a low-speed fluctuation, the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a big hit. There was a possibility that it would happen.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the process of S8108, based on the remaining period of the first special symbol variation being executed as the forcible stop mode of the special symbol (first special symbol), a high speed variation mode and a low speed variation mode are executed. Either the stop mode at the time of fluctuation is determined. Then, it outputs to the display control device 114 by the display command set in the process of S8109. The display control device 114 determines the forced stop display mode of the third symbol variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the type of the forced stop mode included in the received display command. Then, display control based on the determined forced stop display mode is executed.

  Specifically, when a display command indicating the high-speed fluctuation mode is received, the image data in the display mode indicating the forced stop is interrupted in the image data prepared for executing the high-speed fluctuation display, and the high-speed fluctuation mode is interrupted. The display control is executed so that the display is suddenly switched to the display mode indicating the forced stop. With this configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the first special symbol has been forcibly stopped without delay. Also, during the high-speed change, it is difficult for the player to identify the fluctuating third symbol, so even if the display mode indicating the forced stop is suddenly stopped and displayed, the image is replaced. There is no discomfort to the player.

  On the other hand, when the display command indicating the low speed fluctuation stop mode is received, the image displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is read, and the reach state (the combination indicating the jackpot winning) is displayed. 3 symbols can be stopped and displayed). When it is determined that the current state is not the reach state, the image corresponding to the display data in which each third symbol is displayed at a predetermined position (established line) is forcibly stopped among the display data used for the low-speed fluctuation display. The image is determined, and the fluctuation display is forcibly stopped after the low-speed fluctuation is continued until the forced stop image is displayed. In the case of the reach state, image data is created by replacing one symbol included in the remaining third symbol column during the change with a forced stop symbol indicating forced stop, and the forced stop symbol is stopped and displayed. The variable display data for forced stop is generated as described above, and the display control based on the variable display data for forced stop is executed.

  As described above, when the first special symbol is forcibly stopped, the third symbol is forcibly stopped in accordance with the variation display mode of the third symbol executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. By making the processing different, the third symbol can be stopped and displayed without giving a sense of incongruity to the player no matter at what timing the first special symbol change is forcibly stopped.

  Further, when the above-described display control is executed, the period from the first special symbol change is forcibly stopped to the stop of the third symbol change display is changed to the change display mode of the third symbol change being executed. In this case, for example, in a case where the first special symbol change is forcibly stopped, a period from when the first special symbol change is forcibly displayed until the forced stop is determined, or when the first special symbol change is forcibly stopped. The symbol determination period from when the special symbol indicating the small hit B win in the second special symbol change in which the forced stop condition for forcibly stopping the symbol is satisfied is displayed until the symbol is fixed is defined as a predetermined period (for example, one second). Then, within the predetermined period, various forced stop display controls for stopping and displaying the third symbol change may be executed. Then, a third symbol display mode (for example, “123”) for forcible stop determination is displayed based on the command (determination command) indicating that the determination period has elapsed being output from main controller 110. good. With this configuration, when the third symbol variation display is forcibly stopped, the period until the third symbol variation display is forcibly stopped is changed according to the variation display mode of the third symbol variation being executed. In this case, the third symbol change display can be forcibly stopped within the fixed period, and the third symbol can be displayed in the same display mode in a display mode for forcibly determining the stop after the fixed period.

  Returning to FIG. 186, the description will be continued. In the process of S8103, if it is determined that the number of special figure reserved balls is not 3 (S8103: No), then it is determined whether the number of special figure reserved balls is 4 (S8106) and determined to be 4. If it has been performed (S8106: Yes), an effect mode aiming at the top (for example, an effect mode in which the character 811 goes up one step from the effect screen shown in FIG. 164 (a)) is determined (S8107), and the process proceeds to S8108. Transition. If it is determined that the value is not 4 in the process of S8106, the process of S8107 is skipped and the process proceeds to S8108.

  Next, the contents of the variable display setting process 7 (S4153) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 187 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 7 (S4153). The variable display setting process 7 (S4153) is executed in the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment, and is used to execute a variable effect on the third symbol display device 81. And generates and sets a display variation pattern command based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the variation display setting process 7 (S4153), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S5201). If it is determined that the special figure change start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S5201: No), it means that the change pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, so that the processing of S5234 is performed. Move to. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure change start flag 223d is on (S5201: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the change number counter 223fc (S5231), and the special figure change start flag 223d is set to off (S5202). Then, a rendering mode setting process for generating a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 based on the acquired variation pattern type is executed (S5232), and the data in the winning information storage area 223b is deleted. The processing is shifted (S5233), and the flow shifts to the processing of S5234.

  In the process of S5234, it is determined whether the special figure 2 change start flag 223fa provided in the RAM 223 is on (S5234). If it is determined that the special figure 2 change start flag 223fa is not on (that is, it is off) (S5234: No), the change pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, so that Move on to processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 change start flag 223fa is ON (S5234: Yes), the value of the change number counter 223fc is added by 1 (S5235), and the special figure 2 change start flag 223fa is set to OFF (S5235). (S5236) Then, the variable display setting process 7 for special figure 2 is executed (S5237). Details of the special figure 2 variable display setting processing 7 (S5237) will be described later with reference to FIG. Upon completion of the process in S5237, the flow shifts to a process in S5238.

  In the process of S5238, it is determined whether the stop type selection flag 223e or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223fb provided in the RAM 223 is on (S5238). If it is determined that the special figure change start flag 223e or the special figure 2 change start flag 223fb is not on (that is, it is off) (S5238: No), no change pattern command has been received from the main control device 110. Since this is the state, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure change start flag 223e or the special figure 2 change start flag 223fb is ON (S5238: Yes), the special figure change start flag 223e or the special figure 2 change start flag 223fb is set to OFF ( (S5239) Then, the display special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command is set based on the stop type extracted from the command (S5240), and thereafter, the present process is ended.

  Next, details of the above-described effect mode setting process (S5322) will be described. The effect mode setting process (S5232) is a process for setting an effect mode according to the change type of the first special symbol notified by the change pattern command, as described above. In the effect mode setting process (S5232), first, it is determined whether the current state is the normal state (S8201). If it is determined that the current state is not the normal state (S8201: No), then, it is determined whether the current state is the probable change state. (S8202). In the processing of S8202, when it is determined that the state is not the probable change state (S8202: No), it means that the apparatus is in the latent state (rensou mode), the ceiling effect setting processing is executed (S8203), and the determined effect mode is determined. Is set (S8208), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S8202, when it is determined that the state is in the probable change state (S8202: Yes), the value of the fluctuation number counter 223fc is set to determine whether the current first special symbol is the final fluctuation in the probable change state. It is determined whether it is 1 (S8204). In the process of S8204, when it is determined that the value of the number-of-times-of-change counter 223fc is 1 (S8204: Yes), the ceiling effect setting for selecting the effect mode of the last change display effect before shifting to the RUSH game. The process is executed (S8206), and the process proceeds to S8208. On the other hand, in the process of S8204, when it is determined that the number of remaining working hours is not 1 (S8204: No), that is, since there is no possibility of shifting to the latent state (the extended mode), the fluctuation pattern command indicates The effect mode corresponding to the variation type is determined (S8205), and the process proceeds to S8208. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8201 that the current game state is the normal state (S8201: Yes), then the effect mode for the normal mode corresponding to the fluctuation type indicated by the fluctuation pattern command is determined. (S8207), and the process proceeds to S8208.

  Next, the ceiling effect setting processing (S8202, S8206) will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 188. As shown in FIG. 188, in the ceiling effect setting process (S8203 (S8206)), first, the data of the execution area corresponding to the first special symbol in the winning information storage area 223b is read (S8301), and the read execution is performed. It is determined whether or not the data in the area is data corresponding to a jackpot (S8302), and if it is determined that the area is a jackpot (S8302: Yes), that is, it is determined that the current special figure 1 change is a jackpot change. In this case, the presentation mode corresponding to the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command (the presentation mode for informing the jackpot is determined (S8303), and this processing ends. That is, when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery. , Because the jackpot game is executed without shifting to the latent state, the effect of informing the arrival at the top (see FIG. 161 (b)) An effect mode for notifying a jackpot (for example, an effect mode in which a display mode indicating a jackpot winning is displayed while climbing a cliff) is determined without determining the mode. In spite of the fact that the top reach effect has been executed, the jackpot game is executed, and thereafter, a game state other than the latent state is set, which can prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. .

  In the present embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S8302 that the special symbol variation has won the jackpot, the top reaching effect is not executed regardless of the selected jackpot type. Without being limited to the above, if a jackpot in which the latent state is set after the jackpot game is won, after performing the top reaching effect, further perform an effect of displaying a display mode indicating the jackpot winning on the top. It may be configured as follows. Further, in the present embodiment, the processing is performed so as to determine whether or not to execute the top reaching effect at the final variation of the probable change state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the jackpot in which the latent state is set after the end is won (during the change of the jackpot), after the top reaching effect is executed, an effect of displaying a display mode indicating the jackpot winning on the top is executed. You may comprise. Thereby, the effect mode of the effect (the effect in which the character 811 aims at the top) executed during the probability change state can be changed based on the remaining period of the probability change state and the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery, In addition, it is possible to ensure that the latent state is set when the top-reach effect is executed, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  On the other hand, in the process of S8302, when it is determined that the data read from the execution area is not data indicating the jackpot (S8302: No), the effect mode in which the character 811 reaches the top of the rocky mountain (FIG. 169 (b)) (Refer to step S8304), the ceiling effect execution flag 223fh is set to on (step S8305), and the process ends.

  By executing the ceiling effect setting process (see FIG. 189), the top reach effect (see FIG. 169 (b)) according to the prefetch result of the lottery result of the first special symbol at the time of shifting to the latent state. Can be suitably set.

  Next, the details of the special figure 2 variable display setting processing 7 (S5237) executed in the above-described variable display setting processing 7 (see S4153 in FIG. 187) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 190. The special figure 2 change display setting process 7 (S5237) is a process for setting a change effect corresponding to the change pattern of the second special symbol change. When the special figure 2 variable display setting process 7 (S5237) is executed, first, it is determined whether the RUSH flag 223fg is on (S8401), and it is determined that the RUSH flag 223fg is off. In the case (S8401: No), that is, when it is determined that the current game state is the normal state or the latent state, it is then determined whether the probable state is set (S8402).

  In the process of S8402, when it is determined that the probable change state is not set, that is, when it is determined that the current game state is the normal state (S8402: No), the process corresponding to the change type indicated by the change pattern command is performed. (2) The variable display mode of the special symbol is determined (S8403), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S8402, when it is determined that the current game state is the probable change state (S8402: Yes), the probable change setting process (S8402: Yes) for setting the fluctuation display mode of the second special symbol fluctuation during the probable change state ( S8404) is executed, and this process ends. The details of the setting process during probable change (S8404) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S8401, if it is determined that the RUSH flag 223fg is on (S8401: Yes), then it is determined whether the preparation flag 223fd is on (S8405). If it is determined that the 223fd is off (S8405: No), it means that the RUSH game is in progress (the preparation state is completed), and thus the second special symbol in the latent state (RUSH game). The RUSH setting process (S8410) for setting the variation display mode of the variation is executed, and the process ends. The details of the RUSH setting process (S8410) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S8405, when it is determined that the preparation state flag 223fd is turned on (that is, in the preparation state) (S8405: Yes), the variation type of the small hit is notified by the variation pattern command. It is determined (S8406) whether or not the change type of the small hit has been notified (S8406: Yes), the preparation state flag 223fd is turned off (S8407), and the present fluctuation display effect is produced. As a mode, an effect mode (see FIG. 162 (b)) of a RUSH entry effect for notifying the RUSH entry is determined (S8408), and this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 191, the processing content of the probable change setting processing (S8404) will be described. FIG. 191 is a flowchart showing the contents of the during-probability-change setting process (S8404). In the probable change setting process (S8404), the effect mode when the second special symbol change is executed during the probable change state is set. A process for setting an effect mode (shortcut effect mode) when the latent state is set is performed without passing 50 times). As described above, in the present embodiment, when the right-handed game is executed during the probable change state, most of the balls flowing down the right area win the right electric combination 164, and the first special symbol change is executed. It is composed. However, when the balls flowing down the right area collide with each other, the ball rarely enters the right second entrance 645 in the case of irregular behavior, and the second special symbol lottery is executed. There are cases. Then, when the small win C is won by the second special symbol lottery executed during the probable change state, the probabilistic change is not performed for the number of probable changes (50 times), which is the end condition of the probable change state, and the probable change is performed. The state can be shifted to the latent state. Therefore, when the second special symbol lottery (fluctuation) is executed during the probability change state, a special effect is executed to indicate to the player that a chance to shift to the latent state has come. .

  When the in-probability change setting process (S8404) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the current second special symbol change is a change in which the small hit C is won (S8501). If it is determined that it is the small hit C (S8501: Yes), the value of the change number counter 223fc is read out next (S8502), and the probability of remaining change is 5 based on the value of the change number counter 223fc read out in the process of S8502. It is determined whether the number is less than or equal to the number of times (S8503). If it is determined that the number of times is less than or equal to 5 (S8503: Yes), an effect mode indicating entry of a small hit RUSH (RUSH game) is determined, and the process proceeds to S8506 described later. Transition.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S8503 that the number of probable changes is not less than 5 (it is 6 or more) (S8503: No), an effect indicating that a shortcut enters a small hit RUSH (RUSH game). A mode (for example, a warp effect) is determined (S8504), and the flow shifts to the process of S8506. If it is determined in the process of S8501 that the current fluctuation does not win the small hit C (S8501: No), the process directly proceeds to the process of S8506.

  In the process of S8506, the character 811 wears a flame with the effect mode (for example, from the display mode illustrated in FIG. 161 (a)) indicating that the special 2 change (second special symbol change) has been performed during the probability change. The display mode of the character 811 is varied), the effect mode of climbing the mountain vigorously is determined) (S8506), the display pattern command indicating the determined various effect modes is set (S8507), and the process ends. .

  Next, the contents of the RUSH setting process (S8410) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 192 is a flowchart showing the contents of the RUSH setting process (S8410). In the RUSH setting process (S8410), a process for setting various effects for the second special symbol change executed during the RUSH game is executed.

  When the RUSH setting process (S8410) is executed, it is determined whether the super RUSH flag 223fi is set to ON (S8601). If it is determined that the super RUSH flag 223fi is set to ON (S8601: Yes), the next step is performed. Next, it is determined whether or not the current fluctuation has won the small hit B (S8602). If it is determined that the small win B has been won (S8602: Yes), the first special symbol change being executed at the time of the change stop is forcibly stopped, so that the end suggestion effect indicating the pinch of the end of the super RUSH is performed. This is set (S8603), and the effect mode for RUSH corresponding to the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command is determined (S8604), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S8602, if the current fluctuation does not win the small hit B (S8602: No), or if it is determined that the super RUSH flag 223fi is not set to ON in the process of S8601 (S8601: (No), the process directly proceeds to the process of S8604, and then the present process is terminated.

<About another example using the game board configuration of the seventh embodiment>
In the above-described seventh embodiment, as shown in FIG. 157, a flow path through which the ball passing through the through gate 67 can flow is formed in the right region of the game board 13, and the right electric accessory 164 is provided in the flow path. In addition, while the right electric accessory 164 is in the closed state (the state in which the ball is difficult to win in the right electric accessory 164), the ball is placed on the opening / closing lid 164r1 of the right electric accessory 164. A flow path (see FIG. 158) is formed so that the ball flows down, and the right second ball inlet 645 is arranged at a position where a ball flowing down on the opening / closing lid 164r1 can enter the ball. Then, in accordance with the opening pattern of the right electric accessory 164 (opening operation pattern of a game per ordinary figure), a sphere that flows down the right side area, and thus a sphere that can flow down the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 (hereinafter, specified). The ratio of the ball flowing down the flow path to the right electric accessory 164 (the right first entrance 164r provided in the right electric accessory 164 (the first special symbol lottery trigger). The ratio of entering the starting opening) and the ratio of entering the right second entrance 645 (the ratio of entering the starting opening which is a lottery trigger of the second special symbol lottery) are varied. It was configured to be able to.

  Specifically, when the probable change state is set as the game state, the change time of the normal symbol change and the right electric change so that most of the balls flowing down the specific flow path win the right electric accessory 164. The opening pattern of the accessory 164 is defined, and when the latent state is set, the ball flowing down the specific flow path wins the right electric accessory 164 more than when the probable state is set. The fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation and the opening pattern of the right motor-operator 164 are defined so as to lower the ratio of the movement. In addition, when the normal state is set, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation is defined so that the winning ratio to the right electric auditors product 164 is further reduced than when the latent state is set. ing. In the latent state and the normal state, the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set for both, and the opening operation pattern (opening pattern of the right electric accessory 164) executed in the game per ordinary figure is the same. However, by changing the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the interval at which the game is executed per ordinary symbol is changed, and as a result, the ratio of the ball flowing down the specific flow path to the right electric accessory 164 is changed. Was configured.

  According to the configuration of the above-described seventh embodiment, the starting ports (the right first ball entry port 164r and the right second ball entry port 645) into which the ball easily enters differ according to the set game state. By performing the right-handed game, the type of the special symbol in which the special symbol lottery is mainly executed can be easily changed, so that when a different game state is set for the player, a different game is performed. Sex games can be played, and the interest of the games can be improved.

  However, in the above-described seventh embodiment, a special symbol type in which a special symbol lottery is mainly executed is defined for a set gaming state (for example, a probability variation state). Is configured such that the first special symbol lottery is easily executed and the second special symbol lottery is easily executed during the latent state. Therefore, unless the set game state is variably set, the special symbol type corresponding to the special symbol lottery mainly executed cannot be changed, and a player who has played a game for a long time in the same game state cannot be used. There was a problem of getting tired of the game early.

  In order to solve the above-described problem, it is preferable to use the following components or a combination of the components in place of the configuration of the seventh embodiment.

<Structure example 1: Structure of the ordinary figure fluctuation pattern selection table>
In the above-described seventh embodiment, as shown in FIG. 172 (b), a variation pattern is defined in accordance with the set game state and the value of the second variation type counter CS3, and the variation pattern is selected. When the processing is performed, a variation pattern corresponding to the acquired value of the second variation type counter CS3 is selected. That is, in the above-described seventh embodiment, when the same game state is set, a fluctuation pattern having the same content is defined regardless of the number of times of the special symbol fluctuation executed during the game state. The configuration is such that the variation pattern is selected based on the value of the second variation type counter CS3 acquired from the data table. On the other hand, in the present configuration example 1, according to the number of special symbol changes executed in the state where the specific game state (probable change state) is set (the number of special symbol lotteries executed after the end of the probable variable jackpot game). The general-purpose variation pattern selection table is configured so that the selection ratio of the selected variation time and the length of the selected variation time can be varied.

  That is, in contrast to the configuration of the ordinary figure change pattern selection table 202fg (see FIG. 172 (b)) of the above-described seventh embodiment, different change patterns corresponding to the number of special pattern changes after the game state is set. They differ in the provisions. Specifically, in the range where the number of times of the special symbol change from the setting of the probability change state is 1 to 2 times, a change pattern of a change time of 2 seconds is defined, and in the range of 3 to 50 times, the above is described. A variation pattern in which the variation time is 0.8 seconds is specified as in the ordinary figure variation pattern selection table 202fg of the seventh embodiment.

  With this configuration, a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 2 seconds is usually selected as the symbol fluctuation from the setting of the probable change state to the execution of the special symbol fluctuation twice. Therefore, the predetermined period (the period until the special symbol change is executed twice) after the probable change state is set is more right than the predetermined period (the period after the special symbol change is executed twice). It is possible to make it easy for the ball to enter the second entrance 645. Thereby, it is possible to easily execute the second special symbol lottery only during a part of the period during the probability change state. Therefore, a specific small hit (small hit C) is won by the second special symbol lottery only during a certain period during the probability change state, and the probability is changed without waiting for a predetermined period (50 times of probability change) to elapse. It is possible to easily make the transition from the state to the latent state that is more advantageous to the player than the probability change state.

  In the configuration example 1 described above, the fluctuation pattern of the ordinary symbol that can be selected so that the predetermined period after the probable change state is set is more advantageous to the player than the period other than the predetermined period is defined. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a certain period elapses after the probable change state is set, a change pattern of a normal symbol that is advantageous to the player may be easily selected. With this configuration, when the specific period has elapsed without terminating the probable change state, it is possible to cause the player to execute a more advantageous game than during the specific period. Therefore, it is possible to motivate a player who is performing a long-time game without changing the game state.

  Further, in the configuration example 1 described above, a configuration is adopted in which a different variation time (variation pattern) is selected according to the number of special symbol variations after the probable variation state is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Regardless of the number of special symbol changes, a change pattern with a change time of 2 seconds and a change pattern with a change time of 0.8 seconds are configured to be selectable. And, specifically, when the number of special symbol changes after the probable change state is set satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, the special symbol executed after the probable change state is set) A variation pattern that is advantageous to the player when the number of variations is less than two or when the number of special symbol variations after the probable variation state is set is an even number, than when the predetermined condition is not satisfied. S variation pattern) may be configured such is easily selected. With this configuration, it is possible to easily set a period in which a game advantageous to the player is executed only by variably setting the selection ratio of each variation pattern in accordance with the number of times the special symbol varies.

  In the configuration example 1 described above, the general-purpose variation pattern selection table to be referred to when the probable change state is set is one type. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and according to the jackpot type that triggers the probable change state to be set. It may be configured to select the fluctuation pattern of the ordinary symbol by referring to a different data table. In this case, even if the jackpot type in which the same probability change state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the winning jackpot Depending on the type, it is possible to select a variation pattern (variation time) of the ordinary symbol variation by referring to a different data table (general figure variation pattern table). In this case, according to the jackpot type, the length of the advantageous period (the period in which a game (for example, the second special symbol lottery) that is more advantageous to the player than other periods is more easily executed) and the timing at which the advantageous period is set are set. It is good to make it different. In addition, when a specific advantageous jackpot type is set, the entire period of the probable change state is set to the advantageous period, and when a specific disadvantageous jackpot type is set, the advantageous period is set for the entire period of the probable change state. You may comprise so that it may not be set.

  In addition, as described above, in a period in which a specific game state (probable change state) is set, in a case where a game that is more advantageous to the player than another period can be executed in some periods, For the player, in addition to the current playing state, the player determines whether or not the present period is an advantageous period (a period in which a game more advantageous to the player than other periods (eg, the second special symbol lottery) is more easily executed). It is preferable to perform a period suggestion effect for suggesting (notifying) a rabbit. For example, during the hill-climbing effect (see FIG. 161 (a)) executed during the probable change state in the above-described seventh embodiment, the rabbit Is changed to a display mode in which the character 811 imitating the character is powered up, the character "powerful zone entry" is displayed in the main display area Dm, and an effect capable of shortening a period until reaching the top is executed. Good.

  With this configuration, it is possible to easily notify the player that the current period is the advantageous period. Therefore, for example, a plurality of general figure fluctuation pattern tables having different advantageous periods are prepared as the general figure fluctuation pattern table referred to during the probability change state, and based on the jackpot type set at the time of the probability change jackpot, one Even in the case where the ordinary figure variation pattern table is configured to be selectable, the advantage period can be easily notified to the player. Note that the above-mentioned period suggestion effect is intended for all effects that are configured to be more easily executed during the advantageous period than during the outside of the advantageous period. Even if it is a production other than a production that directly explains something, at the time the production is executed, the possibility of the current advantageous period is higher than the possibility of being outside the advantageous period, so the period suggestion Included in the production. Therefore, the period suggestion effect only needs to be performed at a frequency lower than the advantageous period, and may be executed in a period (a disadvantageous period) outside the advantageous period.

  Further, in addition to the above-mentioned period suggestion effect, that is, an effect for suggesting to the player that the current time is likely to be an advantageous period, the universal figure change pattern table referred to in the current state of probable change includes It may be configured to execute a state suggestion effect that indicates that the table is a general-purpose variation pattern table in which an advantageous period is easily set among a plurality of general-purpose variation pattern tables that can be referred to during the state.

  Further, in the case where the probability change state is set, when the ball enters the right second entrance 645, a notification for notifying that the ball has entered the right second entrance 645. The effect mode of the effect may be configured to be different based on the determination result of whether or not the current time is the advantageous period. For example, a ball enters the right second entrance 645 during the advantageous period. In this case, since the ball is entered with a high ball entry frequency (during the advantageous period), the notification effect is executed without setting an effect mode that excessively celebrates the player, and the ball entry frequency is low. In a state (during a disadvantage period), when a ball enters the right second entrance 645, a notification effect that can be set when the ball enters the right second entrance 645 during the advantageous period It is preferable to set an effect mode for celebrating the player rather than the effect mode of the above. In the case where a plurality of periods with different eases of entering the ball for a specific entrance is configured to be settable, by changing the presentation mode of the notification effect according to the set period, When a ball can be made to enter a specific entrance during a period in which it is difficult to enter, a notification effect of a special effect mode can be executed.

  In the above-described configuration example 1, by changing the variation time of the ordinary symbol according to the predetermined condition (big hit type, game state, number of special symbol changes, value of the variation type counter CS3), the specific flow path (through gate 67) is changed. It is configured to vary the rate at which the ball that has flowed down the flow path through which the ball has passed) reaches the right second entrance 645. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In the case of winning, the length (period fixed period) of the period from the time when the winning normal symbol change is stopped and displayed until the time when the game is executed is determined by the type of the winning general symbol or the selection. It may be made different depending on the type of the ordinary figure variation pattern. That is, the period from the start of the ordinary symbol fluctuation to the execution of the game per ordinary figure is determined by predetermined conditions (big hit type, game state, number of special symbol fluctuations, value of the fluctuation type counter CS3, general figure lottery result, etc.). May be configured to be variable in accordance with

<Structure example 2: Opening operation configuration of right electric accessory>
In the above-described seventh embodiment, an example of one type of opening operation pattern of the right electric accessory 164 in the per-figure game executed during the probable change state is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A plurality of types of opening operation patterns of the right electric accessory 164 in the per-figure per game executed during the game can be set, and the right electric accessory 164 during the per-figure per game is set according to the set opening operation pattern. The length of the period during which the ball is in the closed state (the ball flows down the opening / closing lid 164r1 to the right second ball entrance 645) may be configured to have different lengths. With this configuration, the sphere that has flowed down the specific flow path (the flow path through which the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 flows down) according to the hit type of the game-per-game played during the probable change state is the second right-hand ball. The ratio of reaching the entrance 645 can be varied.

  Further, for example, as the opening operation pattern of the game per day, the first open state (the state in which the ball easily enters the right electric accessory 164) is in the first closed state (the ball is moved to the right electric accessory 164) for 2 seconds. (A state in which it is difficult to win) is set for 5 seconds, and the second open state is set for 0.5 seconds. An opening operation pattern is set. It may be configured such that the game per day is ended.

  With such a configuration, for example, if the ball is made to win the right electric accessory 164 during the first open state, the game per ordinary drawing ends at that time, but during the first open state, By executing the game so that the ball does not win the right electric accessory 164, it is possible to easily make the ball reach the right second ball entrance 645 during the game per ordinary drawing. Further, in this case, it is preferable that the opening operation pattern in which the game for the ordinary drawing ends when the period of the first opening state elapses can be set. Thereby, it is possible to provide a pleasure for the player to select whether to fire the ball during the per-game game (perform the right-handed game) or not.

  In the seventh embodiment described above and another configuration example of the seventh embodiment, in the above-described seventh embodiment, as shown in FIG. 157, the ball passing through the through gate 67 in the right region of the game board 13. Is formed so that the right electric accessory 164 is disposed in the channel, and the right electric accessory 164 is closed (the ball wins in the right electric accessory 164). During a difficult state), a flow path (see FIG. 158) is formed so that the ball flows down on the opening / closing lid 164r1 of the right electric accessory 164, and the ball flowing down on the opening / closing lid 164r1 can enter the ball. The right second ball entrance 645 is arranged at a certain position. Then, in accordance with the opening pattern of the right electric accessory 164 (opening operation pattern of a game per ordinary figure), a sphere that flows down the right side area, and thus a sphere that can flow down the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 (hereinafter, specified). The ratio of the ball flowing down the flow path to the right electric accessory 164 (the right first entrance 164r provided in the right electric accessory 164 (the first special symbol lottery trigger). The ratio of entering the starting opening) and the ratio of entering the right second entrance 645 (the ratio of entering the starting opening which is a lottery trigger of the second special symbol lottery) are varied. In the probable change state, the second special symbol lottery is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery. In other words, the starting port provided on the upstream side of the specific flow path is configured such that a lottery disadvantageous to the player is executed than the starting port provided on the downstream side, and the starting port provided on the upstream side is formed. The ball winning ratio of the ball to the starting port on the downstream side where the lottery that is advantageous to the player is performed by changing the winning ratio of the ball is configured to be variable, but is not limited thereto, for example, The configuration is such that a lottery that is advantageous to the player is executed when the ball enters the starting port provided on the upstream side of the specific area, than when the ball enters the starting port provided on the downstream side. May be.

  Further, in the above-described seventh embodiment, no matter what occasion sets the latent state that is most advantageous to the player, specifically, the jackpot is won after the jackpot game is completed. Then, even if the latent state is set after the jackpot game is completed, or even if the predetermined transition condition (for example, the number of times of the probability change is 50) is satisfied during the positive change state and the latent state is set, the latent state is set. Is set during a jackpot game or a probable change state in order to facilitate a state in which a predetermined number (for example, four) of reserved memories of the first special symbol (special figure 1 reserved) is secured. In such a right-handed game, a special figure 1 reservation can be obtained. Specifically, when the first special symbol change is executed during the probability change state, and the first special symbol change is not executed during the jackpot game, the latent state is set when the potential win is won. Is more likely to be executed in the state where the number of reserved special figures 1 is the upper limit (4) than when the latent state is set via the probability change state.

  When the latent state is set, a game (second special symbol lottery) having a different degree of advantage (different fluctuation time) is executed according to the number of special figure 1 reservations, and the special figure 1 reservation is performed. It was configured such that the smaller the number, the more advantageous the game is executed than the case where the special figure 1 reservation number is large.

  In other words, when the number of times of the probability change (the number of times of the special symbol change executed during the state of the probability change) reaches 50 during the state of the probability change, the special figure is executed by the right-handed game executed until the number of times of the probability change reaches 50 times. It was configured so that the number of 1 hold could be the upper limit (4) with a high probability. Furthermore, in the above-described seventh embodiment, when the small hit C is won in the second special symbol lottery during the probability change state, the probability change state is changed to the latent state before the number of probability changes reaches 50 times. It was configured so that it could be migrated. Therefore, for example, immediately after the probability change state is set, the small hit C is won, and when the state shifts to the latent state, the latent state is set as compared with the case where the latent state is set based on the fulfillment of other transition conditions. Since the execution period of the right-handed game before the certainty state is set becomes shorter, it is possible to easily reduce the number of special figure 1 reservations at the time when the certainty state is set. Therefore, it is possible to set a transition condition more advantageous to the player than the other transition conditions described above (transition conditions that are satisfied when the number of times of probability change reaches 50).

  As described above, a plurality of transition conditions (big hit, 50 times of probability change, small hit C winning) are set in advance in order to set a specific game state (for example, a latent state), and the type of the satisfied transition condition is set. By changing the degree of advantage after the specific game state is set in accordance with the game state, the player is interested not only in the game state set for the player but also in the transition condition that is established. be able to. Further, in order to set a specific game state (for example, a latent state) in a state where the same game state (for example, a probability change state) is set, a plurality of transition conditions (50 times of probability change, small hit C win) A transition condition that can be satisfied without passing through a jackpot is set in advance, and the degree of advantage after a specific game state is set according to the type of the satisfied transition condition is configured to be variable. A game aiming to win a jackpot and a game aiming to establish advantageous transition conditions can be performed in parallel. Further, the specific transition condition (small hit C winning) set in advance is configured so that the degree of advantage after setting the latent state is easily changed according to the timing to be established. When the transition condition is satisfied in a state where the number of reserved special figures 1 is small, an advantageous game (super RUSH) is configured to be easily executed after the latent state is set. It is possible to play the game while expecting whether or not the transition condition is satisfied. Also, since the specific transition condition (small hit C winning) can be satisfied regardless of the number of special figure 1 reservations, it is possible to always expect the player to expect the specific transition condition to be satisfied. .

  In the above-described seventh embodiment, of the plurality of shift conditions for shifting to the latent state, the shift condition established by the small hit C win is configured to be most advantageous to the player, but is not limited to this. Alternatively, the player may be configured to be more advantageous when the number of times of the probability change reaches 50 times. In this case, for example, the probabilistic state is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the latent state, What is necessary is just to comprise so that a game advantageous to a player may be performed rather than a state being set.

  Further, as the effect (hill-climbing effect) performed during the probable change state shown with reference to FIGS. 161 (a) and (b), the effect mode of the effect performed when the transition condition is satisfied is shown at the time. It may be changed in accordance with the number of reserved special figure 1 balls. For example, when an execution condition for executing an advantageous game after setting a latent state is satisfied (for example, when the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is one) In the case where the transition condition is satisfied in the state of, the effect of reaching the summit (for example, an effect mode in which the summit is a flower field) is performed more gorgeously than in the case where the transition condition is not satisfied. It may be configured to notify that the transition condition is satisfied in an advantageous state. In addition, when the small hit C is won (the time when the second special symbol change in which the small hit C is won is started) or when it is determined that the number of times of the probability change reaches 50 times (the special figure 1 reservation is read ahead and the At the time when it is determined that the jackpot is not won until the number of times reaches 50), an effect prompting to interrupt the right-handed game may be executed. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary increase of the special figure 1 reservation.

  Further, in the above-described seventh embodiment, in the state in which the latent state is set, the game is interrupted until the first special symbol change (10-minute change) of a long time change is executed a plurality of times, thereby forcibly. It is possible to play a game in a game state that is advantageous to the player, but on the other hand, by interrupting the game for a long time during the latent state, the game most disadvantageous to the player is executed It is good to set a penalty as follows. Specifically, it is configured such that the selected general symbol variation pattern is made different depending on the number of reserved symbols of ordinary symbols (number of reserved ordinary symbols), and is selected when the number of reserved symbols of ordinary symbols is zero. It is preferable that the general figure variation pattern is more disadvantageous to the player than the general figure variation pattern selected when the number of stored ordinary symbols is more than 0 (for example, 3). More specifically, the configuration may be such that a general-purpose variation pattern in which a long variation time is set is easily selected.

  With this configuration, when the game is suspended for a long time during the latent state, and the number of ordinary drawing reservations is set to 0, the player in a disadvantageous situation where it is difficult to increase the special figure 1 reservation from 0. Can play the game. Further, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that the general figure change pattern can be selected based on the number of reserved general figure and the number of reserved special figure 1 balls. When the number of reserved figures is one or two, a short variation time is easily set so that the number of special figure 1 reserved balls tends to be three or more as a variation time of a normal symbol, and the number of reserved general figures is 0. When the number of special figure reservations is 0, it is preferable to set a long fluctuation time to make it difficult to newly acquire special figure 1 reservation.

  Further, a configuration in which the normal pattern fluctuation pattern is made different according to the number of ordinary symbols to be stored may be applied to the pachinko machine 10 having the following configuration. Specifically, as a configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, a through gate 67 is provided also on the left side of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment shown in FIG. A position where a ball can be won (for example, a first ball entry) regardless of whether a game is played, that is, a game in which a ball flows down in the left area, or a game in which the ball strikes right (a game in which a ball flows down in the right area). The position of the variable prize device 650 that is opened during a jackpot game is arranged at a different position from the gaming board 13 (a position below the mouth 64). Is configured to allow the user to make a selection. Then, the rate at which the shot ball passes through the through gate 67 is made different between when the right-handed game is played and when the left-handed game is played. This makes it possible to vary the number of stored ordinary symbols (the number of reserved ordinary symbols) acquired at the end of the big hit game, depending on which game is played during the big hit game. Then, as the game state set after the end of the jackpot game, a first game state in which a larger number of ordinary figure reservations is more advantageous than in a case where the number is smaller, and a second game state in which a larger number of ordinary figure reservations is more disadvantageous than when the number is smaller. The game state is settable.

  With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with a pleasure of selecting a game method during the big hit game while predicting a game state set after the big hit game ends.

<Modification of the seventh embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the above-described seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the above-described seventh embodiment, a gaming machine (so-called simultaneous fluctuation) in which the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 lottery) and the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 lottery) can be executed in an overlapping manner In the specification, when a specific game state (for example, a latent state) is set, a long-time (for example, 10 minutes) fluctuation pattern as a fluctuation time of the first special symbol fluctuation is changed to a second special symbol fluctuation. The configuration is such that a short-term (for example, one second) variation pattern is set as the variation time, and further, it is configured such that a small hit can be won in the special drawing 2 lottery.

  With this configuration, it is possible to increase the number of times the special figure 2 lottery is executed during the latent state, and to execute the special figure 2 lottery based on the result of the lottery. Frequent small hit games can provide an advantageous game to the player.

  On the other hand, in a modified example of the seventh embodiment, similarly to the above-described seventh embodiment, a gaming machine (a so-called so-called “lottery”) that can execute a lottery of a first special symbol and a lottery of a second special symbol in an overlapping manner. , Simultaneous fluctuation specification), when a specific game state (for example, a probable change state) is set, the fluctuation time of one special symbol (for example, the first special symbol) is increased (for example, 10 minutes). In some cases, the other special symbol (for example, the second special symbol) is configured to be shorter (for example, one second) so that the other special symbol lottery is preferentially executed.

  Then, the lottery of the other special symbol lottery (for example, the second special symbol) is more advantageous than the lottery of one special symbol lottery (for example, the first special symbol) (for example, the second special symbol lottery). It is easier to win the small hit than the first special symbol lottery, or the content of the big hit game executed when the big hit is won), and is advantageous to the player during a specific game state (for example, a probable change state). There are things that make the game easier to play.

  In the gaming machine described above, at least during the period in which the probability change state is set, the first special symbol lottery becomes a disadvantageous lottery disadvantageous to the player, and the second special symbol lottery becomes an advantageous lottery advantageous to the player. . Further, in the above-described gaming machine, at least one of the ending conditions for ending a specific gaming state (for example, a probable change state) includes a lottery result of one special symbol lottery (for example, a first special symbol lottery). Set the ending condition that is established when the lottery result (for example, a loss winning or a jackpot winning) is obtained, and provide a gaming ability to execute a number of advantageous special symbol lotteries until the ending condition is satisfied by the disadvantageous special symbol lottery By doing, there is something that improves the interest of the game.

  However, in the above-described gaming machine, when a specific gaming state (for example, a probable change state) that is an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player is set, the period in which the advantageous gaming state continues is the first special symbol lottery. Therefore, there is a problem that it is not possible for the player to enthusiastically play a game while expecting the advantageous game state to continue for a long time. Specifically, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a lottery result for terminating the advantageous gaming state (for example, a jackpot winning in which the normal state is set after the end of the jackpot game), the result for indicating the lottery result is displayed. The period until the special symbol is stopped and displayed (the period until the jackpot game based on the lottery result is started) is a period in which the advantageous gaming state is continued, and once the period in which the advantageous gaming state is continued is set. However, there is a problem that the period cannot be changed (discarded).

  On the other hand, in the seventh embodiment, when a small hit is won in an advantageous special symbol lottery (second special symbol lottery) mainly executed during the advantageous gaming state, the disadvantageous special symbol variation (the (1 special symbol variation) can be discarded. In other words, if the result of the disadvantageous special symbol change being executed is a result of terminating the advantageous gaming state (for example, a result indicating a jackpot winning in which the normal state is set after the end of the jackpot game), the lottery result is displayed. By discarding, the advantageous game state can be extended (continued). Further, when the disadvantageous special design change (first special design change) being executed is discarded, the number of the disadvantageous special design change is not updated (added) by the discarded disadvantageous special design change. Therefore, as a termination condition for terminating the advantageous gaming state, a variation number termination condition that is satisfied when the number of disadvantageous special symbol variations during the advantageous gaming state reaches a predetermined number (for example, two) is set. Also in this case, the advantageous game state can be extended (continued).

  With such a configuration, the period during which the advantageous gaming state continues can be changed based on the result of the lottery of the advantageous special symbol (second special symbol), so that a player who performs a game in the advantageous gaming state can be changed. It is possible to make the player play the game enthusiastically.

  Further, in the present modification, in the case of winning a small win in the advantageous special symbol lottery in the advantageous game state (probable change state), the small hit type in which the above-described disadvantageous special symbol change (first special symbol change) being executed is discarded. (Small hit B) and a small hit type (small hit C) for terminating the advantageous gaming state after discarding the disadvantageous special symbol change (first special symbol change) being executed are configured to be at least configurable. ing.

  That is, in the present modification, an end condition that is established based on a lottery result of an advantageous special symbol (a second symbol) is set as an end condition for terminating the advantageous gaming state. By providing a plurality of termination conditions for terminating the advantageous gaming state in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the length of the period during which the advantageous gaming state continues.

  In addition, since an end condition that can be established based on the result of the lottery of the advantageous special symbol (the second special symbol) in the advantageous gaming state is set, a surprising game can be provided to the player. In addition, as described above, when the small hit is won in the advantageous special symbol lottery, the period in which the advantageous gaming state continues can be shortened or lengthened depending on the set small hit type, When a small hit is won in the lottery of the advantageous special symbol (the second special symbol), the player can watch the game contents thereafter.

  Further, in the present modified example, similarly to the above-described seventh embodiment, the number of reserved balls of the disadvantageous special symbol (first special symbol) (the total number of the number of reserved balls of the special symbol and the number of reserved balls of the advantageous special symbol) The variable time of the variation of the advantageous special symbol (the second special symbol) can be variably set in accordance with the number of the reserved balls of the disadvantageous special symbol (the first special symbol). The smaller the number of reserved balls and the total number of retained special symbols with the reserved balls, the shorter the fluctuation time is set as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol fluctuation executed during the advantageous gaming state (during the probable change state). It is configured to be easy.

  Thus, by winning a small win in the lottery of the advantageous special symbol (second special symbol) and discarding the disadvantageous special symbol variation being executed, it is possible to increase the number of lotteries of the second special symbol in the advantageous gaming state. .

  Further, in the above-described seventh embodiment, when the special symbol high probability state is set after the jackpot game ends, the special symbol high probability state continues until the special symbol lottery is performed next. The probability state of the ordinary symbol is shifted from the high probability state to the low probability state when a predetermined transition condition (specific small hit winning or execution of a predetermined number of special symbol lotteries) is satisfied. Was configured as follows. In the pachinko machine 10 configured as above, once the high probability state of the special symbol is set, the jackpot winning probability in the special symbol lottery can be increased until the next jackpot winning, so that the player can play the game with confidence. On the other hand, if the special symbol high probability state is set, the special symbol high probability state will not end until the jackpot is won, so the special symbol high probability state There is a problem in that the player's willingness to play decreases.

  On the other hand, in the present modification, a condition in which the high-probability state of the special symbol is shifted to the low-probability state is added. It is configured so that it can transition to a probability state. As a result, even when the special symbol high probability state is set, the special symbol high probability state may end without winning the jackpot, so the player is playing during the special symbol high probability state. It is possible to cause a player to play a game with a sense of tension.

  In addition, in this modified example, when the probable change state (the high probability state of the special symbol, the high probability state of the ordinary symbol) is set, when the first transition condition is satisfied, the low probability state of the special symbol is set, When the second transition condition is satisfied, the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, and when the first transition condition is satisfied before the second transition condition, the state is changed from the probable change state to the time saving state (the low probability state of the special symbol). If the second transition condition is satisfied before the first transition condition, the probable state is changed to the latent state (the high probability state of the special symbol, the low state of the ordinary symbol). (Probability state). Then, when both transition conditions are satisfied, the normal state (the low probability state of the special symbol and the low probability state of the ordinary symbol) is set.

  In other words, the system is configured to finally transition to the normal state through different processes depending on the order in which the first transition condition and the second transition condition that can be satisfied during the probable change state are satisfied. With such a configuration, the player who is playing in the probable state is not only interested in when the probable state ends, but also about which game state to transition from the probable state. be able to.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the above-described seventh embodiment, a long-term (for example, 10 minutes) fluctuation pattern is set as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol fluctuation while the latent state is set, and the normal state is set. Is set so that a long-term (for example, 10 minutes) variation pattern is set as the variation time of the second special symbol variation, and the special symbol lottery is a big hit as in the present modified example. If a first transition condition (for example, the number of executions of the special symbol lottery is 50) that can be satisfied even if no winning is set, a normal state set based on the first transition condition being satisfied is set. In the meantime, there is a possibility that both the first special symbol change and the second special symbol change may fluctuate for a long time (for example, 10 minutes), and it is not possible for the player to play the game smoothly. was there.

  On the other hand, in the present modification, the special symbol variation (for example, the first special symbol variation) is changed from the game state (for example, the probable variation state) in which the long-term variation is set as the variation pattern of the other special symbol variation. It is configured such that it does not directly transition to a gaming state (for example, a normal state) in which a long-term variation is set as a variation pattern (for example, a second special symbol variation) without going through a special symbol jackpot winning. The first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation are both configured to be less likely to fluctuate for a long time (for example, 10 minutes). This allows the player to play the game smoothly.

  First, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 193 is a front view schematically showing the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in a modified example of the seventh embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 of the present modification is different from the pachinko machine 10 of the above-described seventh embodiment (see FIG. 157) in the right area (the right side of the variable display unit 80) of the game area formed on the game board 13. A part of the configuration of the region to be formed is different, and the other configuration is the same. The same components are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 193, in the present modification, a distribution member 700 is provided on the upstream side of the right region, and a left flow path 701 in which a ball fired by a right-handed game is formed on the left side of the distribution member 700, It is configured to be alternately distributed to the right channel 702.

  On the upstream side of the left flow path 701, a movable lid 1500 forming the flow lower surface of the left flow path 701 is provided. And an open state in which a ball can enter the first right entrance port 64b disposed below the movable lid 1500, and a closed state in which entry is difficult (impossible). The opening and closing operation is performed so as to be located at the first position.

  Specifically, a movable lid opening / closing process is provided as a process executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 55), and the movable lid opening / closing process causes an opening period of 0.1 second. And an opening / closing operation that repeats a closing period of an average of 0.8 seconds in accordance with a predetermined scenario. The right first ball entrance 64b controlled to be opened and closed in this manner is configured such that a ball is less likely to enter than the first ball entrance 64.

  Then, the sphere flowing down the left channel 701 and flowing down on the movable lid 1500 (the sphere flowing down the channel formed on the movable lid 1500 located in the closed state) flows down the bent portion of the left channel 701. Then, the nail flows into the left side flow path 701 toward the electric accessory 640a with a nail planted at a position facing the lower end of the flow path.

  On the other hand, a bending portion is formed in the right flow path 702 by the distribution device 700, and a small hitting attacker (variable ball entry means) 3650 is provided so as to be a part of the flow lower surface of the bending portion. ing. The small hit attacker 3650 flows in when the open / close lid 3650a is open and the open / close lid 3650a is controlled to be opened / closed during the small hit game executed based on the small hit winning in the second special symbol lottery. And a small winning prize port 3653 into which the ball flowing down the flow path enters. The contents of the opening / closing control of the opening / closing lid 3650a during the small hit game are described in the main processing (see FIG. 55) of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above. And the detailed description is omitted.

  Here, the operation of the constantly movable member 1500 will be described in detail. The constantly movable valve 1500 is configured to be changed between an open position (open state) and a closed position (closed state) at a predetermined timing based on power being supplied to the pachinko machine 10. I have. Specifically, in the movable member driving process (not shown) executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process of main controller 110 (see FIG. 55), the operation control is performed based on the movable scenario stored in ROM 203. Have been. In this movable scenario, an operation of constantly opening the movable member 1500 for 0.1 second and thereafter closing the movable member 1500 for 0.8 second is repeatedly executed.

  That is, in the game board 13 of this modification, the ball shot in the right-handed game flows into the first flow path 701 at 1.2-second intervals, and the rolling surface on which the constantly movable member 1500 is provided. It flows down in the downstream direction while rolling. When the timing at which the ball flows into the first flow path 701 and rolls on the constantly movable member 1500 (or falls on the constantly movable member) coincides with the timing at which the constantly movable valve 1500 is opened. The ball passes through the constantly movable member 1500 in the open state and enters the right first ball entry port 64b.

  The timing of rolling on the constantly movable member 1500 (or falling on the constantly movable member) is an interval of 1.2 seconds, and the timing of constantly opening the movable valve 1500 is 0 in 0.9 seconds. .1 second, the timing at which they match is about once every 15.6 seconds. That is, when the right-hitting game is continuously executed, about four balls per minute enter the first right entrance 64b.

  In other words, in a gaming state in which a right-handed game is continuously executed, such as during a jackpot game or a time-saving game, a ball periodically enters the right first entrance 64b, so that the jackpot game is not performed. When the probable change state is set after the termination, it is possible to prevent a state in which the first special symbol is not held (special figure 1 held). In addition, since the period during which the movable valve 1500 is always opened at one time is set to a period (0.1 seconds) in which it is difficult for the player to aim and hit, the first entrance is provided in the normal game state. A right-handed game may be more disadvantageous to a player than a left-handed game aiming at 64.

  More specifically, when the left-handed game is performed in the case where the gaming state is the normal state, the design is such that, out of the 250 shot balls, about 15 shots enter the first entrance 64. When a ball enters, five prize balls are paid out. Further, it is designed so that about five shots enter the general entrance 63, and five prize balls are paid out when the ball enters. Therefore, in the left-handed game, it is possible to allow approximately 20 balls to enter the first entrance 64 in consideration of re-launching the prize balls to be paid out when 250 balls are fired. Become.

  On the other hand, in the case where the game state is the normal state, when a right-handed game is performed, it is designed that, out of the 250 balls fired, about nine rounds enter the right first entrance opening 64b. If the ball enters, two prize balls are paid out. The general entrance 63 is not provided in the right area. Therefore, in the right-handed game, when 250 balls are fired, even if considering that the awarded balls to be paid out are fired again, about 10 balls are allowed to enter the right first entrance 64b. I can only do it. Therefore, when the game state is the normal state, it is possible to suppress the player from playing a right-handed game.

  In the present embodiment, the general winning opening 63 is not provided in the game area (right side area) through which the ball fired by the right-handed game passes. The general winning opening 63 may be provided on the basis of a design philosophy to the extent that is not advantageous to the player. This makes it possible to increase the number of balls to be paid out as prize balls in a right-handed game during a time-saving state or a jackpot state.

  Further, since the distribution member 700 is provided as a delay unit for delaying the flow of the ball on the path until the ball fired by the right-handed game reaches the movable lid 1500, the ball fired by the right-handed game is movable. It is possible to make it difficult to predict the timing of reaching the lid 1500. In this modification, the purpose of delaying the flow of the ball (to make the flow behavior of the ball different) and the purpose of distributing the ball fired by the right-handed game to a plurality of flow paths are also used. Although the distributing member 700 is provided, the present invention is not limited to this, and a different configuration may be used for each purpose. On the other hand, a delay means (for example, a flow path in which the friction coefficient of the lower surface is different from that of another lower surface, a sphere, or the like) for differentiating the flow period of the sphere (flow period until reaching the movable lid 1500). The downstream direction may branch midway, and a flow path that eventually reaches the movable lid 1500 may be provided in any case.

  Next, a description will be given of the electric accessory 640a to which the ball flowing down the first flow path 701 and the second flow path 702 reaches. As shown in FIG. 193, the electric accessory 640a is provided in an area where any of the sphere flowing down the first flow path 701 and the sphere flowing down the second flow path 702 can be reached. A guided state (protruding state) in which a ball that has reached the electric accessory 640a can flow down to the second entrance 640 by a general-purpose hit game executed when a winning is won, and an electric accessory 640a The state can be changed to a released state (embedded state) in which the ball that has reached can not be accepted.

  Furthermore, the variable mode (opening / closing control content) of the electric accessory 640a executed as a per-game per-game described above is made different depending on the set probability state of the ordinary symbol, and the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is changed. In the set gaming state (probable change state, time saving state), the electric accessory 640a has a sufficient time (for example, 3 seconds) for the ball reaching the electric accessory 640a to reach the second entrance 640. In the gaming state (normal state, latent state) in which a low probability state of a normal symbol is set, the ball reaching the electric accessory 640a is directed to the second entrance 640 in the gaming state in which the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set. The opening and closing control is performed such that the electric accessory 640a is in the induction state for a time (for example, 0.1 second) that cannot be reached.

  With such a configuration, during a game state in which a low probability state of a normal symbol is set (for example, a normal state, a latent state), a left-handed game is an advantageous game that is more advantageous to the advantage than a right-handed game. During a game state in which a high probability state of a normal symbol is set (for example, a probable change state, a time saving state), a right-handed game can be an advantageous game that is more advantageous to a player than a left-handed game.

  Finally, the balls that have passed through the motorized accessory 640 a (the balls that have flowed down the first flow path 701 and the balls that have flowed down the second flow path 702) reach the V winning device 2650. The V prize device 2650 is controlled to be opened and closed by a jackpot game executed when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery, and a ball that has won the V prize device 2650 during the jackpot game passes through a specific gate. After the jackpot game, a special symbol high probability state can be set.

  Next, the internal structure of the V winning device 2650 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the structure of the V winning device 2650 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 194 is an exploded perspective view of the V winning device 2650.

  As shown in FIG. 194, the V prize device 2650 is combined with the opening forming member 2650b which is arranged to protrude from the front side of the game board 13 and the back side of the opening forming member 2650b, and the V prize device 2650 is provided. A base member 2650c for screwing to the game board 13 and a plurality of LEDs arranged on the back side of the base member 2650c for lighting the LEDs from the back side of the base member 2650c to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 In order to open and close the arranged LED board 2650d, the back cover body 2650e that sandwiches the LED board 2650d with the base member 2650c, and the jackpot winning port (big jackpot port) 2650a formed in the opening forming member 2650b. Opening / closing unit 2650f having an opening / closing door 2650f1, and a back cover body 2650e. A flow path cover body 2650g that is combined with the surface side to form a flow path, a switching member 2650h that protrudes into a flow path formed by the back cover body 2650e and the flow path cover body 2650g and switches the flow path of the game ball, A link member 2650i locked with the switching member 2650h, a back cover body 2650j disposed on the back side of the flow path cover body 2650g, and fixed to the back side of the back cover body 2650j to operate the link member 2650i. A flow path solenoid 2650k to be formed and a fixing cover body 2650m for covering the flow path solenoid 2650k from the back side and fixing it to the back cover body 2650j with screws.

  FIG. 195 is a sectional view of the V winning device 2650. FIG. 195 (c) is a top view of the V winning device 2650, and FIG. 195 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the V winning device 2650 along Lb-Lb. As shown in FIG. 195 (b), the V prize device 2650 is formed with a jackpot prize port (big jackpot prize port) 2650a which is an opening through which a game ball can enter. The jackpot winning port (jackpot winning port) 2650a has a substantially rectangular opening formed above the pachinko machine 10, so that the game balls passing through the opening are guided to the left in FIG. 195 (b). Has a bottom surface inclined downward and to the left. At the left end of the bottom surface, a detection port 2650a1 composed of a magnetic sensor (ball detection switch) 2650c1 for detecting a winning of a game ball is arranged. The game ball that has passed through the detection port 2650a1 is guided to a distribution channel formed on the back side of the back cover body 2650e shown in FIG. 195 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 195 (b), the opening of the jackpot winning port (jackpot winning port) 2650a is an opening through which a ball can enter by an opening / closing door 2650f1 constituted by a shutter mechanism that can come and go from the gaming board 13 side. The state is changed to a closed state in which the ball cannot be entered (ball entry is difficult). In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the opening / closing door 2650f1, and the ball can roll over the upper part of the opening / closing door. In the open state, the opening / closing door 2650f1 is configured to be retracted from the inside of the base member 2650c (the interior of the game board 13) so as to be retracted from the inside of the jackpot winning port (big jackpot winning port) 2650a. .

  In the open state, a surface orthogonal to the direction in which the game balls flow down can be configured as the opening of the V winning device 2650, so that more game balls can be efficiently used to win the jackpot (win jackpot) 2650a. You can win within. Therefore, the ball can be reliably won by the V prize device 2650 during the big hit game, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

  FIG. 195 (a) is a sectional view taken along the line La-La shown in FIG. 195 (b). As shown in FIG. 195 (a), the magnetic sensor 2650c1 having the detection port 2650a1 is fixed to the base member 2650c so that the detection port 2650a1 is inclined toward the distribution channel side of the back cover body 2650e.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 196, a configuration will be described in which the sphere guided to the distribution channel of the back cover body 2650e is distributed to a normal discharge channel 2650e1 and a special discharge channel 2650e2 described later.

  FIG. 196 (a) is a rear view of the back cover body 2650e showing a state in which the switching member 2650h is operated so that the ball is distributed to the special discharge channel 2650e2. As shown in FIG. 196 (a), the switching member 2650h has a locking hole 2650h1 into which the projection of the link member 2650i is inserted, and a guiding piece 2650h2 for guiding the ball. It is pivotally supported from the back side. Here, the flow path cover 2650g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 2650h2 can be inserted. It is configured so that it can be arranged as possible.

  As shown in FIG. 196 (a), the sphere guided into the distribution channel from the detection port 2650a1 is guided to the upper surface of a guide piece 2650h2 disposed diagonally below and to the left, and a special discharge channel (specific gate) 2650e2 is provided. It is guided to. The special discharge flow path (specific gate) 2650e2 is configured to have a V route through which the flowing sphere passes through the specific area (detection switch) 2650e3. The passage is detected by the detection switch 2650e3 which can detect the passage, and thereafter, the ball is discharged out of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball.

  Here, although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the detection switch 2650e3 detects a ball during the jackpot game, that is, when the ball passes the V route, a special symbol It is configured such that a high probability state is set. That is, the specific area (detection switch) 2650e3 is configured as a trigger for setting the high probability state of the special symbol. In addition, the switching member 2650h is a flow path (special discharge flow path (specific gate) 2650e2) that can pass through the specific area (detection switch) 2650e3 as a flow path of a ball that has won the V prize device 2650 during the jackpot game. This is for setting one of the flow paths (normal discharge flow path 2650e1) that cannot pass through the specific area (detection switch) 2650e3, and sets the flow path solenoid 2650k to ON. The flow path is switched so that the ball that has won the V prize device 2650 flows down the special discharge flow path 2650e2 (see FIG. 196 (a)).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 198, the contents of the transition of the gaming state in the present modified example will be described. FIG. 198 is a transition diagram schematically showing transition contents of a gaming state in a modification of the seventh embodiment. In this modification, the probability of winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery is set to 1/200, and in the state where the normal state is set, the ball is thrown into the first entrance 64 by the left-handed game. Thereby, a game for executing the lottery of the first special symbol is performed. When a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 lottery), the jackpot A is set at a rate of 40% as the jackpot type, and the jackpot B is set at a rate of 60%. Then, when a big hit is won in the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 lottery), the big hit C is set at a rate of 100% as the big hit type.

  When the jackpot A is set as the jackpot type, the same jackpot game as the jackpot A7 of the seventh embodiment (see FIG. 169) is executed, and the normal state is set after the jackpot game ends. When the big hit B is set, the same big hit game as the big hit B7 (see FIG. 169) of the above-described seventh embodiment is executed, and the probability change state is set after the big hit game ends. In this modified example, when the probable change state is set, the special symbol executed during the special symbol high probability state is set as the end condition (first transition condition) of the special symbol high probability state (special symbol high probability). The number of lotteries (ST times) is set to 50, and the special symbol lottery number executed during the normal symbol high probability state is set as the end condition (second transition condition) of the normal symbol high probability state (normal symbol high probability). The number of times (time savings) is set to 70 (second transition condition A), or the number of lottery 1 lottery times is set to two (second transition condition B).

  When the big hit game is executed, a right-handed game is performed. As described above with reference to FIG. 193, by executing the right-handed game during the jackpot game, after the jackpot game ends, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol (special figure 1 reserved ball number) is the upper limit (4). Can be easily reached. During the probable change state, a game for executing a special drawing 2 lottery by a right-handed game is performed. In this modification, the special figure 2 lottery is configured to execute a lottery more advantageous to the player than the special figure 1 lottery so that the gaming state that is most advantageous to the player becomes the probable change state. This embodiment is different from the above-described seventh embodiment in that the special figure 2 lottery is easily executed when the symbol high probability state is set.

  Specifically, the special figure 2 lottery is configured to be easier to win the small hit than the special figure 1 lottery, and the probability of winning the small hit in the special figure 2 lottery is set to 1/20. In addition, in the case where the big hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery, a game state (probable change state) advantageous to the player after the big hit game is set is more easily set than in the case of the special figure 1 lottery in which the big hit is won. ing. In addition, in the seventh embodiment described above, the latent pattern 7 table 203fe3 referred to when selecting the fluctuation pattern during the latent state is referred to when selecting the fluctuation pattern during the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, In the seventh embodiment, the probable variation 7 table 202fe2 referred to when the variation pattern in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is selected is referred to when the variation pattern in the latent state is selected. .

  In the present embodiment configured in this manner, a right-handed game in which the special figure 2 lottery is mainly executed in the probability change state in which the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set and the time reduction state is performed, and the low probability of the ordinary symbol is performed. In the normal state where the state is set and the latent state, the left-handed game in which the special figure 1 lottery is mainly executed is performed.

  Next, the relationship between the game result in the probable change state and the transition content of the game state will be described. As described above, in the present modification, the first transition condition for transitioning from the probable state to the time saving state when the condition is satisfied and the second transition condition for transiting from the probable state to the latent state when the condition is satisfied are set. Have been. Specifically, as the first transition condition, the number of special symbol lotteries executed (ST times) 50 during the special symbol high-probability state is set, and as the second transition condition, during the normal symbol high-probability state. The number of executed special symbol lotteries (time saving times) is set to 70 (second transition condition A), or the number of special figure 1 lotteries is set to two (second transition condition B).

  In other words, if the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times without winning the jackpot after the probability change state is set, the state shifts to the time reduction state, and then the special symbol lottery during the time reduction state is executed 20 times. , So as to shift to a normal state. Here, in the present modified example, during the probable change state, a different fluctuating time is set as the fluctuating time of the second special symbol according to the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol (number of reserved balls of special figure 1). Make up. Specifically, similarly to the above-described latent table 7fe3 in the seventh embodiment, when the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is equal to or less than a predetermined number (eg, 1, 2), when the number of reserved balls is equal to or more than a predetermined number (eg, It is configured such that the fluctuation time shorter than 4) is easily selected.

  With this configuration, in the probable change state in which the set period (50 ST times) is defined, the special figure 2 in which the lottery that is advantageous to the player is easily executed is increased in order to increase the number of times the special figure is executed. It is possible to cause the player to perform a novel game of winning the small hit B in 2 lotteries and discarding the special figure 1 fluctuation to reduce the number of special figure 1 reserved balls.

  Further, in the present modification, since the second transition condition B is set, for example, when the probability change state is set after the jackpot game ends, the game is interrupted, and the special figure 1 change is executed a plurality of times. When the act of reducing the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is executed, the second transition condition B is satisfied, and a transition is made from the probable state to the latent state. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the operation of the game is reduced by suspending the game during the period in which the special figure 1 fluctuation in the probable change state in which the long fluctuation time is easily selected is executed. it can.

  Next, a description will be given of how the special symbols change when the gaming state shifts. First, the flow when the second transition condition B is satisfied in the state in which the probable state is set and the latent state is set will be described. As described above, since the second transition condition B can be satisfied when the special figure 1 fluctuation is stopped and displayed, a new special figure 1 fluctuation is executed immediately after the latent state is set. Since the variation pattern (variation time) of the newly executed special figure 1 variation is selected using the variation pattern table referred to during the latent state, the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation during the normal state is changed. A variation pattern that can be selected will be selected. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the long-term special figure 2 fluctuation from being executed during the long-term special figure 1 fluctuation.

  On the other hand, a case where the first shift condition is satisfied during the probable change state and the time saving state is set will be described. As described above, the first transition condition can be satisfied either when the special figure 1 fluctuation is stopped and displayed or when the special figure 2 fluctuation is stopped and displayed. At a different timing, there may be a case where the special figure 1 fluctuation for a long time is executed. However, the time saving state is configured so that the special figure lottery is continued 20 times or until the special figure lottery wins the jackpot, and the total of the fluctuation times for 20 special figure 2 fluctuations executed during the time reduction state The value is configured to be at least longer than the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation set during the latent state. The contents of the variation pattern table are defined such that the variation of the special figure 1 executed during the time saving state is easier to select a variation time shorter than the special figure 1 variation executed during the latent state.

  With this configuration, in the case of shifting from the probable change state to the time saving state and then to the normal state, both the first special symbol change and the second special symbol change are for a long time (for example, 10 minutes). ) It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation that fluctuates. In addition, during a time saving state or a latent state, if a special jackpot is won by a special figure lottery, the special figure change being executed is discarded. A new special drawing lottery corresponding thereto is executed. Therefore, in the case where a new gaming state is set at the time of the jackpot winning, the long special figure change executed before the jackpot winning is continuously executed even after the jackpot game is ended, so that the first special is performed. It is possible to suppress occurrence of a situation in which both the symbol fluctuation and the second special symbol fluctuation fluctuate for a long time (for example, 10 minutes).

  As described above, in the present modified example, the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are configured to be able to be executed in an overlapping manner, and the second special symbol lottery is executed in a second special symbol lottery in comparison with the case where the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery. It is configured such that a winning state in the symbol lottery makes it easier to set a probable change state after the end of the jackpot game. With this configuration, the second special symbol lottery becomes a lottery (game) more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery in the game state set after the big hit game is over.

  In addition, the same technical idea as the present modification may be applied to the pachinko machine 10 having a different playability from the present modification. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may be applied by using the above-described first to third embodiments. As described above, if a predetermined execution condition (for example, entry of a ball into a special power starting port, or a small hit in a special symbol lottery) is established without a jackpot winning in a special symbol lottery, a predetermined game ( (Game per accessory, small hit game) can be executed, and it is determined that a ball that has entered the variable entering means that is opened during the predetermined game has entered a specific area (for example, a V winning opening). The present invention may be applied to the pachinko machine 10 in which a jackpot game is executed at the opportunity.

  In this case, as shown in FIGS. 197 (a) and (b), the internal structure of the small hit attacker 3650 is changed so that the ball which has won the small hit attacker 3650 is either the normal winning opening 3652 or the V winning opening 3653. The movable valve 3651 may be configured to be movable so as to win a crab, and the jackpot game may be executed when the ball wins the V winning opening 3653 (see FIG. 197 (b)). Even when the ball that has won the small hit attacker 3650 has won the normal winning opening 3652 (see FIG. 197 (a)), the same award ball as when the ball has won the V winning opening 3653 is provided. It is good to configure.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 199 and FIG. 200, the contents of the effect performed in the present modification will be described. As described above, in the present embodiment, various transition conditions for terminating the probable change state are set, and the probable change state is transited to a different game state according to the established transition condition. Among them, the effect contents regarding the second transition condition B that is satisfied when the special figure 1 change is executed a predetermined number of times (twice) during the probable change state will be described.

  In this modified example, when a small hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery, similar to the above-described seventh embodiment, the small hit type (small hit A, small hit C) for interrupting the running of the special figure 1 is changed. , A small hit type (small hit B) for discarding the running of the special figure 1 fluctuation can be set. Then, when the special figure 1 change is stopped and displayed without being discarded, the special figure 1 change number is updated.

  In other words, when the small hit B is set when the small hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery, the special figure 1 change that is being executed is discarded, and the special figure 1 change number is updated without updating the special figure 1 change frequency. It is configured to perform the fluctuation. Therefore, in the probable change state, the second shift condition B described above is hardly satisfied if the change in the special figure 1 being executed is continuously discarded. On the other hand, as the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 fluctuation during the probable change state, a long special figure 1 fluctuation in which a long time (for example, 10 minutes) fluctuation time is set and a short time (for example, 1 minute) fluctuation time are set. In the case where the short special figure 1 fluctuation is selected, if the long special figure 1 fluctuation is being executed and the remaining fluctuation time is, for example, 8 minutes, the small hit B is won. It is more advantageous for the player to win the small hit A and interrupt the long special figure 1 fluctuation than to discard the long special figure 1 fluctuation. That is, the second transition condition B can be hardly satisfied.

  Specifically, when the special figure 1 fluctuation newly executed after discarding the long special figure 1 fluctuation that is being executed is the short special figure 1 fluctuation, compared to the case where the long special figure 1 fluctuation is not discarded, When the fluctuation time of the short special figure 1 fluctuation elapses, the possibility that the special figure 1 fluctuation frequency is updated may be increased.

  Thus, in the present modification, in the state where the probable change state is set, the state of the special figure 1 change being executed (the length of the remaining change time) and the change of the special figure 1 executed next are set. Whether the current gaming state is advantageous to the player based on the variation pattern (fluctuation time) and the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery executed (a state in which the probable variation state is easy to continue). Or not). This allows the player to be notified of the game content in the probable change state in an easily understandable manner.

  FIG. 199 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display contents when a RUSH period variable effect executed when a small hit is won in the special drawing 2 lottery in the probability change state (RUSH) is executed. FIG. 199 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of an extended display indicating that the RUSH period has been extended as a result of the RUSH period variable effect. FIG. 200 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of an extended display indicating that the RUSH period has been shortened as a result of the RUSH period variable effect, and FIG. 200 (b) is a RUSH period. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the extended display which shows that the RUSH period was extended as a production result of a variable production. In this modification, of the various display modes displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, the same elements as those in the above-described seventh embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. I do.

  As shown in FIG. 199 (a), during the RUSH period, when the result of the special drawing 2 lottery result is a predetermined lottery result (a large hit, a small hit, a part of a miss), the rabbit is displayed in the main display area Dm. An effect (variable period effect) in which a character 811 imitating the game finds a treasure chest 812 to which an extra bag 812h is attached is executed. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, the character "What is the content of the bonus?" The treasure box 812 is a display mode for mainly displaying the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery executed, and the bag 812h changes how the RUSH period (probable change state period) changes based on the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery. This is a display mode for notifying a player of the fact.

  After the variable duration effect shown in FIG. 199 (a) is started and the special figure 2 change is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. An effect is executed in which a result display mode 812a indicating the lottery result of the special symbol lottery (special figure 2 lottery) is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 199 (b), as the result display mode 812a, a display mode of “V” indicating that the small hit has been won in the special drawing 2 lottery is displayed. As the result display mode 812a, a display mode imitating "V" is displayed when the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery is a small hit, and the character "" is displayed when the lottery result is a big hit. Is displayed, and if it is off, a display mode imitating a "cross" is displayed.

  Then, from among the opened bags 812h, a status display mode 812j indicating whether the RUSH period (probable change state period) is variable (the state has been shifted to a variable state) based on the lottery result of this special figure 2 lottery. Is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 199 (b), a “extended” display mode indicating that the RUSH period has been extended is displayed as the status display mode 812j. As the status display mode 812j, in addition to the "extended" display mode indicating that the RUSH period has been extended, "sorry" indicating that the RUSH period has been shortened, the small hit C has been set, and the RUSH period has ended. "End", the special drawing 2 lottery subject to the variable period production is out of order, and does not affect the RUSH period "?", And the special figure 2 lottery subject to the variable period production A display mode such as “celebration” to congratulate that the result is a jackpot is displayed.

  Here, regarding the setting method of various display modes displayed when the variable period effect is executed, the control processing executed by the audio lamp control device 113 of the above-described seventh embodiment (see FIGS. 183 to 192). This will be described with reference to FIG. First, in the status command receiving process (see S4232 in FIG. 183) executed in the command determination process 7 (S4192 in FIG. 183), it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is in the probable changing state, and the probable changing state is in progress. If it is determined that “RUSH” in FIG. 199 (a) is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, a process for setting a display command is executed.

  Next, instead of the special figure 2 change display setting processing 7 (see S5237 in FIG. 190) executed in the change display setting processing 7 (see S4153 in FIG. 187), the current special figure 2 change is a big hit change, A selection process is performed to determine whether the change is a small hit change or a change in out-of-office, and to select whether to execute the variable duration effect based on the determination result. In this selection process, whether or not to execute the variable period effect is selected based on the contents specified in the dedicated data table (variable period effect selection table). More specifically, the period of the special figure 2 is about 20% if the change is a big hit, 100% if the change is a small hit, and 10% if it is a change. The contents of the period variable effect selection table are defined so that the execution of the variable effect is selected.

  Here, when it is selected to execute the variable period effect in the jackpot fluctuation, the display mode of “this” is displayed as the result display mode 812a and the “celebration” is displayed as the status display mode 812j in accordance with the stop timing of the special figure 2 fluctuation. A display command for displaying the display mode on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is set. In addition, when it is selected to execute the variable period effect in the deviating fluctuation, the display mode of “X” is displayed as the result display mode 812a and the “?” Is displayed as the status display mode 812j in accordance with the stop timing of the special figure 2 fluctuation. A display command is displayed for displaying the display mode on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is selected to execute the variable duration effect in the small hit change, then the small hit type set in the current small hit change is read, and the special figure 1 being executed at the stop timing of the special figure 2 change is read out. A type determination process is performed to determine whether the type is a small hit type that interrupts fluctuation or a small hit type that is discarded. Next, the remaining time of the currently running special figure 1 fluctuation is calculated based on the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223fe, and is executed next from the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b. The fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation (the fluctuation pattern command included in the winning information stored in the reserved first area) is predicted.

  Then, as a result of the type determination processing, when it is determined that the small hit type interrupts the special figure 1 change, the remaining time of the special figure 1 change at the time of interruption is changed to the change time of the next special figure 1 change. If it is longer, the display mode of “extended” is displayed as the status display mode 812j. If the remaining time of the special figure 1 fluctuation at the time of interruption is shorter than the fluctuation time of the next special figure 1 fluctuation to be executed, “ A display command for displaying the display mode of “sorry” on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is set. Also, as a result of the type determination process, when it is determined that the small hit type is to discard the special figure 1 fluctuation, the remaining time of the special figure 1 fluctuation at the time of destruction is changed to the fluctuation time of the next special figure 1 fluctuation. If it is longer, the display mode of “sorry” is displayed as the status display mode 812j. If the remaining time of the special figure 1 change at the time of discarding is shorter than the change time of the next special figure 1 change, “ A display command for displaying the “extended” display mode on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is set. Furthermore, when the small hit type set this time is the small hit C, the high probability state of the ordinary symbol shifts to the low probability state at the stop timing of the special figure 2 change, so that the status display mode 812j is “end”. A display command is displayed for displaying the display mode on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the present modification, even when the same small hit type is set, the timing at which the small hit change is stopped and displayed or the special figure 1 change executed next time is changed. The production result of the variable duration production is varied according to the set fluctuation pattern. In other words, when the small hit variation is stopped and displayed as the result of the variable duration effect, the small hit type that interrupts the special figure 1 change that is being executed at the special figure 2 change stop timing, It is configured to relatively determine which of the small hit types to be discarded is more advantageous to the player, and to set the production mode (display mode) of the variable duration production based on the discrimination result. ing. Therefore, regardless of the timing at which the small hit changes, it is possible to easily inform the player whether or not the small hit type advantageous to the player is set at that time.

  In addition, in the present modification, as described above, the effect mode of the variable period effect is configured to be relatively set. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The effect form of the period variable effect may be determined based on whether the fluctuation time is longer than a specific time (for example, 1 minute), or the remaining fluctuation time when the special figure 1 fluctuation is discarded is specified time (for example, , 30 seconds).

  Further, the technical idea of the seventh embodiment described above and the technical idea of the modification of the seventh embodiment may be combined. For example, in the latent state of the seventh embodiment, an end condition other than the jackpot winning is set. Alternatively, the latent state may be terminated even when the termination condition is satisfied.

  Specifically, the first termination condition that can be satisfied when the total of the number of lotteries of the first special symbol and the number of lotteries of the second special symbol reaches 100, and the number of lotteries of the first special symbol is 5 A second end condition that can be satisfied when the number of times has been reached and a third end condition that can be satisfied when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a specific small hit (small hit C) can be set. Just do it.

  With such a configuration, when a latent state that is advantageous to the player is set for the pachinko machine 10 of the above-described seventh embodiment, the player is notified of how long the latent state is to be continued. It can be difficult to understand. That is, in the above-described seventh embodiment, once the latent state has been set, the latent state continues at least until the next big hit game is executed (until the big hit is won). There is a problem that the game becomes monotonous, but in this modification, it is possible to make the player play the game while expecting the latent state to continue for a long time or until the jackpot is won. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

  Furthermore, when a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, the small hit type (small hit A) for interrupting the first special symbol change being executed and the second special symbol change being executed are discarded (forcible upon departure). A plurality of small hit types including at least a small hit type (small hit B) to be stopped) can be set. Then, when the small hit B is set as the small hit type and the first special symbol change is discarded, the lottery count of the first special symbol in the latent state is updated by the discarded first special symbol change. It is configured not to be. With such a configuration, it is possible to vary the ease with which the above-described second end condition is satisfied during the latent state based on the lottery result of the second special symbol. Further, the degree of advantage of the lottery result of the second special symbol can be changed according to the execution status of the first special symbol.

  For example, in a gaming machine in which the fluctuating time A (2 minutes) and the fluctuating time B (10 minutes) can be set at least as the fluctuating time of the first special symbol in the latent state, the fluctuating time B (10 minutes) is set. ) Is set, and when the remaining time of the running first special symbol change is longer than 2 minutes, the running first special symbol change is discarded rather than discarded. In the state where the suspended first special symbol change is shorter than 2 minutes, it is more advantageous for the player that the suspended first special symbol is discarded than the suspended first special symbol to be interrupted. This is advantageous.

  Therefore, the player can be interested in both the special symbol lottery result and the fluctuation state of the first special symbol, and the interest of the game can be improved. Further, the degree of advantage to the player can be made different by a combination of a plurality of events (special symbol lottery, the state of fluctuation of the first special symbol), so that it is possible to provide a game that is difficult for the player to predict.

  Further, the technical idea described above may be used for a gaming machine using the configuration of the third embodiment. In this case, the processing for the running of the special figure may be made different depending on the hit type acquired when the special power operation port is won.

  Also, in the seventh embodiment, in a gaming machine (so-called simultaneous fluctuation specification) in which the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed in an overlapping manner, the lottery result of the second special symbol is obtained. Accordingly, the length of the period in which the advantageous game state is set is varied by discarding or interrupting the first special symbol change being executed. In other words, although the first special symbol change is discarded, the end condition that can be satisfied based on the number of executions of the first special symbol lottery is hardly satisfied, thereby aiming at a long-term advantageous gaming state. In place of this, a special area is provided in a small hit attacker opened in a small hit game executed when a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, and when a ball passes through the specific area. May also be configured to execute a jackpot game.

  In the above-described seventh embodiment, the configuration in which only the first special symbol has the hold storage function is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and both the first special symbol and the second special symbol can hold and store. A function may be provided. In this case, in the gaming state (latent state) that is advantageous to the player, only the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is used as the number of reserved balls to be referred to when selecting the variation time of the second special symbol to be executed. May be referred to, or the total number of reserved balls obtained by adding the reserved ball number of the first special symbol and the reserved ball number of the second special symbol may be referred to. Further, the variation time of the second special symbol may be selected based on the difference between the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol. In this case, for example, the second special symbol may be selected. As the value obtained by subtracting the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol from the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is larger, a variation pattern (variation pattern with a shorter variation time) advantageous to the player is more likely to be selected as a variation pattern of the second special symbol. It is good to constitute so that it becomes.

  With this configuration, the player needs to reduce the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol while acquiring the reserved ball of the second special symbol, so that the player interrupts the game and reserves the first special symbol. The act of reducing the number of balls can be suppressed. In addition to this, the total number of reserved balls obtained by adding the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol, and the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol When the variation time of the second special symbol is selected based on both the difference and the total number of reserved balls is equal to or more than a specific number (for example, 5) and the difference is equal to or more than 3 In the above, it is preferable that the variation pattern of the second special symbol (variation pattern with a short variation time) that is advantageous to the player is easily selected. This allows the player to actively play the game, thereby improving the operation of the game.

  In the above-described seventh embodiment, when the gaming state (probable state) advantageous to the player is set, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is a specific number (one or two). The variation pattern (short-time variation pattern) more advantageous to the player is selected as the second special symbol variation than the case other than the specific number, and the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is set as the specific number. Although a small value is set, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the specific number may be a plurality of values (for example, three or four) including the upper limit number (4) of the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol. Alternatively, it may be a distant value (for example, one or three). In this case, if a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery and a small hit type for discarding the running first special symbol change is set, the small hit win is advantageous or disadvantageous to the player. Can be varied according to the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol. In other words, depending on the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol, the case where discarding the first special symbol change is advantageous to the player, and the case where not discarding (interrupting) is advantageous to the player. Can be provided. With this configuration, the player can be more interested in the relationship between the lottery result of the second special symbol and the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol.

  Further, in the above-described seventh embodiment, when a game state (latent state) advantageous to the player is set, one type of variation pattern table referred to when selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this.For example, a large number of jackpot types in which a probability change state and a latent state are set after a jackpot is completed are provided, and are referred to during the latent state based on the set jackpot type. A plurality of variation pattern tables referred to during the latent state may be provided so that the variation pattern tables can be different. In this case, the second special pattern table may be provided according to the referenced variation pattern table. It is preferable to change the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol in which a variation pattern (short variation pattern) advantageous to the player is easily selected as the symbol variation. With such a configuration, it is possible to change the number of balls to be held in the first special symbol that the player aims at during the latent state, so that it is possible to provide a game that is difficult for the player to predict. Further, when a plurality of variation pattern tables referred to during the latent state are provided, a part of the variation pattern table is provided to the player as the second special symbol variation regardless of the number of balls reserved for the first special symbol. An advantageous variation pattern (a short-time variation pattern) in which an advantageous variation pattern (short-time variation pattern) is easily selected (always selected), and a second special symbol variation is advantageous to the player regardless of the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol. It is preferable to provide both or one of a disadvantageous fluctuation pattern table in which a fluctuation pattern (a short-time fluctuation pattern) is hard to be selected (it is not selected).

  Further, in the modification of the seventh embodiment described above, when the first special symbol change being executed is discarded, the number of time savings is configured not to be subtracted. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special symbol is not limited to this. A configuration may be adopted in which the number of time savings is subtracted when the fluctuation is discarded. In such a configuration, when a game state (probable change state) that is advantageous to the player is set, a short time (for example, 5 seconds) change time is set as the change pattern of the second special symbol change. A variation pattern is set so that a variation pattern in which a long time (for example, 10 minutes) is set as the variation pattern of the first special symbol variation is easily selected. Then, in the second special symbol change that is efficiently executed in response to the first special symbol change, a certain number of times (for example, two times) of small hits in which the first special symbol change being executed is discarded is reliably changed. It is possible to provide the player with a novel playability of being able to execute the middle game.

  In the above-described seventh embodiment, the configuration is such that the variation time of the second special symbol change becomes shorter when the number of the storages of the first special symbol becomes one or two during the latent state. Was. Furthermore, a specific small jackpot (small jackpot B) is won in the second special symbol lottery, and the number of reserved storages of the first special symbol is reduced by discarding (forcibly stopping) the variation of the first special symbol being executed. Was configured. Further, as a configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, in a game executed during the latent state (right-handed game), it is possible to acquire a hold memory of the first special symbol. In addition, the variation time of the first special symbol variation executed during the latent state is configured to be long (for example, 10 minutes). With such a configuration, as a game in the latent state, in the second special symbol lottery in which a lottery more advantageous to the player than in the first special symbol lottery is executed, a big hit or a small hit which is advantageous to the player A game that has never been played before, in which a game in which many prize balls are acquired by winning a game and a game in which the reserved memory of the first special symbol is reduced and the frequency of executing the second special symbol lottery is increased are simultaneously executed. Could be provided to the player.

  On the other hand, when the number of reserved storages of the first special symbol is four (upper limit), the execution frequency of the second special symbol lottery may be increased. In this case, as compared with the configuration of the above-described seventh embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which it is difficult to acquire the holding storage of the first special symbol during the game in the latent state (right-handed game). In this case, unlike the above-described embodiments, it is disadvantageous for the player to win a specific small hit (small hit B) in the second special symbol lottery.

  Even in the case of such a configuration, it is easy to perform a lottery of a special symbol (second special symbol) advantageous to the player in accordance with the number of reserved special symbols (first special symbol) that is disadvantageous to the player. Can be different. Also, in this case, for example, by obtaining the reserved number of the first special symbol up to the upper limit value during the big hit game in which the latent state is set after the big hit game, the second special symbol lottery is advantageously executed. It is possible to easily set the state to be performed. Therefore, it is possible to enthusiastically play the game in order to acquire the reserved number of first special symbols up to the upper limit during the jackpot game.

  In addition, even if the number of the first special symbols to be retained is acquired up to the upper limit during the jackpot game, the process of starting the first special symbol change after setting the latent state starts the second special symbol change. Since the process is executed before the process, it is possible to prevent the second special symbol change from being executed in an advantageous state after the latent state is set. In addition, as a control process of the main control device 110, the process of starting the second special symbol change may be executed before the process of starting the first special symbol change. With this configuration, for example, in the case where the latent state is set after the end of the big hit game, the number of the held storages of the first special symbol is changed (decreased) from the number of the held storages acquired during the big hit game. The second special symbol change can be executed without any problem.

  As described above, in the seventh embodiment, in the case where the number of stored special symbols (the number of special figure reserved balls) is a specific number (for example, one), a game advantageous to the player (for example, The first game (for example, a game in which special symbol fluctuation is forcibly stopped) in which the special symbol fluctuation is configured to be easily executed, and further, the special symbol holding memory number (special symbol reserved ball count) is easily set to a specific number. ) And a second game (for example, a game in which a special symbol change is stopped after a lapse of a change time) that is difficult to obtain a specific number is configured to be executable. Further, the design is made such that the specific number (for example, one) of special figure reserved balls in which a game advantageous to the player is easily executed is smaller than the upper limit number (for example, four) of the number of special figure reserved balls. However, when the current number of special figure reserved balls is larger than the specified number, the first game is more easily executed than when the number is smaller than the specified number. Further, when the current number of special figure reserved balls is a specific number, or when the number is smaller than the specific number, the first game is more difficult to be executed than when the number is larger than the specific number.

  With this configuration, the number of special figure reserved balls can be brought close to a specific number simply by having the player play the game aiming at the execution of the first game. Easy games can be played.

  In the above-described seventh embodiment, the number of special figure reserved balls that is easy to execute a game that is advantageous to the player is set to a number smaller than the upper limit number of special figure reserved balls. Alternatively, the upper limit number of special figure reserved balls may be set as the number of special figure reserved balls (specific number) that makes it easier for the player to execute an advantageous game. In this case, if a game in which the special symbol change is forcibly stopped is executed, the number of special figure reserved balls tends to decrease, which is disadvantageous to the player. That is, it is possible to provide the player with a novel game property in which a game is performed with the aim of not executing the game in which the special symbol change is forcibly stopped.

<Eighth embodiment>
Next, an eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the above-described seventh embodiment, the processing content for the first special symbol change being executed is made different depending on the small hit type set when the small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery. Was. Specifically, when the small hit type A or the small hit C is set as the small hit type, the special symbol change being executed is interrupted, and when the small hit B is set, the special symbol change being executed is changed. It was configured to be destroyed.

  In the pachinko machine 10 using such a configuration, no matter what the lottery result of the first special symbol variation being executed, the processing according to the set small hit type is executed. There is a problem in that even if during a jackpot change, which is a lottery result that is more advantageous to the player, the jackpot change is discarded based on the small hit win. In addition, when such a configuration is used, a high expectation effect with a high expectation in which the first special symbol change during execution is a big hit is executed before the second special symbol is stopped and displayed. Therefore, there is a problem that it is difficult for the player to execute the high expectation effect because the player notices that the jackpot change has been discarded (the jackpot winning has been invalidated).

  In addition, in the above-described seventh embodiment, when a game state (latent state) advantageous to the player is set, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is shorter than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, In addition, since the second special symbol is configured not to be stored on hold, for example, the second special symbol that has won the small hit is stopped and displayed at a timing before the first special symbol that has won the big hit is stopped and displayed. Even if a means for determining in advance is provided, the timing at which the stop display is not determined is immediately before the big hit change is stopped and displayed. (Corresponding to the fluctuation time).

  On the other hand, in the eighth embodiment, when the small hitting game is executed (when the special process is executed for the special symbol change being executed), the small hit game is performed according to the content of the special symbol change being executed. This is largely different from the above-described seventh embodiment in that the configuration is such that the processing content is determined. More specifically, at the time when the small hit game is executed based on one special symbol lottery (when the special symbol indicating the small hit winning is stopped and displayed), the variation pattern of the other special symbol variation being executed If the result of the determination is a specific fluctuation pattern (for example, a fluctuation pattern in which a fluctuation time of 30 seconds or more is set), the other special symbol fluctuation being executed is discarded, and the specific fluctuation is discarded. If it is other than a pattern, the other special symbol variation being executed can be interrupted.

  Further, in the eighth embodiment, as the variation pattern of the special symbol variation (big hit variation) which has won the big hit, the big hit type in which the big hit game (for example, the probable big hit) which is advantageous to the player is executed, and the disadvantage to the player is given. A different big hitting game (for example, a normal big hit) is executed so that a different changing pattern is selected according to the disadvantageous jackpot type. Further, the changing pattern selected according to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is changed. It is configured to be different.

  More specifically, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is large, the variation time of less than 30 seconds is set as a variation pattern corresponding to the advantageous jackpot type than when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is small. A variation pattern in which a variation time of 30 seconds or more is set as a variation pattern corresponding to the disadvantageous jackpot type is configured to be easily selected.

  With such a configuration, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is large, a jackpot game (for example, a probable variable jackpot) advantageous to the player is more easily executed than when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is small ( A jackpot game (for example, a normal jackpot) that is disadvantageous to the player can be made difficult to be executed (it is easy to be discarded by the small hit winning). That is, it is possible to vary the ratio of the probability jackpot at the time of winning the jackpot according to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol. Therefore, it is possible for the player to enthusiastically accumulate the number of reserved balls of the special symbol while expecting an advantageous jackpot game to be executed, and as a result, the operation of the game can be improved.

  Further, the eighth embodiment is different from the above-described seventh embodiment in that a small hitting win can be made in any one of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery. I have. By configuring in this way, even if one of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery is won, it is possible to abandon the big jackpot by the other small hit lottery, According to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol, it is possible to surely make the ratio occupied by the probable jackpot at the time of winning the jackpot.

  First, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 used in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 201 is a front view schematically showing the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 used in the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 201, the configuration of the game board 13 in the present embodiment differs from the above-described modification of the seventh embodiment (see FIG. 193) in part of the configuration in the right area and in the lower area (variable The difference is that a part of the configuration of the display unit 80 (the lower area) is different. Other components are the same, and the same components are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 201, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 used in the eighth embodiment is different from the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the modified example of the above-described seventh embodiment (see FIG. 193). The first flow path 701 and the second flow path 702, through which the balls distributed by the distribution member 700 can flow, are provided to extend to the lower side of the right region, the through gate 67, the electric combination The structure and arrangement position of the object 640a are changed, and the small hit attacker (the second attacker) that is opened in a part of the small hit game that is opened in the small hit game instead of the small hit attacker 3650 ) 5650 is disposed at the lower center position of the game board 13. The other components are the same, and the same components are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the configuration of the right side area of the game board 13 will be described focusing on differences from the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the modification of the above-described seventh embodiment (see FIG. 193). The ball distributed to the first flow path 701 by the distribution member 700 passes through the curved path 701a, passes through the through gate 67, and flows downward in the right region. The sphere distributed to the second flow path 702 flows down the third flow path 703a provided on the downstream side, flows into the inflow port 704a, and flows into the back side of the first flow path 701 (FIG. 201). It flows down the fifth flow path 704b provided on the back side (from the viewpoint), passes through the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640, and flows out from the outlet to the lower right area on the game board 13. . Then, the balls distributed to the two flow paths (the first flow path 701 and the second flow path 702) by the distribution member 700 merge under the right region, flow down on the variable prize device (first attacker) 2650, and out. It flows into the mouth 66.

  Next, the through gate 67 and the second entrance 640 of the configuration arranged in the right area of the game board 13 will be described. In the present embodiment, the through gate 67 is disposed downstream of the first flow path 701 having the curved path 701a, and the second ball is disposed downstream of the second flow path 702 (the lower end of the fifth flow path 704b). A mouth 640 is provided. With such a configuration, the sphere flowing into the second flow path 702 at 1.2-second intervals can be made to flow toward the second entrance 640 without decreasing the flow velocity. Therefore, since the falling intervals of the spheres flowing down the second flow path 702 can be made constant, the spheres are connected in the second flow path 702, and a plurality of spheres enter the second ball entrance 640 at the same time. Can be suppressed. Further, when the third symbol display device 81 notifies that the electric accessory 640a is open without noticing that the electric accessory 640a has been opened, the ball is quickly released to the second entrance 640. You can get into the ball.

  In addition, different flow paths (first flow path 701, first flow path 701, Since the distributing member 700 is disposed in the second flow path 702) so as to cause the ball to flow down only one of the flow paths (when the distribution function is invalidated), the second entrance port is provided. It is possible to make it difficult for the ball to enter the 640. That is, when the through gate 67 and the electric accessory 640a are disposed in one of the flow paths distributed by the distribution member 700, the distribution member 700 is broken, and a state in which the ball flows down only in one of the flow paths is created. This makes it possible to create a state in which a ball can easily enter the second entrance 640. However, by using the configuration of this modification, a ball is illegally entered into the second entrance 640. Creating a state that is easy to cause can be suppressed.

  Next, a case where a ball flows down the second flow path 702 will be described. The second flow path 702 is configured such that the period during which the ball flows down is shorter than that of the first flow path 701 described above. Specifically, the time required for the sphere flowing into the second flow path 702 to flow out of the outlet is about 1.5 seconds. With this configuration, when 100 balls are fired toward the right region in one minute, the sphere that has flown into the first flow path 701 and the sphere that is fired next to the sphere are fired, and the second flow path 702 is fired. Will flow down the lower right area (the area where the first variable winning device 2650 is provided) of the game board 13 almost simultaneously (about 0.1 second difference). Therefore, in the gaming state in which the first variable winning device 2650 is opened (big hit state or small hit state), it is possible to easily win a plurality of balls at once.

  Further, a part of the second flow path 702 (fifth flow path 704b) is provided on the back side of the first flow path 701 so that a plurality of flow paths are overlapped in a front view. In this way, by forming a plurality of ball channels using the depth direction of the game board 13, it is possible to reduce the space for forming the ball channels (the area occupied by the ball channels in the game board 13). it can.

  Furthermore, the ball outlet of the second flow path 702 is located below the outlet of the first flow path 701 (downstream of the second ball inlet 640), and the first outlet is located in the lower right area of the game board 13. The configuration is such that the sphere flows out downstream from the sphere flowing out of the flow path 701. As a result, the sphere that has flowed out of the outlet 704c vigorously (the sphere that has flowed faster than the sphere that has flowed down the first flow path 701) directly collides with the sphere that has flowed out of the first flow path 701, and is irregular. A situation in which a ball flow occurs can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, a configuration is used in which the ball fired by the right-handed game by the distribution member 700 is alternately distributed to two flow paths. However, other configurations may be used. Instead of alternating (1: 1) to the channels, the balls may be distributed at different ratios, or the balls may be distributed to three or more channels. Further, the configuration may be such that the spheres are randomly distributed to a plurality of flow paths according to the weight of the spheres and the timing of the flow. Further, in the present embodiment, the sorting member 700 in which the sorting destination of the next passing ball changes according to the own weight of the passing ball is used. A dividing member may be used.

  Next, a lower region of the game board 13 in which the small hit attacker 5650 is provided will be described. The small hitting attacker 5650 is a variable ball-in means that is opened in a small hitting game that is executed when a small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery. As shown in FIG. 201, the small hitting attacker 5650 is disposed below the first ball entrance 64, and a ball flowing down on the game board 13 arrives by a nail implanted in the game board 13. It is configured to be difficult. Therefore, when a small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, a small hit game in which the player is unlikely to acquire a prize ball is executed.

  In the present embodiment, when a small hit is won in the first special symbol and the second special symbol, control for interrupting or forcibly stopping the change of the other special symbol being executed is configured to be executable. The control content to be executed is switched based on the variation content of the other special symbol variation. In other words, when a small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, it is difficult for the player to obtain a prize ball, but a predetermined control (interruption or forced stop) is executed for the second special symbol variation being executed. This is a trigger for execution.

<Electrical Configuration in Eighth Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The eighth embodiment is different from the above-described seventh embodiment in that a part of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and a part of the RAM 203 are different. Otherwise, it is the same. The same components are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 202, the contents specified in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 202 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 according to the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 202, the ROM 202 of the eighth embodiment is different from the ROM 202 of the above-described seventh embodiment (see FIG. 168 (a)) in that the small hit random number table 202fb is replaced with the small hit random number 8 table. 202gb, the jackpot type selection 7 table 202fd instead of the jackpot type selection 8 table 202gd, the variation pattern selection 8 table 202fe instead of the variation pattern selection 7 table 202fe, and the small hit type selection 7 table 202ff instead of the small hit type selection 7 table 202ff The difference is that a selection eight table 202gf is provided, and the other points are the same.

  Here, the contents of the small hit random number 8 table 202gb will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 203 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the small hit random number 8 table 202gb. As shown in FIG. 203, the small hit random number 8 table 202gb defines a small hit determination value for the first special symbol. Specifically, the small hit determination value is defined in the range of "300 to 599" for the value of the first random number counter C1 regardless of the probability state of the special symbol with respect to the symbol type of the first special symbol, A small hit determination value is defined in a range where the value of 1 of the first random number counter C1 is "550 to 599" with respect to the second special symbol regardless of the probability state of the special symbol.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the small hit is won with a probability of about 1/2 when the first special symbol lottery is executed, and the small hit with a probability of about 1/12 when the second special symbol lottery is executed. It is configured to win. In the present embodiment, when the small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, the small hit attacker 5650 in which the ball cannot be won during the small hit game (it is difficult to win) is opened. Is executed, and when a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, a small hit game in which the variable winning device 65 that is opened during the big hit game is opened is executed. Therefore, even if the first special symbol lottery is set to win the small hit with a high probability, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively specific (prize ball). Also, in the second special symbol lottery, it is set so as to win a small hit with a probability lower than the small hit probability of the first special symbol lottery. In addition, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to reduce the ball possession.

  Next, the contents of the jackpot type selection 8 table 202gd will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 204 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the jackpot type selection 8 table 202gd. As shown in FIG. 204, the jackpot type selection 8 table 202gd is different from the above-described jackpot type selection 7 table 202fd (see FIG. 169) in that a prize-winning device (a prize-winning device to be opened) in which a jackpot operation is executed. The difference is that they differ from each other in that the value of the time-saving counter 203h set after the end of the jackpot is different, and the other points are the same. It should be noted that the jackpot types used in the above-described seventh embodiment and the jackpot types used in the eighth embodiment have partially different names for convenience of explanation (for example, jackpot A7). And jackpot A8) are the same for the elements that are not described for the differences. A detailed description of the same elements will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 204, in the eighth embodiment, when a normal jackpot (jackpot A8, jackpot D8) is won in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, it is set at the time of the jackpot win. Regardless of the game state, the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to 0, that is, it is defined that the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is not set after the big hit game ends. In addition, when the jackpot C8 set at a rate of 20% of the jackpot winning in the first special symbol lottery is won, the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to 10000 regardless of the gaming state set at the time of the jackpot winning. Is set to That is, the probable change state is set in effect until the next big hit is won.

  As described above, in the jackpot type set when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, a jackpot type having a different degree of advantage for the player is defined, and "jackpot A8" “Big hit B8” and “big hit C8” are defined. In other words, it is stipulated that “big hit C8” is the most advantageous big hit type for the player.

  On the other hand, in the case of winning in the probability change jackpot in the second special symbol lottery (in the case of winning in "big hit E8"), the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to 100 regardless of the gaming state set at the time of jackpot winning. . In other words, if the "big hit E8" is won, a probability change state of 100 times (100 special symbol changes) after the big hit game is set.

  That is, in the present embodiment, when the right-handed game is executed during the probable change state and the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol are executed in parallel (overlapping), it is the most advantageous jackpot type. While aiming to win the jackpot C8, a game is executed that aims not to win the jackpot types “jackpot A8” and “jackpot D8” for which the probability change state ends.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 205 and 206, among the variation pattern selection tables in the eighth embodiment, the probable change 8 table 202ge and the latent probabilities 8 table 202ge referred to during the probable change state will be described. I do. FIG. 205 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the eight tables for probabilities of change 202ge, and FIG. 206 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the eight tables for latent probability 202ge. .

  In the present embodiment, a right-handed game is executed in a state in which the probable state and the latent state are set, and a game in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are executed in an overlapping manner is performed. Then, the variation pattern set when the big hit is won is made different depending on the selected big hit type. Furthermore, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol (number of reserved balls of special figure 1) and the number of reserved balls of second special symbol (number of reserved balls of special figure 2) are different based on the total number of reserved special figures. It is configured so that a variation pattern can be selected.

  To be more specific, the larger the total number of special figure reservations, the shorter the fluctuation time selected when the player wins a jackpot that is advantageous to the player than the case where the total number of special figure reservations is short. In addition, the configuration is such that the larger the number of combined special figure reservations, the longer the variable time selected when the player wins a jackpot disadvantageous to the player than the case where the total number of special figure reservations is short.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the case where a small hit is won in one special symbol lottery, the control to be executed for the other special symbol variation being executed in accordance with the variation pattern of the other special symbol variation being executed. The content is configured to be different. Specifically, when the other special symbol variation being executed is a variation pattern of 30 seconds or more, a process for discarding the special symbol variation is executed. If the variation pattern is less than 30 seconds, a process for interrupting the special symbol variation is executed.

  With this configuration, if the total number of special figure reservations is large, the special symbol fluctuation is discarded when a jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player is set, compared to the case where the total number of special figure reservations is small. When a jackpot type that is advantageous to the player is set, the special symbol change can be made difficult to discard (easy to interrupt). Therefore, the player can be motivated to play the game so as to continue the state where the total number of special figure reservations is large.

  As shown in FIG. 205, in the probable change 8 table 202g2, different fluctuations are performed based on the special symbol type, the result of the determination of success / failure (the result of the selected type), and the number of special figure reservations (the total number of special figure reservations). A pattern is defined.

  More specifically, the symbol type of the special symbol is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), and the result of the hit determination is the jackpot type of "big hit A", and In the range of “0 to 3”, the entire range (“0 to 198”) of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with a short variation having a variation time of 28 seconds as a variation pattern. In the range of (total number of reserved special figures) “4 to 7”, the long range of the fluctuation time of 30 seconds is associated with the entire range (“0 to 198”) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 as the fluctuation pattern. Stipulated.

  Also, the symbol type of the special symbol is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), and the result of the hit determination is the jackpot type of "big hit B", and the number of special figure reservations (the total number of special figure reservations) is In the range of “0 to 3”, the long range of the fluctuation time of 30 seconds is associated with the entire range (“0 to 198”) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 as the fluctuation pattern, In the range of “4 to 7”, the entire range (“0 to 198”) of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with a short variation having a variation time of 28 seconds as a variation pattern. .

  The symbol type of the special symbol is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), and the result of the hit determination is the jackpot type of "big hit C", and the number of special figures held (the total number of special figures held) is "0". In the range of “~ 3”, the entire range (“0 to 198”) of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with a very long variation having a variation time of 60 seconds as a variation pattern. In the range of “number” from “4 to 7”, the entire range (“0 to 198”) of the variation type counter CS1 is defined as a variation pattern in association with a super short variation having a variation time of 10 seconds. .

  In addition, the symbol type of the special symbol is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the result is incorrect (including small hits), and the number of special symbols held (the total number of special symbols held) is “0 to 3”. , The long range of the fluctuation time of 35 seconds is associated as a fluctuation pattern with the entire range (“0 to 198”) of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the number of special figure reservations (the total number of special figure reservations) is “ In the range of “4 to 6”, the entire range (“0 to 198”) of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with a middle variation having a variation time of 25 seconds as a variation pattern, and the number of special figure reservations (total special figure reservation) In the range of “7”, the entire range (“0 to 198”) of the variation type counter CS1 is defined as a variation pattern in which a short variation having a variation time of 15 seconds is associated.

  In addition, the symbol type of the special symbol is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the result of the hit determination is the jackpot type of "big hit D", and the number of special figures held (the total number of special figures held) In the range of “0 to 3”, the entire range (“0 to 198”) of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with a short variation having a variation time of 20 seconds as a variation pattern. In the range of “4 to 7”, the entire range (“0 to 198”) of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with a long variation having a variation time of 35 seconds as a variation pattern. .

  The symbol type of the special symbol is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), and the result of the hit determination is a jackpot type of "big hit E", and the number of special figures held (the total number of special figures held) is "0". In the range of “−3”, the long range of the fluctuation time of 35 seconds is associated with the entire range (“0 to 198”) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 as the fluctuation pattern. ) Is "4 to 7", and the entire range ("0 to 198") of the variation type counter CS1 is defined as a variation pattern in which a short variation having a variation time of 20 seconds is associated.

  In addition, the symbol type of the special symbol is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the result is incorrect (including small hits), and the number of special symbol reservations (total number of special symbol reservations) is “0 to 7”. , Ie, the entire range, the entire range (“0 to 198”) of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with a short variation having a variation time of 15 seconds as a variation pattern.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 206, in the 8 tables for latents 202g2, the special symbol type, the result of the determination of success / failure (the result of the selected type), and the number of special figure reservations (the total number of special figure reservations) are displayed. A different variation pattern is defined based on this.

  More specifically, the symbol type of the special symbol is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), and the result of the hit determination is the jackpot type of "big hit A", and In the range of “0 to 4”, a short variation with a variation time of 28 seconds is associated as a variation pattern with the entire range (“0 to 198”) of the variation type counter CS1. In the range of (total number of reserved special figures) “5 to 7”, the long range of 30 seconds as the fluctuation pattern is associated with the entire range (“0 to 198”) of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Stipulated.

  Also, the symbol type of the special symbol is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), and the result of the hit determination is the jackpot type of "big hit B", and the number of special figure reservations (the total number of special figure reservations) is In the range of “0 to 4”, the entire range (“0 to 198”) of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with a short variation with a variation time of 28 seconds as a variation pattern, and the number of special figure reservations (summed special figure) In the range of “5 to 7”, the entire range (“0 to 198”) of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with a long variation having a variation time of 30 seconds as a variation pattern. .

  The symbol type of the special symbol is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), and the result of the hit determination is a jackpot type of "big hit C", and the number of special figures held (the total number of special figures held) is "0". In the range of “−4”, the long range of the fluctuation time of 30 seconds is associated with the entire range (“0 to 198”) of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the number of special figure reservations (the total number of special figure reservations) ) Is "5 to 7", and the entire range ("0 to 198") of the variation type counter CS1 is defined as a variation pattern in which a short variation with a variation time of 28 seconds is associated.

  In addition, the symbol type of the special symbol is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the result is incorrect (including small hits), and the number of special symbols held (the total number of special symbols held) is “0 to 6”. , The long range of the fluctuation time of 35 seconds is associated as a fluctuation pattern with the entire range (“0 to 198”) of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the number of special figure reservations (the total number of special figure reservations) is “ In the range of “7”, the entire range (“0 to 198”) of the variation type counter CS1 is defined as a variation pattern in which a middle variation having a variation time of 25 seconds is associated.

  In addition, the symbol type of the special symbol is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the result of the hit determination is the jackpot type of "big hit D", and the number of special figures held (the total number of special figures held) In the range of “0 to 4”, the entire range (“0 to 198”) of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with a short variation having a variation time of 28 seconds as a variation pattern, In the range of “5 to 7”, the entire range (“0 to 198”) of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with a long variation having a variation time of 30 seconds as a variation pattern. .

  The symbol type of the special symbol is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), and the result of the hit determination is a jackpot type of "big hit E", and the number of special figures held (the total number of special figures held) is "0". In the range of “−4”, the long range of the fluctuation time of 30 seconds is associated with the entire range (“0 to 198”) of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the number of special figure reservations (the total number of special figure reservations) ) Is "5 to 7", and the entire range ("0 to 198") of the variation type counter CS1 is defined as a variation pattern in which a short variation with a variation time of 28 seconds is associated.

  In addition, the symbol type of the special symbol is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the result is incorrect (including small hits), and the number of special symbols reserved (the total number of special symbols reserved) is "0 to 3". , The long range of the fluctuation time of 35 seconds is associated as a fluctuation pattern with the entire range (“0 to 198”) of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the number of special figure reservations (total number of special figure reservations) is “ In the range of “4 to 6”, the entire range (“0 to 198”) of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with a middle variation having a variation time of 325 as a variation pattern. ) Is “7” and the entire range (“0 to 198”) of the variation type counter CS1 is defined in association with a short variation having a variation time of 15 seconds as a variation pattern. As described above, in the present embodiment, the execution is performed when the execution condition for executing the specific control (for example, interruption or discard) for the special symbol variation being executed is satisfied (for example, at the time of executing the small hit game). The content of the specific control to be performed is switched according to the content of the special symbol change being executed. The variation display mode of the special symbol variation being executed (the variation display mode set at the time of executing the special symbol variation) is switched to a variation display mode according to the content of the specific control. As a result, the switching content of the variation display mode can be changed according to the content of the special symbol variation being executed, so that the interest of the game can be improved. Further, as shown in FIGS. 205 and 206, the switching condition for switching the variation display mode of the special symbol variation being executed to the specific variation display mode (variable display mode for forcibly stopping) according to the set game state. Are different in the easiness of establishment. Further, the easiness of establishing the switching condition is varied depending on the type of the special symbol being executed and the set big hit type (the length of the selected variation time is varied). Accordingly, it is possible to provide the player with a pleasure of predicting how the variable display mode is switched when the execution condition is satisfied. In addition, in the present embodiment, the ease of establishment of the execution condition is configured to be different according to the special symbol type, and specifically, a lottery result ( The probability of winning (small hits) is made different according to the special symbol type, and the length of the change time of the special symbol change set when the small hits is won is made different. Thereby, the game result can be made to differ greatly depending on which special symbol type performs the change indicating which lottery result at which timing. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 205 and FIG. 206, a specific variation time is selected corresponding to each condition. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A plurality of fluctuation times that can be selected in this manner may be defined, and a fluctuation pattern of a different fluctuation time may be selected according to the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Further, in the present embodiment, the variation time of 30 seconds is set as the threshold as a condition for switching the content of the specific control to be executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of thresholds may be set. In the present embodiment, a variation time (for example, 28 seconds, 30 seconds) that is close to a threshold value set as a condition for switching the content of the specific control to be executed is selected. Thereby, when the fluctuation effect corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern is executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, the fluctuation effect in the same effect mode can be executed. It should be noted that the difference in the fluctuation time (two seconds) can be dealt with by delaying the start timing of the fluctuation effect from the start timing of the special symbol fluctuation, or setting the end timing of the fluctuation effect earlier than the end timing of the special symbol fluctuation. What is necessary is just to be comprised so that a still image (for example, the image displayed at the start of a fluctuation effect or the image displayed at the end of a fluctuation effect) may be displayed for the difference period.

  Next, the contents of the small hit type selection 8 table 202gf in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 207 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the small hit type selection 8 table 202gf. The small hit type selection 8 table 202gf is different from the small hit type selection 7 table 202ff (see FIG. 172 (a)) in that the small hit type is defined for the first special symbol, The point that the opening target that is opened in the game is changed, the point that the symbol confirmation time is changed, and the point that the control content to be performed for the special symbol change during execution is changed are the same. is there. The same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The content specified in the small hit type selection 8 table 202gf will be specifically described. When the value of the small hit type counter C5 is in a range of “0 to 89”, “small hit A8” is associated with the value. , “90-99” is associated with “small hit B8”. Since the range of possible values of the small hit type counter C5 is 100 from "0 to 99", the rate of selecting "small hit A8" at the time of the small hit winning is 90% (90/100), The rate at which the small hits B8 are selected is 10% (10/100).

  When "small hit A" is selected, a small hit game in which the small hit attacker (second attacker) 5650 is opened for 0.1 second is executed. Further, “0.1 seconds” is selected as the symbol determination time of the special symbol, and a process of interrupting the second special symbol (the special symbol 2) being executed is executed. Here, when the process of interrupting the currently executing second special symbol (special symbol 2) is executed, the process of interrupting the process of measuring the change in elapsed time of the currently executing second special symbol change is performed. Be executed. Specifically, when the small hitting game is executed, the special figure 2 temporary stop flag is set to ON, and the second special symbol (special figure 2) is set while the special figure 2 temporary stop flag is set to ON. ) Is performed to skip the process of updating the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj indicating the fluctuation time (remaining fluctuation time). Then, upon the end of the small hitting game, the restart condition is satisfied (the special figure 2 temporary stop flag is set to off), and the process of updating the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj that has been interrupted is restarted. With such a configuration, while the small hit game is being executed (while the interruption condition is satisfied), it is possible to inhibit the remaining change time of the second special symbol change being executed from decreasing. Therefore, while the small hit game is being executed, for example, the second special symbol change that has been won is stopped and displayed, and the winning game (big hit game, small hit game) is executed repeatedly. Can be banned. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

  In addition, since the process of measuring the elapsed time of the special symbol change during execution is only interrupted (skipped), the first special symbol change executed before the small hit game after the restart condition is satisfied. Can be resumed. Therefore, the result of the already executed special symbol lottery can be reliably notified to the player. In addition, in this embodiment, when the interruption condition is satisfied triggered by the winning of the small hit, the processing for interrupting the special symbol change being executed is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the special symbol fluctuation during execution may be continuously performed, and the stop display of the first special symbol fluctuation may be interrupted after the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation has elapsed. In other words, even when the interruption condition is satisfied, the update processing for updating the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation is continuously executed, and when the update processing is executed until the predetermined fluctuation time elapses, the interruption is performed. It may be configured such that it is determined whether or not the condition is satisfied, and if it is determined that the interruption condition is satisfied, the stop display of the special symbol change is not executed until the restart condition is satisfied. This eliminates the need to interrupt the update process for updating the variation time of the special symbol variation, so that the processing load can be reduced.

  Furthermore, when "small hitting A" is selected, the small hitting game opening target is the small hitting attacker (second attacker) 5650, and the small hitting game in which it is difficult to obtain a prize ball during the small hitting game is executed. .

  When "small hit B" is selected, the small hit game is executed with the same operation content as "small hit A" described above. Further, depending on the change state of the second special symbol being executed, either a process of interrupting the change of the special figure 2 being executed or a process of forcibly stopping (discarding) is executed. As described above, in the present embodiment, in a part of the case where a small hit is won in one special symbol lottery, the content of the control executed for the other special symbol variation being executed is changed to the other special symbol variation status ( (Change situation, setting situation). Specifically, when the variation pattern set for the other special symbol variation being executed is a variation pattern having a variation time of 30 seconds or more, the special symbol variation is forcibly stopped (discarded). If the variation pattern has a variation time of less than 30 seconds, the control contents can be switched so that the special symbol variation is interrupted. With this configuration, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol lottery being executed is to be discarded in accordance with the fluctuation state of the special symbol fluctuation being executed. The player can be watched at which timing.

  Further, in the present embodiment, since the content of the variation pattern, that is, the length of the variation time is set as a condition for switching the control content for the special symbol variation being executed, for example, it corresponds to a lottery result disadvantageous to the player. By simply defining the variation pattern table so that the variation time of the variation pattern becomes longer, it is possible to easily stop (discard) the special symbol variation corresponding to the lottery result disadvantageous to the player. The conditions used to determine the control content are not limited to the above. For example, the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation during execution, or whether the lottery result satisfies a specific condition, is determined. The result of the control content may be determined based on Furthermore, the control content to be executed for the running first special symbol variation may be determined based on a combination of the running first special symbol variation and the lottery result of the second special symbol that has won the small hit. .

  Next, the content of the small hit type corresponding to the second special symbol (special figure 2) as the symbol type in the small hit type selection 8 table 202gf will be described. "Small hit C8" is associated with the range of the value of the small hit type counter C5 from "0 to 79", and "Small hit D8" is associated with the range of "80 to 89". , "90-99" is associated with "small hit E8". Since the range of possible values of the small hit type counter C5 is 100 from "0 to 99", the ratio of selecting "small hit C8" at the time of the small hit winning is 80% (80/100), The rate at which “small hit D8” is selected is 10% (10/100), and the rate at which “small hit E8” is selected is 10% (10/100).

  When "small hit C8" is selected, a small hit game in which the big hit attacker (first attacker) 2650 is opened for 1.5 seconds is executed. Also, “0.5 seconds” is selected as the symbol confirmation time of the special symbol. Also, when the “small hit D8” is selected, the same small hit game as the above “small hit C8” is executed, and furthermore, according to the fluctuation state of the first special symbol being executed, Either a process of interrupting the change of the special figure 1 or a process of forcibly stopping (discarding) is executed. In addition, the content of the control process at the time of interrupting or forcibly stopping the first special symbol change based on the "small hit D8" is the target of the control process executed based on the "small hit B8". Since only the first symbol has been switched to the first special symbol, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 208 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 according to the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 208, the present embodiment is different from the above-described RAM 203 of the seventh embodiment in that a special variation flag 203ga is added, and the rest is the same. The same components are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The special fluctuation flag 203ga is for indicating whether the special symbol fluctuation to be executed is a fluctuation pattern in which a fluctuation time of 30 seconds or more is set, and is used when the fluctuation time of 30 seconds or more is set. Set to on. In the present embodiment, when the small hit change that has been won for the specific small hit type is stopped and displayed, the other special symbol change is interrupted according to the change pattern set for the other special symbol change being executed. It is configured to be able to switch between executing a process and executing a process of discarding (forcibly stopping). That is, in one special symbol lottery, for the other special symbol variation, the processing condition for switching the variation mode being executed to a variation mode different from the variation mode set when executing the other special symbol variation. Is established, the variation after switching is made different according to the variation during execution.

  With such a configuration, when the above-described processing condition is satisfied, the type of variation to be switched to is determined based on the other special symbol variation. Some games can be offered.

<Control Process of Main Controller in Eighth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 209 to FIG. 215, control processing contents of the main control device 110 in the eighth embodiment will be described. The eighth embodiment is different from the above-described seventh embodiment in that the first special symbol lottery is configured to be able to win a small hit, and when a variation pattern is selected, the variation time is 30 seconds or more. Is added to the process of determining whether the variation pattern in which is set is selected, and when the special symbol variation winning the small hit is stopped and displayed, the process is executed for the other special symbol variation being executed. The difference is that processing for determining the processing content is added, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same elements, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the eighth embodiment, various control processes executed for the first special symbol will be described while illustrating the characteristic processing contents of the eighth embodiment, but the same processing contents will be described. This is also executed in the control processing of the corresponding second special symbol, but the detailed description using the drawings is omitted because the description is duplicated.

  First, the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 8 (S386) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 209 is a flowchart showing the content of the first special symbol big hit determination process 8 (S386). This first special symbol big hit determination process 8 (S386) is different from the first special symbol big hit determination process (see S356 in FIG. 121) of the above-described seventh embodiment (fourth embodiment) in that the current lottery result is obtained. When it is determined that it is not a big hit (see S457 in FIG. 121), the special figure 1 deviation variation processing 8 (S481) is executed, and the other points are the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same elements, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, the details of the special figure 1 deviation variation processing 8 (S481) executed in the first special symbol big hit determination processing 8 (see S386 in FIG. 209) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 210 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 departure variation process 8 (S481). In the special figure 1 departure variation process 8, when the first special symbol lottery has not been won (when departure has been won), a process for determining whether or not a small hit has been won is executed. Note that the detailed contents are different from the above-described special figure 2 deviation variation processing (see S1059 in FIG. 128) in that the processing target is switched from the second special symbol to the first special symbol. Are the same.

  In the special figure 1 deviation fluctuation processing 8 (S481), first, it is determined whether or not the current lottery result (the lottery result acquired in the processing of S457 of the first special symbol big hit determination processing (see S386 in FIG. 209)) is a small hit. It is determined (S485).

  When it is determined that the small hit is won in the processing of S485 (S485: Yes), the small hit flag 203i is set to ON (S486), and the lottery result of the first special symbol is set to the small hit (S487). ) Then, a small hit symbol of the first special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S488), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S485, when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small hit, that is, the lottery is out (S485: No), the out-of-spec symbol of the first special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is displayed. It is set (S485), and this processing ends.

  As described above, the special figure 1 departure fluctuation processing (S481 in FIG. 210) executed as one processing of the first special symbol fluctuation start processing (see S258 in FIG. 120), that is, the fluctuation of the special symbol (lottery) The small hit flag 203i is set to ON when it is determined that the small hit has been won in the processing executed at the timing of starting the small hit, and the setting status of the small hit flag 203i at the timing of stopping the fluctuation of the first special symbol , It is possible to easily execute the processing corresponding to the small hit winning.

  It should be noted that the small hit flag 203i used in the present embodiment is a special figure 1 area indicating that the small hit has been won in the first special symbol lottery, and a special figure 2 area indicating that the small hit has been won in the second special symbol lottery. When a small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, the flag in the special figure 1 area is set to ON, and when a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, , The flag in the special figure 2 area is set to ON. Thus, even if the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are overlapped and a small hit is won, the state can be easily stored.

  Next, the contents of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (S387) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 211 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (S387). This first special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (S387) is different from the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S357 in FIG. 122) executed in the above-described seventh embodiment (fourth embodiment). , The difference between adding a special variation flag to ON after selecting a variation pattern, and adding a process for selecting a variation pattern other than the jackpot winning Are the same. The same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (S387) is executed, the same processes as S551 to S555 are performed as in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S357 in FIG. 122), and thereafter, the currently selected symbol is selected. It is determined whether the variation pattern is a variation pattern with a variation time of 30 seconds or more (S582). If it is determined that the fluctuation time is 30 seconds or longer (S582: Yes), the special fluctuation flag 203ga is set to ON (S583), and the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection processing (see S357 in FIG. 122) is performed. The same processing from S556 to S559 is executed, and this processing ends. If it is determined that the fluctuation time is not longer than 30 seconds (S582: No), the processing of S583 is skipped, and the same S556 to S559 as the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection processing (see S357 of FIG. 122). Is performed, and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S551 that the current lottery result is not a big hit (S551: No), the special figure 1 departure variation pattern selection processing is executed (S581), and thereafter, the processing shifts to the processing of S553. Details of the special figure 1 deviation variation pattern selection processing (S581) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 212, the contents of the special figure 1 deviation variation pattern selection processing 8 (S581) will be described. FIG. 212 is a flowchart showing the details of the special figure 1 deviation variation pattern selection processing 8 (S581). In the special figure 1 deviation variation pattern selection processing 8 (S581), the same processing content as the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection processing 7 (see S1277 in FIG. 179) of the seventh embodiment described above is applied to the second special symbol. Is switched to the first special symbol.

  When the special figure 1 departure variation pattern selection process 8 (S581) is executed, if it is determined that the current lottery result of the first special symbol (special figure 1 lottery result) is not a small hit (S591: No), The processing having the same contents as S1377 to S1379 of special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection processing 7 (see S1277 in FIG. 179) is executed by changing the processing target to the first special symbol (S597 to S599), and thereafter, this processing is performed. To end. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S591 that the small hit is a small hit (S591: Yes), the value of the small hit type counter C5 is acquired (S592), and the small hit type is determined based on the acquired value of the small hit type counter C5. The small hit type is selected with reference to the selection 8 table 202gf (S593). Next, the processing having the same contents as the processing in S1374 to S1376 of the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection processing (see S1277 in FIG. 179) is executed by changing the processing target to the first special symbol (S594 to S596). The process ends.

  Next, the contents of the first special symbol change stop processing 8 (S288) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 213 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol change stop processing 8 (S288). This first special symbol variation stop processing 8 (S288) determines that the special figure 1 big hit flag 203i is not set to ON with respect to the first special symbol variation stop processing 7 (see S278 of FIG. 175). (S851; No), that is, the time saving update process 7 (see S882 in FIG. 175) executed when the first special symbol change to be stopped and changed this time is the out-of-place change, 8 (S892), and when it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit flag 203i is set to ON (S581: Yes), a process of determining whether the second special symbol change is executed is executed. (S891) The point that the processing of S853 to S855 is skipped when the second special symbol change is not executed, and the stop of the jackpot change (start of the jackpot game) Zui and various flags, and the process of clearing the various counters (S870 in FIG. 175), differs in that to perform the add special variation flag 203ga processing (S893 in FIG. 213), but is otherwise identical. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and the detailed description is omitted.

  Next, the details of the special figure 1 departure stop process 8 (S892) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 214 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 departure stop process 8 (S892). In this special figure 1 departure stop processing 8 (S892), the same processing as the special figure 2 departure stop processing 7 of the seventh embodiment described above (see S1584 of FIG. 181) is performed by changing the processing target from the second special symbol to the first special pattern. This is different in that it is switched to the special symbol and executed, and a small hitting process 8 (S1972) is executed instead of the small hitting process (see S1671 in FIG. 181). Description is omitted.

  Here, the small hit processing 8 (S1972) executed in the special figure 1 departure stop processing 8 (see S892 in FIG. 214) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 215 is a flowchart showing the content of the small hitting process 8 (S1972). This small hitting process 8 (S1972) differs from the small hitting process of the above-described seventh embodiment (see S1671 in FIG. 182) in the content of the control process executed according to the type of the winning hit. They differ in the point. Specifically, when a specific small hit type (small hit B, D, E) is won, a process (interruption process, forced stop (discard) process) according to the variation pattern of the running special symbol variation is performed. It differs in that it is configured to execute.

  When the small hit processing 8 (S1972) is executed, first, the small hit type set for the current first special symbol change is read (S1682), and the read small hit type is “small hit A or small hit. It is determined whether or not it is "hit C" (S1981). If it is determined to be "small hit A" or "small hit C" (S1981: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present time is changing the special figure 2 (during the change of the second special symbol) (S1684). If it is determined that FIG. 2 is changing (S1684: Yes), the special figure 2 temporary stop flag indicating that the second special symbol change is interrupted (temporary stop) is set to ON (S1885), and the special figure 2 is set. A special figure 2 temporary stop command indicating that the temporary stop flag is turned on is set (S1686), and the process ends. In the process of S1684, when it is determined that the special figure 2 is not changing (S1684: No), the processes of S1685 and S1686 are skipped, and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1981, if it is determined that the small hit is not “small hit A” or “small hit C” (S1981: No), then it is determined whether the read small hit type is “small hit E8”. (S1982), if it is determined that it is "small hit E8" (S1982: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203h is larger than 0, that is, the current state is in the probable change state (in the normal symbol high probability state). ) Is determined (S1688). If it is determined that the current state is in the probable change state (S1688: Yes), it is next determined whether the time-saving end standby flag 203dm is set to ON (S1689), and if the time-saving end standby flag 203dm is not ON. If it is determined (S1689: No), that is, if it is determined that it is not the final change in the probable change state, the time reduction end standby flag 203dm is set to ON (S1690).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the special variation flag 203ga is set to ON (S1983). If it is determined that the special variation flag is not set to ON, that is, the variation pattern set to the second special symbol variation being executed is determined. If the variation pattern does not have a variation time of 30 seconds or longer, or if the second special symbol variation has not been executed (S1983: No), the flow shifts to S1684 described above. If the value of the time-saving counter 203h is not larger than 0 in the process of S1688, that is, if it is determined that the present time is not in the probable change state (S1688: No), or the time-saving end standby flag 203dm is set in the process of S1689. If it is set to ON, that is, if it is determined that it is the final variation of the probable variation state (S1689: Yes), the process of S1690 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the above-described process of S1684. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1983 that the special fluctuation flag 203ga is set to ON (S1983: Yes), the flow shifts to the processing of S1692. If it is determined in the processing of S1982 that it is not “small hit E8”, that is, if it is determined that it is “small hit B8” or “small hit D8” (S1982: No), the processing of S1688 to S1690 is performed. And skips to step S1983.

  In the processing of S1692 to S1697, the same processing as the small hit processing (see S1671 in FIG. 182) of the above-described seventh embodiment is executed by switching the processing target from the second special symbol to the first special symbol, and thereafter. Then, the special fluctuation flag 203ga is set to off (S1184), and this processing ends.

  As described above, in the eighth embodiment, when the small hitting game is executed (when the special processing is performed for the special symbol change being executed), the content of the special symbol change being executed is described. Is configured to determine the processing content according to. More specifically, at the time when the small hit game is executed based on one special symbol lottery (when the special symbol indicating the small hit winning is stopped and displayed), the variation pattern of the other special symbol variation being executed If the result of the determination is a specific fluctuation pattern (for example, a fluctuation pattern in which a fluctuation time of 30 seconds or more is set), the other special symbol fluctuation being executed is discarded, and the specific fluctuation is discarded. If it is other than a pattern, the other special symbol variation being executed can be interrupted. In other words, when the specific condition for executing the special process for the special symbol variation being executed is satisfied, the processing content of the special process is determined with reference to the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol being executed. The configuration is not limited to this. For example, the content of the special processing determined when the specific condition is satisfied may be changed according to the set game state. Specifically, when the normal state is set, even if the specific condition is satisfied, only “interruption” is determined as the special processing, and when the certain change state is set, the above-described eighth execution is performed. As in the embodiment, “interruption” or “discard” may be configured. By making the content of the determination of the special processing different according to the game state set in this way, it is possible to give a variety of playability in each game state.

  Further, the content of the special processing to be determined may be made different depending on the type of the special symbol for which the specific condition is satisfied. For example, the second special symbol may be different from the case where the specific condition is satisfied for the first special symbol. May be configured such that “discard” is more easily determined when the specific condition is satisfied. Specifically, the first special symbol lottery may be configured so that the specific condition is more difficult to be satisfied than the second special symbol lottery (so that it is difficult to win a small hit), or the specific condition is satisfied. In the case, the condition for determining “discard” (in the eighth embodiment, the variation pattern being executed is 30 seconds or more) is determined by the second special symbol when the specific condition is satisfied in the first special symbol. You may be comprised so that it may become conditions (for example, the variation pattern under execution is 32 seconds or more) which are harder to be satisfied than when a specific condition is satisfied. Thereby, the content of the special processing can be made different depending on which special symbol type meets the specific condition, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, when the specific condition for executing the special process for the special symbol variation being executed is satisfied, the processing content of the special process is determined with reference to the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol being executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the lottery result of the special symbol change being executed is a specific lottery result, the special symbol change being executed is not discarded. In the case where the lottery result of the special symbol change being executed is a big hit, a small hit, or a loss, a condition for determining “discard” (in the eighth embodiment, the running change pattern (30 seconds or more). With this configuration, the ease of “discarding” can be varied according to the result of the special symbol lottery, so that a game suitable for the design concept can be easily executed.

  Further, in the eighth embodiment, as the variation pattern of the special symbol variation (big hit variation) which has won the big hit, the big hit type in which the big hit game (for example, the probable big hit) which is advantageous to the player is executed, and the disadvantage to the player is given. A different big hitting game (for example, a normal big hit) is executed so that a different changing pattern is selected according to the disadvantageous jackpot type. Further, the changing pattern selected according to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is changed. It is configured to be different.

  More specifically, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is large, the variation time of less than 30 seconds is set as a variation pattern corresponding to the advantageous jackpot type than when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is small. A variation pattern in which a variation time of 30 seconds or more is set as a variation pattern corresponding to the disadvantageous jackpot type is configured to be easily selected.

  With such a configuration, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is large, a jackpot game (for example, a probable variable jackpot) advantageous to the player is more easily executed than when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is small ( A jackpot game (for example, a normal jackpot) that is disadvantageous to the player can be made difficult to be executed (it is easy to be discarded by the small hit winning). That is, it is possible to vary the ratio of the probability jackpot at the time of winning the jackpot according to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol. Therefore, it is possible for the player to enthusiastically accumulate the number of reserved balls of the special symbol while expecting an advantageous jackpot game to be executed, and as a result, the operation of the game can be improved.

  Further, the eighth embodiment is different from the above-described seventh embodiment in that a small hitting win can be made in any one of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery. I have. By configuring in this way, even if one of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery is won, it is possible to abandon the big jackpot by the other small hit lottery, According to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol, it is possible to surely make the ratio occupied by the probable jackpot at the time of winning the jackpot.

  In the above-described eighth embodiment, the condition (specific condition) that triggers the execution of the special processing (interruption or discard) for one special symbol variation (for example, the first special symbol variation) is set as the other special symbol variation. Although the condition that is satisfied when a specific small hit is won in the fluctuation (for example, the second special symbol fluctuation) is shown, an opportunity to satisfy the specific condition may be provided. May be configured so that a specific condition is satisfied when the ball enters the entrance of the pachinko machine, or when the power supplied to the pachinko machine 10 is not normal (for example, noise is generated and the power supply is temporarily stopped). May be configured so that the specific condition is satisfied when it is determined that the state is interrupted. Further, a game method executed by a player is an illegal game method (for example, a magnetic sensor for detecting a magnetic force is provided, and a game method when the magnetic sensor detects a magnetic force, and a shock detection for detecting an impact on the pachinko machine 10). A sensor may be provided, and the specific condition may be satisfied when the impact detection sensor detects a game method when a predetermined amount of impact is detected.

  Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, when the special symbol change executed when the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set (when the probable change state and the time saving state are set) is discarded (forced stop), In addition, the configuration is such that the number of time savings (the number of probable variations) is not added according to the discarded special symbol variation. Specifically, in a gaming machine configured such that when the number of special symbol changes reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50) in the state where the probability change state is set, the latent probability state is set. When the special symbol change executed during the probable change state is discarded (forced stop), the number of times of saving time (the number of probable changes) is not added. In the pachinko machine 10 using such a configuration, for example, on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, a display mode (for example, FIG. The value of (a) displayed in the display area HR2) is also configured so that the display mode is not updated in synchronization with the number of times of saving time. Therefore, it is possible to easily notify the player that the special symbol change has been discarded without updating the number of times saved. In this case, for example, the pachinko machine is configured so that the display mode for indicating the number of time savings (the number of times of change) displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is updated at the start timing of the special symbol change. In the case of the machine 10, the display mode is restored based on the fact that the special symbol change has been discarded (for example, if the remaining number of working hours is displayed, the addition is performed, and the elapsed time saving number is displayed. The effect of subtracting (if any) is performed.

  Also, a plurality of time-saving termination conditions (for example, first special symbol) are used as transition conditions (terminating conditions for terminating a high-probability state of a normal symbol (time-saving termination condition)) for transitioning from the probable state to the latent state. The first time-saving end condition that is satisfied when the total number of the change and the second special symbol change reaches 100, and the second time-saving end condition that is satisfied when the second special symbol change is executed five times) In the pachinko machine 10 that has been set, on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, an end condition that is most easily satisfied among a plurality of time saving end conditions (for example, corresponding to the second special symbol change five times). In the case of the pachinko machine 10 configured to notify the player of the game content in an easily understandable manner by displaying only “5”), the first special symbol change is executed immediately after the probable change state is set. Also, the third symbol display device Display mode of "5" displayed at the first display surface is configured not updated. When the first special symbol change is executed 95 times after the first special symbol change is executed 95 times after the probability change state is set (when the 96th first special symbol change is executed) The display control for updating the display of “5” displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 to “4” is executed. In this way, it is determined whether or not to update the number of hours saved displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the special symbol type in which the special symbol change is performed during the probable change (time saving) state. This makes it possible to notify the player of the period until the probable change state ends in an easy-to-understand manner.

<Ninth embodiment>
Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The ninth embodiment is different from the above-described seventh embodiment in that a hold storage function is provided also for the second special symbol, and an effect (RUSH) performed during the latent state (RUSH game). There is a great difference in that the effect mode of the “medium effect” is changed, and that the variation pattern of the big hit type, the small hit type, and the normal symbol is changed.

  In the above-described seventh embodiment, the special symbol reservation number for indicating the reserved symbol storage number is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 (see dm1a in FIG. 161). In addition, in recent gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that displays the number of reserved symbols corresponding to the number of reserved special figures on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in order to easily show the number of reserved special figures to the player. . Further, a pre-reading process (prior discrimination process) is performed on the winning information of the special symbol stored and stored, and the pre-reading result (pre-determination result) is changed in a display mode of a corresponding reserved symbol (for example, a reserved symbol). There is a type of executing a hold change effect of notifying the player by changing the color or effect of the game or changing the design of the hold symbol.

  However, in the above-described pending change effect, the number of reserved symbols to be subjected to the pending change effect is determined according to the number of acquired special figure reserved balls. It is more difficult to execute the change-on-hold effect than in the case where the number of holding balls is large. In other words, as long as the effect using the reserved symbols displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is executed in accordance with the number of acquired special figure reserved balls, it depends on the number of acquired special figure reserved balls. Since the effect of the look-ahead effect (holding change effect) for notifying the player of the pre-reading result (pre-determination result) is variable, for example, for a player who cannot acquire many special figure reserved balls However, there is a problem in that the player is dissatisfied with the fact that he cannot obtain many special figure reserved balls, and he is dissatisfied with the effect of the pre-reading effect being reduced, which lowers the willingness to play.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the number of special figure reserved balls acquired is determined according to the result of the pre-reading processing (preliminary determination processing) executed for the special symbol winning information stored and stored. Regardless, it is configured to execute a look-ahead effect (icon effect) that varies the number of specific symbols (exclusive icons displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81). Thus, even if the number of acquired special figure reserved balls is small, it is possible to execute the same prefetching effect as in the case where the acquired number of special figure reserved balls is the upper limit, according to the prefetch result. It becomes possible. Therefore, it is possible to provide a look-ahead effect with a high effect even for a player who cannot acquire many special figure reserved balls, thereby suppressing a decrease in the player's willingness to play. Can be.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of specific symbols displayed in the above-described icon effect is set to the number of special figure reserved balls that can be retained (the storage of the second special symbol mainly executed during the latent state). ) Is not displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 (it is difficult for the player to discriminate). ). With this configuration, the specific symbol displayed to the player in the icon effect is as if the number of special figure reserved balls (the number of stored second special symbols that are mainly executed during the latent state) is the same. It can make you think it is a reserved symbol to show. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the willingness to play of a player who cannot acquire many special figure reserved balls.

  In addition, in this embodiment, when the pre-reading result is a specific result (for example, a jackpot in which a latent state is set), a special figure holding ball in which the number of the specific symbols displayed in the icon effect can be held and stored. It is configured to be larger than the upper limit value (4) of the number (the number of reserved special symbols to be mainly executed during the latent state). With this configuration, it is possible to provide a surprising effect to a player who has an illusion that the specific symbol displayed to the player in the icon effect is a reserved symbol.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as a result of the pre-reading process (preliminary determination process) performed on the winning information of the special symbol stored and stored, the number of times of opening of the attacker that is opened in the small hit game is determined. The number of specific symbols to be displayed is determined based on the result of the determination. The number of times the attacker is released in one small hit game is made different depending on the type of the small hit that has been won. Furthermore, as a part of the big hit game executed when the big hit is won, the same attacker releasing operation as that of the small hit game is executed.

  With this configuration, it is possible to make the player predict the number of small hit games to be executed in the future based on the number of specific symbols displayed as the icon effect. Further, in the present embodiment, the player is notified that the period in which the specific symbol is displayed is a period in which the latent state (RUSH game) does not end. That is, when at least one specific symbol remains at the end of the big hit game, the fact that the latent state is set after the end of the big hit game is notified in advance. Therefore, each time the number of specific symbols is changed, the player pays attention to the icon effect, so that the effect can be enhanced.

<Production contents in the ninth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 216 to FIG. 219, characteristic effect contents among the effect contents executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment will be described. Specifically, the contents of the icon effect for variably displaying a specific symbol executed during the latent state (during the RUSH game) will be described. This icon effect is an effect in which the number of specific symbols (icons) is variably displayed based on a pre-read result with respect to the reserved memory of the acquired second special symbol (special symbol 2 reservation).

  First, with reference to FIG. 216 (a), the display contents of the ending screen of the jackpot game in which the latent state (RUSH game) is set immediately after will be described. FIG. 216 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of an ending screen displayed during an ending period in a jackpot game before entering a RUSH game. In the ninth embodiment, similarly to the above-described first embodiment, when a latent hit is won in a state where the latent state is not set (a jackpot in which the latent state is set after the end of the jackpot game), , The effect mode displayed during the ending period is made different between the first hit when entering the RUSH game and the case where the potential hit is won in the state where the latent state is set. .

  As shown in FIG. 216 (a), the display area 71 is formed on the left side of the main display area Dm, and the display area HR70 is formed in the center during the ending period at the time of the first hit of the RUSH game. Then, in the display area HR70, an icon 871 imitating carrot and acquired number information 872 (4 in FIG. 216 (a)) are displayed. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, the characters "RUSH continues as long as there is an icon" are displayed.

  In the present embodiment, when the RUSH game is executed, an icon 871 is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, and the game executed during the RUSH game based on the number of displayed icons 871 and the display mode. Is suggested to the player. This icon 871 is configured such that the number of display and the display mode are variably set based on information (lottery information, look-ahead information) relating to the second special symbol mainly executed during the RUSH game.

  As described above, in the present embodiment in which the icon effect is executed during the RUSH game, during the ending period of the jackpot game which triggers the entry into the RUSH game, the icon effect initial shown in FIG. A display screen is displayed, and four icons 871 are displayed irrespective of the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol at that time and the result of the pre-reading. By this, no matter what state the RUSH game is executed, the effect mode of the icon effect at the time of the RUSH game entry can be made the same. It is possible to suppress the player's willingness to play the game.

  In the present embodiment, four icons 871 are displayed at the start of the icon effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the specific start condition is satisfied at the start of the icon effect, for example, In the case where there is a jackpot advantageous to the player in the pre-reading result for the reserved ball of the second special symbol (the latent jackpot whose latent state is set again), the number of icons 871 displayed at the start of the icon effect May be configured to be a number other than four. In this case, it is preferable to display a smaller number of icons 871 than four.

  When the RUSH game is started, an icon 871 displayed in the display area HR70 is displayed as a hold icon 873 in the display area HR71, and the effect using the hold icon 873 and a character 811 imitating a rabbit is mainly displayed. This is executed in the area Dm. As shown in FIG. 216 (b), in the present embodiment, the upper limit display number of the hold icon 873 is configured to be the same as the upper limit hold number of the second special symbol in which the lottery is mainly executed during the RUSH game. Therefore, a maximum of four hold icons 873a to 873d are displayed in the display area HR71.

  As for the reserved icons 873a to 873d, a first reserved icon 873a, a second reserved icon 873b, a third reserved icon 873c, and a fourth reserved icon 873d are displayed in order from the top of the display area HR, and an effect is produced in order from the first reserved icon 873a. Used. Then, when the first hold icon 873a is deleted from the display area HR71 for use in the effect, the remaining second hold icons 873b to 873d are shifted to the hold icons in the previous order, respectively. You. When a new hold icon is acquired, additional icons are displayed in the order following the already displayed hold icons.

  In the present embodiment, the small hitting game executed during the RUSH game, more specifically, the number of release of the second attacker 1650 is pre-read, and the number of the reserved icons is determined based on the pre-read result. ing. Then, the number of times the second attacker 1650 is opened in the small hit game is made different depending on the small hit type that has been won. The big hit game in which the attacker 1650 is opened a predetermined number of times is executed.

  That is, for example, even if the number of acquired special figure 2 reserved balls is two, the number of times the second attacker 1650 is released is four times as a result of the pre-reading (prior determination) for the two special figure 2 reserved balls. In this case, a configuration is made such that four icons can be set as the number of icons to be held. With this configuration, the number of reserved icons to be displayed can be determined irrespective of the actual number of special figure 2 reserved balls, so that a large number of special figure 2 reserved balls cannot be acquired. Even if it is, it is possible to execute an interesting icon effect.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 217 (a), among the icon effects during the RUSH game, the effect contents that consume the reserved icon will be described. FIG. 217 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when a small hitting game is executed during a RUSH game. As shown in FIG. 217 (a), when the small hit game is executed, the digestion effect in which the character 811 eats the hold icon 873a is executed, and the prize ball display mode indicating the prize balls acquired in the small hit game. 874 is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 217 (a), a prize ball display mode 874 is displayed in a display mode of “+15” indicating that one ball has been won in the second attacker 1650 and that there were 15 prize balls. I have. In addition, the character "I'll give you" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds, and informs the player that the character 811 is performing the effect of eating the hold icon 873a in an easily understandable manner.

  Note that in FIG. 217 (a), the display screen displayed during the digestion effect has been described with an example in which a small hit game in which the second attacker 1650 is opened once is performed, so that the character 811 is held in the hand. Although the number of hold icons 873a to be taken is one, for example, when a small hit game in which the second attacker 1650 is opened twice is executed, a digestion effect in which the character 811 eats two hold icons is executed. Is done. Although a detailed description will be given later, in the present embodiment, in some small hit games, or in some big hit games, a hit game that opens the second attacker 1650 a plurality of times is configured. The configuration is such that the number of times the second attacker 1650 is opened is larger in the big hit game than in the small hit game.

  That is, as the effect shown in FIG. 217 (a), when the effect in which the character 811 eats a plurality of hold icons is executed, the degree of expectation for the jackpot winning can be increased. With such a configuration, among the icon effects performed during the RUSH game, the player can also be interested in the contents of the effect of consuming the reserved icons (decreasing the number of reserved icons).

  In the present embodiment, the opening operation mode of the second attacker 1650 opened in the small hit game and the opening operation mode of the second attacker 1650 opened in the big hit game are configured to be the same. ing. Therefore, by grasping the content of the opening operation of the second attacker 1650 executed during the hit game, it is possible to prevent the type of the current hit game (small hit game, big hit game) from being determined by the player. Can be.

  In the present embodiment, the number of the reserve icons 873 displayed in the number corresponding to the number of times the character 811 eats in one digestion effect, that is, the number of times the second attacker 1650 is opened in the small hitting game being executed is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an effect in which the hold icon used for the digestion effect remains at the end timing of the digestion effect, that is, the number of hold times larger than the number of times the second attacker 1650 is opened in the small hit game is released. A digestive effect using icons may be executed. With such a configuration, the number of reserved icons displayed at the start of the digestive effect can be increased, so that the player can be more expected to win the jackpot.

  In addition, during the execution period of the digestion effect, the number of hold icons used in the digestion effect may be configured to be variable. Thereby, since the number of the reserved icons can be increased at any timing, even if the icon production with a low jackpot expectation is executed, the number of the reserved icons used for the production during the digestive production period is reduced. A game can be performed while expecting the game to increase during the digestion effect period.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 217 (b), description will be given on the effect contents of the acquired effect indicating that a plurality of pending icons have been acquired as the icon effect executed during the RUSH game. FIG. 217 (b) is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen displayed as an acquisition effect indicating that a plurality of hold icons have been acquired, as an icon effect performed during the RUSH game. In the present embodiment, as in the effect performed during the RUSH game of the seventh embodiment described above (see FIG. 162 (b)), an effect in which the character 811 opens the treasure box 812 is executed. Then, an acquisition effect in which a predetermined number (1 to 3) of the hold icons are displayed from the treasure box is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 217 (b), a treasure chest 812 displayed during the RUSH game opens, and an icon 871 imitating carrot and acquired number information 872 (3 in FIG. 217 (b)) are displayed in the display area HR70. Is displayed. Then, the character "get ginseng" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds, and an effect of notifying the player that the number of displayed hold icons has increased is executed.

  As described above, in the icon effect of the present embodiment, while the RUSH game continues, the display number of the hold icon is controlled so that the hold icon does not become 0, and the acquisition for increasing the hold icon at various timings is performed. The effect is configured to be executable. The configuration is such that the greater the number of icons 871 acquired in one acquisition effect, the more advantageous the game is to be executed for the player. Further, in the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the number of displayed suspension icons can be increased at a timing different from the timing of increasing the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 218 (a), the content of the continuous effect performed during the icon effect will be described. FIG. 218 (a) is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen displayed during a continuous effect performed during the icon effect. In the present embodiment, a continuous effect can be executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied at the start of the change of the second special symbol. This continuous effect includes a pattern executed for one change period of the second special symbol change and a pattern executed over a plurality of second special symbol changes. An effect using all the icons is executed.

  Specifically, in the present embodiment, the configuration is such that a continuous effect can be executed when four (upper limit) icons are displayed, and when the continuous effect is executed, FIG. ), The four reserved icons (873a to 873d) displayed in the display area HR71 are displayed in a line in the center of the main display area Dm, and the character 811 eats the first reserved icon 873a in order. Is executed. After the last hold icon 873d, a V icon 873y indicating a jackpot win (a jackpot win of a jackpot type advantageous to the player) is displayed. Further, in the sub-display area Ds, the characters "Eat carrots! Treasure may come out from inside" are displayed to indicate to the player the effect of the continuous effect.

  In other words, when the continuous effect is executed, it means that all the reserved icons are consumed and the jackpot is won, or the reserved icons cannot be completely consumed and the RUSH game is continued. Further, as shown in FIG. 218 (b), the V icon 873z may be displayed from among the pending icons being consumed in a state where the continuous production is being performed and the last pending icon is consumed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 218 (b), a description will be given of the contents of the effect when the V icon 873z is displayed during the continuous effect. FIG. 218 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when the V icon 873z is obtained without exhausting all the reserved icons during the continuous production. As shown in FIG. 218 (b), an effect of finding a V icon 873z from among the third holding icons 873c is performed while the third holding icon 873c is being digested (during eating). . In this case, since the fourth holding icon 873d is not digested, the fourth holding icon 873d is displayed in the display area HR71. If the jackpot game is started in this state, the jackpot game will be executed while the hold icon is displayed. At this point, the latent state (RUSH game) is executed again after the jackpot game ends. It will inform the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 219, a description will be given of the contents of the effect in which a special icon different from a normal hold icon is displayed during the icon effect. FIG. 219 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a display screen when a special icon is displayed during an icon effect. Although the details will be described later, the present embodiment is configured to calculate the number of reserve icons that can be displayed based on the number of reserved special figure 2 balls and the number of releases of the second attacker 1650 calculated by prefetching. I have.

  Then, the special icon is displayed when the number of holdable icons that can be displayed is a predetermined number or more (for example, four or more), that is, when the display upper limit number is exceeded. Then, when the second special symbol change during the execution or the prefetching result of the second special symbol includes a jackpot winning that is advantageous to the player, the number of displayable reserved icons is likely to exceed a predetermined number. are doing.

  As shown in FIG. 219, when the number of displayable hold icons is calculated to be equal to or more than a predetermined number, a special icon effect in which a special icon 873x imitating a gorgeous ginseng in the acquired effect appears from the treasure box 812 is executed. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, the characters "lucky, SP ginseng get" are displayed to indicate to the player that the icon acquired this time is a special icon. In the present embodiment, the number of icons that can be displayed simultaneously in the display area HR71 is defined as four, which is the upper limit of the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol. When the number exceeds the number, the special icon is displayed to perform the effect of increasing the expectation of the jackpot to the player while maintaining the upper limit of the number of icons simultaneously displayed in the display area HR71. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the number of hold icons that can be displayed exceeds four (when a special condition is satisfied), the upper limit number of hold icons that can be displayed simultaneously in the display area HR71 is set. You may comprise so that it may be larger than the upper limit of the number of reserved balls of a 2nd special symbol. With this configuration, the player who has recognized that the holding icon indicates the number of holding balls of the second special symbol can receive a number of holdings exceeding the upper limit number of the number of holding balls of the second special symbol. By displaying the icon, an unexpected effect can be executed. Furthermore, when the number of reserved icons exceeding the upper limit of the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is displayed, the expectation of the jackpot winning can be increased. It can be performed using sexual effects.

  The various effect screens executed during the characteristic effect (icon effect) executed in the ninth embodiment have been described above with reference to FIGS. 216 to 219, but are not limited thereto. For example, in the state where the RUSH game is being executed, if the number of special figure 2 reservations becomes 0, one or more reservation icons are displayed, and the reservation icon which does not relate to the result of the special symbol lottery is displayed. The pseudo-variation effect using the icon may be configured to be executed, or the suspension icon may be hidden.

  In the present embodiment, as the display mode of the hold icon, a display mode imitating a normal ginseng (see the hold icon 873a in FIG. 217 (a)) and a display mode imitating a luxurious ginseng (the special icon in FIG. 219) 873x) can be set, but other display modes may be settable. For example, the first display mode corresponding to either the small hit or the big hit and the big hit may be set. A corresponding second display mode and a third display mode corresponding to a specific jackpot may be settable. Further, in order to additionally display a large number of reserved icons at once, a reduction effect of digesting a large number of reserved icons at once may be executed.

<Electrical Configuration in Ninth Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the ninth embodiment, a part of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, a part of the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113, and a part of the RAM 223 are different from the above-described seventh embodiment. are doing. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the contents of the jackpot type selection 9 table 202hd included in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 220 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the big hit type selection 9 table 202hd. The big hit type selection 9 table 202hd is different from the big hit type selection 7 table 202fd (see FIG. 169) in the seventh embodiment described above in that the big hit type (big hit) associated with the first special symbol (special figure 1). The target of opening the jackpot operation specified for A to C) is different from the value of the time saving counter 203h set after the end of the jackpot game, and is associated with the second special symbol (special figure 2). The difference is that the types of the jackpot types are increased, and the others are the same.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 220, as the big hit type of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 34", and the big hit type is "Big hit A9" is associated and defined. The “big hit A9” is the same big hit type as the “big hit A7” in the above-described seventh embodiment, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, “big hit B9” is defined as the big hit type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “35 to 79”. The “big hit B9” is different from the “big hit B7” of the above-described seventh embodiment in that the value of the time-saving counter 203h set after the end of the big hit game is changed, and is otherwise the same.

  Specifically, when the "big hit B9" is won in the normal state, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 100. Is set. On the other hand, when the "big hit 9" is won in the latent state, 0 is set to the value of the time reduction counter 203h.

  That is, when the "big hit B9" is won in the normal state or the probable change state, the state shifts to the relatively advantageous probable change state. On the other hand, when "big hit B9" is won in the latent state, the number of times saved is set to 0, so that the gaming state after the end of the big win is the most advantageous latent state. Further, even when the probability change state is set after the jackpot game is over, it is more advantageous for the player to win the "big hit B9" in the probability change state than to win the "big hit B9" in the normal state. In order to set the probability change state, the number of times of probability change is smaller in the case of winning in the probability change state than in the case of winning in the normal state.

  With this configuration, it is possible to easily transition to the most advantageous gaming state by transitioning from the normal state, which is the initial gaming state, to a different gaming state. It is possible to enthusiastically play a game aiming at the most advantageous game state.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 220, “big hit C9” is defined as the big hit type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “80 to 99”. The "big hit C9" is different from the "big hit C7" of the above-described seventh embodiment in that the value of the time-saving counter 203h set after the end of the big hit game is changed, and is otherwise the same.

  Specifically, when the "big hit C9" is won in the normal state, the probable change state and the latent state, that is, when the "big hit C9" is won, the time-saving counter 203h is set regardless of the set gaming state. The value is set to 0. That is, when the "big hit C9" is won, the game state (latent state) that is most advantageous to the player after the end of the big hit game is the most advantageous big hit type for the player. In the state where the latent state is set, the value of “big hit B9” and “big hit C9” are the same.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, according to the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit in the first special symbol lottery, the rate of transition to the gaming state (latent state) most advantageous to the player is determined. The normal state and the probable state are set differently from the case where the latent state is set. The normal state and the probable state are set to 20%, and the latent state is set to 65%. It is configured such that the latent state is set after the big hit game ends.

  Further, as described above, the normal state in which the transition rate to the latent state is set to 20% and the probable change state are both configured to transit to the probable state at a rate of 45%. It is configured such that the degree of expectation for transition to the latent state in the case of transition to is different. With such a configuration, the transition rate for shifting to the most advantageous gaming state (latency state) for the player after the end of the jackpot game for a plurality of gaming states as the gaming state set at the time of the jackpot winning is set. Even if they are set to be the same, the degree of expectation of shifting to the latent state can be made different for each game state set at the time of winning the jackpot.

  Next, the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery will be described. As shown in FIG. 220, in the ninth embodiment, four types of jackpots (jackpots D9 to G9) associated with the second special symbol (special figure 2) are defined, and according to the selected jackpot type. The jackpot game opening operation contents are different.

  Specifically, as the big hit type of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in a range of “0 to 34”, and “big hit D9” is associated with the big hit type. Stipulated. The “big hit D9” is a big hit type in which the same content as the “big hit D7” of the above-described seventh embodiment is defined. "Big hit E9" is defined as the big hit type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "35 to 69". The "big hit E9" is a type of big hit (8 rounds big change big hit) in which the number of rounds of the big hit is eight rounds and the special symbol is set to the certain change state after the end of the big hit. Note that when the "big hit E9" is won in the normal state, the probable state, and the latent state, 0 is set to the value of the time reduction counter 203h.

  That is, when the "big hit C9" is won, 0 is set to the value of the time reduction counter 203h regardless of the set gaming state. That is, when the "big hit C9" is won, the game state (latent state) that is most advantageous to the player after the end of the big hit game is the most advantageous big hit type for the player. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with “big hit E9” is 35, so the first special symbol lottery In the case of a jackpot, the rate at which the "big hit E9" is determined is 35% (35/100).

  "Big hit F9" is defined as the big hit type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "70 to 89". In the "big hit F9", the number of rounds of the big hit is 9 rounds, and in the first round (R), the second attacker 1650 opens for 1.5 seconds, and the second round (R) to the ninth round (R). Up to this point, a jackpot game in which the first attacker 650 opens for 30 seconds is executed, and after the end of the jackpot, there is a jackpot of a type set to the special symbol change state (9 round change jackpot). Note that when the "big hit F9" is won in the normal state, the probable change state, and the latent state, 0 is set to the value of the time reduction counter 203h.

  As described above, when the "big hit F9" is won, the same opening operation as in the small hit game is executed as the first round. That is, in the pre-reading of the second special symbol, the number of times of opening the second attacker 1650 is calculated in addition to the jackpot winning. Thereby, in the icon effect that determines the number of displayed hold icons based on the number of times the second attacker 1650 has been released (the number of times the small hit game has been released), a pattern that suggests a small hit and a pattern that suggests a big hit It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand, and it is possible to enhance the production effect. In the "big hit F9", nine rounds of big hit games are defined so that the number of times the first attacker 650 is released is the same as the above "big hit E9". With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing the jackpot type selected based on the number of times of opening the first attacker 650.

  In the present embodiment, the same opening operation as that of the small hit game is executed in the first round (R), and the actual big hit game is executed in the second round (R) and thereafter. For example, even if the "big hit F9" is won, the jackpot game of 8 rounds (R) is executed, and the second attacker 1650 is opened for 1.5 seconds in the first round (R). The opening operation and the opening operation for opening the first attacker 650 for 28.5 seconds may be executed. With this configuration, the number of rounds of the jackpot game to be executed can be unified, and therefore, for example, a notification unit (for example, an LED) that notifies the first symbol display device 37 of the number of rounds of the jackpot game being executed. In the case where a means for informing the number of rounds by lighting of the lamp) is provided, the number of types of rounds to be informed by the informing means can be reduced, and the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. Further, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing the jackpot type based on the notification content of the notification means.

  "Big hit G9" is defined as the big hit type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "90 to 99". In the “big hit G9”, the number of rounds of the big hit is 11 rounds. In the first to third rounds (R), the second attacker 1650 opens for 1.5 seconds, and the 11th round (R) from the fourth round (R). The jackpot game in which the first attacker 650 opens for 30 seconds is executed until the first hit, and after the end of the jackpot, there is a jackpot of the type set to the special change state of the special symbol (11 round certain change jackpot). Note that when the "big hit G9" is won in the normal state, the probable change state, and the latent state, 0 is set to the value of the time reduction counter 203h.

  As described above, when the “big hit G9” is won, the same opening operation as the small hit game is executed as the first to third rounds. That is, in the pre-reading of the second special symbol, the number of times the second attacker 1650 is opened three times is calculated in addition to the jackpot winning. Thereby, in the icon effect that determines the number of displayed hold icons based on the number of times the second attacker 1650 has been released (the number of times the small hit game has been released), a pattern that suggests a small hit and a pattern that suggests a big hit It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand, and it is possible to enhance the production effect. In addition, since the number of times of release of the second attacker 1650 is calculated three times as a result of one lottery of the second special symbol lottery, the number of times of release of the second attacker 1650 even when the number of reserved special figure 2 balls is small. Can be calculated a lot, and the effect style of the icon effect can be diversified. In the "big hit G9", a big hit game of 11 rounds is defined so that the number of times of opening the first attacker 650 is the same as the above "big hit E9". With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing the jackpot type selected based on the number of times of opening the first attacker 650.

  In the present embodiment, the same opening operation as the small hit game is executed in the first to third rounds (R), and the actual big hit game is executed in the fourth and subsequent rounds (R). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even when the “big hit G9” is won, the big hit game of the 8th round (R) is executed, and the second attacker 1650 is executed in the first round (R). May be configured to execute an opening operation to open the first attacker 650 for 25.5 seconds after executing the opening operation to open the first attacker three times for 1.5 seconds. With this configuration, the number of rounds of the jackpot game to be executed can be unified, and therefore, for example, a notification unit (for example, an LED) that notifies the first symbol display device 37 of the number of rounds of the jackpot game being executed. In the case where a means for informing the number of rounds by lighting of the lamp) is provided, the number of types of rounds to be informed by the informing means can be reduced, and the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. Further, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing the jackpot type based on the notification content of the notification means.

  Next, the contents of the small hit type selection 9 table 202hf will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 221 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small hit type selection 9 table 202hf. As shown in FIG. 221 (a), the small hit type selection 9 table 202hf is different from the small hit type selection 7 table 202ff of the above-described seventh embodiment in that the types of the small hit types are increased. The content of the small hit operation specified for the small hit type (opening content of the small hit game) and the content of the processing for the first special symbol change executed when the small hit game is executed are changed. And the other points are the same. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

  The small hit type selection 9 table 202hf is a data table that is referred to when selecting the small hit type after the small hit winning in the special symbol lottery similarly to the small hit type selection 7 table 202ff described above, and is acquired. It is defined that four types of small hits, "small hit A9" to "small hit D9", are selected in accordance with the value of the small hit type counter C5.

  When a small hit is won in the special symbol lottery, the content of the small hit operation and the content of the process for the special symbol change being executed can be made different depending on the selected small hit type. In the present embodiment, the interruption process is executed for the special symbol variation being executed, regardless of which small hit type is selected. This interruption process is a process of temporarily interrupting the process of subtracting the variation time of the special symbol variation being executed (for example, until the small hitting game ends). This interruption processing is the same as that in the above-described seventh embodiment, and therefore detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The contents defined in the small hit type selection 7 table 202ff will be specifically described. When the value of the small hit type counter C5 is in the range of “0 to 59”, “small hit A9” is associated with the value. , "60-79" is associated with "small hit B9", "80-89" is associated with "small hit C9", and "90-99" is assigned. Is associated with “small hit D9”. Since the range of possible values of the small hit type counter C5 is 100 from "0 to 99", the rate at which "small hit A9" is selected at the time of small hit winning is 60% (60/100), The rate at which "small hit B9" is selected is 20% (20/100), the rate at which "small hit C9" is selected is 10% (10/100), and the rate at which "small hit D9" is selected is 10%. (10/100).

  When "small hit A9" is selected, a small hit game in which the variable winning device (first attacker 650) is opened for 1.5 seconds is executed, and when "small hit B9" is selected, the right variable winning is selected. When a small hitting game in which the device (second attacker) 2650 is opened for 0.5 seconds is executed and “small hitting C9” is selected, the right variable winning device (second attacker) 2650 is opened for 0.5 seconds. The small hit game to be executed twice is executed, and when "small hit C9" is selected, the small hit game to execute the right variable winning device (second attacker) 2650 for 0.5 seconds three times is executed. It is stipulated that

  That is, in the present embodiment, according to the small hit type selected when the small hit is won, the small hit game that opens the first attacker 650 that is mainly opened during the big hit game and the small hit game that is mainly performed during the small hit game And a small hitting game in which the second attacker 2650 to be opened is opened. With this configuration, the jackpot game was executed immediately after the small jackpot game was executed? Can be made to remind the player. As described above, in the present embodiment, when a jackpot game is executed in a state where the hold icon is displayed in the latent state, the latent state is set again after the end of the jackpot game. The icon effect is executed. Therefore, if the player wins the "small hit A" while the hold icon is displayed, the player can be delighted that an advantageous big hit game is executed when the first attacker 650 is opened.

  When "small hit B9" to "small hit D9" are selected, a small hit game in which the second attacker 1650 is opened is executed, but the second attacker is selected for each selected small hit type. The number of times of opening 1650 is different. That is, the number of times of opening the second attacker 1650 calculated for one special symbol lottery can be made different. Thereby, when calculating the display number of the reserved icon in the icon effect, the number of times the second attacker 1650 is opened can be largely deviated from the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 and thus the number of small hits. Become. Therefore, it is possible to easily display the number of reserved icons determined based on the number of times the second attacker 1650 is released without synchronizing with the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2.

  In the present embodiment, a small hitting game in which either the first attacker 650 or the second attacker 1650 is opened according to the selected small hitting type is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an opening operation of sequentially opening the first attacker 650 and the second attacker 1650 may be set in one small hitting game. Thereby, the opening operation performed as one small hitting game can make the player think that a plurality of small hitting games are continuously performed. Therefore, the relationship between one special symbol lottery and the number of times the second attacker 1650 is opened can be made more difficult to understand.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 221 (b), the contents of the ordinary figure fluctuation pattern selection 9 table 202hg will be described. FIG. 221 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ordinary figure fluctuation pattern selection 9 table 202hg. As shown in FIG. 221 (b), the ordinary figure variation pattern selection 9 table 202hg is different from the ordinary figure variation pattern selection table 202fg of the seventh embodiment in the variation of the ordinary symbol selected during the latent state. The difference is that the pattern is the same as during the normal state, and the rest is the same. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

  As shown in the normal figure fluctuation pattern selection 9 table 202hg, in the present embodiment, during the probable change state, the ball fired by the right-handed game enters the right electric accessory 164 as in the seventh embodiment. are doing. On the other hand, the ball fired by the right-handed game during the latent state is configured to be harder to enter the right electric combination 164 than in the above-described seventh embodiment. That is, in the above-described seventh embodiment, even in the latent state, the ball is inserted into the right electric accessory 164 to easily increase the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol. In the ninth embodiment, the same variation pattern as in the normal state is selected because the game does not have such a playability.

  Next, the contents of the ROM 222 included in the audio lamp control device 113 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 222A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 in the ninth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 222 (a), in the ninth embodiment, an icon display number selection table 222 ha, a continuous effect selection table 222 hb, Are provided, and are otherwise the same. The same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The icon display number selection table 222ha is a data table that is referred to when selecting the display number of the hold icon displayed in the icon effect described above with reference to FIGS. 216 and 217, and is a non-display information storage area 223hb. And the display number of the hold icon based on the information on the number of times the second attacker 1650 has been opened calculated based on the winning information command received from the main control device 110 and the acquired special figure 2 hold number Is stipulated.

  Here, the contents of the icon display number selection table 222ha will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 223 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the icon display number selection table 222ha. As shown in FIG. 223 (a), the number of icons that can be selected (the number of reserved icons displayed) is the count of the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol in the special figure 2 reserved number (special symbol reserved ball count counter 223c). Value) and the value stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb, the number of icons to be displayed is defined.

  Specifically, when the number of reserved special figure 2 is “1” and the value stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb is “0 to 2”, “1” is defined as the number of displayed icons. When the value stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb is “3 to 5”, “5 (special)” is defined as the number of displayed icons. On the other hand, when the special figure 2 reservation number is “1”, the value stored in the non-display information storage area 223hb does not exceed “6”, and the corresponding value is not defined.

  If the number of reserved special figure 2 is “2” and the value stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb is “0 to 2”, “1 to 2” is defined as the number of icons to be displayed. When the value stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb is “3 to 5”, “1 to 4” is defined as the number of displayed icons, and the icon display number is stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb. When the value is "6 to", "5 (*)" is defined as the number of displayed icons.

  When the number of reserved special figure 2 is “3” and the value stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb is “0 to 2”, “1 to 3” is defined as the number of displayed icons, When the value stored in the non-display information storage area 223hb is “3 to 5”, “2 to 4” is defined as the number of displayed icons, and the value stored in the non-display information storage area 223hb is In the case of “6 to”, “4” is defined as the number of displayed icons.

  When the number of reserved special figures 2 is “4” and the value stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb is “0 to 2”, “1 to 4” is defined as the number of icons to be displayed. If the value stored in the non-display information storage area 223hb is “3 to 5”, “3 to 4” is defined as the number of icons to be displayed, and the icon display number is stored in the non-display information storage area 223hb. When the value is “6 to”, “4” is defined as the number of displayed icons.

  Here, when the number of displayed icons is “5 (special)”, the icon display number larger than “4”, which is the upper limit of the number of reserved special figure 2 balls, is selected. In the embodiment, the upper limit display number of the reserve icon is “4”, and therefore, the special icon for indicating that the selected icon display number exceeds “4” which is the upper limit number of the number of reserved balls of special figure 2 (FIG. 219 special icon 873x) is displayed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the larger the difference between the number of balls in the special figure 2 and the value stored in the display information storage area 223hb, that is, as a result of the look-ahead of one special figure 2 reservation The special icon is configured to be more easily displayed as the number of times the second attacker 1650 is opened is calculated a plurality of times. With this configuration, it is possible to execute an effect that gives the player a sense of expectation even in a situation where the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is small.

  On the other hand, when the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is large (for example, three or four), the execution is performed when the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is small because the number of special figure 2 reserved balls to be prefetched increases. It is more likely that the number of releases of the second attacker 1650 will be calculated a plurality of times as a prefetch result of one special figure 2 reservation than the prefetch result performed, but if the number of special figure 2 reservation balls is large (for example, 3 (4) is configured such that “4” is easily set without setting “5 (special)” as the number of displayed icons. Then, when the number of displayed icons is “4”, the configuration is such that a continuous effect described later is easily executed. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a special icon is frequently displayed in a state where the number of reserved special figure 2 balls is large.

  Further, even when the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is small (for example, two), the number of times of opening the second attacker 1650 is large as a pre-read result, that is, a small hit C9 or a small hit D9 (FIG. 221 (a)). ), Or when the big hit G9 (see FIG. 220) is won, an icon display number larger than the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is selected.

  On the other hand, even when the number of reserved special figure 2 balls is large, when the number of times of opening the second attacker 1650 is small as a pre-read result, that is, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is out, or when the small hit A9 ( If the player has won the jackpot D9 or the jackpot E9 (see FIG. 220), the number of icons displayed is smaller than the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 (see FIG. 221 (a)). It is configured to be.

  With this configuration, the display number of the reserved icons used for the icon effect can be determined irrespective of the actual number of the special figure 2 reserved balls, and therefore, it is interesting regardless of the special figure 2 reserved ball number. It is possible to execute a prefetching effect.

  In the present embodiment, since the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol (special figure 2 reserved ball number) is not displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, the reserved icon is displayed to the player. Special figure 2 It is configured to be able to execute an interesting look-ahead effect regardless of the actual number of reserved special figure 2 balls. Instead, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a reserved icon used for icon effect and a reserved symbol indicating the actual number of reserved special figure 2 balls are displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. In this case, since the player can grasp the actual number of special figure 2 reserved balls and the number of displayed reserve icons, for example, if a large number of reserved icons are displayed in a state where the special figure 2 reserved ball number is small. We can make you think you won the jackpot.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a jackpot type (jackpot F9 or jackpot G9) for which the number of times of opening the second attacker 1650 is calculated is won, a latent state is set after the end of the jackpot game. Therefore, all jackpots that can be predicted based on the number of displayed hold icons are jackpots for which the latent state is set. Therefore, since the prediction based on the presentation mode of the icon effect (display of the reserved icon) is the prediction of the jackpot winning which is advantageous to the player, the player is more interested in the prediction than the prediction including the jackpot winning which is disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, when a jackpot winning in which the number of times of opening the second attacker 1650 is not calculated, that is, when a jackpot (jackpot D9, jackpot E9) in which the second attacker 1650 is not opened during the jackpot game is executed, It is configured such that the rate at which the latent state is set after the end of the big hit game is 50%. Therefore, even if a large jackpot is won in a case where the icon presentation is in a presentation mode in which a jackpot win cannot be predicted (for example, in a state where the number of displayed icons is small), the latent state after the jackpot game ends. Can leave the possibility to be set. In addition, in this case, before the execution of the jackpot game, an effect for invoking whether or not the hold icon is completely consumed is executed. If at least one of the hold icons is displayed at the age of the jackpot game being executed, the jackpot is played. It is configured to notify that the latent state is set after the game is over (RUSH game is continued).

  As described above, by using the reserved icons displayed in the icon effect for various purposes, more various effects can be executed and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  Returning to FIG. The continuous effect selection table 222hb is a data table that is referred to when selecting whether or not to execute the continuous effect described above with reference to FIG. 218. In the icon effect, the number of displayed pending icons is four. It is referred to when the second special symbol change is started in the state. In the continuous effect selection table 222hb, whether or not to execute a continuous effect is defined based on winning information (special figure 2 winning information) on the second special symbol stored in the winning information storage area 223b.

  Here, the contents specified in the continuous effect selection table 222hb will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 223 (b). FIG. 223 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the continuous effect selection table 222hb. As shown in FIG. 223 (b), in the continuous effect selection table 222hb, among the special figure 2 winning information, the winning information of the execution area (the winning information used in the second special symbol lottery this time) and the pending The execution status is defined based on the winning information of the (reserved area), the acquired value of the effect counter 223f, and the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc, and the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc is 4. That is, it is defined that the continuous effect can be selected only when four hold icons 873 are displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81.

  Specifically, if the winning information included in the execution area is a big hit, that is, if the second special symbol change executed this time is a big hit change, if the big hit type is “big hit F9, big hit G9”, In the case where the execution of the continuous effect A (execution A) is specified and the other jackpot types are “big hit D9 and big hit E9”, the range of the obtained effect counter 223f is continuously set in the range of “0 to 89”. The non-execution of the effect is associated, and the execution of the continuous effect B (execution B) is defined in the range of “90 to 99”. When the execution area includes the winning information regarding the jackpot winning, since the jackpot game is executed after the second special symbol change, the continuous winning game is performed without considering the winning information stored in the holding area. Whether or not the performance is performed is specified.

  Here, in the continuous production of the pattern that finally wins the jackpot, as the production result of the continuous production, the first result in which all the reserved icons are digested to get the V icon 873y, and the V icon in which all the reserved icons are not digested, A determination is made as to which of the second result for obtaining 873z is the effect result. More specifically, it is determined whether or not the jackpot to be subjected to the continuous production this time is a probability variable jackpot (jackpot E9 to G9). In the case), a first result for digesting all the reserved icons is set, and if it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot, a lottery for determining whether to set the first result or the second result (result). Selection lottery), and the type of the effect result is set based on the result of the selection lottery. With this configuration, it is possible to surely prevent a situation in which the latent state is not set after the jackpot game is completed even though the jackpot game is executed in a state where the hold icon remains. it can.

  In addition, even if the winning is achieved in the probability change jackpot (execution A), since the first result can be set as the production result of the continuous production, for example, the continuous production in which the V icon 873y is obtained. Even if is executed, the player can play the game while keeping expectations to the end. In addition, if the jackpot game corresponding to the probability change jackpot is executed in a state where all the hold icons are consumed, the hold icon is displayed until the jackpot game ends when the predetermined occurrence condition is satisfied during the jackpot game. It may be configured to execute an effect to be displayed.For example, when an operation effect of causing the player to operate the frame button 22 during the jackpot game is executed, and the effect result of the operation effect is a predetermined effect result, It is preferable that the generation condition be satisfied.

  With this configuration, the player who is playing the big hit game can be motivated to play the game in order to quickly grasp the game state set after the big hit game ends. Further, the technique for establishing the occurrence condition is not limited to this. For example, a predetermined number of balls may be won by the variable ball entry means (the first attacker 650 or the second attacker 1650) that is opened during the jackpot game. May be set, or an occurrence condition that is satisfied when a predetermined number of balls enter a different ball entry device than the variable entry device that is opened during a jackpot game.

  Returning to FIG. 223 (b), the description will be continued. If the execution area of the special map 2 winning information includes winning information indicating a small hit winning, and the winning information is “small hit B9” to “small hit D9”, “big hit E” in the hold, When there is winning information indicating one of the jackpot types “big hit F” and “big hit G”, the execution of the continuous effect B (execution B) is associated with the value of the effect counter 223f in the range of “0 to 69”. Non-execution of the continuous effect is defined in association with the range of “70 to 99”. If there is no winning information indicating any of the jackpot types of “big hit E”, “big hit F”, and “big hit G” in the hold, the value of the effect counter 223f is continuously in the range of “0 to 69”. The non-execution of the effect is associated with the execution (execution C) of the continuous effect C in the range of “70 to 99”. Also, in the execution area of the special map 2 winning information, winning information indicating the small hit winning is included, and when the winning information is “small hit A9”, regardless of the winning information stored in the holding area. The non-execution of the continuous production is specified.

  If the execution area of the special map 2 winning information includes winning information indicating a winning, the winning information indicating any one of the "big hit E", "big hit F", and "big hit G" in the hold. If there is no winning information indicating any of the jackpot types of "big hit E", "big hit F", and "big hit G" in the hold, the continuous Non-execution of the production is specified.

  As described above, when selecting whether or not to execute the continuous effect, the result of the lottery of the second special symbol executed this time and the result of the pre-reading of the second special symbol stored on the hold (stored in the hold area) (Winning information), it is possible to execute a continuous production with a high degree of expectation of big hits. Therefore, after grasping that the jackpot is won at the time when the continuous production is executed, it is possible to make the continuous production look at the continuous production while watching whether the production result of the continuous production is the first result or the second result. Since it can be performed, the effect can be enhanced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the continuous effect is executed only when four hold icons are displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 223 (a), the configuration is such that the larger the actual number of special figure 2 reserved balls, the more easily four reserved icons are displayed. Therefore, the player can be motivated to play the game so that the four reserved icons are displayed, and the operation of the game can be enhanced. In addition, even if the number of reserved special figure 2 balls reaches the upper limit, the reserved icon may not be displayed in the upper limit number (four), so the number of reserved special figure 2 balls reaches the upper limit. Even in the state, the player can be motivated to play the game so that the four hold icons are displayed, and the operation of the game can be further enhanced.

  In this embodiment, the continuous effect can be executed only when four hold icons are displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when two or more hold icons are displayed, the continuous effect can be performed. You may comprise so that production may be performed. In this case, for example, it is configured to determine whether or not to execute a continuous effect based on the actual number of reserved special figure 2 balls and the result of pre-reading, and, for example, win a big hit (big hit E9) that is advantageous to the player Only when there is winning information indicating that the game is to be performed, it is preferable that the continuous effect is executed with a small number of hold icons. Thereby, according to the display number of the hold icon at the time when the continuous production is executed, the degree of expectation of the continuous production, that is, the expectation of the jackpot winning which is advantageous to the player can be made different, so that the player On the other hand, it is possible to make the user interested in the timing at which the continuous production is performed.

  Furthermore, it is configured to determine whether or not to execute the continuous effect based on the actual number of reserved special figure 2 balls and the result of the pre-reading. When there is the winning information shown, as a preparation effect for executing the continuous effect, the continuous effect may be executed after the forced increase display is executed so that the display number of the hold icon becomes the upper limit. .

  When the contents defined in the continuous production selection table 222hb have been described with reference to FIG. 223 (b), the continuous production types A, B, B A continuous production C (execution C) is provided. In the execution A, a continuous production (see FIG. 218 (b)) for mainly acquiring the V icon 873z in the middle of the continuous production, and in the execution B, a V icon is mainly provided at the end of the continuous production. (Execution C to acquire the V icon 873y in FIG. 218 (a)). In the execution C, during the continuous production, the holding icons 873a to 873d imitating carrots cannot be completely digested (cannot be eaten). Although it has been described that the effect in which the icon cannot be acquired is performed, it is sufficient that the effect having the above-described content is mainly performed. For example, the effect of the execution B is executed in the execution A with a low probability, that is, If production which effect result is than the actual game result disadvantage may be executable to configure another continuous effect.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 222 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the ninth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 222 (b), the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 of the ninth embodiment is not displayed on the RAM 223 (see FIG. 174) of the audio ramp control device 113 of the seventh embodiment. The difference is that an information storage area 223ha, an undisplayed icon number counter 223hb, a displayed icon number counter 223hc, and a continuous effect flag 223hd are added, and the rest is the same. The same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The undisplayed information storage area 223hb is a data area for temporarily storing the number of releases of the second attacker 1650 calculated based on the winning information command (winning command) received from the main control device 110, and will be described later. In the winning command processing 9 to be performed (see S4281 in FIG. 224), the number of times of release of the extracted second attacker 1650 is stored (S4486 in FIG. 224). Then, it is referred to when determining the number of displayed icons based on the stored information, and thereafter, the referred information is discarded. For the winning information already acquired before the latent state is set, the second attacker 1650 is opened for all the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223hb at the end timing of the jackpot game. The number of times is extracted and the result is stored.

  By providing the undisplayed information storage area 223hb in this manner, the timing at which the winning information of the special symbol is received and the timing at which the effect mode is determined can be easily made different.

  The not-yet-displayed-icon counter 223hb is a counter for indicating the number of pending icons that are not yet displayed among the number of currently-displayable pending icons, and the counter value is decremented when a new pending icon is displayed. Is done. In the present embodiment, as effects for increasing or decreasing the number of reserved icons, a true icon effect for increasing / decreasing the value of the undisplayed icon number counter 223hc, a value for the displayed icon number counter 223hc, and a value for displaying / displaying the value of the undisplayed icon number counter 223hb. A pseudo-effect (an effect having the same value) that increases / decreases only the apparent number of reserved icons without increasing / decreasing the value of the completed icon counter 223hc is configured to be executable.

  The displayed icon number counter 223hc is a counter for counting the number of currently-held icons, and is added when a new icon is displayed, and is subtracted when the number of held icons decreases. It is. When displaying a new reserved icon, the total number of reserved icons to be displayed is determined with reference to the value of the undisplayed icon number counter 223hb and the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc, and the determined total number is displayed. The number of displayed icons is determined based on the difference from the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc.

  The continuous effect flag 223hd is a flag for indicating that the continuous effect is being executed, and is set to ON while the continuous effect is being executed. While the continuous effect flag 223hd is set to ON, the effect of increasing or decreasing the number of reserved icons in the icon effect is not executed.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device of the ninth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 224 to FIG. 227, a description will be given of the control processing executed by the audio lamp control device out of the control contents of the ninth embodiment. The control contents of the audio lamp control device according to the ninth embodiment include a winning command process 9 (see S4281 in FIG. 224) instead of the winning command process (see S4211 in FIG. 183) in the seventh embodiment. The jackpot end process 9 (see S4954 in FIG. 225) instead of the jackpot end process, and the ready state setting process 9 (see S4691 in FIG. 226) instead of the ready state setting process (see S4641 in FIG. 185) are set during the RUSH. RUSH setting process 9 (see S8450 in FIG. 227) is performed instead of the process (see S8410 in FIG. 192), and the rest is the same. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

  First, the contents of the winning command processing 9 (see S4281 in FIG. 224) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 224 is a flowchart showing the content of the winning command processing 9 (S4281). In the winning command processing 9 (S4281), processing for updating information related to the icon effect performed during the RUSH game and determining the number of display of the hold icons 873 (see FIG. 217) displayed in the icon effect is executed. Is done.

  When the winning command processing 9 (S4281) is executed, first, the information of the received winning command is set in the corresponding winning information storage area 223b (S4481), and it is determined whether the RUSH flag 223fg is set to ON. If (S4482) is set to ON (S4482: Yes), the winning information (big hit information, small hit information) included in the received winning command is extracted (S4484). That is, it is determined whether or not the winning command received this time is a winning command to be won.

  If it is determined in the processing of S4484 that there is hit information (S4484: Yes), the number of times of opening the second attacker 1650 is extracted based on the hit type (big hit type, small hit type) indicated by the hit information (S4485), The value corresponding to the extracted number is stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb (S4486). Then, the number of displayed icons is selected with reference to the icon display number selection table 222ha based on the special figure 2 number of reserved balls and the information stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb (S4487). Thereafter, the difference between the selected icon display number and the displayed icon number counter 223hc is added to the value of the undisplayed icon number counter 223hb (S4488), and other processing is executed (S4412), and this processing ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when a winning command is received as a winning command, control for changing the number of displayed suspended icons is not executed, only updating information used for icon effects. This makes it possible to make the timing at which the display number of the hold icon changes and the timing at which the winning winning command is received different from each other, making it difficult for the player to understand when and how the display number of the hold icon changes. be able to. In the present embodiment, when a winning command is received as a winning command, the information used for the icon effect is only updated, and the control for changing the display number of the pending icon is not executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Control for changing the display number of the holding icon may be executed, or control for changing the display number of the holding icon when a predetermined lottery is executed and the winning is performed. It may be configured to execute.

  If it is determined in the processing of S4484 that there is no hit information (S4484: No), it is next determined whether or not the continuous effect flag 223hd is set to ON (S4489), and the flag is not set to ON. Is determined (S4489: No), it is determined whether the value of the undisplayed icon number counter 223hb is larger than 0 (S4490). If it is determined that it is larger than 0 (S4490: Yes), the effect mode of the pseudo effect for increasing or decreasing the number of icons is set (S4491), the execution timing of the pseudo effect is set (S4492), and the pseudo effect effect is set. Then, the values of various counters (undisplayed icon number counter 223hb, displayed icon number counter 223hc) are updated (S4493), a display command for indicating the set effect mode is set (S4494), and the process proceeds to S4412. I do.

  In the process of S4489, when it is determined that the continuous rendering flag 223hd is set to ON (S4489: Yes), that is, when the continuous rendering is currently being performed, or when the value of the undisplayed icon number counter 223hb is 0 In the case (S4404: No), that is, when it is in a state where the display number of the hold icon cannot be increased, the process proceeds to the process of S4412 without setting the pseudo effect.

  Next, the content of the big hit end processing 9 (S4954) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 225 is a flowchart showing the content of the big hit end process 9 (S4954). This jackpot end processing 9 (S4954) is based on winning information already acquired when the RUSH game can be executed after the jackpot has ended, that is, when the latent state is set or when the probable change state is set. In this regard, the processing content is largely different from the jackpot ending processing described above in that the processing for setting the information regarding the icon effect is executed.

  When the jackpot end process 9 (S4954) is executed, first, it is determined whether the RUSH flag 223fg is set to ON (S5051), and if it is determined that the RUSH flag 223fg is not set to ON (S5051: No), Next, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is a probability change jackpot (S5052). If it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot (S5052: Yes), that is, if the jackpot has been set at a timing other than during the RUSH game, all jackpots stored in the winning information storage area 223b are set. The winning information is read (S5053), the winning information (big hit information, small hit information) included in the winning information is extracted (S5054), and the number of times of opening the second attacker 1650 is calculated based on the extracted winning information (S5054). S5055). Then, the calculated total number of second attackers (total release number) is stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb (S5056).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is a latent jackpot (S5057). If the jackpot is a latent jackpot (S5057: Yes), a display for indicating a corresponding latent mode (preparation mode, RUSH mode) is made. Command (S5058), the number of displayed icons is set to 4 (S5059), the value of the displayed icon counter is set to 4 (S5060), and the information stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb is set. The information corresponding to the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc is deleted (S5061), a display command indicating the end of the big hit is set (S5062), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5057 that the hit is not a latent big hit (S5057: No), a display command for indicating the positive change mode is set (S5063), and the process proceeds to S5062. .

  If it is determined in the process of S5051 that the RUSH flag 223fg is set to ON, that is, if the jackpot has been won during the RUSH game (S5051: Yes), it is determined whether the current jackpot is a normal jackpot. (S5064), if it is a normal jackpot (S5064: Yes), since the RUSH game is over, various flags and counters related to the RUSH game are reset (set to the initial state) (S5065), and the current jackpot is reached. The corresponding RUSH display command is set (S5066), and the flow shifts to the process of S5062. In this case, in the processing of S5066, a display command indicating the end of the RUSH game is set. If it is determined in the process of S5065 that it is not a normal jackpot (S5064: No), the process of S5065 is skipped and the process of S5066 is executed. In this case, a display command indicating that the RUSH game will be continued is set.

  Next, the contents of the preparation state setting process 9 (S4691) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 226 is a flowchart showing the contents of the preparation state setting process 9 (S4691). In the preparation state setting processing 9 (S4691), a hold icon is displayed at the timing of shifting from the probable state to the latent state, in contrast to the preparation state setting processing of the seventh embodiment (see S4641 in FIG. 226). The processing is different in that a processing for adding the same is added, and the other processing is the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and the detailed description is omitted.

  When the preparation state setting processing 9 (S4691) is executed, first, the same processing as S8001 to S8004 as the preparation state setting processing (see S4641 in FIG. 226) is executed, and then, the corresponding latent mode (RUSH mode) Is set (S8051), the number of displayed icons is set to 4 (S8052), the value of the displayed icon counter is set to 4 (S8053), and stored in the non-display information storage area 223hb. The information corresponding to the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc is deleted from the displayed information (S8054), and the process ends.

  That is, the same processing as the processing executed at the end of the big hit when the latent state is set after the big hit game is executed is executed. This makes it possible to unify the initial display of the icon effect (the state in which four reserved icons are displayed regardless of the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2) regardless of the trigger when the latent state is set. Therefore, the control process for changing the effect mode of the icon effect according to the transition trigger to the latent state can be unified, so that the load of the control process can be reduced.

  Next, the contents of the RUSH setting process 9 (S8450) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 227 is a flowchart showing the contents of the RUSH setting process 9 (S8450). In the RUSH setting process 9 (S8450), a process for setting an effect mode of an icon effect to be executed according to the second special symbol change executed during the RUSH game is executed.

  When the RUSH setting process 9 (S8450) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc is 4 (S8651), and if it is 4, (S8651: Yes), and the continuous effect selection is performed. The continuous effect is selected with reference to the table 222hb (S8652), and it is determined whether the continuous effect is to be executed (S4453). If it is determined that the continuous effect is to be executed (S4453: Yes), a display command for indicating the effect mode of the selected continuous effect is set (S4454), and the process ends. In the process of S4454, the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc and the value of the undisplayed icon number counter 223hb are also updated in accordance with the number of reserved icons used (consumed) in the selected continuous effect. If it is determined in the processing of S4453 that the continuous effect is not to be executed (S8653: No), this processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8651 that the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc is not 4 (S8651: No), then it is determined whether the continuous effect flag 223hd is set to ON (S8655). ), If it is determined that it is not set to ON (S8655: No), it is determined whether the value of the undisplayed icon number counter 223hb is larger than 0 (S8656). When it is determined that it is larger than 0 (S8656: Yes), the effect mode of the pseudo effect for increasing or decreasing the number of icons is set (S8657), the execution timing of the pseudo effect is set (S8658), and the pseudo effect mode is adjusted. Then, the values of the various counters (undisplayed icon number counter 223hb, displayed icon number counter 223hc) are updated (S8659), a display command for indicating the set effect mode is set (S8660), and the process ends. .

  In the process of S8655, when it is determined that the continuous production flag 223hd is set to ON (S8655: Yes), that is, when the continuous production is currently being performed, or when the value of the undisplayed icon number counter 223hb is 0. In this case, that is, when it is not possible to increase the display number of the hold icons, the process ends without setting the pseudo effect.

<Regarding Modification of Ninth Embodiment>
Next, a modification of the ninth embodiment will be described. In the icon effect performed in the above-described ninth embodiment, a continuous effect can be performed based on the pre-read result. And the production mode of the continuous production was determined when the continuous production was set. Specifically, as the effect of the continuous effect, the type of effect, such as an effect that is executed so that the reserved icon remains, or an effect that is executed to exhaust all the reserved icons, is determined in advance. The effect according to the type was configured to be executed. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the processing load during the continuous production without any difference between the production result of the continuous production and the actual game result. There was a problem that it was not possible to give diversity to the children.

  On the other hand, in the present modification, at the start of the jackpot game to be the target of the continuous production, it is configured to vary the production mode of the continuous production based on the winning jackpot type and the number of remaining reserved icons. I have. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set the production mode of the continuous production mode, for example, by dividing the production mode into the first half period until the jackpot game is started and the second half period after the jackpot game is started. Therefore, it is possible to easily diversify the effect patterns of the continuous effect.

  Further, in this modification, since the process of increasing the number of display of the hold icons after the jackpot game is started is configured to be executable, an effect mode in which all the hold icons are consumed in the first half period of the continuous effect is set. Even if the winning jackpot type is a latent jackpot, the display number of the hold icon can be increased during the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to relax the prohibition condition when determining the effect mode in the first half period of the effect pattern of the continuous effect, and it is possible to easily diversify the effect pattern.

  Further, in the present modification, the continuous effect is configured to progress in accordance with the opening operation of the second attacker 1650 executed during the big hit game. Thereby, it is possible to make the player think that the small hit game is being executed even though the second attacker 1650 is opened in the big hit game.

<Regarding Control Process of Voice Lamp Control Device in Modification of Ninth Embodiment>
Here, with reference to FIG. 228, a control process of the sound lamp control device 113 in the present modification will be described. The present modified example is different from the above-described ninth embodiment in that a jackpot-related process 9 (S4802) executed at the start timing of the jackpot game is executed, and is otherwise the same. FIG. 228 is a flowchart showing the content of the jackpot-related process 9 (S4802).

  When the jackpot-related process 9 (S4802) is executed, it is determined whether a jackpot start command has been received (S4901), and if it has been determined (S4901: Yes), a jackpot start command for display is set (S4902). Then, it is determined whether the RUSH flag 223fg is set to ON (S4951). If it is determined that the RUSH flag 223fg is set to ON (S4951: Yes), then the continuous effect flag 223hd is set to ON. It is determined whether it has been set (S4952). That is, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is a jackpot to be subjected to a continuous effect.

  In the process of S4952, when it is determined that the continuous production flag 223hd is set to ON (S4952: Yes), the continuous production flag 223hd is set to OFF (S4953), and the current big hit is a latent big hit ( It is determined whether or not it is a jackpot in which the latent state is set after the jackpot game (S4954), and if it is determined that the jackpot is a latent jackpot (S4954: Yes), the number of open second attackers 1650 during the jackpot is determined. The information in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb and the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc are updated correspondingly, that is, the hold icons are displayed in correspondence with the release of the second attacker 1650 executed in the big hit game executed this time. Each value is updated to digest the number (S4955).

  Thereafter, a display command corresponding to the updated content is set (S4956), and after the update, it is determined whether the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc is 0 (S4957), and when it is determined that the value is 0, that is, In the case where the continuous effect is advanced in accordance with the opening of the second attacker 1650, even though the RUSH continues at the latent hit, if the display number of the hold icon becomes 0 (S4957), the continuous effect is executed. Thereafter, an additional effect (mode) for displaying one hold icon is set (S4958), and the process ends. As an additional effect mode set here, there is an effect in which carrots fall from the sky during a jackpot game. In addition, although detailed description is omitted, a jackpot game executed during the RUSH is being performed and the hold icon is not displayed, that is, a RUSH game may be ended by the current jackpot game. Is configured to execute a pseudo additional effect as to whether or not the above additional effect is executed. This pseudo additional production is formed of a first production that stimulates that something falls from the sky, similarly to the additional production, and a second production that other than ginseng falls from the sky. This allows the player to play a game while keeping expectations until the end.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4954 that the current big hit is not a latent big hit (S4954: No), that is, if the RUSH game ends with the current big hit, all the displayed holding icons are consumed. The effect mode is determined (S4959), the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc is cleared (S4960), and the process ends. If it is determined in the process of S4951 that the jackpot start command has not been received (S4951: No), the same processes of S4913 to S4916 as the above-described jackpot-related process (see S4802 in FIG. 68) are executed. This processing ends.

  Note that the technical concept used in this modification, that is, the technical concept of performing an effect of changing the display number of the hold icon at the timing when the jackpot game is started, is used for purposes other than executing in a continuous effect. Is also good.

  In this modification, since the process of increasing the display number of the hold icons after the jackpot game is started is configured to be executable, it is assumed that an effect mode in which all the hold icons are consumed in the first half period of the continuous effect is set. Also, when the jackpot type that has been won is the latent jackpot, the number of displayed hold icons can be increased during the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to relax the prohibition condition when determining the effect mode in the first half period of the effect pattern of the continuous effect, and it is possible to easily diversify the effect pattern.

  Further, in the present modification, the continuous effect is configured to progress in accordance with the opening operation of the second attacker 1650 executed during the big hit game. Thereby, it is possible to make the player think that the small hit game is being executed even though the second attacker 1650 is opened in the big hit game.

  As described above, in the ninth embodiment described above, in accordance with the result of the pre-reading process (prior discrimination process) performed on the winning information of the special symbol stored and stored, the special map acquired in accordance with the result is obtained. It is configured to execute a look-ahead effect (icon effect) in which the number of specific symbols (dedicated icons displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81) is varied regardless of the number of reserved balls. Thus, even if the number of acquired special figure reserved balls is small, it is possible to execute the same prefetching effect as in the case where the acquired number of special figure reserved balls is the upper limit, according to the prefetch result. It becomes possible. Therefore, it is possible to provide a look-ahead effect with a high effect even for a player who cannot acquire many special figure reserved balls, thereby suppressing a decrease in the player's willingness to play. Can be.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of specific symbols displayed in the above-described icon effect is set to the number of special figure reserved balls that can be retained (the storage of the second special symbol mainly executed during the latent state). ) Is not displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 (it is difficult for the player to discriminate). ). With this configuration, the specific symbol displayed to the player in the icon effect is as if the number of special figure reserved balls (the number of stored second special symbols that are mainly executed during the latent state) is the same. It can make you think it is a reserved symbol to show. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the willingness to play of a player who cannot acquire many special figure reserved balls.

  In addition, in this embodiment, when the pre-reading result is a specific result (for example, a jackpot in which a latent state is set), a special figure holding ball in which the number of the specific symbols displayed in the icon effect can be held and stored. It is configured to be larger than the upper limit value (4) of the number (the number of reserved special symbols to be mainly executed during the latent state). With this configuration, it is possible to provide a surprising effect to a player who has an illusion that the specific symbol displayed to the player in the icon effect is a reserved symbol.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as a result of the pre-reading process (preliminary determination process) performed on the winning information of the special symbol stored and stored, the number of times of opening of the attacker that is opened in the small hit game is determined. The number of specific symbols to be displayed is determined based on the result of the determination. The number of times the attacker is released in one small hit game is made different depending on the type of the small hit that has been won. Furthermore, as a part of the big hit game executed when the big hit is won, the same attacker releasing operation as that of the small hit game is executed.

  With this configuration, it is possible to make the player predict the number of small hit games to be executed in the future based on the number of specific symbols displayed as the icon effect. Further, in the present embodiment, the player is notified that the period in which the specific symbol is displayed is a period in which the latent state (RUSH game) does not end. That is, when at least one specific symbol remains at the end of the big hit game, the fact that the latent state is set after the end of the big hit game is notified in advance. Therefore, each time the number of specific symbols is changed, the player pays attention to the icon effect, so that the effect can be enhanced.

  In the ninth embodiment described above, the number of icons that can be displayed (the number of reserved icons) in the winning command processing 9 (S4281 in FIG. 224) executed when the winning information command indicating the winning information of the special symbol is received. ) Is determined and the effect of increasing / decreasing the number of pending icons displayed at various timings is executed. However, a process of determining the number of icons that can be displayed (the number of pending icons) (display) The number-of-possible-icons determination process) is not executed every time the winning command process 9 (S4281 in FIG. 224) is executed when the winning information command indicating the winning information of the special symbol is received. When the process 9 (S4281 in FIG. 224) is executed, it may be configured to be executed only when the predetermined condition is satisfied. More specifically, the number of additional receptions of the prize information command (prize command) becomes a predetermined period (for example, a period indicating an elapsed time of 30 seconds) from the execution of the previous displayable icon number determination process. May be configured to execute the process of determining the number of displayable icons when the period up to) has elapsed. This makes it possible to make the timing at which the winning information command (winning command) is actually received different from the timing at which the number of displayable icons is determined based on the information included in the command. It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether the number of reserved icons has been determined for (reserved figure storage). In this way, the received winning information command includes the effect of changing the timing of determining the number of icons that can be displayed, thereby increasing or decreasing the number of reserved icons displayed within the range of the number of icons that can be displayed. Since it can be easily separated from the winning information, it is possible to easily provide a surprising effect to the player.

  Further, in addition to the winning command processing 9 (S4281 in FIG. 224), for example, when a predetermined operation is performed on the operation means (frame button 22) that can be operated by the player, the displayable icon number determination processing is executed. May be configured. In this case, an operation effect for causing the player to operate the operation means with predetermined contents on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 may be executed. This makes it easy for a player who has operated the operating means correctly for the operation effect to be executed to execute the icon effect based on the winning information included in the received winning information command. Can be motivated to play the game.

  In addition, it detects that a ball has entered the general winning opening 63 or the through gate 67 provided on the game board 13 and displays the result based on the detection result (at a predetermined probability when the ball enters). You may comprise so that the possible icon number determination process may be performed. With this configuration, the number of reserve icons that can be displayed is determined by a game that is not related to the special symbol lottery. Therefore, the timing at which a winning information command (winning command) is actually received for the player is determined. Since the timing at which the number of displayable icons is determined based on the information included in the command can be made different, it is possible to determine for which winning information (special figure reservation storage) the number of reserved icons has been determined. It can be difficult.

  In the present embodiment, as effects for increasing or decreasing the number of reserved icons, a true icon effect for increasing / decreasing the value of the undisplayed icon number counter 223hc, a value for the displayed icon number counter 223hc, and a value for displaying / displaying the value of the undisplayed icon number counter 223hb. Pseudo-effects (effects that finally have the same value) in which only the number of appearance reserved icons is increased / decreased without increasing / decreasing the value of the completed icon counter 223hc. The mode is also configured to be set by the control processing executed by the sound lamp control device 113. However, the present invention is not limited to this. If it is determined that the effect is to be performed, the range of the number of pending icons to be increased or decreased in the pseudo effect and a display frame indicating that the pseudo effect is to be executed. When a display command indicating that a pseudo effect is to be executed is received by the display control device 114, an effect based on information included in the received display command is set. You may be comprised so that an aspect may be determined.

  With this configuration, only the icon effect (true icon effect) set based on the winning information of the special symbol needs to be controlled by the sound lamp control device 113, so that the sound lamp control device 113 The processing load of the control process can be reduced. In addition, by executing a pseudo effect in which only the apparent number of reserved icons is increased / decreased (variable) without increasing / decreasing the value of the undisplayed icon number counter 223hb and the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc, the icon effect is held. The variable pattern of the number of icons can be diversified. In addition, since the pseudo effect is executed such that the final increment and decrement of the pending icon match, when setting the effect mode of the true icon effect, care is taken about the effect status of the pseudo effect. There is no need, and the processing load of the control processing of the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

<Tenth embodiment>
Next, a tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The tenth embodiment differs from the seventh embodiment in that the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 is partially changed, and that the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 are partially configured. Changes, a part of the configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113, a control process executed by the main control device 110, and a control executed by the sound lamp control device 113 The difference is that part of the processing has been changed. In addition, due to the above-described differences, some of the effect contents executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 are also different. Note that the same components as those of the above-described seventh embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Here, a major difference between the tenth embodiment and the above-described seventh embodiment will be briefly described. In the tenth embodiment, the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol are configured not to be performed in parallel (in parallel), and the lottery of the second special symbol is performed. This is configured to be executed in preference to the lottery of the first special symbol. Then, the lottery in which the second special symbol lottery is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery is executed. Further, it is configured such that the ease of executing the lottery of the second special symbol is changed according to the set game state. Specifically, when the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set (time saving state, probable change state), the case where the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set (normal state) is set. In order to make it easier to acquire the lottery right for the second special symbol, the entrance with the electric accessory 640a that is opened in the hit game (normal game per game) executed at the time of winning the normal symbol. When a ball enters the (second entrance 640), a lottery right for the second special symbol can be acquired. In other words, when playing a game in the normal state, which is the initial game state, the first special symbol lottery is configured to be more easily executed than the second special symbol lottery, and the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery. At the same time, the high probability state of the ordinary symbol can be set, and when the ordinary symbol high probability state is set, the second special symbol lottery which is more advantageous than the first special symbol lottery is executed. Is configured. With such a configuration, the degree of advantage to the player can be greatly changed according to the set game state, and it is expected that a game state with a high degree of advantage to the player is set. It is possible to make the player play the game while being eager.

  Here, for example, when the normal state which is the most unfavorable game state among the plurality of game states is set, the lottery of the second special symbol which is a lottery advantageous to the player is not executed at all. With such a configuration, the player's willingness to play in the normal state, that is, the player's willingness to set a more advantageous game state (time saving state, probable change state) is reduced, and Had the problem of getting tired early. On the other hand, in the tenth embodiment, when a specific condition is satisfied during a period in which the normal state is set, a predetermined number (up to five) of lottery rights for the second special symbol can be obtained. are doing. Specifically, in the case where a win is made in a normal symbol lottery executed in a state where the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, the electric bonus game 640 is opened for 5 seconds. Make up. With this configuration, it is possible to temporarily provide a period in which the second special symbol lottery can be easily performed even in the normal state which is a disadvantageous gaming state to the player. For a player playing a game, a game aimed at winning a special symbol lottery win and a game aiming to win a regular symbol lottery can be executed, so that the player gets tired of the game early. Can be suppressed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the effect form of the special figure 2 variable effect executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in correspondence with the second special symbol lottery executed during the normal state is stored. It is configured to be variable based on the number of lottery rights of the second special symbol, that is, the number of special figure 2 reservations. Specifically, as an effect mode of the special figure 2 fluctuation effect executed when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit, a pseudo-off-variation fluctuation effect indicating that the lottery result is off during the first half period of the fluctuation effect. In the second half period, the third symbol stopped (temporarily stopped) in the pseudo off-state fluctuation effect is restarted to execute a pseudo-hit fluctuation effect indicating that the lottery result is a big hit, The number of times the third symbol is temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) in the pseudo-hit variation effect is configured to be variable in accordance with the number of special figure 2 reservations. With this configuration, the variable effect in which the third symbol is pseudo-stopped a plurality of times before the third symbol is stopped and displayed (fixed display) in a combination indicating that the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit. Can be executed. In other words, it can be assumed that the jackpot has been won through a plurality of second special symbol lotteries.

  With this, even if the jackpot is won in the special figure 2 reservation used for the second special symbol lottery executed first among the plurality of special figure 2 reservations acquired during the regular figure game, the player On the other hand, since a plurality of special figure 2 reservations were acquired during the per-figure game, it can be assumed that the big hit was won. Can be done.

  When the special figure 2 reservation number is 0 in the case of winning the big hit in the second special symbol lottery, when the first special symbol lottery is executed as the above-mentioned pseudo-hit variation effect, the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. A variable effect simulating a variable effect displayed on the display surface (an effect mode of the special figure 1 variable effect performed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in response to the first special symbol lottery) is executed. It is composed. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the repetition of the special figure 2 fluctuation effect in a situation where the special figure 2 reservation is not acquired, and therefore, the pseudo fluctuation effect is provided to the player. It is possible to make it difficult to identify that the operation is being performed. In addition, after a pseudo variable effect imitating the special figure 1 variable effect is executed, the third symbol is stopped (fixed display) in a combination indicating that the jackpot has been won in the second special symbol lottery, so that the game is performed. It is possible to execute a surprising fluctuating effect on the user.

<About the game board configuration of the pachinko machine in the tenth embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the game board 13 used in the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 229 is a front view schematically showing the configuration of the game board 13 in the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 229, the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment is different from the configuration of the gaming board 13 in the above-described pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment (see FIG. 157) on the right side of the variable display unit 80. The configuration is different in that the configuration of the formed right region and the configuration of the lower region formed below the variable display unit 80 are different, and the other configurations are the same. The same components are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment executes a game in which a ball flows down to a left area formed on the left side of the variable display unit 80 (left-handed game), but a game in which a ball flows down to the right area. The game board 13 is configured so that, even when (right-handed game) is executed, there is no difference (less likely) in the game value obtained by the player. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 229, the game board 13 is formed symmetrically with respect to a vertical line at the center of the game board 13, and a ball enters the lower area of the variable display unit 80. The first entrance 64 that can be a chance for a lottery of the first special symbol, and the second entrance that is provided at a position below the first entrance 64 and can be a lottery for the second special symbol when the ball enters. 2 entrance 640, an electric accessory 640a attached to the 2nd entrance 640, and opened in a per-game winning game executed when a normal symbol lottery is won, and a second entry thereof. A V winning device 2650 which is provided below the ball opening 640 and is opened in a jackpot game executed when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery is provided.

  The ball fired by the left-handed game flows down the left region, passes through the through gate 67 provided in the left region at a rate of 1/2, and the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 does not pass through the through gate 67. The dropped ball also flows down toward the first ball entry port 64 provided in the lower region by the nail implanted in the game board 13. Here, the ball that has flowed downward from between the nails enters the two general entrances 63. In the present embodiment, about 1/50 of the sphere flowing down the left area is configured to enter one of the two general entrances 63, and the sphere enters the general entrance 63. When a ball is entered, ten prize balls (privileges) are provided.

  The first ball entrance 64 is configured so that one ball can enter at a ratio of one to fifteen balls, similarly to the first embodiment described above. The ball is configured to be paid out as a prize ball. In the state in which the electric accessory 640 is closed (the state shown in white in FIG. 229), the second entrance 640 has almost no ball in it, and the electric accessory 640 is open ( In the state shown in black in FIG. 229), the ball is shot in a left-handed game, and is configured so that one out of every two balls that flow down the left region enters the ball. When a ball is entered, one ball is paid out as a prize ball. Also, the V winning device 2650 is configured such that in the state where the jackpot game is not executed, almost no balls enter the ball, and during the jackpot game, two balls out of three balls enter the ball. When a ball enters, 15 balls are paid out as prize balls.

  Here, the V winning device 2650 will be described. The V prize device 2650 is a variable ball entry means that is opened in a jackpot game executed when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery, and a ball that has won the V prize device 2650 during the jackpot game is specified. By passing through the gate, a special symbol high probability state can be set after the big hit game is over. In addition, according to the type of the winning jackpot, the ball winning the V-prize device 2650 can execute a jackpot game in which the ball easily flows down the specific gate and a jackpot game in which the ball hardly flows down. In the jackpot game in which the ball winning the V-prize device 2650 easily flows down the specific gate, that is, a jackpot (game) in which the ball can easily flow down to the specific gate if a normal game is performed during the jackpot game ) Is a jackpot game (game), in which a ball that has won the V prize device 2650 is unlikely to flow down a specific gate, ie, a ball flows down to a specific gate even if a normal game is played during the jackpot game. The jackpot (game) in which it is difficult is described as a normal jackpot (game).

  As described above, even if the jackpot game is executed, even if the ball cannot flow down to the specific gate during the jackpot game, the special symbol high probability state (the jackpot state) after the jackpot game ends. ) Is never set. That is, in the present embodiment, at the timing when the big hit game is executed, the game state set after the big hit game ends is not determined. Although a detailed description will be given later, in the present embodiment, in the round game executed in the fifth round of the jackpot game, a round game (V round game) in which the ball is most likely to flow down to the specific gate is executed. It is composed. Therefore, the game state set after the end of the big hit game cannot be determined until the V round game ends. In this way, by configuring so that the gaming state set after the end of the jackpot game is determined based on the game result during the jackpot game, the player can obtain various benefits (high prize balls, special symbol high probability state) in the jackpot game. Can be played, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  On the other hand, in the case of using the above-described configuration, the production mode of the notification effect (for example, the production mode of the jackpot ending period) for notifying the player of the gaming state set after the end of the jackpot game (for example, the jackpot) At the start of the game) it is not possible to set, the control process for the pitching out and the control process for the display must be performed densely. There is a problem that the control process becomes complicated.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the probability change jackpot game is executed, an effect mode indicating that the probability change state is set in advance (at the start of the jackpot game) as the notification mode after the end of the jackpot game is set. Immediately before the notification effect is executed (for example, at the start of the jackpot ending period), it is determined whether or not to switch the effect mode of the notification effect based on the result of the ball flowing down to the specific gate, When the ball is flowing down the specific gate, the notification effect of the preset effect mode is executed, and only when the ball is not flowing down the specific gate, the effect mode of the notification effect is switched. Make up.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the length of the jackpot ending period is made different between the probability variable jackpot and the normal jackpot, so that the ending period longer than the normal jackpot is set for the probability variable jackpot that is advantageous to the player. Make up. Thereby, it is possible to inform the player that the probability change state is set after the big hit game is completed, before the probability change state is actually set. On the other hand, if the probable change state is not set after the end of the jackpot game, even if the fact is notified for a long period of time, the ending period is shortened because it only gives the player discomfort.

  As described above, when the length of the jackpot ending period is different between the probability jackpot and the normal jackpot, if the ball cannot flow down to the specific gate during the probability jackpot game, the jackpot ending By simply performing the process of switching the production mode of the period to the production mode executed during the ending period of the normal hit game, the length of the ending period is different, so that an uncomfortable notification production is performed during the ending period. There was a problem. In addition, if a special effect mode that is set only when the ball cannot flow down to the specific gate in the probability change jackpot game is facilitated in advance, image data (effect data) for the effect mode is displayed in advance. It has to be stored in the character ROM 234 of the control device 114, and there is a problem that the storage capacity increases.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the jackpot ending period is divided into a first half period and a second half period, and the length of the second half period is configured to be a common length regardless of the jackpot type. When the ball could not flow down to the specific gate, only the staging mode corresponding to the latter half of the jackpot ending period is switched to the staging mode set for the latter half of the ending period of the normal hit game. Make up. As a result, a notification effect without providing a special effect mode used only when the ball cannot flow down to the specific gate during the probability change jackpot game and without giving a sense of incongruity to the player is executed. can do.

  In the present embodiment, the jackpot ending period is divided into the first half period and the second half period, and the length of the second half period is set to a common length regardless of the jackpot type. It is configured to switch and set the production mode of the notification production that is executed when it is not possible to flow down to the specific gate, but without being limited to this, for example, during the last round period of the jackpot game By executing the notification effect, the notification effect that is performed for a longer period than the actual jackpot ending period may be configured to be executable, or the predetermined period of time from when the jackpot ending period is set, to the end of the jackpot game By continuing to perform the round production performed during the round period, and then performing the notification production, the actual jackpot ending period It may be configured to perform a notification effect of remote short period of time.

  Since the V winning device 2650 has the same contents as the V winning device 2650 (see FIGS. 194 to 196) of the above-described eighth embodiment, the same reference numerals are given and the detailed description is omitted. . Also, the configuration of the right area of the variable display unit 80 and the ball flowing down the right area are sent to the through gate 67, the general entrance 63, the first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, and the V winning device 2650. Since the ratio of entering the ball is the same as the above-described left region, detailed description thereof will be omitted. As described above, in the present embodiment, regardless of the set game state, and regardless of whether the jackpot game is being executed, even if the player executes the right-handed game, the left-handed game Is executed, the same privilege is provided. Therefore, the player can play a game by any game method according to his / her mood.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 229, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be symmetrical. However, the present invention is not limited to this. What is necessary is just to comprise so that there may not be a big difference between the case where the left-handed game is played and the case where the right-handed game is played. The number of the entrances 63 is smaller than the number of entrances 63, and the ratio of the ball entering the first entrance 64 is configured to be higher in the left-handed game than in the right-handed game. It is more difficult to obtain the prize ball than the right-handed game, but it is easier to execute the first special symbol lottery. May be configured. In the case of such a configuration, during the normal state, that is, during the execution of the game in which the ball is thrown into the first entrance 64, the player can play the game by any game method. In a game in which a ball enters the second entrance 640 (a game in a time-saving state or a probable change state), a right-handed game is more advantageous to a player than a left-handed game. .

<About Display Contents in Tenth Embodiment>
Next, display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 230A and 230B are schematic diagrams schematically showing display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment. The display content of the third symbol display device 81 in the tenth control example is changed and displayed in synchronization with the third symbol (the special symbol) with respect to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 in the first control example described above. The scroll direction of the decorative pattern is changed from vertical to horizontal (from right to left), and the number of activated lines for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery is one (see FIG. 11A). ) To five (see FIG. 230 (a)) and the point that the notification mode of the information related to the game is changed. Some elements are the same (similar) as those in the first control example, but have different reference numerals for convenience of explanation. Otherwise, they are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The third symbol display device 81 is configured by a 15-inch size liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 described later, so that, for example, three symbol columns of upper, middle, and lower ( Z1 to Z3) are displayed (see FIG. 230 (a)). The third symbol (decorative symbol that changes in response to the variable display of the first special symbol (special figure 1) or the second special symbol (special figure 2)) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is: It is composed of ten types of main symbols to which identification information imitating the numbers "1" to "9" are attached. In the present embodiment, the number of pieces of identification information imitating a specific number (for example, the identification information imitating the number “4”) is configured to be greater than the number of pieces of identification information imitating other numbers. are doing. Thereby, when the identification information imitating a specific number is in the reach state, the jackpot symbol passing on the activated line (in which the specific number is imitated) is more than when the identification information is in the reach state with other identification information. Since the number of (identification information) can be increased, it is possible to visually predict that the player has a high expectation of the jackpot winning.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, the main symbol is formed by using different types of characters (such as fish) for each piece of identification information that imitates a number. In this way, by using a character corresponding to each piece of identification information, it is possible to visually inform the player of the result of the lottery of the special symbol, so that an easy-to-understand game can be performed. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a lottery result by the main control device 110 described later is a big hit, the same main symbols are aligned (for example, “777”), and the variable display is performed. Is configured to generate a jackpot after the game is over. In other words, the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a symbol for indicating the result of the lottery of the special symbol by the main control device 110.

  In the main display area Dm, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3, which are upper, middle, and lower, respectively, are displayed. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order, and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are scrolled in the left-right direction with a periodicity to perform variable display.

  Specifically, the upper symbol row Z1 is configured such that a symbol row is formed such that numbers are ascending from right to left, and is scrolled and displayed from right to left. The row of symbols Z2 and the row of lower symbols Z3 are formed such that the symbols are arranged in ascending order from left to right, and are scrolled from right to left and displayed in a variably manner. Further, in each symbol row, a sub symbol (blank symbol) which does not show the result of the lottery of the special symbol is formed between the main symbols. In FIG. 230 (b), a blank symbol (sub symbol) is displayed using a symbol imitating a triangle.

  As shown in FIG. 230 (a), the main display area Dm has three effective lines L1 to L3 formed in the vertical direction and two effective lines L4 and L5 formed in the oblique direction. If the third symbol is stopped in a combination of big hit symbols (in the present control example, the same combination of main symbols) in a state where the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed, A jackpot video is displayed as a jackpot.

  As shown in FIG. 230 (a), in the present control example, since each effective line (L1 to L5) is formed so as to include the symbol display position of each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the third symbol display device is used. Until all the symbol rows V1 to V3 displayed in the 81 main display area Dm are stopped and displayed, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the lottery result of the corresponding special symbol. Therefore, until the last symbol row (in this control example, the middle symbol row V2) is stopped and displayed, the user can be interested in the variable display of the third symbol executed in the main display area Dm.

  In addition, the mode of the variable display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary. The number of symbol columns, the direction of the variable display of the symbol in the symbol column, each symbol The number of symbols in the columns can be changed as appropriate. The symbols variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are not limited to those described above. For example, a symbol that combines an image of a figure or a character with a numeral may be configured as the third symbol. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the area in which the third symbol is variably displayed is variable. For example, when a specific effect is performed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the variable display area of the third symbol is displayed. Or by moving the variable display area to a position (for example, a corner of the display screen) where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize, so that it is difficult for the player to determine whether the third symbol is fluctuating. You may make it. Further, during the period in which the special symbol is changing, the change of the third symbol may be temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) and may be changed again.

  Further, in the present control example, the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the change of the first special symbol and the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the change of the second special symbol are the same (to the extent that the player is difficult to identify). ), But the display style and the display area of the third symbol may be changed so as to correspond to the type of the special symbol that is changing.

  Next, the contents actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 230 (b), a small display area Dm1 is formed at the upper left of the main display area Dm in front view, and a small display area Dm2 is formed at the upper right of front view. The small display area Dm1 is an area in which identification information (fourth symbol) for indicating a special symbol lottery status (whether or not a lottery is in progress (change) and a lottery result) is displayed. The fourth symbol (special figure 1 fourth symbol) for indicating the lottery status of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) or the fourth symbol (showing the lottery status of the second special symbol (special symbol 2)) (Special figure 2 fourth symbol) is displayed in the small display area Dm1.

  The small display area Dm2 is an area in which identification information (fourth symbol) for indicating the lottery status of the ordinary symbol (whether or not the lottery is being performed (changing) and the lottery result) is displayed. A fourth symbol (fourth symbol) for indicating the lottery situation of the ordinary symbol (figure figure) or a fourth symbol (special figure 2) for indicating the lottery situation of the second special symbol (figure figure 2) (Fourth symbol) is displayed in the small display area Dm1.

  By providing the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 in this way, it is possible to notify the player of the lottery status of the special symbol and the lottery status of the normal symbol. Although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fourth symbol is shown in a display mode imitating a figure such as a circle and a cross, and the fourth symbol is displayed in the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2. Is displayed (see the small display area Dm1 in FIG. 230 (b)) to show the situation where the special symbol is changing, and the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 (see FIG. 230 (b), the small display area Dm2), the special symbol lottery result is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a display mode using numbers as the fourth symbol, a plurality of colors, By using the display mode that indicates the number, the display mode that changes the color indicates that the special symbol is fluctuating, and the display mode that indicates the specific symbol or color is stopped and displayed, so that the special symbol lottery result is displayed. May be configured to indicate .

  Further, in the present embodiment, the fourth symbol is used to indicate the lottery status of the special symbol (whether or not the lottery is in progress (fluctuating) and the lottery result), but this is not restrictive. Alternatively, it may be configured to notify only whether or not the special symbol is being drawn (changed). Further, as shown in FIG. 230 (b), in the present embodiment, a fourth symbol display area (small display areas Dm1, Dm2) in which a fourth symbol for indicating the lottery status of the special symbol is displayed is displayed on the main display. An example is shown in which the upper left and upper right sides of the area Dm are formed, but the position and size of the fourth symbol display area are changed in the effect of a variable effect executed in the center of the main display area Dm. It may be different depending on the mode.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a region in which the variable effect is executed from being restricted by the fourth symbol display region, thereby suppressing a reduction in the effect of the effect. In this case, the fourth symbol display area is deleted from the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and the variable display of the fourth symbol is displayed using the light emitting means (eg, an LED) provided in the variable display device unit 80. Should be configured to execute.

  The display content displayed in the sub-display area Ds is substantially the same as that in the first control example, and thus detailed description is omitted. However, the sub-display area Ds is divided into two small areas Ds1 and Ds2 in the left-right direction. However, in the eighth control example, the display area of the sub-display area Ds is limited to the small area Ds1, and the active area Ds1a and the standby area Ds1b are formed in the small area Ds1. I have. The display content of the active area Ds1a is the same as that of the small area Ds1 of the above-described first control example, and thus the detailed description is omitted.

  Next, the display contents of the waiting area Ds1b will be described. In the present embodiment, eight pedestals are displayed in the waiting area Ds1b, and normally, a reserved symbol for indicating the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is displayed.

  In addition, when the sum of the reserved ball of the first special symbol (special figure 1 reserved ball) and the reserved ball of the second special symbol (special figure 2 reserved ball) is 8, that is, the rightmost pedestal When a reserved symbol is displayed on the screen, that is, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol reaches the upper limit (8), a dedicated effect (period effect) using the eight reserved symbols stored and executed is executed. During the period during which the period effect is being executed, the waiting area Ds1b is not a reserved symbol for indicating the number of reserved balls of the special symbol, but a period during which the period effect is executed. The effect may be configured to display an effect-holding symbol that indicates only (a hold symbol targeted for the period effect).

  With this configuration, even if a new holding ball is acquired during the period effect, a new holding symbol is not displayed in the waiting area Ds1b, so that the player can determine how long the period effect continues. It can be informed clearly.

  In the tenth embodiment, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be left-right symmetric, and the same game result is provided when a right-handed game is performed and when a left-handed game is performed. It is not displayed because it is configured so that, for example, depending on the set game state, a right-handed game is a more advantageous game method than a left-handed game, In the case of the pachinko machine 10 capable of setting the case where the left-handed game is more advantageous than the hitting game, the direction in which the ball is fired toward the player is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. A guide display mode for guiding the (game direction) may be configured to be displayed. With such a configuration, the player can easily grasp to which area of the game board the ball should be fired simply by visually recognizing the guidance display mode displayed in the guidance display area. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand.

  To describe in more detail, as a guidance display area, a display mode of “right-handed” for guiding a player to perform a right-handed game, and a display of a left-handed game for the player. And a display mode of "left-handed" for guiding the player may be displayed, and a display mode of "right-handed" may be a game state in which right-handed game is advantageous to a player, for example, a probable change state. It is displayed during the time-saving state and during the jackpot game, and the display mode of “left-handed” may be configured to be displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) after the right-handed game is completed. Also, in the game state where the left-handed game is advantageous to the player, that is, when it is detected that the right-handed game is being executed during the normal state, the “left-handed” is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). Is preferably displayed. In addition, various display modes displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 described in the above embodiments may be configured to be appropriately displayed.

<About the effects of the tenth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 231 to FIG. 236, characteristic effect contents among various effect contents executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment will be described. do. First, with reference to FIG. 231 (a), a display screen when reach is established in the normal state will be described. FIG. 231 (a) is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a display screen displayed when a reach state is set in a normal state (normal state). In the present embodiment, the third symbol that is variably displayed is stopped and displayed in the order of the upper symbol column Z1 and the lower symbol column Z2, and a big hit is made on any of the activated lines L1 to L5 (see FIG. 230 (a)). When the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z2 are stopped and displayed as a part of the third symbol combination indicating the winning, the reach state is established, and the upper symbol row Z1, as a part of the third symbol combination indicating the jackpot winning, An effective line in which the lower symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed is set as a reach effective line, and the middle symbol row Z2 is variably displayed. Then, after reaching the reach state, the middle symbol row Z2 shifts by one low speed (the main symbol (the third symbol simulating a number)) at which the player can visually recognize each piece of identification information (the third symbol). (The time required for about 0.5 seconds).

  As described above, in this embodiment, since one symbol row has ten types of main symbols, when the middle symbol row Z2 is variably displayed at a low speed, the time required for one round is displayed. It is configured to be 5 seconds (0.5 × 10). Then, the middle symbol row Z2 that is variably displayed at a low speed is stopped and displayed as it is. Alternatively, it is configured to change to a different presentation mode (reach mode) based on the satisfaction of a specific transition condition.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 231 (a), the reach state is established with any third symbol (in FIG. 231 (a), the identification information simulating “9” (the third symbol simulating a crab)). , The identification information (the third symbol imitating the octopus) of the middle symbol column Z2 (see FIG. 230) variably displayed during the reach can be visually recognized first. The low-speed fluctuation display is executed such that

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the effect mode of the variable effect is configured to be variable according to the change mode of the middle symbol row Z2 after the reach state, and, for example, after the reach state, It is configured such that it can be changed to a different presentation mode (reach mode) at the timing when the symbol row Z2 makes one round or the timing when the symbol row Z2 makes two rounds. Therefore, by unifying the identification information of the middle symbol row Z2 that can be visually recognized first after entering the reach state as in the present embodiment, a different presentation mode (reach mode) is given to the player at any timing. Can be easily understood.

  In the present embodiment, the timing of changing to a different presentation mode (reach mode) is the timing of one round of the middle symbol row Z2 or the timing of two loops after the reach state, but is not limited thereto. For example, the identification information (the same identification information as the identification information of which the reach is stopped) which becomes the combination indicating the jackpot after the reach state is determined from the timing at which the reach effective line is passed or the identification information which becomes the combination indicating the jackpot. You may be comprised so that the shifted identification information may change to a different production mode (reach mode) at the timing of passing through the reach effective line. In this way, the game is configured such that the specific identification information corresponding to the type of the identification information of which the reach is stopped is changed to a different presentation mode (reach mode) based on passing through the reach valid line. It is possible to give a relationship between the timing at which the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed in a winning combination and the timing at which it is changed to a different presentation mode (reach mode). More specifically, the identification information (identification information that is the same as the identification information in which the reach is stopped), which is a combination indicating the jackpot after the reach state, is changed to a different presentation mode (reach mode) at the timing of passing through the reach effective line. In this case, the timing at which the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed in a winning combination for the player and the timing at which it is changed to a different effect mode (reach mode) are overlapped. The identification information (the same identification information as the identification information of which the reach has been stopped), which is a combination indicating a jackpot, is closely watched for the fluctuation effect while giving the player a great sense of expectation when approaching the reach effective line. Can be done.

  Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, a specific identification state (a third pattern imitating the numeral 1) becomes first visible regardless of which of the third symbols is in the reach state. As described above, since the middle symbol row Z2 is configured to be displayed at a low-speed fluctuation, for example, a combination in which the third symbol combination to be finally stopped and displayed is shifted by one type from the third symbol combination which is a big hit. In the case where (reach one frame deviates) (when the final stop display mode is determined in advance), all the third symbols are stopped and displayed after the reach state (the final stop display mode is stopped and displayed). ) Is different depending on the type of the third symbol in the reach state.

  Specifically, when the reach state is reached in the “third symbol imitating the numeral 1”, the middle symbol row Z2 is a low-speed fluctuation display with the “third symbol imitating the numeral 1” as a specific symbol. Therefore, in order to stop and display the middle symbol row Z2 one frame off the reach as the final stop display mode, 5.5 seconds (first lap) and 10.5 seconds (second lap) from the reach state are set. In short, when the reach state is reached with the "third symbol imitating the numeral 6", the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed at a low speed with the "third symbol imitating the numeral 1" as a specific symbol. In the final stop display mode, it takes 8 seconds (first lap) and 13 seconds (second lap) from the reach state to stop display of the middle symbol row Z2 at one frame off the reach.

  Therefore, in order to establish the reach state with different types of third symbols in the variation pattern in which the same variation time is set, the timing of reaching the reach state from the stop display timing of the third symbol is set in reverse. Processing had to be performed. In other words, there is a problem that a reach effect without uniformity is performed in which the period from the fluctuation start timing to the reach state is changed according to the type of the third symbol in the reach state, and the effect of the effect is reduced. Was.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, along with the execution of the special symbol lottery, the fluctuation time of the first symbol for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery is determined by the main controller 110 by lottery, and the determined fluctuation is determined. The time is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by a fluctuation pattern command. Then, the sound lamp control device 113 selects a fluctuation display effect of the effect period that matches the fluctuation time notified by the fluctuation pattern command, synchronizes with the fluctuation display of the first symbol, and displays the fluctuation display effect of the third symbol. Is executed. The fluctuation pattern command output from main controller 110 is composed of a basic time command indicating a basic fluctuation time and an addition time command indicating a fluctuation time to be added. The type of the third symbol in the reach state is made variable based on the length of time. More specifically, when a variation pattern of a variation time of 30 seconds is determined, a command corresponding to 30 seconds is notified as a basic time command, and a command corresponding to 0 seconds is notified as an addition time. You. On the other hand, when the variation pattern of the variation time of 37 seconds is determined, a command corresponding to 30 seconds is notified as the basic time command, and a command corresponding to 7 seconds is added as the addition time. In other words, the audio lamp control device 113 is configured to be able to identify the variation type that is longer than the basic time by 7 seconds based on the notification content of the addition time command. Thus, the type of the third symbol to be in the reach state can be set only by confirming the content of the addition time command.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 231 (b) to FIG. 234, description will be given of the effect contents regarding the second special symbol change (lottery) executed when the normal state is set. First, with reference to FIG. 231 (b), the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 during the execution of the normal symbol fluctuation that has been won in the normal state will be described. FIG. 231 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display contents displayed during the execution of the normal symbol change in which the winning has been won in the normal state. As shown in FIG. 231 (b), when the ordinary symbol variation is executed, a variation display mode (indicated by an arrow in the figure) indicating that the ordinary symbol variation is being executed is displayed in the small display area Dm2. . Then, a small display area Dm3 is formed on the lower right side of the main display area Dm, and an icon imitating the electric accessory 640 that is opened in a game per ordinary drawing is displayed therein, and the small display area Dm3 is displayed. Is displayed (indicated by six lines in the figure) to notify the player that is formed. Note that the icon shown in the small display area Dm3 is a display that imitates the electric accessory 640 in the closed state because the situation shown in FIG. It is an aspect. With this configuration, the game will be executed soon for the player. It can be predicted that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In FIG. 231 (b), an example has been described in which the execution of the normal symbol variation that has been won has been described as an example. (Probability of 1/100), a small display area Dm3 is formed, and an effect (gase effect) of displaying an icon imitating the electric accessory 640 is executed. In this case, an effect mode is set in which the small display area Dm3 disappears before the currently executed normal symbol change (out-of-position change) is stopped and displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to lengthen the period in which the player is expected to execute the game per ordinary figure.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a maximum of four lottery rights for ordinary symbols can be reserved, and when a new lottery right (regular drawing reservation) is acquired, the acquired lottery right is used. The result of the ordinary symbol lottery can be determined in advance. Then, a command (information) indicating the result of the preliminary determination is configured to be output to the audio lamp control device 113. Therefore, the stage prior to the execution of the normal symbol change, which is winning the suggestive effect suggesting the execution of the game per day, that is, the stage where the pre-discrimination result is the winning of the day-posting, which is the winning. Thus, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect indicating that the game per day is to be executed soon. In this case, it is preferable that the suggestion effect is executed in an effect mode that is difficult for the player to understand, rather than the suggestion effect shown in FIG. 231 (b). For example, the special symbol lottery corresponding to the special symbol change during execution may be performed. As a result, or a preliminary determination result for the acquired special figure reservation, the suggestion effect is configured to be executed in the same effect mode as the effect indicating the effect, and a situation advantageous to the player is achieved by the executed suggestion effect. You may be comprised so that a player may be notified only of coming soon.

  In this way, it can be seen that the more the divergence between the timing at which the per-figure game is actually executed and the execution timing of the suggested effect, the more the difference between the timing of the suggested effect and the mode of the suggested effect to indicate to the player that the per-figure game is performed. By making it difficult to understand that the target of the suggested effect is a game per ordinary figure, it is possible to improve the interest of the game when the suggested effect is executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 232 (a), a description will be given of the contents of an effect when a game per ordinary drawing (game per long opening) is executed during the normal state. FIG. 232 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the effect content displayed when the game per ordinary drawing (game per long opening) is executed in the normal state (during the normal state). In the present embodiment, in the normal state in which the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, the probability of winning in the ordinary symbol lottery is designed to be 1/100, and the ordinary symbol is executed in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol. The variation time of the symbol variation is designed to be 10 seconds. Then, as described above with reference to FIG. 229, in any of the case where the right-handed game is executed and the case where the left-handed game is executed, about １ ／ of the fired balls pass through the through gate 67. ing. Further, a maximum of four lottery rights for ordinary symbols (regular symbol reservation) can be stored.

  That is, while the game is continued in the normal state, the ordinary symbol lottery is continuously executed, and the winning is performed per ordinary figure at a rate of about once every 1000 seconds. Further, in the case where a win is made in the normal state, a game in which the electric accessory 640 is opened for 5 seconds is executed (a long opening win). In addition, as shown in FIG. 229, since the electric accessory 640 is provided below the first entrance 64, the ball fired only by continuing the game aiming at the first entrance 64 becomes the second entrance. It is configured to be able to enter the ball entrance 640. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where the player cannot enter the ball into the second entrance 640 in the per-figure game in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol generated with a low probability. I have.

  As shown in FIG. 232 (a), when the normal symbol hitting game is executed in the normal state, a combination (two circles in the figure) indicating that the result of the normal symbol lottery is a hit in the small display area Dm2. ), The identification information (symbol) is stopped and displayed, a comment "Aim for the electric tuy" is displayed above the main display area Dm, and the open electric chew (motor combination) is displayed in the small display area Dm3. An icon imitating the object 640) is displayed. In addition, since the normal symbol lottery and the special symbol lottery are configured to be able to be executed in parallel (overlapping), the variation display and the small display of the third symbol executed in response to the special symbol variation The fluctuation display of the fourth symbol executed in the area Dm1 is continuously executed even during the ordinary symbol game.

  In addition, the waiting area Ds1b of the sub display area Ds includes a special number indicating the number of second special symbol holding memories (special figure 2 holding) acquired based on the ball entering the second entrance 640. In FIG. 2, the reserved symbol (indicated by a black circle in the figure) is larger than the special figure 1 reserved symbol (indicated by a white circle in the figure) indicating the number of the reserved memories (special figure 1 pending) of the first special symbol that have been acquired. It is displayed preferentially (to the left of the waiting area Ds1b). In other words, the state shown in FIG. 232 (a) is a state after four or more balls have been entered into the second entrance 640 during the game per ordinary drawing, and the special figure 2 is held with the upper limit number. This shows a state after obtaining four pieces.

  In the present embodiment, since the lottery of the second special symbol is configured to be executed with priority over the lottery of the first special symbol, the special figure 2 reserved acquired later is acquired first. The special symbol lottery is executed prior to the reservation in FIG. With this configuration, it is possible to execute the second special symbol lottery continuously with priority when the game per game is executed during the normal state and a plurality of special figure 2 holds are acquired. Therefore, it is possible to execute a dedicated effect with one period during which the lottery of the second special symbol is executed as an advantageous period (chance zone) advantageous to the player, and to provide an effect that is easy for the player to understand. it can.

  Next, the effect contents in the chance zone in which the second special symbol lottery (change) is executed during the normal state will be described with reference to FIGS. 232 (b) to 234. FIG. 232 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the effect contents executed when the chance zone is set. As shown in FIG. 232 (b), when the second special symbol lottery (variation) is executed during the normal state, a comment of “entering a chance zone” is displayed above the main display area Dm. This chance zone is an advantageous period which is set to a period until all special figure 2 reservations acquired during the normal state are consumed, and is basically from the start of the first second special symbol lottery (change). It is configured to be displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 until the last second special symbol lottery (change) is completed. Thereby, it is possible to notify the player that the current period is the advantageous period in an easily understandable manner.

  In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, when a jackpot is won in the chance zone, the character "" Probable GET high probability "" is displayed as a guide display mode for indicating that a probable change state can be acquired with a high probability. In addition, as will be described in detail later, during this chance zone, a pseudo-variation effect that makes it appear that a plurality of special symbol changes are executed during one special symbol change (second special symbol change) is performed. It is configured to run. Therefore, the display mode (see FIG. 232 (a)) indicating the number of reserved symbols stored in the sub display area Ds is not displayed, and the small display area Ds11 formed on the upper right side of the main display area Dm. In the small display area Ds12, the number of reserved special figure 2 (in the figure, the number of reserved special figure 2 is “2” indicating that the number of reserved special figure 1 is two). "3") indicating that the number is three is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 232 (b), the display mode displayed in the small display areas Ds11 and Ds12 is smaller than the display mode displayed in the standby area Ds1b (see FIG. 232 (a)) of the sub display area Ds. Since it is configured such that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize it, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the number of reserved special figures during the chance zone. Therefore, when the pseudo fluctuation effect is executed in the chance zone, it can be assumed that a plurality of special symbol lotteries (changes) are actually executed, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. In the present embodiment, the number of special figure reservations is displayed using a partial area (small display areas Ds11 and Ds12) of the main display area Dm. During the zone, the number of reserved special figures may not be notified to the player, or may be specified in an area other than the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 (for example, an LED provided in the variable display unit 80). You may be comprised so that the figure reservation number may be alert | reported. Further, it may be configured so that the player cannot easily identify the number of special figure reservations. The display mode may be changed to a display mode in which the color can be changed. With this configuration, even if the player can easily grasp the display mode for indicating the number of special figure reservations, it is possible to prevent the current number of special figure reservations from being easily identified. Therefore, the same effects as in the present embodiment can be obtained.

  As shown in FIG. 232 (b), a character 1801 imitating a rabbit indicating that the second special symbol is currently changing is displayed on the lower right side of the main display area Dm. As described above, since the special symbol lottery (fluctuation) and the normal symbol lottery (fluctuation) are executed in parallel (overlap), the period in which the game per ordinary symbol is executed is the first special symbol lottery. There is a case where it overlaps during the fluctuation period (see FIG. 232 (a)) and a case where it does not overlap. In the case where a game per common symbol is executed during the period of change of the first special symbol, the second special symbol lottery is executed after the currently executed first special symbol change is completed, and the first special symbol is drawn. If it does not overlap during the fluctuation period, the second special symbol lottery is executed immediately after the ball enters the second entrance 640 during the per-figure game (during the per-figure game). In other words, the execution timing of the second special symbol lottery is different depending on the variation state of the first special symbol when the game per ordinary game is executed, and the currently executed special symbol variation is changed to the first special symbol. There is a problem that it is difficult for the player to accurately determine whether the change is the change or the second special symbol change.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the second special symbol change is executed, the character 1801 is displayed in the main display area Dm. It is possible to notify the player of the first special symbol change or the second special symbol change in an easy-to-understand manner.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 233 (a) to 234, among the variable effects executed in the chance zone, the effect contents of the pseudo variable effect (special variable effect) will be described. FIG. 233 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display screen when the third symbol is temporarily stopped during the special fluctuation effect, and FIG. 233 (b) acquires special figure 2 suspension. FIG. 234 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display screen when the third symbol is restarted in a special fluctuation effect executed in a state where the special figure 2 is not held. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the display screen when the 3rd symbol restarts in the special fluctuation effect performed in a state.

  Here, the effect contents of the special fluctuation effect (pseudo fluctuation effect) will be described. This special fluctuation effect is a fluctuation effect in which the third symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped) during one fluctuation period of the second special symbol fluctuation, and then restarted. This is a pseudo fluctuation effect that makes it seem that the pattern fluctuation has been executed. First, a reach effect is executed using the first half period (about 10 seconds) of the special fluctuation effect, and at the end timing of the first half period, as shown in FIG. ), The third symbol is tentatively stopped (in the figure, the third symbol is indicated by a wavy line). At this timing, that is, at the end timing of the first half period of the special fluctuation effect, a character “sorry” indicating that the result of the special symbol lottery is out of order is displayed in the sub-display area Ds, and a chance is given to the player. The first special symbol lottery executed during the zone is configured to be considered to have missed. In other words, in the first half period of the special fluctuation effect, a special first half effect is executed in which the reach effect with the expectation of the jackpot winning is stopped (temporary stop display) with the effect result indicating the deviation.

  After that, in the latter half period of the special fluctuation effect, a fluctuation effect (special latter effect) for restarting the temporarily stopped third symbol is executed. This special second half effect is configured so that the effect mode is changed according to the number of reserved special figure 2 reservations. For example, in a state where the special figure 2 reservation is secured, FIG. As shown, the special second half effect is executed in the effect mode corresponding to the second special symbol change in the chance zone, and in the state where the special figure 2 reservation is not secured, the chance zone ends as shown in FIG. After that, the special second half effect is executed in the effect mode corresponding to the first special symbol change executed. That is, in the present embodiment, as the special variation effect, the type of the special symbol variation executed after the second special symbol variation being executed is ended is determined based on the number of reserved special symbols, and the effect corresponding to the determination result is provided. The effect mode of the special second-stage effect is set in the mode. Therefore, it is possible to make the player more strongly think that a plurality of special symbol changes have been executed during one second special symbol change.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, if the special second half effect is executed in the effect mode corresponding to the second special symbol change in the chance zone (see FIG. 233 (b)), the acquired special figure 2 reserved number The number of times the third symbol is temporarily stopped during the latter half of the period is made different. Although the detailed description is omitted, when neither the special figure 2 reservation nor the special figure 1 reservation is secured when the special fluctuation effect is executed, the third symbol shown in FIG. Without performing the temporary stop display of the second special symbol change, a single variable effect (a variable effect that does not cause the third symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed) by using the entire variable period of the second special symbol change. Make up. As a result, the above-described special fluctuation effect is executed only in a state where the number of special figure reservations is secured, so that a plurality of special symbol fluctuations are executed during one second special symbol fluctuation. I can make you think strongly.

  In addition, only when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a jackpot, an effect mode is set in which the number of temporary stoppages of the third symbol executed during the latter half period is different from the acquired number of reserved special symbol 2 reservations. It is configured to be. Therefore, for example, when the third symbol is temporarily stopped five or more times, it is possible to give the player the expectation that the second special symbol change being executed is a big hit. As described above, in the present embodiment, it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the case where the third symbol is temporarily stopped and the case where the third symbol is stopped and displayed. hard. Therefore, the number of times of temporary stop display and the number of times of stop display are mixed, and it is assumed that the temporary stop display is performed five times or more. In spite of this, it can be assumed that the number of times of temporary stop display has not reached five, and it is possible to provide the player with a pleasure of predicting the effect result.

  It should be noted that other configurations may be used as the effect form of the special fluctuation effect. For example, in order to allow the player to easily grasp the number of times of the third symbol temporarily stopped and displayed during one second special symbol change. May be configured to be displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, or the third symbol displayed temporarily during the second special symbol change is displayed. At least a part (for example, the background color, the effect of the third symbol, and the like) of the special variation effect may be configured to be changed stepwise according to the number of times. In addition, a display mode (for example, the first time and the second time) indicating the number of times of the temporary stop display may be displayed at a timing when the temporarily stopped third symbol is displayed again.

  As shown in FIG. 234, when the special fluctuation effect is executed in a state where the special figure 2 reservation is not secured, the character “CHANCE ZONE END” is sub-displayed as a display mode indicating that the chance zone has ended. An effect mode in which the variation display of the third symbol displayed in the area Ds and executed in the main display area Dm is a variation display corresponding to the first special symbol variation (variation display in which the third symbol varies in the horizontal direction). Is performed as a special second half effect, so that after the player is made to think that the chance zone has ended, the effect result of the special variable effect, that is, the lottery result of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed. . Therefore, an unexpected effect can be provided to the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 235, the effect contents in the state where the probable change state is set will be described. FIG. 235 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the effect contents when the first special symbol change is executed in a state where the probable change state is set, and FIG. 235 (b) It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the effect content when the 2nd special symbol change is performed in the state where the probable change state is set.

  In the present embodiment, the second special symbol lottery is configured to be easily executed when the probability change state (the special symbol high probability state, the normal symbol high probability state) is set. Then, when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, a probability change state is set with a high probability (the probability change jackpot game that allows the ball to easily flow down to the specific gate during the jackpot game is always executed. ). The probable change state is configured to continue until the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times).

  That is, once the probable change state is set, the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery (the jackpot probability in the high probability state of the special symbol is 1/50) before the predetermined number (50 times) of the special symbol lottery is executed. ), The probability change state can be looped with high probability. Therefore, the player who is executing the game in the probable change state can be motivated to play the game so as to win the jackpot in the second special symbol lottery as soon as possible.

  On the other hand, even in the state in which the probability change state is set, for example, the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state wins the probability change jackpot, and immediately after the probability change state is set after the end of the jackpot game, that is, In the state where the probable change state is set, the first special symbol lottery may be executed when the special figure 2 reservation is not acquired and the special figure 1 reservation is acquired. In the present embodiment, as described above, if the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the probability change jackpot game is executed at a rate of 100%, whereas if the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, It is configured such that the probability jackpot game is executed at a rate of 50%, and the normal jackpot game is executed at the remaining 50%. In other words, even if the probable change state is set, if the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the probable change state may not be able to be looped.

  In the case where the jackpot has been won in the first special symbol lottery during the probable change state as described above, if the player determines early that the won jackpot is the jackpot type (normal jackpot) in which the normal jackpot game is executed, In the present embodiment, the third design corresponding to the probability change jackpot is used as a variation effect corresponding to the first special symbol variation executed during the probability change state, since the problem that the player's willingness to play decreases. A double-reach effect, which is a variable effect in which a (representing identification information with an odd number) and a third symbol (identification information with an even number) normally corresponding to a jackpot, simultaneously enters a reach state, is executed. It is configured to be easy. More specifically, when the first special symbol lottery executed during the probable change state wins the normal jackpot, the above-described double reach effect is always executed (FIG. 235 (a)). reference).

  Thereby, when the first special symbol lottery executed during the probable change state wins the normal jackpot, only the third symbol (identification information with an even number) assigned to the normal jackpot is in the reach state. The effect can be prevented from being executed, and it is possible to prevent the player from being predicted in advance that the normal jackpot is won during the special symbol fluctuation period.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 235 (a), in the present embodiment, when the probable change state is set, the small display areas Ds11 and Ds12 are formed as in the above-described chance zone, and The special figure reservation number is configured to be difficult to grasp. Then, above the main display area Dm, the character of “during super chance mode” is displayed as a display mode for notifying the player that the current state is in the probable change state.

  Here, during the super chance mode, the double reach (the third symbol corresponding to the probable change jackpot (identification information with the number 1)) shown in FIG. 235 (a) and the third symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot ( 2) and the double-reach effect, which is a fluctuation effect that simultaneously enters the reach state, indicates that the special symbol change being executed is the first special symbol change. In this embodiment, a double-reach effect shown in FIG. 235 (a) can be executed even in the fluctuation effect executed in response to the second special symbol change because there is a possibility that the player may be easily grasped by the player. It is composed. In other words, in the case of the jackpot winning, the variable effect corresponding to the second special symbol lottery in which the probability variable jackpot game is always executed is configured so that the double reach effect using the third symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot can be executed. ing.

  With this configuration, even if the double-reach effect shown in FIG. 235 (a) is executed, it is determined whether the special symbol variation being executed is the first special symbol variation or the second special symbol variation. This makes it difficult for the player to easily determine.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a double-reach effect is executed as a variable effect corresponding to the second special symbol lottery, the type of the third symbol which is in the reach state at the timing when the middle symbol row Z2 makes one revolution is determined. As shown in FIG. 235 (b), an effect of changing to a third symbol (identification information with a number of 1 and identification information with a number of 9) corresponding to the probability change jackpot (to the probability change double reach) Promotion effect) is executed.

  With such a configuration, when the special symbol lottery being executed is a big hit, the player can be notified in advance that the probability change big hit game will be executed. In addition, even if a double-reach effect is executed as a variable effect corresponding to the first special symbol lottery, the player is expected to be promoted to a probable double reach in the middle of the process, and to perform the game while expecting the player. Can be.

  In the present embodiment, as a variable condition for changing (promoting) the currently-running double-reach production to a probable double-reach production, a case where the variation mode of the middle symbol Z2 is a predetermined mode (one lap has elapsed) is set. The variable condition to be satisfied is set, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a third symbol corresponding to the reach state as a third symbol variably displayed in the middle symbol row Z2 (the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot combination). The variable condition that is satisfied when the symbol passes through the reach effective line may be set, or the variable condition that is satisfied when the operation result of the operation means (frame button 22) operable by the player is a specific operation result. You may comprise so that a variable condition may be set.

  In the present embodiment, the type of the third symbol in the reach state is changed when the variable condition is satisfied. However, the present invention is not limited to this. You may comprise so that the number of symbols may be increased. More specifically, from the double reach state shown in FIG. 235 (a), blank symbols (indicated by triangles in the figure) are deleted, and “3.2.1” is displayed in order from the left as an upper symbol row Z1. Then, a triple reach effect in which “1.2.3” is displayed in order from the left as the lower symbol column Z3 may be executed. Even in the case of such a configuration, the triple reach production can increase the number of reach of the third symbol corresponding to the probability variable jackpot than the double reach production. Can be visually notified to the player that the possibility of winning is high.

  In addition, the above-described technical idea may be applied to the fluctuation effect performed during the normal state. For example, only the third symbol (identification information with an even number) corresponding to the normal jackpot is set to the reach state. When the variable condition is satisfied during the normal single reach production, the type of the third symbol in the reach state may be switched to the type of the third symbol corresponding to the probable big hit, or the third symbol in the reach state May be configured to increase the number. This allows the player to play a game while expecting a more advantageous effect to be provided to the player until the variable effect ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 236, description will be given of the effect contents executed during the big hit ending period in the present embodiment. FIG. 236 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display mode displayed in the first half of the ending period of the normal jackpot game, and FIG. 236 (b) is an ending of the probable jackpot game. FIG. 236 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display mode displayed in the first half of the period, and FIG. 236 (c) is a display mode displayed in the second half of the ending period of the normal jackpot game FIG. 236 (d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display mode displayed in the latter half of the ending period of the probability-change jackpot game. .

  In the present embodiment, in a jackpot game (probably variable jackpot game) in which a probable change state that is an advantageous game state for a player is easily set, a jackpot game (probably a jackpot game) in which a probable change state that is an advantageous game state for a player is difficult to set. ), The jackpot ending period is set longer. Specifically, it is stipulated that 17 seconds are set as the jackpot ending period in the probability variable jackpot and 15 seconds are set as the jackpot ending period in the normal jackpot. As a result, it is possible to easily notify the player that the probable change state is set during the ending period.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, even when the probability-change jackpot game is executed, the probability-change state is not set unless the ball that has won the prize-winning device 2650 flows down to the specific gate. I have. Therefore, if the ball cannot flow down to the specific gate during the probability change jackpot game, the probability change state is not set after the probability change jackpot game ends, and the time reduction state (special symbol A low probability state, a normal symbol high probability state) are set.

  In this case, if the notification effect indicating that the probability change state is set during the ending period of the probability change jackpot game is executed, the effect content of the notification effect differs from the actually set game state, and the player There was a problem of giving dissatisfaction. Further, when the effect mode of the notification effect performed in the ending period of the probability change jackpot game (17 seconds) is switched to the effect mode of the notification effect performed in the ending period of the normal jackpot game (15 seconds), There is a problem that the length of the actual ending period is different from the length of the production period of the notification effect, so that the notification effect is performed with a sense of incongruity for the player.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the jackpot ending period is divided into a first half period and a second half period, and the length of the second half period is set to a unified period (7 seconds) regardless of the type of the jackpot game. I have. And it is comprised so that the production | presentation aspect of the notification effect performed in a latter half period may be determined according to the game state set after a big hit game is over.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 236, when the normal jackpot game is executed, the time reduction state is set for the first half period (8 seconds) as the notification effect executed during the jackpot ending period. When the effect mode (refer to FIG. 236 (a)) in which characters of “chance mode 100 times” indicating that the game is performed is executed, and then, in the latter half period (7 seconds), a jackpot is won during the time saving state. (If a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery), an effect mode in which characters of “hit and super chance GET during the chance mode” are displayed as a game guidance mode for indicating that the probability change state is likely to be set (FIG. 236 (c) ) Is performed.

  On the other hand, when the probability change jackpot game is executed, the “super chance mode 100” suggesting that the probability change state is set for the first half period (10 seconds) as the notification effect performed during the jackpot ending period. The effect mode (see FIG. 236 (b)) in which the character “NO.” Is displayed is executed, and then, during the latter half of the period (7 seconds), “card picking” is performed as an alert mode that is not directly related to the game content. It is configured to execute an effect mode (see FIG. 236 (d)) in which a character "Please note that it is forgotten" is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the production mode during the above-described jackpot ending period is configured to be set in advance at the timing when the jackpot game is executed. Thus, during the jackpot game in which various control processes are executed, it is not necessary to execute the process for determining the presentation mode of the notification effect every time, so the processing load of the control process executed during the jackpot game is reduced. Can be done.

  Here, a case will be described in which a ball cannot be caused to flow down to a specific gate during a jackpot game, despite the fact that the probability change jackpot game has been executed. In this case, in the display mode shown in FIG. 236 (b), the process of hiding the character “super” and the notification effect executed in the second half period (7 seconds) of the big hit ending period are performed in the normal hit mode. A process of switching to a notification effect (see FIG. 236 (c)) executed in the second half (7 seconds) of the ending period of the game is executed.

  More specifically, as a display mode shown in FIG. 236 (a), a display layer (display hierarchy) in which characters of "super" are displayed and a display layer (display) in which characters of "chance mode 100 times" are displayed Display on the display layer (display hierarchy) in which the character "super" is displayed based on the result of determining whether or not the ball was able to flow down to the specific gate during the jackpot game The configuration is such that the presence or absence of an instruction can be switched. Thereby, it is possible to execute the notification effect corresponding to the determination result of whether or not the ball was able to flow down to the specific gate during the big hit game by the simple control process. Furthermore, during the period set to the same length as the second half of the jackpot ending period, the effect mode is switched, so that the effect mode of the notification effect can be switched without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

  In the present embodiment, the length of the jackpot ending period differs depending on the jackpot type. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the length of the jackpot ending period may be unified for all jackpot types. Further, in the present embodiment, the second half of the jackpot ending period is set as a period having the same length for all jackpot types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. You may comprise so that it may become the same length with respect to a kind. Furthermore, when there are three or more jackpot types, it is not necessary to set the same period for all the jackpot types. For example, the first half period of the jackpot for the jackpot type A and the jackpot type B is the same length. Thus, the jackpot type B and the jackpot type C may be configured so that the latter half period of the jackpot has the same length.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the ending period having a different length is set according to the type of the winning jackpot. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured so as to be different.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 237, the relationship between the variation pattern of the special symbol selected in the present embodiment and the effect mode to be executed will be described. FIG. 237 (a) is a schematic diagram showing a flow of an effect when a fluctuation pattern in which a non-reach fluctuation effect is executed is set as the fluctuation effect of the third symbol, and FIG. 237 (b) It is the schematic diagram which showed the flow of the effect when the fluctuation pattern in which the reach fluctuation effect is performed is set as the fluctuation effect of the 3rd symbol.

  Although a detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. 242, in the present embodiment, a variation pattern obtained by adding the basic time and the addition time is used as a variation pattern (variation time) for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery. Stipulates. Then, the period corresponding to the basic time is set as a common fluctuation pattern, and the period corresponding to the addition time is set as a specific fluctuation pattern.

  That is, in the present embodiment, as the effect of the third symbol change performed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 to show the result of the special symbol lottery, the third symbol is displayed after the reach state is displayed. The period until the stop display is made to be different depending on the type of the third symbol in the reach state. Then, the third symbol corresponding to the time set as the addition time is set as the third symbol in the reach state. With this configuration, the third symbol variation effect (the third symbol variation effect executed in correspondence with the basic time) performed during a predetermined period after the third symbol starts to vary is common. Can be changed.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 237 (a), in the case of the non-reach fluctuation effect, since the addition time is not set, the common fluctuation pattern corresponding to the basic time (8 seconds) is set, and the third symbol is set. The upper symbol row Z1 is stopped and displayed at a timing when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation effect (for example, the timing when 5 seconds have elapsed), and one second later, the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped so that the reach state does not occur on the activated line. Stop display is performed in a display mode, and two seconds later, the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode indicating that the lottery result is out of order. Thereafter, after a one second stop display period (determination time), the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is definitely displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 237 (b), when the reach fluctuation effect is executed, a basic time (30 seconds) is set, and as a common fluctuation pattern of 30 seconds, until 5 seconds elapse from the reach state. Is set. That is, the effect form from the reaching state to the middle symbol row Z2 making one round is set as the common variation pattern. Thereafter, an effect mode (reach pattern, stop symbol) according to the addition time is set.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 238, description will be given of an effect mode of the ending effect executed during the ending period of the jackpot game. FIG. 238 (a) shows the flow of the effect of the ending period for the normal jackpot, and FIG. 238 (b) shows the flow of the ending period for the odd jackpot. FIG. It shows a flow when a specific gate does not flow down.

  As shown in FIG. 238, in the present embodiment, the ending period (ED period) is different between the normal jackpot and the probable jackpot, and the ED period of 15 seconds for the normal jackpot and 17 seconds for the probable jackpot is set. Make up. Then, the ending display mode divided into the first half period and the second half period is displayed (see FIG. 236).

  In the present embodiment, at the start timing of the jackpot game, an effect mode in the ending period is set, and it is determined whether or not a V prize has been made during the jackpot period (whether or not a ball has flowed down to a specific gate) in the ending period ( The determination is made at the start timing of the (ED period), and the ending display mode is switched based on the determination result.

<Electrical Configuration in Tenth Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 239 to 245. The pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment in that a part of the ROM 202, a part of the RAM 203, The difference is that a part of the ROM 222 and a part of the RAM 223 provided in the device 113 are changed, and the rest is the same. The same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 239 to 242. First, the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 239 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 239 (a), the ROM 202 of the present embodiment is different from the ROM 202 of the above-described fourth embodiment (see FIG. 116) in that the special symbol big hit random number 10 table 202ja is substituted for the first random number table 202a. Is replaced with the variation pattern selection 4 table 202dc, the variation pattern selection 10 table 202jb, the second random number table 202b is replaced with the ordinary random number 10 table 202jc, and the jackpot type selection 4 table 202db is replaced with the jackpot type selection 10 table. The difference is that the 202jd is provided, and the small hit random number table 202de is deleted. Although not shown, the tenth embodiment differs from the fourth embodiment in that only the update range is changed in place of the first random number counter C1 and the other special hits having the same function are performed. The random number counter C1 (update range "0-999") is replaced with the second random number counter C2, and only the update range is changed. Otherwise, the ordinary random number counter C5 (update range "0-299") having the same function. ). The other configurations are the same, and therefore are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description will be omitted. As described above, the names of the various counters are partially changed, but since the basic functions are the same, various counters referred to in the detailed description and various data tables defined in the ROM 202 are used. Is omitted.

  First, the special symbol jackpot random number 10 table 202ja will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 240A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special symbol big hit random number 10 table 202ja. The special symbol big hit random number 10 table 202ja is determined to be a hit with respect to the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 23B) according to the symbol type of the special symbol and the probability state of the special symbol. The difference is that the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is defined.

  Specifically, regardless of the type of the special symbol for which the special symbol lottery has been executed (the first special symbol and the second special symbol), if the low probability state of the special symbol is set, the jackpot determination value (special A value of the special hit random number counter C1 of “0 to 4” is defined as a value determined to be a big hit in a symbol lottery, and if a special symbol high probability state is set, the special hit is determined as a big hit determination value. A range of the value “0 to 19” of the random number counter C1 is defined. That is, in the tenth embodiment, even if a special symbol lottery of any type is executed in a state where the low probability state of the special symbol is set, the jackpot is won with a probability of about 1/200, and the special symbol is selected. Regardless of which type of special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state in which the high probability state is set, the jackpot is won with a probability of about 1/50. In this embodiment, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 determined to be a big hit for each special symbol type is commonly defined. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The value of the random number counter C1 may be defined as the jackpot determination value, or the number of values of the special hit random number counter C1 serving as the jackpot determination value may be made different for each special symbol type.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the low probability state of the special symbol is set, the value (“0 to 4”) of the special hit random number counter C1 determined to be a big hit is set to the high of the special symbol. Even when the probability state is set, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 determined to be a big hit is configured. With this configuration, the first prefetching process (see S1775 in FIG. 135) executed in the start winning process 4 (see S152 in FIG. 134) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and the second prefetching In the process (see S1764 in FIG. 136), for example, when the value of the first random number counter C1 determined to be a big hit in the low probability state of the special symbol is acquired, a special symbol lottery corresponding to the winning information is executed. It is possible to predict in advance that the winning information includes the information for winning the jackpot without executing the process of determining (predicting) the gaming state at a certain point in time. In addition, without being limited to this, at least a part or all of the value of the special hit random number counter C1 determined to be a big hit in the low probability state of the special symbol is specially controlled so as not to be determined to be a big hit in the special symbol high probability state. The contents of the symbol big hit random number table 202ja may be defined. With this configuration, when the same value of the special hit random number counter C1 is obtained, the gaming state set when the big hit determination is performed using the obtained value of the special hit random number counter C1. The determination result can be made different according to. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for an illegal act of obtaining the value of the specific special random number counter C1 to be performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 240 (b), the contents defined in the ordinary random number 10 table 202jc will be described. FIG. 240 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the ordinary random number 10 table 202jc. As shown in FIG. 240 (b), if the ordinary symbol random number counter C5 is in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, the acquired ordinary random number counter C5 falls within the range of "0 to 2". When the normal symbol is in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, the ordinary symbol random number counter C5 defines the ordinary symbol hit in a range of “0 to 149”.

  That is, in the present embodiment, when the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, the probability (1/100) of winning in the ordinary symbol lottery is set to the low probability. As a result, it is possible to make the execution probability of the game per ordinary symbol different between the normal state, which is the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, the probable change state, which is the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, and the time reduction state.

  Next, the contents of the jackpot type selection 10 table 202jd will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 241 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the jackpot type selection 10 table 202jd. The jackpot type selection 10 table 202jd is a data table in which the determination value for determining the jackpot type is stored for each special symbol type, similarly to the jackpot type selection table 202d in the first embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 241 (a), the jackpot type selection 10 table 202jd in the tenth embodiment includes a special figure 1 jackpot 10 table 202jd1 referred to when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery. A special figure 2 big hit 10 table 202jd2 which is referred to when a big hit is won in the 2 special symbol lottery is defined.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 241 (b), the contents specified in the special figure 1 big hit 10 table 202jd1 will be described. FIG. 241 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 1 big hit 10 table 202jd1. The special figure 1 big hit 10 table 202jd1 is a data table that is referred to when a big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery and a big hit type is selected.

  As shown in FIG. 241 (b), the special figure 1 big hit 10 table 202jd1 in the tenth embodiment includes “big hit A” to “big hit B” as the big hit types of the first special symbol (special figure 1). The two jackpot types are defined.

  Specifically, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the jackpot type of the value of the special jackpot type counter C2 (update range “0 to 99”) is “0 to 49”. "Big hit A" is defined in association with this. The “big hit A” is a big hit type in which the number of rounds of the big hit is 7 rounds, and the variable hit jackpot game is executed. Is a jackpot type in which “50” is set. Note that if the ball does not flow down (pass through) a specific gate (special discharge channel 2650e2 (see FIG. 196)) provided in the V winning device 2650 during the probability change jackpot game (when non-V), the jackpot After the game ends, “0” is set to the value of the probability change counter 203ja. Further, “big hit A” specifies that “17 seconds” is set as the ending period of the big hit game.

  Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the special hit type counter C2, there are 50 random numbers (counter values) associated with the "big hit A", so that the first special symbol lottery is selected. In the case of a jackpot, the rate at which the "jackpot A" is determined is 50% (50/100).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 241 (b), "big hit B" is defined as the big hit type in association with the value of the special hit type counter C2 in the range of "50 to 99". The “big hit B” is a big hit type in which the number of rounds of the big hit is 7 rounds and the normal big hit game is executed, and “100” is set to the value of the time saving counter 203h after completion of the big hit game, and the value of the probability change counter 203ja. Is a jackpot type in which “0” is set to “1”. Further, “big hit B” specifies that “15 seconds” is set as the ending period of the big hit game.

  Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the special hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with “big hit B” is 50, In the case of a jackpot, the rate at which the “jackpot B” is determined is 50% (50/100).

  In other words, the two jackpot types (jackpot A and jackpot B) that can be set when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery have the same number of rounds of jackpot games, but the number of rounds in the V prize device 2650 during the jackpot game. Are different from each other in the ease with which the ball can pass through the specific gate (special discharge channel 2650e2 (see FIG. 196)) provided in the "big hit A" than the "big hit B". Is configured to execute a jackpot game that is easy to flow down to a specific gate. Therefore, "big hit A" becomes a big hit type that is more advantageous than "big hit B".

  Next, with reference to FIG. 241 (c), the contents specified in the special figure 2 big hit 10 table 202jd2 will be described. FIG. 241 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 2 big hit 10 table 202jd2. The special figure 2 big hit 10 table 202jd2 is a data table which is referred to when a big hit is won in the second special symbol lottery and a big hit type is selected.

  As shown in FIG. 241 (c), in the special figure 2 big hit 10 table 202jd2 in the tenth embodiment, “big hit C” to “big hit E” are set as the big hit types of the second special symbol (special figure 2). The three jackpot types are defined.

  Specifically, as the big hit type of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the value of the special hit type counter C2 is in a range of “0 to 29”, and “big hit C” is defined in association with the big hit type. Have been. The “big hit C” is a type of big hit in which the number of rounds of the big hit is four and the variable hit jackpot game is executed. Is a jackpot type in which “50” is set. Note that if the ball does not flow down (pass through) a specific gate (special discharge channel 2650e2 (see FIG. 196)) provided in the V winning device 2650 during the probability change jackpot game (when non-V), the jackpot After the game ends, “0” is set to the value of the probability change counter 203ja. Further, in the "big hit C", it is defined that "17 seconds" is set as the ending period of the big hit game.

  Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the special hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the "big hit C" is 30, so that the second special symbol is drawn by lottery. In the case of a jackpot, the rate at which the “jackpot C” is determined is 30% (30/100).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 241 (c), "big hit D" is defined as the big hit type in association with the range of the special hit type counter C2 of "30 to 69". The “big hit D” is a big hit type in which the number of rounds of the big hit is 7 rounds, and the probability change jackpot game is executed. Is a jackpot type for which “50” is set. Note that if the ball does not flow down (pass through) a specific gate (special discharge channel 2650e2 (see FIG. 196)) provided in the V winning device 2650 during the probability change jackpot game (when non-V), the jackpot After the game ends, “0” is set to the value of the probability change counter 203ja. Further, in the "big hit D", it is defined that "17 seconds" is set as the ending period of the big hit game.

  Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the special hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the "big hit D" is 40, so the second special symbol lottery is selected. In the case of a jackpot, the rate at which the “jackpot C” is determined is 40% (40/100).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 241 (c), "big hit E" is defined as the big hit type in association with the value of the special hit type counter C2 of "70 to 99". The “big hit E” is a type of big hit in which the number of rounds of the big hit is 16 and the probability change jackpot game is executed. Is a jackpot type for which “50” is set. Note that if the ball does not flow down (pass through) a specific gate (special discharge channel 2650e2 (see FIG. 196)) provided in the V winning device 2650 during the probability change jackpot game (when non-V), the jackpot After the game ends, “0” is set to the value of the probability change counter 203ja. Further, “big hit E” specifies that “17 seconds” is set as the ending period of the big hit game.

  Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the special hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the "big hit E" is 30, so the lottery of the second special symbol is performed. In the case of a jackpot, the rate at which the “jackpot E” is determined is 30% (30/100).

  That is, the three jackpot types (jackpot C, jackpot D, and jackpot E) that can be set when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery all execute the jackpot game, but the number of rounds of the jackpot game is The "big hit E" in which the most round games are executed is the jackpot type most advantageous to the player, and the "big hit A" is the jackpot type most disadvantageous to the player.

  As described above, when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the probability change jackpot game is always executed. Therefore, the probability change jackpot game is executed at a rate of 50% than in the first special symbol lottery. In terms of the game state set after the end of the big hit game, it is an advantageous big hit type. In addition, in terms of the number of round games executed during the jackpot game, that is, the number of prize balls that can be acquired during the jackpot game, the maximum number that can be obtained is larger in the second special symbol lottery and the minimum number that can be obtained. Also specifies that the number of the second special symbol lottery is smaller. In addition, the number of prize balls that can be acquired on average is defined to be larger in the second special symbol lottery.

  Therefore, the first special symbol lottery is more advantageous in terms of the number of prize balls obtainable under the minimum condition, and the second special symbol lottery is more advantageous in other aspects. In this embodiment, the jackpot types shown in FIG. 241 are defined. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and various types may be used based on the same technical ideas as the jackpot types that can be set in the above-described embodiments. The jackpot type may be configured to be settable.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 242, the contents of the fluctuation pattern selection 10 table 202jb in the tenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 242 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variation pattern selection 10 table 202jb. As shown in FIG. 242 (a), the fluctuation pattern selection 10 table 202jb includes a normal 10 table 202jb1 which is referred to when a fluctuation pattern of a special symbol fluctuation is selected in a state where the normal state is set, A probability change / time saving 10 table 202jb2 which is referred to when a change pattern of the special symbol change is selected in a state where the state or the time saving state is set is defined.

  First, the normal ten table 202jb1 will be described with reference to FIG. 242 (b). FIG. 242 (b) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the normal ten table 202jb1. In the ten-for-normal table 202jb1, various variation patterns are defined in correspondence with the special symbol lottery results, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is assigned to each of the variation patterns. Specifically, the type of special symbol (symbol type) is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the hit / failure determination result is a big hit, and the value of the obtained variation type selection counter CS1 is “0 to 19”. In this case, a normal (reach) having a fluctuation time of 33 seconds to 42 seconds is defined as a fluctuation pattern. When this normal is determined, a combination command indicating any one of the basic time of 30 seconds and the addition time of 3 seconds to 12 seconds is output as a fluctuation pattern command. Although a detailed description is omitted, in the present embodiment, the addition time is configured in more detail in units of 0.5 seconds in accordance with the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1. When the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0", the addition time is "3 seconds", when it is "1", the addition time is "3.5 seconds", and when it is "2", it is added. If the time is "4 seconds" or "3", the addition time is "4.5 seconds". If the time is "3", the addition time is "5 seconds". If the time is "4", the addition is performed. When the time is “5.5 seconds” and “5”, the addition time is “6 seconds”, and when the time is “6”, the addition time is “6.5 seconds” and “7”. Indicates that the addition time is “7 seconds”, if the addition time is “8”, the addition time is “7.5 seconds”, and if the addition time is “9 to 11”, the addition time is “8 seconds” or “12”. When the addition time is “8.5 seconds”, when the addition time is “13”, the addition time is “9 seconds”, and when the addition time is “14”, the addition time is “9.5 seconds”, “15”. ", The addition time is" 10 seconds ", if it is" 16 ", the addition time is" 10.5 seconds ", and if it is" 17 ", the addition time is" 11 seconds "," 18 ". ", The addition time is set to" 11.5 seconds ", and when it is" 19 ", the addition time is set to" 12 seconds ".

  When the command (basic command) indicating the selected basic time (30 seconds) and the command indicating the addition time (addition command) are notified to the sound lamp control device 113, the information included in the basic command is notified. , A fluctuation pattern (normal reach) is set on the basis of the information, and a reach symbol (type of the third symbol) is set on the basis of information included in the addition command. Accordingly, the type of the third symbol in the middle symbol row Z2 that can be visually recognized first by the player in the reach state is always a specific third symbol (in the present embodiment, the third symbol having the number 1 added thereto). Even if it is configured so as to be a symbol, the reach effect can be executed in various third symbol types without changing the period from the execution of the variable effect to the reaching state.

  When the value of the obtained change type selection counter CS1 is “20 to 169”, a super (reach) with a change time of 43 seconds to 52 seconds is defined as a change pattern. When the supermarket is determined, a command of a combination indicating any of the basic time of 30 seconds and the addition time of 13 seconds to 22 seconds is output as a fluctuation pattern command. In the present embodiment, the addition time is set in more detail in units of 0.5 seconds in accordance with the obtained value of the variation type counter CS1, and the content is the same as the above-described normal pattern. Therefore, detailed description is omitted.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the effect form of the reach effect is configured to be variable according to the information (the number of seconds) included in the addition command, and specifically, the number of seconds included in the addition command is “ In the case of "3 seconds to 12 seconds", a normal reach effect (an effect that is stopped and displayed after the middle symbol row Z2 fluctuates about one turn) is used, and in the case of "13 seconds to 22 seconds", a super reach effect (a middle symbol row) An effect that is stopped and displayed after Z2 fluctuates about two turns) is executed.

  With such a configuration, for example, during the first predetermined period, the variable effect is executed in the same effect mode, and thereafter, when performing the variable effect in which the effect mode branches, the same effect mode is executed. It is possible to set a period based on a basic command (a command including information indicating a basic time) and to set a fluctuation effect after branching based on an addition command (a command including information indicating an additional time). . Therefore, for example, even when the entire fluctuation time is the same, the sound lamp control device 113 can easily change the fluctuation time only by changing the ratio of the basic time and the ratio of the addition time. A fluctuating effect can be set.

  In this embodiment, the basic time (30 seconds) when the normal reach is executed and the basic time (30 seconds) when the super reach is executed are the same, and the fluctuation time set as the addition time is set. It is configured to change the production mode of the reach production according to the length of the reach, but without being limited to this, the basic time for normal reach is set to 30 seconds, and the basic time for super reach is set to 40 seconds. Alternatively, the addition time may be selected from the range of “3 to 12 seconds” only for determining the type of the third symbol.

  Next, when the acquired value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is “170 to 198”, SP (reach) with a variation time of 90 seconds is defined as the variation pattern. When this SP is determined, a combination command indicating a basic time of 55 seconds and an addition time of 35 seconds is output as a variation pattern command. Here, when the SP is determined, the effect in which the fluctuation effect of the third symbol once in the reach state is switched to another fluctuation effect is executed. Even if it is configured that the type of the third symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 in which the can be visually recognized is always a specific third symbol (the third symbol with the numeral 1 in this embodiment), Without giving a sense of incongruity, the display order of the third symbol in the middle symbol row Z2 can be changed in correspondence with the third symbol to be finally stopped during the change, so as in the above-described normal and supermarkets, There is no need to vary the addition time and set the type of the third symbol in the reach state.

  Similarly, in the case where the symbol type is the special figure 1 and the result of the determination of the success or failure is out of range, if the obtained value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is “0 to 179”, the variation time is 8 seconds as the variation pattern. Departure is specified. When this deviation is determined, a combination command indicating a basic time of 8 seconds and an addition time of 0 seconds is output as a fluctuation pattern command. Here, when the deviation is determined, a fluctuation effect in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the deviation without being in the reach state is executed as the fluctuation effect of the third symbol. Therefore, there is no need to set the addition time.

  When the obtained value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is “180 to 198”, the variation pattern has a variation time of 33 seconds to 52 seconds. When the out-of-reach is determined, a combination command indicating any of the basic time of 30 seconds and the addition time of 3 seconds to 22 seconds is output as a fluctuation pattern command. In the present embodiment, the addition time is set in more detail in units of 0.5 seconds in accordance with the obtained value of the variation type counter CS1, and the content is the same as the above-described normal pattern. Therefore, detailed description is omitted. That is, even when the lottery result is out of order, the same variation pattern command is set as in the case where the lottery result is a hit. When the lottery result is out of order, it is necessary to set the type of the third symbol that is stopped and displayed so that the third symbol that is finally stopped and displayed is not a combination that makes a big hit. On the side of the lamp control device 113, a correction process is performed so that the third symbol shifted by one from the setting content of the third symbol type based on the addition command referred to when winning is won. Thus, when the out-of-reach effect is executed, it is possible to easily set an effect mode in which the third symbol is stop-displayed (out-of-stop display) in the vicinity of the third symbol to be a big hit combination.

  On the other hand, when the type of special symbol (symbol type) is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the result of the hit determination is a big hit, and the value of the obtained variation type selection counter CS1 is “0 to 99”. In this case, a special reach having a fluctuation time of 40 seconds is defined as a fluctuation pattern. When the special reach is determined, a command of a combination indicating a basic time of 10 seconds and an addition time of 30 seconds is output as a variation pattern command. When the value of the obtained variation type selection counter CS1 is “100 to 198”, a special reach with a variation time of 10 seconds is defined as a variation pattern. When the special reach is determined, a combination command indicating a basic time of 10 seconds and an addition time of 0 seconds is output as a fluctuation pattern command.

  Here, in the present embodiment, when the second special symbol lottery is executed in a state where the normal state is set, as described above with reference to FIG. 232 (b) to FIG. The effect is configured to be performed. When the command (basic command) indicating the basic time (10 seconds) and the command (addition command) indicating the additional time (30 seconds) are notified to the sound lamp control device 113, the commands are included in the basic command. A fluctuation pattern (special fluctuation) is set based on information to be set, and a special reach is set based on information included in the addition command. More specifically, when a basic command indicating a basic time of 10 seconds is notified as a variation pattern command of the second special symbol in a state where the normal state is set, as shown in FIG. An effect mode of a special fluctuation effect in which the third symbol fluctuates in the vertical direction is set. Then, at the timing when the basic time elapses, an effect mode is set in which the third symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped) as shown in FIG. 233 (a). Then, when the addition command indicating the addition time of 0 second has been received (when the variation pattern is a special deviation), the third symbol is displayed as it is and the variation effect is ended.

  On the other hand, when the addition command indicating the addition time of 30 seconds has been received (when the fluctuation pattern is the special reach), the third temporarily stopped as shown in FIG. 233 (b) and FIG. 234. A fluctuation effect in which the symbol is restarted is set. The detailed effect form of the variable effect in which the temporarily stopped third symbol is restarted will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the details of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 239 (b) is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 239 (b), the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the tenth embodiment has a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da, a second special symbol holding ball storage area 203db, and a normal symbol holding ball storage area. 203dc, a first special symbol holding ball number counter 203dd, a second special symbol holding ball number counter 203de, a normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d, a game state storage area 203g, a time saving counter 203h, a probability change counter 203ja, a jackpot start flag 203jb, a jackpot Medium flag 203jcc, probability change setting flag 203jd, probability variation pass counter 203je, winning number counter 203jf, remaining ball timer flag 203jg, remaining ball timer 203jh, probability variation valid flag 203ji, probability variation valid timer 203jj, ejection number counter 203jk, And at least a memory area 203Z.

  Of the various configurations of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 according to the tenth embodiment, some of the configurations having the same names as those of the above-described embodiments are denoted by different reference numerals for convenience of description. Have the same configuration, and the detailed description is omitted, even if the reference numerals are different, they have the same contents.

  The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da has four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area). Each of these areas has a special random number counter C1 and a special hit type counter C2. , And the value of the stop type selection counter C3 are stored.

  More specifically, the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 are acquired at the timing when the ball wins (starts winning) in the first entrance 64, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding number). Among the vacant areas of 1 area to 4th reserved area, the areas are stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when a special symbol lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da are transferred to the execution area. It is shifted (moved), and based on each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery of a special symbol is made.

  When data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process of packing the winning data stored in the other reserved areas (the reserved second area to the reserved fourth area) into the reserved area having the smaller area number (the reserved first area to the reserved third area). Done. In the present control example, in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da, data is shifted only for holding areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) in which winning data is stored.

  The second special symbol holding ball storage area 203db has four holding areas, similarly to the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da. In the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203db, each counter value obtained based on the winning winning in the second entrance 640 is stored. The method of storing the counter value and the like are the same as those in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203dc has one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area). Each of these areas stores an ordinary winning random number counter C5. More specifically, the value of the counter C5 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (first holding area to first holding area). Of the vacant areas (four areas), the area numbers are stored in ascending order of area numbers (first to fourth). That is, similarly to the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main control device 110, when a lottery for a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter C5 stored in the first reserved area of the ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203dc is shifted to the execution area ( Is moved), and a determination such as a lottery for a normal symbol is made based on the value of the counter C5 stored in the execution area.

  When the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that it is the same as in the case of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db. Then, a shift process is performed to pack the winning data stored in the other reserved areas into the reserved area having the smaller area number. The data shift is also performed only for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

  The first special symbol holding ball number counter 203dd is a variable display (third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the ball entering the first entrance 64 (start winning). This is a counter for counting the number of retained balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable display performed by the symbol display device 81 up to four times. The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd has an initial value set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of suspended balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value becomes 4. Are incremented by one. On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is decremented by one each time a new special symbol change display is executed.

  The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd (the number of times N1 of the variable display in the first special symbol is changed) is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by a reserved ball number command. The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 each time the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is changed.

  Each time the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is changed, the sound ramp control device 113 displays the variable display retained in the main control device 110 by the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. The value of the number of retained balls can be obtained. As a result, the number of spheres of variation display that is managed by the first special symbol retention sphere number counter 223c1 of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed to the actual variation display that is suspended in the main control device 110 due to noise or the like. Even if the number of balls is deviated, the deviation can be corrected by the next received ball number command.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and displays the reserved ball number for notifying the display control device 114 of the reserved ball number every time the reserved ball number changes. Send the ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball count symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball count notified by the display reserved ball count command.

  The second special symbol holding ball number counter 203de is a variable display (third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry into the second entrance 640 (start winning). This is a counter for counting the number of retained balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable display performed by the symbol display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de is set to zero, and every time a ball enters the second entrance 640 and the number of retained balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value becomes 4. Are incremented by one. On the other hand, the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203de is decremented by one each time a new special symbol change display is executed. The value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de is also notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by a reserved ball number command, similarly to the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd.

  The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d counts up to four times the number of holding balls (the number of waiting times) of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67. It is a counter that counts up to. The ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d has the same contents as the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d used in the above-described first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The probability change counter 203ja is a counter for indicating a state in which the special symbol high-probability state is set, and a value corresponding to the case where the special symbol high-probability state is set is set. After the jackpot game ends, a value corresponding to the winning jackpot type is set in the probability change counter 203ja (see S2602 in FIG. 253). And when the big hit game is won, it is cleared to 0. When the value of the probability change counter 203ja is larger than 0, that is, in a state where the special symbol high probability state is set, the value is decremented by one every time the special symbol change is stopped and displayed (S622 in FIG. 248). reference).

  In the present embodiment, when the special symbol high probability state is set, the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is set, and the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is subtracted based on the special symbol lottery (fluctuation). When the value of becomes zero, the probable change state ends and the time shift state is set, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a special symbol is executed until the next big hit game is executed. May be configured to continue the high probability state of. In this case, the value of the probability change counter 203ja may be set to "10000".

  Further, in the present embodiment, as a condition for terminating the probability change state, that is, as a condition for subtracting the value of the probability variation counter 203ja, the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is subtracted based on the number of special symbol lotteries (changes). Although only the condition is set, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when an end condition that can be satisfied by the contents of various processes executed by the main control device 110 is satisfied, the value of the probability change counter 203ja is subtracted. May be configured. Specifically, when the lottery result of each symbol lottery executed in a state where the high probability state of the special symbol is set is a predetermined lottery result (for example, a special out-of-special lottery), Even when the result is a predetermined lottery result (for example, winning for a special public figure), the value of the probability change counter 203ja may be subtracted, or the ball may enter a specific entrance (for example, The value of the probability change counter 203ja may be decremented based on the ball entering the first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, or the like.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the value of the probability change counter 203ja is configured to be decremented by one. The subtraction may be performed, or the subtraction may be performed such that the value of the probable counter 203ja becomes “0” regardless of the current value of the probable counter 203ja. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how long the probable change state continues, and to interest the player in the game in the probable change state.

  Further, the condition for terminating the probable change state may be changed according to the content of the condition for setting the probable change state (big hit type). Thereby, not only can the player execute the jackpot game, but also the player can be interested in the jackpot type corresponding to the executed jackpot game, and the interest of the game can be improved. .

  The jackpot start flag 203jb is a flag indicating whether to start a jackpot. If the jackpot start flag 203jb is on, it means the timing to start the jackpot, and if it is off, it means that it is not the timing to start the jackpot. This big hit start flag 203jb is set to ON when it is the end timing of the variable display indicating the big hit. In addition, the jackpot start flag 203jb is set to off when the start of the jackpot is set (see S2403 in FIG. 251).

  The big hit flag 203jc is a flag indicating whether or not a big hit (special game state) is being performed. If the big hit flag 203jc is on, it means that a big hit is being made, and if it is off, it means that there is no big hit. The big hit flag 203jc becomes a big hit by a special symbol lottery, and the big hit (special game state) is started and set to ON (see S2403 in FIG. 251). Also, it is set to off at the end of the big hit (special game state) (see S2605 in FIG. 253). Then, in the special symbol variation process 10 (see FIG. 247), it is determined whether or not a big hit is being made by referring to the big hit flag 203jc (see S601 in FIG. 247).

  The probability change setting flag 203jd is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the game state to the probability change state after the jackpot game. In the present pachinko machine 10, whether or not the gaming state is set to the probable change state is determined by determining whether the ball is at a specific gate (special discharge channel 2650e2 (see FIG. 196)) provided in the V winning device 2650 during the jackpot game. It is determined by whether or not the ball has entered (flowed down). Here, when it is detected that the ball has entered (flowed down) the specific gate (passing through the certain-variable switch provided in the specific gate), the certain-variable setting flag 203jd is set to ON (S2715 in FIG. 254). . On the other hand, the probability change setting flag 203jd is set to off at the end of the jackpot (see S2605 in FIG. 253). The probability change setting flag 203jd is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to a state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is turned on (when the power is turned on). In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, it is set to off.

  If the probability change setting flag 203jd is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not the probability change switch has passed before the power is turned off. If it is determined that the power has passed, the probability change setting flag 203jd is determined. May be configured to be officially set to ON and return. In this case, it is possible to determine whether or not the power has passed through the probable variable switch before the power is turned off, based on whether or not a probable variable passage counter 203m described later is a value greater than zero. With this configuration, it is possible to judge whether or not the power is turned off and the power is turned on again by rewriting only the probable change setting flag 203jd in a state where the power is turned off, thereby reducing damage to the game store. it can.

  The probability change passage counter 203je is a counter for counting the number of balls that have passed through the probability change switch (flowed down the specific gate) in one round of the jackpot game (five rounds in the present embodiment). It should be noted that it is possible to determine whether or not all of the game balls that have won the specific winning opening 2650a of the V winning device 2650 have been discharged, based on the sum of the probable variable passage counter 203je and the discharge number counter 203jk described later. The probable variable passage counter 203je is updated by being incremented by one when the ball passes the probable switch (flows down a specific gate). In addition, after performing a process of determining whether or not the number of balls won in the V winning device 2650 matches the number of ejected balls, the initial value is reset to “0”. It should be noted that the probability change passage counter 203je is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

  The winning number counter 203jf is a counter for counting the number of balls that have won the specific winning opening 2650a of the V winning device 2650 in one round in the jackpot game, and when the winning in the specific winning opening 2650a is detected. Based on this, it is updated by being added one by one. On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of winnings in the V-winning device 2650 (the value of the winning number counter 203jf) and the number of dischargeds (the total value of the discharging number counter 203jk and the positive variable passing counter 203je) are reduced by one. After it is determined whether or not they match, it is reset to the initial value “0”. The value of the winning number counter 203jf is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

  The remaining ball timer flag 203jg is a flag indicating whether or not it is a ball throwing period after the completion of one round and the specific winning opening 2650a is closed. When the remaining ball timer flag 203jg is set to ON, it means that the ball is in a ball-running period. While the remaining ball timer flag 203jg is set to ON, the remaining ball timer 203r described later is incremented by one and updated. The remaining ball timer 203r is a counter for determining a time since the specific winning opening 2650a is closed, and determines whether or not a time necessary for discharging the game ball in the V winning device 2650 has elapsed. It is a counter for.

  The remaining ball timer 203jh is a time required for discharging the prize-winning ball to the V-prize device 2650, when one preset round is completed and the specific prize port 2650a of the V-prize device 2650 is closed. Is a counter for determining whether has elapsed. In the present embodiment, the time required until the winning ball is discharged to the V winning device 2650 is 0.5 seconds, and in the present embodiment, the counter value corresponding to 0.8 seconds is previously set to the remaining ball timer 203jh. Is set as the upper limit. Based on the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203jh (0.8 seconds in the present embodiment), it is determined whether or not the number of winnings to the V-winning device 2650 and the number of dischargeds match. You. If they do not match, an error command is set and that effect is reported. Therefore, it can be notified early that the game ball is clogged in the V winning device 2650.

  If the winning number and the discharge number do not match, the dedicated flag is set to ON, and if the flag is ON, the certain-variable setting flag 203jd is turned on even if the game ball passes through the certain-variable switch. May not be set. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress improper assignment of a probable change state.

  The probable change valid flag 203ji indicates that the game ball has passed through the probable change switch (entered the V region) after the distributing member has been switched to an arrangement in which the ball cannot be distributed to a specific gate, and the passing (ingress) is set. This is a flag for determining whether or not the ball is valid. When the probability change valid flag 203ji is set to ON, it indicates that the game ball passes through the probability change switch during a normal period.

  The probable change valid timer 203jj is a counter for counting the time since the above-described probable change valid flag 203ji was set to ON. After the V-prong is switched to the non-V side arrangement, the period required for normal passage through the probabilistic switch can be determined by the probable change valid timer 203jj. In the present embodiment, the time required for the game ball reaching the V-prong to pass through the probable change switch is 0.3 second. The upper limit value of the probable change valid timer 203jj is set to a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds, and even after passing through the probable change switch, it is determined to be illegal and not to be passed.

  As a result, a game ball can be illegally entered into the V region and passed through the probable change switch, a game ball can be pushed up with a piano wire or the like from below the probable change switch and passed therethrough, or a magnetic sensor can be erroneously detected by radio waves or the like. Damage caused by fraudulent activities.

  The discharge number counter 203jk is a counter for counting the number of game balls discharged from the variable winning device 65 in one round. The number-of-discharges counter 203jk is reset to 0, which is the initial value, after it is determined that the number of balls winning the variable prize device 65 matches the number of discharges.

  Next, configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 243 to 245. First, the configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 243 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the tenth embodiment. In the tenth embodiment, a normal middle special figure 2 effect selection table 222ja and a probability change effect selection table 222jb are added to the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the first embodiment described above, The difference is that the contents of the table 222a and the contents of the operation scenario table 222b are changed in correspondence with the present embodiment. The details of the contents of the variation pattern selection table 222a and the contents of the operation scenario table 222b will not be described in detail, but various values associated with the changes of the main control device 110 are changed. Is what it is.

  First, the contents of the normal middle special figure 2 effect selection table 222ja will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 244 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal middle special figure 2 effect selection table 222ja. This normal middle special figure 2 effect selection table 222ja shows the third symbol of the third symbol when the variation pattern with the addition time of 30 seconds is selected from the second special symbol variation executed while the normal state is set. It is a data table that is referred to when selecting an effect mode, and is made to correspond to the lottery result (win / fail judgment result) of the second special symbol lottery, the number of special figure 2 reservations, the number of special figure 1 reservations, and the value of the effect counter 223f. Different production modes (production contents).

  In the present embodiment, when the second special symbol change is executed during the normal state, a common out-of-reach effect is executed in accordance with the basic time (10 seconds) (see FIG. 233 (a)). The pseudo-fluctuation effect (see FIGS. 233 (b) to 234) is executed during the addition time (30 seconds) as the effect content (effect mode) selected with reference to the normal middle special figure 2 effect selection table 222ja. Is configured.

  Specifically, when the lottery result is a jackpot and the number of special figure 2 reservations is 3, the value of the effect counter 223f obtained regardless of the number of special figure 1 reservations changes to a range of “0 to 79”. "Pseudo 3 effects" is specified as a pattern and "special pseudo 2 effects" is specified as a variation pattern in the range of "80 to 99". Regardless of the value of the effect counter 223f acquired in the range of “0 to 99”, “pseudo 2 effect” as a variation pattern, and when the number of special figure 2 reservations is 1, regardless of the number of special figure 1 reservations The value of the effect counter 223f is defined as “pseudo 1 effect” as a variation pattern in the range of “0 to 89”, and “90 to 99” as “special pseudo 4 effect” as a variation pattern.

  In addition, when the lottery result is a big hit and the special figure 2 reservation number is 0, “special end effect” is performed when the special figure 1 reservation number is 1 to 4, and when the special figure 1 reservation number is 0. "Simulation-free production" is set.

  When the lottery result is out of order, when the special figure 2 reservation number is 3, the value of the effect counter 223f acquired regardless of the special figure 1 reservation number is in the range of “0 to 99” and the variation pattern is “ When the number of reserved special figure 2 is two, the value of the effect counter 223f acquired regardless of the number of reserved special figure 1 is within the range of “0 to 99” and the variation pattern is “ When the pseudo figure 2 effect has the special figure 2 reservation number of 1, the value of the effect counter 223f acquired regardless of the special figure 1 reservation number is in a range of “0 to 99”, and the fluctuation pattern is “pseudo 1 effect”. However, when the special figure 2 reservation number is 0, “simulation-free production” is defined.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when setting the effect form of the pseudo fluctuation effect of the second special symbol, the presence / absence of the number of special figure 2 reservations and the number of special figure 1 reservations is determined, and the next execution is performed. It is configured to execute a pseudo fluctuation effect in an effect mode corresponding to a special symbol lottery. With this configuration, it is possible to make it easy to think that the pseudo fluctuation effect executed during one special symbol fluctuation period is a fluctuation effect corresponding to the next special symbol fluctuation.

  Further, since the number of pseudo fluctuations executed in the pseudo fluctuation effect (the number of temporary stoppages of the third symbol) is configured to correspond to the acquired number of reserved special figure 2 reservations, during the normal state. It can be assumed that all of the special figure 2 reservations acquired during the game executed per day are used. Therefore, when the pseudo-variation effect in which the jackpot has been won is executed, the player thinks that the jackpot has been won as a result of acquiring many special figure 2 reservations during the per-figure game executed during the normal state. Can be made. In addition, when the pseudo-variation effect that has been won is executed, it is assumed that all the special figure 2 reservations have been consumed, and then the variable effect using the special figure 2 reservation is executed (Chance Zone Continuation), it is possible to provide the player with an extraordinary effect.

  Further, in the present embodiment, since the pseudo fluctuation effect (special pseudo 2 effect, pseudo 4 effect) which is set only when the jackpot is won is provided, the number of pseudo fluctuations executed in the pseudo fluctuation effect, The player can be interested in the two reserved numbers.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 245, the contents of the probable changing effect selection table 222jb will be described. FIG. 245 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the during-probability change effect selection table 222jb. The probable change effect selection table 222jb is a data table that is referred to when setting a fluctuating effect when a fluctuating pattern having a basic time of 30 seconds is selected as a fluctuating pattern of the special symbol fluctuation executed during the probable changing state. It is.

  As shown in FIG. 245, different rendering modes are defined according to the type of the special symbol, the lottery result, and the value of the rendering counter 223f. Specifically, when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the lottery result is a probability change jackpot, the value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of “0 to 49” and “probability change single reach”. However, “double reach” is defined in the range of “50 to 99”, “double reach” is defined when the jackpot is normal, and “non-reach” is defined when the jackpot is out of range.

  When the symbol type is the second special symbol (special symbol 2) and the lottery result is a probability change jackpot, the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 49", and "special double reach" is set to " "Probable change double reach" is defined in the range of "50 to 99", and in the case of a deviation, "double reach" is set in the range of "0 to 4" and "double reach" is set in the range of "5 to 10". The “variable double reach” is defined as “non-reach” in the range of “11 to 99”.

  With such a configuration, in both the case where the first special symbol lottery is executed and the case where the second special symbol lottery is executed in the probable change state, the “double reach” (see FIG. 235 (a)). (A reach effect in which two or more third symbols including the third symbol corresponding to the "reach state") is executed, so that when "double reach" is executed for the player, It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether the third symbol variation effect corresponding to the special symbol lottery is being executed.

  Furthermore, when "special double reach" is set, the effect mode of "double reach" is set first, and then the effect mode in which the effect mode is changed to "probable double reach" shown in FIG. 235 (b). Is executed. Therefore, even when “double reach” is executed in response to the first special symbol lottery, it is possible to play a game while expecting to be promoted to “probable double reach” on the way. In this “special double reach”, the timing at which the staging mode of the reach effect is changed is the timing at which the middle symbol row Z2 makes one or two turns, but the timing is not limited to this, and the player can use the operation buttons 22 The effect mode may be changed based on the timing at which is operated.

  Next, the flow of a game in the tenth embodiment will be briefly described with reference to FIG. FIG. 246 is a transition diagram showing a game flow in the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 246, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to set three game states as a game state: a normal state, a probable change state, and a time saving state. In the normal state, the first special symbol lottery is configured to be easier to execute than the second special symbol lottery. In the probable change state and the time saving state, the second special symbol lottery is executed more than the first special symbol lottery. It is configured to be easy.

  If the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state wins the jackpot (the jackpot probability is 1/200), the normal jackpot game and the probable jackpot game are executed with a probability of 1/2, and to the specific gate during the jackpot game. When the ball flows down, the state shifts to the positive change state, and when the ball does not flow down to the specific gate, the state shifts to the time saving state.

  The probable change state is configured so that the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times or continues until the jackpot is won. If the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times without the jackpot being won during the probable change state, the time saving is reduced. Transition to state. This time saving state is configured to continue until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times after the jackpot game ends. For example, if the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, Becomes 100 times, and when the state shifts from the probable change state to the time reduction state, the number of times of reduction becomes 50 times.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in Tenth Embodiment>
Next, the contents of control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 247 to 255. In the tenth embodiment, as described above, in a state in which the lottery right of the first special symbol (special figure 1 reservation) and the lottery right of the second special symbol (special figure 2 reservation) are both stored, The point that the lottery of the second special symbol is executed with priority. By causing a ball to flow down to a specific gate provided in the V winning device 2650 during the execution of the jackpot game, a special symbol high probability state is set after the jackpot game ends. Point. As a termination condition for terminating the probable change state which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, a special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) in addition to the termination condition that is satisfied when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery. This embodiment is different from the above-described embodiments in that an end condition that is satisfied in the case of the above is provided.

  In order to configure the pachinko machine 10 having the above-described difference, as a control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, a special symbol variation process 10 (see S154 in FIG. 247) described later, and a normal symbol variation Processing 10 (see S166 in FIG. 249), through gate passing processing (see S157 in FIG. 250), and jackpot control processing 10 (see S1074 in FIG. 251) are executed. Other control contents are the same as any of the control processing contents executed in the pachinko machine 10 of each of the above-described embodiments, and thus detailed description will be omitted.

  First, the special symbol variation process 10 (S154) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 247 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process 10 (S154). The special symbol variation process 10 (S154) is executed in the timer interrupt process, and is a variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 or a third symbol display device 81 performed by the third symbol display device 81. This is a process for controlling a variable display of three symbols.

  In the special symbol variation process 10 (S154), first, it is determined whether or not the present is a special symbol big hit (big hit game) (S601). Specifically, it is determined whether the big hit flag 203jc is on. If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is in a jackpot (during a jackpot game) (S601: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  In the process of S601, if it is determined that the special symbol is not during the big hit (big hit game) (S601: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S602). ), If the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing (S602: No), that is, if a new special symbol lottery (change) can be executed, the second special symbol holding ball number counter The value of 203de (the number of times N2 of the variable display is held based on the lottery of the second special symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the second special symbol holding ball counter 203de is larger than 0 (S604). If the value (N2) of the second special symbol retaining ball number counter 203de is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (N2) of the second special symbol retaining ball number counter 203de is subtracted by 1 (S605) and changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command indicating the value of the performed second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de is set (S606). The set number-of-spheres command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the audio lamp control device 113 in an external output process of a main process described later executed by the MPU 201. Sent. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de from the reserved ball number command and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the RAM 223. Of these, the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c2 corresponding to the second special symbol is stored.

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the processing of S606, the data stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db is shifted (S607). In the process of S607, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, in each area, such as the first area on hold → the execution area, the second area on hold → the first area on hold, the third area on hold → the second area on hold, the fourth area on the hold → third area on hold, etc. The data is shifted, and the process proceeds to S608.

  On the other hand, in the process of S604, if the value (N2) of the second special symbol retaining ball number counter 203de is 0 (S204: No), the value of the first special symbol retaining ball number counter 203dd (the first special symbol The number of times the variable display is suspended based on the lottery N1) is acquired (S208), and it is determined whether the acquired value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is larger than 0 (S609).

  In the processing of S609, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is 0 (S609: No), this processing ends as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S609, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S609: Yes), the first special symbol reserved ball number is set. The value (N1) of the counter 603dd is decremented by 1 (S610), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd changed by the calculation is set (S611). The set number-of-spheres command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the audio lamp control device 113 in an external output process of a main process described later executed by the MPU 201. Sent. When receiving the reserved ball count command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 203dd from the reserved ball count command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball count counter 223c of the RAM 223. The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c1 corresponding to the second special symbol is stored.

  After setting the number-of-retained-balls command by the process of S611, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da is shifted by the same method as the process of S607 (S612), and the process is performed by the process of S608. Move to. In the processing of S608 performed after the processing of S607 or S612, a special symbol variation start process for starting variable display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S608), and this process ends. In this special symbol change start process, similar to the special symbol big hit determination process (see S306 in FIG. 41) executed in the special symbol change start process (see S205 in FIG. 41) of the first embodiment described above, A process for determining a special symbol lottery result and a process for selecting a special symbol variation pattern as in the special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S307 in FIG. 41) are executed.

  In the process of S602, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S602: Yes), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S614). In the process of S614, the value of the fluctuation time counter for measuring the fluctuation time of the special symbol is updated, and the display of the first symbol display device 81 is updated in accordance with the updated value of the fluctuation time counter. In this fluctuation time counter, a value indicating the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern selected in the special symbol fluctuation start process (S608) is set at the start timing of the special symbol fluctuation, and thereafter, the process of S614 is executed. It is updated (subtracted) every time. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation time has elapsed in the processing of S613 (S613: Yes), that is, when the value of the fluctuation time counter updated in the processing of S614 is 0, the first symbol display device 37 is displayed. The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol is set (S615). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by the special symbol change start process (S608). When the special symbol change start process (S608) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1. If the special symbol is a big hit, the special symbol is determined according to the value of the first hit type counter C2. Any of the jackpots A to E is determined.

  In the present control example, when the big hit A occurs, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, when the big hit B is turned on, the red LED is turned on. , The green LED is turned on, and in the case of the jackpot D, the blue LED and the green LED are turned on. In the case of a disconnection, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next change display is started, but may be turned on only for a few seconds after the change stops.

  After the process of S615 is completed, when the variable display being executed on the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is: It is determined whether it is a special symbol jackpot (S616). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S616: Yes), the jackpot start flag 203jb is set to ON (S617), and the values of the time saving counter 203h and the probability change counter 203ja are cleared (set to 0) (S618). ), And proceeds to the process of S619. When the jackpot start flag is set to ON by the process of S617, when the jackpot control process 10 (see S1074 in FIG. 251) of the main process executed by the main control device 110 is executed, the process proceeds to S2401: Yes. The process branches to set an opening command (S2402). As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, a big hit effect is started.

  In the processing of S616, if the result of the current lottery is out of the special symbol (S616: No), the processing of S617 and S618 is skipped, the updating processing is executed (S620), and thereafter, the processing shifts to S619.

  The state command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the audio lamp control device 113 in an external output process (S1001) of a main process described later executed by the MPU 201. Sent to. Upon receiving the status command, the sound ramp control device 113 acquires the game status included in the status command. Thereby, the state grasped by the sound lamp control device 113 can be made to coincide with the actual state of the pachinko machine 10.

  Next, the contents of the update process (S620 in FIG. 247) executed in the special symbol change process 10 (see S154 in FIG. 247) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 248 is a flowchart showing the contents of the update processing (S620). The update process (S620) is a process executed when the change time of the special symbol change has elapsed (when the change is stopped), and updates the remaining period of the period in which the probable change state is continuously set. Processing for updating the remaining period of the period in which the time reduction state is continuously set is executed.

  When the update process (S620) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is larger than 0, that is, whether the current state is the special symbol high probability state (S621), and the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is 0. If it is determined that the value is greater than (S621: Yes), the value of the probability change counter 203ja is decremented by 1 (updated) (S622), and then it is determined whether or not the updated value of the probability change counter 203ja is 0 (S623). If it is determined that the value is 0 (S623: Yes), the time saving state is set in the gaming state storage area 203g (S624), and the process proceeds to S625. When it is determined that the value of the probability change counter 203ja is not larger than 0 (is 0) in the process of S621 (S621; No), the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is not present because the special symbol is not in the high probability state at present. Is skipped, and the process proceeds to S625.

  In the process of S623, the process of S624 is also skipped when the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is not 0, that is, when the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is larger than 0 and the probability variation state (high probability state of the special symbol) continues. Then, the process proceeds to S625.

  In the process of S625, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203h is greater than 0. If it is determined that the value is greater than 0, that is, if the current state is a normal symbol high probability state (S625: Yes), the time reduction is performed. The value of the counter 203h is decremented by 1 (S626), and it is determined whether the value of the time reduction counter 203h after the subtraction is 0 (S627). The horse that has determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203h is 0 in the process of S627 sets the normal state in the gaming state storage area 203g (S628), and sets the value of the probability change counter 203ja, the value of the time reduction counter 203h, and the current game. A status command indicating the status is set (S629), and the process ends. Further, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203h is not larger than 0 (it is 0) in the processing of S625 (S625: No), or it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203h is not 0 in the processing of S627. In this case (S627: No), the process directly proceeds to S629.

  Next, the contents of the ordinary symbol variation process 10 (S166) will be described with reference to FIG. The normal symbol variation process 10 (S166) includes various processes related to the ordinary symbol variation (lottery) (the process of executing the ordinary symbol variation, the process of setting the variation mode (variation time) of the ordinary symbol variation to be executed, and the execution). The process of updating the normal symbol fluctuation in the middle, the process of stopping the normal symbol fluctuation, and the process of determining the game content of the normal symbol per game executed when the result of the normal symbol lottery is a win. In addition, a part of the processing of selecting the fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the processing of determining the game content of the general symbol per game are partially included in the normal symbol fluctuation processing of the first embodiment (see S106 in FIG. 48). They differ in that they are changed, and are otherwise the same. The same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the ordinary symbol variation process 10 (S166) is executed, first, the same processes of S1101 to S1113 as the above-described ordinary symbol variation process (see S106 in FIG. 48) are executed. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is during the time reduction (normally high probability state of the symbol) by referring to the value of the time reduction counter 203h (S1161), and is determined to be during the time reduction (normal symbol high probability state). If this is done (S1161: Yes), the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is set to 3 seconds (S1162), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1161 that it is not during the working hours (normally high probability state of the symbol) (S1161: No), the variation time of the ordinary symbol is set to 10 seconds (S1163), and the process ends.

  In addition, the same processing as S1115 to S1118, which is the same as the above-described normal symbol variation process (see S106 in FIG. 48), is executed to determine whether or not the current gaming state is during the time reduction (normal symbol high probability state) by the time reduction counter 203h. It is determined with reference to the value (S1118), and when it is determined that the time is during the time saving (normally high probability state of the symbol) (S1118: Yes), the opening time of the electric accessory 640 is determined as the game content of the game per ordinary figure. Sets the game content (opening operation) x 2 times per second (S1165), executes the process of S1121, and ends the process. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1118 that the time is not during working hours (normally high probability state of the symbol) (S1118: No), the opening time of the electric accessory 640 is 5 seconds × 1 The content of the game (opening operation) is set (S1164), the process of S1121 is executed, and the process ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the hit probability of the ordinary symbol is lower in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol than in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol (see FIG. 240 (b)), and Although the normal symbol fluctuation time is set to be long, the period during which the electric accessory 640 is opened in the normal symbol winning game executed when a winning is won is configured to be long. With such a configuration, in a normal state (a low probability state of a normal symbol), a situation occurs in which a ball cannot be made to enter the second entrance 640 when a winning is performed with a low probability per a general figure. Can be suppressed. In addition, since the upper limit number (four) of special figure 2 reservations can be easily acquired during one game per ordinary game, a plurality of second special symbol lotteries are performed in the chance zone (see FIG. 233 (b)). The game can be easily executed twice, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Next, the contents of the through gate passage processing (see S157) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 250 is a flowchart showing the content of the through gate passage process (see S157). This through-gate passage processing (see S157) is different from the through-gate passage processing of the above-described first embodiment (see S107 in FIG. 49) by using the acquired value of the ordinary random number counter C5 to determine the actual success / failure. Is executed (prior to execution of the win / fail determination (see S1111) in the ordinary symbol variation process 10 (see S166 in FIG. 249)), the lottery result (win / fail determination result) is obtained in advance. The processing is different in that a processing for performing the processing is added, and the other processing is the same. The same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the through gate passage process (see S157) is executed, first, the same processes as S1201 to S1205 as the through gate passage process (see S107 in FIG. 49) of the above-described first embodiment are executed. A lottery result is obtained in advance based on the random number 10 table 202jc (S1211), and a general-purpose winning information command including a normal hit determination result (prior determination result obtained in the process of S1211) is set (S1212). The process ends.

  The general-purpose winning information command set in the process of S1212 is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by the same process as the winning information command indicating the pre-determination result of the special symbol set in each embodiment described above. You. With such a configuration, it is possible to determine in advance the lottery result of the ordinary symbol lottery corresponding to the lottery right of the ordinary symbol stored and stored, and to execute an effect based on the preliminary determination result.

  Specifically, in the state in which the chance zone is set, that is, in the state where the second special symbol lottery is executed based on the fact that the game per game is executed during the normal state, When the winning information command includes information indicating the winning of the normal symbol, an effect of continuing the chance zone until the next time the normal winning game is executed can be executed. In this case, even if the second special symbol lottery is completed and the first special symbol lottery is executed before the next regular symbol game is executed, the first special symbol lottery is executed. As an effect mode of the variable effect executed correspondingly, instead of an effect mode corresponding to the first special symbol lottery (for example, an effect mode in which the third symbol is fluctuated in the horizontal direction shown in FIG. 231 (b)), It is preferable that an effect mode corresponding to the 2 special symbol lottery (for example, an effect mode in which the third symbol is changed in the vertical direction shown in FIG. 232 (b)) is set. With this configuration, in the case where a plurality of games per regular figure are executed within a predetermined period in the normal state, the chance zone can be set for a long period of time, and the effect can be enhanced.

  In addition, if the chance zone is not completed even though the second special symbol lottery has been executed a predetermined number of times since the chance zone was set, the player will be notified that the next game per ordinary map will be executed soon. Can be grasped, so that the player can be interested in the number of times of the second special symbol lottery executed in the chance zone. In addition, in the present embodiment, as a variable effect corresponding to the second special symbol lottery executed during the chance zone, a pseudo variable effect of temporarily stopping the third symbol a plurality of times is configured. That is, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the number of executions of the second special symbol lottery. Therefore, it is possible to provide a pleasure of allowing the player to predict when the chance zone ends or whether the chance zone is extended.

  Next, the content of the jackpot control process 10 (S1074) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 251 is a flowchart showing the content of the jackpot control process 10 (S1074). The jackpot control process 10 (S1074) is a process executed in the main process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 55). This is a process for executing various effects and opening or closing the special winning opening (large opening) 2650a.

  In the jackpot control process 10 (S1074), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot start flag 203jb is on (S2401). If it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203jb is on (S2401: Yes), a jackpot opening command is set (S2402), and the jackpot start flag 203jb is turned off and the jackpot middle flag 203jc is set on (S2403). Then, the present process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2401 that the big hit start flag 203jb is off (S2401: No), then the special symbol big hit is currently being made (that is, the big hit flag 203jc is on). ) It is determined whether or not (S2404). In the process of S2404, if it is determined that the present is not a big hit (the big hit flag 203jc is off) (S2404: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S2404, when it is determined that the present is a big hit (the big hit flag 203jc is on) (S2404: Yes), it is then determined whether or not it is a new round start timing (S2404: Yes). S2405).

  If it is determined in the processing of S2405 that it is the start timing of a new round (S2405: Yes), a jackpot operation setting processing for setting the opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 2650a according to the number of rounds is executed (S2406). ), End this processing. Details of the jackpot operation setting processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2405 that it is not the start timing of a new round (S2405: No), then it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending period of the currently executed round (S2407). . Here, in the present control example, when the final round of the jackpot has ended, it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending period. If it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending period (S2407: Yes), the ending command is set (S2408), and the process ends. The ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 in the external output processing of the main processing executed by the MPU 201. . When receiving the ending command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits an ending command for display to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, an ending effect (see FIG. 236) indicating the end of the big hit is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2407, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending period currently being executed (S2407: No), it is next determined whether it is the end timing of the jackpot (S2409). Here, the jackpot end timing indicates a case where the execution period of the ending effect has elapsed. In the process of S2409, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the jackpot (S2409: Yes), a jackpot end process for setting a game state after the end of the jackpot is executed (S2410), and this process ends. Details of the jackpot end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S2409, when it is determined that the timing is not the end of the big hit (S2409: No), a winning process for performing control according to winning in the specific winning opening 2650a is executed (S2411), and the identification is performed. Abnormality processing is performed to determine whether the ball that has entered the winning opening 2650a has been normally ejected (S2412), and then this processing ends. Details of the winning process and the abnormal process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 254 and 255.

  Next, the details of the jackpot operation setting process (S2406) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 252 is a flowchart showing the jackpot operation setting process (S2406). The jackpot operation setting process (S2406) is executed in the jackpot control process, and as described above, is a process for setting the opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 2650a according to the number of rounds.

  When the jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 252) is started, first, it is determined whether it is the start timing of five rounds (S2501). If it is determined in the process of S2501 that it is the start timing of the fifth round (S2501: Yes), the start of the operation scenario of the V character object (flow path solenoid (positive-change solenoid)) 65k is set (S2502), and the jackpot is won. An opening pattern of the specific winning opening 2650a corresponding to the type is set (S2503).

  Here, although a detailed description is omitted, in the present embodiment, the content of the round game executed in a specific number of rounds (fifth round) among the round games executed plural times during one big hit game Is different according to the jackpot type. Specifically, only in the case of a specific jackpot type (probably variable jackpot), as a fifth round game, V is set so that the ball can easily flow down to a specific gate. The round game for operating the accessory is configured to be executed. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the probability that the ball will flow down to the specific gate only during a specific period in the jackpot game executed for a long period of time, so that the player can play the jackpot game without losing concentration. Game can be executed.

  In the present embodiment, when the fifth round in the probability-change jackpot game is executed, it is a chance period in which the ball flows down to the specific gate for the player on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. Is configured to display the character "Aim for V" as a guide notification mode for indicating. Thereby, it is possible to clearly inform the player of a specific period in which the ball can easily flow down to the specific gate among the jackpot games executed for a long time. Further, based on the fact that the detecting means detects that the ball has flowed down the specific gate, "VGET" is provided as a guidance notification mode for guiding that the ball has flowed down the specific gate to the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. "Is displayed. Thereby, it is possible to easily notify the player that the condition for setting the probable change state after the end of the jackpot game is satisfied.

  In addition, the notification mode of the above-described guidance notification may be changed in accordance with the satisfaction of the condition. For example, “Aim V” based on the elapsed time of a specific period in which a ball easily flows down to a specific gate or the remaining time. May be changed, the size of the display area may be changed, or a character with more emphasized content (for example, “Aim at V quickly”) may be changed. This can prevent a situation in which the player does not shoot the ball in a situation where the ball easily flows down to the specific gate.

  Further, in the present embodiment, by changing the operation pattern of the V character for switching the flow path of the winning ball to the V winning device 2650, the period in which the ball easily flows down to the specific gate and the difficult period are set. Although possible, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the V-prong is operated in a common operation pattern from the start of the jackpot game, and the timing at which the specific winning opening 2650a is opened is varied depending on the jackpot type. Thus, a period in which the ball easily flows down to the specific gate and a period in which the ball is difficult to flow may be settable. Thereby, the operation pattern of the V-cassette can be shared, so that the V-cassette can be hardly broken down.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2501, if it is determined that the current round is not the fifth round (S2501: No), the processes of S2502 and S2503 are skipped, and the opening of the normal specific winning opening 2650a is set (S2504). ) And the process moves to S2505. In the processing of S2505, a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S2505), and this processing ends.

  The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the audio ramp control device 113 in the external output process (S1001) of the main process executed by the MPU 201. Sent. When receiving the round number command, the sound lamp control device 113 sets a display round number command for displaying the newly started round number on the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 can be updated according to the number of rounds of the jackpot.

  By executing the jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 252), it is possible to open the special winning opening 2650a in each round of the jackpot, and to enable the passage of the special discharge channel 2665e2 in the fifth round. it can. As a result, in the jackpots A, CE, and E, the ball almost certainly passes through the specific gate (probability change switch 2665e3) only by the player firing the ball in the fifth round. Symbol high probability state, ordinary symbol high probability state) can be set.

  Next, the jackpot end process (S2410) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 253 is a flowchart showing the jackpot ending process (S2410). The big hit end process (S2410) is executed in the big hit control process 10 (see S1074 in FIG. 251), and is a process for setting the gaming state after the big hit end as described above.

  In the big hit end processing (S2410), first, it is determined whether or not the probable change setting flag 203jd is on (S2601). If it is determined in the processing of S2601 that the probability change setting flag 203jd is ON (S2601: Yes), it means that the ball has passed the specific gate (probability change switch 2650e3) during the jackpot, and thus the probability change counter 203ja The value is set to 50 (S2602), and the process moves to S2603. On the other hand, in the processing of S2601, if the probability change setting flag 203jd is off (S2601: No), the processing of S2602 is skipped, and the processing shifts to S2603.

  In the process of S2603, 100 is set to the value of the time-saving counter 203h (S2603), and then a status command is set based on the value of the time-saving counter 203h and the value of the probability change counter 203ja (S2604). The status command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the audio lamp control device 113 in the external output process (S1001) of the main process executed by the MPU 201. Sent. When receiving the status command, the sound ramp control device 113 updates the slave status setting area 223g according to the gaming status notified by the status command. Thus, the sound lamp control device 113 can accurately grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. Next, both the big hit flag 203jc and the probability change setting flag 203jd are set to off (S2605), and this processing ends.

  By executing the jackpot ending process (see FIG. 253), it is possible to accurately set the game state after the jackpot ending according to whether or not the ball has passed the specific gate (probable change switch 2665e3) during the jackpot game. it can.

  Next, the details of the winning process (S2411) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 254 is a flowchart showing the winning process (S2411). The winning process (S2411) is executed in the big hit control process 10 (see FIG. 251), and is a process for controlling according to the winning in the specific winning opening 2650a as described above.

  In the winning process (S2411), first, it is determined whether or not the current time is a round valid period (S2701). Here, the round valid period is a period in which a round game is set, that is, a period from the open state of the specific winning opening 2650a to the end of the interval period. In the process of S2701, if it is not the round validity period (S2701: No), the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2701 that the current time is the round valid period (S2701: Yes), it is then determined whether or not a winning in the specific winning opening 2650a has been detected (S2702). If a winning is detected (S2702: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the winning counter 203jf and updated (S2703), and a winning command indicating that a winning in the specific winning opening 2650a is detected is set. (S2704), the flow shifts to the process of S2705. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2702 that a winning in the specific winning opening 2650a has not been detected (S2702: No), the process skips steps S2703 and S2704 and shifts to the process in step S2705.

  In the process of S2705, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 203jf is 10 or more (S2705). If the value of the winning number counter 203jf is 10 or more (S2705: Yes), the process proceeds to S2707. On the other hand, in the process of S2705, if it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203jf is 9 or less (S2705: No), it is determined whether the round time (30 seconds) has elapsed (S2706), and the round time has elapsed. If it has been performed (S2706: Yes), the process proceeds to S2707. In the process of S2706, it is determined that the round time has elapsed when 30 seconds have elapsed from the start of each round game of the current big hit. Note that, in the present embodiment, the end condition of the round game is established by the same round time lapse and the number of wins regardless of the jackpot type and the number of rounds. The end condition of the round game may be changed, or the end condition of the round game may be changed depending on the number of rounds to be executed.

  In the process of S2707, the closing of the specific winning opening 2650a is set (S2707), and a closing command indicating that the closing of the specific winning opening 2650a is set (S2708). Next, it is determined whether the closing of the specific winning opening 2650a this time is a closing based on the end of the five rounds (S2709), and if it is determined that the closing is based on the end of the five rounds (S2709: Yes), the flow path is determined. The solenoid (probably variable solenoid) 2665k is set to off (S2710), and the process shifts to S2711. On the other hand, in the process of S2709, if it is determined that the closing of the specific winning opening 2650a this time is due to the completion of a round other than five (S2709: No), the flow path solenoid (probable variable solenoid) 2665k is turned on. Is not set, the process of S2710 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2712.

  In the process of S2711, the remaining ball timer flag 203jg, the probability change valid flag 203ji, and the round end flag 203 are set to ON (S2711), and the process proceeds to S2712. If it is determined in step S2705 that the value of the winning number counter is 9 or less (S2705: No), and if it is determined in step S2706 that the round time has not elapsed (S2706: No), the process proceeds to step S2707. Steps S2711 to S2711 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S2712.

  In the process of S2712, it is determined whether the round end flag 203 is on (S2712), and if the round end flag 203 is off (S2712: No), the process proceeds to S2713. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2712 that the round end flag 203 is on (S2712: Yes), then it is determined whether the probable change valid flag 203ji is on (S2716). In the processing of S2716, if the probability change validity flag 203ji is off (S2716: No), this processing ends as it is.

  On the other hand, if the probable variable valid flag 203ji is on (S2716: No), 1 is added to the value of the probable variable valid timer 203jj (S2717), and it is determined whether the value of the probable variable valid timer 203jj is the upper limit value (S2717). S2718). If the value of the probable change enable timer 203jj is not the upper limit value (S2718: No), the process shifts to the process of S2713 to execute the process of monitoring the probable change switch 2665e3 and updating the probable change setting flag 203jd. Accordingly, if the probability change valid timer 203jj is not at the upper limit value, it is determined whether the ball has passed the probability change switch 2665e3, so that the probability change state can be set in consideration of the time of ball ejection. In addition, since there is an upper limit to the time determined to be valid, it is possible to prevent the ball from passing through the probability change switch 2665e3 and imparting the probability change state.

  On the other hand, if the value of the probable variable valid timer 203jj is the upper limit (S2718: Yes), the probable variable valid flag 203ji and the round end flag 203 are set to off (S2719), and the value of the probable variable valid timer 203jj is reset (S2720). ), End this processing.

  In the process of S2713, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the probability change switch 2665e3 (S2713). If the ball has not passed through the probability change switch 2665e3 (S2713: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball has passed the probable variable switch 2665e3 (S2713: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the probable variable passage counter 203je (S2714), the probable variable setting flag 203jd is set to on (S2715), and this processing is performed. To end.

  Next, the abnormal processing (S2412) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 255 is a flowchart showing this abnormal processing (S2412). This abnormal process (S2412) is a process executed in the jackpot control process 10 (see FIG. 251), and as described above, determines whether the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 2650a has been normally ejected. This is the process to perform.

  In the abnormal processing (S2412), first, it is determined whether or not the current time is the round validity period (S2801). If the current time is not the round validity period (S2801: No), the present processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round is valid (S2801: Yes), it is determined whether the ball has passed the ball outlet switch 2650e4 (see FIG. 196) (S2802).

  In the process of S2802, when it is determined that the ball has passed the ball outlet switch 2650e4 (S2802: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the number-of-discharges counter 203jk (S2803), and the flow shifts to the process of S2804. On the other hand, in the process of S2802, if the ball has not passed through the ball outlet switch 2650e4 (S2802: No), the process of S2803 is skipped and the process shifts to the process of S2804.

  In the processing of S2804, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203jg is on (S2804). If it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203jg is off (S2804: No), the present process ends. On the other hand, if the remaining ball timer flag 203jg is ON (S2804: Yes), since the ball is in the throwing period, 1 is added to the value of the remaining ball timer 203jh and updated (S2805). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining ball timer 203jh is the upper limit value (S2806). If the value of the remaining ball timer 203jh is not the upper limit value (S2806: No), the present process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the remaining ball timer 203jh is the upper limit value (S2806: Yes), the number of discharges (the sum of the value of the positive variable passage counter 203je and the value of the discharge number counter 203jk) is awarded. It is determined whether the number matches the value (the value of the winning number counter 203jf) (S2807).

  If it is determined in the processing of S2807 that the number of discharged papers and the number of winnings do not match (S2807: No), an error command is set (S2808), and the flow shifts to the processing of S2809. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, a character indicating a winning number mismatch error) is displayed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a fraudulent act of illegally entering a ball into the special discharge channel 2650e2 and passing through the positive change switch 2650e3 while the special discharge channel 2650e2 is closed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2807, when it is determined that the number of discharges and the number of winnings match (S2807: Yes), the process of S2808 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S2809. In the process of S2809, the remaining ball timer flag 203jg is set to off (S2809), and then the value of the remaining ball timer 203jh is reset (S2810). After that, the values of the winning number counter 203jf, the number-of-discharge counter 203jk, and the value of the variable probability passing counter 203je are reset (S2811), and the process ends.

  Executing this abnormal process (see FIG. 255) may cause a problem that a ball that has entered the specific winning opening 2650a may not be discharged properly due to clogging of the ball inside the V winning device 2650 or the like. It can be detected and notified early.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the tenth embodiment>
Next, the contents of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 256 to 263. In the tenth embodiment, a command determination process 10 (see S4193 in FIG. 256) is replaced with a variable display setting process 7 (see S4193 in FIG. 256) in place of the command determination process 7 (see S4192 in FIG. 183). The difference is that the variable display setting process 10 (see S4183 in FIG. 261) is performed instead of the variable display setting process 10 (see S4153 in FIG. 187), and the rest is the same. The same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the contents of the command determination process 10 (see S4193) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 256 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 10 (see S4193). When the command determination processing 10 (see S4193) is executed, the same processing as S4231 to S4208 as the command determination processing 7 of the seventh embodiment (see S4192 in FIG. 183) is performed.

  In the process of S4208, when it is determined that the reserved ball number command has been received (S4208: Yes), the reserved ball number is extracted from the received command, and the corresponding value is set to the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c (the first special ball number). This is stored in the symbol retaining ball number counter 223c1, the second special symbol retaining ball number counter 223c2), and the normal symbol retaining ball number counter 223ja (S4291), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the pending ball number command has not been received (S4208: No), then it is determined whether or not a winning command (winning information command) has been received (S4210). (S4210: Yes), the winning command processing 10 is executed (S4292), and this processing ends. The details of the winning command processing 10 (S4292) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S4210, when it is determined that the winning command (winning information command) has not been received (S4210: No), it is next determined whether a stop command has been received (S4293), and when it has been determined that it has been received. (S4293: Yes), the stop display of the third symbol is set (S4294), and this processing ends. If it is determined that the stop command has not been received (S4293: No), then it is determined whether a general-purpose related command has been received (S4216), and if it has been determined that it has been received (S4216: Yes), The related process 10 is executed (S4295), and thereafter, the present process ends. A detailed description of the general-purpose-related process 10 (S4295) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the processing of S4216, when it is determined that the general-purpose related command has not been received (S4216: No), it is determined whether the jackpot-related command has been received (S4296), and when it has been determined that it has been received (S4296: Yes). ), And executes the jackpot-related process 10 (S4297), and thereafter ends this process. A detailed description of the jackpot-related processing 10 (S4297) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot-related command has not been received (S4296: No), processing according to other commands is executed (S4220), and this processing ends.

  Next, the content of the winning command processing 10 (see S4292) executed in the command determination processing 10 (see S4193 in FIG. 256) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 257 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning command processing 10 (S4292). The winning command processing 10 (S4292) is set when a special symbol lottery lottery right is acquired from the main control device 110 or when a general symbol lottery lottery right is acquired. This is a process executed when a general-prize winning information command is received or a V winning command set when a ball flows down (passes) a specific gate (probability change switch) during a jackpot game.

  When the winning command processing 10 (S4292) is executed, first, the information of the received winning command (winning information command) is stored (set) in the area corresponding to the winning information storage area (winning information storage area) 223b (S4401). ), It is determined whether or not the command received this time is a general-purpose winning information command (S4441). If it is determined that the command is a general-purpose winning information command (S4441: Yes), the received information includes the winning information ( It is determined whether or not the winning information that has been won per day is included (S4442). If it is determined that there is winning information (S4442: Yes), then the value of the time reduction counter 203h is larger than 0, That is, it is determined whether or not the current state is the high probability state of the ordinary symbol (S4443).

  Here, if the current state is not the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, that is, if it is determined that the normal state is present (S4443: No), the state in which the lottery right of the ordinary symbol lottery to be won per ordinary figure is acquired during the normal state. Since there is a high possibility that a chance zone will be set, a display command for suggesting opening of the electric tulong is set (S4444), and the flow shifts to the process of S4445. When the display command is set in the process of S4444, the display control device 114 is notified to the display control device 114 with the same control contents as the various display commands set in the control process of the other audio lamp control devices, and during the normal state. The suggestion effect (for example, the small display area Dm3 is displayed in the main display area Dm on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81) suggesting that the game per day is executed and the electric accessory 640 is opened long (opened for 5 seconds). An effect that inspires whether or not it is formed) is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the suggestion effect described above is executed only when the lottery right of the ordinary symbol lottery to be won per ordinary figure is acquired during the normal state, but the present invention is not limited to this. The above-described suggestion effect may be configured to be executed even when it is determined that the general-prize winning information command includes winning information indicating a specific out-of-prize winning. With this, it is possible to set a case where the per-figure-per-game is executed when the suggested effect is executed and a case where the game is not executed. Can be made.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the lottery right of the ordinary symbol lottery to be won per ordinary figure is acquired in the normal state, the suggestion effect is configured to be executed. Based on the pre-determination result of the special symbol lottery or the special symbol lottery stored in the prize information storage area 223b, the timing at which the game for the general symbol is actually executed, that is, the general symbol indicating the winning of the general symbol Preliminary game state processing is performed to determine whether or not the game state at the timing at which the normal symbol lottery corresponding to the winning information command is executed (the timing at which the game per common figure is executed) is the normal state. When it is determined that there is a suggestion effect, the above-described suggestion effect may be executed. This makes it possible to more appropriately indicate that a chance zone is set.

  Returning to FIG. 257, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S4441 that the general-purpose winning information command has not been received (S4441: No), if it is determined that there is no hit information in the processing of S4442 (S4442: No), the time reduction counter is determined in the processing of S4443. If it is determined that the value of 203h is larger than 0 (S4443: Yes), the process also proceeds to S4445.

  In the process of S4445, the command received this time is the V winning command (the command set when the ball flows down to the certain change switch (specific gate) in the winning process (see S2411 of FIG. 254) (see S2791)). It is determined (S4445) that the command is a V winning command (S4445: Yes), the V winning flag 223jc is set to ON (S4446), other processing is executed (S4412), and this processing ends. If it is determined in the processing of S4445 that the V winning command has not been received (S4445: No), the processing of S4446 is skipped, the processing of S4412 is executed, and this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 258, the contents of the general figure related process 10 (S4295) executed in the command determination process 10 (see S4193 in FIG. 256) will be described. FIG. 258 is a flowchart showing the contents of the general-purpose-related process 10 (S4295). The general figure related processing 10 (S4295) includes a general figure change pattern command indicating that the ordinary symbol lottery has been executed from the main control device 110, a general figure start command indicating that the general figure game has been started, and the like. This is a process that is executed when a general-period end command indicating the end of the general-period game is received.

  When the general-figure-related processing 10 (S4295) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the general-figure fluctuation pattern command has been received (S4701). A start command is set (S4702), and it is determined whether the value of the time reduction counter 203h is larger than 0, that is, whether the symbol is in a high probability state of a normal symbol (S4781). If it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203h is larger than 0 (S4781: Yes), the process is terminated as it is, and if it is determined that the value is not larger than 0 (S4781: No), the currently received ordinary figure fluctuation is received. It is determined whether or not the pattern command is a normal figure variation pattern command corresponding to the ordinary symbol lottery that has been won per ordinary figure (S4782). If it is determined that the pattern command has not been won per ordinary figure (S4782: No) Then, the processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning has been made per ordinary figure (S4782: Yes), a display command indicating that the long opening waiting is in progress is set because the regular opening fluctuation is executed in which the long opening winning is executed ( (S4783), this process ends. By setting the display command in the processing of S4783, the display mode shown in FIG. 231 (b) is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. This makes it possible for the player to easily predict that the chance zone is likely to be set soon.

  In the present embodiment, a process of displaying the display mode (display mode for forming the small display area Dm3) shown in FIG. 231 (b) based on whether or not the normal symbol change is a hit change is used. However, the display mode shown in FIG. 231 (b) is not limited to this, and is a specific out-of-usual variation (for example, a part of the out-of-usual variation in which the same variation time as the per-usual variation is set). (Display mode for forming the small display area Dm3) may be configured to be displayed.

  Further, the size of the display area of the small display area Dm3 may be changed according to the content of the variation effect (third symbol variation effect) corresponding to the special symbol variation being executed. When a fluctuation effect with a high jackpot expectation degree (for example, a reach effect) is executed in the symbol fluctuation effect, a smaller display area is displayed than when a fluctuation effect with a high jackpot expectation degree (for example, a reach effect) is not executed. It is preferable to change the display content so that the display area of Dm3 is reduced. In this way, the variable content suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol lottery executed independently and the variable performance suggesting the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery have a relationship, and the display content is variably controlled, so that It is possible to suppress a situation in which a lot of game information is unnecessarily provided to the player and the player is confused, and an easy-to-understand game can be provided.

  Returning to FIG. 258, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S4701 that the general figure variation pattern command has not been received (S4701: No), it is next determined whether a general figure start command has been received (S4703), and the general figure start command has been received. Is determined (S4703: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (S4784), and if it is determined that it is not greater than 0 (S4784: No), the long release is performed. A display command indicating "in" is set (S4785), and this process ends. By setting the display command in the processing of S4785, the display mode shown in FIG. 232 (a) is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. This makes it possible for the player to easily understand that the long open win is being executed. If it is determined in the processing of S4784 that the value of the time reduction counter 203h is larger than 0 (S4784: Yes), the processing of S4785 is skipped and the present processing ends.

  In the processing of S4703, when it is determined that the general figure start command has not been received (S4703: No), it is determined whether the general figure end command has been received (S4709). (S4709: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the time reduction counter 203h is larger than 0 (S4786). If it is determined that the value is not large (S4786: No), then, if the value of the ordinary symbol holding ball counter 223ja is 1 or more, It is determined whether or not the flag is present (S4787), and when it is determined that it is 1 or more (S4787: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special effect flag 223jb is set to ON (S4788). If it is determined (S4788: No), a display command indicating the entry into the chance zone is set (S4789), and the special effect flag 2 is set. Set off a 3jb (S4790), the process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S4786 to S4788, if it is determined that the determination result is other than the determination result described above, the present processing is terminated as it is.

  Next, the content of the jackpot-related processing 10 (S4297) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 259 is a flowchart showing the content of the jackpot-related process 10 (S4297). In the jackpot-related process 10 (S4297), a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won is performed. The processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from main controller 110 is executed.

  In the jackpot-related process 10 (S4297), first, it is determined whether or not the command received this time is a jackpot start command (S4901). If it is determined that the command is a jackpot start command (S4901: Yes), a display jackpot start command is set (S4902). The display jackpot start command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. When receiving the display jackpot start command, the display control device 114 displays an effect indicating the start of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot game is a normal jackpot (game) (S4981). If it is determined that the jackpot game is a normal jackpot (S4981: Yes), the chance mode entry (time saving state is set) is determined. The ending display mode shown is set (S4982), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not a normal jackpot (S4981: No), that is, if it is determined that it is a probable change jackpot, an ending display mode indicating entry into a super chance mode (a probable change state is set) is set ( S4983), and terminates this processing.

  That is, in the present embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 241, the ending periods of different lengths are set according to the set jackpot types (normal jackpots and probability-change jackpots), and the jackpot game is started. The ending display mode (see FIG. 236) corresponding to the ending period of the jackpot game executed this time at the timing is configured to be set in advance. With this configuration, various controls (variable display control of the jackpot game information to be variably displayed according to the progress of the jackpot game (for example, control for displaying information for indicating the acquired number of prize balls or control during execution) Control for displaying information indicating the number of round games) and prize ball payout control for paying out prize balls in accordance with the number of balls that have won the V prize device 2650 during the jackpot game are frequently executed. Since it is not necessary to execute display control for setting the ending display mode during the jackpot game period, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. In the present embodiment, the process of setting the ending display mode at the start timing of the jackpot game is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the special symbol jackpot determined to execute the jackpot game is not limited to this. The ending display mode may be set during the fluctuation, or may be set using the remaining period of the main process of the sound lamp control device 113 executed during the period in which the control process is small during the big hit game period. Is also good.

  If it is determined in the processing of S4901 that a jackpot-related command has not been received (S4901: No), it is next determined whether a round number command has been received (S4913), and it has been determined that a round number command has been received. If this is done (S4913: Yes), a display round number command is set based on the number of rounds (S4914), and it is determined whether the current round number is 5 rounds (V rounds) (S4984). If it is determined that the round is 5 rounds (V round) (S4984: Yes), a display command for guiding the V winning is set (S4985), and this processing ends. If it is determined in the processing of S4984 that the current round number is not five rounds (V rounds), that is, if it is determined that a round game other than the fifth round is to be started (S4984: No), the processing ends as it is. .

  If it is determined in the processing of S4913 that the round number command has not been received (S4913: No), then it is determined whether an ending command has been received (S4986), and if it has been received (S4986: Yes). ), The ending process 10 is executed (S4987), and this process ends. If it is determined that the ending command has not been received in the process of S4986 (S4986: No), it is determined whether a jackpot end command has been received (S4915), and if it has been received (S4915: Yes). ), And execute a jackpot ending process (S4916), and thereafter terminate this process. If it is determined that the jackpot end command has not been received in the process of S4915 (S4915: No), the process ends as it is.

  Next, the ending process 10 (S4987) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 260 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending process 10 (S4987). The ending process 10 (S4987) is a process executed when it is determined that the ending command has been received in the jackpot-related process 10 (see S4297 in FIG. 259), and is performed during the ending period. The processing for finally determining the display mode is executed.

  When the ending process 10 (S4987) is executed, first, it is determined whether the V winning flag 223jc is set to ON (S4991), and if it is determined that the V winning flag 223jc is set to ON (S4991: Yes), V The winning flag 223jc is set to off (S4992), the execution of the ending display corresponding to the ending display mode already set is set (S4995), and this processing ends. If it is determined in the processing of S4991 that the V winning flag 223jc is not set to ON (S4991: No), it is determined whether or not the current big hit is a probable big hit (S4993), and it is not a probable big hit (normal If it is determined that it is a big hit (S4993: No), the process directly proceeds to S4995.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4993, when it is determined that it is the probability change jackpot (S4993: Yes), a display switching command for switching the display mode of the latter half period (7 seconds) of the ending period is set (S4994). The flow shifts to S4995.

  When the display switching command is set in the processing of S4994, it is notified to the display control device 114, and the display mode of the latter half of the ending period set in advance in response to the setting of the certainty change state (see FIG. 236 ( d) is switched to a display mode (see FIG. 236 (c)) corresponding to the setting of the time saving state. In the present embodiment, since the display period of the display mode switched based on the display switching command is fixed (7 seconds), the display mode can be easily switched.

  Next, the contents of the variable display setting process 10 (S4183) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 261 is a flowchart showing the content of the variable display setting process 10 (S4183). The variable display setting process 10 (S4183) is different from the variable display setting process 7 (see S4153 in FIG. 187) of the seventh embodiment in that the special mode 1 effect mode setting is performed instead of the effect mode setting process (S5232). The difference is that the process (S5251) is executed and that the special figure 2 effect mode setting process 10 (S5252) is executed instead of the special figure 2 variable display setting process 7 (S5237). In addition, the difference is that the process of subtracting the value of the variation counter (S5231 and S5235 in FIG. 187) is deleted. The other processes are the same, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, the contents of the special figure 1 effect mode setting process 10S (S5251) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 262 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 effect mode setting process 10S (S5251). The special figure 1 effect mode setting process 10S (S5251) is executed when the variable effect of the first special symbol is set in the variable display setting process 10 (see S4183 in FIG. 261). A process for setting an effect mode of a variable effect corresponding to the playing state being performed is executed.

  When the variable display setting process 10 (S4183) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a probable change state based on the information set in the slave state setting area 223g (S8251). Here, if it is determined that the state is not the probable change state (the normal state or the time saving state) (S8251: No), the effect mode corresponding to the basic command (command indicating the length of the basic time) indicated by the fluctuation pattern command (for example, An effect mode in which the third symbol change is started and the vehicle is not departed from and stopped without reaching, or an effect mode in which the reach state is reached after the third symbol change is started and 5 seconds elapse), ie, the third symbol (S8252), and thereafter, an effect corresponding to the addition command (command indicating the length of the addition time) indicated by the variation pattern command. Mode (for example, a rendering mode corresponding to a period from when the reach state has been reached for 5 seconds until the third symbol is stopped and displayed), that is, a stop diagram of the third symbol In response to determining the effect mode of the period variably (S8253), the process proceeds to the below-described processing of S8257.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S8251 that the state is the probable change state (S8251: Yes), the change time (basic time) included in the basic command indicated by the change pattern command is extracted (S8254), and the basic change time (basic change time) is extracted. Time is 30 seconds (S8255). Here, in the present embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 242 (c), when the first special symbol lottery is executed in the probable change state, the basic time is always 30 when the jackpot is won. A variation pattern of a second is selected, and a variation pattern of a basic time of 30 seconds is selected so that about 90% of cases where a winning is missed is selected.

  In the process of S8255, when it is determined that the basic fluctuation time is 30 seconds (S8255: Yes), an effect mode (effect content) is determined based on the probable change effect selection table 222jb (S8256), and the determined effect is determined. The display variation pattern command indicating the mode is set (S8257), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the basic fluctuation time is not 30 seconds (S8255: No), the above-described processing of S8252 and S8253 is executed, and then the processing of S8257 is executed, and this processing ends.

  Next, the contents of the special figure 2 effect mode setting process 10 (S5252) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 263 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 effect mode setting process 10 (S5252). The special figure 2 effect mode setting process 10 (S5252) is executed when the variable effect of the second special symbol is set in the variable display setting process 10 (see S4183 in FIG. 261). A process for setting an effect mode of a variable effect corresponding to the playing state being performed is executed.

  When the special figure 2 effect mode setting process 10 (S5252) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the normal state (S8261), and if it is determined that the current gaming state is the normal state (S8261: Yes). Then, a display command indicating the entry into the chance zone is set (S8262), then the special effect flag 223jb is set to ON (S8263), and the effect mode is determined based on the normal medium special figure 2 effect selection table 222ja (S8262). (S8264), the display variation pattern command indicating the determined effect mode is set (S8265), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S8261, if it is determined that the game state is not the normal state (S8261: No), then it is determined whether the current game state is the probability change state (S8266), and if it is determined that the current game state is not the probability change state. Is (S8266: No), an effect mode (for example, an effect in which the third pattern change is started, and the game is stopped without reaching the reach after the start of the third pattern change) corresponding to the basic command (command indicating the length of the basic time) indicated by the change pattern command. Mode, or an effect mode from the start of the third symbol change to the reach state until 5 seconds elapse), that is, an effect corresponding to a period in which the common effect mode can be executed regardless of the stop symbol of the third symbol. The mode is determined (S8267), and thereafter, the effect mode (for example, R) corresponding to the addition command (command indicating the length of the addition time) indicated by the variation pattern command. After 5 seconds have passed since the switch was in the hunch state, an effect mode corresponding to a period until the third symbol is stopped and displayed), that is, an effect mode of a period that is changed corresponding to the stop symbol of the third symbol. It is determined (S8268), and the process shifts to the above-described process of S8265, and thereafter, this process ends.

  Further, in the process of S8266, when it is determined that the state is the probable change state (S8266: Yes), the fluctuation time (basic time) included in the basic command indicated by the fluctuation pattern command is extracted (S8269), and the basic fluctuation time (basic time) is determined. It is determined whether (time) is 30 seconds (S8270). Here, in the present embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 242 (c), when the second special symbol lottery is executed in the probable change state, approximately 25% of the case where the jackpot has been won, and the off winning has been achieved. In such a case, a variation pattern of a basic time of 30 seconds is selected with a probability of about 4% of the case where the operation is performed.

  In the process of S8270, when it is determined that the basic fluctuation time is 30 seconds (S8270: Yes), the effect mode (effect content) is determined based on the probable changing effect selection table 222jb (S8271), and the determined effect is determined. The display variation pattern command indicating the mode is set (S8265), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the basic fluctuation time is not 30 seconds (S8270: No), the above-described processing of S8267 and S8268 is performed, and then the processing of S8265 is performed, and this processing ends.

  As described above, in the tenth embodiment, the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol are configured not to be executed in parallel (in parallel). The lottery of the second special symbol is configured to be executed prior to the lottery of the first special symbol. Then, the lottery in which the second special symbol lottery is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery is executed. Further, it is configured such that the ease of executing the lottery of the second special symbol is changed according to the set game state. Specifically, when the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set (time saving state, probable change state), the case where the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set (normal state) is set. In order to make it easier to acquire the lottery right for the second special symbol, the entrance with the electric accessory 640a that is opened in the hit game (normal game per game) executed at the time of winning the normal symbol. When a ball enters the (second entrance 640), a lottery right for the second special symbol can be acquired. In other words, when playing a game in the normal state, which is the initial game state, the first special symbol lottery is configured to be more easily executed than the second special symbol lottery, and the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery. At the same time, the high probability state of the ordinary symbol can be set, and when the ordinary symbol high probability state is set, the second special symbol lottery which is more advantageous than the first special symbol lottery is executed. Is configured. With such a configuration, the degree of advantage to the player can be greatly changed according to the set game state, and it is expected that a game state with a high degree of advantage to the player is set. It is possible to make the player play the game while being eager.

  In addition, in a case where a winning is achieved in a normal symbol lottery executed in a state where the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, a general symbol winning game in which the electric accessory 640 is opened for 5 seconds is configured to be executable. I have. With this configuration, it is possible to temporarily provide a period in which the second special symbol lottery can be easily performed even in the normal state which is a disadvantageous gaming state to the player. For a player playing a game, a game aimed at winning a special symbol lottery win and a game aiming to win a regular symbol lottery can be executed, so that the player gets tired of the game early. Can be suppressed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the effect form of the special figure 2 variable effect executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in correspondence with the second special symbol lottery executed during the normal state is stored. It is configured to be variable based on the number of lottery rights of the second special symbol, that is, the number of special figure 2 reservations. Specifically, as an effect mode of the special figure 2 fluctuation effect executed when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit, a pseudo-off-variation fluctuation effect indicating that the lottery result is off during the first half period of the fluctuation effect. In the second half period, the third symbol stopped (temporarily stopped) in the pseudo off-state fluctuation effect is restarted to execute a pseudo-hit fluctuation effect indicating that the lottery result is a big hit, The number of times the third symbol is temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) in the pseudo-hit variation effect is configured to be variable in accordance with the number of special figure 2 reservations. With this configuration, the variable effect in which the third symbol is pseudo-stopped a plurality of times before the third symbol is stopped and displayed (fixed display) in a combination indicating that the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit. Can be executed. In other words, it can be assumed that the jackpot has been won through a plurality of second special symbol lotteries.

  With this, even if the jackpot is won in the special figure 2 reservation used for the second special symbol lottery executed first among the plurality of special figure 2 reservations acquired during the regular figure game, the player On the other hand, since a plurality of special figure 2 reservations were acquired during the per-figure game, it can be assumed that the big hit was won. Can be done.

  When the special figure 2 reservation number is 0 in the case of winning the big hit in the second special symbol lottery, when the first special symbol lottery is executed as the above-mentioned pseudo-hit variation effect, the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. A variable effect simulating a variable effect displayed on the display surface (an effect mode of the special figure 1 variable effect performed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in response to the first special symbol lottery) is executed. It is composed. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the repetition of the special figure 2 fluctuation effect in a situation where the special figure 2 reservation is not acquired, and therefore, the pseudo fluctuation effect is provided to the player. It is possible to make it difficult to identify that the operation is being performed. In addition, after a pseudo variable effect imitating the special figure 1 variable effect is executed, the third symbol is stopped (fixed display) in a combination indicating that the jackpot has been won in the second special symbol lottery, so that the game is performed. It is possible to execute a surprising fluctuating effect on the user.

  In the present embodiment, when the probability change jackpot game is executed, an effect mode indicating that the probability change state is set after the end of the jackpot game is set in advance (at the start of the jackpot game) as an effect mode of the notification effect, Immediately before the notification effect is executed (for example, at the start of the jackpot ending period), it is determined whether or not to switch the effect mode of the notification effect based on the result of the ball flowing down to the specific gate. When it is flowing down, a notification effect of the preset effect mode is executed, and the effect mode of the notification effect is switched only when the ball is not flowing down the specific gate.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the length of the jackpot ending period is made different between the probability variable jackpot and the normal jackpot, so that the ending period longer than the normal jackpot is set for the probability variable jackpot that is advantageous to the player. Make up. Thereby, it is possible to inform the player that the probability change state is set after the big hit game is completed, before the probability change state is actually set. On the other hand, if the probable change state is not set after the end of the jackpot game, even if the fact is notified for a long period of time, the ending period is shortened because it only gives the player discomfort.

  As described above, when the length of the jackpot ending period is different between the probability jackpot and the normal jackpot, if the ball cannot flow down to the specific gate during the probability jackpot game, the jackpot ending By simply performing the process of switching the production mode of the period to the production mode executed during the ending period of the normal hit game, the length of the ending period is different, so that an uncomfortable notification production is performed during the ending period. There was a problem. In addition, if a special effect mode that is set only when the ball cannot flow down to the specific gate in the probability change jackpot game is facilitated in advance, image data (effect data) for the effect mode is displayed in advance. It has to be stored in the character ROM 234 of the control device 114, and there is a problem that the storage capacity increases.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the jackpot ending period is divided into a first half period and a second half period, and the length of the second half period is configured to be a common length regardless of the jackpot type. When the ball could not flow down to the specific gate, only the staging mode corresponding to the latter half of the jackpot ending period is switched to the staging mode set for the latter half of the ending period of the normal hit game. Make up. As a result, a notification effect without providing a special effect mode used only when the ball cannot flow down to the specific gate during the probability change jackpot game and without giving a sense of incongruity to the player is executed. can do.

  In the present embodiment, the jackpot ending period is divided into the first half period and the second half period, and the length of the second half period is set to a common length regardless of the jackpot type. It is configured to switch and set the production mode of the notification production that is executed when it is not possible to flow down to the specific gate, but without being limited to this, for example, during the last round period of the jackpot game By executing the notification effect, the notification effect that is performed for a longer period than the actual jackpot ending period may be configured to be executable, or the predetermined period of time from when the jackpot ending period is set, to the end of the jackpot game By continuing to perform the round production performed during the round period, and then performing the notification production, the actual jackpot ending period It may be configured to perform a notification effect of remote short period of time.

  Since the V winning device 2650 has the same contents as the V winning device 2650 (see FIGS. 194 to 196) of the above-described eighth embodiment, the same reference numerals are given and the detailed description is omitted. . Also, the configuration of the right area of the variable display unit 80 and the ball flowing down the right area are sent to the through gate 67, the general entrance 63, the first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, and the V winning device 2650. Since the ratio of entering the ball is the same as the above-described left region, detailed description thereof will be omitted. As described above, in the present embodiment, regardless of the set game state, and regardless of whether the jackpot game is being executed, even if the player executes the right-handed game, the left-handed game Is executed, the same privilege is provided. Therefore, the player can play a game by any game method according to his / her mood.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 230, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be symmetrical. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured so that there is no large difference between the case where the left-handed game is performed and the case where the right-handed game is performed. For example, the number of the general entrance holes 63 provided in the left region is changed to the general number provided in the right region. The number of entrances 63 is smaller than the number of entrances 63, and the ratio of the ball entering the first entrance 64 is configured so that the left-handed game is higher than the right-handed game. It is more difficult to obtain the prize ball than the right-handed game, but it is easier to execute the first special symbol lottery. May be configured. In the case of such a configuration, during the normal state, that is, during the execution of the game in which the ball is thrown into the first entrance 64, the player can play the game by any game method. In a game in which a ball enters the second entrance 640 (a game in a time-saving state or a probable change state), a right-handed game is more advantageous to a player than a left-handed game. .

  In each of the above embodiments, each time the value (N) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is updated in the main control device 110 (that is, each time the value is increased or decreased), the reserved ball number command is issued. Has been described from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only when the value (N) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d increases in the main control device 110, the reserved number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to decrease the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when receiving the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. By this means, the number of times that main controller 110 transmits the number-of-holds command to voice lamp control device 113 and the number of times that voice lamp control device 113 receives the number-of-holds command can be reduced. It is possible to reduce the control burden of the sound lamp control device 113.

  In each of the above embodiments, the winning of the special figure entrance 64 is held up to four times, and the passage through the through gate 67 is held up to one time, but the maximum number of reserved balls is limited to this. Instead, the number may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). In addition, the number of balls to be changed in the variable display based on the winning in the special figure entrance 64 can be changed by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81 or the area divided into four by the number of the reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different manner (for example, color or lighting pattern). A light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light emitting member. May be configured.

  Further, as described in the above embodiments, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to scrolling the symbol as the identification information in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, The pattern may be moved and displayed along a predetermined path such as a vertical direction or an L-shape. The dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern. For example, one or a plurality of characters may be operated or changed and displayed in a variety of ways together with the pattern or separately from the pattern. It also includes the effect display that is performed. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol. In addition, it is difficult for the player to identify the display mode of the dynamic display of the third symbol for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol and the display mode of the dynamic display of the decorative symbol for indicating the lottery result of the normal symbol. For example, each display mode may be set using the common image data of the display control device 114.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the third symbol display for displaying the result of the lottery of each symbol to the player is executed by one display means (the third symbol display device 81), but other configurations are used. For example, of the third symbols, different display means may be provided for the display means for displaying the main symbol and the display means for displaying the slave symbol, which are emphasized and displayed to the player. Further, a configuration other than the liquid crystal display may be used as the configuration of the display unit.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the left side of the game board 13 in the case of the gaming state (time saving state) that is advantageous to the player and the case of the gaming state (normal state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the time saving state. Although the left-handed game aiming at the area is configured to be executed, the aiming area of the different game board 13 may be different depending on the gaming state. For example, in the normal state, the game board is A left-handed game aiming at the left area of the game board 13 may be executed, and a right-handed game aiming at the right area of the game board 13 may be executed in the time-saving state. May be executed, and the right-handed game may be executed during the normal state.

  Furthermore, in each of the above-described embodiments, the left-handed game aiming at the left area of the game board 13 is executed regardless of which game state is set and whether the jackpot game is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured such that the right-handed game is executed during the time-saving state and during the jackpot game, and the left-handed game is executed only during the normal state. With such a configuration, the player can easily understand whether or not the player is in an advantageous state according to the game method to be executed (right-handed game, left-handed game).

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the frame button 22 for determining that the operating means has been operated by the player performing a pressing operation is used as the operating means operable by the player. It is also possible to use a lever-shaped operation means that can determine that the player has operated by tilting the player left and right or back and forth, and can determine that the player has been operated by touching or approaching A simple touch sensor type operation means, a wireless type operation means capable of discriminating that the operation has been performed by transmitting a predetermined radio wave, or the like may be used. In addition, the frame button 22 is electrically connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and the frame button 22 changes the effect mode of the effect executed by the pachinko machine 10 based on the operation of the player. For example, it is only necessary to be able to change the effect form of various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 based on the operation of the player on the frame button 22 by, for example, displaying the frame button 22. It may be electrically connected to the control device 114, or input of an output signal from the operation means (frame button 22) may be performed, and the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113, the sound output device 226, the lamp display A control device that can generate an effect setting signal that can be output to the device 227 may be provided. With this configuration, even when a plurality of effect operation means are provided, the output signals (operation signals) output from the plurality of effect operation means can be centrally managed. The effect mode for the player's operation on the means can be set smoothly.

  In the above-described sixth embodiment, a switch button group 22z (switch button 22za, first select button 22zb, second select button 22zc) for selecting the end condition of the game per accessory is provided, and the movable valve 750 Part of or a part of each operation control of the storage device (first storage device 770, second storage device 771), second frame button (release button) 22b (1022b, 1122b), and third frame button (release button) 22c The whole may be configured to be executed by the audio lamp control device 113 instead of the main control device 110.

<Eleventh embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described seventh embodiment, by shifting to the latent state, the lottery of the second special symbol having a high small hit probability becomes easy to be executed, and the game ball enters the right variable winning device 1650. In such a case, a state in which an opportunity to acquire a prize ball can be frequently obtained is formed. In other words, a very advantageous game state in which a large amount of prize balls can be obtained without winning a jackpot is formed.

  In addition, in the eleventh embodiment, by performing a predetermined operation on the operation means provided in the pachinko machine 10, the jackpot probability and the high probability state (probable change state) of the low probability state of the special symbol are obtained. The combination (setting) with the jackpot probability can be changed. More specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment, six combinations (settings) are defined as combinations (settings) of the jackpot probability (see FIG. 269 (a)). The clerk of the hall or the like performs a predetermined operation (setting change operation) outside business hours or the like, so that the jackpot probability of the pachinko machine 10 can be arbitrarily set. The higher the jackpot probability (high setting), the easier it is to win a jackpot in the normal state (special symbol low probability state) and in the latent state (special symbol high probability state). On the other hand, the most advantageous latent state is likely to be completed in a relatively short period of time (in the latent state, another gaming state is easily set by the jackpot win). On the other hand, the lower the jackpot probability (lower setting), the easier it is for the normal state to continue for a longer period of time (more likely to cause hammering), but the more advantageous latent state tends to continue for a relatively long time. In the latent state, the total number of prize balls that can be obtained by the small hit game is likely to increase. In other words, according to the jackpot probability (probability), the game property (the game state in which both the disadvantageous state and the advantageous game state are easily completed in a relatively short period, and the game state in which the disadvantageous game state and the advantageous game state are both advantageous for a relatively long time) Since it is possible to make the game characteristics different from each other easily, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the player.

  The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment is different from the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described seventh embodiment in that the board configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed. In addition, various operation means (setting key 110b, setting change switch 110c) for changing the setting of the pachinko machine 10 (combination of the jackpot probability in the high probability state and the low probability state) are provided. The configuration of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the control device 110 is partially changed, the configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 is partially changed, and the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 Is partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is one. Is a point that is the change. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the following. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the seventh embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 264 is a front view of the game board 13 in the eleventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 264, the gaming board 13 in the eleventh embodiment is different from the gaming board 13 in the above-described seventh embodiment (see FIG. 157) in that a first special board is provided below the central first ball entrance 64c. The only difference is that a special figure 1 prize device 1640 that is opened when a small win is achieved in a symbol lottery is provided. In other words, in the eleventh embodiment, not only the lottery of the second special symbol but also the lottery of the first special symbol is adopted so that the small hit can be won. The types of prize devices that are opened (can be entered) at the time of winning are different.

  The special figure 1 prize device 1640 includes a special figure 1 prize port 1640a into which a game ball can enter, an oblong rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the special figure 1 prize port 1640a, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate. And a solenoid (not shown) for a special figure 1 small hitting for opening / closing drive to the front side as a shaft. In the special figure 1 prize device 1640, normally, the opening and closing plate completely covers the special figure 1 prize port 1640a, so that it becomes difficult for game balls to enter the special figure 1 prize port 1640a (see FIG. (The winning port 1640a for FIG. 1 is closed). In the case of a small win in the lottery of the first special symbol, the solenoid for the special figure 1 small hit is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side, so that the game ball is easy to win in the special figure 1 winning opening 1640a. An open state is formed temporarily. As shown in FIG. 264, the special figure 1 prize winning device 1640 has a central first ball entrance 64c disposed vertically above the same, and the upper right direction and the upper left direction as viewed from the front are closed by game nails. Therefore, even if the special figure 1 winning port 1640a is opened, it is difficult to allow the game ball to enter the special figure 1 winning port 1640a. That is, the small hit of the first special symbol in the eleventh embodiment is not provided for the player to obtain the prize ball, and the player has intentionally or mistakenly right-handed in the normal state. When the lottery of the second special symbol has been executed due to, for example, the second special symbol is forcibly terminated (discarded) by the long hit of the first special symbol. More specifically, in the eleventh embodiment, when the lottery of one special symbol becomes a big hit or a small hit, when the change display of the big hit or the small hit is stopped, the change display of the other special symbol is being executed. If so, the variable display of the other special symbol is forcibly released and stopped and displayed with the symbol. That is, in normal times, a game ball enters the second entrance 645 by right-handing, and a lottery of the second special symbol is executed, and a long fluctuation (a fluctuation display for 600 seconds) of the second special symbol is executed. Even if, after that, a game ball is made to enter the central first entrance hole 64c by left-handing and the lottery of the first special symbol is executed, so that the probability is high (for example, a ratio of about 90%). A big hit or a small hit of the first special symbol is won, and the long fluctuation of the second special symbol can be forcibly removed and terminated (discarded). As a result, it is possible to more easily execute the variation of the special symbol on the side that is easily executed for each game state.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 265, details of various operation means for changing the setting of the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 265 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 265, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment, a set value display device 110a capable of displaying a set value on the main controller 110, a setting change operation (and a setting confirmation operation) ), A setting key 110b capable of switching between a state of accepting and a state of not accepting (normal game state), and an operator (for example, installing the pachinko machine 10 in a state of accepting a setting change operation (setting change state)). And a setting switch 110c capable of changing the set value of the pachinko machine 10 in response to an operation of a pachinko clerk at the hall where the pachinko machine is located. A method of changing settings using this setting change mechanism and a method of checking settings will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  First, a procedure for changing the settings of the pachinko machine 10 using the setting change mechanism will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIGS. 266 (a) to 266 (d), in order to change the settings of the pachinko machine 10, first, the setting key 110b is rotated clockwise in a state where the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off. As a result, it is turned to the ON position (see FIG. 266 (a)). That is, in order to change the settings, it is necessary to first shut down the power of the pachinko machine 10. Next, the RAM clear switch 122 is turned on while the setting key 110b is turned to the ON side, and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on (see FIG. 266 (b)). Thereby, the state of the pachinko machine 10 after the power is turned on is set to the setting change state. When the setting is changed, "-" is displayed for each digit of the setting value display device 110a constituted by a 4-digit 7-segment display. With this display content, the operator (for example, a store clerk in the hall) can easily understand that the setting has been normally changed to the setting change state.

  In the setting change state, the set value is switched by one each time the setting switch 110c is pressed (see FIG. 266 (c)). In the eleventh embodiment, six types of setting values 1 to 6 are provided, and the larger the numerical value is, the higher the jackpot probability becomes. That is, the jackpot probability of the setting 1 is the lowest (for example, 1/320 in the low probability state and 1/102 in the high probability (probable change) state), and the jackpot probability of the setting 6 is the highest (for example, 1 in the low probability state). / 220, 1/70 in the high probability state). In the setting change state, each time the setting switch 110c is pressed, the setting is changed in the order of 1 → 2 →... → 6. When the setting switch 110c is pressed in a state where the setting value is 6, the setting value returns to 1. Further, every time the setting switch 110c is pressed, a numeral indicating the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display device 110a. FIG. 226 (c) is a diagram showing a display mode in a state where the set value is set to “5”. As shown in FIG. 226 (c), when the setting value is switched to 5 by pressing down the setting switch 110c, the numeral “5” indicating the setting 5 is displayed in the lower one digit of the setting value display device 110a. Is done.

  After the operator completes the switching operation to the desired setting value, the setting key 110b is rotated counterclockwise to dispose the setting key 110b at the OFF position, whereby the setting change state is terminated and the normal game (See FIG. 266 (d)). The setting key 110b includes a key portion having a key shape and a keyhole portion having a keyhole shape matching the key portion, and the key portion can be removed. Thus, the key portion can be inserted into the keyhole portion only when the operator (for example, a hall clerk) performs the setting change operation, and the key portion can be removed and stored when the setting change operation is completed. it can. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized player or the like from changing the settings of the pachinko machine 10 during business hours, thereby preventing an unexpected disadvantage to the hall. it can.

  Next, a procedure (setting confirmation operation) for confirming the setting will be described with reference to FIGS. In order to confirm the setting, first, similarly to the setting change operation, the setting key 110b is turned to the ON position while the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off (see FIG. 266 (e)). Then, by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 without turning on the RAM clear switch 122 (that is, with the RAM clear switch 122 kept off), the setting confirmation state is set (see FIG. 266 (f)). When the mode shifts to the setting confirmation state, the currently set value is displayed on the set value display device 110a. The example of FIG. 266 (f) shows a state where “5” is set as the set value. When the setting confirmation by the operator is completed, the setting confirmation state is terminated by turning the setting key 110b to the ON side, and the state is shifted to a state where a normal game can be performed (see FIG. 266 (g)).

  Although the setting key 110b and the setting switch 110c are provided separately in the eleventh embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the configuration may be such that the setting switch 110c is deleted and the setting can be changed according to the amount of rotation of the setting key 110b. More specifically, the setting may be switched in the order of 1 → 2 →... → 6 each time the setting key 110b is turned by 60 degrees. Then, at the end of the setting change operation, the key portion of the setting key 110b may be pulled out of the keyhole portion so as to return to a state where a normal game can be played. With this configuration, the configuration of the setting change mechanism can be simplified, and the number of components can be reduced. Therefore, the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 267, a description will be given of a transition of the effect mode in the eleventh embodiment in a case where the setting change operation is completed and a transition is made to a state where a normal game can be played. Here, in the eleventh embodiment, an effect capable of suggesting to the player the set value set by the setting change operation is configured to be executable. More specifically, in the eleventh embodiment, each time a specific change pattern is selected, the current setting of the pachinko machine 10 is set only between the time when the setting change is performed and the time when the first jackpot is won. A setting suggestion effect that suggests a value by the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is configured to be executable.

  In this setting suggestion effect, the left symbol column and the right symbol column are stopped and displayed in the third symbol with the same number, and an effect that finally comes off (so-called out-of-reach effect) is executed, and the reach is performed. The set value is indicated to the player by the numbers of the left and right third symbols stopped at the time of occurrence. More specifically, the reach of one symbol (the reach effect in which the third symbol with the number “1” attached to the left and right is stopped and displayed) is selected when “1” is set as the set value. There is a high possibility that the reach of two symbols is selected when the set value is set to “2”, and the reach of three symbols is set to “3” as the set value. Is highly likely to be selected, and the reach of four symbols is likely to be selected when the set values “4” to “6” are set, and the reach of five symbols is set as “ It is highly likely that the selection is made when “5” or “6” is set, and the possibility that the reach of 6 symbols is selected when “6” is set as the set value is increased. It is configured. The reach of the symbol “9” is configured to be selected only when “6” is set as the set value. On the other hand, the reach of eight symbols is configured to be more likely to be selected as the setting is lower.

  FIG. 267 is a diagram showing a transition of the presentation mode after the setting change operation in the eleventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 267, in the eleventh embodiment, after the setting change operation is completed, the normal effect mode is executed over the fluctuation display based on the 49th special symbol lottery, and the 50th fluctuation is performed. In the display, a setting suggestion effect is executed. Then, in the 51st to 99th fluctuation displays, a normal effect mode is executed, and in the 100th fluctuation display, a setting suggestion effect is executed. Thereafter, a setting suggestion effect is executed every time the number of times of the variable display becomes a multiple of 50 until the first win of the jackpot. In the eleventh embodiment, whether the setting suggestion effect is a variation pattern to be set according to the type of the variation pattern notified by the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 to the audio ramp control device 113. The sound lamp control device 113 is configured to determine whether or not it is not.

  Although details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 271 and 272 (b), in the eleventh embodiment, when the power-on with the RAM clear 122 is executed, the number of fluctuations after the power-on is 50. A variation pattern scenario is set such that a special variation type (out-of-range special reach variation) that is not normally selected is selected every time the multiple is reached. The voice lamp control device 113 is configured to determine the production mode of the setting suggestion production and execute the fluctuation pattern production of the decided production mode only when the special reach fluctuation is notified as the fluctuation pattern command. are doing. With this configuration, the audio lamp control device 113 grasps whether or not the setting change (power-on with operation of the RAM clear switch 122) has been executed, the number of fluctuations after the power-on, and the like. Since there is no need, the processing load on the audio lamp control device 113 side can be reduced.

  After the setting is changed, the setting suggestion effect is executed every time the special symbol lottery is executed until the jackpot is won for the first time. It is possible to start the game with the pachinko machine 10 that has not been won in the jackpot, and to make the user decide to check whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed. Continued motivation can be provided to the player. More specifically, for example, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the result of the previous day is poor (the jackpot probability calculated from the actual number of games (number of lotteries of special symbols) and the number of jackpots is low). When the setting suggestion effect can be confirmed, the player can be expected to expect that the setting effect has been changed to an advantageous setting value. Therefore, it is intended to continue the game in the pachinko machine 10 in which the setting suggestion effect has been confirmed. I can make you think. Also, for example, if the result of the previous day is good (the result of the jackpot probability calculated from the actual number of games and the number of jackpots is high), the setting suggestion effect cannot be confirmed in the pachinko machine 10, Since the player can be convinced that the setting has not been changed as it is, the game can be continued in expectation of a good result as in the previous day. Further, in the setting suggestion effect, when an effect that can be expected to be set at a high setting is executed, the game can be continued with a stronger expectation of the high setting. In addition, even if a jackpot is won before the setting suggestion effect is executed (before the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times), the event of winning within 50 times occurs as the higher the setting. Since it is possible to make the player think that the game is easy, it can be made to think that the game is to be continued.

  As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, every time a special symbol lottery is performed a specific number of times (50 times) after the setting is changed and until the jackpot is first won, identification regarding the degree of advantage of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. By executing an effect capable of suggesting the element (set value), it is possible to increase the motivation of the player for the game. Thereby, especially, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 in a state where the jackpot has not been won can be improved.

<Electrical Configuration in Eleventh Embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 according to the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 268 (a) is a block diagram showing a configuration of the ROM 202 in the eleventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 268 (a), the ROM 202 according to the eleventh embodiment is different from the configuration of the ROM 202 according to the above-described seventh embodiment (see FIG. 168 (a)) in that the first random number 7 table 202fa is replaced. In that a first random number 11 table 202ma is provided, a small random number table 202fb is provided in place of the small random number table 202fb, and a big hit type selection 11 table is provided in place of the big hit type selection 7 table 202fd. This is different in that a 202 md is provided, a fluctuating pattern selection 11 table 202me is provided in place of the fluctuating pattern selection 7 table 202fe, and a fluctuating pattern scenario table 202mf is added. The fluctuation pattern scenario table 202mf includes four fluctuation pattern tables defined in the fluctuation pattern 11 table 202me (11 tables 202me1 for normal use, 11 tables 202me2 for time saving / probable change, 11 tables 202me3 for latent detection, and the RAM clear table 202me4). Is a data table that is referred to to determine which of the fluctuation pattern tables is to be referred to to select a fluctuation pattern (variation time).

  First, the details of the first random number 11 table 202ma in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 269 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first random number 11 table 202ma. As shown in FIG. 269 (a), the first random number 11 table 202ma in the eleventh embodiment has a random number value (counter value) determined to be a big hit in association with the state of the special symbol and the set value. Is defined. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 269 (a), in the low probability state of the special symbol, for the set value “1” (set 1), the counter value of the first random number counter C1 (random value ) Is defined in association with “0 to 204”, and for the set value “2” (setting 2), the range of the counter value (random value) of the first random number counter C1 is “0 to 217”. Is defined in association with the setting value “3” (setting 3), and “0 to 233” is defined as the range of the counter value (random value) of the first random number counter C1. For the setting value “4” (setting 4), “0 to 251” is defined as the range of the counter value (random value) of the first random number counter C1, and the setting value “5” (setting 5) ), The counter value of the first random number counter C1 A range of “0 to 272” is defined in association with a range of “random number value”, and a range of “0” is set as a range of the counter value (random value) of the first random number counter C1 for the set value “6” (setting 6). ２297 ”are defined in association with each other. In the eleventh embodiment, the range that the first random number counter C1 can take is expanded to “0 to 65535”. Therefore, the jackpot probability of the setting 1 in the low probability state of the special symbol is 1/320 (205/65536), the jackpot probability of the setting 2 is 1/301 (218/65536), and the jackpot probability of the setting 3 is It is 1/280 (234/65536), the jackpot probability of setting 4 is 1/260 (252/65536), the jackpot probability of setting 5 is 1/240 (273/65536), and the jackpot probability of setting 6 Is 1/220 (298/65536).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 269 (a), in the high probability state of the special symbol, “0 to 643” corresponds to the setting 1 as the range of the counter value (random value) of the first random number counter C1. For setting 2, “0 to 686” is defined as the range of the counter value (random number value) of the first random number counter C1. The range of the counter value (random number value) of the random number counter C1 is defined in association with “0 to 735”. For the setting 4, the counter value (random value) of the first random number counter C1 is set to “0”. ７９791 ”is defined in association with the setting 5, and“ 0 to 857 ”is defined in association with the range of the counter value (random value) of the first random number counter C1 for setting 5, and the setting value 6 The first hit "0-935" is defined in association with a range of counter value of the counter C1 (random number). Therefore, the jackpot probability of the setting 1 in the special symbol high-probability state is 1/102 (644/65536), the jackpot probability of the setting 2 is 1/95 (686/65536), and the jackpot probability of the setting 3 is 1/89 (736/65536), the jackpot probability of setting 4 is 1/82 (792/65536), the jackpot probability of setting 5 is 1/76 (858/65536), and the jackpot probability of setting 6 Is 1/70 (936/65536). Note that the ratio between the jackpot probability in the low probability state and the jackpot probability in the high probability state is common.

  In the eleventh embodiment, as a whole, the higher the setting, the higher the degree of advantage for the player. That is, the configuration is such that setting 6 is most advantageous for the player, and setting 1 is most disadvantageous. In other words, the higher the setting, the higher the jackpot probability, so the total prize balls that can be acquired by the jackpot itself increase, and even taking into account the fact that the number of prize balls due to the small jackpot that can be acquired during the latent state decreases , The higher the setting is, the higher the total advantage is. In other words, the low setting (for example, setting 1) is more disadvantageous to the player as the game is continued, so how many prize balls can be obtained in the 1 latent state (big hit) How many times a special symbol lottery can be executed without winning the game), and the short game will be a good game. It becomes a long-running game in which a prize ball can be stably obtained.

  As described above, the eleventh embodiment is configured so that it can be set to one of the six set values from 1 to 6, and the higher the setting, the lower the probability state and the higher the probability ( The jackpot probability in the (probable change) state increases. Therefore, the higher the setting, the more difficult the normal state is to continue for a long period of time (the less likely to be hammering), but the more advantageous latent state is likely to end in a relatively short period of time (big hit in the latent state). Other game states are easily set by winning.) Here, as described above, in the eleventh embodiment, when the special symbol lottery is executed in the latent state, which is the most advantageous game state, the small winning is won with a high probability and the right variable winning device 1650 is opened. Therefore, an opportunity to win a prize ball is often given without winning a jackpot. Further, once the game shifts to the advantageous latent state, the game is not shifted to another game state unless a jackpot is won. Therefore, in the latent state, the longer the period in which the jackpot is not won (that is, the more the player gets addicted), the more prize balls can be obtained by the small hit, which is advantageous to the player. Therefore, in an advantageous latent state, the jackpot probability is relatively low, and the low setting in which the hammer is relatively easy is more likely to be 1 than in the high setting in which the jackpot probability is high and the hammer is less likely to occur. , The total number of prize balls that can be obtained by the small hit game is likely to increase. In other words, according to the jackpot probability (probability), the game property (the game state in which both the disadvantageous state and the advantageous game state are easily completed in a relatively short period, and the game state in which the disadvantageous game state and the advantageous game state are both advantageous for a relatively long time) Since it is possible to make the game characteristics different from each other easily, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the player.

  In the eleventh embodiment, the ratio of the jackpot probability in the special symbol low-probability state to the jackpot probability in the special symbol high-probability state (probable change state) is configured to be common to all settings. However, the ratio of the jackpot probability between the low probability state and the high probability state may be different for each setting. More specifically, for example, the jackpot probability in the low-probability state is made different according to the set value similarly to the above-described eleventh embodiment, while the jackpot probability in the high-probability state is constant regardless of the set value (for example, , 1/90). With this configuration, it is possible to make the easiness of addiction in the high-probability state common regardless of the setting, so that the advantage degree in the advantageous latent state can be made common regardless of the setting. Therefore, the superiority of the high setting can be further enhanced, so that it is possible to provide easy-to-understand gaming characteristics in which a higher setting is advantageous in all aspects. In addition, for example, the odd-number setting (settings 1, 3, and 5) and the even-number setting (settings 2, 4, and 6) may have different jackpot probabilities in the high-probability state. Specifically, for example, the configuration is such that the jackpot probability in the high-probability state is low (for example, 1/100) in the odd setting, while the jackpot probability in the high-probability state is high (for example, 1/70) in the even setting. May be. With such a configuration, the degree of advantage in the advantageous latent state can be made different between the odd number setting and the even number setting, so that the playability can be greatly changed according to the setting. Furthermore, in this case, as the jackpot probability in the low probability state of the special symbol, the even setting is configured to have a higher jackpot probability than the odd setting, and the setting is higher in the odd setting and in the even setting. It may be configured such that the greater the probability of the jackpot. With such a configuration, it is possible to greatly vary the playability depending on whether the set value is an odd number or an even number. That is, in the even number setting, the disadvantageous normal state is hard to last for a long time, but the latent state is hard to last for a long time. It is easy to last for a long time, but since the latent state is easy to last for a long time, the addiction is severe, but once it shifts to the latent state, it is possible to expect more prize balls In other words, it is possible to realize a game like a rough sea. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be further improved. In addition, since an appropriate setting can be selected according to the business policy of the hall, the convenience of the hall can be improved.

  Next, details of the small hit random number 11 table 202mb in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 269 (b) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the small hit random number 11 table 202mb in the eleventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 269 (b), in the eleventh embodiment, a common value is associated with the random number value determined as the small hit (the value of the first random number counter C1) regardless of the type of the special symbol. Stipulated. More specifically, 936 to 58981 is associated and defined as a range of the random number value corresponding to the small hit (the counter value of the first random number counter C1). Of the 65535 random number values (counter values) from 0 to 65535 that the first random number counter C1 can take, the number of random number values (counter values) corresponding to small hits is 58046, so that the lottery of the special symbol is not performed. When executed, the rate at which the lottery result is a small hit is about 88.6% (58046/65536).

  As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, when a lottery of a special symbol is executed, it is configured to win a small hit with a high probability (a ratio of 88.6%). , The right variable winning device 1650 is frequently opened, and the prize ball can be frequently acquired by the player. Therefore, the interest of the game in the latent state can be improved, and the game can be played with a strong expectation of shifting to the latent state. In addition, by making a lottery win with a high probability in the lottery of the first special symbol as well as the lottery of the second special symbol, the player has intentionally or mistakenly made a right-hand in the normal state. When the lottery of the second special symbol has been executed due to, for example, the long fluctuation of the second special symbol can be forcibly ended (discarded) by the small hit of the first special symbol.

  Next, details of the jackpot type selection 11 table 202md in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 270 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the jackpot type selection 11 table 202md. The big hit type selection 11 table 202md is a data table in which the determination value for determining the big hit type is stored for each special symbol type, like the big hit type selection 7 table 202fd in the seventh embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 270, the jackpot type selection 11 table 202md in the eleventh embodiment includes six jackpots of "big hit A11" to "big hit F11" as the big hit types of the first special symbol (special figure 1). The type is specified. On the other hand, as the jackpot types of the second special symbol, five jackpot types of “jackpot G11” to “jackpot K11” are defined.

  As shown in FIG. 270, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special figure 1), “big hit A11” is defined as the big hit type in association with the value “0” of the first hit type counter C2. ing. In the “big hit A11”, the number of rounds of the big hit is 16 rounds, and the gaming state after the end of the big hit is set to the most advantageous latent state irrespective of the gaming state at the time of winning (time saving regardless of the gaming state). The value of the counter 203h is set to 0, and the probability change flag 203g is set to ON. The "big hit A11" is the most advantageous big hit type for the player because the number of rounds is the largest and the gaming state after the big hit is the most advantageous. Since the random number value (counter value) associated with “big hit A11” is one of the 100 random number values (counter value) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the first special symbol lottery is selected. In the case of the jackpot, the rate at which the "small jackpot A11" is determined is 1% (1/100).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 270, “big hit B11” is defined as the big hit type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “1 to 49”. In the “big hit B11”, the number of rounds of the big hit is eight rounds, and the special symbol is set to the special symbol change state after the jackpot is completed (the probability variable flag 203g is set to ON). It is. In the case where the "big hit B11" is won in the normal state, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 65536, while in the gaming state other than the normal state (the time saving state, the probability change state, and the latent state), the time saving time is set. 0 is set to the value of the counter 203h.

  That is, when the "big hit B11" is won in the normal state, the state shifts to a relatively advantageous probability change state. In this probable change state, the number of times saved is set to 65536, so that the probable change state substantially continues until the next big hit. On the other hand, if the "big hit B11" is won in a gaming state other than the normal state, the number of times saved is set to 0, and the gaming state after the end of the big win is the most advantageous latent state. Therefore, the "big hit B11" is a big hit type that is relatively advantageous in terms of the gaming state when the winning is performed in the normal state. On the other hand, when the winning is performed in a gaming state other than the normal state, the winning type is the most advantageous in the gaming state. Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with “big hit B11” is 49, so that the first special symbol lottery is selected. In the case of a jackpot, the rate at which the "jackpot B11" is determined is 49% (49/100).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 270, "big hit C11" is defined as the big hit type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "50 to 59". In the “big hit C11”, the number of rounds of the big hit is eight, and the game state after the big hit is set to a relatively advantageous probable change state regardless of the game state at the time of the big hit winning (the value of the time-saving counter 203h). Is set to 65536, and the probability change flag 203g is set to ON).

  That is, when the "big hit C11" is won, a probable change state that substantially continues to the next big hit is set regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning. Therefore, the "big hit C11" is a big hit type that is relatively advantageous in terms of the gaming state. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with “big hit C11” is 10, so the first special symbol lottery In the case of a big hit, the rate at which the “big hit C11” is determined is 10% (10/100).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 270, “big hit D11” is defined as the big hit type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “60 to 64”. In the “big hit D11”, the number of rounds of the big hit is eight, and the game state after the big hit is set to a relatively advantageous probable change state regardless of the game state at the time of the big hit (the value of the time-saving counter 203h). Is set to 100, and the probability change flag 203g is set to ON). In addition, unlike “big hit C11”, in “big hit D11”, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 100, so that the probability change state does not always continue until the next big hit. That is, if the special symbol lottery within 100 times after the “big hit D11” is completed does not result in a big hit, the value of the time reduction counter 203h becomes 0 and the state shifts to the most advantageous latent state. Therefore, the "big hit D11" is a big hit type that is more advantageous than the "big hit C11" in the game state after the end of the big hit. In the event that a special jackpot has been won within 100 times, the operation will be exactly the same as the "big hit D11", which will be more advantageous than the "big hit C11" in terms of the game state after the end of the big hit. It can be rephrased as an easy jackpot type. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with “big hit D11” is 5, so the first special symbol lottery In the case of a jackpot, the rate at which the "jackpot D11" is determined is 5% (5/100).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 270, “big hit E11” is defined as the big hit type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “65 to 84”. In the "big hit E11", the number of rounds of the big hit is eight rounds, and the game state after the big hit is set to a relatively disadvantageous time-saving state regardless of the game state at the time of the big hit winning (the value of the time-saving counter 203h). Is set to 100, and the probability change flag 203g is set to OFF). Therefore, the "big hit E11" is a big hit type that is relatively disadvantageous in terms of a game state after the big hit end. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "big hit E11" is 20, so the first special symbol lottery In the case of a jackpot, the rate at which the "big hit E11" is determined is 20% (20/100).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 270, “big hit F11” is defined as the big hit type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “85 to 99”. In the “big hit F11”, the number of rounds of the big hit is eight rounds, and the state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit is set to the low probability state of the special symbol (the probability change flag 203g is set to off). (8 rounds regular jackpot). In addition, when the "big hit F11" is won in the normal state, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 100, whereas when the "big hit F11" is won in a game state other than the normal state, the time saving counter 203h is set. The value is set to 0. Therefore, if a "big hit F11" is won in a game state other than the normal state, the game shifts to the most disadvantageous normal state. Therefore, the "big hit F11" is the most disadvantageous in the game state after the end of the big hit. It is a big hit type. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with “big hit F11” is 15, so the lottery of the first special symbol is selected. In the case of a jackpot, the rate at which the "jackpot F11" is determined is 15% (15/100).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 270, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 4”, while the jackpot type is “big hit”. G11 "is defined in association with the above. This “big hit G11” has a number of rounds of 16 big hits, and the state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit is set to the special change state of the special symbol (the certain change flag 203g is set to ON). 16 rounds with a big change). In addition, in the case of winning in the "big hit G11" in the normal state, 65536 is set to the value of the time saving counter 203h, while in the case of winning in the gaming state other than the normal state, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set. The value is set to 0. Therefore, when the "big hit G11" is won in the normal state, a probable change state that substantially continues to the next big hit is set, and when the "big hit G11" is won in a game state other than the normal state, An advantageous latent state is set. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the "big hit G11" is 5, so the lottery of the second special symbol is performed. In the case of a jackpot, the rate at which the "jackpot G11" is determined is 5% (5/100).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 270, “big hit H11” is defined as the big hit type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “5 to 9”. In the “big hit H11”, the number of rounds of the big hit is two rounds, and the state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit is set to the special change state of the special symbol (the certain change flag 203g is set to ON). (2 rounds jackpot). In addition, in the case of winning in the "big hit H11" in the normal state, 65536 is set to the value of the time saving counter 203h, while in the case of winning in the game state other than the normal state, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set. The value is set to 0. Therefore, when the "big hit H11" is won in the normal state, a probable change state that substantially continues to the next big hit is set, and when the "big hit H11" is won in a game state other than the normal state, An advantageous latent state is set. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "big hit H11" is 5, so the second special symbol lottery In the case of a jackpot, the rate at which the "jackpot H11" is determined is 5% (5/100).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 270, “big hit I11” is defined as the big hit type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “10 to 14”. In the "big hit I11", the number of rounds of the big hit is two rounds, and the gaming state after the end of the big hit is set to a probability change state of 100 times of time reduction regardless of the gaming state at the time of the big hit winning (of the time reduction counter 203h). (The value is set to 100 and the probability change flag 203g is set to ON.) Therefore, the "big hit I11" is a big hit type that is relatively advantageous in terms of the game state after the big hit end. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "big hit I11" is 5, so the second special symbol lottery In the case of a jackpot, the rate at which the "big hit I11" is determined is 5% (5/100).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 270, "big hit J11" is defined as the big hit type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 being "15 to 64". The “big hit J11” has two rounds of big hits and is set to a probable change state in which the game state after the big hit is substantially continued to the next big hit regardless of the game state at the time of the big hit winning. (The value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to 65536, and the probability change flag 203g is set to ON.) Therefore, the "big hit J11" is a big hit type having a lower degree of advantage than the "big hit I11" in the gaming state after the end of the big hit. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are 50 random numbers (counter values) associated with the "big hit J11", so the second special symbol lottery In the case of a jackpot, the rate at which the "jackpot J11" is determined is 50% (50/100).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 270, “big hit K11” is defined as the big hit type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “65 to 99”. In the "big hit K11", the number of rounds of the big hit is two, and the game state after the end of the big hit is set to the time saving state of 100 times of the time saving regardless of the game state at the time of the big hit winning (the time saving counter). The value of 203h is set to 100, and the probability change flag 203g is set to OFF). Therefore, the "big hit K11" is the most unfavorable big hit type among the big hit types of the second special symbol both in terms of the number of rounds and in the game state after the end of the big hit. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with “big hit K11” is 35, so the second special symbol lottery In the case of a jackpot, the rate at which the "jackpot K11" is determined is 35% (35/100).

  In the case where a jackpot has been won in the lottery of the second special symbol in the normal state, there is no jackpot type that directly shifts to the latent state. This is because the right shot is aimed at the right second entrance 645 in the normal state. This is for the purpose of suppressing irregular game methods of firing game balls. That is, if the player makes a right hit in the normal state, the long fluctuation of the second special symbol is executed, the game efficiency is extremely deteriorated, and the gaming state after the end of the big hit is more disadvantageous than the big hit of the first special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel that playing an irregular game is disadvantageous. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the irregular game method.

  Next, the details of the variation pattern selection 11 table 202me in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Here, although illustration is omitted, the variation pattern selection 11 table 202me in the eleventh embodiment determines a variation pattern (variation time) when a special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state after the end of the big hit. 11 table 202me1 for normal use, which is referred to in order to determine a fluctuation pattern when a special symbol lottery is executed in the probable change state and the time saving state, and the latent state And a fluctuation pattern when a special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state after the RAM is cleared, and a latent 11 table 202me3 which is referred to determine a fluctuation pattern when a special symbol lottery is executed. And the RAM clear table 202me4 which is referred to for the It is composed of Buru.

  Of these, the prescribed contents of the time saving / probability change 11 table 202me2 are the same as those of the probability change 7 table 202fe2 in the seventh embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted here. First, with reference to FIG. 271 (a), details of the latent 11 table 202me3 constituting the variable pattern selection 11 table 202me in the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 271 (a) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the eleventh table for latent image 202me3.

  As shown in FIG. 271 (a), a super long variation of 60000 ms is defined in association with the lottery of the first special symbol regardless of the lottery result. Therefore, when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed in the latent state, the fluctuation display for 600 seconds (10 minutes) is always executed. On the other hand, in the case of the lottery result of the second special symbol, if the lottery result is a hit, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 49” and the fluctuation time is 2000 ms. When the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “50 to 198”, a long variation per 5000 ms is defined in association with the variation. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 271 (a), when the lottery result of the second special symbol is out of place (or a small hit), the change time of the change type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 49”. An off-short variation of 2000 ms is defined in association with a long variation of 5000 ms in a variation type counter CS1 in the range of "50 to 198". Therefore, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the latent state, only the fluctuation pattern of a short fluctuation time (2 seconds or 5 seconds) is executed, so that the small hit of the second special symbol is performed in a relatively short period of time. The game is executed. Therefore, more prize balls can be acquired in a short period of time in the latent state, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Next, the details of the RAM clear time table 202me4 will be described with reference to FIG. 271 (b). As described above, the RAM clear table 202me4 has a special symbol lottery in a normal state (normal state after the RAM clear operation) set when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on while the RAM clear switch 122 is pressed. 6 is a data table referred to for determining a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) based on. Here, as described above, in order to change the setting of the pachinko machine 10 (setting of a combination of the jackpot probability in the low probability state and the high probability state), the RAM clear operation is indispensable. For this reason, the RAM clearing table 202me4 is always referred to until the jackpot is won after the setting is changed.

  As shown in FIG. 271 (b), when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a hit, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 39” regardless of the number of variations after the RAM clear operation. A fluctuation normal time of 20000 ms is defined in association with the normal fluctuation, and a value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in a range of "40 to 119". When the value of CS1 is in the range of “120 to 198”, a special fluctuation per 40,000 ms is specified in association with the fluctuation.

  On the other hand, if the lottery result is out of order and the number of changes after the RAM clear operation is a multiple of 50, a special reach change with a change time of 25000 seconds is supported regardless of the value of the change type counter CS1. It is stipulated. The out-of-special reach reach variation is a variation type that can be determined only in the normal state after the RAM clear operation. The voice lamp control device 113 is configured to execute a setting suggestion effect as an effect mode (fluctuation pattern effect) during execution of the out-of-special reach reach fluctuation, when receiving the fluctuation pattern command indicating the out-of-special reach reach fluctuation. I have. In other words, after the RAM clear operation (after the setting change), the setting suggestion effect can be executed every time the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times on condition that no jackpot has been won. Therefore, the player who wants to guess the setting of the pachinko machine 10 which is currently playing the game based on the content of the setting suggestion effect desires that the special symbol lottery be continuously removed at least 50 times or more. It is possible to provide novel game characteristics. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be further improved. Further, if the setting suggestion effect does not occur even if the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times or more after the power is turned on, it is determined that the RAM clear operation has not been performed (that is, the setting has not been changed). Can be convinced. Therefore, in the case where the result of the previous day of the pachinko machine 10 performing the game is good (the result of the jackpot probability calculated from the actual number of games (the number of special symbol lotteries) and the number of jackpots is high). Can be set to a setting (high setting) with a large jackpot probability before the previous day, and the player can be predicted that the setting has not been changed to the good setting until today. On the other hand, on the other hand, the result of the previous day of the pachinko machine 10 performing the game is poor (the actual number of games (the number of special symbol lotteries) and the number of jackpots are low and the jackpot probability is low). In this case, it is possible to make the player predict that the jackpot probability is set to a bad setting (low setting) before the previous day and that the bad setting has not been changed until today. As described above, since the playability of estimating the presence or absence of the setting change and the setting value can be realized by the presence or absence of the setting suggestion effect, it is possible to further enhance the interest for the player's advantage.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 271 (b), when the lottery result is out of order and the number of changes after the RAM clear operation is other than a multiple of 50, the value of the change type counter CS1 is set to “0”. A variation time of 8000 ms is defined in association with the range of “−70”, and a variation time of 12000 ms is associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 in the range of “71 to 130”. The normal type is defined in such a manner that the fluctuation type counter CS1 has a fluctuation time of 20000 ms with respect to the range of "131 to 170", and the fluctuation type counter CS1 has a value of "171 to 198". On the other hand, a super-variation with a variation time of 30,000 ms is defined in association with the super-variation. In other words, when the number of times of change is other than a multiple of 50 and the lottery of the first special symbol is lost, the special reach change is not selected. In this manner, by limiting the timing at which the out-of-special reach reach is executed (that is, the execution timing of the setting suggestion effect) to the number of times of a multiple of 50, it is possible to continue the game until the number of times of the variation becomes a multiple of 50. The player can have a sense of purpose. Therefore, it is possible to improve the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 that has not won the jackpot at least once on the day.

  As shown in FIG. 271 (b), when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a hit, the change time is long per 600,000 ms regardless of the number of changes after the RAM clear operation and the value of the change type counter CS1. Fluctuations are defined in association with each other. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the second special symbol is out of order, the out-of-change long-time change of 600000 ms is defined in association with the number of changes after the RAM clear operation and the value of the change type counter CS1. That is, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the normal state after the RAM clear operation, an extremely long fluctuation time of 600,000 ms is set under any circumstances. Therefore, in the normal state, the game efficiency in the case of performing the game by right-handing can be extremely deteriorated, and the special reach fluctuation is not selected even if the game comes off (the setting suggestion effect is not executed). Is extremely disadvantageous for Therefore, it is possible to suppress the irregular game method of right-handing in the normal state.

  In the case of the normal table 202me1, if the first special symbol is drawn out of the RAM clearing table 202me4 by lottery, the special reach change is not selected even if the number of changes is a multiple of 50. (A variation pattern at a variation number other than a multiple of 50 is selected), and the other specified contents are the same as those in the RAM clear table 202me4. Detailed description is omitted.

  Next, the details of the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202mf in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202mf includes the four fluctuation pattern tables (the normal 11 table 202me1, the time saving / probable variation 11 table 202me2, the latent 11 table 202me3, and the RAM) defined in the fluctuation pattern 11 table 202me. This is a data table that is referred to to determine which variation pattern table (variation time) is to be selected by referring to which variation pattern table in the clear time table 202me4).

  As shown in FIG. 272, the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202mf in the eleventh embodiment includes the gaming state after the end of the previous jackpot, the type of the previous jackpot, and the number of lotteries (variations) of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot. A variation pattern table referred to for selecting a variation pattern is defined in association with the variation pattern table. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 272, the gaming state after the end of the previous jackpot is the latent state, and the previous jackpot type is the jackpot A11, B11, G11, H11, after the jackpot is over. Irrespective of the number of lotteries (number of times of change) of the special symbol, the fluctuation pattern scenario in which the change pattern (time of change) is determined by referring to the latent 11 table 202me3 (see FIG. 271 (a)) is defined in association. Have been. Therefore, when the big hits A11, B11, G11, and H11 are won, the lottery of the second special symbol is frequently executed by right-handing until the next big hit, and the small hit of the second special symbol is won. An advantageous game state is provided in which a chance to obtain a prize ball is frequently given.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 272, the number of special symbol lotteries within 100 after the end of the jackpot for the jackpots D11 and I11 for the previous jackpot type D11 and I11 for the jackpot D11 and I11 after the end of the jackpot. In this case, the variation pattern scenario in which the time saving / probability change 11 table 202me2 is referred to and the special probability 11 table 202me3 is referred to in the case of 101 or more special symbol lotteries is defined in association with each other. For this reason, if the gaming state after the jackpot is won and the jackpot D11 or I11 is set to the probable change state, the first special symbol lottery is performed by right-handing until the special symbol lottery is completed 100 times after the jackpot. On the other hand, the lottery is frequently executed (the long fluctuation is always set when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed). On the other hand, the lottery of the second special symbol is executed frequently after 101 times, and the lottery of the second special symbol is executed. An advantageous game state is formed in which a chance of winning a small hit and obtaining a prize ball is frequently given. Therefore, in the probable change state, it is possible to play the game with the expectation that the lottery will be executed 101 times or more without winning the jackpot, so that the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 272, the gaming state after the end of the previous jackpot is a probable change state, and the previous jackpot type is other than the jackpot D11 and I11 (that is, any one of the jackpots B11, C11, G11, H11, and J11). ), A variation pattern scenario in which the time saving / probability variation 11 table 202me2 is referred to is defined irrespective of the number of special symbol lotteries after the end of the jackpot. Therefore, when the jackpots B11, C11, G11, H11, and J11 are won and the probable change state is set, a relatively advantageous game state in which the player can play the game without reducing the number of balls held until the next jackpot. To form

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 272, when the gaming state after the end of the previous jackpot is the normal state and the last jackpot type is the jackpot F11, the number of special symbol lotteries after the end of the jackpot is determined. Instead, a variation pattern scenario in which the normal 11 table 202me1 is referred to is defined in association. For this reason, if the player does not play the game by aiming at the central first ball entrance 64c by left-handing, a game state is formed which is disadvantageous for a player whose game efficiency is significantly deteriorated.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 272, when the gaming state after the end of the previous jackpot is the time saving state and the last jackpot type is any of the jackpots E11, F11, and K11, the number of hits is within 100 after the end of the jackpot. In the case of the number of special symbol lotteries, the variation pattern scenario in which the time saving / probability change 11 table 202me2 is referred to, and in the case of 101 or more special symbols lottery times, the normal 11 table 202me1 is referred to, is defined in association with each other. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 272, the normal state after the RAM is cleared is associated with a variation pattern scenario that refers to the RAM clear table 202me4 regardless of the number of special symbol lotteries after the RAM is cleared. Stipulated. Therefore, in the normal state after the RAM is cleared, the special reach variation is selected and the setting suggestion effect is executed every time the number of times of drawing the special symbol becomes a multiple of 50. Therefore, the player who wants to guess the setting of the pachinko machine 10 which is currently playing the game based on the content of the setting suggestion effect desires that the special symbol lottery be continuously removed at least 50 times or more. It is possible to provide novel game characteristics. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 268 (b), details of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 in the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 268 (b) is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the RAM 203 according to the eleventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 268 (b), the RAM 203 in the eleventh embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the above-described seventh embodiment (see FIG. 173) in that a second special symbol holding ball storage area 203db and a second 2 special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd, set value storage area 203ma, winning state storage area 203mb, special figure 1 big hit flag 203mc, special figure 2 big hit flag 203md, special figure 1 small hit flag 203me, The difference is that a special map 2 small hit flag 203mf is added. Further, the difference is that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh, the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203d k, the special figure 2 subtraction flag 203dl, and the time saving end standby flag 203dm are deleted.

  The second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db is different from the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da only in that it is a storage area corresponding to the second special symbol. More specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the small hit type counter C5, and the variation in accordance with the timing of entering the right second entrance 645. Each value of the type counter CS1 is acquired, and the acquired data is an area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). Are stored in order from the smallest area. That is, the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when a special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db are changed to the execution area. Is shifted (moved), and a determination such as a lottery of a special symbol is made based on each counter value stored in the execution area. When data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process of packing the winning data stored in the other reserved areas (the reserved second area to the reserved fourth area) into the reserved area having the smaller area number (the reserved first area to the reserved third area). Done.

  The second special symbol holding ball number counter 203dd is a counter for counting the number of holding balls based on winning in the right second entrance 645, and the first special symbol holding for counting the number of holding balls of the first special symbol. It has the same function as the ball number counter 203da. That is, it is a counter capable of counting the reserved balls of the second special symbol up to the upper limit value (4).

  The set value storage area 203ma is a storage area for storing data corresponding to the set values of the pachinko machine 10. More specifically, if “00H” is stored as data in the set value storage area 203ma, it indicates that the set value “1” is set, and if “01H” is stored as data, If the set value “2” is set, and “02H” is stored as data, it indicates that the set value “3” is set, and “03H” is stored as data. For example, it indicates that the set value “4” is set, and if “04H” is stored as data, it indicates that the set value “5” is set, and “05H” is stored as data. Indicates that the set value “6” has been set. When a special symbol lottery is executed, the data in the set value storage area 203ma is read, and a special symbol lottery (big hit lottery) is executed with a lottery probability corresponding to the set value indicated by the read data. That is, in the first random number 11 table 202ma (see FIG. 269 (a)), the range of the random number value corresponding to the set value indicated by the data in the set value storage area 203ma and the first random number stored in the execution area A special symbol lottery is executed by comparing the value of the random number counter C1 (see S492 and S493 in FIG. 278 and S1081 and S1082 in FIG. 285). Note that the initial value of the setting value storage area 203ma is set to “00H”, and every time the setting switch 110c is pressed (operated) in the setting change state, “01H” → “02H” →. -> The value is updated by "05H" and "01H" each time. When the setting switch 110c is further pressed while the data is "05H", the data is updated to "01H". When the power is turned on with the depression of the RAM clear switch 122, all the data in the RAM 203 is reset (cleared) to write. Therefore, when only the RAM clear operation is performed, the value of the set value storage area 203ma is also reset to the initial value “01H”. That is, even if only the RAM clear operation is performed without performing the setting change operation, the setting can be changed to 1. Thereby, the convenience of the hall can be improved.

  In the eleventh embodiment, all the data in the RAM 203 is cleared when the power is turned on by pressing the RAM clear switch 122 (RAM clear operation). However, the present invention is not limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, only the data in the set value storage area 203ma may be retained even when the RAM clear operation is performed. That is, the configuration may be such that the data in the setting value storage area 203ma is not updated (changed) unless the setting switch 110c is operated (pressed) in the setting change state. With such a configuration, when the hole side desires to reset the data in the RAM 203 without changing the set value (for example, the business hours of the hall end with the most advantageous latent state, the resetting is performed). Otherwise, the most advantageous state may be maintained even at the start of the next business day, etc.), so that the desire can be easily fulfilled, so that the convenience of the hall can be improved.

  The winning state storage area 203mb is a storage area for storing information indicating a gaming state at the time of winning a jackpot. Specifically, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal state (if the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 0 and the probability change flag 203fa is off), the normal state is stored in the winning state storage area 203mb. "00H" is stored as information indicating On the other hand, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the time saving state (if the value of the time saving counter 203h is 1 or more and the probability change flag 203fa is off), the time saving state is indicated in the winning state storage area 203mb. “01H” is stored as information. If the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is a probable change state (if the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 1 or more and the probable change flag 203fa is on), the probable change state is indicated in the winning state storage area 203mb. “02H” is stored as information. If the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is a latent state (if the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 0 and the probability variable flag 203fa is on), the latent state is stored in the winning state storage area 203j. “03H” is stored as the indicating information. The information stored in the winning state storage area 203mb is retained until the end of the jackpot, and is referred to when setting a game state after the jackpot has ended (see S1991 in FIG. 292).

  The special map 1 big hit flag 203mc indicates that the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained based on a game ball having entered the central first entrance 64c or the right first entrance 164r is changed at the start of the change. This flag is set to ON when it is determined that the value matches the jackpot determination value (see S459 in FIG. 278). This special figure 1 big hit flag 203mc is set to off when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit or the small hit of the second special symbol (S10855 in FIG. 282, S1594 in FIG. 288, S11608 in FIG. 289). reference).

  When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol ends in a state where the special figure 1 big hit flag 203mc is turned on, a process of removing the second special symbol and forcibly stopping with the symbol is executed (see S854 of FIG. 282). . Thus, it is possible to prevent a problem in which one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is a big hit or a small hit while the other is a big hit.

  The special figure 2 big hit flag 203md is set when the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired based on the fact that the ball has entered the right second entrance 645 is determined to match the big hit determination value at the start of the change. This flag is set to ON (see S1059 in FIG. 285). This special figure 2 big hit flag 203md is set to OFF when the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit or the small hit of the first special symbol is set (S10855 in FIG. 282, S1594 in FIG. 288, S11608 in FIG. 289). reference).

  When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol ends in a state where the special figure 2 big hit flag 203md is on, a process of removing the first special symbol and forcibly stopping the second special symbol is executed (see S1554 of FIG. 288). . Thus, it is possible to prevent a problem in which one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is a big hit or a small hit while the other is a big hit.

  The special figure 1 small hit flag 203me indicates that the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained based on a game ball having entered the center first entrance 64c or the right first entrance 164r at the start of the change. This flag is set to ON when it is determined that it matches the small hit determination value (see S10481 in FIG. 279). The special figure 1 small hit flag 203me is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the small hit or the large hit of the second special symbol (S3009 in FIG. 283, S1594 in FIG. 288, and S1594 in FIG. 289). See S11608). When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol ends in a state where the special figure 1 small hit flag 203me is turned on, a process of detaching the second special symbol and forcibly stopping at the symbol is executed (see S3006 in FIG. 283). ). As a result, during the execution of the small hit of the first special symbol, a large hit or a small hit occurs in the lottery of the second special symbol, and a problem occurs in which the big hit or the small hit is started in duplicate during the small hit. Can be prevented (suppressed).

  The special figure 2 small hit flag 203mf indicates that the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained based on the game ball having entered the right second entrance 645 coincides with the small hit determination value at the start of the change. This flag is set to ON when it is determined (see S1332 in FIG. 286). This special figure 2 small hit flag 203mf is set to off when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the small hit or the large hit of the first special symbol (S10855 in FIG. 282, S3009 in FIG. 283, and S3009 in FIG. 289). See S11608). When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol ends in a state where the special figure 2 small hit flag 203mf is on, a process of removing the first special symbol and forcibly stopping at the symbol is executed (see S11605 in FIG. 289). ). As a result, during the execution of the small hit of the second special symbol, a lottery or a small hit occurs in the lottery of the second special symbol, and a problem occurs in which the big hit or the small hit is started while the small hit is repeated. Can be prevented (suppressed).

  Next, a method of shifting the state of the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment realized by performing control based on various tables specified in the ROM 202 and various flags and counters provided in the RAM 203 will be described. 273 will be described. FIG. 273 is a diagram illustrating a method of shifting the state of the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment. Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment has roughly four game states. That is, a normal state (a low probability state of a special symbol and a normal state of a normal symbol), a time reduction state (a low probability state of a special symbol and a time reduction state of a normal symbol), and a probability change state (a probability variation state of a special symbol) In addition, there are provided four game states of a normal symbol time reduction state and a latent state (a special symbol positive change state and a normal symbol normal state). Hereinafter, for the sake of simplicity, the most disadvantageous normal state is referred to as a normal mode, and the degree of advantage is the second lowest after the normal state (normal mode), but the game can be played with almost no decrease in the number of balls held. The time-saving state is referred to as a pullback mode, and the probable change state having a relatively high degree of advantage in which the player can play a game with almost no reduction of the possessed ball until the next jackpot is referred to as a extended mode A, and then the jackpot. The most advantageous latent state in which small wins are frequently won and the number of possessed balls can be continuously increased is referred to as extended mode B. In FIG. 273, the normal mode is illustrated on the upper left side, the pullback mode is illustrated on the upper right side, the extended mode A is illustrated on the lower left side, and the extended mode B is illustrated on the lower right side.

  As shown in the upper left part of FIG. 273, there is a possibility that the mode will shift from the normal mode to another state when a big hit occurs. Specifically, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 273, when the jackpot A11 determined to be the jackpot of the first special symbol and determined as the jackpot type at a rate of 1% is selected (determined), after the end of the jackpot, the consecutive The mode shifts to Zhuang mode B. In addition, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is selected and one of the jackpots B11 to D11 determined as the jackpot type at a rate of 64% is selected (determined), a relatively advantageous extended mode A after the end of the jackpot. Move to. On the other hand, if the jackpot of the first special symbol is selected and one of the jackpots E11 and F11 determined as the jackpot type at a rate of 35% is selected (determined), the pullback mode having a relatively low degree of advantage after the jackpot is completed. Move to. For this reason, when a jackpot is won in the normal mode, it is possible to cause the player to play a game in expectation of shifting to one of the extended game modes A and B. As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, the jackpot probability is configured to be different depending on the setting, and the higher the setting (the higher the setting), the higher the jackpot probability. Therefore, the possibility of winning a jackpot earlier in the normal mode, which is more disadvantageous as the setting is higher, is increased. In other words, the higher the setting, the longer the period during which the jackpot is not won in the disadvantageous normal mode is less likely to be longer (more difficult to add). As described above, if a big hit is won in the normal mode, the mode always shifts to another mode with a higher degree of advantage compared to the normal mode. Therefore, in the normal mode, the high setting with a high jackpot probability is compared to the low setting. The degree of advantage becomes higher.

  Also, as shown in the upper right part of FIG. 273, there is a possibility that the state may be shifted from the retraction mode to another state when a jackpot has been reached or when a prescribed number of time savings has elapsed. Specifically, as shown on the upper right side of FIG. 273, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is selected and one of the jackpots A11 and B11 determined at a rate of 50% as the jackpot type is selected (determined). Shifts to the most advantageous series mode B after the end of the jackpot. In addition, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is selected and one of the jackpots C11 and D11 determined at a rate of 15% as the jackpot type is selected (determined), a relatively advantageous extended mode A after the end of the jackpot. Move to. In addition, when the jackpot F11 determined as the jackpot type of the first special symbol and determined at a rate of 15% as the jackpot type is selected (determined), and a prescribed number of times of reduction (100 times) elapses after the pullback mode is set. In this case, the mode is shifted to the normal mode which is disadvantageous for the player. On the other hand, if the jackpot E11 determined as the jackpot type of the first special symbol and determined as the jackpot type at a rate of 20% is selected (determined), the pullback mode having a comparatively low degree of advantage is again performed after the end of the jackpot. Set (loop through pullback mode). Therefore, in the pull-back mode, the ratio of setting the most advantageous extended mode B when a jackpot is won is significantly higher than that in the normal mode (1% → 50%). , It can be expected to shift to the extended-villa mode B more strongly. As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, the higher the setting, the higher the jackpot probability. Therefore, the higher the setting, the higher the possibility of winning the jackpot during the prescribed number of time savings (100 times). In other words, the higher the setting, the higher the possibility of winning the jackpot again within the number of time savings (returning the jackpot) and shifting to the most advantageous extended play mode B, while the lower the setting, the less the number of time savings The possibility of shifting to the disadvantageous normal mode without winning a jackpot increases. Therefore, also in the retraction mode, the high setting having a high jackpot probability has a higher degree of advantage than the low setting as in the normal mode.

  Also, as shown in the lower left part of FIG. 273, there is a possibility that the state shifts from the extended-villa mode A to another state when a big hit occurs or when a specified number of time savings has elapsed. Specifically, as shown on the lower left side of FIG. 273, the jackpot of the first special symbol becomes a jackpot, and the jackpots A11 and B11 determined at a rate of 50% as the jackpot type are selected (determined), and When the number of time savings set in the mode A has elapsed, the mode shifts to the extended play mode B, which is the most advantageous for the player. In addition, when the jackpot E11 determined as the jackpot type of the first special symbol and the jackpot type determined at a rate of 20% is selected (determined), the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is set to the pullback mode having a relatively low degree of advantage. You. Further, when the jackpot F11 determined as the jackpot type of the first special symbol and determined as the jackpot type at a rate of 15% is selected (determined), the game state after the end of the jackpot is set to the normal mode most disadvantageous to the player. You. On the other hand, when the jackpot C11 and D11 determined as the jackpot type at the rate of 15% are determined as the jackpot of the first special symbol, the extended-play mode A is set again after the end of the jackpot. Therefore, in the extended game mode A, the jackpot probability is increased, and the ratio of transition to the advantageous extended mode B at the time of winning the jackpot is also increased (50%) as in the pullback mode. , To form a gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Here, as described above, in the eleventh embodiment, even in the high probability (probable change) state of the special symbol, the higher the setting, the higher the jackpot probability. Therefore, the higher the setting is, the easier it is to win the jackpot earlier. If 100 times are set as the number of time savings in the extended-villa mode A, the lower the setting is, the lottery of the special symbol is performed, and the number of consecutive times is 100. Is more likely to occur, so that it is easier to shift to the more advantageous extended-villa mode B. That is, a novel gaming property in which the lower the setting is, the higher the advantage is, can be realized. In addition, in the extended-villa mode A, it is more likely that the number of time savings (65536 times) that substantially lasts until the next big hit is set, but when continuing to the next big hit, the big hit probability gives the degree of advantage. The effect is relatively small. This is because, while the probable change state continues, the game ball can easily enter the right first ball entrance 164r, so that the player can play the game with almost no decrease in the number of possessed balls.

  Further, as shown in the lower right part of FIG. 273, there is a possibility that the state is shifted from the extended-villa mode B to another state only when a big hit occurs. Specifically, as shown on the lower right side of FIG. 273, the jackpot becomes the second special symbol, and the jackpots I11 and J11 determined at a rate of 55% as the jackpot type are selected (determined). After the end, the mode is shifted to the extended play mode A which is relatively advantageous to the player. If the jackpot K11 is determined to be the jackpot of the second special symbol and determined as the jackpot type at a rate of 35%, the pullback mode having a low degree of advantage is set after the end of the jackpot. On the other hand, when the jackpots G11 and H11 determined as the jackpot type of the second special symbol and determined at a rate of 10% as the jackpot type are selected (determined), the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is the most advantageous again. The mode is set to the extended mode B (the extended mode B is looped). As described above, in the extended game mode B, while staying in the extended game mode, it is possible to obtain a prize ball due to a small hit of the second special symbol and, when a big hit occurs, to the most disadvantageous normal mode. This is very advantageous for the player because there is no possibility of shifting to the above. Here, as described above, in the eleventh embodiment, the higher the setting is, the higher the jackpot probability becomes, so that the extended-villa mode B which is advantageous to the player is easily ended early (the jackpot is won with a small number of lotteries). Easier). The extended play mode B substantially continues until the next jackpot, and while the extended play mode B is continued, it is possible to frequently acquire a prize ball due to a small hit, so that the big hit is not won. You can expect to get more prize balls. Therefore, a low setting in which it is difficult to win a jackpot (the jackpot probability is low) has a higher expected value of the number of prize balls that can be obtained when the mode is shifted to the extended-play mode B, and is therefore the most advantageous game. In this state, a novel gaming property in which a lower setting is more advantageous can be realized. In other words, in the extended-villa mode B, it is possible to realize a very special playability in which the degree of advantage decreases as the winning becomes easier, so that the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

  Next, details of the ROM 222 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 274, the ROM 222 in the eleventh embodiment is different from the configuration of the RM 222 in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see FIG. 30A) in the setting suggestion effect selection table. The only difference is that 222 ma is added. The setting suggestion effect selection table 222ma indicates the effect of the setting suggestion effect performed during the execution period of the out-of-special reach reach change when the main controller 110 notifies the change type command of the out-of-special reach reach as a change type. It is a data table referred to for selection.

  Details of the setting suggestion effect selection table 222ma will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 275 is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the setting suggestion effect selection table 222ma. As shown in FIG. 275, the setting suggestion effect selection table 222ma in the eleventh embodiment defines the value of the effect counter 223f and the effect mode in association with each setting value. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 275, for the effect mode of one symbol reach, in the case of setting 1, ten counter values “0 to 9” are associated with the value range of the effect counter 223f. In the case of settings 2 to 6, three counter values “0 to 2” are defined in association with each other as a range of the value of the effect counter 223f. For this reason, when the out-of-special reach fluctuation is notified in the setting 1 (when the number of fluctuations after the setting change becomes a multiple of 50), the rate at which the fluctuation pattern effect of one symbol reach is selected is 10% (10/10). 100), on the other hand, when a special reach variation is notified in a setting other than the setting 1, the variation pattern effect of one symbol reach is selected at a rate of 3%. Therefore, when one symbol reach is executed when the number of changes after the setting change is a multiple of 50, the possibility of the minimum setting of 1 is relatively high.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 275, in the case of the setting 1, three counter values “10 to 12” are defined as the value of the effect counter 223 f in association with the effect mode of the two symbol reach, and the setting is performed. In the case of 2, ten counter values of "3 to 12" are defined in association with the value of the effect counter 223f, and in the case of the setting 3 to 6, three counter values of "3 to 5" are associated with each other. Stipulated. Therefore, when the deviation special fluctuation is notified in the setting 1, the rate at which the fluctuation pattern effect of the two symbol reach is selected is 1% (1/100), and when the deviation special fluctuation is notified in the setting 2, 2 The ratio at which the fluctuation pattern effect of the symbol reach is selected is 10% (10/100), and the ratio at which the fluctuation pattern effect of the two symbol reach is selected when the special fluctuation is notified in the setting 3 to 6 is 3 % (3/100). Therefore, when the two symbol reach is executed when the number of changes after the setting change is a multiple of 50, the possibility of setting 2 is relatively high.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 275, in the case of the settings 1 and 2, three counter values of “13 to 15” are defined in association with the effect mode of the three symbol reach in the case of the setting 1 or 2 as the value of the effect counter 223 f. In the case of setting 3, 15 counter values of "6 to 20" are defined in association with the value of the effect counter 223f, and in the case of settings 4 to 6, three counter values of "6 to 8" correspond. It is stipulated. Therefore, when the deviation special fluctuation is notified in the settings 1, 2, 4 to 6, the rate at which the fluctuation pattern effect of the three symbol reach is selected is 3% (3/100). When the change is notified, the ratio at which the change pattern effect of the three symbol reach is selected is 15% (15/100). Therefore, when the three symbol reach is executed when the number of changes after the setting change is a multiple of 50, the possibility of setting 3 is relatively high.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 275, in the case of the setting 1 or 2, three counter values “16 to 18” are defined as the value of the effect counter 223f for the effect mode of the four symbol reach. In the case of setting 3, three counter values of "21 to 23" are defined in association with the value of the effect counter 223f, and in the case of setting 4, fifteen counter values of "9 to 23" are associated with each other. In the case of settings 5 and 6, seven counter values “9 to 15” are defined in association with each other. Therefore, when the deviation special fluctuation is notified in the settings 1 to 3, the ratio of selecting the fluctuation pattern effect of the four symbol reach is 3% (3/100), and when the deviation special fluctuation is notified in the setting 4 The ratio at which the four-pattern reach variation pattern effect is selected is 15% (15/100), and the ratio at which the four-pattern reach variation pattern effect is selected when a special deviation is notified in the settings 5 and 6. Is 7% (7/100). Therefore, when the four symbol reach is executed when the number of fluctuations after the setting change is a multiple of 50, the possibility of the setting 4 is relatively high, and the player has the expectation of the setting 5 or 6 as well. You can make it.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 275, in the case of the settings 1 and 2, three counter values “19 to 21” are defined as the value of the effect counter 223 f in the five symbol reach effect mode. In the case of settings 3 and 4, three counter values of "23 to 26" are defined in association with the value of the effect counter 223f, and in the case of setting 5, 15 counter values of "15 to 29" correspond. In the case of setting 6, seven counter values “16 to 22” are defined in association with each other. Therefore, when the deviation special fluctuation is notified in the settings 1 to 4, the ratio of selecting the fluctuation pattern effect of the five symbol reach is 3% (3/100), and when the deviation special fluctuation is notified in the setting 5 The rate at which the fluctuation pattern effect of the five symbol reach is selected is 15% (15/100), and the rate at which the fluctuation pattern effect of the five symbol reach is selected when the special fluctuation is notified in the setting 6 is 7 % (7/100). For this reason, when 5 symbol reach is executed when the number of changes after the setting change is a multiple of 50, the possibility of the setting 5 is relatively high, and the expectation of the setting 6 is also given to the player. Can be.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 275, in the case of the setting 1 or 2, three counter values “22 to 24” are defined as the value of the effect counter 223 f for the effect of the six symbol reach. In the case of the settings 3 and 4, three counter values of “27 to 29” are defined in association with the value of the effect counter 223f, and in the case of the setting 5, three counter values of “30 to 32” correspond. In the case of setting 6, fifteen counter values “23 to 38” are defined in association with each other. Therefore, when the deviation special fluctuation is notified in the settings 1 to 5, the rate at which the fluctuation pattern effect of the 6 symbol reach is selected is 3% (3/100), and when the deviation special fluctuation is notified in the setting 6 The ratio at which the fluctuation pattern effect of 6 symbol reach is selected is 15% (15/100). For this reason, when the six symbol reach is executed when the number of changes after the setting change is a multiple of 50, the possibility of the setting 6 is relatively high.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 275, in the case of the setting 1 or 2, the value of the effect counter 223f is defined in association with 75 counter values of “25 to 99” for the effect mode of the eight symbol reach. In the case of settings 3 and 4, 70 counter values of "30 to 99" are defined in association with the value of the effect counter 223f, and in the case of setting 5, 67 counter values of "33 to 99" correspond. In the case of setting 6, 57 counter values “39 to 96” are defined in association with each other. Therefore, when the deviation special fluctuation is notified in the settings 1 and 2, the rate at which the fluctuation pattern effect of the eight symbol reach is selected is 75% (75/100), and the deviation special fluctuation is notified in the settings 3 and 4. In this case, the rate at which the fluctuation pattern effect of the eight symbol reach is selected is 70% (70/100), and the rate at which the fluctuation pattern effect of the eight symbol reach is selected when the special fluctuation is notified in the setting 5 Is 67% (67/100), and when the special fluctuation is notified in the setting 6, the ratio of selecting the fluctuation pattern effect of the eight symbol reach is 57%. Therefore, the lower the setting, the easier it is to select the variation pattern effect of the eight symbol reach, and when the eight symbol reach is executed at a multiple of 50 of the variation after the setting change, the possibility of the low setting is relatively low. Get higher.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 275, in the case of the setting 6 for the effect form of the nine symbol reach, three counter values “97 to 99” are defined in association with the value of the effect counter 223f. On the other hand, in the case of other settings, the value of the effect counter 223f is not associated. Therefore, when 9 symbols reach is executed when the number of changes after the setting change is a multiple of 50, the setting 6, which is the highest setting, is determined.

  As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, the setting can be estimated from the content every time the number of times of change after the setting change becomes a multiple of 50 (the selectivity of each effect mode differs for each setting value). It is configured to execute a setting suggestion effect. As a result, it is possible to remind the player to continue the game until the number of fluctuations after the power is turned on is a multiple of 50, thereby improving the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 from the time when the power is turned on until the jackpot is won. Can be done.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Control Device in Eleventh Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 276 to 292. First, the details of the special symbol variation process 11 (FIG. 276, S121) will be described with reference to FIG. This special symbol variation process 11 (FIG. 276, S121) is executed in place of the special symbol variation process 4 (FIG. 119, S151) of the seventh embodiment (and the fourth embodiment), and is executed in the seventh embodiment (FIG. 119, S151). This is a process for performing display settings on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, similarly to the special symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 119) in the fourth embodiment).

  Of the special symbol variation process 11 (FIGS. 276 and S121), in the processes of S251, S254, S259, and S262, the special symbol variation process 4 (FIGS. 119 and S151) of the seventh embodiment (and the fourth embodiment) is respectively performed. ), The same processes as those of S251, S254, S259 and S262 are executed.

  As shown in FIG. 276, in the special symbol variation process 11 (S121) in the eleventh embodiment, the variation of the first special symbol is being displayed (the value of the special symbol 1 variation time counter 203di) in the process of S254. Is larger than 0) (S254: Yes), the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is subtracted and updated (S291), and the display of the first special symbol on the first symbol display device is performed. Update (S292). Next, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di updated in the process of S291 is 0 (S256), and if it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is 0 (S256). : Yes), the first special symbol change stop process 11 for setting the stop display of the first special symbol is executed (S293), and the process proceeds to S259. Details of the first special symbol change stop processing 11 (S293) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 282 and 283. If it is determined in the process of S256 that the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is not 0 (S256: No), the process of S293 is skipped and the process proceeds to S259.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S254 that the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is not larger than 0 (is 0) (S254: No), it means that the first special symbol is not in the fluctuation display. Next, a first special symbol variation start process 11 for starting the variation display of the first special symbol is executed (S294), and the process proceeds to S259. Although details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 277 to 281, the first special symbol change start processing 11 (S294) is the first special symbol change start processing 7 (see FIG. 177) in the seventh embodiment. Is a process executed in place of.

  In the special symbol variation process 11 in the eleventh embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S259 that the value of the special figure 2 variation time counter 203dj is a value larger than 0 (S259: No), the current is the 2 means that the special symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner. Next, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuating time counter 203dj is subtracted and updated (S295), and the second special symbol is displayed on the first symbol display device. Is updated (S296), and it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj after the update in the process of S295 has become 0 (S262). In the processing of S262, if it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj has been updated to 0 (S262: Yes), it means that the fluctuation time in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol has elapsed, The second special symbol change stop process 11 for setting the symbol stop display is executed (S297), and this process ends. Here, although the details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 288 and 289, the second special symbol change stop processing 11 (S297) is the second special symbol change stop processing 7 (see FIG. 180) in the seventh embodiment. ). On the other hand, in the process of S262, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj after the update has not been updated to 0 (S262: No), the process of S297 is skipped, and the present process ends as it is. I do.

  As shown in FIG. 276, if it is determined in the processing of S259 that the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj is not larger than 0 (that is, it is 0) (S259: No), the fluctuation of the second special symbol is performed. Since it means that the display is not executed, the second special symbol change start process 11 for starting the change display of the second special symbol is executed (S298), and this process ends. Although details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 284 to 287, this second special symbol change start process 11 (S298) is replaced with the second special symbol change start process 7 (see FIG. 177) in the seventh embodiment. This is the process executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 277, details of the first special symbol change start process 11 (S294), which is one of the special symbol change processes 11 (FIG. 276, S121), will be described. The first special symbol change start process 11 (S294) is a process executed in place of the first special symbol change start process (FIG. 120, S258) in the above-described seventh embodiment (and the fourth embodiment). This is a process for starting the variable display of the first special symbol.

  In the first special symbol variation start process 11 (S294), in each of the processes S351 to S355, the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 120, S258) in the seventh embodiment (and the fourth embodiment) is performed. The same processes as those in S351 to S355 are executed.

  In the first special symbol change start process 11 (S294) in the eleventh embodiment, after executing the process of S355, the first special symbol jackpot determination process 11 for executing the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol is executed. (S391). Although details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 278 and 279, the first special symbol jackpot determination process 11 (S391) is the first special symbol jackpot determination process in the seventh embodiment (and the fourth embodiment). This is a process executed in place of (see FIG. 121).

  When the process of S391 is completed, next, a first special symbol variation pattern selection process 11 for selecting a variation pattern (variation time) according to the result of the special symbol lottery is executed (S392). Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 280, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 11 (S392) is the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 122). When the processing in S392 ends, a game state update process for updating the game state is executed (S393), and the processing ends. Details of the game state update processing (S393) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 278, details of the first special symbol big hit determination process 11 (S391), which is one of the first special symbol change start processes 11 (FIG. 277, S294), will be described. This first special symbol big hit determination process 11 (S391) is a process executed in place of the first special symbol big hit determination process (FIG. 121, S356) in the seventh embodiment (and the fourth embodiment) described above. As described above, this is a process for executing the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol.

  Of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 11 (S391), in each of the processes of S451 and S458 to S461, the first special symbol jackpot determination process in the seventh embodiment (and the fourth embodiment) (FIG. 121, S356). The same processes as those of S451 and S458 to S461 are performed.

  As shown in FIG. 278, in the first special symbol big hit determination process 11 (S391) in the eleventh embodiment, when the process of S451 is completed, it is next determined whether the probability change flag 203fa is set to ON. (S491), when it is determined that the probability change flag 203fa is ON (S491: Yes), it means that the current state is the special symbol high probability state (probability variation state), and thus the first hit for the high probability time is performed. The random number value corresponding to the current set value is read out from the random number 11 table 202ma (see FIG. 269 (a)) (S492), and the process proceeds to S494. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S491 that the probability change flag 203fa is off (S491: No), it means that the current state is the low probability state of the special symbol, and thus the first random number for the low probability state. From the eleventh table 202ma (see FIG. 269 (a)), a random number corresponding to the current set value is read out (S493), and the process proceeds to S494. In the processing of S494 executed after the processing of S492 or S493, a lottery result (judgment result) of the jackpot lottery is acquired using the winning random number value read in the processing of S492 or S493 and the data of the execution area (S494). ), The process proceeds to S458.

  In the first special symbol big hit determination process 11 (see FIG. 278) in the eleventh embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S458 that the current lottery result of the first special symbol is not a big hit (S458: No) ), The special figure 1 departure variation processing 11 for setting a stop symbol according to the departure type is executed (S495), and this processing ends. Details of the special figure 1 departure variation processing 11 (S495) will be described with reference to FIG.

  The special figure 1 departure variation process 11 (S495) is a process for setting a stop symbol when the special symbol lottery result is deviated (including a small hit which is a type of departure). This processing is the same as the special figure 1 deviation variation processing 8 (see FIG. 210) in the embodiment. Of the special figure 1 deviation variation processing 11 (see FIG. 279) in the eleventh embodiment, in each of S485 and S487 to S489, the special figure 1 deviation variation processing 8 (FIG. 210, S481) in the eighth embodiment is respectively performed. ), And the same processes as those in S487 and S487 to S489.

  In the special figure 1 departure variation processing 11 (S495) in the eleventh embodiment, if it is determined in the processing of S485 that the current lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit (S485: Yes), the special figure The small hit flag 203me is set to ON (S10481), and the process shifts to S487. By setting the special figure 1 small hit flag 203me, it is possible to easily determine that it is sufficient to stop at the small hit symbol when the fluctuation of the first special symbol stops.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 280, details of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 11 (S392), which is one of the first special symbol variation start processes 11 (FIG. 277, S294), will be described. The first special symbol variation pattern selection process 11 (S392) is a process executed instead of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 122, S357) in the seventh embodiment (and the fourth embodiment) described above. It is.

  In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 11 (S392), in each of the processes S551 to S553 and S555 to S559, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process in the seventh embodiment (and the fourth embodiment) is performed. The same processes as those of S551 to S553 and S555 to S559 of (FIG. 122, S357) are executed.

  As shown in FIG. 280, in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 11 (S392) in the eleventh embodiment, after performing the process of S553, referring to the variation pattern scenario table 202mf (see FIG. 272). The change pattern table corresponding to the number of changes is read (S560), and the process proceeds to S555. By reading the fluctuation pattern table with reference to the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202mf, the fluctuation pattern can be varied according to the number of fluctuations after the big hit, the game state, and the previous big hit type, so that the fluctuation pattern is diversified. be able to. In the processing after S555, the variation pattern is selected by referring to the read variation pattern table, as in the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing (see FIG. 122) in the seventh embodiment (and the fourth embodiment). Then, a process of setting the start of the selected variation pattern is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 281, details of the game state update processing (S393), which is one of the first special symbol change start processing 11 (FIG. 277, S294), will be described. This game state update processing (S393) is processing for updating the game state at the start of the change.

  As shown in FIG. 281, in the gaming state update processing (S393), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203h is a value larger than 0, that is, whether or not the current gaming state is during the time reduction (S2901). ). In the process of S2901, if it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203h is 0 (S2901: No), the game state (the number of time reductions) does not need to be updated, and thus the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203h is greater than 0 (S2901: Yes), the value of the time reduction counter 203h is decremented by 1 (S2902), and the remaining time reduction command indicating the value of the time reduction counter is issued. It is set (S2903). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203h after the subtraction has become 0 (S2904). If it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203h has become 0 (S2904: Yes), the gaming state has been changed. This means that the process moves to S2905 to notify the voice lamp control device 113 of the changed gaming state. On the other hand, in the process of S2904, when it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203h after the subtraction is not 0 (S2904: No), the game state is not changed, and thus the present process is terminated as it is.

  In the processing of S2905, it is determined whether or not the probable change flag 203fa is on (S2905). If it is determined that the probable change flag 203fa is on (S2905: Yes), the number of time savings is 0 in the probable change state. Therefore, a state command indicating the latent state is set (S2906), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2905 that the probability change flag 203fa is OFF (S2905: No), it means that the number of time savings has become 0 in the time saving state and the state has shifted to the normal state. The indicated status command is set (S2907), and this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 282, details of the first special symbol change stop processing 11 (S293) will be described. The first special symbol change stop process 11 (S293) is a process executed in place of the first special symbol change stop process 7 (FIG. 175, S278) in the seventh embodiment described above. This is a process for setting a stop display.

  In the first special symbol variation stop process 11 (S293), in each of the processes S851-S855, S863, and S864, S851 of the first special symbol variation stop process 7 (FIG. 175, S278) in the seventh embodiment is respectively performed. The same processing as the processing of S855, S863, and S864 is executed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 282, in the first special symbol variation stop process 11 (S293) in the eleventh embodiment, in the process of S851, it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit flag 203mc is set to off. (S581: No), it means that the special symbol lottery result is not a big hit, so the special figure 1 departure stop processing for stopping and displaying the first special symbol with the deviated symbol is executed (S10851), and Move on to processing. Details of the special figure 1 departure stop processing (S10851) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S581 that the special figure 1 big hit flag 203mc is set to ON (S581: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj is greater than 0. It is determined (S10852). In the processing of S10852, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj is larger than 0 (S10852: Yes), the fluctuation display of the second special symbol being executed is removed and the forcible stop is performed at the symbol. Through S855, and then proceeds to S10853. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj is 0 (S10852: No), it means that the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is not executed, and thus the processing of S852 to S855 is performed. Are skipped, and the flow shifts to the process of S10853.

  In the processing of S10853, the start of the jackpot is set (S10853), and the data stored in the winning state storage area 203mb is changed to data according to the current gaming state (that is, data indicating the gaming state at the time of the jackpot winning). Then, the values of the special figure 1 big hit flag 203mc, the special figure 2 big hit flag 203md, the special figure 2 small hit flag 203mf, the probable change flag 203fa, and the time reduction counter 203h are all reset (S10855). Next, the big hit flag 203i is set to ON (S10856), and the flow shifts to the process of S863.

  Next, the details of the special figure 1 departure stop processing (S10851) executed in the first special symbol change stop processing 11 (see FIGS. 282 and S293) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 283 is a flowchart showing the special figure 1 departure stop processing (S10851).

  In the special figure 1 departure stop processing (S10851), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 small hit flag 203me is on (S3001), and if it is determined that the special figure 1 small hit flag 203me is off. (S3001: No) means that the lottery result of this special symbol is purely out of place (not a small hit), so the first symbol display device 37 displays the first special symbol during the variable display. The fluctuation stop at the off symbol is set (S3002), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3001 that the special figure 1 small hit flag 203me is ON (S3001: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj is greater than 0 or not. (S3003). In the process of S3003, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj is greater than 0 (S3003: Yes), it means that the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is being executed, A process for forcibly stopping the second special symbol when it comes off is executed. More specifically, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df is set to ON (S3004), a special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating the fluctuation stop of the second special symbol is set (S3005), and the first symbol display device 37 is set. In step S3006, a change stop is set for the second special symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner. Next, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj is set to 0 (S3007), and the process proceeds to S3008.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3003 that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj is 0 (S3003: No), it means that the second special symbol is not in the fluctuation display, so The process of S3007 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3008.

  In the processing of S3008, the start of the small hit of the first special symbol is set (S3008), and the special figure 1 small hit flag 203me, the special figure 2 big hit flag 203md, and the special figure 2 small hit flag 203mf are turned off ( 3009). Next, data indicating that a small hit is being made is set in the gaming state storage area 203g (S3010), and the first symbol display device 37 stops changing the first special symbol being changed and displayed with the small hit symbol. This is set (S3011), and this processing ends.

  By executing the special figure 1 departure stop processing (see FIG. 283), when a small hit of the first special symbol is achieved, the second special symbol is forcibly deviated and stopped when the small hit is displayed. Can be done. Therefore, especially in the case where the second special symbol performs a long fluctuation in the normal state, the long fluctuation can be easily terminated only by the small win of winning with a high probability in the lottery of the first special symbol. .

  Next, the details of the second special symbol change start process 11 (S298) will be described with reference to FIG. The second special symbol change start process 11 (S298) is a process executed in place of the second special symbol change start process 7 (FIG. 177, S280) in the seventh embodiment.

  In the second special symbol change start process 11 (S298), in each of the processes of S951 and S952, the processes of S951 and S952 of the second special symbol change start process 7 (FIG. 177, S280) in the seventh embodiment are respectively performed. The same processing as each processing is executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 284, in the second special symbol change start process 11 (S298) in the eleventh embodiment, the special figure 2 change stop flag 203df is not set to ON in the process of S951, that is, When it is determined that the first special symbol is not stopped and displayed as the big hit symbol (S951: No), the processes of S953 to S957, S981, and S982 are executed, and the process proceeds to S983 (S393) described later. The processing of S953 to S957, S981 and S982 is different from the processing of S351 to S355, S391 and S392 of the first special symbol variation start processing 11 (FIG. 277, S294) by the first special symbol holding ball. Number counter 203dd, value of first special symbol reserved ball number counter (N1), first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da, first special symbol big hit determination process 11 (S391), first special symbol variation pattern selection process 11 ( S392), the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter (N2), the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db, the second special symbol jackpot determination process 11 (S981), The details are the same as in the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 11 (S982) except that the process is changed to S11. For omitted. Furthermore, in the second special symbol variation start process 11 (see FIG. 284) in the eleventh embodiment, when the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 11 (S982) is completed, the above-described gaming state update process (FIGS. 281 and S393) ) Is executed (S983), and this process ends.

  Next, the details of the second special symbol big hit determination process 11 (S981), which is one process of the second special symbol change start process 11 (FIG. 284, S298), will be described with reference to FIG. The second special symbol big hit determination process 11 (S981) is a process executed in place of the second special symbol big hit determination process 7 (FIG. 178, S978) in the above-described seventh embodiment, and is the second special symbol big hit determination process. This is a process for executing a jackpot lottery.

  Of the second special symbol big hit determination processing 11 (S981), in each of S1051, S1058 to S1061 and S1071 processing, S1051 of the second special symbol big hit determination processing 7 (FIGS. 178, S978) of the seventh embodiment, respectively. The same processes as those in S1058 to S1061 and S1071 are executed.

  As shown in FIG. 285, in the second special symbol big hit determination processing 11 (S981) in the eleventh embodiment, when it is determined in the processing of S1071 that the probable change flag 203fa is set to ON (S1071). : Yes), the random number value corresponding to the current set value is read out from the first random number 11 table 202ma for high probability (see FIG. 269 (a)) (S1081), and the process proceeds to S1083. I do. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1071 that the probability change flag 203fa is not set to ON (S1071: No), the first random number 11 table 202ma for the low probability state (see FIG. 269 (a)) is used. The random number value corresponding to the current setting value is read (S1082), and the process proceeds to S1083. In the processing of S1083, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery (result determination result) is obtained based on the winning random number value read in the processing of S1081 and S1082 and the data of the execution area (S1083).

  In the second special symbol jackpot determination process 11 (see FIG. 285) in the eleventh embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S1058 that the current lottery is not a big hit (S1058: No), the second special symbol is determined. The special figure 2 deviation change processing 11 for setting a fluctuation display corresponding to the deviation is executed (S1084), and this processing ends. Details of the special figure 2 deviation variation processing 11 (S1084) will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 286, in the special figure 2 deviation fluctuation process 11 (S1084), first, it is determined whether the current lottery result is a small hit (S1331), and if it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit, (S1331: Yes), the special map 2 small hit flag 203mf is set to ON (S1332). Next, the lottery result of the second special symbol is set to a small hit (S1333), a small hit symbol of the second special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S1334), and this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1331, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small hit (that is, it is out of place) (S1331: No), a out-of-design symbol of the second special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. Is set (S1335), and this processing ends. By executing the special figure 2 deviation variation process 11 (see FIG. 286), an appropriate stop symbol can be set according to whether the type of deviation is a pure deviation or a small hit.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 287, details of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 11 (S982), which is one of the second special symbol variation start processes 11 (FIG. 284, S298), will be described. The second special symbol variation pattern selection process 11 (S982) is performed in place of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIGS. 129 and S956) in the above-described seventh embodiment (and the fourth embodiment). It is.

  In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 11 (S982), in each of the processes S1251 to S1253, S1255, S1256, and S1258 to S1260, the second special symbol in the seventh embodiment (and the fourth embodiment) is used. The same processes as those of S1251 to S1253, S1255, S1256, and S1258 to S1260 of the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 129, S956) are executed.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 287, in the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 11 (S982) in the eleventh embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1251 that the special figure 2 lottery result is not a jackpot ( (S1251: No), the process of S1252 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1253.

  In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 11 (see FIG. 287) according to the eleventh embodiment, after performing the process of S1253, the variation corresponding to the number of variations is performed with reference to the variation pattern scenario table 202mf (FIG. 271). The pattern table is read (S1281), and thereafter, the processing of S1255, S1256, S1258 to S1260 is executed, and this processing ends.

  Next, the contents of the second special symbol change stop processing 11 (S297) will be described with reference to FIG. The second special symbol change stop process 11 (S297) is a process executed instead of the second special symbol change stop process 7 (FIG. 180, S283) in the seventh embodiment.

  In the second special symbol variation stop process 11 (S297), in each of the processes of S1505, S1551, S1553, S1554, and S1561-S1563, the second special symbol variation stop process 7 (FIG. 180, FIG. The same processing as the processing of S1505, S1551, S1553, S1554, and S1561 to S1563 of S283) is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 288, in the second special symbol change stop processing 11 (S297) in the eleventh embodiment, when it is determined in the processing of S1551 that the special figure 2 big hit flag 203md is off (S1551). : No), the special figure 2 departure stop processing 11 for stopping and displaying the second special symbol with the stop symbol corresponding to the departure is executed (S1596), and the processing shifts to S1562. Details of the special figure 2 departure stop processing 11 (S1596) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1551 that the special figure 2 big hit flag 203md is ON (S1551: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is greater than 0 ( S1591). In the process of S1591, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is greater than 0 (S1591: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag is set to ON (S1592), and the first figure during the fluctuation display is set. The processing of S1553, S1554, and S1505 for forcibly stopping the special symbol with the missing symbol is executed, and the process proceeds to S1593.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1591 that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is 0 (S1591: No), it means that the first special symbol is not in the fluctuation display, and the first special symbol is not displayed. Since it is not necessary to forcibly stop the special symbol, the processing of S1592, S1553, S1554, and S1505 is skipped, and the flow proceeds to the processing of S1593.

  In the processing of S1593, the start of the jackpot is set (S1593), and the data in the winning state storage area 203mb is updated to data according to the current gaming state (data indicating the gaming state at the time of the jackpot winning) (S1594). Next, the values of the special figure 1 big hit flag 203mc, the special figure 1 small hit flag 203me, the special figure 2 big hit flag 203md, the probability change flag 203fa, and the time-saving counter 203h are all reset (S1595), and the processing shifts to S1561.

  Next, the details of the special figure 2 departure stop processing 11 (S1596) will be described with reference to FIG. The special figure 2 departure stop processing 11 (S1596) is a processing executed in place of the special figure 2 departure stop processing 7 (FIG. 181, S1584) in the above-described seventh embodiment, and removes the second special symbol. This is a process for stopping at a corresponding stop symbol.

  In the special figure 2 departure stop processing 11 (S1596), the processing of S1660 is the same as the processing of S1660 of the special figure 2 departure stop processing 7 (FIG. 181, S1584) in the seventh embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 289, in the special figure 2 departure stop processing 11 (S1596) in the eleventh embodiment, first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 small hit flag 203mf is set to ON (S11601). If it is determined that the small hit flag 203m in FIG. 2 is set to ON (S11601: Yes), then, the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is larger than 0, that is, the first special symbol fluctuates. It is determined whether it is being displayed (S11602). In the process of S11602, if it is determined that the first special symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner (the value of the special figure 1 fluctuating time counter 203di is larger than 0) (S11602: Yes), the fluctuating first special symbol is displayed. Is executed and the symbol is forcibly stopped at the symbol. Specifically, the special figure 1 change stop flag is set to ON (S11603), and a special figure 1 change stop command for indicating that the special figure 1 change stop flag is set to ON is set (S11604). Next, the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed with a deviated symbol (S11605), the value of the special symbol 1 variable time counter is set to 0 (S11606), and the process shifts to S11607.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S11602 that the value of the special figure 1 change time counter is 0 (S11602: No), the first special symbol is not changing, and the change display of the first special symbol is displayed. The process of S11603 to S11606 for forcibly stopping is skipped, and the process proceeds to S11607.

  In the process of S11607, the start of the special figure 2 small hit is set (S11607), and the special figure 1 big hit flag 203mc, the special figure 1 small hit flag 203me, and the special figure 2 small hit flag 203mf are set to off (S11608). Next, data indicating that a small hit is being made is set in the gaming state storage area 203g (S11609), the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed with a small hit symbol (S11610), and this processing is performed. To end.

  Next, the content of the startup process 11 will be described with reference to FIG. The start-up process 11 is a process executed in place of the start-up process (FIG. 54) in the above-described seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment). This is a process executed to perform various initial settings based on.

  In the start-up process 11, in each process of S1701 to S1714, the same processes as the respective processes of S1701 to S1714 of the start-up process (FIG. 54) in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment) are respectively executed. You.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 290, in the startup process 11 in the eleventh embodiment, after executing the process of S1703, it is determined whether or not the setting key 110b is located at the ON position (S1721). In the process of S1721, if it is determined that the setting key 110b is located at the ON position (S1721: Yes), it means that the setting key 110b is set to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. A set value control process for performing the corresponding control is executed (S1722), and the process proceeds to S1710. Details of the set value control processing (S1722) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1721 that the setting key is not at the ON position (S1721: No), the process proceeds to step S1704.

  In the start-up process 11 (see FIG. 290) in the eleventh embodiment, after executing the process of S1710, a status command indicating the current gaming state is set (S1723), and the process proceeds to S1711.

  Next, the contents of the set value control process (S1722), which is one of the startup processes 11 (FIG. 290), will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 291, in the set value control process (S1722), first, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 265) is turned on (S3101). ), A payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S3102). Upon receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start the payout control of the game balls. After transmitting the pay-out initialization command, main controller 110 executes an initialization process of RAM 203 (S3103, S3104). In the RAM initialization processing (S3103, S3104), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S3103), and thereafter, the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S3104). After the execution of the initialization processing of the RAM 203, a state command indicating a setting change state is set (S3105), and the processing shifts to S3106.

  In the process of S3106, it is determined whether or not the setting switch 110c is turned on (pressed) (S3106). In the process of S3106, if it is determined that the setting switch 110c is turned on (pressed) (S3106: Yes), the data of the setting value storage area 203ma is updated by adding 1 (S3107), and the process of S3108 Move to. On the other hand, in the process of S3106, when it is determined that the setting switch is off (S3106: No), the process of S3107 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3108.

  In the process of S3108, it is determined whether or not the setting key 110b is located at the off position (S3108). If it is determined that the setting key 110b is located at the off position (S3108: Yes), the process ends. That is, the setting change state ends, and the process returns to the start-up process 11 (see FIG. 292). Thereby, it is possible to shift to a playable state in which a normal game can be performed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3108 that the setting key 110b is not located at the off position (S3108: No), the process returns to step S3106. That is, the processes of S3106 to S3108 are repeated until it is determined in the process of S3108 that the setting key 110b is located at the off position.

  If it is determined in the processing of S3101 that the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S3101: No), first, a payout return command is transmitted to the payout control device 111 (S3109), and then the set value storage area is set. The data of 203 ma is read (S3110). When the process of S3110 is completed, next, the set value corresponding to the read data is displayed on the set value display device 110a (S3111), a status command indicating a setting confirmation status is set (S3112), and the setting key 110b is set. It is determined whether or not it is located at the off position (S3113). In the process of S3113, if it is determined that the setting key 110b is located at the off position (S3113: Yes), the process ends. That is, the game state is shifted to a playable state. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3113 that the setting key 110b is not located at the off position (S3113: No), the processing of S3113 is repeatedly executed. That is, the setting confirmation state is continued until the setting key 110b is arranged at the off position.

  By executing the setting value control process (see FIG. 291), the setting value can be changed according to the operation on the setting switch 110c in the setting change state. Further, in the setting confirmation state, the setting value can be continuously displayed on the setting value display device 110a until the setting switch 110b is disposed at the off position.

  Next, the details of the jackpot control process 11 (S1831) in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The jackpot control process 11 (S1831) is a process executed instead of the jackpot control process (S1804 in FIG. 56) in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment), and performs various controls during the jackpot game. This is the process to be performed.

  In the big hit control process 11 (S1831), in each of the processes of S1901 to S1912 and S1916 to S1918, the big hit control process (S1804 in FIG. 56, S1804) of the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment) is executed. The same processes as those in S1916 to S1918 are executed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 292, in the jackpot control process 11 (S1831) in the eleventh embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1912 that the current time is the end of the jackpot (S1912: Yes), the winning The data in the state storage area 203mb is read (S1991), and the time-saving counter 203h and the probability change flag 203fa are updated according to the gaming state (game state at the time of winning the jackpot) corresponding to the read data and the current jackpot type. Then, the flow shifts to the process of S1916. By executing the jackpot control process 11 (see FIG. 292), the gaming state after the end of the jackpot can be appropriately set according to the gaming state at the time of the jackpot winning and the jackpot type.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 293 to 296. First, the contents of the command determination process 11 (S4131) in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The command determination process 11 (S4311) is a process executed in place of the command determination process 7 (FIG. 183, S4192) in the above-described seventh embodiment. This is the process for performing.

  In each of the command determination processes 11 (S4131) except for the process of S4241, the same processes as those of the command determination process 7 (FIG. 183, S4192) of the seventh embodiment except for the process of S4232 are respectively performed. Is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 293, in the command determination process 11 (S4131) in the eleventh embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S4231 that a status command has been received (S4231: Yes), the command is notified by the status command. A state command reception process 11 for performing control according to the performed game state is executed (S4241), and this process ends. Details of the status command processing 11 (S4141) will be described with reference to FIG. The status command receiving process 11 (S4241) is a process executed instead of the status command receiving process (FIG. 64, S4213 (S4232)) in the above-described seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment).

  Of the status command receiving process 11 (S4141), the process of S4509 is the same as the process of S4509 of the status command receiving process (FIG. 64, S4213 (S4232)) in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment). Is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 294, in the status command receiving process 11 (S4241) in the eleventh embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the received command is a command indicating a setting change state (S4511). If it is determined that the command indicates a change state (S4511: Yes), a display command corresponding to the setting change screen is set (S4512), and the flow shifts to the processing of S4509.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4511 that the received command is not a command indicating the setting change state (S4511: No), then it is determined whether the received command is a command indicating the setting confirmation state. (S4513). If it is determined that the received command is a command indicating the setting confirmation state (S4513: Yes), a display command corresponding to the setting confirmation screen is set (S4514), and the process shifts to S4509.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4513 that the received command is not a command indicating the setting confirmation state (S4513: No), then it is determined whether or not the currently set gaming state is changed ( S4515). When it is determined that there is no change in the gaming state (S4515: No), the process proceeds to S4509. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4515 that there is a change in the game state (S4515: Yes), a display command corresponding to the changed game state is set (S4516), and the flow shifts to the processing of S4509. .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 295, the details of the variable display setting process 11 (S4132) in the eleventh embodiment will be described. This variable display setting process 11 (S4132) is a process executed instead of the variable display setting process 7 (FIG. 187, S4153) in the seventh embodiment described above.

  In the variable display setting process 11 (S4132), in each process except S5261, the same processes as those in the variable display setting process 7 (FIG. 187, S4153) except for S5232 in the seventh embodiment are respectively executed. .

  As shown in FIG. 295, in the variable display setting process 11 (S4132) in the eleventh embodiment, after performing the process of S5202, the variable display mode according to the variable pattern notified by the currently received variable pattern command is executed. Is performed (S5261), and the flow shifts to the process of S5233. Details of the effect mode setting process 11 (S5261) will be described with reference to FIG. This effect mode setting process 11 (S5261) is a process executed in place of the effect mode setting process (FIG. 188, S5232) in the seventh embodiment described above.

  In the effect form setting processing 11 (S5261), in each of the processing of S8201, S8207, and S8208, the processing of S8201, S8207, and S8208 of the effect form setting processing (FIG. 188, S5232) in the seventh embodiment are respectively performed. The same processing is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 296, in the effect mode setting process 11 (S5261) in the eleventh embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S8201 that the current gaming state is not the normal state (S8201: No), The effect mode corresponding to the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command is determined (S8281), and the flow shifts to the process of S8208.

  On the other hand, in the process of S8201, if it is determined that the current gaming state is the normal state (S8201: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the current fluctuation pattern is a special reach fluctuation (S8282). In the process of S8282, if it is determined that the current variation pattern is not a special reach variation (S8282: No), the process proceeds to S8207. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S8282 that the current fluctuation pattern is out of the special reach fluctuation (S8282: Yes), after the setting is changed (after power-on with the RAM clear operation), the number of fluctuations without a big hit Is a multiple of 50, and it is the setting suggestion effect execution timing. Therefore, the setting suggestion effect selection table 222ma (see FIG. 275) is read out (S8283), and the setting suggestion effect selection table 222ma (see FIG. 275) ) Is determined (S8284), and the flow shifts to the process of S8208.

  By executing the effect mode setting process 11 (see FIG. 296), it is possible to infer the setting from the contents every time the number of changes after the setting change becomes a multiple of 50 (each effect mode for each setting value). Is different), the setting suggestion effect can be executed, so that the player can be made to think that he / she wants to continue the game until the number of fluctuations after the power is turned on becomes a multiple of 50. It is possible to improve the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 until winning.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment, the jackpot probability of the pachinko machine 10 is arbitrary (for example, (Any of six types of jackpot probabilities). The higher the jackpot probability (high setting), the easier it is to win a jackpot in the normal state (special symbol low probability state) and in the latent state (special symbol high probability state). On the other hand, the most advantageous latent state is likely to be completed in a relatively short period of time (in the latent state, another gaming state is easily set by the jackpot win). On the other hand, the lower the jackpot probability (lower setting), the easier it is for the normal state to continue for a longer period of time (more likely to cause hammering), but the more advantageous latent state tends to continue for a relatively long time. In the latent state, the total number of prize balls that can be obtained by the small hit game is likely to increase. In other words, according to the jackpot probability (probability), the game property (the game state in which both the disadvantageous state and the advantageous game state are easily completed in a relatively short period, and the game state in which the disadvantageous game state and the advantageous game state are both advantageous for a relatively long time) Since it is possible to make the game characteristics different from each other easily, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the player.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment, the configuration is changed so that the setting is always set to the normal state (the setting of the RAM 203 is initialized by the RAM clear operation). Only in a normal state where a transition is made after the change (after the RAM clear operation), a particular type of variation pattern (variation time) is selected based on satisfaction of a specific condition. That is, each time the number of times of drawing of the special symbol after the setting change (after the RAM clear operation) is a multiple of 50, the fluctuation of the fluctuation time is 25 seconds and the special reach fluctuation is selected. With this configuration, after the power is turned on, whether the setting change operation is performed according to the variation type of the variation pattern that is executed when the specific condition is satisfied (the number of special symbol lotteries is a multiple of 50). Since it is possible to confirm whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved until the specific condition is satisfied. Furthermore, in the eleventh embodiment, as the effect mode (fluctuation pattern effect) during the execution of the off-special reach change, the setting is made by the type of the third symbol (the number attached to the third symbol) when the reach occurs. It is configured to indicate the set value that is set. With this configuration, it is possible to improve the motivation of the player to play a game when a reach effect in an effect mode that is easily executed at a high setting is executed. In addition, in the case where the effect of the content suggesting the high setting is not executed in the setting suggestion effect, it is possible to remind the user to confirm the setting suggestion effect again. In other words, it is possible to make the user think that the lottery of the special symbol is to be executed 50 times, so that the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  Although the setting key 110b and the setting switch 110c are provided separately in the eleventh embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the configuration may be such that the setting switch 110c is deleted and the setting can be changed according to the amount of rotation of the setting key 110b. More specifically, the setting may be switched in the order of 1 → 2 →... → 6 each time the setting key 110b is turned by 60 degrees. Then, at the end of the setting change operation, the key portion of the setting key 110b may be pulled out of the keyhole portion so as to return to a state where a normal game can be played. With this configuration, the configuration of the setting change mechanism can be simplified, and the number of components can be reduced. Therefore, the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  In the eleventh embodiment, the ratio between the jackpot probability in the low probability state of the special symbol and the jackpot probability in the high probability state (probable change state) of the special symbol is configured to be common to all settings, but is not limited to this. Instead, the ratio of the jackpot probability between the low probability state and the high probability state may be different for each setting. More specifically, for example, the jackpot probability in the low-probability state is made different according to the set value similarly to the above-described eleventh embodiment, while the jackpot probability in the high-probability state is constant regardless of the set value (for example, , 1/90). With this configuration, it is possible to make the easiness of addiction in the high-probability state common regardless of the setting, so that the advantage degree in the advantageous latent state can be made common regardless of the setting. Therefore, the superiority of the high setting can be further enhanced, so that it is possible to provide easy-to-understand gaming characteristics in which a higher setting is advantageous in all aspects. In addition, for example, the odd-number setting (settings 1, 3, and 5) and the even-number setting (settings 2, 4, and 6) may have different jackpot probabilities in the high-probability state. Specifically, for example, the configuration is such that the jackpot probability in the high-probability state is low (for example, 1/100) in the odd setting, while the jackpot probability in the high-probability state is high (for example, 1/70) in the even setting. May be. With such a configuration, the degree of advantage in the advantageous latent state can be made different between the odd number setting and the even number setting, so that the playability can be greatly changed according to the setting. Furthermore, in this case, as the jackpot probability in the low probability state of the special symbol, the even setting is configured to have a higher jackpot probability than the odd setting, and the setting is higher in the odd setting and in the even setting. It may be configured such that the greater the probability of the jackpot. With such a configuration, it is possible to greatly vary the playability depending on whether the set value is an odd number or an even number. That is, in the even number setting, the disadvantageous normal state is hard to last for a long time, but the latent state is hard to last for a long time. It is easy to last for a long time, but since the latent state is easy to last for a long time, the addiction is severe, but once it shifts to the latent state, it is possible to expect more prize balls In other words, it is possible to realize a game like a rough sea. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be further improved. In addition, since an appropriate setting can be selected according to the business policy of the hall, the convenience of the hall can be improved. Furthermore, for example, only the setting 6, which is the highest setting, may be configured so that the playability is significantly different from other settings. Specifically, for example, for the setting 1 to the setting 5, the jackpot probability in the above-described eleventh embodiment is adopted, but only the setting 6 has an extremely high jackpot probability (for example, the probability of being twice or more the setting 5). ) May be configured. Specifically, for example, the jackpot probability in the low probability state of the special symbol may be set to 1/100, and the jackpot probability in the high probability state of the special symbol may be set to 1/30. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to easily determine whether or not the setting is 6 in a relatively short game from the jackpot winning rate. Therefore, the player who is convinced that the setting is 6 can play the game for a long time, so that the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. Further, by making it easy to determine whether or not the setting is 6, the setting uses the highest setting (that is, the most advantageous setting for the player) when the setting 6 is set. Can be recognized by the player. Therefore, the reputation of the hall can be improved.

  In the eleventh embodiment, a part of the probability change jackpot (in the case of the jackpots D11, E11, and I11) is configured so that a probability change state in which the number of times saved is 100 is set after the end of the jackpot. When 100 time savings have been passed (the number of special symbols has been lost consecutively in the 100 lotteries), the system shifts to the most advantageous latent state. In other words, in the specific game state (probable change state), the game machine shifts to an advantageous state by continuously deviating (lottery result different from the jackpot) over a specific number of times (100 times) of the special symbol lottery. With the configuration, the lower the jackpot probability in the high probability state of the special symbol (that is, the lower the setting), the more advantageous the gaming property is realized. However, the lower the jackpot probability, the more advantageous the gaming property is realized. The configuration for performing this is not limited to this. For example, it is assumed that the probable state of the special symbol is terminated based on the fact that the lottery of the special symbol of a specific number of times (for example, 100 times) has been executed, and the latent state is set to the most disadvantageous state (even if the right hand is hit. In a state in which it is difficult to execute the 1 special symbol lottery and the 2nd special symbol lottery), a transition is made to the normal state, which is relatively advantageous when the lottery of the special symbol of a specific number of times is consecutively lost in the latent state. May be configured. In other words, in the latent state, even if the jackpot is won, the number of rounds is small and the latent state is set again after the end of the jackpot. It may be configured such that the type of the jackpot set to the advantageous probable change state later becomes the majority. In the probable change state, it is easy to win the jackpot with almost no decrease in the possession ball, and the probable change state is configured to be easily set again after the end of the jackpot. A specification in which a game is played by two goals may be adopted. Also in this specification, the lower the jackpot probability in the latent state, the easier it is to transition to the relatively advantageous normal state, and consequently the transition to the most advantageous probability change state. , The lower the setting, the higher the degree of advantage is. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. In this case, if the jackpot probability is low, the jackpot is less likely to be a jackpot in the normal state where the degree of advantage is high, and the probability that the number of times of the probability change (specific number) is ended without the jackpot in the advantageous probability change state also increases. Therefore, in the high setting where the jackpot probability is high, the latent state and the disadvantageous jackpot are easily repeated, but if it can be shifted to the normal state, the jackpot can be won with a relatively small number of lotteries, In the probable change state, it is possible to realize a gaming property in which the jackpot and the probable change state are easily repeated more times. As described above, since the playability can be made different between the low setting and the high setting, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the eleventh embodiment, the configuration is made such that the off-special reach change can be executed only in the normal state set after the setting change (after the RAM clear operation), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even in the normal state set under conditions other than after the setting change (after the RAM clear operation), each time the number of special symbol lotteries becomes a multiple of the specific number of times (50 times), the probability is relatively low (for example, 1). (Probability of / 10) so that the special reach fluctuation is executed, so that the setting suggestion effect may be executed even in a normal state other than after the setting change. With this configuration, even in the normal state set under conditions other than the setting change, it is possible to make the player think that the game is to be continued until the number of lotteries is a multiple of the specific number (50 times). The operation rate of the machine 10 can be improved. Also, instead of making the selection probability of the out-of-special reach reach change different, for example, the period in which the out-of-special reach reach change is selected is made longer than the normal state after the setting change (after the RAM clear operation) (for example, the special symbol). Each time the number of lotteries becomes a multiple of 100). In the normal state, the variation pattern may be determined with reference to a common variation pattern scenario regardless of whether the setting has been changed. In other words, even in the normal state other than after the setting change, the configuration is such that the special reach fluctuation is executed every time the number of lotteries becomes a multiple of 50, and the setting suggestion effect is executed every time the number of lotteries becomes a multiple of 50. It may be configured to obtain. With this configuration, it is possible to further improve the operation rate in a disadvantageous normal state.

  In the eleventh embodiment, when the RAM clear operation is performed when the power is turned on, the RAM clear time table 202me4 is stored in the RAM clear time table 202 during the normal state regardless of whether or not the state has shifted to the setting change state. It was configured to determine the fluctuation pattern with reference to the reference. That is, if the RAM clear operation has been performed even if the state has not been shifted to the setting change state, the special reach variation is executed and the setting suggestion effect is executed every time the number of times of drawing the special symbol becomes a multiple of 50. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration suggestion effect may be performed only when the power is turned on and the setting change state is entered, and each time the number of special symbol lotteries becomes a multiple of 50 in the normal state thereafter. With this configuration, only when the hall clerk or the like is actually performing the setting change operation, the special reach fluctuation is executed and the setting suggestion effect is performed, so that it is easier to determine whether the setting has been changed. Can be identified by the player.

  In the eleventh embodiment, when the out-of-special reach change is executed, as a change pattern effect, the setting value is indicated by the number attached to the third symbol when the reach occurs, However, it is not always necessary to indicate the set value by the effect. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a variation pattern effect of an effect mode that can indicate only whether or not a special reach variation is performed is performed. That is, even if the out-of-office special reach fluctuation is determined, the configuration may be such that the setting value is not suggested from the effect mode. With this configuration, it is not necessary for the voice lamp control device 113 to know the set value, and only when the variation type of the out-of-special reach fluctuation is notified (or appears only in the case of the out-of-spec special reach fluctuation). Since it is sufficient to execute the effect of (Easy Mode), the processing load on the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced. Further, it is possible to prevent the player from thinking that the setting is low due to the suggestion of the setting, and to reduce the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10.

  In the eleventh embodiment, the setting suggestion effect is executed when the change pattern of the off-special reach change is notified, but the present invention is not limited to this. The sound lamp control device 113 may simply be configured to execute the setting suggestion effect at a predetermined ratio (for example, 1%) when determining the effect mode of the fluctuation pattern effect. With this configuration, it is not necessary to provide the special reach variation, and a common variation pattern table can be used in a normal state, so that the number of variation pattern tables can be reduced. Therefore, the capacity of the ROM 202 can be reduced.

  In the eleventh embodiment, in the normal state after the setting change (after the RAM clear operation), the setting suggestion effect is executed every time the special symbol lottery is performed 50 times regardless of the setting value set in the setting change state. (A special reach variation is selected), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the ratio at which the setting suggestion effect is executed when the out-of-special reach variation is selected may be made different. In other words, the ratio of executing the setting suggestion effect on the sound lamp control device 113 side when the out-of-office special reach change is notified may be changed according to the set value. Alternatively, by changing the variation pattern selection table that is referred to in the normal state after the RAM clear operation for each set value, when the variation count becomes a multiple of 50 according to the set value, a special reach variation is selected. The ratio itself may be different. More specifically, for example, at multiples of 50, the higher the setting, the more easily the variation pattern other than the special reach variation may be selected (the more difficult the setting suggestion effect is). With this configuration, when the special reach variation is not executed (the setting suggestion effect is not executed) even though the number of special symbol lotteries is a multiple of 50, an expectation for a high setting is made. Feeling can be improved. In addition, for example, by making the variation pattern selection table referred to in the normal state after the RAM clear operation differ for each set value, a special reach variation is executed in accordance with the set value (a setting suggestion effect is executed). ) The periods may be different. With such a configuration, the game can be performed by focusing on how many times the variation and the special reach variation are executed, so that the game can be positively started from the state where the jackpot is 0 times. it can. Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  In the eleventh embodiment, the data in the set value storage area 203ma is also cleared to the initial value when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on with the RAM clear operation. It is not limited to. For example, the data of the set value storage area 203ma may be configured not to be cleared even if the RAM clear operation is performed. In other words, the data in the setting value storage area 203ma may be configured to be updated only while the setting key 110b is located at the ON position. With this configuration, when the hall does not want to change the setting, but wishes to perform the RAM clear operation, the wish can be fulfilled, so that the convenience of the hall can be improved.

  In the eleventh embodiment, in the case of a small win in the lottery of the second special symbol, the right variable winning device 1650 that can win during the small hit game, and in the case of a big win in the special symbol lottery, Although the variable prize winning device 650 capable of winning in each round of the jackpot is separately provided, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the variable prize winning device 650 may be configured to be able to enter a ball when a small win or a large win is made in the second special symbol lottery. With this configuration, the right variable winning device 1650 can be eliminated, so that the number of components of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced and the degree of freedom of the game area can be improved.

  In the eleventh embodiment, the setting value is suggested only by the setting suggestion effect. That is, in the normal state after the setting change, when the number of times of the special symbol lottery is a multiple of 50 and the variation pattern of the deviation special reach fluctuation is set, the setting suggestion effect is executed as the fluctuation pattern effect in the deviation special reach fluctuation. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a setting is suggested in a jackpot opening effect or an ending effect. In this case, the type (selection ratio) of the character appearing on the third symbol display device 81 in the opening effect or the ending effect may be different for each set value. Further, for example, after a transition to the advantageous game state (the extended mode A or the extended mode B), the advantageous game state is terminated, and is displayed when the transition to the disadvantageous normal mode is performed. The type of display mode of the display mode (so-called result display) showing the game result in the game state may be different. Specifically, for example, as a title displayed according to a game result, a title of a type determined only according to a game result and a title of a type determined also in consideration of a set value may be provided. Good. With this configuration, the result display can be focused on at the end of the advantageous gaming state.

  In the thirteenth embodiment, the setting value is displayed on the setting value display device 110a in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured to display a numerical value indicating a set value.

  In the thirteenth embodiment, the higher the setting, the easier it is for the player to be advantageous (so-called, the higher the opportunity percentage). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the configuration may be such that the total advantage is equal between some settings and other settings. More specifically, for example, by adjusting the jackpot probability, the advantages of the setting 1 and the setting 6 may be equalized. That is, in the setting 1, once the system shifts to the latent state, the expected value of the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the latent state is significantly increased as compared with the other settings (for example, the special symbol height). By setting the jackpot probability in the probability state to 1/200), it is more advantageous than the setting values other than the setting 6 (settings 2 to 5) even in consideration of the fact that the jackpot probability is low in the low probability state of the special symbol. It may be configured as follows. In addition, the setting 2 and the setting 5 may have the same advantageous degree, and the setting 3 and the setting 4 may have the same advantageous degree. That is, the setting 1 and the setting 6 may be configured to be the setting having the highest degree of advantage, and the setting 3 and the setting 4 may be configured to be the setting having the lowest degree of advantage. In other words, in the settings 1 to 3, the lower the jackpot probability becomes, the more advantageous the gaming performance (the main gaming performance is to increase the number of possessed balls with small winning prize balls in the latent state), and the setting from the setting 4 In 6, it may be configured such that the higher the jackpot probability becomes, the more advantageous the gaming property (the main gaming property is to increase the number of possessed balls with the jackpot prize ball). With this configuration, it is possible to make the difference in the playability of each setting more remarkable, so that the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

  Furthermore, in this case, whether the setting (settings 1 to 3) of the playability in which increasing the number of possessed balls with the small winning prize balls in the latent state is set, or whether the large winning prize balls have the possessed ball. May be configured to be able to notify the player whether or not the setting of the gaming property (settings 4 to 6) in which increasing is set. More specifically, for example, in the demonstration display displayed when the game in the pachinko machine 10 has not been performed for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) or more, the user is notified of which game is the playability (for example, setting If the setting is 1 to 3, the character "strike type" is displayed, and if the setting is 4 to 6, the character "click type" is displayed.) This allows the player to start playing the game with the desired playability setting, thereby improving the convenience of the player. In addition, in place of or in addition to the demonstration display screen, a volume display is displayed when a volume change operation for changing the volume of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, and a light amount of various light emitting members such as LEDs is changed. The display mode, such as the light amount display, which is displayed when the light amount changing operation is performed, may be configured to be able to notify the player of the playability (whether it is a one-shot type or a slick type). With this configuration, it is possible to check the playability at an arbitrary timing of the player by performing the volume change operation or the light amount change operation, so that the convenience of the player can be further improved. Furthermore, the display mode on the jackpot ending screen or the result screen after the completion of the latent state may be varied according to the game characteristics. Specifically, for example, when the one-shot type of playability (settings 1 to 3) is set, the total number of prize balls acquired in the advantageous state is displayed in a more conspicuous manner, while the tricky-type game is displayed. If the gender (settings 4 to 6) is set, the total number of jackpots won in the advantageous state may be displayed in a more prominent manner. With this configuration, it is possible to easily configure an item that the player tends to pay more attention to for each game property, so that the convenience of the player can be improved. In this case, the setting value display device 110a may be configured to display the settings A, B, and C instead of the settings 1, 2, and 3. That is, the notation of the set value may be made different depending on the game characteristics. With this configuration, when the clerk of the hall changes or confirms the set value, the degree of advantage is not in numerical order (the degree of advantage is in the order of setting 3, 4 → 2, 5 → 1, 6). It is possible to suppress confusion due to the increase in the height).

  In the eleventh embodiment, after the setting is changed, the RAM clearing table 202me4 (see FIG. 271 (b)) is referred to to determine the variation pattern table until the jackpot is first won (50 special symbols). Is executed every time the lottery is executed), but is not limited to this. For example, the fluctuation pattern scenario may be set so that a winning is achieved by switching to a state where the normal 11 table 202me1 is referred to by winning. In this case, the RAM clear time table 202me4 may be configured to always execute the special reach fluctuation when a lottery result other than the jackpot is obtained. In other words, in the specification that wins the small hit with a high probability, after the setting change, the special reach is executed every time the special symbol lottery is executed until the first small hit game (or the big hit game) is executed. May be configured. With this configuration, the setting change can be performed by executing only one special symbol lottery in the pachinko machine 10 in which the special symbol lottery has not been executed once after the opening of the hall. It can be determined whether or not there is a possibility. Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 immediately after the opening of the hall can be improved.

  In the eleventh embodiment, the special reach fluctuation is executed every time the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times only after the setting change. However, even in a normal state other than after the setting change, Each time the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times, a special reach variation may be executed. With this configuration, the number of fluctuations at which a special reach is set when no setting change has been made is predicted from the number of fluctuations at the end of the game on the previous day. Is not executed, it is possible to realize a novel playability that a player can be convinced that the possibility of setting change is high.

  In the eleventh embodiment, the configuration is such that the special reach variation is executed every time the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that the off-special reach change can be executed only once. In other words, when the normal state is set, the number of special symbol lotteries until the special reach variation is set is set. When the setting is changed, 50 is set, while other conditions are set. When the normal state is set in, the number of times that the digestion cannot be substantially performed, such as 65536 times, may be set. Then, after the out-of-special reach fluctuation is set, the number of times that can not be substantially consumed, such as 65536 times, may be set. With this configuration, when the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times in a state where the jackpot has not been won, a game can be played by paying attention to whether or not the special reach is generated.

<Twelfth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment, the jackpot probability can be set to any one of a plurality of stages (six stages). The higher the setting, the higher the jackpot probability. Configured.

  In addition, in the twelfth embodiment, a period (chance zone) that is advantageous to the player is formed when a specific lottery result different from the big hit is obtained in a predetermined game state. More specifically, it is configured such that it is easier for the player to win the jackpot in the lottery of the second special symbol than in the case of the jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol. In the case where the first special symbol is lost in the lottery in the latent state, a variation pattern having a long variation time (long variation) can be set. That is, by performing the lottery of the second special symbol intensively while the long fluctuation of the first special symbol is being executed, without winning the jackpot of the first special symbol having a relatively low degree of advantage, An advantageous period (chance zone) can be formed in which the second special symbol with a high degree of advantage can be aimed at the jackpot.

  In addition, in the twelfth embodiment, when the first special symbol is fluctuated and the second special symbol is randomly selected and the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is discarded. It is configured so that it will not be stopped (it will not be stopped and displayed with a missing symbol). With such a configuration, when a small hit of the second special symbol is made during the long fluctuation of the first special symbol (during the chance zone), the long fluctuation is discarded (the chance zone is forcibly terminated). Can be suppressed). Therefore, the player can fully enjoy the chance zone once entered.

  The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment is different from the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment in that the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 is partially changed. The configuration of the RAM 223 of the main controller 110 is partially changed, the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed, and the control executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 The processing is partially changed. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the following. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the eleventh embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 297 and FIG. 298, a description will be given of a characteristic effect mode executed in the extended-villa mode B (latent state) of the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 297 is a diagram showing a display mode of a continuous out-of-game effect that is executed when the lottery of the first special symbol is out of the lottery mode B in the twelfth embodiment. Here, in the twelfth embodiment, similarly to the above-described eleventh embodiment, when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed, the small hit or the big hit is configured with a high probability (about 90%). ing. In other words, it is configured such that a lottery of a special symbol is lost with a relatively low probability. In the twelfth embodiment, when the relatively low probability of the consecutive outliers continues for a first predetermined number of times (for example, three consecutive outliers in the first special symbol lottery), the first number of consecutive outliers is determined. It is configured to set a long fluctuation as the out-of-eye fluctuation (to form a chance zone in which the lottery of the advantageous second special symbol can be intensively executed). Also, in the case where the disconnection continues for a second number of times less than the first number (for example, two consecutive disconnections), the second number of disconnections at a predetermined rate (for example, a rate of 20%). It is configured to set a long fluctuation as the fluctuation (form a chance zone). That is, since the chance zone is formed more easily as the first special symbol continues to be missed, it is possible to play a game by paying attention to the number of consecutive misses of the first special symbol. The continuous departure effect to be described below is an effect mode executed to suggest (notify) the player of the number of consecutive departures and whether or not the player can enter the chance zone.

  First, with reference to FIG. 297, a display mode at the time of starting the above-described discontinuous production effect will be described. This continuous loss effect is started when the first special symbol is removed by lottery after the end of the big hit or the small hit of the first special symbol. As shown in FIG. 297, when the lottery of the first special symbol is lost, the character 811 imitating a rabbit has the character SP at the top in the main display area Dm when the first special symbol is stopped. The effect of finding the hill on which the flag FG has been set is executed. In addition, along with the effect of finding this hill, the character "Aim for more stakes" is displayed in the sub display area Ds. In addition, on the right side of the main display area Dm, a guidance suggestion display for suggesting to the player the situation until the chance zone (super RUSH game) is executed is displayed. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the chance zone is started if the character 811 imitating a rabbit can climb the hill and reach the flag FG. As shown in FIG. 297 (a), the hill discovered by the character 811 has two ladders, a ladder HG1 extending from the foot to the middle and a ladder HG2 extending from the middle to the top. In addition, a jumping platform JD is installed at the foot of the hill. In the case where the chance zone is started in the twelfth embodiment, an effect in which the character 811 reaches the top (flag FG) in two changes by climbing the ladder one by one, and one using the jump stand JD. Either one of two patterns, that is, a case of jumping to the top at a stretch due to the change, is executed. More specifically, in the case where the lottery of the first special symbol is missed for two consecutive times, and when the variation pattern of the second consecutive pattern is set to the long variation, the user jumps to the top at a stretch using the jumping stand JD. The effect is executed and the start of the chance zone (super RUSH) is notified. On the other hand, in the case of three consecutive misses in the lottery of the first special symbol and if the second consecutive miss is not a long fluctuation, the effect of climbing the ladder HG1 that extends from the foot to the middle during the second consecutive fluctuation. Is performed, and during the third consecutive departure change, the effect of climbing the ladder HG2 that continues from the middle to the top is executed, and the start of the chance zone (super RUSH) is notified.

  On the other hand, if the lottery of the first special symbol following the first departure was not departed (small hit), the character 811 was displayed in the main display area Dm as shown in FIG. 297 (b). An effect is performed in which the user jumps toward the top using the jumping stand JD, but falls over without reaching the top. In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, characters “failure ...” are displayed. According to these effect modes, it is possible to make the player easily understand that the detachment is not continuous and does not enter the chance zone.

  FIG. 298 is a diagram showing a display mode in a case where the lottery of the first special symbol is repeated three times consecutively and the long variation of the first special symbol is set in the consecutive mode B (RUSH). As shown in FIG. 298, when the long fluctuation of the first special symbol is started, in the main display area Dm, the character 811 reaches the flag SP, and a rejoicing effect with the flag SP raised is executed. In addition to this, the characters “Super RUSH rush!” Are displayed in the sub display area Ds, and the remaining fluctuation time until the long fluctuation ends (that is, the remaining time until the chance zone ends). Time) countdown display is displayed. Thus, the player can easily confirm the end of the chance zone (super RUSH) in which only the advantageous second special symbol lottery can be executed, so that the convenience of the player can be improved.

  In the twelfth embodiment, similar to the eleventh embodiment, the jackpot probability is made different depending on the setting, while the small jackpot probability is common to all the settings. Then, only three kinds of lottery results of a big hit, a small hit, and a miss are provided as the lottery results of the special symbol. For this reason, the higher the setting, the lower the probability of disconnection, so that the possibility of entering the chance zone (continuous disconnection) is reduced. In other words, the lower the setting, the higher the possibility of shifting to the chance zone that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, when shifting to the extended-villa mode B, the lower setting has a higher degree of advantage. Extremely special and novel playability can be realized. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

<Electrical Configuration in Twelfth Embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 according to the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, the ROM 202 in the twelfth embodiment is different from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the above-described eleventh embodiment (see FIG. 268 (a)) in that the first random number 11 table is replaced with the first random number 12 table 202ma. There is a point of providing 202na, a point of providing a small hit random number 12 table 202nb instead of the small hit random number 11 table 202mb, and a large hit type selection 12 table 202nd is provided instead of the big hit type selection 11 table 202md. The difference is that a variation pattern selection 12 table 202ne is provided instead of the variation pattern selection 11 table 202me.

  First, details of the first random number 12 table 202na in the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 299 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first random number 12 table 202na in the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 299 (a), the first random number 12 table 202na in the twelfth embodiment is similar to the first random number 11 table 202ma in the eleventh embodiment. A range of a random value (counter value) determined to be a jackpot is defined in association with the range. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 299 (a), in the low probability state of the special symbol, for the setting 1, the range of the counter value (random value) of the first random number counter C1 is "0 to 0". 204 for the setting 2 and “0 to 217” for the range of the counter value (random number value) of the first random number counter C1 for setting 2. The range of the counter value (random number value) of the first random number counter C1 is defined in association with “0 to 233”. For the setting 4, the counter value (random number value) of the first random number counter C1 is The range is defined in association with “0 to 251”, and the setting 5 is defined in association with “0 to 311” as the range of the counter value (random value) of the first random number counter C1. For 6, the first "0-409" is defined in association with a range or a counter value of the random number counter C1 of the (random number). Therefore, the jackpot probability of the setting 1 in the low probability state of the special symbol is 1/320 (205/65536), the jackpot probability of the setting 2 is 1/301 (218/65536), and the jackpot probability of the setting 3 is It is 1/280 (234/65536), the jackpot probability of setting 4 is 1/260 (252/65536), the jackpot probability of setting 5 is 1/210 (312/65536), and the jackpot probability of setting 6 Is 1/160 (410/65536).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 299 (a), in the high probability state of the special symbol, “0 to 467” corresponds to the setting 1 as the range of the counter value (random value) of the first random number counter C1. For setting 2, “0-498” is defined in association with the range of the counter value (random value) of the first random number counter C1. The range of the counter value (random value) of the random number counter C1 is defined in association with “0 to 534”. For the setting 4, the range of the counter value (random value) of the first random number counter C1 is “0”. To 575 ", and for setting 5," 0 to 712 "is defined as the range of the counter value (random value) of the first random number counter C1. The first hit "0-935" is defined in association with a range of counter value of the counter C1 (random number). Thus, the jackpot probability of the setting 1 in the special symbol high probability state is 1/140 (468/65536), the jackpot probability of the setting 2 is 1/131 (499/65536), and the jackpot probability of the setting 3 is It is 1/123 (535/65536), the jackpot probability of setting 4 is 1/114 (576/65536), the jackpot probability of setting 5 is 1/92 (713/65536), and the jackpot probability of setting 6 Is 1/70 (936/65536). Note that, as in the eleventh embodiment, the ratio between the jackpot probability in the low probability state and the jackpot probability in the high probability state is common.

  As described above, in the twelfth embodiment, mainly, the jackpot probability of the setting 5 and the setting 6 in the low probability state of the special symbol is increased, and the jackpot probability in the high probability (probable change) state of the special symbol is generally reduced. To lower. As a result, it is possible to relatively increase the probability of occurrence of a loss in the first special symbol lottery and increase the execution frequency of the continuous loss effect, so that the player who has confirmed the start of the continuous loss effect is provided with a chance zone. More often than not. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

  Next, details of the small hit random number 12 table 202nb in the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 299 (b). FIG. 299 (b) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the small hit random number 12 table 202nb in the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 299 (b), the small random number 12 table 202nb has 58982 pieces of 936 to 59917 as random numbers (values of the first random number counter C1) determined to be a small hit of the first special symbol. A random number value (counter value) is defined in association. Of the 65536 random number values (counter values) that can be taken by the first random number counter C1, the number of random number values (counter values) determined to be small hits is 58982, so that the small number is determined by lottery for the first special symbol. The probability of winning a win is 1 / 1.11 (58982/65536). As described above, the probability of winning the jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol in the probable change state of the special symbol is 1/140 (setting 1) to 1/70 (setting 6). Therefore, the probability that the first special symbol will be lost by lottery in the special symbol probable change state is 1 / 10.8 (setting 1) to 1 / 11.7 (setting 6). As described above, in the latent state, an advantageous chance zone is more likely to be set as the consecutive removal in the first special symbol lottery. Then, the lower the setting, the lower the probability of the jackpot, the higher the probability of departure. Therefore, in the latent state, a novel gaming property in which a low setting makes it easier to enter an advantageous chance zone can be realized, and the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 299 (b), the small hit random number 12 table 202nb includes 64599 of 936 to 65534 as random numbers (values of the first random number counter C1) determined to be a small hit of the second special symbol. A number of random numbers (counter values) are defined in association with each other. Of the 65536 random number values (counter values) that the first random number counter C1 can take, the number of random number values (counter values) determined to be small hits is 64599, so that the small number is determined by lottery for the first special symbol. The probability of winning a win is 1 / 1.01 (64599/65536). For this reason, in the twelfth embodiment, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, the winning is almost completed. However, in the twelfth embodiment, when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed in the extended-villa mode B (the latent state), the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is distributed in the same manner as the lottery of the second special symbol. It is configured to be determined. For this reason, if the first special symbol is stopped and displayed first during the small special change of the second special symbol, the second special symbol is forcibly stopped due to being removed. That is, even if a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, about half of the lottery is changed to be out due to the small hit symbol of the first special symbol being stopped and displayed first. The opportunity to get a prize ball is lost by the small hit game of the design. In other words, the frequency of small hits in the second special symbol in the extended mode B in the twelfth embodiment is approximately half of that in the extended mode B (latent state) in the eleventh embodiment. (The frequency of winning prize balls is about half). Therefore, in the twelfth embodiment, the jackpot probability in the special symbol high-probability state is lowered as a whole, and the small hit probability of the second special symbol is increased, so that the extended game mode B (invisible) in the eleventh embodiment is increased. State) is adjusted so as not to be too disadvantageous.

  As described above, the twelfth embodiment has a configuration in which long fluctuations of the first special symbol can be set in the case where the consecutive departures in the first special symbol lottery. During this long fluctuation, there is no possibility that the small hit symbol (and the big hit symbol) of the first special symbol is stopped. Therefore, when the small hit symbol of the second special symbol is won, the small hit symbol is reliably based on the small hit symbol. A small hit game can be executed. In other words, during the long fluctuation (chance zone) of the first special symbol, the execution frequency of the small hitting game of the second special symbol increases, and the winning frequency of the prize ball increases. In addition, even if a small win occurs in the lottery of the second special symbol, the long variation of the first special symbol is controlled so as not to be discarded (forcibly stopped by a missing symbol). ) Can be continued longer. Furthermore, although the details will be described later, it is configured such that a large hit in the lottery of the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than a large hit in the lottery of the first special symbol. That is, the ratio of the jackpot of the second special symbol being set to the most advantageous extended play mode B (latent state) after the end of the jackpot (looping the extended play mode B) than the jackpot of the first special symbol. Is configured to be higher. For this reason, in the chance zone in which the lottery of the first special symbol is difficult to be executed (the lottery of the second special symbol is intensively executed), the loop rate of the extended game mode B in the case of a big hit is substantially improved. This is advantageous for the player. Therefore, in the extended-villa mode B, it is possible to realize a very special and novel playability of expecting continuous disconnection in order to shift to the chance zone. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

  Next, the details of the jackpot type selection 12 table 202nd in the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 300 is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the jackpot type selection 12 table 202nd in the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 300, in the big hit type selection 12 table 202nd in the twelfth embodiment, six big hit types from "big hit A12" to "big hit F12" are defined as the big hit types of the first special symbol. On the other hand, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol, three jackpot types of "jackpot G12" to "jackpot K12" are defined.

  As shown in FIG. 300, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special figure 1), “big hit A12” is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value “0” of the first hit type counter C2. ing. In the “big hit A12”, the number of rounds of the big hit is 16 rounds, and the gaming state after the end of the big hit is set to the most advantageous latent state irrespective of the gaming state at the time of winning (time reduction regardless of the gaming state). The value of the counter 203h is set to 0, and the probability change flag 203g is set to ON.) This is a type of jackpot (16 round (R) probability change jackpot). This “big hit A12” is the most advantageous big hit type for the player because the number of rounds is the largest and the gaming state after the big hit is the most advantageous. Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there is one random number value (counter value) associated with “big hit A12”, so that the first special symbol lottery is selected. In the case of a jackpot, the rate at which the "big hit A12" is determined is 1% (1/100).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 300, “big hit B12” is defined as the big hit type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “1 to 49”. In the “big hit B12”, the number of rounds of the big hit is eight, and after the big hit is finished, the special symbol is set to the certain change state (the certain change flag 203g is set to ON). It is. In the case of winning in the "big hit B12" in the normal state and the latent state, 65536 is set to the value of the time saving counter 203h, whereas in the time saving state and the probable change state, 0 is set to the value of the time saving counter 203h. You.

  That is, when the "big hit B12" is won in the normal state and the latent state, the state shifts to a relatively advantageous state of change. In this probable change state, the number of times saved is set to 65536, so that the probable change state substantially continues until the next big hit. On the other hand, if the "big hit B12" is won in the time saving state and the probable change state, the number of time savings is set to 0, so that the gaming state after the end of the big hit becomes the most advantageous latent state. Therefore, the "big hit B12" is a big hit type that is relatively advantageous in terms of the gaming state when the winning is performed in the normal state and the latent state. On the other hand, when the winning is performed in a gaming state other than the normal state, the winning type is the most advantageous in the gaming state. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 49 random numbers (counter values) associated with "big hit B12" are selected, so that the first special symbol lottery is selected. In the case of a jackpot, the rate at which the "big hit B12" is determined is 49% (49/100).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 300, “big hit C12” is defined as the big hit type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “50 to 59”. In the “big hit C12”, the number of rounds of the big hit is eight, and the game state after the big hit is set to a relatively advantageous probable change state regardless of the gaming state at the time of the big hit winning (the value of the time-saving counter 203h). Is set to 65536, and the probability change flag 203g is set to ON).

  That is, when the "big hit C12" is won, a probable change state that substantially continues to the next big hit is set regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning. Therefore, the "big hit C12" is a big hit type that is relatively advantageous in terms of the gaming state. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "big hit C12" is 10, so the first special symbol lottery In the case of a jackpot, the rate at which the "jackpot C12" is determined is 10% (10/100).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 300, “big hit D12” is defined as the big hit type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “60 to 64”. In the “big hit D12”, the number of rounds of the big hit is eight rounds, and the game state after the big hit is set to a relatively advantageous probable change state regardless of the game state at the time of the big hit winning (the value of the time-saving counter 203h). Is set to 100, and the probability change flag 203g is set to ON). Note that, unlike “big hit C12”, in “big hit D12”, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 100, so that the probability change state does not always continue until the next big hit. In other words, if the special symbol lottery within 100 times after the “big hit D12” is completed does not result in a big hit, the value of the time reduction counter 203h becomes 0 and the state shifts to the most advantageous latent state. Therefore, the "big hit D12" is a big hit type which is more advantageous than the "big hit C12" in the game state after the end of the big hit. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with “big hit D12” is 5, so the first special symbol lottery In the case of a jackpot, the rate at which the "jackpot D12" is determined is 5% (5/100).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 300, “big hit E12” is defined as the big hit type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “65 to 84”. In the "big hit E12", the number of rounds of the big hit is eight, and the game state after the big hit is set to a relatively disadvantageous time-saving state regardless of the game state at the time of the big hit winning (the value of the time-saving counter 203h). Is set to 100, and the probability change flag 203g is set to OFF). Therefore, the "big hit E12" is a big hit type that is relatively disadvantageous in terms of a game state after the big hit end. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "big hit E12" is 20, so the first special symbol lottery In the case of a jackpot, the rate at which the "big hit E12" is determined is 20% (20/100).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 300, “big hit F12” is defined as the big hit type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “85 to 99”. In the “big hit F12”, the number of rounds of the big hit is eight, and the state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit is set to the low probability state of the special symbol (the probability change flag 203g is set to off). (8 rounds regular jackpot). In addition, when the "big hit F12" is won in the normal state, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 100. On the other hand, when the "big hit F12" is won in a game state other than the normal state, the time saving counter 203h is set. The value is set to 0. Therefore, if the "big hit F12" is won in a game state other than the normal state, the game shifts to the most disadvantageous normal state. Therefore, the "big hit F12" is the most disadvantageous in the gaming state after the end of the big hit. It is a big hit type. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with “big hit F12” is 15, so the lottery of the first special symbol is selected. In the case of a big hit, the rate at which the "big hit F12" is determined is 15% (15/100).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 300, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 9”, while the jackpot type is “big hit”. G12 "is defined in association. In the “big hit G12”, the number of rounds of the big hit is 16 rounds, and the state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit is set to the special change state of the special symbol (the positive change flag 203g is set to ON). 16 rounds with a big change). In addition, when a "big hit G12" is won in a game state other than the latent state, 65536 is set to the value of the time saving counter 203h, and when a "big hit G12" is won in the latent state, the time saving counter is set. 0 is set to the value of 203h. Therefore, in the case of winning the "big hit G12" in a gaming state other than the latent state, a probability change state substantially continuing to the next big hit is set, and in the case of the "big hit G12" winning in the latent state, Is set to the most advantageous latent state. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "big hit G12" is 10, so the second special symbol lottery In the case of a jackpot, the rate at which the "jackpot G12" is determined is 10% (10/100).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 300, “big hit H12” is defined as the big hit type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “10 to 64”. In the “big hit H12”, the number of rounds of the big hit is eight, and the state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit is set to the special change state of the special symbol (the certain change flag 203g is set to ON). 8 rounds jackpot). In addition, in the gaming state other than the latent state, when the "big hit H12" is won, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 65536. On the other hand, when the "big hit H12" is won in the latent state, the time saving counter is set. 0 is set to the value of 203h. Therefore, in the case of winning the "big hit H12" in a gaming state other than the latent state, a probability change state substantially continuing to the next big hit is set, while in the latent state, the "big hit H12" is won. Is set to the most advantageous latent state. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, 55 random numbers (counter values) associated with “big hit H12” are drawn, so the second special symbol lottery is selected. In the case of a jackpot, the rate at which the "jackpot H12" is determined is 55% (55/100).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 300, “big hit K12” is defined as the big hit type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “65 to 99”. In the "big hit K12", the number of rounds of the big hit is eight rounds, and the game state after the end of the big hit is set to the time saving state of 100 times of time saving regardless of the game state at the time of the big hit winning (time saving counter). The value of 203h is set to 100, and the probability change flag 203g is set to OFF). Therefore, the "big hit K12" is the most disadvantageous big hit type among the big hit types of the second special symbol both in terms of the number of rounds and in the game state after the end of the big hit. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 35 random numbers (counter values) associated with "big hit K12" are selected, so that the second special symbol lottery is selected. In the case of a jackpot, the rate at which the "jackpot K12" is determined is 35% (35/100).

  As described above, in the twelfth embodiment, in the extended game mode B (latent state), when the first special symbol has a big hit, the gaming state after the big hit is more disadvantageous than the eleventh embodiment described above. It is configured to be. More specifically, in the eleventh embodiment, if a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the latent state, a rate of 50% (that is, one of the jackpots A11 and B11 is won) ), The gaming state after the end of the big hit is set to be the most advantageous extended play mode B (latency state). However, in the twelfth embodiment, the extended play mode B (latency state) is set. In the meantime, if the first special symbol is a big hit, the advantageous extended mode B is set only at a rate of 1%. On the other hand, in the twelfth embodiment, in the advantageous extended-village mode B (latent state), when a jackpot is won by the lottery of the second special symbol, the advantageous extended-village mode with a high probability (65% ratio) B is set. Therefore, in the latent state, a game can be performed with a stronger expectation of a big hit in the second special symbol lottery than in a lottery in the first special symbol lottery. In addition, a game can be performed with a stronger expectation that a chance zone (a long fluctuation period of the first special symbol) in which the special symbol lottery can be executed biased to the second special symbol lottery will be set. As a result, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the twelfth embodiment, in the advantageous latent state, the ratio of the jackpot of the second special symbol set to the advantageous latent state after the end of the jackpot is higher than the jackpot of the first special symbol. With such a configuration, the chance zone in which the special symbol lottery can be executed with a bias toward the second special symbol lottery is formed in an advantageous state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, by configuring so that the jackpot of the second special symbol has a higher probability of the jackpot of the probability change (the jackpot that shifts to the probability change state or the latent state after the jackpot ends) than the jackpot of the first special symbol, You may comprise so that the advantage degree of a 2nd special symbol may become high.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 301, details of the variation pattern selection 12 table 202ne in the twelfth embodiment will be described. Here, although illustration is omitted, the variation pattern selection 12 table 202ne in the twelfth embodiment determines a variation pattern (variation time) when a special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state after the end of the big hit. 12 table for normal use 202ne1 for reference, 12 table for time saving / probable change 202ne2 referred to determine a fluctuation pattern when a special symbol lottery is executed in the probable change state and the time saving state, and a latent state And a fluctuation pattern when a special symbol lottery is executed in a normal state after the RAM is cleared, and a latent 12 table 202ne3 which is referred to determine a fluctuation pattern when a special symbol lottery is executed. And the RAM clear time table 202ne4 referred to for It is composed of Buru. Of these four types of data tables, the normal 12 table 202ne1, the time saving / probable change 12 table 202ne2, and the RAM clearing table 202ne4 are the normal 11 table 202me1 and the time saving / probable change in the above-described eleventh embodiment, respectively. Since the same data as those in the eleventh table 202me2 and the RAM clearing table 202me4 are defined, detailed description thereof is omitted here.

  With reference to FIG. 301, the details of the latent twelve table 202ne3 constituting the fluctuating pattern selection twelve table 202ne in the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 301 is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the latent 12 table 202ne3 in the twelfth embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 301, in the twelfth table for latent accuracy 202ne3 in the twelfth embodiment, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a hit, regardless of the number of changes after the hit and the small hit, the change type counter CS1 For a range of values from "0 to 149", a variation type (fluctuation pattern) is defined in association with a short variation per 2000 ms of variation time, and a value of a variation type counter CS1 is defined for a range of "150 to 198". As a variation type, a long variation per 5000 ms is associated and defined.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 301, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is out of order, the variation time is varied according to the number of times the first special symbol varies after the end of the big hit and the small hit. . More specifically, as shown in FIG. 301, if the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit and the small hit (the number of lotteries of the first special symbol) is 1, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is used. (That is, for the entire range that the variation type counter CS1 can take), a short variation with a variation time of 1000 ms is defined as the variation type in association with the variation type. For this reason, the chance zone (long fluctuation) is not set in the first (non-continuous) departure in the latent state. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 301, if the number of changes of the first special symbol after a hit (big hit or small hit) is two, the value of the change type counter CS1 falls within the range of “0 to 158”. On the other hand, a short variation with a variation time of 1000 ms is defined in association with the variation type, and the variation type counter CS1 has a variation type with a variation time of 600,000 ms and a very long variation with a variation type of “159 to 198”. It is defined in association. Therefore, when two consecutive misses occur in the latent state, the extra long variation is set at a rate of about 20% (40/199). That is, it is possible to form an advantageous state (chance zone) in which only the advantageous second special symbol lottery can be executed. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 301, if the number of changes of the first special symbol after a hit (big hit or small hit) is 3 or more, the change time is 600,000 ms as the change type regardless of the value of the change type counter CS1. The super long fluctuations are defined in association with each other. Therefore, in the case of three or more consecutive deviations in the latent state, a deviation long variation (chance zone) is always set. Therefore, a novel playability that strongly desires continuous detachment can be realized, and the interest of the player in the game can be improved. In addition, the lower the setting, the higher the probability of the first special symbol coming off. Therefore, in the latent state, the lower the setting, the more advantageous (the chance zone is easily set, and as a result, the more advantageous the second special symbol). It is possible to realize a novel game characteristic of making it easier to win a jackpot. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

  As shown in FIG. 301, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a small hit, the value of the change type counter CS1 is "0 to 49" regardless of the number of changes after the hit (big hit and small hit). The variation type (variation pattern) is defined in association with a short variation of 2000 ms as a variation type (variation pattern), and the variation type counter CS1 has a variation time of 5000 ms as a variation type for a range of “50 to 198”. Is defined in association with each other.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 301, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit, the value of the change type counter CS1 is set to “0 to 149” regardless of the number of changes after the hit (big hit and small hit). Is defined as a variation type (fluctuation pattern) with a variation time of 2000 ms, and a variation of the variation type counter CS1 is "150 to 198". Is defined in association with a long variation per 5000 ms. In other words, the distribution is the same as that in the case where the jackpot has been won in the lottery of the first special symbol. In addition, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is out of order, the outgoing short time fluctuation of 1000 ms corresponds to the fluctuation type regardless of the number of fluctuations after the hit (big hit and small hit) and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. It is stipulated. Furthermore, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit, the value of the change type counter CS1 is set in the range of “0 to 49” regardless of the number of changes after the hit (big hit and small hit). The fluctuation pattern is defined in association with a short fluctuation of 2000 ms, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with a long fluctuation of 5000 ms as the fluctuation type in the range of “50 to 198”. Stipulated. In other words, the distribution is the same as in the case where a small win has been achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol.

  As described above, in the twelfth embodiment, in the latent state (ie, the state in which the variation pattern is determined with reference to the latent 12 table 202ne3), if a lottery result other than the deviation is obtained, the first special symbol is displayed. The correspondence between the variation pattern and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is common to the second special symbol. As a result, it is possible to prevent only the disadvantageous first special change from continuing to be stopped first. Further, as the number of consecutive misses in the lottery of the first special symbol increases, the rate of setting the extra long variation (chance zone in which the lottery of the advantageous second special symbol can be intensively executed) is set higher. As a result, a novel playability that strongly expects the continuation of the detachment can be realized. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 302, details of the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 according to the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 302 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 according to the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 302, the RAM 223 according to the twelfth embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 according to the eleventh embodiment (and the seventh embodiment) described above (see FIG. 174) in that a continuous out-of-game effect counter 223na is added. Only in that

  The consecutive-miss effect counter 223na is a counter that indicates the progress of the effect in the continuous-miss effect (see FIGS. 297 (a), (b), and FIG. 298). The initial value of the consecutive outgoing effect counter 223na is set to 0, and the value is incremented by 1 each time the outgoing continues in the lottery of the first special symbol during the latent state, and is updated (see FIG. 306). See S8735 and S8741). When setting the effect mode of the continuous out-of-control effect, the effect mode is set according to the value of the continuous out-of-control effect counter 223na and the variation type.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Control Device in Twelfth Embodiment>
Next, the special figure 2 departure stop processing 12 (S11595) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 303 is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 departure stop processing 12 (S11595) in the twelfth embodiment. The special figure 2 departure stop process 12 (S11595) is a process executed in place of the special figure 2 departure stop process 11 (FIG. 289, S1596) in the above-described eleventh embodiment.

  This special figure 2 departure stop processing 12 (S11595) is different from the special figure 2 departure stop processing 11 (FIG. 289, S1596) in the eleventh embodiment in that the processing of S11602 to S11606 is deleted. The difference is that the process of S11611 is executed instead of the process of. In other words, when the second special symbol is stopped at the small hit, even if the first special symbol is changing, the first special symbol during the change is not removed and the first special symbol is not forcibly stopped at the symbol (the variable display is continued as it is). ) Is different only in the configuration. By configuring so that the change display of the first special symbol is not discarded (forced stop) when the small hit of the second special symbol is achieved, the chance zone (the change in the departure of the first special symbol) becomes the second special symbol. It is possible to suppress a situation in which the game is forcibly ended regardless of the remaining time in the chance zone just by winning once in the lottery.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the twelfth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  First, with reference to FIG. 304, details of the rendering mode setting process 12 (S5271) in the twelfth embodiment will be described. This effect mode setting process 12 (S5271) is a process executed in place of the effect mode setting process 11 (FIG. 296, S5261) of the eleventh embodiment described above.

  Of the effect form setting processing 12 (S5271), in each of S8201, S8207, S8208, and S8281-S8284, S8201, S8207, S8208 of effect form setting processing 11 of the eleventh embodiment (FIG. 296, S5261), respectively. , And the same processes as those of S8281 to S8284.

  As shown in FIG. 304, in the effect mode setting process 12 (S5271) in the twelfth embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S8201 that the current state is not the normal state (S8201: No), the current It is determined whether it is in a certain state (S8291). If it is determined that the current state is not the latent state (S8291: No), the process proceeds to S8281, whereas if it is determined that the present state is the latent state (S8291: Yes), the first in the latent state is determined. When the special symbol lottery is executed, a special figure 1 effect setting process for setting the effect mode is executed (S8292), and the flow shifts to the process of S8208. Details of the special figure 1 effect setting processing (S8292) will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 305, in the special figure 1 effect setting process (S8292), first, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern of the first special symbol notified by the variation pattern command is a variation pattern corresponding to the deviation (step S8292). S8701). In the process of S8701, when it is determined that the current variation pattern is a variation pattern corresponding to the deviation (S8701: Yes), the out-of-stage effect setting process for setting the effect mode of the continuous out-of-order effect (see FIG. 297). Is executed (S8702), and this processing ends. Details of the out-of-office effect setting process (S8702) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S8701, if it is determined that the current variation pattern is not the variation pattern corresponding to the deviation (S8701: No), then it is determined whether the value of the consecutive deviation effect counter 223na is greater than 0. (S8703). In the process of S8783, when it is determined that the value of the consecutive out-of-control effect counter 223na is greater than 0 (S8703: Yes), the effect mode in which the arrival at the top of the hill fails is determined (S8704), and the continuous out-of-control effect counter 223na. Is reset to 0 (S8705), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S8703, when it is determined that the value of the consecutive out-of-sequence effect counter 223na is 0 (S8703: No), the effect mode corresponding to the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command is determined (S8706). It is determined whether or not the super RUSH flag 223fi is ON (that is, whether or not the vehicle is in the chance zone) (S8707). If it is determined that the super RUSH flag 223fi is on (S8707: Yes), the super RUSH flag 223fi is set to off (S8708), and the process ends. If it is determined that the super RUSH in-flight flag 223fi is off (S8707: No), the present process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 306, details of the above-described out-of-office effect setting process (S8702) will be described. FIG. 306 is a flowchart showing the out-of-stage effect setting process (S8702) in the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 306, in the off-stage effect setting process (S8702), first, it is determined whether or not the super RUSH flag 223fi is on (S8731). In the processing of S8731, if it is determined that the super RUSH flag 223fi is ON (S8731: Yes), at least the previous fluctuation display is set to the super long fluctuation, and this time the super fluctuation is set to the super long fluctuation. Since it means that the chance zone has been set (at least two consecutive chance zones), an effect mode indicating the addition of Super RUSH is determined (S8732), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8731 that the super RUSH flag 223fi is off (S8731: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the non-continuous effect counter 223na is 0 (S8733). In the process of S8733, when it is determined that the value of the consecutive out-of-sequence effect counter 223na is 0 (S8733: Yes), an effect mode (see FIG. 297 (a)) corresponding to the first variation of the out-of-sequence effect is determined. (S8734), 1 is added to the value of the consecutive-miss effect counter 223na (S8735), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S8733, when it is determined that the value of the consecutive out-of-game effect counter 223na is not 0 (S8733: No), it is then determined whether the value of the continuous out-of-game effect counter 223na is 1 (S8736). ). If it is determined that the value of the consecutive out-of-control effect counter 223na is not 1 (it is 2 or more) (S8736: No), an effect mode is set in which the user climbs the second-stage ladder and enters a super RUSH (chance zone). (S8737), and shifts to the processing of S8742.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the continuous out-of-game effect counter 223na is 1 (S8736: Yes), it is next determined whether or not the current fluctuation is a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a super-long fluctuation (S8738). ). If it is determined that the current fluctuation is a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a super long fluctuation (S8738: Yes), the effect of entering the super RUSH (chance zone) by arriving at the top of the hill at a stretch with a jumping platform. It is determined (S8739), and the flow shifts to the process of S8742. On the other hand, in the process of S8738, when it is determined that the current variation pattern is not the variation pattern corresponding to the departure super long variation (S8738: No), an effect mode of climbing the first ladder is determined (S8740). One is added to the value of the consecutive out-of-game effect counter 223na (S8741), and then this processing ends.

  In the process of S8742, the value of the consecutive out-of-sequence effect counter 223na is reset, the super RUSH flag 223fi is set to ON (S8742), and the process ends. By performing the out-of-sequence effect setting process (see FIG. 306), when the first special symbol is continuously out, the effect of the out-of-sequence effect is suitably performed according to the number of times of continuous and the selected variation pattern. Can be set.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment, the higher the setting is, the lower the probability that the special symbol comes off is, and the first special symbol is randomly selected in the advantageous latent state. In the case where the number of consecutive misses is equal to the number of times, a chance zone advantageous to the player is set. More specifically, a configuration is adopted in which a very long (for 10 minutes) extremely long variation is set as the first variation. With this configuration, it is possible to bias and execute the advantageous second special symbol lottery during the execution of the extra long variation. In other words, in the lottery of the second special symbol, there is a chance to win a prize ball by winning a small hit with a high probability, and when a big hit is won, the gaming state after the end of the big hit is again the most advantageous latent It can be configured to increase the possibility of being set to the state. Therefore, in the latent state, a novel gaming property in which the chance zone is more likely to be set as the setting is lower can be realized, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the twelfth embodiment, a chance zone is set at a rate of 20% when the lottery of the first special symbol misses two consecutive times in the latent state, and when the lottery continues three or more times. Although the chance zone is set at a rate of 100%, the correspondence between the number of consecutive misses and the set rate of the chance zone is not limited to this, and may be arbitrarily determined. Further, the chance zone may be set even if the continuation does not continue, or a certain ratio (for example, 50% The chance zone may be set at a rate of 100%). With this configuration, the appearance rate of the chance zone can be increased, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the twelfth embodiment, when the lottery of the second special symbol that is easy to be executed in the chance zone is executed, a large jackpot type that is advantageous when a large jackpot is won is easily selected, and a small jackpot that is won with a high probability is selected. In the case of winning, it was configured so that prize balls could be easily obtained during the small hit game, but it is not limited to this, and the specifications are arbitrarily determined within a range that is more advantageous than the lottery of the first special symbol be able to. Specifically, for example, the rate of the probability of changing the jackpot at the time of the jackpot is different between the lottery of the second special symbol and the lottery of the first special symbol, and the rate of the variable jackpot at the lottery of the first special symbol (for example, 50%) may be configured to increase the rate of the probability of winning the random change in the second special symbol lottery (for example, to 80% or 100%). With this configuration, it is possible to play a game with a strong expectation that a big win will be achieved by a lottery of the second special symbol in the chance zone. In addition, for example, with respect to the type of jackpot, the lottery of the second special symbol is more disadvantageous than the lottery of the first special symbol (for example, the rate at which the advantageous extended mode B (the latent state) is set is lower. Or to reduce the probability of a jackpot). In the case of such a configuration, during the chance zone, it is highly likely that if a large jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, it will be disadvantageous. It is possible to realize a novel game property in which the player can play a game in the hope that no big hit will occur.

  In the twelfth embodiment, basically, when a large hit or a small hit is made in the lottery of one special symbol, the variable display of the other special symbol is deviated and forcibly stopped at the symbol. The variable display is configured to continue the variable display even when the first special symbol is performing the variable display only when the small hit occurs, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the lottery of the second special symbol, in the case of a big hit or a small hit, if the change display of the first special symbol is being executed at the time of stopping the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol, the running The fluctuation display is continued without forcibly stopping (during the big hit game and the small hit game, the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is interrupted, and the change display of the first special symbol after the big hit game and the small hit game ends) May be restarted). With this configuration, when a jackpot is won during the chance zone, the chance zone continues even after the end of the jackpot. ), The benefits of the chance zone can be continued even after the jackpot. Therefore, the advantage of the chance zone can be further enhanced, and the interest of the player in playing the game when the chance zone is set can be further improved.

  In the twelfth embodiment, in the advantageous extended-village mode B (latency state), when the lottery of the relatively disadvantageous first special symbol is lost, only the relatively advantageous second special symbol lottery is performed. Although the chance zone that can be executed frequently is formed, the opportunity to set the chance zone is not limited to the occasion. For example, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation is lengthened (for example, set to 10 minutes), so that during the execution of the jackpot fluctuation, an advantageous second special symbol is displayed. It may be formed as a chance zone in which only the lottery can be executed frequently. In this case, the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery during the chance zone, and the second special symbol jackpot symbol is not stopped and displayed before the chance zone ends (that is, the first special symbol is not displayed). If the jackpot change of the second special symbol is not forcibly changed to the stop by the big symbol stop of the second special symbol), the relatively special first special symbol big jackpot is started at the end of the chance zone, so that during the chance zone, It is possible to realize a gaming property that strongly expects to win a favorable second special symbol. Therefore, the interest of the player between the chance zones can be further improved. Further, a chance zone may be formed when a small win is made in the lottery of the first special symbol.

  In the twelfth embodiment, when a lottery of a disadvantageous first special symbol is lost, only a lottery of an advantageous second special symbol can be intensively executed to form an advantageous chance zone. However, in place of or in addition to this, a relatively long fluctuation time (for example, 5 minutes) can be set even when a lottery of the advantageous second special symbol is lost, so that it is comparatively possible. You may be comprised so that the period (pinch zone) in which only the unfavorable 1st special symbol lottery is performed may be formed. With such a configuration, the lower the setting, the more likely the chance zone and the pinch zone appear. Therefore, the lower the setting, the more advantageous the game in the extended play mode B can be added. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Thirteenth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment described above, in the specification in which the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be simultaneously (duplicated), the first special symbol is displayed in a latent state. In the case where a lottery is lost, a chance zone can be set which can be executed with a bias toward the second special symbol lottery which is advantageous.

  On the other hand, in the thirteenth embodiment, in a specification in which only one type of variable display can be executed, a period (chance zone) advantageous to the player is set when a lottery result of a special symbol is lost. The configuration was adopted. More specifically, in the thirteenth embodiment, a jackpot (direct hit) executed when a jackpot is won by a special symbol lottery, and a specific area (V area) provided at a predetermined position on the game board 13. ), A big hit (V hit) executed based on the game ball entering (V winning) is provided, and when a special symbol is removed by a special symbol lottery in a specific game state (time saving state). By executing a specific game method during the deviation change, the ball entry rate (V winning rate) to the specific area (V area) is configured to be high. With this configuration, similar to the twelfth embodiment, it is possible to realize a novel playability in which the lower the setting is, the more the advantage in a specific game state (time saving state) can be improved.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment is different in the configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment in that the game board 13 has a partially modified board configuration, and the main controller 110 , The configuration of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 is partially changed, the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed, and the configuration is executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. The point is that the control processing has been partially changed. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the following. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the twelfth embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 307 is a front view of the game board 13 in the thirteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 307, the game board 13 in the thirteenth embodiment is different from the board surface configuration of the game board 13 in the twelfth embodiment (and the eleventh embodiment) in the game board 13 (see FIG. 264). A lottery device 6750 is provided below the three symbol display device 81 to execute a jackpot lottery (cassette lottery) by allocating the flowing game balls to a specific area (V area) or an out port. In which the right variable winning device 1650 and the right motorized accessory 164 are deleted, and a second ball provided with a motorized accessory 6400a instead of the right second ball entry port 645. The difference is that a mouth 6400 is provided.

  The lottery device 6750 is in a state in which a game ball can enter for a predetermined period when a small hit is made in the special symbol lottery (that is, the small hitting attacker 6750a provided at the entrance portion of the lottery device 6750 is used). Released), the game ball that has entered during the state where the ball can be entered enters the V winning opening 6750f1 provided inside the lottery device 6750, and the game ball enters the jackpot (per V). Win. Note that one lottery winning port and five out ports (out ports 6750f2 to 6750f6) are provided inside the lottery device 6750. A game ball that has entered the inside of the lottery device 6750 always enters the V winning opening 6750f1 or one of the out openings, so that a game ball that has entered the lottery device 6750 enters the V winning opening. The rate (probability) at which the player wins (the V prize occurs) is 1/6.

  In the thirteenth embodiment, when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed, the possibility of winning a small hit is 0, but when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, a high probability (for example, , 98%). Therefore, in the normal symbol time-saving state in which the game ball easily enters the second entrance 6400, the right hit is continued with a high probability, and the small hit attacker 6750a is opened by continuously hitting right. Therefore, it is easy to enter the V winning hole. On the other hand, in the normal state of the normal symbol, it is difficult to make the game ball enter the second entrance 6400 even if the player hits right, so it is necessary to advance the game by hitting left. A left-hit game ball can enter the first entrance 64, but cannot enter the second entrance 6400. Therefore, in the normal state of the normal design, it is necessary to win a small hit. There is no. In the thirteenth embodiment, only two types of gaming states, a normal state and a time saving state, are provided. In other words, the special symbol high probability state and the low probability state are not provided, and the special symbol lottery probability (direct hit lottery probability) is configured to be always constant.

  Next, details of the lottery device 6750 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 308 is a diagram showing the internal structure of the lottery device 6750. As shown in FIG. 308, one V winning opening 6750f1 and five normal V winning openings 6750f2 to 6750f6 are provided inside the lottery device 6750, and the distribution rotator 6750f which always performs a rotating operation at a constant speed. Is provided. The game ball that has reached the distribution rotator 6750f enters one of one V winning port and five out ports. The distribution rotator 6750f always rotates at a constant speed from when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 until the power is turned off. Depending on the rolling speed and the like of the game ball at, which one of the entrances (one V winning opening and five out entrances) provided in the distribution rotator 6750f varies. That is, each time a game ball enters the lottery device 6750 as a small hit, the game ball can be randomly distributed to any of the entrances.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 308, a small hitting attacker 6750a for opening and closing the entrance portion of the lottery device 6750 is provided on the right side of the lottery device 6750 in a front view. When the small hit is won, the small hit attacker 6750a is opened for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds). The game ball that has reached the small hitting attacker 6750a from above during the opening period flows into the lottery device 6750. As shown in FIG. 308, a guiding channel 6750b for letting game balls flow down to the sorting rotator 6750f is provided inside the lottery device 6750. The part is provided with a ball discharge door 6750c that opens and closes the floor surface. When the ball discharge door 6750c is closed, one floor is formed by the floor surface of the guide flow path 6750b and the upper surface of the ball discharge door 6750c, so that the game ball is moved downstream from the ball discharge door 6750c. And can flow down. On the other hand, when the ball discharge door 6750c is open, the game ball falls to a discharge area 6750d formed below the ball discharge door 6750c and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. That is, it is discharged to the outside without reaching the distribution rotator 6750f. Also, as shown in FIG. 308, the flowing game balls are temporarily stopped in the guide channel 6750b about one game ball downstream of the lower end of the ball discharge door 6750c (the guide channel). A ball stop 6750e capable of closing a specific position of 6750b) is provided.

  The ball discharge door 6750c, the discharge area 6750d, and the ball stopper 6750e are provided to limit the number of game balls that reach the distribution rotator 6750f to one at a minimum. A control method for limiting the number of game balls reaching the distribution rotator 6750f to one will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 309 (a) is a diagram illustrating a case where a plurality of game balls enter the inside of the lottery device 6750 in a state where both the ball discharge door 6750c and the ball stopper 6750e are closed. As shown in FIG. 309 (a), when the ball discharge door 6750c and the ball stopper 6750e are closed, the game balls flowing into the inside of the lottery device 6750 pass through the upper surface of the ball discharge door 6750c. As a result, the ball stops 6750e prevent the flow from flowing down and are stopped to the right of the ball stops 6750e. If one game ball further flows down in the guide channel 6750b while one game ball is stopped, the flow is prevented by the already stopped game ball, and the right side of the stopped game ball is prevented. Stopped. As described above, since the ball stopper 6750e is disposed at a distance of about one game ball from the lower end of the ball discharge door 6750c, it enters the lottery device 6750 after the second ball. The played game ball is stopped on the upper surface of the ball discharge door 6750c.

  FIG. 309 (b) is a diagram showing a state where the ball discharge door 6750c is opened while the game ball is parked. As shown in FIG. 309 (b), when the ball discharge door 6750c is opened, the game balls other than the game balls stopped to the right of the ball stopper 6750e fall into the discharge area 6750d, and the pachinko machine is used. It falls outside the machine 10. Thus, a state where only one game ball is stopped inside the lottery device 6750 can be formed. After 0.5 second has passed since the ball discharge door 6750c was opened, the ball stopper 6750e is tilted leftward when viewed from the front, so that it can pass through the guide channel 6750b. Thereby, one game ball remaining in the lottery device 6750 can be caused to flow down to the distribution rotator 6750f. The game ball that has flowed down the guiding flow path 6750b is dropped toward the distribution rotator 6750f from the upper right direction when viewed from the front with respect to the distribution rotator 6750f, and substantially enters the ball disposed on the right side in front view at the time of the fall. Get into the mouth. By controlling in this way, the number of game balls that can reach the sorting rotator 6750f in one small hit can be limited to a maximum of one, so that the probability of the jackpot using the lottery device 6750 (sorting) The proportion allocated to the V winning opening by the rotating body 6750f) can be made constant.

  Next, the details of the distribution rotator 6750f will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 310 is a top view of the distribution rotator 6750f. As shown in FIG. 189, the sorting rotator 6750f is formed in a substantially circular shape when viewed from above, and has six entrances arranged at an outer edge thereof. Since the distribution rotator 6750f is provided with a slope that is downward from the center toward the outer edge, the game sphere that has reached from near the center of the distribution rotator 6750f is inclined toward the outer edge. Along the line, the ball is distributed to any of the entrances provided in the outer edge portion.

  As shown in FIG. 310, one V winning opening having a substantially trapezoidal shape in a top view and five out ports having a substantially trapezoidal shape in a top view are arranged on the distribution rotator 6750f. That is, the V winning opening 6750f1 and the out openings 6750f2 to 6750f6 are arranged in order. As shown in FIG. 310, while the power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10, the distribution rotator 6750f always has the shaft 6750fz as the rotation axis and has a constant speed in the clockwise direction in a top view (for example, for 6 seconds). (A rotation speed for one rotation).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 311, when the lottery of the second special symbol in the thirteenth embodiment results in a small hit, each part of the lottery device 6750 (small hitting attacker 6750a, ball stopper 6750e, and ball) The operation pattern (opening pattern) of the discharge door 6750c) will be described. FIG. 311 is a diagram showing a temporal change of the state of each part at the time of the small hit winning.

  As shown in FIG. 311, when the small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the small hit attacker 6750 a is opened together with the start of the small hit (start of the effective period of the small hit). As shown in FIG. 311, the open state of the small hitting attacker 6750 a continues for 2 seconds, and is closed when 2 seconds have elapsed. Thereafter, the small hitting attacker 6750a is maintained in the closed state until the small hitting ends. If the game ball can enter the small hitting attacker 6750a during the opening period of 2 seconds, the game ball reaches the distribution rotator 6750f during the small hitting effective period, and any of the entering balls A game ball can enter the mouth.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 311, the ball stopper 6750 e is maintained in the closed state (see FIG. 309 (a)) until 3.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the small hit, and 3.5 seconds have elapsed. From the point in time (1.5 seconds after the closing of the small hitting attacker 6750a) to the end of the small hitting, the state is switched to the open state (a state in which the guiding flow path 6750b can flow down) and closed again at the end of the small hitting. Can be switched to a state. On the other hand, the ball discharge door 6750c is maintained in the closed state (see FIG. 309 (a)) until three seconds have elapsed since the start of the small hit, and at the time when three seconds elapse (the closing of the small hit attacker 6750a). The state is switched to the open state (see FIG. 309 (b)) from the time one second elapses to the end of the small hit, and is switched to the closed state again at the end of the small hit. In other words, for three seconds after the start of the small hit, the ball stopping portion 6750e and the ball discharge door 6750c are in a closed state, so that all the game balls entering the inside of the lottery device 6750 are ball stopped. The portion 6750e is stopped in the guide channel 6750b.

  When three seconds have elapsed from the start of the small hit, the ball discharge door 6750c is opened with the ball stopper 6750e closed, so that the ball discharge door 6750e is stopped by directly contacting the right side of the ball stopper 6750e. All of the game balls other than the above-mentioned game ball fall from the opening of the ball discharge door 6750c to the discharge area 6750d and are discharged to the outside. In other words, there is only one game ball stopped inside the lottery device 6750. Then, since the ball stopper 6750e is opened 0.5 seconds after the ball discharge door 6750c is opened, one game ball remaining inside the lottery device 6750 is directed to the sorting rotator 6750f. Flow down. As described above, by opening the ball discharge door 6750c first and then opening the ball stopper 6750e, two or more game balls are set inside the lottery device 6750 during the opening period of the small hitting attacker 6750a. Even if the ball enters, the second and subsequent game balls can be discharged from the discharge area 6750d to the outside until the ball stopper 6750e is opened. Therefore, the number of game balls that reach the distribution rotator 6750f in one small hit can be limited to one each time. Therefore, the winning probability of the big hit in the small hit (the probability that the game ball enters the V winning opening) ) Can always be constant (１ ／).

  In the thirteenth embodiment, in the normal symbol time-saving state, if the lottery of the second special symbol executed with the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol being 0 gives a small hit, the fluctuation time is 1 For 2 seconds, 2 seconds, or 3 seconds. For this reason, even if the fluctuation start timing (ball entry timing to the second entrance 6400) can be adjusted by adjusting the launch timing of the game ball, it is not possible to adjust up to the start timing of the small hitting game. Since it becomes impossible (started at any timing of 1 second, 2 seconds, or 3 seconds after the start of the fluctuation), the small hit start timing at which the V prize becomes easy from the arrangement of the distribution rotator 6750f is set. The game method of predicting and adjusting the firing timing of the game ball can be configured so as not to be established. In other words, the big hit (per V) winning rate in the case of a small hit in the time reduction state can be made constant (１ ／). Here, in the thirteenth embodiment, since the fluctuation time of the symbol is normally fixed to 30 seconds regardless of the game state, the electric accessory 6400a is opened only at intervals of at least 30 seconds (second ball entry). The opportunity to enter the mouth 6400 is given only every 30 seconds). On the other hand, when a small hit is won at a rate of 98% in the second special symbol lottery, the fluctuation time is set to 3 seconds or less (one of 1 second, 2 seconds, and 3 seconds). That is, even if the effective period (six seconds) of the small hit game is taken into account, the period required from the start of the lottery of one special symbol to the end of the small hit game is 9 seconds or less (the normal symbol fluctuation time). Therefore, in the time-saving state, it is basically difficult to accumulate the reserved balls even if the player keeps right-handing continuously. Further, in the thirteenth embodiment, “0.5 seconds × 1 time” is set as the opening time of the electric accessory 6400a when a normal symbol is hit in the normal symbol time-saving state, so It is configured such that it is only possible to enter one game ball during the open period based on the symbol hit. Therefore, it is possible to make it harder to store the reserved ball of the second special symbol.

  On the other hand, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in a situation where the reserved ball of the second special symbol exists, the fluctuation time is fixed to one second. That is, while the reserved ball is present, a new special symbol lottery is executed every 7 seconds (variable time 1 second + small hitting game period 6 seconds). In this case, the timing at which the ball stopping portion 6750e is opened and the game ball stopped inside the guiding flow path 6750b moves toward the distribution rotator 6750f is also every 7 seconds. Here, as described above, the distribution rotator 6750f is configured to always perform the rotation operation at a rotation speed of one rotation in six seconds while the power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10. When the game ball heads to the distribution rotator 6750f every 7 seconds, the game ball reaches the distribution rotator 6750f approximately every 7/6 laps. Here, as described above, in the distribution rotator 6750f, since six entrances (V winning opening 6750f1, out exits 6750f2 to 6750f6) are arranged at equal intervals, the game balls are provided every 7/6 laps. When the ball reaches the distribution rotator 6750f, the ball almost enters the ball entrance that is adjacent in the rotation direction to the ball entrance that has been allocated (entered) about the previous time (about 7 seconds ago). I do. Therefore, as the number of the reserved balls of the second special symbol increases, the game balls can be made to enter the adjacent entrance at every small hit change. I can say. In the thirteenth embodiment, when the lottery of the second special symbol is lost, the long variation of the second special symbol is set so that the second special symbol is changed during the long variation. It was configured to be able to accumulate up to (4) retaining balls. This makes it possible to realize a novel game property that can make a departure that is not very pleasing to a large chance per V on the contrary.

  Next, an overview of the chance zone in the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, in the thirteenth embodiment, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the time saving state, control is performed such that a long fluctuation time (for example, 5 minutes) fluctuation pattern (out-of-long fluctuation) is set. In the meantime, it is configured such that up to (four) reserved balls of the second special symbol can be stored. That is, when the lottery of the second special symbol is lost, the variation time of the length is set so that the lottery of the ordinary symbol can be executed at least four times or more. As described above, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is 30 seconds, and the opening period of the ordinary symbol is 0.5 seconds. Therefore, during the long fluctuation, the lottery of the ordinary symbol can be executed about five times. . Therefore, it is possible to easily accumulate up to the maximum value of four reserved balls of the second special symbol only by continuously right-handing during the deviation long fluctuation. FIG. 312 is a diagram showing a temporal change of the progress of the game after the reserved ball is accumulated up to the upper limit in the chance zone (off-long variation).

  FIG. 312 (a) shows an example of a temporal change in the arrangement (rotational position) of the distribution rotator 6750f immediately after the end of the chance zone. 312 (a) correspond to any of the six entrances (V winning opening 6750f1, out exits 6750f2 to 6750f6). That is, the numeral “1” represents the first entrance (any one of the six entrances), and the numeral “2” represents the second entrance adjacent to the first entrance in the rotation direction. The mouth and the number "3" indicate the third entrance which is adjacent to the second entrance in the rotational direction, and the numeral "4" indicates the fourth entrance which is adjacent to the third entrance in the rotational direction. The numeral “5” indicates the fifth entrance that is adjacent to the fourth entrance in the rotation direction, and the numeral “6” indicates the entrance in the rotation direction relative to the fifth entrance. The adjacent sixth entrances are shown. Note that FIG. 312 (a) shows the change over time of the entrance where a game ball dropped from the guide channel 6750b can enter as the position (rotation position) of the distribution rotator 6750f. Here, FIG. 312 (a) exemplifies a situation in which the first entrance is arranged to be able to enter the ball at the end timing of the chance zone for easy understanding. Since the rotation of the distribution rotator 6750f is executed irrespective of the end timing of the chance zone (the state of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol), the end timing of the chance zone and the first entrance are not necessarily entered. The timing at which the ball moves to the position where the ball can be moved is not the same.

  As shown in FIG. 312 (a), the type of the entrance provided at the position where a game ball can enter the distribution rotator 6750f switches every second. That is, as shown in FIG. 312 (a), until one second elapses from the end of the chance zone, the arrangement is such that the game ball can enter the first entrance, and two seconds after the elapse of one second Until the elapsed time, the game ball can enter the second entrance, and after 2 seconds, the game ball can enter the third entrance until 3 seconds. The game ball can enter the fourth entrance from 3 seconds to 4 seconds, and the fifth entrance from 5 seconds to 4 seconds. The arrangement is such that the ball can enter, and the arrangement is such that the game ball can enter the sixth entrance from the lapse of 5 seconds to the lapse of 6 seconds. Thereafter, every one second, the ball entrances in which the ball can be placed are switched one by one.

  On the other hand, FIG. 312 (b) is a diagram showing the transition of the game after the end of the long miss change (chance zone). If the reserve ball is accumulated until the end of the long deviation change (during the chance zone), the small hit change starts with the end of the chance zone. As described above, the small hit variation of the second special symbol is always set to one second in a situation where the reserved ball exists, so the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed after one second elapses, and the small hit game is performed. Is started. As described above with reference to FIG. 311, in the small hitting game of the thirteenth embodiment, the small hitting attacker 6750a is opened for two seconds immediately after the start, and the ball first enters the lottery device 6750 during the opening period. The ball (game ball stopped by the ball stopper 6750e) flows down to the distribution rotator 6750f after 3.5 seconds from the start of the small hit. That is, the small hitting attacker 6750a is opened from the lapse of 1 second to the lapse of 3 seconds after the end of the chance zone, and the gaming ball is directed to the distribution rotator 6750f when the lapse of 4.5 seconds after the end of the chance zone. Flowed down. In this case, since the flow-down period from the ball stopper 6750e to the distribution rotator 6750f requires 0.5 seconds to 1 second, it actually takes 5 seconds from the end of the chance zone to reach the distribution rotator 6750f. After 5.5 seconds have passed. That is, as shown in FIG. 312 (a), in an arrangement in which the sixth entrance can enter the ball, the game ball reaches the distribution rotator 6750f. Therefore, if the sixth winning opening is the V winning opening 6750f1, the game ball enters the V winning opening 6750f1 (that is, a V winning occurs) and wins per V (at the end of the small hitting). On the other hand, if the sixth entrance is any one of the out entrances, no V prize is generated, and no victory is won. FIG. 312 (b) illustrates a case where the sixth entrance is an exit.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 312 (b), if the V winning does not occur in the first small hit after the end of the chance zone, after the small hit validity period elapses (after 6 seconds from the start of the small hit). Then, the variable display based on the second reserved ball suspended in the chance zone is started. That is, after the end of the chance zone, the fluctuation display based on the second reserved ball is started at the lapse of 7 seconds. In addition, when the reserve ball is stored up to the upper limit (four) in the chance zone, the variation time of the variation display based on the second reserve ball (the variation display executed when there are two reserve balls) Is always set to one second. Therefore, the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed at the elapse of 1 second (8 seconds after the end of the chance zone) after the start of the fluctuation, and the small hit game is started, and the small hit attacker 6750a is operated for 2 seconds (at the end of the chance zone). It is released (after 8 seconds elapse to 10 seconds elapse). Then, as a result of the ball stopping portion 6750e being opened 3.5 seconds after the start of the small hit (11.5 seconds after the end of the chance zone), the range from 12 seconds to 12.5 seconds after the end of the chance zone. Within, the game ball reaches the distribution rotator 6750f. That is, as shown in FIG. 312 (a), in an arrangement in which the first entrance can enter the ball, the game ball reaches the distribution rotator 6750f. Therefore, if the first entrance is the V winning opening 6750f1, the game ball enters the V winning opening 6750f1 (that is, a V winning occurs) and wins per V (at the end of the small hitting). On the other hand, if the first entrance is any one of the out entrances, no V prize is generated and no victory is won. FIG. 312 (b) illustrates a case where the first entrance is an out entrance. In this manner, in the second small hitting game after the end of the chance zone, in the rotation direction with respect to the entrance opening (sixth entrance) in the first small hitting game after the end of the chance zone, The ball enters the adjacent entrance (first entrance).

  Similarly, in the small hit based on the third reserved ball held in the chance zone (third small hit after the end of the chance zone), similarly, as shown in FIGS. 312 (a) and (b), the second hit The game ball enters the entrance (second entrance) adjacent to the entrance (first entrance) in the rotation direction with respect to the entrance (first entrance) in the small hit game. Regarding the fourth retained ball, since the retained ball is 0 at the time of digestion of the reserved, any of 1 second, 2 seconds, and 3 seconds is randomly set as the fluctuation time. In the case where the fluctuation time of 2 seconds is set, the entrance (the third entrance) which is adjacent to the entrance (the second entrance) in the rotation direction in the third small hit game In the case of entering the ball into the mouth, and setting a fluctuation time of 2 seconds, two in the rotation direction with respect to the entrance (the second entrance) that entered the ball in the third small hitting game If the ball enters the entrance (the fourth entrance) at the position advanced by the minute and the variation time of 3 seconds is set, the entrance (the fourth entrance) that entered in the third small hitting game The ball enters the entrance (the fifth entrance) at a position advanced by three in the rotation direction with respect to the entrance 2 (the entrance 2).

  In summary, by continuously right-handing in the chance zone, the reserve ball is accumulated to the maximum, and the game ball enters the small hit attacker 6750a during the opening period of the small hit game after the end of the chance zone. By doing so, it is possible to almost certainly enter the sixth entrance, the first entrance, and the second entrance, and any one of the third to fifth entrances , A game ball can be entered. In other words, it is possible to allow the game balls to enter four different entrances among the six entrances provided in the distribution rotator 6750f during the holding digestion after the end of the chance zone. . Therefore, the probability of the V prize occurring from the end of the chance zone to the consumption of all the reserved balls (up to the upper limit number (four)) accumulated during the chance zone is 4/6. Since the V prize rate is about 52% (1-5 / 6 × 5/6 × 5/6 × 5/6) when the small hitting game is executed four times with the reserved ball being 0, the chance zone Is set, it is possible to form an advantageous situation where the V winning rate is increased by 10% or more. In addition, when the winning of the normal symbol is started during the holding digestion and the number of the holding balls of the second special symbol increases, the number of small hitting games increases, so that the V winning rate further increases. As described above, in the thirteenth embodiment, when the player loses in the time reduction state, an advantageous situation in which the V prize is more likely to occur than usual can be formed. It is possible to realize a novel gaming ability that hopes to become. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

  Next, a characteristic effect in the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, in the thirteenth embodiment, when the lottery of the second special symbol is lost in the time saving state, control is performed so that the variation time is set to a variation long time of 5 minutes (300 seconds). It is configured to be able to accumulate up to the maximum number of reserved balls during the execution of the change. Then, by storing the reserved balls up to the upper limit number, it is highly likely that the V prize will occur in the small hitting game that is executed from the end of the departure long fluctuation until all the reserved balls are consumed ( 4/6 or more). FIG. 313 describes an effect mode (charge time effect) executed on the third symbol display device 81 during the execution of the off-long change (during the chance zone).

  FIG. 313 (a) is a diagram showing an effect mode of the charge time effect executed when the lottery of the second special symbol is lost in the time saving state. As shown in FIG. 313 (a), when a long deviation change is executed (enters a chance zone) and a charge time effect is executed, a character 811 imitating a rabbit is substantially at the center of the main display area Dm. A display mode in which the whole body starts to exert force with a steep expression is displayed, and a display area in which a character “Charge time has entered!” Is displayed in a horizontally long rectangular shape above the character 811. In this display area, a countdown display of the remaining period until the end of the charge time (chance zone) is also displayed. The example of FIG. 313 (a) illustrates a state where the time is 4 minutes and 56 seconds remaining, and the character “4:56 remaining” is displayed in the display area. Further, on the right side of the character 811 in a front view, an expected degree display image KH of a vertically long substantially rectangular shape is displayed. The expected degree display image KH is a display area in which characters indicating the expected degree of occurrence of the V prize in the small hit game for the number of reserved balls executed after the end of the chance zone are displayed, and the reserved ball of the second special symbol is displayed. It is configured such that the degree of expectation displayed increases as the number increases. FIG. 313 (a) illustrates a state where the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 0, and “Expectation 0/6” is displayed in the expectation display image KH. Further, the character “Right-handed raises the expectation !!” is displayed in the sub display area Ds, and the small display area Ds1 formed on the right side of the sub display area Ds The number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is displayed in a relatively inconspicuous manner by numbers. According to these display modes, it is possible to make the player easily understand that the right hitting improves the expectation of the big hit.

  FIG. 313 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a game ball enters the second entrance 6400a and the number of reserved balls increases during execution of the charge time effect. When a ball entering the second entrance 6400a is detected during the execution of the charge time effect, the character 811 is switched to a display mode in which the character 811 is dressed in an aura OG (the surrounding area emits light), and is displayed on the upper left side of the character 811. , An expectation-up image UG in which a letter “UP !!” is displayed in a substantially elliptical horizontal shape is formed. Further, the degree of expectation displayed in the degree-of-expectation display image KH increases by one and becomes “１ ／”. Further, the number indicating the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol in the small display area Ds1 is also updated. With these display contents, it is possible to make the player easily understand that the degree of expectation increases as the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol increases. The range of the aura OG increases as the number of reserved balls increases, and the degree of expectation displayed in the degree of expectation display image KH increases to a maximum of 4/6. These changes in the display contents can further increase the sense of expectation for the small hit game that is executed after the end of the chance zone (charge time), thereby improving the interest of the player in the game.

  In the thirteenth embodiment, the display mode of the aura image OG and the expected degree display image KH is simply changed according to the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. For example, each time the number of reserved balls increases, the prefetch result may be determined, and the display mode may be determined in consideration of the determination result. More specifically, for example, when the prefetch result is a small hit, the display mode of the aura image OG or the expected degree display image KH is raised by one step, while when the prefetch result is a big hit, the maximum May be set to a display mode corresponding to the degree of expectation (for example, 6/6). With this configuration, it is possible to play the game by paying attention to the change in the display mode (suggested degree of expectation) during the execution of the charge time effect, so that the interest of the player in the game is further improved. Can be.

<Electrical configuration in thirteenth embodiment>
Next, details of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 314 (a) is a block diagram showing a configuration of the ROM 202 in the thirteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 314 (a), the ROM 202 in the thirteenth embodiment is different from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the twelfth embodiment in that the first random number table 202pa is replaced by the first random number table 202na. A small random number 13 table 202pb is provided instead of the small random number 12 table 202nb, and a second random number 13 table 202pc is provided instead of the second random number 7 table 202fc. The difference is that a jackpot type selection 13 table 202pd is provided instead of the jackpot type selection 12 table 202nd, and a variation pattern selection 13 table 202pe is provided instead of the variation pattern selection 12 table 202ne. .

  First, details of the first random number 13 table 202pa in the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 315 (a) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the first random number 13 table 202pa. As shown in FIG. 315 (a), in the first random number 13 table 202pa in the thirteenth embodiment, a range of values of one type of first random number counter C1 is defined in association with each set value. I have. That is, in the thirteenth embodiment, the special symbol low-probability state and the probable change state do not exist, and the jackpot lottery (special symbol lottery) is always executed with a constant jackpot probability.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 315 (a), for setting 1, “0 to 204” is defined in association with the range of the counter value (random value) of the first random number counter C1. For setting 2, "0 to 217" is defined as the range of the counter value (random value) of the first random number counter C1, and for setting 3, the counter of the first random number counter C1 is set. “0 to 233” is defined in association with the range of the value (random value), and “0 to 251” corresponds to the setting 4 in the range of the counter value (random value) of the first random number counter C1. For setting 5, “0 to 311” is defined in association with the range of the counter value (random value) of the first random number counter C1. Counter value of random number counter C1 "0-409" is defined in association with a range of random number). Therefore, the jackpot probability of the setting 1 in the low probability state of the special symbol is 1/320 (205/65536), the jackpot probability of the setting 2 is 1/301 (218/65536), and the jackpot probability of the setting 3 is It is 1/280 (234/65536), the jackpot probability of setting 4 is 1/260 (252/65536), the jackpot probability of setting 5 is 1/210 (312/65536), and the jackpot probability of setting 6 Is 1/160 (410/65536).

  Next, the details of the small random number 13 table 202pb in the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 315 (b) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the small hit random number 13 table 202pb in the thirteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 315 (b), the value of the first random number counter C1 is not associated with the first special symbol. Therefore, the probability of a small win in the lottery of the first special symbol is zero. On the other hand, for the second special symbol, "410 to 64634" is defined in association with the range of the counter value of the first random number counter C1. Therefore, the probability of a small win in the second special symbol lottery is 1 / 1.02 (64225/65536). Therefore. Taking into account the jackpot probability, the probability of a loss in the second special symbol lottery is 1/59 (setting 1) to 1/73 (setting 6). In other words, the lower the setting, the higher the probability of rushing into the chance zone in the time saving state (and setting a long fluctuation in the special symbol lottery), so that after the advantageous time saving state is set, Until the lottery based on the reserved balls of all the second special symbols retained in the state is completed, the probability of winning per V is higher in the low setting. Here, in the thirteenth embodiment, when a winning per V is won, the gaming state after the end of the per V is always set to an advantageous time saving state. Therefore, once the time saving state is set, the lower the setting, the easier the time saving state and the jackpot are repeated for a longer time (more times). Therefore, in an advantageous time-saving state, a novel game property of performing a game in expectation of a low setting can be realized, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  Next, details of the second random number table 202pc in the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 315 (c) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the second random number table 202pc in the thirteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 315 (c), the second random number 13 table 202pc in the thirteenth embodiment includes a random number value (second Only "0" is defined as the counter value of the random number counter C4. For this reason, in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol (normal state), the probability of winning in the ordinary symbol lottery is 1/300.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 315 (c), the second winning random number 13 table 202pc includes a random number value (second winning random number counter C4) determined to be a normal symbol hit in the normal symbol high-probability state (time saving state). "0 to 299" is defined as the counter value of the above. For this reason, in the low probability state (normal state) of the ordinary symbol, the probability of winning in the ordinary symbol lottery is 1/1 (300/300). As described above, in the thirteenth embodiment, the winning probability of the ordinary symbol in the ordinary symbol low-probability state (ordinary state) is configured to be extremely low. Thereby, even if it is attempted to execute the lottery of the second special symbol having a high small hit probability by right-handing in the normal state, it is difficult to hit the normal symbol, and the game ball is allowed to enter the second entrance 6400. Is difficult, so that it is possible to make the structure easier to lose than performing left-handed driving. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the irregular game method of right-handing in the normal state.

  Next, the details of the first hit type selection 13 table 202pd in the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The first hit type selection 13 table 202pd is a data table referred to for specifying (determining) the big hit type when the big hit is won, similarly to the first hit type selection 12 table 202nd in the twelfth embodiment. is there. FIG. 316 (a) is a block diagram showing a configuration of the first hit type selection 13 table 202pd.

  As shown in FIG. 316 (a), the first hit type selection 13 table 202pd in the thirteenth embodiment has a big hit when a special symbol lottery results in a big hit (a so-called “direct hit” occurs). In the case where a big hit has occurred based on the direct hit table 202pd1 for specifying (determining) the type and the fact that a V prize has occurred (the gaming ball has entered the V prize opening 6750f1 during the small hit game). And a V hitting table 202pd2 for specifying (determining) the jackpot type. First, the details of the direct hit table 202pd1 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 316 (b) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the direct hit table 202pd1. As shown in FIG. 316 (b), in the thirteenth embodiment, as a jackpot type that can be determined when a jackpot has been won in the lottery of the first special symbol (a direct hit has occurred), Two types of big hits, "big hit B13", are provided. The "big hit A13" is a big hit type (four round time-saving big hit) in which the number of rounds of the big hit is four, and the game state after the end of the big hit is set to the time saving state of five times regardless of the game state. . On the other hand, the "big hit B13" has four rounds of the big hit, and when the winning is performed in the normal state, the normal state is set again after the end of the big hit, and when the winning is performed during the time saving state, This is a jackpot type (four rounds regular jackpot) to which the number of times saved is five. Therefore, in the normal state, “big hit A13” is more advantageous to the player than “big hit B13” because the gaming state after the end of the big hit is more advantageous. In the time-saving state, no matter which jackpot is won, the advantageous time-saving state is set after the end of the jackpot, so that the degree of advantage is equal.

  As shown in FIG. 316 (b), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with the range of "0 to 64" and the "big hit A13", and the range of "65 to 99" is defined. Thus, "big hit B13" is defined in association. In other words, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the "big hit A13" is determined at a rate of 65% (65/100), and the "big hit B13" is determined at a rate of 35% (35/100).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 316 (b), the jackpot C13 is provided in the direct hit table 202pd1 as a jackpot type that can be determined when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery. The "big hit C13" has a number of rounds of big hits of 12 rounds. If the winning is made in the normal state, the normal state is set again after the jackpot is finished, and if the winning is made during the time saving state, the time is reduced. This is a jackpot type (four rounds regular jackpot) to which the number of times reduced by five is given. If you win the jackpot in the second special symbol lottery. 100% (100/100) "big hit C13" is determined.

  Next, details of the V hitting table 202pd2 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the V hitting table 202pd2 is for specifying (selecting) the type of the big hit executed based on the fact that the V winning has occurred in the small hitting game (the gaming ball has passed the V winning switch 6500e3). Is a data table in which the data is defined. FIG. 316 (c) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the V hitting table 202pd2. As shown in FIG. 316 (c), in the V hitting table 202pd2, three kinds of big hit types, "big hit D13", "big hit E13", and "big hit F13" are defined.

  As shown in FIG. 316 (c), “big hit D13” is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “0 to 49”. The “big hit D13” is a big hit type in which the number of rounds of the big hit is 12 rounds, and the game state after the end of the big hit is set to a time-saving state advantageous to the player regardless of the game state at the time of winning. The “big hit D13” is the most successful big hit type for the player because the number of rounds is the largest among all the big hit types, and the game state after the end of the big hit is also advantageous. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) of “0 to 99” that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with “big hit C7” is 50, The probability (ratio) that “big hit D13” is determined (selected) as the type of big hit that is started when a V winning occurs during execution of the small hit game is 50/100 (50%).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 316 (c), the "big hit E13" is defined in association with the hit of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "50 to 69". The "big hit E13" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds of the big hit is eight, and the game state after the end of the big hit is set to a time-saving state advantageous to the player regardless of the game state at the time of winning. The "big hit E13" has the second largest number of rounds after the "big hit C13" and the "big hit D13", and the game state after the end of the big hit is an advantageous time-saving state. , "Big hit D13", which is the second most advantageous jackpot type. It is also the most advantageous jackpot type in terms of the gaming state. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) “0 to 99” that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with “big hit E13” is 20, The probability (ratio) that “big hit E13” is determined (selected) as the type of big hit that is started when a V winning occurs during execution of the small hit game is 20/100 (20%).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 316 (c), the "big hit F13" is defined in association with the hit of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "70 to 99". The "big hit F13" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds of the big hit is four and the game state after the end of the big hit is set to a time-saving state advantageous to the player regardless of the game state at the time of winning. This "big hit F13" is the most disadvantageous in terms of the number of rounds, but is the most advantageous big hit type in terms of the gaming state. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) of “0 to 99” that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with “big hit F13” is 30. The probability (ratio) that “big hit F13” is determined (selected) as the type of big hit that is started when a V winning occurs during execution of the small hit game is 30/100 (30%).

  In addition, as described above, in the thirteenth embodiment, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, a small hit is won at a rate of about 98%, and a V prize is generated in one small hit game. The probability is 1/6. In addition, it is almost impossible to accumulate the reserved balls of the second special symbol unless the lottery of the second special symbol is deviated with a relatively low probability. Therefore, when the time saving state of the number of time savings of 5 is set, the small hitting game is executed 5 times and the ball is shifted to the normal state with the holding ball of the second special symbol being 0, or the V prize is completed within 5 times. In most cases, it occurs or the voltage becomes V. The probability of a V winning occurring within 5 small hits executed in the time reduction state is about 59.8% (1-5 / 6 × 5/6 × 5/6 × 5/6 × 5/6). Therefore, basically, once the time saving state is set, the jackpot is won at a rate of about 59.8% (more than 60% when the direct hit is also taken into account). In the case where the second special symbol is won directly, and in the case where the V winning is achieved, an advantageous time-saving state is always set again after the end of the big hit. An advantageous state in which the jackpot and the time saving state are repeated is formed. Therefore, the game can be performed with one goal being to shift to the time reduction state, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 317, details of the variation pattern selection 13 table 202pe in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. Here, although illustration is omitted, the fluctuation pattern selection 13 table 202pe in the thirteenth embodiment is a normal pattern 13 which is referred to in order to determine a fluctuation pattern when a special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state. Table 202pe1, 13 tables 202pe2 for time saving referred to to determine a variation pattern when a lottery of a special symbol is executed in the time saving state, and lottery of a special symbol in a normal state after clearing the RAM (after setting change). And a RAM clearing table 202pe3 which is referred to to determine a variation pattern when is executed. For convenience of explanation, first, details of the time saving 13 table 202pe2 will be described.

  FIG. 317 is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the 13 time reduction table 202pe2 in the thirteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 317, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is hit in the 13 tables for time saving 202pe, the variation type (variation) is applied to the entire range of the variation type counter CS1 regardless of the number of balls retained. As a pattern, a short-circuit fluctuation of 1000 ms is associated with the fluctuation time. On the other hand, when the lottery of the first special symbol is out of order, regardless of the number of retained balls, the outgoing short-time fluctuation of 1000 ms is defined as the fluctuation type with respect to the entire range of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. I have. Therefore, when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed in the time saving state, the fluctuation time is set to 1000 ms regardless of the lottery result.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 301, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a hit, a middle variation corresponding to a variation time of 5000 ms corresponds to a value of the variation type counter CS1 in a range of “0 to 49”. In addition, a long variation per 10,000 ms is defined in association with a value of the variation type counter CS1 in a range of “50 to 198”. In addition, as shown in FIG. 301, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is out of range, the out-of-range long fluctuation in which the fluctuation time is 300,000 ms is associated with the entire range in which the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take. Have been. Therefore, when the lottery of the second special symbol is lost in the time saving state, the second special symbol continues to fluctuate for 5 minutes, so that a chance zone in which the reserved ball of the second special symbol can be stored during that time is formed. Can be.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 301, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit, the fluctuation time is configured to be variable according to the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 301, if the number of retained balls in the second special symbol is 0, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 65”, and the variation type is the variation time. Is defined in association with the small hit variation A of 1000 ms, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined in association with the small hit variation B of 2000 ms as the variation type in the range of “66 to 132”. In addition, a small hit variation C of 3000 ms in variation time is defined as a variation type in association with a range of the variation type counter CS1 of “133 to 198”. That is, it is configured that the fluctuation time of 1 second, the fluctuation time of 2 seconds, and the fluctuation time of 3 seconds are selected at a ratio of approximately 1: 1: 1. For this reason, in a state where the number of reserved balls is 0, it is possible to configure so that a game method aiming at a small hit start timing that is easy to win a V from the arrangement of the distribution rotator 6750f is not established. The V winning rate in the state can be uniformly reduced to 1/6.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 301, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is one or more, the value of the variation type counter CS1 falls within the entire range that can be taken. On the other hand, a small hit variation A with a variation time of 1000 ms is defined in association. For this reason, if the reserved balls are accumulated up to the upper limit number in the chance zone, the fluctuation time is fixed at 1 second until the reserved balls become 0 (until the three reserved balls are digested). The interval at which the sphere reaches the distribution rotator 6750f can be made constant (7 second intervals). As a result, with respect to the sorting rotator 6750f that makes one round in 6 seconds, until the reserved ball becomes 0, the entry adjacent to the entrance that entered in the previous small hit in the direction of rotation is made in each small hit. A game ball can enter the ball opening. That is, in the small hitting game corresponding to the number of the reserved balls, it is possible to configure so that it is difficult to enter the same entrance, so that the possibility of winning a V can be improved. Therefore, when a chance to shift to the chance zone and accumulate the reserved balls is given, the sense of expectation for the V prize can be improved. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Although illustration is omitted, in the thirteenth embodiment, even in the normal state, the correspondence between the variation pattern of the second special symbol and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is the same except for the deviation. ing. Therefore, for example, even if a long variation is set due to the lottery of the second special symbol executed in a state where the number of time reductions is one, the holding ball of the second special symbol is released during the long variation. By accumulating, after the end of the long fluctuation (that is, after the end of the time saving state), it is possible to execute a small hit game with a high V winning rate. That is, a small hit game with a high V prize rate can be executed after the end of the chance zone regardless of the timing when the lottery of the second special symbol is lost, so that the small hit game is always performed until the time saving state ends. Can be expected. It should be noted that, in the normal state, if the lottery is lost in the second special symbol lottery, the fluctuation time is set to be one second and the short fluctuation is set. This is because even if a long swing is executed in the case of a miss in the normal state, the winning probability of the normal symbol is low and the reserved ball of the second special symbol cannot be accumulated, so the lottery of the special symbol is executed. In other words, it is intended to suppress a long useless period in which a reserved ball cannot be accumulated.

  Next, details of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 according to the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 314 (b) is a block diagram showing a configuration of the RAM 203 in the thirteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 314 (b), the RAM 203 in the thirteenth embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the twelfth embodiment (and the eleventh embodiment) (see FIG. 268 (b)) in the jackpot type. The difference is that a storage area 203pa and a V passing flag 203pb are added. In addition, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df, the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di, the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj, the positive change flag 203fa, the special figure 1 big hit flag 203mc, the special figure 2 big hit flag 203md, The difference is that the special figure 1 small hit flag 203me and the special figure 2 small hit flag 203mf are deleted. The deletion of these flags and counters is due to the elimination of the simultaneous variation function and the probability variation function.

  The jackpot type storage area 203pa is used to determine the jackpot type (type per V) set when the game ball that has won the lottery device 6750 enters the V winning opening 6750f1 during the execution of the small hit game. Is a storage area in which the data of the above is stored. In the big hit type storage area 203pa, when the change of the special symbol whose judgment result is the small hit stops, the data value corresponding to the big hit type corresponding to the judged small hit type is stored (FIG. 320). S36022). When a game ball enters the V winning opening 6750f1 in the lottery device 6750, at the end of the small hit, the start of the big hit of the type corresponding to the data value stored in the big hit type storage area 203pa is set (FIG. 324). S3311).

  The V passing flag 203pb is a flag indicating whether or not a V winning has been detected during the small hitting game. If the V passing flag 203pb is on, it indicates that the V winning has already been detected during the small hit game, and if it is off, it means that the V winning has not been detected. The V passing flag 203pb has an initial value set to off, and is set to on when a V winning is detected (see S3406 in FIG. 325). Further, at the end of the small hit in which the V winning is detected, the start of the big hit according to the small hit type is set, and thereafter, the setting is turned off (see S3312 in FIG. 324). With the V passing flag 203pb, it is possible to accurately determine whether or not to start a big hit at the end of the small hit game (ie, whether or not a V winning has occurred during the small hit game).

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the thirteenth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, with reference to FIG. 318, the details of the special symbol variation process 13 (S141) will be described. The special symbol variation process 13 (S141) is a process executed in place of the special symbol variation process 11 (FIG. 276, S121) in the twelfth embodiment (and the eleventh embodiment), and includes a first symbol display. This is a process for setting a special symbol variable display in the device 37.

  In the special symbol variation process 13 (S141), in the process of S251, the same process as the process of S251 of the special symbol variation process 11 (FIG. 276, S121) in the twelfth embodiment (and the eleventh embodiment) is executed. Is done.

  In the special symbol variation process 13 (S141) in the thirteenth embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S251 that the current time is not a big hit or a small hit (S251: No), the first symbol display device is executed. It is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is fluctuating (S10201). If the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not fluctuating (S10201: No), the first special symbol holding ball counter 203dd is displayed. A value (the number of times N1 of the variable display is held based on the lottery of the first special symbol) is acquired (S10202), and it is determined whether or not the acquired value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is larger than 0. (S10203).

  In the process of S10203, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is not 0 (that is, it is 1 or more) (S10203: Yes), the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd. Is subtracted by one (S10204), and a special figure 1 reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd changed by the calculation is set (S10205). The special figure 1 pending sphere number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is output by the MPU 201 to an external output process of a later-described main process 13 (see FIG. 322) (S1801). ) Is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the special figure 1 reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number of the RAM 223. It is stored in the counter 223c.

  After the special figure 1 reserved ball count command is set by the processing of S10205, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da is shifted (S10206). In the process of S10206, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 203dd to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, in each area, such as the first area on hold → the execution area, the second area on hold → the first area on hold, the third area on hold → the second area on hold, the fourth area on the hold → third area on hold, etc. The data is shifted, and the process proceeds to S10212.

  On the other hand, in the process of S10203, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is 0 (S10203: No), the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de (second The number of times the variable display is suspended based on the special symbol lottery N2) is acquired (S10207). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de is larger than 0 (S10208). If the value (N2) of the second special symbol retaining ball number counter 203de is not 0 (S10208: Yes), the value (N2) of the second special symbol retaining ball number counter 203de is subtracted by 1 (S10209) and changed by calculation. A special figure 2 reserved ball number command indicating the value of the performed second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de is set (S10210). The special figure 2 reserved sphere count command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is output to the external processing (S1801) of the main processing 13 (see FIG. 322) to be described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. ) Is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the special figure 2 reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de from the reserved figure number command and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number of the RAM 223. The value is stored in the counter 223c.

  After the special figure 2 reserved ball count command is set by the processing of S10210, the data stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db is shifted by the same method as the processing of S10206 (S10211).

  In the processing of S10212 executed after the processing of S10206 or S10211, the special symbol change start processing 13 for starting the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S10212), and this processing ends. The details of the special symbol change start process 13 (S10212) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S10201, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S10201: Yes), the change time counter for measuring the change time is updated (S10213), and the updated change time counter is updated. Based on the value, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S10214). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and the fluctuation time is determined. If has not elapsed (S10214: No), the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S10215), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S10214, if the fluctuating time of the fluctuating display being executed has elapsed (S10214: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S10216). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol change start process 13 (S10212) described later with reference to FIG. When the special symbol change start process 13 (S10212) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area. More specifically, whether or not a special symbol is a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1. If the special symbol is a big hit, the special symbol is set according to the value of the first hit type counter C2. Jackpot type is determined.

  After the processing of S10216 is completed, when the variable display being executed on the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result (the current lottery result) of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start processing is: It is determined whether it is a special symbol jackpot (S10217). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S10217: Yes), data corresponding to the current gaming state is stored in the winning state storage area 203mb (S10218), and the value of the time reduction counter 203h is reset to 0. (S10219). Next, the start of the big hit is set, and the big hit flag 203i is set to ON (S10220), and the processing shifts to S10225.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S10217, if the result of the current lottery is out of the special symbol (including the small hit) (S10217: No), the value of the time reduction counter 203h is a value larger than 0 (that is, the time reduction of the ordinary symbol). State is determined (S10221), and when it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (S10221: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 203h is updated by subtracting 1 (S10222), and the processing is performed. Is shifted to S10223. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203h is 0 in the process of S10221 (S10221: No), the process of S10222 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S10223.

  In the process of S10223, it is determined whether or not the current lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit (S10223). If it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit (S10223: Yes), the start of the small hit is performed. A small hit start process for setting is executed (S10224), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S10223, when it is determined that the current lottery result of the special symbol is not a small hit (that is, a loss) (S10223: No), the process of S10224 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S10225. I do.

  In the process of S10225, a stop command indicating a stop type is set, and the process ends (S10225). The stop command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1801) of the main process 13 (see FIG. 322) described later executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the state command, the sound lamp control device 113 sets a stop symbol of the third symbol based on the stop type indicated by the stop command.

  By executing the special symbol variation process 13 (see FIG. 318), it is possible to configure to execute only one of the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol. Also, the lottery of the first special symbol can be executed with priority over the lottery of the second special symbol.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 319, details of the special symbol change start process 13 (S10212), which is one of the special symbol change processes 13 (FIG. 318, S141), will be described. In the special symbol change start process 13 (S10212), first, data stored in the execution area is acquired (S321), and the value of the first random number counter C1 and the second The lottery result of the big hit lottery is acquired with reference to the per-random number 13 table 202pa (see FIG. 315, (a)) and the per-random number 13 table 202pb (see FIG. 315, (b)) (S322). Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery of the special symbol acquired by the process of S322 is a jackpot of the special symbol (S323). The data indicating the current jackpot type is stored in the storage area 203pa (S324). Then, the display mode at the time of the big hit is set according to the current big hit type (S325). In the process of S325, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (the lighting state of the LED 37a) is set according to the type of the big hit. The big hit type is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined (S326). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S326, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect on the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the big hit symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the table corresponding to the current game state in the fluctuation pattern selection 13 table 202pe, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is calculated. The corresponding fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is determined. When the process of S326 ends, the process moves to the process of S332.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S323 that the current special symbol lottery is not a big hit (S323: No), then it is determined whether the current special symbol lottery is a small hit (S327). If it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit (S327: Yes), the display mode at the time of the small hit is set (S328). When the processing of S328 is completed, a fluctuation pattern at the time of a small hit is determined (S329). When the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of S329, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation effect on the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at a combination of symbols indicating a small hit. The fluctuation time of the third symbol until the operation is performed is determined. At this time, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the table corresponding to the current game state in the fluctuation pattern selection 13 table 202pe, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is calculated. The corresponding fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is determined. When the processing in S329 ends, the flow shifts to the processing in S332.

  On the other hand, in the process of S327, when it is determined that the current lottery of the special symbol is not a small hit (S327: No), a display mode (missing symbol) at the time of departure is set (S330). A variation pattern at the time of departure is determined (S331). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, as in the process of S329, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern selection 13 table 202pe corresponding to the current game state, and the variation is determined. A variation pattern (variation time) corresponding to the value of the type counter CS1 is determined. When the processing in S331 ends, the flow shifts to the processing in S332.

  When any of the processes in S326, S329, and S331 is completed, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in any of the processes in S326, S329, and S331 is set (S332). ). Next, a counter value corresponding to the fluctuation time of the current fluctuation pattern is set in the fluctuation time counter (S333). Then, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in any of the processes of S325, S328, and S330 is set (S334). These fluctuation pattern command and stop type command are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and are used in an external output process (S1801) of a main process 13 (see FIG. 322) to be described later. It is transmitted to the device 113. When the processing of S334 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing 13 (see FIG. 318).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 320, details of the small hit start process (S10225) described above will be described. The small hit start process (S10225) is, as described above, a process for starting a small hit when a special symbol lottery results in a small hit. In the small hit start processing (S10225), first, the operation scenario (see FIG. 311) of the lottery device 3750 in the small hit game is read out (S3601), and then the current small hit is stored in the big hit type storage area 203pa. In step S3602, data indicating a jackpot type that is started when a V winning occurs is stored. More specifically, in the process of S3602, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 49”, the big hit type D13 (12 rounds hourly big hit) is stored as the big hit type, and the first hit type is stored. If the value of the type counter C2 is in the range of "50 to 69", the jackpot E13 (eight rounds of time and short jackpot) is stored as the jackpot type, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "70 to 99". If so, the jackpot F13 (4 rounds time-saving jackpot) is stored as the jackpot type. When the process of S3603 ends, the start of the small hit is set, and the process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 321, the contents of the ordinary symbol variation process 13 (S142) will be described. This ordinary symbol variation process 13 (S142) is a process executed in place of the ordinary symbol variation process (FIG. 48, S106) in the twelfth embodiment (and the first embodiment).

  Of the ordinary symbol variation process 13 (S142), the processes of S1101 to S1113, S1115 to 1118 and S1121 are respectively performed by the ordinary symbol variation process (FIG. 48, S106) in the twelfth embodiment (and the first embodiment). The same processes as those of S1101 to S1113, S1115 to 1118 and S1121 are executed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 321, in the ordinary symbol variation process 13 (S142) in the thirteenth embodiment, after executing the process of S1112 or S1113, the variation time of the ordinary symbol is determined to be 30 seconds (S1131). The fluctuation time of 30 seconds is a period in which it is difficult to increase the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol even if the player keeps right-handing continuously in an advantageous time-saving state. In other words, in the time-saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is changed to the game state so that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol cannot be increased unless the special symbol is removed by lottery and the departure long fluctuation is set. It is fixed for 30 seconds. Thereby, when a lottery of the second special symbol is lost during the time reduction state, great joy can be given to the player.

  In the processing of S1118, if the time reduction counter 203h is not on (is off), that is, if it is determined that the current state is the low probability state of the ordinary symbol (S1118: No), the opening time of the electric accessory and The number of times is set to “0.2 seconds × 1 time” (S1133). On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S1118 that the time reduction counter 203h is set to ON (S1118: Yes), the opening time and the number of times of the electric accessory are set to “0.5 seconds × 1 time” ( S1132). The opening time of 0.5 seconds × 1 time makes it difficult to allow two or more game balls to enter the second entrance 6400 (a reserved ball of the second special symbol per normal symbol). It will be difficult to obtain) is composed of length. After executing the processing of S1132 or S1133, the process proceeds to the processing of S1121.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 322, details of the main processing 13 executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. The main process 13 is a process executed instead of the main process (see FIG. 55) in the twelfth embodiment (and the first embodiment).

  Of the main processing 13, the processing of S1801 to S1803 and S1806 to 1816 respectively correspond to the processing of S1801 to S1803 and S1806 to 1816 of the main processing (FIG. 55) in the twelfth embodiment (and the first embodiment). The same processing is performed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 322, in the main process 13 of the thirteenth embodiment, after executing the process of S1803, the main process 13 replaces the big hit control process (see FIG. 56) of the twelfth embodiment (and the first embodiment). The big hit control process 13 is executed (S1841). Details of the jackpot control process 13 (S1841) will be described later with reference to FIG. After the process of S1841 is completed, a small hit control process for executing various controls during execution of the small hit game is executed (S1842), and the process proceeds to S1806. Details of the small hit control process (S1842) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the details of the jackpot control process 13 (S1841), which is one of the main processes 13 (FIG. 322), will be described with reference to FIG. The jackpot control process 13 (S1841) is a process executed in place of the jackpot control process (S1804 in FIG. 56) in the twelfth embodiment (and the first embodiment) described above, and includes various processes during execution of the jackpot game. This is a process for executing control.

  In the big hit control process 13 (S1841), in each of the processes S1901 to S1912 and S1916 to 1918, the big hit control processes (S1801 and S1904 in FIG. 56, S1804) in the twelfth embodiment (and the first embodiment) are respectively performed. The same processes as those in S1916 to S1918 are executed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 323, in the jackpot control process 13 (S1841) in the thirteenth embodiment, in the process of S1912, when it is determined that the current time is the end of the jackpot (S1912: Yes), the winning time is determined. The data of the state storage area 203mb is read (S1991), and the value of the time reduction counter 203h is updated according to the gaming state corresponding to the read data of the winning state storage area 203mb and the current big hit type (S1992). , To S1916.

  Next, the content of the small hit control process (S1842), which is one of the processes in the main process 13 (FIG. 322), will be described with reference to FIG. In the small hit control process (S1842), first, it is determined whether or not the present time is the start timing of the small hit (S3301). In the process of S3301, when the start of the small hit is set in the small hit start process (see FIG. 320), it is determined that the timing is the start timing of the small hit.

  If it is determined in the processing of S3301 that it is the start timing of the small hit (S3301: Yes), a small hit opening command indicating the start of the small hit opening period is set (S3302), and the small hit flag 203dg is turned on. (S3303), the start of the operation scenario for small hits is set (S3304), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3301 that it is not the timing of starting the small hit (S3301: No), then, it is determined whether the small hit flag 203dg is on (that is, whether the small hit is in progress) ( If it is determined that the small hit flag 203dg is off (S3305) (S3305: No), the present process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the small hit flag 203dg is ON (S3305: Yes), it means that the small hit game is being executed, and it is next whether the small hit end timing is reached (ie, , The end timing of the ending period) (S3306). If it is determined that the end timing of the small hit is reached (S3305: Yes), the end of the small hit is set by turning off the small hit flag 203dg. It is set (S3308). Next, it is determined whether or not the V passing flag 203pb is on (S3309). If it is determined that the V passing flag 203pb is on (S3309: Yes), the V winning has been detected in the current small hit. Therefore, the value of the time reduction counter 203h is reset to 0 (S3310), the start of the jackpot of the type corresponding to the data stored in the jackpot type storage area 203pa is set (S3311), and V passing is performed. The flag 203pb is set to off (S3312), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S3309, if it is determined that the V passing flag 203pb is off (S3309: No), it means that no V winning has been detected, and therefore, a big hit game based on the V winning is set. The processing is skipped from S3310 to S3312, and the processing ends.

  In the process of S3306, when it is determined that the timing is not the end timing of the small hit (S3306: No), the entry into the V winning opening 3750f1 is monitored, and when the entry is detected, the occurrence of the V winning is determined. A V-pass detection process for storing is executed (S3307), and this process ends. By executing the small hit control process (see FIG. 324), the big hit game can be started only when the V winning is detected during the execution of the small hit game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 325, the contents of the V passage detection processing (S3307), which is one of the small hit control processing (FIG. 324, S1842), will be described. As described above, this V passage detection processing (S3307) is processing for monitoring the incoming ball into the V winning opening 3750f1 and storing the occurrence of the V winning when the incoming ball is detected.

  As shown in FIG. 325, in the V passage detection process (S3307), first, it is determined whether or not the V passage flag 203pb is on (S3401), and if it is determined that the V passage flag 203pb is on ( S3401: Yes), since the ball entry (passing) into the V winning opening has already been detected, which means that monitoring of the incoming ball to the V winning opening 3750f1 is not required, and thus the present process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the V passing flag 203pb is off (S3401: No), it is determined whether or not a ball entry (pass) to the V winning opening 3750f1 is detected (S3402), and the V winning is achieved. If it is determined that the incoming ball (passing) to the mouth 3750f1 has not been detected (S3402: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S3402, when it is determined that a ball entry to the V winning opening 3750f1 has been detected (S3402: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the V winning period is in effect (S3403). If it is outside (S3403: No), an error command is set (S3404) because there is a possibility that the game ball has entered (passed) the V winning opening 3750f1 due to fraud or the like. finish.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3403, when it is determined that the current time is within the V validity period (S3403: Yes), the V passing command is set (S3405), and then the V passing flag 203pb is set to ON (S3406). ), End this processing.

  According to the V passage detection processing, when a V prize occurs, the occurrence of the V prize can be stored by setting the V passage flag 203pb to ON. Whether it is possible or not can be accurately determined.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the thirteenth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 326 and 327. First, the contents of the variable display setting process 13 (S4161) in the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. This variable display setting process 13 (S4161) is a process executed in place of the variable display setting process 11 (FIG. 295, S4132) in the twelfth embodiment (and the eleventh embodiment) described above.

  In the variable display setting processing 13 (S4161), the processing of S5231 is the same as the processing of S5231 of the variable display setting processing 11 (FIGS. 295, S4132) in the twelfth embodiment (and the eleventh embodiment). Is done.

  As shown in FIG. 326, in the variable display setting process 13 (S4161) in the thirteenth embodiment, first, it is determined whether the variable start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S5281). If it is determined that the variation start flag 223d is off (S5281: No), the process proceeds to S5285 because the special figure variation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110. On the other hand, if it is determined that the change start flag 223d is on (S5281: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the change number counter 223fc (S5231), and the change start flag 223d is set to off (S5282). Next, an effect mode setting process 13 for setting an effect mode according to the fluctuation pattern type notified by the fluctuation pattern command is executed (S5283), and the data in the winning information storage area 223b is shifted (S5284), and S5285. Move to the processing of. Details of effect mode setting process 13 (S5283) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S5285, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e is set to ON (S5285), and if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not set to ON (S5285: No), the process ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is set to ON (S5285: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is set to OFF (S5286), and a display stop type command is set based on the stop type extracted from the command. (S5287), this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 327, the contents of the rendering mode setting process 13 (S5283) will be described. The effect mode setting process 13 (S5283) is a process executed in place of the effect mode setting process 12 (see FIG. 304) in the twelfth embodiment.

  In each of the effect mode setting processes 13 (S5283), S8201, S8207, S8208, and S8281 are performed in S8201, S8207, S8208, and S8281, respectively, of the effect mode setting process 12 (see FIG. 304) in the twelfth embodiment. The same processing as the above processing is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 327, in the effect mode setting process 13 (S5283) in the thirteenth embodiment, when it is determined that the current state is not the normal state in the process of S8201 (S8201: No), It is determined whether or not the variation pattern is a long variation (S18201). In the process of S18201, when it is determined that the current variation pattern is not a long variation (S18201: No), the process proceeds to S8207. On the other hand, in the process of S18201, if it is determined that the current variation pattern is a long variation (S18201: Yes), an effect mode corresponding to the charge effect (see FIG. 313) is determined (S18202), and the process of S8208 is performed. Move to. By executing the charge effect, the player can easily understand that the player can play the game with the aim of increasing the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol by right-handing during the chance zone (charge time). be able to.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment, in the time-saving state where the lottery of the second special symbol is more advantageous than the normal state (the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed), It was configured such that the V prize occurred at a rate of 1/6. When a V-prize occurs, a big-hit is started after the end of the small-hit, and the game state after the end of the big-hit becomes an advantageous time-saving state again. Therefore, pay attention to whether or not a V-prize occurs in the small-hit game. A game can be played. In addition, in the thirteenth embodiment, a chance zone in which a reserve ball of the second special symbol can be stored up to the upper limit number is formed when the player wins in the time saving state. By executing the right hit continuously in the chance zone and accumulating the reserved balls to the maximum, a small hit game with a higher V prize rate than usual is executed, so a special wish for a strong hope that the player will lose in the time saving state It is possible to realize a great game. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be further improved. In the thirteenth embodiment, the higher the setting (the higher the jackpot probability), the lower the probability of departure. Therefore, when shifting to the time-saving state, the lower setting becomes the chance zone. The possibility of migration is increased. In other words, the lower the setting, the higher the degree of advantage in the time saving state, so that when shifting to the time saving state, it is possible to realize a very special and novel gameplay that makes it hope that the setting is lower. it can. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the player in the game.

  In the thirteenth embodiment, when a lottery of the first special symbol is lost during the time saving state, a long variation (5 minutes) is set, and only during the long variation. Although it was configured to be able to store the reserved balls of the second special symbol, a period during which the reserved balls of the second special symbol can be stored (that is, the game balls are distributed to the V winning opening 6750f1 by the distribution device 6750). The period during which control is performed so as to be easily performed is not limited to this. For example, the configuration may be such that the reserved balls of the second special symbol are easily accumulated even during the execution of the jackpot game. With such a configuration, a situation in which the player is likely to be assigned to the V winning opening 6750f1 immediately after the end of the jackpot is likely to occur, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. In addition, for example, when a direct hit is won in the time reduction state, by increasing the fluctuation time of the direct hit (for example, to 5 minutes), a state in which a V winning is likely to occur after the end of the direct hit is formed. You may. In this case, the higher the setting, which is easier to win in a direct hit, the higher the degree of advantage, so that the player can be made to think that he / she wants to play the game with the pachinko machine 10 with the higher setting.

  In the thirteenth embodiment, in the situation where one or more reserve balls of the second special symbol are present, each time a small hit game is executed, a game ball enters the previous small hit (distribution rotator). The fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set (set to 1 second) so that the game ball can easily enter the entrance that is adjacent to the entrance in the rotation direction with respect to the entrance (distributed by 6750f). Although the configuration has been described, it is not always necessary to set the fluctuation time during which the ball easily enters the ball entrance adjacent in the rotation direction. The behavior when the small hit game is executed consecutively in the situation where the reserved balls are accumulated, is arbitrarily determined within a range that is more advantageous than the case where the small hit game is executed the same number of times without holding For example, even if a fluctuating time (for example, 7/6 seconds) in which it is easy to enter the next two entrances in the rotation direction with respect to the entrance that entered in the previous small hit is set. Good.

  In the thirteenth embodiment, in the lottery device 3750 that performs a lottery to determine whether or not a jackpot is to be won by the entered game ball, the possibility that the V prize is generated is increased as the setting becomes lower. It is not limited. For example, the present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine 10 having a specification in which a probability variable lottery device for performing a lottery during a jackpot game is provided in a gaming state after a jackpot (either a low probability state of a special symbol or a probability variation state). Good. Specifically, if at least one game ball that has entered the probability variable lottery device that allows game balls to enter during the execution of the jackpot game enters the V winning opening, the state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot May be set to a special symbol probable change state, while the special symbol is set to a low probability state when no V winning occurs during the jackpot game. Then, the lower the setting, the lower the jackpot probability, but the configuration may be such that the ratio of the jackpot types in which the probability variable lottery device is operated in the operation pattern in which the V prize is likely to occur becomes higher. With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the fourteenth embodiment, a chance zone (long fluctuation) in which a situation in which a V prize is likely to occur in a small hitting game (a state in which a reserved ball has accumulated up to an upper limit value) is likely to be formed in the case of a loss in a time saving state. Is set, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the normal state, even if the lottery of the first special symbol can be won with a smaller probability (for example, the probability of 1/100) than the lottery of the second special symbol, it is possible to win a small hit, and then a predetermined condition is satisfied. May be configured to form a chance zone. Specifically, for example, when two consecutive small hits are won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the fluctuation time is configured to be extremely long, and by right-handing during that time, during the time reduction state, It may be configured such that a reserved ball of the second special symbol can be stored like a set chance zone. With such a configuration, even if a V winning does not occur in the small winning game of the first special symbol, the V winning is achieved if the first special symbol lottery results in a small winning after the small winning game is completed. Since it is possible to obtain a chance to easily occur, it is possible to play the game by paying attention to the result of the first special symbol lottery after the small hit. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<14th embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described thirteenth embodiment, the jackpot lottery of the special symbol and the lottery for determining a variation pattern for indicating the result of the jackpot lottery are executed with reference to different random numbers. Was configured as follows. That is, the big hit lottery is executed by comparing the value of the first random number counter C1 with the first hit type selection 13 table 202pa, and the lottery for determining the fluctuation pattern is performed by comparing the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. , The fluctuation pattern selection 13 table 202pe.

  On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 of the fourteenth embodiment is configured to execute the special symbol jackpot lottery and the lottery for determining the variation pattern based on the same random number value. Then, a special outlier variation pattern is selected as an outlier variation pattern corresponding to a random number value that becomes a hit in some set values and becomes outlier in some set values. In other words, the configuration is such that the set value can be estimated (narrowed down) when an out-of-place variation pattern that is selected only with some set values is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to cause the player to play a game while paying attention to the type of the variation pattern that is executed when the player loses the game.

  Further, in the fourteenth embodiment, the execution ratio of the specific effect (winning rate suggestion effect) capable of suggesting the setting increases as the situation becomes more disadvantageous for the player. In other words, the execution rate of the winning rate suggestion effect increases as the number of times that the game cannot be shifted to the advantageous game state after the end of the jackpot (a probability change state that continues until the next jackpot or the number of time savings is 100) continues. It was constituted so that it might become. This makes it possible to remind the player to start the game in the pachinko machine 10 in which the disadvantageous situation continues for a long time, so that the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  Although details will be described later, in the fourteenth embodiment, four types of game states of a normal state, a time saving state, a probable change state, and a latent state are provided, and the normal state and the latent state are disadvantageous. It is configured as a gaming state. That is, in the normal state and the latent state, even if the electric accessory 6400a is hard to be opened and right-handed, it is difficult to execute the lottery of the second special symbol (the game is executed by executing the lottery of the first special symbol by left-handing). It is necessary to advance the game). In addition, in the disadvantageous game state, even if the player wins the probability change jackpot, a small percentage of time savings (for example, 8 times) is set at a high rate. It is configured such that it is difficult to shift to an advantageous probable change state that continues up to the jackpot. With such a configuration, it is possible to realize a novel playability in which a game is played with a strong desire to win a jackpot in a small number of times (8 times). Further, in the fourteenth embodiment, when a jackpot is won, a high ratio (90% ratio) is set, and a special symbol high probability state (latent state or probable change state) is set after the jackpot. Instead, the upper limit number (for example, 11 times) is provided for the number of consecutive times (probable change limit number) of the special symbol high probability state. That is, when the number of times of the probability change is reached, the special symbol state after the end of the big hit is forcibly set to the low probability state of the special symbol, even if the winning of the probability variable big hit is achieved. This makes it difficult to predict the gaming state after the end of the jackpot, thereby realizing a deep gaming ability.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the fourteenth embodiment is different in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment in that the board configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed. , The configuration of the ROM 202 and the RAM 223 of the sound ramp control device 113 is partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 It is partially changed and the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the following. This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the thirteenth embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 328 is a diagram showing a board configuration of the game board 13 in the fourteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 328, the gaming board 13 in the fourteenth embodiment is different from the board configuration of the gaming board 13 in the thirteenth embodiment (see FIG. 307) in that the lottery device 6750 is deleted. The difference is that various movable members (accessories) capable of executing a predetermined effect operation are provided for each part of the game board 13.

  Next, an operation unit 300 provided with various movable members will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 329 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 300, and FIG. 330 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit 300 when the disassembled operation unit 300 is viewed from the front. As shown in FIGS. 329 and 330, the operation unit 300 has one side (the front side in FIG. 330) opened from the bottom wall 311 and the outer wall 312 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall 311. And a rear case 310 formed in a box shape. The rear case 310 is formed in a rectangular frame shape in a front view by forming a rectangular opening 311a in the center of the bottom wall 311. The opening 311a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 328) (that is, in which the third symbol display device 81 can be arranged).

  In the operation unit 300, the swing operation unit 400, the first slide operation unit 500, the box-shaped unit 600, the decorative accessory unit 700, and the second slide operation unit 800 are accommodated in the internal space of the rear case 310, respectively. It is configured as one unit. Specifically, the second slide operation unit 800 is formed to have an outer shape that is slightly smaller than the shape formed by the inner surface of the outer wall 312 of the rear case 310, and contacts the inner surface of the outer wall 312 while Is disposed on the bottom wall portion 311 in a manner surrounded by a circle. In the assembled state (see FIG. 329), the second slide operation unit 800 has a rectangular opening at a position corresponding to the opening 311a of the rear case 310 in a front view.

  The swing operation unit 400, the first slide operation unit 500, the box-shaped unit 600, and the decoration accessory unit 700 are disposed on the front side of the second slide operation unit 800 in a stacked state, respectively. (See FIG. 329). As described above, in the present embodiment, a predetermined operation unit (for example, the second slide operation unit 800) and another operation unit (for example, the first slide operation unit 500) are stacked on the front side in a stacked state. Since it is provided, a predetermined operation unit can be shielded by another operation unit in a front view. In other words, when the game board 13 (see FIG. 328) is formed of a light-transmitting material and the player can visually recognize the operation unit disposed on the back side of the game board 13, the predetermined operation unit Can be visually recognized by the player, and other parts can be shielded from the player by other operation units. Accordingly, it is not necessary to design the predetermined effect member shielded by the other operation units on the assumption that the entire effect member is visually recognized by the player, so that the degree of freedom in the design can be improved. .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 331 and FIG. 332, an outline of the operation mode of the upright object 400 and the first slide operation unit 500 will be described. In the description of FIGS. 331 and 332, FIGS. 329 and 330 are appropriately referred to.

  331 and 332 are front views of the operation unit 300. FIG. Note that FIG. 331 shows a state in which the upright part 410 and the arm member 420 of the swing operation unit 400 are arranged at the extended position, and FIG. 332 shows a state in which the tilting part 510 of the first slide operation unit 500 is arranged at the extended position. Each state is shown in the figure. As shown in FIG. 331, the swing operation unit 400 includes an arm member 420 whose base end is pivotally supported so as to swing and a swing end side opposite to the base end of the arm member 420. Erection member 410 that is pivotally supported, and moves these arm members 420 and erection member 410 between the retracted position (origin position) shown in FIG. 329 and the extended position shown in FIG. 331. Let it. At the evacuation position (origin position) shown in FIG. 329, the upright member 410 and the arm member 420 are retreated below the opening 311a of the rear case 310, and are invisible to the player (see FIG. 328). On the other hand, in the overhang position shown in FIG. 331, the arm member 420 is lifted, and the upright member 410 is arranged at the center of the opening 311a of the rear case 310 (that is, at the front of the third symbol display device 81).

  As shown in FIG. 332, the first sliding operation unit 500 includes a tilting member 510 that is slid obliquely downward, and a rotation that can rotate clockwise and counterclockwise around the rotation shaft 520a as a rotation axis. An accessory 520 is provided. The tilting role object 510 operates between the retracted position (origin position) shown in FIG. 329 and the extended position shown in FIG. At the retracted position (origin position) shown in FIG. 329, the tilting role object 510 is retracted to the right of the opening 311a of the rear case 310 (see FIG. 328). On the other hand, in the overhang position shown in FIG. 332, the tilting role object 510 is disposed at the center of the opening 311a of the rear case 310 (that is, at the front of the third symbol display device 81).

  As described above, the game board 13 in the fourteenth embodiment is provided with a plurality of movable members (a variety of role members such as the standing role member 410 and the tilting role member 510), and can perform various staging operations. It is configured to be executable. As a result, the effect of the effect can be enhanced, and the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 333, a description will be given of a characteristic effect mode in the fourteenth embodiment. In the fourteenth embodiment, in the normal state and the latent state, which are relatively disadvantageous to the player, the degree of expectation (winning rate) of winning a jackpot in a special symbol lottery of 100 times or less as one type of the variable display effect is shown. It is configured to be able to execute a winning rate suggestion effect that informs (indicates) the player. Here, in the fourteenth embodiment, as described above, in both the normal state and the latent state, it is extremely difficult to execute a special symbol lottery even if the player strikes right (the game must be advanced by left strike). A) disadvantageous game state. That is, since the behavior of the pachinko machine 10 other than the jackpot probability (operation of the pachinko machine 10) is common between the normal state and the latent state, it is basically the normal state or the latent state. It will be difficult to identify. However, if it is a specification that you do not know at all whether it is a normal state or a latent state, if you lose consecutively by special symbol lottery, the normal state with a low jackpot probability may be set The player has a feeling of anxiety as to whether or not the player is motivated to play the game, despite the fact that the latent state, which has a slightly higher degree of advantage than the normal state, has a slightly higher degree of advantage, is set. And the player may quit the game. That is, there is a possibility that the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 is reduced. Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment, by executing the winning rate suggestion effect, it is configured to be able to identify the normal state or the latent state based on the effect content. With this, it is possible to remind the player to continue the game until the winning rate suggestion effect is executed, and to improve the motivation for the game when the effect content has a high possibility of a latent state. be able to. Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. In the fourteenth embodiment, the rate at which the number of time savings is set to 0 is lower when a jackpot is won in the normal state than when the jackpot is won in the latent state. This can prevent the normal state from being excessively disadvantageous as compared with the latent state, thereby suppressing a decrease in the operation rate in the normal state.

  FIG. 333 (a) is a diagram showing an effect mode at the start of a winning rate suggestion effect. When the execution of the winning rate suggestion effect is set in the normal state or the latent state, the boy with a beeper displayed in the small area Ds2 is imitated while all the third symbols are fluctuated and displayed at high speed. An effect is produced in which the character 710 that has made a speech saying “the winning rate within 100 games is... The dialogue emitted by the character 710 after the dialogue indicates a probability (winning rate) of winning a jackpot during 100 games (that is, until 100 special symbol lotteries are completed). Since the probability of a big hit in the latent state is higher than in the normal state, a higher winning rate is more likely to be suggested in the latent state.

  FIG. 333 (b) is a diagram showing a display mode when a winning rate is suggested by the character 710 in a winning rate suggesting effect. As shown in FIG. 333 (b), in the winning rate suggestion effect, an effect is executed in which the character 710 suggests a numerical value of the winning rate to the player by dialogue. FIG. 333 (b) exemplifies a situation where a dialogue “30% over” indicating that the winning rate is at least 30% or more is issued. Although the details will be described later, the effect mode in which the dialogue “30% over” is issued is configured such that the probability of being selected in the latent state is higher than in the normal state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that the degree of expectation of the latent state is high, and it is possible to improve the motivation of the player for the game. In the fourteenth embodiment, the jackpot probabilities of the setting 1 in the low probability state and the high probability state of the special symbol are set to 1/200 and 1 / 55.6. In the low probability state of the special symbol, the ratio of winning the 1/200 jackpot (the winning rate) before the 100 special symbol lotteries are executed is about 39.4%, so the "30% over" winning is achieved. The rate is a numerical value that is applicable even in the normal state of setting 1. As a result, even if a winning rate of “30% over” is suggested in the normal state where the jackpot probability is low, a behavior of winning the jackpot at a rate exceeding 30% can be realized, and therefore the player can be realized. Can be suppressed from having a distrust of the user.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 334 (a), another mode of the winning rate suggestion effect in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. Here, in the winning rate suggestion effect according to the fourteenth embodiment, the theoretical value of the rate of winning a jackpot (winning rate within 100 games) must be maintained before 100 special symbol lotteries are executed. In addition, the winning rate is suggested. The winning rate within the 100 games varies according to the setting. More specifically, in the fourteenth embodiment, in the low probability state of the special symbol, the jackpot probability of setting 1 is set to 1/200, while the jackpot probability of setting 6 is set to 1/90. ing. Therefore, the winning rate within 100 games of the setting 1 is about 39.4%, while the winning rate within 100 games of the setting 6 is about 67.3%. Therefore, for example, when the winning rate of “40% over” is reported in the normal state, the setting 1 is denied. Conversely, if the winning rate of “40% over” is reported in setting 1, the normal state is denied (the latent state is determined). As described above, in the fourteenth embodiment, in consideration of the difference in the jackpot winning rate between each setting and the game state word, in the winning rate suggestion effect, the specific production mode (within 100 games within the specific setting or the passing place state) When a win rate higher than the win rate is executed), a part of the situation (a part of the setting or the normal state) is denied. As a result, in the winning rate suggestion effect, in addition to being able to suggest to the player whether the game is in the normal state or in the latent state, it is also possible to indicate the set value. Can be realized.

  FIG. 334 (a) is a diagram illustrating an effect mode of a winning rate suggestion effect in which the setting 6 is determined. As shown in FIG. 334 (a), the setting 6 is configured so that a winning rate of “66.6% over” can be reported as a winning rate suggesting effect. By setting all the places (the tens place, the ones place, and the one place after the decimal point) of the value indicating the winning rate to “6”, it is possible to indicate to the player that the setting is 6. Therefore, it is possible to realize an effect mode that is easier to understand. The effect mode of “66.6% over” is configured to be able to be executed only in the normal state in setting 6. In the normal state, the 100 game winning rate of setting 5 (big hit probability 1/120) is about 56.7%, and the 100 game winning rate of setting 6 (big hit probability 1/90) is about 67.3%. In a case where “66.6% over” is notified in the normal state of the setting 6, the behavior of winning a jackpot at a rate exceeding 66.6% can be realized. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from having a distrust.

  In the fourteenth embodiment, as the situation becomes more disadvantageous for the player, the state shifts to an advantageous game state (either an advantageous game state (a probable change state that continues until the next jackpot, or a time reduction state where the number of time savings is 100)). It is configured to increase the probability that the winning rate suggestion effect will be executed as the number of consecutive times (the number of through times) that could not be increased increases. That is, it is configured such that the ratio at which the setting is suggested is increased. Thereby, it is possible to make the player think that he / she wants to continue the game in a situation that is disadvantageous to the player, so that the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  Next, a setting suggestion effect in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. In the fourteenth embodiment, the main controller 110 is provided with an out-of-order variation pattern (variation type) that can be selected (or easily selected) with only some set values. More specifically, an outlier fluctuation selected only at setting 2 or higher (setting 1 negative super reach), an outlier fluctuation selected only at setting 4 or higher (high setting confirmed super reach), or an outlier fluctuation selected only at setting 6 (Setting 6 confirmed super reach) is provided. In addition, out-of-place fluctuations (even suggestion super reach) in which even-numbered settings are easier to select than odd-numbered settings, and out-of-place fluctuations (radix check super reach) in which odd-numbered settings are more easily selected than even-numbered settings are provided. . On the sound lamp control device 113 side, when these change types are notified, as in the case of the eleventh embodiment, as a change pattern effect, by the numbers attached to the third symbols on the left and right when reach occurs, It is configured to suggest a variation pattern type (that is, a set value) (execute a setting suggestion effect).

  FIG. 334 (b) is a diagram illustrating an example of a variation pattern effect (effect mode) when the variation type (variation pattern) of the high setting confirmed super reach is notified from the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 334 (b), when the high setting confirmation super reach is executed, a third symbol with a numeral “4” and a numeral with a numeral “5” are attached to the right symbol column. While the third symbol and the third symbol with the number "6" are stopped vertically in a row, the third symbol with the number "6" is assigned to the left symbol column. , The third symbol with the number “5” and the third symbol with the number “4” are stopped in a vertical line, and a reach effect is executed. That is, the reach of the third symbol with the number “4” is generated in the downward direction, the reach of the third symbol with the number “5” is generated in the horizontal direction, and “6” is obtained in the upward direction. The reach effect (so-called triple reach effect) in which the reach of the third symbol with the number "" is generated is executed, and finally the symbol is stopped and displayed. In the setting suggestion effect, the setting is suggested by the number attached to the symbol to which the reach is applied. Can easily be understood.

  In addition, in the setting suggestion effect, in order to execute an effect in which a reach occurs in the third symbol to which any number from “1” to “6” is attached, a normal out-of-range super-reach (that is, the selection is performed regardless of the setting). When the obtained “super reach” is notified as a variation type, an effect in which reach occurs in the third symbol to which a value other than “1” to “6” (that is, any of “7” to “9”) is added. Is configured to execute. Thus, when the out-of-reach super-reach effect is performed, the player can easily understand whether the effect is a setting suggestion effect or a normal super-reach effect by simply checking the number attached to the third symbol. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to realize an effect mode that is easier to understand.

<Electrical Configuration in Fourteenth Embodiment>
Next, the details of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 according to the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 335 (a) is a block diagram showing a configuration of the ROM 202 in the fourteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 335 (a), the configuration of the ROM 202 in the fourteenth embodiment is different from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the above-described thirteenth embodiment (see FIG. 314 (a)) in that the first random number 13 table 202pa Is provided in place of the first random number 14 table 202qa, a jackpot type selection 14 table 202qd is provided in place of the jackpot type selection 13 table 202pd, and a variation pattern is provided in place of the variation pattern selection 13 table pe. The difference is that the selection 14 table 202qe is provided, the time saving provision table 202qf is added, and the small hit random number 13 table 202pb is deleted due to the abolition of the small hit lottery result. I have. The other configuration is the same as that of the above-described thirteenth embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.

  First, the details of the first random number 14 table 202qa in the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 336 (a) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the first random number 14 table 202qa. As shown in FIG. 336 (a), the first random number 14 table 202qa according to the fourteenth embodiment stores a random number value (counter value) determined to be a big hit in association with a special symbol state and a set value. A range is defined. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 336 (a), in the low probability state of the special symbol, for setting 1, the range of the counter value (random value) of the first random number counter C1 is "0 to 0". 328 counter values (random values) of “89, 200 to 437” are defined in association with each other, and for setting 2, the range of the counter values (random values) of the first random number counter C1 is “100 to 189”. , 230 to 503 ”are defined in association with each other. For the setting 3, the range of the counter value (random value) of the first random number counter C1 is“ 0 to 89, 230 counter values (random value) are defined in association with each other. For setting 4, the counter value (random value) of the first random number counter C1 is set to "100 to 189,280". ~ 6 768 counter values (random number values) of “7” are defined in association with each other, and for setting 5, “0 to 89, 280 to 735” are set as the range of the counter value (random number value) of the first random number counter C1. 546 counter values (random number values) are defined in association with each other. For setting 6, the range of the counter value (random number value) of the first random number counter C1 is “100 to 189, 300 to 937”. 728 counter values (random number values) are defined in association with each other. Therefore, the jackpot probability of the setting 1 in the low probability state of the special symbol is 1/200 (328/65536), the jackpot probability of the setting 2 is 1/180 (364/65536), and the jackpot probability of the setting 3 is 1/160 (410/65536), the jackpot probability of setting 4 is 1/140 (468/65536), the jackpot probability of setting 5 is 1/120 (546/65536), and the jackpot probability of setting 6. Is 1/90 (728/65536).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 336 (a), in the high probability state of the special symbol, “0 to 1179” corresponds to the setting 1 as the range of the counter value (random value) of the first random number counter C1. For setting 2, “0 to 1310” is defined in association with the range of the counter value (random number value) of the first random number counter C1. The range of the counter value (random value) of the random number counter C1 is defined in association with “0 to 1474”. For the setting 4, the range of the counter value (random value) of the first random number counter C1 is “0”. １６1684 ”are associated with each other, and for setting 5,“ 0 to 1965 ”is associated and defined as the range of the counter value (random value) of the first random number counter C1. The "0-2620" is defined in association with a range of counter values per random number counter C1 (random number). Therefore, the jackpot probability of setting 1 in the special symbol high probability state is 1 / 55.6 (1180/65536), the jackpot probability of setting 2 is 1/50 (1311/65536), and the jackpot of setting 3 The probability is 1 / 44.4 (1475/65536), the jackpot probability of setting 4 is 1 / 38.9 (1685/65536), and the jackpot probability of setting 5 is 1 / 33.3 (1966/65536). And the jackpot probability of setting 6 is 1/25 (2621/65536). Note that, as in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments, the ratio of the jackpot probability in the low probability state to the jackpot probability in the high probability state is common.

  Here, unlike the other embodiments, the random number value (counter value of the first hit random number counter C1) determined to be a big hit in the low probability state of the special symbol is not continuous (the value is partially skipped). ) Is a range in which the odd number setting is more easily selected than the even number setting as a random number value (counter value of the first random number counter C1) that is not determined to be a special symbol jackpot (that is, determined to be out), A range in which an even number setting is easier to select than an odd number setting, a range that cannot be selected in a setting 1, a range that can be selected only in a high setting (settings 4 to 6), a range that can be selected only in a setting 6, and the like are provided. That's why. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 339 and the like, in the variation pattern selection 14 table in the fourteenth embodiment, the variation pattern at the time of departure and the value of the first random number counter C1 are defined in association with each other. I have. In other words, the configuration is such that the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern lottery are determined with reference to a common counter (first random number counter C1). Then, the configuration is such that a special outlier variation pattern type is associated with a range of random numbers determined to be a jackpot in some set values. With this configuration, it is possible to estimate (narrow down) the set value when the special out-of-offset variation pattern is executed. Therefore, the player can play the game paying attention to the type of the variation pattern executed at the time of departure, so that the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

  Next, the details of the jackpot type selection 14 table 202qd in the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 336 (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the jackpot type selection 14 table 202qd in the fourteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 336 (b), the first hit type selection 14 table 202qb according to the tenth embodiment includes a large hit type determined (selected) when a big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery. At least a special hitting table 202qd1 and a special hitting table 202qd2 for determining (selecting) a jackpot type when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery are defined. First, with reference to FIG. 337 (a), the details of the special hit table 202qd1 will be described.

  FIG. 337 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the special hit table 202qd1 in the fourteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 337 (a), in the special hitting table 202qd1 in the fourteenth embodiment, eight jackpot types from "big hit A14" to "big hit H14" are set as the jackpot types of the first special symbol. Stipulated. “Big hit A14” to “big hit C14” are the big hit types in which the number of rounds is nine and the special symbol state after the big hit end is set to the special symbol high probability state. The “big hit D14” to “big hit F14” are the big hit types in which the number of rounds is three and the state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit is set to the special symbol high probability state. “Big hit G14” is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is nine and the state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit is set to the low probability state of the special symbol. Further, "big hit H14" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is three rounds and the state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit is set to the low probability state of the special symbol. Note that whether or not the time reduction state of the ordinary symbol is given is configured to be different depending on the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit and the big hit type.

  As shown in FIG. 337 (a), for the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 of “0 to 5”, “big hit A14” (9 rounds probability changing big hit) is defined in association with the big hit type. ing. Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) of “0 to 99” that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with “big hit A14” is “0 to 5”. ”, The rate at which“ big hit A14 ”is determined (selected) when the big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery is 6% (6/100).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 337 (a), for the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 of “6 to 46”, “big hit B14” (9 round probability change big hit) is associated with the big hit type. Stipulated. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with “big hit B14” is 41, “6 to 46”. When the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the rate of determining (selecting) the "big hit B14" is 41% (41/100).

  Also, as shown in FIG. 337 (a), for the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “47 to 66”, “big hit C14” (9 round probability change big hit) is associated with the big hit type. Stipulated. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with “big hit C14” is 20, which is “47 to 66”. When the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the ratio of determining (selecting) the "big hit C14" is 20% (20/100).

  Also, as shown in FIG. 337 (a), "big hit D14" (three round probability change big hit) is defined as the big hit type in association with the value "67" of the first hit type counter C2. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "big hit D14" is one, so the first special symbol lottery When the jackpot is won, the rate at which "big hit D14" is determined (selected) is 1% (1/100).

  As shown in FIG. 337 (a), for the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 of “68, 69”, “big hit E14” (three round probability change big hit) is associated with the big hit type. Stipulated. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with “big hit E14” is two, so the first special symbol lottery The rate at which the "big hit E14" is determined (selected) when the big hit is won is 2% (2/100).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 337 (a), with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “70 to 89”, “big hit F14” (three round probability change big hit) is associated with the big hit type. Stipulated. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with “big hit F14” is 20, which is “70 to 89”. When the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the ratio of determining (selecting) the "big hit F14" is 20% (20/100).

  Also, as shown in FIG. 337 (a), for the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 of “90 to 92”, “big hit G14” (9 rounds normal big hit) is associated with the big hit type. Stipulated. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the "big hit G14" is 3, so the first special symbol lottery When the jackpot is won, the rate at which "big hit G14" is determined (selected) is 3% (3/100).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 337 (a), with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “93 to 99”, “big hit H14” (3 round normal big hit) is associated with the big hit type. Stipulated. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with “big hit H14” is 7, so the first special symbol lottery When the jackpot is won, the rate at which "big hit H14" is determined (selected) is 7% (7/100).

  As described above, in the fourteenth embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the probability of changing the jackpot is 90% (when the jackpot is one of “jackpot A14” to “jackpot F14”), At the rate of 10% (in the case of one of "big hit G14" and "big hit H14"), the normal jackpot is won. The configuration is such that a jackpot of nine rounds is determined at a rate of 70%, and a jackpot of three rounds is determined at a rate of 30%.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 337 (b), the details of the special hit table 202qd2 are described. As described above, the special two-win table 202qd2 is a data table for determining a hit type when a large hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol. As shown in FIG. 337 (b), in the fourteenth embodiment, four big hit types of "big hit I14" to "big hit L14" are provided as hit types of the second special symbol. “Big hit A14” to “big hit C14” are the big hit types in which the number of rounds is nine and the special symbol state after the big hit end is set to the special symbol high probability state. The “big hit D14” to “big hit F14” are the big hit types in which the number of rounds is three and the state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit is set to the special symbol high probability state. “Big hit I14” is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is nine and the special symbol state after the big hit end is set to the special symbol high probability state. “Big hit J14” is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is three and the state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit is set to the high probability state of the special symbol. “Big hit K14” is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 9 and the special symbol state after the big hit end is set to the special symbol low probability state. Furthermore, "big hit L14" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is three and the special symbol state after the big hit end is set to the special symbol low probability state.

  As shown in FIG. 337 (b), for the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 of “0 to 66”, “big hit I14” (9 rounds of probability change big hit) is defined in association with the big hit type. ing. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) “0 to 99” that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with “big hit I14” is “0 to 66”. , 67% (67/100) when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, and the “big hit I14” is determined (selected).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 337 (b), for the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 of “67 to 89”, “big hit J14” (three rounds probability change big hit) is associated with the big hit type. Stipulated. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) from “0 to 99” that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with “big hit J14” is “67 to 89”. Therefore, the rate at which the "big hit J14" is determined (selected) when the big hit is won in the second special symbol lottery is 23% (23/100).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 337 (b), for the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “90 to 92”, “big hit K14” (9 rounds normal big hit) is associated with the big hit type. Stipulated. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) of “0 to 99” that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with “big hit K14” is “90 to 92”. ”, The rate at which“ big hit K14 ”is determined (selected) when a big hit is won in the second special symbol lottery is 3% (3/100).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 337 (b), for the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "93 to 99", "big hit L14" (three round normal big hit) is associated with the big hit type. Stipulated. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) “0 to 99” that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with “big hit L14” is “93 to 99”. ”, The rate at which“ big hit L14 ”is determined (selected) when a big hit is won by lottery of the second special symbol is 7% (7/100).

  As described above, in the fourteenth embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the 90% ratio ("big hit I14", The jackpot is determined to be a probable variable jackpot when any one of "big hit J14" is reached, and a normal jackpot is won at a rate of 10% (if any of "big hit K14" or "big hit L14"). The configuration is such that a jackpot of nine rounds is determined at a rate of 70%, and a jackpot of three rounds is determined at a rate of 30%. In other words, the arrangement is such that the number of rounds is equal to that in the case of a jackpot in the first special symbol lottery.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 338 (a), details of the variation pattern selection 14 table 202qe in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. Note that the variation pattern selection 14 table 202qe in the fourteenth embodiment is different from the other embodiments in that the variation pattern (variation time) is determined according to the value (random value) of the first random number counter C1. Data is defined. FIG. 338 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection 14 table 202qe in the fourteenth embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 338 (a), the fluctuating pattern selection 14 table 202qe in the fourteenth embodiment includes a game state in which a normal state of a normal symbol is set (that is, a normal state in which a game is to be advanced by left-handed, a latent state). A left-handed state table 202qe1 for determining (selecting) a fluctuation pattern (variation time) in a certain state, and a game state in which a time-saving state of an ordinary symbol is set (that is, a time-saving state in which the game is to be advanced by right-handing) , The right-handed state table 202qe2 for determining (selecting) a variation pattern (variation time) in the (probable variation state). First, the details of the left-handed state table 202qe1 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 338 (b) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the left-handed state table 202qe1. As shown in FIG. 338 (b), in the left-handed state table 202qe1 in the fourteenth embodiment, the symbol type, the lottery result, and the range of the value of the first random number counter C1 are associated with the variation pattern. Stipulated. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 338 (b), when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the lottery result is "big hit", the value of the first random number counter C1 is 4 Is defined in association with the value of the multiple of the “normal hit” of which the variation time is 20,000 ms, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is a value other than a multiple of 4 and the “per hit of the normal random reach” is 30,000 ms. "Super reach" is defined in association with each other. Therefore, in the normal state and in the latent state, when the first special symbol has a big hit, the fluctuation time is set to 20 seconds at a rate of about 1/4, and the fluctuation time is set at a rate of about 3/4. Set to 30 seconds.

  As shown in FIG. 338 (b), when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the lottery result is “missing”, the value of the first random number counter C1 is “0 to 99”. Is defined in association with “even number suggested super reach” having a variation time of 30,000 ms. Here, as described above with reference to FIG. 336 (a), in the odd-number setting, “0 to 89” in the range of the random number value (counter value of the first random number counter C1) corresponding to the even-numbered super reach is set. Is set to the random value determined to be a jackpot, while the even number setting is set so that the range of the random value corresponding to the even-numbered super reach and the range of the random value determined to be the jackpot do not overlap. Is set. Therefore, in the odd number setting, even if the special symbol lottery is executed with the random number value corresponding to the even number suggestion super reach, it is 90% big hit (the deviation change is not executed). Substantially 1/10. That is, even-numbered super-reach is more likely to be executed ten times in the case of even-numbered super-reach, so that when even-numbered super-reach is executed, it is possible to make the player think that there is a high possibility that even-numbered super reach is even-numbered.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 338 (b), the value of the first random number counter C1 is in the range of “100 to 199”, and “odd number suggested super reach” having a variation time of 30,000 ms is defined in association with the value. I have. Here, as described above with reference to FIG. 336 (a), in the even number setting, “100 to 189” in the range of the random number value (counter value of the first random number counter C1) corresponding to the odd suggestion super reach is set. Is set to the random number value determined to be a jackpot, while the odd number setting is set so that the range of the random number value corresponding to odd-numbered super reach and the range of the random number value determined to be the jackpot do not overlap. Is set. Therefore, in the even-number setting, even if the random number value corresponding to the odd-numbered suggestion super-reach is executed, even if the lottery of the special symbol is executed, the big hit becomes 90% (the deviation change is not executed). Substantially 1/10. In other words, the odd-numbered super-reach is more likely to be executed 10 times in the odd-numbered super-reach, so that when the odd-numbered super-reach is executed, it is possible to make the player think that the odd-numbered setting is more likely to be an odd-numbered setting.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 338 (b), the value of the first random number counter C1 is in a range of “200 to 229”, and “setting 1 negative super reach” with a variation time of 30000 ms is defined in association with the value. ing. Here, as described above with reference to FIG. 336 (a), in the setting 1, the entire range of the random number value (counter value of the first random number counter C1) corresponding to the setting 1 negative super reach becomes the big hit. In the other settings, the random number value is set so that the range of the random number value corresponding to the setting 1 negative super reach does not overlap with the range of the random number value determined to be the jackpot. ing. Therefore, in the setting 1, even if the lottery of the special symbol is executed with the random number value corresponding to the setting 1 negation super reach, the jackpot becomes a jackpot (the deviation change is not executed), so that the setting 1 negation super reach may be executed. Becomes 0. That is, since the setting 1 negative super reach is executed only with the setting 2 or more, when executed, the player can have a sense of security that at least the minimum setting is not attained. Therefore, the player's motivation for the game can be improved.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 338 (b), the value of the first random number counter C1 is in a range of “200 to 229”, and “setting 1 negative super reach” with a variation time of 30000 ms is defined in association with the value. ing. Here, as described above with reference to FIG. 336 (a), in the setting 1, the entire range of the random number value (counter value of the first random number counter C1) corresponding to the setting 1 negative super reach becomes the big hit. In the other settings, the random number value is set so that the range of the random number value corresponding to the setting 1 negative super reach does not overlap with the range of the random number value determined to be the jackpot. ing. Therefore, in the setting 1, even if the lottery of the special symbol is executed with the random number value corresponding to the setting 1 negation super reach, the jackpot becomes a jackpot (the deviation change is not executed), so that the setting 1 negation super reach may be executed. Becomes 0. That is, since the setting 1 negative super reach is executed only with the setting 2 or more, when executed, the player can have a sense of security that at least the minimum setting is not attained. Therefore, the player's motivation for the game can be improved.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 338 (b), the “high setting fixed super reach” with a variation time of 30,000 ms is defined in association with the value of the first random number counter C1 in the range of “230 to 279”. ing. Here, as described above with reference to FIG. 336 (a), in the settings 1 to 3 (low settings), the range of the random number value (counter value of the first random number counter C1) corresponding to the high setting confirmed super reach is set. While the entire range is set to random numbers determined to be a jackpot, in settings 4 to 6 (high setting), a range of random numbers corresponding to a high setting confirmed super reach and a range of random numbers determined to be a jackpot are set. And the random number value is set so as not to overlap. Therefore, in the settings 1 to 3, even if the special symbol lottery is executed with the random number value corresponding to the high setting confirmed super reach, the jackpot becomes a jackpot (the deviation change is not executed), so that the high setting confirmed super reach is executed. The possibility is 0. In other words, since the high setting confirmation super reach is executed only at the setting 4 or higher (high setting), the player feels a great sense of security that the high setting is set (the jackpot probability is set relatively high) when executed. Can be embraced. Therefore, the player's motivation for the game can be improved.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 338 (b), “setting 6 fixed super reach” with a variation time of 30000 ms is defined in association with the value of the first random number counter C1 in the range of “280 to 299”. ing. Here, as described above with reference to FIG. 336 (a), in the settings 1 to 5 (settings other than the setting 6), the random number value (counter value of the first random number counter C1) corresponding to the setting 6 determined super reach. Is set to random numbers determined to be jackpots, while in setting 6, the range of random numbers corresponding to setting 6 confirmed super reach overlaps with the range of random numbers determined to be jackpots The random number value is set so that it does not occur. Therefore, in the settings 1 to 5, even if the special symbol lottery is executed with the random number value corresponding to the setting 6 confirmed super reach, the jackpot becomes a jackpot (no deviation change is executed), so the setting 6 confirmed super reach is executed. The possibility is 0. That is, since the setting 6 confirmed super reach can be executed only in the setting 6 (high setting), when executed, it is the highest setting (the jackpot probability is set to the highest) and a great sense of security and satisfaction. Can be held by the player. Therefore, the player's motivation for the game can be further improved.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 338 (b), in the range where the value of the first random number counter C1 is “300” or more, the normal (that is, selected without depending on the setting) variation pattern is different. Corresponding. More specifically, “out-of-reach super reach” with a variation time of 30,000 ms is defined in association with the value of the first random number counter C1 in the range of “300 to 10084”. A value of “1085-33465” is associated with “short deviation” of 8000 ms, and a value of the first random number counter C1 is varied with respect to a range of “33466-53224”. “Out of length” with a time of 12000 ms is defined in association with the value of the first random number counter C1 in the range of “53225 to 65535”, and “out of reach” with a variation time of 20,000 ms is defined in association with it. ing.

  On the other hand, when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special symbol 2) and the lottery result is "big hit", the variation time is 120,000 ms with respect to the entire range of possible values of the first random number counter C1. Is defined in association with each other. When the symbol type is the second special symbol (special symbol 2) and the lottery result is "out", the variation time of 120,000 ms is "out of range" with respect to the entire range of possible values of the first random number counter C1. “Long variation” is defined in association with the “long variation”. For this reason, when the irregular game method of right-handing in a state where the game is to be advanced by left-handing (normal state, latent state) is practiced, since the electric accessory 6400a is hardly released, the second special symbol Even if the lottery becomes difficult to execute, and even if the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed, the fluctuation time is set longer than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, so that the game efficiency is extremely deteriorated. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method of right-handing in a game state (normal state, latent state) in which the game is to be advanced by left-handing.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 339, in the fourteenth embodiment, it is determined that a random number (counter value of the first random number counter C1) associated with various fluctuation patterns corresponding to the departure and a hit are detected. The outline of the correspondence between the random number value (the counter value of the first random number counter C1) and the setting value 1 and the setting value 4 will be specifically described.

  As shown in the middle part of FIG. 339, the random number value determined to be a hit in the setting 1 is within the range of the random number value corresponding to the even-numbered super reach (the first random number counter C1 is in the range of “0 to 99”). , 90% that occupy 90%, the entire range of the random number value corresponding to the setting 1 negative super reach (the range of the first random number counter C1 is “200 to 229”), and the high setting finalized. The entire range of the random number value corresponding to the super reach (the first random number counter C1 is in the range of “230 to 279”) and the random number value range corresponding to the setting 6 determined super reach (the first random number counter C1 is “30” which is a part of the entire range of “280 to 299” and the range of the random number value corresponding to the out-of-range super reach (the range of the first random number counter C1 is “300 to 10084”). And scope of the ～437 ", is set to. For this reason, if the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired at the time of the start winning in the setting 1 is within the range of the random number value corresponding to the even-numbered super reach (within the range of “0 to 99”), 90% (“0 to 99”) 0-89 ") is determined to be a big hit, and a winning normal variation or a winning super variation is executed. In other words, in setting 1, which is an odd-numbered setting, even if a random number value corresponding to even-numbered suggestion super-reach has been obtained, only 10% of actual-numbered suggestion super-reach is actually executed. Becomes difficult to execute.

  In addition, the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired at the time of the start winning in the setting 1 is within the range of the random number value corresponding to any of the setting 1 negative super reach, the high setting confirmed super reach, and the setting 6 confirmed super reach (“200内 299 ”), it is always determined to be a big hit, and a winning normal variation or a winning super variation is executed. In other words, the setting 1 is configured so that the possibility of executing the setting 1 negative super reach, the high setting confirmed super reach, and the setting 6 confirmed super reach becomes zero.

  Also, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 339, the random number value determined to be a hit in the setting 4 is in the range of the random number value corresponding to the odd suggestion super reach (the first random number counter C1 is in the range of “100 to 199”). Out of the range of “100 to 189” that occupies 90%, the entire range of the random number value corresponding to the setting 6 determined super reach (the range of the first random number counter C1 is “280 to 299”), The range is set to “300 to 657” which is a part of the range of the random number value corresponding to the super reach (the first random number counter C1 is in the range of “300 to 10084”). For this reason, if the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired at the time of the start winning in the setting 4 is within the range of the random number value corresponding to the odd suggestion super reach (within the range of “100 to 199”), 90% (“ 100 to 189 ") is determined to be a big hit, and a winning normal variation or a winning super variation is executed. In other words, in setting 4 which is an even number setting, even if a random number value corresponding to the odd number suggesting super reach is acquired, the odd number suggesting super reach is actually executed only by 10%. Becomes difficult to execute.

  If the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired at the time of the start winning in the setting 4 is within the range of the random number value corresponding to the setting 6 confirmed super reach (within the range of “280 to 299”), it is always determined to be a big hit. Then, the winning normal variation or the winning super variation is executed. In other words, the setting 4 is configured so that the possibility of executing the setting 6 confirmed super reach becomes zero.

  Although illustration is omitted, the same applies to other settings. In setting 2, odd-numbered super reach (range of random numbers “100 to 199”) is difficult to be executed, and high-setting confirmed super reach and setting 6 are set. A random value (counter value of the first random number counter C1) determined to be a big hit is set (distributed) so that the possibility of executing the determined super reach (range of random numbers “230 to 299”) becomes zero. ing. In setting 3, even-number suggestion super reach (range of random numbers “0 to 99”) is difficult to be executed, and high setting confirmed super reach and setting 6 determined super reach (range of random numbers “230 to 299”) are set. Is set (distributed) such that the possibility of the execution is zero, which is determined to be a big hit (the counter value of the first random number counter C1). In setting 5, even-number suggestion super reach (range of random numbers “0 to 99”) becomes difficult to execute, and setting 6 confirmed super reach (range of random numbers “280 to 299”) may be executed. A random value (counter value of the first random number counter C1) determined to be a big hit is set (distributed) so as to be 0. Then, in the setting 6, the odd suggestion super reach (the range of the random number value “100 to 199”) becomes difficult to execute, and the random number value (the first random number) determined to be the big hit is executed so that the other variation types are executed without limitation. The counter value of the hit random number counter C1) is set (distributed).

  With this configuration, it is possible to provide an outlier variation type that is hard to be executed for each setting and an outlier variation type that is not likely to be executed. It is possible to realize the gaming ability to play. For example, when the setting 1 negative super reach and the odd suggestion super reach are confirmed, it is possible to make the player guess that the possibility of the setting 3 or the setting 5 is high. In addition, when the high setting confirmed super reach and the even number suggested super reach are confirmed, the player can be inferred that the possibility of the setting 4 or the setting 6 is high. Further, when the setting 6 confirmation super reach is executed, the player can be convinced that the setting 6 is set. As described above, in the fourteenth embodiment, it is possible to realize a novel playability of estimating (narrowing down) the setting based on the execution status of the specific type of deviation variation pattern. Interest in games can be further improved. In addition, since the setting can be suggested by the variation type randomly selected in the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 simply analyzes the variation pattern command output each time a special symbol lottery is executed. Thus, it is only necessary to execute a fluctuation pattern effect according to the analysis result, and the processing load of the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced. In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 only needs to define the correspondence between the variation type and the effect mode of the variation pattern effect, and does not need to know the set value itself (that is, the main control device). 110 does not need to notify the audio lamp control device 113 of the set value. Therefore, the processing load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and the setting value can be prevented from being illegally acquired ( Suppression).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 340, the details of the right-handed state table 202qe2 constituting the above-described variation pattern selection 14 table 202qe will be described. FIG. 340 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the right-handed state table 202qe2. As shown in FIG. 340, when the lottery result is “big hit”, the value of the first random number counter C1 is a multiple of 4 and the variation time is 10000 ms regardless of the type of the special symbol. A "per-reach reach" is defined in association with a value other than a multiple of 4 of the first per-random number counter C1, and a "reach super reach" with a variation time of 15000 ms is defined. Therefore, when a special symbol lottery wins in the time saving state and the probable change state, the fluctuation time is set to 10 seconds at a rate of about 1/4, and the fluctuation time is set to 15 seconds at a rate of about 3/4. Is set. That is, a short fluctuation pattern is more likely to be set as compared to a state in which the game needs to be advanced by left-handing.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 340, when the lottery result is “missing”, the variation time of the first random number counter C1 is set to “0 to 4999” regardless of the type of the special symbol. Is defined in association with “missing super reach” of 15000 ms, and the value of the random number counter C1 per first is defined in association with the range of “5000 to 44999” and “short deviation” with a variation time of 5000 ms. The range of the value of the first random number counter C1 is “45000 to 54999” and “variable length” of 7000 ms is defined in association with the range, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is “55000 to 65535”. Is defined in association with “out-of-range normal reach” with a variation time of 10,000 ms. That is, in the time saving state or the probable change state, even in the case of deviation, a fluctuation pattern having a shorter fluctuation time is easily selected compared to the normal state or the latent state. As a result, the game efficiency in the advantageous state can be increased, and the interest of the player in the advantageous state can be further improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 341, details of the time savings assignment table 202qf in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. The time-saving giving table 202qf is a data table that is referred to for setting the number of time savings after the end of the big hit according to the big hit type and the gaming state at the time of the big hit winning. FIG. 341 is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the time-saving provision table 202qf.

  As shown in FIG. 341, in the gaming state (normal state, latent state) in which the normal state of the ordinary symbol is set, the jackpot A14 (9 rounds variable jackpot) and the jackpot D14 (3 rounds variable jackpot) won in the gaming state. If the probability-change jackpot is a hit before reaching the probability-change limit, the number of time savings (65536 times) substantially continuing to the next jackpot is given, while the probability-change limit number (11 times) is reached by the jackpot. Is set to eight time savings. Therefore, if the jackpot A14 or the jackpot D14 is won before the probability change limit is reached, the probability change state (the most advantageous game state) which continues until the next jackpot is set, while the probability change limit is reached. , Only the low probability state of the special symbol and the eight time saving states are set, so that the degree of advantage of the player varies greatly depending on whether or not the number of times of the probable change has been reached.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 341, the jackpot A14 (9 rounds probability change jackpot) and the jackpot D14 (3 rounds probability change jackpot) won in the gaming state (time saving state, probability change state) in which the time reduction state of the ordinary symbol is set. If the probability change jackpot is a hit before reaching the probability change limit, the number of time savings (65536 times) substantially continuing to the next jackpot is given, while if the probability change limit number is reached by the jackpot, 100 The number of times saved is set. Therefore, even if the number of times of the probability change has been reached, the lottery of the special symbol can be executed 100 times without reducing the number of balls held, so that it is possible to give a sense of expectation to return the jackpot. In the fourteenth embodiment, it is configured not to clearly notify the player whether or not the limit number has been reached (whether the state is the probable change state or the time saving state). For this reason, even if the time-saving state has been set by actually reaching the probability-change limit number, the probability-change state can be expected from the player, and the interest of the player in the game can be improved. .

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 341, in the gaming state (normal state, latent state) in which the normal state of the ordinary symbol is set, the jackpot B14 (9 round probability variable jackpot), the jackpot E14 (3 round probability variable jackpot), and Regarding the jackpot I14 (9 round probability change jackpot), eight time saving times are given regardless of whether the hit is before reaching the probability change limit or the probability change limit number is reached. In other words, if the limit is not reached, the state will be in a stable state until the special symbol lottery ends eight times after the end of the big hit, and the latent state will be in the ninth and subsequent times. On the other hand, if the number of times of the limit has been reached, the time is reduced until the special symbol lottery ends eight times after the end of the big hit, and the normal state is set after the ninth time. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 341, in the gaming state (time saving state, probability change state) in which the normal symbol time reduction state is set, the jackpot B14 (9 round probability variation jackpot), the jackpot E14 (3 round probability variation jackpot), and the jackpot are won. The same number of time savings granted as the big hit A14 and the big hit D14 is associated with I14 (9 round probability change big hit). In other words, the number of time savings (65536 times) that substantially lasts until the next big hit is defined in association with the hit before reaching the probability change limit number, and the number of time savings of 100 times is reached for the hit after reaching the probability change limit number. The number of times is defined in association with each other. Therefore, the jackpots B14, E14, and I14 are more disadvantageous than the jackpots A14 and D14 in the gaming state after the end of the jackpot, when the winning is performed in a normal state or a state where the probability limit number has not been reached in the latent state. In the case of winning in other situations (when winning in the probable change state, time saving state, or when the probable change limit is reached), the same gaming state as the jackpots A14 and D14 is set.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 341, the jackpot C14 (9 round probability change jackpot) and the jackpot F14 (3 round probability change jackpot), which are won in the normal state, are defined in association with eight times as the number of time savings. . In addition, in the case of winning the probability change jackpot in the normal state, the number of times of saving will not be reached because the number of times of probability change will not be reached. No need). Regarding the jackpots C14 and F14 which have been won in the latent state, even if the hits are before reaching the probability change limit or the number of times of the probability change is reached, 0 times are defined as the number of time savings in association with each other. I have. That is, when the jackpots C14 and F14 are won in the latent state, the time saving state of the symbol is not given even once, which is extremely disadvantageous for the player. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 341, the jackpot C14 (9 rounds probability change jackpot) and the jackpot F14 (3 rounds probability change jackpot) won in the gaming state (time saving state, probability change state) in which the time reduction state of the normal symbol is set. For example, the same number of time savings as the jackpots A14, B14, D14, E14, and I14 are associated with each other. That is, the hit before the arrival of the probability change limit is defined in association with the number of time savings to be continued until the next big hit, and the hit after the arrival of the probability change number of times is defined in association with the number of time reduction of 100 times. ing.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 341, the jackpot G14 (9 round ordinary jackpot), the jackpot H14 (3 round ordinary jackpot), and the jackpot won in the gaming state (normal state, latent state) in which the normal state of the ordinary symbol is set. For K14 (9 round normal jackpot) and jackpot L14 (3 round normal jackpot), eight times are defined as the number of time savings. It should be noted that, when a jackpot is won, it is impossible to reach the number of times of probability change, and therefore, the number of times of saving the time when the number of times of probability variation is reached is not specified (it is not necessary to specify). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 341, for the jackpots G14, H14, K14, and L14 that have been won in the gaming state (the time saving state, the probable change state) in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, 100 times are given as the number of time savings. Are associated. In other words, when the jackpots G14, H14, K14, and L14 are won, the number of time savings to be continued until the next jackpot cannot be set, which is more disadvantageous than the jackpots A14 to F14 and H14 to J14.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 341, in the gaming state (normal state, latent state) in which the normal state of the ordinary symbol is set, the probability limit number of times has been reached for the jackpot J14 (three round probability variation) which has been won. Regardless of whether it is or not, zero is associated and defined as the number of times saved. Therefore, the jackpot J14 has a small number of rounds and is not provided with a time saving state, and thus becomes a disadvantageous jackpot type for the player when the player is won in the normal state or the latent state. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 341, for the jackpot J14 which has been won in the game state (time saving state, probability change state) in which the time reduction state of the ordinary symbol is set, if the probability variation jackpot is a hit before reaching the probability variation limit. While the time saving state (65536 times) substantially continuing to the next big hit is provided, if the number of times of the probability change has been reached due to the big hit, 100 time saving times are set.

  As described above, in the fourteenth embodiment, according to the jackpot type, the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, and whether or not the number of times of the probability change has been reached, the number of time savings given after the end of the jackpot is made different. are doing. Thereby, the game state after the end of the big hit can be diversified, so that the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

  Next, details of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 according to the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 335 (b) is a block diagram showing a configuration of the RAM 203 according to the fourteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 335 (b), the configuration of the RAM 203 according to the fourteenth embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 203 according to the above-described thirteenth embodiment (see FIG. 314 (b)) in that a probable change flag 203fa and a limit counter 203qa and a limit reaching flag 203qb are different. Further, the difference is that the small hit flag 203dg, the big hit type storage area 203pa, and the V passing flag 203pb are deleted. The deletion of these components is intended to delete the configuration for realizing the V-hit, since the fourteenth embodiment does not include the jackpot (V-hit) based on the V-prize.

  The probability change flag 203fa is a flag for indicating that the gaming state has changed to the probability change state, and is set to ON when it is determined that the probability change state is set. Then, when the end condition of the probable change state is satisfied, it is set to off.

  The limit counter 203qa is a counter for counting the number of times of the probability change limit. If the value of the limit counter 203qa is less than 11 at the end of the probability change jackpot, the state after the jackpot is set to the special symbol high probability state to indicate that the number of times of the probability change has not been reached. On the other hand, if the value of the limit counter 203qa is 11 at the end of the jackpot, the state after the jackpot is set to the low probability state of the special symbol to indicate that the number of times of the jackpot has been reached. The initial value of the limit counter 203qa is set to 0, and is updated by adding a value one by one at the end of the probability change jackpot every time the probability change jackpot is won (see S3504 in FIG. 352). The limit counter 203qa resets its value to 0 when it is determined that the probability change limit has been reached (the counter value has been updated to 11) at the end of the probability change jackpot and at the end of the normal jackpot (FIG. 352). S3502).

  The limit reaching flag 203qb is a flag indicating whether or not the number of times of the probability change limit has been reached. If the limit reaching flag 203qb is on, it means that the number of times of the probability change has been reached (election has been won 11 times in a row), and if it is off, it has not reached the number of times of the probability change. . The limit reaching flag 203qb is set to off in the initial state, and is set to on based on the fact that the counter value of the limit counter 203qa has been updated to 11, which is the number of times of the probability change at the end of the big hit (see FIG. 352). See S3507). The limit reaching flag 203qb is set to off at the start of the big hit (see S10233 in FIG. 347).

  Next, a state transition method according to the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Here, in the fourteenth embodiment, as described above, four game states are provided: a normal state and a latent state that are disadvantageous to the advantage, a time saving state and a probability change state that are advantageous to the player. Further, in the fourteenth embodiment, there are provided two types of probable change states: a probable change state in which the number of time savings is eight and a probable change state that continues until the next jackpot win. In addition, two types of time reduction states are provided: a time reduction state in which the number of time reductions is eight and a time reduction state in which the number of time reductions is 100. In the following description, for the sake of simplicity, the normal state and the latent state that are disadvantageous to the player are referred to as a normal mode A and a normal mode B, respectively. Are referred to as a chance mode A and a chance mode B, respectively, and the time saving state in which the number of time savings is large (100 times) is referred to as a pullback mode, and a probable change state (substantially when the extended house This state is referred to as a connected mode. First, a mode transition method in the normal mode A will be described with reference to the upper left side of FIG.

  As shown in the upper left part of FIG. 342, in the normal mode A, there is a possibility that the mode is shifted to another mode only when a jackpot is won. In other words, when one of the jackpots A14 and D14 determined at a rate of 7% is won in the case of the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery, the mode after the jackpot is advantageous to the player in the extended game mode. Is set to In addition, when one of the jackpots B14, C14, E14, and F14 determined at a rate of 83% is won in the case of a jackpot in the first special symbol lottery, the mode after the jackpot is changed to the chance mode B. Is set. Further, when either one of the jackpots G14 and H14 determined at a rate of 10% is won in the case of a jackpot in the first special symbol lottery, the mode after the jackpot is set to the chance mode A. As described above, when the jackpot is won in the normal mode A, the time-saving state of the ordinary symbol is always given at least eight times. Can be expected. Further, when the jackpot is won in the normal mode A, the player wins one of the jackpots B14, C14, E14, and F14 (at a high rate of 83%), and shifts to the chance mode B. That is, in most cases, it is possible to receive eight lotteries in the special symbol high probability state, so that the shift to the extended-villa mode can be expected to be stronger.

  Next, a mode transition method in the normal mode B will be described with reference to the upper right side of FIG. As shown on the upper right side of FIG. 342, in the normal mode, there is a possibility that the mode is shifted to another mode only when a jackpot is won. Specifically, when either of the jackpots A14 and D14 determined at a rate of 7% is won in the case of a jackpot in the first special symbol lottery, the mode after the jackpot is advantageous to the player. The mode is set to the extended-villa mode. In addition, when the number of times of the probability change has reached the jackpot due to the jackpot, the mode after the end of the jackpot is set to the chance mode A. In addition, in the case of winning in the lottery of the first special symbol, if one of the big hits B14 and E14 determined at a rate of 43% is won, the mode after the big hit is set to the chance mode B. In addition, when the number of times of the probability change has reached the jackpot due to the jackpot, the mode after the end of the jackpot is set to the chance mode A. Further, when either one of the jackpots G14 and H14 determined at a rate of 10% is won in the case of a jackpot in the first special symbol lottery, the mode after the jackpot is set to the chance mode A. On the other hand, when the jackpot is won in either of the jackpots C14 and F14 determined at a rate of 40% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the mode after the end of the jackpot is changed to the normal mode B again. Is set. That is, a disadvantageous state in which the normal symbol time reduction state is not provided is set. In addition, when the number of times of the probability change is reached by the jackpot, the mode after the end of the jackpot is set to the normal mode A. That is, regardless of whether the number of times of reaching the probability change limit has been reached or not, the time saving state is not provided. As described above, when the jackpot is won in the normal mode B, the time saving state of the ordinary symbol is given only at a rate of 60%. Therefore, in the game state after the end of the jackpot, the normal mode B is more effective than the normal mode A. Is disadvantageous. However, in the normal mode B, the jackpot probability is increased three times or more. Therefore, the normal mode B is more advantageous in terms of the jackpot probability.

  Next, a mode transition method in the chance mode A will be described with reference to the center left side of FIG. As shown on the left side of the center of FIG. 342, in the chance mode A, there is a possibility that the state may shift to another state when the number of time savings ends, in addition to the case where the jackpot is won. Specifically, as shown on the left side in the center of FIG. 342, when a special symbol lottery wins a jackpot, the winning rate is determined at a rate of 90% (big hits A14 to F14, I14, J14). The mode after the end of the big hit is set to the extended play mode most advantageous to the player. On the other hand, when a special symbol lottery wins a regular jackpot (big jackpot G14, H14, K14, L14) determined at a rate of 10%, the mode after the jackpot is set to the pull-back mode. On the other hand, when the number of times saved in the chance mode A has elapsed (the lottery of the special symbol is lost eight times in a row), the mode shifts to the normal mode A which is disadvantageous to the player. For this reason, in the chance mode A, it is possible to play a game with a strong expectation that a jackpot will be won during the eight times of working hours.

  Next, a mode transition method in the chance mode B will be described with reference to the center right side of FIG. 342. As shown on the left side of the center in FIG. 342, in the chance mode B, there is a possibility that the state may shift to another state when the jackpot is won and when the number of times of saving time is ended, as in the chance mode A. Specifically, as shown on the right side of the center of FIG. 342, when a special pattern lottery is won, a winning is determined at a probability change jackpot (jackpots A14 to F14, I14, J14) determined at a rate of 90%. The mode after the end of the big hit is set to the extended play mode most advantageous to the player. When the number of times of the probability change reaches the jackpot, the mode after the end of the jackpot is set to the pullback mode. On the other hand, when a special symbol lottery wins a regular jackpot (big jackpot G14, H14, K14, L14) determined at a rate of 10%, the mode after the jackpot is set to the pull-back mode. On the other hand, when the number of times saved in the chance mode B has elapsed (the lottery of the special symbol is lost eight times in a row), the mode shifts to the normal mode B which is disadvantageous to the player. For this reason, in the chance mode B, similarly to the chance mode A, a game can be played with a strong expectation that a jackpot will be won during eight time savings.

  Next, a mode transition method in the retraction mode will be described with reference to the lower left part of FIG. 342. As shown in the lower left part of FIG. 342, in the pullback mode, as in the chance modes A and B, there is a possibility that the state will shift to another state when a jackpot is won and when the number of times of saving time is completed. Specifically, as shown in the lower left part of FIG. 342, when a special symbol lottery wins a jackpot, the winning rate is determined at a rate of 90% (big hits A14 to F14, I14, J14). The mode after the end of the big hit is set to the extended play mode most advantageous to the player. On the other hand, when the number of time savings elapses in the retraction mode (the lottery of the special symbol is lost 100 times in a row), the mode shifts to the normal mode A which is disadvantageous to the player. On the other hand, when a special symbol lottery wins a regular jackpot (jackpot G14, H14, K14, L14) determined at a rate of 10% when the jackpot is won, the mode after the end of the jackpot becomes the pull-back mode again. Set (loop through pullback mode).

  Next, a mode transition method in the extended-villa mode will be described with reference to the lower right side of FIG. 342. As shown on the lower right side of FIG. 342, in the extended-villa mode, there is a possibility that the state will shift to another state only when a jackpot is won. Specifically, as shown in the lower right part of FIG. 342, when a special symbol lottery wins a regular jackpot (big hit G14, H14, K14, L14) determined at a rate of 10%, The mode after the end of the jackpot is set to the retraction mode. On the other hand, if a special design lottery results in a jackpot and a winning is determined at a rate of 90% (a jackpot A14 to F14, I14, J14) determined at a rate of 90%, the mode after the jackpot ends is again set to the player. Is set to the most advantageous mode (the mode is looped). In addition, if the winning has been achieved in the jackpot and the number of times of the jackpot has reached the limit number, the pullback mode is set after the jackpot ends.

  As described above, in the fourteenth embodiment, in order to shift to the extended play mode that is advantageous to the player, basically, the shift to the chance modes A and B in which eight times are set. Therefore, it is necessary to win the jackpot within a relatively small number of time savings of eight times. However, once the mode is switched to the extended mode, a very advantageous state in which the extended mode and the jackpot are repeated at a high rate of 90% is formed. Therefore, when the mode is switched to the extended mode, the player Can give a great sense of satisfaction.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 343 (a), details of the RAM 222 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 343 (a) is a block diagram showing a configuration of the RAM 222 according to the fourteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 343 (a), the configuration of the RAM 222 in the fourteenth embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 222 in the above-described thirteenth embodiment (and the eleventh embodiment) (see FIG. 274) in that the winning rate is indicated. An effect lottery table 222qa, an effect type selection table 222qb, a power return operation table 222qc, and an accessory operation setting table 222qd are different in that they are added.

  First, with reference to FIG. 344 (a), details of the winning rate suggestion effect lottery table 222qa in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. The winning rate suggestion effect lottery table 222qa is a data table that defines the rate at which the winning rate suggestion effect (see FIG. 333) is determined as a variation pattern effect for each game situation. Here, as described above, in the fourteenth embodiment, the winning rate suggestion effect increases as the disadvantageous situation for the player continues (the more times the transition to the retreat mode or the retraction mode cannot be performed increases). Is configured to have a high execution probability.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 344 (a), the current game state is the normal state (normal mode A), and the number of consecutive times that the game cannot be shifted to the advantageous state after the jackpot (through) has been reached. For a situation of three times or less, a probability of 1/100 is defined in association with a lottery probability of a winning rate suggestion effect. In addition, the current game state is the normal state (normal mode A), and the number of consecutive times (through) that could not be shifted to the advantageous state after the jackpot is 4 or more and 6 or less. In addition, a probability of 1/90 is defined in association with a lottery probability of a winning rate suggestion effect. Also, in the case where the current game state is the normal state (normal mode A) and the number of continuous times (through) which could not be shifted to the advantageous state after the big hit is 7 or more and 9 or less In addition, a probability of 1/80 is associated and defined as a lottery probability of a winning rate suggestion effect. Furthermore, if the current gaming state is the normal state (normal mode A) and the number of consecutive times (shooting) cannot be shifted to the advantageous state after the jackpot is 10 or more, the winning rate is suggested. A 1/50 probability is defined in association with the effect lottery probability.

  On the other hand, when the current gaming state is the latent state (normal mode B), a 1/50 probability is defined in association with the lottery probability of the winning rate suggestion effect regardless of the number of throughs. As described above, in the fourteenth embodiment, the execution probability of the winning rate suggestion effect is increased as the situation becomes more disadvantageous for the player (the more unpleasant situations continue). With this configuration, as the disadvantageous situation continues, the possibility that the setting is suggested in the winning rate suggestion effect increases, so that even if the disadvantageous situation continues, the motivation for the game can be maintained. it can. Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  In the fourteenth embodiment, the probability that the winning rate suggestion effect is executed in the relatively advantageous latent state (normal mode B) is constant regardless of the situation. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even in the latent state, the execution probability of the winning rate suggestion effect may be increased as the disadvantageous situation for the player continues. With this configuration, it is possible to make it more difficult for the player's motivation to play the game when the disadvantageous situation continues.

  Next, details of the effect type selection table 222qb will be described. The effect type selection table 222qb is a data table that is referred to when the execution of the winning rate suggestion effect (see FIG. 333) is determined to determine the effect mode. In order to make the description easy to understand, first, referring to FIG. 344 (b), the correspondence between the jackpot probability in the fourteenth embodiment and the winning rate within 100 games will be described, and then FIG. The details of the effect type selection table 222qb will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 344 (b) is a diagram showing, for each set value, the correspondence between the jackpot probability in the low probability state and the probable change state of the special symbol and the winning rate within 100 games. As shown in FIG. 344 (b), in the low probability state of the special symbol, the jackpot probability of the setting 1 is 1/200, and the winning rate within 100 games is about 39.4% (100 special symbol lotteries). , The probability of a continuous 199/200 deviation is about 60.6%). In addition, the jackpot probability of the setting 2 is 1/180, and the winning rate within 100 games is about 42.7% (the probability that the winning rate of 179/180 will be consecutively out of 179/180 in 100 special symbol lotteries is about 57.3%). %). In addition, the jackpot probability of the setting 3 is 1/160, and the winning rate within 100 games is about 46.6% (the probability that the winning rate of 159/160 is consecutively lost in the lottery of 100 special symbols is about 53.4). %). In addition, the jackpot probability of the setting 4 is 1/140, and the winning rate within 100 games is about 51.2% (the probability that the winning rate of 139/140 is consecutively out of 139/140 in 100 special symbol lotteries is about 48.8%). %). In addition, the jackpot probability of setting 5 is 1/120, and the winning rate within 100 games is about 56.7% (the probability of being consecutively out of 119/120 in 100 special symbol lotteries is about 43.3%). %). Furthermore, the jackpot probability of the setting 6 is 1/90, and the winning rate within 100 games is about 67.3% (the probability of being 89/90 consecutively out of 89/90 in 100 special symbol lotteries is about 32.7%). %).

  On the other hand, in the special symbol change state, the jackpot probability of the setting 1 is 1 / 55.6, and the winning rate within 100 games is about 83.7% (54 times in 100 special symbol lotteries continuously). .6 / 55.6 is about 16.3%). In addition, the jackpot probability of the setting 2 is 1/50, and the winning rate within 100 games is about 86.7% (the probability of continuously being 49/50 out of 100 in lottery of special symbols is about 13.3). %). In addition, the jackpot probability of setting 3 is 1 / 44.4, and the winning rate within 100 games is about 89.7% (out of 43.4 / 44.4 consecutively in 100 special symbol lotteries). Probability is about 10.3%). In addition, the jackpot probability of the setting 4 is 1 / 38.9, and the winning rate within 100 games is about 92.6% (in the lottery of 100 special symbols, it continuously falls out of 37.9 / 38.9. Probability is about 7.4%). In addition, the jackpot probability of the setting 5 is 1 / 33.3, and the winning rate within 100 games is about 95.2% (in the case of 100 special symbol lotteries, it continuously falls out of 32.3 / 33.3. Probability is about 4.8%). Furthermore, the jackpot probability of the setting 6 is 1/25, and the winning rate within 100 games is about 98.3% (the probability that the winning is 24/25 consecutively in about 100 special symbol lotteries is about 1.7). %).

  In the winning rate suggestion effect according to the fourteenth embodiment, an effect mode is selected that does not contradict the actual winning rate within 100 games calculated from the jackpot probability (in the effect type selection table 222qb). Data is specified). As a result, the effect contents of the winning rate suggesting effect and the actual behavior (big hit winning rate) can be matched, so that the player can be prevented from having a distrust of the pachinko machine 10 or the hall. .

  Next, details of the effect type selection table 222qb in the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 345 is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the effect type selection table 222qb. As shown in FIG. 345, in the effect type selection table 222qb in the fourteenth embodiment, a value range of the effect counter 223f is defined in association with the effect mode, the game state, and the set value. ing. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 345, for the normal state and the setting 1, the value of the effect counter 203 f is in the range of “0 to 84”, and the odd number setting suggestion effect (100 games or less) An effect mode that suggests a winning rate of 13.5%) is defined in association with each other. If the value of the effect counter 203f is in the range of “85 to 94”, an even number setting suggesting effect (winning rate within 100 games) In the case where the value of the effect counter 203f is in the range of “95 to 99”, a latent suggestion effect (30% as a winning rate within 100 games) is defined. %) Is defined in association with each other. Therefore, in the case of the setting 1, when the execution of the winning rate suggestion effect is determined in the normal state, the odd number setting suggestion effect (13.5% over indicating the setting 1 or 3 or 5 is notified) is executed at a rate of 85%. Then, an even number setting suggestion effect (a mode in which 24.6% over implies setting 2 or 4 or 6 is reported) is executed at a rate of 10%, and a latent suggestion effect (the possibility of the latent state is high) is performed at a rate of 5%. (A mode in which 30% over indicating the above is notified) is executed. In other words, most are odd number setting suggestion effects. As described above, the winning rate within 100 games in the normal state of the setting 1 is about 39.4%, which is higher than the winning rate notified by the above three effects, and may be inconsistent with the actual behavior. Absent.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 345, for the normal state and the setting 2, the odd setting suggestion effect is defined in association with the value of the effect counter 203f in the range of “0 to 9”. For the range of the counter 203f of “10 to 91”, an even number setting suggestion effect is defined in association with the value. For the range of the effect counter 203f of “92 to 96”, the latent probability suggestion effect is provided. In the range where the value of the effect counter 203f is in the range of "97 to 99", an effect with a probability of or more than 2 and a confirmed effect (an effect mode in which 40% is suggested as a winning rate within 100 games) is supported. It is stipulated. Therefore, in the case of the setting 2, when the execution of the winning rate suggestion effect is determined in the normal state, the odd number setting suggestion effect (13.5% over indicating the setting 1 or 3 or 5 is notified) is executed at a rate of 10%. Then, an even number setting suggestion effect (a mode in which 24.6% over indicating setting 2 or 4 or 6 is announced) is executed at a rate of 82%, and a latent suggestion effect (the possibility of the latent state is high) is performed at a rate of 5%. (A mode in which 30% over indicating the fact is notified) is executed, and at a rate of 3%, (a mode in which a 40% over that is higher than the jackpot winning rate of 39.4% in the normal state of the setting 1 is notified) Is executed. In other words, most of the effects are suggestions for setting an even number, but a low-probability or more than two or more fixed effects are also performed. Therefore, in a situation in which the player is convinced that the player is in the normal state (for example, in a situation in which a great addiction occurs during a jackpot), if a confirmed performance of at least or2 is set, the setting is 2 or more. Since it can be guessed that there is, it is possible to make the player have fun of guessing the setting.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 345, for the normal state and the setting 3, the odd setting suggestion effect is defined in association with the value of the effect counter 203f in the range of “0 to 80”, and the effect For the range of the counter 203f in the range of "81 to 90", the even number setting suggestion effect is defined in association with the value, and for the range of the effect counter 203f in the range of "91 to 95", the latent probability suggestion effect is provided. Is defined in association with the value of the effect counter 203f in the range of "96 to 98". , And three or more determined effects (an effect mode in which 45.6% over is suggested as a winning rate within 100 games) are defined in association with each other. Therefore, in the case of the setting 3, when the execution of the winning rate suggestion effect is determined in the normal state, the odd number setting suggestion effect (13.5% over indicating the setting 1 or 3 or 5 is notified) is executed at a rate of 81%. Then, an even number setting suggestion effect (a mode in which 24.6% over indicating setting 2 or 4 or 6 is notified) is executed at a rate of 10%, and a latent suggestion effect (the possibility of the latent state is high) is performed at a rate of 5%. A mode in which a 30% over indicating that the game is performed is executed, and at a rate of 3%, the certainty effect is determined to be 2 or more with a latent probability of or 2 (40% over which is higher than the jackpot winning rate of 39.4% in the normal state of the setting 1). Then, a setting effect of 3 or more at a rate of 1% (a mode in which 45.6% over indicating that the setting is high is notified) is executed. In other words, most of the effects are odd-numbered setting suggesting effects, but with a low probability, a certainty effect with a latent probability of 2 or more and a setting effect with 3 or more settings are also executed. Therefore, when these effect modes are executed, the setting can be guessed, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 345, for the normal state and the setting 4, the odd setting suggestion effect is defined in association with the value of the effect counter 203f in the range of “0 to 9”. For the range of the counter 203f of “10 to 89”, an even number setting suggestion effect is defined in association with the value. For the value of the effect counter 203f of “90 to 94”, the latent probability suggestion effect is provided. Is defined in association with the value of the effect counter 203f in the range of "95 to 97". The determined effect is set in association with the setting 3 or more, and for the value “99” of the effect counter 203f, the latent effect is determined to be 4 or more and the determined effect (an effect mode in which 50% over is suggested as a winning rate within 100 games). Is compatible Only and are defined. Therefore, in the case of the setting 4, if the execution of the winning rate suggestion effect is determined in the normal state, the odd number setting suggestion effect is executed at a rate of 10%, the even number setting suggestion effect is executed at a rate of 80%, and 5% Is performed at a rate of 3%, and a confirmed performance (or more than or equal to 2) is performed at a rate of 3%, and a determined performance of 3 or more is performed at a rate of 1%. A fixed effect (a mode in which 50% over, which is higher than 46.6%, which is the jackpot winning rate in the normal state of the setting 3, is notified), that is, the effect is almost even setting suggestion effect, but with a low probability A definite effect of at least or2, a definite effect of at least 3 and a definite effect of at least or4 are also executed.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 345, for the normal state and the setting 5, the odd number setting suggestion effect is defined in association with the value of the effect counter 203f in the range of “0 to 77”, and the effect For the range of the counter 203f in the range of “78 to 87”, the even number setting suggestion effect is defined in association with the value. For the range of the effect counter 203f in the range of “88 to 92”, the latent suggestion effect is provided. Is defined in association with the value of the effect counter 203f in the range of "93 to 95". For example, a setting effect of 3 or more is determined in association with the effect, and a value of “98” of the effect counter 203f is defined in association with a latent effect of 4 or more, and a value of “99” of the effect counter 203f. On the other hand, Confirm effect constant of 5 or more (100 representation embodiment of 56%-over-a winning rate within the game is suggested) it is defined in association. Therefore, in the case of the setting 5, when the execution of the winning rate suggestion effect is determined in the normal state, the odd number setting suggestion effect is executed at a rate of 78%, the even number setting suggestion effect is executed at a rate of 10%, and 5% Is performed at a rate of 3%, a determined effect is executed at a rate of 3% or more, a determined effect is executed at a rate of 2%, and a determined effect is executed at a rate of 3% or more. An effect is executed, and a set effect of 5 or more is set at a rate of 1% (a mode in which 56% over which implies setting 5 or 6 is notified).

  Also, as shown in FIG. 345, for the normal state and the setting 6, the odd setting suggestion effect is defined in association with the value of the effect counter 203f in the range of “0 to 9”. For the range of the counter 203f of “10 to 84”, an even number setting suggestion effect is defined in association with the range, and for the value of the effect counter 203f of “85 to 89”, the latent probability suggestion effect is provided. Is defined in association with the value of the effect counter 203f in the range of “90 to 92”. That is, the determined effect is set to 3 or more, and the determined effect is defined in association with the value “95” of the effect counter 203f. Against The determined effect is defined in association with a setting of 5 or more, and for the value “98” of the effect counter 203f, a latent or6 determined effect (an effect mode in which 60% over is suggested as a winning rate within 100 games). For the value “99” of the effect counter 203f, a setting 6 finalized effect (an effect mode that suggests 66.6% over as a winning rate within 100 games) is defined and associated. I have. Therefore, in the case of the setting 6, if the execution of the winning rate suggestion effect is determined in the normal state, the odd number setting suggestion effect is executed at a rate of 10%, the even number setting suggestion effect is executed at a rate of 75%, and 5% Is performed at a rate of 3%, a determined effect is executed at a rate of 3% or more, a determined effect is executed at a rate of 2%, and a determined effect is executed at a rate of 3% or more. An effect is executed, a set effect of 5 or more is set at a rate of 2%, and a latent or 6 set effect at a rate of 1% (60% higher than the jackpot winning rate of 56.7% in the normal state of the setting 5) Then, a setting 6 finalized effect (a mode in which 66.6% over indicating setting 6 is notified) is executed at a rate of 1%. Therefore, when the setting 6 finalization effect is executed, or when the latent or 6 finalizing effect is executed in a state where the normal state is convinced, the player can have great satisfaction. .

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 345, in the latent state, the selection ratio of each effect mode is common regardless of the setting. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 345, the value of the effect counter 203f is defined in association with the range of “0 to 59”, and the value of the effect counter 203f is set to “60 to 83”. Is defined in association with the determined effect of at least or2, and the value of the effect counter 203f is defined in association with the determined effect of at least or4, in the range of "84 to 88". For the value "89" of the effect counter 203f, the latent probability or6 determined effect is defined in association with the value of the effect counter 203f, and for the value of the effect counter 203f of "90-99", the latent certainty effect (winning rate within 100 games) (A mode in which 80% over, which is higher than 67.3%, which is the winning rate of the setting 6 in the low probability state, is notified). Therefore, in the case of the latent state, a latent suggestion effect is executed at a rate of 60%, a latent effect of at least or2 is confirmed at a rate of 24%, and a latent effect of at least 4 is determined at a rate of 5%. A latent or6 determined effect is executed at a rate of 1%, and a latent determined effect is executed at a rate of 10%.

  As described above, in the fourteenth embodiment, the setting value and the game state are inferred from the effect contents by differentiating the effect form of the winning rate suggestion effect according to the game state and the set value. It is possible to realize the gaming ability to be performed. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

  Next, the power return operation table 222qc will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The power supply return operation table 222qc is a data table that is referred to when executing a power supply return operation for confirming whether or not each accessory can be normally changed when the power is turned on. The power return operation is performed every time the power is turned on (regardless of whether the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed). In the power supply return operation table 222qc, a return operation for each type of accessory is defined in association with the value of the return pointer 223qe. If it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the operation of any of the accessories by the return operation, an error command is set (see S9003 in FIG. 357). This error command includes information indicating the type of abnormality and the location where the abnormality has occurred. The display control device 114 that has received the error command performs a display on the third symbol display device 81 indicating the type of abnormality and the location of the abnormality. As described above, by performing the return operation based on the power-on, it can be quickly grasped whether or not each accessory has an abnormality. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the clerk of the hall starts the game for the player without noticing that an abnormality has occurred in the accessory of the pachinko machine 10.

  Note that the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to return all the accessories to the origin position (origin return) before executing the power return operation based on the power return operation table 222qc. In other words, when the power supply is cut off during the change of the accessory, the power supply return operation is executed after the home position is returned based on the power-on. As a result, only one type of operation that starts from the origin position needs to be prepared for the power supply return operation (it is necessary to define a power supply return operation of a different pattern depending on the position of the accessory when the power is turned on). Therefore, the data amount of the power return operation table 222qc can be reduced.

  When the power is turned off and the power is turned on again while changing the character, the reason why the operation of the character is not performed from the continuation of the operation is that the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is not backed up. That is, once the power is turned off, it becomes impossible to grasp the progress of the effect performed so far. Therefore, regardless of whether the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed or not, when the power is turned on, the home return operation is performed and then the power return operation is performed.

  In the present embodiment, the storage contents of the RAM 223 are not backed up. However, a configuration may be adopted in which backup power is supplied and the information stored in the RAM 223 can be retained even after the power is cut off. With this, when the power is cut off during the production, the progress of the production at the time of the power supply being turned off after the power is turned on can be determined, and the production can be executed from the continuation, so that the player's interest in the game is improved. be able to.

  FIG. 346 (a) is a diagram illustrating an example of the power return operation table 222qc. As shown in FIG. 346 (a), the power supply return operation table 222qc defines the operation contents of the accessory for each value of the return pointer 223qe. Although the details will be described later, the return pointer 223qe is set in the initial operation process (see FIG. 357) every time the main process 14 (see FIG. 355) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed until the return operation is completed. Are updated one by one.

  As shown in FIG. 346 (a), the power return operation table 222qc of the present embodiment is configured such that the return operation is performed in the order of the tilting role object 510 → the standing role object 410 in accordance with the update of the return pointer 223qe. ing. Further, in the return operation, each accessory is varied from the origin position to the overhang position, and then is varied back to the origin position. That is, the entire operation range in which the accessory may change during the normal game is exhaustively operated by the return operation. Thus, when an abnormality has occurred in any of the accessories, the abnormality can be reliably detected.

  In addition, the power return operation table 222qc of the present embodiment is configured to stop the operation for a predetermined period (2000 ms) after changing each accessory to the overhang position. This makes it possible to detect whether an error has occurred during the operation from the overhang position and the operation from the overhang position to the origin position, and also to detect whether or not an abnormality has occurred while the operation is stopped. can do. Note that the abnormality during the operation stop may be, for example, a case where the operation is not stopped despite the setting of the operation stop, or a point at which the operation is stopped before the predetermined period (2000 ms) designated as the operation stop period elapses. The return to the position may occur, or the return to the origin position may not be started even after the operation stop period has elapsed.

  Further, the power supply return operation table 222qc of the present embodiment is configured to set an operation stop period for a predetermined period (2000 ms) after the return operation of all the accessories ends. This suspension period is used as a timing for ending the confirmation and shutting off the power of the pachinko machine 10 when confirming whether or not the sub-side control device such as the sound lamp control device 113 normally starts up by shipping inspection or the like. Is provided. That is, if the accessory is operated immediately after the return operation is completed, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 waits until the operated accessory returns to the original point and then shuts off the power or operates the accessory. The power supply must be shut off during the operation, and the accessory must be manually returned to the origin position after the power supply is cut off, which may deteriorate the inspection efficiency. On the other hand, by providing an operation stop period after the end of the return operation as in the present embodiment, if the power is shut off during the operation stop period, the power is shut off in a state where all the characters are at the origin positions. State. Therefore, since it is not necessary to wait until returning to the origin position or to manually return the accessory to the origin position after the power is turned off, it is possible to improve inspection efficiency such as shipping inspection.

  In the fourteenth embodiment, when the setting is changed when the power is turned on, the power return operation (and the origin return operation) is delayed until the setting change is completed. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the difficulty in performing the setting change operation due to the obstruction of the operation of each accessory, thereby improving the convenience at the time of the setting change operation. In the setting change state, it is necessary to open the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 in order to operate the setting keys 110b and the setting switches 110c provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, but these are opened. In the state, since the inner frame 12 and the outer frame 14 are in a relatively unstable state supported only by the opening / closing shaft, an abnormal load occurs when the returning operation of the accessory is executed, and the opening / closing shaft is opened. Etc. may be caused. On the other hand, by using a configuration in which the return operation of the accessory is delayed in the setting change state, the accessory can be prevented from operating in an unstable state in which the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are open. In addition, damage to the opening / closing shaft and the like can be prevented. Further, in the fourteenth embodiment, when the setting is confirmed at the time of turning on the power, the power return operation (and the home return operation) is avoided. This is because if the setting is in the setting confirmation state when the power is turned on, the state of the pachinko machine 10 is unlikely to change. With this configuration, the accessory can be returned to a normally movable state promptly after the setting confirmation state ends.

  Next, details of the accessory operation setting table 222qd in the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 346 (b). The accessory operation setting table 222qd is a data table that defines the type (group) of the accessory to be operated and the operation timing in various effects of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the operation of the accessory is set based on the accessory operation setting table 222qd. FIG. 346 (b) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the accessory operation setting table 222qd. As shown in FIG. 346, in the accessory operation setting table 222qd, the timing of operating the accessory and the group of the accessory operated at the operation timing are defined for each corresponding effect.

  More specifically, in the super reach production in which the production time is out of 30 seconds, a series of operations in which the tilting role object 510 moves to the overhang position and then moves to the origin position at the timing when 20 seconds have elapsed from the production start. It is specified to execute. In addition, in the normal reach production in which the production time is 20 seconds, at the timing when 19 seconds have elapsed from the start of the production, after the standing character 410 moves to the overhang position, a series of operations to move to the origin position are executed. Stipulated. Furthermore, in the super reach production in which the production time is 30 seconds, a series of operations in which the tilting role object 510 moves to the overhang position and then moves to the origin position at the timing when 20 seconds have elapsed from the start of the production. Is stipulated. In addition, it is stipulated that, at the timing when 29 seconds have elapsed from the start of the effect, a series of operations of moving the upright role 410 to the extension position and then moving to the origin position are executed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, since the operation timing of the accessory and the group of the accessory to be operated are defined in the accessory operation setting table 222qd, each group is determined based on the accessory operation setting table 222qd. By simply performing a predetermined operation on the other hand, it is possible to realize operations of various types of characters.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the operation of the accessory is not performed in all the variable effects, but the operation of the accessory is set only in a part of the variable effects having a relatively long fluctuation time. A fluctuation production with a relatively long fluctuation time has a low probability of being selected as a production for notifying a departure, and is easily selected as a production for notifying a jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a high expectation for the jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to whether the accessory operates or not, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the accessory is operated only in a part of the variation pattern effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, you may comprise so that an accessory may operate also in other effects, such as a jackpot opening effect, an ending effect, and a round effect. Further, the type of the variable effect for operating the accessory may be increased, and for example, the accessory may be operated even in a departure normal reach or the like. This makes it possible to further diversify the effect, so that the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

  Next, details of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 343 (b). FIG. 343 (b) is a block diagram showing a configuration of the RAM 223 according to the fourteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 343 (b), the configuration of the RAM 223 in the fourteenth embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 (see FIG. 302) in the thirteenth embodiment (and the twelfth embodiment) by the sub-setting values. A storage area 223qa, a through number counter 223qb, an initialization flag 223qc, a closing operation flag 223qd, a return pointer 223qe, an accessory operation flag 223qf, a return delay flag 223qg, and a return standby flag 223qh are added. Is different. Further, an interruption flag 223m, a special figure 2 change start flag 223fa, a special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223fb, a preparation state flag 223fd, a special figure 1 change time counter 223fe, and a special figure 2 change time counter 203ff , RUSH flag 223fg, a ceiling effect flag 223fh, a super RUSH flag 223fi, and a consecutive out-of-sequence effect counter 223na. These deletions are mainly intended to eliminate flags and counters for managing various effects that are not executed in the fourteenth embodiment.

  The slave setting value storage area 223qa is a storage area for storing data indicating the setting value of the pachinko machine 10. In the slave setting value storage area 223qa, when data indicating a setting value set in the setting change state is notified from the main control device 110 as a setting value command, data corresponding to the setting value notified by the command is stored. Is stored (see S14204 in FIG. 358).

  The through number counter 223qb is a counter for counting the number of consecutive times (the number of throughs) in which the transition to the advantageous gaming state has failed. When setting the effect mode of the fluctuation pattern effect, the number of throughs indicated by the value of the number-of-throughs counter 223qb and the specified contents of the win rate suggestion effect lottery table 222qa are referred to, and whether or not the win rate suggestion effect can be executed. Is determined (see S18215 in FIG. 363).

  The initialization flag 223qc is a flag that indicates whether or not it is a period during which the return operation of the accessory performed based on turning on the power is performed. As long as the initialization flag 223qc is on, an initial operation process (see FIG. 357) that is a process for setting the return operation of the accessory is executed. On the other hand, if the initialization flag 223qc is off, it indicates that the return operation of the accessory has already been completed, and thus the initial operation process (see FIG. 357) is skipped (see S8901: No in FIG. 356). The initialization flag 223qc is set to ON in the home position return process (see S4021) of the startup process 14 (see FIG. 353) (see S8807 in FIG. 354). On the other hand, in the initial operation processing, when it is determined that the return operation of the accessory has been completed (that is, when the END information is read from the power supply return operation table 222qc), it is set to OFF (see S9104 in FIG. 357). ).

  The closing operation flag 223qd is a flag indicating whether or not the home position return of the accessory executed before the power return operation is completed. If the throwing operation flag 223qd is on, it indicates that the return to origin of the accessory has been completed, and if it is off, it indicates that the return to origin has not been completed. The closing operation flag 223qd is set to ON when it is determined that the home position return operation has been completed (see S9008 in FIG. 357). Further, as described above, since the RAM 223 is not backed up, the turning-on operation flag 223qd is also cleared (that is, turned off) when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off.

  The return pointer 223qe is used to select the operation data of the accessory from the power supply return operation table 222qc (see FIG. 346 (a)) which defines the operation content of the return operation of the accessory performed based on the power-on. Can be More specifically, each time the initial operation process (see FIG. 357) executed at 1 ms intervals is performed, the return pointer 223qe is updated (1 is added to the value of the return pointer 223qe), and the updated value is updated. The action of the accessory indicated by the value is set. Since the RAM 223 is not backed up, the return pointer 223qe is cleared to zero (the value becomes 0000H) when the power is turned off. Therefore, every time the power is turned on, the return operation of the accessory can be executed from the beginning of the power return operation table 222qc.

  The accessory operation flag 223qf is a flag indicating whether or not each accessory is being changed. The accessory operation flag 223qf is composed of 2 bytes, and each accessory is associated with each bit. If the value of each bit of the accessory operation flag 223qf is 1, it indicates that the corresponding accessory is being changed, and if it is 0, it indicates that the corresponding accessory is being stopped. The value of the empty bit is fixed to 0. Based on the state of each bit of the accessory operation flag 223qf, the type of the operating accessory can be specified.

  The return delay flag 223qg indicates that, since the setting confirmation state is set at the time of power restoration, the return operation of the accessory (origin return operation, power return operation) is delayed until the setting confirmation state ends. This is a flag for indicating.

  The return standby flag 223qh is a flag for indicating that the setting confirmation state set at the time of power return has been completed and the return operation of the accessory (origin return operation, power return operation) can be started. is there.

<Regarding Main Control Process in Fourteenth Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 347 to 352. First, with reference to FIG. 347, the details of the special symbol variation process 14 (S181) in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. This special symbol change process 14 (S181) is a process executed in place of the special symbol change process 13 (FIG. 318, S141) in the thirteenth embodiment.

  In the special symbol variation process 14 (S181), in each of S10201 to S10211, S10213 to S10222, and S10225, the special symbol variation process 13 (FIG. 318, S141) in the thirteenth embodiment is performed. The same processes as those in S10222 and S10225 are executed.

  In the special symbol variation process 14 (S181) according to the fourteenth embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the present is a big hit (S10231). If it is determined that the present is a big hit (S10231: Yes), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S10231, when it is determined that the present is not a big hit (S10231: No), the process proceeds to S10201.

  In the special symbol variation process 14 (see FIG. 347) in the fourteenth embodiment, each process of S10202 to S10206 relating to the lottery of the first special symbol and each process of S10208 to S10211 relating to the lottery of the second special symbol are performed. The processing order has been changed. That is, in the fourteenth embodiment, the lottery of the second special symbol is executed more preferentially than the lottery of the first special symbol.

  In the special symbol variation process 14 (see FIG. 347) in the fourteenth embodiment, after the process of S10206 or S10211, the first symbol display device 37 replaces the special symbol variation start process 13 (see FIG. 319). A special symbol change start process 14 for starting the change display is executed (S10232), and this process ends. The details of the special symbol change start process 14 (S10232) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the special symbol variation process 14 (see FIG. 347) according to the fourteenth embodiment, when the process of S10219 is completed, the limit reaching flag 203gb is set to off, and the process proceeds to S10220. In the special symbol variation process 14 (S181) according to the fourteenth embodiment, the process directly proceeds to the process of S10225 after executing the process of S10222. This is because, in the fourteenth embodiment, no deviation is provided as a result of the special symbol lottery.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 319, details of the above-described special symbol change start processing 14 (S10232) will be described. The special symbol change start process 14 (S10232) is a process executed in place of the special symbol change start process 13 (FIG. 319, S10212) in the thirteenth embodiment.

  In the special symbol change start process 14 (S10232), in each of S321, S323 to S326 and S330 to S334, in the special symbol change start process 13 (FIG. 319, S10212) of the above-described thirteenth embodiment, respectively. The same processes as those of S323 to S326 and S330 to S334 are executed.

  As shown in FIG. 348, in the special symbol change start process 14 (S10232) in the fourteenth embodiment, first, after executing the process of S321, it is determined whether or not the probability change flag 203fa is ON, that is, It is determined whether or not the state is in the probable change state (S341). If it is determined that the probable change flag 203fa is set to ON (S341: Yes), the first random number 14 table 202pa for the high probability state (FIG. 335) (See (a)), a random number corresponding to the current set value is read out (S342), and the process proceeds to S344. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S341 that the probability change flag 203fa is off (S341: No), the current random number in the first random number 14 table 202pa for low probability time (see FIG. 335 (a)) is used. The random number value corresponding to the set value is read (S343), and the process proceeds to S344.

  In the process of S344, the lottery result is obtained based on the winning random number read in the process of S342 or S343 and the data of the execution area (S344), and the process proceeds to S323.

  The processing in S3341 to S344 is a change due to the fact that the thirteenth embodiment does not have the certainty changing function, whereas the fourteenth embodiment has the certainty changing function.

  Next, details of the set value control processing 14 (S1731) in the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The set value control process 14 (S1731) is a process executed in place of the set value control process (FIG. 291, S1722) in the above-described thirteenth embodiment. This is the process to perform.

  In the setting value control processing 14 (S1731), in each processing of S3101 to S3113, the same processing as the processing of each of S3101 to S3113 of the setting value control processing (FIGS. 291 and S1722) in the thirteenth embodiment is executed. You.

  In the setting value control process 14 (S1731) in the fourteenth embodiment, when the setting key is determined to be in the off position in the process of S3108 (S3108: Yes), the data of the setting value storage area 203ma is displayed. The setting value command is set (S 3121), and this processing ends. By executing the process of S 3121, the setting value can be immediately notified to the sound lamp control device 113 when the setting change state ends.

  Next, the details of the main processing 14 of the main control device 110 in the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The main process 14 (see FIG. 350) is a process executed instead of the main process 13 (FIG. 321) in the thirteenth embodiment.

  Of the main processing 14, in the processing of S1801 to S1803 and S1806 to 1816, the same processing as the processing of S1801 to S1803 and S1806 to 1816 of the main processing 13 (FIG. 321) in the thirteenth embodiment is respectively executed. You.

  Further, in the main process 14 (see FIG. 350) in the fourteenth embodiment, after the process of S1803 is executed, the big hit control process 14 is executed instead of the big hit control process 13 (see FIG. 323) in the thirteenth embodiment. (S1851), and proceeds to the process of S1806. Details of the jackpot control process 14 (S1851) will be described with reference to FIG.

  Of the jackpot control process 14 (S1851), the processes of S1901 to S1912 and 1918 are the same as the processes of S1901 to S1912 and 1918 of the jackpot control process 13 (FIG. 322, S1841) in the thirteenth embodiment, respectively. Is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 351, in the jackpot control process 14 (S1851) in the fourteenth embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S1912 that the current time is the jackpot end timing (S1912: Yes), the jackpot end A jackpot end process 14 for setting a later game state is executed (S11911), and this process ends. Details of the big hit end processing 14 (S11911) will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 352, in the big hit end processing 14 (S11911), first, it is determined whether or not the current big hit is a probability variable big hit (S3501). In the process of S3501, if it is determined that the current jackpot is not a probability variable jackpot (that is, a normal jackpot) (S3501: No), the value of the limit counter 203ga is set to 0 (S3502), and the probability variation flag 203fa is set. The processing is set to off (S3503), and the process proceeds to S3508.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3501, if it is determined that the current jackpot is a probable variable jackpot (S3501: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the limit counter 203ga (S3504), and then the value of the limit counter 203ga after the addition. It is determined whether or not has become 11 (S3505). In the process of S3505, when it is determined that the value of the limit counter after the addition has reached 11 (S3505: Yes), the limit reaching flag 203gb is set to ON (S3507), and after the processes of S3502 and S3503 are executed, S3508 is executed. Move to the processing of. On the other hand, in the process of S3505, when it is determined that the value of the limit counter 203ga after the addition is not 11 (S3505: No), the probable change flag 203fa is set to ON (S3506), and the process proceeds to S3508.

  In the processing of S3508, the number of times of saving corresponding to the type of the jackpot being executed, the data of the winning state storage area 203mb, and the state of the limit reaching flag is read from the saving time table 202qf (see FIG. 341) (S3508). Then, the read number of time savings is set as the counter value of the time saving counter 203h (S3509). Next, a time-saving setting state command for notifying the set number of time savings is set (S3510), a state command corresponding to the game state after the end of the big hit is set (S3511), and the big hit type being executed and the winning state are set. A variation pattern scenario corresponding to the data of the storage area 203 mb and the state of the limit reaching flag is specified (S3512). Then, the data indicating the scenario specified in the processing of S3512 is stored in the variation pattern scenario storage area (S3513), the end of the jackpot is set (S3514), and this processing ends. By executing the big hit end processing 14 (see FIG. 352), the game state after the big hit end can be accurately set by taking into account the number of times of the probability change.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the fourteenth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 353 to 363. First, with reference to FIG. 353, details of the start-up processing 14 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. The start-up process 14 is a process executed in place of the start-up process (FIG. 59) in the above-described thirteenth embodiment (and the first embodiment), and is executed based on turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10. Processing.

  In the start-up process 14, in the processes of S4001 to S4011, the same processes as the processes of S4001 to S4011 of the start-up process (FIG. 59) in the thirteenth embodiment (and the first embodiment) are respectively executed. You.

  In the start-up process 14 according to the fourteenth embodiment, when the process of S4001 ends, the arrangement of each accessory at the time of power-on is determined. An origin return process for returning to the position is performed (S4021), and the process proceeds to S4002. Details of the origin return processing (S4021) will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 354, in the origin return processing (S4021), first, it is determined whether or not a state command indicating a setting change state has been received (S8801). In the process of S8801, if it is determined that the status command indicating the setting change status has been received (S8801: Yes), the return delay flag 223qg is turned on to delay the start of the home position return operation and the power supply return operation of the accessory. (S8802), and the process ends. This makes it possible to delay the returning operation of the accessory until the setting change state is completed, thereby suppressing the possibility that the accessory will operate in the setting change state and make the setting change operation difficult to perform. Can be. In the setting change state, it is necessary to open the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 in order to operate the setting keys 110b and the setting switches 110c provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, but these are opened. In the state, since the inner frame 12 and the outer frame 14 are in a relatively unstable state supported only by the opening / closing shaft, an abnormal load occurs when the returning operation of the accessory is executed, and the opening / closing shaft is opened. Etc. may be caused. On the other hand, by using a configuration in which the return operation of the accessory is delayed in the setting change state, the accessory can be prevented from operating in an unstable state in which the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are open. In addition, damage to the opening / closing shaft and the like can be prevented.

  On the other hand, in the process of S8801, if it is determined that the status command indicating the setting change status has not been received (S8801: No), it is next determined whether a status command indicating the setting confirmation status has been received (S8801). S8803). If it is determined that the status command indicating the setting confirmation status has been received (S8803: Yes), the initialization flag 223qc and the closing operation flag 223qd are set to off (S8804), and this processing ends. That is, it is set so as not to perform (avoid) the return operation of the accessory (origin return operation, power supply return operation). This is a state in which the setting confirmation state is often shifted by an operation of an operator (for example, a clerk of a hall, etc.) in a situation where the pachinko machine 10 is moving without any problem in the gaming state, and therefore, This is because the possibility that an abnormality has occurred in the object is extremely low. By avoiding the return operation of the accessory in the setting confirmation state, the time from the end of the setting confirmation state to the transition to the state where the game can be played as usual including the operation of the accessory is shortened can do.

  On the other hand, in the process of S8803, if it is determined that the status command indicating the setting confirmation status has not been received (S8803: No), it is next determined whether there is any accessory deviated from the origin (S8805). ). In the process of S8805, when it is determined that there is an accessory deviating from the origin (S8805: Yes), an operation in the direction of the origin position is set for the accessory deviating from the origin (S8806), and the operation of S8807 is performed. Move on to processing. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no accessory deviated from the origin (S8805: No), the process of S8806 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S8807. In the processing of S8807, the initialization flag 223qc is set to ON (S8807), and this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 355, details of the main processing 14 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. The main process 14 is a process executed in place of the main process (FIG. 60) in the thirteenth embodiment (and the first embodiment) described above.

  Of the main processing 14, in the processing of S4101 to S4111 and S4114 to S4118, the processing of S4101 to S4111 and S4114 to S4118 of the main processing (FIG. 60) in the thirteenth embodiment (and the first embodiment) is respectively performed. The same processing as the processing is performed.

  In the main process 14 of the fourteenth embodiment, when the process of S4111 is completed, next, the accessory control process for controlling the operation of the various accessory is executed (S4141). Details of the accessory control process (S4141) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 356 and 357. When the processing of S4141 ends, next, the command determination processing 14 is executed (S4142). Details of the command determination processing 14 (S4142) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 358 to 361. After performing the process of S4142, the variable display setting process 14 is performed (S4143), and the process shifts to the process of S4114. Details of the variable display setting processing 14 (S4143) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 362 and 363.

  Next, the contents of the accessory control process (S4141), which is one of the processes in the main process 14 (FIG. 355), will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 356, in the accessory control processing (S4141) in the fourteenth embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the initialization flag 223qc is on (S8901). In the process of S8901, if it is determined that the initialization flag 223qc is on (S8901: Yes), an initial operation process for setting a return operation (initial operation) of the accessory is executed (S8902), and the present process is performed. To end. Details of this initial operation processing (S8902) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S8901 that the initialization flag 223qc is off (S8901: No), it is next determined whether there is any accessory that stops operation (S8903). If it is determined that there is an accessory that stops the operation (S8903: Yes), the operation of the accessory is set to stop, the corresponding bit of the accessory operation flag 223qf is set to 0 (S8904), and the process of S8905 is performed. Move to. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8903 that there is no accessory to stop the operation (S8903: No), the process of S8904 is skipped, and the process shifts to the process of S8905.

  In the processing of S8905, it is determined whether or not there is an accessory to start the operation (S8905). In the process of S8905, when it is determined that there is an accessory to start the operation (S8905: Yes), the operation start is set, and the corresponding bit of the accessory operation flag 223qf is set to 1 (S8906), and the process of S8907 is performed. Move to. On the other hand, in the process of S8905, when it is determined that there is no accessory to start the operation (S8905: No), the process of S8906 is skipped and the process shifts to the process of S8907.

  In the process of S8907, it is determined whether or not the return standby flag 223qh is on (S8907). If it is determined that the return standby flag 223qh is ON (S8907: Yes), the return operation of the accessory has been delayed, and the delay has been released (the return operation can be executed). Therefore, the return standby flag 223qh is set to off (8908), and the flow shifts to the process of S8909. If it is determined that the return standby flag is off (S8907: No), the process ends.

  In the process of S8909, it is determined whether or not there is any accessory deviated from the origin (S8909). If it is determined that there is an accessory deviating from the origin (S8909: Yes), the operation in the origin position direction is set for the accessory deviating from the origin (S8910), and the initialization flag 223qc is turned on. This is set (S8911), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no accessory deviated from the origin (S8909: No), the processing of S8910 is skipped, the processing of S8911 is executed, and this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 357, details of the initial operation process (S8902), which is one of the accessory control processes (FIG. 356, S4141), will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 357, in the initial operation process (S8902) in the fourteenth embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not an abnormal operation of the accessory is detected (S9001). If it is determined in the processing of S9001 that an abnormal operation has been detected (S9001: Yes), a notification operation corresponding to the character that detected the abnormality is set (S9002), an error command is set (S9003), and S9004 is set. Move to the processing of. On the other hand, in the process of S9001, if it is determined that an abnormal operation has not been detected (S9001: No), the processes of S9002 and S9003 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S9004.

  In the process of S9004, it is determined whether or not the closing operation flag 223qd is on (S9004). If it is determined that the closing operation flag 223qd is off (S9004: No), then it is determined whether there is any accessory that is returning to the origin (S9005). In the process of S9005, when it is determined that there is an accessory that is returning to the origin (S9005: Yes), the present process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S9005, when it is determined that there is no accessory that is returning to the origin (S9005: No), the number of drive steps of all the accessory motors is set to 0 (S9006), and the operation is stopped for one second. A period is set (S9007), the closing operation flag 223qd is set to ON (S9008), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9004 that the closing operation flag 223qd is ON (S9004: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the operation stop period (1 second) has elapsed (S9009). If it is determined that the operation suspension period has not elapsed (S9009: No), the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S9009, if it is determined that the operation suspension period has elapsed (S9009: Yes), the return pointer 223qe is updated (S9010), and the power return operation table 222qc (see FIG. 346, (a)) is returned. The data specified by the pointer 223qe is read (S9011), and it is determined whether the END information has been read (S9012). In the process of S9012, if it is determined that the END information has been read (S9012: Yes), it means that the power return operation has been completed, and thus the initialization flag 223qc and the power-on operation flag 223qd are set to off (S9014). ), End this processing. On the other hand, in the process of S9012, if it is determined that the data read from the power return operation table 222qc is not END information (S9012: No), the operation of the accessory corresponding to the read data is set (S9013). The process ends.

  Next, the details of the command determination processing 14 (S4142) in the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The command determination process 14 (S4142) is a process executed in place of the command determination process 11 (FIG. 293, S4311) in the above-described thirteenth embodiment (and the eleventh embodiment).

  Of the command determination processing 14 (S4142), in the processing of S4203, S4205, S4207 to S4211, S4214, S4216 to S4218, S4220, S4231, S4233 to S4235, and S4242, respectively, the thirteenth embodiment (and the eleventh embodiment) ), The same processes as S4203, S4205, S4207 to S4211, S4214, S4216 to S4218, S4220, S4231, S4233 to S4235, and S4242 of the command determination process 11 (FIG. 293, S4311) are executed.

  As shown in FIG. 358, in the command determination process 14 (S4142) of the fourteenth embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S4231 that the status command has been received (S4231: Yes), the thirteenth embodiment ( In place of the status command receiving process 11 (see FIG. 294) in the eleventh embodiment), a status command receiving process 14 is executed (S14201), and this process ends. Details of the status command reception processing 14 (S14201) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 359 and 360.

  If it is determined in the process of S4218 that a hit-related command has been received (S4218: Yes), a jackpot-related process 14 for executing control according to the type of the command related to the jackpot is executed (S14202). Then, the present process ends. Details of the jackpot-related processing 14 (S14202) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4218, when it is determined that the hit-related command has not been received (S4218: No), it is next determined whether or not the set value command has been received (S14203). If it is determined that the set value command has been received (S14203: Yes), the slave set value storage area 223qa is updated according to the set value indicated by the command (S14204), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S14203 that the set value command has not been received (S14203: No), the process shifts to the process of S4220.

  Next, the contents of the status command receiving process 14 (S14201), which is one of the command determining processes 14 (FIG. 358, S4142), will be described with reference to FIG. The status command receiving process 14 (S14201) is a process executed in place of the status command receiving process 11 (FIG. 294, S4241) in the above-described thirteenth embodiment (and the eleventh embodiment).

  Of the status command receiving process 14 (S14201), in the processes of S4509 and S4511 to S4514, the processes of S4509 and S4511 to S4514 of the status command receiving process 11 (FIG. 294, S4241) of the thirteenth embodiment are respectively performed. The same processing is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 359, in the status command receiving process 14 (S14201) in the fourteenth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S4513 that the received command is not a command indicating the setting confirmation status (S4513: No), the normal state setting processing for executing the control according to the type of the state command received in the state where the normal game is possible is executed (S4521), and the flow shifts to the processing of S4509. Details of the normal state setting processing (S4521) will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the normal state setting process (S4521), first, it is determined whether or not the return delay flag 203qg is on (S9101). If it is determined that the return delay flag 203g is ON (S9102: Yes), it means that a status command indicating a normal gaming state has been notified in the setting confirmation state, and the setting confirmation state is terminated and the return operation is performed. Since this means that it has become possible, the return delay flag 203qg is set to off, the return standby flag 203qh is set to on (S9102), and the process moves to S9105. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S9101 that the return delay flag 203qg is off (S9101: No), then it is determined whether the received command is a command indicating either the normal state or the latent state. It is determined (S9103). If it is determined in the process of S9103 that the received command is a command indicating either the normal state or the latent state (S9103: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the through number counter 223qb and updated (S9104). ), And proceeds to the process of S9105. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S9103 that the received command is not a command indicating the normal state or the latent state (S9103: No), the process skips step S9104 and shifts to step S9105.

  In the processing of S9105, it is determined whether or not there is a change in the gaming state (S9105). In the process of S9105, when it is determined that the gaming state has been changed (S9105: Yes), a display command corresponding to the changed gaming state is set (S9106), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S9105 that the game state has not been changed (S9105: No), the processing of S9106 is skipped, and the present processing ends.

  Next, the contents of the jackpot-related processing 14 (S14202), which is one of the command determination processing 14 (FIG. 358, S4142), will be described with reference to FIG. The jackpot-related process 14 (S14202) is a process executed in place of the jackpot-related process (S4802 in FIG. 68) in the above-described thirteenth embodiment (and the first embodiment).

  Of the jackpot-related processing 14 (S14202), in each of S4901, S4902, and S4913 to S4916, S4901 and S4902 of the jackpot-related processing (FIG. 68, S4802) in the thirteenth embodiment (and the first embodiment), respectively. , And S4913 to S4916.

  As shown in FIG. 361, in the jackpot-related process 14 (S14202) of the fourteenth embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S4901 that the jackpot start command has not been received (S4901: No), the process proceeds to S4913. Move on to processing.

  As shown in FIG. 361, in the big hit related process 14 (see FIG. 361) in the fourteenth embodiment, after executing the process of S4902, it is determined whether or not it is a hit during the time saving state of the ordinary symbol (S4921). ). If it is determined that it is not a hit during the time saving state of the ordinary symbol (S4921: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S4921, if it is determined that the hit is during the time saving state of the ordinary symbol (S4921: Yes), the value of the through number counter 223qb is reset to 0 (S4922), and this process ends. By executing the jackpot-related process 14 (see FIG. 361), the number of times of through can be reset when the mode is shifted to the extended mode or the retraction mode. Therefore, it is possible to accurately grasp how long the disadvantageous situation continues for the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 362, details of the variable display setting process 14 (S4143) in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. The variable display setting process 14 (S4143) is a process executed instead of the variable display setting process 13 (FIG. 325, S4161) in the thirteenth embodiment.

  Of the variable display setting processing 14 (S4143), in each of the processing of S5231, S5281, S5282, and S5284 to S5287, S5231, S5281, and S5282 of the variable display setting processing 13 (FIG. 325, S4161) in the thirteenth embodiment are respectively performed. , And S5284 to S5287.

  As shown in FIG. 362, in the variable display setting process 14 (S4143) of the fourteenth embodiment, after performing the process of S5282, the effect mode setting process 13 (see FIG. 327) of the thirteenth embodiment is replaced. Then, the effect form setting process 14 is executed (S5291), and the flow shifts to the process of S5284. Details of the effect mode setting process 14 (S5291) will be described with reference to FIG.

  In each of the effect form setting processing 14 (S5291), in the processing of S8207 and S8208, the same processing as the processing of each of S8207 and S8208 of the effect form setting processing 13 (FIG. 326, S5283) in the thirteenth embodiment is executed. Is done.

  As shown in FIG. 363, in the effect mode setting process 14 (S5291) in the fourteenth embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not a change pattern for setting suggestion has been notified (S18211). When it is determined that the setting suggestion change pattern has been notified (S18211: Yes), a setting suggestion effect mode corresponding to the type of the change pattern is determined (S18212), and the process shifts to S8208. Specifically, when the fluctuation pattern of the even-numbered super reach is notified, the reach is generated in the third symbol with three numbers “2”, “4”, and “6” (triple reach). When the suggestion effect of the mode is set and the variation pattern of the odd-numbered suggestion super reach is notified, a third symbol with three numbers “1”, “3”, and “5” is attached. When a setting suggestion effect in which a reach occurs (triple reach occurs) is set, and a change pattern of setting 1 negative super reach is notified, two numbers “2” and “6” are added. When a setting suggestion effect of a mode in which a reach occurs (a double reach occurs) is set in each of the third symbols, and a change pattern of the high setting confirmed super reach is notified, "4", "5", " 6 " When the setting suggestion effect of the mode in which the reach is generated in each of the third symbols with numbers (triple reach is generated) is set, and the change pattern of the setting 6 confirmed super reach is notified, the number of "6" A setting suggestion effect of a mode in which a reach occurs in the third symbol marked with is set. In this way, when a reach occurs, the set value suggested by the setting suggestion effect can be easily grasped only by checking the number attached to the symbol of the reach, so that the player can easily understand the effect. Aspects can be realized.

  In the fourteenth embodiment, when reach is generated in a pattern other than the setting suggestion variation pattern, a third symbol other than the third symbol with a number of “1” to “6” used for setting suggestion is used. (The third symbol numbered “7” to “9”) is configured to generate reach. This makes it possible to easily understand whether or not the variation pattern is a setting suggestion variation pattern simply by checking the number attached to the symbol in which the reach has occurred. Therefore, it is possible to realize an effect mode that is easy for the player to understand.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S18211 that the change pattern for setting suggestion has not been notified (S18211: No), it is next determined whether or not the current change is a change pattern corresponding to the deviation (step S18211). S18213). If it is determined that the current fluctuation is a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the deviation (S18213: Yes), it is next determined whether the current state is the normal state or the latent state (S18214). In the processing of S18214, if it is determined that the current state is the normal state or the latent state (S18214: Yes), it is determined by lottery probability corresponding to the value of the through number counter 223qb whether or not the state suggestion effect can be executed (S18215). Then, it is determined whether or not the lottery of the execution possibility has been won (S18216). In the process of S18216, when it is determined that the lottery for execution is won (S18216: Yes), the setting value and the value of the effect counter 223f are referred to by referring to the effect type selection table 222qb (see FIG. 345). The effect mode is determined (S18217), and the flow shifts to the process of S8208.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S18213, it is determined that the current fluctuation is not the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the deviation (S18213: No), and in the processing of S18214, it is determined that the present is neither the normal state nor the latent state. In the case (S18214: No), if it is determined in the processing of S18216 that the lottery of the execution of the state suggestion effect has been unsuccessful (S18216: No), the process proceeds to S8207.

  By executing the effect mode setting process 14 (see FIG. 363), when the main control device 110 notifies a change pattern for setting suggestion, an effect indicating a set value according to the change type is executed. In addition to the above, even when the change pattern for setting suggestion is not notified, as the adverse situation continues for the player, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect can be increased. Therefore, the variation of the variable display effect that can suggest the setting to the player can be enriched, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the fourteenth embodiment is configured to execute the special symbol jackpot lottery and the lottery for determining the variation pattern based on the same random number value. Then, a special outlier variation pattern is selected as an outlier variation pattern corresponding to a random number value that becomes a hit in some set values and becomes outlier in some set values. In other words, the configuration is such that the set value can be estimated (narrowed down) when an out-of-place variation pattern that is selected only with some set values is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to cause the player to play a game while paying attention to the type of the variation pattern that is executed when the player loses the game. In addition, since the setting can be suggested by the variation type randomly selected in the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 simply analyzes the variation pattern command output each time a special symbol lottery is executed. Thus, it is only necessary to execute a fluctuation pattern effect according to the analysis result, and the processing load of the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced. In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 only needs to define the correspondence between the variation type and the effect mode of the variation pattern effect, and does not need to know the set value itself (that is, the main control device). 110 does not need to notify the audio lamp control device 113 of the set value. Therefore, the processing load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and the setting value can be prevented from being illegally acquired ( Suppression).

  Further, in the fourteenth embodiment, the execution ratio of the specific effect (winning rate suggestion effect) capable of suggesting the setting increases as the situation becomes more disadvantageous for the player. In other words, the winning rate increases as the number of times that the game cannot be shifted to an advantageous game state (a probability change state that continues until the next big hit or a time saving number of 100 times) after the big hit is continued (the number of throughs increases). It is configured so that the execution ratio of the suggestion effect is high. This makes it possible to remind the player to start the game in the pachinko machine 10 in which the disadvantageous situation continues for a long time, so that the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  Furthermore, in the fourteenth embodiment, when the setting is changed when the power is turned on, the power return operation (and the home return operation) is delayed until the setting change is completed. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the difficulty in performing the setting change operation due to the obstruction of the operation of each accessory, thereby improving the convenience at the time of the setting change operation. In the setting change state, it is necessary to open the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 in order to operate the setting keys 110b and the setting switches 110c provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, but these are opened. In the state, since the inner frame 12 and the outer frame 14 are in a relatively unstable state supported only by the opening / closing shaft, an abnormal load occurs when the returning operation of the accessory is executed, and the opening / closing shaft is opened. Etc. may be caused. On the other hand, by using a configuration in which the return operation of the accessory is delayed in the setting change state, the accessory can be prevented from operating in an unstable state in which the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are open. In addition, damage to the opening / closing shaft and the like can be prevented.

  Further, in the fourteenth embodiment, when the setting is confirmed when the power is turned on, the power return operation (and the origin return operation) is avoided. This is because if the setting is in the setting confirmation state when the power is turned on, the state of the pachinko machine 10 is unlikely to change. With this configuration, the accessory can be returned to a normally movable state promptly after the setting confirmation state ends.

  In the fourteenth embodiment, the winning rate suggestion effect is executed in the normal state as the number of consecutive times (the number of through times) in which the game cannot be shifted to the advantageous extended game mode or the pullback mode after the end of the big hit increases. Although the probability is increased and the possibility that the set value is suggested as a result is increased, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that the success probability of the winning rate suggestion effect is increased when the normal winning state is reached and the normal state is reached after the jackpot. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation for the game even when the player wins the disadvantageous normal jackpot.

  In the fourteenth embodiment, the probability that the winning rate suggestion effect will be performed in the normal state increases as the number of consecutive times (the number of through times) in which the transition to the advantageous retreat mode or the pullback mode cannot be changed after the jackpot ends increases. Although it was configured to be high, it is not limited to this. For example, in combination with the above-described twelfth embodiment, the winning rate suggestion effect is more easily executed in the advantageous consecutive play mode B (latency state) as the number of consecutive misses in the first special symbol lottery increases. Is also good. Further, for example, in the consecutive play mode B, a small hit in the first special symbol, in which a prize ball can hardly be obtained, causes an advantageous small hit change in the second special symbol to be deviated and forcedly stopped in the symbol. It may be configured so that the winning rate suggestion effect is more likely to occur as it occurs. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the stress on the player when an adverse situation occurs. Also, for example, in the pachinko machine 10 of the type that executes a lottery to determine whether to shift (fall) to the low probability state of the special symbol each time a special symbol lottery is executed in the probability variation state, the state is set to the probability variation state. The setting value may be configured to be more easily suggested by the winning rate suggestion effect as the number of special symbol lotteries from when the special symbol is selected to when the lottery is selected is determined. With such a configuration, even if the player has fallen into an unfavorable special symbol low probability state with a small number of lotteries, it is possible to reduce the disappointment of the player.

  In the fourteenth embodiment, the distribution of the jackpot determination value (random number value) is made different according to the setting, and some of the set values are out of order, and some of the set values are out of order. In such a case, the configuration is such that a special variation pattern is determined in the event that the setting value is determined, so that the setting value can be suggested by the special variation pattern. However, the configuration is not limited to this. For example, a configuration is adopted in which a variation pattern selection table in which different data is simply defined according to settings is provided, and a variation pattern that is easily selected with some set values or a variation pattern that is selected only with some set values is provided. You may. With this configuration, it is not necessary to set the jackpot determination value to a discrete value, so that it is possible to reduce the work of the developer when setting the jackpot determination value.

  In the fourteenth embodiment, when the setting key 110b is turned on and the power is turned on with the RAM clear operation, the returning operation of the accessory is delayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. is not. For example, when the power is turned on with the RAM clear operation, the return operation of the accessory may be executed unconditionally. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the period from the end of the setting change state to the transition to a state in which a normal game including a character can be played.

  In the fourteenth embodiment, only the jackpot probability in the special symbol high-probability state and the special symbol low-probability state are made different according to the setting. However, the target that can be made different according to the setting is It is not limited to. It is only necessary that the degree of advantage of the player differs according to the set value. For example, the number of times of the probability change limit may be increased as the setting is increased. With this configuration, when the mode is shifted to the extended-play mode, the higher the setting, the more easily the extended-play mode loops. Therefore, the pachinko machine having a higher set value is provided to the player. It is possible to strongly desire to play a game at 10. Therefore, the game can be performed by paying more attention to the contents of the setting suggestion effect and the winning rate suggestion effect, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the fourteenth embodiment, when the setting is changed at the time of turning on the power (that is, the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are opened to operate the setting key 110b and the setting switch 110c on the back side of the pachinko machine 10). ), The start of the return operation of the accessory (origin return operation, power supply return operation) is delayed until the setting change state ends, but the present invention is not limited to this. . For example, even if the setting change state ends, the start of the return operation of the accessory may be delayed while at least one of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 is open. With this configuration, the accessory operates in a state where the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are open, and a load different from that during the normal game is applied to the opening / closing axis and the front frame 14 of the inner frame 12. Can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the hinge 18, the hinge 19, and the like from being damaged as a result of generating a larger load than usual.

  In the fourteenth embodiment, when the power is turned on and the setting is changed, the start of the return operation of the accessory is delayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. Some or all of the accessories may be executed based on power-on without delaying the return operation. In this case, as the accessory that starts the return operation immediately after the power is turned on regardless of whether or not the setting is changed, the setting change operation is not hindered, and the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are open. In this state, the movement amount of the position of the center of gravity based on the accessory operation may be set to be within a predetermined amount (for example, 5 cm). In the state where the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are open, since these are supported only by the opening / closing shaft, the role of the center of gravity can be largely shifted (the heavy type or the high-speed moving type). When a movable object having a long moving distance is moved, an excessive load may be applied to the opening / closing axis. Therefore, the opening operation of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 and the like can be started immediately after the power supply is turned on by starting only the return operation of the accessory that has little effect on the center of gravity of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 due to the movable state. Can be prevented from being damaged.

  In the fourteenth embodiment, the third symbol for notifying the jackpot is selected without any limitation. In other words, even if a reach occurs in the third symbol with "6" attached thereto, if the same three symbols are all reported as a jackpot, the setting 6 fixed super reach, which is a type of deviation variation, Although it was configured to determine that there is no such information, it is not limited to this. For example, when reach occurs in the third symbol numbered “1” to “6” (that is, when reach occurs in the third symbol that can be selected in the setting suggestion variation pattern), Even if it comes off or comes off, it may be configured such that the setting is indicated by the number attached to the third symbol where the reach occurred (the setting is indicated regardless of whether the same third symbol is prepared). Good. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a jackpot is notified even though the user thinks that a good setting is suggested, and the player is made to think that he / she has been delighted.

<Modification of Fourteenth Embodiment>
Next, a modification of the above-described fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the above-described fourteenth embodiment, when a reach occurs in the third symbol display device 81, the type of the variation pattern is indicated to the player by a number attached to the symbol in which the reach has occurred. Was. More specifically, the simultaneous occurrence of reach in the third symbol with three numbers “2”, “4”, and “6” indicates that the possibility of setting an even number is high, The simultaneous occurrence of reach in the third symbol with three numbers of "1", "3", and "5" suggests that the odd number setting is highly possible, and that the number of "2" and "6" is high. Reach occurs in the third symbol with two numbers, indicating that there is no possibility of setting 1, and three numbers of "4", "5", and "6" are added. Reach occurs simultaneously in the third symbol, indicating that the setting is high (any one of settings 4 to 6), and reach occurs in the third symbol numbered “6”. Thus, it is configured to indicate that the setting is 6.

  In addition to this, in the present modified example, various effect examples that suggest that there is a possibility that a setting suggestion effect may occur depending on the effect mode before a reach occurs will be described.

  First, FIG. 368 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when a reach symbol selection effect for causing the player to select a type of the reach symbol is executed. This reach symbol selection effect can be executed during a predetermined period (for example, when 5 seconds to 10 seconds have elapsed after the start of the fluctuation) before the timing when the reach occurs (for example, when 11 seconds have elapsed after the start of the fluctuation). It is a production with a possibility. As shown in FIG. 368 (a), when the reach symbol suggestion effect is executed, a display region imitating a balloon is formed for the small region Ds3 in the sub display region Ds, and the display region is formed inside the display region. The text "Select a reach symbol with PUSH !!" is displayed. Further, in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, a display area in which the character “Choice!” Is displayed in the center of the main display area Dm is formed, and the upper right side of the main display area Dm is displayed. , Three third symbols with numbers "4", "5" and "6" are displayed, and a third symbol with the number "6" is displayed on the lower right side. An area is formed, and a display area in which a third symbol with the number “7” is displayed is formed on the upper left side, and numbers “2”, “4”, and “6” are added on the lower left side. The displayed three third symbols are displayed. During execution of the reach symbol selection effect, one of the four display areas in which different combinations of the third symbols are displayed is set to have a lighted (light emitting) appearance, and the remaining display areas are turned off. Is set. When the player presses the frame button (PUSH button) 22, the third symbol shown in the display area that is set to be lit and is set as the reach symbol in the variable display effect. Thereby, the player can be given a pleasure to select the reach symbol, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. In addition, if the reach in the third symbol with the number “6” is selected and the reach is deviated, it is determined that the super reach is set to 6, so even if a hit is made, the super reach is determined. Even if it becomes, it can delight the player. In other words, in the case of the reach symbol selection effect, when the choices include a combination of symbols that are determined to be relatively advantageous to the player when deviating, such as a high setting suggested super reach and a setting 6 confirmed super reach. In addition, a player who desires a high setting can be expected to select the symbol combination for setting suggestion, and then expect the variable display to be lost. Conversely, a player who expects a big hit can be caused to play a game with the expectation that the big hit will be notified. As described above, by executing the reach symbol selection effect, the reach symbol to be selected and the result of the expected fluctuation display are different depending on whether the player desires a high setting or a player who desires a jackpot. Since the game can be performed, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In addition, in the case of a player who desires a high setting, in particular, when the degree of expectation of a notice (for example, a so-called reservation notice effect, a comment notice effect, or the like) for the change is low (a content corresponding to a low possibility of being a big hit). In the case of), at the point in time when a combination option (display area) corresponding to the suggestion of the high setting is displayed in the reach symbol selection effect, the sense of expectation that the high setting is suggested can be increased. In other words, if the reach design selection effect is executed in consideration of other effects, it is determined whether the setting is likely to be suggested (out of place) or whether the jackpot is likely to be notified. Since it is possible to realize the gaming ability to play the game, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the player in the game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 368 (b), the reach symbol prefetch effect in this modification will be described. FIG. 368 (b) is a diagram showing a display mode of the reach symbol prefetch effect. As shown in FIG. 368 (b), when the reach symbol look-ahead effect is executed, the character “6 reach is on hold” is displayed in the small area Ds3. That is, in the fluctuation display based on any of the holding balls, the player can easily understand that the reach effect of the effect mode in which the reach occurs in the “6” symbol is executed. So also in this case. A player who wants to set a high setting can be expected to come off when a reach occurs in the symbol “6”. In addition, in the case where a preview effect in which the display mode of a part of the reserved symbols is changed (a so-called “hold preview effect”) has occurred, the holding ball in which the hold preview effect has occurred (that is, the display mode has not been changed). It is possible to realize a novel game characteristic that it is possible to more strongly expect that the reach of the symbol “6” does not occur in the reserved ball having a higher jackpot expectation degree than the reserved ball. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. In the reach symbol prefetching effect, a pattern for notifying another third symbol for setting suggestion is also provided, and another symbol (for example, a symbol having a high jackpot expectation degree of “7”) is notified. An embodiment is also provided. Thereby, when the reach symbol look-ahead effect is executed, it is possible to realize a gaming ability of estimating a jackpot expectation degree, an expectation degree at which a setting suggestion is performed, and the like from the notified symbol type, so that the player Interest in games can be improved.

  In the fourteenth embodiment, the setting value is displayed on the setting value display device 110a in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. However, instead of or in addition to this, the third symbol display device 81 may be used. May also be displayed. In this case, in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the return operation of the accessory is delayed or avoided, so that the set value displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is hidden behind the accessory by the movement of the accessory. Since it is possible to suppress the operation, the operation of the accessory in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state can be more appropriately controlled.

  In the fourteenth embodiment, the start of the return operation of the accessory is suppressed (delayed) during the setting change state. However, the return operation may be started even in the setting change state. In this case, in the setting change state, the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are opened, and the operation of the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mostly performed by the clerk of the hall. It becomes difficult to confirm. Therefore, when an abnormality occurs in the operation of the accessory during the setting change state, the operation is more conspicuous than when an abnormality occurs in the operation of the accessory in a state other than the setting change state (note the back side of the pachinko machine 10). However, the abnormality may be notified in a manner that can be easily noticed. With this configuration, when an abnormality has occurred in a part or all of the accessory, it is possible to easily make the clerk of the hall aware of the abnormality.

<Fifteenth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to fourteenth embodiments, the main controller 110 constantly updates the value of the first random number counter C1 and the counter value of the first random number counter C1 acquired at the time of the start winning. Is determined to determine whether or not matches a winning random number, thereby executing a lottery (big hit lottery) as to whether or not the special symbol is a big hit. In addition, the configuration is such that the jackpot lottery is executed by using a first random number table in which a different random number value is associated with each set value.

  On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifteenth embodiment has a configuration in which a random number generation IC 900 capable of generating a random number (first random number counter R1) is provided separately from the main control device 110. The configuration is such that the random number value (counter value of the first random number counter R1) generated by the generation IC 900 is obtained and used for the jackpot lottery. The random number generation IC 900 is configured to be able to specify a random number update range, and by setting a different random number update range according to a set value, a large hit lottery using a common hit determination value. It is configured to be able to change the probability. For example, if the random number update range of the second setting is halved with respect to the random number update range of the first setting, the probability denominator of the jackpot probability in the second setting is half of the first setting. The jackpot probability in the second setting can be reduced to half of the jackpot probability in the first setting. With such a configuration, the main controller 110 simply sets a random number update range according to the set value to the random number generation IC at the time of setting change, and executes a special symbol lottery when executing a special symbol lottery. It is only necessary to compare the common winning random number value with the counter value of the first random number counter R1 obtained from the random number generating IC. In other words, the main control device 110 does not need to store different collision determination values for each set value, and only needs to store one common collision determination value regardless of the setting. The processing load at the time of drawing a special symbol can be reduced by the amount that the process of selecting the hit determination value can be deleted. Further, the capacity of the random number table per first can be reduced.

  The difference between the pachinko machine 10 of the fifteenth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment is that a random number generation IC 900 is electrically connected to the input / output port 205 of the main controller 110. That is, the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 is partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, FIG. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the eleventh embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the electrical configuration according to the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 364 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 364, in the fifteenth embodiment, in addition to the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment described above, a random number generation IC 900 is electrically connected to the input / output port 205 of the main controller 110. It is different in that it is. The random number generation IC 900 is used to generate a winning random number (first random number counter R1) acquired based on a winning start. That is, instead of the first random number counter C1 stored in the RAM 203 in the eleventh embodiment, a counter value (random number value) used for the jackpot lottery (determination) executed in the main controller 110 is obtained from an external IC. It is configured to With this configuration, the storage area for storing various counter values in the RAM 203 can be reduced, so that the capacity of the RAM 203 can be saved. Further, since the process of updating various counter values can be omitted, the processing load on the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can be reduced. This random number generation IC 900 can randomly generate a numerical value of a maximum of 16 bits (0 to 65535) as the value of the first random number counter R1. The random number generation IC 900 includes, for example, a clock generation circuit capable of generating a clock frequency of 250 kHz inside. Every time a clock signal is generated by the clock generation circuit, the IC 900 is synchronized with the clock signal. A random number value within the set random number update range (the value of the first random number counter R1) can be randomly generated. That is, since the random number value can be randomly generated every 0.004 milliseconds, the random number value can be generated at an interval shorter than the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39). it can. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent a situation in which the random number value is not updated over a plurality of times of the timer interrupt processing, and it is possible to ensure the randomness in the jackpot lottery.

  In the fifteenth embodiment, only the first random number counter R1 is generated by the random number generation IC 900. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, some or all of the various counter values, such as the first hit type counter C2, the change type counter CS1, the second hit random number counter C4, and the ordinary figure change type counter CS2, are generated by the random number generation IC 900. It may be replaced with a random value. With this configuration, the storage area for storing various counter values in the RAM 203 can be reduced, so that the capacity of the RAM 203 can be saved. Further, since the process of updating various counter values can be omitted, the processing load on the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

  Next, details of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 according to the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 365. Although illustration is omitted, the ROM 202 according to the fifteenth embodiment is different from the configuration of the ROM 202 according to the eleventh embodiment (see FIG. 268 (a)) in that the first random number 11 table 202ma is used instead of the first random number 11 table. 15 is different only in that a table 202ra is provided and a random number range setting table 202rb that defines a random number update range of the random number generation IC 900 for each set value is added.

  First, the details of the first random number 15 table 202ra in the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 365 (a) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the first random number 15 table 202ra in the fifteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 365 (a), the first random number 15 table 202ra in the fifteenth embodiment defines “0 to 204” as the jackpot determination value in the low probability state of the special symbol, and the high value of the special symbol. “0 to 643” is defined as the jackpot determination value in the probability state (probable change state). That is, only the big hit determination value of setting 1 (see FIG. 269 (a)) in the eleventh embodiment is defined. In the fifteenth embodiment, instead of using a common random number value (hit determination value) defined in the first random number 15 table 202ra, the range of the random number value generated by the random number generation IC 900 is set according to the setting. By making it variable, the jackpot probability for each setting is configured to be the same as in the eleventh embodiment.

  Next, the details of the random number range setting table 202rb in the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The random number range setting table 202rb is a data table that is referred to when setting a random number generation range (random number update range) according to the set value for the random number generation IC 900. At the end of the setting change state, the random number generation range corresponding to the set value is specified with reference to the random number range setting table 220rb, and the specified random number generation range is set for the random number generation IC 900. . By making the random number generation range different, the probability denominator in the jackpot lottery can be made different for each setting, so that the jackpot probability can be made substantially different according to the setting.

  As shown in FIG. 365 (b), in the random number range setting table 202rb in the fifteenth embodiment, “0 to 65535” is defined in association with the random number generation range corresponding to the setting 1, and corresponds to the setting 2. As a random number generation range to be set, “0 to 61499” is associated and defined. As a random number generation range corresponding to setting 3, “0 to 57399” is associated and defined. As a random number generation range corresponding to setting 4, “0-53299” is defined in association with “0-49199” as a random number generation range corresponding to setting 5, and “0-45099” is defined as a random number generation range corresponding to setting 6. It is defined in association.

  Therefore, in the setting 1, the value of the first random number counter R1 can take 65536 values of “0 to 65535”, and the large probability of the special symbol in the low probability state and the high probability state of the special symbol in the setting 1 is 1 respectively. / 320 (205/65536) and 1 / 1101.8 (644/65536). Further, in the setting 2, the value of the first random number counter R1 can take 61500 values of “0 to 61499”. / 300 (205/61500) and 1 / 95.5 (644/61500). In setting 3, since the value of the first random number counter R1 can take 57400 values of “0 to 57399”, the big hit probability in the low probability state and the high probability state in the special symbol in setting 3 is 1 / 280 (205/57400) and 1 / 89.1 (644/57400). Further, in setting 4, the value of the first random number counter R1 can take 53300 values of “0-53299”, so that the large probability of the special symbol in the low probability state and the high probability state in the setting 4 is 1 / 260 (205/53300) and 1 / 82.8 (644/53300). In setting 5, since the value of the first random number counter R1 can take 49200 values of “0 to 49199”, the big hit probability in the low probability state and the high probability state of the special symbol in setting 5 is 1 respectively. / 240 (205/49200) and 1 / 76.4 (644/49200). In setting 6, since the value of the first random number counter R1 can take 45100 values of “0 to 45099”, the jackpot probabilities of the low probability state and the high probability state of the special symbol in the setting 6 are each 1 / 220 (205/45100) and 1/70 (644/45100).

  As described above, in the fifteenth embodiment, only the range of the common hit determination value that does not depend on the set value is defined in the first random number 15 table 202ra, and the random number generation IC 900 generates the random number value. By changing the range in accordance with the set value, the jackpot probability for each setting is varied. With this configuration, the data amount of the first random number 15 table 202ra can be reduced, and the process of reading the jackpot determination value according to the set value is not required when executing the jackpot lottery. In addition, the processing load at the time of the jackpot lottery can be reduced.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Control Device in Fifteenth Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 366 and 367. First, with reference to FIG. 366, details of the start winning processing 15 (S1751) in the fifteenth embodiment will be described. This start winning process 15 (S1751) is a process executed in place of the start winning process 4 (see FIG. 134) in the eleventh embodiment (and the fourth embodiment), and various random numbers ( (Counter value).

  In the start winning processing 15 (see FIG. 366) in the fifteenth embodiment, in the processing of S1751 to S1755, S1757 to S1762, and S1764, the start winning processing 4 in the eleventh embodiment (and the fourth embodiment) is performed. The same processes as those of S1751 to S1755, S1757 to S1762, and S1764 of FIG. 134 are performed.

  In the startup winning process 15 (see FIG. 366) in the fifteenth embodiment, when the process of S1755 ends, the value of the first random number counter R1 is acquired from the random number generation IC 900 (S1771). Further, the respective values of the first hit type counter C2 and the variation type counter CS1 are obtained, and the obtained counter values (random numbers) are stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da (S1772), and the processing is performed. Is shifted to S1775.

  In the start winning process 15 (see FIG. 366) in the fifteenth embodiment, when the process of S1762 ends, the value of the first random number counter R1 is acquired from the random number generation IC 900 (S1773). Further, the values of the first hit type counter C2 and the variation type counter CS1 are obtained, and the obtained counter values (random numbers) are stored in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203db (S1774). Is shifted to S1764.

  By executing the start winning process 15 (see FIG. 366), the value of the first random number counter R1 randomly generated by the random number generation IC 900 can be acquired every time a start winning is detected.

  Next, the setting value control processing 15 (S1741) in the fifteenth embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This set value control process 15 (S1741) is executed in place of the set value control process (see FIG. 291) in the eleventh embodiment, and is a process for performing control in a setting change state and a setting confirmation state.

  In the set value control process 15 (see FIG. 367), in each process of S3101 to S3113, the same process as the process of each of S3101 to S3113 of the set value control process (see FIG. 291) in the eleventh embodiment is executed. Is done.

  In the setting value control process 15 (see FIG. 367) in the fifteenth embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S3108 that the setting key 110b is located at the off position, the random number generation range corresponding to the setting value is changed to the random number range. It is read from the setting table 202rb (see FIG. 365 (b)), the read random number generation range is set in the random number generation IC 900 (S3131), and this processing ends.

  By executing the set value control process 15 (see FIG. 367), a random number generation range can be set according to the set value. The jackpot probability can be changed accordingly.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifteenth embodiment is configured to acquire, from an external IC, the counter value (random number value) used for the jackpot lottery (determination) executed in the main controller 110. . With this configuration, the storage area for storing various counter values in the RAM 203 can be reduced, so that the capacity of the RAM 203 can be saved. Further, since the process of updating various counter values can be omitted, the processing load on the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can be reduced. Further, in the fifteenth embodiment, the first random number 15 table 202ra in which the determination value determined to be a big hit in the special symbol lottery is specified, only the range of the common hit determination value independent of the set value. Is defined, and the range of generating a random number value in the random number generation IC 900 is varied according to the set value, so that the jackpot probability for each setting is varied. With this configuration, the data amount of the first random number 15 table 202ra can be reduced, and the process of reading the jackpot determination value according to the set value is not required when executing the jackpot lottery. In addition, the processing load at the time of the jackpot lottery can be reduced.

<Sixteenth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the sixteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 369 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, FIG. 370 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 371 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 369, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 369) to support the inner frame 12. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 370) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63a, 63b, 64a, 64b, 65a and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front of the game board 13. Note that the inner frame 12 has a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 373) that launches a ball into the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides a ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower plate unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 369), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation. The pachinko machine 10 is provided with a door opening switch 208g (see FIG. 374) for detecting that either the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is unlocked and opened (the door is opened). I have.

  The front frame 14 is provided with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and is provided with a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 is visible on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape that projects forward and has an open upper surface, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 369), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112 a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 on the left side in front view.

  The frame button 22 is, for example, a button pressed by the player when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 370) described later. The frame button 22 is also used as an operation button for allowing a player to select the effect content in a so-called super reach, which is one mode of the variable effect.

  The fluctuation effect is an effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As described later, the ball fired on the front area of the game board 13 is a specific winning opening (a second starting port 64b described later. 370.) is executed when a ball (starting prize) is entered, and after a symbol (a third symbol described later) is fluctuated and displayed for a predetermined time, a combination of symbols stopped and displayed indicates that the winning prize is awarded. This is an effect of presenting the result (whether or not a jackpot) of the lottery performed to the player.

  The stage is an effect mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are provided with uniformity. There are two stages. Various effects such as the above-described fluctuation effects and reach effects performed during the fluctuation effects are designed to be performed in accordance with the theme given to each stage.

  The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is pressed by the player during a period in which the fluctuation effect is not performed, or during a high-speed fluctuation in which the third symbol is displayed in a high-speed fluctuation so as to be invisible to the player. Each time the frame button 22 is operated, the state is repeatedly changed in the order of “town stage” → “sky stage” → “island stage” → “town stage” →. Immediately after the power is turned on, the “city stage” is set as the initial stage.

  Further, when the normal reach production is started in the variable production performed by the third symbol display device 81, when the normal reach is changed to the super reach, the selection screen of the super reach production mode selection screen is displayed during the normal reach. It is configured to be displayed on the display device 81.

  On the selection screen, a plurality of production mode candidates that can be selected as super-reach production modes are displayed, and one of the production mode candidates is selected. If the player presses the frame button 22 while the selection screen is displayed, the selected effect mode candidate is changed. Then, the super-reach effect mode is determined based on the effect mode candidate selected when developing into super-reach, and the super-reach is executed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the effect mode.

  In the present embodiment, the frame button 22 is configured as a button that is pressed down. However, instead of the frame button 22, a predetermined direction (for example, a , Rearward, rightward, and leftward). Then, based on the direction in which the operation lever is tilted, the effect stage may be selected and changed, or the effect mode of super reach may be selected.

  Light emitting means such as various lamps is provided around the front frame 14 (for example, at a corner). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or at a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. On the periphery of the window 14c, there are provided illuminations 29 to 33 in which light-emitting means such as LEDs are incorporated. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and at the time of a big hit or a reach effect, etc., each of the illumination parts 29 to 33 is lit by turning on or blinking a built-in LED. Or, it flashes to notify that a jackpot is in progress or that the player is reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, a display lamp 34, which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and is capable of displaying when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error has occurred, is provided at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 in a front view.

  A small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized below the right side illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (see FIG. 370). ) Is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball lending operation unit 40 is provided below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, and the like are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is slid according to the operation. Lending is done. More specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED is turned on, and the balance is displayed as a number as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a remaining amount. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit.

  In a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, a so-called cash machine, the ball-lending operation unit 40 becomes unnecessary. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part to make the parts configuration common. The pachinko machine using the card unit and the cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be completely stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape having an open upper surface at the center thereof. I have. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is arranged, and inside the operation handle 51, the driving of the ball firing unit 112a is permitted. Sensor 51a, a push-button type stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 by a change in electric resistance. (Not shown).

  When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the operation amount. The ball is fired at a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes, and the ball is hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. The firing interval of the sphere in the sphere firing unit 112a is set to about 0.6 seconds. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  At the lower front part of the lower plate 50, a ball release lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball pulling lever 52 is constantly urged rightward, and is slid leftward against the urging, so that a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a “thousand boxes”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is mounted on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 370, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a number of nails and windmills for ball guidance, rails 61 and 62, a first normal winning opening 63 a, The second ordinary winning opening 63b, the first starting opening 64a, the second starting opening 64b, the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, the variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled. Attached to. The first ordinary winning opening 63a, the second ordinary winning opening 63b, the first starting opening 64a, the second starting opening 64b, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. , And is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with a wood screw or the like. Further, the central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c (see FIG. 369) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is provided inside the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front of the game board 13, and the front and rear of the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 369) surround the front and back of the game board 13. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a winning opening or the like is provided on the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70). Area that flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 373) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to a tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 370) of the inner rail 61 to prevent a situation in which a ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right portion in FIG. 370) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball, and the ball fired at a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and momentum. Is rebounded toward the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is provided between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by being driven into the plate 60.

  A first design in which a plurality of light-emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LED”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light-emitting means, are provided on the upper right side (the upper right side in FIG. 370) of the game area in front view. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 performs a display corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays a game state of the pachinko machine 10.

  The plurality of LEDs 37a indicate, by the lighting state of the LED 37a, a fluctuation display performed when a ball (start winning prize) enters one of the first start port 64a and the second start port 64b. As a stop symbol after the end, a symbol corresponding to a result of a lottery performed for the start winning is indicated by a lighting state, or a variation in a ball entered in the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b is changed. The number of reserved balls, which is the number of unexecuted balls (reserved balls), is indicated by the lighting state. The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during a big hit and an error. The LEDs 37a are configured to emit different colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the LEDs, and various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 can be indicated with a small number of LEDs by a combination of the emitted colors.

  The pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not a ball hits the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b as a jackpot (a jackpot lottery). Is also determined. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R certain-variable jackpot, a 2R certain-variable jackpot, and a 15R regular large jackpot are prepared.

  The LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, as a stop symbol after the end of the change executed when the ball enters the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b, If it is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed.

  Here, "15R probability variable jackpot" is a probability variable jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after 15 rounds of jackpot, and "2R probability variable jackpot" means a maximum round number of two rounds. Is a probable jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after. The “15R normal jackpot” is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to the low probability state after the 15 rounds of jackpots and the time is reduced during a predetermined number of changes (for example, 100 changes). .

  The “high-probability state” refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, when the probability is changing (probable change, probability change state). In other words, the special game state (jackpot) ) Is a game state that is easy to shift to. The high-probability state (probable-change state, probable-change state) in the present embodiment includes a state of a game in which the hit probability of a second symbol described later increases and a ball easily enters the second starting port 64b.

  On the other hand, the “low-probability state” refers to a state in which the probability of change is not being changed, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the probability of jackpot is lower than that in the case of probability change. The time saving state (medium time saving) of the “low probability state” is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and only the jackpot probability of the second symbol increases while the jackpot probability remains unchanged, and the second starting port 64b This refers to a game state where a hemisphere easily enters.

  In addition, instead of changing the hit probability of the second symbol, depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the time when the later-described electric accessory attached to the second starting port 64b is opened, or the one time by the second symbol The number of times the electric accessory is opened at the time of the hit may be changed. Specifically, in the time reduction state, the time during which the electric accessory associated with the second starting port 64b is opened is made longer than in the case other than the time reduction state, or the number of times the electric accessory is opened per one time May be increased as compared with the case other than the time saving state. Further, in the time-saving state, at least two of increasing the probability of hitting the second symbol, increasing the opening time of the electric accessory, and increasing the number of times of opening the electric accessory may be performed simultaneously. Good.

  A first ordinary winning opening 63a is provided on the lower left side of the game area, and a second ordinary winning opening 63b is provided on the lower right side of the gaming area. When a ball enters the first ordinary winning opening 63a, a first ordinary winning opening switch 208c (see FIG. 374) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first ordinary winning opening switch 208c is turned on. Eight balls are paid out as prize balls. When a ball enters the second ordinary winning opening 63b, a second ordinary winning opening switch 208d (see FIG. 374) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second ordinary winning opening switch 208d is turned on. As a result, eight balls are paid out as prize balls. Note that the number of prize balls when a ball wins in the first ordinary winning opening 63a and the number of award balls when a ball wins in the second ordinary winning opening 63b are not necessarily the same. The number of prize balls may be different, such as the number of balls and the latter is eight.

  A variable display device unit 80 is provided in the center of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 and a second symbol display device 83. The third symbol display device 81 is synchronized with the fluctuation display on the first symbol display device 37 by using a ball entry (start winning prize) in any one of the first opening 64a and the second opening 64b as a trigger. , A liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”) for performing a variable display (fluctuation effect) of the third symbol. The second symbol display device 83 is provided with a second symbol display device 83 including LEDs that variably display the second symbol when the ball of the through gate 67 passes as a trigger. Further, a center frame 86 is provided in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is configured by a large liquid crystal display of, for example, an 8-inch size, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 (see FIG. 373) described later, so that, for example, the left and the middle are displayed. And the right three symbol columns are displayed.

  Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the decorative display corresponding to the display of the first symbol display device 37 is performed. This is performed by the third symbol display device 81. Note that, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 372 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 372 (a) is a diagram schematically illustrating the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 372 (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten types of main symbols numbered from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is configured by attaching numbers from “0” to “9” on the rear symbol made of a wooden box, and the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are Large numbers are added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) are provided with an attached symbol imitating a character such as a plane, a furoshiki, a helmet, etc. on almost the front of the wooden box. An even number is added to the lower right side of the attached symbol so as to be small in green and displayed in front of the attached symbol.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a lottery result by a main control device 110 (see FIG. 373) described later is a big hit, the same main symbol is displayed on the active line L1 in a variable display (variable effect). ) Is performed, and a big hit occurs after the variable display ends. When shifting to the high-probability state (probable change state) after the end of the jackpot, a fluctuation display is performed in which the main symbols (corresponding to “high-probability symbols”) to which odd numbers are added are aligned on the activated line L1. On the other hand, when the state shifts to the low-probability state after the end of the big hit, a fluctuation display is performed in which the main symbols (corresponding to “low-probability symbols”) to which even numbers are added are aligned on the activated line L1.

  As shown in FIG. 372 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is largely divided into upper and lower parts, and the lower two-thirds display the third symbol (main symbol) in a variable manner (fluctuation effect). The main display area Dm, and the other upper third are the sub-display areas Ds for displaying announcement effects, characters, and the like. Further, a reserved ball count display area Db for displaying the reserved ball count is provided in the lower bottom side center portion of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle, and right. A symbol row Z1 is displayed in the display area Dm1, a symbol row Z2 is displayed in the display area Dm2, and a display area. The symbol row Z3 is displayed on Dm3.

  In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in ascending or descending numerical order, and the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are scrolled from top to bottom with a periodicity to perform a variable display. In particular, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in ascending order.

  Further, in the main display area Dm, a third symbol is displayed in three stages of upper, middle, and lower for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. The middle portion of the main display area Dm is set as the active line L1, and in each variation effect, a third symbol is displayed on the active line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2. Stopped and displayed. When the third symbol is stopped, if a combination of big hit symbols (combination of the same main symbols) is arranged on the pay line L1, a big hit moving image is displayed as a big hit.

  The sub display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Each of the small areas Ds1 to Ds3 is an area for displaying a character and a preview effect image. The images displayed in each of the small areas Ds1 to Ds3 give the player a sense of expectation that a large hit will be achieved as a result of the variable display performed in the main display area Dm. The number-of-reserved-balls display area Db is the number of retained balls that is the number of balls (reserved balls) for which the variable display (fluctuation effect) has not been executed among the balls entered into the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b. Is an area for displaying.

  In the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 372 (b), a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the left small area Ds1 and the right small area Ds3, suggesting to the player that the transition to the big hit is easier than usual. In the central small area Ds2, normally, a predetermined character (a boy with a beeper in this embodiment) performs a predetermined operation, sometimes performs a special operation different from the predetermined operation, or a black boy. The notice effect is performed by changing the color of the hair of the user, the color of the normally white bee, or the appearance of another character.

  On the other hand, when the ball enters the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b while the variable effect (variable display) is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37), The number of entering balls is reserved up to a maximum of four times. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the reserved ball number display area Db. In the reserved ball number display area Db, one reserved ball number symbol (“●” symbol) is displayed for each reserved ball number, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the number of displayed reserved ball number symbols. .

  That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the reserved ball number display area Db, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is one ball, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number symbol is reserved. Indicates that the number of balls is four. Further, when the reserved ball number symbol is not displayed in the reserved ball number display area Db, it indicates that the reserved ball number is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

  In addition, in this embodiment, although the ball which entered into the 1st starting port 64a and the 2nd starting port 64b was comprised so that it might be suspended up to four times in total, the maximum number of retaining balls is four times in total. It is not limited, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Also, instead of displaying the reserved ball count symbol in the reserved ball count display area Db, the reserved ball count is displayed in a part of the third symbol display device 81 by a number, or the area divided into four is divided by the reserved ball count. However, the display may be performed in a different mode (for example, a color or a lighting pattern). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls for the maximum number of holding balls, and displaying the number of holding balls according to the number of the holding lamps in the lighting state.

  Returning to FIG. 370, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which a symbol “O” and a symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol) are alternately turned on each time a ball passes through the through gate 67. is there. In the case of the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol of “○”), the electric accessory provided at the second starting port 64b is operated for a predetermined time. Only in the operating state (open).

  The number of balls passing through the through gate 67 is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and also illuminated by the second symbol holding lamp 84. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81. Then, the number of reserved symbols is displayed based on the number of lit second symbol retaining lamps 84.

  In addition, the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, and also the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol. The processing may be performed using a part of the display device 81. Similarly, instead of turning on the second symbol holding lamp 84, a variation display of the second symbol may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the number of passing balls through the through gate 67 is not limited to four as in the case of the second starting port 64b, but is three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). May be set. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol reserved lamp 84 may not be turned on.

  A first starting port 64a is provided below the variable display device unit 80, and a second starting port 64b is provided below the first starting port 64a. The first starting port 64a is provided with an opening through which a ball can enter upward. The opening of the first starting port 64a is always open, so that the ball can enter. When a ball enters the first starting port 64a, a first starting port switch 208a (see FIG. 374) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control is caused by the turning on of the first starting port switch 208a. A jackpot lottery is performed by the device 110 (see FIG. 373), a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37, and the third symbol display device 81 performs a variation effect of the third symbol. Be executed. The first starting port 64a is also one of the winning ports from which three balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball enters.

  On the other hand, the second starting port 64b is provided with an electric accessory having two blades covering an opening through which a ball enters the second starting port 64b. By opening and closing the two blades, the electric accessory brings the second starting port 64b into an open state (expanded state) or a closed state (reduced state). In the normal state, the second starting port 64b is in a closed state in which the blade of the electric accessory is closed (the blade stands up), and the ball cannot enter the second starting port 64b or enters the ball. It is in a difficult state.

  Then, when the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at the symbol of “○”, the electric accessory of the second starting port 64b is operated for a predetermined time. While the electric accessory is being operated, the blade of the electric accessory stands up. It is in a state of being moved in a substantially V-shape (an inverted C-shape), and the second starting port 64b is in an open state. When the second starting port 64b is in the open state, the ball can enter the second starting port 64b, or the ball can easily enter the ball compared to the closed state. That is, as a result of the variable display on the second symbol display device 83, a stop is made at the symbol of “○” and a hit is made, and when the second starting port 64b is opened, a ball enters the second starting port 64b. Then, it is possible to set a state where many jackpot lotteries can be performed.

  When a ball enters the second starting port 64b, a second starting port switch 208b (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control is performed due to the turning on of the second starting port switch 208b. A jackpot lottery is performed by the device 110 (see FIG. 373), a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37, and the third symbol display device 81 performs a variation effect of the third symbol. Be executed. The second starting port 64b is also one of the winning ports where two balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball enters.

  A variable winning device 65 is provided below the second starting port 64b, and a large rectangular winning port (a large open port, also referred to as a specific winning port) 65a is provided substantially in the center thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when a lottery in the main control device 110 becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (variable time) elapses, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to become a big hit stop symbol. The stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the special winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until ten balls are won).

  The special winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the special winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of the special winning opening 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds).

  The variable prize winning device 65 is, specifically, a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the special winning opening 65a, and a special winning opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And The large winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state where a ball cannot win or is hard to win. At the time of a big hit, the big win opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the front lower side, and the ball temporarily forms an open state in which it is easy to win the big win 65a, and the open state and the normal closing state. It operates so that the state and the state are alternately repeated.

  When a ball enters the special winning opening 65a, a special winning opening switch 208e (see FIG. 374) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the number of times that the special winning opening switch 208e is turned on is counted. The number of balls winning the special winning opening 65a is counted, and the closing condition of the special winning opening 65a is determined. In addition, as a result of turning on the special winning opening switch 208e, twelve balls are paid out as prize balls. Then, the open state and the closed state of the special winning opening 65a are repeated by the jackpot, so that many balls easily enter the special winning opening 65a, and the player has a game value (game value). As an award, a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. This state is one form of a special game state advantageous to the player.

  Note that the special game state is not limited to the above-described embodiment. A special winning opening and a large opening which is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening are provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit is lit on the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening is opened for a predetermined time. During the opening of the specific winning opening, a game state in which the large opening is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins in the specific winning opening may be formed as a special gaming state.

  Through gates 67 are provided on the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, respectively. The through gate 67 is provided with a through hole (not shown) through which a sphere passes in a vertical direction. When the ball fired in the game area passes through the through gate 67, a through gate switch (not shown) provided in the through hole is turned on, and the main control device 110 causes the second symbol ( A lottery).

  As a result of the lottery of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) performed on the ball passing through the through gate 67, when it is determined that the winning is achieved, the second symbol display device 83 displays the variation of the second symbol on the second symbol display device 83. After the symbol “○” is stopped and displayed, the electric accessory of the second starting port 64b operates. As a result, the blade of the electric accessory, which makes it difficult for the ball to enter the second starting port 64b, moves from a state of standing substantially vertically to a substantially V-shape (reverse C-shape), and moves the ball for a predetermined time. Is in a state where the ball can enter the second starting port 64b, or in a state where the ball can easily enter the ball as compared with the closed state.

  At the lower left and right corners of the game board 13, sticking spaces K1 and K2 for sticking stamps, identification labels, and the like are provided. Through the small window 35 (see FIG. 369).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning ports 63a, 63b, 64a, 64b, 65a is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through an out port 66. Also, the balls that have entered the winning openings 63a, 63b, 64a, 64b, 65a are guided to the ball discharge path after passing through a switch provided for each winning opening to detect the incoming balls. You. The ball guided to the ball discharge path passes through an out switch 208f (see FIG. 374) for detecting the guided ball, and is then discharged to an island facility (not shown) in which the pachinko machine 10 is installed. .

  Here, the ball shot into the game area of the pachinko machine 10 always enters any one of the winning ports 63a, 63b, 64a, 64b, 65a or the out port 66. Therefore, the balls that have entered the winning openings 63a, 63b, 64a, 64b, 65a and the out opening 66 are guided to the ball discharge path, and always pass through the out switch 208f. Therefore, by counting the number of balls detected by the out switch 208f, the number of balls fired in the game area (the number of balls used in the game) can be grasped. Further, the out switch 208f detects a ball that has actually passed through the game area and entered any of the winning openings 63a, 63b, 64a, 64b, 65a or the out opening 66. In other words, a ball that has been fired into the game area but is caught somewhere in the game area and is not used as a game as a result is not detected. Therefore, by counting the number of balls detected by the out switch 208f, it is possible to prevent such a ball that has not been used in the game from being counted as a ball fired in the game area.

  In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), a sound lamp control board (sound lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is mounted as a unit on which a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 and a payout unit 93 forming a protective cover unit are unitized. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for controlling each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are mounted as needed.

  In addition, the main board is provided with an inspection terminal 207a (see FIG. 373) to which an inspection device 300 for inspecting the performance of the gaming machine such as an accessory ratio can be connected. The inspection terminal 207a is usually covered by the back pack 92 of the back pack unit 94, and appears when the back pack 92 is opened. However, the back pack 92 may be provided with an opening for the inspection terminal 207a so that the inspection terminal 207a is exposed from the opening. When the connector of the cable connected to the inspection device 300 is inserted into the inspection terminal 207a, the inspection device 300 can inspect the gaming performance such as the accessory ratio of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are stored.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) are connected to the box base and the box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (the caulking structure). Consolidation). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to a connection portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is peeled to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102 or if the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electric configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 373). ing. The balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and the payout device 133 pays out a required number of balls as needed. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a clogged ball in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 373). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 373 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main control device 110 has an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built therein.

  In the main control device 110, the main features of the pachinko machine 10 such as the jackpot lottery, the setting of the variable display (fluctuation effect) in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display result in the second symbol display device 83. Execute the process. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed by the MPU 201, and the RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer for storing various counters for controlling these processing.

  The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. Then, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 383) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 via a bus line 204 including an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol holding lamp 84, and a lower edge of an opening / closing plate of the special winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 composed of a large winning opening solenoid for opening / closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected as a front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via an input / output port 205. Send

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit to instruct the sub-control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  In addition, the input / output port 205 includes a switch group and a sensor group including various switches for detecting a ball entering each winning opening, a ball guided to the ball discharge path through each winning opening and the out opening. The MPU 201 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch 253 and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. The MPU 201 outputs a signal output from the various switches 208 and a RAM erasure signal output from the RAM erasure switch circuit 253. Various processes are executed based on SG2.

  Main controller 110 is provided with an accessory ratio management chip 207 that manages information on the accessory ratio in pachinko machine 10. The accessory ratio management chip 207 is connected to the MPU 201 via the bus 206, receives information required for managing the accessory ratio from the MPU 201, processes and stores the received information, and thereby stores the information of the pachinko machine 10. It is a microchip (integrated circuit) that manages information about the ratio.

  An inspection terminal 207a is connected to the accessory ratio management chip 207. The inspection terminal 207a is configured to be connectable to an external inspection device 300 that inspects the performance of the gaming machine, such as the ratio of the accessory, and when the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a via a cable and a connector, Information on the accessory ratio managed by the accessory ratio management chip 207 and other information on the inspection are transmitted to the inspection device 300. The inspection device 300 can determine whether or not the accessory ratio of the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal range based on the information on the accessory ratio received via the inspection terminal 207a.

  Here, a detailed configuration of main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 374 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of main controller 110.

  As described above, the RAM erasing switch circuit 253 is connected to the input / output port 205 as the input side, and the solenoid 209, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 38, the second symbol holding lamp 84, In addition to the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113, as various switches 208 connected as an input side, a first starting port switch 208a for detecting a ball winning the first starting port 64a, a second starting port switch 208a, A second starting port switch 208b for detecting a ball winning the starting port 64b, a first normal winning port switch 208c for detecting a ball winning the first normal winning port 63a, and a second normal winning port 63b. Second normal winning opening switch 208d for detecting a hit ball, and a special winning opening switch 208e for detecting a ball winning the special winning opening 65a. An out switch 208f for detecting a ball that has won the winning ports 63a, 63b, 64a, 64b, and 65a and a ball that has entered the out port 66 and that has been guided to the ball discharge path; A door opening switch 208g for detecting that at least one of the front frames 14 is locked and opened is connected.

  The input / output port 205 includes a first port 205a to which the output of the first starting port switch 208a is input, a second port 205b to which the output of the second starting port switch 208b is input, and a first normal winning port switch 208c. An ordinary switch 205c to which an output is input, an ordinary port 205d to which an output of the second ordinary winning opening switch 208d is input, a special winning opening port 205e to which an output of the special winning opening switch 208e is input, and an out switch. An out port 205f to which the output of 208f is connected, and a door opening port 205g to which the output of the door opening switch 208g is connected are provided.

  The MPU 201 executes a switch reading process (see FIG. 379) for checking the status of various switches in a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 378) executed every 2 milliseconds. In the switch reading process, the MPU 201 refers to the first port 205a, the first two ports 205b, the first port 205c, the second port 205d, the special winning port 205e, and the out port 205f, and determines the winning port where the prize has been won. And the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path during 0.5 seconds, and the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path in 0.5 seconds. (The number of balls fired into the game area) is counted. Then, the counted number of each ball and the game state at that time (whether a big hit, the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 (so-called door) is open, an error state, and the like) are displayed. It is set in the accessory ratio management chip 207 every 0.5 seconds. The accessory ratio management chip 207 calculates and manages the accessory ratio based on the number of each ball. Whether or not the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is being opened is determined by the MPU 201 referring to the door opening port 205g and confirming the output of the door opening switch 208g.

  The ROM 202 of the MPU 201 stores at least a jackpot random number table 202a, a jackpot type table 202b, a stop pattern table 202c, a fluctuation pattern table 202d, a prize ball number table 202e, and trigger information data 202f. Main controller 110 executes main processing of pachinko machine 10 based on various counters stored in RAM 203 and various tables 202a to 203d stored in ROM 202. The award ball count table 202e and the trigger information data 202f are data used for managing the accessory ratio in the accessory ratio management chip 207, and are used when the main control device 110 is turned on. It is transmitted to the management chip 207.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 375, a counter and the like provided in RAM 203 of main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like are mainly used to perform a jackpot lottery, setting of a variable display (fluctuation effect) of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of a display result of the second symbol display device 83. Used by the MPU 201 of the control device 110. In the description of the various counters, various tables 202a to 202d stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 will also be described with reference to FIG.

  For setting the jackpot lottery and the variable display (fluctuation effect) of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, a first random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and a second random number counter C1 used for selecting the jackpot symbol are set. A per-type counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter C3, a fluctuation type counter CS1 used for selecting a fluctuation pattern, and a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting an initial value of the first random number counter C1 are used. .

  In addition, a second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol display device 83, and a second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting an initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 378), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main processing (see FIG. 385). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. As will be described later in detail, the RAM 203 is provided with a reserved ball storage area 203b composed of four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas). The values of a first random number counter C1, a first hit type counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter CS1 are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the second starting port 64b.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 899) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 899 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 899). It returns to the structure. When the first random number counter C1 is updated one cycle, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the first random number counter C1 is read from the initial value. The random number counter C1 is updated.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 899, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 378) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 385).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and the ball wins one of the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b ( At the timing of the start prize, the value of the first random number counter C1 at that time is stored in the first random number counter storage area of any of the first to fourth reserved areas provided in the reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. 203b1. The value of the random number to be the big hit is set by the big hit random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the holding area is set by the big hit random number table 202a. If it matches the value of the random number that is the jackpot that has been made, it is determined to be a jackpot.

  Here, the details of the jackpot random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 376 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the jackpot random number table 202a. The jackpot random number table 202a indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 has a bigger hit than the low probability state used for the low probability state used when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state (period when the probability is not changing). It is divided into two types, a high-probability state used during a high-probability state (probable change) and a high-probability state. Then, the numbers of random numbers to be big hits included in the low probability state and the high probability state are set differently. As described above, by changing the number of random numbers to be the jackpot, the probability of the jackpot is changed between the low probability state and the high probability state.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. In the first hit random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (big hit random value) that becomes a big hit in the low probability state is 3, and the value “7,307,582” is stored in the big hit random number table 202a. ing.

  On the other hand, in the case of the high probability state, the number of the random numbers (the jackpot random number value) which is the big hit is 30, and the value is “28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322”. , 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892 "are stored in the jackpot random number table 202a. .

  In the present embodiment, the jackpot random number values for the low-probability state and the jackpot random number value for the high-probability state stored in the jackpot random number table 202a are respectively set so as not to be duplicated. You have set. Here, if there is a value that becomes a jackpot random value regardless of the status of the pachinko machine 10, the value is likely to be predicted from the outside, and there is a possibility that the possibility of illegally assigning a jackpot may increase. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by changing the value of the random number that becomes a jackpot according to the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state or the low probability state), the jackpot is determined. Since it is possible to make it difficult for the value of the random number to be predicted, it is possible to suppress fraud.

  Returning to FIG. 375, the description will be continued. The first hit type counter C2 is for determining the type of a big hit in the case of a big hit. The first hit type counter C2 is incremented by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99), and the maximum value (for example, 0 to 99) is obtained. In the case of a counter that can take a value, it returns to 0 after reaching 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and the ball is activated by one of the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b. At the timing of winning in the mouth (starting winning), the value of the first hit type counter C2 at that time is set to the first random number counter C1 of the first to fourth areas of the reserved first to fourth areas provided in the reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. It is stored in the first hit type counter storage area 203b2 of the same hold area as the hold area to be stored.

  Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in one reserved area in the reserved sphere storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit, that is, if it is a random number that is lost, a fluctuation pattern in a fluctuation effect. Also, the type of the stop symbol (hereinafter, referred to as “stop type”) is the one at the time of departure. On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in one reserved area in the reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number with a large hit, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type in the fluctuation effect are those at the time of the big hit. . In this case, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type at the time of the big hit are determined corresponding to the big hit type indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area.

  The value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. The big hit type is determined based on the first hit type counter C2 and the big hit type table 202b stored in the ROM 202. Here, the jackpot type table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 376 (b). FIG. 376 (b) is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the jackpot type table 202b. As shown in FIG. 376 (b), the big hit type table 202b is a table in which the big hit types are associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2.

  As described above, as the jackpot type, as described above, the maximum number of rounds shifts to the high probability state after 15 rounds of jackpots, and the maximum round number shifts to the low probability state after 15 rounds of jackpots. There is a “15R normal big hit” that is a time saving state during the number of times of change, and a “2R certain variable big hit” where the maximum round number shifts to a high probability state after two rounds of big hits.

  In the big hit type table 202b, each big hit type is associated with a value of a first hit type counter C2 for determining the big hit type. In the example of FIG. 376 (b), the value “0-39” of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 15R probability variable jackpot, and the value “40-39” of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 15R normal jackpot. 79 ", and the value" 80-99 "of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 2R probability change jackpot.

  When the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is a value that is a big hit, the big hit type associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area is determined from the big hit type table 202b. . For example, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "20", "15R probability change big hit" is determined as the big hit type, and if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "60", the big hit type is "60". If the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “90”, “2R probable big hit” is determined as the big hit type.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the case of a jackpot, a 15R probability variable jackpot is selected with a probability of 40%, a 15R normal jackpot is selected with a probability of 40%, and a 2R probability variable jackpot is selected with a probability of 20%. . In addition, the probability that each big hit type is selected in the case of a big hit is appropriately set depending on the model. Then, according to the set probability, the value of the first hit type counter C2 associated with each big hit type is defined in the big hit type table.

  The probability that the jackpot type is selected may be changed according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In this case, a jackpot type table corresponding to each game state may be prepared, and in each of the jackpot type tables, the number of values of the first hit type counter C2 associated with each jackpot type may be changed.

  Further, the probability of selecting the jackpot type may be changed depending on the starting port that entered the ball. That is, as a probability of each jackpot type selected when the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number that is a big hit when the ball enters the first starting port 64a, For example, "15R probability change big hit" is 40%, "15R normal change hit" is 40%, "2R probability change hit" is 20%, and the ball is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b when the ball enters the second starting port 64b. As the probability of each jackpot type selected when the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is a random number that is a jackpot, for example, 55% for “15R probable jackpot”, 40% for “15R ordinary jackpot”, and “2R probable jackpot” May be set to 5%.

  In this case, a jackpot type table corresponding to the first starting port 64a and a jackpot type table corresponding to the second starting port 64b are prepared, and in each of the jackpot type tables, the first jackpot type associated with each jackpot type. What is necessary is just to change the number of values of the counter C2. The values of the various counters stored in each of the reserved first to fourth areas of the reserved ball storage area 203b are used for winning the winning in any one of the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b. A flag indicating whether the jackpot is stored is also stored together, and the jackpot type used when determining the jackpot type based on the first hit counter C2 stored in each area based on the flag is also stored. A table may be selected. Alternatively, a flag is separately provided in a form corresponding to each of the reserved first to fourth areas, and according to the flag, the values of various counters stored in the corresponding area are set in the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b. The jackpot type used to determine which jackpot type has been stored in accordance with the prize to the starting port and determine the jackpot type based on the first hit type counter C2 stored in each area based on the flag. A table may be selected.

  Returning to FIG. 375, the description of the various counters will be continued. The stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one, for example, in the range of 0 to 99, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop pattern at the time of the off-state displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop pattern selection counter C3, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. Three stops: a "reach out of front and rear", which stops after the reach occurs, and a "reach other than front and rear out" in which the final stop symbol stops other than before and after the reach symbol. Direction) pattern is selected.

  The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and the ball is moved to one of the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b. At the time of winning (starting winning), the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 at that time is stored in the first random number counter C1 of the first to fourth reserved areas provided in the reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. It is stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3 of the same hold area as the hold area.

  A plurality of stop pattern tables 202c having different ranges of random numbers from which the stop types are selected are provided in the ROM 202 in correspondence with the stop pattern selection counter C3. The plurality of stop pattern tables 202c are prepared in order to change the selection ratio of the stop type according to whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state or the low probability state.

  For example, in the high probability state, the stop pattern table 202c having a wide range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” of 0 to 89 is selected so that a reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a jackpot is likely to occur. And it becomes easy to select “completely out of order”. In the stop pattern table 202c, the "reach out of front and rear" is narrowed to 98 and 99, and the "reach other than front and rear out" is also narrowed to 90 to 97, so that "reach out of front and rear" and "reach other than front and rear out" are hard to be selected. Become.

  In the low probability state, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of “completely out of range” is 0 to 79 in order to secure the ball entry time to the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b. And the narrow stop pattern table 202c is selected, and it is difficult to select “completely out of place”. In the stop pattern table 202c, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of “reach other than front and rear out” is widened to 80 to 97, and “reach other than front and back out” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform many reach displays with a long rendering time, so that the ball entry time to the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b can be secured, and the fluctuation by the third symbol display device 81 can be ensured. The display is easily performed continuously. Note that, also in the latter stop pattern table 202c, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of “reach out of order” is set to 98,99.

  The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 378) described below is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process (see FIG. 385). At the timing when the ball wins (starts winning) one of the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 at that time is provided in the reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. Of the reserved first to fourth areas, the random number counter C1 is stored in the fluctuation type counter storage area 203b4 in the same reserved area as the reserved area in which the random number counter C1 is stored.

  The variation type counter CS1 is used for determining a variation pattern. That is, when performing a variable effect based on various counters stored in one reserved area, the MPU 201 stores the variable type counter CS1 stored in the variable type counter storage area 203b4 of the reserved area and the variable type counter CS1 stored in the ROM 202. The variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern table 202d. The determination of the variation pattern is, specifically, determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. The voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 perform the reach type and the fine design of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the variation pattern (variation time) determined by the variation type counter CS1. The change mode is determined, and the presence or absence of the announcement effect and the execution mode of the advance effect are determined.

  Here, the details of the variation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. 376 (c) to (e). The pachinko machine 10 is provided with a jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 used at the time of a jackpot, and detachment variation pattern tables 202d2 and 202d3 used at the time of a detachment, as the variation pattern table 202d. Also, as the variation pattern table for deviation 202d2, 202d3, depending on whether the game state is a time saving state or a high probability state at the time of probability change, or a normal low probability state excluding the time reduction state, the game state for the deviation (probability). A variation pattern table 202d3 and a variation pattern table 202d2 for deviation (normal) are prepared.

  Further, each of the variation pattern tables 202d1 to 202d3 includes a table referred to when the number of reserved balls is 0 (that is, when there is no reserved ball), a table referred to when the number of reserved balls is 1, A table referred to when the number of reserved balls is two, a table referred to when the number of reserved balls is three, and a table referred to when the number of reserved balls is four are separately provided.

  Note that, as in the present embodiment, it is not always necessary to prepare a variation pattern table for each number of reserved balls, and each of the variation pattern tables 202d1 to 202d3 is changed so that the table referred to simply based on the number of reserved balls is changed. May be provided. For example, each of the fluctuation pattern tables 202d1 to 202d3 may be separately prepared as a table referred to when the number of reserved balls is less than 3, and a table referred to when the number of reserved balls is 3 or more. . In each of the variation pattern tables 202d1 to 202d3, the condition of the number of reserved balls for determining the table to be referred to may be different. For example, the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 includes a table referred to when the number of reserved balls is less than 3, and a table referred to when the number of retained balls is 3 or more. A different table may be prepared as the table 202d2 for each number of reserved balls, and one table may be prepared as the variation pattern table for departure (probable change) 202d3 regardless of the number of reserved balls.

  FIG. 376 (c) is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 that is referred to when the number of reserved balls is two in the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 stored in the ROM 202.

  The jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 is divided into groups (groups) based on the jackpot type, regardless of the number of reserved balls. Specifically, it is divided into a 15R jackpot common that is referred to when the 15R probability variable jackpot and the 15R regular jackpot are determined as the jackpot type, and a 2R probability variable jackpot that is referred to when the 2R probability variable jackpot is determined. I have. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups.

  When the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is a big hit value (big hit random value), the variation pattern is changed according to the big hit type corresponding to the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area. Is determined in the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1. In the group (group) of the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1, the fluctuation pattern associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the same holding area is determined as the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation effect held in the holding area. Is done.

  In common with the 15R jackpot, three variation patterns, a variation A having a variation time of 30 seconds, a variation B having a variation time of 60 seconds, and a variation C having a variation time of 90 seconds are prepared to be selectable. Is associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1.

  The fluctuation A is a fluctuation pattern in which a so-called normal reach in which the third symbol is aligned after the reach having a short fluctuation time is executed by the third symbol display device 81. The variation B is a variation pattern in which the so-called super reach in which the third symbol is aligned after the reach having a longer variation time than the normal reach is performed on the third symbol display device 81. The super reach includes, for example, a reach that evolves from a normal reach, a long reach that simply has a long reach time, and the like. The fluctuation C is a fluctuation pattern in which the so-called special reach in which the third symbol is aligned after the reach having a longer fluctuation time than the super-reach is executed on the third symbol display device 81. The special reach includes, for example, a reach that further develops after the super reach, and a special reach that has a development destination from the normal reach different from the super reach.

  In the example shown in FIG. 376 (c), the association between the variation pattern and the value of the variation type counter CS1 when the number of reserved balls is 2 is 0 to 10 for variation A in the 15R jackpot common table. B is 11 to 99, and variation C is 100 to 198. Since the table common to the 15R jackpots is selected in the case of the 15R probability variable jackpot or the 15R regular jackpot, the variation C in which the special reach is executed is easily selected in order to give the player an expectation. Has become. However, by configuring so that the variation A in which the normal reach is executed and the variation B in which the super reach is executed are selected, it is possible to provide a gaming ability in which a big hit can be expected from any reach.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a large number of stalls having different staging contents are prepared for each reach. For example, the super reach includes a rear image (a third image which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81). (The image displayed on the back side of the image) can be changed quickly and displayed, or a character can be displayed suddenly, etc. A plurality of reach with different production contents, such as a character to which "?" Is added, is included. The main controller 110 determines only the variation A, variation B, and variation C as the variation pattern when the 15R probability variation jackpot or the 15R normal jackpot is determined, and the audio lamp controller 113 and the display controller 114 determine each variation A to A detailed variation pattern corresponding to C is determined. According to the detailed fluctuation pattern, a fluctuation effect is executed by the third symbol display device 81.

  Only the variation pattern of “2R variation” having a variation time of 59 seconds is prepared for exclusive use for the 2R probability variation jackpot. In the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1, as shown in FIG. 375 (c), all possible values of the variation type counter CS1 in the group dedicated to the 2R probability variation jackpot, regardless of the number of reserved balls, 0R-198) is associated with the 2R variation. In other words, when the jackpot variation type is the 2R probability variation jackpot, the 2R variation is always selected as the variation pattern.

  When the 2R variation is selected by the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113 and the display controller 114 determine a detailed variation pattern corresponding to the 2R variation. Therefore, when the main control device 110 determines the 2R probability change jackpot as the jackpot type, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variation effect with a detailed variation pattern corresponding to the 2R variation. In the pachinko machine 10, as a detailed variation pattern corresponding to the 2R variation, for example, while displaying characters such as “chicken” or “girl” in the small areas Ds1 and Ds3 of the third symbol display device 81, A variation pattern in which the third symbol stops at a specific symbol, a variation pattern in which the third symbol finally stops at a specific symbol with lighting or blinking of a specific lamp, and the like are included.

  Although the change pattern at the time of the big hit is determined using only the change type counter CS1, the change pattern may be determined using other plural change type counters. For example, whether or not to add a notice effect for notifying the start of the jackpot or the reach effect before the start of the change or during the change effect may be determined by another change type counter, or when reach is established, The number of symbols shifted to stop the third symbol to be stopped (for example, one symbol shifted before and after) may be determined by another variation type counter.

  Also, in the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1, a group dedicated to the 2R probability variation jackpot is provided. However, in the case of the pachinko machine 10, when the 2R probability variation jackpot is selected, only the variation pattern of “2R variation” is selected. A group dedicated to the 2R probability change jackpot may not be provided, and only the association between the change type counter CS1 and the change pattern in the case of a 15R probability change hit or 15R normal hit may be defined in the hit change pattern table 202d1. In this case, when the jackpot type is the 2R sure-change jackpot, the 2R variation may be determined as the variation pattern without referring to the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1.

  In the pachinko machine 10, only “2R fluctuation” is selected when a 2R probability change hit occurs, but one fluctuation pattern is selected from a plurality of change patterns when a 2R probability change hit occurs. You may do so. In this case, like the group common to the 15R jackpots, even in the group dedicated to the 2R probability jackpot, the variation type counter CS1 is associated with the variation pattern selected in the case of the 2R jackpot, and The variation pattern associated with the stored value of the variation type counter CS1 may be determined as the variation pattern in the variation effect suspended in the suspension area.

  FIG. 376 (d) schematically shows an example of the out-of-place (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 which is referred to when the number of reserved balls is 2 in the out-of-place (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 stored in the ROM 202. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 376 (d), the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 is exclusively for complete deviation, referred to when complete deviation is determined as the type of stop at the time of deviation, and reach-rear-reach and front-rear-reach. Is divided into groups (groups) based on the reach that is referred to when the reach is determined and the type of stop at the time of departure, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 corresponds to each of the divided groups. Is attached.

  When the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in a certain holding area is not a value of a big hit (big hit random number value), that is, when the value of the first random number counter C1 is out of value, the gaming state is a normal time except a time reduction state. When in the low probability state, the variation type counter CS1 stored in the suspension area according to the suspension type corresponding to the value of the suspension pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same suspension area as the first random number counter C1. Is determined from the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2.

  For complete departure, two variation patterns, a variation D with a variation time of 7 seconds and a variation E with a variation time of 10 seconds, are prepared to be selectable, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is set for each variation pattern. Are associated. When the fluctuation D or the fluctuation E is selected as the fluctuation pattern, the third symbol display device 81 executes a fluctuation effect in which after the high-speed fluctuation of the third symbol is started, stop display is performed without reaching the reach. As shown in FIG. 376 (d), in the variation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2, when the number of reserved balls is 2, each variation dedicated to complete variation and the value of the variation type counter CS1 correspond to the variation D. 0 to 98 and fluctuation E is 99 to 198.

  In addition, the reach is common to the three fluctuations A to C described above, namely, the fluctuation A in which the normal reach is executed by the third symbol display device 81 with the fluctuation time of 30 seconds and the super reach is executed with the fluctuation time of 60 seconds. Three variation patterns are prepared to be selectable: a variation B executed by the three symbol display device 81 and a variation C executed by the third symbol display device 81 with a variation time of 90 seconds and a special reach. In the out-of-office (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2, when the number of reserved balls is 2, the correspondence between each reach common fluctuation and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is as follows: fluctuation A is 0 to 98, and fluctuation B is 99 to 190. , The variation C is 191 to 198.

  FIG. 376 (e) schematically shows an example of the out-of-place (probably variable) variation pattern table 202d3 which is referred to when the number of reserved balls is 2 among the out-of-place (probable change) variation pattern tables 202d3 stored in the ROM 202. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 376 (e), the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d3 is referred to when the complete departure is determined as the departure stop type, similarly to the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table. Fluctuation D and Fluctuation E can be selected as a fluctuation pattern only for complete departure, and the reach that is referred to when the reach other than front and rear departure and reach other than front and rear departure is determined, and fluctuations A to C can be selected as the fluctuation pattern, It is divided into groups (groups) based on the type of stop at the time of departure, and in each of the divided groups, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with a variation pattern that can be selected.

  When the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in a certain holding area is a value that does not become a big hit, that is, a value that comes off, when the gaming state is in a time saving state or a high probability state at the time of probable change, In accordance with the stop type corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same hold area, the change pattern corresponding to the value of the change type counter CS1 stored in the hold area is changed to the deviation (probable change) change pattern. It is determined from the table 202d3.

  As shown in FIG. 376 (e), in the variation (probable variation) variation pattern table 202d3, in the case where the number of reserved balls is 2, each variation only for complete variation and the value of the variation type counter CS1 correspond to the variation D. 0 to 190, and the variation E is 191 to 198. In addition, when the number of reserved balls is 2, the correspondence between each variation and the value of the variation type counter CS1 in the common reach is that variation A is 0 to 98, variation B is 99 to 190, and variation C is 191 to 198. ing. That is, the association between each variation and the value of the variation type counter CS1 in the common reach is the same in the variation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 and the variation (probable variation) variation pattern table 202d3.

  On the other hand, when the game state is the time saving state or the high probability state at the time of a probable change, the ball easily enters the second starting port 64b, and the complete departure (fluctuation E) with a long fluctuation time is frequently executed. Then, it takes time until the start of the next variable display, which may give the player a waiting state and make the player feel uncomfortable. In addition, the operation rate of a hole is undesirably reduced because of a decrease in operation rate.

  Therefore, if the game state is completely off when the game state is in the time reduction state or the high probability state at the time of a probability change, the complete change with a shorter fluctuation time than in the other game state (normal state except the time reduction state) ( A variation pattern table 202d2 for deviation (normal) and a variation pattern table 202d3 for deviation (probable variation) are configured so that the variation D) is easily selected. Thus, by starting the next variable display early, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player will feel uncomfortable. In addition, it is possible to suppress an extremely low operation rate.

  Although the variation pattern at the time of departure is selected using only the variation type counter CS1, the variation pattern may be selected using a plurality of variation type counters (selection of presence / absence of notice or the like). In addition, the selection of the type of miss is configured to be divided into a variation pattern table for the removal (normal) and a variation pattern table for the removal (probable variation), but even if the game state is normal, a plurality of holding balls (for example, In the case of a maximum of four, three or more), the fluctuation display may be terminated early, and the selection may be made with reference to the deviation (probable change) fluctuation pattern table.

  In addition, since the association between the fluctuations A to C selected when the fluctuation type is the out-of-order reach or the reach other than the out-of-order fluctuation and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the same irrespective of the game state, the association for the out-of-range ( The (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 and the deviation (probable fluctuation) fluctuation pattern table 202d3 do not include a group common to the reach, and these fluctuation pattern tables 202d2 and 202d3 are referred to only when the stop type is completely deviated. In addition, a variation pattern table that is referred to when the stop type is the out-of-reach reach or the out-of-reach reach regardless of the state of the game may be separately prepared.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, the association between the fluctuations A to C selected when the fluctuation type is out-of-reach reach or the reach other than the out-of-reach reach and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the same regardless of the gaming state. Although it is assumed that there is, it may be different depending on the game state.

  Further, in the deviation pattern tables 202d2 and 202d3 for deviations shown in FIGS. 376 (d) and 376 (e), the fluctuations D and E are simply referred to as “perfect deviation fluctuations”, and the “perfect deviation fluctuation” is selected. In such a case, a configuration may be adopted in which the variation D and the variation E are selected with a predetermined probability by referring to another table. Of course, in this case as well, a table corresponding to the number of reserved balls may be prepared.

  Returning to FIG. 375, the second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by one, for example, in the range of 0 to 250, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (ie, 250). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4.

  In the present embodiment, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 382) is performed, and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the left or right through gate 67. The number of random number values to be won is 149, and the range is “5 to 153”. That is, when the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 153”, it is determined as a hit, and a symbol “O” is displayed on the second symbol display device 83 as a stop symbol (second symbol). The lighted display is performed, and the electric accessory of the second starting port 64b is operated, and the second starting port 64b is opened for a predetermined time.

  Note that the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250), and is executed once every timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 378). In addition to being updated, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 385).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs a jackpot lottery and a variation display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the values of the counters and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting of (fluctuation effect) and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 374, the description will be continued. The prize ball count table 202e of the ROM 202 is a table that defines the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters (wins) in each of the winning ports 63a, 63b, 64a, 64b, and 65a. Here, the details of the award ball count table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 377 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the award ball count table 202e.

  As shown in FIG. 377, in the prize ball number table 202e, as the “starting port type”, the first starting port 64a, the second starting port 64b, the first ordinary winning opening 63a, the second ordinary winning opening 63b, and the big winning opening 65a. Is defined, and the “number of prize balls” corresponding to the winning opening is defined for each winning opening. Specifically, in the prize ball number table 202e, the prize ball number 3 is associated with the first starting port 64a, the prize ball number 2 is associated with the second starting port 64b, and the first normal winning is achieved. The prize ball number 8 is associated with the mouth 63a, the prize ball number 8 is associated with the second ordinary winning opening 63b, and the prize ball number 12 is associated with the special winning opening 65a.

  The prize ball number table 202e defines the number of prize balls corresponding to each winning port for all winning ports provided in the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, in the case of the pachinko machine 10, when a winning port is provided in addition to the winning ports 63a, 63b, 64a, 64b, 65a, the prize ball number table 202e including the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning port is provided. Is defined.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the number of prize balls is the same in the first ordinary winning opening 63a and the second ordinary winning opening 63b. Therefore, in the prize ball count table 202e, the "starting port type" is defined as "normal winning port" by combining the first normal winning port 63a and the second normal winning port 63b, and is associated with the "normal winning port". The number of award balls 8 may be defined. Also, if the number of awarded balls in the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b is the same as “3”, the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b are matched in the awarded ball number table 202e. The “starting port type” may be defined as “starting port”, and the number of prize balls 3 may be defined in association with the “starting port”.

  The award ball number table 202e is transmitted to the accessory ratio management chip 207 during the initialization processing of the MPU 201 executed when the power is turned on to the main control device 110. Used to calculate the ratio.

  The trigger information data 202f is data that defines the timing (trigger) for calculating the accessory ratio in the accessory ratio management chip 207. Although details will be described later, the accessory ratio management chip 207 calculates the accessory ratio at the timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f.

  The accessory ratio management chip 207 corresponds to three timings (triggers) as timings (triggers) for calculating the accessory ratio. The first is the number of shot balls, and the accessory ratio management chip 207 calculates the accessory ratio every time the number of shot balls reaches a predetermined number. The second is the time, and the accessory ratio management chip 207 calculates the accessory ratio when a predetermined time comes. The third is the game time, and the accessory ratio management chip 207 calculates the accessory ratio when the game time by the player has passed a predetermined time.

  In the trigger information data 202f, information indicating any of “number of shots”, “time”, and “game time” is defined as a timing (trigger) for calculating the accessory ratio in the accessory ratio management chip 207.

  When the information indicating the “number of shots” is defined, the trigger information data 202f also defines information indicating the “predetermined number of balls” that is the timing for calculating the accessory ratio. For example, when the trigger information data 202f defines information indicating the “number of shots” and information indicating 500 balls as the “predetermined number of balls”, each time the number of shot balls reaches 500, the ratio of the accessory In the management chip 207, the accessory ratio is calculated.

  When the information indicating “time” is defined, the trigger information data 202f also defines information indicating “predetermined time” which is a timing for calculating the accessory ratio. For example, when information indicating “time” and information indicating 12:00, 17:00, 19:00, and 22:00 are defined as the “predetermined time” in the trigger information data 202f, the time is set to 12:00. At 17:00, 19:00, and 22:00, the accessory ratio is calculated in the accessory ratio management chip 207.

  When the information indicating the “game time” is defined, the trigger information data 202f also defines the information indicating the “predetermined time” which is the timing for calculating the accessory ratio. For example, when the trigger information data 202f defines information indicating “game time” and information indicating two hours as “predetermined time”, the accessory ratio management chip 207 is set every time the game time elapses two hours. , The accessory ratio is calculated.

  The trigger information data 202f is transmitted to the accessory ratio management chip 207 together with the prize ball number table 202e in the initialization process of the MPU 201 executed when the power is turned on to the main controller 110. This is used when the management chip 207 determines a trigger for calculating the accessory ratio.

  The RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored in addition to the counter buffer shown in FIG. 375, various flags, counters, and I / Os. And the like, and a work area (work area) in which values such as are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off (including when a power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter), a power failure signal SG1 output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201. With this input, the power-off occurrence information is set by the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 383) executed. Then, in the main processing of the MPU 201 (FIG. 385), when it is determined that there is power-off information, the stack pointer at that time and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203.

  On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power supply, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by a main process (see FIG. 388), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 387).

  The RAM 203 further stores a reserved ball number counter 203a, a reserved ball storage area 203b, a reserved ball execution area 203c, a first counter 203d, a first two counter 203e, a first counter 203f, a second counter 203g, a special winning opening counter 203h, and an out. It has at least a counter 203i.

  The number-of-reserved-balls counter 203a is one of the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b detected in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 382) periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. The number of pending balls (the number of times of waiting) of the variable display (variable effect performed by the third symbol display device 81) performed on the first symbol display device 37 is counted up to four times based on the entry of the ball (start winning prize). It is a counter to do. The number-of-reserved-balls counter 203a is set to zero as an initial value by an initialization process (S616 in FIG. 384) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Then, every time the start winning is detected and the number of balls to be changed displayed is increased, 1 is added to the maximum value of 4 (see S202 and S203 in FIG. 380). On the other hand, the reserved ball number counter 203a is decremented by one each time a variable effect is executed (see S305 in FIG. 381).

  The value of the reserved ball counter 203a (that is, the reserved ball number) is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by a reserved ball number command (see S205 in FIG. 380). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 each time a start winning is detected and the reserved ball number counter 203a is incremented by one.

  The voice lamp control device 113 can acquire the value of the number of retained balls in the variable effect retained in the main control device 110 by the retained ball number command. Thus, the voice lamp control device 113 can manage the number of times the variable effect is suspended without accessing the main control device 110. Further, every time a start winning is detected, the main control device 110 transmits a reserved ball count command to the audio ramp control device 113, so that the suspended ball count of the variable effect managed by the audio ramp control device 113 is reduced by noise. Even if the number of balls deviated from the actual fluctuating effect held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of the above, the deviation can be corrected by the next received ball number command.

  The sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display reserved ball number command to notify the reserved ball number to the display control device 114 every time the reserved ball number managed therein changes. The display control device 114 displays a reserved ball count symbol in the reserved ball count display area Db of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball count notified by the display reserved ball count command.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the main control device 110 transmits the reserved ball count command to the sound ramp control device 113, not only the value of the reserved ball count counter 203a obtained by adding 1 to the reserved ball count command, but also The first random number counter C1, first collision type counter C2, and stop pattern selection counter acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 374) in accordance with the start prize which triggered the addition of the reserved ball number counter 203a. C3 and the values of the variation type counter CS1 are also included.

  That is, when there is a start winning, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 obtained from the counter buffer by the main controller 110 are changed. Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command.

  In the sound ramp control device 113, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 transmitted by the reserved ball count command are changed based on the respective values. Before the effect is executed, a look-ahead is performed, and before the execution of the variable effect, it is determined what the variable effect will be (whether it will be a big hit or not, and how long the variable time will be). Then, based on the result of the pre-reading, it is possible to determine the execution of various effects.

  The reserved ball storage area 203b stores a first random number counter C1, a first hit type counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter CS1 acquired from a counter buffer (see FIG. 375) upon detection of a winning start. This is a memory for storing each value. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has won one of the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b (start winning) in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 378), the MPU 201 reads each of the counters from the counter buffer. The values of C1 to C3 and CS1 are acquired and stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b. The reserved ball storage area 203b includes four reserved areas (reserved first to first) so that data (each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) corresponding to one start winning can be stored (reserved) up to four times. 4 areas) (see FIG. 375).

  The reserved ball execution area 203c stores data (each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) to be referred to in a process such as a jackpot lottery or setting of a variable display (fluctuation effect) of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. Value).

  When the MPU 201 detects that it is the start timing of the execution of the fluctuation effect, the MPU 201 executes processing such as a jackpot lottery and setting of the fluctuation display (variation effect) of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. Of the data (each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) corresponding to each start winning stored in the above-mentioned reserved ball storage area 203b, the data corresponding to one start winning is stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c. Shift to Note that the shift in the present embodiment indicates that data stored in one area is moved to another area.

  Here, the details of the reserved ball storage area 203b and the reserved ball execution area 203c will be described with reference to FIG. 375 again. The reserved ball storage area 203b and the reserved ball execution area 203c are used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform a jackpot lottery and to set a variable display (fluctuation effect) of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. Used by

  For setting the jackpot lottery and the variable display (fluctuation effect) of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, a first random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and a first random number counter C1 used for determining the jackpot type are set. A hit type symbol counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter C3 used to determine the type of stop when the vehicle goes off, and a variation type counter CS1 used to determine a variation pattern are used. Each of the above-mentioned counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer by the MPU 201 when the ball wins (starts winning) in one of the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b. Store each value.

  The reserved ball storage area 203b is composed of four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas). Each of the four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas) stores a first random number counter storage area 203b1 for storing the value of the first random number counter C1 and a second random number counter C2 for storing the value of the first random counter C2. A per-type counter storage area 203b2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a fluctuation type counter storage area 203b4 for storing the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 are provided.

  In this embodiment, the first hit random number counter storage area 203b1, the first hit type counter storage area 203b2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3, and the variation type counter storage area 203b4 are stored in one holding ball storage area. Although provided in 203b, a plurality of reserved ball storage areas may be provided, and four areas 203b1, 203b2, 203b3, and 203b4 may be provided in any of the reserved ball storage areas.

  As described above, data (each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) acquired at the timing when the ball wins (starts winning) in the second starting port 64b is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b for up to four times. However, in this case, data is stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four reservation areas (reservation first to fourth areas). In other words, data corresponding to an earlier start winning prize is stored in an area having a smaller area number, and data corresponding to an earliest start winning prize is stored in the reserved first area.

  On the other hand, the reserved ball execution area 203c is composed of only one area. In the reserved ball execution area 203c, similarly to the reserved ball storage area 203b, the first random number counter storage area 203c1 for storing the value of the first random number counter C1 and the value of the first collision type counter C2 are stored. A first hit type counter storage area 203c2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203c3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a fluctuation type counter storage area 203c4 for storing the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 are provided.

  When the MPU 201 determines that the execution start timing of the variable effect has come, the MPU 201 transfers the data (each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) stored in the reserved first area of the reserved ball storage area 203b to the reserved ball. Shift to the respective areas 203c1 to 203c4 of the execution area 203c. Then, the data shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203c is referred to in the change start process (see FIG. 385), a jackpot lottery is performed based on the reference data, and a change pattern and a stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. decide. In the first symbol display device 37, under the control of the main control device 110, the variable display is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type.

  Further, the determined fluctuation pattern and stop type are notified to the audio lamp control device 113 by the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command, and are also notified to the display control device 114 via the audio lamp control device 113. . Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variation effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

  Details of the data shift will be described. When determining that the execution start timing of the variable effect has come, the MPU 201 transfers the random number value in the first random number counter storage area 203b1 of the reserved first area to the first random number counter storage area 203c1 of the reserved ball execution area 203c. shift. Similarly, the random number value in the first hit type counter storage area 203b2 is shifted to the first hit type counter storage area 203c2, and the random number value in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3 is shifted to the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203c3. Then, the random number value in the variation type counter storage area 203b4 is shifted to the variation type counter storage area 203c4.

  When the shift of the data to the reserved ball execution area 203c is completed, the reserved first area becomes empty, and is stored (reserved) in each area (second to fourth) of the reserved ball storage area 203b. A shift process is performed to pack the data into the areas (first to third) having the area number smaller by one. In the present embodiment, data is shifted only in the reserved areas (first to fourth) in which data is stored (reserved) in the reserved ball storage area 203b.

  Here, a data shift performed on each of the reserved areas in the reserved ball storage area 203b will be described. For example, when the value of the number-of-reserved-balls counter 203a when the start of the variable effect is determined is “4”, and data is stored in all the areas (first to fourth) of the reserved ball storage area 203b. I do. In this state, the data of the reserved first area is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203c, and when the reserved first area becomes empty, the MPU 201 transfers the data of the other areas (second to fourth) to the respective areas. The area is shifted to the area with the smaller number (first to third). That is, the data in the second reserved area is shifted to the first reserved area, the data in the third reserved area is shifted to the second reserved area, and the data in the fourth reserved area is shifted to the third reserved area.

  Further, for example, if the value of the number-of-reserved-balls counter 203a at the time when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined is “2”, the MPU 201 shifts only the data of the reserved second area to the reserved first area. , End the data shift. As described above, in the present embodiment, the data shift processing is not performed for the reserved areas (third and fourth) in which data is not stored (reserved), so that the number of data shifts can be reduced. It is possible to reduce the control load.

  Note that, regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data in the reserved area (second to fourth) may be shifted to an area having an area number smaller by one. In this case, it is unnecessary to determine whether or not data is stored (held) in the holding area (second to fourth), so that the program can be easily created.

  Returning to FIG. 374, the description will be continued. The first counter 203d is a counter for counting the number of balls winning the first starting port 64a, the first counter 203e is a counter for counting the number of balls winning the second starting port 64b, and the first counter 203f. Is a counter that counts the number of balls that have won the first ordinary winning opening 63a, 203g is a counter that counts the number of balls that have won the second ordinary winning opening 63b, and 203h is a large winning counter 203h. The out counter 203i, a counter for counting the number of balls winning in the winning opening 65a, is a counter for counting the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls used in the game). is there. Each of these counters 203d to 203i is set to zero as an initial value by an initial setting process (S616 in FIG. 384) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on.

  Also, the MPU 201 performs the first port 205a, the second port 205b, and the first port 205 in the switch reading process (see FIG. 379) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 378) executed every 2 milliseconds. With reference to the port 205c, the ordinary two port 205d, the special winning opening port 205e, and the out port 205f, the first starting opening switch 208a, the second starting opening switch 208b, the first ordinary winning opening switch 208c, and the second ordinary winning opening switch 208d. It is determined whether a ball has been detected in each of the special winning opening switch 208e and the out switch 208f. Then, when a prize is awarded at any of the winning ports (a ball is detected at the corresponding switch), the counter corresponding to the winning port at which the prize is received is counted up by one, and the ball is output at the out switch 208f. Is detected, the out counter 203i is counted up by one.

  The counting of the number of balls in the counters 203d to 203i is performed continuously for 0.5 seconds. When 0.5 seconds have elapsed, the values of the counters 203d to 203h are set as winning information, and the value of the out counter 203i is set as out information, together with information indicating the game state at that time, in the accessory ratio management chip 207. Is done. When the setting of the values of the counters 203d to 203i in the accessory ratio management chip 207 is completed, the values of the counters 203d to 203i are initialized to zero, and the winning prize mouths in the next 0.5 seconds are again won. The number of balls played is counted for each winning opening, and the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls used in the game) is counted.

  Thus, in the pachinko machine 10, the MPU 201 counts the number of balls winning in each winning opening for each winning opening at intervals of 0.5 seconds, and calculates the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path. The number (ie, the number of balls used in the game) is counted, and the counted result is set in the accessory ratio management chip 207. Then, as will be described later, the accessory ratio management chip 207 accumulates these counted values for each value until the timing for calculating the accessory ratio is reached. The number of balls won in each winning opening until the timing of calculating the material ratio or before the timing of calculating the accessory ratio from the previous calculation of the accessory ratio is calculated. It counts each time, and counts the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (ie, the number of balls used in the game).

  As described above, the number of winning balls in the winning opening actually detected by the MPU 201 is input from the MPU 201 to the accessory ratio management chip 207. The number of balls recognized as winning can be accurately grasped.

  Also, suppose that the MPU 201 counts the number of balls won in each winning opening for each winning opening, and counts the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls used in the game). Assuming that the counting is performed only by the accessory ratio management chip 207 without performing the above, the accessory ratio management chip 207 also wins a prize at each winning opening at a short interval (for example, every 2 milliseconds) or guides the ball to the ball discharge path. The monitored ball must be monitored, and the processing load increases and the power consumption may increase.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the counting result of the MPU 201 sets these counting results in the accessory ratio management chip 207 at 0.5 second intervals. Each time a prize is won from the time the power is turned on until the timing of calculating the accessory ratio for the first time, or from the time the last time the ratio of the accessory is calculated until the timing of calculating the next accessory ratio. A process of counting the number of balls winning the mouth for each winning opening and counting the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls used in the game) may be executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in processing load and power consumption in the accessory ratio management chip 207.

  On the other hand, the MPU 201 counts the number of balls winning in each winning opening for each winning opening, and counts the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls used in the game). For this reason, for example, at two millisecond intervals, a prize at each winning opening or a ball guided to a ball discharge path is monitored. In the first place, such monitoring is performed mainly in a game such as a jackpot lottery or a prize ball determination. This is necessary for performing such control, and processing is originally performed at short time intervals of 2 milliseconds. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, since the firing interval of the balls fired into the game area by the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 373) is about 0.6 seconds, each winning port counted at 0.5 second intervals is provided. The number of winning balls or the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls used in the game) is 0 or 1 ball in most cases, and at most several balls. Therefore, the data amount required for the counters 203d to 203i provided in the RAM 203 may be small. Therefore, the increase in the capacity of the RAM 203 can be suppressed by this counting process. Therefore, in the MPU 201, the number of balls winning each winning opening in 0.5 seconds is counted for each winning opening, and the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the balls used in the game). ) Is not significantly affected.

  The accessory ratio management chip 207 includes a CPU 261, a buffer 262, a first reading memory 263, a second reading memory 264, a setting register 265, and a real-time clock (hereinafter, referred to as "RTC") 266. These are connected to each other via a bus 206. Further, the bus 206 is also connected to the MPU 201 and the inspection terminal 207a.

  Further, a large-capacity capacitor 267 is connected to the accessory ratio management chip 207. While the power is supplied to the main control device 110, the capacitor 267 is charged. When the power supply to the main control device 110 is stopped due to a power failure or the like, the accessory ratio management chip 207 is Using the electric power charged in the capacitor 267, a process associated with the power-off is executed. Note that a chargeable / dischargeable secondary battery may be connected to the accessory ratio management chip 207 instead of the capacitor 267.

  The CPU 261 is an arithmetic device that controls the operation of the accessory ratio management chip 207. The CPU 261 executes a control program stored in a ROM (not shown) provided in the accessory ratio management chip 207, so that the CPU The management of the material ratio and the like are performed by the accessory / material ratio management chip 207. The CPU 261 performs the management of the accessory ratio in the accessory ratio management chip 207 and the like, and thus can flexibly cope with a change in the functions and specifications of the accessory ratio management chip 207 by changing the software.

  The RTC 266 outputs the current time. The RTC 266 has a built-in chargeable / dischargeable secondary battery (not shown), and the RTC 266 always outputs the time while keeping the current time by using the secondary battery as a power source. The time output by the RTC 266 is referred to by the CPU 261 when the timing (trigger) for calculating the accessory ratio set in the trigger setting area 265b is “time”, and the time indicated by the RTC 266 is the trigger setting area. When the time matches or exceeds the “predetermined time” set in H.265b, a process of calculating the accessory ratio is executed. Further, although details will be described later, the jackpot information, the door opening information, the error information, or the large hit data 263g, the open data 263h, the error data 263i, and the out-of-time data 263j are stored in the first reading memory 263, respectively. When out-of-time information is added, the time at that time is read from the RTC 266, and the read time is added to each data together with each information.

  The buffer 262 is a memory for temporarily storing various types of information set by the MPU 201, and is configured by an SRAM (Static Random Access Memory) which is a volatile memory from which data can be read and written. The first buffer 262a, the second buffer 262b, the first buffer 262c, the second buffer 262d, the special winning opening buffer 262e, the out buffer 262f, the big hit buffer 262g, the open buffer 262h, the error buffer 262i, etc. Is provided at least.

  The first buffer 262a stores the value of the first counter 203d set by the MPU 201 at 0.5 second intervals. The value of the start 2 counter 203e set by the MPU 201 at 0.5 second intervals is stored in the start 2 buffer 262b. The value of the general counter 203f set by the MPU 201 at 0.5 second intervals is stored in the general buffer 262c. The buffer 2 262d stores the value of the counter 203g set by the MPU 201 at 0.5 second intervals. The value of the special winning opening counter 203h set by the MPU 201 at 0.5 second intervals is stored in the special winning opening buffer 262e. The value of the out counter 203i set by the MPU 201 at 0.5 second intervals is stored in the out buffer 262f.

  When the gaming state set by the MPU 201 is a big hit at intervals of 0.5 seconds, information (big hit information) is stored in the big hit buffer 262g. When the gaming state set by the MPU 201 is opening the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 at intervals of 0.5 seconds, information (door opening information) is stored in the opening buffer 262h. When the gaming state set by the MPU 201 is in error at intervals of 0.5 seconds, information (error information) is stored in the error buffer 262i.

  In the accessory ratio management chip 207, the MPU 201 performs setting (writing) on various buffers provided in the buffer 262, and upon receiving an interrupt signal from the MPU 201, the CPU 261 executes a setting information receiving process (FIG. 387) described later. See). The setting information receiving process counts the number of winning balls for each winning opening based on various information set in the buffer 262, and guides the ball to the ball discharge path (that is, the ball fired to the game area). The number of balls is counted and the number of these balls is stored in the first reading memory 263, and information on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is also stored in the first reading memory 263.

  The setting register 265 is a register for setting a set value required for the operation of the accessory ratio management chip 207. The setting register 265 has at least a prize ball number data setting area 265a and a trigger setting area 265b.

  In the award ball number data setting area 265a, a award ball number table 202e (see FIG. 377) stored in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 is set. In the trigger setting area 265b, trigger information data 202f stored in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 is set. When the main controller 110 is turned on, the award ball count table 202 e and the trigger information data 202 f are transmitted to the accessory ratio management chip 207. Then, the CPU 261 sets the prize ball number table 202e in the prize ball number data setting area 265a, and sets the trigger information data 202f in the trigger setting area 265b.

  The prize ball number table 202e set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a is referred to by the CPU 261 when calculating the accessory ratio. Here, the number of prize balls when there is a prize in each prize port is determined by the model of the pachinko machine, and the information is conventionally stored in the ROM 202. Each time the power is supplied, the information on the number of prize balls is transmitted to the prize ball number table 202e stored in the ROM 202 to the accessory ratio management chip 207. By setting to 265a, it is not necessary to store information on the number of award balls different for each model in the ROM of the accessory ratio management chip 207 at the manufacturing stage. Therefore, the production of the accessory ratio management chip 207 can be simplified. If the pachinko machine model is different, the ROM 202 may be changed. Even if the pachinko machines of different models use the same accessory ratio management chip 207, the accessory ratio can be accurately calculated.

  The trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is also referred to by the CPU 261, and it is determined whether or not the timing (trigger) for calculating the accessory ratio indicated by the trigger information data 202f has been reached. When it is determined, a process of calculating the accessory ratio is executed. Here, the timing (trigger) for calculating the accessory ratio is determined by the accessory ratio management chip 207 because there is a physical limitation on the storage capacity for recording information on the accessory ratio in the accessory ratio management chip 207. It is preferable that the timing is not fixed, but that the jackpot probability and the probability of change in the pachinko machine 10 are considered. Like the pachinko machine 10, the trigger information data 202f that defines the timing of calculating the accessory ratio determined in consideration of the jackpot probability and the probability of change in the pachinko machine 10 is stored in the ROM 202, and power is supplied. Each time the pachinko machine 10 sends the trigger information data 202f to the ROM ratio management chip 207, the trigger information data 202f is sent to the ROM 202 at a timing that matches the jackpot probability and the probability of change in the pachinko machine 10. The ratio and the continuous accessory ratio can be calculated and stored in the second reading memory 264.

  It should be noted that only the prize ball number table 202e and the trigger information data 202f transmitted in the start-up process (so-called boot process) executed by the MPU 201 when the main controller 110 is turned on are the prize ball number data. The setting area 265a and the trigger setting area 265b are configured to be set. The startup process is a so-called boot process, which is a non-user program that is not programmed by the user. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent person from setting a false prize ball count table and trigger information data in the prize ball count data setting area 265a and the trigger setting area 265b.

  The first reading memory 263 is a memory for temporarily storing information set in the buffer 262 by the MPU 201 while accumulating until the timing of calculating the accessory ratio. The first reading memory 263 is configured by a volatile memory capable of reading and writing data, for example, an SRAM. Note that the first reading memory 263 may be configured by a DRAM (Dynamic Random Access Memory), which is a volatile memory capable of reading and writing a larger amount of data.

  The first reading memory 263 includes a first counter 263a, a second counter 263b, a first counter 263c, a second counter 263d, a special winning opening counter 263e, an out counter 263f, big hit data 263g, open data 263h, and an error. At least data 263i and out-of-time data 263j are stored. These counters and data stored in the first reading memory 263 are all initialized to 0 by the CPU 261 based on an initialization signal transmitted from the MPU 201 when the main controller 110 is powered on ( (See S710 in FIG. 386).

  These counters and data stored in the first reading memory 263 are referred to by the accessory ratio calculation process executed by the CPU 261 when the timing of calculating the accessory ratio has come, and necessary processes are executed. After that, the CPU 261 again initializes all the bits to 0 (S744 in FIG. 389). As a result, the first reading memory 263 temporarily stores the information set in the buffer 262 by the MPU 201 again while accumulating until the next timing of calculating the accessory ratio. .

  The first counter 263a is a counter for accumulating and counting the number of balls that have won the first starting port 64a until the timing of calculating the accessory ratio. When the value of the first counter 203d indicating the number of balls that have won the first starting port 64a for 0.5 second is set in the first buffer 262a by the MPU 201, the value set in the first buffer 262a by the CPU 261. (That is, the number of balls that have won the first starting port 64a for 0.5 seconds) is added to the first counter 263a.

  The first 2 counter 263b is a counter for accumulating and counting the number of balls that have won the second starting port 64b until the timing of calculating the accessory ratio. When the MPU 201 sets the value of the start 2 counter 203e indicating the number of balls that have won the first starting port 64a in the start 2 buffer 262b for 0.5 second, the CPU 261 sets the value set in the start 2 buffer 262b. (That is, the number of balls that have won the second starting port 64b for 0.5 seconds) is added to the first counter 263b.

  The general 1 counter 263c is a counter for accumulating and counting the number of balls that have won the first ordinary winning opening 63a until the timing of calculating the accessory ratio. When the value of the general counter 203f indicating the number of balls that have won the first ordinary winning opening 63a for 0.5 seconds is set in the general buffer 262c by the MPU 201, the CPU 261 sets the value of the general buffer 203c. The value (that is, the number of balls that have won the first ordinary winning opening 63a for 0.5 seconds) is added to the first counter 263c.

  The second counter 263d is a counter for accumulating and counting the number of balls that have won the second normal winning opening 63b until the timing of calculating the accessory ratio. When the value of the general 2 counter 203g indicating the number of balls winning in the second normal winning opening 63b for 0.5 second is set in the general 2 buffer 262d by the MPU 201, the CPU 2 sets the value in the general 2 buffer 262d. The value (that is, the number of balls that have won the second ordinary winning opening 63b for 0.5 seconds) is added to the second counter 263d.

  The special winning opening counter 263e is a counter for accumulating and counting the number of balls that have won the special winning opening 65a until the timing of calculating the accessory ratio. When the value of the special winning opening counter 203h indicating the number of balls winning the special winning opening 65a for 0.5 seconds is set in the special winning opening buffer 262e by the MPU 201, the value is set in the special winning opening buffer 262e by the CPU 261. The value (that is, the number of balls that have won the special winning opening 65a for 0.5 seconds) is added to the special winning opening counter 263e.

  The out counter 263f is a counter for accumulating and counting the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, balls fired into the game area) until the timing of calculating the accessory ratio. When the value of the out counter 203i indicating the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path for 0.5 second is set in the out buffer 262f by the MPU 201, the value set in the out buffer 262f by the CPU 261 (that is, 0). (The number of balls guided to the ball discharge path for 5 seconds) is added to the out counter 263f. When the trigger for calculating the accessory ratio set in the trigger setting area 265b is “number of fires”, the out counter 263f is referred to, and the number of balls (number of fires) indicated by the out counter 263f is set in the trigger setting area. When it becomes equal to or more than the “predetermined number of balls” set to 265b, the CPU 261 executes a process for calculating the accessory ratio.

  If the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 has reached the jackpot before the timing of calculating the accessory ratio, the jackpot medium data 263g indicates the jackpot information indicating that the pachinko machine 10 has reached the jackpot and the time at that time. It is the data defined together. When the MPU 201 sets the jackpot information indicating that the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot as the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 in the jackpot buffer 262g, the CPU 261 combines the jackpot information with the current time indicated by the RTC 266 and sets the jackpot. It is added to the middle data 263g.

  The opening data 263h indicates that the pachinko machine 10 has opened the door when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is opening the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 (door) before the timing of calculating the accessory ratio. This is data that defines the door opening information indicating that the state has been set, together with the time at that time. When the MPU 201 sets the door opening information indicating that the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is being opened as the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 in the opening buffer 262h, the CPU 261 sets the door opening information. Is added to the open data 263h together with the current time indicated by the RTC 266.

  The error-in-progress data 263i includes error information indicating that the pachinko machine 10 is in an error state when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in an error state before the timing of calculating the accessory ratio. This is the data defined in conjunction with the time. When the MPU 201 sets error-in-progress information indicating that the pachinko machine 10 is in error as the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 in the error-in-progress buffer 262i, the CPU 261 compares the error-in-progress information with the current time indicated by the RTC 266. Are added to the error data 263i.

  The out-of-time data 263j is transmitted to the pachinko machine 10 when the setting (writing) to the buffer 262 by the MPU 201 is performed during a late-night time period (for example, between midnight and 6 a.m.) which is normally outside business hours. This is data that defines out-of-time information indicating that some operation was performed at midnight, together with the time at that time. When the setting (writing) to the buffer 262 is performed by the MPU 201, the time at that time is read from the RTC 266 by the CPU 261, and when it is determined that the time is in the midnight time zone, the out-of-time information is It is added to the out-of-time data 263j together with the current time indicated by the RTC 266.

  The second reading memory 264 is configured by a nonvolatile memory capable of reading and writing data, for example, a flash memory. The second reading memory 264 only needs to hold the stored data while the power is turned off, and may use a ferroelectric memory (FeRAM: Ferroelectric Random Access Memory) or a magnetoresistive RAM other than a flash memory. (MRAM: Magnetoresistive Random Access Memory), a resistance change type memory (ReRAM: Resistive Random Access Memory), or the like. Further, while the second reading memory 264 is constituted by a DRAM, the backup voltage is continuously supplied from the power supply device 115 to the DRAM while the power is turned off, so that data is retained even when the power is turned off. You may make it.

  The second reading memory 264 stores at least the accessory ratio data 264a, the continuous accessory ratio data 264b, the number of shot balls data 264c, and the game state data 264d.

  The accessory ratio data 264a is data in which data representing the accessory ratio calculated at each timing (trigger) for calculating the accessory ratio is recorded together with the calculated time. The continuous character ratio data 264b is data obtained by recording data representing the continuous character ratio calculated at the same timing (trigger) together with the calculated time.

  Here, the ratio of the bonuses is paid out along with the winning in the second starting port 64b and the special winning opening 65a in which the bonuses work out of the total number of balls (prize balls) paid out to the player. It indicates the ratio of the number of balls (prize balls), and is set to 70% or less. In addition, the ratio of the consecutive bonuses is a ball (prize) paid out along with a prize in the special winning opening 65a in which the bonuses are continuously operated, out of the total number of balls (prize balls) paid out to the player. (Balls), and is set to 60% or less.

  Originally, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio refer to the above-mentioned ratio in the case where the test shooting test of the game ball is performed for 10 hours, but here, the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is used. At the timing (trigger) for calculating the character ratio shown by the player, the CPU 261 operates the player until the timing is reached for the first time after the power is turned on or between the previous timing and the current timing. Out of the total number of balls (prize balls) paid out, the ratio of the number of balls (prize balls) paid out with the prize in the second starting port 64b and the special winning port 65a is calculated. The time is recorded in the accessory ratio data 264a together with the time. In addition, of the total number of balls (prize balls) paid out to the player during the period from when the power is turned on until the timing reaches for the first time or between the previous timing and the present timing, a special winning prize The ratio of the number of balls (prize balls) paid out in connection with the winning in the mouth 65a is calculated, and is recorded in the continuous character ratio data 264b together with the time at that time.

  In addition, even when the power supply is cut off, the power is paid out while the power supply is determined to be cut off from the timing (trigger) for calculating the latest accessory ratio using the power charged in the capacitor 267. Based on the number of balls (prize balls) that have been hit, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are calculated, and are recorded in the accessory ratio data 264a or the continuous accessory ratio data 264b together with the time at that time. . As a result, after calculating and recording the role ratio and the continuous role ratio, even after the power is cut off, even with respect to the number of prize balls paid out, the role ratio and the continuous role ratio are not leaked. The ratio can be calculated.

  The number of balls winning the first starting port 64a indicated by the first counter 263a stored in the first reading memory 263, the number of balls winning the second starting port 64b indicated by the second counter 263b, The number of balls that have won the first ordinary winning opening 63a indicated by the first counter 263c, the number of balls that have won the second ordinary winning opening 63b indicated by the second counter 263d, and the large number indicated by the large winning counter 263e. For each of the number of balls winning the winning opening 65a, the number of winning balls associated with each winning opening shown in the winning ball number table 202e (see FIG. 377) set in the winning ball number data setting area 265a. , The number of balls paid out for each winning opening in accordance with the winning in the winning opening can be calculated. Then, by summing these, the total number of balls paid out to the player can be calculated.

  As a result, the number of balls paid out with the prize in the second starting port 64b and the balls paid out with the prize in the grand prize port 65a with respect to the total number of balls paid out to the player. By calculating the total ratio with the number of items, the accessory ratio can be calculated. In addition, by calculating the ratio of the number of balls paid out in accordance with the prize in the special winning opening 65a to the total number of balls paid out to the player, the continuous character ratio can be calculated.

  The number of fired balls data 264c is obtained by calculating the total number of balls fired into the game area counted by the out counter 263f of the first reading memory 263 at each timing (trigger) for calculating the accessory ratio and the time at that timing. It is data recorded together. The total number of balls fired in the game area from when the power is turned on until the timing reaches the timing for the first time or from the previous timing to the current timing is indicated by the out counter 263f. When the timing for calculating the accessory ratio comes, the value of the out counter 263f at that time is recorded in the shot ball count data 264c together with the time indicated by the RTC 266.

  The gaming state data 264d includes the jackpot data 263g, the opening data 263h, the error data 263i, and the jackpot information stored in the after-hour data 263j stored in the first reading memory 263, the door opening information, the error information, and the out-of-time information. Is recorded together with the time associated with each piece of information. When it is time to calculate the accessory ratio, the big hit data 263g, the open data 263h, the error data 263i, and the outside data 263j of the first reading memory 263 are stored as big hit information, door open information, The CPU 261 records the in-error information, the out-of-time information, and the time associated with each information in the gaming state data 264d.

  At this time, for example, when the jackpot information is stored in the jackpot data 263g at intervals of less than one second, it means that the jackpot is continuously occurring as a gaming state, and thus the jackpot at the oldest time is used. Only the information and the time are recorded in the game state data 264d. Similarly, in the case of the information during door opening, the information during error, and the out-of-time information, when each information is stored in each of the data 263h to 263h at intervals of less than 1 second, the information of the oldest time and the time thereof are respectively provided. Only the game state data 264d is recorded. Thereby, the storage capacity required for the game state data 264d can be reduced.

  When the jackpot information, the door opening information, the error information, and the out-of-hours information are recorded in the gaming state data 264d, the CPU 261 arranges (sorts) each piece of information from the oldest time information to the gaming state data 264d. Record. Then, when outputting the information recorded in the game state data 264d to the inspection device 300, the CPU 261 outputs the information in the order of recording. As a result, each piece of information is output in ascending order of time, so that the inspection device 300 can easily analyze a change in the game state with the passage of time by analyzing the information in that order.

  However, the CPU 261 does not necessarily need to arrange the pieces of information in order from the oldest time information and store the information in the game state data 264d. In this case, when outputting the information recorded in the game state data 264d to the inspection device 300, the CPU 261 may read out the game state data 264d in order from the information of the oldest time and transmit the information to the inspection device 300. Alternatively, each information may be output to the inspection device 300 in the order in which the information was recorded, and the inspection device 300 may rearrange the received information from the information at the oldest time.

  In addition, the jackpot information 263g, the opening data 263h, the error data 263i, and the jackpot information stored in the after-hour data 263j stored in the first reading memory 263 correspond to the jackpot information, the door opening information, the error information, and the after-hour information, respectively. All of them may be recorded in the game state data 264d together with the attached time. Although the storage capacity required for the game state data 264d becomes large, by outputting this to the inspection device 300, it is possible to analyze the operation state of the pachinko machine 10 while seeing a small change in the game state.

  Here, information relating to the bonus ratio, the continuous bonus ratio, and the total number of balls fired to the game area that can be recorded in the bonus ratio data 264a, the continuous bonus ratio data 264b, and the number-of-launched-balls data 264c are respectively a predetermined number ( For example, it is limited to 1024). In addition, the total number of the jackpot information, the door opening information, the error information, and the out-of-time information that can be recorded in the game state data 264d is also limited to a predetermined number (for example, 16384). If a predetermined number of pieces of information have already been recorded in the accessory ratio data 264a, the continuous accessory ratio data 264b, the number of fired balls data 264c, or the game state data 264d, the oldest information is deleted, and the latest information is stored there. Is recorded. For example, the accessory ratio data 264a, the continuous accessory ratio data 264b, the number of fired balls data 264c, and the game state data 264d are each configured as a ring buffer, and each manages a position at which information is written on the ring buffer. The memory is prepared separately in the second reading memory 264 or in a non-volatile memory provided separately from the second reading memory 264, and by shifting the writing position by one each time information is written, the oldest information can be obtained. Erasing and recording the latest information there. In this way, by setting an upper limit on the number of information that can be recorded in each data, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the second reading memory 264. When the information to be recorded in each data reaches the upper limit number, the oldest information is deleted and the latest information is recorded, and the analysis including the latest state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed by the inspection apparatus 300. Can be done. By providing a memory for managing the position where information is written on the ring buffer in the second reading memory 264, even if the power is cut off, the power is supplied after the power is supplied. From the continuation of the information stored up to this point, new information can be added and recorded.

  When the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, an interrupt occurs to the CPU 261 and the CPU 261 causes the accessory ratio data 264a recorded in the second reading memory 264, the continuous accessory ratio data 264b, and the emission. The ball count data 264c and the game state data 264d are sequentially transmitted to the inspection device 300. When transmitting each of the data 264a to 264d to the inspection device 300, the CPU 261 records each information recorded in each of the data 264a to 264d (including the recorded time information associated with each information). They are read out in order and transmitted to the inspection device 300. By simply connecting the inspection device 300 to the inspection terminal 207a, an interrupt occurs and a process of transmitting each piece of information recorded in the second reading memory 264 to the inspection device 300 is performed. Can be completed. Therefore, the inspection device 300 analyzes the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio from the information received from the pachinko machine 10, and can detect fraudulent acts quickly and easily based on the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio.

  More specifically, if the data to be transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300 does not satisfy the upper limit number of the recordable information (the predetermined number), the CPU 261 first adds the information to the data. The information recorded from the position where is written to the position indicated by the memory that manages the position where the information is written (that is, the position where the information at the latest time is recorded) is sequentially read out, and the inspection is performed. Transmit to the device 300. On the other hand, if the data to be transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300 satisfies the upper limit number of the recordable information (the above-mentioned predetermined number) which is defined for each of the data, the data to be written is indicated by the memory for managing the information writing position. From the next position (ie, the position where the information of the oldest time is recorded) after the written position, the read position is shifted by one at a time, and the position indicated by the memory managing the position where the information is written (ie, the position indicated by the memory) , The information recorded up to the latest time is recorded and transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300. As a result, information is output to the inspection device 300 in order from the information at the oldest time.

  Since the second reading memory 264 is constituted by a non-volatile memory, even when the power is cut off in the middle, information on the ratio of the accessory in the pachinko machine 10 is recorded in the second reading memory 264. Continue to be. Therefore, the inspection device 300 can receive and analyze the information on the accessory ratio and the like including the information before the power is turned off.

  Here, some of the wrongdoers illegally open the electric accessory of the second starting port 64b by some method or guide a ball to the second starting port 64b, so that the second starting port 64b can be operated. Some are trying to increase the chances of jackpots by increasing the prize money. In addition, there are those that try to obtain many prize balls by illegally opening the opening / closing plate of the special winning opening 65a by some method or guiding a ball to the special winning opening 65a. When such misconduct has occurred, the ratio of the accessory and the ratio of the continuous accessory increase.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the main control device 110 is provided with the accessory ratio management chip 207, and the accessory ratio management chip 207 obtains winning information from the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to each winning opening. , And calculates and calculates the ratio of the accessory and the ratio of the continuous accessory in the pachinko machine 10 at a predetermined timing. When the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio recorded on the accessory ratio management chip 207 are output to the inspection device 300. In this way, by analyzing the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio in the inspection device 300, when an illegal act has been performed, the illegal act can be found.

  In the pachinko machine 10, information on the number of balls fired to the game area and information on the game state are also recorded in the accessory ratio management chip 207 and output to the inspection device 300. Therefore, when the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are high by the analysis by the inspection device 300, the cause is searched for based on information on the number of balls fired in the game area and information on the game state. be able to.

  The accessory ratio management chip 207 is provided in the main controller 110 and is housed in one board box 100 together with the MPU 201, the ROM 202, and the like. Accordingly, it is difficult for the wrongdoer to modify the winning information and the like input to the accessory ratio management chip 207. Also, it is difficult to falsify or delete the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio recorded in the accessory ratio management chip 207. Therefore, it is possible to maintain high reliability with respect to the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio calculated and output by the accessory ratio management chip 207.

  Further, the accessory ratio management chip 207 includes a first reading memory 263 and a second reading memory 264, and counts the number of balls won for each winning opening in the first reading memory 263. Based on the number of winning balls for each winning opening counted in, a bonus ratio and a continuous bonus ratio are calculated and recorded in the second reading memory 264. Here, the second reading memory 264 is constituted by a nonvolatile memory. However, in general, a nonvolatile memory requires large power for writing, takes a long time for writing, The number of times of writing is limited. In the present embodiment, the first reading memory 263 composed of a volatile memory and the second reading memory 264 composed of a non-volatile memory are separated. By performing the process of counting and storing the number of winning balls for each mouth at high speed, the number of winning balls in each winning opening can be counted without missing. Then, a process of calculating the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio from the number of winning balls for each winning opening stored in the first reading memory 263 and recording the same in the second reading memory 264 is performed at a predetermined timing ( By executing each trigger, the number of times of writing to the second reading memory 264 can be reduced, so that it is possible to suppress the above-mentioned problems caused by using a nonvolatile memory from becoming obvious.

  Returning to FIG. 373, the description will be continued. The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 includes a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 383) as a process during a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so as to have a launching strength of the ball according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when a command to launch the ball is issued by the main control device 110. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation handle 51 is turned off (not operated) on the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is turned off. The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of 51, and a ball is fired at intervals of about 0.6 seconds with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound from a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing lights from a lamp display device (such as the illuminated units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and makes a fluctuating effect or continuous It controls the setting of the display mode of the effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 such as the notice effect.

  The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22 and, when the player operates the frame button 22, changes the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or performs super reach. The sound output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect mode at the time, and the display control device 114 is instructed.

  When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the third image display device 81 displays a rear image corresponding to the changed stage. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  When the frame button 22 is operated for a purpose other than the change of the stage, such as changing the effect of the super reach, a frame button operation command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the frame button operation command, the display control device 114 displays an image corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 on the third symbol display device 81.

  The RAM 223 indicates a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed, or indicates that a variation effect should be started in an ON state. It has a change start flag (not shown) and the like.

  The command storage area is configured by a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 393) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process performs The command is analyzed, and processing according to the command is performed.

  The fluctuation start flag is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned ON when a stop type command output from the main control device 110 is received (see S1005 in FIG. 393). Then, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see S1102 in FIG. 394).

  The display control device 114 is a device that controls the screen display of the third symbol display device (LCD) 81, and displays various screen displays such as a variable display (fluctuation effect) of the third symbol and a big hit effect at the time of a big hit by an audio lamp. The control is performed according to a command transmitted from the control device 113 (main control device 110).

  The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a ROM (program ROM) 232, a work RAM 233, a video RAM 234, a character ROM 235, an image controller 236, an input port 237, an output port 238, and bus lines 239 and 240. have. The input side of the input port 237 is connected to the output side of the audio lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 237 is connected to the MPU 231, the ROM 232, the work RAM 233, and the image controller 236. A video RAM 234 and a character ROM 235 are connected to the image controller 236, and an output port 238 is connected via a bus line 240. The third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 238. Note that the pachinko machine 10 is a model having the same design as the design displayed on the third symbol display device 81, even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model having different jackpot lottery probabilities and different numbers of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot. Therefore, the display control device 114 is used as a common component to reduce cost.

  The MPU 231 of the display control device 114 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio lamp control device 113 and other various commands. The ROM 232 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data. The work RAM 233 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various programs.

  The character ROM 235 is a memory that stores effect data (character information) such as symbols (background symbols and third symbols) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a compressed format. The video RAM 234 includes an area (not shown) for storing a plurality of pieces of character information read from the character ROM 235 in a decompressed format to generate an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a plurality of decompressed pieces of information. This is a memory having a frame buffer area (not shown) for temporarily storing display data for one frame generated using at least a part of the character information until the display is performed.

  The image controller 236 adjusts the respective timings of the MPU 231, the video RAM 234, and the output port 238 to intervene in the reading and writing of data, and reads out the display data stored in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 234 at a predetermined timing to perform the third reading. This is displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power outage signal SG1 is output to the NMI terminals of the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt processing. Note that, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 386).

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data and also controls the payout control device 111 to execute a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 378 to 385, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process started upon power-on and a main process executed after the start-up process, and is started periodically (in the present embodiment at a period of 2 milliseconds). There are a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process started by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. Here, for convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt processing and the NMI interrupt processing will be described first, and then the startup processing and the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 378 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process that is repeatedly executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. As the MPU 201 executes the timer interrupt process, various processes to be executed periodically are performed.

  In this timer interrupt process, first, an external output process is executed (S101). In the timer interrupt processing and the main processing, a command to be transmitted to the payout control device 111, the sound ramp control device 113, and the like is generated based on various processes, and temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. I do. In the external output process in S101, the output data such as the command stored in the command transmission ring buffer is transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side.

  For example, a command for the number of balls to be held set in the start winning process (see FIG. 380) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, a determination command, and the like set in the variation process (see FIG. 381) and the variation start process (FIG. 382), which is one process of the variation process, are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. In addition, a ball firing signal set when a ball is fired in the process of S111 described below is transmitted to the firing control device 112.

  Next, the prize ball counting signal and the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S102), and then, in the case of the jackpot state, the large winning opening (large opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is opened or closed. Large opening opening / closing processing is performed (S103). In other words, the special winning opening 65a is opened in each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the special winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a predetermined number of balls have been won in the special winning opening 65a. When any one of these conditions is satisfied, the special winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the special winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of rounds.

  Next, display control processing of a second symbol (for example, a symbol of “○” or “X”) by the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S105). In brief, on the condition that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes, and the second symbol display device 83 changes the second symbol. The display is performed. Then, lottery of the second symbol is performed based on the value of the second random number counter C4, and when the second symbol hits, the electric accessory associated with the second starting port 64b is opened for a predetermined time.

  Next, a switch reading process is executed (S106). That is, the state of the various switches 208 connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined to store the detection information (winning detection information). Further, based on the winning detection information, a prize ball command corresponding to the number of acquired balls to be transmitted to the payout control device 111 is set in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. Thereby, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 111 by the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process executed next. Details of the switch reading process (S106) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S107). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches a maximum value (899 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches a maximum value (250 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented. Is stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Furthermore, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S108). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1, and the second random number counter C4 are each incremented by one, and their counter values are set to the maximum value. When they reach (899, 99, 99, 198, 250 in this embodiment, respectively), they are cleared to 0, respectively. Further, when the first random number counter C1 or the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 or the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is changed to the first random number counter C1 or The initial value of the second random number counter C4 is read, and the initial value is set in the first random number counter C1 or the second random number counter C4. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the counter of the RAM 203.

  Next, a process for performing display by the first symbol display device 37 and a variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol and the like by the third symbol display device 81 are executed (S109), and then, the first start port 64a. Then, a start winning process is executed in accordance with a win in one of the start ports of the second start port 64b (S110). Note that the details of the fluctuation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 381, and the details of the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIG. 380.

  After the start winning process is executed, the launch control process is executed (S111), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S112), and the timer interrupt process is ended. The firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a, and fires the ball on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping firing is not operated. This is a process for determining ON / OFF of the data. When the launch of the sphere is on, the information of the sphere launch signal is set in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 in order to transmit the sphere launch signal to the launch control device 112. Thereby, the ball firing signal is transmitted to the firing control device 112 via the payout control device 111 by the processing of S101 of the timer interrupt processing executed next.

  The other processing (S112) includes processing for determining whether the pachinko machine 10 is in an error state. For example, although the information of the ball firing signal is set in the process of S111, the ball guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the ball fired to the game area) is detected by the out switch 208f for a predetermined time or more. If not, it is determined that there is a possibility of clogging of the ball, and it is determined that there is an error. Further, when the abnormal payout signal is read in the process of S102, it is determined that the payout of the ball is in an error state. Further, when a large vibration is given to the pachinko machine 10 or when it is determined that the magnet is brought close to the pachinko machine 10, it is determined that there is a possibility that an illegal act has been performed in the game, and that the game is in an error state. .

  It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a vibration sensing sensor for sensing the vibration, and the output of the vibration sensing sensor is input to the input / output port 205 of the main control device 110. The processing is performed by reading the output of the vibration sensor in the process of S112. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a magnetic sensor for detecting a change in magnetism, and the output of the magnetic sensor is input to the input / output port 205 of the main controller 110 to determine whether the magnet is brought close to the pachinko machine 10. This is performed by reading the output of the magnetic sensor in the process of S112.

  If it is determined in the process of S112 that an error has occurred, an error command including information on the error type is set in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. As a result, the error command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 by the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process executed next. Then, a warning sound corresponding to the error type can be output from the audio output device 226, the display lamp 34 can be turned on and blinked, and an image corresponding to the error type can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .

  Next, the switch reading process (S106), which is one of the timer interrupt processes executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 379 is a flowchart showing the switch reading process (S106).

  In the switch reading process, first, each of the first starting port switch 208a, the second starting port switch 208b, the first ordinary winning opening switch 208c, the second ordinary winning opening switch 208d, the big winning opening switch 208e, and the out switch 208f. The output is read by referring to the first port 205a, the first two ports 205b, the first port 205c, the second port 205d, the special winning port 205e, and the out port 205f of the input / output port 205, and the first starting port 64a, The presence / absence of a prize in the second starting port 64b, the first ordinary prize opening 63a, the second ordinary prize entrance 63b, and the special winning opening 65a, and the presence / absence of a ball guided to the ball discharge path are determined, and the detection information ( The winning detection information is stored (S151). The winning of one ball and the determination of one ball guided to the ball discharging path are performed over three timer interrupt processes based on the outputs of the switches 208a to 208f.

  Next, based on the winning detection information, it is determined that a winning has been achieved by the processing of S151 among the first starting opening 64a, the second starting opening 64b, the first ordinary winning opening 63a, the second ordinary winning opening 63b, and the big winning opening 65a. If there is a determined winning opening, the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning opening is paid out such that the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning opening (ie, the number specified by the winning ball count table 202e) is paid out. The award ball command is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 (S152). Thereby, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 111 by the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process executed next.

  Then, based on the winning detection information, it is determined that a winning has been achieved by the processing of S151 among the first starting opening 64a, the second starting opening 64b, the first ordinary winning opening 63a, the second ordinary winning opening 63b, and the big winning opening 65a. If there is a winning port determined, the counter corresponding to the winning port having the winning is set to 1 among the first 1 counter 203d, the first 2 counter 203e, the first 1 counter 203f, the second 2 counter 203g, and the big winning port counter 203h. When it is determined that the ball has been guided to the ball discharge path while counting up, the out counter 203i is counted up by one (S153).

  Next, it is determined whether or not 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the last time the winning information (the value of each of the counters 203d to 203i and the information on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10) was set in the accessory / material ratio managing chip 207 (see FIG. S154). As a result, if 0.5 second has not elapsed (S154: No), the switch reading process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that 0.5 seconds have elapsed (S154: Yes), the processing of S155 to S157 is executed. First, in the process of S155, the values of the first counter 203d, the second counter 203e, the first counter 203f, the second counter 203g, and the special winning counter 203h are set as winning information, and the value of the out counter 203i is set as out information. Is set in the accessory ratio management chip 207 together with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (S155).

  Thus, the value of the first counter 203d is set in the first buffer 262a of the accessory ratio management chip 207, the value of the first counter 203e is set in the second buffer 262b of the accessory ratio management chip 207, and the first counter The value of 203f is set in the first buffer 262c of the bonus ratio management chip 207, the value of the second counter 203g is set in the second buffer 262d of the bonus ratio management chip 207, and the value of the special winning opening counter 203h is used. The value is set in the special winning opening buffer 262e of the physical ratio management chip 207, and the value of the out counter 203i is set in the out buffer 262f of the accessory ratio management chip 207.

  As described above, the counting of the number of balls in the counters 203d to 203i is performed continuously for 0.5 seconds, and when 0.5 seconds have elapsed, the values of the counters 203d to 203h are set as winning information, and the value of the out counter 203i is set. Is set in the accessory ratio management chip 207 together with information indicating the gaming state at that time as out information. That is, in the present pachinko machine 10, the MPU 201 counts the number of balls winning in each winning opening at every 0.5 second interval for each winning opening, and counts the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path ( That is, the number of balls used in the game) is counted, and the counted result is set in the accessory ratio management chip 207. Then, as will be described later, the accessory ratio management chip 207 accumulates these counted values for each value until the timing for calculating the accessory ratio is reached. The number of balls won in each winning opening until the timing of calculating the material ratio or before the timing of calculating the accessory ratio from the previous calculation of the accessory ratio is calculated. It counts each time, and counts the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (ie, the number of balls used in the game).

  It is assumed that the MPU 201 does not count the number of balls winning each winning opening for each winning opening or count the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls used in the game). Assuming that the counting is performed only by the accessory ratio management chip 207, even the accessory ratio management chip 207 wins a prize at each winning opening or is guided to the ball discharge path at a short interval (for example, 2 millisecond interval). The sphere must be monitored, which increases the processing load and power consumption.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the counting result of the MPU 201 sets these counting results in the accessory ratio management chip 207 at 0.5 second intervals. Each time a prize is won from the time the power is turned on until the timing of calculating the accessory ratio for the first time, or from the time the last time the ratio of the accessory is calculated until the timing of calculating the next accessory ratio. A process of counting the number of balls winning the mouth for each winning opening and counting the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls used in the game) may be executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in processing load and power consumption in the accessory ratio management chip 207.

  On the other hand, the MPU 201 counts the number of balls winning in each winning opening for each winning opening, and counts the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls used in the game). Therefore, at two millisecond intervals when the timer interrupt processing is executed, the winning in each winning opening and the ball guided to the ball discharging path are monitored. This is necessary for performing main control of a game such as award ball determination, and is originally performed at a short time interval of 2 milliseconds. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, since the firing interval of the balls fired into the game area by the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 373) is about 0.6 seconds, each winning port counted at 0.5 second intervals is provided. The number of winning balls or the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls used in the game) is 0 or 1 ball in most cases, and at most several balls. Therefore, the data amount required for the counters 203d to 203i provided in the RAM 203 may be small. Therefore, the increase in the capacity of the RAM 203 can be suppressed by this counting process. Therefore, in the MPU 201, the number of balls winning each winning opening in 0.5 seconds is counted for each winning opening, and the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the balls used in the game). ) Is not significantly affected.

  The game state set by the process of S155 includes, for example, a jackpot, opening the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14, and an error. Whether the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is being opened is determined by the MPU 201 referring to the door opening port 205g and confirming the output of the door opening switch 208g.

  Whether or not the gaming state is in error is based on the result determined by the processing of S112 of the timer interrupt processing. In the process of S155, when it is determined in the process of S112 that there is an error, information indicating that the game is in an error state is set in the accessory ratio management chip 207.

  If the gaming state set in the process of S155 includes a jackpot, jackpot information is stored in the jackpot buffer 262g. If the gaming state includes the opening of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14, the jackpot is opened. The information indicating that the door is being opened is stored in the middle buffer 262h, and if the gaming state includes an error, the error information is stored in the error buffer 262i. Then, in the accessory ratio management chip 207, these pieces of information are finally recorded in the game state data 264d of the second reading memory 264. When the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, information on the game state is transmitted to the inspection device 300 together with information on the accessory ratio. Therefore, when the inspection device 300 analyzes the accessory ratio of the pachinko machine 10 and finds a mysterious tendency in the accessory ratio, the inspection device 300 refers to the information indicating the gaming state to find the cause. Can be.

  After the processing of S155, an interrupt signal is transmitted to the accessory ratio management chip 207 (S156). The accessory ratio management chip 207 executes a setting information receiving process (see FIG. 387) described later based on the interrupt signal, and based on various information set in the buffer 262, a ball winning for each winning opening. Is counted, the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the balls fired into the game area) is counted, and the numbers of these balls are stored in the first reading memory 263, and the pachinko machine is used. Information on the ten game states is also stored in the first reading memory 263.

  After the processing of S156, the first counter 203d, the second counter 203e, the first counter 203f, the second counter 203g, the big winning counter 203h corresponding to each winning opening, the large winning counter 203h, and the out counter 203i corresponding to the out switch 208f are reset to 0. Is initialized (S157), the switch reading process ends, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. When the counters 203d to 203i are initialized to 0 by the processing of S157, the number of balls winning each winning opening in the next 0.5 seconds is counted by the counters 203d to 203h again for each winning opening. The number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls used in the game) is counted by the out counter 203i.

  In the process of S154, if this process is executed for the first time after the power is supplied to the main control device 110, the winning information (the values of the counters 203d to i and the value of the pachinko machine) (S154: Yes) It is assumed that 0.5 seconds have passed since the setting of the game state of No. 10 (S154: Yes), and the process proceeds to S155. This is the number of balls winning each winning opening detected before the power was turned off or the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path, which is set in the accessory ratio management chip 207 when the power is turned off. The value of each of the counters 203d to 203i of the RAM 203, which has not been maintained, can be set in the accessory ratio management chip 207 immediately after the power is supplied, provided that the value is retained even during power-off. Therefore, in the accessory ratio management chip 207, it is possible to suppress the omission of the winning information and the out information due to the power-off.

  Next, the start winning process (S110), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 380. FIG. 380 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S110). The start winning process determines whether there is a ball (start win) in one of the first start port 64a and the second start port 64b, and if there is a start win, each of the counters C1 to C3. A process of storing (reserving) the value of CS1 in the retaining ball storage area 203b is executed. Further, a process for transmitting the value of each of the held counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to the sound lamp control device 113 together with the number of held balls is executed.

  Upon executing the start winning process, the MPU 201 first determines whether or not the ball has won (start win) the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b (S201). Here, by the processing of S151 of the switch reading processing (refer to FIG. 379), the first starting port switch 208a for detecting the winning to the first starting port 64a and the second starting for detecting the winning to the second starting port 64b. The result of the presence or absence of a prize in the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b, which is determined based on the output signal from the mouth switch 208b, is used.

  When it is determined that the ball has won the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b (the start winning has been achieved) (S201: Yes), the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (the main controller 110 holds the ball). It is determined whether or not the number N of the pending balls of the fluctuating effect is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S202). Then, whether there is no prize in any of the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b (S201: No), or even if there is a prize in the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b. If the number N of reserved balls is not N <4 (S202: No), the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

  On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b (S201: Yes) and if the number N of retained balls is smaller than 4 (S202: Yes), the value of the retained ball number counter 203a (Reserved). The number of balls N) is incremented by 1 (S203). Then, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 are read from the counter buffer (see FIG. 375) and provided in the reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. Among the reserved first to fourth areas, a first random number counter storage area 203b1, a first type counter storage area 203b2, and a stop pattern selection counter storage area of an area corresponding to the value indicated by the reserved ball number counter 203a. 203b4 is held (stored) in the fluctuation type counter storage area 203b4 (S204).

  Specifically, if the value of the number-of-reserved-balls counter 203a after the addition in the process of S203 is “1”, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved in the respective storage areas of the reserved first area. If the value of the added ball count counter 203a is “2”, the storage area of the reserved second area is “2”. If the value of the added ball counter 203a is “3”, the reserved third area is “3”. If the value of the added ball count counter 203a after addition is "4" in each storage area, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored in the respective storage areas of the reserved fourth area.

  Next, the value of the number-of-reserved-balls counter 203a (the number N of reserved balls) after the addition in the process of S203, the first random number counter C1 stored (reserved) in the reserved ball storage area 203b by the process of S204, In order to transmit the reserved ball count command including the values of the type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 to the voice ramp control device 113, the reserved ball count command is provided in the RAM 203 for command transmission. A ring buffer is set (S205). As a result, the retained ball count command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output process of S101 of the timer interrupt process executed next.

  Upon receiving the reserved ball count command, the voice lamp control device 113 instructs the display control device 114 to display the reserved ball count symbol corresponding to the reserved ball count N in the reserved ball count display area Db (see FIG. 372). I do. In addition, the sound ramp control device 113 uses the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the pending ball count command to read ahead before performing a variable effect based on each value, and to determine which variable effect It is determined before the execution of the fluctuating effect whether or not such a situation occurs (whether or not a big hit will occur, what will be the fluctuating time, etc.). Then, based on the result of the pre-reading, it is possible to determine the execution of various effects.

  The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the reserved ball count command in the processing of S205 may use the values themselves read from the counter buffer in the processing of S204, or the reserved sphere storage area in the processing of S204. A value obtained by reading out (holding) the value stored in 203b may be used.

  Upon completion of the process in S205, the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 381, a description will be given of the fluctuation process (S109), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. FIG. 381 is a flowchart showing the change processing (S109). The fluctuation processing (S109) controls the fluctuation display performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the fluctuation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  In this fluctuation processing, first, it is determined whether or not a big hit is currently occurring (S301). The big hit is included during the big hit game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 37 at the time of the big hit and during the predetermined time after the big hit game ends. If the result of the determination is that the jackpot is being hit (S301: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If it is not during the big hit (S301: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302), and if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing. (S302: No) Then, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed after the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 has stopped (S303). As a result, if the predetermined time has not elapsed after the stop of the fluctuation (S303: No), the present process is terminated as it is. As a result, the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 for a predetermined time, so that the player can visually recognize the stop symbol.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S303, if a predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation is stopped (S303: Yes), the value of the number-of-reserved-balls counter 203a (the number of retained balls N in the variable display retained in the main control device 110). Is greater than or equal to 0 (S304). As a result, if the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (reserved ball number N) is not 0 (S304: Yes), it is determined that it is the execution start timing of the fluctuation effect, and first, the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (reserved) The number of balls N) is subtracted by 1 (S305). This is because the execution of one variation effect of the suspended variation effects is started by the variation start process (S307), and the number of reserved balls is reduced by one.

  Next, the data stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S306). This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first to fourth areas of the reserved ball storage area 203b toward the reserved ball execution area 203c. The data in each area is shifted in the order of the area 203c, the reserved second area → the reserved first area, the reserved third area → the reserved second area, the reserved fourth area → the reserved third area, and so on.

  After the data shift process of S306, the variation start process for the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is executed based on the values of the various counters stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c by the data shift process. (S307), and returns to the timer interrupt processing. The change start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S304, when it is determined that the value of the reserved ball counter 203a (reserved ball number N) is 0 (S304: No), the demonstration effect is being performed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, it is determined whether or not the demonstration is being performed (S308). In this determination process, after the demo command is transmitted to the display control device 114 via the audio lamp control device 113, the value of the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (reserved ball number N) is determined to be larger than 0. It is determined that the interval is under demonstration.

  When it is determined that the demonstration is not being performed (S308: No), a demonstration command to be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 is set (S309), and the process returns to the timer interruption process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the demonstration is being performed (S309: Yes), the process returns to the timer interrupt process. The demo command set in the process of S309 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is output in the external output process (S101 in FIG. 382) of the next timer interrupt process. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When receiving the demonstration command, the sound lamp control device 113 instructs the display control device 114 to display the demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, as described above, the demonstration command is set when there is no pending ball when a predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation stop. Therefore, if the fluctuation display is not started even after the lapse of the predetermined time after the fluctuation stop, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined in the process of S308 that the demonstration is not being performed (S308: No), the process of determining whether a second predetermined time longer than the predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of the fluctuation is further performed. After the execution and the fluctuation stop, the process of S309 may be executed after the second predetermined time has elapsed to set the demonstration command. Thereby, when there is no pending ball after the fluctuation stop, the player can show the stopped design of the stopped fluctuation effect for a relatively long time without immediately starting the demonstration effect.

  In the processing of S302, when it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time has elapsed (S310). The display time during the change of the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the change pattern selected by the change type counter CS1 (decided according to the change pattern command), and the change time elapses. If not (S310: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S311), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

  In the present embodiment, of the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts. And turn on the green LED. If the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED.If the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. At the same time, a display mode for turning on the red LED is set.

  Note that the fluctuation process is executed every 2 milliseconds. However, if the lighting color of the LED is changed every time the fluctuation process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by one each time the fluctuation process is executed so that the player can confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. When the counter reaches 200, the LED is turned on. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  On the other hand, if the fluctuation time of the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S310: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol is set on the first symbol display device 37 (S312). The stop symbol is set in advance by a fluctuation start process (S307) described later with reference to FIG. In the fluctuation start processing, it is determined whether or not a big hit is made according to the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c by the processing of S306, and if it is a big hit, the first hit type counter C2 is determined. Depending on the value of, a pattern that becomes a 15R probability variable jackpot after the jackpot (the maximum number of rounds changes to the high probability state after 15 rounds of jackpot) or a 2R probability variable jackpot (the maximum number of rounds changes to the high probability state after 2 rounds of jackpot) It is determined whether the symbol is a symbol that becomes a transitional jackpot to be shifted or a symbol that becomes a 15R normal jackpot (a jackpot that shifts to the low probability state after the jackpot of the 15th round has been reached).

  In the present embodiment, the blue LED is turned on when the 15R probability change hits after the big hit, the red LED is turned on when the 2R probability change hit occurs, and the red LED and the blue LED is turned on. In the case of a disconnection, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. Each LED is turned off when the next change display is started, but may be turned on only for a few seconds after the change stops.

  When the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the process of S312, the stop symbol of the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81 is synchronized with the lighting of the LED on the first symbol display device 37. In order to confirm and display, a decision command is set (S313), and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing. Upon receiving this confirmation command, the sound lamp control device 113 instructs the display control device 114 to stop the fluctuation display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 and to confirm and display the stopped symbol. Do.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 382, a description will be given of a change start process (S307), which is one of the change processes executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. FIG. 382 is a flowchart showing the change start processing (S307). In the change start process (S307), based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the reserved sphere storing area, a "big hit" or "missing" lottery (big hit lottery) is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 is displayed. And the effect pattern (fluctuation pattern) of the fluctuation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 is determined.

  In the change start process, first, a big hit is determined based on the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c and the big hit random number table 202a (see FIG. 376 (a)). A lottery (win / fail judgment) process is performed (S401).

  Whether or not a big hit is determined based on the relationship between the value of the first random number counter C1 and the mode at that time. As described above, in the jackpot random number table 202a, when the gaming state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take is in the normal low probability state, “7,307,582” is defined as the jackpot random value. When the gaming state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take is in the high probability state, “28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420 , 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 826, 866, 892 "are defined as the jackpot random numbers.

  In the process of S401, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area is compared with the jackpot random number values defined in the jackpot random number table 202a, and they match. In this case, it is determined that the hit is a big hit. As a result of the process of S401, when it is determined that the hit is a big hit (S401: Yes), the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c and the big hit type table 202b (FIG. 376 (b)) ), The display mode at the time of the big hit is set (S402).

  In this process, according to the jackpot type table 202b, the jackpot type associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c, that is, the high probability state after the maximum hit of 15 rounds The 15R probable jackpot that shifts to the 15R regular jackpot that shifts to the low probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds, or the 2R probability jackpot that shifts to the high probability state after the jackpot of 2 rounds Is determined. Then, based on the determined jackpot type, the display mode at the time of the jackpot (the lighting state of the LED 37a) on the first symbol display device 37 is set.

  In addition, in the third symbol display device 81, in order to stop and display various jackpot symbols corresponding to the jackpot type, the jackpot type (15R probability variable jackpot, 2R probability variable jackpot, 15R normal jackpot) is set as the stop type as it is, The display mode at the time of the big hit in the three symbol display device 81 is set.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined (S403), and the process proceeds to S406. Specifically, in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the fluctuation time until the stop display is performed in the big hit display mode is determined. In determining the change pattern at the time of the big hit, first, the big hit change pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 376 (c)) to be used is selected according to the number of the reserved balls at that time indicated by the reserved ball number counter 203a. Then, when the 15R probability variable jackpot or the 15R regular jackpot is set as the jackpot type in the process of S402, it is stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c in the “15R jackpot common” group of the selected jackpot variation pattern table 202d1. The change pattern associated with the value of the change type counter CS1 is selected. That is, in this case, one of the fluctuation A, the fluctuation B, and the fluctuation C is selected.

  If the 2R probability change jackpot is set as the jackpot type in the process of S402, the change type stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c in the “2R probability change jackpot only” group of the selected jackpot change pattern table 202d1. A variation pattern associated with the value of the counter CS1 is selected. In this embodiment, only the 2R variation is selected in this case. The relationship between the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation A, fluctuation B, fluctuation C, and 2R fluctuation) and the fluctuation time is defined in advance by a table or the like.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S401 that the hit is not a big hit (S401: No), the display mode at the time of departure is set (S404). In the process of S404, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the out-of-design, and the third pattern is displayed based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c. As the stop type to be displayed on the symbol display device 81, one of the reach out of front and rear, the reach other than the back and forth out of reach, and the complete out of reach is set. In the present embodiment, as described above, the range of the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to each stop type depends on whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the high probability state or the low probability state. The tables are set differently.

  Next, a variation pattern at the time of departure is determined (S405), and the process proceeds to S406. Specifically, in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the fluctuation time until the stop symbol is displayed in the off symbol is determined. At this time, if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state at normal time excluding the time saving state, the variation pattern table for miss (normal) corresponding to the number of reserved balls at that time indicated by the retained ball number counter 203a. 202d2 (see FIG. 376 (d)) is selected. Further, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state or the high probability state at the time of probable change, the deviation (probable change) variation pattern table 202d3 (corresponding to the reserved ball number at that time indicated by the reserved ball number counter 203a) 376 (e) is selected.

  If complete departure is set as the stop type in the process of S404, the suspension is reserved in the “permanent departure only” group of the selected departure (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 or the departure (probable variation) variation pattern table 202d3. A variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the ball execution area 203c is selected. That is, in this case, the fluctuation D or the fluctuation E is selected.

  In the process of step S402, if the stop type is set to the out-of-order reach and the reach other than the out-of-order stop, the "reach common" of the selected off (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 or the off (probable variation) variation pattern table 202d3 is set. In this group, a variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c is selected. That is, in this case, the fluctuation A, the fluctuation B, and the fluctuation C are selected. Then, the fluctuation time is set based on the relationship between the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time defined in advance by a table or the like.

  In the process of S406, based on the variation pattern determined by the processes of S403 and S405, a variation pattern command for notifying the variation pattern to the display control device 114 via the audio lamp control device 113 is set (S406). Further, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 via the sound lamp control device 113 of the stop type set in the process of S402 or S404 is set (S415), and the process returns to the fluctuation process. These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are converted into voices in the processing of S101 of the next timer interrupt processing (FIG. 382). Sent to lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command, the sound ramp control device 113 generates a display fluctuation pattern command and a display type command based on the command, and transmits them to the display control device 114.

  FIG. 383 is a flowchart illustrating an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt process (S501). I do.

  Note that the above-described NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout control device 111 in the same manner, and the power-off information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 384, a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is turned on will be described. FIG. 384 is a flowchart showing the start-up processing. This start-up process is started by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S601). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (one second in the present embodiment) is executed in order to wait until the sub-side control devices (the peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) are in an operable state. (S602). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S603).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided on the power supply 115 is turned on (S604). If it is turned on (S604: Yes), the process proceeds to S614. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S604: No), it is further determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S605), and if not, it is not stored (S605: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown may not have been completed normally, the process also proceeds to S614 in this case.

  If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S605: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S606). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S607: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, the backed-up data has been destroyed, and the process also proceeds to S614 in such a case.

  Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as described later in the process of S706 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S614, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S614). Upon receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 203, sets an initial value, and enters a state where the payout control of the game balls can be started. After transmitting the pay-out initialization command, main controller 110 executes an initialization process of RAM 203 (S615, S616).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is opened, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is pressed at the time of execution of the startup processing, the RAM initialization processing (S615, S616) is executed. Similarly, the initialization process of the RAM 203 (S615, S616) is executed also when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the initialization processing of the RAM (S615, S616), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S615), and thereafter, an initial value is set in the RAM 203 (S616). After the execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S610.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S604: No), power-off occurrence information is stored (S605: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (S604: No), S607: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S608). Then, a payout return command at the time of power restoration for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of driving power cutoff is transmitted (S609), and the process proceeds to S610. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 enters a state in which the payout control of the game balls can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S610, the initialization signal is transmitted to the accessory ratio management chip 207 (S610). Thus, the accessory ratio management chip 207 receives the initialization signal and executes an initialization process such as initializing the buffer 262 and the first reading memory 263 to all 0 (S711 in FIG. 386). Initialization is performed so that the accessory ratio management chip 207 can manage the accessory ratio.

  Next, the information of the award ball number table 202e is transmitted to the accessory ratio management chip 207 (S611). As a result, in the accessory ratio management chip 207, the prize ball number table 202e is set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a, and each prize when there is a prize at each winning port indicated by the prize ball number table 202e. On the basis of the number of balls, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio of the pachinko machine 10 are calculated.

  Here, the number of prize balls when there is a prize in each prize port is determined by the model of the pachinko machine, and the information is conventionally stored in the ROM 202. Each time the power is supplied, the information on the number of prize balls is transmitted to the prize ball number table 202e stored in the ROM 202 to the accessory ratio management chip 207. By setting to 265a, it is not necessary to store information on the number of award balls different for each model in the ROM of the accessory ratio management chip 207 at the manufacturing stage. Therefore, the production of the accessory ratio management chip 207 can be simplified. Further, when the pachinko machines are of different models, it is only necessary to change the ROM 202. Even if the pachinko machines of different models use the same accessory ratio management chip 207, the accessory ratio can be accurately calculated.

  Next, the information of the trigger information data 202f is transmitted to the accessory ratio management chip 207 (S612). Accordingly, in the accessory ratio management chip 207, when the trigger information data 202f is set in the trigger setting area 265b and the timing (trigger) for calculating the accessory ratio indicated by the trigger information data 202f comes, the pachinko machine 10 Is calculated.

  Here, the timing (trigger) for calculating the accessory ratio is determined by the accessory ratio management chip 207 because there is a physical limitation on the storage capacity for recording information on the accessory ratio in the accessory ratio management chip 207. It is preferable that the timing is not fixed, but that the jackpot probability and the probability of change in the pachinko machine 10 are considered. Like the pachinko machine 10, the trigger information data 202f that defines the timing of calculating the accessory ratio determined in consideration of the jackpot probability and the probability of change in the pachinko machine 10 is stored in the ROM 202, and power is supplied. Each time the pachinko machine 10 sends the trigger information data 202f to the ROM ratio management chip 207, the trigger information data 202f is sent to the ROM 202 at a timing that matches the jackpot probability and the probability of change in the pachinko machine 10. The ratio and the continuous accessory ratio can be calculated and stored in the second reading memory 264.

  After the processing of S612, the interruption is permitted (S613). Then, the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the start-up process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 384 is a flowchart showing the main processing. In the main process, a counter update process and a power-off process are roughly performed.

  In the main process, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S701). If the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S701: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 does not output the power failure signal SG1, and the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, the updating of the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S702, S703).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S702). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by one, and are cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899, 250 in this embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the change type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S108 (see FIG. 378) (S703), and the process proceeds to S701.

  Here, while the main process is being executed, the timer interrupt process described with reference to FIG. 378 is started and executed at predetermined time intervals (2 milliseconds in the present embodiment). In the timer interrupt processing, different processing is executed according to the state of the game. For example, during the big hit, the execution of controlling the opening and closing of the special winning opening 65a is performed, and if a ball passes through the through gate 67, the second symbol display device 83 controls the display of the second symbol. In addition, in the jackpot lottery executed when the variable display is started on the first symbol display device 37, the number of the jackpot random number values to be compared with the acquired first random number counter C1 depending on whether the state is the high probability state or the low probability state. Will be different. Therefore, the time required to execute one timer interrupt process changes according to the state of the game. Therefore, the remaining time from the end of one timer interrupt process to the execution timing of the next timer interrupt process is not constant, but changes according to the state of the game at that time.

  The processes of S702 and S703, which are one process of the main process, are executed during the remaining time of the timer interrupt process. That is, the updating of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is repeatedly executed using the remaining time, so that the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI1 are updated. The counter CINI2 (that is, the initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random. . In particular, by updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at random, the first random number counter C1 and the second random number counter C4 are updated using these as initial values for updating. Can have randomness.

  In the process of S701, if the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S701: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. Since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 383 has been executed, the processing at the time of power shutdown after S704 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S704), and a power-off command indicating that power has been cut off is sent to another control device (a peripheral control device such as the payout control device 111 or the sound lamp control device 113). And the power-off information is transmitted to the accessory ratio management chip 207 (S705). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S706), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S707), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area of the RAM 203 to be backed up.

  Note that the process of S701 is executed at the timing when one cycle of the processes of S702 and S703 performed within the remaining time of the timer interrupt process ends. Thereby, in the main processing of the main controller 110, various settings by the timer interrupt processing are completed, and at the timing when the updating of each of the counters CINI1, CINI2, CS1 is completed, the information of the occurrence of the power interruption is confirmed. . Therefore, when returning from the power-off state, the processing can be started from the processing of S701 after the start-up processing is completed. That is, the process can be started from the process of S701, as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process.

  Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, even if the contents of the registers used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not stored, the stack pointer is not reset in the initialization process (S601). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S701. As a result, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without erroneous operation or runaway of main controller 110.

  In the present embodiment, a case has been described in which the periodically executed processing is executed by the timer interruption processing, and the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 are updated in the remaining time of the timer interruption processing in the main processing. A part or all of the processing executed in the timer interrupt processing may be executed at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 milliseconds) in the main processing. For example, the prize ball counting signal, the payout abnormality signal reading process (S102), the large opening opening / closing process (S103), the second symbol control process (S105), and the switch reading which were executed in the timer interrupt process in the present embodiment. A part or all of the process (S106) may be configured to be executed every 2 milliseconds in the main process instead of the timer interrupt process.

  In this case, a step of determining whether or not a predetermined time (2 milliseconds) has elapsed in the main processing is provided. Only when it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, a process to be executed every predetermined time is executed. The updating of the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 may be performed regardless of whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed. As a result, the updating of each of the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 is performed during the remaining time of the processing executed at predetermined time intervals, but the processing executed at predetermined time intervals is executed in accordance with the state of the game. , The counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 can be updated randomly even in such a configuration.

  Next, each control process executed by the CPU 261 in the accessory ratio management chip 207 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the CPU 261 can be roughly classified into main processing of managing an accessory ratio which is started when the power is turned on, and receiving of setting information executed based on an interrupt signal received from the MPU 201 after winning information and the like are set by the MPU 201. There is a process and a test result output process executed based on the connection of the test device 300 to the test terminal 207a.

  First, with reference to FIG. 386, the main control of the accessory ratio executed by the CPU 261 in the accessory ratio management chip 207 will be described. FIG. 386 is a flowchart showing the main part ratio management main process. This accessory ratio management main process is started when power is supplied to the accessory ratio management chip 207.

  When the accessory ratio management main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not an initialization signal has been received from the MPU 201 (S710). While it is determined that the initialization signal has not been received (S710: No), the determination in S710 is continued. If it is determined that the initialization signal has been received (S710: Yes), the process proceeds to S711 to perform initialization (S711). Thereby, in the accessory ratio management chip 207, the initialization of the RAM 203 in at least the MPU 201 is completed, and the initial setting of the accessory ratio management chip 207 is executed after waiting for the stage in which the control of the game by the MPU 201 can be started. Will do.

  In the initialization of S711, when starting the operation of the accessory ratio management chip 207, initialization necessary for each device in the accessory ratio management chip 207 is executed. For example, the buffer 262 and the first reading memory 263 are all initialized to 0. As a result, in the buffer 262, even if there is a buffer that is not set by the MPU 201 for each of the buffers 262a to 262i, meaningless data can be suppressed from remaining in the buffer. It can be prevented from being stored in the memory 263. Also, in the first reading memory 263, the number of balls won in each winning opening and the ball discharge path are guided to the timing of calculating the ratio of the bonus after the power is supplied to the bonus ratio management chip 207. The number of balls that have been hit (that is, the number of balls fired into the game area) can be accumulated and counted, and information about the game state during that time can be stored.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the information of the award ball count table 202e has been received from the MPU 201 (S712). Then, while not receiving (S712: No), the process of S712 is continuously executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that it has been received (S712: Yes), the received prize ball count table 202e is set in the prize ball count data setting area 265a (S713). As a result, in the accessory ratio management chip 207, the prize ball number table 202e is set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a, and each prize when there is a prize at each winning port indicated by the prize ball number table 202e. On the basis of the number of balls, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio of the pachinko machine 10 are calculated.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the information of the trigger information data 202f has been received from the MPU 201 (S714). Then, while not receiving (S714: No), the process of S714 is continuously executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the trigger information has been received (S714: Yes), the received trigger information data 202f is set in the trigger setting area 265b. Thus, when the timing (trigger) for calculating the accessory ratio indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b occurs in the accessory ratio management chip 207, the accessory ratio of the pachinko machine 10 and The continuous character ratio is calculated.

  As described above, only the prize ball number table 202e and the trigger information data 202f transmitted during the startup process (so-called boot process) executed by the MPU 201 when the main controller 110 is turned on are the prize balls. The number data setting area 265a and the trigger setting area 265b are configured to be set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent person from setting a false prize ball count table and trigger information data in the prize ball count data setting area 265a and the trigger setting area 265b.

  Next, when the processing of S710 to S715 is completed, interruption permission is set (S716). As a result, when an interrupt signal transmitted after the winning information and the like is set from the MPU 201 is received, the setting information receiving process is executed, and the error occurs based on the fact that the inspection apparatus 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a. Inspection result output processing is executed by the interrupt signal.

  When an interrupt signal is input at the same time, the setting information receiving process is executed prior to the inspection result output process. As a result, the latest winning information, out information, and information on the game state input from the MPU 201 are accumulated and stored in the accessory ratio management chip 207, and then the information such as the accessory ratio is transmitted to the inspection device 300. Therefore, the analysis by the inspection device 300 can be performed including the latest information. On the other hand, when the interrupt signals are input at the same time, the inspection result output processing may be executed prior to the inspection apparatus output processing. In this case, when the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, it is possible to transmit information about the accessory ratio and the like to the inspection device 300.

  Next, it is determined whether or not power-off information has been received from the MPU 201 (S717). Unless power-off information has been received (S717: No), S717 is continuously executed. If the CPU 261 receives an interrupt signal from the MPU 201 during that time, it executes the setting information receiving process prior to the process of S717, and generates an interrupt generated based on the connection of the inspection device 300 to the inspection terminal 207a. If an inspection signal is received, an inspection result output process is executed.

  As a result of the processing in S717, when the power-off information is received (S717: Yes), the power to the main control device 110 (the accessory ratio management chip 207) is cut off due to a power failure or the like. Therefore, the accessory ratio calculation processing is executed (S718), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the processing cannot be executed. The details of the accessory ratio calculation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the setting information receiving process executed by the CPU 261 in the accessory ratio management chip 207 will be described with reference to FIGS. 387 and 388. FIG. 387 is a flowchart showing the setting information receiving process. This setting information receiving process is executed based on the interrupt signal received from the MPU 201 after the winning information and the like are set by the MPU 201.

  The setting information receiving process includes winning information (each value of the first counter 203d, the second counter 203e, the first counter 203f, the second counter 203g, and the special winning opening counter 203h) set in the buffers 262a to 262e by the MPU 201 and This is a process of storing the out information (the value of the out counter 203i) set in the out buffer 262f and the game state set in each of the buffers 262g to 262i in the first reading memory 263. If it is the timing of calculating the accessory ratio, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are calculated based on the counters 263a to 263e stored in the first reading memory 263, and the data on the number of fired balls and the game state are calculated. At the same time, processing for recording in the second reading memory 264 is also performed.

  First, reference is made to FIG. In the setting information receiving process, first, it is determined whether or not there is door opening information in the opening buffer 262h (S720). If there is door opening information in the opening buffer 262h (S720: Yes), the door opening information is set (added and stored) in the opening data 263h together with the current time indicated by the RTC 266 ( S721).

  When it is determined by the processing of S720 that there is no door opening information in the opening buffer 262h (S720: No), and after the processing of S721, next, it is determined whether there is error information in the error buffer 262i. Is determined (S722). If there is error information in the error buffer 262i (S722: Yes), the error information is set (added and stored) in the error data 263i together with the current time indicated by the RTC 266 (S723). .

  If it is determined by the processing of S722 that there is no error information in the error buffer 262i (S722: No), and after the processing of S723, the current time indicated by the RTC 266 is then changed to the midnight time zone (midnight 0). It is determined whether or not the time is between the hour and the early morning (6:00) (S724). Normally, since the midnight hours are outside business hours, the fact that the MPU 201 transmits an interrupt signal during this midnight time and the setting information receiving process is executed means that any illegal acts are performed during the midnight hours. It is thought that it was done. Therefore, if it is determined in the process of S724 that the time is midnight (S724: Yes), in order to keep a record to that effect, the out-of-time information is indicated by the RTC 266 in the out-of-time data 263j. It is set (added and stored) in accordance with the time (S725).

  If it is determined by the processing of S724 that it is not the midnight time zone (S724: No), and after the processing of S725, it is then determined whether or not there is big hit information in the big hit buffer 262g (S726). If there is jackpot information in the jackpot buffer 262g (S726: Yes), the jackpot information is set (added and stored) in the jackpot data 263g together with the current time indicated by the RTC 266 (S727).

  When it is determined that there is no big hit information in the big hit buffer 262g by the process of S726 (S726: No), and after the process of S727, it is set in the buffers 262a to 262f corresponding to each winning port and the out switch 208f. The calculated values are added to the corresponding counters 263a to 263f of the first reading memory 263 (S728).

  Specifically, the value set in the first buffer 262a corresponding to the first starting port 64a (that is, the number of balls that have won the first starting port 64a for 0.5 seconds) is added to the first counter 263a. As a result, the number of balls that have won the first starting port 64a is accumulated in the first counter 263a. The value set in the first buffer 262b corresponding to the second starting port 64b (that is, the number of balls that have won the second starting port 64b for 0.5 seconds) is added to the first counter 263b. As a result, the number of balls that have won the second starting port 64b is accumulated in the first counter 263b.

  The value set in the general 1 buffer 262c corresponding to the first normal winning opening 63a (that is, the number of balls that have won the first normal winning opening 63a for 0.5 seconds) is added to the general 1 counter 263c. As a result, the number of balls that have won the first ordinary winning opening 63a is accumulated in the first counter 263c. The value set in the second buffer 262d corresponding to the second normal winning opening 63b (that is, the number of balls that have won the second normal winning opening 63b for 0.5 seconds) is added to the second counter 263d. As a result, the number of balls that have won the second ordinary winning opening 63b is accumulated in the second counter 263d. The value set in the special winning opening buffer 262e corresponding to the special winning opening 65a (that is, the number of balls that have won the special winning opening 65a for 0.5 seconds) is added to the special winning opening counter 263e. Thus, the number of balls that have won the special winning opening 65a is accumulated in the special winning opening counter 263e.

  Each of the counters 263a to 264f and each of the data 263g to 264j of the first reading memory 263 includes an initial setting process (see FIG. 386) executed when power is supplied to the accessory ratio management chip 207, and an accessory ratio. It is initialized to 0 in S744 (see FIG. 389) to be described later, which is executed when the calculation timing comes. As a result, the first reading memory 263 temporarily stores the information set in the buffer 262 by the MPU 201 again while accumulating until the next timing of calculating the accessory ratio. .

  Subsequently, the description of the setting information winning process will be continued with reference to FIG. After the processing of S728, the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is referred to (S729). Then, when the trigger (timing) for calculating the accessory ratio indicated by the trigger information data 202f is the “number of fires” (S729: “number of fires”), the value of the out counter 263f (that is, the game) It is determined whether or not the number of balls fired in the area) is equal to or greater than the “predetermined number of balls” (set value) included in the trigger information data 202f (S730). If the value of the out counter 263f is equal to or more than the "predetermined number of balls" (S730: Yes), it is determined that it is time to calculate the accessory ratio, and the accessory ratio calculation process is executed (S733). , To S734. The details of the accessory ratio calculation process will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if the value of the out counter 263f is not equal to or more than the "predetermined number of balls" (S730: No), the process directly proceeds to S734.

  By defining the trigger (timing) for calculating the accessory ratio based on the number of shot balls, it is possible to always calculate the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio while a predetermined ball is fired. Therefore, since many balls win various prize ports and the winning agent ratio and the continuous winning agent ratio at the stage when the winning ball is performed can be calculated, the averaged winning agent ratio and the continuous winning agent ratio are calculated. it can. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate fluctuations in the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio in a short time in a normal game, so that the inspection device 300 can more easily analyze a fraudulent activity.

  In the process of S729, when the trigger (timing) for calculating the accessory ratio indicated by the trigger information data 202f is “time” (S729: “time”), the current time indicated by the RTC 266 is changed to “time”. It is determined whether or not the “predetermined time” (set value) included in the trigger information data 202f has been reached (S731). Here, reaching has not only the case where the current time indicated by the RTC 266 matches the "predetermined time" but also includes the case where the "predetermined time" has passed for the first time.

  When it is determined that the current time indicated by the RTC 266 has reached the “predetermined time” by the process of S731 (S731: Yes), it is determined that the timing for calculating the accessory ratio has come. Then, the accessory ratio calculation process is executed (S733), and the flow shifts to S734. On the other hand, if the current time indicated by the RTC 266 has not reached the “predetermined time” (S731: No), the process directly proceeds to S734.

  By defining the trigger (timing) for calculating the accessory ratio based on the current time, even when the pachinko machine 10 does not play a lot of games, the arrival of the predetermined time ensures that the accessory ratio is ensured. And the ratio of consecutive bonuses can be calculated. Therefore, the inspection device 300 can be surely analyzed for the presence or absence of a fraudulent act based on the surely calculated accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio.

  In the process of S729, when the trigger (timing) for calculating the accessory ratio indicated by the trigger information data 202f is “game time” (S729: “game time”), the player uses the pachinko machine 10 It is determined whether or not the total time (game time) in which the game has been performed is equal to or longer than the "predetermined time" included in the trigger information data 202f (S732).

  Here, the game time can be calculated by, for example, the following method. That is, a game time counter is provided in the first reading memory 263. The game time counter, like other counters and data stored in the first reading memory 263, performs an initial setting process (see FIG. 386) executed when power is supplied to the accessory ratio management chip 207; It is initialized to 0 in later-described S744 (see FIG. 389) executed when the timing for calculating the accessory ratio has come. Then, in the setting information receiving process, the value of the out buffer 262f is checked, and if a value of 1 or more is set, the ball guided to the ball discharge path is detected, that is, the ball is detected in the game area. Since it means that the game has been fired, the game time counter is counted up by one. The setting information reception counter is started by an interrupt signal transmitted from the MPU 201 at 0.5 second intervals. Therefore, the game time can be calculated by adding 0.5 seconds to the value of the game time counter.

  When it is determined that the game time is equal to or longer than the “predetermined time” by the process of S732 (S732: Yes), it is determined that the timing for calculating the accessory ratio has come, and the accessory ratio calculation process is executed. (S733) The flow shifts to S734. On the other hand, if the game time is shorter than the "predetermined time" (S731: No), the process directly proceeds to S734.

  The accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are originally calculated by performing a test shooting test of a game ball for 10 hours. By defining the trigger (timing) for calculating the accessory ratio by the game time, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio close to the original definition can be calculated by the accessory ratio management chip. The analysis can be performed using the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio close to the original definition.

  In the process of S734, all buffers 262 are initialized to 0 (S734). Thereby, in the next setting of the winning information, the out information, and the game information from the MPU 201, even if there is a buffer that is not set for each of the buffers 262a to 262i, it is possible to suppress that meaningless data remains in the buffer, It is possible to prevent the meaningless data from being stored in the first reading memory 263. After the processing in S734, the setting information reception processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 389, the accessory ratio calculation processing (S718, S733) executed by the CPU 261 in the accessory ratio management chip 207 will be described. FIG. 389 is a flowchart showing this accessory ratio calculation processing. The accessory ratio calculating process is a process of calculating the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio from the information stored in the first reading memory 263 and recording the ratio in the second reading memory 264. The timing of calculating the accessory ratio ( (Trigger) (see FIG. 388), and also when the power is turned off (see FIG. 386).

  In the accessory ratio calculation process, first, the accessory ratio is calculated from the values of the counters 263a to 263f stored in the first reading memory 263, and added to the accessory ratio data 264a together with the current time indicated by the RTC 266. (S740). Next, the continuous character ratio is calculated from the values of the counters 263a to 263f stored in the first reading memory 263, and is added to the continuous character ratio data 264b and recorded together with the current time indicated by the RTC 266 (S741). ).

  The accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are calculated as follows. That is, the number of balls winning the first starting port 64a indicated by the first counter 263a stored in the first reading memory 263, and the number of balls winning the second starting port 64b indicated by the second counter 263b. , The number of balls that have won the first ordinary winning opening 63a indicated by the first counter 263c, the number of balls that have won the second ordinary winning opening 63b indicated by the second counter 263d, and the large winning counter 263e. The prize associated with each winning opening shown in the prize ball number table 202e (see FIG. 377) set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a for each of the number of the balls winning in the special winning opening 65a. When the number of balls is multiplied, the number of balls paid out for each winning opening in accordance with winning in the winning opening is calculated. Next, the total of these is calculated as the total number of balls paid out to the player.

  Then, with respect to the total number of balls paid out to the player, the number of balls paid out with the prize in the second starting port 64b and the number of balls paid out with the prize in the big winning port 65a By calculating the ratio of the total with the number, the ratio of the accessory is calculated. Further, the ratio of the number of balls paid out in accordance with the winning in the special winning opening 65a with respect to the total number of balls paid out to the player is calculated, thereby calculating the ratio of the continuous character.

  Originally, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio refer to the above-mentioned ratio when a game ball test test is performed for 10 hours. In the present embodiment, the trigger information data set in the trigger setting area 265b is used. At each timing (trigger) for calculating the accessory ratio indicated by 202f, the player is notified from the time when the power is turned on until the timing reaches the timing for the first time, or from the previous timing to the current timing. Of the total number of balls (prize balls) paid out, the ratio of the number of balls (prize balls) paid out in accordance with the prize in the second starting port 64b and the special winning port 65a is calculated as the accessory-material ratio. Then, it is recorded in the accessory ratio data 264a together with the time at that time. In addition, of the total number of balls (prize balls) paid out to the player during the period from when the power is turned on until the timing reaches for the first time or between the previous timing and the present timing, a special winning prize The ratio of the number of balls (prize balls) paid out in connection with the prize in the mouth 65a is calculated as the continuous bonus ratio, and is recorded in the continuous bonus ratio data 264b together with the time at that time.

  In addition, even when the power supply is cut off, the power is paid out while the power supply is determined to be cut off from the timing (trigger) for calculating the latest accessory ratio using the power charged in the capacitor 267. Based on the number of balls (prize balls) that have been hit, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are calculated, and are recorded in the accessory ratio data 264a or the continuous accessory ratio data 264b together with the time at that time. . As a result, after calculating and recording the role ratio and the continuous role ratio, even after the power is cut off, even with respect to the number of prize balls paid out, the role ratio and the continuous role ratio are not leaked. The ratio can be calculated.

  Next, the value of the out counter 263f indicating the total number of balls shot into the game area is added to the shot ball count data 264c and recorded together with the current time indicated by the RTC 266 (S742). Furthermore, various jackpot information stored in the big hit data 263g, open data 263h, error data 263i, out-of-time data 263j, door open information, error information, and out-of-hour information are associated with each information. The times (the times at which the information was stored) are arranged (sorted) in order from the information of the oldest time, and added to the game state data 264d and recorded (S743).

  In the processing of S743, for example, when the jackpot information is stored in the jackpot medium data 263g at intervals of less than 1 second, it means that the jackpot is continuously occurring as the gaming state, and therefore the oldest time is set. Is recorded in the gaming state data 264d. Similarly, in the case of the information during door opening, the information during error, and the information outside time, when each information is stored in each data 263h to j at intervals of less than 1 second, the information of the oldest time and the time thereof Only the game state data 264d is recorded. Thereby, the storage capacity required for the game state data 264d can be reduced.

  As described above, upon receiving the winning information, the out information, and the information on the game state from the MPU 201, the accessory ratio management chip 207 accumulates and temporarily stores the information in the first reading memory 263, At each timing (trigger) for calculating the accessory ratio, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are calculated based on the information stored in the first reading memory 263 and added to the second reading memory 264. Record. Thus, the ratio of the accessory and the like can be managed with a small storage capacity, and information on the ratio of the accessory and the like can be transmitted to the inspection device 300.

  In addition, the second reading memory 264 also stores the time when these were recorded in the second reading memory 264 for the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio. Further, in the second reading memory 264, information indicating the total number of balls fired in the game area as well as the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio is stored in the second reading memory 264 at the time when the information is recorded in the second reading memory 264. The information about the game state (big hit information, door opening information, error information, out-of-hours information) is also recorded together with the time when each information is stored in the first reading memory 263. 264. Therefore, as a result of analyzing the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio in the inspection device 300, when there is a large change in the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio, the changed accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio is changed to the second one. By analyzing the total number of balls fired in the game area and the game state near the time recorded in the second reading memory 264, the cause of the change in the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio can be found.

  Here, information relating to the bonus ratio, the continuous bonus ratio, and the total number of balls fired to the game area that can be recorded in the bonus ratio data 264a, the continuous bonus ratio data 264b, and the number-of-launched-balls data 264c are respectively a predetermined number ( For example, it is limited to 1024). Further, the total number of hit information, door opening information, error information, and out-of-time information that can be recorded in the game state data 264d is also limited to a predetermined number (for example, 16384). If a predetermined number of pieces of information have already been recorded in the accessory ratio data 264a, the continuous accessory ratio data 264b, the number of fired balls data 264c, or the game state data 264d, the oldest information is deleted, and the latest information is stored there. Is recorded.

  More specifically, the continuous accessory ratio data 264b, the number of fired balls data 264c, and the game state data 264d are each constituted by a ring buffer, and a memory for managing a position where information is written on the ring buffer is prepared for each. By shifting the writing position by one each time information is written, the process of erasing the oldest information and recording the newest information therein can be realized.

  In this way, by setting an upper limit on the number of information that can be recorded in each data, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the second reading memory 264. When the information to be recorded in each data reaches the upper limit number, the oldest information is deleted and the latest information is recorded, and the analysis including the latest state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed by the inspection apparatus 300. Can be done.

  After the processing in S743, the first reading memory 263 is initialized to all zeros (S744). Thus, the information set in the buffer 262 by the MPU 201 is temporarily stored again by the first reading memory 263 until the next timing of calculating the accessory ratio is reached. .

  When the process of S744 ends, the accessory ratio calculation process ends.

  Next, an inspection result output process executed by the CPU 261 in the accessory ratio management chip 207 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 390 is a flowchart showing the inspection result output processing. This inspection result output processing is executed based on an interrupt signal input to the CPU 261 when a connector of a cable connecting the inspection device 300 is inserted into the inspection terminal 207a. In the inspection result output process, the data in the second reading memory 264 is output to the inspection device 300.

  When the inspection result output processing is executed, first, all the accessory ratios recorded in the accessory ratio data 264a and the accessory ratios associated with the respective accessory ratios are recorded in the second reading memory 264. The recorded time is output to the inspection apparatus 300 in order from the recording medium having the oldest recording time (S751).

  Specifically, if the upper limit number (predetermined number) of recordable information is not satisfied in the accessory ratio data 264a, the CPU 261 writes information of the accessory ratio first in the accessory ratio data 264a. The information of the bonus ratio recorded from the location to the location indicated by the memory that manages the location where the information is written (ie, the location where the bonus ratio information at the latest time is recorded) is stored. The data is sequentially read and transmitted to the inspection device 300. On the other hand, if the upper limit number (predetermined number) of recordable information is satisfied in the accessory ratio data 264a, the position next to the position indicated in the memory for managing the position where information is written (that is, The position to be read is shifted one by one in order from the position of the information on the ratio of the character at the oldest time, and the position indicated by the memory managing the position where the information is written (that is, the position of the latest time). The information recorded up to the position where the information of the physical ratio is recorded) is sequentially read and transmitted to the inspection device 300. As a result, the information on the accessory ratio is output to the inspection device 300 in order from the information at the oldest time.

  Next, all the continuous bonus ratios recorded in the continuous bonus ratio data 264b and the time when the continuous bonus ratio associated with each continuous bonus ratio is recorded in the second reading memory 264 are described. Then, the recording time is outputted to the inspection device 300 in order from the oldest thing ratio (S752).

  More specifically, if the upper limit number (predetermined number) of recordable information is not satisfied in the continuous auditors ratio data 264b, the CPU 261 first stores information on the continuous auditors ratio in the continuous auditors ratio data 264b. Is recorded from the position where is written to the position indicated in the memory for managing the position where information is written (that is, the position where the information on the continuous character ratio at the latest time is recorded). The information of the physical ratio is sequentially read and transmitted to the inspection device 300. On the other hand, when the continuous accessory ratio data 264b satisfies the upper limit number (predetermined number) of recordable information, the position next to the position indicated in the memory for managing the position where information is written (ie, From the oldest time to the position where the information on the continuous character ratio is recorded) is shifted by one at a time, and the position indicated by the memory for managing the position at which the information is written (that is, the latest time) (The position at which the information on the continuous character ratio is recorded) is sequentially read and transmitted to the inspection device 300. As a result, the information on the continuous character ratio is output to the inspection device 300 in order from the information at the oldest time.

  Next, information on the number of balls fired to all the game areas (number of fired balls) recorded in the number of fired balls data 264c and information on the number of fired balls associated with the information on each number of fired balls are displayed. (2) The times recorded in the reading memory 264 and the recorded times are output to the inspection apparatus 300 in order from the oldest thing ratio (S753).

  Specifically, if the upper limit number (predetermined number) of recordable information is not satisfied in the number-of-launched-balls data 264c, the CPU 261 writes the information of the number of launched spheres in the number-of-launched-balls data 264c first. Information of the number of shot spheres recorded from the recorded position to the position indicated in the memory for managing the position where information is written (ie, the position where the information of the number of fired balls at the latest time is recorded). The data is sequentially read and transmitted to the inspection device 300. On the other hand, if the upper limit number (predetermined number) of recordable information is satisfied in the number-of-launched-balls data 264c, the position next to the position indicated by the memory that manages the position where information is written (that is, The reading position is shifted one by one in order from the earliest time in which the information of the number of fired balls is recorded, and the position indicated in the memory managing the position where the information is written (that is, the latest time of firing). The information recorded up to the position where the information on the number of balls is recorded) is sequentially read and transmitted to the inspection device 300. As a result, the information on the number of shot balls is output to the inspection device 300 in order from the information on the oldest time.

  Next, all the jackpot information, the door opening information, the error information, and the out-of-time information recorded in the game state data 264d, and the time when the information is stored in the first reading memory 263 in association with each information. Are output to the inspection apparatus 300 in order from the information whose time is old (S754).

  Specifically, in the case where the upper limit number (predetermined number) of recordable information is not satisfied in the game state data 264d, the CPU 261 starts from the position where the information is first written in the game state data 264d. The information recorded up to the position indicated by the memory for managing the writing position (that is, the position where the latest time information is recorded) is sequentially read and transmitted to the inspection device 300. On the other hand, when the upper limit number (predetermined number) of recordable information is satisfied in the game state data 264d, the position next to the position indicated in the memory for managing the position where information is written (that is, the most The reading position is shifted one by one from the position where the information of the oldest time is recorded, and the position indicated in the memory managing the position where the information is written (that is, the position where the latest time information is recorded) ) Are sequentially read and transmitted to the inspection device 300. As described above, in the gaming state data 264d, information on the gaming state is arranged (sorted) from the information of the oldest time and recorded in the gaming state data 264d. Therefore, the information on the game state is output to the inspection device 300 in order from the information of the oldest time.

  By the processes of S751 to S754, each piece of information is sequentially output from the oldest one. Therefore, the inspection apparatus 300 analyzes each piece of information in the order of the output, thereby obtaining the ratio of the character and the material with time. It is possible to easily analyze the change of the continuous character ratio, the number of fired balls and the game state.

  After the processing of S754, the inspection result output processing ends.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the main controller 110 is provided with the accessory ratio management chip 207, the winning information is obtained from the MPU 201, and the accessory ratio management chip 207 calculates the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio. And record. Then, when the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, information on the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio recorded on the accessory ratio management chip 207 is output to the inspection device 300.

  Here, some of the wrongdoers illegally open the electric accessory of the second starting port 64b by some method or guide a ball to the second starting port 64b, so that the second starting port 64b can be operated. Some are trying to increase the chances of jackpots by increasing the prize money. In addition, there are those that try to obtain many prize balls by illegally opening the opening / closing plate of the special winning opening 65a by some method or guiding a ball to the special winning opening 65a. When such misconduct has occurred, the ratio of the accessory and the ratio of the continuous accessory increase.

  On the other hand, since the pachinko machine 10 is configured as described above, by analyzing the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio in the inspection device 300, if an illegal act is performed, Can be found.

  In the pachinko machine 10, information on the number of balls fired to the game area and information on the game state are also recorded in the accessory ratio management chip 207 and output to the inspection device 300. Therefore, when the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are high by the analysis by the inspection device 300, the cause is searched for based on information on the number of balls fired in the game area and information on the game state. be able to.

  The accessory ratio management chip 207 is provided in the main controller 110 and is housed in one board box 100 together with the MPU 201, the ROM 202, and the like. Accordingly, it is difficult for the wrongdoer to modify the winning information and the like input to the accessory ratio management chip 207. Therefore, it is possible to maintain high reliability with respect to the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio calculated and output by the accessory ratio management chip 207.

  Also, since the MPU 201 does not manage the accessory ratio and the like, but a dedicated accessory ratio management chip 207 for managing the accessory ratio and the like is provided, an increase in the processing load of the MPU 201 can be suppressed, and The MPU 201 can be dedicated to such control.

  Further, the accessory ratio management chip 207 is provided with a prize ball number data setting area 265a, and when power is supplied, the prize ball number table 202e stored in the ROM 202 is set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a. Then, the accessory ratio management chip 207 calculates the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio using the award ball number table 202e set in the award ball number data setting area 265a. This eliminates the need to store information on the number of prize balls different for each model in the ROM of the accessory ratio management chip 207 at the manufacturing stage. Therefore, the production of the accessory ratio management chip 207 can be simplified. If the pachinko machine model is different, the ROM 202 may be changed. Even if the pachinko machines of different models use the same accessory ratio management chip 207, the accessory ratio can be accurately calculated.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 391 to 395, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. The processes of the MPU 221 are roughly classified into a start-up process started when the power is turned on, and a main process executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 391, a start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 391 is a flowchart showing the start-up processing. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is performed, first, an initial setting process is performed when the power is turned on (S801). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Then, depending on whether the power-off processing flag is on or not, the current startup processing is caused by a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power failure, a so-called “momentary power failure”), and the power-off processing in S915 (see FIG. 392). ) Are determined to be started during the execution (S802). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 392, when receiving the power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S912 in FIG. 392), the sound lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process in S915. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of S915 is being performed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing flag.

  If the power-off processing flag is OFF (S802: No), the current startup processing is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs, and the power-off processing in S915 is performed. It is started after the execution of the process is completed, or started only by resetting the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S803).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S806. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, the data is not destroyed in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data is destroyed in the RAM 223. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S803: Yes), the process proceeds to S804, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S803: No), the process proceeds to S808.

  If the current startup process is started after the power is completely shut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the storage in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off. ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S803: Yes), and the flow shifts to S804. On the other hand, this start-up processing is started after an instantaneous power failure occurs and after the execution of the power-off processing in S915 is completed, or is reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Is started, the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so that the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S803: No), and the process proceeds to S808.

  If the power-off processing flag is on (S802: Yes), this startup processing is performed after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power-off processing in S915, the audio lamp control device 113 Of the MPU 221 has been reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being performed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, since control cannot be continued, the process proceeds to S804, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the processing of S804, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S804). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and read out for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined that the data is normal. Such writing and checking for each byte is performed in the order of "55h", "0AAh", and "00h" after "0FFh". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S805: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written to the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S806). By confirming the keyword of “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not data is destroyed in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S805: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S807), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the sound may be output from the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message. It may be.

  In the processing of S808, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S808). The power-off flag is turned on when executing the power-off process in S915 (see S914 in FIG. 392). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S915 is executed, the process of S808 in the state where the power-off flag is turned on is that the current startup process is instantaneous. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S915 has been completed. Accordingly, in such a case (S808: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the sound ramp control device 113 (S809), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S810). The permission is set (S811), and the process proceeds to the main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the reason why the process of step S808 is reached after the power-off flag is turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power is completely shut off, for example, and the process of step S808 is performed via the processes of steps S804 to S806. This is the case where the processing has been reached or the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 has been reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like and started. Therefore, in such a case (S808: No), the process skips S809, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, shifts the process to S810, sets the initial value of the RAM 223 (S810), and sets the interrupt permission. Then (S811), and shifts to the main processing.

  The reason why the clearing process in S809 is skipped is that when the process from S804 to the process in S808 is performed via the process in S806, all the storage areas in the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S804. When the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, thereby saving the sound lamp control device 113. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 390, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 390 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not one millisecond or more has elapsed since the last time the process of S901 was executed (S901). If the one or more millisecond has not elapsed (S901: No). , Without performing the processing in S902 to S908. In the processing of S901, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed. Unlike S902 to S908, which need not be processed in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond), the variable display processing in S910. This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination processing in S911 or S911 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S911 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S910 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process can be prevented. Based on the above, it is possible to make settings relating to the variable effect without delay.

  In the process of S901, when it is determined that one millisecond or more has elapsed since the last time the process of S901 was executed (S901: Yes), the process proceeds to S902. If the process of S901 is executed for the first time after the start-up process shown in FIG. 389, the process directly proceeds to the process of S902.

  In the process of S902, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S903 to S911 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S902). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set so as to be the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S906 described later (S903), and thereafter, the power-on notification processing is executed (S904). The power-on notification processing is to provide notification that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be In addition, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S905 without performing notification by the power-on notification process.

  Next, a frame button input monitoring / production process is executed (S905). In this frame button input monitoring / production process, an input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the production effect is monitored, and a case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is dealt with. This is a process for setting to perform an effect. In this process, when an operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  Further, when the frame button 22 is pressed during the period in which the fluctuation effect is not executed or during the high-speed fluctuation period, a process of changing the stage is performed, and the back image change for the display control device 114 is performed instead of the frame button operation command. Set the command. By including information on the type of the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change in the rear image change command, the display controller 114 converts the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 into an image corresponding to the stage. Is performed. Also, when the notice character appears at the start of the fluctuation display, the frame button 22 is pressed to display the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation, or the frame button 22 is pressed during the reach effect to display the expectation of the jackpot. The effect may be changed to a holding effect, or the frame button 22 may be a decision button for selecting one of the plurality of reach effects. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the processing of S905 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process (S905) is completed, next, a lamp editing process is executed (S906), and then a sound editing / output process is executed (S907). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the processing of S907, the liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S908). In the liquid crystal effect execution management processing, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S906 is performed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process, and the sound editing / outputting process of S907 is also synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81. Run in time. After the processing in S908, the flow shifts to the processing in S910.

  In the process of S910, a display variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 to display the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, and the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. A variable display process, which is a process set for transmission, is executed. Details of the variable display processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the fluctuation display process, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S911). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S911 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S912). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S912 (S912: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S914), and the power-off processing is executed (S915). After the execution of the power-off processing, the power-off processing-in-progress flag is turned off (S916), and then the processing is in an infinite loop. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off, and the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 is turned off. Further, the storage of the information of the occurrence of the power interruption is also deleted.

  On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S912 (S912: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S913), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S913: No), the process returns to S901, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S913: Yes), the processing is executed in an infinite loop to stop the execution of the subsequent processing.

  Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main processing is not executed, and thereafter the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, the player can call the store clerk of the hall or the like and request the repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 has been destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM breakdown.

  Next, the command determination process (S911) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 391 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S911). This command determination processing (S911) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 392) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. .

  In the command determination process, first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from main controller 110 is read and analyzed from the command storage area provided in RAM 223, and the variation pattern command is received from main controller 110. It is determined whether or not this is the case (S1001). When it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received (S1001: Yes), the variation pattern is extracted from the variation pattern command (S1002), and the process returns to the main process. The variation pattern extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and in a variation display process (see FIG. 394) described below, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display controller 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern is provided. Used when setting.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S1001: No), then it is determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1003). When it is determined that the stop type command has been received (S1003: Yes), the stop type is extracted from the stop type command (S1004), the change start flag is set to ON (S1005), and the process returns to the main process. .

  Note that the main control unit 110 transmits the fluctuation pattern command when the fluctuation effect is started, and then indicates the fluctuation production stop type in which the fluctuation pattern is indicated by the fluctuation pattern command. This command is always transmitted from 110. By setting the fluctuation start flag to ON in the processing of S1005, in the fluctuation display processing to be executed later, based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the previously received fluctuation pattern command and the stop type extracted from the stop type command. Then, a process for generating a display variation pattern command and a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern and the stop type, and performing processing for transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is performed.

  As a result of the processing in S1003, when it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S1003: No), it is next determined whether or not a pending ball count command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1006). Then, when it is determined that the reserved ball number command has been received (S1006: Yes), the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110 included in the reserved ball number command (that is, the suspended variable effect is retained) The number of spheres is extracted and stored in the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 (S1007).

  Here, the reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when a ball wins (starts winning) in one of the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b. Every time there is, by the processing of S1007, the value of the number of retained balls stored in the RAM 223 of the sound ramp control device 113 can be adjusted to the value of the retained ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, even if the value of the number of retained balls of the audio lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the retained number of balls counter 203a of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the number of retained balls of the The value of the number counter 223a can be corrected to match the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110.

  Next, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 included in the received pending ball count command are extracted and stored in the RAM 223 (S1008).

  The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the pending ball number command are obtained from the counter buffer in the main control device 110 when the ball wins (starts winning) in the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b. It was done. The audio ramp control device 113 can execute the prefetching process by referring to each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the RAM 223. That is, when the suspended fluctuation effect is executed, the result of the fluctuation effect is determined (whether or not a jackpot, the fluctuation time, etc.) will be determined before the execution of the fluctuation effect, Execution of various effects can be determined.

  Next, a display reserved ball count command for notifying the display control device 114 of the value of the reserved ball count stored in the RAM 223 by the processing of S1007 is set (S1009), and the process returns to the main processing. The display reserved ball count command set here is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by a command output process (S902) of the main process. As a result, the display control device 114 executes a process to display the number-of-reserved-balls symbol corresponding to the number of retained balls on the third symbol display device 81.

  As a result of the processing in S1006, when it is determined that the pending ball number command has not been received (S1006: No), it is next determined whether or not a confirmation command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1010). The confirmation command is a command for confirming and displaying the variation effect being executed on the third symbol display device 81. When it is determined that the confirmation command has been received (S1010: Yes), a display confirmation command for notifying the display control device 114 of the reception of the confirmation command is set (S1011), and the process returns to the main processing. . The display determination command set here is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output processing (S902) of the main processing. The display control device 114 stops the fluctuation effect being executed by the third symbol display device 81 by receiving the determination command for display, and corresponds to the stop type indicated by the stop type command for display earlier. By displaying the stop symbol, it is confirmed and displayed.

  As a result of the processing of S1010, when it is determined that the finalization command has not been received (S1010: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the processing corresponding to the received command is executed. (S1012), and proceeds to main processing. For example, if the other command is a command used by the sound lamp control device 113, a process corresponding to the command is performed, a processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is a command used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set to be transmitted to the device 114. The demo command received from the main control device 110 is set as a display demo command by the process of S1013, temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and then executed as a command output process ( It is transmitted to the display control device 114 by S902).

  Next, the variable display processing (S910) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 394 is a flowchart showing the variable display processing (S910).

  This fluctuation display processing (S910) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 392) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and displays the fluctuation effect on the third symbol display device 81 as described above. In order to execute the command, a display variation pattern command and a display stop type command are generated based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command received from the main control device 110, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114. This is the process to do.

  In the variation display processing, first, it is determined whether or not a variation start flag provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1101). If it is determined that the change start flag is not on (that is, it is off) (S1101: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110. End and return to the main processing.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the change start flag is on (S1101: Yes), the change start flag is turned off (S1102), and the change start flag is extracted from the change pattern command in the process of S1002 of the command determination process (see FIG. 393). The fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation effect is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1103). The variation pattern extracted here is a variation time. In the sound ramp control device 113, a plurality of detailed fluctuation patterns are prepared for each fluctuation time, and one detailed fluctuation pattern is prepared from the plurality of detailed fluctuation patterns prepared for the extracted fluctuation pattern (variation time). The pattern is determined by lottery, and a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the determined detailed variation pattern is set (S1104).

  The display variation pattern command set here is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by a command output process of the main process (S902). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the detailed variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Then, the display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

  Next, the stop type in the variable effect extracted from the stop type command in the process of S1004 of the command determination process (see FIG. 391) is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1105). Then, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the extracted stop type is set (S1104). The display stop type command set here is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by a command output process (S902) of the main process. The display control device 114 sets a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command when the variable effect executed by the display change pattern command set in the process of S1105 is to be confirmed and displayed. I do.

  Next, the value of the number of reserved balls in the RAM 223 is reduced by one in accordance with the consumption of the reserved balls in accordance with the setting of the display variation pattern command (that is, the setting of the variable display corresponding to the reserved balls). (S1107), a display reserved ball count command for notifying the display controller 114 of the updated value of the reserved ball count is set (S1108). Then, the process returns to the main processing.

  The display pending ball count command set by the processing of S1108 is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output processing of the main processing (S902). You. The display control device 114 executes a process of causing the third symbol display device 81 to display a number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls indicated by the display reserved ball number command. Therefore, the player can recognize the number of the held balls by counting the number of the held ball symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly classified into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interruption processing that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and a one-frame processing performed by the image controller 236. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes a main process, and executes a command interrupt process or a V interrupt process in accordance with reception of a command or detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed simultaneously, command reception processing is executed with priority. Thus, the V interrupt processing can be executed by quickly reflecting the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 395 (a) is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main process is started when the power is turned on, and continues to be executed until the power is turned off.

  When the main process is executed by the MPU 231 after the power is turned on, first, an initial setting process is executed (S1401). Specifically, first, processing for initializing the MPU 231 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 233 and the video RAM 234 is performed. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 235 is read, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the video RAM 234. Further, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 234, and the extracted information is stored in an area in the video RAM 234 different from the area in the video RAM 234 where the decompressed character information is stored. The extracted character information is written in the prepared frame buffer area. In addition, other settings necessary for initialization are performed.

  When the initial setting process is completed, interrupt permission is set (S1402), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interruption permission is set by the processing of S1402, the command interruption processing and the V interruption processing are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interruption signal.

  Next, a command interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 395 (b) is a flowchart showing the command interruption processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interruption process.

  In this command interruption processing, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in a command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S1501), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing are read out by a command determination processing of a V interrupt processing described later, and processing according to the command is performed.

  Next, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 395 (c) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. And display to the image controller 236.

  As described above, the execution of the V interrupt processing is started when a V interrupt signal from the image controller 236 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated every 20 milliseconds in the image controller 236 when drawing processing of an image for one frame is completed, and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 236 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 236 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing and the display processing are not completed, so that a new image drawing is started during the image drawing, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed according to a new drawing instruction.

  In this V interrupt processing, first, as shown in FIG. 395 (c), a command determination processing (S1602) is executed. In this command determination processing (S1602), the contents of the command from the sound ramp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interruption processing are analyzed, and processing according to the command is executed. For example, when the display variation pattern command is stored, the image is drawn so that the variation effect is executed on the third symbol display device 81 by the detailed variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern table command. And control of display is started.

  When the display stop type command is stored, the fluctuation effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 is stopped and displayed at the stop symbol indicated by the display stop type command, so that the high speed fluctuation is performed ( While the display of the third symbol is being changed so that the player cannot recognize the content of the third symbol), the displayed third symbol is replaced. When the confirmation command for display is stored, the drawing and display of the image are controlled so that the fixed display is performed in the variable effect executed by the third symbol display device 81.

  In the command determination process (S1602), all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds during which the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display fluctuation pattern command, the stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the fluctuation effect and other effect modes selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. Can be controlled so that is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  When the command determination process (S1602) is completed, a display setting process (S1603) is executed. In the display setting process (S1603), based on the type of screen to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 determined by the command determination process (S1602) and the like, one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The content of the image is specifically specified.

  After the display setting process (S1603) is executed, a task process is executed (S1064). In this task processing, based on the contents of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third display device 281 specified by the display setting processing (S1603), the characters (sprites, display objects) constituting the image are determined. The type is specified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined for each character (sprite).

  Then, a drawing process is executed (S1504). In this drawing process, the types of various characters constituting one frame and parameters necessary for drawing each character determined in the task process (S1503) are transmitted to the image controller 236. Thus, the image controller 236 executes the image drawing process according to the information, and displays the image drawn according to the information received 1V before on the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. Control for transmitting image data to the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

  Thereafter, after performing other necessary processing, for example, updating processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 (S1505), the V interrupt processing ends.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the sixteenth embodiment, the accessory control ratio management chip 207 is provided in the main controller 110, winning information is obtained from the MPU 201, and Calculate and record the material ratio and the continuous character ratio. Then, when the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, information on the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio recorded on the accessory ratio management chip 207 is output to the inspection device 300.

  Here, some of the wrongdoers illegally open the electric accessory of the second starting port 64b by some method or guide a ball to the second starting port 64b, so that the second starting port 64b can be operated. Some are trying to increase the chances of jackpots by increasing the prize money. In addition, there are those that try to obtain many prize balls by illegally opening the opening / closing plate of the special winning opening 65a by some method or guiding a ball to the special winning opening 65a. When such misconduct has occurred, the ratio of the accessory and the ratio of the continuous accessory increase.

  On the other hand, since the pachinko machine 10 is configured as described above, by analyzing the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio in the inspection device 300, if an illegal act is performed, Can be found.

  In the pachinko machine 10, information on the number of balls fired to the game area and information on the game state are also recorded in the accessory ratio management chip 207 and output to the inspection device 300. Therefore, when the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are high by the analysis by the inspection device 300, the cause is searched for based on information on the number of balls fired in the game area and information on the game state. be able to.

<Seventeenth embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a seventeenth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 of the sixteenth embodiment, when it is time to calculate the accessory ratio, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are calculated based on the values of the counters 263a to 263e stored in the first reading memory 263. Has been described, and is recorded in the second reading memory 264. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventeenth embodiment, when the trigger (timing) indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is reached, each of the triggers recorded in the first reading memory 263 is used. The values of the counters 263a to 263e are recorded in the second reading memory 264 as they are, and the values of the counters 263a to 263e recorded in the second reading memory 264 are output to the inspection device 300 as they are.

  Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 of the seventeenth embodiment will be described focusing on differences from the pachinko machine 10 of the sixteenth embodiment. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the seventeenth embodiment, the same configurations and processes as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the sixteenth embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals as in the sixteenth embodiment, and description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 396 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of main controller 110 in pachinko machine 10 of the seventeenth embodiment. The electrical configuration of the main control device 110 of the seventeenth embodiment is different from that of the sixteenth embodiment in that the second reading memory 264 of the accessory ratio management chip 207 stores the accessory ratio data 264a of the sixteenth embodiment. The point is that prize counter data 264e is recorded instead of the continuous character ratio data 264b.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, the meaning of the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is different from the sixteenth embodiment. That is, in the seventeenth embodiment, the trigger information data 202f indicates a trigger (timing) for recording the values of the respective counters 263a to 263e stored in the first reading memory 263 in the second reading memory 264. Note that only the meaning of the trigger information data 202f is different from that of the sixteenth embodiment, and the content itself is the same as that of the sixteenth embodiment.

  That is, in the trigger information data 202f, as the trigger (timing) for recording the values of the respective counters 263a to 263e stored in the first reading memory 263 in the second reading memory 264, "number of firings", "time", " Information indicating any of "game time" is defined.

  When the information indicating the “number of shots” is defined, the trigger information data 202f also defines information indicating the “predetermined number of balls” that is the timing for calculating the accessory ratio. For example, when the trigger information data 202f defines information indicating the “number of shots” and information indicating 500 balls as the “predetermined number of balls”, the first reading is performed every time the number of shot balls reaches 500. The values of the respective counters 263 a to 263 e stored in the memory 263 are recorded in the second reading memory 264.

  When the information indicating “time” is defined, the trigger information data 202f also defines information indicating “predetermined time” which is a timing for calculating the accessory ratio. For example, when information indicating “time” and information indicating 12:00, 17:00, 19:00, and 22:00 are defined as the “predetermined time” in the trigger information data 202f, the time is set to 12:00. , 17:00, 19:00, and 22:00, the values of the counters 263a to 263e stored in the first reading memory 263 are recorded in the second reading memory 264.

  When the information indicating the “game time” is defined, the trigger information data 202f also defines the information indicating the “predetermined time” which is the timing for calculating the accessory ratio. For example, when information indicating “game time” and information indicating 2 hours as “predetermined time” are defined in the trigger information data 202f, the first reading memory 263 is read every time the game time elapses 2 hours. Of the counters 263a to 263e stored in the second reading memory 264.

  The winning counter data 264e is stored in the first counter 263a of the first reading memory 263 at each timing (trigger) of recording the values of the counters 263a to 263e stored in the first reading memory 263 in the second reading memory 264. The total number of balls that have won the first starting port 64a counted, the total number of balls that have won the second starting port 64b counted by the first counter 263b, and the first normal number that has been counted by the first counter 263c. The total number of balls that have won the winning opening 63a, the total number of balls that have won the second ordinary winning opening 63b counted by the ordinary 2 counter 263d, and the large winning opening 65a that has been counted by the special winning opening counter 263e. Is the data recorded together with the total number of hit balls and the time at the recording timing.

  The total number of balls won in each winning opening during the period from when the power is turned on until the timing reaches for the first time or between the previous timing and the present timing is determined by a counter 263a to 263e corresponding to each winning opening. Is indicated by When it is time to record the values of the counters 263a to 263e stored in the first reading memory 263 in the second reading memory 264, the values of the counters 263a to 263e at that time are indicated by the RTC 266. Is recorded in the winning counter data 264e at the same time.

  The winning counter data 264e is associated with one time, and the total number of balls winning in the first starting port 64a, the total number of balls winning in the second starting port 64b, and the first normal winning port 63a at that time. The total number of balls, the total number of balls that have won the second ordinary winning opening 63b, and the total number of balls that have won the large winning opening 65a may be recorded.

  Further, an area for recording the total number of balls winning the first starting opening 64a in the winning counter data 264e, an area for storing the total number of winning balls in the second starting opening 64b, and a winning in the first ordinary winning opening 63a. An area for recording the total number of balls won in the second normal winning opening 63b, and an area for recording the total number of balls winning in the large winning opening 65a, and a first reading memory. When the timing (trigger) for recording the values of the counters 263a to 263e stored in the second reading memory 264 into the second reading memory 264 is reached, the total number of balls winning the corresponding winning opening is calculated for each area. The winning counter data 264e may be configured to be recorded in synchronization with the time at the timing.

  Here, the information on the total number of balls that have won each winning opening that can be recorded in the winning counter data 264e is limited to a predetermined number (for example, 16384). For example, in association with one time, the total number of balls winning the first starting opening 64a at that time, the total number of balls winning the second starting opening 64b, the total number of balls winning the first normal winning opening 63a, When the winning counter data 264e is configured to record the total number of balls winning in the second normal winning opening 63b and the total number of balls winning in the large winning opening 65a, a predetermined number of information is already recorded in the winning counter data 264e. If so, the information at the oldest time is deleted, and the latest information is recorded there. For example, the winning counter data 264e is configured as a ring buffer, and a memory for managing a position where information is written is separately prepared on the ring buffer, and the writing position is shifted by one each time information is written. Thus, a process of deleting the oldest information and recording the newest information therein can be realized. In this way, by setting an upper limit on the number of information that can be recorded in the winning counter data 264e, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the second reading memory 264. When the information to be recorded in the winning counter data 264e reaches the upper limit number, the oldest information is erased and the latest information is recorded, so that the inspection device 300 including the latest state of the pachinko machine 10 is recorded. Analysis can be performed.

  It should be noted that an area for recording the total number of balls won in the first starting port 64a, an area for storing the total number of balls winning in the second starting port 64b, and a total number of balls winning in the first ordinary winning port 63a are recorded. When the winning counter data 264e is configured by providing an area for storing the total number of balls winning in the second normal winning opening 63b and an area for recording the total number of balls winning in the large winning opening 65a, Alternatively, a ring buffer may be configured for each area, and an upper limit may be set for the number of information that can be recorded in each area, and control may be performed as described above. Thereby, when the information to be recorded reaches the upper limit number in each area, the oldest information is deleted and the latest information is recorded, so that the inspection device 300 including the latest state of the pachinko machine 10 is recorded. Analysis can be performed.

  When the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, an interrupt occurs to the CPU 261. The CPU 261 records the winning counter data 264e recorded in the second reading memory 264, the number of shot balls data 264c, and the game state data. 264d are sequentially transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300. When transmitting each data 264e, 264c, 264d to the inspection device 300, the CPU 261 stores each information recorded in each data 264e, 264c, 264d (including the recorded time information associated with each information). , In the order in which they were recorded, and transmitted to the inspection device 300.

  More specifically, if the data to be transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300 does not satisfy the upper limit number of the recordable information (the predetermined number), the CPU 261 first adds the information to the data. The information recorded from the position where is written to the position indicated by the memory that manages the position where the information is written (that is, the position where the information at the latest time is recorded) is sequentially read out, and the inspection is performed. Transmit to the device 300. On the other hand, if the data to be transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300 satisfies the upper limit number of the recordable information (the above-mentioned predetermined number) which is defined for each of the data, the data to be written is indicated by the memory for managing the information writing position. From the next position (ie, the position where the information of the oldest time is recorded) after the written position, the read position is shifted by one at a time, and the position indicated by the memory managing the position where the information is written (ie, the position indicated by the memory) , The information recorded up to the latest time is recorded and transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300. As a result, information is output to the inspection device 300 in order from the information at the oldest time.

  It should be noted that an area for recording the total number of balls won in the first starting port 64a, an area for storing the total number of balls winning in the second starting port 64b, and a total number of balls winning in the first ordinary winning port 63a are recorded. When the winning counter data 264e is configured by providing an area for storing the total number of balls winning in the second normal winning opening 63b and an area for recording the total number of balls winning in the large winning opening 65a, By reading the information for each area as described above, the total number of balls winning the winning opening is output to the inspection apparatus 300 in order from the oldest time information for each winning opening. Become.

  Next, the winning information storing processing (S718, S733) executed by the CPU 261 in the accessory ratio management chip 207 in the seventeenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 397. FIG. 397 is a flowchart showing the winning information storing process. In the sixteenth embodiment, when the timing (trigger) for calculating the accessory ratio comes (see FIG. 388) and when the power is turned off (see FIG. 386), the information stored in the first reading memory 263 is used. In the seventeenth embodiment, the main character ratio and the continuous main character ratio are calculated and recorded in the second reading memory 264 (see FIG. 389). However, in the seventeenth embodiment, they are stored in the first reading memory 263. When the timing (trigger) for recording each piece of information in the second reading memory 264 is reached (see FIG. 388) and when the power is turned off (see FIG. 386), a prize is awarded instead of the accessory ratio calculation process. Execute information storage processing. The winning information storing process is a process of recording each information stored in the first reading memory 263 in the second reading memory 264.

  In the winning information storing process, first, the value of each of the counters 263 a to 263 e corresponding to the winning opening stored in the first reading memory 263 is matched with the current time indicated by the RTC 266 and the second reading memory 264 is read. It is recorded in addition to the winning counter data 264e (S761). Thus, for each combination timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b, a period from when the power is turned on until the timing is reached for the first time, or from the previous timing to the current timing. Until the timing, the total number of balls that have won the first starting port 64a counted by the first counter 263a of the first reading memory 263 and the second starting port 64b counted by the second counter 263b The total number of balls won, the total number of balls won in the first ordinary winning opening 63a counted by the first counter 263c, and the number of balls won in the second ordinary winning opening 63b counted by the second counter 263d. The total number and the total number of balls winning the special winning opening 65a counted by the special winning opening counter 263e are additionally recorded in the second reading memory 264.

  Further, even when the power supply is cut off, it is determined that the power supply is cut off from the latest timing (trigger) of recording in the second reading memory 264 using the power charged in the capacitor 267. In addition, the total number of balls winning the first starting port 64a counted by the first counter 263a of the first reading memory 263 and the total number of balls winning the second starting port 64b counted by the second counter 263b And the total number of balls that have won the first ordinary winning opening 63b counted by the first counter 263c, the total number of balls that have won the second ordinary winning opening 63b counted by the second counter 263d, The total number of balls winning the special winning opening 65a counted by the mouth counter 263e is additionally recorded in the second reading memory 264. As a result, even if a prize is received in each winning port during the time when it is determined that the power is cut off from the timing (trigger) of recording the latest reading data in the second reading memory 264, the prize is not leaked without any omission. The total number of balls played can be recorded in the second reading memory 264 for each winning opening.

  In the following S742 to S744, the same process as that of S742 to S744 of the accessory ratio calculation process of the sixteenth embodiment (see FIG. 389) is executed, and the winning information storing process is ended.

  Next, an inspection result output process executed by the CPU 261 in the accessory ratio management chip 207 according to the seventeenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 398 is a flowchart showing the inspection result output processing. This inspection result output processing is executed based on an interrupt signal input to the CPU 261 when the connector of the cable connecting the inspection device 300 is inserted into the inspection terminal 207a, as in the sixteenth embodiment. In the inspection result output process, the data in the second reading memory 264 is output to the inspection device 300.

  When the inspection result output process in the seventeenth embodiment is executed, first, the prize ball number table 202e set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a is output to the inspection device 300 (S771). Next, all information indicating the total number of winning balls in each winning opening recorded in the winning counter data 264e is recorded together with the time at which the information was recorded in the second reading memory 264 in association with each information. Output to the inspection apparatus 300 in order from the oldest information (S772). In S753 and S754 executed subsequent to the process of S772, the same processes as S753 and S754 of the inspection result output process of the sixteenth embodiment are executed, and the inspection result output process ends.

  The inspection device 300 calculates the role-material ratio and the continuous role-material ratio based on the information indicating the total number of winning balls in each winning opening output in S772 and the prize ball number table 202e output in S771. Then, the calculated accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are analyzed. Then, when the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are high by analysis by the inspection device 300, the cause is searched for based on information on the number of balls fired into the game area and information on the game state. be able to. In addition, by the processing of S772, the information indicating the total number of winning balls in each winning opening is sequentially output from the oldest one, so that the inspection apparatus 300 analyzes each information in the order in which the information is output. In addition, it is possible to easily analyze changes in the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio with the passage of time.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the seventeenth embodiment, each time the timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f stored in the trigger setting area 265b occurs in the accessory ratio management chip 207, The values of the counters 263a to 263e for counting the total number of winning balls for each winning opening stored in the first reading memory 263 are sequentially recorded in the winning counter data 264e of the second reading memory 264. When the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, the information indicating the total number of winning balls for each winning opening recorded in the winning counter data 264e of the second reading memory 264 is stored in the winning ball number table 202e. Is transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300 together with the

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventeenth embodiment, the total number of balls won in the corresponding winning opening is obtained for each winning opening, and is recorded in the second reading memory 264. Therefore, the required storage capacity of the second reading memory 264 is larger than in the case of recording the calculated accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio in the second reading memory 264 as in the sixteenth embodiment. Since the total number of winning balls for each winning opening is transmitted to the apparatus 300, if the analysis by the inspection apparatus 300 reveals a large change in the ratio of the accessory or the continuous accessory, the inspection apparatus 300 By referring to the total number of winning balls for each winning opening, the cause can be grasped more accurately.

  Further, information indicating the total number of balls won in each winning opening transmitted to the inspection device 300 is associated with the time at which the information was recorded in the second reading memory 264 and transmitted to the inspection device 300. You. Therefore, in the inspection device 300, when the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are analyzed based on the information indicating the total number of balls winning each winning opening, a large change occurs in the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio. The time at which the total number of balls winning each winning opening used in the calculation of the changed bonus ratio or the continuous bonus ratio is recorded in the second reading memory 264 is specified. By analyzing the total number of balls won in each winning opening, the total number of balls fired in the game area, or the game state, it is possible to find out the cause of the change in the ratio of the accessory or the continuous accessory.

  In addition, the same configuration as the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the sixteenth embodiment can provide the same effects as those obtained by the configuration.

<Eighteenth embodiment>
Next, a description will be given, with reference to FIGS. 399 to 402, of a pachinko machine 10 according to an eighteenth embodiment to which the present invention is applied. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first and seventeenth embodiments, a case where the accessory ratio management chip 207 is provided in the main control device 110 and the information on the accessory ratio in the pachinko machine 10 is managed by the accessory ratio management chip 207. explained. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the eighteenth embodiment, the MPU 201 manages information on the accessory ratio. Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the eighteenth embodiment is provided with the combination ratio display device 400, and displays information on the combination ratio on the combination ratio display device 400.

  Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 of the eighteenth embodiment will be described focusing on differences from the pachinko machine 10 of the sixteenth embodiment or the seventeenth embodiment. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the eighteenth embodiment, the same components and processes as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the sixteenth or seventeenth embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals as those of the sixteenth or seventeenth embodiment. And description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 399 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the eighteenth embodiment. The difference of the pachinko machine 10 of the eighteenth embodiment from the pachinko machine 10 of the sixteenth embodiment and the seventeenth embodiment is that the configuration of the main control device 110 is different. Other configurations are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the sixteenth embodiment and the seventeenth embodiment.

  As described above, the main control device 110 of the eighteenth embodiment does not include the accessory ratio management chip 207, and the MPU 201 manages information on the accessory ratio. Specifically, the accessory ratio management main process executed by the CPU 261 of the accessory ratio management chip 207 of the sixteenth or seventeenth embodiment is executed in the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201. . At this time, each counter and data stored in the first reading memory 263 of the accessory ratio management chip 207 are stored in the RAM 203 in the eighteenth embodiment.

  The second reading memory 264 provided in the accessory ratio management chip 207 is provided in the main control device 110 so as to be connected to the input / output port 205. In the eighteenth embodiment, the RTC 266 provided in the MPU 201 in the sixteenth embodiment and the seventeenth embodiment uses the one built in the MPU 201 in the eighteenth embodiment.

  Further, the inspection terminal 207a to which the inspection device 300 is connected is connected to the input / output port 205. When the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a via a cable and a connector, the MPU 201 executes an inspection result output process, and information about the accessory ratio and other information about the inspection are transmitted to the inspection device 300.

  Further, the winning combination display device 400 is connected to the input / output port 205 of the main control device 110. The winning combination display device 400 is composed of, for example, a plurality of 7-segment display devices, and is provided on a main board constituting the main control device 110. That is, the pachinko machine 10 is assembled so that the display screen of the winning combination display device 400 can be seen when looking at the back side thereof. Note that the pachinko machine 10 may be assembled so that the display screen of the duty ratio display device 400 can be seen from the front side.

  The combination ratio display device 400 displays a combination of the bonus and the consecutive combination, or information (for example, a base value) related to the combination of the combination and the ratio of the continuous combination. For example, the information on the role ratio and the continuous role ratio displayed on the role ratio display device 400 may be information indicating the total number of balls paid out by winning, for each winning opening, or all winnings. The total number of balls paid out by winning a prize to the mouth, the total number of balls paid out by winning a prize to the winning opening (the second starting port 64b and the big winning opening 65a) in which the accessory operates, and It may be information indicating the total number of balls paid out by winning a winning opening (large winning opening 65a) that operates. Further, information indicating the total number of balls fired in the game area (the number of fired balls) may be included in the information on the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio displayed on the combination ratio display device 400. The winning combination display device 400 is configured by a liquid crystal display having a predetermined number of pixels, an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display, or the like, instead of the 7-segment display. Alternatively, information related to the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio may be displayed.

  The MPU 201 has a built-in ROM 202 and a RAM 203, and has a plurality of registers 200 for storing various data in a hierarchy closest to an ALU (Arithmetic Logic Unit) which is the heart of the MPU 201. The plurality of registers 200 are generally used in various situations without a specific purpose, such as temporarily holding a value in the middle of an operation or storing an address of a memory required for processing. Various registers such as a general-purpose register and an accumulator register for accumulating and summing the operation results of the ALU are included.

  The plurality of registers 200 also include a flag register 200a (also referred to as a status register or the like) including a flag indicating an overflow by an ALU operation, a flag indicating an interrupt state, and the like. Due to the nature of the register, the contents of the flag register 200a can be updated each time one instruction is executed.

  The RAM 203 is provided with an in-use area 203x and an out-of-use area 203y, and a work area (inner work area 203x1, outer work area 203y1) and a stack area (inner stack area 203x2, outer stack area 203y2). ) Are provided.

  This is because, when the MPU 201 performs main control of the game, while the MPU 201 manages information relating to the accessory ratio, the MPU 201 stores various counters stored in the RAM 203 and used for main control of the game. This is because it is necessary to prevent data from being erroneously destroyed by various counters and data stored in the RAM 203 and used for managing information on the ratio of the accessory. That is, various counters and data used for the main control of the game must be protected with certainty in order to protect the interests of the player. In addition, the data saved in the stack area of the RAM 203 when performing the main control of the game, the main control of the game continues without any problems again after the processing related to the management of the information on the accessory ratio is performed on the way. You must ensure that it is protected.

  Therefore, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 stores various counters and data used for the main control of the game in the internal work area 203x1 of the area 203x in the use area, and stores the stack area when performing the main control of the game. Is saved to the stack area 203x2 of the used area 203x. On the other hand, the MPU 201 stores various counters and data used for management of information relating to the accessory ratio in the outer work area 203y1 of the out-of-use area 203y, and stores the counter in the stack area when managing information relating to the accessory ratio. The data to be saved is saved in the outside stack area 203y2 of the outside area 203y. This makes it possible to reliably protect various counters and data used for main control of the game and data saved in the stack area when performing the control.

  Next, referring to FIG. 400, it is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the eighteenth embodiment. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process that is repeatedly executed, for example, every 4 milliseconds. As the MPU 201 executes the timer interrupt process, various processes to be executed periodically are performed.

  In this timer interruption process, first, a game process for performing main control of the game is executed (S2001). For example, processes such as S101 to S111 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 378) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 described in the sixteenth embodiment are executed in the process of S2001. That is, the main control of the game includes a jackpot lottery, setting of a variable display, opening / closing control of the big winning port (large opening port) 65a at the time of the jackpot, a winning lottery of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. . As described above, the MPU 201 uses the in-use area area 203x (the inner work area 203x1 and the inner stack area 203x2) in the RAM 203 while executing the process of S2001.

  Next, a winning ratio process for managing information relating to the winning ratio is executed (S2002). Details of the winning combination process will be described later with reference to FIG. After the processing in S2002, the timer interrupt processing ends.

  As described above, in the timer interruption process of the present embodiment, the main control of the game, which is an important control, is preferentially executed by performing the game process first and then performing the winning ratio process.

  Next, the details of the winning combination process (S2002) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 400) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 401 is a flowchart showing the combination processing. In this combination processing, first, the interrupt is prohibited (S2011), then the flag register 200a is saved to the inner stack area 203x2 by the PUSH instruction (S2012), and thereafter, the combination processing is executed by the CALL instruction. The subroutine program to be executed is read out, and the winning combination main process is executed (S2013). Details of the winning combination main process will be described later with reference to FIG. At the stage of the processing of S2011 and S2012, the MPU 201 executes the processing by using the in-use area 203x of the RAM 203.

  When the process of S2013 is completed and the process returns to the role processing from the subroutine program of the ratio main processing, the flag register 200a saved in the inner stack area 203x2 is restored by a POP instruction (S2015). Is permitted (S2016), and then the winning combination process ends. Note that the MPU 201 also executes the processing of S2015 and S2016 by using the in-use area 203x of the RAM 203.

  In the processing of S2012, the flag register 200a was saved to the inner work area 203x1 using a load (LD) instruction, and in the processing of S2014, the flag register 200a was saved to the inner work area 203x1 using a load (LD) instruction. The flag register 200a may be restored.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 402, details of the winning ratio main process (S2013) executed by reading the subroutine program by the winning ratio process (S2002) (see FIG. 401) will be described. FIG. 402 is a flowchart showing the winning combination main process.

  In the win ratio main process, first, a stack pointer (not shown) of the MPU 201 is set to a start position of the outer stack area 203y2 by a load (LD) instruction (S2021). As a result, in the subsequent processing, the data is saved in the outer stack area 203y2. After this process, the MPU 201 uses the external work area 203y1 as a work area of the RAM 203. That is, the MPU 201 stores various counters and data using the external work area 203y1, and uses the external stack area 203y2 as necessary.

  Next, of the registers 200, the registers 200 (except for the flag register 200a) used in the processing relating to the accessory ratio are individually loaded into areas determined in the respective external work areas 203y1 by a load (LD) instruction. It is evacuated (S2022). Then, processing relating to the accessory ratio is executed (S2023).

  In the process of S2023, for example, in the sixteenth embodiment or the seventeenth embodiment, the same process as the accessory ratio management main process (see FIG. 386) executed by the CPU 261 of the accessory ratio management chip 207 is executed. In addition, a process of controlling the display of the winning combination display device 400 is executed. In addition, when the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, an inspection result output process executed by the CPU 261 of the accessory ratio management chip 207 of the sixteenth or seventeenth embodiment (see FIGS. 390 and 30). The same processing as described above may be executed in the processing of S2023.

  When the processing of S2023 is completed, a stack pointer (not shown) of the MPU 201 is set to a fixed address in the inner stack area 203x2 by a load (LD) instruction (S2024). Thus, in the subsequent processing, data is started again in the inner stack area 203x2.

  Here, the winning ratio main process (S2002) in which the winning ratio main process (S2013) is executed is a game process (S2001) in which the main control of the game is executed in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 399. Done after finishing. The timer interrupt processing is read when the counter update processing (S702 to S703) is not executed in the infinite loop (loop of S701 to S703) of the main processing (FIG. 385) executed by the MPU 201. Is executed.

  Therefore, when the process of S2020 is performed, the data saved at the time of shifting from the main process to the timer interrupt process and the flag register 200a saved by the process of S2012 are stored in the inner stack area 203x2. It is saved (however, when the flag register 200a is saved in the inner work area 203x1 by the load instruction, it does not exist in the inner stack area 203x2), and the number of the saved data is fixed. Therefore, in the process of S2012, when the stack pointer is specified at the position where the stack pointer is stacked in the inner stack area 203x2, the position can be surely specified only by setting the fixed address to the stack pointer. Then, before shifting the stack pointer from the inner stack area 203x2 to the outer stack area 203y2 (before executing the processing of S2012), it is not necessary to save the value of the stack pointer indicating the inside of the inner stack area 203x2. An increase in the capacity of the RAM 203 due to the saving can be suppressed.

  Next, by the processing of S2022, the values of the registers 200 individually saved in the determined areas of the external work area 203y1 are respectively transferred from the determined areas of the external work area 203y1 corresponding to the load (LD) instruction. By reading and setting in the corresponding register 200, it is restored (S2025). Then, after the processing of S2025, the winning combination main process ends, and the process returns to the winning ratio process. After the process of S2025 is completed, the MPU 201 uses the inner work area 203x1 as a work area of the RAM 203. That is, the MPU 201 stores various counters and data using the inner work area 203x1, and uses the inner stack area 203x2 as necessary.

  As described above, in the MPU 201, when executing the process related to the accessory ratio (S2023), each process is executed using the area 203y outside the use area (the outside work area 203y1 and the outside stack area 203y2). At the stage of shifting to the processing of S2023 using the out-of-area area 203y, of the registers 200 provided in the MPU 201, the registers 200 used in the processing relating to the accessory ratio are individually saved to the outer work area 203y1 of the RAM 203. I do. Then, before the processing of S2023 is completed and the MPU 201 returns to the processing using the in-use area 203x, the registers 200 evacuated to the external work area 203y1 are returned to the corresponding registers 200 individually. Thereafter, a game process for performing main control of the game using the used area 203x (the inner work area 203x1 and the inner stack area 203x2) is executed.

  Here, from the game processing for performing the main control of the game using the area 203x within the use area, the processing relating to the ratio of the character using the area 203y outside the use area is performed, and the game using the area 203x within the use area is performed again. When returning to the game process of performing the main control of the game, the protection of the player's interest and the fact that the main control of the game must be continuously performed again without any problem, The processing must not be affected by the processing related to the accessory ratio. Therefore, the RAM 203 is divided into an in-use area 203x used for main control processing of the game and an out-of-use area 203y used for processing relating to the accessory ratio. However, since the register 200 has a smaller capacity as compared with the RAM 203 and the register 200 whose use purpose is specified also exists, the register 200 used in the main control processing of the game and the processing relating to the accessory ratio is used. Is impossible or difficult to separate.

  In addition, before and after performing the process related to the accessory ratio, in other words, the process shifts from the game process performing the main control of the game using the in-use area 203x to the process related to the accessory ratio using the out-of-use area 203y. The contents of the register 200 are made the same between the step of performing the game and the step of shifting from the processing relating to the ratio of the character using the area 203y outside of the use area to the game processing performing the main control of the game using the area 203x within the use area. Therefore, there is also a demand that it is desired to ensure that the game process for performing the main control of the game is not affected by the process related to the accessory ratio executed between the game processes.

  On the other hand, before performing the process related to the ratio of the use of the accessory using the area 203y outside the use area, the contents of all the registers 200 are collectively saved to the outer stack area 203y2 using the PUSH instruction, and After the execution, a method of returning all the registers 200 from the outer stack area 203y2 collectively by using a POP instruction may be considered. However, in this case, it is necessary to previously set the capacity of the outer stack area 203y2 to be large in order to save the contents of all the registers 200, and the capacity of the outer work area 203y1 becomes smaller or the RAM 203 becomes larger. Must be transformed.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the MPU 201 is provided in the MPU 201 when shifting from the game processing for performing a main control of the game using the in-use area 203x to the processing related to the accessory ratio using the out-of-use area 203y. Of the registered registers 200, the registers 200 used in the processing relating to the accessory ratio are individually saved to the outside work area 203y1 of the RAM 203, and after the processing relating to the combination processing is executed, the area 203y outside the used area is removed. When shifting (returning) from the processing relating to the used-property ratio to the game processing for performing the main control of the game using the used area 203x, the registers 200 evacuated to the external work area 203y1 are individually restored. Thereby, the stage of shifting from the game processing for performing the main control of the game using the area 203x within the use area to the processing relating to the ratio of the character using the area 203y outside the use area, and the step of using the area 203y outside the use area. Since the contents of the register 200 can be the same at the stage of shifting from the processing related to the physical ratio to the game processing for performing the main control of the game using the used area 203x, the game for performing the main control of the game It can be ensured that the processing is not affected by the processing relating to the accessory ratio executed between the processing.

  In addition, a stage of shifting from a game process for performing a main control of a game using the area 203x within the use area to a process relating to a ratio of an accessory using the area 203y outside the use area, At the stage of shifting from the process related to the ratio to the game process of performing a main control of the game using the used area 203x, the process related to the accessory ratio is performed instead of saving / restoring the contents of all the registers 200. Since only the contents of some of the registers 200 used are saved / restored, the capacity of the RAM 203 (external work area 203y1) required to save the contents of the registers can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the capacity of the RAM 203 and to secure a large area for storing other data in the external work area 203y1.

  Note that the register 200 that is not used in the process for the accessory ratio is not affected by the process for the accessory ratio in the first place, and its contents are kept before and after the process for the accessory ratio is executed. Therefore, only the contents of some registers 200 used in the processing related to the accessory ratio are saved / restored without saving / restoring the contents of the register 200 not used in the processing related to the accessory ratio. It is possible to reliably ensure that the game process for performing the main control of the game is not affected by the process related to the accessory ratio executed between the game processes.

  However, since the flag register 200a is a register used for all instructions executed by the MPU 201, the flag register 200a is also a register used for processing relating to the accessory ratio, but in the processing of S2022, the flag register 200a Has not been evacuated exceptionally. This is because the contents of the flag register 200a are changed only by reading out the winning ratio main process (S2013) in the winning ratio process shown in FIG. 401, and the process shifts from the game process for executing the main control of the game to the process for the accessory ratio. This is because the value of the flag register 200a at the time of the end of the game process cannot be saved at the stage of the process of S2022.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, before reading the main combination processing (S2013) in the combination processing shown in FIG. 401, only the flag register 200a is evacuated to the inner stack area 203x2, and after the main combination processing (S2013) ends. , Only the flag register 200a is returned from the inner stack area 203x2. Thereby, the value of the flag register 200a at the time when the game process is completed can be reliably returned after the process relating to the accessory ratio is executed.

  In addition, a stage of shifting from a game process for performing a main control of a game using the area 203x within the use area to a process relating to a ratio of an accessory using the area 203y outside the use area, Since the save / restore of the register 200 is performed individually for each register at the stage of shifting from the process regarding the ratio to the game process for performing a main control of the game using the area 203x within the used area, the game Only the register 200 that needs to be saved / returned in order to ensure that the game process that performs the main control is not affected by the process related to the accessory ratio executed between them (that is, used in the process related to the accessory ratio) Of the register 200 only) can be individually saved and restored.

  Further, since the register 200 is retracted to the outer work area 203y1 instead of the outer stack area 203y2, the capacity required for the outer stack area 203y2 can be reduced, and the capacity of the outer work area 203y1 can be increased. Some MPUs 201 specify a stack area and a work area in advance depending on the model (type). Such an MPU 201 has a function of clearing (initializing to 0) the contents of the RAM 203 itself when data is further saved and stacked beyond the area of the stack area designated in advance. is there. On the other hand, by evacuating the register 200 to the external work area 203y1 instead of the external stack area 203y2, it is possible to prevent the external stack area 203y2 from being immediately filled with the stacked data. Therefore, in the MPU 201 having such a function, it is possible to prevent the RAM 203 from being cleared because data is further stacked beyond a predetermined area of the outer stack area 203y2.

  Further, since the register 200 is not saved using the PUSH instruction / POP instruction but is saved using the load (LD) instruction, the place where the register 200 is saved can be fixed by the program. Therefore, while performing the process related to the accessory ratio, the game is mainly controlled by playing a program by using the outside work area 203y1 while clearly avoiding the area where the register 200 is evacuated. The contents of the register 200 used in the processing can be reliably protected.

  When all the registers 200 are used in the processing related to the accessory ratio, all the registers 200 are individually saved / restored in a predetermined area of the external work area 203y1 by using a load (LD) instruction. You may make it do. Thus, the effect of retreating the register 200 to the outside work area 203y1 can be enjoyed.

  When some registers 200 used in the processing related to the accessory ratio are saved, the registers 200 are individually saved to a predetermined area of the outer stack area 203y2 by using a PUSH instruction, and the outer stack area 203y2 is determined. The registers 200 saved in the area may be individually restored using a POP instruction. Thus, the capacity of the RAM 203 required to save the contents of the register can be suppressed. Therefore, the capacity of the RAM 203 can be reduced, and a large area for storing the external work area 203y1 can be secured. In this case, when the register 200 saved by using the POP instruction is restored, it is necessary to restore the register 200 saved by the PUSH instruction later by the POP instruction first. .

  In addition, the same configuration as that of the pachinko machine 10 of the sixteenth and seventeenth embodiments can provide the same effects as those obtained by the configuration.

<Nineteenth Embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a nineteenth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 of the eighteenth embodiment, the main control device 110 shifts from the game processing for performing the main control of the game using the area 203x within the use area to the processing related to the accessory ratio using the area 203y outside the use area. At this stage, the register 200 used in the processing relating to the accessory ratio is individually saved, and after the processing relating to the accessory ratio is completed, the processing relating to the accessory ratio using the area 203y outside the used area is performed. The case where the evacuated register 200 is individually restored at the stage of shifting to the game processing for performing the main control of the game using the area 203x has been described. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the nineteenth embodiment, the main controller 110 uses the area 203x in the used area in the accessory processing (S2002) executed in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 400). During the execution of the process, at the stage of reading out the main item main process (S2013) for executing the process relating to the ratio of the accessory using the area 203y outside the used area by the CALL instruction, the register 200 used in the process relating to the ratio of the accessory is read. Are individually cleared to 0, and the main item main process (S2013) is read by the CALL instruction. In the main item main process (S2013), at the stage where the main item main process (S2013) using the area 203y outside the use area is ended and the process returns to the process using the area 203x within the use area, the process regarding the main item ratio is performed. After clearing the registers 200 used in the above to 0 individually, the processing returns to the winning combination processing.

  Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 of the nineteenth embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 of the eighteenth embodiment. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the nineteenth embodiment, the same components and processes as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the sixteenth to eighteenth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals as those of the sixteenth to eighteenth embodiments. Description is omitted.

  The pachinko machine 10 of the nineteenth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 of the eighteenth embodiment in that the duty ratio processing (S2002), which is one of the timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, is different. The partial processing is different from the partial processing of the winning ratio main processing (S2013), which is one of the processing of the winning ratio processing (S2002).

  FIG. 403 is a flowchart showing the winning combination process (S2002) in the nineteenth embodiment. In this winning combination processing, first, the same processing of S2011 and S2012 as in the eighteenth embodiment is executed, and then all the registers 200 used in the processing related to the winning combination (except for the flag register 200a) Are individually cleared to 0 using a load (LD) instruction. Then, the process proceeds to S2013, in which a subroutine program for executing the hand ratio main process using the out-of-use area 203y is read by the CALL instruction, and the hand ratio main process is executed. Then, the same processes in S2014 and S2015 as in the eighteenth embodiment are executed, and thereafter, the winning combination process ends.

  Next, FIG. 404 is a flowchart showing the winning combination main process (S2013) in the nineteenth embodiment. In the winning combination main process, first, the same process of S2021 as in the eighteenth embodiment is executed, and then, the process of S2023, that is, the same as the eighteenth embodiment (that is, the process related to the accessory ratio) is executed. Next, the registers 200 used in the processing related to the accessory ratio are individually cleared to 0 (S2041). Then, the same processing of S2024 as in the eighteenth embodiment is executed to end the winning combination main process using the area 203y outside the use area, return to the processing of the combination ratio, and execute the processing using the area 203x inside the use area. Execute.

  In the nineteenth embodiment, in the register 200 used in the processing related to the accessory ratio using the area 203y outside the used area, the value is changed by the processing related to the accessory ratio, and the value is left as it is in the corresponding register 200. On the other hand, it is assumed that even if the MPU 201 executes a game process for performing a main control of a game using the in-use area 203x, the MPU 201 does not affect the game process. In this case, the MPU 201 normally provides the MPU 201 with a stage in which the game processing that mainly controls the game using the area 203x within the use area shifts to the processing related to the accessory ratio using the area 203y outside the use area. The register 200 used in the process for the accessory ratio is saved from the register 200 and the process for the accessory ratio is executed. There is no problem even if the saved register 200 is not restored at the stage of shifting to the game processing for performing the main control of the game using the area 203x. However, in this case, the value of the register 200 is changed before and after the processing relating to the accessory ratio, so that an external person cannot determine whether or not there is really no problem.

  Therefore, as in the present embodiment, first, in the winning combination processing, the processing is shifted from the gaming processing for performing a main control of the game using the area 203x within the used area to the processing relating to the accessory ratio using the area 203y outside the used area. Before reading the subroutine program for executing the main portion ratio processing by the CALL instruction, once, all the registers 200 used in the process related to the accessory ratio performed in the main portion ratio main process are individually set to 0. To clear. Then, in the winning combination main processing, after executing the processing relating to the winning combination, the main processing of the game using the inside area 203x is started from the processing relating to the inside ratio 203x using the outside area 203y. At the stage of shifting to, the registers 200 used in the processing relating to the accessory ratio (that is, the same register 200 as the register 200 cleared to 0 before executing the ratio main processing) are individually set to 0. clear. Thereby, a step of shifting from the game processing for performing the main control of the game using the area 203x within the used area to the processing relating to the accessory ratio using the area 203y outside the used area (a step of reading out the main ratio processing). A step of shifting from the processing relating to the accessory ratio using the area 203y outside of the use area to a game processing of performing a main control of a game using the area 203x within the use area (a step of returning to the ratio processing from the ratio main processing) Thus, the contents of the register 200 can be made identical at a glance. Therefore, it can be ensured that the game processing for performing the main control of the game is not affected by the processing related to the accessory ratio executed between the game processing. The register 200 that is not used in the process related to the accessory ratio does not change its contents before and after the process related to the accessory ratio and is kept held. Therefore, even if the unused register 200 is not cleared to 0, It is the same at both stages.

  Here, in the nineteenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the registers 200 used in the processing relating to the accessory ratio are individually cleared to 0 in the processing of S2031 and S2041, but it is not always necessary to clear the registers 200 to 0. For example, the same effect can be obtained even if the same predetermined value is stored in the processing of S2031 and S2041. However, immediately after the power is turned on and the reset input to the MPU 201 is released (in a stage where software initialization is not executed), in consideration of the fact that all registers are initialized to 0, S2031 and S2041 are performed. In the processing of (1), it is desirable to individually clear (initialize) the registers 200 used in the processing relating to the accessory ratio to zero. Also, by clearing the registers 200 used in the process relating to the accessory ratio to 0 individually, it is possible to grasp at a glance that the register 200 has been cleared to 0.

  In addition, the same configuration as the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixteenth to eighteenth embodiments can provide the same effects as those obtained by the configuration.

<Twentieth embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a twentieth embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 of the twentieth embodiment, four 7-segment displays (lower right of the 7-segment portion) are used instead of the winning ratio display device 400 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the eighteenth or nineteenth embodiment. (Including a dot segment provided on the side) 401a, 401b, 401c, and 401d (see FIG. 406 (a)). The base value of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed on the base display device 401 as one piece of information on the accessory ratio.

  The base value is the number (ratio) of balls to be paid out (prize balls) for 100 balls at the time of a big hit, a high probability (probable change), and a normal time excluding a time reduction. In the pachinko machine 10 of the twentieth embodiment, the number of out balls guided from the game area to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls hit into the game area, in other words, the number of balls used in the game). Each time the total number of outs reaches 60000, the base value for the 60000 spheres is measured and stored.

  The base display device 401 displays a base value (hereinafter, referred to as a “real-time base value”) measured in real time during the period until the total number of outs reaches 60000, and the last (most recent) total out number. Is measured when the total number of outs reaches 60,000 one before the previous time (two times before) in addition to the base value (hereinafter referred to as the "previous base value") measured when the number reaches 60,000. Base value (hereinafter referred to as the “before before base value”) and the base value (hereinafter referred to as “before before and after”) that was measured when the total number of outs reached 60,000 immediately before (before before) twice before. ) Is switched and displayed every predetermined period (5 seconds in the present embodiment). In addition to the real-time base value, displaying the past multiple base values (previous base value, pre-previous base value, pre-previous base value) enables you to more accurately determine whether there has been fraud, Further, it is possible to predict to some extent the time at which the misconduct has occurred.

  In the twentieth embodiment, every time the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, all the segments (including the dot segments) of the seven-segment displays 401a to 401d provided in the base display device 401 immediately after the power is turned on. Is turned on for a predetermined period (5 seconds in this embodiment). In the base display device 401, if some segments are not turned on due to a failure such as a disconnection, the base value or the like cannot be displayed correctly, and there is a possibility that an erroneous determination may be made in determining whether or not there is an illegal act. Every time the power is turned on, by lighting all the segments of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided in the base display device 401 for a predetermined period, it can be confirmed whether all the segments can be normally turned on. It can be easily determined whether or not the display of 401 is normally performed.

  Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the twentieth embodiment can be used when the pachinko machine 10 is completely newly started up in a manufacturing factory, or when the used pachinko machine 10 is moved to another hall as a used stand. When starting up, the display on the base display device 401 until the total number of outs reaches a predetermined number (300 in this embodiment) is displayed in a special display mode different from a normal base value display. . In the new start-up of the pachinko machine 10, there is a case where a ball is manually inserted into each winning opening and a prize ball is paid out in a shipping inspection or the like for checking the quality of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the base value at this time is significantly different from the actual base value of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, when a new start-up of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the display of the base display device 401 until the total number of outs reaches a predetermined number (300 in the present embodiment) is the normal base value display. By displaying in a different special display mode, it can be shown that the base value being displayed is not a regular base value. Further, by performing the display, it can be suggested that the pachinko machine 10 is in a newly started state.

  Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 of the twentieth embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the pachinko machines 10 of the sixteenth to nineteenth embodiments. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the twentieth embodiment, the same components and processes as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the sixteenth to nineteenth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals as those of the sixteenth to nineteenth embodiments. Description is omitted.

  FIG. 405 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the twentieth embodiment. The difference between the pachinko machine 10 of the twentieth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 of the eighteenth embodiment is that the ratio display device 400 is connected to the main control device 110 in the eighteenth embodiment. In the embodiment, the point is that the base display device 401 is connected to the main control device 110. The base display device 401 is for displaying the base value of the pachinko machine 10 as described above.

  In the combination ratio display device 400 according to the eighteenth embodiment, the base value of the pachinko machine 10 may be switched and displayed at predetermined time intervals together with the accessory ratio of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, it is not always necessary to provide the inspection terminal 207a, and the configuration may not be such that the information on the accessory ratio is output to the inspection device 300. In the case where information on the accessory ratio is not output to the inspection device 300, the second reading memory 264 may be omitted.

  Here, the details of the base display device 401 will be described with reference to FIG. First, FIG. 406 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the base display device 401. The base display device 401 includes four 7-segment displays 401a to 401d arranged in a horizontal row, and is provided on a main board constituting the main control device 110. That is, the pachinko machine 10 is assembled so that the display screen of the base display device 401 can be seen when the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 is viewed, so that a four-digit number or alphabetic character can be confirmed. The pachinko machine 10 may be assembled so that the display screen of the base display device 401 can be seen from the front side.

  Each of the seven-segment displays 401a to 401d has a dot segment provided on the lower right side of the seven-segment part in addition to the seven-segment part. The base display device 401 uses two left-side seven-segment displays 401a and 401b as identification segments and four right-side seven-segment displays 401c and 401d as ratio segs among the four seven-segment displays 401a to 401d. I do. The identification segment is used to indicate identification information for specifying the content to be displayed in the ratio segment. The ratio seg is used to display the ratio of the content specified by the identification information indicated by the identification seg.

  FIG. 406 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing display contents on the base display device 401. As described above, the base display device 401 displays the real-time base value measured in real time during the period until the total number of outs reaches 60,000 and the last (most recent) total out number reaches 60,000. The previous base value measured before, the base value measured two times before the previous time (two times before) when the total number of outs reaches 60000 pieces, and the base value one time before the previous time (two times before the previous time) 2) The base value measured two times before and after the total number of outs reaches 60000 is switched and displayed every 5 seconds.

  When displaying the real-time base value on the base display device 401, "bL." Is displayed on the identification segment and the real-time base value being measured is displayed on the ratio seg in two digits. By displaying “bL.” On the identification segment, a person who has seen that the number displayed on the ratio segment is a real-time base value can be recognized.

  When displaying the previous base value on the base display device 401, “b1.” Is displayed in the identification segment and the previous base value is displayed in two digits in the ratio segment. By displaying “b1.” On the identification segment, a person who has seen that the number displayed on the ratio segment is the previous base value can be recognized.

  When the base value is displayed two times before in the base display device 401, “b2.” Is displayed in the identification segment and the base value is displayed in two digits in the ratio segment. By displaying “b2.” In the identification segment, a person who has seen that the number displayed in the ratio segment is the base value two times before can be recognized.

  When the base value is displayed twice before the base display device 401, “b3.” Is displayed in the identification segment, and the base value is displayed in two digits before and after the ratio seg. By displaying “b3.” In the identification segment, a person who has seen that the number displayed in the ratio segment is the base value two times before can be recognized.

  As described above, the base display device 401 also displays a plurality of past base values (previous base value, pre-previous base value, pre-previous base value) in addition to the real-time base value. Here, the real-time base value is a base value measured in real time until the total number of outs reaches 60000 as described above. Here, generally, in the hall, about 10,000 to 20,000 balls are launched per day for one pachinko machine 10, and a game is played. In other words, the last base value, the last-before-last base value, and the two-before-last base value measured for 60,000 spheres indicate the base values over several days of about 3 to 6 days. If the real-time base value is not displayed on the base display device 401, it takes about 3 to 6 days until the measurement of the base value for 60000 spheres is performed. It could be the base value 3-6 days ago. Therefore, if there is any misconduct after the previous measurement of the base value, the base value for the next 60,000 balls is measured and displayed on the base display device 401 for 3 to 6 days. Misconduct may not be discovered. On the other hand, by displaying the real-time base value on the base display device 401, the current base value can be shown as a preliminary value. Discover possible actions.

  On the other hand, the real-time base value is a base value measured in real time with the total number of outs being less than 60000 as described above. As described above, the base value is the number (percentage) of balls that are paid out (prize balls) for 100 balls in normal times, and thus the state of the game of the pachinko machine 10 changes. (For example, the normal state happens to continue for a long time, the jackpot happens to happen frequently, the probable change happens to happen for a long time, etc.), and the real-time base value may fluctuate. Therefore, if only the real-time base value is displayed on the base display device 401, it may be difficult to determine whether or not there has been a fraud.

  On the other hand, the previous base value, the last-before-time base value, and the before-last-time base value measured for 60000 spheres indicate the base value over several days of about 3 to 6 days, Regardless of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 in the corresponding several days, the previous base value, the base value before the previous game, and the base value before the previous game can be averaged. Therefore, by displaying not only the real-time base value but also the base value measured for 60000 spheres such as the previous base value on the base display device 401, it is possible to more accurately determine whether there is an illegal act. it can.

  On the other hand, when only the previous base value is displayed as the base value measured for the 60,000 balls, during the period in which the previous base value was measured, a player accustomed to the pachinko machine 10 happened to play a game. Then, the base value generally decreases. Therefore, even when only the real-time base value and the previous base value are displayed on the base display device 401, it may be difficult to determine whether or not there has been a fraud. On the other hand, by displaying not only the last base value but also a plurality of base values such as a base value before the previous time and a base value before the previous time as the base value measured for 60,000 balls, each base value is displayed. In, it can be determined whether or not the base value has changed based on the familiarity of the player who played the game. Therefore, it is possible to more accurately determine whether or not there is an illegal act.

  In the present embodiment, the real-time base value, the previous base value, the pre-previous base value, and the pre-previous base value are switched and displayed every 5 seconds on the base display device 401. May be switched between a mode in which the real-time base value and the previous base value are displayed simultaneously and a mode in which the pre-last base value and the pre-last base value are simultaneously displayed at predetermined intervals. Alternatively, the real-time base value, the previous base value, the base value before last time, and the base value before last time may all be displayed on the base display device 401 at the same time.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a case where three base values, a previous base value, a base value two times before, and a base value two times before, are displayed as base values measured on 60000 spheres to be displayed on the base display device 401. Has been described, but it is also possible to display two values of the previous base value, the base value before the previous time, and the base value before the previous time, the base value before the previous time, the base value before the previous time, and the base value before the previous time. Alternatively, the base value may be further displayed two times before and after each time when the total number of outs reaches 60,000 immediately before (every two times before). That is, an arbitrary number of base values of 2 or more may be displayed as the base values measured on 60000 spheres to be displayed on the base display device 401.

  Returning to FIG. 405, the description will be continued. The base display device 401 is connected to a base display device control circuit 402 provided in the main control device 110 and connected to the input / output port 205. The base display device control circuit 402 drives and controls each of the seven-segment displays 401a to 401d of the base display device 401 based on the drive / control signals from the MPU 201, and performs various operations as shown in FIG. The display is performed.

  In the process for displaying the base value on the base display device 401, the process is performed using the area 203y outside the used area of the RAM 203. That is, information necessary for displaying the base value on the base display device 401 is stored in the outside work area 203y1 of the use area outside area 203y. Here, with reference to FIG. 407, details of the information stored in the outside work area 203y1 and necessary for displaying the base value on the base display device 401 will be described. First, FIG. 407 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing information necessary for displaying a base value, which is stored in the outside work area 203y1 of the RAM 203.

  The information necessary for displaying the base value stored in the outside work area 203y1 includes a total out number counter 203j, a low-accuracy payout number counter 203k, real-time base value data 203l, previous base value data 203m, and base value data before last time. 203n, at least two times before the base value data 203o, a new startup flag 203p, and a display type counter 203q are provided.

  Among them, the total out number counter 203j, the low-accuracy payout number counter 203k, the real-time base value data 203l, the previous base value data 203m, the pre-last base value data 203n, the pre-last base value data 203o, and the new startup flag 203p are: Even when the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is operated, the information is not initialized (cleared) and the information is kept stored. As a result, even if the RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on, the measurement of the real-time base value performed before the operation is performed is continued, and the measured real-time base value is displayed on the base display device 401. Can be done. Further, the base display device 401 can display the previous base value, the base value before last time, and the base value before last time held before the operation of the RAM erase switch 122 is performed.

  On the other hand, in the twentieth embodiment, a RAM all erase switch (not shown) is provided in the board box 100 in which the main board is stored, and only when the power is turned on while the RAM all erase switch is operated, The RAM 203 including the total out number counter 203j, the low-accuracy payout number counter 203k, the real-time base value data 203l, the previous base value data 203m, the base value data 203n before last time, the base value data 203o before last time 203o, and the new start flag 203p are stored in the RAM 203. Initialized (cleared). When the pachinko machine 10 is completely newly started up at the manufacturing plant, or when the pachinko machine 10 is newly started up, such as when the used pachinko machine 10 is moved to another hall as a used stand, the RAM all erase switch is operated. While the power is turned on, the total out number counter 203j, the low-accuracy payout number counter 203k, the real-time base value data 203l, the previous base value data 203m, the pre-last base value data 203n, the pre-last base value data 203o, and the new The start-up flag 203p can be initialized, from which the measurement of the base value can be newly started. Also, when the used pachinko machine 10 is moved to another hall as a used stand, it is possible to initialize (clear) the information so that the illegal operation is performed in the previous hall and the base value is cleared. Even if is changed, the information is continuously displayed at the next store, so that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of suspicion that the wrongdoing has occurred at the next store. Further, since the RAM all erasure switch is provided in the board box 100 connected unopenable, it cannot be operated unless the connection of the board box 100 is broken and opened. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a fraudster from deleting information necessary for displaying the base value, and to reliably protect such information.

  Note that a hole such as a keyhole is provided in place of the RAM all erasure switch, and only when a key or the like that fits the hole is inserted, the total out number counter 203j, the low-accuracy payout number counter 203k, the real-time base value data 203l, The last base value data 203m, the last-before-last base value data 203n, the two-last-last base value data 203o, and the new start-up flag 203p may be initialized. As a result, only those who have a key or the like that fits the hole can delete the information necessary for displaying the base value, thereby preventing a fraudster from erasing the information necessary for displaying the base value. , You can surely protect this information.

  The total out number counter 203j is a counter for counting the total out number, which is the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (ie, the number of balls used in the game). The total out number counter 203j is initialized to zero when the power is turned on while operating the RAM all erasure switch, and when the ball is detected by the out switch 208f, the ball is guided to the ball discharge path. And 1 is added. When the total out number counter 203j reaches 60000, the MPU 201 determines that the total out number has reached 60,000, executes a predetermined process described later, and initializes the total out number counter 203j to zero. Become As a result, the total out number is again counted by the total out number counter 203j until the total out number reaches 60000.

  The low-probability-payout number counter 203k is a counter for counting the number of prize balls paid out at the time of a big hit, a high probability (probable change), and a normal time excluding a time reduction. The low-probability payout number counter 203k is initialized to zero when the power is turned on while operating the RAM all erase switch. If there is a payout of balls (prize balls) when the game state is normal, the number of the paid out balls is added to the low-probability payout number counter 203k.

  For example, in the present embodiment, at normal times, the first opening 64a called a so-called "navel" whose opening is always open, and the first ordinary winning opening 63a and the second ordinary winning opening 63b which are general winning openings. When the first starting port switch 208a, the first normal winning port switch 208c, and the second normal winning port switch 208d detect that a ball has been hit, the number of winning balls set for the corresponding winning port is detected. Is determined by the award ball number table 202e (see FIGS. 374 and 377), and the award ball number is added to the low-probability payout number counter 203k.

  In the case of the pachinko machine 10, a "small hit" is provided as one mode of "missing", and when the "small hit" is achieved, the large winning opening 65a is opened for several seconds and several times. In normal times, with the opening of the special winning opening 65a in the "small hit", there is a ball in the special winning opening 65a, and when a prize ball is played, the number of prize balls is set to a low certainty payout number counter 203k. May be added. Further, when a game state is normal and a ball is entered in the second starting port 64b and a prize ball is played, the number of the prize balls may be added to the low-probability payout number counter 203k.

  The addition of the number of prize balls to the low-probability payout number counter 203k is cumulatively performed until the total out number counter 203j reaches 60,000. That is, the value of the low-probability payout number counter 203k when the total out number counter 203j reaches 60,000 is equal to the value of the ball paid out in the normal game state for the 60,000 balls launched into the game area. It becomes the number.

  When the total out number counter 203j reaches 60000, the low-probability payout number counter 203k is initialized to zero together with the total out number counter 203j. In this way, the number of balls paid out in the normal game state during the period until the total number of outs reaches 60000 is counted by the low-probability payout number counter 203k.

The MPU 201 calculates the real-time base value every predetermined period (for example, every 4 milliseconds when the timer interrupt processing is executed) using the following equation (1).
Real time base value = value of low-probability payout number counter 203k / value of total out number counter 203j × 100 (1)
The real-time base value calculated by the equation (1) is stored in the real-time base value data 203l.

  That is, the real-time base value data 203l is data indicating the measured (calculated) real-time base value. Further, the previous base value data 203m is data indicating a previous base value, the last-last base value data 203n is data indicating a pre-last base value, and the last-last base value data 203o is data indicating a two-last base value. is there.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 407 (b), the configurations of the real-time base value data 203l, the previous base value data 203m, the pre-last base value data 203n, and the pre-last base value data 203o will be described. FIG. 407 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of each of the base value data 203l to 203o.

  As shown in FIG. 407 (b), each of the base value data 203l to 203o is composed of 8 bits (1 byte), the seventh bit (most significant bit) on the MSB side is a valid data flag, and , The base value is stored in the 0th to 6th bits (lower 7 bits). When the valid data flag is 1, each of the base value data 203l to 203o means that a valid base value is stored in the 0th to 6th bits. On the other hand, when the valid data flag is 0, each of the base value data 203l to 203o means that a valid base value is not stored in the 0th to 6th bits.

  When the power is turned on while operating the RAM all erasure switch, all of the base value data 203l to 203o are initialized to zero for both the valid data flag and the base value. That is, immediately after the power is turned on while operating the RAM all erasure switch, all of the real-time base value, the previous base value, the pre-previous base value, and the pre-previous base value are not stored with valid data.

  After that, until the total out number counter 203j reaches 300, the real-time base value stores the base value calculated by the expression (1) as the base value of the real-time base value data 203l, while the real-time base value data 203l Is set to 0. In this case, when displaying the real-time base value on the base display device 401, “88.” is blinked (or lit) in the identification segment, and the real-time base value stored in the real-time base value data 203l is compared with the ratio. Flashing (or lighting) is displayed on the segment.

  As described above, the RAM all erasing switch is used when the pachinko machine 10 is completely newly started up at the manufacturing factory, or when the used pachinko machine 10 is moved to another hall as a used stand, and the pachinko machine 10 is newly started up. It is operated when it is done. When the pachinko machine 10 is newly started up, a ball may be manually inserted into each winning port to pay out a prize ball in a shipping inspection or the like for checking the quality of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Therefore, the base value at this time is significantly different from the actual base value of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 is newly started up, the display on the base display device 401 until the total number of outs reaches 300 first blinks (or lights) “88.” on the identification segment. At the same time, the real-time base value stored in the real-time base value data 203l is blinked (or lit) in the ratio segment and displayed in a special display mode different from a normal base value display, so that the displayed base value is normal. Is not a valid base value. Further, by performing the display, it can be suggested that the pachinko machine 10 is in a newly started state. In this special display mode, both “88.” of the identification segment and the real-time base value of the ratio segment may be turned on or off. Alternatively, “88.” of the identification segment may be turned on to blink the real-time base value of the ratio segment, or conversely, “88.” of the identification segment may blink, and the real-time base value of the ratio segment appears. You may.

  When the total number-of-outs counter 203j reaches 300, the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l is set to 1. Thus, the base value stored in the real-time base value data 203l becomes a valid base value. Therefore, based on the fact that the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l has become 1, "bL." Is lit on the identification segment of the base display device 401 and the base value of the real-time base value data 203l is displayed on the ratio segment. By doing so, an effective real-time base value can be reported.

  On the other hand, at this stage, the valid data flag of each of the previous base value data 203m, the pre-last base value data 203n, and the pre-last base value data 203o remains 0. At this time, when the previous base value, the pre-previous base value, and the pre-previous base are displayed on the base display device 401 by switching every predetermined period, the identification seg is displayed corresponding to each base value, while the ratio seg is displayed. Is turned on with "-". As a result, it is possible to indicate that a valid base value has not been obtained as the previous base value, the pre-last base value, or the pre-last base value.

  When the total out number counter 203j reaches 60000, the base value stored in the real-time base value data 203l at that time becomes the base value for the total out number of 60000. Then, the base value data 203n is shifted to the base value data 203o before and after the previous time, and the real time base value data 203l is shifted to the base value data 203m for the previous time. Shift. Thereby, the base value measured when the total number of outs reaches 60000 is held as the previous base value.

  Here, when shifting the data to the previous base value data 203m, the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l to be shifted is “1”, and the valid data flag of the previous base value data 203m after the shift is set. Is also “1”. Therefore, when displaying the previous base value on the base display device 401 thereafter, the base value stored in the previous base value data 203m is displayed as an effective base value on the ratio seg.

  When shifting the previous base value data 203m to the base value data 203n two times before the previous time, if the valid data flag of the previous base value data 203m is "1" (the power is turned on while operating the RAM all erase switch). After all the initialization of the RAM 203 has been executed, this corresponds to the case where the total number of outs reaches 60,000 for the second time), and the effective data flag of the base value data 203n two times before the shift becomes “1”. Therefore, when the base value is displayed on the base display device 401 two times before, the base value stored in the base value data 203n is displayed on the ratio seg as an effective base value.

  Further, when the base value data 203n is shifted to the base value data 203o before and after the previous two times, if the valid data flag of the base value data 203n before the previous time is "1" (the power supply is turned on while operating the RAM all erase switch). When the total number of outs reaches 60,000 for the third time after the RAM 203 has been turned on and all initialization of the RAM 203 has been performed), the effective data flag of the base value data 203o is set to “1” two times before and after the shift. ". Therefore, thereafter, when the base value is displayed two times before the base value on the base display device 401, the base value stored in the base value data 203o before the last time is displayed as an effective base value on the ratio segment.

  When the total number-of-outs counter 203j reaches 60000 and the real-time base value data 203l is shifted to the previous base value data 203m, the real-time base value data 203l is also reset as the total-out number counter 203j is initialized to 0. Initialized to 0 including the valid data flag. The valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l is kept at 0 until the total out number counter 203j reaches 300 again. When the total out number counter 203j reaches 300, the valid data of the real-time base value data 203l is retained. 1 is stored in the flag. Thereafter, 1 is held in the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l until the total out number counter 203j reaches 60,000.

  Here, while the total number of outs is small, the measured real-time base value greatly depends on the content of the game at that time, so even if it is displayed, it becomes a meaningless base value and adversely affects the determination of fraud. May cause. Therefore, by setting the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l to 0 while the total number of outs is 0 to 300, when displaying the real-time base value on the base display device 401, the identification segment includes the real-time base value. “BL.” Indicating the value is turned on, while “−−” is turned on for the ratio segment. Accordingly, it can be shown that the currently effective real-time base value has not been obtained because the total number of outs is small. In this case, “bL.” Indicating the real-time base value may blink on the identification segment, and the base value of the real-time base value data 203l may be displayed on the ratio segment. Accordingly, it is possible to indicate that a currently effective real-time base value has not been obtained because the total number of outs is small, and it is possible to notify the real-time base value at that time as a reference.

  On the other hand, after the total number of outs reaches 300, by setting the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l to 1, when displaying the real-time base value on the base display device 401, the identification segment includes the real-time base value. While “bL.” Indicating the base value is turned on, the base value stored in the real-time base value data 203l is displayed as an effective base value in the ratio segment.

  Returning to FIG. 407 (a), the new start-up flag 203p is used when the pachinko machine 10 is completely newly started up in a manufacturing plant, or when the used pachinko machine 10 is moved to another hall as a used stand. A flag 10 indicates that a new start-up period is in progress. When the new start-up flag 203p is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a new start-up period, and when it is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is not in a new start-up period.

  The new start-up flag 203p is initialized to be turned on when the power is turned on while operating the RAM all erasure switch which is operated when the pachinko machine 10 is newly started up, and during the pachinko machine 10 is newly started up. Is shown. Then, the new startup flag 203p is kept on until the total out number counter 203j reaches 300, and if the total out number counter 203j differs by 300, the new startup flag 203p is set to off. Thereafter, the new startup flag 203p is kept off.

  When the new start-up flag 203p is ON, the special display mode described above, that is, “88.” flashes (or lights) on the identification segment and the real-time base value data 203l is displayed on the ratio segment on the base display device 401. The real-time base value is displayed in such a manner that the stored real-time base value is blinked (or lit). Further, by performing the display, it can be suggested that the pachinko machine 10 is in a newly started state.

  The display type counter 203q is a counter for determining the type of the base value to be displayed on the base display device 401. When the display type counter 203q is 0, the base display device 401 displays the real-time base value, and when the display type counter 203q is 1, the base display device 401 displays the previous base value, and the display type counter 203q Is 2, the base value is displayed twice before the base display device 401, and when the display type counter 203q is 3, the base value is displayed twice before the base display device 401.

  The display type counter 203q is set when the new start-up flag 203p is set to off, that is, when the total number of outs reaches 300 after the new start-up of the pachinko machine 10 and the new start-up period ends. Is initialized to 0. Then, the display type counter 203q is incremented by one every 5 seconds, and is returned to 0 when the value of the display type counter 203q is 3 when counting up. As a result, the base value displayed on the base display device 401 changes every 5 seconds in the order of the real-time base value, the previous base value, the base value before the previous time, and the base value before the previous time, and the display of the base value before the previous time. After that, the display returns to the real-time base value, and the display of the real-time base value, the previous base value, the base value before the previous time, and the base value before the previous time is repeated while being switched every five seconds.

  Next, referring to FIG. 408, a description will be given of a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when power is applied to the main control device 110 in the twentieth embodiment. FIG. 408 is a flowchart showing the start-up processing. Here, the start-up process will be described focusing on differences from the start-up process (see FIG. 384) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the sixteenth embodiment. Note that, as described above, the same processes as those in the startup process of the sixteenth embodiment are executed with the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

  First, it is determined by the processing of S604 that the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on (S604: Yes), and when it is determined by the processing of S605 that the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 ( (S605: No), when the calculated RAM determination value is determined not to be normal by the processing of S607 (S607: No), after transmitting the payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 (S614), Among the used areas, the total number-of-outs counter 203j, the low-accuracy payout number counter 203k, the real-time base value data 203l, the previous base value data 203m, the previous base value data 203n, and the last two previous times are information necessary for displaying the base value. The area excluding the base value data 203o and the new startup flag 203p is cleared to 0. And (S3001), sets an initial value for RAM203 area was the clear, except for information needed to display the base value such as (S3002).

  As a result, even if the RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on, the measurement of the real-time base value performed before the operation is performed is continued, and the measured real-time base value is displayed on the base display device 401. Can be done. Further, the base display device 401 can display the previous base value, the base value before last time, and the base value before last time held before the operation of the RAM erase switch 122 is performed. Then, even if the wrongdoer operates the RAM erase switch 122 to delete the evidence, the information necessary for displaying the base value is maintained, so that the evidence of the wrongdoing can be suppressed.

  If it is determined that the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on by the process of S604 (S604), then it is determined whether or not the RAM all erasure switch is turned on (S3003). If the RAM all erasure switch has not been turned on (S3003: No), the process proceeds to S605.

  On the other hand, if the RAM all erasure switch is turned on (S3003: Yes), a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 (S3004), as in the processing of S614. The whole initialization process (S3005, S3006) is executed. In the entire initialization process of the RAM 203 (S3005, S3006), the total out number counter 203j, the low-accuracy payout number counter 203k, the real-time base value data 203l, the last base value data 203m, and the last two bases are information necessary for displaying the base value The used area of the RAM 203 including the value data 203n, the base value data 203o before and after the new start flag 203p is cleared to 0 (S3005), and thereafter, the initial value is set in the RAM 203 (S3006).

  As described above, the RAM all erasing switch is used when the pachinko machine 10 is completely newly started up at the manufacturing factory, or when the used pachinko machine 10 is moved to another hall as a used stand, and the pachinko machine 10 is newly started up. To be operated. Then, by turning on the power while operating the RAM all erase switch, the total out number counter 203j, the low-accuracy payout number counter 203k, the real-time base value data 203l, the previous base value data 203m, the last-before-time base value data 203n, The base value data 203o and the new startup flag 203p can be initialized each time, and the measurement of the base value can be newly started from there. Also, when the used pachinko machine 10 is moved to another hall as a used stand, it is possible to initialize (clear) the information so that the illegal operation is performed in the previous hall and the base value is cleared. Even if is changed, the information is continuously displayed at the next store, so that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of suspicion that the wrongdoing has occurred at the next store. Further, since the RAM all erasure switch is provided in the board box 100 connected unopenable, it cannot be operated unless the connection of the board box 100 is broken and opened. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a fraudster from deleting information necessary for displaying the base value, and to reliably protect such information.

  When any of the processes of S609, S3002, and S3006 is executed, all the segments (including the dot segments) of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 are turned on (S3007). In this state, a wait process is performed for 5 seconds (S3008). Thus, every time the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, all the segments (including the dot segments) of the seven-segment displays 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 are continuously turned on for at least 5 seconds. .

  In the base display device 401, if some segments are not turned on due to a failure such as a disconnection, the base value or the like cannot be displayed correctly, and there is a possibility that an erroneous determination may be made in determining whether or not there is an illegal act. By turning on all the segments of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 for at least 5 seconds each time the power is turned on, it is possible to confirm whether all the segments can be normally turned on, and display the base. Whether the display of the device 401 is normally performed can be easily determined.

  In addition, the progress of the start-up process is waited for 5 seconds during which the lighting is performed, and the start of the normal game process is waited. Thereby, when the base value cannot be correctly displayed on the base display device 401, it is possible to suppress the progress of the game without being able to determine whether or not there is a fraudulent act. In this case, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of any disadvantage to the player, the hall, and the like.

  In this embodiment, every time the power is turned on, while all the segments of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 are turned on, the game is stopped for 5 seconds so that the game does not progress. However, a normal game process may be started and the game may proceed while the lighting is being performed. In this case, only the display of the base value on the base display device 401 may be made to stand by while measuring the real-time base value in accordance with the progress of the game. Thus, when a momentary power failure occurs, even if the process of turning on all the segments of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 is performed, the player can immediately play the game. Can resume.

  In the start-up process, after the process of S3008, the process proceeds to the process of S613.

  Next, a base value process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the twentieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 409 is a flowchart showing the base value processing. This base value process is a combination of a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 400) periodically (for example, every 4 milliseconds) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 shown in the eighteenth embodiment. This is executed as one process of (S2002), and calculates (measures) a base value and displays the base value.

  In this base value processing, first, a base value calculation processing is executed (S3101), a real-time base value is calculated (measured), and when the total number of outs reaches 60,000, the base value data between the base value data 203l to 203o is calculated. And the like. Details of the base value calculation processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, it is determined whether one second has elapsed since the last execution of the base value display processing (S3103) (S3102), and it is determined that one second has elapsed since the previous execution of the base value display processing (S3103). If it is performed (S3102: Yes), a base value display process is executed (S3103), and a process of displaying a base value on the base display device 401 is executed. The details of the base value display processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 411 and 412.

  When the processing in S3103 is completed, the base value processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that one second has not elapsed since the last time the base value display processing (S3103) was executed (S3102: No), the base value display processing (S3103) is skipped. To end the base value processing. Thus, the base value display processing (S3103) is executed at one-second intervals, and the display of the base display device 401 is drive-controlled every second.

  In the determination process of S3102, if the process of S3102 is executed for the first time after the power of main controller 110 is turned on (that is, after the start-up process shown in FIG. 408 is executed), the last time It is not determined whether or not one second has elapsed since the execution of the value display processing (S3103), but an affirmative determination is made (S3102: Yes), and the base value display processing (S3103) is executed. Thus, the drive control process of the base display device 401 can be executed immediately after the start-up process shown in FIG. 408 is executed.

  Next, the details of the above-described base value calculation process (S3101), which is one process of the base value process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 410 is a flowchart showing the base value calculation processing.

  In the base value calculation processing (S3101), first, at least the output of each of the first starting port switch 208a, the first normal winning port switch 208c, the second normal winning port switch 208d, and the out switch 208f is read, and the first starting port is read. 64a, the first ordinary winning opening 63a, the second ordinary winning opening 63b, and the presence or absence of a ball guided to the ball discharge path are determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored (S3201). ). The winning of one ball and the determination of one ball guided to the ball discharging path are performed over three timer interrupt processes based on the outputs of the switches 208a, 208c, 208d, and 208f.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the out switch 208f is on (S3201). If it is determined that the out switch 208f is on and there is a ball guided to the ball discharge path (S3201: Yes), the total out is performed. One is added to the number counter 203j (S3203). Thus, the total out number, which is the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of hit balls), is counted by the total out number counter 203j.

  After the process of S3203 or by the process of S3201, when it is determined that the out switch 208f is not on and there is no ball guided to the ball discharge path (S3201: No), then, when the gaming state is a big hit Instead, it is determined whether or not the game is in the low probability state and the time saving state, that is, whether or not the gaming state is normal (S3204). Then, when it is determined that the gaming state is not a big hit, a low probability state and a time saving state, that is, if it is determined that the gaming state is a normal state (S3204: Yes), the process of S3205 is executed.

  That is, in the processing of S3205, based on the winning detection information stored in the processing of S3201, the winning that is determined to have a winning among the first starting opening 64a, the first ordinary winning opening 63a, and the second ordinary winning opening 63b. If there is a mouth, the number of prize balls corresponding to the prize hole having the prize (that is, the number specified by the prize ball number table 202e) is added to the low-probability payout number counter 203k. As a result, the number of prize balls paid out at the time of a big hit, a high probability (probable change), and a normal time excluding a time reduction is counted by the low-probability payout number counter 203k.

  After the processing of S3205 or by the processing of S3204, when it is determined that the gaming state is a big hit, a high probability (probable change), or a time reduction, that is, the gaming state is determined to be not the normal state (S3204: No) Then, the real-time base value is calculated by the above equation (1), and the calculated real-time base value is stored as the base value of the real-time base value data 203l (S3206). By this processing, the measurement of the base value is performed in real time.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the total out number counter 203j is 60000, that is, whether or not the total out number has reached 60000 (S3207). As a result, if the total number of outs does not reach 60000 (S3207: No), the processing of S3208 to S3210 is skipped, and the processing shifts to S3211. On the other hand, if the total number of outs has reached 60,000 (S3207: Yes), the processing of S3208 to S3210 is executed, and the flow shifts to the processing of S3211.

  In the process of S3208, first, the base value data 203n is shifted to the base value data 203o before and after the previous time, the base value data 203m is shifted to the base value data 203n before the previous time, and the real time base value data 203l is shifted to the previous time. The data is shifted to the base value data 203m (S3208). As a result, the real-time base value measured when the total number of outs reaches 60000 is held as the previous base value, and thereafter, the base value is displayed on the base display device 401 as the previous base value. Further, the respective base values that have been displayed as the previous base value and the base value before the previous times are thereafter displayed on the base display device 401 as the base value before the previous times and the base value before the previous times.

  Note that each base value may be stored in a ring buffer of a FIFO (First In First Out) method. In this case, in the process of S3208, the address (ring buffer pointer) for storing the real-time base value may be updated. However, when the base value is stored in the FIFO ring buffer, if the ring buffer pointer is broken once due to some influence such as noise, the base value may be correctly stored in the RAM 203 and cannot be displayed thereafter. is there. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the area of the RAM 203 for storing the real-time base value, the previous base value, the base value before last time, and the base value before last time is fixed, and every time the total number of outs reaches 60000, By shifting the data during this period, the above-described problem that may occur when the base value is stored in the FIFO ring buffer can be avoided.

  In the process of S3208, these shift processes are executed by one LDIR instruction. The LDIR instruction enables block transfer of data only by setting the start address (HL) of the data to be transferred, the start address (DE) of the transfer destination, and the number of transfer bytes (BC). That is, data is transferred from (HL) to (DE), and both (HL) and (DE) are incremented by one, and (BC) is decremented by one. This is repeated until (BC) becomes 0. Therefore, the base value data 203o is stored at the address (AA) two times before the previous time (AA is one address of the RAM 203), the base value data 203n before the previous time is stored at the address (AA + 1), and the previous base value data 203m is stored at the address (AA + 2). ), The real-time base value data 203l is stored in the address (AA + 3), the head address (HL) of the data to be transferred is set to (AA), the transfer destination address is set to (AA + 1), The shift process in S3208 can be easily realized by setting the number of transfer bytes to 3 bytes and executing only one LDIR instruction.

  In the subsequent process of S3209, the base value and the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l are initialized to 0 (S3209). As a result, the base value is newly measured in real time until the total number of outs reaches 60000, while the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l remains unchanged until the total number of outs reaches 300. It is kept at 0. While the total number of outs is small, the measured real-time base value greatly depends on the content of the game at that time, so even if it is displayed, it becomes a meaningless base value, and it may adversely affect the judgment of wrongdoing is there. Therefore, by setting the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l to 0 while the total number of outs is 0 to 300, when displaying the real-time base value on the base display device 401, the identification segment includes the real-time base value. “BL.” Indicating the value is turned on, while “−−” is turned on for the ratio segment. Accordingly, it can be shown that the currently effective real-time base value has not been obtained because the total number of outs is small.

  In the subsequent processing of S3210, the total out number counter 203j is initialized to 0 (S3210). As a result, the total out number is again counted by the total out number counter 203j until the total out number reaches 60000.

  In the process of S3211, it is determined whether or not the value of the total out number counter 203j is 300, that is, whether or not the total out number has reached 300 (S3211). As a result, if the total number of outs has not reached 300 (S3211: No), the processing of S3212 to S3215 is skipped, and the base value calculation processing ends as it is. On the other hand, if the total number of outs has reached 300 (S3211: Yes), the process of S3212 to S3215 is executed, and then the present base value calculation process ends.

  In the process of S3212, it is determined whether or not the new startup flag 203p is on (S3212). As a result, when the new start-up flag 203p is on (S3212: Yes), it means that the pachinko machine 10 is in the new start-up period by turning on the power while operating the RAM all erasure switch. . Then, since the total number of outs has reached 300 as a result of the processing in the previous step S3211, it is time to end the new start-up period, so the new start-up flag 203p is set to off (S3213). Then, the display type counter 203q is initialized to zero (S3214). As a result, the base display device 401 thereafter switches and displays the real-time base value, the previous base value, the base value before the previous time, and the base value before the previous time every 5 seconds.

  After the process of S3214 or by the process of S3212, when it is determined that the new startup flag 203p is off (S3212: No), 1 is set to the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l. You. As a result, after the total number of outs reaches 300, by setting the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l to 1, when displaying the real-time base value on the base display device 401, the identification segment includes: While “bL.” Indicating the real-time base value is turned on, the base value stored in the real-time base value data 203l is displayed as an effective base value in the ratio segment.

  Next, referring to FIGS. 411 and 412, details of the above-described base value display processing (S3103), which is one processing of the base value processing executed by MPU 201 in main control device 110 and executed at one second intervals. Will be described. 411 and 412 are flowcharts showing the base value calculation processing (S3103).

  First, referring to FIG. 411, when the base value calculation process (S3103) is started, it is determined whether or not the new startup flag 203p is on (S3301). When the new startup flag 203p is on (S3301: Yes), it means that the pachinko machine 10 is in a new startup period by turning on the power while operating the RAM all erasure switch. Accordingly, the base display device control circuit 402 causes the identification segment of the base display device 401 to blink (or light) “88.” and the ratio segment to blink (or light) the base value of the real-time base value data 203l. (S3302). Then, the base value display processing ends.

  As described above, in the new start-up of the pachinko machine 10, in a shipping inspection or the like for checking the quality of the pachinko machine 10, there is a case where a ball is manually put into each winning opening and a prize ball is paid out. Therefore, the base value at this time is significantly different from the actual base value of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, during the new start-up period of the pachinko machine 10, the display of the base display device 401 blinks (or lights) “88.” on the identification segment and displays the real-time base value stored in the real-time base value data 203l. To display that the displayed base value is not a regular base value (valid base value) by displaying it in a special display mode different from the normal base value display, which blinks (or lights) on the ratio segment. Can be. Further, by performing the display, it can be suggested that the pachinko machine 10 is in a newly started state.

  On the other hand, as a result of the process of S3302, when the new start-up flag 203p is off (S3301: No), it is determined whether five seconds have elapsed since the display type counter 203q was updated or initialized (S3303). As a result, if 5 seconds have elapsed (S3303: Yes), the display type counter 203q is updated (S3304), and the flow shifts to the process of S3305 shown in FIG. On the other hand, if 5 seconds have not elapsed as a result of the process of S3303 (S3303: No), the process of S3304 is skipped, and the process shifts to the process of S3305 shown in FIG. 412.

  In updating the display type counter 203q in S3304, when the display type counter 203q is other than 3, 1 is added to the display type counter 203q. When the display type counter 203q is 3, the display type counter 203q is initialized to 0. By updating the display type counter 203q every 5 seconds, the type of the base value displayed on the base display device 401 is changed to a real-time base value, a previous base value, a pre-preceding base value, a pre-pre-twice base value, a real-time base value. , The last base value,... In the order of 5 seconds.

  Referring to FIG. 412, in the process of S3305, the value of display type counter 203q is determined (S3305). When the display type counter 203q is 0 (S3305: “0”), it is a period during which the real-time base value is displayed on the base display device 401. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l is 1 (S3306). If the valid data flag is 1 (S3306: Yes), “bL. Is turned on and a control signal is transmitted to the base display device control circuit 402 so as to turn on and display the base value of the real-time base value data 203l in the ratio segment (S3307). As described above, when the base value of the real-time base value data 203l is measured for the total number of outs of 300 or more, the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l is set to 1 Is set to Therefore, the real-time base value measured as the effective base value can be displayed and indicated on the base display device 401.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S3306, when the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l is 0 (S3306: No), while the “bL.” Is lit on the identification seg of the base display device 401 and the ratio seg is displayed. A control signal is transmitted to the base display device control circuit 402 so that “−−” is displayed (S3308).

  As described above, when the base value of the real-time base value data 203l is measured when the total number of outs is less than 300, it is determined that the base value is not valid, and the valid data of the real-time base value data 203l is determined. 0 is set in the flag. Accordingly, it can be shown that the currently effective real-time base value has not been obtained because the total number of outs is small.

  When the display type counter 203q is 1 as a result of the processing in S3305 (S3305: “1”), it is a period in which the previous base value is displayed on the base display device 401. Therefore, it is determined whether the valid data flag of the previous base value data 203m is 1 (S3309). If the valid data flag is 1 (S3309: Yes), the identification segment of the base display device 401 is set to "b1. Is lit, and a control signal is transmitted to the base display device control circuit 402 so that the base value of the previous base value data 203m is lit on the ratio seg (S3310). Thus, when a valid base value is stored in the previous base value data 203m, the valid previous base value can be displayed and indicated on the base display device 401.

  Also, when the total number of outs reaches 60000 and the data is shifted to the previous base value data 203m, the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l to be shifted is "1", and The valid data flag of the base value data 203m also becomes “1”. Therefore, when the total number of outs first reaches 60000 after the pachinko machine 10 is newly started up, when the previous base value is displayed on the base display device 401, the last base value is stored in the previous base value data 203m. The base value will be displayed on the ratio segment as a valid base value.

  On the other hand, as a result of the process of S3309, when the valid data flag of the previous base value data 203m is 0 (S3309: No), the identification segment of the base display device 401 is displayed with "b1." A control signal is transmitted to the base display device control circuit 402 so that “−−” is displayed (S3311). Accordingly, when a valid base value has not been obtained as the previous base value, it is possible to indicate that a valid previous base value has not been obtained by “−−” displayed in the ratio segment.

  If the display type counter 203q is 2 as a result of the processing in S3305 (S3305: “2”), it is a period in which the base value is displayed on the base display device 401 two times before. Therefore, it is determined whether the valid data flag of the base value data 203n is 1 before the last (S3312). If the valid data flag is 1 (S3312: Yes), the identification segment of the base display device 401 is set to “b2. Is lit, and a control signal is transmitted to the base display device control circuit 402 so that the base value of the base value data 203n is lit and displayed on the ratio seg two times before (S3313). In this way, when a valid base value is stored in the pre-last base value data 203n, the valid pre-last base value can be displayed and indicated on the base display device 401.

  When shifting the previous base value data 203m to the base value data 203n two times before the previous time, if the valid data flag of the previous base value data 203m is "1" (the power is turned on while operating the RAM all erase switch). After all the initialization of the RAM 203 has been executed, this corresponds to the case where the total number of outs reaches 60,000 for the second time), and the effective data flag of the base value data 203n two times before the shift becomes “1”. Accordingly, when the base value is displayed on the base display device 401 after that, the base value stored in the base value data 203n is displayed on the ratio seg as a valid base value.

  On the other hand, as a result of the process of S3312, if the valid data flag of the base value data 203n is two times before (S3312: No), “b2.” Is displayed on the identification segment of the base display device 401 while the ratio segment is displayed. A control signal is transmitted to the base display device control circuit 402 so that “−−” is displayed (S3313). Accordingly, when a valid base value is not obtained as the last-before-time base value, it is possible to indicate that a valid second-before-time base value is not obtained by “——” displayed in the ratio segment.

  If the display type counter 203q is 3 as a result of the process of S3305 (S3305: “3”), it is a period in which the base value is displayed on the base display device 401 two times before. Therefore, it is determined whether the valid data flag of the base value data 203o is two before last (S3315). If the valid data flag is 1 (S3315: Yes), the identification segment of the base display device 401 is determined. A control signal is transmitted to the base display device control circuit 402 so that "b3." Is lit and the base value of the base value data 203o is lit and displayed twice before and after the ratio seg (S3316). Thus, when a valid base value is stored in the two-last-last base value data 203o, the valid second-last base value can be displayed and indicated on the base display device 401.

  When the base value data 203n is shifted to the base value data 203o before and after the previous time, if the valid data flag of the base value data 203n before the previous time is set to “1” (the power supply is turned on while operating the RAM all erase switch). When the total number of outs reaches 60,000 for the third time after the RAM 203 has been turned on and all initialization of the RAM 203 has been performed), the effective data flag of the base value data 203o is set to “1” two times before and after the shift. ". Therefore, after that, when the base value is displayed twice before the base value on the base display device 401, the base value stored in the base value data 203o before and after the previous time is displayed on the ratio seg as a valid base value. Become.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S3315, when the valid data flag of the base value data 203o is two times before the previous one (S3315: No), “b2.” Is displayed on the identification segment of the base display device 401 while being lit. A control signal is transmitted to the base display device control circuit 402 so that "-" is lit on the ratio segment (S3317). In this way, if a valid base value is not obtained as the base value before the last time, the “−−” displayed in the ratio segment indicates that a valid base value before the time is not obtained. Can be shown.

  When any of S3307, S3308, S3310, S3311, S3313, S3314, S3316, and S3371 ends, the base value display process ends as shown in FIG.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the twentieth embodiment, the base display device 401 displays the real-time base value (hereinafter, “real-time base value”) measured in real time during the period until the total out number reaches 60,000. Base value), the previous base value measured when the total number of outs reached the last (most recent) reaches 60000, and the total out number reached 10000 before (2 times before) the previous time The base value measured two times before and the base value measured two times before when the total number of outs reaches 60,000 immediately before (two times before) two times before the predetermined number of times, Is displayed. In addition to the real-time base value, displaying the past multiple base values (previous base value, pre-previous base value, pre-previous base value) enables you to more accurately determine whether there has been fraud, Further, it is possible to predict to some extent the time at which the misconduct has occurred.

  In the twentieth embodiment, every time the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, all the segments (including the dot segments) of the seven-segment displays 401a to 401d provided in the base display device 401 immediately after the power is turned on. For a predetermined period (5 seconds in the present embodiment). This makes it possible to confirm whether all the segments can be lit normally and easily determine whether or not the display on the base display device 401 is normally performed.

  Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the twentieth embodiment can be used when the pachinko machine 10 is completely newly started up in a manufacturing factory, or when the used pachinko machine 10 is moved to another hall as a used stand. When starting up, the display on the base display device 401 until the total number of outs reaches a predetermined number (300 in this embodiment) is displayed in a special display mode different from a normal base value display. . In the new start-up of the pachinko machine 10, there is a case where a ball is manually inserted into each winning opening and a prize ball is paid out in a shipping inspection or the like for checking the quality of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the base value at this time is significantly different from the actual base value of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, when a new start-up of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the display of the base display device 401 until the total number of outs reaches a predetermined number (300 in the present embodiment) is the normal base value display. By displaying in a different special display mode, it can be shown that the base value being displayed is not a regular base value. Further, by performing the display, it can be suggested that the pachinko machine 10 is in a newly started state.

  In addition, with the same configuration as the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the sixteenth to nineteenth embodiments, the same effect as the configuration can be obtained.

<Twenty-first embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a twenty-first embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixteenth embodiment to the twentieth embodiment, the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol are preset in the main control device 110, and the jackpot probability and / or It was not possible to change the winning probability of two symbols. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the twenty-first embodiment, the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol are determined in multiple stages (in the present embodiment, the set values “1” to “6”) (6 stages). The pachinko machine 10 according to the twenty-first embodiment changes the setting value of the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol (hereinafter, referred to as a “probability setting value”) (hereinafter, referred to as a “setting change mode”) or When the probability setting value is confirmed (hereinafter, referred to as “setting confirmation mode”), the probability setting value is displayed on the base display device 401 provided in the pachinko machine 10 according to the twentieth embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 according to the twenty-first embodiment is configured to be able to display a history of errors (hereinafter, referred to as “error history”) occurring in the pachinko machine 10 on the base display device 401.

  Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-first embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 of the twentieth embodiment. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-first embodiment, the same configurations and processes as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the sixteenth to twentieth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals as those of the sixteenth to twentieth embodiments. Description is omitted.

  FIG. 413 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the twenty-first embodiment. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the twenty-first embodiment, the base display device 401 is disposed on a main board constituting the main control device 110, and as shown in FIG. It is assembled so that the display screen of the device 401 can be seen. The base value is displayed on the base display device 401 in the normal state, while the probability set value is displayed in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. The base display device 401 is also configured to display an error history.

  A setting key 501 used to change the set probability set value or to confirm the set probability set value is provided on the main board constituting the main control device 110. An error display button 502 used to display an error history is provided. The setting key 501 and the error display button 502 are provided so as to protrude from the main board through a hole provided in the board box 100, and can be operated by persons involved in the hall without opening the board box 100.

  Here, the setting key 501 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 414 (a) is a front view of the setting key 501 showing a case where the setting key 501 is in an off state, and FIG. 414 (b) is a setting key 501 showing a case where the setting key 501 is in an on state. FIG. The setting key 501 inserts a dedicated key into a keyhole provided in the setting key 501 to switch between an OFF side indicated by “OFF” and an ON side indicated by “ON”. It is configured to be rotatable. The setting key 501 is turned off when it is located on the off side, and turned on when it is located on the warm side.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the twenty-first embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the pachinko machine is operated according to the states of the RAM erase switch 122, the setting key 501, and the door open switch (not shown). The startup mode of the machine 10 is determined. The door opening switch is a switch that detects that the inner frame 12 has been unlocked and opened (the door has been opened).

  FIG. 47 shows a start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10, and a RAM erasing switch 122, a setting key 501, and a door open switch when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on to start up in the start-up mode for each start-up mode. (Not shown).

  As the start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10, four modes of a normal mode, a RAM clear mode, a setting change mode, and a setting confirmation mode are prepared. The RAM clear mode is a mode for erasing (clearing) the data stored in the RAM 203 in order to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state. The setting change mode is a mode for changing the set probability set value. The setting confirmation mode is a mode for confirming the set probability set value.

  The normal mode is a startup mode other than the RAM clear mode, the setting change mode, and the setting confirmation mode. When the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203, or when the data stored in the RAM 203 is damaged. This is a mode for executing various start-up processes while retaining the data stored in the RAM 203 and restarting the game of the pachinko machine 10 from the state before the power-off.

  Then, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on without turning on the RAM erasing switch 122 and with the setting key 501 kept in the off state, the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the normal mode. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on by turning on the RAM erasing switch 122 with the setting key 501 kept in the off state, the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the RAM clear mode.

  On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the setting key 501 is turned on and the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the setting change mode on condition that the door opening switch is on. . When the setting key 501 is turned on and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the RAM erasing switch 122 is turned off, the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the setting confirmation mode on condition that the door opening switch is on.

  In this way, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, if the setting key 501 is turned off, the person in charge of the hall, etc., depending on whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on, can turn on the pachinko machine 10. As the start-up mode, it is possible to select a RAM clear mode or a normal mode which is a start-up mode not related to the probability setting value.

  On the other hand, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, if the setting key 501 is turned on after the inner frame 12 is unlocked and opened, the person involved in the hall can turn on the RAM erase switch 122 or not. Depending on whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is started, it is possible to select between a setting change mode related to the probability setting value and a setting confirmation mode.

  That is, a startup mode irrelevant to the probability set value and a startup mode irrelevant to the probability set value can be selected according to whether the setting key 501 is turned off or on. When the startup mode is not related to the probability set value, it is possible to select whether the startup mode is the RAM clear mode or the normal mode depending on whether the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on. When setting the startup mode related to the probability set value, it is possible to select whether the startup mode is the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode depending on whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on.

  Here, when the probability set value is changed, the jackpot probability and / or the second symbol hit probability in the game are changed. Therefore, when the game is continued while taking over the game state before the power is turned off, the pachinko machine 10 May not be able to exhibit predetermined game performance. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 erases (clears) the data stored in the RAM 203 when the probability set value is changed in the setting change mode. On the other hand, the setting confirmation mode is a start-up mode in which the probability setting value is merely confirmed, so that the data stored in the RAM 203 is retained (not cleared) so that the game can be continued while taking over the game state before the power is turned off. .

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when starting up the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode in which the data in the RAM 203 is cleared, the inner frame 12 is unlocked and opened, and the RAM is erased while the setting key 501 is turned on. When the pachinko machine 10 is turned on by turning on the switch 122 and the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting check mode in which the data in the RAM 203 is not cleared, the inner frame 12 is unlocked and opened before setting. The power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the key 501 is turned on and the RAM erase switch 122 is turned off.

  As described above, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode related to the probability setting value, the setting key 501 is turned on before the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. When the pachinko machine 10 is started in the RAM clear mode or the setting change mode for clearing the data stored in the RAM 203, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while pressing (turning on) the RAM erase switch 122. That is, if the person involved in the hall understands the meaning of each start-up mode, he can easily understand what kind of operation is required as an operation on the pachinko machine 10 necessary for the start-up mode to be started up.

  In addition, in order to start up the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, a dedicated key that can be inserted into the setting key 501 is required, and the key is managed by the hole. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from arbitrarily checking the probability set value and searching for the pachinko machine 10 with the large jackpot probability and / or the hit probability being high, or preventing the player from changing the probability set value to the high probability without permission. Further, since the RAM erasing switch 122 is normally provided at a position where the player does not easily touch it, it is possible to prevent the player from changing the probability setting value to a high probability without permission at this point.

  Further, even when the switch or the like to be operated at the same time is activated in the setting operation mode, there are two switches and the switch can be sufficiently operated with both hands, so that operability is good. As described above, the person in charge of the hall or the like can easily and easily select the start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10 by properly using the on / off state of the RAM erase switch 122 and the setting key 501.

  In this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the door opening switch is turned on when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, that is, the inner frame 12 is opened. It is a condition.

  This is because, in order to change or check the probability set value, it is necessary for a person related to the hall or the like to visually recognize the probability set value displayed on the base display device 401 on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, so that the inner frame is required. 12 is required to be open. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on without opening the inner frame 12 even though the setting key 501 is on, the setting key 501 is not started in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. As in the case of the off state, the pachinko machine 10 is started in the normal mode if the RAM erasing switch 122 is off, and the pachinko machine 10 is started in the RAM clear mode if the RAM erasing switch 122 is on. As a result, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, and the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, even though the inner frame 12 is closed while the setting key 501 is in the on state. It can be suppressed that it does not start. Also, in order to open the inner frame 12, a dedicated key managed by the hall side is required. Therefore, the player freely opens the inner frame 12 and checks the probability set value to search for the pachinko machine 10 having the high jackpot probability and / or the hit probability, or changes the probability set value to the high probability without permission. Can be suppressed.

  When the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the condition that the door opening switch is turned on when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, that is, that the inner frame 12 is opened is not necessarily a condition. It is not necessary. That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the setting key 501 is turned on and the RAM erasing switch 122 is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 is set in the setting change mode regardless of whether the door opening switch is on. May be launched. When the setting key 501 is turned on and the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the RAM erasing switch 122 turned off, the pachinko machine 10 is set in the setting check mode regardless of whether the door opening switch is on or not. May be launched.

  Now, the pachinko machine 10 prepares a setting change mode and a setting confirmation mode for changing or confirming the probability set value as one of the start-up modes. However, in the present embodiment, the change and confirmation of the probability set value are performed. Is enabled only when the pachinko machine 10 is started (when the power is turned on) in the setting check mode, and the probability set value cannot be checked while the game is in progress. This is for the following reason.

  That is, the display of the accessory ratio such as the display of the base value by the base display device 401, the display of the accessory ratio, and the display of the value indicating the game performance, the game state, and the like enable the fraudulent act to be detected early. Therefore, in principle, it must be displayed during the game. Therefore, at least the probability set value cannot be displayed while the game is being played by the player.

  If the setting key 501 is turned on so that the display of the probability setting value can be performed other than when the pachinko machine 10 is started up, the probability setting value can be displayed even during the game being played by the player. For example, the game may be stopped. However, with the main control device 110, the variation time can be stopped along with stopping the game, but the variation effect may be continuously performed on the third symbol display device 81. A mismatch may occur between the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114.

  When the setting key 501 is turned on so that the probability setting value can be displayed at times other than when the pachinko machine 10 is started up, the probability setting value is displayed during the game being played by the player. Although it is conceivable that the game can be continued as it is and the probability set value can be confirmed on the base display device 401, it is necessary to open the inner frame 12 in order to confirm the display on the base display device 401. Therefore, it is substantially difficult for the player to continue the game.

  It is also conceivable that after the setting key 501 is turned on, the probability setting value is displayed on the base display device 401 after all the variable effects including the jackpot and the suspended portion have been completed. However, many fluctuation effects include those with a long fluctuation time, some of which last for about 5 minutes. In addition, the normal symbol fluctuation time is also set to be long when the gaming state is normal, and it takes a lot of time until all the holdings are exhausted, so it is difficult to wait until the probability set value is displayed.

  Therefore, in the present pachinko machine 10, when it is desired to change or check the probability set value, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is once turned off, the setting key 501 is turned on, and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on again. Thereby, the probability setting value can be displayed on the base display device 401 in a state where the game is not performed in the pachinko machine 10, and the probability setting value can be surely changed or confirmed by the person related to the hall or the like. Further, once the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the state before the power is turned off is backed up in the RAM 203, and the startup processing is performed without clearing the backed up state. Even if the set value is confirmed, the game can be restarted from the state before the power was turned off.

  In addition, by restricting the change or confirmation of the probability set value when the pachinko machine 10 is started up, it is possible to suppress a player from checking or changing the probability set value without permission at normal times.

  FIG. 416 (a) is a diagram showing the role of the RAM erase switch 122 and the setting key 501 in the setting change mode. FIG. 416 (b) is a diagram showing the role of the setting key 501 in the setting confirmation mode.

  As shown in FIG. 416 (a), when the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on in the setting change mode, the probability set value displayed on the base display device 401 is updated. When the setting key 501 is turned off in the setting change mode, the probability setting value displayed on the base display device 401 at that time is determined as the probability setting value in the pachinko machine 10.

  In the present embodiment, “1” to “6” can be set as the probability setting values, and the jackpot random number value and / or the second probability setting value are set for each of the probability setting values (“1” to “6”). The winning random number value of the symbol is stored in the ROM 202 in advance. The jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol at the probability set value are determined by the number of jackpot random numbers and / or the number of hit random numbers of the second symbol determined for each probability set value. In this pachinko machine 10, the smaller the probability set value (closer to 1), the lower the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol, and the larger the probability set value (closer to 6), the larger the jackpot probability and / or Alternatively, the big random number value and / or the second random number value of the second symbol are determined for each probability setting value so that the winning probability of the second symbol is high.

  Note that the jackpot random number value and / or the hit random number value of the second symbol are fixed, and the range and / or range of random numbers generated for performing the jackpot lottery for each probability setting value (“1” to “6”) Alternatively, a range of random numbers to be generated for performing the second symbol winning lottery may be stored in the RAM 203 in advance. The jackpot probability and / or the second symbol hit probability at the probability set value are determined by the range of the jackpot random number and / or the range of the hit random number of the second symbol set for each probability set value.

  In the setting change mode, each time the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on, the probability set value displayed on the base display device 401 is incremented by one. However, when the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on when the probability set value displayed on the base display device 401 is “6”, the probability set value displayed on the base display device 401 is updated to “1”. You. In other words, each time the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed in the setting change mode, the probability setting value displayed on the base display device 401 loops while adding the range of “1” to “6” by one.

  When the setting key 501 is turned off in the setting change mode, the probability set value displayed on the base display device 401 at that time is determined as the probability set value of the pachinko machine 10. Then, after the data in the RAM 203 is cleared, the pachinko machine 10 performs game control with the determined probability set value thereafter, and displays the base value on the base display device 401.

  In the setting confirmation mode, as shown in FIG. 416 (b), when the setting key 501 is turned off, the setting confirmation mode ends, and the base value is displayed instead of the probability setting value displayed on the base display device 401. Is displayed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 417, the display contents of the probability set value to be displayed on the base display device 401 in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode will be described. FIG. 417 is a schematic diagram schematically showing various examples of display contents of the base display device 401 in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, and FIG. 417 (a) is an example thereof.

  In the example shown in FIG. 417 (a), in the case of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, all the segments of the seven-segment displays 401a and 401b constituting the identification segment of the base display device 401 are turned off. Further, among the seven-segment displays 401c and 401d constituting the ratio segment of the base display device 401, all the segments of the left-seven-segment display 401c are turned off, and only the right-seventh-segment display 401d is used. The probability setting values (1 to 6) are displayed.

  As described in the twentieth embodiment, when the base value is displayed on the base display device 401, characters (bL., B1,..., Etc.) for identifying the type of the base value displayed in the ratio seg are included in the identification segment. ) Is displayed, in the example shown in FIG. 417 (a), in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, all segments of the identification segment are turned off. This makes it possible to clearly differentiate the display state between displaying the base value and displaying the probability set value on the base display device 401. It is possible to make the user know which information is the base value or the probability setting value. When displaying the base value on the base display device 401, the base value is displayed in two digits in the ratio segment. That is, when the base value is, for example, “6”, the ratio segment is displayed as “06”. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 417 (a), in the case of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the probability set value is displayed using only the 7-segment display 401d on the right side of the ratio segment and the probability set value on the left side is displayed. Since all the segments of the segment display 401c are turned off, even if the identification seg is broken and cannot be turned on, see that all the segments of the 7-segment display 401c on the left side of the ratio seg are turned off. Thus, it is possible to make it clear to the persons involved in the hall and the like that the information displayed on the base display device 401 is the probability set value.

  FIG. 417 (b) is a schematic diagram showing another example of display contents of the base display device 401 in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. In the example shown in FIG. 417 (b), in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, only the middle horizontal bar segment is lit on the 7-segment displays 401a and 401b constituting the identification segment of the base display device 401, Turn off other segments. That is, “−−” is displayed on the identification segment. Also, among the seven-segment displays 401c and 401d constituting the ratio segment of the base display device 401, also in the left-side seven-segment display 401c, only the middle horizontal bar segment is turned on, and the other segments are turned off. That is, “−” is also displayed on the segment. Then, the probability setting values (1 to 6) are displayed using only the 7-segment display 401d on the right side of the ratio segment.

  This also makes it possible to clearly differentiate the display state of the identification segment between the case where the base value is displayed on the base display device 401 and the case where the probability set value is displayed. It is possible to grasp whether the information displayed in 401 is a base value or a probability setting value. Further, in the case of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the probability set value is displayed using only the 7-segment display 401d on the right side of the ratio seg, and "-" is displayed on the 7-segment display 401c on the left side. Therefore, even if the identification seg is broken and cannot be turned on, looking at the display of the 7-segment display 401c on the left side of the ratio seg, it is confirmed that the information displayed on the base display device 401 is the probability set value. It is possible to make it clear to the persons involved in the hall etc.

  FIG. 417 (c-1) is a schematic diagram showing another example of display contents of the base display device 401 in the setting change mode, and FIG. 417 (c-2) is a display of the base display device 401 in the setting confirmation mode. It is the schematic diagram which showed another example of the content. In this example, the display contents are changed between the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Specifically, in the identification segment, as in FIG. 417 (a), all the segments of the seven-segment displays 401a and 401b that constitute the identification segment are turned off. On the other hand, the ratio segment displays “H” indicating the setting change mode or “C” indicating the setting confirmation mode on the left 7-segment display 401c among the 7-segment displays 401c and 401d constituting the ratio segment. , The probability set values (1 to 6) are displayed on the right 7-segment display 401d.

  This also makes it possible to clearly differentiate the display state of the identification segment between the case where the base value is displayed on the base display device 401 and the case where the probability set value is displayed. It is possible to grasp whether the information displayed in 401 is a base value or a probability setting value.

  When displaying the base value on the base display device 401, the base value is displayed in two digits in the ratio segment. That is, when the base value is, for example, “6”, the ratio segment is displayed as “06”. On the other hand, in the examples shown in FIGS. 417 (c-1) and (c-2), in the case of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the probability setting is performed using only the 7-segment display 401d on the right side of the ratio segment. The value is displayed, and “H” is displayed in the setting change mode and “C” is displayed in the setting confirmation mode on the left 7-segment display 401c. As a result, even if the identification segment is broken and cannot be turned on, “H” or “C” different from the number is displayed on the 7-segment display 401c on the left side of the ratio segment, so that the base display device 401 is displayed. Can be clearly grasped by the person in charge of the hall or the like that the information displayed in is displayed as the probability set value.

  In the setting change mode and the setting check mode, different display contents are displayed on the 7-segment display 401c on the left side of the ratio seg to clearly indicate whether the current mode is the setting change mode or the setting check mode. be able to.

  FIG. 417 (d-1) is a schematic diagram showing another example of the display content of the base display device 401 in the setting change mode, and FIG. 417 (d-2) is a display of the base display device 401 in the setting confirmation mode. It is the schematic diagram which showed another example of the content. Also in this example, as in FIGS. 417 (c-1) and (c-2), the display contents are changed between the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Specifically, in the seven-segment displays 401a and 401b constituting the identification seg, only the middle horizontal bar segment is turned on, and the other segments are turned off, as in FIG. 417 (b). That is, “−−” is displayed on the identification segment. On the other hand, in the ratio seg, the 7-segment displays 401c and 401d constituting the ratio seg change the setting change mode on the left 7-segment display 401c similarly to FIGS. 417 (c-1) and (c-2). "H" or "C" indicating the setting confirmation mode is displayed, and the probability set values (1 to 6) are displayed on the right 7-segment display 401d.

  This also makes it possible to clearly differentiate the display state of the identification segment between the case where the base value is displayed on the base display device 401 and the case where the probability set value is displayed. It is possible to grasp whether the information displayed in 401 is a base value or a probability setting value. Also, even if the identification segment is broken and cannot be turned on, “H” or “C” different from the number is displayed on the 7-segment display 401c on the left side of the ratio segment, so that the base display device 401 is displayed. The fact that the displayed information is the probability set value can be clearly grasped by the person involved in the hall or the like. In the setting change mode and the setting check mode, different display contents are displayed on the 7-segment display 401c on the left side of the ratio seg to clearly indicate whether the current mode is the setting change mode or the setting check mode. be able to.

  FIG. 417 (e-1) is a schematic diagram showing another example of the display content of the base display device 401 in the setting change mode, and FIG. 417 (e-2) is a display of the base display device 401 in the setting confirmation mode. It is the schematic diagram which showed another example of the content. Also in this example, the display contents are changed between the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. However, the display contents are changed by the identification segment, so that the display contents shown in FIGS. 417 (c-1) and (c-2) are changed. This is different from the example and the examples in FIGS. 417 (d-1) and (d-2). Specifically, in the 7-segment displays 401a and 401b constituting the identification segment, "SH." Is displayed in the setting change mode, and "SC." Is displayed in the setting confirmation mode. On the other hand, in the ratio segment, all the segments of the left seven-segment display 401c are turned off, and the probability set values (1 to 6) are displayed using only the right seven-segment display 401d.

  As described above, when the base value is displayed on the base display device 401, characters (bL., B1,..., Etc.) for identifying the type of the base value displayed in the ratio seg are displayed in the identification segment. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 417 (a), “SH.” Indicating the setting change mode is displayed in the case of the setting change mode, and “SC.” Indicating the setting check mode is displayed in the case of the setting check mode. . As described above, by displaying different display contents in the case where the base value is displayed as the display contents displayed in the identification segment and in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, both can be clearly differentiated. Therefore, at a glance, it is possible to grasp whether the information displayed on the base display device 401 is a base value or a probability setting value. Further, by displaying different display contents on the identification segment in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, it is possible to clearly indicate whether the current mode is the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  When the base value is displayed on the base display device 401, the base value is displayed in two digits in the ratio segment, and in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, a 7-segment display on the right side of the ratio segment is displayed. The probability set value is displayed using only 401d, and all the segments of the left 7-segment display 401c are turned off. Therefore, even if the identification segment is broken and cannot be turned on, the 7-segment display on the left side of the ratio seg is displayed. By seeing that all the segments of the segment display 401c are turned off, it is clear to the persons involved in the hall and the like that the information displayed on the base display device 401 is at least a probability set value instead of a base value. It can be grasped.

  Returning to FIG. 413, the description will be continued. The error display button 502 is a button for displaying an error history on the base display device 401. As described above, the base display device 401 can display an error history that is a history of errors that have occurred in the pachinko machine 10. The display of the error history is displayed on the base display device 401 only while the error display button 502 is pressed. That is, the base value is continuously displayed on the base display device 401 unless the error display button 502 is pressed.

  An improper operation such as applying a shock to the pachinko machine 10 or bringing a magnet closer to change the flow direction of the ball to cause the ball to enter various winning openings, thereby intentionally obtaining a prize ball or performing a jackpot lottery. There is a case where an act or a fraudulent act of letting a ball pass through the through gate 67 and intentionally performing a lottery for a normal symbol is performed. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to detect an impact or to detect the approach of a magnet, and when these are detected, stop the game as a serious error. At this time, instead of displaying the error history on the base display device 401, the base value is continuously displayed.

  If it is configured to display the type of error on the base display device 401 when a serious error is detected, if a wrongdoing is performed so that the base value or the like is changed, the base display device 401 In order to hide the base value displayed on the pachinko machine, a serious error is caused by intentionally applying an impact to the pachinko machine 10 or bringing a magnet close to the pachinko machine 10, causing the base display device 401 to display the error type, and the base value is not displayed. It is conceivable to be driven.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, even if a serious error is detected, a person who has committed an illegal act such as changing the base value or the like by continuing to display the base value on the base display device 401, The display of the base value after the cheating can not be hidden, and the cheating on the base value can be surely found.

  Then, in the pachinko machine 10, when the error display button 502 is pressed, the error history is displayed on the base display device 401 only during the pressing operation. From the displayed error history, the person in charge of the hall or the like can grasp what kind of error has occurred in the pachinko machine 10. When the pressing operation of the error display button 502 is released, the base value is displayed on the base display device 401 again.

  Note that the error history may display only the type of error that occurred closest in time. Further, the error type may be displayed up to a plurality of times (for example, four times) from the error including the error occurring closest in time. In the case of displaying the error types for a plurality of times at the maximum, the error occurrence time is displayed on the base display device 401 by a predetermined time in order from the closest to the current time. When the error display button 502 is pressed when no error occurs in the pachinko machine 10 (or when no error record remains), an error message is displayed while the pressing operation is being performed. A display indicating that there is no record may be displayed on the base display device 401, or the base value may be continuously displayed.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, while the error display button 502 is being pressed, an error history is displayed on the base display device 401, but when the base value is displayed on the base display device 401, the error display is performed. When the button 502 is pressed once, an error history is displayed on the base display device 401. When the error display button 502 is pressed once while the error history is displayed on the base display device 401, the error is displayed on the base display device 401. The base value may be configured to be displayed again.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 418, display contents when an error history is displayed on the base display device 401 will be described. FIG. 418 is a schematic diagram schematically showing various examples of display contents when an error history is displayed on the base display device 401, and FIG. 418 (a) is an example thereof.

  In the example shown in FIG. 418 (a), when displaying the error history on the base display device 401, all the segments of the seven-segment displays 401a and 401b constituting the identification segment of the base display device 401 are turned off. Further, among the seven-segment displays 401c and 401d constituting the ratio segment of the base display device 401, "E" indicating that an error history is to be displayed is displayed on the left-hand seven-segment display 401c, and the seven-segment display on the right is displayed. The error type is numerically displayed using only the device 401d. For example, if an impact detection error occurs, “1” is displayed as an error type, and if a magnet detection error occurs, “2” is displayed as an error type.

  As described in the twentieth embodiment, when the base value is displayed on the base display device 401, characters (bL., B1,..., Etc.) for identifying the type of the base value displayed in the ratio seg are included in the identification segment. ) Is displayed, in the example shown in FIG. 417 (a), in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, all segments of the identification segment are turned off. This makes it possible to clearly differentiate the display state between the case where the base value is displayed on the base display device 401 and the case where the error history is displayed, so that the display state is displayed on the base display device 401 at a glance. It is possible to make the user know whether the information is a base value or an error history. When displaying the base value on the base display device 401, the base value is displayed in two digits in the ratio segment. That is, when the base value is, for example, “6”, the ratio segment is displayed as “06”. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 418 (a), when displaying the error history on the base display device 401, the probability set value is displayed using only the 7-segment display 401d on the right side of the ratio segment and the left side is displayed. "E" indicating the display of the error history is displayed on the 7-segment display 401c, so that even if the identification segment is broken and cannot be turned on, the information displayed on the base display device 401 is the error history. This can be clearly understood by persons involved in the hall and the like.

  Further, even when the display contents of the base display device 401 in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are as shown in FIG. 417 (a), FIG. 417 (c-1), and (c-2), the error history is based on the error history. When displaying on the display device 401, “E” indicating the display of the error history is displayed on the left 7-segment display 401c, so that the base display device 401 displays the probability set value and displays the error history. In some cases, the display state can be clearly differentiated, and at a glance, it is possible to grasp whether the information displayed on the base display device 401 is a probability setting value or an error history. it can.

  417 (b), 417 (d-1), (d-2), 417 (e-1), and (e-) are displayed on the base display device 401 in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. In the case of 2), the display in the identification segment can be clearly differentiated between the case where the probability set value is displayed and the case where the error history is displayed, and is displayed on the base display device 401 at a glance. It can be grasped whether the information is a probability set value or an error history. When displaying the error history on the base display device 401, "E" indicating the display of the error history is displayed on the left 7-segment display 401c. Also, it is possible to make it clear to the persons involved in the halls and the like that the information displayed on the base display device 401 is an error history.

  FIG. 418 (b) is a schematic diagram showing another example of the display contents when displaying the error history on the base display device 401. In the example shown in FIG. 418 (b), when displaying the error history on the base display device 401, only the middle horizontal bar segment is lit on the seven-segment displays 401a and 401b constituting the identification segment of the base display device 401. And turn off the other segments. That is, “−−” is displayed on the identification segment. Further, among the seven-segment displays 401c and 401d constituting the ratio segment of the base display device 401, "E" indicating that an error history is to be displayed is displayed on the left-hand seven-segment display 401c, and the seven-segment display on the right is displayed. The error type is displayed as a numerical value in the same manner as in FIG.

  This also makes it possible to clearly differentiate the display state between the case where the base value is displayed on the base display device 401 and the case where the error history is displayed. It is possible to make the user know whether the information is a base value or an error history. When displaying the error history on the base display device 401, the base history is displayed using only the 7-segment display 401d on the right side of the ratio seg, and the display of the error history is shown on the 7-segment display 401c on the left side. Since “E” is displayed, even if the identification seg is broken and cannot be turned on, the information displayed on the base display device 401 is displayed by looking at the display of the 7-segment display 401c on the left side of the ratio seg. The probability set value can be clearly understood by the hall-related persons and the like.

  Further, even when the display contents of the base display device 401 in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are as shown in FIG. 417 (b), FIG. When displaying on the display device 401, “E” indicating the display of the error history is displayed on the left 7-segment display 401c, so that the base display device 401 displays the probability set value and displays the error history. In some cases, the display state can be clearly differentiated, and at a glance, it is possible to grasp whether the information displayed on the base display device 401 is a probability setting value or an error history. it can.

  417 (a), 417 (c-1), (c-2), 417 (e-1), and (e-) are displayed on the base display device 401 in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. In the case of 2), the display in the identification segment can be clearly differentiated between the case where the probability set value is displayed and the case where the error history is displayed, and is displayed on the base display device 401 at a glance. It can be grasped whether the information is a probability set value or an error history. When displaying the error history on the base display device 401, "E" indicating the display of the error history is displayed on the left 7-segment display 401c. Also, it is possible to make it clear to the persons involved in the halls and the like that the information displayed on the base display device 401 is an error history.

  FIG. 418 (c-1) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents when an error type that occurred closest in time is displayed as an error history, and FIG. 418 (c-2) shows an error history. FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents when displaying an error type that has occurred second closest in time. In the example of FIGS. 418 (c-1) and (c-2), “E” indicating the display of the error history is displayed on the left 7-segment display 401a among the 7-segment displays 401a and 401b constituting the identification segment. Is displayed on the right side of the 7-segment display 401b, and a numerical value indicating how close the error type to be displayed is related to the error that occurred in time is shown. In other words, when the identification segment is displayed as “E1.”, It indicates that the error type of the error that occurred closest in time is displayed, and when the identification segment is displayed as “E2.” Indicates that the error type of the error that occurred second closest is displayed. On the other hand, in the ratio segment, all the segments of the left 7-segment display 401c are turned off, and the error type is displayed using only the right 7-segment display 401d.

  In this way, as the display contents displayed on the identification segment, when displaying the base value, when displaying the probability set value, and when displaying the error history, the display contents are different from each other, so Can be differentiated. Therefore, at a glance, it is possible to grasp whether the information displayed on the base display device 401 is a base value, a probability setting value, or an error history. Also, in the identification segment, by displaying a numerical value indicating how close the error type to be displayed is related to an error that occurred in time, the displayed error type is close to what time in time. It can clearly indicate whether the error is related to the error that has occurred.

  When the base value is displayed on the base display device 401, the base value is displayed in two digits in the ratio segment, and when the error history is displayed on the base display device 401, the seven segments on the right side of the ratio segment are displayed. The error type is displayed using only the display 401d, and all the segments of the left 7-segment display 401c are turned off. Therefore, even if the identification segment is broken and cannot be turned on, the left segment of the ratio seg is not displayed. By seeing that all the segments of the 7-segment display 401c are turned off, it is possible to make it clear to the persons involved in the hall or the like that the information displayed on the base display device 401 is not at least the base value. it can. When the pachinko machine 10 is not started up or when the error display button 502 is depressed, the information displayed on the base display device 401 is an error history. Can be easily grasped.

  Next, referring to FIG. 419, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 indicates that the base display device 401 is displaying the probability set value in the setting change mode (hereinafter, referred to as “display during setting change”). The display mode shown and the display mode showing that the probability set value is displayed in the setting check mode (hereinafter, referred to as “display during setting check”) will be described.

  First, FIG. 419 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37. A plurality of LEDs 37a are provided as described above in the description of the sixteenth embodiment. Depending on the lighting state of the plurality of LEDs 37a, a fluctuation display is performed, a pattern according to the result of the lottery is displayed after the fluctuation display, and a holding series is displayed. Or show. The LED 37a includes seven round number notification LEDs 37a1 (first round number notification LED to seventh round number notification LED) for notifying the maximum number of rounds in the case of a big hit when a big hit occurs.

  The pachinko machine 10 uses the round number notification LED 37a1 to light the round number notification LED 37a1 in a lighting pattern different from the maximum round number notification, so that the setting change display is being performed or the setting check is being performed. Notify that display is being performed.

  FIG. 419 (b) shows a lighting pattern for notifying that the maximum number of rounds is 2, a lighting pattern for notifying that the maximum number of rounds is 15, and a setting change in the round number notification LED 37a1. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a lighting pattern when notifying that a display is being performed, and a lighting pattern when notifying that a display is indicating a setting being confirmed.

  The lighting pattern of the round number notification LED 37a1 when notifying that the maximum number of rounds is 2 is as follows: the first round number notification LED is “off”, the second round number notification LED is “off”, and the third round number notification LED. Is “off”, the fourth round number notification LED is “off”, the fifth round number notification LED is “on”, the sixth round number notification LED is “on”, and the seventh round number notification LED is “on”. .

  The lighting pattern of the round number notification LED 37a1 when notifying that the maximum number of rounds is 15 is as follows: the first round number notification LED is “on”, the second round number notification LED is “on”, and the third round number notification LED. Is “ON”, the fourth round number notification LED is “ON”, the fifth round number notification LED is “OFF”, the sixth round number notification LED is “OFF”, and the seventh round number notification LED is “OFF”. .

  The lighting pattern of the round number notification LED 37a1 when notifying that the setting change display is being performed is as follows: the first round number notification LED is “on”, the second round number notification LED is “off”, and the third round number notification LED is “On”, the fourth round number notification LED is “On”, the fifth round number notification LED is “On”, the sixth round number notification LED is “Off”, and the seventh round number notification LED is “On”.

  The lighting pattern of the round number notification LED 37a1 when notifying that the display is during the setting confirmation display is as follows: the first round number notification LED is “on”, the second round number notification LED is “off”, and the third round number notification LED is “On”, the fourth round number notification LED is “Off”, the fifth round number notification LED is “On”, the sixth round number notification LED is “Off”, and the seventh round number notification LED is “On”.

  In the present embodiment, the round number notification LED 37a1 is used to not only notify the maximum number of rounds at the time of the big hit, but also to display the setting change or confirm the setting with a lighting pattern different from the lighting pattern used for the notification. Although the case of notifying that the display is being performed has been described, the LED other than the round number notification LED 37a1, such as the LED for notifying the big hit symbol and the LED for notifying the hit symbol, or the entire LED 37a, Using a lighting pattern that is not used in the notification, the fact that the setting change display or the setting check display is being performed may be notified. Accordingly, the setting change display or the setting confirmation display can be notified on the first symbol display device 37 only by software control without changing the hardware configuration of the first symbol display device 37.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the twenty-first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 420 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. The difference between the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-first embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 of the twentieth embodiment is that the setting key 501 and the error display button 502 are connected to the input / output port 205 of the main controller 110. The point is that the impact detection sensor 503 and the magnetic sensor 504 are connected to the input / output port 215 of the payout control device 111. Also, the point that an error detection signal is output from the payout control device 111 to the main control device 110 is different from the pachinko machine 10 of the twentieth embodiment.

  The setting key 501 outputs to the main control device 110 a signal indicating whether it is in the off state or the on state. Main controller 110 grasps the state of setting key 501 during the startup process executed when the power is turned on, and is output from RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided with RAM erase switch 122. The startup mode is determined based on the conditions shown in FIG. 415 by grasping the contents of the RAM erasing signal SG2 and the signal output from the door open switch.

  Error display button 502 outputs a signal indicating the presence or absence of a pressing operation to main controller 110. Main controller 110 determines whether or not error display button 502 has been pressed based on a signal output from error display button 502, and displays an error history on base display device 401 while the button is pressed.

  The impact detection sensor 503 is a sensor for detecting that an impact has been applied to the pachinko machine 10. The magnetic sensor 504 is a sensor for detecting that a magnet has approached the pachinko machine 10.

  When the impact detection sensor 503 detects that an impact has been applied to the pachinko machine 10, the payout control device 111 applies an impact to the pachinko machine 10 by a fraudulent person, and the flowing direction of the ball is illegally changed. To determine that a serious error has occurred, instruct the firing control device 112 to stop firing the ball, and notify the main control device 110 of the occurrence of the error. Outputs an error detection signal.

  Further, when the magnetic sensor 504 detects that the magnet has approached the pachinko machine 10, the payout control device 111 causes the magnet to approach the pachinko machine 10 by an illegal actor and illegally changes the flowing direction of the ball. In order to judge that there is a possibility that the error has occurred, instruct the firing control device 112 to stop firing the ball as a serious error occurrence, and notify the main control device 110 of the occurrence of the error. Output an error detection signal.

  When receiving the error detection signal from the payout control device 111, the main control device 110 stops the progress of the game. Thus, when there is a possibility that a serious error has occurred, the game in the pachinko machine 10 can be stopped. The main controller 110 also determines the type of error (shock detection error or magnet detection error) notified by the error detection signal received from the payout controller 111 in the error data 203t of the RAM 203 described later (see FIG. 421). ). When the error display button 502 is pressed, an error history is displayed on the base display device 401 based on the error type stored in the error data 203t.

  FIG. 421 is a schematic diagram schematically showing data stored in the external work area 203y1 of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. The outer work area 203y1 stores at least the base value data 203r, the accessory ratio data 203s, and the error data 203t.

  The base value data 203r is data necessary for calculating the base value and displaying the calculated base value on the base display device 401. For example, the total out number counter shown in FIG. 203j, a low-probability payout number counter 203k, real-time base value data 203l, previous base value data 203m, pre-last base value data 203n, pre-last base value data 203o, new start-up flag 203p, and the like.

  The accessory ratio data 203s is data necessary to calculate the accessory ratio and to display the calculated accessory ratio on the base display device 401. For example, the first counter 263a illustrated in FIG. The first two counters 263b, the first one counter 263c, the second one counter 263d, the special winning opening counter 263e, the out counter 263f, the data corresponding to the bonus ratio data 264a, the continuous bonus ratio data 264b or similar data. .

  The error data 203t is data indicating an error type of an error that has occurred in the pachinko machine 10. When an error detection signal is received from the payout control device 111, the error type indicated by the error detection signal is stored as error data 203t. When the error display button 502 is pressed, an error history is displayed on the base display device 401 based on the error type stored in the error data 203t.

  Here, when the error history displayed on the base display device 401 is only the error type that occurred closest in time, only the latest error type is always stored in the error data 203t. Specifically, upon receiving the error detection signal from the payout control device 111, the main control device 110 overwrites the error data 203t with the error type indicated by the error detection signal. As a result, only the latest error type is always stored in the base display device 401, and only the most recent error type is displayed in the error history displayed on the base display device 401.

  On the other hand, when the error history displayed on the base display device 401 includes a plurality of (for example, four) error types up to a plurality of times (for example, four times) retroactive to the error, including the error that occurred closest in time. In the error data 203t, the occurrence time is stored a plurality of times in ascending order from the current time.

  For example, the error data 203t indicates that the error type that occurred closest in time is stored in the error data 203t such that four error types are stored in order from the closest occurrence to the current time. First error type data to be stored, second error type data to store an error type that occurred second closest in time, and third error type to store an error type that occurred third closest in time Data and fourth error type data that stores an error type that has occurred fourth closest in time. When receiving the error detection signal from the payout control device 111, the main control device 110 shifts the third error type data to the fourth error type data, shifts the second error type data to the third error type data, The one error type data is shifted to the second error type data, and the error type indicated by the received error detection signal is stored as the first error type data. As a result, four types of errors are stored in the error data 203t in order from the closest occurrence to the current time, and the base display device 401 includes the error that occurred closest in time. In addition, error types for a plurality of times (for example, four times) are displayed at most retroactively from the error. In this case, if the address of each error type data is assigned so that the shift processing of each error type data can be performed by one LDIR instruction, the shift processing can be performed by only one LDIR instruction. .

  Note that the error history displayed on the base display device 401 includes a plurality of (for example, four) error types up to a plurality of times (for example, four times) retroactive to the error, including the error that occurred closest in time. The error data 203t may be constituted by a ring buffer of a FIFO (First In First Out) system, and may store the error types for a plurality of times. In this case, when receiving an error detection signal from the payout control device 111, the main control device 110 may update the address (ring buffer pointer) storing the error type.

  Here, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the RAM clear mode, the pachinko machine 10 keeps at least the base value data 203r, the accessory ratio data 203s, and the error data 203t without erasing. I do. As a result, even if the RAM erasure switch 122 is turned on, the base value data 203r, the accessory ratio data 203s, and the error data 203t cannot be erased, so that they can be displayed on the base display device 401. Can be. Therefore, even if the wrongdoer turns on the RAM erase switch 122 to hide the wrongdoing, the evidence can be suppressed from being hidden.

  The pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode, and the data in the RAM 203 is also deleted when the probability set value is changed. However, the base value data 203r and the error data 203t are deleted. Without holding. Thus, even if the fraudster changes the probability set value in order to conceal the fraud, it is possible to suppress the concealment of the evidence. On the other hand, the accessory ratio data 203s is deleted during the deletion of the data in the RAM 203 performed after the change of the probability setting value. This is because if the probability set value is changed, the accessory ratio also changes. Therefore, if the data 203s for the accessory ratio based on the probability set value before the change remains, the role based on the probability set value after the change remains. This is because the material ratio cannot be calculated correctly. On the other hand, since the base value does not change even if the probability setting value is changed, the base value data 203r is stored, and the past base value and information necessary for calculating the base value are stored. By doing so, it is possible to detect past misconduct without being concealed.

  As described above, in erasing the data in the RAM 203 after the change of the probability set value, a part of the data related to the display of the base display device 401 is kept without erasing, and the remaining data is retained. By erasing the data, the data can be retained or erased in accordance with the actual situation of each data.

  Further, in the external work area 203y1, the area to be erased by erasing the data in the RAM 203 after the change of the probability set value is performed, and the area to be retained without being erased are divided into areas to be erased. Alternatively, the base value data 203r and the error data 203t may be stored in an area where the data 203s are stored and stored without being erased. This makes it possible to easily erase the data including the character ratio data 203s stored in the area to be erased by erasing the data in the RAM 203 after the probability set value is changed, and to erase the data. The data including the base value data 203r and the error data 203t stored in the holding area without fail can be securely held by erasing the data in the RAM 203 after the probability setting value is changed. it can.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 422, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 according to the twenty-first embodiment is turned on will be described. FIG. 422 is a flowchart showing the start-up processing. This start-up process is started by a reset at power-on.

  In the start-up process, first, an initial value setting process is performed when the power is turned on (S4001). For example, access permission to the RAM 203 is set, and a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer.

  Next, an internal function register setting process is executed (S4002). In the present embodiment, a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 426) for performing main control of the game is executed with a timer interrupt (hereinafter, referred to as “4 millisecond timer interrupt”) generated every 4 milliseconds as a trigger. The base display control process (see FIG. 425) for controlling the display content displayed on the display device 401 is executed with a timer interrupt generated every 2 milliseconds (hereinafter, referred to as a “2 millisecond timer interrupt”) as an opportunity. In the processing in S4002, for example, the 4 ms timer interrupt and the 2 ms timer interrupt are permitted. In addition, when a random number value required for performing the jackpot lottery or the hit lottery is generated by a random number generation circuit (not shown) provided in the main control device 110, in the process of S4002, the range of the generated random number value ( Set the maximum value).

  In particular, by permitting a 2 ms timer interrupt in the internal function register setting process, a 2 ms timer interrupt occurs every 2 ms and the base display control process is executed. Thus, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the probability set value can be displayed on the base display device 401.

  In the process of S4002, it is not always necessary to permit the interruption of the 4 millisecond timer and to set the range (maximum value) of the random number value. In the process of S4002, when the permission of the 4 millisecond timer interrupt and / or the setting of the range (maximum value) of the random number value are not performed, the other processes described later, which are executed at the stage of shifting from the startup process to the main process, are performed. In the raising process (S4013), permission of the 4 millisecond timer interrupt not performed in the process of S4002 and / or setting of the range (maximum value) of the random number value may be performed.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on (S4003). If it is turned on (S4003: Yes), it is determined whether the setting key 501 is on and the door open switch is on. Is determined (S4004). If an affirmative determination is made in the processing of S4004 (S4004: Yes), the RAM erase switch 122 is on, the setting key 501 is on, and the door open switch is on, so as shown in FIG. The startup mode is set to the setting change mode, and the setting change process is executed (S4005).

  Here, the details of the setting change processing (S4005) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 423 is a flowchart showing the setting change processing (S4005). The setting change process (S4005) is a process executed when the start-up mode is the setting change mode, and is a process for accepting a change in the probability set value from a person related to the hall or the like and confirming the change.

  In the setting change processing (S4005), first, the start of the display of the probability set value on the base display device 401 is set (S4101). With the start setting of the display of the probability set value, the display of the probability set value is started on the base display device 401 by the control by the base display control process (see FIG. 425) executed every 2 milliseconds. The display mode at this time is one of FIGS. 417 (a), (b), (c-1), (d-1), and (e-1).

  Note that the probability setting value displayed here may be fixed to a specific value without fail. That is, when the start-up mode is set to the setting change mode, the display on the base display device 401 may be started at a specific probability set value without fail. The specific probability set value may be, for example, “1” which is the minimum value of the probability set values (“1” to “6”), or “3” or “3” which is an intermediate value of the probability set values. 4 "or" 6 "which is the maximum value of the probability setting value. Thereby, regardless of the probability setting value that was set before the power was turned off, the person related to the hall and the like can change the probability setting value from the specific probability setting value.

  On the other hand, when the start-up mode is set to the setting change mode, display may be started on the base display device 401 with the probability set value set before the power was turned off as it is. This allows the person involved in the hall or the like to change the probability set value while considering the probability set value that was set before the power was turned off.

  When the startup mode is set to the setting change mode, the probability setting value is displayed as “3” on the base display device 401 if the probability setting value that was set before the power was turned off is 3 or more. Is started, and if the probability set value that was set before the power was turned off is less than 3, the display may be started with the probability set value that was set before the power was turned off as it is. Good. For example, when the probability set value set before the power is turned off is high, such as “5” or “6”, there are many cases where the probability set value needs to be reduced slightly (for example, by 1) in many cases. In such a case, if display is started with the probability set value set as it is before the power is turned off, the following problem occurs. That is, the update of the probability set value is incremented by one each time the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on. When the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on when the probability set value is “6”, the probability set value is changed to “ 1 ". Therefore, for example, when it is desired to change the probability set value from “6” to “5”, the probability set value must be substantially rotated once while the RAM erase switch 122 is repeatedly turned on. On the other hand, when the probability setting value set before the power is turned off is high, the probability setting value is started to be displayed as “3”, thereby reducing the number of times the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on, thereby reducing the probability setting value. The value can be updated.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the probability set value is in the range of “1” to “6” (S4102). If it is not within the predetermined range, that is, if the probability set value is abnormal (S4102). : No), the probability setting value is changed to the initial value (S4103), and the process proceeds to S4104. The initial value may be “1” which is the minimum value of the probability setting values (“1” to “6”), or “3” or “4” which is the intermediate value of the probability setting values. Or the maximum value of the probability setting value may be “6”. On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability set value is within the range of “1” to “6” as a result of the process of S4102 (S4102: Yes), the process of S4103 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4104. .

  In the process of S4104, it is determined whether the setting key 501 has been turned off (S4104). In the process of S4104, when it is detected that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 has transitioned from the on state to the off state (edge is detected), it is determined that the setting key 501 has been turned off. This is because, as described later, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up without turning on the RAM erasing switch 122, the probability setting value is broken and the probability setting value is within the normal range (the range of “1” to “6”). If not, the setting change processing is executed. At this time, however, the setting key 501 is normally in the off state. If it is determined that the setting key 501 is in the off state by detecting that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 is in the off state, the probability setting value is broken and the probability range is normal (“1”). If the setting key 501 is in the OFF state even if the setting change processing is executed and the setting key 501 is in the off state, an affirmative determination is immediately made in the processing of S4104, and the probability setting is performed as described later. The value is determined and the setting change process ends. Therefore, it becomes impossible for persons involved in the hall or the like to change the probability set value. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4104 that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 has transitioned from the on state to the off state, it is determined that the setting key 501 has been turned off. Unless a related person or the like performs an operation of temporarily turning the setting key 501 from the off state to the on state and then back to the off state, an affirmative determination is not made in the process of S4104. Changes can be made.

  When the pachinko machine 10 is started up without turning on the RAM erasure switch 122, even if the probability setting value is broken and is not within the normal range (the range of “1” to “6”), the setting is performed. When the change process is not executed (for example, when the hall-related person is prompted to restart the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode), the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 is turned off. May be determined that the setting key 501 has been turned off.

  As a result of the processing in S4104, when it is determined that the setting key 501 is not in the off state (S4104: No), it is determined whether the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on (S4105). As a result, if it is determined that the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S4105: No), the process returns to S4102, and if it is determined that the RAM erasure switch 122 is turned on (S4105: Yes), the probability setting value is set. Is updated (S4106), and the process returns to S4102. As described above, when the probability setting value up to that time is “1” to “5”, 1 is added to the probability setting value, and the probability setting value up to that time is updated. When the value is “6”, the setting is performed by returning the probability setting value to “1”. The probability set value updated by the process of S4106 is displayed on the base display device 401 under the control of the base display control process (see FIG. 425) executed every 2 milliseconds.

  The loop processing of S4102 → S4103 → S4104: No → S4105 (and S4106) → S4102 continues to be executed by the processing of S4104 until it is determined that the setting key 501 is turned on (S4104: Yes). When it is determined that the setting key 501 has been turned on by the process of S4104 (S4104: Yes), the probability setting value displayed on the base display device 401 is changed to the probability setting value to be used in a game from now on. Is determined (S4107). Then, the end of the display of the probability set value on the base display device 401 is set (S4108), and the setting change process ends. By the process of S4108, the display of the probability set value on the base display device 401 is ended by the control of the base display control process (see FIG. 425) executed every 2 milliseconds by the end setting of the display of the probability set value, The display of the base value on the base display device 401 is started.

  Returning to FIG. 422, the description of the startup processing will be continued. When the setting change processing in S4005 is completed, next, a setting change RAM clear processing is executed (S4006). In this setting change RAM clearing process, of the data stored in the RAM 203, the data used for controlling the game (predetermined data excluding the probability set value stored in the inner work area 203x1) and the data 203s for the accessory ratio Are erased (cleared), while the base value data 203r and the error data 203t are retained without being erased. By erasing the data used for controlling the game (predetermined data excluding the probability set value stored in the inner work area 203x1), newly starting a game using the newly set probability set value Can be.

  Further, as described above, when the probability setting value is changed, the accessory ratio also changes. Therefore, if the data 203s for the accessory ratio based on the probability setting value before the change remains, the probability setting value after the change is changed. Cannot be calculated correctly. In the setting change RAM clearing process, by deleting the accessory ratio data 203s, it is possible to correctly calculate the accessory ratio based on the changed probability set value.

  On the other hand, the base value does not change even if the probability setting value is changed. Therefore, in the setting change RAM clear processing, the base value data 203r is held and the past base value and the base value are calculated. By retaining necessary information, it is possible to detect unfair acts performed in the past without being concealed. Also, by retaining the error data 203t in the setting change RAM clearing process, even if the fraudulent person who caused the error starts the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode, the error history is stored. It cannot be erased and concealment of fraudulent acts can be suppressed.

  After the processing of S4006, other start-up processing is executed (S4013), and the processing shifts to the main processing.

  On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in the process of S4004 (S4004: No), the RAM erase switch 122 is on and the setting key 501 is off or the door open switch is off. When the RAM erase switch 122 is on and the setting key 501 is off, the startup mode is set to the RAM clear mode and the normal RAM clear processing is executed as shown in FIG. 415 (S4007). If the RAM erasing switch 122 is on and the setting key 501 is on, but the door opening switch is off (that is, if the inner frame 12 is closed), the startup mode is set. The normal RAM clear processing is executed instead of the change mode in the RAM clear mode (S4007). Thus, even if the inner frame 12 is closed while the setting key 501 is on, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the setting change mode, and the game is not started in the pachinko machine 10. it can.

  In the normal RAM clearing process (S4007), of the data stored in the RAM 203, data used for controlling the game (predetermined data excluding the probability set value stored in the inner work area 203x1) is erased (cleared). , The base value data 203r, the accessory ratio data 203s, and the error data 203t are retained without being erased. A new game can be started by deleting data used for controlling the game (predetermined data excluding the probability set value stored in the inner work area 203x1).

  On the other hand, by holding the data 203r for the base value, the data 203s for the accessory ratio, and the data 203t for the error without erasing them, the RAM erasing switch 122 is turned on and the data in the RAM 203 is erased. However, these can be displayed on the base display device 401. Therefore, even if the wrongdoer turns on the RAM erase switch 122 to conceal the wrongdoing, the wrongdoing can be found from the base value, the accessory ratio, the error history, and the like displayed on the base display device 401. .

  After the processing of S4007, other start-up processing is executed (S4013), and the processing shifts to the main processing.

  As a result of the processing in S4003, when it is determined that the RAM erasure switch 122 is off (S4003: No), it is then determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S4008). If not (S4008: No), there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off may not have been completed normally, so in this case as well, the process proceeds to S4007 to execute the normal RAM clear process (S4007). .

  If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S4008: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated, and whether the calculated RAM determination value is normal, that is, the calculated RAM determination value is stored when the power is turned off. It is determined whether the value matches the RAM determination value (S4009). The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 203. In the present embodiment, the probability set value stored in the RAM 203 is also used for calculating the checksum value.

  If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S4009: No), that is, if the calculated RAM determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, the data in the backed-up RAM 203 is destroyed. In this case, first, it is determined whether or not the probability setting value stored in the RAM 203 is within a normal range (a range from “1” to “6”) (S4010). If the probability set value is within the normal range (S4010: Yes), the process proceeds to S4007, where the normal RAM clearing process is executed. Needless to say, the probability set value is maintained without being erased in the normal RAM clear processing or the setting change RAM clear processing.

  On the other hand, if the probability setting value is not within the normal range, for example, “7” (S4010: No), the process proceeds to S4005, executes the setting change process shown in FIG. A related person or the like is set again to set the probability setting value. At this time, a display prompting the change of the probability set value may be performed on the third symbol display device 81, or a notification sound or a sound may be output from the sound output device 226 to notify the user. Further, an external terminal (not shown) provided in main controller 110 may notify hall computer 600 that the probability set value is not within the normal range. Thus, it is possible to notify the person concerned with the hall or the like that it is necessary to reset the probability set value.

  As a result of the processing in S4009, if the calculated RAM determination value is normal (S4009: Yes), it is determined whether the setting key 501 is on and the door open switch is on (S4011). If an affirmative determination is made in the process of S4011 (S4011: Yes), the RAM erasure switch 122 is off, the setting key 501 is on, and the door open switch is on, so that as shown in FIG. The startup mode is set to the setting confirmation mode, and the setting confirmation processing is executed (S4012).

  Here, the details of the setting confirmation processing (S4012) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 424 is a flowchart showing the setting confirmation processing (S4012). The setting confirmation process (S4012) is a process executed when the start-up mode is the setting confirmation mode, and is a process for displaying the probability set value on the base display device 401.

  In this setting confirmation processing (S4012), first, the start of the display of the probability set value on the base display device 401 is set (S4201). With the start setting of the display of the probability set value, the display of the probability set value is started on the base display device 401 by the control by the base display control process (see FIG. 425) executed every 2 milliseconds. The display mode at this time is any of FIGS. 417 (a), (b), (c-2), (d-2), and (e-2).

  Next, it is determined whether the setting key 501 has been turned off (S4202). In the process of S4202, when it is detected that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 has transitioned from the on-state to the off-state, it is determined that the setting key 501 has been turned off. Note that it may be determined that the setting key 501 has been turned off by detecting that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 is off.

  As a result of the processing in S4202, if the setting key 501 is not in the off state (S4202: No), S4202 is repeatedly executed, and waits until the setting key 501 is turned off. During this time, the display of the probability set value is continuously performed on the base display device 401. When the setting key 501 is turned off (S4202: Yes), the display of the probability set value on the base display device 401 is set to end (S4203), and the setting confirmation processing ends. By the process of S4203, the display of the probability set value on the base display device 401 is ended by the control of the base display control process (see FIG. 425) executed every 2 milliseconds according to the end setting of the display of the probability set value, The display of the base value on the base display device 401 is started.

  This setting confirmation processing (S4012) is executed after it is determined whether the RAM determination value (checksum) is normal. This is because, when the RAM determination value is abnormal, the RAM clear processing should be executed before confirming the probability set value. However, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting confirmation mode, the setting confirmation process may be executed before the determination whether the RAM determination value (check sum) is normal is made. .

  Returning to FIG. 422, the description of the startup processing will be continued. When the setting confirmation processing in S4012 ends, other startup processing is executed (S4013), and the processing shifts to the main processing.

  If a negative determination is made in the process of S4011 (S4011: No), the RAM erase switch 122 is off, and the setting key 501 is off or the door open switch is off. When the RAM erasure switch 122 is off and the setting key 501 is off, the startup mode is set to the normal mode, the setting confirmation process in S4012 is skipped, and the other startups in S4013 are performed, as shown in FIG. After performing the raising process, the process proceeds to the main process. If the RAM erasure switch 122 is off and the setting key 501 is on, but the door opening switch is off (that is, if the inner frame 12 is closed), the startup mode is set. The normal mode is set instead of the confirmation mode, the setting confirmation processing in S4012 is skipped, the other startup processing in S4013 is executed, and then the flow shifts to the main processing. Thus, even if the inner frame 12 is closed while the setting key 501 is on, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on and the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the setting confirmation mode, thereby preventing the pachinko machine 10 from starting a game. it can.

  Next, a base display control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the twenty-first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the base display control process is a process of controlling the display content displayed on the base display device 401, and is executed by a 2 millisecond timer interrupt generated every 2 milliseconds.

  In the base display control process, first, various setting processes for causing the base display device control circuit 402 to perform display control of the base display device 401 are executed (S4301). Next, it is determined whether or not the setting of the probability set value in the setting change mode is being changed (S4302). If it is determined that the setting is being changed (S4302: Yes), the probability set value during the setting change is changed. The setting change seg data including the seg data is set as seg data (S4303), the seg data is output to the base display device control circuit 402 (S4309), and the base display control process ends. Thus, the probability set value is displayed on the base display device 401 in any of the display modes of FIGS. 417 (a), (b), (c-1), (d-1), and (e-1). You.

  If it is determined that the setting is not being changed as a result of the process of S4302 (S4302: No), then it is determined whether the setting of the probability set value in the setting check mode is being checked (S4304). As a result, when it is determined that the setting is being confirmed (S4304: Yes), the setting confirmation seg data including the probability setting value during the setting confirmation is set as the seg data (S4305), and the seg data is used as the base display device control circuit. 402 (S4309), and terminates the base display control process. As a result, the probability set value is displayed on the base display device 401 in one of the display modes of FIGS. 417 (a), (b), (c-2), (d-2), and (e-2). You.

  If it is determined that the setting is not being confirmed as a result of the process of S4304 (S4304: No), then it is determined whether or not the error history is being displayed based on the fact that the error display button 502 is pressed (step S4304). S4306). As a result, when it is determined that the error history is being displayed (S4306: Yes), the error history seg data including the error type is set as the seg data (S4307), and the seg data is output to the base display device control circuit 402. (S4309), and ends the base display control processing. As a result, the error history is displayed on the base display device 401 in one of the display modes shown in FIGS. 418 (a), (b), (c-1) and (c-2).

  If it is determined that the error history is not being displayed as a result of the process of S4306 (S4306: No), the normal game seg data including the base value or the accessory ratio is set as the seg data (S4308), and the seg data is displayed on the base. The output is output to the device control circuit 402 (S4309), and the base display control process ends. Thus, the base value or the accessory ratio is displayed on the base display device 401 in the normal state.

  Next, a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the twenty-first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 426 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing. As described above, this timer interrupt process is a process for performing main control of a game, and is executed by a 4 millisecond timer interrupt generated every 4 milliseconds.

  In this timer interrupt processing, first, it is determined whether or not the probability setting value is within a normal range (“1” to “6”) (S4401). Each time the timer interrupt process is executed, it is determined whether the probability set value is within the normal range, so that even if the probability set value has been destroyed for any reason, it can be found early. can do.

  As a result of the process of S4401, if the probability set value is within the normal range (S4401: Yes), the normal game process for performing the main control of the game is executed (S4402), and then the calculation and the base of the accessory ratio are performed. The CPU executes a ratio process (base process) for performing a process of managing information relating to the ratio of the bonus and the base value, such as calculating a value (S4403), and terminates the timer interrupt process.

  In the game process (S4402), for example, processes such as S101 to S111 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 378) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 described in the sixteenth embodiment are executed. That is, the main control of the game includes a jackpot lottery, setting of a variable display, opening / closing control of the big winning port (large opening port) 65a at the time of the jackpot, a winning lottery of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. . Note that the MPU 201 uses the used area in the RAM 203 (the inner work area 203x1 and the inner stack area 203x2) in the RAM 203 while executing the process of S4402. On the other hand, while executing the process of S4403, the MPU 201 uses the outside area 203y (the outside work area 203y1 and the outside stack area 203y2) in the RAM 203.

  At this time, in the process of S4403, as described in the eighteenth embodiment, from the game process for performing main control of the game using the area 203x within the used area, the ratio of the character and the base using the area 203y outside the used area is changed. When shifting to the processing related to the value, the register 200 used in the processing related to the accessory ratio among the registers 200 provided in the MPU 201 is individually evacuated to the external work area 203y1 of the RAM 203, After execution of the processing relating to the base processing, when the processing is shifted from the processing relating to the accessory ratio using the area 203y outside the used area to the game processing mainly controlling the game using the area 203x within the used area (return), The registers 200 evacuated to the work area 203y1 may be individually restored.

  Further, as described in the nineteenth embodiment, while executing the processing using the area 203x within the used area, the processing for executing the processing related to the character ratio or the base value using the area 203y outside the used area is described in the CALL instruction. At the stage of reading, the registers 200 used in the processing related to the accessory ratio or the base value may be individually cleared to 0, and the processing for executing the processing related to the accessory ratio or the base value may be read by the CALL instruction. . Then, at the stage where the processing using the area 203y outside the used area read by the CALL instruction is completed and the processing returns to the processing using the area 203x inside the used area, the registers 200 used in the processing relating to the accessory ratio are individually stored. After clearing to 0, the process may return to the winning combination process (base process).

  On the other hand, as a result of the process of S4401, if the probability set value is not within the predetermined range (S4401: No), the process does not proceed to the game process (S4402), the notification command is set (S4404), and the notification command is set. It is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In response to the notification command, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs, from the sound output device 226, a notification sound or a sound that prompts a person in the hall or the like to restart the pachinko machine 10 to change the probability setting value. Alternatively, a command for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display a message urging a person related to the hall to be displayed is output to the display control device 114. Further, an external terminal (not shown) provided in main controller 110 may notify hall computer 600 that the probability set value is not within the normal range. Thereby, the person in charge of the hall and the like restarts the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode and performs a process of changing the probability set value.

  In addition, following the processing in S4404, a ball firing stop instruction is issued to the payout control device 111 (S4405). Thereby, the launch of the ball is stopped. After the processing in S4405, the timer interrupt processing ends. While the probability setting value is not within the normal range (S4401: No), the game process (S4402) is not executed even if the timer interrupt process is executed every 4 milliseconds. Stopped completely. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged by continuing the game with the abnormal probability set value.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the twenty-first embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the start-up regardless of the probability setting value is performed depending on whether the setting key 501 is turned off or on. A mode and a startup mode related to the probability setting value can be selected. When the startup mode is not related to the probability set value, it is possible to select whether the startup mode is the RAM clear mode or the normal mode depending on whether the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on. When setting the startup mode related to the probability set value, it is possible to select whether the startup mode is the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode depending on whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on. Thereby, if the person involved in the hall understands the meaning of each start-up mode, it can easily understand what kind of operation is required as an operation on the pachinko machine 10 necessary for the start-up mode to be started up. .

  In addition, the configuration described in the description of the twenty-first embodiment provides the above-described effects. Moreover, the same configuration as the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixteenth to twentieth embodiments can provide the same effects as those obtained by the configuration.

<Twenty-second embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a twenty-second embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to FIG. In the twentieth embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting change mode, the probability set value is updated by turning on the RAM erase switch 122, and it is detected that the setting key 501 is turned off. The case where the probability set value is determined when the probability is set has been described. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the twenty-first embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting change mode, the probability setting value is updated by turning on the setting change switch (not shown). When the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on, the probability set value is determined.

  Here, the setting change switch is a switch for updating the probability set value by being operated during the setting change mode. Like the error display button 502, the main board is changed from the hole provided in the board box 100 through the main board. It is provided more protruding, and can be operated by persons involved in the hall without opening the substrate box 100. The setting change switch normally outputs an off signal, and outputs an on signal when pressed down.

  Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-second embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-first embodiment. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-second embodiment, the same configurations and processes as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the sixteenth to twenty-first embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals as those of the sixteenth to twenty-first embodiments. Description is omitted.

  FIG. 427 is a flowchart showing a setting change process (S4005) executed in the startup process (see FIG. 422) by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 according to the twenty-second embodiment. The setting change process (S4005) is a process executed when the start-up mode is the setting change mode, as in the twenty-first embodiment, and accepts and confirms a change in the probability setting value from a person related to the hall or the like. It is processing for.

  In the setting change processing according to the twenty-second embodiment, first, the processing of S4101 to S4103 similar to that of the twenty-first embodiment is executed, and then it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 has been turned on (S4111). As a result, if it is determined that the RAM erasure switch 122 has not been turned on (S4111: No), then it is determined whether the setting change switch has been turned on (S4112).

  As a result, if it is determined that the setting change switch is not turned on (S4112: No), the process returns to S4102, and if it is determined that the setting change switch is turned on (S4112: Yes), the process of the twenty-first embodiment is performed. The probability set value is updated in the same manner as in S4106 (see FIG. 423) (S4106), and the process returns to S4102. The probability set value updated by the process of S4106 is displayed on the base display device 401 under the control of the base display control process (see FIG. 425) executed every 2 milliseconds.

  The loop processing of S4102 → S4103 → S4111: No → S4112 (and S4106) → S4102 is continuously executed until it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on by the processing of S4111 (S4111: Yes). If it is determined that the RAM erasure switch 122 is turned on by the process of S4111 (S4111: Yes), the probability set value displayed on the base display device 401 is changed to the probability set value to be used in a game from now on. Is determined (S4107). When the probability set value is determined, the data in the RAM 203 is erased (cleared) as described in the twenty-first embodiment. Therefore, by turning on the RAM erasure switch 122 by the person involved in the hall to determine the probability setting value, the person concerned in the hall can strongly recognize that the data in the RAM 203 will be erased thereafter.

  After the processing in S4107, it is determined whether the setting key 501 has been turned on (S4113). In the process of S4113, when it is detected that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 has transitioned from the on state to the off state, it may be determined that the setting key 501 has been turned off, or the setting key 501 may be determined. By detecting that the level of the signal output from is OFF, the setting key 501 may be determined to be OFF.

  As a result of the processing in S4113, while it is determined that the setting key 501 is not in the OFF state (S4113: No), the processing in S4113 is repeatedly executed. If it is determined that the setting key 501 has been turned off as a result of the processing in S4113 (S4113: Yes), the end of the display of the probability set value on the base display device 401 is set (S4108), and the setting change processing is performed. To end. By the process of S4108, the display of the probability set value on the base display device 401 is ended by the control of the base display control process (see FIG. 425) executed every 2 milliseconds by the end setting of the display of the probability set value, The display of the base value on the base display device 401 is started.

  As described above, the configuration described in the description of the twenty-second embodiment achieves the effects described above. The same configuration as the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the sixteenth to twenty-first embodiments can provide the same effects as those obtained by the configuration.

<Twenty-third embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a twenty-third embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. In the twenty-first and twenty-second embodiments, when the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting change mode, the probability set value can be updated, and when the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting check mode, the probability set value can be confirmed. Was explained. Further, a case where the start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10 is determined from the normal mode, the RAM clear mode, the setting change mode, and the setting confirmation mode in accordance with the operation states of the RAM erase switch 122 and the setting key 501 when the power is turned on. explained.

  Here, if the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like during the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the problem is how to start up when the power is turned on again. The pachinko machine 10 according to the twenty-third embodiment solves this problem. Further, in the twenty-third embodiment, the abnormality of the RAM 203 (hereinafter, referred to as “RAM abnormality”), the fact that the setting change process has been performed, and the fact that the setting confirmation process has been performed are reported to the hall via the external output terminal 503. Output to the computer 600. The person in charge of the hall or the like can grasp, via the hall computer 600, a RAM abnormality that has occurred in the pachinko machine 10, a fact that setting change processing or setting confirmation has been performed, and the like.

  Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-third embodiment will be described focusing on differences from the pachinko machines 10 of the twenty-first and twenty-third embodiments. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-third embodiment, the same configurations and processes as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the sixteenth to twenty-second embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals as those of the sixteenth to twenty-second embodiments. Description is omitted.

  FIG. 428 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the twenty-third embodiment. The difference between the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-third embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-first embodiment is that an external output terminal 503 is connected to the input / output port 205 of the main controller 110. The external output terminal 503 is configured to be connectable to the hall computer 600. The external output terminal 503 is provided so as to protrude from the main board through a hole provided in the board box 100, and by connecting a wiring connector (not shown) connected to the hall computer 600 to the external output terminal 503, Signals and data output from main controller 110 to hall computer 600 are relayed to hall computer 600.

  FIG. 429 is a schematic diagram schematically showing data stored in the internal work area 203x1 of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. In this inner work area 203x1, probability set value data 203x11, change probability set value data 203c12, setting change flag 203x13, setting check flag 203x14, RAM abnormal flag 203x15, and RAM erase switch flag 203x16 are stored. At least stored.

  The probability set value data 203x11 is data indicating a probability set value set (confirmed) in the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, as in the twenty-first and twenty-second embodiments, “1” to “6” can be set as the probability set values, and the respective probability set values (“1” to “6”) are set. On the other hand, the random number value of the big hit and / or the random number value of the second symbol are stored in the ROM 202 in advance. The jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol at the probability set value are determined by the number of jackpot random numbers and / or the number of hit random numbers of the second symbol determined for each probability set value. In this pachinko machine 10, the smaller the probability set value (closer to 1), the lower the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol, and the larger the probability set value (closer to 6), the larger the jackpot probability and / or Alternatively, the big random number value and / or the second random number value of the second symbol are determined for each probability setting value so that the winning probability of the second symbol is high.

  In the setting change process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, which is executed when the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting change mode, the probability set value determined by the person related to the hall or the like is set to the probability set value data 203x11. Is stored in The pachinko machine 10 sets a jackpot random number value and / or a second symbol hit random value corresponding to the probability set value indicated by the probability set value data 203x11 based on the ROM 202, and performs a jackpot lottery or a second symbol hit lottery. Execute

  Note that the jackpot random number value and / or the hit random number value of the second symbol are fixed, and the range and / or range of random numbers generated for performing the jackpot lottery for each probability setting value (“1” to “6”) Alternatively, a range of random numbers to be generated for performing the second symbol winning lottery may be stored in the RAM 203 in advance. The jackpot probability and / or the second symbol hit probability at the probability set value are determined by the range of the jackpot random number and / or the range of the hit random number of the second symbol set for each probability set value. In this case, the pachinko machine 10 sets the range of random numbers generated for performing the jackpot lottery corresponding to the probability set value indicated by the probability set value data 203x11 and / or the random number generated for performing the jackpot lottery of the second symbol. A range is set, and a random number for performing the jackpot lottery and / or a random number for performing the second symbol win lottery is generated.

  The update probability set value data 203x12 is a probability that is updated by a person related to the hall before the probability set value is determined in the setting change process executed when the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting change mode. This is data indicating a set value. That is, the above-mentioned probability set value data 203x11 is data indicating the determined probability set value, whereas the update probability set value data 203x12 is updated by the person in charge of the hall before the determination in the setting change process. Data indicating the probability setting value to be performed.

  Specifically, when the execution of the setting change process is started, first, the probability set value data 203x11 is stored as the update probability set value data 203x12. In other words, the probability setting value so far is set in the update probability setting value data 203x12, and starting from the probability setting value so far, the person related to the hall or the like updates the probability setting value. Each time the RAM erase switch 122 also serving as a switch for updating the probability set value is turned on, the update probability set value data 203x12 is incremented by one, and the update probability set value data 203x12 is "6". When the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on at this time, the update probability setting value data 203x12 is updated to "1". Then, when the setting key 501 is turned off, the update probability set value data 203x12 is stored as the probability set value data 203x11, and the probability set value updated by the person related to the hall or the like will be used in a future game. It is determined as a probability setting value.

  Here, in the setting change processing, the probability setting value is not updated using the probability setting value data 203x11, but the probability setting value is updated using the updating probability setting data 203x12 for the following reason. . That is, if the probability set value is updated using the probability set value data 203x11, if the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like during the setting change process, the probability set value that has been used for the game until that time is deleted by the update. Will be done. Therefore, even if the power is turned on again, the pachinko machine 10 is started, and the probability setting value is changed from the beginning, the probability setting value used for the game has disappeared. Disappears. In this case, the probability setting value stored in the probability setting value data 203x11 before the power is turned off, that is, the setting change process can be restarted from the probability setting value in the middle of the setting change, but the probability setting value that has not been determined is stored. May give the illusion of a person involved in the hall.

  Further, depending on the relationship between the timing at which the person in charge of the hall or the like turned on the RAM erase switch 122 and the timing at which the power was turned off, an event that the probability set value data 203x11 was not updated even though the RAM erase switch 122 was turned on occurred. obtain. In this case, a difference occurs between the probability setting value that the hall-related persons and the like thought to have updated and the probability setting value stored by the pachinko machine 10, so that the hall-related persons and the like may feel distrust.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the probability set value is updated in the setting change process, the probability set value is updated using the update probability set value data 203x12. The probability setting value used so far can be stored in 203 × 11. As a result, even if the power is cut off during the setting change process, in the setting change process executed again, the probability set value used in the game up to now and remaining as the probability set value data 203x11 is updated. By saving the probability set value data 203x12, the probability set value can be updated again from the beginning. Therefore, the person related to the hall and the like can redo the update of the probability setting.

  The setting change flag 203x13 is a flag indicating whether or not the setting change process is being executed. The setting change flag 203x13 indicates that the setting change process is being executed when it is on, and indicates that the setting change process is not being executed when it is off. The setting change flag 203x13 is set to off at normal time. Then, when the execution of the setting change process is started, the setting change in-progress flag 203x13 is set to ON. When the updated probability set value is determined in the setting change processing and the execution of the setting change processing ends, the setting change flag 203x13 is turned off.

  By the way, if the setting change flag 203x13 is turned on in the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power is turned on, the setting change process is being executed when the power was last cut off. That is, it indicates that the power has been cut off during the update of the probability set value by the setting change process. Therefore, in this case, the start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10 is partially changed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 430, a startup mode when the power is turned on after the power is turned off during the setting change will be described. FIG. 430 is a diagram for describing a start-up mode set in response to each start-up operation when the power is turned on after the power is turned off during the setting change or the setting confirmation.

  As shown in FIG. 430, after the power is cut off during the setting change, a startup operation for starting up in the normal mode, that is, turning on the power while keeping the setting key 501 off and the RAM erase switch 122 off. When the start-up operation is performed, the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode in which the setting change process is restarted (from the beginning) and executed instead of starting up in the normal mode.

  After the power was turned off during the setting change, a startup operation for starting up in the RAM clear mode, that is, a startup operation of turning on the power by turning on the RAM erase switch 122 with the setting key 501 turned off. In this case, the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode in which the setting change process is restarted (from the beginning) and executed instead of starting up in the RAM clear mode.

  After the power is turned off during the setting change, a start-up operation for starting up in the setting change mode, that is, a start-up operation of turning on the power by turning on the RAM erase switch 122 with the setting key 501 turned on. In this case, the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode as in the start-up operation. Also in this case, the setting change process is restarted from the beginning (from the beginning) and executed.

  After the power is cut off during the setting change, a start-up operation for starting up in the setting confirmation mode, that is, a start-up operation of turning on the power while the setting key 501 is turned on and the RAM erase switch 122 is turned off. In this case, the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode in which the setting change process is started again (from the beginning) and executed instead of starting up in the setting check mode.

  As described above, the startup mode when the power is turned on after the power is turned off during the setting change is not limited to the startup operation for starting up in the setting change mode and other startup operations. Even if the operation is a raising operation, the setting change mode is set in which the setting change process is restarted from the beginning and executed. Thus, when the power is cut off during the setting change, the probability setting value can be changed from the beginning by the persons involved in the hall without fail when the power is turned on thereafter. Therefore, the change of the probability set value can be reliably performed by the person related to the hall, and the change can be determined. Therefore, even if the power is cut off during the setting change, the persons involved in the hall can reliably update and confirm the probability set value when the power is turned on again, and the pachinko machine can be safely operated. A change in the probability set value for 10 can be made.

  Also, by restarting the setting change process from the beginning (from the beginning), instead of continuing from the probability setting value being updated when the power is cut off during the setting change and restarting the update of the probability setting value, The probability set value can be updated again from the beginning using the probability set value (probability set value data 203x11) used in the game up to now. Therefore, the person related to the hall and the like can redo the update of the probability setting.

  Returning to FIG. 429, the description will be continued. The setting confirmation flag 203x14 is a flag indicating whether or not the setting confirmation process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting confirmation mode as the start-up mode. is there. The setting confirmation flag 203x14 indicates that the setting confirmation processing is being executed when the flag is ON, and indicates that the setting confirmation processing is not being executed when the flag is OFF. The setting confirmation flag 203x14 is set to off at normal times. Then, when the execution of the setting confirmation processing is started, the setting confirmation flag 203x14 is set to ON, and when the execution of the setting confirmation processing ends, the setting confirmation flag 203x14 is turned OFF.

  By the way, if the setting confirmation flag 203x14 is on in the startup process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power is turned on, the setting confirmation process is being executed when the power was last shut down. That is, it indicates that the power has been turned off during the confirmation of the probability set value by the setting confirmation process. Therefore, in this case, the start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10 is partially changed.

  Here, referring to FIG. 430 again, a startup mode when the power is turned on after the power is turned off during the setting confirmation will be described. As shown in FIG. 430, after the power is turned off during the setting confirmation, a start operation for starting in the normal mode, that is, turning on the power while the setting key 501 is off and the RAM erase switch 122 is off. When the start-up operation is performed, the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting check mode in which the setting check process is restarted (from the beginning) and executed instead of starting in the normal mode. Thus, after the power is turned off during the setting check, the probability set value can be checked even if the person involved in the hall starts up by operating in the normal mode. This allows the person involved in the hall or the like to confirm that the probability setting value has not been destroyed due to the power being cut off during the setting confirmation, so that the pachinko machine 10 can be started up with confidence.

  After the power was cut off during the setting confirmation, a startup operation for starting up in the RAM clear mode, that is, a startup operation of turning on the power by turning on the RAM erase switch 122 with the setting key 501 turned off. In this case, the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the RAM clear mode according to the start-up operation of the person in charge of the hall. The fact that the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on indicates that the person concerned in the hall or the like wants to at least clearly clear the RAM. Therefore, in this case, by starting the pachinko machine 10 in the RAM clear mode, it is possible to perform a start-up process according to the intention of a person related to the hall or the like.

  After the power is turned off during the setting confirmation, a start-up operation for starting up in the setting change mode, that is, a start-up operation of turning on the power by turning on the RAM erase switch 122 with the setting key 501 turned on. Also in this case, the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode as in the start-up operation. Also in this case, the fact that the setting key 501 is turned on and the RAM erasing switch 122 is turned on indicates that the person related to the hall or the like clearly wants to change the probability set value. Therefore, in this case, by starting up the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode, it is possible to perform a start-up process according to the intention of the hall-related personnel and the like.

  After the power is cut off during the setting change, a start-up operation for starting up in the setting confirmation mode, that is, a start-up operation of turning on the power while the setting key 501 is turned on and the RAM erase switch 122 is turned off. Also in this case, the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting confirmation mode as in the start-up operation. Also in this case, the fact that the setting key 501 is turned on and the RAM erasure switch 122 is turned on indicates that the person related to the hall or the like wants to clearly confirm the probability set value again. Therefore, in this case, by starting up the pachinko machine 10 in the setting check mode in which the setting check process is restarted from the beginning (from the beginning), the start-up process can be performed according to the intention of the hall-related personnel.

  Returning to FIG. 429, the description is continued. The RAM abnormality flag 203x15 is a flag for indicating that there is an abnormality in the RAM 203, such as that data stored in the RAM 203 has been destroyed. The RAM abnormality flag 203x15 indicates that the RAM 203 has an abnormality when turned on, and indicates that there is no abnormality in the RAM 203 when turned off.

  The RAM abnormality flag 203x15 is normally set to off. In the start-up processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power is turned on, whether or not the power-off occurrence information to be stored at the time of the previous power-off is not present in the RAM 203, If the judgment value (check sum) is not normal or the probability setting value is not within the normal range (“1” to “6”), it is determined that there is an abnormality in the RAM 203 and the RAM abnormality flag 203 × 15 is set to ON.

  When the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 is turned on, a notification of the RAM abnormality is issued to prompt a restart in the setting change mode, and the fact is notified to the hall computer 600 via the external output terminal 503. The MPU 201 of the control device 110 enters an infinite loop state. Accordingly, the pachinko machine 10 is restarted in the setting change mode by the persons involved in the hall and the like, and the probability setting value is surely reset, and the RAM 203 is cleared, so that the pachinko machine 10 can operate normally. Can be driven.

  The RAM erase switch flag 203x16 is a flag indicating the previous state of the RAM erase switch 122 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. In the present embodiment, the RAM erasing switch 122 is used to determine the start-up mode when the pachinko machine 10 starts up, and to set the probability setting value when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode. Also used when updating. That is, each time the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on, the probability set value is updated.

  At this time, when the state of the RAM erasure switch 122 changes from the OFF state to the ON state, it is determined that the RAM erasure switch 122 has been turned on, and the probability set value is updated. The RAM erasure switch flag 203x16 is used to determine whether or not the state of the RAM erasure switch 122 has changed from the off state to the on state. That is, when the RAM erasure switch flag 203x16 indicating the previous state of the RAM erasure switch 122 is off and the RAM erasure switch 122 is on, it is determined that the RAM erasure switch 122 is on. After making the determination, the state of the RAM erase switch 122 at that time is stored in the RAM erase switch flag 203x16.

  Here, the RAM erasure switch flag 203x16 is temporarily set to “1” before the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting change mode and before it is determined whether the state of the RAM erasure switch 122 is changed from the off state to the on state. Set to "ON". This is because when the state of the RAM erasing switch 122 is first determined from the OFF state to the ON state, the RAM erasing switch is still used as a start-up operation for starting the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch flag 203x16 is turned off at this time, the RAM erase switch flag 203x16 is off and the RAM erase switch 122 is on. There is a possibility that the probability setting value may be updated by erroneously determining that the RAM erase switch 122 has been turned on for updating the probability setting value. Accordingly, persons involved in the hall and the like have a distrust of updating the probability set value even though the RAM erase switch 122 has not been turned on to update the probability set value.

  On the other hand, after the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode, the RAM erase switch flag 203x16 is temporarily set to "1" before first determining whether the state of the RAM erase switch 122 has changed from the OFF state to the ON state. By setting “ON”, even if the RAM erasing switch 122 is still turned on as a start-up operation for starting up the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode at the time of the first determination, it is set to the probability setting. It is possible to suppress that the probability setting value is updated by erroneously determining that the RAM erase switch 122 has been turned on for updating the value.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 431, a description will be given of a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 according to the twenty-third embodiment is turned on. FIG. 431 is a flowchart showing the start-up processing. This start-up process is started by a reset at power-on.

  In this start-up process, first, an initial value setting process is performed upon power-on (S4201). For example, access permission to the RAM 203 is set, and a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer.

  Next, an internal function register setting process is executed (S4202). In the present embodiment, similarly to the twenty-first and twenty-second embodiments, a base display control process (see FIG. 425) for controlling the display content displayed on the base display device 401 is performed every two milliseconds. Execute as an opportunity. In the process in S4202, for example, the 2 millisecond timer interrupt is permitted. Further, when a random number value required for performing the jackpot lottery or the hit lottery is generated by a random number generation circuit (not shown) provided in the main control device 110, in the process of S4202, the range of the generated random number value ( Set the maximum value). In the process of S4202, access to the RAM 203 is permitted. In the process of S4202, the main controller 110 performs various settings for transmitting and receiving signals by serial communication with the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113.

  In particular, by permitting a 2 ms timer interrupt in the internal function register setting process, a 2 ms timer interrupt occurs every 2 ms and the base display control process is executed. Thus, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the probability set value can be displayed on the base display device 401.

  In the process of S4202, it is not always necessary to set the range (maximum value) of the random value. In the case where the range (maximum value) of the random number value is not set in the process of S4202, in the other startup process (S4221) described later, which is executed at the stage of shifting from the startup process to the main process, The range (maximum value) of the random number value not performed in the process of S4202 may be set.

  Next, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S4203). As a result, if the power-off occurrence information is stored (S4203: Yes), it means that the process at the time of the previous power-off is normally completed, and then the RAM determination value is calculated and calculated. It is determined whether or not the determined RAM determination value is normal, that is, whether or not the calculated RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off (S4204). The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 203. In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which the probability setting value stored in the RAM 203 is excluded from the calculation of the checksum value. However, the probability setting value may be included in the calculation of the checksum value.

  As a result of the processing in S4204, if it is determined that the calculated RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off (S4204: Yes), the RAM determination value is normal, and at least the RAM determination value is used to calculate the RAM determination value. Since it can be determined that the stored data (information) is normally held, it is next determined whether or not the probability setting value is within the normal range ("1" to "6") (S4205). Here, it is determined whether or not the probability set value is within the normal range because, when the power was turned off last time, although the processing related to the power cutoff was performed normally, the probability set value is determined at that stage. This is because it may be broken and out of the normal range. The process of S4205 is performed to reliably detect such an abnormality in the probability set value.

  If the probability setting value is within the normal range (S4205: Yes), it is determined whether the setting change flag 203x13 is on (S4206). If the setting change flag 203x13 is on (S4206: Yes), it means that the setting change process was being executed when the power was last turned off, that is, the power supply was being updated while the probability setting value was being updated by the setting change process. Indicates that was rejected. Therefore, in this case, the processing shifts to the processing of S4213, and the setting change processing is executed (S4213).

  As a result, the startup mode when the power is turned on after the power is turned off during the setting change is not limited to the startup operation for starting up in the setting change mode, and other startup operations Even if it is an operation, a setting change mode can be set in which the setting change process is restarted from the beginning and executed. Therefore, when the power is cut off during the setting change, the probability setting value can be changed from the beginning by the persons involved in the hall without fail when the power is turned on thereafter. Therefore, the change of the probability set value can be reliably performed by the person related to the hall, and the change can be determined. Therefore, even if the power is cut off during the setting change, the persons involved in the hall can reliably update and confirm the probability set value when the power is turned on again, and the pachinko machine can be safely operated. A change in the probability set value for 10 can be made.

  Also, by restarting the setting change process from the beginning (from the beginning), instead of continuing from the probability setting value being updated when the power is cut off during the setting change and restarting the update of the probability setting value, The probability set value can be updated again from the beginning using the probability set value (probability set value data 203x11) used in the game up to now. Therefore, the person related to the hall and the like can redo the update of the probability setting. The details of the setting change process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S4206, if the setting change flag 203x13 is on (S4206: No), it means that the setting change processing was not being executed when the power was last turned off, and then the hall is changed. As a process of confirming a start-up operation performed when a person concerned turns on the power of the pachinko machine 10, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on (S4207). In the process of S4207, since the 4 millisecond timer interrupt is not permitted and the timer interrupt process described later is not executed, the state of the RAM erase switch 122 is changed by the switch state read process of the timer interrupt process. The state of the RAM erase switch 122 is read by directly accessing the input / output port 205 instead of making a determination using the read data.

  If the result of the processing in S4207 is that the RAM erasure switch 122 is off (S4207: No), then it is determined whether or not the setting key 501 is on to confirm further the start-up operation (S4207). S4208). In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which it is determined only whether the setting key 501 is in the ON state. However, as in the twenty-first and twenty-second embodiments, the setting key 501 is in the ON state and the door is open. It may be determined whether or not the switch is on.

  As a result of the processing in S4208, if the setting key 501 is in the off state (S4208: N0), since the RAM erase switch 122 is off and the setting key 501 is in the off state, the person involved in the hall starts up in the normal mode. It means that you operated. Then, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation flag 203x14 is ON (S4209). As a result, if the setting confirmation flag 203x14 is on (S4209: Yes), the setting confirmation processing was being executed when the power was last turned off, that is, the confirmation of the probability set value by the setting confirmation processing. Indicates that the power was turned off during. In this case, as shown in FIG. 430, the setting confirmation processing is executed from the beginning (S4210). By the setting confirmation process, the currently set probability setting value is displayed on the base display device 401. Thereby, the probability set value can be confirmed.

  As described above, even when the hall-related person performs the start-up operation for starting up in the normal mode as the start-up operation, the pachinko machine 10 is not started up in the normal mode, and the setting confirmation process is started from the beginning ( The pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting confirmation mode to be executed again from the beginning. Thus, after the power is turned off during the setting check, the probability set value can be checked even if the person involved in the hall starts up by operating in the normal mode. This allows the person involved in the hall or the like to confirm that the probability setting value has not been destroyed due to the power being cut off during the setting confirmation, so that the pachinko machine 10 can be started up with confidence. The details of the setting confirmation process will be described with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S4209, if it is determined that the setting confirmation flag 203x14 is off (S4209: No), it means that the setting confirmation processing was not being executed when the power was last shut down. . The process of S4209 is executed when the setting change flag 203x13 is determined to be OFF in the process of S4206 (S4206: No), that is, the setting change process is performed when the power is last turned off. Even if it was not running.

  Therefore, in this case, the start-up mode is set to the normal mode indicated by the start-up operation by the person in charge of the hall or the like, and the setting confirmation process in S4210 and the process in S4211 described later are skipped, and other start-up processes are executed. Thereafter (S4214), the process proceeds to the main process. In addition, as other startup processing, a 4 millisecond timer interrupt is permitted. In the present embodiment, similarly to the twenty-first or twenty-second embodiments, a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 426) for performing main control of a game is executed with a 4 ms timer interrupt generated every 4 ms. . By permitting a 4 millisecond timer interrupt in the processing of S4214, the timer interrupt processing is executed every 4 milliseconds.

  In the main process of this embodiment, only the updating process of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 and the updating process of the variation type counter CS1 (S702 and S703 in FIG. 385) are executed during the loop. Execute an infinite loop processing. 385. Power failure monitoring processing executed in the main processing in the sixteenth embodiment and the like (processing for monitoring whether or not there is information on occurrence of power interruption and executing processing relating to power interruption when information on occurrence of power interruption is present. Steps S701 and S704 to S707) are executed in the timer interrupt processing in the present embodiment.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting key 501 is in the ON state as a result of the processing in S4208 (S4208: Yes), the RAM erase switch 122 is OFF and the setting key 501 is in the ON state. Means that the startup operation was performed in the setting confirmation mode. Here, the process of S4208 is performed when the setting change flag 203x13 is determined to be off in the process of S4206 (S4206: No), that is, the setting change process when the power was last shut down. Is not running. Accordingly, in this case, as shown in FIG. 430, the pachinko machine 10 is operated in the setting confirmation mode in which the hall-related person or the like has started up, regardless of whether the setting confirmation processing was being executed when the power was last turned off. In order to start up, the process proceeds to S4210, and a setting confirmation process is executed (S4210). By the setting confirmation process, the currently set probability setting value is displayed on the base display device 401. Thereby, the probability set value can be confirmed. Details of the setting confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the setting confirmation processing (S4210) ends, an external output processing is executed (S4211). In this external output processing, information indicating that the setting confirmation processing has been executed or that the probability set value has been displayed on the base display device 401 is output to the hall computer 600 via the external output terminal 503. Thereby, the person in charge of the hall or the like can grasp that the setting confirmation processing is executed in the pachinko machine 10 and the probability set value is displayed on the base display device 401. Therefore, when the probability setting value is incorrectly displayed, it can be quickly grasped. After the external output process has been executed, other start-up processes are executed (S4221), and the process proceeds to the main process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the RAM erasure switch 122 is turned on in the process of S4207, which is a process for confirming the start-up operation performed when the hall-related person or the like turns on the power of the pachinko machine 10, ( S4207: Yes), it is determined whether or not the setting key 501 is on to confirm the start-up operation (S4212). In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which it is determined only whether the setting key 501 is in the ON state. However, as in the twenty-first and twenty-second embodiments, the setting key 501 is in the ON state and the door is open. It may be determined whether or not the switch is on.

  As a result of the processing in S4212, if the setting key 501 is in the ON state (S4212: Yes), the RAM erasure switch 122 is ON and the setting key 501 is in the ON state. It means that the operation was raised. When the start-up operation is performed in the setting change mode, as shown in FIG. 430, regardless of whether the setting check flag 203x14 is on, that is, whether the setting check process was being executed when the power was last shut down. Regardless of this, the start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10 is set to the setting change mode.

  Therefore, as a result of the processing in S4212, if the setting key 501 is in the ON state (S4212: Yes), the setting change processing is executed (S4213). By the setting change processing, the probability set value is displayed on the base display device 401, and when the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on by a person related to the hall or the like, the probability set value is updated and the setting key 501 is turned off. Then, the updated probability set value is determined as the probability set value to be used for the game from now on, and the RAM clear processing is performed. Thus, after changing the probability set value, the gaming machine can be newly started with the changed probability set value. Details of the setting confirmation processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Here, even if the setting confirmation process was being executed when the power was last turned off, the fact that the setting key 501 was turned on and the RAM erasing switch 122 was turned on means that a person involved in the hall is in charge. Etc. clearly indicate the intention to change the probability set value. Therefore, in this case, by starting up the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode, it is possible to perform a start-up process according to the intention of the hall-related personnel and the like.

  When the setting change process (S4213) ends, an external output process is executed (S4214). In this external output process, information indicating that the setting change process has been executed or the probability set value has been changed is output to the hall computer 600 via the external output terminal 503. Thereby, the person in charge of the hall or the like can grasp that the setting change process has been executed by the pachinko machine 10 and the probability set value has been changed. Therefore, when the probability setting value is illegally changed, it can be quickly grasped. After the external output process has been executed, other start-up processes are executed (S4221), and the process proceeds to the main process.

  On the other hand, if the setting key 501 is in the off state as a result of the processing in S4212 (S4212: No), then it is determined whether or not the RAM is abnormal by referring to whether or not the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 is on. (S4215). Here, the RAM erase switch 122 is determined to be ON by the processing of S4207 (S4207: Yes), the setting key 501 is determined to be OFF by the processing of S4212 (S4212: No), and the processing of S4215 is performed. If executed, the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 is always off, so it is determined that the RAM is not abnormal in the process of S4215 (S4215: No).

  In this case, in the process of S4206, since the setting change flag 203x13 is determined to be off (S4206: No), the case where the setting change process was not being executed when the power was last shut down. is there. Therefore, the RAM erase switch 122 is determined to be on by the processing of S4207 (S4207: Yes), the setting key 501 is determined to be off by the processing of S4212 (S4212: No), and the RAM abnormality is determined by the processing of S4215. If it is determined that this is not the case (S4215: No), it means that the person involved in the hall has started up in the RAM clear mode, and the setting change process was not being executed when the power was last turned off. As shown in FIG. 430, the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the RAM clear mode regardless of whether the setting confirmation process was being executed when the power was last turned off. Therefore, a RAM clear process is executed (S4216).

  In this RAM clearing process, data used for controlling the game (predetermined data excluding the probability set value data 203x11 stored in the inner work area 203x1) of the data stored in the RAM 203 is erased (cleared), The accessory ratio data 203s, the base value data 203r, and the error data 203t (see FIG. 421) stored in the outside work area 203y1 are retained without being deleted. A new game can be started by deleting data used for controlling the game (predetermined data excluding the probability set value data 203x11 stored in the inner work area 203x1). Further, even if the RAM clear processing is executed, the probability set value data 203x11 is held, so that the game can be continued with the probability set value determined before the RAM clear processing is executed.

  Here, as described above, even if the setting confirmation process was being executed when the power was last turned off, there is no RAM abnormality, and the startup operation for starting up in the RAM clear mode is performed. The pachinko machine 10 is started up in the RAM clear mode according to the start-up operation of the person in charge of the hall. The fact that the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on indicates that the person concerned in the hall or the like wants to at least clearly clear the RAM. Therefore, in this case, by starting the pachinko machine 10 in the RAM clear mode, it is possible to perform a start-up process according to the intention of a person related to the hall or the like.

  When the RAM clear processing in S4216 is completed, other start-up processing is executed (S4221), and the flow shifts to the main processing.

  On the other hand, if it is determined by the processing of S4203 that the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S4203: No), the calculated RAM determination value is determined by the processing of S4204 to be the same as the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off. If they do not match and it is determined that the RAM determination value is abnormal (S4204: No), the process of S4205 determines that the probability setting value is not within the normal range (S4205: No). Is satisfied, it can be determined that there is an abnormality in the RAM 203, so the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 is turned on (S4217), and the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on to confirm the start-up operation of the person in charge of the hall and the like. Is determined (S4218). In the process of S4218, similarly to the process of S4207, the input / output port 205 is directly accessed to read the state of the RAM erase switch 122.

  As a result of the processing in S4218, when it is determined that the RAM erasure switch 122 is on (S4218: Yes), the process proceeds to the above-described S4212, and further, it is determined whether or not the setting key 501 is on. A determination is made (S4212). As a result, when the setting key 501 is in the ON state (S4212: Yes), it means that the person related to the hall or the like has performed the start-up operation in the setting change mode. Then, in this case (S4212: Yes), in order to start up the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode in accordance with the start-up operation of the person in charge of the hall or the like, the flow shifts to S4213 to execute the above-described setting change processing.

  Here, even if a RAM abnormality has occurred, if the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting change mode, the RAM can be cleared after resetting the probability setting value again. Therefore, a new game can be started with the newly set normal probability set value. The RAM clear flag turns off the RAM abnormality flag 203x15. Therefore, thereafter, main controller 110 can control the game without executing the process related to the RAM abnormality.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the RAM erasure switch 122 is off as a result of the processing of S4218 (S4218: No), even if it is determined that the RAM erasure switch 122 is on as a result of the processing of S4218, the processing of S4212 is performed. As a result of the processing, when it is determined that the setting key 501 is in the off state (S4218: Yes, S4212: No), among the RAM abnormalities, the person in charge of the hall etc. performs the normal mode, the RAM clear mode, and the setting confirmation mode. This means that the startup operation has been performed in any of the startup modes.

  In this case, the flow shifts to the above-described processing of S4215, and in the processing of S4215, it is always determined that the RAM is determined to be abnormal (S4215: Yes), and the flow shifts to the processing of S4219. In the process of S4219, a RAM abnormality setting process is performed (S4219). In this RAM abnormality setting process, a process for performing notification regarding the RAM abnormality is executed. For example, a sound lamp for turning off the power once and prompting to start the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode is provided by sound output from the sound output device 226 and / or display on the third symbol display device 81. A command is transmitted to the control device 113.

  Then, an external output process for notifying the hall computer 600 of the RAM abnormality via the external output terminal 503 is executed (S4220), and other start-up processes are executed (S4221), and the process proceeds to the main process. I do. Since the hall computer 600 is notified that the RAM is abnormal, the person in charge of the hall or the like can surely grasp that the RAM abnormality has occurred without noticing the notification from the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, although the details will be described later, when the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 is turned on due to the occurrence of the RAM abnormality, in the timer interruption processing, the main control regarding the game is not executed except for the random number update processing and the power failure monitoring processing. And That is, since the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 shifts to the main process, since the main control relating to the game is not executed even in the timer interrupt process, the MPU 201 enters an infinite loop state. Then, the pachinko machine 10 is re-started in the setting change mode after the hall related person or the like grasps the RAM abnormality by the RAM abnormality setting process in S4219 or the external output process in S4220, and the probability set value is securely set. By resetting and clearing the RAM 203 together with the RAM abnormality flag 203x15, it is possible to cause the pachinko machine 10 to operate normally.

  As described above, in order to eliminate the RAM abnormality, it is necessary for the person related to the hall or the like to restart the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode. Then, in order to start up in the setting change mode, a dedicated key corresponding to the setting key 501 is required. Therefore, the elimination of the RAM abnormality always involves a hall (store manager) managing the dedicated key. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the hole side from resolving the RAM abnormality without knowing that the RAM abnormality has occurred.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 432, details of the setting change process (S4213), which is one process of the startup process (FIG. 431), will be described. FIG. 432 is a flowchart showing the setting change process (S4213). The setting change process (S4213) is a process executed when the start-up mode is the setting change mode, and is a process for accepting and confirming a change in the probability setting value from a person related to the hall or the like.

  In this setting change process, first, a 4 millisecond timer interrupt is permitted (S4301). By permitting the 4 millisecond timer interrupt, a timer interrupt process (FIG. 434) described later is executed upon occurrence of the 4 millisecond timer interrupt. Although the details will be described later, when the power failure monitoring process is executed during the timer interruption process and the power is cut off during the execution of the setting change process, the state at that time is held in the RAM 203 by the power failure monitoring process. As it is, it is configured to wait in an infinite loop until the power is completely cut off.

  Next, the setting change flag 203x13 is set to ON (S4302), and necessary initial settings are performed at the start of the setting change (S4303). In the process of S4303, for example, an initial value is set in the RAM area used in the setting change process. The clearing (off setting) of the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 accompanying the execution of the setting change process when the RAM is abnormal may be performed in the process of S4303 or may be performed by a RAM clear process (S4313) described later. Good. As described above, when the RAM is abnormal, the hall-related person is urged to restart the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode. When the pachinko machine 10 is restarted in the setting change mode, the probability setting value is reset and the RAM 203 is cleared, so that the pachinko machine 10 can operate normally. Therefore, by clearing (off setting) the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 along with the execution of the setting change process, it can be shown that the RAM abnormality has been eliminated.

  Next, the probability setting value data 203x11 indicating the probability setting value used so far is read and stored as the update probability setting value data 203x12 (S4303). The update of the probability set value is performed not by using the probability set value data 203x11 but by using the update probability set value data 203x12. The update probability set value data 203x12 is displayed on the base display device 401. The display mode at this time may be any one of FIGS. 417 (a), (b), (c-1), (d-1), and (e-1).

  Next, the RAM erase switch flag 203x16 is set to ON (S4305). Note that the on setting of the RAM erasure switch flag 203x16 may be executed in the process of S4303. During the period from when the setting change process is executed to when the process of S4309 (determination process of whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on) described later is executed for the first time, the RAM erase switch flag 203x16 is turned on. The settings need only be made.

  Next, it is determined whether the probability set value stored in the update probability set value data 203x12 is within the normal range ("1" to "6") (S4306), and is not within the normal range, that is, abnormal. If the probability set value has been reached (S4306: No), the update probability set value data 203x12 is changed to the initial value (S4307), and the process proceeds to S4308. The initial value may be “1” which is the minimum value of the probability setting values (“1” to “6”), or “3” or “4” which is the intermediate value of the probability setting values. Or the maximum value of the probability setting value may be “6”. Accordingly, even when the probability set value data 203x11 is destroyed due to a RAM abnormality, or when the update probability set value data 203x12 is destroyed while updating the probability set value, the update probability set value data 203x12 is not used. By saving the probability set value in the normal range as, the probability set value in the normal range can be updated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the probability set value stored in the update probability set value data 203x12 is in the range of “1” to “6” (S4306: Yes) as a result of the process of S4306, the process of S4307 Are skipped, and the flow shifts to the processing of S4308.

  In the process of S4308, it is determined whether the setting key 501 has been turned off (S4308). In the processing of S4308, when it is detected that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 has transitioned from the on state to the off state (edge is detected), it is determined that the setting key 501 has been turned off.

  This is because, as described above, even if the pachinko machine 10 is started in the normal mode or the RAM clear mode in which the setting key 501 is turned off when the power is turned off during the execution of the setting change process, This is because the pachinko machine 10 is configured to execute the setting change process from the beginning (from the beginning). In the process of S4308, when it is determined whether or not the setting key 501 is turned off only by checking that the level of the setting key 501 is in the off state, the pachinko machine is started by the start-up operation in the normal mode or the RAM clear mode. When the setting key 501 is turned on and the execution of the setting change process is started as described above, since the setting key 501 is in the OFF state from the beginning, an affirmative determination is immediately made in the process of S4308, and the probability set value cannot be updated. However, there is a problem that the probability set value is determined as described later.

  On the other hand, when it is detected in the process of S4308 that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 has transitioned from the on state to the off state (edge detection), the setting key 501 is turned off. By making the determination, it is possible to avoid determining that the setting key 501 has been turned off unless the setting key 501 is once turned on and then turned off. Therefore, after the power is turned off during the execution of the setting change process, if the pachinko machine 10 is started up by the start-up operation in the normal mode or the RAM clear mode and the setting change process is executed, the setting key 501 is once turned on. Since the probability set value can be determined only by setting the state to the off state, the problem that the probability set value is determined without updating the probability set value can be avoided.

  As a result of the processing in S4308, when it is determined that the setting key 501 is not in the OFF state (S4308: No), it is determined whether the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on (S4309). In the process of S4309, when the state of the RAM erasure switch 122 changes from the OFF state to the ON state, it is determined that the RAM erasure switch 122 has been turned on, and the probability set value is updated.

  As described above, the RAM erasing switch 122 is used to determine the start-up mode when the pachinko machine 10 starts up, and updates the probability set value when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode. It is also used when That is, each time the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on, the probability set value is updated. Therefore, as a result of the processing in S4309, when it is determined that the RAM erasure switch 122 is turned on (S4309: Yes), the update probability set value data 203x12 is updated (S4310), and the processing returns to S4306. In the process of S4010, specifically, the update probability set value data 203x12 is updated by adding 1, and when the update probability set value data 203x12 is “6”, the update probability set value data 203x12 is set to “1”. Update to

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the RAM erasure switch 122 has not been turned on as a result of the process of S4309 (S4309: No), the process of S4310 is skipped, and the process returns to S4306.

  Thus, in the process of S4309, when the state of the RAM erasure switch 122 is changed from the OFF state to the ON state, it is determined that the RAM erasure switch 122 is turned on. Specifically, the RAM erase switch flag 203x16 indicating the previous state of the RAM erase switch 122 for setting the probability, the output of the RAM erase switch flag 203x16 read in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 434) described later, and When the RAM erase switch flag 203x16 is off and the RAM erase switch 122 is on, it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 has been turned on. Then, after making the determination, in the process of S4309, the state of the RAM erase switch 122 at that time is stored in the RAM erase switch flag 203x16.

  Here, as described above, the RAM erase switch flag 203x16 is temporarily set to “ON” by the processing of S4305 and the like before the processing of S4309 is first performed after the execution of the setting change processing is started. This is because there is a possibility that the RAM erase switch 122 is still turned on as a start-up operation for starting up the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode at the stage of executing the process of S4309 first. If the RAM erasure switch flag 203x16 is off, the RAM erasure switch flag 203x16 is off and the RAM erasure switch 122 is on, so that the RAM erasure switch 122 is turned on to update the probability set value. There is a possibility that the probability setting value may be erroneously determined to have been updated. Accordingly, persons involved in the hall and the like have a distrust of updating the probability set value even though the RAM erase switch 122 has not been turned on to update the probability set value.

  On the other hand, after the execution of the setting change process is started and before the process of S4309 is performed for the first time, the RAM erase switch flag 203x16 is temporarily set to “ON”, so that the pachinko machine can perform the first determination. Even if the RAM erase switch 122 is still turned on as a start-up operation for starting up the 10 in the setting change mode, it is erroneously determined that the RAM erase switch 122 has been turned on for updating the probability set value. It is possible to prevent the probability set value from being updated.

  The loop processing of S4306 to S4310 is continued to be executed until it is determined that the setting key 501 is turned on by the processing of S4308 (S4308: Yes). If it is determined that the setting key 501 has been turned on by the processing of S4308 (S4308: Yes), the update probability setting value data 203x12 is stored as the probability setting value data 203x11 (S4311). As a result, the probability set value updated by the person in charge of the hall or the like is determined as a probability set value to be used in a future game.

  Next, the 4 millisecond timer interrupt is prohibited (S4312), and the execution of the timer interrupt process is stopped. Then, RAM clear processing is executed (S4313), and the setting change processing ends.

  In the process of S4313, of the data stored in the RAM 203, data used for controlling the game (predetermined data excluding the probability set value data 203x11 stored in the inner work area 203x1) is deleted (cleared), and While the accessory ratio data 203s stored in the outside work area 203y1 is deleted, the base value data 203r and the error data 203t (see FIG. 421) are retained without being deleted. A new game can be started by deleting data used for controlling the game (predetermined data excluding the probability set value data 203x11 stored in the inner work area 203x1). Further, since the probability set value data 203x11 is held, a game can be performed with the determined probability set value.

  Further, by this RAM clear processing, the setting change flag 203x13 is set to off. Therefore, if the power is not turned off during the execution of the setting change processing, the setting change flag 203x13 is set to off, while if the power is turned off during the execution of the setting change processing, the setting change flag 203x13 is turned on. Will remain. Therefore, in the startup process shown in FIG. 431, if the setting change flag 203x13 is on, it can be determined that the setting change process was being executed when the power was last turned off.

  Further, if the probability set value is changed, the accessory ratio also changes. Therefore, if the accessory ratio data 203s based on the probability set value before the change remains, if the accessory ratio data 203s based on the changed probability set value is left. The ratio cannot be calculated correctly. In the setting change RAM clearing process, by deleting the accessory ratio data 203s, it is possible to correctly calculate the accessory ratio based on the changed probability set value.

  On the other hand, the base value does not change even if the probability setting value is changed. Therefore, in the setting change RAM clear processing, the base value data 203r is held and the past base value and the base value are calculated. By retaining necessary information, it is possible to detect unfair acts performed in the past without being concealed. Also, by retaining the error data 203t in the setting change RAM clearing process, even if the fraudulent person who caused the error starts the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode, the error history is stored. It cannot be erased and concealment of fraudulent acts can be suppressed.

  When the setting change process ends, the display of the probability set value on the base display device 401 ends, and the display of the base value on the base display device 401 starts.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 433, details of the setting confirmation process (S4210), which is one of the start-up processes (FIG. 431), will be described. FIG. 433 is a flowchart showing the setting confirmation processing (S4215). The setting confirmation process (S4215) is a process executed when the start-up mode is the setting confirmation mode, and is a process for displaying the currently set probability setting value on the base display device 401.

  In this setting confirmation processing, first, as in the processing of S4301 of the setting change processing, a 4 millisecond timer interrupt is permitted (S4401). By permitting the 4 millisecond timer interrupt, a timer interrupt process (FIG. 434) described later is executed upon occurrence of the 4 millisecond timer interrupt. Although the details will be described later, when the power failure monitoring process is executed during the timer interruption process and the power is cut off during the execution of the setting change process, the state at that time is held in the RAM 203 by the power failure monitoring process. As it is, it is configured to wait in an infinite loop until the power is completely cut off.

  Next, the setting confirmation flag 203x14 is set to ON (S4402), for example, as shown in one of (a), (b), (c-2), (d-2), and (e-2) in FIG. In the display mode, when the display of the probability set value indicated by the probability set value data 203x11 on the base display device 401 is started, it is determined whether or not the setting key 501 has been turned off (S4403). In the process of S4403, when it is detected that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 has transitioned from the on state to the off state (edge is detected), it is determined that the setting key 501 has been turned off.

  This is because, as described above, even if the pachinko machine 10 is started in the normal mode in which the setting key 501 is turned off when the power is turned off during the execution of the setting confirmation process, the pachinko machine 10 is not operated. This is because the configuration is such that the setting confirmation process is executed from the beginning (from the beginning). In the process of S4403, the pachinko machine 10 is started up by the start-up operation in the normal mode when it is determined whether or not the setting key 501 is turned off only by checking that the level of the setting key 501 is off. When the setting confirmation processing is started as described above, since the setting key 501 is in the OFF state from the beginning, an affirmative judgment is immediately made in the processing of S4403, and the confirmation of the probability setting value ends instantaneously. The problem arises.

  On the other hand, when it is detected in the process of S4403 that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 has transitioned from the on-state to the off-state (edge detection), the setting key 501 is turned off. By making the determination, it is possible to avoid determining that the setting key 501 has been turned off unless the setting key 501 is once turned on and then turned off. Therefore, after the power is turned off during the execution of the setting confirmation process, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up by the start-up operation in the normal mode and the setting confirmation process is executed, the setting key 501 is once turned on and then turned on. Since the confirmation of the probability set value can be completed only by turning off, the problem that the confirmation of the probability set value ends instantaneously can be avoided.

  If the setting key 501 is not in the off state as a result of the processing in S4403 (S4403: No), S4403 is repeatedly executed, and the process waits until the setting key 501 is turned off. During this time, the display of the probability set value is continuously performed on the base display device 401. When the setting key 501 is turned off (S4403: Yes), when the display of the probability set value on the base display device 401 is terminated and the display of the base value on the base display device 401 is started, the setting is being checked. The flag 203x14 is cleared to off (S4404). As a result, if the power is not turned off during the execution of the setting confirmation process, the setting confirmation flag 203x14 is set to off, while if the power is turned off during the execution of the setting confirmation process, the setting confirmation flag 203x14 is turned off. It remains on. Therefore, in the startup processing shown in FIG. 431, if the setting confirmation flag 203x14 is on, it can be determined that the setting confirmation processing was being executed when the power was last shut down.

  Then, the 4 millisecond timer interrupt is prohibited (S4405), the execution of the timer interrupt processing is stopped, and the setting confirmation processing ends.

  Next, a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the twenty-third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 434 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing. As described above, this timer interrupt process is a process for performing main control of a game, and is executed by a 4 millisecond timer interrupt generated every 4 milliseconds.

  In this timer interruption process, first, a random number update process used for a big hit lottery or a second symbol hit lottery is executed (S4501), and then a power failure monitoring process is executed (S4502). In the power failure monitoring process, a process is performed to monitor whether or not there is information on occurrence of power interruption, and to execute a process related to power interruption when there is information on occurrence of power interruption (processing corresponding to S701 and S704 to S707 in FIG. 385). ).

  Next, with reference to the RAM abnormality flag 203x15, it is determined whether or not the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 is on and a RAM abnormality has occurred (S4503). As a result, when it is determined that the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 is off and no RAM abnormality has occurred (S4503: No), the processing of S4504 to S4515 is executed as normal game processing.

  That is, a trial test information setting process for setting trial test information is executed (S4504), and then, a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a solenoid 209, and a base display device control circuit 402 connected to the input / output port 205. , The first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol holding lamp 84, the external output terminal 503, etc., perform a port output process for outputting an output signal set in the previous timer interrupt process. The process is executed (S4505).

  Next, the state of various sensors, switches 208 and the like are read (S4506). The state of the RAM erase switch 122 is also read by the processing in S4506. Next, subtraction processing of various timers used for game control is performed (S4507), and then processing for detecting improper behavior due to impact, magnets, or the like based on an error signal from the payout control device 111 is executed (S4507). S4508).

  Next, a launch control process for controlling the launch of a sphere by the sphere launch unit 112a is executed (S4509), and then a payout command for notifying the number of balls paid out by the payout control device 111 is issued to the payout control device 111. A payout command receiving process is received (S4510), and then a payout command transmitting process for instructing the payout control device 111 to pay out a ball is executed (S4511).

  Next, a special figure / special electric power control process relating to a variable display of the first symbol (third symbol, special symbol) and a big hit is executed (S4512), and then a general symbol / variable display relating to the variable display and the hit of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is performed. The ordinary power control process is performed (S4513). Then, display LED data setting processing of the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol holding lamp 84, and the like is executed (S4514), and output to the hall computer 600 via the external output terminal 503. An external signal setting process for setting an external signal to be performed is executed (S4515), and the timer interrupt process ends.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S4503, if the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 is on and it is determined that a RAM abnormality has occurred (S4503: Yes), the processing in S4504 to S4515, which is a normal game processing, is skipped. Then, the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

  As described above, when the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 is turned on by detecting the occurrence of the RAM abnormality by the start-up process of FIG. 431, in the timer interruption process, the main processes related to the game except the random number update process and the power failure monitoring process are performed. Control is not executed. As a result, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 enters the infinite loop state since the main control relating to the game is not executed even in the timer interruption process after the transition to the main process. Then, the pachinko machine 10 is re-started in the setting change mode after making the hall-related persons grasp the RAM abnormality by the RAM abnormality setting processing in S4219 and the external output processing in S4220 of the start-up processing, and the probability setting is performed. Clearly resetting the value and clearing the RAM 203 together with the RAM abnormality flag 203 × 15 allow the pachinko machine 10 to operate normally.

  As described above, in order to eliminate the RAM abnormality, it is necessary for the person related to the hall or the like to restart the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode. Then, in order to start up in the setting change mode, a dedicated key corresponding to the setting key 501 is required. Therefore, the elimination of the RAM abnormality always involves a hall (store manager) managing the dedicated key. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the hole side from resolving the RAM abnormality without knowing that the RAM abnormality has occurred.

  On the other hand, in the timer interrupt processing, even when a RAM abnormality has occurred, the random number updating processing and the power failure monitoring processing are executed. By executing the random number update process, the random number can be continuously generated while the power is on. In addition, by executing the power failure monitoring process, even if a RAM abnormality has occurred, the occurrence of a power failure can be monitored, and when the power failure has occurred, a process corresponding to the power failure can be reliably executed. In particular, when the pachinko machine 10 has been started up in the setting change mode in the situation where the RAM abnormality is detected, the setting change processing is executed in the start-up processing. If the power is turned off during the execution of the setting change processing, the setting change flag 203x13 is held in the RAM 203 while being turned on. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up next time, Regardless of the start-up operation, the setting change process can be restarted from the beginning.

  As described above, the configuration described in the description of the twenty-third embodiment achieves the effects described above. In addition, the same configuration as the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixteenth embodiment to the twenty-second embodiment can achieve the same effect as that obtained by the configuration.

<24th embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the twenty-fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-first embodiment, a setting key 501 is provided on the front side of the main controller 110 provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 (that is, on the back side of the pachinko machine 10). The jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol can be changed in a plurality of stages (for example, six stages of set values “1” to “6”).

  The setting key 501 is provided so as to be exposed in the direction of the back of the pachinko machine 10 when the inner frame 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, and the locking of the inner frame 12 is released by a person involved in the hall or the like. When the inner frame 12 is rotated with respect to the outer frame 11, the setting key 501 is exposed to the front of the pachinko machine 10 with the rotation of the inner frame 12. With this configuration, when the person in charge of the hall wants to change the setting of the pachinko machine 10, the key for changing the setting can be immediately inserted into the setting key 501 by rotating the inner frame 12. The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed quickly.

  The hall is provided with an island facility incorporating a ball automatic supply device or the like in a closed predetermined space, and by attaching an outer frame of a pachinko machine to both sides of the island facility in the long side direction, the island facility is installed. A plurality of pachinko machines can be installed in the system. Then, outside the opening hours of the hall, the persons involved in the hall release the lock between the inner frame and / or the front frame and the outer frame of each of the pachinko machines installed on the island facilities, and attach them to the outer frame (island facilities). On the other hand, the inner frame and / or the front frame are opened, and setting change work and maintenance work of each pachinko machine are performed.

  However, since the setting key 501 is configured to be exposed on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, for example, in a situation where the pachinko machine 10 is installed on one long side of the hall island equipment, the pachinko machine 10 is installed. The inner frame of another pachinko machine installed on the other long side (that is, the back side of the pachinko machine 10) other than the long side of the pachinko machine 10 is opened for some reason (for example, fraud, etc.). If so, the setting key 501 provided to be exposed on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 can be directly operated. As a result, even if the inner frame 12 of the pachinko machine 10 is not opened, the pachinko machine on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is opened, and the setting key 501 of the pachinko machine 10 is directly operated. When the setting key 501 is illegally operated, the setting contents may be changed, which may cause an unexpected disadvantage to the hall. In addition, for example, illegal operations such as unauthorized replacement of the main control device 110 due to cutting of the sealing unit 100c connecting the box base 100a and the box cover 100b of the board box 100 are performed, and an unexpected disadvantage occurs in the hall. May cause.

  Here, as in a slot machine, a structure in which the entire back side of the pachinko machine 10 is covered with a housing structure to prevent improper operation of the setting key 501 of the main control device 110 from the back side of the pachinko machine 10 can be considered. In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, unlike a slot machine, it is necessary to replenish balls from the upper side of the island facility and to discharge out balls, and the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a housing. If the ball is covered with the structure, a complicated structure for replenishment and discharge of the ball is required, and the manufacturing cost may increase due to the housing structure and the replenishment and discharge structure.

  Also, in the island facility, when the wiring connection with the card sanding device arranged adjacent to the left side of the pachinko machine 10 and the connection wiring with the power supply are considered, the back structure of the pachinko machine 10, particularly the back of the pachinko machine 10 The structure on the left side is desirably configured to be open to some extent, and is preferably a structure that is easily connected to the above devices and the like by wiring.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-fourth embodiment, a protective cover member 140 for covering the setting key 501 from the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is provided on the right side plate 11d of the outer frame 11, and the inner frame 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11. In this situation, the protection cover member 140 is configured so that the setting key 501 is not exposed on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the setting key 501 from being directly operated from the back side of the pachinko machine 10 by the protective cover member 140 when the inner frame 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11. It is possible to prevent an improper operation such as an illegal operation of the setting key 501.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-fourth embodiment, the sealing unit 100c provided on the left side of the back surface of the board box 100 that houses the main controller 110 (the right side of the pachinko machine 10 when viewed from the front) is covered with a protective cover member 140. By configuring the sealing unit 100c so that it cannot be in direct contact with the sealing unit 100c, it is difficult to perform unauthorized operations such as cutting the sealing unit 100c and replacing the main control device 110. Can be prevented.

  Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 according to the twenty-fourth embodiment will be described focusing on differences from the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixteenth to twenty-third embodiments. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-fourth embodiment, the same components and processes as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the sixteenth to twenty-third embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals as those of the sixteenth to twenty-third embodiments. And its illustration and description are omitted.

  First, the rear configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 435 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the twenty-fourth embodiment. The difference between the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-fourth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-first embodiment is that the outer frame 11 is configured by combining a wooden plate and an aluminum plate, and 11 is that a protective cover member 140 is attached. Other configurations are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-first embodiment.

  The outer frame 11 of the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-fourth embodiment has an upper plate 11a made of a wooden plate as an upper side, a lower plate 11b also made of a wooden plate as a lower side, and is more rigid than the wooden plate. The left side plate 11c made of an aluminum plate material having a high height is defined as a left side, and the right side plate 11d also formed of an aluminum plate material is formed as a right side with four fixed sides.

  By forming the left side plate 11c and the right side plate 11d of the outer frame 11 with an aluminum plate material, even if the left side plate 11c and the right side plate 11d are formed to be thinner than a conventional wooden plate material, Since the rigidity of the entire machine 11 can be maintained, a design space in the lateral direction of the pachinko machine 10 can be secured, and the degree of freedom in designing the pachinko machine 10 can be increased.

  Further, the left side plate 11c and the right side plate 11d are formed in a U-shape in cross section when viewed from above, and are directed toward the inside of the pachinko machine 10 at the side surface portion located on the side surface of the pachinko machine 10 and the front side of the pachinko machine 10 at the side surface portion. The pachinko machine 10 includes a front portion that is extended and formed on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 and a rear surface portion that extends toward the inside of the pachinko machine 10.

  The pachinko machine 10 drives the outer frame 11 (that is, the pachinko machine 10) by driving a nail into an island facility (not shown) from the inner wall side of the upper plate 11a and the lower plate 11b of the outer frame 11. Is configured to be fixed to the island facility.

  The protective cover member 140 is fixed to a right side plate 11d of the outer frame 11 by a fixing screw 11g (see FIG. 437) described later, and is used to connect a setting key 501 of the main control device 110 and a sealing unit 100c (see FIG. 440) described later. It is configured to cover together.

  Note that the base display device 401 and the error display button 502 of the main control device 110 are not covered by the protective cover member 140 and are exposed toward the back side of the pachinko machine 10. This is because the base display device 401 and the error display button 502 do not change the settings of the pachinko machine 10 and are used to display the status of the pachinko machine 10, and are unlikely to be fraudulent. Therefore, it is not necessary to cover with the protective cover member 140. With this configuration, the protective cover member 140 can be formed with a minimum necessary size, and the manufacturing cost required for the protective cover member 140 can be reduced.

  Here, the details of the protective cover member 140 of the twenty-fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 436 (a) is a left front perspective view of the protective cover member 140 according to the twenty-fourth embodiment as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 436 (b) is a right side rear view of the protective cover member 140 according to the twenty-fourth embodiment. FIG.

  The protective cover member 140 is formed entirely of a transparent resin (for example, a polycarbonate resin), and includes a cover attaching portion 150 attached to the right side plate 11d of the outer frame 11, and a cover attaching portion 150. An upright portion 160 extending and formed in the back direction (rear side) of the pachinko machine 10, and a rightward direction of the back surface of the pachinko machine 10 from the tip side of the upright portion 160 (that is, the back side (rear side) of the pachinko machine 10). (I.e., a cover 170 extending from the pachinko machine 10 to the left as viewed from the front).

  The cover mounting portion 150 includes a mounting surface 151 that is in surface contact with a part of the inner wall surface of the side surface of the right side plate 11d of the outer frame 11, an upper mounting hole 152 and a lower mounting hole 153 that are formed in the mounting surface 151. And a curved portion 154 formed in a shape to abut along the inner wall shape of the right side plate 11d.

  The upper mounting hole 152 and the lower mounting hole 153 are formed in the mounting surface 151 so that a fixing screw 11g (see FIG. 437) described later can be inserted thereinto. The upper mounting hole 152 and the lower mounting hole 153 are located at positions where they can be respectively mounted on a cover upper mounting hole 11e and a cover lower mounting hole 11f (see FIG. 437) which are formed in the right side plate 11d of the outer frame 11 and are described later. Is provided.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 437 to FIG. 439, a manner of attaching the protective cover member 140 to the outer frame 11 will be described. FIG. 437 is a right side view of the pachinko machine 10 (excluding the front frame 14) in the twenty-fourth embodiment. FIG. 438 is a front left perspective view for explaining a method of attaching the protective cover member 140 to the outer frame 11 in the twenty-fourth embodiment. FIG. 439 is a front view of the outer frame 11 and the protective cover member 140 attached to the outer frame 11 in the twenty-fourth embodiment. For convenience of explanation, FIG. 437 shows a state in which the front frame 14 has been removed from the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12, and FIGS. 438 and 439 show that the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 have been removed from the outer frame 11. And the description thereof is omitted.

  First, as shown in FIG. 437, a cover mounting hole, which is a through hole for mounting the protective cover member 140, is provided in the middle part of the side surface of the right side plate 11 d constituting the outer frame 11 of the pachinko machine 10. 11e and a cover lower mounting hole 11f are formed by drilling, and fixing screws 11g are screwed into the respective holes.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 438, the upper cover mounting hole 11e and the lower cover mounting hole 11f are formed at positions corresponding to the upper mounting hole 152 and the lower mounting hole 153 of the protective cover member 140, respectively. Specifically, an upper cover mounting hole 11e is formed at a position corresponding to the upper mounting hole 152, and a lower cover mounting hole 11f is formed at a position corresponding to the lower mounting hole 153. Then, with the (outer) mounting surface 151 and the curved portion 154 of the protective cover member 140 abutting on the inner side of the side surface portion and the rear surface portion of the right side plate 11d, the outer side of the right side plate 11d (the right rear side in FIG. 438). ), The fixing screws 11g are screwed into the cover upper mounting hole 11e and the upper mounting hole 152, and are also screwed into the cover lower mounting hole 11f and the lower mounting hole 153, whereby the outer frame 11 ( The protective cover member 140 is fixed to the right side plate 11d).

  Here, the curved portion 154 of the protective cover member 140 is formed in a shape that comes into contact with the inner wall shape of the side surface portion and the rear surface portion of the right side plate 11d. The rear surface of the right side plate 11d is made of aluminum. Therefore, in a state where the inner frame 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the inner wall of the side surface and the rear surface of the right side plate 11 d abuts on the curved portion 154, and the right side plate 11 d and the protective cover member 140 come into contact with each other. There is no gap (space). Thus, when the inner frame 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the fixing screw 11g inserted into the upper mounting hole 152 and the cover mounting hole 11e from the back side of the pachinko machine 10, and the lower mounting By making it impossible to directly operate the fixing screw 11g inserted into the hole 153 and the cover lower mounting hole 11f, it is possible to prevent the protective cover member 140 from being detached from the back side of the pachinko machine 10. Can be.

  Further, a card sanding device (not shown) is installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 10 in the island facility, and usually, a gap is not formed between the right side plate 11d of the outer frame 11 and the card sanding device. Is configured. Therefore, by configuring so that the fixing screw 11g cannot be directly operated from the right side of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to prevent the protective cover member 140 from being detached from the side of the pachinko machine 10.

  Therefore, it is difficult to remove the protection cover member 140 from the back side or the side surface of the pachinko machine 10, and by directly covering the setting key 501 by covering the setting key 501 with the protection cover member 140 when the inner frame 12 is closed. Can not be operated.

  Further, the curved portion 154 is formed in a thin plate shape, and is configured to be elastically deformable based on the elastic force of a resin material constituting the entire protective cover member 140. Therefore, when an external force is applied to the protective cover member 140, the curved portion 154 causes the protective cover member 140 to be slightly bent in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 10. With this configuration, for example, even when the main controller 110 (see FIG. 437) comes into contact with the protective cover member 140 and receives an impact when the inner frame 12 is closed by the closing momentum, for example, Since the bending portion 154 is bent by the elastic force and absorbs the impact, the protection cover member 140 can be prevented from being damaged.

  Here, returning to FIGS. 436 (a) and 436 (b), the configuration of the protective cover member 140 will be described. The protection cover member 140 is provided with an upright portion 160 extending from the cover mounting portion 150 toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 in addition to the cover mounting portion 150, and a front end side of the upright portion 160 (that is, A cover 170 is formed in a cantilever shape from the back side of the pachinko machine 10 to the left side of the pachinko machine 10 when viewed from the front. The upright portion 160 is provided with an upright cover wall 161, an upright upper cover portion 162, an upright lower cover portion 163, an upright inner rib 164, and an upright outer rib 165. Further, the cover 170 is provided with a cover plate 171, a cover-side protrusion 172, a key cover 173, and a cover outer rib 174.

  Hereafter, the configuration of the upright portion 160 will be described in detail. The upright cover wall 161 is formed so as to extend continuously from the curved portion 154 of the cover attaching portion 150 toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 10. The upright cover wall 161 covers the right side surface of the main control device 110 as viewed from the front (the left side surface as viewed from the back), and is provided with a setting key 501 and a sealing unit 100c (to be described later, see FIG. 440). It is possible to prevent an unauthorized act from the right side of the front view 110 (left side of the back view).

  The upright upper cover portion 162 includes an upper inner cover portion 162a and an upper outer cover portion 162b. The upper inner cover portion 162a extends horizontally from the entire upper portion of the upright cover wall 161 and a portion of the upper portion of the cover plate 171 toward the inside of the pachinko machine 10 (in the direction in which the main control device 110 is provided). It is formed. The upper outer cover portion 162b extends horizontally from the entire upper portion of the upright cover wall 161 toward the outside of the pachinko machine 10 (in a direction in which the main controller 110 is not provided).

  By forming the upright upper cover portion 162 such that the upper inner cover portion 162a and the upper outer cover portion 162b are flush with each other, the right upper portion of the main controller 110 as viewed from the front (the upper left portion as viewed from the back) is formed. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from the upper right side in front view (the upper left side in rear view) of the main control device 110 that is covered and provided with a setting key 501 and a sealing unit 100c (both shown in FIG. 440) described later. The upper outer cover portion 162b can also be used, for example, in a case where wire misbehavior is performed from the left side of the back surface of the pachinko machine 10 and when the wire is transmitted upward from the outside of the upright cover wall 161, the wire is Collides with the upper outer cover portion 162b, thereby preventing the wire from entering.

  The upright lower cover 163 includes a lower inner cover 163a (see FIG. 436 (a)) and a lower outer cover 163b (see FIG. 436 (b)). The lower inner cover portion 163a extends horizontally from the entire lower portion of the upright cover wall 161 and the entire lower portion of the cover plate 171 toward the inside of the pachinko machine 10 (in the direction in which the main control device 110 is disposed). Is formed. Further, the lower outer cover portion 163b is formed to extend horizontally from the entire lower portion of the upright cover wall 161 toward the outside of the pachinko machine 10 (the direction in which the main control device 110 is not provided).

  The lower inner cover 163a has a larger area than the upper inner cover 162a. This is because the position of the main control device 110 is closer to the lower side of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 435), and the main controller 110 is accessed from the lower side from above the pachinko machine 10. For this reason, a person who misbehaves with respect to the main control device 110 often performs misconduct by infiltrating a wire or the like from the lower side of the back of the pachinko machine 10 in many cases. Therefore, in order to prevent the above-mentioned misconduct, the area of the lower inner cover portion 163a is formed to be large, and the lower inner cover portion 163a forms the main control device 110 at the lower right portion in front view (lower left portion in rear view). The gap between the control device 110 and the protective cover member 140 is configured to be as small as possible.

  As described above, by forming the standing lower cover portion 163 such that the lower inner cover portion 163a and the lower outer cover portion 163b are flush with each other, the right lower portion in the front view (the lower left portion in the rear view) of the main control device 110 is formed. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from the lower right side in front view (lower left side in rear view) of the main control device 110 that is covered and provided with a setting key 501 and a sealing unit 100c (both refer to FIG. 440) described later. Further, the lower outer cover portion 163b allows, for example, when the wire is transmitted downward from the outside of the upright cover wall 161 in a case where an illegal act is performed by a wire, the wire is connected to the lower outer cover portion 163b. The collision can prevent the wire from entering.

  The upright inner rib 164 (see FIG. 436 (a)) is formed in a rib shape in which the amount of protrusion gradually increases toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 in the middle portion of the upright cover wall 161 inside the pachinko machine 10. I have. The upright inner ribs 164 function as reinforcing ribs of the upright cover wall 161 to prevent the upright cover wall 161 from being damaged. In particular, other parts (for example, main control) disposed on the pachinko machine 10 can be used. The degree of reinforcement of the upright cover wall 161 is increased by gradually increasing the amount of protrusion of the upright inner rib 164 toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 within a range not in contact with the device 110).

  The upright outer rib 165 (see FIG. 436 (b)) is formed in a rib shape in which the amount of protrusion gradually decreases toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 in the middle portion of the upright cover wall 161 outside the pachinko machine 10, It is formed at a position that is paired inside / outside with the upright inside rib 164 described above. The upright outer rib 165 functions as a reinforcing rib of the upright cover wall 161 similarly to the upright inner rib 164, and prevents the upright cover wall 161 from being damaged.

  The upstanding outer ribs 165 are formed so as to have the same protrusion amounts as the upper outer cover portion 162b and the lower outer cover portion 163b described above, and the pachinko machine 10 to which the protective cover member 140 is attached is installed in the island facility. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed, the standing outer rib 165 is not caught by the island facilities, and the pachinko machine 10 is not obstructed.

  Hereafter, the configuration of the cover 170 will be described in detail. The cover plate 171 is configured such that the plate surface of the cover plate 171 extends in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10 from the above-described upright portion 160 (the upright cover wall 161, the upright upper cover portion 162, the upright lower cover portion 163, and the upright inner rib 164). Each direction is extended to a position that is equal to or greater than the setting unit 100d (see FIG. 440) of the main control device 110 and less than the base display device 401 (error display button 502).

  On the front side of the pachinko machine 10 of the cover plate 171 (that is, the side facing the main control device 110; the same applies hereinafter), a position corresponding to a setting unit 100d (see FIG. 440) of the main control device 110, which will be described later, The cover-side protrusion 172 is formed to project in a square shape toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and a part of the cover plate 171 surrounded by the cover-side protrusion 172 is configured as a key cover portion 173.

  The cover-side protrusion 172 is formed so as to enter a space formed by a setting-portion side wall 100e of the setting portion 100d and a case-side protrusion 100g, which will be described later, and has a protrusion amount enough to abut the setting-portion bottom surface 100f. Is formed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 439, the protective cover member 140 attached to the right side plate 11d of the outer frame 11 is installed such that the plate surface of the cover plate 171 of the cover 170 described later faces the front side of the pachinko machine 10. Is done. The cover plate 171 has a setting unit 100d (see FIG. 442) provided in the board box 100 of the main control device 110 to be described later. 110 "in some cases), a cover-side protrusion 172 formed in a square shape on the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and a key surrounded by the cover-side protrusion 172. And a cover portion 173. Therefore, the key cover portion 173 of the protection cover member 140 and the setting portion 100d of the main control device 110 are configured to face each other.

  Here, with reference to FIGS. 440 to 442, the configuration of the setting unit 100d in the main control device 110 of the twenty-fourth embodiment, the cover-side protrusion 172 of the protective cover member 140, and the key cover 173 will be described. FIG. 440 is a front view of the board box 100 of the main control device 110 according to the twenty-fourth embodiment, FIG. 441 is a cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 taken along the line AA of FIG. 435, and FIG. 5 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of main controller 110 and protective cover member 140 in region B of FIG. For convenience of description, FIG. 440 omits illustration of parts that are not related to the present invention, and FIG. 441 illustrates a state in which the front frame 14 is removed from the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12. Description is also omitted.

  First, as shown in FIG. 440, the main control device 110 according to the twenty-fourth embodiment has the main control device 110 housed in a board box 100 in which a box base 100a (see FIG. 442) and a box cover 100b are combined. A setting key 501 used to change the set probability set value or check the set probability set value is provided on the main board constituting the control device 110.

  The box cover 100b is provided with a setting portion 100d at a position corresponding to the setting key 501. The setting portion 100d is provided on the box cover 100b from the outermost surface side (that is, the back surface of the pachinko machine 10). The cover-side protrusion 172 is formed to be recessed by the amount of protrusion of the cover 172 so as to accommodate the entire cover-side protrusion 172. As a part constituting the setting portion 100d, a setting portion side wall 100e, a setting portion bottom surface 100f, and a case-side protrusion 100g are provided.

  The setting portion side wall 100e is formed to extend from the outermost surface side of the box cover 100b toward the main board side (not shown), and as shown in FIGS. 441 and 442, the extension length of the setting portion side wall 100e. The height (the amount of depression of the setting portion 100d) is formed to be equal to the amount of protrusion of the cover-side protrusion 172.

  The setting portion bottom surface 100f is formed to extend from the setting portion side wall 100e, has a keyhole (not shown) that exposes a keyhole portion of the setting key 501, and is formed so as to close a portion other than the keyhole. . With this configuration, the main control device 110 can be operated on the setting key 501 while being housed in the closed space formed by the box base 100a (see FIG. 442) and the box cover 100b.

  The case-side protrusion 100g is formed so as to project from the setting portion bottom surface 100f toward the protective cover member 140 (the back side of the pachinko machine 10) so as to have the same amount of protrusion as the cover-side protrusion 172 of the protective cover member 140. ing. The cover-side protrusion 172 of the protective cover member 140 is formed to be accommodated in a space formed by the setting portion side wall 100e and the case-side protrusion 100g.

  That is, as shown in FIGS. 441 and 442, when the inner frame 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the cover-side protrusion 172 is formed by the setting portion side wall 100e and the case-side protrusion 100g. And the cover-side protrusion 172 abuts the setting portion bottom surface 100f of the setting portion 100d while the case-side protrusion 100g abuts on the cover plate 171 of the protective cover member 140. . With this configuration, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the arrangement portion of the setting key 501 is sealed by the key cover portion 173 of the protection cover member 140 and the case-side protrusion 100g of the setting portion 100d. By making the access to the setting unit 100d difficult by the side protrusions 172, the security of the setting key 501 is enhanced, and there is no room for wire or the like to enter, so that an illegal act on the setting key 501 can be prevented.

  Also, the case-side protrusion 100g of the main control device 110 and the cover plate 171 of the protection cover member 140 are in contact with the setting portion bottom surface 100f of the main control device 110 and the cover-side protrusion 172 of the protection cover member 140, respectively. With this configuration, if the setting change key is still inserted in the setting key 501, the inner frame 12 cannot be locked to the outer frame 11. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the person in charge of the hall from forgetting to collect the setting change key.

  Returning to FIG. 436 (a) and FIG. 436 (b), the description will be continued. On the back side of the pachinko machine 10 of the cover plate 171 (that is, the side not facing the main controller 110), cover outer ribs 174 are formed in a rectangular shape and a cross-shaped rib shape. The cover outer rib 174 functions as a reinforcing rib of the cover plate 171 to prevent the cover plate 171 from being damaged.

  Further, the cover outer rib 174 allows the wire to move upward or downward from the cover plate 171 when the wire is transmitted upward or downward from the back side of the pachinko machine 10, for example. The intrusion of the wire can be prevented by hitting the outer rib 174.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 443, the state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of changing the settings of the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 443 is a left front perspective view showing the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 unfolded (opened) with respect to the outer frame 11 to which the protective cover member 140 according to the twenty-fourth embodiment is attached. For convenience of description, in FIG. 443, portions not related to the present invention are omitted or simplified, and the description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 443, when the person related to the hall unlocks the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 with respect to the outer frame 11 outside the opening hours of the hall or the like, the state shown in FIG. The frame 14 rotates with respect to the outer frame 11, and the back side of the inner frame 12 is exposed toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10. At this time, the protective cover member 140 remains fixed to the outer frame 11, and the setting key 501 of the main control device 110 installed on the back surface of the inner frame 12 turns the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14. With the movement, the pachinko machine 10 is exposed to the front side, and can be immediately operated by the person in charge of the hall.

  Therefore, the person in charge of the hall can immediately change the setting of the pachinko machine 10 simply by unlocking and rotating the inner frame 12 without performing complicated work such as removing the protective cover member 140. . Further, in performing the setting change operation, the user can perform the setting change operation while visually recognizing the base display device 401, and the setting change operation can be easily performed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-fourth embodiment, the protection cover member 140 that covers the setting key 501 from the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is provided on the right side plate 11d of the outer frame 11. When the inner frame 12 is closed, the setting key 501 is not exposed to the back side of the pachinko machine 10 by the protective cover member 140. When the lock of the inner frame 12 is unlocked and the setting is changed, the back side of the inner frame 12 is exposed to the front of the pachinko machine 10 with the protective cover member 140 remaining on the outer frame 11. It is configured to

  With this configuration, when the inner frame 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the setting key 501 is directly operated from the back side of the pachinko machine 10 with a simple configuration using the protective cover member 140. The setting key 501 can be prevented from being fraudulently operated. Further, since the security performance on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved without using a housing structure such as a slot machine, an increase in the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 due to the use of the housing structure or the like is suppressed. be able to.

  When the inner frame 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11, the setting key 501 of the main control device 110 installed on the back of the inner frame 12 is operated by the pachinko machine as the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 rotate. It is exposed to the front side of the machine 10 and is immediately ready for operation by persons involved in the hall. Therefore, the person in charge of the hall can perform a setting change operation of the pachinko machine 10 without performing a complicated operation such as removing the protective cover member 140. Further, in performing the setting change operation, the user can perform the setting change operation while visually recognizing the base display device 401, and the setting change operation can be easily performed.

  Further, when the inner frame 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the cover-side protrusion 172 is configured to enter a space formed by the setting portion side wall 100e and the case-side protrusion 100g. When the side projection 100g contacts the cover plate 171 of the protective cover member 140, the cover-side projection 172 is configured to contact the setting unit bottom surface 100f of the setting unit 100d. With this configuration, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the arrangement portion of the setting key 501 is sealed by the key cover portion 173 of the protection cover member 140 and the case-side protrusion 100g of the setting portion 100d. By making the access to the setting unit 100d difficult by the side protrusions 172, the security of the setting key 501 is enhanced, and there is no room for wire or the like to enter, so that an illegal act on the setting key 501 can be prevented.

  Further, the case-side protrusion 100g of the main control device 110 and the cover plate 171 of the protection cover member 140 are in contact with the setting portion bottom surface 100f of the main control device 110 and the cover-side protrusion 172 of the protection cover member 140, respectively. If the key for setting change is kept inserted in the setting key 501, the inner frame 12 cannot be locked to the outer frame 11, so that the setting by the person in charge of the hall is required. It is possible to prevent forgetting to collect the change key.

  When the inner frame 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the inner wall of the right side plate 11 d abuts against the curved portion 154, and no gap (space) is generated between the right side plate 11 d and the protective cover member 140. State. Thus, when the inner frame 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the fixing screw 11g inserted into the upper mounting hole 152 and the cover mounting hole 11e from the back side of the pachinko machine 10, and the lower mounting By making it impossible to directly operate the fixing screw 11g inserted into the hole 153 and the cover lower mounting hole 11f, it is possible to prevent the protective cover member 140 from being detached from the back side of the pachinko machine 10. Can be.

  Further, a card sanding device is installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 10 in the island facility, and is usually configured so that no gap is formed between the right side plate 11d of the outer frame 11 and the card sanding device. . Therefore, by configuring so that the fixing screw 11g cannot be directly operated from the right side of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to prevent the protective cover member 140 from being detached from the side of the pachinko machine 10.

  Further, the curved portion 154 is formed in a thin plate shape, and is configured to be elastically deformable based on the elastic force of a resin material constituting the entire protective cover member 140. Therefore, when an external force is applied to the protective cover member 140, the curved portion 154 causes the protective cover member 140 to be slightly bent in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 10. With this configuration, for example, when the inner frame 12 is closed, even when the main control device 110 comes into contact with the protective cover member 140 due to the momentum at the time of closing and an impact is applied, the bending portion 154 is elastic. The protective cover member 140 can be prevented from being damaged by being bent by the force and absorbing the impact.

  Further, the upper outer cover portion 162b, the lower outer cover portion 163b, and the cover outer rib 174 allow, for example, when wire misbehaving is performed from the back of the pachinko machine 10, the wire is raised by the upright cover wall 161 or the cover plate 171. When the wire travels upward or downward from the outside of the wire, the wire collides with the upper outer cover portion 162b, the lower outer cover portion 163b, or the cover outer rib 174, thereby preventing the wire from entering.

  In addition, the area of the lower inner cover portion 163a is formed to be large, and the lower inner cover portion 163a allows the main control device 110 and the protective cover member 140 at the right lower portion in front view (lower left portion in rear view) of the main control device 110 to be connected. The gap is configured to be as small as possible. With this configuration, the lower right part of the main control device 110 in front view (the lower left part in rear view) is covered, and the setting key 501 and the sealing unit 100c are provided. Fraud from the lower left) can be prevented.

  As described above, the configuration described in the description of the twenty-fourth embodiment provides the above-described effects. Further, the same configuration as the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the sixteenth to twenty-third embodiments can achieve the same effect as that obtained by the configuration.

<Twenty-fifth embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a twenty-fifth embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to FIGS. In the twenty-first embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the RAM erase switch 122, the setting key 501, and the door opening switch 208g for detecting the opening of the inner frame 12 (in the twenty-fifth embodiment, the inner frame The start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10 has been determined according to the state described below.

  That is, when the power is turned on, the detection mode of the setting key 501 and the RAM erase switch 122 is detected, and the detection mode of the door open switch 208g is detected. According to the detection results, the start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10 is set. Was configured to change.

  However, when determining the start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10 based on the detection result of the door opening switch 208g, if the door opening switch 208g cannot be turned on (that is, the opening of the inner frame 12) due to a failure or the like, the door is opened. The startup mode (that is, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode) set based on the detection of the opening switch 208g cannot be started. Therefore, due to the erroneous detection of the door opening switch 208g, it is not possible to change settings, which are important game elements of the pachinko machine 10, and it may not be possible to execute the business mode assumed by the hall.

  Further, in the start-up process at the time of power-on, a process of detecting the door opening switch 208g is required, and the control required at the time of power-on is complicated, and the processing load on the main control device 110 is increased. There is a risk.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-fifth embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while employing the protective cover member 140 of the twenty-fourth embodiment, the inner frame opening switch 208g1, which is the door opening switch 208g, is opened. Regardless of the detection result, the start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10 is determined according to the two detection states of the RAM erase switch 122 and the setting key 501.

  With this configuration, the protective cover member 140 prevents the pachinko machine 10 from acting on the setting key 501 when the inner frame 12 is closed, and prevents the inner frame opening switch 208g1 from being opened when the inner frame 12 is opened. Regardless of reliability, setting change or the like, which is an important game element of the pachinko machine 10, can be performed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the security performance of the pachinko machine 10 and reliably execute the business mode assumed by the hall.

  Further, in the startup process at the time of power-up, the process of detecting the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is not required, so that the process for the detection process is not executed, so that the processing load on the main control device 110 can be reduced. Can be.

  Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 according to the twenty-fifth embodiment will be described focusing on differences from the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixteenth to twenty-fourth embodiments. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-fifth embodiment, the same configurations and processes as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the sixteenth to twenty-fourth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals as those of the sixteenth to twenty-fourth embodiments. And its illustration and description are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 444, each startup mode when the power of the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-fifth embodiment is turned on will be described. FIG. 444 is a diagram illustrating a startup mode of the pachinko machine 10 according to the twenty-fifth embodiment, and a RAM erase switch 122 and a setting key 501 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on for startup in each startup mode. It is a figure which showed each information of.

  In the start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-fifth embodiment, four modes of a normal mode, a RAM clear mode, a setting change mode, and a setting confirmation mode are prepared similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-first embodiment. ing. The RAM clear mode is a mode for erasing (clearing) the data stored in the RAM 203 in order to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state. The setting change mode is a mode for changing the set probability set value. The setting confirmation mode is a mode for confirming the set probability set value.

  The normal mode is a startup mode other than the RAM clear mode, the setting change mode, and the setting confirmation mode. When the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203, or when the data stored in the RAM 203 is damaged. This is a mode for executing various start-up processes while retaining the data stored in the RAM 203 and restarting the game of the pachinko machine 10 from the state before the power-off.

  Then, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on without turning on the RAM erasing switch 122 and with the setting key 501 kept in the off state, the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the normal mode. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on by turning on the RAM erasing switch 122 with the setting key 501 kept in the off state, the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the RAM clear mode.

  On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the setting key 501 is turned on and the RAM erasing switch 122 is turned on, regardless of the detection result of the door opening switch 208 (that is, even if the ON detection is performed). The pachinko machine 10 starts up in the setting change mode (even when the off-state is detected). When the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the setting key 501 is turned on and the RAM erasure switch 122 is turned off, regardless of the detection result of the inner frame opening switch 208g1 (that is, even if the ON detection is performed). The pachinko machine 10 starts up in the setting confirmation mode even if the off-state is detected.

  As described above, when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, regardless of whether the inner frame 12 is unlocked or not, if the setting key 501 is turned off, the person in charge of the hall can use the RAM erase switch. Depending on whether or not 122 is turned on, it is possible to select whether the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the RAM clear mode, which is a start-up mode not related to the probability set value, or in the normal mode.

  On the other hand, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, regardless of whether or not the inner frame 12 is unlocked, if the setting key 501 is turned on, the person involved in the hall and the like can turn the RAM erase switch 122 on. Depending on whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode related to the probability set value can be selected as the start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10.

  That is, regardless of the detection mode of the inner frame opening switch 208g1, whether the setting key 501 is in the off state or the on state, the start mode irrespective of the probability setting value and the probability setting value Startup mode with When the startup mode is not related to the probability set value, it is possible to select whether the startup mode is the RAM clear mode or the normal mode depending on whether the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on. When setting the startup mode related to the probability set value, it is possible to select whether the startup mode is the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode depending on whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on.

  Here, since the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-fifth embodiment is configured such that the setting can be changed or the setting can be confirmed regardless of the opening of the inner frame 12, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 when the inner frame 12 is closed. Although there is a concern that the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-fifth embodiment employs the protective cover member 140 of the twenty-fourth embodiment, there is a concern that the illegal operation of the setting key 501 may result from the illegal operation of the setting key 501. Therefore, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the protective cover member 140 prevents the pachinko machine 10 from directly contacting the setting key 501 and the sealing unit 100c from the back side. Therefore, it is possible to change settings without performing processing such as detection of opening of the inner frame 12, and to prevent illegal acts when the inner frame 12 is closed.

  In other words, when the setting key 501 is operated by providing the protective cover member 140, it means that the inner frame 12 is open. Therefore, it is possible to recognize that the inner frame 12 is open without detecting the inner frame opening switch 208g1 in the process.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 445 is a block diagram showing an electric configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-fifth embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 445, the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is connected to the input / output port 205 of the main controller 110 according to the twenty-fifth embodiment. The inner frame opening switch 208g1 is for detecting whether or not the inner frame 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11, and a protruding piece (not shown) protruding to the upper rear side of the inner frame 12. And an elastic body (not shown) for applying an elastic force such as a spring to the projecting piece, and a detection sensor (not shown) for detecting the position of the projecting piece. When the inner frame 12 is closed, the protruding piece of the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is pressed against the upper portion of the outer frame 11 and is immersed in the inner frame 12 because the force of the cylinder lock 20 is stronger than the elastic force of the elastic body. On the other hand, when a dedicated key is inserted into the cylinder lock 20 and turned in the first direction (for example, clockwise), the inner frame 12 is released from the outer frame 11, and when the inner frame 12 is opened, the elastic force of the elastic body is Thereby, the projecting piece is configured to project toward the outer frame 11 side. When the detection sensor detects the protrusion of the protruding piece, it is determined that the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is on, and an inner frame opening signal is output.

  The detection result of the inner frame opening switch 208g1 (that is, the presence or absence of the inner frame opening signal) is input to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via the input / output port 205. In this case, when the inner frame 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is not determined to be ON, and does not output an inner frame opening signal to the MPU 201. On the other hand, when the inner frame 12 is open with respect to the outer frame 11, the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is determined to be ON, and outputs an inner frame opening signal to the MPU 201. The MPU 201 specifies that the inner frame 12 is open when the inner frame opening signal is input from the inner frame opening switch 208g1, and closes the inner frame 12 when the inner frame opening signal is not input. Identify the state.

  Next, referring to FIG. 446, a description will be given of a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-fifth embodiment is turned on. FIG. 446 is a flowchart showing the start-up processing. This start-up process is started by a reset at power-on.

  In the startup process according to the twenty-fifth embodiment, first, an initial value setting process upon power-on is executed (S4401). For example, access permission to the RAM 203 is set, and a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer.

  Next, an internal function register setting process is executed (S4402). In the twenty-fifth embodiment, similarly to the twenty-third embodiment, a base display control process (see FIG. 425) for controlling the display content displayed on the base display device 401 is triggered by a 2 millisecond timer interrupt generated every 2 milliseconds. Execute. In the process in S4402, for example, the 2 millisecond timer interrupt is permitted. In addition, when a random number value required for performing a jackpot lottery or a hit lottery is generated by a random number generation circuit (not shown) provided in the main control device 110, in the process of S4402, the range of the generated random number value ( Set the maximum value). In the process of S4402, access to the RAM 203 is permitted. In the process of S4402, the main controller 110 performs various settings for transmitting and receiving signals by serial communication with the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113.

  In particular, by permitting a 2 ms timer interrupt in the internal function register setting process, a 2 ms timer interrupt occurs every 2 ms and the base display control process is executed. Thus, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the probability set value can be displayed on the base display device 401.

  In the process of S4402, it is not always necessary to set the range (maximum value) of the random value. In the case where the range of the random number value (maximum value) is not set in the process of S4402, in the other startup process (S4421) to be described later, which is executed at the stage of shifting from the startup process to the main process, A range (maximum value) of the random number value not performed in the process of S4402 may be set.

  Next, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S4403). As a result, if the power-off occurrence information is stored (S4403: Yes), it means that the process at the time of the previous power-off is normally completed, and then the RAM determination value is calculated and calculated. It is determined whether the determined RAM determination value is normal, that is, whether the calculated RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off (S4404). The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 203. In the twenty-fifth embodiment, a case will be described in which the probability set value stored in the RAM 203 is excluded from the calculation of the checksum value. However, the probability set value may be included in the calculation of the checksum value.

  As a result of the process of S4404, when it is determined that the calculated RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off (S4404: Yes), the RAM determination value is normal, and at least the RAM determination value is used for calculating the RAM determination value. Since it can be determined that the stored data (information) is normally held, it is determined whether the probability set value is within the normal range ("1" to "6") (S4405). Here, it is determined whether or not the probability set value is within the normal range because, when the power was turned off last time, although the processing related to the power cutoff was performed normally, the probability set value is determined at that stage. This is because it may be broken and out of the normal range. The processing in S4405 is performed to reliably detect such an abnormality in the probability set value.

  If the probability set value is within the normal range (S4405: Yes), it is determined whether the setting change flag 203x13 (see FIG. 429) is on (S4406). If the setting change flag 203x13 is on (S4406: Yes), it means that the setting change process was being executed when the power was last turned off, that is, the power supply was being updated while the probability setting value was being updated by the setting change process. Indicates that was rejected. Therefore, in this case, the processing shifts to the processing of S4413, and the setting change processing is executed (S4413).

  As a result, the startup mode when the power is turned on after the power is turned off during the setting change is not limited to the startup operation for starting up in the setting change mode, and other startup operations Even if it is an operation, a setting change mode can be set in which the setting change process is restarted from the beginning and executed. Therefore, when the power is cut off during the setting change, the probability setting value can be changed from the beginning by the persons involved in the hall without fail when the power is turned on thereafter. Therefore, the change of the probability set value can be reliably performed by the person related to the hall, and the change can be determined. Therefore, even if the power is cut off during the setting change, the persons involved in the hall can reliably update and confirm the probability set value when the power is turned on again, and the pachinko machine can be safely operated. A change in the probability set value for 10 can be made.

  Also, by restarting the setting change process from the beginning (from the beginning), instead of continuing from the probability setting value being updated when the power is cut off during the setting change and restarting the update of the probability setting value, The probability set value can be updated again from the beginning using the probability set value (probability set value data 203x11) used in the game up to now. Therefore, the person related to the hall and the like can redo the update of the probability setting.

  On the other hand, if the setting change flag 203x13 (see FIG. 429) is turned off as a result of the process of S4406 (S4406: No), it means that the setting change process was not being executed when the power was last shut down. Next, as a process of confirming the start-up operation performed by the person in charge of the hall when turning on the power to the pachinko machine 10, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on (S4407). In the process of S4407, since the 4 millisecond timer interrupt is not permitted and the timer interrupt process is not executed, the state of the RAM erase switch 122 is read in the switch state read process of the timer interrupt process. Instead of making a determination using a device, the state of the RAM erase switch 122 is read by directly accessing the input / output port 205.

  If the result of the processing in S4407 is that the RAM erasure switch 122 is off (S4407: No), then it is determined whether or not the setting key 501 is on to confirm further the start-up operation (S4407). S4408). In the twenty-fifth embodiment, the configuration is such that the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is not detected in S4408. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-on, the process of detecting the inner frame opening switch 208g1 becomes unnecessary, and the process for the detection process is not executed, so that the processing load on the main control device 110 can be reduced. .

  As a result of the processing in S4408, when the setting key 501 is in the off state (S4408: N0), since the RAM erase switch 122 is off and the setting key 501 is in the off state, the person involved in the hall starts up in the normal mode. It means that you operated. Then, it is determined whether the setting confirmation flag 203x14 (see FIG. 429) is on (S4409). As a result, if the setting confirmation flag 203x14 is ON (S4409: Yes), the setting confirmation processing was being executed when the power was last turned off, that is, the confirmation of the probability set value by the setting confirmation processing. Indicates that the power was turned off during. In this case, as shown in FIG. 430, the setting confirmation processing is executed from the beginning (S4410). By the setting confirmation process, the currently set probability setting value is displayed on the base display device 401. Thereby, the probability set value can be confirmed.

  As described above, even when the hall-related person performs the start-up operation for starting up in the normal mode as the start-up operation, the pachinko machine 10 is not started up in the normal mode, and the setting confirmation process is started from the beginning ( The pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting confirmation mode to be executed again from the beginning. Thus, after the power is turned off during the setting check, the probability set value can be checked even if the person involved in the hall starts up by operating in the normal mode. This allows the person involved in the hall or the like to confirm that the probability setting value has not been destroyed due to the power being cut off during the setting confirmation, so that the pachinko machine 10 can be started up with confidence.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S4409, if it is determined that the setting confirmation flag 203x14 (see FIG. 429) is off (S4409: No), the setting confirmation processing is not being executed when the power was last shut down. Means that The process of S4409 is performed when the setting change flag 203x13 (refer to FIG. 429) is determined to be off in the process of S4406 (S4406: No), that is, when the power was last turned off. There is also a case where the setting change process is not being executed.

  Therefore, in this case, the start-up mode is set to the normal mode indicated by the start-up operation by the person in charge of the hall or the like, and the setting confirmation process in S4410 and the process in S4411 described later are skipped, and other start-up processes are executed. Thereafter (S4414), the process shifts to the main process. In addition, as other startup processing, a 4 millisecond timer interrupt is permitted. In the twenty-fifth embodiment, similarly to the twenty-third embodiment, a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 426) for performing main control of a game is executed by a 4 ms timer interrupt generated every 4 ms. By permitting a 4-ms timer interrupt in the process of S4414, a timer interrupt process is executed every 4 ms.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting key 501 is on as a result of the process of S4408 (S4408: Yes), the RAM erase switch 122 is off and the setting key 501 is on, so that the person related to the hall, etc. Means that the startup operation was performed in the setting confirmation mode. Here, the process of S4408 is executed when the setting change flag 203x13 (see FIG. 429) is determined to be off in the process of S4406 (S4406: No), that is, when the power was last turned off. Sometimes, the setting change process is not being executed. Accordingly, in this case, as shown in FIG. 430, the pachinko machine 10 is operated in the setting confirmation mode in which the hall-related person or the like has started up, regardless of whether the setting confirmation processing was being executed when the power was last turned off. In order to start up, the process proceeds to S4410, and a setting confirmation process is executed (S4410). By the setting confirmation process, the currently set probability setting value is displayed on the base display device 401. Thereby, the probability set value can be confirmed.

  When the setting confirmation processing (S4410) ends, an external output processing is executed (S4411). In this external output processing, information indicating that the setting confirmation processing has been executed or that the probability set value has been displayed on the base display device 401 is output to the hall computer 600 via the external output terminal 503. Thereby, the person in charge of the hall or the like can grasp that the setting confirmation processing is executed in the pachinko machine 10 and the probability set value is displayed on the base display device 401. Therefore, when the probability setting value is incorrectly displayed, it can be quickly grasped. After the external output processing has been executed, other start-up processing is executed (S4421), and the processing shifts to the main processing.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the RAM erasure switch 122 is turned on in the process of S4407, which is a process for confirming the start-up operation performed when the hall-related person or the like turns on the power of the pachinko machine 10, ( (S4407: Yes), and it is determined whether the setting key 501 is in an ON state to further confirm the start-up operation (S4412). In the twenty-fifth embodiment, the configuration is such that the detection of the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is not performed in S4412. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-on, the process of detecting the inner frame opening switch 208g1 becomes unnecessary, and the process for the detection process is not executed, so that the processing load on the main control device 110 can be reduced. .

  As a result of the processing in S4412, when the setting key 501 is in the ON state (S4412: Yes), the RAM erase switch 122 is ON and the setting key 501 is in the ON state. It means that the operation was raised. When the start-up operation is performed in the setting change mode, as shown in FIG. 430, the setting confirmation processing is performed regardless of whether the setting confirmation flag 203x14 (see FIG. 429) is on or not, that is, when the power is last turned off. The start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10 is set to the setting change mode regardless of whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is being executed.

  Therefore, as a result of the process of S4412, if the setting key 501 is in the ON state (S4412: Yes), the setting change process is executed (S4413). By the setting change processing, the probability set value is displayed on the base display device 401, and when the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on by a person related to the hall or the like, the probability set value is updated and the setting key 501 is turned off. Then, the updated probability set value is determined as the probability set value to be used for the game from now on, and the RAM clear processing is performed. Thus, after changing the probability set value, the gaming machine can be newly started with the changed probability set value.

  Here, even if the setting confirmation process was being executed when the power was last turned off, the fact that the setting key 501 was turned on and the RAM erasing switch 122 was turned on means that a person involved in the hall is in charge. Etc. clearly indicate the intention to change the probability set value. Therefore, in this case, by starting up the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode, it is possible to perform a start-up process according to the intention of the hall-related personnel and the like.

  When the setting change process (S4413) ends, an external output process is executed (S4414). In this external output process, information indicating that the setting change process has been executed or the probability set value has been changed is output to the hall computer 600 via the external output terminal 503. Thereby, the person in charge of the hall or the like can grasp that the setting change process has been executed by the pachinko machine 10 and the probability set value has been changed. Therefore, when the probability setting value is illegally changed, it can be quickly grasped. After the external output processing has been executed, other start-up processing is executed (S4421), and the processing shifts to the main processing.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S4412, if the setting key 501 is in the off state (S4412: No), then it is determined whether or not the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 (see FIG. 429) is on to determine whether or not the RAM is abnormal. It is determined whether or not it is (S4415). Here, the RAM erasure switch 122 is determined to be ON by the processing of S4407 (S4407: Yes), the setting key 501 is determined to be OFF by the processing of S4412 (S4412: No), and the processing of S4415 is performed. If executed, the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 is always off, so it is determined that the RAM is not abnormal in the process of S4415 (S4415: No).

  In this case, since the setting change flag 203x13 (see FIG. 429) is determined to be off in the process of S4406 (S4406: No), the setting change process is being executed when the power was last shut down. If not. Therefore, the RAM erase switch 122 is determined to be on by the processing of S4407 (S4407: Yes), the setting key 501 is determined to be off by the processing of S4412 (S4412: No), and the RAM abnormality is determined by the processing of S4415. If not determined (S4415: No), it means that the person involved in the hall has started the operation in the RAM clear mode, and the setting change process was not being executed when the power was last turned off. The pachinko machine 10 is started up in the RAM clear mode regardless of whether the setting confirmation processing was being executed when the power was last turned off. Therefore, a RAM clear process is executed (S4416).

  In this RAM clearing process, of the data stored in the RAM 203, predetermined data excluding the probability setting value data 203x11 (see FIG. 429) stored in the inner work area 203x1 (see FIG. 429) used for game control is used. ), While the data 203s for the accessory ratio stored in the outside work area 203y1 (see FIG. 421), the data 203r for the base value, and the data 203t for the error (both see FIG. 421) are shown in FIG. Keep without erasing. A new game can be started by deleting data used for controlling the game (predetermined data excluding the probability set value data 203x11 stored in the inner work area 203x1). Further, even if the RAM clear processing is executed, the probability set value data 203x11 is held, so that the game can be continued with the probability set value determined before the RAM clear processing is executed.

  Here, as described above, even if the setting confirmation process was being executed when the power was last turned off, there is no RAM abnormality, and the startup operation for starting up in the RAM clear mode is performed. The pachinko machine 10 is started up in the RAM clear mode according to the start-up operation of the person in charge of the hall. The fact that the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on indicates that the person concerned in the hall or the like wants to at least clearly clear the RAM. Therefore, in this case, by starting the pachinko machine 10 in the RAM clear mode, it is possible to perform a start-up process according to the intention of a person related to the hall or the like.

  When the RAM clear processing in S4416 is completed, other start-up processing is executed (S4421), and the processing shifts to the main processing.

  On the other hand, if it is determined by the processing of S4403 that the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S4403: No), the calculated RAM determination value is determined by the processing of S4404 to be the same as the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off. If they do not match and it is determined that the RAM determination value is abnormal (S4404: No), or if it is determined that the probability setting value is not within the normal range by the processing of S4405 (S4405: No). If any of the above applies, it can be determined that there is an abnormality in the RAM 203. Therefore, the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 (see FIG. 429) is turned on (S4417). Then, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 is on (S4418). In the process of S4418, similarly to the process of S4407, the state of the RAM erase switch 122 is read by directly accessing the input / output port 205.

  If it is determined that the RAM erasure switch 122 is ON as a result of the process of S4418 (S4418: Yes), the process proceeds to the above-described S4412, and further, it is determined whether or not the setting key 501 is on. A determination is made (S4412). As a result, when the setting key 501 is in the ON state (S4412: Yes), it means that the person related to the hall, etc., has started up in the setting change mode. Then, in this case (S4412: Yes), in order to start up the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode in accordance with the start-up operation of the person related to the hall or the like, the flow shifts to S4413 to execute the above-described setting change processing.

  Here, even if a RAM abnormality has occurred, if the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting change mode, the RAM can be cleared after resetting the probability setting value again. Therefore, a new game can be started with the newly set normal probability set value. By this RAM clear, the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 (see FIG. 429) is turned off. Therefore, thereafter, main controller 110 can control the game without executing the process related to the RAM abnormality.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the RAM erasure switch 122 is off as a result of the processing of S4418 (S4418: No), or if it is determined that the RAM erasure switch 122 is on as a result of the processing of S4418, the processing proceeds to S4412. If it is determined that the setting key 501 is in the OFF state as a result of the processing (S4418: Yes or S4412: No), the person in charge of the hall, etc., in the RAM abnormality, sets the normal mode, the RAM clear mode, This means that the startup operation has been performed in any of the startup modes in the confirmation mode.

  In this case, the flow shifts to the above-described processing of S4415, and in the processing of S4415, it is always determined that the RAM is determined to be abnormal (S4415: Yes), and the flow shifts to the processing of S4419. In the process of S4419, a RAM abnormality setting process is performed (S4419). In this RAM abnormality setting process, a process for performing notification regarding the RAM abnormality is executed. For example, a sound lamp for turning off the power once and prompting to start the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode is provided by sound output from the sound output device 226 and / or display on the third symbol display device 81. A command is transmitted to the control device 113.

  Then, an external output process for notifying the hall computer 600 via the external output terminal 503 that the RAM is abnormal is executed (S4420), and other start-up processes are executed (S4421), and the process proceeds to the main process. I do. Since the hall computer 600 is notified that the RAM is abnormal, the person in charge of the hall or the like can surely grasp that the RAM abnormality has occurred without noticing the notification from the pachinko machine 10.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-fifth embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while employing the protective cover member 140 of the twenty-fourth embodiment, the door opening switch 208g is used. Regardless of the detection result of the frame release switch 208g1, the start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10 is determined according to the two detection states of the RAM erase switch 122 and the setting key 501. With this configuration, the protective cover member 140 prevents the pachinko machine 10 from acting on the setting key 501 when the inner frame 12 is closed, and prevents the inner frame opening switch 208g1 from being opened when the inner frame 12 is opened. Regardless of reliability, setting change or the like, which is an important game element of the pachinko machine 10, can be performed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the security performance of the pachinko machine 10 and reliably execute the business mode assumed by the hall.

  Further, in the startup process at the time of power-up, the process of detecting the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is not required, so that the process for the detection process is not executed, so that the processing load on the main control device 110 can be reduced. Can be.

  As described above, the configuration described in the description of the twenty-fifth embodiment has the above-described effects. Further, the same configuration as the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixteenth to twenty-fourth embodiments can achieve the same effect as that obtained by the configuration.

<Twenty-sixth embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a twenty-sixth embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to FIGS. 447 to 449. In the twenty-fifth embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, regardless of the detection mode of the inner frame opening switch 208g1, the pachinko machine 10 is controlled according to the state of the RAM erase switch 122 and the setting key 501. Startup mode was determined.

  On the other hand, in the twenty-sixth embodiment, the front frame opening switch 208g2 for detecting the opening of the front frame 14 is provided, and when the inner frame opening switch 208g1 detects the opening of the inner frame 12 (ie, ON detection), In addition, when the front frame opening switch 208g2 detects that the front frame 14 is closed (that is, off detection), the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is started. On the other hand, even when the inner frame opening switch 208g1 detects the closing of the inner frame 12 (that is, OFF detection), or when the inner frame opening switch 208g1 detects the opening of the inner frame 12, When the frame opening switch 208g2 detects opening of the front frame 14 (that is, ON detection), it is configured to start in the normal mode without starting the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  Conventionally, if the pachinko machine 10 is easily shifted to a state in which the setting can be changed or the setting can be confirmed, it is not possible to eliminate a room for performing an incorrect setting change or the setting confirmation. It is desirable to take multi-step security measures for the pachinko machine 10 so as not to shift.

  On the other hand, when a person involved in the hall performs maintenance work on the pachinko machine 10, both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are opened from the outer frame 11, and the maintenance work is performed on the hall having the authority to change settings and confirm settings. It is generally performed by employees of the hall who do not have the authority to change settings or check settings, rather than the person in charge.

  Here, if the employee enters the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode during maintenance work by an employee who does not have the authority to change the setting or check the setting, if the employee enters inside with an outside fraudulent person There is a possibility that information on the setting status of the pachinko machine 10 may be leaked to the unauthorized person.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-sixth embodiment, during a maintenance operation in which the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are both opened, the configuration change or the setting confirmation cannot be performed, so that the authority to change the settings is granted. The security performance for the pachinko machine 10 can be improved by making it difficult for a non-employee to change the settings.

  Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 according to the twenty-sixth embodiment will be described focusing on differences from the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixteenth to twenty-fifth embodiments. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-sixth embodiment, the same components and processes as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the sixteenth to twenty-fifth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals as those of the sixteenth to twenty-fifth embodiments. And its illustration and description are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 447, each startup mode when the power of the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-sixth embodiment is turned on will be described. FIG. 447 shows a start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10 according to the twenty-sixth embodiment, and a RAM erase switch 122 and a setting key 501 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on to start up in the start-up mode for each start-up mode. It is a figure which showed each information of the inner frame opening switch 208g1 and the front frame opening switch 208g2.

  In the start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-sixth embodiment, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-fifth embodiment, four modes of a normal mode, a RAM clear mode, a setting change mode, and a setting confirmation mode are prepared. ing. The RAM clear mode is a mode for erasing (clearing) the data stored in the RAM 203 in order to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state. The setting change mode is a mode for changing the set probability set value. The setting confirmation mode is a mode for confirming the set probability set value.

  The normal mode is a startup mode other than the RAM clear mode, the setting change mode, and the setting confirmation mode. When the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203, or when the data stored in the RAM 203 is damaged. This is a mode for executing various start-up processes while retaining the data stored in the RAM 203 and restarting the game of the pachinko machine 10 from the state before the power-off.

  When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on without turning on the RAM erasing switch 122 and with the setting key 501 being turned off, the detection mode of the inner frame opening switch 208g1 and the front frame opening switch 208g2 is determined. Regardless, the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the normal mode. Further, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on by turning on the RAM erasing switch 122 with the setting key 501 kept in the off state, the pachinko machine 10 is turned on regardless of the detection mode of the inner frame opening switch 208g1 and the front frame opening switch 208g2. Starts in the RAM clear mode.

  In the twenty-sixth embodiment, the normal mode may be set based on the detection mode of the inner frame opening switch 208g1 or the front frame opening switch 208g2 even when the setting key 501 is turned on. is there.

  Specifically, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, even if both the RAM erase switch 122 and the setting key 501 are on, the inner frame release switch 208g1 is not on or the front frame release switch 208g2 is off. If not, that is, if the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is off or the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is on, but the front frame opening switch 208g2 is on, the normal mode is started instead of the setting change mode. It is configured as follows.

  Further, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, even if the RAM erasing switch 122 is off and the setting key 501 is on, the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is not on or the front frame opening switch 208g2 is turned on. If the switch is not off, that is, if the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is off or the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is on but the front frame opening switch 208g2 is on, the normal mode is set instead of the setting confirmation mode. Is configured to stand up.

  Conventionally, when a person related to the hall performs maintenance work on the pachinko machine 10, the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are both opened from the outer frame 11, and the setting change is not performed by the person in charge of the hall that performs setting change and setting confirmation. Or a hall employee who does not have the authority to check the settings. That is, during the maintenance operation of the pachinko machine 10, the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is turned on and the front frame opening switch 208g2 is turned on.

  Here, if the employee enters the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode during maintenance work by an employee who does not have the authority to change the setting or check the setting, if the employee enters inside with an outside fraudulent person There is a possibility that information on the setting status of the pachinko machine 10 may be leaked to the unauthorized person.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-sixth embodiment, at the time of maintenance work in which the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are both opened, that is, when both the inner frame open switch 208g1 and the front frame open switch 208g2 are on. , So that setting change or setting confirmation cannot be performed. With this configuration, it is possible to improve the security performance of the pachinko machine 10 by making it difficult for an employee who does not have the authority to change the setting or the like to change the setting or confirm the setting.

  Next, while turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 by turning on the RAM erasing switch 122 while turning on the setting key 501, the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is turned on and the front frame opening switch 208g2 is turned off. Under certain conditions, the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the setting change mode. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the setting key 501 is turned on and the RAM erasing switch 122 is turned off, the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is on and the front frame opening switch 208g2 is off. On the condition that the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the setting confirmation mode.

  As described above, when turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10, the person in charge of the hall or the like sets the setting key 501 to the OFF state, and determines whether or not to turn on the RAM erasing switch 122. As the start-up mode, it is possible to select a RAM clear mode or a normal mode which is a start-up mode not related to the probability setting value.

  On the other hand, when turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10, if the setting key 501 is turned on on condition that only the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is on, the person in charge of the hall and the like can turn the RAM erase switch 122 on. Depending on whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode related to the probability set value can be selected as the start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10.

  That is, first, depending on whether the setting key 501 is turned off or on, a start-up mode irrelevant to the probability set value and a start-up mode related to the probability set value can be selected. Then, in the startup mode irrespective of the probability set value, regardless of the detection mode of the inner frame opening switch 208g1 and the front frame opening switch 208g2, depending on whether the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on or not. While it is possible to select whether the startup mode is the RAM clear mode or the normal mode, if the startup mode is related to the probability setting value, the RAM is set on condition that only the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is on. Depending on whether or not the erase switch 122 is turned on, it is possible to select whether the startup mode is the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 448 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the twenty-sixth embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 448, a front-frame open switch 208g2 as well as an inner-frame open switch 208g1 is connected to the input / output port 205 of the main controller 110 according to the twenty-sixth embodiment as a door open switch 208g. The front frame opening switch 208g2 is for detecting whether or not the front frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 12, and has a front protruding piece (not shown) protruding from the upper rear side of the front frame 14. ), A front elastic body (not shown) for applying an elastic force such as a spring to the front projecting piece, and a front detection sensor (not shown) for detecting the position of the front projecting piece. When the front frame 14 is closed, the front projecting piece of the front frame opening switch 208g2 is pressed against the upper portion of the inner frame 12 and is immersed in the front frame 14 because the force of the cylinder lock 20 is stronger than the elastic force of the front elastic body. On the other hand, when a dedicated key is inserted into the cylinder lock 20 and turned in a second direction (for example, counterclockwise) different from the first direction, the front frame 14 is released from the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 is opened. Is opened, the front projecting piece projects toward the inner frame 12 by the elastic force of the front elastic body. When the front detection sensor detects the protrusion of the front protruding piece, it is determined that the front frame opening switch 208g2 is on, and a front frame opening signal is output.

  The detection result of the front frame opening switch 208g2 (that is, presence / absence of a front frame opening signal) is input to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via the input / output port 205. In this case, when the front frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 12, the front frame open switch 208g2 is not determined to be ON, and does not output a front frame open signal to the MPU 201. On the other hand, when the front frame 14 is open with respect to the inner frame 12, the front frame release switch 208g2 is determined to be on, and outputs a front frame release signal to the MPU 201. The MPU 201 determines that the front frame 14 is open when the front frame opening signal is input from the front frame opening switch 208g2, and closes the front frame 14 when the front frame opening signal is not input. Identify the state.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 according to the twenty-sixth embodiment is turned on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 449 is a flowchart showing the start-up processing. This start-up process is started by a reset at power-on.

  The startup process of the twenty-sixth embodiment differs from the startup process of the twenty-fifth embodiment in that when the RAM erase switch 122 is off and the setting key 501 is on, the inner frame release switch 208g1 is turned on. The setting confirmation process (S4410) is executed on condition that the switch is on and the front frame opening switch 208g2 is off, and the RAM erase switch 122 is on and the setting key 501 is on. In some cases, on condition that the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is turned on and the front frame opening switch 208g2 is turned off, the setting change process (S4413) is executed, and the inner frame opening switch 208g1 and the inner frame opening switch 208g1 are turned off. In the confirmation processing of the front frame opening switch 208g2, when the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is not turned on, or If the front frame opening switch 208g2 is not off even if the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is on (that is, if it is on), it is necessary to start up in the normal mode without starting up in the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode. is there.

  In the start-up process of the twenty-sixth embodiment, in the determination of the setting key 501 in S4408, it is determined that the setting key 501 is not on (S4408: No), and the setting confirmation flag 203x14 is on. If it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 has not been turned on (SS4409: No), the power of the pachinko machine 10 has been turned on with both the RAM erasing switch 122 and the setting key 501 turned off, and the process proceeds to S4421 to start up in the normal mode. .

  On the other hand, in the process of S4408, when it is determined that the setting key 501 is turned on (S4408: Yes), or even when it is determined that the setting key 501 is turned off (S4408: No) If it is determined that the setting confirmation flag 203x14 is turned on (S4409: Yes), the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off when the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on and the setting key 501 is turned on. Since it is turned on, the process shifts to S4451 in order to check whether or not the setting confirmation process (S4410) can be executed, that is, whether or not a maintenance operation is being performed.

  In the process of S4451, it is determined whether or not the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is turned on (S4451). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is turned on (S4451: Yes), that is, when it is determined that the inner frame 12 is open, the front frame opening switch 208g2 is then turned on. It is determined whether the switch is off (S4452). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the front frame opening switch 208g2 is off (S4452: Yes), that is, when it is determined that the front frame 14 is closed, the person in charge of the hall having the setting confirmation authority As a result, it is considered that the power of the pachinko machine 10 has been turned on, the process proceeds to S4410, and the setting confirmation process (S4410) is executed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S4451 that the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is not turned on (S4451: No), that is, when it is determined that the inner frame 12 is in the closed state, Since the inner frame 12 is closed and there is a possibility of a fraudulent act from the back side of the pachinko machine 10, the setting confirmation process (S4410) is not executed, and the process proceeds to S4421. Start in mode.

  Also, in the process of S4452, when it is determined that the front frame opening switch 208g2 is not turned off (S4452: No), that is, it is determined that the inner frame 12 is open and the front frame 14 is open. In this case, it is highly probable that the pachinko machine 10 is undergoing maintenance work, so that the setting confirmation process (S4410) is not performed, and the process proceeds to S4421 to start up in the normal mode.

  Next, if the setting change flag 203x13 is determined to be on in the process of S4406 (S4406: Yes), or if the setting key 501 is determined to be on in the process of S4412, the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on. Since the power of the pachinko machine 10 has been turned on while the setting key 501 is on, the setting change process (S4413) can be executed, that is, it is not during maintenance work. The process moves to S4453 to confirm whether

  In the process of S4453, similarly to the process of S4451, it is determined whether or not the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is turned on (S4453). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is turned on (S4453: Yes), that is, when it is determined that the inner frame 12 is open, the front frame opening switch 208g2 is then turned on. It is determined whether it is off (S4454). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the front frame opening switch 208g2 is OFF (S4454: Yes), that is, when it is determined that the front frame 14 is closed, the person in charge of the hall having the setting confirmation authority As a result, it is considered that the power of the pachinko machine 10 has been turned on, the process proceeds to S4413, and the setting change process (S4413) is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4453 that the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is not turned on (S4453: No), that is, if it is determined that the inner frame 12 is in the closed state, Since the inner frame 12 is closed and there is a possibility of a fraudulent act from the back side of the pachinko machine 10, the setting change process (S4413) is not executed, and the process proceeds to S4421. Start in mode.

  In the process of S4454, when it is determined that the front frame opening switch 208g2 is not turned off (S4454: No), that is, it is determined that the inner frame 12 is open and the front frame 14 is open. In this case, it is highly probable that the pachinko machine 10 is undergoing maintenance work, so that the setting change process (S4413) is not performed, and the process proceeds to S4421 to start up in the normal mode.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-sixth embodiment, only the inner frame 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11, that is, the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is turned on and the front frame is opened. When the release switch 208g2 is off, the configuration is such that the setting change or the setting confirmation operation can be performed. On the other hand, during maintenance work in which both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are open, that is, the inner frame release switch. When both 208g1 and the front frame opening switch 208g2 are on, the configuration is such that setting change or setting confirmation cannot be performed. Therefore, at the time of maintenance work in which the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are both opened, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 is started in the normal mode, not in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. With this configuration, it is possible to improve the security performance of the pachinko machine 10 by making it difficult for an employee who does not have the authority to change the setting or the like to change the setting or confirm the setting.

  As described above, the configuration described in the description of the twenty-sixth embodiment provides the above-described effects. Moreover, the same configuration as the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixteenth to twenty-fifth embodiments can achieve the same effect as that obtained by the configuration.

<Twenty-seventh embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a twenty-seventh embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to FIGS. 450 and 451. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the twenty-fourth embodiment, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the setting key 501 of the main controller 110 and the sealing unit 100c are covered by the protective cover member 140 attached to the outer frame 11, and when the inner frame 12 is closed. The configuration key 501 and the sealing unit 100c are configured so as not to be directly operated.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-seventh embodiment, the protective cover member 140 is extended leftward in front view (that is, right side in rear view) to a portion covering the connector mounting portion 100h of the main control device 110, and the payout is performed. The control device 111 is formed to extend downward from the front as far as a portion covering the sealing portion 111a. That is, in addition to the setting key 501 and the sealing unit 100c of the main control device 110, the protective cover member 140 covers the connector mounting portion 100h of the main control device 110 and the sealing portion 111a of the dispensing control device 111. .

  With this configuration, when the inner frame 12 is closed, in addition to the setting key 501 and the sealing unit 100c of the main control device 110, a connector connection used for communication of control signals to the control devices 111 and 113 and the like is provided. It is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from being directly operated from the back side of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the parts related to the game specifications, such as the wearing part 100h and the sealing part 111a of the payout control device 111 that manages the payout of the prize balls and the lending balls. Therefore, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the security performance on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 according to the twenty-seventh embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixteenth to twenty-sixth embodiments. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-seventh embodiment, the same components and processes as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the sixteenth to twenty-sixth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals as those of the sixteenth to twenty-sixth embodiments. And its illustration and description are omitted.

  Here, the configuration of the protective cover member 140 in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 450 and 451. FIG. 450 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the twenty-seventh embodiment, and FIG. 451 is a right side view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the twenty-seventh embodiment. For convenience of explanation, FIG. 450 shows a state in which the front frame 14 has been removed from the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12, and FIG. 451 shows a state in which the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 have been removed from the outer frame 11. And their description is omitted.

  The point that the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-seventh embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-fourth embodiment is that the cover plate 171 of the protective cover member 140 is different from the pachinko machine 100 of the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. A point that covers the back side of the pachinko machine 10 with the sealing portion 111a, and the upright cover wall 161 and the upright lower cover portion 163 of the protection cover member 140 are in front of the sealing portion 111a of the dispensing control device 111 in a front right side (in a back view left side). ) And the positions of the lower cover mounting hole 11f of the right side plate 11d and the lower mounting hole 153 of the cover mounting portion 150 are provided slightly below the twenty-fourth embodiment. Other configurations are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-fourth embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 450 and FIG. 451, the upright cover wall 161 of the protective cover member 140 of the twenty-seventh embodiment is continuously pachinko from the curved part 154 of the cover mounting part 150 formed longer than the twenty-fourth embodiment. It is formed to extend toward the rear side of the machine 10 (see FIG. 451). The upright cover wall 161 covers the right side of the main controller 110 in front view (left side in rear view) and the right side of front view of the payout controller 111 (left side in rear view). Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 provided with the setting key 501 and the sealing unit 100c of the main control device 110 and the sealing portion 111a of the payout control device 111 can be directly Since it is not possible to contact the site, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from misbehaving from the right side in front view.

  The upright lower cover portion (not shown) of the twenty-seventh embodiment includes a lower inner cover portion (not shown) and a lower outer cover portion (not shown). The lower inner cover portion extends horizontally from the entire lower portion of the upright cover wall 161 and the entire lower portion of the cover plate 171 toward the inside of the pachinko machine 10 (in the direction in which the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 are disposed). It is formed extending in the direction. In addition, the lower outer cover portion is formed to extend horizontally from the entire lower portion of the upright cover wall 161 to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 (the direction in which the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 are not provided). I have.

  The lower inner cover (not shown) has a larger area than the upper inner cover (not shown), as in the twenty-fourth embodiment. This is because the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111, in particular, the disposition position of the payout control device 111 is closer to the lower side of the pachinko machine 10, and the main control is from the upper side of the pachinko machine 10 to the lower side. Since it is easy to access the device 110 or the payout control device 111, a person who misbehaves with respect to the main control device 110 or the payout control device 111 often causes a wire or the like to enter from the lower side of the back of the pachinko machine 10. Do wrongdoing by doing. Therefore, in order to prevent the above-mentioned misconduct, the area of the lower inner cover portion is formed to be large, and the lower inner cover portion 163a controls the dispensing control at the lower right portion in front view of the dispensing control device 111 (lower left portion in rear view). The gap between the device 111 and the protective cover member 140 is configured to be as small as possible.

  In this manner, by forming the lower inner cover portion (not shown), the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111, particularly the right lower portion in the front view (the lower left portion in the rear view) of the dispensing control device 111 are covered, It is possible to prevent the payout control device 111 provided with the sealing portion 111a or the main control device 110 provided with the setting key 501 and the sealing unit 100c from being fraudulently acted on from the lower right side in front view (lower left side in rear view). .

  Next, the cover plate 171 of the twenty-seventh embodiment starts from the upright portion 160 (the upright cover wall 161, the upright upper cover portion 162, the upright lower cover portion 163, and the upright inner rib 164 (see FIG. 436)). The board surface is oriented in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10, and is formed so as to extend to a position covering the setting portion 100d of the main control device 110 and covering the connector mounting portion 100h of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 450). The plate surface of the cover plate 171 covers the RAM erase switch 122 provided in the power supply device 115. In this way, by covering the devices 501, 100c, 122, and 111a that can affect the game specifications with the protective cover member 140, the security performance on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. The cover plate 171 of the twenty-seventh embodiment is formed so as not to cover the base display device 401 and the error display button 502. In addition, since the cover plate 171 is transparent, the visibility of the back surface or the like does not decrease. Therefore, the base display device 401 and / or the error display button 502 may be covered from the viewpoint of security of the main control device 110 as a whole. .

  The cover outer rib 174 formed on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 of the cover plate 171 is formed to project from a portion corresponding to the setting key 501 and a portion corresponding to the RAM erase switch 122. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to form a hole or the like in the cover plate 171, and it is possible to improve security performance on the back side of the pachinko machine 10.

  In addition, the upper side protrusion (not shown) of the cover plate 171 of the 27th embodiment is formed in a rib shape in the front direction of the pachinko machine 10, and the lower side protrusion (not shown) of the back pack 92 of the back pack unit 94. ) May be formed in a rib shape in the direction of the back surface of the pachinko machine 10. The lower side of the upper side protrusion and the upper side of the lower side protrusion are configured to be in contact with each other, so that even when the protective cover member 140 is attached to the outer frame 11, the upper side protrusion may be formed. The lower part and the lower side protrusion of the back pack 92 do not interfere with each other, the back pack 92 provided on the inner frame 12 can be closed, and the upper side surface of the lower side protrusion and the lower side surface of the upper side protrusion come into contact with each other. Thus, the gap between the back pack 92 and the protective cover member 140 can be eliminated, and the pachinko machine 10 can be prevented from contacting the main control device 110 from the back side using a wire or the like. Therefore, it is possible to prevent improper operation from the back side of the pachinko machine 10. Further, the back pack 92 is attached to the outer frame 11 in a cantilever shape because the back pack 92 is attached to the inner frame 12 in one end and the other end of the back pack 92 fixed to both ends. Even when an impact is applied to the protective cover member 140 from the back side of the pachinko machine 10, the rigidity of the protective cover member 140 is compensated by the back pack 92 attached to the inner frame 12 in a shape of a beam fixed at both ends. can do. Therefore, even when an impact or the like is given from the back side of the pachinko machine 10, the protection cover member 140 can be prevented from being damaged.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-seventh embodiment, the protection cover member 140 is extended to the left side in front view (that is, the right side in rear view) up to the portion covering the connector mounting portion 100h of the main control device 110. At the same time, the dispensing control device 111 is formed so as to extend downward from the front as far as a portion covering the sealing portion 111a. That is, in addition to the setting key 501 and the sealing unit 100c of the main control device 110, the protective cover member 140 covers the connector mounting portion 100h of the main control device 110 and the sealing portion 111a of the dispensing control device 111. . With this configuration, when the inner frame 12 is closed, in addition to the setting key 501 and the sealing unit 100c of the main control device 110, a connector connection used for communication of control signals to the control devices 111 and 113 and the like is provided. It is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from being directly operated from the back side of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the parts related to the game specifications, such as the wearing part 100h and the sealing part 111a of the payout control device 111 that manages the payout of the prize balls and the lending balls. Therefore, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the security performance on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved with a simple configuration using one member.

<Twenty-eighth embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a twenty-eighth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In a conventional gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the ratio of the number of balls (the number obtained by dividing the number of payout balls (the number of safe balls) by the number of out balls) when a player continuously plays a game with the pachinko machine. A so-called machine split, hereinafter sometimes referred to as a “payout rate”) is provided in a plurality of stages, and any one of the set values corresponding to the payout rate desired by a person in charge of the hall, etc. There is a configuration in which a person involved in the hall or the like can be changed (updated) after the power of the machine is turned on and before the game is started by the player (before opening the game hall). Then, when the player plays a game with the pachinko machine, a win / fail lottery is performed based on the set value, so that the player can play the game at a payout rate according to the set value. Becomes possible.

  Specifically, for example, in a pachinko machine capable of executing a jackpot game in which the obtained game value is high and a small jackpot game in which the obtained game value is lower than the jackpot game, a jackpot random number table 272a different for each set value is provided in advance. Have been. In the jackpot random number table 272a, the number of jackpot random numbers corresponding to the jackpot game, the number of jackpot random numbers corresponding to the jackpot game, and the loss turbulence corresponding to the losing in which none of the variable winning devices 65 and 72 are opened. The number of numerical values (hereinafter, the jackpot random value, the small random number value, and the loss random number value are collectively referred to as “each random value”) is distributed (defined) so as to be different for each set value. . Then, as the set value increases, the payout rate is more advantageous to the player (for example, the number of jackpot random numbers increases).

  Further, in a conventional pachinko machine, a first special symbol (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "special figure 1") and a second special symbol (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "special figure 2") are provided. , The distribution of the number of jackpot random numbers, the number of small hit random numbers, and the number of lost random numbers in Toku-zu 1 There is a configuration in which each distribution is different. When configured in this way, the distribution of the number of each random value is different for each set value, and the distribution of the number of each random value is also different for each special symbol, so that various playability can be provided for each set value. It can create and enhance the interest of the game.

  Further, in the conventional pachinko machine, the variable display based on the lottery game of the special figure 1 and the variable display based on the lottery game of the special figure 2 are simultaneously and concurrently executed in the special symbol display device 39, and each special symbol is displayed. There is a device that is configured to be able to simultaneously perform a variable display based on the information (a so-called simultaneous variable device).

  Here, in the pachinko machine described above, as a game specification relating to each special symbol, there is a "normal gaming state" (or "time reduction state") in which the special jackpot probability is low and the jackpot game is unlikely to occur. In addition, there is provided a "probability changing state" in which the special symbol has a high jackpot probability and the jackpot game is more likely to occur than in the "normal gaming state".

  In order to realize the “probability fluctuation state”, it is necessary to provide a larger number of jackpot random numbers in the “probability fluctuation state” than in the “normal gaming state”, but the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is limited to an upper limit (for example, “ 0 to 9999 ”), and the number of each random value must be distributed within that range.

  In addition, in order to install a pachinko machine in a game hall, it is necessary to pass a certification test conducted by the competent authority and obtain approval that the pachinko machine is within the specified range. For this reason, the pachinko machine developer must pass the certification test and receive approval, so that at the time of designing the game specifications, the payout rate at which the certification in the certification test can be obtained with all the set values of the pachinko machine As described above, the number of jackpot random numbers and the number of small jackpot random values in the jackpot random number table 272a must be distributed.

  However, in pachinko machines where the set value can be changed, when the number of jackpot random numbers is increased to change from the low probability state to the high probability state of the special symbol, If the number of hit random numbers is reduced and changed, it is necessary to calculate the payout rate of the big hit game and the payout rate of the small hit game for each set value, and to calculate each. The calculation of the overall payout rate becomes complicated, and there is a possibility that the man-hours at the time of designing the game specifications may increase. In particular, in a pachinko machine such as a simultaneous fluctuation machine, it is necessary to calculate a payout rate in consideration of a fluctuation time of each special symbol which is performed simultaneously, and calculate each payout rate in a big hit game and a small hit game. In the case where the calculation is performed in combination for each set value, the man-hour at the time of designing the game specification may be enormous.

  Thus, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-eighth embodiment, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers from the low probability state to the high probability state of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is determined by the number of loss random numbers in all the set values. It is configured to make up for. Also, the number of small random numbers in the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not changed for each set value. That is, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers due to the setting change, and the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers due to the change from the low-probability state to the high-probability state for each setting, decrease the number of lost random numbers Then, the reduced amount is compensated for by assigning it to the big hit random value, and the number of the first special symbol and the second special symbol small hit random value is the same for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol setting. . With this configuration, it is possible to calculate the payout rate for each set value by considering only the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers, and to increase the man-hour when designing the game specification. Can be suppressed.

  Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 according to the twenty-eighth embodiment will be described focusing on differences from the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixteenth to twenty-seventh embodiments. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-eighth embodiment, the same components and processes as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the sixteenth to twenty-seventh embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals as those of the sixteenth to twenty-seventh embodiments. And its illustration and description are omitted.

  First, the board surface configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 452 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the twenty-eighth embodiment. The difference between the board configuration of the game board 13 of the twenty-eighth embodiment and the sixteenth embodiment is that the top of the center frame 86 of the variable display device unit 80 is slightly biased rightward in front view, so-called left-handed. That the game and the right-handed game are clearly different from each other on the board, that the through gate 67 is arranged only on the right side of the board, and that the variable winning device 65 is arranged on the right side of the board. The point that the ordinary electric hand 64c of the ordinary symbol is arranged on the right side of the panel surface and is constituted by a retractable opening / closing plate, and the second starting port 64b corresponding to FIG. 2 is located downstream of the ordinary electric hand 64c. The arrangement is different, and the second variable winning device 72 having the small winning opening 72a is newly provided. Other configurations and functions are the same or substantially the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the sixteenth embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 452, the game board 13 of the twenty-eighth embodiment has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, and a number of ball guides, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a general prize. The opening 63, the first starting opening 64 a, the second starting opening 64 b, the ordinary electric hand 64 c, the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, the second variable winning device 72, the variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled.

  The general winning opening 63, the first starting opening 64a, the second starting opening 64b, the normal electrical working 64c, the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, the second variable winning device 72, and the variable display device unit 80 are formed on a base plate by router processing. It is arranged in a through hole formed in 60 and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with a wood screw or the like. Further, the central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c (see FIG. 369) of the front frame 14.

  A special symbol display device 39 provided with a state LED group 39a composed of a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a special LED group 39b is provided on the upper right side (the upper right side in FIG. 452) of the game area in front view. Have been. The special symbol display device 39 displays the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol according to each control performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 453) described below (hereinafter, the variable display of both special symbols is referred to as “ Dynamic display "), and the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed.

  The state LED group 39a indicates the number of retained balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) for which the variable display has not been executed, among the balls that have won (entered) the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b described later. This is indicated by the lighting state. In addition, the number of rounds of the jackpot and the error display are also indicated by the lighting state of the state LED group 39a corresponding to the state. In addition, the state LED group 39a is configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and various combinations of the emission colors indicate various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. be able to.

  Note that the “round” in the jackpot means a period from the opening of a large winning opening 65a to be described later in order to separate the number of winning balls of the jackpot from the opening to the closing, and in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-eighth embodiment, the large One "round" is executed when "30 seconds" have elapsed since the opening of the winning opening 65a or when 10 balls are won while the large winning opening 65a is open.

  The special LED group 39b includes a total of 12 LEDs, including an upper LED group 39b1 composed of six LEDs and a lower LED group 39b2 composed of six LEDs. In the upper LED group 39b1, a first special symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game is dynamically displayed. The lower LED group 39b2 dynamically displays a second special symbol indicating the determination result of the second lottery game.

  Specifically, the upper LED group 39b1 is dynamically activated until a fluctuation time (dynamic display time) determined based on winning in the first starting port 64a provided at the center of the game board 13 is elapsed. After the display (in the twenty-eighth embodiment, the lowermost LED of the upper LED group 39b1 is sequentially turned on one by one from the uppermost LED, and the lighting pattern is repeatedly displayed), a symbol indicating the determination result (the twenty-eighth embodiment) In this case, the stop display is performed in a total of 64 types of stop symbols by a combination of the lighting patterns of the six LEDs.

  In addition, the lower LED group 39b2 displays a dynamic display (dynamic display time) until a fluctuation time (dynamic display time) determined based on winning in the second starting port 64b provided on the right side of the game board 13 elapses. In the twenty-eighth embodiment, the lower LED group 39b2 sequentially turns on the lower LEDs from the uppermost LED one by one, and repeatedly displays the lighting pattern. Depending on the combination of the lighting patterns of the six LEDs, stop display is performed in a total of 64 types of stop symbols.

  In any of the LED groups 39b1 and 39b2, when the determination result is a loss, only the leftmost LED is lit and displayed, and when the determination result is a big hit, the LED corresponds to the type (type) of the big hit. Each LED group is lit and displayed in a lighting pattern. Details of the stop pattern of each LED group will be described later.

  The pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-eighth embodiment is configured so that the special symbol display device 39 can execute the dynamic display of the special figure 1 and the dynamic display of the special figure 2 simultaneously and in parallel. Therefore, for example, when a ball wins in the second starting port 64b in a state where the upper LED group 39b1 fluctuates based on the winning of the ball in the first starting port 64a, the lower LED group 39b2 is generated based on the winning. , The dynamic display of the special figure 2 is started immediately.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, when a hit to the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b is determined to be a big hit or not (big hit lottery). The jackpot type is also determined in accordance with the winning ports 64a and 64b that have won.

  The jackpot type determined in the twenty-eighth embodiment corresponds to “16 rounds (hereinafter, the round may be simply referred to as“ R ”) probable jackpot” based on the winning in the first starting port 64a. “Probability variation A”, “probability variation B” corresponding to “6R probability variable jackpot”, and “time reduction” corresponding to “6R time saving jackpot” are prepared (see FIG. 456 (a)). Further, based on the winning in the second starting opening 64b, the “probability variation A” corresponding to “16R probability variation jackpot”, the “probability variation B” corresponding to “6R probability variation jackpot”, and “6R time reduction jackpot” A corresponding “time reduction” is prepared (see FIG. 456 (b)).

  Here, the jackpot type of the “probability variation A” corresponding to the “16R probability change jackpot” means that each special symbol has a higher probability state than the “normal game state” after the maximum round number of 16 rounds. On the other hand, it is a big hit that shifts to a game state in which the normal symbol is in a low probability state (hereinafter, may be referred to as a “super probability fluctuation state”). In addition, the jackpot type of “probability variation B” corresponding to “6R probability change jackpot” means that after the maximum number of rounds of six rounds, each special symbol has a high probability state compared to the “normal game state”. In addition, it is a big hit that shifts to a gaming state in which a normal symbol is also in a high probability state (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as a “probability variation state”). Furthermore, the jackpot type of “time reduction” corresponding to “6R time-saving jackpot” means that, after the maximum number of rounds of six rounds, each special symbol has a low probability state, while a normal symbol has a high probability state. It is a jackpot that shifts to a gaming state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as a “time reduction state”).

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-eighth embodiment, the “normal gaming state” refers to a gaming state that is not a “super-probability variation state”, a “probability variation state” or a “time reduction state”, and the jackpot probability of each special symbol And a state in which the normal symbol win probability is in a normal state (ie, a low probability state) and the normal electric hand 64c is opened for a short time (ie, a non-open extended state). That is, the "normal game state" has a lower jackpot probability of each special symbol than in the "super probability fluctuation state" and "probability fluctuation state", and is more normal than in the "probability fluctuation state" and "time reduction state". It is in a state where the probability of hitting the symbol is low, and the opening time of the ordinary electric hand 64c is also short. Although the details will be described later, in this case, when a so-called right-handed game is played, a game state in which a ball easily wins in the second starting port 64b (hereinafter, a state in which a ball easily wins in the second starting port 64b is referred to as " (May be referred to as a "winning assistance state"), but the most disadvantageous gaming state for the player.

  Note that the right-handed game refers to an act of shooting a ball with the force of hitting the return rubber 69 and passing the ball through the right side of the variable display device unit 80 in a front view, and the game board 13 of the variable display device unit 80 in a front view. A ball can win the through gate 67, the variable winning device 65, and the second starting port 64b arranged on the right side. On the other hand, the left-handed game refers to an act of causing a shot ball to pass through the left side of the variable display device unit 80 in a front view, and the ball can win at the first starting port 64a. Hereinafter, the term “right-handed game” or “left-handed game” refers to a state in which a ball is fired in the above-described firing mode, respectively.

  Next, the "time shortened state" is a state in which the big hit probability of each special symbol is a low probability state like the "normal game state", but the hit probability of the normal symbol is increased, and the opening time of the normal electric hand 64c. Also refers to a state in which a so-called "time saving function" for a long time is provided. That is, in the "time shortened state", although the big hit by the special symbol is equivalent to the "normal gaming state", the hit by the normal symbol is easily derived, and the open state of the normal electric role 64c becomes long. Therefore, in the "time shortened state", a so-called winning assist state is set, and almost all balls fired by the right-handed game enter the second starting port 64b. Although the details will be described later, in this case, the dynamic display of the special figure 2 can be continuously executed, and a prize ball (for example, one piece / prize) based on the prize in the second start port 64b can be obtained. It is possible to play a game while suppressing the decrease in the possessed ball.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the twenty-eighth embodiment, the “time reduction state” is a predetermined number of times (50 in the twenty-eighth embodiment) determined in advance for each of the jackpots after the jackpot of the jackpot type “time reduction” (see FIG. 456). Times) until the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed. After the specified number of special symbols have been dynamically displayed, the state is shifted from the "time reduction state" to the "normal game state".

  Next, the “probability change state” is a high probability state in which the subsequent jackpot probability of each special symbol is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, and the hit probability of the ordinary symbol is increased. It refers to a gaming state in which the opening time is also long (that is, an extended opening state). In other words, the "probability variation state" is a state in which the jackpot result with the special symbol is easily derived, the winning result with the ordinary symbol is easily derived, and the open state of the ordinary electric hand 64c is longer. Although the details will be described later, in this case, in the “probability variation state”, a so-called winning assistance state is set, and almost all the balls fired by the right-handed game enter the second starting port 64b. The dynamic display can be continuously executed, and a prize ball (for example, one piece / prize) based on winning in the second starting port 64b can be obtained to play a game while suppressing a decrease in the number of balls held. It is possible to play the game in a state where a jackpot game (special game state) based on the dynamic display of the special map 2 is likely to occur. In other words, in the “probability variation state”, almost all the balls fired by the right-handed game enter the second starting port 64b and do not flow down to the downstream side (that is, the second variable winning device 72 side). Has become.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-eighth embodiment, as the “probability change state”, after the jackpot of the jackpot type “probability change B” (see FIG. 456), the next jackpot game is started (until the next jackpot). Both the big hit probability of each special symbol and the hit probability of the ordinary symbol are maintained in a high probability state. That is, once the "probability change state" is entered, the "probability change state" is continued until a jackpot game with each special symbol occurs.

  Next, the “super probability fluctuation state” is a high probability state in which the subsequent jackpot probability of each special symbol is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, while the normal symbol hit probability is as low as the “normal gaming state”. This is a game state in which the open state of the ordinary electric hand 64c is short in addition to the probability state. That is, the “super probability fluctuation state” is a state in which the jackpot result by the special symbol is easily derived, while the hit result by the ordinary symbol is hardly derived from the “time reduction state” and the “probability fluctuation state”, and The opening time of the hand 64c is shorter than the “time reduction state” and the “probability change state”. Although details will be described later, in this case, in the “super probability fluctuation state”, if the player makes a right-handed game, passes the ball to the through gate 67, and wins a win in the variable display of the normal symbol, the second start Although it is possible to cause the mouth 64b to win a ball and execute the dynamic display of the special figure 2, since the open state of the ordinary electric hand 64c is for a short period of time, a ball that rolls on the upper surface of the ordinary electric hand 64c Is in a gaming state where it can be guided to the downstream side of the ordinary electric hand 64c as it is.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-eighth embodiment, after the jackpot of the jackpot type “stochastic variation A” (see FIG. 456), the next jackpot game is started as the “super probability variation state” (so-called, until the next jackpot). In addition, while the jackpot probability of each special symbol is in a high probability state, the hit probability of an ordinary symbol is maintained in a low probability state. That is, once the user enters the “super-probability fluctuation state”, the “super-probability fluctuation state” is continued until a jackpot game with each special symbol occurs.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-eighth embodiment, a second variable prize device 72 described later, which is opened for a short time on the downstream side (lower right side of the board) of the ordinary electric hand 64c when a small hitting game described later is won. Is arranged. Although details will be described later, in the "super probability fluctuation state", when the small hit game is won as a result of the dynamic display of the special figure 2, some of the balls fired by the right-handed game are moved to the second starting port. It is possible to win the small winning opening 72a of the second variable winning device 72 without winning the win 64b. The small winning opening 72a has a larger number of winning balls based on winning than the second starting opening 64b (winning into the small winning opening 72a → 10 prize balls, winning in the second starting opening 64b → winning ball). 1), by winning the small hitting game in the "super probability fluctuation state", it is possible to increase the number of balls possessed by the player by causing the ball to enter the small winning opening 72a instead of the second starting opening 64b. Become. By setting (distributing) such that the small hit game is frequently won in the dynamic display of the special map 2, payout of the prize ball by the small hit game can be frequently performed in the "super probability fluctuation state". . As a result, in the "super probability fluctuation state", it is possible to realize the gaming property of how to make the "super probability fluctuation state" continue for a long time and make the small winning opening 72a win many balls.

  With such a configuration, first, in the "normal gaming state", a left-handed game is performed, the big hit game is won in the dynamic display of the special figure 1, and the game value by the big hit game is obtained. It is possible to realize a game property in which the gaming state is any of the “super-probability variation state”, the “probability variation state”, or the “time reduction state” accompanying the jackpot type. Then, in the "time reduction state", a right-handed game is performed to realize the playability of how to win the jackpot game in the dynamic display of the special figure 2 while the prize assist state is valid. it can. Further, in the "probability variation state", it is possible to realize a gaming ability of performing a right-handed game and maintaining the winning assistance state while determining whether or not the next big hit game is a big hit type. Further, in the "super probability fluctuation state", although the player plays a right-handed game and does not have a prize assisting state, the player wins the small hitting game and wins a ball in the small winning opening 72a to increase the number of possessed balls, thereby increasing the jackpot. It is possible to realize the game property of how to continue the "super probability fluctuation state" without winning the game. The driving mode of the ordinary electric winning combination 64c and the driving mode of the second variable winning device 72 in each gaming state will be described later.

  Here, the display mode of the special LED group 39b for each jackpot type will be described. As the stop display (lighting display) of the upper special LED group 39b1 for the first special symbol, one type of display pattern corresponding to the loss, 21 types of display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type “probability variation A”, and the type of the jackpot type “probability variation” There are provided a total of 64 display patterns, 21 display patterns corresponding to "B" and 21 display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "time reduction". Each display pattern does not have a specific regularity for each jackpot type, and a random display pattern is associated in advance. Therefore, when the player looks at the display pattern of the upper LED group 39b1, it is possible to recognize that the stop display of the loss has been stopped, while the jackpot type “probability variation A”, “probability variation B” or “ It is difficult to identify which of the stop displays of “time reduction”.

  Also, as the stop display (lighting display) of the lower special LED group 39b2 for the second special symbol, one type of display pattern corresponding to the loss, 21 types of display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type “probability variation A”, and A total of 64 types of display patterns are provided, 21 types of display patterns corresponding to "probability variation B", 20 types of display patterns corresponding to the big hit type "time reduction", and one type of display pattern corresponding to the small hit. I have. Like the upper LED group 39b1, each display pattern does not have a specific regularity for each jackpot type, and a random display pattern is associated in advance. Therefore, when the player looks at the display pattern of the lower LED group 39b2, the stop display of the loss and the stop display of the small hit can be recognized, while the big hit type “probability change A”, “probability change B” or It is difficult to identify which stop display is “time reduction”.

  With this configuration, even if each jackpot type is displayed in the stop display of the special LED group 39b of the special symbol display device 39, unless all the jackpot types corresponding to each stop display are grasped. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize the type of the winning jackpot. Therefore, for example, even if the player wins the “probability variation B”, the third symbol display device 81 displays the big hit result corresponding to “time reduction” as a temporary display, and “ The jackpot promotion effect of promoting the jackpot result corresponding to “time reduction” to the jackpot result corresponding to “probability variation B” can be effectively executed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Next, in the game area of the game board 13, a plurality of general prize holes 63 are provided in which ten balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball wins.

  Further, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the first special symbol or the first special symbol in the special symbol display device 39 is triggered by entering the first opening 64a (start winning) or entering the second opening 64b (start winning). A third symbol display device constituted by a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”) having a third symbol display area 81a for performing a fluctuation effect of the third symbol while synchronizing with the dynamic display of the second special symbol. 81 is formed in a display area different from the third symbol display area 81a in the third symbol display device 81, and synchronized with the dynamic display of the first special symbol in the upper LED group 39b1 of the special symbol display device 39. The fourth symbol 82a for special figure 1 for performing the variable display of the symbol and the special symbol for performing the variable display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the dynamic display of the second special symbol in the lower LED group 39b2 of the special symbol display device 39. (2) A fourth symbol display area 82 having a fourth symbol 82b, and an LED for displaying an ordinary symbol in a variable manner (hereinafter, the variable display of the ordinary symbol is referred to as a "variable display") when the ball of the through gate 67 passes as a trigger. A second symbol display device 83 (hereinafter, the second symbol display device 83 is referred to as “ordinary symbol display device 83” for convenience of description) is provided. Further, a center frame 86 is provided in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 17-inch liquid crystal display, and its display content is controlled by a display control device 114 (see FIG. 453) described later, so that, for example, left, middle, and right Are displayed (not shown).

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-eighth embodiment, the dynamic display of the special figure 1 and the dynamic display of the special figure 2 are configured to be able to be executed simultaneously and in parallel. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the display area 81a is configured to execute a variable effect based on any one of the special symbols according to various situations. Specifically, for example, in the case of the “normal game state”, only the variable effect relating to the special figure 1 is executed in the third symbol display area 81a of the third symbol display device 81, and the variable effect relating to the special figure 2 is the third effect. The fourth symbol 82b for the special figure 2 and the lower LED group 39b2 of the special symbol display device 39 are configured not to perform the adjustment in the symbol display area 81a. In the case of the “super probability fluctuation state”, the “probability fluctuation state”, or the “time reduction state”, only the fluctuation effect related to the special figure 2 is executed in the third symbol display area 81a of the third symbol display device 81. 1 is not performed in the third symbol display area 81a, but is executed by the fourth symbol 82a for special figure 1 and the upper LED group 39b1 of the special symbol display device 39. With this configuration, it is possible to execute an effect (variable effect) relating to a special symbol to be noted in each game state in the third symbol display area 81a of the third symbol display device 81 which is a large display. Can accurately recognize the game situation and the like.

  As described above, the fourth symbol display area 82 displays the fourth symbols 82a and 82b corresponding to the respective special symbols, and executes or does not execute the dynamic display of each special symbol in the fourth symbols 82a and 82b. Is configured to be displayed. The fourth symbols 82a and 82b are synchronized with the dynamic display of each special symbol in each of the LED groups 39b1 and 39b2 of the special symbol display device 39 and the fluctuation display of each special symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Thus, it is configured to have the same function as the special symbol display device 39. Therefore, the player, for example, in the third symbol display device 81, even if the variation of the third symbol is a temporary stop, blackout, freeze, etc., even if the variation effect of the third symbol is difficult or unrecognizable, By confirming the execution mode of each of the fourth symbols 82a and 82b, it is possible to grasp whether or not the variable effect (dynamic display) is being executed even in the above-mentioned difficult-to-recognize state.

  Note that the execution of each special symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is not only a variation effect relating to the special symbol to be executed according to the game state as in the twenty-eighth embodiment, but also dynamic display of both special symbols. May be displayed and executed simultaneously by the third symbol display device 81. In addition, a priority order of special symbols to be executed for each game state is provided, and when a special symbol with a high priority is executed, a special symbol with a high priority is executed while performing a variable effect related to the special symbol. In the situation where the fluctuation effect is not executed, when the execution opportunity of the special symbol having the low priority is acquired, the fluctuation effect regarding the special symbol may be executed.

  The normal symbol display device 83 performs variable display in which a symbol “O” and a symbol “X” as a display symbol (ordinary symbol) are alternately turned on each time a ball passes through the through gate 67. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the ordinary symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the twenty-eighth embodiment, a symbol of “○”), the ordinary electric hand 64c above the second starting port 64b operates for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in a state (open).

  The number of reserved balls in the through gate 67 is retained up to a maximum of four times, the reserved ball number is displayed by the above-mentioned special symbol display device 39, and the second symbol reserved lamp 84 (hereinafter, the second symbol reserved lamp 84 will be described. For the sake of convenience, it is also lit on a "ordinary symbol holding lamp 84". Usually, four symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81. Then, the number of reserved symbols is displayed based on the number of lights of the ordinary symbol retaining lamp 84.

  Note that the variable display of the ordinary symbol is performed by switching between turning on and off the plurality of lamps in the ordinary symbol display device 83 as in the twenty-eighth embodiment, and a special symbol display device 39 or a third symbol display device. 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the ordinary symbol holding lamp 84 may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the maximum number of reserved balls that pass through the through gate 67 is not limited to four, but may be set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight). In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the special symbol display device 39, it is not always necessary to perform the lighting display by the ordinary symbol retaining lamp 84.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first starting port 64a into which a ball can enter is provided. When a ball enters the first starting port 64a, a first starting port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device is turned on by the turning on of the first starting port switch. At 110 (see FIG. 453), a jackpot lottery of the first special symbol is performed. Then, a dynamic display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED group 39b1 above the special LED group 39b of the special symbol display device 39, and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 only in the "normal gaming state". A variable effect based on the first special symbol is executed. The first starting port 64a is also one of the winning ports from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball enters.

  A second starting port 64b through which a ball can enter only when the ordinary electric hand 64c is in an open state is provided on the right side of the gaming board 13 in a front view and below a variable winning device 65 described later. Have been. When a ball enters the second starting port 64b, a second starting port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device is turned on by turning on the second starting port switch. At 110 (see FIG. 453), a jackpot lottery of the second special symbol is performed. A display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED group 39b2 below the special LED group 39b of the special symbol display device 39, and is in the "super probability fluctuation state", the "probability fluctuation state", or the "time reduction state". Only in this case, the third symbol display device 81 executes a variable effect based on the second special symbol. In addition, the second starting port 64b is also one of the winning ports where one ball is paid out as a prize ball when the ball enters.

  As described above, a single plate-shaped ordinary electrical hand 64c is provided above the second starting port 64b to cover the opening through which the ball enters the second starting port 64b. The normal electric role 64c is in a closed state in which it protrudes from the board surface of the game board 13 to cover the opening of the flow path flowing into the second starting port 64b. It is configured to be displaceable between an open state in which an opening of a flow channel flowing into the air is opened. The second starting port 64b is normally in a closed state in which the normal electric role 64c protrudes from the board, and the ball cannot enter or hardly enters the second starting port 64b. .

  On the other hand, when the variable display on the ordinary symbol display device 83 stops at the symbol of “○”, the ordinary electric hand 64c of the second starting port 64b is operated for a predetermined time. While the normal electric hand 64c is operated, the normal electric hand 64c is immersed in the board from the state in which the normal electric hand 64c protrudes from the board, and the second starting port 64b is in the open state. When the second starting port 64b is in the open state, the ball can enter the second starting port 64b, or the ball can easily enter the ball compared to the closed state. In other words, as a result of the variable display on the ordinary symbol display device 83, a stop is made at the symbol of “○” and a hit is made, and the ball is thrown into the second startup port 64b by opening the second startup port 64b. A state in which a lot of jackpots can be performed can be achieved.

  A deceleration member (not shown) for decelerating a ball rolling on the upper surface of the ordinary electric hand 64c is formed above the ordinary electric hand 64c. In the twenty-eighth embodiment, a sphere rolling on the upper surface of the ordinary electric hand 64c collides with this deceleration member, so that the time for rolling on the upper surface of the ordinary electric hand 64c is lengthened. Is configured so that it takes about 3 seconds for the ball to roll on the upper surface from the right end to the left end of the normal electric hand 64c. Therefore, if the ball fired by the right-handed game is released (submerged) while the normal electric hand 64c is rolling on the normal electric hand 64c (ie, for about 3 seconds), Due to its own weight, it can flow downward in the vertical direction of the game board 13 and win a prize in the second starting port 64b, while the normal electric hand 64c closes (projects) while rolling on the normal electric hand 64c. When maintained, it is configured to roll from the right end to the left end on the normal electric hand 64c and flow down to the small winning opening 72a side arranged on the left side of the gaming board 13 of the normal electric hand 64c in a front view. ing. Although the details will be described later, in the “probability fluctuation state” and the “time reduction state”, the variable display time of the ordinary symbol is set to less than “3 seconds” (that is, “0.5 seconds”), so that the normal electric While the ball is rolling over the upper 64c, the variable display of the normal symbol ends, and as a result, the ball hits the normal symbol, so that the ball rolling above the normal electric 64c is in the third position. It flows into the second starting port 64b.

  Note that the time for rolling on the upper surface of the ordinary electric hand 64c is not limited to the above embodiment, and can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, for example, it may be configured to have a short time of less than “3 seconds” (for example, “1 second”) or a long time of “3 seconds” or more (for example, “5 seconds”). The configuration may be such that

  A variable winning device 65 is provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 in a front view, and a horizontally long rectangular winning port 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-eighth embodiment, when the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the main controller 110 (see FIG. 453) is a big hit, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, The special LED group 39b of the special symbol display device 39 is turned on so as to be a big hit stop symbol, and a stop symbol corresponding to the big hit (for example, three identical symbols (“777”) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. And the like) are displayed to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot game. Thereafter, the opening / closing plate (not shown) provided in the variable winning device 65 is opened, and the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit game) in which the ball can easily enter the big winning opening 65a. In this special game state, the large winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, until “30 seconds” elapse or until ten balls are won).

  When the special winning opening 65a is opened, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the opening or when a predetermined number of winnings are detected, the special winning opening 65a is closed, and after the closing, the special winning opening 65a is opened again. The opening and closing operation of the special winning opening 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 16 times (16 rounds). The state in which the opening / closing operation is being performed is one form of a special game state (big hit state) that is advantageous to the player. As a provision of a value (game value), a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual.

  Below the variable winning device 65, there is provided a lateral feed member 65c for guiding a ball flowing down the right side of the center frame 86 to the upper right end of the normal electric hand 64c. By this transverse feed member 65c, a ball fired by a right-handed game, which has not been won in the variable winning device 65, is guided to the right end side of the normal electric hand 64c, and the upper surface of the normal electric hand 64c is always Can be rolled.

  As described above, it takes about 3 seconds for the sphere to roll along the slope from the right end to the left end of the upper surface of the normal electric hand 64c, so that the ball rolls on the upper surface of the normal electric hand 64c. In a situation where the ball is not opened for more than 3 seconds (ie, the closed state of the grid 64c is maintained for more than 3 seconds), the ball is moved to the right end of the upper surface of the grid 64c. To the left end, and flows down to the downstream side. On the other hand, when the ball is rolling on the upper surface of the ordinary electric hand 64c and the ordinary electric hand 64c is opened within about 3 seconds (that is, the closed state of the ordinary electric hand 64c is maintained for about 3 seconds or more). Otherwise, the ball rolling on the upper surface of the ordinary electric hand 64c flows down to the second starting port 64b side, and is configured to win the second starting port 64b.

  A second variable winning device 72 is disposed on the left side (downstream side) of the second starting port 64b when viewed from the front, and a horizontally long small winning port 72a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-eighth embodiment, when the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the main controller 110 (see FIG. 453) is a small hit, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed. The special LED group 39b of the special symbol display device 39 is illuminated and displayed so as to be a small symbol stop symbol, and a stop symbol corresponding to the small symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (for example, a fixed specific symbol ( "341")) is displayed to indicate the occurrence of the small hit game. Thereafter, the opening / closing plate (not shown) provided in the second variable winning device 72 is opened, and the gaming state transits to a special gaming state (small hitting game) in which the ball easily enters the small winning opening 72a. In this special game state, the small winning opening 72a which is normally closed is opened until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, until "1.8 seconds" elapses or one ball is won). .

  The opening and closing operation of the small winning opening 72a is configured to be performed only once in one small hitting game. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is one form of a special gaming state (small hitting state) that is advantageous to the player, and the player is provided with more gaming value (gaming value) than usual at the time of giving the gaming value (game value). Payout of less prize balls than the jackpot game is performed. In addition, the small winning opening 72a is closed when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a predetermined time has elapsed since opening or a predetermined number of winnings are detected) when the small winning opening 72a is opened, and the small hitting game ends after the closing. Then, the game is restarted in the gaming state before the start of the small hitting game.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-eighth embodiment, the ball fired by the right-handed game and not winning the variable winning device 65 is the second ball in the state where the ordinary electric hand 64c is closed for 3 seconds or more. It can flow down to the position where the variable winning device 72 is provided and flow into the small winning opening 72a. On the other hand, in a state where the ordinary electric hand 64c is intermittently opened within three seconds, almost all balls rolling on the upper surface of the ordinary electric hand 64c flow down to the second starting port 64b side, and It is configured not to reach the arrangement position of the variable winning device 72.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 453 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the twenty-eighth embodiment.

  The MPU 271 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit is mounted on the main control device 110 of the twenty-eighth embodiment. The MPU 271 includes a ROM 272 storing various control programs executed by the MPU 271 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 272. A certain RAM 273 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in.

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit to instruct the sub-control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  In the main control device 110, the main features of the pachinko machine 10 such as the jackpot lottery, the setting of dynamic display and fluctuating effect on the special symbol display device 39 and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the variable display display result on the ordinary symbol display device 83. Perform various processing. The RAM 273 is provided with a counter buffer 273c for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

  In addition, the ROM 272 stores a jackpot random number table 272a, a jackpot type table 272b, a hold number table 272c, a stop pattern table 272d, a variation pattern table 272e, an ordinary figure random number table 272f, an ordinary figure variation table 272g, an electric utility opening table 272h, and a jackpot. At least an open table 272i and a small hit open table 272j are stored. Main controller 110 executes the above main control using various counters stored in RAM 273 and various tables stored in ROM 272.

  Here, a counter and the like provided in RAM 273 of main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters and the like are used for a big hit lottery and a small hit lottery, a dynamic display setting of the special symbol display device 39, a variable effect setting of the third symbol display device 81, a lottery of a variable display display result in the ordinary symbol display device 83. It is used by the MPU 271 of the main control device 110 to perform such operations. Further, in the description of the various counters, various tables stored in the ROM 272 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 455 to 464.

  The jackpot lottery and the small hit lottery, the dynamic display setting of the special symbol display device 39, and the setting of the fluctuation effect of the third symbol display device 81 include a jackpot random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and the small hit lottery, A jackpot type counter C2 used to select a jackpot symbol stop type, a stop pattern selection counter C3 used to select a rough presentation mode of a variable effect, and a first initial value used to set an initial value of a jackpot random number counter C1. A random number counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for detailed variation pattern selection are used.

  In addition, the random number counter C4 per ordinary figure (equivalent to the second random number counter C4 in the sixteenth embodiment) is used for the lottery of the ordinary symbol display device 83, and the initial value of the random number counter C4 per ordinary figure is set for the lottery. A 2 initial value random number counter CINI2 (equivalent to the 2nd initial value random number counter CINI2 in the sixteenth embodiment) is used.

  Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time an update is performed, and the counter returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 4 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 466), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main process (see FIG. 385). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer 273c set in a predetermined area of the RAM 273. As will be described in detail later, the RAM 273 has a first reserved ball storage area 273d including four reserved areas (first reserved first to fourth areas) related to the first special symbol, and four reserved areas related to the second special symbol. A second reserved ball storage area 273e composed of areas (second reserved first to fourth areas) is provided, and in each of these areas, a ball enters the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b. The values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 are stored in accordance with the timing.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The jackpot random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by one within a predetermined range (for example, “0 to 9999”) and becomes a maximum value (for example, “9999” in the case of a counter that can take a value of “0 to 9999”). It is configured to return to "0" after reaching. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 is updated once, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and the update of the jackpot random number counter C1 is performed from the initial value. Done.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the jackpot random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the jackpot random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of “0 to 9999”, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of “0 to 9999”. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 466) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 385).

  The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in the twenty-eighth embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 466)). Then, at the timing when the ball wins (starts winning) in the first starting opening 64a, the first holding first to first holding provided in the first holding ball storage area 273d corresponding to the first starting opening 64a (first special symbol). It is stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 273d1 of any of the first holding areas in the fourth area. In addition, at the timing when the ball wins (starts winning) in the second starting port 64b, the second reserved first to first provided in the second reserved ball storage area 273e corresponding to the second starting port 64b (second special symbol). It is stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 273e1 of any of the second holding areas in the fourth area.

  The value of the random number at which the jackpot random number counter C1 becomes a jackpot or a small jackpot is set in a jackpot random number table 272a corresponding to each special symbol stored in the ROM 272 of the main control device 110. That is, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 273d1 of the reserved area of the first reserved ball storage area 273d becomes the jackpot set by the jackpot random number table 272a1 corresponding to the first special symbol. If it matches the value of the random number, it is determined to be a big hit, and if it matches the value of the random number to be a small hit, it is determined to be a small hit. Also, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 273e1 of the reserved area of the second reserved ball storage area 273e becomes the jackpot set by the jackpot random number table 272a2 corresponding to the second special symbol. If it matches the value of the random number, it is determined to be a big hit, and if it matches the value of the random number to be a small hit, it is determined to be a small hit.

  Here, the details of the jackpot random number table 272a corresponding to each special symbol will be described with reference to FIG. 455. FIG. 455 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of a jackpot random number table 272a1 corresponding to the first special symbol stored in the ROM 272 (hereinafter, referred to as a "special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1"). FIG. 455 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of a jackpot random number table 272a2 (hereinafter, referred to as a “special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2”) corresponding to the second special symbol stored in the ROM 272. is there.

  The special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 and the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 of the twenty-eighth embodiment are respectively for the low probability state used when the gaming state is the special symbol low probability state for each set value, The game state is divided into two types, a high-probability state and a high-probability state that are used when the special symbol has a higher probability of being a big hit than the low probability state of the special symbol.

  Then, for each set value, the number of jackpot random numbers included in the low probability state and the high probability state is differently set. Further, an increase in the number of jackpot random numbers required for shifting from the low probability state to the high probability state is compensated for from the number of loss random numbers corresponding to the loss. That is, when the number of jackpot random numbers is increased in order to shift from the low probability state to the high probability state, the number of lost random numbers is reduced, and the decrease is assigned as the number of jackpot random values. In this way, by changing the number of jackpot random numbers according to the game state, the jackpot probability is changed between the low probability state and the high probability state.

  On the other hand, in each special symbol, the number of small random numbers included in each set value and in each of the low probability state and the high probability state is set to be the same. That is, the number of small random numbers in the first special symbol is the same for each set value, and is the same for the low probability state and the high probability state. Similarly, the number of small random numbers in the second special symbol is the same for each set value, and is the same in the low probability state and the high probability state. In this way, by setting the number of small random numbers to the same value for each set value in each special symbol, and for the low probability state and the high probability state, all the set values and the game state in each special symbol In this case, the game value giving ratio in which only the small hit game is considered is equalized.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-eighth embodiment, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers from the low probability state to the high probability state of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is determined by the loss random number value in all the set values. It is configured to supplement from the number of Also, the number of small random numbers in the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not changed for each set value. That is, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers due to the setting change, and the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers due to the change from the low-probability state to the high-probability state for each setting, decrease the number of lost random numbers Then, the reduced amount is compensated for by assigning it to the big hit random value, and the number of the first special symbol and the second special symbol small hit random value is the same for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol setting. . With this configuration, it is possible to calculate the payout rate for each set value by considering only the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers, and to increase the man-hour when designing the game specification. Can be suppressed.

  Also, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-eighth embodiment, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers resulting from the setting change is determined by the jackpot random number counter C1, which is a jackpot random number value that can be obtained when the player is most likely to stay in a game. It is configured to compensate from the role of the most random number other than (ie, the lost random number). With such a configuration, for example, in the first special symbol whose execution rate is encouraged in the “normal game state” where the stay rate is high, the appearance of the lost role, which is the most frequent role in the variation effect of the first special symbol, appears. Setting discrimination can be made difficult from the number of times. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 to be seen by setting only the appearance rate of the jackpot having a lower appearance probability than the losing role as the setting determination element by the player. As a result, even if the setting is low (i.e., the set value 1 or the like), the game can be continued without letting the player know the setting, and the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be promoted.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the twenty-eighth embodiment, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers resulting from the setting change is determined by determining the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers C1 out of the jackpot random number counter C1, It is configured to compensate from the number.

  The losing role is different from the jackpot role and the small winning role, because it is a role that does not provide a game value, and is provided for each pachinko machine 10 and a data lamp (not shown) for displaying a game result or the like in the pachinko machine 10. Is not clearly (largely) displayed. Here, suppose that the number of the jackpot random numbers corresponding to the jackpot game and the number of the jackpot random numbers corresponding to the small jackpot game that are easily (largely) displayed on the data lamp are changed for each setting. When the player glances (confirms) the appearance rates of the two elements of the big hit game and the small hit game with a data lamp, the setting discrimination of the pachinko machine 10 is easily guessed. As a result, for example, when the setting of the pachinko machine 10 set to the low setting (for example, the set value “1”) is discovered by the player, the player does not play the game with the pachinko machine 10 and The operation of the machine 10 may be reduced.

  Therefore, an increase in the number of jackpot random numbers resulting from the change in the setting of the probability set value is determined by using the jackpot random number counter C1 which does not give a game value to a player and is not clearly (broadly) displayed on a data lamp. Is configured so as to compensate from the number of lost random numbers corresponding to the above, so that the setting discrimination element by the player is only the appearance rate of the big hit, and the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is hard to be seen from the appearance rate of the small hit. be able to. Therefore, the discrimination factor of the probability set value is limited to the appearance rate of the hand based on one random number value. For example, even if the payout rate is low (that is, the set value “1” or the like), it is set to the player. The game can be continued without being seen, and the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be promoted.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-eighth embodiment, in the high probability state of the special symbol, the lower the set value is, the harder the jackpot is to occur, and the higher the set value, the more the large jackpot is likely to occur. In the “state”, the lower the set value is, the longer the stay period of the “super probability fluctuation state” is likely to be. As a result, as the set value is lower, the number of wins in small hits in the “super probability fluctuation state” tends to increase, so that the game value given in the “super probability fluctuation state” increases. Therefore, even if the set value is low, by entering the “super probability fluctuation state”, it is possible to increase the game value that can be given to the player as compared with the case where the set value is high. Therefore, by providing the "super probability fluctuation state", the advantage and disadvantage of the setting difference can be reversed, the variation of the game can be abundant, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 455 (a), in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1 of the twenty-eighth embodiment, when the set value is “1”, the jackpot random number which becomes a jackpot in the low probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1 The number of values (big hit random value) of the counter C1 is 50, and the value “0 to 49” is defined (set) in the special drawing 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “1” (ie, the “normal game state” or the “time reduction state”) is 50/10000 = 0.5 / 100. (That is, 0.5%).

  On the other hand, when the set value is “1”, the number of random number values (big hit random number values) that become big hits in the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 500, and the values “0 to 499” are Are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “1” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 500/10000 = 5/100 ( That is, 5%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set to be 10 times larger than the low probability state.

  When the set value is “1”, the number of random numbers (small hit random value) that are small hits in the low probability state and the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 are both 100 and low. The value “50 to 149” in the case of the probability state or the value “500 to 599” in the case of the high probability state is defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the small hit probability in the first special symbol of the set value “1” is 100/10000 = 1/100 (that is, 1%) in any game state, and the low probability state and the high probability of the special symbol It is set so that the winning probability of the small hit is equal to the state.

  Therefore, when the set value is “1”, the number of random number values (loss random number values) that are lost in the low probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1 is the remaining number other than the jackpot random number value and the small jackpot random value. For 9850, the values “150 to 9999” are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. In the high probability state, the number of random values (losing random values) that result in a loss is 9400 other than the jackpot random value and the small random number value, and the values “600 to 9999” are the special figures. It is defined (set) in the big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the loss probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “1” (that is, “normal game state” or “time shortened state”) is 9850/10000 = 98.5 / 100. (That is, 98.5%), and the loss probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 9400. / 10000 = 94/100 (that is, 94%).

  That is, at the set value “1”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of the special map 1 is reduced, and the number of loss random numbers in the “normal game state” where the stay ratio is the highest in the game is reduced. The number of jackpot random numbers for the increase from the low probability state to the high probability state is within the range of the number of lost random numbers in the “normal game state” (that is, 9850 or less) while being configured to compensate for the decrease. It is configured as follows.

  Next, when the set value is “2”, the number of values (big hit random value) of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes the big hit in the low probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 52, and the value is “0 to 51”. Are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “2” (ie, the “normal game state” or the “time reduction state”) is 52/10000 = 0.52 / 100. (That is, 0.52%).

  On the other hand, when the set value is “2”, the number of random number values (small jackpot random number value) in the high probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1 is 520, and the value “0 to 519” is Are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “2” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 520/10000 = 5.2 / 100 (that is, 5.2%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set so as to be 10 times larger than the low probability state.

  When the set value is “2”, the number of random numbers (small hit random value) that are small hits in the low probability state and the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is equal to the set value “1”. As in the case, the value “52 to 151” in the case of the low probability state or the value “520 to 619” in the case of the high probability state is defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. Have been. That is, the small hit probability in the first special symbol of the set value “2” is 100/10000 = 1/100 (that is, 1%) in any game state, and the low probability state and the high probability of the special symbol It is set so that the winning probability of the small hit is equal to the state.

  Therefore, when the set value is “2”, the number of random number values (loss random number values) that are lost in the low probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is the remaining number other than the big hit random number value and the small hit random number value. The number “152 to 9999” is defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 for 9848 pieces. In the case of the high-probability state, the number of random numbers (losing random values) that are lost is 9380 remaining values other than the big hit random value and the small hit random value, and the values “620 to 9999” are the special figure. It is defined (set) in the big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the loss probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “2” (that is, “normal game state” or “time shortened state”) is 9848/10000 = 98.48 / 100. (That is, 98.48%), and the loss probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 9380. /10000=93.8/100 (that is, 93.8%).

  That is, at the set value “2”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of the special figure 1 is reduced, and the number of lost random numbers in the “normal game state” where the staying rate is highest in the game is reduced. The range of the number of lost random numbers in the "normal gaming state" is that the number of jackpot random numbers in the increase from the low-probability state to the high-probability state and the increase due to the change in the set value is configured to compensate for the decrease. (That is, 9848 or less).

  Therefore, although the set value “2” in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 has the same small hit probability as the set value “1” (both are 1%), the big hit probability is slightly improved (low). (Probability state: 0.5% → 0.52%, high probability state: 5% → 5.2%), which can be said to be a setting in which a jackpot game is more likely to occur than in the case of the set value “1”.

  Next, when the set value is “3”, the number of the jackpot random number counter C1 (the jackpot random number value) which becomes the jackpot in the low probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1 is 54, and the value is “0 to 53”. Are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “3” (that is, the “normal game state” or the “time reduction state”) is 54/10000 = 0.54 / 100 (that is, 0.54%).

  On the other hand, when the set value is “3”, the number of random number values (big hit random number values) that become a big hit in the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 540, and the values “0 to 539” are Are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “3” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 540/10000 = 5.4 / 100 (that is, 5.4%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set so as to be 10 times larger than the low probability state.

  Further, when the set value is “3”, the number of random numbers (small hit random value) that are small hits in the low probability state and the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 are the set value “1” and As in the case of the set value “2”, the number is 100 each, and the values “54 to 153” in the low probability state or the values “540 to 639” in the high probability state are stored in the special figure 1 big hit random number table. 272a1. That is, the small hit probability in the first special symbol of the set value “3” is 100/10000 = 1/100 (that is, 1%) in any game state, and the low probability state and the high probability of the special symbol It is set so that the winning probability of the small hit is equal to the state.

  Therefore, when the setting value is “3”, the number of random numbers that are lost in the low probability state (losing random value) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is the remaining number other than the big hit random value and the small hit random value. For 9846, the values “154 to 9999” are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. In the case of the high-probability state, the number of random numbers (losing random numbers) that are lost is 9360 remaining numbers other than the big hit random number and the small hit random number, and the values “640 to 9999” are the special figure. It is defined (set) in the big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the loss probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “3” (that is, “normal game state” or “time shortened state”) is 9846/10000 = 98.46 / 100. (That is, 98.46%), and the loss probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 9360. /10000=93.6/100 (that is, 93.6%).

  That is, at the setting value “3”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of the special figure 1 is reduced, and the number of loss random numbers in the “normal game state” having the highest staying rate in the game is reduced. The range of the number of lost random numbers in the "normal gaming state" is such that the number of jackpot random numbers in the increase from the low probability state to the high probability state, and the increase due to the change in the set value, while compensating for the decrease (That is, 9846 or less).

  Therefore, although the set value “3” in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is equal to the small value probability (1% both) as compared with the set value “2”, the big hit probability is slightly improved (low). (Probability state: 0.52% → 0.54%, high probability state: 5.2% → 5.4%), which can be said to be a setting in which a jackpot game is more likely to occur than in the case of the set value “2”.

  Next, when the set value is "4", the number of the jackpot random number counter C1 (small jackpot random value) which becomes a jackpot in the low probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1 is 56, and the value is "0 to 55". Are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “4” (that is, “normal game state” or “time shortened state”) is 56/10000 = 0.56 / 100. (That is, 0.56%).

  On the other hand, when the setting value is “4”, the number of random number values (big hit random number values) which are big hits in the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 560, and the values “0 to 559” are Are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “4” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 560/10000 = 5.6 / 100 (that is, 5.6%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set so as to be 10 times larger than the low probability state.

  Further, when the set value is “4”, the number of random numbers (small hit random value) which are small hits in the low probability state and the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 are set values “1” to “1”. As in the case of “3”, the value is “100” in both cases, and the value “56 to 155” in the case of the low probability state or the value “560 to 659” in the case of the high probability state is stored in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. Stipulated (set). That is, the small hit probability in the first special symbol of the set value “4” is 100/10000 = 1/100 (that is, 1%) in any game state, and the low probability state and the high probability of the special symbol It is set so that the winning probability of the small hit is equal to the state.

  Accordingly, when the set value is “4”, the number of random numbers that are lost in the low-probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1 (loss random value) is the remaining number other than the jackpot random value and the small random number value. For 9844, the values “156 to 9999” are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. In the case of the high-probability state, the number of lost random numbers (losing random number values) is the remaining 9340 numbers other than the big hit random number value and the small hit random number value. It is defined (set) in the big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the loss probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “4” (that is, “normal game state” or “time shortened state”) is 9844/10000 = 98.44 / 100. (That is, 98.44%), and the loss probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 9340. /10000=93.4/100 (that is, 93.4%).

  That is, at the set value “4”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of Toku-zu 1 is reduced by the number of loss random numbers in the “normal game state” where the staying rate is the highest in the game, The range of the number of lost random numbers in the "normal gaming state" is such that the number of jackpot random numbers in the increase from the low probability state to the high probability state, and the increase due to the change in the set value, while compensating for the decrease (That is, 9844 or less).

  Therefore, although the set value “4” in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 has the same small hit probability (1% both) as compared with the set value “3”, the big hit probability is slightly improved (low). (Probability state: 0.54% → 0.56%, high probability state: 5.4% → 5.6%), which can be said to be a setting in which a jackpot game is more likely to occur than in the case of the set value “3”.

  Next, when the set value is “5”, the number of values (big hit random value) of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes a big hit in the low probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 58, and the value is “0 to 57”. Are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “5” (ie, the “normal game state” or the “time shortened state”) is 58/10000 = 0.58 / 100. (That is, 0.58%).

  On the other hand, when the set value is “5”, the number of random number values (small jackpot random value) that become a jackpot in the high probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1 is 580, and the value “0 to 579” is Are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “5” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 580/10000 = 5.8 / It is set to 100 (that is, 5.8%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set to be 10 times larger than the low probability state.

  When the set value is “5”, the number of random numbers (small hit random value) that are small hits in the low probability state and the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is from the set value “1” to As in the case of “4”, the values are “100” in both cases, and the values “58 to 157” in the case of the low probability state or the values “580 to 679” in the case of the high probability state are stored in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. Stipulated (set). That is, the small hit probability in the first special symbol of the set value “5” is 100/10000 = 1/100 (that is, 1%) in any game state, and the low probability state and the high probability of the special symbol It is set so that the winning probability of the small hit is equal to the state.

  Therefore, when the set value is “5”, the number of random numbers that are lost in the low probability state (loss random value) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is the remaining number other than the big hit random value and the small hit random value. The value "158 to 9999" is defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. In the case of the high probability state, the number of random numbers (losing random numbers) which are lost is 9320 remaining values other than the big hit random number and the small hit random number, and the values “680-9999” are the special figure. It is defined (set) in the big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the loss probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “5” (ie, the “normal game state” or the “time shortened state”) is 9842/10000 = 98.42 / 100. (That is, 98.42%), and the loss probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 9320. /10000=93.2/100 (that is, 93.2%).

  That is, at the setting value “5”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of the special figure 1 is reduced, and the number of loss random numbers in the “normal game state” where the staying rate is highest in the game is reduced. The range of the number of lost random numbers in the "normal gaming state" is such that the number of jackpot random numbers in the increase from the low probability state to the high probability state, and the increase due to the change in the set value, while compensating for the decrease (That is, 9842 or less).

  Therefore, although the set value “5” in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 has the same small hit probability (1% both) as compared with the set value “4”, the big hit probability is slightly improved (low). (Probability state: 0.56% → 0.58%, high probability state: 5.6% → 5.8%), which can be said to be a setting in which a jackpot game is more likely to occur than when the set value is “4”.

  Next, when the set value is "6", the number of values (big hit random value) of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes a big hit in the low probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 60, and the value is "0 to 59". Are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. In other words, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “6” (that is, “normal game state” or “time reduction state”) is 60/10000 = 0.6 / 100. (That is, 0.6%).

  On the other hand, when the set value is “6”, the number of random number values (big hit random number values) that become big hits in the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 600, and the value “0 to 599” is Are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “6” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 600/10000 = 6/100 ( That is, the high probability state of the special symbol is set so as to be 10 times larger than the low probability state.

  When the set value is “6”, the number of random numbers (small hit random value) that are small hits in the low probability state and the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is from the set value “1” to As in the case of “5”, the number is 100 each, and the value “60 to 159” in the case of the low probability state or the value “600 to 699” in the case of the high probability state is stored in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. Stipulated (set). That is, the small hit probability in the first special symbol of the set value “6” is 100/10000 = 1/100 (that is, 1%) in any game state, and the low probability state and the high probability of the special symbol It is set so that the winning probability of the small hit is equal to the state.

  Therefore, when the set value is “6”, the number of random number values (loss random number value) that is lost in the low probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is the remaining number other than the big hit random number value and the small hit random number value. For 9840, the values “160 to 9999” are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. In the high probability state, the number of random numbers that are lost (loss random numbers) is the remaining 9300 numbers other than the big hit random number and the small hit random number, and the values “700 to 9999” are the special figures. It is defined (set) in the big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the loss probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “6” (that is, the “normal game state” or the “time shortened state”) is 9840/10000 = 98.4 / 100. (That is, 98.4%), and the loss probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 9300. / 10000 = 93/100 (that is, 93%).

  That is, at the set value “6”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of the special map 1 is reduced, and the number of lost random numbers in the “normal game state” where the staying rate is the highest in the game is reduced. The range of the number of lost random numbers in the "normal gaming state" is such that the number of jackpot random numbers in the increase from the low probability state to the high probability state, and the increase due to the change in the set value, while compensating for the decrease (Ie, 9840 or less).

  Therefore, although the set value “6” in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 has the same small hit probability (1% both) as the set value “5”, the big hit probability is slightly improved (low). (Probability state: 0.58% → 0.6%, high probability state: 5.8% → 6%), it can be said that the jackpot game is more likely to occur than in the case of the set value “5”.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 455 (b), in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 of the twenty-eighth embodiment, when the set value is “1”, the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 indicates that the jackpot is in the low probability state. The number of values of the big hit random number counter C1 (big hit random number value) is 50, as in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1, and the value “0 to 49” is defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. Have been. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “1” (that is, the “normal game state”) is 50/10000 = 0.5 / like the first special symbol. It is set to be 100 (that is, 0.5%).

  On the other hand, when the set value is “1”, the number of random number values (small jackpot random value) that are the big hits in the high probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is 500, as in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1. The value “0-499” is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the high-probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “1” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 500 as in the case of the first special symbol. / 10000 = 5/100 (that is, 5%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set so as to be 10 times larger than the low probability state.

  Here, when the set value is “1”, the number of random number values (small hit random number values) that are small hits in the low probability state and the high probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 are both 9400 pieces. The value “50 to 9449” for the low probability state or the value “500 to 9899” for the high probability state is defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the small hit probability in the second special symbol of the set value “1” is 9400/10000 = 94/100 (that is, 94%) in any game state, and the low probability state and the high probability of the special symbol It is set so that the winning probability of the small hit is equal to the state.

  Therefore, when the set value is “1”, the number of random number values (loss random number values) that are lost in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is the remaining number other than the jackpot random number value and the small random number value. For 550, the values “9450-9999” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. In the case of the high probability state, the number of random numbers (losing random numbers) that are lost is the remaining 100 other than the jackpot random number and the small random number, and the value “9900 to 9999” is the special figure. It is defined (set) in the two big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the loss probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “1” (that is, “normal game state” or “time shortened state”) is 550/10000 = 5.5 / 100. (I.e., 5.5%), and the loss probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol (that is, "super probability variation state" or "probability variation state") is 100. / 10000 = 1/100 (that is, 1%).

  That is, at the set value “1”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of Tokuju 2 is reduced by the number of lost random numbers in the “normal game state” where the staying rate is the highest in the game, The number of jackpot random numbers for the increase from the low probability state to the high probability state is within the range of the number of lost random numbers in the “normal game state” (that is, 550 or less) while being configured to compensate for the decrease. It is configured as follows.

  As described above, the small hit probability of the second special symbol is significantly higher than the small hit probability of the first special symbol (1% → 94%), and is smaller than the loss random value of the second special symbol. The number is set to be very easy to select. That is, in the lottery game in the second special symbol, the setting is such that it is easier to win a small hit than a big hit or a loss.

  Next, when the set value is “2”, the number of values of the jackpot random number counter C1 (small jackpot random value) which becomes a jackpot in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is the same as in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1. , 52, and the values “0 to 51” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “2” (that is, the “normal game state” or the “time shortened state”) is 52/50, like the first special symbol. It is set so that 10000 = 0.52 / 100 (that is, 0.52%).

  When the set value is “2”, the number of random number values (small jackpot random number value) in the high probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is 520 as in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1. The value “0-519” is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “2” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 520 like the first special symbol. /10000=5.2/100 (that is, 5.2%), and the special symbol high-probability state is set to be 10 times bigger than the low-probability state.

  Here, when the set value is “2”, the number of small random numbers (small hit random value) in the low probability state and the high probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is the set value “1”. In the same way as in the case of (1), the value “52 to 9451” in the case of the low probability state or the value “520 to 9919” in the case of the high probability state is defined in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 (setting). ) Has been. That is, the small hit probability in the second special symbol of the set value “2” is 9400/10000 = 94/100 (that is, 94%) in any game state, and the low probability state and the high probability of the special symbol It is set so that the winning probability of the small hit is equal to the state.

  Therefore, when the setting value is “2”, the number of random numbers that are lost in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 (loss random value) is the number of remaining random numbers other than the jackpot random number value and the small random number value. For 548, the values “9452 to 9999” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. In the case of the high-probability state, the number of random numbers that are lost (loss random number values) is the remaining 80 other than the jackpot random number value and the small random number value, and the values “9920 to 9999” are the special figures. It is defined (set) in the two big hit random number table 272a2. In other words, the loss probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “2” (that is, the “normal game state” or the “time reduction state”) is 548/10000 = 5.48 / 100. (Ie, 5.48%), and the loss probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol (ie, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 80. /10000=0.8/100 (that is, 0.8%).

  In other words, at the setting value “2”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of Tokuju 2 is reduced by the number of loss random numbers in the “normal game state” where the staying rate is the highest in the game, The range of the number of lost random numbers in the "normal gaming state" is that the number of jackpot random numbers in the increase from the low-probability state to the high-probability state and the increase due to the change in the set value is configured to compensate for the decrease. (That is, 548 or less).

  Therefore, although the set value “2” in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is equal to the set value “1” (both 94%) and the jackpot probability is slightly improved (low). (Probability state: 0.5% → 0.52%, high probability state: 5% → 5.2%), which can be said to be a setting in which a jackpot game is more likely to occur than in the case of the set value “1”.

  Next, when the set value is “3”, the number of values of the jackpot random number counter C1 (small jackpot random value) which becomes a jackpot in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is the same as that of the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1. , 54, and the values “0 to 53” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “3” (ie, the “normal game state” or the “time shortened state”) is 54 / like the first special symbol. It is set so that 10000 = 0.54 / 100 (that is, 0.54%).

  On the other hand, when the set value is “3”, the number of random number values (small jackpot random value) which are the big hits in the high probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is 540 like the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1. The value “0 to 539” is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “3” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 540 like the first special symbol. /10000=5.4/100 (that is, 5.4%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set to be 10 times larger than the low probability state.

  Here, when the set value is “3”, the number of small random numbers (small hit random value) in the low probability state and the high probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is the set value “1”. Similarly to the case of “2”, the number is 9400, and the value “54 to 9453” in the case of the low probability state or the value “540 to 9939” in the case of the high probability state is the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. Is specified (set). That is, the small hit probability in the second special symbol of the set value “3” is 9400/10000 = 94/100 (that is, 94%) in any game state, and the low probability state and the high probability of the special symbol It is set so that the winning probability of the small hit is equal to the state.

  Therefore, when the set value is “3”, the number of random number values (losing random number values) that are lost in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is the remaining number other than the jackpot random number value and the small jackpot random value. For 546, the values “9454-9999” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. In the case of the high probability state, the number of random values (losing random values) that are lost is the remaining 60 random numbers other than the jackpot random number value and the small random number value. It is defined (set) in the two big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the loss probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “3” (that is, the “normal game state” or the “time shortened state”) is 546/10000 = 5.46 / 100. (Ie, 5.46%), and the loss probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 60. /10000=0.6/100 (that is, 0.6%).

  That is, at the setting value “3”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of the special map 2 is reduced, and the number of loss random numbers in the “normal game state” having the highest stay ratio in the game is reduced. The range of the number of lost random numbers in the "normal gaming state" is that the number of jackpot random numbers in the increase from the low-probability state to the high-probability state and the increase due to the change in the set value is configured to compensate for the decrease. (Ie, 546 or less).

  Therefore, although the set value “3” in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 has the same small hit probability (94%) as the set value “2”, the jackpot probability is slightly improved (low). (Probability state: 0.52% → 0.54%, high probability state: 5.2% → 5.4%), which can be said to be a setting in which a jackpot game is more likely to occur than in the case of the set value “2”.

  Next, when the set value is "4", the number of values (big hit random value) of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes a big hit in the low probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is the same as in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. , 56, and the values “0 to 55” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “4” (that is, the “normal game state” or the “time shortened state”) is 56 / like the first special symbol. It is set so that 10000 = 0.56 / 100 (that is, 0.56%).

  On the other hand, when the set value is “4”, the number of random number values (small jackpot random value) which are the jackpots in the high probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is 560 like the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1. The value “0-559” is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2. In other words, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “4” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 560 like the first special symbol. /10000=5.6/100 (that is, 5.6%), and the special symbol high-probability state is set to be 10 times bigger than the low-probability state.

  Here, when the setting value is “4”, the number of random number values (small hit random number values) that are small hits in the low probability state and the high probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is the set value “1”. Similarly to the case of “3”, the number is “9400” in both cases, and the value “56 to 9455” in the case of the low probability state or the value “560 to 9959” in the case of the high probability state is the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. Is specified (set). That is, the small hit probability in the second special symbol of the set value “4” is 9400/10000 = 94/100 (that is, 94%) in any game state, and the low probability state and the high probability of the special symbol It is set so that the winning probability of the small hit is equal to the state.

  Therefore, when the set value is “4”, the number of random numbers that are lost in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 (loss random value) is the remaining number other than the jackpot random number and the small random number. For 544, the values “9456 to 9999” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. In the case of the high-probability state, the number of random numbers (losing random values) that are lost is the remaining 40 random numbers other than the big hit random number and the small hit random number. It is defined (set) in the two big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the loss probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “4” (that is, the “normal game state” or the “time shortened state”) is 544/10000 = 5.44 / 100. (I.e., 5.44%), and the loss probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol (that is, the "super probability fluctuation state" or the "probability fluctuation state") is 40. /10000=0.4/100 (that is, 0.4%).

  That is, at the set value “4”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of the special map 2 is reduced, and the number of losing random numbers in the “normal game state” having the highest stay ratio in the game is reduced. The range of the number of lost random numbers in the "normal gaming state" is that the number of jackpot random numbers in the increase from the low-probability state to the high-probability state and the increase due to the change in the set value is configured to compensate for the decrease. (That is, 544 or less).

  Therefore, although the set value “4” in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 has the same small hit probability as the set value “3” (both 94%), the jackpot probability is slightly improved (low). (Probability state: 0.54% → 0.56%, high probability state: 5.4% → 5.6%), which can be said to be a setting in which a jackpot game is more likely to occur than in the case of the set value “3”.

  Next, when the set value is “5”, the number of values of the jackpot random number counter C1 (small jackpot random value) which becomes a jackpot in a low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is the same as in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1. , 58, and the values “0 to 57” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “5” (that is, the “normal game state” or the “time shortened state”) is 58/50, like the first special symbol. It is set so that 10000 = 0.58 / 100 (that is, 0.58%).

  On the other hand, when the set value is “5”, the number of random number values (small jackpot random value) which are the big hits in the high probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is 580 like the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1. The value “0-579” is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “5” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 580 like the first special symbol. /10000=5.8/100 (that is, 5.8%), and the special symbol high-probability state is set to be 10 times bigger than the low-probability state.

  Here, when the set value is “5”, the number of random number values (small hit random number value) which are small hits in the low probability state and the high probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is the set value “1”. Similarly to the case of “4”, the number is 9400, and the value “58 to 9457” in the case of the low probability state or the value “580 to 9979” in the case of the high probability state is the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. Is specified (set). In other words, the small hit probability in the second special symbol of the set value “5” is 9400/10000 = 94/100 (that is, 94%) in any game state, and the low probability state and the high probability of the special symbol It is set so that the winning probability of the small hit is equal to the state.

  Therefore, when the set value is “5”, the number of random numbers that are lost in the low probability state (losing random value) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is the remaining number other than the jackpot random value and the small random number value. For 542, the values “9458-9999” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. In the case of the high probability state, the number of random numbers (losing random numbers) which are lost is the remaining 20 other than the jackpot random numbers and the small random numbers, and the values “9980 to 9999” are the special figures. It is defined (set) in the two big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the loss probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “5” (that is, “normal game state” or “time shortened state”) is 542/10000 = 5.42 / 100. (I.e., 5.42%), and the loss probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol (that is, the "super probability fluctuation state" or the "probability fluctuation state") is 20. /10000=0.2/100 (that is, 0.2%).

  That is, at the set value “5”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of Tokuju 2 is reduced by the number of loss random numbers in the “normal game state” where the staying rate is the highest in the game, The range of the number of lost random numbers in the "normal gaming state" is that the number of jackpot random numbers in the increase from the low-probability state to the high-probability state and the increase due to the change in the set value is configured to compensate for the decrease. (That is, 542 or less).

  Therefore, although the set value “5” in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is equal to the set value “4” and the small hit probability is equal (both 94%), the big hit probability is slightly improved (low). (Probability state: 0.56% → 0.58%, high probability state: 5.6% → 5.8%), which can be said to be a setting in which a jackpot game is more likely to occur than in the case of the set value “4”.

  Next, when the set value is “6”, the number of values of the jackpot random number counter C1 (small jackpot random value) which becomes a jackpot in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is the same as in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1. , And 60 values thereof are defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “6” (that is, the “normal game state” or the “time shortened state”) is 60/60, similar to the first special symbol. It is set so that 10000 = 0.6 / 100 (that is, 0.6%).

  On the other hand, when the set value is “6”, the number of random number values (small jackpot random value) which are the jackpots in the high probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is 600, as in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1. The value “0-599” is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2. In other words, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “6” (ie, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 600, as in the case of the first special symbol. / 10000 = 6/100 (that is, 6%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set so as to be 10 times larger than the low probability state.

  Here, when the set value is “6”, the number of random number values (small hit random value) that are small hits in the low probability state and the high probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is the set value “1”. Similarly to the case of “5”, the number is 9400, and the value “60 to 9449” in the case of the low probability state or the value “600 to 9999” in the case of the high probability state is stored in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. Is specified (set). That is, the small hit probability in the second special symbol of the set value “6” is 9400/10000 = 94/100 (that is, 94%) in any game state, and the low probability state and the high probability of the special symbol It is set so that the winning probability of the small hit is equal to the state.

  Therefore, when the setting value is “6”, the number of random number values (loss random number values) that are lost in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is the number of remaining random numbers other than the jackpot random number value and the small random number value. For 540, the values “9460-9999” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. In the case of the high probability state, the number of random numbers (losing random numbers) that are lost is the remaining 0 other than the jackpot random number and the small random number, and the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 has the lost random numbers. The corresponding value is not stored. That is, the loss probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “6” (that is, the “normal game state” or the “time shortened state”) is 540/10000 = 5.4 / 100. (I.e., 5.4%), and the loss probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol (that is, the "super probability fluctuation state" or the "probability fluctuation state") is 0. / 10000 = 0/100 (that is, 0%), so that the loss combination does not appear.

  That is, at the set value “6”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of Tokuju 2 is reduced by the number of loss random numbers in the “normal game state” where the staying rate is the highest in the game, The range of the number of lost random numbers in the "normal gaming state" is that the number of jackpot random numbers in the increase from the low-probability state to the high-probability state and the increase due to the change in the set value is configured to compensate for the decrease. (That is, 540 or less).

  Therefore, although the setting value “6” in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is equal to the setting value “5” (both 94%) and the jackpot probability is slightly improved (low). (Probability state: 0.58% → 0.6%, high probability state: 5.8% → 6%), which can be said to be a setting in which a jackpot game is more likely to occur than in the case of the set value “5”.

  As described above, in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1 and the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the “probability variation state” is determined by the number of lost random numbers in the “normal game state”. , And within the range of the number of lost random numbers in the “normal game state”. In addition, the number of small random number values per hit is not changed between the “normal gaming state” and the “probability changing state”. With this configuration, it is possible to calculate the payout rate for each set value by considering only the increase in the jackpot random value, thereby suppressing an increase in man-hours when designing the game specification. be able to.

  Returning to FIG. 454, the description will be continued. The jackpot type counter C2 determines a jackpot type when a jackpot is reached, and is incremented by one in a predetermined range (for example, “0 to 99”), and the maximum value (for example, “0 to 99”) is obtained. In the case of a counter that can take the value of ".", It returns to "0" after reaching "99"). The value of the jackpot type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (in the twenty-eighth embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 466)).

  Then, at the timing when the ball wins the first starting port 64a, the jackpot of the first reserved first to fourth areas of the first reserved ball storage area 273d of the RAM 273 provided corresponding to the first starting port 64a is won. The random number counter C1 is stored in the big hit type counter storage area 273d2 of the first reservation area which is the same as the first reservation area in which the random number counter C1 is stored. In addition, at the timing when the ball wins the second starting port 64b, the jackpot in the second reserved first to fourth areas of the second reserved ball storage area 273e of the RAM 273 provided corresponding to the second starting port 64b. The random number counter C1 is stored in the big hit type counter storage area 273e2 of the second reservation area which is the same as the second reservation area where the random number counter C1 is stored.

  Here, for example, a random number (big hit random number value) or a small hit in which the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in one holding area in the first holding ball storage area 273d or the second holding ball storage area 273e becomes a big hit. If the random number is not a random number (small random number value), that is, if the random number is a loss (losing random number value), the variation pattern in the variation effect and the type of stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as “stop type”) are lost. It is time. On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the one reserved area in the first reserved ball storage area 273d or the second reserved ball storage area 273e is a random number (big hit random number value) which is a big hit, a fluctuation effect is produced. The fluctuation pattern and stop type in are those at the time of the big hit. In this case, the fluctuation pattern and stop type at the time of the big hit are determined corresponding to the big hit type indicated by the value of the big hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area. In addition, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in one reserved area in the first reserved ball storage area 273d or the second reserved ball storage area 273e is a random number (small hit random number value) in which a small hit is obtained, the fluctuation will occur. The fluctuation pattern and the stop type in the effect are those at the time of the small hit.

  As described above, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-eighth embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of “0 to 99”, and the jackpot type counter C2 and the jackpot type stored in the ROM 272. The jackpot type is determined based on the table 272b. The jackpot type table 272b includes a special figure 1 jackpot type table 272b1 referred to in the first lottery game of the first special symbol, and a special figure 2 jackpot type table 272b2 referred to in the second lottery game of the second special symbol. Are provided.

  Here, the special figure 1 big hit type table 272b1 and the special figure 2 big hit type table 272b2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 456 (a) and 456 (b). FIG. 456 (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the special figure 1 big hit type table 272b1 corresponding to the first special symbol stored in the ROM 272, and FIG. 456 (b) is also stored in the ROM 272. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the special figure 2 big hit type table 272b2 corresponding to the 2nd special symbol.

  As shown in FIGS. 456 (a) and 456 (b), the jackpot type table 272b is provided according to the type of the special symbol (that is, the first special symbol or the second special symbol). And the value of the jackpot type counter C2 are associated with each other.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-eighth embodiment, as a jackpot type, after the maximum number of rounds is 16 rounds, until the next special jackpot is won (so-called, until the next jackpot. Hereinafter, referred to as “the next jackpot”). ), The special symbol is in the high probability state, the normal symbol is in the low probability state, and the "super probability fluctuation state" corresponding to the "super probability fluctuation state" is the maximum probability round. The number of rounds corresponding to the "probability variation B" corresponding to the "probability variation state" in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol and the hit probability of the ordinary symbol are in the high probability state after the jackpot of six rounds until the next jackpot, and the maximum number of rounds While the special symbol's jackpot probability is in the low-probability state until the fluctuation effect of each special symbol is executed 50 times in total after the six round jackpot, the normal symbol Probability per corresponds to a high probability state "time reduction state" there is a "time reduction".

  In the special figure 1 big hit type table 272b1 and the special figure 2 big hit type table 272b2, each big hit type is associated with a possible value of the big hit type counter C2 for determining the big hit type.

  In the example of the special figure 1 big hit type table 272b1 of FIG. 456 (a), the value “0-9” of the big hit type counter C2 is associated with “probability change A”, and the big hit is obtained with “probability change B”. The value “10-59” of the type counter C2 is associated, and the value “60-99” of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with “time reduction”.

  In the winning / non-prize lottery of the first special symbol in the twenty-eighth embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 273d1 of any of the first reserved areas of the first reserved ball storage area 273d becomes a big hit. If the value is the value, the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 273d2 of the same first reservation area is determined from the special figure 1 jackpot type table 272b1. For example, if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is “7”, “probability variation A” is determined as the jackpot type, and if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is “50”, “probability variation B” is used as the jackpot type. Is determined, and if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is “95”, “time reduction” is determined as the jackpot type.

  In other words, when the jackpot is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol as the first lottery game, the jackpot type of “probability variation A” is 10%, the jackpot type of “probability variation B” is 50%, and “ The big hit type of "shortening" will be won at a rate of 40%.

  In the example of the special figure 2 big hit type table 272b2 in FIG. 456 (b), the value “0 to 29” of the big hit type counter C2 is associated with “probability variation A”, and “probability variation B” is associated with “probability variation B”. The value "30-59" of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with the value "60-99" of the jackpot type counter C2 for "time reduction".

  In the second lottery winning / failing lottery in the twenty-eighth embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 273e1 of any one of the first reserved areas of the second reserved ball storage area 273e becomes a big hit. If the value is the value, the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 273e2 of the same first holding area is determined from the special figure 2 jackpot type table 272b2. For example, if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is “17”, “probability variation A” is determined as the jackpot type, and if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is “40”, “probability variation B” is determined as the jackpot type. Is determined, and if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is “85”, “time reduction” is determined as the jackpot type.

  That is, when the big hit is won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol as the second lottery game, the jackpot type of “probability variation A” is 30%, the jackpot type of “probability variation B” is 30%, and “time” The big hit type of "shortening" will be won at a rate of 40%.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-eighth embodiment, in the first lottery game using the first special symbol, the selection ratio of “probability fluctuation A” having the highest game value is 10%, while the second lottery using the second special symbol is selected. In the game, since the selection ratio of “probability variation A” is 30%, the lottery game using the second special symbol is set to have a higher game value for the player than the lottery game using the first special symbol. For this reason, the player is provided with a game property of how to receive the lottery by the second special symbol, that is, to make the ball enter the second starting port 64b rather than the first starting port 64a. Variations are provided to enhance the interest of the game.

  In addition, the probability that each big hit type is selected in the case of a big hit is appropriately set depending on the model. Then, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 associated with each jackpot type is defined in the jackpot type table 272b according to the set probability.

  Further, the probability of selecting the jackpot type may be changed according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In this case, a jackpot type table 272b corresponding to each game state may be prepared, and the number of values of the jackpot type counter C2 associated with each jackpot type may be changed in each jackpot type table 272b.

  Returning to FIG. 454, the description of the various counters will be continued. The stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to add, for example, "1" in order within a range of "0 to 99" and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value (that is, "99").

  In the twenty-eighth embodiment, the rough production mode of the fluctuation production at the time of the big hit and the loss is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of the fluctuation productions suspended and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3. Selected. Specifically, “non-reach (long)” production mode and “non-reach (short)” production mode in which “reach display” does not occur, and “variable element of“ normal reach ”as“ reach display ”are executed. A “normal reach” production mode, a “super-reach” production mode in which the “super-reach” variable element is executed by developing from the “normal-reach” variable element, and a “special-reach” mode that also evolves from the “normal-reach” variable element Is different from the “reach display” effect mode in which the “reach display” effect mode in which the “reach display” is performed and the “extremely long fluctuation” effect condition in which the fluctuation time is set long without the “reach display” occurring An effect mode is selected from a “special fluctuation” effect mode in which a special effect described later is executed.

  Here, each production mode will be described in detail. Among the production modes, “non-reach (long)” production mode and “non-reach (short)” production mode (hereinafter, “non-reach (long)” production mode and “non-reach (short)” production mode are collectively referred to. Then, the “non-reach” effect mode may be referred to as “a non-reach” effect mode), in which the three symbol columns (not shown) fluctuate as a special symbol fluctuating effect. This is an effect mode in which the same third symbol does not stop in the two symbol columns that stop first after the fluctuation element of “high-speed fluctuation” in which the “shutter” is shuffled at high speed does not generate “reach display”.

  The variable element of “high-speed fluctuation” is, for example, in the fluctuation effect of the third symbol performed by the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol displayed in each symbol row is scrolled at a high speed vertically downward on the display screen. Means the variable factor that is being used. In this “high-speed change”, the third symbol is changed so that the player cannot clearly recognize the display content of the third symbol, and the stop result of the variable effect previously stopped and displayed is irregularly mixed (shuffled). Is executed.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-eighth embodiment, after the fluctuation element of “high-speed fluctuation” is performed, the fluctuation element of “low-speed fluctuation” is executed except for a specific production mode (“non-reach (short)” production mode). It is configured to be.

  The variable element of “low-speed fluctuation” means that in the fluctuation effect of the third symbol performed by the third symbol display device 81, after the fluctuation element of “high-speed fluctuation”, the third symbol is reduced at a speed visible to the player. Means a variable element that is scrolling. In the variable element of "low speed fluctuation", each symbol row is stopped and displayed in order while the player recognizes the display content of the third symbol. When the same third symbol is stopped in two symbol columns (for example, the left symbol column and the right symbol column) to be stopped and displayed first, it is determined that "reach display" has occurred and the symbol has developed into a variable element of "normal reach". When a different third symbol is stopped in the two symbol columns to be stopped and displayed first, the remaining symbol columns are stopped and displayed, and the variable effect is ended.

  Therefore, in the “non-reach (long)” effect mode, the “low-speed fluctuation” fluctuation element is performed after the “high-speed fluctuation” fluctuation element is performed, and each symbol row stops in order, and stops first. The third symbol, which is different from the two symbol columns to be stopped, stops, the remaining one symbol column stops, and one variable effect ends. On the other hand, in the “non-reach (short)” effect mode, after the “high-speed fluctuation” is performed, the “low-speed fluctuation” fluctuation element is not performed, and after the “high-speed fluctuation” fluctuation element ends, each symbol row is simultaneously displayed. Stopping, a different third symbol is stopped and displayed in two symbol columns (for example, two symbol columns that stop first in the “non-reach (long)” effect mode), and other symbol columns are also stopped and displayed, The variable production of 1 ends.

  In the effect mode, the “normal reach” effect mode refers to “floating effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81, which is“ immediately after the same third symbol stops in the two symbol columns to be stopped and displayed first. The variable element of "normal reach" is executed, and is one of the production modes of the other "reach display", that is, the "reach display" which does not develop into the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach".

  Among the effect modes, the “super reach” effect mode is one of the “reach display” effect modes in which the “super reach” variable element is developed from the “normal reach” variable element.

  Among the effect modes, the “special reach” effect mode is one of the “reach display” effect modes in which the “normal reach” variable element is developed and the “special reach” variable element is executed.

  In the production mode, the “super long fluctuation” production mode is that the “high-speed fluctuation” fluctuation element is performed for a long time, then the “low-speed fluctuation” fluctuation element is performed, and each symbol row stops in order. The third symbol, which is different from the first symbol row to be stopped first, is stopped, and then the remaining symbol rows are also stopped and displayed, and the one variable effect ends.

  Among the production modes, the “special fluctuation” production mode is a variable element of “normal reach” that can be selected in the “special reach” production mode and a variable element of “special reach” and a variable element of “re-variation”. Is one of the production modes of the “reach display” executed.

  The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in the twenty-eighth embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 466)). Then, at the timing when the ball has won the first starting port 64a, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 at that time is stored in the first holding ball storage area 273d provided in the first holding ball storage area 273d corresponding to the first starting port 64a. It is stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 273d3 of the first reservation area in which the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored among the first to fourth areas. Further, at the timing when the ball wins the second starting port 64b, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 at that time is stored in the second holding ball storage area 273e corresponding to the second starting port 64b. It is stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 273e3 of the second holding area in which the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored among the first to fourth areas.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the twenty-eighth embodiment, the success or failure of the variable effect (big hit, small hit or losing), the current game state, and the number of the variable effects of the two special symbols currently on hold (the number of holding balls) are described. Accordingly, the stop pattern table 272d that refers to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to be different. That is, a plurality of types of stop pattern tables 272d are provided, and are configured to be selected based on the number of floating effects (the number of reserved balls) of both special symbols in standby.

  In the twenty-eighth embodiment, when determining a detailed fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation effect, first, based on the number-of-reserved table 272c (see FIG. 457) provided in the ROM 272, whether or not the fluctuation effect is appropriate is determined. One of the stop pattern tables 272d corresponding to the state and the current number of variable effects (the number of reserved balls) is selected. Then, based on the selected stop pattern table 272d and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, an effect mode which is a rough mode of the variable effect is selected. Thereafter, a detailed variation pattern (variation time) of the variation effect is determined based on the selected effect mode and a value of a variation type counter CS1 described later.

  The plurality of types of stop pattern tables 272d are set so that the range of the random number value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 in which the effect mode is selected differs for each stop pattern table 272d. The plurality of stop pattern tables 272d are prepared in order to change the selection ratio of the effect mode of the variable effect according to the success / failure of the variable effect, the game state, and the number of balls to be held. That is, (1) whether a big hit occurs in the fluctuation effect of the acquired third symbol, or (2) the current gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “super probability fluctuation state”, “probability fluctuation state”, “time reduction state”. Alternatively, the selection ratio of the production mode is changed according to whether the game is in the “normal game state” and (3) how many balls are reserved for the variable production being reserved.

  The first reason is to change the degree of expectation to be a big hit for each effect mode. That is, in the case of winning in the jackpot lottery and in the case of losing the jackpot lottery, a stop pattern, that is, a “non-reach” production mode, a “normal reach” production mode, a “super reach” production mode, and a “special reach” production By configuring the selection ratios of the modes to be different from each other, the degree of expectation to be a big hit is changed for each effect mode. Specifically, for example, when the jackpot lottery is won, the “super reach” production mode or the “special reach” production mode is configured to be easily selected, and when the jackpot lottery is not won, the “non-reach” production The mode and the "normal reach" effect mode are configured to be easily selected.

  With such a configuration, the “super reach” production mode and the “special reach” production mode can be a large-hit production mode, and the “normal reach” production mode and the “non-reach” production mode are hard to hit. An effect or a non-jackpot effect can be set, and the jackpot expectation degree for each effect mode can be differentiated. Therefore, when an effect that easily hits the fluctuation effect appears, while the effect that easily hits is performed, it is suggested to the player that a jackpot is likely to occur, and the interest of the game is enhanced. I have.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-eighth embodiment, specifically, when the acquired lottery result is a jackpot, a stop pattern table 272d in which it is easy to select an effect that is easy to hit and that is difficult to select an effect that is hard to hit. The effect mode (stop pattern), which is the rough content of the variable effect, is selected based on the above. On the other hand, when the acquired lottery result is a loss, it is difficult to select an effect that is easy to hit, and the effect mode (stop pattern) of the variable effect is based on the stop pattern table 272d that is easy to select an effect that is hard to hit. Configure to select. Thereby, when notifying the player of the lottery result of the third symbol in the variable effect, if an effect that is easy to hit is executed, a jackpot is easily generated in the variable effect, and an effect that is difficult to hit is executed. In this case, a jackpot is less likely to occur in the variable effect, and by providing a difference in the jackpot expected value for each effect mode (stop pattern), it is possible to enhance the interest of the game during the execution of the variable effect.

  Further, as a second reason, the number of times of entering the first starting port 64a in the state where the number of times of waiting for the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol has reached the upper limit, or the number of times of waiting for the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol is the upper limit. This is to reduce as much as possible the useless balls (so-called non-lottery of special symbols due to overflow prize) based on the ball entering the second start-up port 64b in the state of reaching.

  More specifically, the maximum number of standby times for the variable effect of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set to four at a maximum, and the variable effect is performed for at least a fixed time. In the gaming state in which a ball easily enters the second starting port 64b in the “probability variation state”, “probability variation state”, and “time reduction state”, it is easy to reach the maximum number of reserved balls of the second special symbol. In these game states, if a fluctuating effect with a long fluctuating time is selected, the ball frequently enters the second starting port 64b in a state where the maximum number of reserved balls of the second special symbol has been reached, and the angle and the second starting port Despite having entered the ball at 64b, the second special symbol lottery opportunity cannot be obtained. Also, in the “normal game state”, if a fluctuation effect with a long fluctuation time is selected while the maximum number of reserved balls of the first special symbol has been reached, the first special symbol is held during the execution of the fluctuation effect. Since the number of balls is not digested, even if a ball enters the first starting port 64a during that time, it is not possible to obtain a lottery opportunity for the first special symbol. In such a state, the player determines that the game value is not obtained even if the ball is thrown into the first starting port 64a, and the player is excited for the game, and the fluctuation effect is digested. The game is stopped and the game is interrupted until the number of reserved balls can be obtained again.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-eighth embodiment, the gaming state in which the maximum number of reserved balls of the third symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is easily reached, or the number of balls that are close to (or coincides with) the maximum number of reserved balls With the number of reserved balls, the effect form of the variable effect is selected based on the stop pattern table 272d in which the short change time is easy to select. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b in a state where the maximum number of reserved balls of the third symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) has been reached. it can.

  Further, as a third reason, by setting a long execution time and delaying the end of the variable effect, the state in which the variable effect is executed is maintained for a long time. More specifically, when the number of reserved balls in the variable effect is small (absent), a ball is newly inserted into either the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b within the changing time of the running variable effect. If the ball is not balled, the next fluctuation effect cannot be started, and a demo screen or the like must be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the case where the fluctuation effect is not performed on the third symbol display device 81 despite the fact that the player plays a game by firing a ball, it is possible to obtain an interest relating to the jackpot lottery required by the player. Instead, it gets excited to the game. In addition, the player recognizes that the pachinko machine 10 is difficult for the ball to enter the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b because the variable effect is not performed on the third symbol display device 81, There is a possibility that the game with the pachinko machine 10 may be stopped because it is determined that the game value is difficult to obtain.

  In view of this, the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-eighth embodiment is configured to select the effect form of the variable effect based on the stop pattern table 272d in which the long change time is easily selected when the number of balls to be changed is small. I have. This makes it difficult for a situation in which the variable effect is not performed in the third symbol display device 81 to be maintained, and the execution state of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained for a long time.

  As a fourth reason, the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-eighth embodiment is a so-called simultaneous fluctuating machine capable of simultaneously executing the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol in parallel. However, a special symbol to be executed (encourageed) for each game state is set (defined) in advance as a game specification. In order to actively draw a special symbol to be executed for each game state, temporarily When a lottery opportunity for a special symbol that is not desired to be executed in a predetermined game state (not recommended) is acquired, a predetermined penalty (penalty) is given.

  Specifically, for example, in the “normal gaming state”, a left-handed game is previously encouraged as a game specification, and the left-handed game is performed, and the big hit game is won in the dynamic display of FIG. While obtaining the game value of the jackpot game, the game property of realizing the accompanying “super-probability change state”, “probability change state”, or “time reduction state” depending on the jackpot type is realized. Also, in the "time shortened state", a right-handed game is previously recommended as a game specification, and the right-handed game is performed, and how the special display 2 is dynamically displayed during the situation where the winning assisting state is valid. In the above, the game performance of whether to win the jackpot game is realized. Further, in the "probability fluctuation state", a right-handed game is previously encouraged as a game specification, and the next big-hit game becomes any big-hit type while performing the right-handed game and maintaining the winning assisting state. Or not. In the "super probability fluctuation state", a right-handed game is recommended in advance as a game specification, and the right-handed game is performed, and although there is no prize assisting state, while the second starting port 64b is appropriately awarded, Based on the winning, the small winning game is won, and the ball is increased to the small winning opening 72a, so that the number of possessed balls is increased. The big winning game based on the winning in the second starting opening 64b is not won. The game specification is set in advance so as to realize the game characteristics of how to keep the period of the “super probability fluctuation state” long.

  Therefore, in the “normal game state”, the execution of the dynamic display of the special figure 1 based on the left-handed game is encouraged, while in the “super probability fluctuation state”, the “probability fluctuation state” or the “time reduction state”, The execution of the dynamic display of the special map 2 based on the right-handed game is encouraged. Here, if the game is not executed according to the above-described game specifications, in particular, in the “normal game state”, an action of executing the dynamic display of the special figure 2 and simultaneously executing the dynamic display of the special figure 1 is performed. In the event that the game has been lost, a game result different from the payout rate based on the game specification originally set may be derived, which may cause an unexpected disadvantage to the hall.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-eighth embodiment, in the "normal gaming state", when the total number of reserved special symbols is 5 or more, that is, at least one reserved special figure 2 is not encouraged. In the case where a plurality of dynamic displays of the special figure 1 are suspended (for example, four) in the presence of the above, the dynamic display of the special symbol newly started (the dynamic display of the special figure 1 ) Is performed for a long time (for example, 5 minutes) to reduce the execution efficiency of dynamic display of special symbols. With this configuration, when a ball is awarded to the second starting port 64b which causes the dynamic display of the special figure 2 which is not recommended as a game specification, the dynamic state of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 By lowering the execution efficiency of the display, it is possible to lower the efficiency of giving the game value. As a result, it is possible to hesitate the player to execute the dynamic display of the special figure 2 in a game state where the execution of the dynamic display of the special figure 2 is not encouraged (that is, the “normal game state”), It is possible to prevent a game different from the assumed game specification from being performed, thereby reducing a disadvantage to the hall.

  In the "super probability fluctuation state", the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time reduction state", the left-handed game is not promoted as the game specification, but the non-recommended game (that is, the left-handed game) is performed. Even in this case, the gaming value obtained by the player is set lower than when the recommended game (that is, the right-handed game) is performed. For this reason, the game mode is not disadvantageous to the game hall, and no special penalty is provided.

  Here, the details of the suspended number table 272c will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 457 is a diagram schematically showing the hold number table 272c. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-eighth embodiment, when performing a fluctuating effect based on a ball entering the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b, Based on the gaming state at that time and the total number of fluctuation effects of special figures 1 and 2 at that time as well, referring to the number-of-reservations table 272c, one of the stop pattern tables 272d1 to 272d5 is selected. Is configured. Then, based on one of the selected stop pattern tables 272d1 to 272d5 and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, a rough effect mode of the variable effect is determined.

  Specifically, as shown in the reserved number table 272c of FIG. 457, when the loss is extracted in the “normal game state” and the total number of reserved balls is “1 to 3”, or When the loss is extracted in the “state”, “probability variation state” or “time reduction state” and the total number of reserved balls is “1”, the A table 272d1 of the stop pattern table 272d (see FIG. 458 (a)). ) Is selected.

  In addition, when the loss is extracted in the “normal game state” and the number of reserved balls is “4”, or when the loss is extracted in the “super probability fluctuation state”, the “probability fluctuation state”, or the “time reduction state”. When the number of reserved balls is "2 to 8", the B table 272d2 (see FIG. 458 (b)) of the stop pattern table 272d is selected.

  Further, when the loss is extracted in the “normal game state” and the number of retained balls is “5 to 8”, the C table 272d3 of the stop pattern table 272d (see FIG. 458 (c)) is selected. .

  In addition, at the time of winning the jackpot (ie, when extracting the “16R probability variable jackpot”, the “6R probability variable jackpot”, and the “6R short time jackpot”), the stop pattern table 272d regardless of the game state or the number of retained balls. Is selected (see FIG. 459 (a)).

  Further, at the time of winning a small hit (that is, at the time of extracting a small hit game), the E table 272d5 (see FIG. 459 (b)) of the stop pattern table 272d is selected regardless of the game state or the number of retained balls. Is done.

  That is, when any of the jackpots is won, the stop pattern table 272d (D table 272d4) is selected based on only the type of the jackpot, regardless of the number of retained balls or the game state at that time, and the small jackpot is won. In this case, the stop pattern table 272d (E-table 272d5) is selected based only on the winning of the small hit, regardless of the number of reserved balls or the game state at that time, and the winning pattern or the small hit is selected. Only when the winning is not made (that is, at the time of losing), the stop pattern table 272d (A table 272d1, B table 272d2 or C table 272d3) is selected based on the number of retained balls and the game state at that time.

  It should be noted that, even when a big hit or a small hit is won, the stop pattern table 272d may be configured to be different depending on the number of reserved balls. For example, when the number of reserved balls is large when a jackpot is won, a stop pattern table 272d in which a relatively short variation pattern is easily selected may be selected.

  In this case, for example, in each effect mode in which the “reach display” is executed, the effect mode in which only the time of the variable element of “high-speed fluctuation” is changed from 10 seconds to only 5 seconds is selected. . With this configuration, for example, when the fluctuation effect is started in a state where the maximum number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is four, even if the fluctuation element of “high-speed fluctuation” is performed in 5 seconds, At the time point when the variable element of “high-speed fluctuation” for 5 seconds ends (at the time point when it is recognized as a variable element of “high-speed fluctuation” for 5 seconds), “reach display” may occur in the fluctuation effect. For this reason, even when the fluctuation element of “high-speed fluctuation” for 5 seconds is performed, an effect mode in which “reach display” is executed other than the “non-reach (short)” effect mode is executed. By doing so, at the time of execution of the “high-speed fluctuation” fluctuation element for 5 seconds, it is not possible to know whether the fluctuation effect is a big hit or a loss.

  Next, each stop pattern table 272d will be described with reference to FIGS. 458 and 459. FIG. 458 is a diagram showing a stop pattern table 272d that can be selected at the time of losing. FIG. 458 (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the A table 272d1 of the stop pattern table 272d. (B) is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the B table 272d2 of the stop pattern table 272d, and FIG. 458 (c) is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the C table 272d3 of the stop pattern table 272d. is there. FIG. 459 is a diagram schematically showing a stop pattern table 272d selected at the time of a big hit or a small hit. FIG. 459 (a) schematically shows an example of a D table 272d4 of the stop pattern table 272d. FIG. 459 (b) is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the E table 272d5 of the stop pattern table 272d.

  As shown in FIG. 458 (a), in the A table 272d1 of the stop pattern table 272d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to each “non-reach (long)” effect mode is set to “0” to “74”. , The range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “normal reach” production mode is set to “75” to “94”, and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “super reach” production mode is “95” to “95”. 97, and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “special reach” effect mode is set to “98”, “99”. In the A table 272d1, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the “non-reach (short)” effect mode and the “extremely long fluctuation”, and the “non-reach (short)” effect mode and The “super long fluctuation” effect mode is set so as not to be selected.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 458 (b), in the B table 272d2 of the stop pattern table 272d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “non-reach (short)” effect mode is “0” to “74”. , The range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “normal reach” effect mode is set to “75” to “94”, and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “super reach” effect mode is “95”. To "97", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach" effect mode is set to "98, 99". In the B table 272d2, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the “non-reach (long)” effect mode and the “super long fluctuation” effect mode, and the “non-reach (long)” effect The mode and the “super long fluctuation” effect mode are set so as not to be selected.

  That is, in the A table 272d1, the “non-reach (long)” effect mode is 75%, the “normal reach” effect mode is 20%, the “super reach” effect mode is 3%, and the “special reach” effect mode is 2%. It is set to be the selection ratio. In the B table 272d2, the “non-reach (short)” effect mode is 75%, the “normal reach” effect mode is 20%, the “super reach” effect mode is 3%, and the “special reach” effect mode is 2%. It is set to be the selection ratio.

  Therefore, the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is selected in the A table 272d1, and the "non-reach (short)" effect mode is selected in the B table 272d2 instead of the "non-reach (long)" effect mode. It is configured as follows.

  Therefore, it can be said that the A table 272d1 tends to have a relatively longer variation time of the selected variation effect than the B table 272d2. In other words, it can be said that the B-table 272d2 is more likely to have the fluctuation time of the selected fluctuation effect shorter than the A-table 272d1.

  The selection ratios of the “normal reach” effect, the “super reach” effect, and the “special reach” effect with the A table 272d1 and the B table 272d2 are set to be equal.

  In this way, when the loss lottery result is extracted, the effect form of the variable effect is selected based on the number of balls on hold for the variable effect on hold. For example, when the number of pending balls in the variable effect is large, the “non-reach (short)” effect mode in which the variable effect time is short is selected. Thereby, when the number of balls to be held in the variable effect is large, the execution time of the variable effect to be executed is shortened, and the execution number of the variable effect is increased, whereby the execution efficiency of the variable effect can be increased.

  Also, for example, when the number of pending balls for the variable effect is small, the “non-reach (short)” effect mode is used in order to secure the ball entry time to the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b. The “non-reach (long)” effect mode in which the variable effect time is long is selected. Thereby, the “non-reach (long)” effect mode in which the variable effect time is longer than when the “non-reach (short)” effect mode is selected can be performed, and thus the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b. The situation in which the variable effect is being executed by making it easier to secure the ball entry time for the ball, and by increasing the possibility that a new starting prize will occur during the execution time of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81. Can be maintained.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 458 (c), in the C table 272d3 of the stop pattern table 272d, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is allocated only to the “extremely long fluctuation” effect mode (“0” to “99”). , The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the effect mode in which the other "losing display" or "reach display" is executed. Therefore, the stop type selected when the total number of special symbols held is 5 or more in the “normal game state” is set to always be the “super long fluctuation” effect mode.

  With this configuration, in the “normal game state”, when the number of reserved special symbols is 5 or more, that is, when there is at least one or more reserved special figure 2 which is not encouraged, In the case where a plurality of dynamic displays of Toku-zu 1 are held, a fluctuation effect of a newly started special symbol (even if the dynamic display of Toku-zu 1 is performed) is performed for a long time (for example, 5 minutes). It is configured to reduce the execution efficiency of the special symbol fluctuation effect. As a result, when a ball is awarded to the second starting port 64b, which is not encouraged as a game specification, and the fluctuation effect of the special figure 2 can be executed, the execution efficiency of the fluctuation effect of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is reduced. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the efficiency of giving the game value. As a result, in the game state in which the execution of the fluctuation effect of the special figure 2 is not encouraged, the player wins the prize (that is, the execution of the right-handed game) to the second starting port 64b which is a trigger of the execution of the fluctuation effect of the special figure 2. It is possible to prevent the player from playing a game different from the assumed game specification for each game state, and reduce disadvantages to the hall.

  In the twenty-eighth embodiment, the stop pattern table 272d that is selected based on the number of retained balls for the variable effect is configured to be different when selecting the effect mode in the loss effect variable effect. Alternatively, substantially the same effect mode is selected by the determination of the variable effect based on the entry of the ball into the second starting port 64b and the determination of the variable effect based on the start of the variable effect based on the entering ball. Is configured.

  Specifically, in the case of a loss effect fluctuating effect, one of the A table 272d1 and the B table 272d2 is selected based on the number of pending balls of the fluctuating effect, but the A table 272d1 And the B table 272d2, the value of the stop pattern counter C3 assigned to the “non-reach (long)” effect mode or the “non-reach (short)” effect mode is the same, and is assigned to another effect mode. The values of the stop pattern counters C3 are also set to be the same.

  That is, the only difference is whether the “non-reach (long)” effect mode is selected or the “non-reach (short)” effect mode is selected based on the number of pending balls in the variable effect. The only effect is that the effect mode is substantially the same except for the time of the effect element. Therefore, the effect mode selected at the time of the start winning and the effect mode selected at the start of the fluctuation are substantially the same effect mode even when the game state transitions (for example, the number of reserved balls increases). Is selected. As a result, even if a look-ahead notice such as "holding change notice" is made based on the presentation mode selected at the time of the start winning, the content of the variable effect to be executed becomes substantially the same, and the target of the look-ahead notice Can be executed in which no inconsistency occurs with the contents of the prefetch notice.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 459 (a), in the D table 272d4 of the stop pattern table 272d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “normal reach” effect mode is set to “0” to “4”. The range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “super reach” effect mode is set to “5” to “39”, and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “special reach” effect mode is “40” to “40”. 99 ". In the D table 272d4, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the “special fluctuation” effect mode, and the “special fluctuation” effect mode is set so as not to be selected. The D table 272d4 is the stop pattern table 202d selected at the time of the big hit, and since "reach display" always occurs, each "non-reach" effect mode is not selected.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 459 (b), in the E table 272d5 of the stop pattern table 272d, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is assigned only to the “special fluctuation” effect mode (“0” to “99”). , The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the effect mode in which the other “reach display” is executed. Therefore, the stop type selected when the small hit is won is always set to the “special fluctuation” effect mode. Since the E table 272d5 is the stop pattern table 272d selected at the time of the small hit, each "non-reach" effect mode is not selected.

  That is, in the D table 272d4, the selection ratio is set such that the “normal reach” effect mode is 5%, the “super reach” effect mode is 35%, and the “special reach” effect mode is 60%. In the E table 272d5, the “special fluctuation” effect mode is set so as to have a selection ratio of 100%.

  Therefore, in the variable production at the time of winning the jackpot, the selection ratio is high in the order of the “special reach” production mode> “super reach” production mode> “normal reach” production mode, and the “normal reach” production mode> It is set so that the selection ratio increases in the order of “super-reach” effect mode> “special reach” effect mode. Therefore, the jackpot expectation degree at the time of appearance of each “reach display” is likely to show the jackpot display result in the order of “special reach” production mode> “super reach” production mode> “normal reach” production mode It is configured to be. Thereby, the degree of expectation to the big hit can be shown to the player by the effect mode of the variable effect, and the player can enjoy a feeling of uplifting to the big hit according to the effect mode of the executed variable effect.

  As described above, the situation in which a game is played by determining the effect mode of the variable effect to be executed based on the success or failure of the variable effect, the game state at that time, and the number of balls reserved for the variable effect at that time By shortening the execution time of the variable effect and increasing the number of executions of the variable effect based on the above, it is possible to select an effect mode that increases the execution efficiency of the variable effect.

  In the case where the number of retained balls in the variable effect is large (for example, “4”), when “reach display” is selected, the stop pattern in which the effect element of “high-speed fluctuation” of each “reach display” is shortened A table 272d may be provided. In addition, when the number of reserve balls in the variable effect is large, a stop pattern table 272d may be provided in which the effect element of “low speed change” is omitted in each effect mode. Furthermore, a stop pattern table 272d in which the selectivity of each effect mode is completely different from each other may be provided according to the number of retained balls of the variable effect. However, in the case where the selectivity of each effect mode is different depending on the number of reserved balls of the variable effect, the number of reserved balls at the time of determining the execution of the pre-reading advance notice and There may be a case where the number of reserved balls at the time of execution of the fluctuation effect that is the target of the prefetch notice is different. In such a case, it is necessary to perform a process for maintaining consistency between the content of the pre-reading notice and the content of the variable effect, so that the process becomes complicated.

  Returning to FIG. 454, the description will be continued. For example, the variation type counter CS1 is configured to add “1” in order within a range of “0 to 9” and return to “0” after reaching the maximum value (that is, “9”). The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 466), which will be described later, is performed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process (see FIG. 385). Then, at the timing when the ball wins the first starting port 64a, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 at that time is provided in the first reserved ball storage area 273d of the RAM 273 provided corresponding to the first starting port 64a. Of the obtained first reserved first to fourth areas, the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the fluctuation type counter storage area 273d4 of the first reserved area. Further, at the timing when the ball wins the second starting port 64b, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 at that time is provided in the second reserved ball storage area 273e of the RAM 273 provided corresponding to the second starting port 64b. Of the obtained second reserved first to fourth areas, the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the variation type counter storage area 273e4 of the second reserved area.

  The fluctuation type counter CS1 is used for determining a detailed fluctuation time (rough fluctuation pattern) of the fluctuation effect. That is, the MPU 271 of the main control device 110 uses the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern table 272e stored in the ROM 272 to produce detailed information on the effect mode selected by the stop pattern table 272d and the stop pattern selection counter C3. Determine the fluctuating time. The voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type and the fine symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1. In addition, the presence or absence of the notice effect and the execution mode of the notice effect are determined.

  As described above, the MPU 271 of the main control device 110 selects a rough fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation effect and determines only the fluctuation time. With this configuration, the MPU 271 of the main control device 110 does not need to perform detailed notice lottery control or the like necessary for executing the variable production, so that the processing of the MPU 271 related to the variable production can be reduced. it can. Further, it is not necessary for the main control device 110 to prepare commands for all the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation effect, and the ROM capacity of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

  In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine a detailed fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation effect based on the fluctuation time (rough fluctuation pattern) determined by the main control device 110, thereby performing the fluctuation effect. The degree of freedom for selection can be increased. Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the game state changes every moment, it is possible to select or change the effect contents of the variable effect at any time in response to the change, and to execute an appropriate effect according to the game state. it can.

  Here, details of the variation pattern table 272e will be described with reference to FIGS. The pachinko machine 10 includes, as the fluctuation pattern table 272e, a special figure 1 loss fluctuation pattern table 272e1 commonly used in all game states when the first special symbol is lost, and when the first special symbol has a big hit. Or, the special pattern 1 large hit / small hit variation pattern table 272e2 which is used at the time of the small hit and is commonly used in all the game states, and is used at the time of the loss of the second special symbol and the "normal game state" Special figure 2 loss variation pattern table 272e3, special figure 2 big hit / small hit variation pattern table 272e4 used in the case of "big game state" at the time of big hit or small hit of the second special symbol, When the second special symbol is lost, the "super probability fluctuation state", "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state" (hereinafter, "super probability fluctuation state") The "moving state", the "probability changing state" and the "time reduction state" are sometimes collectively referred to as "probable change / time saving time". A special pattern 2 big hit / small hit variation pattern table 272e6 used when the special symbol is a big hit or a small hit and "probable change / time saving time" is prepared.

  FIG. 460 (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the special pattern 1 loss variation pattern table 272e1 stored in the ROM 272, and FIG. 460 (b) is a special figure 1 big hit stored in the ROM 272. FIG. 461 (a) is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the small hit variation pattern table 272e2. FIG. 461 (a) is an example of the special figure 2 loss variation pattern table 272e3 for the "normal game state" stored in the ROM 272. FIG. 461 (b) is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the special pattern 2 big hit / small hit variation pattern table 272e4 for the “normal game state” stored in the ROM 272. FIG. 462 (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the special figure 2 loss variation pattern table 272e5 for “probability change / time saving” stored in the ROM 272. There, FIG. 462 (b) is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a stored is "probability variation-time reduction when" JP Figure 2 for the big hit, small prize fluctuation pattern table 272e6 for the ROM 272. As shown in FIGS. 460 to 462, each of the variation pattern tables 272e1 to 272e6 is grouped based on the selected effect mode.

  Specifically, as the production mode at the time of the loss, “E0: non-reach (long)” and “non-reach (short)” productions referred to when the “non-reach (long)” production mode is determined “E1: non-reach (short)” referred to when the aspect is determined, “E2: normal reach” referenced when the “normal reach” production mode is determined, and “super reach” production mode Are determined when “E3: Super Reach” is produced, and “E4: Special Reach” is produced when the “Special Reach” production mode is determined. It is classified into “E5: super long fluctuation” which is referred to when it is determined. In addition, as the production mode at the time of the big hit and the small hit, it is referred to when the “normal reach” rendering mode is determined and “E6: normal reach” and when the “super reach” rendering mode is determined. "E7: Super Reach", "E9: Special Reach", which is referred to when the production mode is determined, and "E9: Special Reach", and "E9", which is referred to when the "special variation" production mode is determined. : Special fluctuation ”. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups.

  In the twenty-eighth embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in a certain reserved area of the first reserved ball storage area 273d corresponding to the first special symbol is a big hit value (big hit random value) and a small hit value. If it is not (small hit random number value), that is, if the value is a loss, referring to the reserved number table 272c, based on the playing state at that time and the number of reserved balls at that time. Then, the stop pattern table 272d is selected, and an effect mode is selected based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same holding area and the stop pattern table 272d. Then, a group (group) to be referred to in the special figure 1 loss variation pattern table 272e1 is determined based on the selected effect mode. In the group (group) of the special figure 1 loss variation pattern table 272e1, the variation pattern (variation time) associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the same reserved area is reserved in the reserved area. It is determined as a fluctuation pattern in a fluctuation effect.

  In the special pattern 1 loss variation pattern table 272e1 which is referred to when the first special symbol is lost, “E0: non-reach (long)” has “15 seconds” for the entire variation time ““ high-speed variation (long) ”. "Variable element + variable element of" low-speed fluctuation "" (variation time. In the following, it is naturally possible to replace "variation pattern" with "variation time").

  In the example shown in FIG. 460 (a), the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E0: non-reach (long)” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+“ the low-speed fluctuation ”. "Variable element" is "0-9", and only "variable element of" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+ variable element of" low-speed fluctuation "" is set to be selectable.

  That is, in any game state, when the “non-reach (long)” effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 loss fluctuation pattern table 272e1 referred to when the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol is executed, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set. “Variable element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ variable element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”” is associated with all possible values (“0 to 9”). In other words, in the case of the “non-reach (long)” effect mode in the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol, “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ the fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”” is always selected as the fluctuation pattern. You.

  Here, each variable element constituting the variable pattern will be described. The variable element constitutes a part of one variable effect, and one variable effect is configured by combining each variable element. In the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-eighth embodiment, as the variable elements, the variable elements of “high-speed fluctuation”, the variable elements of “low-speed fluctuation”, the variable elements of “normal reach”, the variable elements of “super reach” and the “special reach” A variable element and a variable element of “re-change” are provided.

  The variable element of “high-speed fluctuation” is a variable element that scrolls at high speed so that the player cannot clearly recognize the contents of the third symbol. When the “non-reach (short)” effect mode or the like is selected, the variable element of the “high-speed change” is performed “5 seconds” at the beginning of the variable effect (hereinafter, referred to as “high-speed change (short)”). If the “non-reach (long)” effect mode or the like is selected, “10 seconds” is performed at the beginning of the variable effect (hereinafter, may be referred to as “high-speed change (long)”), When the “super long fluctuation” effect mode is selected, “595 seconds” is performed at the beginning of the fluctuation effect (hereinafter, may be referred to as “high speed fluctuation (extremely long)”), and the “high probability fluctuation / time saving time” “3 seconds” is performed at the beginning of the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol (hereinafter, may be referred to as “high-speed fluctuation (ultra short)”). It should be noted that, when the variable element of “high-speed fluctuation” ends, a variable element of “low-speed fluctuation” to be described later is started (executed) or the fluctuation effect ends as it is.

  The variable element of "low-speed fluctuation" is started after the execution of the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation" of "3 seconds", "5 seconds", "10 seconds" or "595 seconds" so that the third symbol can be visually recognized. This is a variable element that indicates whether or not “reach display” is generated by scrolling. The fluctuation element of the “low speed fluctuation” is not executed when the “non-reach (short)” effect mode is selected, and is not performed in the effect mode other than the “non-reach (short)” effect mode (for example, “non-reach (long)”. ) If "effect mode" is selected, "5 seconds" is performed after the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation".

  That is, in the “non-reach (short)” effect mode, after the variable element of “high-speed fluctuation” is performed, each symbol row of the third symbol display device 81 rapidly changes without passing through the variable element of “low-speed fluctuation”. (It stops). In addition, when the fluctuation element of this “low-speed fluctuation” ends, the fluctuation effect ends as it is.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-eighth embodiment, the “non-reach (long)” effect mode includes a “fast change” fluctuation element of “10 seconds” and a “slow change” fluctuation element of “5 seconds”. A fluctuation effect is constituted by the fluctuation pattern including the fluctuation effect. Further, in the “non-reach (short)” effect mode, a variable effect is configured with a change pattern of only a “fast change” change element of “5 seconds”. Further, in the “super long fluctuation” effect mode, a fluctuation effect is configured by a fluctuation pattern including a fluctuation element of “high-speed fluctuation” of “595 seconds” and a fluctuation element of “low-speed fluctuation” of “5 seconds”.

  When the same symbol (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “reach forming symbol”) is stopped and displayed in the symbol row of 2 which stops first in the variable element of “low speed variation”, the variable element of “normal reach” is the remaining element. Is a variable element that indicates whether or not a jackpot will occur depending on the result of the change in the symbol sequence. The variable element of “normal reach” is performed “5 seconds” after the variable element of “low-speed fluctuation”.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-eighth embodiment, after the execution of the variable element of “normal reach”, a pattern that directly displays “losing display”, a pattern that directly displays “big hit display”, and a pattern of “super reach” A pattern that evolves into a variable element, a pattern that evolves into a “special reach” variable element, and a pattern that executes a “re-change” variable element once a temporary “losing display” appears Have been.

  The variable element of “super reach” is developed and executed when the change of the remaining symbol row is continued without stopping the “loss display” in the variable element of “normal reach”, and in the third symbol display device 81 This is a variable element that indicates whether a big hit occurs by performing a predetermined effect (for example, “battle effect”). The variable element of “super reach” is performed “10 seconds” after the execution of the variable element of “normal reach”.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-eighth embodiment, after the execution of the variable element of “super reach”, a temporary pattern of “losing display” and a pattern of direct “big hit display” are temporarily set. And a pattern for executing a variable element of “re-variation” after the “loss display” appears.

  The variable element of “special reach” is developed and executed when the “loss display” is not stopped and the fluctuation of the remaining symbol columns is continued in the variable element of “normal reach”. This is a variable element that indicates whether a special effect (for example, “competitive effect”) different from the predetermined effect is performed and a jackpot occurs. The variable element of “special reach” is performed for “20 seconds” after the execution of the variable element of “normal reach”.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-eighth embodiment, after the execution of the variable element of “special reach”, a temporary pattern of “losing display” and a pattern of direct “big hit display” are temporarily set. And a pattern that "re-fluctuates" after "miss display" appears.

  It should be noted that it is configured to develop into a variable element of “super reach” or a variable element of “special reach” after the execution of the variable element of “normal reach”. When the symbol stops, it may be configured such that it does not pass through the variable element of “normal reach” and suddenly develops into the variable element of “super reach” or the variable element of “special reach”. Further, the configuration may be such that the variable element of “special reach” is performed after the execution of the variable element of “super reach”.

  The variable element of “re-change” is a variable element that develops and executes after “losing display” once appears in any of the “reach displays”, and appears as “big hit display”. The variable element of this “re-change” is performed “5 seconds” after any of the “reach display”.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-eighth embodiment, a pattern in which "big hit display" or "small hit display" appears after the execution of the "re-change" variable element is prepared.

  Further, the variable element of the “re-change” is configured to be generated only when the big hit game or the small hit game is won. In other words, in the case of "losing display", the variable element of "re-change" is not executed. This is because the variable element of “re-change” is a variable element that changes the temporarily displayed “losing” to “big hit” or “small hit”. If it is done in the case of "losing display" that is not done, inconsistencies in the production will occur. Therefore, the variable element of this “re-change” is selected only in the big hit / small hit change pattern tables 272e2, 272e4, 272e6 (see FIGS. 460 (b), 461 (b) and 462 (b)). It is configured not to be selected in the loss variation pattern tables 272e1, 272e3, 272e5 (see FIGS. 460 (a), 461 (a) and 462 (a)).

  Next, in the variation pattern table for special figure 1 loss, “E1: non-reach (short)” includes one of “only high-speed variation (short) variation elements” with a total variation time of “5 seconds”. There are two fluctuation patterns.

  In the example shown in FIG. 460 (a), the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E1: non-reach (short)” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “only the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (short) ””. "0-9", and only "variable element of" high-speed variation (short) "" is set to be selectable.

  That is, in any of the game states, when the “non-reach (short)” effect mode is selected in the special pattern 1 loss variation pattern table 272e1 referred to when performing the variation effect of the first special symbol, the variation type counter CS1 is set. All the possible values (“0 to 9”) are associated with “only the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (short) ””. That is, in the case of the “non-reach (short)” effect mode in the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol, “only the high-speed fluctuation (short)” fluctuation element is always selected as the fluctuation pattern.

  Next, in the fluctuation pattern table for special figure 1 loss, “E2: normal reach” has a fluctuation element of “high-speed fluctuation (long)” + a fluctuation element of “low-speed fluctuation” with an overall fluctuation time of “20 seconds”. + Variable element of "normal reach"].

  In the example shown in FIG. 460 (a), the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E2: normal reach” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ the fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”. + "0 to 9" for the "variable element of" normal reach "", and only the "variable element of" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+ the fluctuation element of" low-speed fluctuation "+ the fluctuation element of" normal reach "" Is set to be selectable.

  That is, in any game state, when the “normal reach” effect mode is selected in the special pattern 1 loss fluctuation pattern table 272e1 which is referred to at the time of executing the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol, all the fluctuation type counters CS1 can take. The value (“0 to 9”) is associated with “a fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ a fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”+ a fluctuation element of“ normal reach ””. That is, in the case of the “normal reach” effect mode in the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol, the fluctuation pattern is always “a fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ a fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”+ a fluctuation element of“ normal reach ”” Is selected.

  Next, in the variation pattern table for special figure 1 loss, “E3: Super Reach” has a variation element of “high-speed variation (long)” + variation of “low-speed variation” with a total variation time of “30 seconds”. A variation pattern of “element + variation element of“ normal reach ”+ variation element of“ super reach ”” is prepared.

  In the example shown in FIG. 460 (a), the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E3: super reach” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ the fluctuation of“ low-speed fluctuation ”. Element + fluctuation element of “normal reach” + fluctuation element of “super reach” ”is“ 0 to 9 ”, and the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ the fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ” + “Normal reach” fluctuation element + “super reach” fluctuation element ”alone.

  That is, in any game state, when the “super reach” effect mode is selected in the special pattern 1 loss variable pattern table 272e1 that is referred to at the time of performing the variable effect of the first special symbol, all the possible values of the variable type counter CS1 can be obtained. (“0-9”) is associated with “variable element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ variable element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”+ variable element of“ normal reach ”+ variable element of“ super reach ”” Have been. In other words, in the case of the “super reach” effect mode in the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol, the fluctuation element of “high-speed fluctuation (long) + variation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”+ variation element of“ normal reach ”is always used as the fluctuation pattern. + “Variable element of“ super reach ”” is selected.

  Next, in the variation pattern table for special figure 1 loss, “E4: special reach” has a variation element of “high-speed variation (long)” + variation of “low-speed variation” with an overall variation time of “40 seconds”. Element + variable element of “normal reach” + variable element of “special reach” ”.

  In the example shown in FIG. 460 (a), the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E4: special reach” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ the fluctuation of“ low-speed fluctuation ”. Element + fluctuation element of “normal reach” + fluctuation element of “special reach” ”is“ 0 to 9 ”, and the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ the fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ” + "Normal reach" fluctuation element + "Special reach" fluctuation element "alone.

  That is, in any game state, when the “special reach” effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 loss fluctuation pattern table 272e1 that is referred to at the time of performing the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol, all of the possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (“0-9”) is associated with “variable element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ variable element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”+ variable element of“ normal reach ”+ variable element of“ special reach ”” Have been. That is, in the case of the “special reach” effect mode in the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol, the fluctuation element of “high-speed fluctuation (long)” + variation element of “low-speed fluctuation” + variation element of “normal reach” is always used as the fluctuation pattern. + “Variable element of“ special reach ”” is selected.

  Next, in the variation pattern table 272e1 for the special figure 1 loss, “E5: super long fluctuation” includes a fluctuation element of “high speed fluctuation (super long)” of “600 seconds” + “low speed fluctuation”. Of fluctuation factors ”is prepared.

  In the example shown in FIG. 460 (a), the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E5: super long fluctuation” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (super-long) ”+“ low-speed fluctuation ”. "Variable element" is "0-9", and only the "variable element of" high-speed fluctuation (extremely long) "+ the variable element of" low-speed fluctuation "" are set to be selectable.

  That is, in any game state, when the “extremely long fluctuation” effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 loss fluctuation pattern table 272e1 referred to when the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol is executed, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can be taken. All values (“0 to 9”) are associated with “variable element of“ high-speed fluctuation (extremely long) ”+ variable element of“ low-speed fluctuation ””. That is, in the case of the “super long fluctuation” effect mode in the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol, “variation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (extremely long) ”+ variation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”” is always selected as the fluctuation pattern. .

  In addition, the variation pattern at the time of the loss of the special figure 1 is determined as the variation pattern as it is, and the variation pattern may be determined without using the variation type counter CS1. In addition, although the selection is made using only the variation type counter CS1, the selection may be made using a plurality of variation type counters in combination (selection of the presence or absence of a notice display or the like).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 460 (b), the special figure 1 big hit / small hit variation pattern table 272e2 referred to at the time of the big hit or the small hit of the first special symbol will be described. In the twenty-eighth embodiment, when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in a certain reserved area of the first reserved ball storage area 273d corresponding to the first special symbol is a value that becomes a big hit or a value that becomes a small hit, With reference to the reserved number table 272c, the stop pattern table 272d is selected based on the gaming state at that time and the number of retained balls at that time, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same reserved area is selected. An effect mode is selected based on the value and the stop pattern table 272d. Then, a group (group) to be referred to is determined in the special figure 1 big hit / small hit variation pattern table 272e2 based on the selected effect mode. In the group (group) of the special pattern 1 big hit / small hit change pattern table 272e2, the change pattern (change time) associated with the value of the change type counter CS1 stored in the same hold area is stored in the hold area. It is determined as a fluctuation pattern in the suspended fluctuation effect.

  In the special pattern 1 big hit / small hit change pattern table 272e2, “E6: Normal Reach” has a total change time of “20 seconds” and a “high-speed change (long)” change element + “low-speed change” change. Element + “normal reach” fluctuation element ”, and the entire fluctuation time is“ 25 seconds ”“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”fluctuation element +“ low-speed fluctuation ”fluctuation element +“ normal reach ”fluctuation element +“ re The two variation patterns “variation element of variation” are prepared to be selectable, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern.

  In the example shown in FIG. 460 (b), the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E6: normal reach” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ the fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”. + "Variable element of" normal reach "", "0 to 2", "variable element of" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+ fluctuation element of" low-speed fluctuation "+ fluctuation element of" normal reach "+ fluctuation of" re-variation " "3-9" for "element".

  That is, in any game state, when the “normal reach” effect mode is selected in the special pattern 1 big hit / small hit change pattern table 272e2 which is referred to at the time of executing the change effect of the first special symbol, ““ high speed change (long) )), The fluctuation pattern of "low-speed fluctuation" + "normal-reach fluctuation" is 30%, the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + the fluctuation element of "low-speed fluctuation" + "normal reach" Is set to be selected at a rate of 70%.

  Therefore, in the “normal reach” effect mode selected at the time of the special hit of the special map 1, “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ the fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”+ the fluctuation element of“ normal reach ”+ the“ re- fluctuation ” The variation pattern of the “variable element” is easily selected (70% of the whole). In addition, a variation pattern of “variation element of“ high-speed variation (long) ”+ variation element of“ low-speed variation ”+ variation element of“ normal reach ”” is selected so that any variation pattern can be selected. It is possible to provide a game that can be expected to be a big hit.

  Next, in the special pattern 1 big hit / small hit variation pattern table 272e2, "E7: Super Reach" has a variation factor of "high speed variation (long)" with a total variation time of "30 seconds" + "low speed variation". ”+“ Normal reach ”fluctuation +“ super reach ”fluctuation” and “high-speed fluctuation (long) fluctuation + low-speed fluctuation” with an overall fluctuation time of “35 seconds”. Element + variable element of “normal reach” + variable element of “super reach” + variable element of “re-variation” are prepared to be selectable, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 for each variation pattern Are associated with each other.

  In the example shown in FIG. 460 (b), the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E7: super reach” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ the fluctuation of“ low-speed fluctuation ”. Element + variable element of “normal reach” + variable element of “super reach” ”,“ 0-3 ”,“ variable element of “high-speed fluctuation (long)” + variable element of “low-speed fluctuation” + “normal reach” “Variable element + variable element of“ super reach ”+ variable element of“ re-variation ”” is “4 to 9”.

  That is, in any game state, when the “super reach” effect mode is selected in the special pattern 1 big hit / small hit change pattern table 272e2 which is referred to at the time of executing the first special symbol change effect, ““ high speed change ( Variable) "variable element of" low speed fluctuation "+ variable element of" normal reach "+ variable element of" super reach "" is 40%, and the fluctuation pattern of "high-speed fluctuation (long) + The variation pattern of "low-speed variation" + variation factor of "normal reach" + variation factor of "super reach" + variation factor of "re-variation" is set to be selected at a rate of 60%.

  Therefore, in the “super-reach” effect mode selected at the time of the jackpot in the special map 1, “variable element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ variable element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”+ variable element of“ normal reach ”+“ super-reach ” (Variable element of “+ variable element of re-change”) ”(60% of the total). In addition, the fluctuation pattern of “fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”+ fluctuation element of“ normal reach ”+ fluctuation element of“ super reach ”” is selected. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that can expect a big hit from any of the fluctuation patterns.

  Next, in the special pattern 1 big hit / small hit variation pattern table 272e2, "E8: special reach" has a variable factor of "high-speed variation (long)" + "low-speed variation" with an overall variation time of "40 seconds". ”+“ Normal reach ”+“ Special reach ”variance” and “High speed (long) variability” + “Slow variability” with a total variance of 45 seconds. Element + variable element of “normal reach” + variable element of “special reach” + variable element of “re-variation” are prepared to be selectable, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 for each variation pattern Are associated with each other.

  In the example shown in FIG. 460 (b), the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E8: special reach” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ the fluctuation of“ low-speed fluctuation ”. Element + fluctuation element of “normal reach” + fluctuation element of “special reach” ”,“ 0-4 ”,“ fluctuation element of “high-speed fluctuation (long)” + fluctuation element of “low-speed fluctuation” + “normal reach” Variable element + variable element of "special reach" + variable element of "re-variation"].

  That is, in any of the game states, when the “special reach” effect mode is selected in the special pattern 1 big hit / small hit change pattern table 272e2 which is referred to when the first special symbol changing effect is executed, ““ high speed change ( Variable) "variable element of" low speed fluctuation "+ variable element of" normal reach "+ variable element of" special reach "] is 50%, and the fluctuation element of" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+" The variation pattern of “low-speed variation” + the variation factor of “normal reach” + the variation factor of “special reach” + the variation factor of “re-variation” is selected such that the variation pattern is 50%.

  Therefore, in the “special reach” effect mode selected at the time of the special hit of special figure 1, “variable element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ variable element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”+ variable element of“ normal reach ”+“ special reach ” Of "variable element" and the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + the variable element of "low-speed fluctuation" + the variable element of "normal reach" + the variable element of "super reach" + the variable element of "re-variation" Is selected (50% each). As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming ability in which a large hit can be expected in any of the fluctuation patterns.

  Next, in the special pattern 1 big hit / small hit change pattern table 272e2, "E9: special change" has a total change time of "45 seconds", "high-speed change (long)" change element + "low-speed change". , A fluctuation element of “normal reach” + a fluctuation element of “special reach” + a fluctuation element of “re-change”.

  In the example shown in FIG. 460 (b), the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E9: special fluctuation” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ the fluctuation of“ low-speed fluctuation ”. Element + variable element of “normal reach” + variable element of “special reach” + variable element of “re-variation” are “0 to 9”, and the variable element of “high-speed fluctuation (long)” + Variable element of "low speed fluctuation" + Variable element of "Normal reach" + Variable element of "Special reach" + Variable element of "re-variation" are set to be selectable.

  That is, in any game state, when the "special fluctuation" effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 loss fluctuation pattern table 272e1 referred to when the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol is executed, all the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take. (“0-9”), “variable element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ variable element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”+ variable element of“ normal reach ”+” It is set so that the same variation pattern as the variation element of “special reach” + the variation element of “re-variation” is selected without exception. Thus, the fluctuation pattern of the “fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ the fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”+ the fluctuation element of“ normal reach ”+ the fluctuation element of“ special reach ”+ the fluctuation element of“ re- fluctuation ”” In this case, it is possible to expect a big hit or a small hit, and to provide a game property in which some game value is given, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, when a big hit or a small hit is won, by configuring a relatively long change pattern to be easily selected, the content of the variable effect in which a big hit or a small hit occurs can be enhanced to enhance the game content. Interest can be improved. In addition, in the case where the big hit and the small hit are not won, that is, in the case of a loss, a relatively short fluctuation pattern such as a “non-reach” effect mode is configured to be easily selected, so that the fluctuation effect at the time of the loss is achieved. Can shorten the effect contents, and can efficiently consume the variable effect.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 461 (a), the special figure 2 loss variation pattern table 272e3 that is referred to when the second special symbol is lost in the “normal game state” (ie, “normal time”) will be described. In the twenty-eighth embodiment, when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in a certain holding area of the second holding ball storage area 273e corresponding to the second special symbol is not a value that is a big hit or a small hit, that is, a loss occurs. If the value is a value, the stop pattern table 272d is selected based on the game state at that time and the number of balls reserved at that time with reference to the reservation number table 272c and stored in the same reservation area. The effect mode is selected based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the stop pattern table 272d. Then, a group (group) to be referred to in the special figure 2 loss variation pattern table 272e3 is determined based on the selected effect mode. In the group (group) of the special figure 2 loss variation pattern table 272e3, the variation pattern (variation time) associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the same reserved area is reserved in the reserved area. It is determined as a fluctuation pattern in a fluctuation effect.

  In the special figure 2 loss variation pattern table 272e3 referred to in the "normal game state", "E0: non-reach (long)" indicates that the overall variation time is "high-speed variation (extremely long)" of "600 seconds". And a fluctuation element of "low-speed fluctuation".

  In the example shown in FIG. 461 (a), the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E0: non-reach (long)” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (extremely long) ”+“ low speed ”. "Variable element of fluctuation" is "0-9", and only "variable element of" high-speed fluctuation (extremely long) "+ variable element of" low-speed fluctuation "" can be selected.

  That is, when the “non-reach (long)” effect mode is selected in the special pattern 2 loss variation pattern table 272e3 referred to in the “normal game state”, all possible values of the variation type counter CS1 (“0 to 9)) is associated with a “fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (extremely long) ”+ a fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ””. That is, in the case of the “non-reach (long)” effect mode in the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol in the “normal game state”, the fluctuation pattern is always “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (extremely long) ”+“ the low-speed fluctuation ”. Is selected. As a result, the configuration is such that the variation time of the variation effect of the second special symbol in the “normal game state” is selected to be much longer than the variation time of the variation effect of the first special symbol in the “normal game state”. It is set that the time efficiency of the game is very low (bad).

  Next, in the special pattern 2 loss variation pattern table 272e3 referred to in the "normal game state", "E1: non-reach (short)" indicates that the total variation time is "595 seconds" and "high-speed variation (super 1) is prepared.

  In the example shown in FIG. 461 (a), the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E1: non-reach (short)” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “only the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (extremely long) ””. On the other hand, it is set to "0-9", and only "variable element of" high-speed variation (extremely long) "" can be selected.

  That is, when the “non-reach (short)” effect mode is selected in the special pattern 2 loss variation pattern table 272e3, ““ high speed ”is set for all possible values (“ 0 to 9 ”) of the variation type counter CS1. Only the variation element of “variation (extremely long)” is associated. In other words, in the case of the “non-reach (short)” effect mode in the change effect of the second special symbol in the “normal game state”, “variable element of“ high-speed change (extremely long) ”is always selected as the change pattern. Is done. As a result, the configuration is such that the variation time of the variation effect of the second special symbol in the “normal game state” is selected to be much longer than the variation time of the variation effect of the first special symbol in the “normal game state”. It is set that the time efficiency of the game is very low (bad).

  Next, in the special pattern 2 loss variation pattern table 272e3 referred to in the “normal game state”, “E2: normal reach” indicates that the entire variation time is “605 seconds” and “high-speed variation (extremely long)”. Fluctuation element + variation element of “low-speed fluctuation” + variation element of “normal reach”].

  In the example shown in FIG. 461 (a), the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E2: normal reach” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (extremely long) ”+ the fluctuation of“ low-speed fluctuation ”. Element + "normal reach" fluctuation element "is" 0-9 ", and" "high-speed fluctuation (extremely long)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element " Only set to be selectable.

  In other words, when the “normal reach” effect mode is selected in the special pattern 2 loss variation pattern table 272e3, “high-speed variation (extremely long) is performed for all possible values (“ 0 to 9 ”) of the variation type counter CS1. )) + Variable element of “low-speed fluctuation” + variable element of “normal reach”]. That is, in the case of the “normal reach” effect mode in the change effect of the second special symbol in the “normal game state”, the change element of “high-speed change (extremely long)” + “low-speed change” is always used as the change pattern. + “Normal reach” variable ”is selected. As a result, the configuration is such that the variation time of the variation effect of the second special symbol in the “normal game state” is selected to be much longer than the variation time of the variation effect of the first special symbol in the “normal game state”. It is set that the time efficiency of the game is very low (bad).

  Next, in the special pattern 2 loss variation pattern table 272e3 referred to in the "normal game state", "E3: super reach" has "615 seconds" for the entire variation time of "" high speed variation (extremely long) "". , A fluctuation element of “low speed fluctuation” + a fluctuation element of “normal reach” + a fluctuation element of “super reach”.

  In the example shown in FIG. 461 (a), the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E3: super reach” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (extremely long) ”+ the fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”. “0-9” for “variable element +“ normal reach ”variable element +“ super-reach ”variable element”, and “variable element of“ high-speed fluctuation (extremely long) ”+ fluctuation of“ low-speed fluctuation ” Element + variable element of “normal reach” + variable element of “super reach” ”is set to be selectable.

  That is, when the “super-reach” effect mode is selected in the special pattern 2 loss variation pattern table 272e3, ““ high-speed variation (ultra) ”is performed for all possible values (“ 0 to 9 ”) of the variation type counter CS1. Long), a variable element of “low-speed fluctuation” + a variable element of “normal reach” + a variable element of “super reach”. In other words, in the case of the “super reach” effect mode in the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol in the “normal game state”, the fluctuation pattern of “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (extremely long) ”+ the fluctuation of“ low-speed fluctuation ” Element + variable element of “normal reach” + variable element of “super reach” ”. As a result, the configuration is such that the variation time of the variation effect of the second special symbol in the “normal game state” is selected to be much longer than the variation time of the variation effect of the first special symbol in the “normal game state”. It is set that the time efficiency of the game is very low (bad).

  Next, in the special pattern 2 loss variation pattern table 272e3 referred to in the “normal game state”, “E4: Special Reach” has “625 seconds” for the entire variation time of “High-speed variation (extremely long)”. And a fluctuation element of “low speed fluctuation” + a fluctuation element of “normal reach” + a fluctuation element of “special reach”.

  In the example shown in FIG. 461 (a), the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E4: special reach” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (extremely long) ”+ the fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”. "0-9" for "variable element +" normal reach "variable element +" special reach "variable element" and "" high-speed fluctuation (extremely long) "fluctuation element +" low-speed fluctuation "fluctuation Element + “variable element of“ normal reach ”+ variable element of“ special reach ””.

  That is, when the “special reach” effect mode is selected in the special pattern 2 loss variation pattern table 272e3, “high-speed variation (ultra-high speed variation) is performed for all possible values (“ 0 to 9 ”) of the variation type counter CS1. Long), a “low-speed fluctuation” fluctuation element, a “normal reach” fluctuation element, and a “special reach” fluctuation element ”. In other words, in the case of the “special reach” effect mode in the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol in the “normal game state”, the fluctuation pattern is always “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (extremely long) ”+ the fluctuation of“ low-speed fluctuation ”. Element + variable element of “normal reach” + variable element of “special reach” ”. As a result, the configuration is such that the variation time of the variation effect of the second special symbol in the “normal game state” is selected to be much longer than the variation time of the variation effect of the first special symbol in the “normal game state”. It is set that the time efficiency of the game is very low (bad).

  Next, in the special pattern 2 loss variation pattern table 272e3 referred to in the "normal game state", "E5: super long fluctuation" indicates that the entire fluctuation time is "" high speed fluctuation (super long) "of" 600 seconds ". And a fluctuation element of "low-speed fluctuation".

  In the example shown in FIG. 461 (a), the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E5: super long fluctuation” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (super-long) ”+“ low-speed fluctuation ”. "Variable element" is "0-9", and only "variable element of" high-speed fluctuation (extremely long) "+ variable element of" low-speed fluctuation "" can be selected.

  That is, when the “extremely long fluctuation” effect mode is selected in the special pattern 2 loss fluctuation pattern table 272e3, the “high-speed fluctuation (“ 0 to 9 ”) is performed for all possible values (“ 0 to 9 ”) of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Ultra-long) + variable element of “low-speed fluctuation”. In other words, in the case of the “super long fluctuation” effect mode in the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol in the “normal game state”, the fluctuation pattern is always “the fluctuation element of“ high speed fluctuation (extremely long) ”+ the fluctuation element of“ low speed fluctuation ”. Variable element "is selected. As a result, the configuration is such that the variation time of the variation effect of the second special symbol in the “normal game state” is selected to be much longer than the variation time of the variation effect of the first special symbol in the “normal game state”. It is set that the time efficiency of the game is very low (bad).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 461 (b), the special figure 2 big hit / small hit variation pattern table 272e4 referred to at the time of the big hit or the small hit of the second special symbol in the “normal gaming state” will be described. In the twenty-eighth embodiment, when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in a certain holding area of the second holding ball storage area 273e corresponding to the second special symbol is a value of a big hit or a value of a small hit, With reference to the reserved number table 272c, the stop pattern table 272d is selected based on the gaming state at that time and the number of retained balls at that time, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same reserved area is selected. An effect mode is selected based on the value and the stop pattern table 272d. Then, a group (group) to be referred to is determined in the special pattern 2 big hit / small hit variation pattern table 272e4 based on the selected effect mode. In the group (group) of the special pattern 2 big hit / small hit change pattern table 272e4, a change pattern (change time) associated with the value of the change type counter CS1 stored in the same hold area is stored in the hold area. It is determined as a fluctuation pattern in the suspended fluctuation effect.

  In the special pattern 2 big hit / small hit change pattern table 272e4 referred to in the “normal game state”, “E6: Normal Reach” has “605 seconds” for the entire change time and “High-speed change (extremely long)”. Fluctuation element + fluctuation element of "low-speed fluctuation" + fluctuation element of "normal reach" "and fluctuation element of" high-speed fluctuation (extremely long) "with fluctuation time of" 610 seconds "+ fluctuation of" low-speed fluctuation " An element + a fluctuation element of “normal reach” + a fluctuation element of “re-change” are prepared to be selectable, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each fluctuation pattern.

  In the example shown in FIG. 461 (b), the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E6: normal reach” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (extremely long) ”+ the fluctuation of“ low-speed fluctuation ”. Element + fluctuation element of "normal reach"], fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (extremely long)" + fluctuation element of "low-speed fluctuation" + fluctuation element of "normal reach" + "re- fluctuation" "3-9" for the "variable element".

  That is, when the "normal reach" effect mode is selected in the special pattern 2 big hit / small hit change pattern table 272e4 which is referred to at the time of executing the change effect of the second special symbol in the "normal game state", "" High speed change ( 30% of the fluctuation pattern of the "fluctuation factor of" Ultra-long) "+" fluctuation factor of "Slow-fluctuation" + "fluctuation of" normal reach "" + Variable element of “normal reach” + variable element of “re-variation” ”is set to be selected at a rate of 70%. Further, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol in the “normal game state” is configured to be selected so as to be much longer than the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol in the “normal game state”. And the time efficiency of the game is set to be very low (bad).

  Therefore, although the time efficiency of the game is low, in the “normal reach” effect mode selected at the time of the big hit in Toku-zu 2, the variable element of “high-speed fluctuation (extremely long)” + the variable element of “low-speed fluctuation” + “normal reach” (Variable element + variable element of "re-variation") "(70% of the total). In addition, a variation pattern of “variation element of“ high-speed variation (extremely long) ”+ variation element of“ slow variation ”+ variation element of“ normal reach ”” is configured to be selected. However, it is possible to provide a game that can expect a big hit.

  Next, in the special pattern 2 big hit / small hit change pattern table 272e4 referred to in the “normal game state”, “E7: Super Reach” indicates “615 seconds” for the entire change time of “High-speed change (super Variable element of “long”) + variable element of “low-speed fluctuation” + variable element of “normal reach” + variable element of “super-reach” ”and“ high-speed fluctuation (extremely long) ”with a total fluctuation time of“ 620 seconds ” ”+“ Low-speed fluctuation ”+“ normal reach ”fluctuation +“ super-reach ”fluctuation +“ re-variation ”fluctuation. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with the variation pattern.

  In the example shown in FIG. 461 (b), the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E7: super reach” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (extremely long) ”+ the fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”. "0-3" for "variable element +" normal reach "variable element +" super-reach "variable element", "variable element of" high-speed fluctuation (extremely long) "+ variable element of" low-speed fluctuation "+" normal reach " "+ Fluctuation element of" super-reach "+" fluctuation element of "re-fluctuation" ".

  That is, when the “super reach” effect mode is selected in the special pattern 2 big hit / small hit change pattern table 272e4 which is referred to at the time of executing the change effect of the second special symbol in the “normal game state”, ““ high speed change ” (Ultra-long) "fluctuation factor +" Slow fluctuation "fluctuation element +" Normal reach "fluctuation element +" Super reach "fluctuation element" fluctuation pattern is 40%, and "High-speed fluctuation (ultra-long)" fluctuation The fluctuation pattern of the element + the fluctuation element of the "low speed fluctuation" + the fluctuation element of the "normal reach" + the fluctuation element of the "super reach" + the fluctuation element of the "re- fluctuation" is set to be selected at a rate of 60%. ing. Further, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol in the “normal game state” is configured to be selected so as to be much longer than the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol in the “normal game state”. And the time efficiency of the game is set to be very low (bad).

  Therefore, although the time efficiency of the game is low, in the “super reach” effect mode selected at the time of the big hit in Toku-zu 2, the variable element of “high-speed fluctuation (extremely long)” + the variable element of “low-speed fluctuation” + “normal reach” ”+“ Super-reach ”+“ re-variation ”fluctuation pattern” (60% of the total). Also, a variation pattern of “variable element of“ high-speed variation (extremely long) ”+ variable element of“ low-speed variation ”+ variable element of“ normal reach ”+ variable element of“ super reach ”” is selected. Thereby, it is possible to provide a game that can expect a big hit from any of the fluctuation patterns.

  Next, in the special pattern 2 big hit / small hit change pattern table 272e4 referred to in the "normal game state", "E8: Special Reach" indicates that the entire change time is "625 seconds" and "High Speed Change (Super Variable) element of + slow fluctuation + fluctuation element of "normal reach" + fluctuation element of "special reach", and "high-speed fluctuation (extremely long)" with a total fluctuation time of "630 seconds" ”+“ Low-speed fluctuation ”+“ normal reach ”fluctuation +“ special reach ”fluctuation +“ re-variation ”fluctuation. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with the variation pattern.

  In the example shown in FIG. 461 (b), the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E8: special reach” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (extremely long) ”+ the fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”. "0-4", "fluctuation element of" high-speed fluctuation (extremely long) "+ fluctuation element of" low-speed fluctuation "+" normal reach "for fluctuation element + fluctuation element of" normal reach "+ fluctuation element of" special reach " ”+“ Variable element of “special reach” + variable element of “re-variation” ”.

  That is, when the “special reach” effect mode is selected in the special pattern 2 big hit / small hit change pattern table 272e4 that is referred to at the time of executing the changing effect of the second special symbol in the “normal game state”, ““ high speed changing ” (Ultra-long) "+" Low-speed fluctuation "+" Normal reach "+" Special reach "fluctuation pattern is 50%, and" High-speed fluctuation (Ultra-long) "fluctuation It is set so that the fluctuation pattern of the element + the fluctuation element of the "low speed fluctuation" + the fluctuation element of the "normal reach" + the fluctuation element of the "special reach" + the fluctuation element of the "re- fluctuation" is 50%. ing. Further, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol in the “normal game state” is configured to be selected so as to be much longer than the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol in the “normal game state”. And the time efficiency of the game is set to be very low (bad).

  Therefore, although the time efficiency of the game is low, in the “special reach” effect mode selected at the time of the jackpot in Toku-zu, the fluctuation element of “high-speed fluctuation (extremely long)” + the fluctuation element of “low-speed fluctuation” + “normal reach” And "special reach" fluctuation patterns and "high-speed fluctuations (extremely long)" fluctuations + "slow fluctuations" fluctuations + "normal reach" fluctuations + "special reach" (Variable element + variable element of “re-variation”) ”(50% each). As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming ability in which a large hit can be expected in any of the fluctuation patterns.

  Next, in the special pattern 2 big hit / small hit change pattern table 272e4 referred to in the "normal game state", "E9: special change" indicates that the entire change time is "630 seconds" and "high speed change (super Long), a “low-speed fluctuation” fluctuation element, a “normal reach” fluctuation element, a “special reach” fluctuation element, and a “re- fluctuation” fluctuation element ”.

  In the example shown in FIG. 461 (b), the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E9: special fluctuation” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (extremely long) ”+ the fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”. "0-9" for the variable element + the variable element of "normal reach" + the variable element of "special reach" + the variable element of "re-change", and the "high-speed change (extremely long)" It is set so that only the variable element + the variable element of “low speed fluctuation” + the variable element of “normal reach” + the variable element of “special reach” + the variable element of “re-variation” can be selected.

  That is, when the “special fluctuation” effect mode is selected in the special pattern 2 big hit / small hit fluctuation pattern table 272e4, which is referred to at the time of executing the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol in the “normal game state”, the fluctuation type counter CS1 “Variable element of“ high-speed fluctuation (extremely long) ”+ variable element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”+“ normal reach ”for all values (“ 0 to 9 ”) that can be selected in the“ special reach ”effect mode And the fluctuation pattern of “special reach” + the fluctuation element of “re-fluctuation” ”. Accordingly, the fluctuation element of the "high-speed fluctuation (extremely long)" + the fluctuation element of the "low-speed fluctuation" + the fluctuation element of the "normal reach" + the fluctuation element of the "special reach" + the fluctuation element of the "re- fluctuation" In the pattern, a big hit or a small hit can be expected, a game property that some game value is given is provided, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol in the “normal game state” is configured to be selected so as to be much longer than the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol in the “normal game state”. And the time efficiency of the game is set to be very low (bad). With such a configuration, in the “normal game state”, when a ball is awarded to the second starting port 64b and the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol is executed, it is much longer than the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol. Since the fluctuation effect of time (that is, at least “595 seconds” or more) is executed, the execution efficiency of the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol in the “normal game state” is compared with the execution efficiency of the first special symbol, It is set to be very bad. Therefore, the profit (merit) of winning the second starting port 64b in the “normal game state” can be reduced as much as possible.

  Furthermore, when the total number of reserved first and second special symbols is large, a very long variation time is selected in the variation time of the variation effect of the first special symbol. Therefore, in a situation where the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol is reserved, even if it is attempted to execute the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol, the time efficiency of the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol can be reduced. In the "normal gaming state", the profit (merit) of winning the second starting port 64b can be further reduced. As a result, in the game state in which the execution of the fluctuation effect of the special figure 2 is not encouraged, the player wins the prize (that is, the execution of the right-handed game) to the second starting port 64b which is a trigger of the execution of the fluctuation effect of the special figure 2. It is possible to prevent the player from playing a game different from the assumed game specification and reduce disadvantages to the hall.

  Next, referring to FIG. 462 (a), the special figure 2 referred to when the "super stochastic fluctuation state", the "probability fluctuation state", or the "time shortened state" (that is, "probable change / time saving time") is lost. The loss variation pattern table 272e5 will be described. In the twenty-eighth embodiment, when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in a certain holding area of the second holding ball storage area 273e corresponding to the second special symbol is not a value that is a big hit or a small hit, that is, a loss occurs. If the value is a value, the stop pattern table 272d is selected based on the game state at that time and the number of balls reserved at that time with reference to the reservation number table 272c and stored in the same reservation area. The effect mode is selected based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the stop pattern table 272d. Then, a group (group) to be referred to in the special figure 2 loss variation pattern table 272e5 is determined based on the selected effect mode. In the group (group) of the special figure 2 loss variation pattern table 272e5, the variation pattern (variation time) associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the same reserved area is reserved in the reserved area. It is determined as a fluctuation pattern in a fluctuation effect.

  In the variation pattern table 272e5 for the special figure 2 lost referred to in the "probable variation / time saving time", the "E0: non-reach (long)" indicates that the entire variation time is "8 seconds" in the "high-speed variation (ultra short )) + Variable element of “low-speed fluctuation”.

  In the example shown in FIG. 462 (a), the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E0: non-reach (long)” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high speed fluctuation (ultra short) ”+“ low speed ”. "Variation element of" fluctuation "" is set to "0-9", and only "variation element of" high-speed fluctuation (ultra-short) "+ variation element of" low-speed fluctuation "" can be selected.

  That is, when the “non-reach (long)” effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 loss variation pattern table 272e5 referred to by “probability change / time saving”, all possible values of the variation type counter CS1 (“0 9) is associated with a “fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (ultra-short) ”+ a fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ””. In other words, in the case of the “non-reach (long)” effect mode in the change effect of the second special symbol in “probable change / time saving time”, the change pattern is always “variable element of“ high-speed change (ultra short) ”+“ low speed ” Fluctuation element of fluctuation ”is selected. As a result, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol of “probable change / time saving time” is the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol and the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol of the “normal game state”. It is configured such that a shorter time is selected as compared with, and the time efficiency of the game is set to be high (good).

  Next, in the special pattern 2 loss variation pattern table 272e5 referred to by “probable variation / time saving”, “E1: non-reach (short)” indicates “3 seconds” for the entire variation time “high speed variation ( One variation pattern “only the variation element of“ Ultra short ”) is prepared.

  In the example shown in FIG. 462 (a), the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E1: non-reach (short)” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is changed to “only high-speed fluctuation (ultra short)” fluctuation element. On the other hand, it is set to “0 to 9”, and only “variable elements of“ high-speed variation (ultra-short) ”only” can be selected.

  That is, when the “non-reach (short)” effect mode is selected in the special pattern 2 loss variation pattern table 272e5 referred to as “probable variation / time saving time”, all possible values of the variation type counter CS1 (“0 9) is associated with “only the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (ultra short) ””. That is, in the case of the “non-reach (short)” effect mode in the change effect of the second special symbol in “probable change / time saving time”, “variable element of“ high-speed change (ultra short) only ”is always used as the change pattern. Selected. As a result, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol of “probable change / time saving time” is the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol and the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol of the “normal game state”. It is configured such that a shorter time is selected as compared with, and the time efficiency of the game is set to be high (good).

  Next, in the variation pattern table 272e5 for the special figure 2 loss referred to by the “probable variation / time saving time”, “E2: normal reach” has “13 seconds” for the entire variation time ““ high speed variation (ultra short) ””. , A fluctuation element of “low-speed fluctuation” + a fluctuation element of “normal reach”.

  In the example shown in FIG. 462 (a), the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E2: normal reach” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (ultra short) ”+ the fluctuation of“ low-speed fluctuation ”. Element + "normal reach" fluctuation element "is" 0-9 "," "high-speed fluctuation (ultra short)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element " Only set to be selectable.

  That is, when the “normal reach” effect mode is selected in the special pattern 2 loss variation pattern table 272e5 referred to by “probability change / time saving”, all possible values of the variation type counter CS1 (“0 to 9”) Is associated with a “fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (ultra short) ”+ a fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”+ a fluctuation element of“ normal reach ””. In other words, in the case of the “normal reach” effect mode in the change effect of the second special symbol in “probable change / time reduction”, the change pattern of “variable element of“ high-speed change (ultra short) ”+ variation of“ low-speed change ” Element + variable element of “normal reach” ”is selected. As a result, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol of “probable change / time saving time” is the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol and the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol of the “normal game state”. It is configured such that a shorter time is selected as compared with, and the time efficiency of the game is set to be high (good).

  Next, in the variation pattern table 272e5 for the special figure 2 loss referred to by “probable variation / time saving time”, “E3: super reach” has “23 seconds” of the entire variation time “high speed variation (ultra short)”. , A fluctuation element of “low-speed fluctuation” + a fluctuation element of “normal reach” + a fluctuation element of “super-reach” ”.

  In the example shown in FIG. 462 (a), the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E3: super reach” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (ultra short) ”+ the fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”. "0-9" for the variable element + the variable element of "normal reach" + the variable element of "super reach", and the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation (ultra-short)" + fluctuation of "low-speed fluctuation" Element + variable element of “normal reach” + variable element of “super reach” ”is set to be selectable.

  That is, when the “super reach” effect mode is selected in the special pattern 2 loss variation pattern table 272e5 referred to as “probable variation / time saving”, all possible values of the variation type counter CS1 (“0 to 9”) ) Is associated with a “fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (ultra short) ”+ a fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”+ a fluctuation element of“ normal reach ”+ a fluctuation element of“ super reach ”. In other words, in the case of the “super reach” effect mode in the change effect of the second special symbol in “probable change / time saving time”, as the change pattern, “variable element of“ high speed change (ultra short) ”+ variable element of“ low speed change ” Variable element + variable element of “normal reach” + variable element of “super reach” ”is selected. As a result, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol of “probable change / time saving time” is the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol and the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol of the “normal game state”. It is configured such that a shorter time is selected as compared with, and the time efficiency of the game is set to be high (good).

  Next, in the variation pattern table 272e5 for the special figure 2 loss referred to by "probable variation / time saving time", "E4: special reach" has a total variation time of "33 seconds" of "high speed variation (ultra short). , A fluctuation element of “low-speed fluctuations” + a fluctuation element of “normal reach” + a fluctuation element of “special reach”.

  In the example shown in FIG. 462 (a), the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E4: special reach” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (ultra short) ”+ the fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”. “0-9” for “variable element + variable element of“ normal reach ”+“ variable element of special reach ””, and “variable element of“ high-speed fluctuation (ultra short) ”+ variation of“ low-speed fluctuation ” Element + “variable element of“ normal reach ”+ variable element of“ special reach ””.

  That is, when the “special reach” effect mode is selected in the special pattern 2 loss variation pattern table 272e5 referred to by “probability change / time saving”, all possible values of the variation type counter CS1 (“0 to 9”) ) Is associated with a “fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (ultra-short) ”+ a fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”+ a fluctuation element of“ normal reach ”+ a fluctuation element of“ special reach ”. In other words, in the case of the “special reach” production mode in the fluctuation production of the second special symbol in “probable change / time saving time”, the fluctuation pattern is always “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (ultra short) ”+ the fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”. Variable element + variable element of “normal reach” + variable element of “special reach” ”is selected. As a result, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol of “probable change / time saving time” is the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol and the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol of the “normal game state”. It is configured such that a shorter time is selected as compared with, and the time efficiency of the game is set to be high (good).

  In addition, in the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol in the “probable change / time saving time”, the C table 272d3 is not allocated in the number-of-reservations table 272c. Therefore, in the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol in the “probable change / time saving time”, since the “super long fluctuation” effect mode is not selected, the special figure 2 loss variation pattern table 272e5 referred to in the “probability change / time saving time” is not selected. No value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with the “super long variation” effect mode.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 462 (b), a special figure 2 big hit / small hit variation pattern table 272e6 referred to at the time of the big hit or the small hit of the second special symbol in the “probable change / time saving time” will be described. In the twenty-eighth embodiment, when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in a certain holding area of the second holding ball storage area 273e corresponding to the second special symbol is a value of a big hit or a value of a small hit, With reference to the reserved number table 272c, the stop pattern table 272d is selected based on the gaming state at that time and the number of retained balls at that time, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same reserved area is selected. An effect mode is selected based on the value and the stop pattern table 272d. Then, a group (group) to be referred to in the special pattern 2 big hit / small hit variation pattern table 272e6 is determined based on the selected effect form. In the group (group) of the special pattern 2 big hit / small hit change pattern table 272e6, the change pattern (change time) associated with the value of the change type counter CS1 stored in the same hold area is stored in the hold area. It is determined as a fluctuation pattern in the suspended fluctuation effect.

  In the special pattern 2 big hit / small hit change pattern table 272e6 referred to in the “probable change / time saving time”, “E6: Normal Reach” has “13 seconds” for the entire change time of “High Speed Change (Ultra Short)”. ”+“ Low-speed fluctuation ”+“ normal reach ”fluctuation element” and “18-second” “high-speed fluctuation (ultra-short)” fluctuation element + “low-speed fluctuation” A variation element + a variation element of “normal reach” + a variation element of “re-variation” is prepared to be selectable, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern.

  In the example shown in FIG. 462 (b), the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E6: normal reach” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (ultra short) ”+ the fluctuation of“ low-speed fluctuation ”. "0 + 2", "Fast variation (ultra short)" variation + "Slow variation" variation + "Normal reach" variation + "Re-variation" "3-9" for the "variable element".

  That is, when the “normal reach” effect mode is selected in the special pattern 2 big hit / small hit change pattern table 272e6 which is referred to at the time of performing the change effect of the second special symbol in “probable change / time saving time”, ““ high speed change ” (Ultra-short) fluctuation element + "Low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "Normal reach" fluctuation element "fluctuation pattern is 30%," High-speed fluctuation (ultra-short) "fluctuation element +" Low-speed fluctuation "fluctuation pattern The variation pattern of “element + variation element of“ normal reach ”+ variation element of“ re-variation ”” is set to be selected at a rate of 70%. As a result, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol of “probable change / time saving time” is the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol and the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol of the “normal game state”. It is configured such that a shorter time is selected as compared with, and the time efficiency of the game is set to be high (good).

  Therefore, in the “normal reach” effect mode selected at the time of the jackpot in the special map 2 of “probable change / time saving time”, the “variable element of“ high-speed fluctuation (ultra short) ”+ the fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”+“ normal reach ” The variation pattern of “variable element + variable element of“ re-variation ”” is easily selected (70% of the whole). In addition, a variation pattern of “variation factor of“ high-speed variation (ultra short) ”+ variation factor of“ low-speed variation ”+ variation factor of“ normal reach ”” is configured to be selected so that a game can be efficiently performed in a short time. While playing, it is possible to provide a game that can expect a big hit from any of the fluctuation patterns.

  Next, in the special pattern 2 big hit / small hit change pattern table 272e6 referred to in the “probability change / time saving time”, “E7: super reach” has “23 seconds” of the entire change time “high speed change ( Ultra-short) ”+“ low-speed fluctuation ”+“ normal-reach ”+“ super-reach ”fluctuation” and “28-second” “high-speed fluctuation (ultra-short) )) + "Low-speed fluctuation" + "normal reach" fluctuation + "super reach" fluctuation + "re-variation" fluctuation. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern.

  In the example shown in FIG. 462 (b), the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E7: super reach” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (ultra short) ”+ the fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”. "0-3", "fluctuation element of" high-speed fluctuation (ultra short) "+ fluctuation element of" low-speed fluctuation "+" normal reach "for fluctuation element + fluctuation element of" normal reach "+ fluctuation element of" super reach " "+ Fluctuation element of" super-reach "+" fluctuation element of "re-fluctuation" ".

  That is, when the "super reach" effect mode is selected in the special pattern 2 big hit / small hit change pattern table 272e6 which is referred to when performing the change effect of the second special symbol in "probable change / time saving time", "" high speed " The fluctuation pattern of "fluctuation element (ultra short)" + the fluctuation element of "slow fluctuation" + the fluctuation element of "normal reach" + the fluctuation element of "super reach" are 40%, and the fluctuation pattern of "high-speed fluctuation (ultra short)" The fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation element + the fluctuation element of the "low speed fluctuation" + the fluctuation element of the "normal reach" + the fluctuation element of the "super reach" + the fluctuation element of the "re- fluctuation" is set to be selected at a rate of 60%. Have been. As a result, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol of “probable change / time saving time” is the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol and the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol of the “normal game state”. It is configured such that a shorter time is selected as compared with, and the time efficiency of the game is set to be high (good).

  Therefore, in the “super reach” effect mode selected at the time of the jackpot in the special map 2 of “probable change / time saving time”, the variable element of “high speed fluctuation (ultra short)” + the variable element of “low speed fluctuation” + “normal reach” (Variable element of “super reach” + variable element of “re-variation”) ”is easily selected (60% of the whole). In addition, a variation pattern of “variation factor of“ high-speed variation (ultra-short) ”+ variation factor of“ low-speed variation ”+ variation factor of“ normal reach ”+ variation factor of“ super reach ”” is also selected. Thus, it is possible to provide a gaming ability in which a large hit can be expected from any of the fluctuation patterns while playing the game efficiently with reduced time.

  Next, in the special pattern 2 big hit / small hit change pattern table 272e6 referred to in the "probable change / time saving time", "E8: special reach" indicates that the entire change time is "high speed change (33 seconds)". "Variable element of" Ultra short) "+" Variable element of "Low speed fluctuation" + "Variable element of" Normal reach "+" Variable element of "Special reach" "" and "Variable element of" High speed (Ultra short) )) + "Low-speed fluctuation" + "normal reach" fluctuation + "special reach" fluctuation + "re-variation" fluctuation ". The value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern.

  In the example shown in FIG. 462 (b), the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E8: special reach” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (ultra-short) ”+ the fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”. “0 to 4”, “fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (ultra short) ”+ fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”+“ normal reach ”for the fluctuation element + the fluctuation element of“ normal reach ”+ the fluctuation element of“ special reach ” ”+“ Variable element of “special reach” + variable element of “re-variation” ”.

  In other words, when the special special effect effect mode is selected in the special pattern 2 big hit / small hit change pattern table 272e6, which is referred to when performing the change effect of the second special symbol in the “probable change / time saving time”, ““ high speed ” Fluctuating element of "fluctuation (ultra-short)" + fluctuating element of "slow fluctuation" + fluctuating element of "normal reach" + fluctuating element of "special reach" 50% The fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation element + the fluctuation element of the "low speed fluctuation" + the fluctuation element of the "normal reach" + the fluctuation element of the "special reach" + the fluctuation element of the "re- fluctuation" is set to be selected at a rate of 50%. Have been. As a result, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol of “probable change / time saving time” is the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol and the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol of the “normal game state”. It is configured such that a shorter time is selected as compared with, and the time efficiency of the game is set to be high (good).

  Accordingly, in the “special reach” effect mode selected at the time of the jackpot in the special map 2 of “probable change / time saving time”, the variable element of “high-speed fluctuation (ultra short)” + the fluctuation element of “low-speed fluctuation” + “normal reach” Fluctuation pattern of "variable element of" special reach "" and fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (ultra short)" + fluctuation element of "low-speed fluctuation" + fluctuation element of "normal reach" + fluctuation of "special reach" The variation pattern of “element + variation element of“ re-variation ”” is evenly selected (50% each). As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming ability in which any variation pattern more time-efficient than the “normal gaming state” can be expected to be equally successful.

  Next, in the special pattern 2 big hit / small hit change pattern table 272e6 referred to in the "probable change / time saving time", the whole change time is "3 seconds" in the "high speed change ( One variation pattern “only the variation element of“ Ultra short ”) is prepared.

  In the example shown in FIG. 462 (b), the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E9: special fluctuation” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “only the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (ultra short) ””. 0 to 9 ", and only the" high-speed fluctuation (ultra short) "fluctuation element alone is set to be selectable.

  That is, when the “special fluctuation” effect mode is selected in the special pattern 2 big hit / small hit fluctuation pattern table 272e6 which is referred to at the time of executing the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol in “probable change / time saving time”, the fluctuation type counter The same fluctuation pattern as “only high-speed fluctuation (ultra-short) fluctuation element” that can be selected in a “non-reach (short)” production mode for all possible values (“0 to 9”) of CS1 It is set so that the fluctuation pattern is selected without exception.

  Thus, when a small hit is won in the second special symbol in “probable change / time saving time”, only the variable element of “high-speed change (ultra short)” which is the most time-efficient among the selectable change patterns. Is executed without fail, it is possible to quickly execute small hits that frequently appear in the second special symbol in the “probable change / time saving time”. As a result, a right-handed game is performed in the “probable change / time saving time”, a small hit game is frequently performed in the fluctuation production of the second special symbol, and a ball is won in the small winning opening 72a, so that the player's possession ball is held. It is possible to realize a gradually increasing gaming property.

  Further, in the “probable change / time saving time”, the change time that can be selected is configured to be shorter than the “normal game state”. Therefore, in the “probable change / time saving time”, it is possible to efficiently use the fluctuation effect in a time efficient manner, and to perform a light effect and to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, the fluctuation pattern in the case of winning a small hit is not limited to the above embodiment, but can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, for example, when a small hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the “normal gaming state”, a special effect provided specially may be performed, or “probability variation” In the "state", a long variation pattern (for example, a variation pattern selected in a "special reach" effect mode) may be performed when the second special symbol is won in a small lottery by lottery.

  Returning to FIG. 454, the description will be continued. The per-figure random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by one, for example, in the range of “0 to 99” and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value (ie, “99”). When the per-figure-period random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the per-figure per-figure random number counter C4.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the random number counter C4 per figure (value = “0 to 99”), and each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 466) is performed. It is updated once and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 385).

  The value of the random number counter C4 per ordinary figure is updated, for example, periodically (in the twenty-eighth embodiment, once every timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 466)), and it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67. At the timing, it is stored in one of the first to fourth general-purpose reserved areas provided in the general-purpose reserved ball storage area 273i of the RAM 273. Then, the data is sequentially shifted to the general figure reserved ball execution area 273j in the order stored in the general figure reserved ball storage area 273i, and the value of the general figure per-random number counter C4 stored in the general figure reserved ball execution area 273j is changed. A hit determination is made for the hit.

  The value of the random number which is a hit for the normal symbol is set by the random number table 272f (refer to FIG. 463 (a)) stored in the ROM 272 of the main control device 110 for each game state. When the value of the per-figure-per-hit counter C4 stored in the area 273j matches the value of the random number which is a win set by the per-figure-per-figure random number table 272f, it is determined to be a win. The variable display time of the ordinary symbol is set with reference to the ordinary symbol change table 272g (see FIG. 463 (b)) according to the game state, and the ordinary symbol display device 83 stops after the elapse of the variable display time. A symbol “○” is displayed as a symbol (normal symbol). Thereafter, the opening time of the normal electric hand 64c is set by referring to the electric hand opening table 272h (see FIG. 463 (c)) according to the gaming state, and during the opening time, the normal electric hand 64c is opened. In the meantime, the ball can enter the second starting port 64b.

  On the other hand, if the value of the per-figure-per-counter C4 stored in the per-figure per-drawing counter area does not match the value of the winning random number set by the per-figure per-random number table 272f, it is determined that a loss has occurred. Then, the variable display time is set by referring to the general symbol change table 272g (see FIG. 463 (b)) according to the game state, and after the variable display time elapses on the ordinary symbol display device 83, the stop symbol (ordinary symbol) ), The symbol “x” is lit and displayed.

  Here, the details of the per-drawing random number table 272f will be described with reference to FIG. 463 (a). FIG. 463 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the per-drawing random number table 272f stored in the ROM 272.

  As described above, the random number per figure table 272f indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state (“probability variation state” or “time The game state of the “normal symbol low-probability state” used in the period that is not the “shortened state” (including the special symbol jackpot) and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 are more ordinary patterns than the “normal symbol low-probability state”. Is a state with a high probability of winning, a “probability variation state” or a “normal symbol high probability state” used in the case of a “time shortened state”. Then, the numbers of winning random numbers included in the “normal symbol low probability state” and the “normal symbol high probability state” are set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers different between the “normal symbol low probability state” and the “normal symbol high probability state”, the “normal symbol low probability state” and the “normal symbol high probability state” , The winning probability is changed.

  As shown in FIG. 463 (a), in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-eighth embodiment, the number of values of the random number counter C4 per ordinary figure which is a hit in the case of the “normal symbol low probability state” is 50, and the value “ “50 to 99” are defined (set) in the random number table 272f per ordinary figure. That is, the winning probability of the ordinary symbol in the “normal symbol low-probability state” (that is, the “normal gaming state” or the “super-probability changing state”) is set to be 50/100 = １ ／.

  On the other hand, the number of values of the random number counter C4 per ordinary figure which becomes a hit in the case of the “normal symbol high probability state” is 99, and the value “1 to 99” is defined (set) in the random number per ordinary figure table 272f. Have been. That is, the hit probability of the ordinary symbol in the “normal symbol high probability state” (that is, the “probability variation state” or the “time shortened state”) is set to be 99/100.

  Thus, by changing the probability of the ordinary symbol depending on the game state, it is possible to make a difference as to whether or not the ordinary electric hand 64c is easily opened (immersed). As a result, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the normal electric hand 64c is likely to be opened (submerged), so that it is possible to win a prize toward the second starting port 64b, or the normal electric hand 64c is opened ( It is possible to produce different game characteristics for each game state by making the state in which the ball hardly wins the second starting port 64b depending on the game state because it is difficult to immerse.

  In particular, in the "super probability fluctuation state", "probability fluctuation state" and "time reduction state" where right-handed games are encouraged, in the "probability fluctuation state" and "time reduction state", it becomes "normal symbol high probability state" The normal electric hand 64c is easily opened, and the ball fired by the right-handed game is configured to easily enter the second starting port 64b. In other words, the ball hit right in the “probability changing state” and the “time shortening state” is configured to easily enter the second starting port 64b and hardly enter the small winning port 72a. On the other hand, in the "super-probability changing state", the "normal pattern low probability state" is set, the ordinary electric hand 64c is hard to open, and the ball fired by the right-handed game rolls from the right end to the left end on the ordinary electric hand 64c. , And can flow down to the small winning opening 72a side. In other words, the ball struck right in the “super probability fluctuation state” is more difficult to win in the second starting port 64b than in the “probability fluctuation state” and “time reduction state”, and is easier to win in the small winning opening 72a. It is configured.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 463 (b), the details of the ordinary figure variation table 272g for determining the variable display time of the ordinary symbol will be described. FIG. 463 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the general-purpose variation table 272g stored in the ROM 272.

  Similar to the per-figure random number table 272f, the regular figure fluctuation table 272g is divided into two types, one for the "normal symbol low probability state" and the one for the "normal symbol high probability state". And, for "normal symbol low probability state" (that is, for "normal game state" and "super probability fluctuation state") and for "normal symbol high probability state" (that is, "probability fluctuation state" and "time reduction state") ) And the variable display time of the normal symbol is set differently. In this way, by changing the variable display time of the ordinary symbol in the "ordinary symbol low probability state" and the "ordinary symbol high probability state", the "ordinary symbol low probability state" and the "ordinary symbol high probability state" Normally, the time at which the symbol pass / fail result is derived is changed.

  As shown in FIG. 463 (b), in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-eighth embodiment, the variable display time of the ordinary symbol set in the case of the “ordinary symbol low probability state” is set to “5 seconds”. It is defined by the fluctuation table 272g. That is, in the "normal symbol low probability state", the time from the start of the variable display of the ordinary symbol to the derivation of the stopped symbol is set to "5 seconds" without exception.

  On the other hand, the variable display time of the ordinary symbol set in the case of the “normal symbol high probability state” is defined by the ordinary symbol variation table 272g to be “0.5 seconds”. That is, in the “normal symbol high probability state”, the time from the start of the variable display of the normal symbol to the derivation of the stopped symbol is set to be “0.5 seconds” without exception.

  Thus, by changing the variable display time of the normal symbol in accordance with the game state, it is possible to determine whether the ball rolling on the normal electric hand 64c is in a state where the variable display result is easily derived during the rolling. Can be caused. As a result, when the ball passes through the through gate 67 and the variable display of the ordinary symbol based on the passage is executed, while the ball is rolling from the right end to the left end on the upper surface of the ordinary electric hand 64c (that is, approximately (3 seconds), the variable display result is derived, and based on the derived result, the normal electric hand 64c is opened (immersed) or while the upper surface of the normal electric hand 64c is rolling from the right end to the left end. By changing the situation in which the ball rolls from the right end to the left end on the upper surface of the ordinary electric utility 64c without deriving the variable display result depending on the game state, it is possible to produce different game characteristics for each game state. .

  In particular, in the "super probability fluctuation state", "probability fluctuation state" and "time reduction state" where right-handed games are encouraged, in the "probability fluctuation state" and "time reduction state", it becomes "normal symbol high probability state" While the ball rolls on the upper surface of the normal electric hand 64c, the normal electric hand 64c is opened (submerged), and the ball fired by the right-handed game can win the second starting port 64b. It is configured as follows. In other words, the ball hit right in the “probability changing state” and the “time shortening state” is configured to easily enter the second starting port 64b and hardly enter the small winning port 72a. On the other hand, in the "super-probability changing state", the state becomes the "normal symbol low-probability state", and while the ball rolls on the upper surface of the ordinary electric hand 64c, the ordinary electric hand 64c tends to maintain the closed (projected) state. The ball fired by the right-handed game rolls from the right end to the left end on the ordinary electric hand 64c, and can flow down to the small winning opening 72a side. In other words, the ball struck right in the “super probability fluctuation state” is more difficult to win in the second starting port 64b than in the “probability fluctuation state” and “time reduction state”, and is easier to win in the small winning opening 72a. It is configured.

  Next, the electrical activity release table 272h will be described with reference to FIG. 463 (c). FIG. 463 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the electrical activity opening table 272h stored in the ROM 272. The electric winning combination opening table 272h is referred to when a normal symbol hits, and the opening (immersion) time and the number of times of opening the normal electric winning 64c are defined based on the game state at the timing when the normal symbol hit occurs.

  The electric activity opening table 272h is divided into groups based on the game state in which the symbols are usually drawn by lot. Specifically, the "normal game state" and the "super probability fluctuation state" are referred to as "normal symbol low probability state", and the "probability fluctuation state" and "time reduction state" are referred to as "normal" The opening mode (the number and time) of the ordinary electric hand 64c is changed for the “symbol high probability state”.

  As shown in FIG. 463 (c), in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-eighth embodiment, when the normal symbol is won in the “normal symbol low probability state”, that is, in the “normal game state” or the “super probability fluctuation state”, The number of times of opening of the ordinary electric hand 64c is “one time”, and the opening time is defined in the electric hand opening table 272h so as to be “0.1 second”. In other words, when a normal symbol is won in the “normal symbol low probability state”, the normal electric hand 64c is set to be opened for a total of “0.1 seconds”.

  On the other hand, the number of times of opening the normal electric hand 64c which is set when a normal symbol is won in the “normal symbol high probability state”, that is, in the “probability changing state” or the “time reduction state”, is “3 times”. The opening time is specified in the electrical opening table 272h so as to be "5 seconds". That is, when a normal symbol is won in the “normal probability high state”, the normal power 64c is configured to be opened for a total of “15 seconds”.

  In addition, the closing time (so-called interval time) between the opening of one of the ordinary electric roles 64c and the next opening is set to be "1 second". Therefore, when the normal symbol is won in the “normal symbol high probability state”, the opening and closing of the ordinary electric hand 64c are intermittently repeated for a total of “17 seconds”.

  Thus, by changing the opening mode of the ordinary electric hand 64c according to the gaming state, it is possible to cause a difference in the length of the period during which the ordinary electric hand 64c is open (immersed). As a result, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, it is easy to win the second starting port 64b due to the long period during which the normal electric hand 64c is opened (immersed), or the normal electric hand 64c is opened. Whether the situation where the ball is difficult to win the second starting port 64b due to a short (immersive) situation is made different depending on the game state, it is possible to produce different game properties for each game state.

  In particular, in the "super probability fluctuation state", "probability fluctuation state" and "time reduction state" where right-handed games are encouraged, in the "probability fluctuation state" and "time reduction state", it becomes "normal symbol high probability state" The opening period of the ordinary electric hand 64c is prolonged, and the ball fired by the right-handed game is configured to easily enter the second starting port 64b. In other words, the ball hit right in the “probability changing state” and the “time shortening state” is configured to easily enter the second starting port 64b and hardly enter the small winning port 72a. On the other hand, in the “super-probability change state”, the “normal pattern low-probability state” is set, the opening period of the normal electric hand 64c is shortened, and the ball fired by the right-handed game does not win the second starting port 64b. , And can flow down to the small winning opening 72a side. In other words, the ball struck right in the “super probability fluctuation state” is more difficult to win in the second starting port 64b than in the “probability fluctuation state” and “time reduction state”, and is easier to win in the small winning opening 72a. It is configured.

  In this manner, by providing four gaming states in which the high probability state or the low probability state of the special symbol and the high probability state or the low probability state of the ordinary symbol are provided, the game property is changed to each gaming state, A variety of games can be provided, and the interest of the games can be improved.

  The winning probability of variable display of a normal symbol and the variable display time of variable display are not limited to those in the above embodiment, but can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, any ratio may be used as long as the probability that the “probability variation state” or the like is easier to win the ordinary symbol than the “normal gaming state”, for example, the probability of winning the ordinary symbol in the “normal gaming state” May be configured to be difficult to hit with about 1/100, or the hit probability of the ordinary symbol in the “probability variation state” may be set to about 50/100 = １ ／. In addition, any time may be used as long as the variable display time is shorter in the “probability change state” than in the “normal game state”. For example, the variable display time of the ordinary symbol in the “normal game state” is “5 seconds” or more. May be a long time (for example, “30 seconds”) or a short time less than “5 seconds” (for example, “1 second”).

  Further, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the ordinary electric hand 64c are not limited to the above embodiment, and can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, as the opening time of the ordinary electric hand 64c, any opening time may be used as long as the “probability variation state” is more advantageous for the player than the “normal gaming state”, for example, “normal” The opening time of the ordinary electric hand 64c in the "game state" may be set to "0.1 seconds" or more (for example, "1 second"), or the number of times of opening may be set to "1 time" or more (for example, "3 times"). ) May be set. Further, the open time of the ordinary electric hand 64c in the “probability variation state” may be a long time of “5 seconds” or more (for example, “10 seconds”), or a short time of less than “5 seconds” (for example, “1”). Seconds "). Further, the number of times of opening the ordinary electric hand 64c in the “probability variation state” may be a large number of times “3” or more (for example, “10”), or a small number of times less than “3” (for example, “1”). Times)).

  Returning to FIG. 453, the description will be continued. The RAM 273 includes, in addition to the counter buffer 273c illustrated in FIG. 454, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 271 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 271 are stored, various flags, counters, input / output It has a work area (work area) in which values such as output (Input / Output; hereinafter abbreviated as “I / O”) are stored. The RAM 273 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 273 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is cut off (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 273. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power supply, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 273. The writing to the RAM 273 is executed when the power is turned off by the main process (see FIG. 385), and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 273 is executed in the startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 422). Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 271 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure, and when the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 271, An NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 383) as a process during a power failure is immediately executed.

  The RAM 273 further stores a first reserved ball number counter 273a, a second reserved ball number counter 273b, a first reserved ball storage area 273d, a second reserved ball storage area 273e, a first reserved ball execution area 273f, and a second reserved ball execution area. It has at least an area 273g, a general-purpose reserved ball number counter 273h, a general-purpose reserved ball storage area 273i, and a general-purpose reserved ball execution area 273j.

  The first reserved ball number counter 273a receives a ball (hereinafter, referred to as a first start) in the first start port 64a detected in a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 466) periodically executed every 4 milliseconds. Dynamic display of the first special symbol performed by the special symbol display device 39 (third symbol display device) based on the entry of a ball into the mouth 64a or the second starting port 64b is sometimes referred to as “start winning”. The counter counts up to four times the number of reserved balls (the number of times of waiting) in the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol performed in step 81).

  This first reserved ball number counter 273a is set to "0" as an initial value by an initial setting process (S616 in FIG. 384) of the RAM 273 after the power is turned on. Then, every time a start winning prize to the first starting opening 64a is detected and the number of reserved balls of the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) relating to the first special symbol increases, one is added to the maximum value "4" (FIG. 468). S5303). On the other hand, the first reserved ball number counter 273a is decremented by one every time the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) of the first special symbol is executed (see S5512 in FIG. 471).

  The second reserved ball number counter 273b is, like the first reserved ball number counter 273a, a second starting port 64b detected in a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 466) periodically executed every 4 milliseconds. Of the second special symbol dynamic display (variable effect of the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol performed by the third symbol display device 81) performed by the special symbol display device 39 based on the winning of the start. This is a counter for counting the number of balls (the number of waiting times) up to four times.

  This second reserved ball number counter 273b is set to “0” as an initial value by an initial setting process (S616 in FIG. 384) of the RAM 273 after the power is turned on, similarly to the first reserved ball number counter 273a. Then, every time the start winning prize to the second starting opening 64b is detected and the number of reserved balls of the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) relating to the second special symbol increases, one is added to the maximum value “4” (FIG. 468). S5307). On the other hand, the second reserved ball number counter 273b is decremented by one each time the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) of the second special symbol is executed (see S5542 in FIG. 473).

  The value of the first reserved ball number counter 273a (that is, the reserved ball number of the first special symbol) or the value of the second reserved ball number counter 273b (that is, the reserved ball number of the second special symbol) is the reserved ball number command. Is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 (see S5310 in FIG. 468). The reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the start winning is detected and the first reserved ball number counter 273a or the second reserved ball number counter 273b is incremented by one. Command.

  The sound ramp control device 113 can acquire the value of the number of retained balls itself in the dynamic display (variable effect) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol retained in the main control device 110 by the retained ball number command. it can. Thus, the voice lamp control device 113 can manage the number of times of suspension of dynamic display (variable effect) of each special symbol without accessing the main control device 110. In addition, every time a winning start is detected, the main controller 110 transmits a reserved ball count command to the audio ramp control device 113, thereby dynamically displaying (changing) each special symbol managed by the audio ramp control device 113. Even if the number of retained balls in the effect) deviates from the actual number of retained balls in the dynamic display (variable effect) retained in main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the number of retained balls to be received next The deviation can be corrected by the ball number command.

  Further, in the twenty-eighth embodiment, when the main control device 110 transmits the retained ball number command to the sound ramp control device 113, the retained ball number command is incremented by one to the first retained ball number counter 273a or the second retained ball number command. In addition to the value of the 2 reserved balls counter 273b, the counter buffer 273c (see FIG. 454) in association with the above-mentioned starting prize which triggered the addition of the first reserved balls number counter 273a or the second reserved balls number counter 273b. Each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 acquired from the above is also included.

  That is, when a winning start is made, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 acquired from the counter buffer 273c by the main controller 110 are stored in the holding ball. The number command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the sound ramp control device 113, a fluctuation effect based on each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 transmitted by the reserved ball number command is executed. Before the execution of the variable effect, it is determined in advance that the variable effect will be performed (whether or not a big hit will occur, and how long the variable time will change). Then, based on the result of the pre-reading, it is possible to determine the execution of various effects, and to determine the effect content and the execution timing (timing) of the “pending change notice”.

  In addition, you may comprise so that the command of holding | maintenance ball number command which shows the holding | maintenance ball number of a fluctuation effect, and the command which shows the value of the big hit random number counter C1 etc. may be transmitted separately. As a command indicating a value of the jackpot random number counter C1 or the like different from the reserved ball number command, a reserved ball number command is generated at the timing of a ball entering the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b, and the command is generated. A command similar to a variation pattern command and a stop type command based on entering a ball (a pre-variation pattern command and a pre-stop type command) may be generated and transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In this case, a program for generating the pre-variation pattern command and the pre-stop type command can be easily created by diverting the program of the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command.

  As described above, the first reserved ball storage area 273d stores the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 acquired from the counter buffer 273c in accordance with the detection of the start winning at the first opening 64a. And a memory for storing each value of the variation type counter CS1. When the MPU 271 detects that the ball has won (starts winning) the first starting port 64a during the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 466), the MPU 271 reads the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 from the counter buffer 273c. It is acquired and stored in the first reserved ball storage area 273d. The first holding ball storage area 273d stores four holdings so that data (each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) corresponding to one starting winning of the first special symbol can be stored (held) up to four times. Area (first reserved first to fourth areas) (see FIG. 454).

  As described above, the second reserved ball storage area 273e stores the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 acquired from the counter buffer 273c in accordance with the detection of the start winning at the second opening 64b. And a memory for storing each value of the variation type counter CS1. When the MPU 271 detects that the ball has won (starts winning) the second starting port 64b during the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 466), the MPU 271 outputs the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 from the counter buffer 273c. It is acquired and stored in the second reserved ball storage area 273e. The second holding ball storage area 273e stores four holdings so that data (each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) corresponding to one starting winning of the second special symbol can be stored (held) up to four times. Area (second reserved first to fourth areas) (see FIG. 454).

  As described above, the first reserved ball execution area 273f starts the execution, or performs the big hit lottery or the small hit lottery of the first special symbol being executed, the movement of the special symbol display device 39 and the third symbol display device 81. This is a memory for storing data (each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) to be referred to in processing such as setting of a target display and a variation effect.

  When the MPU 271 detects that it is the execution start timing of the fluctuating effect of the first special symbol, the MPU 271 performs a large hit lottery or a small hit lottery of the first special symbol, dynamically displays the special symbol display device 39 and the third symbol display device 81, and In order to execute the processing such as the setting of the variable effect, the oldest start of the data (each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) corresponding to the start winning stored in the first reserved ball storage area 273d described above. The data corresponding to the winning is shifted to the first reserved ball execution area 273f. Note that the shift in the twenty-eighth embodiment indicates that data stored in one area is moved to another area.

  As described above, the second reserved ball execution area 273g starts the execution, or the big special lottery or the small special lottery of the second special symbol being executed, and the movement of the special symbol display device 39 and the third symbol display device 81. This is a memory for storing data (each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) to be referred to in processing such as setting of a target display and a variation effect.

  When the MPU 271 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variation effect of the second special symbol, the large special lottery and the small special lottery of the second special symbol, the dynamic display of the special symbol display device 39 and the third symbol display device 81 and In order to execute the processing such as the setting of the fluctuation effect, of the data (each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) corresponding to the starting prize stored in the above-mentioned second reserved ball storage area 273e, The data corresponding to one start winning is shifted to the second reserved ball execution area 273g.

  Here, referring to FIG. 454 again, the details of the first reserved ball storage area 273d, the second reserved ball storage area 273e, the first reserved ball execution area 273f, and the second reserved ball execution area 273g will be described. The first reserved ball storage area 273d, the second reserved ball storage area 273e, the first reserved ball execution area 273f, and the second reserved ball execution area 273g are a jackpot lottery or a small jackpot lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It is used by the MPU 271 of the main control device 110 to perform dynamic display and setting of a fluctuation effect of the special symbol display device 39 and the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the jackpot lottery and the small jackpot lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the dynamic display and the variable effect setting of the special symbol display device 39 and the third symbol display device 81 are used for the big hit lottery. Jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2 used to determine the jackpot type, a stop pattern selection counter C3 used to determine the effect mode of the variation effect, and a variation type counter CS1 used to determine the variation pattern. Used. The first reserved ball storage area 273d and the first reserved ball execution area 273f store the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer 273c by the MPU 271 when the ball has won the first starting port 64a (starting winning). Are stored, and the second reserved ball storage area 273e and the second reserved ball execution area 273g are acquired from the counter buffer 273c by the MPU 271 when the ball has won (started winning) the second starting port 64b. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored.

  The first reserved ball storage area 273d is composed of four reserved areas (first reserved first to fourth areas). Each of the four reserved areas (first reserved first to fourth areas) has a jackpot random number counter storage area 273d1 for storing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and a jackpot type counter storage area for storing the value of the jackpot type counter C2. 273d2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 273d3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a fluctuation type counter storage area 273d4 for storing the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

  The second reserved ball storage area 273e is composed of four reserved areas (second reserved first to fourth areas), like the first reserved ball storage area 273d. Each of the four reserved areas (second reserved first to fourth areas), like the first reserved ball storage area 273d, has a jackpot random number counter storage area 273e1 for storing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and a jackpot type counter C2. , A stop pattern selection counter storage area 273e3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a fluctuation type counter storage area 273e4 for storing the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Have been.

  In the twenty-eighth embodiment, the jackpot random number counter storage areas 273d1 and 273e1, the jackpot type counter storage areas 273d2 and 273e2, the stop pattern selection counter storage areas 273d3 and 273e3, and the fluctuation type counter storage areas 273d4 and 273e4 are one. Although they are collectively provided in the two reserved ball storage areas 273d and 273e, a plurality of reserved ball storage areas may be provided for each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1.

  As described above, in the first reserved ball storage area 273d, data (each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) acquired at the time when the ball wins (starts winning) in the first starting port 64a is stored up to four times. In this case, data is sequentially stored in the vacant areas of the four reserved areas (first reserved first to fourth areas) in ascending order of area numbers (first to fourth). It is memorized. In other words, the data corresponding to the start winning in the first starting port 64a that is older in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the first reserved first area is stored in the first starting port 64a that is the oldest in time. Will be stored.

  Further, the first reserved ball execution area 273f is composed of only one area. In the first reserved ball execution area 273f, as in the first reserved ball storage area 273d, a jackpot random number counter storage area 273f1 for storing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and a jackpot type for storing the value of the jackpot type counter C2. A counter storage area 273f2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 273f3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a fluctuation type counter storage area 273f4 for storing the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 are provided.

  When the MPU 271 determines that the execution start timing of the fluctuating effect of the first special symbol has come, the MPU 271 determines whether or not the first special symbol has any data stored in the second reserved ball storage area 273e and the second reserved ball execution area 273g. When data is stored in the first reserved first area of the reserved ball storage area 273d, the data stored in the first reserved first area is replaced with each area 273f1 of the first reserved ball execution area 273f. 273f4.

  Then, the data shifted to the first reserved ball execution area 273f is referred to in the special figure 1 change start process (see FIG. 471), and the big hit lottery and the small hit lottery are performed based on the reference data and the game state. , The change pattern and the stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. In the special symbol display device 39, under the control of the main control device 110, dynamic display is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type.

  Further, the determined fluctuation pattern and the stop type are notified to the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command and a special figure 1 stop type command. Then, under the control of the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs the following based on the fluctuation pattern and the stop type notified by the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command and the special figure 1 stop type command. A fluctuation effect of the first special symbol is performed.

  Details of the data shift will be described. When determining that the execution start timing of the variation effect of the first special symbol has come, the MPU 271 determines whether or not data is stored in the first reserved first area of the first reserved ball storage area 273d. As a result of the determination, if data is stored in the first reserved first area, the random number value stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 273d1 of the first reserved first area is stored in the jackpot random number counter of the first reserved ball execution area 273f. Shift to area 273f1. Similarly, the random number value of the jackpot type counter storage area 273d2 of the first hold first area is shifted to the jackpot type counter storage area 273f2, and the random number value of the stop pattern selection counter storage area 273d3 of the first hold first area is It shifts to the stop pattern selection counter storage area 273f3, and shifts the random number value of the fluctuation type counter storage area 273d4 of the first reserved first area to the fluctuation type counter storage area 273f4.

  When the data is shifted to the first reserved ball execution area 273f, the first reserved first area becomes empty, and is stored in each area (second to fourth) of the first reserved ball storage area 273d. A shift process is performed to pack the (reserved) data into areas (areas 1 to 3) having an area number smaller by one. In the twenty-eighth embodiment, in the first reserved ball storage area 273d, data is shifted only in the first reserved area (first to fourth) in which data is stored (reserved).

  Here, the data shift performed on each of the reserved areas in the first reserved ball storage area 273d will be described. For example, the value of the first reserved ball number counter 273a when the start of the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol is determined is “4”, and all the areas (first to fourth) of the first reserved ball storage area 273d are provided. ) Is assumed to store data. In this state, the data in the first reserved first area is shifted to the first reserved ball execution area 273f, and when the first reserved first area becomes empty, the MPU 271 causes other areas (second to fourth). Are shifted to the area having the smaller area number (first to third). That is, the data of the first reserved second area is shifted to the first reserved first area, the data of the first reserved third area is shifted to the first reserved second area, and the data of the first reserved fourth area is shifted. To the first reserved third area.

  In addition, for example, if the value of the first reserved ball number counter 273a at the time when the start of the variation effect of the first special symbol is determined is “2”, the MPU 271 stores only the data of the first reserved second area. , The data is shifted to the first reserved first area, and the data shift is completed. As described above, in the twenty-eighth embodiment, since the data shift processing is not performed on the first reserved area (third to fourth) in which data is not stored (reserved), the number of data shifts is reduced. And the control burden can be reduced.

  Note that, regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data of the first reserved area (second to fourth) may be shifted to an area having an area number smaller by one. In this case, it is not necessary to determine whether or not data is stored (held) in the first holding area (second to fourth), thereby facilitating creation of a program.

  Next, in the second reserved ball storage area 273e, data (each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) acquired at the timing when the ball wins (starts winning) in the second starting port 64b is up to four times. In this case, data is stored in the vacant areas of the four reserved areas (second reserved first to fourth areas) in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth). Is done. In other words, the data corresponding to the start winning in the second starting port 64b that is earlier in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the oldest second starting port 64b is stored in the second reserved first area. Will be stored.

  The second reserved ball execution area 273g is composed of only one area. In the second reserved ball execution area 273g, as in the second reserved ball storage area 273e, a jackpot random number counter storage area 273g1 for storing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and a jackpot type for storing the value of the jackpot type counter C2. A counter storage area 273g2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 273g3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a fluctuation type counter storage area 273g4 for storing the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 are provided.

  When the MPU 271 determines that the execution start timing of the variation effect of the second special symbol has come, regardless of the presence or absence of data stored in the first reserved ball storage area 273d and the first reserved ball execution area 273f, the second When data is stored in the second reserved first area of the reserved ball storage area 273e, the data stored in the second reserved first area is transferred to each area 273g1 of the second reserved ball execution area 273g. 273g4.

  Then, the data shifted to the second reserved ball execution area 273g is referred to in the special figure 2 change start process (see FIG. 473), and the big hit lottery and the small hit lottery are performed based on the reference data and the game state. , The change pattern and the stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. In the special symbol display device 39, under the control of the main control device 110, dynamic display is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type.

  Further, the determined variation pattern and the stop type are notified to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the variation pattern command and the stop type command. Then, under the control of the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variation effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

  Details of the data shift will be described. When determining that the execution start timing of the variation effect of the second special symbol has come, the MPU 271 determines whether data is stored in the second reserved first area of the second reserved ball storage area 273e. As a result of the determination, if data is stored in the second reserved first area, the random number value of the jackpot random number counter storage area 273e1 of the second reserved first area is stored in the jackpot random number counter of the second reserved ball execution area 273g. Shift to area 273e1. Similarly, the random number value of the jackpot type counter storage area 273e2 of the second hold first area is shifted to the jackpot type counter storage area 273g2, and the random number value of the stop pattern selection counter storage area 273e3 of the second hold first area is It shifts to the stop pattern selection counter storage area 273g3, and shifts the random number value of the fluctuation type counter storage area 273e4 of the second reserved first area to the fluctuation type counter storage area 273g4.

  When the data is shifted to the second reserved ball execution area 273g, the second reserved first area becomes empty, and is stored in each area (second to fourth) of the second reserved ball storage area 273e. A shift process is performed to pack the (reserved) data into areas (areas 1 to 3) having an area number smaller by one. In the twenty-eighth embodiment, data is shifted only in the second reserved areas (first to fourth) in which data is stored (reserved) in the second reserved sphere storage area 273e.

  Here, the data shift performed on each of the reserved areas in the second reserved ball storage area 273e will be described. For example, the value of the second reserved ball number counter 273b at the time when the start of the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol is determined is “4”, and all the areas of the second reserved ball storage area 273e (first to fourth) ) Is assumed to store data. In this state, the data in the second reserved first area is shifted to the second reserved ball execution area 273g, and when the second reserved first area is vacant, the MPU 271 causes other areas (second to fourth). Are shifted to the area having the smaller area number (first to third). That is, the data of the second reserved second area is shifted to the second reserved first area, the data of the second reserved third area is shifted to the second reserved second area, and the data of the second reserved fourth area is shifted. To the second reserved third area.

  Further, for example, if the value of the second reserved ball number counter 273b at the time when the start of the variation effect of the second special symbol is determined is “2”, the MPU 271 only stores the data of the second reserved second area. , The data is shifted to the second reserved first area, and the data shift is completed. As described above, in the twenty-eighth embodiment, data shift processing is not performed on the second reserved area (third to fourth) in which data is not stored (reserved), so that the number of data shifts is reduced. And the control burden can be reduced.

  In addition, regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data of the second reserved area (second to fourth) may be shifted to an area having an area number smaller by one. In this case, it is not necessary to determine whether or not data is stored (held) in the second holding area (second to fourth), so that the program can be easily created.

  In this way, the data on the dynamic display of the first special symbol to be executed and the data on the dynamic display of the second special symbol to be executed are separately stored, and the dynamic display is performed based on each data. Is performed, the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol can be simultaneously executed.

  Returning to FIG. 453, the description will be continued. The normal figure holding ball number counter 273h displays a normal symbol based on the passage of the ball to the through gate 67 detected in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 466) periodically executed every 4 milliseconds. This is a counter for counting up to four times the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of variable display of ordinary symbols performed by the device 83.

  As in the case of the reserved ball number counters 273a and 273b, the ordinary figure reserved ball number counter 273h is set to "0" as an initial value by an initial setting process (see S616 in FIG. 384) of the RAM 273 after the power is turned on. Then, every time the passage of a ball to the through gate 67 is detected and the number of balls for variable display relating to the ordinary symbol increases, one is added to the maximum value "4" (see S5405 in FIG. 469). On the other hand, the normal figure reserved ball number counter 273h is decremented by one every time the normal symbol variable display is executed (see S5595 in FIG. 476).

  The general figure holding ball storage area 273i is a memory for storing the general figure counter C4 acquired from the counter buffer 273c in accordance with the detection of the passage of the ball to the through gate 67. When the MPU 271 detects that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 during the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 466), the MPU 271 obtains the value of the counter C4 per general figure from the counter buffer 273c and stores the general figure holding ball. It is stored in area 273i. The general figure holding ball storage area 273i has four holding areas (normal figure) so that the data (value of the counter C4 per general figure) corresponding to one holding ball of a normal symbol can be stored (held) up to four times. (Reserved first to fourth areas) (see FIG. 454).

  The general figure holding sphere execution area 273j is a memory for starting execution or storing data (the value of the general figure random number counter C4) to be referred to in the process of executing the normal symbol winning lottery or variable display. It is.

  When the MPU 271 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variable display of the normal symbol, the MPU 271 executes the process of holding the normal symbol holding ball described above in order to execute a process such as a lottery of the normal symbol and a setting of the variable display of the normal symbol display device 83. One of the data stored in the storage area 273i (the value of the random number counter C4 per ordinary figure) is shifted to the ordinary figure holding sphere execution area 273j. Note that the shift in the twenty-eighth embodiment indicates that data stored in one area is moved to another area.

  Here, the details of the general-purpose reserved ball storage area 273i and the general-purpose reserved ball execution area 273j will be described with reference to FIG. 454 again. The general figure holding ball storage area 273i and the general figure holding ball execution area 273j are used by the MPU 271 of the main control device 110 to perform a process such as a lottery of a normal symbol and a setting of variable display of the normal symbol display device 83. You.

  As described above, the ordinary symbol random number counter C4 used for the ordinary symbol hit lottery is used for setting the normal symbol hit lottery and the variable display of the ordinary symbol display device 83. The general-purpose-reserved-sphere storing area 273i stores the value of the general-purpose random number counter C4 obtained from the counter buffer 273c by the MPU 271 when the ball passes through the through gate 67.

  The general-purpose reserved ball storage area 273i is composed of four reserved areas (general-purpose reserved first to fourth areas). Each of the four reserved areas (the first to fourth areas of the ordinary drawing reservation) is provided with an ordinary random number counter storage area (not shown) for storing the value of the ordinary figure random number counter C4.

  The data (value of the random number counter C4 per normal figure) obtained at the timing when the ball passes through the through gate 67 is stored up to four times in the normal figure reserved sphere storage area 273i. Data is stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth) in the vacant areas of the reservation area (normal drawing first to fourth areas). In other words, the data corresponding to the passage of the ball to the through gate 67 that is older in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the first area of the ordinary figure reservation stores the data of the ball to the through gate 67 that is the oldest in time. Data corresponding to the passage will be stored.

  On the other hand, the ordinary figure reserved ball execution area 273j is composed of only one area. In the general-purpose reserved ball execution area 273j, a general-purpose random number counter storage area (not shown) for storing the value of the general-purpose random number counter C4 is provided similarly to the general-purpose reserved ball storage area 273i. .

  When the MPU 271 determines that the execution timing of the variable display of the normal symbol has come, the MPU 271 stores the data stored in the first general-purpose reserved ball storage area 273i in the general-purpose reserved ball execution area 273j. shift.

  Then, the data shifted to the normal figure holding ball execution area 273j is referred to in the general figure changing process (see FIG. 476), and based on the reference data and the game state, a winning lottery is performed and the contents of the variable display are performed. To determine. In the ordinary symbol display device 83, variable display is performed based on the determined content under the control of the main control device 110.

  Details of the data shift will be described. When the MPU 271 determines that the execution start timing of the variable display of the ordinary symbol has come, the random number value in the random number counter storage area (not shown) in the general figure holding first area of the general figure holding ball storage area 273i is stored. Is shifted to a per-figure-per-figure-per-random-counter storage area (not shown) of the general figure holding sphere execution area 273j.

  When the shift of the data to the general-purpose reserved ball execution area 273j is completed, the first general-purpose reserved ball storage area 273i is stored in each area (second to fourth) of the general-purpose reserved ball storage area 273i because the first general-purpose reserved ball storage area becomes empty. A shift process is performed to pack the (held) data into areas (first to third) with the area number smaller by one. In the twenty-eighth embodiment, data is shifted only in the general-purpose reserved area (first to fourth) in which the data is stored (reserved) in the general-purpose reserved ball storage area 273i.

  Here, a description will be given of a data shift performed on each reserved area in the ordinary figure reserved ball storage area 273i. For example, when the start of variable display of the ordinary symbol is determined, the value of the general figure reserved ball number counter 273h is “4”, and the general figure reserved ball storage area 273i is stored in all areas (first to fourth). It is assumed that data is stored. In this state, when the data of the first general-purpose reserved area is shifted to the general-purpose first-use reserved ball execution area 273j, and the first general-purpose reserved area becomes empty, the MPU 271 sets the other areas (second to fourth). Are shifted to the area having the smaller area number (first to third). That is, the data of the second area of the general figure reservation is shifted to the first area of the general figure reservation, the data of the third area of the general figure reservation is shifted to the second area of the general figure reservation, and the data of the fourth area of the general figure reservation is shifted. Is shifted to the third area of the regular drawing reservation.

  Further, for example, if the value of the general figure reserved ball number counter 273h at the time of determining the start of the variable display of the ordinary symbol is “2”, the MPU 271 transmits only the data of the general figure reserved second area, The data is shifted to the first area shown in FIG. As described above, in the twenty-eighth embodiment, the data shift processing is not performed for the general-purpose reserved area (third to fourth) in which data is not stored (reserved), so that the number of data shifts is reduced. And the control burden can be reduced.

  Note that, regardless of the presence / absence of data, each data in the general-purpose reserved area (second to fourth) may be shifted to an area having an area number smaller by one. In this case, it is not necessary to determine whether or not data is stored (held) in the ordinary drawing holding area (second to fourth), so that the program can be easily created.

  Returning to FIG. 453, the description will be continued. As described above, the ROM 272 of the main control device 110 refers to the ROM 272 of the first special symbol or the second special symbol for controlling the opening of the special winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 when a jackpot is won in the lottery game. The big hit opening table 272i to be played and the small size referred to for controlling the opening of the small winning opening 72a of the second variable winning device 72 when a small hit is won in the lottery game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The hit release table 272j is stored.

  Here, the big hit opening table 272i and the small hit opening table 272j will be described with reference to FIG. 464. FIG. 464 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the jackpot opening table 272i stored in the ROM 272, and FIG. 464 (b) is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of the small jackpot opening table 272j stored in the ROM 272. FIG. The jackpot opening table 272i is referred to at the time of the jackpot of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and based on the jackpot type that generated the jackpot of each special symbol, the opening mode (number of times, maximum opening time, maximum Winning prize) is specified. The small hit opening table 272j is referred to at the time of the small hit of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and regardless of the game state in which the small hit of each special symbol occurs, the opening mode (number of times) of the small winning opening 72a. , Maximum opening time, maximum winning number).

  First, the jackpot opening table 272i is classified based on the jackpot type that has won the jackpot. Specifically, for the “probability fluctuation A” referred to when the jackpot type “probability variation A” is won, and for the “probability variation B” referenced when the jackpot type “probability variation B” is won. The opening mode of the special winning opening 65a is changed for "time reduction" which is referred to when the jackpot type "time reduction" is won.

  As shown in FIG. 464 (a), in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-eighth embodiment, the number of times the large winning opening 65a is opened when the jackpot type “probability variation A” is won is “16 times”. The maximum opening time for opening one of the special winning openings 65a is "30 seconds" and the maximum winning number is "10", and the prize balls paid out based on the winning of the ball into the special winning opening 65a. The number is defined in the jackpot opening table 272i so as to be “15”.

  In addition, the shift gaming state after the end of the jackpot according to the jackpot type “probability change A” is shifted to the “super probability change state” of “special figure: high probability, ordinary figure: low probability”. Stipulated in

  Next, the number of times the special winning opening 65a is opened when the jackpot type "probability variation B" is won is "6 times", and the maximum opening time in opening one of the special winning openings 65a is "30 seconds". The maximum winning number is "10", and the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the ball into the special winning opening 65a is defined by the jackpot opening table 272i so as to be "15". I have.

  In addition, in the jackpot opening table 272i, it is determined that the transition gaming state after the end of the jackpot according to the jackpot type “probability variation B” transitions to the “probability variation state” of “special figure: high probability, ordinary figure: high probability”. Stipulated.

  Next, the number of times the special winning opening 65a is opened when the jackpot type "time reduction" is won is "6 times", and the maximum opening time in opening one of the special winning openings 65a is "30 seconds". In addition, the maximum winning number is “10”, and the number of award balls paid out based on the winning of the ball into the special winning opening 65a is defined by the jackpot opening table 272i so as to be “15”. .

  The jackpot opening table 272i specifies that the game state after the end of the jackpot due to the jackpot type “time reduction” shifts to the “time reduction state” of “special figure: low probability, ordinary figure: high probability”. Have been.

  As a result, the game value (total number of prize balls that can be paid out) is given to the player for each of the winning jackpot types. Can be caused. In addition, by changing the game state to be shifted to after the big hit game for each of the big hit types, it is possible to cause a difference in the playability after the big hit based on the big hit type. As a result, in the lottery game of the special symbol, it is possible to produce a game property of determining whether to win any of the jackpot types, and to improve the interest of the game.

  The mode of opening the special winning opening 65a based on the jackpot type (the number of times, the maximum opening time, the maximum winning number, the number of winning prizes, and the transition game state) is not limited to the above embodiment, and can be changed as appropriate. is there. Specifically, the number of releases may be the same for each jackpot type, the maximum opening time may be changed for each jackpot type, or the maximum winning number may be changed. May be. In addition, it is not necessary to shift to a separate gaming state for each jackpot type, and a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of jackpot types are shifted to a common gaming state.

  In addition, during a jackpot game due to “probability variation A”, “probability variation B”, and “time reduction”, the system is configured to temporarily transition to the “normal gaming state”. With such a configuration, during each big hit game, it is possible to prevent a game value from being given (for example, a long opening of the ordinary electric utility 64c) other than by opening the special winning opening 65a. The calculation of the payout rate at the time of design of the game specification becomes easy, and the design man-hour of the game specification can be reduced.

  Further, in one round of the big hit game (or the small hit game), the opening and closing of the big winning port 65a (or the small winning port 72a) may be performed a plurality of times. Specifically, for example, in one round, after the opening of the special winning opening 65a is started, the opening is temporarily closed for a predetermined number of seconds (for example, “5 seconds”) shorter than the maximum opening time, and the predetermined closing time ( For example, after one second), the special winning opening 65a may be opened again, and may be closed again after the maximum opening time elapses or when the maximum winning number is won. With such a configuration, variations of the game in the big hit game (or the small hit game) can be abundant, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 464 (b), in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-eighth embodiment, there is one type of opening mode of the small winning opening 72a set when a small hit is won. The number of times the small winning opening 72a is opened is "1 time", the maximum opening time in opening one of the small winning openings 72a is "1.8 seconds", and the maximum winning number is "1". The number of award balls to be paid out based on the winning of a ball into the small winning opening 72a is defined in the small hit opening table 272j so as to be "10". As a result, when a small hit is won, a predetermined number of prize balls can be obtained, although a game value as high as a big hit is not obtained.

  Further, after the end of the small hit, the gaming state does not shift, and is defined in the small hit opening table 272j so that the gaming state before the small hit is maintained. Specifically, for example, when a small hit is won in the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the “normal gaming state”, after the small hit game ends (including the execution of the small hit game), It is defined to be in the “normal game state”. In addition, in the case of winning a small hit with the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the “super probability fluctuation state”, after the end of the small hit game (including the execution of the small hit game), the “super probability fluctuation state” is returned again. State ". Furthermore, in the case of winning the small hit with the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the “probability changing state”, after the small hitting game is completed (including during the execution of the small hitting game), the “probability changing state” is returned again. It is stipulated that In the case where the first special symbol or the second special symbol is won in the "small hitting state" in the "time shortening state", after the small hitting game ends (including the execution of the small hitting game), the "time shortening state" is returned again. It is stipulated that

  The mode of opening the small winning opening 72a based on the small hit (the number of times, the maximum opening time, the maximum winning number, the number of winning balls, or the transition game state) is not limited to the above embodiment, and can be changed as appropriate. is there. More specifically, the number of times of opening in the small hitting game may be configured to be performed a plurality of times, the maximum opening time may be changed, or the maximum winning number may be changed. May be.

  In addition, as a mode of opening the small winning opening 72a based on the small hit, as the maximum opening time (for example, “1.8 seconds”) based on the small winning game, the total accumulated seconds of the opening time of the small winning opening 72a is the maximum opening time. The small winning opening 72a may be opened until the time is reached. Specifically, the opening time of one small winning opening 72a is set to “0.2 seconds”, and the small winning opening 72a is repeatedly opened and closed “9 times” in one small hitting game, and the small winning The small winning opening 72a is configured to be opened such that the total opening time of the small winning opening 72a based on the game is equal to the maximum opening time. With such a configuration, it is possible to create a playability of whether or not a ball can be won while the small winning opening 72a is open in the small hit game, and to enhance the interest of the game.

  Furthermore, while the small hit game and the small hit game are configured so that the pre-small gaming state is maintained, the small hit game or after the small hit game is configured to transition from the pre-small gaming state. You may. Specifically, for example, during the small hitting game, the state transitions to the “normal gaming state” regardless of the gaming state before the small hitting game, and thereafter, the gaming state before the small hitting (for example, “pre If the "probability change state", it may be configured to shift to the "super probability change state" even after the small hit game. In addition, a gaming state having a high game value from the gaming state before the small hitting game (for example, “probability variation state” to “super probability variation state”, “time reduction state” to “probability variation state”, or “normal gaming state” ”To“ time reduction state ”). Furthermore, a gaming state having a lower game value from the gaming state before the small hitting game (for example, “probability fluctuation state” to “probability fluctuation state”, “probability fluctuation state” to “time reduction state”, or “time reduction state” ) To a “normal game state” or the like. With such a configuration, it is possible to create a game property in which a game state is shifted upon a small hit, to enhance a variety of games, and to enhance the interest of the game.

  Returning to FIG. 453, the description will be continued. An input / output port 275 is connected to the MPU 271 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 274 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 275 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a special symbol display device 39, an ordinary symbol display device 83, an ordinary symbol holding lamp 84, and a front side with the lower side of the open / close plate of the special winning opening 65a as an axis. A large winning opening solenoid for opening and closing the small winning opening 72a, a small winning opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing of the small winning opening 72a to the front side around the lower side of the opening and closing plate, and a normal electric wire for opening and driving the ordinary electric hand 64c. A solenoid 209 including a role solenoid is connected, and the MPU 271 transmits various commands and control signals to these via an input / output port 275.

  The input / output port 275 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. The MPU 201 outputs from the various switches 208. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  Further, the input / output port 275 includes a base display device control circuit 402 for controlling the base display device 401, a setting key 501, an error display button 502, a setting change switch 505, and an external output terminal plate 700. It is connected.

  The external output terminal plate 700 is provided above a payout unit 93 (see FIG. 3) provided on the right side of the back view of the pachinko machine 10, and connects the pachinko machine 10 and a hall computer 600 (see FIG. 428) of a game hall. It is electrically connected. This external output terminal plate 700 is used to display game information (for example, jackpot information, small hit information, game state information (“normal game state”, “super probability fluctuation state”, “probability fluctuation state” "Time reduction state" or "big hit game"), winning information to the first opening 64a, winning information to the second opening 64b, winning information to the big winning opening 65a, small winning opening 72a. And a plurality of output terminals (not shown) for outputting prize information to the hall computer 600. By connecting the output terminals to the hall computer 600, the hall computer 600 allows the player to enter a game hall. It is possible to grasp the game state and the like of the plurality of pachinko machines 10 provided.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-eighth embodiment, the game result (role) of the pachinko machine 10 is output to the hall computer 600 (see FIG. 428) by the external output terminal plate 700, and the output result, that is, the number of jackpots or small hits The number of hits is displayed on a data lamp (not shown) provided in each pachinko machine 10. A player playing a game may check the data lamp provided on the pachinko machine 10 before playing the game. Then, based on the display contents of the data lamp, the setting contents of the pachinko machine 10 are guessed by referring to the game history of the day or the past of the pachinko machine 10 to play a game from now, and the pachinko machine 10 to play the game is selected. In this case, if the setting content is a game result that is easy to be discriminated (observed), the player selects the pachinko machine 10 with good setting content (for example, the setting value “6”) and bad setting content (for example, Setting value "1") By avoiding the game of the pachinko machine 10, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 may be reduced, and the profit of the game hall may be reduced.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-eighth embodiment, at least one role (that is, a small “probability variation state”) that is a frequently appearing role in a specific game state and can be clearly (largely) displayed on the data lamp. The configuration is such that a difference is not provided for each set value in a winning combination, and a setting difference is provided in a combination that is least likely to appear (ie, a big hit in a “probability variation state” or the like). With this configuration, it is difficult to cause a role having a setting difference and a low appearance ratio to appear, and it is difficult to grasp the setting difference of the role unless the number of game trials is increased. be able to. Therefore, when the number of trials of the game is small, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine the setting difference of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, it is difficult for the player to determine the setting difference of the pachinko machine 10, and the pachinko machine 10 with a low setting can also be operated, thereby suppressing a decrease in the operation of each pachinko machine 10 installed in the game hall. Can be.

  Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 271 in the main control device 110 according to the twenty-eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 271 is roughly divided into a start-up process (see FIG. 422) started when the power is turned on, a setting change process (see FIG. 465) executed in the start-up process, and the start-up process. Main processing (see FIG. 385) executed later, timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 466) started periodically (in the twenty-eighth embodiment, at a period of 4 milliseconds), and generation of a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal There is an NMI interrupt process activated by input (see FIG. 383). Here, for convenience of explanation, the setting change process (see FIG. 465) will be described first, and then the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 466) will be described. Note that the start-up process (see FIG. 422), the main process (see FIG. 385), and the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 383) are the same processes as the above-described embodiments (the sixteenth embodiment and the twenty-second embodiment). Therefore, the description is omitted.

  First, the details of the setting change process (S4005) of the twenty-eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 465 is a flowchart showing the setting change process (S4005) of the twenty-eighth embodiment. The setting change process (S4005) of the twenty-eighth embodiment is a process executed when the start-up mode is the setting change mode, and accepts a change in the probability set value from a person related to the hall or the like, and responds to the probability. The jackpot random number table 272a is set.

  Regarding the setting change processing (S4005) of the twenty-eighth embodiment, the difference from the setting change processing of the twenty-second embodiment is that, after the set values are determined (S4107), the set values correspond to the determined (set) values. That is, the process (S4121) of setting the jackpot random number table 272a2 is performed.

  In the setting change process (S4005) of the twenty-eighth embodiment, in S4101 to S4111, the setting value change (update) process is performed based on the detection result of the RAM erase switch 122 and the setting change switch 505, and the change (update) is performed. The set value is determined as a probability set value to be used in a future game (S4107). Then, a jackpot random number table 272a corresponding to the probability setting value is set (S4121), and in the subsequent lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the winning / non-selection lottery is performed with reference to the jackpot random number table 272a. .

  As described above, when the pachinko machine 10 starts up, the jackpot random number table 272a is set based on the probability setting value, so that the jackpot random number table 272a cannot be changed unless the start-up process is executed. it can. Since the power of the pachinko machine 10 can be normally turned on and off only by persons involved in the halls, it is possible to prevent the player from altering the jackpot random number table 272a illegally.

  In addition, the jackpot random number table 272a is set based on the probability setting value only when the pachinko machine 10 is started up, and the jackpot random number table 272a is not set at the time of a normal game. It is not necessary to perform the process of setting the jackpot random number table 272a at the time of the game in which the game is performed, and the processing load at the time of executing the game can be reduced.

  Next, a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 271 in the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the twenty-eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 466 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing of the twenty-eighth embodiment.

  In this timer interrupt process, first, an external output process is executed (S5101). In the timer interruption process and the main process (see FIG. 385), a command or a signal to be transmitted to the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the hall computer 600, or the like is generated based on various processes, and the command is generated. When the signal is generated, the signal is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 273, and when a signal is generated, the signal is output to a device corresponding to the signal (for example, the external output terminal plate 700). In the external output process of S5101, the output data such as the command stored in the command transmission ring buffer is transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side, and the above signal is output to various devices.

  Here, the external output process (S5101) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 467 is a flowchart showing this external output processing (S5101).

  In this external output processing (S5101), first, it is determined whether or not there is a command to be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 (S5201). The command to be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 is, for example, a reserved ball number command set in a start winning process (see FIG. 468) described later or a special figure 1 change start process (see FIG. 471) described later. Special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command and special figure 1 stop type command, special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command and special figure 2 stop type command set in a special figure 2 change process (see FIG. 472) described later, special figure described later Special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command and special figure 2 stop type command set in 2 fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 473), special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command set in special figure 1 change processing (see FIG. 474) described later, and Special figure 1 stop type command, special figure 1 confirmation command and / or special figure 2 confirmation command set in the fluctuation stop processing (see FIG. 475) described later, (See FIG. 477), a jackpot opening command or a small jackpot opening command, an opening command set in a special winning opening opening / closing control process (see FIG. 478) described later, and a special winning opening opening process described later (see FIG. 479). ), An ending command set in a jackpot ending process (see FIG. 480) described later, or a small opening command or a small closing set in a small winning opening opening / closing control process (see FIG. 481) described later. Command (hereinafter, the command may be referred to as an “audio lamp command”).

  In the process of S5201, if the voice lamp related command has been set (generated) in the timer interrupt process executed previously (previous), it is determined that there is a command to be transmitted to the voice ramp control device 113 (S5201). : Yes), the voice lamp related command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 (S5202), and the process proceeds to S5203. On the other hand, in the process of S5201, if it is determined that the voice ramp command has not been set (generated) (S5201: No), the process proceeds to S5203 without performing the process of S5202.

  Next, in the process of S5203, it is determined whether or not there is a command to be transmitted to the payout control device 111 (S5203). As a command to be transmitted to the payout control device 111, each start winning command based on the determination that a ball has won the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b in a starting winning process (see FIG. 468) described later. In addition, a special winning opening command based on the determination that a ball has won the special winning opening 65a in a special winning opening opening process (see FIG. 479) described later, and a small winning opening opening / closing control process (see FIG. 481) described later. , A small winning command (hereinafter, the command may be referred to as a “payout command”) based on the determination that the ball has won the small winning port 72a, and the like.

  In the process of S5203, if a payout-related command has been set (generated) in the previously (last time) executed timer interrupt process, it is determined that there is a command to be transmitted to the payout control device 111 (S5203: Yes). ), The payout command is transmitted to the payout control device 111 (S5204), and the process proceeds to S5205. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5203 that the payout-related command has not been set (generated) (S5203: No), the process proceeds to S5205 without performing the process of S5204.

  Next, in the process of S5205, it is determined whether there is output information (signal) to be output to the external output terminal plate 700, that is, the hall computer 600 (see FIG. 428) (S5205). The output information (signal) to be output to the external output terminal plate 700 includes the number of winnings in the first opening 64a, the number of winnings in the second opening 64b, the number of winnings in the general winning opening 63, and the number of outs 66. The number of inflows into the game, the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol (the number of start or stop), the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol (the number of start or stop), the number of start of big hit game (the number of end), the start of small hit game Number (end number), opening mode (open or closed) of the special winning opening 65a, opening mode (opening or closing) of the small winning opening 72a, number of winnings in the large winning opening 65a, number of winnings in the small winning opening 72a, The number of balls entering the through gate 67, the number of shots by the firing solenoid, the game state (hereinafter, the above signal may be referred to as an "outer end signal"), and the like correspond to the above.

  In the process of S5205, if it is set so as to output the external terminal system signal in the previously (last time) executed timer interrupt process, the signal to be output to the external output terminal board 700 (Hall computer 600) is output. It is determined that there is (S5205: Yes), the external end system signal is output to the external output terminal board 700 (S5206), and the external output processing (S5101) is ended, and the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 466) is performed. Return. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5205 that the external end system signal has not been set (S5205: No), the processing of S5206 is not performed, the external output processing (S5101) is terminated, and the timer interrupt is performed. Return to the processing (see FIG. 466).

  Returning to FIG. 466, the description will be continued. After the processing in S5101, the winning ball count signal and the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S5102), and then the hit processing for executing the processing at the time of hitting each special symbol is executed (S5102). S5103). This hit processing (S5103) will be described later with reference to FIG. 477.

  After S5103, next, a normal electric hand control process for executing a drive control process of the normal electric hand 64c is executed (S5104). Briefly, on the condition that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, the ordinary symbol display device 83 performs variable display of the ordinary symbol, and as a result of the variable display of the ordinary symbol, a winning symbol of the ordinary symbol (for example, “ When the symbol “○” appears and becomes a hit state, the ordinary electric hand 64c is opened for a predetermined time. Details of the ordinary electrical combination control process (S5104) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the processing of S5104, next, reading processing of various winning switches is executed (S5105). That is, the state of the various switches 208 connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch 208 is determined to store the detection information (winning detection information). In addition, a prize ball command corresponding to the number of acquired balls to be transmitted to the payout control device 111 is set in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 273 based on the winning detection information. As a result, a predetermined prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 111 by the external output process (S5101) of the next timer interrupt process.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S5106). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to "0" when the counter value reaches a maximum value ("9999" in the twenty-eighth embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer 273c area of the RAM 273. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches a maximum value (“99” in the sixteenth embodiment), it is cleared to “0” and the second initial value The updated value of the random number counter CINI2 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer 273c area of the RAM 273.

  Furthermore, the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1, and the ordinary figure random number counter C4 are updated (S5107). More specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1, and the per-figure random number counter C4 are each incremented by one, and their counter values are set to the maximum value (the sixteenth embodiment). In the embodiment, when the numbers reach “9999”, “99”, “99”, “9”, and “99”, respectively, they are cleared to “0”. Further, when the jackpot random number counter C1 or the ordinary figure random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 or the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is changed to the jackpot random number counter C1 or the ordinary figure random number. The initial value of the counter C4 is read, and the initial value is set in the jackpot random number counter C1 or the ordinary figure random number counter C4. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer area 273c of the RAM 273.

  Next, a start winning process is executed in accordance with the winning of the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b (S5108), and then a gate passing process is executed in accordance with the passage of the ball to the through gate 67 (S5109). . The details of the start winning process (S5108) will be described later with reference to FIG. 468, and the details of the gate passing process (S5109) will be described later with reference to FIG. 469.

  After executing the gate passing process (S5109), a process for dynamically displaying a special symbol by the special symbol display device 39 based on the processing content of the above-mentioned start winning process (S5108) or by the third symbol display device 81. A special figure fluctuation process for setting a fluctuation pattern of the third symbol and the like is executed (S5110). The details of the special figure change processing (S5110) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After executing the special figure variation processing (S5110), then, based on the processing content of the gate passing processing (S5109), the ordinary figure variation which executes the processing for performing the variable display of the ordinary symbol by the ordinary symbol display device 83 is performed. The processing is executed (S5111). The details of the ordinary figure change processing (S5111) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After executing the normal figure fluctuation processing (S5111), the control unit executes the firing control processing (S5112), and executes other processing to be executed periodically (S5113), and ends the timer interrupt processing. Note that the firing control process (S5112) detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a, and that the stop switch 51b for stopping firing is not operated. This is a process of determining whether to turn on the ball. When the launch of the ball is on, the information of the launch signal is set in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 273 in order to transmit the launch signal to the launch control device 112. As a result, the ball firing signal is transmitted to the firing control device 112 via the payout control device 111 by the processing of S5101 of the timer interrupt processing executed next.

  Next, the start winning process (S5108), which is one of the timer interrupt processes (see FIG. 466) executed by the MPU 271 in the main control device 110, will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 468. FIG. 468 is a flowchart showing the start winning processing (S5108).

  In the start winning process (S5108), it is determined whether or not a ball has been won in the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b, and if there is a winning, the value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 has been won. A process of storing (reserving) in the first reserved ball storage area 273d or the second reserved ball storage area 273e corresponding to the mouths 64a and 64b is executed. Further, a process for transmitting the value of each of the held counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to the sound lamp control device 113 together with the number of held balls is executed.

  In the start winning process (S5108), the MPU 271 first determines whether or not the ball has won (start win) the first starting port 64a (S5301). Here, based on the output signal of the special figure 1 entrance switch (not shown) for detecting the entrance (winning) to the first starting port 64a, which is read in the switch reading processing (see S5105 in FIG. 466). , Detects a ball entering the first starting port 64a over three timer interrupt processes (see FIG. 466).

  If it is determined that the ball has won the first starting port 64a (there is a start winning) (S5301: Yes), then the value of the first reserved ball number counter 273a (the first reserved ball number in the main controller 110). It is determined whether or not the number N1 of suspended balls for dynamic display (fluctuating production) of one special symbol is less than an upper limit value ("4" in the twenty-eighth embodiment) (S5302). Then, even if there is a prize in the first starting port 64a, if the number N1 of pending operation balls is not N1 <4 (S5302: No), the start prize winning process (S5108) is ended and a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 466). Return to

  On the other hand, if the number N1 of pending operation balls <4 (S5302: Yes), the value of the first reserved ball number counter 273a (the number N1 of pending operation balls) is incremented by 1 (S5303). Then, since this time is a prize in the first starting opening 64a corresponding to the first special symbol, the first reserved ball storage area 273d is set as a storage destination of each of the random numbers C1 to C3, CS1 (S5304), and the processing is performed. To S5309.

  In the processing of S5301, if it is determined that the ball has not won the first starting port 64a (S5301: No), then it is determined whether or not the ball has won the second starting port 64b (start winning). (S5305). Here, similarly to the first start port 64a, a special figure 2 entrance switch (not shown) for detecting a ball entry (winning) into the second start port 64b read in the switch reading process (see S5105 in FIG. 466). Based on the output signal of (b), a ball entering the second starting port 64b is detected over three timer interrupt processes (see FIG. 466).

  If it is determined that the ball has won the second starting port 64b (there is a start winning) (S5305: Yes), then the value of the second reserved ball number counter 273b (the first reserved ball number in the main controller 110). (2) It is determined whether or not the number N2 of operation-reserved balls for dynamic display (fluctuating production) of a special symbol is less than an upper limit value ("4" in the twenty-eighth embodiment) (S5306). Then, if there is no winning in the second starting opening 64b (S5305: No), or if there is a winning in the second starting opening 64b but the number of active balls is not N2 <4 (S5306: No), this is determined. The start winning process (S5108) ends, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 466).

  On the other hand, if the number N2 of pending operation balls is smaller than 4 (S5306: Yes), the value of the second reserved ball number counter 273b (the number N2 of pending operation balls) is incremented by 1 (S5307). Since this time is a prize in the second starting opening 64b corresponding to the second special symbol, the second reserved ball storage area 273e is set as a storage destination of each of the random numbers C1 to C3 and CS1 (S5308), and the processing is performed. To S5309.

  In the process of S5309, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 are read from the counter buffer 273c (see FIG. 454), and are set as storage destinations in S5304 or S5308. Of the first reserved first to fourth areas or the second reserved first to fourth areas provided in the first reserved ball storage area 273d or the second reserved ball storage area 273e, the first reserved ball storage area 273d is provided. If it is specified as the storage destination, the jackpot random number counter storage area 273d1, the jackpot type counter storage area 273d2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 273d3, and the variation type counter of the area corresponding to the value indicated by the first reserved ball number counter 273a. Each in storage area 273d4 Distillate (stored) to (S5309). When the second reserved ball storage area 273e is designated as the storage destination, the big hit random number counter storage area 273e1, the big hit type counter storage area 273e2, and the stop of the area corresponding to the value indicated by the second reserved ball number counter 273b are stopped. It is reserved (stored) in the pattern selection counter storage area 273e3 and the variation type counter storage area 273e4 (S5309).

  Specifically, for example, in the process of S5304 based on winning in the first starting port 64a, the first reserved ball storage area 273d is set as a storage destination, and the first reserved ball number counter after addition by the process of S5303 is performed. If the value of 273a is “1”, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are held in the respective storage areas of the first holding first area. If the value of the first reserved ball number counter 273a after the addition is "2", the value of the first reserved ball number counter 273a after the addition is "3" in each storage area of the first reserved second area. If there is, if the value of the first reserved ball number counter 273a after the addition is "4" in each of the storage areas of the first reserved third area, the respective stored areas of the first reserved fourth area are counters C1 to C3. , CS1 are reserved.

  Further, for example, in the process of S5308 based on winning in the second starting opening 64b, the second reserved ball storage area 273e is set as a storage destination, and the value of the second reserved ball number counter 273b after the addition in the process of S5307. Is "1", the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are held in the respective storage areas of the second holding first area. If the value of the second reserved ball number counter 273b after addition is "2", the value of the second reserved ball number counter 273b after addition is "3" in each storage area of the second reserved second area. If there is, if the value of the second reserved ball number counter 273b after the addition is "4" in each storage area of the second reserved third area, the counter C1 to C3 is stored in each stored area of the second reserved fourth area. , CS1 are reserved.

  Next, the value of the first reserved ball number counter 273a or the second reserved ball number counter 273b (the number N1 of activated balls or the number N2 of activated balls) after the addition by the processing of S5303 or S5307, and the first value by the processing of S5309. The retained ball number command including each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 stored (reserved) in the reserved ball storage area 273d or the second reserved ball storage area 273e is voiced. In order to transmit the command to the lamp control device 113, the command for setting the number of reserved balls is set in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 273 (S5310). As a result, the retained ball count command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output process in S5101 of the next timer interrupt process (see FIG. 466). Upon completion of the process in S5310, the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 466).

  In the process of S5310, the value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the reserved ball count command may use the value itself read from the counter buffer 273c in the process of S5309, or the first reserved in the process of S5309. The value stored (reserved) in the ball storage area 273d or the second reserved ball storage area 273e may be used.

  Further, in the processing of S5301 and S5305, when a ball wins simultaneously in the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b, the winning processing of the ball to the first starting port 64a is preferentially executed, and the second starting is performed. The process waits for a ball winning process in the mouth 64b, and in the start winning process (S5108) in the next timer interrupt process (see FIG. 466), executes the ball winning process in the waiting second starting port 64b. May be configured.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 469, the gate passing process (S5109), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 466) executed by the MPU 271 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 469 is a flowchart showing the gate passage processing (S5109).

  The gate passage process (S5109) determines whether or not the ball has passed (entered) the through gate 67. If the ball has passed (entered), the value of the random number counter C4 per ordinary figure is stored in the ordinary figure holding ball. A process of storing (holding) in the storage area 273i is executed. Further, in the twenty-eighth embodiment, in a game state where right-handed game is not encouraged (that is, “normal game state”), if the passage of a ball is detected at the through gate 67 that passes only during right-handed game, the encouragement is performed. It is determined that a game that has not been executed is executed, and a predetermined notification (for example, an alarm sound output) is made.

  In the gate passage processing (S5109), the MPU 271 first determines whether or not the ball has passed the through gate 67 (S5401). Here, based on an output signal of a general-purpose gate switch (not shown) for detecting passage of a sphere to the through gate 67 (entering the ball) read in the switch reading process (see S5105 in FIG. 466), Is detected over three timer interrupt processes (see FIG. 466).

  If it is determined in the processing of S5401 that the ball has passed (entered) the through gate 67 (S5401: Yes), it is next determined whether or not the current game state is the "normal game state" (S5402). ). If the result of determination is “normal game state” (S5402: Yes), a right-handed game is played in a situation where right-handed game is not encouraged, and a ball has been detected by the through gate 67. In addition, a normal right-handed error process for giving an error message indicating that a game not recommended to the employees of the game hall has been executed is performed (S5403), and the process proceeds to S5404.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5402, when it is determined that the game is not the “normal game state” (S5402: No), the situation where the right-handed game is encouraged (that is, the “super probability fluctuation state”, the “probability fluctuation state”, or Since the right-handed game is performed in the “time reduction state”, the process of S5403 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S5404.

  In this way, when the game is played in a situation where the right-handed game is not encouraged, the situation is determined by the through gate 67 detected only in the right-handed game, and the determination result is reported as an error. The player and the employee of the game hall can recognize that the game is not encouraged. As a result, a non-recommended game can be detected without the need to provide another detection device, and a non-recommended game is performed by suppressing the player from performing a non-recommended game by the notification. Of the game hall due to the above can be suppressed.

  Next, in the process of S5404, the value of the ordinary figure retaining ball number counter 273h (the number of operation-reserved balls HN for variable display of ordinary symbols suspended in the main controller 110) is set to the upper limit value (4 in the twenty-eighth embodiment). )) Is determined (S5404). Then, there is no passage (entering the ball) to the through gate 67 (S5401: No), or even if there is a passage (entering the ball) to the through gate 67, the number of active balls is not HN <4 (S5404: No), the gate passing process (S5109) is completed, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 466).

  On the other hand, if the number of operation-reserved balls HN <4 (S5404: Yes), the value of the general-purpose reserved ball number counter 273h (the number of operation-reserved balls HN) is incremented by 1 (S5405). Then, the value of the per-figure per-counter C4 is read from the counter buffer 273c (see FIG. 454), and the read data is read out of the first to fourth areas of the fuji-figure holding provided in the fuji-figure holding ball storage area 273i. It is stored in an area corresponding to the value indicated by the ordinary figure reserved ball number counter 273h (S5406).

  Specifically, for example, if the value of the general figure reserved ball number counter 273h after the addition in the processing of S5405 is “1”, the value of the general figure per-counter C4 is reserved in the general figure reserved first area. In addition, if the value of the post-additional ball-holding ball counter 273h is “2”, the value is “2”. If the value of the general-purpose reserved ball number counter 273h after the addition is “4” in the reserved general-purpose reserved area, the value of the general-purpose counter C4 is retained in the general-purpose reserved fourth area. After the end of the processing of S5406, this gate passage processing (S5109) ends, and the flow returns to the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 466).

  In the twenty-eighth embodiment, the reserved ball count command related to the variable display of the ordinary symbol is configured not to be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. The information may be transmitted to the CPU 113 to perform an effect (notification) on a reserved symbol or the like related to the variable display of the ordinary symbol. In this case, by transmitting the value of the counter C4 per ordinary figure in the number of retained balls command and transmitting the same, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to be able to execute a so-called look-ahead process on ordinary symbols, and to provide a variation of the effect on ordinary symbols. It may be configured to be provided.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 470, a description will be given of a special figure change process (S5110), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 466) executed by the MPU 271 in the main control device 110. FIG. 470 is a flowchart showing the special figure change processing (S5110).

  This special figure variation processing (S5110) is for performing dynamic display on the special symbol display device 39 relating to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and control relating to the variable effect performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  In the special figure change processing (S5110), the MPU 271 first determines whether any one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is currently in a big hit (S5501). During the jackpot, during the jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the special symbol display device 39 at the time of the jackpot, during the predetermined time before the jackpot game start (that is, the jackpot opening), During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game (ie, the jackpot ending). If the result of determination in S5501 is that any of the special symbols is in a big hit (S5501: Yes), the special figure variation processing (S5110) is terminated, and the flow returns to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 466).

  If it is determined in the processing of S5501 that no big hit is occurring (S5501: No), then it is determined whether any one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is currently in the small hit. (S5502). During the small hit, the predetermined time before the start of the small hit game (that is, the small hit opening) and during the small hit game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the special symbol display device 39 at the time of the small hit And during the predetermined time after the end of the small hitting game (that is, the small hitting ending). If the result of determination in S5502 is that any of the special symbols is in a small hit (S5502: Yes), the special figure variation processing (S5110) is terminated, and the flow returns to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 466).

  In the process of S5502, when it is determined that the small hit is not occurring (S5502: No), next, it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first special symbol on the special symbol display device 39 is being dynamically displayed. (S5503). As a result of the determination, if the display mode of the first special symbol is being dynamically displayed (S5503: Yes), the process of S5504 and S5505 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S5506. If the display mode of the first special symbol is not being dynamically displayed (S5503: No), then it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed after the dynamic display of the first special symbol on the special symbol display device 39 has stopped. (S5504). As a result, if the predetermined time has not elapsed after stopping the dynamic display of the first special symbol (S5504: No), the process proceeds to S5506. Thereby, the stop symbol in the dynamic display of the first special symbol (fluctuation effect) is displayed on the special symbol display device 39 and the third symbol display device 81 for a predetermined time, so that the stop symbol is displayed to the player. It can be visually recognized.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S5504, if the predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of the dynamic display of the first special symbol (S5504: Yes), it is the timing at which the dynamic display of the first special symbol can be executed. A special figure 1 change start process, which is a process for determining whether or not to execute the dynamic display of the first special symbol, is performed (S5505), and thereafter, the process proceeds to S5506. The details of the special figure 1 change start process (S5505) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S5506, it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second special symbol on the special symbol display device 39 is being dynamically displayed (S5506). As a result of the determination, if the display mode of the second special symbol is being dynamically displayed (S5506: Yes), the process of S5507 and S5508 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S5509, while the second symbol in the special symbol display device 39 is displayed. (2) If the display mode of the special symbol is not being dynamically displayed (S5506: No), then it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed after the dynamic display of the second special symbol on the special symbol display device 39 has stopped. (S5507). As a result, if the predetermined time has not elapsed after the stop of the dynamic display of the second special symbol (S5507: No), the process proceeds to S5509. Thereby, the stop symbol in the dynamic display of the second special symbol (fluctuation effect) is displayed on the special symbol display device 39 and the third symbol display device 81 for a predetermined time, so that the stop symbol is displayed to the player. It can be visually recognized.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5507, if the predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of the dynamic display of the second special symbol (S5507: Yes), it is the timing at which the dynamic display of the second special symbol can be executed. A special figure 2 change start process, which is a process for determining whether or not to execute the dynamic display of the second special symbol, is performed (S5508), and thereafter, the process proceeds to S5509. The details of the special figure 2 change start process (S5508) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S5509, it is determined whether to stop the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed, and if it is time to stop, the execution of the dynamic display is executed. A fluctuation stop process as a stop process is performed (S5509). After the fluctuation stop processing (S5509), the special figure fluctuation processing (S5110) ends, and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 466). The details of the fluctuation stop processing (S5509) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-eighth embodiment, the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously and in parallel, so that each special symbol is sequentially displayed. More lottery opportunities can be given to the player than in the case of execution, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Here, the special figure 1 change start processing (S5505) which is one of the special figure change processing (S5110) executed by the MPU 271 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 471 is a flowchart showing the special figure 1 change start process (S5505).

  In the special figure 1 change start process (S5505), when the timing at which the execution of the dynamic display (change effect) of the first special symbol can be started is reached, the number of reserved balls (N1) of the first special symbol exists. It is determined whether or not to perform the determination, and if the number of reserved balls is present, the content of the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) is determined based on the determination result while performing the hit determination based on the game state. In addition, when a small hit is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the dynamic display of the second special symbol is being executed and the result of the dynamic display of the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed is determined. Is a big hit or a small hit, the currently set execution time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol is compared with the execution time (remaining time) of the dynamic display of the currently executed second special symbol. When it is determined that the execution time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol is shorter than the execution time (remaining time) of the dynamic display of the second special symbol, the dynamic display of the second special symbol during execution is performed. While changing the target display to the dynamic display of the loss, the execution time to be stopped at the same time as the dynamic display of the first special symbol is reset. Further, when the dynamic display of the first special symbol is not a small hit and the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed has a content that can derive a big hit, a winning / non-selection lottery in the first special symbol is performed. First, the dynamic display of the first special symbol is set as the dynamic display of the loss.

  With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a jackpot or a small jackpot from being generated by the other special symbol while the jackpot or the small jackpot is being performed by one of the special symbols. ) Can prevent the player from being paid out an excessive game value. Further, in calculating the payout rate, it is not necessary to consider overlapping big hits or small hits, so that calculation of the payout rate can be facilitated and an increase in man-hours at the time of designing game specifications can be suppressed. .

  In the special figure 1 change start process (S5505), the MPU 271 first activates the value of the first reserved ball number counter 273a (dynamic display (variation effect) relating to the first special symbol held in the main control device 110). It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls N1) is larger than “0” (S5511). As a result, if the value of the first reserved ball number counter 273a (the number of activated reserved balls N1) is not a value larger than “0” (S5511: No), the reserved ball number of the dynamic display of the first special symbol to be started Does not exist, the special figure 1 change start processing (S5505) ends, and the processing returns to the special figure change processing (see FIG. 470).

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S5511, if the value of the first reserved ball number counter 273a (the number N1 of activated reserved balls) is not “0” (S5511: Yes), the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) relating to the first special symbol is performed. It is the execution start timing, and it is determined that there is a dynamic display of the first special symbol to be started. First, the value of the first reserved ball number counter 273a (the number of activated reserved balls N1) is decremented by 1 (S5512). This is because the execution of one dynamic display (variable effect) of the dynamic display (variable effect) related to the reserved first special symbol is started, and the number of reserved balls is reduced by one.

  Next, in the process of S5513, the data stored in the first reserved sphere storage area 273d is shifted (S5513). This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth reserved areas of the first reserved ball storage area 273d toward the first reserved ball execution area 273f. Hold first area → first hold ball execution area 273f, first hold second area → first hold first area, first hold third area → first hold second area, first hold fourth area → first The data in each area is shifted, such as in a reserved third area.

  Next, in the processing of S5514, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is the special symbol high-probability state, that is, whether or not the “super-probability fluctuation state” or the “probability fluctuation state” (S5514). As a result of the determination, if the gaming state is not the special symbol high-probability state, that is, if it is determined to be the “normal gaming state” or the “time reduction state” (S5514: No), the jackpot probability of the first special symbol (And the small-hit probability) is in the low-probability state, so that it is set so as to refer to the low-probability state in the special figure 1 big-hit random number table 272a1 (see FIG. 455 (a)) (S5515). Move to determination process.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S5514, when the gaming state is the high probability state of the special symbol, that is, the “super probability fluctuation state” or the “probability fluctuation state” (S5514: Yes), the first special symbol Since the jackpot probability (and the small jackpot probability) is in the high probability state, it is set so as to refer to the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 (see FIG. 455 (a)) (S5516), and the processing is S5517. Then, the process proceeds to the success / failure determination process.

  In the hit determination processing of S5517, first, the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 273f in the first special symbol and the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 set in S5515 or S5516 (FIG. 455 (a)), a small hit lottery process (small hit success / absence determination) processing for determining whether or not a small hit has been won (S5517).

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-eighth embodiment, the small hit is determined based on the relationship between the probability set value set when the power is turned on, the value of the big hit random number counter C1, and the type of the special symbol. As described above, in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1, no difference is provided between the small hit random numbers for each set value (that is, all 100), but the number of jackpot random numbers different for each set value is different. As the (range) is changed, the value (range) of the small hit random value is different for each set value.

  Specifically, when the gaming state (mode) of the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state of the special symbol (that is, the “normal gaming state” or the “time shortening state”), the random number of small hits for each set value is 100 pieces. In the case of the setting value “1”, the value is “50 to 149”, in the case of the setting value “2”, the value is “52 to 151”, and in the case of the setting value “3”, the value is “54 to 153”. In the case of the setting value "4", it is defined as "56 to 155", in the case of the setting value "5", it is "58 to 157", and in the case of the setting value "6", it is defined as "60 to 159". .

  On the other hand, when the gaming state (mode) of the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol high-probability state (that is, “super-probability fluctuation state” or “probability fluctuation state”), the small random number value for each set value is also 100 pieces. The setting value is “500 to 599” for the setting value “1”, “520 to 619” for the setting value “2”, and “540 to 639” for the setting value “3”. In the case of the value "4", it is defined as "560-659", in the case of the set value "5", it is "580-679", and in the case of the set value "6", it is defined as "600-699".

  In the processing of S5517, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 273f is compared with the small hit random number value defined in the special figure 1 big jackpot random number table 272a1, and they match. If so, it is determined that it is a small hit. As a result of the processing of S5517, when it is determined that the small hit is made (S5517: Yes), the display mode at the time of the small hit is set (S5518). In the twenty-eighth embodiment, only one type of small hit game is provided. Therefore, when a small hit is won, the same counter is obtained without checking other counters (eg, big hit type counter C2). A stop symbol (for example, “341” or the like) corresponding to the small hit is set.

  It should be noted that a plurality of types of small hit games (for example, "small hit A" for one round, "small hit B" for two rounds, etc.) are provided, and the big hit types stored in the first reserved ball execution area 273f. The type of the small hitting game may be selected by the counter C2. In this case, instead of the big hit type counter C2, a small hit type counter dedicated to a small hit may be provided, and the type of the small hit game may be selected based on the value of the small hit type counter. With this configuration, variations in the small hit game can be enriched, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Next, in the process of S5519, a fluctuation pattern at the time of a small hit is determined (S5519), and the process proceeds to S5520. Specifically, in the process of S5519, the variation pattern is determined by the same control program as that at the time of the big hit or the loss. That is, in the special symbol display device 39 and the third symbol display device 81, the effect mode is selected based on the presence or absence of a small hit and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 273f. Then, the dynamic time (fluctuation time) of the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 from among the selected rendering modes. In the twenty-eighth embodiment, in determining the fluctuation pattern at the time of the small hit, the E table 272d5 (see FIG. 459 (b)) is selected without fail irrespective of the game state and the number of reserved balls, and furthermore, the E table 272d5 "E9: Special fluctuation" effect mode is selected without exception.

  In the special pattern 1 big hit / small hit change pattern table 272e2 provided for each effect mode set in the processing of S5519, the special pattern is associated with the value of the change type counter CS1 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 273f. Select the fluctuation pattern. Then, the variation time is set based on the relationship between the variation pattern and the variation time that are defined in advance. In the twenty-eighth embodiment, in determining the fluctuation pattern at the time of the small hit, the fluctuation element of “45 seconds” is the “variation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ the fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”+“ normal reach ”. ”+“ Special reach ”+“ re-variation ”.

  Next, in the process of S5520, the special figure 2 is changed in order to determine whether or not the lottery result of the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed is changed by the small hitting game of the first special symbol that has been won this time. The process (S5520) is performed, and then the process shifts to S5527.

  Here, the special figure 2 change processing (S5520) which is one of the special figure 1 change start processing (S5505) executed by the MPU 271 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 472 is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 change processing (S5520).

  This special figure 2 change processing (S5520) is executed when the small hit game is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, and the big hit game or the small hit game is performed in the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed. If it can occur, the change time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol set this time (that is, “45 seconds”) is compared with the change time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed, If the change time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol set this time is shorter than the change time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed, the content of the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed is a big hit. Alternatively, a process of changing from a small hit to a loss is performed.

  In the special figure 2 change process (S5520), the MPU 271 first determines whether or not the dynamic display of the second special symbol is being executed (S5531). As a result of the determination, if the dynamic display of the second special symbol has not been executed (S5531: No), there is no dynamic display of the second special symbol to be changed. S5520) is ended, and the process returns to the special figure 1 change start process (FIG. 471).

  On the other hand, in the processing of S5531, when it is determined that the dynamic display of the second special symbol is being executed (S5531: Yes), the result of the dynamic display of the currently executed second special symbol is lost. It is determined whether or not this is the case (S5532). As a result of the determination, if the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed is lost (S5532: Yes), the large winning opening 65a or the small winning opening 72a will not be opened repeatedly, and in this case also. This special figure 2 change processing (S5520) ends, and the processing returns to the special figure 1 change start processing (FIG. 471).

  On the other hand, in the process of S5532, if the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed is not a loss, that is, if the dynamic display is a big hit or a small hit (S5532: No), then the second special symbol being executed is displayed. The change time of the dynamic display (remaining execution time) is compared with the change time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol set this time (that is, “45 seconds”), and the dynamic time of the second special symbol being executed is compared. It is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the dynamic display (remaining execution time) is longer than the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol set this time (that is, whether or not the remaining “45 seconds” or more) (S5533). ).

  As a result of the determination in S5533, when it is determined that the variation time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed (the remaining execution time) is longer than the variation time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol set this time ( S5533: Yes), since the dynamic display of the first special symbol set this time derives the winning / failing result earlier, the small hit game in the dynamic display of the first special symbol is preferentially executed, In order to prevent the overlapping winning opening 65a or the small winning opening 72a from being opened in duplicate, the result of the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed is changed to "losing" (S5534), and the second special symbol being executed is changed. The variation pattern (variation time) of the dynamic display is set equal to the variation pattern of the dynamic display of the first special symbol set this time (that is, “45 seconds”) (S5535). With this configuration, the result of the first special symbol derived earlier is preferentially executed, and the result of the second special symbol derived later is changed (erased). The opening of the opening 65a or the small winning opening 72a can be prevented beforehand, and an excessive gaming value can be prevented from being given to the player.

  Next, the special figure 2 variation pattern command based on the variation pattern changed in the processing of S5535 is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 273 (S5536), and based on the success / failure result changed in the processing of S5534. The special figure 2 display mode command is set in the ring buffer for command transmission (S5537). After the processing of S5537, the special figure 2 change processing (S5520) is ended, and the processing returns to the special figure 1 change start processing (FIG. 471). Thereby, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command and the special figure 2 stop type command are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output processing (S5101) of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 466) to be executed next. You.

  Upon receiving the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command or the special figure 2 stop type command, the sound ramp control device 113 executes the special figure 2 display fluctuation pattern command or the special figure 2 A display type command is generated and transmitted to the display control device 114.

  Here, the voice lamp control device 113 determines that a command transmission error has occurred if the variation pattern command and the display mode command cannot be normally received (as a set) when performing the variation effect of each special symbol. An error change (default change) indicating that a transmission error has occurred is executed. Here, when the variation pattern (variation time) of the dynamic display of the second special symbol and the success / failure result are changed, and only the variation pattern command or only the stop type command is transmitted, the sound lamp control device 113 Since the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command, which should be transmitted as a set, are not transmitted, there is a possibility that a command transmission error is determined. In addition, if the receiving program of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed in consideration of the change of the dynamic display of the second special symbol, the control program must be newly designed and the sound lamp control device is changed. The control program on the 113 side may be complicated.

  Therefore, when the content of the dynamic display of the second special symbol is changed based on the content of the dynamic display of the first special symbol as in the twenty-eighth embodiment, the dynamic display of the second special symbol to be changed is performed. By transmitting the variation pattern command and the stop type command as a set to the audio ramp control device 113, it is not necessary to change the control program on the audio ramp control device 113 side, thereby reducing the number of design steps and the control burden. be able to. Further, in the twenty-eighth embodiment, the variation effect of the special symbol executed by the third symbol display device 81 is different depending on the game state. Here, when the content of the non-executing special symbol variation effect is replaced by the third symbol display device 81, the non-executing special symbol variation effect is not executed in the first place. Even when the replacement control is executed for, it is possible to provide a comfortable game without causing the player to feel uncomfortable.

  In the process of S5533, if the variation time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed (remaining execution time) is not longer (ie, shorter) than the variation time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol set this time. When it is determined (S5533: No), the dynamic display of the first special symbol set this time derives the winning / failure result later, that is, the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed is performed first. In order to derive the success / failure result, the jackpot game or the small jackpot game in the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed is preferentially executed, and the opening of the overlapping large winning opening 65a or the small winning opening 72a is prevented beforehand. In this case, the result of the pass / fail of the first special symbol set this time is changed to “losing” (S5538), and the change pattern (variation time) of the dynamic display of the first special symbol set this time is changed to the second special symbol being executed. Dynamic Display Fluctuation Time The remaining run time) and set equally (S5539), the special symbol 2 terminates change processing (S5520), returns to the special symbol 1 change start processing (see FIG. 471). With this configuration, the result of the pass / fail of the second special symbol derived earlier is preferentially executed, and the result of the pass / fail of the first special symbol derived later is changed (erased). The opening of the opening 65a or the small winning opening 72a can be prevented beforehand, and an excessive gaming value can be prevented from being given to the player.

  In the process of S5532, when it is determined that the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed is a loss (S5532: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S5535, and the second special symbol being executed is executed. Of the dynamic display of the first special symbol set this time (that is, "45 seconds") (S5535). ). With such a configuration, the result of the pass / fail of the first special symbol derived first is preferentially executed, and the second special symbol derived later is stopped in synchronization with the dynamic display of the first special symbol. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a situation where the dynamic display is executed in a situation where the big hit game or the small hit game has been started.

  Returning to FIG. 471, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S5517 that the winning is not a small hit (S5517: No), then, the dynamic display of the second special symbol is being executed and the lottery result of the big hit game in the dynamic display It is determined whether or not can be derived (S5521). Whether the jackpot game can be derived in the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed or not can be determined based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 273g according to the game state and the special figure. It is performed with reference to the two big hit random number table 272a2 (see FIG. 455 (b)), and if the big hit is not derived in the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed (S5521: No), then the first big hit is performed. It is determined whether or not there is a big hit based on the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 273f and the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 (see FIG. 455 (a)) set in S5515 or S5516. A jackpot lottery (win / fail judgment) process is performed (S5522).

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-eighth embodiment, it is determined whether or not a jackpot is present based on the relationship between the set value set at power-on, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and the current gaming state (mode). You. As described above, in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 (see FIG. 455 (a)), the setting difference is provided in the big hit random number value, and the gaming state (mode) of the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal low probability state. (Ie, the “normal game state” or “time reduction state”) and the high probability state (ie, “super probability fluctuation state” or “probability fluctuation state”), the value of the random number of the jackpot (Range) are different.

  Specifically, when the gaming state (mode) of the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state of the special symbol (that is, the “normal gaming state” or the “time reduction state”), the jackpot random number value for each set value is equal to the set value. In the case of "1", it is "0-49 (that is, 50)", in the case of the setting value "2", it is "0-51 (that is, 52)", and in the case of the setting value "3", "0 to 53 (i.e., 54)", "0" to "55" (i.e., 56) when the set value is "4", and "0 to 57" (i.e., the set value "5"). , 58), and the set value “6” is defined as “0 to 59 (that is, 60)”.

  On the other hand, when the gaming state (mode) of the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol high-probability state (that is, “super-probability fluctuation state” or “probability fluctuation state”), the jackpot random number value for each set value is set to “1”. "Is" 0-499 (i.e., 500) ", the set value" 2 "is" 0-519 (i.e., 520) ", and the set value" 3 "is" 0 ". -539 (i.e., 540) ", the set value" 4 "is" 0-559 (i.e., 560) ", and the set value" 5 "is" 0-579 (i.e., 580). ), And the set value “6” is defined as “0-599 (ie, 600)”.

  Therefore, in the process of S5522, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 273f is compared with the jackpot random number value specified in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1, and these are compared. If they match, it is determined to be a jackpot. As a result of the processing of S5522, when it is determined that the current dynamic display of the first special symbol is a big hit (S5522: Yes), then, the big hit type counter C2 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 273f is determined. Based on the value and the special figure 1 big hit type table 272b1 corresponding to the first special symbol (see FIG. 456 (a)), the display mode of the first special symbol at the time of big hit is set (S5523).

  In this processing, according to the special figure 1 big hit type table 272b1, the big hit type associated with the value of the big hit type counter C2 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 273f, that is, the maximum number of rounds after the 16 round big hit "Probability fluctuation A" which shifts to "super probability fluctuation state", "probability fluctuation B" which shifts to "probability fluctuation state" after a maximum of 6 rounds of jackpots, or " It is determined whether or not “time reduction” is to be entered for the “time reduction state”. Then, based on the determined jackpot type, the display mode at the time of the jackpot (display mode of the upper LED group 39b1) on the special symbol display device 39 is set. Specifically, the jackpot type is determined based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 273f and the special figure 1 jackpot type table 272b1 (see FIG. 456 (a)). .

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined (S5524), and the process shifts to S5520. Specifically, first, in the special symbol display device 39 and the third symbol display device 81, the display mode (stop type) at the time of the big hit and the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 273f. The effect mode is selected based on the value, and the dynamic time (fluctuation time) of the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) is determined from the selected effect mode based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. In determining the variation pattern at the time of the big hit, first, a stop pattern table 272d (see FIG. 458 or 459) to be used is selected according to the type of stop at the big hit. Then, in the process of S5520, as in the case where the small win has been won, the dynamic (variable) time of the big hit scheduled to be implemented this time in the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol A special symbol which is prioritized according to whether a big hit or a small hit occurs, and whether the dynamic display of the second special symbol is longer or shorter than the dynamic time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol this time. Determine the jackpot or the small hit.

  In the twenty-eighth embodiment, there are three types of jackpot games, but if a jackpot is won, no matter which jackpot type is used, regardless of the number of pending balls of the dynamic display on standby, there is no exception. The D table 272d4 (see FIG. 459 (a)) is set. Then, in the D table 272d4, the effect mode corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 273f is selected.

  In the process of S5524, referring to the selected rendering mode and the special pattern 1 big hit / small hit change pattern table 272e2, the value of the change type counter CS1 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 273f is corresponded. Select the attached fluctuation pattern. Then, the variation time is set based on the relationship between the variation pattern and the variation time that are defined in advance.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5521 that the big hit can be derived in the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed (S5521: Yes), the big hit game is already derived in the dynamic display of the second special symbol. Is determined, the display mode at the time of the loss is set so that the big hit is not repeatedly derived in the dynamic display of the first special symbol (S5525).

  In the process of S5525, the display mode of the special symbol display device 39 is set to a display mode corresponding to the lost symbol, and a rough variation pattern (effect mode) is set. The setting of the effect mode includes the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 273f, the total value of the first reserved ball number counter 273a and the second reserved ball number counter 273b, and the current value. Based on the gaming state, the non-reach (long) production mode, the “non-reach (short)” production mode, the “normal reach” production mode, and the “super reach” are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the production mode. One of an effect mode, a “special reach” effect mode, and a “super long fluctuation” effect mode is set. In the twenty-eighth embodiment, each effect mode depends on whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the “normal gaming state”, the “super-probability variation state”, the “probability variation state”, or the “time reduction state”. The stop pattern table 272d is set so that the range of the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to.

  Next, the variation pattern at the time of loss is determined (S5526), and the flow shifts to the process of SS5527. In the processing of S5526, the special symbol display device 39 and the third symbol display device 81 determine the fluctuation time until the stop symbol is displayed in the lost symbol. Specifically, the fluctuation stored in the first reserved ball execution area 273f in the special figure 1 loss fluctuation pattern table 272e1 provided for each display mode (effect mode) at the time of the loss determined in the processing of S5525. A variation pattern associated with the value of the type counter CS1 is selected. Then, the variation time is set based on the relationship between the variation pattern and the variation time that are defined in advance.

  In the process of S5522, when it is determined that the dynamic display of the first special symbol is not a big hit (S5522: No), the process proceeds to S5525, and the processes of S5525 and S5526 are performed. The display mode and the fluctuation pattern at the time are set.

  As described above, the process of setting the effect mode and the variation pattern at the time of the small hit, the process of setting the effect mode and the variation pattern at the time of the big hit, and the process of setting the effect mode and the variation pattern at the time of the loss are performed by the stop pattern table 272d. By using the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 to determine and determine using the same determination program, the program can be shared, and the number of development steps during development can be reduced.

  Next, in the processing of S5527, based on the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the dynamic display of the first special symbol determined by the processing of S5519, S5524, or S5526, the fluctuation pattern is provided via the sound lamp control device 113. The special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the fluctuation time corresponding to the time is set (S5527).

  Specifically, for example, when the big hit lottery is won, the big hit type is “probability change A”, and a change pattern including a change element of “super reach” of “25 seconds” is selected. Is a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command indicating special figure 1, big hit, “probability fluctuation A”, and “super reach” of “25 seconds”. In addition, if the player loses the jackpot lottery and further selects a variation pattern that includes a variation element of “25 seconds” “super reach”, the special figure 1 loss, “25 seconds” “super reach” The special figure 1 variation pattern command shown is set. As described above, even when the fluctuation effects have the same fluctuation time, the special lamp 1 fluctuation pattern command is set together with the type of the special symbol, the validity of the fluctuation effect, and the content of the rough fluctuation pattern, so that the sound ramp control is performed. The device 113 grasps the type of the special symbol to be changed, the contents of the effect mode including the pass / fail, and the change time, and can determine a detailed change pattern of the change effect based on the information.

  After the processing of S5527, a special figure for notifying the display control device 114 via the sound lamp control device 113 of the stop type of the dynamic display of the first special symbol set in the processing of S5518, S5523 or S5525. One stop type command is set (S5528), the special figure 1 change start processing (S5505) ends, and the process returns to the special figure change processing (see FIG. 470).

  Specifically, for example, if the jackpot is won and the content of the jackpot is “probability variation A”, without specifying the specific third symbol stop mode (for example, “7” symbol), A special figure 1 stop type command indicating "probability variation A" is set. In addition, if the jackpot is won and the content of the jackpot is “time reduction”, it is “time reduction” without specifying the specific third symbol stop mode (for example, “4” symbol). A special figure 1 stop type command is set to indicate this.

  On the other hand, if the jackpot is not won and the “Super Reach” production mode is selected, the specific stop mode (for example, “787”) of the third symbol is not specified and “ A special figure 1 stop type command is set to indicate the "super reach" effect mode. In addition, if the jackpot is not won and the “normal reach” effect mode is selected, a specific stop mode (for example, “737” or the like) of the third symbol is not specified, and the “normal reach” at the time of the loss is specified. A special figure 1 stop type command indicating the effect mode is set. Furthermore, if the jackpot is not won and the “non-reach” effect mode is selected, the specific stop mode of the third symbol (for example, “258” or the like) is not specified and “ A special figure 1 stop type command is set to indicate the "non-reach" effect mode.

  As described above, by setting the rough stop type based on the success or failure of the variable effect in the special figure 1 stop type command, the sound lamp control device 113 (the display control device 114) can determine the special symbol to be changed and the success or failure. By grasping the stop type based on the information, it is possible to determine a detailed fluctuation effect stop result based on the information.

  The special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command and the special figure 1 stop type command are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 273, and are externally output in the next timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 466). In (S5101), these commands are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the special figure 1 change pattern command or the special figure 1 stop type command, the sound ramp control device 113 generates a change pattern command for special figure 1 display or the special figure 1 display type command based on the command, and the display control device 114. Send to

  Next, the special figure 2 change start processing (S5508) which is one of the special figure change processing (S5110) executed by the MPU 271 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 473 is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 change start process (S5508).

  This special figure 2 change start processing (S5508) performs the same processing as the above-described special figure 1 change start processing (S5505) related to the first special design for the second special design. When the timing at which the execution of the target display (fluctuation effect) can be started is reached, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls (N2) of the second special symbol exists, and when the number of reserved balls exists. In this case, the content of the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) is determined based on the result of the determination while making the determination based on the game state. In addition, when a small hit is won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, the dynamic display of the first special symbol is being executed, and the result of the dynamic display of the dynamic display of the first special symbol being executed is determined. Is a big hit or a small hit, the currently set execution time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol is compared with the execution time (remaining time) of the dynamic display of the first special symbol being executed. When it is determined that the execution time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol is shorter than the execution time (remaining time) of the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the dynamic time of the first special symbol during execution is determined. While changing the target display to the dynamic display of the loss, the execution time to stop at the same time as the dynamic display of the second special symbol is reset. Further, in the case where the dynamic display of the second special symbol is not a small hit, if the dynamic display of the first special symbol being executed has a content that can derive a big hit, a winning / non-selection lottery in the second special symbol is performed. First, the dynamic display of the second special symbol is set as the dynamic display of the loss.

  With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a jackpot or a small jackpot from being generated by the other special symbol while the jackpot or the small jackpot is being performed by one of the special symbols. ) Can prevent the player from being paid out an excessive game value.

  In the special figure 2 change start process (S5508), the MPU 271 first activates the value of the second reserved ball number counter 273b (dynamic display (variation effect) related to the second special symbol held in the main controller 110). It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls N2) is larger than “0” (S5541). As a result, if the value of the second reserved ball number counter 273b (the number of activated reserved balls N2) is not a value greater than "0" (S5541: No), the reserved ball number of the dynamic display of the second special symbol to be started Does not exist, the special figure 2 change start processing (S5508) ends, and the processing returns to the special figure change processing (see FIG. 470).

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S5541, the value of the second reserved ball number counter 273b (the number of activated reserved balls N2) is not "0" (S5541: Yes), the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) related to the second special symbol is performed. It is the execution start timing, and it is determined that there is a dynamic display of the second special symbol to be started. First, the value of the second reserved ball number counter 273b (the number of activated reserved balls N2) is decremented by 1 (S5542). This is because the execution of one dynamic display (fluctuation effect) of the reserved dynamic display (fluctuation effect) relating to the second special symbol is started, and the number of reserved balls is reduced by one.

  Next, in the processing of S5543, the data stored in the second reserved sphere storage area 273e is shifted (S5543). This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting data stored in the first to first reserved first to fourth areas of the second reserved ball storage area 273e toward the second reserved ball execution area 273g. Hold first area → second hold ball execution area 273g, second hold second area → second hold first area, second hold third area → second hold second area, second hold fourth area → second The data in each area is shifted, such as in a reserved third area.

  Next, in the process of S5544, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is the special symbol high probability state, that is, whether or not the “super probability fluctuation state” or the “probability fluctuation state” (S5544). As a result of the determination, when the gaming state is not the special symbol high probability state, that is, when it is determined to be the “normal gaming state” or the “time shortened state” (S5544: No), the jackpot probability of the second special symbol Since the small hit probability is in the low probability state, a special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 (see FIG. 455 (b)) for the low probability state of the second special symbol is set (S5545), and the process is performed in S5547. Move to determination process.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S5544, when the gaming state is the high probability state of the special symbol, that is, “super probability fluctuation state” or “probability fluctuation state” (S5544: Yes), the second special symbol Since the jackpot probability (and the small jackpot probability) are in the high probability state, the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 (see FIG. 455 (b)) for the high probability state of the second special symbol is set (S5546), and the processing is performed. Is transferred to the success / failure determination process of S5547.

  In the hit determination processing of S5547, first, in the second special symbol, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 273g and the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 set in S5545 or S5546 (see FIG. 455 (b)) to perform a small hit lottery (small hitting success / failure determination) process for determining whether or not a small hit has been won (S5547).

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the twenty-eighth embodiment, the small hit is determined based on the relationship between the set value set when the power is turned on, the value of the big hit random number counter C1, and the type of the special symbol. As described above, in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2, there is no setting difference in the small hit random number values (that is, all 9400 pieces), but the number (range) of the jackpot random number values different for each set value is By being changed, the value (range) of the small random number value differs for each set value.

  Specifically, when the gaming state (mode) of the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state of the special symbol (that is, the “normal gaming state” or the “time reduction state”), the small random number value for each set value is 9,400. In the case of the setting value “1”, the value is “50 to 9449”, in the case of the setting value “2”, the value is “52 to 9451”, and in the case of the setting value “3”, the value is “54 to 9453”. In the case of the setting value "4", it is defined as "56-9455", in the case of the setting value "5", it is "58-9457", and in the case of the setting value "6", it is defined as "60-9449". .

  On the other hand, when the gaming state (mode) of the pachinko machine 10 is in the special pattern high-probability state (that is, “super-probability fluctuation state” or “probability fluctuation state”), the small random number value for each set value is also 9,400. In the case of the set value “1”, it is “500-9899”, in the case of the set value “2”, it is “520-9919”, and in the case of the set value “3”, it is “540-9939”. In the case of the value "4", it is defined as "560-9959", in the case of the set value "5", it is defined as "580-9979", and in the case of the set value "6", it is defined as "600-9999".

  In the processing of S5547, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 273g is compared with the small jackpot random number value specified in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2, and they match. If so, it is determined that it is a small hit. As a result of the processing of S5547, when it is determined that the small hit is made (S5547: Yes), the display mode at the time of the small hit is set (S5548). In the twenty-eighth embodiment, since only one type of small hit game is provided, when a small hit is won, the same counter is obtained without checking other counters (for example, big hit type counter C2). The display mode (type) of the small hit game is set.

  Next, in the processing of S5549, the fluctuation pattern at the time of the small hit is determined (S5549), and the processing shifts to S5550. Specifically, in the process of S5549, the variation pattern is determined by the same control program as that at the time of the big hit or the loss. That is, in the special symbol display device 39 and the third symbol display device 81, based on the small hit display mode (stop type) and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 273g. Then, the dynamic time (variation time) of the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 from the selected rendering mode. In the twenty-eighth embodiment, in determining the fluctuation pattern at the time of the small hit, the E table 272d5 is selected without exception irrespective of the game state and the number of reserved balls, and further, “E9: special fluctuation” is completely selected in the E table 272d5. An effect mode is selected.

  The special special figure 2 large hit / small hit change pattern table 272e4 provided for each effect mode set in the processing of S5549 and referred to at the time of the "normal game state", or "super probability change state", "probability" The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 273g in the special pattern 2 big hit / small hit fluctuation pattern table 272e6 for probability change / time saving referred to in the "change state" or "time reduction state". Is selected. Then, the variation time is set based on the relationship between the variation pattern and the variation time that are defined in advance. In the twenty-eighth embodiment, in the determination of the fluctuation pattern at the time of the small hit, in the “normal game state”, the fluctuation pattern of “630 seconds”, which is the fluctuation element of “high-speed fluctuation (extremely long)” + "Variable element of" low-speed fluctuation "+" Variable element of "Normal reach" + Variable element of "Special reach" + "Variable element of" re-variation "" is selected, and "Super stochastic fluctuation state", "Probability fluctuation state" or "Time In the case of the "shortened state", the "3 seconds" fluctuation pattern "only the fluctuation element of" high-speed fluctuation (ultra short) "" is selected.

  Next, in the process of S5550, the special figure 1 is changed in order to determine whether or not the lottery result of the dynamic display of the first special symbol being executed is changed by the small hitting game of the second special symbol that has been won this time. The process (S5550) is performed, and then the process proceeds to S5557.

  Here, the special figure 1 change processing (S5550) which is one of the special figure 2 change start processing (S5508) executed by the MPU 271 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 474 is a flowchart showing the special figure 1 change processing (S5550).

  This special figure 1 change processing (S5550) is executed when the small hit game is won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, and the big hit game or the small hit game is performed in the dynamic display of the first special symbol being executed. If it can occur, the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol set this time (that is, “630 seconds” or “3 seconds”) and the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol being executed If the change time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol set this time is shorter than the change time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol being executed, the dynamic time of the first special symbol being executed is A process of changing the content of the display from a big hit or a small hit to a loss is performed.

  In the special figure 1 change processing (S5550), the MPU 271 first determines whether or not the dynamic display of the first special symbol is being executed (S5561). If the result of the determination is that the dynamic display of the first special symbol has not been executed (S5561: No), there is no dynamic display of the first special symbol to be changed. S5550) is ended, and the process returns to the special figure 2 change start process (FIG. 473).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5561 that the dynamic display of the first special symbol is being executed (S5561: Yes), the hit / fail result indicated by the dynamic display of the first special symbol being executed is lost. It is determined whether or not this is the case (S5562). As a result of the determination, if the dynamic display of the first special symbol being executed is lost (S5562: Yes), the large winning opening 65a or the small winning opening 72a will not be opened repeatedly, and in this case also. This special figure 1 change processing (S5550) ends, and the processing returns to special figure 2 change start processing (FIG. 473).

  On the other hand, in the process of S5562, if the dynamic display of the first special symbol being executed is not a loss, that is, if it is a big hit or a small hit (S5562: No), then the first special symbol being executed is displayed. The change time of the dynamic display (remaining execution time) is compared with the change time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol set this time (that is, “630 seconds” or “3 seconds”). 1 Whether the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the special symbol (remaining execution time) is longer than the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol set this time (that is, the remaining “630 seconds” or “3 seconds”) Is determined (S5563). In the dynamic display of the first special symbol, a variation pattern of “630 seconds” or more is configured not to be selected. Therefore, in S5563, it is configured to determine whether it is “3 seconds” or more. You may.

  As a result of the determination in S5563, when it is determined that the variation time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol being executed (the remaining execution time) is longer than the variation time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol set this time ( S5563: Yes), since the dynamic display of the second special symbol set this time derives the result of the winning first, the small hit game in the dynamic display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed, In order to prevent the overlapping winning opening 65a or the small winning opening 72a from being opened in duplicate, the result of the dynamic display of the first special symbol being executed is changed to "losing" (S5564), and the execution of the first special symbol being executed is changed. The change pattern (change time) of the dynamic display is set to be equal to the change pattern of the dynamic display of the second special symbol set this time (that is, “630 seconds” or “3 seconds”) (S5565). With this configuration, the result of the pass / fail of the second special symbol derived earlier is preferentially executed, and the result of the pass / fail of the first special symbol derived later is changed (erased). The opening of the opening 65a or the small winning opening 72a can be prevented beforehand, and an excessive gaming value can be prevented from being given to the player.

  Next, the special figure 1 variation pattern command based on the variation pattern changed in the processing of S5565 is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 273 (S5566), and based on the success / failure result changed in the processing of S5564. The special figure 1 display mode command is set in the ring buffer for command transmission (S5567). After the processing of S5567, the special figure 1 change processing (S5550) ends, and the processing returns to the special figure 2 change start processing (FIG. 473). As a result, the special figure 1 change pattern command and the special figure 1 stop type command are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output processing (S5101) of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 466) to be executed next. You.

  In the processing of S5563, if the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol being executed (the remaining execution time) is not longer (ie, shorter) than the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol set this time. When it is determined (S5563: No), the dynamic display of the second special symbol set this time derives the result of the success / failure, that is, the dynamic display of the first special symbol being executed is performed first. In order to derive the success / failure result, the jackpot game or the small jackpot game in the dynamic display of the first special symbol being executed is preferentially executed, and the opening of the duplicate big winning port 65a or the small winning port 72a is prevented beforehand. In this case, the pass / fail result of the second special symbol set this time is changed to "losing" (S5568), and the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the dynamic display of the second special symbol set this time is changed to the first special symbol being executed. Dynamic Display Fluctuation Time And equally set the remaining running time) (S5569), the special symbol 1 terminates change processing (S5550), returns to the special symbol 2 change start processing (see FIG. 473). With this configuration, the result of the first special symbol derived earlier is preferentially executed, and the result of the second special symbol derived later is changed (erased). The opening of the opening 65a or the small winning opening 72a can be prevented beforehand, and an excessive gaming value can be prevented from being given to the player.

  Returning to FIG. 473, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S5547 that the winning is not a small hit (S5547: No), then, the dynamic display of the first special symbol is being executed, and the lottery result of the big hit game in the dynamic display. It is determined whether or not can be derived (S5551). This determination is performed with reference to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 273f according to the game state and the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1 (see FIG. 455 (a)). When the big hit is not derived in the dynamic display of the first special symbol being executed (S5551: No), then, the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 273g, and S5545 or S5546. A jackpot lottery (win / fail judgment) process for determining whether or not a jackpot has been performed is performed based on the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 (see FIG. 455 (b)) set at (S5552).

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-eighth embodiment, it is determined whether or not a jackpot is present based on the relationship between the set value set at power-on, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and the current gaming state (mode). You. As described above, in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 (see FIG. 455 (b)), similar to the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1 (see FIG. 455 (a)), the jackpot random number value has a setting difference. The game state (mode) of the pachinko machine 10 is a normal low-probability state (ie, “normal game state” or “time reduction state”) and a high-probability state (ie, “super-probability state”). Or "probability variation state"), the value (range) of the jackpot random value is configured to be different. Note that the range of the jackpot random number value in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is the same as that of the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  Therefore, in the process of S5552, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 273g is compared with the jackpot random number value specified in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2, and those are compared. If they match, it is determined to be a jackpot. As a result of the processing of S5552, when it is determined that the dynamic display of the second special symbol at this time is a big hit (S5552: Yes), the big hit type counter C2 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 273g is next. Based on the value and the special figure 2 big hit type table 272b2 (see FIG. 456 (b)) corresponding to the second special symbol, the display mode at the time of the big hit of the second special symbol is set (S5553).

  In this process, according to the special figure 2 big hit type table 272b2, the big hit type associated with the value of the big hit type counter C2 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 273g, that is, the maximum round number after the 16 round big hit "Probability fluctuation A" which shifts to "super probability fluctuation state", "probability fluctuation B" which shifts to "probability fluctuation state" after a maximum of 6 rounds of jackpots, or " It is determined whether or not “time reduction” is to be entered for the “time reduction state”. Then, based on the determined jackpot type, the display mode at the time of the jackpot (display mode of the lower LED group 39b2) on the special symbol display device 39 is set. Specifically, the jackpot type is determined based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 273g and the special figure 2 jackpot type table 272b2 (see FIG. 456 (b)). .

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined (S5554), and the process proceeds to S5550. Specifically, first, in the special symbol display device 39 and the third symbol display device 81, the display mode (stop type) at the time of the big hit and the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 273g. The effect mode is selected based on the value, and the dynamic time (fluctuation time) of the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) is determined from the selected effect mode based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. In determining the variation pattern at the time of the big hit, first, a stop pattern table 272d (see FIG. 458 or 459) to be used is selected according to the type of stop at the big hit. Then, in the processing of S5550, as in the case of winning the small hit, in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, the dynamic (fluctuation) time of the big hit scheduled to be implemented this time, and in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, A special symbol which is prioritized according to whether a big hit or a small hit occurs, and whether the dynamic display of the first special symbol is longer or shorter than the dynamic time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol this time. Determine the jackpot or the small hit.

  In the twenty-eighth embodiment, there are three types of jackpot games, but if a jackpot is won, no matter which jackpot type is used, regardless of the number of pending balls of the dynamic display on standby, there is no exception. The D table 272d4 (see FIG. 459 (a)) is set. Then, in the D table 272d4, the effect mode corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 273g is selected.

  The special special figure 2 large hit / small hit change pattern table 272e4 provided for each effect mode selected in the processing of S5554 and referred to in the "normal game state", or the "super probability change state", "probability" The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 273g in the special pattern 2 big hit / small hit fluctuation pattern table 272e6 for probability change / time saving referred to in the "change state" or "time reduction state". Is selected. Then, the variation time is set based on the relationship between the variation pattern and the variation time that are defined in advance.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5551 that the big hit can be derived in the dynamic display of the first special symbol being executed (S5551: Yes), the big hit game is already derived in the dynamic display of the first special symbol. Is determined, the display mode at the time of the loss is set so that the big hit is not repeatedly derived in the dynamic display of the second special symbol (S5555).

  In the processing of S5555, the display mode of the special symbol display device 39 is set to a display mode corresponding to the lost symbol, and a rough variation pattern (effect mode) is set. The setting of the effect form includes the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 273g, the total value of the first reserved ball number counter 273a and the second reserved ball number counter 273b, and the current value. Based on the gaming state, the non-reach (long) production mode, the “non-reach (short)” production mode, the “normal reach” production mode, and the “super reach” are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the production mode. One of an effect mode, a “special reach” effect mode, and a “super long fluctuation” effect mode is set. In the twenty-eighth embodiment, each effect mode depends on whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the “normal gaming state”, the “super-probability variation state”, the “probability variation state”, or the “time reduction state”. The stop pattern table 272d is set so that the range of the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to.

  Next, the variation pattern at the time of losing is determined (S5556), and the flow shifts to the process of SS5557. In the processing of S5556, in the special symbol display device 39 and the third symbol display device 81, the fluctuation time until stop display with the lost symbol is determined. More specifically, a normal special figure 2 loss variation pattern table 272e3 provided for each loss display mode (effect mode) determined in the processing of S5555 and referred to in the "normal game state", or In the special pattern 2 loss variation pattern table 272e5 for probabilistic variation and time reduction referred to in the "super probability variation state", "probability variation state" or "time reduction state", the variable is stored in the second reserved ball execution area 273g. The change pattern associated with the value of the change type counter CS1 is selected. Then, the variation time is set based on the relationship between the variation pattern and the variation time that are defined in advance.

  In the process of S5552, when it is determined that the dynamic display of the second special symbol at this time is not a big hit (S5552: No), the process proceeds to S5555, and the processes of S5555 and S5556 are performed. The display mode and the fluctuation pattern at the time are set.

  Thus, the setting process of the effect mode and the variation pattern at the time of the small hit in the second special symbol, the process of setting the effect mode and the variation pattern at the time of the big hit, and the process of setting the effect mode and the variation pattern at the time of the loss, By using the same random number values C3 and CS1 to determine and determine by the same determination program, the program can be shared and the number of development steps during development can be reduced. In addition, by determining and determining the hit / fail determination processing for the second special symbol and the hit / fail determination processing for the first special symbol using the same determination program, the program can be shared and the number of development steps during development can be reduced. be able to.

  Next, in the processing of S5557, based on the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the dynamic display of the second special symbol determined by the processing of S5549, S5554, or S5556, the fluctuation pattern is provided via the sound lamp control device 113. The special figure 2 change pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the change time according to the setting is set (S5557).

  Specifically, for example, when the big hit lottery is won, the big hit type is “probability change A”, and a change pattern including a change element of “super reach” of “25 seconds” is selected. Is a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command that indicates "super reach" of special figure 2, jackpot, "probability fluctuation A", and "25 seconds". In addition, if the fluctuation pattern including the fluctuation element of “25 seconds” “Super Reach” is selected for the jackpot lottery, and the special pattern 2 is lost, “Super Reach” of “25 seconds” is selected. The special figure 2 variation pattern command shown is set. In this way, even if the fluctuation effect is the same fluctuation time, the special lamp 2 fluctuation pattern command is set together with the type of the special symbol, the validity of the fluctuation effect, and the content of the rough fluctuation pattern, so that the sound ramp control is performed. The device 113 can determine the type of the special symbol to be changed, the content of the effect mode including the pass / fail, and the change time, and can determine a detailed change pattern of the change effect based on the information.

  After the processing of S5557, a special figure for notifying the display control device 114 via the sound lamp control device 113 of the stop type of the dynamic display of the second special symbol set in the processing of S5548, S5553 or S5555. A 2 stop type command is set (S5558), the special figure 2 change start processing (S5508) ends, and the process returns to the special figure change processing (see FIG. 470).

  Specifically, for example, if the jackpot is won and the content of the jackpot is “probability variation A”, without specifying the specific third symbol stop mode (for example, “7” symbol), A special figure 2 stop type command indicating “probability variation A” is set. In addition, if the jackpot is won and the content of the jackpot is “time reduction”, it is “time reduction” without specifying the specific third symbol stop mode (for example, “4” symbol). A special type 2 stop type command is set to indicate this.

  On the other hand, if the jackpot is not won and the “Super Reach” production mode is selected, the specific stop mode (for example, “787”) of the third symbol is not specified and “ A special figure 2 stop type command is set to indicate the "super reach" effect mode. In addition, if the jackpot is not won and the “normal reach” effect mode is selected, a specific stop mode (for example, “737” or the like) of the third symbol is not specified, and the “normal reach” at the time of the loss is specified. A special figure 2 stop type command indicating the effect mode is set. Furthermore, if the jackpot is not won and the “non-reach” effect mode is selected, the specific stop mode of the third symbol (for example, “258” or the like) is not specified and “ A special figure 2 stop type command is set to indicate the "non-reach" effect mode.

  As described above, by setting the rough stop type based on the success or failure of the variable effect in the special figure 2 stop type command, the sound lamp control device 113 (the display control device 114) can determine whether the special symbol to be changed and the correct design are appropriate. By grasping the stop type based on the information, it is possible to determine a detailed fluctuation effect stop result based on the information.

  The special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command and the special figure 2 stop type command are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 273, and are externally output in the next timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 466). In (S5101), these commands are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the special figure 2 change pattern command and the special figure 2 stop type command, the sound ramp control device 113 generates a change pattern command for special figure 2 display and the special figure 2 display type command based on the command, and generates the display control device 114. Send to

  Next, with reference to FIG. 475, the fluctuation stop processing (S5509) which is one of the special figure fluctuation processing (S5110) executed by the MPU 271 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 475 is a flowchart showing this fluctuation stop processing (S5509).

  This fluctuation stop processing (S5110) is to change the display content of the upper LED group 39b1 or the lower LED group 39b2 of the special symbol display device 39 during the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the dynamic display of the second special symbol. At the same time as updating, when the end timing of each dynamic display comes, a determination command according to the special symbol to be ended is set, and the fluctuation of the dynamic display of the special symbol at the end timing is stopped.

  In the fluctuation stop processing (S5509), the MPU 271 first determines whether or not the dynamic display of the first special symbol is being executed on the special symbol display device 39 (S5571). As a result of the determination, if the dynamic display of the first special symbol is not executed (S5571: No), S5572 to S5581 relating to the stop processing of the first special symbol are skipped, and the process shifts to S5582.

  On the other hand, if the dynamic display of the first special symbol is being executed (S5571: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the execution time (variation time) of the dynamic display of the first special symbol being executed has elapsed. (S5572). The display time during the dynamic display of the first special symbol on the special symbol display device 39 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the special pattern 1 variation pattern command). If the dynamic display time (variation time) has not elapsed (S5572: No), the display of the upper LED group 39b1 on the special symbol display device 39 is updated (S5573), and the process proceeds to S5582. .

  In the twenty-eighth embodiment, in the upper LED group 39b1 of the special symbol display device 39, for example, the uppermost LED of the upper LED group 39b1 is used until the fluctuation time elapses from the start of the dynamic display of the first special symbol. When the lower LED is turned on one by one and the lower LED is turned on one after another, a display mode of repeatedly displaying a lighting pattern in which the lower LED is turned on one by one from the uppermost LED again is used. Is set.

  On the other hand, if the dynamic display time (variation time) of the dynamic display of the first special symbol on the special symbol display device 39 has elapsed (S5572: Yes), the upper LED group 39b1 of the special symbol display device 39 is displayed. Then, a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol is set (S5574). The stop symbol is preset by the special figure 1 change start processing (see FIG. 471), the special figure 2 change processing (see FIG. 472), or the special figure 1 change processing (see FIG. 474). By the processing of S5518, S5523, or S5525 of the special figure 1 change start processing, or S5538 of the special figure 2 change processing, the big hit or the small hit is determined according to the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 273f. Winning or losing is determined. Then, in the case of a jackpot, a symbol that becomes “probability variation A”, a symbol that becomes “probability variation B”, or a symbol that becomes “time reduction” after the jackpot is determined based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2. You. In the case of a small hit, a symbol corresponding to the small hit is determined. Further, in the case of a loss, a symbol corresponding to the loss is determined.

  When the display mode of the special symbol display device 39 corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the process of S5574, the stop effect of the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81 is changed to the display of the upper LED group 39b1 on the special symbol display device 39. In order to synchronize and confirm the display, a special figure 1 decision command is set (S5575), and the process shifts to S5576.

  The special figure 1 confirmation command is a command for confirming and displaying the variable effect corresponding to the first special symbol being executed on the third symbol display device 81. Upon receiving this special figure 1 determination command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a special figure 1 display determination command to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the confirmation command for special figure 1 display, stops the fluctuation effect of the third symbol and the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol on the third symbol display device 81, and stops the symbol. Is displayed.

  Next, in the processing of S5576, it is determined whether or not the value of a time reduction counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 273 is larger than “0” in order to determine whether or not the “time reduction state” is established (S5576). ).

  This time-saving counter is a counter for indicating the “time reduction state”, and the value of a predetermined number (“50” in the twenty-eighth embodiment) is set at the end of the jackpot type of the jackpot corresponding to “time reduction”. Is set. Then, each time one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is dynamically displayed, the value of the time-saving counter is decremented by one each time, and the value of the time-saving counter is greater than “0”. In addition, the gaming state is determined as the "time reduction state". Specifically, in the jackpot end process (see FIG. 480), which is one of the jackpot processes (see FIG. 477) to be described later, when the jackpot state ends and the “time reduction state” is started, At the end of the jackpot of the jackpot type corresponding to “shortening”, “50” is set.

  Although the value of the time saving counter is configured to be decremented in the dynamic display of any special symbol, it is configured to be decremented only when the dynamic display of any one of the special symbols is executed. You may. Specifically, for example, when the dynamic display of the first special symbol is executed, the value of the time reduction counter is not subtracted, and only when the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed, the value of the time reduction counter is subtracted. With this configuration, for example, in the “time reduction state”, even if the dynamic display of the first special symbol having no winning assistance function is executed, the “time reduction state” is maintained, and the prize assisting function is maintained. The "time reduction state" can be digested only when the dynamic display of the second special symbol having the function is executed. Therefore, in the entire "time shortened state", a dynamic display of a special symbol having a prize assist function can be executed, and a player can be provided with a game value by the game having the prize assist function, and the interest of the game can be increased. Can be improved.

  In addition, a time reduction counter is provided for each special symbol, and the time reduction counter has a different value for each special symbol (for example, “10” for the time reduction counter for the first special symbol, and “10” for the time reduction counter for the second special symbol). May be set to “100”), and the “time reduction state” may be ended when the value of one of the time saving counters becomes “0”. With such a configuration, by providing a plurality of conditions for terminating the "time reduction state", a variation can be provided in the game, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the processing of S5576, if the value of the time reduction counter is larger than “0” (S5576: Yes), it is “time reduction state”, and the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) of the first special symbol has been completed once. The value of the counter is decremented by 1 (S5577), and the process shifts to S5578. On the other hand, in the processing of S5576, if the value of the time reduction counter is not a value larger than “0” (S5576: No), it is not “time reduction state” but “super probability fluctuation state”, “probability fluctuation state”, or “normal”. Since the game state is “game state”, the process of S5577 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S5578.

  In the process of S5578, it is determined whether or not a big hit is derived in the dynamic display of the first special symbol stopped this time (S5578). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the big hit is not derived in the dynamic display of the first special symbol stopped this time (S5578: No), then, in the dynamic display of the first special symbol stopped this time, the small hit is determined. It is determined whether or not is derived (S5579). In the processing of S5578 or S5579, when it is determined that the big hit is derived (S5578: Yes) or when the small hit is determined to be derived (S5579: Yes), the first special symbol stopped this time To stop the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed in order to preferentially execute the big hit game or the small hit game based on the dynamic display of the lower symbol group 39b2 of the special symbol display device 39 Then, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol is set (S5580). In this case, since the stop symbol of the dynamic display of the second special symbol has been changed to the display mode corresponding to the loss by S5534 of the special figure 2 change process (see FIG. 472), the symbol corresponding to the loss is determined. You.

  When the display mode of the special symbol display device 39 corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the processing of S5580, the stop symbol of the variable effect corresponding to the second special symbol on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the special symbol display device 39. In order to confirm and synchronize with the display of the lower LED group 39b2, a special figure 2 decision command is set (S5581), and the process shifts to S5582.

  The special figure 2 confirmation command is a command for confirming and displaying the variable effect corresponding to the second special symbol being executed on the third symbol display device 81. Upon receiving this special figure 2 confirmation command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a special figure 2 display confirmation command to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 stops the fluctuation effect of the third symbol and the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol on the third symbol display device 81 by receiving the special figure 2 display confirmation command, and stops the symbol. Is displayed.

  In the process of S5579, when it is determined that the small hit is not derived in the dynamic display of the first special symbol stopped this time (S5579: No), the processes of S5580 and S5581 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S5582. Move to.

  Next, in the processing of S5582, it is determined whether or not the dynamic display of the second special symbol is being executed on the special symbol display device 39 (S5582). If the result of the determination is that the dynamic display of the second special symbol has not been executed (S5582: No), S5583 to S5592 relating to the stop processing of the second special symbol are skipped, and the fluctuation stop processing (S5509) ends. Then, the process returns to the special figure change processing (see FIG. 470).

  On the other hand, if the dynamic display of the second special symbol is being executed (S5582: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the execution time (variation time) of the dynamic display of the currently executed second special symbol has elapsed. (S5583). The display time during dynamic display of the second special symbol on the special symbol display device 39 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the special pattern 2 variation pattern command). If the dynamic display time (variation time) has not elapsed (S5583: No), the display of the lower LED group 39b2 on the special symbol display device 39 is updated (S5584), and the dynamic stop processing (S5509). ) Is ended, and the process returns to the special figure change processing (see FIG. 470).

  In the twenty-eighth embodiment, in the lower LED group 39b2 of the special symbol display device 39, as in the case of the upper LED group 39b1, for example, the lower LED group 39b2 until the fluctuation time elapses from the start of the dynamic display of the second special symbol. A lighting pattern in which the lowermost LEDs of the group 39b2 are turned on one by one from the uppermost LED, and when the lowermost LEDs are turned on, the lowermost LEDs are turned on one by one from the uppermost LED again. Is displayed repeatedly.

  On the other hand, if the dynamic display time (variation time) of the dynamic display of the second special symbol on the special symbol display device 39 has elapsed (S5583: Yes), the lower LED group 39b2 of the special symbol display device 39 is displayed. Then, a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol is set (S5585). The stop symbol is preset by the special figure 2 change start processing (see FIG. 473), the special figure 1 change processing (see FIG. 474), or the special figure 2 change processing (see FIG. 472). According to the processing of S5548, S5553 or S5555 of the special figure 2 change start processing or S5568 of the special figure 1 change processing, a big hit or a small hit is determined according to the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 273g. Winning or losing is determined. Then, in the case of a jackpot, a symbol that becomes “probability variation A”, a symbol that becomes “probability variation B”, or a symbol that becomes “time reduction” after the jackpot is determined based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2. You. In the case of a small hit, a symbol corresponding to the small hit is determined. Further, in the case of a loss, a symbol corresponding to the loss is determined.

  When the display mode of the special symbol display device 39 corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the processing of S5585, the stop effect of the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81 is changed to the display of the lower LED group 39b2 on the special symbol display device 39. A special figure 2 finalization command is set (S5586) in order to perform synchronous and final display, and the process moves to S5587.

  Next, in the processing of S5587, it is determined whether or not the value of a time reduction counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 273 is larger than “0” in order to determine whether or not the “time reduction state” is established (S5587). ). As a result of the determination, if the value of the time reduction counter is greater than “0” (S5587: Yes), it is “time reduction state”, and the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) of the second special symbol has been completed once. Is subtracted by 1 (S5588), and the process moves to S5589. On the other hand, in the processing of S5587, if the value of the time reduction counter is not a value larger than “0” (S5587: No), it is not “time reduction state” but “super probability fluctuation state”, “probability fluctuation state”, or “normal”. Game state, the process of S5588 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S5589.

  In the processing of S5589, it is determined whether or not a big hit is derived in the dynamic display of the second special symbol stopped this time (S5589). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the big hit is not derived in the dynamic display of the second special symbol stopped this time (S5589: No), then, in the dynamic display of the second special symbol stopped this time, the small hit is determined. Is determined (S5590). In the processing of S5589 or S5590, when it is determined that the big hit is derived (S5589: Yes), or when it is determined that the small hit is derived (S5590: Yes), the second special symbol to be stopped this time is used. In order to preferentially execute the big hit game or the small hit game based on the dynamic display of the above, in order to stop the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed, the upper LED group 39b1 of the special symbol display device 39 Then, a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol is set (S5592). In this case, since the stop symbol of the dynamic display of the first special symbol has been changed to the display mode corresponding to the loss by S5564 of the special figure 1 change process (see FIG. 474), the symbol corresponding to the loss is determined. You.

  When the display mode of the special symbol display device 39 corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the processing of S5591, the stop symbol of the variable effect corresponding to the first special symbol on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the special symbol display device 39. A special figure 1 determination command is set (S5592) in order to perform a final display in synchronization with the display of the upper LED group 39b1, and this motion stop processing (S5509) is ended, and a special figure change processing (see FIG. 470) is performed. Return.

  In the processing of S5590, when it is determined that the small hit is not derived in the dynamic display of the second special symbol stopped this time (S5590: No), the fluctuation stop processing (S5509) ends and the special figure is stopped. Return to the fluctuation processing (see FIG. 470).

  As described above, in the fluctuation stop process (S5509), the timing for stopping the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the timing for stopping the dynamic display of the second special symbol are determined separately, so that the special special symbols are simultaneously and in parallel. Even in the case of performing each of the symbol fluctuating effects, each special symbol can be individually stopped and displayed, and a consistent effect can be executed. In addition, when a big hit or a small hit is derived in the fluctuation effect of one special symbol, a decision command is also transmitted to the fluctuation effect of the other special symbol, just in case, and the fluctuation of the other special symbol is changed. The effect can be stopped reliably. The fixed command is a command for performing only the process of stopping the variable effect, and even if the variable command of 2 is transmitted twice for the variable effect of 1 special symbol, a discrepancy in the effect occurs. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 does not judge an error even when the confirmation command is received repeatedly. Therefore, even if the confirmation command of 2 is transmitted for the fluctuation effect of one special symbol, no trouble or the like occurs, and the fluctuation effect can be surely stopped and a consistent effect can be executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 476, a general-purpose variation process (S5111) which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 466) executed by the MPU 271 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 476 is a flowchart showing the ordinary figure change processing (S5111). The normal symbol variation process (S5111) controls the variable display of the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display device 83.

  The MPU 271 first determines whether or not the ordinary electric hand 64c is currently open (operating), that is, whether or not the ordinary symbol is being hit (S5601). ). As a result of the discrimination, if the ordinary electric hand 64c is open (S5601: Yes), since the ordinary symbol is being hit, the ordinary figure variation processing (S5111) is terminated and the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 466). Return to).

  On the other hand, if the ordinary electric hand 64c is not open (S5601: No), it is not a hit of an ordinary symbol, so next, it is determined whether or not the display mode of the ordinary symbol display device 83 is variably displaying the ordinary symbol. It is determined (S5602). As a result of the determination, if the display mode of the ordinary symbol display device 83 is not variable display of the ordinary symbol (S5602: No), the variable display on the ordinary symbol display device 83 is stopped for a predetermined time (for example, “1 second”). )) It is determined whether or not it has elapsed (S5603). As a result, if the predetermined time has not elapsed after the variable display is stopped (S5603: No), the ordinary figure variation processing (S5111) is ended, and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 466). Thus, the stop symbol in the variable display is displayed on the ordinary symbol display device 83 for a predetermined time, so that the player can visually recognize the stop symbol.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S5603, if a predetermined time has elapsed after the variable display is stopped (S5603: Yes), the value of the ordinary figure reserved ball number counter 273h (variable for the ordinary symbol retained in the main control device 110). It is determined whether or not the number of operation-reserved balls HN) is greater than "0" (S5604).

  As a result of the processing in S5604, if the value of the ordinary figure pending ball number counter 273h (the operation reserved ball number HN) is not larger than “0” (S5604: No), there is a reserved pattern number of ordinary symbols to be executed that is variably displayed. Since this is not the case, the ordinary figure change processing (S5111) ends, and the flow returns to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 466). On the other hand, if the value of the ordinary figure retaining ball number counter 273h (the operation retaining number of balls HN) is a value larger than “0” (S5604: Yes), it is the execution start timing of the variable display related to the ordinary symbol retained. In step S5605, the value of the ordinary figure reserved ball number counter 273h (operation reserved ball number HN) is decremented by one. This is because the execution of one variable display among the variable displays related to the ordinary symbols that has been suspended is started by the processing (S5606 to S5613) described later, and the number of reserved balls relating to the ordinary symbols is reduced by one. That's why.

  Next, the data stored in the ordinary figure reserved sphere storage area 273i is shifted (S5606). This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the general figure holding sphere storing area 273i toward the general figure holding sphere execution area 273j. Reservation first area → Utsugi reservation ball execution area 273j, Pujitsu reservation second area → Pujitsu reservation first area, Pujitsu reservation third area → Pujitsu reservation second area, Pujitsu reservation fourth area → Pujizu The data in each area is shifted, such as in a reserved third area.

  After the data shift process of S5606, the normal symbol display device 83 changes the ordinary symbol based on the data stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball execution area 273j by the data shift process (ie, the value of the ordinary symbol counter C4). In order to execute the display, first, it is determined whether the gaming state is the “normal gaming state” or the “super-probability changing state” (S5607). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the state is the “normal game state” or the “super probability fluctuation state” (S5607: Yes), the variable display time of the ordinary symbol is set to “5 seconds” (S5608), and the process proceeds to S5610. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the gaming state is not the “normal gaming state” or the “super-probability variation state”, that is, when it is determined to be the “probability variation state” or the “time reduction state” (S5607: No), The variable display time of the ordinary symbol is set to “0.5 seconds” shorter than the “normal game state” or “super probability fluctuation state” (S5609), and the process proceeds to S5610.

  Thereby, in the "probability changing state" or the "time shortening state" in the right-handed game, the variable display of the ordinary symbol is performed while the ball is rolling on the upper surface of the ordinary electric hand 64c (that is, about 3 seconds). Is stopped and the variable display wins, the ordinary electric hand 64c is opened, and almost all the balls rolling on the upper surface of the ordinary electric hand 64c fall below the game board 13 in a front view. Then, it is configured to flow into the second starting port 64b (that is, does not flow into the small winning port 72a side). On the other hand, in the “super probability fluctuation state” in the right-handed game, the variable display of the ordinary symbol may not stop while the ball is rolling on the upper surface of the ordinary electric hand 64c. It is configured so that it can roll completely from the right end to the left end and flow down to the small winning opening 72a side of the second variable winning device 72. Therefore, even with the same right-handed game, it is possible to create a game state that flows into the small winning opening 72a and a game state that does not flow into the small winning opening 72a, thereby enriching the variation of the game and improving the interest of the game.

  In the process of S5610, a stop symbol in the variable display of the normal symbol, that is, whether or not the variable symbol of the normal symbol is displayed is determined with reference to the random number table 272f per symbol according to the game state (S5610). Specifically, in the “normal gaming state” and the “super-probability changing state”, that is, in the low-probability state of the ordinary symbol, the general-purpose-holding ball is referred to by referring to the group for the low-probability state in the random number table per general figure 272f. The value of the random number counter C4 per ordinary symbol stored in the execution area 273j is determined, and a symbol for stopping the variable display of the ordinary symbol (that is, whether or not the symbol is an ordinary symbol) is determined. In the “probability fluctuation state” and the “time reduction state”, that is, in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, the group for the high probability state in the random number table per general figure 272f is referred to, and the general figure holding ball execution area 273j is displayed. The stored value of the random number counter C4 per symbol is determined, and a symbol for stopping variable display of the ordinary symbol (that is, whether or not the symbol is an ordinary symbol) is determined. After the processing in S5610, the ordinary figure fluctuation processing (S5111) ends, and the flow returns to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 466).

  Thus, by changing the probability of the normal symbol according to the game state, it is determined whether or not the normal electric hand 64c is easy to open when the ball passes through the through gate 67 when the player hits right. It can make a difference. As a result, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the normal electric hand 64c is easily opened (that is, a high probability state of a normal symbol) and easily flows into the second starting port 64b side. In a situation where the electric hand 64c is difficult to open (that is, a low probability state of the normal symbol), the upper surface of the closed (projecting) normal electric hand 64c is rolled from the right end to the left end, and is directed to the small winning opening 72a side. By making the situation that can flow into the game state different depending on the game state, it is possible to produce different game characteristics for each game state.

  In the process of S5602, when it is determined that the display mode of the ordinary symbol display device 83 is in variable display (S5602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variable display time has elapsed (S5611). The variable display time of the ordinary symbol display device 83 is determined according to the game state by the processing of S5608 or S5609. If the variable display time has not elapsed (S5611: No), the display of the ordinary symbol display device 83 is performed. Is updated (S5612), the ordinary figure change processing (S5111) ends, and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 466).

  On the other hand, if the variable display time of the variable display on the ordinary symbol display device 83 has elapsed (S5611: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol preset in S5610 is set on the ordinary symbol display device 83. (S5613), and ends the ordinary figure change processing (S5111) and returns to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 466).

  Thus, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-eighth embodiment, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the variable display in the ordinary symbol display device 83 is set based on the ordinary symbol variation processing (S5111), and the ordinary symbol is set. From the start of the variable display on the display device 83 to the lapse of the variable display time, the symbol “O” and the symbol “X” are alternately lit. Then, when the variable display result is a hit, the symbol “O” is turned on, and when the result is a loss, the symbol “X” is turned on.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 477, the hit processing (S5103), which is one processing of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 466) executed by the MPU 271 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 477 is a flowchart showing the hit processing (S5103).

  As described above, in the hitting process (S5103), when a special symbol big hit occurs, the number of times (number of rounds) of opening the special winning opening 65a is set according to the type of the big hit (big hit type), The opening time of the winning opening 65a is set. Then, in the case of the big hit state, a special winning opening opening / closing control process (see FIG. 478) for controlling opening or closing of the special winning opening 65a is executed. At the end of the jackpot, a jackpot ending process (see FIG. 480) for ending the jackpot is executed. Furthermore, when a small hit of a special symbol occurs, the number of times of opening the small winning opening 72a (the number of rounds) and the opening time of the small winning opening 72a are set. Then, in the case of the small hit state, a small winning opening opening / closing control process (see FIG. 481) for controlling the opening or closing of the small winning opening 72a is executed.

  That is, in the jackpot game, the special winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the big hit state, and the maximum opening time of the special winning opening 65a ("30 seconds" in the twenty-eighth embodiment) has elapsed, or the special winning opening has been set. It is determined whether or not a predetermined number of balls (10 in the twenty-eighth embodiment) have won the ball 65a. When any one of these closing conditions is satisfied, the special winning opening 65a is closed, and the control related to opening and closing the special winning opening 65a are repeatedly executed a predetermined number of rounds.

  In the small hit game, the small winning opening 72a is opened in the round of the small winning state (ie, one round), and the maximum opening time of the small winning opening 72a (“1.8 seconds” in the twenty-eighth embodiment) is set. The closing condition is determined as to whether the time has elapsed or whether or not a predetermined number of balls (one ball in the twenty-eighth embodiment) has won the small winning opening 72a. When any of these closing conditions is satisfied, the small winning opening 72a is closed, and the control related to opening and the control related to closing the small winning opening 72a are executed only once.

  In the hit processing (S5103), the MPU 271 first determines whether or not the jackpot lottery result has been derived (winning) as a dynamic display lottery result of any special symbol (S5701). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the jackpot lottery result is derived as the lottery result of the dynamic display (fluctuating effect) of any special symbol (S5701: Yes), the control relating to the won jackpot is executed. First, the number of rounds according to the winning jackpot type is set in a round counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 273 (S5702). Then, in order to transmit a jackpot opening command indicating that the jackpot is started to the sound ramp control device 113, the jackpot opening command is set in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 273 (S5703). A jackpot opening time (for example, “5 seconds”) is set (S5704), and the process proceeds to S5709. As a result, the jackpot opening command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S5101) of the timer interrupt process executed next.

  When any of the jackpots is won, the special symbol and the ordinary symbol are both set to the low probability state during the jackpot regardless of the gaming state and the jackpot type. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a prize is frequently given to the second starting opening 64b based on the winning of the ordinary symbol during the big hit.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5701, when it is determined that the jackpot lottery result is not derived (not won) as the lottery result of the dynamic display (variable effect) of any special symbol (S5701: No) Next, it is determined whether or not a small hit lottery result has been derived (winning) as the dynamic display lottery result (S5705). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the small hit lottery result has been derived (winned) in the dynamic display (variable production) of any special symbol (S5705: Yes), the control relating to the winning small hit is executed. For this purpose, first, a round counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 273 is set to "1" which is the number of rounds according to the winning small win (S5706). Then, the small hit opening command is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 273 in order to transmit the small hit opening command indicating that the small hit is started to the sound ramp control device 113 (S5707). Next, the opening time of the small hit (for example, “1 second”) is set (S5708), and the process shifts to S5709. Thus, the small hit opening command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S5101) of the timer interrupt process to be executed next.

  With such a configuration, the value of the round counter is set according to the winning jackpot or the small hit, and the number of times the large winning port 65a or the small winning port 72a is opened according to the winning combination is set. An opening effect corresponding to a big hit or a small hit can be executed.

  Next, in the process of S5709, it is determined whether or not a jackpot game is being executed (S5709). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the big hit game is being executed (S5709: Yes), the big win port opening / closing control processing for executing the opening / closing control of the big win port 65a corresponding to the big hit game is executed (S5710). .

  Here, the winning opening opening / closing control process (S5710), which is one of the hit processes (see FIG. 477) executed by the MPU 271 in the main control device 110, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 478 is a flowchart showing the special winning opening opening / closing control process (S5710). In this special winning opening opening / closing control process (S5710), the opening / closing control of the special winning opening 65a is executed based on the number of times the special winning opening 65a is opened set in the winning process (S5103).

  In the special winning opening opening / closing control process (S5710), the MPU 271 first determines whether or not the special winning opening 65a is open (S5721). As a result of the determination, if the special winning opening 65a is being opened (S5721: Yes), a special winning opening opening process for controlling the opened special winning opening 65a is executed (S5722), and the special winning opening is opened and closed. The control process (S5710) ends, and the process returns to the hitting process (see FIG. 477).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5721 that the special winning opening 65a has not been opened (S5721: No), then the jackpot opening time set in the winning processing (see FIG. 477), or It is determined whether or not the interval time set in the special winning opening process (see FIG. 479) has elapsed (S5723). If the result of the determination is that the jackpot opening time or interval time has elapsed (S5723: Yes), a special winning opening opening process for opening the special winning opening 65a is executed to start a new round in the big hit game. (S5724) Then, "10" is set to the value of a winning counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 273 (S5725). Then, an opening time setting for setting the maximum opening time (ie, “30 seconds”) of the special winning opening 65 a is performed (S 5726), and an opening command indicating that the special winning opening 65 a has been opened is set in a command provided in the RAM 273. A transmission ring buffer is set (S5727), and the process proceeds to S5722. As a result, the release command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S5101) of the timer interrupt process executed next.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S5723, if the jackpot opening time or the interval time has not elapsed (S5723: No), since the jackpot opening time or the interval time is in progress, the processing of S5724 to S5727 is skipped. The special winning opening opening / closing control process (S5710) ends, and the process returns to the winning process (see FIG. 477).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 479, the special winning opening opening process (S5722), which is one process of the special winning opening opening / closing control process (see FIG. 478) executed by the MPU 271 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 479 is a flowchart showing this special winning opening processing (S5727).

  In the special winning opening opening process (S5722), the MPU 271 first determines whether or not the opening time of the special winning opening 65a set in S5726 of the above-described special winning opening opening / closing control process (see FIG. 477) has elapsed. Is determined (S5731). If the result of the determination is that the opening time of the special winning opening 65a has elapsed (S5731: Yes), one closing condition of the special winning opening 65a is satisfied, and it is the closing timing of the special winning opening 65a in that round. Then, the value of the winning counter is cleared to "0" (S5732), and the process shifts to S5736. The closing process of the special winning opening 65a from S5736 will be described later.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S5731, unless the opening time of the special winning opening 65a has elapsed (S5731: No), the closing timing of the special winning opening 65a has not arrived, so that the opening of the special winning opening 65a is maintained. Next, it is determined whether or not a ball has been detected by the special winning opening switch (not shown) (S5733), that is, whether or not the ball has won the special winning opening 65a.

  In the process of S5733, if a ball is detected by the special winning opening switch (S5733: Yes), that is, if the ball has won the special winning opening 65a, the value of the winning counter is decremented by 1 (S5734). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter obtained by subtracting 1 is greater than “0” (S5735). As a result of the determination, if the value of the winning counter is not greater than “0” (S5735: No), that is, if the value of the winning counter is equal to or less than “0”, ten balls win in the special winning opening 65a. Since one closing condition of the special winning opening 65a is satisfied, the process shifts to S5736 to close the special winning opening 65a.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5733, when the ball is not detected by the special winning opening switch (S5733: No), that is, when the ball does not win in the special winning opening 65a, or in the process of S5735, the winning counter of the winning counter is determined. If it is determined that the value is larger than “0” (S5735: Yes), the closing condition of the special winning opening 65a is not satisfied, so that the open state of the special winning opening 65a is maintained. The processing of opening the special winning opening (S5722) is ended without performing the processing of S5740. After the end of the special winning opening process (S5722), the process returns to the winning process (see FIG. 477).

  In the closing process of the special winning opening 65a from S5736, first, a special winning opening closing process for closing the special winning opening 65a is executed (S5736), and then the special winning opening 65a is set to the audio lamp control device 113. A close command indicating that the camera is closed is set (S5737), and the process shifts to S5738. The closing command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 273, and is output during the external output processing (see S5101 in FIG. 466) of the timer interrupt processing to be executed next. It is transmitted to the control device 113.

  Next, in the process of S5738, since one round of the special winning opening 65a has been consumed, the value of the round counter is subtracted by 1 (S5738), and whether the value of the round counter obtained by subtracting 1 is a value larger than “0” or not. It is determined whether or not (S5739). If the result of the determination is that the value of the round counter is a hit larger than “0” (S5739: Yes), the number of rounds (the number of opening of the special winning opening 65a) in the jackpot is in a state of remaining. Next, an interval time (for example, "2 seconds") until the special winning opening 65a is opened is set (S5740), and the special winning opening process (S5722) ends. After the end of the special winning opening process (S5722), the process returns to the winning process (see FIG. 477).

  On the other hand, in the process of S5739, when the value of the round counter is not a value larger than “0” (S5739: No), that is, when the value of the round counter is equal to or smaller than “0”, the large winning opening 65a in this big hit is Since all the opening operations have been completed, in order to end the jackpot state, the processing of S5740 is skipped, the interval time is not set, and the special winning opening processing (S5722) is ended to open and close the special winning opening. The process returns to the control process (see FIG. 478), and then returns to the hit process (see FIG. 477).

  Returning to FIG. 477, the description will be continued. After the end of the special winning opening opening / closing control process in S5710, it is determined whether the value of the round counter is greater than “0” (S5711). If the result of the determination is that the value of the round counter is greater than “0” (S5711: Yes), the process of S5712 is skipped in order to continue the big hit game, and the hit process (S5103) is performed once. Then, the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 466). On the other hand, when the value of the round counter is not a value larger than “0” (S5711: No), that is, when the value of the round counter is equal to or smaller than “0”, a jackpot ending process is executed to end the jackpot game. (S5712), the hit processing (S5103) ends, and the flow returns to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 466).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 480, the jackpot end process (S5712), which is one of the hit processes (see FIG. 477) executed by the MPU 271 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 480 is a flowchart showing the jackpot ending process (S5712).

  In the jackpot ending process (S5712) of the twenty-eighth embodiment, based on the jackpot type in which the jackpot game has occurred, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game, that is, the jackpot probability of the special symbol executed after the jackpot game and the normal symbol Set the hit probability.

  In the big hit end processing (S5712), the MPU 271 first determines whether or not the big hit type that has generated the current big hit game is “probability variation A” (S5751). As a result of the determination, if the jackpot type is “probability variation A” (S5751: Yes), the special symbol is set to the high probability state as the game state after the end of the jackpot game (S5752), and the normal symbol is set to low. A probability state is set (S5753), and the process proceeds to S5760. That is, a “super-probability changing state” in which the special symbol is in the high-probability state and the ordinary symbol is in the low-probability state is set. In the twenty-eighth embodiment, since the counter for counting the number of executions of the special symbol in the “super probability fluctuation state” is not set, the “super probability fluctuation state” is maintained until the next jackpot is won. Becomes

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S5751 that the jackpot type is not “probability variation A” (S5751: No), then, it is determined whether the jackpot type that generated the current jackpot game is “probability variation B”. It is determined whether or not (S5754). As a result of the determination, if the jackpot type is “probability variation B” (S5754: Yes), the special symbol is set to the high probability state as the game state after the end of the jackpot game (S5755), and the ordinary symbol is also high. A probability state is set (S5756), and the process proceeds to S5760. That is, a “probability variation state” in which both the special symbol and the ordinary symbol are in the high probability state is set. In the twenty-eighth embodiment, since a counter or the like for counting the number of executions of the special symbol in the “probability variation state” is not set, the “probability variation state” is maintained until the next big hit is won. In the processing of S5754, when it is determined that the jackpot type is not “probability variation B” (S5754: No), the jackpot type that generated the jackpot game this time is “time reduction”, and therefore, after the jackpot game ends. As the gaming state, the special symbol is set to the low probability state (S5557), the ordinary symbol is set to the high probability state (S5758), and the value of the time reduction counter (not shown) is set to "50" (S5759). ) And the process moves to S5760. That is, the “time reduction state” in which the special symbol is in the low probability state and the ordinary symbol is in the high probability state is set. In the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-eighth embodiment, the “time reduction state” set here is maintained while the value of the time reduction counter is greater than “0”, and the value of the time reduction counter is greater than “0”. When the value is no longer the same (that is, when the value of the time reduction counter becomes “0” or less), a transition is made to the “normal gaming state”.

  In the process of S5760, to end the jackpot, first, an ending command indicating the start of the jackpot ending effect is set to the sound lamp control device 113 (S5760). Then, a jackpot end setting process for setting the ending time and the like is performed (S5761), the jackpot end process (S5712) ends, and the process returns to the hit process (see FIG. 477). The ending command set in the process of S5760 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 273, and is included in the external output process (see S5101 in FIG. 466) of the next timer interrupt process. Is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113.

  Returning to FIG. 477, the description will be continued. In the process of S5709, when it is determined that it is not a big hit (S5709: No), it is next determined whether or not a small hit game is being executed (S5713). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the small hitting game is being executed (S5713: Yes), the small winning opening / closing control processing for executing the opening / closing control of the small winning opening 72a corresponding to the small hitting game is executed (S5713: Yes). S5714).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 481, the small winning opening opening / closing control process (S5714), which is one process of the hitting process (see FIG. 477) executed by the MPU 271 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 481 is a flowchart showing the small winning opening opening / closing control process (S5714). In the small winning opening opening / closing control process (S5714), a round counter and a winning counter, which are also used in the control at the time of the big hit, are set and determined, and the opening / closing control of the small winning opening 72a is executed.

  In the small winning opening opening / closing control process (S5714), the MPU 271 first determines whether or not the small winning opening 72a is being opened (S5771). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the small winning opening 72a is not opened (S5771: No), the process proceeds to S5777 without performing S5772 to S5776, which is the control regarding the opening of the small winning opening 72a.

  On the other hand, if the small winning opening 72a is being opened (S5771: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the small winning opening time set in the winning process (see FIG. 477) has elapsed (S5772). As a result of the determination, if the opening time of the small hit has elapsed (S5772: Yes), a small winning opening opening process of opening the small winning opening 72a is executed to start one round of the small hit game ( (S5773) Then, "1" is set to the value of a winning counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 273 (S5774). Then, an opening time is set to set the maximum opening time of the small winning opening 72a (that is, "1.8 seconds") (S5775), and a small opening command indicating that the small winning opening 72a is opened is provided in the RAM 273. It is set to the received command transmission ring buffer (S5776), and the process moves to S5777. As a result, the small open command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S5101) of the timer interrupt process executed next.

  In the processing of S5772, if the small-hit opening time has not elapsed (S5772: No), the small-hit opening time is in progress. After the end of S5714), the process returns to the winning process (see FIG. 477).

  Next, in the process of S5777, it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the opening time of the small winning opening 72a set in S5775 described above has elapsed (S5777). If the result of the determination is that the opening time of the small winning opening 72a has elapsed (S5777: Yes), one closing condition of the small winning opening 72a is satisfied, and it is the closing timing of the small winning opening 72a in that round. Then, the value of the winning counter is cleared to "0" (S5778), and the process shifts to S5782. The processing for closing the small winning opening 72a from S5782 will be described later.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S5777, if the opening time of the small winning opening 72a has not elapsed (S5777: No), since the closing timing of the small winning opening 72a has not arrived, the opening of the small winning opening 72a is maintained. Next, it is determined whether or not a ball has been detected by the small winning opening switch (not shown), that is, whether or not the ball has won the small winning opening 72a (S5779).

  In the processing of S5779, if a ball is detected by the small winning opening switch (S5779: Yes), that is, if a ball has won the small winning opening 72a, the value of the winning counter is decremented by 1 (S5780). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter obtained by subtracting 1 is a value larger than “0” (S5781). As a result of the determination, if the value of the winning counter is not greater than “0” (S5781: No), that is, if the value of the winning counter is equal to or less than “0”, one ball wins in the small winning opening 72a. Since one closing condition of the small winning opening 72a is satisfied, the process shifts to S5782 in order to close the small winning opening 72a.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S5779, when the ball is not detected by the small winning opening switch (S5779: No), that is, when the ball does not win in the small winning opening 72a, or in the processing of S5781, the winning counter is set. When it is determined that the value is larger than “0” (S5781: Yes), the closing condition of the small winning opening 72a is not satisfied. Thus, in order to maintain the open state of the small winning opening 72a, the small winning opening opening / closing control process (S5714) is ended without performing the processes of S5782 to S5784. After the small winning opening opening / closing control process (S5714) ends, the process returns to the winning process (see FIG. 477).

  As described above, the round counter and the winning counter used for controlling the opening and closing of the special winning opening 65a in the big hit game are used for the opening and closing control of the small winning opening 72a in the small winning game, and the opening and closing control of the special winning opening 65a is controlled. By making the program for opening and closing the small winning opening 72a the same as that of the small winning opening 72a, the program can be shared, the number of man-hours during development can be reduced, and when the above control is made into a subroutine, the ROM The capacity can be reduced.

  In the closing process of the small winning opening 72a from S5782, first, a small winning opening closing process for closing the small winning opening 72a is executed (S5782), and then the small winning opening 72a is set to the audio lamp control device 113. A small close command indicating that the command has been closed is set (S5783), and the process shifts to S5784. The small closing command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 273, and is output in the external output processing (see S5101 in FIG. 466) of the next timer interrupt processing to be executed. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113.

  Next, in the processing of S5784, since one round of the small winning opening 72a has been consumed, the value of the round counter is decremented by 1 (S5784), and the small winning opening opening / closing control processing (S5714) ends. After the small winning opening opening / closing control process (S5714) ends, the process returns to the winning process (see FIG. 477).

  Returning to FIG. 477, the description will be continued. After the end of the small winning opening opening / closing control process in S5714, it is determined whether the value of the round counter is greater than “0” (S5715). If the result of the determination is that the value of the round counter is greater than “0” (S5715: Yes), the process of S5716 is skipped to continue the small hit game, and the hit process is temporarily performed (S5103). And returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 466).

  On the other hand, in the processing of S5715, if the value of the round counter is not a value larger than “0” (S5715: No), that is, if the value of the round counter is equal to or smaller than “0”, in order to end the small hitting game, A small ending command indicating the start of a small hit ending effect is set to the sound ramp control device 113, and a small hit end process for setting an ending time and the like is executed (S5716), and the hit process (S5103) is ended. Then, the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 466).

  As described above, in the winning process (see FIG. 477), the special winning opening opening / closing control process (see FIG. 478) for controlling the opening and closing of the special winning opening 65a, and the small winning opening / closing control process for controlling the opening and closing of the small winning opening 72a. By executing (see FIG. 481), the MPU 271 in the main control device 110 can manage the execution of the jackpot game and the small jackpot game, and at the time of the big hit with the process of opening and closing the big winning port 65 a at the time of the big hit And the various states at the time of the small hit accompanying the processing of opening and closing the small winning opening 72a at the time of the small hit can be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Also, in the winning process (see FIG. 477), by setting the game state after the end of the big hit by the big hit ending process (see FIG. 481), different gaming properties are created for each of the big hit types that have been won, and a variety of game variations are provided. To improve the interest of the game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 482, a description will be given of the normal electric winning combination control process (S5104), which is one of the timer interrupt processes (see FIG. 466) executed by the MPU 271 in the main control device 110. FIG. 482 is a flow chart showing the ordinary electric hand control process (S5104).

  In the normal electric winning combination control process (S5104), when a normal symbol hits, the normal electric winning combination 64c is opened / closed (projected and immersed) in accordance with a game state. That is, the opening (immersion) time of the ordinary electric hand 64c is set according to the game state, and the ordinary electric hand 64c is driven to open based on the set time. The control for closing (projecting) the ordinary electric hand 64c during (immersion) is executed.

  In the ordinary electric hand control process (S5104), the MPU 271 first determines whether or not the ordinary electric hand 64c is being opened (submerged), that is, whether or not the ordinary symbol is being hit (S5801). As a result of the discrimination, when it is determined that the ordinary electric hand 64c is not being opened (S5801: No), that is, when it is determined that the ordinary symbol is not being hit, whether or not the variable display of the ordinary symbol is finished next It is determined whether or not it is (S5802).

  If the result of determination in S5802 is that variable display of ordinary symbols has not been completed (S5802: No), this ordinary electric combination control process (S5104) ends, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 466). If the variable display of the ordinary symbol has been completed (S5802: Yes), then it is determined whether or not a win has been made in the variable display (S5803).

  As a result of the determination in S5803, if it is determined that the winning has not been won in the variable display (S5803: No), the normal electric winning combination control process (S5104) ends, and the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 466) Return to On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning has been won in the variable display (S5803: Yes), first, in order to execute the control related to the winning, whether or not the ordinary symbol at the time of winning is in the high probability state is determined. That is, it is determined whether the gaming state is in the “probability changing state” or the “time reduction state” (S5804).

  As a result of the determination in S5804, if it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the high probability state, that is, it is not in the “probability variation state” or “time reduction state” (S5804: No), the gaming state is “normal gaming state”. ”Or“ super probability fluctuation state ”, the opening time of the ordinary electric hand 64c in the hit state is set to“ 0.1 second ”based on the specified contents of the electric hand opening table 272h (S5805). In order to perform the opening of the normal electric hand 64c once, the value of an electric hand counter (not shown) is set to “1” (S5806), and the process proceeds to S5809.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5804, when it is determined that the symbol is in the high probability state, that is, in the “probability variation state” or “time reduction state” (S5804: Yes), the electric hand release table Based on the contents of 272h, the opening (immersion) time of the ordinary electric hand 64c in the hit state is set to “5 seconds” (S5807), and the number of times of opening the ordinary electric hand 64c based on the corresponding condition is performed three times. The value of the combination counter is set to “3” (S5808), and the process shifts to S5809.

  In the process of S5809, the normal electric hand 64c is opened (immersed) (S5809), the closed (projected) normal electric hand 64c is driven to the open state, and the normal electric hand control process (S5104) is performed. Then, the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 466).

  Thus, when the player makes a right-handed hit, the ball passing through the through gate 67 reaches the position where the ordinary electric hand 64c is disposed, and the state in which the ordinary electric hand 64c is open is long or short. Can make a difference. As a result, the ball passing through the through gate 67 is likely to be guided to the second starting port 64b side, or the upper surface of the ordinary electric hand 64c rolls from the right end to the left end in the closed state of the ordinary electric hand 64c, By making the state in which the ball can flow down to the small winning opening 72a side of the second variable winning device 72 different depending on the gaming state, it is possible to produce different gaming properties for each gaming state.

  In the processing of S5801, if it is determined that the normal electric hand 64c is being opened (S5801: Yes), that is, if it is determined that it is in the middle of a normal symbol, then it is set in S5805 or S5807. It is determined whether or not one open time of the ordinary electric utility 64c has elapsed (S5810). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that one set opening time of the ordinary electric hand 64c has not elapsed (S5810: No), the operation of S5811 to S5813 is performed to maintain the open state of the ordinary electric hand 64c. The process is skipped, the normal electrical combination control process (S5104) ends, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 466).

  On the other hand, in the process of S5810, if it is determined that one set opening time of the normal electric hand 64c has elapsed (S5810: Yes), first, the normal electric hand 64c is closed (projected). Performed (S5811). Then, the ordinary electric hand 64c in the closed (submerged) state is driven to the closed (projected) state, and “1” is subtracted from the value of the electric hand counter set in the processing of S5806 or S5808 (S5812). Then, it is determined whether or not the subtracted value of the electric hand counter is a value larger than “0” (S5813). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the value of the electric hand counter is larger than “0” (S5813: Yes), the number of times of opening of the ordinary electric hand 64c based on the corresponding number remains, and the processing is performed. The flow shifts to S5809, where the opening process of the ordinary electric hand 64c is performed again. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the power combination counter is not greater than “0” (S5813: No), that is, if the value of the power combination counter is equal to or less than “0”, the normal power Since the release of the role 64c has been completed, the normal power role 64c is not re-opened, the normal power role control process (S5104) ends, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 466).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-eighth embodiment, by changing the winning probability and the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol and the opening time of the ordinary electric hand 64c according to the gaming state, the through gate 67 is provided. In a right-handed game in which a ball can pass through, in the “probability changing state” and the “time shortening state”, the open state of the ordinary electric hand 64c is configured to appear frequently. Even when the port 72a is open, the ball can almost flow into the second starting port 64b. On the other hand, even in the same right-handed game, in the “super probability fluctuation state”, the open state and the closed state of the ordinary electric hand 64c are configured to coexist, and the ball also flows into the second starting port 64b. In some cases, however, the upper surface of the closed ordinary electric hand 64c may roll from the right end to the left end, and the ball can flow into the small winning opening 72a of the second variable winning device 72. Therefore, the winning ports 64b and 72a that can be won in each of the game states in the right-handed game are made different, the game value given to the player is made different, the variation of the game is abundant, and the interest of the game is improved. it can.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-eighth embodiment, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the “probability variation state” of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is determined by the first special symbol and the second special symbol. (2) The range of the number of lost random numbers in the “normal game state” is reduced while reducing the number of lost random numbers in the “normal game state” and compensating for the decrease. It is configured to be inside. In addition, the number of small random number values per hit is not changed between the “normal gaming state” and the “probability changing state”. With this configuration, it is possible to calculate the payout rate for each set value by considering only an increase in the number of jackpot random numbers (a decrease in the number of lost random numbers), Calculation of the payout rate can be facilitated, and an increase in man-hours at the time of designing game specifications can be suppressed.

  In addition, the increase in the number of the jackpot random number values of the first special symbol due to the setting change is a role selected in the "normal gaming state" of the jackpot random number counter C1, which is the gaming state having the highest staying rate in the game. In addition, the configuration is made so as to supplement from the role of the largest random number other than the jackpot random number value (that is, if it is in the “normal gaming state”, of the small random number value and the lost random number value, the lost random number value). With such a configuration, in the first special symbol whose execution rate is encouraged in the “normal game state” where the staying rate is high, the number of occurrences of the lost role, which is the most common role in the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol, is calculated. Can make setting discrimination difficult. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 to be seen by setting only the appearance rate of the jackpot having a lower appearance probability than the losing role as the setting determination element by the player. As a result, even if the setting is low (i.e., the set value 1 or the like), the game can be continued without letting the player know the setting, and the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be promoted.

  Further, the increase in the number of the jackpot random numbers resulting from the setting change is compensated for from the number of the lost random numbers corresponding to the lost combination that does not provide the player with the game value in the jackpot random number counter C1.

  Unlike the jackpot role and the small jackpot role, the losing role is a role that does not add a game value, and is therefore a role that is not clearly (largely) displayed on a data lamp (not shown) provided for each pachinko machine 10. is there. Here, if the number of the small hit random numbers corresponding to the small hit games clearly (largely) displayed on the data lamp is changed for each setting, the player sets the appearance rate of the small hit games to the data ramp. As a result, the number of setting determination elements of the pachinko machine 10 increases. As a result, for example, when the setting of the pachinko machine 10 set to the low setting (for example, the set value “1”) is discovered by the player, the player does not play the game with the pachinko machine 10 and The operation of the machine 10 may be reduced.

  Therefore, the increase in the number of the jackpot random numbers resulting from the setting change is determined by a loss corresponding to a loss role that is not clearly (broadly) displayed on the data lamp of the jackpot random number counter C1 without giving a game value to the player. By configuring so as to compensate from the number of random numbers, it is possible to make it difficult for the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 to be seen through, with the setting discriminating element by the player being only the appearance rate of the jackpot. Therefore, for example, even if the setting is low (that is, the setting value is “1” or the like), the game can be continued without letting the player know the setting, and the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be promoted.

  Further, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol in the “normal game state” is configured to be selected so as to be much longer than the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol in the “normal game state”. And the time efficiency of the game is set to be very low (bad). In the second special symbol, since it is configured to easily win the small hitting game, if the ball is won in the second starting port 64b in the “normal gaming state”, the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed. In spite of the “normal game state”, a prize ball may be given to the player based on the small hitting game, which may cause an unexpected disadvantage to the game hall. Therefore, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol in the “normal game state” is selected so as to be much longer than the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol in the “normal game state”. Thus, in the “normal game state”, when a ball is won in the second starting port 64b and the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol is executed, a very long time (ie, at least) compared to the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol. A fluctuation effect of “595 seconds or more” can be executed. For this reason, the execution efficiency of the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol in the “normal game state” is set to be very poor as compared with the execution efficiency of the first special symbol. Therefore, the profit (merit) of winning the second starting port 64b in the “normal game state” can be reduced as much as possible, and the execution of a game that is not encouraged can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, in a situation where the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol is reserved, even if an attempt is made to execute the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol, the time efficiency of the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol may be reduced. With this configuration, it is possible to amplify the degree of decrease in the profit (merit) of winning the second starting port 64b in the “normal gaming state”. As a result, in the game state in which the execution of the fluctuation effect of the special figure 2 is not encouraged, the player wins the prize (that is, the execution of the right-handed game) to the second starting port 64b which is a trigger of the execution of the fluctuation effect of the special figure 2. It is possible to prevent the player from playing a game different from the assumed game specification and reduce disadvantages to the hall.

  In addition, when a small hit is won in the dynamic display of one special symbol, the dynamic display of the other special symbol is being executed, and the success / failure result of the dynamic display of the other special symbol being executed is displayed. If it is a big hit or a small hit, the execution time of the dynamic display of one special symbol set this time is compared with the execution time (remaining time) of the dynamic display of the other special symbol being executed. When it is determined that the execution time of the dynamic display of one special symbol is shorter than the execution time (remaining time) of the dynamic display of the other special symbol, the dynamic time of the other special symbol being executed is changed. While the target display is changed to the dynamic display of the loss, the execution time to stop at the same time as the dynamic display of one special symbol is reset. In addition, when a big hit is won in the dynamic display of one special symbol, the dynamic display of the other special symbol is being executed, and the result of the dynamic display of the other special symbol being executed is small. When it is a hit, the execution time of the dynamic display of one special symbol set this time is compared with the execution time (remaining time) of the dynamic display of the other special symbol being executed. When it is determined that the execution time of the dynamic display of one special symbol is shorter than the execution time (remaining time) of the dynamic display of the other special symbol, the dynamic time of the other special symbol being executed is changed. While the target display is changed to the dynamic display of the loss, the execution time to stop at the same time as the dynamic display of one special symbol is reset. Furthermore, in the case where the dynamic display of one special symbol is not a small hit, if the dynamic display of the other special symbol being executed has a content that can derive a big hit, a winning / rejecting lottery in one special symbol is performed First, the dynamic display of the one special symbol is set as the dynamic display of the loss. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a jackpot or a small jackpot from being generated by the other special symbol while the jackpot or the small jackpot is being performed by one of the special symbols. ) Can prevent the player from being paid out an excessive game value.

  Furthermore, when changing the content of the dynamic display of the other special symbol based on the content of the dynamic display of the other special symbol, a change pattern command and a stop type command related to the dynamic display of the other special symbol to be changed are provided. Is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 as a set.

  Here, the voice lamp control device 113 determines that a command transmission error has occurred if the variation pattern command and the display mode command cannot be normally received (as a set) when performing the variation effect of each special symbol. An error change (default change) indicating that a transmission error has occurred is executed. Here, when the variation pattern (variation time) of the dynamic display of the second special symbol and the success / failure result are changed, and only the variation pattern command or only the stop type command is transmitted, the sound lamp control device 113 Since the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command, which should be transmitted as a set, are not transmitted, there is a possibility that a command transmission error is determined. In addition, if the receiving program of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed in consideration of the change of the dynamic display of the second special symbol, the control program must be newly designed and the sound lamp control device is changed. The control program on the 113 side may be complicated.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-eighth embodiment, when the content of the dynamic display of the other special symbol is changed based on the content of the dynamic display of the other special symbol, the dynamic of the other special symbol to be changed is changed. By transmitting the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command related to the display to the audio ramp control device 113 as a set, the audio ramp control device 113 can execute normal control without determining a command transmission error. Become. Therefore, even when the control for changing the content of the dynamic display is performed during the execution of the dynamic display of the special symbol, the normal control can be performed without changing the control program on the voice lamp control device 113 side. Since it can be executed, there is no need to set a new control program or the like, and it is possible to reduce the number of design steps and the control load.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-eighth embodiment, as the set value increases stepwise, the number of jackpot random numbers increases stepwise and evenly. With this configuration, it is possible to calculate the payout rate for each set value by considering only the increase in the jackpot random number value that is uniformly increased, and it is easy to calculate the payout rate. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in man-hours at the time of designing game specifications.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-eighth embodiment, in the high probability state of the special symbol, the lower the set value is, the harder the jackpot is to be generated, and the higher the set value is, the more the large jackpot is likely to be generated. In the “state”, the lower the set value is, the longer the stay period of the “super probability fluctuation state” is likely to be. As a result, as the set value is lower, the number of wins in small hits in the “super probability fluctuation state” tends to increase, so that the game value given in the “super probability fluctuation state” increases. Therefore, even if the set value is low, by entering the “super probability fluctuation state”, it is possible to increase the game value that can be given to the player as compared with the case where the set value is high. Therefore, by providing the "super probability fluctuation state", the advantage and disadvantage of the setting difference can be reversed, the variation of the game can be abundant, and the interest of the game can be improved.

<29th embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the twenty-ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-eighth embodiment, in the winning / non-winning lottery between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, both the big hit and the small hit can be won. The number of numerical values was increased, and only the jackpot probability was changed. Further, in the high probability state of the special symbol, the number of jackpot random numbers is configured to be increased as compared with the low probability state. In any case, by increasing the number of jackpot random numbers, reducing the number of lost random numbers and compensating for the decrease, the number of discriminating elements set by the player is reduced and the game state is changed. In accordance with this, a game property was created to determine whether or not a game value based on the small hit game could be obtained, thereby enriching the variation of the game.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-ninth embodiment, two special symbols (for example, a first special symbol and a second special symbol) are provided, and a low probability state is not provided in the lottery of each special symbol without providing a high probability state. Only a special symbol (eg, a first special symbol) that can be changed in a predetermined game state (eg, a “normal game state”) can win a large jackpot in any special symbol. Instead, a small win is won only in the other special symbol (for example, the second special symbol) that is easily changed in a game state (for example, “time reduction state”) other than the predetermined game state. In addition, a special area switch 208h (so-called V winning opening) is provided in the small winning opening 72a which is opened when a small hit is won with the other special symbol, and a ball is detected by the special area switch 208h. Is also configured to be able to generate a jackpot game (a so-called one-type and two-type mixer). Then, a configuration is provided in which a setting difference is provided only in the jackpot probability of each special symbol, and an increase in the jackpot random number value required to cause the setting difference is compensated from the lost random number value.

  Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 according to the twenty-ninth embodiment will be described focusing on differences from the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixteenth to twenty-eighth embodiments. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-ninth embodiment, the same components and processes as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the sixteenth to twenty-eighth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals as those of the sixteenth to twenty-eighth embodiments. And its illustration and description are omitted.

  First, the board configuration of the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 483 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the twenty-ninth embodiment. The board configuration of the game board 13 of the twenty-ninth embodiment is different from that of the twenty-eighth embodiment in that the normal electric hand 64c is immersed in the board of the game board 13 in a normal state (non-winning state), and a normal symbol is formed. The point that it is a retractable type projecting to the front side of the game board 13 when winning, and the position where the second starting port 64b can win only when the ball has rolled from the right end to the left end on the upper surface of the ordinary electric hand 64c. , The variable winning device 65 (large winning opening 65a) is located at the lower center of the game board 13 in front view, and a special area is set in the small winning opening 72a of the second variable winning device 72. The point that the switch 208h is provided and the point that the right general winning opening 63c is disposed at a position between the through gate 67 and the ordinary electric hand 64c. Other configurations and functions are the same or substantially the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-eighth embodiment.

  The ordinary electric hand 64c of the twenty-ninth embodiment is configured to drive-control one plate to a protruding state or an immersing state according to a variable display result of an ordinary symbol. In the normal state (default state), the ordinary electric hand 64c is stored at a position immersed in from the front surface of the game board 13, and in the immersion state, it affects a ball flowing down the board of the game board 13. Not to be placed. On the other hand, when the player wins the variable display of the normal symbol, the storage state is protruded from the front surface of the game board 13, and when the normal electric hand 64 c is in the protruding state, the upper surface of the normal electric hand 64 c is turned on. The ball can roll from the right end to the left along the slope. Then, when the ball is rolled to the left end of the normal electric hand 64c while the normal electric hand 64c maintains the protruding state, the ball can be guided to the second starting port 64b.

  In the twenty-ninth embodiment, when a ball is won in the second starting port 64b, the winning is possible only when the upper surface of the ordinary electric hand 64c is completely rolled from the right end to the left end. ) Is configured such that a ball cannot enter the second starting port 64b. In the twenty-ninth embodiment, when a ball is detected by the special area switch 208h in the small winning opening 72a, a jackpot is generated in any game state (period). In the twenty-ninth embodiment, a small hit game is easily generated based on a winning in the second starting opening 64b, and a small winning opening 72a that can generate a big hit by winning the small hit is opened. If the ball is detected by the special area switch 208h in the small winning opening 72a, the player can easily acquire the game value. For this reason, it is configured such that a ball can enter the second starting port 64b only in a gaming state (period) executed after winning a predetermined jackpot (in the twenty-ninth embodiment, "time reduction state"), It is configured to prevent a game value that is not assumed as a game specification from being given to a player.

  A deceleration member (not shown) that collides with a sphere rolling on the upper surface of the ordinary electric hand 64c to decelerate the sphere is formed on an upper portion (upper surface) of the ordinary electric hand 64c. In the twenty-ninth embodiment, a ball that rolls from the right end to the left end on the upper surface of the protruding ordinary electric hand 64c collides with this deceleration member, so that the time required for rolling from the right end to the left end of the upper surface of the ordinary electric hand 64c is reduced. It is configured to be long. Specifically, when the ball rolls on the upper surface from the right end to the left end of the ordinary electric hand 64c, it is configured to take about three seconds. Therefore, if the ball fired by the right-handed game rolls on the protruding ordinary electric hand 64c (that is, for about 3 seconds), the ball becomes immersed when the ordinary electric hand 64c is immersed. Due to the own weight of the game board 13, the game board 13 flows downward and vertically below the game board 13. On the other hand, when the protruding state of the ordinary electric hand 64c is maintained while rolling on the ordinary electric hand 64c, the normal electric hand 64c is completely rolled, and the game board 13 of the ordinary electric hand 64c is It is configured to flow down to the second starting port 64b side arranged on the left side when viewed from the front.

  Note that the time for rolling on the upper surface of the ordinary electric hand 64c is not limited to the above embodiment, and can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, for example, it may be configured to have a short time of less than “3 seconds” (for example, “1 second”) or a long time of “3 seconds” or more (for example, “5 seconds”). The configuration may be such that

  A variable winning device 65 is provided below the first starting port 64a of the twenty-ninth embodiment in a front view, and a large rectangular winning port 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-ninth embodiment, when the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the main control device 110 (see FIG. 484) is a big hit, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, A special symbol group 39b of the special symbol display device 39 is illuminated and displayed so as to be a jackpot stop symbol, and a stop symbol (for example, “777”) corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The occurrence of a jackpot game is indicated. Thereafter, the opening / closing plate (not shown) provided in the variable winning device 65 is opened, and the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit game) in which the ball can easily enter the big winning opening 65a. In this special game state, the large winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, until “30 seconds” elapse or until ten balls are won).

  The special winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined condition is satisfied (ie, when a predetermined time has elapsed since opening or when a predetermined number of winnings are detected during opening), and after the closing, the special winning opening 65a is closed again. Is opened for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of the special winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed according to the type of the big hit, and can be repeated, for example, up to 16 times (16 rounds). The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is one form of a special gaming state (big hit state) that is advantageous to the player, and the player is provided with a larger value than usual in giving a game value (game value). Prize balls are paid out.

  Since the variable winning device 65 of the twenty-ninth embodiment is disposed at the lower center in the front view of the game board 13, the ball fired in the left-handed game (that is, passed through the left side of the variable display device unit 80 in the front view). The ball and the ball fired in the right-handed game (that is, the ball that has passed through the right side of the variable display device unit 80 in a front view) are configured to be able to win. Accordingly, it is not necessary to provide a plurality of variable winning devices for each gaming state (for each firing mode), and the number of components of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced, and the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  Here, as the jackpot type determined in the twenty-ninth embodiment, “16R jackpot” and “4R jackpot” are prepared based on the winning in the first starting opening 64a (FIG. 487 (a)). reference). In addition, “16R jackpot”, “8R jackpot”, and “4R jackpot” are prepared based on the winning in the second starting port 64b (see FIG. 487 (b)).

  The jackpot type of “16R jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to a “time reduction state” in which a symbol is normally in a high probability state after a maximum round number of 16 rounds. The jackpot type of “8R jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to a “time reduction state” in which a symbol is normally in a high probability state after the maximum number of rounds of eight rounds. Further, the jackpot type of “4R jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to a “time reduction state” in which a symbol is normally in a high probability state after the maximum round number of four round jackpots.

  The “time reduction state” of the twenty-ninth embodiment is a state in which the special jackpot probability of each special symbol is low like the “normal game state”, but the fluctuation time (variable display time) of the normal symbol is reduced, and This means that the so-called "time saving function" in which the open time of the ordinary electric hand 64c is also long is provided. That is, in the "time reduction state", although the jackpot by the special symbol is equivalent to the "normal game state", the variable display result by the ordinary symbol is easily derived in a short time, and the open state of the ordinary electric hand 64c is long. It becomes a state. Therefore, in the “time reduction state”, a so-called winning assistance state is set, and the ball fired by the right-handed game is more likely to win a prize in the second starting port 64b. In addition to this, it is possible to obtain a prize ball (for example, one piece / prize) based on a prize in the second starting port 64b and play a game while suppressing a decrease in the number of balls held.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-ninth embodiment, the “time reduction state” is set so that the number of times given for each special symbol and jackpot type is different. Then, after each jackpot, a predetermined number of times predetermined for each jackpot (in the twenty-ninth embodiment, the total number of times of dynamic display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 10 or the second special symbol) Is a dynamic display once, or the total number of times of dynamic display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 100 or the dynamic display of the second special symbol is seven). Is maintained until is executed. After the specified number of special symbols have been dynamically displayed, the state is shifted from the "time reduction state" to the "normal game state". The number of hours saved for each special symbol will be described later with reference to FIG.

  A second variable winning device 72 is disposed on the left side (downstream side) of the second starting port 64b when viewed from the front, and a horizontally long small winning port 72a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A special area switch 208h is provided in the small winning opening 72a so that the ball that has flowed into the small winning opening 72a can be detected.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-ninth embodiment, when the lottery of the second special symbol in the main controller 110 (see FIG. 484) is a small hit, the small hit is stopped after a predetermined time (variable time) elapses. The lower LED group 39b2 of the special symbol display device 39 is illuminated and displayed so as to become a symbol, and a stop symbol (for example, “341”, “134”, “143”) corresponding to the small hit is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. ) Is displayed to indicate the occurrence of the small hit game. Thereafter, the opening / closing plate (not shown) provided in the second variable winning device 72 is opened, and the gaming state transits to a special gaming state (small hitting game) in which the ball easily enters the small winning opening 72a. In this special game state, the small winning opening 72a which is normally closed is opened until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, until "1.8 seconds" elapses or one ball is won). .

  The ball that has flowed into the small winning opening 72a is detected by a special area switch 208h provided in the small winning opening 72a. When a ball is detected by the special area switch 208h (so-called V prize), a small hit type counter stored in the reserved ball execution area 273fa for storing information relating to the dynamic display that caused the small hit game is stored. The small hit type is determined based on the value of a small hit type counter C5 (see FIG. 485) described later stored in the area 273fa5, and a predetermined big hit game based on the small hit type is started. Therefore, by winning a game for a small hit, the game specification is such that a big hit game can be provided indirectly, and a game property of how to win a big hit or a small hit is realized. The small hit type and the like will be described later.

  A right general winning opening 63c is disposed below the through gate 67 in a front view of the game board 13 and above a right end portion of the ordinary electric hand 64c in a front view of the game board 13. The right general winning opening 63c is a winning opening in which ten balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins, similarly to the general winning opening 63.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-ninth embodiment, a right-handed game during a special symbol big hit game, a special symbol small hit game, or during a "time shortened state" (that is, during an extended open state of the ordinary electric utility 64c). Is configured to be able to play a game. Specifically, the ball fired by the right-handed game is awarded during the big win game 65a, which is opened during the big hit game, the small winning opening 72a which is opened during the small hit game, or during the "time reduction state". In addition to the possible second starting opening 64b (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “winning openings 65a, 72a, 63c”), the above-mentioned right general winning opening 63c can also be awarded.

  Conventionally, during a jackpot game, a small jackpot game, or a “time-saving state”, one winning port directly associated with each state (that is, the big winning port 65a, the small winning port 72a or the The second starting port 64b) is configured to win a ball, and to give a game value to the player based on the winning. However, the winning ports 65a, 72a, 63c that can win in each of the above states are fixed, and the game becomes monotonous, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

  Therefore, in each of the above-mentioned states, the ball can be won in the right general prize port 63c in addition to the directly related prize ports 65a, 72a, 64b. A game value other than the game value obtained by winning the winning holes 65a, 72a, 64b can be given to the player during the above state. Therefore, in order to amplify the game value given in the above state by the ball winning in the right general winning opening 63c, how to make the right general winning opening 63c win in each of the above states. Can be created and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, during the jackpot game, when a predetermined winning number of balls (for example, 10) are made to win in the special winning opening 65a during one round, or a predetermined opening time (for example, “10 seconds”) has elapsed. In this case, an interval time during which the special winning opening 65a is closed is provided. In such a case, during the interval time (that is, during closing of the special winning opening 65a), the large winning opening 65a is configured such that no ball can win. Therefore, after firing the ball of the specified winning number, the player stops firing the ball for the interval time, and continues to stop firing the ball until the special winning opening 65a is opened again (so-called, There is a case where the player performs an action of suppressing a decrease in the ball held by the player himself by performing a stop-hit game. When the above-described hitting game is performed, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 (the number of shot balls) is reduced by the number of the balls that have not been fired. May be reduced.

  Therefore, the right general winning opening 63c is arranged upstream of the big winning opening 65a so that a ball fired in a right-handed game can also win the right general winning opening 63c. With such a configuration, even when the ball having the specified winning number is fired, a part of the balls can win in the right general winning opening 63c, and only the fired balls for the specified winning number can be obtained. A situation where the special winning opening 65a is not closed can be created. As a result, for example, when a phenomenon occurs in which the specified opening time elapses before the ball with the specified winning number is made to win in the special winning opening 65a, the player wins the ball with the specified winning number in the special winning opening 65a. The loss when the ball with the specified number of prizes is not allowed to win in the special winning opening 65a is larger than the effect of suppressing the decrease in the number of balls by performing the hitting game. Therefore, by making it easier to give a demerit than the advantage of performing a hitting game to the player, the player is encouraged to continuously fire the ball without performing the hitting game, and the profit of the game hall Can be suppressed. The same effect can be obtained for the small winning port 72a during the small hit game or the second starting port 64b during the "time reduction state".

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 484 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the twenty-ninth embodiment.

  In the ROM 272 of the main control device 110 of the twenty-ninth embodiment, a jackpot random number table 272a, a jackpot type table 272b, a hold number table 272c, a stop pattern table 272d, a fluctuation pattern table 272e, a general figure random number table 272f, a general figure fluctuation table 272g, an electrical opening table 272h, a big hit opening table 272i, and a small hit opening table 272j. In the RAM 273 of the twenty-ninth embodiment, the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1, the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the general figure random number counter C4, the second initial In addition to the value random number counter CINI2, a small hit type counter C5 is provided. Main controller 110 executes the above main control using various counters stored in RAM 273 and various tables stored in ROM 272.

  Here, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 273 of the main control device 110 according to the twenty-ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. These counters and the like are used for a big hit lottery and a small hit lottery, a dynamic display setting of the special symbol display device 39, a variable effect setting of the third symbol display device 81, a lottery of a variable display display result in the ordinary symbol display device 83. It is used by the MPU 271 of the main control device 110 to perform such operations. Further, in the description of the various counters, various tables stored in the ROM 272 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 486 to 493.

  In the twenty-ninth embodiment, the big hit lottery and the small hit lottery, the dynamic display setting of the special symbol display device 39, and the setting of the variable effect of the third symbol display device 81 are used for the big hit lottery and the small hit lottery. The jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2 used to select the stop type of the jackpot symbol, a stop pattern selection counter C3 used to select the effect mode of the fluctuation effect, and used to set initial values of the jackpot random number counter C1. A first initial value random number counter CINI1, a variation type counter CS1 used for selecting a variation pattern, and a small hit type counter C5 used for selecting a stop type of a small hit symbol are used.

  In addition, the random number counter C4 per ordinary figure (equivalent to the second random number counter C4 in the sixteenth embodiment) is used for the lottery of the ordinary symbol display device 83, and the initial value of the random number counter C4 per ordinary figure is set for the lottery. A 2 initial value random number counter CINI2 (equivalent to the 2nd initial value random number counter CINI2 in the sixteenth embodiment) is used.

  Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time an update is performed, and the counter returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 4 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 466), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main process (see FIG. 385). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer 273c set in a predetermined area of the RAM 273. Although details will be described later, the RAM 273 includes a first reserved ball storage area 273d including four reserved areas (first reserved first to fourth areas) related to the first special symbol, and four reserved areas related to the second special symbol. A second reserved ball storage area 273e including areas (second reserved first to fourth areas) is provided. The values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 are stored in the first reserved ball storage area 273d in accordance with the timing of entering the first starting port 64a. Is done. In addition, in the second reserved ball storage area 273e, the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the small hit type are set in accordance with the timing of entering the second starting port 64b. Each value of the counter C5 is stored. Note that updating of each counter is the same as in the twenty-eighth embodiment, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  Here, the details of the jackpot random number table 272a corresponding to each special symbol in the twenty-ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 486. FIG. 486 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1 stored in the ROM 272, and FIG. 486 (b) is a special figure 2 jackpot random number table stored in the ROM 272. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of 272a2 typically.

  The special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1 and the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 of the twenty-ninth embodiment are configured such that the jackpot probability differs for each set value. In addition, a small hit random number value for winning a small hit game is not assigned to the special map 1 big hit random number table 272a1, whereas a small hit random number value for winning a small hit game is assigned to the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. ing.

  In the twenty-ninth embodiment, in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 and the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2, the increase in the number of the jackpot random numbers required to displace the set value “1” from “1” to “6”. Is reduced by reducing the number of loss random numbers corresponding to the loss, and is compensated from the decrease. By making the number of the jackpot random numbers different in this way, the probability of the jackpot being changed for each set value is changed.

  On the other hand, in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a1, the number of the small hit random numbers in each set value is set to be the same. By making the number of small hit random numbers the same for each set value in this way, the game value assignment ratios in all set values taking into account only the small hit games are equal.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-ninth embodiment, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers resulting from the change in the set values of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is determined by the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Are configured to reduce the number of lost random numbers and to compensate for the decrease, while increasing the number of jackpot random numbers to be equal to or less than the number of lost random numbers. Also, the number of small random numbers is set so as not to change for each set value. With this configuration, it is possible to calculate the payout rate for each set value by considering only the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers, and to increase the man-hour when designing the game specification. Can be suppressed.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-ninth embodiment, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers due to the setting change is determined by a lottery table in any special symbol (that is, the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 and the special figure 2 big hit random number table). 272a2) is also configured so as to compensate for the assigned loss role. That is, the number of lost random numbers assigned to the two big hit random number tables 272a is changed instead of the small hit random numbers assigned only to the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. Here, when the number of the jackpot random numbers associated with the setting change is supplemented from the hand assigned to only one of the lottery tables (for example, the small hit random value in the second special symbol), the payout rate of each special symbol is calculated. Since the calculation is different, the calculation becomes complicated, and the man-hour at the time of designing the game specification increases. Therefore, by compensating for the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers from the number of random numbers corresponding to the hand (ie, the losing hand) present in each special symbol, a part of the calculation of the payout rate in each special symbol is performed. Can be shared, and an increase in man-hours at the time of designing game specifications can be suppressed.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-ninth embodiment, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers resulting from the setting change is determined by the role of the largest random number other than the jackpot random number in the jackpot random number counter C1 (ie, the small jackpot random number). The random number value and the loss random number value are compensated based on the loss random number value. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to determine the setting based on the number of appearances of the winning combination, which is the most common combination in the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 to be seen by setting only the appearance rate of the jackpot having a lower appearance probability than the losing role as the setting determination element by the player. As a result, even if the setting is low (i.e., the set value 1 or the like), the game can be continued without letting the player know the setting, and the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be promoted.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-ninth embodiment, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers resulting from the setting change is determined by determining the loss random number value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the loss role that does not give the player a gaming value. It is configured to compensate from the number.

  The losing role is different from the jackpot role and the small winning role, because it is a role that does not provide a game value, and is provided for each pachinko machine 10 and a data lamp (not shown) for displaying a game result or the like in the pachinko machine 10. Is not clearly (largely) displayed. Here, suppose that the number of the jackpot random numbers corresponding to the jackpot game and the number of the jackpot random numbers corresponding to the small jackpot game that are easily (largely) displayed on the data lamp are changed for each setting. When the player glances (confirms) the appearance rates of the two elements of the big hit game and the small hit game with a data lamp, the setting discrimination of the pachinko machine 10 is easily guessed. As a result, for example, when the setting of the pachinko machine 10 set to the low setting (for example, the set value “1”) is discovered by the player, the player does not play the game with the pachinko machine 10 and The operation of the machine 10 may be reduced.

  Therefore, an increase in the number of jackpot random numbers resulting from the change in the setting of the probability set value is determined by using the jackpot random number counter C1 which does not give a game value to a player and is not clearly (broadly) displayed on a data lamp. Is configured so as to compensate from the number of lost random numbers corresponding to the above, so that the setting discrimination element by the player is only the appearance rate of the big hit, and the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is hard to be seen from the appearance rate of the small hit. be able to. Therefore, the discrimination factor of the probability set value is limited to the appearance rate of the hand based on one random number value. For example, even if the payout rate is low (that is, the set value “1” or the like), it is set to the player. The game can be continued without being seen, and the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be promoted.

  As shown in FIG. 486 (a), in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 of the twenty-ninth embodiment, when the set value is “1”, the value of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes a big hit in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 The number of (big hit random number) is 50, and the value “0-49” is defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol of the set value “1” is set to be 50/10000 = 0.5 / 100 (that is, 0.5%).

  When the set value is “1”, a small hit random number value (small hit random value) is not allocated in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. In other words, the small hit probability in the first special symbol of the set value “1” is 0%, so that the small hit game based on the winning in the first starting port 64a does not occur.

  Therefore, when the set value is “1”, the number of random number values (loss random number values) that are lost in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is the remaining 9950 numbers other than the big hit random number value, and the value “50 to "9999" is defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the loss probability in the first special symbol of the set value “1” is set so as to be 9950/10000 = 99.5 / 100 (that is, 99.5%).

  Next, when the set value is “2”, the number of values (big hit random value) of the big hit random number counter C1 that becomes a big hit in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 52, and the value “0 to 51” is a special value. It is defined (set) in the big hit random number table 272a1 in FIG. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol of the set value “2” is set to be 52/10000 = 0.52 / 100 (that is, 0.52%).

  Further, when the set value is “2”, as in the case where the set value is “1”, the value of the small random number (small hit random value) is not assigned in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the small hit probability in the first special symbol of the set value “2” is 0%, and the small hit game based on the winning in the first starting port 64a does not occur.

  Therefore, when the set value is “2”, the number of random number values (losing random number values) that are lost in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is the remaining 9948 other than the big hit random number value, and the value “52 to "9999" is defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the loss probability in the first special symbol of the set value “2” is set to be 9948/10000 = 99.48 / 100 (that is, 99.48%).

  That is, the set value “2” has a slightly larger jackpot probability than the set value “1” (0.5% → 0.52%), and the bigger hit game occurs more than the set value “1”. It can be said that the setting is easy to perform.

  Next, when the set value is “3”, the number of values (big hit random value) of the big hit random number counter C1 that becomes a big hit in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 54, and the value “0 to 53” is a special value. It is defined (set) in the big hit random number table 272a1 in FIG. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol of the set value “3” is set to be 54/10000 = 0.54 / 100 (that is, 0.54%).

  Also, when the set value is “3”, the value of the random number (small hit random value) to be a small hit is allocated in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 as in the case of the set values of “1” and “2”. Not. That is, the small hit probability in the first special symbol of the set value “3” is 0%, and the small hit game based on the winning in the first starting port 64a does not occur.

  Therefore, when the set value is “3”, the number of random numbers (losing random value) which are lost in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is the remaining 9946 other than the big hit random value, and the value “54 to "9999" is defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the loss probability in the first special symbol of the set value “3” is set to be 9946/10000 = 99.46 / 100 (that is, 99.46%).

  That is, the setting value “3” has a slightly higher probability of the jackpot than the setting value “2” (0.52% → 0.54%), and the jackpot game occurs more than the setting value “2”. It can be said that the setting is easy to perform.

  Next, when the set value is “4”, the number of the jackpot random number counter C1 (the jackpot random number value) which becomes the jackpot in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1 is 56, and the value “0 to 55” is It is defined (set) in the big hit random number table 272a1 in FIG. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol of the set value “4” is set to be 56/10000 = 0.56 / 100 (that is, 0.56%).

  Further, when the set value is “4”, the value of the random number (small hit random value) to be a small hit is allocated in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 as in the case where the set value is “1” to “3”. Not. In other words, the small hit probability in the first special symbol of the set value “4” is 0%, and the small hit game based on the winning in the first starting port 64a does not occur.

  Therefore, when the set value is “4”, the number of random numbers (losing random values) that are lost in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is the remaining 9944 other than the big hit random values, and the value “56 to "9999" is defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the loss probability in the first special symbol of the setting value “4” is set to be 9944/10000 = 99.44 / 100 (that is, 99.44%).

  That is, the setting value “4” has a slightly larger probability of the jackpot than the setting value “3” (0.54% → 0.56%), and the jackpot game occurs more than the setting value “3”. It can be said that the setting is easy to perform.

  Next, when the set value is “5”, the number of values (big hit random value) of the big hit random number counter C1 that becomes a big hit in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 58, and the value “0 to 57” is the special hit. It is defined (set) in the big hit random number table 272a1 in FIG. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol of the set value “5” is set to be 58/10000 = 0.58 / 100 (that is, 0.58%).

  Further, when the set value is “5”, the value of the random number (small hit random value) to be a small hit is allocated in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 as in the case where the set value is “1” to “4”. Not. That is, the small hit probability in the first special symbol of the set value “5” is 0%, and the small hit game based on the winning in the first starting port 64a is not generated.

  Therefore, when the set value is “5”, the number of random number values (losing random number values) that are lost in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is the remaining 9942 other than the big hit random number value, and the value “58 to "9999" is defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the loss probability in the first special symbol having the set value “5” is set to be 9942/10000 = 99.42 / 100 (that is, 99.42%).

  That is, the setting value “5” has a slightly larger probability of the jackpot than the setting value “4” (0.56% → 0.58%), and the jackpot game occurs more than the setting value “4”. It can be said that the setting is easy to perform.

  Next, when the set value is “6”, the number of values (big hit random value) of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes big hit in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 60, and the value “0 to 59” is a special value. It is defined (set) in the big hit random number table 272a1 in FIG. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol of the set value “6” is set to be 60/10000 = 0.6 / 100 (that is, 0.6%).

  Further, when the set value is “6”, the value of the random number (small hit random value) to be a small hit is allocated in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 as in the case of the set value of “1” to “5”. Not. In other words, the small hit probability in the first special symbol of the set value “6” is 0%, so that the small hit game based on the winning in the first starting port 64a does not occur.

  Therefore, when the set value is “6”, the number of random number values (losing random number values) that are lost in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is the remaining 9940 other than the big hit random value, and the value “60 to "9999" is defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the loss probability in the first special symbol of the set value “6” is set to be 9940/10000 = 99.4 / 100 (that is, 99.4%).

  That is, the set value “6” has a slightly larger jackpot probability than the set value “5” (0.58% → 0.6%), and the jackpot game occurs more than the set value “5”. It can be said that the setting is easy to perform.

  As described above, in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1, the increase in the number of jackpot random values due to the setting change is reduced by reducing the number of the loss random numbers, and the loss random number is compensated for. It is configured to be within (below) the number of numerical values.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 486 (b), in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 of the twenty-ninth embodiment, when the set value is “1”, the jackpot random number counter which becomes a jackpot in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 The number of values of C1 (big hit random number value) is 50 as in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1, and the values “0 to 49” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol is set to be 50/10000 = 0.5 / 100 (that is, 0.5%), similarly to the first special symbol.

  Here, when the set value is “1”, the number of small hit random numbers (small hit random numbers) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is 1250, and the value “50 to 1299” is special. It is defined (set) in the big hit random number table 272a2 in FIG. That is, the small hit probability in the second special symbol is set to be 1250/10000 = 12.5 / 100 (that is, 12.5%).

  Therefore, when the set value is “1”, the number of random number values (losing random number values) that are lost in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is the remaining 8700 numbers other than the big hit random number value and the small hit random number value. The value “1300 to 9999” is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2. That is, the loss probability in the second special symbol is set to be 8700/10000 = 87/100 (that is, 87%).

  Next, when the set value is “2”, the number of the jackpot random number counter C1 (small jackpot random value) which becomes a jackpot in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is 52 like the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1. , The values “0 to 51” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol is set to be 52/10000 = 0.52 / 100 (that is, 0.52%), similarly to the first special symbol.

  Here, when the set value is “2”, the number of random hit values (small hit random value) which is a small hit in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is 1250, and the value “52 to 1301” is special. It is defined (set) in the big hit random number table 272a2 in FIG. That is, the small hit probability in the second special symbol is set to be 1250/10000 = 12.5 / 100 (that is, 12.5%), like the set value “1”.

  Therefore, when the set value is “2”, the number of random number values (losing random number values) to be lost in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is 8698 other than the jackpot random number value and the small jackpot random number value. The value “1302 to 9999” is defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the loss probability in the second special symbol is set to be 8698/10000 = 86.98 / 100 (that is, 86.98%).

  That is, although the set value “2” has the same small hit probability as the set value “1”, the big hit probability is slightly improved (0.5% → 0.52%). It can be said that the setting is such that a jackpot game is more likely to occur than in the case of “1”.

  Next, when the set value is “3”, the number of values of the jackpot random number counter C1 (small jackpot random number) which becomes a jackpot in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is 54 in the same manner as in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1. , The values “0 to 53” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol is set to be 54/10000 = 0.54 / 100 (that is, 0.54%), similarly to the first special symbol.

  Here, when the set value is “3”, the number of random number values (small hit random number values) which are small hits in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is 1250 like the set values “1” and “2”. The value "54 to 1303" is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2. That is, the small hit probability in the second special symbol is set to be 1250/10000 = 12.5 / 100 (that is, 12.5%), like the set values “1” and “2”.

  Therefore, when the set value is “3”, the number of random number values (losing random number values) to be lost in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is the remaining 8696 other than the big hit random number value and the small hit random number value. The values “1304 to 9999” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2. That is, the loss probability in the second special symbol is set to be 8696/10000 = 86.96 / 100 (that is, 86.96%).

  That is, although the set value “3” has the same small hit probability as the set value “2”, the big hit probability is slightly improved (0.52% → 0.54%). It can be said that the setting is such that a jackpot game is more likely to occur than in the case of “2”.

  Next, when the set value is “4”, the number of the jackpot random number counter C1 (the jackpot random number value) which becomes a jackpot in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is 56 like the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1. The value “0-55” is defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol is set to be 56/100000 = 0.56 / 100 (that is, 0.56%), similarly to the first special symbol.

  Here, when the set value is “4”, the number of small random numbers (small hit random value) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is 1250 like the set values “1” to “3”. The value “56 to 1305” is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2. That is, the small hit probability in the second special symbol is set to be 1250/10000 = 12.5 / 100 (that is, 12.5%), similarly to the set values “1” to “3”.

  Therefore, when the set value is “4”, the number of random number values (losing random number values) that are lost in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is 8694 remaining numbers other than the big hit random number value and the small hit random number value. The value “1306 to 9999” is defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the loss probability in the second special symbol is set to be 8694/10000 = 86.94 / 100 (that is, 86.94%).

  That is, although the set value “4” has the same small hit probability as the set value “3”, the big hit probability is slightly improved (0.54% → 0.56%). It can be said that the setting is such that a jackpot game is more likely to occur than in the case of “3”.

  Next, when the set value is "5", the number of the jackpot random number counter C1 (small jackpot random value) which becomes a jackpot in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is 58 like the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1. , The values “0 to 57” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol is set to be 58/10000 = 0.58 / 100 (that is, 0.58%), similarly to the first special symbol.

  Here, when the set value is “5”, the number of random hit values (small hit random value) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is 1250 like the set values “1” to “4”. The value “58 to 1307” is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2. That is, the small hit probability in the second special symbol is set to be 1250/10000 = 12.5 / 100 (that is, 12.5%), similarly to the set values “1” to “4”.

  Therefore, when the set value is “5”, the number of random number values (losing random number values) to be lost in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is the remaining 8692 numbers other than the big hit random number value and the small hit random number value. The values “1308 to 9999” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2. In other words, the loss probability in the second special symbol is set to be 8692/10000 = 86.92 / 100 (that is, 86.92%).

  That is, although the set value “5” has the same small hit probability as the set value “4”, the big hit probability is slightly improved (0.56% → 0.58%). It can be said that the setting is such that a jackpot game is more likely to occur than in the case of “4”.

  Next, when the set value is “6”, the number of values of the jackpot random number counter C1 (small jackpot random value) that becomes a jackpot in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is 60 in the same manner as in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1. , The values “0 to 59” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol is set to be 60/10000 = 0.6 / 100 (that is, 0.6%), similarly to the first special symbol.

  Here, when the set value is “6”, the number of small random numbers (small hit random value) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is 1250 like the set values “1” to “5”. The value “60 to 1309” is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2. That is, the small hit probability in the second special symbol is set to be 1250/10000 = 12.5 / 100 (that is, 12.5%), similarly to the set values “1” to “5”.

  Therefore, when the set value is "6", the number of random number values (losing random number values) that are lost in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is the remaining 8690 pieces other than the large jackpot random number value and the small jackpot random number value. The value "1310-9999" is defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the loss probability in the second special symbol is set to be 8690/10000 = 86.9 / 100 (that is, 86.9%).

  That is, although the set value “6” has the same small hit probability as the set value “5”, the big hit probability is slightly improved (0.58% → 0.6%). It can be said that the setting is such that a jackpot game is more likely to occur than in the case of “5”.

  In this way, in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers due to the setting change is compensated from the decrease by decreasing the number of lost random numbers instead of the number of small jackpot random values. And within the range of the number of the lost random numbers (below).

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-ninth embodiment, in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1 and the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2, an increase in the number of jackpot random numbers due to the setting change is present in both the jackpot random number tables 272a1 and 272a2. While reducing the number of lost random numbers to make up for the decrease, the number of jackpot random numbers that increase is within the range of the number of lost random numbers at the lowest probability setting value (below). The configuration is as follows. Also, the number of small random numbers is set so as not to change for each set value. With this configuration, it is possible to calculate the payout rate for each set value by considering only the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers, and to increase the man-hour when designing the game specification. Can be suppressed.

  Returning to FIG. 485, the description will be continued. The small hit type counter C5 determines a small hit type when a small hit occurs, and is incremented by one in a predetermined range (for example, “0 to 99”) in order, and the maximum value (for example, “ In the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99 ”, the counter returns to“ 0 ”after reaching“ 99 ”). The value of the small hit type counter C5 is updated, for example, periodically (in the twenty-ninth embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 466)).

  Then, at the timing when the ball wins the second starting port 64b, the big hit in the second reserved first to fourth areas of the second reserved ball storage area 273e of the RAM 273 provided corresponding to the second starting port 64b. The random number counter C1 is stored in the small hit type counter storage area 273e5 of the second reserved area which is the same as the second reserved area in which the random number counter C1 is stored. If the update maximum values of two or more counters are set to the same value, the update content of the other counter may be grasped based on the extraction result of one counter. Therefore, the configuration may be such that the maximum update value of each counter is different.

  Here, for example, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in one reserved area in the first reserved ball storage area 273d or the second reserved ball storage area 273e is not a random number (big jackpot random value) that is a big jackpot, That is, if it is a lost random number (loss random value), the variation pattern in the variation effect and the type of the stop symbol (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “stop type”) are those at the time of the loss. On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the one reserved area in the first reserved ball storage area 273d or the second reserved ball storage area 273e is a random number (big hit random number value) which is a big hit, a fluctuation effect is produced. The fluctuation pattern and stop type in are those at the time of the big hit. In this case, the fluctuation pattern and stop type at the time of the big hit are determined corresponding to the big hit type indicated by the value of the big hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area. In addition, if the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in one holding area in the second holding ball storage area 273e is a random number (small hit random number value) with a small hit, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type in the fluctuation effect are It will be a small hit. In this case, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type at the time of the small hit are determined corresponding to the small hit type indicated by the value of the small hit type counter C5 stored in the same holding area. When a ball passes the special area switch 208h during the small hit game, a big hit game corresponding to the small hit type is generated.

  The value of the jackpot type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-ninth embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of “0 to 99”, as in the twenty-eighth embodiment, and is stored in the jackpot type counter C2 and the ROM 272. The big hit type is determined based on the big hit type table 272b. In the big hit type table 272b, a special figure 1 big hit type table 272b1 (see FIG. 487 (a)) referred to in the first lottery game of the first special symbol and a second lottery game of the second special symbol are referred to. Special table 2 big hit type table 272b2 (see FIG. 487 (b)).

  Further, the value of the small hit type counter C5 in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-ninth embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of “0 to 99”, and the small hit type counter C5 and the small hit type stored in the ROM 272. The small hit type is determined based on the table 272b3 (see FIG. 487 (c)). In the small hit type table 272b3, only the special figure 2 small hit type table 272b3 referred to in the second lottery game of the second special symbol is provided, and the table referred to in the first lottery game of the first special symbol is Not provided. This is because it is not possible to win a small hit in the first special symbol, and it is not necessary to provide a small hit type table for the first special symbol.

  Here, the special figure 1 big hit type table 272b1, the special figure 2 big hit type table 272b2, and the special figure 2 small hit type table 272b3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 487 (a) to 487 (c). FIG. 487 (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the special figure 1 big hit type table 272b1 corresponding to the first special symbol stored in the ROM 272, and FIG. 487 (b) is also stored in the ROM 272. FIG. 487 (c) is a view schematically showing an example of the special figure 2 big hit type table 272b2 corresponding to the second special symbol corresponding to the second special symbol shown in FIG. It is the figure which showed an example of the small hitting type table 272b3 typically.

  As shown in FIGS. 487 (a) and 487 (b), each of the jackpot type tables 272b1 and 272b2 has a special symbol type (that is, a first special symbol or a second special symbol) and a type of the special symbol. Is a table in which the jackpot type according to the above is associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2. Also, as shown in FIG. 487 (c), the small hit type table 272b3 is a table in which the small hit type of the second special symbol is associated with the value of the small hit type counter C5.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-ninth embodiment, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol, the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed once after the jackpot of the maximum round of four rounds, or the first special symbol, Until the dynamic display of the symbol and the second special symbol is executed a total of ten times, the variable display time of the ordinary symbol is shortened, and the number of times the ordinary electric hand 64c projects based on the winning of the variable display is large. After the “4R jackpot” that transits to a state in which the projecting time becomes longer (ie, “time reduction state”) and the maximum number of rounds is 16 rounds, dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed seven times. Until the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed 100 times in total, there is a “16R jackpot” which is in a “time reduction state” (see FIG. 487 (a)). .

  Also, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol, the maximum number of rounds is four rounds, until the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed seven times, or between the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed seven times after the “4R jackpot” which becomes the “time reduction state” until the dynamic display is executed 100 times in total, and after the maximum number of rounds of eight rounds is reached. Until or after the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed 100 times in total, "8R jackpot" which becomes "time reduction state" and the maximum number of rounds after 16 round jackpots Until the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed seven times, or until the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed 100 times in total. "16R jackpot" (Fig. 4 7 (b) reference).

  Further, three small hit types are provided as the small hit types of the second special symbol, and a small hit game having a maximum round number of one round is executed in all of them. In addition, when a ball is detected by the special area switch 208h during the small hitting game as the small hitting type, the dynamic display of the second special symbol is performed seven times after the maximum number of rounds is four. Until the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed 100 times in total, a big hit game that becomes a “time-saving state” occurs. When a ball is detected by the special area switch 208h during the small hitting game, the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed seven times after the maximum round number of eight rounds, or the first special symbol is displayed. Until the dynamic display with the second special symbol is executed 100 times in total, a “big hit game corresponding to the“ 8R big hit ”” in which the big hit game which is in the “time shortened state” occurs. When a ball is detected by the different area switch 208h, the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed seven times after the jackpot of the maximum round of 16 rounds, or the first special symbol and the second special symbol are executed. There is a "16R big hit corresponding small hit" in which a big hit game that is in a "time shortened state" occurs until the dynamic display is executed 100 times in total (see FIG. 487 (c)).

  In the special figure 1 big hit type table 272b1 and the special figure 2 big hit type table 272b2, each big hit type is associated with a possible value of the big hit type counter C2 for determining the big hit type. In the special figure 2 small hitting type table 272b3, each possible small hitting type is associated with a possible value of the small hitting type counter C5 for determining the small hitting type.

  In the example of the special figure 1 big hit type table 272b1 of FIG. 487 (a), the value “0 to 98” of the big hit type counter C2 is associated with “4R big hit”, and the big hit type counter with “16R big hit”. The value “99” of C2 is associated.

  Specifically, in the winning / non-selection lottery of the first special symbol in the twenty-ninth embodiment, the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 273d1 of any of the first reserved areas of the first reserved ball storage area 273d. If the value is a jackpot value, the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 273d2 of the same first holding area is from the special figure 1 jackpot type table 272b1. It is determined. For example, if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "7", "4R jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type, and if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "99", "16R jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type. Is done.

  In other words, when the big hit is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol as the first lottery game, the big hit type of "4R big hit" is 99%, and the big hit type of "16R big hit" is 1%. Will be done.

  In the example of the special figure 2 jackpot type table 272b2 in FIG. 487 (b), the value “0 to 29” of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with “4R jackpot”, and the jackpot is assigned with “8R jackpot”. The value “30 to 59” of the type counter C2 is associated, and the value “60 to 99” of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with “16R jackpot”.

  In the second special symbol winning / decreasing lottery in the twenty-ninth embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 273e1 of any of the second reserved areas of the second reserved ball storage area 273e becomes a big hit. If it is the value, the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 273e2 of the same second holding area is determined from the special figure 2 jackpot type table 272b2. For example, if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "17", "4R jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type, and if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "40", "8R jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type. If the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "89", "16R jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type.

  That is, when a big hit is won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol as the second lottery game, the big hit type of “4R big hit” is 30%, the big hit type of “8R big hit” is 30%, and “16R big hit” is Jackpot type will be elected at a rate of 40%.

  In the example of the special figure 2 small hit type table 272b3 in FIG. 487 (c), the value of the small hit type counter C5 “0 to 29” is associated with “4R big hit corresponding small hit”, and “8R big hit” The value "30-59" of the small hit type counter C5 is associated with "corresponding small hit", and the value "60-99" of the small hit type counter C5 is associated with "16R big hit corresponding small hit". ing.

  In the second special symbol winning / losing lottery in the twenty-ninth embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 273e1 of any of the second reserved areas of the second reserved ball storage area 273e is determined to be a small hit. If the value is smaller than the above, the small hit type associated with the value of the small hit type counter C5 stored in the small hit type counter storage area 273e5 of the same second holding area is obtained from the special figure 2 small hit type table 272b3. It is determined. For example, if the value of the small hit type counter C5 is “27”, “4R big hit corresponding small hit” is determined as the small hit type, and if the value of the small hit type counter C5 is “50”, the small hit type is Is determined, and if the value of the small hit type counter C5 is "95", "16R big hit corresponding small hit" is determined as the small hit type.

  That is, when the small hit is won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, which is the second lottery game, the small hit type of "4R jackpot corresponding small hit" is 30%, and the small hit of "8R jackpot corresponding small hit" is 30%. The type is won at a rate of 30%, and the small hit type of "16R big hit corresponding to small hit" is 40%. Then, when the ball is detected by the special area switch 208h in the small winning opening 72a during the small hit game, the big hit game corresponding to the small hit type (that is, "4R big hit", "8R big hit" or " 16R jackpot ") is started. Therefore, the small hit type in the second special symbol and the big hit type in the second special symbol are substantially the same, and the small hit is won in the second special symbol, and the ball is set in the special area switch 208h. By winning a prize, it is possible to obtain a game value at the same ratio as in the case of winning with the second special symbol.

  In addition, when it is configured so that the same game value is obtained in the big hit and the small hit in the second special symbol, in the dynamic display of the second special symbol (fluctuating effect), the big hit or the small hit is won. By making the game difficult or indistinguishable from the player, it is possible to obscure the timing of giving the game value. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to guess the jackpot probability associated with the setting change. For example, even if the setting is low (that is, the set value 1 or the like), the player can continue the game without letting the player know the setting. The operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be promoted.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-ninth embodiment, the selection ratio of “16R jackpot” having the highest game value in the first lottery game with the first special symbol is 1%, while the second special symbol with the second special symbol is 1%. In the lottery game, the selection ratio of "16R jackpot" according to the jackpot win is 40%, and the selection ratio of "16R jackpot corresponding small hit" according to the jackpot win is 40%. The lottery game with the second special symbol is set to have a higher game value for the player than the game. For this reason, the player is provided with a game property of how to receive the lottery by the second special symbol, that is, to make the ball enter the second starting port 64b rather than the first starting port 64a. Variations are provided to enhance the interest of the game.

  Note that the probability of selecting each of the big hit types or the small hit types when a big hit occurs is appropriately set depending on the model. Then, according to the set probability, the value of the big hit type counter C2 or the small hit type counter C5 associated with each big hit type or each small hit type in the big hit type table 272b or the small hit type table 272b3. Is defined.

  Further, the probability of selecting the big hit type or the small hit type may be changed according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In this case, the big hit type table 272b or the small hit type table 272b3 corresponding to each gaming state is prepared, and the big hit type associated with each big hit type or each small hit type in the respective big hit type table 272b or the small hit type table 272b3. What is necessary is just to change the number of values of the type counter C2 or the small hit type counter C5.

  Returning to FIG. 485, the description of the various counters will be continued. The stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to add, for example, "1" in order within a range of "0 to 99" and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value (that is, "99").

  In the twenty-ninth embodiment, the rough effect mode of the variable effect at the time of a big hit and a loss displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined by the number of the variable effects being held and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3. Selected. Specifically, only the “non-reach (long)” effect mode or “non-reach (short)” effect mode in which “reach display” does not occur, and “variable element of“ normal reach ”as“ reach display ”are executed. A “normal reach” production mode, a “super-reach” production mode in which the “super-reach” variable element is executed by developing from the “normal-reach” variable element, and a “special-reach” mode that also evolves from the “normal-reach” variable element Are performed, and a special fluctuation effect mode in which any of the above-described “reach display” can be executed is selected.

  The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in the twenty-ninth embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 466)). Then, at the timing when the ball has won the first starting port 64a, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 at that time is stored in the first holding ball storage area 273d provided in the first holding ball storage area 273d corresponding to the first starting port 64a. It is stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 273d3 of the first reservation area in which the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored among the first to fourth areas. Further, at the timing when the ball wins the second starting port 64b, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 at that time is stored in the second holding ball storage area 273e corresponding to the second starting port 64b. It is stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 273e3 of the second holding area in which the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored among the first to fourth areas.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-ninth embodiment, the stop pattern selection counter C3 is controlled in accordance with the success or failure of the variable effect, the current game state, and the number of the variable effects of the two special symbols currently on hold (the number of balls held). The stop pattern table 272d that refers to the value is configured to be different. That is, a plurality of types of stop pattern tables 272d are provided, and are configured to be selected based on the number of floating effects (the number of reserved balls) of both special symbols in standby.

  In the twenty-ninth embodiment, when determining a detailed fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation effect, first, based on the number-of-reserved table 272c provided in the ROM 272, whether or not the fluctuation effect is appropriate, the current game state, and the current game state are determined. One of the stop pattern tables 272d corresponding to the number of variable effects (the number of reserved balls) is selected. Then, based on the selected stop pattern table 272d and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, a rough effect mode of the variable effect is selected. Thereafter, a detailed variation pattern (variation time) of the variation effect is determined based on the selected effect mode and a value of a variation type counter CS1 described later.

  Here, the details of the suspended number table 272c will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 488 is a diagram schematically showing the hold number table 272c. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-ninth embodiment, a fluctuating effect (dynamic display; the same applies hereinafter) is performed based on a ball entering the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b. In this case, referring to the reserved number table 272c based on the success or failure of the variable effect, the gaming state at that time, and the total number of the variable effects of the special figures 1 and 2 at that time, The stop pattern tables 272d1 to 272d5 are configured to be selected. Then, based on the selected stop pattern tables 272d1 to 272d5 and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, a rough effect mode of the variable effect is determined.

  Specifically, as shown in the reserved number table 272c of FIG. 488, when the loss is extracted in the “normal game state” and the total number of reserved balls is “1 to 3”, or When the loss is extracted and the total number of reserved balls is “1”, the A table 272d1 of the stop pattern table 272d (see FIG. 489 (a)) is selected.

  Further, when the loss is extracted in the “normal game state” and the number of retained balls is “4 to 8”, or when the loss is extracted in the “time reduction state” and the retained ball number is “2 to In the case of "8", the B table 272d2 (see FIG. 489 (b)) of the stop pattern table 272d is selected.

  Further, at the time of winning the jackpot (ie, when extracting “16R jackpot”, “8R jackpot”, and “4R jackpot”), the D table of the stop pattern table 272d regardless of the game state or the number of retained balls. 272d4 (see FIG. 490 (a)) is selected.

  Also, at the time of the small hit winning (that is, at the time of extracting the small hit game), the E table 272d5 (see FIG. 490 (b)) of the stop pattern table 272d is selected regardless of the game state or the number of retained balls. Is done.

  That is, when any of the jackpots is won, the stop pattern table 272d (D table 272d4) is selected based on only the type of the jackpot, regardless of the number of retained balls or the game state at that time, and the small jackpot is won. In this case, the stop pattern table 272d (E-table 272d5) is selected based only on the winning of the small hit, regardless of the number of reserved balls or the game state at that time, and the winning pattern or the small hit is selected. Only when a win is not made (ie, at the time of a loss), the stop pattern table 272d (A table 272d1 or B table 272d2) is selected based on the number of retained balls and the game state at that time.

  It should be noted that, even when a big hit or a small hit is won, the stop pattern table 272d may be configured to be different depending on the number of reserved balls. For example, when the number of reserved balls is large when a jackpot is won, a stop pattern table 272d in which a relatively short variation pattern is easy to be selected (for example, a “super reach” effect mode in which the variation element of “high-speed variation” is 5 seconds or “ Special reach "production mode etc.) may be selected.

  Next, each stop pattern table 272d will be described with reference to FIGS. 489 and 490. FIG. 489 is a diagram showing a stop pattern table 272d that can be selected at the time of loss, and FIG. 489 (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the A table 272d1 of the stop pattern table 272d. (B) is a figure which showed typically an example of B table 272d2 of stop pattern table 272d. FIG. 490 is a diagram schematically showing a stop pattern table 272d selected at the time of a big hit or a small hit. FIG. 490 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a D table 272d4 of the stop pattern table 272d. 490 (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the E table 272d5 of the stop pattern table 272d.

  As shown in FIG. 489 (a), in the A table 272d1 of the stop pattern table 272d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to each “non-reach (long)” effect mode is set to “0” to “74”. , The range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “normal reach” production mode is set to “75” to “94”, and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “super reach” production mode is “95” to “95”. 97, and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “special reach” effect mode is set to “98”, “99”. In the A table 272d1, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the “non-reach (short)” effect mode, and the “non-reach (short)” effect mode is set so as not to be selected. ing.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 489 (b), in the B table 272d2 of the stop pattern table 272d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “non-reach (short)” effect mode is “0” to “74”. , The range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “normal reach” effect mode is set to “75” to “94”, and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “super reach” effect mode is “95”. To "97", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach" effect mode is set to "98, 99". In the B table 272d2, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the “non-reach (long)” effect mode, and the “non-reach (long)” effect mode is set so as not to be selected. ing.

  That is, in the A table 272d1, the “non-reach (long)” effect mode is 75%, the “normal reach” effect mode is 20%, the “super reach” effect mode is 3%, and the “special reach” effect mode is 2%. It is set to be the selection ratio. In the B table 272d2, the “non-reach (short)” effect mode is 75%, the “normal reach” effect mode is 20%, the “super reach” effect mode is 3%, and the “special reach” effect mode is 2%. It is set to be the selection ratio.

  Therefore, the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is selected in the A table 272d1, and the "non-reach (short)" effect mode is selected in the B table 272d2 instead of the "non-reach (long)" effect mode. It is configured as follows.

  Therefore, it can be said that the A table 272d1 tends to have a relatively longer variation time of the selected variation effect than the B table 272d2. In other words, it can be said that the B-table 272d2 is more likely to have the fluctuation time of the selected fluctuation effect shorter than the A-table 272d1.

  The selection ratios of the “normal reach” effect, the “super reach” effect, and the “special reach” effect with the A table 272d1 and the B table 272d2 are set to be equal.

  In this way, when the loss lottery result is extracted, the effect form of the variable effect is selected based on the number of balls on hold for the variable effect on hold. For example, when the number of pending balls in the variable effect is large, the “non-reach (short)” effect mode in which the variable effect time is short is selected. Thereby, when the number of balls to be held in the variable effect is large, the execution time of the variable effect to be executed is shortened, and the execution number of the variable effect is increased, whereby the execution efficiency of the variable effect can be increased.

  Also, for example, when the number of pending balls for the variable effect is small, the “non-reach (short)” effect mode is used in order to secure the ball entry time to the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b. The “non-reach (long)” effect mode in which the variable effect time is long is selected. Thereby, the “non-reach (long)” effect mode in which the variable effect time is longer than when the “non-reach (short)” effect mode is selected can be performed, and thus the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b. The situation in which the variable effect is being executed by making it easier to secure the ball entry time for the ball, and by increasing the possibility that a new starting prize will occur during the execution time of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81. Can be maintained.

  In the twenty-ninth embodiment, the stop pattern table 272d that is selected based on the number of retained balls in the variable effect is configured to be different when selecting the effect mode in the loss effect variable effect. Alternatively, substantially the same effect mode is selected by the determination of the variable effect based on the entry of the ball into the second starting port 64b and the determination of the variable effect based on the start of the variable effect based on the entering ball. Is configured.

  Specifically, in the case of a loss effect fluctuating effect, one of the A table 272d1 and the B table 272d2 is selected based on the number of pending balls of the fluctuating effect, but the A table 272d1 And the B table 272d2, the value of the stop pattern counter C3 assigned to the “non-reach (long)” effect mode or the “non-reach (short)” effect mode is the same, and is assigned to another effect mode. The values of the stop pattern counters C3 are also set to be the same.

  That is, the only difference is whether the “non-reach (long)” effect mode or the “non-reach (short)” effect mode is selected based on the number of pending balls for the variable effect. The same presentation mode is selected. Therefore, the effect mode selected at the time of the start winning and the effect mode selected at the start of the fluctuation are substantially the same effect mode even when the game state transitions (for example, the number of reserved balls increases). Is selected. As a result, even in the case of performing a pre-reading notice such as "preliminary change notice" based on the effect form selected at the time of the start winning prize, the content of the pre-reading notice is not included in the variable effect which is the target of the pre-read notice. An effect that does not cause inconsistency can be executed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 490 (a), in the D table 272d4 of the stop pattern table 272d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “normal reach” effect mode is set to “0” to “4”. The range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “super reach” effect mode is set to “5” to “39”, and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “special reach” effect mode is “40” to “40”. 99 ". In the D table 272d4, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the “special fluctuation” effect mode, and the “special fluctuation” effect mode is set so as not to be selected. The D table 272d4 is the stop pattern table 202d selected at the time of the big hit, and since "reach display" always occurs, each "non-reach" effect mode is not selected.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 490 (b), in the E table 272d5 of the stop pattern table 272d, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is assigned only to the “special fluctuation” effect mode (“0” to “99”). , The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the effect mode in which the other “reach display” is executed. Therefore, the stop type selected when the small hit is won is always set to the “special fluctuation” effect mode. Since the E table 272d5 is the stop pattern table 272d selected at the time of the small hit, each "non-reach" effect mode is not selected.

  That is, in the D table 272d4, the selection ratio is set such that the “normal reach” effect mode is 5%, the “super reach” effect mode is 35%, and the “special reach” effect mode is 60%. In the E table 272d5, the “special fluctuation” effect mode is set so as to have a selection ratio of 100%.

  Therefore, in the variable production at the time of winning the jackpot, the selection ratio is high in the order of the “special reach” production mode> “super reach” production mode> “normal reach” production mode, and the “normal reach” production mode> It is set so that the selection ratio increases in the order of “super-reach” effect mode> “special reach” effect mode. Therefore, the jackpot expectation degree at the time of appearance of each “reach display” is likely to show the jackpot display result in the order of “special reach” production mode> “super reach” production mode> “normal reach” production mode It is configured to be. Thereby, the degree of expectation to the big hit can be shown to the player by the effect mode of the variable effect, and the player can enjoy a feeling of uplifting to the big hit according to the effect mode of the executed variable effect.

  As described above, the situation in which a game is played by determining the effect mode of the variable effect to be executed based on the success or failure of the variable effect, the game state at that time, and the number of balls reserved for the variable effect at that time By shortening the execution time of the variable effect and increasing the number of executions of the variable effect based on the above, it is possible to select an effect mode that increases the execution efficiency of the variable effect.

  Returning to FIG. 485, the description will be continued. For example, the variation type counter CS1 is configured to add “1” in order within a range of “0 to 9” and return to “0” after reaching the maximum value (that is, “9”). The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 466) is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process (see FIG. 385). Then, at the timing when the ball wins the first starting port 64a, the value of the variation type counter CS1 at that time is provided in the first reserved ball storage area 273d of the RAM 273 provided corresponding to the first starting port 64a. Of the obtained first reserved first to fourth areas, the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the fluctuation type counter storage area 273d4 of the first reserved area. At the timing when the ball wins the second starting port 64b, the value of the variation type counter CS1 at that time is provided in the second reserved ball storage area 273e of the RAM 273 provided corresponding to the second starting port 64b. Of the obtained second reserved first to fourth areas, the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the variation type counter storage area 273e4 of the second reserved area.

  The variation type counter CS1 is used for determining a detailed variation pattern of the variation effect. That is, the MPU 271 of the main control device 110 uses the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern table 272e stored in the ROM 272 to produce detailed information on the effect mode selected by the stop pattern table 272d and the stop pattern selection counter C3. Determine the fluctuation pattern. The determination of the variation pattern is, specifically, determination of the variation time of the variation effect. The voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 perform the reach type and the fine symbol of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the variation pattern (variation time) determined by the variation type counter CS1. The change mode is determined, and the presence or absence of the announcement effect and the execution mode of the advance effect are determined.

  As described above, the MPU 271 of the main control device 110 selects a rough fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation effect and determines only the fluctuation time. With this configuration, the MPU 271 of the main control device 110 does not need to perform detailed notice lottery control or the like necessary for executing the variable production, so that the processing of the MPU 271 related to the variable production can be reduced. it can. Further, it is not necessary for the main control device 110 to prepare commands for all the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation effect, and the ROM capacity of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

  In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine a detailed fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation effect based on the fluctuation time (rough fluctuation pattern) determined by the main control device 110, thereby performing the fluctuation effect. The degree of freedom for selection can be increased. Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the game state changes every moment, it is possible to select or change the effect contents of the variable effect at any time in response to the change, and to execute an appropriate effect according to the game state. it can.

  Here, the details of the variation pattern table 272e will be described with reference to FIGS. 491 and 492. The pachinko machine 10 includes, as the fluctuation pattern table 272e, a special figure 1 loss fluctuation pattern table 272e1 commonly used in all game states when the first special symbol is lost, and when the first special symbol has a big hit. The special figure 1 big hit variation pattern table 272e2 which is commonly used in all the game states, and all the game states when the second special symbol is lost (in the twenty-ninth embodiment, the "time reduction state" , The ball can enter the second starting port 64b only, so that the variation pattern table 272e3 for the special drawing 2 loss, which is commonly used in the "time reduction state" only), Special figure 2 big hit which is used at the time of big hit or small hit of the second special symbol and in all game states (substantially only "time shortened state") Ri, and for the variation pattern table 272e4 small prize are prepared.

  FIG. 491 (a) is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the special figure 1 loss variation pattern table 272e1 stored in the ROM 272, and FIG. 491 (b) is a special figure 1 big hit table stored in the ROM 272. FIG. 492 (a) is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the variation pattern table 272e2, and FIG. 492 (a) is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the special figure 2 loss variation pattern table 272e3 stored in the ROM 272. 492 (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the special figure 2 big hit / small hit variation pattern table 272e4 stored in the ROM 272. As shown in FIGS. 491 and 492, each of the variation pattern tables 272e1 to 272e4 is grouped based on the selected effect mode.

  Specifically, as the production mode at the time of the loss, “E0: non-reach (long)” and “non-reach (short)” productions referred to when the “non-reach (long)” production mode is determined “E1: non-reach (short)” referred to when the aspect is determined, “E2: normal reach” referenced when the “normal reach” production mode is determined, and “super reach” production mode Are determined when “E3: Super Reach” is referred to when the “Special Reach” effect mode is determined. In addition, as the production mode at the time of the big hit and the small hit, it is referred to when the “normal reach” rendering mode is determined and “E6: normal reach” and when the “super reach” rendering mode is determined. "E7: Super Reach", "E9: Special Reach", which is referred to when the production mode is determined, and "E9: Special Reach", and "E9", which is referred to when the "special variation" production mode is determined. : Special fluctuation ”. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups.

  In the twenty-ninth embodiment, the case where the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in a certain reserved area of the first reserved ball storage area 273d corresponding to the first special symbol is not a value (small jackpot random value) that is a big jackpot, If the value is a loss, the stop pattern table 272d is selected based on the game state at that time and the number of balls held at that time with reference to the number-of-holds table 272c, and the same hold area is selected. Is selected based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the stop pattern table 272d and the stop pattern table 272d. Then, a group (group) to be referred to in the special figure 1 loss variation pattern table 272e1 is determined based on the selected effect mode. In the group (group) of the special figure 1 loss variation pattern table 272e1, the variation pattern (variation time) associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the same reserved area is reserved in the reserved area. It is determined as a fluctuation pattern in a fluctuation effect.

  In the special pattern 1 loss variation pattern table 272e1 which is referred to when the first special symbol is lost, “E0: non-reach (long)” has “15 seconds” for the entire variation time ““ high-speed variation (long) ”. And a fluctuation element of "low-speed fluctuation".

  In the example shown in FIG. 49A, the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E0: non-reach (long)” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+“ the low-speed fluctuation ”. "Variable element" is "0-9", and only "variable element of" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+ variable element of" low-speed fluctuation "" can be selected.

  That is, in any game state, when the “non-reach (long)” effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 loss fluctuation pattern table 272e1 referred to when the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol is executed, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set. “Variable element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ variable element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”” is associated with all possible values (“0 to 9”). In other words, in the case of the “non-reach (long)” effect mode in the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol, “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ the fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”” is always selected as the fluctuation pattern. You.

  Next, in the variation pattern table for special figure 1 loss, “E1: non-reach (short)” includes one of “only high-speed variation (short) variation elements” with a total variation time of “5 seconds”. There are two fluctuation patterns.

  In the example shown in FIG. 491 (a), the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E1: non-reach (short)” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “only for the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (short) ””. "0-9", and only "variable element of" high-speed variation (short) "" is set to be selectable.

  That is, in any of the game states, when the “non-reach (short)” effect mode is selected in the special pattern 1 loss variation pattern table 272e1 referred to when performing the variation effect of the first special symbol, the variation type counter CS1 is set. All the possible values (“0 to 9”) are associated with “only the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (short) ””. That is, in the case of the “non-reach (short)” effect mode in the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol, “only the high-speed fluctuation (short)” fluctuation element is always selected as the fluctuation pattern.

  Next, in the fluctuation pattern table for special figure 1 loss, “E2: normal reach” has a fluctuation element of “high-speed fluctuation (long)” + a fluctuation element of “low-speed fluctuation” with an overall fluctuation time of “20 seconds”. + Variable element of "normal reach"].

  In the example shown in FIG. 49A, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in “E2: normal reach” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ the fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”. + "0 to 9" for the "variable element of" normal reach "", and only the "variable element of" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+ the fluctuation element of" low-speed fluctuation "+ the fluctuation element of" normal reach "" Is set to be selectable.

  That is, in any game state, when the “normal reach” effect mode is selected in the special pattern 1 loss fluctuation pattern table 272e1 which is referred to at the time of executing the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol, all the fluctuation type counters CS1 can take. The value (“0 to 9”) is associated with “a fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ a fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”+ a fluctuation element of“ normal reach ””. That is, in the case of the “normal reach” effect mode in the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol, the fluctuation pattern is always “a fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ a fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”+ a fluctuation element of“ normal reach ”” Is selected.

  Next, in the variation pattern table for special figure 1 loss, “E3: Super Reach” has a variation element of “high-speed variation (long)” + variation of “low-speed variation” with a total variation time of “30 seconds”. A variation pattern of “element + variation element of“ normal reach ”+ variation element of“ super reach ”” is prepared.

  In the example shown in FIG. 49A, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in “E3: super reach” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ the fluctuation of“ low-speed fluctuation ”. Element + fluctuation element of “normal reach” + fluctuation element of “super reach” ”is“ 0 to 9 ”, and the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ the fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ” + “Normal reach” fluctuation element + “super reach” fluctuation element ”alone.

  That is, in any game state, when the “super reach” effect mode is selected in the special pattern 1 loss variable pattern table 272e1 that is referred to at the time of performing the variable effect of the first special symbol, all the possible values of the variable type counter CS1 can be obtained. (“0-9”) is associated with “variable element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ variable element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”+ variable element of“ normal reach ”+ variable element of“ super reach ”” Have been. In other words, in the case of the “super reach” effect mode in the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol, the fluctuation element of “high-speed fluctuation (long) + variation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”+ variation element of“ normal reach ”is always used as the fluctuation pattern. + “Variable element of“ super reach ”” is selected.

  Next, in the variation pattern table for special figure 1 loss, “E4: special reach” has a variation element of “high-speed variation (long)” + variation of “low-speed variation” with an overall variation time of “40 seconds”. Element + variable element of “normal reach” + variable element of “special reach” ”.

  In the example shown in FIG. 49A, the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E4: special reach” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ the fluctuation of“ low-speed fluctuation ”. Element + fluctuation element of “normal reach” + fluctuation element of “special reach” ”is“ 0 to 9 ”, and the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ the fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ” + "Normal reach" fluctuation element + "Special reach" fluctuation element "alone.

  That is, in any game state, when the “special reach” effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 loss fluctuation pattern table 272e1 that is referred to at the time of performing the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol, all of the possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (“0-9”) is associated with “variable element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ variable element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”+ variable element of“ normal reach ”+ variable element of“ special reach ”” Have been. That is, in the case of the “special reach” effect mode in the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol, the fluctuation element of “high-speed fluctuation (long)” + variation element of “low-speed fluctuation” + variation element of “normal reach” is always used as the fluctuation pattern. + “Variable element of“ special reach ”” is selected.

  In addition, the variation pattern at the time of the loss in Tokuju 1 (the variation pattern at the time of the big hit in Tokuju 1 or the variation pattern at the time of the loss or the big hit / small hit in Tokuju 2) is the same as the variation pattern Therefore, the variation pattern may be determined without using the variation type counter CS1. In addition, although the selection is made using only the variation type counter CS1, the selection may be made using a plurality of variation type counters in combination (selection of the presence or absence of a notice display or the like).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 491 (b), the special figure 1 big hit variation pattern table 272e2 referred to at the time of the first special symbol big hit will be described. In the twenty-ninth embodiment, when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in a certain holding area of the first holding ball storage area 273d corresponding to the first special symbol is a value that results in a big hit, the holding number table 272c is referred to. Then, a stop pattern table 272d is selected based on the gaming state at that time and the number of reserved balls at that time, and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same reserved area and the stop pattern table The effect mode is selected based on 272d. Then, a group (group) to be referred to in the special figure 1 big hit variation pattern table 272e2 is determined based on the selected effect mode. In the group (group) of the special figure 1 big hit variation pattern table 272e2, the variation pattern (variation time) associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the same reserved area is reserved in the reserved area. It is determined as a fluctuation pattern in a fluctuation effect.

  In the variation pattern table for special figure 1 big hit 272e2, "E6: normal reach" has a variation element of "high-speed variation (long) + a variation element of" low-speed variation "+" low-speed variation "of" 20 seconds ". Fluctuation element of "normal reach"], fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" with fluctuation time of "25 seconds" + fluctuation element of "low-speed fluctuation" + fluctuation element of "normal reach" + "re- fluctuation" And "variable element" are prepared to be selectable, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern.

  In the example shown in FIG. 491 (b), the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E6: normal reach” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ the fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”. + "Variable element of" normal reach "", "0 to 2", "variable element of" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+ fluctuation element of" low-speed fluctuation "+ fluctuation element of" normal reach "+ fluctuation of" re-variation " "3-9" for "element".

  That is, in any game state, when the “normal reach” effect mode is selected in the special pattern 1 big hit fluctuation pattern table 272e2 which is referred to at the time of executing the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol, the “high speed fluctuation (long)” is selected. The fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation element + the fluctuation element of the "low-speed fluctuation" + the fluctuation element of the "normal reach" is 30%, the fluctuation element of the "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + the fluctuation element of the "low-speed fluctuation" + the fluctuation of the "normal reach" The variation pattern of “element + variation element of“ re-variation ”” is set to be selected at a rate of 70%.

  Therefore, in the “normal reach” effect mode selected at the time of the special hit of the special map 1, “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ the fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”+ the fluctuation element of“ normal reach ”+ the“ re- fluctuation ” The variation pattern of the “variable element” is easily selected (70% of the whole). In addition, a variation pattern of “variation element of“ high-speed variation (long) ”+ variation element of“ low-speed variation ”+ variation element of“ normal reach ”” is selected so that any variation pattern can be selected. It is possible to provide a game that can be expected to be a big hit.

  Next, in the special pattern 1 big hit variation pattern table 272e2, “E7: Super Reach” has a variation element of “high-speed variation (long)” + variation of “low-speed variation” with a total variation time of “30 seconds”. Element + fluctuation element of "normal reach" + fluctuation element of "super reach" "and fluctuation element of" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+ fluctuation element of" low-speed fluctuation "+" 35 seconds " A variable element of "normal reach" + a variable element of "super reach" + a variable element of "re-variation" are prepared to be selectable, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each fluctuation pattern. Have been.

  In the example shown in FIG. 491 (b), the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E7: super reach” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ the fluctuation of“ low-speed fluctuation ”. Element + variable element of “normal reach” + variable element of “super reach” ”,“ 0-3 ”,“ variable element of “high-speed fluctuation (long)” + variable element of “low-speed fluctuation” + “normal reach” “Variable element + variable element of“ super reach ”+ variable element of“ re-variation ”” is “4 to 9”.

  That is, in any game state, when the “super reach” effect mode is selected in the special pattern 1 big hit fluctuation pattern table 272e2 which is referred to when the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol is executed, ““ high speed fluctuation (long) ”” 40% of fluctuation pattern + fluctuation element of "low speed fluctuation" + fluctuation element of "normal reach" + fluctuation element of "super reach" + 40% of fluctuation pattern of "high speed fluctuation (long)" + "low speed fluctuation" The variation pattern of “variable element of“ normal reach ”+ variable element of“ super reach ”+ variable element of“ re-variation ”” is set to be selected at a rate of 60%.

  Therefore, in the “super-reach” effect mode selected at the time of the jackpot in the special map 1, “variable element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ variable element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”+ variable element of“ normal reach ”+“ super-reach ” (Variable element of “+ variable element of re-change”) ”(60% of the total). In addition, the fluctuation pattern of “fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”+ fluctuation element of“ normal reach ”+ fluctuation element of“ super reach ”” is selected. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that can expect a big hit from any of the fluctuation patterns.

  Next, in the special pattern 1 big hit variation pattern table 272e2, “E8: special reach” has a variation element of “high-speed variation (long)” + variation of “low-speed variation” with an overall variation time of “40 seconds”. Element + fluctuation element of "normal reach" + fluctuation element of "special reach"] and fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + fluctuation element of "low-speed fluctuation" of "45 seconds" + " A variable element of “normal reach” + a variable element of “special reach” + a variable element of “re-change” is prepared to be selectable, and the value of the change type counter CS1 is associated with each change pattern. Have been.

  In the example shown in FIG. 491 (b), the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E8: special reach” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ the fluctuation of“ low-speed fluctuation ”. Element + fluctuation element of “normal reach” + fluctuation element of “special reach” ”,“ 0-4 ”,“ fluctuation element of “high-speed fluctuation (long)” + fluctuation element of “low-speed fluctuation” + “normal reach” Variable element + variable element of "special reach" + variable element of "re-variation"].

  That is, in any of the game states, when the “special reach” effect mode is selected in the special pattern 1 big hit fluctuation pattern table 272e2 which is referred to when the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol is executed, ““ high speed fluctuation (long) ”” The fluctuation pattern of "variable element of" low-speed fluctuation "+ fluctuation element of" normal reach "+ fluctuation element of" special reach "" is 50%, and the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "low-speed fluctuation" The variation pattern of “variable element of“ normal reach ”+ variable element of“ special reach ”+ variable element of“ re-variation ”” is set to be selected at a rate of 50%.

  Therefore, in the “super-reach” effect mode selected at the time of the jackpot in the special map 1, “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ the fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”+ the fluctuation element of“ normal reach ”+“ special reach ” Of "variable element" and the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + the variable element of "low-speed fluctuation" + the variable element of "normal reach" + the variable element of "super reach" + the variable element of "re-variation" Is selected (50% each). As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming ability in which a large hit can be expected in any of the fluctuation patterns.

  In the twenty-ninth embodiment, the first special symbol dynamic display is configured so as not to win a small hit. Therefore, the special pattern 1 big hit variation pattern table 272e2 is executed when a small hit is won. No fluctuation pattern corresponding to “E9: special fluctuation” described later is provided.

  With such a configuration, when a big hit is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, a relatively long change pattern is easily selected so that a change effect of generating a big hit occurs. Enhancing the content of the performance can enhance the interest of the game. In addition, in the case where the jackpot has not been won, that is, in the case of a losing, a relatively short variation pattern is configured to be easily selected, thereby shortening the content of the variation effect at the time of the losing, and making the variation effect. It can be digested efficiently.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 492 (a), the special figure 2 loss variation pattern table 272e3 referred to when the second special symbol is lost will be described. In the twenty-ninth embodiment, when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in a certain reserved area of the second reserved ball storage area 273e corresponding to the second special symbol is not a value that is a big hit or a small hit, that is, When the value is a loss, the stop pattern table 272d is selected based on the game state at that time and the number of balls at that time with reference to the number-of-reservations table 272c, and the same stop area is selected. An effect mode is selected based on the stored value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the stop pattern table 272d. Then, a group (group) to be referred to in the special figure 2 loss variation pattern table 272e3 is determined based on the selected effect mode. In the group (group) of the special figure 2 loss variation pattern table 272e3, the variation pattern (variation time) associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the same reserved area is reserved in the reserved area. It is determined as a fluctuation pattern in a fluctuation effect.

  In the special pattern 2 loss variation pattern table 272e3, “E0: non-reach (long)” has a total variation time of “15 seconds” and a “variation element of“ high-speed variation (long) ”+“ low-speed variation ”. One variation pattern is prepared.

  In the example shown in FIG. 492 (a), the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E0: non-reach (long)” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+“ the low-speed fluctuation ”. "Variable element" is "0-9", and only "variable element of" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+ variable element of" low-speed fluctuation "" is set to be selectable.

  That is, when the “non-reach (long)” effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 loss variation pattern table 272e3 referred to in any game state, all possible values of the variation type counter CS1 (“0 to 9”) )) Is associated with a “fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ a fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ””. In other words, in the case of the “non-reach (long)” production mode in the fluctuation production of the second special symbol, as in the case of the fluctuation production of the first special symbol, the fluctuation pattern “variable element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+“ The variable element of "low-speed fluctuation" is selected.

  Next, in the special pattern 2 loss variation pattern table 272e3, “E1: non-reach (short)” has a total variation time of “5 seconds” and “only high-speed variation (short) variation element”. There are two fluctuation patterns.

  In the example shown in FIG. 492 (a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in “E1: non-reach (short)” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “only the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (short) ””. "0-9", and only "variable element of" high-speed variation (short) "" is set to be selectable.

  That is, when the “non-reach (short)” effect mode is selected in the special pattern 2 loss variation pattern table 272e3 referred to in any game state, all possible values of the variation type counter CS1 (“0 to 9”) )) Is associated with “only the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (short) ””. In other words, in the case of the “non-reach (short)” effect mode in the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol, as with the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol, the fluctuation pattern is always “only the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (short) ””. Is selected.

  Next, in the special pattern 2 loss variation pattern table 272e3, “E2: normal reach” has a variation element of “high-speed variation (long)” + variation element of “low-speed variation” with an overall variation time of “20 seconds”. + Variable element of "normal reach"].

  In the example shown in FIG. 492 (a), the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E2: normal reach” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ the fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”. + "Normal reach" fluctuation element "is set to" 0-9 ", and only" Fast fluctuation (long) "fluctuation element +" Slow fluctuation "fluctuation element +" Normal reach "fluctuation element" It is set to be selectable.

  That is, when the “normal reach” effect mode is selected in the special pattern 2 loss variation pattern table 272e3 that is referred to in any game state, all possible values (“0 to 9”) of the variation type counter CS1 are obtained. "Variable element of" high-speed variation (long) "+ variable element of" low-speed variation "+ variable element of" normal reach "" are associated with each other. That is, in the case of the “normal reach” effect mode in the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol in “probable change / time saving time”, as in the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol, the “high-speed fluctuation (long)” is always used as the fluctuation pattern. Variable element + variable element of "low speed fluctuation" + variable element of "normal reach"].

  Next, in the variation pattern table 272e3 for the special figure 2 loss, "E3: super reach" indicates that the total variation time is "30 seconds" and the "high-speed variation (long)" variation factor + "low-speed variation" variation. A variation pattern of “element + variation element of“ normal reach ”+ variation element of“ super reach ”” is prepared.

  In the example shown in FIG. 492 (a), the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E3: super reach” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ the fluctuation of“ low-speed fluctuation ”. Element + variable element of “normal reach” + variable element of “super reach” ”is“ 0-9 ”, and“ variable element of “high-speed fluctuation (long)” + variable element of “low-speed fluctuation” + It is set so that only the "normal reach" fluctuation element + the "super reach" fluctuation element "can be selected.

  That is, when the “super reach” effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 loss variation pattern table 272e3 referred to in any game state, all possible values (“0-9”) of the variation type counter CS1 are changed to “0”. On the other hand, “variable element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ variable element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”+ variable element of“ normal reach ”+ variable element of“ super reach ”” are associated. In other words, in the case of the “super reach” effect mode in the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol, as in the case of the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol, the fluctuation pattern “variation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+“ low-speed fluctuation ” Variable element of “normal reach” + variable element of “super reach” ”is selected.

  Next, in the variation pattern table 272e3 for the special figure 2 loss, "E4: special reach" indicates that the overall variation time is "40 seconds" and the "variation factor of" high-speed variation (long) "+ variation of" low-speed variation ". Element + variable element of “normal reach” + variable element of “special reach” ”.

  In the example shown in FIG. 492 (a), the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E4: special reach” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ the fluctuation of“ low-speed fluctuation ”. Element + variable element of “normal reach” + variable element of “special reach” ”is“ 0-9 ”, and“ variable element of “high-speed fluctuation (long)” + variable element of “low-speed fluctuation” + It is set so that only the "normal reach" fluctuation element + the "special reach" fluctuation element "can be selected.

  That is, when the “special reach” effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 loss variation pattern table 272e3 that is referred to in any game state, all possible values (“0 to 9”) of the variation type counter CS1 are changed to “0”. On the other hand, “variable element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ variable element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”+ variable element of“ normal reach ”+ variable element of“ special reach ”” are associated. In other words, in the case of the “special reach” effect mode in the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol, as in the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol, the fluctuation pattern is always “variable element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+“ low-speed fluctuation ”. Variable element of “normal reach” + variable element of “special reach” ”is selected.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 492 (b), the special pattern 2 big hit / small hit variation pattern table 272e4 referred to at the time of the big hit or the small hit of the second special symbol will be described. In the twenty-ninth embodiment, when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in a certain holding area of the second holding ball storage area 273e corresponding to the second special symbol is a value that becomes a big hit or a value that becomes a small hit, With reference to the reserved number table 272c, the stop pattern table 272d is selected based on the gaming state at that time and the number of retained balls at that time, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same reserved area is selected. An effect mode is selected based on the value and the stop pattern table 272d. Then, a group (group) to be referred to is determined in the special pattern 2 big hit / small hit variation pattern table 272e4 based on the selected effect mode. In the group (group) of the special pattern 2 big hit / small hit change pattern table 272e4, a change pattern (change time) associated with the value of the change type counter CS1 stored in the same hold area is stored in the hold area. It is determined as a fluctuation pattern in the suspended fluctuation effect.

  In the special pattern 2 big hit / small hit variation pattern table 272e4, "E6: normal reach" has a variation factor of "high speed variation (long)" + variation of "low speed variation" with a total variation time of "20 seconds". Element + “normal reach” fluctuation element ”, and the entire fluctuation time is“ 25 seconds ”“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”fluctuation element +“ low-speed fluctuation ”fluctuation element +“ normal reach ”fluctuation element +“ re The two variation patterns “variation element of variation” are prepared to be selectable, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern.

  In the example shown in FIG. 492 (b), the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E6: normal reach” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ the fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”. + "Variable element of" normal reach "", "0 to 2", "variable element of" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+ fluctuation element of" low-speed fluctuation "+ fluctuation element of" normal reach "+ fluctuation of" re-variation " "3-9" for "element".

  That is, when the “normal reach” effect mode is selected in the special pattern 2 big hit / small hit change pattern table 272e4 which is referred to when the second special symbol change effect is executed, the “high-speed change (ultra short)” change element is selected. + Fluctuation factor of "low-speed fluctuation" + fluctuation element of "normal reach" 30%, fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (ultra short)" + fluctuation element of "low-speed fluctuation" + fluctuation element of "normal reach" + The variation pattern of “re-variation” is set to be selected at a rate of 70%.

  Therefore, in the “normal reach” effect mode selected at the time of the second special symbol jackpot, “variable element of“ high-speed fluctuation (ultra short) ”+ variable element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”+ variable element of“ normal reach ”+“ re-variation ” The variation pattern of “variable element” is easily selected (70% of the whole). In addition, a variation pattern of “high-speed variation (ultra-short)” + “low-speed variation” + “normal reach” variation pattern is configured to be selected. However, it is possible to provide a game that can expect a big hit.

  Next, in the special pattern 2 big hit / small hit variation pattern table 272e4, "E7: super reach" has a variation element of "high-speed variation (long)" + "low-speed variation" with an overall variation time of "30 seconds". ”+“ Normal reach ”fluctuation +“ super reach ”fluctuation” and “high-speed fluctuation (long) fluctuation + low-speed fluctuation” with an overall fluctuation time of “35 seconds”. Element + variable element of “normal reach” + variable element of “super reach” + variable element of “re-variation” are prepared to be selectable, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 for each variation pattern Are associated with each other.

  In the example shown in FIG. 492 (b), the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E7: super reach” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ the fluctuation of“ low-speed fluctuation ”. Element + variable element of “normal reach” + variable element of “super reach” ”,“ 0-3 ”,“ variable element of “high-speed fluctuation (long)” + variable element of “low-speed fluctuation” + “normal reach” “Variable element + variable element of“ super reach ”+ variable element of“ re-variation ”” is “4 to 9”.

  That is, when the “super reach” effect mode is selected in the special pattern 2 big hit / small hit change pattern table 272e4 which is referred to when the second special symbol changing effect is executed, the “high-speed changing (long)” changing element is selected. + Variable element of "low-speed fluctuation" + fluctuation element of "normal reach" + fluctuation element of "super-reach" 40%, fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + fluctuation element of "low-speed fluctuation" + A variation element of "normal reach" + a variation element of "super reach" + a variation element of "re-variation" are set to be selected at a rate of 60%.

  Therefore, in the “super reach” effect mode selected at the time of the second special symbol jackpot, “variable element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ variable element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”+ variable element of“ normal reach ”+“ super reach ” The variation pattern of “variable element of“ + variable element of “re-variation” ”” is easily selected (60% of the whole). In addition, the fluctuation pattern of “fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”+ fluctuation element of“ normal reach ”+ fluctuation element of“ super reach ”” is selected. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that can expect a big hit from any of the fluctuation patterns.

  Next, in the special pattern 2 big hit / small hit change pattern table 272e4, "E8: special reach" has a total change time of "40 seconds", a "high-speed change (long)" change element + "low-speed change". ”+“ Normal reach ”+“ Special reach ”variance” and “High speed (long) variability” + “Slow variability” with a total variance of 45 seconds. Element + variable element of “normal reach” + variable element of “special reach” + variable element of “re-variation” are prepared to be selectable, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 for each variation pattern Are associated with each other.

  In the example shown in FIG. 492 (b), the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E8: special reach” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ the fluctuation of“ low-speed fluctuation ”. Element + fluctuation element of “normal reach” + fluctuation element of “special reach” ”,“ 0-4 ”,“ fluctuation element of “high-speed fluctuation (long)” + fluctuation element of “low-speed fluctuation” + “normal reach” Variable element + variable element of "special reach" + variable element of "re-variation"].

  That is, when the “special reach” effect mode is selected in the special pattern 2 big hit / small hit change pattern table 272e4, which is referred to when the second special symbol changing effect is executed, the “high-speed changing (long)” changing element is selected. + Fluctuation factor of "low speed fluctuation" + fluctuation element of "normal reach" + fluctuation element of "special reach" is 50%, fluctuation factor of "high speed fluctuation (long)" + fluctuation element of "low speed fluctuation" + Variable element of “normal reach” + variable element of “special reach” + variable element of “re-variation” are set to be selected at a rate of 50%.

  Therefore, in the “special reach” effect mode selected at the time of the second special symbol jackpot, “variable element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ variable element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”+ variable element of“ normal reach ”+“ special reach ” Pattern of "variable element" and the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + the variable element of "low-speed fluctuation" + the fluctuation element of "normal reach" + the fluctuation element of "special reach" + the fluctuation of "re-variation" The variation pattern of the "element" is evenly selected (50% each). As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming ability in which a large hit can be expected in any of the fluctuation patterns.

  Next, in the special pattern 2 large hit / small hit change pattern table 272e4, "E9: special change" has a total change time of "20 seconds", a "high-speed change (long)" change element + "low-speed change". "Variable element of" normal reach "" and "variable element of" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+ variable element of" low-speed fluctuation "+ variable element of" normal reach "+" super reach "of" 30 seconds " Fluctuation element ”and“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”fluctuation element with a total fluctuation time of“ 40 seconds ”+“ low-speed fluctuation ”fluctuation element +“ normal reach ”fluctuation element +“ special reach ”fluctuation element Are prepared to be selectable, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern.

  In the example shown in FIG. 492 (b), the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E9: special fluctuation” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ the fluctuation of“ low-speed fluctuation ”. Element + fluctuation element of "normal reach"], the fluctuation element of "high speed fluctuation (long)" + the fluctuation element of "low speed fluctuation" + the fluctuation element of "normal reach" + "super reach" "4-6" for "variable element", "variable element for" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+ variable element for" low-speed fluctuation "+ variable element for" normal reach "+ variable element for" special reach " "7 to 9".

  That is, when the “special fluctuation” effect mode is selected in the special pattern 2 big hit / small hit fluctuation pattern table 272e4, which is referred to at the time of executing the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol, the “high-speed fluctuation (long)” fluctuation element is selected. + Variation factor of "low speed variation" + variation factor of "normal reach" is 40%, variation factor of "high speed variation (long)" + variation factor of "low speed variation" + variation factor of "normal reach" + The fluctuation pattern of the “super-reach” fluctuation element is 30%, the “high-speed fluctuation (long)” fluctuation element + the “slow fluctuation” fluctuation element + the “normal reach” fluctuation element + the “special reach” fluctuation element ” Is set to be selected at a rate of 30%.

  Therefore, in the “special fluctuation” effect mode selected at the time of the small hit of the second special symbol, the fluctuation element of “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ the fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”+ the fluctuation element of“ normal reach ”” The pattern is easily selected (40% of the whole). In addition, the fluctuation pattern of “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ the fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”+ the fluctuation element of“ normal reach ”+ the fluctuation element of“ super-reach ”” or ““ high-speed fluctuation (long) ” Variable element + fluctuation element of "low speed fluctuation" + fluctuation element of "normal reach" + fluctuation element of "special reach", so that small hits can be obtained from any of the fluctuation patterns. It is possible to provide a playability that can be expected.

  As a result, when a small hit is won in the second special symbol, all "reach indications" can be selected, and therefore, in any of the "reach indications", the player should expect a lottery result of a big hit or a small hit. Can improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, the fluctuation pattern in the case of winning a small hit is not limited to the above embodiment, but can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, for example, when a small hit is won by lottery in the second special symbol, a long variation pattern (for example, a variation pattern including a variation element of “re-variation”) may be performed. Alternatively, a short fluctuation pattern (for example, a fluctuation pattern of only a high-speed fluctuation (short) fluctuation element) may be performed.

  Returning to FIG. 485, the description will be continued. The per-figure random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by one, for example, in the range of “0 to 99” and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value (ie, “99”). When the per-figure-period random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the per-figure per-figure random number counter C4.

  The value of the random number counter C4 per ordinary figure is updated, for example, periodically (in the twenty-ninth embodiment, once every timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 466)), and it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67. At this time, the data is stored in one of the first to fourth general-purpose reserved areas provided in the general-purpose reserved ball storage area 273i of the RAM 273. Then, the data is sequentially shifted to the general figure reserved ball execution area 273j in the order stored in the general figure reserved ball storage area 273i, and the value of the general figure per-random number counter C4 stored in the general figure reserved ball execution area 273j is changed. A hit determination is made for the hit.

  The value of the random number which is a hit for the normal symbol is set by a random number table 272f (refer to FIG. 493 (a)) stored in the ROM 272 of the main controller 110 and stored in the general figure holding ball execution area 273j. If the value of the general-purpose hit counter C4 is equal to the value of the random number which is the hit set by the general-purpose hit random number table 272f, it is determined to be a hit. After the hit determination, the variable display time of the ordinary symbol is set by referring to the ordinary symbol change table 272g (see FIG. 493 (b)) according to the game state, and the lapse of the variable display time on the ordinary symbol display device 83. Thereafter, a symbol "O" is displayed as a stop symbol (a normal symbol). After that, the protruding time of the ordinary electric hand 64c is set by referring to the electric hand opening table 272h (see FIG. 493 (c)) according to the gaming state, and during the opening time, the ordinary electric hand 64c operates to protrude. In the meantime, the ball can enter the second starting port 64b.

  On the other hand, if the value of the per-figure-per-counter C4 stored in the per-figure per-drawing counter area does not match the value of the winning random number set by the per-figure per-random number table 272f, it is determined that a loss has occurred. After the loss is determined, the variable display time is set by referring to the general-purpose variation table 272g (see FIG. 493 (b)) according to the game state, and after the variable display time has elapsed in the ordinary symbol display device 83, the stop symbol is set. The symbol “x” is lit and displayed as (ordinary symbol).

  Here, the details of the per-drawing random number table 272f will be described with reference to FIG. 493 (a). FIG. 493 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of a per-figure random number table 272f stored in the ROM 272.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-ninth embodiment, neither the special symbol nor the ordinary symbol is provided with a so-called probability variation function, and the random number table per ordinary symbol 272f is commonly used in all gaming states of the pachinko machine 10. Only one type is provided.

  As shown in FIG. 493 (a), in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-ninth embodiment, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-sixth embodiment, the random number counter C4 for the ordinary figure per hit which is a hit in all the game states (ie, the “normal game state” and the “time reduction state”) The number of values is 99, and the values “1 to 99” are defined (set) in the random number table 272f per figure. That is, the winning probability of the ordinary symbol is set to be 99/100 (99%).

  Thus, in the variable display of the normal symbol, it is set so that it is easy to win a win, but the variable display time of the normal symbol which differs for each game state described later and the projection of the normal electric hand 64c which differs for each game state are also described later. It is configured to change, depending on the time (the number of times), whether or not the second start-up port 64b can win the prize.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 493 (b), the details of the ordinary figure fluctuation table 272g will be described. FIG. 493 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the general-purpose variation table 272g stored in the ROM 272.

  Different from the per-figure random number table 272f, the perpetual figure fluctuation table 272g is divided into two types: a "normal game state" and a "time reduction state". The variable display time of the ordinary symbol set for the “normal game state” and the “time reduction state” is set differently. As described above, by making the variable display time of the ordinary symbol different between the “normal game state” and the “time shortened state”, the time at which the result of the success / failure of the ordinary symbol is derived for each game state.

  As shown in FIG. 493 (b), in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-ninth embodiment, the variable display time of the ordinary symbol set in the case of the “normal gaming state” is set to “5 seconds”. 272 g. That is, in the “normal game state”, the time from the start of the variable display of the ordinary symbol to the derivation of the stopped symbol is set to be “5 seconds” without exception.

  On the other hand, the variable display time of the ordinary symbol set in the case of the “time shortened state” is defined by the ordinary figure variation table 272g to be “0.5 seconds”. That is, in the “time reduction state”, the time from the start of the variable display of the ordinary symbol to the derivation of the stopped symbol is set to be “0.5 seconds” without exception.

  Thereby, when the variable display time of the ordinary symbol is changed according to the game state, the through gate 67 and the ordinary so that the time for the ball to flow from the through gate 67 to the ordinary electric hand 64c takes "0.5 seconds" or more are required. By arranging the electric hand 64c, it is possible to make a difference as to whether or not the variable display of the ordinary symbol ends before the ball passing through the through gate 67 reaches the position where the ordinary electric hand 64c is arranged. As a result, when the ball fired in the right-handed game passes through the through gate 67 in the "time shortened state" and the variable display of the ordinary symbol based on the passage is executed, the ball is changed to the ordinary electric hand 64c. The normal electrical hand 64c can be protruded before reaching the disposition position. As a result, the ball itself that has passed through the through gate 67 can be guided to the second starting port 64b side, and in the ball fired in the right-handed game, the useless ball is reduced, and the ball held by the player in the “time shortened state” Can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 493 (c), the electrical activity release table 272h will be described. FIG. 493 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the electrical activity opening table 272h stored in the ROM 272. The electric winning opening table 272h is referred to when a normal symbol hits, and the protruding time and the number of protruding times of the normal electric hand 64c are defined based on the game state at the timing when the normal symbol hit occurs.

  The electric activity opening table 272h is divided into groups based on the game state in which the symbols are usually drawn by lot. Specifically, the protruding mode (the number of times and the number of times) of the normal electric hand 64c is used for the “normal gaming state” referred to in the “normal gaming state” and for the “time shortened state” referred to in the “time shortened state”. Time) is changed.

  As shown in FIG. 493 (c), in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-ninth embodiment, the number of protrusions of the ordinary electric hand 64c set when the ordinary symbol is won in the “normal game state” is “one time”. The protruding time is defined in the electrical activity opening table 272h so as to be "0.1 second". In other words, when a normal symbol is won in the “normal gaming state”, the normal electric hand 64c is set to protrude for a total of “0.1 seconds”.

  On the other hand, the number of projections of the ordinary electric hand 64c set when the ordinary symbol is won in the "time reduction state" is "3 times", and the ejection time of the ordinary electric hand 64c is set to "5 seconds". 272h. That is, when a normal symbol is won in the "time reduction state", the normal electric hand 64c is configured to protrude for a total of "15 seconds".

  In addition, the immersion time (so-called interval time) between one projection and the next projection of the ordinary electric hand 64c is set to be "1 second". Therefore, when a normal symbol is won in the "time reduction state", the projection and the immersion of the ordinary electric hand 64c are intermittently repeated for a total of "17 seconds".

  Thus, by changing the manner in which the normal electric hand 64c protrudes according to the gaming state, it is possible to cause a difference in the length of the period during which the normal electric hand 64c protrudes. As a result, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, a situation in which the normal electric hand 64c protrudes for a long time to easily win a prize to the second starting opening 64b side, or a case in which the normal electric hand 64c protrudes. Whether the ball is difficult or impossible to win the second start-up port 64b due to the shortness is made different depending on the game state, so that different game properties can be generated for each game state.

  The winning probability of variable display of a normal symbol and the variable display time of variable display are not limited to those in the above embodiment, but can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, as the winning probability of the normal symbol, any probability may be used as long as the "time reduction state" is easier to win in the variable display of the normal symbol than the "normal gaming state", for example, Ordinarily, the winning probability of the symbol may be set to about 1/100 so that it is difficult to win. In addition, as the variable display time of the normal symbol, any variable display time may be used as long as the “time reduction state” is shorter than the “normal game state”, for example, the variable display time of the normal symbol in the “normal game state” It may be a long time of “5 seconds” or more (for example, “30 seconds”) or a short time of less than “5 seconds” (for example, “1 second”).

  Further, the projecting time and the projecting frequency of the ordinary electric hand 64c are not limited to the above embodiment, but can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, for example, the protruding time of the ordinary electric hand 64c in the “normal gaming state” may be set to “0.1 seconds” or more (for example, “1 second”), or the number of protrusions may be set to “1 time”. "(For example," 3 times "). Further, the protruding time of the ordinary electric hand 64c in the “time reduction state” may be a long time of “5 seconds” or more (for example, “10 seconds”), or a short time of less than “5 seconds” (for example, “1”). Seconds "). Further, the number of times that the ordinary electric hand 64c protrudes in the “time shortened state” may be a large number of “3” or more (for example, “10”), or a small number of less than “3” (for example, “1”). Times)).

  Returning to FIG. 484, the description will be continued. The RAM 273 includes, in addition to the counter buffer 273c illustrated in FIG. 485, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 271 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 271 are stored, various flags, a counter, an I / O A work area (work area) in which values such as O are stored. The RAM 273 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 273 is backed up. .

  The RAM 273 further stores a first reserved ball number counter 273a, a second reserved ball number counter 273b, a first reserved ball storage area 273d, a second reserved ball storage area 273e, a reserved ball execution area 273fa, and a general-purpose reserved ball number counter 273h. , And at least a general-purpose reserve ball execution area 273j.

  As described above, the reserved ball execution area 273fa is a storage area commonly used by the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and is used to start the execution or to execute the first special symbol or the second special symbol. 2. Data (counters C1 to C3, C5, and CS1) to be referred to in a process such as a special symbol big hit lottery or a small hit lottery, and a process of setting a dynamic display and a variable effect of the special symbol display device 39 and the third symbol display device 81. Is stored in the memory.

  When the MPU 271 detects that it is the execution start timing of the fluctuating effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the MPU 271 determines the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the special symbol display device 39 and the third symbol display. In order to execute the processing such as the setting of the dynamic display and the variable effect of the device 81, the data (counters C1 to C1) corresponding to the start winning prize stored in the first reserved ball storage area 273d or the second reserved ball storage area 273e. C3, CS1), data corresponding to one start winning prize of the data is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 273fa. Note that the shift in the twenty-ninth embodiment indicates that data stored in one area is moved to another area.

  Here, referring to FIG. 485 again, the details of the first reserved ball storage area 273d, the second reserved ball storage area 273e, and the reserved ball execution area 273fa will be described. The first reserved ball storage area 273d, the second reserved ball storage area 273e, and the reserved ball execution area 273fa are used for the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol and the operation of the special symbol display device 39 and the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 271 of the main control device 110 to set a target display and a fluctuating effect.

  As described above, the jackpot lottery or the small hit lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the dynamic display and the variable effect setting of the special symbol display device 39 and the third symbol display device 81 are set as the big hit lottery and The big hit random number counter C1 used for the small hit lottery, the big hit type counter C2 used for determining the big hit type, the stop pattern selection counter C3 used for determining the effect mode of the variable effect, and the change used for determining the change pattern The type counter CS1 and the small hit type counter C5 used for determining the small hit type are used. The first reserved ball storage area 273d stores the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer 273c by the MPU 271 when the ball has won the first starting port 64a (starting winning), The second reserved ball storage area 273e stores the respective values of the counters C1 to C3, CS1 and C5 acquired from the counter buffer 273c by the MPU 271 when the ball has won the second starting port 64b (start winning). .

  The first reserved ball storage area 273d is composed of four reserved areas (first reserved first to fourth areas). Each of the four reserved areas (first reserved first to fourth areas) has a jackpot random number counter storage area 273d1 for storing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and a jackpot type counter storage area for storing the value of the jackpot type counter C2. 273d2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 273d3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a fluctuation type counter storage area 273d4 for storing the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

  The second reserved ball storage area 273e is composed of four reserved areas (second reserved first to fourth areas). Each of the four holding areas (second holding first to fourth areas) has a jackpot random number counter storage area 273e1 for storing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and a jackpot type counter storage area for storing the value of the jackpot type counter C2. 273e2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 273e3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, a fluctuation type counter storage area 273e4 for storing the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and a small area for storing the value of the small hit type counter C5. A hit type counter storage area 273e5 is provided.

  In the twenty-ninth embodiment, the jackpot random number counter storage areas 273d1 and 273e1, the jackpot type counter storage areas 273d2 and 273e2, the stop pattern selection counter storage areas 273d3 and 273e3, the variation type counter storage areas 273d4 and 273e4, Although the hit type counter storage area 273e5 is provided collectively in one reserved ball storage area 273d, 273e (the small hit type counter storage area 273e5 is only the second reserved ball storage area 273e), each counter C1 is provided. A plurality of reserved ball storage areas may be provided for each of C3, C5, and CS1.

  Further, in the twenty-ninth embodiment, the small holding type counter storage area is not provided in the first reserved ball storage area 273d, but the small holding type counter is also provided in the first reserved ball storage area 273d. Is also good. With this configuration, the counter value to be obtained can be made the same between when the ball wins in the first starting port 64a and when the ball wins in the second starting port 64b. Can be used. As a result, the number of man-hours for developing the control program can be reduced, and the program capacity in the ROM 272 can be reduced.

  In the first reserved ball storage area 273d, data (each value of each of the counters C1 to C3, CS1) acquired at the timing when the ball wins (starts winning) in the first starting port 64a is stored up to a maximum of four times. However, in this case, data is stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four reserved areas (first reserved first to fourth areas). In other words, the data corresponding to the start winning in the first starting port 64a that is older in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the first reserved first area is stored in the first starting port 64a that is the oldest in time. Will be stored.

  In the second reserved ball storage area 273e, data (each value of each of the counters C1 to C3, CS1, and C5) acquired at the timing when the ball wins (starts winning) in the second starting port 64b is stored for up to four times. In this case, the data is sequentially stored in the vacant areas of the four reserved areas (second reserved first to fourth areas) in ascending order of the area numbers (first to fourth). It is memorized. In other words, the data corresponding to the start winning in the second starting port 64b that is earlier in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the oldest second starting port 64b is stored in the second reserved first area. Will be stored.

  On the other hand, the reserved ball execution area 273fa is composed of only one area. Like the second reserved ball storage area 273e, the reserved ball execution area 273fa stores a jackpot random number counter storage area 273fa1 for storing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and a jackpot type counter for storing the value of the jackpot type counter C2. An area 273fa2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 273fa3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, a variation type counter storage area 273fa4 for storing the value of the variation type counter CS1, and a small area for storing the value of the small hit type counter C5. A hit type counter storage area 273fa5 is provided.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the twenty-ninth embodiment is provided with two special symbols (that is, a first special symbol and a second special symbol) as in the pachinko machine 10 according to the twenty-eighth embodiment. Unlike the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-eighth embodiment which can execute the dynamic display of the special symbol, only the special symbol display device 39 (and the third symbol display device 81) dynamically displays one special symbol (fluctuation effect). Is configured to be executable. Specifically, for example, in a state where the dynamic display (variable effect) of the first special symbol is suspended, and in a state where the dynamic display (variable effect) of the second special symbol is not suspended. If so, the special symbol display device 39 (and the third symbol display device 81) executes the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) of the first special symbol. Also, for example, if the dynamic display (variable effect) of the first special symbol is in a suspended state and the dynamic display (variable effect) of the second special symbol is also in a suspended state, First, the special symbol display device 39 (and the third symbol display device 81) performs the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) of the second special symbol, and after all the dynamic display of the reserved second special symbol has been executed. The dynamic display of the reserved first special symbol is executed (so-called special figure 2 priority change).

  Therefore, in the RAM 273 of the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-ninth embodiment, an execution area for storing information relating to dynamic display and fluctuating effects executed by the special symbol display device 39 and the third symbol display device 81 is provided. As described above, the first reserved ball execution area 273f and the second reserved ball execution area 273g are not provided, and one reserved ball execution area 273fa is provided as the execution area.

  When the MPU 271 determines that the execution start timing of the variable effect has come, the data (each value of each of the counters C1 to C3, C5, and CS1) is stored in the second reserved first area of the second reserved ball storage area 273e. If so, the data stored in the second reserved first area is shifted to each area 273fa1 to 273fa5 of the reserved ball execution area 273fa.

  On the other hand, when it is the execution start timing of the variable effect, the MPU 271 does not store data in the second reserved first area of the second reserved ball storage area 273e, and the first data of the first reserved ball storage area 273d. When data is stored in the reserved first area, the data (each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) stored in the first reserved first area is transferred to each area 273fa1 of the reserved ball execution area 273f. To 273fa4. In this case, since the area for storing the value of the small hit type counter C5 (that is, the small hit type counter storage area) is not provided in the first reserved ball storage area 273d, it corresponds to the value of the small hit type counter C5. The shift processing is omitted.

  Then, the data shifted to the reserved ball execution area 273fa is referred to in the special figure 2 change start processing (see FIG. 497) or the special figure 1 change start processing (see FIG. 498), and based on the reference data, the jackpot lottery (see FIG. 498). And / or a small win lottery), and a variation pattern and a stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. In the special symbol display device 39, under the control of the main control device 110, dynamic display is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type.

  The fluctuation pattern and the stop type determined here are determined by the voice lamp control device 113 according to the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command and the special figure 1 stop type command, or the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command and the special figure 2 stop type command. And the display control device 114 are notified. Under the control of the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 causes the special figure 1 change pattern command and the special figure 1 stop type command, or the special figure 2 change pattern command and the special figure 2 A fluctuation effect is performed based on the fluctuation pattern and the stop type notified by the stop type command.

  Details of the data shift will be described. When determining that the execution start timing of the variable effect has come, the MPU 271 determines whether data is stored in the second reserved first area of the second reserved ball storage area 273e. As a result of the determination, when it is determined that data is stored in the second reserved first area, the random number value of the jackpot random number counter storage area 273e1 of the second reserved first area is replaced with the jackpot random number of the reserved ball execution area 273fa. Shift to the counter storage area 273fa1. Similarly, the random number value of the jackpot type counter storage area 273e2 of the second hold first area is shifted to the jackpot type counter storage area 273fa2, and the random number value of the stop pattern selection counter storage area 273e3 of the second hold first area is It shifts to the stop pattern selection counter storage area 273fa3, shifts the random number value of the change type counter storage area 273e4 of the second hold first area to the change type counter storage area 273fa4, and shifts the small hit type counter of the second hold first area. The random number value in the storage area 273e5 is shifted to the small hit type counter storage area 273fa5.

  When the data is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 273fa, the second reserved first area becomes empty, so that the data is stored (reserved) in each area (second to fourth) of the second reserved ball storage area 273e. ) Is shifted to the area having the smaller area number (first to third). In the twenty-ninth embodiment, data is shifted only in the second reserved areas (first to fourth) in which data is stored (reserved) in the second reserved sphere storage area 273e.

  Here, the data shift performed on each of the reserved areas in the second reserved ball storage area 273e will be described. For example, the value of the second reserved ball number counter 273b when the start of the variable effect is determined is “4”, and data is stored in all the areas (first to fourth) of the second reserved ball storage area 273e. It is assumed that it is. In this state, the data of the second reserved first area is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 273fa, and when the second reserved first area becomes empty, the MPU 271 transmits the data of the other areas (second to fourth). Are shifted to the area having the smaller area number (first to third). That is, the data of the second reserved second area is shifted to the second reserved first area, the data of the second reserved third area is shifted to the second reserved second area, and the data of the second reserved fourth area is shifted. To the second reserved third area.

  Further, for example, if the value of the second reserved ball number counter 273b at the time of determining the start of the fluctuation effect is “2”, the MPU 271 transmits only the data of the second reserved second area to the second reserved second area. After shifting to one area, the data shift ends. As described above, in the twenty-ninth embodiment, the data shift processing is not performed for the second reserved area (third to fourth) in which data is not stored (reserved), so that the number of data shifts is reduced. And the control burden can be reduced.

  In addition, regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data of the second reserved area (second to fourth) may be shifted to an area having an area number smaller by one. In this case, it is not necessary to determine whether data is stored (held) in the second holding area (second to fourth), so that it is easy to create a program.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the data is not stored in the second reserved first area of the second reserved ball storage area 273e at the timing of starting the execution of the variable effect, the MPU 271 proceeds to the first reserved It is determined whether or not data is stored in the first reserved first area of the ball storage area 273d. As a result of the determination, if data is stored in the first reserved first area, the random number value of the big hit random number counter storage area 273d1 of the first reserved first area is replaced with the big hit random number counter storage area 273fa1 of the reserved ball execution area 273fa. Shift to Similarly, the random number value of the jackpot type counter storage area 273d2 of the first hold first area is shifted to the jackpot type counter storage area 273fa2, and the random number value of the stop pattern selection counter storage area 273d3 of the first hold first area is It shifts to the stop pattern selection counter storage area 273fa3, and shifts the random number value of the fluctuation type counter storage area 273d4 of the first reserved first area to the fluctuation type counter storage area 273fa4.

  When the data is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 273fa, the first reserved first area becomes empty, and is stored (reserved) in each area (second to fourth) of the first reserved ball storage area 273d. ) Is shifted to the area having the smaller area number (first to third). In the twenty-ninth embodiment, data is shifted only in the first reserved area (first to fourth) in which data is stored (reserved) in the first reserved sphere storage area 273d.

  Here, the data shift performed on each of the reserved areas in the first reserved ball storage area 273d will be described. For example, the value of the first reserved ball number counter 273a when the start of the variable effect is determined is “4”, and data is stored in all areas (first to fourth) of the first reserved ball storage area 273d. It is assumed that it is. In this state, the data of the first reserved first area is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 273fa, and when the first reserved first area becomes empty, the MPU 271 transmits the data of the other areas (second to fourth). Are shifted to the area having the smaller area number (first to third). That is, the data of the first reserved second area is shifted to the first reserved first area, the data of the first reserved third area is shifted to the first reserved second area, and the data of the first reserved fourth area is shifted. To the first reserved third area.

  Further, for example, if the value of the first reserved ball number counter 273a at the time of determining the start of the fluctuation effect is “2”, the MPU 271 transmits only the data of the first reserved second area and the first reserved second area. After shifting to one area, the data shift ends. As described above, in the twenty-ninth embodiment, data shift processing is not performed on the first reserved area (third to fourth) in which data is not stored (reserved), so that the number of data shifts is reduced. And the control burden can be reduced.

  Note that, regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data of the first reserved area (second to fourth) may be shifted to an area having an area number smaller by one. In such a case, it is unnecessary to determine whether data is stored (held) in the first holding area (second to fourth), and thus it is possible to easily create a program.

  Returning to FIG. 484, the description will be continued. The ROM 272 of the main control device 110 includes a jackpot opening table referred to for controlling the opening of the jackpot 65a of the variable winning device 65 when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol or the second special symbol lottery game. 272i and a small hit opening table 272j that is referred to for controlling the opening of the small winning opening 72a of the second variable winning device 72 when a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery game is stored. .

  Here, the big hit opening table 272i and the small hit opening table 272j will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 494 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the big hit opening table 272i stored in the ROM 272, and FIG. 494 (b) is a schematic diagram of an example of the small hit opening table 272j stored in the ROM 272. FIG. The jackpot opening table 272i is referred to at the time of a jackpot of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and based on the jackpot type of the jackpot generated in the dynamic display of each special symbol, the opening mode (number of times, maximum Opening time, maximum winning number). The small hit opening table 272j is referred to at the time of the small hit of the second special symbol, and the small hit generated in the dynamic display of the second special symbol is independent of the game state (substantially, “time reduction”). Only the "state") defines the mode of opening one small winning opening 72a (number of times, maximum opening time, maximum winning number).

  First, the jackpot opening table 272i is classified based on the jackpot type that has won the jackpot. Specifically, for the “4R jackpot” that is referred to when the jackpot type “4R jackpot” is won, for the “8R jackpot” that is referred to when the jackpot type “8R jackpot” is won, and for the jackpot type “ The opening mode of the special winning opening 65a is changed for "16R jackpot" which is referred to when the "16R jackpot" is won.

  As shown in FIG. 494 (a), in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-ninth embodiment, the number of times the large winning opening 65a is opened when the big hit type “4R big hit” is won is “four times”. The maximum opening time in opening one of the special winning openings 65a is "30 seconds" and the maximum winning number is "10", and the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of a ball into the special winning opening 65a. Are defined in the jackpot opening table 272i so as to be “15”.

  Next, the number of times the special winning opening 65a is opened when the jackpot type "8R big hit" is won is "8 times", and the maximum opening time in opening one of the special winning openings 65a is "30 seconds". In addition, the maximum winning number is “10”, and the number of award balls paid out based on the winning of the ball into the special winning opening 65a is defined by the jackpot opening table 272i so as to be “15”. .

  Next, the number of times the special winning opening 65a is opened when the jackpot type "16R big hit" is won is "16 times", and the maximum opening time in opening one of the special winning openings 65a is "30 seconds". In addition, the maximum winning number is “10”, and the number of award balls paid out based on the winning of the ball into the special winning opening 65a is defined by the jackpot opening table 272i so as to be “15”. .

  Thereby, the number of prize balls that can be paid out for each of the winning jackpot types is different, thereby making it possible to cause a difference in the game value directly given according to the winning jackpot type. As a result, in the lottery game of the special symbol, it is possible to produce a game property of determining whether to win any of the jackpot types, and to improve the interest of the game.

  The mode of opening the special winning opening 65a based on the jackpot type (the number of times, the maximum opening time, the maximum winning number, the number of winning prizes, and the transition game state) is not limited to the above embodiment, and can be changed as appropriate. is there. Specifically, the number of releases may be the same for each jackpot type, the maximum opening time may be changed for each jackpot type, or the maximum winning number may be changed. May be. In addition, it is not necessary to shift to a separate gaming state for each jackpot type, and a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of jackpot types are shifted to a common gaming state.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 494 (b), in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-ninth embodiment, there is one kind of opening mode of the small winning opening 72a which is set when a small hit is won. The number of times the small winning opening 72a is opened is "1 time", the maximum opening time in opening one of the small winning openings 72a is "1.8 seconds", and the maximum winning number is "1". The number of award balls to be paid out based on the winning of a ball into the small winning opening 72a is defined in the small hit opening table 272j so as to be "10".

  In the twenty-ninth embodiment, a special area switch 208h is provided in the small winning opening 72a, and a small hit game is won, and the special area switch 208h in the opened small winning opening 72a detects a ball. It is configured so that a big hit game is generated (so-called two kinds). Therefore, although it is necessary to act to make the ball win the special area switch 208h, the result equivalent to "winning the big hit game in the second special symbol" by "winning the small hit game in the second special symbol" Thus, in the dynamic display in the second special symbol, a playability of whether to win either the big hit game or the small hit game is created.

  The mode of opening the small winning opening 72a based on the small hit (the number of times, the maximum opening time, the maximum winning number, the number of winning balls, or the transition game state) is not limited to the above embodiment, and can be changed as appropriate. is there. More specifically, the number of times of opening in the small hitting game may be configured to be performed a plurality of times, the maximum opening time may be changed, or the maximum winning number may be changed. May be.

  In addition, as a mode of opening the small winning opening 72a based on the small hit, as the maximum opening time (for example, “1.8 seconds”) based on the small winning game, the total accumulated seconds of the opening time of the small winning opening 72a is the maximum opening time. The small winning opening 72a may be configured to be opened and closed until the time is reached. Specifically, the opening time of one small winning opening 72a is set to “0.2 seconds”, and the small winning opening 72a is repeatedly opened and closed “9 times” in one small hitting game, and the small winning The small winning opening 72a is configured to be opened such that the total opening time of the small winning opening 72a based on the game is equal to the maximum opening time. When the entire small hitting game is completed in a short period (that is, “1.8 seconds”), if a situation in which the ball cannot be fired due to clogging of the ball or a shortage of the ball in the upper plate 17 occurs in the period, the small hitting is performed. During the game, the ball cannot be fired, the special area switch 208h in the small winning opening 72a does not detect the ball, the jackpot game does not occur, and the game value that should be originally obtained cannot be obtained, and the player There is a risk of causing unexpected damage. Therefore, by setting a long period during which the ball can enter the small winning opening 72a in the small hitting game, the entire small hitting game is performed for a long time, and during that time, unexpected clogging of the ball or shortage of the ball in the upper plate 17 occurs. Even if a situation occurs, the above situation is resolved during the small hitting game period, and the period during which the ball is fired to make the small winning opening 72a win the ball and the special area switch 208h can detect the ball is extended. can do. Therefore, it is possible to suppress occurrence of unexpected disadvantage for the player. In addition, it is preferable that the opening / closing plate for closing the small winning opening 72a is a retractable type, the opening / closing plate is configured to protrude when closed, and to be immersed when opened, and that the upper surface of the opening / closing plate is configured to roll a ball. It is.

  Returning to FIG. 484, the description will be continued. An input / output port 275 is connected to the MPU 271 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 274 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 275 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a special symbol display device 39, an ordinary symbol display device 83, an ordinary symbol holding lamp 84, and a front side with the lower side of the open / close plate of the special winning opening 65a as an axis. A special winning opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening and closing of the opening, a small winning opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing the opening and closing drive of the opening and closing plate of the small winning opening 72a to the front side, A solenoid 209 including a normal electric combination solenoid (not shown) for opening the combination 64 c is connected, and the MPU 271 transmits various commands and control signals to these via an input / output port 275.

  The input / output port 275 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), a special area switch 208h, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Various processes are executed based on the signal output from the switch 208 and the RAM erasure signal SG2 output from the RAM erasure switch circuit 253.

  As described above, the special area switch 208h is configured to be able to detect a ball that has won the small winning opening 72a, and is turned on with respect to the MPU 271 when the ball passes through the arrangement position of the special area switch 208h. Output a signal. On the other hand, when the sphere does not pass through the position where the special area switch 208h is provided, an off signal is output to the MPU 271. Therefore, the MPU 271 can recognize whether or not a ball has flowed into the small winning opening 72a based on the detection output of the special area switch 208h.

  Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 271 in the main control device 110 according to the twenty-ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 271 is roughly divided into a start-up process (see FIG. 422) started upon power-on, a setting change process (see FIG. 465) executed in the start-up process, and after the start-up process. The main process to be executed (see FIG. 385), the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 466) started periodically (in the 29th embodiment, at a period of 4 milliseconds), and the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal (See FIG. 383). Here, for convenience of explanation, a start winning process (see FIG. 495), a special figure changing process (see FIG. 496), and a hit process (see FIG. 500) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 466) are described. Will be described. Note that the start-up process (see FIG. 422), the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 466), the main process (see FIG. 385), and the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 383) are described in the above embodiments (the sixteenth embodiment). , And a description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the start winning process (S5108), which is one of the timer interrupt processes (see FIG. 466) executed by the MPU 271 in the main control device 110, will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 495. FIG. 495 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S5108) in the twenty-ninth embodiment.

  The start winning process (S5108) determines whether or not a ball has won the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b. If there is a winning in the first starting port 64a, each of the counters C1 to C3 is determined. A process of storing (reserving) the value of CS1 in the first reserved ball storage area 273d is executed. Then, a process for transmitting the value of each of the held counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to the sound lamp control device 113 together with the number of held balls is executed. Further, when a winning is made in the second starting port 64b, a process of storing (reserving) the values of the counters C1 to C3, CS1, and C5 in the second retaining ball storage area 273e is executed. Then, a process for transmitting the values of the held counters C1 to C3, CS1 and C5 to the sound lamp control device 113 together with the number of held balls is executed.

  In the start winning process (S5108), the MPU 271 first determines whether or not the ball has won the first starting port 64a (start winning) (S6001). Here, based on the output signal of the special figure 1 entrance switch (not shown) for detecting the entrance (winning) to the first starting port 64a, which is read in the switch reading processing (see S5105 in FIG. 466). , Detects a ball entering the first starting port 64a over three timer interrupt processes (see FIG. 466).

  If it is determined that the ball has won the first starting port 64a (the start winning has been achieved) (S6001: Yes), then the value of the first reserved ball number counter 273a (the first reserved ball number in the main control device 110). It is determined whether or not the number of activated balls N1 for the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) of one special symbol is less than the upper limit ("4" in the twenty-ninth embodiment) (S6002). Then, even if there is a prize in the first starting port 64a, if the number N1 of pending operation balls is not N1 <4 (S6002: No), this starting prize-winning processing (S5108) ends, and a timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 466). Return to

  On the other hand, if the number N1 <4 (S6002: Yes), the value of the first reserved ball counter 273a (the number N1 of reserved balls) is incremented by 1 (S6003). Then, since this time is a prize in the first starting port 64a corresponding to the first special symbol, the first reserved ball storage area 273d is set as a storage destination of each of the random numbers C1 to C3, CS1 (S6004), and the processing is performed. To S6005.

  In the process of S6005, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 is read from the counter buffer 273c (see FIG. 485), and the value set as the storage destination in S6004 The jackpot random number counter storage area 273d1, the jackpot type counter storage area of the area corresponding to the value indicated by the first reserved ball number counter 273a among the first reserved first to fourth areas provided in the one reserved ball storage area 273d. 273d2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 273d3, and the variation type counter storage area 273d4 are respectively reserved (stored) (S6005).

  Specifically, for example, in the processing of S6005 based on winning in the first starting port 64a, if the value of the first reserved ball number counter 273a after the addition by the processing of S6003 is “1”, the first reserved The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are held in the respective storage areas of one area. If the value of the first reserved ball number counter 273a after the addition is "2", the value of the first reserved ball number counter 273a after the addition is "3" in each storage area of the first reserved second area. If there is, if the value of the first reserved ball number counter 273a after the addition is "4" in each of the storage areas of the first reserved third area, the respective stored areas of the first reserved fourth area are counters C1 to C3. , CS1 are reserved.

  Next, the value of the first reserved ball number counter 273a (the number of activated reserved balls N1) after the addition by the processing of S6003 and the jackpot random number counter C1 stored (reserved) in the first reserved ball storage area 273d by the processing of S6005, A retained ball number command including the values of the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 and data indicating that the command corresponds to the first special symbol is transmitted to the sound ramp control device 113. Therefore, the command of the number of reserved balls is set in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 273 (S6006). As a result, the retained ball count command relating to the first special symbol is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process in S5101 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 466) executed next. Upon completion of the process in S6006, the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 466).

  In the process of S6006, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to be included in the reserved ball count command may use the values themselves read from the counter buffer 273c in the process of S6005, or the first suspended in the process of S6005. A value read out (stored) in the ball storage area 273d may be used.

  In the process of S6001, if it is determined that the ball has not won the first starting port 64a (S6001: No), then it is determined whether or not the ball has won the second starting port 64b (start winning). (S6007). Here, similarly to the first start port 64a, a special figure 2 entrance switch (not shown) for detecting a ball entry (winning) into the second start port 64b read in the switch reading process (see S5105 in FIG. 466). Based on the output signal of (b), a ball entering the second starting port 64b is detected over three timer interrupt processes (see FIG. 466).

  If it is determined that the ball has won the second starting port 64b (there is a winning start) (S6007: Yes), then the value of the second reserved ball number counter 273b (the second reserved ball number in the main control device 110). (2) It is determined whether or not the number of active balls N2 of the dynamic display (fluctuating effect) of the special symbol is less than the upper limit ("4" in the twenty-ninth embodiment) (S6008). Then, if there is no winning in the second starting opening 64b (S6007: No), or if there is a winning in the second starting opening 64b but the number of active balls is not N2 <4 (S6008: No), this is determined. The start winning process (S5108) ends, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 466).

  On the other hand, if the number N2 of pending operation balls <4 (S6008: Yes), the value of the second reserved ball number counter 273b (the number N2 of pending operation balls) is incremented by 1 (S6009). Then, this time, since the winning is to the second starting port 64b corresponding to the second special symbol, the second reserved ball storage area 273e is set as the storage destination of each of the random numbers C1 to C3, CS1, and C5 (S6010). The process moves to S6011.

  In the process of S6011, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1, and the small hit type counter C5 are read from the counter buffer 273c (see FIG. 485) and stored in S6010. The jackpot random number counter storage area 273e1 of the area corresponding to the value indicated by the second reserved ball number counter 273b among the second reserved first to fourth areas provided in the previously set second reserved ball storage area 273e. Then, the large hit type counter storage area 273e2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 273e3, the fluctuation type counter storage area 273e4, and the small hit type counter storage area 273e5 are respectively suspended (stored) (S6011).

  Specifically, for example, in the process of S6011 based on winning in the second starting port 64b, if the value of the second reserved ball number counter 273b after the addition by the process of S6010 is “1”, the second reserved The values of the counters C1 to C3, CS1, and C5 are held in the respective storage areas of one area. If the value of the second reserved ball number counter 273b after addition is "2", the value of the second reserved ball number counter 273b after addition is "3" in each storage area of the second reserved second area. If there is, if the value of the second reserved ball number counter 273b after the addition is "4" in each storage area of the second reserved third area, the counter C1 to C3 is stored in each stored area of the second reserved fourth area. , CS1, C5 are reserved.

  Next, the value of the second reserved ball number counter 273b (the number of activated reserved balls N2) after the addition in the processing of S6009 and the jackpot random number counter C1 stored (reserved) in the second reserved ball storage area 273e by the processing of S6011; A voice lamp is used to output a command for the number of balls to be held, which includes the values of the big hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1, and the small hit type counter C5, and data indicating that the command corresponds to the second special symbol. In order to transmit the command to the control device 113, the pending ball number command is set in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 273 (S6012). As a result, the number-of-retained-balls command relating to the second special symbol is transmitted to the sound ramp control device 113 by the external output process in S5101 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 466) executed next. Upon completion of the process in S6011, the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 466).

  Note that the values of the counters C1 to C3, CS1, and C5 to be included in the pending ball number command in the processing of S6011 may use the values themselves read from the counter buffer 273c in the processing of S6011, or may be used in the processing of S6011. A value obtained by reading the value stored (reserved) in the 2 reserved ball storage area 273e may be used.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 496, a special figure change process (S5110), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 466) executed by the MPU 271 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 496 is a flowchart showing the special figure change processing (S5110) in the twenty-ninth embodiment.

  In the special map change process (S5110), the MPU 271 first determines whether or not a jackpot is currently underway (S6101). During the big hit, during the big hit game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the special symbol display device 39 at the time of the big hit and during the predetermined time after the big hit game ends (that is, the big hit ending time. "5 seconds"). If the result of the determination is that the big hit is in progress (S6101: Yes), the special figure change processing (S5110) is terminated, and the flow returns to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 466).

  In the process of S6101, if it is not a big hit (S6101: No), then it is determined whether or not a small hit is currently made (S6102). The small hit is performed during the small hit game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the special symbol display device 39 during the small hit and during the predetermined time after the end of the small hit game (for example, the small hit). Ending time, for example, “3 seconds”). As a result of the determination, if the small hit is occurring (S6102: Yes), the special figure change processing (S5110) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 466).

  In the processing of S6102, if it is not a small hit (S6102: No), then it is determined whether or not the display mode of the special symbol display device 39 is in a dynamic display (fluctuating) (S6103). If the display mode of the symbol display device 39 is not during dynamic display (S6103: No), then, a predetermined time (for example, "1 second") has elapsed after the dynamic display on the special symbol display device 39 has stopped. It is determined (S6104). As a result, if the predetermined time has not elapsed after stopping the dynamic display (S6104: No), the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 466). Thereby, the stop symbol in the dynamic display (fluctuating effect) is displayed on the special symbol display device 39 and the third symbol display device 81 for a predetermined time, so that the player can visually recognize the stop symbol. .

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S6104, if a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of the dynamic display (S6104: Yes), then the value of the second reserved ball number counter 273b (retained in the main control device 110). It is determined whether or not the number N2 of pending operation balls of the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) relating to the second special symbol is larger than "0" (S6105).

  As a result of the processing in S6105, if the value of the second reserved ball number counter 273b (the number of activated reserved balls N2) is not “0” (S6105: Yes), the execution of the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) related to the second special symbol is started. It is determined that it is the timing, and first, the value of the second reserved ball number counter 273b (the number of operation reserved balls N2) is subtracted by 1 (S6106). This is because the execution of one dynamic display (fluctuation effect) of the suspended dynamic displays (fluctuation effects) related to the second special symbol is started by the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S6108) described later. This is because the number of reserved balls related to the second special symbol is reduced by one.

  Next, the data stored in the second reserved sphere storage area 273e is shifted (S6107). This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the second reserved first to fourth areas of the second reserved ball storage area 273e toward the reserved ball execution area 273fa. 1 area → holding ball execution area 273fa, second holding second area → second holding first area, second holding third area → second holding second area, second holding fourth area → second holding third area In such a manner, the data in each area is shifted.

  After the data shift process in S6107, the dynamic of the second special symbol with respect to the special symbol display device 39 and the third symbol display device 81 based on the values of the various counters stored in the reserved ball execution area 273fa by the data shift process. In order to execute the display and the variation effect, a special figure 2 variation start process is executed (S6108), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 466). The special figure 2 change start process (S6108) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S6105, when it is determined that the value of the second reserved ball number counter 273b (the number of activated reserved balls N2) is not larger than “0” (for example, “0”) (S6105: No), It is determined whether the value of the first reserved ball counter 273a (the number N1 of the reserved balls for the dynamic display (variable effect) relating to the first special symbol reserved in the main control device 110) is larger than "0". It is determined (S6109). If the value of the first reserved ball number counter 273a (the number of activated reserved balls N1) is not "0" (S6109: Yes), it is determined that it is time to start executing the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) relating to the first special symbol. First, the value of the first reserved ball number counter 273a (the number of activated reserved balls N1) is decremented by 1 (S6110). This is because the execution of one dynamic display (fluctuation effect) of the suspended dynamic display (fluctuation effect) related to the first special symbol is started by the later-described special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S6112). This is because the number of reserved balls related to the first special symbol is reduced by one.

  Next, the data stored in the first reserved ball storage area 273d is shifted (S6111). This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to first reserved first to fourth areas of the first reserved sphere storage area 273d toward the reserved sphere execution area 273fa. 1 area → holding ball execution area 273fa, 1st holding 2nd area → 1st holding 1st area, 1st holding 3rd area → 1st holding 2nd area, 1st holding 4th area → 1st holding 3rd area In such a manner, the data in each area is shifted.

  After the data shift process in S6111, the dynamics of the first special symbol with respect to the special symbol display device 39 and the third symbol display device 81 are performed based on the values of the various counters stored in the reserved ball execution area 273fa by the data shift process. In order to execute the display and the fluctuation effect, the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing is executed (S6112), and the process returns to the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 466). The special figure 1 change start process (S6112) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  As a result of the processing in S6109, when it is determined that the value of the first reserved ball number counter 273a (the number N1 of suspended balls) is not larger than “0” (for example, “0”) (S6109: No), the third symbol is used. It is determined whether or not the demonstration effect is being performed on the display device 81, that is, whether or not the demonstration is being performed (S6113). In this determination processing, after transmitting the demonstration command to the display control device 114 via the audio lamp control device 113, the value of the first reserved ball number counter 273a or the second reserved ball number counter 273b (the operation reserved ball number N1 or It is determined that the demonstration is being performed until any value of the number of reserved balls N2) is determined to be larger than “0”.

  If it is determined that the demonstration is not being performed (S6113: No), a demonstration command to be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 is set (S6114), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 466). On the other hand, when it is determined that the demonstration is being performed (S6113: Yes), the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 466). The demo command set in the process of S6114 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 273, and is included in the external output process of the next timer interrupt process (see S5101 in FIG. 466). It is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the processing of S6103, when it is determined that the display mode of the special symbol display device 39 is in dynamic display (S6103: Yes), it is determined whether or not the dynamic display time (variable time) has elapsed (S6115). ). The display time during the dynamic display of the special symbol display device 39 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and the dynamic display time is determined. If the (variation time) has not elapsed (S6115: No), the display of the special symbol display device 39 is updated (S6116), and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 466).

  On the other hand, if the dynamic display time (variable time) of the dynamic display on the special symbol display device 39 has elapsed (S6115: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol is set on the special symbol display device 39. (S6117). The stop symbol is set in advance by a special figure 2 change start process (S6108) or a special figure 1 change start process (S6112) described later with reference to FIG. 497 or FIG. 498. In the special figure 2 change start processing or the special figure 1 change start processing, the big hit, the small hit, or the loss is determined by the processing of S6107 or S6111, according to the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 273fa, In the case of a jackpot, a symbol of "4R jackpot", a symbol of "8R jackpot", or a symbol of "16R jackpot" is determined based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2. In the case of a small hit, depending on the value of the small hit type counter C5, a symbol "4R big hit corresponding small hit", a symbol "8R big hit corresponding small hit" or "16R big hit corresponding small hit" is displayed. Is determined. Further, in the case of a loss, a symbol corresponding to the loss is determined.

  When the display mode of the special symbol display device 39 corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the process of S6117, the stop symbol of the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed as the special symbol. In order to confirm and display in synchronization with the display of the device 39, a confirm command is set (S6118), and the process shifts to S6119. The confirmation command is a command for confirming and displaying the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol being executed by the third symbol display device 81, and includes the variation effect of the first special symbol and the variation of the second special symbol. Used in common with directing. Upon receiving this confirmation command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display confirmation command to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 is configured to stop the variation effect of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 by receiving the display confirmation command, and to confirm and display the stopped symbol.

  In the process of S6119, in order to determine whether or not the time is in the “time shortened state”, both the values of the special figure 2 time reduction counter and the total time reduction counter (both not shown) provided in the RAM 273 are larger than “0”. It is determined whether or not it is (S6119).

  The special figure 2 time-saving counter and the total time-saving counter are counters for indicating the “time reduction state”, and are initialized to “0” by an initial setting process (S616 in FIG. 384) of the RAM 273 after the power is turned on. Is set, and a predetermined number is set at the end of each jackpot (in the 29th embodiment, “1” or “7” is set in the special figure 2 time saving counter, and “10” or “100” is set in the total time saving counter). If both the value of the special figure 2 time reduction counter and the value of the total time reduction counter are greater than "0", the gaming state is determined as "time reduction state". Specifically, in the big hit end processing (see FIG. 501) in the hit processing (see FIG. 400) described later, when the big hit state ends, the special figure 2 time reduction is performed based on the type of the big hit game (big hit type). The values of the counter and the total time-saving counter are set.

  In the process of S6119, if both the value of the special figure 2 time-saving counter and the total time-saving counter are not “0” (S6119: Yes), it is “time-saving state” and dynamic display of any special symbol (fluctuation effect) ) Has been completed once, so that a time saving subtraction process is performed (S6120) to update (subtract) the value of the special figure 2 time saving counter or the total time saving counter (S6120), and the special figure changing process (S5110) is completed. The process returns to the interrupt processing (see FIG. 466). The time saving subtraction process (S6120) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S6119, if both the value of the special figure 2 time-saving counter and the total time-saving counter are “0” (S6119: No), it is not “time reduction state” but “normal game state”. The processing is skipped, the special figure change processing (S5110) ends, and the processing returns to the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 466).

  Next, the special figure 2 change start processing (S6108), which is one of the special figure change processing (S5110) executed by the MPU 271 in the main controller 110, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 497 is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 change start process (S6108). This special figure 2 change start process (S6108) is based on the values of various counters stored in the reserved ball execution area 273fa according to the game state, and the lottery (small hit lottery and big hit) in the second special symbol is performed. At the same time, a small win lottery is performed, and the dynamic display (variable pattern and stop type) of the dynamic display and the variable effect on the second special symbol performed by the special symbol display device 39 and the third symbol display device 81 are determined.

  In the special figure 2 change start process (S6108), the MPU 271 first sets the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 for the second special symbol (S6131), and then the big hit random number stored in the reserved ball execution area 272fa. A small hit lottery (small hit determination) based on the value of the counter C1 and the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 (see FIG. 486 (b)) set in S6131. ) Processing is performed (S6132).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-ninth embodiment, the small hit is determined based on the relationship between the value of the big hit random number counter C1 and the set value at that time. That is, in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 set based on the set value when the power is turned on, the small hit random value is set for each setting, and the small hit random value is set to "1250" for all setting values. Although specified, the range of the small hit random number value is changed in accordance with the change of the big hit random value that differs for each set value. Specifically, when the set value is “1”, “50 to 1299” is defined as the small hit random value, and when the set value is “2”, “52 to 1301” is set as the small hit random value. When the set value is “3”, “54 to 1303” is specified as the small random number value, and when the set value is “4”, “56 to 1305” is set as the small random number value. When the set value is “5”, “58 to 1307” is specified as a small hit random value, and when the set value is “6”, “60 to 1309” is specified as a small hit random value. You.

  In the processing of S6132, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 273fa is compared with the small jackpot random number value defined in the special jackpot random number table 272a2, and they match. In this case, it is determined that the small hit has occurred. As a result of the processing in S6132, when it is determined that the small hit is made (S6132: Yes), the value of the small hit type counter C5 stored in the reserved ball execution area 273fa and the special figure 2 corresponding to the second special symbol 2 Based on the small hit type table 272b3 (see FIG. 487 (c)), the display mode at the time of the small hit is set (S6133).

  In this processing, the small hit type associated with the value of the small hit type counter C5 stored in the reserved ball execution area 273fa, that is, the small hit type, based on the special figure 2 small hit type table 272b3 (see FIG. 487 (c)), When the ball passes the special area switch 208h during the small hit game, the maximum round number is “16R big hit small hit” which shifts to the “time reduction state” after the 16 round big hit, or the maximum round number is 8 rounds. It is determined whether the “8R jackpot corresponding small hit” shifts to the “time reduction state” after the big hit or the “4R big hit corresponding small hit” shifts to the “time shortened state” after the maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. Then, the display mode at the time of the small hit on the special symbol display device 39 is set based on the determined small hit type. In addition, as a display mode at the time of the small hit, for example, "341" when "16R big hit corresponding small hit", "134" when "8R big hit corresponding small hit", "4R big hit corresponding small hit" In this case, "143" is selected.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of the small hit is determined (S6134), and the process proceeds to S6141. Specifically, in the special symbol display device 39 and the third symbol display device 81, the display mode (stop type) at the time of the small hit and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball execution area 273fa. Based on the value of the variation type counter CS1, the dynamic time (fluctuation time) of the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) is determined from the selected rendering mode. In the twenty-ninth embodiment, in determining the fluctuation pattern at the time of the small hit, the E table 272d5 (see FIG. 490 (b)) is selected without fail irrespective of the game state and the number of retained balls, and furthermore, the E table 272d5 is selected. "E9: Special fluctuation" effect mode is selected without exception.

  Specifically, in the E table 272d5 of the stop pattern table 272d, the effect mode corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball execution area 273fa is selected (in the twenty-ninth embodiment, there is no leakage). "Special fluctuation" production mode).

  Then, a variation pattern associated with the type of the effect mode in the special pattern 2 big hit / small hit variation pattern table 272e4 and the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 273fa is selected. Then, the variation time is set based on the relationship between the variation pattern and the variation time that are defined in advance.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S6132 that the small hit has not been won (S6132: No), then the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 272fa and the value set in S6131 are set. A big hit lottery (big hit success / failure determination) process is performed to determine whether or not a big hit has been won based on the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 (see FIG. 486 (b)) (S6135).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-ninth embodiment, it is determined whether or not a jackpot has occurred based on the relationship between the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the set value at that time. That is, in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 set based on the set value when the power is turned on, a different jackpot random value is set for each setting. Specifically, when the set value is “1”, “0-49” is defined as the jackpot random value, and when the set value is “2”, “0-51” is set as the jackpot random value. When the set value is “3”, “0-53” is defined as a jackpot random value, and when the set value is “4”, “0-55” is defined as a jackpot random value. If the value is “5”, “0-57” is defined as a jackpot random number value, and if the set value is “6”, “0-59” is defined as a jackpot random value.

  In the process of S6135, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 273fa is compared with the jackpot random number values defined in these special figure 2 jackpot random number tables 272a2, and when they match. Is determined to be a jackpot. As a result of the processing in S6135, when it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot (S6135: Yes), the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 273fa and the special figure 2 jackpot type corresponding to the second special symbol Based on the table 272b2 (see FIG. 487 (b)), the display mode at the time of the big hit is set (S6136).

  In this process, according to the special figure 2 big hit type table 272b2 (see FIG. 487 (b)), the big hit type associated with the value of the big hit type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 273fa, that is, the maximum number of rounds "16R jackpot" which shifts to "time reduction state" after 16 rounds of jackpot, "8R jackpot" which shifts to "time reduction state" after 8 rounds of jackpot, or 4 rounds of maximum round number It is determined whether or not “4R jackpot” that shifts to the “time reduction state” after the jackpot. Then, based on the determined jackpot type, the display mode at the time of the jackpot on the special symbol display device 39 is set.

  Next, a change pattern at the time of a big hit is determined (S6137), a big hit flag (not shown) indicating that a process related to the big hit is executed is turned on (S6138), and the process shifts to S6141. Specifically, the processing of S6137 is based on the display mode (stop type) at the time of the big hit and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball execution area 273fa, and the special symbol display device 39 and the third symbol display device are used. The effect mode in the symbol display device 81 is selected, and the dynamic time (fluctuation time) of the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) is determined from the selected effect mode based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. In determining the variation pattern at the time of the big hit, first, a stop pattern table 272d (see FIG. 490 (a)) to be used is selected according to the type of the big hit stop. In the twenty-ninth embodiment, in determining the fluctuation pattern at the time of the big hit, the D table 272d4 (see FIG. 490 (a)) is selected without exception irrespective of the gaming state and the number of retained balls.

  Then, in the D table 272d4 of the stop pattern table 272d, the effect mode corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball execution area 273fa is selected (in the twenty-ninth embodiment, the “normal reach” effect). Mode, “Super Reach” production mode or “Special Reach” production mode).

  Then, in the special pattern 2 big hit / small hit change pattern table 272e4, a change pattern is selected based on the set effect mode and the value of the change type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 273fa. As a result, the fluctuation time is set based on the relationship between the predetermined fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S6135 that the hit is not a jackpot (S6135: No), that is, the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 273fa is a lost random number value (that is, the set value is “1”). , "1300 to 9999" when the set value is "2", "1302 to 9999" when the set value is "3", "1304 to 9999" when the set value is "3", and "4" for the set value. If it is "1306 to 9999", if it is "5", it is "1308 to 9999", if it is "6", it is "1310 to 9999". The display mode at the time of losing is set (S6139).

  In the processing of S6139, the display mode of the special symbol display device 39 is set to a display mode corresponding to the lost symbol, and a rough variation pattern (effect mode) is set. As the setting of the effect form, specifically, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball execution area 273fa, the total value of the first reserved ball number counter 273a and the second reserved ball number counter 273b, Based on the current game state, the third symbol display device 81 displays the non-reach (long) effect, the "non-reach (short)" effect, the "normal reach" effect, One of the “super reach” effect mode and the “special reach” effect mode is set. In the twenty-ninth embodiment, the range of the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to each effect mode depends on whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the “time reduction state” or the “normal gaming state”. The stop pattern table 272d is set differently.

  Next, the variation pattern at the time of losing is determined (S6140), and the process proceeds to S6141. In the processing of S6140, the special symbol display device 39 and the third symbol display device 81 determine the fluctuating time until the stop symbol is displayed in the lost symbol. Specifically, in the special pattern 2 loss variation pattern table 272e3 provided for each display mode (effect mode) at the time of loss determined in the processing of S6139, the variation type counter stored in the reserved ball execution area 273fa. A variation pattern associated with the value of CS1 is selected. Then, the variation time is set based on the relationship between the variation pattern and the variation time that are defined in advance.

  As described above, the process of setting the effect mode and the variation pattern at the time of the small hit, the process of setting the effect mode and the variation pattern at the time of the big hit, and the process of setting the effect mode and the variation pattern at the time of the loss are performed by the stop pattern table 272d. By using the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 to determine and determine using the same determination program, the program can be shared, and the number of development steps during development can be reduced.

  In the process of S6141, based on the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined by the processes of S6133, S6136, and S6139, the display controller 114 is notified of the variation time according to the variation pattern via the sound lamp controller 113. The special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command to be executed is set (S6141). Specifically, for example, when the small hit is won in the lottery, the small hit is “16R big hit corresponding small hit”, and further, the fluctuation pattern of “normal reach” of “20 seconds” is selected, The special figure 2 variation pattern command of “normal hit” of “small hit”, “small hit corresponding to 16R big hit” and “20 seconds” is selected. If the big hit is won and the big hit is “8R big hit” and the fluctuation pattern of “normal reach” of “20 seconds” is selected, the big hit, “8R big hit”, “20 seconds” Is set to "normal reach". Further, if the player loses the jackpot lottery and the “normal reach” fluctuation pattern of “20 seconds” is selected, a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command indicating the loss of “20 seconds” “normal reach” is set. You. In this way, even if the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol is the same fluctuation time, the voice lamp control device can be set by also setting the validity of the fluctuation effect and the content of the general fluctuation pattern in the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command. The 113 can grasp the contents of the effect mode including the pass / fail and the fluctuation time, and determine the detailed fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol based on the information.

  After the processing of S6141, a special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 via the sound lamp control device 113 of the stop type set in the processing of S6134, S6137 or S6140 is set (S6142). ), And return to the special figure change processing (see FIG. 496). Specifically, for example, if a jackpot is won and the content of the jackpot is “16R jackpot”, the stop state of the third symbol (for example, “777” or the like) is not specified and “16R jackpot” is specified. A special figure 2 stop type command indicating "big hit" is set. In addition, if the small hit is won and the content of the small hit is “8R big hit corresponding small hit”, the specific stop mode of the third symbol (for example, “134”) is not specified and “8R The special figure 2 stop type command is set to indicate "big hit small hit".

  On the other hand, if the player does not win the big hit or the small hit and further selects the “super reach” effect mode or the “special reach” effect mode, the specific third symbol stop mode (for example, “787”) Without specifying, a special figure 2 stop type command is set to indicate the “super reach” effect mode or the “special reach” effect mode at the time of loss. In addition, if the jackpot is not won and the “normal reach” effect mode is selected, a specific stop mode (for example, “737” or the like) of the third symbol is not specified, and the “normal reach” at the time of the loss is specified. A special figure 2 stop type command indicating the effect mode is set. Furthermore, if the jackpot is not won and any of the “non-reach” effect modes is selected, the loss mode is not specified without specifying the specific stop mode of the third symbol (for example, “258”). A special figure 2 stop type command is set to indicate the “non-reach” effect mode at the time.

  In this way, by setting the rough stop type based on the success or failure of the variable effect in the special figure 2 stop type command, the sound lamp control device 113 (display control device 114) can grasp the stop type based on the success or failure. Thus, it is possible to determine a more detailed stop effect of the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol based on the information.

  The special figure 2 change pattern command and the special figure 2 stop type command are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 273, and are executed in step S5101 of the next timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 466). Then, these commands are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the special figure 2 change pattern command and the special figure 2 stop type command, the sound ramp control device 113 generates a display special figure 2 change pattern command and a display special figure 2 type command based on the command, and displays the display control device 114. Send to

  Next, the special figure 1 change start processing (S6112), which is one of the special figure change processing (S5110) executed by the MPU 271 in the main controller 110, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 498 is a flowchart showing the special figure 1 change start process (S6112). In the special figure 1 change start process (S6112), based on the values of various counters stored in the reserved ball execution area 273fa in accordance with the game state, a lottery or a loss in the first special symbol (big hit lottery) is performed, and , A dynamic display (dynamic pattern and stop type) of the first special symbol performed by the special symbol display device 39 and the third symbol display device 81, and the like.

  In the special figure 1 change start process (S6112), the MPU 271 first sets the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 for the first special symbol (S6151), and then sets the big hit random number stored in the reserved ball execution area 272fa. Based on the value of the counter C1 and the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 (see FIG. 486 (a)) set in S6151, a big hit lottery (big hit success / failure determination) process for determining whether or not a big hit has been won. Performed (S6152).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-ninth embodiment, it is determined whether or not a jackpot has occurred based on the relationship between the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the set value at that time. That is, in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1 set based on the set value when the power is turned on, a different jackpot random value is set for each setting. Specifically, similarly to the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2, when the set value is “1”, “0 to 49” is defined as the jackpot random value, and when the set value is “2”, “0-51” is defined as a jackpot random number value. If the set value is “3”, “0-53” is defined as a jackpot random value, and if the set value is “4”, “0-55”. Is defined as a jackpot random number value. When the set value is “5”, “0-57” is defined as a jackpot random value. When the set value is “6”, “0-59” is set as a jackpot random number. It is specified as a numerical value.

  In the process of S6152, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 273fa is compared with the jackpot random number values defined in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1, and if they match. Is determined to be a jackpot. As a result of the processing in S6152, when it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot (S6152: Yes), the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 273fa and the special figure 1 jackpot type corresponding to the first special symbol Based on the table 272b1 (see FIG. 487 (a)), the display mode at the time of the big hit is set (S6153).

  In this process, according to the special figure 1 big hit type table 272b1 (see FIG. 487 (a)), the big hit type associated with the value of the big hit type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 273fa, that is, the maximum number of rounds Is determined to be "16R jackpot" which shifts to "time reduction state" after 16 rounds of jackpot, or "4R jackpot" which shifts to "time reduction state" after 4 rounds of jackpot. Then, based on the determined jackpot type, the display mode at the time of the jackpot on the special symbol display device 39 is set.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined (S6154), and a big hit flag (not shown) indicating that the processing regarding the big hit is executed is turned on (S6155), and the process shifts to S6158. Specifically, the processing of S6154 is based on the display mode (stop type) at the time of the big hit and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball execution area 273fa and the special symbol display device 39 and the third symbol display device. The effect mode in the symbol display device 81 is selected, and the dynamic time (fluctuation time) of the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) is determined from the selected effect mode based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. In the twenty-ninth embodiment, in determining the fluctuation pattern at the time of the big hit, the D table 272d4 (see FIG. 490 (a)) is selected without exception irrespective of the gaming state and the number of retained balls.

  Then, in the D table 272d4 of the stop pattern table 272d, the effect mode corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball execution area 273fa is selected (in the twenty-ninth embodiment, the “normal reach” effect). Mode, “Super Reach” production mode or “Special Reach” production mode).

  Then, in the special figure 1 big hit variation pattern table 272e2, the variation pattern is selected by being attached to the set effect mode and the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 273fa. As a result, the fluctuation time is set based on the relationship between the predetermined fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6152 that it is not a jackpot (S6152: No), that is, the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 273fa is a lost random number value (that is, the set value is “1”). , "50-9999" if the set value is "2", "52-9999" if the set value is "3", "54-9999" if the set value is "3", and "4" If it is "56-9999", if it is "5", it is "58-9999", if it is "6", it is "60-9999") The display mode at the time of losing is set (S6156).

  In the process of S6156, the display mode of the special symbol display device 39 is set to the display mode corresponding to the lost symbol, and a rough variation pattern (effect mode) is set. The setting of the rendering mode includes the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball execution area 273fa, the total value of the first reserved ball number counter 273a and the second reserved ball number counter 273b, and the current game state. Based on the above, the non-reach (long) production mode, the “non-reach (short)” production mode, the “normal reach” production mode, and the “super reach” production mode are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the production mode. , "Special reach" effect mode is set. In the twenty-ninth embodiment, the range of the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to each effect mode depends on whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the “time reduction state” or the “normal gaming state”. The stop pattern table 272d is set differently.

  Next, the variation pattern at the time of loss is determined (S6157), and the flow shifts to the process of S6158. In the process of S6157, the special symbol display device 39 and the third symbol display device 81 determine the variation time until the stop symbol is displayed in the lost symbol. Specifically, in the special pattern 1 loss variation pattern table 272e1 provided for each loss display mode (effect mode) determined in the process of S6156, the variation type counter stored in the reserved ball execution area 273fa. A variation pattern associated with the value of CS1 is selected. Then, the variation time is set based on the relationship between the variation pattern and the variation time that are defined in advance.

  Thus, the setting process of the effect mode and the variation pattern at the time of the big hit and the setting process of the effect mode and the variation pattern at the time of the loss are determined and determined by the same determination program using the same random number value C3 and CS1. Thus, the program can be shared, and the number of development steps at the time of development can be reduced. In addition, the process of setting the effect mode and the variation pattern in the first special symbol and the process of setting the effect mode and the variation pattern in the second special symbol are determined and determined by the same determination program using the same C3 and CS1. Thus, the program can be shared, and the number of development steps at the time of development can be reduced.

  In the process of S6158, based on the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined by the processes of S6154 and S6156, the display controller 114 is notified of the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern via the sound lamp controller 113. FIG. 1 sets a variation pattern command (S6158). Specifically, for example, if a big hit is won in a lottery, the big hit is “4R big hit”, and the fluctuation pattern of “normal reach” of “20 seconds” is selected, A special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command indicating "normal reach" of "4R jackpot" / "20 seconds" is set. In addition, if the player loses the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern of “normal reach” of “20 seconds” is selected, a special figure 1 variation pattern command indicating the loss of “normal reach” of “20 seconds” is set. You. As described above, even if the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol is the same fluctuation time, the voice lamp control device can be set by also setting the validity of the fluctuation effect and the content of the rough fluctuation pattern in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command. The 113 can grasp the contents of the effect mode including the pass / fail and the fluctuation time, and can determine a detailed fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol based on the information.

  After the process of S6158, a special figure 1 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 via the sound lamp control device 113 of the stop type set in the process of S6153 or S6157 is set (S6159), It returns to special figure change processing (refer to FIG. 496). Specifically, for example, if a jackpot is won and the content of the jackpot is “16R jackpot”, the stop state of the third symbol (for example, “777” or the like) is not specified and “16R jackpot” is specified. A special figure 1 stop type command indicating "big hit" is set.

  On the other hand, if the player does not win the jackpot and the “super reach” effect mode or the “special reach” effect mode is selected, the specific stop mode of the third symbol (for example, “787”) is specified. Instead, a special figure 1 stop type command is set to indicate the “super reach” effect mode or the “special reach” effect mode at the time of loss. In addition, if the jackpot is not won and the “normal reach” effect mode is selected, a specific stop mode (for example, “737” or the like) of the third symbol is not specified, and the “normal reach” at the time of the loss is specified. A special figure 1 stop type command indicating the effect mode is set. Furthermore, if the jackpot is not won and any of the “non-reach” effect modes is selected, the loss mode is not specified without specifying the specific stop mode of the third symbol (for example, “258”). The special figure 1 stop type command is set to indicate the “non-reach” effect mode at the time.

  As described above, by setting the rough stop type based on the success or failure of the variable effect in the special figure 1 stop type command, the sound lamp control device 113 (the display control device 114) grasps the stop type based on the success or failure. Thus, it is possible to determine a more detailed stop effect of the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol based on the information.

  The special figure 1 change pattern command and the special figure 1 stop type command are stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 273, and the processing of S5101 of the next timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 466) is executed. Then, these commands are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the special figure 1 change pattern command and the special figure 1 stop type command, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a display special figure 1 change pattern command and a display special figure 1 type command based on the command, and generates the display control device 114. Send to

  Note that the special figure 2 change start processing (see FIG. 497) and the special figure 1 change start processing (see FIG. 498) may be configured to be performed by a common control program. In this case, since the small hit lottery is also performed in the special figure 1 change start processing (see FIG. 498) relating to the first special symbol which cannot be won in the small hit, extra processing is executed in the first special symbol determination processing. However, the number of development steps and the ROM capacity can be reduced by using a common program.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 499, the time-saving subtraction process (S6120), which is one of the special figure variation processes (S5110) executed by the MPU 271 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 499 is a flowchart showing the time saving subtraction process (S6120). This time saving subtraction process (S6120) counts the number of executions of the dynamic display of the first special symbol (fluctuation effect) or the dynamic display of the second special symbol (fluctuation effect) in the "time reduction state", When the specified number of times of dynamic display has been executed, the “time reduction state” ends.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-ninth embodiment, as the end condition of the “time reduction state”, whether the dynamic display (variable effect) of the second special symbol is executed for the set number of single executions is performed. The total number of times of the dynamic display of the first special symbol (fluctuation effect) and the dynamic display of the second special symbol (fluctuation effect) is executed for the total number of times of execution different from the number of single executions. The "time reduction state" is configured to end when one of the conditions is satisfied.

  In the twenty-ninth embodiment, the number of executions is set for each jackpot type in a jackpot end process (see FIG. 501) described later. Specifically, the number of executions is set to “4R jackpot” in the first special symbol. In the case of winning, the dynamic display of the second special symbol (fluctuation effect) is executed once, or the dynamic display of the first special symbol (fluctuation effect) and the dynamic display of the second special symbol ( The "time reduction state" based on the "4R jackpot" of the first special symbol is finished when the total of the time and the variation effect) is executed 10 times. In addition, the jackpot other than the "4R jackpot" in the first special symbol (that is, "16R jackpot" in the first special symbol, or "16R jackpot", "8R jackpot" or "4R jackpot" in the second special symbol) In the case of winning, dynamic display of the second special symbol (fluctuation effect) is executed seven times, or dynamic display of the first special symbol (fluctuation effect) and dynamic display of the second special symbol ( When a total of 100 times is performed, the first special symbol “16R jackpot” or the second special symbol “16R jackpot”, “8R jackpot” or “4R jackpot” The "shortened state" is configured to end.

  In the time saving subtraction process (S6120), the MPU 271 first determines whether or not the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) has been completed (S6161). As a result of the determination, if the dynamic display of the second special symbol has been completed (S6161: Yes), the value of the special figure 2 time reduction counter (not shown) for counting the number of times the second special symbol is executed is decremented by one. (S6162), and the process moves to S6163. On the other hand, if the dynamic display of the second special symbol has not ended (S6161: No), that is, if the dynamic display of the first special symbol has ended, the processing of S6162 is skipped and the special figure is skipped. The process proceeds to S6163 without subtracting the value of the two-hour counter.

  In the processing of S6163, the value of the total time-saving counter (not shown) for counting the total number of times of execution of both special symbols is decremented by 1 (S6163), and the processing shifts to S6164. That is, when the dynamic display of the first special symbol is executed, only the value of the total time saving counter is decremented by one, while when the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed, the special figure 2 is displayed. The value of both the time reduction counter and the total time reduction counter are decremented by one.

  In the process of S6164, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 2 time reduction counter is a value larger than “0” (S6164). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 time reduction counter is not greater than “0” (S6164: No), that is, when the value of the special figure 2 time reduction counter is “0” or less, (2) Since the end condition of the “time reduction state” based on the number of times of dynamic display of the special symbol is satisfied, the process shifts to S6165 to end the “time reduction state”.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S6164, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 time reduction counter is greater than “0” (S6164: Yes), the processing is performed based on the number of times of dynamic display of the second special symbol. Since the end condition of the “time reduction state” is not satisfied, it is determined whether or not the value of the total time reduction counter is greater than “0” (S6167). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the value of the total time saving counter is not greater than “0” (S6167: No), that is, when the value of the total time saving counter is “0” or less, the second special symbol is used. Although the end condition of the “time reduction state” based on the number of executions of the dynamic display is not satisfied, the “time reduction state” based on the total number of executions of the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not satisfied. Since the end condition is satisfied, the process moves to S6165 to end the “time reduction state”.

  In the process of S6165, an end setting process (for example, transmission of a time reduction end command) for ending the “time reduction state” is performed (S6165), and then both the special figure 2 time reduction counter and the total time reduction counter are set to “0”. After clearing (S6166), the time saving subtraction process (S6120) ends, and the process returns to the special figure variation process (see FIG. 496). Here, by clearing both the special figure 2 time reduction counter and the total time reduction counter to “0”, even if one of the “time reduction state” end conditions is satisfied, the other “time reduction state” The counter associated with the end condition of the "state" can be initialized, and then the counting in the "time saving state" can be performed accurately.

  In the process of S6167, when it is determined that the value of the total time saving counter is larger than “0” (S6167: Yes), the total of the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is determined. Since the end condition of the “time reduction state” based on the number of executions is not satisfied, the processing of S6165 and S6166 is not performed to maintain the “time reduction state”, and the time reduction processing (S6120) is ended. The process returns to the special figure change process (see FIG. 496).

  As described above, by changing the condition (the number of times) at which the “time reduction state” ends depending on the special symbol to be executed, a variation can be provided in the game and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, when a short specified number of “time reduction state” (for example, one time) is set after the jackpot game is completed, and the dynamic display of the second special symbol is to be executed in the “time reduction state”, If the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol exists before the game, before the execution condition of the second special symbol (that is, the winning in the second starting port 64b) is established by driving the ordinary electric combination 64c. The dynamic display of the first special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (ie, once), and the “time reduction state” may end when the dynamic display of the first special symbol is executed. Therefore, the ending condition of the “time reduction state” is made different for each execution number of each special symbol, and the ball is transferred to the second starting port 64b before the ending condition based on the execution number of the dynamic display of the first special symbol is satisfied. Is set so that the player can win the prize (ie, the total number of times of dynamic display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 10 or more), so that the second special symbol can be surely obtained in the "time reduction state". The dynamic display of the symbol can be executed, and the expected game specification (for example, the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed in the “time reduction state”) is provided to the player without fail. Can enhance the interest of the people.

  Next, the hit processing (S5103), which is one of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 466) executed by the MPU 271 in the main control device 110, will be described with reference to FIG. 500. FIG. 500 is a flowchart showing the hit processing (S5103).

  This winning process (S5103) is a type of a big hit (big hit type) or a small hit type when a big hit is won based on the detection of the special area switch 208h during a small hit game or a big hit in a special symbol. The number of rounds (the number of rounds) of the special winning opening 65a is set in accordance with, and the opening time of the special winning opening 65a is set. Then, in the case of the big hit state, a special winning opening opening / closing control process (see FIG. 478) for controlling opening or closing of the special winning opening 65a is executed. At the end of the jackpot, a jackpot ending process (see FIG. 501) for ending the jackpot is executed. Furthermore, when a small hit of a special symbol occurs, the number of times of opening the small winning opening 72a (the number of rounds) and the opening time of the small winning opening 72a are set. Then, in the case of the small hit state, the detection of the ball by the special area switch 208h is determined while executing the small winning opening opening / closing control process (see FIG. 502) for controlling the opening or closing of the small winning opening 72a. .

  In the hit processing (S5103), the MPU 271 first determines whether the big hit flag is turned on (S6201). In the twenty-ninth embodiment, the big hit flag is turned on when a big hit is won in the dynamic display of each special symbol, or when a ball is detected by the special area switch 208h during the small hit game. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot flag is turned on (S6201: Yes), the jackpot flag is set to off (S6202), and then, in order to execute the control related to the jackpot game, the selected jackpot type or small jackpot type is executed. The corresponding round number is set in a round counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 273 (S6203). Then, in order to transmit a jackpot opening command indicating that the jackpot is started to the voice ramp control device 113, the jackpot opening command is set in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 273 (S6204). A jackpot opening time (for example, “5 seconds”) is set (S6205), and the process proceeds to S6210. As a result, the jackpot opening command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S5101) of the timer interrupt process executed next. In the above-described round counter, “0” is set as an initial value when the power is turned on.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S6201 that the big hit flag is not turned on (S6201: No), it is next determined whether or not the small hit is won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol (S6206). ). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the small hit has been won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol (S6206: Yes), the control is first provided in the RAM 273 in order to execute the control on the winning small hit. The number of rounds corresponding to the winning small hit is set to "1" in a round counter (not shown) (S6207). Then, the small hit opening command is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 273 in order to transmit the small hit opening command indicating that the small hit is started to the sound ramp control device 113 (S6208). Next, the opening time of the small hit (for example, “1 second”) is set (S6209), and the process proceeds to S6210. Thus, the small hit opening command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S5101) of the timer interrupt process to be executed next.

  With this configuration, the value of the round counter is set according to the winning (acquired) jackpot or the small hit, and the number of times of opening the special winning opening 65a or the small winning opening 72a according to the winning combination is set. At the same time, an opening effect corresponding to the big hit or the small hit can be executed.

  Next, in the process of S6210, it is determined whether or not a big hit game is being executed (S6210). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the big hit game is being executed (S6210: Yes), a big winning port opening / closing control process for executing the opening / closing control of the big winning port 65a corresponding to the big hit game is executed (S6211). The process moves to S6212. Note that the special winning opening opening / closing control process (S6211) is the same as the special winning opening opening / closing control process (see FIG. 478) in the twenty-eighth embodiment, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In the process of S6212, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter is greater than “0” (S6212). If the result of the determination is that the value of the round counter is greater than “0” (S6212: Yes), the process of S6213 is skipped and the hit process (S5103) is performed once to continue the big hit game. Then, the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 466). On the other hand, when the value of the round counter is not a value larger than “0” (S6212: No), that is, when the value of the round counter is equal to or smaller than “0”, a big hit end process is executed to end the big hit game. (S6213), the hit processing (S5103) ends, and the flow returns to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 466).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 501, the big hit end process (S6213), which is one of the hit processes (see FIG. 500) executed by the MPU 271 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 501 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end processing (S6213).

  In the big hit end processing (S6213) of the twenty-ninth embodiment, based on the big hit type (small hit type) in which the big hit game is generated, an end condition of the “time reduction state” executed after the big hit game is ended is set.

  In the big hit end process (S6213), the MPU 271 first determines whether or not the game has been a big hit game by dynamically displaying the first special symbol (S6221). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the big hit game is the big hit game by the dynamic display of the first special symbol (S6221: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the big hit type of the big hit game is “4R big hit” ( S6222). If the result of the determination is that it is “4R jackpot” (S6222: Yes), the value of the special figure 2 time reduction counter is set to “1” in order to set a short “time reduction state” disadvantageous to the player. Is set (S6223), the value of the total time-saving counter is set to "10" (S6224), and the process shifts to S6227.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S6221 that the game is not a jackpot game by dynamic display of the first special symbol (S6221: No), that is, it is determined that the game is a jackpot game by dynamic display of the second special symbol. In the case, or when it is determined that the big hit game by the dynamic display of the first special symbol is not “4R big hit” (S6222: No), that is, the “16R big hit” in the dynamic display of the first special symbol , "7" is set to the value of the special figure 2 time saving counter (S6225), and the value of the total time saving counter is set to "7" in order to set a long "time reduction state" advantageous to the player. "100" is set (S6226), and the process moves to S6227.

  As described above, by generating the “time reduction state” having different degrees of advantage based on the big hit type or the small hit type of the winning special symbol, the variation of the game can be abundant and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the process of S6227, to end the big hit, first, an ending command indicating the start of the big hit ending effect is set to the sound lamp control device 113 (S6227). Then, a jackpot end setting process for setting the ending time and the like is performed (S6228), the jackpot end process (S6213) is ended, and the process returns to the hit process (see FIG. 500). The ending command set in the processing of S6227 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 273, and is included in the external output processing (see S5101 in FIG. 466) of the next timer interrupt processing. Is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113.

  Returning to FIG. 500, the description will be continued. In the process of S6210, when it is determined that it is not a big hit (S6210: No), it is next determined whether or not a small hit game is being executed (S6214). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the small hitting game is being executed (S6214: Yes), the small winning opening / closing control processing for executing the opening / closing control of the small winning opening 72a corresponding to the small hitting game is executed ( S6215).

  Here, the small winning opening opening / closing control process (S6215), which is one process of the hitting process (see FIG. 501) executed by the MPU 271 in the main control device 110, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 502 is a flowchart showing the small winning opening opening / closing control process (S6215).

  In this small winning opening opening / closing control process (S6215), a round counter and a winning counter which are also used in the control at the time of the big hit are set and determined, the opening / closing control of the small winning opening 72a is executed, and the special area switch 208h is detected and determined. To determine whether a big hit game based on the small hit game will occur.

  In the small winning opening opening / closing control process (S6215), the MPU 271 first determines whether or not the small winning opening 72a is open (S6231). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the small winning opening 72a is not opened (S6231: No), it is then determined whether the small winning opening time set in the winning process (see FIG. 501) has elapsed. It is determined (S6322). If the result of the determination is that the opening time of the small hit has elapsed (S6322: Yes), a small winning opening opening process of opening the small winning opening 72a is executed in order to start one round in the small hit game ( (S6233) Then, "1" is set to the value of a winning counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 273 (S6234). Then, an opening time is set to set the maximum opening time of the small winning opening 72a (that is, "1.8 seconds") (S6235), and a small opening command indicating that the small winning opening 72a is opened is provided in the RAM 273. It is set to the received command transmission ring buffer (S6236), and the process moves to S6237. As a result, the small open command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S5101) of the timer interrupt process executed next.

  On the other hand, if the small hit opening time has not elapsed in the processing of S6231 (S6231: No), the small win opening time is in progress, and thus the small winning opening opening / closing control processing (S6215) is terminated. Return to the processing (see FIG. 501).

  In the processing of S6231, if it is determined that the small winning opening 72a is being opened (S6231: Yes), the processing proceeds to S6237 without performing the steps S6322 to S6236 relating to the opening of the small winning opening 72a. Transition.

  In the processing of S6237, it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the opening time of the small winning opening 72a set in S6235 described above elapses (S6237). If the result of the determination is that the opening time of the small winning opening 72a has elapsed (S6237: Yes), one closing condition of the small winning opening 72a is satisfied, and it is the closing timing of the small winning opening 72a in that round. Then, the value of the winning counter is cleared to "0" (S6238), and the process shifts to S6244. The process of closing the small winning opening 72a from S6244 will be described later.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S6237, if the opening time of the small winning opening 72a has not elapsed (S6237: No), since the closing timing of the small winning opening 72a has not arrived, the opening of the small winning opening 72a is maintained. First, it is determined whether or not a ball has been detected by the special area switch 208h (S6239).

  In the processing of S6239, when it is determined that the ball is detected by the special area switch 208h (S6239: Yes), it is a prize (ie, two kinds) to the special area switch 208h during the small hitting game. In order to execute the jackpot game based on the winning, the jackpot flag is set to ON (S6240), and the process proceeds to S6241. On the other hand, if the ball is not detected by the special area switch 208h in the process of S6239 (S6239: No), the process of S6240 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S6241.

  In the processing of S6241, it is determined whether or not a ball has been detected by the small winning opening switch (not shown) for detecting the ball flowing into the small winning opening 72a, that is, whether or not the ball has won the small winning opening 72a. (S6241). As a result of the determination, if a ball is detected by the small winning opening switch (S6241: Yes), that is, if the ball has won the small winning opening 72a, the value of the winning counter is decremented by 1 (S6242). It is determined whether the value of the winning counter obtained by subtracting 1 is greater than "0" (S6243). As a result of the determination, when the value of the winning counter is not greater than “0” (S6243: No), that is, when the value of the winning counter is “0” or less, one ball wins in the small winning opening 72a. Since one closing condition of the small winning opening 72a is satisfied, the process shifts to S6244 in order to close the small winning opening 72a.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S6241, when no ball is detected by the small winning opening switch (not shown) (S6241: No), that is, when no ball is won in the small winning opening 72a, or in the processing of S6243. In the case where it is determined that the value of the winning counter is greater than "0" (S6243: Yes), the opening condition of the small winning opening 72a is maintained because the closing condition of the small winning opening 72a is not satisfied. Therefore, the small winning opening opening / closing control processing (S6215) is ended without performing the processing of S6244 to S6246. After the small winning opening opening / closing control process (S6215) ends, the process returns to the winning process (see FIG. 501).

  As described above, the round counter and the winning counter used for controlling the opening and closing of the special winning opening 65a in the jackpot game are also used for controlling the opening and closing of the small winning opening 72a in the small hitting game, and the program for controlling the opening and closing of the special winning opening 65a. By using the same configuration as the program for controlling the opening and closing of the small winning opening 72a, the program can be shared, the number of development steps during development can be reduced, and the ROM capacity can be reduced.

  In the closing process of the small winning opening 72a from S6244, first, a small winning opening closing process of closing the small winning opening 72a is executed (S6244), and then the small winning opening 72a is set to the audio lamp control device 113. A small close command indicating that the command is closed is set (S6245), and the process proceeds to S6246. The small closing command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 273, and is output in the external output processing (see S5101 in FIG. 466) of the next timer interrupt processing to be executed. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113.

  Next, in the processing of S6246, since one round of the small winning opening 72a has been consumed, the value of the round counter is decremented by 1 (S6246), and the small winning opening opening / closing control processing (S6215) is ended. After the small winning opening opening / closing control process (S6215) ends, the process returns to the winning process (see FIG. 501).

  Returning to FIG. 501, the description will be continued. After the end of the small winning opening opening / closing control process in S6215, it is determined whether the value of the round counter is greater than “0” (S6216). If the result of the determination is that the value of the round counter is greater than “0” (S6216: Yes), the process of S6217 is skipped to continue the small hitting game, and the hitting process is temporarily performed (S5103). And returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 466).

  On the other hand, in the processing of S6216, if the value of the round counter is not a value larger than “0” (S6216: No), that is, if the value of the round counter is equal to or smaller than “0”, in order to end the small hitting game, A small ending command indicating the start of a small hit ending effect is set for the sound ramp control device 113, and a small hit end process for setting an ending time and the like is executed (S6217), and the hit processing (S5103) is ended. Then, the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 466).

  As described above, in the winning process (see FIG. 501), a special winning opening opening / closing control process (see FIG. 478) for controlling opening / closing of the special winning opening 65a and a small winning opening / closing control process for controlling opening / closing of the small winning opening 72a. By executing (see FIG. 502), the MPU 271 in the main controller 110 can manage the execution of the jackpot game and the small jackpot game, and various states at the time of the big hit accompanying the process of opening and closing the big win port 65a at the time of the big hit. The various states at the time of a small hit accompanying the process of opening and closing the small winning opening 72a at the time of a small hit can be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Also, in the winning process (see FIG. 501), the number of times of the “time reduction state” after the end of the big hit is set by the big hit end process (see FIG. 501), so that the winning type (small hit type) differs for each winning type. It can create amusement, enrich the variation of the game, and improve the interest of the game.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-ninth embodiment, the increase in the jackpot random value resulting from the setting change of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is determined by the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Each of the symbols is configured so as to compensate for the number of lost random numbers, and is configured to be within the range of the number of lost random values. Furthermore, in each special symbol, the number of random numbers other than the big random number value and the lost random number value (that is, the small random number value in the second special symbol) is not changed. With this configuration, it is possible to calculate the payout rate for each set value by considering only the increase in the jackpot random value, thereby suppressing an increase in man-hours when designing the game specification. be able to.

  In addition, in each of the special symbols, an increase in the jackpot random number value caused by the setting change is compensated for from the role of the largest random number value other than the jackpot random number value in the jackpot random number counter C1 (ie, both of the random number values are lost). Constitute. With this configuration, it is possible to make setting discrimination difficult based on the number of appearances of the losing combination, which is the most common combination. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 to be seen by setting only the appearance rate of the jackpot having a lower appearance probability than the losing role as the setting determination element by the player. As a result, even if the setting is low (i.e., the set value 1 or the like), the game can be continued without letting the player know the setting, and the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be promoted.

  Further, the increase in the jackpot random number value due to the setting change is compensated for from the lost random number value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the lost combination that does not give a game value to the player.

  Unlike the jackpot role and the small jackpot role, the losing role is a role that does not add a game value, and is therefore a role that is not clearly (largely) displayed on a data lamp (not shown) provided for each pachinko machine 10. is there. Here, if the small hit random number value corresponding to the small hit game clearly (largely) recorded in the data lamp is changed for each setting, the player confirms the appearance rate of the small hit game with the data lamp. By doing so, the number of setting determination elements of the pachinko machine 10 increases. As a result, for example, when the setting of the pachinko machine 10 set to the low setting (for example, the set value “1”) is discovered by the player, the player does not play the game with the pachinko machine 10 and The operation of the machine 10 may be reduced.

  Therefore, the increase in the jackpot random number value due to the setting change is compensated from the lost random number value corresponding to the lost portion that is not counted in the data lamp without giving a game value to the player in the jackpot random number counter C1. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult for the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 to be seen by setting only the appearance ratio of the jackpot as the setting determination element by the player. Therefore, for example, even if the setting is low (that is, the setting value is “1” or the like), the game can be continued without letting the player know the setting, and the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be promoted.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-ninth embodiment, the increase in the jackpot random number value due to the setting change is determined by a lottery table in any special symbol (that is, the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 and the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2). However, it is configured to compensate from the part that has been assigned. Here, when the big hit random value accompanying the setting change is supplemented from the role (for example, the small hit random value in the second special symbol) assigned to only one lottery table, the calculation of the payout rate in each special symbol is performed. Due to the difference, the calculation becomes complicated, and the number of steps in designing the game specification increases. Therefore, by compensating for the increase of the jackpot random value from the hand (ie, the loss hand) present in each special symbol, it becomes possible to share a part of the calculation of the payout rate in each special symbol, An increase in man-hours at the time of designing game specifications can be suppressed.

<30th embodiment>
Next, a description will be given of the pachinko machine 10 according to a thirtieth embodiment with reference to FIG.

  The pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-eighth embodiment changes (increases) the number of jackpot random numbers that generate jackpot games that provide the most time-efficient game value for each set value, and determines the amount of change (increase) in the game. It was configured to compensate from the number of lost random numbers to which no value was given.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the thirtieth embodiment, although the time efficiency is not better than the big hit game, the number of the small hit random numbers for generating the small hit game which gives the player a game value is changed for each set value. (Increase), and the change (increase) is compensated from the number of loss random numbers. In the case of a small jackpot game, when trying to obtain a game value equivalent to one jackpot game, if the player does not win many small jackpot games over a longer period of time than the jackpot game, the same jackpot game will be obtained. Can not do. Therefore, by providing a portion where the setting difference occurs in the number of the small hit random numbers that generate the small hit game, it is difficult to perform the game for a long time and determine the setting unless a lot of the small hit games are won. be able to. Therefore, by setting the setting discriminating element by the player to a game specification that is difficult unless the game is played for a long time, it is possible to make it difficult for the pachinko machine 10 to see the set value in a short game. As a result, even if the setting is low (that is, the set value is 1 or the like), it is possible for the player to make it difficult for the user to find the setting and to continue the game, thereby promoting the operation of the pachinko machine 10.

  Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 according to the thirtieth embodiment will be described focusing on differences from the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixteenth to twenty-ninth embodiments. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the thirtieth embodiment, the same components and processes as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the sixteenth to twenty-ninth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals as those of the sixteenth to twenty-ninth embodiments. And its illustration and description are omitted.

  The details of the jackpot random number table 272a corresponding to each special symbol in the thirtieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 503. FIG. 503 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1 stored in the ROM 272, and FIG. 503 (b) is a special figure 2 jackpot random number table stored in the ROM 272. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of 272a2 typically.

  The special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 and the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 of the 30th embodiment are respectively for each set value, for the low probability state used when the gaming state is the special symbol low probability state, The game state is divided into two types, a high-probability state and a high-probability state that are used when the special symbol has a higher probability of being a big hit than the low probability state of the special symbol.

  In each set value, the number of small hit random numbers included in the low probability state and the high probability state is changed, and the number of small hit random values is different in each set value in each game state. Is set to In addition, the increase in the number of small hit random numbers for each set value and each game state is compensated for from the number of lost random numbers corresponding to the lost. In this way, by making the number of small hit random numbers different, the winning probability of small hit is changed for each set value and each gaming state.

  On the other hand, in each set value, the number of jackpot random numbers included in the low probability state and the high probability state is set to be the same. As described above, the number of jackpot random numbers varies depending on the game state, but by setting the same for each set value, the game value assignment ratio in which only the jackpot game is considered at all set values becomes equal.

  As shown in FIG. 503 (a), in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1 of the thirtieth embodiment, when the set value is “1”, the jackpot random number which becomes a jackpot in the low probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1 The number of values (big hit random value) of the counter C1 is 50, and the value “0 to 49” is defined (set) in the special drawing 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “1” (that is, the “normal game state”) is 50/10000 = 0.5 / 100 (that is, 0.5). %).

  On the other hand, when the set value is “1”, the number of random number values (big hit random number values) that become big hits in the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 500, and the values “0 to 499” are Are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “1” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 500/10000 = 5/100 ( That is, 5%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set to be 10 times larger than the low probability state.

  When the set value is “1”, the number of random numbers (small hit random value) that are small hits in the low probability state and the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 are both 100 and low. The value “50 to 149” in the case of the probability state or the value “500 to 599” in the case of the high probability state is defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the small hit probability in the first special symbol of the set value “1” is 100/10000 = 1/100 (that is, 1%) in any game state, and the low probability state and the high probability of the special symbol It is set so that the winning probability of the small hit is equal to the state.

  Therefore, when the set value is “1”, the number of random number values (loss random number values) that are lost in the low probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1 is the remaining number other than the jackpot random number value and the small jackpot random value. For 9850, the values “150 to 9999” are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. In the high probability state, the number of random values (losing random values) that result in a loss is 9400 other than the jackpot random value and the small random number value, and the values “600 to 9999” are the special figures. It is defined (set) in the big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the loss probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “1” (that is, “normal game state” or “time shortened state”) is 9850/10000 = 98.5 / 100. (That is, 98.5%), and the loss probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 9400. / 10000 = 94/100 (that is, 94%).

  That is, at the set value “1”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of the special map 1 is reduced, and the number of loss random numbers in the “normal game state” where the stay ratio is the highest in the game is reduced. The number of jackpot random numbers for the increase from the low probability state to the high probability state is within the range of the number of lost random numbers in the “normal game state” (that is, 9850 or less) while being configured to compensate for the decrease. It is configured as follows.

  Next, when the setting value is “2”, the number of the jackpot random number counter C1 (small jackpot random value) which becomes a jackpot in the low probability state in the special figure 1 big jackpot random number table 272a1 is 50 in the same manner as the set value “1”. The value “0 to 49” is defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. In other words, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “2” (ie, the “normal game state”) is 50/10000 = 0.5, like the set value “1”. / 100 (that is, 0.5%).

  Further, when the set value is “2”, the number of random number values (small jackpot random value) that become a big hit in the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 500 like the set value “1”. The value “0-499” is defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the high-probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “2” (that is, “super-probability-change state” or “probability-change state”) is the same as the set value “1”. 500/10000 = 5/100 (that is, 5%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set to be 10 times larger than the low probability state.

  On the other hand, when the set value is “2”, the number of values (small hit random value) of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes a small hit in the low probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 102, and the value is “50”. To 151 ”is defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the small hit probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “2” (that is, the “normal game state”) is 102/10000 = 1.02 / 100 (that is, 1.1.0). 02%).

  When the set value is "2", the number of random number values (small hit random value) which are small hits in the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 120, and the values are "500 to 619". Are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the small hit probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “2” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 120/10000 = 1. / 100 (that is, 1.2%), and the special symbol high-probability state is set so as to be easily hit by about 1.18 times smaller than the low-probability state.

  Therefore, when the set value is “2”, the number of random number values (loss random number values) that are lost in the low probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is the remaining number other than the big hit random number value and the small hit random number value. The number “152 to 9999” is defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 for 9848 pieces. In the case of the high-probability state, the number of random numbers (losing random values) that are lost is 9380 remaining values other than the big hit random value and the small hit random value, and the values “620 to 9999” are the special figure. It is defined (set) in the big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the loss probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “2” (that is, “normal game state” or “time shortened state”) is 9848/10000 = 98.48 / 100. (That is, 98.48%), and the loss probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 9380. /10000=93.8/100 (that is, 93.8%).

  That is, at the set value “2”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of Toku-zu 1 is reduced by the number of loss random numbers in the “normal game state” where the staying rate is the highest in the game, While compensating for the decrease, the increase in the number of small hit random numbers due to the setting change in the low-probability state and the high-probability state of Tokuju 1 also reduces the number of lost random numbers in the "normal gaming state". Then, it is configured to compensate for the decrease, and the number of big hit random numbers and the number of small hit random numbers for the increase from the low-probability state to the high-probability state and the increase due to the change of the set value are set to "normal" It is configured to be within the range of the number of lost random numbers in the "game state" (that is, 9848 or less).

  Therefore, although the set value “2” in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a2 has the same big hit probability (0.5% or 5%) as the set value “1”, the small hit probability is slightly improved. (Low-probability state: 1% → 1.02%, high-probability state: 1% → 1.2%), and in any of the game states, small-hitting games are more likely to occur than when the set value is “1”. It can be said that there is.

  Next, when the set value is “3”, the number of values of the jackpot random number counter C1 (small jackpot random value) which becomes a jackpot in the low probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1 is the set values “1” and “2”. Similarly to the above, the values “0 to 49” are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “3” (that is, the “normal game state”) is 50/10000 as in the case of the set values “1” and “2”. = 0.5 / 100 (that is, 0.5%).

  Further, when the set value is “3”, the number of random number values (small jackpot random value) that become the big hit in the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is the same as the set values “1” and “2”. For 500, the values “0 to 499” are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. In other words, the jackpot probabilities of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “3” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) are the set values “1” and “2”. , 500/10000 = 5/100 (that is, 5%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set so as to be 10 times larger than the low probability state.

  On the other hand, when the set value is “3”, the number of values (small hit random value) of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes a small hit in the low probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 104, and the value is “50”. To 153 "is defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the small hit probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “3” (that is, “normal game state”) is 104/10000 = 1.04 / 100 (that is, 1.1.0). 04%).

  When the set value is "3", the number of random number values (small hit random number values) which are small hits in the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 140, and the values are "500 to 639". Are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the small hit probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “3” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 140/10000 = 1.4. / 100 (that is, 1.4%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set to be about 1.35 times smaller than the low probability state.

  Therefore, when the setting value is “3”, the number of random numbers that are lost in the low probability state (losing random value) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is the remaining number other than the big hit random value and the small hit random value. For 9846, the values “154 to 9999” are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. In the case of the high-probability state, the number of random numbers (losing random numbers) that are lost is 9360 remaining numbers other than the big hit random number and the small hit random number, and the values “640 to 9999” are the special figure. It is defined (set) in the big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the loss probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “3” (that is, “normal game state” or “time shortened state”) is 9846/10000 = 98.46 / 100. (That is, 98.46%), and the loss probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 9360. /10000=93.6/100 (that is, 93.6%).

  That is, at the setting value “3”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of the special figure 1 is reduced, and the number of loss random numbers in the “normal game state” having the highest staying rate in the game is reduced. While compensating for the decrease, the increase in the number of small hit random numbers due to the setting change in the low-probability state and the high-probability state of Tokuju 1 also reduces the number of lost random numbers in the "normal gaming state". Then, it is configured to compensate for the decrease, and the number of big hit random numbers and the number of small hit random numbers for the increase from the low-probability state to the high-probability state and the increase due to the change of the set value are set to "normal" It is configured to be within the range of the number of lost random numbers in the "game state" (that is, 9846 or less).

  Therefore, although the set value “3” in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a2 has the same big hit probability (0.5% or 5%) as the set value “2”, the small hit probability is slightly improved. (Low-probability state: 1.02% → 1.04%, high-probability state: 1.2% → 1.4%). It can be said that the setting is easy to perform.

  Next, when the set value is “4”, the number of the values (big hit random value) of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes the big hit in the low probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is the set value “1” to “3”. Similarly to the above, the values “0 to 49” are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. In other words, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “4” (ie, the “normal game state”) is 50 / 10,000 similarly to the set values “1” to “3”. = 0.5 / 100 (that is, 0.5%).

  When the set value is “4”, the number of random number values (small jackpot random values) that become a big hit in the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is the same as the set values “1” to “3”. For 500, the values “0 to 499” are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the jackpot probabilities of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “4” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) are the set values “1” to “3”. , 500/10000 = 5/100 (that is, 5%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set so as to be 10 times larger than the low probability state.

  On the other hand, when the set value is "4", the number of values (small hit random value) of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes a small hit in the low probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 106, and the value is "50". To 155 "is defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. In other words, the small hit probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “4” (that is, the “normal game state”) is 106/10000 = 1.06 / 100 (that is, 1.1.0). 06%).

  When the set value is “4”, the number of random number values (small hit random value) to be a small hit in the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 160, and the value is “500 to 659”. Are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the small hit probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “4” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 160/10000 = 1.6. / 100 (that is, 1.6%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set to be about 1.51 times smaller than the low probability state.

  Accordingly, when the set value is “4”, the number of random numbers that are lost in the low-probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1 (loss random value) is the remaining number other than the jackpot random value and the small random number value. For 9844, the values “156 to 9999” are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. In the case of the high-probability state, the number of lost random numbers (losing random number values) is the remaining 9340 numbers other than the big hit random number value and the small hit random number value. It is defined (set) in the big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the loss probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “4” (that is, “normal game state” or “time shortened state”) is 9844/10000 = 98.44 / 100. (That is, 98.44%), and the loss probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 9340. /10000=93.4/100 (that is, 93.4%).

  That is, at the set value “4”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of Toku-zu 1 is reduced by the number of loss random numbers in the “normal game state” where the staying rate is the highest in the game, While compensating for the decrease, the increase in the number of small hit random numbers due to the setting change in the low-probability state and the high-probability state of Tokuju 1 also reduces the number of lost random numbers in the "normal gaming state". Then, it is configured to compensate for the decrease, and the number of big hit random numbers and the number of small hit random numbers for the increase from the low-probability state to the high-probability state and the increase due to the change of the set value are set to "normal" It is configured to be within the range of the number of lost random numbers in the "game state" (that is, 9844 or less).

  Therefore, although the set value “4” in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a2 has the same big hit probability (0.5% or 5%) as the set value “3”, the small hit probability is slightly improved. (Low-probability state: 1.04% → 1.06%, high-probability state: 1.4% → 1.6%). It can be said that the setting is easy to perform.

  Next, when the set value is “5”, the number of values (big hit random value) of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes a big hit in the low probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is the set value “1” to “4”. Similarly to the above, the values “0 to 49” are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “5” (that is, the “normal game state”) is 50 / 10,000 similarly to the set values “1” to “4”. = 0.5 / 100 (that is, 0.5%).

  Further, when the set value is “5”, the number of random number values (big hit random number values) which are the big hits in the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is the same as the set values “1” to “4”. For 500, the values “0 to 499” are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. In other words, the jackpot probabilities of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “5” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) are set values “1” to “4”. , 500/10000 = 5/100 (that is, 5%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set so as to be 10 times larger than the low probability state.

  On the other hand, when the set value is “5”, the number of values (small hit random value) of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes a small hit in the low probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 108, and the value is “50”. To 157 "is defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the small hit probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “5” (ie, the “normal game state”) is 108/10000 = 1.08 / 100 (that is, 1.1.0). 08%).

  When the set value is "5", the number of random number values (small hit random number values) that are small hits in the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 180, and the values are "500 to 679". Are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. In other words, the small hit probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “5” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 180/10000 = 1.8. / 100 (that is, 1.8%), and the special symbol high-probability state is set to be about 1.67 times as small as the low-probability state.

  Therefore, when the set value is “5”, the number of random numbers that are lost in the low probability state (loss random value) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is the remaining number other than the big hit random value and the small hit random value. The value "158 to 9999" is defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. In the case of the high probability state, the number of random numbers (losing random numbers) which are lost is 9320 remaining values other than the big hit random number and the small hit random number, and the values “680-9999” are the special figure. It is defined (set) in the big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the loss probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “5” (ie, the “normal game state” or the “time shortened state”) is 9842/10000 = 98.42 / 100. (That is, 98.42%), and the loss probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 9320. /10000=93.2/100 (that is, 93.2%).

  That is, at the setting value “5”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of the special figure 1 is reduced, and the number of loss random numbers in the “normal game state” where the staying rate is highest in the game is reduced. While compensating for the decrease, the increase in the number of small hit random numbers due to the setting change in the low-probability state and the high-probability state of Tokuju 1 also reduces the number of lost random numbers in the "normal gaming state". Then, it is configured to compensate for the decrease, and the number of big hit random numbers and the number of small hit random numbers for the increase from the low-probability state to the high-probability state and the increase due to the change of the set value are set to "normal" It is configured to be within the range of the number of lost random numbers in the "game state" (that is, 9842 or less).

  Therefore, although the set value “5” in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a2 has the same big hit probability (0.5% or 5%) as the set value “4”, the small hit probability is slightly improved. (Low-probability state: 1.06% → 1.08%, high-probability state: 1.6% → 1.8%). It can be said that the setting is easy to perform.

  Next, when the set value is “6”, the number of values (big hit random value) of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes a big hit in the low probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is the set value “1” to “5”. Similarly to the above, the values “0 to 49” are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. In other words, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “6” (ie, the “normal game state”) is 50/10000, similar to the set values “1” to “5”. = 0.5 / 100 (that is, 0.5%).

  Further, when the set value is “6”, the number of random number values (small jackpot random value) that are the big hits in the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is the same as the set values “1” to “5”. For 500, the values “0 to 499” are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. In other words, the jackpot probabilities of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “6” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) are the set values “1” to “5”. , 500/10000 = 5/100 (that is, 5%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set to be 10 times larger than the low probability state.

  On the other hand, when the set value is “6”, the number of values (small hit random number value) of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes a small hit in the low probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 110, and the value is “50”. To 159 "is defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the small hit probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “6” (that is, the “normal game state”) is 110/10000 = 1.100 (that is, 1.1.0). 1%).

  When the set value is “6”, the number of random numbers (small hit random number value) that is a small hit in the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 200, and the value is “500 to 699”. Are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the small hit probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “6” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 200/10000 = 2/100. (That is, 2%), so that the high probability state of the special symbol is set to be about 1.82 times smaller than the low probability state.

  Therefore, when the set value is “6”, the number of random number values (loss random number value) that is lost in the low probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is the remaining number other than the big hit random number value and the small hit random number value. For 9840, the values “160 to 9999” are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. In the high probability state, the number of random numbers that are lost (loss random numbers) is the remaining 9300 numbers other than the big hit random number and the small hit random number, and the values “700 to 9999” are the special figures. It is defined (set) in the big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the loss probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “6” (that is, the “normal game state” or the “time shortened state”) is 9840/10000 = 98.4 / 100. (That is, 98.4%), and the loss probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 9300. / 10000 = 93/100 (that is, 93%).

  That is, at the set value “6”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of the special map 1 is reduced, and the number of lost random numbers in the “normal game state” where the staying rate is the highest in the game is reduced. While compensating for the decrease, the increase in the number of small hit random numbers due to the setting change in the low-probability state and the high-probability state of Tokuju 1 also reduces the number of lost random numbers in the "normal gaming state". Then, it is configured to compensate for the decrease, and the number of big hit random numbers and the number of small hit random numbers for the increase from the low-probability state to the high-probability state and the increase due to the change of the set value are set to "normal" It is configured to be within the range of the number of lost random numbers in the "game state" (that is, 9840 or less).

  Therefore, although the set value “6” in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a2 has the same big hit probability (0.5% or 5%) as the set value “5”, the small hit probability is slightly improved. (Low-probability state: 1.08% → 1.1%, high-probability state: 1.8% → 2%), and in any of the gaming states, the small hitting game is more likely to occur than in the case of the set value “5”. It can be said that it is a setting.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 503 (b), in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 of the thirtieth embodiment, when the set value is “1”, the special figure 2 big jackpot random number table 272a2 has a low probability of a big hit. The number of the big hit random number counter C1 (big hit random number value) is 50 like the first special symbol, and the value “0-49” is defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. I have. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “1” (that is, the “normal game state”) is 50/10000 = 0.5 / like the first special symbol. It is set to be 100 (that is, 0.5%).

  Also, when the set value is “1”, the number of random number values (big hit random value) in the high probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is 500 like the first special symbol. The value “0-499” is defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “1” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 500/10000 = 5/100 ( That is, 5%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set to be 10 times larger than the low probability state.

  On the other hand, when the set value is “1”, the number of random number values (small hit random number values) which are small hits in the low probability state and the high probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 are both 9400 pieces, The value “50 to 9449” in the case of the probability state or the value “500 to 9899” in the case of the high probability state is defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the small hit probability in the second special symbol of the set value “1” is 9400/10000 = 94/100 (that is, 94%) in any game state, and the low probability state and the high probability of the special symbol It is set so that the winning probability of the small hit is equal to the state.

  Therefore, when the set value is “1”, the number of random numbers that are lost in the low-probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 (loss random value) is the remaining number other than the jackpot random number value and the small jackpot random value. For 550, the values “9450-9999” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. In the case of the high probability state, the number of random numbers (losing random numbers) that are lost is the remaining 100 other than the jackpot random number and the small random number, and the value “9900 to 9999” is the special figure. It is defined (set) in the two big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the loss probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “1” (that is, “normal game state” or “time shortened state”) is 550/10000 = 5.5 / 100. (I.e., 5.5%), and the loss probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol (that is, "super probability variation state" or "probability variation state") is 100. / 10000 = 1/100 (that is, 1%).

  That is, at the set value “1”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of Tokuju 2 is reduced by the number of lost random numbers in the “normal game state” where the staying rate is the highest in the game, The number of jackpot random numbers for the increase from the low probability state to the high probability state is within the range of the number of lost random numbers in the “normal game state” (that is, 550 or less) while being configured to compensate for the decrease. It is configured as follows.

  Next, when the set value is “2”, the number of the jackpot random number counters C1 (small jackpot random value) which becomes the big jackpot in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is 50 like the set value “1”. The values “0 to 49” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “2” (that is, the “normal game state”) is 50/10000 = 0.5, like the set value “1”. / 100 (that is, 0.5%).

  Further, when the set value is “2”, the number of random number values (small jackpot random value) that become the big hit in the high probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is 500 like the set value “1”. The value “0-499” is defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “2” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is the same as the set value “1”. 500/10000 = 5/100 (that is, 5%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set so as to be 10 times larger than the low probability state.

  On the other hand, when the setting value is “2”, the number of values (small hit random number value) of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes a small hit in the low probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is 9402, and the value is “50”. ９４ 9451 ”is defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the small hit probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “2” (that is, the “normal game state”) is 9402/10000 = 94.02 / 100 (that is, 94.02 / 100). 02%).

  When the set value is “2”, the number of random number values (small hit random number values) that are small hits in the high probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is 9420, and the values are “500 to 9919”. Are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the small hit probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “2” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 9420/10000 = 94.2. / 100 (that is, 94.2%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set to be about 1.002 times smaller than the low probability state.

  Therefore, when the setting value is “2”, the number of random numbers that are lost in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 (loss random value) is the number of remaining random numbers other than the jackpot random number value and the small random number value. For 548, the values “9452 to 9999” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. In the case of the high-probability state, the number of random numbers that are lost (loss random number values) is the remaining 80 other than the jackpot random number value and the small random number value, and the values “9920 to 9999” are the special figures. It is defined (set) in the two big hit random number table 272a2. In other words, the loss probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “2” (that is, the “normal game state” or the “time reduction state”) is 548/10000 = 5.48 / 100. (Ie, 5.48%), and the loss probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol (ie, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 80. /10000=0.8/100 (that is, 0.8%).

  That is, at the setting value “2”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of Tokuju 2 is reduced by the number of loss random numbers in the “normal game state” where the staying rate is the highest in the game, While compensating for the decrease, the increase in the number of small random numbers in the low-probability state and the high-probability state shown in Tokujin 2 also decreases the number of lost random numbers in the "normal gaming state". Then, it is configured to compensate for the decrease, and the number of big hit random numbers and the number of small hit random numbers for the increase from the low-probability state to the high-probability state and the increase due to the change of the set value are set to "normal" It is configured to be within the range of the number of lost random numbers in the “game state” (ie, 548 or less).

  Therefore, although the set value “2” in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 has the same big hit probability (0.5% or 5%) as the set value “1”, the small hit probability is slightly improved. (Low-probability state: 94% → 94.02%, high-probability state: 94% → 94.2%). It can be said that there is.

  Next, when the setting value is “3”, the number of the jackpot random number counter C1 (the jackpot random number value) which becomes the jackpot in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is the set value “1” and “2”. Similarly to the above, the values “0 to 49” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “3” (that is, the “normal game state”) is 50/10000, like the set values “1” and “2”. = 0.5 / 100 (that is, 0.5%).

  Further, when the set value is “3”, the number of random number values (small jackpot random value) that become a big hit in the high probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is the same as the set values “1” and “2”. For 500, the values “0 to 499” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. In other words, the jackpot probabilities of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “3” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) are the set values “1” and “2”. , 500/10000 = 5/100 (that is, 5%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set so as to be 10 times larger than the low probability state.

  On the other hand, when the set value is “3”, the number of values (small hit random value) of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes a small hit in the low probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is 9404, and the value is “50”. ９４ 9453 ”is defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the small hit probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “3” (that is, the “normal game state”) is 9404/10000 = 94.04 / 100 (that is, 94.04 / 100). 04%).

  When the set value is “3”, the number of random number values (small hit random number values) that are small hits in the high probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is 9440, and the values are “500 to 9939”. Are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the small hit probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “3” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 9440/10000 = 94.4. / 100 (that is, 94.4%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set so as to be easily hit by about 1.004 times the low probability state.

  Therefore, when the set value is “3”, the number of random number values (losing random number values) that are lost in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is the remaining number other than the jackpot random number value and the small jackpot random value. For 546, the values “9454-9999” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. In the case of the high probability state, the number of random values (losing random values) that are lost is the remaining 60 random numbers other than the jackpot random number value and the small random number value. It is defined (set) in the two big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the loss probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “3” (that is, the “normal game state” or the “time shortened state”) is 546/10000 = 5.46 / 100. (Ie, 5.46%), and the loss probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 60. /10000=0.6/100 (that is, 0.6%).

  That is, at the setting value “3”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of Toku-zu 2 is reduced by the number of loss random numbers in the “normal game state” where the staying rate is the highest in the game, While compensating for the decrease, the increase in the number of small random numbers in the low-probability state and the high-probability state shown in Tokujin 2 also decreases the number of lost random numbers in the "normal gaming state". Then, it is configured to compensate for the decrease, and the number of big hit random numbers and the number of small hit random numbers for the increase from the low-probability state to the high-probability state and the increase due to the change of the set value are set to "normal" It is configured to be within the range of the number of lost random numbers in the "game state" (that is, 546 or less).

  Therefore, although the set value “3” in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 has the same jackpot probability (0.5% or 5%) as the set value “2”, the small hit probability is slightly improved. (Low-probability state: 94.02% → 94.04%, high-probability state: 94.2% → 94.4%), and in any game state, a small hit game occurs more than the set value “2” It can be said that the setting is easy to perform.

  Next, when the set value is “4”, the number of values of the jackpot random number counter C1 (small jackpot random value) which becomes a jackpot in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is the set value “1” to “3”. Similarly to the above, the values “0 to 49” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “4” (that is, the “normal game state”) is 50 / 10,000 similarly to the set values “1” to “3”. = 0.5 / 100 (that is, 0.5%).

  When the set value is “4”, the number of random number values (small jackpot random value) that are the big hits in the high probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is the same as the set values “1” to “3”. For 500, the values “0 to 499” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. In other words, the jackpot probabilities of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “4” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) are the set values “1” to “3”. , 500/10000 = 5/100 (that is, 5%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set so as to be 10 times larger than the low probability state.

  On the other hand, when the setting value is “4”, the number of values (small hit random number value) of the big hit random number counter C1 that becomes a small hit in the low probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is 9406, and the value is “50”. ９４ 9455 ”is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2. That is, the small hit probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “4” (that is, the “normal game state”) is 9406/10000 = 94.06 / 100 (that is, 94.06 / 100). 06%).

  When the set value is “4”, the number of random number values (small hit random number values) that are small hits in the high probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is 9460, and the values are “500 to 9959”. Are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the small hit probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “4” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 9460/10000 = 94.6. / 100 (that is, 94.6%), and the special symbol high-probability state is set to be about 1.006 times smaller than the low-probability state.

  Therefore, when the set value is “4”, the number of random numbers that are lost in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 (loss random value) is the remaining number other than the jackpot random number and the small random number. For 544, the values “9456 to 9999” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. In the case of the high-probability state, the number of random numbers (losing random values) that are lost is the remaining 40 random numbers other than the big hit random number and the small hit random number. It is defined (set) in the two big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the loss probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “4” (that is, the “normal game state” or the “time shortened state”) is 544/10000 = 5.44 / 100. (I.e., 5.44%), and the loss probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol (that is, the "super probability fluctuation state" or the "probability fluctuation state") is 40. /10000=0.4/100 (that is, 0.4%).

  That is, at the set value “4”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of the special map 2 is reduced, and the number of lost random numbers in the “normal game state” where the stay rate is the highest in the game is reduced. While compensating for the decrease, the increase in the number of small random numbers in the low-probability state and the high-probability state shown in Tokujin 2 also decreases the number of lost random numbers in the "normal gaming state". Then, it is configured to compensate for the decrease, and the number of big hit random numbers and the number of small hit random numbers for the increase from the low-probability state to the high-probability state and the increase due to the change of the set value are set to "normal" It is configured to be within the range of the number of lost random numbers in the "game state" (that is, 544 or less).

  Therefore, although the set value “4” in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 has the same jackpot probability (0.5% or 5%) as the set value “3”, the small hit probability is slightly improved. (Low-probability state: 94.04% → 94.06%, high-probability state: 94.4% → 94.6%). It can be said that the setting is easy to perform.

  Next, when the set value is “5”, the number of values (big hit random value) of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes a big hit in the low probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is the set value “1” to “4”. Similarly to the above, the values “0 to 49” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “5” (that is, the “normal game state”) is 50 / 10,000 similarly to the set values “1” to “4”. = 0.5 / 100 (that is, 0.5%).

  Further, when the set value is “5”, the number of random number values (small jackpot random value) which are the big hits in the high probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is the same as the set values “1” to “4”. For 500, the values “0 to 499” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. In other words, the jackpot probabilities of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “5” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) are set values “1” to “4”. , 500/10000 = 5/100 (that is, 5%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set so as to be 10 times larger than the low probability state.

  On the other hand, when the set value is “5”, the number of values (small hit random value) of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes a small hit in the low probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is 9408, and the value is “50”. ９４9457 ”is defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the small hit probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “5” (that is, the “normal game state”) is 9408/10000 = 94.08 / 100 (that is, 94.08 / 100). 08%).

  When the set value is “5”, the number of random number values (small hit random number values) that are small hits in the high probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is 9480, and the values are “500 to 9979”. Are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the small hit probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “5” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 9480/10000 = 94.8. / 100 (that is, 94.8%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set to be about 1.008 times smaller than the low probability state.

  Therefore, when the set value is “5”, the number of random numbers that are lost in the low probability state (losing random value) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is the remaining number other than the jackpot random value and the small random number value. For 542, the values “9458-9999” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. In the case of the high probability state, the number of random numbers (losing random numbers) which are lost is the remaining 20 other than the jackpot random numbers and the small random numbers, and the values “9980 to 9999” are the special figures. It is defined (set) in the two big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the loss probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “5” (that is, “normal game state” or “time shortened state”) is 542/10000 = 5.42 / 100. (I.e., 5.42%), and the loss probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol (that is, the "super probability fluctuation state" or the "probability fluctuation state") is 20. /10000=0.2/100 (that is, 0.2%).

  That is, at the setting value “5”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of Tokuju 2 is reduced by the number of loss random numbers in the “normal game state” where the staying rate is the highest in the game, While compensating for the decrease, the increase in the number of small hit random numbers due to the setting change in the low-probability state and the high-probability state of Tokuju 2 is also the number of lost random numbers in the "normal gaming state". It is configured to reduce and compensate for the decrease, and furthermore, the number of the big hit random numbers and the number of the small hit random numbers for the increase from the low probability state to the high probability state and the increase due to the change of the set value are “ It is configured to be within the range of the number of lost random numbers in the “normal gaming state” (ie, 542 or less).

  Therefore, although the set value “5” in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 has the same jackpot probability (0.5% or 5%) as the set value “4”, the small hit probability is slightly improved. (Low-probability state: 94.06% → 94.08%, high-probability state: 94.6% → 94.8%). It can be said that the setting is easy to perform.

  Next, when the set value is “6”, the number of the values (big hit random value) of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes the big hit in the low probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is the set value “1” to “5”. Similarly to the above, the values “0 to 49” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “6” (that is, the “normal game state”) is 50/10000, similar to the set values “1” to “5”. = 0.5 / 100 (that is, 0.5%).

  Further, when the set value is “6”, the number of random number values (small jackpot random value) which are the big hits in the high probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is the same as the set values “1” to “5”. For 500, the values “0 to 499” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the jackpot probabilities of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “6” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) are the set values “1” to “5”. , 500/10000 = 5/100 (that is, 5%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set so as to be 10 times larger than the low probability state.

  On the other hand, when the set value is “6”, the number of values (small hit random value) of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes a small hit in the low probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is 9410, and the value is “50”. .. 9449 "is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2. That is, the small hit probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “6” (that is, “normal game state”) is 9410/10000 = 94.1 / 100 (that is, 94.100). 1%).

  When the set value is “6”, the number of random number values (small hit random number values) that are small hits in the high probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is 9,500, and the values are “500 to 9999”. Are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the small hit probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “6” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 9500/10000 = 95/100. (That is, 95%), and the special symbol high-probability state is set to be about 1.01 times smaller than the low-probability state.

  Therefore, when the setting value is “6”, the number of random number values (loss random number values) that are lost in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is the number of remaining random numbers other than the jackpot random number value and the small random number value. For 540, the values “9460-9999” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. In the case of the high-probability state, the number of random numbers that are lost (loss random number) is zero other than the jackpot random number value and the small random number value, and corresponds to the lost random number value in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2. Is not stored. That is, the loss probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “6” (that is, the “normal game state” or the “time shortened state”) is 540/10000 = 5.4 / 100. (I.e., 5.4%), and the loss probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol (that is, the "super probability fluctuation state" or the "probability fluctuation state") is 0. / 10000 = 0/100 (that is, 0%), so that the loss combination does not appear.

  That is, at the set value “6”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of the special figure 2 is reduced, and the number of loss random numbers in the “normal game state” where the stay ratio is the highest in the game is reduced. While compensating for the decrease, the increase in the number of small random numbers in the low-probability state and the high-probability state shown in Tokujin 2 also decreases the number of lost random numbers in the "normal gaming state". Then, it is configured to compensate for the decrease, and the number of big hit random numbers and the number of small hit random numbers for the increase from the low-probability state to the high-probability state and the increase due to the change of the set value are set to "normal" It is configured to be within the range of the number of lost random numbers in the "game state" (that is, 540 or less).

  Therefore, although the set value “6” in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 has the same jackpot probability (0.5% or 5%) as the set value “6”, the small hit probability is slightly improved. (Low-probability state: 94.08% → 94.1%, high-probability state: 94.8% → 95%), and a small hitting game is more likely to occur in any of the gaming states than when the set value is “5”. It can be said that it is a setting.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the thirtieth embodiment, in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1 and the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2, the jackpot random value associated with the change from the low probability state to the high probability state, and , While increasing the small random number value due to the setting change from the number of lost random numbers in the "normal gaming state", the number of lost random numbers in the "normal gaming state" is within the range. To be configured. Also, the number of jackpot random numbers is changed from the low probability state to the high probability state, but is not changed by the setting change. With this configuration, it is possible to calculate the payout rate for each set value by considering only an increase in the small hit random value, thereby suppressing an increase in man-hours when designing the game specification. can do.

  In addition, in the case of trying to obtain the same game value as one jackpot game, if the small jackpot game does not win a lot of small jackpot games over a longer time than the jackpot game, the small jackpot game has the same game value as the jackpot game. Can not get. Therefore, by providing a portion where a setting difference occurs in the small hit random value that generates the small hit game, it is possible to play the game for a long time and make it difficult to determine the setting unless a lot of small hit games are won. it can. Therefore, by setting the setting discriminating element by the player to a game specification that is difficult unless the game is played for a long time, it is possible to make it difficult for the pachinko machine 10 to see the set value in a short game. As a result, even if the setting is low (i.e., the set value 1 or the like), the game can be continued without letting the player know the setting, and the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be promoted.

  Also, in the pachinko machine 10 of the thirtieth embodiment, the increase in the small random number value due to the setting change is compensated from the lost random number value corresponding to the lost role that does not give the player a gaming value in the big hit random number counter C1. It is configured to

  Unlike the jackpot role and the small jackpot role, the losing role is a role that does not add a game value, and is therefore a role that is not clearly (largely) displayed on a data lamp (not shown) provided for each pachinko machine 10. is there. Here, if the random number value of the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot game clearly (largely) recorded in the data lamp is changed for each setting, the player can confirm the appearance rate of the jackpot game by the data lamp. Therefore, the number of setting determination elements of the pachinko machine 10 increases. As a result, for example, when the setting of the pachinko machine 10 set to the low setting (for example, the set value “1”) is discovered by the player, the player does not play the game with the pachinko machine 10 and The operation of the machine 10 may be reduced.

  Therefore, the increase in the small random number value due to the change in the setting is determined by a loss random corresponding to a loss part which is not clearly (broadly) displayed on the data lamp without giving a game value to the player in the large random number counter C1. By configuring so as to compensate from the numerical values, it is possible to make it difficult for the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 to be seen by setting only the appearance ratio of the small hit as the setting discriminating element by the player. Therefore, the setting discriminating element is limited, and, for example, even if the payout rate is low (that is, the set value “1” or the like), the game is continued without the player observing the setting, and the pachinko machine 10 Operation can be promoted.

<Thirty-first embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the thirty-first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-eighth embodiment, the jackpot random value for generating the jackpot game that provides the game value with the most time efficiency for each set value is changed (increased), and the change (increase) is determined as the game value. It was configured to compensate for the loss random value that was not given.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the thirty-first embodiment, the jackpot random number value and the small jackpot random value that can provide the game value are changed (increased) for each set value, and the change (increase) is lost. It is configured to compensate from a random value. Further, when the increment of the jackpot random number value and the small hit random number value for each set value is increased for each set value by one role (that is, one of the big hit game and the small hit game) (that is, The configuration is such that the rate of increase is lower than in the case of the twenty-eighth embodiment and the thirtieth embodiment. With this configuration, the difference in the setting of the appearance rate of one combination for each set value is reduced, and the game is performed only with the appearance rate of the single combination that gives the game value (that is, the big hit game or the small hit game). This makes it difficult for the user to find the setting, and promotes the operation of the pachinko machine 10.

  Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 according to the thirty-first embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixteenth to thirty embodiments. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the thirty-first embodiment, the same components and processes as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the sixteenth to thirty embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals as those of the sixteenth to thirty embodiments. And its illustration and description are omitted.

  The details of the jackpot random number table 272a corresponding to each special symbol in the thirty-first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 504. FIG. 504 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1 stored in the ROM 272, and FIG. 504 (b) is a special figure 2 jackpot random number table stored in the ROM 272. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of 272a2 typically.

  The special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1 and the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 of the thirty-first embodiment have a low probability of a special symbol whose gaming state is "normal gaming state" or "time shortened state" for each set value, respectively. For the low probability state used in the case of the state (the period that is not the “super probability fluctuation state” or “probability fluctuation state”) and the height of the special symbol with a higher probability that the gaming state will be a big hit than the low probability state of the special symbol It is divided into two types, one for the “super-probability state” or the “high-probability state” used in the case of the “probability state”.

  Then, for each set value, the number of jackpot random numbers and small hit random numbers included in the low probability state and the high probability state are changed, and the number of jackpot random numbers and small hit random numbers are also set for each setting. Are set to be different. In addition, an increase in the number of big hit random numbers and small hit random numbers for each set value and each gaming state is compensated for from the number of lost random numbers corresponding to the lost. In this way, by changing the numbers of the big hit random number and the small hit random number, the probability of the big hit and the small hit is changed for each set value and each gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 504 (a), in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1 of the thirty-first embodiment, when the set value is “1”, the jackpot random number which becomes a jackpot in the low probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1 The number of values (big hit random numbers) of the counter C1 is 50, and the values “0 to 49” are defined (set) in the special drawing 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “1” (that is, the “normal game state”) is 50/10000 = 0.5 / 100 (that is, 0.5). %).

  On the other hand, when the set value is “1”, the number of random number values (big hit random number values) that become big hits in the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 500, and the values “0 to 499” are Are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “1” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 500/10000 = 5/100 ( That is, 5%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set to be 10 times larger than the low probability state.

  When the set value is “1”, the number of random numbers (small hit random value) that are small hits in the low probability state and the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 are both 100 and low. The value “50 to 149” in the case of the probability state or the value “500 to 599” in the case of the high probability state is defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the small hit probability in the first special symbol of the set value “1” is 100/10000 = 1/100 (that is, 1%) in any game state, and the low probability state and the high probability of the special symbol It is set so that the winning probability of the small hit is equal to the state.

  Therefore, when the set value is “1”, the number of random number values (loss random number values) that are lost in the low probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1 is the remaining number other than the jackpot random number value and the small jackpot random value. For 9850, the values “150 to 9999” are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. In the high probability state, the number of random values (losing random values) that result in a loss is 9400 other than the jackpot random value and the small random number value, and the values “600 to 9999” are the special figures. It is defined (set) in the big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the loss probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “1” (that is, “normal game state” or “time shortened state”) is 9850/10000 = 98.5 / 100. (That is, 98.5%), and the loss probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 9400. / 10000 = 94/100 (that is, 94%).

  That is, at the set value “1”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of the special map 1 is reduced, and the number of loss random numbers in the “normal game state” where the stay ratio is the highest in the game is reduced. The number of jackpot random numbers for the increase from the low probability state to the high probability state is within the range of the number of lost random numbers in the “normal game state” (that is, 9850 or less) while being configured to compensate for the decrease. It is configured as follows.

  Next, when the set value is “2”, the number of the jackpot random number counter C1 (small jackpot random value) which becomes the big jackpot in the low probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1 is 51, and the value is “0 to 50”. Are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “2” (that is, the “normal game state”) is 51/10000 = 0.51 / 100 (that is, 0.51). %).

  On the other hand, when the set value is “2”, the number of random number values (big hit random number values) that become big hits in the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 510, and the value “0 to 509” is Are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “2” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 510/10000 = 5.1 / It is set to 100 (that is, 5.1%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set to be 10 times larger than the low probability state.

  When the set value is “2”, the number of the big hit random number counter C1 (small hit random value) which becomes a small hit in the low probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 101, and the value is “51”. To 151 "is defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the small hit probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “2” (that is, the “normal game state”) is 101/10000 = 1.100 / 100 (that is, 1.1.0). 01%).

  On the other hand, when the set value is “2”, the number of random number values (small hit random number values) that are small hits in the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 110, and the values “510 to 619” Are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the small hit probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “2” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 110/10000 = 1. / 100 (that is, 1.1%), and the special symbol high-probability state is set to be about 1.09 times smaller than the low-probability state.

  Therefore, when the set value is “2”, the number of random number values (loss random number values) that are lost in the low probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is the remaining number other than the big hit random number value and the small hit random number value. The number “152 to 9999” is defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 for 9848 pieces. In the case of the high-probability state, the number of random numbers (losing random values) that are lost is 9380 remaining values other than the big hit random value and the small hit random value, and the values “620 to 9999” are the special figure. It is defined (set) in the big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the loss probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “2” (that is, “normal game state” or “time shortened state”) is 9848/10000 = 98.48 / 100. (That is, 98.48%), and the loss probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 9380. /10000=93.8/100 (that is, 93.8%).

  That is, at the set value “2”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of Toku-zu 1 is reduced by the number of loss random numbers in the “normal game state” where the staying rate is the highest in the game, It is configured to compensate for the decrease. Also, while increasing the number of jackpot random numbers due to the setting change, reducing the number of lost random numbers in the "normal gaming state" and compensating for the decrease, the small jackpot random value accompanying the setting change The increase in the number is also reduced so that the number of lost random numbers in the "normal game state" is reduced and compensated from the decrease, and the increase from the low probability state to the high probability state and the set value change So that the number of the big random numbers and the number of the small random numbers are increased within the range of the number of the lost random numbers of the set value “1” in the “normal gaming state” (that is, 9848 or less). It is configured.

  Therefore, the set value “2” in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 has a slightly larger jackpot probability than the set value “1” (low probability state: 0.5% → 0.51%, high probability). Probability state: 5% → 5.1%) and small hit probability slightly improved (low probability state: 1% → 1.01%, high probability state: 1% → 1.1%). Even in the gaming state, it can be said that the setting is such that the big hit game and the small hit game are more likely to occur than the case where the set value is “1”.

  Next, when the set value is “3”, the number of values (big hit random value) of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes the big hit in the low probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 52, and the value is “0 to 51”. Are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “3” (that is, the “normal game state”) is 52/10000 = 0.52 / 100 (that is, 0.52 %).

  On the other hand, when the set value is “3”, the number of random number values (small jackpot random value) that are the big hits in the high probability state in the special figure 1 big jackpot random number table 272a1 is 520, and the values “0 to 519” are Are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “3” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 520/10000 = 5.2 / 100 (that is, 5.2%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set so as to be 10 times larger than the low probability state.

  When the set value is “3”, the number of values (small hit random value) of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes a small hit in the low probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 102, and the value is “52”. To 153 "is defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the small hit probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “3” (that is, the “normal game state”) is 102/10000 = 1.02 / 100 (that is, 1.1.0). 02%).

  On the other hand, when the set value is “3”, the number of random number values (small hit random number values) which are small hits in the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 120, and the values “520 to 639” Are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. In other words, the small hit probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “3” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 120/10000 = 1. / 100 (that is, 1.2%), and the special symbol high-probability state is set so as to be easily hit by about 1.18 times smaller than the low-probability state.

  Therefore, when the setting value is “3”, the number of random numbers that are lost in the low probability state (losing random value) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is the remaining number other than the big hit random value and the small hit random value. For 9846, the values “154 to 9999” are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. In the case of the high-probability state, the number of random numbers (losing random numbers) that are lost is 9360 remaining numbers other than the big hit random number and the small hit random number, and the values “640 to 9999” are the special figure. It is defined (set) in the big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the loss probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “3” (that is, “normal game state” or “time shortened state”) is 9846/10000 = 98.46 / 100. (That is, 98.46%), and the loss probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 9360. /10000=93.6/100 (that is, 93.6%).

  That is, at the setting value “3”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of the special figure 1 is reduced, and the number of loss random numbers in the “normal game state” having the highest staying rate in the game is reduced. It is configured to compensate for the decrease. Also, while increasing the number of jackpot random numbers due to the setting change, reducing the number of lost random numbers in the "normal gaming state" and compensating for the decrease, the small jackpot random value accompanying the setting change The increase in the number is also reduced so that the number of lost random numbers in the "normal game state" is reduced and compensated from the decrease, and the increase from the low probability state to the high probability state and the set value change Is configured so that the number of large random numbers and the number of small random numbers in increments within the range are within the range of the number of lost random numbers in the "normal gaming state" (that is, 9846 or less).

  Therefore, the set value “3” in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a2 has a slightly larger jackpot probability than the set value “2” (low probability state: 0.51% → 0.52%, high value). Probability state: 5.1% → 5.2%) and small hit probability slightly improved (low probability state: 1.01% → 1.02%, high probability state: 1.1% → 1. 2%), it can be said that the setting is such that the big hit game and the small hit game are more likely to occur than in the case of the set value “2” in any game state.

  Next, when the set value is “4”, the number of the jackpot random number counter C1 (the jackpot random number value) which becomes the jackpot in the low probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1 is 53, and the value is “0 to 52”. Are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “4” (that is, “normal game state”) is 53/10000 = 0.53 / 100 (that is, 0.53 %).

  On the other hand, when the set value is “4”, the number of random number values (big hit random number values) that are big hits in the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 530, and the values “0 to 529” are Are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “4” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 530/10000 = 5.3 / It is set to 100 (that is, 5.3%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set to be 10 times larger than the low probability state.

  Further, when the set value is “4”, the number of values (small hit random value) of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes a small hit in the low probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 103, and the value is “53”. To 155 "is defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the small hit probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “4” (that is, “normal game state”) is 103/10000 = 1.03 / 100 (that is, 1.1.0). 03%).

  On the other hand, when the set value is “4”, the number of random number values (small hit random value) which are small hits in the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 130, and the values “530 to 659” Are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the small hit probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “4” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 130/10000 = 1.3. / 100 (that is, 1.3%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set to be about 1.26 times smaller than the low probability state.

  Accordingly, when the set value is “4”, the number of random numbers that are lost in the low-probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1 (loss random value) is the remaining number other than the jackpot random value and the small random number value. For 9844, the values “156 to 9999” are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. In the case of the high-probability state, the number of lost random numbers (losing random number values) is the remaining 9340 numbers other than the big hit random number value and the small hit random number value. It is defined (set) in the big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the loss probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “4” (that is, “normal game state” or “time shortened state”) is 9844/10000 = 98.44 / 100. (That is, 98.44%), and the loss probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 9340. /10000=93.4/100 (that is, 93.4%).

  That is, at the set value “4”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of Toku-zu 1 is reduced by the number of loss random numbers in the “normal game state” where the staying rate is the highest in the game, It is configured to compensate for the decrease. Also, while increasing the number of jackpot random numbers due to the setting change, reducing the number of lost random numbers in the "normal gaming state" and compensating for the decrease, the small jackpot random value accompanying the setting change The increase in the number is also reduced so that the number of lost random numbers in the "normal game state" is reduced and compensated from the decrease, and the increase from the low probability state to the high probability state and the set value change The number of big random numbers and the number of small random numbers for the increase due to are set within the range of the number of lost random numbers in the "normal gaming state" (that is, 9844 or less).

  Therefore, the setting value “4” in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a2 has a slightly larger jackpot probability than the setting value “3” (low probability state: 0.52% → 0.53%, high probability). Probability state: 5.2% → 5.3%) and small hit probability are slightly improved (low probability state: 1.02% → 1.03%, high probability state: 1.2% → 1. 3%), it can be said that the setting is such that the big hit game and the small hit game are more likely to occur in any of the game states than in the case of the set value “3”.

  Next, when the set value is “5”, the number of values (big hit random value) of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes the big hit in the low probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 54, and the value is “0 to 53”. Are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “5” (that is, the “normal game state”) is 54/10000 = 0.54 / 100 (that is, 0.54). %).

  On the other hand, when the set value is “5”, the number of random number values (big hit random number values) that are big hits in the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 540, and the values “0 to 539” are Are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. In other words, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “5” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 540/10000 = 5.4 / 100 (that is, 5.4%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set so as to be 10 times larger than the low probability state.

  When the set value is "5", the number of values (small hit random value) of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes a small hit in the low probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 104, and the value is "54". To 157 "is defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the small hit probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “5” (that is, the “normal game state”) is 104/10000 = 1.04 / 100 (that is, 1.1.0). 04%).

  On the other hand, when the set value is “5”, the number of random number values (small hit random number values) which are small hits in the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 140, and the values “540 to 679” Are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. In other words, the small hit probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “5” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 140/10000 = 1.4. / 100 (that is, 1.4%), and the special symbol high-probability state is set to be about 1.35 times smaller than the low-probability state.

  Therefore, when the set value is “5”, the number of random numbers that are lost in the low probability state (loss random value) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is the remaining number other than the big hit random value and the small hit random value. The value "158 to 9999" is defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. In the case of the high probability state, the number of random numbers (losing random numbers) which are lost is 9320 remaining values other than the big hit random number and the small hit random number, and the values “680-9999” are the special figure. It is defined (set) in the big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the loss probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “5” (ie, the “normal game state” or the “time shortened state”) is 9842/10000 = 98.42 / 100. (That is, 98.42%), and the loss probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 9320. /10000=93.2/100 (that is, 93.2%).

  That is, at the setting value “5”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of the special figure 1 is reduced, and the number of loss random numbers in the “normal game state” where the staying rate is highest in the game is reduced. It is configured to compensate for the decrease. Also, while increasing the number of jackpot random numbers due to the setting change, reducing the number of lost random numbers in the "normal gaming state" and compensating for the decrease, the small jackpot random value accompanying the setting change The increase in the number is also reduced so that the number of lost random numbers in the "normal game state" is reduced and compensated from the decrease, and the increase from the low probability state to the high probability state and the set value change The number of large random numbers and the number of small random numbers for the increase due to are set within the range of the number of lost random numbers in the “normal game state” (that is, 9842 or less).

  Therefore, the set value “5” in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a2 has a slightly improved big hit probability compared to the set value “4” (low probability state: 0.53% → 0.54%, high probability). Probability state: 5.3% → 5.4%) and the small hitting probability is slightly improved (low probability state: 1.03% → 1.04%, high probability state: 1.3% → 1. 4%), it can be said that the setting is such that the big hit game and the small hit game are more likely to occur in any of the game states than in the case of the set value “5”.

  Next, when the set value is "6", the number of values (big hit random value) of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes a big hit in the low probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 55, and the value is "0 to 54". Are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “6” (that is, the “normal game state”) is 55/10000 = 0.55 / 100 (that is, 0.55). %).

  On the other hand, when the set value is “6”, the number of random number values (small jackpot random value) in the high probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1 is 550, and the value “0 to 549” is Are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “6” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 550/10000 = 5.5 / It is set to 100 (that is, 5.5%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set to be 10 times larger than the low probability state.

  When the set value is “6”, the number of values (small hit random value) of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes a small hit in the low probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 105, and the value is “55”. To 159 "is defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the small hit probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “6” (that is, the “normal gaming state”) is 105/10000 = 1.05 / 100 (that is, 1.1.0). 05%).

  On the other hand, when the set value is “6”, the number of random number values (small hit random number values) that are small hits in the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 150, and the values “550 to 699” Are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the small hit probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “6” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 150/10000 = 1.5 / 100 (that is, 1.5%), so that the high probability state of the special symbol is set to be 1.43 times smaller than the low probability state.

  Therefore, when the set value is “6”, the number of random number values (loss random number value) that is lost in the low probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is the remaining number other than the big hit random number value and the small hit random number value. For 9840, the values “160 to 9999” are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. In the high probability state, the number of random numbers that are lost (loss random numbers) is the remaining 9300 numbers other than the big hit random number and the small hit random number, and the values “700 to 9999” are the special figures. It is defined (set) in the big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the loss probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “6” (that is, the “normal game state” or the “time shortened state”) is 9840/10000 = 98.4 / 100. (That is, 98.4%), and the loss probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 9300. / 10000 = 93/100 (that is, 93%).

  That is, with the setting value “6”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of Tokuju 1 is compensated from the decrease by decreasing the number of loss random numbers in the “normal game state”. I do. Also, while increasing the number of jackpot random numbers due to the setting change, reducing the number of lost random numbers in the "normal gaming state" and compensating for the decrease, the small jackpot random value accompanying the setting change The increase in the number is also reduced so that the number of lost random numbers in the "normal game state" is reduced and compensated from the decrease, and the increase from the low probability state to the high probability state and the set value change The number of large random numbers and the number of small random numbers for the increase due to are set within the range of the number of lost random numbers in the "normal gaming state" (that is, 9840 or less).

  Therefore, the set value “6” in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a2 has a slightly larger jackpot probability than the set value “5” (low probability state: 0.54% → 0.55%, high probability). Probability state: 5.4% → 5.5%) and the small hitting probability is slightly improved (low probability state: 1.04% → 1.05%, high probability state: 1.4% → 1. 5%), it can be said that the setting is such that the big hit game and the small hit game are more likely to occur in any of the game states than in the case of the set value “6”.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 504 (b), in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 of the thirty-first embodiment, if the set value is “1”, the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 indicates the low probability state of the jackpot. The number of the big hit random number counter C1 (big hit random number value) is 50 like the first special symbol, and the value “0-49” is defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. I have. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “1” (that is, the “normal game state”) is 50/10000 = 0.5 / like the first special symbol. It is set to be 100 (that is, 0.5%).

  Also, when the set value is “1”, the number of random number values (big hit random value) in the high probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is 500 like the first special symbol. The value “0-499” is defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “1” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 500/10000 = 5/100 ( That is, 5%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set to be 10 times larger than the low probability state.

  On the other hand, when the set value is “1”, the number of random number values (small hit random number values) which are small hits in the low probability state and the high probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 are both 9400 pieces, The value “50 to 9449” in the case of the probability state or the value “500 to 9899” in the case of the high probability state is defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the small hit probability in the second special symbol of the set value “1” is 9400/10000 = 94/100 (that is, 94%) in any game state, and the low probability state and the high probability of the special symbol It is set so that the winning probability of the small hit is equal to the state.

  Therefore, when the set value is “1”, the number of random numbers that are lost in the low-probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 (loss random value) is the remaining number other than the jackpot random number value and the small jackpot random value. For 550, the values “9450-9999” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. In the case of the high probability state, the number of random numbers (losing random numbers) that are lost is the remaining 100 other than the jackpot random number and the small random number, and the value “9900 to 9999” is the special figure. It is defined (set) in the two big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the loss probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “1” (that is, “normal game state” or “time shortened state”) is 550/10000 = 5.5 / 100. (I.e., 5.5%), and the loss probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol (that is, "super probability variation state" or "probability variation state") is 100. / 10000 = 1/100 (that is, 1%).

  That is, at the set value “1”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of Tokuju 2 is reduced by the number of lost random numbers in the “normal game state” where the staying rate is the highest in the game, The number of jackpot random numbers for the increase from the low probability state to the high probability state is within the range of the number of lost random numbers in the “normal game state” (that is, 550 or less) while being configured to compensate for the decrease. It is configured as follows.

  As described above, the small hit probability of the second special symbol is significantly higher than the small hit probability of the first special symbol (1% → 94%), and is smaller than the loss random value of the second special symbol. The number is set to be very easy to select. That is, in the lottery game in the second special symbol, the setting is such that it is easier to win a small hit than a big hit or a loss.

  Next, when the set value is “2”, the number of values of the jackpot random number counter C1 (small jackpot random value) which becomes a jackpot in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is the same as in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1. , 51, and the values “0 to 50” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “2” (ie, the “normal game state”) is 51/10000 = 0.51 / 1, similar to the first special symbol. 100 (ie, 0.51%).

  On the other hand, when the set value is “2”, the number of random number values (small jackpot random value) which are the big hits in the high probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is 510 like the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1. The value “0-509” is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “2” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 510 like the first special symbol. /10000=5.1/100 (that is, 5.1%), and the special symbol high-probability state is set to be 10 times bigger than the low-probability state.

  When the set value is “2”, the number of values (small hit random number value) of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes a small hit in the low probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is 9401, and the value “51” To 9451 "is defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the small hit probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “2” (that is, “normal gaming state”) is 9401/10000 = 94.01 / 100 (that is, 94.01 / 100). 01%).

  On the other hand, when the setting value is “2”, the number of random number values (small hit random number values) that are small hits in the high probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is 9410, and the values “510 to 9919” Is defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the small hit probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “2” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 9410/10000 = 94.1. / 100 (that is, 94.1%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set to be about 1.001 times smaller than the low probability state.

  Therefore, when the setting value is “2”, the number of random numbers that are lost in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 (loss random value) is the number of remaining random numbers other than the jackpot random number value and the small random number value. For 548, the values “9452 to 9999” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. In the case of the high-probability state, the number of random numbers that are lost (loss random number values) is the remaining 80 other than the jackpot random number value and the small random number value, and the values “9920 to 9999” are the special figures. It is defined (set) in the two big hit random number table 272a2. In other words, the loss probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “2” (that is, the “normal game state” or the “time reduction state”) is 548/10000 = 5.48 / 100. (Ie, 5.48%), and the loss probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol (ie, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 80. /10000=0.8/100 (that is, 0.8%).

  That is, at the setting value “2”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of Tokuju 2 is reduced by the number of loss random numbers in the “normal game state” where the staying rate is the highest in the game, It is configured to compensate for the decrease. Also, while increasing the number of jackpot random numbers due to the setting change, reducing the number of lost random numbers in the "normal gaming state" and compensating for the decrease, the small jackpot random value accompanying the setting change The increase in the number is also reduced so that the number of lost random numbers in the "normal game state" is reduced and compensated from the decrease, and the increase from the low probability state to the high probability state and the set value change The number of big random numbers and the number of small random numbers for the increase due to are set within the range of the number of lost random numbers in the "normal gaming state" (that is, 548 or less).

  Therefore, the setting value “2” in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 has a slightly larger jackpot probability than the setting value “1” (low probability state: 0.5% → 0.51%, high probability). Probability state: 5% → 5.1%) and small hit probability slightly improved (low probability state: 94% → 94.01%, high probability state: 94.1% → 94.1%), In any game state, it can be said that the setting is such that the big hit game and the small hit game are more likely to occur than the case where the set value is “1”.

  Next, when the set value is “3”, the number of values of the jackpot random number counter C1 (small jackpot random value) which becomes a jackpot in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is the same as that of the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1. , 52, and the values “0 to 51” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “3” (ie, the “normal game state”) is 52/10000 = 0.52 / similar to the first special symbol. 100 (that is, 0.52%).

  On the other hand, when the set value is “3”, the number of random number values (small jackpot random value) which are the big hits in the high probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is 520 like the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1. The value “0-519” is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “3” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 520 like the first special symbol. /10000=5.2/100 (that is, 5.2%), and the special symbol high-probability state is set to be 10 times bigger than the low-probability state.

  When the set value is “3”, the number of values (small hit random value) of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes a small hit in the low probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is 9402, and the value “52” ９４ 9453 ”is defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the small hit probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “3” (that is, the “normal game state”) is 9402/10000 = 94.02 / 100 (that is, 94.02 / 100). 02%).

  On the other hand, when the set value is “3”, the number of random number values (small hit random number values) that are small hits in the high probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is 9420, and the values “520 to 9939” Is defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the small hit probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “3” (that is, “super probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 9420/10000 = 94.2. / 100 (that is, 94.2%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set to be about 1.002 times smaller than the low probability state.

  Therefore, when the set value is “3”, the number of random number values (losing random number values) that are lost in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is the remaining number other than the jackpot random number value and the small jackpot random value. For 546, the values “9454-9999” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. In the case of the high probability state, the number of random values (losing random values) that are lost is the remaining 60 random numbers other than the jackpot random number value and the small random number value. It is defined (set) in the two big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the loss probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “3” (that is, the “normal game state” or the “time shortened state”) is 546/10000 = 5.46 / 100. (Ie, 5.46%), and the loss probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 60. /10000=0.6/100 (that is, 0.6%).

  That is, at the setting value “3”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of Toku-zu 2 is reduced by the number of loss random numbers in the “normal game state” where the staying rate is the highest in the game, It is configured to compensate for the decrease. Also, while increasing the number of jackpot random numbers due to the setting change, reducing the number of lost random numbers in the "normal gaming state" and compensating for the decrease, the small jackpot random value accompanying the setting change The increase in the number is also reduced so that the number of lost random numbers in the "normal game state" is reduced and compensated from the decrease, and the increase from the low probability state to the high probability state and the set value change The number of big hit random numbers and the number of small hit random numbers of the increase due to are set within the range of the number of lost random numbers in the "normal gaming state" (that is, 546 or less).

  Therefore, the setting value “3” in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 has a slightly higher jackpot probability than the setting value “2” (low probability state: 0.51% → 0.52%, high probability). Probability state: 5.1% → 5.2%) and the small hitting probability are slightly improved (low probability state: 94.01% → 94.02%, high probability state: 94.1% → 94. 2%), it can be said that the setting is such that the big hit game and the small hit game are more likely to occur than in the case of the set value “2” in any game state.

  Next, when the set value is “4”, the number of the jackpot random number counter C1 (the jackpot random number value) which becomes the big hit in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is the same as the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1. , 53, and the values “0 to 52” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “4” (that is, the “normal game state”) is 53/10000 = 0.53 / similar to the first special symbol. 100 (that is, 0.53%).

  On the other hand, when the set value is “4”, the number of random number values (small jackpot random value) which are the big hits in the high probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is 530 like the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1. The value “0-529” is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “4” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 530 like the first special symbol. /10000=5.3/100 (that is, 5.3%), and the special symbol high-probability state is set to be 10 times bigger than the low-probability state.

  When the set value is “4”, the number of values (small hit random number value) of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes a small hit in the low probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is 9403, and the value is “53”. ９４ 9455 ”is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2. That is, the small hit probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “4” (that is, “normal game state”) is 9403/10000 = 94.03 / 100 (that is, 94.03 / 100). 03%).

  On the other hand, when the set value is “4”, the number of random number values (small hit random number values) that are small hits in the high probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is 9430, and the values “530 to 9959” Is defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the small hit probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “4” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 9430/10000 = 94.3. / 100 (that is, 94.3%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set so as to be about 1.003 times smaller than the low probability state.

  Therefore, when the set value is “4”, the number of random numbers that are lost in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 (loss random value) is the remaining number other than the jackpot random number and the small random number. For 544, the values “9456 to 9999” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. In the case of the high-probability state, the number of random numbers (losing random values) that are lost is the remaining 40 random numbers other than the big hit random number and the small hit random number. It is defined (set) in the two big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the loss probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “4” (that is, the “normal game state” or the “time shortened state”) is 544/10000 = 5.44 / 100. (I.e., 5.44%), and the loss probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol (that is, the "super probability fluctuation state" or the "probability fluctuation state") is 40. /10000=0.4/100 (that is, 0.4%).

  That is, at the set value “4”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of the special map 2 is reduced, and the number of losing random numbers in the “normal game state” having the highest stay ratio in the game is reduced. It is configured to compensate for the decrease. Also, while increasing the number of jackpot random numbers due to the setting change, reducing the number of losing random numbers in the "normal game state" and compensating for the decrease, the small jackpot random value accompanying the setting change is configured. The increase in the number is also reduced so that the number of lost random numbers in the "normal game state" is reduced to compensate for the decrease, and further, the increase from the low probability state to the high probability state and the setting value change Is configured so that the number of large random numbers and the number of small random numbers in the increments within the range are within the range of the number of lost random numbers in the "normal gaming state" (that is, 544 or less).

  Therefore, the set value “4” in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 has a slightly improved jackpot probability compared to the set value “3” (low probability state: 0.52% → 0.53%, high value). Probability state: 5.2% → 5.3%) and the small hit probability is slightly improved (low probability state: 94.02% → 94.03%, high probability state: 94.2% → 94. 3%), it can be said that the setting is such that the big hit game and the small hit game are more likely to occur in any of the game states than in the case of the set value “3”.

  Next, when the set value is “5”, the number of values of the jackpot random number counter C1 (the jackpot random number value) which becomes a jackpot in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is the same as that of the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1. , 54, and the values “0 to 53” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “5” (that is, the “normal game state”) is 54/10000 = 0.54 / like the first special symbol. 100 (that is, 0.54%).

  On the other hand, when the set value is “5”, the number of random number values (small jackpot random value) which are the jackpots in the high probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is 540 like the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1. The value “0 to 539” is defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. In other words, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “5” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 540 like the first special symbol. /10000=5.4/100 (that is, 5.4%), and the special symbol high-probability state is set to be 10 times bigger than the low-probability state.

  When the set value is “5”, the number of values (small hit random value) of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes a small hit in the low probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is 9404, and the value is “54”. ９４9457 ”is defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the small hit probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “5” (that is, “normal game state”) is 9404/10000 = 94.04 / 100 (that is, 94.04 / 100). 04%).

  On the other hand, when the setting value is “5”, the number of random number values (small hit random number values) that are small hits in the high probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is 9440, and the values “540 to 9799” Is defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the small hit probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “5” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 9440/10000 = 94.4. / 100 (that is, 94.4%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set to be about 1.004 times smaller than the low probability state.

  Therefore, when the set value is “5”, the number of random numbers that are lost in the low probability state (losing random value) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is the remaining number other than the jackpot random value and the small random number value. For 542, the values “9458-9999” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. In the case of the high probability state, the number of random numbers (losing random numbers) which are lost is the remaining 20 other than the jackpot random numbers and the small random numbers, and the values “9980 to 9999” are the special figures. It is defined (set) in the two big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the loss probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “5” (that is, “normal game state” or “time shortened state”) is 542/10000 = 5.42 / 100. (I.e., 5.42%), and the loss probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol (that is, the "super probability fluctuation state" or the "probability fluctuation state") is 20. /10000=0.2/100 (that is, 0.2%).

  That is, at the set value “5”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of Tokuju 2 is reduced by the number of loss random numbers in the “normal game state” where the staying rate is the highest in the game, It is configured to compensate for the decrease. Also, while increasing the number of jackpot random numbers due to the setting change, reducing the number of losing random numbers in the "normal game state" and compensating for the decrease, the small jackpot random value accompanying the setting change is configured. The increase in the number is also reduced so that the number of lost random numbers in the "normal game state" is reduced to compensate for the decrease, and further, the increase from the low probability state to the high probability state and the setting value change The number of big hit random numbers and the number of small hit random numbers in the increase due to are within the range of the number of lost random numbers in the "normal gaming state" (that is, 542 or less).

  Therefore, the set value “5” in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 has a slightly larger jackpot probability than the set value “4” (low probability state: 0.53% → 0.54%, high value). Probability state: 5.3% → 5.4%) and small hit probability slightly improved (low probability state: 94.03% → 94.04%, high probability state: 94.3% → 94. 4%), it can be said that the setting is such that the big hit game and the small hit game are more likely to occur in any of the game states than in the case of the set value “4”.

  Next, when the set value is “6”, the number of values (big hit random value) of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes a big hit in the low probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is the same as in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. , 55, and the values “0 to 54” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “6” (that is, the “normal game state”) is 55/10000 = 0.55 / similar to the first special symbol. 100 (that is, 0.55%).

  On the other hand, when the set value is “6”, the number of random number values (small jackpot random value) to be a big hit in the high probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is 550 as in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1. The value “0-549” is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “6” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 550 like the first special symbol. /10000=5.5/100 (that is, 5.5%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set so as to be 10 times larger than the low probability state.

  When the set value is “6”, the number of values (small hit random value) of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes a small hit in the low probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is 9405, and the value is “55”. To 9449 "is defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the small hit probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “6” (that is, the “normal game state”) is 9405/10000 = 94.05 / 100 (that is, 94.05 / 100). 05%).

  On the other hand, when the setting value is “6”, the number of random number values (small hit random number values) that are small hits in the high probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is 9450, and the values “550 to 9999” Is defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the small hit probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “6” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 9450/10000 = 94.5. / 100 (that is, 94.5%), and the special symbol high-probability state is set to be about 1.005 times smaller than the low-probability state.

  Therefore, when the setting value is “6”, the number of random number values (loss random number values) that are lost in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is the number of remaining random numbers other than the jackpot random number value and the small random number value. For 540, the values “9460-9999” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. In the case of the high probability state, the number of random numbers that are lost (loss random number) is the remaining 0 other than the jackpot random number and the small random number, and the special random number table 272a2 stores the lost random number. The corresponding value is not stored, that is, the loss probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “6” (that is, “normal game state” or “time reduction state”) is 540. /10000=5.4/100 (that is, 5.4%), and the second special symbol in the high-probability state (ie, “super-probability state” or “probability-state”). The loss probability of the special symbol is set to be 0/10000 = 0/100 (that is, 0%), so that the loss combination does not appear.

  That is, at the set value “6”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of Tokuju 2 is reduced by the number of loss random numbers in the “normal game state” where the staying rate is the highest in the game, It is configured to compensate for the decrease. Also, while increasing the number of jackpot random numbers due to the setting change, reducing the number of losing random numbers in the "normal game state" and compensating for the decrease, the small jackpot random value accompanying the setting change is configured. The increase in the number is also reduced so that the number of lost random numbers in the "normal game state" is reduced to compensate for the decrease, and further, the increase from the low probability state to the high probability state and the setting value change The number of the big hit random numbers and the number of the small hit random numbers in the increase due to are set within the range of the number of the lost random numbers in the “normal game state” (that is, 540 or less).

  Therefore, the setting value “6” in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 has a slightly larger jackpot probability than the setting value “5” (low probability state: 0.54% → 0.55%, high value). Probability state: 5.4% → 5.5%) and the small hit probability is slightly improved (low probability state: 94.04% → 94.05%, high probability state: 94.4% → 94. 5%), it can be said that the setting is such that the big hitting game and the small hitting game are more likely to occur than the case of the set value “5” in any game state.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the thirty-first embodiment, the big hit random value and the small hit random value that can give a game value are changed (increased) for each set value, and the change (increase) is made. Is compensated from the loss random value. Further, when the increment of the jackpot random number value and the small hit random number value for each set value is increased for each set value by one role (that is, one of the big hit game and the small hit game) (that is, The configuration is such that the rate of increase is lower than in the case of the twenty-eighth embodiment and the thirtieth embodiment. With this configuration, the difference in the setting of the appearance rate of one combination for each set value is reduced, and the game is performed only with the appearance rate of the single combination that gives the game value (that is, the big hit game or the small hit game). This makes it difficult for the user to find the setting, and promotes the operation of the pachinko machine 10.

<Thirty-second embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the thirty-second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  The pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-eighth embodiment is configured to change (increase) the jackpot random value for generating the jackpot game, and to compensate for the change (increase) only from the lost random number value.

  On the other hand, in the case of the pachinko machine 10 of the thirty-second embodiment, when the set value is increased to increase the jackpot random value corresponding to the jackpot game that is most advantageous to the player, first, the role with the lowest game value (that is, If the random number value corresponding to the lowest role becomes insufficient (decreased) as the set value is increased, the role having the next lower game value is compensated from the random number value (ie, the loss random number value) corresponding to the loss role. It is configured to supplement from a random value (ie, a small random number value) corresponding to (ie, a small winning combination). With this configuration, it is possible to compensate for the increase in the jackpot random number value due to the setting change from each random value, so that it is necessary to compensate from one random value (for example, only the lost random value). It is possible to eliminate restrictions at the time of designing game specifications and to increase the increase in the advantage due to the setting change as much as possible. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in game specification design and suppress an increase in the number of development steps, while realizing game specifications with inflection (sharpness) due to the setting difference.

  Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 according to the thirty-second embodiment will be described focusing on differences from the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixteenth to thirty-first embodiments. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the 32nd embodiment, the same reference numerals as those of the 16th to 31st embodiments denote the same configurations and processes as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the 16th embodiment to the 31st embodiment. And its illustration and description are omitted.

  The details of the jackpot random number table 272a corresponding to each special symbol in the thirty-second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 505. FIG. 505 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1 stored in the ROM 272, and FIG. 505 (b) is a special figure 2 jackpot random number table stored in the ROM 272. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of 272a2 typically.

  The special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 and the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 of the thirty-second embodiment have a low probability of a special symbol whose gaming state is “normal gaming state” or “time shortened state” for each set value, respectively. For the low-probability state used in the case of the state (the period that is not the “super-probability-change state” or “probability-change state”) and the height of the special symbol with a higher probability that the gaming state will be a big hit than the low-probability state of the special symbol It is divided into two types, one for the “super-probability state” or the “high-probability state” used in the case of the “probability state”.

  In each of the set values in the predetermined special symbol (the second special symbol in the thirty-second embodiment), the number of the jackpot random numbers is up to the predetermined set value (the set value “3” in the thirty-second embodiment). Only a setting difference is provided, and for a setting value larger than the predetermined setting value (in the thirty-second embodiment, a setting value “4” or more), a setting difference is provided for each of the number of large hit random numbers and the number of small random numbers. On the other hand, for each set value in the other special symbol (in the 32nd embodiment, the first special symbol), a setting difference occurs only in the number of large hit random numbers while the number of small random numbers is the same in all settings. The configuration is as follows.

  Specifically, in the second special symbol, up to the predetermined set value, while increasing only the number of jackpot random values and decreasing only the number of lost random numbers with the increase, With a large set value, the number of small hit random numbers and the number of lost random numbers are decreased with the increase in the number of random hits. Accordingly, the second special symbol is different from the first special symbol in that the increment of the number of jackpot random numbers for each set value and each gaming state is determined by the increase of the number of jackpot random numbers corresponding to the loss up to a predetermined set value. It is configured to compensate from the number, and when the set value is larger than a predetermined set value at which the lost random number value does not exist, the compensation is made from the number of the small random number values corresponding to the small winning combination. In this way, by changing the number of the big hit random numbers and the number of the small hit random numbers for each setting, the probability of the big hit and the small hit is changed for each set value and each game state.

  As shown in FIG. 505 (a), in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1 of the thirty-second embodiment, when the set value is “1”, the jackpot random number which becomes a jackpot in the low probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1 The number of values (big hit random value) of the counter C1 is 50, and the value “0 to 49” is defined (set) in the special drawing 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “1” (that is, the “normal game state”) is 50/10000 = 0.5 / 100 (that is, 0.5). %).

  On the other hand, when the set value is “1”, the number of random number values (big hit random number values) that become big hits in the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 500, and the values “0 to 499” are Are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “1” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 500/10000 = 5/100 ( That is, 5%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set to be 10 times larger than the low probability state.

  When the set value is “1”, the number of random numbers (small hit random value) that are small hits in the low probability state and the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 are both 100 and low. The value “50 to 149” in the case of the probability state or the value “500 to 599” in the case of the high probability state is defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the small hit probability in the first special symbol of the set value “1” is 100/10000 = 1/100 (that is, 1%) in any game state, and the low probability state and the high probability of the special symbol It is set so that the winning probability of the small hit is equal to the state.

  Therefore, when the set value is “1”, the number of random number values (loss random number values) that are lost in the low probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1 is the remaining number other than the jackpot random number value and the small jackpot random value. For 9850, the values “150 to 9999” are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. In the high probability state, the number of random values (losing random values) that result in a loss is 9400 other than the jackpot random value and the small random number value, and the values “600 to 9999” are the special figures. It is defined (set) in the big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the loss probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “1” (that is, “normal game state” or “time shortened state”) is 9850/10000 = 98.5 / 100. (That is, 98.5%), and the loss probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 9400. / 10000 = 94/100 (that is, 94%).

  That is, at the set value “1”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of the special map 1 is reduced, and the number of loss random numbers in the “normal game state” where the stay ratio is the highest in the game is reduced. The number of jackpot random numbers for the increase from the low probability state to the high probability state is within the range of the number of lost random numbers in the “normal game state” (that is, 9850 or less) while being configured to compensate for the decrease. It is configured as follows.

  Next, when the set value is “2”, the number of values (big hit random value) of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes a big hit in the low probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 55, and the value “0 to 54” Are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “2” (that is, the “normal game state”) is 55/10000 = 0.55 / 100 (that is, 0.55). %).

  On the other hand, when the set value is “2”, the number of random number values (small jackpot random value) that become a jackpot in the high probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1 is 520, and the value “0 to 549” is Are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “2” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 550/10000 = 5.5 / It is set to 100 (that is, 5.5%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set to be 10 times larger than the low probability state.

  When the set value is “2”, the number of random numbers (small hit random value) that are small hits in the low probability state and the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is equal to the set value “1”. In the same manner as in the case, the value “55-154” in the case of the low probability state or the value “550-649” in the case of the high probability state is defined in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 (setting). Have been. That is, the small hit probability in the first special symbol of the set value “2” is 100/10000 = 1/100 (that is, 1%) in any game state, and the low probability state and the high probability of the special symbol It is set so that the winning probability of the small hit is equal to the state.

  Therefore, when the set value is “2”, the number of random number values (losing random number values) that are lost in the low probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1 is the remaining number other than the jackpot random number value and the small jackpot random number value. For 9845, the value “155 to 9999” is defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. In the case of the high probability state, the number of random numbers (losing random numbers) that result in a loss is 9350 other than the big hit random number and the small hit random number, and the value “650 to 9999” is a special figure. It is defined (set) in the big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the loss probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “2” (that is, “normal game state” or “time shortened state”) is 9845/10000 = 98.45 / 100. (That is, 98.45%), and the loss probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 9350. /10000=93.5/100 (that is, 93.5%).

  That is, at the set value “2”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of the special figure 1 is reduced, and the number of lost random numbers in the “normal game state” where the staying rate is highest in the game is reduced. The range of the number of lost random numbers in the "normal gaming state" is that the number of jackpot random numbers in the increase from the low-probability state to the high-probability state and the increase due to the change in the set value is configured to compensate for the decrease. (That is, 9848 or less).

  Therefore, although the set value “2” in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a2 has the same small hit probability (1% both) as the set value “1”, the big hit probability is slightly improved (low). (Probability state: 0.5% → 0.55%, high probability state: 5% → 5.5%), which can be said to be a setting in which a jackpot game is more likely to occur than in the case of the set value “1”.

  Next, when the set value is “3”, the number of values (big hit random value) of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes a big hit in the low probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 60, and the value is “0 to 59”. Are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “3” (that is, “normal game state”) is 60/10000 = 0.6 / 100 (that is, 0.6). %).

  On the other hand, when the set value is “3”, the number of random number values (big hit random number values) that become big hits in the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 600, and the values “0 to 599” are Are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “3” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 600/10000 = 6/100 ( That is, 6%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set to be 10 times larger than the low probability state.

  When the set value is “3”, the number of random numbers (small hit random value) that are small hits in the low probability state and the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 are the set value “1” and As in the case of the set value “2”, the number is 100 each, and the value “60-159” in the case of the low probability state or the value “600-699” in the case of the high probability state is stored in the special figure 1 big hit random number table. 272a1. That is, the small hit probability in the first special symbol of the set value “3” is 100/10000 = 1/100 (that is, 1%) in any game state, and the low probability state and the high probability of the special symbol It is set so that the winning probability of the small hit is equal to the state.

  Therefore, when the setting value is “3”, the number of random numbers that are lost in the low probability state (losing random value) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is the remaining number other than the big hit random value and the small hit random value. For 9840, the values “160 to 9999” are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. In the high probability state, the number of random numbers that are lost (loss random numbers) is the remaining 9300 numbers other than the big hit random number and the small hit random number, and the values “700 to 9999” are the special figures. It is defined (set) in the big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the loss probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “3” (ie, the “normal game state” or the “time shortened state”) is 9840/10000 = 98.4 / 100. (That is, 98.4%), and the loss probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 9300. / 10000 = 93/100 (that is, 93%).

  That is, at the setting value “3”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of the special figure 1 is reduced, and the number of loss random numbers in the “normal game state” having the highest staying rate in the game is reduced. The range of the number of lost random numbers in the "normal gaming state" is such that the number of jackpot random numbers in the increase from the low probability state to the high probability state, and the increase due to the change in the set value, while compensating for the decrease (That is, 9846 or less).

  Therefore, although the set value “3” in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a2 is equal to the small value probability (1% both) as compared with the set value “2”, the big hit probability is slightly improved (low). (Probability state: 0.55% → 0.6%, high probability state: 5.5% → 6%), which can be said to be a setting in which a jackpot game is more likely to occur than in the case of the set value “2”.

  Next, when the set value is “4”, the number of values (big hit random value) of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes a big hit in the low probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 65, and the value “0 to 64” Are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “4” (that is, the “normal game state”) is 65/10000 = 0.65 / 100 (that is, 0.65). %).

  On the other hand, when the set value is “4”, the number of random number values (big hit random number values) which are big hits in the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 650, and the values “0 to 649” are Are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “4” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 650/10000 = 6.5 / It is set to 100 (that is, 6.5%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set to be 10 times larger than the low probability state.

  Further, when the set value is “4”, the number of random numbers (small hit random value) which are small hits in the low probability state and the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 are set values “1” to “1”. As in the case of “3”, the value is “100” in both cases, and the value “65 to 164” in the case of the low probability state or the value “650 to 749” in the case of the high probability state is stored in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. Stipulated (set). That is, the small hit probability in the first special symbol of the set value “4” is 100/10000 = 1/100 (that is, 1%) in any game state, and the low probability state and the high probability of the special symbol It is set so that the winning probability of the small hit is equal to the state.

  Accordingly, when the set value is “4”, the number of random numbers that are lost in the low-probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1 (loss random value) is the remaining number other than the jackpot random value and the small random number value. The value “165 to 9999” is defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. In the case of the high-probability state, the number of random numbers (losing random numbers) that are lost is 9250 remaining numbers other than the big hit random number and the small hit random number, and the value “750 to 9999” is a special figure. It is defined (set) in the big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the loss probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “4” (that is, the “normal game state” or the “time shortened state”) is 9835/10000 = 98.35 / 100. (That is, 98.35%), and the loss probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 9250. /10000=92.5/100 (that is, 92.5%).

  That is, at the set value “4”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of Toku-zu 1 is reduced by the number of loss random numbers in the “normal game state” where the staying rate is the highest in the game, The range of the number of lost random numbers in the "normal gaming state" is such that the number of jackpot random numbers in the increase from the low probability state to the high probability state, and the increase due to the change in the set value, while compensating for the decrease (That is, 9844 or less).

  Therefore, although the set value “4” in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a2 has the same small hit probability (1% both) as the set value “3”, the jackpot probability is slightly improved (low). (Probability state: 0.6% → 0.65%, high probability state: 6% → 6.5%), which can be said to be a setting in which a jackpot game is more likely to occur than in the case of the set value “3”.

  Next, when the set value is “5”, the number of values (big hit random value) of the big hit random number counter C1 that becomes a big hit in the low probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 70, and the value is “0 to 69”. Are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “5” (that is, the “normal game state”) is 70/10000 = 0.7 / 100 (that is, 0.7). %).

  On the other hand, when the setting value is “5”, the number of random number values (big hit random number values) that become big hits in the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 700, and the value “0 to 699” is Are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “5” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 700/10000 = 7/100 ( That is, 7%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set to be 10 times larger than the low probability state.

  When the set value is “5”, the number of random numbers (small hit random value) that are small hits in the low probability state and the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is from the set value “1” to As in the case of “4”, the number is 100 each, and the value “70 to 169” in the case of the low probability state or the value “700 to 799” in the case of the high probability state is stored in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. Stipulated (set). That is, the small hit probability in the first special symbol of the set value “5” is 100/10000 = 1/100 (that is, 1%) in any game state, and the low probability state and the high probability of the special symbol It is set so that the winning probability of the small hit is equal to the state.

  Therefore, when the set value is “5”, the number of random numbers that are lost in the low probability state (loss random value) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is the remaining number other than the big hit random value and the small hit random value. The value "170 to 9999" is defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 for 9830 pieces. In the case of the high probability state, the number of random number values (loss random number value) that is lost is 9200 other than the big hit random number value and the small hit random number value, and the value “800 to 9999” is the special figure. It is defined (set) in the big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the loss probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “5” (that is, the “normal game state” or the “time shortened state”) is 9830/10000 = 98.3 / 100. (That is, 98.3%), and the loss probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 9200. / 10000 = 92/100 (that is, 92%).

  That is, at the setting value “5”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of the special figure 1 is reduced, and the number of loss random numbers in the “normal game state” where the staying rate is highest in the game is reduced. The range of the number of lost random numbers in the "normal gaming state" is such that the number of jackpot random numbers in the increase from the low probability state to the high probability state, and the increase due to the change in the set value, while compensating for the decrease (That is, 9842 or less).

  Therefore, although the set value “5” in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a2 has the same small hit probability (1% both) as the set value “4”, the big hit probability is slightly improved (low). (Probability state: 0.65% → 0.7%, high probability state: 6.5% → 7%), which can be said to be a setting in which a jackpot game is more likely to occur than in the case of the set value “4”.

  Next, when the set value is “6”, the number of values (big hit random value) of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes a big hit in the low probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 75, and the value “0 to 74” Are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “6” (that is, the “normal game state”) is 75/10000 = 0.75 / 100 (that is, 0.75). %).

  On the other hand, if the set value is “6”, the number of random number values (big hit random number values) that are big hits in the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is 750, and the values “0 to 749” are Are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “6” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 750/10000 = 7.5 / 100 (that is, 7.5%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set so as to be 10 times larger than the low probability state.

  When the set value is “6”, the number of random numbers (small hit random value) that are small hits in the low probability state and the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is from the set value “1” to As in the case of “5”, the values are both 100, and the value “75 to 174” in the case of the low probability state or the value “750 to 849” in the case of the high probability state is stored in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. Stipulated (set). That is, the small hit probability in the first special symbol of the set value “6” is 100/10000 = 1/100 (that is, 1%) in any game state, and the low probability state and the high probability of the special symbol It is set so that the winning probability of the small hit is equal to the state.

  Therefore, when the set value is “6”, the number of random number values (loss random number value) that is lost in the low probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 is the remaining number other than the big hit random number value and the small hit random number value. The value “175 to 9999” is defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 for 9825 pieces. In the case of the high probability state, the number of lost random numbers (losing random number values) is the remaining 9150 numbers other than the big hit random number value and the small hit random number value. It is defined (set) in the big hit random number table 272a1. That is, the loss probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “6” (that is, the “normal gaming state” or the “time shortening state”) is 9825/10000 = 98.25 / 100. (That is, 98.25%), and the loss probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 9150. /10000=91.5/100 (that is, 91.5%).

  That is, at the set value “6”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of the special map 1 is reduced, and the number of lost random numbers in the “normal game state” where the staying rate is the highest in the game is reduced. The range of the number of lost random numbers in the "normal gaming state" is such that the number of jackpot random numbers in the increase from the low probability state to the high probability state, and the increase due to the change in the set value, while compensating for the decrease (Ie, 9840 or less).

  Therefore, although the set value “6” in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a2 has the same small hit probability (1% both) as compared with the set value “5”, the big hit probability is slightly improved (low). (Probability state: 0.7% → 0.75%, high probability state: 7% → 7.5%), which can be said to be a setting in which a jackpot game is more likely to occur than in the case of the set value “5”.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 505 (b), in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 of the thirty-second embodiment, when the set value is “1”, the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 has a low probability state of a big hit. The number of values of the jackpot random number counter C1 (jackpot random number value) is 50, as in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1, and the value “0-49” is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2. Have been. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “1” (that is, the “normal game state”) is 50/10000 = 0.5 / like the first special symbol. It is set to be 100 (that is, 0.5%).

  When the set value is “1”, the number of random number values (small jackpot random value) which are the jackpots in the high probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is 500 as in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1. The value “0-499” is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the high-probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “1” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 500 as in the case of the first special symbol. / 10000 = 5/100 (that is, 5%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set so as to be 10 times larger than the low probability state.

  Here, when the set value is “1”, the number of random number values (small hit random number values) that are small hits in the low probability state and the high probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 are both 9400 pieces. The value “50 to 9449” for the low probability state or the value “500 to 9899” for the high probability state is defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the small hit probability in the second special symbol of the set value “1” is 9400/10000 = 94/100 (that is, 94%) in any game state, and the low probability state and the high probability of the special symbol It is set so that the winning probability of the small hit is equal to the state.

  Therefore, when the set value is “1”, the number of random number values (loss random number values) that are lost in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is the remaining number other than the jackpot random number value and the small random number value. For 550, the values “9450-9999” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. In the case of the high probability state, the number of random numbers (losing random numbers) that are lost is the remaining 100 other than the jackpot random number and the small random number, and the value “9900 to 9999” is the special figure. It is defined (set) in the two big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the loss probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “1” (that is, “normal game state” or “time shortened state”) is 550/10000 = 5.5 / 100. (I.e., 5.5%), and the loss probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol (that is, "super probability variation state" or "probability variation state") is 100. / 10000 = 1/100 (that is, 1%).

  That is, at the set value “1”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of Tokuju 2 is reduced by the number of lost random numbers in the “normal game state” where the staying rate is the highest in the game, The number of jackpot random numbers for the increase from the low probability state to the high probability state is within the range of the number of lost random numbers in the “normal game state” (that is, 550 or less) while being configured to compensate for the decrease. It is configured as follows.

  As described above, the small hit probability of the second special symbol at the set value “1” is significantly higher than the small hit probability of the first special symbol (1% → 94%), and the loss in the second special symbol is also lost. The number is set to a value that is very easy to select even when compared with the random number value. That is, in the lottery game in the second special symbol, the setting is such that it is easier to win a small hit than a big hit or a loss.

  Next, when the set value is “2”, the number of values (big hit random number values) of the big hit random number counter C1 that becomes a big hit in the low probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is the same as in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. , 55, and the values “0 to 54” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “2” (that is, “normal game state”) is 55/10000 = 0.55 / similar to the first special symbol. 100 (that is, 0.55%).

  When the set value is "2", the number of random number values (small jackpot random value) which are the jackpots in the high probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is 550 like the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1. The value “0-549” is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “2” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 550 like the first special symbol. /10000=5.5/100 (that is, 5.5%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set so as to be 10 times larger than the low probability state.

  Here, when the set value is “2”, the number of random number values (small hit random value) that are small hits in the low probability state and the high probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is the set value “1”. In the same manner as in the case of the above, the number “55 to 9454” in the case of the low probability state or the value “550 to 9949” in the case of the high probability state is defined in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 (setting). ) Has been. That is, the small hit probability in the second special symbol of the set value “2” is 9400/10000 = 94/100 (that is, 94%) in any game state, and the low probability state and the high probability of the special symbol It is set so that the winning probability of the small hit is equal to the state.

  Therefore, when the set value is “2”, the number of random number values (loss random number value) that is lost in the low probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is the remaining number other than the big hit random number value and the small hit random number value. For 545 pieces, the value “9455-9999” is defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. In the case of the high-probability state, the number of random numbers (losing random values) that are lost is the remaining 50 random numbers other than the jackpot random number and the small random number, and the values “9950 to 9999” are the special figures. It is defined (set) in the two big hit random number tables 272a2. That is, the loss probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “2” (that is, the “normal game state” or the “time reduction state”) is 545/10000 = 5.45 / 100. (I.e., 5.45%), and the loss probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol (that is, "super-probability fluctuation state" or "probability fluctuation state") is 50. /10000=0.5/100 (that is, 0.5%).

  That is, at the setting value “2”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of Tokuju 2 is reduced by the number of loss random numbers in the “normal game state” where the staying rate is the highest in the game, The range of the number of lost random numbers in the "normal gaming state" is such that the number of jackpot random numbers in the increase from the low probability state to the high probability state, and the increase due to the change in the set value, while compensating for the decrease (That is, 545 or less).

  Therefore, although the set value “2” in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is equal to the set value “1” (both 94%) and the jackpot probability is slightly improved (low). (Probability state: 0.5% → 0.55%, high probability state: 5% → 5.5%), which can be said to be a setting in which a jackpot game is more likely to occur than in the case of the set value “1”.

  Next, when the set value is “3”, the number of values of the jackpot random number counter C1 (small jackpot random value) which becomes a jackpot in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is the same as that of the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1. , And 60 values thereof are defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “3” (that is, the “normal game state”) is 60/10000 = 0.6 / similar to the first special symbol. 100 (that is, 0.6%).

  On the other hand, when the set value is “3”, the number of random number values (big hit random number values) that are big hits in the high probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is 600, as in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. The value “0-599” is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2. In other words, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “3” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 600 as in the case of the first special symbol. / 10000 = 6/100 (that is, 6%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set to be 10 times larger than the low probability state.

  Here, when the setting value is “3”, the number of random number values (small hit random number values) that are small hits in the low probability state and the high probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is the set value “1”. Similarly to the case of “2”, the number is 9,400, and the value “60 to 9449” in the case of the low probability state or the value “600 to 9999” in the case of the high probability state is the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. Is specified (set). That is, the small hit probability in the second special symbol of the set value “3” is 9400/10000 = 94/100 (that is, 94%) in any game state, and the low probability state and the high probability of the special symbol It is set so that the winning probability of the small hit is equal to the state.

  Therefore, when the set value is “3”, the number of random numbers that are lost in the low-probability state (loss random number value) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is the remaining number other than the jackpot random value and the small random number value. For 540, the values “9460 to 9999” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. In the case of the high probability state, the number of random numbers (losing random numbers) that are lost is the remaining 0 other than the jackpot random number and the small random number, and the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 has the lost random numbers. The corresponding value is not stored. That is, the loss probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “3” (that is, “normal game state” or “time shortened state”) is 540/10000 = 5.4 / 100. (I.e., 5.4%), and the loss probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol (that is, "super-probability variation state" or "probability variation state") is 0. / 10000 = 0/100 (that is, 0%) is set so that the loss combination does not appear.

  That is, at the setting value “3”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of Toku-zu 2 is reduced by the number of loss random numbers in the “normal game state” where the staying rate is the highest in the game, The range of the number of lost random numbers in the "normal gaming state" is such that the number of jackpot random numbers in the increase from the low probability state to the high probability state, and the increase due to the change in the set value, while compensating for the decrease (That is, 540 or less).

  Therefore, although the set value “3” in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is equal to the small value probability (94%) as compared with the set value “2”, the big hit probability is slightly improved (low). (Probability state: 0.55% → 0.6%, high probability state: 5.5% → 6%), which can be said to be a setting in which a jackpot game is more likely to occur than in the case of the set value “2”.

  Next, when the set value is “4”, the number of the jackpot random number counter C1 (the jackpot random number value) which becomes the big hit in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is the same as the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1. , 65, and the values “0 to 64” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “4” (ie, the “normal game state”) is 65/10000 = 0.65 / similar to the first special symbol. 100 (that is, 0.65%).

  On the other hand, when the set value is “4”, the number of random number values (small jackpot random number value) which are the big hits in the high probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is 650 like the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1. The value “0 to 649” is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2. In other words, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “4” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 650 like the first special symbol. /10000=6.5/100 (that is, 6.5%), and the special symbol high-probability state is set to be 10 times bigger than the low-probability state.

  Here, when the set value is “4”, the number of values (small hit random value) of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes a small hit in the low probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is 9400, and the value “ 65-9644 "is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2. That is, the small hit probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “4” (that is, “normal game state”) is 9400 / like the set values “1” to “3”. It is set so that 10000 = 94/100 (that is, 94%).

  On the other hand, when the set value is “4”, the number of random number values (small hit random number values) that are small hits in the high probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is 9350, and the values “650 to 9999” Are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. This is because, in the special symbol 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 at the setting value "4", in the high probability state of the special symbol, there is no value corresponding to the loss random number value, similarly to the setting value "3". Therefore, when the number of jackpot random numbers is increased from the set value “3”, the increment of the number of jackpot random numbers due to the setting change and the probability variation is reduced from the number of small random numbers, not the number of lost random numbers. It is configured to compensate from the number of hit random numbers. That is, the small hit probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “4” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 9350/10000 = 93.5. / 100 (that is, 93.5%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set to be less likely to be a small hit than the low probability state (about 0.995 times).

  Therefore, when the setting value is “4”, the number of random number values (losing random value) that are lost in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is the remaining number other than the jackpot random value and the small random number value. For 535, the value “9465-9999” is defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. In the case of the high probability state, the number of random numbers (losing random number value) which is lost is the remaining 0 other than the jackpot random number value and the small random number value as in the case of the set value “3”. The value corresponding to the lost random number value is not stored in the random number table 272a2. That is, the loss probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “4” (that is, the “normal game state” or the “time shortened state”) is 535/10000 = 5.35 / 100. (I.e., 5.35%), and the loss probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 0. / 10000 = 0/100 (that is, 0%) is set so that the loss combination does not appear.

  That is, at the set value “4”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of the special map 2 is reduced, and the number of lost random numbers in the “normal game state” where the stay rate is the highest in the game is reduced. In addition to the compensation from the decrease, the number that cannot be compensated by the lost random number (that is, 50) is reduced by reducing the number of small hit random numbers, and the compensation is also made from the decrease.

  Therefore, the setting value “4” in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 has a slightly improved jackpot probability compared to the setting value “3” (low probability state: 0.6% → 0.65%, high probability). Probability state: 6% → 6.5%), but the small hit probability decreases in the high probability state of the special symbol (high probability state: 94% → 93.5%. The low probability state is the same as the set value “3”. It can be said that the jackpot game is more likely to occur than in the case of the set value "3", but the small jackpot game is less likely to occur in the high probability state.

  Next, when the set value is “5”, the number of values (small jackpot random value) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that becomes a jackpot in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is the same as in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1. , 70, and the values “0 to 69” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “5” (that is, the “normal game state”) is 70/10000 = 0.7 / like the first special symbol. It is set to be 100 (that is, 0.7%).

  On the other hand, when the set value is “5”, the number of random number values (small jackpot random value) that become a jackpot in the high probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is 700, as in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1. The value “0-699” is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “5” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 700, as in the first special symbol. / 10000 = 7/100 (that is, 7%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set to be 10 times larger than the low probability state.

  Here, when the set value is “5”, the number of values (small hit random value) of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes a small hit in the low probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is 9400, and the value “ 70 to 9469 "are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the small hit probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “5” (that is, the “normal game state”) is 9400 / like the set values “1” to “4”. It is set so that 10000 = 94/100 (that is, 94%).

  On the other hand, when the set value is “5”, the number of random number values (small hit random number values) that are small hits in the high probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is 9300, and the values are “700 to 9999”. Are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. This is because, in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 at the setting value “5”, in the high probability state of the special symbol “4”, there is no value corresponding to the loss random number value in the special pattern high probability state. . Therefore, when the number of jackpot random numbers is increased from the set value “4”, the increment of the jackpot random value due to the setting change and the probability change is determined not by the number of lost random numbers but by the number of small jackpot random values. It is configured to compensate from numerical values. That is, the small hit probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “5” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 9300/10000 = 93/100. (That is, 93%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set so as to be less likely to be a small hit than the low probability state (about 0.989 times).

  Therefore, when the set value is “5”, the number of random number values (loss random number value) that is lost in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is the number of remaining random numbers other than the jackpot random number value and the small random number value. 530 values (9470-9999) are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. In the case of the high probability state, the number of random numbers (losing random numbers) that are lost is the remaining 0 other than the jackpot random numbers and the small random numbers, like the set values “3” and “4”. The value corresponding to the loss random number value is not defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2. That is, the loss probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “5” (that is, the “normal game state” or the “time reduction state”) is 530/10000 = 5.3 / 100. (I.e., 5.3%), and the loss probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol (that is, "super-probability variation state" or "probability variation state") is 0. / 10000 = 0/100 (that is, 0%), so that the loss combination does not appear.

  That is, at the setting value “5”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of Tokuju 2 is reduced by the number of loss random numbers in the “normal game state” where the staying rate is the highest in the game, In addition to the compensation from the decrease, the number that cannot be compensated by the lost random number (that is, 50) is reduced by reducing the number of small hit random numbers, and the compensation is also made from the decrease.

  Therefore, the set value “5” in the special map 2 big hit random number table 272a2 has a slightly larger jackpot probability than the set value “4” (low probability state: 0.65% → 0.7%, high probability). Probability state: 6.5% → 7%, but small hit probability decreases in high probability state of special symbol (high probability state: 93.5% → 93%. Low probability state is the same as set value “4”). It can be said that the jackpot game is more likely to occur than in the case of the set value “4”, but the small jackpot game is less likely to occur in the high probability state.

  Next, when the set value is “6”, the number of values (big hit random value) of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes a big hit in the low probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is the same as in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1. , 75, and the values “0 to 74” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “6” (that is, the “normal game state”) is 75/10000 = 0.75 / similar to the first special symbol. 100 (that is, 0.75%).

  On the other hand, when the set value is “6”, the number of random number values (small jackpot random value) that are the jackpots in the high probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is 750 like the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 272a1. The value “0 to 749” is defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. In other words, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “6” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 750 like the first special symbol. /10000=7.5/100 (that is, 7.5%), and the special symbol high-probability state is set to be 10 times bigger than the low-probability state.

  Here, when the set value is “6”, the number of values (small hit random value) of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes a small hit in the low probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is 9400, and the value “ 75 to 9474 are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. That is, the small hit probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “6” (that is, “normal game state”) is 9400 / like the set values “1” to “5”. It is set so that 10000 = 94/100 (that is, 94%).

  On the other hand, when the set value is “6”, the number of random hit values (small hit random value) in the high probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 is 9250, and the value is “750 to 9999”. Are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. This is because, in the special pattern 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 at the setting value "6", in the high probability state of the special symbol "5", there is no value corresponding to the loss random number value in the special pattern high probability state. . Therefore, when the number of jackpot random numbers is increased from the set value “5”, the increment of the jackpot random value due to the setting change and the probability variation is determined not from the number of lost random numbers but the number of small jackpot random values. It is configured to compensate from numerical values. That is, the small hit probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “6” (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 9250/10000 = 92.5. / 100 (that is, 92.5%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set to be less likely to be a small hit than the low probability state (about 0.984 times).

  Therefore, when the set value is “6”, the number of random numbers that are lost in the low probability state (loss random number value) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2 is the remaining number other than the jackpot random number value and the small jackpot random value. For 525, the values “9475-9999” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2. In the case of the high probability state, the number of random numbers (losing random numbers) that are lost is the same as the set values “3” to “5”, with the remaining 0 other than the big hit random number and the small hit random number, The value corresponding to the loss random number value is not defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 272a2. That is, the loss probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “6” (that is, “normal game state” or “time shortened state”) is 525/10000 = 5.25 / 100. (That is, 5.25%), and the loss probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol (that is, “super-probability variation state” or “probability variation state”) is 0. / 10000 = 0/100 (that is, 0%) is set so that the loss combination does not appear.

  That is, at the set value “6”, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of the special figure 2 is reduced, and the number of loss random numbers in the “normal game state” where the stay ratio is the highest in the game is reduced. In addition to the compensation from the decrease, the number that cannot be compensated by the lost random number (that is, 50) is reduced by reducing the number of small hit random numbers, and the compensation is also made from the decrease.

  Therefore, the set value “6” in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2 has a slightly larger jackpot probability than the set value “5” (low probability state: 0.7% → 0.75%, high probability). Probability state: 7% → 7.5%, but small hit probability decreases in high probability state of special symbol (high probability state: 93% → 92.5%. Low probability state is the same as set value “5”). It can be said that the jackpot game is more likely to occur than in the case of the set value “5”, but the small jackpot game is less likely to occur in the high probability state.

  As described above, in the case of the pachinko machine 10 of the thirty-second embodiment, when the set value is increased to increase the number of jackpot random numbers corresponding to the jackpot game that is most advantageous to the player, If the number of random numbers corresponding to the lower hand (ie, the lost hand) is compensated from the number of random numbers (ie, the lost random number) corresponding to the lower hand and the number of the random numbers corresponding to the lowest hand becomes insufficient as the set value is increased (if the number becomes smaller) ), It is configured to compensate from the number of random numbers (that is, small random number values) corresponding to the next lowest winning combination (that is, small winning combination). With this configuration, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers due to the setting change can be compensated for from the number of each random value, so that the number of random numbers of one (for example, only the lost random number only) can be reduced. It is possible to eliminate restrictions on design of the game specification, such as the need to compensate, and to increase the advantage due to the setting change as much as possible. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in game specification design and suppress an increase in the number of development steps, while realizing game specifications with inflection (sharpness) due to the setting difference.

  Further, in the high probability state of the second special symbol, when the set value is “3” to “6”, the loss combination does not appear. In other words, in the second lottery game in the second special symbol, the loss combination does not appear, so that it is possible to suggest to the player that the pachinko machine 10 has a high setting. Therefore, it becomes easy for the player to set and suggest only in a specific game state (ie, a high probability state) in a specific special symbol (ie, a second special symbol), and how the lottery game by the special symbol is performed in the above-mentioned gaming state. As a result, a game property of whether or not a setting suggestion opportunity is obtained is created, a variety of games can be enriched, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  As described above, the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and it is easily understood that various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be inferred. For example, in each embodiment, a part or a plurality of parts of the configuration of another embodiment is added to the embodiment or replaced with a part or a plurality of parts of the configuration of the embodiment, and the like. The embodiment may be modified to be configured. Further, the numerical values given in the above embodiment are merely examples, and other numerical values can of course be adopted.

<Modification 1>
In each of the above embodiments, the case has been described in which the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are calculated, recorded, and output to the inspection device 300, but instead of the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio, or In addition to the object ratio and the continuous accessory ratio, information indicating the game performance of the pachinko machine 10, such as a base value, the number of balls sucked in with respect to 100 balls hit (= 100−base value), and a jackpot. The average number of outs, etc., until it becomes, may be calculated, recorded, and output to the inspection device 300.

<Modification 2>
In each of the above embodiments, the case where the counter is provided in the first reading memory 263 and the number of winning balls is counted for each winning opening has been described. Alternatively, the number of balls paid out by winning may be counted. In the sixteenth embodiment, when the timing of calculating the accessory ratio comes, based on the number of balls paid out by winning, for each winning opening, counted by the first reading memory 263. The object ratio and the continuous accessory ratio may be calculated and accumulated and recorded in the second reading memory 264. Further, in the seventeenth embodiment, when the timing for calculating the accessory ratio is reached, and when the timing for calculating the accessory ratio is reached, the winning for each winning opening counted by the first reading memory 263 is performed. May be accumulated in the second reading memory 264 and recorded. In this case, when the number of winning balls for 0.5 seconds for each winning opening is stored in the buffer 262, the CPU 261 responds to the number of winning balls for each winning opening. By multiplying the number of prize balls of the winning opening to calculate the number of balls paid out by the prize in 0.5 seconds, the calculated number of paid out balls is stored in the first reading memory 263. The number of balls paid out by winning may be counted for each winning opening by adding to the winning opening counter. When the MPU 201 detects that there is a winning in one winning opening, the MPU 201 writes information indicating the winning opening in the buffer 262, and the CPU 261 causes the buffer 262 to receive the winning. When the information indicating the mouth is written, the number of balls to be paid out by winning the winning opening is added to the counter of the corresponding winning opening provided in the first reading memory 263, so that for each winning opening, The number of balls paid out by winning may be counted. Further, the MPU 201 counts the number of balls paid out by winning at the winning opening every 0.5 seconds (or at every predetermined time) and stores the number in the buffer 262. When the writing to the buffer 262 is performed, the CPU 261 determines, for each winning opening, the number of balls paid out in the winning opening for 0.5 seconds by the winning in the buffer 262 for the first winning opening. By adding to the counter of the corresponding winning opening provided in the reading memory 263, the number of balls paid out by winning may be counted for each winning opening. When the MPU 201 detects that there is a winning in one winning opening, the MPU 201 stores the number of balls paid out by the winning in an area corresponding to the winning opening in the buffer 262 in the buffer 262. In the CPU 261, when writing to the buffer 262 is performed, the number of the paid-out balls is stored in the counter of the first reading memory 263 corresponding to the winning opening in which the number of the paid-out balls is stored. By adding the number of balls, the number of balls paid out by winning may be counted for each winning port. As described above, even if the number of balls paid out by winning is counted for each winning opening by the counter provided in the first reading memory 263, the number of balls paid out by winning is counted out by each winning opening. Since the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio can be calculated from the number of the performed balls, it is possible to detect a fraud by analyzing the calculated accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio. When the number of balls paid out by winning is stored in the buffer 262 by the MPU 201, the prize ball number table 202e need not be transmitted to the accessory ratio management chip 207. Can be calculated from the number of balls paid out by winning in the winning opening for each winning opening stored in. Further, in order to calculate the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio in the inspection device 300, the number of balls paid out by winning, counted for each winning opening, may be transmitted to the inspection device 300. . In this case, even if the contents of the award ball count table 202e are not transmitted to the inspection device 300, the inspection device 300 can calculate the gate ratio and the continuous accessory ratio.

<Modification 3>
In the above-described sixteenth embodiment, the case where the accessory ratio data 264a and the continuous accessory ratio data 264b are recorded in the second reading memory 264 and transmitted to the inspection device 300 has been described. The recording may be performed in the second reading memory 264 and transmitted to the inspection device 300, or only the continuous accessory ratio data 264b may be recorded in the second reading memory 264 and transmitted to the inspection device 300. It may be. The inspection device 300 can analyze the improper behavior by analyzing the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio transmitted from the accessory ratio management chip 207.

<Modification 4>
In the above embodiments, the case where the first reading memory 263 is configured by a volatile memory has been described. However, the first reading memory 263 is configured by a nonvolatile memory (for example, a flash memory, an FeRAM, an MRAM, a ReRAM, and the like). May be done. Further, the backup voltage may be supplied from the power supply device 115 to the first reading memory 263 even when the power is turned off. In this case, in the process of S711 (see FIG. 386) executed by the CPU 261 when power is supplied to the accessory ratio management chip 207, the initialization of the first reading memory 263 may not be executed. As a result, the respective counters 263a to 263f and the respective data 263g to 263j stored in the first reading memory 263 can be maintained even while the power is turned off. Therefore, when the power to the accessory ratio management chip 207 is cut off, the latest second reading memory 264 can be used before the power is cut off without executing the accessory ratio calculation process or the winning information storing process. In the second reading, the ratio of the role and the like is calculated without losing the prize to each winning opening during the time when it is determined that the power is cut off from the timing (trigger) when the recording is performed. It can be recorded in the memory 264. Therefore, in this case, the capacitor 267 may not be necessary.

<Modification 5>
In each of the above embodiments, the case where the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, the inspection result output process is executed, and the case where the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 is output has been described. In addition, information stored in the first reading memory 263 may be output. Since the information stored in the first reading memory 263 has not yet reached the timing (trigger) for recording in the second reading memory 264, the information on the character ratio and the continuous character ratio recorded in the second reading memory 264 has not been reached. The information is not used for calculation, or is not recorded in the second reading memory 264. Therefore, by transmitting the information stored in the first reading memory 263 to the inspection device 300, the inspection device 300 can be analyzed using the latest information.

  In the sixteenth embodiment, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio calculated by the accessory ratio management chip 207 are transmitted to the inspection device 300 as information recorded in the second reading memory 264. However, the information stored in the first reading memory 263 is also transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300, so that the information is a short-term information, but the total number of the balls that have won each winning opening, that is, the ratio of the bonus and the continuous bonus. Raw information before calculating the ratio can be grasped by the inspection device 300. Therefore, the analysis in the inspection device 300 can be performed deeper and more accurately.

  In addition, as a modification of the sixteenth embodiment, as the information recorded in the second reading memory 264, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio calculated by the accessory ratio management chip 207 are transmitted to the inspection device 300. When the information stored in the first reading memory 263 is also transmitted to the inspection device 300, the prize ball number table 202e may be further transmitted to the inspection device 300. Accordingly, the inspection device 300 calculates the latest accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio from the total number of winning balls for each winning opening transmitted from the first reading memory 263 using the award ball number table 202e. And analyze it. Note that the calculated bonus ratio and continuous bonus ratio are determined to be awarded to each winning opening in a short period of time before the timing indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b. Since it is calculated based on the total number of spheres, the calculated accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are not always accurate values, but can be used for the analysis of the inspection device 300 as reference values. .

  Further, when the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, the CPU 261 calculates the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio based on the information stored in the first reading memory 263, and calculates the calculated accessory. The ratio and the continuous accessory ratio may be output to the inspection device 300 together with the information recorded in the second reading memory 264. Accordingly, the inspection device 300 can easily analyze the misconduct using the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio output from the accessory ratio management chip 207. In this case, the information stored in the first reading memory 263 may be output to the inspection device 300 together. This allows the inspection device 300 to perform a deeper analysis using the information on the latest winning. Also in this case, the prize ball number table 202e may be transmitted to the inspection device 300. This allows the inspection apparatus 300 to perform a deeper analysis with reference to the award ball count table 202e.

<Modification 6>
In each of the above embodiments, in the accessory ratio management chip 207, the volatile first reading memory 263 and the nonvolatile second reading memory 264 are provided, and the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is used. Until the indicated timing (trigger) is reached, the information set in the buffer 262 by the MPU 201 is temporarily stored in the first reading memory 263 while being accumulated. Based on the information stored in 263, the main character ratio and the continuous main character ratio are calculated and recorded in the second reading memory 264, or accumulated and stored in the first reading memory 263 until the timing. The case where various types of information are recorded in the second reading memory 264 has been described. On the other hand, in the accessory ratio management chip 207, a nonvolatile memory provided with at least a first reading area serving as the first reading memory 263 and a second reading area serving as the second reading memory 264. The information set in the buffer 262 by the MPU 201 is temporarily stored in the first reading area until the timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is reached. And, when the timing is reached, based on the information temporarily stored in the first reading area, calculate the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio and record them in the second reading area, or Various kinds of information accumulated and stored in the first reading area may be recorded in the second reading area until the timing comes. As a result, the number of components of the memory can be reduced, so that an increase in the cost of the accessory ratio management chip 207 can be suppressed.

<Variation 7>
In each of the above-described embodiments, the MPU 201 counts the number of balls winning each prize port in 0.5 seconds for each prize port, and counts the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path. The number of balls counted for each winning opening, the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path, and information on the playing state at that time are stored in the buffer 262 of the accessory ratio management chip 207 every 0.5 seconds. Each time the setting is performed, the number of balls winning for each winning opening set in the buffer 262, the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path, and the game state The case where the information is accumulated and stored in the first reading memory 263 has been described. On the other hand, in the MPU 201, the winning of the first starting port 64a was detected by the output of the first starting port switch 208a in the timer interrupt processing executed every 2 milliseconds based on the outputs of the various switches. In this case, the first buffer 262a is turned on. When the winning of the second starting port 64b is detected by the output of the second starting port switch 208b, the first buffer 262b is turned on and the first normal winning port switch 208c is turned on. When the winning of the first ordinary winning opening 63a is detected by the output, the first buffer 262c is turned on, and when the winning of the second ordinary winning opening 63b is detected by the output of the second ordinary winning opening switch 208d. The second buffer 262d is turned on, and when the winning of the special winning opening 65a is detected by the output of the special winning opening switch 208e, the special winning opening buffer 262e is turned off. When a ball guided to the ball discharge path is detected by the out switch 208f, the out buffer 262f is turned on, and the corresponding big hit buffer 262g, open buffer 262h, After turning on the buffer 262i during the error, an interrupt signal may be transmitted to the accessory ratio management chip 207. Then, in the accessory ratio management chip 207, in the setting information receiving process executed in response to the interrupt signal, if the first buffer 262a is turned on, the first counter 263a is counted up by one, and the first buffer 262b is turned on. When it is on, the first counter 263b is counted up by one, when the first buffer 262c is turned on, the first counter 263c is counted up by one, and when the second buffer 262d is turned on, the second counter 263b is turned on. The counter 263d is counted up by one. When the special winning opening buffer 262e is turned on, the special winning opening counter 263e is counted up by one. When the out buffer 262f is turned on, the out counter 263f is counted up by one. And if the jackpot buffer 262g is on, If the opening buffer 262h is ON, the information on the opening of the door is added to the opening data 263h together with the current time in the opening buffer 262h. When the error buffer 262i is on, the error information is added to the error data 263i together with the time at that time and stored, and the time when the setting information receiving process is being executed is in the middle of the night. In this case, the out-of-hours information may be added to the out-of-hours data 263j together with the time at that time and stored. This eliminates the need for the MPU 201 to count the number of balls winning each winning opening in 0.5 seconds or the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path, so that the processing load on the MPU 201 increases. Can be suppressed. Therefore, much of the processing capacity of the MPU 201 can be assigned to the main control of the game that should be performed by the MPU 201.

<Modification 8>
Also, in this case, the first starting port switch 208a, the second starting port switch 208b, the first normal winning port switch 208c, the second normal winning port switch 208d, the big winning port switch 208e, and the out switch 208f are controlled by the role ratio management. The information may be directly input to the chip 207. Then, in the accessory ratio management chip 207, the first starting port switch 208a, the second starting port switch 208b, the first normal winning port switch 208c, the second normal winning port switch 208d, the big winning port switch 208e, and the out switch 208f. Of the first starting opening 64a, the second starting opening 64b, the first ordinary winning opening 63a, the second ordinary winning opening 63b, the presence or absence of a winning in the large winning opening 65a, and the ball guided to the ball discharge path. If there is a prize, the counters 263a to 264e of the first reading memory 263 corresponding to the start port where the prize is won are counted up by one, and there is no ball guided to the ball discharge path. In such a case, the out counter 263f may be configured to count up by one. Thus, when a prize is won in the winning opening or when a ball is guided to the ball discharge path, the situation can be immediately reflected on the accessory ratio management chip 207. In addition, the door opening switch 208g is directly input to the accessory ratio management chip 207, and based on the output of the door opening switch 208g, the presence or absence of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is determined by the accessory ratio management chip 207. When the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened, the opening / closing information is added to the opening data 263h together with the time indicated by the RTC 266 at that time, and stored. The management chip 207 may be configured. Thus, when the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened, the situation can be immediately reflected on the accessory ratio management chip 207.

<Modification 9>
In each of the above-described embodiments, the number-of-balls winning in each winning opening until the timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is determined by the accessory ratio management chip 207 as the first number. The counting is performed by each of the counters 263a to 264e of the reading memory 263, and the number of balls discharged to the ball discharge path until the timing (trigger) is reached is counted by the out counter 263f of the first reading memory 263. As described above, the first reading memory 263 stores the first buffer 262a, the second buffer 262b, the first buffer 262c, the second buffer 262d, and the special winning opening buffer 262e set by the MPU 201 every 0.5 seconds. , The value of the out buffer 262f (ie, the number of balls for each winning port winning in 0.5 seconds, and 0.5 seconds The number of balls which are guided to the ball discharge passage) in between, together with the time at that indicated by RTC266, may be stored sequentially. Then, when the timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b comes, the main character ratio and the continuous main character ratio are calculated from the respective values stored in the first reading memory 263. It is calculated and recorded in the second reading memory 264, or the total number of the balls that have won the winning opening until the timing is calculated for each winning, and the ball is discharged to the ball discharge path until the timing. The total number of balls may be calculated and these may be recorded in the second reading memory 264. Also by transmitting the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 to the inspection device 300, the inspection device 300 determines whether there is a possibility that an improper act has been performed from the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio. can do. Then, in this case, when transmitting the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 to the inspection device 300, the information stored in the first reading memory 263, that is, each prize port winning in 0.5 seconds. The number of balls for each, the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path during 0.5 seconds, and the time associated with the number of the balls (that is, the number of the balls is the first reading memory (Time stored in H.263) may be transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300. By this, information such as how many balls are won in which winning opening at which time at every extremely short time of 0.5 seconds, and how many balls are at what time at every extremely short time of 0.5 seconds The inspection apparatus 300 can grasp detailed information such as whether the ball has been guided to the ball discharge path (ie, whether the ball has been fired into the game area). Therefore, the analysis in the inspection apparatus 300 can be performed more deeply and accurately.

  In addition, as a modification of the sixteenth embodiment, as the information recorded in the second reading memory 264, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio calculated by the accessory ratio management chip 207 are transmitted to the inspection device 300. When the information stored in the first reading memory 263 is also transmitted to the inspection device 300, the prize ball number table 202e may be further transmitted to the inspection device 300. Thereby, the inspection device 300 calculates the total number of winning balls for each winning opening from the number of winning balls for each winning opening every 0.5 seconds transmitted from the first reading memory 263, Using the prize ball number table 202e, the latest accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio can be calculated and analyzed. Note that the calculated bonus ratio and continuous bonus ratio are determined to be awarded to each winning opening in a short period of time before the timing indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b. Since it is calculated based on the total number of spheres, the calculated accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are not always accurate values, but can be used for the analysis of the inspection device 300 as reference values. .

<Variation 10>
In addition, the first reading memory 263 stores, in the first reading memory 263, the number of balls for each winning opening in 0.5 seconds, the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path in 0.5 seconds, and When the time associated with the number of balls (that is, the time when the number of balls is stored in the first reading memory 263) is stored, the time is indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b. When the timing (trigger) is reached, the information stored in the first reading memory 263 may be recorded in the second reading memory 264. Then, the inspection device 300 stores the number of balls for each winning port that has won a prize in 0.5 seconds and the ball discharge path in 0.5 seconds recorded in the second reading memory 264. The number of guided balls and the time associated with the number of the balls are transmitted, and the prize ball number table 202e set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a is transmitted to the inspection device 300. It may be. In this way, the inspection apparatus 300 calculates the total number of winning balls for each winning opening for each predetermined section from the number of winning balls for each winning opening every 0.5 seconds, and then calculates the winning ball count table. By calculating the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio in each predetermined section using 202e, it is possible to analyze the possibility of an improper act from the change in the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio. In addition, when there is a change in the ratio of the role and the ratio of the continuous role in which the misconduct is suspected, the inspection device 300 sets the number of balls for each winning port in 0.5 seconds, and 0. Detailed information related to the game, such as the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path in 5 seconds and the time associated with the number of the balls, is input. The cause of the change of the ratio of the articles and the ratio of the continuous characters can be searched in detail.

<Modification 11>
Also, the first reading memory 263 is not provided, and the first buffer 262a, the second buffer 262b, the first buffer 262c, the second buffer 262d, the special winning opening buffer 262e, and the out buffer set by the MPU 201 every 0.5 seconds. Each value of 262f (that is, the number of balls for each winning opening winning in 0.5 seconds and the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path in 0.5 seconds) is indicated by RTC 266. The time may be recorded directly in the second reading memory 264 sequentially in synchronization with the time at which the reading is performed. In this case, the information on the game state set in the big hit buffer 262g, the open buffer 262h, and the error buffer 262i every 0.5 seconds also matches the game state of the second reading memory 264 together with the time indicated by the RTC 266. If the setting from the MPU 201 to the buffer 262 has been performed in the midnight time zone, the out-of-hours information may be recorded together with the time indicated by the RTC 266, and the gaming state data 264d may be recorded. May be recorded. This eliminates the need for the first reading memory 263, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the accessory ratio management chip 207.

<Modification 12>
Also, in the MPU 201, when a winning of the first starting port 64a is detected by the output of the first starting port switch 208a in the timer interrupt processing executed every 2 milliseconds based on the output of various switches. Turns on the first buffer 262a, turns on the first buffer 262b when the winning of the second starting port 64b is detected by the output of the second starting port switch 208b, and turns on the output of the first normal winning port switch 208c. When a winning in the first ordinary winning opening 63a is detected, the first buffer 262c is turned on, and when a winning in the second ordinary winning opening 63b is detected by the output of the second ordinary winning opening switch 208d, the second ordinary 262 is turned on. The buffer 262d is turned on, and when the winning of the special winning opening 65a is detected by the output of the special winning opening switch 208e, the special winning opening buffer 262e is turned on. When the out buffer 262f is turned on when a ball guided to the ball discharge path is detected by the out switch 208f, the MPU 201 sets the value in the first reading memory 263 every 2 milliseconds. Values of the first buffer 262a, the first buffer 262b, the first buffer 262c, the second buffer 262d, the special winning opening buffer 262e, and the out buffer 262f (that is, information indicating the presence or absence of a winning for two milliseconds in each winning opening). , And information indicating the presence or absence of a ball guided to the ball discharge path for 2 milliseconds) may be sequentially stored in synchronization with the time indicated by the RTC 266. Then, when the timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b comes, based on the respective values stored in the first reading memory 263, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory The ratio is calculated and recorded in the second reading memory 264, or the total number of balls that have won the winning opening until the timing is calculated for each winning, and the ball is discharged to the ball discharge path until the timing. The total number of balls performed may be calculated, and these may be recorded in the second reading memory 264. Also by transmitting the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 to the inspection device 300, the inspection device 300 determines whether there is a possibility that an improper act has been performed from the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio. can do. Then, in this case, when transmitting the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 to the inspection device 300, the information stored in the first reading memory 263, that is, the presence or absence of a prize for 2 milliseconds in each prize port is determined. And the information indicating the presence or absence of the ball guided to the ball discharge path for 2 milliseconds, and the time associated with the information (that is, the time when the information is stored in the first reading memory 263). The time may be transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300 together with the time. As a result, information such as which winning port has been won at which time at an extremely short time interval of 2 milliseconds, and at which time the ball has been guided to the ball discharge path at an extremely short time interval of 2 milliseconds (that is, a game) The inspection apparatus 300 can grasp detailed information such as whether the object has been fired to the area). Therefore, the analysis in the inspection apparatus 300 can be performed more deeply and accurately.

<Modification 13>
Also, in the MPU 201, when a winning of the first starting port 64a is detected by the output of the first starting port switch 208a in the timer interrupt processing executed every 2 milliseconds based on the output of various switches. Turns on the first buffer 262a, turns on the first buffer 262b when the winning of the second starting port 64b is detected by the output of the second starting port switch 208b, and turns on the output of the first normal winning port switch 208c. When a winning in the first ordinary winning opening 63a is detected, the first buffer 262c is turned on, and when a winning in the second ordinary winning opening 63b is detected by the output of the second ordinary winning opening switch 208d, the second ordinary 262 is turned on. The buffer 262d is turned on, and when the winning of the special winning opening 65a is detected by the output of the special winning opening switch 208e, the special winning opening buffer 262e is turned on. When the out switch 262f is turned on when a ball guided to the ball discharge path is detected by the out switch 208f, the first reading memory 263 stores each buffer 262a corresponding to each winning opening. When the out buffer 262f is turned on, there is a ball guided to the ball discharge path when there is a buffer turned on among the buffers 262e to 262e, and when the out buffer 262f is turned on. May be sequentially stored together with the time indicated by the RTC 266. Then, when the timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b comes, based on each information stored in the first reading memory 263, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory The ratio is calculated and recorded in the second reading memory 264, or the total number of balls that have won the winning opening until the timing is calculated for each winning, and the ball is discharged to the ball discharge path until the timing. The total number of balls performed may be calculated, and these may be recorded in the second reading memory 264. Also by transmitting the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 to the inspection device 300, the inspection device 300 determines whether there is a possibility that an improper act has been performed from the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio. can do. Then, in this case, when transmitting the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 to the inspection device 300, the information stored in the first reading memory 263, that is, the presence or absence of a prize for 2 milliseconds in each prize port is determined. And the information indicating the presence or absence of the ball guided to the ball discharge path for 2 milliseconds, and the time associated with the information (that is, the time when the information is stored in the first reading memory 263). The time may be transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300 together with the time. As a result, the inspection device 300 can grasp information such as information on which winning opening has been won at which time, and information on which time has been guided to the ball discharge path (that is, whether the game has been launched into the game area). Become like Therefore, the analysis in the inspection apparatus 300 can be performed more deeply and accurately.

  In addition, as a modification of the sixteenth embodiment, as the information recorded in the second reading memory 264, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio calculated by the accessory ratio management chip 207 are transmitted to the inspection device 300. When the information stored in the first reading memory 263 is also transmitted to the inspection device 300, the prize ball number table 202e may be further transmitted to the inspection device 300. Thus, the inspection apparatus 300 calculates the total number of winning balls for each winning opening from the information indicating the presence or absence of a winning ball in each winning opening every 2 milliseconds transmitted from the first reading memory 263. With the use of the prize ball number table 202e, the latest accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio can be calculated and analyzed. Note that the calculated bonus ratio and continuous bonus ratio are determined to be awarded to each winning opening in a short period of time before the timing indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b. Since it is calculated based on the total number of spheres, the calculated accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are not always accurate values, but can be used for the analysis of the inspection device 300 as reference values. .

<Modification 14>
In addition, the first reading memory 263 stores information indicating presence or absence of a prize for 2 milliseconds at each winning opening, information indicating presence or absence of a ball guided to a ball discharge path for 2 milliseconds, and the information. When storing the attached time (that is, the time when the information is stored in the first reading memory 263), the timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b and When this happens, the information stored in the first reading memory 263 may be recorded in the second reading memory 264. Then, the inspection device 300 has information recorded in the second reading memory 264 indicating the presence or absence of a prize for two milliseconds at each winning opening, and the presence or absence of a ball guided to the ball discharge path for two milliseconds. May be transmitted together with the time associated with the information, and the prize ball number table 202e set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a may be transmitted to the inspection device 300. Thus, the inspection apparatus 300 calculates the total number of winning balls for each winning opening for each predetermined section from the information indicating the presence or absence of a winning ball in each winning opening every 2 milliseconds, and then calculates the winning balls. By calculating the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio in each predetermined section using the number table 202e, it is possible to analyze the possibility of fraud from the change in the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio. In addition, when there is a change in the ratio of the character and the continuous character in which the misconduct is suspected, the inspection device 300 includes information indicating the presence or absence of a prize in each prize port for two milliseconds, and a ball for two milliseconds. Information indicating the presence or absence of a ball guided to the discharge path and detailed information related to the game, such as the time associated with the information, have been input. The cause of the change in the product ratio can be investigated in detail.

<Modification 15>
The first reading memory 263 also includes information indicating a winning opening having a prize, information indicating that a ball has been guided to the ball discharge path, and time associated with the information (that is, When the information (time when the information is stored in the first reading memory 263) is stored, the first time (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is used. The information stored in the reading memory 263 may be recorded in the second reading memory 264. Then, the inspection device 300 stores the information indicating the winning opening where the prize was recorded, the information indicating that there was a ball guided to the ball discharge path, and the information indicating the winning prize port recorded in the second reading memory 264. The time associated with the information may be transmitted, and the prize ball number table 202e set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a may be transmitted to the inspection device 300. In this way, the inspection device 300 calculates the total number of winning balls for each winning opening for each predetermined section from the information indicating the winning opening where the winning is achieved, and then uses the winning ball count table 202e to calculate the total number of winning balls for each winning opening. By calculating the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio in the predetermined section, it is possible to analyze the possibility of an injustice from the change in the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio. In addition, when there is a change in the ratio of the role and the ratio of the continuous role in which the misconduct is suspected, the inspection device 300 has information indicating the winning opening where the winning has occurred, and the ball guided to the ball discharge path. And detailed information related to the game, such as the time associated with the information, are input. You can explore in detail.

<Modification 16>
In addition, the first reading memory 263 is not provided, and the first buffer 262a, the second buffer 262b, the first buffer 262c, the second buffer 262d, the winning port buffer 262e, and the out buffer 262f set by the MPU 201 every 2 milliseconds. (Ie, information indicating the presence or absence of a prize for 2 milliseconds at each winning opening and information indicating the presence or absence of a ball guided to the ball discharge path for 2 milliseconds) at the time indicated by the RTC 266. In addition, the information may be directly recorded in the second reading memory 264 sequentially. In this case, the game state information set in the big hit buffer 262g, the open buffer 262h, and the error buffer 262i every 2 milliseconds is also combined with the time indicated by the RTC 266, and the game state data in the second reading memory 264 is also stored. 264d, and when the setting of the buffer 262 from the MPU 201 is performed in the late night time zone, the out-of-hours information is added to the game state data 264d together with the time indicated by the RTC 266. It may be recorded. This eliminates the need for the first reading memory 263, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the accessory ratio management chip 207.

<Modification 17>
In each of the above embodiments, the area where information is recorded in the second reading memory 264 (for example, in the sixteenth embodiment, the accessory ratio data 264a, the continuous accessory ratio data 264b, the number of shot balls data 264c, and the game state data 264d) In the seventeenth embodiment, the checksum value in the number-of-launched-balls data 264c, the game state data 264d, and the winning counter data 264e is calculated and stored in the second reading memory 264. When transmitting the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 to the inspection apparatus 300, the checksum value may be transmitted together. When the inspection device 300 receives the information recorded in the second reading memory 264, it calculates a checksum value from the received information and compares it with the checksum value transmitted from the accessory ratio management chip 207. If they match, the received information may be determined to be correct and analysis may be performed. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the analysis performed by the inspection device 300 based on the erroneous information.

<Modification 18>
In each of the above embodiments, when the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, an interrupt signal is generated, and the CPU 261 executes an inspection result output process based on the interrupt signal, and manages The case where the information recorded in the chip 207 is output to the inspection device 300 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Based on a command transmitted from the inspection device 300 connected to the inspection terminal 207a. Alternatively, the information recorded in the accessory ratio management chip 207 may be output to the inspection device 300. Thus, if the inspection device 300 transmits a command to the accessory ratio management chip 207 after being able to receive information transmitted from the accessory ratio management chip 207, the inspection device 300 The information transmitted from the physical ratio management chip 207 can be reliably received.

<Modification 19>
In each of the above embodiments, when the CPU 261 is executing the accessory ratio calculation process (the sixteenth embodiment) or the winning information storage process (the seventeenth embodiment), the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a and the splitting is performed. When the interrupt signal is generated, the execution of the inspection result output process corresponding to the interrupt signal is suspended while the bonus ratio calculation process or the winning information storage process is being executed, and the bonus ratio calculation process or the winning information is performed. After the storage processing is completed, the execution of the inspection result output may be started. As a result, during the execution of the accessory ratio calculation process or the winning information storage process, the inspection result output process is executed, and strange information that is being written to the second reading memory 264 is transmitted to the inspection device 300. It can be suppressed that such a situation occurs.

<Modification 20>
In the above embodiments, the case where the winning information and the like are transmitted in one direction from the MPU 201 to the accessory ratio management chip 207 in the main control device 110 has been described, but the MPU 201 outputs the information output from the accessory ratio management chip 207. And perform some processing based on the information. For example, when the operation of the accessory ratio management chip 207 stops, or when an error occurs in the processing of the accessory ratio management chip 207, the information is transmitted from the accessory ratio management chip 207 to the MPU 201. Then, based on the information, the MPU 201 informs the user by the display on the first symbol display device 37, the lighting / flashing of the lamp, the output by voice, the display on the third symbol display device 81, and the like. It may be controlled. Thereby, the person in charge of the hall can know the abnormality of the accessory ratio management chip 207, and can take some measures. In addition, the MPU 201, based on information that indicates that the operation of the accessory ratio management chip 207 has stopped, or information that indicates that an error has occurred in processing in the accessory ratio management chip 207, The accessory ratio management chip 207 may be reset. Thereby, the abnormality of the accessory ratio management chip 207 can be automatically eliminated, and the accessory ratio management chip 207 can be operated again.

<Modification 21>
Also, in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixteenth embodiment, when the accessory ratio calculated by the accessory ratio management chip 207 is received by the MPU 201 and the accessory ratio is higher than the first predetermined ratio, the pachinko machine The MPU 201 may control the device 10 to perform the first predetermined notification. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixteenth embodiment, the case where the continuous accessory ratio calculated by the accessory ratio management chip 207 is received by the MPU 201 and the continuous accessory ratio is higher than the second predetermined ratio. The MPU 201 may control the pachinko machine 10 to perform the second predetermined notification. Also, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventeenth embodiment, the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio is appropriately calculated from the information stored in the first reading memory 263 or the second reading memory 264 and transmitted to the MPU 201. The MPU 201 may perform the above-described comparison and notification based on the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio received from the accessory ratio management chip 207. As the first predetermined notification or the second predetermined notification, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 may be displayed in a predetermined color, or a predetermined number may be displayed on the 7-segment display 37b. In addition, as the first predetermined notification and the second predetermined notification, a command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 so as to turn on or blink a predetermined lamp in a predetermined method or to output a predetermined sound. Alternatively, a command may be transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 so that a predetermined symbol or character is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the display control device is transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the command. A command may be further transmitted to 114. In addition, as the first predetermined notification and the second predetermined notification, the hall computer 600 provided in the hall where the pachinko machine 10 is installed is provided with a first predetermined notification via a relay board (not shown). May be transmitted, or information indicating that the continuous accessory ratio is higher than a second predetermined ratio may be transmitted. By these notifications, the pachinko machine 10 can directly inform the person in charge of the hall of an abnormality in the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, it is possible to easily find the pachinko machine 10 in which there is a possibility that the pachinko machine 10 has been tampered with. Further, by performing such notification, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts.

<Variation 22>
In each of the above embodiments, the accessory ratio management chip 207 determines whether the calculated accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio is higher than a first predetermined ratio or a second predetermined ratio. The determination result may be output to the MPU 201. Then, the MPU 201 may be controlled to perform the first predetermined notification or the second predetermined notification based on the determination result received from the accessory ratio management chip 207. Further, the accessory ratio management chip 207 itself may execute a control for performing the first predetermined notification or the second predetermined notification based on the determination result. For example, LEDs for performing these notifications are connected to the accessory ratio management chip 207, and when the accessory ratio management chip 207 performs the first predetermined notification or the second predetermined notification, the LEDs are drive-controlled. May be. Further, the accessory ratio management chip 207 may directly control the first symbol display device 37 to display the LED 37a in a predetermined color or to display a predetermined number on the 7-segment display 37b. Further, a command for performing the first predetermined notification or the second predetermined notification is directly transmitted from the accessory ratio management chip 207 to the sound lamp control device 113, and the command is sent to the sound lamp control device 113. Based on the above, control may be performed such that a predetermined lamp is turned on or blinked, a predetermined sound is output, or a predetermined display is performed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, the information indicating that the accessory ratio is higher than the first predetermined ratio, or the continuous accessory ratio is higher than the second predetermined ratio, to the hall computer 600 directly from the accessory ratio management chip 207. You may make it transmit the information which shows that it is high. This also allows the pachinko machine 10 to directly notify the hall-related persons of the abnormality of the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, it is possible to easily find the pachinko machine 10 in which there is a possibility that the pachinko machine 10 has been tampered with. Further, by performing such notification, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts.

<Modification 23>
In the seventeenth embodiment, when the accessory ratio management chip 207 transmits the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 to the inspection device 300, the prize balls set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a are also set. The case where the information of the number table 202e is transmitted to the inspection device 300 has been described. On the other hand, the accessory ratio management chip 207 sends the prize ball number table 202e to the MPU 201 in response to the output of the inspection device 300 to the inspection terminal 207a or based on a control signal from the inspection device 300. May be transmitted, and the bonus ratio management chip 207 may transmit the prize ball number table 202 e transmitted by the MPU 201 to the inspection device 300 in response to the request. Further, the inspection device 300 outputs a signal requesting the transmission of the award ball count table 202 e directly to the MPU 201, and the MPU 201 receives the request signal and directly transmits the award ball count table 202 e to the inspection device 300. You may make it. Further, after the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is set to be turned on. You may make it. Thus, the accessory ratio management chip 207 can eliminate the award ball number data setting area 265a, and can reduce the number of registers.

<Modification 24>
Further, main controller 110 may not transmit prize ball number table 202e to inspection device 300, and the setting of the number of prize balls for inspection device 300 may be performed manually. This eliminates the need for the main control device 110 to perform control for transmitting the prize ball count table 202e, so that it is possible to suppress the program of the MPU 201 and the program of the accessory ratio management chip 207 from becoming complicated.

<Modification 25>
In the above-described sixteenth embodiment, the case where the award ball number table 202e is not transmitted to the inspection device 300 has been described. However, the pachinko machine 10 of the sixteenth embodiment also transmits the award ball number table 202e to the inspection device 300. Good. Thus, the inspection device 300 can analyze whether there is a possibility of an improper act due to a change in the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio while referring to the award ball count table 202e.

<Modification 26>
In each of the above embodiments, an output register (buffer) for temporarily storing information transmitted from the second reading memory 264 to the inspection device 300 may be provided between the second reading memory 264 and the inspection terminal 207a. Good. Thus, even when the reading speed of the information read from the second reading memory 264 is different from the transmission speed for transmitting the information to the accessory ratio management chip 207, the second reading memory 264 can transmit the information via the output register. The information can be easily transmitted from the two reading memory 264 to the inspection device 300.

<Modification 27>
In each of the above embodiments, the case where the power-off is detected and the information on the accessory ratio and the like is recorded in the second reading memory 264 based on the information stored in the first reading memory 263 is described. explained. On the other hand, by configuring the first reading memory 263 as a non-volatile memory or supplying a backup voltage to the first reading memory 263, the first reading memory 263 can be stored even when the power is turned off. It may be configured such that when power is supplied, information on the ratio of the accessory and the like is recorded in the second reading memory 264 based on the information stored in the first reading memory 263. In this way, the ratio of the bonus and the consecutive bonus can be calculated without omission for the number of prize balls paid out before the power is turned off after being recorded in the second reading memory 264. . In addition, since recording to the second reading memory 264 is performed when the power is turned on, it is possible to suppress a possibility that the power is completely cut off during recording to the second reading memory 264.

<Modification 28>
In each of the above embodiments, when it is detected that the power is cut off, the information on the accessory ratio and the like is automatically stored under the control of the CPU 261 based on the information stored in the first reading memory 263. The case of recording in the reading memory 264 has been described. On the other hand, in the trigger information data 202 f, based on the information stored in the first reading memory 263, as a timing (trigger) for recording information about the accessory ratio and the like in the second reading memory 264, “power off” or "Power supply" may be defined. Then, when the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is “power off”, when it is detected that the power is turned off, based on the information stored in the first reading memory 263, , The information on the ratio of the accessory and the like is recorded in the second reading memory 264, and when the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is "power supply", the first reading is performed when the power is supplied. Based on the information stored in the memory 263, information about the accessory ratio and the like may be recorded in the second reading memory 264. As a result, according to the setting of the trigger information data 202f in the MPU 201, the power supply is cut off from recording the information on the accessory ratio and the like in the second reading memory 264 based on the information stored in the first reading memory 263. Or when power is supplied. If “power supply” can be defined as the trigger information data 202f, the first reading memory 263 may be configured as a non-volatile memory, or the first reading memory 263 may be supplied with a backup voltage to supply the first reading memory 263 with a backup voltage. The reading memory 263 may be configured to be able to save the data even when the power is turned off.

<Modification 29>
In each of the above embodiments, the trigger information data 202f is based on the information stored in the first reading memory 263, and the timing (trigger) for recording the information about the accessory ratio and the like in the second reading memory 264 is “number of shots”. , "Time" and "game time" have been described. On the other hand, the “power supply time” may be defined in the trigger information data 202f. When the information indicating the “power supply time” is defined in the trigger information data 202f, the information indicating the “predetermined time” which is the timing for recording the information about the accessory ratio and the like in the second reading memory 264 is also defined. You may. For example, if the trigger information data 202f defines information indicating "power supply time" and information indicating 4 hours as the "predetermined time", the accessory ratio management chip 207 sets the trigger setting area 265b in the trigger setting area 265b. At the stage when the trigger information data 202f is set, the time indicated by the RTC 266 is acquired, and the acquired time is stored in the memory as “power supply time measurement start time”. It is determined from the difference from the “power supply time measurement start time” whether four hours have elapsed since the power was supplied, and when four hours have elapsed, the accessory ratio management chip 207 stores the information in the first reading memory 263. Based on the information thus obtained, information relating to the accessory ratio and the like may be recorded in the second reading memory 264. Then, the time at which the recording was performed is obtained from the RTC 266, and the time is stored in the memory as a new “power supply time measurement start time”. Thereafter, the time indicated by the RTC 266 and the “power supply time measurement From the difference with the “start time”, it may be determined whether four hours have elapsed. By defining the trigger (timing) for calculating the accessory ratio by the power supply time, even if the pachinko machine 10 does not play a lot of games, the power supply time has passed and the predetermined time has elapsed. It is possible to calculate the object ratio and the continuous accessory ratio. Therefore, the inspection device 300 can be surely analyzed for the presence or absence of a fraudulent act based on the surely calculated accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio.

<Modification 30>
In the seventeenth embodiment, the information recorded in the winning counter data 264e of the second reading memory 264 indicating the total number of balls won in each winning opening at each timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f. Is transmitted to the inspection device 300 together with the prize ball number table 202e. On the other hand, when information indicating the total number of balls won in each winning opening at each timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f is transmitted to the inspection device 300, the information based on each timing is used. Then, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio at each timing may be calculated, and the information indicating the calculated accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio may be transmitted to the inspection device 300 together. Alternatively, when performing transmission to the inspection device 300, instead of the information indicating the total number of winning balls in each winning opening stored in the second reading memory 264, the accessory ratio and the continuous winning combination are based on the information. The object ratio may be calculated, and the calculated accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio may be transmitted to the inspection device 300. Thus, the inspection device 300 does not need to calculate the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio, and the analysis by the inspection device 300 can be facilitated. Further, when calculating the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio in the inspection device 300, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio may be calculated based on the prize ball number table set incorrectly or incorrectly. However, if the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are calculated in the accessory ratio management chip 207, the number of award balls in the award ball number data setting area 265a set by the startup process executed by the MPU 201 when the power is turned on. By using the table 202e, there is no possibility that the prize ball number table 202e is tampered with illegally, and it is possible to accurately calculate the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio.

<Modification 31>
Further, without being limited to the seventeenth embodiment, information indicating the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio is not stored in the second reading memory 264, and information necessary for calculating at least one of them is stored in the second reading memory 264. When stored in the second reading memory 264, the CPU 261 calculates the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio from the information stored in the second reading memory 264 when transmitting to the inspection device 300. The calculated accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio may be output to the inspection apparatus 300 together with or instead of the information stored in the second reading memory 264. Thus, the inspection device 300 does not need to calculate the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio, and the analysis by the inspection device 300 can be facilitated. Further, when calculating the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio in the inspection device 300, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio may be calculated based on the prize ball number table set incorrectly or incorrectly. However, if the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are calculated in the accessory ratio management chip 207, the number of award balls in the award ball number data setting area 265a set by the startup process executed by the MPU 201 when the power is turned on. By using the table 202e, there is no possibility that the prize ball number table 202e is tampered with illegally, and it is possible to accurately calculate the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio. In addition, if the calculated accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are output to the inspection device 300 together with the information stored in the second reading memory 264, the inspection device 300 will output the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio. When it is determined that there is a suspicious point, the cause can be searched for based on the information stored in the second reading memory 264. In addition, in the inspection device 300, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are calculated based on the information stored in the second reading memory 264, and the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio output from the accessory ratio management chip 207 are calculated. By judging whether or not they match, it is possible to judge whether any wrongdoing has been performed.

<Modification 32>
In each of the above embodiments, the out switch 208f for detecting the ball guided to the ball discharge path is provided, and the number of times the ball is detected by the out switch 208f is counted, whereby the number of balls fired to the game area is counted. Has been described, but various methods may be used as a method of counting the number of balls fired into the game area. For example, an out port switch for detecting a ball passing through the out port 66 is provided, and the number of balls passing through the out port 66 detected by the out port switch and the first start detected by the first start port switch 208a. The number of balls passing through the mouth 64a, the number of balls passing through the second starting port 64b detected by the second starting port switch 208b, and the first normal winning port 63a detected by the first normal winning port switch 208c. The number of balls passing through the second normal winning opening switch 208d, the number of balls passing through the second normal winning opening 63b detected by the second normal winning opening switch 208d, and the number of balls passing through the large winning opening 65a detected by the large winning opening switch 208e. The number of balls fired into the game area may be calculated by summing the numbers of the balls. Also, a supply ball detection switch for detecting a ball supplied to the ball firing unit 112a, and a foul ball for detecting a ball fired by the ball firing unit 112a and discharged from the ball guide passage as a foul ball without reaching the game area. A ball fired into the game area is provided by a counter that is provided with a detection switch and counts up by one each time a ball is detected by the supply ball detection switch and counts down by one each time a ball is detected by the foul ball detection switch. May be counted. In addition, instead of the supply ball detection switch, a firing ball detection switch for detecting a ball fired by the ball firing unit 112a is provided, and each time a ball is detected by the firing ball detection switch, the count is incremented by one, and a foul ball detection is performed. The number of balls fired into the game area may be counted by a counter that counts down by one each time a ball is detected by the switch. Further, a game ball detection switch is provided on the return ball prevention member 68 provided at the tip of the inner rail 61, and the game ball detection switch detects a ball guided from the ball guide passage to the game area, and detects a game ball. By providing a counter that counts up by one each time a ball is detected by the switch, the number of balls fired into the game area may be counted.

<Modification 33>
In each of the above embodiments, the CPU 261 is provided in the accessory ratio management chip 207, and information on the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio is recorded in the second reading memory 264 based on software executed by the CPU 261. The case of transmitting to 300 has been described. On the other hand, some or all of the functions of the accessory ratio management chip 207 may be configured by wired logic. With the configuration using wired logic, it is possible to manage information relating to the accessory ratio at high speed.

<Modification 34>
In each of the above-described embodiments, the case has been described in which the accessory ratio management chip 207 is provided in the main control device 110, the information on the accessory ratio is recorded by the accessory ratio management chip 207, and transmitted to the inspection device 300. On the other hand, a non-volatile memory is connected to the MPU 201, the MPU 201 records information about the accessory ratio in the non-volatile memory, and transmits the information recorded in the non-volatile memory by the MPU 201 to the inspection device 300. Control may be performed. As a result, the MPU 201 uses the information on the winning of the ball in each winning opening detected by the MPU 201 and the information on the ball guided to the ball discharging path by itself without transferring the information to another chip, and obtains the information on the accessory ratio by itself. Since it can be managed, it is less susceptible to the influence of noise, and it is possible to more accurately manage information on the accessory ratio.

<Modification 35>
Further, the accessory ratio management chip 207 may be provided separately from the main control device 110 so that the accessory ratio management chip 207 and the main control device 110 are connected. In this case, the accessory ratio management chip 207 may be stored in the same substrate box 100 as the main control device 110, or may be stored in a substrate box different from the substrate box 100 in which the main control device 110 is stored. Good. When the accessory ratio management chip 207 is stored in a board box different from the main control device 110, the accessory ratio management chip 207 may be stored in a board box dedicated to the accessory ratio management chip 207, or other control may be performed. The accessory ratio management chip 207 may be stored in any one of the substrate boxes 101 to 104 in which devices and the like are stored.

<Modification 36>
The accessory ratio management chip 207 may be connected to the payout control device 111, or the accessory ratio management chip 207 may be provided in the payout control device 111. Then, the accessory ratio management chip 207 may record information on the accessory ratio based on a signal from the payout control device 111 and transmit the information to the inspection device 300. In this case, the main control device 110 instructs the payout control device 111 to obtain information on the prize for each prize port (for example, for each prize port, a ball having a prize for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds)). (Information indicating the number) may be transmitted, and the information may be stored in the buffer 262 of the accessory ratio management chip 207. Further, in the prize ball command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the payout control device 111, together with the number of prize balls (the number of balls to be paid out), it is determined which prize port the prize ball is associated with. The information indicating the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball command is set in the buffer 262 based on the prize ball command in the area corresponding to the winning opening where the prize has been won. By adding the winning prize ball number to the counter of the corresponding winning opening provided in the first reading memory 263, the counter displays, for each winning opening, the number of balls paid out by winning the corresponding winning opening. The number may be counted. Further, instead of the accessory ratio management chip 207, the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 may realize the function of the accessory ratio management chip 207. According to these, the information relating to the accessory ratio can be recorded in the accessory ratio management chip 207 or the payout control device 111 and transmitted to the inspection device 300. In these cases, in the main control device 110, the information of the award ball count table 202e and the information of the trigger information data 202f are changed to the main control device 110 by the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 when the power is turned on. May be transmitted to the payout control device 111 by a command. Thus, using the information stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, the payout control device 111 can manage the accessory ratio and the like.

<Modification 37>
Further, the accessory ratio management chip 207 may be connected to the audio lamp control device 113, or the accessory ratio management chip 207 may be provided in the audio lamp control device 113. Then, the accessory ratio management chip 207 may record information on the accessory ratio based on a signal from the audio lamp control device 113 and transmit the information to the inspection device 300. In this case, the main controller 110 instructs the sound lamp controller 113 to obtain information on winning for each winning opening (for example, a ball having a winning for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) for each winning opening). May be transmitted, and the information may be stored in the buffer 262 of the accessory ratio management chip 207. Further, instead of the accessory ratio management chip 207, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 may realize the function of the accessory ratio management chip 207. With these, the information relating to the accessory ratio can be recorded in the accessory ratio management chip 207 or the sound lamp control device 113 and transmitted to the inspection device 300. In addition, by managing the accessory ratio by the accessory ratio management chip 207 or the sound lamp control device 113, the calculated symbol ratio, the continuous character ratio, and the like are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 so as to be displayed. A command may be transmitted to the control device 114. The display on the third symbol display device 81 makes it possible for a person in the hall to easily find the pachinko machine 10 in which the ratio of the accessory and the ratio of the continuous accessory are wrong, or to suppress a wrongdoer from performing an illegal act. it can. In addition, when the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio calculated by the accessory ratio management chip 207 or the audio lamp control device 113 is in a predetermined state (for example, a state in which an improper act is suspected), the audio output device 226 outputs a predetermined value. In order for the audio lamp control device 113 to perform control to output the notification sound of, or to turn on and blink the lamp display device 227 in a predetermined mode, and to display a predetermined display on the third symbol display device 81, A command may be transmitted to the display control device 114. Thereby, the person in the hall can easily find the pachinko machine 10 suspected of wrongdoing, and can suppress the wrongdoer from performing wrongdoing. In these cases, in the main control device 110, the information of the prize ball number table 202e and the information of the trigger information data 202f are changed to the main control device by the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 when the power is turned on. It may be transmitted from the 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 by a command. Thus, using the information stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 can manage the ratio of the accessory and the like.

<Modification 38>
The accessory ratio management chip 207 may be connected to the display control device 114, or the accessory ratio management chip 207 may be provided in the display control device 114. Then, the accessory ratio management chip 207 may record information on the accessory ratio based on the signal from the display control device 114 and transmit the information to the inspection device 300. In this case, the main control device 110 sends information (for example, a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 second) for each winning opening to the display control device 114 to the display control device 114 via the audio lamp controlling device 113). Information indicating the number of balls having a prize in between) may be transmitted, and the information may be stored in the buffer 262 of the accessory ratio management chip 207. Further, instead of the accessory ratio management chip 207, the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 may realize the function of the accessory ratio management chip 207. Also according to these, information on the accessory ratio can be recorded by the accessory ratio management chip 207 or the display control device 114 and transmitted to the inspection device 300. Also, by controlling the accessory ratio by the accessory ratio management chip 207 or the display control device 114, the control for displaying the calculated accessory ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, and the like on the third symbol display device 81 is performed by the display control. The device 114 may do so. The display on the third symbol display device 81 makes it possible for a person in the hall to easily find the pachinko machine 10 in which the ratio of the accessory and the ratio of the continuous accessory are wrong, or to suppress a wrongdoer from performing an illegal act. it can. In addition, when the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio calculated by the accessory ratio management chip 207 or the display control device 114 is in a predetermined state (for example, a state in which a wrongdoing is suspected), a predetermined display is displayed. The display control device 114 may perform control for displaying on the display device 81. Thereby, the person in the hall can easily find the pachinko machine 10 suspected of wrongdoing, and can suppress the wrongdoer from performing wrongdoing. In these cases, in the main control device 110, the information of the prize ball number table 202e and the information of the trigger information data 202f are changed to the main control device by the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 when the power is turned on. It may be transmitted by a command from 110 to the display control device 114 via the audio lamp control device 113. Thus, using the information stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, the display control device 114 can manage the accessory ratio and the like.

<Modification 39>
In each of the above embodiments, on the board on which the main control device 110 is provided, or connected to the accessory ratio management chip 207, or mounted with the accessory ratio management chip 207, or A display device having a plurality of 7-segment displays provided on a substrate provided with a control device realizing the function is provided, and the display device relates to the accessory ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, the accessory ratio, and the continuous accessory ratio. Information or information indicating a game performance (for example, a base value or the like) may be displayed. The display device may be configured by a liquid crystal display having a predetermined number of pixels, an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display, or the like, instead of the 7-segment display. The display device is connected to a substrate on which the main control device 110 is provided, or connected to the accessory ratio management chip 207, or mounted with the accessory ratio management chip 207, or functions of the accessory ratio management chip 207. Is not provided on the board provided with the control device that realizes the above, but is connected to the board provided with the main control device 110 or the accessory ratio management chip 207, or mounted with the accessory ratio management chip 207. Alternatively, it may be provided by being connected to a board on which a control device that realizes the function of the accessory ratio management chip 207 is provided. The display device may be assembled so that the display screen of the display device can be seen when viewing the back side of the pachinko machine 10, or the display screen of the display device can be seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. It may be assembled as follows.

<Modification 40>
The information on the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio displayed on the display device may be, for example, information indicating, for each winning opening, the total number of balls paid out by winning, or to all winning openings. And the total number of balls paid out by winning a prize to the winning opening (in this embodiment, the second starting opening 64b and the big winning opening 65a) in which the accessory operates. It may be information indicating the total number of balls paid out by winning a winning opening (in the present embodiment, a winning opening 65a) in which objects continuously operate. Further, information indicating the total number of balls fired in the game area (the number of fired balls) may be included in the information on the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio displayed on the display device. The display device is configured by a liquid crystal display having a predetermined number of pixels, an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display, or the like, instead of the 7-segment display, to which the ratio of the accessory and the ratio of the continuous accessory, or Information related to the physical ratio and the continuous character ratio may be displayed.

<Modification 41>
The information relating to the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio, the information about the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio, or the information indicating the game performance displayed on the display device is recorded in the second reading memory 264 in the nearest vicinity. At the timing (trigger), the information may be the information itself recorded in the second reading memory 264 or the information generated from the information. In addition, at the timing (trigger) at which recording was performed on the plurality of second reading memories 264 including the latest one, the recording was performed on the second reading memory 264 itself, or the timing was recorded on the second reading memory 264 at each timing. The information generated from the information may be displayed on the display device as an accessory ratio, a continuous accessory ratio, information relating to the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio, or information indicating a game performance. In addition, at the timing (trigger) at which recording was performed on the plurality of second reading memories 264 including the latest, the information recorded on the second reading memory 264 or all the timings (triggers) recorded on the second reading memory 264 were obtained. ) From the information, the average value of the information relating to the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio, the information relating to the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio, or the information indicating the game performance, and displaying the average value on the display device. You may. Further, not only the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 but also the information stored in the first reading memory 263 is reflected, and the Related information or information indicating game performance may be generated and displayed on the display device.

  As a result, by looking at the display device, it is possible that an unauthorized act has been performed based on the information on the accessory ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, the information on the accessory ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, or the information indicating the game performance. Can be determined. The display device may simultaneously display any one of an accessory ratio, a continuous accessory, information relating to the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio, and information indicating game performance, or may be displayed one by one. May be. In addition, any of the accessory ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, the information related to the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio, and the information indicating the game performance may be alternately displayed at predetermined time intervals. When the information is displayed alternately, information indicating what is displayed may be displayed together. Further, when the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio displayed on the display device or the other information exceeds a predetermined ratio (for example, when the accessory ratio exceeds 70%, If it exceeds 60%), the displayed accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio and other information may be displayed in a color different from the normal color or blinking. Further, in the display device, a predetermined period of time (for example, a predetermined time such as 30 seconds) from when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on or until the start-up process is completed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is completed. Period, such as a period until a predetermined process is completed), information relating to the accessory ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio, or information indicating the game performance. May be displayed. Thereby, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the person related to the hall checks the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio displayed on the display device, and also checks information related to the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio. This makes it possible to easily confirm whether or not there has been any wrongdoing. Further, in the display device, when it is determined that the power of the pachinko machine 10 has been turned off, information relating to the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio, information relating to the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio, or game performance is displayed. Information may be displayed. Thereby, the person in the hall can easily confirm whether or not there has been any wrongdoing by checking the ratio of the accessory and the ratio of the continuous accessory displayed on the display device when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. . In addition, when it is determined that the power of the pachinko machine 10 has been cut off, information relating to the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio to the display device, information relating to the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio, or information indicating game performance is displayed. The display may be a predetermined period (for example, a predetermined time such as 10 seconds) or a period until the processing related to power-off by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 ends (for example, until the processing of S705 ends). , Or a period until the predetermined process is completed). In addition, when it is determined that the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, information relating to the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio to the display device, information relating to the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio, or information indicating the game performance is Alternatively, it may be performed using power from a backup power supply, a secondary battery, a large-capacity capacitor, or the like. Further, the display device may be housed in a substrate box. Thereby, it is possible to suppress an act of displaying an incorrect value on the display device.

<Modification 42>
Further, a button for displaying information relating to the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio, information relating to the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio, or information indicating the game performance was provided on the display device, and the button was operated. In this case, the display device may display an accessory ratio, a continuous accessory ratio, information relating to the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio, or information indicating game performance. As a result, only when the accessory ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, and other information are confirmed, by operating the button, information relating to the accessory ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, the accessory ratio, and the continuous accessory ratio can be obtained. Alternatively, information indicating game performance can be displayed on the display device, so that wasteful consumption of power in the display device can be suppressed. In addition, the operation of the button is valid only when the game is in a non-executing state in the pachinko machine 10, and the display device displays on the display device information related to the accessory ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, the accessory ratio, and the continuous accessory ratio, Alternatively, information indicating game performance may be displayed. The pachinko machine 10 determines that the game is not being executed, for example, when the detection of the ball guided to the ball discharge path by the out switch 208f is not detected for a predetermined time or more, or when the operation handle 51 is rotated. This may be performed when the ball has not been fired, when the ball is not fired by the ball firing unit 112a, or when the ball guided to the game area is not detected. Thereby, while playing the game, the information displayed on the display device can be viewed, and it can be suppressed that the wrongdoer tries to do something wrong.

<Modification 43>
The operation of the button may be valid only when the button is operated in combination with another button. By this, a fraudster who does not know the effective combination of button operations can display information related to the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio, information related to the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio, or information indicating game performance. It can be prevented from being easily displayed on the device. In addition, while operating a button for displaying the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio, information related to the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio, or information indicating the game performance on the display device, the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Only when is inserted, the information relating to the accessory ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio, or the information indicating the game performance may be displayed on the display device. Accordingly, when the person in charge of the hall turns on the power of the pachinko machine 10, by operating the buttons together, the ratio of the role and the ratio of the continuous role displayed on the display device, the ratio of the role and the sequence of the role of the role, and the like. By confirming the information related to the physical ratio or the information indicating the game performance, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not there has been any fraudulent activity during the previous business day or outside the business hours at night. Further, while operating a button for displaying the accessory ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, the information relating to the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio, or the information indicating the game performance on the display device, the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is operated. Only when it is cut off, information relating to the accessory ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, the accessory ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, or the information indicating the game performance may be displayed on the display device. Thus, when the person in charge of the hall turns off the power of the pachinko machine 10, by operating the buttons together, the ratio of the role and the ratio of the continuous role, the ratio of the role and the sequence of the role, and the like are displayed on the display device. By confirming the information related to the physical ratio or the information indicating the game performance, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not there has been any wrongdoing before or during today's business. The display of the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio on the display device by the operation of the button, the information related to the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio, or the information indicating the game performance ends based on the elapse of a predetermined period. Alternatively, the process may end when the button is operated again. In addition, only during the period in which the operation of the button is continuously performed, the information relating to the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio, the information relating to the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio, or the information indicating the game performance is displayed. Is also good.

<Modification 44>
If the button is operated and the display device displays the accessory ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, information relating to the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio, or information indicating game performance, the pachinko machine is used. The ten game modes may be set to the check mode, and the main control of the game in the main control device 110 may be temporarily stopped. As a result, as the game progresses, the information on the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio displayed on the display device, the information related to the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio, or the information indicating the game performance changes. This makes it possible to suppress the difficulty in checking the ratio of the accessory and the like. In this case, the main control device 110 sets the game mode of the pachinko machine 10 to the check mode, and temporarily stops the main control of the game, at the stage where the sound lamp control device 113 (and the display control device 114) A command for notifying the transition to the check mode may be transmitted. Then, when the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 receive a command notifying the transition to the check mode, for example, a predetermined image corresponding to the check mode (for example, a black screen) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. ) Is displayed, the fluctuation effect being executed is continuously changed at a high speed during the check mode, the sound output from the sound output device 226 is set to a predetermined sound corresponding to the check mode, or a sound corresponding to the high-speed change is output. May be output. Thereby, it is possible to indicate to the player that the pachinko machine 10 has entered the check mode. Further, the main control device 110 releases the check mode as the game mode of the pachinko machine 10 and, at the stage of restarting the main control of the game, sets the check mode to the sound lamp control device 113 (and the display control device 114). A command for notifying the cancellation may be transmitted. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 return the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 to those before the transition to the check mode. Can be.

<Modification 45>
Further, in the modified examples described so far, when a button operation is performed, the display device provided on the substrate such as the main control device 110 displays the accessory ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, the accessory ratio, and the continuous accessory ratio. Although the case where related information or information indicating game performance is displayed has been described, in addition to or instead of this, when a button operation is performed, the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device is displayed. 81, information related to the accessory ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, the information on the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio, or the information indicating the game performance may be displayed on the lamp display device 227 or the like, or audio output may be performed. The device 226 may output the accessory ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, or some notification sound indicating the game performance. Also in this case, the above-described modification may be appropriately applied in connection with the button operation.

<Modification 46>
Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, the case has been described in which the information related to the accessory ratio is transmitted to the inspection device 300 when the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a. When the button operation is performed, information relating to the accessory ratio may be transmitted to the inspection device 300. Also in this case, the above-described modified example may be appropriately applied in connection with the button operation.

<Modification 47>
In each of the above embodiments, the case where the information managed by the accessory ratio management chip 207 is transmitted to the inspection device 300 has been described. The display device provided on the substrate 110 or the like displays various information such as the ratio of the accessory and the ratio of the continuous accessory, and the display of the first symbol display device 37, the third symbol display device 81, and the lamp display device 227. By displaying information relating to the physical ratio or the continuous role ratio or information indicating the game performance, or from the audio output device 226, outputting a certain notification sound regarding the role ratio or the continuous role ratio, the game performance, When configured to perform some kind of notification, transmission to the inspection device 300 does not necessarily have to be performed.

<Modification 48>
In each of the above embodiments, a large-capacity capacitor 267 or a secondary battery is connected to the accessory ratio management chip 207, and when the power supply to the main control device 110 is stopped due to a power failure or the like, the accessory ratio management chip 207 In the above, a case has been described in which a process accompanying a power-off is executed using the power charged in the capacitor 267. On the other hand, a backup voltage may be supplied to the accessory ratio management chip 207 from the power supply device 115 instead of the capacitor 267 or the secondary battery. Thus, the information stored in the first reading memory 263 can be retained even when the power is turned off. Also, in the case where the wrongdoer attempts to set illegal information in the buffer 262 during the late night time period, the out-of-time information is stored in the out-of-time data 263j of the first reading memory 263, and then the second reading is performed at a predetermined timing. The out-of-time information can be recorded in the game state data 264d of the memory 264.

<Modification 49>
In the above-described embodiment, when the MPU 201 determines whether or not the transmission of the interrupt signal after the setting of the buffer 262 has been performed in the late-night time zone by the process of S724 (see FIG. 387), the time indicated by the RTC 266 is set to The MPU 201 may set the threshold value of the time used for the determination of the midnight time zone, as described in the case of determining whether the time is between midnight and 6 a.m. For example, the midnight time zone determination time data defining the threshold value of the time is stored in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201, and during the startup processing executed by the MPU 201 when power is supplied, the prize ball number table 202e The midnight time zone determination time data stored in the ROM 202 may be set in the midnight time zone determination time setting area provided in the setting register 265 together with the trigger information data 202f. Then, in the process of S724, it may be determined whether or not the MPU 201 has transmitted the interrupt signal after the setting of the buffer 262 in the time zone indicated by the midnight time zone determination time data. Thus, the determination of the midnight time zone can be variably set by the ROM 202.

<Modification 50>
In each of the above embodiments, when the accessory ratio management chip 207 is powered on, the power-on information is stored in the first reading memory 263 together with the time indicated by the RTC 266 at that time, At the timing, the power-on information may be recorded in the game state data 264d of the second reading memory 264 together with the time. Further, when the power is turned on to the accessory ratio management chip 207, the power-on information may be directly recorded in the game state data 264d together with the time indicated by the RTC 266 at that time. Thereby, information on the time at which the power is turned on is also transmitted to the inspection device 300. Therefore, when there is a possibility of a fraudulent act due to a change in the ratio of the main character and the ratio of the consecutive main characters, the cause thereof can be explored in various aspects together with the time at which the power is turned on.

<Modification 51>
In the above embodiments, when the power to the accessory ratio management chip 207 is cut off, the power cutoff information is stored in the first reading memory 263 together with the time indicated by the RTC 266 at that time. At a predetermined timing, the power-off information may be recorded in the game state data 264d of the second reading memory 264 together with the time. In this case, the first reading memory 263 may be configured by a nonvolatile memory or supplied with a backup voltage. Further, when the power to the accessory ratio management chip 207 is cut off, the power cut-off information may be directly recorded in the game state data 264d together with the time indicated by the RTC 266 at that time. In this case, the first reading memory 263 does not necessarily need to be constituted by a nonvolatile memory or to be supplied with a backup voltage. Thereby, information on the time at which the power is turned off is also transmitted to the inspection device 300. Therefore, when there is a possibility of a fraudulent act due to a change in the ratio of the bonus and continuous bonus, the cause thereof can be explored in various aspects, together with the time at which the power is turned off.

<Modification 52>
In the above embodiment, when the power supplied to the main control device 110 is cut off and the processing of S704 to S707 is executed in the main processing of the MPU 201 (see FIG. 385), after the processing of S704 is executed, the processing of S705 is performed. Before the processing of (1) is executed, the same processing as the processing of S155 and S156 shown in FIG. 379 may be executed. That is, in the process at the time of power-off, after the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited (S704), the values of the first counter 203d, the second counter 203e, the first counter 203f, the second counter 203g, and the special winning opening counter 203h of the RAM 203 are set. Is set as the winning information, the value of the out counter 203i is set as the out information, and the interrupting signal is transmitted to the accessory ratio managing chip 207 in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at that time. May be. As a result, the number of balls winning each winning opening immediately before the power is turned off and the balls guided to the ball discharge path and not counted in the accessory ratio management chip 207 are turned off. Before being counted by the accessory ratio management chip 207. Therefore, the number of balls winning each winning opening immediately before the power is turned off and the balls guided to the ball discharge path can be recorded by the accessory ratio management chip 207 without omission.

<Modification 53>
In the above embodiments, when the trigger (timing) for calculating the accessory ratio indicated by the trigger information data 202f is “game time”, a ball guided to the ball discharge path by the out switch 208f is detected. Although the case where the game time is calculated by counting the performed time has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an out-port switch for detecting a ball passing through the out-port 66 is provided, the out-port switch, the first starting-port switch 208a, the second starting-port switch 208b, the first normal winning port switch 208c, and the second normal winning port. When the passage of a ball to each winning opening or the out opening is detected by one of the switch 208d and the special winning opening switch 208e, the game time is calculated by counting the detected time. Is also good. Further, based on the output of the touch sensor 51a provided on the operation handle 51, the game time may be calculated by accumulating the time when it is determined that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the operation handle. The game time may be calculated by accumulating the time during which the player 51 is being rotated by the player, or by accumulating the time during which the player touches the operation handle 51 and rotates the operation handle 51. The game time may be calculated. Further, the ball launching unit 112a may be driven by the launch control device 112 to accumulate the time during which the ball is launched to calculate the game time. Further, a game ball detection switch is provided on the return ball prevention member 68 provided at the end of the inner rail 61, and the game ball detection switch counts the time during which the ball guided from the ball guide passage to the game area is continuously detected. By doing so, the game time may be calculated.

<Modification 54>
In each of the above embodiments, the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol are set in advance by the main control device 110, and the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol cannot be changed by persons involved in the hall. However, instead of this, a configuration may be employed in which a person related to the hall or the like can change the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol in a plurality of stages (for example, six stages). Thus, on the hall side, by making the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol different for each pachinko machine with respect to the same model pachinko machine, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of selecting the platform. .

<Modification 55>
The change of the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol may be performed, for example, as follows. First, for each of a plurality of stages in which the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol can be changed (hereinafter, described as six stages (levels 1 to 6)), a jackpot random number value at a corresponding level (stage) and And / or the random number value of the second symbol is stored in the ROM 202 in advance. The jackpot probability and / or the second symbol hit probability at that level are determined by the number of the jackpot random numbers and / or the second symbol hit random values determined for each level.

<Modification 56>
The main board provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a keyhole for changing the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol. The keyhole may be normally covered by the back pack 92 of the back pack unit 94, or may appear by opening the back pack 92. Alternatively, a keyhole opening may be provided in the back pack 92 so that the keyhole is exposed from the opening. The keyhole is configured to be rotatable by a dedicated key between two positions on the “probability setting off” side and the “probability setting on” side. On the other hand, the exclusive key can be inserted and removed. When the keyhole is set to the “probability setting ON” position by the dedicated key, the pachinko machine 10 can change the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the keyhole is rotated from the “probability setting off” to the “probability setting on” position by a dedicated key, and when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, The pachinko machine 10 may be configured to be activated in a probability setting mode in which the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol can be changed. Thereby, it is possible to safely change the big hit probability and / or the second symbol hit probability at the time of starting the pachinko machine 10 in the hall. If the keyhole is turned from the “probability setting off” to the “probability setting on” position by a dedicated key while the power of the pachinko machine 10 is on, the jackpot probability and / or the second symbol You may make it impossible to change a winning probability. Thus, it is possible to prevent a fraudster from illegally changing the jackpot probability and / or the second symbol hit probability during business hours.

<Modification 57>
In the pachinko machine 10, a push-type probability setting button for changing the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol is provided on the main board. Like the keyhole, the probability setting button is normally covered by the back pack 92 of the back pack unit 94, and appears when the back pack 92 is opened. However, an opening for a probability setting button may be provided in the back pack 92 so that the probability setting button is exposed from the opening. When the pachinko machine 10 enters the probability setting mode, the level (stage) of the hit probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol is displayed on, for example, a display device provided on the main board. Then, when the probability setting button is pressed, the level of the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol is increased by one and displayed on the display device. Further, when the level before the probability setting button is pressed is “6”, when the probability setting button is pressed, the level “1” is displayed on the display device. When the pachinko machine 10 enters the probability setting mode, the level displayed on the display device is a predetermined level (instead of the level of the hit probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol). For example, the level may be “1”.

<Modification 58>
When the level of the jackpot probability and / or the second symbol hit probability to be set is displayed on the display device, when the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed, the jackpot value of the level displayed on the display device or the second value is displayed. The hit value of the symbol is set, and the pachinko machine 10 is started. Thereby, the pachinko machine 10 operates at the set level of the big hit probability and / or the second symbol hit probability. When the level of the jackpot probability to be set and / or the level of the hit probability of the second symbol is displayed, when the keyhole into which the dedicated key is inserted is turned to the “probability setting off” position, the display is made. The hit value of the level or the hit value of the second symbol displayed on the device may be set, and the pachinko machine 10 may be started. This also allows the pachinko machine 10 to operate at the set level of the big hit probability and / or the second symbol hit probability.

<Modification 59>
Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a display device for displaying the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio, or information related to the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio, the pachinko machine 10 sets the probability setting. When activated in the mode, the level of the set jackpot probability and / or the second symbol hit probability may be displayed on the display device. Thereby, by suppressing an increase in the number of display devices mounted on the pachinko machine 10, an increase in cost can be reduced. In addition, by also using the display device and suppressing an increase in the number of parts, the arrangement (layout) of each part can be easily performed.

<Modification 60>
If the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to change the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol, the ratio of the bonuses and the ratio of the continuous bonuses naturally change according to the change. Therefore, it is determined whether the change in the bonus ratio or the continuous bonus ratio managed by the bonus ratio management chip 207 is due to a change in the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol, or due to some kind of fraud. May be lost.

  Therefore, when the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol are changed, all the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 and the information stored in the first reading memory 263 may be deleted. . Thereby, it is possible to eliminate the influence of the change of the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio due to the change of the big hit probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol. In this case, information indicating that the big hit probability and / or the second symbol hit probability has been changed is recorded in the second reading memory 264, and the information is output to the connected inspection device 300. You may. As a result, it can be grasped at the stage of the inspection that the information or the like recorded in the second reading memory 264 has been erased due to the change in the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol. Can be used as a reference for the judgment. In this case, the date and time when the change was made may be stored together. Further, the information indicating that the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol has been changed may include information indicating the level after the change, or may include information of the level before the change. Based on these date and time and level, it is possible to more reliably determine whether there has been fraud.

<Modification 61>
On the other hand, even if the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol are changed, all the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 and the information stored in the first reading memory 263 are retained. It may be. Thereby, before the big hit probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol are changed, it is possible to analyze whether there is any fraud. In this case, information indicating that the big hit probability and / or the second symbol hit probability has been changed is recorded in the second reading memory 264, and the information is output to the connected inspection device 300. You may. Thereby, it can be easily determined whether or not the influence of the change of the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio is caused by a change in the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol. The information indicating that the big hit probability and / or the second symbol hit probability has been changed may include the date and time when the change was made. Further, it may include information indicating the level after the change, or may include information of the level before the change. Based on these date and time and level, it is possible to more reliably analyze the cause of the change in the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio.

<Modification 62>
Further, even when the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol are changed, all the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 and the information stored in the first reading memory 263 are kept stored. In the case of, the display device provided for displaying the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio, or the information related to the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio, has a jackpot probability and / or a hit of the second symbol. After the probability is changed, based on the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 and / or the first reading memory 263, based on the information such as the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio, or the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio, Related information may be displayed. Therefore, regarding the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio displayed on the display device, or the information related to the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio, the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol change. Thus, it is possible to eliminate the influence of the change in the ratio of the bonus and the ratio of the continuous bonus, and to easily detect the fraudulent behavior after the change of the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol. In this case, information indicating that the big hit probability and / or the second symbol hit probability has been changed may be recorded in the second reading memory 264 together with the date and time when the change was made. Based on this information, after the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol are changed, the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 is easily determined, and based on the information, the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory Information related to the ratio or the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio can be displayed.

<Modification 63>
Further, even when the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol are changed, all the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 and the information stored in the first reading memory 263 are retained. In this case, the information may be recorded in the second reading memory 264 for each level (stage) of the big hit probability and / or the second symbol hit probability. With this, for each level of the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio when the level is set are determined from the information recorded in the second reading memory 264. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to clearly switch and analyze the change in the ratio of the bonuses and the continuous ratio of bonuses due to the change of the jackpot probability and / or the probability of the second symbol, and the change in the ratio of the bonuses and the ratio of continuous bonuses due to the misconduct. it can.

<Modification 64>
When the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol are changed, one or more pieces of information recorded in the second reading memory 264 immediately before may be stored, and the others may be deleted. Further, the information stored in the first reading memory 263 may be kept stored. Further, all the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 may be deleted, and only the information stored in the first reading memory 263 may be kept. Thereby, it is possible to eliminate as much as possible the effect ratio and the continuous character ratio before the change of the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol from affecting the analysis and display, while the jackpot probability and / or Before the winning probability of the second symbol is changed, it is possible to analyze whether there is a possibility that an illegal act has been performed. In this case, information indicating that the big hit probability and / or the second symbol hit probability has been changed is recorded in the second reading memory 264, and the information may be output to the connected inspection device 300. Good. Thereby, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the influence of the change of the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio is caused by the change of the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol, and is recorded in the second reading memory 264. It can be grasped at the inspection stage that some of the information, etc., that has been deleted due to the change of the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol can be used as a reference for judging whether there was fraud. it can. The information indicating that the big hit probability and / or the second symbol hit probability has been changed may be stored together with the date and time when the change was made. Further, it may include information indicating the level after the change, or may include information of the level before the change. Based on these date and time and level, it is possible to more reliably analyze the cause of the change in the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio.

<Modification 65>
In each of the above embodiments, the information recorded in the first reading memory 263 and the second reading memory 264 cannot be erased from the outside, so that the wrongdoer cannot erase the evidence of the wrongdoing. . On the other hand, there is a used market in the pachinko machine market, and it is often sold from one store to another store and installed at other stores. In this case, even if a fraudulent act is performed in the previous one store and the ratio of the accessory is changed, if the information remains in the first reading memory 263 or the second reading memory 264, the current reading is performed. There was a possibility that suspicion that fraudulent acts had occurred at another store might occur. Therefore, in preparation for such a case, when selling from one store to another store, the information recorded in the first reading memory 263 or the second reading memory 264 is deleted or the information to be resold is deleted. The second reading memory 264 may be recorded. By deleting information recorded in the first reading memory 263 or the second reading memory 264, it is possible to prevent a record of an improper act performed in one previous store from being carried over to another next store. it can. Also, if the information to be resold is recorded in the second reading memory 264, the information relating to the ratio of the public goods in the preceding one store and the information relating to the ratio of the public goods in the next other store are clearly separated. In addition to performing analysis, it is also possible to detect an improper act performed in the preceding one store from information related to the ratio of the accessory in the previous store.

<Modification 66>
Deletion of information recorded in the first reading memory 263 or the second reading memory 264 or recording of information to be resold in the second reading memory 264 is performed in a limited place such as the maker of the pachinko machine 10. It is good to be limited to. As a result, it is possible to suppress the erasure or the deception of the record of the misconduct being easily performed. The erasing of information recorded in the first reading memory 263 and the second reading memory 264 and the recording of information to be resold in the second reading memory 264 may be performed by the following method. . For example, by connecting the inspection device 300 to the inspection terminal 207a and inputting a dedicated command from the inspection device 300 to the accessory ratio management chip 207, the data is recorded in the first reading memory 263 or the second reading memory 264. A program for erasing the information and recording the information to be resold in the second reading memory 264 may be executed. By using this command as a special command that is confidential except for some persons, it is possible to suppress erasure of a record of fraudulent activity by a fraudster or facilitation of deception. In addition, a hole such as a keyhole is provided on the main board, and information recorded in the first reading memory 263 or the second reading memory 264 is deleted or resold only when a key or the like corresponding to the hole is inserted. A program for recording information in the second reading memory 264 may be executed. As a result, only those having a key or the like that fits the hole can delete information recorded in the first reading memory 263 or the second reading memory 264 or transfer information to be resold to the second reading memory 264. Since the recording can be performed, it is possible to suppress the erasure or the deception of the recording of the fraudulent act by the fraudulent person from being performed easily. Also, a switch is provided in the board box 100 in which the main board is stored, and only when the switch is operated, the information recorded in the first reading memory 263 or the second reading memory 264 is erased or resold. A program for recording the information to be read into the second reading memory 264 may be executed. As a result, unless the board box 100 is opened, the switch cannot be operated and the information recorded in the first reading memory 263 or the second reading memory 264 is erased, and the information to be resold is transferred to the second reading memory 264. Recording cannot be performed. As described above, in the board box 100, the box base and the box cover are connected in a non-openable manner (connection by caulking structure), and the connection portion between the box base and the box cover extends over the box base and the box cover. And a sealing sticker is attached. Therefore, since the fraudster cannot easily open the board box, it is possible to suppress the erasure of the fraudulent record by the fraudster or the manipulation of the fraudulently. Further, if the board box is opened and the switch is operated, evidence of the opening remains, so that it is possible to easily judge that the wrongdoing has been performed.

<Modification 67>
In the eighteenth to twenty-second embodiments, as the process of using the out-of-use area 203y in the RAM 203, the process relating to the accessory ratio and the base value has been exemplified. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Various processes excluding the above may be used. For example, a process for determining improper behavior may be performed. In the process of judging this misconduct, for example, it is judged whether there is an approach or vibration of a magnet, or an unnatural ball entering the winning opening (a detected ball despite the large winning opening 65a being closed). Alternatively, a process for giving a notification when there is an illegal act may be performed. In addition, the process using the area 203y outside the use area may include a plurality of processes having different functions (purposes) (for example, a “process relating to the ratio of an accessory” and a “process for determining an improper act”).

<Modification 68>
In the above-mentioned eighteenth to twenty-second embodiments, the case where the contents of the register 200 are saved to the outside work area 203y1 of the outside area 203y using the load (LD) instruction has been described. Alternatively, the same operation and effect can be obtained by using the store (ST) command to retreat to the outside work area 203y1 of the outside use area 203y.

<Modification 69>
In the twentieth to twenty-second embodiments, in addition to the real-time base value, three base values (previous base value, base value before last time, base value before last time) previously counted for each predetermined period are used as the base display device. Although the case of displaying at 401 has been described, at least two base values counted in the past for each predetermined period (for example, a previous base value and a base value two times before) may be displayed together with the real-time base value. Alternatively, four or more base values counted in the past for each predetermined period may be displayed together with the real-time base value.

<Modification 70>
In the above-described twentieth to twenty-second embodiments, the case where each base value measured in a plurality of periods and the base value being measured in real time are displayed on the base display device 401 has been described. Or, in addition to the base value, the accessory ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, information related to the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio, and / or other information indicating the game performance, each measured in a plurality of periods. And the one measured in real time may be displayed on a display device.

<Modification 71>
In the twentieth to twenty-second embodiments, the case where the MPU 201 executes the base value processing (FIG. 41) and displays various base values on the base display device 401 has been described. A chip is provided, or a management chip for managing a base value is provided separately from the main controller 110. The management chip executes processing equivalent to base value processing, calculates a real-time base value, and calculates a real-time base value. The base value may be displayed on the base display device 401. In this case, the management chip may directly control the display of the base display device 401, or the management chip may control the display of the base display device 401 by the MPU 201 via the MPU 201. Further, the base display device 401 may be directly connected to the management chip.

<Modification 72>
Further, the various counters 203j, 203k, 203q, the base value data 203l to 203o, and the flag 203p shown in FIG. 407 (a) may be stored in the RAM in the management chip. In this case, when the power is turned on while the RAM all erasure switch is turned on, the MPU 201 transmits a signal notifying the fact to the management chip during the start-up process, and the management chip receives the signal and receives the signal. The various counters 203j, 203k, and 203q, the base value data 203l to 203o, the flag 203p, and the like may be initialized.

<Modification 73>
Further, when the power is turned on, the management chip may control the base display device 401 to turn on all the segments of the four 7-segment displays 401a to 401d. In this case, the control may be performed immediately after the management chip starts up with the power-on, or when the power is turned on, the MPU 201 sends an initialization signal to the management chip during the startup process. May be transmitted, and the control may be executed in the processing executed by the management chip upon receiving the initialization signal.

<Modification 74>
In the twentieth to twenty-second embodiments, when the last base value, the last-before-last base value, and the two-last-before-base are displayed on the base display device 401, if there is no effective base value as the base value, the comparison segment is performed. Has been described in which "-" is displayed to indicate that there is no effective base value. On the other hand, when there is no effective base value as the last base value, the last-before-last base value, or the two-before-last base, only the real-time base value may be displayed on the base display device 401. Thereby, it can be shown that there is no effective base value in the previous base value, the base value before last time, and the base value before last time. In addition, it is possible to suppress the useless display of the previous base value, the base value before the last time, and the base value before the previous time without a valid base value. On the other hand, in this case, the real-time base value and the previous base value may be displayed on the base display device 401, and “−−” may be displayed for the previous base value in the comparison segment. This can also indicate that there is no valid base value in the previous base value, the pre-last base value, and the pre-last base value. In addition, by displaying not only the real-time base value but also the previous base value, it can be suggested that after the effective base value is obtained, the previous base value and the like are also displayed on the base display device 401.

<Modification 75>
If there is a valid base value as the last base value and there is no base value before and twice before the base value, only the real-time base value and the previous base value are displayed on the base display device 401. May be. In addition, if there is a valid base value in the previous base value and the base value before the last time, and there is no valid base value as the base time before the previous time, only the real time base value, the previous base value and the base value before the previous time are displayed on the base display device. It may be displayed at 401. Thereby, it is possible to indicate that there is no valid base value for the base value that is not displayed. In addition, it is possible to suppress unnecessary display of a base value that does not have a valid base value.

<Modification 76>
On the other hand, if there is a valid base value in the previous base value and there is no valid base value as the pre-last base value or the pre-last base value, the base display device displays the real-time base value, the previous base value, and the pre-last base value. The reference value may be displayed at 401, and “−−−” may be displayed in the comparison segment for the base value two times before. If there is a valid base value for the previous base value and the base value two times before, and there is no valid base value as the base value two times before, the real time base value, the previous base value, the base value two times before and the base value two times before The base value may be displayed on the base display device 401, and “−−” may be displayed in the comparison segment about the base value two times before. This can also indicate the type of base value for which there is no valid base value. Further, by displaying one base value of a type having no valid base value, it is possible to suggest that the base value of the type is displayed on the base display device 401 after a valid base value is obtained.

<Modification 77>
In the twentieth embodiment, every time the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, all the segments (including the dot segments) of the seven-segment displays 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 are determined. Although the case of lighting for a period (5 seconds in the present embodiment) has been described, all segments may blink for a predetermined period instead of lighting. By blinking all the segments, it is possible to confirm not only whether all the segments can be normally turned on but also whether all the segments can be normally turned off, and determine whether the display of the base display device 401 is normally performed. Easy to judge.

<Variation 78>
Further, when the pachinko machine 10 is newly started up at a manufacturing factory, or when the used pachinko machine 10 is moved to another hall as a used stand, for example, when the pachinko machine 10 is newly started up, for example, the entire RAM is used. Only after the power is turned on while the erase switch is operated and until the total number of outs reaches 300, all segments (dot segments) of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 are displayed. ) May be turned on or off for a predetermined period (5 seconds in this embodiment). Thus, at least at the time of newly starting up the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to confirm whether or not the display on the base display device 401 is normally performed. Further, while the lighting is performed, it can be suggested that the pachinko machine 10 is in a newly started state.

<Modification 79>
Further, when the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is operated, all the segments (including the dot segments) of the seven-segment displays 401a to 401d provided in the base display device 401 are displayed for a predetermined period (this embodiment). (5 seconds in this case).

<Modification 80>
In the twentieth embodiment, immediately after the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, all the segments (including the dot segments) of the seven-segment displays 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 are kept for a predetermined period (this embodiment). In the above description, the control of turning on (or blinking) is performed at a predetermined point (S3007) of the start-up process (see FIG. 408). May be performed at an arbitrary position in. For example, the control may be executed first after the start-up process is started, or the control may be executed after the initial setting (S601). Further, the control may be executed after setting the interruption permission (S613). Further, the control may be executed at a place other than the start-up processing. For example, in the main processing (see FIG. 385) executed after the start-up processing, the control may be executed before the loop processing (S701 to S703) is executed. In the timer interrupt processing, for example, in the base value processing (see FIG. 41) which is one of the timer interrupt processing, the timer interrupt processing or the base value processing is executed only after the power is turned on. It may be determined whether or not the control has been performed, and if the control has been executed for the first time after the power is turned on, the control may be performed. In other words, all the segments (including the dot segments) of the seven-segment displays 401a to 401d once provided on the base display device 401 are turned on (or blink) for a predetermined period (5 seconds in this embodiment) after the power is turned on. If possible, this control may be performed at any timing.

<Modification 81>
In the twentieth embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is newly started up in a manufacturing plant, or when the pachinko machine 10 is newly started up, such as when the used pachinko machine 10 is moved to another hall as a used stand. Until the total number of outs reaches 300, every time the power is turned on, all the segments (including the dot segments) of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 are displayed for a predetermined period (the (5 seconds in the present embodiment), and then the display of the base display device 401 blinks (or lights) “88.” in the identification segment, and the real-time base value stored in the real-time base value data 203l is compared with the ratio segment. Flashing (or lit) on the display, a special display mode different from the normal base value display was described. In this case, every time the power is turned on, all the segments (including the dot segments) of the seven-segment displays 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 are turned on for a predetermined period (5 seconds in the present embodiment). The thing may not be executed. In this case, during the new start-up period of the pachinko machine 10, the base value is displayed on the base display device 401 in a special display mode, so that it is possible to indicate that the displayed base value is not a regular base value, Further, by performing the display, it can be suggested that the pachinko machine 10 is in a newly started state.

<Modification 82>
In the twentieth embodiment or the modified example, as the special display mode displayed on the base display device 401 when the pachinko machine 10 is in the new start-up period, “88.” is blinked (or lit) in the identification segment. At the same time, the mode in which the real-time base value stored in the real-time base value data 203l is blinked (or lit) in the ratio segment is described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this mode. May be displayed on the base display device 401 in a different manner. For example, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the new start-up period, “bL.”, “B1.”, “B2.”, And “b3.” Are switched and displayed at 5-second intervals while the identification segment is blinking. The display on the base display device 401 may be performed in such a manner that “−−” is lit on the comparative segment. Thereby, while this display is being performed, it can be suggested that the pachinko machine 10 is in a new startup state. In this aspect, while “bL.” Is displayed blinking, the real-time base value stored in the real-time base value data 203l may be lit or blinked in the ratio segment. Thereby, the real-time base value at that time can be shown for reference.

<Modification 83>
In the above-mentioned 21st to 27th embodiments, the probability setting value can be changed in six stages of “1” to “6”, and the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol can be changed. Is not limited to six stages, but may be changed to any stage.

<Modification 84>
In the above-mentioned 21st to 27th embodiments, the case where the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol is changed by changing the probability set value has been described. However, when the pachinko machine 10 includes a so-called small hit, Instead of or in addition to the change of the big hit probability and / or the second symbol hit probability, the small hit winning probability may be changed. Here, the small hit is a kind of miss, and when the ball enters the big winning opening 65a opened by the small hit and the ball is paid out, the number of the paid out ball is also calculated as the base value. Used for In other words, if the winning probability of the small hit is changed, the base value also changes. Therefore, if the base value data 203r based on the probability setting value before the change remains, the base value based on the changed probability setting value is changed. Cannot be calculated correctly. Therefore, in this case, the base value data 203r may be erased during the data erasure of the RAM 203 which is started in the setting change mode and performed when the probability set value is changed. . Thereby, the base value based on the changed probability setting value can be correctly calculated.

<Modification 85>
In the above-described twenty-first and twenty-second embodiments, the case has been described in which whether or not the probability set value is within the normal range (the range of “1” to “6”) is checked each time the timer interrupt processing is executed. However, this confirmation may be performed by the pachinko machine 10 according to the twenty-third to twenty-seventh embodiments. Further, this confirmation is performed every time a predetermined opportunity comes, such as every time a variable effect is started, every predetermined time (for example, every hour, or every time a clock provided inside reaches 00 minutes). It may be.

<Modification 86>
In the above-described twenty-first and twenty-second embodiments, it is determined whether or not the probability set value is within the normal range (the range of “1” to “6”) during the timer interrupt processing. If not, the case where the game is stopped and a notification that prompts the person involved in the hall to restart the pachinko machine 10 and change the probability setting value is described. Alternatively, a setting change process may be executed to forcibly change the probability set value by a person related to the hall or the like. In this case, a notification sound that prompts a change in the probability setting value may be output, or a notification may be performed on the third symbol display device 81 to call a person related to the hall. Further, an external terminal (not shown) provided in main controller 110 may notify hall computer 600 that the probability set value is not within the normal range. As a result, the probability set value can be reset within a normal range by a person involved in the hall or the like.

<Modification 87>
In the above-described twenty-first and twenty-second embodiments, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the normal mode or the setting confirmation mode, it is checked whether the RAM determination value is normal during the start-up process, and the RAM determination value is normal. If not, it is further confirmed whether or not the probability set value is within the normal range, and if not, the setting change processing is executed, and the change of the probability set value is performed by a person related to the hall or the like. The case has been described. Instead of executing the setting change processing, the voice output device 226 or the third symbol display device 81 notifies the person involved in the hall or the like to restart the pachinko machine 10 and change the probability set value. And / or from an external terminal (not shown) provided in main controller 110, notifies hall computer 600 that the probability set value is not within the normal range, and enters an infinite loop. You may do so. Thereby, the pachinko machine 10 can be restarted by the person involved in the hall and the like, and the probability set value can be changed.

<Modification 88>
If it is determined that the probability set value is not within the normal range during the startup processing, a specific probability set value (for example, “1”) is set from the range of “1” to “6”. The value may be forcibly set. If it is determined that the probability set value is not within the normal range during the game (for example, during a timer interrupt process), the probability set value should not be forcibly set to a specific probability set value. This is to prevent the player from suffering any disadvantage due to sudden change of the big hit probability and / or the second symbol hit probability during the game.

<Modification 89>
In the above-described twenty-first and twenty-second embodiments, the case where the probability set value is included in the calculation of the RAM determination value (check sum) has been described. However, the probability set value may be excluded from the calculation of the RAM determination value. In this case, before determining whether or not the RAM determination value is normal (S4009 in FIG. 422), it is determined whether or not the probability setting value is within a normal range. In order to change the probability setting value by the person involved in the hall to change the probability setting value, to prompt the person involved in the hall to restart the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode, A specific probability setting value within the range may be forcibly set.

<Modification 90>
In the above-described twenty-third embodiment, the case where the probability setting value is not included in the calculation of the RAM determination value (check sum) has been described. However, the probability setting value may be included from the calculation of the RAM determination value.

<Modification 91>
In the twentieth embodiment, every time the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, all the segments (including the dot segments) of the seven-segment displays 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 are displayed. The case of lighting for a predetermined period (5 seconds in the present embodiment) has been described. However, in the 21st to 27th embodiments, each time the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the pachinko machine 10 is provided on the base display device 401 immediately after the power is turned on. All the segments (including the dot segments) of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d may be turned on or off for a predetermined period. However, until the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, all the segments (including the dot segments) of the seven-segment displays 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 immediately after the power is turned on. Turning on or blinking for a predetermined period may be troublesome. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, lighting or blinking of all the segments of the seven-segment displays 401a to 401d may not be executed. When the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, after the setting change processing or the setting confirmation processing is executed, all the segments of the seven-segment displays 401a to 401d are turned on or blinking. May be executed. When the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, all the segments (including the dot segments) of the seven-segment displays 401a to 401d are once lit or blinked for a predetermined period, When the operation is performed, the lighting or blinking may be terminated.

<Modification 92>
In the twentieth to twenty-seventh embodiments, the base display device 401 is divided into an identification seg composed of two 7-segment displays 401a and 401b and a ratio seg composed of two 7-segment displays 401c and 401d. Although the configuration is described, the identification segment may be configured with one or two or more seven-segment displays, or the ratio seg may be configured with two or more seven-segment displays.

<Modification 93>
In the above-mentioned 21st to 27th embodiments, using the round number notification LED, the LED for notifying the big hit symbol, the LED for notifying the hit symbol, or the like prepared in the first symbol display device 37, or the entire LED 37a, A case has been described in which the base display device 401 notifies that the display indicating that the setting is being changed or the display that is confirming the setting is being performed by using a lighting pattern that is not used in the original notification. 37, using a round number notification LED, an LED for notifying a big hit symbol, an LED for notifying a hit symbol, or the like, or using the entire LED 37a, using a lighting pattern that is not used in the original notification, The fact that the error history is displayed on the base display device 401 may be notified.

<Modification 94>
Further, the first symbol display device 37 is provided with one LED for notifying that the setting change display and the setting confirmation display are being performed on the base display device 401, and for example, the LED is turned on. The base display device 401 notifies that the setting change display is being performed, and blinks its LED to notify that the setting confirmation display is being performed on the base display device 401. You may. In addition, an LED for notifying that the setting change display is being performed on the base display device 401 on the first symbol display device 37, and a setting confirmation display being performed on the base display device 401. And a LED for notifying that the setting display is being performed on the base display device 401 to indicate that the setting change display or the setting check display is being performed. It may be. Further, the first symbol display device 37 is provided with an LED for notifying that the error history is being displayed on the base display device 401, and by turning on the LED, the error is displayed on the base display device 401. The fact that the history display is being performed may be notified.

<Modification 95>
In the 21st to 27th embodiments, when the probability set value or the error history is displayed on the base display device 401, all the segments of each of the seven-segment displays 401a and 401b of the identification segment are turned off, or the identification segment is displayed as " −− ”or a case where fixed characters are displayed on each of the 7-segment displays 401a and 401b in a display mode different from the case where the base value is displayed on the base display device 401. When the value or the error history is displayed on the base display device 401, the identification segment may be displayed in any display mode as long as the display mode is different from the case where the base value is displayed on the base display device 401. For example, a predetermined segment of each of the seven-segment displays 401a and 401b may be blinked, or each of the segments of each of the seven-segment displays 401a and 401b may be lit or blinked sequentially or randomly. In the identification segment, a plurality of display modes may be rotated and displayed. This also makes it possible to clearly differentiate the display state between the case where the base value is displayed on the base display device 401 and the case where the probability set value or the error history is displayed on the base display device 401.

<Modification 96>
In the 21st to 27th embodiments, when the probability set value or the error history is displayed on the base display device 401, all the segments of the 7-segment display 401c on the left side of the comparison segment are turned off or "-" is displayed. In the case where the probability set value or the error history is displayed on the base display device 401, the 7-segment display 401c on the left side of the comparison segment displays the base display device 401. The display may be performed in an arbitrary display mode as long as the display mode is different from the case where the base value is displayed. For example, a predetermined segment of the seven-segment display 401c may be blinked, or each segment of the seven-segment display 401c may be sequentially or randomly lit and blinked. Further, a plurality of display modes may be rotated and displayed on the seven-segment display 401c. This also makes it possible to clearly differentiate the display state between the case where the base value or the error history is displayed on the base display device 401 and the case where the probability set value is displayed.

<Modification 97>
In the 21st to 27th embodiments, as an example of a display mode when an error history is displayed on the base display device 401, an example shown in FIG. 50 is illustrated, and a display mode when a probability set value is displayed on the base display device 401. The case where the display mode is different from that described above has been described. On the other hand, when the error history is displayed on the base display device 401, a display mode similar to the display mode shown in FIG. 49A or 49B may be used. In this case, the display mode when the probability set value is displayed on the base display device 401 may be the same as the display mode when the error history is displayed on the base display device 401. The probability setting value is displayed on the base display device 401 when the person involved in the hall starts the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The error history is displayed on the base display device 401 when the person related to the hall or the like presses the error display button 502. In other words, even if the display mode when displaying the probability set value on the base display device 401 and the display mode when displaying the error history on the base display device 401 are the same display mode, the hall-related person or the like performs the same operation. Based on the operation performed, it can be grasped whether the information displayed on the base display device 401 is a probability set value or an error history.

<Modification 98>
In the 21st to 27th embodiments, when the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting change mode, the probability set value is updated by turning on the RAM erase switch 122 or by turning on the setting change switch. Although the case in which the setting is performed has been described, the setting may be performed using the setting key 501. Specifically, the setting key 501 is rotatable from an on state to a setting change position provided in a direction opposite to the off side, and when the setting key 501 is turned to the setting change position, the setting key 501 is automatically turned on. The setting key 501 is configured to be urged to return. Then, each time the setting key 501 is turned from the ON state to the setting change position, the probability setting value is updated. This also makes it possible to easily change the probability set value.

<Modification 99>
In the twenty-first and twenty-seventh embodiments, the case where the probability set value is updated by turning on the RAM erase switch 122 when the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting change mode has been described. The probability setting value may be updated by providing a setting change switch similar to that described above and turning on the setting change switch. As a result, the roles of the RAM erase switch and the setting change switch are clearly separated, so that the operator can clearly grasp the role of each switch.

<Modification 100>
In the twenty-first to twenty-seventh embodiments, when the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting change mode, the probability setting value is set by turning off the setting key 501 or turning on the RAM erase switch 122. Has been described, but this may be performed by operating a switch provided separately, for example, a setting confirmation switch. The setting confirmation switch is a switch for confirming the probability setting value by being operated, for example, in the setting change mode. Like the error display button 502, the main board is opened through a hole provided in the board box 100. It may be provided so as to be more protruding, and can be operated by persons involved in the hall or the like without opening the substrate box 100. This also makes it possible to easily determine the probability set value.

<Modification 101>
In the twenty-third to twenty-seventh embodiments, when a person related to the hall performs a start-up operation in one of the normal mode, the RAM clear mode, and the setting confirmation mode during the RAM abnormality, the main controller 110 In the processing of S4215 of the startup processing executed by the MPU 201, it is always determined that it is determined that the RAM is abnormal (S4215: Yes), the process proceeds to S4219, and the notification by the RAM abnormality setting processing and (S4219), the output to the hall computer 600 (S4220), and then the infinite loop state has been described. On the other hand, in this case, after the notification by the RAM abnormality setting process and the output to the hall computer 600 (S4219) are executed, the process may proceed to S4213 to execute the setting change process. As a result, the probability setting value is surely reset, and the pachinko machine 10 can operate normally by clearing the RAM 203 together with the RAM abnormality flag 203x15. Further, in this case, since the setting change process is automatically executed, it is not necessary to restart the pachinko machine 10 again, and it is possible to save time and labor for persons involved in the hall.

<Modification 102>
In the processing of S4313 of the setting change processing in the twenty-third to twenty-seventh embodiments, of the data stored in the RAM 203, the data used for controlling the game (excluding the probability set value data 203x11 stored in the inner work area 203x1) (Predetermined data) is deleted (cleared), and the data 203s for the ratio of belongings stored in the outside work area 203y1 is deleted, while the data 203r for the base value and the data 203t for the error (see FIG. 421) Although the case where the data is retained without being erased has been described, the data used for controlling the game (the data stored in the inner work area 203x1) among the data stored in the RAM 203, similarly to the processing of S4216 of the startup processing. (Predetermined data excluding the probability set value data 203x11) is deleted (cleared) while the outside work area 03y1 and character object ratio data 203s stored in a base value data 203 r, (see FIG. 421) error data 203t and may be held without being erased. That is, the same process may be performed for the RAM clear after the setting change process and the RAM clear executed when the pachinko machine 10 is started in the RAM clear mode.

<Modification 103>
In the twenty-third to twenty-seventh embodiments, the start-up mode when the power is turned on after the power is turned off during the setting change is only the start-up operation for starting up in the setting change mode. However, even in the case of another start-up operation, the setting change mode in which the setting change process is restarted from the beginning and executed is described. On the other hand, only when the startup operation when the power is turned on after the power is turned off during the setting change is the startup operation for starting up in the setting change mode, the setting change processing is started from the beginning. Start up as a setting change mode to execute again, and start up operation when power is turned on after power is cut off during setting change, other start up modes (normal mode, RAM clear mode, setting check mode) In the case of the start-up operation corresponding to (1), the MPU 201 may be set to an infinite loop state. In this case, a notification is issued to the person involved in the hall to promptly turn off the power and restart in the setting change mode, or a signal to that effect is output from the external output terminal 503 to the hall computer 600. Or you may. Thus, it is possible to cause the persons involved in the hall and the like to restart the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode and to surely reset the probability set value.

<Modification 104>
Further, when the startup operation when the power is turned on after the power is turned off during the setting change is a startup operation for starting up in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (that is, the setting key 501). Is turned on), the setting change mode is started from the beginning, and the setting change mode is executed. When the power is turned on after the power is cut off during the setting change, If the start operation is a start operation corresponding to another start mode (normal mode, RAM clear mode) (that is, if the setting key 501 is turned off), the MPU 201 enters an infinite loop state. Is also good. In this case, a notification is issued to the person involved in the hall to promptly turn off the power and restart in the setting change mode, or a signal to that effect is output from the external output terminal 503 to the hall computer 600. Or you may. Thus, the pachinko machine 10 can be caused to re-start the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode after the setting key 501 is turned on, so that the probability setting value can be surely reset. . On the other hand, when the startup operation is performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the setting key 501 is in an ON state, and the person involved in the hall is ready to update and set the probability set value smoothly. I have. Therefore, in this case, the probability set value can be definitely determined by starting in the setting change mode.

<Modification 105>
In the above-described twenty-third to twenty-seventh embodiments, after the power is cut off during the setting change, the power-up operation for starting up in the normal mode, that is, the power-up operation with the setting key 501 turned off and the RAM erase switch 122 turned off. A case has been described in which the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode in which the setting change mode is executed by restarting (from the beginning) the setting change processing, instead of starting up in the normal mode, when the start-up operation of inputting is performed. On the other hand, in this case, the setting change process may be executed from the probability set value that was being updated before the power was last turned off. Further, the pachinko machine 10 may be started in the normal mode by ignoring the setting change process executed before the power is turned off, deleting the probability set value in the middle of the update.

<Modification 106>
In the above-described twenty-third to twenty-seventh embodiments, after the power is turned off during the setting change, the start operation for starting in the RAM clear mode, that is, the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on while the setting key 501 is in the off state. A description will be given of a case in which the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting change mode in which the setting change process is executed again from the beginning (from the beginning) instead of starting in the RAM clear mode when the start operation of turning on the power is performed. did. On the other hand, in this case, the setting change process may be executed from the probability set value that was being updated before the power was last turned off. When the setting key 501 is turned on, the setting key 501 is turned on. When the setting key 501 is turned off, the setting key 501 is turned off. It may be raised or RAM clear may be executed. Further, the pachinko machine 10 may be started in the RAM clear mode by ignoring the setting change process executed before the power is turned off, deleting the probability set value in the middle of the update. Then, wait until the setting key 501 is turned on, and when the setting key 501 is turned on, wait until the setting key 501 is turned off. When the setting key 501 is turned off, the game can be executed. You may make it become. Wait until the setting key 501 is turned on, and when the setting key 501 is turned on, insert a process to wait for the setting key 501 to be turned off. Can be given to the person in charge of the hall or the like as if the cancellation of the release was canceled.

<Modification 107>
In the above-described twenty-third to twenty-seventh embodiments, after the power is cut off during the setting change, the start-up operation for starting up in the setting change mode, that is, the setting key 501 is turned on and the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on. When the startup operation of turning on the power is performed, the case where the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting change mode as in the startup operation has been described. When the setting key 501 is turned on, the setting key 501 may be further turned off, and when the setting key 501 is turned off, the operation may be started in the normal mode. As a result, it is possible to give a person related to the hall or the like a feeling that the release of the setting change mode executed when the power was last turned off is released.

<Modification 108>
In the above-described twenty-third to twenty-seventh embodiments, after the power is cut off during the setting change, the start operation for starting in the setting check mode, that is, the setting key 501 is turned on and the RAM erase switch 122 is turned off. When starting up the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode in which the startup operation of turning on the power as it is and not starting up in the setting confirmation mode, but performing the setting change process again from the beginning (from the beginning) As described above, the setting change process may be executed based on the probability set value that was being updated before the power was last turned off. In this case, after the setting key 501 is turned off, the setting confirmation processing may be continuously executed, or the setting confirmation processing may be ignored. Further, it is also possible to start in the setting confirmation mode, ignore the setting change processing executed before the power is turned off, or delete the probability setting value in the middle of updating.

<Modification 109>
In the above-described twenty-third to twenty-seventh embodiments, after the power supply is cut off during the setting confirmation, a start-up operation for starting up in the normal mode, that is, while the setting key 501 is off and the RAM erase switch 122 is off, the power supply is turned off. In the case where the start-up operation of inputting the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting check mode in which the setting check process is executed again from the beginning (from the beginning) instead of starting in the normal mode. Alternatively, the pachinko machine 10 may be started up in the normal mode, ignoring the setting confirmation process that was executed before the power was turned off.

<Modification 110>
In the above-described twenty-third to twenty-seventh embodiments, after the power is turned off during the setting confirmation, a start-up operation for starting up in the RAM clear mode, that is, the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on with the setting key 501 turned off. When the startup operation of turning on the power is performed, the case where the pachinko machine 10 is started in the RAM clear mode as described in the startup operation of the person in charge of the hall has been described. The pachinko machine 10 may be started up in a setting confirmation mode in which the confirmation processing is restarted from the beginning (from the beginning) and executed. In this case, wait until the setting key 501 is turned on. When the setting key 501 is turned on, wait until the setting key 501 is turned off. When the setting key 501 is turned off, the RAM is not cleared. May be started, or the RAM may be cleared.

<Modification 111>
In the above-described twenty-third to twenty-seventh embodiments, after the power is turned off during the setting confirmation, a start-up operation for starting up in the setting change mode, that is, the setting key 501 is turned on and the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on. The case where the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode as in the start-up operation when the power-on operation is performed is described above, but the setting change mode is ignored and the start-up is performed in the setting confirmation mode. You may. Further, after starting up in the setting confirmation mode, a transition to the setting change mode may be made upon a predetermined operation.

<Modification 112>
In the twenty-sixth embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, at least the opening of the inner frame 12 is required as an essential condition. The start-up mode has been set according to the detection mode. On the other hand, it may be configured such that whether the opening of the inner frame 12 is set as a condition for changing the setting or confirming the setting can be set so that the hole can be selected.

  The island facilities of the hall where the pachinko machines 10 are installed include “Ryoshima” where the pachinko machines 10 can be installed on both sides of the island facilities, “Kawashima” where the pachinko machines 10 can be installed on only one side of the island facilities, There are a variety of island facilities, such as a "pillar island" constructed by surrounding a pillar of a hall with a "wall island", or a "single island" in which the pachinko machine 10 can be installed in units of one or two. Depending on the island facility, setting change or setting confirmation may be performed while the inner frame 12 is locked. Therefore, depending on the type of operation of the hall (island facilities), the setting change or setting confirmation is not always performed by opening the inner frame 12, and the setting change or setting confirmation work is performed on condition that the door opening switch 208g is opened. In such a configuration, the operation must be performed once the inner frame 12 is opened, and the operation becomes complicated.

  Therefore, when a dip switch or the like is provided in a part (for example, in the main control device 110) which cannot be operated by an employee or the like, and opening in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the opening of the inner frame 12 is an essential condition. The determination may be made so that the administrator of the hall or the like can determine whether or not the determination is made. With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the security performance of the pachinko machine 10 while considering the work efficiency according to each hall environment.

<Modification 113>
In the twenty-sixth embodiment, the front frame 14 may be configured so that the employee cannot close the front frame 14 without permission during the maintenance work in which the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are both opened. Specifically, when both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are opened, the front frame 14 cannot be closed with respect to the inner frame 12 unless a dedicated key is inserted by a hall manager or the like. Constitute. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent an employee who does not have the authority to change the setting or the like from closing the front frame 14 without permission at the time of maintenance work, thereby making it impossible to change the setting or check the setting. The security performance of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

<Modification 114>
In the twenty-seventh embodiment, the upper surface of the lower side protrusion 92a of the back pack 92 is in contact with the upper side protrusion 171a of the protective cover member 140 and the lower surface. On the other hand, you may comprise so that the upper surface of the lower side protrusion 92a, the upper side protrusion 171a, and a lower surface may be engaged. In this case, when the inner frame 12 is opened, the engagement is easily disengaged. When the inner frame 12 is closed, when the upper side surface of the lower side protrusion 92a and the upper side protrusion 171a engage with the lower side surface. It is suitable. With this configuration, the security performance of the back side of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved without any trouble during the maintenance work of the inner frame 12.

<Modification 115>
In the twenty-fourth embodiment, the protective cover member 140 is attached to the right side plate 11d of the outer frame 11 in a cantilever manner. On the other hand, the protective cover member 140 may be attached to both ends of the support plate from the right plate 11d to the left plate 11c. With this configuration, the security performance of the back side of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved with a simple configuration while increasing the rigidity of the protective cover member 140. In addition, since the protective cover member 140 does not cover the upper or lower back surface of the pachinko machine 10 and does not interfere with replenishment or discharge of balls, the pachinko machine 10 using the protective cover member 140 for existing island facilities Can be attached.

<Modified example 116>
In the twenty-fourth embodiment, the cover-side protrusion 172 is fixedly formed at a predetermined position on the cover plate 171. On the other hand, the cover-side protrusion 172 may be configured to be separable and attachable from the cover plate 171 so that the position of the cover-side protrusion 172 in the cover plate 171 can be changed and adjusted. Conventionally, the general pachinko machine 10 is configured such that the game board 13 can be replaced. Here, when the game board 13 attached to the outer frame 11 of the pachinko machine 10 has been changed, the position of the setting unit 100d of the main control device 110 attached to the replaced game board 13 may be changed. is there. In such a case, the inner frame 12 may not be able to be closed because the cover-side protrusion 172 of the protective cover member 140 does not fit into the setting unit 100d of the main control device 110. On the other hand, in the case where the game board 13 is replaced and the position of the setting unit 100d of the main control device 110 is changed by configuring the cover-side protrusion 172 so as to be detachable and attachable from the cover plate 171. However, since the cover-side protrusion 172 can be fitted into the setting unit 100d, the security performance of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved, and the cover-side protrusion 172 of the protection cover member 140 and the main control device 110 can be mounted. The inner frame 12 can be locked without interfering with the setting unit 100d, so that the conventional distribution form of the pachinko machine 10 is not hindered.

<Modification 117>
In the twenty-fourth embodiment, the protective cover member 140 is attached to the right side plate 11d of the outer frame 11. On the other hand, the protection cover member 140 may be attached to the left side plate 11c, the upper plate 11a, and the lower plate 11b in a cantilever manner. Also in this case, it is preferable to attach the mounting surface 151 of the cover mounting portion 150 of the protective cover member 140 from the inner wall surface of each of the plates 11a to 11c.

<Modification 118>
In the twenty-fourth embodiment, the mounting surface 151 of the cover mounting portion 150 of the protective cover member 140 is attached to the inner wall surface of the right side plate 11 d of the outer frame 11. On the other hand, the mounting surface 151 may be mounted on the outer wall surface of the right side plate 11d, or the cover mounting portion 150 of the protective cover member 140 may be fitted (inserted) inside the right side plate 11d. .

<Modification 119>
In the twenty-seventh embodiment, the protection cover member 140 is configured to cover the setting key 501 and the sealing unit 100c of the main control device 110 and the sealing portion 111a of the payout control device 111. On the other hand, the control devices 110 and 111 are entirely covered by the protective cover member 140, and in addition to the control devices 110 and 111, other control devices (for example, It may be configured to cover part or all of the launch control device 112 and the power supply device 115). By covering many control devices with the protective cover member 140, the security performance on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved with a simple configuration.

<Modification 120>
In the twenty-sixth embodiment, the configuration can be changed or the setting can be confirmed only when the inner frame 12 is open to the outer frame 11 and the front frame 14 is closed to the inner frame 12. However, in other situations (for example, when the inner frame 12 is not open, or when the inner frame 12 is open but the front frame 14 is also open), setting change or setting confirmation cannot be performed. Was composed. On the other hand, the configuration may be such that the setting can be changed or the setting can be confirmed when the front frame 14 is open even if the inner frame 12 is not open.

<Modification 121>
In the above embodiments, the RAM erase switch 122 is mounted on the power supply 115. On the other hand, the RAM erasing switch 122 may be mounted on the main control device 110 or the payout control device 111.

<Modification 122>
In the twenty-seventh embodiment, the upper surface of the lower protrusion of the back pack 92 is in contact with the upper protrusion of the protective cover member 140 and the lower surface. On the other hand, the upper surface of the lower protrusion of the back pack 92 is engaged with the upper surface of the protective cover member 140 and the lower surface thereof, and the engagement is released with the operation of the cylinder lock 20. May be.

<Modification 123>
In the twenty-seventh embodiment, the upper surface of the lower protrusion of the back pack 92 is in contact with the upper protrusion of the protective cover member 140 and the lower surface. On the other hand, the cover plate 171 of the protective cover member 140 may be configured to abut or engage with the outermost surfaces of the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111.

<Modification 124>
In the twenty-fourth embodiment, the cover-side protrusion 172 is formed in a wall shape surrounding the setting key 501 of the setting unit 100d. On the other hand, the cover-side protrusion 172 may be configured by a protrusion that fits over the entire setting portion 100d.

<Modification 125>
In the twenty-seventh embodiment, the upper surface of the lower protrusion of the back pack 92 is in contact with the upper protrusion of the protective cover member 140 and the lower surface. On the other hand, the back pack 92 is extended to the portion of the payout control device 111, and the payout control device 111 is mounted on the back surface side of the backpack 92. Then, a part of the extended back pack 92 may be located in a space between the inner frame 12 and the protective cover member 140. With this configuration, even when the back pack 92 is to be opened to the back side of the pachinko machine 10 when the inner frame 12 is locked, the opening is interfered by the protective cover member 140. Therefore, when the inner frame 12 is locked, it is possible to prevent the backpack 92 from improperly acting on the audio lamp control device 113 disposed inside the pachinko machine 10.

<Modification 126>
In the above-described twenty-fourth to twenty-seventh embodiments, the protective cover member 140 is constituted by one member. On the other hand, two or more protective cover members may be attached to the outer frame 11 so as to cover part or all of the back side of the pachinko machine 10.

<Modification 127>
In each of the above embodiments, the jackpot probability and the like can be changed by the setting key 501. On the other hand, the number of prize balls to be paid out when the player wins one winning opening by the setting key 501 (for example, change from three to five), and the driving of a movable role assisting winning in the winning opening. Time (change from 3 seconds to 5 seconds), drive width (for example, change from 20 mm to 30 mm), or a member (for example, a stage or a croon on which the ball can roll) that affects the flow-down state of the ball It is possible to change the setting relating to the degree of advantage to the player in a plurality of steps, such as the inclination mode (for example, change from 1 degree to 3 degrees) and the inclination mode of the pachinko machine 10 itself (for example, change from 1 degree to 3 degrees). You may comprise.

<Modification 128>
In the above embodiments, the keyhole of the setting key 501 is configured to face the back side of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, the keyhole of the setting key 501 is configured so as to face the lateral direction (leftward or rightward) of the pachinko machine 10, the oblique direction of the pachinko machine 10, or the front side of the pachinko machine 10. You may.

<Modification 129>
In the twenty-eighth embodiment, the big hit random numbers, the small hit random numbers, and the lost random numbers are set as continuous values, and a range determination is made as to whether a big hit or a small hit (for example, “ (Whether it is 0 or more and not more than 49)) so as to reduce the control burden of the main control device 110. On the other hand, each random number value (that is, the big hit random number value and the small hit random number value) that gives the game value may be arranged in a dispersed (dissipated) manner instead of a continuous arrangement. That is, any value may be used as long as the random number value is distributed so as to have the big hit probability (small hit probability, loss probability) equivalent to that of the above-described embodiment, and specifically, for example, updated with “0 to 999” In the case of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot random number value in the low probability state is "7,341,555,777,831", and the jackpot probability is 5/1000. 77, 175, 223, 315, 415, 526, 634, 717, 845 "so that the small hit probability becomes 10/10000.

  Here, when a value that becomes a random number of the jackpot regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, in the low-probability state and the high-probability state, if it is “0 to 50”) continuously exists, There is a possibility that the value can be predicted from the outside, and there is a possibility that the possibility of illegally winning a jackpot is increased. Therefore, by configuring as in the above-described modified example, it is possible to make it difficult to externally predict each random number value to which a game value is given, to enhance the effect of suppressing fraud, and to improve the security performance of the pachinko machine 10.

  In the above-described modification, the jackpot random number value for the low probability state and the jackpot random number value for the high probability state, which are defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 272a, are respectively set so as not to be duplicated. A jackpot random value may be set. With this configuration, the value of the random number to be a big hit is changed by changing the value of the random number to be a big hit according to the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state or the low probability state). Can be hardly predicted, so that the security performance of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

<Modification 130>
In the twenty-eighth embodiment, in the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol that can be changed simultaneously, if a small hit is won in one special symbol that is stopped first, it is stopped later. It was configured to eliminate the jackpot of the other special symbol that was played. On the other hand, when a small symbol is won in one special symbol that is stopped earlier, the progress of the dynamic display of the other special symbol that derives the later large jackpot to be stopped is temporarily stopped, and the small symbol is determined. After the small hitting game based on one special symbol to be derived is completed, the execution of the dynamic display of the other special symbol that has been paused is restarted, and the big hit is derived in the dynamic display. Good. With this configuration, all of the winning combinations (game value) can be provided to the player, and an event (so-called damage) in which the game value is not given even though the combination is won is eliminated. And the player can be prevented from getting up to play.

  In the twenty-eighth embodiment, when the dynamic display that stops first derives a small hit game, and when the dynamic display that stops later can derive a big hit game or a small hit game, the dynamic display that stops first is determined. The big hit game or the small hit game that can be derived by the target display is configured to disappear. On the other hand, when the dynamic display that stops first is a jackpot game, when the dynamic display that stops later can derive a jackpot game or a small jackpot game, it can be derived by the dynamic display that stops later. The big hit game or the small hit game may be configured to disappear.

<Modification 131>
In the twenty-eighth to thirty-second embodiments, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type random number C1, and the like are updated by software processing such as timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 466). random number). On the other hand, a configuration may be adopted in which the jackpot random number counter C1 and the like are updated by a random number generation IC whose update cycle is faster than the soft random number (so-called hard random number). With this configuration, it is difficult to grasp the random number value being updated from the outside, and the security performance can be improved.

<Modification 132>
In the twenty-eighth embodiment to the thirty-second embodiment, the number of the big hit random numbers or the number of the small hit random values increases evenly as the set value increases. On the other hand, the number of the big hit random number values (or the small hit random number values) may be increased unequally or at a predetermined ratio each time the set value increases. Specifically, for example, the number of jackpot random numbers is increased by “2” for each of the set values “1” to “3”, while the number of jackpot random numbers is increased for the set values of “4” to “6”. Is increased by “5”. With this configuration, the game value that can be provided by the setting difference changes greatly, and a game with inflection (sharpness) due to the setting difference can be provided, and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Modification 133>
In the twenty-ninth embodiment, the type of the small hit game is determined using the small hit type counter C5. On the other hand, instead of using the small hit type counter C5, the large hit type counter C2 may be used to determine the type of the small hit game. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the number of counters, and to use a program for determining the type of big hits at the time of selecting a small hit type, thereby reducing the program capacity.

<Modification 134>
In the twenty-eighth to thirty-second embodiments, the combination of the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is changed for each set value. On the other hand, the big hit type corresponding to the value of the big hit type counter or the small hit type counter is changed for each set value, and the setting difference is caused by a change in the selection ratio of the big hit type or the small hit type. Is also good.

<Modification 135>
In the twenty-eighth embodiment, a configuration command is transmitted for each special symbol (ie, the special figure 1 determination command and the special figure 2 determination command). On the other hand, when one special symbol becomes a small hit or a big hit and the other special symbol is stopped, a common determination command in which both special symbols are stopped by one command is transmitted, and the fluctuation effect of both special symbols is performed. It may be configured to stop.

<Modification 136>
In the twenty-ninth embodiment, the number of executions of the dynamic display of each special symbol in the "time reduction state" is counted using the special figure 2 time reduction counter and the total time reduction counter. On the other hand, a special figure 1 time reduction counter corresponding to the first special symbol may be provided so that the “time reduction state” may be terminated depending on the number of times the first special symbol is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to enrich the variation of the game and improve the interest of the game.

<Modification 137>
In the twenty-ninth embodiment, the dynamic display of the second special symbol is configured to be executed prior to the dynamic display of the first special symbol. On the other hand, each special symbol may be executed in the order in which the dynamic display is acquired (the order in which the special symbols are held), or the dynamic display of the first special symbol may be replaced with the dynamic display of the second special symbol. You may comprise so that it may perform more preferentially.

<Modification 138>
In the twenty-eighth embodiment to the thirtieth embodiment, a random number value that gives a game value (that is, a jackpot random number value) is changed in accordance with the setting change, and the changed value is a random value value that does not give a game value (that is, a random value). (A random number value). On the other hand, when a random number value (for example, a jackpot random value) that gives a game value is changed due to a setting change, the change is replaced with a random value (for example, a small random number value) that gives another game value. )). With this configuration, it is possible to provide a difference in the game value that can be given for each setting, provide a game with intonation (sharpness) for each setting, and improve the interest of the game.

<Modification 139>
In the twenty-eighth embodiment and the like, in the big hit random number table 272a, each random number is arranged in ascending order of “range of big hit random value”, “range of small hit random value”, “range of lost random value”. Had been assigned. On the other hand, in the jackpot random number table 272a2, in the ascending order, “range of jackpot random value”, “range of small hit random value”, “range of jackpot random value (hereinafter, referred to as“ range of re-hit jackpot random value ”)” , The random number values may be assigned so as to be arranged in the order of “range of lost random number values”. Here, the “range of re-jackpot random numbers” is configured to correspond to the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers due to the setting change. With such a configuration, the range of the random number value (ie, the increase in the jackpot random number value) corresponding to the role increased by the setting difference is changed to the random number value (ie, the lost random number value) corresponding to the role decreasing by the setting difference. ) Can be fixed, and the range of the random number value (ie, the fixed portion of the jackpot random number and the small random number value) that is not changed with the setting change can be fixed. Thereby, for example, in the control program of the hit / fail judgment, while increasing the number of jackpot random numbers due to the setting change to the set value while sharing the basic hit / fail judgment of the fixed random value range with all the set values. In addition, it is possible to make an additional determination in accordance with the above, thereby facilitating the design of the control program and reducing the number of development steps.

<Modification 140>
In the twenty-eighth embodiment and the like, in the big hit random number table 272a, the respective random numbers are arranged in the ascending order of “range of big hit random values”, “range of small hit random values”, and “range of lost random numbers”. Had been assigned. On the other hand, the configuration may be such that each random value is defined (set) in the order of increasing (or decreasing) number of random numbers. With this configuration, for example, when the determination of the random value is performed in the ascending order, the determination of the winning combination that is easy to win can be performed first, and the control load can be reduced.

<Modification 141>
In the twenty-eighth embodiment and the like, each random number is defined in the jackpot random number table 272a so as to be in the order of “big hit random number value range”, “small hit random number value range”, and “losing random number value range” ( Settings). On the other hand, the “range of jackpot random number values” that is increased with the setting change is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 272a so as to be adjacent (adjacent) to the “range of lost random number values” that is decreased with the setting change. ). Specifically, in the big hit random number table 272a, each random value is defined (set) so as to be in the order of “range of small hit random value”, “range of big hit random value”, and “range of lost random value”. . With this configuration, the random number value that increases due to the setting difference (that is, the increase in the jackpot random number value) is made adjacent to the random number value that decreases due to the setting difference (that is, the lost random number value), and with the change in the setting. The range of the random number value that is not changed (ie, the small random number value per hit) can be fixed. Thus, for example, in a control program for determining whether or not a small hit is appropriate, the determination of the random number value of the small hit is made common to all the set values, and the increase in the random number of the big hit due to the setting change is additionally determined according to the set value. This facilitates the design of the control program and reduces the number of development steps.

<Modification 142>
In the twenty-eighth embodiment and the like, when transitioning from the “normal gaming state” to the “probability changing state”, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is configured to be improved (increased by 10 times). On the other hand, when transitioning from the “normal gaming state” to the “probability changing state”, the small hit probability of the special symbol may be improved. Further, when transitioning from the “normal gaming state” to the “probability changing state”, the degree of increase in the special symbol jackpot probability may be set to 10 times or less (for example, 2 times). Furthermore, in the case of transition from the “normal gaming state” to the “probability changing state”, both the jackpot probability and the small hit probability are set to be improved (for example, the big hit probability is five times and the small hit probability is also five times). Good.

<Modification 143>
In the twenty-eighth embodiment, the large winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 is opened and driven in the big hit game, and the small winning opening 72a of the second variable winning device 72 different from the variable winning device 65 is opened and driven in the small winning game. Was configured. On the other hand, in the jackpot game, the large winning opening 65a is driven to open in the first driving mode (for example, a maximum opening time of 30 seconds × 16 rounds). The opening drive may be performed in a second driving mode (for example, a maximum opening time of 1.8 seconds × 1 round) which is disadvantageous for the player. This eliminates the need to share a special winning port 65a for the jackpot game and the small jackpot game and to provide another device (for example, a small winning port), thereby reducing the number of parts of the pachinko machine 10 and reducing the number of pachinko machines. 10 can be reduced.

<Modification 144>
In the twenty-eighth embodiment, the winning probability of the small hit game in the second special symbol is higher than the winning probability of the small hit game in the first special symbol. On the other hand, the winning probability of the small hitting game in the first special symbol may be configured to be higher than the winning probability of the small hitting game in the second special symbol, or the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be used. The winning probability of the small hit game in may be configured to be equal.

<Modification 145>
In the twenty-eighth embodiment and the like, the setting status of the pachinko machine 10 is not notified, and the number of appearances of the big hit game and the number of appearances of the small hit game are output to the outside, and the contents are displayed on a data lamp or the like. The configuration is such that the setting of the pachinko machine 10 is suggested to the player based on the number of outgoings. On the other hand, you may be comprised so that a setting situation of the pachinko machine 10 may be notified (suggested) to a player based on establishment of a predetermined condition. Specifically, for example, when a predetermined number of dynamic displays are executed, a part of an ending screen of a jackpot game, a part of an effect screen executed at predetermined intervals, or immediately after winning a predetermined combination, and the like. Then, an image indicating the setting contents of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, a character design corresponding to the setting value) is displayed. With such a configuration, in addition to the number of appearances of the big hit game and the small hit game, the setting contents of the pachinko machine 10 can be suggested to the player by performing the game, and the player checks the above image and the like. In addition, the number of appearances of the big hit game and the small hit game gives rise to a game property of estimating the setting contents of the pachinko machine 10, thereby improving the interest of the game.

<Modification 146>
In the above-described thirteenth embodiment and the like, a so-called loop that maintains the “super probability fluctuation state” or the “probability fluctuation state” only when the “super probability fluctuation state” or the “probability fluctuation state” is entered until the next jackpot occurs. It consisted of type game specifications. On the other hand, even if any of the jackpots is won after the end of the jackpot, a game in which a “probability change state” (a so-called “ST type”) in which execution of a predetermined number of dynamic displays is completed after the end of the jackpot is given. It may be configured by specification. With this configuration, it is possible to enrich the variation of the game and contribute to the improvement of the interest of the game.

<Modification 147>
In the above thirteenth embodiment, when the special symbol is in the high probability state by entering the “super probability fluctuation state” or the “probability fluctuation state”, the player can recognize that the special symbol is in the high probability state. It was configured to inform. On the other hand, unlike the above “super-probability fluctuation state” or “probability fluctuation state”, the so-called “latent probability fluctuation state” in which the special symbol is in the high probability state but does not suggest (notify) to that effect to the player is executed. You may comprise so that it is possible. With this configuration, when a jackpot is won, the player does not recognize whether the special symbol is in the high probability state or not, and a gaming property that indicates which gaming state the gaming state is created, and By providing variations and realizing various game characteristics, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Modification 148>
In the twenty-eighth embodiment and the like, in all the setting values, when the special symbol changes from the low probability state to the high probability state, the jackpot probability is increased evenly (all 10 times increase). On the other hand, the increase rate of the jackpot probability is changed for each set value (for example, the set value “1” is five times, the set value “2” is six times,..., The set value “6” is ten times, etc.). It may be configured as follows. With such a configuration, the higher the setting, the easier it is to win the jackpot in the high probability state of the special symbol, and the phenomenon itself of winning the jackpot game earlier in the high probability state becomes the setting suggestion. Therefore, in the high-probability state, a game characteristic of how quickly to win the jackpot is created, and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Modification 149>
In the twenty-eighth embodiment and the like, in the low probability state and the high probability state of the special symbol, a setting difference is generated in the jackpot probability in any state. On the other hand, the configuration is such that the setting difference of the jackpot probability in one of the states (low-probability state or high-probability state) is eliminated and the setting difference of the jackpot probability in the other state (high-probability state or low-probability state) is provided. May be.

<Modification 150>
In the thirty-first embodiment, the big hit random value and the small hit random value are increased for each set value, and the increase of each random value is compensated for from the lost random value. On the other hand, only the jackpot random value may be increased for each set value, and the increase in the jackpot random value may be compensated for from the small jackpot random value and the lost random value. With this configuration, it is possible to compensate for the change in the number of jackpot random numbers based on the setting change from the small hit random value and the loss random value, and to fix the change in the jackpot random value in a fixed manner. There is no need to supplement from a predetermined random number value of one. Therefore, it is not necessary to secure the number of the predetermined random number values from the predetermined random number value of 1 for the change of the jackpot random number value, so that there is no restriction at the time of designing the game specification, and the degree of freedom in designing the game specification is increased. Amusement of games can be improved. In this case, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers may be equally compensated for by the number of small hit random numbers and the number of lost random numbers, or may be reduced by the number of small hit random numbers and the number of lost random numbers. Supplementation may be made so that the rates become equal.

<Modification 151>
In the twenty-eighth embodiment, as the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers due to the setting change, the number of random numbers corresponding to the combination that is likely to be acquired in the gaming state with the highest stay rate (ie, the loss in the “normal gaming state”) (The number of random numbers) is reduced, and the decrease is the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers. On the other hand, for each special symbol executed in the gaming state, the special symbols may be compensated by reducing the number of random numbers corresponding to winning combinations that are easily acquired in the gaming state. Specifically, for example, in the "normal gaming state", in the first special symbol that is easy to execute, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers is compensated for by reducing the number of lost random numbers that are most easily acquired. In the "probability variation state", the second special symbol that is easy to execute is configured to compensate for the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers by reducing the number of small jackpot random values that are most easily obtained. You may.

<Modification 152>
In the twenty-eighth embodiment, as the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers due to the setting change, the number of lost random numbers that are not displayed (accounted) in a large (clear) manner on the data lamp is reduced, and the decrease is It was configured to compensate for the increased number of jackpot random numbers. On the other hand, as the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers due to the setting change, the number of random numbers corresponding to other roles other than the losing role that is not largely (clearly) displayed (accounted) on the data lamp is reduced. , May be configured to compensate as the number of jackpot random numbers for the decrease and increase.

<Modification 153>
In the twenty-eighth embodiment, the maximum update value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is set to “9999” for all set values, and the number of jackpot random numbers that can be a big hit is changed for each set value, and the change is lost. It was configured to compensate from random numbers and to change the jackpot derivation probability. On the other hand, the maximum update value of the jackpot random number counter C1 may be changed for each set value to change the jackpot derivation probability. Specifically, for example, the number of jackpot random numbers is set to 100 (for example, “0 to 99”) for all set values, while the maximum update value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is “9999” for the set value “1”. , The maximum update value of the jackpot random number value is “9899” at the setting value “2”, the maximum update value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is “9799” at the setting value “3”, and the maximum update value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is at the setting value “4”. When the maximum update value is "9699", the set value is "5", the maximum update value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is "9599", and when the set value is "6", the maximum update value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is "9499". The number of lost random numbers may be reduced to change the jackpot derivation probability.

<Modification 154>
In the twenty-eighth embodiment, the number of small random numbers is smaller than the number of random numbers in the first special symbol, so that the probability of derivation is higher than the small symbol in the first special symbol. The number of small hit random numbers is set to be larger than the number of lost random numbers so that the probability of deriving the small hit is higher than the loss. On the other hand, in the first special symbol, the number of small hit random numbers is larger than the number of lost random numbers, or in the second special symbol, the number of small random numbers is smaller (or smaller) than the number of lost random values. (A random number value itself may not be provided). When the number of jackpot random numbers is changed by changing the setting, a larger random number value other than the jackpot random number or an increase in the number of jackpot random numbers from the smaller random number value is compensated. May be configured.

<Modification 155>
In the twenty-eighth embodiment, the jackpot, the small jackpot, and the losing hand are provided as the extracting hand, and each hand is configured to be able to be extracted. On the other hand, as a role in which a game value is given to a player, a medium hit role in which a game value of less than a big hit or a small value or more is provided is provided, and each of the roles can be extracted. While increasing the number of random values corresponding to one of the roles (for example, a jackpot, a middle, or a small jackpot), while increasing the number of other roles (for example, a middle, a small, or a small jackpot) The configuration may be such that the number of random numbers corresponding to the losing role is reduced. In addition, as a big hit, a medium hit, and a small hit, for example, a 15R big hit as a big hit, an 8R big hit as a middle hit, a 4R big hit as a small hit, a probable big hit as a big hit, a latent probability big hit as a middle hit, a small hit When a time saving jackpot is applicable, a 15R certain variable jackpot as a jackpot, a 15R time jackpot as a medium hit, and a 15R regular jackpot as a small hit (a jackpot that does not shift to the “probability fluctuation state” or the “time reduction state”) may be applicable. Is exemplified.

<33rd embodiment>
Hereinafter, a thirty-third embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 which is a kind of gaming machine will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 506 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 507 is an exploded perspective view showing a main configuration of the pachinko machine 10. In FIG. 507, the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the game area PA is omitted for convenience.

  As shown in FIG. 506, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine main body 12 rotatably mounted forward with respect to the outer frame 11. Have. The outer frame 11 is formed by connecting a wooden plate to four sides, and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in a game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to island facilities. In the pachinko machine 10, the outer frame 11 is not an indispensable configuration, but may be a configuration in which the outer frame 11 is provided in an island facility of a game hall.

  As shown in FIG. 507, the gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 arranged behind the inner frame 13. ing. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. More specifically, the inner frame 13 is rotatable forward with the left side being a rotation base end side and the right side being a rotation end side in a front view.

  A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13. The front door frame 14 is rotatable forward with the left side being a rotation base end side and the right side being a rotation tip side in a front view. A back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable rearward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation front end side in front view.

  The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at the tip end of its rotation, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 so that it cannot be opened with respect to the outer frame 11. The door frame 14 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 so that the door frame 14 cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using an unlocking key on a cylinder lock 17 provided to be exposed on the front of the pachinko machine 10.

  Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

  The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 whose outer shape is substantially the same as the outer frame 11. A substantially elliptical window hole 23 is formed in the center of the resin base 21. A game board 24 is detachably attached to the resin base 21. The game board 24 is made of plywood, and a game area PA formed on the front face of the game board 24 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 23 of the resin base 21.

  Here, the configuration of the game board 24 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 508 is a front view of the game board 24.

  An inner rail portion 25 and an outer rail portion 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to partition a part of an outer edge of the game area PA, and the inner rail portion 25 and the outer rail portion 26 provide guidance means. As a guide rail. A game ball fired from a game ball firing mechanism 27 (see FIG. 507) attached below the window hole 23 in the resin base 21 is guided to an upper portion of the game area PA by a guide rail.

  Incidentally, the game ball launching mechanism 27 includes a launch rail 27a extending toward the guide rail, a ball feeder 27b that supplies game balls stored in an upper plate 55a to be described later onto the launch rail 27a, and a launch rail 27a. And a solenoid 27c which is an electric actuator for firing the game ball supplied to the guide rail toward the guide rail. When the firing operation device (or operation handle) 28 provided on the front door frame 14 is rotated, the drive of the solenoid 27c is controlled, and a game ball is fired.

  The game board 24 has a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning opening 31, a special electric winning device 32, a first operating opening 33, a second operating opening 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a special drawing unit 37, a general drawing unit 38, and the like. ing. A total of four general winning ports 31 are provided, and one each other is provided.

  Even if a ball enters the through gate 35, the payout of the game ball is not executed. On the other hand, when balls enter the general winning opening 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. More specifically, the number of prize balls is determined when one game ball enters the first operation port 33 or when one game ball enters the second operation port 34. In the case where one prize ball is paid out and one game ball enters the general winning opening 31, 10 prize balls are paid out and the special electric prize winning device 32 is executed. When one of the game balls enters, the payout of 15 prize balls is executed.

  The number of prize balls is arbitrary. For example, the second operation port 34 may have a smaller number of prize balls than the first operation port 33, and the second operation port 34 may have the first operation port. The number of award balls may be larger than 33.

  In addition, an out port 24a is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 24, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 24a. In addition, a large number of nails 24b are planted on the game board 24 for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the game ball, and various members such as a windmill are provided.

  Here, entering the ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and is not limited to the mode of being discharged from the game area PA after passing through the opening, but also from the game area PA after passing through the opening. A mode in which the game area PA continues to flow down without being discharged is also included. However, in the following description, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the through gate 35 are distinguished from each other in order to clearly distinguish game balls from entering the out opening 24a. Entering a game ball into is also referred to as winning.

  The first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34 are unitized as operation port devices and installed on the game board 24. The first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34 are both open upward. The two working ports 33 and 34 are arranged in the vertical direction such that the first working port 33 faces upward. The second operating port 34 is provided with a general electric part 34a as a guide piece composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. The game ball cannot enter the second operation port 34 in the closed state of the general electric role object 34a, and the prize in the second operation port 34 becomes possible when the general electric role object 34a is opened.

  A through gate 35 is provided upstream of the second operation port 34 in the downflow direction of the game ball. The through gate 35 has a through hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction, and a game ball that has won the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after winning. Thereby, the game ball that has won the through gate 35 can win the second operating port 34.

  On the basis of the winning in the through gate 35, the general-purpose part 34a of the second operating port 34 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Specifically, an internal lottery is performed with a winning in the through gate 35 as a trigger, and a general-purpose display of a general-purpose unit 38 provided in a lower right corner which is an area where the game ball does not pass in the game area PA. The display of the pattern is changed in the section 38a. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is the electrification opening winning and the stop result corresponding to the result is displayed and the variable display on the ordinary figure display section 38a is ended, the state shifts to the ordinary electricity opening state. In the normal-power open state, the general-purpose part 34a is opened in a predetermined manner.

  In addition, the general-purpose display unit 38a is configured by a segment display in which a plurality of display segments by LEDs are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited thereto. It may be constituted by other types of display devices such as a display device, a CRT or a dot matrix display. Further, as the pattern variably displayed on the ordinary figure display unit 38a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, or A configuration in which a plurality of types of colors are switched and displayed may be considered.

  In the general-purpose unit 38, a general-purpose display display 38b is provided at a position adjacent to the general-purpose display 38a. The number of awarded game balls to the through gate 35 is retained up to a maximum of four, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by lighting the general-purpose reservation display section 38b.

  A lottery is performed with a winning in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 as a trigger. The lottery result is clearly shown through the display effects on the symbol display device 41 of the special figure unit 37 and the variable display unit 36.

  More specifically, the special figure unit 37 is provided with a special figure display section 37a. The display area of the special figure display section 37a is smaller than the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. In the special figure display unit 37a, a change in the pattern or a predetermined display is performed by performing a lottery with a winning in the first operating port 33 or a winning in the second operating port 34 as a trigger. Then, a result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. In addition, the special figure display unit 37a is configured by a segment display in which a plurality of display segments by LEDs are arranged in a predetermined mode, but is not limited thereto. It may be constituted by other types of display devices such as a display device, a CRT or a dot matrix display. Further, as a pattern displayed on the special figure display section 37a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, or a plurality of types of colors May be displayed.

  In the special figure unit 37, a special figure reservation display section 37b is provided at a position adjacent to the special figure display section 37a. The number of game balls winning in the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 is retained up to a maximum of four, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting the special figure reservation display section 37b.

  More specifically, the symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, but may be another display device having a display screen such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, and may be a dot matrix display device. You may.

  In the symbol display device 41, when a variable display or a predetermined display of a pattern is performed on the special figure display unit 37a based on a winning in the first operating port 33 or a winning in the second operating port 34, the symbol is displayed in accordance with the display. A variable display or a predetermined display is performed. For example, on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, three symbol columns of an upper row, a middle row, and a lower row are set as a plurality of display areas, and a main number with “1” to “9” in each symbol row. The symbols are scrolled and displayed in an ascending or descending order. In this scroll display, first, scroll display in all the symbol rows is started, and the display is switched from the scroll display to the standby display in the order of the upper symbol row → the lower symbol row → the middle symbol row. The process is terminated in a state where the symbol is statically displayed. Then, in the game time in which the game result is a jackpot result, a predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on an active line set in advance on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. Specifically, the same odd symbol combination is stopped and displayed when the most advantageous big hit result to be described later is obtained, and the same even symbol combination is stopped and displayed when the low-probability big hit result to be described later. When the winning combination is a low winning winning probability big hit result, the combination of the symbols which is not the same symbol combination but is not stopped and displayed when the result is not the low winning winning high probability big hit result is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, in the symbol display device 41, not only the display effect triggered by winning in the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34, but also the display effect in the opening / closing execution mode to which the process shifts after winning is performed. Will be In addition, based on the winning of one of the operating ports 33, 34, the display is started on the special figure display unit 37a and the symbol display device 41, and a predetermined result is displayed and ended until one game is played. Equivalent to times. In addition, the mode of the variable display of the symbol in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and is arbitrary. The number of symbol columns, the direction of the variable display of the symbol in the symbol column, the number of symbols in each symbol column, etc. Can be changed as appropriate. Further, the pattern variably displayed on the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-described symbol, and for example, a configuration in which only numbers are variably displayed as the symbol may be employed.

  If a win is won by a lottery based on a prize in the first operating port 33 or a prize in the second operating port 34, the mode is shifted to an open / close execution mode in which a prize in the special electric prize device 32 is enabled. The special electric winning device 32 has a large winning opening (not shown) communicating with the back side of the game board 24 and an opening / closing door 32a for opening and closing the large winning opening. The opening / closing door 32a is arranged in one of a closed state and an open state. Specifically, the opening / closing door 32a is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot be won, and is switched to an open state in which game balls can be won when a transition to the open / close execution mode is won in the internal lottery. It has become. Incidentally, the open / close execution mode is a mode to which a shift is made when a winning result is obtained. In the closed state, a prize is not impossible, but a prize may be less likely to occur than in the open state.

  FIG. 509 is an explanatory diagram for describing a configuration related to discharge of game balls flowing down the game area PA.

  As described above, a game ball that has entered any of the general winning opening 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the out opening 24a is discharged from the gaming area PA. In other words, the game ball fired from the game ball firing mechanism 27 and flowing into the game area PA is one of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the out opening 24a. Is discharged from the game area PA by entering the ball. A game ball that has entered one of the general winning port 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the out port 24a is guided to the back side of the gaming board 24.

  On the back surface of the game board 24, discharge passage portions 42 to 48 are formed corresponding to the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the out opening 24a, respectively. . The game balls that have flowed into the discharge passages 42 to 48 flow down the discharge passages 42 to 48 that flow in, and are guided to the lower end of the game board 24 on the back side of the game board 24, and are discharged to a discharge ball collection unit (not shown). Collected. The game balls collected by the discharge ball collection unit are discharged to the ball circulation device of the island facility where the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall.

  Various detection sensors 42a to 48a for detecting game balls are provided in the respective discharge passages 42 to 48. The discharge passages 42 to 48 and the detection sensors 42a to 48a will be described below. Since the four general winning openings 31 are provided as described above, there are discharge passage portions 42 to 44 corresponding to each of the four. In this case, one detection sensor 42a is provided for each of the first discharge passage 42 corresponding to the leftmost general winning opening 31 and the second discharge passage 43 corresponding to the general winning opening 31 adjacent to the right. 43a is provided. Specifically, the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is provided so that the detection range exists in the middle position of the first discharge passage portion 42, and the detection range is provided in the middle position of the second discharge passage portion 43. The second winning opening detection sensor 43a is provided so as to be present. The game ball that has entered the leftmost general winning opening 31 is detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a while passing through the first discharge passage section 42, and the game has entered the general winning opening 31 adjacent to the right. The ball is detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a while passing through the second discharge passage portion 43. Further, a third discharge passage portion 44 formed so as to join the two general winning openings 31 on the right side at an intermediate position is provided. The third discharge passage portion 44 has an entrance-side area corresponding to each of the two general winning openings 31 and has one exit-side area by merging the entrance-side areas in the middle. are doing. The third winning opening detection sensor 44a is provided so that the detection range exists at a position in the middle of the exit side region in the third discharge passage portion 44. A game ball entering one of the two right winning holes 31 on the right side is detected by the third winning opening detection sensor 44a while passing through the third discharge passage portion 44.

  A fourth discharge passage portion 45 is provided corresponding to the special electric winning device 32. A special power detection sensor 45a is provided so that a detection range exists at an intermediate position of the fourth discharge passage portion 45, and a game ball that has entered the special power winning device 32 passes through the fourth discharge passage portion 45. It is detected by the special electricity detection sensor 45a. A fifth discharge passage 46 is provided corresponding to the first operation port 33. The first working port detection sensor 46a is provided so that a detection range exists at an intermediate position of the fifth discharge passage section 46, and a game ball entering the first working port 33 passes through the fifth discharge passage section 46. It is detected by the first working port detection sensor 46a during the passage. A sixth discharge passage portion 47 is provided corresponding to the second operation port 34. A second operating port detection sensor 47a is provided so that a detection range exists at an intermediate position of the sixth discharging path section 47, and a game ball entering the second operating port 34 passes through the sixth discharging path section 47. In the middle of the passage, it is detected by the second working port detection sensor 47a. A seventh discharge passage portion 48 exists corresponding to the out port 24a. An out-mouth detection sensor 48a is provided so that a detection range exists at an intermediate position of the seventh discharge passage portion 48. A game ball that has entered the out-open portion 24a passes through the seventh discharge passage portion 48. It is detected by the out mouth detection sensor 48a.

  The game ball detected by any one of the various detection sensors 42a to 48a is not detected by any of the other detection sensors 42a to 48a. A gate detection sensor 49a is also provided for the through gate 35, and a game ball passing through the through gate 35 while flowing down the game area PA is detected by the gate detection sensor 49a.

  As each of the various detection sensors 42a to 49a, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor is used, but any sensor can be used as long as it can individually detect game balls. The various detection sensors 42a to 49a are electrically connected to a main control device 60 described later, and the detection results of the various detection sensors 42a to 49a are output to the main control device 60. Specifically, each of the detection sensors 42a to 49a outputs a LOW level signal when a game ball is not detected, and outputs an HI level signal when a game ball is detected. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the relationship between HI and LOW may be reversed.

  As shown in FIG. 507, the front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13 in which the game board 24 having the above configuration is attached to the resin base 21. As shown in FIG. 506, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 51 so that almost the entire game area PA can be visually recognized from the front. The window 51 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a window panel 52 is fitted therein. The window panel 52 is formed of glass to be colorless and transparent, but is not limited to this. The window panel 52 may be formed of colorless and transparent by synthetic resin, and the game area PA is formed through the window panel 52 from the front of the pachinko machine 10. It may be formed colored and transparent as long as it is visible.

  Above the window 51, a display light emitting section 53 is provided. Further, a pair of left and right speaker units 54 for outputting a sound effect or the like according to a game state is provided. Below the window 51, an upper swelling portion 55 and a lower swelling portion 56 swelling toward the near side are vertically arranged side by side. An upper plate 55a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 55, and a lower plate 56a that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 56. The upper plate 55a has a function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from a payout device described later, and guiding the game balls to the game ball firing mechanism 27 side while aligning them in a line. The lower plate 56a has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper plate 55a.

  Next, the configuration of the back side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 507, a main control device 60 that controls the main control of the game is mounted on the back of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24). FIG. 510 is a front view of main controller 60.

  As shown in FIG. 510, the main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 housed in a board box 60a. An MPU 62 is mounted on an element mounting surface, which is one plate surface of the main control board 61. The board box 60a is formed transparent so that the MPU 62 housed in the board box 60a can be viewed from outside the board box 60a. Although the substrate box 60a is formed to be colorless and transparent, the substrate box 60a may be formed to be colored and transparent as long as the MPU 62 accommodated in the substrate box 60a can be viewed from the outside of the substrate box 60a. The main control device 60 is mounted on the back surface of the resin base 21 such that the opposing wall portion 60b facing the element mounting surface of the main control substrate 61 in the substrate box 60a faces the rear of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, by opening the gaming machine main body 12 to the front of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the outer frame 11 and exposing the back surface of the resin base 21, the opposing wall portion 60b of the board box 60a can be visually observed, and The MPU 62 can be viewed through the opposing wall 60b.

  The substrate box 60a is formed by combining a plurality of case bodies 60c in front and back. The plurality of case bodies 60c prevent the case bodies 60c from being separated from each other. Is provided. The plurality of coupling portions 60e are arranged in parallel on one side of the substantially rectangular parallelepiped substrate box 60a. Accordingly, even if the case body 60c is separated by breaking the part joint part 60e in a state in which the separation of the case body 60c is prevented using the part joint part 60e, another case By setting the portion 60e in the coupled state, it is possible to prevent the case body 60c from being separated again. Also, when the case body 60c is separated, the joint 60e is broken and traces thereof remain, so that it is possible to visually check the joint 60e to determine whether or not the case body 60c is illegally separated. It becomes possible. In addition, a sealing seal 60f is attached to one side of the substrate box 60a opposite to the side on which the connecting portions 60e are arranged side by side so as to straddle the boundary between the case bodies 60c. When the sealing seal 60f is peeled off, the adhesive layer remains on the case body 60c. This makes it possible to leave a trace of the sealing seal 60f peeled off when the case body 60c is separated.

  In the main control device 60 having the above configuration, the main control board 61 is owned by the administrator of the gaming hall to generate an opportunity to change the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 in the range from “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”. A setting key insertion section 68a in which a setting key is inserted and turned on; an update button 68b operated to sequentially change the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 after the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on; A reset button 68c operated to clear data in a main RAM 65 described later provided in the MPU 62 of the 60, a first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c for notifying the management result of the game history. , Are provided. A connection terminal of the external device is connected to the MPU 62 mounted on the main control board 61 so that the management result of the game history or the information (program and data) stored in the main ROM 64 is read by the external device. Terminal 68d for reading is provided. In addition, the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is not limited to six stages of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”, and is arbitrary as long as it is a plurality of stages.

  The setting key insertion section 68a, the update button 68b, the reset button 68c, the reading terminal 68d (that is, the MPU 62), and the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c are all provided on the element mounting surface of the main control board 61. ing. The element mounting surface of the main control board 61 faces the facing wall 60b of the board box 60a as described above, but the setting key insertion section 68a, the update button 68b, the reset button 68c, and the reading terminal 68d face each other. It is not covered by the wall 60b. That is, areas facing the setting key insertion section 68a, the update button 68b, the reset button 68c, and the reading terminal 68d are formed as individual openings in the opposing wall section 60b. Thus, the setting key can be inserted into the setting key insertion portion 68a without the need to open the substrate box 60a, the update button 68b can be pressed, and the reset button 68c is pressed. It is possible to connect a connection terminal of an external device to the reading terminal 68d.

  When the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion section 68a and rotated in a predetermined direction, the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on. By starting the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 in that state (that is, by starting the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 of the main control device 60), the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed. It becomes a state that can be changed. Then, each time the update button 68b is pressed once in this state, the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed one step at a time in the range of "Setting 1" to "Setting 6" in ascending order. When the update button 68b is operated in the state of "setting 6," the setting is updated to "setting 1." Further, the setting key inserted in the setting key insertion portion 68a is rotated from the ON operation position in the direction opposite to the predetermined direction to return to the initial position, thereby setting the setting key insertion portion 68a to the OFF position. Become. When the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned off, the changeable state ends, and the game can be performed with the state of the set value at that time. That is, even if the update button 68b is operated after the changeable state ends, the set value cannot be changed.

  The ON operation on the setting key insertion section 68a is valid only when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started (that is, when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 is started). Therefore, even if the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 performs an ON operation on the setting key insertion section 68a after the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power is completed, the setting value cannot be changed.

  The setting state of the pachinko machine 10 determines the advantage per unit time in the pachinko machine 10, and the larger the value of “setting n” (n is an integer of “1” to “6”), the larger the value of n (that is, the larger the setting). The higher the value, the greater the advantage. Although details will be described later, there are a low probability mode in which the winning probability is relatively low and a high probability mode in which the winning probability is relatively high as the winning / rejecting lottery mode for determining the winning probability of the jackpot result, and the setting value is It is set so that the higher the value, the higher the winning probability of the jackpot result in the low probability mode. On the other hand, the winning probability of the jackpot result in the high probability mode is constant regardless of the setting value.

  The reset button 68c is operated to clear the data in the main RAM 65 as described above. However, in order to cause the data to be cleared, the operation power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 while the reset button 68c is pressed. (That is, it is necessary to start supplying operating power to the MPU 62 of the main controller 60). The ON operation on the reset button 68c is valid only when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started (that is, when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 is started). Therefore, even if the reset button 68c is pressed after the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power is completed in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, the data in the main RAM 65 cannot be cleared.

  As described above, the connection terminal of the external device is connected to the read terminal 68d for reading the management result of the game history or the information (program and data) stored in the main ROM 64 by the external device. In order to perform external output to the pachinko machine 10, it is necessary to start supplying operating power to the pachinko machine 10 with the connection terminal of the external device connected to the reading terminal 68d (ie, the operation of the main control device 60 to the MPU 62). It is necessary to start supplying power). The connection of the external device to the reading terminal 68d is valid only when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started (that is, when the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 is started). Therefore, even if an external device is connected to the reading terminal 68d after the process at the start of supply of the operating power is completed in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, no external output to the external device is performed.

  Each of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c is a segment display in which seven LED display segments are arranged. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be a light emitter, a liquid crystal display device, or an organic EL display. Each of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c is installed so that its display surface faces the direction in which the element mounting surface of the main control board 61 faces, and the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c are formed by the opposed wall portion 60b of the board box 60a. Covered. In this case, since the substrate box 60a is formed to be transparent, the display surfaces of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c housed in the substrate box 60a can be viewed from outside the substrate box 60a. It becomes possible. Further, as described above, the main control device 60 is mounted on the back surface of the resin base 21 such that the opposing wall portion 60b facing the element mounting surface of the main control substrate 61 faces the rear of the pachinko machine 10 in the board box 60a. Therefore, when the gaming machine body 12 is opened to the front of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the outer frame 11 and the back surface of the resin base 21 is exposed to the front of the pachinko machine 10, the first to third notification via the opposing wall 60b. The display surfaces of the display devices 69a to 69c can be visually observed.

  On the display surface of the first notification display device 69a, not only the numbers "0" to "9" but also various characters including alphabetic characters are displayed. On the other hand, in the second notification display device 69b and the third notification display device 69c, numbers “0” to “9” are displayed. The management results of the game history are notified using the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, and the notification contents will be described later in detail. In a changeable state where the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed, a value corresponding to the current setting value is displayed on the third notification display device 69c. Note that a value corresponding to the set value may be displayed on the first notification display device 69a, or may be displayed on the second notification display device 69b. The set value before the changeable state is displayed on one of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, and the current set value is displayed in the first to third notification. It is good also as a structure displayed on the other display device for notification among the display devices 69a-69c for display.

  As shown in FIG. 507, the back pack unit 15 is installed so as to cover the rear side of the inner frame 13 including the main control device 60. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 72 formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and a payout mechanism 73 and a control device assembling unit 74 are attached to the back pack 72.

  The payout mechanism 73 includes a tank 75 to which game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a payout device 76 for paying out the game balls stored in the tank 75. The game balls paid out from the payout device 76 are discharged to the upper plate 55a or the lower plate 56a through a payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 76. The dispensing mechanism 73 is supplied with a main power of, for example, 24 volts AC, and is mounted with a back pack substrate having a power switch for performing an ON operation and an OFF operation of the power.

  The control device assembling unit 74 includes a payout control device 77 having a function of controlling the payout device 76, a predetermined power required by various control devices and the like is generated and output, and the control device unit 74 is operated by the player operating the firing operation device 28. And a power supply / launch control device 78 for controlling launch of the game ball. The payout control device 77 and the power supply / firing control device 78 are arranged one on top of the other so that the payout control device 77 is located behind the pachinko machine 10.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 511 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 for controlling a main game, and a power failure monitoring board 67 for monitoring a power supply. The MPU 62 is mounted on the main control board 61. The MPU 62 includes a main-side ROM 64, a main-side RAM 65, and a management IC 66 in addition to the main-side CPU 63, which is an arithmetic processing device including a control unit and an operation unit. The MPU 62 includes, in addition to the above elements, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like.

  The main ROM 64 is a memory such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory that does not require an external power supply for storing and storing data (that is, a nonvolatile storage unit), and is used as a read-only memory. The main ROM 64 stores various control programs executed by the main CPU 63 and fixed value data.

  The main RAM 65 is a memory such as an SRAM and a DRAM that requires an external power supply for storing and storing data (that is, volatile storage means), and is used for both reading and writing. The main RAM 65 is capable of random access and has a shorter read time than the main ROM 64 when compared with the same data capacity. The main RAM 65 temporarily stores various data and the like when the control program stored in the main ROM 64 is executed.

  The management IC 66 is a management device that manages a game history based on information supplied from the main CPU 63. Although details will be described later, while the management IC 66 grasps the history of the ball entry to the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the out opening 24a, Based on the grasped ball entry history, the frequency of ball entry to the general winning port 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is determined. Further, the occurrence frequency of the open / close execution mode and the high-frequency support mode, which will be described later, is grasped by the management IC 66.

  The MPU 62 is provided with an input port and an output port. A power failure monitoring board 67 and a payout control device 77 provided in the main control device 60 are connected to the input side of the MPU 62. A power supply / emission control device 78 having a function of supplying operating power is connected to the power failure monitoring board 67, and the MPU 62 is supplied with operating power via the power failure monitoring board 67.

  Various sensors such as the incoming ball detection sensors 42a to 49a are connected to the input side of the MPU 62. As described above, the ball detection sensors 42a to 49a include the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, the special power detection sensor 45a, and the first operating opening detection. A sensor 46a, a second working port detection sensor 47a, an out port detection sensor 48a, and a gate detection sensor 49a are included. On the basis of the detection results of the incoming ball detection sensors 42a to 49a, the main CPU 63 determines whether or not to enter each incoming ball portion. In addition, the main CPU 63 executes various lotteries based on winning in the first operating port 33 and executes various lotteries based on winning in the second operating port 34.

  On the input side of the MPU 62, a setting key insertion section 68a, an update button 68b, and a reset button 68c provided on the main control board 61 are provided. A sensor (not shown) is provided in the setting key insertion section 68a, and the sensor detects whether the setting key insertion section 68a is located at the ON operation position or the OFF operation position. Then, the main CPU 63 specifies whether the setting key insertion section 68a is located at the ON operation position or the OFF operation position based on the detection result from the sensor. The update button 68b is provided with a sensor (not shown), which detects whether or not the update button 68b is pressed. Then, the main CPU 63 specifies whether or not the update button 68b is pressed based on the detection result from the sensor. The reset button 68c is provided with a sensor (not shown), and the sensor detects whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed. Then, the main CPU 63 specifies whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed based on the detection result from the sensor.

  The output side of the MPU 62 is connected to a power failure monitoring board 67, a payout control device 77, and a sound emission control device 81. The payout control device 77 outputs, for example, a prize ball command based on the fact that a game ball has entered the prize ball corresponding entry portion corresponding to the payout of a game ball in the entry portion of the above entry portion. You. Various commands such as a change command, a type command, and an opening command are output to the sound emission control device 81.

  On the output side of the MPU 62, a driving unit 32b for a special power supply for opening and closing the opening / closing door 32a of the special power winning device 32, a driving unit 34b for a general power use for opening and closing the general purpose object 34a of the second operating port 34, The drawing unit 37 and the general drawing unit 38 are connected. Incidentally, the special figure unit 37 is provided with a special figure display section 37a and a special figure reservation display section 37b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. Similarly, the general-purpose unit 38 is provided with a general-purpose display unit 38a and a general-purpose reservation display unit 38b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. The main control board 61 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 62 controls the driving of various drive units and various display units through the driver circuits.

  That is, in the open / close execution mode, the drive control of the drive unit 32b for the special power is executed in the main CPU 63 so that the special power winning device 32 is opened and closed. In addition, in a case where the open state of the general electric part 34a is won, the main CPU 63 controls the driving of the general electric drive unit 34b so that the general electric part 34a is opened and closed. In addition, at the time of each game, the main CPU 63 executes display control of the special figure display section 37a. In addition, when the lottery result indicating whether or not to bring the general electric handpiece 34a to the open state is specified, the main CPU 63 executes the display control of the general-purpose display unit 38a. Further, when a prize occurs in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, or when the variable display is started in the special figure display section 37a, the main CPU 63 controls the display of the special figure reservation display section 37b. Is executed, and when the winning in the through gate 35 occurs, or when the variable display is started on the general-purpose display unit 38a, the display control of the general-purpose reservation display unit 38b is executed by the main CPU 63.

  First to third notification display devices 69a to 69c are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. In addition, the management result of the game history in the management IC 66 is notified through the display on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. When the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the current setting value is displayed on the third notification display device 69c. In this case, the first notification display device 69a and the second notification display device 69b are display-controlled by the management IC 66 and are not display-controlled by the main CPU 63, whereas the third notification display device 69c is controlled by the main CPU 63. The display is controlled and the display is controlled by the management IC 66. In the display of the third notification display device 69c, the display control by the main CPU 63 has priority over the display control by the management IC 66.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display of the third notification display device 69c may be controlled by the management IC 66 and may not be controlled by the main CPU 63. In this case, when the current setting value is displayed on the third notification display device 69c when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the main CPU 63 instructs the management IC 66 to display the setting value. Good.

  The MPU 62 is provided with a reading terminal 68d. A sensor (not shown) is provided at the reading terminal 68d, and the sensor detects whether a connection terminal of an external device is connected to the reading terminal 68d. Then, the main CPU 63 specifies whether or not the connection terminal of the external device is connected to the reading terminal 68d based on the detection result from the sensor. When an external device is connected to the reading terminal 68d, the management result of the game history in the management IC 66 or the information (program and data) stored in the main ROM 64 is externally output to the external device.

  The power failure monitoring board 67 relays between the main control board 61 and the power supply / emission control device 78, and monitors a DC stable 24 volt voltage which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply / emission control device 78. The payout control device 77 controls the payout of the prize ball and the loaned ball by the payout device 76 based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60.

  The power supply / launch control device 78 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, it generates the necessary operating power for the main control board 61, the payout control device 77, and the like, and supplies the generated operating power. Incidentally, the power supply / emission control device 78 is provided with a power supply unit at the time of power failure such as a backup capacitor. Power for storing and storing is supplied to the main RAM 65 and the payout control device 77 of the control device 60. The power supply / launch control device 78 is responsible for controlling the launch of the game ball launching mechanism 27, and the game ball launching mechanism 27 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met. The payout mechanism 73 is provided with a power switch as described above. When the power switch is turned on, the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, and the power switch is turned off. As a result, the supply of the operation power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped.

  The audio light emission control device 81 controls the display light emission unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 provided on the front door frame 14 based on various commands received from the main control device 60, and controls the display control device 82. It is. The display control device 82 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 based on the command received from the audio light emission control device 81.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the main CPU 63>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The main CPU 63 uses the various counter information during the game to perform a jackpot occurrence lottery, set the display of the special figure display unit 37a, set the symbol display of the symbol display device 41, and set the display of the general symbol display unit 38a. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 512, the hit random number counter C1 used for the lottery of the hit occurrence, the big hit type counter C2 used for determining the big hit type, and the symbol display device 41 To determine the reach random number counter C3 used for the reach generation lottery, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the hit random number counter C1, and the display duration on the special figure display unit 37a and the symbol display device 41. And a variation type counter CS. In addition, a general-purpose part opening counter C4 used for a lottery to determine whether or not the general-purpose part 34a of the second operating port 34 is in the general-state open state is used. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in various counter areas 65b of the main RAM 65.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value every time the counter is updated, and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals. Information corresponding to the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is provided as acquisition information storage means in the main RAM 65 when a prize occurs in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port. Is stored in the reserved storage area 65a.

  The hold storage area 65a includes a hold area RE and an execution area AE. The holding area RE includes a first holding area RE1, a second holding area RE2, a third holding area RE3, and a fourth holding area RE4, and stores a winning history to the first operating port 33 or the second operating port. At the same time, a combination of each numerical information of the winning random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored as the holding information in any of the holding areas RE1 to RE4.

  In this case, in the first reserved area RE1 to the fourth reserved area RE4, when a prize to the first working port 33 or the second working port 34 occurs continuously plural times, the first reserved area RE1 → the second reserved area RE4. Each numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of the reserved area RE2 → the third reserved area RE3 → the fourth reserved area RE4. By providing the four holding areas RE1 to RE4 in this manner, up to four winning histories of game balls to the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 are stored on hold. .

  It should be noted that the number of items that can be held and stored is not limited to four, but may be any number, such as two, three, five or more, or a single number.

  The execution area AE is an area for moving each numerical information stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE when starting the variable display of the special figure display unit 37a. At this time, a determination as to whether or not a hit is made is made based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

  Each of the above counters will be described in detail.

  First, the general-purpose object opening counter C4 will be described. For example, the general electric appliance open counter C4 is configured to be incremented by one in the range of 0 to 250, and to return to “0” after reaching the maximum value. The general-purpose item release counter C4 is updated periodically, and is stored in the general-purpose holding area 65c of the main RAM 65 at the timing when the game ball has won the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to control the general purpose electronic part 34a to the open state according to the stored value of the general purpose electronic part opening counter C4.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of support modes are set so that the modes of support by the general purpose electric appliance 34a are different from each other. In detail, in the support mode, when compared with a situation where the launch of the game ball is continued in the same manner in the game area PA, the general-purpose electric appliance 34a of the second operating port 34 is opened per unit time. The high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode are set so that the frequency of the state becomes relatively high and low.

  In the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning in the full-power open state in the full-power open lottery using the general-purpose accessory opening counter C4 is the same (for example, both are 4/5). In the high-frequency support mode, the number of times that the general-purpose part 34a is opened when the general-purpose open state is elected is set to be larger than in the low-frequency support mode, and one open time is set longer. Have been. In this case, in the high frequency support mode, when the open state is elected and the open state of the common electric role object 34a occurs a plurality of times, the state from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state is started. The closing time is set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the minimum securing time (ie, the time required for the general-purpose opening lottery to be performed after the one general-purpose opening lottery is performed) is smaller than that in the low-frequency support mode. The duration of one display on the display unit 38a) is set short.

  As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability that a winning in the second operating port 34 will occur is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize to the first operating port 33 is higher than in the second operating port 34, but in the high-frequency support mode, the second operating port 33 is more likely to win. The probability that the winning in the mouth 34 will occur increases. In the case where a prize is generated in the second operating port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of balls held. It can be carried out.

  The configuration for increasing the frequency in which the high frequency support mode is set to the normal power open state per unit time than the low frequency support mode is not limited to the above-described configuration. It is good also as a structure which raises the probability of becoming a normal electric power open state winning. In addition, a securing time to be secured after one general-purpose opening lottery is performed and then the next general-purpose opening lottery is performed (for example, executed in the general-purpose display unit 38a based on winning in the through gate 35). In a configuration in which a plurality of types of variable display time are prepared, a setting is made such that a shorter securing time is more easily selected or the average securing time is shorter in the high frequency support mode than in the low frequency support mode. Is also good. Further, increasing the number of times of opening, lengthening the opening time, shortening the securing time that is secured after one general power opening lottery is performed after one general power opening lottery is performed, such securing time, By shortening the average time and increasing the probability of winning, one of the conditions or an arbitrary combination of conditions may be applied to increase the advantage of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode.

  Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 has the setting states of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”, but the opening frequency and the opening mode of the general purpose accessory 34a in the low frequency support mode are not limited. The setting value is the same, and the opening frequency and the opening mode of the general purpose accessory 34a in the high frequency support mode are the same regardless of the setting value. However, the present invention is not limited to this. At least one of the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode, at least one of the opening frequency and the opening mode of the general purpose electrical appliance 34a fluctuates according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. It may be configured. For example, the higher the set value, the higher the frequency of opening the general purpose electrical item 34a in the low frequency support mode may be. The second operation when the general electrical accessory 34a is opened once in the low frequency support mode. A configuration in which the probability of entering a game ball into the mouth 34 is increased may be adopted. In addition, the higher the set value, the higher the frequency of opening the common electrical object 34a in the high-frequency support mode may be configured to be higher. A configuration in which the probability of entering a game ball into the operating port 34 may be increased.

  Next, the hit random number counter C1 will be described. The hit random number counter C1 is configured to be added one by one in the range of, for example, 0 to 599, and to return to “0” after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the hit random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the hit random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the hit random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The winning random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and is stored in the holding storage area 65a of the main RAM 65 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34.

  The value of the random number for winning the jackpot is stored in the main ROM 64 as a winning / failing table. FIG. 513 is an explanatory diagram for describing various tables stored in the main ROM 64. As the success / failure table, a low probability / failure table 64a to 64f for the low probability mode and a high probability / failure table 64g for the high probability mode are stored.

  The low-probability tables 64a to 64f are provided in one-to-one correspondence with the setting states of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”. In other words, the low-probability table 64a for setting 1 referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 1”, and the setting referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 2” The low-accuracy table 64b for the second, the low-accuracy table 64c for the setting 3 referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 3”, and the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 4” , A low-probability table 64d for setting 4 referred to when the pachinko machine 10 is set, a low-probability table 64e for setting 5 referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 5”, and a pachinko machine 10 And a low-probability table 64f for setting 6 that is referred to when the setting state of “setting 6” is “setting 6”.

  These low-probability tables 64a to 64f are set such that the higher the set value, the higher the probability of winning the jackpot result. Specifically, when the low-probability table 64a for the setting 1 is referred to, the jackpot results at about 1/320, and when the low-probability table 64b for the setting 2 is referred, about 1/310. The result is a jackpot, and when the low-probability table 64c for the setting 3 is referred to, the jackpot results at about 1/300. When the low-probability table 64d for the setting 4 is referred to, the result is about 1/290. , A jackpot result is obtained, and when the low-probability table 64e for setting 5 is referred to, the jackpot result is about 1/280, and when the low-probability table 64f for setting 6 is referred to, about 1/270. The result is a jackpot. As a result, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has a higher setting value, a jackpot result is more likely to occur in the low probability mode, which is advantageous for the player.

  On the other hand, only one type of the high probability rejection table 64g is provided so as to be common in any of the setting states of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”. The high probability of success / failure table 64g is set such that the winning probability of the big hit result is higher than that of the low probability of success / failure tables 64a to 64f regardless of the setting state of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”. Specifically, when the high-accuracy determination table 64g is referred to, the jackpot results at about 1/30. This makes it possible to make the high probability mode more advantageous than the low probability mode regardless of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. Also, even in the lowest setting state “Setting 1”, the high probability mode makes it possible to increase the probability of the jackpot result as compared with the lowest setting state “Setting 6” low probability mode. Becomes In addition, in the high probability mode, it is possible to prevent the advantage or disadvantage caused by the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 from occurring, and to reduce the storage capacity for storing the high accuracy / non-permission table 64g in the main ROM 64 in advance. It becomes possible.

  The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be added one by one in the range of 0 to 29, and to return to “0” after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is updated periodically, and is stored in the hold storage area 65a at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34.

  In this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of jackpot results are set. The plurality of jackpot results are (1) the mode of opening / closing control of the special power winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode, (2) the lottery mode in the winning / rejecting lottery means after the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and (3) the third mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode. A plurality of jackpot results are set by providing a difference in the three conditions of the support mode of the general-purpose accessory 34a of the second operation port 34.

  The opening / closing control of the special power prize device 32 in the open / close execution mode is performed such that the frequency of winning of the special power prize device 32 between the start and the end of the open / close execution mode is relatively high or low. A frequency winning mode and a low frequency winning mode are set. Specifically, in any of the high frequency winning mode and the low frequency winning mode, the game is executed with a predetermined number of round games as an upper limit.

  The round game is a game in which a predetermined upper limit duration time elapses and a predetermined upper limit number of game balls continue to be won in the special power winning device 32 until one of the conditions is satisfied. That is. In addition, the number of round games in the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot result is the same as the fixed round number regardless of the type of the jackpot result triggered by the shift. More specifically, the upper limit number of round games is set to 15 rounds regardless of which jackpot result is obtained.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of open modes of the special power winning device 32 are set so as to have different opening continuation times from when the special power winning device 32 is opened until when the special power winning device 32 is closed. In detail, a long time mode in which the opening duration is set to a long time of 29 seconds, a short time mode in which the opening duration is set to a short time shorter than the long time of 0.06 seconds, Is set.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, when the shooting operation device 28 is operated by the player, the game ball firing mechanism 27 is driven so that one game ball is fired toward the game area PA every 0.6 seconds. Controlled. In the round game, the upper limit number of the end conditions is set to nine. Then, in the long-time mode of the above-described open modes, the open continuation time longer than the product of the launch cycle of the game ball and one round game is set. On the other hand, in the short-time mode, the open duration is set to a time shorter than the product of the launch cycle of the game ball and one round game, more specifically, a shorter time than the launch cycle of the game ball. Therefore, when one opening is performed in the long-time mode, it is expected that the maximum number of winnings in one round game will occur in the special power winning device 32, and 1 in the short-time mode. When the number of times has been opened, it is expected that no prize will be generated in the special power prize winning device 32, or that even if a prize is generated, the number will be about one.

  In the high frequency winning mode, the special power winning device 32 is opened once in a long time mode in each round game. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the special power winning device 32 is opened once in a short time mode in each round game.

  In addition, the number of times of opening and closing of the special power winning device 32 in the high frequency winning mode and the low frequency winning mode, the number of round games, the opening duration for one opening, and the upper limit number in one round game are higher than those in the high frequency winning mode. Is not limited to the above value as long as the frequency of winning in the special power winning device 32 during the period from the start to the end of the open / close execution mode to the end thereof is higher than that in the low frequency winning mode. It is.

  The distribution destination of the jackpot result for the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the main ROM 64 as a distribution table 64h as shown in FIG. In the distribution table 64h, a low-probability big-hit result, a low-prize-high-probability big-hit result, and a most-favorable-big-hit result are set as distribution destinations of the big-hit result when the big-hit result is obtained.

  The low-probability jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the end of the opening / closing execution mode, the success / failure lottery mode becomes the low probability mode, and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. However, the high frequency support mode shifts to the low frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times) after the shift.

  The low winning high probability big hit result is a big hit result in which the opening and closing execution mode becomes the low frequency winning mode, and after the opening and closing execution mode ends, the winning / rejecting lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. is there. The high probability mode and the high frequency support mode are continued until the lottery result in the winning / non-winning lottery becomes a big hit state and the state shifts to a big hit state.

  The most advantageous jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode becomes the high frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the success / failure lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. The high probability mode and the high frequency support mode are continued until the lottery result in the winning / non-winning lottery becomes a big hit state and the state shifts to a big hit state.

  Note that, in relation to the above-mentioned respective game states, the normal game state is not the open / close execution mode, but the state in which the success / failure lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode. In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which a low winning high probability big hit result is not set as a game result. Further, in the opening / closing execution mode in the low winning high probability big hit result, the number of round games may be smaller than that in the case of the low probability big hit result and the most advantageous big hit result.

  In the distribution table 64h, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 29”, “0 to 9” corresponds to the low winning jackpot result, and “10 to 14” corresponds to the low winning high jackpot result. "15-29" corresponds to the most advantageous jackpot result.

  Only one type of distribution table 64h is provided so as to be common in any of the setting states of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”. This makes it possible to avoid the advantage or disadvantage caused by the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 in the distribution mode of the jackpot result, and to store the distribution table 64h in the main ROM 64 in advance. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, the distribution mode of the jackpot results may be different depending on the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the higher the set value, the higher the probability of being allocated to the most advantageous big hit result, and the higher the set value, the higher the probability of being allocated to the most advantageous big hit result or low winning high probability big hit result. In this case, the higher the set value, the higher the probability of the high probability mode after the jackpot result is achieved. Also, the higher the setting value, the lower the probability of being distributed to the low prize winning jackpot result. The higher the setting value, the lower the probability of being distributed to the high prize winning jackpot result, whereas the lower the setting value, the lower the winning probability. It is good also as composition which can be distributed to a jackpot result. In this case, it is possible to increase the probability that the open / close execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode will occur as the set value increases.

  Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one, for example, in the range of 0 to 238, and to return to “0” after reaching the maximum value. In the pachinko machine 10, an expected effect is set as a type of display effect on the symbol display device 41. The expected effect is provided with a symbol display device 41 capable of performing variable display of symbols, and in a gaming machine in which a final stop result is an assignment corresponding result in a game time in which a predetermined jackpot result is obtained, the symbol display device 41 is provided. This is a display state for making the player think that the variable display state is likely to be the above-mentioned provision result at the stage before the stop result is derived and displayed after the start of the variable display of the symbol. It should be noted that, specifically, the combination of symbols with the same numeral attached to one of the activated lines is stopped and displayed.

  Two types of expected effects are set: a reach display, and a preview display for expecting the occurrence of the reach display and the generation of the assignment correspondence result at a stage before the reach display occurs.

  In the reach display, a combination of reach symbols is displayed by stopping and displaying symbols in some of the symbol columns among a plurality of symbol columns displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, and displaying the remaining combinations in that state. A display state in which a symbol is fluctuated in the symbol row is included. In addition, in the state where the combination of the reach symbols is displayed as described above, while performing the variation display of the symbols in the remaining symbol rows, and performing a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on the background screen, , A combination of reach symbols is reduced or displayed, and a reach effect is displayed by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a.

  In the notice display, a state in which symbols are variably displayed in all the symbol rows after the symbol variable display is started on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, or a plurality of symbols in some symbol rows. In a situation in which symbols are variably displayed in the symbol row, a mode in which a character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol row is included. Further, the background screen may have a predetermined mode different from the previous mode, and the symbol on the symbol row may have a predetermined mode different from the previous mode. Such a notice display may occur at any of the game times when the reach display is performed and when the reach display is not performed, but the display when the reach display is performed is higher than when the reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with probability.

  The reach display is executed irrespective of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game cycle in which the same symbol combination is finally stopped and displayed. Further, in the game times corresponding to the jackpot result in which the same symbol combination is not stopped and displayed, the combination is not executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. In addition, the game time corresponding to the result of departure is executed when the reach random number counter C3 acquired at a predetermined timing with reference to the reach table stored in the main ROM 64 corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display. .

  On the other hand, the determination as to whether or not to display the advance notice is made not by the main control device 60 but by the sound emission control device 81. In this case, the sound emission control device 81 indicates that the notice display is more likely to occur in the game times corresponding to any one of the jackpot results than in the game times corresponding to the missed result, and that the notice display with a low appearance rate is performed. A lottery process for displaying a notice is executed so as to satisfy at least one of the conditions of easy occurrence. Incidentally, this lottery result is reflected when the effect for the game round is executed on the symbol display device 41.

  Here, the probability of occurrence of the reach display in the game times resulting in the departure is the same regardless of the setting state of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”. Thereby, it becomes possible to prevent the advantage or disadvantage caused by the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the probability that the reach display is generated in the game time that results in the departure. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the higher the set value, the higher the probability of occurrence of the reach display in a game time that results in a deviation.

  Next, the variation type counter CS will be described. The fluctuation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 198, and to return to “0” after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used by the main CPU 63 to determine the display duration on the special figure display unit 37a and the display duration on the symbol on the symbol display device 41. The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time a timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time until the next timer interrupt process is executed. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired at the time of determining the variation pattern at the time of starting the variation display on the special figure display unit 37a and at the time of starting the symbol variation by the symbol display device 41.

<About the processing configuration of the main CPU 63>
Next, each process executed by the main CPU 63 to advance the game will be described. The processing of the main CPU 63 is roughly classified into a main processing started when the power is turned on, and a timer interrupt processing started periodically (in a cycle of 4 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

<Main processing>
First, the main processing will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  First, a power-on wait process is executed (step S101). In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits without advancing to the next process until a predetermined time for wait (specifically, one second) elapses after the main process is started. In the execution period of the power-on wait processing, the operation start and the initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed. Thereafter, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted (step S102).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a has been turned ON (step S103). If the setting key insertion section 68a has not been turned ON (step S103: NO), it is determined whether the reset button 68c has been pressed (step S104). When the reset button 68c is pressed (step S104: YES), each area of the main RAM 65 is set to "except for the area in which the setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the main RAM 65. "0" is cleared, and an initial setting is performed for the area cleared to "0" (step S105). In other words, when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started while the reset button 68c is pressed and operated without the ON operation of the setting key insertion section 68a, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is The clear processing of the main RAM 65 is executed while maintaining the state before the power supply is stopped, and the initial setting is performed on the storage area where the clear processing is executed. Thus, it is possible to initialize another area of the main RAM 65 without changing the set value. In step S105, initialization is performed after various registers of the main CPU 63 are also cleared to "0".

  If the reset button 68c has not been pressed (step S104: NO), it is determined whether the power failure flag is set to "1" (step S106). The power failure flag is provided in the main RAM 65, and when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped and the predetermined power failure processing is normally executed, the power failure flag is set to “1”. Is set. If "1" is set in the power failure flag, it is determined whether or not the calculation result of the checksum matches the checksum stored when the power is turned off, that is, the validity of the stored data is determined (step S107). . When the process in step S105 is executed or when the affirmative determination is made in step S107, it is determined whether the set value of the pachinko machine 10 is normal by checking the main RAM 65 (step S108). Specifically, when the setting value is any one of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”, it is determined to be normal, and when it is “0” or 7 or more, it is determined to be abnormal.

  If a negative determination is made in any of steps S106 to S108, an operation prohibition process is executed. In the operation prohibition process, after an error notification process for notifying the hole manager or the like of the occurrence of an error is performed (step S109), an infinite loop is performed. The operation prohibition processing is released by executing the later-described all clear processing (step S117).

  If an affirmative determination is made in all of steps S106 to S108, a power-on setting process is executed (step S110). In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the main RAM 65 such as initialization of a power failure flag is set to an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current game state is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. After executing the process of step S110, a recognition process for causing the management IC 66 to recognize various information (step S111) and various data are output to an external device connected to the reading terminal 68d of the MPU 62. A data output process is performed (step S112). Details of the recognition processing and the data output processing will be described later.

  Although the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process, the occurrence of the timer interrupt process is prohibited when the main process is started. The state in which the generation of the timer interrupt processing is prohibited is released at a timing before the processing in step S113 is executed after the processing in step S112 is completed, and the execution of the timer interrupt processing is permitted. As a result, when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the data output process of step S112 is completed, and the timer interrupt process is not executed until the process of step S113 is started. Therefore, the processing for advancing the game by the main CPU 63 is not started until the situation is reached.

  After that, the process proceeds to the remaining process of steps S113 to S116. That is, the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process, but a remaining time is generated between one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. The remaining time varies in accordance with the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, but the remaining process of steps S113 to S116 is repeatedly executed using the irregular time. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining processes in steps S113 to S116 are irregular processes that are executed irregularly.

  In the remaining process, first, in step S113, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit the occurrence of the timer interrupt process. In the following step S114, a random number initial value updating process for updating the random number initial value counter CINI is executed, and in step S115, a fluctuation counter updating process for updating the fluctuation type counter CS is executed. In these updating processes, the current numerical information is read from the corresponding counter of the main RAM 65, a process of adding 1 to the read numerical information is executed, and then a process of overwriting the counter of the read source is executed. In this case, when the counter value exceeds the maximum value, each is cleared to “0”. After that, in step S116, an interrupt permission setting for switching from a state in which the occurrence of the timer interrupt processing is prohibited to a state in which the timer interrupt processing is permitted is performed. When the process in step S116 has been performed, the process returns to step S113, and the processes in steps S113 to S116 are repeated.

  On the other hand, when the setting key insertion section 68a is turned ON (step S103: YES), the main RAM 65 includes an area in which information of the setting value indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set. All areas are cleared to "0" and initial settings are made for the areas cleared to "0" (step S117). That is, when an operation for changing the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is being performed, all areas of the main RAM 65 are cleared to “0” and cleared even when the reset button 68c is not pressed. Initial setting is performed for the storage area where the processing has been executed. In step S117, initialization is performed after various registers of the main CPU 63 are also cleared to "0". The present invention is not limited to this, and even if an operation for changing the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, if the reset button 68c is not pressed, the entire main RAM 65 is not operated. The clearing process may not be executed, and the entire clearing process may be executed when the operation for changing the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed and the reset button 68c is pressed.

  Thereafter, in step S118, a set value update process is executed, and in step S119, a process of outputting a set value update signal is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S110. Hereinafter, the setting value update processing will be described. The output processing of the set value update signal will be described later in detail. FIG. 515 is a flowchart showing the setting value update processing.

  First, "1" is set to a set value counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S201). The set value counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify which set value the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is. When the set value counter is set to “1”, when the set value updating process is executed, the set value becomes “set 1” regardless of the set value up to that time.

  Thereafter, a setting value display start process is executed (step S202). In the setting value display start processing, the display of the third notification display device 69c is controlled so that the number “1” corresponding to “setting 1” is displayed. When changing the set value, the manager of the game hall can check the current setting state of the pachinko machine 10 by checking the third notification display device 69c.

  Thereafter, on condition that the setting key insertion section 68a has not been turned OFF (step S203: NO), it is determined whether or not the update button 68b has been pressed once (step S204). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the signal from the sensor that detects the pressing operation of the update button 68b has switched from the LOW level to the HI level. If a negative determination is made in step S204, the process returns to step S203, and it is determined whether the setting key insertion unit 68a has been turned off.

  When the update button 68b is pressed once (step S204: YES), the value of the set value counter of the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S205). If the value of the set value counter after adding 1 exceeds “6” (step S206: YES), “1” is set to the set value counter (step S207). Thus, each time the update button 68b is pressed once, the setting value is updated to the next higher level, and when the update button 68b is pressed once in the situation of “setting 6,” the setting is changed to “setting 1.” I will return.

  If a negative determination is made in step S206, or if the process in step S207 is performed, a display update process of the set value is performed (step S208). In the display update processing of the set value, the display control of the third notification display device 69c is performed so that the number corresponding to the value of the set value counter of the main RAM 65 is displayed. The administrator of the gaming hall can check the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 after pressing the update button 68b by checking the third notification display device 69c.

  After executing the processing in step S208, the process returns to step S203, and it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a has been turned OFF. If the OFF operation has not been performed (step S203: NO), the processing after step S204 is executed again. If the operation has been turned off (step S203: YES), display end processing of the set value is executed (step S209). In the display end processing of the set value, the display of the set value on the third notification display device 69c is ended.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, the timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The timer interrupt processing is executed periodically (for example, at a period of 4 milliseconds).

  First, power outage information storage processing is executed (step S301). In the power failure information storage processing, it is monitored whether or not a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of the power interruption has been received from the power failure monitoring board 67. Become. In the process at the time of power failure, the power failure flag in the main RAM 65 is set to “1”, a checksum is calculated, and the calculated checksum is stored.

  After that, a random number updating process for lottery is executed (step S302). In the random number updating process for lottery, the winning random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general public goods open counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the current numerical information is sequentially read out from the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general public goods open counter C4, and a process of adding one to each of the read numerical information is executed. Thereafter, a process of overwriting the counter of the read source is executed. In this case, when the counter value exceeds the maximum value, each is cleared to “0”. After that, in step S303, a random number initial value updating process is executed as in step S114, and in step S304, a fluctuation counter updating process is executed as in step S115.

  Thereafter, a fraud detection process is performed to monitor whether a predetermined event set as a fraud monitoring target has occurred (step S305). In the fraud detection processing, the occurrence of a plurality of types of events is monitored, and by confirming that a predetermined event has occurred, the game stop flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to “1”. In a succeeding step S306, it is determined whether or not the game is stopped by determining whether or not the game stop flag is set to "1". If a negative determination is made in step S306, the processing from step S307 is executed.

  In step S307, a port output process is performed. In the port output process, when output information has been set in the previous timer interrupt process, a process for outputting an output corresponding to the output information to the various drive units 32b and 34b is executed. For example, when the information to switch the special power winning device 32 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the special power driver 32b is started, and when the information to switch to the closed state is set. Stops the output of the drive signal. If the information to switch the general-purpose part 34a of the second operating port 34 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the general-purpose driving unit 34b is started and the state is switched to the closed state. When the information is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

  After that, a reading process is executed (step S308). In the reading processing, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing.

  After that, a ball entry detection process is executed (step S309). In the incoming ball detection process, the signals received from the incoming ball detection sensors 42a to 49a are read, and based on the read result, the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operating port 33. The presence or absence of a ball entering the second operation port 34 and the through gate 35 is specified. The details of the incoming ball detection process will be described later.

  Thereafter, a timer update process for updating numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the main RAM 65 is executed (step S310). In this case, the timer counter that is updated by subtracting the stored numerical information is collectively handled, but both the update of the subtraction timer counter and the update of the addition timer counter are collectively performed. It may be configured.

  After that, a launch control process for performing launch control of the game ball is executed (step S311). In a situation where the firing operation to the firing operation device 28 is continued, one game ball is fired in a predetermined firing cycle of 0.6 seconds. In subsequent step S312, as input state monitoring processing, based on the information read in the reading processing in step S308, disconnection confirmation of each of the incoming ball detection sensors 42a to 49a and confirmation of opening of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are performed. I do.

  Then, a special figure special power control process for performing the execution control of the game times and the execution control of the open / close execution mode is executed (step S313). The special figure special power control processing will be described later in detail.

  After that, the general-purpose power control process is executed (step S314). In the general-purpose general-purpose control process, a process for acquiring general-purpose side hold information is performed when a prize has occurred in the through gate 35, and when general-purpose side hold information is stored. Then, a release determination is made for the hold information, and a process for performing an effect for ordinary drawing is executed with the release determination as an opportunity. In addition, based on the result of the opening determination, a process of opening and closing the general purpose accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is executed. In this case, if the support mode is the low frequency support mode, the corresponding process is executed, and if the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the corresponding process is executed. Further, in the case of the opening / closing execution mode, even if the immediately preceding support mode is the high frequency support mode, the low frequency support mode is set.

  In the following step S315, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S313 and S314, output information for reflecting the increase / decrease number of the hold information related to the special figure display section 37a in the special figure hold display section 37b is set. Then, the output information for reflecting the increase / decrease number of the hold information related to the general-purpose display section 38a on the general-purpose display section 38b is set. In step S315, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S313 and S314, output information for updating the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a is set, and the display contents of the general figure display unit 38a are changed. Set the output information to be updated.

  Thereafter, the contents of the command and the signal received from the payout control device 77 are confirmed, and a payout state receiving process for performing a process corresponding to the confirmation result is executed (step S316). In addition, a payout output process for setting the prize ball command as an output target is executed (step S317). Further, an external information setting process for controlling the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing result of the various processes executed in the current timer interrupt process is executed (step S318). Thereafter, a management output process for outputting information corresponding to the ball entry result of the game ball in the game area PA to the management IC 66 is executed (step S319). Details of the management output process will be described later.

  Next, the special figure special power control processing in step S313 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  First, a process of acquiring hold information is executed (step S401). In the process of acquiring the hold information, it is determined whether or not a prize has occurred in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, and if a prize has occurred, the number of holds in the hold storage area 65a is limited to an upper limit. It is determined whether the value is less than the value (“4” in the present embodiment). If the number of reservations is less than the upper limit, the number of reservations is incremented by one, and the numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in the previous step S302 are used for the hold. It is stored in the first reserved area among the empty reserved areas RE1 to RE4 of the area RE. When the winning in the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 occurs simultaneously, the processing for acquiring the suspension information is performed within a range in which the acquisition processing of the suspension information is performed once. Execute multiple times. When a new acquisition of the hold information is performed, a corresponding acquisition command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. When receiving the command, the sound emission control device 81 updates the display of the image indicating the number of pieces of hold information on the symbol display device 41 to display content corresponding to the increase of the hold information.

  Thereafter, the information of the special figure special power counter provided in the main RAM 65 is read (step S402), and the special figure special power address table provided in the main ROM 64 is read (step S403). Then, a start address corresponding to the information of the special figure special power counter is acquired from the special figure special power address table (step S404), and the processing jumps to the processing indicated by the obtained start address among the processing of steps S406 to S412 (step S405). ). The special figure special power counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to know which of the various processes of steps S406 to S412 should be executed. The special figure special power address table stores the special figure special power counter. A start address of a program for executing the processing of steps S406 to S412 is set in association with the numerical information.

  In step S406, a special figure change start process is executed. FIG. 518 is a flowchart showing the special figure change start processing.

  In the special figure change start processing, the data setting processing is executed (step S502) on the condition that the number of pieces of hold information stored in the hold area RE is one or more (step S501: YES). In the data setting process, first, the number of holds is decremented by one, and the data stored in the first hold area RE1 of the hold area RE is moved to the execution area AE. Thereafter, a process of shifting the data stored in each of the holding areas RE1 to RE4 of the holding area RE is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting data stored in the first to fourth holding areas RE1 to RE4 to the lower area side. Specifically, the second shifting area RE2 → the first holding area RE1 Then, the data in each area is shifted, for example, from the third reserved area RE3 to the second reserved area RE2 and from the fourth reserved area RE4 to the third reserved area RE3, and then the fourth reserved area RE4 is cleared to "0". At this time, a shift-time command for recognizing that the data in the holding area has been shifted is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. When receiving the command, the voice light emission control device 81 updates the display of the image indicating the number of pieces of hold information on the symbol display device 41 to display content corresponding to the decrease of the hold information.

  After executing the data setting process, the success / failure table is read from the main ROM 64 (step S503). Specifically, first, the information indicating the current winning / rejecting lottery mode is read out from the main RAM 65 to grasp the current winning / rejecting lottery mode. In the case of the high probability mode, the high probability correct / non-permissible table 64g is read from the main ROM 64. On the other hand, in the case of the low probability mode, the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is grasped by reading the value of the setting value counter of the main RAM 65. Then, the low-probability tables 64a to 64f corresponding to the set values that have been grasped are read from the main ROM 64.

  After that, it executes a hit / fail judgment process with reference to the hit / fail tables 64a to 64g read in step S503 (step S504). In the success / failure determination process, the information for success / failure determination among the information stored in the execution area AE, that is, the numerical information related to the hit random number counter C1, is the big hit numerical information set in the success / failure tables 64a to 64g read in step S503. It is determined whether or not they match.

  If the result of the success / failure determination process is a jackpot winning result (step S505: YES), the distribution determination process is executed (step S506). In the distribution determination processing, information for distribution determination, that is, numerical information related to the jackpot type counter C2 is read out of the information stored in the execution area AE. Then, referring to the distribution table 64h provided in the main-side ROM 64, it identifies which of the jackpot results the read-out numerical information on the jackpot type counter C2 corresponds to. Specifically, it specifies which jackpot result corresponds to the low jackpot result, the low winning jackpot result, or the most advantageous jackpot result.

  After that, a stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed (step S507). Specifically, in the game time related to the start of the fluctuation, the information of the pattern form to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 37a is obtained from the stop result table for the jackpot result stored in the main ROM 64 in advance. The specified information is written to the main RAM 65. In the stop result table for the jackpot result, information on the mode of the pattern stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 37a is set differently for each type of the jackpot result.

  Thereafter, a flag setting process corresponding to the distribution determination result is executed (step S508). Specifically, the main RAM 65 is provided with a flag corresponding to each type of the jackpot result. "1" is set to the flag corresponding to the result.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S505 that the result is not a jackpot winning result, a stop result setting process for a miss result is executed (step S509). Specifically, the information of the pattern form to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 37a in the game time related to the start of the fluctuation is obtained from the stop result table for the departure result stored in the main ROM 64 in advance. The specified information is written to the main RAM 65. In this case, the information on the pattern aspect selected is different from the information on the pattern aspect selected in the case of the jackpot result.

  After executing any of the processes of step S508 and step S509, a process of grasping the duration of the game times is executed (step S510). In this process, numerical information of the variation type counter CS is obtained. Further, it is determined whether or not the reach display is generated on the symbol display device 41 in the current game round. Specifically, when the game time related to the start of the current fluctuation is the low-probability jackpot result or the most advantageous jackpot result, it is determined that the reach display is generated. If none of the jackpot results is found and the numerical information on the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is numerical information corresponding to the occurrence of the reach, it is determined that the reach display is generated.

  When it is determined that the reach display is generated, the duration of the game corresponding to the numerical information of the current fluctuation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the reach generation duration table stored in the main ROM 64. . On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the continuation of the game times corresponding to the numerical information of the current fluctuation type counter CS is referred to by referring to the reach non-occurrence continuation period table stored in the main ROM 64. Get the period. Incidentally, the duration of the game times that can be acquired by referring to the reach non-occurrence duration table is different from the duration of the game times that can be acquired by referring to the reach occurrence duration table.

  Note that the duration of the game times when no reach occurs is set such that the duration of the game times becomes shorter as the number of pieces of hold information stored in the hold area RE increases. Also, in the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, compared to the case where the number of pending information is the same, the duration of the short game round is selected compared to the case where the number of the hold information is the same. A REACH non-occurrence duration table is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The configuration may be such that the duration of the game times does not fluctuate according to the number of hold information and the support mode, and the above relationship may be reversed. Further, the above-described configuration may be applied to a continuation period of a game round when a reach occurs. In addition, a duration table may be individually set for each of the various jackpot results, the case of the out-of-reach reach, and the case of the out-of-reach non-occurrence result. In this case, the distribution of the continuation period of the game times according to each game result is performed.

  Thereafter, the information on the duration of the game times acquired in step S510 is set in a special figure special power timer counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S511). Updating of the numerical information set in the special figure special power timer counter is executed in a timer updating process (step S310). By the way, as the effect for the game round, the variable display of the pattern on the special figure display section 37a and the variable display of the symbol on the symbol display device 41 are performed. Is displayed over the final stop period (for example, 0.5 seconds) in a state where the stop result is displayed (a state in which a predetermined combination of symbols is on the activated line in the symbol display device 41). In this case, the duration of the game times acquired in step S510 is the total time for one game time.

  Thereafter, the change command and the type command are transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step S512). The change command includes information on the duration of the game. Here, as described above, the duration of the game times acquired with reference to the reach non-occurrence duration table is different from the duration of the game times acquired with reference to the reach occurrence duration table. Even if the fluctuation command does not include information on whether or not reach has occurred, the sound emission control device 81 can specify whether or not reach has occurred from the information on the duration of the game times. In this regard, it can be said that the fluctuation command includes information indicating whether or not the reach has occurred. Note that the fluctuation command may include information directly indicating whether or not the reach has occurred. The type command includes information on the game result.

  When the voice light emission control device 81 receives the change command and the type command from the main CPU 63, the display light emitting unit 53, the speaker unit 54, and the symbol display device 41 execute a game effect. In this case, the effect for the game round is performed in a mode corresponding to the contents of the change command and the type command. In addition, in the symbol display device 41, a symbol variation display is performed as an effect for the game round, and when the effect for the game round ends, a combination of symbols corresponding to the results of the hit / fail determination processing and the distribution determination processing is displayed. Stopped and displayed.

  After that, the variation display of the picture on the special figure display section 37a is started (step S513). Then, the special figure special power counter is incremented by 1 (step S514). In this case, since the numerical information of the special figure special power counter when the special figure fluctuation start processing is executed is “0”, the numerical information of the special figure special power counter is “1”. Thereafter, "1" is set to the eleventh output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S515). The eleventh output flag is a flag for specifying by the main CPU 63 that information output indicating that the game round has been started is to be executed to the management IC 66.

  Returning to the description of the special figure special power control processing (FIG. 557), in step S407, the special figure changing processing is executed. In the special figure changing process, it is determined whether or not the timing is during the continuation time of the game times and before the final stop display, and if it is before the final stop display, the display mode of the pattern on the special figure display unit 37a is regulated. A process for changing the target is executed. When the timing to display the final stop is reached, the numerical information of the special figure special power counter is incremented by one, so that the numerical information of the counter is changed from the processing corresponding to the special figure changing processing to the special figure fixing processing. Update to something. In this embodiment, the final stop command is not transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the sound emission control device 81.

  In step S408, a special figure fixing process is executed. In the special figure determination process, the display mode of the picture on the special figure display section 37a is set to a display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the current game. In the special figure determination process, it is determined whether or not the final stop period has elapsed. If the final stop period has elapsed, it is determined whether or not a shift to the open / close execution mode occurs. If the shift to the open / close execution mode does not occur, the numerical information of the special figure special power counter is cleared to “0”. When the shift to the open / close execution mode occurs, the numerical information of the special figure special power counter is incremented by one to change the numerical information of the counter from the one corresponding to the special figure fixing processing to the one corresponding to the special power starting processing. Update.

  In step S409, a special power starting process is executed. In the special power start process, if the process for starting the opening period in the current open / close execution mode has not been executed yet, the opening period setting process is executed. Further, an opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. Upon receiving the opening command, the voice light emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53, the speaker unit 54, and the symbol display device 41 to execute the opening effect. If the opening period has elapsed, start processing for starting the first round game is executed. In the start processing, the special power winning device 32 is set to the open state, and the end condition of the round game is set. In setting the end condition, an upper limit continuation time when the special power winning device 32 is kept open in the current first round game is set, and the special power winning device 32 can be won in the current first round game. The upper limit number of the game balls is set in a winning counter provided in the main RAM 65.

  In step S410, a special power opening process is executed. In the special power opening process, it is determined whether or not the end condition of the round game is satisfied. If the end condition is satisfied, the special power winning device 32 is closed. If the round game that has been completed this time is not the last round game, the numerical information of the special figure special power counter is incremented by one to change the numerical information of the counter from the processing corresponding to the special power open processing to the special power close processing. If the round game ended this time is the last run round game, the numerical information of the special figure special power counter is added by 2, and the numerical information of the counter corresponds to the special power open processing. It is updated from the one corresponding to the special power termination processing.

  In step S411, a special power closing process is executed. In the special power closing process, it is determined whether or not an interval period between round games has elapsed. The interval period is set when the previous round game ends. When the interval period has elapsed, the special power winning device 32 is set in an open state, and an end condition of the round game is set. Then, by subtracting 1 from the numerical information of the special figure special power counter, the numerical information of the counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special power closing processing to the one corresponding to the special power opening processing.

  In step S412, a special power termination process is performed. In the special power ending process, if the process for starting the ending period in the current open / close execution mode has not been executed, the ending period (for example, 5 seconds) is set, and the ending command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. . Upon receiving the ending command, the voice light emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53, the speaker unit 54, and the symbol display device 41 to execute an ending effect. When the ending period has elapsed, each of the success / failure lottery mode and the support mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode is set to a mode corresponding to the jackpot result that triggered the start of the current opening / closing execution mode.

  Next, in the main CPU 63, based on the detection results of the incoming ball detection sensors 42a to 49a, the out port 24a, the general prize port 31, the special power prize device 32, the first operation port 33, the second operation port 34, and the through port. A configuration for specifying whether or not a game ball has entered the gate 35 will be described. FIG. 519 is an explanatory diagram for describing a configuration in which the detection results of the incoming ball detection sensors 42a to 49a are input to the main CPU 63.

  The main CPU 63 is provided with an input port 63a. The input port 63a is configured as an 8-bit parallel interface so that eight types of signals can be handled simultaneously. An area in which information of “0” or “1” is stored according to the voltage of each signal is provided in one-to-one correspondence with each terminal. That is, the area includes the 0th bit D0 to the 7th bit D7. Also, more than eight types of signals are input to the input port 63a. In order to limit the number of simultaneously input targets to eight types, a signal group to be input to the input port 63a is determined by the driver IC. It is switched through the switching control.

  In the incoming ball detection process (step S309) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 516), a signal group to be input to the input port 63a is set to a signal group from each of the incoming ball detection sensors 42a to 49a. In such a setting, the 0th bit D0 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, and the first bit D1 corresponds to the detection signal from the second winning opening detection sensor 43a. The second bit D2 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, and the third bit D3 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the special power detection sensor 45a. , The fourth bit D4 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the first working port detection sensor 46a, and the fifth bit D5 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the second working port detection sensor 47a. Six bits D6 store information corresponding to the detection signal from the out mouth detection sensor 48a, and the seventh bit D7 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the gate detection sensor 49a. It is.

  Each of the above-mentioned incoming ball detection sensors 42a to 49a outputs a LOW level signal indicating that detection is not being performed as a detection signal when the passage of a game ball is not detected, and detects the passage of the game ball. In this case, an HI level signal indicating that detection is being performed is output as a detection signal. The input port 63a stores “0” information for a corresponding bit when a LOW level signal is received, and stores “1” for a corresponding bit when a HI level signal is received. The information of is stored. In other words, in the situation where the passing of the game ball is not detected by the ball detection sensors 42a to 49a, information of "0" corresponding to the information indicating that the ball is not detected is stored in the corresponding bit, and the passage of the game ball is determined. In the detected state, the information of “1” corresponding to the information indicating that the bit is being detected is stored for the corresponding bit.

  FIG. 520 is a flowchart showing the ball entry detection process executed in step S309 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 516).

  When it is confirmed that the state where the information of “0” is stored in the 0th bit D0 is changed to the state where the information of “1” is stored, one first winning opening detection sensor 42a detects one switch. It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S601: YES). In this case, the first output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S602), and the value of the ten prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S603). . The first output flag is used by the main CPU 63 to specify that information output indicating that one game ball has been detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a should be executed to the management IC 66. This is a flag. The ten prize ball counter is a counter for specifying the number of times that the payout of ten game balls should be executed by the main CPU 63. When the value of the ten-prize-ball counter is 1 or more, the ten-prize-ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S317 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 516), and the ten-prize-ball command is output. When the command is output once, the value of the ten prize balls counter is decremented by one. When receiving the ten prize ball commands, the payout control device 77 drives and controls the payout device 76 so that ten game balls are paid out.

  When it is confirmed that the state where the information of “0” is stored in the first bit D1 is changed to the state where the information of “1” is stored, one second winning opening detection sensor 43a detects one state. It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S604: YES). In this case, "1" is set to the second output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S605), and the value of the ten prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S606). . The second output flag is used by the main CPU 63 to specify that information output indicating that one game ball has been detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a should be executed to the management IC 66. It is a flag.

  When it is confirmed that the state where the information of “0” is stored in the second bit D2 is switched to the state where the information of “1” is stored, one third winning opening detection sensor 44a detects one switch. It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S607: YES). In this case, "1" is set to the third output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S608), and the value of the ten prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S609). . The third output flag is used by the main CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one game ball has been detected by the third winning opening detection sensor 44a should be executed to the management IC 66. It is a flag.

  When it is confirmed that the state where the information of “0” is stored in the third bit D3 is changed to the state where the information of “1” is stored, one game ball is detected by the special power detection sensor 45a. It is determined that it has been detected (step S610: YES). In this case, the special power winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S611), and the fourth output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S612). The value of the 15 award ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S613). The special power winning flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball has entered the special power winning device 32 in the round game in the open / close execution mode. In the special figure special power control process (step S313) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 516), by confirming that the special power winning flag is set to "1", one game ball is inserted into the special power winning device 32. It is determined that a ball has occurred, and the remaining number of balls that can enter the special power winning device 32 in the round game is decremented by one. When the process of subtracting 1 from the number of possible balls is executed, the special power winning flag is cleared to “0”. The fourth output flag is a flag for specifying by the main CPU 63 that information output indicating that one game ball has been detected by the special power detection sensor 45a should be executed to the management IC 66. . The 15 prize ball counter is a counter for specifying the number of times the payout of 15 game balls should be executed by the main CPU 63. If the value of the 15-prize-ball counter is 1 or more, the 15-prize-ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S317 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 516), and the 15-prize-ball is output. When the command is output once, the value of the 15 prize balls counter is decremented by one. When receiving the 15 prize ball commands, the payout control device 77 drives and controls the payout device 76 so that 15 game balls are paid out.

  When it is confirmed that the state where the information of “0” is stored in the fourth bit D4 is changed to the state where the information of “1” is stored, one first opening detection sensor 46a detects one switch. It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S614: YES). In this case, the first operation winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S615), and the fifth output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S616). Further, the value of the one-prize-ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S617). The first operation winning flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball has entered the first operation port 33. In the special figure special power control processing (step S313) of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 516), it is confirmed that "1" is set in the first operation winning flag, and is stored in the holding area RE of the holding storage area 65a. On the condition that the number of pieces of pending information stored is less than the upper limit number of four, processing for newly storing the pending information is executed. It is confirmed that the first operation winning flag is set to "1" in the special electric power controlling process (step S313), and when the processing corresponding to the confirmation is executed, the first operation winning flag is cleared to "0". I do. The fifth output flag is used by the main CPU 63 to specify that information output indicating that one game ball has been detected by the first operating port detection sensor 46a should be executed to the management IC 66. This is a flag. The one prize ball counter is a counter for specifying the number of times that one game ball should be paid out by the main CPU 63. When the value of the one-prize-ball counter is 1 or more, the one-prize-ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S317 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 516), and the one-prize-ball is also provided. When the command is output once, the value of the one prize ball counter is decremented by one. When receiving the one prize ball command, the payout control device 77 drives and controls the payout device 76 so that one game ball is paid out.

  When it is confirmed that the state where the information of “0” is stored in the fifth bit D5 is changed to the state where the information of “1” is stored, one second opening detection sensor 47a detects one switch. It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S618: YES). In this case, "1" is set to the second operation winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S619), and "1" is set to the sixth output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S620). Then, the value of the one prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S621). The second operation winning flag is a flag for specifying by the main CPU 63 that one game ball has entered the second operation port 34. In the special figure special electric power control process (step S313) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 516), the second operation winning flag is confirmed to be set to "1", and is stored in the hold area RE of the hold storage area 65a. On the condition that the number of pieces of pending information stored is less than the upper limit number of four, processing for newly storing the pending information is executed. It is confirmed that "1" is set in the second operation winning flag in the special electric power controlling process (step S313), and when the process corresponding to the confirmation is executed, the second operation winning flag is cleared to "0". I do. The sixth output flag is used by the main CPU 63 to specify that information output indicating that one game ball has been detected by the second operating port detection sensor 47a should be executed to the management IC 66. It is a flag.

  When it is confirmed that the state where the information of "0" is stored in the sixth bit D6 is changed to the state where the information of "1" is stored, one game ball is detected by the out-mouth detection sensor 48a. Is detected (step S622: YES). In this case, "7" is set to the seventh output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S623). The seventh output flag is a flag for specifying by the main CPU 63 that information output indicating that one game ball has been detected by the out-mouth detection sensor 48a should be executed to the management IC 66. is there.

  When it is confirmed that the state where the information of “0” is stored in the seventh bit D7 is changed to the state where the information of “1” is stored, one game ball is detected by the gate detection sensor 49a. It is determined that it has been detected (step S624: YES). In this case, "1" is set to the gate winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S625). The gate winning flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball has entered the through gate 35. In the general-purpose power control process (step S314) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 516), by confirming that the gate winning flag is set to “1”, the general-purpose power stored in the general-purpose holding area 65c is confirmed. Processing of storing the current numerical information of the general-purpose accessory opening counter C4 in the general-purpose holding area 65c as the general-purpose side holding information, provided that the number of hold information on the side is less than the upper limit number of four. Execute It is confirmed that "1" is set in the gate winning flag in the ordinary figure general control process (step S314), and when the process corresponding to the confirmation is executed, the gate winning flag is cleared to "0".

  Since the timer interrupt process (FIG. 516) is started at a period of 4 milliseconds as described above, when one of the ball detection sensors 42a to 49a starts detecting one game ball, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 516) is started. In the situation where the detection of one game ball is continued by the ball detection sensors 42a to 49a, the main CPU 63 determines that one game ball has been detected by the ball detection sensors 42a to 49a. It is performed in. Therefore, it is sufficient that the first to seventh output flags are provided one by one.

  Next, the contents of processing executed by the payout control device 77 will be described. First, the electrical configuration of the payout control device 77 and various devices that communicate with the payout control device 77 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

  The payout control device 77 includes an MPU 91. The MPU 91 incorporates a payout ROM 93, a payout RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like, in addition to the payout CPU 92 which is an arithmetic processing device including a control unit and a calculation unit.

  The payout side ROM 93 is a memory such as a NOR type flash memory and a NAND type flash memory which does not require an external power supply for storage (that is, a non-volatile storage unit), and is used as a read-only memory. The payout ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the payout CPU 92 and fixed value data.

  The payout side RAM 94 is a memory such as an SRAM and a DRAM that requires an external power supply for storing and storing data (that is, volatile storage means), and is used for both reading and writing. The payout RAM 94 is capable of random access and has a shorter read time than the payout ROM 93 when compared with the same data capacity. The payout RAM 94 temporarily stores various data and the like for the execution of the control program stored in the payout ROM 93.

  The payout CPU 92 is capable of performing bidirectional communication with the main CPU 63. Upon receiving the prize ball command from the main CPU 63, the payout CPU 92 drives and controls the payout device 76 so that the number of game balls corresponding to the prize ball command is paid out. The payout-side CPU 92 monitors whether or not the game balls can be normally paid out. If the payout-side CPU 92 specifies that the game balls cannot be normally paid out, the payout-side RAM 94 is stored in the payout RAM 94. The payout device 76 is stopped even in a situation where the unpaid prize ball number information is stored. In addition, the payout-side CPU 92 transmits a payout restriction command to the main-side CPU 63 indicating that the payout is not normally performed. When the main CPU 63 receives the payout restriction command, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 execute a notification indicating that the payout of the game balls is not normally performed. The notification command is transmitted to the voice light emission control device 81 so as to be executed. As a state where it is not possible to normally pay out the game balls, a full state where the lower plate 56a is full of the game balls, a state where the game balls are not refilled in the tank 75, and a state where the ball is not replenished, the payout device 76 There is an abnormal payout state in which does not operate normally, a main body open state in which the gaming machine main body 12 is opened from the outer frame 11, and a front door open state in which the front door frame 14 is opened from the inner frame 13. .

  A full tank detection sensor (not shown) is provided at an intermediate position of the game ball passage leading from the payout device 76 to the lower plate 56a, and the detection result of the full tank detection sensor is input to the payout CPU 92. The payout-side CPU 92 specifies that the game ball is in the full state when the game ball is continuously detected by the full tank detection sensor, and the state in which the game ball is continuously detected by the full tank detection sensor is released. In this case, it is specified that the full state has been released.

  A ball non-detection sensor (not shown) is provided at an intermediate position of the game ball passage leading from the tank 75 to the payout device 76, and the detection result of the ball non-detection sensor is input to the payout CPU 92. The payout side CPU 92 specifies that the game ball is not detected when the game ball is not continuously detected by the ball non-detection sensor, and when the state that the game ball is not continuously detected by the ball non-detection sensor is released. Specifies that the ballless state has been released.

  The payout device 76 is provided with a payout detection sensor (not shown) for detecting a game ball paid out from the payout device 76, and the detection result of the payout detection sensor is input to the payout CPU 92. The payout-side CPU 92 specifies that one game ball has been paid out from the payout device 76 when the game ball is detected by the payout detection sensor. Further, the payout-side CPU 92 identifies that the payout is abnormal when the payout detection sensor does not continuously detect the game ball despite the drive control of the payout device 76 so that the game ball is paid out. When the state where the game ball is not continuously detected by the payout detection sensor is released, it is specified that the abnormal payout state has been released.

  A front door opening sensor 95 is provided on the front surface of the inner frame 13 (see FIG. 507), and the detection result of the front door opening sensor 95 is input to the payout CPU 92. In this case, when the front door frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 13, the front door open sensor 95 transmits a close detection signal to the payout side CPU 92, and the front door frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 13. In this case, the front door opening sensor 95 transmits an opening detection signal to the payout side CPU 92. The payout-side CPU 92 specifies that the front door frame 14 is in the closed state when receiving the closing detection signal from the front door opening sensor 95, and determines when the opening detection signal is received from the front door opening sensor 95. It is specified that the front door frame 14 is in the open state. Further, the payout-side CPU 92 transmits a front door opening command to the main CPU 63 at the timing when the front door frame 14 specifies that the front door frame 14 has changed from the closed state to the open state, and specifies that the front door frame 14 has changed from the open state to the closed state. At this timing, a front door closing command is transmitted to the main CPU 63. The main CPU 63 specifies that the front door frame 14 has been opened when the front door opening command is received, and specifies that the front door frame 14 is closed when the front door closing command is received.

  A body opening sensor 96 is provided on the front surface of the back pack unit 15 (see FIG. 507), and the detection result of the body opening sensor 96 is input to the payout CPU 92. In this case, when the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closed state with respect to the outer frame 11, the main body opening sensor 96 transmits a closing detection signal to the payout side CPU 92, and the gaming machine main body 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11. In some cases, the body opening sensor 96 transmits an opening detection signal to the payout CPU 92. The payout CPU 92 determines that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closed state when receiving the closing detection signal from the main body opening sensor 96, and determines that the gaming machine main body 12 is closed when receiving the opening detection signal from the main body opening sensor 96. It is specified that the main body 12 is in the open state. Further, the payout CPU 92 transmits a main body opening command to the main CPU 63 at a timing that specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 has changed from the closed state to the open state, and specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 has changed from the open state to the closed state. A main body closing command is transmitted to the main CPU 63 at the timing. The main CPU 63 specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 has been opened when the main body opening command is received, and specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is closed when the main body closing command is received.

  The timer interruption process executed by the payout-side CPU 92 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The timer interrupt process is started repeatedly at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 milliseconds).

  First, a full tank process is executed (step S701). In the full tank process, as described above, it is determined whether or not the tank is full based on the detection result of the full tank detection sensor. And sends a command indicating that the tank is full to the main CPU 63. When the full state is released, a process for enabling the payout of the game ball is executed, and a command indicating that the full state is released is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

  After that, the ball unnecessary process is executed (step S702). In the ball-free process, as described above, it is determined whether or not the ball is in a state without a ball based on the detection result of the ball-absence detection sensor. At the same time as executing the command, a command indicating that there is no ball is transmitted to the main CPU 63. When the absence of ball state is released, a process for enabling the payout of game balls is executed, and a command indicating that the absence of ball state is released is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

  After that, a payout abnormality monitoring process is executed (step S703). In the payout abnormality monitoring processing, as described above, it is specified whether or not the payout is abnormal based on the detection result of the payout detection sensor, and in the case of the payout abnormal state, the processing of stopping the payout of the game ball is executed. At the same time, a command indicating the abnormal payout state is transmitted to the main CPU 63. Further, when the abnormal payout state is released, a process for enabling the payout of the game balls is executed, and a command indicating that the abnormal payout state is released is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

  Thereafter, a front door opening monitoring process is executed (step S704). In the front door opening monitoring process, as described above, it is determined whether or not the front door frame 14 is open based on the detection result of the front door opening sensor 95, and if the front door frame 14 is open, A process of stopping the payout of game balls is executed, and a front door opening command is transmitted to the main CPU 63. When the front door frame 14 is closed, a process for enabling payout of game balls is executed, and a front door closing command is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

  Thereafter, the main body opening monitoring process is executed (step S705). In the main body opening monitoring process, as described above, it is specified whether or not the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state based on the detection result of the main body opening sensor 96. The processing for stopping the payout is executed, and the main body release command is transmitted to the main CPU 63. When the gaming machine main body 12 is closed, the processing for enabling the payout of gaming balls is executed, and a main body closing command is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

  After that, a command reading process is executed (step S706). In the command reading process, the main CPU 63 executes a process of reading a prize ball command transmitted, and stores the prize ball command in the payout RAM 94. Then, after executing the prize ball setting process for adding the number corresponding to the received prize ball command to the unpaid prize ball number information in the payout RAM 94 (step S707), the payout device 76 pays out the game balls. A payout control process for performing the execution control is executed (step S708). In the payout control process, when the information on the number of unpaid prize balls stored in the payout RAM 94 is 1 or more, the drive control of the payout device 76 is performed, and one game ball is detected by the payout detection sensor. In this case, the value of the winning ball number information is decremented by one. When the value of the prize ball number information becomes “0”, the drive control of the payout device 76 is stopped. Thereafter, an external information setting process for controlling the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing result of the various processes executed in the current timer interrupt process is executed (step S709).

  Next, a configuration for externally outputting information from the pachinko machine 10 to the hall computer HC provided in the game hall will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 507, the back pack unit 15 is provided with an external terminal plate 97. The external terminal plate 97 is provided with a large number of external terminals, some of which are electrically connected to the main CPU 63 and some of which are external terminals. A plurality of external terminals are electrically connected to the payout CPU 92. Since the main CPU 63 and the payout CPU 92 are electrically connected to the external terminal plate 97 in this manner, as shown in FIG. It is possible to output.

  One external terminal of the external terminal plate 97 is electrically connected to the front door opening sensor 95, and one external terminal of the external terminal plate 97 is electrically connected to the main body opening sensor 96. More specifically, a signal relay board 98 is provided at an intermediate position of a signal path from the front door opening sensor 95 to the payout side CPU 92. The signal relay board 98 is provided with a branch path SL2 branched from a signal path SL1 from the front door opening sensor 95 to the payout side CPU 92. The branch path SL2 is connected to an external terminal for opening the front door of the external terminal plate 97. Therefore, the electric signal corresponding to the detection result of the front door opening sensor 95 is input not only to the payout side CPU 92 but also to the front door opening external terminal of the external terminal board 97. Accordingly, a signal indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is in an open state can be output to the hall computer HC without the control of the payout CPU 92.

  More specifically, the main body opening sensor 96 is provided on the signal relay board 98 with a branch path SL4 that branches off from the signal path SL3 from the main body opening sensor 96 to the payout side CPU 92. The branch path SL4 is connected to an external terminal for opening the main body of the external terminal plate 97. Therefore, an electric signal corresponding to the detection result of the main body opening sensor 96 is input not only to the payout side CPU 92 but also to an external terminal for opening the main body in the external terminal board 97. As a result, a signal indicating whether or not the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state can be output to the hall computer HC without the control of the payout CPU 92.

  Next, the contents of information externally output from the main CPU 63 and the payout CPU 92 to the hall computer HC will be described. First, the contents of information externally output from the main CPU 63 to the hall computer HC will be described.

  In the external information setting process (step S318) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 516), the main CPU 63 sets the output of information to each external terminal assigned to the main CPU 63 on the external terminal board 97. As information output from the main CPU 63 to the external terminal board 97, information indicating that the open / close execution mode is in progress, information indicating that the support mode is in the high frequency support mode, and one game round has ended. And a predetermined number (for example, 100) of game balls from the game area PA through one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. Information indicating that the game ball has been ejected, information indicating that a game ball has entered the first operating port 33, and information indicating that a game ball has entered the second operating port 34 are included. .

  In the external information setting process (step S709) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 522), the payout CPU 92 sets the output of information to the external terminals assigned to the payout CPU 92 on the external terminal board 97. The information output from the payout-side CPU 92 to the external terminal board 97 includes information indicating that ten game balls have been paid out.

  In accordance with various information received from the pachinko machine 10 through the external terminal board 97, the hall computer HC can grasp the execution mode of the payout of the game balls in the pachinko machine 10, and the like. For example, the payout rate, which is the ratio of the number of game balls paid out until 100 game balls are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10, the open / close execution mode, and the normal game state other than the high frequency support mode (Hereinafter referred to as “B”), the payout rate in the open / close execution mode, the payout rate in the high frequency support mode, and 100 game balls from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10. The number of game times executed until the game is discharged (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “S”) · BS × “the number of prize balls for winning to the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34” The number of game balls entering the first operating port 33 generated until 100 game balls are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “S1”). From the game area PA of 10 Number of game balls entering the second operation port 34 generated until the number of game balls is discharged (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “S2”) · B− (S1 × “to the first operation port 33” Number of prize balls for winning a prize ”+ S2 ד Number of prize balls for winning a prize to the second operating port 34 ”) Probability of open / close execution mode per unit game time Probability of high frequency support mode per unit game time Is calculated. As a result, it becomes possible for the hall computer HC to manage the ball entry mode in the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10. The number of prize balls is the number of game balls paid out when one game ball enters the corresponding ball entry section.

<Configuration for managing winning modes of gaming balls>
Next, a configuration for managing the game history using the management IC 66 will be described. First, the electrical configuration of the management IC 66 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

  As described above, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 includes the main CPU 63, the main ROM 64, the main RAM 65, and the management IC 66. In addition, the MPU 62 includes the I / F 101 in addition to the above, and also includes the reading terminal 68d described above.

  The I / F 101 is an interface for transmitting and receiving signals to and from a device external to the MPU 62. The I / F 101 is electrically connected to the main CPU 63 via the internal bus 103. Detection results from sensors such as the ball detection sensors 42a to 49a and commands from the payout CPU 92 are input to the MPU 62 through input ports of the I / F 101, and based on the input detection results and the contents of the commands. Various processes are executed by the main CPU 63 as described above. When a signal is output to a device such as a special power drive unit 32b as a result of various processes performed by the main CPU 63, the signal is output through an output port of the I / F 101, and As a result of execution of various processes by the CPU 63, when a command is output to the payout-side CPU 92 and the sound emission control device 81, the command is output through an output port of the I / F 101.

  The management IC 66 includes a management I / F 111, a management CPU 112, a management ROM 113, a management RAM 114, an RTC 115, a correspondence memory 116, a history memory 117, a calculation result memory 131, It has. These devices are connected via an internal bus 66a provided in the management IC 66 so as to be capable of bidirectional communication.

  The management-side I / F 111 receives various signals from the main-side CPU 63 via the one-way communication signal path group 118 built in the MPU 62, and also controls the one-way communication signal path group 119 built in the MPU 62. This is an interface for transmitting various signals to the reading terminal 68d through the interface. Various signals from the main CPU 63 are input to an input port of the management I / F 111, and various signals to the reading terminal 68d are output from an output port of the management I / F 111. The main CPU 63 is electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d via a signal path group 120 for bidirectional communication built in the MPU 62.

  The management CPU 112 is an arithmetic processing device including a control unit and an arithmetic unit. The management-side ROM 113 is a memory such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory that does not require an external power supply for storing and storing data (that is, a nonvolatile storage unit), and is used as a read-only memory. The management ROM 113 stores various control programs executed by the management CPU 112 and fixed value data. The management-side RAM 114 is a memory such as an SRAM and a DRAM that requires an external power supply for storing and storing data (that is, a volatile storage unit), and is used for both reading and writing. The management-side RAM 114 allows random access, and has a shorter read time than the management-side ROM 113 when compared with the same data capacity. The management-side RAM 114 temporarily stores various data and the like when the control program stored in the management-side ROM 113 is executed.

  The RTC 115 is a real-time clock that constantly measures date / time information and time information, and outputs the measured date / time information and time information (hereinafter, also referred to as date / time information) according to an instruction from the management CPU 112. It is a configuration that can be used. The RTC 115 is provided with a backup power supply, so that the date and time information and the time information can be measured even while the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off.

  The correspondence memory 116 is a memory such as an SRAM and a DRAM that requires an external power supply for storage and storage (that is, volatile storage means), and is used for both reading and writing. The correspondence memory 116 stores information on the correspondence between the buffers 122a to 122p provided at the input port 121 of the management-side I / F 111 and the types of signals input to the buffers 122a to 122p. Used for Details of the contents of the correspondence memory 116 will be described later.

  The history memory 117 is a memory such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory that does not require an external power supply for storing and storing data (that is, a nonvolatile storage unit), and is used for both reading and writing. The history memory 117 is used to store information about the game history received from the main CPU 63 through the management I / F 111. Details of the contents of the history memory 117 will be described later.

  The operation result memory 131 is a memory such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory that does not require an external power supply for storing and holding (that is, a nonvolatile storage unit), and is used for both reading and writing. The calculation result memory 131 is used to sequentially store various parameters calculated by the management-side CPU 112 using the history information stored in the history memory 117. The contents of various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131 are sequentially displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, and are output to an external device connected to the reading terminal 68d.

  Next, the configuration of the input port 121 provided in the management-side I / F 111 will be described. FIG. 524 is an explanatory diagram for describing the configuration of the input port 121 of the management-side I / F 111.

  The input port 121 is provided with a plurality of buffers 122a to 122p. Specifically, first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p are provided. One type of signal can be input to each of the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p through signal paths 118a to 118p, and each of the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p is a signal to be input. When the signal is at the LOW level, information of "0" is stored as the first data, and when the signal to be input is at the HI level, the information of "1" is stored as the second data. Note that the relationship between the LOW and HI and the first data and the second data may be reversed.

  The first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 122a. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level first signal when no new gaming ball is detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, and one game is output by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a. When a ball is detected, a first signal at the HI level is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to specify that the first signal at the HI level is being input to the first buffer 122a.

  A second signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a is input to the second buffer 122b. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level second signal when no new gaming ball is detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, and one game is output by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a. When a ball is detected, a second signal at the HI level is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to specify that the second signal at the HI level is being input to the second buffer 122b.

  A third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level third signal when no new game ball is detected by the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, and one game is output by the third winning opening detection sensor 44a. When a ball is detected, a third signal at the HI level is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to specify that the third signal at the HI level is being input to the third buffer 122c.

  A fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special power detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level fourth signal when no new game ball is detected by the special power detection sensor 45a, and when one game ball is detected by the special power detection sensor 45a. And outputs a HI level fourth signal for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to specify that the HI-level fourth signal is being input to the fourth buffer 122d.

  The fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first working port detection sensor 46a is input to the fifth buffer 122e. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level fifth signal when no new game ball is detected by the first operation port detection sensor 46a, and one game is output by the first operation port detection sensor 46a. When a ball is detected, a fifth signal at the HI level is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to specify that the fifth signal at the HI level is being input to the fifth buffer 122e.

  A sixth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second working port detection sensor 47a is input to the sixth buffer 122f. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a sixth signal at the LOW level in a situation where a new game ball is not detected by the second operation port detection sensor 47a, and one game is output by the second operation port detection sensor 47a. When a ball is detected, a sixth signal at the HI level is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to specify that the sixth signal at the HI level is being input to the sixth buffer 122f.

  A seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the out-mouth detection sensor 48a is input to the seventh buffer 122g. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level seventh signal when no new game ball is detected by the out-mouth detection sensor 48a, and one game ball is detected by the out-mouth detection sensor 48a. In this case, the HI-level seventh signal is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to specify that the seventh signal at the HI level is being input to the seventh buffer 122g.

  An eighth signal corresponding to whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress is input to the eighth buffer 122h. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW level eighth signal in a situation other than the open / close execution mode, and continuously outputs a HI level eighth signal in the situation of the open / close execution mode.

  A ninth signal corresponding to whether or not the high-frequency support mode is in progress is input to the ninth buffer 122i. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW-level ninth signal in a situation other than the high-frequency support mode, and continuously outputs a HI-level ninth signal in the situation of the high-frequency support mode.

  A tenth signal corresponding to whether or not the front door frame 14 is open is input to the tenth buffer 122j. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW level tenth signal when the front door frame 14 is closed, and continues the HI level tenth signal when the front door frame 14 is open. And output.

  An eleventh signal corresponding to whether or not the game round has been started is input to the eleventh buffer 122k. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW level eleventh signal until the game round is started, and outputs the HI level eleventh signal for a specific period when the game round is started. I do. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to specify that the HI-level eleventh signal is being input to the eleventh buffer 122k.

  A setting value update signal for causing the management-side CPU 112 to recognize that the setting of the pachinko machine 10 has been newly set by the main-side CPU 63 is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level set value update signal in a situation where a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has not been performed. And outputs a pulse signal in which the set value update signal of the HI level is maintained for a specific period for a number corresponding to the newly set value. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to specify that the HI level set value update signal has been input to the fifteenth buffer 122o.

  In the sixteenth buffer 122p, an output instruction signal for causing the management CPU 112 to recognize a trigger for outputting the history information stored in the history memory 117 and various parameters stored in the operation result memory 131 to the reading terminal 68d is provided. Will be entered. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level output instruction signal when there is no need to output history information, and outputs an HI level output instruction signal for a specific period when it is necessary to output history information. I do. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to specify that the HI-level output instruction signal has been input to the sixteenth buffer 122p.

  Although the twelfth buffer 122l, the thirteenth buffer 122m, and the fourteenth buffer 122n can input a signal from the main CPU 63, the pachinko machine 10 is blank in which a normal signal is not input. As described above, the number of buffers 122a to 122p larger than the types of signals output from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 in the pachinko machine 10 is provided as the input port 121 of the management I / F 111, The management IC 66 can be used for a model different from the pachinko machine 10. Thereby, the versatility of the management IC 66 can be improved. Incidentally, signal paths 118a to 118p are formed between the main CPU 63 and each of the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p so as to correspond to the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p on a one-to-one basis. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the signal paths 118l to 118n may not be formed between the buffers 122l to 122n to be blanked.

  The input of the set value update signal to the fifteenth buffer 122o and the input of the output instruction signal to the sixteenth buffer 122p have been determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and have received an instruction from the main CPU 63. Instead, the management-side CPU 112 can specify that the set value update signal is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o and that the output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p. On the other hand, what types of signals are input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n is not determined in the design stage of the management IC 66, and the types of these signals are received from the main CPU 63. This is specified by the management CPU 112. The details of the identification of these signal types in the management CPU 112 will be described later. Is transmitted by transmitting the type identification command. In this case, the information on the type of various signals provided by the type identification command is stored in the correspondence memory 116, and when the type of various signals is specified by the management CPU 112 while operating power is being supplied, The information stored in the correspondence memory 116 is referred to.

  FIG. 525 is an explanatory diagram for describing the configuration of the correspondence memory 116. The correspondence memory 116 has first to fourteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123n in one-to-one correspondence with the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n provided in the input port 121 of the management-side I / F 111. Is provided.

  In the first correspondence area 123a, information indicating the general winning opening 31 is stored as information for specifying the type of signal input to the first buffer 122a by the management-side CPU 112. In addition, in the first correspondence area 123a, information indicating the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the general winning opening 31 (10 pieces) together with information indicating that the general winning opening 31 is used. Is stored. Information indicating the general winning opening 31 is stored in the second correspondence area 123b as information for specifying the type of signal input to the second buffer 122b by the management-side CPU 112. In addition, in the second correspondence area 123b, information indicating the general winning opening 31 and information on the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the general winning opening 31 (10 pieces) together with information indicating the general winning opening 31. Is stored. In the third correspondence area 123c, information indicating the general winning opening 31 is stored as information for specifying the type of signal input to the third buffer 122c by the management-side CPU 112. In addition, in the third correspondence area 123c, information indicating the number of the game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the general winning opening 31 (10 pieces) together with the information indicating that the game is the general winning opening 31. Is stored.

  In the fourth correspondence area 123d, information indicating the special power winning device 32 is stored as information for specifying the type of the signal input to the fourth buffer 122d by the management-side CPU 112. In addition, in the fourth correspondence area 123d, information (15) of the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the special power prize device 32 together with information indicating that the device is the special prize device 32. Is stored. In the fifth correspondence area 123e, information indicating the first operation port 33 is stored as information for specifying the type of signal input to the fifth buffer 122e by the management-side CPU 112. In addition, the fifth correspondence area 123e includes information indicating the first operating port 33 and information on the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the first operating port 33 (one piece). ) Is also stored. In the sixth correspondence area 123f, information indicating the second operation port 34 is stored as information for specifying the type of signal input to the sixth buffer 122f by the management-side CPU 112. Also, in the sixth correspondence area 123f, information indicating the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the second operation port 34 (1 piece) ) Is also stored. In the seventh correspondence area 123g, information indicating that the signal is the out port 24a is stored as information for the management-side CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the seventh buffer 122g.

  In the eighth correspondence area 123h, information indicating the open / close execution mode is stored as information for the management-side CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the eighth buffer 122h. In the ninth correspondence area 123i, information indicating the high-frequency support mode is stored as information for the management-side CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the ninth buffer 122i. In the tenth correspondence area 123j, information indicating the front door frame 14 is stored as information for the management-side CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the tenth buffer 122j. In the eleventh correspondence area 123k, information indicating the start of a game round is stored as information for the management-side CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the eleventh buffer 122k.

  In the twelfth correspondence area 123l, information indicating blanks that do not correspond to any of them is stored as information for specifying the type of signal input to the twelfth buffer 122l by the management-side CPU 112. In the thirteenth correspondence area 123m, information indicating blanks that do not correspond to any of them is stored as information for the management-side CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m. In the fourteenth correspondence area 123n, information indicating blanks that do not correspond to any of them is stored as information for specifying the type of signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n by the management-side CPU 112.

  As described above, what kind of signal is input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n is specified by the management CPU 112 by receiving an instruction from the main CPU 63. The management IC 66 can be used for a model different from the pachinko machine 10. Thereby, the versatility of the management IC 66 can be improved.

  Also, each time a signal corresponding to storage of history information is output to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n, information for recognizing the type of the signal is not output, but the type of the signal is recognized in advance. And information for specifying the type of signal input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n by the management CPU 112 based on the output information is stored in the correspondence memory 116. Configuration. Thus, as compared with a configuration in which the signal for recognizing the type of the signal is output to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n each time the signal corresponding to the storage of the history information is output, the main output of each signal is mainly performed. It is possible to reduce the amount of information output from the side CPU 63 to the management CPU 112.

  Output of information for specifying the type of signal input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n by the management-side CPU 112 is performed at the start of supply of operating power. Thus, in the situation where the game is started in the pachinko machine 10, the types of signals input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n can be specified by the management CPU 112.

  Further, the information setting that the set value update signal is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o and the information setting that the output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p are performed in the design stage of the management IC 66. As a result, the setting value update signal and the output instruction signal to be surely used not only by the pachinko machine 10 but also by another type of pachinko machine using the management IC 66, the fifteenth buffer 122o and the sixteenth buffer 122p. It is possible to omit the process for specifying the type of signal input to the. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the processing for specifying the type of the signal.

  Next, the history memory 117 of the management IC 66 will be described. FIG. 526 is an explanatory diagram for describing the configuration of the history memory 117.

  The history memory 117 is provided with a history area 124 for sequentially storing history information. In the history area 124, a plurality of pieces of pointer information are sequentially set, and a history information storage area 125 is set in one-to-one correspondence with each piece of pointer information. The history information storage area 125 can store a combination of RTC information and correspondence information. In this case, each history information storage area 125 has a 2-byte data capacity, a 1-byte data capacity is allocated as an area for storing RTC information, and an area for storing correspondence information. One byte data capacity is allocated. When it is necessary to store correspondence information according to signals input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n (actually, in the case of the present pachinko machine 10, the first to eleventh buffers 122a to 122k). First, the date and time information measured by the current RTC 115 is stored in an area for storing RTC information in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be currently written. After that, the correspondence information corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122n that triggered the current information storage is read from the correspondence areas 123a to 123n corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122n in the correspondence memory 116, and the read correspondence information is read. Is stored in the area for storing the correspondence information of the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be currently written.

  Regarding the correspondence information stored in the history information storage area 125, specifically, signals corresponding to the detection results of the ball input detection sensors 42a to 48a are input to the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g as described above. For this reason, information corresponding to the type of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored in the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g in the correspondence memory 116. More specifically, information corresponding to the types of the incoming ball portions corresponding to each of the incoming ball detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored in the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g. In the pachinko machine 10, as described above, the first to third winning opening detection sensors 42a to 44a all detect a game ball that has entered the general winning opening 31. In each of the first to third correspondence areas 123a to 123c corresponding to the detection sensors 42a to 44a, information indicating that the opening is the general winning opening 31 is stored. The fourth correspondence area 123d stores information indicating the special power winning device 32, and the fifth correspondence area 123e stores information indicating the first operating port 33. In the sixth correspondence area 123f, information indicating the second operation port 34 is stored, and in the seventh correspondence area 123g, information indicating the out port 24a is stored. If the buffers 122a to 122n that triggered the information storage this time are any of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g, the information on the type of the ball entry section corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122g is The information is read from any of the seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g, and the read information of the type of the entering ball portion is stored as it is in the area for storing the correspondence information in the history information storage area 125.

  On the other hand, a signal indicating whether or not the open / close execution mode is being input to the eighth buffer 122h, a signal indicating whether or not the high frequency support mode is being input to the ninth buffer 122i, and the tenth buffer 122j being input A signal indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is being opened is input, and a signal indicating whether or not the game round has been started is input to the eleventh buffer 122k. Therefore, information indicating the open / close execution mode is stored in the eighth correspondence area 123h, information indicating the high-frequency support mode is stored in the ninth correspondence area 123i, and the tenth correspondence area is stored. Information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 is stored in 123j, and information indicating that it is a game time is stored in the eleventh correspondence area 123k.

  As described above, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the eighth signal at the LOW level in the state other than the open / close execution mode, and continuously outputs the eighth signal at the HI level in the state of the open / close execution mode. The side CPU 112 specifies that the open / close execution mode has been started when the eighth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, and specifies that the open / close execution mode has ended when the eighth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level. It becomes possible. In both cases where the eighth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level and when the eighth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, the management-side CPU 112 generates a trigger for storing the correspondence information in the history information storage area 125. Identify that you have done it. That is, when the eighth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, not only the information indicating the open / close execution mode read out from the eighth correspondence area 123h but also the start information, together with the history information storage area 125. Is stored in an area for storing the corresponding relationship information. When the eighth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, not only the information indicating the open / close execution mode read from the eighth correspondence area 123h but also the end information, together with the history information storage area 125. Is stored in an area for storing the corresponding relationship information.

  As described above, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW-level ninth signal in a situation other than the high-frequency support mode, and continuously outputs the HI-level ninth signal in a situation of the high-frequency support mode. When the ninth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, the management-side CPU 112 specifies that the high frequency support mode has been started, and when the ninth signal has changed from the HI level to the LOW level, the high frequency support mode ends. Can be specified. When the ninth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level and when the ninth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, the management-side CPU 112 generates a trigger for storing the correspondence information in the history information storage area 125. Identify that you have done it. That is, when the ninth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, not only the information indicating the high-frequency support mode read from the ninth correspondence area 123i but also the start information is stored together with the history information storage area. 125 are stored in an area for storing the correspondence information. When the ninth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, not only the information indicating the high-frequency support mode read from the ninth correspondence area 123i but also the end information, together with the end information. 125 are stored in the area for storing the correspondence information.

  As described above, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW level tenth signal when the front door frame 14 is closed, and outputs the HI level tenth signal when the front door frame 14 is open. To output continuously, the management-side CPU 112 specifies that the front door frame 14 has been opened when the tenth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, and when the tenth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level. Can specify that the front door frame 14 has been closed. When the tenth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level or when the HI level changes to the LOW level, the management-side CPU 112 generates a trigger for storing the correspondence information in the history information storage area 125. Identify that you have done it. That is, when the tenth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, not only the information indicating the front door frame 14 read from the tenth correspondence area 123j but also the opening start information is stored together with the history information. It is stored in an area for storing the correspondence information of the area 125. When the tenth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, not only the information indicating the front door frame 14 read from the tenth correspondence area 123j but also the opening end information is stored together with the history information. It is stored in an area for storing the correspondence information of the area 125.

  As described above, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the eleventh signal at the LOW level until the timing for starting the game, and when the timing for starting the game is reached, outputs the eleventh signal at the HI level for a specific period. Output a signal. Therefore, when the eleventh signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, the management-side CPU 112 specifies that the game has been started. That is, when the eleventh signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, the information indicating the game number read out from the eleventh correspondence area 123k is stored in the history information storage area 125 to store the correspondence information. Store in area.

  The history information storage area 125 can store all the history information generated during the business day in which the pachinko machine 10 is continuously firing game balls from the opening to the closing of the store even if the business day continues for 10 consecutive days. Are provided for several times. For example, if history information is generated 60,000 times in one day, more than 600,000 history information storage areas 125 are provided. As a result, all the history information can be stored and held in the history memory 117 for at least 10 days.

  The history memory 117 is provided with a pointer area 126 separately from the history area 124. The pointer area 126 stores information for the management CPU 112 to specify the current pointer information to be written in the history memory 117. Specifically, at the stage of shipment of the pachinko machine 10, information for designating the pointer information “0” as a writing target is set in the pointer area 126. Each time one piece of history information is newly stored in the history information storage area 125, the information in the pointer area 126 is updated so that the value of the pointer information to be written is incremented by one. If the last order pointer information is to be written and the history information is stored in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the last order pointer information, the pointer information is set so that the pointer information of “0” becomes the write object. The information in the service area 126 is updated. Thus, when a history information storage trigger occurs that exceeds the number of storable history information, new history information is sequentially overwritten from the history information storage area 125 in which old history information is stored. Become.

  When the history information is read from the history memory 117 by the external device, all the history information storage areas 125 are cleared to “0”, and the pointer information of “0” is set as a writing target. The information in the pointer area 126 is updated. This makes it possible to prevent the history information that has once been read from being read again.

  Next, a specific processing configuration for managing the game history using the management IC 66 will be described. First, a processing configuration for storing information on the correspondence between the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n provided in the input port 121 of the management-side I / F 111 and the signal type in the correspondence memory 116 will be described. FIG. 527 is a flowchart showing the recognition processing executed by the main CPU 63. The recognition process is executed in step S111 in the main process (FIG. 514).

  First, "14" is set to a recognition output counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S801). The recognition output counter is a remaining information output for causing the management CPU 112 to recognize which type of signal the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n of the input port 121 in the management I / F 111 correspond to. Is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the required number of times. As described above, since 14 of the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n are to be recognized as signal types, "14" is set in the recognition output counter.

  After that, an output process of the identification start command is executed (step S802). The main CPU 63 outputs various commands to the management CPU 112 so that the management CPU 112 recognizes which type of signal the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n correspond to. In outputting this command, first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h are used. That is, the first to eighth buffers 122a are used by using the first to eighth signals (that is, the first to eighth signal paths 118a to 118h) used to instruct the management-side CPU 112 when the history information is stored. A command is output for causing the management-side CPU 112 to recognize which type of signal corresponds to .about.122n. This reduces the number of signal paths as compared to a configuration in which the signal paths for performing the command output are provided separately from the signal paths 118a to 118p for outputting signals to the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p. And the configuration can be simplified. The identification start command has an 8-bit data capacity, and the data of each bit is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as first to eighth signals, respectively. In the process of outputting the identification start command, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to the HI level at the timing when the output of the identification start command is started so that the management CPU 112 recognizes that a new command has been transmitted. The output period of the identification start command and the period during which the output state of the ninth signal is maintained at the HI level are set to periods that are sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the identification start command and the ninth signal. Have been. Upon receiving the identification start command, the management-side CPU 112 starts processing for storing information on the correspondence between the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n and the type of signal in the correspondence memory 116. Identify.

  Thereafter, a type identification command corresponding to the current value of the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 is read from the main ROM 64 (step S803). In this case, the first buffer 122a corresponds to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n so that the signal type is set first, and then the (n + 1) th buffer is set to the signal type after the nth buffer. Recognition setting of the signal type to be performed is performed. Therefore, if the output counter for recognition is "14" to "12", the type identification command indicating the general winning opening 31 and the number of the winning balls is read out, and if the output counter for recognition is "11", the special prize winning is obtained. The type identification command indicating the device 32 and the number of winning balls is read out. If the recognition output counter is “10”, the type identification command indicating the first operating port 33 and the number of winning balls is read out. If the output counter for recognition is "9", it is determined that the input port is the second operation port 34 and a type identification command indicating the number of winning balls is read out. If the output counter for recognition is "8", it is the output port 24a. The type identification command is read out, and if the recognition output counter is "7", the type identification command indicating the open / close execution mode is read out. If "6", the type identification command indicating the high frequency support mode is read, and if the output counter for recognition is "5", the type identification command indicating the front door frame 14 is read, and the output counter for recognition is read. If the value is "4", the type identification command indicating that it is a game time is read, and if the output counter for recognition is "3" to "1", the type identification command indicating that it is blank is read.

  Thereafter, output processing of the read type identification command is executed (step S804). The type identification command has an 8-bit data capacity like the identification start command, and data of each bit is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as first to eighth signals, respectively. In the output processing of the identification type command, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to the HI level at the timing when the output of the identification type command is started so that the management CPU 112 recognizes that a new command has been transmitted. The output period of the identification type command and the period during which the output state of the ninth signal is maintained at the HI level are set to a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the identification type command and the ninth signal. Have been. Upon receiving the identification type command, the management-side CPU 112 responds to the identification type command in the corresponding relationship areas 123a to 123n corresponding to the buffer to be set this time among the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n. Store information to be performed.

  Thereafter, the value of the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S805), and it is determined whether or not the value of the recognition output counter after the subtraction is “0” (step S806). When the value of the recognition output counter is 1 or more (step S806: NO), a process for outputting a type identification command corresponding to the value of the recognition output counter after subtracting 1 is executed (steps S803 and S803). Step S804).

  On the other hand, if the value of the recognition output counter is “0” (step S806: YES), the output processing of the identification end command is executed (step S807). The identification end command has an 8-bit data capacity, and the data of each bit is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as first to eighth signals, respectively. In the output processing of the identification end command, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to the HI level at the timing when the output of the identification end command is started so that the management-side CPU 112 recognizes that a new command has been transmitted. The output period of the identification end command and the period during which the output state of the ninth signal is maintained at the HI level are set to a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the identification end command and the ninth signal. Have been. Upon receiving the identification end command, the management-side CPU 112 specifies that the processing for storing the information on the correspondence between the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n and the signal type in the correspondence memory 116 has been completed. I do.

  Next, management processing executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The management process is started when the supply of the operation power to the management-side CPU 112 is started. Note that the processing speed of the management-side CPU 112 is faster than the processing speed of the main-side CPU 63, and the next timer interrupt processing (FIG. 516) after one timer interrupt processing (FIG. 516) is started in the main-side CPU 63. By the time, the combination of the processes from step S908 in the management process is executed 16 times or more.

  First, it is determined whether an identification start command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S901). If the identification start command has not been received (step S901: NO), the process returns to step S901 after executing the setting update recognition process (step S902). In the setting update recognition process, when the main CPU 63 sets a new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 as will be described in detail later, a corresponding process is executed.

  When the identification start command is received from the main CPU 63 (step S901: YES), the value of the setting target counter provided in the management RAM 114 is cleared to “0” (step S903). The setting target counter is a counter for specifying the type of the buffers 122a to 122n for which the signal type is to be set by the management CPU 112. The first buffer 122a is first set for the signal type, and thereafter the (n + 1) th buffer is set for the signal type after the n-th buffer.

  Thereafter, on condition that the type identification command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S904: YES), a correspondence setting process is executed (step S905). In the correspondence setting processing, the type identification received this time is stored in the correspondence area corresponding to the current value of the setting target counter of the management-side RAM 114 among the first to fourteenth correspondence relation areas 123a to 123n of the correspondence memory 116. The information of the signal type set in the command is stored. Thereafter, the value of the setting target counter of the management-side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S906).

  When a negative determination is made in step S904 or when the process of step S906 is performed, it is determined whether an identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S907). If the identification end command has not been received (step S907: NO), the process returns to step S904, and if a new type identification command is received from the main CPU 63 (step S904: YES), the process returns to step S905 and step S906. Execute the process again.

  If the identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S907: YES), the processing of steps S908 to S910 is repeatedly executed. In step S908, a history setting process for storing history information corresponding to the type of the signal received from the main CPU 63 in the history memory 117 will be described later. In step S909, although details will be described later, various parameters are calculated using the history information stored in the history memory 117, and the calculation results are reported on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. To perform display output processing. In step S910, an external output process for outputting the history information stored in the history memory 117 and the various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131 to the reading terminal 68d is executed, which will be described in detail later.

  FIG. 529 is a time chart showing how the information on the correspondence between the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a to 122n is stored in the correspondence memory 116. FIG. 529 (a) shows a period during which a command is output from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 using the first to eighth signals (that is, the first to eighth signal paths 118a to 118h). FIG. 529 (b) shows a period in which the output state of the ninth signal is at the HI level, and FIG. FIG. 529 (d) shows the timing at which the correspondence setting process (step S905) is performed by the management-side CPU 112.

  When the supply of the operation power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, the output of the identification start command using the first to eighth signals is started at the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 529 (a). You. Further, at the timing of the t1, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the LOW level to the HI level as shown in FIG. 529 (b). Thereafter, at the timing t2 when the output of the identification start command is continued, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW level as shown in FIG. 529 (b). The management-side CPU 112 confirms that the output state of the ninth signal has been changed from the HI level to the LOW level, thereby specifying that the command is transmitted from the main-side CPU 63, and the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h. By confirming this information, the contents of the command received from the main CPU 63 are grasped. In this case, since the identification start command has been received, the management-side CPU 112 makes an affirmative determination in step S901 of the management processing (FIG. 528) to enter the identification state. Thereafter, at the timing of t3, the output of the identification start command is stopped as shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 529 (a), the output of the first type identification command using the first to eighth signals is started. Also, at the timing of the time t4, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the LOW level to the HI level as shown in FIG. 529 (b). Thereafter, at a timing t5 when the output of the type identification command is continued, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW level as shown in FIG. 529 (b). The management-side CPU 112 confirms that the command state has been transmitted from the main-side CPU 63 by confirming that the output state of the ninth signal has been changed from the HI level to the LOW level. By confirming the information, the contents of the command received from the main CPU 63 are grasped. In this case, since the first type identification command has been received, the management-side CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process at the timing of t5 as shown in FIG. 529 (d). In the correspondence setting processing, information indicating the general winning opening 31 and information on the number of winning balls are stored in the first correspondence area 123a of the correspondence memory 116. Thereafter, at the timing of t6, the output of the type identification command is stopped as shown in FIG. 529 (a).

  Thereafter, at the timings of t7 to t9, the timings of t10 to t12, the timings of t13 to t15, and the timings of t16 to t18, the main timings are the same as the timings of t4 to t6. A correspondence setting process corresponding to the type identification command output from the side CPU 63 is executed by the management CPU 112. In this case, the correspondence setting processing corresponding to the fourteenth type identification command is completed from timing t16 to timing t18.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t19, the output of the identification end command using the first to eighth signals is started as shown in FIG. 529 (a). Further, at the timing of the time t19, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the LOW level to the HI level as shown in FIG. 529 (b). Thereafter, at the timing t20 when the output of the identification end command is continued, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW level as shown in FIG. 529 (b). The management-side CPU 112 confirms that the command state has been transmitted from the main-side CPU 63 by confirming that the output state of the ninth signal has been changed from the HI level to the LOW level. By confirming the information, the contents of the command received from the main CPU 63 are grasped. In this case, since the identification end command has been received, the identification state of the management-side CPU 112 ends at the timing of t20, as shown in FIG. 529 (c). Thereafter, at the timing of t21, the output of the identification end command is stopped as shown in FIG.

  Since the management CPU 112 recognizes whether or not the command is being output using the ninth signal as described above, it is possible to instruct the management CPU 112 when to store history information. Even if the command is output using the first to eighth signals (that is, the first to eighth signal paths) to be used, it is clear to the management-side CPU 112 that the command is being output. It becomes possible to make them recognize.

  Next, a processing configuration for storing the history information in the history memory 117 will be described. FIG. 530 is a flowchart showing the management output process executed by the main CPU 63. The management output process is executed in step S319 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 516).

  First, “11” is set to a management target counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S1001). The management target counter specifies in the main CPU 63 whether or not there is a management target that is not a target of specifying whether or not the signal output state to the management CPU 112 should be changed in the current management output process. In addition, it is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify which of the management targets should change the signal output state to the management CPU 112. In one management output process, the main CPU 63 specifies whether or not the signal output state to the management CPU 112 should be changed. The management target includes seven ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a, There are a total of eleven of the presence / absence of execution of the open / close execution mode, the presence / absence of execution of the high-frequency support mode, the presence / absence of opening / closing of the front door frame 14, and the presence / absence of start of the game. Therefore, "11" is first set to the management target counter.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the output state of the signal to the management-side CPU 112 for the management target corresponding to the current value of the management target counter is at the HI level (step S1002). If it is not the HI level (step S1002: NO), it is determined whether or not the value of the management target counter is 5 or more, so that the number of the ball detection sensors 42a corresponding to the management target counter is seven. To 48a (step S1003).

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1003, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the output flag of the main RAM 65 corresponding to the value of the management target counter (step S1004). Specifically, when the value of the management target counter is “11” and corresponds to the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, it is determined whether the first output flag is set to “1”, When the value of the management target counter is “10” and corresponds to the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the second output flag, and the value of the management target counter is determined. Is "9" and corresponds to the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, it is determined whether or not the third output flag is set to "1", and if the value of the management target counter is "8" If it corresponds to the special electric power detection sensor 45a, it is determined whether or not the fourth output flag is set to "1", and the value of the management target counter is "7", and the first operation port detection sensor 46a , The fifth output flag is set to “1”. It is determined whether or not the sixth output flag is set to “1” when the value of the management target counter is “6” and corresponds to the second working port detection sensor 47a. If the value of the management target counter is “5” and corresponds to the out port 24a, it is determined whether the seventh output flag is set to “1”. As described above, “1” is set in these first to seventh output flags in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 520).

  If “1” is set in the output flag corresponding to the value of the management target counter (step S1004: YES), the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the management target counter among the first to seventh signals is set to the HI level. (Step S1005). After that, the output flag corresponding to the value of the management target counter is cleared to “0” (step S1006).

  If a negative determination is made in step S1003, it is determined whether or not an opportunity has occurred to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the management target counter to the HI level (step S1007). Specifically, when the value of the management target counter is “4”, it is determined whether or not the shift to the open / close execution mode has occurred. When the value of the management target counter is “3”, the high level is determined. It is determined whether or not the shift to the frequency support mode has occurred. If the value of the management target counter is “2”, it is determined whether or not the front door frame 14 has been opened. When the value is “1”, it is determined whether or not the game round has been started by determining whether or not “1” is set in the eleventh output flag. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1007, the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the management target counter is set to the HI level (step S1008). When the process of step S1008 is performed when the value of the management target counter is “1”, the eleventh output flag is cleared to “0”.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1002, it is determined whether or not an opportunity to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the management target counter to the LOW level has occurred (step S1009). Specifically, if the value of the management target counter is 5 or more or “1” and the current management target is any of the incoming ball detection sensors 42a to 48a or the start of the game, the first to seventh signals Then, it is determined whether or not the HI output continuation period (specifically, 10 milliseconds) has elapsed since the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the management target counter among the eleventh signals is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. . This HI output continuation period is set to a period longer than the longest processing interval of the history setting processing (step S908) of the management processing (FIG. 528) in the management CPU 112, and the output of the signal switched from the LOW level to the HI level is performed. This is a period during which the state can be reliably specified by the management-side CPU 112. Further, when the value of the management target counter is “4” and the current management target is the open / close execution mode, it is determined whether the open / close execution mode has ended, and the value of the management target counter is “3”. If the current management target is the high frequency support mode, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode has ended. The value of the management target counter is “2”, and the current management target is the front door frame 14. In this case, it is determined whether the front door frame 14 is in the closed state. When the output of the signal corresponding to the value of the management target counter has been switched to the low level (step S1009: YES), the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the management target counter is set to the low level (step S1009). Step S1010).

  If a negative determination is made in step S1004, if the process in step S1006 is performed, if a negative determination is made in step S1007, if the process in step S1008 is performed, if a negative determination is made in step S1009, or When the process of S1010 is executed, the value of the management target counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S1011). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the management target counter after the subtraction of “1” is “0” (step S1012). If the value of the management target counter is 1 or more (step S1012: NO), the processes from step S1002 are executed for the management target corresponding to the new management target counter value.

  Next, the history setting processing executed by the management-side CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The history setting process is executed in step S908 of the management process (FIG. 528).

  First, the number of buffers to be checked by the management CPU 112 among the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n is set in a check target counter provided in the management RAM 114 (step S1101). Specifically, the number of corresponding areas in the first to fourteenth corresponding areas 123a to 123n in the corresponding memory 116 in which information other than the information indicating the blank is stored is specified. Set the number of pieces of information in the check target counter. In the pachinko machine 10, as described above, since information other than the information indicating blank is stored in the first to eleventh correspondence areas 123a to 123k, "11" is set in the check target counter in step S1101. I do.

  After that, it is checked whether the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n has been changed from “0” to “1”. Then, it is determined whether or not the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S1102). When the value of the check target counter is “n”, the n-th buffers 122 a to 122 n are to be checked for numerical information. For example, if the value of the check target counter is "11", the eleventh buffer 122k is a check target of numerical information, and if the value of the check target counter is "5", the fifth buffer 122e is a check target of numerical information. .

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1102, RTC information that is year / month / day information and time information is read from the RTC 115 (step S1103). Then, a writing process to the history memory 117 is executed (step S1104). In the writing process, the pointer information of the history area 124 that is the current writing target is specified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117, and the pointer information corresponding to the writing target pointer information is specified. The RTC information read in step S1103 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124. In addition, the corresponding relationship information is read from the corresponding relationship areas 123a to 123n corresponding to the current value of the check target counter, and the corresponding relationship information is written to the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. When the correspondence information is any one of the information indicating the open / close execution mode, the information indicating the high-frequency support mode, and the information indicating the front door frame 14, The start information as well as the correspondence information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. When the value of the check target counter is “n”, the n-th correspondence areas 123 a to 123 n are to be read from the correspondence information. For example, if the value of the check target counter is “11”, the eleventh correspondence area 123 k is a target of reading the correspondence information, and if the value of the check target counter is “5”, the fifth correspondence area 123 e is the correspondence. It becomes a target of reading information.

  By executing the writing process as described above, the value of the check target counter is changed to any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the game times. , The RTC information, the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 33 are stored in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. The combination of the operating port 34 and the corresponding relationship information indicating that the game port is one of the game times is stored as the history information. When the value of the check target counter is any of the open / close execution mode, the high frequency support mode, and the front door frame 14, the RTC information is stored in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. In this state, a combination of the opening / closing execution mode, the high-frequency support mode, and the correspondence information indicating one of the front door frame 14 and the start information is stored as the history information.

  Thereafter, the target pointer is updated (step S1105). In the updating process, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read and 1 is added. It is determined whether or not the pointer information after the addition exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124. If it does not exceed the maximum value, the pointer information after the addition of 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as new write target pointer information. If it exceeds the maximum value, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1102 or if the process in step S1105 is performed, it is determined whether the signal output has been switched to the LOW level in the corresponding relationship areas 123a to 123n corresponding to the current value of the check target counter. It is determined whether correspondence information to be checked is stored (step S1106). Specifically, when the current value of the check target counter is “8” to “10”, information indicating the open / close execution mode and the high-frequency support mode are displayed in the corresponding correspondence areas 123h to 123j. Since either one of the information indicating the presence and the information indicating the front door frame 14 is stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S1106.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1106, the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n is changed from “1” to “0”. It is determined whether or not the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from the HI level to the LOW level (step S1107). If an affirmative determination is made in step S1107, RTC information is read out in the same manner as in step S1103 (step S1108), and a process of writing to the history memory 117 is executed (step S1109). In the writing process, the RTC information read in step S1108 is written to the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. In addition, the corresponding relationship information is read from the corresponding relationship areas 123a to 123n corresponding to the current value of the check target counter, and the corresponding relationship information is written to the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Further, not only the correspondence information but also end information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. By executing the writing process in this manner, when the value of the check target counter is any of the open / close execution mode, the high frequency support mode, and the front door frame 14, it corresponds to the pointer information to be written. The history information storage area 125 stores, as history information, a combination of RTC information, correspondence information indicating one of the open / close execution mode, the high frequency support mode, and the front door frame 14, and end information. It will be in the state that was done. Then, the target pointer is updated as in step S1105 (step S1110).

  If a negative determination is made in step S1106, if a negative determination is made in step S1107, or if the process of step S1110 is performed, the value of the check target counter in the management-side RAM 114 is decremented by one (step S1111). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the check target counter after the subtraction of 1 is “0” (step S1112). If the value of the check target counter is equal to or greater than 1 (step S1112: NO), the processes from step S1102 are executed for the check target corresponding to the new check target counter value.

  Next, how the history information is stored in the history memory 117 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 532 (a) shows a period in which an HI level signal is input to any of the first to seventh and eleventh buffers 122a to 122g and 122k, and FIG. 532 (c) shows a period in which the HI level signal is being input to the ninth buffer 122i, and FIG. 532 (d) shows a period in which the HI level signal is being input to the tenth buffer 122j. 532 (e) shows the timing of writing the history information to the history memory 117.

  At the timing of t1, the output state of the signal input to any of the first to seventh and eleventh buffers 122a to 122g and 122k is switched from the LOW level to the HI level as shown in FIG. Therefore, at the timing of the t1, the history information is written in the history memory 117 as shown in FIG. 532 (e). Thereafter, at the timing of t2, the signal switched to the HI level at the timing of t1 as shown in FIG. 532 (a) is switched to the LOW level. However, this signal is a signal that has been input to any of the first to seventh and eleventh buffers 122a to 122g and 122k, and the switching of the LOW level is not a target of storing the history information. At the timing, writing of history information is not executed as shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, at each of the timing of t3, the timing of t5, the timing of t6, the timing of t9, the timing of t10, the timing of t13, and the timing of t14, as shown in FIG. The output state of the signal input to any of the 11 buffers 122a to 122g and 122k is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. Therefore, at each of these timings, history information is written as shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 532 (b), the output state of the signal input to the eighth buffer 122h becomes the HI level from the timing t4 to the timing t7. The eighth buffer 122h corresponds to whether or not the open / close execution mode has occurred. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 532 (e), the timing at which the output state of the signal input to the eighth buffer 122h is switched to the HI level at timing t4, and the timing at which the output state of the signal is switched to the LOW level At each timing of t7, the history information is written. In this case, the history information written at the timing of t4 includes start information, and the history information written at the timing of t7 includes end information. Thus, the execution period of the open / close execution mode can be grasped by checking the history information in the history memory 117.

  Further, history information is written into the history memory 117 in the order of elapse of time. Therefore, whether the history information indicating that a ball has entered the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operating port 33, or the second operating port 34 is in the open / close execution mode. It is possible to distinguish whether or not. In addition, since the history information includes the RTC information, by comparing the RTC information, any one of the out opening 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34 can be obtained. It is possible to determine whether or not the history information indicating that the ball has entered is in the open / close execution mode.

  As shown in FIG. 532 (c), the output state of the signal input to the ninth buffer 122i becomes the HI level from the timing t8 to the timing t11. The ninth buffer 122i corresponds to whether or not the high-frequency support mode has occurred. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 532 (e), the timing at which the output state of the signal input to the ninth buffer 122i switches to the HI level, and the timing at which the output state of the signal switches to the LOW level At each timing of t11, the history information is written. In this case, the history information written at the timing t8 includes start information, and the history information written at the timing t11 includes end information. Thus, the execution period of the high frequency support mode can be grasped by checking the history information in the history memory 117.

  Further, history information is written into the history memory 117 in the order of elapse of time. Therefore, the history information indicating that a ball has been entered into any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is displayed even in the high frequency support mode. It is possible to distinguish whether or not. In addition, since the history information includes the RTC information, by comparing the RTC information, any one of the out opening 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34 can be obtained. It is possible to determine whether or not the history information indicating that the ball has entered is in the high-frequency support mode.

  As shown in FIG. 532 (d), the output state of the signal input to the tenth buffer 122j becomes the HI level from the timing t12 to the timing t15. The tenth buffer 122j corresponds to whether or not the front door frame 14 is open. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 532 (e), the timing at which the output state of the signal input to the tenth buffer 122j switches to the HI level, and the timing at which the output state of the signal switches to the LOW level At each timing of t15, the history information is written. In this case, the history information written at the timing t12 includes start information, and the history information written at the timing t15 includes end information. Thus, by confirming the history information in the history memory 117, it is possible to grasp the period in which the front door frame 14 is in the open state.

  Further, history information is written into the history memory 117 in the order of elapse of time. Therefore, the history information indicating that a ball has been entered into any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is generated while the front door frame 14 is being opened. Or not. In addition, since the history information includes the RTC information, by comparing the RTC information, any one of the out opening 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34 can be obtained. It is possible to distinguish whether or not the history information indicating that the ball has entered is that the front door frame 14 is being opened.

  Next, an output process of a set value update signal executed when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set by the main CPU 63 will be described. FIG. 533 is a flowchart showing the output processing of the set value update signal executed by the main CPU 63. The output processing of the set value update signal is executed in step S119 in the main processing (FIG. 514).

  A value corresponding to the set value of the pachinko machine 10 set this time is set in a pulse number counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S1201). Specifically, the value of the set value counter of the main RAM 65 is set to the pulse number counter. Thereafter, it is determined whether the set value update signal directed to the management CPU 112 is at the HI level (step S1202). As described above, the set value update signal has been input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 of the management IC 66. Here, the output processing of the set value update signal is processing for causing the management-side CPU 112 to specify the types of signals input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n of the input port 121 in the main processing (FIG. 514). It is executed at a timing before a certain recognition process. On the other hand, the input of the set value update signal to the fifteenth buffer 122o is set in the management IC 66 in the design stage of the pachinko machine 10, so that the output of the set value update signal is performed before the recognition processing. Even if the processing is executed, the management-side CPU 112 can specify that the signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o is the set value update signal.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1202, the value of the LOW level counter provided in the main RAM 65 is subtracted by 1 (step S1203), and whether or not the value of the LOW level counter after the subtraction is "0" is determined. Is determined (step S1204). The LOW level counter is a counter for specifying by the main CPU 63 whether or not the set value update signal is maintained at the LOW level for a predetermined period while outputting a plurality of pulses at which the set value update signal is at the HI level. It is. When the value of the LOW level counter is “0” (step S1204: YES), it means that it is time to set the set value update signal to the HI level, and thus the set value update signal is set to the HI level. It is set (step S1205).

  Thereafter, “20” is set to the HI level counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S1206). The HI level counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify a period during which the set value update signal is maintained at the HI level. Since the value set in the HI level counter is decremented by 1 at a period of about 10 microseconds, the output of the set value update signal is maintained at the HI level for 200 microseconds when one pulse is output. The HI level maintenance period is a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to specify that the set value update signal has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level.

  If the set value update signal is at the HI level (step S1202: YES), the value of the HI level counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S1207), and the value of the HI level counter after the subtraction is set to "0". It is determined whether or not it is set (step S1208). If the value of the HI level counter is “0” (step S1208: YES), it means that it is time to set the set value update signal to the LOW level, so that the set value update signal is set to the LOW level. It is set (step S1209).

  Thereafter, the value of the pulse number counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S1210), and it is determined whether or not the value of the pulse number counter after the subtraction is "0" (step S1211). If the value of the pulse number counter is not "0" (step S1211: NO), the output of the pulse signals by the set value update signals for the number corresponding to the set value of the pachinko machine 10 set this time has been completed. In order to mean that there is no data, "20" is set to the LOW level counter of the main RAM 65 (step S1212). Since the value set in the LOW level counter is decremented by 1 in a cycle of about 10 microseconds, the value is maintained at the LOW level for 200 microseconds between a plurality of pulse outputs by the set value update signal. The LOW level maintaining period is a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to specify that the set value update signal has been changed from the HI level to the LOW level.

  When the value of the pulse number counter is "0" (step S1211: YES), the output of the pulse signals by the set value update signals for the number corresponding to the set value of the pachinko machine 10 set this time is completed. Therefore, the output process of the set value identification end command is executed (step S1213). The set value identification end command is a command for causing the management CPU 112 to recognize that the output of the set value update signal for causing the management CPU 112 to recognize the set value of the pachinko machine 10 set this time is completed. When outputting the set value identification end command, the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h are used similarly to the identification start command, the type identification command, and the identification end command. However, the signal pattern of the set value identification end command is different from the identification start command, type identification command, and identification end command.

  As described above, in the output processing of the set value update signal, a pulse signal of the set value update signal corresponding to the set value of the pachinko machine 10 set at the start of the supply of the operating power this time is output to the management IC 66. I do. By executing the setting update recognition process, the management-side CPU 112 grasps the number of pulse signals due to the set value update signal, and grasps the set value of the pachinko machine 10 set this time based on the number.

  FIG. 534 is a flowchart showing a setting update recognition process executed by the management CPU 112. The setting update recognition process is executed in step S902 of the management process (FIG. 528).

  It is determined whether the set value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 has been switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S1301). If an affirmative determination is made in step S1301, the value of the set value grasp counter provided in the management-side RAM 114 is set to "1" (step S1302). The set value grasp counter is a counter for specifying the set value of the pachinko machine 10 by the management CPU 112. For example, if the value of the set value grasp counter is “1”, it means “setting 1”, If the value of the set value grasp counter is “6”, it means “set 6”.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the set value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 has switched from the LOW level to the HI level again (step S1303). If an affirmative determination is made in step S1303, the value of the set value grasp counter of the management-side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S1304). As a result, the set value of the pachinko machine 10 specified by the management CPU 112 increases by one step.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1303, or if the process of step S1304 is performed, based on the input state of the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h of the input port 121. It is determined whether a set value identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S1305). If a negative determination is made in step S1305, the process returns to step S1303.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1305, RTC information that is year / month / day information and time information is read from the RTC 115 (step S1306). Then, a writing process to the history memory 117 is executed (step S1307). In the writing process, the pointer information of the history area 124 that is the current write target is specified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117, and the pointer information corresponding to the write target pointer information is specified. The RTC information read in step S1306 is written to the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124. Further, both the information for identifying the setting value and the information of the value of the setting value grasp counter are written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Thereby, the information indicating that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been newly set, the RTC information corresponding to the date and time when the setting has been performed, and the information of the setting value when the setting has been performed are included. The combination is stored as history information.

  After that, the target pointer is updated (step S1308). In the updating process, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read and 1 is added. It is determined whether or not the pointer information after the addition exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124. If it does not exceed the maximum value, the pointer information after the addition of 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as new write target pointer information. If it exceeds the maximum value, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

  When the setting update recognition process is executed as described above, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the setting is performed, the date and time when the setting is performed, and the The combination of the set values when the setting is made is stored in the history area 124 as history information. Thus, by reading and analyzing the information stored in the history memory 117 using an external device connected to the reading terminal 68d, the date and time when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set and the setting are changed. It is possible to grasp the contents of the set value when the setting is performed.

  Here, even if the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the information stored in the history memory 117 is maintained as it is. As a result, even if the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, it is possible to prevent the history information in the history memory 117 from being erased, and various parameters to be described later are changed when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed. Is calculated using history information that exists across the front and back of. In this case, since the date and time when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set as described above is stored in the history memory 117, the external device is connected to the reading terminal 68d and stored in the history memory 117. By reading the information, it becomes possible to calculate various parameters after the timing when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set and during the period when the setting state is maintained.

  Next, the display output processing executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The display output process is executed in step S909 of the management process (FIG. 528).

  First, it is determined whether it is a calculation timing (step S1401). If 51 seconds have elapsed since the start of the supply of the operating power to the management-side CPU 112, or if 51 seconds have elapsed since the previous affirmative determination in step S1401, an affirmative determination is made in step S1401. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1401, the various numbers of entering balls at normal times are calculated (step S1402). Specifically, first, the number of the history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the out port 24a is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 is counted, so that the number of the out port 24a is counted. Calculate the number of incoming balls. Further, by counting the number of the history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the general winning opening 31 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the ball is entered into the general winning opening 31. Calculate the number. Also, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 in which the correspondence information indicating that the device is the special prize winning device 32 is stored, the ball is entered into the special prize winning device 32. Calculate the number. Further, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the first operation port 33 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the number of the first operation port 33 is increased. Calculate the number of incoming balls. Further, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the second operation port 34 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, Calculate the number of incoming balls.

  Thereafter, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating the front door frame 14 and start information are stored, and a correspondence relationship indicating the front door frame 14. By referring to the history information storage area 125 existing in a period between the history information storage area 125 in which the information and the end information are stored, the out port generated in the situation where the front door frame 14 is in the open state is referred to. 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special power winning device 32, the first working opening 33, and the second working opening 34, the number of balls entering each is calculated (step S1403). In the history area 124 of the history memory 117, a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating the front door frame 14 and start information are stored, and correspondence information indicating the front door frame 14 and The period from the history information storage area 125 in which the end information is stored is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 125. In addition, in the entirety of the pointer information that is a serial number, a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating the front door frame 14 and start information are stored, and a correspondence relationship indicating the front door frame 14. When there are a plurality of sections with the history information storage area 125 in which the information and the end information are stored, the number of entering balls for the total of the sections is calculated. Further, although there is a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information and start information indicating the front door frame 14 are stored, RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 is present. If the correspondence information indicating the front door frame 14 and the end information are not stored in the history information storage area 125 in which is stored the correspondence information indicating the front door frame 14 and the start information are stored. The history information in the history information storage area 125 in which the RTC information corresponding to the time after the stored history information storage area 125 is stored is treated as if the front door frame 14 is in the open state.

After that, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of steps S1402 and S1403 (step S1404). Specifically, first, the number of incoming balls calculated during the opening of the front door frame 14 calculated in step S1403 is subtracted from the number of incoming balls calculated in step S1402. Then, the following first to eighth parameters are calculated using the respective numbers of entered balls after the subtraction. Note that the difference between the number of balls in the out port 24a calculated in step S1402 and the number of balls in the out port 24a calculated in step S1403 is defined as the number of incoming balls K1, and the number of balls in the general winning port 31 calculated in step S1402 is calculated. The difference between the number of balls in the general winning opening 31 calculated in step S1403 with respect to the number of balls is defined as the number of balls K2, and the special prize winning device calculated in step S1403 with respect to the number of balls in the special prize device 32 calculated in step S1402. The difference in the number of incoming balls of the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1403 with respect to the number of incoming balls of the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1402 is the incoming ball. The number K4 is set as the number K4, and the second number calculated in step S1403 with respect to the number of entering balls of the second operating port 34 calculated in step S1402. The difference between the ball entrance number of Doguchi 34 and ball entrance number K5.
First parameter: total number of game balls to be paid out (K2 × “number of prize balls for prize to general prize port 31” + K3 × “number of prize balls for prize to special electric prize device 32” + K4 × “first operation port 33” + K5 × “Number of prize balls for winning to the second operating port 34”) / the ratio of the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “ D2 ") 2nd parameter: ratio of total number K2 of game balls entering general winning opening 31 / total number of game balls ejected from game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) Third parameter: special power winning device The ratio of the total number of game balls K3 to 32 / the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5). Fourth parameter: 1st work Ratio of total number K4 of game balls entering mouth 33 / total number of game balls discharged from game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "D2"). Fifth parameter: second operation A ratio of the total number K5 of game balls entering the mouth 34 / the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "D3"). Sixth parameter: D1- ( D2 × “Number of prize balls for winning to the first operating port 33” + D3 × “Number of prize balls for winning to the second operating port 34”. Seventh parameter: (K3 × “To win to the special electric prize winning device 32”) Number of prize balls ”+ K5 ד Number of prize balls for winning to the second operating port 34 ”) / Total number of game balls to be paid out (K2 ד Number of prize balls for winning to the general winning port 31 ”) + K3 ד Tokuden prize device 3 Ratio of the number of prize balls for winning the second prize ”+ K4 ד the number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33 ”+ K5 ד the number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34 ”. Eighth parameter: K3 × “the number of prize balls for winning in the special prize device 32” / the total number of game balls paid out (K2 × “the number of prize balls for winning in the general prize port 31” + K3 × “the prize ball for winning in the special prize device 32” (Number of pieces) + K4 × “number of prize balls for winning to the first operating port 33” + K5 × (number of prize balls for winning to the second operating port 34)). The parameters are stored in the normal-time storage area in the calculation result memory 131. The first to eighth parameters stored in the normal time storage area are stored and held until the next step S1404 is executed. In other words, when the next step S1404 is executed and the first to eighth parameters are calculated, the newly calculated first to eighth parameters are stored in the normal-time storage area. Up to this time, the previous calculation results of the first to eighth parameters stored in the normal time storage area are overwritten.

  After that, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 storing the correspondence information indicating the open / close execution mode and the start information, the correspondence information indicating the open / close execution mode, and the like. By referring to the history information storage area 125 existing in the period between the end information and the history information storage area 125, the out port 24a and the general prize port 31 generated in the open / close execution mode are referred to. Then, the number of balls entering each of the special winning award device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is calculated (step S1405). In a history area 124 of the history memory 117, a history information storage area 125 storing correspondence information and start information indicating the open / close execution mode, and correspondence information and end information indicating the open / close execution mode. Is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 125. In addition, in the entirety of the pointer information that is a serial number, the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the open / close execution mode and the start information are stored, the correspondence information indicating the open / close execution mode, and When there are a plurality of sections with the history information storage area 125 in which the end information is stored, the number of incoming balls for the total of the sections is calculated. In addition, although there is a history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the opening / closing execution mode and the start information are stored, RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 is stored. If the stored history information storage area 125 does not store the correspondence information indicating the open / close execution mode and the end information, the correspondence information indicating the open / close execution mode and the start information are stored. Any history information in the history information storage area 125 in which RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 is stored is handled in the open / close execution mode.

  Thereafter, during the period of the opening / closing execution mode specified in step S1405, the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the outgoing port 24a generated when the front door frame 14 is in the open state. The number of balls entering each of the second operation ports 34 is calculated (step S1406). The method of calculating the number of entered balls is the same as that of step S1403 except that the period of the open / close execution mode specified in step S1405 is assumed.

After that, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of steps S1405 and S1406 (step S1407). Specifically, first, the number of incoming balls generated during opening of the front door frame 14 calculated in step S1406 is subtracted from the number of incoming balls calculated in step S1405. Then, the following eleventh to eighteenth parameters are calculated using the respective numbers of entered balls after the subtraction. The difference between the number of balls in the out port 24a calculated in step S1405 and the number of balls in the out port 24a calculated in step S1406 is referred to as the number of balls K11, and the number of balls in the general winning port 31 calculated in step S1405 is calculated. The difference between the number of balls in the general winning opening 31 calculated in step S1406 with respect to the number of balls is defined as the number of balls K12, and the special prize winning device calculated in step S1406 with respect to the number of balls in the special prize winning device 32 calculated in step S1405. The difference between the number of incoming balls of 32 is the number of incoming balls K13, and the difference between the number of incoming balls of the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1406 and the number of incoming balls of the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1405 is entered In step S1406, the number K14 is set as the number K14 and the number of balls in the second working port 34 calculated in step S1405. The difference between the ball entrance number of the second actuating port 34 and ball entrance number K15 was.
Eleventh parameter: the total number of game balls to be paid out (K12 × “the number of prize balls for winning into the general winning opening 31” + K13 × “the number of prize balls for winning to the special electric winning device 32” + K14 × “the first operating port 33” + K15 × “Number of prize balls for winning to the second operating port 34”) / the ratio of the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “ The twelfth parameter is a ratio of the total number K12 of game balls to the general winning opening 31 / the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15). The thirteenth parameter: special power winning device 32 total number of game balls K13 / total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K11 + K12 + K1 Fourteenth parameter: the ratio of the total number of game balls entering the first operating port 33 K14 / the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “D12”). 15th parameter: a ratio of the total number K15 of game balls entering the second operation port 34 / the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “D13”). 16th parameter: D11− (D12 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the first operating port 33” + D13 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the second operating port 34”) ・ 17th parameter: (K13 × “the number of prize balls for winning in the special electric winning device 32” + K15 × “the number of prize balls for winning in the second operating port 34” / Total number of game balls to be paid out (K12 × “Number of prize balls for prize to general prize port 31” + K13 × “Number of prize balls for prize to special electric prize device 32” + K14 × “for prize to first operating port 33 Ratio of (award ball number) + K15 × (award ball number for winning in the second operating port 34)) 18th parameter: K13 × (award ball number for winning in the special electric winning device 32) / total number of game balls paid out (K12 × “Number of prize balls for winning in the general winning opening 31” + K13 × “Number of prize balls for winning in the special power winning device 32” + K14 × “Number of winning balls for winning in the first operating port 33” + K15 × “ In step S1407, the first to eighteenth parameters, which are the calculation results, are stored in the calculation result memory 131 in the open / close execution mode in step S1407. To the rear in a storage. The first to eighteenth parameters stored in the open / close execution mode storage area are stored and held until the next step S1407 is executed. In other words, when the next step S1407 is executed to calculate the 11th to 18th parameters, the newly calculated 11th to 18th parameters are stored in the open / close execution mode storage area. Then, the previous calculation results of the first to eighteenth parameters stored in the opening / closing execution mode storage area are overwritten.

  Thereafter, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating the high frequency support mode and start information are stored, and a correspondence relationship indicating the high frequency support mode. By referring to the history information storage area 125 existing in the period between the information and the end information stored in the history information storage area 125, the out port 24a generated in the high frequency support mode, The number of balls entered into each of the winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34 is calculated (step S1408). In the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 storing the correspondence information indicating the high frequency support mode and the start information, the correspondence information indicating the high frequency support mode, and the like. The period from the history information storage area 125 in which the end information is stored is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 125. In addition, in the entirety of the pointer information that is a serial number, the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the high frequency support mode and the start information are stored, and the correspondence indicating the high frequency support mode. When there are a plurality of sections with the history information storage area 125 in which the information and the end information are stored, the number of entering balls for the total of the sections is calculated. Further, although there is a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating the high frequency support mode and start information are stored, RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 is present. Is stored in the history information storage area 125 in which the high-frequency support mode is not stored, the correspondence information and the start information indicating the high-frequency support mode are stored. The history information in the history information storage area 125 in which RTC information corresponding to a time later than the stored history information storage area 125 is stored is treated as that in the high frequency support mode.

  Thereafter, during the period of the high-frequency support mode specified in step S1408, the out opening 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special winning opening device 32, and the first operating opening 33 generated when the front door frame 14 is open. Then, the number of balls entering each of the second working ports 34 is calculated (step S1409). The method of calculating the number of entered balls is the same as that in step S1403 except that the period of the high frequency support mode specified in step S1408 is assumed.

After that, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of steps S1408 and S1409 (step S1410). Specifically, first, the number of incoming balls generated during opening of the front door frame 14 calculated in step S1409 is subtracted from the number of incoming balls calculated in step S1408. Then, the following 21st to 26th parameters are calculated using the numbers of each ball after the subtraction. The difference between the number of balls in the out port 24a calculated in step S1408 and the number of balls in the out port 24a calculated in step S1409 is referred to as the number of balls K21, and the number of balls in the general winning port 31 calculated in step S1408. The difference between the number of balls in the general winning opening 31 calculated in step S1409 with respect to the number of balls is defined as the number of balls K22, and the special prize winning device calculated in step S1409 with respect to the number of balls in the special prize device 32 calculated in step S1408. The difference between the number of incoming balls of 32 is the number of incoming balls K23, and the difference between the number of incoming balls of the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1409 and the number of incoming balls of the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1408 is entered. In step S1409, the number is set to K24, and the number of balls in the second working port 34 calculated in step S1408 is calculated in step S1409. The difference between the ball entrance number of the second actuating port 34 and ball entrance number K25 was.
21st parameter: total payout number of game balls (K22 × “number of prize balls for winning to general prize port 31” + K23 × “number of prize balls for winning to special electric prize device 32” + K24 × “first operating port 33” + K25 × “Number of prize balls for winning to the second operating port 34”) / the ratio of the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “ 22nd parameter: ratio of the total number of game balls entering the general winning opening 31 / K22 / the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25). 23rd parameter: special power winning device 32 total number of game balls K23 / total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K21 + K22 + K2) 24th parameter: the ratio of the total number of game balls entering the first operating port 33 K24 / the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “D22”). 25th parameter: the ratio of the total number of game balls entering the second operation port 34 K25 / the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "D23"). 26th parameter: D21− (D22 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the first operating port 33” + D23 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the second operating port 34”)
In step S1410, the 21st to 26th parameters, which are the operation results, are stored in the high-frequency support mode storage area of the operation result memory 131. The 21st to 26th parameters stored in the high frequency support mode storage area are stored and held until the next step S1410 is executed. In other words, when the next step S1410 is executed and the 21st to 26th parameters are calculated, the newly calculated 21st to 26th parameters are stored in the high-frequency support mode storage area. Thus, the previous calculation results of the 21st to 26th parameters previously stored in the high frequency support mode storage area are overwritten.

Thereafter, the frequency of occurrence of the open / close execution mode is calculated and stored (step S1411). Specifically, by counting the number of the history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the open / close execution mode and the start information are stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the open / close execution mode is counted. Is calculated. Further, the number of occurrences of the game times is calculated by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 in which the correspondence information indicating the start of the game times is stored. . Then, the number of occurrences of the open / close execution mode per unit game time is calculated. Note that the number of occurrences of the open / close execution mode is referred to as the number of occurrences K31, and the number of occurrences of the game times is referred to as the number of occurrences K32.
31st parameter: K31 / K32
In step S1411, the 31st parameter, which is the calculation result, is stored in the open / close execution mode frequency storage area in the calculation result memory 131. The 31st parameter stored in the open / close execution mode frequency storage area is stored and held until the next step S1411 is executed. In other words, when the next step S1411 is executed and the 31st parameter is calculated, the newly calculated 31st parameter is stored in the opening / closing execution mode frequency storage area, so that the opening / closing execution mode is not changed until then. The previous calculation result of the 31st parameter stored in the frequency storage area is overwritten.

Thereafter, the frequency of occurrence of the high frequency support mode is calculated and stored (step S1412). Specifically, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, by counting the number of the history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the high-frequency support mode and the start information are stored, Calculate the number of occurrences of support mode. Further, the number of occurrences of the game times is calculated by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 in which the correspondence information indicating the start of the game times is stored. . Then, the number of occurrences of the high-frequency support mode per unit game time and the ratio of the number of occurrences of the high-frequency support mode to the number of occurrences of the open / close execution mode are calculated. The number of occurrences of the high-frequency support mode is set to the number of occurrences K41, the number of occurrences of the game times is set to the number of occurrences K42, and the number of occurrences of the open / close execution mode calculated in step S1411 is set to the number of occurrences K43.
-41st parameter: K41 / K42-42nd parameter: K41 / K43
In step S1412, the 41st to 42nd parameters, which are the calculation results, are stored in the high-frequency support mode frequency storage area in the calculation result memory 131. The 41st to 42nd parameters stored in the high-frequency support mode frequency storage area are stored and held until the next step S1412 is executed. That is, when the 41st to 42nd parameters are calculated by executing the next step S1412, the newly calculated 41st to 42nd parameters are stored in the high-frequency support mode frequency storage area. Thus, the previous calculation results of the 41st to 42nd parameters stored in the high-frequency support mode frequency storage area are overwritten.

  When a negative determination is made in step S1401, or when the process of step S1412 is performed, a display process is performed (step S1413). FIG. 536 is a flowchart showing the display processing.

  First, the value of the update timing counter provided in the management side RAM 114 is decremented by 1 (step S1501). The update timing counter is a counter for specifying by the management-side CPU 112 that it is time to update the display contents of the management result of the game history on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. The management-side CPU 112 controls the display of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c to thereby control the first to eighth parameters, the 11th to 18th parameters, the 21st to 26th parameters, and the 31st parameter. The parameter and the calculation results of the 41st to 42nd parameters are reported. In this case, the information corresponding to the type of the parameter to be notified is displayed on the first notification display device 69a. Also, of the value obtained by multiplying the parameter to be notified by 100, the number corresponding to the tens place is displayed on the second notification display device 69b, and the number corresponding to the ones place is displayed on the third notification display. It is displayed on the device 69c. In the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, the first to eighth parameters, the 11th to 18th parameters, the 21st to 26th parameters, the 31st parameter, and the 41st to 41st parameters The display corresponding to the calculation result of the forty-second parameter is sequentially switched according to a predetermined order, and after the calculation result of the forty-second parameter, which is the display object of the last order, is displayed, the display object of the first order is displayed. The calculation result of one parameter is displayed. In this case, the period during which the calculation result of one parameter is continuously displayed is 2 seconds.

  Here, the calculation cycle of the various parameters in the management CPU 112 is 51 seconds. On the other hand, the number of various parameters is 25, and the period in which the calculation result of one parameter is continuously displayed is 2 seconds. Therefore, various parameters calculated by the management-side CPU 112 are displayed at least once on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c.

  When the process of step S1501 is performed, the display contents of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c are updated by determining whether or not the value of the update timing counter after subtracting 1 is “0”. It is determined whether or not it is time to perform (step S1502). If an affirmative determination is made in step S1502, the value of the display target counter provided in the management-side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S1503). Then, when the value of the display target counter after adding 1 exceeds the maximum value “24” (step S1504: YES), the value of the display target counter is cleared to “0” (step S1505).

  The display target counter is a counter for the management-side CPU 112 to specify the type of parameter to be displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. The first to eighth parameters, the eleventh to eighteenth parameters, the twenty-first to twenty-sixth parameters, the thirty-first parameter, the fourteenth to forty-second parameters, and the display target counters “0” to “24” The possible values correspond one-to-one. For example, when the value of the display target counter is “0”, the first parameter to be displayed first is the display target of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, and the value of the display target counter is “24”. In the case of, the 42nd parameter which is the last display target is the display target of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1504, or if the process of step S1505 is performed, the first notification display device 69a is displayed so that information corresponding to the type of parameter corresponding to the value of the display target counter is displayed. It controls (step S1506). In addition, a parameter corresponding to the value of the display target counter is read from the calculation result memory 131, the read parameter is multiplied by 100, and a number corresponding to the tens place is displayed on the second notification display device 69b. The number corresponding to the ones digit is displayed on the third notification display device 69c (step S1507). The contents displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c in steps S1506 and S1507 are continued until the next update timing or until the supply of the operating power to the management CPU 112 is stopped. You. Thereafter, a value corresponding to 2 seconds is set as a value corresponding to the next update timing in the update timing counter of the management side RAM 114 (step S1508).

  When the supply of the operating power to the management-side CPU 112 is started by executing the display processing as described above, the management result of the game history is displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. Is done. The display of the management result of the game history is performed irrespective of whether the game is continued or not, and the main control device 60 is opened from the front of the pachinko machine 10 by opening the gaming machine main body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11. This is performed regardless of whether it is visible. As described above, the display control of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c is performed regardless of the state of the game and the state of the pachinko machine 10, thereby the first to third notification display devices 69a. It is possible to simplify the processing configuration for controlling the display of .about.69c.

  The display of the management result of the game history on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c is started after the supply of the operation power to the management CPU 112 is started and after the identification end command is received from the main CPU 63. Is done. In this case, similarly to the information stored in the history memory 117, the information stored in the operation result memory 131 is stored and held even when the supply of the operation power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. Therefore, when the supply of the operation power to the management CPU 112 is started, the management result of the game history calculated before the supply of the operation power to the management CPU 112 is stopped is displayed.

  When the setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, information corresponding to the set value being changed is displayed on the third notification display device 69c. That is, the information corresponding to the set value is displayed before the identification end command is transmitted from the main CPU 63, whereas the game history on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c is displayed. Is started after the main CPU 63 transmits the identification end command. Accordingly, even when the third notification display device 69c is configured to also serve as a display device for displaying information corresponding to the set value and displaying a management result of the game history, the display of these displays is performed. Periods can be prevented from overlapping.

  When the information corresponding to the set value is displayed, the first notification display device 69a and the second notification display device 69b are not displayed. On the other hand, when the management result of the game history is displayed, the first notification display device 69a and the second notification display device 69b are not hidden. This makes it possible to identify which of the display of the information corresponding to the set value and the display of the management result of the game history is performed on the third notification display device 69c.

  Next, a processing configuration for outputting history information stored in the history memory 117 and various parameters stored in the operation result memory 131 to an external device electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d of the MPU 62. explain. FIG. 537 (a) is a flowchart showing a data output process executed by the main CPU 63. The data output process is executed in step S112 of the main process (FIG. 514).

  In the data output processing, first, it is determined whether or not a connection signal indicating that an external device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d is received from the reading terminal 68d (step S1601). If a negative determination is made in step S1601, the present data output process ends. In this case, it is necessary to restart the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 in order to execute the data output processing. Thereby, in order to externally output the history information and various parameters, the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started while the external device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d. Need to be The power switch for performing the operation of stopping and starting the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is provided in the dispensing mechanism 73 mounted on the back surface of the back pack unit 15. To do so, it is necessary to open the gaming machine main body 12 to the outer frame 11 to expose the back surface of the back pack unit 15. In such a situation, in order to externally output the history information and various parameters, the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started while the external device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d. By adopting a configuration in which it is necessary to perform the operation for reading the history information and various parameters, even if a person other than the administrator of the gaming hall attempts to perform the operation, it is possible to make it difficult.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1601, it is determined whether a signal for confirming control information has been received from the reading terminal 68d. It is determined whether or not the confirmation of the control information (program and data) is supported (step S1602). The external device is capable of performing both the confirmation of the control information and the confirmation of the history information and various parameters. When the confirmation of the control information is selected by a manual operation on the external device, the external device transmits the information. A signal for control information confirmation is transmitted, and when confirmation of history information and various parameters is selected by manual operation on the external device, a signal for history confirmation is transmitted from the external device. The configuration is not limited to this, and the external device for confirming control information and the external device for confirming history may be different. In this case, if an external device for control information confirmation is electrically connected to the read terminal 68d, a signal for control information confirmation is transmitted from the external device, and an external device for history confirmation is transmitted to the read terminal 68d. When the device is electrically connected, a signal for history confirmation is transmitted from the external device.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1602, an output process for confirming control information is executed (step S1603). In the output process, a program and data are read as control information from the main ROM 64, and the read control information is output to the reading terminal 68d. As a result, the control information can be read by an external device that is electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d, and whether the control information is correct or not is checked. Can be performed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1602, an output instruction signal is transmitted to the management CPU 112 (step S1604). Specifically, the output state of the output instruction signal is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. This HI level output state is continued for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to specify that the HI-level output instruction signal has been input to the sixteenth buffer 122p. When the output state of the output instruction signal is switched to the HI level, the management-side CPU 112 executes processing for outputting history information.

  Specifically, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 537 (b), the management-side CPU 112 switches the output state of the output instruction signal input to the sixteenth buffer 122p of the input port 121 from the LOW level to the HI level. (Step S1701: YES), the history information stored in the history memory 117 and the various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131 are read, and the read history information and various parameters are output to the reading terminal 68d. (Step S1702). As a result, history information and various parameters can be read by an external device that is electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d, and information on the management result of the game history can be analyzed. In addition, when the management-side CPU 112 outputs the history information to the reading terminal 68d, the history memory 117 is cleared to "0" (step S1703). The history information in the history memory 117 is deleted only when the history information is read by the external device.

  Returning to the description of the data output process (FIG. 537 (a)), when the process of step S1603 or the process of step S1604 is performed, the electrical connection of the external device to the reading terminal 68d is continued. It is determined whether or not it has been performed (step S1605). If continued (step S1605: YES), the process stands by at step S1605. This makes it possible to prevent the processing set in the execution order after the data output processing from being executed until the connection of the external device to the reading terminal 68d is released. When the connection of the external device to the reading terminal 68d is released (step S1605: NO), the data output processing ends.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  When a game ball enters any one of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34, the game ball is paid out. The game is played while expecting the game ball to enter the ball. In this configuration, a game ball enters any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 (hereinafter, also referred to as a history target input section). Occurs, the corresponding history information is stored in the history memory 117 of the management IC 66. This allows the pachinko machine 10 to store and hold information for managing the number or frequency of game balls entering each history target entry section, and uses the managed information. This makes it possible to appropriately manage the manner in which game balls enter each history target entry section. In addition, since the history information is stored and held in the pachinko machine 10 itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the history information and unauthorized modification.

  All the ball entry sections for ejecting game balls from the game area PA are subjected to storage processing of the history information and are also managed using the history information. As a result, it is possible to manage the ball entry frequency for an arbitrary history target entry section using the history information. In addition, it is possible to manage the ratio of the number of game balls entering each history target entry section to the number of game balls ejected from the game area PA using the history information.

  The history information includes RTC information that is information corresponding to the timing at which a game ball entered the history target entry section that triggered the storage of the history information. Thus, by using the history information, it is possible to grasp in detail the ball entry history of the game ball in the entry section for the history.

  In the history memory 117, not only history information corresponding to a game ball having entered the history target ball entry unit, but also history information indicating whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is being performed, and the high frequency support mode. History information indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is being opened is stored. This makes it possible to manage the state of entry of the game ball into the history entry section, distinguishing whether or not each of these situations is present.

  The history information stored in the history memory 117 can be output to an external device that is an external device of the pachinko machine 10. This makes it possible to read the history information with the external device and analyze the manner in which the game ball enters the history target ball entry section using the read history information.

  The MPU 62 is provided with a reading terminal 68d, and a program can be read from the main ROM 64 by an external device electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d. Thereby, it is possible to confirm whether or not the program is normal. In this configuration, the history information stored in the history memory 117 is externally output using the reading terminal 68d for externally outputting the program. This makes it possible to externally output the history information while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

  The information to be output from the reading terminal 68d is specified as either the program or the history information, and the information corresponding to the specified result is externally output through the reading terminal 68d. Thus, in the configuration in which the history information is externally output using the reading terminal 68d for externally outputting the program, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether the information to be externally output is the program or the history information. Side, and the specified information is output to the outside. Therefore, only the necessary information can be read even in a configuration in which the reading terminal 68d is also used.

  Based on information received from an external device electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d, it is specified which of the program and the history information the information to be output from the reading terminal 68d is. This makes it possible to prevent the configuration for selecting information to be output from the outside from becoming complicated.

  An MPU 62 having a main ROM 64 that stores a program in advance has a management IC 66 and a reading terminal 68d. As a result, the signal paths for the reading terminal 68d can be integrated in the MPU 62. Therefore, it is possible to obtain the above-described excellent effects while making it difficult to perform unauthorized access to the signal path to the reading terminal 68d.

  A main CPU 63 that executes processing for paying out game balls based on the entry of game balls into any of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34. In addition, a management CPU 112 is provided, and the management CPU 112 executes processing for storing history information in the history memory 117. This makes it possible to manage the manner in which game balls enter each history target entry section while preventing the processing load on the main CPU 63 from becoming extremely large.

  The main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 are provided on the same chip as the MPU 62. This makes it possible to prevent unauthorized access to the communication path between the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112.

  The main-side CPU 63 transmits information corresponding to the detection results of the ball detection sensors 42a to 48a to each buffer of the input port 121 of the management IC 66 using signal paths corresponding to the ball detection sensors 42a to 48a. It transmits to 122a-122g. As a result, the type of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 corresponds to each of the buffers 122a to 122g (that is, each signal path), and the configuration for distinguishing each type of information in the management CPU 112 is simplified. It is possible to do.

  The main CPU 63 has information corresponding to whether the open / close execution mode is being performed, information corresponding to whether the high frequency support mode is being performed, information corresponding to whether the front door frame 14 is being opened, Then, information corresponding to the start of the game round is transmitted to each of the buffers 122h to 122k of the input port 121 of the management IC 66 by using signal paths corresponding to each of these situations. As a result, the types of information corresponding to these situations correspond to the buffers 122h to 122k (that is, the respective signal paths), and the configuration for distinguishing the types of information in the management-side CPU 112 is simplified. It becomes possible.

  The main CPU 63 transmits to the management CPU 112 correspondence information indicating which type of information the buffers 122a to 122k (that is, the signal paths 118a to 118k) correspond to. This eliminates the need to store the correspondence information in the management IC 66 in advance. Therefore, the versatility of the management IC 66 can be improved.

  When the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the correspondence information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. Thereby, in a situation where a game ball can enter the history target ball entry part, the correspondence between the information transmitted from the main CPU 63 and the history target ball entry part can be specified by the management IC 66. It becomes possible to become.

  Correspondence information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 using the signal paths 118a to 118g for transmitting information indicating whether or not a game ball has entered the history target entry section. This makes it possible to simplify the configuration related to communication as compared with a configuration in which a dedicated signal path for transmitting the correspondence information is provided.

  The management IC 66 is provided with a correspondence memory 116, and the correspondence information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 is stored in the correspondence memory 116. Thereby, every time the main CPU 63 transmits the information of the detection results of each of the ball detection sensors 42a to 48a, the information enabling the history target ball entry part corresponding to the information to be transmitted to be specified by the management IC 66 is transmitted. No need to provide. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the amount of information of the detection result of each of the incoming ball detection sensors 42a to 48a transmitted from the main CPU 63.

  When the output state of the output instruction signal output from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, information is output from the management IC 66 to the reading terminal 68d. In this case, the fact that the signal path corresponding to the sixteenth buffer 122p corresponds to the output instruction signal can be specified by the management CPU 112 without receiving the correspondence information from the main CPU 63. . This makes it possible to prevent the configuration related to the transmission of the correspondence information from becoming extremely complicated.

  The management IC 66 is provided with buffers larger than the number of types of information that need to be transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66, as buffers 122a to 122p capable of receiving information from the main CPU 63. Have been. Accordingly, even when the number of types of the information increases or decreases according to the type of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to cope without changing the configuration regarding the buffers 122a to 122p. Therefore, the versatility of the management IC 66 can be improved.

  When the history information is transmitted from the management IC 66 to the reading terminal 68d, each piece of history information includes correspondence information indicating the type of the target ball entry unit corresponding to the history information. This makes it possible to specify the manner in which game balls enter each history target entry section using the read history information.

  By using the history information stored in the history memory 117 in the management IC 66, various parameters (first to eighth parameters, eleventh parameter, To 18th parameter, 21st to 26th parameter, 31st parameter, 41st to 42nd parameter) are calculated. Then, various parameters of these calculated results are sequentially displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. This allows the pachinko machine 10 to notify the pachinko machine 10 of various parameters obtained as a result of the calculation using the history information.

  Various parameters are calculated with the history information corresponding to the situation where the front door frame 14 is being opened excluded. This makes it possible to derive various parameters in a normal situation where the front door frame 14 is in the closed state. Also, various parameters corresponding to the open / close execution mode and the high-frequency support mode are calculated. As a result, it becomes possible for the manager of the game hall or the like to grasp the state of entering the game ball according to each situation.

  When the history information of the history memory 117 is output to the external device, the history memory 117 is initialized by executing the clearing process of the history memory 117. As a result, the history information that exceeds the storage capacity of the history memory 117 is to be stored in the history memory 117, and the history information that should be stored and retained is erased by overwriting. Is less likely to occur.

  In a configuration in which when a game ball enters the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, the corresponding external output is performed through the external terminal plate 97, and the history information is stored in the history memory 117. . Thus, the history and the number of game balls entering the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34 can be easily grasped by utilizing the information externally output through the external terminal plate 97, and the history is obtained. By using the history information stored in the memory for use 117, it is possible to accurately grasp the number and frequency of game balls entering the history target entry section.

  The probability of the jackpot result in the low probability mode fluctuates according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 from “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”. This makes it possible to generate a situation where even a single pachinko machine 10 is advantageous or disadvantageous in the probability of a jackpot result in the low probability mode. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  The probability of the jackpot result in the low probability mode fluctuates according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 in “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”, while the probability of the jackpot result in the high probability mode is set in the pachinko machine 10. Does not change according to the state. This makes it possible to limit the influence of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 on the probability of the jackpot result to the situation in the low probability mode. Further, since the high probability table 64g referred to in the high probability mode can be made common regardless of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the probability table 64a to 64g is previously stored in the main ROM 64. It is possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity for storing.

  The probability of the jackpot result in the low probability mode fluctuates according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 from “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”, while the distribution mode of the type of the jackpot result is changed to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. Does not fluctuate accordingly. This makes it possible to limit the influence of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 to the situation in the low probability mode. In addition, since the distribution table 64h referred to when allocating the type of the jackpot result can be made common regardless of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the distribution table 64h in the main ROM 64 is used. Can be suppressed from increasing the storage capacity for pre-storing the information.

  Even if a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the history information stored in the history memory 117 is stored without being erased. As a result, even if a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, it is possible to continuously store the history information up to that time in the history memory 117, and the history memory 117 can be stored for a long period of time. The management result of the game history can be specified using the history information accumulated in 117.

  Even if a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, in a configuration in which the history information stored in the history memory 117 is stored and held without being erased, a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. Is performed, the corresponding history information is stored in the history memory 117. This makes it possible to distinguish between the history information before the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 and the history information after the new setting.

  When history information corresponding to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly stored in the history memory 117, information corresponding to the set value is included in the history information. This makes it possible to specify the contents of the setting values set in the past by referring to the history information.

  When the set value update process (FIG. 515) is started, the set value is changed from a set value corresponding to a predetermined start. Thus, in the setting value update process (FIG. 515), the operation of changing the set value from the set value corresponding to a certain start regardless of the set value of the use target before the start of the set value update process (FIG. 515). Can be performed. Therefore, the work contents of the setting value changing operation are easy for the operator to understand.

  The setting value for the start is specifically “setting 1” having the lowest advantage. Therefore, when the setting value update process (FIG. 515) is started, the setting value is changed from “Setting 1” having the lowest advantage. Thereby, even if the manager of the game hall unintentionally ends the setting value update processing (FIG. 515) immediately after the start of the setting value update processing (FIG. 515), the setting value having the lowest advantage is determined. Therefore, in such a situation, it is possible to prevent unintended disadvantages from occurring in the gaming hall.

  When various parameters are calculated at the calculation timing, the history information corresponding to the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 in the history memory 117 is used as a reference, and the history information stored after that is used. To calculate various parameters. In this case, it becomes possible to derive the management result of the game history at the timing after the setting of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set as various parameters.

  In the case where various parameters are calculated at the calculation timing, the history information corresponding to the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 in the history memory 117 and the history information corresponding to the change of the set value is used as a reference. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that various parameters are calculated using history information stored after that. In this case, the management result of the game history at the timing after the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been changed can be derived as various parameters.

  Further, although the opening for exposing the reading terminal 68d is provided in the board box 60a of the main control device 60, the opening is not provided, and the reading terminal 69d is provided on the opposing wall 60b. It is good also as composition covered with. In this case, it is necessary to open the substrate box 60a in order to connect an external device to the reading terminal 68d.

<34th embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the content of the hit / fail table corresponding to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is different from that of the thirty-third embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the 33rd embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the above-described thirty-third embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 538 is an explanatory diagram for describing various tables stored in the main ROM 64 in the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 538, in the main ROM 64, an area 161 for setting 1, an area 162 for setting 2, an area 163 for setting 3, an area 164 for setting 4, an area 165 for setting 5, and an area for setting 6 166 are provided. The setting 1 area 161 includes a low-accuracy winning / failing table 161a for setting 1 that is referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 1” and the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the low probability mode. Is stored in the case where the setting state is “Setting 1” and the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the high probability mode. The setting 2 area 162 includes a low-accuracy winning / failing table 162a for setting 2, which is referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 2” and the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the low probability mode. Is stored in the setting state of “setting 2” and the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the high probability mode. The setting 3 area 163 includes a low-accuracy winning / failing table 163a for setting 3 that is referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 3” and the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the low probability mode. Is stored in the setting state of “setting 3”, and the high-accuracy winning / failing table 163b for setting 3 which is referred to when the winning / lottery mode is the high probability mode.

  The setting 4 area 164 includes a low-probability table 164a for setting 4, which is referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 4” and the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the low probability mode. Is stored in the setting state of “Setting 4”, and the high-probability determination table 164b for setting 4 that is referred to when the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the high probability mode. The setting 5 area 165 includes a low-probability table 165a for setting 5, which is referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 5” and the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the low probability mode. Is stored in the setting state of “setting 5”, and the high-probability determination table 165b for setting 5 which is referred to when the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the high probability mode. The setting 6 area 166 includes a low-probability table 166a for setting 6, which is referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 6” and the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the low probability mode. Is stored in the case of the “setting 6” and the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the high probability mode.

  The winning probabilities of the jackpot results set in each of the low-probability tables 161a to 166a are different from each other. More specifically, when the low-probability table 161a for setting 1 is referred to, the jackpot results at about 1/320, and when the low-probability table 162a for setting 2 is referred, about 1/310. , A jackpot result is obtained. When the low-accuracy determination table 163a for setting 3 is referred to, a large-hit result is obtained at about 1/300, and when the low-accuracy determination table 164a for setting 4 is referred to, about 1/290. The result is a jackpot, and when the low-probability table 165a for the setting 5 is referred to, the result is about 1/280, and when the low-probability table 166a for the setting 6 is referred to, about 1/270. The result is a jackpot. As a result, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has a higher setting value, a jackpot result is more likely to occur in the low probability mode, which is advantageous for the player.

  The winning probabilities of the jackpot results set in each of the high-probability tables 161b to 166b are different from each other. More specifically, when the high accuracy determination table 161b for the setting 1 is referred to, the jackpot result is about 1/45, and when the high accuracy determination table 162b for the setting 2 is referred to, the result is about 1/40. , A jackpot result is obtained. When the high-accuracy determination table 163b for the setting 3 is referred to, a large-hit result is obtained at about 1/35. , A jackpot result is obtained, and when the high-accuracy determination table 165b for the setting 5 is referred to, the jackpot result is about 1/25. When the high-accuracy determination table 166b for the setting 6 is referenced, about 1/20. The result is a jackpot. As a result, if the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has a higher setting value, a jackpot result is more likely to occur in the high probability mode, which is advantageous for the player.

  That is, in the thirty-third embodiment, the winning probability of the jackpot result in the low-probability mode is higher as the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is higher, while the winning probability of the jackpot result in the higher-probability mode is “Setting 1” to “1”. Although the configuration is the same regardless of the setting state of “Setting 6”, in this embodiment, both the winning probability of the jackpot result in the low probability mode and the winning probability of the jackpot result in the high probability mode are determined by the pachinko machine. The configuration is such that the higher the setting state of 10 is, the higher the setting value is. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage of the player with respect to the setting of a high setting value.

  In addition, even if the winning probability of the jackpot result of the low probability mode in the case of the “setting 6” which is the highest setting state, the winning probability of the jackpot result of the high probability mode in the case of the “setting 1” which is the lowest setting state. It is set lower than the probability. This makes it possible to prevent the player's advantage when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 1” from becoming extremely low, and to change the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 to “setting 1”. In the case of "6", it is possible to prevent the advantage of the player from becoming extremely high.

  On the other hand, as in the 33rd embodiment, only one type of distribution table 64h is provided so as to be common in any of the setting states of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”. This makes it possible to avoid the advantage or disadvantage caused by the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 in the distribution mode of the jackpot result, and to store the distribution table 64h in the main ROM 64 in advance. Can be suppressed.

  The winning probability of the jackpot result in the low probability mode is higher when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is higher, whereas the winning state of the jackpot result in the higher probability mode is higher. The configuration may be such that the setting value is lower. In this case, in the low probability mode, the higher the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is, the more advantageous the player is, and in the high probability mode, the lower the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is, the more advantageous the player is. It becomes possible.

  The winning probability of the jackpot result in the high probability mode is higher when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is higher, while the winning probability of the jackpot result in the lower probability mode is “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”. May be constant in the setting state of "." In this case, in the high probability mode, the higher the set state of the pachinko machine 10 is, the more advantageous the player is in the setting value, and in the low probability mode, it is possible to prevent the advantage or disadvantage caused by the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 from occurring. Become.

<35th embodiment>
The present embodiment is different from the above-mentioned thirty-third embodiment in the handling of the management result of the game history when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the 33rd embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the above-described thirty-third embodiment is basically omitted.

  The management IC 66 is provided with a separate storage memory 171 as a memory for storing information, in addition to the memories in the thirty-third embodiment. FIG. 539 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the separate storage memory 171. The separate storage memory 171 is a memory such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory that does not require an external power supply for storing and holding (that is, a nonvolatile storage unit), and is used for both reading and writing.

  The separate storage memory 171 includes a first storage area 172, a second storage area 173, a third storage area 174, a fourth storage area 175, and a fifth storage area 176. In the first to fifth storage areas 172 to 176, information on the management result of the game history calculated when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, more specifically, in the thirty-third embodiment. The various parameters described (first to eighth parameters, 11th to 18th parameters, 21st to 26th parameters, 31st parameters, 41st to 42nd parameters) are sequentially stored. In this case, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, first, various parameters are stored in the first separate storage area 172, and thereafter, every time the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the n-th The areas to be stored are switched such that the storage areas 172 to 176 → the (n + 1) th storage areas 172 to 176. Then, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set after the various parameters are stored in the fifth separate storage area 176, the various parameters are stored again in the first separate storage area 172. At this time, the various parameters already stored in the first separate storage area 172 are deleted. As a result, the various parameters until the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is executed five times are stored in the separate storage memory 171, and the oldest various parameters are erased for more than five times. It is memorized by the thing.

  Various parameters stored in the first to fifth storage areas 172 to 176 can be read by the external device by connecting the external device to the reading terminal 68d. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history before the new setting of the setting state is performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  Next, a setting update recognition process according to the present embodiment executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  When the set value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 is switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S1801: YES), the value of the set value grasp counter of the management RAM 114 is set to “1”. It is set (step S1802). The set value grasp counter is a counter for specifying the set value of the pachinko machine 10 by the management CPU 112. For example, if the value of the set value grasp counter is “1”, it means “setting 1”, If the value of the set value grasp counter is “6”, it means “set 6”.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the set value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 has switched from the LOW level to the HI level again (step S1803). If an affirmative determination is made in step S1803, the value of the set value grasp counter of the management-side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S1804). As a result, the set value of the pachinko machine 10 specified by the management CPU 112 increases by one step.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1803, or if the process of step S1804 is performed, based on the input state of the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h of the input port 121. It is determined whether a set value identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S1805). If a negative determination is made in step S1805, the process returns to step S1803.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1805, monitoring processing for repeatedly changing is executed (step S1806). Although the details of the repetitive change monitoring process will be described later, when a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly generated in a short period of time, a process for notifying it is executed. In a configuration in which various parameters are stored in the separate storage memory 171 each time a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the management result of the game history when the game is played for a predetermined period is intended. It is assumed that the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly performed in a short period of time so that the pachinko machine 10 is erased. On the other hand, by executing the change monitoring process repeatedly, when such an action is performed, the corresponding notification is executed.

  After that, various calculation processes are executed (step S1807). In the various calculation processes, the processes of steps S1402 to S1412 of the display output process (FIG. 535) in the 33rd embodiment are executed. Thus, various parameters (first to eighth parameters, eleventh to eighteenth parameters, twenty-first to twenty-sixth parameters, thirty-first parameters, and forty-first parameters) are utilized using the history information stored in the history memory 117 at that time. To the forty-second parameter) are calculated.

  After that, the various parameters calculated in step S1807 are stored in the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 of the separate storage memory 171 in the area to be stored this time (step S1808). In the separate storage memory 171, a pointer information area is set so that an area to be stored among the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 can be specified by the management-side CPU 112. The information in the pointer information area is changed so that the storage target is changed to the next area in the case where various parameters are stored in the storage target area among the first to fifth storage areas 172 to 176. Will be updated to By executing the processing in step S1808, various parameters at that time for the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 are stored in the separate storage memory 171.

  Thereafter, the history memory 117 is cleared to "0" (step S1809). That is, in the present embodiment, the history memory is read not only when the history information is read by the external device connected to the reading terminal 68d but also when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set. The history information of 117 is deleted.

  After that, the RTC 115 reads out the RTC information, which is year / month / day information and time information (step S1810). Then, a writing process to the history memory 117 is executed (step S1811). In the writing process, the pointer information of the history area 124 that is the current write target is specified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117, and the pointer information corresponding to the write target pointer information is specified. The RTC information read in step S1810 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124. Further, both the information for identifying the setting value and the information of the value of the setting value grasp counter are written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Thereby, the information indicating that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been newly set, the RTC information corresponding to the date and time when the setting has been performed, and the information of the setting value when the setting has been performed are included. The combination is stored as history information.

  After that, the target pointer is updated (step S1812). In the updating process, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read and 1 is added. It is determined whether or not the pointer information after the addition exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124. If it does not exceed the maximum value, the pointer information after the addition of 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as new write target pointer information. If it exceeds the maximum value, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

  Next, the repetitive change monitoring process executed in step S1806 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  First, it is determined whether or not the number of game times executed since the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 was last set is within a reference number (specifically, 100 times) (step S1901). Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 is set by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 in which the correspondence information indicating the start of the game round is stored. The number of game times executed since the state was set last time is grasped, and it is determined whether or not the grasped number of game times is within the reference number (specifically, 100 times).

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1901, the value of the repetition change counter provided in the separate storage memory 171 is incremented by 1 (step S1902). Since the separate storage memory 171 is a memory that does not require external power supply for storing and holding as described above, external power supply is not necessary for storing and holding the value of the repetition change counter.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the repetition change counter after one addition exceeds the notification reference value “5” (step S1903). The notification reference value corresponds to the number of the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 provided in the separate storage memory 171. Therefore, in step S1903, the number of times the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeated without intervening the execution of the game times exceeding the reference number is equal to the number of the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176. It is determined whether or not it has exceeded.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1903, display processing for repeatedly changing is executed (step S1904). In the display process of the repetitive change, the display contents of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c correspond to the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 being repeated a number of times exceeding the notification reference value in a short period of time. Display contents of repeated changes. The display content of the repeated change is a display content displaying “E” on all of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, and this display content does not occur in other situations. The state in which the display contents of the repeated change are displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c is continued until the repeated change flag provided in the separate storage memory 171 is cleared to "0". . The repetition change flag is a flag for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the display contents of the repetition change should be displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. When "1" is set in the repetition change flag and the display contents of the repetition change are displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, the display processing ( (FIG. 536) is not executed. After that, “1” is set to the repetition change flag of the separate storage memory 171 (step S1905).

  If a negative determination is made in step S1901, the value of the repetition change counter in the separate storage memory 171 is cleared to "0" (step S1906). Thereafter, on condition that the repetition change flag of the separate storage memory 171 is set to "1" (step S1907: YES), the display contents of the repetition change on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c are displayed. The display is terminated (step S1908), and the repetition change flag is cleared to "0" (step S1909).

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  When a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the history information stored in the history memory 117 is deleted. As a result, it becomes possible to leave history information of the game executed after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is left in the history memory 117.

  When a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, various parameters are calculated as management results of the game history using the history information of the history memory 117 at that time. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history in the situation before the new setting of the setting state is performed in the pachinko machine 10. Further, even if the history information in the history memory 117 is deleted when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, it is possible to grasp the management result of the game history based on the history information to be deleted. It becomes possible.

  When a new setting of the setting state is performed in the pachinko machine 10, various parameters are calculated using the history information of the history memory 117 at that time. 171 is stored. Thus, even if a new setting state is set in the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to grasp the management result of the game history in a situation before the setting is performed at an arbitrary timing thereafter.

  Since the separate storage memory 171 is provided with the plurality of separate storage areas 172 to 176, it is possible to store various parameters corresponding to the set timings of the set state for a plurality of times. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history in a plurality of periods with reference to the timing at which the new setting of the setting state is performed. Further, even if a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeated in a situation where the game is not performed, various parameters calculated using the history information of the situation where the game is substantially performed are not used. It is possible to increase the possibility of remaining in the separate storage memory 171.

  Various parameters stored in the first to fifth storage areas 172 to 176 can be read by the external device by connecting the external device to the reading terminal 68d. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history before the new setting of the setting state is performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  In a configuration in which various parameters are stored in the separate storage memory 171 each time a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the management result of the game history when the game is played for a predetermined period is intended. It is assumed that the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly performed in a short period of time so that the pachinko machine 10 is erased. On the other hand, by executing the change monitoring process repeatedly, when such an action is performed, the corresponding notification is executed. Thereby, it is possible to notify the administrator or the like that the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been repeatedly performed in a short period of time.

  The notification that the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been repeatedly performed in a short period is performed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. Thus, the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly performed in a short period of time using the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c for notifying the management result of the game history. Notification can be performed.

  In a situation where it is necessary to notify that the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been repeatedly performed in a short period of time, the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c continue to display the display contents of the repeated change. The notification of the management result of the game history at the normal time is not performed by the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. Thereby, it is possible to emphasize the notification that the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been repeatedly performed in a short period of time.

  In the case where the number of game executions performed after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed is within the reference number and the event in which the new setting is performed continues beyond the notification reference value. The notification corresponding thereto is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the total discharge of the game balls discharged from the game area PA after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. In the case where the number is within the reference number and the event in which the new setting is performed continues beyond the notification reference value, the corresponding notification may be executed. Further, after a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, a predetermined ball entry portion (for example, any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, or a predetermined Combination), when the total number of game balls discharged into the combination is within the reference number and the event in which the new setting is performed continues beyond the notification reference value, the corresponding notification is executed. Good. Further, when the total number of pieces of history information newly stored in the history memory 117 after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is within the reference number, an event that the new setting is performed is notified. In the case where the number of consecutive times exceeds the reference value, the corresponding notification may be executed.

  In addition, when a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed within a monitoring reference period (for example, 600 seconds) exceeding a notification reference value, a notification corresponding thereto may be performed.

  Further, when the number of game executions performed after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed is within the reference number and the event in which the new setting is performed continues beyond the notification reference value. The notification corresponding thereto is executed, but the setting value is changed in a situation where the number of times of execution is less than or equal to the reference number after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. When the event continues beyond the notification reference value, the corresponding notification may be executed.

  Further, when the number of game executions performed after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed is within the reference number and the event in which the new setting is performed continues beyond the notification reference value. The notification corresponding thereto is executed, but the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, and the new setting is triggered when the number of executed games is within the reference number of times. When the event in which the calculated various parameters are calculated continues beyond the notification reference value, the corresponding notification may be executed.

  Further, when the number of game executions performed after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed is within the reference number and the event in which the new setting is performed continues beyond the notification reference value. Although the notification corresponding thereto is executed, a configuration in which the progress of the game is limited over a predetermined period (for example, one hour) may be additionally or alternatively.

<Thirty-sixth embodiment>
The present embodiment is different from the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment in that the monitoring process of the repetition change is executed by the main CPU 63. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the thirty-fifth embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 542 is a flowchart showing the repetitive change monitoring process executed by the main CPU 63. The repetitive change monitoring process is executed when the set value update process (step S118) is executed in the main process (FIG. 514). That is, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the change monitoring process is repeatedly performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which, when a set value is changed, a monitoring process of the change is repeatedly performed.

  First, it is determined whether or not the number of game times executed since the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 was previously set is within a reference number (specifically, 100 times) (step S2001). The main RAM 65 is provided with a game number counter for counting the number of game times executed after the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, and the main CPU 63 executes the game number newly. Every time the game counter is incremented by one. Even when the main RAM 65 is cleared (steps S105 and S117), the number-of-games counter is excluded from "0" clear targets.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2001, the value of the repetition change counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2002). Even when the main RAM 65 is cleared (steps S105 and S117), the repetition change counter is excluded from the target of “0” clear.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the repetition change counter after adding 1 exceeds the notification reference value “5” (step S2003). The notification reference value corresponds to the number of the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 provided in the separate storage memory 171. Therefore, in step S2003, the number of times the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeated without intervening the execution of the game times exceeding the reference number becomes equal to the number of the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176. It is determined whether or not it has exceeded.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2003, “1” is set to the repetition change flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S2004). The repetition change flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the notification of the repetition change is to be made. Even if the main RAM 65 is cleared (steps S105 and S117), the repetition change flag is excluded from being cleared to "0".

  If a negative determination is made in step S2001, the value of the repetition change counter of the main RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step S2005). Thereafter, on condition that the repetition change flag of the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S2006: YES), the repetition change flag is cleared to "0" (step S2007).

  In the repetition change monitoring process, when the repetition change flag of the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S2008: YES), a repetition change notification command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step S2009). When the voice light emission control device 81 receives the repetition change notification command, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 are repeatedly notified of the change. The notification of the repetitive change is continued until the supply of the operating power to the sound emission control device 81 is stopped.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to notify that the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been repeatedly performed in a short period of time based on the control by the main CPU 63. In addition, since the notification is performed by the symbol display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54, the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be set without opening the gaming machine body 12 to the outer frame 11 forward. It is possible for the administrator to recognize that the new setting has been repeatedly performed in a short period of time.

  In addition, when a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly performed in a short period of time, in addition to or instead of the configuration in which the notification command of the repetition change is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the sound emission control device 81, The corresponding external output may be performed.

  Further, the main CPU 63 may execute the monitoring process of the repeated change in the present embodiment, and the management CPU 112 may execute the monitoring process of the repeated change in the 35th embodiment. Thereby, it is possible to strictly monitor whether or not the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly performed in a short period of time.

<37th embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the setting update recognition process in the management CPU 112 is different from that of the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the above-described thirty-fifth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the thirty-fifth embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 543 is a flowchart illustrating a setting update recognition process according to the present embodiment, which is executed by the management-side CPU 112.

  When the set value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 switches from the LOW level to the HI level (step S2101: YES), the value of the set value grasp counter of the management side RAM 114 is set to “1”. It is set (step S2102). The set value grasp counter is a counter for specifying the set value of the pachinko machine 10 by the management CPU 112. For example, if the value of the set value grasp counter is “1”, it means “setting 1”, If the value of the set value grasp counter is “6”, it means “set 6”.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the set value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 has switched from the LOW level to the HI level again (step S2103). If an affirmative determination is made in step S2103, the value of the set value grasp counter of the management-side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S2104). As a result, the set value of the pachinko machine 10 specified by the management CPU 112 increases by one step.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2103, or if the process of step S2104 is performed, based on the input state of the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h of the input port 121. It is determined whether a set value identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S2105). If a negative determination is made in step S2105, the process returns to step S2103.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2105, it is determined whether or not a predetermined number or more of predetermined history information exists in the history memory 117 (step S2106). Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 is set by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 in which the correspondence information indicating the start of the game round is stored. The number of game times executed since the state was set last time is grasped, and it is further determined whether or not the grasped number of game times exceeds a reference number (specifically, 100 times). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of the history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating that the game balls have been discharged from the game area PA is a reference number (specifically, 1000). Or not in step S2106. Correspondence information indicating that a game ball has entered a predetermined ball entry portion (for example, any one or a predetermined combination of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the first operation port 33, and the second operation port 34). May be determined in step S2106 as to whether or not the number of history information storage areas 125 in which is stored exceeds the reference number (specifically, 1000). Further, the configuration may be such that it is determined in step S2106 whether or not the total number of history information stored in the history memory 117 exceeds the reference number (specifically, 1000).

  In the case where the number of game executions performed after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed is within the reference number and the event in which the new setting is performed continues beyond the notification reference value. The notification corresponding thereto is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the total discharge of the game balls discharged from the game area PA after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. In the case where the number is within the reference number and the event in which the new setting is performed continues beyond the notification reference value, the corresponding notification may be executed. Further, after a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, a predetermined ball entry portion (for example, any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, or a predetermined Combination), when the total number of game balls discharged into the combination is within the reference number and the event in which the new setting is performed continues beyond the notification reference value, the corresponding notification is executed. Good. Further, when the total number of pieces of history information newly stored in the history memory 117 after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is within the reference number, an event that the new setting is performed is notified. In the case where the number of consecutive times exceeds the reference value, the corresponding notification may be executed.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2106, various arithmetic processes are executed (step S2107). In the various calculation processes, the processes of steps S1402 to S1412 of the display output process (FIG. 535) in the 33rd embodiment are executed. Thus, various parameters (first to eighth parameters, eleventh to eighteenth parameters, twenty-first to twenty-sixth parameters, thirty-first parameters, and forty-first parameters) are utilized using the history information stored in the history memory 117 at that time. To the forty-second parameter) are calculated.

  After that, the various parameters calculated in step S2107 are stored in the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 of the separate storage memory 171 in the area to be stored this time (step S2108). In the separate storage memory 171, a pointer information area is set so that an area to be stored among the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 can be specified by the management-side CPU 112. The information in the pointer information area is changed so that the storage target is changed to the next area in the case where various parameters are stored in the storage target area among the first to fifth storage areas 172 to 176. Will be updated to By executing the processing in step S2108, various parameters at that time are stored in the separate storage memory 171 for the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 this time.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2106, or if the process in step S2108 is performed, the history memory 117 is cleared to "0" (step S2109). That is, in the present embodiment, the history memory is read not only when the history information is read by the external device connected to the reading terminal 68d but also when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set. The history information of 117 is deleted.

  Then, RTC information, which is year / month / day information and time information, is read from the RTC 115 (step S2110). Then, a writing process to the history memory 117 is executed (step S2111). In the writing process, the pointer information of the history area 124 that is the current writing target is specified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117, and the pointer information corresponding to the writing target pointer information is specified. The RTC information read in step S2110 is written to the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124. Further, both the information for identifying the setting value and the information of the value of the setting value grasp counter are written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Thereby, the information indicating that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been newly set, the RTC information corresponding to the date and time when the setting has been performed, and the information of the setting value when the setting has been performed are included. The combination is stored as history information.

  Thereafter, the target pointer is updated (step S2112). In the updating process, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read and 1 is added. It is determined whether or not the pointer information after the addition exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124. If it does not exceed the maximum value, the pointer information after the addition of 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as new write target pointer information. If it exceeds the maximum value, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

  According to the above configuration, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the pachinko machine 10 stores the information in the history memory 117 on condition that a predetermined number or more of history information is stored in the history memory 117. Various parameters are calculated using the history information, and the various parameters are stored in the separate storage memory 171. As a result, even if a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly performed in a short period of time, the information of the management result of the game history as a result of substantially playing the game is stored in the separate storage memory 171. It can be stored.

  Note that the configuration may be such that the processing in step S2109 is executed on condition that the processing in steps S2107 and S2108 is executed. That is, the history information stored in the history memory 117 is deleted on condition that a predetermined number or more of history information is stored in the history memory 117. This makes it possible to prevent the history information in the history memory 117 from being erased even if a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly performed in a short period of time.

<Thirty-eighth embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the history memory 117 is different from that of the thirty-third embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the 33rd embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the above-described thirty-third embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 544 is an explanatory diagram for describing the configuration of the history memory 117 according to the present embodiment.

  The history memory 117 includes a total area 141, a first state area 142, a second state area 143, and a third state area 144. In each of these areas 141 to 144, first to fourteenth counters 141a to 141n, 142a to 142n, 143a to 143n, and 144a to 144n are provided. The first counters 141a to 144a in each of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times that the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a has changed from the LOW level to the HI level. In the second counters 141b to 144b of the areas 141 to 144, information on the number of times that the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122b has changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored. The third counters 141c to 144c of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times that the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c has changed from the LOW level to the HI level. In the fourth counters 141d to 144d of the areas 141 to 144, information on the number of times the output state of the fourth signal input to the fourth buffer 122d has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored. In the fifth counters 141e to 144e of the areas 141 to 144, information on the number of times the output state of the fifth signal input to the fifth buffer 122e has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored. In the sixth counters 141f to 144f of the areas 141 to 144, information on the number of times the output state of the sixth signal input to the sixth buffer 122f has changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored. In the seventh counters 141g to 144g of the areas 141 to 144, information on the number of times that the output state of the seventh signal input to the seventh buffer 122g has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored. The eighth counters 141h to 144h of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times that the output state of the eighth signal input to the eighth buffer 122h has changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The ninth counters 141i to 144i of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times that the output state of the ninth signal input to the ninth buffer 122i has changed from the LOW level to the HI level. Information on the number of times the output state of the tenth signal input to the tenth buffer 122j has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the tenth counters 141j to 144j of the areas 141 to 144. The eleventh counters 141k to 144k of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times that the output state of the eleventh signal input to the eleventh buffer 122k has changed from the LOW level to the HI level. Information on the number of times that the output state of the twelfth signal input to the twelfth buffer 122l has changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the twelfth counters 141l to 144l of the areas 141 to 144. The thirteenth counters 141m to 144m of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times that the output state of the thirteenth signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m has changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The fourteenth counters 141n to 144n of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times that the output state of the fourteenth signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n has changed from the LOW level to the HI level.

  FIG. 545 is a flowchart showing a history setting process according to the present embodiment executed by the management CPU 112.

  First, the number of buffers to be checked by the management CPU 112 among the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n is set in the check target counter of the management RAM 114 (step S2201). Specifically, the number of corresponding areas in the first to fourteenth corresponding areas 123a to 123n in the corresponding memory 116 in which information other than the information indicating the blank is stored is specified. Set the number of pieces of information in the check target counter. In this pachinko machine 10, since information other than the information indicating blank is stored in the first to eleventh correspondence areas 123a to 123k, "11" is set to the check target counter in step S2201.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the buffers 122a to 122n corresponding to the current check target counters are buffers to which the state information signal is input (step S2202). Specifically, in the correspondence areas 123a to 123n corresponding to the current value of the check target counter, information indicating the open / close execution mode, information indicating the high frequency support mode, and It is determined whether any of the information indicating the front door frame 14 is stored.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2202, a state information setting process is executed (step S2203). In the setting process, when the output state of the eighth signal indicating whether the operation is in the open / close execution mode is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, the information of the first state indicating that the operation is in the open / close execution mode is stored on the management side. The information is stored in the RAM 114, and when the output state of the eighth signal is switched from the HI level to the LOW level, the information of the first state is deleted from the management-side RAM 114. When the output state of the ninth signal indicating whether or not the high-frequency support mode is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, the information of the second state indicating the high-frequency support mode is stored in the management-side RAM 114. When the output state of the ninth signal is switched from the HI level to the LOW level, the information of the second state is deleted from the management-side RAM 114. When the output state of the tenth signal indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is being opened is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, the third state information indicating that the front door frame 14 is being opened. Is stored in the management side RAM 114, and when the output state of the tenth signal is switched from the HI level to the LOW level, the information of the third state is deleted from the management side RAM 114.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2202, or if the process in step S2203 is performed, the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n is , From "0" to "1", it is determined whether the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from the LOW level to the HI level ( Step S2204). If the numerical value information stored in the eighth buffer 122h is changed from “0” to “1” in a situation where the current value of the check target counter is a value corresponding to the eighth buffer 122h, the process proceeds to step S2203. The information of the first state is stored in the management-side RAM 114, and an affirmative determination is made in step S2204. If the current value of the check target counter is a value corresponding to the ninth buffer 122i and the numerical information stored in the ninth buffer 122i is changed from “0” to “1”, the process proceeds to step S2203. Thus, the information of the second state is stored in the management-side RAM 114, and an affirmative determination is made in step S2204. If the current value of the check target counter is a value corresponding to the tenth buffer 122j and the numerical information stored in the tenth buffer 122j is changed from “0” to “1”, the process proceeds to step S2203. The third state information is stored in the management-side RAM 114, and an affirmative determination is made in step S2204.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S2204, the corresponding sum counter is added (step S2205). In this addition process, the value of the counter corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fourteenth counters 141a to 141n in the total area 141 of the history memory 117 is incremented by one. For example, if the value of the check target counter is "11", the total eleventh counter 141k is to be added, and if the value of the check target counter is "5", the total fifth counter 141e is to be added. If the value of the check target counter is “1”, the first counter for total 141 a is to be added.

  Thereafter, by referring to the state information of the management side RAM 114, it is determined whether or not the first state, that is, whether or not the open / close execution mode is being performed (step S2206). If the current state is the first state (step S2206: YES), the corresponding counter for the first state is added (step S2207). In the addition process, the value of the counter corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fourteenth counters 142a to 142n in the first state area 142 of the history memory 117 is incremented by one. . For example, if the value of the check target counter is “11”, the eleventh counter 142k for the first state is to be added, and if the value of the check target counter is “5”, the fifth counter 142e for the first state is If the value of the check target counter is "1", the first counter 142a for the first state is to be added.

  Thereafter, by referring to the state information in the management-side RAM 114, it is determined whether or not the state is the second state, that is, whether or not the high frequency support mode is being performed (step S2208). If the current state is the second state (step S2208: YES), the corresponding counter for the second state is added (step S2209). In the addition process, the value of the counter corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fourteenth counters 143a to 143n for the second state in the second state area 143 of the history memory 117 is incremented by one. . For example, if the value of the check target counter is "11", the eleventh counter 143k for the second state is to be added, and if the value of the check target counter is "5", the fifth counter 143e for the second state is If the value of the check target counter is "1", the first counter 143a for the second state is to be added.

  Thereafter, by referring to the state information in the management-side RAM 114, it is determined whether or not the state is the third state, that is, whether or not the front door frame 14 is being opened (step S2210). If the state is the third state (step S2210: YES), a corresponding third state counter is added (step S2211). In the addition processing, the value of the counter corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fourteenth counters 144a to 144n for the third state in the third state area 144 of the history memory 117 is incremented by one. . For example, if the value of the check target counter is “11”, the eleventh counter 144k for the third state is to be added, and if the value of the check target counter is “5”, the fifth counter 144e for the third state is If the value of the check target counter is "1", the first counter 144a for the third state is to be added.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2204, if a negative determination is made in step S2210, or if the process of step S2211 is performed, the value of the check target counter of the management-side RAM 114 is decremented by 1 (step S2212). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the check target counter after the subtraction of 1 is “0” (step S2213). If the value of the check target counter is 1 or more (step S2213: NO), the processing from step S2202 is performed on the check target corresponding to the new check target counter value.

  By executing the history setting process as described above, the number of times the game ball enters the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34, and the opening / closing execution The number of occurrences of the mode, the number of occurrences of the high frequency support mode, and the number of occurrences of the game times are not stored as history information as in the thirty-third embodiment but are stored as number information. As a result, the required storage capacity of the history memory 117 can be reduced as compared with a configuration in which each piece of history information is individually stored.

  With the configuration in which the information is stored not as the history information but as the frequency information, it is not necessary to execute the process of deriving the frequency information from the history information when calculating various parameters. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for calculating various parameters.

  Next, a setting update recognition process in the present embodiment, which is executed by the management CPU 112, will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  When the set value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 is switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S2301: YES), the value of the set value grasp counter of the management RAM 114 is set to “1”. It is set (step S2302). The set value grasp counter is a counter for specifying the set value of the pachinko machine 10 by the management CPU 112. For example, if the value of the set value grasp counter is “1”, it means “setting 1”, If the value of the set value grasp counter is “6”, it means “set 6”.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the set value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 has switched from the LOW level to the HI level again (step S2303). If an affirmative determination is made in step S2303, the value of the set value grasp counter in the management-side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S2304). As a result, the set value of the pachinko machine 10 specified by the management CPU 112 increases by one step.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2303, or if the process in step S2304 is performed, based on the input states of the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h of the input port 121. It is determined whether a set value identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S2305). If a negative determination is made in step S2305, the process returns to step S2303.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2305, the eleventh counter 141k for counting the number of game times executed in the total area 141 of the history memory 117, and the opening and closing of the total area 141 in the history memory 117 The eighth counter 141h for counting the number of occurrences of the mode and the ninth counter 141i for the total counting the number of occurrences of the high frequency support mode in the total area 141 in the history memory 117 are respectively shown. “0” is cleared (step S2306 to step S2308). As a result, the information on the number of times the game has been executed, the number of times the open / close execution mode has occurred, and the number of times the high frequency support mode has occurred is cleared to “0” when a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. Is done. Therefore, the 31st parameter indicating the number of occurrences of the open / close execution mode per unit game, the 41st parameter indicating the number of occurrences of the high frequency support mode per unit game, and the high frequency support mode The calculation result of the forty-second parameter indicating the ratio of the number of occurrences corresponds to the game content after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. In the configuration in which the winning probability of the jackpot result is changed when the set value of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the calculation result of the 31st parameter, the 41st parameter, and the 42nd parameter is changed to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 as described above. , The calculation results of the 31st parameter, the 41st parameter, and the 42nd parameter are appropriate based on the current setting value by making the setting correspond to the game content after the new setting is performed. It is possible to determine whether or not.

  On the other hand, even if the setting of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the counters other than the eighth counter 141h, the ninth counter 141i, and the eleventh counter 141k in the history memory 117 are “ "0" is not cleared. As a result, the management of the number or frequency of entering game balls into each history target ball entry unit is performed based on the long-term game history without being affected by the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. It becomes possible.

  According to the above configuration, the number of game balls entering the out port 24a, the general prize port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34, the number of times the open / close execution mode is generated, and high frequency support The number of mode occurrences and the number of game occurrences are not stored as history information as in the thirty-third embodiment, but are stored as frequency information. As a result, the required storage capacity of the history memory 117 can be reduced as compared with a configuration in which each piece of history information is individually stored.

  Further, since the configuration is stored as the frequency information instead of the history information, it is not necessary to execute the process of deriving the frequency information from the history information when calculating various parameters. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for calculating various parameters.

  Information on the number of times the game has been executed, the number of times the open / close execution mode has occurred, and the number of times the high frequency support mode has occurred is cleared to “0” when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set. Therefore, the 31st parameter indicating the number of occurrences of the open / close execution mode per unit game, the 41st parameter indicating the number of occurrences of the high frequency support mode per unit game, and the high frequency support mode The calculation result of the forty-second parameter indicating the ratio of the number of occurrences corresponds to the game content after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. In the configuration in which the winning probability of the jackpot result is changed when the set value of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the calculation result of the 31st parameter, the 41st parameter, and the 42nd parameter is changed to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 as described above. , The calculation results of the 31st parameter, the 41st parameter, and the 42nd parameter are appropriate based on the current setting value by making the setting correspond to the game content after the new setting is performed. It is possible to determine whether or not.

  On the other hand, even if the setting of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the counters other than the eighth counter 141h, the ninth counter 141i, and the eleventh counter 141k in the history memory 117 are “ "0" is not cleared. As a result, the management of the number or frequency of entering game balls into each history target ball entry unit is performed based on the long-term game history without being affected by the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. It becomes possible.

  Note that the configuration of the history memory 117 as in the present embodiment may be applied to the above-described thirty-third to thirty-seventh embodiments and the embodiments described after this embodiment. For example, when applied to the thirty-third embodiment, even if a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the information in the history memory 117 is maintained as it is. Also, when applied to the thirty-fifth embodiment, when a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the entire history memory 117 is cleared to “0”.

  In addition, when the set value of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the processing of steps S2306 to S2308 may be executed in the setting update recognition processing (FIG. 546). Accordingly, even if a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, if the set value is not changed before and after that, information on the number of times of execution of the game, information on the number of times of execution of the open / close execution mode, and high frequency support The information on the number of occurrences of the mode is not cleared to "0", and when the set value of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, information on the number of executions of the game, information on the number of occurrences of the open / close execution mode, and high frequency support mode Can be cleared to "0".

  In addition, before the processing of steps S2306 to S2308 is performed in the setting update recognition processing (FIG. 546), various parameters are calculated using the respective counters 141 to 144 of the history memory 117, and the calculated parameters are calculated. Various parameters may be stored in the calculation result memory 131.

<Thirty-ninth embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the history memory 117 is different from that of the thirty-third embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the 33rd embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the above-described thirty-third embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 547 is an explanatory diagram for describing the configuration of the history memory 117 in the present embodiment.

  As the history memory 117, history memories 181 to 186 corresponding to “setting 1” to “setting 6” which are the setting states of the pachinko machine 10 are provided. Specifically, a history memory 181 for setting 1 is provided corresponding to “setting 1”, and a history memory 182 for setting 2 is provided corresponding to “setting 2”. A history memory 183 for setting 3 is provided corresponding to “setting 3”, and a history memory 184 for setting 4 is provided corresponding to “setting 4”. A history memory 185 for setting 5 is provided, and a history memory 186 for setting 6 is provided corresponding to “setting 6”.

  Each of the history memories 181 to 186 for the settings 1 to 6 is provided with a combination of the history area 124 and the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 in the 33rd embodiment. As a result, it is possible to store the history information in correspondence with each of the setting states of the pachinko machine 10 of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”. In this case, when a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the history memories 181 to 186 corresponding to the setting values for which the new setting is performed are to be stored as history information. In addition, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the history information can be stored for each set value without erasing the history information. Further, since various parameters are calculated using the history information corresponding to the currently set state of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to appropriately derive various parameters corresponding to each set value.

  In the history memories 181 to 186 for the settings 1 to 6, the total area 141, the first state area 142, the second state area 143, and the third state area 144 in the thirty-eighth embodiment are stored. A configuration in which a combination is set may be adopted.

  Next, a setting update recognition process in the present embodiment executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  When the set value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 switches from the LOW level to the HI level (step S2401: YES), the value of the set value grasp counter provided in the calculation result memory 131 Is set to “1” (step S2402). The set value grasp counter is a counter for specifying the set value of the pachinko machine 10 by the management CPU 112. For example, if the value of the set value grasp counter is “1”, it means “setting 1”, If the value of the set value grasp counter is “6”, it means “set 6”. Further, in the present embodiment, it is assumed that the supply of the operating power to the management IC 66 is stopped because the set value grasp counter is provided in the operation result memory 131 which is a memory that does not require external power supply for storing and holding. Also, the value stored in the set value grasp counter is stored and held.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the set value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 has switched from the LOW level to the HI level again (step S2403). If an affirmative determination is made in step S2403, the value of the set value grasp counter of the calculation result memory 131 is incremented by 1 (step S2404). As a result, the set value of the pachinko machine 10 specified by the management CPU 112 increases by one step.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2403, or if the process in step S2404 is performed, based on the input states of the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h of the input port 121. It is determined whether a set value identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S2405). If a negative determination is made in step S2405, the process returns to step S2403.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2405, the history memories 181 to 186 corresponding to the values of the set value grasp counters of the calculation result memory 131 are set as storage targets of history information and reference targets when calculating various parameters ( Step S2406). More specifically, if the value of the set value grasp counter is “1”, it means that the value is set to “Setting 1”. Therefore, the history memory 181 for Setting 1 stores the history information storage target and various parameters. Set as a reference target at the time of calculation. If the value of the set value grasping counter is "2", it means that the value is set to "Setting 2". Therefore, the history memory 182 for Setting 2 is used to store the history information storage target and various parameters. Set as a reference target. If the value of the set value grasp counter is "3", it means that the value has been set to "Setting 3". Therefore, the history memory 183 for Setting 3 is used to store the history information storage target and various parameters. Set as a reference target. If the value of the set value grasp counter is "4", it means that the value has been set to "setting 4". Therefore, the history memory 184 for setting 4 is used to store the history information storage target and various parameters. Set as a reference target. If the value of the set value grasp counter is "5", it means that the value has been set to "setting 5". Therefore, the history memory 185 for setting 5 is used to store the history information storage target and various parameters. Set as a reference target. If the value of the set value grasp counter is "6", it means that the value has been set to "setting 6". Therefore, the history memory 186 for setting 6 is used to store the history information storage target and various parameters. Set as a reference target.

  After that, the RTC 115 reads out the RTC information, which is year / month / day information and time information (step S2407). Then, a writing process to the history memory 117 is executed (step S2408). In the writing process, the history memories 181 to 186 set as the storage targets of the history information in step S2406 are selected from the history memories 181 to 186 for the settings 1 to 6. Then, by referring to the pointer area 126 in the history memories 181 to 186 to be stored, the pointer information of the history area 124 which is the current write target is specified, and the pointer information becomes the write target. The RTC information read in step S2407 is written to the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124 corresponding to the pointer information that is present. In addition, information for identifying a set value is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Thereby, the combination of the information indicating that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been newly set and the RTC information corresponding to the date and time when the setting has been performed is stored as the history information.

  After that, the target pointer is updated (step S2409). In the updating process, the history memories 181 to 186 set as the storage targets of the history information in step S2406 are selected from the history memories 181 to 186 for the settings 1 to 6, and the history memories 181 to 186 are stored. The numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 is read out and added by one. It is determined whether or not the pointer information after the addition exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124. If it does not exceed the maximum value, the pointer information after the addition of 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as new write target pointer information. If it exceeds the maximum value, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

  According to the above configuration, the history memories 117 to 186 for the settings 1 to 6 are provided as the history memory 117 so as to correspond to “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”, respectively. Thereby, it is possible to store the game history corresponding to each of the setting states of the pachinko machine 10 of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”. In this case, when a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the history memories 181 to 186 corresponding to the setting values for which the new setting is performed are to be stored as history information. In addition, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the history information can be stored for each set value without erasing the history information. Further, since various parameters are calculated using the history information corresponding to the currently set state of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to appropriately derive various parameters corresponding to each set value.

  The history memory 117 is not limited to the configuration in which the six memories of the history memories 181 to 186 for the settings 1 to 6 are provided. Area corresponding to the history memory 181 for setting, the area corresponding to the history memory 182 for setting 2, the area corresponding to the history memory 183 for setting 3, and the history memory 184 for setting 4. An area, an area corresponding to the history memory 185 for setting 5, and an area corresponding to the history memory 186 for setting 6 may be set.

<40th embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the history memory 117 is different from that of the thirty-third embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the 33rd embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the above-described thirty-third embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 549 is an explanatory diagram for describing the configuration of the history memory 117 in the present embodiment.

  As the history memory 117, a first history memory 191 and a second history memory 192 are provided. Each of the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 is provided with a combination of the history area 124 and the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 in the thirty-third embodiment. In this case, a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed in a situation where the history information is stored using one of the first history memories 191 and the second history memory 192. Is performed, the history information of the one history memory 191 or 192 is left without erasing until a predetermined number or more of history information is stored in the other history memories 191 and 192 after that. And history information can be newly stored in both of the history memories 191 and 192 until a predetermined number or more of history information is stored in the other history memories 191 and 192. Become.

  Next, a setting update recognition process according to the present embodiment executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  When the set value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 switches from the LOW level to the HI level (step S2501: YES), the value of the set value grasp counter provided in the management RAM 114 is set to “ 1 "(step S2502). The set value grasp counter is a counter for specifying the set value of the pachinko machine 10 by the management CPU 112. For example, if the value of the set value grasp counter is “1”, it means “setting 1”, If the value of the set value grasp counter is “6”, it means “set 6”.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the set value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 has switched from the LOW level to the HI level again (step S2503). If an affirmative determination is made in step S2503, the value of the set value grasp counter of the management-side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S2504). As a result, the set value of the pachinko machine 10 specified by the management CPU 112 increases by one step.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2503, or if the process in step S2504 is performed, based on the input states of the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h of the input port 121. It is determined whether a set value identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S2505). If a negative determination is made in step S2505, the process returns to step S2503.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2505, "1" is set to the setting change occurrence flag provided in the calculation result memory 131 (step S2506). The setting change occurrence flag has been set as the storage target of the history information in the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. Not only the history memories 191 and 192 but also the other history memories 191 and 192 are flags for the management-side CPU 112 to specify whether or not the situation is a history information storage target. Further, since a setting change occurrence flag is provided in the operation result memory 131, which is a memory that does not require external power supply for storage retention, even if the supply of operating power to the management IC 66 is stopped, a setting change occurs. The value stored in the flag is stored and held.

  Thereafter, RTC information, which is year / month / day information and time information, is read from the RTC 115 (step S2507). Then, a writing process to the history memories 191 and 192 is executed (step S2508). In the writing process, first, by referring to the pointer area 126 of the first history memory 191, the pointer information of the history area 124 that is the current writing target is specified, and the pointer information that is the writing target is specified. The RTC information read in step S2507 is written to the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124 corresponding to. Further, both the information for identifying the setting value and the information of the value of the setting value grasp counter are written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Thereby, the information indicating that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been newly set, the RTC information corresponding to the date and time when the setting has been performed, and the information of the setting value when the setting has been performed are included. The combination is stored in the first history memory 191 as history information. In the writing process, the pointer information of the history area 124 that is the current writing target is specified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the second history memory 192, and the pointer that is the writing target is specified. The RTC information read in step S2507 is written to the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124 corresponding to the information. Further, both the information for identifying the setting value and the information of the value of the setting value grasp counter are written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Thereby, the information indicating that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been newly set, the RTC information corresponding to the date and time when the setting has been performed, and the information of the setting value when the setting has been performed are included. The combination is stored in the second history memory 192 as history information.

  Thereafter, an update process of each target pointer is executed (step S2509). In the updating process, first, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the first history memory 191 is read and 1 is added. It is determined whether or not the pointer information after the addition exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124. If it does not exceed the maximum value, the pointer information after the addition of 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as new write target pointer information. If it exceeds the maximum value, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information. In the updating process, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the second history memory 192 is read and 1 is added. It is determined whether or not the pointer information after the addition exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124. If it does not exceed the maximum value, the pointer information after the addition of 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as new write target pointer information. If it exceeds the maximum value, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

  Next, a history setting process according to the present embodiment executed by the management-side CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  If “1” is not set in the setting change occurrence flag of the operation result memory 131 (step S2601: NO), the storage target side of the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 is This means that the history information should only be stored. In this case, first, the history memories 191 and 192 to be currently stored are grasped (step S2602). The calculation result memory 131 is provided with a storage target flag. If the value of the storage target flag is “0”, the first history memory 191 is to be stored, and the value of the storage target flag is “1”. In this case, the second history memory 192 is to be stored. Note that the storage target flag is provided in the operation result memory 131 which is a memory that does not require external power supply for storage retention, so that even if the supply of operating power to the management IC 66 is stopped, the storage target flag is not stored. Is stored and held.

  Thereafter, a history setting execution process is executed for the history memories 191 and 192 to be stored (step S2603). Specifically, the processes of steps S1101 to S1112 of the history setting process (FIG. 531) in the thirty-third embodiment are executed on one of the history memories 191 and 192 to be stored. As a result, the history information is stored in the history memories 191 and 192 to be stored.

  On the other hand, when the setting change occurrence flag of the calculation result memory 131 is set to “1” (step S2601: YES), the memory is the storage target of the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192. This means that the history information should be stored not only on the side but also on the other side. In this case, a history setting execution process is executed for both history memories 191 and 192 (step S2604). Specifically, first, the processes of steps S1101 to S1112 of the history setting process (FIG. 531) in the thirty-third embodiment are executed on the first history memory 191. As a result, the history information is stored in the first history memory 191. Thereafter, the processes of steps S1101 to S1112 of the history setting process (FIG. 531) in the thirty-third embodiment are executed on the second history memory 192. As a result, the history information is stored in the second history memory 192.

  When the processing of step S2603 or the processing of step S2604 is performed, it is determined whether or not the setting change occurrence flag of the calculation result memory 131 is set to “1” (step S2605). If an affirmative determination is made in step S2605, it is determined whether or not a predetermined number or more of ball discharge histories exist in the history memories 191 and 192 to be non-stored (step S2606). Specifically, when the value of the storage target flag of the operation result memory 131 is “0”, the first history memory 191 is to be stored, and the game area PA is stored in the second history memory 192. It is determined whether or not a predetermined number (specifically, “1000”) or more of history information indicating that a game ball has been discharged from is stored. When the value of the storage target flag of the calculation result memory 131 is “1”, since the second history memory 192 is to be stored, the game area is stored in the first history memory 191 from the game area PA. It is determined whether or not a predetermined number (specifically, “1000”) or more of history information indicating that is discharged is stored. It should be noted that it is not determined whether or not a predetermined number (specifically, “1000”) or more of history information indicating that game balls have been ejected from the game area PA is stored. It may be configured to determine whether or not a predetermined number (specifically, “100”) or more of history information indicating is stored.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2606, a storage object change process is executed (step S2607). In the process of changing the storage target, the value of the storage target flag of the operation result memory 131 is set to a value different from the current value between two values, so that the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 are set. Change the side to be stored. Specifically, if the value of the storage target flag is “0”, the storage target is changed from the first history memory 191 to the second history memory 192 by setting the storage target flag to “1”. If the value of the storage target flag is “1”, the storage target is changed from the second history memory 192 to the first history memory 191 by clearing the storage target flag to “0”. Thereby, the history memories 191 and 192 in which only the history information of the game executed after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is stored are set as storage targets. Various parameters are calculated by using the history information of the newly stored history memories 191 and 192, and are executed after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. It is possible to derive various parameters depending on the game.

  After that, a clearing process is performed on the side of the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 which has been the storage target until then (step S2608). Specifically, if the value of the storage target flag is “0”, the second history memory 192 is cleared to “0”, and if the value of the storage target flag is “1”, the first history memory 191 is cleared to “0”. Clear "0". Then, the setting change occurrence flag of the operation result memory 131 is cleared to “0” (step S2609).

  Next, a display output process according to the present embodiment executed by the management-side CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  If it is the calculation timing (step S2701: YES), the storage target side of the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 is grasped (step S2702). Specifically, if the value of the storage target flag of the operation result memory 131 is “0”, the first history memory 191 is grasped as the storage target, and if the value of the storage target flag is “1”, the second history memory 191 is recognized. The history memory 192 is grasped as a storage target. Thereafter, steps S1402 to S1412 of the display output process (FIG. 535) in the thirty-third embodiment are executed using the history information stored in the history memories 191 and 192 to be stored grasped in step S2702. Calculates various parameters (first to eighth parameters, eleventh to eighteenth parameters, twenty-first to twenty-sixth parameters, thirty-first parameter, and forty-first to forty-second parameters), and calculates the calculated various parameters by the calculation result. Is stored in the storage memory 131 (step S2703). In this case, since the setting change occurrence flag of the operation result memory 131 is set to “1”, the history information is stored in both the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192. Even if there is, various parameters are calculated by using one of the history memories 191 and 192 to be stored.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2701 or if the process of step S2703 is performed, a display process is performed (step S2704). The processing content of the display processing is the same as the display processing (FIG. 536) in the 33rd embodiment.

  According to the above configuration, the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 are provided as the history memory 117. The history information is also stored in the history memories 191 and 192 on the side that is not the storage target, while the history memories 191 and 192 that are the storage targets are directly stored. When a predetermined number or more of history information corresponding to the ejection of the game ball from the game area PA is stored in the history memories 191 and 192 on the non-storage side, the history memory is not the storage target. The history memories 191 and 192 on the side are directly stored, and the history memories 191 and 192 on the side previously stored are cleared to “0”. Thereby, when a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, it is possible to calculate various parameters using only the history information of the game performed at the newly set setting value. Become.

  On the other hand, according to the above configuration, even if a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly performed in a short period of time in order to prevent the calculation of various parameters from being performed properly, the history for the history to be stored is stored. The memories 191 and 192 are maintained without being changed. As a result, even if a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly performed in a short period of time, it is possible to appropriately derive the management result of the game history up to that time.

  Note that the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the two memories, the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192, are provided as the history memory 117. The first history area corresponding to the memory 191 and the second history area corresponding to the second memory 192 may be set.

  Further, a configuration in which only one history memory 117 is provided may be adopted. In this case, if the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA exceeds a predetermined number after the setting of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the setting of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set. The history information before the set timing may be erased, and the history information after the timing at which the setting is performed may be stored and held without being erased. Thus, at the timing when a predetermined number or more of history information is accumulated after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the history before the timing at which the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed is performed. Information can be erased. Also, by setting the history information corresponding to the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 to be stored in the history memory 117, the new setting of the setting state in the history memory 117 is performed. It is possible to distinguish between the history information before the timing at which the is performed and the history information after.

  Further, the timing of deleting the history information is not limited to the case where the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA has become equal to or more than a predetermined number after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. Alternatively, the number of game times executed after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed may be equal to or more than a predetermined number.

  In addition, even if a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, if the set value has not been changed before and after the change, the change of the history memories 191 and 192 to be stored as described above and the change of the history information are performed. The deletion is not performed, and when the setting of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set and the set value is changed before and after that, the history memories 191 and 192 to be stored as described above are used. May be changed and the history information may be deleted.

<Forty-first embodiment>
In the present embodiment, among the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p of the input port 121 in the management-side I / F 111, the type of the buffer whose input signal type is determined at the design stage of the management IC 66 is the above-described type. This is different from the thirty-third embodiment. The processing configuration executed by the main CPU 63 to specify the type of input signal to the management CPU 112 is different from that of the thirty-third embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the 33rd embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the above-described thirty-third embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 553 is an explanatory diagram for describing the configuration of the input port 121 of the management-side I / F 111 according to the present embodiment.

  The same types of signals as those of the above-described thirty-third embodiment are input to the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g and the sixteenth buffer 122p. Specifically, a first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 122a, and a second signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a is input to the second buffer 122b. The second signal is input, the third buffer 122c receives the third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, and the fourth buffer 122d receives the fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electricity detection sensor 45a. A signal is input, a fifth buffer 122e receives a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first working port detection sensor 46a, and a sixth buffer 122f receives a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second working port detection sensor 47a. The sixth signal is input, a seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the out-mouth detection sensor 48a is input to the seventh buffer 122g, and an output instruction is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p. No. is input.

  On the other hand, in the 33rd embodiment, a signal corresponding to the open / close execution mode is input to the eighth buffer 122h as an eighth signal, and a signal corresponding to the high frequency support mode is input to the ninth buffer 122i as a ninth signal. A signal corresponding to the door frame 14 is input to the tenth buffer 122j as a tenth signal, a signal corresponding to the start of the game is input to the eleventh buffer 122k as an eleventh signal, and a set value update signal is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o. However, in this embodiment, buffers to which these signals are input are different. Specifically, the signal corresponding to the start of the game round is input to the eleventh buffer 122k as the game round signal, the set value update signal is input to the twelfth buffer 122l, and the signal corresponding to the open / close execution mode is during the open / close execution mode. A signal corresponding to the high frequency support mode is input to the fourteenth buffer 122n as a signal during the high frequency support mode, and a signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input to the fifteenth buffer 122m as the signal during the door opening. The data is input to the buffer 122o.

  The game time signal is input to the eleventh buffer 122k, the set value update signal is input to the twelfth buffer 122l, the open / close execution mode signal is input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, and the fourteenth buffer 122n. The input of the high-frequency support mode signal, the input of the door opening signal to the fifteenth buffer 122o, and the input of the output instruction signal to the sixteenth buffer 122p are determined in the design stage of the management IC 66. Thus, without receiving an instruction from the main CPU 63, the management CPU 112 can specify that the corresponding signals are input to the eleventh to sixteenth buffers 122k to 122p. On the other hand, what types of signals are input to the first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j is not determined in the design stage of the management IC 66, and the types of these signals are received from the main CPU 63. This is specified by the management-side CPU 112. The process for specifying the type of the signal is executed when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, as in the thirty-third embodiment.

  FIG. 554 is a flowchart showing the recognition processing of this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the recognition process is executed in step S111 in the main process (FIG. 514) as in the 33rd embodiment.

  First, "10", which is the number of the first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j for signal type recognition, is set in the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 (step S2801). After that, an output process of the identification start signal is executed (step S2802). In the output processing, the output state of each of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a, the open / close execution mode signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, and the high frequency support mode signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n Is set to the HI level to start outputting the identification start signal. The period during which these signals are maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of these signals.

  Thereafter, information on the number of outputs corresponding to the current value of the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 is read from the main ROM 64, and the read information on the number of outputs is set in the output counter provided in the main RAM 65 ( Step S2803). The output number counter is a counter for specifying the number of times of output of the type identification signal by the main CPU 63.

  In the present embodiment, when the management CPU 112 recognizes the type of the signal input to the first buffer 122a to the tenth buffer 122j, the number of award balls set for the entry section corresponding to the type of the signal The type identification signal is output the same number of times as the above. The management-side CPU 112 stores information corresponding to the number of times the type identification signal is received for each of the first buffer 122a to the tenth buffer 122j in the first to tenth correspondence areas 123a to 123j of the correspondence memory 116. . That is, the type of signal input to the first buffer 122a to the tenth buffer 122j is grasped as the number of prize balls set for the entry section corresponding to the type of signal.

  In step S2803, when the value of the recognition output counter is any of "10", "9", and "8", "10" corresponding to the number of winning balls in the general winning opening 31 is set in the output number counter. . When the value of the recognition output counter is “7”, “15” corresponding to the number of winning balls of the special power winning device 32 is set in the output number counter. When the value of the recognition output counter is “6”, “1” corresponding to the number of winning balls in the first operation port 33 is set in the output number counter. If the value of the recognition output counter is “5”, “1” corresponding to the number of winning balls in the second operation port 34 is set in the output number counter. Also, when the value of the recognition output counter is "4", the payout of the game ball is not executed even if the game ball enters the out port 24a although it corresponds to the out port 24a. Is set to "0". When the value of the recognition output counter is any one of “3” to “1”, the corresponding ball entry portion does not exist and is blank, so “0” is set to the output number counter.

  After that, a process of outputting a start trigger signal is executed (step S2804). In the output processing, the output of the start trigger signal is started by setting the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a to the HI level. The period during which the first signal is maintained at the HI level is set to a period that is sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the first signal.

  Thereafter, on the condition that the value of the output number counter of the main RAM 65 is not "0" (step S2805: YES), that is, on condition that a value of 1 or more is set in the output number counter in step S2803. The process proceeds to step S2806. In step S2806, output processing of a type identification signal is performed. In the output processing, the output state of the type identification signal is started by setting the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122b to the HI level. The period during which the second signal is maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the second signal.

  Thereafter, the value of the output counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S2807), and it is determined whether or not the value of the output counter after the subtraction is “0” (step S2808). If the value of the output number counter is 1 or more (step S2808: NO), the process returns to step S2806.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2805, or if an affirmative determination is made in step S2808, an end trigger signal output process is executed (step S2809). In the output processing, the output of the end trigger signal is started by setting the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c to the HI level. The period during which the third signal is maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the third signal.

  Thereafter, the value of the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S2810), and it is determined whether or not the value of the recognition output counter after the subtraction is “0” (step S2811). If the value of the recognition output counter is 1 or more (step S2811: NO), the process returns to step S2803 to execute processing for recognizing the type of signal corresponding to the value of the recognition output counter after subtracting one. I do.

  On the other hand, when the value of the recognition output counter is “0” (step S2811: YES), the process of outputting the identification end signal is executed (step S2812). In the output processing, the output state of each of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c, the open / close execution mode signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, and the high frequency support mode signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n Is set to the HI level to start outputting the identification end signal. The period during which these signals are maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of these signals.

  Next, a management process in the present embodiment executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The management process is started when the supply of the operating power to the management-side CPU 112 is started as in the 33rd embodiment.

  First, it is determined whether the reception of the identification start signal from the main CPU 63 has been completed (step S2901). If the identification start signal has not been received, the processing of step S2901 is executed again after the processing for setting update recognition is executed in step S2902. The processing content of the setting update recognition processing is the same as that of the 33rd embodiment.

  If the identification start signal has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S2901: YES), the value of the setting target counter in the management RAM 114 is cleared to "0" (step S2903). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2905 on condition that a start trigger signal has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S2904: YES). In step S2905, it is determined whether a type identification signal has been received from the main CPU 63. If the type identification signal has been received (step S2905: YES), the value of the number-of-receptions counter provided in the management-side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S2906). The reception counter is a counter for specifying the number of times the type identification signal has been received from the main CPU 63 by the management CPU 112. The value of the reception counter is cleared to "0" when an affirmative determination is made in step S2904.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2905, or if the process in step S2906 is performed, it is determined whether an end trigger signal has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S2907). If the end trigger signal has not been received (step S2907: NO), the process returns to step S2905, and if the end trigger signal has been received (step S2907: YES), the correspondence setting process is executed (step S2908). In the correspondence setting process, the reception count counter is set in the correspondence area corresponding to the current value of the setting target counter of the management-side RAM 114 among the first to tenth correspondence relation areas 123a to 123j of the correspondence memory 116. Store the value that has been. In this case, “10” corresponding to the number of winning balls in the general winning opening 31 is set in the first correspondence area 123a, the second correspondence area 123b, and the third correspondence area 123c, and is set in the fourth correspondence area 123d. Is set to "15" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the special electric winning device 32, "1" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the first operation port 33 is set to the fifth correspondence area 123e, and the sixth correspondence relation is set. “1” corresponding to the number of winning balls in the second operation port 34 is set in the area 123f. Also, “0” is set in the seventh to twelfth correspondence areas 123g to 123l. After that, the value of the setting counter of the management-side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S2909).

  If a negative determination is made in step S2904, or if the process of step S2909 is performed, it is determined whether the reception of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 has been completed (step S2910). If the reception of the identification end signal has not been completed (step S2910: NO), the process returns to step S2904, and on condition that a start trigger signal is received from the main CPU 63 (step S2904: YES), the processing after step S2905 is performed. Execute. If the reception of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 has been completed (step S2910: YES), the history setting processing in step S2911, the display output processing in step S2912, and the external output processing in step S2913 are repeatedly executed.

  FIG. 556 is a time chart showing how the information on the correspondence between the first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a to 122j is stored in the correspondence memory 116. FIG. 556 (a) shows a period in which the output state of the first signal is at the HI level, FIG. 556 (b) shows a period in which the output state of the second signal is at the HI level, and FIG. ) Shows a period during which the output state of the third signal is at the HI level, FIG. 556 (d) shows a period during which the output state of the signal during the open / close execution mode is at the HI level, and FIG. FIG. 556 (f) shows the first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a to 122j during the period in which the output state of the signal during the high frequency support mode is at the HI level. FIG. 556 (g) shows the timing at which the value of the number-of-receptions counter in the management-side RAM 114 is incremented by 1, and FIG. 556 (h) shows the timing at which the process of identifying the correspondence is executed. tube Shows a timing relationship setting processing (step S2908) is performed on the side CPU 112.

  When the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, the first signal is output at the timing of t1, as shown in FIGS. 556 (a), 556 (d) and 556 (e). The output state of the open / close execution mode signal and the high frequency support mode signal is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. Thus, the output of the identification start signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is started. Thereafter, at the timing of t2, the output states of the first signal, the open / close execution mode signal, and the high frequency support mode signal are changed from the HI level to the LOW level. As a result, the output of the identification start signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is stopped. At the timing t2, the management-side CPU 112 makes an affirmative determination in step S2901 of the management processing (FIG. 555), and enters the identification state as shown in FIG. 556 (f).

  Thereafter, the output state of the first signal is maintained at the HI level as shown in FIG. 556 (a) from the timing t3 to the timing t4. As a result, the start trigger signal is output to the management CPU 112. Then, the output state of the second signal is maintained at the HI level from the timing t5 to the timing t7, as shown in FIG. 556 (b). As a result, the type identification signal is output to the management-side CPU 112 once. In this case, at the timing of t6, the value of the reception counter of the management-side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 as shown in FIG. 556 (g).

  Thereafter, the output state of the third signal is maintained at the HI level as shown in FIG. 556 (c) from the timing t8 to the timing t10. As a result, the end trigger signal is output to the management-side CPU 112. In this case, the correspondence setting process is executed by the management CPU 112 at the timing of t9, as shown in FIG. 556 (h). Since the value of the number-of-receptions counter is “1” at the timing when the correspondence setting process is executed, “1” is set as the correspondence information in the correspondence areas 123a to 123j to be set this time in the correspondence memory 116. Is stored.

  Thereafter, the output state of the first signal is maintained at the HI level from the timing t11 to the timing t12, as shown in FIG. As a result, the start trigger signal is output to the management CPU 112. Then, the timing from t13 to t15, the timing from t16 to t18, the timing from t19 to t21, and the timing from t22 to t24, as shown in FIG. The output state of the signal is maintained at the HI level. As a result, the type identification signal is output to the management-side CPU 112 once. In this case, at the timing of t14, the timing of t17, the timing of t20, and the timing of t23, as shown in FIG. 556 (g), the value of the reception counter of the management-side RAM 114 is incremented by one.

  Thereafter, the output state of the third signal is maintained at the HI level from the timing t25 to the timing t27, as shown in FIG. 556 (c). As a result, the end trigger signal is output to the management-side CPU 112. In this case, the correspondence setting process is executed by the management-side CPU 112 at the timing of t26, as shown in FIG. 556 (h). Since the value of the number-of-receptions counter is “10” at the timing when the correspondence setting process is executed, “10” is set as the correspondence information in the correspondence areas 123a to 123j to be set this time in the correspondence memory 116. Is stored.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t28, as shown in FIGS. 556 (c), 556 (d) and 556 (e), the output states of the third signal, the open / close execution mode signal and the high frequency support mode signal are set to LOW. The level is changed to the HI level. Thus, the output of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is started. Thereafter, at the timing of t29, the output state of the third signal, the open / close execution mode signal and the high frequency support mode signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW level. Thus, the output of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is stopped. At the timing t29, the management-side CPU 112 makes an affirmative determination in step S2910 of the management process (FIG. 555), whereby the identification state is released as shown in FIG. 556 (f).

  In the present embodiment, since the information on the number of winning balls is stored as the correspondence information, the history information stored in the history memory 117 includes the winning ball corresponding to the ball entry unit that triggered the storage of the history information. Information on the number is included as correspondence information. In this configuration, when there are a plurality of types of ball entry portions having the same number of prize balls, the ball entry portions cannot be distinguished in the history information. More specifically, since the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 each have one prize ball, it is possible to distinguish the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 in the history information. Can not. Under such circumstances, the number of prize balls of the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34 may be different. Thus, even in the configuration in which the history information is stored as in the present embodiment, the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34 can be distinguished in the history information.

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, not only the set value update signal and the output instruction signal, but also information corresponding to whether or not the game round has been started, information corresponding to whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress, The information corresponding to whether or not the high frequency support mode is being performed and the information corresponding to whether or not the front door frame 14 is being opened are also determined by the main CPU 63 to be signal paths corresponding to these information. Can be specified by the management-side CPU 112 without receiving the correspondence information. In this case, only the information corresponding to the detection results of the incoming ball detection sensors 42a to 48a is the information that needs to cause the management CPU 112 to recognize the correspondence between the information and the signal paths 118a to 118j from the main CPU 63. Become. When the correspondence information is to be recognized by the management-side CPU 112, the same number of pulse signals as the number of prize balls corresponding to each of the incoming ball detection sensors 42a to 48a is transmitted from the main-side CPU 63 to the management-side CPU 112 using the second signal. Is output to This makes it possible to simplify the configuration related to the transmission of the correspondence information.

<Forty-second embodiment>
The present embodiment is different from the above-described thirty-third embodiment in the configuration for providing information of each ball entry result to the management IC 66. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the 33rd embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the above-described thirty-third embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 557 is an explanatory diagram for describing the configuration of a signal path for allowing the detection results of the incoming ball detection sensors 42a to 48a to be input to the main CPU 63 and the management IC 66.

  The detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is input to the main CPU 63 through the first signal path SL11. The detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a is input to the main CPU 63 through the second signal path SL12. The detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is input to the main CPU 63 through the third signal path SL13. The detection result of the special power detection sensor 45a is input to the main CPU 63 through the fourth signal path SL14. The detection result of the first working port detection sensor 46a is input to the main CPU 63 through the fifth signal path SL15. The detection result of the second working port detection sensor 47a is input to the main CPU 63 through the sixth signal path SL16. The detection result of the out-mouth detection sensor 48a is input to the main CPU 63 through the seventh signal path SL17.

  A first branch path SL21 is formed so as to branch from a middle position of the first signal path SL11, and the first branch path SL21 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a second branch path SL22 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the second signal path SL12, and the second branch path SL22 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a third branch path SL23 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the third signal path SL13, and the third branch path SL23 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a fourth branch path SL24 is formed so as to branch from a middle position of the fourth signal path SL14, and the fourth branch path SL24 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a fifth branch path SL25 is formed so as to branch from a middle position of the fifth signal path SL15, and the fifth branch path SL25 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a sixth branch path SL26 is formed so as to branch from a middle position of the sixth signal path SL16, and the sixth branch path SL26 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a seventh branch path SL27 is formed so as to branch from a middle position of the seventh signal path SL17, and the seventh branch path SL27 is electrically connected to the management IC 66.

  With the above configuration, the detection results of the incoming ball detection sensors 42 a to 48 a are input to the management IC 66 without the intervention of the processing by the main CPU 63. As a result, the main CPU 63 executes processing for causing the management CPU 112 to recognize each ball entry result of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. Therefore, the processing load on the main CPU 63 can be reduced.

  The branch points of the branch paths SL21 to SL27 from the signal paths SL11 to SL17 exist in the MPU 62. This makes it difficult to access the branch point and the branch routes SL21 to SL27 from the outside, thereby preventing an illegal act of inputting an abnormal ball entry result only to the management IC 66. .

<Forty-third embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the display device for displaying the management result of the game history is different from that of the thirty-third embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the 33rd embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the above-described thirty-third embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 558 is a front view of main controller 60 in the present embodiment.

  In the 33rd embodiment, the main control device 60 is provided with the first notification display device 69a, the second notification display device 69b, and the third notification display device 69c. A device 201, a second notification display device 202, a third notification display device 203, and a fourth notification display device 204 are provided. The first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are provided side by side on the element mounting surface of the main control board 61.

  Each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is a segment display in which seven LED display segments are arranged. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be a light emitting body, a liquid crystal display device, or an organic EL display. Each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is installed so that the display surface faces in the direction in which the element mounting surface of the main control board 61 faces, and is formed by the opposed wall portion 60b of the board box 60a. Covered. In this case, since the substrate box 60a is formed to be transparent, the display surfaces of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 housed in the substrate box 60a can be viewed from outside the substrate box 60a. It becomes possible. The main control device 60 is mounted on the rear surface of the resin base 21 so that the opposing wall portion 60b facing the element mounting surface of the main control substrate 61 in the substrate box 60a faces the rear of the pachinko machine 10. When the main body 12 is opened to the front of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the outer frame 11 and the back of the resin base 21 is exposed to the front of the pachinko machine 10, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 are provided through the facing wall portion 60b. To 204 can be visually observed.

  On the display surface of the first notification display device 201, alphabets such as "A", "E", "H", "L", and "O" are displayed. On the other hand, in the second notification display device 202, the third notification display device 203, and the fourth notification display device 204, numbers are displayed in a range of “0” to “9”. The management results of the game history are notified using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. In this case, the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 manage the game history to be notified (the first to eighth parameters, the eleventh to eighteenth parameters in the 33rd embodiment). , The 21st to 26th parameters, the 31st parameter, and the 41st to 42nd parameters) are displayed, and the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204 are notified. A display corresponding to the content of the management result of a certain type of game history is performed.

  In detail, the types of the management result of the game history include the first to eighth parameters, the eleventh to eighteenth parameters, the twenty-first to twenty-sixth parameters, the thirty-first parameter, and the forty-first to forty-second parameters in the thirty-third embodiment. Existing. The first notification display device 201 performs a display corresponding to the type of the parameter group to be notified. Specifically, when any of the first to eighth parameters is to be notified, “A” is displayed on the first notification display device 201, and any of the first to eighteen parameters is notified. “E” is displayed on the first notification display device 201 when the notification is to be made, and the first notification display device is made when any of the 21st to 26th parameters is to be notified. "H" is displayed at 201, and if any of the 31st parameters is to be notified, "L" is displayed at the first notification display device 201, and the 41st to 42nd parameters are notified. If it is a target, “O” is displayed on the first notification display device 201.

  The second notification display device 202 displays the order corresponding to the type of the management result of the game history to be notified among the arrangement order of the management results of the game history in the parameter group to be notified. To explain by taking a parameter group of the first to eighth parameters as an example, when the first parameter is a notification target, “1” is displayed on the second notification display device 202, and the second parameter is displayed. "2" is displayed on the second notification display device 202 when the information is to be notified, and "3" is displayed on the second notification display device 202 when the third parameter is to be notified. Is displayed, and “4” is displayed on the second notification display device 202 when the fourth parameter is a notification target, and is displayed on the second notification display device when the fifth parameter is a notification target. "5" is displayed on the display device 202, and when the sixth parameter is a notification target, "6" is displayed on the second notification display device 202, and the seventh parameter is a notification target. The second notification display device 202 "7" is displayed Te, when the eighth parameter is a notification target "8" is displayed in the second notification for the display device 202. In addition, a parameter group of the 21st to 26th parameters will be described as an example. When the 21st parameter is a notification target, “1” is displayed on the second notification display device 202 and the 22nd parameter is displayed. When the parameter is to be notified, “2” is displayed on the second notification display device 202, and when the 23rd parameter is to be notified, “2” is displayed on the second notification display device 202. "3" is displayed, "4" is displayed on the second notification display device 202 when the twenty-fourth parameter is to be notified, and the second is displayed when the twenty-fifth parameter is to be notified. “5” is displayed on the notification display device 202, and “6” is displayed on the second notification display device 202 when the 26th parameter is to be notified.

  The display contents of the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204 are described in detail. The number is displayed on the display device 203 and the digit corresponding to the ones digit is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204.

  In the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the first to eighth parameters, the 11th to 18th parameters, the 21st to 26th parameters, the 31st parameter, and the 41st to 42nd parameters The display corresponding to the calculation result of the parameter is sequentially switched in accordance with a predetermined order, and after the calculation result of the forty-second parameter, which is the display object of the last order, is displayed, the first parameter which is the display object of the first order is displayed. Is displayed. In this case, the period during which the calculation result of one parameter is continuously displayed is 2 seconds. On the other hand, the calculation cycle of the various parameters in the management CPU 112 is 51 seconds, and the number of the various parameters is 25. Therefore, the various parameters calculated by the management CPU 112 are to be notified at least once by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 202.

  In the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, not only the notification of the management result of the game history but also the changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed as in the thirty-third embodiment. Indicates a value corresponding to the current setting value. Specifically, in the changeable state, the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are turned off, whereas the first to fourth notification display devices 204 arranged side by side are located at the right end. The value corresponding to the current setting value is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204 that is operating. That is, when “setting 1” is selected in the changeable state, “1” is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204, and when “setting 2” is selected in the changeable state. “2” is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204, and “3” is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204 when “setting 3” is selected in the changeable state, and can be changed. When “setting 4” is selected in the state, “4” is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204, and when “setting 5” is selected in the changeable state, the fourth notification is displayed. “5” is displayed on the display device 204, and “6” is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204 when “setting 6” is selected in the changeable state.

  Next, an electrical configuration for performing various displays on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 based on the control of the MPU 62 will be described. FIG. 559 is a block diagram for explaining an electrical configuration for performing various displays on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 based on the control of the MPU 62.

  As described above, the main control board 61 is provided with the MPU 62 and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. The main control board 61 is provided with a first display IC 205, a second display IC 206, a third display IC 207, and a fourth display IC 208.

  The first display IC 205 is provided so as to correspond to the first notification display device 201, is electrically connected to the MPU 62 by a signal path SL31, and is electrically connected to the first notification display device 201 by a signal path SL32. It is connected. The first display IC 205 is provided with a storage buffer for storing display data received from the MPU 62, and controls display of the first notification display device 201 in accordance with the display data stored in the storage buffer. Control of the light emitting segment. The first display IC 205 can store and hold the display data stored in the storage buffer when the operation power is supplied, and displays the display content corresponding to the stored and held display data on the first notification display device. 201 is displayed continuously. When the display data is changed by the MPU 62, the display of the first notification display device 201 is changed to the display content corresponding to the changed display data. Further, after the supply of the operating power to the first display IC 205 is started and the display data is not set by the MPU 62, the display data becomes all “0” data. Means that the first notification display device 201 is in a non-display state, that is, a light-off state.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration. Even when the supply of the operation power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped by the backup power being supplied to the first display IC 205, the display is performed by the first display IC 205. A configuration capable of storing and holding data may be adopted. In this case, when the supply of the operation power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the display performed on the first notification display device 201 immediately before the supply of the operation power of the pachinko machine 10 is stopped is displayed. The process is started by the first notification display device 201.

  The second display IC 206 is provided corresponding to the second notification display device 202, is electrically connected to the MPU 62 by a signal path SL33, and is electrically connected to the second notification display device 202 by a signal path SL34. It is connected. The second display IC 206 is provided with a storage buffer for storing the display data received from the MPU 62, and controls the display of the second notification display device 202 according to the display data stored in the storage buffer, that is, each display. Control of the light emitting segment. The second display IC 206 can store and hold the display data stored in the storage buffer when the operating power is supplied, and displays the display content corresponding to the stored and held display data on the second notification display device. 202 is displayed continuously. When the display data is changed by the MPU 62, the display of the second notification display device 202 is changed to the display content corresponding to the changed display data. Also, in a situation after the supply of the operating power to the second display IC 206 has been started and the display data has not been set by the MPU 62, the display data becomes all “0” data. Means that the second notification display device 202 is in a non-display state, that is, a light-off state.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration. Even when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped by supplying the backup power to the second display IC 206, the second display IC 206 displays the display. A configuration capable of storing and holding data may be adopted. In this case, when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the display performed on the second notification display device 202 immediately before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped is displayed. The process is started by the second notification display device 202.

  The third display IC 207 is provided corresponding to the third notification display device 203, is electrically connected to the MPU 62 by a signal path SL35, and is electrically connected to the third notification display device 203 by a signal path SL36. It is connected. The third display IC 207 is provided with a storage buffer for storing display data received from the MPU 62, and controls the display of the third notification display device 203 in accordance with the display data stored in the storage buffer, that is, each display. Control of the light emission segment. The third display IC 207 can store and hold the display data stored in the storage buffer when the operation power is supplied, and displays the display content corresponding to the stored and held display data in a third notification display device. 203 is displayed continuously. Then, when the display data is changed by the MPU 62, the display of the third notification display device 203 is changed to the display content corresponding to the changed display data. Further, after the supply of the operation power to the third display IC 207 is started and the display data is not set by the MPU 62, the display data becomes all “0” data. Indicates that the third notification display device 203 is in a non-display state, that is, a light-off state.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration. Even when the supply of operation power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped due to the supply of backup power to the third display IC 207, the third display IC 207 displays the display. A configuration capable of storing and holding data may be adopted. In this case, when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the display performed on the third notification display device 203 immediately before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped is displayed. The process is started by the third notification display device 203.

  The fourth display IC 208 is provided corresponding to the fourth notification display device 204, is electrically connected to the MPU 62 by a signal path SL37, and is electrically connected to the fourth notification display device 204 by a signal path SL38. It is connected. The fourth display IC 208 is provided with a storage buffer for storing the display data received from the MPU 62, and controls the display of the fourth notification display device 204 according to the display data stored in the storage buffer, that is, each display. Control of the light emitting segment. The fourth display IC 208 can store and hold the display data stored in the storage buffer when the operation power is supplied, and displays the display content corresponding to the stored and held display data in a fourth notification display device. 204 is displayed continuously. Then, when the display data is changed by the MPU 62, the display of the fourth notification display device 204 is changed to the display content corresponding to the changed display data. Further, after the supply of the operating power to the fourth display IC 208 is started and the display data is not set by the MPU 62, the display data becomes all “0” data. Means that the fourth notification display device 204 is in a non-display state, that is, in a light-off state.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration. Even when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped by the backup power being supplied to the fourth display IC 208, the display is displayed on the fourth display IC 208. A configuration capable of storing and holding data may be adopted. In this case, when the supply of the operation power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the display performed on the fourth notification display device 204 immediately before the supply of the operation power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped is displayed. The process is started by the fourth notification display device 204.

  Output of display data to the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208 is performed by the MPU 62, and output setting of the display data is performed by the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112. That is, the display control of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is executed by the main CPU 63 and the display control of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is executed by the management CPU 112. In this case, the period during which the output setting of the display data is performed is adjusted in each of the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 so that the output setting of the display data is not performed at the same time. Specifically, in the changeable state where the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed after the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 is started, the output setting of the display data by the main CPU 63 is performed. However, the output setting of the display data by the management CPU 112 is not performed. On the other hand, in a state in which the setting value is not changeable, the output setting of the display data is performed by the main CPU 63 while the output setting of the display data is performed by the management CPU 112.

  If the output setting of the display data by the main CPU 63 and the output setting of the display data by the management CPU 112 are performed at the time of synchronization, the output setting of the display data by the main CPU 63 has priority. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration in which the output setting of the display data by the management CPU 112 is prioritized may be adopted.

  Next, a display process executed by the management-side CPU 112 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  First, the value of the update timing counter of the management side RAM 114 is decremented by 1 (step S3001). The update timing counter is a counter for specifying by the management-side CPU 112 that it is time to update the display content of the management result of the game history on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the display content of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 has been updated by determining whether or not the value of the update timing counter after subtracting 1 is “0”. Is determined (step S3002).

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3002, the value of the display target counter of the management-side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S3003). Then, when the value of the display target counter after adding 1 exceeds the maximum value “24” (step S3004: YES), the value of the display target counter is cleared to “0” (step S3005). The display target counter is a counter for specifying the type of parameter to be displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 by the management CPU 112. The first to eighth parameters, the eleventh to eighteenth parameters, the twenty-first to twenty-sixth parameters, the thirty-first parameter, the fourteenth to forty-second parameters, and the display target counters “0” to “24” The possible values correspond one-to-one. For example, when the value of the display target counter is “0”, the first parameter to be displayed first is the display target of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and the value of the display target counter is “24”. In the case of, the 42nd parameter, which is the last display target, is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3004 or if the process in step S3005 is executed, display data corresponding to the type of parameter corresponding to the value of the display target counter is read from the management-side ROM 113 (step S3006). Then, a process of setting display data corresponding to the first notification display device 201 is executed (step S3007), and a process of setting display data corresponding to the second notification display device 202 is executed (step S3008). For example, if the value of the display target counter is “0” and the first parameter is a display target, display data for displaying “A” on the first notification display device 201 is displayed on the first display IC 205. In addition to the output, display data for displaying “1” on the second notification display device 202 is output to the second display IC 206. For example, if the value of the display target counter is “24” and the forty-second parameter is to be displayed, the display data for displaying “O” on the first notification display device 201 is displayed on the first display. In addition to outputting to the IC 205, display data for displaying “2” on the second notification display device 202 is output to the second display IC 206.

  Thereafter, a parameter corresponding to the value of the display target counter is read out from the operation result memory 131, and display data corresponding to the tens place and display data corresponding to the ones place of the result of multiplying the read out parameter by 100 are read out. It is read from the management side ROM 113 (step S3009). Then, the display of the third notification display device 203 is controlled so that the number corresponding to the tens place is displayed (step S3010), and the fourth information is controlled so that the number corresponding to the ones place is displayed. The display of the notification display device 204 is controlled (step S3011). For example, if the result of multiplying by 100 is “53”, display data for displaying “5” on the third notification display device 203 is output to the third display IC 207, and the fourth notification display device 204 is displayed on the third notification IC 207. Display data for displaying “3” is output to the fourth display IC 208.

  Thereafter, a value corresponding to 2 seconds is set as a value corresponding to the next update timing in the update timing counter of the management-side RAM 114 (step S3012).

  By executing the display process as described above, the management results of the game history are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. The display of the management result of the game history is performed irrespective of whether the game is continued or not, and the main control device 60 is opened from the front of the pachinko machine 10 by opening the gaming machine main body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11. This is performed regardless of whether it is visible. As described above, the display control of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is performed regardless of the state of the game and the state of the pachinko machine 10, thereby the first to fourth notification display devices 201. To 204 can be simplified.

  The display of the management result of the game history on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 starts after the supply of the operation power to the management CPU 112 is started and after the identification end command is received from the main CPU 63. Is done. In this case, similarly to the information stored in the history memory 117, the information stored in the operation result memory 131 is stored and held even when the supply of the operation power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. Therefore, when the supply of the operation power to the management CPU 112 is started, the management result of the game history calculated before the supply of the operation power to the management CPU 112 is stopped is displayed.

  The first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208 store and hold the display data output from the MPU 62 while the operating power is supplied, and correspond to the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 according to the display data. Display control. Therefore, after the display of the management result of the game history is started, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are not turned off (i.e., not displayed), and are turned on corresponding to some display ( That is, the display state).

  Next, a setting value update process according to the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  First, the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are turned off (step S3101). Specifically, display data that is all “0” is output to the first to third display ICs 205 to 207. Thereby, the display segments of the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are all turned off, and the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are set to the non-display state. Immediately after the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, all of the display segments of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are turned off, and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 are provided. 204 are non-display states. Therefore, step S3101 is a process of maintaining the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 in the non-display state, and if any of the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 is affected by some influence. If it is in the display state, it is a process of setting it to the non-display state.

  After that, “1” is set to the set value counter of the main RAM 65 (step S3102). The set value counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify which set value the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is. When the set value counter is set to “1”, when the set value updating process is executed, the set value becomes “set 1” regardless of the set value up to that time.

  Thereafter, a process of starting to display the set values in the fourth display notification device 204 is executed (step S3103). In the set value display start processing, display data for displaying “1” is output to the fourth display IC 208. As a result, the number “1” corresponding to “Setting 1” is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204.

  Thereafter, on condition that the setting key insertion section 68a has not been turned off (step S3104: NO), it is determined whether or not the update button 68b has been pressed once (step S3105). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the signal from the sensor that detects the pressing operation of the update button 68b has switched from the LOW level to the HI level. If a negative determination is made in step S3105, the process returns to step S3104, and it is determined whether the setting key insertion unit 68a has been turned OFF.

  When the update button 68b is pressed once (step S3105: YES), the value of the set value counter of the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3106). If the value of the set value counter after adding 1 exceeds “6” (step S3107: YES), “1” is set to the set value counter (step S3108). Thus, each time the update button 68b is pressed once, the setting value is updated to the next higher level, and when the update button 68b is pressed once in the situation of “setting 6,” the setting is changed to “setting 1.” I will return.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3107, or if the process in step S3108 is performed, a process of updating the display of the set values in the fourth notification display device 204 is performed (step S3109). In the setting value display update processing, display data for displaying a number corresponding to the value of the setting value counter of the main RAM 65 is output to the fourth display IC 208. As a result, a number corresponding to the current set value is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. The manager of the gaming hall can check the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 after pressing the update button 68b by checking the fourth notification display device 204.

  After executing the processing of step S3109, the process returns to step S3104, and it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a has been turned off. If the OFF operation has not been performed (step S3104: NO), the processing after step S3105 is executed again. If the OFF operation has been performed (step S3104: YES), display start processing of management results on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is executed (step S3110).

  In the display start process, a display start command of the management result is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112. The management-side CPU 112 that has received the management result display start command executes processing for displaying a first parameter among various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131. The processing contents in this case are the same as steps S3006 to S3012 in the display processing (FIG. 560). Thereby, the display corresponding to the first parameter calculated immediately before the operation power of the pachinko machine 10 was stopped last time is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  Next, display modes of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the management result of the game history is displayed and when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is updated will be described. FIG. 562 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a display mode of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the management result of the game history is displayed, and FIG. 562 (b) is a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display aspect of the 1st-4th notification display apparatuses 201-204 when the setting state of 10 is changed.

  When the management result of the game history is displayed, at least one display segment in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is in a light emitting state as shown in FIG. 562 (a). That is, each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is in the display state. This is the same regardless of whether any of the first to eighth parameters, the eleventh to eighteenth parameters, the twenty-first to twenty-sixth parameters, the thirty-first parameter, and the forty-first to forty-second parameters is to be notified. . Thereby, the administrator of the game hall visually confirms that all of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are in the display state, and thus the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are displayed. It is possible to grasp that the management result of the game history is displayed.

  On the other hand, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, all the display segments in each of the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are turned off as shown in FIG. That is, each of the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 is in a non-display state. Further, any one of "1" to "6" is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. As described above, any one of “1” to “6” is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204 and each of the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 is in the non-display state. The manager of the game hall can grasp that the display corresponding to the set value is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and clearly grasp the current set value. It becomes possible.

  Next, the manner in which the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 enter the display state will be described with reference to the time charts of FIGS. 563 (a) to 563 (h). FIG. 563 (a) shows a changeable state period in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed, and FIG. 563 (b) shows an update of the setting display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. FIG. 563 (c) shows a period in which the management result of the game history is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and FIG. 563 (d) shows the first to fourth notification display devices. FIG. 563 (e) shows a period in which the first notification display device 201 is in a display state, and FIG. 563 (f) shows a display update timing corresponding to the game history management results in 201 to 204. FIG. 563 (g) shows a period in which the second notification display device 203 is in the display state, and FIG. 563 (h) shows a period in which the third notification display device 203 is in the display state. Display device 204 is displayed Indicate the period during which has become.

  As shown in FIG. 563 (a), the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed at the timing t1 by starting the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 with the setting key insertion unit 68a being turned ON. Can be changed. At the time t1, the setting display is updated as shown in FIG. 563 (b), and the fourth notification display device 204 is brought into the display state as shown in FIG. 563 (h), and the display state is continued. In this case, since “Setting 1” is selected, “1” is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. On the other hand, at the timing of t1, as shown in FIGS. 563 (e) to 563 (g), the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are in a non-display state, that is, in a state where all display segments are turned off. Will be maintained.

  After that, the operation of changing the set value by the operation of the update button 68b is performed at each of the timing of t2, the timing of t3, the timing of t4, and the timing of t5, and as shown in FIG. 563 (b), Is the timing for updating the set value display. In this case, as shown in FIG. 563 (h), in the fourth notification display device 204, at each of these timings, the display content is switched to a number corresponding to the set value after the change. The display device 204 for the fourth notification is maintained in the display state including the timings at which the operations are performed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 563 (e) to FIG. 563 (g), the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are also in the non-display state, that is, all the display The segment is kept off.

  Thereafter, when the setting key insertion section 68a is turned off at the timing of t6, the changeable state is ended as shown in FIG. 563 (a). In this case, the display period of the management result of the game history is started at the timing of t6 as shown in FIG. 563 (c). Specifically, the display of the first parameter stored in the calculation result memory 131 is started. Therefore, at the timing t6, the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are switched from the non-display state to the display state as shown in FIGS. 563 (e) to 563 (g), and the fourth notification display is performed. Although the display contents are changed by the device 204, the display state is maintained.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t7, the timing of t8, the timing of t9, the timing of t10, the timing of t11, and the timing of t12, the timing of updating the display of the management result of the game history becomes as shown in FIG. 563 (d). In this case, as shown in FIGS. 563 (e) to 563 (h), the display contents corresponding to the management result of the updated game history are updated at the respective timings by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. The first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are maintained in the display state including the timing at which the display contents are switched.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  In the configuration in which the management result of the game history is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, in the changeable state where the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed, the corresponding display is displayed. This is performed by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. As a result, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 can be used not only for displaying the management result of the game history but also as a display device for performing a corresponding display in a changeable state. .

  This corresponds to the period during which the management result of the game history is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and the setting value changeable state of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. This is distinguished from the period in which the display is performed. As a result, by grasping the situation where the display is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, any display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Can be specified.

  When the display corresponding to the changeable state of the set value is performed, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are configured to have a display mode different from a display mode when the management result of the game history is displayed. The display is controlled. Thus, by grasping the display modes of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, which display is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is specified. It becomes possible.

  A plurality of notification display devices 201 to 204 are provided. Thereby, various displays can be performed as the display corresponding to the management result of the game history. In addition, the presence of the plurality of notification display devices 201 to 204 increases the display mode between the case where the management result of the game history is displayed and the case where the display corresponding to the setting value changeable state is performed. It is possible to make them different.

  When the display corresponding to the changeable state of the set value is performed, the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 which are not in the non-display state when the management result of the game history is displayed are in the non-display state. Thus, by simply checking whether the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are in the non-display state, the display of the management result of the game history and the display corresponding to the changeable state of the set value can be performed. It is possible to clearly specify which of these is performed by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  When the display corresponding to the set value changeable state is performed, the fourth notification display device 204 is in the display state, and the display content is the fourth notification display device 204 when displaying the management result of the game history. This is the display content that can be displayed. In this way, by allowing the display contents on the fourth notification display device 204 to overlap, each of the case where the management result of the game history is displayed and the case where the display corresponding to the set value changeable state is performed are performed. Is not restricted. Further, even if the display contents on the fourth notification display device 204 can be duplicated in this way, the first to third notification display devices are displayed when the display corresponding to the set value changeable state is performed. Since 201 to 203 are in the non-display state, it is possible to specify which display is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  When the management result of the game history is displayed, each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is in a display state. Thereby, the display modes of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are clearly different between the case where the management result of the game history is displayed and the case where the display corresponding to the set value changeable state is performed. It becomes possible.

  When the management result of the game history is displayed, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are not maintained in the non-display state even when the type of the management result of the game history to be displayed is changed. . Thereby, it becomes possible to specify the management result of the game history regardless of the timing at which the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are confirmed in the situation where the management result of the game history is displayed. Also, regardless of the timing at which the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are confirmed, the display of the management result of the game history and the change of the set value are enabled in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It is possible to specify which of the corresponding displays is being performed.

  When the display corresponding to the setting value changeable state is performed, only one of the fourth notification display devices 204 is in the display state. This makes it easy to grasp whether or not the display corresponding to the set value changeable state is being performed.

  In the configuration in which the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are arranged in the horizontal direction, the display corresponding to the set value changeable state is performed using only the fourth notification display device 204 arranged at the right end. Done. This makes it easy to grasp whether or not the display corresponding to the set value changeable state is being performed.

  When the management result of the game history is displayed, the display corresponding to the type of the management result of the game history to be displayed is performed by using the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202. Using the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204, a display corresponding to the content of the management result of the game history is performed. Thereby, it becomes easy to grasp the management result of the game history. In this case, in the state in which the set value can be changed, both the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 on which the type of the management result of the game history is displayed are in the non-display state. As a result, the state in which the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 for displaying the types are not displayed corresponds to the set value changeable state, and corresponds to the set value changeable state. It is easy to grasp that the display is being performed.

  When the display corresponding to the set value changeable state is performed, not only the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 on which the type of the management result of the game history is displayed, but also the game The third notification display device 203 on which the content of the history management result is displayed is also in a non-display state. This makes it easier to grasp that the display corresponding to the set value changeable state is being performed.

  Display data is output from the MPU 62 to the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208, and the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208 perform predetermined display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 according to the display data. In such a configuration, display data is stored and held in the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208. Accordingly, even when the main CPU 63 stops executing the processing for advancing the game due to, for example, the occurrence of the radio wave detection abnormality or the vibration detection abnormality (when an affirmative determination is made in step S306). The display of the management result of the game history on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 can be maintained.

  Note that, among the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the objects which are in the non-display state (all unlit state) in the changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed are the first to fourth notification apparatuses. The present invention is not limited to the third notification display devices 201 to 203, and may be first and second notification display devices 201 and 202. In this case, a predetermined display (for example, “5” is displayed) different from the content of the current setting value is displayed on the third notification display device 203, and the current setting value is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. May be displayed, a predetermined display (for example, “5”) different from the content of the current set value is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204, and the third notification is displayed. The display device 203 may display a number corresponding to the current setting value. Also, a configuration in which the first notification display device 201 and the third notification display device 203 are in a non-display state (all unlit states) and the second notification display device 202 and the fourth notification display device 204 are in a display state. The first notification display device 201 and the fourth notification display device 204 may be in a non-display state (all unlit state), and the second notification display device 202 and the third notification display device 203 may be in the display state. The second notification display device 202 and the third notification display device 203 may be in a non-display state (all unlit state), and the first notification display device 201 and the fourth notification display device 204 may display. The second notification display device 202 and the fourth notification display device 204 may be in a non-display state (all unlit state), and the first notification display device 201 and the third notification display device 203 may be in a state. Is displayed. It may be configured.

  In the changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed, only the first notification display device 201 may be in a non-display state (all unlit state). Only the display device 202 may be in a non-display state (all-off state), or only the third notification display device 203 may be in a non-display state (all-off state). A configuration may be adopted in which only 204 is in a non-display state (all unlit state).

  In the changeable state where the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed, only the first notification display device 201 may be in the display state, and only the second notification display device 202 may be displayed. The third notification display device 203 may be in a display state.

<Forty-fourth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the display contents of the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 in the setting value changeable state are different from those of the forty-third embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the forty-third embodiment will be described. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the forty-third embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 564 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the first notification display device 201, and FIG. 564 (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the second notification display device 202.

  As shown in FIG. 564 (a), the first notification display device 201 includes seven first to seventh display segments 201a to 201g. Each of the first to seventh display segments 201a to 201g is formed in a rod shape, and has a light emitting body such as an LED inside. These seven first to seventh display segments 201a to 201g are arranged so that the first notification display device 201 becomes a so-called seven-segment display.

  As shown in FIG. 564 (b), the second notification display device 202 includes seven first to seventh display segments 202a to 202g. Each of the first to seventh display segments 202a to 202g is formed in a rod shape, and has a light emitting body such as an LED inside. These seven first to seventh display segments 202a to 202g are arranged such that the second notification display device 202 becomes a so-called seven-segment display.

  FIG. 565 shows a case where the management results of the game history are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and a case where the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed as a changeable state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of the 1st alerting display device 201 and the 2nd alerting display device 202 in FIG.

  The display contents of the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 when the management result of the game history is displayed are the same as those of the above-mentioned 43rd embodiment. Therefore, any one of “A”, “E”, “H”, “L”, and “O” is displayed on the first notification display device 201, and “1” to “8” on the second notification display device 202. Is displayed.

  In this case, each of the first to seventh display segments 201a to 201g of the first notification display device 201 is “A”, “E”, “H”, “L”, In at least one type of the display of “O”, a light is emitted. That is, the display segments 201a to 201g that are not light-emitting targets even when any of “A”, “E”, “H”, “L”, and “O” are displayed on the first notification display device 201 Does not exist.

  Similarly, for the second notification display device 202, the first to seventh display segments 202a to 202g of the second notification display device 202 respectively have "1" to "8" in the second notification display device 202. Is a light emission target in at least one type of display among the above displays. That is, even when any of “1” to “8” is displayed on the second notification display device 202, there are no display segments 202a to 202g that are not light emission targets.

  In the changeable state where the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed, in the first notification display device 201, the second display segment 201b and the fifth display segment 201e are in a light emitting state. As described above, the second display segment 201b and the fifth display segment 201e can emit light when the management result of the game history is displayed on the first notification display device 201. Furthermore, the second display segment 201b and the fifth display segment 201e are in a light emitting state in any case where the management result of the game history is displayed on the first notification display device 201. On the other hand, among the first to seventh display segments 201a to 201g, only the second display segment 201b and the fifth display segment 201e emit light, and the display content of the first notification display device 201 is the management of the game history. Not present when displaying results. Thus, in the setting value changeable state, a display that is not displayed when the game history management result is displayed while using the display segments 201b and 201e that can be in a light emitting state when the game history management result is displayed. The mode can be displayed on the first notification display device 201. Therefore, it is possible to cause the first notification display device 201 to perform display corresponding to the set value changeable state while also using the display segments 201a to 201g used when displaying the management result of the game history. It becomes possible.

  In the state in which the set value can be changed, the third display segment 202c is in the light emitting state in the second notification display device 202. As described above, the third display segment 202c can emit light when the management result of the game history is displayed on the second notification display device 202. On the other hand, among the first to seventh display segments 202a to 202g, only the third display segment 202c emits light, and the display content of the second notification display device 202 exists when displaying the management result of the game history. I haven't. Thus, in the setting value changeable state, a display mode that is not displayed when the game history management result is displayed while using the display segment 202c that can be in a light emitting state when displaying the game history management result is displayed. It can be displayed on the second notification display device 202. Therefore, the display corresponding to the changeable state of the set value can be performed on the second notification display device 202, while also using the display segments 202a to 202g used when displaying the management result of the game history. It becomes possible.

  Next, a setting value update process according to the present embodiment, which is executed by the main CPU 63, will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  First, a process of starting display of set values in the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 is executed (step S3201). Specifically, in the first notification display device 201, the second display segment 201b and the fifth display segment 201e emit light, and the other display segments 201a, 201c, 201d, 201f, and 201g turn off. Is output to the first display IC 205. Further, the second notification display device 202 outputs to the second display IC 206 display data in which the third display segment 202c emits light and the other display segments 202a, 202b, 202d to 202g turn off. As a result, the display for notifying that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed is started on the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202.

  Thereafter, the process of turning off the third notification display device 203 is executed (step S3202). Specifically, display data that is all “0” is output to the third display IC 207. As a result, all the display segments of the third notification display device 203 are turned off, and the third notification display device 203 is turned off.

  Thereafter, “1” is set to the set value counter of the main RAM 65 (step S3203). The set value counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify which set value the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is. When the set value counter is set to “1”, when the set value updating process is executed, the set value becomes “set 1” regardless of the set value up to that time.

  Thereafter, a process of starting to display the set values on the fourth notification display device 204 is executed (step S3204). In the set value display start processing, display data for displaying “1” is output to the fourth display IC 208. As a result, the number “1” corresponding to “Setting 1” is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204.

  Thereafter, on condition that the setting key insertion unit 68a has not been turned OFF (step S3205: NO), it is determined whether or not the update button 68b has been pressed once (step S3206). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the signal from the sensor that detects the pressing operation of the update button 68b has switched from the LOW level to the HI level. If a negative determination is made in step S3206, the process returns to step S3205 to determine whether the setting key insertion unit 68a has been turned OFF.

  If the update button 68b is pressed once (step S3206: YES), the value of the set value counter of the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3207). If the value of the set value counter after adding 1 exceeds “6” (step S3208: YES), “1” is set to the set value counter (step S3209). Thus, each time the update button 68b is pressed once, the setting value is updated to the next higher level, and when the update button 68b is pressed once in the situation of “setting 6,” the setting is changed to “setting 1.” I will return.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3208, or if the process in step S3209 is performed, a process of updating the display of the set values in the fourth notification display device 204 is performed (step S3210). In the setting value display update processing, display data for displaying a number corresponding to the value of the setting value counter of the main RAM 65 is output to the fourth display IC 208. As a result, a number corresponding to the current set value is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. The manager of the gaming hall can check the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 after pressing the update button 68b by checking the fourth notification display device 204.

  After executing the processing in step S3210, the process returns to step S3205, and it is determined whether the setting key insertion unit 68a has been turned OFF. If the OFF operation has not been performed (step S3205: NO), the processing after step S3206 is executed again. If the OFF operation has been performed (step S3205: YES), display start processing of management results on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is executed (step S3211).

  In the display start process, a display start command of the management result is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112. The management-side CPU 112 that has received the management result display start command executes processing for displaying a first parameter among various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131. The processing contents in this case are the same as steps S3006 to S3012 in the display processing (FIG. 560). Thereby, the display corresponding to the first parameter calculated immediately before the operation power of the pachinko machine 10 was stopped last time is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  The setting value can be changed by setting the display segments 201a to 201g and 202a to 202g of the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202, which can be in the light emitting state when the management result of the game history is displayed, to the light emitting state. The display corresponding to the state is performed. Thereby, in diversifying the display of the management result of the game history, it is possible to minimize restrictions on the content of the display corresponding to the management result of the game history. On the other hand, for each of the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202, the display segments 201a to 201g and 202a to be in the light emitting state when the display corresponding to the set value changeable state is performed. The combination of 202g is a combination that does not exist when the management result of the game history is displayed. Thereby, by grasping the combination of the display segments 201a to 201g and 202a to 202g that are in the light emitting state for each of the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202, the display of the management result of the game history is performed. And which of the displays corresponding to the set value changeable state is being performed can be grasped.

  For each of the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202, there are display segments 201a to 201g and 202a to 202g that do not emit light even if the display of the management result of the game history is performed in all patterns. I haven't. Thereby, in diversifying the display corresponding to the game history management result, it is possible to minimize the display content of the game history management result.

  When the display corresponding to the set value changeable state is performed, the third notification display device 203 that does not enter the non-display state when displaying the management result of the game history enters the non-display state. Thereby, not only the display contents of the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 but also whether the third notification display device 203 is in a non-display state is confirmed, and the game history is confirmed. It is possible to clearly specify which of the display of the management result and the display corresponding to the set value changeable state is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  It should be noted that the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 are limited to a configuration in which only one type of display content corresponding to the changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed is set. However, a configuration in which a plurality of types are set may be adopted. In this case, the display order of the plurality of types of display contents may be determined in advance, and the display contents to be displayed may be changed according to the display order each time the changeable state is newly executed. As described above, even when there are a plurality of types of display contents corresponding to the set value changeable state, the display contents are set to the display segment 201a which becomes a light emitting state when the management result of the game history is displayed. The display contents are displayed by using the game history information 201 to 201g and 202a to 202g, and are not displayed when the management result of the game history is displayed.

  Also, in one of the case where the management result of the game history is displayed and the case where the display corresponding to the changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed is performed, the first and second notification display devices are provided. A blinking display may be performed in 201 and 202, and a display for maintaining lighting may be performed on the other. In this case, since the management of the game hall can specify which of the display of the management result of the game history and the display corresponding to the changeable state depending on which of the blinking display and the lighting display, the change is performed. The combination of the display segments 201a to 201g and 202a to 202g which are set to the light emitting state in the display corresponding to the possible state may be a combination used when displaying the management result of the game history, and the management of the game history. A combination that is not used when displaying the result may be used. Further, the lighting period and the turning-off period in the blinking display may be identical to each other in the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202, or may be completely displaced. However, the configuration may be such that only a part thereof is overlapped.

<45th embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the forty-third embodiment in that, when an abnormal state occurs in the pachinko machine 10, a display corresponding thereto is performed using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. . Hereinafter, a configuration different from the forty-third embodiment will be described. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the forty-third embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 567 is an explanatory diagram for describing the configuration of the abnormal display area 211 provided in the main RAM 65.

  The abnormality display area 211 is an area for storing information on an abnormal state to be displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. The abnormal display area 211 is provided with a plurality of unit areas 211a to 211d. Specifically, a first unit area 211a, a second unit area 211b, a third unit area 211c, and a fourth unit area 211d are provided. Each of the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d can store information on an abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 one by one. In other words, up to four pieces of information on the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 can be stored and held in the abnormal display area 211.

  Here, in the present embodiment, all information on the abnormal state occurring in the pachinko machine 10 is specified by the main CPU 63. For example, when an abnormality related to the payout of the game ball (for example, the lower plate 56a is full, the tank 75 is empty, or the payout device 76 causes a payout error), a command corresponding to the generated abnormality is issued to the payout CPU 92. From the main CPU 63. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a radio wave detection sensor and a vibration detection sensor (not shown). When an illegal radio wave is detected by the radio wave detection sensor, an abnormal signal corresponding thereto is transmitted to the main CPU 63 and an abnormal signal is transmitted. When the vibration is detected by the vibration detection sensor, a corresponding abnormal signal is transmitted to the main CPU 63. Further, based on the fact that normal signals are not transmitted from the respective ball-in detection sensors 42a to 49a, occurrence of disconnection abnormality in these ball-in detection sensors 42a to 49a is specified.

  The type of abnormal state specified by the main CPU 63 is larger than the maximum number of abnormal state information that can be stored in the abnormal display area 211. Then, when a large number of abnormal states occur at the same time, it is assumed that new abnormal information will be generated even though the information of the maximum number of abnormal states is already stored in the abnormal display area 211. On the other hand, the storage priority of the abnormal state information is set at the setting stage of the pachinko machine 10, and the information is newly stored in a state where the maximum number of abnormal state information is already stored in the abnormality display area 211. When an abnormal state occurs, information of an abnormal state having a high storage priority is left in the abnormal display area 211. Thereby, it becomes possible to give priority to the notification of an abnormal state having a high storage priority.

  Next, the abnormality setting process executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The abnormality setting processing is executed as the first processing of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 516).

  First, it is determined whether an abnormal display target has occurred (step S3301). The types of the abnormal display target include the lower tray 56a being full, the tank 75 not having a ball, the dispensing device 76 dispensing abnormality, radio wave detection abnormality, vibration detection abnormality, and disconnection abnormality of each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a. The number of types of the abnormal display target is larger than the number of the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d provided in the abnormal display area 211.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3301, it is determined whether information on the abnormal state corresponding to the abnormality display target that has occurred this time has already been stored in any of the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d of the abnormal display area 211. Is determined (step S3302). If the information is already stored, the information of the abnormal state corresponding to the abnormality display target that has occurred this time is not stored in the abnormality display area 211. Thus, it is possible to prevent information of the same type of abnormal state from being redundantly stored in the abnormal display area 211.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3302, it is determined whether the value of the abnormality target counter provided in the main RAM 65 is the maximum value (specifically, "4") (step S3303). The abnormality target counter is a counter for specifying, by the main CPU 63, the number of areas in the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d in the abnormality display area 211 in which abnormal state information is stored.

  If the value of the abnormality target counter is the maximum value (step S3303: YES), a priority comparison process is executed (step S3304). In the priority comparison process, first, the abnormal state information having the lowest storage priority is specified from the abnormal state information stored in the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d of the abnormal display area 211. The storage priority is predetermined in the design stage of the pachinko machine 10, and specifically, the lower tray 56a is full → there is no ball in the tank 75 → vibration detection abnormality → payout abnormality by the payout device 76 → ball entry detection sensor 42a The storage priority increases in the order of disconnection abnormality to 49a → radio wave detection abnormality. In the priority comparison process, the information of the abnormal state having the lowest storage priority stored in the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d and the storage priority of the abnormality display target that has occurred this time are higher. Is determined by comparison.

  When the storage priority of the abnormality display target that has occurred this time is lower (step S3305: NO), the information of the abnormality state corresponding to the abnormality display target that has occurred this time is not stored in the abnormality display area 211. Accordingly, in a configuration in which the number of types of the abnormal display target is greater than the number of the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d provided in the abnormal display area 211, the information of the abnormal state having a high storage priority is stored. This can be left in the abnormality display area 211.

  If the storage priority of the abnormality display target that has occurred this time is higher (step S3305: YES), the processing for setting the abnormality display area 211 is executed (step S3306). In the setting process of the abnormality display area 211 performed when the affirmative determination is made in step S3305, the current generation is performed in the unit areas 211a to 211d specified as storing the information of the abnormal state having the lowest storage priority. Overwrites the abnormal status information corresponding to the abnormal display target.

  On the other hand, if the value of the abnormality target counter in the main RAM 65 has not reached the maximum value (step S3303: NO), the value of the abnormality target counter is incremented by 1 (step S3307), and then the setting processing of the abnormality display area 211 is performed. Is executed (step S3306). In the setting process, one area is selected from the unit areas 211a to 211d in which the abnormal state information is not stored in the abnormal display area 211, and the abnormal state corresponding to the abnormality display target that has occurred this time in the selected area. The information of is stored.

  In step S3306, if there is only one abnormal condition information stored in the abnormal display area 211, the abnormal condition information is stored in the first unit area 211a. In the case where there are a plurality of pieces of abnormal state information stored in the "n" area, the abnormal state information is stored in order from the area having the smaller value of "n" in the n-th unit areas 211a to 211b.

  In the abnormality setting process, it is determined whether or not a release event of the abnormality display target has occurred (step S3308). For example, it is determined whether or not a command indicating that the lower tray 56a has been fully filled, the absence of the ball in the tank 75 has been released, or that the dispensing device 76 has released a dispensing abnormality has been received from the dispensing-side CPU 92. judge. Also, it is determined whether an abnormality clearing operation has been performed for the occurrence of a radio wave detection abnormality, whether an abnormality clearing operation has been performed for the occurrence of a vibration detection abnormality, or whether an abnormality clearing operation has been performed for a disconnection abnormality. judge.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3308, a process of deleting the abnormal display area 211 is performed (step S3309). In the erasing process, it is specified whether or not the information of the abnormal state corresponding to the abnormal display target that has been canceled this time is stored in any of the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d of the abnormal display area 211. If it is stored, by clearing the stored area to "0", the abnormal state information is deleted. In this case, if there is only one abnormal state information stored in the abnormal display area 211 after the erasure, the abnormal state information is stored in the first unit area 211a. When there are a plurality of pieces of abnormal state information stored in the display area 211, the abnormal state information is stored in the nth unit areas 211a to 211b in order from the area having the smaller value of “n”. Further, the value of the abnormality target counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S3310).

  In the abnormality setting process, it is determined whether or not an operation for starting an abnormality display has occurred (step S3311). The operation for starting the abnormal display is performed by pressing the update button 68b with the gaming machine main body 12 opened forward with respect to the outer frame 11 in a situation where the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is not a changeable state. It is performed by operating.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3311, it is determined whether or not information on one or more abnormal states is stored in the abnormal display area 211 (step S3312). When the information on the abnormal state is not stored, the abnormal display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is not started. Thus, it is possible to prevent the abnormal display from being started even though there is no information on the abnormal state to be informed.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3312, “1” is set in the abnormality display flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S3313). The abnormal display flag cancels the display corresponding to the management result of the game history and displays the display corresponding to the information of the abnormal state stored in the abnormal display area 211 on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the situation is to be performed. It should be noted that a negative determination is made in step S3311 even if an abnormality display start operation is performed in a state where the abnormality display flag is already set to "1".

  After that, the process of setting the display of the management result is executed (step S3314). In the stop setting process, the display of the game history management results on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is temporarily stopped by transmitting a display stop command to the management CPU 112. Upon receiving the display stop command, the management-side CPU 112 stops the execution of the display processing (FIG. 560). However, the management-side CPU 112 does not set the display data that is all “0” data in the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208 even if the display stop command is received. Therefore, until the display data is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208, the display of the management result of the game history at that time is continued on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. You.

  In the abnormality setting process, it is determined whether or not an operation for terminating the abnormality display has occurred (step S3315). The abnormal display ending operation is performed by pressing the reset button 68c with the gaming machine main body 12 opened forward with respect to the outer frame 11 in a situation where the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is not a changeable state. It is performed by operating. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3315, the abnormality display flag in the main RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step S3316). It should be noted that a negative determination is made in step S3315 even if the operation of terminating the abnormal display is performed in a situation where the value of the abnormal display flag is already “0”.

  After that, the cancellation of the display of the management result is executed (step S3317). In the cancellation release processing, the update of the display of the management result of the game history in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is stopped by transmitting the cancellation release command to the management CPU 112. To release. The management-side CPU 112 resumes the execution of the processing for display (FIG. 560) by receiving the cancellation release command. However, the management-side CPU 112 does not set the display data that is all “0” data in the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208 even if the cancellation release command is received. Therefore, until the display data is transmitted from the management-side CPU 112 to the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208, the abnormal display at that time is continued in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Further, the management-side CPU 112 continues to store the history information and calculate various parameters even when the update of the display of the management result of the game history is stopped, and the result of calculating the various parameters is calculated. It is stored in the result memory 131. Therefore, when the state in which the update of the display of the management result of the game history is stopped is released, the display of the management result of the latest game history is immediately displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It will be restarted.

  In the abnormality setting process, if “1” is set in the abnormality display flag of the main RAM 65 (step S3318: YES), an abnormality display process is executed (step S3319). FIG. 569 is a flowchart showing the abnormality display processing.

  First, the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 are turned off (step S3401). Specifically, display data that is all “0” is output to the first and second display ICs 205 and 206. As a result, all the display segments of the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 are turned off, and the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 are not displayed.

  Thereafter, the value of the update timing counter provided in the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S3402). The update timing counter is a counter for specifying by the main CPU 63 that it is time to update the display content of the abnormal display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. If the value of the update timing counter is already “0”, that state is maintained. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the update timing counter is “0” to determine whether or not it is time to update the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 ( Step S3403).

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3403, a process of updating the display target counter provided in the main RAM 65 is executed (step S3404). In this update process, if the current time is the first time of the abnormality display process since the abnormality display flag of the main RAM 65 is set to “1”, the display target counter is set to “0”. The value of the display target counter corresponds to the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d of the abnormal display area 211. Specifically, the value of “0” of the display target counter corresponds to the first unit area 211a. The value of “1” of the display target counter corresponds to the second unit area 211b, the value of “2” of the display target counter corresponds to the third unit area 211c, and “3” of the display target counter. Corresponds to the fourth unit area 211d. In the updating process, when the abnormality display flag of the main RAM 65 is set to “1” this time and the first time of the abnormality display process is not performed, the value of the display target counter is incremented by one.

  After that, it is determined whether or not the abnormal state information is stored in the area corresponding to the current value of the display target counter among the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d (step S3405). Here, as described above, when only one piece of information on the abnormal state is stored, the information on the abnormal state is stored in the first unit area 211a, and a plurality of pieces of information on the abnormal state are stored. In this case, the abnormal state information is stored in the nth unit areas 211a to 211b in the order from the area having the smaller value of “n”. Therefore, if the abnormal state information is not stored in the area corresponding to the current value of the display target counter, the abnormal state information is also stored in the area corresponding to the value larger than the display target counter value. Will not be. If the value of the display target counter after 1 is added exceeds the maximum value of “3”, the corresponding area does not exist in the first place, so that the information of the abnormal state is not stored. .

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3405, the value of the display target counter in the main RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step S3406). Here, it is assumed that all the abnormal states targeted for the abnormal display are canceled in the situation where the abnormal display is being performed. In this case, even if the process for displaying an abnormality is performed, information on an abnormal state is not stored in the abnormality display area 211. In such a situation, a display indicating that the information of the abnormal state is not stored is displayed on the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3405, or if the process of step S3406 is performed, display data of a display target corresponding to the value of the display target counter in the main RAM 65 is read from the main ROM 64 (step S3407). Specifically, the information stored in the area corresponding to the value of the display target counter of the main RAM 65 among the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d of the abnormal display area 211 is read. Then, display data corresponding to the information is read from the main ROM 64. The display data is set in one-to-one correspondence with the abnormal state information, and the display contents of the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 based on the display data are set for each type of abnormal state information. Is different. In addition, there is display data corresponding to the absence of the abnormal state information, and this display data is different from the display data corresponding to the abnormal state information. Therefore, when the information on the abnormal state does not exist, the display contents of the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 are different from the display contents when the information on the abnormal state exists.

  On the other hand, in the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204, the display contents corresponding to the abnormal state information and the display contents corresponding to the absence of the abnormal state information are the third and fourth notification contents. The display contents when the management result of the game history is displayed on the fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 and the display contents of the set values on the fourth notification display device 204 overlap. On the other hand, when displaying the management result of the game history, all of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are in the display state, and the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed. In the state, the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are in the non-display state, and the fourth notification display device 204 is in the display state. When an abnormal display is performed, the first and second notification display devices are set. Since the display devices 201 and 202 are in the non-display state and the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 are in the display state, even if the display contents are overlapped as described above, it corresponds to any situation. It becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to grasp whether the display is made.

  Thereafter, the display of the third notification display device 203 is controlled according to the display data read in step S3407 (step S3408), and the display of the fourth notification display device 204 is controlled (step S3409). In this case, the display device 203 for the third notification and the display device for the fourth notification are used regardless of whether the display corresponding to the information on the abnormal state is performed or the display corresponding to the absence of the information on the abnormal state. Each of the display devices 204 does not enter a non-display state (that is, does not enter a completely unlit state), and is in some display state.

  Thereafter, a value corresponding to 2 seconds is set as a value corresponding to the next update timing in the update timing counter of the main RAM 65 (step S3410).

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  In the configuration in which the management result of the game history is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the display corresponding to the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Done. As a result, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 can be used not only for displaying the management result of the game history but also as a display device for performing a display corresponding to an abnormal state.

  In the case where the display corresponding to the abnormal state is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the pachinko machine 10 does not have the abnormal state, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 A display corresponding to the fact that no abnormal condition has occurred is displayed. Thus, it is possible to clearly specify whether or not the pachinko machine 10 has an abnormal state by checking the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  The period in which the management result of the game history is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and the display corresponding to the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 are performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Is different from the period of time. As a result, by grasping the situation where the display is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, any display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Can be specified.

  When the display corresponding to the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are configured to have a display mode different from a display mode when the management result of the game history is displayed. The display is controlled. Thus, by grasping the display modes of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, which display is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is specified. It becomes possible.

  A plurality of notification display devices 201 to 204 are provided. Thereby, various displays can be performed as the display corresponding to the management result of the game history. In addition, the presence of the plurality of notification display devices 201 to 204 increases the display mode between the case where the management result of the game history is displayed and the case where the display corresponding to the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. It is possible to make them different.

  When the display corresponding to the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 which are not in the non-display state when the management result of the game history is displayed are in the non-display state. Thus, only by checking whether the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 are in the non-display state, the display of the management result of the game history and the display corresponding to the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 are performed. It is possible to clearly specify which of these is being performed by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  When the display corresponding to the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 are in the display state, and the display content is the third in the case of displaying the management result of the game history. , The fourth notification display devices 203, 204. By allowing the display contents on the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 to overlap in this manner, the display of the management result of the game history and the display corresponding to the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 are performed. It is possible not to impose restrictions on the respective display contents when they are performed. Further, even if the display contents on the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 can be overlapped in this way, if the display corresponding to the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the first and second notification devices are displayed. Since the second notification display devices 201 and 202 are in the non-display state, it is possible to specify which display is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  Note that, when the operation of starting the abnormal display is performed in a state where the information of the abnormal state is not stored in the abnormal display area 211, the information of the abnormal state is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 at that time. May be displayed corresponding to the fact that is not stored.

<46th embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the management output process executed by the main CPU 63 is different from that of the thirty-third embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the 33rd embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the above-described thirty-third embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 570 is a flowchart showing a management output process executed by the main CPU 63 in this embodiment.

  First, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the management start flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S3501). The management start flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the situation is such that history information should be stored in the history memory 117. In the present embodiment, the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA after the supply of the operation power to the pachinko machine 10 is started (that is, after the supply of the operation power to the MPU 62 is started) is a management start reference. The history information is not stored in the history memory 117 until the total number of the game balls discharged from the game area PA becomes equal to or more than the number corresponding to the management start reference value until the number becomes equal to or more than the number corresponding to the value. The storage of the history information in the history memory 117 is started. At the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10 or the like, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 may be checked before shipping. At that time, the game balls are put into each of the ball entry units, and the subsequent operation is checked. On the other hand, the history information is not stored in the history memory 117 until the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA after the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 becomes equal to or more than the management start reference value. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the result of entering the ball at the time of the operation check as described above from being stored as history information.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3501, "7" is set to the start-time management counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S3502). The start-time management counter determines which of the seven incoming ball detection sensors 42a to 48a is in a state in which the detection state of the game ball is to be specified when the management start flag is not set to "1". This is a counter specified by the main CPU 63.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the output flag of the main RAM 65 corresponding to the value of the start-time management counter (step S3503). Specifically, when the value of the start-time management counter is “7” and corresponds to the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the first output flag. If the value of the start management counter is "6" and corresponds to the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, it is determined whether or not the second output flag is set to "1". If the value of the counter is "5" and corresponds to the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, it is determined whether or not the third output flag is set to "1". When it is “4” and corresponds to the special power detection sensor 45a, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the fourth output flag, and the value of the start management counter is “3” and the first output flag is “3”. In the case of corresponding to the working port detection sensor 46a, the fifth output flag is set. It is determined whether or not "1" is set. If the value of the start-time management counter is "2" and corresponds to the second working port detection sensor 47a, "1" is set to the sixth output flag. It is determined whether or not the seventh output flag is set to “1” if the value of the start management counter is “1” and corresponds to the out port 24a. . As described above, “1” is set in these first to seventh output flags in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 520).

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3503, the output flag corresponding to the value of the starting management counter is cleared to "0" (step S3504). Thereafter, the value of the number-of-discharges counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3505). The discharge number counter is a counter for specifying the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA by the main CPU 63 in a situation where the management start flag of the main RAM 65 is not set to “1”.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the discharge number counter is equal to or more than the management start reference value (step S3506). Although the management start reference value is set to “300”, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to be smaller than “300” or configured to be larger than “300”. .

  If a negative determination is made in step S3503, or if a negative determination is made in step S3506, the value of the start management counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by one (step S3507). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the start-time management counter after the subtraction of 1 is “0” (step S3508). When a negative determination is made in step S3508, the process returns to step S3503, and when an affirmative determination is made in step S3508, the output processing for management is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if the value of the discharge number counter of the main RAM 65 is equal to or larger than the management start reference value (step S3506: YES), “1” is set to the management start flag of the main RAM 65 (step S3509). Thereafter, a management process is executed (step S3510). Also, when the management start flag is set to “1” and an affirmative determination is made in step S3501, the management process is also executed (step S3510). The processing contents of the management processing are the same as steps S1001 to S1012 of the management output processing (FIG. 530) in the 33rd embodiment.

  According to the above configuration, the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA after the supply of the operation power to the pachinko machine 10 is started (that is, after the supply of the operation power to the MPU 62 is started) is managed. Until the number corresponding to the start reference value or more is reached, the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is equal to or greater than the number corresponding to the management start reference value without storing history information in the history memory 117. In this case, the storage of the history information in the history memory 117 is started. At the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10 or the like, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 may be checked before shipping. At that time, the game balls are put into each of the ball entry units, and the subsequent operation is checked. On the other hand, the history information is not stored in the history memory 117 until the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA after the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 becomes equal to or more than the management start reference value. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the result of entering the ball at the time of the operation check as described above from being stored as history information.

  Here, until the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA after the supply of the operation power to the pachinko machine 10 is started as described above is equal to or more than the number corresponding to the management start reference value, the history ball is used. In the configuration in which the history information is not stored in the memory 117, the management result of the game history during that period cannot be calculated. Therefore, in such a situation, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 may be configured to perform display corresponding to the situation. For example, in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, all the display segments may be set to emit light. Since the display content is not displayed either when displaying the management result of the game history or when displaying the changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed, By checking the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, it is possible to specify whether or not the history information is not stored as described above.

  The setting mode of the information of the management start flag of the main RAM 65 differs depending on whether or not the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed after the supply of the operation power to the pachinko machine 10 is started. It is good also as a structure which does. FIG. 571 is a flowchart showing the main processing in the other mode executed by the main CPU 63. In steps S3601 to S3609, the same processing as steps S101 to S109 of the main processing (FIG. 514) in the 33rd embodiment is executed, and in steps S3611 to S3620, the main processing in the 33rd embodiment (FIG. 514) The same processing as in steps S110 to S119 is executed. On the other hand, in the present alternative embodiment, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3608, the management start flag in the main RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step S3610), and after executing the processing in step S3620, the management start flag in the main RAM 65 is cleared. Is set to "1" (step S3621). According to this configuration, when the processing for newly setting the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is not executed, the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA after the start of the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 Is not stored in the history memory 117 until the value of the pachinko machine 10 is equal to or greater than the management start reference value. When processing for newly setting the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is executed, The history information is stored in the history memory 117 irrespective of the number of game balls discharged after the start of the supply of the operating power. This makes it possible to manage the game history immediately after starting the supply of the operation power to the pachinko machine 10 in a situation where there is a high possibility that the operation check does not correspond to the operation check of the pachinko machine 10 at the shipping stage.

  Further, the history information is stored in the history memory 117 until the total number of the game balls discharged from the game area PA after the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is equal to or more than the management start reference value. Instead of the structure having no history memory 117, an area for storing history information until the total number of game balls reaches the management start reference value or more may be provided separately from the history memory 117. Thereby, it is possible to specify the management result of the game history in the situation.

  Further, the history information is stored in the history memory 117 until the total number of the game balls discharged from the game area PA after the supply of the operation power to the pachinko machine 10 is equal to or more than the management start reference value. A condition may be added as a condition for the occurrence of a situation where no supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started in a situation where history information is not stored in the history memory 117. In this case, when the supply of the operation power to the pachinko machine 10 is started in a situation where the history information is already stored in the history memory 117, the total number of the game balls discharged from the game area PA is determined as the management start reference. The history information is stored in the history memory 117 from the beginning irrespective of whether the value is equal to or greater than the value.

  Further, the history information is stored in the history memory 117 until the total number of the game balls discharged from the game area PA after the supply of the operation power to the pachinko machine 10 is equal to or more than the management start reference value. In addition to or instead of the configuration without the above, when an abnormal state such as a radio wave detection abnormality or a vibration detection abnormality occurs, the history information may not be stored in the history memory 117 until the abnormal state is released. This makes it possible to prevent the history information from being stored for an event that has occurred in a situation where the state is abnormal.

  Further, the history information is stored in the history memory 117 until the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA after the supply of the operation power to the pachinko machine 10 is equal to or more than the management start reference value. In addition to or in place of the non-existing configuration, the history information may not be stored in the history memory 117 when the gaming machine body 12 or the front door frame 14 is open. As a result, it is possible to prevent the history information from being stored for an event that has occurred while the gaming machine body 12 or the front door frame 14 is open.

<47th embodiment>
The present embodiment is different from the above-mentioned thirty-third embodiment in the execution subject of the processing for managing the game history. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the 33rd embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the above-described thirty-third embodiment is basically omitted.

  In the thirty-third embodiment, the MPU 62 is provided with the management IC 66. However, in this embodiment, the MPU 62 is not provided with the management IC 66. Instead of providing the management IC 66, in the present embodiment, processing for managing the game history is executed by the main CPU 63. Further, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 63 executes various controls while distinguishing between specific control and non-specific control. Specifically, the control related to the management of the game history is non-specific control, and the control other than the non-specific control including the control for advancing the game based on the game operation by the player is the specific control.

  In detail, the specific control includes all the control by the main process (FIG. 514) executed when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. In this embodiment, the recognition process (step S111), the data output process (step S112), and the setting value update signal output process (step S119) of the 33rd embodiment are executed. Not done. Also in this embodiment, the timer interrupt process is executed periodically so as to interrupt the processes of steps S113 to S116 in the main process (FIG. 514). Among them, the processes other than the management process described later are all included in the specific control. Part of the management processing is also included in the specific control.

  FIG. 572 is an explanatory diagram for describing a setting mode of programs and data in the main ROM 64. Corresponding to the fact that the control executed by the main CPU 63 is distinguished between the specific control and the non-specific control, as shown in FIG. 572, the main ROM 64 also executes a specific control program and a specific control program. The addresses of the areas where the data and the non-specific control program and the non-specific control data are stored are clearly distinguished.

  Specifically, programs for specific control are collectively stored in an area of each continuous address in the range of addresses X (1) to X (k + 2). Further, addresses X (k + 3) to X (k + 5) which are continuous with addresses X (1) to X (k + 2) are addresses of unused areas in which no data is stored. Data for specific control is collectively stored in the area of each continuous address in the range of k + 6) to X (m + 2). Addresses X (m + 3) to X (m + 5) which are continuous with addresses X (k + 6) to X (m + 2) are addresses of unused areas where no data is stored. Non-specific control programs are collectively stored in the area of each continuous address in the range of (m + 6) to X (n + 2). Further, addresses X (n + 3) to X (n + 5) which are continuous with addresses X (m + 6) to X (n + 2) are addresses of unused areas in which no data is stored, and subsequently, addresses X ( Data for non-specific control is collectively stored in the area of each continuous address within the range of (n + 6) to X (p + 2). The relationship between the program and the data and the address as described above is set in both the physical address in the main ROM 64 and the logical address on the memory map recognized by the main CPU 63.

  As described above, the program for specific control and data for specific control, and the program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control, regardless of the execution order of the processing for executing the corresponding control, Since the information is stored in the area of the address in the different range, for example, when checking only the program for specific control and the data for specific control, the address where the program for specific control and the data for specific control are stored It is sufficient to check only the area of the range. For example, when checking only the non-specific control program and the non-specific control data, the address where the non-specific control program and the non-specific control data are stored. You only need to check the area of the range. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently perform the work of checking the program and data separately for the specific control and the non-specific control. In addition, it is possible to efficiently perform the work of correcting the program and the data separately for the specific control and the non-specific control.

  Any data is stored between the address range of the area where the specific control program and the specific control data are stored and the address range of the area where the non-specific control program and the non-specific control data are stored. By setting an address range of an unused area that has not been set, it becomes easy to grasp the boundary between the address range for specific control and the address range for non-specific control at the time of a check operation.

  In each of the address range for the specific control and the address range for the non-specific control, the program and the data are stored in the address areas of the different ranges irrespective of the execution order of the processing for executing the corresponding control. By doing so, it is possible to efficiently perform the work of checking separately for programs and data. Further, since the address range of an unused area where no data is stored is set between the address range of the area where the program is stored and the address range of the area where the data is stored, It becomes easy to grasp the boundary between the address range and the data address range in the checking operation.

  FIG. 573 is an explanatory diagram for describing a setting mode of each area in the main RAM 65. Corresponding to the fact that the control executed by the main CPU 63 is distinguished between the specific control and the non-specific control, the work area 221 for the specific control and the specific control The address range of the stack area 222 for non-specific control and the address range of the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are clearly distinguished.

  Specifically, an area of each continuous address within the range of addresses Y (1) to Y (r + 2) is set as a work area 221 for specific control. Addresses Y (r + 3) to Y (r + 5) that are continuous with addresses Y (1) to Y (r + 2) are addresses of unused areas, and subsequently, addresses Y (r + 6) to Y (s + 2). The area of each continuous address within the range of ()) is set as the stack area 222 for specific control. Addresses Y (s + 3) to Y (s + 5) that are continuous with addresses Y (r + 6) to Y (s + 2) are addresses of unused areas, and subsequently, addresses Y (s + 6) to Y (t + 2). The area of each continuous address within the range of ()) is set as a work area 223 for non-specific control. Addresses Y (t + 3) to Y (t + 5) that are continuous from addresses Y (s + 6) to Y (t + 2) are addresses of unused areas, and subsequently, addresses Y (t + 6) to Y (u + 2). The area of each continuous address within the range of ()) is set as a stack area 224 for non-specific control. The relationship between each area and the address as described above is set in both the physical address in the main RAM 65 and the logical address on the memory map recognized by the main CPU 63.

  As described above, since the work area 221 for the specific control and the work area 223 for the non-specific control are separately set, the main CPU 63 executes the specific control and the non-specific control. Thus, when executing various calculations, different areas of the main RAM 65 are used. As a result, when one of the specific control and the non-specific control is executed, it is possible to make it difficult to cause an event that information required in the main RAM 65 is erased on the other. Incidentally, when writing information to each of the work areas 221 and 223 and reading information from each of the work areas 221 and 223, the main CPU 63 issues a load instruction.

  Since the stack area 222 for the specific control and the stack area 224 for the non-specific control are set separately, the main CPU 63 performs both the specific control and the non-specific control. Different areas of the main RAM 65 are used when saving the information stored in the register of the side CPU 63 and when storing the information of the return address in the program. Thus, when the information stored in the register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the situation where one of the specific control and the non-specific control is being executed, and when the information of the return address on the program is stored, the other is used. It is possible to make it difficult to cause an event that information to be deleted is erased. Incidentally, when writing information to each of the stack areas 222 and 224, a push command is performed by the main CPU 63, and when reading information from each of the stack areas 222 and 224, a pop command is performed by the main CPU 63. When reading information from each of the stack areas 222 and 224, the order of writing to the stack areas 222 and 224 is a target to be read first after the subsequent information.

  Here, when the main CPU 63 executes a process corresponding to the specific control, the main CPU 63 can write information into the work area 221 for the specific control and the stack area 222 for the specific control, Information can be read from the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control. On the other hand, when the main CPU 63 executes the processing corresponding to the specific control, the main CPU 63 can read information from the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control. It is not possible to write information to the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control. This makes it possible to prevent the information used in the process corresponding to the non-specific control from being accidentally erased in the situation where the process corresponding to the specific control is being executed.

  When the main CPU 63 executes a process corresponding to the non-specific control, the main CPU 63 can write information into the work area 223 for the non-specific control and the stack area 224 for the non-specific control. At the same time, information can be read from the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control. On the other hand, when the main CPU 63 executes the process corresponding to the non-specific control, the main CPU 63 can read information from the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control, Writing information to the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 is not possible. This makes it possible to prevent information used in the process corresponding to the specific control from being accidentally erased in the situation where the process corresponding to the non-specific control is being executed.

  The backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. The backup power is stored in the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, the non-specific control To the entire work area 223 and the stack area 224 for non-specific control. As a result, the information stored in the specific control work area 221, the specific control stack area 222, the non-specific control work area 223, and the non-specific control stack area 224 are stored in the power-off state of the pachinko machine 10. Even after that, the data is retained while the backup power is supplied.

  Next, a timer interrupt process executed by the main CPU 63 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The timer interrupt process is executed periodically (for example, every 4 milliseconds) while the processes of steps S113 to S116 are being executed in the main process (FIG. 514), as in the thirty-third embodiment. The program corresponding to the timer interrupt process is set as a program for specific control.

  In steps S3701 to S3718, the same processes as those in steps S301 to S318 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 516) in the thirty-third embodiment are executed. These processes are executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for specific control and data for specific control. In step S3719 in the timer interrupt process, a management process is executed. When the management process is executed, a subroutine program corresponding to the management process set in the specific control program is executed. The information for specifying the return address of the timer interrupt processing in is written into the stack area 222 for specific control by a push command. When the management process is completed, information for specifying the return address is read by the pop instruction, and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing program indicated by the return address.

  FIG. 575 is a flowchart showing the management process. The processing of steps S3801 to S3805 in the management processing is executed by the main CPU 63 using the specific control program and the specific control data.

  First, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 574) (step S3801). This prevents a timer interrupt process (FIG. 574), which is a process corresponding to the specific control, from being interrupted and activated in the middle of a later-described management execution process, which is a process corresponding to the non-specific control. Becomes possible.

  After that, as “PUSH PSW”, the information of the flag register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control by a push command (step S3802). The flag register includes a carry flag, a zero flag, a P / V flag, a sign flag, a half carry flag, and the like, and the information in the flag register changes depending on the execution results of an operation instruction, a rotate instruction, an input / output instruction, and the like. By saving such flag register information before the subroutine program corresponding to the management execution process is started, the information of the flag register in a state before the subroutine call or the subroutine is changed after the start of the subroutine is changed. It is possible to evacuate the stack area 222 for specific control. The information amount of the flag register is 1 byte.

  Thereafter, the management execution process is started by reading out a subroutine program corresponding to the management execution process set in the non-specific control program (step S3803). In this case, information for specifying the return address of the management process after the execution of the management execution process is written in the stack area 222 for specific control by a push command. Then, when the management execution processing is completed, information for specifying the return address is read by the pop instruction, and the program returns to the management processing program indicated by the return address.

  When the program returns to the management processing program after the execution of the management execution processing, the information of the flag register saved in the specific control stack area 222 in step S3802 by the pop instruction as “POP PSW” is used as the main CPU 63. (Step S3804). Thus, the information of the flag register of the main CPU 63 returns to the information at the time when step S3802 was executed. That is, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 returns to the information for executing the specific control.

  Thereafter, interruption permission is set to switch from a state in which the generation of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 574) is prohibited to a state in which the generation is permitted (step S3805). As a result, new execution of the timer interrupt processing becomes possible.

  FIG. 576 is a flowchart showing the management execution process. The processing of steps S3901 to S3915 in the management execution processing is executed by the main CPU 63 using the non-specific control program and the non-specific control data.

  First, as "LD SP, Y (u + 2)", Y (u + 2) is set as a fixed address at the start of the non-specific control in the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 by a load instruction (step S3901). The stack pointer is an area in which address information for specifying the storage area in the stack areas 222 and 224 to which information is to be written by the push command is specified by the main CPU 63. Each time a push instruction is performed, the information of the stack pointer is updated to the information of the address of the storage area to be written in the next order, and every time a pop instruction is performed, the information of the stack pointer is updated to the information of the previous order. Is updated to the information of the address of the storage area. When the non-specific control stack area 224 is used, information to be stored is stored from the storage area of the last address in the non-specific control stack area 224, and each time the information to be stored is added. Then, the storage area of the storage destination is changed toward the first address side in the stack area 224 for non-specific control. Therefore, in step S3901, the information of the last address in the non-specific control stack area 224 is set in the stack pointer. The storage of information from the storage area of the last address to the storage area of the first address is the same for the stack area 222 for specific control.

  Incidentally, in the case where a push instruction is additionally executed for both the stack area 222 for specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control even though information is set in all storage areas, All areas of the main RAM 65 are cleared to "0" assuming that an abnormality has occurred in the storage processing. This makes it possible to prevent the game from proceeding as it is despite the occurrence of an abnormality in the storage process.

After that, the information of the WA register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the WA buffer set in the work area 223 for non-specific control by a load instruction as “LD (_WABUF), WA” (step S3902). In addition, the information of the BC register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the BC buffer set in the non-specific control work area 223 by a load instruction as “LD (_BCBUF), BC” (step S3903). Also, "LD
(_DEBUF), DE ”, the information of the DE register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the DE buffer set in the work area 223 for non-specific control by a load instruction (step S3904). Also, the information of the HL register of the main CPU 63 is saved to the HL buffer set in the non-specific control work area 223 by a load instruction as “LD (_HLBUF), HL” (step S3905). In addition, the information of the IX register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the IX buffer set in the non-specific control work area 223 by a load instruction as “LD (_IXBUF), IX” (step S3906). Also, the information of the IY register of the main CPU 63 is saved to the IY buffer set in the non-specific control work area 223 by a load instruction as “LD (_IYBUF), IY” (step S3907).

  The registers of the main CPU 63 include various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers in addition to the flag registers described above. In this case, in step S3902 to step S3907, information of WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register, which are some of these various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers, Is saved in the corresponding buffer in the work area 223 for non-specific control. The information amount of each of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register is 2 bytes.

  These WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register are registers used in a check process (step S3908) corresponding to non-specific control. By saving the information set in such registers in the work area 223 for non-specific control prior to execution of the check processing (step S3908), the information of these registers used in the specific control is saved in the non-specific control. Can be evacuated before is started. Therefore, even if these registers are overwritten during the non-specific control, the information saved in the non-specific control work area 223 is returned to these registers when the non-specific control is terminated, so that the state of these registers is restored. Can be returned to a state corresponding to the specific control before the non-specific control is executed.

  Further, instead of saving all information of various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers to the work area 223 for non-specific control, the WA to be used in the check processing corresponding to the non-specific control is used. By selectively saving the information of the register, the BC register, the DE register, the HL register, the IX register, and the IY register to the work area 223 for non-specific control, the information of the register is saved in the work area 223 for non-specific control. This makes it possible to reduce the capacity to be secured. Therefore, it is possible to save the register information as described above while securing a large capacity of the non-specific control work area 223 that can be used in the check processing. Of course, among the various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers in the main CPU 63, registers other than the WA register, the BC register, the DE register, the HL register, the IX register, and the IY register correspond to the non-specific control. The information set before the process to be performed is started is stored and held until the process corresponding to the non-specific control ends and the process corresponding to the specific control is restarted.

  Also, by saving the register information in the non-specific control work area 223 instead of in the non-specific control stack area 224, the capacity of the non-specific control stack area 224 can be reduced accordingly. It becomes possible. Further, when the stack area 224 for non-specific control is used, as described above, the information writing order is read first after the subsequent information, and thus the information reading order is temporarily shifted due to some kind of noise or the like. If this happens, all information of the subsequent reading order will be restored to a different register. The probability of occurrence of such an event increases as the amount of information saved in the non-specific control stack area 224 increases. On the other hand, by saving the register information to the non-specific control work area 223, it is possible to prevent the above-described event from occurring even when there is a large amount of information to be saved. .

  After executing the processing of steps S3902 to S3907, a check processing is executed (step S3908). When the check processing is executed, a subroutine program corresponding to the check processing set in the non-specific control program is executed. Information for specifying the return address of the execution processing is written to the non-specific control stack area 224 by the push command. When the check processing is completed, information for specifying the return address is read by the pop instruction, and the program returns to the management execution processing program indicated by the return address. Details of the check processing will be described later.

  After executing the check processing, Y (r + α) is set as “LD SP, Y (r + α)” as a fixed address at the time of returning to the specific control in the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 by a load instruction (step S3909). ). The address of Y (r + α) is set as an address between Y (r + 8) and Y (s) in the stack area 222 for specific control.

  Immediately before the subroutine of the management execution process is executed in step S3803 of the management process (FIG. 575), the amount of information stored in the specific control stack area 222 is always constant, and accordingly, the main The information of the stack pointer of the side CPU 63 (that is, the value of the stack pointer) is constant. In this case, the information stored in the specific control stack area 222 includes, for example, information on the return address of the management process (FIG. 575) after the management execution process (FIG. 576) ends, and the management process (FIG. 575). Information on the return address of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 574) after the end of (FIG. 575). The certain information of the stack pointer is Y (r + α). Therefore, when the check process as the process corresponding to the non-specific control is completed and the process returns to the process corresponding to the specific control, the constant information Y (r + α) is set in the stack pointer of the main CPU 63. This makes it possible to restore the information of the stack pointer to the information immediately before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started. By setting the fixed information in the stack pointer in this way, by returning the information of the stack pointer to the information immediately before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started, the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is performed. It is not necessary to save the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 corresponding to the specific control to the main RAM 65 before starting the process. Therefore, the processing load can be reduced, and it is not necessary to secure an area for the evacuation in the main RAM 65.

  After that, the information saved in the WA buffer of the non-specific control work area 223 is overwritten into the WA register of the main CPU 63 by a load instruction as “LD WA, (_WABUF)” (step S3910). In addition, the information saved in the BC buffer of the non-specific control work area 223 is overwritten in the BC register of the main CPU 63 as “LD BC, (_BCBUF)” by a load instruction (step S3911). In addition, the information saved in the DE buffer of the non-specific control work area 223 is overwritten in the DE register of the main CPU 63 as “LD DE, (_DEBUF)” by a load instruction (step S3912). Also, as the “LD HL, (_HLBUF)”, the information saved in the HL buffer of the non-specific control work area 223 is overwritten on the HL register of the main CPU 63 by a load instruction (step S3913). In addition, the information saved in the IX buffer of the non-specific control work area 223 is overwritten in the IX register of the main CPU 63 as “LD IX, (_IXBUF)” by a load instruction (step S3914). In addition, as the “LD IY, (_IYBUF)”, the information saved in the IY buffer of the non-specific control work area 223 is overwritten in the IY register of the main CPU 63 by a load instruction (step S3915). By executing the processing of steps S3910 to S3915, processing corresponding to the non-specific control of each information of the WA register, the BC register, the DE register, the HL register, the IX register, and the IY register of the main CPU 63 is started. It is possible to return to the information corresponding to the specific control just before.

  Here, when the process corresponding to the non-specific control is executed, the information stored in the flag register and the various registers of the main CPU 63 is not saved in the main RAM 65 when the process corresponding to the specific control is restarted. . As a result, there is no need to secure storage areas for saving the information in the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control.

  Further, when the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is executed, the information stored in the flag register and the various registers of the main CPU 63 indicates that the processing corresponding to the non-specific control after returning to the processing corresponding to the specific control. This information is not used when it is restarted. In other words, the information necessary for a plurality of times of the processing corresponding to the non-specific control executed with the processing corresponding to the specific control interposed therebetween is the work area 223 for the non-specific control or the stack area for the non-specific control. 224, and are not stored in the flag register and various registers of the main CPU 63. Therefore, even if the information stored in the flag register and various registers of the main CPU 63 is not saved in the main RAM 65 when the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is executed, the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is executed. No problem arises.

  Next, a check process executed by calling a subroutine program in step S3908 will be described. In the check process, a process for collecting information on the game history, a process for deriving a management result of the game history, and a process for notifying the management result are executed. In other words, the process for collecting the game history information, the process for deriving the management result of the game history, and the process for notifying the management result are executed as processes corresponding to the non-specific control.

  Prior to the description of the check processing, the contents of various areas 231 to 234 of the non-specific control work area 223 used for managing the game history will be described. FIG. 577 is an explanatory diagram for describing various areas 231 to 234 of the non-specific control work area 223 used for managing the game history.

  The work area 223 for non-specific control includes a normal counter area 231, an open / close execution mode counter area 232, and a high frequency support mode counter area 233. In each of these areas 231 to 233, general winning counters 231a, 232a, 233a, special power winning counters 231b, 232b, 233b, first operation counters 231c, 232c, 233c, second operation counters 231d, 232d, 233d, and Out counters 231e, 232e, and 233e are provided. The general winning counters 231a, 232a, and 233a are counters for counting the number of game balls entering the general winning opening 31 from a predetermined measurement start timing. The special power prize counters 231b, 232b, 233b are counters for counting the number of game balls entering the special power prize device 32 from a predetermined measurement start timing. The first operation counters 231c, 232c, 233c are counters for measuring the number of game balls entering the first operation port 33 from a predetermined measurement start trigger. The second operation counters 231d, 232d, and 233d are counters for measuring the number of game balls entering the second operation port 34 from a predetermined measurement start trigger. The out counters 231e, 232e, 233e are counters for counting the number of game balls entering the out port 24a from a predetermined measurement start trigger.

  Each of the counters 231a to 231e of the normal counter area 231 is a target entry section 24a, which is a target in a situation where the front door frame 14 is in a closed state and is not in either the open / close execution mode or the high frequency support mode. It is used to measure the number of game balls entered in 31 to 34. Each of the counters 232a to 232e in the opening / closing execution mode counter area 232 enters the target ball entry section 24a, 31 to 34 in a situation where the front door frame 14 is in the closed state and in the opening / closing execution mode. It is used to measure the number of balls played. Each of the counters 233a to 233e in the high-frequency support mode counter area 233 is a target entry section 24a, 31 to 34 in a situation in which the front door frame 14 is in a closed state and in a high-frequency support mode. It is used to count the number of game balls that have entered the ball.

  Note that the situation where the front door frame 14 is in the open state is excluded from the measurement target because the game balls enter the ball entry units 24a and 31 to 34 with the front door frame 14 opened. This is for excluding the number of incoming balls in the case of being performed from the measurement target. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration in which the front door frame 14 is in an open state and a configuration in which the front door frame 14 is in a closed state may be a measurement target.

  In the work area 223 for non-specific control, an operation result storage area 234 is provided in addition to the normal counter area 231, the open / close execution mode counter area 232, and the high frequency support mode counter area 233. The calculation result storage area 234 is an area for storing information of a management result of the game history calculated using the normal counter area 231, the open / close execution mode counter area 232, and the high frequency support mode counter area 233. . The information on the management result of the game history stored in the calculation result storage area 234 is stored and held until the information on the management result of the game history is newly calculated and the newly calculated information is overwritten.

  FIG. 578 is a flowchart showing a check process executed by calling a subroutine program in step S3908. The processing of steps S4001 to S4008 in the check processing, including the processing of the subroutine, is executed by the main CPU 63 using the non-specific control program and the non-specific control data. When the processing of the subroutine is executed, the information of the return address after the execution of the processing of the subroutine is written to the storage area corresponding to the current value of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the non-specific control stack area 224. At the same time, the value of the stack pointer is updated to the address information of the storage area to be stored in the next order. When the processing of the subroutine is completed, the information of the return address is read out from the storage area corresponding to the value of the current order of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 and corresponds to the information of the return address. Upon returning to the program, the value of the stack pointer is updated to the information of the address of the storage area from which the information of the return address is read.

  In the checking process, when the front door frame 14 is in the open state (step S4001: YES), the normal ball entry management process (step S4004), the ball entry management process in the open / close execution mode (step S4005), and the high frequency The result calculation process (step S4007) and the display process (step S4008), which will be described later, are executed without executing any of the ball entry management processes (step S4006) in the support mode. Since the game area PA is formed by the space defined by the back surface of the window panel 52 provided on the front door frame 14 and the front surface of the game board 24, when the front door frame 14 is opened. Even if the game area PA is opened forward and a game ball is fired toward the game area PA in that situation, the game ball cannot flow down the game area PA normally. Further, the case where a game ball enters the ball entry portions 24a and 31 to 34 in a state where the front door frame 14 is in an open state is determined by a game hall manager for maintenance and elimination of trouble. This is a case where the front door frame 14 is in an open state and game balls enter due to maintenance or the like. Since such a ball entry of a game ball is not a ball entry of a game ball in a normal game execution situation, there is no need to manage such a ball entry of a game ball. Therefore, in the checking process, if the front door frame 14 is in the open state as described above, none of the processes in steps S4004 to S4006 is executed.

  If the front door frame 14 is in the closed state and is not in either the open / close execution mode or the high-frequency support mode (step S4001 to step S4003: NO), the normal ball entry management process is executed (step S4004). When the front door frame 14 is in the closed state and is in the open / close execution mode (step S4001: NO, step S4002: YES), a ball entry management process in the open / close execution mode is executed (step S4005). When the front door frame 14 is in the closed state and in the high-frequency support mode (step S4001: NO, step S4003: YES), the ball entry management process in the high-frequency support mode is executed (step S4006).

  FIG. 579 is a flowchart showing the normal ball entry management process in step S4004.

  When it is determined that one game ball is detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a (step S4101: YES), that is, the signal received from the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. When it is confirmed that the game has been changed, when it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a (step S4103: YES), ie, the signal received from the second winning opening detection sensor 43a. Has been switched from the LOW level to the HI level, or when it has been determined that one game ball has been detected by the third winning opening detection sensor 44a (step S4105: YES), ie, the third winning opening When it is confirmed that the signal received from the detection sensor 44a has been switched from the LOW level to the HI level, the general input for normal operation is performed. The value of the counter 231a is incremented by 1 (step S4102, step S4104, step S4106).

  In the case of the ball entry management process in the opening / closing execution mode, the value of the general prize counter 232a for the opening / closing execution mode is incremented by 1 as a process corresponding to steps S4102, S4104, and S4106, and the entry in the high frequency support mode is performed. In the case of the ball management processing, the value of the general winning counter 233a for the high frequency support mode is incremented by 1 as processing corresponding to steps S4102, S4104 and S4106. Also, in the ball entry detection process (step S3709) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 574) executed as a process corresponding to the specific control, the detection results of the first to third winning opening detection sensors 42a to 44a are monitored. When it is determined that one of the first to third winning opening detection sensors 42a to 44a detects one game ball, a process for paying out the number of game balls corresponding to the general winning opening 31 is performed. Execute

  When it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the special power detection sensor 45a (step S4107: YES), it has been confirmed that the signal received from the special power detection sensor 45a has been switched from the LOW level to the HI level. In this case, the value of the normal special power winning counter 231b is incremented by 1 (step S4108).

  If the ball entry management process is in the opening / closing execution mode, the value of the special power winning counter 232b for the opening / closing execution mode is incremented by 1 as a process corresponding to step S4108, and if the ball entry management process is in the high frequency support mode. As a process corresponding to step S4108, the value of the special power winning counter 233b for the high frequency support mode is incremented by one. In addition, the detection result of the special power detection sensor 45a is also monitored in the incoming ball detection process (step S3709) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 574) executed as the process corresponding to the specific control. If it is determined that a game ball has been detected, a process for paying out the number of game balls corresponding to the special winning prize device 32 is executed, and a process for specifying an end timing of the round game is executed.

  When it is determined that one game ball is detected by the first operating port detection sensor 46a (step S4109: YES), that is, the signal received from the first operating port detection sensor 46a is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. If the change is confirmed, the value of the normal first operation counter 231c is incremented by 1 (step S4110).

  If the ball entry management process is in the open / close execution mode, the value of the first operation counter 232c for the open / close execution mode is incremented by 1 as a process corresponding to step S4110, and the ball entry management process is in the high frequency support mode. For example, as a process corresponding to step S4110, the value of the first operation counter 233c for the high frequency support mode is incremented by one. The detection result of the first working port detection sensor 46a is also monitored in the ball entry detection processing (step S3709) of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 574) executed as processing corresponding to the specific control, and the first working port detection sensor If it is determined at 46a that one game ball has been detected, a process for paying out the number of game balls corresponding to the first operation port 33 is executed, and at the same time, acquisition of special figure suspension information is performed. Execute the process to identify the trigger.

  When it is determined that one game ball is detected by the second operating port detection sensor 47a (step S4111: YES), that is, the signal received from the second operating port detection sensor 47a is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. When the change is confirmed, the value of the normal second operation counter 231d is incremented by 1 (step S4112).

  If the ball entry management process is in the open / close execution mode, the value of the second operation counter 232d for the open / close execution mode is incremented by 1 as a process corresponding to step S4112, and the ball entry management process is in the high frequency support mode. For example, as a process corresponding to step S4112, the value of the second operation counter 233d for the high frequency support mode is incremented by one. Also, in the ball entry detection process (step S3709) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 574) executed as a process corresponding to the specific control, the detection result of the second operation port detection sensor 47a is monitored, and the second operation port detection sensor If it is determined at 47a that one game ball has been detected, a process for paying out the number of game balls corresponding to the second operation port 34 is executed and at the same time, the acquisition of the reservation information for the special figure Execute the process to identify the trigger.

  When it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the out-mouth detection sensor 48a (step S4113: YES), that is, the signal received from the out-mouth detection sensor 48a has been switched from the LOW level to the HI level. If confirmed, the value of the normal out counter 231e is incremented by 1 (step S4114).

  If the ball entry management process is in the open / close execution mode, the value of the open / close execution mode out counter 232e is incremented by 1 as a process corresponding to step S4114. As a process corresponding to S4114, the value of the out counter 233e for the high frequency support mode is incremented by one. Also, in the incoming ball detection process (step S3709) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 574) executed as the process corresponding to the specific control, the detection result of the out-mouth detection sensor 48a is not monitored.

  By executing the processes of steps S4004 to S4006 as described above, the number of game balls entering the general winning opening 31 is measured using the general winning counters 231a, 232a, 233a, and the special electric winning device 32 The number of game balls entering the first operating port 33 is measured using the special power winning counters 231b, 232b, 233b, and the number of game balls entering the first operating port 33 is determined using the first operating counters 231c, 232c, 233c. The number of game balls entering the second operation port 34 is measured using the second operation counters 231d, 232d, 233d, and the number of game balls entering the out port 24a is determined by the out counter 231e. It is measured using 232e and 233e. This allows the main CPU 63 to grasp the history of the ball entry into each of the ball entry sections 24a and 31 to 34. Further, since the normal counter area 231, the open / close execution mode counter area 232, and the high-frequency support mode counter area 233 are separately provided, it is possible to determine whether the open / close execution mode or the high-frequency support mode is neither. The main CPU 63 can recognize the history of the ball entry to each of the ball entry units 24a and 31 to 34 by distinguishing between the situation of the open / close execution mode and the situation of the high frequency support mode.

  Returning to the description of the check process (FIG. 578), when an affirmative determination is made in step S4001, when the process of step S4004 is executed, when the process of step S4005 is executed, or when the process of step S4006 is executed, A result calculation process is executed in S4007, and a display process is executed in step S4008.

  FIG. 580 is a flowchart showing the result calculation processing in step S4007.

  First, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the management start flag provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control (step S4201). The management start flag is a flag used by the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not it is a situation to collect the game history for calculating the management result of the game history. In the present embodiment, when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started for the first time after the manufacture of the pachinko machine 10 (that is, when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is started), the game discharged from the game area PA Until the total number of balls becomes equal to or more than the number corresponding to the management start reference value, the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA without executing the collection of the game history for calculating the management result of the game history When the number is equal to or more than the number corresponding to the management start reference value, the collection of the game history for calculating the management result of the game history is executed. At the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10 or the like, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 may be checked before shipping. At that time, the game balls are put into each of the ball entry units, and the subsequent operation is checked. On the other hand, a game for calculating the management result of the game history until the total number of the game balls discharged from the game area PA after the supply of the operation power to the pachinko machine 10 becomes equal to or more than the management start reference value. By not performing history collection, it is possible to prevent a result of entering a ball at the time of the operation check as described above from being collected as a game history for calculating a management result of the game history. Become.

  Here, when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started for the first time after the manufacture of the pachinko machine 10 (that is, when the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 is started), the value of the management start flag is “0”. It has become. In this case, the values of the counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231, the values of the counters 232a to 232e in the open / close execution mode counter area 232, and the values of the counters 233a to 233e in the high frequency support mode counter area 233. Is also “0”. On the other hand, when the value of the management start flag is “1”, the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and then, when the backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65, the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is Is started, the value of the management start flag remains “1”. In this case, the values of the counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231, the values of the counters 232a to 232e in the open / close execution mode counter area 232, and the values of the counters 233a to 233e in the high frequency support mode counter area 233. Also, the state before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped is maintained. With the above configuration, when the value of the management start flag is “0”, the value of each counter 231 a to 231 e of the normal counter area 231, the value of each counter 232 a to 232 e of the open / close execution mode counter area 232, Also, the values of the counters 233a to 233e of the counter area 233 for the high frequency support mode are also “0”.

  Incidentally, when the clear processing of the main RAM 65 is executed in step S105 or step S117 in the main processing (FIG. 514), the target of the clear processing is a work area 221 for specific control and a stack for specific control. The work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are excluded from the target of the clear processing. Thus, the manager of the gaming hall cannot intentionally clear the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control to “0”.

  Further, the main CPU 63 confirms whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control in a timer interrupt process (FIG. 574) described later. Is confirmed, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control may be cleared to "0". Thus, when an abnormality occurs in the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control, initialization can be performed. In addition, when an abnormality occurs in the work area 223 for non-specific control in this configuration, the work area 223 for non-specific control is cleared to “0” without clearing the stack area 224 for non-specific control to “0”. When an abnormality occurs in the non-specific control stack area 224, the non-specific control work area 223 is cleared to "0" without clearing the non-specific control work area 223 to "0". Is also good. Further, even if an abnormality occurs in the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control, the calculation result storage area 234 may be excluded from the target of “0” clear.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4201, the values of the respective counters 231a to 231e of the normal counter area 231, the values of the respective counters 232a to 232e of the open / close execution mode counter area 232, and the values of the high frequency support mode counter area 233 will be described. The total number is calculated by summing all the values of the counters 233a to 233e (step S4202). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated total number is larger than the management start reference value “300” (step S4203).

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S4203, “1” is set to the management start flag of the work area 223 for non-specific control (step S4204). The counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231, the counters 232a to 232e in the open / close execution mode counter area 232, and the counters 233a to 233e in the high frequency support mode counter area 233 are all cleared to "0". (Step S4205). As a result, after the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started (that is, after the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 is started), the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is equal to the management start reference value. , All the information of the game history collected until the number of game histories becomes equal to or more than the number corresponding to. Therefore, the collection of the game history for calculating the management result of the game history until the total number of the game balls discharged from the game area PA becomes equal to or more than the management start reference value after the supply of the operation power to the pachinko machine 10 is started. Can be prevented from being executed.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S4201, the calculation processing of the total number is executed in the same manner as in step S4202 (step S4206). That is, the values of the counters 231a to 231e of the normal counter area 231, the values of the counters 232a to 232e of the open / close execution mode counter area 232, and the values of the counters 233a to 233e of the high frequency support mode counter area 233 are set. The total number is calculated by summing all of them. Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated total number is equal to or larger than the calculation reference number “6000” (step S4207).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S4207, arithmetic processing of various parameters is performed (step S4208). Specifically, the values of the various counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 are K61 to K65, the values of the various counters 232a to 232e in the open / close execution mode counter area 232 are K71 to K75, When the values of the various counters 233a to 233e in the counter area 233 are K81 to K85, the following 61st to 68th parameters are calculated.
The 61st parameter: the total number of game balls to be paid out (“K61 + K71 + K81” × “the number of prize balls for winning in the general winning opening 31” + “K62 + K72 + K82” × “the number of prize balls for winning in the special prize winning device 32” + “K63 + K73 + K83” “× the number of winning balls for winning in the first operating port 33” + “K64 + K74 + K84” × “the number of winning balls for winning in the second operating port 34”) / the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA ( Ratio of K61 + K62 + K63 + K64 + K65 + K71 + K72 + K73 + K74 + K75 + K81 + K82 + K83 + K84 + K85) 62nd parameter: Total number of game balls to be paid out in normal time (K61 × “Number of prize balls for winning to general winning opening 31” + K62 × “Number of prize balls for special prize winning device 32 to K to the special power prize device 32”) × “Number of winning balls for winning in the first operating port 33” + K64 × “Number of winning balls for winning in the second operating port 34”) / Total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA in the normal state (K61 + K62 + K63 + K64 + K65) ) Ratio / the 63rd parameter: the total number of game balls to be paid out in the open / close execution mode (K71 × “the number of prize balls for winning into the general winning opening 31” + K72 × “the number of prize balls for winning to the special power prize device 32”) + K73 × “the number of winning balls for winning the first operating port 33” + K74 × “the number of winning balls for winning the second operating port 34”) / Total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA in the open / close execution mode Ratio of the number (K71 + K72 + K73 + K74 + K75). Sixty-fourth parameter: the total number of game balls to be paid out in the high frequency support mode ( 81 × “Number of prize balls for winning in the general winning opening 31” + K82 × “Number of prize balls for winning in the special electric winning device 32” + K83 × “Number of prize balls for winning in the first operating port 33” + K84 × “No. 2) Number of prize balls for winning in operating port 34) / Ratio of total number of game balls (K81 + K82 + K83 + K84 + K85) ejected from game area PA in high-frequency support mode. 65th parameter: game balls to general winning port 31. (K61 + K71 + K81) / (K61 + K62 + K63 + K64 + K65 + K71 + K72 + K73 + K74 + K75 + K81 + K82 + K83 + K84 + K85) / 66th parameter: Total number of game balls K in the first working port 33 + 73 K + 73 K in the first operation port 33 / The total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA (K61 + K62 + K63 + K64 + K65 + K71 + K72 + K73 + K74 + K75 + K81 + K82 + K83 + K84 + K85) 67th parameter: (“K62 + K72 + K82” × “K at the prize-winning machine for special prize winning device 32 + 2K at the end of the special prize winning device 32 + 74 K2 at the time of“ K2 at the end of the special prize winning device 32 + K2 at the end of the game ”. Number of prize balls for winning in the mouth 34) / Total number of game balls paid out (“K61 + K71 + K81” × “Number of prize balls for winning in the general winning opening 31”) + “K62 + K72 + K82” × “For winning in the special electricity prize device 32” Prize ball number ”+“ K63 + K73 + K83 ”ד number of prize balls for winning to the first operating port 33 ”+“ K64 + K74 + K84 ”ד number of prize balls for winning to the second operating port 34 ”) / 68th Parameter: “K62 + K72 + K82” × “the number of prize balls for winning in the special prize winning device 32” / the total payout number of game balls (“K61 + K71 + K81” × “the number of prize balls for winning in the general winning opening 31” + “K62 + K72 + K82” × “ Number of prize balls for winning in the special electric prize winning device 32 "+" K63 + K73 + K83 "×" number of prize balls for winning in the first operating port 33 "+" K64 + K74 + K84 "×" number of winning balls for winning in the second operating port 34 " Then, the 61st to 68th parameters calculated in step S4208 are overwritten in the calculation result storage area 234 (step S4209). In this case, the 61st to 68th parameters of the calculation result in the previous processing round already stored in the calculation result storage area 234 are deleted. Note that even when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, the backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65. Therefore, if the backup power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10, Even immediately after the start of the supply of the operating power, the calculation result storage area 234 stores information on the 61st to 68th parameters calculated before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped.

  Thereafter, the counters 231a to 231e of the normal counter area 231, the counters 232a to 232e of the open / close execution mode counter area 232, and the counters 233a to 233e of the high frequency support mode counter area 233 are all cleared to "0". (Step S4210). As a result, when the 61st to 68th parameters are calculated, the game history information can be temporarily deleted at that time.

  Immediately after the management start flag is set to “1”, when the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA is equal to or greater than a value obtained by subtracting the management start reference value from the calculation reference number, steps S4208 to S4208 are executed. The processing of step S4210 may be executed, and thereafter, when the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA becomes equal to or greater than the calculation reference number, the processing of steps S4208 to S4210 may be executed.

  FIG. 581 is a flowchart showing the display processing in step S4008 in the check processing (FIG. 578).

  First, the value of the update timing counter provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control is decremented by 1 (step S4301). The update timing counter is a counter for specifying by the main CPU 63 that it is time to update the display content of the management result of the game history on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. The main CPU 63 notifies the calculation results of the 61st to 68th parameters by controlling the display of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. In this case, the information corresponding to the type of the parameter to be notified is displayed on the first notification display device 69a. Also, of the value obtained by multiplying the parameter to be notified by 100, the number corresponding to the tens place is displayed on the second notification display device 69b, and the number corresponding to the ones place is displayed on the third notification display. It is displayed on the device 69c. In the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, the displays corresponding to the calculation results of the 61st to 68th parameters are sequentially switched in a predetermined order, and are the display targets in the last order. After the calculation result of the 68th parameter is displayed, the calculation result of the 61st parameter to be displayed in the first order is displayed. In this case, the period during which the calculation result of one parameter is continuously displayed is 10 seconds.

  Here, the calculation cycle of the 61st to 68th parameters in the main CPU 63 is a minimum of 60 minutes. On the other hand, the number of the 61st to 68th parameters is eight, and the period during which the calculation result of one parameter is continuously displayed is 10 seconds. Therefore, the 61st to 68th parameters calculated by the main CPU 63 are displayed at least once on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c.

  When the process of step S4301 is executed, the display contents of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c are updated by determining whether or not the value of the update timing counter after subtracting 1 is “0”. It is determined whether or not it is time to perform (step S4302). If an affirmative determination is made in step S4302, the value of the display target counter provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control is incremented by 1 (step S4303). Then, if the value of the display target counter after adding 1 exceeds the maximum value of “7” (step S4304: YES), the value of the display target counter is cleared to “0” (step S4305).

  The display target counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the type of parameter to be displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. The 61st to 68th parameters correspond one-to-one with the possible values of the display target counters “0” to “7”. For example, when the value of the display target counter is “0”, the 61st parameter which is the first display target is the display target of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, and the value of the display target counter is “7”. In the case of, the 68th parameter which is the last display target is the display target of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c.

  When a negative determination is made in step S4304, or when the process of step S4305 is performed, the first notification display device 69a is displayed so that information corresponding to the type of parameter corresponding to the value of the display target counter is displayed. It controls (step S4306). Also, a parameter corresponding to the value of the display target counter is read from the calculation result storage area 234, the read parameter is multiplied by 100, and a number corresponding to the tens place is displayed on the second notification display device 69b, The number corresponding to the ones digit is displayed on the third notification display device 69c (step S4307).

  Here, a display IC is provided corresponding to each of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. In step S4306, the main CPU 63 outputs display data to the display IC corresponding to the first notification display device 69a. In step S4307, the main CPU 63 outputs the display IC corresponding to the second notification display device 69b and the third notification. The display data is output to each of the display ICs corresponding to the display device 69c. These display ICs can store and hold display data when the operating power is supplied, and continuously display contents corresponding to the stored and held display data to the corresponding notification display devices 69a to 69c. Display. When the display data is changed by the main CPU 63, the display of the notification display devices 69a to 69c is changed to the display content corresponding to the changed display data. As a result, even after the management execution process (FIG. 576) corresponding to the non-specific control ends and the process returns to the process corresponding to the specific control, the setting is performed in the execution status of the process corresponding to the non-specific control. The display corresponding to the display data is continued on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c.

  Thereafter, a value corresponding to 10 seconds is set as a value corresponding to the next update timing in the update timing counter of the work area 223 for non-specific control (step S4308).

  When the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started by executing the display processing as described above, the management result of the game history is displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. Is done. The display of the management result of the game history is performed irrespective of whether the game is continued or not, and the main control device 60 is opened from the front of the pachinko machine 10 by opening the gaming machine main body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11. This is performed regardless of whether it is visible. As described above, the display control of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c is performed regardless of the state of the game and the state of the pachinko machine 10, thereby the first to third notification display devices 69a. It is possible to simplify the processing configuration for controlling the display of .about.69c.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  The main RAM 65 is provided with a work area 221 for specific control and a stack area 222 for specific control, and a work area 223 for non-specific control and a stack area 224 for non-specific control. The work area 221 for the specific control and the stack area 222 for the specific control are provided when the processing corresponding to the specific control is executed by the main CPU 63 by using the specific control program and the specific control data. While the information can be stored and the information can be read out, a process corresponding to the non-specific control is executed by the main CPU 63 using the non-specific control program and the non-specific control data. In this case, the information can be read but the information cannot be stored. The work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control can store information and read information when processing corresponding to non-specific control is executed by the main CPU 63. On the other hand, when the process corresponding to the specific control is executed by the main CPU 63, the information can be read out but the information cannot be stored. Thus, the work area 221 for the specific control and the stack area 222 for the specific control are treated as dedicated storage areas for the processing corresponding to the specific control, and the work area 223 for the non-specific control and the stack area for the non-specific control are provided. 224 can be handled as a dedicated storage area for processing corresponding to non-specific control. Therefore, it is possible to make the storage destination of the information in the main RAM 65 clearly different between the process corresponding to the specific control and the process corresponding to the non-specific control. Therefore, it is possible to prevent information used in the other process from being erased when executing one of the process corresponding to the specific control and the process corresponding to the non-specific control.

  The process corresponding to the specific control includes a process for controlling the progress of the game, and the process corresponding to the non-specific control includes a process for managing the game history. As described above, the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 are treated as dedicated storage areas for processing corresponding to the specific control, and the non-specific control work area 223 and the non-specific control Is handled as a dedicated storage area for processing corresponding to non-specific control. Thereby, when executing the process for controlling the progress of the game, information used in the process for managing the game history, for example, the normal counter area 231, the open / close execution mode counter area 232, the high frequency support mode It is possible to prevent the information stored in the counter area 233 and the operation result storage area 234 from being rewritten.

  The main RAM 65 includes a normal counter area 231 for storing information for managing the game history, an open / close execution mode counter area 232, a high frequency support mode counter area 233, and a calculation result storage area 234. This makes it possible for the main CPU 63 to complete the processing for managing the game history. In addition, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access or unauthorized modification to the information of the game history and the information of various parameters calculated using the information of the game history.

  When the situation corresponding to the non-specific control is changed from the state performing the processing corresponding to the specific control to the situation where the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is performed, The information of the register is saved in the main RAM 65. Thereby, when the process corresponding to the non-specific control is executed, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the various registers of the main CPU 63 from being rewritten when executing the process corresponding to the specific control. Become. Further, when or after ending the processing corresponding to the non-specific control, the information saved in the main RAM 65 is restored to various registers of the main CPU 63. Thus, when the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is completed, it is possible to execute the processing corresponding to the specific control from the state of the various registers of the main CPU 63 before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is performed. Become.

  When the situation corresponding to the non-specific control is changed from the situation where the processing corresponding to the specific control is executed, or when the situation corresponding to the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is executed, various registers of the main CPU 63 are used. Of the registers are saved in the main RAM 65. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required to save the information of the register of the main CPU 63 in the main RAM 65.

  When the situation corresponding to the non-specific control is changed from the situation where the processing corresponding to the specific control is executed, or when the situation corresponding to the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is executed, various registers of the main CPU 63 are used. In the processing corresponding to the non-specific control, the information of the register in which information is to be stored is saved in the main RAM 65. Thereby, when the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is completed, it is possible to restart the processing corresponding to the specific control from the state of the register of the main CPU 63 before the execution of the processing corresponding to the non-specific control. In addition, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity required for saving the information of the register of the main CPU 63 in the main RAM 65.

  When the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started, the information of the flag register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the stack area 222 for the specific control in the processing corresponding to the specific control, and the WA register, the BC register, Each information of the DE register, the HL register, the IX register, and the IY register is saved in the non-specific control work area 223 in the processing corresponding to the non-specific control. As a result, it is possible to perform the saving at a timing suitable for each piece of information stored in the various registers of the main CPU 63, and the processing for saving the information corresponds to the processing corresponding to the specific control and the processing corresponding to the non-specific control. It can be executed in a distributed manner with the processing.

  The flag register includes a carry flag, a zero flag, a P / V flag, a sign flag, a half carry flag, and the like, and the information in the flag register changes depending on the execution results of an operation instruction, a rotate instruction, an input / output instruction, and the like. In this case, the information of the flag register is saved to the specific control stack area 222 in the process corresponding to the specific control before the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started. Accordingly, it is possible to save the call of the subroutine corresponding to the non-specific control and the information of the flag register in a state before the change after the start of the subroutine to the stack area 222 for the specific control.

  By saving the information of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register to the non-specific control work area 223 instead of the non-specific control stack area 224, The capacity of the stack area 224 for specific control can be reduced. Further, when the stack area 224 for non-specific control is used, the order of writing information is read first after the subsequent information. All subsequent reading order information will be restored to different registers. The probability of occurrence of such an event increases as the amount of information saved in the non-specific control stack area 224 increases. On the other hand, by saving the register information to the non-specific control work area 223, it is possible to prevent the above-described event from occurring even when there is a large amount of information to be saved. .

  The stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in a case where the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is changed from a state where the processing corresponding to the specific control is performed, or in a case where the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is performed. Is a fixed information, and the information of the stack pointer is not saved in the main RAM 65 at the start of the process corresponding to the non-specific control. As a result, it is not necessary to secure a capacity for saving the information of the stack pointer in the main RAM 65, so that the storage capacity of the main RAM 65 can be suppressed accordingly. Further, even in the configuration in which the information of the stack pointer is not saved as described above, when the situation corresponding to the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is changed from the state performing the processing corresponding to the specific control, or In the case where the corresponding processing is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is fixed information, so that the processing corresponding to the non-specific control can be performed without saving the information of the stack pointer as described above. When the processing is completed, it is possible to return to the information of the stack pointer before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started.

  Although the information of the flag register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the main RAM 65 in the process corresponding to the specific control when the process corresponding to the non-specific control is executed, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the information of the flag register may be saved to the main RAM 65 in the process corresponding to the non-specific control. In addition, after the process corresponding to the non-specific control is completed, the information is returned to the flag register of the main CPU 63 in the process corresponding to the specific control. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The information may be returned to the flag register in a process corresponding to the non-specific control.

  After the information of the WA register, the BC register, the DE register, the HL register, the IX register, and the IY register of the main CPU 63 starts the processing corresponding to the non-specific control, the main CPU 63 executes the processing corresponding to the non-specific control. Although the configuration in which the information is saved in the side RAM 65 is not limited to this, the information in these registers may be saved in the main RAM 65 in a process corresponding to the specific control. Further, when the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is completed, the information is restored to the registers in the processing corresponding to the non-specific control. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The information may be returned to the register in a process corresponding to the specific control after the process corresponding to the non-specific control is completed.

<48th embodiment>
The present embodiment is different from the forty-seventh embodiment in the processing configuration of the management process. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the forty-seventh embodiment will be described. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the 47th embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 582 is a flowchart showing a management process according to the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processing of steps S4401 to S4405 in the management processing is executed by the main CPU 63 using the specific control program and the specific control data.

  First, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 574) (step S4401). This prevents a timer interrupt process (FIG. 574), which is a process corresponding to the specific control, from being interrupted and activated in the middle of a later-described management execution process, which is a process corresponding to the non-specific control. Becomes possible.

  After that, the information of the flag register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the PSW buffer set in the work area 221 for specific control by a load instruction as “LD (_PSWBUF), PSW” (step S4402). The flag register includes a carry flag, a zero flag, a P / V flag, a sign flag, a half carry flag, and the like, and the information in the flag register changes depending on the execution results of an operation instruction, a rotate instruction, an input / output instruction, and the like. By saving the information of the flag register before the subroutine program corresponding to the management execution process is started, the flag register in the state before being changed after the subroutine call or the start of the subroutine is changed. Information can be saved in the work area 221 for specific control.

  Thereafter, the management execution process is started by reading out a subroutine program corresponding to the management execution process set in the non-specific control program (step S4403). In this case, information for specifying the return address of the management process after the execution of the management execution process is written in the stack area 222 for specific control by a push command. Then, when the management execution processing is completed, information for specifying the return address is read by the pop instruction, and the program returns to the management processing program indicated by the return address.

  When the program returns to the management processing program after the execution of the management execution processing, it is saved in the PSW buffer in the work area 221 for specific control in step S4402 by a load command as “LD PSW, (_PSWBUF)”. The information of the flag register is returned to the flag register of the main CPU 63 (step S4404). As a result, the information of the flag register of the main CPU 63 returns to the information at the time when step S4402 was previously executed. That is, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 returns to the information for executing the specific control.

  Thereafter, interrupt permission is set to switch from the state in which the generation of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 574) is prohibited to the state in which the timer interrupt processing is permitted (step S4405). As a result, new execution of the timer interrupt processing becomes possible.

  According to the above configuration, the information of the flag register of the main CPU 63 immediately before switching from the specific control to the non-specific control is saved in the work area 221 for the specific control instead of the stack area 222 for the specific control. This makes it possible to save the information of the flag register while suppressing the capacity of the stack area 222 for specific control.

  Note that the PSW buffer in the work area 221 for specific control is secured as a dedicated area, but is not limited thereto, and may be configured as a shared area in which other information can be written. In other words, in the situation where the management processing is not executed, it is not necessary to save the information of the flag register of the main CPU 63 corresponding to the specific control, so that the predetermined processing is performed in the processing corresponding to the specific control in the situation where the management processing is not executed. It is also possible to use a shared area that is also used as a PSW buffer when performing arithmetic processing. In this case, the shared area is surely used to save the information of the flag register when executing the management processing, and therefore, as information other than the information of the flag register, before the management processing is executed. It is necessary to have a configuration in which unnecessary information is written in the shared area.

<49th embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the forty-seventh embodiment in the processing configuration of the management execution process. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the forty-seventh embodiment will be described. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the 47th embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 583 is a flowchart showing the management execution process according to the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. The processing of steps S4501 to S4515 in the management execution processing is executed by the main CPU 63 using the non-specific control program and the non-specific control data.

  First, as in step S3901 of the management execution process (FIG. 576) in the forty-seventh embodiment, “LD SP, Y (u + 2)” is set to the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 at the start of non-specific control by a load instruction. Y (u + 2) is set as the fixed address (step S4501).

  Thereafter, as a “PUSH WA”, the information of the WA register of the main CPU 63 is evacuated to the storage area corresponding to the current stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 in the non-specific control stack area 224 by a push command (step S4502). In this case, the information of the WA register is saved in the storage area corresponding to the fixed address set in the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in step S4501. Further, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address of the storage area to be written in the next order.

  Thereafter, as a “PUSH BC”, the information of the BC register of the main CPU 63 is saved to the storage area corresponding to the current stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 in the non-specific control stack area 224 by a push instruction (step S4503). Further, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address of the storage area to be written in the next order.

  Thereafter, as a “PUSH DE”, the information of the DE register of the main CPU 63 is saved to the storage area corresponding to the current stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 in the non-specific control stack area 224 by a push instruction (step S4504). Further, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address of the storage area to be written in the next order.

  Thereafter, as a “PUSH HL”, the information of the HL register of the main CPU 63 is saved to a storage area corresponding to the current stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 in the non-specific control stack area 224 by a push command (step S4505). Further, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address of the storage area to be written in the next order.

  Thereafter, as a “PUSH IX”, the information of the IX register of the main CPU 63 is saved to a storage area corresponding to the current stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 in the non-specific control stack area 224 by a push instruction (step S4506). Further, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address of the storage area to be written in the next order.

  Thereafter, as a “PUSH IY”, the information of the IY register of the main CPU 63 is saved to the storage area corresponding to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the non-specific control stack area 224 by a push instruction (step S4507). Further, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address of the storage area to be written in the next order.

  After executing the processing of steps S4502 to S4507, a check processing is executed (step S4508). When executing the check processing, a subroutine program corresponding to the check processing set in the non-specific control program is executed. At the time of execution of the program of the subroutine, information for specifying the return address of the management execution process after execution of the check process is transmitted by the push instruction to the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for non-specific control. Write to the storage area corresponding to the information. Then, when the check processing is completed, information for specifying the return address is read by a pop instruction, and the program returns to the management execution processing program indicated by the return address. The contents of the check processing are the same as in the forty-seventh embodiment.

  After that, as in step S3909 of the management execution process (FIG. 576) in the forty-seventh embodiment, the load instruction causes the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 to return to the specific control as "LD SP, Y (r + α)". Y (r + α) is set as the fixed address (step S4509). The address of Y (r + α) is set as an address between Y (r + 8) and Y (s) in the stack area 222 for specific control.

  Thereafter, the information saved in the storage area corresponding to the information in the previous order with respect to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the non-specific control stack area 224 by the pop instruction is set as “POP IY”. It overwrites the IY register of the main CPU 63 (step S4510). Further, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address of the storage area to be written in the previous order.

  Thereafter, as a “POP IX”, the information saved by the pop instruction in the storage area corresponding to the information in the previous order with respect to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the non-specific control stack area 224 is displayed. The IX register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten (step S4511). Further, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address of the storage area to be written in the previous order.

  Thereafter, the information saved in the storage area corresponding to the information in the previous order with respect to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the non-specific control stack area 224 by the pop instruction as “POP HL”. The HL register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten (step S4512). Further, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address of the storage area to be written in the previous order.

  Thereafter, the information saved in the storage area corresponding to the information in the previous order with respect to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the non-specific control stack area 224 by the pop instruction as “POP DE”. It overwrites the DE register of the main CPU 63 (step S4513). Further, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address of the storage area to be written in the previous order.

  Thereafter, as a “POP BC”, the information saved by the pop instruction in the storage area corresponding to the information in the previous order with respect to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the non-specific control stack area 224 is displayed. It overwrites the BC register of the main CPU 63 (step S4514). Further, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address of the storage area to be written in the previous order.

  Thereafter, as a “POP WA”, the information saved by the pop instruction in the storage area corresponding to the information in the previous order with respect to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the non-specific control stack area 224. It overwrites the WA register of the main CPU 63 (step S4515). Further, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address of the storage area to be written in the previous order.

  By executing the processing of steps S4510 to S4515, processing corresponding to the non-specific control of the information of the WA register, the BC register, the DE register, the HL register, the IX register, and the IY register of the main CPU 63 is started. To the information corresponding to the specific control immediately before.

  The registers of the main CPU 63 include various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers in addition to the flag registers. In this case, in step S4502 to step S4507, each of the information of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register, which are some of these various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers, In the stack area 224 for non-specific control. These WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register are registers used in a check process (step S4508) corresponding to non-specific control. The information set in such registers is saved in the non-specific control stack area 224 prior to the execution of the check processing (step S4508), so that the information of these registers used in the specific control is stored in the non-specific control. Can be evacuated before is started. Therefore, even if these registers are overwritten during non-specific control, when the non-specific control ends, the information saved in the non-specific control stack area 224 is restored to these registers, so that the state of these registers is restored. Can be returned to a state corresponding to the specific control before the non-specific control is executed.

  In addition, instead of saving all information of various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers to the stack area 224 for non-specific control, a WA to be used in a check process corresponding to non-specific control is used. The information of the register, the BC register, the DE register, the HL register, the IX register, and the IY register is selectively saved in the stack area 224 for non-specific control, so that the information of the register is saved in the stack area 224 for non-specific control. It is possible to reduce the capacity to be ensured for this purpose. Therefore, it is possible to save the register information as described above while securing a large capacity of the non-specific control stack area 224 that can be used in the check processing.

<50th embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the forty-seventh embodiment in the processing configuration of the management execution process. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the forty-seventh embodiment will be described. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the 47th embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 584 is a flowchart showing the management execution process according to the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. The processing of steps S4601 to S4605 in the management execution processing is executed by the main CPU 63 using the non-specific control program and the non-specific control data.

  First, as in step S3901 of the management execution process (FIG. 576) in the forty-seventh embodiment, “LD SP, Y (u + 2)” is set to the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 at the start of non-specific control by a load instruction. Y (u + 2) is set as the fixed address (step S4601).

  Thereafter, the information of all the registers of the main CPU 63 is saved in the ALL buffer set in the non-specific control work area 223 by a load instruction as “LD (_ALLBUF), ALL” (step S4602). Accordingly, not only the WA register, the BC register, the DE register, the HL register, the IX register, and the IY register used in the check processing corresponding to the non-specific control, but also all the other registers including the other registers are used. The register information is collectively saved in the ALL buffer of the work area 223 for non-specific control. In this manner, by saving all the registers of the main CPU 63 to the work area 223 for non-specific control, it is not necessary to selectively save the information of the registers of the main CPU 63.

  Here, the register to be saved includes a flag register. The information of the flag register is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S3802 of the management process (FIG. 575), but the information of the flag register is saved in the work area 223 for non-specific control in step S4602. Is done. This eliminates the need to selectively save the register information of the main CPU 63, including the flag register information. Even if the information of the flag register is saved in such a manner as described above, after the management execution process is completed, the main CPU 63 is removed from the special control stack area 222 in step S3804 of the management process (FIG. 575). Of the flag register of the main CPU 63 can be returned to the state immediately before the execution of the management execution process when returning to the process corresponding to the specific control. Becomes

  Thereafter, a check process is performed (step S4603). When executing the check processing, a subroutine program corresponding to the check processing set in the non-specific control program is executed. At the time of execution of the program of the subroutine, information for specifying the return address of the management execution process after execution of the check process is transmitted by the push instruction to the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for non-specific control. Write to the storage area corresponding to the information. Then, when the check processing is completed, information for specifying the return address is read by a pop instruction, and the program returns to the management execution processing program indicated by the return address. The contents of the check processing are the same as in the forty-seventh embodiment.

  After that, as in step S3909 of the management execution process (FIG. 576) in the forty-seventh embodiment, the load instruction causes the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 to return to the specific control as "LD SP, Y (r + α)". Y (r + α) is set as the fixed address (step S4604). The address of Y (r + α) is set as an address between Y (r + 8) and Y (s) in the stack area 222 for specific control.

  After that, the information saved in the ALL buffer of the non-specific control work area 223 is overwritten in the register corresponding to each of the main CPUs 63 as “LD ALL, (_ALLBUF)” by a load instruction (step S4605). This makes it possible to return the information of all the registers of the main CPU 63 to the information corresponding to the specific control immediately before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started.

  According to the above configuration, the information of the register of the main CPU 63 is not saved in the non-specific control stack area 224 but in the non-specific control work area 223, so that the non-specific control stack area is reduced accordingly. 224 can be kept small. Further, when the stack area 224 for non-specific control is used, the order of writing information is read first after the subsequent information. All subsequent reading order information will be restored to different registers. The probability of occurrence of such an event increases as the amount of information saved in the non-specific control stack area 224 increases. On the other hand, by saving the register information to the non-specific control work area 223, it is possible to prevent the above-described event from occurring even when there is a large amount of information to be saved. .

  When the information of the register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the work area 223 for non-specific control, a WA register, a BC register, a DE register, and an HL register used in a check process which is a process corresponding to the non-specific control. , IX register and IY register, and information of all registers including other registers are collectively saved in the ALL buffer of the work area 223 for non-specific control. In this manner, by saving all the registers of the main CPU 63 to the work area 223 for non-specific control, it is not necessary to selectively save the information of the registers of the main CPU 63.

  Although the information of all the registers of the main CPU 63 is saved in the main RAM 65 in the processing corresponding to the non-specific control after the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the information of all registers may be saved in the main RAM 65 in the processing corresponding to the specific control. Also, when the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is completed, the information is restored to all the registers in the processing corresponding to the non-specific control. However, the present invention is not limited to this. May be performed in a process corresponding to the specific control after the process corresponding to the non-specific control ends.

<51st embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the forty-seventh embodiment in the processing configuration of the management execution process. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the forty-seventh embodiment will be described. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the 47th embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 585 is a flowchart showing the management execution process according to the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processes of steps S4701 to S4706 in the management execution process are executed by the main CPU 63 using the non-specific control program and the non-specific control data.

  First, as “LD (_SPBUF), SP”, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is saved in the SP buffer set in the non-specific control work area 223 by a load instruction (step S4701). As a result, the information of the stack pointer corresponding to the specific control immediately before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started is saved in the work area 223 for the non-specific control.

  After that, as in step S3901 of the management execution process (FIG. 576) in the forty-seventh embodiment, “LD SP, Y (u + 2)” is set to the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 at the start of the non-specific control by the load instruction. Y (u + 2) is set as the fixed address (step S4702).

  Thereafter, as a “PUSH ALL”, the information of all the registers of the main CPU 63 is transferred from the storage area corresponding to the current stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 in the non-specific control stack area 224 and the storage area by a push instruction. It is evacuated to a continuous storage area (step S4703). In this case, since the information of all the registers of the main CPU 63 cannot be stored in one storage area of the non-specific control stack area 224, the current state of the main CPU 63 in the non-specific control stack area 224 is as described above. The storage area corresponding to the information of the stack pointer and the storage area continuous from the storage area are set as save destinations of the register information. Also, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the address information of the storage area to be written in the next order in the storage area storing the last information when the information of all registers is saved.

  Thereafter, a check process is performed (step S4704). When executing the check processing, a subroutine program corresponding to the check processing set in the non-specific control program is executed. At the time of execution of the program of the subroutine, information for specifying the return address of the management execution process after execution of the check process is transmitted by the push instruction to the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for non-specific control. Write to the storage area corresponding to the information. Then, when the check processing is completed, information for specifying the return address is read by a pop instruction, and the program returns to the management execution processing program indicated by the return address. The contents of the check processing are the same as in the forty-seventh embodiment.

  After that, as a “POP ALL”, a pop instruction instructs the storage area corresponding to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the non-specific control stack area 224 and the information saved to a continuous storage area from the storage area. Is overwritten in the register corresponding to each of the main CPUs 63 (step S4705). This makes it possible to restore the information of all the registers of the main CPU 63 to the information corresponding to the specific control immediately before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started.

  Thereafter, the information saved in the SP buffer of the non-specific control work area 223 is overwritten on the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 as “LD SP, (_SPBUF)” by a load instruction (step S4706). As a result, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 returns to the information corresponding to the specific control immediately before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started.

  According to the above configuration, when the information of the register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the stack area 224 for non-specific control, the WA register, the BC register, and the DE register used in the check processing corresponding to the non-specific control are used. Not only the registers, the HL register, the IX register, and the IY register, but also the information of all the registers, including other registers, are saved collectively in the non-specific control stack area 224. In this manner, by saving all the registers of the main CPU 63 to the non-specific control stack area 224, it is not necessary to selectively save the information of the registers of the main CPU 63.

  The information of the stack pointer corresponding to the specific control immediately before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started is saved in the work area 223 for the non-specific control. Accordingly, even if the information of the stack pointer corresponding to the specific control immediately before the process corresponding to the non-specific control is changed, the process corresponding to the non-specific control is completed and the specific control is performed. When returning to the corresponding process, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 can be returned to the information corresponding to the specific control immediately before the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started.

  Although the information of all the registers of the main CPU 63 is saved in the main RAM 65 in the processing corresponding to the non-specific control after the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the information of all registers may be saved in the main RAM 65 in the processing corresponding to the specific control. Also, when the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is completed, the information is restored to all the registers in the processing corresponding to the non-specific control. However, the present invention is not limited to this. May be performed in a process corresponding to the specific control after the process corresponding to the non-specific control ends.

<52nd embodiment>
The present embodiment is different from the forty-seventh embodiment in the processing configuration of the management process and the management execution process. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the forty-seventh embodiment will be described. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the 47th embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 586 is a flowchart showing the management process executed by the main CPU 63 in the present embodiment. The processing of steps S4801 to S4811 in the management processing is executed by the main CPU 63 using the specific control program and the specific control data.

  First, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit occurrence of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 574) (step S4801). This prevents a timer interrupt process (FIG. 574), which is a process corresponding to the specific control, from being interrupted and activated in the middle of a later-described management execution process, which is a process corresponding to the non-specific control. Becomes possible.

  Thereafter, as a “PUSH PSW”, the information of the flag register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control by a push command (step S4802). The flag register includes a carry flag, a zero flag, a P / V flag, a sign flag, a half carry flag, and the like, and the information in the flag register changes depending on the execution results of an operation instruction, a rotate instruction, an input / output instruction, and the like. By saving the information of the flag register before the subroutine program corresponding to the management execution process is started, the flag register in the state before being changed after the subroutine call or the start of the subroutine is changed. Information can be saved in the stack area 222 for specific control.

  Thereafter, the WA register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction as "LD WA, 0" (step S4803). Further, the BC register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction as "LD BC, 0" (step S4804). In addition, the DE register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction as "LD DE, 0" (step S4805). Further, the HL register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction as "LD HL, 0" (step S4806). Also, the IX register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction as "LD IX, 0" (step S4807). In addition, the IY register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction as "LD IY, 0" (step S4808).

  The registers of the main CPU 63 include various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers in addition to the flag registers. In this case, in steps S4803 to S4808, the WA register, the BC register, the DE register, the HL register, the IX register, and the IY register, which are some of the various general-purpose registers, the auxiliary registers, and the index registers, are used. Clear "0". These WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register are registers used in the check processing (step S4902) corresponding to the non-specific control. By clearing such registers to “0” prior to execution of management execution processing (step S4809), which is processing corresponding to non-specific control, the state of these registers can be changed before processing corresponding to non-specific control is started. In addition, it is possible to set the state immediately after the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started.

  The information of the WA register, the BC register, the DE register, the HL register, the IX register, and the IY register before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control starts after the processing corresponding to the non-specific control ends. This is unnecessary information in the process corresponding to the specific control. Therefore, even if the information in these registers is cleared to “0” without being saved, no problem occurs in the processing corresponding to the specific control that has been restored after the processing corresponding to the non-specific control has been completed.

  After executing the processes of steps S4803 to S4808, the management execution process is started by reading out a subroutine program corresponding to the management execution process set in the non-specific control program (step S4809). In this case, information for specifying the return address of the management process after the execution of the management execution process is written in the stack area 222 for specific control by a push command. Then, when the management execution processing is completed, information for specifying the return address is read by the pop instruction, and the program returns to the management processing program indicated by the return address.

  When the program returns to the management process after the execution of the management execution process, the information of the flag register saved in the specific control stack area 222 in step S4802 by the pop command as “POP PSW” is used as the main CPU 63. (Step S4810). As a result, the information of the flag register of the main CPU 63 returns to the information at the time when step S4802 was executed last time. That is, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 returns to the information for executing the specific control.

  Thereafter, interruption permission is set to switch from the state in which the generation of the timer interruption processing (FIG. 574) is prohibited to the state in which the generation is permitted (step S4811). As a result, new execution of the timer interrupt processing becomes possible.

  FIG. 587 is a flowchart illustrating the management execution process according to the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. The processing of steps S4901 to S4909 in the management execution processing is executed by the main CPU 63 using a non-specific control program and non-specific control data.

  First, similarly to step S3901 of the management execution process (FIG. 576) in the forty-seventh embodiment, the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is fixed at the start of the non-specific control by a load instruction as “LD SP, Y (u + 2)”. Y (u + 2) is set as the address (step S4901).

  Thereafter, a check process is performed (step S4902). When the check processing is executed, a subroutine program corresponding to the check processing set in the non-specific control program is executed. Information for specifying the return address of the execution processing is written to the non-specific control stack area 224 by the push command. When the check processing is completed, information for specifying the return address is read by the pop instruction, and the program returns to the management execution processing program indicated by the return address. The contents of the check processing are the same as in the forty-seventh embodiment.

  Then, the WA register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction as "LD WA, 0" (step S4903). Further, the BC register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction as "LD BC, 0" (step S4904). Further, the DE register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction as "LD DE, 0" (step S4905). Further, the HL register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction as "LD HL, 0" (step S4906). In addition, the IX register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction as "LD IX, 0" (step S4907). In addition, the IY register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction as "LD IY, 0" (step S4908).

  The WA register, the BC register, the DE register, the HL register, the IX register, and the IY register are registers used in the check processing (step S4902) corresponding to the non-specific control as described above. By clearing such registers to “0” before returning from the processing corresponding to the non-specific control to the processing corresponding to the specific control, the state of these registers can be changed before returning to the processing corresponding to the specific control. It is possible to set a state immediately after the supply of the operating power to the side CPU 63 is started.

  Further, the information of the WA register, the BC register, the DE register, the HL register, the IX register, and the IY register before the process corresponding to the specific control is started is not specified after the process corresponding to the specific control is completed. This is unnecessary information in the processing corresponding to the control. Therefore, even if the information in these registers is cleared to “0” without being saved, no problem occurs in the processing corresponding to the non-specific control that has been restored after the processing corresponding to the specific control has been completed.

  After that, as in step S3909 of the management execution process (FIG. 576) in the forty-seventh embodiment, the load instruction causes the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 to return to the specific control as "LD SP, Y (r + α)". Y (r + α) is set as the fixed address (step S4909). The address of Y (r + α) is set as an address between Y (r + 8) and Y (s) in the stack area 222 for specific control.

  According to the above configuration, when the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started from the situation where the process corresponding to the specific control is being executed, the WA register, the BC register, the DE register, the HL register, and the IX register of the main CPU 63 are provided. And IY registers are cleared to “0”. As a result, there is no need to save the information of these registers to the main RAM 65. Therefore, there is no need to secure a capacity for saving these pieces of information.

  Also, when returning from the situation in which the process corresponding to the non-specific control is being executed to the process corresponding to the specific control, the WA register, the BC register, the DE register, the HL register, the IX register, and the IY register of the main CPU 63 are reset. This is a configuration in which “0” is cleared. Thus, when returning to the processing corresponding to the specific control, it is possible to return the state of each of these registers to the state immediately before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started.

  The state where each of the registers is cleared to “0” is a state in which the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration for setting each of the registers to a predetermined state when starting the processing corresponding to the non-specific control and when returning to the processing corresponding to the specific control. .

  When starting the process corresponding to the non-specific control and when returning to the process corresponding to the specific control, the registers to be cleared to “0” are some of the registers of the main CPU 63. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for setting each of the registers to a predetermined state when starting the process corresponding to the non-specific control and when returning to the process corresponding to the specific control.

  In a configuration in which the WA register, the BC register, the DE register, the HL register, the IX register, and the IY register are cleared to “0” when starting the process corresponding to the non-specific control and when returning to the process corresponding to the specific control, Other registers are not cleared to “0”. This makes it possible to prevent information necessary for the process corresponding to the specific control from being deleted at the start of the process corresponding to the non-specific control.

  Further, information of registers other than the WA register, the BC register, the DE register, the HL register, the IX register, and the IY register is not saved in the main RAM 65 at the start of the process corresponding to the non-specific control. As a result, there is no need to secure an area for saving such information in the main RAM 65.

  The information of the WA register, the BC register, the DE register, the HL register, the IX register, and the IY register of the main CPU 63 before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started after the processing corresponding to the non-specific control ends. This information is not used in the process corresponding to the specific control. Thereby, even if the above-described registers are cleared to “0” when the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started, the specific control is performed after the process corresponding to the non-specific control is completed. It is possible not to affect the processing.

  Instead of the configuration in which the WA register, the BC register, the DE register, the HL register, the IX register, and the IY register of the main CPU 63 are cleared to “0” in steps S4803 to S4808 in the management process (FIG. 586), A configuration in which the register is initialized may be employed. That is, when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, each register of the main CPU 63 is once cleared to “0”, and then the information of each register is set to the initial state. In steps S4803 to S4808, each register may be set so as to be in the initial state. In this case, the configuration of each register is set so as to be in the initial state also in steps S4903 to S4908, so that when returning to the process corresponding to the specific control, the state of each register is not specified. It is possible to return to the state immediately before the processing corresponding to the control is started.

  In place of the configuration in which the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main CPU 63 are cleared to “0” in steps S4803 to S4808 in the management process (FIG. 586), A configuration in which “1” is set in all the registers may be adopted. In this case, also in steps S4903 to S4908, when returning to the processing corresponding to the specific control by setting "1" to all of the registers, the state of each register is changed to the processing corresponding to the non-specific control. Can be returned to the state immediately before the start of the operation.

  Further, when the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is executed, the information of the flag register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the main RAM 65 in the processing corresponding to the specific control. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the information of the flag register may be saved in the main RAM 65 in the process corresponding to the non-specific control. In addition, after the process corresponding to the non-specific control is completed, the information is returned to the flag register of the main CPU 63 in the process corresponding to the specific control. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The information may be returned to the flag register in a process corresponding to the non-specific control.

  The process of clearing the WA register, the BC register, the DE register, the HL register, the IX register, and the IY register of the main CPU 63 to “0” is a process corresponding to the specific control before the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the process of clearing these registers to “0” may be performed by a process corresponding to the non-specific control. Further, when the process corresponding to the non-specific control is completed, the process of clearing each register to “0” is performed in the process corresponding to the non-specific control. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The process of clearing each register to “0” may be performed in a process corresponding to the specific control after the process corresponding to the non-specific control is completed.

  In the management process (FIG. 586), the "PUSH PSW" process in step S4802 is executed before setting "0" to each register in steps S4803 to S4808. The “PUSH PSW” process in step S4802 is executed after setting “0” in each register in steps S4803 to S4808 and before the subroutine program corresponding to the management execution process is read in step S4809. May be adopted. This makes it possible to save the information of the flag register after being changed by the load instruction in steps S4803 to S4808 to the stack area 222 for specific control.

<53rd embodiment>
The present embodiment is different from the forty-seventh embodiment in the configuration for collecting game history information. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the forty-seventh embodiment will be described. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the 47th embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 588 is an explanatory diagram for describing an electrical configuration in the present embodiment.

  The MPU 62 is provided with a main CPU 63, a main ROM 64, and a main RAM 65 as in the 47th embodiment. Further, unlike the forty-seventh embodiment, the MPU 62 is electrically connected to the management RAM 241. That is, the management RAM 241 is provided separately from the main RAM 65 incorporated in the MPU 62, and the management RAM 241 is externally attached to the MPU 62.

  The main RAM 65 is provided with a work area 221 for specific control, a stack area 222 for specific control, a work area 223 for non-specific control, and a stack area 224 for non-specific control as in the 47th embodiment. I have. Therefore, when the main CPU 63 executes the processing corresponding to the specific control by using the specific control program and the specific control data in the main ROM 64, the work area 221 for the specific control in the main RAM 65 and When the main CPU 63 executes the processing corresponding to the non-specific control using the non-specific control program and the non-specific control data in the main ROM 64 using the stack area 222 for the specific control. A work area 223 for non-specific control and a stack area 224 for non-specific control in the main RAM 65 are used.

  The management RAM 241 includes a normal counter area 231, an open / close execution mode counter area 232, a high frequency support mode counter area 233, and a calculation result storage area 234. The contents of these areas 231 to 234 are the same as in the above-mentioned 47th embodiment. Also in the present embodiment, a management execution process including a check process is executed as a process corresponding to the non-specific control in the main CPU 63. In the check process, the game history is collected through the updating of the normal counter area 231, the open / close execution mode counter area 232, and the high frequency support mode counter area 233, as in the 47th embodiment, and the game history is collected. The 61st to 68th parameters calculated using the performed game history are written to the calculation result storage area 234. That is, the management RAM 241 is used when the main CPU 63 executes a process corresponding to the non-specific control, and the management RAM 241 is used as a work area for the non-specific control.

  When the game history is collected and the 61st to 68th parameters are calculated using the collected history information, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control of the main RAM 65 are used. Used as appropriate.

  According to the above configuration, the normal counter area 231, the open / close execution mode counter area 232, the high frequency support mode counter area 233, and the operation result storage area 234 are provided in the management RAM 241 external to the MPU 62. This makes it possible to store the collected game history information without increasing the necessary storage capacity in the non-specific control work area 223 in the main RAM 65, and to utilize the game history. The calculated 61st to 68th parameters can be stored. Further, it is possible to increase the storage capacity for storing game history information while using the general-purpose MPU 62.

  When collecting the game history and calculating the 61st to 68th parameters using the collected history information, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control of the main RAM 65 are appropriately used. Is done. This makes it possible to prevent the processing speed in executing the processing related to the history information from being extremely reduced.

  In addition to or in place of the configuration in which the management RAM 241 is provided with the normal counter area 231, the open / close execution mode counter area 232, the high frequency support mode counter area 233, and the operation result storage area 234, the thirty-third embodiment is described. In such a case, a storage area corresponding to the history memory 117 may be set. In this case, it is necessary to increase the storage capacity required to store the history information, but the management RAM 241 external to the MPU 62 is used as storage means for storing the history information. Therefore, it is possible to flexibly cope with an increase in storage capacity.

<Fifty-fourth embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the forty-seventh embodiment in the processing configuration executed by the main CPU 63. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the forty-seventh embodiment will be described. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the 47th embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 589 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed by the main CPU 63 in the present embodiment. The processing of steps S5001 to S5019 in the main processing is executed by the main CPU 63 using the specific control program and the specific control data.

  First, power-on wait processing is executed (step S5001). In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits without advancing to the next process until a predetermined time for wait (specifically, one second) elapses after the main process is started. In the execution period of the power-on wait processing, the operation start and the initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed. Thereafter, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted (step S5002).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c has been pressed (step S5003), and whether or not the setting key insertion section 68a has been turned on using the setting key (step S5004). It is determined whether or not the front door frame 14 is open with respect to 13 (step S5005), and it is determined whether or not the gaming machine main body 12 is open with respect to the outer frame 11 (step S5006).

  In this embodiment, a front door opening sensor 95 for detecting whether or not the front door frame 14 is in an open state with respect to the inner frame 13 is electrically connected to the main CPU 63. The detection result of 95 is input to the main CPU 63. In this case, when the front door frame 14 is in the closed state with respect to the inner frame 13, the front door opening sensor 95 transmits a close detection signal to the main CPU 63, and the front door frame 14 is in the open state with respect to the inner frame 13. In this case, the front door opening sensor 95 transmits an opening detection signal to the main CPU 63. The main CPU 63 specifies that the front door frame 14 is in the closed state when receiving the closing detection signal from the front door opening sensor 95, and determines when the opening detection signal is received from the front door opening sensor 95. It is specified that the front door frame 14 is in the open state.

  In this embodiment, a main body opening sensor 96 for detecting whether or not the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state with respect to the outer frame 11 is electrically connected to the main CPU 63. The detection result of 96 is input to the main CPU 63. In this case, when the gaming machine main body 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the main body opening sensor 96 transmits a closing detection signal to the main CPU 63, and the gaming machine main body 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11. In some cases, the main body opening sensor 96 transmits an opening detection signal to the main CPU 63. The main CPU 63 determines that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closed state when receiving the closing detection signal from the main body opening sensor 96, and determines when the gaming machine main body 12 is receiving the opening detection signal from the main body opening sensor 96. It is specified that the main body 12 is in the open state.

  If the reset button 68c is being pressed (step S5003: YES) and a negative determination is made in any of steps S5004 to S5006, a clear process for non-setting update is executed (step S5007). . In the clearing process at the time of non-setting update, the specific control except for the area (specifically, the set value counter) in which the setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 in the specific control work area 221 is set. The work area 221 is cleared to "0", and an initial setting is performed for the area cleared to "0". As a result, since the area indicating whether the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the high probability mode is cleared to “0”, the winning / rejecting lottery is performed regardless of the winning / rejecting lottery mode immediately before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. The mode is a low probability mode. In addition, the game is not executed, the opening / closing execution mode is not executed, and the general-purpose display unit 38a is not variably displayed, and the general electric functioning object 34a is in the closed state. Situation. In addition, since the hold storage area 65a and the ordinary power hold area 65c provided in the work area 221 for specific control are also cleared to "0", the hold information for the special figure display unit 37a is erased and the general figure display unit is cleared. The hold information for 38a is deleted. In the clearing process at the time of non-setting update, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to “0”. In the clearing process at the time of non-setting update, initial setting is performed after various registers of the main CPU 63 are also cleared to "0".

  In the non-setting update clearing process, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to “0”. As a result, even if the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started while the reset button 68c is pressed, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0". It is possible to do so.

  If the reset button 68c has not been pressed (step S5003: NO), it is determined whether the power failure flag is set to “1” (step S5008). The power failure flag is provided in the work area 221 for the specific control, and when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, if the predetermined power failure processing is normally executed, the power failure flag is set. Is set to "1". If “1” is set in the power failure flag, it is determined whether or not the calculation result of the checksum matches the checksum stored when the power was turned off, that is, the validity of the stored data is determined (step S5009). . If the clear processing at the time of non-setting update is executed in step S5007, or if an affirmative determination is made in step S5009, the setting of the pachinko machine 10 is confirmed by checking the value of the set value counter in the work area 221 for specific control. It is determined whether the value is normal (step S5010). Specifically, when the setting value set in the setting value counter is any one of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”, it is determined that the setting is normal, and when the setting value is “0” or 7 or more, an abnormality is determined. It is determined that there is.

  If a negative determination is made in any of steps S5008 to S5010, an operation prohibition process is executed. In the operation prohibition process, after an error notification process for notifying the occurrence of an error to a hall manager or the like is performed (step S5011), an infinite loop is performed. The operation prohibition process is released by executing a setting update clear process (step S5018) described later.

  If an affirmative determination is made in all of steps S5008 to S5010, a power-on setting process is executed (step S5012). In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the work area 221 for specific control such as initialization of a power failure flag is set to an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current game state is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81.

  Although the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process, the occurrence of the timer interrupt process is prohibited when the main process is started. The state in which the generation of the timer interrupt process is prohibited is released at a timing before the process of step S5013 is completed after the process of step S5012 is completed, and the execution of the timer interrupt process is permitted. As a result, when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the power-on setting processing in step S5012 ends, and the timer interrupt processing is not executed until the step before the processing in step S5013 starts. Therefore, the processing for advancing the game by the main CPU 63 is not started until the situation is reached.

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to the remaining process of steps S5013 to S5016. That is, the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process, but a remaining time is generated between one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. The remaining time varies in accordance with the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, and the remaining processes of steps S5013 to S5016 are repeatedly executed using the irregular time. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining processes in steps S5013 to S5016 are irregular processes that are irregularly executed. In steps S5013 to S5016, the same processes as those in steps S113 to S116 of the main process (FIG. 514) in the 33rd embodiment are executed.

  On the other hand, when the reset button 68c is being pressed (step S5003: YES), and when all of the steps S5004 to S5006 are affirmatively determined, a process for updating the set value is executed. Specifically, first, a setting value copy process is executed (step S5017). In the copy processing, the information of the set value counter used to specify the set value of the pachinko machine 10 in the work area 221 for specific control is stored in a copy area provided in the work area 221 for specific control. . Thus, even if the information of the setting value counter is cleared to “0” in the setting update clearing process (step S5018) to be executed thereafter, the information before the setting value updating clearing process is executed is performed. It is possible to grasp the set value of the pachinko machine 10 (that is, the set value of the pachinko machine 10 before the supply of the operation power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped).

  Thereafter, a clear process at the time of setting update is executed (step S5018). In the clear processing at the time of setting update, the work area 221 for the specific control is set to “0” except for the area indicating whether the winning / rejecting lottery mode in the work area 221 for the specific control is the high probability mode and the copy area. Is cleared, and initial setting is performed for the area cleared to "0". As a result, the game round is not executed, the opening / closing execution mode is not executed, and the general-purpose display unit 38a is not variably displayed. There is a certain situation. In addition, since the hold storage area 65a and the ordinary power hold area 65c provided in the work area 221 for specific control are also cleared to "0", the hold information for the special figure display unit 37a is erased and the general figure display unit is cleared. The hold information for 38a is deleted. In the clearing process at the time of setting update, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to “0”, and initial setting is performed for the area cleared to “0”. In the clearing process at the time of setting update, the set value counter used to specify the set value of the pachinko machine 10 is cleared to “0”. In the clearing process at the time of setting update, initial setting is performed after various registers of the main CPU 63 are also cleared to “0”.

  On the other hand, in the clearing process at the time of setting update, since the area indicating whether the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the high probability mode is not cleared to “0”, even if the setting value updating process (step S5019) is executed, the winning / rejecting lottery mode is executed. Can be maintained in the mode before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. In addition, since the copy area is not cleared to “0” in the clearing process at the time of setting update, it is possible to specify the set value that was set before the clearing process at the time of setting update is performed.

  In the clearing process at the time of setting update, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to “0”. As a result, even when the set value updating process capable of changing the set value of the pachinko machine 10 is executed, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to “0”. It is possible to do so.

  Then, after executing the set value updating process in step S5019, the process proceeds to step S5012. Hereinafter, the setting value update processing will be described. FIG. 590 is a flowchart showing the setting value update processing. The processing of steps S5101 to S5114 in the setting value update processing is executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for specific control and data for specific control.

  First, “1” is set to a set value counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step S5101). The set value counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify which set value the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is. When the set value counter is set to “1”, when the set value updating process is executed, the set value becomes “set 1” regardless of the set value up to that time.

  After that, a setting value display start process is executed (step S5102). In the setting value display start processing, the display of the third notification display device 69c is controlled so that the number “1” corresponding to “setting 1” is displayed. When changing the set value, the manager of the game hall can check the current setting state of the pachinko machine 10 by checking the third notification display device 69c.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not one game ball is detected by the out-mouth detection sensor 48a (step S5103). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the signal received from the out-mouth detection sensor 48a has switched from the LOW level to the HI level. If a negative determination is made in step S5103, it is determined whether the update button 68b has been pressed once (step S5104). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the signal from the sensor that detects the pressing operation of the update button 68b has switched from the LOW level to the HI level. If a negative determination is made in step S5104, the process returns to step S5103, and it is determined whether or not one game ball has been detected by the out-mouth detection sensor 48a.

  If the update button 68b is pressed once (step S5104: YES), the value of the set value counter in the work area 221 for specific control is incremented by 1 (step S5105). If the value of the set value counter after adding 1 exceeds “6” (step S5106: YES), “1” is set to the set value counter (step S5107). Thus, each time the update button 68b is pressed once, the setting value is updated to the next higher level, and when the update button 68b is pressed once in the situation of “setting 6,” the setting is changed to “setting 1.” I will return.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5106, or if the process in step S5107 is performed, a display update process of the set value is performed (step S5108). In the setting value display update processing, the display control of the third notification display device 69c is performed so that a number corresponding to the value of the setting value counter in the work area 221 for specific control is displayed. The administrator of the gaming hall can check the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 after pressing the update button 68b by checking the third notification display device 69c.

  After executing the processing in step S5108, the process returns to step S5103, and it is determined whether or not one game ball has been detected by the out-mouth detection sensor 48a. If one game ball has not been detected by the out-mouth detection sensor 48a (step S5103: NO), the processing after step S5104 is executed again. If one game ball is detected by the out-mouth detection sensor 48a (step S5103: YES), it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a has been switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step S5109). In this case, instead of specifying whether the setting key insertion unit 68a is in the OFF state, it is specified whether switching from the ON state to the OFF state has occurred, and it is determined that the switching has occurred. If specified, an affirmative determination is made in step S5109.

  If it has not been switched to the OFF state (step S5109: NO), the processing of step S5109 is executed again. Thus, the process waits until the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned off. If the state has been switched to the OFF state (step S5109: YES), display end processing of the set value is executed (step S5110). In the display end processing of the set value, the display of the set value on the third notification display device 69c is ended. In this case, the display of various parameter information stored in the calculation result storage area 234 provided in the non-specific control work area 223 is started by the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c.

  Thereafter, a setting value comparison process is performed (step S5111). In the set value comparison processing, it is determined whether or not the information of the set value counter in the specific control work area 221 matches the information stored in the copy area in the specific control work area 221. That is, it is determined whether or not the set value set before the supply of the operation power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped is the same as the set value set in the current set value updating process.

  If the set value set before the supply of the operation power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped is the same as the set value set in the current set value update process (step S5112: NO), the non- A notification process at the time of change is executed (step S5113). In the notification process at the time of non-change, a setting maintaining command indicating that the setting value has not been changed is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. Upon receiving the setting maintaining command, the sound emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 to emit light in a mode corresponding to the setting maintaining, and causes the speaker unit 54 to output a sound of “setting maintained.” In addition, a character image “Setting is maintained.” Is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

  These notifications are maintained until the notification execution period (for example, 10 seconds) elapses after the setting maintaining command is transmitted, and is terminated when the notification execution period has elapsed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the notification may be ended when the notification end operation is performed by the manager of the game hall. As the notification end operation, for example, the update button 68b may be pressed, or the reset button 68c may be pressed. By confirming the notification, the administrator of the game hall can grasp that the set value has been maintained. In the notification process at the time of non-change, the set value is maintained by setting the display content on at least one of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c to the display content corresponding to the setting maintenance. May be notified, or an external output indicating that the set value is maintained may be provided.

  If the set value set before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped is not the same as the set value set in the current set value updating process (step S5112: YES), the change is made. The time notification process is executed (step S5114). In the notification process at the time of change, a setting change command indicating that the set value has been changed is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. Upon receiving the setting change command, the sound emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 to emit light in a manner corresponding to the setting change, and causes the speaker unit 54 to output a sound saying “Setting change.” In addition, a character image “Setting is changed.” Is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

  These notifications are maintained until the notification execution period (for example, 10 seconds) elapses after the setting change command is transmitted, and is terminated when the notification execution period has elapsed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the notification may be ended when the notification end operation is performed by the manager of the game hall. As the notification end operation, for example, the update button 68b may be pressed, or the reset button 68c may be pressed. By confirming the notification, the administrator of the game hall can know that the set value has been changed. In the notification process at the time of the change, the setting value is changed by setting the display content on at least one of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c to the display content corresponding to the setting change. May be notified or an external output indicating that the set value has been changed may be performed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in order to execute the setting value updating process, not only the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned ON, but also the reset button 68c is pressed, and the front door frame 14 is opened. It is necessary that the gaming machine main body 12 be in an open state. This makes it difficult to perform the setting value update process illegally.

  In addition, in order to execute the set value update processing, the front door frame 14 and the gaming machine main body 12 need to be open. As a result, even if an attempt is made to illegally execute the setting value update process, the improper act becomes conspicuous because the front door frame 14 and the gaming machine main body 12 are in the open state, and the administrator of the gaming hall has the It becomes easier to detect fraud.

  In particular, in order for the set value update process to be executed, not only the opening operation of the gaming machine main body 12 required to expose the main control device 60 but also the opening operation of the front door frame 14 is required. This makes it possible to complicate the operation of the fraudulent act and to make the fraudulent act stand out.

  Further, in a configuration in which the processing for proceeding with the game is not returned if the setting value update processing is not completed, in order to finalize the setting value selected in the setting value update processing and end the setting value update processing, It is necessary to cause a game ball to enter the out port 24a to cause the out port detection sensor 48a to detect a game ball, and then to turn off the setting key insertion section 68a. As a result, even if the set value update processing is executed improperly, it is possible to make it difficult to end the set value update processing and return to the processing for proceeding the game.

  Further, the set value set before the supply of the operation power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped is compared with the set value selected in the set value updating process, and whether the set values are the same is determined. The notification corresponding to the crab is executed. Thereby, the manager of the game hall can easily grasp whether or not the set value can be changed by the set value update process.

  FIG. 591 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. The timer interrupt process is executed periodically (for example, every 4 milliseconds) while the processes of steps S5013 to S5016 are being executed in the main process (FIG. 589). The program corresponding to the timer interrupt process is set as a program for specific control.

  In steps S5201 to S5205, the same processes as those in steps S301 to S305 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 516) in the 33rd embodiment are executed. These processes are executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for specific control and data for specific control.

  After that, a setting confirmation process is executed (step S5206). When the setting check process is executed, a subroutine program corresponding to the setting check process set in the specific control program is executed. However, when the subroutine program is executed, the setting check process is executed. The information for specifying the return address of the timer interrupt processing after the execution of is executed is written to the stack area 222 for specific control by the push command. When the setting confirmation processing is completed, information for specifying the return address is read by the pop instruction, and the program returns to the timer interrupt processing program indicated by the return address.

  FIG. 592 is a flowchart showing the setting confirmation processing. The processing of steps S5301 to S5312 in the setting confirmation processing is executed by the main CPU 63 using the specific control program and the specific control data.

  First, it is determined whether or not the set value corresponding to the set value counter information in the specific control work area 221 is being displayed on the third notification display device 69c (step S5301). If a negative determination is made in step S5301, it is determined whether the mode is neither the game play mode nor the opening / closing execution mode (step S5302), and the pattern change display time on the general figure display unit 38a and the general electric role object 34a are opened. It is determined whether it is any of the ordinary power open states that can be in the state (step S5303), it is determined whether the front door frame 14 is open with respect to the inner frame 13 (step S5304), and the outer frame is determined. It is determined whether or not the game machine main body 12 is in an open state with respect to 11 (step S5305), and it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on (step S5306). Whether the front door frame 14 is in the open state is determined based on the detection result of the front door open sensor 95 as in step S5005 in the main process (FIG. 589), and whether the gaming machine body 12 is in the open state. This determination is made based on the detection result of the main body opening sensor 96 as in step S5006 in the main processing (FIG. 589).

  If a negative determination is made in any of steps S5302 to S5306, the setting confirmation processing ends without executing the processing of steps S5307 to S5309. If an affirmative determination is made in all of steps S5302 to S5306, a setting value display start process is executed (step S5307). In the setting value display start process, the display of the third notification display device 69c is controlled so that the number of the setting value corresponding to the information of the setting value counter in the work area 221 for specific control is displayed. When checking the set value, the manager of the game hall can grasp the current setting state of the pachinko machine 10 by looking at the third notification display device 69c.

  After that, “1” is set to the game stop flag provided in the work area 221 for the specific control (step S5308). The game stop flag is determined in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 591) in a situation where an affirmative determination is made in step S5207 and the processes in steps S5208 to S5221 are not executed, that is, in a situation where execution of the process for advancing the game should be stopped. This flag is used by the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not there is a flag. When the game stop flag is set to “1”, an affirmative determination is made in step S5207 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 591), so that the processing of steps S5208 to S5221 is not executed. As a result, the setting value is confirmed in a state where the execution of the processing for advancing the game is stopped. However, even when the game stop flag is set to “1”, the processing of steps S5201 to S5205 in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 591) is executed, and thus the setting value is confirmed. In this case, the power failure monitoring is executed, the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the random number initial value counter CINI are updated, and fraud detection is performed.

  Thereafter, a confirmation notification start command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step S5309). Upon receiving the confirmation notification start command, the sound emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 to emit light in a mode corresponding to the setting confirmation, and causes the speaker unit 54 to output a sound saying “Setting is being confirmed.” . In addition, a character image “Setting is being confirmed.” Is displayed on the symbol display device 41. These notifications are continued until a confirmation notification end command is received from the main CPU 63. Note that a configuration may be adopted in which an external output indicating that the set value is being confirmed is output.

  As described above, on the condition that it is neither the game time nor the opening / closing execution mode, nor is it any one of the fluctuation display time of the pattern in the general figure display unit 38a and the general electric open state in which the general electric role product 34a can be in the open state. The display for confirming the set value is performed on the third notification display device 69c, so that the work of confirming the set value is not performed in a situation where the game is being performed. It becomes possible.

  Further, in order for the display for confirming the set value to be performed on the third notification display device 69c, not only is the setting key insertion portion 68a turned ON, but also the front door frame 14 is opened. It is necessary that the gaming machine main body 12 be in an open state. As a result, it is possible to make the display for confirming the setting value difficult to perform even if it is attempted to do so incorrectly.

  In addition, in order for the display for confirming the set value to be performed on the third notification display device 69c, the front door frame 14 and the game machine main body 12 need to be open. As a result, even if an attempt is made to illegally perform a display for confirming the set value, since the front door frame 14 and the gaming machine main body 12 are in the open state, the illegal act becomes conspicuous, and the management of the gaming hall is performed. This makes it easier for people to discover the fraud.

  In particular, in order for the display for confirming the set value to be performed on the third notification display device 69c, not only the opening operation of the gaming machine main body 12 required to expose the main control device 60 but also In addition, since the opening operation of the front door frame 14 is also required, the work of the fraudulent acts can be complicated, and the fraudulent acts can be conspicuous.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S5301, it is determined whether the setting key insertion unit 68a has been turned OFF (step S5310). If the OFF operation has been performed (step S5310: YES), the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step S5311). As a result, a negative determination is made in step S5207 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 591), whereby the processing of steps S5208 to S5221 is executed. Thereby, the state in which the execution of the processing for advancing the game is stopped is released.

  Thereafter, a confirmation notification end command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step S5312). Upon receiving the confirmation notification end command, the voice light emission control device 81 ends the notification indicating that the setting values in the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 are being checked.

  Returning to the description of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 591), after finishing the setting confirmation processing in step S5206, it is determined whether or not the game is stopped (step S5207). In this case, if “1” is set to the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control in the setting confirmation processing in step S5206, an affirmative determination is made in step S5207, and the processing in steps S5208 to S5221 is performed. Do not execute processing. Also, in the case where the occurrence of fraud is detected in the fraud detection processing of step S5205, an affirmative determination is made in step S5207, and the processing of steps S5208 to S5221 is not performed.

  In steps S5208 to S5219, the same processes as those in steps S307 to S318 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 516) in the thirty-third embodiment are executed. These processes are executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for specific control and data for specific control. In step S5221, the same process as step S3719 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 574) in the forty-seventh embodiment is executed.

  On the other hand, in step S5220, a RAM monitoring process is executed. When the RAM monitoring process is executed, a subroutine program corresponding to the RAM monitoring process set in the specific control program is executed. The information for specifying the return address of the timer interrupt processing in is written into the stack area 222 for specific control by the push command. Then, when the RAM monitoring processing is completed, information for specifying the return address is read by the pop instruction, and the program returns to the timer interrupt processing program indicated by the return address.

  FIG. 593 is a flowchart showing the RAM monitoring process. The processing of steps S5401 to S5412 in the RAM monitoring processing is executed by the main CPU 63 using a specific control program and specific control data.

  First, monitoring processing of the work area 221 for specific control is executed (step S5401). In the monitoring process, it is monitored whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the information stored in the work area 221 for specific control due to noise or the like. This monitoring method is arbitrary. For example, in the work area 221 for the specific control, whether the state of the storage area in which information is not written by various controls in the main CPU 63 is different from the initial state or not is determined. Is monitored, and when the state is different from the initial state, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred. In this case, if the initial state of the storage area is a value of “0”, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred if “1” is stored in the storage area, and the initial state of the storage area is “1”. Is determined to have occurred when the storage area has a value of “0”. In addition to the above monitoring method, a configuration may be adopted in which it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when the value of a predetermined byte is different from a value that can be set in a normal state.

  If it is determined in step S5401 that there is an abnormality (step S5402: YES), the processing in steps S5409 to S5412 is performed. If it is not determined in step S5401 that there is an abnormality (step S5402: NO), the process proceeds to step S5403.

  In step S5403, monitoring processing of the stack area 222 for specific control is executed. In the monitoring process, it is monitored whether or not information stored in the specific control stack area 222 has an abnormality due to noise or the like. This monitoring method is arbitrary. For example, in the stack area 222 for specific control, whether or not the state of the storage area where information is not written by various controls in the main CPU 63 is different from the initial state Is monitored, and when the state is different from the initial state, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred. In this case, if the initial state of the storage area is a value of “0”, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred if “1” is stored in the storage area, and the initial state of the storage area is “1”. Is determined to have occurred when the storage area has a value of “0”. In addition to the above monitoring method, a configuration may be adopted in which it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when the value of a predetermined byte is different from a value that can be set in a normal state.

  If it is determined in step S5403 that there is an abnormality (step S5404: YES), the processing in steps S5409 to S5412 is performed. If it is not determined in step S5403 that there is an abnormality (step S5404: NO), the process proceeds to step S5405.

  In step S5405, monitoring processing of the work area 223 for non-specific control is executed. In the monitoring process, it is monitored whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the information stored in the non-specific control work area 223 due to noise or the like. This monitoring method is optional. For example, in the work area 223 for non-specific control, whether or not the state of the storage area in which information is not written by various controls in the main CPU 63 is different from the initial state Is monitored, and when the state is different from the initial state, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred. In this case, if the initial state of the storage area is a value of “0”, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred if “1” is stored in the storage area, and the initial state of the storage area is “1”. Is determined to have occurred when the storage area has a value of “0”. In addition to the above monitoring method, a configuration may be adopted in which it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when the value of a predetermined byte is different from a value that can be set in a normal state.

  If it is determined in step S5405 that there is an abnormality (step S5406: YES), the processing in steps S5409 to S5412 is performed. If it is not determined in step S5405 that there is an abnormality (step S5406: NO), the process advances to step S5407.

  In step S5407, monitoring processing of the stack area 224 for non-specific control is executed. In the monitoring process, it is monitored whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the information stored in the non-specific control stack area 224 due to noise or the like. This monitoring method is optional. For example, in the stack area 224 for non-specific control, whether or not the state of the storage area in which information is not written by various controls in the main CPU 63 is different from the initial state Is monitored, and if the state is different from the initial state, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred. In this case, if the initial state of the storage area is a value of “0”, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred if “1” is stored in the storage area, and the initial state of the storage area is “1”. Is determined to have occurred when the storage area has a value of “0”. In addition to the above monitoring method, a configuration may be adopted in which it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when the value of a predetermined byte is different from a value that can be set in a normal state.

  If it is determined in step S5407 that there is an abnormality (step S5408: YES), the processing in steps S5409 to S5412 is performed. Specifically, first, a setting value copy process is executed (step S5409). In the copy processing, the information of the set value counter used to specify the set value of the pachinko machine 10 in the work area 221 for specific control is stored in a copy area provided in the work area 221 for specific control. . As a result, even if the information of the set value counter is cleared to “0” in the abnormality clearing process (step S5410) executed thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 before the abnormality clearing process is executed. Can be set.

  After that, a clearing process at the time of abnormality is performed (step S5410). In the abnormal clearing process, the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to “0” except for the copy area, and the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the stack for non-specific control are cleared. Area 224 is cleared to "0". After clearing “0”, initial setting is performed. That is, in the RAM monitoring processing, an abnormality occurs in any one of the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control. If it is specified that the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" except for the copy area, the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control, Is cleared to "0". As a result, when there is a possibility that some information abnormality has occurred in the main RAM 65, neither the process corresponding to the specific control nor the process corresponding to the non-specific control is executed as it is. It is possible to do so.

  If the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to “0”, the information of the return address after the execution of the RAM monitoring process is also deleted. Therefore, when the stack area 222 for the specific control is cleared to “0”, the process of step S5412 is terminated, and then the process returns to the predetermined program. Specifically, the configuration is such that the process uniquely returns to the process of step S5013 in the main process (FIG. 527). However, the program that returns uniquely is not limited to step S5013, and may be step S5221 in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 591). When the stack area 222 for the specific control is cleared to “0”, the stack order of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is also set to the address of the first storage area in the stack area 222 for the specific control.

  After that, an abnormal command indicating that the clearing process at the time of abnormality has occurred is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step S5411). Upon receiving the abnormal command, the sound light emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 to emit light in a mode corresponding to the forced clear, and causes the speaker unit 54 to output a sound of “forced clear”. In addition, a character image “Forcibly cleared.” Is displayed on the symbol display device 41. These notifications are maintained until the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and is terminated when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the notification may be ended when the notification end operation is performed by the manager of the game hall. As the notification end operation, for example, the update button 68b may be pressed, or the reset button 68c may be pressed. By confirming the notification, the manager of the game hall can know that the main RAM 65 has been forcibly cleared.

  Thereafter, a setting value update process is executed (step S5412). That is, when the clearing process at the time of the abnormality occurs, the “0” clear is executed including the set value counter in the work area 221 for the specific control. Execute the set value update process to perform the setting. The processing content of the setting value update processing is the same as that of step S5019 of the main processing (FIG. 589). Therefore, each time the update button 68b is pressed once, the set value is updated one step at a time, and the set value being selected is determined by detecting the game ball by the out-opening detection sensor 48a. The set value that is being updated and the set value that has been confirmed are displayed on the third notification display device 69c. Thereafter, when the setting key insertion section 68a is switched from the ON state to the OFF state, it is determined that the condition for ending the setting value updating process is satisfied.

  Here, it is not determined that the end condition is satisfied only by the setting key insertion unit 68a being in the OFF state. It is determined that the condition has been established. When the set value updating process is executed in the RAM monitoring process (FIG. 593), the setting key insertion unit 68a is in the OFF state at the start of the set value updating process. In order to establish the condition, it is necessary to insert a setting key into the setting key insertion section 68a, perform an ON operation once, and then perform an OFF operation. As a result, it is possible to prevent the setting value update process from ending even when the regular operation by the manager of the gaming hall is not performed.

  When the setting key insertion section 68a is switched from the ON state to the OFF state and the condition for ending the set value updating process is satisfied, the step S5111 in the set value updating process (FIG. 590) is executed to execute The setting value stored in the copy area in the work area 221 for specific control is compared with the set value currently set in the set value counter in the work area 221 for specific control. In other words, it is determined whether or not the set value set before the abnormality clear processing (step S5410) is executed and the set value set in the current set value update processing are the same. When both the set values are the same (step S5112: NO), the notification process at the time of non-change (step S5113) is executed so that the setting maintenance notification described above is performed. On the other hand, when the two set values are different (step S5112: YES), the notification of the change in setting described above is performed by executing the notification process at the time of change (step S5114).

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  In order to execute the setting value update process when the supply of the operation power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, not only the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on but also the reset button 68c is pressed. , The front door frame 14 must be in an open state, and the gaming machine main body 12 must be in an open state. This makes it difficult to perform the setting value update process illegally.

  In order to execute the set value update process, the front door frame 14 and the gaming machine main body 12 need to be open. As a result, even if an attempt is made to illegally execute the setting value update process, the improper act becomes conspicuous because the front door frame 14 and the gaming machine main body 12 are in the open state, and the administrator of the gaming hall has the It becomes easier to detect fraud.

  In particular, in order for the set value update process to be executed, not only the opening operation of the gaming machine main body 12 required to expose the main control device 60 but also the opening operation of the front door frame 14 is required. This makes it possible to complicate the operation of the fraudulent act and to make the fraudulent act stand out.

  If the set value update process is not completed and the process does not return to the process for proceeding with the game, in order to finalize the set value selected in the set value update process and end the set value update process, It is necessary to cause the game ball to enter the 24a, allow the out-opening detection sensor 48a to detect the game ball, and then turn off the setting key insertion section 68a. As a result, even if the set value update processing is executed improperly, it is possible to make it difficult to end the set value update processing and return to the processing for proceeding the game.

  The set value that was set before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 was stopped is compared with the set value selected in the set value update process, and whether or not both set values are the same is determined. A corresponding notification is performed. Thereby, the manager of the game hall can easily grasp whether or not the set value can be changed by the set value update process.

  The set value is set on the condition that it is neither the game play nor the opening / closing execution mode, nor is the picture variable display time in the general figure display section 38a or the general electric open state in which the general electric work 34a can be in the open state. By performing the display for confirmation on the third notification display device 69c, it is possible to prevent the setting value confirmation work from being performed in the situation where the game is being played. .

  In order for the display for confirming the set value to be performed on the third notification display device 69c, not only the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned ON, but also the front door frame 14 is opened. And the gaming machine body 12 needs to be in an open state. As a result, it is possible to make the display for confirming the setting value difficult to perform even if it is attempted to do so incorrectly.

  In order for the display for confirming the set value to be performed on the third notification display device 69c, the front door frame 14 and the gaming machine main body 12 need to be open. As a result, even if an attempt is made to illegally perform a display for confirming the set value, since the front door frame 14 and the gaming machine main body 12 are in the open state, the illegal act becomes conspicuous, and the management of the gaming hall is performed. This makes it easier for people to discover the fraud.

  In particular, in order for the display for confirming the set value to be performed on the third notification display device 69c, not only the opening operation of the gaming machine main body 12 required to expose the main control device 60 but also In addition, since the opening operation of the front door frame 14 is also required, the work of the fraudulent acts can be complicated, and the fraudulent acts can be conspicuous.

  When it is specified that an abnormality has occurred in any one of the specific control work area 221, the specific control stack area 222, the non-specific control work area 223, and the non-specific control stack area 224. Clears the work area 221 for specific control except for the copy area to “0”, and sets the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control to “0”. "clear. As a result, when there is a possibility that some information abnormality has occurred in the main RAM 65, both the processing corresponding to the specific control and the processing corresponding to the non-specific control are executed as it is. It is possible to prevent it from happening.

  In the process corresponding to the specific control, information abnormality occurs not only in the work area 221 for the specific control and the stack area 222 for the specific control, but also in the work area 223 for the non-specific control and the stack area 224 for the non-specific control. Is monitored. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration as compared to a configuration that monitors whether an information abnormality has occurred separately for processing corresponding to specific control and processing corresponding to non-specific control.

  When it is specified that an abnormality has occurred in any one of the specific control work area 221, the specific control stack area 222, the non-specific control work area 223, and the non-specific control stack area 224. In the processing corresponding to the specific control, not only the work area 221 for the specific control and the stack area 222 for the specific control, but also the work area 223 for the non-specific control and the stack area 224 for the non-specific control are set to “0”. Is cleared. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration as compared with a configuration in which “0” is cleared separately for the process corresponding to the specific control and the process corresponding to the non-specific control.

  When the information clearing process has been performed due to the occurrence of the information error, the setting value updating process is executed. This makes it possible to prevent the game from proceeding even though the set value has not been set. In this case, when the set value set before the clear processing at the time of abnormality is executed is the same as the set value set in the set value update processing after the execution of the clear processing at the time of abnormality, Is notified of the setting maintenance. As a result, even if the clearing process at the time of the abnormality is performed, the setting maintenance notification is performed by resetting the set value set in the previous situation, and the clearing process at the time of the abnormality is performed. Can also indicate to the player that the set value has not changed. Incidentally, since it is common to record the set value of each pachinko machine 10 installed in the game hall, the set value updating process after the execution of the clearing process at the time of abnormality is performed so that the set value becomes the recorded set value. It is possible to perform

  Note that the condition for executing the set value update process when the supply of the operation power to the pachinko machine 10 is started may be a condition different from the above embodiment. FIG. 594 is a flowchart showing another embodiment of the main process. In the main processing, the same processing as steps S5001 to S5019 of the main processing (FIG. 589) in the above embodiment is executed in steps S5501 to S5506 and steps S5508 to S5520. On the other hand, in the main process, it is determined in step S5507 whether or not the operation handle of the firing operation device 28 operated to fire the game ball in the game area PA is rotated from the initial rotation position. Then, the reset button 68c is pressed (step S5503: YES), the setting key insertion section 68a is turned ON (step S5504: YES), and the front door frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 13. (Step S5505: YES), the gaming machine main body 12 is open with respect to the outer frame 11 (Step S5506: YES), and the operation handle of the firing operation device 28 is rotated from the initial rotation position. If yes (step S5507: YES), the set value updating process (step S5520) is executed. Accordingly, in order to execute the set value updating process when the supply of the operation power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, not only the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion unit 68a to perform the ON operation, but also the firing is performed. It is necessary to start supplying the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 with the operation handle of the operation device 28 being rotated. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to illegally change the set value. In step S5507, it is not determined whether or not the operation handle of the firing operation device 28 has been rotated from the initial rotation position, but it is determined whether or not the firing operation device 28 has been touched by a player. It may be configured.

  In addition, when the supply of the operation power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the condition that the set value update process is executed includes a condition that the front door frame 14 is open with respect to the inner frame 13 and that Although both the conditions that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state with respect to the frame 11 are set, the configuration may be such that only one of these conditions is set.

  Further, as a condition for performing the set value updating process when the supply of the operation power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, a condition that the reset button 68c is pressed is set. However, the configuration may be such that the condition is not set.

  In addition, as a condition for executing the set value update process when the supply of the operation power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the operation to the pachinko machine 10 in a situation where the game ball is detected by the gate detection sensor 49a is set as a condition. A configuration in which the condition that the power supply is started may be set. Accordingly, in order to execute the setting value update process when the supply of the operation power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, not only the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion unit 68a to perform the ON operation, but also the through operation is performed. It is necessary to start supplying the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 with the game balls staying at the gate 35. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to illegally change the set value.

  Further, the content of the operation for fixing the set value in the set value update process may be different from the content of the above embodiment. FIG. 595 is a flowchart showing another example of the setting value updating process. In the set value update processing, the same processing as steps S5101 to S5102 and steps S5104 to S5114 of the set value update processing (FIG. 590) in the above embodiment is executed in steps S5601 to S5602 and steps S5604 to S5614. . On the other hand, in the setting value updating process, in step S5603, the ON signal is continuously output from the gate detection sensor 49a instead of determining whether or not a game ball has been detected by the out-mouth detection sensor 48a. It is determined whether the ON continuation period is longer than the end reference period (specifically, 5 seconds). If an affirmative determination is made in step S5603, the set value being selected is determined, and the flow advances to step S5609. According to this configuration, in order to finalize the selected set value, it is necessary to intentionally cause the game balls to stay in the through gate 35 for the end reference period or longer. The game ball staying in the through gate 35 for the end reference period or more does not occur in a situation where a normal game is played. As a result, it is possible to make the condition for fixing the selected set value not to be satisfied or hard to be satisfied in a situation where a normal game is being played. Further, even if the setting value update process is started due to fraud, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an operation for fixing the selected setting value in the setting value update process.

  In the setting value updating process, the selected setting value may be determined when the operation handle of the firing operation device 28 is rotated from the initial rotation position, and the firing operation device 28 is touched by the player. In this case, the setting value being selected may be determined when the selection is made.

  In the setting value updating process, the selected value may be determined when the special power detection sensor 45a detects that a game ball has entered the special power prize device 32 provided with the opening / closing member. Alternatively, the selected setting value may be determined when the second operation port detection sensor 47a detects that a game ball has entered the second operation port 34 provided with the opening / closing member. In this case, in order to finalize the currently selected set value, it is necessary to maintain the game ball after manually opening the target entry section, thereby making it difficult to perform an illegally changing the set value. It becomes possible.

  In addition, in the setting value update processing, the selection is performed based on the detection that the game ball has entered the second ball entry section after the detection that the game ball has entered the first ball entry section. A configuration in which the middle set value is determined may be adopted. In this case, in order to finalize the selected set value, it is necessary to enter the game ball by care in a plurality of ball entry sections in a predetermined order, so that it is difficult to perform an act of illegally changing the set value. Becomes possible. In this case, by setting the first ball entry portion and the second ball entry portion as ball entry portions in which no opening / closing member is provided, the workability of regular work is not extremely reduced. It is possible to do.

  In the setting value update processing, the setting key insertion section 68a may be switched from the ON state to the OFF state, so that the selected setting value is fixed and the setting value update processing end condition may be satisfied.

  Further, the operation for updating the set value by one step in the set value update process is not limited to the configuration in which the update button 68b is pressed, and the set value is changed by one step when the reset button 68c is pressed. The configuration may be updated.

  Further, the case where the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started in a situation where the reset button 68c is pressed and the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned ON by the setting key, When the front door frame 14 is not in the open state with respect to the frame 13 or when the gaming machine main body 12 is not in the open state with respect to the outer frame 11, the clear processing at the time of non-setting update (step S5007) is executed. The configuration is not limited, and the configuration may be such that the clear processing at the time of non-setting update is not executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the clear processing at the time of non-setting update from being executed against the intention of the manager of the gaming hall.

  Also, the case where the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started in a situation where the reset button 68c is being pressed and the setting key insertion section 68a is not turned on by the setting key, When the front door frame 14 is not in the open state with respect to the frame 13 or when the gaming machine main body 12 is not in the open state with respect to the outer frame 11, the clear processing at the time of non-setting update (step S5007) is executed. The configuration is not limited, and the configuration may be such that the clearing process at the time of non-setting update is not executed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to execute the clear processing at the time of non-setting update illegally.

<Fifty-fifth embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the fifty-fourth embodiment in the processing configuration of the main process. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the fifty-fourth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that in the fifty-fourth embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 596 is a flowchart showing the main processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. The processing of steps S5701 to S5720 in the main processing is executed by the main CPU 63 using the specific control program and the specific control data.

  First, power-on wait processing is executed (step S5701). In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits without advancing to the next process until a predetermined time for wait (specifically, one second) elapses after the main process is started. In the execution period of the power-on wait processing, the operation start and the initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed. Thereafter, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted (step S5702).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the front door frame 14 is open with respect to the inner frame 13 based on the detection result of the front door opening sensor 95 (step S5703). It is determined whether or not the gaming machine body 12 is in the open state (step S5704), and it is determined whether the reset button 68c is pressed (step S5705). If a negative determination is made in any of steps S5703 to S5705, the processing of steps S5706 to S5714 is performed. Steps S5706 to S5714 are the same as steps S5008 to S5016 of the main processing (FIG. 589) in the fifty-fourth embodiment.

  If an affirmative determination is made in all of steps S5703 to S5705, a selection process is executed (step S5715). In the selection process, either the situation in which the clear processing at the time of non-setting update is executed and the set value update processing is not executed, or the situation in which the clear processing at the time of setting update is executed and the set value update processing is executed is set. A process of determining whether or not the game is based on a selection operation by a manager of the game hall is executed. Specifically, each time the update button 68b is pressed once, the state is switched from a state in which one of the above-described situations is selected to a state in which the other situation is selected. The selection operation may be performed by operating the reset button 68c, or may be performed by operating another operation unit. If the clearing process at the time of non-setting update is executed and the setting value updating process is not executed, “O” is displayed on the first notification display device 69a and the second notification display device 69b is displayed. And, when the third notification display device 69c is turned off and the status of executing the clearing process at the time of setting update and executing the setting value update process is selected, "O" is displayed on the second notification display device 69b. Is displayed, and the first notification display device 69a and the third notification display device 69c are turned off. In addition, when the reset button 68c is continuously pressed for more than a fixed selection period (specifically, 10 seconds), the state on the selected side among the above-described states is set as the current selection target. I do.

  When the update button 68b is continuously pressed for more than a fixed selection period (specifically, 10 seconds), the selected one of the above-mentioned situations is confirmed as a current selection target. If another operation unit is continuously pressed for more than a fixed selection period (specifically, 10 seconds), the state of the selected side among the above-described states is selected this time. It is good also as a structure determined as an object. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the state on the side selected from the above-described states is determined as the current selection target by rotating the operation handle of the firing operation device 28.

  In the selection process, when the clearing process at the time of non-setting update is executed and the setting value updating process is not executed is determined as the current selection target (step S5716: NO), the clear process at the time of non-setting update is executed. (Step S5717). The processing content of the clear processing at the time of non-setting update is the same as that of step S5007 of the main processing (FIG. 589) in the 54th embodiment.

  In the selection process, when the situation of executing the clear process at the time of setting update and executing the set value updating process is determined as the current selection target (step S5716: YES), the setting value copy process is executed (step S5716). In step S5718, a clear process at the time of setting update is executed (step S5719), and a set value updating process is executed (step S5720). The processing contents of these steps S5718 to S5720 are the same as the steps S5017 to S5019 of the main processing (FIG. 589) in the fifty-fourth embodiment.

  According to the above-described configuration, even when the configuration key insertion unit 68a is not provided, the clear process at the time of non-setting update is performed and the set value update process is not performed, and the clear process at the time of configuration update is performed. In addition, the manager of the game hall can select which of the situations in which the setting value update process is executed.

  In addition, not only when executing the set value update process but also when executing the clear process at the time of non-setting update, supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is performed in a state where the reset button 68c is pressed. In addition to starting, it is necessary to open the front door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 13 and open the gaming machine body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to execute the clear processing at the time of non-setting update illegally.

  The conditions for the selection process to be performed when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started include the condition that the front door frame 14 is open with respect to the inner frame 13 and that the outer frame is Although the condition that both the condition that the game machine main body 12 is in the open state is set for 11 is set, the configuration may be such that only one of these conditions is set.

  In addition, as a condition for executing the selection process when the supply of the operation power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, a condition that the firing handle of the firing operation device 28 is rotated is added. The configuration that the condition that the firing operation device 28 is touched may be added, and the configuration that the condition that the game ball is detected by the gate detection sensor 49a is added. Is also good.

<56th embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the 54th embodiment in the processing configuration of the RAM monitoring process. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the fifty-fourth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that in the fifty-fourth embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 597 is a flowchart showing the RAM monitoring processing according to the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. The processing of steps S5801 to S5814 in the RAM monitoring processing is executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for specific control and data for specific control.

  First, monitoring processing of the work area 221 for specific control is executed (step S5801). The contents of the monitoring process are the same as those in step S5401 of the RAM monitoring process (FIG. 593) in the 54th embodiment. If it is determined in step S5801 that there is an abnormality (step S5802: YES), the processing in steps S5805 to S5808 is performed.

  If it is not determined in step S5801 that there is an abnormality (step S5802: NO), monitoring processing of the stack area 222 for specific control is executed (step S5803). The contents of the monitoring process are the same as those in step S5403 of the RAM monitoring process (FIG. 593) in the 54th embodiment. If it is determined in step S5803 that there is an abnormality (step S5804: YES), the processing in steps S5805 to S5808 is performed.

  For details of the processing in steps S5805 to S5808, first, a setting value copy processing is executed (step S5805). In the copy processing, the information of the set value counter used to specify the set value of the pachinko machine 10 in the work area 221 for specific control is stored in a copy area provided in the work area 221 for specific control. . As a result, even if the information of the set value counter is cleared to “0” in the abnormality clearing process (step S5806) executed thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 before the abnormality clearing process is executed. Can be set.

  After that, a clearing process at the time of abnormality is performed (step S5806). In the clearing process at the time of abnormality, the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to “0” except for the copy area, and the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to “0”. After clearing “0”, initial setting is performed. On the other hand, "0" clear of the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control is not executed. That is, in the RAM monitoring process according to the present embodiment, when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in any of the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222, the specific control is performed excluding the copy area. The work area 221 is cleared to "0", and the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0". Accordingly, when there is a possibility that some information abnormality has occurred in the work area 221 for specific control or the stack area 222 for specific control, the processing corresponding to the specific control is executed as it is. It is possible to prevent it from happening. Further, even if an information error occurs in the work area 221 for specific control or the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are cleared to “0”. The non-specific control work area 221 and the non-specific control work area 223 and the non-specific control stack area 224 are cleared to “0” due to the information abnormality in the specific control work area 221 or the specific control stack area 222. It is possible to do not.

  If the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to “0”, the information of the return address after the execution of the RAM monitoring process is also deleted. Thus, when the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to “0”, the process of step S5808 is ended, and then the process returns to the predetermined program. Specifically, the configuration is such that the process uniquely returns to the process of step S5013 in the main process (FIG. 527). However, the program that returns uniquely is not limited to step S5013, and may be step S5221 in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 591). When the stack area 222 for the specific control is cleared to “0”, the stack order of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is also set to the address of the first storage area in the stack area 222 for the specific control.

  After that, an abnormal command indicating that the clearing process at the time of abnormal has occurred is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step S5807). Upon receiving the abnormal command, the sound light emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 to emit light in a mode corresponding to the forced clear, and causes the speaker unit 54 to output a sound of “forced clear”. In addition, a character image “Forcibly cleared.” Is displayed on the symbol display device 41. These notifications are maintained until the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and is terminated when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the notification may be ended when the notification end operation is performed by the manager of the game hall. As the notification end operation, for example, the update button 68b may be pressed, or the reset button 68c may be pressed. By confirming the notification, the manager of the game hall can know that the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control have been forcibly cleared.

  After that, a setting value update process is executed (step S5808). The processing content of the setting value update processing is the same as that of step S5412 in the RAM monitoring processing (FIG. 593) in the 54th embodiment.

  If it is not determined that there is an abnormality in both step S5801 and step S5803 (step S5802 and step S5804: NO), monitoring processing of the work area 223 for non-specific control is executed (step S5809). The contents of the monitoring process are the same as those in step S5405 of the RAM monitoring process (FIG. 593) in the 54th embodiment. If it is determined in step S5809 that there is an abnormality (step S5810: YES), the work area 223 for non-specific control is cleared to “0” and initialization is performed (step S5811). In this case, all of the normal counter area 231, the open / close execution mode counter area 232, the high frequency support mode counter area 233, the operation result storage area 234, and the management start flag are cleared to "0". This makes it possible to eliminate the information abnormality in the work area 223 for non-specific control.

  On the other hand, in step S5811, the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to “0”. As a result, even if an information error occurs in the non-specific control work area 223, the specific control work area 221, the specific control stack area 222, and the non-specific control stack area 224 are set to " "0" can be prevented from being cleared.

  In step S5811, the normal counter area 231, the open / close execution mode counter area 232, the high frequency support mode counter area 233, and the operation result storage area 234 are cleared to "0", but the management start flag is not cleared to "0". It may be configured. In step S5811, the normal counter area 231, the open / close execution mode counter area 232, the high frequency support mode counter area 233, and the management start flag are cleared to "0", but the operation result storage area 234 is not cleared to "0". It may be configured. In step S5811, the normal counter area 231, the open / close execution mode counter area 232, and the high frequency support mode counter area 233 are cleared to "0", but the operation result storage area 234 and the management start flag are not cleared to "0". It may be configured.

  When a negative determination is made in step S5810 or when the process of step S5811 is performed, a monitoring process of the non-specific control stack area 224 is performed (step S5812). The contents of the monitoring process are the same as those in step S5407 of the RAM monitoring process (FIG. 593) in the 54th embodiment. If it is determined in step S5812 that there is an abnormality (step S5813: YES), the stack area 224 for non-specific control is cleared to “0” and initialization is performed (step S5814). This makes it possible to eliminate the information abnormality in the non-specific control stack area 224.

  On the other hand, in step S5814, the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, and the work area 223 for non-specific control are not cleared to “0”. Thus, even if an information error occurs in the non-specific control stack area 224, the specific control work area 221, the specific control stack area 222, and the non-specific control work area 223 are set to " "0" can be prevented from being cleared.

  According to the above configuration, when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in any of the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222, the specific control work area 221 is excluded except for the copy area. Is cleared to "0" and the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0". Accordingly, when there is a possibility that some information abnormality has occurred in the work area 221 for specific control or the stack area 222 for specific control, the processing corresponding to the specific control is executed as it is. It is possible to prevent it from happening.

  Even if the information abnormality occurs in the work area 221 for specific control or the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to “0”. As a result, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to “0” due to information abnormality in the work area 221 for specific control or the stack area 222 for specific control. It is possible to do so.

  Even if the information abnormality occurs in the work area 223 for non-specific control, the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to “0”. This prevents the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control from being cleared to “0” due to the information abnormality in the work area 223 for non-specific control. It becomes possible.

  Even if the information abnormality occurs in the non-specific control stack area 224, the specific control work area 221, the specific control stack area 222, and the non-specific control work area 223 are not cleared to "0". As a result, the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, and the work area 223 for non-specific control are prevented from being cleared to “0” due to the information abnormality in the stack area 224 for non-specific control. It becomes possible.

  When an information error has occurred in the work area 221 for specific control, the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" except for the copy area, while the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0". A configuration in which “0” is not cleared may be adopted.

  Further, when an information abnormality occurs in the stack area 222 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to “0”, but the work area 221 for specific control is not cleared to “0”. It may be. In this case, even if the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to “0”, the processing of steps S5805 to S5808 may not be performed.

<57th embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration for monitoring whether or not an information abnormality has occurred in each of the areas 221 to 224 of the main RAM 65 is different from that of the fifty-fourth embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the fifty-fourth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that in the fifty-fourth embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 598 is a flowchart showing a RAM monitoring process according to the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. The processing of steps S5901 to S5908 in the RAM monitoring processing is executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for specific control and data for specific control.

  First, monitoring processing of the work area 221 for specific control is executed (step S5901). The contents of the monitoring process are the same as those in step S5401 of the RAM monitoring process (FIG. 593) in the 54th embodiment. If it is determined in step S5901 that there is an abnormality (step S5902: YES), processing in steps S5905 to S5908 is executed.

  If it is not determined in step S5901 that there is an abnormality (step S5902: NO), monitoring processing of the stack area 222 for specific control is executed (step S5903). The contents of the monitoring process are the same as those in step S5403 of the RAM monitoring process (FIG. 593) in the 54th embodiment. If it is determined in step S5903 that there is an abnormality (step S5904: YES), the processing in steps S5905 to S5908 is executed.

  For details of the processing in steps S5905 to S5908, first, a setting value copy processing is executed (step S5905). In the copy processing, the information of the set value counter used to specify the set value of the pachinko machine 10 in the work area 221 for specific control is stored in a copy area provided in the work area 221 for specific control. . Thus, even if the information of the set value counter is cleared to “0” in the abnormality clearing process (step S5906) executed thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 before the abnormality clearing process is executed. Can be grasped.

  Thereafter, a clearing process is performed at the time of abnormality (step S5906). In the clearing process at the time of abnormality, the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to “0” except for the copy area, and the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to “0”. After clearing “0”, initial setting is performed. On the other hand, "0" clear of the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control is not executed. That is, in the RAM monitoring process according to the present embodiment, when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in any of the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222, the specific control is performed excluding the copy area. The work area 221 is cleared to "0", and the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0". Accordingly, when there is a possibility that some information abnormality has occurred in the work area 221 for specific control or the stack area 222 for specific control, the processing corresponding to the specific control is executed as it is. It is possible to prevent it from happening. Further, even if an information error occurs in the work area 221 for specific control or the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are cleared to “0”. The non-specific control work area 221 and the non-specific control work area 223 and the non-specific control stack area 224 are cleared to “0” due to the information abnormality in the specific control work area 221 or the specific control stack area 222. It is possible to do not.

  After that, an abnormal command indicating that the clearing process at the time of the abnormality has occurred is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step S5907). Upon receiving the abnormal command, the sound emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 to emit light in a mode corresponding to the forced clear of the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control, and the speaker unit 54 Output a sound saying "Forced clearing has been performed for specific control." In addition, a character image “Forced clear has been executed for the specific control” is displayed on the symbol display device 41. These notifications are maintained until the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and is terminated when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the notification may be ended when the notification end operation is performed by the manager of the game hall. As the notification end operation, for example, the update button 68b may be pressed, or the reset button 68c may be pressed. By confirming the notification, the manager of the game hall can know that the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control have been forcibly cleared.

  Thereafter, a setting value update process is executed (step S5908). The processing content of the setting value update processing is the same as that of step S5412 in the RAM monitoring processing (FIG. 593) in the 54th embodiment.

  As described above, in the RAM monitoring processing executed using the specific control program and the specific control data, information abnormality is monitored for the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222. However, information abnormality monitoring is not performed for the non-specific control work area 223 and the non-specific control stack area 224. The monitoring of the information abnormality for the non-specific control work area 223 and the non-specific control stack area 224 is performed in a process corresponding to the non-specific control using the non-specific control program and the non-specific control data. Executed.

  FIG. 599 is a flowchart illustrating management execution processing according to the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the management execution processing is executed by reading out a subroutine program in the management processing (FIG. 575), as in the forty-seventh embodiment. Further, the processing of steps S6001 to S6016 in the management execution processing is executed by the main CPU 63 using the non-specific control program and the non-specific control data.

  In steps S6001 to S6008 and steps S6010 to S6016, the same processes as those in steps S3901 to S3915 of the management execution process (FIG. 576) in the forty-seventh embodiment are executed. In step S6009, another monitoring process is performed. When executing the separate monitoring process, a subroutine program corresponding to the different monitoring process set in the non-specific control program is executed. Information for specifying the return address of the later management execution processing is written to the non-specific control stack area 224 by a push command. Then, when the separate monitoring process is completed, information for specifying the return address is read by the pop instruction, and the process returns to the management execution process program indicated by the return address.

  FIG. 600 is a flowchart showing another monitoring process. Note that the processes of steps S6101 to S6108 in the separate monitoring process are executed by the main CPU 63 using the non-specific control program and the non-specific control data.

  First, monitoring processing of the work area 223 for non-specific control is executed (step S6101). The contents of the monitoring process are the same as those in step S5405 of the RAM monitoring process (FIG. 593) in the 54th embodiment. If it is determined in step S6101 that there is an abnormality (step S6102: YES), the work area 223 for non-specific control is cleared to “0” and initialization is performed (step S6103). In this case, all of the normal counter area 231, the open / close execution mode counter area 232, the high frequency support mode counter area 233, the operation result storage area 234, and the management start flag are cleared to "0". This makes it possible to eliminate the information abnormality in the work area 223 for non-specific control.

  On the other hand, in step S6103, the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to “0”. As a result, even if an information error occurs in the non-specific control work area 223, the specific control work area 221, the specific control stack area 222, and the non-specific control stack area 224 are set to " "0" can be prevented from being cleared.

  In step S6103, although the normal counter area 231, the open / close execution mode counter area 232, the high frequency support mode counter area 233, and the operation result storage area 234 are cleared to "0", the management start flag is not cleared to "0". It may be configured. In step S6103, the normal counter area 231, the open / close execution mode counter area 232, the high frequency support mode counter area 233, and the management start flag are cleared to "0", but the operation result storage area 234 is not cleared to "0". It may be configured. In step S6103, the normal counter area 231, the open / close execution mode counter area 232, and the high frequency support mode counter area 233 are cleared to "0", but the operation result storage area 234 and the management start flag are not cleared to "0". It may be configured.

  Thereafter, a clear notification process is executed (step S6104). In the clear notification process, a command indicating that the work area 223 for non-specific control has been cleared to “0” is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. Upon receiving the command, the voice light emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 to emit light in a manner corresponding to the forced clear of the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the “history information is forcibly cleared from the speaker unit 54”. ". In addition, a character image “History information has been forcibly cleared” is displayed on the symbol display device 41. These notifications are maintained until the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and is terminated when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the notification may be ended when the notification end operation is performed by the manager of the game hall. As the notification end operation, for example, the update button 68b may be pressed, or the reset button 68c may be pressed. By confirming the notification, the manager of the gaming hall can grasp that the work area 223 for non-specific control has been forcibly cleared.

  When a negative determination is made in step S6102 or when the process of step S6104 is performed, a monitoring process of the non-specific control stack area 224 is performed (step S6105). The contents of the monitoring process are the same as those in step S5407 of the RAM monitoring process (FIG. 593) in the 54th embodiment. If it is determined in step S6105 that there is an abnormality (step S6106: YES), the stack area 224 for non-specific control is cleared to “0” and initialization is performed (step S6107). This makes it possible to eliminate the information abnormality in the non-specific control stack area 224.

  On the other hand, in step S6107, the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, and the work area 223 for non-specific control are not cleared to “0”. Thus, even if an information error occurs in the non-specific control stack area 224, the specific control work area 221, the specific control stack area 222, and the non-specific control work area 223 are set to " "0" can be prevented from being cleared.

  After that, a clear notification process is executed (step S6108). In the clear notification processing, a command indicating that the stack area 224 for non-specific control has been cleared to “0” is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. Upon receiving the command, the sound light emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 to emit light in a mode corresponding to the forced clear of the stack area 224 for non-specific control, and the “non-specific control stack is Forced to clear. " In addition, a character image "Stack of non-specific control has been forcibly cleared" is displayed on the symbol display device 41. These notifications are maintained until the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and is terminated when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the notification may be ended when the notification end operation is performed by the manager of the game hall. As the notification end operation, for example, the update button 68b may be pressed, or the reset button 68c may be pressed. By confirming the notification, the manager of the gaming hall can grasp that the stack area 224 for non-specific control has been forcibly cleared.

  When the stack area 224 for non-specific control is forcibly cleared, the address of the program in step S6010 in the management execution process (FIG. 599) is uniquely set as the information of the return address after the execution of the separate monitoring process. . As a result, even if the stack area 224 for non-specific control is forcibly cleared, it is possible to return to the program that should originally return in the management execution process. When the stack area 224 for non-specific control is forcibly cleared, the storage order of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for non-specific control is set to the address of the first storage area.

  According to the above configuration, monitoring whether or not an information abnormality has occurred in the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control is executed by the processing corresponding to the specific control in the main CPU 63, and Monitoring whether or not an information abnormality has occurred in the work area 223 for the specific control and the stack area 224 for the non-specific control is executed by a process corresponding to the non-specific control in the main CPU 63. Thus, the processing corresponding to the specific control and the processing corresponding to the non-specific control not only clearly distinguish the areas 221 to 224 of the main RAM 65 to be used, but also the area of the main RAM 65 to be monitored. 221 to 224 can also be clearly distinguished.

  When the work area 223 for non-specific control is cleared to “0”, the information of various registers of the main CPU 63 used in the processing corresponding to the specific control is stored in the work area 223 for non-specific control. The saved information is also cleared to “0”. In this case, even if the process corresponding to the non-specific control ends and returns to the process corresponding to the specific control, it may not be possible to return to the state before the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started. Therefore, when the work area 223 for non-specific control is cleared to “0”, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control may be cleared to “0”. In this configuration, the set value counter in the work area 221 for specific control is also cleared to “0”. As a corresponding process, a configuration in which the set value update process is executed first may be adopted.

<Fifty-eighth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the management process is different from that of the 52nd embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the 52nd embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the 52nd embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 601 is a flowchart illustrating a management process according to the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processing of steps S6201 to S6219 in the management processing is executed by the main CPU 63 using the specific control program and the specific control data.

  First, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 574) (step S6201). This prevents a timer interrupt process (FIG. 574), which is a process corresponding to the specific control, from being interrupted and activated in the middle of a later-described management execution process, which is a process corresponding to the non-specific control. Becomes possible.

  Thereafter, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is overwritten on the HL register of the main CPU 63 by a load instruction as “LD HL, SP” (step S6202). In this case, the information amount of the stack pointer is 16 bits, and the information amount of each of the H register and the L register is 8 bits. And the 8-bit information continuous from the lower side of the stack pointer is overwritten in the L register.

  After that, the load instruction issues “LD (HL), 0” to change the 1-byte storage area corresponding to the information of the stack pointer stored in the HL register of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control to “0”. It is cleared (step S6203). The information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is overwritten in the HL register of the main CPU 63 in step S6202, and the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is not updated until the processing of step S6203 is executed. Since it has not been performed, in step S6203, the storage area of 1 byte corresponding to the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control has been cleared to "0".

  Thereafter, as a “LD SP, SP-1”, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address of the storage area to be written in the next order in the stack area 222 for specific control by a load instruction. (Step S6204). When the specific control stack area 222 is used, the information to be stored is stored from the storage area of the last address in the specific control stack area 222, and each time the information to be stored is added, the specific control stack area 222 is stored. The storage area of the storage destination is changed toward the first address side of the stack area 222 of FIG. Therefore, in step S6204, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address corresponding to the storage area having the smaller address by one address in the stack area 222 for specific control. By executing the processing in step S6204, the storage area in the next order with respect to the storage area cleared to "0" in step S6203 is set as a storage target of information according to the next push command, and in step S6203. The storage area cleared to “0” is set as a target for reading information by the next pop instruction.

  After that, the WA register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction as "LD WA, 0" (step S6205). Also, the BC register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction as "LD BC, 0" (step S6206). Also, the DE register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction as "LD DE, 0" (step S6207). Also, the HL register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction as "LD HL, 0" (step S6208). Also, the IX register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction as "LD IX, 0" (step S6209). In addition, the IY register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction as "LD IY, 0" (step S6210).

  The registers of the main CPU 63 include various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers in addition to the flag registers. In this case, in steps S6205 to S6210, the WA register, the BC register, the DE register, the HL register, the IX register, and the IY register, which are some of the various general-purpose registers, the auxiliary registers, and the index registers, are written. Clear "0". The WA register, the BC register, the DE register, the HL register, the IX register, and the IY register are registers used in management execution processing (step S6212) corresponding to non-specific control. By clearing such registers to “0” prior to the execution of the management execution process (step S 6212) corresponding to the non-specific control, the state of these registers can be changed before the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started. In addition, the state immediately after the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started can be set.

  The information of the WA register, the BC register, the DE register, the HL register, the IX register, and the IY register before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control starts after the processing corresponding to the non-specific control ends. This is unnecessary information in the process corresponding to the specific control. Therefore, even if the information in these registers is cleared to “0” without being saved, no problem occurs in the processing corresponding to the specific control that has been restored after the processing corresponding to the non-specific control has been completed.

  Thereafter, as a “POP PSW”, information is read from the storage area in the write order one immediately before the storage area corresponding to the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control by a pop instruction, The read information is overwritten in the flag register of the main CPU 63 (step S6211). The information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 immediately before the execution of the pop instruction in step S6211 is the storage area in the next writing order with respect to the storage area in the specific control stack area 222 cleared to "0" in step S6203. Is the information corresponding to. Therefore, the storage area in the write order one before the storage area corresponding to the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the specific control stack area 222 is the storage area cleared to “0” in step S6203. . Then, the information read from this storage area is overwritten on the flag register of the main CPU 63, so that the flag register is cleared to "0". One storage area in the specific control stack area 222 has an information amount of 8 bits (1 byte), and the flag register of the main CPU 63 also has an information amount of 8 bits (1 byte). . By clearing the flag register to “0” prior to the execution of the management execution process (step S 6212) corresponding to the non-specific control, the state of the flag register can be changed before the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started. It is possible to set the state immediately after the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started.

  After that, the management execution process is started by reading out a subroutine program corresponding to the management execution process set in the non-specific control program (step S6212). In this case, information for specifying the return address of the management process after the execution of the management execution process is written in the stack area 222 for specific control by a push command. Then, when the management execution processing is completed, information for specifying the return address is read by the pop instruction, and the program returns to the management processing program indicated by the return address.

  The processing content of the management execution processing is the same as the management execution processing (FIG. 587) in the 52nd embodiment. Therefore, after the check processing is completed in the management execution processing, the WA register, the BC register, the DE register, the HL register, the IX register, and the IY register are cleared to "0". As a result, these registers are cleared to "0" prior to the return from the process corresponding to the non-specific control to the process corresponding to the specific control. It is possible to set the state immediately after the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started.

  When the program returns to the management processing program after the execution of the management execution processing, processing for clearing the flag register of the main CPU 63 to “0” is executed. Specifically, first, as “PUSH HL”, the information of the HL register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control by a push command (step S6213). After the execution of the push instruction, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 includes information corresponding to the storage area of the next writing order in the storage area in which the information of the HL register is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control. Become.

  Thereafter, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is overwritten on the HL register of the main CPU 63 by a load instruction as “LD HL, SP” (step S6214). In this case, the information amount of the stack pointer is 16 bits, and the information amount of each of the H register and the L register is 8 bits. And the 8-bit information continuous from the lower side of the stack pointer is overwritten in the L register.

  After that, the load instruction issues “LD (HL), 0” to change the 1-byte storage area corresponding to the information of the stack pointer stored in the HL register of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control to “0”. It is cleared (step S6215). The information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is overwritten in the HL register of the main CPU 63 in step S6214, and the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is not updated until the processing of step S6215 is executed. Since this is not performed, in step S6215, the 1-byte storage area corresponding to the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0".

  Thereafter, as a “LD SP, SP-1”, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address of the storage area to be written in the next order in the stack area 222 for specific control by a load instruction. (Step S6216). When the specific control stack area 222 is used, the information to be stored is stored from the storage area of the last address in the specific control stack area 222, and each time the information to be stored is added, the specific control stack area 222 is stored. The storage area of the storage destination is changed toward the first address side of the stack area 222 of FIG. Therefore, in step S6216, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address corresponding to the storage area on the side where the address of one in the stack area 222 for specific control is smaller. By executing the processing in step S6216, the storage area in the next order with respect to the storage area cleared to “0” in step S6215 is set as an information storage target by the next push instruction, and in step S6215. The storage area cleared to “0” is set as a target for reading information by the next pop command.

  Thereafter, as a “POP PSW”, information is read from the storage area in the write order one immediately before the storage area corresponding to the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control by a pop instruction, The read information is overwritten on the flag register of the main CPU 63 (step S6217). The information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 immediately before the execution of the pop instruction in step S6217 is the same as the storage area in the next write order with respect to the storage area in the specific control stack area 222 cleared to “0” in step S6215. Is the information corresponding to. Therefore, the storage area of the write order immediately before the storage area corresponding to the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the specific control stack area 222 is the specific control specific area cleared to “0” in step S6215. It becomes a storage area in the stack area 222. Then, the information read from this storage area is overwritten on the flag register of the main CPU 63, so that the flag register is cleared to "0". One storage area in the specific control stack area 222 has an information amount of 8 bits (1 byte), and the flag register of the main CPU 63 also has an information amount of 8 bits (1 byte). . By clearing the flag register to “0” after execution of the management execution process (step S 6212) which is a process corresponding to the non-specific control, the main CPU 63 sets the state of the flag register after the process corresponding to the non-specific control ends. Can be brought into a state immediately after the supply of the operating power to the power supply is started. When the pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area in which the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control is one immediately before.

  Thereafter, the information of the HL register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6213 is returned to the HL register of the main CPU 63 as “POP HL” by a pop instruction (step S6218). Since the HL register is cleared to “0” immediately before the end of the management execution process (step S 6212), the information cleared to “0” is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S 6213. At the same time, in step S6218, the information cleared to “0” is returned to the HL register of the main CPU 63, and as a result, the HL register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to “0”. When the pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area in the stack area 222 for specific control whose writing order is two before.

  Thereafter, interruption permission is set to switch from the state in which the generation of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 574) is prohibited to the state in which the generation is permitted (step S6219). As a result, new execution of the timer interrupt processing becomes possible.

  According to the above configuration, the following effects can be obtained in addition to the effects described in the 52nd embodiment.

  When the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started from the situation where the process corresponding to the specific control is being executed, the flag register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to “0”. This eliminates the need to save information of the flag register used in the process corresponding to the specific control in the main RAM 65 in the situation where the process corresponding to the non-specific control is being executed. Therefore, there is no need to secure a capacity for saving the information.

  Further, the flag register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" even when the process corresponding to the non-specific control is returned to the process corresponding to the specific control from the situation where the process corresponding to the non-specific control is being executed. Accordingly, when returning to the process corresponding to the specific control, it is possible to return the state of the flag register to the state immediately before the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started.

  The state in which the flag register is cleared to “0” is a state in which the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration for setting the flag register to a predetermined state when starting the processing corresponding to the non-specific control and when returning to the processing corresponding to the specific control.

  The information of the flag register of the main CPU 63 before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started is information that is not used in the processing corresponding to the specific control after the processing corresponding to the non-specific control ends. Accordingly, even if the flag register is cleared to “0” when the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started, the process corresponding to the specific control after the process corresponding to the non-specific control is completed is performed. It is possible to prevent the influence.

  A predetermined storage area of the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0", and the flag register is cleared to "0" by overwriting the information of the cleared storage area in the flag register by a pop instruction. Configuration. This makes it possible to clear the flag register to “0” even in a configuration in which the clearing of “0” to the flag register is directly controlled by a load instruction.

  Instead of clearing the flag register to “0”, the flag register may be initialized. That is, when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the flag register of the main CPU 63 is once set to “0” and then the information is set to be in the initial state. In S6204 and step S6211, the flag register may be set so as to be in the initial state. In this case, the flag register is set so as to be in the initial state also in steps S6213 to S6218, so that when returning to the processing corresponding to the specific control, the state of the flag register is set to the non-specific control. Can be restored to the state immediately before the processing corresponding to the processing is started.

  In steps S6202 to S6204 and step S6211, the flag register of the main CPU 63 may be set to "1" instead of clearing the flag register to "0". In this case, by setting "1" to all of the flag registers in steps S6213 to S6218 as well, when returning to the processing corresponding to the specific control, the state of the flag register starts the processing corresponding to the non-specific control. It is possible to return to the state immediately before the operation.

  Further, instead of the processing of steps S6202 to S6204 and S6211, the flag register of the main CPU 63 may be directly cleared to "0" by a load instruction as "LD PSW, 0". Further, instead of the processing of steps S6213 to S6218, a configuration may be employed in which the flag register of the main CPU 63 is directly cleared to “0” by a load instruction as “LD PSW, 0”.

  Further, instead of the configuration for executing the processing of steps S6213 and S6218, a configuration may be adopted in which the HL register is cleared to “0” by a load instruction as “LD HL, 0”. Even in this case, it is possible to restore the state of the HL register to the state immediately before the management execution processing, which is processing corresponding to the non-specific control, is executed.

  Further, instead of the configuration in which the process of clearing the flag register to “0” is performed in the process corresponding to the specific control, a configuration in which the process is performed in the process corresponding to the non-specific control may be adopted.

<59th embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the management process is different from that of the 52nd embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the 52nd embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the 52nd embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 602 is a flowchart showing a management process according to the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processing of steps S6301 to S6323 in the management processing is executed by the main CPU 63 using the specific control program and the specific control data.

  First, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit the occurrence of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 574) (step S6301). This prevents a timer interrupt process (FIG. 574), which is a process corresponding to the specific control, from being interrupted and activated in the middle of a later-described management execution process, which is a process corresponding to the non-specific control. Becomes possible.

  Thereafter, as a “PUSH AF”, the information of the A register and the information of the flag register of the main CPU 63 are stored in the stack area 222 for specific control corresponding to the current stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 by a push instruction. The area and the storage area are evacuated to the storage areas in the next writing order (step S6302). Since the A register and the flag register of the main CPU 63 each have an information amount of 8 bits (1 byte), the information of the A register and the information of the flag register are individually stored in two storage areas having consecutive addresses. Will be evacuated. When the push instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area in the stack area 222 for specific control in which the writing order is two later.

  After that, the information of the A register and the information of the flag register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6302 are overwritten on the HL register of the main CPU 63 as “POP HL” by a pop instruction (step S6303). . In this case, the information of the A register saved in the specific control stack area 222 is overwritten on the H register of the main CPU 63, and the information of the flag register saved in the specific control stack area 222 is stored in the L of the main CPU 63. Overwritten to the register. The H register and the L register of the main CPU 63 each have an information amount of 8 bits (1 byte). When the pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area in which the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control is two before.

  Thereafter, the A register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction as "LD A, 0" (step S6304). Then, the information of the A register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten in the L register of the main CPU 63 by a load instruction as "LD L, A" (step S6305), and the load instruction is changed to "LD H, A" by the load instruction. The information of the A register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten on the H register of the main CPU 63 (step S6306). Since the A register has been cleared to “0” in step S6304, the information in the A register is overwritten on each of the L register and the H register, so that each of the L and H registers has been cleared to “0”. Becomes

  Thereafter, as a “PUSH HL”, the information of the HL register (that is, the H register and the L register) of the main CPU 63 corresponds to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control by a push instruction. The storage area and the storage area in the next writing order are saved to the storage area (step S6307). The H register and the L register of the main CPU 63 each have an information amount of 8 bits (1 byte). Will be evacuated. When the push instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area in the stack area 222 for specific control in which the writing order is two later.

  After that, the BC register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction as "LD BC, 0" (step S6308). Also, the DE register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction as "LD DE, 0" (step S6309). Further, the IX register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction as "LD IX, 0" (step S6310). In addition, as the “LD IY, 0”, the IY register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to “0” by the load instruction (step S6311).

  The registers of the main CPU 63 include various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers in addition to the flag registers. In this case, in steps S6308 to S6311, the BC register, the DE register, the IX register, and the IY register, which are some of the general-purpose registers, the auxiliary registers, and the index registers, are cleared to "0". The HL register has been cleared to "0" in steps S6305 and S6306. These BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register are registers used in management execution processing (step S6313), which is processing corresponding to non-specific control. By clearing such registers to “0” prior to the execution of the management execution process (step S6313) corresponding to the non-specific control, the state of these registers can be changed before the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started. In addition, it is possible to set the state immediately after the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started.

  Further, the information of the BC register, the DE register, the HL register, the IX register, and the IY register before the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started is used for the specific control after the process corresponding to the non-specific control is completed. This is unnecessary information in the corresponding processing. Therefore, even if the information in these registers is cleared to “0” without being saved, no problem occurs in the processing corresponding to the specific control that has been restored after the processing corresponding to the non-specific control has been completed.

  After that, as “POP AF”, the pop-up command overwrites the A register and the flag register of the main CPU 63 with the information of the H register and the information of the L register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6307 (step S6307). Step S6312). In this case, the information of the H register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is overwritten on the A register of the main CPU 63, and the information of the L register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is stored in the flag of the main CPU 63. Overwritten to the register. Since both the information of the H register and the information of the L register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control are all “0” information, the A register of the main CPU 63 becomes "0" is cleared and the flag register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0". Thus, the state of the flag register can be set to a state immediately after the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started. When the pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area in which the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control is two before.

  Thereafter, the management execution process is started by reading out a subroutine program corresponding to the management execution process set in the non-specific control program (step S6313). In this case, information for specifying the return address of the management process after the execution of the management execution process is written in the stack area 222 for specific control by a push command. Then, when the management execution processing is completed, information for specifying the return address is read by the pop instruction, and the program returns to the management processing program indicated by the return address.

  After the checking process is completed in the management execution process, the BC register, the DE register, the HL register, the IX register, and the IY register are cleared to "0". As a result, these registers are cleared to "0" prior to the return from the process corresponding to the non-specific control to the process corresponding to the specific control. It is possible to set the state immediately after the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started.

  When the program returns to the management processing program after the execution of the management execution processing, processing for clearing the flag register of the main CPU 63 to “0” is executed. In detail, first, as “PUSH HL”, the information of the HL register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control by a push instruction (step S6314). After the execution of the push instruction, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 includes information corresponding to the storage area of the next writing order in the storage area in which the information of the HL register is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control. Become.

  Thereafter, as a “PUSH AF”, the information of the A register and the information of the flag register of the main CPU 63 are stored in the stack area 222 for specific control corresponding to the current stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 by a push instruction. The area and the storage area are evacuated to the respective storage areas in the next writing order (step S6315). Since the A register and the flag register of the main CPU 63 each have an information amount of 8 bits (1 byte), the information of the A register and the information of the flag register are individually stored in two storage areas having consecutive addresses. Will be evacuated. When the push instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area in the stack area 222 for specific control in which the writing order is two later.

  Thereafter, the information of the A register and the information of the flag register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6315 are overwritten on the HL register of the main CPU 63 as “POP HL” by a pop instruction (step S6316). . In this case, the information of the A register saved in the specific control stack area 222 is overwritten on the H register of the main CPU 63, and the information of the flag register saved in the specific control stack area 222 is stored in the L of the main CPU 63. Overwritten to the register. The H register and the L register of the main CPU 63 each have an information amount of 8 bits (1 byte). When the pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area in which the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control is two before.

  Then, the A register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction as "LD A, 0" (step S6317). Then, the information of the A register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten on the L register of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction as “LD L, A” (step S6318), and the load instruction is written as “LD H, A” by the load instruction. The information in the A register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten on the H register of the main CPU 63 (step S6319). Since the A register has been cleared to "0" in step S6317, the information in the A register is overwritten on each of the L register and the H register, so that each of the L and H registers has been cleared to "0". Becomes

  Thereafter, as a “PUSH HL”, the information of the HL register (that is, the H register and the L register) of the main CPU 63 corresponds to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control by a push instruction. The storage area and the storage area in the next writing order are saved to the storage area (step S6320). The H register and the L register of the main CPU 63 each have an information amount of 8 bits (1 byte). Will be evacuated. When the push instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area in the stack area 222 for specific control in which the writing order is two later.

  After that, as the “POP AF”, the information of the H register and the information of the L register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6320 are overwritten on the A register and the flag register of the main CPU 63 by a pop command (step S6320). Step S6321). In this case, the information of the H register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is overwritten on the A register of the main CPU 63, and the information of the L register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is stored in the flag of the main CPU 63. Overwritten to the register. Since both the information of the H register and the information of the L register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control are all “0” information, the A register of the main CPU 63 is reset by executing the process of step S6321. "0" is cleared and the flag register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0". By clearing the flag register to “0” after executing the management execution process (step S6313) corresponding to the non-specific control, the main CPU 63 resets the state of the flag register after the process corresponding to the non-specific control ends. Can be brought into a state immediately after the supply of the operating power to the power supply is started. When the pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area in which the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control is two before.

  Thereafter, the information of the HL register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6314 is returned to the HL register of the main CPU 63 as “POP HL” by a pop instruction (step S6322). Since the HL register is cleared to “0” immediately before the end of the management execution processing (step S6313), the information cleared to “0” is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6314. At the same time, in step S6322, the information cleared to “0” is returned to the HL register of the main CPU 63, and as a result, the HL register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to “0”. When the pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area in the stack area 222 for specific control whose writing order is two before.

  After that, interrupt permission is set to switch from the state in which the generation of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 574) is prohibited to the state in which the timer interrupt processing is permitted (step S6233). As a result, new execution of the timer interrupt processing becomes possible.

  According to the above configuration, the flag register of the main CPU 63 can be cleared to "0" without executing the process of clearing the predetermined storage area in the stack area 222 for specific control to "0" by a load instruction. Becomes As a result, the flag register of the main CPU 63 can be cleared to “0” even if the clearing of a predetermined storage area in the specific control stack area 222 is restricted by a load instruction. Becomes possible.

  Instead of clearing the flag register to “0”, the flag register may be initialized. That is, when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the flag register of the main CPU 63 is temporarily set to “0”, and then information is set to be in the initial state. In S6307 and S6312, the flag register may be set so as to be in the initial state. In this case, in steps S6314 to S6322, the flag register is set so as to be in the initial state, so that when returning to the process corresponding to the specific control, the state of the flag register is set to the non-specific control. Can be restored to the state immediately before the processing corresponding to the processing is started.

  Also, in steps S6302 to S6307 and step S6312, instead of the configuration in which the flag register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0", a configuration in which all the flag registers are set to "1" may be adopted. In this case, by setting "1" to all of the flag registers in steps S6314 to S6322, when returning to the processing corresponding to the specific control, the state of the flag register is changed to the processing corresponding to the non-specific control. It is possible to return to the state immediately before the operation.

  Further, the configuration may be such that the processes of steps S6302 and S6303 are not performed. In this case, the processing configuration can be simplified.

  Further, the configuration may be such that the processes of step S6315 and step S6316 are not executed. In this case, the processing configuration can be simplified.

  Further, instead of the configuration for executing the processing of steps S6302 to S6306, after the HL register is cleared to “0” by a load instruction as “LD HL, 0”, the HL register that has been cleared to “0” is pushed. The flag register of the main CPU 63 may be cleared to "0" by returning the information saved by the pop instruction to the AF register after saving the information to the stack area 222 for specific control.

  Further, instead of the configuration in which the process of clearing the flag register to “0” is performed in the process corresponding to the specific control, a configuration in which the process is performed in the process corresponding to the non-specific control may be adopted.

<60th embodiment>
The present embodiment is different from the forty-seventh embodiment in the processing configuration of the management process. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the forty-seventh embodiment will be described. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the 47th embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 603 is a flowchart illustrating a management process according to the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processes of steps S6401 to S6416 in the management process are executed by the main CPU 63 using the specific control program and the specific control data.

  First, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 574) (step S6401). This prevents a timer interrupt process (FIG. 574), which is a process corresponding to the specific control, from being interrupted and activated in the middle of a later-described management execution process, which is a process corresponding to the non-specific control. Becomes possible.

  Thereafter, as a “PUSH WA”, the information of the WA register (that is, the W register and the A register) of the main CPU 63 corresponds to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control by a push instruction. The storage area and the storage area in the next writing order are saved to the storage area (step S6402). Since the W register and the A register of the main CPU 63 each have an information amount of 8 bits (1 byte), the information of the W register and the A register are individually saved in two storage areas having consecutive addresses. You. When the push instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area in the stack area 222 for specific control in which the writing order is two later.

  After that, the information of the flag register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten on the A register of the main CPU 63 by a load instruction as “LD A, PSW” (step S6403). In this case, both the flag register and the A register have an information amount of 8 bits (1 byte). Then, as "LD (_FGBUF), A", the information of the A register of the main CPU 63 is saved to the FG buffer set in the work area 221 for specific control by a load instruction (step S6404). Since the information in the flag register has been overwritten in the A register in step S6403, the information in the flag register is saved in the work area 221 for specific control by executing step S6404.

  Thereafter, the information of the WA register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6402 is returned to the WA register of the main CPU 63 as “POP WA” by a pop command (step S6405). Thereby, even if the A register is used to save the information of the flag register to the work area 221 for specific control, it is possible to return the state of the A register to the state before the saving was performed. Become. When the pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area in which the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control is two before.

  After that, the management execution process is started by reading out a subroutine program corresponding to the management execution process set in the non-specific control program (step S6406). In this case, information for specifying the return address of the management process after the execution of the management execution process is written in the stack area 222 for specific control by a push command. Then, when the management execution processing is completed, information for specifying the return address is read by the pop instruction, and the program returns to the management processing program indicated by the return address.

  The processing content of the management execution processing is the same as the management execution processing (FIG. 576) in the 47th embodiment. Therefore, before the check processing is started in the management execution processing, each information of the WA register, the BC register, the DE register, the HL register, the IX register, and the IY register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the work area 223 for non-specific control. At the same time, the information saved in the non-specific control work area 223 after the completion of the check process in the management execution process is stored in the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main CPU 63. Is returned to. As a result, the states of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main CPU 63 can be the same before and after the check processing.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration of the management execution process may be the same as the management execution process (FIG. 583) in the forty-ninth embodiment. 584), and may be the same as the management execution process (FIG. 585) in the fifty-first embodiment.

  When the process returns to the management process program after the execution of the management execution process, a process for returning the information of the flag register of the main CPU 63 to a state before the execution of the management execution process is executed. In detail, first, as “PUSH HL”, the information of the HL register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control by a push command (step S6407). After the execution of the push instruction, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 includes information corresponding to the storage area of the next writing order in the storage area in which the information of the HL register is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control. Become.

  Thereafter, as a “PUSH WA”, the information of the WA register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control by a push command (step S6408). After the execution of the push instruction, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 includes the information corresponding to the storage area of the next writing order in the storage area where the information of the WA register is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control. Become.

  Thereafter, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is overwritten on the HL register of the main CPU 63 by a load instruction as “LD HL, SP” (step S6409). In this case, the information amount of the stack pointer is 16 bits, and the information amount of each of the H register and the L register is 8 bits. And the 8-bit information continuous from the lower side of the stack pointer is overwritten in the L register.

  Thereafter, the information of the flag register saved in the FG buffer in the work area 221 for specific control in step S6406 is overwritten in the A register of the main CPU 63 as “LD A, (_FGBUF)” by the load instruction (step S 6406). S6410). As a load instruction, “LD (HL), A” is stored in the 1-byte storage area corresponding to the information of the stack pointer stored in the HL register of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control. The information of the A register of the CPU 63 is stored (step S6411). Thus, the information of the flag register saved in the FG buffer in the work area 221 for specific control in step S6404 is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control.

  Thereafter, as a “LD SP, SP-1”, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address of the storage area to be written in the next order in the stack area 222 for specific control by a load instruction. (Step S6412). When the specific control stack area 222 is used, the information to be stored is stored from the storage area of the last address in the specific control stack area 222, and each time the information to be stored is added, the specific control stack area 222 is stored. The storage area of the storage destination is changed toward the first address side of the stack area 222 of FIG. Accordingly, in step S6412, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address corresponding to the storage area of the stack area 222 for specific control where the address is smaller by one address. By executing the processing of step S6412, the next storage area is set as a storage target of information by the next push instruction with respect to the storage area in which the information of the A register is saved in step S6411, and In step S6411, the storage area in which the information of the A register has been saved is set as a target of reading information by the next pop instruction.

  Thereafter, as a “POP PSW”, information is read from the storage area in the write order one immediately before the storage area corresponding to the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control by a pop instruction, The read information is overwritten on the flag register of the main CPU 63 (step S6413). The information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 immediately before the execution of the pop instruction in step S6413 is the same as the information corresponding to the storage area in the next writing order with respect to the storage area in which the information of the A register is saved in step S6411. Has become. Accordingly, in the storage area corresponding to the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for the specific control, the storage area in which the write order is one before the storage area in which the information of the A register is saved in step S6411. Area. Then, the information read from this storage area is overwritten on the flag register of the main CPU 63, so that the information of the flag register saved in the FG buffer in the work area 221 for specific control in step S6404 is stored in the flag of the main CPU 63. It will be restored to the register. When the pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area in which the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control is one immediately before.

  After that, the information of the WA register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6408 is returned to the WA register of the main CPU 63 as “POP WA” by a pop instruction (step S6414). When the pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area in which the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control is two before. In addition, the information of the HL register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6407 is returned to the HL register of the main CPU 63 as “POP HL” by a pop instruction (step S6415). When the pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area in which the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control is two before.

  Thereafter, interrupt permission is set to switch from the state in which the generation of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 574) is prohibited to the state in which the timer interrupt processing is permitted (step S6416). As a result, new execution of the timer interrupt processing becomes possible.

  According to the above configuration, when the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started from the situation where the process corresponding to the specific control is being executed, the information of the flag register of the main CPU 63 is not stored in the stack area 222 for the specific control. It is possible to retreat to the work area 221 for specific control. When the process corresponding to the non-specific control is executed and the process corresponding to the specific control is restored, the information of the flag register saved in the specific control work area 221 is stored in the flag of the main CPU 63. It returns to the register. This allows the information to be returned to the flag register of the main CPU 63 from the storage area of the specific control work area 221 specified on the program without referring to the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63. Even if the information of the stack pointer of the side CPU 63 has been rewritten due to noise or the like, the information can be restored to the flag register of the main CPU 63.

  Also, instead of the configuration in which the process of saving the information of the flag register in the main RAM 65 is performed in the process corresponding to the specific control, the configuration may be such that the process is performed in the process corresponding to the non-specific control. Further, instead of the configuration in which the processing of returning the information of the flag register saved in the main RAM 65 to the flag register of the main CPU 63 is executed in the processing corresponding to the specific control, the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is performed. It may be configured to be executed.

<61st embodiment>
The present embodiment is different from the forty-seventh embodiment in the processing configuration of the management process. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the forty-seventh embodiment will be described. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the 47th embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 604 is a flowchart showing a management process according to the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processing of steps S6501 to S6519 in the management processing is executed by the main CPU 63 using the specific control program and the specific control data.

  First, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 574) (step S6501). This prevents a timer interrupt process (FIG. 574), which is a process corresponding to the specific control, from being interrupted and activated in the middle of a later-described management execution process, which is a process corresponding to the non-specific control. Becomes possible.

  Thereafter, as a “PUSH HL”, the information of the HL register (that is, the H register and the L register) of the main CPU 63 corresponds to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control by a push instruction. The storage area and the storage area in the next write order are saved to the storage area (step S6502). Since the H register and the L register of the main CPU 63 each have an information amount of 8 bits (1 byte), the information of the H register and the L register is individually saved in two storage areas having consecutive addresses. You. When the push instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area in the stack area 222 for specific control in which the writing order is two later.

  Thereafter, as a “PUSH AF”, the information of the A register and the information of the flag register of the main CPU 63 are stored in the stack area 222 for specific control corresponding to the current stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 by a push instruction. The area and the storage area are saved in the storage areas in the next writing order (step S6503). Since the A register and the flag register of the main CPU 63 each have an information amount of 8 bits (1 byte), the information of the A register and the information of the flag register are individually stored in two storage areas having consecutive addresses. Will be evacuated. When the push instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area in the stack area 222 for specific control in which the writing order is two later.

  Thereafter, the information of the A register and the information of the flag register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6503 are overwritten on the HL register of the main CPU 63 as “POP HL” by a pop instruction (step S6504). . In this case, the information of the A register saved in the specific control stack area 222 is overwritten on the H register of the main CPU 63, and the information of the flag register saved in the specific control stack area 222 is stored in the L of the main CPU 63. Overwritten to the register. When the pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area in which the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control is two before.

  Thereafter, the information of the L register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten on the A register of the main CPU 63 by a load instruction as “LD A, L” (step S6505). Since the information of the flag register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten in the L register in step S6504, the information of the flag register is overwritten on the A register by overwriting the information of the L register with the A register. Become. Then, as "LD (_FGBUF), A", the information of the A register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the FG buffer set in the work area 221 for specific control by a load instruction (step S6506). Since the information in the flag register has been overwritten in the A register in step S6505, the information in the flag register is saved in the work area 221 for specific control by executing step S6506.

  Thereafter, as a “PUSH HL”, the information of the HL register (that is, the H register and the L register) of the main CPU 63 corresponds to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control by a push instruction. The storage area and the storage area in the next writing order are saved to the storage area (step S6507). In this case, since the information of the A register and the information of the flag register are overwritten in the HL register in step S6504, the information of the A register and the information of the flag register are saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6507. I was made to. When the push instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area in the stack area 222 for specific control in which the writing order is two later.

  After that, as the “POP AF”, the pop register instructs the A register and the flag register of the main CPU 63 to overwrite the information of the H register and the information of the L register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6507 (FIG. Step S6508). In this case, the information of the H register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is overwritten on the A register of the main CPU 63, and the information of the L register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is stored in the flag of the main CPU 63. Overwritten to the register. The information of the H register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is the information of the A register at the time of step S6503, and the information of the L register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is the flag at the time of step S6503. This is register information. Therefore, by executing the processing of step S6508, the states of the A register and the flag register of the main CPU 63 return to the state at the time of step S6503. When the pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area in which the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control is two before.

  Thereafter, the information of the HL register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6502 is returned to the HL register of the main CPU 63 as “POP HL” by a pop command (step S6509). Thus, the state of the HL register of the main CPU 63 returns to the state at the time of step S6502. When the pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area in which the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control is two before.

  After that, the management execution process is started by reading out a subroutine program corresponding to the management execution process set in the non-specific control program (step S6510). In this case, information for specifying the return address of the management process after the execution of the management execution process is written in the stack area 222 for specific control by a push command. Then, when the management execution processing is completed, information for specifying the return address is read by the pop instruction, and the program returns to the management processing program indicated by the return address.

  In the management execution process, before the check process is started, each information of the BC register, the DE register, the HL register, the IX register, and the IY register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the work area 223 for non-specific control, After the checking process is completed in the management execution process, the information saved in the non-specific control work area 223 is returned to the BC, DE, HL, IX, and IY registers of the main CPU 63. Thus, the BC register, the DE register, the HL register, the IX register, and the IY register of the main CPU 63 can be set to the same state before and after the check processing.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration of the management execution process may be the same as the management execution process (FIG. 583) in the forty-ninth embodiment. 584), and may be the same as the management execution process (FIG. 585) in the fifty-first embodiment.

  When the process returns to the management process program after the execution of the management execution process, a process for returning the information of the flag register of the main CPU 63 to a state before the execution of the management execution process is executed. More specifically, first, as “PUSH HL”, the information of the HL register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control by a push command (step S6511). After the execution of the push instruction, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 includes information corresponding to the storage area of the next writing order in the storage area in which the information of the HL register is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control. Become.

  Thereafter, as a “PUSH AF”, the information of the A register and the information of the flag register of the main CPU 63 are stored in the stack area 222 for specific control corresponding to the current stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 by a push instruction. The area and the storage area are evacuated to the respective storage areas in the next writing order (step S6512). Since the A register and the flag register of the main CPU 63 each have an information amount of 8 bits (1 byte), the information of the A register and the information of the flag register are individually stored in two storage areas having consecutive addresses. Will be evacuated. When the push instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area in the stack area 222 for specific control in which the writing order is two later.

  Thereafter, the information of the A register and the information of the flag register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6512 are overwritten on the HL register of the main CPU 63 as “POP HL” by a pop instruction (step S6513). . In this case, the information of the A register saved in the specific control stack area 222 is overwritten on the H register of the main CPU 63, and the information of the flag register saved in the specific control stack area 222 is stored in the L of the main CPU 63. Overwritten to the register. When the pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area in which the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control is two before.

  Thereafter, the information of the flag register at the time of step S6503 saved in the FG buffer in the specific control work area 221 in step S6506 by the load instruction as “LD A, (_FGBUF)” is stored in the A register of the main CPU 63. Is overwritten (step S6514). Then, the information in the A register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten on the L register of the main CPU 63 by a load instruction as "LD L, A" (step S6515). Since the information of the flag register of the main CPU 63 at the time of step S6503 has been restored to the A register in step S6514, the information of the A register is overwritten on the L register, so that the L register at the time of step S6503 is stored in the L register. The information in the flag register is overwritten.

  Thereafter, as a “PUSH HL”, the information of the HL register (that is, the H register and the L register) of the main CPU 63 corresponds to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control by a push instruction. The storage area and the storage area in the next writing order are saved to the storage area (step S6516). In this case, since the H register is overwritten with the information of the A register at the time of step S6512 in step S6513, the information of the A register is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6516. Become. Further, since the information of the flag register at the time of step S6503 has been overwritten in the L register in step S6515, the information of the flag register has been saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6516.

  After that, as the “POP AF”, the pop register instructs the A register and the flag register of the main CPU 63 to overwrite the information of the H register and the information of the L register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6516 (step S6516). Step S6517). In this case, the information of the H register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is overwritten on the A register of the main CPU 63, and the information of the L register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is stored in the flag of the main CPU 63. Overwritten to the register. The information of the H register saved in the specific control stack area 222 is the information of the A register at the time of step S6512, and the information of the L register saved in the specific control stack area 222 is the flag at the time of step S6503. This is register information. Therefore, by executing the processing of step S6517, the state of the A register of the main CPU 63 returns to the state of step S6512, and the state of the flag register returns to the state at the time of step S6503.

  Incidentally, the A register of the main CPU 63 is not used in the management execution process. Therefore, the state of the A register at the time of step S6512 is the state of the A register at the time of step S6508, and the state of the A register at the time of step S6508 is the state of the A register at the time of step S6503. Therefore, by executing the process of step S6517, the states of the A register and the flag register of the main CPU 63 return to the state at the time of step S6503. When the pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area in which the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control is two before.

  Thereafter, the information of the HL register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6511 is returned to the HL register of the main CPU 63 as “POP HL” by a pop instruction (step S6518). Thus, the state of the HL register of the main CPU 63 returns to the state at the time of step S6511. When the pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area in which the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control is two before.

  Thereafter, interruption permission is set to switch from a state in which the generation of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 574) is prohibited to a state in which the generation is permitted (step S6519). As a result, new execution of the timer interrupt processing becomes possible.

  According to the above configuration, the information of the flag register of the main CPU 63 is not executed by executing the load instruction by directly executing the process of directly overwriting the information of the flag register from the flag register of the main CPU 63 to the other registers of the main CPU 63. Can be saved to the work area 221 for specific control.

  Instead of executing the processing of steps S6505 to S6508, instead of executing the processing of step S6504, the information of the flag register was overwritten by a load instruction as “LD (_FGBUF), L”. By saving the information of the L register in the FG buffer, the information of the flag register may be saved in the work area 221 for specific control.

  In addition, without executing the processing of step S6514 and step S6515, instead of executing the processing of step S6513, the work area for specific control is designated as “LD L, (_FGBUF)” by a load instruction. 221 may be configured to overwrite the information of the flag register saved in the L register.

  Also, instead of the configuration in which the process of saving the information of the flag register in the main RAM 65 is performed in the process corresponding to the specific control, the configuration may be such that the process is performed in the process corresponding to the non-specific control. Further, instead of the configuration in which the processing of returning the information of the flag register saved in the main RAM 65 to the flag register of the main CPU 63 is executed in the processing corresponding to the specific control, the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is performed. It may be configured to be executed.

<62nd embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the forty-seventh embodiment in the processing configuration executed by the main CPU 63. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the forty-seventh embodiment will be described. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the 47th embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 605 is a flowchart showing the main processing in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processing of steps S6601 to S6621 in the main processing is executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

  First, power-on wait processing is executed (step S6601). In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits without advancing to the next process until a predetermined time for wait (specifically, one second) elapses after the main process is started. In the execution period of the power-on wait processing, the operation start and the initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed. Thereafter, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted (step S6602).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the power failure flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control in the main RAM 65 (step S6603). If “1” is set in the power failure flag (step S6603: YES), a checksum is calculated for the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 (step S6604).

  The method of calculating the checksum is arbitrary. For example, a calculation method of adding all the numerical values of the storage area for which the checksum is to be calculated can be used. The method of calculating the checksum is the same as the method of calculating the checksum in the process at the time of power failure described later. The checksum calculated in the process at the time of a power failure to be described later is stored in the work area 221 for specific control. At this time, it is excluded from the storage area to be operated.

  That is, when calculating the checksum, some storage areas in the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 are to be calculated. In the storage area to be calculated, the checksum is calculated in the process at the time of power failure when the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, and then the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 is restarted, and the process of step S6604 is executed. Until the power supply such as the backup power to the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control is continued, the storage area is basically not rewritten. Therefore, the information of the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 is not changed between the time when the supply of the operation power to the MPU 62 is stopped and the time when the supply of the operation power to the MPU 62 is restarted. In this case, the checksums for the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 are the same as those immediately before the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped. In the storage area to be calculated when calculating the checksum, an area in which the setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 in the specific control work area 221 is set (specifically, a setting value counter) )It is included.

  After that, the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area calculated in the power failure process executed immediately before the supply of the operation power to the MPU 62 is stopped and stored in the specific control work area 221 The checksum for 222 is read from the work area 221 for specific control, and the read checksum is compared with the checksum calculated in step S6604 (step S6605). Then, it is determined whether or not the checksums match (step S6606).

  Here, the power failure information storage processing executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 606. The power failure information storage processing is executed in step S6801 in timer interrupt processing (FIG. 608) described later.

  In the power failure information storage process, first, information “10”, which is information on the number of repetitions for a power failure signal, is set in a repetition counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step S6701), and the work area for specific control 221 is cleared to "0" (step S6702).

  Thereafter, a process of reading information of the power failure signal received at the input port of the MPU 62 is executed (step S6703). In this case, if a power failure signal (LOW level power failure signal) corresponding to the absence of power interruption has been received, information “0” is stored in the input port as non-power interruption information, When a power failure signal (HI level power failure signal) corresponding to the occurrence of power interruption has been received, information “1” is stored in the input port as power failure occurrence information. In step S6703, a process of reading the information of the power failure signal into the register of the main CPU 63 is executed.

  If the information of the power failure signal read in step S6703 corresponds to the occurrence of a power failure (the occurrence of a power failure) (step S6704: YES), the numerical information of the power failure detection counter is incremented by one (step S6705). If a negative determination is made in step S6704 or if the process in step S6705 is performed, the numerical information of the repetition counter is decremented by one (step S6706). Then, it is determined whether the numerical information of the repetition counter after the subtraction of 1 is “0” (step S6707). If a negative determination is made in step S6707, the process returns to step S6703 and repeats the processing of steps S6703 to S6706. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S6707, the flow advances to step S6708.

  In step S6708, it is determined whether or not the current numerical information of the power failure detection counter is equal to or more than the trigger reference number corresponding to the power failure occurrence. If the number is less than the trigger reference number of times, the power outage information storage processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the number of times is equal to or more than the trigger reference number, the power failure processing of steps S6709 to S6712 is executed.

  Specifically, first, “1” is set to a power failure flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step S6709). Thereby, when the process at the time of power failure is executed normally and the storage of the information in the main RAM 65 is normally performed, the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started again when the specific control "1" is set in the power failure flag of the work area 221.

  After that, a checksum is calculated for the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 (step S6710). In this case, the storage area in the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control to be calculated when the checksum is calculated is the target of the checksum calculation in step S6604 of the main processing (FIG. 605). It is the same as the storage area in the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control. In the storage area to be calculated when calculating the checksum, an area (specifically, a setting value counter) in which setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 in the work area 221 for specific control is set. )It is included. Then, the calculated checksum is stored in the storage area for storing the checksum in the work area 221 for specific control, which is excluded from the calculation target of the checksum.

  Thereafter, the information of the output port in the register of the main CPU 63 is all set to "0" (step S6711), and the access to the main RAM 65 is prohibited (step S6712). Then, the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed.

  Since the power failure information storage process is executed as the first process of the timer interrupt process, it is not necessary to execute the process during the timer interrupt process after the power is restored. As a result, it is not necessary to store the address of the processing being executed at the time of the power failure as stack information in the main RAM 65, and the processing load of the processing at the time of the power failure can be reduced.

  Returning to the description of the main process (FIG. 605), if a negative determination is made in step S6603 or step S6606, a clear process at the time of non-setting update is executed (step S6607). In the clear processing at the time of non-setting update, the specific control is performed except for an area (specifically, a set value counter) in which the setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 in the specific control work area 221 is set. Is cleared to "0" and the initial setting is executed. As a result, since the area indicating whether the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the high probability mode is cleared to “0”, the winning / rejecting lottery is performed regardless of the winning / rejecting lottery mode immediately before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. The mode is a low probability mode. In addition, the game is not executed, the opening / closing execution mode is not executed, and the general-purpose display unit 38a is not variably displayed, and the general electric functioning object 34a is in the closed state. Situation. In addition, since the hold storage area 65a and the ordinary power hold area 65c provided in the work area 221 for specific control are also cleared to "0", the hold information for the special figure display unit 37a is erased and the general figure display unit is cleared. The hold information for 38a is deleted. In the clearing process at the time of non-setting update, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0" and the initial setting is executed. In the clearing process at the time of non-setting update, initial setting is executed after various registers of the main CPU 63 are also cleared to "0".

  On the other hand, in the clearing process at the time of non-specific update, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to “0”. As a result, even if the power failure flag is not set to “1” due to the failure of the power failure process, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are set to “0”. It becomes possible not to be cleared. Further, even if an error occurs in the checksum of the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are cleared to “0”. It is possible not to be performed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S6603 or step S6606, and the clear processing at the time of non-setting update is executed in step S6607, then the value of the set value counter in the work area 221 for specific control is checked to check the pachinko machine. It is determined whether the set value of 10 is normal (step S6608). Specifically, when the setting value set in the setting value counter is any one of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”, it is determined that the setting is normal, and when the setting value is “0” or 7 or more, an abnormality is determined. It is determined that there is. If the set value is abnormal (step S6608: NO), a process (steps S6611 to S6621) for newly setting the set value described below is executed. This makes it possible to monitor whether the set value is normal even in the case where a negative determination is made in step S6603 or step S6606 and the non-setting update clearing process (step S6607) is executed. In addition, when the set value is abnormal, the set value can be reset.

  If the set value is normal (step S6608: YES), power-on setting processing is executed (step S6609). In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the work area 221 for specific control such as initialization of a power failure flag is set to an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current game state is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81.

  Although the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process, the occurrence of the timer interrupt process is prohibited when the main process is started. The state in which the generation of the timer interrupt processing is prohibited is released at a timing before the processing of step S6610 is completed after the processing of step S6609 is completed, and the execution of the timer interrupt processing is permitted. As a result, when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the power-on setting process in step S6609 ends, and the timer interrupt process is not executed until the stage before the process in step S6610 is started. Therefore, the processing for advancing the game by the main CPU 63 is not started until the situation is reached.

  After that, the process proceeds to the remaining process of steps S6610 to S6613. That is, the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process, but a remaining time is generated between one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. Although the remaining time varies according to the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, the remaining process of step S6610 to step S6613 is repeatedly executed using the irregular time. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining processes in steps S6610 to S6613 are irregular processes that are executed irregularly. In steps S6610 to S6613, the same processes as those in steps S113 to S116 of the main process (FIG. 514) in the 33rd embodiment are executed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, when the power failure flag of the work area 221 for specific control is not set to “1”, or the checksums do not match. In this case, if the set value is normal after executing the non-setting update clearing process (step S6608: YES), the process proceeds to a process for advancing the game. As a result, even if the power failure flag is not set to “1” due to the failure of the power failure process, the power ON / OFF operation is performed again after the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. There is no need to perform an OFF operation. Further, even if an error occurs in the checksum of the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control, the power is turned ON / OFF again after the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. No action is required.

  If an affirmative determination is made in both step S6603 and step S6606, it is determined whether the set value of the pachinko machine 10 is normal by checking the value of the set value counter in the work area 221 for specific control (step S6614). ). Specifically, when the setting value set in the setting value counter is any one of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”, it is determined that the setting is normal, and when the setting value is “0” or 7 or more, an abnormality is determined. It is determined that there is. If the set value is abnormal (step S6614: NO), a process (steps S6611 to S6621) for newly setting the set value described below is executed.

  If the setting value is normal (step S6614: YES), it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c has been pressed (step S6615), and whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a has been turned on using the setting key. It is determined whether or not the front door frame 14 is open with respect to the inner frame 13 (step S6616), and whether or not the gaming machine body 12 is open with respect to the outer frame 11 (step S6617). It is determined whether or not there is (step S6618).

  In this embodiment, a front door opening sensor 95 for detecting whether or not the front door frame 14 is in an open state with respect to the inner frame 13 is electrically connected to the main CPU 63. The detection result of 95 is input to the main CPU 63. In this case, when the front door frame 14 is in the closed state with respect to the inner frame 13, the front door opening sensor 95 transmits a close detection signal to the main CPU 63, and the front door frame 14 is in the open state with respect to the inner frame 13. In this case, the front door opening sensor 95 transmits an opening detection signal to the main CPU 63. The main CPU 63 specifies that the front door frame 14 is in the closed state when receiving the closing detection signal from the front door opening sensor 95, and determines when the opening detection signal is received from the front door opening sensor 95. It is specified that the front door frame 14 is in the open state.

  In this embodiment, a main body opening sensor 96 for detecting whether or not the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state with respect to the outer frame 11 is electrically connected to the main CPU 63. The detection result of 96 is input to the main CPU 63. In this case, when the gaming machine main body 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the main body opening sensor 96 transmits a closing detection signal to the main CPU 63, and the gaming machine main body 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11. In some cases, the main body opening sensor 96 transmits an opening detection signal to the main CPU 63. The main CPU 63 determines that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closed state when receiving the closing detection signal from the main body opening sensor 96, and determines when the gaming machine main body 12 is receiving the opening detection signal from the main body opening sensor 96. It is specified that the main body 12 is in the open state.

  If the reset button 68c has not been pressed (step S6615: NO), the power-on setting processing is executed in step S6609, and then the remaining processing in steps S6610 to S6613 is repeated. That is, when the reset button 68c is not pressed, the process shifts to the process for controlling the progress of the game without executing the process of clearing the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control. .

  If the reset button 68c is being pressed (step S6615: YES) and a negative determination is made in any of steps S6616 to S6618, a clear process for non-setting update is performed (step S6607). ), On condition that the set value is normal (step S6608: YES), the processing shifts to processing for controlling the progress of the game after step S6609. The processing content of the clear processing at the time of non-setting update is as described above.

  If the reset button 68c is being pressed (step S6615: YES) and a positive determination is made in all of the steps S6616 to S6618, a process for updating the set value is executed. Also, when it is determined in step S6608 or step S6614 that the set value is abnormal, a process for updating the set value is executed.

  Specifically, a setting value copy process is executed first (step S6619). In the copy processing, the information of the set value counter used to specify the set value of the pachinko machine 10 in the work area 221 for specific control is stored in a copy area provided in the work area 221 for specific control. . As a result, even if the information of the set value counter is cleared to “0” in the setting update clearing process (step S6620) to be executed thereafter, the information before the setting value updating clearing process is executed is executed. It is possible to grasp the set value of the pachinko machine 10 (that is, the set value of the pachinko machine 10 before the supply of the operation power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped).

  Thereafter, a clear process at the time of setting update is executed (step S6620). In the clearing process at the time of setting update, the work area 221 for the specific control is set to “0” except for the area indicating whether the winning / rejecting lottery mode in the work area 221 for the specific control is the high probability mode and the copy area. "Clear and execute the initial setting. As a result, the game round is not executed, the opening / closing execution mode is not executed, and the general-purpose display unit 38a is not variably displayed. There is a certain situation. In addition, since the hold storage area 65a and the ordinary power hold area 65c provided in the work area 221 for specific control are also cleared to "0", the hold information for the special figure display unit 37a is erased and the general figure display unit is cleared. The hold information for 38a is deleted. In the clearing process at the time of setting update, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to “0” and the initial setting is executed. In the clearing process at the time of setting update, the set value counter used to specify the set value of the pachinko machine 10 is cleared to “0”. In the clearing process at the time of setting update, the initial setting is executed after the various registers of the main CPU 63 are also cleared to "0".

  On the other hand, in the clearing process at the time of setting update, since the area indicating whether the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the high probability mode is not cleared to “0”, even if the setting value updating process (step S6621) is executed, the winning / rejecting lottery mode is executed. Can be maintained in the mode before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. In addition, since the copy area is not cleared to “0” in the clearing process at the time of setting update, it is possible to specify the set value that was set before the clearing process at the time of setting update is performed. Note that the present invention is not limited to the above configuration, and the setting value counter used for specifying the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 may not be cleared to “0” in the clearing process at the time of setting update. In the clearing process, an area indicating whether or not the win / fail lottery mode is the high probability mode may be cleared to “0”.

  In the clearing process at the time of setting update, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to “0”. As a result, even when the set value updating process capable of changing the set value of the pachinko machine 10 is executed, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to “0”. It is possible to do so.

  After that, in step S6621, a setting value update process is executed. The processing content of the setting value update processing is the same as the setting value update processing (FIG. 590) in the fifty-fourth embodiment. After executing the set value update process, the process proceeds to a process for controlling the progress of the game after step S6609.

  According to the above configuration, when the set value is abnormal, the set value update process is started without requiring any special operation by the administrator of the game hall. Then, when the set value updating process is completed, the process proceeds to a process for controlling the progress of the game. As a result, it is possible to play a game in a situation where a normal set value is set. On the other hand, in order to complete the setting value update process, it is necessary to perform an OFF operation using the setting key for the setting key insertion section 68a, and the setting value is set arbitrarily by a person other than the game hall manager, and the game is started. Can be prevented from occurring.

  Next, a description will be given of a configuration for forcibly stopping the progress of the game when the main CPU 63 cannot perform various processes normally. FIG. 607 (a) is a block diagram for explaining the configuration of the MPU 62.

  As shown in FIG. 607 (a), the MPU 62 includes a main CPU 63, a main ROM 64, and a main RAM 65, and further includes a reset signal output unit 251 and a program monitoring unit 252. The reset signal output unit 251 has a function of outputting a reset signal to the main CPU 63. Specifically, the reset signal output unit 251 outputs the reset signal as the HI level signal when the operating power is supplied from the power supply / emission control device 78 and the output disable condition is not satisfied. A reset signal is output to the CPU 63, and when the operating power is not supplied from the power supply / emission control device 78 or when the output disable condition is satisfied even when the operating power is supplied, the reset signal is output to the main CPU 63. Not output to The main CPU 63 executes various processes when the operating power is supplied from the power supply / emission control device 78 and receives the reset signal from the reset signal output unit 251. Even if the operating power is supplied, if no reset signal is received from the reset signal output unit 251, various processes are not executed. Further, when the main CPU 63 switches from a state in which the reset signal is not received from the reset signal output unit 251 to a state in which the reset signal is received when the operating power is supplied from the power supply / emission control device 78. The main processing (FIG. 605) is started.

  The program monitoring unit 252 has a function of monitoring whether the main CPU 63 can normally perform various processes. Specifically, the program monitoring unit 252 monitors whether the value of the program counter provided in the main CPU 63 is an abnormal value. The program counter is for storing an address where an instruction to be executed in the main CPU 63 is stored. A possible value is defined for the program counter, and the program monitoring unit 252 monitors whether the value of the program counter is a value other than the possible value. In addition, when writing information to the work area 221 for specific control by a load instruction, the program monitoring unit 252 monitors whether the address specified as the write destination area is an abnormal address. When reading information from the work area 221 for specific control by a load instruction, the program monitoring unit 252 may be configured to monitor whether the address specified as the area to be read is an abnormal address.

  If the program monitoring unit 252 determines that the value of the program counter is an abnormal value, or determines that the address specified when writing information by the load instruction is an abnormal address, the reset signal output unit 251 Output a monitoring error signal to When the monitoring signal is received from the program monitoring unit 252, the reset signal output unit 251 temporarily stops the output of the reset signal even if the operating power is supplied from the power supply / firing control device 78, and continues to stop. After the output of the reset signal is stopped for a period, the output of the reset signal is restarted. The stop continuation period is a period sufficient for the main CPU 63 to specify that the output of the reset signal is stopped. Accordingly, when the value of the program counter becomes an abnormal value, or when an address specified when writing information by a load instruction becomes an abnormal address, the main CPU 63 Will execute the main processing.

  FIG. 607 (b) is a time chart showing the output state of the reset signal by the reset signal output unit 251. FIG. 607 (b1) shows a period during which operating power is supplied from the power supply / emission control device 78, and FIG. 607 (b2) shows a period during which a reset signal is output from the reset signal output unit 251. b3) indicates the timing at which the monitoring error signal is output from the program monitoring unit 252.

  First, a case where the monitoring error signal is not output from the program monitoring unit 252 will be described. As shown in FIG. , T2, the output of the reset signal from the reset signal output unit 251 is started as shown in FIG. 607 (b). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 607 (b1), the supply of the operating power from the power supply / emission control device 78 to the MPU 62 is stopped at the timing of t3, and reset at the timing of t4 as shown in FIG. 607 (b2). The output of the reset signal from the signal output unit 251 is stopped.

  Next, a case in which a monitoring abnormality signal is output from the program monitoring unit 252 will be described. As shown in FIG. Thus, the output of the reset signal from the reset signal output unit 251 is started at the timing of t6, as shown in FIG. 607 (b). Thereafter, at time t7, the value of the program counter becomes an abnormal value, or the address specified when information is written by a load instruction becomes an abnormal address, so that program monitoring is performed as shown in FIG. 607 (b3). The monitoring abnormality signal is output from the unit 252 to the reset signal output unit 251. As a result, as shown in FIG. 607 (b2), the output of the reset signal from the reset signal output unit 251 is temporarily stopped at the timing of t7, and restarted at the subsequent timing of t8.

  In this case, the main CPU 63 stops the execution of various processes at the timing of t7, and starts the main process (FIG. 605) at the timing of t8 when the rising of the reset signal is confirmed. However, since the power failure process is not executed when the execution of various processes by the main CPU 63 is stopped, the main process (FIG. 605) is performed in a situation where the power failure flag in the work area 221 for specific control is not set to “1”. Is started, and the main processing (FIG. 605) is started without storing the checksums for the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control. Therefore, in the main process (FIG. 605), a negative determination is made in step S6603 or step S6606, and a clear process for non-setting update (step S6607) is executed. Thereby, when the value of the program counter becomes an abnormal value or the designated address becomes an abnormal address when information is written by the load instruction, and the monitoring error signal is output from the program monitoring unit 252, It is possible to execute a clearing process at the time of non-setting update, in which a predetermined storage area of the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to “0”. .

  However, in the non-specific update clearing process, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to “0”. Accordingly, even if the program monitoring unit 252 outputs a monitoring abnormality signal due to an abnormal value of the program counter value or an abnormal address specified when writing information by a load instruction, the non- The work area 223 for specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control can be prevented from being cleared to “0”.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 607 (b), the supply of operating power from the power supply / emission control device 78 to the MPU 62 is stopped at the timing of t9 as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 607 (b2), the output of the reset signal from the reset signal output unit 251 is stopped.

  Next, a timer interrupt process executed by the main CPU 63 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The timer interrupt process is executed periodically (for example, every 4 milliseconds) while the processes of steps S6610 to S6613 are being executed in the main process (FIG. 605). The program corresponding to the timer interrupt process is set as a program for specific control.

  In steps S6801 to S6819, the same processes as those in steps S5201 to S5219 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 591) in the 54th embodiment are executed. These processes are executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for specific control and data for specific control. After that, a setting monitoring process is executed (step S6820). FIG. 609 is a flowchart showing the setting monitoring process.

  By checking the value of the set value counter in the work area 221 for specific control, it is determined whether the set value of the pachinko machine 10 is normal (step S6901). Specifically, when the setting value set in the setting value counter is any one of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”, it is determined that the setting is normal, and when the setting value is “0” or 7 or more, an abnormality is determined. It is determined that there is.

  If the set value is abnormal (step S6901: NO), first, a copy process of the set value is executed (step S6902). In the copy processing, the information of the set value counter used to specify the set value of the pachinko machine 10 in the work area 221 for specific control is stored in a copy area provided in the work area 221 for specific control. . Thereby, it is possible to grasp the set value of the pachinko machine 10 before the execution of the set value update process executed thereafter.

  Thereafter, an abnormal command indicating that an abnormality in the set value has occurred is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step S6903). Upon receiving the abnormal command, the sound light emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 to emit light in a manner corresponding to the set value abnormality, and also outputs a sound saying “set value abnormality detected” from the speaker unit 54. Output. In addition, the symbol display device 41 displays a character image of “Setting value abnormality is detected.” These notifications are maintained until the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and is terminated when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the notification may be ended when the notification end operation is performed by the manager of the game hall. As the notification end operation, for example, the update button 68b may be pressed, or the reset button 68c may be pressed. By confirming the notification, the administrator of the game hall can grasp that the set value abnormality has occurred.

  After that, a setting value update process is executed (step S6904). In other words, each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 608) is executed, it is monitored whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the set value. To perform the setting value update process. The processing content of the setting value update processing is the same as the setting value update processing (FIG. 590) in the fifty-fourth embodiment. Therefore, each time the update button 68b is pressed once, the set value is updated one step at a time, and the set value being selected is determined by detecting the game ball by the out-opening detection sensor 48a. The set value that is being updated and the set value that has been confirmed are displayed on the third notification display device 69c. Thereafter, when the setting key insertion section 68a is switched from the ON state to the OFF state, it is determined that the condition for ending the setting value updating process is satisfied. After executing the set value update process, the process returns to the timer interrupt process (FIG. 608).

  Here, in the setting value updating process, it is not determined that the end condition is satisfied only by the setting key insertion unit 68a being in the OFF state, and the setting key insertion unit 68a is switched from the ON state to the OFF state. It is determined that the termination condition is satisfied when the condition is satisfied. When the setting value updating process is performed in the setting monitoring process, the setting key insertion unit 68a is in the OFF state at the start of the setting value updating process. It is necessary to insert a setting key into the setting key insertion section 68a, perform an ON operation once, and then perform an OFF operation. As a result, it is possible to prevent the setting value update process from ending even when the regular operation by the manager of the gaming hall is not performed.

  When the setting key insertion section 68a is switched from the ON state to the OFF state and the condition for ending the set value updating process is satisfied, the step S5111 in the set value updating process (FIG. 590) is executed to execute The setting value stored in the copy area in the work area 221 for specific control is compared with the set value currently set in the set value counter in the work area 221 for specific control. That is, it is determined whether the set value set before the setting value update process (step S6904) is executed and the set value set in the current set value update process are the same. When both the set values are the same (step S5112: NO), the notification process at the time of non-change (step S5113) is executed so that the setting maintenance notification described above is performed. On the other hand, when the two set values are different (step S5112: YES), the notification of the change in setting described above is performed by executing the notification process at the time of change (step S5114).

  In the configuration in which the set value update process is executed when a set value error has occurred, the set value set before the set value update process was executed and the set value set in the set value update process If the set values are the same, the setting maintenance notification is performed. As a result, even if the set value update process is executed due to a set value error, the setting maintenance notification is performed by resetting the set value set in the previous situation, and the set value update due to the set value error Even if the processing is executed, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the set value has not changed. Incidentally, since it is general to record the set value of each pachinko machine 10 installed in the game hall, it is possible to execute a set value update process due to a set value abnormality so that the set value becomes the recorded set value. It is possible.

  Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 608), after executing the setting monitoring process in step S6822, the management process is executed in step S6821. When the management process is executed, a subroutine program corresponding to the management process set in the specific control program is executed. The information for specifying the return address of the timer interrupt processing in is written into the stack area 222 for specific control by a push command. When the management process is completed, information for specifying the return address is read by the pop instruction, and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing program indicated by the return address.

  FIG. 610 is a flowchart illustrating a management process according to the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. The processing of steps S7001 to S7005 in the management processing is executed by the main CPU 63 using the specific control program and the specific control data.

  First, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit occurrence of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 608) (step S7001). This prevents a timer interrupt process (FIG. 608) corresponding to the specific control from being interrupted and activated in the middle of a later-described management execution process corresponding to the non-specific control. Becomes possible.

  Thereafter, the information of the flag register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the PSW buffer set in the work area 221 for specific control by a load instruction as “LD (_PSWBUF), PSW” (step S7002). The flag register includes a carry flag, a zero flag, a P / V flag, a sign flag, a half carry flag, and the like, and the information in the flag register changes depending on the execution results of an operation instruction, a rotate instruction, an input / output instruction, and the like. By saving the information of the flag register before the subroutine program corresponding to the management execution process is started, the flag register in the state before being changed after the subroutine call or the start of the subroutine is changed. Information can be saved in the work area 221 for specific control.

  After that, the management execution process is started by reading out a subroutine program corresponding to the management execution process set in the non-specific control program (step S7003). In this case, information for specifying the return address of the management process after the execution of the management execution process is written in the stack area 222 for specific control by a push command. Then, when the management execution processing is completed, information for specifying the return address is read by the pop instruction, and the program returns to the management processing program indicated by the return address.

  When the program returns to the management processing program after the execution of the management execution processing, it is saved as “LD PSW, (_PSWBUF)” in the PSW buffer in the specific control work area 221 in step S7002 by a load instruction. The information of the flag register is returned to the flag register of the main CPU 63 (step S7004). As a result, the information of the flag register of the main CPU 63 returns to the information at the time when step S7002 was previously executed. That is, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 returns to the information for executing the specific control.

  Thereafter, interrupt permission is set to switch from the state in which the generation of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 608) is prohibited to the state in which the timer interrupt processing is permitted (step S7005). As a result, new execution of the timer interrupt processing becomes possible.

  FIG. 611 is a flowchart illustrating the management execution process according to the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processing of steps S7101 to S7116 in the management execution processing is executed by the main CPU 63 using the non-specific control program and the non-specific control data.

  In steps S7101 to S7108 and steps S710 to S7116, the same processes as those in steps S4501 to S4515 of the management execution process (FIG. 583) in the forty-ninth embodiment are executed. In step S7109, another monitoring process is performed. When the separate monitoring process is executed, a subroutine program corresponding to the different monitoring process set in the non-specific control program is executed. Is written into the non-specific control stack area 224 by a push command. Then, when the separate monitoring process is completed, information for specifying the return address is read by the pop instruction, and the process returns to the management execution process program indicated by the return address.

  FIG. 612 is a flowchart showing another monitoring process. The processing of steps S7201 to S7206 in the separate monitoring processing is executed by the main CPU 63 using the non-specific control program and the non-specific control data.

  In the separate monitoring process, it is determined whether or not the value of the pointer indicating the processing position of the process being executed in the non-specific control program is outside the normal numerical range (step S7201). The information stored in the normal counter area 231, the open / close execution mode counter area 232, and the high-frequency support mode counter area 233 provided in the non-specific control work area 223 is obviously abnormal information. It is determined whether or not it has been performed (step S7202). For example, in the normal counter area 231, when the value of the normal general winning counter 231a is 1000 or more even though the value of the normal out counter 231e is "0", it is determined that there is an abnormality. In addition, it is determined whether or not the information stored in the calculation result storage area 234 provided in the non-specific control work area 223 is obviously abnormal information (step S7203). For example, if any of the 62nd to 64th parameters is not “0” even though the 61st parameter is “0”, it is determined to be abnormal.

  When an affirmative determination is made in any of steps S7201 to S7203, it is determined that an information abnormality has occurred in the work area 223 for non-specific control, and a process of partially clearing the work area 223 for non-specific control is performed. (Step S7204). In the partial clear processing, the storage areas other than the management start flag in the non-specific control work area 223 are cleared to “0”. In this case, all of the normal counter area 231, the open / close execution mode counter area 232, the high frequency support mode counter area 233, and the calculation result storage area 234 are cleared to "0". This makes it possible to eliminate the information abnormality in the work area 223 for non-specific control.

  By not clearing the management start flag to "0", it is possible to maintain the state in which the management start flag is already set to "1", and the pachinko machine 10 can be continued in the game hall. It is possible to prevent the collection of the history information from being restricted in the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10 despite being used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in step S7204, the entire non-specific control work area 223 including the management start flag may be cleared to “0”.

  In step S7204, the stack area 224 for non-specific control is not cleared to “0”. In the stack area 224 for non-specific control, information of various registers used in the processing corresponding to the specific control in steps S7102 to S7107 in the management execution processing (FIG. 611) is saved. In this case, by preventing the non-specific control stack area 224 from being cleared to “0”, information of various registers used in the processing corresponding to the specific control and the non-specific control stack area 224 can be prevented from being deleted. The information of the return address of the management execution process (FIG. 611) after the completion of the separate monitoring process is stored in the non-specific control stack area 224. By not clearing, it is possible to prevent the information of this return address from being erased.

  After that, an initial setting process is executed (step S7205). In the initial setting process, the initial setting is performed on the storage area targeted for clearing “0” in step S7204 in the work area 223 for non-specific control.

  Thereafter, a clear notification process is executed (step S7206). In the clear notification process, a command indicating that the work area 223 for non-specific control has been cleared to “0” is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. Upon receiving the command, the voice light emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 to emit light in a manner corresponding to the forced clear of the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the “history information is forcibly cleared from the speaker unit 54”. ". In addition, a character image “History information has been forcibly cleared” is displayed on the symbol display device 41. These notifications are maintained until the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and is terminated when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the notification may be ended when the notification end operation is performed by the manager of the game hall. As the notification end operation, for example, the update button 68b may be pressed, or the reset button 68c may be pressed. By confirming the notification, the manager of the gaming hall can grasp that the work area 223 for non-specific control has been forcibly cleared.

  When a negative determination is made in all of steps S7201 to S7203, or when the process of step S7206 is performed, the separate monitoring process ends, and the process returns to the monitoring execution process (FIG. 611).

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  When the program monitoring unit 252 specifies that an address specified when writing information by a load instruction is an abnormal address, the reset signal output unit 251 turns the reset signal from OFF to ON, and the main CPU 63 Then, the main process (FIG. 605) is executed as in the case where the supply of the operating power is newly started. When the reset signal is changed from OFF to ON, “1” is not set in the power failure flag in the work area 221 for specific control, and the checksum at the time of the power failure is stored in the work area 221 for specific control. Since it has not been performed, the clearing process at the time of the non-setting update is forcibly performed (step S6607). In the clearing process at the time of non-setting update, the storage area other than the storage area in which the set value of the pachinko machine 10 is stored in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to “0”, and the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to “0”. "0" is cleared, and initialization processing of these areas is further executed. Accordingly, if there is a possibility that an information abnormality has occurred in the work area 221 for specific control or the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are stored in the work area 221 and the stack area 222 for specific control. On the other hand, by executing the “0” clear process and the initial setting process, it is possible to eliminate the information abnormality.

  When the program monitoring unit 252 determines that the value of the program counter of the main CPU 63 is an abnormal value, the reset signal output unit 251 turns the reset signal from OFF to ON. The main processing (FIG. 605) is executed as in the case where the supply is newly started. When the reset signal is changed from OFF to ON, “1” is not set in the power failure flag in the work area 221 for specific control, and the checksum at the time of the power failure is stored in the work area 221 for specific control. Since it has not been performed, the clearing process at the time of the non-setting update is forcibly performed (step S6607). In the clearing process at the time of non-setting update, the internal storage area of the main CPU 63 including various registers is cleared to "0" and the initial setting process is executed. Accordingly, when there is a possibility that an information abnormality has occurred in the internal storage area of the main CPU 63, the “0” clear and initial setting processing is executed on the internal storage area of the main CPU 63 to execute the processing. It is possible to eliminate the information abnormality.

  On the other hand, in the clearing process at the time of non-specific update, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to “0”. As a result, since the information abnormality is specified in the program monitoring unit 252 as described above, “0” is cleared for the internal storage area of the main CPU 63, the work area 221 for specific control, and the stack area 222 for specific control. Even when the initial setting process is executed, it is possible to prevent the information of the game history from being erased, and to prevent the information of the management result of the game history from being erased. It is possible to do.

  If the power failure flag is not set to “1” or if the checksums do not match in the main processing (FIG. 605) when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the non-setting update is cleared. In the configuration in which the process (step S6607) is executed, when the occurrence of the information abnormality is specified by the program monitoring unit 252, the power failure flag is not set to “1” by turning the reset signal from OFF to ON. At the same time, the main processing (FIG. 605) is executed in a state where the checksum is not stored. This makes it possible to eliminate the information abnormality specified by the program monitoring unit 252 using the configuration for eliminating the information abnormality at the start of the supply of the operating power.

  In a configuration in which whether or not the checksum is normal is monitored in the main processing (FIG. 605) when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the calculation target of the checksum includes a specific control , And a stack area 222 for non-specific control, and a work area 223 for non-specific control and a stack area 224 for non-specific control are not included. This makes it possible to specify whether or not an information abnormality has occurred only in the storage area corresponding to the specific control in the main RAM 65.

  If it is determined that the checksum is abnormal in the main processing (FIG. 605) when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the clear processing at the time of non-setting update (step S6607) is executed. However, in the clearing process at the time of the non-setting update, the process of clearing “0” and the initial setting process are performed in the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control. On the other hand, the process of clearing “0” is not executed in the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control. Accordingly, the processing corresponding to the specific control is not continuously performed in the state where the information abnormality occurs in the work area 221 for the specific control and the stack area 222 for the specific control. And the storage area corresponding to the non-specific control in the main RAM 65 is cleared to "0" by the information abnormality of the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control. It is possible to do not.

  In the power failure information storage process (FIG. 606), the power failure processing (steps S6709 to S6712) calculates the checksum for the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222, whereas the main RAM 65 No checksum is calculated for the storage area corresponding to the non-specific control. This makes it possible to prevent the processing period required for completing the power failure processing from being excessively long.

  When the occurrence of an abnormality in the information stored in the non-specific control work area 223 is specified in another monitoring process (FIG. 612) executed in the process corresponding to the non-specific control, the non-specific control is supported. In the separate monitoring process (FIG. 612), the work area 223 for non-specific control is cleared to “0” and the initial setting process is executed. As a result, a process corresponding to the non-specific control is executed in a state where the information of the non-specific control work area 223 is held as it is even though some abnormality has occurred in the non-specific control work area 223. It is possible to prevent it from happening. In addition, since the process of clearing the work area 223 for non-specific control and the process of initial setting are performed in the process corresponding to the non-specific control, the information of the work area 223 for non-specific control is updated. It is possible to prevent the processing corresponding to the specific control from intervening.

  In another monitoring process (FIG. 612) corresponding to the non-specific control, monitoring is performed to determine whether or not an error has occurred in the work area 223 for non-specific control. The processing for clearing the work area 223 for non-specific control to “0” and the processing for initial setting are executed. Accordingly, the monitoring of whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the non-specific control work area 223 and the execution of the initialization of the non-specific control work area 223 are performed in a series of processes in the process corresponding to the non-specific control. It is possible to execute as.

  If the occurrence of an abnormality in the information stored in the non-specific control work area 223 is specified in another monitoring process (FIG. 612) executed in the process corresponding to the non-specific control, Although the process for clearing and initializing the work area 223 is executed, the process for clearing and initializing the stack area 224 for non-specific control is not executed. Thereby, while information abnormalities in the non-specific control work area 223 can be eliminated, information of various registers used in the processing corresponding to the specific control saved in the non-specific control stack area 224 and separate management are performed. It is possible to prevent the information of the return address after the processing is completed from being erased.

  The processing for clearing the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control and initializing is executed in the processing corresponding to the specific control, and the work area 223 for non-specific control is set to "0". The processing of clearing and initial setting is executed in the processing corresponding to the non-specific control. As a result, with regard to such initialization processing as well, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are treated as dedicated storage areas for processing corresponding to specific control, The work area 223 can be handled as a dedicated storage area for processing corresponding to the non-specific control.

  The main processing (FIG. 605) is configured to monitor whether or not the set values are normal in steps S6608 and S6614. However, the processing for monitoring whether or not these set values are normal is performed. A configuration that is not executed may be adopted. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load of the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power, which is executed when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. In addition, even if the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power is not monitored as to whether the set value is normal, the timer interrupt executed after the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power is completed. In the setting monitoring process (step S6820) of the process (FIG. 608), whether or not the setting value is normal is monitored, so that if the setting value is abnormal, it can be dealt with.

  Further, the configuration monitoring process (step S6820) is not limited to the configuration that is executed each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 608) is activated. The configuration monitoring process (step S6820) may be performed every time the number of times (for example, 10,000 times) is performed. In this case, it is possible to suppress the execution frequency of the monitoring while periodically monitoring whether the set value is normal.

  Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the setting monitoring process (step S6820) is executed in the remaining process (step S6610 to step S6613) in the main process (FIG. 605). In this case, it is possible to monitor whether the set value is normal by using the idle time in a situation where the timer interrupt processing is not being executed.

  Further, the configuration monitoring process (step S6820) may be executed when a game round is newly started. More specifically, when a game round is newly started, a setting monitoring process (step S6820) may be performed before the execution determination process is performed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the execution determination processing from being performed in a situation where the set value is abnormal.

  If the setting monitoring process (step S6820) identifies that the setting value is abnormal, the setting monitoring process (step S6902) is provided in the specific control work area 221 instead of the configuration shifting to the setting value updating process (step S6904). The game stop flag may be set to “1”. In this case, in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 608), the affirmative determination in step S6807 does not execute the processing of steps S6808 to S6821, and the progress of the game is stopped when the set value is abnormal. Becomes However, since the processing of steps S6801 to S6806 is executed, the power failure monitoring is executed, and the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the random number initial value counter CINI are updated. Fraud detection is performed. Further, when the game stop flag is set to “1”, a notification indicating that the setting value should be updated may be executed to prompt the execution of the setting value update process. In this case, the game stop manager clears the game stop flag to “0” by performing a power-on operation in such a manner that the set value update process is performed after the power-off operation is performed by the game hall manager who has confirmed the notification. As a result, the state in which the progress of the game is stopped is released, and the set value updating process is executed to set a normal set value.

  If it is determined in the setting monitoring process (step S6820) that the setting value is abnormal, the main process (1) is set in a state where the setting abnormality flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to “1”. 605) may be started. In order to stop the progress of the game with the setting abnormality flag set to “1” and to release the state in which the progress of the game is stopped, the power is turned off → A configuration that requires ON may be adopted. In this case, even if an operation for executing the setting value update processing is not performed in the main processing (FIG. 605), the setting is forcibly set when the setting abnormality flag is set to “1”. By executing the value update process, it is possible to forcibly perform a new setting of the set value using the set value update process set in the main process (FIG. 605).

  When the occurrence of an information abnormality is specified by the program monitoring unit 252 and the reset signal is forcibly turned from OFF to ON, the initialization process is executed for the work area 221 for specific control. The setting value of the pachinko machine 10 may be “setting 1”. When the occurrence of an information abnormality is specified by the program monitoring unit 252 and the reset signal is forcibly turned from OFF to ON, the setting is performed after the initialization process is performed on the work area 221 for the specific control. It is good also as a structure which performs a value update process.

  When the occurrence of an information abnormality is identified by the program monitoring unit 252, the reset signal is not forcibly turned from OFF to ON, and the non-setting update clearing process (step S6607) is executed. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that a clearing process at the time of setting update (step S6620) and a setting value updating process (step S6621) are executed.

  In the clearing process at the time of non-setting update (step S6607), the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 becomes “setting 1” by initializing the storage area for storing the information of the setting value in the work area 221 for specific control. The configuration may be such that a predetermined setting value other than “Setting 1” is used. Thereby, when the clear processing at the time of non-setting update is executed, it becomes possible to set the predetermined set value.

  Further, in the clearing process at the time of non-setting update (step S6607), the configuration is such that the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0". Good.

  Although the management start flag is not cleared to "0" in step S7204 in the separate monitoring process (FIG. 612), the management start flag may be cleared to "0". In step S7204 of the separate monitoring process (FIG. 612), the normal counter area 231, the open / close execution mode counter area 232, and the high frequency support mode counter area 233 may not be cleared to "0". 234 may not be cleared to “0”.

  In step S7204 in the separate monitoring process (FIG. 612), the process of clearing “0” and the initial setting process are executed not only for the work area 223 for non-specific control but also for the stack area 224 for non-specific control. It may be configured. In this case, the information is used in the information corresponding to the return address of the management execution process after the end of the separate monitoring process in the non-specific control stack area 224 and the process corresponding to the specific control saved in the non-specific control stack area 224. It is preferable not to erase the information of various registers.

  In the separate monitoring process (FIG. 612), it is monitored whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the stack area 224 for non-specific control. A configuration in which “0” clear processing and initial setting processing are executed for the stack area 224 may be adopted. In this case, it is preferable not to delete the information of the return address of the management execution process after the end of the separate monitoring process in the stack area 224 for non-specific control.

  Further, the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which both the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 are the checksum calculation targets, and only the specific control work area 221 is the checksum calculation target. The configuration may be such that only the stack area 222 for specific control is a target for calculating the checksum.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the main processing executed by the main CPU 63 is different from that of the 62nd embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the above-described 62nd embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the 62nd embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 613 is a flowchart showing the main processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processing of steps S7301 to S7322 in the main processing is executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

  First, power-on wait processing is executed (step S7301). In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits without advancing to the next process until a predetermined time for wait (specifically, one second) elapses after the main process is started. In the execution period of the power-on wait processing, the operation start and the initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed. Thereafter, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted (step S7302).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the power failure flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control in the main RAM 65 (step S7303). If “1” is set in the power failure flag (step S7303: YES), a checksum is calculated for the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 (step S7304). The method of calculating the checksum is the same as that in step S6604 of the main processing (FIG. 605) in the 62nd embodiment.

  Thereafter, the work area 221 for the specific control and the work area 221 for the specific control calculated in the power outage process executed immediately before the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped and stored in the work area 221 for the specific control are performed. The checksum for the stack area 222 is read from the work area 221 for specific control, and the read checksum is compared with the checksum calculated in step S7304 (step S7305). Then, it is determined whether the checksums match (step S7306).

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S7306, the processing in steps S7307 to S7320 is performed. In this case, the processing contents of steps S7307 to S7314 are the same as steps S6614 to S6621 of the main processing (FIG. 605) in the 62nd embodiment, and steps S7316 to S7320 are the same as those in the 62nd embodiment (FIG. 605). This is the same as steps S6609 to S6613 in FIG. 605).

  If the reset button 68c is pressed (step S7308: YES) and a negative determination is made in any of steps S7309 to S7311, a clear process for non-setting update is executed (step S7308). S7315). The processing content of the clear processing at the time of non-setting update is the same as that of step S6607 of the main processing (FIG. 605) in the 62nd embodiment. However, in the present embodiment, after performing the clear processing at the time of non-setting update, the process proceeds to the processing of steps S7316 to S7320 without determining whether the set value is normal. Only when a negative determination is made in any of steps S7309 to S7311, the non-setting update clearing process (step S7315) is executed. Since it is determined in step S7307 whether the setting value is normal, there is no need to determine whether the setting value is normal after executing the clear processing at the time of non-setting update.

  If a negative determination is made in step S7303 or step S7306, that is, if the power failure flag in the specific control work area 221 is not set to "1" or if a checksum error has occurred, a clearing process for an error is executed. (Step S7321). FIG. 614 is a flowchart showing the clearing process at the time of abnormality. Note that the processes of steps S7401 to S7405 in the abnormal clearing process are executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for specific control and data for specific control.

  First, the process of clearing the work area 221 for specific control is executed (step S7401). In the clear processing, the work area for the specific control is removed except for the area (specifically, the set value counter) in which the information of the set value indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the work area 221 for the specific control. 221 is cleared to “0” and an initial setting is performed for the area cleared to “0”. As a result, since the area indicating whether the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the high probability mode is cleared to “0”, the winning / rejecting lottery is performed regardless of the winning / rejecting lottery mode immediately before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. The mode is a low probability mode. In addition, the game is not executed, the opening / closing execution mode is not executed, and the general-purpose display unit 38a is not variably displayed, and the general electric functioning object 34a is in the closed state. Situation. In addition, since the hold storage area 65a and the ordinary power hold area 65c provided in the work area 221 for specific control are also cleared to "0", the hold information for the special figure display unit 37a is erased and the general figure display unit is cleared. The hold information for 38a is deleted.

  After that, a clear process of the stack area 222 for specific control is executed (step S7402). In the clearing process, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to “0” and initialization is performed.

  After that, as “PUSH PSW”, the information of the flag register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control by a push command (step S7403). The flag register includes a carry flag, a zero flag, a P / V flag, a sign flag, a half carry flag, and the like, and the information in the flag register changes depending on the execution results of an operation instruction, a rotate instruction, an input / output instruction, and the like. By saving such flag register information before the subroutine program corresponding to the non-specific control clearing process is started, the flag in the state before the subroutine call or the subroutine is changed after the start of the subroutine is changed. Register information can be saved in the stack area 222 for specific control. The information amount of the flag register is 1 byte.

  Thereafter, by reading out a subroutine program corresponding to the non-specific control clear processing set in the non-specific control program, the non-specific control clear processing is started (step S7404). In this case, information for specifying the return address of the clearing process at the time of abnormality after execution of the non-specific control clearing process is written to the specific control stack area 222 by a push command. When the clear processing for the non-specific control is completed, information for specifying the return address is read out by the pop command, and the program returns to the abnormality clear program indicated by the return address.

  When the program returns to the clearing process at the time of abnormality after the execution of the non-specific control clearing process, the flag register saved to the specific control stack area 222 in step S7402 by a pop command as “POP PSW” as “POP PSW” Is returned to the flag register of the main CPU 63 (step S7405). As a result, the information of the flag register of the main CPU 63 returns to the information at the time when step S7402 was executed. That is, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 returns to the information for executing the specific control.

  FIG. 615 is a flowchart showing the clear processing for non-specific control. The processes of steps S7501 to S7516 in the non-specific control clearing process are executed by the main CPU 63 using the non-specific control program and the non-specific control data.

  First, as a "LD SP, Y (u + 2)", Y (u + 2) is set as a fixed address at the start of the non-specific control in the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 by a load instruction (step S7501). In this case, the information of the last address in the non-specific control stack area 224 is set as the stack pointer, similarly to step S3901 of the management execution process (FIG. 576) in the forty-seventh embodiment.

After that, the information of the WA register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the WA buffer set in the work area 223 for non-specific control by a load instruction as “LD (_WABUF), WA” (step S7502). Also, as a load instruction, “LD (_BCBUF), BC” saves the information of the BC register of the main CPU 63 to the BC buffer set in the work area 223 for non-specific control (step S7503). Also, "LD
(_DEBUF), DE ”, the information of the DE register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the DE buffer set in the work area 223 for non-specific control by a load instruction (step S7504). Also, the information of the HL register of the main CPU 63 is saved to the HL buffer set in the non-specific control work area 223 by a load instruction as “LD (_HLBUF), HL” (step S7505). Further, the information of the IX register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the IX buffer set in the non-specific control work area 223 by a load instruction as “LD (_IXBUF), IX” (step S7506). In addition, the information of the IY register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the IY buffer set in the work area 223 for non-specific control by a load instruction as “LD (_IYBUF), IY” (step S7507).

  The registers of the main CPU 63 include various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers in addition to the flag registers described above. In this case, in steps S7502 to S7507, information of WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register, which are some of these general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers, are stored. Is saved in the corresponding buffer in the work area 223 for non-specific control. The information amount of each of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register is 2 bytes.

  The WA register, the BC register, the DE register, the HL register, the IX register, and the IY register partially clear the work area 223 for non-specific control (step S7508) and initialize ( This is a register used in step S7509). The information set in such a register is saved in the non-specific control work area 223 prior to the execution of the partial clear processing (step S7508) and the initial setting processing (step S7509) of the non-specific control work area 223. By doing so, it is possible to save the information of these registers used during the specific control before the non-specific control is started. Therefore, even if these registers are overwritten during the non-specific control, the information saved in the non-specific control work area 223 is returned to these registers when the non-specific control is terminated, so that the state of these registers is restored. Can be returned to a state corresponding to the specific control before the non-specific control is executed.

  Also, instead of saving all information of various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers to the work area 223 for non-specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control, which is processing corresponding to non-specific control, is saved. The information of the WA register, the BC register, the DE register, the HL register, the IX register, and the IY register to be used in the partial clearing process (step S7508) and the initial setting process (step S7509) are selectively used for non-specific control. By saving the information in the work area 223, it is possible to reduce the capacity secured for saving the information of the register in the work area 223 for non-specific control. Therefore, while securing a large capacity of the non-specific control work area 223 that can be used in the partial clear processing (step S7508) and the initial setting processing (step S7509) of the non-specific control work area 223, It is possible to save such register information. Of course, among the various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers in the main CPU 63, registers other than the WA register, the BC register, the DE register, the HL register, the IX register, and the IY register correspond to the non-specific control. The information set before the process to be performed is started is stored and held until the process corresponding to the non-specific control ends and the process corresponding to the specific control is restarted.

  Also, by saving the register information in the non-specific control work area 223 instead of in the non-specific control stack area 224, the capacity of the non-specific control stack area 224 can be reduced accordingly. It becomes possible. Further, when the stack area 224 for non-specific control is used, as described above, the information writing order is read first after the subsequent information, and thus the information reading order is temporarily shifted due to some kind of noise or the like. If this happens, all information of the subsequent reading order will be restored to a different register. The probability of occurrence of such an event increases as the amount of information saved in the non-specific control stack area 224 increases. On the other hand, by saving the register information to the non-specific control work area 223, it is possible to prevent the above-described event from occurring even when there is a large amount of information to be saved. .

  After executing the processing of steps S7502 to S7507, a process of partially clearing the work area 223 for non-specific control is executed (step S7508). In the partial clear processing, a storage area other than the storage area in which information of various registers of the main CPU 63 used in the processing corresponding to the specific control is saved among the storage areas of the work area 223 for non-specific control. Is cleared to "0". Specifically, the WA buffer, the BC buffer, the DE buffer, the HL buffer, the IX buffer, and the IY buffer among the respective storage areas of the non-specific control work area 223 are not cleared to “0”, and the storages other than these various buffers are not cleared. Clear the area to "0".

  In this case, all of the normal counter area 231, the open / close execution mode counter area 232, the high frequency support mode counter area 233, the operation result storage area 234, and the management start flag are cleared to "0". This makes it possible to eliminate the information abnormality in the work area 223 for non-specific control. Also, by preventing the storage area in which the information of the various registers of the main CPU 63 used in the process corresponding to the specific control has been saved from being cleared to “0”, the process corresponding to the non-specific control is completed. When returning to the process corresponding to the specific control, it is possible to return the information used in the process corresponding to the specific control to various registers of the main CPU 63.

  In step S7508, the stack area 224 for non-specific control is not cleared to “0”. The non-specific control stack area 224 stores information on the return address of the abnormal clear processing (FIG. 614) after the non-specific control clear processing is completed. By preventing 224 from being cleared to "0", it is possible to prevent the information of the return address from being erased.

  After that, an initial setting process is executed (step S7509). In the initial setting process, the initial setting is performed on the storage area to be cleared to “0” in step S7508 in the work area 223 for non-specific control.

  After that, as in the case of step S3909 of the management execution process (FIG. 576) in the forty-seventh embodiment, the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 returns to the specific control as “LD SP, Y (r + α)” by the load instruction. Is set as Y (r + α) as the fixed address (step S7510). The address of Y (r + α) is set as an address between Y (r + 8) and Y (s) in the stack area 222 for specific control.

  After that, the information saved in the WA buffer of the non-specific control work area 223 is overwritten in the WA register of the main CPU 63 as “LD WA, (_WABUF)” by a load instruction (step S7511). In addition, as the “LD BC, (_BCBUF)”, the information saved in the BC buffer of the non-specific control work area 223 is overwritten in the BC register of the main CPU 63 by a load instruction (step S7512). In addition, the information saved in the DE buffer of the non-specific control work area 223 is overwritten in the DE register of the main CPU 63 as “LD DE, (_DEBUF)” by a load instruction (step S7513). Further, as the “LD HL, (_HLBUF)”, the information saved in the HL buffer of the non-specific control work area 223 is overwritten in the HL register of the main CPU 63 by a load instruction (step S7514). Also, as the “LD IX, (_IXBUF)”, the information saved in the IX buffer of the non-specific control work area 223 is overwritten on the IX register of the main CPU 63 by a load instruction (step S7515). In addition, the information saved in the IY buffer of the non-specific control work area 223 is overwritten in the IY register of the main CPU 63 as “LD IY, (_IYBUF)” by a load instruction (step S7516). By executing the processing of steps S7511 to S7516, processing corresponding to the non-specific control of each information of the WA register, the BC register, the DE register, the HL register, the IX register, and the IY register of the main CPU 63 is started. It is possible to return to the information corresponding to the specific control just before.

  According to the above configuration, in the main process (FIG. 613) executed when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the power failure flag is not set to “1” or the checksum is abnormal. In some cases, the clearing process at the time of abnormality (step S7321) is executed, so that not only the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control but also the work area 223 for non-specific control become "0". Is cleared and initialized. When an information error has occurred in the work area 221 for the specific control, there is a possibility that an information error has also occurred in the work area 223 for the non-specific control. The work area 223 is also initialized so that the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is not executed as it is despite the information abnormality occurring in the work area 223 for the non-specific control. It is possible to do.

  Even when the process of clearing to “0” and the process of initial setting are performed on the work area 223 for non-specific control in the clearing process at the time of abnormality (step S7321), the work area for non-specific control is performed. The information of various registers used in the processing corresponding to the specific control saved in 223 is not cleared to “0”. Thus, the process of clearing the work area 223 for non-specific control to “0” while preventing the information used in the process corresponding to the specific control from being deleted after the process corresponding to the non-specific control ends. And a process for initial setting can be executed.

  Even when the process of clearing the work area 223 for non-specific control to “0” and the process of initial setting are executed in the clearing process at the time of abnormality (step S7321), the stack area 224 for non-specific control is performed. Are not executed for the process of clearing "0" and the process of initial setting. This makes it possible to prevent the information of the return address from being erased after the non-specific control clear processing (FIG. 615) ends.

  The process of clearing the work area 221 for the specific control and the stack area 222 for the specific control to “0” and the process of initializing are executed in the process corresponding to the specific control, and the work area 223 for the non-specific control is set to “ The process of clearing "0" and the process of initial setting are executed in a process corresponding to the non-specific control. As a result, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are also treated as dedicated storage areas for processing corresponding to specific control, with regard to the processing for clearing “0” and the processing for initial setting. The work area 223 for specific control can be treated as a dedicated storage area for processing corresponding to non-specific control.

  Note that both the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 are not limited to the configuration in which the checksum is calculated, and only the specific control work area 221 is the checksum calculation target. The configuration may be such that only the stack area 222 for specific control is a target for calculating the checksum.

  Further, the work area 223 for non-specific control may be configured to calculate the checksum. In this case, the work area 221 for the specific control and the work area 223 for the non-specific control may be a check sum calculation target, and the stack area 222 for the specific control and the work area 223 for the non-specific control may be checked. The configuration may be such that the sum is to be calculated, and the specific control work area 221, the specific control stack area 222, and the non-specific control work area 223 may be the checksum calculation target.

  Further, the stack area 224 for non-specific control may be configured to be a check sum calculation target. In this case, the work area 221 for the specific control and the stack area 224 for the non-specific control may be a check sum calculation target, and the stack area 222 for the specific control and the stack area 224 for the non-specific control may be checked. The sum may be calculated, and the specific control work area 221, the specific control stack area 222, and the non-specific control stack area 224 may be the checksum calculation target.

  The work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control may be configured so that the checksum is calculated. In this case, the configuration may be such that the work area 221 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are the checksum calculation targets. The specific control work area 223 and the non-specific control stack area 224 may be the checksum calculation target. The specific control work area 221, the specific control stack area 222, and the non-specific control stack area 222. The work area 223 and the stack area 224 for non-specific control may be configured to calculate the checksum.

  Also, in steps S7508 and S7509 in the non-specific control clearing process (FIG. 615), "0" clear processing is performed not only for the non-specific control work area 223 but also for the non-specific control stack area 224. A configuration for executing the initial setting process may be adopted. In this case, it is preferable not to delete the information of the return address of the clear processing at the time of abnormality after the end of the clear processing for non-specific control.

  Although the management start flag is cleared to “0” in step S7508 in the non-specific control clearing process (FIG. 615), the management start flag may not be cleared to “0”. In step S7508 in the non-specific control clearing process (FIG. 615), the normal counter area 231, the open / close execution mode counter area 232, and the frequent support mode counter area 233 may not be cleared to "0". The operation result storage area 234 may not be cleared to “0”.

<64th embodiment>
The present embodiment is different from the above-mentioned 62nd embodiment in the processing configuration relating to monitoring of information abnormality of the main RAM 65 using a checksum. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the above-described 62nd embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the 62nd embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 616 is a flowchart showing the power failure information storage processing according to the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. The power failure information storage processing is executed in step S6801 in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 608). Further, the processing of steps S7601 to S7613 in the power failure information storage processing is executed by the main CPU 63 using the specific control program and the specific control data.

  In steps S7601 to S7608 in the power failure information storage processing, the same processing as steps S6701 to S6708 in the power failure information storage processing (FIG. 606) in the 62nd embodiment is executed. If the occurrence of a power failure is specified, an affirmative determination is made in step S7608, and the processing during power failure in steps S7609 to S7613 is executed.

  Specifically, first, "1" is set to a power failure flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step S7609). Thereby, when the process at the time of power failure is executed normally and the storage of the information in the main RAM 65 is normally performed, the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started again when the specific control "1" is set in the power failure flag of the work area 221.

  After that, a checksum is calculated for the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 (step S7610). In this case, the work area 221 for the specific control and the storage area in the stack area 222 for the specific control to be calculated when calculating the checksum for the specific control are stored in the step S7701 of the checksum monitoring process (FIG. 617) described later (FIG. 617). Are the same as the storage area in the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 for which the specific control checksum is calculated. In addition, in the storage area to be calculated when calculating the checksum for the specific control, an area (specifically, an area where the setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 in the work area 221 for the specific control is set) Is a set value counter). The calculated checksum for the specific control is a storage area for storing the checksum for the specific control in the work area 221 for the specific control, and is excluded from the calculation target of the checksum for the specific control. In the storage area.

  Thereafter, a checksum is calculated for the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control (step S7611). In this case, the storage area in the non-specific control work area 223 and the non-specific control stack area 224, which are the calculation targets when calculating the non-specific control checksum, is a checksum monitoring process described later (FIG. 617). This is the same as the storage area in the non-specific control work area 223 and the non-specific control stack area 224 for which the non-specific control checksum is calculated in step S7706. Then, the calculated non-specific control checksum is a storage area for storing the non-specific control checksum in the specific control work area 221 and is excluded from the calculation target of the specific control checksum. Is stored in the stored storage area.

  After that, all the information of the output port in the register of the main CPU 63 is set to “0” (step S7612), and the access to the main RAM 65 is prohibited (step S7613). Then, the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed.

  Next, the checksum monitoring process executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. Note that the checksum monitoring process is executed in the main process (FIG. 605) in place of steps S6604 to S6606. The processing of steps S7701 to S7711 in the checksum monitoring process is executed by the main CPU 63 using the specific control program and the specific control data.

  First, a checksum for specific control is calculated for the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control (step S7701). The method of calculating the checksum for the specific control is the same as that in step S7610 in the power failure information storage processing (FIG. 616). Thereafter, the checksum for the specific control, which is calculated in step S7610 of the power failure process executed immediately before the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped and is stored in the work area 221 for the specific control, is specified. In addition to reading from the control work area 221, the read specific control checksum is compared with the specific control checksum calculated in step S7701 (step S7702). It is determined whether the checksums for the specific control match (step S7703).

  If the checksums for the specific control do not match (step S7703: NO). A clear process of the work area 221 for specific control is executed (step S7704). In the clearing process, the work area for the specific control is removed except for the area (specifically, the set value counter) in which the information of the set value indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the work area 221 for the specific control. 221 is cleared to “0” and the initial setting is executed. As a result, since the area indicating whether the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the high probability mode is cleared to “0”, the winning / rejecting lottery is performed regardless of the winning / rejecting lottery mode immediately before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. The mode is a low probability mode. In addition, the game is not executed, the opening / closing execution mode is not executed, and the general-purpose display unit 38a is not variably displayed, and the general electric functioning object 34a is in the closed state. Situation. In addition, since the hold storage area 65a and the ordinary power hold area 65c provided in the work area 221 for specific control are also cleared to "0", the hold information for the special figure display unit 37a is erased and the general figure display unit is cleared. The hold information for 38a is deleted. In the clearing process, the initialization is executed after the various registers of the main CPU 63 are also cleared to "0". In addition, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to “0” and initialization is performed (step S7705).

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S7703 or if the process of step S7705 is performed, a checksum for non-specific control is calculated for the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control (step S7703). S7706). The method of calculating the checksum for the non-specific control is the same as that in step S7611 in the power failure information storage processing (FIG. 616). Thereafter, the non-specific control checksum calculated in step S7611 of the power failure processing executed immediately before the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped and stored in the specific control work area 221 is stored. The non-specific control checksum is read out from the specific control work area 221, and the read non-specific control checksum is compared with the non-specific control checksum calculated in step S7706 (step S7707). Then, it is determined whether or not the checksums for the non-specific control match (step S7708).

  If the checksums for the non-specific control do not match (step S7708: NO), the information of the flag register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the stack area 222 for the specific control by a push instruction as "PUSH PSW" (step S7708: NO). Step S7709). The flag register includes a carry flag, a zero flag, a P / V flag, a sign flag, a half carry flag, and the like, and the information in the flag register changes depending on the execution results of an operation instruction, a rotate instruction, an input / output instruction, and the like. By saving such flag register information before the subroutine program corresponding to the non-specific control clearing process is started, the flag in the state before the subroutine call or the subroutine is changed after the start of the subroutine is changed. Register information can be saved in the stack area 222 for specific control. The information amount of the flag register is 1 byte.

  Thereafter, by reading out a subroutine program corresponding to the non-specific control clear processing set in the non-specific control program, the non-specific control clear processing is started (step S7710). In this case, information for specifying the return address of the checksum monitoring process after the execution of the non-specific control clear process is written to the specific control stack area 222 by a push command. When the clear processing for the non-specific control is completed, information for specifying the return address is read out by the pop instruction, and the program returns to the program for monitoring the checksum indicated by the return address.

  When the program returns to the program for the clearing process at the time of abnormality after executing the clearing process for the non-specific control, the flag register saved in the stack area 222 for the specific control in step S7709 by a pop command as “POP PSW” Is returned to the flag register of the main CPU 63 (step S7711). As a result, the information of the flag register of the main CPU 63 returns to the information at the time when step S7709 was executed. That is, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 returns to the information for executing the specific control.

  FIG. 618 is a flowchart showing the non-specific control clear processing. The processing of steps S7801 to S7818 in the non-specific control clear processing is executed by the main CPU 63 using the non-specific control program and the non-specific control data.

  In steps S7801 to S7807 in the clear processing for non-specific control, the same processing as steps S7501 to S7507 in the clear processing for non-specific control (FIG. 615) in the 63rd embodiment is executed.

  Thereafter, a process of partially clearing the work area 223 for non-specific control is executed (step S7808). In the partial clear processing, a storage area other than the storage area in which information of various registers of the main CPU 63 used in the processing corresponding to the specific control is saved among the storage areas of the work area 223 for non-specific control. Is cleared to "0". Specifically, the WA buffer, the BC buffer, the DE buffer, the HL buffer, the IX buffer, and the IY buffer among the respective storage areas of the non-specific control work area 223 are not cleared to “0”, and the storages other than these various buffers are not cleared. Clear the area to "0".

  In this case, all of the normal counter area 231, the open / close execution mode counter area 232, the high frequency support mode counter area 233, the operation result storage area 234, and the management start flag are cleared to "0". This makes it possible to eliminate the information abnormality in the work area 223 for non-specific control. Also, by preventing the storage area in which the information of the various registers of the main CPU 63 used in the process corresponding to the specific control has been saved from being cleared to “0”, the process corresponding to the non-specific control is completed. When returning to the process corresponding to the specific control, it is possible to return the information used in the process corresponding to the specific control to various registers of the main CPU 63.

  After that, an initial setting process is executed (step S7809). In the initial setting processing, initial setting is performed on the storage area that has been cleared to “0” in step S7808 in the work area 223 for non-specific control.

  Thereafter, a process of partially clearing the stack area 224 for non-specific control is executed (step S7810). In the partial clearing process, information on the return address of the checksum monitoring process (FIG. 617) after the non-specific control clearing process is completed is stored in each storage area of the non-specific control stack area 224. The storage areas other than the stored storage area are cleared to "0". As a result, while the information of the return address of the checksum monitoring process (FIG. 617) after the non-specific control clearing process ends, the information abnormality of the non-specific control stack area 224 is prevented. Can be eliminated.

  Thereafter, an initial setting process is executed (step S7811). In the initial setting process, initial setting is performed on the storage area that has been cleared to “0” in step S7810 in the stack area 224 for non-specific control.

  After that, the processing of steps S7812 to S7818 is executed. The processes in steps S7812 to S7818 execute the same processes as those in steps S7510 to S7516 in the non-specific control clear process (FIG. 615) in the 63rd embodiment.

  According to the above configuration, the checksum for the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 and the checksum for the non-specific control work area 223 and the non-specific control stack area 224 are different. Calculated individually. Thus, it is possible to individually specify the information abnormality in each of the storage area corresponding to the specific control in the main RAM 65 and the storage area corresponding to the non-specific control in the main RAM 65.

  When the checksum for the specific control is abnormal, the process of clearing “0” and the initial setting process are executed for the work area 221 for the specific control and the stack area 222 for the specific control, If there is an abnormality in the checksum, the process of clearing “0” and the initial setting process are executed for the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control. As a result, it is possible to narrow down the target for executing the process of clearing “0” and the initial setting process to the area where the abnormality of the checksum is specified.

  The process of clearing the work area 221 for the specific control and the stack area 222 for the specific control to “0” and the process of initializing are executed in the process corresponding to the specific control, and the work area 223 for the non-specific control is set to “ The process of clearing "0" and the process of initial setting are executed in a process corresponding to the non-specific control. As a result, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are also treated as dedicated storage areas for processing corresponding to specific control, and the non-specific The control work area 223 can be handled as a dedicated storage area for processing corresponding to the non-specific control.

  Although the management start flag is cleared to "0" in step S7808 in the non-specific control clearing process (FIG. 618), the management start flag may not be cleared to "0". In step S7808 of the non-specific control clearing process (FIG. 618), the normal counter area 231, the open / close execution mode counter area 232, and the high frequency support mode counter area 233 may not be cleared to "0". The operation result storage area 234 may not be cleared to “0”.

<65th embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the forty-seventh embodiment in the processing configuration executed by the main CPU 63. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the forty-seventh embodiment will be described. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the 47th embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 619 is a flowchart showing main processing in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processing of steps S7901 to S7924 in the main processing is executed by using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

  First, power-on initial setting processing is executed (step S7901). In the power-on initialization process, for example, the process waits without advancing to the next process until a predetermined time for wait (specifically, one second) elapses after the main process is started. The operation start and the initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed in the predetermined period for the weight. Also, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted.

  After that, an internal function register setting process is executed (step S7902). In the internal function register setting process, the interrupt cycle of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 622), which is a process that is started by periodically interrupting the main process, is set to the first interrupt cycle (specifically, 4 milliseconds). And the interrupt cycle of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 628), which is a process that is started by periodically interrupting the main process, is set to the second interrupt cycle that is shorter than the first interrupt cycle. (Specifically, 2 milliseconds).

  That is, in the present embodiment, the first timer interrupt process and the second timer interrupt process exist as timer interrupt processes so that the interrupt cycle is relatively long and short. Both the first timer interrupt processing and the second timer interrupt processing are started by interrupting the main processing. The second timer interrupt process is started by interrupting the first timer interrupt process. On the other hand, the first timer interrupt process does not start by interrupting the second timer interrupt process. Further, if both the first interrupt cycle and the second interrupt cycle have elapsed in a situation where both the first timer interrupt processing and the second timer interrupt processing have not been executed, the second interrupt cycle is performed regardless of the order in which the cycles have elapsed. It is started first from the timer interrupt processing. In this regard, it can be said that the second timer interrupt process is a process that is started with priority over the first timer interrupt process.

  In the internal function register setting processing, the first interrupt cycle of the first timer interrupt processing is set in a predetermined register of the main CPU 63, and the second interrupt cycle of the second timer interrupt processing is set in a specific register of the main CPU 63. I do. Further, in the internal function register setting process, in addition to the setting of the first and second interrupt cycles, for example, a setting process of a numerical range of various counters such as a numerical range of the hit random number counter C1 is executed.

  After that, “1” is set in the startup processing flag provided in the work area 221 for the specific control (step S7903). The start-up processing flag indicates that the first timer interrupt processing should be terminated without executing various processings set in the first timer interrupt processing even if the first timer interrupt processing is started. Is a flag for specifying by the main CPU 63. By setting the start-up processing flag to “1”, even if the first timer interrupt processing is started, various processings set in the first timer interrupt processing are not executed and the first timer interrupt processing is not executed. The timer interrupt processing ends.

  After that, interrupt permission is set (step S7904). Accordingly, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 622) is started by interrupting at the first interrupt period, and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 628) is started by interrupting at the second interrupt period. However, since the start-up processing flag is set to “1” in step S7903, even if the first timer interrupt processing is started, various processings set in the first timer interrupt processing are executed. Without this, the first timer interrupt processing ends.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c has been pressed (step S7905). That is, it is determined whether or not the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed while the reset button 68c is being pressed, and the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. Here, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60 is provided with the setting key insertion section 68a and the reset button 68c, but is not provided with the update button 68b. Further, the main control device 60 is provided with first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in the same manner as in the forty-third embodiment, instead of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c.

  If the reset button 68c has not been pressed (step S7905: NO), it is determined whether or not “1” has been set in the power failure flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step S7906). When a power failure process is executed in a power failure information storage process (step S8202) of a first timer interrupt process (FIG. 622) described later, “1” is set in the power failure flag. The power failure flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the processing at the time of power failure was properly performed at the time of the previous power-off.

  If “1” is set in the power failure flag (step S7906: YES), a checksum is calculated for the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 (step S7907). The method of calculating the checksum is arbitrary, but the same calculation method as that used when the checksum is calculated in the power failure information storage process (step S8202) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 622) described later. Has become the way. The checksum calculated in the power failure process is stored in the specific control work area 221. The storage area of the specific control work area 221 in which the checksum is stored is used for calculating the checksum. It is excluded from the storage area to be operated.

  That is, when calculating the checksum, the storage area to be calculated, which is a part of the storage area in the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control, is to be calculated. In the storage area to be calculated, the checksum is calculated in the process at the time of power failure when the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, and then the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 is restarted, and the process of step S7907 is executed. Until the power supply such as the backup power to the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control is continued, the storage area is basically not rewritten. Therefore, the information of the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 is not changed between the time when the supply of the operation power to the MPU 62 is stopped and the time when the supply of the operation power to the MPU 62 is restarted. In this case, the checksums for the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 are the same as those immediately before the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped. In the storage area to be calculated when calculating the checksum, an area (specifically, a setting value counter) in which setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 in the work area 221 for specific control is set. )It is included. The check sum calculation target does not include the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control.

  Thereafter, the work area 221 for the specific control and the work area 221 for the specific control calculated in the power outage process executed immediately before the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped and stored in the work area 221 for the specific control are performed. The checksum for the stack area 222 is read from the work area 221 for specific control, and the read checksum is compared with the checksum calculated in step S7907 (step S7908). Then, it is determined whether or not the checksums match (step S7909).

  If a negative determination is made in step S7906 or step S7909, that is, if the power failure flag is not set to “1” or the checksums do not match, the game stop flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control Is set to "1" (step S7910). In the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 622) described later, the game stop flag makes an affirmative determination in step S8207 and does not execute the processes in steps S8208 to S8221, that is, stops the execution of the process for advancing the game. This flag is used by the main CPU 63 to specify whether the situation is to be performed. When the game stop flag is set to “1”, an affirmative determination is made in step S8207 of a first timer interrupt process (FIG. 622) described later, so that the process of steps S8208 to S8221 is not executed. As a result, when the power failure flag is not set to “1” because the power failure processing was not properly performed at the time of the previous power shutdown, the game progress is stopped, and the specific control If the checksums do not match for at least one of the work area 221 and the stack area 222 for specific control due to a change in the storage state of information since the last power-off, the game progress is stopped. State.

  In this case, in the storage area to be calculated when the checksum is calculated, the area in which the setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the work area 221 for specific control as described above (specifically, Setting value counter). Therefore, if the set value abnormality has occurred after the previous power-off, the checksums do not match, and the progress of the game is stopped.

  On the other hand, even in a situation where the game stop flag is set to “1”, the processing of steps S8202 to S8206 in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 622) is executed. Therefore, even in the situation where the progress of the game is stopped, the power failure monitoring is executed, and the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the random number initial value counter CINI are updated. Fraud detection is performed.

  Thereafter, at the start of the supply of the operating power, an abnormal command indicating that an abnormality has occurred with respect to the power failure flag or the checksum is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step S7911). Upon receiving the abnormal command, the sound light emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 to emit light in a manner corresponding to the information abnormality at the start of the supply of the operating power, and “change the setting from the speaker unit 54. Is output. In addition, a character image “Please change the setting.” Is displayed on the symbol display device 41. These notifications are maintained until the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and is terminated when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, even if the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is temporarily stopped, the above-described notification will be made when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is restarted until the set value updating process (step S7918) is executed. The configuration may be continued.

  In the situation where the progress of the game is stopped, the manager of the gaming hall confirming the above notification temporarily stops the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10, and thereafter resumes the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10. In this case, an operation for performing the set value update process (step S7918) is performed. Accordingly, when an abnormality occurs in the power failure flag or the checksum at the start of the supply of the operation power, it is possible to newly set the set value in the set value update process (step S7918). .

  In particular, as described above, in the storage area to be calculated when the checksum is calculated, the area in which the setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the work area 221 for specific control (specifically, the setting value) Counter), an error may have occurred in the set value if an error has occurred in the checksum. On the other hand, when an abnormality occurs in the checksum as described above, the execution of the set value update processing (step S7918) is prompted, so that the game is not performed with the abnormal set value. It is possible to do.

  If the power failure flag is set to “1” and the checksum is normal (step S7906 and step S7909: YES), it is determined whether the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on using the setting key. Then, it is determined whether the front door frame 14 is open with respect to the inner frame 13 and the gaming machine main body 12 is open with respect to the outer frame 11 (step S7913). The detection of whether or not the front door frame 14 is open with respect to the inner frame 13 uses the front door open sensor 95 as in the 62nd embodiment, and the gaming machine body 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11. The main body opening sensor 96 is used to detect whether or not the state is the same as in the 62nd embodiment. The setting key insertion section 68a is turned ON using the setting key (step S7912: YES), the front door frame 14 is open with respect to the inner frame 13, and the gaming machine body is positioned with respect to the outer frame 11. If 12 is in the open state (step S7913: YES), a setting confirmation process is executed (step S7914). In the setting confirmation processing, the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are confirmed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 used for displaying various parameters as management results of the game history. A process for displaying a status indicating that the pachinko machine 10 is present and displaying a current set value of the pachinko machine 10 is executed.

  FIG. 620 is a flowchart showing the setting confirmation processing. Note that the processing of steps S8001 to S8003 in the setting confirmation processing is executed using the specific control program and the specific control data in the main CPU 63.

  First, "1" is set to a setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step S8001). The setting confirmation display flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being confirmed. By setting "1" to the setting confirmation display flag, the corresponding display control is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in a second timer interrupt process (FIG. 628) described later. Is This causes the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 to indicate that the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being checked and to indicate the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10. Is performed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion section 68a is operated to be turned off using the setting key (step S8002). In this case, the configuration may be such that it is determined whether the setting key insertion section 68a has been switched from the ON state to the OFF state, or the configuration may be such that it is determined whether the setting key insertion section 68a is in the OFF state. If the setting key insertion section 68a has not been turned off (step S8002: NO), the processing of step S8002 is repeated as it is.

  If the setting key insertion section 68a is turned off (step S8002: YES), the setting confirmation display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step S8003). This causes the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 to indicate that the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being checked and to indicate the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10. Is canceled. In this case, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 start displaying the management result of the game history.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the power-on operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed in a state where the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on by the setting key without pressing the reset button 68c, thereby operating power to the main CPU 63. In the situation where the supply of is started and the main processing is started, the reset button 68c is not pressed and the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on, and the processing that enables the progress of the game in the main processing is performed. The setting confirmation process is executed in a state where the processing at the time of starting the supply of the operating power, which is a situation before the execution, is being executed. This makes it possible to confirm the set value in a situation where no game is being played.

  Assuming that the set value is confirmed in a situation where the progress of the game is continued, for example, if the set value is confirmed during the execution of the game round, the set value is confirmed while being performed. Therefore, there is a possibility that a shift to the open / close execution mode occurs. In this case, there is a possibility that game balls cannot be fired toward the special power winning device 32 even though the open / close execution mode has been started. Further, if the set value is confirmed during the execution of the opening / closing execution mode, the opening / closing execution mode proceeds under the condition that the set value is confirmed. There is a possibility that the game ball cannot be fired toward.

  Assuming a case where the progress of the game is stopped when the set value is confirmed, if the confirmation of the set value is started in a situation where the game is being performed, the progress of the game is stopped halfway May be complicated. For example, if the confirmation of the set value is started during the execution of the game round and the progress of the game is to be stopped halfway, a process for stopping the game round is required. In this case, when the confirmation of the set value is started, the variation display of the symbol on the symbol display device 41 is stopped halfway, and when the confirmation of the set value is completed, the variation display of the symbol on the symbol display device 41 is restarted. If so, complicated processing will be required. In addition, for example, if the confirmation of the set value is started during the execution of the opening / closing execution mode and the progress of the game is stopped in the middle, a process for stopping the opening / closing execution mode in the middle is required. In addition, when the confirmation of the set value is started in the middle of the execution of the variation display of the pattern on the ordinary figure display unit 38a and the progress of the game is to be stopped in the middle, the process for stopping the variation display of the pattern in the middle is performed. Required. In addition, if the setting value check is started during the execution of the opening execution state of the general electricity role object 34a and the progress of the game is to be stopped on the way, a process for stopping the opening execution state on the way is required. Become. On the other hand, a configuration in which the set value is confirmed after all the games have been completed may be considered. In this case, the game times, the opening / closing execution mode, the variation display of the pattern on the general-purpose display section 38a, and It is necessary to wait for a situation in which none of the release execution states of the object 34a is executed, and there is a possibility that the waiting time until starting to check the set value may be increased.

  On the other hand, in the main processing executed when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the state before the supply of the operating power, which is the situation before the processing enabling the progress of the game is executed, is performed. Since the setting confirmation process is executed in a situation where the process is being executed, the setting value is confirmed in a situation where the progress of the game has already been stopped. This makes it possible to prevent the setting value from being checked in a situation where the game is in progress, and to stop the game progressing in the middle of the setting value check, or to stop the game progress. There is no need to wait for confirmation of the set value until Therefore, it is possible to appropriately confirm the set value.

  Returning to the description of the main process (FIG. 619), when the reset button 68c is pressed (step S7905: YES), a RAM clear process is executed (step S7915). In the RAM clear processing, the work area for the specific control, except for the area (specifically, the set value counter) in which the set value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the work area 221 for the specific control. 221 is cleared to “0” and the initial setting is executed. As a result, since the area indicating whether the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the high probability mode is cleared to “0”, the winning / rejecting lottery is performed regardless of the winning / rejecting lottery mode immediately before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. The mode is a low probability mode. In addition, the game is not executed, the opening / closing execution mode is not executed, and the general-purpose display unit 38a is not variably displayed, and the general electric functioning object 34a is in the closed state. Situation. In addition, since the hold storage area 65a and the ordinary power hold area 65c provided in the work area 221 for specific control are also cleared to "0", the hold information for the special figure display unit 37a is erased and the general figure display unit is cleared. The hold information for 38a is deleted. In the RAM clearing process, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0" and initialization is performed. In the RAM clearing process, initialization is performed after various registers of the main CPU 63 are also cleared to "0". In this initial setting, the same processing as the internal function register setting processing in step S7902 (step S7902) is executed.

  On the other hand, in the RAM clear processing, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to “0”. This makes it possible to prevent the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control from being cleared to “0” by the clearing operation by the manager of the gaming hall.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion section 68a has been turned ON using the setting key (step S7916), and the front door frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 13 and the outer frame 11 is opened. Then, it is determined whether or not the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state (step S7917). The detection of whether or not the front door frame 14 is open with respect to the inner frame 13 uses the front door open sensor 95 as in the 62nd embodiment, and the gaming machine body 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11. The main body opening sensor 96 is used to detect whether or not the state is the same as in the 62nd embodiment. The setting key insertion portion 68a is turned ON using the setting key (step S7916: YES), the front door frame 14 is open with respect to the inner frame 13, and the gaming machine body is positioned with respect to the outer frame 11. If 12 is in the open state (step S7917: YES), a setting value update process is executed (step S7918).

  FIG. 621 is a flowchart showing the setting value update processing. Note that the processing of steps S8101 to S8107 in the setting value update processing is executed using the specific control program and the specific control data in the main CPU 63.

  First, "1" is set to a setting update display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step S8101). The setting update display flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being updated. When the setting update display flag is set to “1”, corresponding display control is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in a second timer interrupt process (FIG. 628) described later. Is As a result, a display indicating that the set values of the pachinko machine 10 are being updated and a display indicating the current set values of the pachinko machine 10 are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Is

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the set value counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control is 1 or more corresponding to “Setting 1” and 6 or less corresponding to “Setting 6” (step). S8102). If the value of the set value counter is “0” or 7 or more, a negative determination is made in step S8102, and “1” is set in the set value counter (step S8103). Thereby, the set value of the pachinko machine 10 becomes “Setting 1”.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S8102 or if the process of step S8103 is performed, it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a has been turned off using the setting key (step S8104). In this case, the configuration may be such that it is determined whether the setting key insertion section 68a has been switched from the ON state to the OFF state, or the configuration may be such that it is determined whether the setting key insertion section 68a is in the OFF state.

  If the setting key insertion section 68a has not been turned OFF (step S8104: NO), the setting value counter in the work area 221 for specific control is provided on condition that the reset button 68c is pressed (step S8105: YES). Is incremented by 1 (step S8106). Thus, each time the reset button 68c is pressed once, the set value is updated to the next higher level. If the reset button 68c is not pressed (step S8105: NO) or if the value of the set value counter is incremented by 1, the process returns to step S8102. If it is determined that the value is 7 or more, “1” is set to the set value counter in step S8103. As a result, when the reset button 68c is pressed once in the situation of "Setting 6," the display returns to "Setting 1."

  If the setting key insertion section 68a has been turned OFF (step S8104: YES), the setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step S8107). As a result, a display indicating that the set values of the pachinko machine 10 are being updated and a display indicating the current set values of the pachinko machine 10 are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Is released. In this case, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 start displaying the management result of the game history.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the reset button 68c is pressed, the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, and the reset is performed in a state where the main processing is started. The button 68c is pressed, and the RAM clear processing (step S7915) is executed regardless of whether the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on. As a result, the operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the reset button 68c is uniquely linked to the execution of the RAM clear processing (step S7915), and the RAM clear processing (step S7915) is performed. The operation content to be generated can be made easy for the manager of the game hall to understand.

  Even if the RAM clear processing (step S7915) is executed, the set value counter in the work area 221 for specific control is not cleared to "0" and the information of the set value counter is not changed. This makes it possible to prevent the set values from being changed even when the RAM clear processing (step S7915) is executed.

  The RAM clear processing is performed based on not only performing the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the reset button 68c, but also performing the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 while performing the ON operation of the setting key insertion unit 68a with the setting key. Not only (Step S7915) but also a set value update process (Step S7918) is executed. Also, as described above, the setting confirmation process (step S7914) is performed based on performing the power-on operation of the pachinko machine 10 while performing the ON operation of the setting key insertion unit 68a with the setting key without pressing the reset button 68c. Be executed. As a result, it is possible to make the ON operation for the setting key insertion unit 68a common as the operation for executing the processing related to the setting value. Therefore, it is possible to make the operation content for generating the processing related to the set value easy to understand for the manager of the game hall.

  When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on by the setting key, and the pressing operation of the reset button 68c is not added, the setting confirmation process is executed, and the reset is performed. When a pressing operation of the button 68c is added, a set value updating process is executed. Accordingly, it is possible to make the execution target process different from the setting confirmation process and the setting value update process depending on whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed. Therefore, it is possible to make the contents of the operation for executing the desired processing of the setting confirmation processing and the setting value update processing easy for the manager of the gaming hall to understand. In addition, by making the operation content for executing the setting value update processing more than the setting confirmation processing, it is possible to make it particularly difficult to perform an illegal operation of the setting value update processing.

  Returning to the description of the main process (FIG. 619), when the process of step S7911 is performed, when a negative determination is made in step S7912 or step S7913, when the process of step S7914 is performed, a negative determination is made in step S7916 or step S7917. When the determination is made or when the process of step S7918 is performed, the start-up process flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to “0” (step S7919). By clearing the start-up processing flag to “0”, the state in which various processes set in the first timer interrupt processing are not executed even if the first timer interrupt processing is started is released. In step S7919, the power failure flag in the work area 221 for specific control is also cleared to "0".

  Thereafter, a return command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step S7920). The return command includes information indicating the number of pieces of hold information for the special figure display unit 37a, information indicating the current pass / fail lottery mode, information indicating the current support mode, and whether or not the open / close execution mode is being executed. Information and information indicating whether or not the game is being executed. These pieces of information are set based on information stored in the work area 221 for specific control. Upon receiving the return command, the voice light emission control device 81 changes the display content of the symbol display device 41, the light emission content of the display light emitting unit 53, and the sound output content of the speaker unit 54 according to various information set in the return command. Content.

  Here, when confirming the set value of the pachinko machine 10, it is necessary to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while turning on the setting key insertion section 68a with the setting key. Then, for example, when it becomes necessary to check the set value during the execution of the game round, the power-off operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed during the execution of the game round. The power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed while the ON operation is performed. In this case, since the backup power is not supplied to the RAM provided in the sound emission control device 81, the effect for the game time in the RAM of the sound emission control device 81 is performed at the stage when the power-off operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. Is erased. On the other hand, since backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 and clear processing of the main RAM 65 is not executed when checking the set value, the power OFF operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed during execution of the game. When the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed while the setting key insertion unit 68a is subsequently operated by the setting key, the pattern change display is performed on the special figure display unit 37a after the setting confirmation process is performed. Will be restarted. Then, a situation occurs in which the symbol display is not displayed on the symbol display device 41, although the symbol display is displayed on the special figure display unit 37a.

  On the other hand, after the setting confirmation processing is completed, a return command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81, and the return command includes information indicating whether or not the game is being executed. Then, when receiving the return command, the voice light emission control device 81 causes the symbol display device 41 to start the symbol variation display. This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which the symbol display is not performed on the symbol display device 41 despite the variable display of the symbol being performed on the special figure display unit 37a. . This symbol change display is performed at a relatively high speed so that each symbol in the change display is indistinguishable or difficult to identify for the player. In addition, the return command does not include the result of the rejection determination process of the game time to be restarted and the result of the distribution determination process, and does not include the information indicating the end timing of the game time to be restarted. Therefore, when the voice light emission control device 81 starts the symbol variation display on the symbol display device 41 based on the return command, if the game time to be resumed corresponds to the departure result, the next game time is started. When a command to start the command to be displayed or the demo display is received by the symbol display device 41, the variable display of the symbol based on the return command is ended, the display corresponding to the newly received command is started, and the restart target is displayed. If the game time corresponds to the jackpot result, when the opening command indicating the start of the opening / closing execution mode is received, the variation display of the symbol based on the return command is ended and the opening effect is started.

  When the return command includes information indicating that the open / close execution mode is being executed, the sound emission control device 81 starts the display effect indicating that the open / close execution mode is being executed on the symbol display device 41. To be done. This allows the player to recognize that the open / close execution mode is being executed.

  After that, the process proceeds to the remaining process of steps S7921 to S7924. That is, the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 622) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 628). Will result in a residual time. The remaining time varies in accordance with the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, but the remaining process of steps S7921 to S7924 is repeatedly executed using the irregular time. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining processes in steps S7921 to S7924 are irregular processes that are executed irregularly. In steps S7921 to S79224, the same processes as those in steps S113 to S116 of the main process (FIG. 514) in the 33rd embodiment are executed.

  Next, the first timer interrupt processing executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. It should be noted that the first timer interrupt processing is periodically started at a cycle of 4 milliseconds, which is the first interrupt cycle, as described above. Further, the program corresponding to the first timer interrupt processing is set as a program for specific control.

  First, it is determined whether or not the start-up processing flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to “1” (step S8201). As described above, “1” is set in the start-up processing flag in step S7903 of the main processing (FIG. 619). If “1” is set in the start-up processing flag (step S8201: YES), the first timer interrupt processing ends without executing various processing of steps S8202 to S8221. Thus, when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started and the main process (FIG. 619) is started, the execution of the first timer interrupt process and the second timer interrupt process is permitted early. Even if there is, various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the first timer interrupt process are performed until the process at the start of the supply of the operating power ends and execution of the process for controlling the progress of the game is permitted. It can be prevented from being executed.

  As described above, the startup processing flag is cleared to “0” in step S7919 when the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power is completed in the main processing (FIG. 619). In the first timer interrupt process, when “1” is not set in the start-up process flag (step S8201: NO), the processes after step S8202 are executed.

  In steps S8202 to S8219 and S8221, the same processes as those in steps S3701 to S3719 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 574) in the forty-seventh embodiment are executed. These processes are executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for specific control and data for specific control. In this case, as described above, in the main processing (FIG. 619), it is determined that the power failure flag is not set to "1" (step S7906: NO), or it is determined that the checksums do not match (step S7906). (S7909: NO), the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step S7910). When "1" is set to the game stop flag, the processing of steps S8201 to S8206 is executed in the first timer interrupt processing, but the processing of steps S8208 to S8221 is performed by making an affirmative determination in step S8207. Do not execute. As a result, when the power failure flag is not set to “1” because the power failure processing was not properly performed at the time of the previous power shutdown, the game progress is stopped, and the specific control If the checksums do not match for at least one of the work area 221 and the stack area 222 for specific control due to a change in the storage state of information since the last power-off, the game progress is stopped. State. For example, launching of a game ball is prohibited by not executing the process of step S8212. In addition, execution of the game round and the opening / closing execution mode is prohibited by not executing the processing of step S8214. Also, payout of game balls is prohibited by not executing the processing of step S8218.

  On the other hand, even in such a situation where the progress of the game is stopped, the power failure monitoring is performed in step S8202, and the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 in steps S8203 and S8204 are performed. In addition, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated, and further, fraud detection is performed in step S8206.

  In the first timer interrupt process, a setting monitoring process is performed in step S8220. FIG. 623 is a flowchart showing the setting monitoring process. Note that the processing of steps S8301 to S8303 in the setting monitoring processing is executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

  It is determined whether the set value of the pachinko machine 10 is normal by checking the value of the set value counter in the work area 221 for specific control (step S8301). Specifically, when the setting value set in the setting value counter is any one of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”, it is determined that the setting is normal, and when the setting value is “0” or 7 or more, an abnormality is determined. It is determined that there is.

  If the set value is abnormal (step S8301: NO), “1” is set to the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control, as in step S7910 in the main process (FIG. 619) (step S8302). When the game stop flag is set to “1”, an affirmative determination is made in step S8207 of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 622), so that the process of steps S8208 to S8221 is not executed. Thereby, when it is determined that the set value is abnormal, the progress of the game is stopped. On the other hand, even when the game stop flag is set to “1”, the processing of steps S8202 to S8206 in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 622) is executed, so that the progress of the game is stopped. In this situation, the power outage monitoring is executed, the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the random number initial value counter CINI are updated, and further, fraud detection is executed.

  After that, an abnormal command indicating that the set value is abnormal is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step S8303). Upon receiving the abnormal command, the sound light emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 to emit light in a manner corresponding to the set value abnormality, and causes the speaker unit 54 to output a sound “Please change the setting.” . In addition, a character image “Please change the setting.” Is displayed on the symbol display device 41. These notifications are maintained until the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and is terminated when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, even if the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is temporarily stopped, the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is restarted until the set value updating process (step S7918) of the main process (FIG. 619) is executed. The notification may be continued when the notification is made.

  In the situation where the progress of the game is stopped, the manager of the gaming hall confirming the above notification temporarily stops the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10, and thereafter resumes the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10. In this case, an operation for performing the set value update process (step S7918) is performed. This makes it possible to newly set the set value in the set value update process (step S7918) when a set value abnormality occurs.

  Here, a process of monitoring whether or not the set value is abnormal is executed in a first timer interrupt process (FIG. 622) that is periodically started. This makes it possible to monitor whether the set value is abnormal even in a situation where a game is being played. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from continuing even though the set value is abnormal. Further, monitoring whether the set value is abnormal is executed every time a monitoring trigger occurs. This makes it possible to increase the frequency of monitoring whether the set value is abnormal.

  In the main process (FIG. 619), a process for monitoring whether the set value is normal is not set. If a process for monitoring whether the set value is normal is set in the process at the start of the supply of the operating power in the main process (FIG. 619), the power failure flag and the checksum are set at the start of the supply of the operating power. It is necessary to monitor whether the set value is normal in addition to the monitoring of the setting, and the monitoring load increases. Further, if it is specified that the set value is abnormal at the start of supply of the operating power, the RAM clear processing (step S7915) and the set value update processing (step S7918) are to be executed. Is complicated. On the other hand, since the process for monitoring whether the set value is normal is not set in the main process (FIG. 619), the processing configuration at the time of starting the supply of the operating power is preferable. It becomes possible. Even if the process for monitoring whether the set value is normal in the process at the start of the supply of the operating power is not set, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 622) is performed as described above. In this configuration, the setting monitoring process (step S8220) is performed, so that if the setting value is abnormal, it can be dealt with.

  In the configuration in which the first timer interrupt process is executed as described above, in the present embodiment, as described above, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 628) is performed separately from the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 622) as the timer interrupt process. The second timer interrupt process exists and is started by interrupting the first timer interrupt process even during the execution of the first timer interrupt process. In this case, although illustration is omitted in the first timer interrupt process, the timer interrupt process is prohibited and the timer interrupt process is permitted before and after each process of steps S8201 to S8221. For example, the timer interrupt processing is prohibited before executing the lottery random number update processing (step S8203), and the timer interrupt processing is permitted after executing the lottery random number update processing (step S8203). This makes it possible to prevent the second timer interrupt process from being interrupted and activated during the execution of the lottery random number update process. Further, the timer interrupt processing is prohibited before executing the special figure special power control processing (step S8214), and the timer interrupt processing is permitted after executing the special figure special power control processing (step S8214). This makes it possible to prevent the second timer interrupt process from being interrupted and activated during the execution of the special figure special power control process.

  Next, a configuration for controlling display of various display units by the main CPU 63 will be described. FIG. 624 is a block diagram for explaining a configuration for controlling display of various display units by the main CPU 63.

  The target for which the main CPU 63 performs display control is a special figure display unit 37a, a special figure reservation display unit 37b, a general figure display unit 38a, a general figure reservation display unit 38b, and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 201. 204 are present. Each of these is provided as a segment display section in which a plurality of LED display segments are arranged. These segment display sections enter a light emitting state by setting data corresponding to the light emitting state (for example, data of “1” which is one of the binary data), and data corresponding to the light-off state (eg, binary data). When the other data “0” is set, the light is turned off.

  The main control board 61 is provided with a first display circuit 261 corresponding to the special figure display section 37a, and a second display circuit 262 corresponding to the special figure reservation display section 37b. A third display circuit 263 is provided so as to correspond to the display unit 38a, and a fourth display circuit 264 is provided so as to correspond to the general-purpose reservation display unit 38b. A fifth display circuit 265 is provided corresponding to 204. In the forty-third embodiment, the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208 are provided on the main control board 61 in one-to-one correspondence with the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. However, in the present embodiment, the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208 are not provided.

  The first display circuit 261 provides data corresponding to the supplied display data to each of the plurality of display segments of the special figure display unit 37a. Thereby, each display segment of the special figure display unit 37a is turned on or off in a mode corresponding to the display data provided to the first display circuit 261. In this case, the first display circuit 261 can store and hold the provided display data for a predetermined period (for example, 16 milliseconds), but when the predetermined period elapses, the display data gradually becomes all “0”. Will be approached. Therefore, the display segment of the special figure display portion 37a which is in the light emitting state by the display data provided to the first display circuit 261 has passed a predetermined period without new display data being provided to the first display circuit 261. This gradually turns off the light. With such a configuration, not only when the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a are changed but also when the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a are not changed, the previous display data output processing is performed. The same display data as the first display is supplied to the first display circuit 261.

  The number of display segments provided in the special figure display section 37a is eight. Therefore, 8-bit data is provided to the first display circuit 261 as display data for controlling the display of the special figure display unit 37a.

  The second display circuit 262 provides data corresponding to the supplied display data to each of the plurality of display segments of the special figure suspension display unit 37b. As a result, each display segment of the special figure reservation display section 37b is turned on or off in a manner corresponding to the display data provided to the second display circuit 262. In this case, the second display circuit 262 can store and hold the provided display data for a predetermined period (for example, 16 milliseconds), but when the predetermined period elapses, the display data gradually becomes all “0”. Will be approached. Therefore, the display segment of the special figure reservation display section 37b which is in a light emitting state by the display data provided to the second display circuit 262 has a predetermined period without new display data being provided to the second display circuit 262. As time passes, the light is gradually turned off. With such a configuration, not only when the display contents of the special figure suspension display section 37b are changed but also when the display contents of the special figure suspension display section 37b are not changed, the previous display data of the previous display data is not changed. The same display data as in the output processing is supplied to the second display circuit 262.

  The number of display segments provided in the special figure suspension display section 37b is four. Therefore, 4-bit data is provided to the second display circuit 262 as display data for controlling the display of the special figure suspension display section 37b. However, since the display data is provided in units of 8 bits, even when the display data is provided to the second display circuit 262, the 8-bit data is provided. 37b is used as display data for display control.

  The third display circuit 263 provides data corresponding to the supplied display data to each of the plurality of display segments of the general-purpose display unit 38a. Accordingly, each display segment of the general-purpose display unit 38a is turned on or off in a manner corresponding to the display data provided to the third display circuit 263. In this case, the third display circuit 263 can store and hold the provided display data for a predetermined period (for example, 16 milliseconds), but when the predetermined period elapses, the display data gradually becomes all “0”. Will be approached. Therefore, the display segment of the general-purpose display section 38a, which is in the light emitting state by the display data provided to the third display circuit 263, passes the predetermined period without the new display data being provided to the third display circuit 263. This gradually turns off the light. With this configuration, the output processing of the previous display data is performed not only when the display content of the general-purpose display unit 38a is changed but also when the display content of the general-purpose display unit 38a is not changed. The same display data is supplied to the third display circuit 263.

  The number of display segments provided in the general-purpose display unit 38a is eight. Therefore, 8-bit data is provided to the third display circuit 263 as display data for controlling the display of the general-purpose display unit 38a.

  The fourth display circuit 264 provides data corresponding to the supplied display data to each of the plurality of display segments of the general-purpose reservation display unit 38b. As a result, each display segment of the general-purpose pending display unit 38b is turned on or off in a mode corresponding to the display data provided to the fourth display circuit 264. In this case, the fourth display circuit 264 can store and hold the provided display data for a predetermined period (for example, 16 milliseconds), but when the predetermined period elapses, the display data gradually becomes all “0”. Will be approached. Therefore, the display segment of the general-purpose display section 38 b which is in the light-emitting state by the display data provided to the fourth display circuit 264 has a predetermined period without new display data being provided to the fourth display circuit 264. The light is gradually turned off as time passes. Further, with such a configuration, not only when the display content of the general-purpose hold display unit 38b is changed but also when the display content of the general-purpose hold display unit 38b is not changed, the previous display data of the previous display data is not changed. The same display data as in the output processing is supplied to the fourth display circuit 264.

  The number of display segments provided in the general-purpose display section 38b is four. Therefore, 4-bit data is provided to the fourth display circuit 264 as display data for controlling the display of the general-purpose display section 38b. However, since display data is provided in units of 8 bits, even when display data is provided to the fourth display circuit 264, 8 bits of data are provided. 38b is used as display data for display control.

  The fifth display circuit 265 provides data corresponding to the supplied display data to each of the plurality of display segments provided in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Thus, the display segments of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are turned on or off in a manner corresponding to the display data provided to the fifth display circuit 265. In this case, the fifth display circuit 265 can store and hold the provided display data for a predetermined period (for example, 16 milliseconds), but when the predetermined period elapses, the display data gradually becomes all “0”. Will be approached. Therefore, new display data is provided to the fifth display circuit 265 for the display segments of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 which are in a light emitting state by the display data provided to the fifth display circuit 265. After a predetermined period elapses, the light is gradually turned off. Further, with such a configuration, not only the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are changed, but also the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are changed. Even if the display data is not output, the same display data as in the previous output processing of the display data is supplied to the fifth display circuit 265.

  Each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is provided with seven display segments. On the other hand, display data is provided in units of 8 bits. When the display data of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is provided to the fifth display circuit 265, 7-bit display data corresponding to the first notification display device 201 is provided as data in units of 8 bits. Thereafter, 7-bit display data corresponding to the second notification display device 202 is provided as 8-bit data, and then 7-bit display data corresponding to the third notification display device 203 is converted to 8-bit data. Finally, 7-bit display data corresponding to the fourth notification display device 204 is provided as 8-bit data.

  In the configuration in which the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 are provided as described above, the main CPU 63 supplies display data to the display IC 266. That is, the display ICs 266 are not provided in a one-to-one correspondence with the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265, but one display IC 266 is provided so as to be common to all of the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265. The display IC 266 is provided. When supplying the display data to the display IC 266, the main CPU 63 also supplies the display IC 266 with type data indicating which of the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 the display data corresponds to.

  The electrical connection between the main CPU 63 and the display IC 266 is described in detail below. They are electrically connected using the line LN4. Each of these signal lines LN1 to LN4 is a signal line for transmitting a signal from the main CPU 63 to the display IC 266 by one-way communication.

  The type data is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the display IC 266 by serial communication using the type data signal line LN1. In this case, each 1-bit division of the type data by serial communication is indicated by the type clock signal transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the display IC 266 using the type clock signal line LN2. The type data is data indicating which of the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 the display data to be transmitted corresponds to. The type data is transmitted as 5-bit data of the first to fifth bits. When the display data corresponds to the first display circuit 261, the first bit goes high and the other bits go low. When the display data corresponds to the second display circuit 262, the second bit goes high and the other bits go low. When the display data corresponds to the third display circuit 263, the third bit goes high and the other bits go low. When the display data corresponds to the fourth display circuit 264, the fourth bit goes high and the other bits go low. When the display data corresponds to the fifth display circuit 265, the fifth bit goes high and the other bits go low.

  Display data is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the display IC 266 by serial communication using the display data signal line LN3. In this case, each 1-bit division of the display data by the serial communication is indicated by the display clock signal transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the display IC 266 using the display clock signal line LN4. The display data is transmitted in 8-bit units of the first to eighth bits.

  The main CPU 63 transmits display data corresponding to each of the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 to the display IC 266 in a second timer interrupt process (FIG. 628) described later. In this case, in one processing of the second timer interrupt processing, display data is transmitted to one of the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265, and the nth display circuit → n + 1th display circuit is displayed. The display circuits 261 to 265 to which display data is to be transmitted are changed one by one every time a new process of the second timer interrupt process occurs according to the order in which the circuits are formed. Also, in the second timer interrupt process in the next process after the process of transmitting the display data corresponding to the fifth display circuit 265 which is the last sequence in the sequence, the first display circuit 261 which is the first sequence in the sequence described above. The display data corresponding to is transmitted. In the second timer interrupt process for transmitting display data to any of the first to fourth display circuits 261 to 264, only one 8-bit display data is transmitted, but the fifth display circuit 265 In the second timer interrupt process for transmitting the display data, four display data in 8-bit units are transmitted corresponding to the number of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  In the configuration in which the main CPU 63 transmits display data as described above, a work area 221 for specific control and a work area 223 for non-specific control have various storage areas referred to by the main CPU 63 for transmitting display data. Is set. FIG. 625 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining various buffers 271 to 275 provided in the work area 221 for specific control, and FIG. 625 (b) is provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various storage areas 234 and 276.

  As shown in FIG. 625 (a), the work area 221 for specific control has a first display data buffer 271, a second display data buffer 272, a third display data buffer 273, a fourth display data buffer 274, A fifth display data buffer 275 is provided.

  The first display data buffer 271 stores display data to be supplied to the first display circuit 261. Since the first display circuit 261 is provided corresponding to the special figure display unit 37a as described above, the first display data buffer 271 stores display data for causing the special figure display unit 37a to perform a predetermined display. Will be stored. In this case, the display data is stored in the first display data buffer 271 in the display control process (step S8216) based on the contents of the special figure special power control process (step S8214) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 622). . When the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 628) for transmitting the display data to the first display circuit 261 is executed, only when the display data stored in the first display data buffer 271 is changed. Instead, even if the display data is not changed, the display data stored in the first display data buffer 271 is transmitted to the display IC 266.

  The second display data buffer 272 stores display data to be supplied to the second display circuit 262. Since the second display circuit 262 is provided so as to correspond to the special figure suspension display section 37b as described above, the second display data buffer 272 has a display for causing the special figure suspension display section 37b to perform a predetermined display. The data will be stored. In this case, the display data is stored in the second display data buffer 272 in the display control process (step S8216) based on the contents of the special figure special power control process (step S8214) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 622). . When the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 628) for transmitting the display data to the second display circuit 262 is executed, only when the display data stored in the second display data buffer 272 is changed. Instead, even when the display data is not changed, the display data stored in the second display data buffer 272 is transmitted to the display IC 266.

  The third display data buffer 273 stores display data to be supplied to the third display circuit 263. Since the third display circuit 263 is provided corresponding to the general-purpose display unit 38a as described above, the third display data buffer 273 stores display data for causing the general-purpose display unit 38a to perform a predetermined display. Will be stored. In this case, the display data is stored in the third display data buffer 273 in the display control process (step S8216) based on the contents of the general-purpose power control process (step S8215) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 622). Is When the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 628) for transmitting the display data to the third display circuit 263 is performed, only when the display data stored in the third display data buffer 273 is changed. Instead, even when the display data is not changed, the display data stored in the third display data buffer 273 is transmitted to the display IC 266.

  The fourth display data buffer 274 stores display data to be supplied to the fourth display circuit 264. Since the fourth display circuit 264 is provided so as to correspond to the general-purpose reserve display unit 38b as described above, the fourth display data buffer 274 displays a signal for causing the general-purpose reserve display unit 38b to perform a predetermined display. The data will be stored. In this case, the display data is stored in the fourth display data buffer 274 in the display control process (step S8216) based on the contents of the general-purpose power control process (step S8215) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 622). Is When the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 628) for transmitting the display data to the fourth display circuit 264 is executed, only when the display data stored in the fourth display data buffer 274 is changed. Instead, even when the display data is not changed, the display data stored in the fourth display data buffer 274 is transmitted to the display IC 266.

  The fifth display data buffer 275 stores display data to be supplied to the fifth display circuit 265. Since the fifth display circuit 265 is provided corresponding to the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as described above, the fifth display data buffer 275 has the first to fourth notification display devices 201. To 204 to store display data for performing a predetermined display. When the second timer interrupt processing for transmitting the display data to the fifth display circuit 265 is performed, not only is the display data stored in the fifth display data buffer 275 changed, but also the display data is not changed. Is not changed, the display data stored in the fifth display data buffer 275 is transmitted to the display IC 266.

  Here, in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, a display corresponding to the management result of the game history is performed, and a setting confirmation process (FIG. 620) or a setting value update process (FIG. 621) is executed. In this case, a display corresponding to the current setting value is performed. In this case, since the fifth display data buffer 275 is provided in the work area 221 for specific control, the process of storing display data in the fifth display data buffer 275 is performed as a process corresponding to the specific control. On the other hand, the process for deriving the management result of the game history is performed as a process corresponding to the non-specific control, and the 61st to 68th parameters which are the management results of the game history are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices. In steps 201 to 204, the objects are sequentially displayed.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 625 (b), the work area 223 for non-specific control includes not only the operation result storage area 234 for storing the 61st parameter to the 68th parameter, but also the 61st parameter to the 68th parameter. Among them, a display target setting area 276 for storing parameters to be displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is provided. Even in the present embodiment, the period in which the calculation result of one parameter is continuously displayed is 10 seconds as in the 47th embodiment. Each time is elapsed, the calculation result of the parameter to be displayed is read from the calculation result storage area 234 in accordance with a predetermined display order, and the calculation result of the read parameter is stored in the display target setting area 276. . Then, when the management result of the game history is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 628) corresponding to the specific control is performed. Then, the display data stored in the display target setting area 276 is read, and the read display data is stored in the fifth display data buffer 275.

  On the other hand, when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 620) is being executed, the first to fourth notification displays are performed in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 628) corresponding to the specific control. The display data for enabling the display indicating that the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being confirmed in the devices 201 to 204 and the display indicating the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 are the fifth data. It is stored in the display data buffer 275. When the setting value update process (FIG. 621) is being executed, the first to fourth notification displays are performed in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 628) corresponding to the specific control. The display data for enabling the display indicating that the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being updated in the devices 201 to 204 and the display indicating the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10 to be performed are fifth display data. The data is stored in the buffer 275.

  In the configuration in which the first to fifth display data buffers 271 to 275 are provided as described above, the main CPU 63 executes the display data corresponding to the respective processing times in the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 628). The display data is read from the buffers 271 to 275, the read display data is transmitted to the display IC 266, and the type data indicating which of the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 the display data corresponds to is displayed. The information is transmitted to the display IC 266. FIG. 626 is an explanatory diagram for describing an electrical configuration of the display IC 266.

  As shown in FIG. 626, the display IC 266 includes a type data buffer 281, a selection signal output unit 282, a display data buffer 283, and a display data output unit 284. The display data buffer 283 stores display data received from the main CPU 63. The display data output unit 284 transmits the display data stored in the display data buffer 283 to the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265. The type data buffer 281 stores the type data received from the main CPU 63. The selection signal output unit 282 is a selection signal for designating a display circuit 261 to 265 corresponding to the type data stored in the type data buffer 281 among the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 as a display data receiving destination. Is output.

  In detail, as shown in FIG. 624, the display IC 266 and the first display circuit 261 are electrically connected using the display signal group 291. The display signal group 291 is provided so that 8-bit display data can be transmitted at one time, and display data in 8-bit units is transmitted from the display IC 266 by parallel communication. Further, a branch signal group 292 is provided by branching from the display signal group 291, and the branch signal group 292 includes the second display circuit 262, the third display circuit 263, the fourth display circuit 264, and the fifth display circuit 265. Are electrically connected to each other. The branch signal group 292 is provided so that 8-bit display data can be transmitted at a time, similarly to the display signal group 291. The display data in 8-bit units is transmitted from the display IC 266 by parallel communication. You.

  Since the display signal group 291 and the branch signal group 292 are provided as described above, when display data stored in the display data buffer 283 is transmitted by the display data output unit 284, the display data is the first data. To the fifth display circuits 261 to 265. In this case, first to fifth selection signal lines 301 to 305 are provided for receiving the supplied display data and specifying the display circuits 261 to 265 to be used.

  The first selection signal line 301 is provided to electrically connect the display IC 266 and the first display circuit 261. When the type data corresponding to the first display circuit 261 is stored in the type data buffer 281, in order for the first display circuit 261 to receive and use the display data supplied from the display data output unit 284. The selection signal output unit 282 of the display IC 266 transmits the first selection signal to the first display circuit 261 through the first selection signal line 301. As a result, the display data supplied to all of the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 through the display signal group 291 and the branch signal group 292 is received and used only by the first display circuit 261.

  The second selection signal line 302 is provided to electrically connect the display IC 266 and the second display circuit 262. When the type data corresponding to the second display circuit 262 is stored in the type data buffer 281, the display data supplied from the display data output unit 284 is received by the second display circuit 262 for use. The selection signal output unit 282 of the display IC 266 transmits a second selection signal to the second display circuit 262 through the second selection signal line 302. As a result, the display data supplied to all of the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 through the display signal group 291 and the branch signal group 292 are received and used only by the second display circuit 262.

  The third selection signal line 303 is provided to electrically connect the display IC 266 and the third display circuit 263. When the type data corresponding to the third display circuit 263 is stored in the type data buffer 281, the display data supplied from the display data output unit 284 is received by the third display circuit 263 for use. The selection signal output unit 282 of the display IC 266 transmits the third selection signal to the third display circuit 263 through the third selection signal line 303. Thus, the display data supplied to all of the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 through the display signal group 291 and the branch signal group 292 is received and used only by the third display circuit 263.

  The fourth selection signal line 304 is provided so as to electrically connect the display IC 266 and the fourth display circuit 264. When the type data corresponding to the fourth display circuit 264 is stored in the type data buffer 281, the display data supplied from the display data output unit 284 is received by the fourth display circuit 264 for use. The selection signal output unit 282 of the display IC 266 transmits a fourth selection signal to the fourth display circuit 264 through the fourth selection signal line 304. Thereby, the display data supplied to all of the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 through the display signal group 291 and the branch signal group 292 is received and used only by the fourth display circuit 264.

  The fifth selection signal line 305 is provided so as to electrically connect the display IC 266 and the fifth display circuit 265. When the type data corresponding to the fifth display circuit 265 is stored in the type data buffer 281, the display data supplied from the display data output unit 284 is received and used by the fifth display circuit 265. The selection signal output unit 282 of the display IC 266 transmits a fifth selection signal to the fifth display circuit 265 via the fifth selection signal line 305. Thus, the display data supplied to all of the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 through the display signal group 291 and the branch signal group 292 is received and used only by the fifth display circuit 265.

  FIG. 627 shows how the type data and the display data are transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the display IC 266, and the display data transmitted from the display IC 266 is received by the first display circuit 261 or the second display circuit 262. It is a time chart. 627 (a) shows the transmission period of the type data signal from the main CPU 63 to the display IC 266, and FIG. 627 (b) shows the transmission period of the type clock signal from the main CPU 63 to the display IC 266. ) Shows the transmission period of the display data signal from the main CPU 63 to the display IC 266, FIG. 627 (d) shows the transmission period of the display clock signal from the main CPU 63 to the display IC 266, and FIG. 627 (e) shows the display IC 266. 627 (f) shows a transmission period of the first selection signal from the display IC 266 to the second display circuit 262, and FIG. 627 (g) shows a transmission period of the second selection signal from the display IC 266 to the second display circuit 262. The transmission period of the display data from the display IC 266 to the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 is shown. The same applies to the case where display data is received in the third to fifth display circuits 263 to 265.

  Type data from the main CPU 63 to the display IC 266 at the timing t1 after the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 including the main CPU 63, the display IC 266, and the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 is started. And transmission of display data is started. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 627 (b), a pulse type clock signal is transmitted at each of the timing of t1, the timing of t2, the timing of t3, the timing of t4, and the timing of t5. As shown in (a), the pulse type data signal is transmitted in correspondence with the transmission of the pulse type clock signal at the timing of t1. Thus, information corresponding to the first display circuit 261 is stored in the type data buffer 281 of the display IC 266.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 627 (d), a pulse-like display clock is used at each of the timing of t1, the timing of t2, the timing of t3, the timing of t4, the timing of t5, the timing of t6, the timing of t7 and the timing of t8. The signal is transmitted, and as shown in FIG. 627 (c), the pulsed display data signal is transmitted in correspondence with the transmission of the pulsed display clock signal at the timings t2, t3, t5 and t7. Is sent. As a result, the display data corresponding to the information format is stored in the display data buffer 283 of the display IC 266.

  When the transmission of the eighth bit display clock signal is completed at the timing of t9 as shown in FIG. 627 (d), the type data buffer 281 is stored at the timing of t9 as shown in FIG. 627 (e). The transmission of the first selection signal is started by the selection signal output unit 282 of the display IC 266 to the first display circuit 261 corresponding to the stored type data, and at the timing of the t9, as shown in FIG. 627 (g). The transmission of the display data stored in the display data buffer 283 by the display data output unit 284 of the display IC 266 is started. Thus, the first display circuit 261 receives and uses the display data.

  Thereafter, at time t10, transmission of the type data and display data from the main CPU 63 to the display IC 266 is newly started as shown in FIGS. 627 (a) to 627 (d). In this case, at the timing of t10, the transmission of the first selection signal from the display IC 266 to the first display circuit 261 is stopped as shown in FIGS. 627 (e) and 627 (g), and The transmission of the display data to the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 is stopped.

  For details of the new transmission of the type data and the display data, as shown in FIG. 627 (b), the pulse type clock is used at each of the timing of t10, the timing of t11, the timing of t12, the timing of t13, and the timing of t14. The signal is transmitted, and as shown in FIG. 627 (a), the pulse type data signal is transmitted in correspondence with the transmission of the pulse type clock signal at the timing of t11. As a result, information corresponding to the second display circuit 262 is stored in the type data buffer 281 of the display IC 266.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 627 (d), a pulse-like display clock is used at each of the timing of t10, the timing of t11, the timing of t12, the timing of t13, the timing of t14, the timing of t15, the timing of t16, and the timing of t17. The signal is transmitted, and as shown in FIG. 627 (c), it corresponds to the transmission of the pulsed display clock signal at the timing of t10, the timing of t11, the timing of t12, the timing of t15, the timing of t16, and the timing of t17. Then, a pulse-like display data signal is transmitted. As a result, the display data corresponding to the information format is stored in the display data buffer 283 of the display IC 266.

  Then, when the transmission of the eighth bit display clock signal is completed at the timing t18 as shown in FIG. 627 (d), the display clock signal is stored in the type data buffer 281 at the timing t18 as shown in FIG. 627 (f). The transmission of the second selection signal is started by the selection signal output unit 282 of the display IC 266 toward the second display circuit 262 corresponding to the type data thus obtained, and at the time t18, as shown in FIG. The transmission of the display data stored in the display data buffer 283 is started by the display data output unit 284 of the display IC 266. As a result, the display data is received and used by the second display circuit 262.

  Note that only one piece of display data is transmitted in the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 628) for transmission of display data for the first to fourth display circuits 261 to 264, but for the fifth display circuit 265 In the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 628) to which the display data is to be transmitted, four pieces of display data are transmitted corresponding to the number of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. The second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 628) is started in the second interrupt cycle (specifically, 2 milliseconds) as described above, but even if it is processing for transmitting four pieces of display data. Each processing time is set so that one processing cycle is completed in less than the second interrupt cycle.

  With the above configuration, it is possible to transmit display data to a plurality of display circuits 261 to 265 using one display IC 266. Here, as described above, each of the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 can store and hold the provided display data for a predetermined period (for example, 16 milliseconds), but the predetermined period has elapsed. Then, the display data gradually approaches the state of all “0”. In this case, if the reception of the display data in each of the display circuits 261 to 265 exceeds a predetermined period, the special figure display part 37a, the special figure reservation display part 37b, the general figure display part 38a, the general figure reservation display part 38b, and the Even in the situation where the display contents are not changed in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the display segments in the light-emitting state temporarily approach the light-off state, and as a result, the light in the display segments Flashing may occur. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, apart from the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 622) started at the first interrupt cycle (specifically, 4 milliseconds), the second interrupt shorter than the first interrupt cycle is performed. A second timer interrupt process (FIG. 628) started at a cycle (specifically, 2 milliseconds) is set, and transmission of display data to the display IC 266 is collectively performed in the second timer interrupt process. .

  Hereinafter, the second timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. Note that the processes of steps S8401 to S8413 in the second timer interrupt process are executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

  First, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit the occurrence of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 622) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 628) (step S8401). By prohibiting the occurrence of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 622), the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 622) interrupts the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 628) even if the first interrupt cycle has elapsed. Can be prevented from being started. Further, since the occurrence of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 628) is prohibited, even if the second interrupt cycle has elapsed during the execution of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 628), the second timer interrupt process is performed. It is possible to prevent the processing (FIG. 628) from being started redundantly.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether “1” is set in the setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control (step S8402). The setting update display flag is a flag used by the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the setting value update process (FIG. 621) is being executed by the main CPU 63. As described above, the setting value updating process (FIG. 621) is performed in a state where the process at the start of the supply of the operating power is executed in the main process (FIG. 619) when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. However, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 628) is interrupted and started even if the process at the time of starting the supply of the operating power is being executed. Even in the situation where the value update process (FIG. 621) is being executed, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 628) is interrupted and activated.

  The condition in which the setting update display flag is set to “1” means that the main CPU 63 has executed the set value update process (FIG. 621) in the second processing of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 628). It means that it is the process that was started by interrupting in the situation. If an affirmative determination is made in step S8402, a process of setting the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update is executed (step S8403). In the setting process, a display indicating that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being updated on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and a display indicating the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 are displayed. The display data to be performed is stored in the fifth display data buffer 275.

  When the display data stored in the fifth display data buffer 275 is transmitted to the fifth display circuit 265 via the display IC 266, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 will be described with reference to FIG. The display shown in the figure is performed. Specifically, when a display indicating that the setting value is being updated is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are displayed. In each case, at least one display segment emits light. That is, each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is in the display state. Accordingly, even when the display indicating that the setting value is being updated is being displayed, it is determined that the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are not out of order. The administrator can understand. Note that, even when the management result of the game history is displayed, at least one display segment is in a light emitting state in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and the first to fourth notification display devices are displayed. Each of the display devices 201 to 204 is in a display state.

  For details on the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, in the first notification display device 201, one central display segment emits light and the remaining display segments turn off. Becomes Even when the management result of the game history is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, one central display segment in the first notification display device 201 may emit light, The display content of the first notification display device 201 when the management result of the game history is displayed includes display content in which one central display segment emits light and the remaining display segments turn off. Not. Thereby, the display content of the first notification display device 201 in the situation where the set value is updated is displayed while using the display segment that can be lit even when the management result of the game history is displayed. Display contents that are not displayed in the result of the management.

  In the second notification display device 202, similarly to the first notification display device 201, one central display segment is in a light emitting state, and the remaining display segments are in a non-lighting state. Even when the management result of the game history is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, one central display segment in the second notification display device 202 can emit light, The display content of the second notification display device 202 when the management result of the game history is displayed includes display content in which one central display segment emits light and the remaining display segments turn off. Not. Accordingly, the display content of the second notification display device 202 in a situation where the set value is updated is displayed while using the display segment that can be lit even when the management result of the game history is displayed. Display contents that are not displayed in the result of the management.

  In the third notification display device 203, some display segments are turned on and the remaining display segments are turned off so that the character "H" is displayed. In this case, the display segment that becomes light-emitting may be light-emitting even when the management result of the game history is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. When displayed, the display content of the third notification display device 203 does not include the display content in which the letter “H” is displayed. Thereby, the display content of the third notification display device 203 in a situation where the set value is updated is displayed while using the display segment that can be lit even when the management result of the game history is displayed. Display contents that are not displayed in the result of the management. In addition, the display contents of the third notification display device 203 in the situation where the set value is being confirmed do not include the display contents in which the letter “H” is displayed. Accordingly, by displaying “H” on the third notification display device 203, it is possible to notify the administrator of the gaming hall that the setting value is being updated.

  In the fourth notification display device 204, some display segments are turned on and the remaining display segments are turned off so that a display corresponding to the current set value is performed. In the case of FIG. 629 (a), since the current setting value is “Setting 2”, “4” corresponding to “Setting 2” is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. By checking the fourth notification display device 204, the administrator of the game hall can grasp the current set value. The display content of the fourth notification display device 204 in the situation where the set value is being updated can be displayed in both the situation where the management result of the game history is displayed and the situation where the set value is confirmed.

  Returning to the description of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 628), when a negative determination is made in step S8402, it is determined whether or not “1” is set to the setting confirmation display flag in the work area 221 for specific control. (Step S8404). The setting confirmation display flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 620) is being executed by the main CPU 63. As described above, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 620) is performed in a state where the process at the time of starting the supply of the operating power is performed in the main process (FIG. 619) when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. However, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 628) is interrupted and started even if the process at the time of starting the supply of the operating power is being executed. Even in the situation where the confirmation process (FIG. 620) is being executed, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 628) is interrupted and activated.

  The condition in which the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1" means that the main CPU 63 has executed the setting confirmation process (FIG. 620) in the second processing of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 628). It means that it is the process that was started by interrupting in the situation. If an affirmative determination is made in step S8404, processing for setting the fifth display data buffer 275 during setting confirmation is executed (step S8405). In the setting process, a display indicating that the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being checked on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and a display indicating the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are displayed. The display data to be performed is stored in the fifth display data buffer 275.

  When the display data stored in the fifth display data buffer 275 is transmitted to the fifth display circuit 265 via the display IC 266, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 will be described with reference to FIG. The display shown in the figure is performed. Specifically, when a display indicating that the setting value is being updated is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are displayed. In each case, at least one display segment emits light. That is, each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is in the display state. Thereby, even when the display indicating that the setting value is being checked is displayed, it is determined that the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are not out of order. The administrator can understand.

  For details on the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, in the first notification display device 201, one central display segment emits light and the remaining display segments turn off. Becomes Even when the management result of the game history is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, one central display segment in the first notification display device 201 may emit light, The display content of the first notification display device 201 when the management result of the game history is displayed includes display content in which one central display segment emits light and the remaining display segments turn off. Not. Thereby, the display content of the first notification display device 201 in the situation where the set value is confirmed is used while using the display segment that can be lit even when the management result of the game history is displayed. Display contents that are not displayed in the result of the management.

  In the second notification display device 202, similarly to the first notification display device 201, one central display segment is in a light emitting state, and the remaining display segments are in a non-lighting state. Even when the management result of the game history is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, one central display segment in the second notification display device 202 can emit light, The display content of the second notification display device 202 when the management result of the game history is displayed includes display content in which one central display segment emits light and the remaining display segments turn off. Not. Thereby, the display content of the second notification display device 202 in a situation where the set value is confirmed is displayed while using the display segment that can be lit even when the management result of the game history is displayed. Display contents that are not displayed in the result of the management.

  Here, the display contents on the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 are the same regardless of whether the setting value is being updated or the setting value is being checked. Thereby, the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 indicate that the display targets on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are not related to the management result of the game history but to the set values. It is possible to clearly notify the manager of the game hall by the display of.

  In the third notification display device 203, some display segments are turned on so that the character "k" is displayed, and the other display segments are turned off. In this case, the display segment that becomes light-emitting may be light-emitting even when the management result of the game history is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. When displayed, the display content of the third notification display device 203 does not include the display content in which the character “k” is displayed. Accordingly, the display content of the third notification display device 203 in a situation where the set value is confirmed is displayed while using the display segment that can be lit even when the management result of the game history is displayed. Display contents that are not displayed in the result of the management. Also, “H” is displayed on the third notification display device 203 when the set value is being updated, whereas “k” is displayed on the third notification display device 203 when the set value is being checked. Is displayed. Thus, by confirming the display content of the third notification display device 203, the administrator of the gaming hall is notified of whether the setting value is being updated or the setting value is being confirmed. It becomes possible.

  In the fourth notification display device 204, some display segments are turned on and the remaining display segments are turned off so that a display corresponding to the current set value is performed. In the case of FIG. 629 (b), since the current setting value is “Setting 2”, “4” corresponding to “Setting 2” is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. By checking the fourth notification display device 204, the administrator of the game hall can grasp the current set value. Note that the display content of the fourth notification display device 204 in the situation where the set value is being confirmed may be displayed in both the situation where the management result of the game history is displayed and the situation where the set value is updated.

  Returning to the description of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 628), if a negative determination is made in step S8404, the process of setting the fifth display data buffer 275 in the normal state is executed (step S8406). In this case, information is read from the display target setting area 276 in the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display parameters corresponding to the read information. The display data is stored in the fifth display data buffer 275. By transmitting the display data to the fifth display circuit 265 via the display IC 266, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 calculate the current display target parameter among the 61st to 68th parameters. The result is displayed.

  When the processing of step S8403, step S8405, or step S8406 is executed, the transmission state of the signal through the type data signal line LN1 and the type clock signal line LN2 is turned off (step S8407), and the display data signal line LN3 and the display are displayed. The transmission state of the signal through the clock signal line LN4 is turned off (step S8408). Thereafter, the type counter provided in the specific control work area 221 is updated (step S8409).

  The type counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the transmission target of the display data in the first to fifth display data buffers 271 to 275 in the current processing of the second timer interrupt processing. When the value of the type counter is “1”, the display data of the first display data buffer 271 is to be transmitted, and when the value of the type counter is “2”, the display data of the second display data buffer 272 is to be transmitted. When the value of the type counter is “3”, the display data of the third display data buffer 273 is to be transmitted, and when the value of the type counter is “4”, the display data of the fourth display data buffer 274 is If the type data is to be transmitted and the value of the type counter is “5”, the display data in the fifth display data buffer 275 is to be transmitted. In the type counter updating process, the value of the type counter is incremented by one, and if the value of the type counter after the one addition exceeds the upper limit value of “5”, the value of the type counter is set to “1”. . Thereby, the transmission target of the display data is sequentially changed in the first to fifth display data buffers 271 to 275 every time the second timer interrupt process is performed.

  Then, the type data corresponding to the value of the type counter is read from the main ROM 64 (step S8410). Specifically, when the value of the type counter is “1”, the type data corresponding to the first display circuit 261 is read from the main ROM 64, and when the value of the type counter is “2”, the second type is read. The type data corresponding to the display circuit 262 is read from the main ROM 64, and when the value of the type counter is "3", the type data corresponding to the third display circuit 263 is read from the main ROM 64, and the value of the type counter is read. When the value is "4", the type data corresponding to the fourth display circuit 264 is read from the main ROM 64, and when the value of the type counter is "5", the type data corresponding to the fifth display circuit 265 is read. Read from the side ROM 64.

  Thereafter, display data is read from the display data buffers 271 to 275 corresponding to the value of the type counter (step S8411). Specifically, when the value of the type counter is “1”, the display data is read from the first display data buffer 271, and when the value of the type counter is “2”, the display data is read from the second display data buffer 272. The display data is read, and if the value of the type counter is "3", the display data is read from the third display data buffer 273. If the value of the type counter is "4", the display data is read from the fourth display data buffer 274. The display data is read, and when the value of the type counter is “5”, the display data is read from the fifth display data buffer 275.

  After that, transmission processing of various signals is executed (step S8412). In the transmission processing, a signal is output to the type data signal line LN1 and the type clock signal line LN2 such that the type data read in step S8410 is transmitted to the display IC 266. In the transmission process, a signal is output to the display data signal line LN3 and the display clock signal line LN4 so that the display data read in step S8411 is transmitted to the display IC 266.

  Thereafter, interrupt permission is set to permit generation of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 622) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 628) (step S8413).

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on by the setting key without pressing the reset button 68c, the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. In a situation where the main processing (FIG. 619) is started, the reset button 68c is not pressed and the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on, and processing enabling the progress of the game is executed in the main processing. The setting confirmation processing is executed in a state where the processing at the time of starting the supply of the operating power, which is the state before the start, is being executed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to illegally check the set value.

  Assuming that the set value is confirmed in a situation where the progress of the game is continued, for example, if the set value is confirmed during the execution of the game round, the set value is confirmed while being performed. Therefore, there is a possibility that a shift to the open / close execution mode occurs. In this case, there is a possibility that game balls cannot be fired toward the special power winning device 32 even though the open / close execution mode has been started. Further, if the set value is confirmed during the execution of the opening / closing execution mode, the opening / closing execution mode proceeds under the condition that the set value is confirmed. There is a possibility that the game ball cannot be fired toward.

  Assuming a case where the progress of the game is stopped when the set value is confirmed, if the confirmation of the set value is started in a situation where the game is being performed, the progress of the game is stopped halfway May be complicated. For example, if the confirmation of the set value is started during the execution of the game round and the progress of the game is to be stopped halfway, a process for stopping the game round is required. In this case, when the confirmation of the set value is started, the variation display of the symbol on the symbol display device 41 is stopped halfway, and when the confirmation of the set value is completed, the variation display of the symbol on the symbol display device 41 is restarted. If so, complicated processing will be required. In addition, for example, if the confirmation of the set value is started during the execution of the opening / closing execution mode and the progress of the game is stopped in the middle, a process for stopping the opening / closing execution mode in the middle is required. In addition, when the confirmation of the set value is started in the middle of the execution of the variation display of the pattern on the ordinary figure display unit 38a and the progress of the game is to be stopped in the middle, the process for stopping the variation display of the pattern in the middle is performed. Required. In addition, if the setting value check is started during the execution of the opening execution state of the general electricity role object 34a and the progress of the game is to be stopped on the way, a process for stopping the opening execution state on the way is required. Become. On the other hand, a configuration in which the set value is confirmed after all the games have been completed may be considered. In this case, the game times, the opening / closing execution mode, the variation display of the pattern on the general-purpose display section 38a, and It is necessary to wait for a situation in which none of the release execution states of the object 34a is executed, and there is a possibility that the waiting time until starting to check the set value may be increased.

  On the other hand, in the main processing executed when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the state before the supply of the operating power, which is the situation before the processing enabling the progress of the game is executed, is performed. Since the setting confirmation process is executed in a situation where the process is being executed, the setting value is confirmed in a situation where the progress of the game has already been stopped. This makes it possible to prevent the setting value from being checked in a situation where the game is in progress, and to stop the game progressing in the middle of the setting value check, or to stop the game progress. There is no need to wait for confirmation of the set value until Therefore, it is possible to appropriately confirm the set value.

  When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while pressing the reset button 68c, the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, and the reset button 68c is started in a state where the main processing (FIG. 619) is started. Is pressed, and the RAM clear processing (step S7915) is executed regardless of whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a has been turned ON. As a result, the operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the reset button 68c is uniquely linked to the execution of the RAM clear processing (step S7915), and the RAM clear processing (step S7915). Can be made easy for the manager of the gaming hall to understand.

  Even if the RAM clear processing (step S7915) is executed, the set value counter in the work area 221 for specific control is not cleared to "0" and the information of the set value counter is not changed. This makes it possible to prevent the set values from being changed even when the RAM clear processing (step S7915) is executed.

  Not only is the operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 performed while pressing the reset button 68c, but also the operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while performing the ON operation of the setting key insertion portion 68a with the setting key is performed. Not only the clear processing (step S7915) but also the set value update processing (step S7918) is executed. Also, as described above, the setting confirmation process is performed based on the power-on operation of the pachinko machine 10 while the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on by the setting key without pressing the reset button 68c (step S7914). Is executed. As a result, it is possible to make the ON operation for the setting key insertion unit 68a common as the operation for executing the processing related to the setting value. Therefore, it is possible to make the operation content for generating the processing related to the set value easy to understand for the manager of the game hall.

  When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on by the setting key, and the pressing operation of the reset button 68c is not added, a setting confirmation process is executed, and the reset button is executed. When the pressing operation of 68c is added, a set value updating process is executed. Accordingly, it is possible to make the execution target process different from the setting confirmation process and the setting value update process depending on whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed. Therefore, it is possible to make the contents of the operation for executing the desired processing of the setting confirmation processing and the setting value update processing easy for the manager of the gaming hall to understand. In addition, by making the operation content for executing the setting value update processing more than the setting confirmation processing, it is possible to make it particularly difficult to perform an illegal operation of the setting value update processing.

  The process of monitoring whether or not the set value is abnormal is executed in a first timer interrupt process (FIG. 622) that is periodically started. This makes it possible to monitor whether the set value is abnormal even in a situation where a game is being played. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from continuing even though the set value is abnormal.

  Monitoring whether the setting value is abnormal is executed every time a monitoring trigger occurs. More specifically, it is executed each time the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 622) is started. This makes it possible to increase the frequency of monitoring whether the set value is abnormal.

  In the main process (FIG. 619), a process for monitoring whether the set value is normal is not set. If a process for monitoring whether the set value is normal is set in the process at the start of the supply of the operating power in the main process (FIG. 619), the power failure flag and the checksum are set at the start of the supply of the operating power. It is necessary to monitor whether the set value is normal in addition to the monitoring of the setting, and the monitoring load increases. Further, if it is specified that the set value is abnormal at the start of supply of the operating power, the RAM clear processing (step S7915) and the set value update processing (step S7918) are to be executed. Is complicated. On the other hand, since the process for monitoring whether the set value is normal is not set in the main process (FIG. 619), the processing configuration at the time of starting the supply of the operating power is preferable. It becomes possible. Even if the process for monitoring whether the set value is normal in the process at the start of the supply of the operating power is not set, the setting monitoring is performed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 622). Since the configuration is such that the process (step S8202) is executed, it is possible to cope with a case where the set value is abnormal.

  The display setting for the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 is performed by the display IC 266 in accordance with the display data transmitted from the main CPU 63, so that the display contents corresponding to the display data are displayed. The display control of the special figure reservation display part 37b, the general figure display part 38a, the general figure reservation display part 38b, and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is controlled. Thus, the processing load on the main CPU 63 can be reduced. In this case, a plurality of display units such as a special figure display unit 37a, a special figure reservation display unit 37b, a general figure display unit 38a, a general figure reservation display unit 38b, and first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are provided. In the configuration provided, the display IC 266 is not provided in one-to-one correspondence with the plurality of display units, but one display IC 266 is also used for the plurality of display units. This makes it possible to increase the number of display units to be display-controlled while suppressing an increase in the number of display ICs 266. Further, the transmission interval of the display data from the main CPU 63 to the display IC 266 is set before the display corresponding to the display data can not be maintained in each display unit, before the display circuits 261 to 265 corresponding to each display unit. The transmission interval is set so that the display setting by the display IC 266 is performed. Thus, even if one display IC 266 is also used for a plurality of display units, it is possible to appropriately perform display corresponding to display data on each display unit.

  When transmitting the display data to the display IC 266, the main-side CPU 63 transmits to the display IC 266 type data enabling the type of the display circuits 261 to 265 to be set for the display data. Thus, when the display data is transmitted from the main CPU 63, the display IC 266 may set the display data to the display circuits 261 to 265 corresponding to the type data transmitted from the main CPU 63. Therefore, even when one display IC 266 is used for a plurality of display units, the configuration of the display IC 266 can be simplified.

  The main CPU 63 transmits the display data so that the update cycle is repeated when the setting of the display data for the plurality of display units is performed once in a predetermined order one time. I do. This allows the main CPU 63 to change the display unit to which the display data is to be transmitted in accordance with the predetermined order, so that the processing configuration of the main CPU 63 can be simplified.

  Even if the content of the display data for one display unit is the same as the content of the display data when the display unit was previously transmitted with the display unit as the transmission target, the main CPU 63 determines that the display unit is a transmission target. Transmits the display data. Thus, even when one display IC 266 is used for a plurality of display units, the same display can be continued on a predetermined display unit.

  The main CPU 63 executes a process for transmitting display data to the display IC 266 in a second timer interrupt process (FIG. 628) which is started by interrupting another process when the second interrupt cycle is reached. This makes it possible to set the cycle at which the display data is set on each display unit to a predetermined cycle. Therefore, even in a configuration in which one display IC 266 is used for a plurality of display units, before each display unit cannot maintain the display corresponding to the display data, the display ICs 266 may be used. The setting of the display data by the display IC 266 can be performed.

  Processing for transmitting display data to the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 to be display-set by the display IC 266 is summarized in the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 628). Thus, the cycle in which the display data is set in the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 can be set to the same cycle.

  When the first interrupt cycle is reached, the main CPU 63 interrupts another process and executes the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 622). In this case, the second interrupt cycle of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 628) is set to be shorter than the first interrupt cycle of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 622). This makes it possible to transmit the display data in a shorter cycle than in a configuration in which the processing of transmitting the display data to the display IC 266 is performed in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 622).

  Also, the process of transmitting display data to the display IC 266 is set in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 628) having a shorter interrupt cycle than the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 622) in which the process for making the game proceed is set. Have been. Thus, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 622) can be activated at an appropriate period when executing the process for advancing the game, and the excellent effects described above can be achieved. Become.

  The second timer interrupt process (FIG. 628) is interrupted and activated even in a situation where the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 622) is being executed. This makes it possible to set the display data transmission cycle to a predetermined cycle.

  When the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 628) is started, the interrupt of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 622) is prohibited, and when the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 628) is ended, the first timer interrupt process is executed. The interrupt shown in FIG. 622 is permitted. This makes it possible to prevent the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 622) from being interrupted and executed while the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 628) is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to give priority to the processing for transmitting the display data.

  The second timer interrupt process (FIG. 628) is interrupted and activated even in the situation where the process (steps S7901 to S7918) at the start of the supply of the operating power is being executed in the main process (FIG. 619). This makes it possible to control the display of the plurality of display units even in a situation where the processing at the time of starting the supply of the operating power is being executed. Further, since the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 628) is started by interrupting the process at the start of the supply of the operating power, the processing configuration of the process at the start of the supply of the operating power is not complicated. Also, it is possible to control the display of the plurality of display units in a situation where the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power is being executed.

  The second timer interrupt process (FIG. 628) is interrupted and activated even in the situation where the set value update process (step S7918) is being executed in the main process (FIG. 619). At (FIG. 628), display data for displaying the current setting value on the fourth notification display device 204 is transmitted. Accordingly, the current setting value is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204 in a situation where the setting value update process (step S7918) is being performed without complicating the processing configuration of the main process (FIG. 619). It is possible to be done.

  Even after the processing at the time of starting the supply of the operating power is performed in the main processing (FIG. 619), the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 628) is interrupted and started every time the second interrupt cycle elapses. Thus, by using the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 628), either the situation in which the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power is being executed or the situation after the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power is completed It is also possible to control the display of a plurality of display units.

  An update button 68b is provided in the same manner as in the thirty-third embodiment. In the set value update process (FIG. 621), the set value is not updated by one step every time the reset button 68c is pressed. Each time the update button 68b is pressed, the set value may be updated by one step. Further, positions corresponding to each of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6” are set as the rotation operation positions when the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion section 68a and the rotation operation is performed. The configuration may be such that a set value corresponding to the rotational operation position of the part 68a is set. Further, the setting key insertion portion 68a is configured to be capable of being further rotated than the ON position, and each time a rotating operation beyond the ON position is performed, the set value being updated is changed to the next set value. The configuration may be updated.

  In the setting value updating process (FIG. 621), the setting value being selected is determined by turning off the setting key insertion unit 68a, and the setting value updating process is terminated by further pressing the reset button 68c. May be adopted. In the configuration in which the update button 68b is provided, in the setting value update process (FIG. 621), the setting value being selected is determined by turning off the setting key insertion unit 68a, and the update button 68b is further pressed. The configuration may be such that the set value update process is terminated by an operation.

  In addition, as a condition for executing the set value updating process (FIG. 621), a condition that the gaming machine body 12 is in the open state may not be set, and the front door frame 14 is in the open state. The condition may not be set, and both the condition that the gaming machine body 12 is in the open state and the condition that the front door frame 14 is in the open state may not be set.

  Further, as a condition for executing the setting confirmation process (FIG. 620), a condition that the gaming machine body 12 is in the open state may not be set, and the front door frame 14 is in the open state. The condition may not be set, and both the condition that the gaming machine body 12 is in the open state and the condition that the front door frame 14 is in the open state may not be set.

  In the main processing (FIG. 619) executed when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, it is specified that the power failure flag is not set to “1” or that the checksum is abnormal. In such a case, the configuration may be such that the RAM clear processing (step S7915) is executed. In this case, after the RAM clear processing (step S7915) is executed, the setting value updating processing (step S7918) may be executed, and a notification indicating that the setting value updating processing (step S7918) should be executed. And the progress of the game may be stopped, or a process for controlling the progress of the game may be started.

  Also, in the main processing (FIG. 619), the setting confirmation processing (step S7914) is performed instead of the processing for determining whether or not the power failure flag is set to “1” and the processing for comparing the checksums. , May be executed before these processes. In this case, it is possible to give priority to the process for confirming the set value.

  Further, the configuration monitoring process (step S8220) is not limited to the configuration in which the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 622) is executed every time the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 622) is started. The configuration may be such that the setting monitoring process (Step S8222) is executed every time the predetermined number of times (for example, 10,000 times) is executed. In this case, it is possible to suppress the execution frequency of the monitoring while periodically monitoring whether the set value is normal.

  Further, the configuration monitoring process (step S8220) may be configured to be executed in the remaining process (steps S7921 to S79224) in the main process (FIG. 619). In this case, it is possible to monitor whether the set value is normal by using the idle time in a situation where the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 622) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 628) are not executed. It becomes possible.

  In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which a setting monitoring process (step S8222) is executed when a game round is newly started. More specifically, when a game round is newly started, a setting monitoring process (step S8220) may be performed before the execution determination process is performed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the execution determination processing from being performed in a situation where the set value is abnormal.

  Further, when it is determined that the setting value is abnormal in the setting monitoring process (Step S8220), the process may be shifted to the setting value updating process (Step S7918).

  If it is determined in the setting monitoring process (step S8220) that the setting value is abnormal, the main process (1) is set in a state where the setting abnormality flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1". 619) may be started. In order to stop the progress of the game with the setting abnormal flag set to “1” and to release the state in which the progress of the game is stopped, the power is turned off → A configuration that requires ON may be adopted. In this case, even if an operation for executing the set value updating process is not performed in the main process (FIG. 619), the setting is forcibly set when the setting abnormality flag is set to “1”. By executing the value updating process, it is possible to forcibly perform a new setting of the setting value by using the setting value updating process set in the main process (FIG. 619).

  In addition, the hold information obtained when a game ball enters the first operation port 33 and the hold information obtained when a game ball enters the second operation port 34 are separately stored, The first special figure display section and the second special figure display section may be provided as the special figure display section 37a in correspondence with the reservation information. In this case, the variable display of the pattern on the first special figure display unit and the variable display of the pattern on the second special figure display unit can be executed in an overlapping manner, and when a predetermined game state is reached, either one of them is displayed. A configuration in which the duration of the change display of the picture on the special figure display unit is extremely long may be adopted. In this configuration, if it is attempted to wait for the confirmation of the set value until a situation in which no game is played, the waiting time becomes long. On the other hand, by performing the setting confirmation process (step S7914) in the process at the start of the supply of the operating power in the main CPU 63, the setting value can be set without causing the above-described standby time. Can be confirmed.

  Further, in the low frequency support mode, the duration of the fluctuation display of the picture on the ordinary figure display unit 38a may be extremely long. In this configuration, if it is attempted to wait for the confirmation of the set value until a situation in which no game is played, the waiting time becomes long. On the other hand, by performing the setting confirmation process (step S7914) in the process at the start of the supply of the operating power in the main CPU 63, the setting value can be set without causing the above-described standby time. Can be confirmed.

  Further, the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in the case where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 620) is executed are not limited to the display contents in the above-described embodiment. The character "k" may not be displayed on the display unit 203, and only the central display segment may emit light as in the case of the first notification display unit 201 and the second notification display unit 202. . In addition, the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 may be turned off and the fourth notification display device 204 may perform a display corresponding to the current set value.

  Further, the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the set value update process (FIG. 621) is executed are not limited to the display contents in the above-described embodiment. The character "H" may not be displayed on the display unit 203, and only the central display segment may emit light as in the case of the first notification display unit 201 and the second notification display unit 202. . In addition, the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 may be turned off and the fourth notification display device 204 may perform a display corresponding to the current set value.

  Further, instead of transmitting the type data and the display data to the display IC 266 simultaneously, the main CPU 63 may be configured to start transmitting the type data and then start transmitting the display data. In this case, the transmission of the display data may be started during the transmission of the type data, or the transmission of the display data may be started after the transmission of the type data is completed. Further, the transmission of the type data may be started after the transmission of the display data is started. In this case, the transmission of the type data may be started during the transmission of the display data, or the transmission of the type data may be started after the transmission of the display data is completed.

  The display IC 266 is not limited to the configuration in which only one display IC 266 is provided so as to be common to the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265. It is good also as a structure provided corresponding to each one by one. In this configuration, when the display data stored and held in each display IC provided in one-to-one correspondence with the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 is short, the display data to each display IC is Unintended blinking may occur on each display unit depending on the providing cycle. On the other hand, the processing for transmitting the display data is concentrated in the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 628) in which the interrupt cycle is relatively short as in the above-described embodiment. The provision cycle can be shortened, and unintended blinking can be prevented from occurring on each display unit.

  Further, instead of the configuration in which the hit random number counter C1 is provided in the main RAM 65, a configuration may be adopted in which a random number circuit for updating the random number acquired in the hit determination processing is provided. In this case, in the internal function register setting process in the main process (FIG. 619), setting for associating the random number of the random number circuit with the random number acquired in the pass / fail determination process is performed.

  In the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 622), the timer interrupt process is prohibited and the timer interrupt process is permitted before and after each of the processes in steps S8201 to S8221, but this may be changed. For example, for a part of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 622), the timer interrupt processing is prohibited and the timer interrupt processing is permitted before and after that, while the other processing of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 622) is performed. The configuration may be such that prohibition of timer interrupt processing and permission of timer interrupt processing are not performed before and after that. Further, the configuration may be such that prohibition of timer interrupt processing and permission of timer interrupt processing are set so as to sandwich a plurality of processing included in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 622).

  Further, in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 622), a configuration in which the setting of prohibiting the interrupt of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 628) may not be performed may be made. In this case, since the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 628) is executed with priority over the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 622), it is possible to give priority to the display control of the plurality of display units. . Further, in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 622) in this configuration, the interrupt of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 622) is prohibited in order to prevent the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 622) from being started repeatedly. On the other hand, the interrupt of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 628) may not be prohibited.

  When both the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 622) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 628) occur, the execution of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 628) is performed by the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 628). 622), the execution of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 622) may be prioritized over the execution of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 628). It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the timer interrupt processing is started earlier from the timer interrupt processing that occurs earlier.

  When the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 628) is being executed, the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 628) is executed instead of the configuration in which the execution of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 622) is prohibited. In such a situation, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 622) may be interrupted and started. This makes it possible to prioritize execution of the processing for advancing the game over display control of the plurality of display units.

  Further, the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 628) is not set, and various processing of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 628) is performed by the main processing (FIG. 619) and the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 622). May be executed in a distributed manner. For example, in the setting confirmation process (step S7914) in the main process (FIG. 619), a display indicating that the setting is being confirmed and a display corresponding to the current set value are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. May be configured to set processing to be performed. In the setting value update process (step S7918) in the main process (FIG. 619), a display indicating that the setting is being updated and a display corresponding to the current set value are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. May be configured to set processing to be performed. In addition, in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 622), the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, the general figure reservation display unit 38b, and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 To 204 may be configured to perform processing for display control.

  The second timer interrupt process (FIG. 628) is not limited to the configuration in which only the process for controlling the display of a plurality of display units is executed. Alternatively or alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which a process different from the process for controlling the display of the plurality of display units is executed. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which part of the processing for advancing the game is executed in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 622), and the rest is executed in the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 628). In this case, a process in which the execution cycle is preferably relatively short is executed in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 628) in which the interrupt cycle is relatively short, and processing in which no problem occurs even if the execution cycle is relatively long. Is preferably executed in a first timer interrupt process (FIG. 622) having a relatively long interrupt cycle. In addition, among the processes of steps S8202 to S8221 in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 622) of the above embodiment, the power failure information storage process (step S8202) is executed in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 628). Other processes may be executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 622). In this case, the power failure monitoring can be repeatedly executed in a relatively short cycle. In addition to or in place of this configuration, the fraud detection process (step S8206) is executed in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 628), and the other processes are executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 622). May be adopted. In this case, fraud monitoring can be repeatedly executed in a relatively short cycle.

  The number of the display circuits 261 to 265 for which the display setting of the display data is performed by the display IC 266 is not limited to five, but may be two, three, four, or six or more. Is also good. The first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are not limited to the configuration in which the fifth display circuit 265 is associated with the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. A configuration in which display circuits are provided in one-to-one correspondence may be employed.

<66th embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the set value updating process executed by the main CPU 63 is different from that of the 65th embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the 65th embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the 65th embodiment is basically omitted. In the present embodiment, an update button 68b is provided on the main control board 61 as in the 33rd embodiment.

  FIG. 630 is a flowchart showing the set value update processing in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processing of steps S8501 to S8508 in the setting value update processing is executed using the specific control program and the specific control data in the main CPU 63.

  First, “1” is set to a setting update display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step S8501). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the set value counter provided in the work area 221 for the specific control is equal to or more than 1 corresponding to “Setting 1” and equal to or less than 6 corresponding to “Setting 6” (step). S8502). If the value of the set value counter is “0” or 7 or more, a negative determination is made in step S8502, and “1” is set in the set value counter (step S8503). Thereby, the set value of the pachinko machine 10 becomes “Setting 1”.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S8502 or if the process of step S8503 is performed, it is determined whether the reset button 68c is pressed (step S8504). If the reset button 68c has not been pressed (step S8504: NO), the value of the set value counter in the work area 221 for specific control is provided on condition that the update button 68b is pressed (step S8505: YES). Is incremented by 1 (step S8506). Thus, each time the update button 68b is pressed once, the set value is updated to the next higher level. If the update button 68b is not pressed (step S8505: NO) or if the value of the set value counter is incremented by 1, the process returns to step S8502. If it is determined that the value is 7 or more, “1” is set to the set value counter in step S8503. As a result, when the update button 68b is pressed once in the situation of "Setting 6," the display returns to "Setting 1."

  If the reset button 68c has been pressed (step S8504: YES), the current set value is determined, and the flow advances to step S8507. In step S8507, it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a has been turned off using the setting key. In this case, the configuration may be such that it is determined whether the setting key insertion section 68a has been switched from the ON state to the OFF state, or the configuration may be such that it is determined whether the setting key insertion section 68a is in the OFF state. If the setting key insertion section 68a has not been turned off (step S8507: NO), the processing of step S8507 is executed again.

  If the setting key insertion section 68a is turned off (step S8507: YES), the setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step S8508).

  According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the setting value is updated by pressing the update button 68b, the setting value is determined by pressing the reset button 68c, and the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned off. Thus, the setting value updating process ends. That is, in order to end the setting value updating process after updating the setting value in the setting value updating process, it is necessary not only to turn off the setting key insertion unit 68a but also to press the reset button 68c. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the user to play a game with the set value after the set value has been illegally updated.

<67th embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration related to the display control of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 executed by the main CPU 63 is different from that of the above-described 65th embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the 65th embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the 65th embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 631 is an explanatory diagram for describing an electrical configuration of the calculation result storage area 234 provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control.

  The calculation result storage area 234 stores information of a base value calculated by the main CPU 63. The base value refers to the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA (ie, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) in a situation other than the open / close execution mode and the high frequency support mode based on the jackpot result. It is the ratio of the total number of game balls to be paid out.

More specifically, in the present embodiment, although the normal counter area 231 is provided in the non-specific control work area 223 in this embodiment, the open / close execution mode counter area 232 and the frequent support mode counter area 233 are provided. Is not provided. The normal counter area 231 includes a normal general prize counter 231a, a special special prize counter 231b, a normal first operation counter 231c, a normal second operation counter 231d, and a normal prize counter 231a. Out counter 231e is provided. In a situation other than the open / close execution mode or the high frequency support mode based on the jackpot result, when one game ball enters the general winning opening 31, the value of the normal general winning counter 231a is incremented by one, and When one game ball enters the prize device 32, the value of the special special electric winning counter 231b is incremented by one, and when one game ball enters the first operating port 33, the normal operation is performed. The value of the first operation counter 231c is incremented by 1, and when one game ball enters the second operation port 34, the value of the normal second operation counter 231d is incremented by 1, and the out port 24a is When one game ball enters, the value of the normal out counter 231e is incremented by one. When the values of the various counters 231a to 231e of the normal counter area 231 in the state other than the open / close execution mode and the high frequency support mode based on the jackpot result are K91 to K95, the base values are as follows.
Base value: total number of game balls paid out (K91 × “number of prize balls for winning in general winning opening 31” + K92 × “number of prize balls for winning in special electric winning device 32” + K93 × “to first operating port 33” + K94 × “Number of prize balls for winning to the second operating port 34”) / Ratio of the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K91 + K92 + K93 + K94 + K95).

  The base value is calculated each time a result calculation process (FIG. 635) described later is executed in a management process (step S8920) of a first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638) described later. The values of the various counters 231a to 231e in 231 indicate that the management start flag provided in the non-specific control work area 223 is not set to “1”, and that the open / close execution mode and the frequent support mode based on the jackpot result When the total number of the game balls discharged from the game area PA (that is, the total number of the game balls supplied to the game area PA) becomes the management start reference number in a situation other than the above, it is cleared to “0”, In the situation where the management start flag is set to “1”, the open / close execution mode and the high frequency support mode based on the jackpot result The total number of game balls discharged from the gaming area PA (i.e. the total number of ball game which is supplied to the game area PA) is "0" cleared by the shift reference number in nor availability deviation.

  The management start reference number is set to 300, which is smaller than the shift reference number, as in the forty-seventh embodiment. At the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10 or the like, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 may be checked before shipping. At that time, the game balls are put into each of the ball entry units, and the subsequent operation is checked. The base value under such a situation may be different from the situation where a normal game is played. Therefore, the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA in a situation where the management start flag is not set to “1” and is neither the opening / closing execution mode based on the jackpot result nor the high frequency support mode (ie, Once the total number of game balls supplied to the area PA) becomes the management start reference number smaller than the shift reference number, the various counters 231a to 231e of the normal counter area 231 are cleared to "0" once. This makes it possible to reduce the influence of the operation check on the base value in a situation where a normal game is played after the pachinko machine 10 is shipped. Note that the management start reference number is not limited to 300, but may be any number as long as the number is plural, and may be set to a number smaller than 300 or set to a number larger than 300. Is also good.

  The shift reference number is set to 60000. Since the pachinko machine 10 fires up to 100 game balls per minute, 60,000 are the maximum number of fired balls in 10 hours. In this case, the general business hours in the game hall are about 13 hours, and the time during which the game is played in a state other than the open / close execution mode or the high frequency support mode based on the jackpot result is about 10 hours. Therefore, the shift reference number is set assuming the maximum number of game balls to be fired in one business day. By clearing the various counters 231a to 231e of the normal counter area 231 to “0” each time the shift reference number is reached, it is possible to calculate the base value in the range of the shift reference number. Note that the shift reference number is not limited to 60,000 and is arbitrary as long as it is a plurality of pieces, and may be set to a number smaller than 60,000 or set to a number larger than 60,000. Good.

  The calculation result storage area 234 includes a current area 311, a first history area 312, a second history area 313, and a third history area 314 as storage areas for storing the base value information. I have. Each of these various areas 311 to 314 has the same storage capacity, and more specifically, has a 1-byte capacity so that base value information can be stored.

  The current area 311 stores the base value calculated in the latest result calculation process (FIG. 635). That is, the current base area 311 stores the latest base value.

  In the first history area 312, the final base value in the immediately preceding calculation period is stored. In this case, if the immediately preceding calculation period is after the management start flag is set to “1”, the first history area 312 displays the open / close execution mode based on the jackpot result in the immediately preceding calculation period. And the base value at the timing when the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) becomes the shift reference number in a situation other than the high frequency support mode. Is stored. If the management start flag is set to “1” after the immediately preceding calculation period has elapsed, the first history area 312 displays the open / close execution mode based on the jackpot result in the immediately preceding calculation period. The base value at the timing when the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) in the situation other than the high frequency support mode becomes the management start reference number is Is stored.

  The second base area 313 stores the final base value in the calculation period two times before. In this case, if the calculation period two times before is after the management start flag is set to “1”, the opening and closing execution mode based on the jackpot result in the calculation period two times before is displayed in the second history area 313. And the base value at the timing when the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) becomes the shift reference number in a situation other than the high frequency support mode. Is stored. If the management start flag is set to “1” after the calculation period two times before has elapsed, the opening / closing execution mode based on the jackpot result in the second history area 313 is displayed in the second history area 313. The base value at the timing when the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) in the situation other than the high frequency support mode becomes the management start reference number is Is stored.

  The third base area 314 stores the final base value in the calculation period three times before. In this case, if the calculation period three times before is after the management start flag is set to “1”, the third history area 314 displays the opening / closing execution mode based on the jackpot result in the calculation period three times before. And the base value at the timing when the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) becomes the shift reference number in a situation other than the high frequency support mode. Is stored. Further, if the management start flag is set to “1” after the calculation period three times before has elapsed, the third history area 314 includes the open / close execution mode based on the jackpot result in the calculation period three times before. The base value at the timing when the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) in the situation other than the high frequency support mode becomes the management start reference number is Is stored.

  The base values stored in the current area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 are sequentially notified by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Specifically, every time the display continuation period (specifically, 5 seconds) elapses, the current area 311 → the first history area 312 → the second history area 313 → the third history area 314 is determined in a predetermined order. The base value to be notified is switched, and the switching of the base value to be notified in the predetermined order is repeated.

  FIGS. 632 (a) to 632 (d) show first to fourth notification when the base value stored in each of the various areas 311 to 314 is notified in a situation where the management start flag is set to “1”. It is an explanatory view for explaining display contents of display 201-204. FIG. 632 (a) shows an example of display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the base value stored in the current area 311 is notified, and FIG. 632 (b) shows the first history. FIG. 632 (c) shows an example of display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the base value stored in the area 312 is notified, and FIG. 632 (c) shows the base stored in the second history area 313. FIG. 632 (d) shows an example of display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when a value is notified, and FIG. 632 (d) shows a case where the base value stored in the third history area 314 is notified. An example of the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is shown.

  As shown in FIGS. 632 (a) to 632 (d), the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 each have eight display segments 321 to 324. Each of the seven display segments 321 to 324 among the eight display segments 321 to 324 is a rod-shaped light-emitting region having the same shape and the same size, and is arranged so as to generate a “8” character. Have been. On the other hand, one display segment 321 to 324 is a circular light emitting area, and is located at the lower right position with respect to the seven display segments 321 to 324 arranged in the shape of “8”. Is provided. Regardless of the base value of any of the various areas 311 to 314, at least one display segment 321 to 324 in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is in a light emitting state.

  The first notification display device 201 performs a display indicating that the base value is being reported on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Specifically, the character “b” is displayed on the first notification display device 201 regardless of the base value of any of the various areas 311 to 314. When information other than the base value is notified on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the character “b” is not displayed on the first notification display device 201. Thus, by confirming that the character “b” is displayed on the first notification display device 201, the administrator of the game hall can use the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 to set the base. It is possible to grasp that the value is reported.

  On the second notification display device 202, a display indicating which base value of the various areas 311 to 314 is being reported is performed. Specifically, in a situation where the base value of the current area 311 is notified, the character “L.” is displayed on the second notification display device 202 as shown in FIG. In the situation where the base value of the first history area 312 is notified, the character “1.” is displayed on the second notification display device 202 as shown in FIG. 632 (b). In the situation where the base value of the second history area 313 is notified, the character “2.” is displayed on the second notification display device 202 as shown in FIG. In the situation where the base value of the third history area 314 has been notified, the character “3.” is displayed on the second notification display device 202 as shown in FIG. Thereby, by confirming the characters displayed on the second notification display device 202, the manager of the game hall can change the base value notified on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 by any of the methods. It is possible to grasp whether or not it is during the calculation period.

  In the second notification display device 202, the circular display segments 321 to 324 emit light even when the base value of any of the various areas 311 to 314 is notified. As will be described later, the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204 display any number from “0” to “9” as a display corresponding to the base value. In this case, when any of the numbers “1” to “3” is displayed on the second notification display device 202, the three numbers are displayed on the second to fourth notification display devices 202 to 204. This means that it is difficult to grasp the base value. On the other hand, when the circular display segments 321 to 324 provided at the lower right of the second notification display device 202 emit light, the second notification display device 202 sets “1” to “1”. Even if any number of "3" is displayed, the number displayed on the second notification display device 202 and the number displayed on the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204 are displayed. This makes it possible to distinguish from numbers.

  On the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204, the number of the base value to be notified is displayed. The base value is calculated as a decimal number to the second decimal place, but the first decimal place number of the base value is displayed on the third notification display device 203, and the decimal point of the base value is calculated. The second digit is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. Here, when the base value is “1.00”, the number “0” is displayed on each of the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204. On the other hand, if the base values have not yet been stored in the areas 311 to 314 to be notified, the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display are displayed as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. The character "-" is displayed on each of the devices 204. Accordingly, even when the base value calculated as a decimal number to the second decimal place is notified on the two display devices, the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204, the base value is displayed. Is "1.00", and the display contents can be distinguished between a case where the base value is not yet stored in the areas 311 to 314 to be notified.

  When the base value is “1.00” and when the base value is “0.00”, the display contents of the combination of the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204 are the same. On the other hand, in order to distinguish the two, one of the former and the latter may be configured to maintain the light emitting state of the display of “00” and the other to blink the display of “00”.

  Next, with reference to the time chart of FIG. 634, the base values of the various areas 311 to 314 are notified on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in a state where the management start flag is set to “1”. This will be described. FIG. 634 (a) shows a period in which the base value stored in the current area 311 is notified on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and FIG. 634 (b) stores the base value in the first history area 312. FIG. 634 (c) shows the base value stored in the second history area 313 indicating the first to fourth notifications. FIG. 634 (d) shows the base value stored in the third history area 314 in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. FIG. 634 (e) shows the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA in a state other than the open / close execution mode or the high frequency support mode based on the jackpot result after the base value calculation period is newly started. Quantity (sun The total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA Chi) indicates the time to reach the initial reference number (6000 in particular).

  At the timing of t1, the notification of the base value stored in the current area 311 is started by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as shown in FIG. At the time of this notification, as shown in FIG. 632 (a), a display indicating that the base value is a notification target is performed on the first notification display device 201, and is stored in the current area 311 on the second notification display device 202. A display indicating that the base value is a notification target is performed, and a display corresponding to the base value stored in the current area 311 is performed on the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 634 (e), the calculation initial display is performed from the timing t1 to the timing t2. Specifically, the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA in a state other than the open / close execution mode or the high frequency support mode based on the jackpot result after the base value calculation period is newly started (that is, the game area In a period until the total number of game balls supplied to the PA reaches the initial reference number (specifically, 6000), the display object is displayed on the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202. Instead of keeping the characters lit, the characters to be displayed are displayed blinking as the initial display of the calculation. Immediately after the start of the calculation period, there is little information on the game history for calculating the base value, so that the measured value of the base value may be a value far outside the theoretical value range of the base value. On the other hand, by performing the calculation initial display immediately after the calculation period is started in this way, it is possible to make the administrator of the game hall recognize that it is immediately after the calculation period is started. .

  In addition, the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204, in which a number corresponding to the base value is displayed in the initial display of the calculation, continue to light the numbers, whereas the first notification display device. Characters to be displayed are blinked on the display 201 and the second notification display device 202. This makes it possible to notify that the calculation period has just started, while keeping the visibility of the base value from deteriorating. The present invention is not limited to this. Even in the case of the initial display of the calculation, a blinking display may be performed on at least one of the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204. The display may be performed, or the blinking display may be performed on only one of the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202. In addition, the initial reference number is not limited to 6000 and may be any number as long as the number is plural, and may be set to a number smaller than 6000 or set to a number larger than 6000. Good.

  At the timing of t2, the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA in a situation other than the open / close execution mode and the high frequency support mode based on the jackpot result from the timing of t1 (ie, the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA). When the total number reaches the initial reference number (specifically, 6000 pieces), the initial display of the calculation is ended as shown in FIG. 634 (e). Thereby, the lighting display is started not only on the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204 but also on the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202.

  Thereafter, when the display continuation period elapses from the timing of t1 at the timing of t3, the notification of the base value stored in the current area 311 is ended as shown in FIG. As shown, notification of the base value stored in the first history area 312 is started. In this case, the calculation initial display is not performed because the base value stored in the first history area 312 is the final calculation result of the base value in the immediately preceding calculation period.

  Thereafter, when the display continuation period elapses from the timing t3 at the timing t4, the notification of the base value stored in the first history area 312 is terminated as shown in FIG. The notification of the base value stored in the second history area 313 is started as shown in ()). In this case, the calculation initial display is not performed because the base value stored in the second history area 313 is the final calculation result of the base value in the calculation period two times before.

  Thereafter, when the display continuation period elapses from the timing of t4 at the timing of t5, the notification of the base value stored in the second history area 313 is terminated as shown in FIG. The notification of the base value stored in the third history area 314 is started as shown in ()). In this case, since the base value stored in the third history area 314 is the final calculation result of the base value in the calculation period three times before, the calculation initial display is not performed.

  Thereafter, when the display continuation period elapses from the timing of t5 at the timing of t6, the notification of the base value stored in the third history area 314 is ended as shown in FIG. The notification of the base value stored in the current area 311 is started as shown in FIG. In this case, since the base value calculation period is newly started, the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA in a state other than the open / close execution mode and the high frequency support mode based on the jackpot result (that is, the game area PA FIG. 634 (e) extends from timing t6 to timing t7 in order to notify that the period until the supplied number of game balls reaches the initial reference number (specifically, 6000). The initial display of the calculation is performed as shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, when the display continuation period elapses from the timing of t6 at the timing of t8, the notification of the base value stored in the current area 311 is terminated as shown in FIG. 634 (a), and the display of FIG. As shown, notification of the base value stored in the first history area 312 is started. In this case, the calculation initial display is not performed because the base value stored in the first history area 312 is the final calculation result of the base value in the immediately preceding calculation period.

  Next, a processing configuration for enabling notification of the base value as described above will be described.

  In a management process (step S8920) in a first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638) described later, a management process corresponding to the non-specific control in step S3803 is similar to the management process (FIG. 575) in the forty-seventh embodiment. Read the program for execution processing. Then, in this management execution process (FIG. 576), a check process is executed in step S3908 as in the above-described 47th embodiment.

  In the check process, when it is determined that one game ball enters the general winning opening 31 in a state other than the open / close execution mode and the high frequency support mode based on the jackpot result, the normal general winning counter 231a is used. When the value of one special game prize counter 231b is added to the value of one game ball entering the special power prize winning device 32, the value of the normal special power prize counter 231b is incremented by one. When the entry of a game ball is specified, the value of the normal first operation counter 231c is incremented by 1, and when the entry of one game ball into the second operation port 34 is specified, the normal operation counter 231c is added. The value of the second operation counter 231d is incremented by one, and when the entry of one game ball into the out port 24a is specified, the value of the normal out counter 231e is incremented by one. In the checking process, a result calculation process and a display process are executed.

  FIG. 635 is a flowchart showing the result calculation processing. Note that the processing of steps S8601 to S8615 in the result calculation processing is executed using the non-specific control program and the non-specific control data in the main CPU 63.

  First, a base value calculation process is performed (step S8601). In the calculation processing, a base value is calculated using the values of the various counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231. The method of calculating the base value is as described above. Then, the calculated base value is overwritten on the current area 311 (step S8602).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the management start flag provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control (step S8603). The management start flag has a value of “0” when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started for the first time after the manufacture of the pachinko machine 10. Also, when the work area 223 for non-specific control is cleared to “0” including the management start flag and initialized, the value of the management start flag becomes “0”. In a situation where the management start flag is a value of “0” and is not in either the open / close execution mode or the high-frequency support mode based on the jackpot result, the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA (that is, the game area PA When the supplied total number of game balls) becomes the management start reference number, “1” is set to the management start flag. When the management start flag is set to “1”, the values of the various counters 231 a to 231 e in the normal counter area 231 are cleared to “0”, and a new calculation period is started. This makes it possible to make the effect of the operation check at the stage of shipping the pachinko machine 10 less likely to be affected by the base value in a situation where a normal game is played after the pachinko machine 10 is shipped.

  If a negative determination is made in step S8603, the total number is calculated by summing all the values of the various counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 (step S8604). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated total number is more than the management start reference number of 300 (step S8605).

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S8605, the management start flag is set to "1" (step S8606). After that, a data shift process is executed (step S8607). In the data shift process, information stored in the current area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 in the calculation result storage area 234 is transferred from the second history area 313 to the third history area 314. , The first history area 312 → the second history area 313, the current area 311 → the first history area 312. Thereby, the final base value in the previous calculation period is stored in the third history area 314 as the final base value in the previous calculation period, and the final base value in the previous calculation period is stored. Is stored in the second history area 313 as the final base value in the previous calculation period, and the last base value calculated in the current calculation period is set as the final base value in the previous calculation period. One history area 312 is stored. In the data shift process, the LDIR instruction is used when shifting the information as described above. In the LDIR instruction, the information stored in the storage source area is shifted (copied) to the storage destination area by designating the address of the information storage source area and the address of the information storage destination area. Becomes

  However, in a situation where “1” is not set in the management start flag, basically, the base value information is not stored in the first to third history areas 312 to 314, and therefore, in step S 8607, the management is substantially performed. Only the shift of the final base value of the calculation period to the first history area 312 in the situation where the start flag is not set to “1” is performed. Thereafter, all the counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 are cleared to "0" (step S8608).

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S8603, the total number is calculated by summing all the values of the various counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 (step S8609). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated total number is more than the initial reference number of 6000 (step S8610). If a negative determination is made in step S8610, “1” is set to the calculation initial flag provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control (step S8611), and if an affirmative determination is made in step S8610, the process proceeds to step S8610. The calculation initial flag is cleared to "0" (step S8612). The calculation initial flag indicates the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA in a state other than the open / close execution mode or the high frequency support mode based on the jackpot result after the base value calculation period is newly started (that is, the game area This flag is used by the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the total number of game balls supplied to the PA has reached the initial reference number.

  When the processing of step S8611 or step S8612 is executed, it is determined whether or not the total number calculated in step S8609 is equal to or more than 60000, which is the shift reference number (step S8613). If an affirmative determination is made in step S8613, a data shift process is performed (step S8614). In the data shift process, the information stored in the current area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 in the calculation result storage area 234 is transferred to the second history area 313 → the second history area in the same manner as in step S 8607. The third history area 314, the first history area 312 → the second history area 313, the current area 311 → the first history area 312 are shifted in this order. Thereby, the final base value in the previous calculation period is stored in the third history area 314 as the final base value in the previous calculation period, and the final base value in the previous calculation period is stored. Is stored in the second history area 313 as the final base value in the previous calculation period, and the last base value calculated in the current calculation period is set as the final base value in the previous calculation period. One history area 312 is stored. In the data shift process, the LDIR instruction is used when shifting the information as described above. In the LDIR instruction, the information stored in the storage source area is shifted (copied) to the storage destination area by designating the address of the information storage source area and the address of the information storage destination area. Becomes Thereafter, all the counters 231a to 231e of the normal counter area 231 are cleared to "0" (step S8615).

  FIG. 636 is a flowchart showing the display processing. Note that the processing of steps S8701 to S8714 in the display processing is executed using a non-specific control program and non-specific control data in the main CPU 63.

  First, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the management start flag provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control (step S8701). If an affirmative determination is made in step S8701, the value of the switching timing counter provided in the non-specific control work area 223 is decremented by one (step S8702). The switching timing counter displays the first to fourth notification displays among the base values stored in the current area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 of the calculation result storage area 234. This is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify that it is time to switch the base value to be notified in the devices 201 to 204. As described above, every time the display continuation period (specifically, 5 seconds) elapses, the notification is performed in a predetermined order of the current area 311 → the first history area 312 → the second history area 313 → the third history area 314. While the target base value is switched, the switching of the base value to be notified in the predetermined order is repeated.

  When the process of step S8702 is performed, it is determined whether or not the value of the switching timing counter after subtraction by 1 is “0”, so that the base value that is the current notification target becomes the notification target. It is determined whether or not the display continuation period has elapsed since (step S8703). If an affirmative determination is made in step S8703, the value of the display target counter provided in the non-specific control work area 223 is incremented by 1 (step S8704). If the value of the display target counter after adding 1 exceeds the maximum value “3” (step S8705: YES), the value of the display target counter is cleared to “0” (step S8706).

  The display target counter is the first to fourth notification display among the base values stored in the current area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 in the calculation result storage area 234. It is a counter for the base CPU 63 to specify a base value to be notified in the devices 201 to 204. Specifically, when the value of the display target counter is “0”, the base value stored in the current area 311 is the notification target, and when the value of the display target counter is “1”, the first history area is displayed. When the base value stored in 312 is the notification target and the value of the display target counter is “2”, the base value stored in the second history area 313 is the notification target, and the value of the display target counter is “3”. ", The base value stored in the third history area 314 is to be notified.

  If a negative determination is made in step S8705, or if the process in step S8706 is performed, the switching timing counter of the non-specific control work area 223 displays the display continuation period (specific value) as a value corresponding to the next notification target switching timing. The value is set to 5 seconds (typically, 5 seconds) (step S8707).

  If a negative determination is made in step S8703 or if the process in step S8707 is performed, the display target setting area 276 provided in the non-specific control work area 223 corresponds to the base value that is the current notification target. A process for setting display data to be performed is executed. Specifically, first, the display type data corresponding to the value of the display target counter is set in the display target setting area 276 (step S8708). The display type data includes display data for causing the first notification display device 201 to perform display indicating that the notification target of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is a base value, and a base of the notification target. A display indicating which of the current area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 in the calculation result storage area 234 corresponds to the second notification display device 202. And display data to be performed.

  Thereafter, a base value is read from an area corresponding to the value of the display target counter among the current area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 in the calculation result storage area 234, and the read base is read. The calculation result data corresponding to the number of the first decimal place and the number of the second decimal place in the value is set in the display target setting area 276 (step S8709). The calculation result data includes display data for causing the third notification display device 203 to display a number corresponding to the first decimal place in the base value of the notification target, and a number having the second decimal place in the base value of the notification target. And display data for causing the fourth notification display device 204 to perform the display corresponding to.

  As described above, the display data including the display type data and the calculation result data is set in the display target setting area 276. By transmitting the display data to the display IC 266 in a second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639) described later, a display corresponding to the display data is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. .

  Further, the processing of step S8709 is executed every time the display processing (FIG. 636) is executed, regardless of the switching timing of the base value to be notified. As described above, the base value is calculated using the current value in each of the counters 231a to 231e of the normal counter area 231 each time the calculation result storage process (FIG. 635) is executed, and the calculated base value is calculated. It is stored in the current area 311 of the calculation result storage area 234. In this case, the process of step S8709 for setting the calculation result data in the display target setting area 276 as described above is performed every time the display process (FIG. 636) is executed regardless of the switching timing of the base value of the notification target. When the base value is changed in a situation where the base value of the current area 311 is to be notified, the changed base value can be notified.

  After that, it is determined whether or not the base value of the current area 311 is to be notified based on the value of the display target counter (step S8710), and the calculation initial flag provided in the non-specific control work area 223 is set to “ It is determined whether "1" is set (step S8711). As described above, the calculation initial flag indicates the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA in a state other than the open / close execution mode or the high frequency support mode based on the jackpot result since the base value calculation period is newly started. This flag is used by the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA has reached the initial reference number. If an affirmative determination is made in both step S8710 and step S8711, “1” is set to the initial display flag provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control (step S8712), and one of step S8710 and step S8711 is performed. If a negative determination is made in step, the initial display flag is cleared to "0" (step S8713).

  The initial display flag is used to notify the first notification display device 201 that the base value of the current area 311 is a notification target in order to notify that the base value is the initial base value of the calculation after the start of the calculation period. And a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the second notification display device 202 should be displayed in a blinking manner. When it is specified that the initial display flag is set to “1” in a second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639) described later, it is not only necessary to transmit the display data stored in the display target setting area 276 to the display IC 266. When the display corresponding to the display data is performed by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 are blinked and the third notification display device 202 is displayed. The notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204 are turned on. If it is specified that the initial display flag is not set to “1” in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639) described later, the display corresponding to the display data stored in the display target setting area 276 is displayed. When the display is performed by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, all of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are lighted and displayed.

  On the other hand, if “1” is not set in the management start flag provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control and a negative determination is made in step S8701, the current area 311 is returned regardless of the value of the display target counter. The base value is read, and the calculation result data corresponding to the first decimal place number and the second decimal place number in the read base value is set in the display target setting area 276 (step S8714). By transmitting display data corresponding to the calculation result data to the display IC 266, the first decimal place number in the base value of the current area 311 is displayed on the third notification display device 203, and the base of the current area 311 is displayed. The number of the second decimal place in the value is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. With the above configuration, in a situation where the management start flag is not set to “1”, the base value in the past calculation period is not reported, and only the base value calculated in the current calculation period is reported. Is done.

  When the management start flag is not set to “1”, the calculation result data is set in the display target setting area 276 but the display type data is not set. Although details will be described later, when the base value is notified in a situation where the management start flag is not set to “1”, the display contents of the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 are managed. When the start flag is set to “1”, the display content is different from that when the base value is notified.

  Next, the main processing executed by the main CPU 63 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. Note that the processing of steps S8801 to S8825 in the main processing is executed by using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

  First, power-on initialization processing is executed (step S8801). In the power-on initialization process, for example, the process waits without advancing to the next process until a predetermined time for wait (specifically, one second) elapses after the main process is started. The operation start and the initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed in the predetermined period for the weight. Also, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted.

  After that, an internal function register setting process is executed (step S8802). In the internal function register setting process, the interrupt cycle of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638), which is a process started by interrupting the main process periodically, is set to the first interrupt cycle (specifically, 4 milliseconds). And the interrupt cycle of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639), which is a process periodically started by interrupting the main process, is set to the second interrupt cycle shorter than the first interrupt cycle. (Specifically, 2 milliseconds).

  That is, in the present embodiment, as in the 65th embodiment, the first timer interrupt process and the second timer interrupt process exist as timer interrupt processes so that the interrupt cycle is relatively long. Both the first timer interrupt processing and the second timer interrupt processing are started by interrupting the main processing. The second timer interrupt process is started by interrupting the first timer interrupt process. On the other hand, the first timer interrupt process does not start by interrupting the second timer interrupt process. Further, if both the first interrupt cycle and the second interrupt cycle have elapsed in a situation where both the first timer interrupt processing and the second timer interrupt processing have not been executed, the second interrupt cycle is performed regardless of the order in which the cycles have elapsed. It is started first from the timer interrupt processing. In this regard, it can be said that the second timer interrupt process is a process that is started with priority over the first timer interrupt process. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be employed in which the first timer interrupt process is started with priority over the second timer interrupt process.

  In the internal function register setting processing, the first interrupt cycle of the first timer interrupt processing is set in a predetermined register of the main CPU 63, and the second interrupt cycle of the second timer interrupt processing is set in a specific register of the main CPU 63. I do. Further, in the internal function register setting process, in addition to the setting of the first and second interrupt cycles, for example, a setting process of a numerical range of various counters such as a numerical range of the hit random number counter C1 is executed.

  After that, “1” is set to a start-up processing flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step S8803). The start-up processing flag indicates that even if the first timer interrupt processing is started, the processing for monitoring the power failure, updating the various counters, and monitoring the illegality among the various processings set in the first timer interrupt processing is executed. On the other hand, this flag is for the main CPU 63 to specify that the first timer interrupt process should be terminated without executing the process for advancing the game.

  FIG. 638 is a flowchart showing the first timer interrupt process executed by the main CPU 63 in the present embodiment. It should be noted that the first timer interrupt processing is periodically started at a cycle of 4 milliseconds, which is the first interrupt cycle, as described above. Further, the program corresponding to the first timer interrupt processing is set as a program for specific control.

  In steps S8901 to S8905, the same processes as those in steps S301 to S305 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 516) in the thirty-third embodiment are executed. That is, power failure monitoring is performed by executing power failure information storage processing in step S8901. Specifically, similarly to the power failure information storing process (FIG. 606) in the 62nd embodiment, it is monitored whether or not a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of the power shutdown has been received from the power failure monitoring board 67, and the power failure is monitored. When the occurrence is specified, an infinite loop is performed after the process at the time of power failure is executed. In the process at the time of power failure, “1” is set to a power failure flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control, a checksum is calculated, and the calculated checksum is stored in the work area 221 for specific control. Also, by executing the random number updating process for lottery in step S8902, each numerical information of the winning random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general public goods open counter C4 is updated, and in step S8903 By executing the random number initial value update processing, the numerical information of the random number initial value counter CINI is updated, and in step S8904, the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS is updated by executing the fluctuation counter update processing. In addition, by executing the fraud detection processing in step S8905, it is monitored whether or not an event set as a fraud monitoring target has occurred. In the fraud detection process, the occurrence of a plurality of types of events is monitored, and by confirming that one of the plurality of types of events has occurred, the game stoppage provided in the work area 221 for specific control is performed. Set "1" to the flag.

  After executing the processing of steps S8901 to S8905, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in any of the game stop flag and the start-up processing flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control. (Step S8906). If “1” is not set in any of the game stop flag and the start-up processing flag (step S8906: NO), the processing of steps S8907 to S8920 is executed. In steps S8907 to S8919, the same processes as those in steps S8208 to S8220 of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 622) in the 65th embodiment are executed. In step S8920, the management process is executed in the same manner as in step S8221 of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 622) in the 65th embodiment. However, the contents of the management execution process called in the management process are as follows. The contents have already been described. In the check processing, the update processing of each of the counters 231a to 231e of the normal counter area 231 is executed, and the result calculation processing (FIG. 635) and the display processing (FIG. 636) are executed.

  On the other hand, when “1” is set in at least one of the game stop flag and the start-up processing flag (step S8906: YES), the first timer interrupt processing is performed without executing the processing of steps S8907 to S8920. finish. That is, not only in the situation where the game stop flag is set to “1”, but also when the start-up processing flag is set to “1”, the processing of steps S8901 to S8905 is performed in the first timer interrupt processing. On the other hand, the processing of steps S8907 to S8920 is not executed.

  As for the flag during the start-up process, the process (Steps S8801 to S8819) at the start of the supply of the operating power is started in the main process (FIG. 637) and the interrupt is permitted (Step S8805) as in the 65th embodiment. "1" is set in advance, and "0" is cleared before the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power is completed and the remaining processing (steps S8822 to S8825) is started. In this case, as described above, in the first timer interrupt processing, if the start-up processing flag is set to “1”, the processing of steps S8907 to S8920 is not executed, thereby supplying operating power. In the situation where the processing at the start (steps S8801 to S8819) is being executed, it is possible to prevent the processing for advancing the game from being executed. On the other hand, in the first timer interrupt process as described above, even if “1” is set in the start-up process flag, the processes of steps S8901 to S8905 are executed to start the operation power supply. (Steps S8801 to S8819), the power failure monitoring is performed, and the update of the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the random number initial value counter CINI are performed. And fraud detection is performed.

  In particular, even when the start-up processing flag is set to “1”, the power failure information storage processing (step S8901) is executed to start the operation power supply (steps S8801 to S8819). ) Is executed, even if a power failure occurs, the power failure processing can be executed for the power failure. In the process at the time of power failure, as described above, the power failure flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to “1”, the checksum is calculated, and the calculated checksum is stored in the work area 221 for specific control. Since the power is stored, when the supply of the operation power is restarted, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of the abnormality in the main RAM 65 from being specified. As a result, even if a power failure occurs during the setting value update process (step S8819), the setting value selected at that time can be stored and held as the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10. . Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the execution of the set value update process, it is not necessary to execute the set value update process again when the supply of the operating power is restarted.

  Incidentally, in the situation where the set value updating process is being executed, the interrupt is not inhibited at any timing in any of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639). It is possible. In this case, if the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638) or the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639) is interrupted and activated in the main process (FIG. 637) including the set value update process, the activation target is The information of the return address of the main processing (FIG. 637) for returning after the completed timer interrupt processing is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control, and the main side immediately before the timer interrupt processing is started. Information of various registers of the CPU 63 is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control. Then, when the timer interrupt process to be started is completed, the process returns to the main process (FIG. 637) corresponding to the information of the return address saved in the stack area 222 for specific control, and The information saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is restored to various registers of the main CPU 63.

  Returning to the description of the main processing (FIG. 637), after setting the start-up processing flag to “1” in step S8803, the initial check period (specifically, A value corresponding to 5 seconds is set (step S8804). In this embodiment, when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, can the display segments 321 to 324 provided in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 normally emit light? In order for the manager of the game hall to check whether or not the check is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 from the start of the process of step S8804 until the initial check period elapses. . Specifically, as the check display, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 633 (b), all display segments 321 to 324 of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are maintained in a light emitting state. . In step S8804, information corresponding to the initial check period is set in the checking counter.

  Note that the initial check period is required until a process for controlling the progress of the game is started when none of the processes of step S8811, step S8812, step S8815, and step S8819 described later in the main process is executed. The time is set to be longer than the maximum time. Therefore, the game may be started in a situation where the check display is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  After that, interrupt permission is set (step S8805). Thus, the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) is started by interrupting at the first interrupt cycle, and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 639) is started by interrupting at the second interrupt cycle. However, since “1” is set in the start-up processing flag in step S8803, even if the first timer interrupt processing is started, the power failure monitoring and various counters of the various processing of the first timer interrupt processing are performed. While the processing for performing the update and the fraud monitoring is executed, the first timer interrupt processing is ended without executing the processing for advancing the game.

  After that, in steps S8806 to S8825, the same processes as those in steps S7905 to S7924 of the main process (FIG. 619) in the 65th embodiment are executed. Specifically, in step S8806, it is determined whether the reset button 68c has been pressed. That is, it is determined whether or not the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed while the reset button 68c is being pressed, and the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. Here, in the present embodiment, as in the 65th embodiment, the main control device 60 is provided with the setting key insertion section 68a and the reset button 68c, but is not provided with the update button 68b. Further, the main control device 60 is provided with first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in the same manner as in the forty-third embodiment, instead of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c.

  If the reset button 68c has not been pressed (step S8806: NO), it is determined whether or not “1” has been set in the power failure flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step S8807). When a power failure process is performed in the power failure information storage process (step S8901) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638), “1” is set in the power failure flag. The power failure flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the processing at the time of power failure was properly performed at the time of the previous power-off.

  If “1” is set in the power failure flag (step S8807: YES), a checksum is calculated for the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 (step S8808). The method of calculating the checksum is the same as in the 65th embodiment. Thereafter, the work area 221 for the specific control and the work area 221 for the specific control calculated in the power outage process executed immediately before the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped and stored in the work area 221 for the specific control are performed. The checksum for the stack area 222 is read from the work area 221 for specific control, and the read checksum is compared with the checksum calculated in step S8808 (step S8809). Then, it is determined whether the checksums match (step S8810).

  If a negative determination is made in step S8807 or step S8810, that is, if the power failure flag is not set to “1” or the checksums do not match, the game stop flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control Is set to "1" (step S8811). When the game stop flag is set to “1”, the processes of steps S8901 to S8905 are executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638), while an affirmative determination is made in step S8906 to perform steps S8907 to S8907. The processing of S8920 is not executed. Accordingly, when the power failure flag is not set to “1” because the power failure processing was not properly performed at the time of the previous power shutdown, or when the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are performed. If at least one of the checksums does not match due to a change in the storage state of the information since the last power-off, processing for power failure monitoring, updating of various counters, and illegal monitoring is executed. On the other hand, processing for advancing the game is not executed.

  Thereafter, at the start of the supply of the operating power, an abnormal command indicating that an abnormality has occurred with respect to the power failure flag or the checksum is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step S8812). Upon receiving the abnormal command, the sound light emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 to emit light in a manner corresponding to the information abnormality at the start of the supply of the operating power, and “change the setting from the speaker unit 54. Is output. In addition, a character image “Please change the setting.” Is displayed on the symbol display device 41. These notifications are maintained until the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and is terminated when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, even if the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is temporarily stopped, the above-described notification is made when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is resumed until the set value updating process (step S8819) is executed. The configuration may be continued.

  When the power failure flag is set to “1” and the checksum is normal (step S8807 and step S8810: YES), it is determined whether the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on using the setting key. Then, it is determined whether the front door frame 14 is open with respect to the inner frame 13 and the gaming machine main body 12 is open with respect to the outer frame 11 (step S8814). The detection of whether or not the front door frame 14 is open with respect to the inner frame 13 uses the front door open sensor 95 as in the 62nd embodiment, and the gaming machine body 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11. The main body opening sensor 96 is used to detect whether or not the state is the same as in the 62nd embodiment. The setting key insertion section 68a is turned ON using the setting key (step S8813: YES), the front door frame 14 is open with respect to the inner frame 13, and the gaming machine body is positioned with respect to the outer frame 11. If 12 is in the open state (step S8814: YES), a setting confirmation process is executed (step S8815). The details of the setting confirmation process will be described later.

  If the reset button 68c has been pressed (step S8806: YES), a RAM clear process is executed (step S8816). The content of the RAM clearing process is the same as that in step S7915 of the main process (FIG. 619) in the 65th embodiment. After that, the setting key insertion section 68a is turned ON using the setting key (step S8817: YES), and the front door frame 14 is open with respect to the inner frame 13 and the game is performed with respect to the outer frame 11. When the main body 12 is in the open state (step S8818: YES), a setting value update process is executed (step S8819). Details of the setting value update processing will be described later.

  When the processing of step S8812 is performed, when a negative determination is made in step S8813 or step S8814, when the processing of step S8815 is performed, when a negative determination is made in step S8817 or step S8818, or when the processing of step S8819 is performed. If executed, the start-up processing flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step S8820). By clearing the start-up processing flag to “0”, the state in which the processing for advancing the game is not executed even if the first timer interrupt processing is started is released. In step S8820, the power failure flag in the work area 221 for specific control is also cleared to “0”.

  Thereafter, a return command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step S8821). The content of the information included in the return command and the processing content of the sound emission control device 81 when the return command is received are the same as those in step S7920 of the main process (FIG. 619) in the 65th embodiment.

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to the remaining process of steps S8822 to S8825. That is, the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639). Will result in a residual time. Although the remaining time varies according to the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, the remaining processes of steps S8822 to S8825 are repeatedly performed using the irregular time. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining processes in steps S8822 to S8825 are irregular processes that are executed irregularly. In steps S8822 to S8825, the same processes as those in steps S113 to S116 of the main process (FIG. 514) in the thirty-third embodiment are executed.

  Next, the second timer interrupt processing in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 639. The processing of steps S9001 to S9014 in the second timer interrupt processing is executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for specific control and data for specific control.

  First, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit the occurrence of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639) (step S9001). By prohibiting the occurrence of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638), the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638) interrupts the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639) even if the first interrupt cycle has elapsed. Can be prevented from being started. In addition, since the occurrence of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639) is prohibited, even if the second interrupt cycle elapses during the execution of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639), the second timer interrupt process is performed. It is possible to prevent the processing (FIG. 639) from being started redundantly.

  After that, the process of updating the under-check counter is executed (step S9002). In the updating process of the check-in-progress counter, when the value of the check-in-progress counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control is 1 or more, the value of the check-in-progress counter is decremented by one. Accordingly, in a situation where the initial check period is being measured using the check-in-progress counter, the value of the check-in-progress counter is periodically reduced each time the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639) is activated. The Rukoto.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control (step S9003). The setting update display flag is a flag for specifying by the main CPU 63 whether or not the setting value updating process (FIG. 642) is being executed by the main CPU 63. As described above, the setting value updating process (FIG. 642) is performed in a state where the process at the start of the supply of the operating power is executed in the main process (FIG. 637) when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. However, the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 639) is interrupted and started even in the situation where the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power is executed. Even in a situation where the value update process (FIG. 642) is being executed, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639) is interrupted and activated.

  The condition that the setting update display flag is set to “1” means that the main CPU 63 has executed the set value updating process (FIG. 642) in the second processing of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639). It means that it is the process that was started by interrupting in the situation. If an affirmative determination is made in step S9003, a process of setting the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update is executed (step S9004). In the setting process, similarly to step S8403 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 628) in the 65th embodiment, the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are updated by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. In the fifth display data buffer 275, display data for causing a display indicating that the current status is present and a display indicating the current set value of the pachinko machine 10 are stored. Thereby, similarly to the 65th embodiment, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 change the display indicating that the setting value is being updated and the display indicating the current setting value. Done.

  If a negative determination is made in step S9003, it is determined whether "1" is set in the setting confirmation display flag in the work area 221 for specific control (step S9005). The setting confirmation display flag is a flag for specifying by the main CPU 63 whether or not the setting confirmation process (FIG. 641) is being executed by the main CPU 63. As described above, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 641) is performed in a state where the process at the time of starting the supply of the operating power is performed in the main process (FIG. 637) when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. However, the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 639) is interrupted and started even in the situation where the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power is executed. Even in a situation where the confirmation process (FIG. 641) is being executed, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639) is interrupted and activated.

  The condition in which the setting confirmation display flag is set to “1” means that the main CPU 63 has executed the setting confirmation process (FIG. 642) in the second processing of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639). It means that it is the process that was started by interrupting in the situation. If an affirmative determination is made in step S9005, a setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during setting confirmation is executed (step S9006). In the setting process, as in step S8405 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 628) in the 65th embodiment, the set values of the pachinko machine 10 are confirmed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. In the fifth display data buffer 275, display data for causing a display indicating that the current status is present and a display indicating the current set value of the pachinko machine 10 are stored. Thus, similarly to the 65th embodiment, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 change the display indicating that the setting value is being checked and the display indicating the current setting value. Done.

  If a negative determination is made in step S9005, a normal setting process is executed (step S9007). The normal setting process will be described later in detail.

  When the processing of step S9004, step S9006 or step S9007 has been executed, the processing of step S9008 to step S9014 is executed. The processing contents of steps S9008 to S9014 are the same as those of steps S8407 to S8413 of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 628) in the 65th embodiment.

  Specifically, first, the signal transmission state through the type data signal line LN1 and the type clock signal line LN2 is turned off (step S9008), and the signal transmission through the display data signal line LN3 and the display clock signal line LN4 is performed. The state is turned off (step S9009). After that, the type counter provided in the specific control work area 221 is updated (step S9010).

  The type counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the transmission target of the display data in the first to fifth display data buffers 271 to 275 in the current processing of the second timer interrupt processing. When the value of the type counter is “1”, the display data of the first display data buffer 271 is to be transmitted, and when the value of the type counter is “2”, the display data of the second display data buffer 272 is to be transmitted. When the value of the type counter is “3”, the display data of the third display data buffer 273 is to be transmitted, and when the value of the type counter is “4”, the display data of the fourth display data buffer 274 is If the type data is to be transmitted and the value of the type counter is “5”, the display data in the fifth display data buffer 275 is to be transmitted. In the type counter updating process, the value of the type counter is incremented by one, and if the value of the type counter after the one addition exceeds the upper limit value of “5”, the value of the type counter is set to “1”. . Thereby, the transmission target of the display data is sequentially changed in the first to fifth display data buffers 271 to 275 every time the second timer interrupt process is performed.

  After that, the type data corresponding to the value of the type counter is read from the main ROM 64 (step S9011). Specifically, when the value of the type counter is “1”, the type data corresponding to the first display circuit 261 is read from the main ROM 64, and when the value of the type counter is “2”, the second type is read. The type data corresponding to the display circuit 262 is read from the main ROM 64, and when the value of the type counter is "3", the type data corresponding to the third display circuit 263 is read from the main ROM 64, and the value of the type counter is read. When the value is "4", the type data corresponding to the fourth display circuit 264 is read from the main ROM 64, and when the value of the type counter is "5", the type data corresponding to the fifth display circuit 265 is read. Read from the side ROM 64.

  Thereafter, display data is read from the display data buffers 271 to 275 corresponding to the value of the type counter (step S9012). Specifically, when the value of the type counter is “1”, the display data is read from the first display data buffer 271, and when the value of the type counter is “2”, the display data is read from the second display data buffer 272. The display data is read, and if the value of the type counter is "3", the display data is read from the third display data buffer 273. If the value of the type counter is "4", the display data is read from the fourth display data buffer 274. The display data is read, and when the value of the type counter is “5”, the display data is read from the fifth display data buffer 275.

  After that, transmission processing of various signals is executed (step S9013). In the transmission processing, a signal is output to the type data signal line LN1 and the type clock signal line LN2 such that the type data read in step S9011 is transmitted to the display IC 266. In addition, in the transmission processing, a signal is output to the display data signal line LN3 and the display clock signal line LN4 so that the display data read in step S9012 is transmitted to the display IC 266.

  After that, interrupt permission is set to permit generation of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 639) (step S9014).

  FIG. 640 is a flowchart showing a normal setting process in step S9007 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639). Note that the processing of steps S9101 to S9109 in the normal setting processing is executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for specific control and data for specific control.

  First, it is determined whether the value of the check-in-progress counter provided in the specific control work area 221 is 1 or more (step S9101). When the value of the check-in-progress counter is 1 or more (step S9101: YES), it means that it is the initial check period. In this case, check display data is set in the fifth display data buffer 275 in the work area 221 for specific control (step S9102). The display data set in the fifth display data buffer 275 is display data for controlling the display of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as described above. The check display data is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in order to perform the check display, that is, in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, respectively. This is display data for setting all display segments 321 to 324 to a light emitting state. By supplying the check display data to the display IC 266, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 633 (b), all of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 serve as check displays. Display segments 321 to 324 emit light. This allows the manager of the gaming hall to know whether or not each of the display segments 321 to 324 of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 can normally emit light.

  Here, the initial check period can be canceled at the time of confirming the setting or updating the setting value. Such a cancelable configuration will be described. FIG. 641 is a flowchart showing the setting confirmation processing executed in step S8815 of the main processing (FIG. 637). Note that the processing of steps S9201 to S9206 in the setting confirmation processing is executed using the specific control program and the specific control data in the main CPU 63.

  First, an operation instruction command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step S9201). Upon receiving the operation instruction command, the sound emission control device 81 causes the speaker unit 54 to output a sound saying “Please operate the reset button 68c.” The notification is continued until the reset button 68c is pressed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c has been pressed (step S9202). If the reset button 68c has not been pressed, the process stands by in step S9202. When the reset button 68c is pressed (step S9202: YES), the check-in-progress counter provided in the specific control work area 221 is cleared to "0" (step S9203). This cancels the initial check period.

  After that, “1” is set to a setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step S9204). By setting “1” to the setting confirmation display flag, in the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 639), an affirmative determination is made in step S9005 as described above, and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 201 are output. In the fourth display data buffer 275, display data indicating that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being confirmed at 204 and display indicating the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 are stored. (Step S9006). Thus, similarly to the 65th embodiment, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 change the display indicating that the setting value is being checked and the display indicating the current setting value. Done.

  Thereafter, on condition that the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned off (step S9205: YES), the setting confirmation display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step S9206). This causes the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 to indicate that the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being checked and to indicate the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10. Is canceled. In this case, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 start displaying the base value.

  When the setting confirmation process is started as described above, the initial check period is canceled in the middle on the condition that the reset button 68c is pressed, and the current state is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Is notified. Thereby, when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started and the main processing (FIG. 637) is started by the main CPU 63, the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power in the main processing is executed. In this situation, even if the initial check period is started and the display for checking is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the process at the start of the supply of the operation power is executed. In the case where the set value is confirmed in the situation, the initial check period is cancelled, and the current set value can be displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Therefore, the set value can be confirmed without waiting for the initial check period to elapse.

  Even when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 641) is executed in the main process (FIG. 637), the initial check period starts first, so that the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 It is possible to confirm the set value after confirming whether or not each of the display segments 321 to 324 in each of them can normally emit light. This makes it possible to accurately confirm the set value.

  FIG. 642 is a flowchart showing the setting value update processing executed in step S8819 of the main processing (FIG. 637). Note that the processing of steps S9301 to S9310 in the setting value update processing is executed using the specific control program and the specific control data in the main CPU 63.

  First, an update start command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step S9301). Upon receiving the update start command, the sound emission control device 81 causes the speaker unit 54 to output a sound saying “Setting is being changed.” The notification is continued until the setting value updating process is completed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the set value counter provided in the work area 221 for the specific control is equal to or more than 1 corresponding to “Setting 1” and equal to or less than 6 corresponding to “Setting 6” (step) S9302). If the value of the set value counter is “0” or 7 or more, a negative determination is made in step S9302, and “1” is set in the set value counter (step S9303). Thereby, the set value of the pachinko machine 10 becomes “Setting 1”.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S9302 or if the process of step S9303 is performed, it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a has been turned off using the setting key (step S9304). In this case, the configuration may be such that it is determined whether the setting key insertion section 68a has been switched from the ON state to the OFF state, or the configuration may be such that it is determined whether the setting key insertion section 68a is in the OFF state.

  If the setting key insertion unit 68a has not been turned off (step S9304: NO), it is determined whether the reset button 68c has been pressed (step S9305). If the reset button 68c is pressed (step S9305: YES), the condition is that the setting update display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is not set to "1" (step S9306: NO). In addition, the setting update display flag is set to “1” (step S9307), and the checking counter provided in the specific control work area 221 is cleared to “0” (step S9308).

  When the counter during the check is cleared to “0”, the initial check period is canceled. Also, by setting the setting update display flag to “1”, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639) makes an affirmative determination in step S9003 as described above, and displays the first to fourth notification display devices. In the fifth display data buffer 275, display data indicating that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being updated in 201 to 204 and display indicating the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 are performed. It is stored (step S9004). Thereby, similarly to the 65th embodiment, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 change the display indicating that the setting value is being updated and the display indicating the current setting value. Done.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S9306 or when the process in step S9308 is performed, the value of the set value counter in the work area 221 for specific control is incremented by 1 (step S9309). Thus, each time the reset button 68c is pressed once, the set value is updated to the next higher level. If the reset button 68c is not pressed (step S9305: NO) or if the value of the set value counter is incremented by 1, the process returns to step S9302. If it is determined that the value is 7 or more, “1” is set to the set value counter in step S9303. As a result, when the reset button 68c is pressed once in the situation of "Setting 6," the display returns to "Setting 1."

  If the setting key insertion section 68a has been turned OFF (step 9304: YES), the setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step S9310). As a result, a display indicating that the set values of the pachinko machine 10 are being updated and a display indicating the current set values of the pachinko machine 10 are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Is released. In this case, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 start displaying the base value.

  When the setting value updating process is executed as described above, the initial check period is canceled halfway and the current state is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 on condition that the reset button 68c is pressed. Is notified. Thereby, when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started and the main processing (FIG. 637) is started by the main CPU 63, the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power in the main processing is executed. In this situation, even if the initial check period is started and the display for checking is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the process at the start of the supply of the operation power is executed. In the case where the set value is updated in such a situation, it is possible to cancel the initial check period and cause the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 to display the current set value. Therefore, it is possible to update the set value while checking the current set value without waiting for the initial check period to elapse.

  Even when the set value updating process (FIG. 642) is executed in the main process (FIG. 637), the initial check period is started first, so that the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 The setting value can be updated after confirming whether or not each of the display segments 321 to 324 can normally emit light. This makes it possible to update the set value accurately.

  In the setting value update process (FIG. 642), when the reset button 68c is pressed to update the setting value, the initial check period is canceled. As a result, when the reset button 68c is pressed to update the set value, the initial check period is canceled accordingly, and operability for canceling the initial check period can be improved. Become.

  Returning to the description of the normal setting process (FIG. 640), when the value of the check-in-progress counter is “0” and is not in the initial check period (step S9101: NO), it is provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control. It is determined whether “1” is set in the management start flag (step S9103). If "1" is not set in the management start flag (step S9103: NO), the display before management start setting process is executed for the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 (step S9104). In the setting process, display data for setting all the display segments 321 and 322 in the light emitting state in each of the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 is set in the fifth display data buffer 275. It is to be noted that the configuration is not limited to a configuration in which all the display segments 321 and 322 are set to the light emitting state in each of the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202. A blinking display may be performed in all the display segments 321 and 322 in each of the 202.

  Thereafter, the calculation result data set in the display target setting area 276 in the non-specific control work area 223 is read (step S9105), and the read calculation result data is stored in the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204. The display data to be applied is set in the fifth display data buffer 275 (step S9106). As described above, in the display processing (FIG. 636), if “1” is not set to the management start flag (step S8701: NO), the base value is read from the current area 311 and the first decimal point in the read base value is read. The calculation result data corresponding to the number of the place and the number of the second decimal place is set in the display target setting area 276 (step S8714). In step S9106, the calculation result data is set in the fifth display data buffer 275 as display data to be applied to the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204.

  The display data set in the fifth display data buffer 275 in steps S9104 and S9106 is supplied to the display IC 266, so that the first and second notification displays are displayed as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. In a situation where all the display segments 321 and 322 are in the light emitting state in each of the devices 201 and 202, the first notification display device 203 places the first decimal place of the base value calculated in the current calculation period. Is displayed, and the fourth notification display device 204 displays the number of the second decimal place of the base value calculated in the current calculation period. A number corresponding to the base value is displayed on the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 while all the display segments 321 and 322 are in a light emitting state in each of the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202. By doing so, it becomes possible for the administrator of the gaming hall to recognize that the base value that is currently reported is the base value in a situation where the management start flag is not set to “1”.

  Further, in a situation where “1” is set in the management start flag, as described above, every time the display continuation period (specifically, 5 seconds) elapses, the current area 311 → the first history area 312 → the While the base values to be notified are switched on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in a predetermined order such as the second history area 313 → the third history area 314, the management start flag is set to “3”. In a situation where “1” is not set, the base value of the current area 311 is maintained as a notification target. Thereby, when the operation check of the pachinko machine 10 is performed at the stage of shipping the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to confirm the current base value at an arbitrary timing.

  If "1" is set in the management start flag (step S9103: YES), the display data set in the display target setting area 276 in the non-specific control work area 223 is read, and the read display data is read. 5 is set in the display data buffer 275 (step S9107). By supplying the display data to the display IC 266, if the base value of the current area 311 is to be notified, the display as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. The display is performed on the display devices 201 to 204, and if the base value of the first history area 312 is to be notified, the display as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. If the base value of the second history area 313 is to be notified by the devices 201 to 204, the display as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 632 (c) is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices. If the base value of the third history area 314 is to be notified, a display as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 632 (d) is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201. To 204.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the initial display flag provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control (step S9108). The initial display flag is a first notification for notifying that the base value is the base value at the beginning of the calculation after the start of the calculation period in the situation where the base value of the current area 311 is to be notified as described above. Is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 should be displayed in a blinking manner. When “1” is set in the initial display flag (step S9108: YES), the blink setting process is executed for the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 (step S9109).

  In the blink setting process, when the display corresponding to the display data currently set in the fifth display data buffer 275 is performed on the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202, the display is blinked. Make settings to make it work. As a setting for blinking display, specifically, transmission of display data to the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 is performed according to the display data currently set in the fifth display data buffer 275. The corresponding data is transmitted to the display IC 266 until a predetermined lighting period (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses, and thereafter, all the display segments 321 and 322 of the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 are turned off. The state data is transmitted to the display IC 266 until a predetermined light-off period (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses, and thereafter, the predetermined light-on period and the predetermined light-off period are alternately repeated. As a result, when the base value of the current area 311 is to be notified immediately after the start of the new calculation period of the base value, the initial calculation display is performed on the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202. It is possible to make the manager of the gaming hall grasp that the current base value reported on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is immediately after the start of the new calculation period. It becomes possible.

  Next, the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the supply of the operation power to the main CPU 63 is started will be described with reference to a time chart of FIG. FIG. 643 (a) shows the initial check period, and FIG. 643 (b) shows the base value notified by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the management start flag is not set to "1". FIG. 643 (c) shows the base values stored in the various areas 311 to 314 of the calculation result storage area 234 sequentially in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. 643 (d) shows a display indicating that the set values of the pachinko machine 10 are being updated and a display indicating the current set values of the pachinko machine 10 are first to fourth. FIG. 643 (e) shows a display period during which the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being checked, and a display indicating that the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being checked and the current state of the pachinko machine 10 Set value Shows the setting confirmation during a display period of the display is performed in the first to fourth notification display device 201 to 204 shown, FIG. 643 (f) shows the timing of the reset button 68c is pressed.

  First, a case where the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started in a situation where the management start flag is not set to “1”, and a setting confirmation process (FIG. 641) A case where the set value update process (FIG. 642) is not executed will be described.

  At the timing of t1, the initial check period is started as shown in FIG. 643 (a). Thereby, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 633 (b), the display for checking is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t2, the initial check period ends without being canceled halfway as shown in FIG. 643 (a). In this case, the pre-management display period is started at the timing of t2 as shown in FIG. 643 (b). In the display period before management start, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 633 (c), in the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202, all the display segments 321 and 322 are in a light-emitting state, and On the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204, a number corresponding to the current base value is displayed.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t3, in a situation where the management start flag is not set to “1” and neither of the open / close execution mode and the high frequency support mode according to the jackpot results, the game balls discharged from the gaming area PA The total number (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) reaches the management start reference number that is smaller than the shift reference number. As a result, the management start flag is set to “1”, thereby ending the display period before management start as shown in FIG. 643 (b). In this case, the normal display period is started at the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 64C. During the normal display period, as shown in FIGS. 632 (a) to 632 (d), the base values stored in the various areas 311 to 314 in the calculation result storage area 234 are the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Is notified in sequence.

  Next, a case where the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started in a situation where the management start flag is set to “1”, and a setting confirmation process (FIG. 641) ) And the case where the set value update processing (FIG. 642) is not executed will be described.

  At time t4, an initial check period starts as shown in FIG. 643 (a). Thereby, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 633 (b), the display for checking is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t5, the initial check period ends without being canceled halfway as shown in FIG. In this case, the normal display period is started at the timing of t5 as shown in FIG. 643 (c). During the normal display period, as shown in FIGS. 632 (a) to 632 (d), the base values stored in the various areas 311 to 314 in the calculation result storage area 234 are the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Is notified in sequence.

  Next, in the case where the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started in a state where the management start flag is set to “1”, the setting value updating process (FIG. 642) ) Will be described.

  At time t6, the initial check period starts as shown in FIG. 643 (a). Thereby, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 633 (b), the display for checking is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  Thereafter, the setting value updating process (FIG. 642) is started during the initial check period, and the reset button 68c is pressed at the timing of t7 as shown in FIG. 643 (f). Thus, the initial check period ends in the middle as shown in FIG. 643 (a) at the timing t7, and the setting update display period starts as shown in FIG. 643 (d) at the timing t7. You.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t8, the display period during setting update ends as shown in FIG. 643 (d). In this case, the normal display period is started at the timing of t8 as shown in FIG. 643 (c). During the normal display period, as shown in FIGS. 632 (a) to 632 (d), the base values stored in the various areas 311 to 314 in the calculation result storage area 234 are the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Is notified in sequence.

  Next, a case where the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started in a situation where the management start flag is set to “1”, and a setting confirmation process (FIG. 641) ) Will be described.

  At time t9, an initial check period is started as shown in FIG. Thereby, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 633 (b), the display for checking is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  Thereafter, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 641) is started during the initial check period, and the reset button 68c is pressed at the timing of t10 as shown in FIG. 643 (f). Thus, the initial check period is ended halfway as shown in FIG. 643 (a) at the timing t10, and the setting confirmation display period is started as shown in FIG. 643 (e) at the timing t10. You.

  After that, at the timing of t11, the display period during setting confirmation ends as shown in FIG. 643 (e). In this case, the normal display period starts at the timing of t11, as shown in FIG. 643 (c). During the normal display period, as shown in FIGS. 632 (a) to 632 (d), the base values stored in the various areas 311 to 314 in the calculation result storage area 234 are the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Is notified in sequence.

  It is to be noted that, in a case where the supply of the operation power to the main CPU 63 is started in a situation where the management start flag is not set to “1”, a process for setting confirmation in the process at the start of the supply of the operation power (FIG. 641) Alternatively, when the setting value update process (FIG. 642) is executed and the initial check period is canceled halfway, the display period before management start is started after the display period during the setting update or the display period during the setting check is ended. It will be.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  An initial check period in which each of the display segments 321 to 324 in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 can emit light can be generated as a check display. This makes it possible to confirm whether or not each of the display segments 321 to 324 is in a light emitting state, and confirms whether or not the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal. It is possible to do.

  When the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, an initial check period of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is started. Thus, when the supply of the operating power is started, it is possible to quickly confirm whether the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal.

  Each time the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, an initial check period of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is started. This makes it possible to confirm whether the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal each time the supply of the operating power is started.

  When the supply of the operation power to the main CPU 63 is started, the initial check period of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is started without requiring any special operation. This makes it easy to check whether the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal.

  Even if the initial check period has not elapsed, if a cancellation opportunity occurs, the above-described check display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is terminated halfway. As a result, it is possible to terminate the above-mentioned check display even in the middle of the initial check period and cause the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 to perform another display.

  When the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, and before the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed, the initial check period is started and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 201 are started. At 204, the display for checking is started. Thereby, before the game is started, it is possible to confirm whether the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal.

  In a configuration in which a predetermined setting-related process such as a setting confirmation process (FIG. 641) and a setting value update process (FIG. 642) is performed in a state where the process at the time of starting the supply of the operating power is being performed, the supply of the operating power is started. The initial check period is started in a situation where the process of the time is being executed. As a result, it is possible to consolidate not only the predetermined setting-related processing but also the processing for starting the initial check period with respect to the processing when the supply of the operating power is started.

  In the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 641) and the setting value update processing (FIG. 642), in the configuration in which the display corresponding to the current setting value is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the predetermined setting is performed. Before the related processing is executed, an initial check period is started, and the display for checking is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Thus, after confirming whether the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal, the current setting value is confirmed using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It is possible to do. Therefore, it is possible to accurately confirm the set value.

  Even if the initial check period has not elapsed yet, the first to fourth notification is performed based on the execution of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 641) or the set value update process (FIG. 642) in the situation of the initial check period. The display for checking on the display devices 201 to 204 is ended in the middle. Thus, when the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 641) or the setting value update processing (FIG. 642) is executed, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 201 do not need to wait for the initial check period to elapse. The check processing in 204 is ended, and the current setting values can be displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Therefore, it is possible to confirm the current set value at an early stage.

  When the setting confirmation process (FIG. 641) or the setting value updating process (FIG. 642) is executed in the situation of the initial check period, and the reset button 68c is pressed, the initial check period has elapsed. Even if there is no display, the above-mentioned display for checking on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is ended in the middle. This makes it possible to end the initial check period at an arbitrary timing after the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 641) or the setting value update processing (FIG. 642) is started. For example, when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 641) or the setting value update process (FIG. 642) is started, the administrator of the game hall sufficiently confirms that the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal. After confirming the above, it is possible to end the above-mentioned check display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and start displaying the current set values.

  In the set value updating process (FIG. 642), the set value to be selected is updated by pressing the reset button 68c. In this case, when the reset button 68c is pressed as described above, the display for checking is ended on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and the display of the current set value is started. By doing so, it is not necessary to perform a dedicated operation for terminating the check display and starting the display of the current set values. Therefore, it is possible to improve the workability of the work for updating the set value.

  The calculation result storage area 234 stores a plurality of base values derived using the information of the normal counter area 231 in different periods. This makes it possible to grasp the base value in a plurality of periods, so that the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA can be accurately grasped.

  The calculation result storage area 234 is provided with a current area 311 in which the latest base value is stored, and first to third history areas 312 to 314 in which base values derived before that are stored. I have. This makes it possible to grasp not only the latest one but also the past one as the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA.

  A base value repeatedly calculated in a relatively short cycle before one calculation period elapses is stored in the current area 311, and base values calculated when one calculation period elapses are first to third base values. Stored in the history areas 312 to 314. This makes it possible to grasp the most recent ratio of the number of award balls to the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA, and to grasp the past ratio in the unit of one calculation period. Becomes possible. Further, since the base values are stored in the first to third history areas 312 to 314 in units of one calculation period, the number of base values stored in the first to third history areas 312 to 314 is suppressed. It becomes possible.

  Various counters 231a to 231e of the normal counter area 231 are cleared to "0" based on the elapse of one calculation period. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the normal counter area 231. Even if the various counters 231a to 231e of the normal counter area 231 are thus cleared to "0", the base values calculated after one calculation period has elapsed are the first to third base values. Since it is stored in the history areas 312 to 314, the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA in the past calculation period can be grasped later.

  A plurality of history areas 312 to 314 are provided as areas for storing past base values. This makes it possible to compare base values in a plurality of past calculation periods.

  The base values stored in the current area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 are sequentially displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. This makes it possible to individually grasp the base values in a plurality of calculation periods while suppressing the number of notification display devices 201 to 204.

  Even if the process at the time of starting the supply of the operating power is being executed, the execution of the power outage information storage process (step S8901) monitors the occurrence of the power outage and, when the occurrence of the power outage is identified, Power failure processing is executed. This makes it possible to appropriately cope with a power failure occurring in a situation where the processing at the time of starting the supply of the operating power is being performed.

  In the configuration in which the power failure information storage processing (step S8901) is included in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638), the first timer interrupt processing is performed even when the processing at the time of starting the supply of the operating power is being executed. Triggered and activated. This makes it possible to periodically monitor the occurrence of a power failure even in a situation where the process at the time of starting the supply of the operating power is being executed.

  The first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638) is started by interrupting even if the remaining process is being executed after the process at the start of the supply of the operating power is completed. This makes it possible to periodically monitor the occurrence of a power outage in a situation where the process at the time of starting the supply of the operating power is performed by using the first timer interrupt process started by interrupting the remaining process. Become.

  When the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638) is interrupted and started in a state where the process at the start of the supply of the operating power is being executed, the start-up process flag provided in the work area 221 for the specific control is set to “ Since "1" is set, the processing for advancing the game is not executed. Thus, in a configuration in which the first timer interrupt processing is interrupted and started even in a situation where the processing at the time of starting the supply of the operating power is being executed, the occurrence of the power failure is periodically monitored. It is possible to prevent the processing for advancing the game from being executed in the situation where the processing at the start of supply is being executed.

  In a configuration in which the setting value updating process (FIG. 642) is executed in a situation where the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power is being executed, the power failure information can be obtained even if the process of starting the supply of the operating power is being executed. The storage processing (step S8901) is executed. As a result, even if a power failure occurs during setting of the setting value to be used, it is possible to appropriately cope with the power failure.

  Note that the check displays on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are not limited to a configuration that is ended when the initial check period has elapsed, and an operation for ending the check displays is not limited thereto. The check display may be continued until the operation is performed. As the operation for ending, for example, the reset button 68c may be operated regardless of whether any of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 641) and the setting value update process (FIG. 642) is being executed. Alternatively, an operation unit other than the reset button 68c may be operated. In this case, the check display is continued on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 until it is time to check the base value or the set value on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Therefore, it is possible to check the base value or the set value after checking whether the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal. In addition, since the check display is ended based on the operation of the operation unit, the check display can be ended at a desired timing.

  In addition, regardless of whether the supply of the operating power is started or not, when a predetermined operation unit such as the update button 68b or the reset button 68c is operated, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are checked. The display may be started. In this case, it is possible to start the check display at a desired timing when confirming the base value or the set value. Further, the display for check may be terminated when a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed in the configuration, and the predetermined operation unit operated to start the display for check or another predetermined operation unit different from the predetermined operation unit may be used. The configuration may be such that the display for checking is terminated when the operation unit is operated.

  When the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started in a state where a specific operation unit other than the reset button 68c such as the update button 68b is operated, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are activated. A configuration may be adopted in which the display for checking is not started when the display for checking is started and the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started without operating the specific operation unit. In this case, in a configuration in which the display for checking is performed when the supply of the operation power is started, it is possible to select whether or not to start the display for checking by an operation of the administrator of the game hall.

  Further, the present invention is not limited to the configuration in which the base value is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 irrespective of whether or not the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state. The base value may be displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when it is specified based on the detection result of the main body opening sensor 96 that the device is in the open state. In this case, when the gaming machine body 12 is in the open state, first, the display for checking the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is started, and thereafter, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are started. The base value may be displayed at 204. Thereby, before confirming the base value, it is possible to confirm whether the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal or not. Further, the display for check may be terminated when a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed in the configuration, and the predetermined operation unit operated to start the display for check or another predetermined operation unit different from the predetermined operation unit may be used. The configuration may be such that the display for checking is terminated when the operation unit is operated.

  When the main processing (FIG. 637) is started in a state where the condition for executing the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 641) is satisfied, the check display of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is displayed. If the main processing is started in a state where the condition for executing the setting confirmation processing is not satisfied without being started, the display for checking may be started. In this case, it is possible to prevent the check display from being performed when it is determined that the setting value is to be confirmed.

  When the main process (FIG. 637) is started in a state where the condition for executing the set value update process (FIG. 642) is satisfied, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display the check display. If the main processing is started in a state where the condition for executing the set value update processing is not satisfied without being started, the display for checking may be started. In this case, when it is determined that the setting value is to be updated, it is possible to prevent the display for checking from being performed.

  When the main process (FIG. 637) is started in a state where either the condition for executing the setting confirmation process (FIG. 641) or the condition for executing the setting value updating process (FIG. 642) is satisfied. The main processing is performed in a state in which both the condition for executing the setting confirmation process and the condition for executing the setting value updating process are not satisfied without the check display of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 being started. May be started when the check is started. In this case, it is possible to prevent the display for checking from being performed when it is determined that the setting value is to be confirmed or the setting value is to be updated.

  Further, in the display for checking, the display segments 321 to 324 in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are not limited to the configuration in which the display segments 321 to 324 are maintained in the light emitting state. Each of the display segments 321 to 324 in each of the display devices 201 to 204 may be in a blinking state. In the display for checking, in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, each of the display segments 321 to 324 sequentially emits light one by one or a part of them, and the range of the initial check period Each of the display segments 321 to 324 may emit light at least once.

  Further, the processing for displaying the check display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is not limited to the configuration executed as the processing corresponding to the specific control, and the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is not limited to this. It may be configured to be executed as.

  When the base value is not stored in any of the first to third history areas 312 to 314 of the calculation result storage area 234, the history areas 312 to 314 are stored in the first to fourth notification display devices 201. It is good also as composition which does not become a notice object in -204. In this case, for example, when the base value is stored in the current area 311 and the first history area 312, but the base value is not stored in the second history area 313 and the third history area 314, the display continuation period Every time elapses, the notification target in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is switched between the current area 311 and the first history area 312, and the second history area 313 and the third history area 314 are switched. It will not be notified.

  Further, in the current area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 of the calculation result storage area 234, a base value represented as a decimal to the second decimal place is stored. Although the configuration is not limited to this, the configuration may be such that information of a combination of a number at the first decimal place and a number at the second decimal place is stored in the base value. The total number of game balls to be calculated (K91 × “the number of prize balls for winning into the general winning opening 31”) + K92 × “the number of prize balls for winning to the special prize winning device 32” + K93 × “ The number of prize balls for winning to one operating port 33 "+ K94 x" the number of prize balls for winning to second operating port 34 ") and the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K91 + K92 + K93 + K). 4 + K95) may be configured to a combination of the information is stored with. In the former case, the information of the various areas 311 to 314 can be directly set in the display target setting area 276, and in the latter case, the base value is calculated using the information of the various areas 311 to 314, and then The information of the first decimal place and the second decimal place extracted from the base value is set in the display target setting area 276.

  In addition, the operation result storage area 234 may be provided with only the current area 311 and the first history area 312 as areas for storing base values. A configuration in which only the two history areas 313 are provided may be employed. Further, a configuration may be employed in which four or more areas are provided as history areas for storing information on past base values.

  In the operation result storage area 234, various areas 311 to 314 are fixed in address, and the base value is not limited to a configuration in which the base values are shifted in the various areas 311 to 314 as necessary. To 314 may be provided as a ring buffer.

  Further, instead of the configuration in which the base value is calculated as the aspect information, a configuration in which the 61st to 68th parameters are calculated as in the forty-seventh embodiment may be adopted. In this case, the current area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 of the calculation result storage area 234 may be configured to store all of the 61st to 68th parameters. The current area 311 may store the 61st to 68th parameters, but the first to third history areas 312 to 314 may store some parameters such as only the 61st parameter.

  Further, in addition to or instead of the base value as the aspect information, the configuration may be such that the occurrence probability of the jackpot result is calculated and stored, or the occurrence probability of the high frequency support mode may be calculated and stored.

  Further, the trigger for shifting the base value in the various areas 311 to 314 in the calculation result storage area 234 is limited to the case where the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA becomes equal to or more than the shift reference number. Instead, the shift may be performed when a predetermined period (for example, 8 hours) has elapsed, or the shift may be performed when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped. The shift may be performed when the supply of the operating power to the CPU 63 is started, or the shift may be performed when the set value of the pachinko machine 10 is changed. Further, a configuration in which there are a plurality of types of triggers for performing the shift may be employed.

  Until the management start flag provided in the non-specific control work area 223 is set to “1”, the display segments 321 and 322 in each of the first and second notification display devices 202 emit light. The display segments 321 and 322 in each of the first and second notification display devices 202 may be in a blinking state. Until the management start flag is set to “1”, “bL .−−” → “b1 .−−” → “b2 .−−” → ”b2 .−−” on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. The display of “b3 .−−−” may be repeated.

  Until the management start flag provided in the non-specific control work area 223 is set to “1”, the display segments 321 to 324 in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are displayed. The display segments 321 and 322 in each of the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 are turned on or off, and the third and fourth notifications are performed without performing the check display for turning on the light emission state. The display corresponding to the fact that “1” is not set in the management start flag may be performed, such as that the display corresponding to the current base value is performed on the display devices 203 and 204.

  When the game stop flag is set to "1" because the power failure flag is not set to "1" or the checksums do not match, the progress of the game is stopped. Each of the display segments 321 to 324 in the display devices 201 to 204 may be configured to be in a light-emitting state as in the case of the check display, or each of the display segments 321 to 324 may be configured to be in a flashed state.

  Further, the display control of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is not limited to the configuration performed by the main CPU 63, but may be configured to be performed by a dedicated control unit. Or a configuration performed by the display control device 82. In this case, when the base values are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the base value to be notified is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the control means serving as the control subject, and the first When the set values are displayed on the fourth to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the set values to be notified are transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the control means serving as the control subject. Further, when the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power is performed in the main CPU 63, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are displayed in a state where the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power is being performed. Thus, the information corresponding to the start of the check display is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the control means serving as the control subject so that the check display is started.

<68th embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the main processing executed by the main CPU 63 is different from that of the 67th embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the 67th embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the 67th embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 644 is a flowchart showing the main processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processes of steps S9401 to S9426 in the main process are executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

  In steps S9401 to S9403, the same processes as those in steps S8801 to S8803 of the main process (FIG. 637) in the 67th embodiment are executed. After that, interruption permission is set (step S9404). Thus, the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) is started by interrupting at the first interrupt cycle, and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 639) is started by interrupting at the second interrupt cycle. However, since the start-up processing flag is set to “1” in step S9403, even if the first timer interrupt processing is started, among the various processing of the first timer interrupt processing, the power failure monitoring and the various counters are executed. While the processing for performing the update and the fraud monitoring is executed, the first timer interrupt processing is ended without executing the processing for advancing the game.

  Thereafter, information corresponding to an initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in a check-in-progress counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step S9405). The value set in the counter during the check is decremented by one each time the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639) is started, similarly to the 67th embodiment. When a value of 1 or more is set in the check counter, a check display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as in the 67th embodiment.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the checking counter is “0” (step S9406). Then, the process waits in step S9406 until the value of the check-in-progress counter becomes “0”. Accordingly, the display for checking on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is continued until the initial check period set in step S9405 elapses.

  After that, the processing of steps S9407 to S9426 is executed. The processing contents of steps S9407 to S9426 are the same as those of steps S8806 to S8825 of the main processing (FIG. 637) in the 67th embodiment.

  According to the above configuration, when the supply of the operation power to the main CPU 63 is started and the process at the start of the supply of the operation power is started in the main CPU 63, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are displayed. The display for the check is performed, and the progress of the processing at the start of the supply of the operation power is stopped until the initial check period elapses in that situation. As a result, it is possible to prevent the setting check and the setting value update from being executed in the middle of the initial check period, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the processing load. Further, it is possible to prevent the game from being started during the initial check period.

<69th embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the main processing executed by the main CPU 63 is different from that of the 67th embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the 67th embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the 67th embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 645 is a flowchart showing the main processing in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processing of steps S9501 to S9525 in the main processing is executed using the specific control program and the specific control data in the main CPU 63.

  In steps S9501 to S9518, the same processes as those in steps S7901 to S7918 of the main process (FIG. 619) in the 65th embodiment are executed. Thereafter, information corresponding to the initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in a check-in-progress counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step S9519). The value set in the counter during the check is decremented by one each time the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639) is started, similarly to the 67th embodiment. When a value of 1 or more is set in the check-in-progress counter, the check display is continued on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as in the 67th embodiment.

  After that, the processes in and after step S9520 are executed. The processing contents of steps S9520 to S9525 are the same as those of steps S7919 to S7924 of the main processing (FIG. 619) in the 65th embodiment.

  According to the above configuration, when the supply of the operation power to the main CPU 63 is started, the process at the start of the supply of the operation power (steps S9501 to S9518) is completed by the main CPU 63 and the remaining process is performed. Before (Step S9522 to Step S9525) is started, an initial check period is started. Accordingly, it is not necessary to control the initial check period in the situation where the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power is performed, so that the processing load in the situation where the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power is being performed is reduced. It becomes possible.

  The setting confirmation process (step S9514) and the setting value update process (step S9518) are executed as processes at the start of the supply of the operating power, whereas the processes at the start of the supply of the operating power are completed during the initial check period. Will be started later. Thereby, even if the display for check is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 during the initial check period, the display of the set value using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is performed. It is possible to prevent the influence.

  When the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, one of the setting confirmation process (step S9514) and the setting value update process (step S9518) is executed, and the setting confirmation process (step S9518). S9514) and the setting value updating process (step S9518) are not performed, and the display for checking is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Thereby, it is possible to confirm whether the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal regardless of the situation when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started.

  In the main processing (FIG. 645) of the main CPU 63, either the setting confirmation processing (step S9514) or the setting value updating processing (step S9518) is executed, and the setting confirmation processing (step S9514) and the setting This is a process that is commonly executed regardless of whether any of the value updating processes (Step S9518) is not performed, and is either a setting confirmation process (Step S9514) or a setting value updating process (Step S9518). If this is performed, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are checked as a process whose execution order is later than the setting confirmation process (step S9514) and the setting value update process (step S9518). The process for starting the display is set. As described above, since the process for starting the display for checking on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is set as the common process, the above-described advantages are achieved while simplifying the processing configuration. It is possible to achieve the effect.

  Even in the situation where the display for check is being executed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the process for causing the main CPU 63 to proceed with the game can be started. Thereby, even if the display for checking is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 after the setting confirmation process (step S9514) or the setting value update process (step S9518) is executed, the game can be played. It is possible to prevent the start timing of the processing for proceeding from being delayed.

  The configuration may be such that the processing after step S9520 is not started until the initial check period has elapsed. In this case, it is possible to prevent the game from being started while the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are displaying the check.

<70th embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the normal setting process executed by the main CPU 63 is different from that of the 67th embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the 67th embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the 67th embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 646 is a flowchart showing a normal setting process executed by the main CPU 63 in the present embodiment. The processing of steps S9601 to S9605 in the normal setting processing is executed by using the specific control program and the specific control data in the main CPU 63.

  First, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the management start flag provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control (step S9601). If “1” has not been set in the management start flag (step S9601: NO), check display data is set in the fifth display data buffer 275 in the work area 221 for specific control (step S9602). When the data for the check display is supplied to the display IC 266, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 start the check display. Specifically, in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, all the display segments 321 to 324 are in a light emitting state. This allows the manager of the gaming hall to know whether or not each of the display segments 321 to 324 of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 can normally emit light.

  If “1” is set in the management start flag (step S9601: YES), the processing of steps S9603 to S9605 is executed. The processing contents in steps S9603 to S9605 are the same as those in steps S9107 to S9109 in the normal setting processing (FIG. 640) in the 67th embodiment. By executing the processing of steps S9603 to S9605, the base values stored in the various areas 311 to 314 of the calculation result storage area 234 are sequentially notified on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. At the same time, if the base value of the current area 311 is notified immediately after the start of the new calculation period, the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 perform initial display of calculation.

  According to the above configuration, when “1” is not set in the management start flag, the initial check period in which the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 perform the display for check is performed. Thereby, the situation that is the initial check period when the supply of the operation power to the main CPU 63 is started is limited to the situation where the management start flag is not set to “1” at the stage of shipping the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Becomes possible.

<71st embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the 65th embodiment in the configuration relating to the set values. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the 65th embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the 65th embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIGS. 647 (a) to 647 (d) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the setting correspondence storage area 325 provided in the main ROM 64.

  The setting correspondence storage area 325 stores a low probability mode success / failure table, a high probability mode success / failure table, a setting confirmation process (FIG. 620), and a setting value update process (FIG. 621) in association with the setting values of the pachinko machine 10. In, the display data of the set value used for displaying the current set value on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is set. More specifically, the setting correspondence storage area 325 includes a first setting information storage area 325a, a second setting information storage area 325b, a third setting information storage area 325c, a fourth setting information storage area 325d, and a fifth setting information storage area. 325e and a sixth setting information storage area 325f are provided.

  Each of the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f includes a storage area for storing a low / high probability mode success / failure table referred to when the success / failure mode is the low probability mode, and a success / failure lottery mode. A storage area for storing a high / low probability mode success / failure table referred to in the case of the high probability mode, and a first to fourth notification for setting confirmation processing (FIG. 620) and setting value update processing (FIG. 621). A storage area is provided for storing display data of setting values used for displaying the current setting values on the display devices 201 to 204. In each of the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f, a predetermined plural-byte area is secured as a storage area for storing a low probability mode success / failure table, and a high probability mode success / failure table is stored. A predetermined area of a plurality of bytes is secured as a storage area for performing the operation, and a 1-byte area is secured as a storage area for storing display data of the set value. Therefore, each of the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f has a storage capacity of a plurality of bytes. In this case, the start address of the first setting information storage area 325a is A (1), the start address of the second setting information storage area 325b is A (2), and the third setting information storage area 325c is set. Is A (3), the start address of the fourth setting information storage area 325d is A (4), and the start address of the fifth setting information storage area 325e is A (5). The start address of the sixth setting information storage area 325f is A (6).

  In the above configuration, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment of the present embodiment, six setting values of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6” are set as the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 in the same manner as in the thirty-third embodiment. ing. In this case, the probability of a jackpot result in the low-probability mode differs for each of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”, while the probability of a jackpot result in the high-probability mode is the same. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 647 (a), in the first setting information storage area 325a, a storage area for storing the low probability mode success / failure table is stored in the first low probability success / failure table LT ( 1) is stored, and a common high-probability table HT common to “Setting 1” to “Setting 6” is stored in a storage area for storing the high-probability mode success / failure table. Display data for displaying “1” is stored in a storage area for storing display data. In the second setting information storage area 325b, a second low-probability table LT (2) corresponding to “Setting 2” is stored in a storage area for storing the low-probability mode success / failure table. A common high-accuracy pass / fail table HT common to “Setting 1” to “Setting 6” is stored in a storage area for storing the pass / fail table of “No. Display data for displaying "2" is stored.

  In the third setting information storage area 325c, a third low-probability table LT (3) corresponding to “Setting 3” is stored in a storage area for storing a low-probability mode success / failure table. A common high-accuracy pass / fail table HT common to “Setting 1” to “Setting 6” is stored in a storage area for storing the pass / fail table of “No. Display data for displaying "3" is stored. In the fourth setting information storage area 325d, a fourth low-probability table LT (4) corresponding to "Setting 4" is stored in a storage area for storing the low-probability mode success / failure table. A common high-accuracy pass / fail table HT common to “Setting 1” to “Setting 6” is stored in a storage area for storing the pass / fail table of “No. Display data for displaying "4" is stored.

  In the fifth setting information storage area 325e, a fifth low-probability table LT (5) corresponding to “Setting 5” is stored in a storage area for storing a low-probability mode success / failure table. A common high-accuracy pass / fail table HT common to “Setting 1” to “Setting 6” is stored in a storage area for storing the pass / fail table of “No. Display data for displaying "5" is stored. In the sixth setting information storage area 325f, a sixth low-probability table LT (6) corresponding to "Setting 6" is stored in a storage area for storing a low-probability mode success / failure table. A common high-accuracy pass / fail table HT common to “Setting 1” to “Setting 6” is stored in a storage area for storing the pass / fail table of “No. Display data for displaying "6" is stored.

  In the case of the configuration of the above-described first embodiment, the probability that the jackpot results in the low probability mode becomes higher as the set value becomes larger. On the other hand, the probability of the jackpot result in the high probability mode is the same regardless of the set value. In addition, since the probability of a jackpot result in the high probability mode is 1/30, the probability of a jackpot result in the high probability mode is higher than the jackpot probability of the low probability mode in the “setting 6” even in “setting 1”. High probability.

  In the first embodiment in which “setting 1” to “setting 6” are set as the setting values, the processing is executed in step S503 in order to execute the hit / fail judgment processing in step S504 of the special figure change start processing (FIG. 518). A description will be given of the reading process of the hit / fail table. FIG. 648 is a flowchart showing a process of reading the hit / fail table. Note that the processes of steps S9701 to S9705 in the read / write table reading process are executed using the specific control program and the specific control data in the main CPU 63.

  First, the value of the set value counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control in the main RAM 65 is read (step S9701). Which of the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f in the setting correspondence storage area 325 should be referred to when the setting value counter reads the hit / failure table and when the display data of the setting value is read, respectively. Is a counter for specifying by the main CPU 63.

  After that, from among the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f in the setting correspondence storage area 325, a storage area corresponding to the value of the set value counter read in step S9701 is selected (step S9702). The set value counter is configured to take any value of “1” to “6” as in the 65th embodiment, and the first set value is set when the value of the set value counter is “1”. The information storage area 325a is selected, the second setting information storage area 325b is selected when the value of the set value counter is "2", and the third setting is performed when the value of the set value counter is "3". The information storage area 325c is selected. If the value of the set value counter is "4", the fourth setting information storage area 325d is selected. If the value of the set value counter is "5", the fifth setting is performed. The information storage area 325e is selected, and if the value of the set value counter is "6", the sixth setting information storage area 325f is selected.

  At the time of this selection, a correspondence table stored in the main ROM 64 in advance is referred to. The correspondence table defines the correspondence between the values of the set value counters and the start addresses of the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f. More specifically, A (1), which is the start address of the first setting information storage area 325a, is set in correspondence with the value of the set value counter "1", and corresponds to the value of "2" in the set value counter. Thus, A (2), which is the start address of the second setting information storage area 325b, is set, and A, which is the start address of the third setting information storage area 325c, corresponds to the value of "3" of the setting value counter. (3) is set, and A (4), which is the start address of the fourth setting information storage area 325d, is set in correspondence with the value of “4” of the set value counter, and “5” of the set value counter is set. A (5), which is the start address of the fifth setting information storage area 325e, is set in correspondence with the value of "." Start address A (6) has been set.

  Thereafter, if the current win / fail lottery mode is the low-probability mode (step S9703: NO), the win / fail table of the low-probability mode is read from the setting information storage areas 325a to 325f selected in step S9702 (step S9704). On the other hand, if the current win / fail lottery mode is the high probability mode (step S9703: YES), the high / low probability mode win / fail table is read from the setting information storage areas 325a to 325f selected in step S9702 (step S9705).

  By executing the read / write table reading process as described above, the win / fail table corresponding to the current win / loss lottery mode is read from the setting information storage areas 325a to 325f corresponding to the values of the set value counters. Then, in the win / fail determination processing (step S504) of the special figure change start processing (FIG. 518), it is determined whether or not the current game round corresponds to the big hit result by using the read win / fail table.

  Next, a description will be given of a process performed when the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 628) is interrupted and started while the set value update process (step S7918) is being executed in the main process (FIG. 619) of the main CPU 63. I do. In this case, in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 628), the setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the updating of the set value is executed (step S8403). FIG. 649 is a flowchart showing a setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during setting update. Note that the processing of steps S9801 to S9805 in the setting processing is executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

  First, the value of the set value counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control in the main RAM 65 is read (step S9801). After that, from among the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f in the setting correspondence storage area 325, a storage area corresponding to the value of the set value counter read in step S9801 is selected (step S9802). The set value counter is configured to take any value of “1” to “6” as in the 65th embodiment, and the first set value is set when the value of the set value counter is “1”. The information storage area 325a is selected, the second setting information storage area 325b is selected when the value of the set value counter is "2", and the third setting is performed when the value of the set value counter is "3". The information storage area 325c is selected. If the value of the set value counter is "4", the fourth setting information storage area 325d is selected. If the value of the set value counter is "5", the fifth setting is performed. The information storage area 325e is selected, and if the value of the set value counter is "6", the sixth setting information storage area 325f is selected. At the time of this selection, the correspondence table stored in the main ROM 64 in advance is referred to in the same manner as the read / write table reading process (FIG. 648).

  After that, the display data of the setting value is read from the setting information storage areas 325a to 325f selected in step S9802 (step S9803). The display data of the read set value is set in the fifth display data buffer 275 in the work area 221 for specific control as display data to be applied to the fourth notification display device 204 (step S9804). Further, display data for displaying on the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 a display indicating that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being updated is set in the fifth display data buffer 275. (Step S9805).

  By executing the setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update as described above, the display corresponding to the display data set in the fifth display data buffer 275 in step S9805 is displayed in the first to the fifth positions. The display is performed by the third notification display devices 201 to 203, and the display corresponding to the display data set in the fifth display data buffer 275 in step S9804 is performed by the fourth notification display device 204. Thereby, as shown in an explanatory diagram of FIG. 629 (a), for example, the display indicating that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being updated and the display indicating the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 are the first. To the fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  The setting executed when the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 628) is interrupted and started while the setting confirmation processing (step S7914) is being executed in the main processing (FIG. 619) of the main CPU 63. In the setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the confirmation (step S8405), the setting of the display data of the set value is the same as the setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update (FIG. 649). Is performed.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, six setting values of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6” are set as the setting values of the pachinko machine 10, but depending on the model and model of the pachinko machine 10. In some cases, less than six setting values may be used. Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 647 (b), three-stage set values of “setting 1,” “setting 3,” and “setting 6” are set. In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 647 (c), four levels of setting values of “setting 1,” “setting 2,” “setting 3,” and “setting 4” are set. In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment shown in the explanatory diagram of (d), only one-stage set value of “setting 1” is set. In this case, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, any of the pachinko machines 10 of the second to fourth embodiments stores first to sixth setting information that allows setting of six-stage setting values. A setting correspondence storage area 325 having areas 325a to 325f is used.

  For details on the case where the setting correspondence storage area 325 is used in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, as shown in an explanatory diagram of FIG. 647 (b), the first setting information storage area 325a and the fourth setting information storage area 325d stores various information corresponding to “setting 1”. That is, in the first setting information storage area 325a and the fourth setting information storage area 325d, the first low-probability table LT (1 ) Is stored in the storage area for storing the high probability mode success / failure table, and the first high probability success / failure table HT (1) corresponding to “Setting 1” is stored. Display data for displaying “1” is stored in a storage area for storing.

  Various information corresponding to “Setting 3” is stored in the second setting information storage area 325b and the fifth setting information storage area 325e. In other words, in the second setting information storage area 325b and the fifth setting information storage area 325e, a storage area for storing the low probability mode success / failure table is stored in the third low probability success / failure table LT (3) corresponding to “Setting 3”. ) Is stored, and a third high-probability table HT (3) corresponding to “setting 3” is stored in a storage area for storing the high-probability mode success / failure table. Display data for displaying “3” is stored in a storage area for storing.

  Various information corresponding to “Setting 6” is stored in the third setting information storage area 325c and the sixth setting information storage area 325f. That is, in the third setting information storage area 325c and the sixth setting information storage area 325f, a storage area for storing the low probability mode success / failure table is stored in the sixth low likelihood decision table LT (6) corresponding to “Setting 6”. ) Is stored in the storage area for storing the high probability mode success / failure table, and a sixth high probability success / failure table HT (6) corresponding to “Setting 6” is stored. Display data for displaying “6” is stored in a storage area for storing.

  In the case of the configuration of the second embodiment, even if the configuration correspondence storage area 325 having the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f is used, these first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f are used. The set value of the number of steps smaller than the number of 6 is set. The probability of a jackpot result in the low probability mode increases as the set value increases, and the probability of a jackpot result in the high probability mode increases as the set value increases. Note that the jackpot probability of the high probability mode in “Setting 1” is higher than the jackpot probability of the low probability mode in “Setting 6”.

  In the case of the configuration of the second embodiment, in the read / write table reading process (FIG. 648), the setting value counter corresponds to “setting 1” regardless of whether the value of the set value counter is “1” or “4”. The pass / fail table is read, and the pass / fail table corresponding to “Setting 3” is read regardless of whether the value of the set value counter is “2” or “5”, and the value of the set value counter is read. In either case of “3” and “6”, the success / failure table corresponding to “Setting 6” is read.

  In the process of reading the hit / fail table (FIG. 648), the hit / fail table is read from the setting information storage area 325 corresponding to the value of the set value counter, regardless of the number of steps of the set value. As a result, even when the three-stage set values are set, the processing configuration of the read / write table readout processing (FIG. 648) is the same as the case where the six-stage set values are set. It becomes possible.

  In the case of the configuration of the second embodiment, when the setting correspondence storage area 325 in which six setting values can be set is used, three setting values are set. Therefore, setting is possible in the setting correspondence storage area 325. It is possible to divide the number of stages of the appropriate set value by the number of stages of the set value to be used. That is, the number of steps of the setting value to be used is a divisor of the maximum number of steps of the setting value that can be set in the setting correspondence storage area 325, and is different from the maximum number of steps. In this case, the same number of setting information storage areas 325a to 325f are allocated to each of the setting values to be used, and three sets of setting values are arranged one by one in ascending order. In this case, setting values are assigned to the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f such that the group is repeated. Accordingly, when the reset button 68c is repeatedly operated from the situation where the value of the set value counter is “1” in the set value update process (FIG. 621), the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are displayed. Are changed in the order of “1” → “3” → “6” → “1” → “3” → “6” → “1” →... In other words, the display is changed to the display of a different set value for one operation of the reset button 68c, and the display in a certain mode is performed when one set of displayable set values is displayed one time. The orbit will be repeated. Therefore, it becomes easy to perform the setting value update operation.

  In the setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update (FIG. 649), the setting value is displayed from the setting information storage area 325 corresponding to the value of the setting value counter regardless of the number of setting value stages. This is a configuration for reading data. Thus, even when three-step setting values are set, the processing configuration of the setting process (FIG. 649) can be the same processing configuration as when six-step setting values are set. It becomes possible.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, various kinds of information corresponding to “setting 1” are stored in the first setting information storage area 325a and the second setting information storage area 325b, and the third setting information storage area 325c and the second Various information corresponding to “Setting 3” is stored in the fourth setting information storage area 325d, and various information corresponding to “Setting 6” is stored in the fifth setting information storage area 325e and the sixth setting information storage area 325f. May be adopted. In other words, the same number of setting information storage areas 325a to 325f are assigned to each of the setting values to be used, and the same setting values are continuously set in relation to the value of the setting value counter. It is good also as a structure set to 325a-325f. In this case, when the reset button 68c is repeatedly operated from the situation where the value of the set value counter is “1” in the set value update process (FIG. 621), the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are displayed. Are changed in the order of “1” → “1” → “3” → “3” → “6” → “6” → “1” →...

  For details on the case where the setting correspondence storage area 325 is used in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, as shown in an explanatory diagram of FIG. 647 (c), the first setting information storage area 325a and the second setting information storage area Various information corresponding to “Setting 1” is stored in 325b. That is, in the first setting information storage area 325a and the second setting information storage area 325b, the first low-probability table LT (1) corresponding to “Setting 1” is a storage area for storing the low-probability mode success / failure table. ) Is stored, and a common high-probability table HT common to “Setting 1” to “Setting 6” is stored in a storage area for storing a high-probability mode success / failure table. Display data for displaying “1” is stored in a storage area for storing data.

  Various information corresponding to “Setting 2” is stored in the third setting information storage area 325c and the fourth setting information storage area 325d. That is, in the third setting information storage area 325c and the fourth setting information storage area 325d, a storage area for storing the low probability mode success / failure table is stored in the second low likelihood decision table LT (2) corresponding to “Setting 2”. ) Is stored, and a common high-probability table HT common to “Setting 1” to “Setting 6” is stored in a storage area for storing a high-probability mode success / failure table. Display data for displaying “2” is stored in a storage area for storing data.

  Various information corresponding to “Setting 3” is stored in the fifth setting information storage area 325e. In other words, in the fifth setting information storage area 325e, the third low-probability table LT (3) corresponding to "Setting 3" is stored in the storage area for storing the low-probability mode success / failure table. In a storage area for storing the probability mode pass / fail table, a common high-accuracy pass / fail table HT common to “Setting 1” to “Setting 6” is stored, and a storage area for storing set value display data. The display data for displaying "3" is stored.

  Various information corresponding to “Setting 4” is stored in the sixth setting information storage area 325f. In other words, in the sixth setting information storage area 325f, the fourth low-probability table LT (4) corresponding to “Setting 4” is stored in the storage area for storing the low-probability mode success / failure table. In a storage area for storing the probability mode pass / fail table, a common high-accuracy pass / fail table HT common to “Setting 1” to “Setting 6” is stored, and a storage area for storing set value display data. The display data for displaying "4" is stored.

  In the case of the configuration of the third embodiment, even if the configuration corresponding storage area 325 having the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f is used, these first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f are used. The set value of the number of stages smaller than six, which is the number of items, is set. Then, the probability of a big hit result in the low probability mode increases as the set value increases, and the probability of a big hit result in the high probability mode becomes the same regardless of the set value. In addition, since the probability of a jackpot result in the high probability mode is 1/30, the probability of a jackpot result in the high probability mode is higher than the jackpot probability of the low probability mode in the “setting 4” even in “setting 1”. High probability.

  In the case of the configuration of the third embodiment, in the read / write table reading process (FIG. 648), the setting value counter corresponds to “setting 1” regardless of whether the value of the set value counter is “1” or “2”. The pass / fail table is read, and the pass / fail table corresponding to “Setting 2” is read regardless of whether the value of the set value counter is “3” or “4”, and the value of the set value counter is read. In the case of “5”, the success / failure table corresponding to “Setting 3” is read, and when the value of the set value counter is “6”, the success / failure table corresponding to “Setting 4” is read.

  In the process of reading the hit / fail table (FIG. 648), the hit / fail table is read from the setting information storage area 325 corresponding to the value of the set value counter, regardless of the number of steps of the set value. As a result, even when the four-step setting values are set, the processing configuration of the read / write table readout processing (FIG. 648) is the same as the processing configuration when the six-step setting values are set. It becomes possible.

  In the case of the configuration of the third embodiment, when the setting correspondence storage area 325 in which six setting values can be set is used, four setting values are set, and thus the setting correspondence storage area 325 can be set. Cannot be divided by the number of steps of the set value to be used. In this case, two continuous setting information storage areas 325a to 325d are assigned to each of "Setting 1" and "Setting 2" in relation to the value of the setting value counter, and "Setting 3" and "Setting 3" One setting information storage area 325e, 325f is assigned to each of "Setting 4". Thereby, when the reset button 68c is repeatedly operated from the situation where the value of the set value counter is “1” in the set value update process (FIG. 621), the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are displayed. Are changed in the order of “1” → “1” → “2” → “2” → “3” → “4” → “1” →...

  In the setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update (FIG. 649), the setting value is displayed from the setting information storage area 325 corresponding to the value of the setting value counter regardless of the number of setting value stages. This is a configuration for reading data. Thereby, even when the four-step setting values are set, the processing configuration of the setting process (FIG. 649) can be the same processing configuration as when the six-step setting values are set. It becomes possible.

  In order to change the display of the set values on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 for one operation of the reset button 68c in the set value update process (FIG. 621), It is preferable that various information corresponding to the same set value is not set in the continuous set information storage areas 325a to 325f in relation to the value of the set value counter. For example, various information corresponding to “Setting 1” is set in the first setting information storage area 325a, and various information corresponding to “Setting 2” is set in the second setting information storage area 325b. Various information corresponding to “Setting 3” is set in 325c, various information corresponding to “Setting 4” is set in the fourth setting information storage area 325d, and “Setting 1” is set in the fifth setting information storage area 325e. A configuration is conceivable in which various information to be set are set, and various information corresponding to “setting 2” is set in the sixth setting information storage area 325f. In this case, when the reset button 68c is repeatedly operated from the situation where the value of the set value counter is “1” in the set value update process (FIG. 621), the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are displayed. Are changed in the order of “1” → “2” → “3” → “4” → “1” → “2” → “1” →...

  For details on the case where the setting correspondence storage area 325 is used in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 647 (d), all the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f are used. Stores various information corresponding to “Setting 1”. That is, in the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f, the first low-probability table LT (1) corresponding to “Setting 1” is stored in a storage area for storing the low-probability mode success / failure table. A common high-accuracy table HT common to “Setting 1” to “Setting 6” is stored in a storage area for storing the high-probability mode success / failure table, and display data of the set values is stored. Display data for displaying "1" is stored in the storage area for performing the operation.

  In the case of the configuration of the fourth embodiment, only one type of set value is set even in the configuration in which the setting corresponding storage area 325 having the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f is used. Even in the configuration in which only one type of set value is set, the read / write table is read from the setting information storage area 325 corresponding to the value of the set value counter in the read / write table reading process (FIG. 648). is there. Thus, even when only one type of set value is set, the processing configuration of the read / write table readout processing (FIG. 648) is set to the same processing configuration as the case where the set value of six levels is set. It is possible to do.

  In the case of the configuration of the fourth embodiment, it is not necessary to set the set value, and thus it is basically unnecessary to execute the set value update process (FIG. 621). An update process (FIG. 621) may be performed. In this case, “setting 1” is assigned to all of the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f. Therefore, when the reset button 68c is repeatedly operated from the situation where the value of the set value counter is “1” in the set value updating process (FIG. 621), the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are used. As for the set value to be displayed, the display of “1” is continued in the order of “1” → “1” → “1” → “1” → “1” → “1” → “1” →. It will be.

  In the setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update (FIG. 649), the setting value is displayed from the setting information storage area 325 corresponding to the value of the setting value counter regardless of the number of setting value stages. This is a configuration for reading data. Thus, even when only one type of set value is set, the processing configuration of the setting process (FIG. 649) is the same as the case where six-stage set values are set. Becomes possible.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  Since the setting value to be used is set from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage, the player expects that a more advantageous setting value is to be used. It will be. In this case, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second to fourth embodiments, the first predetermined number (specifically, six) of setting information storage areas 325a to 325f for storing the success / failure tables corresponding to the setting values are provided. In this configuration, the number of types of setting values to be used is smaller than the first predetermined number. This makes it possible to share the configuration relating to the setting correspondence storage area 325 with the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment in which the number of types of setting values to be used is the first predetermined number, and changes the number of types of setting values. In this case, the design work of the pachinko machine 10 can be easily performed.

  In the setting value update process (step S7918), every time the reset button 68c is operated, the setting value to be used is changed by changing the numerical information of the setting value counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control. The use / non-permission table in the setting information storage areas 325a to 325f corresponding to the changed numerical information is used in the use / non-permission judgment processing, so that the permission / non-permission judgment processing is executed in a mode corresponding to the setting value to be used. Become. In this case, each of the setting value setting tables that can be set is stored in at least one setting information storage area 325a to 325f, and is a part of the first predetermined number and stores a plurality of setting information storage areas. Since the same hit / fail table is stored in the areas 325a to 325f, the hit / fail tables are stored in all of the first predetermined number of setting information storage areas 325a to 325f. As a result, while the first predetermined number of setting information storage areas 325a to 325f are used as they are and the setting value to be used is determined using the setting value counter, the setting values of the setting values to be used are used. It is possible to make the number of types smaller than the first predetermined number.

  The configuration is such that the hit / fail table is read from the setting information storage areas 325a to 325f corresponding to the numerical information of the set value counter, and the hit / fail judgment processing is executed using the read hit / fail table. Thus, even when the number of types of setting values to be used is smaller than the first predetermined number, the configuration for reading the hit / failure table when executing the hit / fail determination processing can be used as it is. .

  In the situation where the set value updating process (step S7918) is executed, the display data of the set value is read from the set information storage areas 325a to 325f corresponding to the numerical information of the set value counter, and the read display data of the set value is added to the read data. The corresponding display is performed by the fourth notification display device 204. Thus, even when the number of types of setting values to be used is smaller than the first predetermined number, the configuration for reading the display data of the setting values when executing the display corresponding to the setting values is used as it is. It is possible to do.

  The number of steps of the setting value to be used is a divisor of the maximum number of steps of the setting value that can be set in the setting correspondence storage area 325, and is different from the maximum number of steps. In this case, the same number of setting information storage areas 325a to 325f are allocated to each of the setting values to be used, and three sets of setting values are arranged one by one in ascending order. In this case, setting values are assigned to the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f such that the group is repeated. Accordingly, when the reset button 68c is repeatedly operated from the situation where the value of the set value counter is “1” in the set value update process (FIG. 621), the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are displayed. Are changed in the order of “1” → “3” → “6” → “1” → “3” → “6” → “1” →... In other words, the display is changed to the display of a different set value for one operation of the reset button 68c, and the display in a certain mode is performed when one set of displayable set values is displayed one time. The orbit will be repeated. Therefore, it becomes easy to perform the setting value update operation.

  In a configuration in which the hit / fail table in the high-probability mode does not change according to the set value, the hit / fail table in the high-probability mode is stored in the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f of the setting correspondence storage area 325. Instead, the information may be stored in a storage area different from the setting corresponding storage area 325 in the main ROM 64.

  When there is only one set value to be used, the hit / fail table corresponding to the set value is set in only one set information storage area 325a to 325f, and the remaining set information storage areas 325a to 325f are set. It is good also as a structure which does not set a success / failure table in 325f. If the setting value to be used is in a plurality of stages but the number of stages is smaller than the number of the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f, the hit / fail table corresponding to each of the setting values is The configuration may be such that the corresponding setting information storage areas 325a to 325f are set only in the corresponding one and the remaining setting information storage areas 325a to 325f are not set with the hit / fail table. In this configuration, by setting the numerical information corresponding to the setting information storage areas 325a to 325 in which the hit / fail table is not set as numerical information that cannot be selected in the setting value counter, the setting information storage area in which the hit / fail table is not set It is possible to prevent 325a to 325f from being selected at the time of reading the hit / fail table or the display data of the set value.

<72nd embodiment>
In the seventy-first embodiment, the setting correspondence storage area 325 in which six-step setting values can be set is used. In the present embodiment, the setting correspondence storage in which three-step setting values can be set. The area 326 is used.

  FIGS. 650 (a) to 650 (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the setting correspondence storage area 326 stored in the main ROM 64 in advance.

  The setting correspondence storage area 326 includes a first setting information storage area 326a, a second setting information storage area 326b, and a third setting information storage area 326c. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 650 (a), various types of information corresponding to “Setting 1” are set in the first setting information storage area 326a, and “Setting 2” is set in the second setting information storage area 326b. Are set, and various information corresponding to “setting 3” is set in the third setting information storage area 326c. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the set values for the maximum number that can be set in the setting correspondence storage area 326 are set.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment shown in FIG. 650 (b), various types of information corresponding to “setting 1” are set in all of the first to third setting information storage areas 326a to 326c. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, only one type of set value is set using the setting correspondence storage area 326 in which set values in three stages can be set.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment shown in FIG. 650 (c), various types of information corresponding to “Setting 1” are set in the first setting information storage area 326a and the second setting information storage area 326b. Various information corresponding to “Setting 3” is set in the information storage area 326c. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, two-stage set values are set using the setting correspondence storage area 326 in which three-stage set values can be set.

  According to the above configuration, the setting correspondence storage area 326 in which the set values of the three stages can be set is provided in the second and third embodiments in which the set values of the number of stages smaller than the set values of the three stages are used. The pachinko machine 10 can be diverted as it is. As in the 71st embodiment, the processing configuration of the read / write table (FIG. 648) and the processing configuration of the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update (FIG. 649) are the same as those of the first to seventh embodiments. The pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment can be commonly used.

<73rd embodiment>
In the present embodiment, when the setting confirmation processing (step S7914) or the setting value update processing (step S7918) is executed in the main processing (FIG. 619) of the main CPU 63, the pachinko machine 10 can be visually recognized from the front side. This is different from the above-described 65th embodiment in that a predetermined notification is executed on the display unit that becomes Hereinafter, a configuration different from the 65th embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the 65th embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 651 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining various display units provided in an area that can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 52 that forms the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

  As various display units, a special figure display unit 37a, a special figure reservation display unit 37b, a general figure display unit 38a, and a general figure reservation display unit 38b are provided. These functions are the same as those in the 33rd embodiment. The special figure display part 37a and the general figure display part 38a are provided so as to be arranged side by side. Have been.

  The round display section 330 has seven display segments 331 to 337, like the special figure display section 37a and the ordinary figure display section 38a. Each of the seven display segments 331 to 337 is a rod-shaped light-emitting region having the same shape and the same size, and is arranged so as to generate a figure “8”. The light emission of the seven display segments 331 to 337 is individually controlled.

  The round display section 330 reports the number of round games that occur in the open / close execution mode triggered by the jackpot result. In the present embodiment, as a jackpot result that can be selected when a jackpot is won in the jackpot determination process, a first jackpot result that triggers a shift to an open / close execution mode in which the number of round game executions is relatively small, and a round game There is a second jackpot result which triggers the transition to the opening / closing execution mode in which the number of times of execution is relatively large. Specifically, in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the first jackpot result, the round game is executed twice, and in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the second jackpot result, the round game is executed 16 times.

  The first jackpot result includes a jackpot result in which the success / failure lottery mode becomes a low probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends and a support mode becomes a low frequency support mode, and a success / failure lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. There is a jackpot result in which the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode as well as the mode. In addition, the second jackpot result includes a jackpot result in which the success / failure lottery mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode. There is a jackpot result in which the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode as well as the mode.

  FIG. 651 (b) is an explanatory diagram for describing the display contents of the round display section 330.

  When the open / close execution mode triggered by any of the jackpot results is started, the round display unit 330 changes from the non-display state in which all the display segments 331 to 337 are turned off to at least a part of the display segments. The display state is such that the segments 331 to 337 emit light. When the open / close execution mode is continued, the display content displayed on the round display unit 330 at the start of the open / close execution mode is maintained. Then, when the open / close execution mode ends, the round display unit 330 changes from the display state to the non-display state.

  In the open / close execution mode in which two round games are executed, as shown in FIG. 651 (b), the first to fourth display segments 331 to 334 of the round display section 330 are turned off, and the fifth To the seventh display segments 335 to 337 are turned on. In the opening / closing execution mode in which 16 round games are executed, as shown in FIG. 651 (b), the first to fourth display segments 331 to 334 of the round display section 330 are turned on, and the fifth display segment is turned on. To the seventh display segments 335 to 337 are turned off. Thereby, when the opening / closing execution mode is executed on the pachinko machine 10, the manager of the gaming hall checks the round display section 330, and the opening / closing execution mode corresponds to any type of opening / closing execution mode. It is possible to grasp whether it is.

  When the set value update processing (step S7918) is being executed in the main processing (FIG. 619) of the main CPU 63, a corresponding display is performed on the round display section 330. Specifically, when the setting value update process (step S7918) is being performed, as shown in FIG. 651 (b), the first display segment 331, the third display segment 333, The fifth display segment 335 and the seventh display segment 337 are turned off, and the second display segment 332, the fourth display segment 334, and the sixth display segment 336 are turned on.

  The display on the round display unit 330 corresponding to the set value updating process (step S7918) is started when the set value updating process (step S7918) is started, and when the set value updating process (step S7918) is ended. Will be terminated. This display content is different from the display content displayed on the round display unit 330 when the open / close execution mode is executed, and when the setting confirmation process (step S7914) described later is executed, the round display unit is displayed. The display content displayed at 330 is also different. Thus, the administrator of the game hall can easily grasp whether or not the setting value update process (step S7918) is being performed by checking the round display unit 330. Further, such grasping can be performed using the round display unit 330.

  When the setting confirmation process (step S7914) is being executed in the main process (FIG. 619) of the main CPU 63, a corresponding display is performed on the round display unit 330. Specifically, when the setting confirmation process (step S7914) is being executed, as shown in FIG. 651 (b), the first display segment 331, the third display segment 333, The fifth display segment 335 and the seventh display segment 337 are turned on, and the second display segment 332, the fourth display segment 334, and the sixth display segment 336 are turned off.

  The display on the round display unit 330 corresponding to the setting confirmation process (step S7914) is started when the setting confirmation process (step S7914) is started, and when the setting confirmation process (step S7914) is ended. Will be terminated. This display content is different from the display content displayed on the round display unit 330 when the open / close execution mode is executed, and further displayed on the round display unit 330 when the set value update process (step S7918) is executed. The displayed contents are also different. Thus, the administrator of the gaming hall can easily grasp whether or not the setting confirmation process (step S7914) is being executed by confirming the round display section 330. Further, such grasping can be performed using the round display unit 330.

  In the situation where the setting confirmation process (step S7914) and the set value update process (step S7918) are executed in the main process (FIG. 619), the process for advancing the game is not executed. Therefore, the setting confirmation process (step S7914) and the set value updating process (step S7918) are not executed in the situation where the open / close execution mode is being executed. Further, when one of the setting confirmation process (step S7914) and the setting value updating process (step S7918) is being executed, the other is not executed. Therefore, even if the round display section 330 is also used as a display section for performing each display, the situation where each display should be performed does not occur repeatedly.

  Note that the display contents of the round display unit 330 are not limited to the above display contents, and are arbitrary as long as each situation can be distinguished from the display contents of the round display unit 330. One of the display and setting value update processing (step S7918) corresponding to the setting confirmation processing (step S7914) may be configured such that all of the first to seventh display segments 331 to 337 are turned on. In one of the display and setting value update processing (step S7918) corresponding to the setting confirmation processing (step S7914), all of the first to seventh display segments 331 to 337 are turned on and the state is maintained. The other may be configured so that all of the first to seventh display segments 331 to 337 blink.

  Further, instead of the configuration in which the display corresponding to the setting confirmation process and the display corresponding to the setting value updating process are performed in the round display unit 330, the configuration may be such that these displays are performed in the special figure display unit 37a. These displays may be performed on the general-purpose display unit 38a. Further, the display corresponding to the setting confirmation processing is performed on one of the special figure display unit 37a, the general figure display unit 38a, and the round display unit 330, and the setting is performed on the other one display unit. The display corresponding to the value update processing may be performed.

  In addition, the hold information obtained based on the entry of the game ball into the first operation port 33 and the hold information obtained based on the entry of the game ball into the second operation port 34 are separately stored, A first special figure display section in which a game round triggered by the hold information corresponding to the first operation port 33 is executed as the special figure display section 37a, and a game triggered by the hold information corresponding to the second operation port 34 In the configuration in which the second special figure display unit for performing the round is provided, the display corresponding to the setting confirmation processing and the display corresponding to the setting value update processing are performed on the first special figure display unit. The display corresponding to the setting confirmation processing and the display corresponding to the setting value update processing may be performed on the second special figure display unit, and the setting confirmation processing may be performed on the first special figure display unit. Is displayed and the set value is updated on the second special map display section. It may be configured to display corresponding sense is performed.

  In addition, a configuration may be provided in which a dedicated display unit for displaying that the setting confirmation process is being performed is provided, and the fact that the setting value updating process is being performed is displayed. May be provided with a dedicated display unit for displaying a status that the setting confirmation process is being executed or a status that the setting value updating process is being executed. The display unit may be provided. In this case, the display of the dedicated display unit may be controlled by the main CPU 63, or the display may be controlled by the audio light emission control device 81 or the display control device 82.

<74th embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the 65th embodiment in the processing configuration of the main processing and the first timer interrupt processing. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the 65th embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the 65th embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 652 is a flowchart showing the main processing in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processing of steps S9901 to S9923 in the main processing is executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

  First, a power-on initial setting process is executed (step S9901). In the power-on initialization process, for example, the process waits without advancing to the next process until a predetermined time for wait (specifically, one second) elapses after the main process is started. The operation start and the initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed in the predetermined period for the weight. Also, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted.

  After that, an internal function register setting process is executed (step S9902). In the internal function register setting process, as in step S7902 of the main process (FIG. 619) in the 65th embodiment, a first timer interrupt process (FIG. 653) is set to the first interrupt period (specifically, 4 milliseconds), and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 628) is a process that is started by periodically interrupting the main process. Is set to a second interrupt cycle (specifically, 2 milliseconds) which is shorter than the first interrupt cycle.

  After that, interrupt permission is set for the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 628) (step S9903). Thus, the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 628) is started by interrupting at the second interrupt cycle. On the other hand, in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 653), setting of interrupt permission is not performed. As a result, the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 653) is still maintained in a state where the interrupt is prohibited.

  After that, the processing of steps S9904 to S9917 is executed. The processing contents of steps S9904 to S9917 are the same as those of steps S7905 to S7918 of the main processing (FIG. 619) in the 65th embodiment.

  After the processing of steps S9904 to S9917 is completed, interruption permission is set for the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 653) (step S9918). Thus, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 653) is started by interrupting at the first interrupt cycle. That is, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 622) is started by interrupting at the first interrupt period, and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 628) is started by interrupting at the second interrupt period. After that, in steps S9919 to S9923, the same processes as those in steps S7920 to S7924 of the main process (FIG. 619) in the 65th embodiment are executed.

  FIG. 653 is a flowchart showing the first timer interrupt process executed by the main CPU 63 in the present embodiment. It should be noted that the first timer interrupt processing is periodically started at a cycle of 4 milliseconds, which is the first interrupt cycle, as described above. Further, the program corresponding to the first timer interrupt processing is set as a program for specific control.

  First, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit the occurrence of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 653) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 628) (step SA101). By prohibiting the generation of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 653), the generation of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 653) is prohibited, and the execution of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 653) is temporarily stopped. Even if the first interrupt cycle has elapsed, it is possible to prevent the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 653) from being started repeatedly. Further, since the occurrence of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 628) is prohibited, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 628) can be performed with respect to the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 653) even if the second interrupt cycle has elapsed. Can be prevented from being interrupted and activated.

  After that, in steps SA102 to SA121, the same processes as those in steps S8202 to S8221 of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 622) in the 65th embodiment are executed. If an affirmative determination is made in step SA107, or if the processing in step SA121 is performed, an interrupt permission setting for permitting the generation of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 653) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 628) is set. Is performed (step SA122).

  According to the above configuration, in the situation where the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power is being executed in the main processing (FIG. 652), the interrupt of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 628) is permitted, while the first timer interrupt processing is performed. The interrupt shown in FIG. 653 is not permitted. Accordingly, even when the process at the time of starting the supply of the operating power is being executed, the display control of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 by the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 628) can be executed. On the other hand, it is possible to prevent the processing for controlling the progress of the game by the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 653) from being executed.

  In addition, the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 653) is not started by interrupting the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 628), and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 628) is replaced by the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 653). It is not started by interrupting. This makes it possible to prevent the timer interrupt processing from being started repeatedly.

<75th embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration for displaying the base value on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is different from that of the 67th embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the 67th embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the 67th embodiment is basically omitted.

In this embodiment, as in the 67th embodiment, the work area 223 for non-specific control is provided with a normal counter area 231. The normal counter area 231 includes a normal general prize counter 231a, a special special prize counter 231b, a normal first operation counter 231c, a normal second operation counter 231d, and a normal prize counter 231a. Out counter 231e is provided. In a situation other than the open / close execution mode or the high frequency support mode based on the jackpot result, when one game ball enters the general winning opening 31, the value of the normal general winning counter 231a is incremented by one, and When one game ball enters the prize device 32, the value of the special special electric winning counter 231b is incremented by one, and when one game ball enters the first operating port 33, the normal operation is performed. The value of the first operation counter 231c is incremented by 1, and when one game ball enters the second operation port 34, the value of the normal second operation counter 231d is incremented by 1, and the out port 24a is When one game ball enters, the value of the normal out counter 231e is incremented by one. When the values of the various counters 231a to 231e of the normal counter area 231 in the state other than the open / close execution mode and the high frequency support mode based on the jackpot result are K91 to K95, the base values are as follows.
Base value: total number of game balls paid out (K91 × “number of prize balls for winning in general winning opening 31” + K92 × “number of prize balls for winning in special electric winning device 32” + K93 × “to first operating port 33” + K94 × “Number of prize balls for winning to the second operating port 34”) / Ratio of the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K91 + K92 + K93 + K94 + K95).

  In the work area 223 for non-specific control, an operation result storage area 234 is provided in addition to the normal counter area 231. As in the 67th embodiment, the operation result storage area 234 includes current area 311, first history area 312, second history area 313, and third area as storage areas for storing information of base values. A history area 314 is provided (see FIG. 631). The current base area 311 stores the latest base value calculated in the result calculation processing (FIG. 654). In the first history area 312, the final base value in the immediately preceding calculation period is stored. The second base area 313 stores the final base value in the calculation period two times before. The third base area 314 stores the final base value in the calculation period three times before.

  FIG. 654 is a flowchart showing the result calculation processing executed by the main CPU 63 in the present embodiment. The management process (step S8920) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638) is a process corresponding to the non-specific control in step S3803, similarly to the management process (FIG. 575) in the forty-seventh embodiment. Read the program for execution processing. Then, in this management execution process (FIG. 576), a check process is executed in step S3908 as in the above-described 47th embodiment. In this check process, a result calculation process is executed, and a display process (FIG. 655) described later is executed. The processing of steps SA201 to SA217 in the result calculation processing is executed using the non-specific control program and the non-specific control data in the main CPU 63.

  First, a base value calculation process is executed (step SA201). In the calculation process, the base value is calculated using the values of the various counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 as in the 67th embodiment. Here, in the present embodiment, the calculation of the base value is not completed by one processing of the result calculation processing, but is completed by executing the processing of the result calculation processing a plurality of predetermined times.

  Specifically, in a predetermined processing cycle of the result calculation processing in which the calculation of the base value is newly started, in step SA201, the values of the various counters 231a to 231e of the normal counter area 231 are set to K91 to K95. In this case, K91 × “the number of prize balls for winning the general winning opening 31”, K92 × “the number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32”, and K93 × “the number of winning balls for the first operating port 33” The number of prize balls ", K94 ×" the number of prize balls for winning to the second operating port 34 ", and the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K91 + K92 + K93 + K94 + K95) are calculated. Is stored in the in-operation storage area provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control. Thereafter, in step SA201 of the result calculation processing of the processing round after the predetermined processing round, the total payout number of game balls (K91 × “Number of prize balls for winning in the general winning opening 31” + K92 × “Number of prize balls for winning in the special electric winning device 32” + K93 × “Number of prize balls for winning in the first operating port 33” + K94 × “Second operation The number of prize balls for the winning in the mouth 34) is calculated, and the calculation result is stored in the storage area during calculation. Thereafter, in step SA201 of the result calculation process of the result of the processing performed two times after the predetermined processing, the base value is calculated using the various information stored in the storage area during calculation.

  That is, in this embodiment, it is necessary to execute the result calculation process three times in order to calculate one base value. In this case, since the result calculation processing is called and executed in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638), it is executed every time the first interrupt cycle (specifically, 4 milliseconds) elapses. Become. Therefore, one base value is calculated in a cycle of about 12 milliseconds. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the cycle at which one base value is calculated may be a cycle shorter than the 12 ms cycle, or may be a cycle longer than the 12 ms cycle.

  As described above, by performing a plurality of times of the result calculation process to calculate one base value, the processing load for calculating the base value can be reduced. In particular, since the result calculation process is performed as a process corresponding to the non-specific control, the result calculation process is performed not only by reading out the non-specific control program and the non-specific control data, but also by performing the specific control. It is necessary to save information of various registers of the main CPU 63 used in the processing corresponding to the above. In this case, by reducing the processing load for calculating the base value, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the result calculation processing, and consequently the processing load for executing the processing corresponding to the non-specific control. Can be reduced.

  Even in a configuration in which the number of times of the result calculation process is performed a plurality of times to calculate one base value, each piece of information in the process of calculating the base value in each of the results calculation process is a work for non-specific control. The data is written to the area 223. Accordingly, the processing corresponding to the specific control is performed between one processing round and the next processing round of the result calculation processing, and the main CPU 63 used in the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is executed. Even if the information in the various registers is erased, it is possible to store and hold the information during the calculation of the base value.

  Even if the result calculation processing is performed a plurality of times to calculate one base value, the normal counter area 231 is used in the first processing result calculation processing to calculate a new base value. The values of the various counters 231a to 231e are all extracted, and the extracted values are used to calculate the base value of the number of times of calculation. Thus, even if the values of the various counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 are changed during the calculation of one base value, the one base value is not affected by the change in the one base value. Can be calculated.

  After performing the base value calculation process in step SA201, it is determined whether the calculation of one base value has been completed in the result calculation process of the current process (step SA202). If the calculation of one base value is not completed (step SA202: NO), the processing of steps SA203 to SA205 is not executed, so that the base value is not overwritten on the current area 311 of the operation result storage area 234.

  If the calculation of one base value has been completed (step SA202: YES), the base value for which the calculation has been completed is overwritten on the current area 311 (step SA203). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the shift trigger flag provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control (step SA204). In the present embodiment, the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) in a situation other than the open / close execution mode and the high frequency support mode based on the jackpot result is When the calculation of the new base value is completed after the shift reference number (specifically, 60000), the data shift process (step SA216) in the calculation result storage area 234 is executed. In this data shift processing, the information stored in the current area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 in the calculation result storage area 234 are transferred from the second history area 313 to the third history area. After shifting in the order of 314, the first history area 312 → the second history area 313, the current area 311 → the first history area 312, the current area 311 is cleared to “0”. The shift trigger flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the situation is after the total number of the game balls reaches the shift reference number and before the data shift process is executed.

  If “1” is set in the shift trigger flag (step SA204: YES), “1” is set in the shift completion flag provided in the non-specific control work area 223 (step SA205). The shift completion flag is a flag used by the main CPU 63 to specify that the calculation of one base value has been completed after the total number of the gaming balls has reached the shift reference number.

  When a negative determination is made in step SA202, when a negative determination is made in step SA204, or when the process of step SA205 is performed, “1” is set in the management start flag provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control. It is determined whether or not it is set (step SA206). If "1" is not set in the management start flag (step SA206: NO), a process for before management start is executed (step SA207). In the process before management start, the processes of steps S8604 to S8608 of the result calculation process (FIG. 635) in the 67th embodiment are executed.

  When “1” is set in the management start flag (step SA206: YES), it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the shift trigger flag in the work area 223 for non-specific control (step SA208). . If “1” is not set in the shift trigger flag (step SA208: NO), the total number is calculated by summing all the values of the various counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 (step SA209). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated total number is equal to or more than the shift reference number of 60000 (step SA210).

  When an affirmative determination is made in step SA210, the shift trigger flag in the work area 223 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step SA211). Further, “1” is set to the display flag before shift provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control (step SA212). The pre-shift display flag mainly indicates that the pre-shift display corresponding to the total number of gaming balls reaching the shift reference number should be started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. This flag is specified by the side CPU 63.

  If "1" is set in the shift trigger flag and an affirmative determination is made in step SA208, it is determined whether "1" has been set in the shift completion flag in the work area 223 for non-specific control. (Step SA213). The shift completion flag is set to “1” when the calculation of one base value is completed after the total number of the game balls reaches the shift reference number as described above. If an affirmative determination is made in step SA213, the shift trigger flag in the work area 223 for non-specific control is cleared to "0" (step SA214). Further, the calculation completion flag at the time of shift in the work area 223 for non-specific control is cleared to "0" (step SA215).

  Thereafter, a data shift process is executed (step SA216). In the data shift process, information stored in the current area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 in the calculation result storage area 234 is transferred from the second history area 313 to the third history area 314. After shifting in the order of the first history area 312 → the second history area 313, the current area 311 → the first history area 312, the current area 311 is cleared to “0”. Thereby, the final base value in the previous calculation period is stored in the third history area 314 as the final base value in the previous calculation period, and the final base value in the previous calculation period is stored. Is stored in the second history area 313 as the final base value in the calculation period two times before, and the base value calculated after the total number of the game balls reaches the shift reference number in the current calculation period is one time It is stored in the first history area 312 as the final base value in the previous calculation period. Further, the current area 311 is in a state where no base value is stored. In the data shift processing, when shifting the information as described above, the LDIR instruction is used. In the LDIR instruction, the information stored in the storage source area is shifted (copied) to the storage destination area by designating the address of the information storage source area and the address of the information storage destination area. Becomes Thereafter, all the counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 are cleared to "0" (step SA217).

  FIG. 655 is a flowchart showing the display processing according to the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. The processing of steps SA301 to SA320 in the display processing is executed using the non-specific control program and the non-specific control data in the main CPU 63.

  First, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the management start flag in the work area 223 for non-specific control (step SA301). If a negative determination is made in step SA301, as in step S8714 of the display process (FIG. 636) in the 67th embodiment, the base value is read from the current area 311 and the first decimal place in the read base value is read. The numerical value and the calculation result data corresponding to the second decimal place are set in the display target setting area 276 (step SA302). By transmitting display data corresponding to the calculation result data to the display IC 266, the first decimal place number in the base value of the current area 311 is displayed on the third notification display device 203, and the base of the current area 311 is displayed. The number of the second decimal place in the value is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. With the above configuration, in a situation where the management start flag is not set to “1”, the base value in the past calculation period is not reported, and only the base value calculated in the current calculation period is reported. Is done. Note that the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in the case where the base value is notified in a state where the management start flag is not set to “1” are the same as those in the 67th embodiment.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step SA301, the value of the switching timing counter provided in the non-specific control work area 223 is decremented by one (step SA303). The switching timing counter determines the timing at which the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are switched in a situation where the display of the base value is performed by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. This is a counter for specifying at.

  In the present embodiment, the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (ie, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) in a state other than the open / close execution mode and the high frequency support mode based on the jackpot result is In the situation where the shift reference number has not been reached, the notification of the base value stored in each of the current area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 is displayed for the display continuation period (specifically, Is executed for 5 seconds), and the non-display for the interval is performed during the interval period (specifically, 1 second) in order to notify that the switching of the base value to be notified occurs during the notification of the base values. Seconds). Specifically, as the non-display for the interval, all the display segments 321 to 324 are turned off in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, so that the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 201 are turned off. Reference numeral 204 denotes a non-display state. The non-display for the interval is performed before the base value to be notified is switched in a predetermined order of the current area 311 → the first history area 312 → the second history area 313 → the third history area 314, so that the notification is performed. It is possible to make the manager of the gaming hall clearly recognize that the target base value is switched.

  When the total number of the game balls reaches the shift reference number, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 perform the corresponding pre-shift display. Specifically, “A.” is displayed on each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as the display before shift. The display content of “A.” is a display content that is not displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in any of the display continuation period of the display corresponding to the base value and the interval period in which the interval is not displayed. is there. Accordingly, the entire display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in the situation where the display before the shift is performed are set to the display continuation period of the display corresponding to the base value and the interval period of non-display for the interval. Can have different display contents. Therefore, when the manager of the game hall confirms that the pre-shift display is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the total number of the game balls has reached the shift reference number. This makes it possible to grasp that the base value is shifted.

  The display contents of the display before shift are the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in the state where the check display is performed, and the display contents of the state where the flag before management start is not set to “1”. The display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and the setting value update in the situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 641) is being executed. It is also different from the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in the situation where the process (FIG. 642) is being executed. From this point as well, when the manager of the game hall confirms that the display before the shift is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the total number of the game balls becomes the shift reference number. , It is possible to understand that the base value is shifted.

  The execution period of the display before the shift is set to a period longer than the interval period (specifically, one second) in which the non-display for the interval is performed. The execution period of the display before the shift is set to a period longer than the display continuation period (specifically, 5 seconds) of the display corresponding to the base value. Specifically, the execution period of the display before the shift is set to 8 seconds. The present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that the execution period of the display before shift is longer than the interval period and is equal to or shorter than the display continuation period of the display corresponding to the base value, or may be equal to or shorter than the interval period. . However, in order for the administrator of the gaming hall to clearly recognize that the pre-shift display is being performed, it is preferable that the execution period of the pre-shift display is set to a period longer than the interval period.

  As described above, in order to complete the calculation of one base value, it is necessary to execute the result calculation process (FIG. 654) a plurality of times. Specifically, the cycle in which one base value is calculated is The cycle is 12 milliseconds. The data shift process (step SA216) in which the base value information is shifted between the various areas 311 to 314 of the calculation result storage area 234 when the total number of the game balls reaches the shift reference number, It is executed after one base value is newly calculated after reaching. In this case, the execution period of the display before the shift is longer than the longest period required until the data shift process (step SA216) is completed when the total number of the game balls reaches the shift reference number. Is set. Accordingly, in the situation where the display before shift is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the new calculation of one base value and the data shift process of the base value (step SA216) are completed. Becomes possible.

  Returning to the description of the display processing (FIG. 655), when the processing of step SA303 is executed, it is determined whether or not the value of the switching timing counter after subtraction by one is “0”, thereby displaying the base value. It is determined whether the current measurement target period has elapsed among the continuation period, the interval period in which the non-display for the interval is performed, and the execution period of the display before the shift (step SA304). If an affirmative determination is made in step SA304, the display before shift is started by determining whether or not “1” is set to the display flag before shift in the work area 223 for non-specific control. It is determined whether or not (step SA305). If a negative determination is made in step SA305, it is determined whether or not the interval flag provided in the non-specific control work area 223 is set to "1" (step SA306). The interval flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not it is a situation to start the non-display for the interval.

  If a negative determination is made in step SA306, it means that the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 should start notification at the present switching timing as the base value. In this case, the value of the display target counter provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control is incremented by 1 (step SA307). When the value of the display target counter after adding 1 exceeds the maximum value of “3” (step SA308: YES), the value of the display target counter is cleared to “0” (step SA309).

  The display target counter is the first to fourth notification display among the base values stored in the current area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 in the calculation result storage area 234. It is a counter for the base CPU 63 to specify a base value to be notified in the devices 201 to 204. Specifically, when the value of the display target counter is “0”, the base value stored in the current area 311 is the notification target, and when the value of the display target counter is “1”, the first history area is displayed. When the base value stored in 312 is the notification target and the value of the display target counter is “2”, the base value stored in the second history area 313 is the notification target, and the value of the display target counter is “3”. ", The base value stored in the third history area 314 is to be notified.

  If a negative determination is made in step SA308 or if the process in step SA309 is performed, the base value is displayed on the switching timing counter of the work area 223 for non-specific control as a value corresponding to the next switching timing. A value corresponding to the display continuation period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set (step SA310). Thereafter, "1" is set to the interval flag in the work area 223 for non-specific control (step SA311). Thus, if the pre-shift display flag in the non-specific control work area 223 is not set to “1” before the next switching timing, the interval non-shifting flag is set if the next switching timing is reached. The display will be performed.

  Thereafter, a process for setting display data corresponding to the base value to be notified this time in the display target setting area 276 provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control is executed. Specifically, similarly to step S8708 of the display process (FIG. 636) in the 67th embodiment, the display type data corresponding to the value of the display target counter is set in the display target setting area 276 (step SA312). The display type data includes display data for causing the first notification display device 201 to perform display indicating that the notification target of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is a base value, and a base of the notification target. A display indicating which of the current area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 in the calculation result storage area 234 corresponds to the second notification display device 202. And display data to be performed.

  Thereafter, similarly to step S8709 of the display processing (FIG. 636) in the 67th embodiment, the current area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 in the calculation result storage area 234 are displayed. The base value is read from the area corresponding to the value of the display target counter, and the calculation result data corresponding to the first decimal place number and the second decimal place number in the read base value is stored in the display target setting area 276. It is set (step SA313). The calculation result data includes display data for causing the third notification display device 203 to display a number corresponding to the first decimal place in the base value of the notification target, and a number having the second decimal place in the base value of the notification target. And display data for causing the fourth notification display device 204 to perform the display corresponding to.

  By setting the display data including the display type data and the calculation result data in the display target setting area 276, the display data is transferred to the display IC 266 in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639) as in the 67th embodiment. The data is transmitted, and the display corresponding to the display data is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. That is, when the base value of the current area 311 is to be notified, as an example, the display as shown in FIG. 632 (a) is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and the first notification is performed. When the base value of the history area 312 is to be notified, as an example, the display as shown in FIG. 632 (b) is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and the second history area is displayed. When the base value of 313 is to be notified, as an example, the display as shown in FIG. 632 (c) is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and the display of the third history area 314 is performed. When the base value is to be notified, as an example, the display as shown in FIG. 632 (d) is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step SA306 because the interval flag in the work area 223 for non-specific control is set to “1”, the current switching timing is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Means that the target to start the notification is the non-display for the interval. In this case, an interval setting process is executed (step SA314). In the setting process, a value corresponding to the interval period (specifically, one second) is set in the switching timing counter of the work area 223 for non-specific control as a value corresponding to the next switching timing. Thereafter, the interval flag in the work area 223 for non-specific control is cleared to "0" (step SA315). Accordingly, if the pre-shift display flag in the non-specific control work area 223 is not set to “1” before the next switching timing, the base value is set when the next switching timing is reached. The display will be performed.

  Thereafter, interval data is set in the display target setting area 276 provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control (step SA316). The interval data is data for causing the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 to perform the non-display for the interval. Specifically, all of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are used. This is data for turning off the display segments 321 to 324. By setting the interval data as the display data in the display target setting area 276, the interval data is transmitted to the display IC 266 in the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 639), and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 201 are displayed. 204 are in a non-display state. The administrator of the game hall, which has confirmed that the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are in the non-display state, can grasp that it is the interval period.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step SA305 because the pre-shift display flag in the non-specific control work area 223 has been set to “1”, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 perform the current determination. This means that the target to start the notification at the timing of the switching is the display before shift. In this case, a setting process of the display period before the shift is executed (step SA317). In the setting process, a value corresponding to the execution period of the display before shift (specifically, 8 seconds) is set in the switching timing counter of the work area 223 for non-specific control as a value corresponding to the next switching timing.

  Thereafter, the interval flag in the non-specific control work area 223 is cleared to "0", and the pre-shift display flag in the non-specific control work area 223 is cleared to "0" (step SA318). The maximum value "3" is set to the display target counter in the work area 223 (step SA319). If the execution period of the pre-shift display has elapsed by clearing the interval flag to “0”, the next notification target becomes the base value. Then, by setting the maximum value in the display target counter, if a negative determination is made in step SA306 to notify the base value, the display target counter after adding 1 to the value of the display target counter in step SA307. Is greater than the maximum value, the affirmative determination is made in step SA308, and the value of the display target counter is cleared to "0". Accordingly, when the execution period of the display before shift has elapsed, the next notification target becomes the base value, and the base value becomes the base value of the current area 311 of the calculation result storage area 234.

  That is, when the display before the shift is performed, the notification is started from the notification of the base value regardless of whether the notification target before the display before the shift is the base value or the non-display for the interval. Thus, when the display before the shift is completed, the base value can be confirmed without waiting for the elapse of the interval period. In addition, the base value which is the last notification target before the pre-shift display is performed in any of the current area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 of the calculation result storage area 234. Even if there is, when the pre-shift display ends, the notification is started from the base value of the current area 311. This makes it possible to return the notification order of the base values in the current area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 to the first notification order, and immediately after the base value shift occurs. Can be easily recognized by the manager of the game hall.

  After that, the display data before shift is set in the display target setting area 276 provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control (step SA320). The pre-shift display data is data for causing the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 to perform a pre-shift display, and specifically, “ A. "is displayed. By setting the display data before shift in the display target setting area 276 as the display data, the display data before shift is transmitted to the display IC 266 in the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 639), and the first to fourth notification information is displayed. “A.” is displayed on each of the display devices 201 to 204. The administrator of the gaming hall that has confirmed that the pre-shift display is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 can grasp the execution period of the pre-shift display. .

  Next, the base values of the various areas 311 to 314 are notified on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in a situation where the management start flag is set to “1” with reference to the time chart of FIG. This will be described. FIG. 656 (a) shows a period in which the base value stored in the current area 311 is notified on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and FIG. 656 (b) stores the base value in the first history area 312. FIG. 656 (c) shows the base value stored in the second history area 313 indicating the first to fourth notifications. 656 (d) shows the base value stored in the third history area 314, which is notified by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. FIG. FIG. 656 (e) shows a period in which non-display for an interval is performed by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and FIG. 656 (f) shows a first to fourth notification display device. Period during which display before shift is performed in 201 to 204 FIG. 656 (g) shows the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA in a state other than the open / close execution mode or the high frequency support mode based on the jackpot result after the base value calculation period is newly started. The timing at which (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) reaches the shift reference number (specifically, 60000).

  At the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 656 (a), the notification of the base value stored in the current area 311 is started by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. At the time of this notification, as shown in FIG. 632 (a), a display indicating that the base value is a notification target is performed on the first notification display device 201, and is stored in the current area 311 on the second notification display device 202. A display indicating that the base value is a notification target is performed, and a display corresponding to the base value stored in the current area 311 is performed on the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204.

  After that, when the display continuation period elapses from the timing t1 at the timing t2, the notification of the base value stored in the current area 311 is ended as shown in FIG. Thus, the non-display for the interval is started in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. This non-display for the interval is ended as shown in FIG. 656 (e) at the timing t3 when the interval period has elapsed from the timing t2.

  At the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 656 (b), the notification of the base value stored in the first history area 312 is started by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. At the time of this notification, as shown in FIG. 632 (b), a display indicating that the base value is a notification target is performed on the first notification display device 201, and on the second notification display device 202, the first history area 312 is displayed. A display indicating that the stored base value is a notification target is performed, and a display corresponding to the base value stored in the first history area 312 is displayed on the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204. Is

  Thereafter, when the display continuation period elapses from the timing of t3 at the timing of t4, the notification of the base value stored in the first history area 312 is terminated as shown in FIG. As shown in (1), non-display for an interval is started in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. The non-display for the interval is ended at the timing t5 when the interval period has elapsed from the timing t4, as shown in FIG. 656 (e).

  At the timing of t5, as shown in FIG. 656 (c), the notification of the base value stored in the second history area 313 is started by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. At the time of this notification, as shown in FIG. 632 (c), a display indicating that the base value is a notification target is performed on the first notification display device 201, and a second history area 313 is displayed on the second notification display device 202. A display indicating that the stored base value is a notification target is performed, and a display corresponding to the base value stored in the second history area 313 is displayed on the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204. Is

  Thereafter, when the display continuation period elapses from the timing of t5 at the timing of t6, the notification of the base value stored in the second history area 313 is terminated as shown in FIG. As shown in (1), non-display for an interval is started in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. This non-display for the interval is ended at the timing t7 when the interval period has elapsed from the timing t6, as shown in FIG. 656 (e).

  At the timing of t7, as shown in FIG. 656 (d), the notification of the base value stored in the third history area 314 is started by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. At the time of this notification, as shown in FIG. 632 (d), a display indicating that the base value is a notification target is performed on the first notification display device 201, and a third history area 314 is displayed on the second notification display device 202. A display indicating that the stored base value is a notification target is performed, and a display corresponding to the base value stored in the third history area 314 is displayed on the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204. Will be

  Thereafter, when the display continuation period elapses from the timing of t7 at the timing of t8, the notification of the base value stored in the third history area 314 is terminated as shown in FIG. As shown in (1), non-display for an interval is started in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. This non-display for the interval is ended at the timing t9 when the interval period has elapsed from the timing t8, as shown in FIG. 656 (e).

  Thereafter, the display corresponding to the base value stored in the current area 311 as shown in FIG. 656 (a) is displayed over the timing from t9 to t10 in the same manner as the timing from t1 to t2, as shown in FIG. The display is performed by the four notification display devices 201 to 204, and the non-display of the interval is performed in the same manner as the timing of t2 to t3 over the timing of t10 to t11, as shown in FIG. This is performed by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Then, at the timing of t11, as in the timing of t3, the display corresponding to the base value stored in the first history area 312 as shown in FIG. 656 (b) is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It starts with.

  Thereafter, at a timing t12, which is a timing when the display corresponding to the base value stored in the first history area 312 is being performed, as shown in FIG. 656 (g), a calculation period of the base value is newly added. The total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) is shifted in a state other than the open / close execution mode or the high frequency support mode based on the jackpot result since the start. The reference number (specifically, 60000 pieces) is reached. However, at the timing of t12, since the display continuation period has not elapsed since the display corresponding to the base value of the first history area 312 was started at the timing of t11, as shown in FIG. The display corresponding to the base value in one history area 312 is continued. Thereby, even if the timing at which the total number of the game balls reaches the shift reference number is arbitrary, the display of the current notification target on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is performed as scheduled. After performing over the period, it is possible to start the pre-shift display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  Thereafter, when the display continuation period elapses from the timing t11 at the timing t13, the notification of the base value stored in the first history area 312 is ended as shown in FIG. 656 (b), and the timing shown in FIG. As shown in (1), the display before shift is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. In addition, even if the total number of the game balls reaches the shift reference number while the notification of the other base value is being performed, if the display continuation of the notification of the base value has elapsed, the shift before the shift is performed. The display is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Even if the total number of the game balls reaches the shift reference number while the interval non-display is being performed, the display before the shift is displayed when the interval period for the interval non-display has elapsed. The process starts with the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  After that, the pre-shift display execution period elapses from the timing t13 at the timing t14, and the pre-shift display ends as shown in FIG. 656 (f), and the current area 311 as shown in FIG. 656 (a). Of the base value stored in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is started. That is, even if the notification target when the pre-shift display is started is the base value of the first history area 312, when the display before the shift ends, the notification corresponds to the first notification order in the base value notification order. Notification is started from the base value of the current area 311.

  Thereafter, when the display continuation period elapses from the timing of t14 at the timing of t15, the notification of the base value stored in the current area 311 is ended as shown in FIG. The non-display for the interval is started in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as described above. This non-display for the interval is ended at the timing of t16 when the interval period has elapsed from the timing of t15 as shown in FIG. 656 (e), and the base of the first history area 312 as shown in FIG. The display corresponding to the value is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  The base values stored in the current area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 of the calculation result storage area 234 are sequentially displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Is done. Accordingly, it is possible to individually notify the respective base values corresponding to different periods while suppressing the number of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. In addition, since each base value is displayed in a predetermined order, it becomes easier for the manager of the gaming hall to grasp the type of the base value to be displayed.

  The display order of the base values is determined in association with each of the current area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 in the calculation result storage area 234. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration for specifying the type of the base value to be displayed when the display of the base value is newly started.

  Before the state in which one base value is displayed is changed to the state in which the next base value is displayed, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are in a non-display state for intervals. This allows the manager of the gaming hall to clearly know that the type of the base value to be displayed has been switched.

  In the configuration in which the base values are sequentially displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, in any of the open / close execution mode and the high frequency support mode based on the jackpot result after the base value calculation period is newly started. If the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) reaches the shift reference number (specifically, 60000 pieces) in the absence of the The pre-shift display is performed on the fourth to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Thus, it is possible to use the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 to notify that the total number of the gaming balls has reached the shift reference number.

  When the total number of the game balls reaches the shift reference number, the base value stored in the current area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 in the calculation result storage area 234. Is shifted to the storage area on the rear side of the storage order, the various counters 231a to 231e of the normal counter area 231 are cleared to "0", and the calculation of the base value for a new calculation period is started. Therefore, when the total number of the game balls reaches the shift reference number, the notification content of the base value in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is changed. In this case, if the total number of the game balls reaches the shift reference number, the base value is restarted after the display before the shift is performed, so that the total number of the game balls reaches the shift reference number. As a result, it becomes possible for the manager of the gaming hall to recognize that the notification content of the base value is changed.

  If the total number of the game balls reaches the shift reference number while the base value is being displayed, the display before the shift is started after the display continuation period of the display of the base value has elapsed. As a result, it is possible to start the pre-shift display while not disturbing the display of the base value already performed.

  In a configuration in which a plurality of base values stored in the calculation result storage area 234 are sequentially displayed in a predetermined display order, after the display before the shift is performed, the display is performed from the base value in the first order in the predetermined display order. Thereby, when the total number of the game balls reaches the shift reference number, it is possible to confirm again from the base value of the first order in the predetermined display order.

  In the configuration in which the base value is calculated by the result calculation process (FIG. 654), the result calculation process is executed a plurality of times from the start of calculation of one base value to the completion of the calculation of the base value. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for executing the result calculation process, compared to a configuration in which the calculation of the base value is completed in one result calculation process.

  When the total number of the game balls reaches the shift reference number, the base value is newly derived at the timing when the shift reference number is reached, and then the base value data shift processing (step SA216) is executed. When the total number of the game balls reaches the shift reference number, the display before shift is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Thereby, in a situation where the base value is newly derived and the data shift processing of the base value is being performed, it is possible to perform the pre-shift display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and Even if the reference number has been reached, it is possible to prevent the display of the previous base value from continuing as it is.

  It should be noted that the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA in a state other than the open / close execution mode or the high frequency support mode based on the jackpot result since the start of the calculation period of the base value (that is, the total number of game balls discharged to the game area PA) Until the total number of game balls reaches the initial reference number (specifically, 6000), similarly to the 67th embodiment, when the base value of the current area 311 is displayed, the first to fourth notification is performed. It is good also as a structure in which initial display of a calculation is performed by the display devices 201-204 for display.

  When the total number of the game balls reaches the shift reference number (specifically, 60000 pieces) in a state where the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are not displayed for the interval, the shift is immediately performed. When the previous display is started and the base value is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the total number of the gaming balls reaches the shift reference number (specifically, 60000). In such a case, the display before shift may be started when the display continuation period of the display of the base value has elapsed. As a result, it is possible to start the pre-shift display early, while preventing the display of the base value already being performed from being terminated halfway.

  Further, the display contents of the display before the shift are not limited to those described above, and the display contents of at least a part of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 can be displayed in other situations. However, the entire display content of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 may be a display content that is not displayed in other situations. When the display before shift is performed, at least one display segment 321 to 324 is turned on in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. All of the display segments 321 to 324 may be turned off for a part of the four notification display devices 201 to 204. Further, when the display before the shift is performed, the display content of the display before the shift is not limited to the configuration in which the display content of the display before the shift is maintained throughout the execution period of the display before the shift, and the display content of the display before the shift is changed to the display before the shift. May be blinked over the execution period of.

  In addition, the present invention is not limited to the configuration in which the execution period of the display before the shift is fixed. The execution period of the pre-shift display may be changed according to the period required until the data shift processing of the base value is completed.

  When the total number of the game balls reaches the shift reference number, the last of the display circles of the base values performed by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 at that time. The display before shift may be started after the display of the base value of the order (that is, the base value stored in the third history area 314) is completed. This makes it possible to start a new display rotation of each base value via the display before shift after the display rotation of each base value is completed.

  When the total number of the game balls reaches the shift reference number, the calculation of the base value is started using the various counters 231a to 231e of the normal counter area 231 at that time, and the calculation of the base value is started. The data shift process (step SA216) may be performed when the process is completed. In this case, it is possible to accurately calculate the base value at the timing when the total number of the game balls reaches the shift reference number.

  Also, in the interval period, instead of performing the interval non-display, a predetermined display is performed on at least a part of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and the first to fourth notification display is performed. The entire display of the devices 201 to 204 may be configured to perform an interval display having display contents different from display contents that may occur in a situation where the base value is notified. For example, in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, only the central display segment 321 to 324 may be turned on to display “-”, and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 may be displayed. A configuration may be such that "-" is displayed on some of the four notification display devices 201 to 204 and the remaining display devices are in a non-display state.

  Further, the configuration may be such that the interval period is not set. In this case, when the display continuation period has elapsed for one base value, the display of the base values to be displayed in the next order is started by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Become.

<Sixty-sixth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the start timing of the display before the shift is different from that of the 75th embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the 75th embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the 75th embodiment is basically omitted.

  The start timing of the pre-shift display in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 657 (a) shows a period in which the base value stored in the current area 311 is notified on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and FIG. 657 (b) stores the base value in the first history area 312. FIG. 657 (c) shows that the base value stored in the second history area 313 is the first to fourth notification. 657 (d) shows the base value stored in the third history area 314 on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. FIG. FIG. 657 (e) shows a period during which non-display for an interval is performed by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and FIG. 657 (f) shows a first to fourth notification display device. Period during which display before shift is performed in 201 to 204 FIG. 657 (g) shows the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA in a state other than the open / close execution mode or the high frequency support mode based on the jackpot result after the base value calculation period is newly started. The timing at which (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) reaches the shift reference number (specifically, 60000).

  At the timings t1 to t11, as in the time charts in FIGS. The display corresponding to the base value over the interval and the execution of the non-display for the interval during the interval period are repeated, and the display corresponding to the base value is displayed in the current area 311 → the first history area 312 → the second history of the calculation result storage area 234. It is repeated in the order of area 313 → third history area 314. Then, at the timing of t11, as shown in FIG. 657 (b), the display corresponding to the base value stored in the first history area 312 is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  Thereafter, at a timing t12, which is a timing when the display corresponding to the base value stored in the first history area 312 is being performed, as shown in FIG. 657 (g), the calculation period of the base value is newly added. The total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) is shifted in a state other than the open / close execution mode or the high frequency support mode based on the jackpot result since the start. The reference number (specifically, 60000 pieces) is reached. In this case, at the timing of t12, although the display continuation period has not elapsed since the display corresponding to the base value of the first history area 312 was started at the timing of t11, as shown in FIG. 657 (b). The notification of the base value stored in the first history area 312 is ended, and the display before shift is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as shown in FIG.

  Even if the total number of the game balls reaches the shift reference number while other base values are being notified, the display before shift is displayed at the timing at the first to fourth notification display devices 201. To 204. Further, even if the total number of the game balls reaches the shift reference number while the interval non-display is being performed, the display before the shift is displayed at the timing at the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It starts with.

  Thereafter, when the execution period of the display before shift elapses from the timing of t12 at the timing of t13, the display before shift is terminated as shown in FIG. 657 (f), and the current area 311 is displayed as shown in FIG. 657 (a). Of the base value stored in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is started. That is, even if the notification target when the pre-shift display is started is the base value of the first history area 312, when the display before the shift ends, the notification corresponds to the first notification order in the base value notification order. Notification is started from the base value of the current area 311.

  Thereafter, when the display continuation period elapses from the timing of t13 at the timing of t14, the notification of the base value stored in the current area 311 is ended as shown in FIG. The non-display for the interval is started in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as described above. This non-display for the interval ends at the timing of t15, which is the timing when the interval period has elapsed from the timing of t14, as shown in FIG. 657 (e), and as shown in FIG. The display corresponding to the value is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  According to the above configuration, the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA in a state other than the open / close execution mode or the high-frequency support mode based on the jackpot result after the base value calculation period is newly started (that is, the game number) When the total number of game balls supplied to the area PA reaches the shift reference number (specifically, 60000 pieces), the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 before the shift at that timing. Display starts. As a result, the pre-shift display can be started early, and it is possible to notify early that the total number of the gaming balls has reached the shift reference number.

<77th embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the main processing executed by the main CPU 63 is different from that of the 67th embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the 67th embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the 67th embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 658 is a flowchart showing main processing in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. The processing of steps SA401 to SA425 in the main processing is executed by using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

  First, power-on initial setting processing is executed (step SA401). In the power-on initialization process, for example, the process waits without advancing to the next process until a predetermined time for wait (specifically, one second) elapses after the main process is started. The operation start and the initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed in the predetermined period for the weight. Also, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted.

  Thereafter, an internal function register setting process is executed (step SA402). In the internal function register setting process, similarly to the 67th embodiment, the interrupt cycle of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638), which is a process started by interrupting the main process periodically, is set to the first interrupt cycle (FIG. 638). (Specifically, 4 milliseconds), and the interrupt cycle of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639), which is a process that is started by interrupting the main process periodically, is set to be longer than the first interrupt cycle. The second interrupt cycle (specifically, 2 milliseconds), which is a short cycle, is set.

  That is, in the present embodiment, similarly to the 67th embodiment, the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 639) are performed as the timer interrupt processing so that the interrupt cycle is relatively long. Exists. The first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639) are both started by interrupting the main process. The second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639) is started by interrupting the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638). On the other hand, the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) is not activated by interrupting the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 639). In a situation where both the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 639) are not executed, if both the first interrupt cycle and the second interrupt cycle have elapsed, the cycle is determined. Irrespective of the lapse order of the process, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639) is started first. In this regard, it can be said that the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639) is a process that is started prior to the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) may be started prior to the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 639).

  In the internal function register setting processing, the first interrupt cycle of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) is set in a predetermined register of the main CPU 63, and the second interrupt cycle of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 639) is mainly set. It is set in a specific register of the side CPU 63. Further, in the internal function register setting process, in addition to the setting of the first and second interrupt cycles, for example, a setting process of a numerical range of various counters such as a numerical range of the hit random number counter C1 is executed.

  After that, “1” is set in the start-up processing flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step SA403). As in the 67th embodiment, even if the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) is started, the power-out processing flag indicates the power failure among the various processings set in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638). While the processing for monitoring, updating the various counters, and performing the fraud monitoring is executed, it is determined that the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) should be ended without executing the processing for advancing the game. This flag is specified by the main CPU 63.

  As for the flag during the start-up processing, the processing (steps SA401 to SA418) at the start of the supply of the operating power is started in the main processing (FIG. 658) and the interruption permission (step SA404) is performed as in the 67th embodiment. "1" is set in advance, and "0" is cleared before the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power ends and the remaining processing (steps SA422 to SA425) is started. In this case, as in the 67th embodiment, in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638), if the start-up process flag is set to “1”, the processes of steps S8907 to S8920 are not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the processing for advancing the game from being executed in the situation where the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power (steps SA401 to SA418) is being executed. On the other hand, as described above, in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638), even if the start-up processing flag is set to “1”, the processing from step S8901 to step S8905 is executed, thereby reducing the operating power. Even when the processing at the start of supply (step SA401 to step SA418) is being executed, the power failure monitoring is performed, and the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the random number initial value counter The CINI is updated, and fraud detection is further performed.

  In particular, even when the start-up processing flag is set to “1”, the power failure information storage processing (step S8901) is executed to start the operation power supply processing (steps SA401 to SA418). ) Is executed, even if a power failure occurs, the power failure processing can be executed for the power failure. In the process at the time of power failure, similarly to the 67th embodiment, the power failure flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to “1”, the checksum is calculated, and the calculated checksum is used for the specific control. Since the power is stored in the work area 221, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an abnormality in the main RAM 65 from being identified when the supply of the operating power is restarted. Accordingly, when a power failure occurs during the setting confirmation processing (step SA415) or the setting value update processing (step SA418), the fact that a power failure has occurred during these setting-related processing is indicated by the supply of the next operating power. It can be specified at the start.

  Incidentally, in the situation where the setting confirmation processing (step SA415) or the setting value update processing (step SA418) is being executed, both the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 639) are performed. The interrupt is not prohibited and can be interrupted at an arbitrary timing. In this case, the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) or the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 639) in the main processing (FIG. 658) including the setting confirmation processing (step SA415) and the setting value updating processing (step SA418). In the case of being activated by interruption, the information of the return address of the main processing (FIG. 658) for returning after the completion of the timer interrupt processing to be activated is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control. The information of various registers of the main CPU 63 immediately before the start of the timer interrupt process is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control. Then, when the timer interrupt processing to be activated ends, the process returns to the main processing (FIG. 658) corresponding to the information of the return address saved in the stack area 222 for specific control, and The information saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is restored to various registers of the main CPU 63.

  After setting the start-up processing flag to “1” in step SA403, interruption permission is set (step SA404). Thus, the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) is started by interrupting at the first interrupt cycle, and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 639) is started by interrupting at the second interrupt cycle. However, since “1” is set in the start-up process flag in step SA403, even if the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638) is started, various processes of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638) are started. Among them, the processing for monitoring the power failure, updating the various counters, and monitoring the illegality is executed, but the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) is ended without executing the processing for proceeding the game. .

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c has been pressed (step SA405). That is, it is determined whether or not the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed while the reset button 68c is being pressed, and the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. Here, in the present embodiment, similar to the 67th embodiment, the main control device 60 is provided with the setting key insertion section 68a and the reset button 68c, but is not provided with the update button 68b. Further, the main control device 60 is provided with first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in the same manner as in the forty-third embodiment, instead of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c.

  If the reset button 68c has not been pressed (step SA405: NO), it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the power failure flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step SA406). When a power failure process is performed in the power failure information storage process (step S8901) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638), “1” is set in the power failure flag. The power failure flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the processing at the time of power failure was properly performed at the time of the previous power-off.

  If “1” is set in the power failure flag (step SA406: YES), a checksum is calculated for the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 (step SA407). The method of calculating the checksum is the same as in the 65th embodiment. Thereafter, the work area 221 for the specific control and the work area 221 for the specific control calculated in the power outage process executed immediately before the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped and stored in the work area 221 for the specific control are performed. The checksum for the stack area 222 is read, and the read checksum is compared with the checksum calculated in step SA407 (step SA408). Then, it is determined whether or not the checksums match (step SA409).

  If a negative determination is made in step SA406 or step SA409, that is, if the power failure flag is not set to “1” or the checksums do not match, the game stop flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control Is set to "1" (step SA410). When the game stop flag is set to “1”, the processes of steps S8901 to S8905 are executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638), while an affirmative determination is made in step S8906 to perform steps S8907 to S8907. The processing of S8920 is not executed. Accordingly, when the power failure flag is not set to “1” because the power failure processing was not properly performed at the time of the previous power shutdown, or when the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are performed. If at least one of the checksums does not match due to a change in the storage state of the information since the last power-off, processing for power failure monitoring, updating of various counters, and illegal monitoring is executed. On the other hand, processing for advancing the game is not executed.

  Thereafter, at the start of the supply of the operating power, an abnormal command indicating that an abnormality has occurred with respect to the power failure flag or the checksum is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step SA411). Upon receiving the abnormal command, the sound light emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 to emit light in a manner corresponding to the information abnormality at the start of the supply of the operating power, and “change the setting from the speaker unit 54. Is output. In addition, a character image “Please change the setting.” Is displayed on the symbol display device 41. These notifications are maintained until the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and is terminated when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, even if the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is temporarily stopped, the above-described notification will be made when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is restarted until the set value updating process (step SA418) is executed. The configuration may be continued.

  If the power failure flag is set to “1” and the checksum is normal (step SA406 and step SA409: YES), “1” is set to the setting update display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control. It is determined whether or not the process has been performed (step SA412). The setting update display flag is a flag for specifying by the main CPU 63 that the setting value update process (step SA418) is being executed as in the 67th embodiment, and “1” is set to the setting update display flag. When the setting is set, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 perform a display indicating that the setting value is being updated and a display indicating the setting value being updated. The setting update display flag is a flag that is set to “1” when the setting value updating process (step SA418) is started and is cleared to “0” when the setting value updating process (step SA418) is ended. In a situation where the setting value update process (step SA418) is not executed, basically, the setting update display flag is not set to “1”. However, if the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped while the setting value update process (step SA418) is being executed, the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started thereafter. , The setting update display flag is set to "1". When the setting update display flag is set to "1", the RAM clear processing (step SA416) is executed, or the setting update display flag is cleared to "0" in the setting value update processing (step SA418). It is maintained until executed.

  If a negative determination is made in step SA412 that “1” has not been set in the setting update display flag, it is determined whether the setting key insertion unit 68a has been turned ON using the setting key (step SA413). ). When the setting key insertion section 68a is turned ON using the setting key (step SA413: YES), a setting confirmation process is executed (step SA415). Further, even when the setting key insertion section 68a is not turned ON using the setting key (step SA413: NO), the setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 221 for the specific control is set to “1”. Is set (step SA414: YES), a setting confirmation process is executed (step SA415). The setting confirmation processing will be described later.

  The setting confirmation display flag is a flag for specifying by the main CPU 63 that the setting confirmation processing (step SA415) is being executed as in the 67th embodiment, and “1” is set in the setting confirmation display flag. When set, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 perform a display indicating that the setting value is being checked and a display indicating the currently set value. . The setting confirmation display flag is a flag that is set to “1” when the setting confirmation processing (step SA415) is started and is cleared to “0” when the setting confirmation processing (step SA415) is ended. In a situation where the setting confirmation process (step SA415) is not executed, basically, the setting confirmation display flag is not set to “1”. However, if the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped while the setting confirmation process (step SA415) is being executed, the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started thereafter. , The setting confirmation display flag is set to "1". When the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1", the RAM clear processing (step SA416) is executed, or the setting confirmation display flag is cleared to "0" in the setting confirmation processing (step SA415). It is maintained until executed.

  If the reset button 68c is pressed (step SA405: YES), a RAM clear process is executed (step SA416). In the RAM clearing process, except for an area (specifically, a setting reference area 341 described later) in which a setting value information indicating a setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the work area 221 for the specific control. The work area 221 is cleared to "0" and the initial setting is executed. As a result, since the area indicating whether the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the high probability mode is cleared to “0”, the winning / rejecting lottery is performed regardless of the winning / rejecting lottery mode immediately before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. The mode is a low probability mode. In addition, the game is not executed, the opening / closing execution mode is not executed, and the general-purpose display unit 38a is not variably displayed, and the general electric functioning object 34a is in the closed state. Situation. In addition, since the hold storage area 65a and the ordinary power hold area 65c provided in the work area 221 for specific control are also cleared to "0", the hold information for the special figure display unit 37a is erased and the general figure display unit is cleared. The hold information for 38a is deleted. Further, the setting update display flag and the setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 221 for the specific control are cleared to “0”. Further, a setting update area 342 described later provided in the specific control work area 221 is cleared to “0”. In the RAM clearing process, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0" and initialization is performed. In the RAM clearing process, initialization is performed after various registers of the main CPU 63 are also cleared to "0". In this initial setting, a process similar to the internal function register setting process in step SA402 is executed. Note that the process for clearing “0” and the process for performing initial setting are not executed for the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion section 68a has been turned ON using the setting key (step SA417). If the ON operation has been performed (step SA417: YES), a set value update process is executed (step SA418). The setting value update processing will be described later.

  When the processing in step SA411 is performed, when a negative determination is made in step SA414, when the processing in step SA415 is performed, when the negative determination is made in step SA417, or when the processing in step SA418 is performed, the specific control is performed. The information corresponding to the initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the check-in-progress counter provided in the work area 221 (step SA419). The value set in the counter during the check is decremented by one each time the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639) is started, similarly to the 67th embodiment. When a value of 1 or more is set in the check-in-progress counter, the check display is continued on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as in the 67th embodiment.

  According to the above configuration, when the supply of the operation power to the main CPU 63 is started, the process at the start of the supply of the operation power (steps SA401 to SA418) is completed in the main CPU 63 and the remaining process is performed. Before (Step SA422 to Step SA425) is started, an initial check period is started. Accordingly, it is not necessary to control the initial check period in the situation where the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power is performed, so that the processing load in the situation where the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power is being performed is reduced. It becomes possible.

  Also, the setting confirmation process (step SA415) and the setting value update process (step SA418) are executed as the process at the start of the supply of the operating power, whereas the process at the start of the supply of the operating power is performed during the initial check period. Started after finishing. Thereby, even if the display for check is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 during the initial check period, the display of the set value using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is performed. It is possible to prevent the influence.

  Thereafter, the start-up processing flag in the specific control work area 221 is cleared to "0" (step SA420). When the start-up processing flag is cleared to “0”, a negative determination is made in step S8906 when the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) is activated, so that not only the processing in steps S8901 to S8905 is performed. The processing from step S8907 to step S8920 is executed, and the state in which the processing for advancing the game is not executed is released. In step SA420, the power failure flag in the work area 221 for specific control is also cleared to "0".

  Thereafter, a return command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step SA421). The content of the information included in the return command and the processing content of the sound emission control device 81 when the return command is received are the same as those in step S7920 of the main process (FIG. 619) in the 65th embodiment.

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to the remaining process of steps SA422 to SA425. That is, the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639). Will result in a residual time. The remaining time varies in accordance with the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process. The remaining process of steps SA422 to SA425 is repeatedly executed using the irregular time. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining processes in steps SA422 to SA425 are irregular processes that are executed irregularly. In steps SA422 to SA425, the same processes as those in steps S113 to S116 of the main process (FIG. 514) in the 33rd embodiment are executed.

  Next, a configuration related to a set value in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 659 is an explanatory diagram for describing the contents of a storage area related to set values provided in the work area 221 for specific control.

  As shown in FIG. 659, the work area 221 for specific control is provided with a setting reference area 341 and a setting update area 342. The setting reference area 341 is a storage area in which information for specifying the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 by the main CPU 63 is stored. In step S503 in the special figure change start process (FIG. 518), the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is specified based on the information stored in the setting reference area 341 and the hit / failure table corresponding to the specified setting value is read. Then, in step S504, the read / write determination table is executed using the read read / write table. In a situation where the setting confirmation display flag in the specific control work area 221 is set to “1”, the display of the set value corresponding to the information stored in the setting reference area 341 is displayed as the fourth notification display. This is performed in the device 204.

  The setting reference area 341 stores numerical value information as setting value information. Specifically, when the numerical information of “1” is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is “Setting 1”. When the numerical information “2” is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 2”. When the numerical information “3” is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 3”. When the numerical information “4” is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 4”. When the numerical information “5” is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 5”. When the numerical information of “6” is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 6”.

  The setting update area 342 stores information on the setting value that is being updated in the setting value update process (step SA418). That is, in the setting value update processing (step SA418), the information of the setting value to be selected is updated every time the reset button 68c is pressed. The set value information stored in the setting update area 342 is changed without changing the value information. This makes it possible to update the set value while storing and holding the information of the set value set before the start of the set value update process (step SA418). When the setting value updating process (step SA418) is completed, the setting value information stored in the setting updating area 342 at that time is overwritten on the setting reference area 341. As a result, the set value resulting from the update in the set value update process (step SA418) is set as the current set value of the pachinko machine 10. When the setting update display flag in the specific control work area 221 is set to “1”, the display of the set value corresponding to the information stored in the setting update area 342 is displayed as the fourth notification display. This is performed in the device 204.

  Numerical information is stored in the setting update area 342 as setting value information. Specifically, when the numerical information “1” is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value of the update target (selection target or change target) is “setting 1”. When the numerical information “2” is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated is “setting 2”. When the numerical information of “3” is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated is “setting 3”. When the numerical information “4” is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated is “setting 4”. When the numerical information of “5” is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated is “setting 5”. When the numerical information of “6” is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated is “setting 6”.

  FIG. 660 is a flowchart showing the setting confirmation processing executed in step SA415 of the main processing (FIG. 658). The processing of steps SA501 to SA504 in the setting confirmation processing is executed using the specific control program and the specific control data in the main CPU 63.

  On condition that "1" is not set in the setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step SA501: NO), "1" is set in the setting confirmation display flag (step SA502). . When the setting confirmation display flag is set to “1”, an affirmative determination is made in step S9005 of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 639), whereby the setting processing for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting confirmation is performed. (Step S9006) is executed.

  FIG. 661 is a flowchart showing the setting processing for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting confirmation. Note that the processing of steps SA601 to SA603 in the setting processing is executed by using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

  First, display data of a set value corresponding to the set value information stored in the setting reference area 341 of the work area 221 for specific control is read (step SA601). Then, the read display data of the set value is set in the fifth display data buffer 275 in the work area 221 for specific control as display data to be applied to the fourth notification display device 204 (step SA602). In addition, display data for causing the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 to perform a display indicating that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being checked is set in the fifth display data buffer 275. (Step SA603).

  By executing the setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting confirmation as described above, the display corresponding to the display data set in the fifth display data buffer 275 in step SA603 is displayed in the first to the fifth positions. A display corresponding to the display data set in the fifth display data buffer 275 in step SA602 is performed by the fourth notification display device 204, while the third notification display devices 201 to 203 perform the display. Thereby, as shown in an explanatory diagram of FIG. 629 (b), for example, the display indicating that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being confirmed and the display indicating the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 are the first. To the fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  Returning to the description of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 660), when the affirmative determination is made in step SA501 or when the process of step SA502 is performed, the setting key insertion unit 68a changes the ON state to the OFF state using the setting key. It is determined whether or not the switching has been performed (step SA503). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the reception state of the signal received from the detection sensor that detects the state of the setting key insertion unit 68a has changed from the reception state corresponding to the ON state to the reception state corresponding to the OFF state. I do. Therefore, not only when the setting key insertion section 68a is maintained in the ON state, but also when the setting confirmation processing is started in a situation where the setting key insertion section 68a is in the OFF state, the OFF state is maintained. In this case as well, a negative determination is made in step SA503. If it is not specified that the setting key insertion section 68a has switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step SA503: NO), the processing of step SA503 is repeated.

  If it is determined that the setting key insertion section 68a has been switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step SA503: YES), the setting confirmation display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step SA504). Accordingly, a negative determination is made in step S9005 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639), and the setting process (step S9006) for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting confirmation is not executed. Therefore, on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, a display indicating that the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being confirmed and a display indicating the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 are displayed. The state to be performed is released.

  As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the setting key insertion portion 68a being turned on by the setting key without pressing the reset button 68c, the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. When the main process (FIG. 658) is started and the reset button 68c is not pressed and the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned ON, the game can be advanced in the main process (FIG. 658). The setting confirmation process (FIG. 660) is executed in a situation where the processing at the time of starting the supply of the operating power, which is a situation before the execution of the processing described above, is being executed. This makes it possible to confirm the set value in a situation where no game is being played.

  FIG. 662 is a flowchart showing the set value update processing executed in step SA418 of the main processing (FIG. 658). Note that the processing of steps SA701 to SA710 in the setting value update processing is executed by using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

  First, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the setting update display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step SA701). If “1” is not set in the setting update display flag (step SA701: NO), “1” is set in the setting update display flag (step SA702). After that, the information of the setting value stored in the setting reference area 341 in the specific control work area 221 is overwritten on the setting update area 342 in the specific control work area 221 (step SA703). As a result, the setting value information set when the supply of the operating power was stopped last time is set in the setting update area 342.

  On the other hand, after the supply of the operating power is stopped during the execution of the setting value update processing, the supply of the operating power is restarted, and the RAM clear processing (step SA416) of the main processing (FIG. 658) is executed. If the setting update display flag has already been set to "1" due to the start of the setting value update processing (step SA701: YES), the processing of step SA703 is not executed. In this case, the process after step SA704 is performed in a state where the information of the setting value set in the setting updating area 342 in the setting value updating process before the supply of the operating power is stopped is maintained as it is. Become.

  If the setting update display flag is set to “1”, a positive determination is made in step S9003 of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 639), whereby the setting processing for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update is performed. (Step S9004) is executed.

  FIG. 663 is a flowchart showing a setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during setting update. Note that the processing of steps SA801 to SA803 in the setting processing is executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

  First, the display data of the set value corresponding to the set value information stored in the setting update area 342 of the work area 221 for specific control is read (step SA801). Then, the read display data of the set value is set in the fifth display data buffer 275 in the work area 221 for specific control as display data to be applied to the fourth notification display device 204 (step SA802). Further, display data for causing the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 to perform a display indicating that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being updated is set in the fifth display data buffer 275. (Step SA803).

  By performing the setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update as described above, the display corresponding to the display data set in the fifth display data buffer 275 in step SA803 is displayed in the first to the first positions. A display corresponding to the display data set in the fifth display data buffer 275 in step SA802 is performed by the fourth notification display device 204, while the third notification display devices 201 to 203 perform the display. Thereby, as shown in, for example, an explanatory diagram of FIG. The display is performed by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  Returning to the description of the setting value update processing (FIG. 662), when the affirmative determination is made in step SA701 or when the processing in step SA703 is performed, the information of the setting values stored in the setting update area 342 is from “1” to “1”. It is determined whether it is any of “6” (step SA704). If it is not one of "1" to "6" (step SA704: NO), "1" is set in the setting update area 342 (step SA705). Thereby, the setting value to be updated becomes “setting 1”.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step SA704 or when the process in step SA705 is executed, it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a has switched from the ON state to the OFF state using the setting key (step SA706). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the reception state of the signal received from the detection sensor that detects the state of the setting key insertion unit 68a has changed from the reception state corresponding to the ON state to the reception state corresponding to the OFF state. I do. Therefore, not only when the setting key insertion unit 68a is maintained in the ON state, but also when the setting value updating process is started in a situation where the setting key insertion unit 68a is in the OFF state, the OFF state is maintained. In this case also, a negative determination is made in step SA706.

  If a negative determination is made in step SA706, the value of the setting update area 342 is incremented by one on the condition that the reset button 68c is pressed (step SA707: YES) (step SA708). Thus, each time the reset button 68c is pressed once, the set value is updated to the next higher level. If the reset button 68c has not been pressed (step SA707: NO) or if the value of the setting update area 342 has been incremented by 1, the process returns to step SA704. If it is determined that the value of the service area 342 is 7 or more, “1” is set in the setting update area 342 in step SA705. As a result, when the reset button 68c is pressed once in the situation of "Setting 6," the display returns to "Setting 1."

  If it is specified that the setting key insertion unit 68a has been switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step SA706: YES), the information of the setting value stored in the setting updating area 342 is overwritten on the setting reference area 341 ( Step SA709). As a result, the set value information updated as a result of the current set value update process is set in the setting reference area 341, and the set value corresponding to the set information is set in the current pachinko machine 10. Set value.

  Thereafter, the setting update display flag in the specific control work area 221 is cleared to “0” (step SA710). Accordingly, a negative determination is made in step S9003 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639), and the situation is such that the setting process (step S9004) for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update is not executed. Therefore, on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, a display indicating that the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being updated and the setting selected as the update target of the pachinko machine 10 The state in which the value is displayed is released.

  As described above, based on performing not only the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the reset button 68c but also the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 while the ON operation of the setting key insertion portion 68a by the setting key, Not only the RAM clear processing (step SA416) but also the set value update processing (FIG. 662) is executed. In addition, as described above, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 660) is performed based on performing the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 while performing the ON operation of the setting key insertion unit 68a with the setting key without pressing the reset button 68c. Be executed. As a result, an ON operation for the setting key insertion unit 68a can be shared as an operation for executing the setting-related processing relating to the setting value. Therefore, it is possible to make the operation content for generating the setting-related process easy for the manager of the game hall to understand.

  When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on by the setting key, and the pressing operation of the reset button 68c is not added, the setting confirmation process is executed, and the reset is performed. When a pressing operation of the button 68c is added, a set value updating process is executed. Accordingly, it is possible to make the execution target process different from the setting confirmation process and the setting value update process depending on whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed. Therefore, it is possible to make the contents of the operation for executing the desired processing of the setting confirmation processing and the setting value update processing easy for the manager of the gaming hall to understand. In addition, by making the operation content for executing the setting value update processing more than the setting confirmation processing, it is possible to make it particularly difficult to perform an illegal operation of the setting value update processing.

  Next, when the power failure process is performed in a state where the setting value updating process (FIG. 662) or the setting confirmation process (FIG. 660) is being performed, the main process (FIG. 658) will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG.

  First, when the power failure process is executed in a state where neither the setting value update process (FIG. 662) nor the setting confirmation process (FIG. 660) is executed, the main process (FIG. 658) will be described.

  When the supply of the operating power is restarted without the setting key insertion section 68a being turned ON and the reset button 68c not being pressed (that is, “no operation”), the RAM is not used in the main processing (FIG. 658). Neither the clearing process (step SA416), the setting value updating process (step SA418), nor the setting confirmation process (step SA415) is executed. When the supply of the operation power is restarted while the reset button 68c is pressed while the setting key insertion section 68a is not turned on (that is, when the “RAM clear operation” is performed), the main processing (FIG. 658) In this case, the RAM clear processing (step SA416) is executed, but the setting value update processing (step SA418) and the setting confirmation processing (step SA415) are not executed. When the operation power supply is restarted while the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on and the reset button 68c is pressed (that is, when the “setting change operation” is performed), the RAM is used in the main processing (FIG. 658). While the clearing process (step SA416) is executed and the setting value updating process (step SA418) is executed, the setting confirmation process (step SA415) is not executed. When the supply of the operating power is resumed without the reset button 68c being pressed but the setting key insertion section 68a is turned ON (that is, when the “setting confirmation operation” is performed), the setting confirmation processing (step While SA415) is executed, the RAM clear processing (step SA416) and the set value update processing (step SA418) are not executed.

  Next, when the power failure process is performed in a situation where the set value updating process (step SA418) is being executed (that is, a situation where the setting update display flag is set to “1”), the subsequent supply of the operating power is performed. The contents of the processing executed in the main processing (FIG. 658) when restarting the process will be described.

  When the supply of the operating power is resumed in the state where the “RAM clear operation” is performed, the RAM clear processing (step SA416) is executed in the main processing (FIG. 658), and the set value updating processing (step SA418) and The setting confirmation process (step SA415) is not executed. In other words, even if the power failure process is executed in the situation where the set value update process (step SA418) is being executed, if the “RAM clear operation” is performed when the supply of the operating power is resumed thereafter, the set value is reset. The RAM clear processing (step SA416) is executed without restarting the update processing (step SA418) and performing a new execution. Thus, it is possible to give priority to the execution of only the RAM clear processing (step SA416) for the “RAM clear operation”. In this case, if the power failure process is performed in the set value update process (step SA418) before the process in step SA709 is performed, the set value updated in the set value update process (step SA418) (ie, Since the information of the changed setting value is not set in the setting reference area 341, the setting value set before the start of the setting value updating process (step SA 418) is changed to the restart of the supply of the operating power. It will also be used later. The setting update display flag is cleared to “0” by executing the RAM clear processing (step SA416).

  When the supply of the operating power is resumed in the situation where the “setting change operation” is performed, in the main process (FIG. 658), the RAM clear process (step SA416) is executed and the set value updating process (step SA418) is executed. On the other hand, the setting confirmation process (step SA415) is not executed. In other words, even if the power failure process is executed in the situation where the set value update process (step SA418) is being executed, the RAM is cleared when the "setting change operation" is performed when the supply of the operating power is resumed thereafter. After the processing (step SA416) is executed, the set value update processing (step SA418) is newly started.

  When the RAM clear processing (step SA416) is executed, the setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to “0” as described above, and therefore, in the setting value update processing (FIG. 662), step SA701 is performed. By making a negative determination in, the setting value information stored in the setting reference area 341 is overwritten on the setting update area 342. Therefore, if the power failure process is performed before the process of step SA709 is performed in the set value update process (step SA418) before the supply of the operation power is stopped, the set value update process (step SA418) The information of the setting value updated in ()) is invalidated because it is not set in the setting reference area 341. In this case, in the setting value update processing after the restart of the supply of the operating power (step SA418), the setting that was set before the start of the setting value update processing before the supply of the operating power (step SA418) was started is started. The setting value is updated from the value.

  When the supply of the operation power is restarted in the state of “no operation”, or when the supply of the operation power is restarted in the state of performing the “setting confirmation operation”, the power failure flag and the check are performed in the main processing (FIG. 658). By making an affirmative determination in step SA412 on the condition that no abnormality has occurred with respect to the sum, the set value updating process (step SA418) is executed without executing the RAM clearing process (step SA416). When the RAM clear processing (step SA416) is not executed, the state in which the setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" is maintained. By making an affirmative determination in SA701, the information on the set value in the setting update area 342 is maintained as it is. Therefore, the update of the set value is restarted from the set value that is being updated in the set value update process (step SA418) before the supply of the operating power is stopped. Accordingly, when the power failure process is executed during the set value update process (step SA418) and the “RAM clear operation” is not performed when the supply of the operating power is resumed thereafter, the “setting Even if the "change operation" has not been performed, the setting value update processing (step SA418) can be restarted.

  In particular, it is assumed that the power-off operation of the pachinko machine 10 is erroneously performed during the execution of the setting value update process (step SA418). In this case, the power-on operation of the pachinko machine 10 is immediately performed. May be performed. In this case, it is assumed that the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on without pressing the reset button 68c while the setting key insertion section 68a is being turned on, and a "setting confirmation operation" is performed. In such a situation, the supply of the operating power is restarted. In such a situation, the setting value updating process (step SA418) is executed as described above, and the setting value updating process (step SA418) before the supply of the operating power is stopped in the setting value updating process (step SA418). The update of the set value is restarted from the set value that is being updated. As a result, even if the above-described event occurs, it is possible to restart the update of the set value without any problem.

  Next, when the power failure process is performed in a situation where the setting confirmation processing (step SA415) is being executed (ie, a situation in which the setting confirmation display flag is set to “1”), the subsequent supply of operating power is performed. The contents of the processing executed in the main processing (FIG. 658) when restarting the process will be described.

  When the supply of the operating power is resumed in the state where the “RAM clear operation” is performed, the RAM clear processing (step SA416) is executed in the main processing (FIG. 658), and the set value updating processing (step SA418) and The setting confirmation process (step SA415) is not executed. In other words, even if the power failure process is performed while the setting confirmation process (step SA415) is being performed, the setting confirmation is performed when the “RAM clear operation” is performed when the supply of the operating power is resumed thereafter. The RAM clear processing (step SA416) is executed without newly executing the processing for use (step SA415). Thus, it is possible to give priority to the execution of only the RAM clear processing (step SA416) for the “RAM clear operation”. The setting confirmation display flag is cleared to “0” by executing the RAM clear processing (step SA416).

  When the supply of the operating power is resumed in the situation where the “setting change operation” is performed, in the main process (FIG. 658), the RAM clear process (step SA416) is executed and the set value updating process (step SA418) is executed. On the other hand, the setting confirmation process (step SA415) is not executed. In other words, even if the power failure process is performed in a situation where the setting confirmation process (step SA415) is being performed, if the “setting change operation” is performed when the supply of operating power is resumed thereafter, the setting confirmation is performed. The setting value update process (step SA418) is executed after the RAM clear process (step SA416) is executed without newly executing the use process (step SA415). As a result, it is possible to give priority to the execution of the RAM clear processing (step SA416) and the setting value update processing (step SA418) for the "setting change operation". Even if the setting confirmation process (step SA415) is not executed in this way, the setting value to be updated is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204 by executing the setting value update process (step SA418). At the end of the set value update process (step SA418), the information of the set value to be updated at that time is set in the setting reference area 341. Therefore, the manager of the gaming hall can use the current pachinko machine. Ten set values can be confirmed. The setting confirmation display flag is cleared to “0” by executing the RAM clear processing (step SA416).

  When the supply of the operating power is resumed in the situation where the “setting confirmation operation” has been performed, the main processing (FIG. 658) performs the setting confirmation processing (step SA415) is executed. Thus, even if the power failure process is performed in the middle of the setting confirmation process (step SA415), the confirmation of the set value can be resumed by performing the “setting confirmation operation” when the supply of the operating power is resumed. Becomes

  When the supply of the operating power is restarted in the “no operation” state, the main processing (FIG. 658) makes an affirmative determination in step SA414 on condition that no abnormality has occurred in the power failure flag and the checksum. Even if the setting key insertion section 68a is not turned on, the setting confirmation processing (step SA415) is executed. Thus, even if the power failure process is executed during the setting confirmation process (step SA415) and the operation power supply is resumed afterwards, the setting value is confirmed even if the status is “no operation”. It is possible to restart.

  Next, the end timing of the setting value update processing (FIG. 662) and the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 660) in relation to the operation state of the setting key insertion unit 68a will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 665 (a) shows a period in which the power of the pachinko machine 10 is ON, FIG. 665 (b) shows a period in which the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on, and FIG. 665 (c) shows a setting FIG. 665 (d) shows the period during which the value update process (FIG. 662) is being executed, FIG. 665 (d) shows the period during which the setting confirmation process (FIG. 660) is being executed, and FIG. Indicates the period that has been set.

  First, a case in which each of the setting value update processing (FIG. 662) and the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 660) is executed in a normal flow will be described.

  At time t1, the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on using the setting key as shown in FIG. 665 (b), and at time t2, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on as shown in FIG. 665 (a). An operation is performed. In this case, the pressing operation of the reset button 68c is also performed. Therefore, the set value update process (FIG. 662) is started at the timing of t3 as shown in FIG. 665 (c). Thereafter, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 665 (b), the setting key insertion section 68a changes from the ON state to the OFF state. Thus, the setting value update processing (FIG. 662) ends as shown in FIG. 665 (c).

  At time t5, the setting key insertion section 68a is turned ON using the setting key as shown in FIG. 665 (b), and at time t6, the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on as shown in FIG. 665 (a). Is turned on. In this case, the pressing operation of the reset button 68c has not been performed. Therefore, the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 660) is started at the timing of t7 as shown in FIG. 665 (d). Thereafter, at the timing of t8, as shown in FIG. 665 (b), the state is changed from the state where the setting key insertion section 68a is operated ON to the state where it is operated OFF. This completes the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 660) as shown in FIG. 665 (d).

  Next, a case will be described in which the power failure process is executed during the execution of the setting value update process (FIG. 662) and the operation is not performed when the supply of the operating power is resumed thereafter.

  At time t9, the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on using the setting key as shown in FIG. 665 (b), and at time t10, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on as shown in FIG. 665 (a). An operation is performed. In this case, the pressing operation of the reset button 68c is also performed. Therefore, the set value update process (FIG. 662) is started at the timing of t11 as shown in FIG. 665 (c). Then, the power is turned off as shown in FIG. 665 (a) due to the power-off operation of the pachinko machine 10 or the sudden power failure of the commercial power supply at the timing t12 during the execution of the set value update processing (FIG. 662). When the state is reached, the power failure process is started as shown in FIG. 665 (e). In this case, the set value update processing (FIG. 662) ends as shown in FIG. 665 (c) at the timing of t12, and the power failure processing ends as shown in FIG. 665 (e) at the timing of t13.

  Thereafter, at time t14, the setting key insertion section 68a is turned off as shown in FIG. 665 (b), and in this state, at time t15, the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on as shown in FIG. An ON operation is performed. In this case, the pressing operation of the reset button 68c is not performed. That is, the power-on operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed in the state of “no operation”. However, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off last time, the power failure process is executed in the middle of the set value update process (FIG. 662). Therefore, the set value update process (FIG. 662) is started at the timing of t16 as shown in FIG. 665 (c). In this case, the setting value update processing (FIG. 662) is terminated when it is determined that the setting key insertion unit 68a has been switched from the ON operation state to the OFF operation state. Even if the setting key insertion section 68a is maintained in the OFF state from the start timing of (662), the end condition of the set value update processing (FIG. 662) is not satisfied.

  Thereafter, at time t17 during the execution of the setting value update process (FIG. 662), the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned ON using the setting key as shown in FIG. At a timing, as shown in FIG. 665 (b), the setting key insertion section 68a changes from the ON state to the OFF state. Thus, the setting value update processing (FIG. 662) ends as shown in FIG. 665 (c).

  Next, a case will be described in which the power failure process is performed during the execution of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 660), and the operation is not performed when the supply of the operating power is resumed thereafter.

  At time t19, the setting key insertion section 68a is turned ON using the setting key as shown in FIG. 665 (b), and at time t20, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on as shown in FIG. 665 (a). An operation is performed. In this case, the pressing operation of the reset button 68c is not performed. Therefore, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 660) is started at the timing of t21 as shown in FIG. 665 (d). Then, the power is turned off as shown in FIG. 665 (a) due to the power-off operation of the pachinko machine 10 or the occurrence of a sudden power failure of the commercial power supply at the timing of t22 during the execution of the setting confirmation process (FIG. When the state is reached, the power failure process is started as shown in FIG. 665 (e). In this case, the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 660) ends as shown in FIG. 665 (d) at the timing t22, and the power failure processing ends as shown in FIG. 665 (e) at the timing t23.

  Thereafter, at time t24, the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned off as shown in FIG. 665 (b), and at that time, the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on at time t25 as shown in FIG. 665 (a). An ON operation is performed. In this case, the pressing operation of the reset button 68c is not performed. That is, the power-on operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed in the state of “no operation”. However, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off last time, the power failure process is executed in the middle of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 660). Therefore, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 660) is started at the timing of t26 as shown in FIG. 665 (d). In this case, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 660) is terminated when it is determined that the setting key insertion unit 68a has been switched from the ON operation to the OFF operation. Even if the setting key insertion section 68a is kept turned off from the start timing of (660), the end condition of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 660) is not satisfied.

  Then, at a timing t27 during which the setting confirmation process (FIG. 660) is being executed, the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned ON using the setting key as shown in FIG. At a timing, as shown in FIG. 665 (b), the setting key insertion section 68a changes from the ON state to the OFF state. This completes the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 660) as shown in FIG. 665 (d).

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  In order to execute the setting value update process (FIG. 662), when the supply of the operating power is started, the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on and the reset button 68c is pressed to perform the setting. Change operation ". As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to illegally change the set value. In this case, if the supply of the operating power is stopped while the setting value update process (FIG. 662) is being executed, the "setting change operation" is not performed when the supply of the operating power is restarted. However, the setting value updating process (FIG. 662) can be executed. This makes it possible to prioritize the execution of the setting value update processing (FIG. 662).

  When the supply of the operating power is stopped while the setting value update process (FIG. 662) is being executed, a “setting confirmation operation” for confirming the set value is performed when the supply of the operating power is restarted. In such a case, the setting value update processing (FIG. 662) is executed instead of the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 660). As a result, it is possible to prioritize the change of the set value over the confirmation of the set value, so that the game does not start even though the change of the set value of the use target is not actually completed. It becomes possible.

  In the situation where the set value update process (FIG. 662) is being executed, the set value selected as the update target is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. As a result, it is possible to change the set value while grasping the set value selected as the update target. Also, by displaying the setting value selected as the update target in this way, the setting value updating process (FIG. 9) is performed even when the “setting confirmation operation” is performed when the supply of the operating power is restarted. Even if the configuration 662) is prioritized, it is possible to substantially confirm the set value.

  In the situation where the set value update process (FIG. 662) is being executed, not only the display corresponding to the set value selected as the update target on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 but also the set value update process A display corresponding to the situation where (FIG. 662) is being performed is also performed. Thereby, even if the setting value updating process (FIG. 662) is started in spite of performing the “setting confirmation operation” when the supply of the operating power is restarted, the setting value updating process (FIG. 662) is performed. It becomes easy for the manager of the game hall to know that the game has been started.

  When the supply of the operation power is stopped while the setting value update process (FIG. 662) is being executed, and when the supply of the operation power is restarted thereafter, “No operation” or “Setting confirmation operation” Is performed, the set value is changed from the set value selected before the supply of the operating power was stopped. This makes it possible to continue changing the set value from the set value selected before the supply of the operating power was stopped.

  When the supply of the operating power is stopped while the setting value update process (FIG. 662) is being executed, and when the supply of the operating power is restarted thereafter, the “setting change operation” is performed. The setting value is changed from the setting value to be used. This makes it possible to make the initial set value when the change of the set value is started to be different depending on the operation content when the supply of the operating power is restarted.

  Even if the supply of the operating power is stopped while the setting value updating process (FIG. 662) is being executed, if the “RAM clear operation” is performed when the supply of the operating power is restarted, The setting value update processing (FIG. 662) is not executed. Accordingly, even when the supply of the operating power is stopped while the setting value updating process (FIG. 662) is being executed, if it is not necessary to subsequently execute the setting value updating process (FIG. 662). By performing the “RAM clear operation” when the supply of the operating power is started, it is possible to prevent the setting value update process (FIG. 662) from being executed.

  In order to execute the setting confirmation process (FIG. 660), it is necessary to perform a “setting confirmation operation” by turning on the setting key insertion unit 68a when the supply of the operating power is started. . As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to illegally check the set value. In this case, if the supply of the operating power is stopped while the setting confirmation process (FIG. 660) is being executed, the “setting confirmation operation” is not performed when the supply of the operating power is restarted. Also, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 660) can be executed. This makes it possible to prioritize the execution of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 660).

  If the setting change operation is performed when the supply of the operating power is resumed even when the supply of the operating power is stopped while the setting confirmation process (FIG. 660) is being executed. The setting value update processing (FIG. 662) is executed without executing the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 660). This makes it possible to prioritize the setting value changing operation over the setting value confirmation operation.

  The work area 221 for specific control is provided with a setting reference area 341 and a setting update area 342, and information corresponding to the setting value to be used is stored in the setting reference area 341 and the setting value update processing is performed. Information corresponding to the setting value in the process of being changed in the situation where (FIG. 662) is being executed is stored in the setting update area 342. As a result, while the information of the set value set before the start of the set value update process (FIG. 662) is stored and held in the setting reference area 341, the information to be updated in the set value update process (FIG. 662) is obtained. The set value can be changed.

  When the supply of the operating power is stopped during the execution of the setting value update process (FIG. 662), the "no operation" or "setting confirmation operation" is performed when the supply of the operating power is resumed thereafter. In this case, when the change of the set value is started from the set value corresponding to the information stored in the setting update area 342, and the "setting change operation" is performed when the supply of the operating power is resumed thereafter, The change of the set value may be started from the set value corresponding to the information stored in the setting reference area 341. This makes it possible to appropriately generate each of these situations.

  In order to start the setting value updating process (FIG. 662), it is necessary to turn on the setting key insertion unit 68a using the setting key, so that the setting value updating process (FIG. 662) is illegally started. It becomes possible to make the act hard to perform. In this case, the setting value update process (FIG. 662) does not end only when the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned off, but is turned off when the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on. Is terminated. As a result, when the supply of the operation power is stopped while the setting value update processing (FIG. 662) is being executed, and the operation key is not operated when the supply of the operation power is resumed thereafter, the setting key is inserted. Even if the setting value updating process (FIG. 662) is started in a state where the unit 68a is in the OFF state, the setting value updating process (FIG. 662) is not immediately terminated, and the setting key inserting unit 68a is once turned ON. Since the setting value updating process (FIG. 662) is completed by further performing the OFF operation after the operation, the setting value updating process (FIG. 662) can be ended at a timing suitable for the manager of the game hall.

  In order to start the setting confirmation process (FIG. 660), it is necessary to turn on the setting key insertion unit 68a using the setting key, and thus the setting confirmation process (FIG. 660) is to be illegally started. It becomes possible to make the act difficult. In this case, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 660) does not end only when the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned off, but is turned off when the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on. Is terminated. As a result, the setting key is inserted when the operation power supply is stopped while the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 660) is being executed and the operation is not performed when the operation power supply is resumed thereafter. Even if the setting confirmation process (FIG. 660) is started in a state where the unit 68a is in the OFF state, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 660) is not immediately terminated, and the setting key insertion unit 68a is once turned ON. Since the setting confirmation process (FIG. 660) is terminated by further performing the OFF operation after the operation, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 660) can be terminated at a timing suitable for the manager of the game hall.

  When the supply of the operation power to the main CPU 63 is started, the processing at the start of the supply of the operation power (step SA401 to step SA418) is completed in the main CPU 63, and the remaining process (step SA422 to step SA422) is performed. Before SA425) is started, an initial check period is started. Accordingly, it is not necessary to control the initial check period in the situation where the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power is performed, so that the processing load in the situation where the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power is being performed is reduced. It becomes possible.

  The processing for setting confirmation (FIG. 660) and the processing for updating the set value (FIG. 662) are executed as the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power, whereas the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power is completed during the initial check period. Will be started later. Thereby, even if the display for check is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 during the initial check period, the display of the set value using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is performed. It is possible to prevent the influence.

  When the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, one of the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 660) and the setting value update processing (FIG. 662) is executed, and the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 660) and the setting value update process (FIG. 662) are not performed, and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 perform the check display. Thereby, it is possible to confirm whether the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal regardless of the situation when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started.

  In the main processing (FIG. 658) of the main CPU 63, either the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 660) or the setting value update processing (FIG. 662) is executed, and the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 660) and the setting This is a process that is executed in common even when none of the value update processing (FIG. 662) is executed, and is one of the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 660) and the set value update processing (FIG. 662). If this is performed, check the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as a process whose execution order is later than the setting confirmation process (FIG. 660) and the setting value update process (FIG. 662). The process for starting the display is set. As described above, since the process for starting the display for checking on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is set as the common process, the above-described advantages are achieved while simplifying the processing configuration. It is possible to achieve the effect.

  Even in the situation where the display for check is being executed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the process for causing the main CPU 63 to proceed with the game can be started. Thereby, even if the display for checking is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 after the execution of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 660) or the setting value update process (FIG. 662), the game can be played. It is possible to prevent the start timing of the processing for proceeding from being delayed.

  When the supply of the operating power is stopped while the supply of the operating power is stopped while the setting value updating process (FIG. 662) is being executed, and when the operation is “no operation”, the setting value updating process is performed. (FIG. 662) is not limited to the configuration starting from the set value in the middle of the change before the supply of the operating power is stopped, and is not limited to the current set value of the use target stored in the setting reference area 341. It may be configured to be started. In addition, when the supply of the operating power is stopped while the setting value updating process (FIG. 662) is being executed, and when the supply of the operating power is restarted, and there is “no operation”, the RAM clear process ( The setting value update process (FIG. 662) may be executed after step SA416) is executed, or the RAM clearing process (step SA416) is executed after the set value update process (FIG. 662) is executed. It may be.

  Further, when the supply of the operating power is stopped in a situation where the setting value updating process (FIG. 662) is being executed, and when the supply of the operating power is restarted, and when there is “no operation”, the setting value updating process ( 662) may not be executed. In this case, the configuration value information stored in the configuration reference area 341 may be overwritten in the configuration update area 342 at the start of the next configuration value update process (FIG. 662).

  When the supply of the operating power is stopped while the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 660) is being executed, and when the supply of the operation power is resumed, and when there is “no operation”, the setting confirmation processing ( 660) may not be executed.

  Further, when the supply of the operating power is stopped in a situation where the supply of the operating power is stopped while the setting value updating process (FIG. 662) is being executed, and when the “RAM clear operation” is performed, The configuration may be such that the set value update processing (FIG. 662) is executed after the RAM clear processing (step SA416) is executed. In this case, the setting value update process (FIG. 662) may be started from the setting value that is being changed before the supply of the operating power is stopped, and the current usage target stored in the setting reference area 341 may be used. May be started from the set value.

  Further, when the supply of the operating power is stopped in a situation where the supply of the operating power is stopped while the setting value updating process (FIG. 662) is being executed, and when the “RAM clear operation” is performed, The configuration may be such that the set value update process (FIG. 662) is executed without executing the RAM clear process (step SA416). After the set value update process (FIG. 662) is executed, the RAM clear process (step SA416) May be executed. In this case, the setting value update process (FIG. 662) may be started from the setting value that is being changed before the supply of the operating power is stopped, and the current usage target stored in the setting reference area 341 may be used. May be started from the set value.

  In addition, when the supply of the operation power is stopped in a situation where the supply of the operation power is stopped while the setting confirmation process (FIG. 660) is being executed, and the “RAM clear operation” is performed, The configuration confirmation processing (FIG. 660) may be executed after the RAM clear processing (step SA416) is executed, and the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 660) is performed without executing the RAM clear processing (step SA416). May be executed, or the RAM clearing process (step SA416) may be executed after the setting confirmation process (FIG. 660) is executed.

  Further, when the supply of the operation power is stopped in a situation where the supply of the operation power is stopped while the setting value update process (FIG. 662) is being executed, and a “setting change operation” is performed when the supply of the operation power is restarted, Although the setting value updating process (FIG. 662) is started from the current setting value of the use target stored in the setting reference area 341, the setting value updating process (FIG. 662) stops supplying the operating power. It may be configured to start from the set value in the middle of the change before the change.

  Further, when the supply of the operation power is stopped in a situation where the supply of the operation power is stopped while the setting value update process (FIG. 662) is being executed, and a “setting change operation” is performed when the supply of the operation power is restarted, The configuration may be such that the set value update process (FIG. 662) is executed without executing the RAM clear process (step SA416). After the set value update process (FIG. 662) is executed, the RAM clear process (step SA416) May be executed. In this case, the setting value update process (FIG. 662) may be started from the setting value that is being changed before the supply of the operating power is stopped, and the current usage target stored in the setting reference area 341 may be used. May be started from the set value.

  Also, if the setting change operation is performed when the supply of the operating power is restarted when the supply of the operating power is stopped while the setting confirmation process (FIG. 660) is being executed, Although the setting value updating process (FIG. 662) is started from the current setting value of the use target stored in the setting reference area 341, the setting value updating process (FIG. 662) stops supplying the operating power. It may be configured to start from the set value in the middle of the change before the change.

  Also, if the setting change operation is performed when the supply of the operating power is restarted when the supply of the operating power is stopped while the setting confirmation process (FIG. 660) is being executed, The configuration may be such that the set value update process (FIG. 662) is executed without executing the RAM clear process (step SA416). After the set value update process (FIG. 662) is executed, the RAM clear process (step SA416) May be executed.

  Also, if the setting change operation is performed when the supply of the operating power is restarted when the supply of the operating power is stopped while the setting confirmation process (FIG. 660) is being executed, The configuration may be such that the setting confirmation process (FIG. 660) is executed and the setting value updating process (FIG. 662) is not executed, and the setting value updating process (FIG. 662) is executed after the setting confirmation process (FIG. 660) is executed. The configuration may be executed, or the setting confirmation process (FIG. 660) may be executed after the set value update process (FIG. 662) is executed. Also, if the setting change operation is performed when the supply of the operating power is restarted when the supply of the operating power is stopped while the setting confirmation process (FIG. 660) is being executed, The configuration may be such that neither the setting confirmation process (FIG. 660) nor the set value update process (FIG. 662) is executed.

  Further, when the supply of the operating power is stopped in a situation where the supply of the operating power is stopped while the setting value updating process (FIG. 662) is being executed, and the “setting confirmation operation” is performed, The setting value updating process (FIG. 662) is not limited to a configuration in which the setting value updating process (FIG. 662) is started from the setting value being changed before the supply of the operating power is stopped. 341 may be started from the current set value of the object to be used.

  Further, when the supply of the operating power is stopped in a situation where the supply of the operating power is stopped while the setting value updating process (FIG. 662) is being executed, and the “setting confirmation operation” is performed, The configuration value update process (FIG. 662) may be executed after the RAM clear process (step SA416) is executed. The RAM clear process (step SA416) is executed after the set value update process (FIG. 662) is executed. It may be configured to be executed.

  When the supply of the operating power is stopped in a situation where the setting value update process (FIG. 662) is being executed, and when the supply of the operating power is restarted, the setting is performed when the “setting confirmation operation” is performed. The configuration for executing the setting confirmation process (FIG. 660) without executing the value update process (FIG. 662) may be adopted. In this case, the configuration value information stored in the configuration reference area 341 may be overwritten in the configuration update area 342 at the start of the next configuration value update process (FIG. 662).

  Further, when the supply of the operating power is stopped in a situation where the supply of the operating power is stopped while the setting value updating process (FIG. 662) is being executed, and the “setting confirmation operation” is performed, The setting value update process (FIG. 662) may be executed after the setting check process (FIG. 660) is executed. The setting check process (FIG. 660) may be executed after the set value update process (FIG. 662) is executed. ) May be executed. Further, when the supply of the operating power is stopped in a situation where the supply of the operating power is stopped while the setting value updating process (FIG. 662) is being executed, and the “setting confirmation operation” is performed, The configuration may be such that neither the setting confirmation process (FIG. 660) nor the set value update process (FIG. 662) is executed.

  If the supply of the operating power is started in a situation where the setting update display flag in the work area 221 for the specific control is set to “1”, the power-on initialization processing (step SA401) is performed. After the predetermined time has elapsed, the interruption of the second timer interruption processing (FIG. 639) is permitted, and the display indicating that the setting value is being updated is stored in the setting update area 342. The display indicating the set value corresponding to the information is not limited to the configuration started by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and these are displayed without waiting for the predetermined time for the weight to elapse. The display may be started. Further, even if “1” is set in the setting update display flag, it is determined that the setting value is being updated on condition that the setting value updating process (FIG. 662) is being executed. The display and the display indicating the set value corresponding to the information stored in the setting update area 342 may be performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. In this case, it is possible to prevent such display from being performed in a situation where the setting value update process (FIG. 662) is not being executed.

  When the supply of the operating power is started in a state where the setting confirmation display flag in the work area 221 for the specific control is set to “1”, the power-on initialization processing (step SA401) is performed. After the predetermined time has elapsed, the interruption of the second timer interruption processing (FIG. 639) is permitted, and the display indicating that the setting value is being confirmed is stored in the display and setting reference area 341. The display indicating the set value corresponding to the information is not limited to the configuration started by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and these are displayed without waiting for the predetermined time for the weight to elapse. The display may be started. Even if “1” is set in the setting confirmation display flag, it is determined that the setting value is being confirmed on condition that the setting confirmation process (FIG. 660) is being executed. The display and the display indicating the set value corresponding to the information stored in the setting update area 342 may be performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. In this case, it is possible to prevent such display from being performed in a situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 660) is not being executed.

  Further, in a situation where the set value updating process (FIG. 662) is being executed, an image indicating that the set value is being updated on the symbol display device 41 may be displayed. In addition to or in place of the above, an image indicating an operation procedure for updating the setting value may be displayed, and it is assumed that the setting value is being updated by the display light emitting unit 53 or the speaker unit 54. The notification shown may be performed. In this case, it is possible to make the administrator of the gaming hall clearly recognize that the setting value update process (FIG. 662) is being executed.

  Further, in the situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 660) is being executed, an image indicating that the setting value is being confirmed on the symbol display device 41 may be displayed. In addition to or in place of the above, an image indicating an operation procedure for confirming the set value may be displayed. The notification shown may be performed. In this case, the manager of the gaming hall can clearly recognize that the setting confirmation process (FIG. 660) is being executed.

  The operation unit operated to update the set value in the set value update process (FIG. 662) is not limited to the reset button 68c, and may be a dedicated operation unit such as the update button 68b. An operation unit provided in main controller 60 to cancel the abnormal state may be used. Further, positions corresponding to each of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6” are set as the rotation operation positions when the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion section 68a and the rotation operation is performed. The configuration may be such that a set value corresponding to the rotational operation position of the part 68a is set. Further, the setting key insertion portion 68a is configured to be capable of being further rotated than the ON position, and each time a rotating operation beyond the ON position is performed, the set value being updated is changed to the next set value. The configuration may be updated.

  When the set value updating process (FIG. 662) is executed, a signal corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 may be externally output to the management computer of the game hall. In this case, the signal output may be performed over a predetermined period (for example, 100 milliseconds), and the signal output is continued while the set value update process (FIG. 662) is being performed. Configuration. This makes it possible for the management computer of the gaming hall to know that the set value updating process (FIG. 662) has been executed in the pachinko machine 10.

  Further, when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 660) is executed, a signal corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 may be externally output to the management computer of the game hall. In this case, the signal output may be performed for a predetermined period (for example, 100 milliseconds), and the signal output is continued while the setting confirmation process (FIG. 660) is being executed. Configuration. This makes it possible for the management computer in the gaming hall to know that the setting confirmation process (FIG. 660) has been executed in the pachinko machine 10.

  Also, the configuration in which the processing is terminated when the key insertion unit is changed from the ON state to the OFF state is applied to processing other than the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 660) and the setting value update processing (FIG. 662). Is also good. For example, in order to display the base value on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, a predetermined key insertion unit needs to be operated to an ON position, and the predetermined key insertion unit is turned ON. The display may be terminated when it is specified that the state has been changed from the state to the OFF state.

  Further, a configuration in which at least one of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 is to be opened may be set as a condition for starting the set value updating process (FIG. 662). . In this configuration, when the supply of the operating power is stopped in a situation where the setting value update process (FIG. 662) is being performed, and when the supply of the operating power is restarted, “no operation” or “setting confirmation operation” is performed. Is performed, the setting value update process (FIG. 662) may be started even if the release target has not been released.

  In addition, a configuration in which at least one of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 is to be opened may be set as a condition for starting the setting confirmation process (FIG. 660). . In this configuration, when the supply of the operating power is stopped in a situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 660) is being executed and “no operation” is performed when the supply of the operating power is restarted, the above-described release is performed. A configuration in which the setting confirmation process (FIG. 660) is started even when the target has not been opened is possible.

  The RAM clear processing executed before the setting value update processing (FIG. 662) is executed, and the RAM clear processing executed without executing the set value update processing. The target area may be different.

  When the setting value update process (FIG. 662) is started in a situation where the setting update display flag is not set to “1”, the setting value corresponding to the information stored in the setting reference area 341 is determined. The configuration in which the setting value is changed is not limited to the configuration in which the setting value is changed from a predetermined initial value setting value. The initial value may be, for example, “setting 1”, “setting 6”, or any other setting value.

  Further, in addition to or instead of the configuration in which the setting value updating process (FIG. 662) is executed as the process at the start of the supply of the operating power, the "setting change operation" Is performed, the setting value update process (FIG. 662) may be executed. Even in this configuration, if the setting value update processing (FIG. 662) ends before the normal end trigger occurs, the setting value update processing (FIG. 662) is performed even if the “setting change operation” is not performed. The configuration to be executed makes it possible to give priority to the work of changing the set value.

  Further, in addition to or instead of the configuration in which the setting confirmation process (FIG. 660) is executed as the process at the time of starting the supply of the operating power, the “setting confirmation operation” Is performed, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 660) may be executed. Even in this configuration, if the setting confirmation process (FIG. 660) is completed before the normal end trigger occurs, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 660) is performed even if the “setting confirmation operation” is not performed. With the configuration to be executed, it is possible to give priority to the work of checking the set value.

<78th embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the main processing executed by the main CPU 63 is different from that of the 77th embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the above-described seventy-seventh embodiment will be described. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the 77th embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 666 is a flowchart showing the main processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processing of steps SA901 to SA925 in the main processing is executed using the specific control program and the specific control data in the main CPU 63.

  In steps SA901 to SA904, the same processes as those in steps SA401 to SA404 of the main process (FIG. 658) in the 77th embodiment are executed. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the setting update display flag provided in the work area 221 for the specific control (step SA905). When the supply of the operating power is restarted after the supply of the operating power is stopped while the setting value update process (step SA918) is being performed, the setting update display flag is set to “1”. , The main process is started.

  If a negative determination is made in step SA905, it is determined whether the reset button 68c is pressed (step SA906). That is, it is determined whether or not the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed while the reset button 68c is being pressed, and the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started.

  If the reset button 68c has not been pressed (step SA906: NO), it is determined whether or not “1” has been set in the power failure flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step SA907). When a power failure process is performed in the power failure information storage process (step S8901) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638), “1” is set in the power failure flag. The power failure flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the processing at the time of power failure was properly performed at the time of the previous power-off.

  If “1” is set in the power failure flag (step SA907: YES), a checksum is calculated for the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 (step SA908). The method of calculating the checksum is the same as in the 65th embodiment. Thereafter, the work area 221 for the specific control and the work area 221 for the specific control calculated in the power outage process executed immediately before the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped and stored in the work area 221 for the specific control are performed. The checksum of the stack area 222 is read, and the read checksum is compared with the checksum calculated in step SA908 (step SA909). Then, it is determined whether the checksums match (step SA910).

  If a negative determination is made in step SA907 or step SA910, that is, if the power failure flag is not set to “1” or the checksums do not match, the game stop flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control Is set to "1" (step SA911). Further, at the start of the supply of the operating power, an abnormal command indicating that an abnormality has occurred with respect to the power failure flag or the checksum is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step SA912). The processing contents of step SA911 and step SA912 are the same as step SA410 and step SA411 of the main processing (FIG. 658) in the 77th embodiment.

  When the power failure flag is set to “1” and the checksum is normal (step SA907 and step SA910: YES), it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned ON using the setting key. (Step SA913). When the setting key insertion section 68a is turned ON using the setting key (step SA913: YES), a setting confirmation process is executed (step SA914). The processing content of the setting confirmation processing is the same as that of the above-described seventy-seventh embodiment. That is, in the present embodiment, even if “1” is set in the setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control, the setting confirmation processing is executed unless the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned ON. Not done. Therefore, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped while the setting confirmation process is being executed, the setting confirmation process is not executed unless the supply of the operating power is resumed in the situation where the “setting confirmation operation” is performed.

  If “1” is set to the setting update display flag (step SA905: YES) or if the reset button 68c is pressed (step SA906: YES), RAM clear processing is executed (step SA915). The processing contents of the RAM clear processing are the same as the RAM clear processing (step SA416) of the main processing (FIG. 658) in the 77th embodiment.

  Thereafter, if the setting update display flag is set to "1" (step SA916: YES), the setting value updating process is executed irrespective of whether or not the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on (step SA916). SA918). On the other hand, if “1” is not set in the setting update display flag (step SA916: NO), the setting value update is performed on condition that the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on (step SA917: YES). The process is executed (step SA918). In other words, if the supply of the operating power is stopped while the setting value updating process is being executed, the RAM clear process (step After the execution of SA915), the setting value update processing (step SA918) is newly started.

  When the processing of step SA912 is performed, when a negative determination is made in step SA913, when the processing of step SA914 is performed, when a negative determination is performed in step SA917, or when the processing of step SA918 is performed, step SA919 is performed. To execute the process of Step SA925. The processing contents of steps SA919 to SA925 are the same as those of steps SA419 to SA425 of the main processing (FIG. 658) in the 77th embodiment.

  FIG. 667 is a diagram illustrating a main process (step SA918) or a process for confirming the setting (step SA914) when the power failure process is performed and the supply of the operating power is resumed thereafter. FIG. 166 is an explanatory diagram for describing the details of the processing performed in FIG. 666).

  When the power failure process is performed in a state where neither the setting value update process (step SA918) nor the setting confirmation process (step SA914) is performed, the main process (FIG. 666) is performed when the supply of the operating power is restarted. The details of the processing executed in step ()) are the same as those in the above-described seventy-seventh embodiment. That is, when the supply of the operation power is resumed in the “no operation” state, the RAM clear processing (step SA915), the set value update processing (step SA918), and the setting confirmation processing (step SA914) is not executed. When the supply of the operating power is resumed in the situation where the “RAM clear operation” is performed, the RAM clear process (step SA915) is executed in the main process (FIG. 666), while the set value updating process (step SA915) is performed. SA918) and the setting confirmation process (step SA914) are not executed. When the supply of the operating power is resumed in the situation where the “setting change operation” is performed, in the main processing (FIG. 666), the RAM clear processing (step SA915) is executed and the setting value updating processing (step SA918) is performed. On the other hand, the setting confirmation process (step SA914) is not executed. If the supply of the operating power is resumed in the situation where the “setting confirmation operation” has been performed, the setting confirmation processing (step SA914) is executed in the main processing (FIG. 666), while the RAM clear processing (step SA915). Also, the setting value update processing (step SA918) is not executed.

  Next, when the power failure process is executed in a situation where the set value update process (step SA918) is being executed (that is, a situation where the setting update display flag is set to “1”), the subsequent supply of the operating power is performed. The content of the processing executed in the main processing (FIG. 666) when restarting is described.

  When the supply of operating power is resumed in the "no operation" situation, when the supply of operating power is resumed in the situation where the "RAM clear operation" is performed, the operation is performed in the situation where the "setting change operation" is performed In both the case where the supply of power is restarted and the case where the supply of operating power is restarted in the state where the “setting confirmation operation” is performed, the RAM clearing process (step SA915) is performed in the main process (FIG. 666). ) Is executed and the setting value update processing (step SA918) is executed, while the setting confirmation processing (step SA914) is not executed. That is, when the power failure process is performed in the state where the set value update process (step SA918) is being performed, the RAM clear is performed regardless of the operation content when restarting the supply of the operating power thereafter. After the processing (step SA915) is executed, the set value update processing (step SA918) is newly started.

  With the above configuration, when the supply of the operating power is stopped in the middle of the setting value updating process (step SA918), the setting key insertion unit when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on is resumed when the supply of the operating power is restarted. Irrespective of the content of the operation on the reset button 68a and the reset button 68c, the setting value update processing (step SA918) can be newly started after the RAM clear processing (step SA915) is executed. Thus, when the supply of the operating power is stopped during the update of the set value, the opportunity to complete the update after updating the set value is surely generated when the supply of the operating power is restarted thereafter. It becomes possible. Therefore, when the supply of the operation power is restarted after the supply of the operation power is stopped during the update of the set value, the setting before the previous set value update process (step SA918) is started. It is possible to prevent the game from being started with the value.

  If the supply of the operating power is stopped during the setting value updating process (step SA918), the RAM clearing process (step SA915) is executed irrespective of the operation content when the supply of the operating power is restarted. By performing the setting value update processing (step SA918) after the above processing, the above-described superiority can be achieved while simplifying the processing configuration as compared with a configuration in which the processing content executed according to each operation content is changed. It is possible to achieve the effect.

  Next, when the power failure process is performed in a situation where the setting confirmation process (step SA914) is being executed (that is, a situation where the setting confirmation display flag is set to “1”), the subsequent supply of the operating power is performed. The content of the processing executed in the main processing (FIG. 666) when restarting is described.

  If the power failure process is executed in a situation where the setting confirmation process (step SA914) is being executed (that is, a situation in which the setting confirmation display flag is set to “1”), the main power supply is resumed after the restart of the supply of the operating power. The contents of the processing executed in the processing (FIG. 666) are as follows: when the power failure processing is executed in a situation where neither the setting value update processing (FIG. 662) nor the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 660) is executed. In this case, the content of the processing executed in the main processing (FIG. 666) when the supply of the operating power is resumed thereafter is the same. In other words, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped while the setting confirmation process (step SA914) is being executed, if the supply of the operating power is resumed thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 may be turned on. A process corresponding to the operation content is executed.

  Unlike the change of the set value, the check of the set value does not affect the game even if the process is terminated in the middle and not restarted. Therefore, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped during the execution of the confirmation of the set value, the processing corresponding to the operation content at the time of the power-on operation of the pachinko machine 10 is executed, so that the administrator of the gaming hall can perform the processing. , It is possible to prioritize the operation content at the time of the power ON operation.

<79th embodiment>
In the present embodiment, if the power failure process is performed in the situation where the setting value update process (step SA918) or the setting confirmation process (step SA914) is being performed, the main process (step SA918) is performed when the supply of the operating power is resumed. The content of the processing executed in FIG. 666) is different from that of the above-described seventy-seventh embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the above-described seventy-seventh embodiment will be described. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the 77th embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 668 shows the main processing (FIG. 662) when the power failure processing is executed in the situation where the setting value updating processing (FIG. 662) or the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 660) is being executed, and thereafter the supply of the operating power is restarted. FIG. 658) is an explanatory diagram for describing the details of the processing performed in (FIG. 658).

  In the case where the power failure process is executed in a situation where neither the setting value update process (FIG. 662) nor the setting confirmation process (FIG. 660) is executed, the main process (FIG. 658) is performed when the supply of the operating power is resumed. The contents of the processing executed in step ()) are the same as those in the above-described seventy-seventh embodiment. Further, if the power failure process is executed in a situation where the setting confirmation process (step FIG. 660) is being executed (that is, a situation in which the setting confirmation display flag is set to “1”), the subsequent supply of operating power is performed. The content of the processing executed in the main processing (FIG. 658) when resuming is the same as that in the 78th embodiment.

  When the power failure process is executed in a situation where the set value update process (FIG. 662) is being executed (that is, a situation where the setting update display flag is set to “1”), the main power supply is resumed after the power supply is resumed. The contents of the processing executed in the processing (FIG. 658) are as follows: in the case of “no operation” and in the case of the “setting confirmation operation”, the setting value updating processing (FIG. 662) is restarted as in the 77th embodiment. is there. In the case of the “RAM clear operation” and the “setting change operation”, the setting value update process (FIG. 662) is restarted after the RAM clear process (step SA416) is executed. In this case, in the RAM clear process (step SA416), not only the setting reference area 341 provided in the specific control work area 221 but also the setting update display flag and the setting update flag provided in the specific control work area 221 are provided. The area 342 has been excluded from the target of initialization. Therefore, even if the RAM clear processing (step SA416) is executed in a state where the setting update display flag is set to “1”, the setting update display flag is not set when the subsequent setting value update processing (FIG. 662) is started. "1" is set, and the update of the setting value is started from the setting value information stored in the setting updating area 342 at that time.

  With the above configuration, when the supply of the operating power is stopped during the updating of the set value, the set value updating process (FIG. 662) is not only executed reliably when the supply of the operating power is resumed thereafter, but also. The update of the set value can be restarted from the set value in the middle of the update immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped. As a result, the setting value changing operation can be continued as it is.

<80th embodiment>
In the present embodiment, if the power failure process is performed in the situation where the setting value update process (step SA918) or the setting confirmation process (step SA914) is being performed, the main process (step SA918) is performed when the supply of the operating power is resumed. The content of the processing executed in FIG. 666) is different from that of the above-described seventy-seventh embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the above-described seventy-seventh embodiment will be described. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the 77th embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 669 shows the main processing (FIG. 662) when the power failure processing is executed in the situation where the setting value update processing (FIG. 662) or the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 660) is being executed, and thereafter the supply of the operating power is restarted. FIG. 658) is an explanatory diagram for describing the details of the processing performed in (FIG. 658).

  In the case where the power failure process is executed in a situation where neither the setting value update process (FIG. 662) nor the setting confirmation process (FIG. 660) is executed, the main process (FIG. 658) is performed when the supply of the operating power is resumed. The contents of the processing executed in step ()) are the same as those in the above-described seventy-seventh embodiment. Further, if the power failure process is executed in a situation where the setting confirmation process (step FIG. 660) is being executed (that is, a situation in which the setting confirmation display flag is set to “1”), the subsequent supply of operating power is performed. The content of the processing executed in the main processing (FIG. 658) when resuming is the same as that in the 78th embodiment.

  When the power failure process is executed in a situation where the set value update process (FIG. 662) is being executed (that is, a situation where the setting update display flag is set to “1”), the main power supply is resumed after the power supply is resumed. The contents of the processing executed in the processing (FIG. 658) include the setting value update processing (FIG. 662) and the setting confirmation in the case of "no operation", in the case of "RAM clear operation" and in the case of "setting confirmation operation". When the power failure process is executed in a state where none of the power supply processes (FIG. 660) is executed, the same contents of the process executed in the main process (FIG. 658) when the supply of the operating power is resumed thereafter. It is. That is, in the case of "no operation", none of the RAM clear processing (step SA416), the setting value update processing (FIG. 662) and the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 660) are executed, and the "RAM clear operation" In the case of, the RAM clearing process (step SA416) is executed, but the setting value updating process (FIG. 662) and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 660) are not executed. Although the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 660) is executed, the RAM clear processing (step SA416) and the set value update processing (FIG. 662) are not executed.

  On the other hand, in the case of the “setting change operation”, the setting value update processing (FIG. 662) is restarted after the RAM clear processing (step SA416) is executed. In this case, in the RAM clear process (step SA416), not only the setting reference area 341 provided in the specific control work area 221 but also the setting update display flag and the setting update flag provided in the specific control work area 221 are provided. The area 342 has been excluded from the target of initialization. Therefore, even if the RAM clear processing (step SA416) is executed in a state where the setting update display flag is set to “1”, the setting update display flag is not set when the subsequent setting value update processing (FIG. 662) is started. "1" is set, and the update of the setting value is started from the setting value information stored in the setting updating area 342 at that time.

  With the above configuration, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped in the middle of updating the set value, it corresponds to the operation content by the administrator of the gaming hall when the supply of the operating power is resumed thereafter. It is possible to prioritize the execution of the processing.

  If the supply of the operating power is stopped while the setting value is being updated, and if the supply of the operating power is restarted in a situation where the “setting change operation” is performed, the supply of the operating power is performed. It is possible to restart the update of the set value from the set value in the middle of the update just before the stop. As a result, the setting value changing operation can be continued as it is.

<81st embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the main processing executed by the main CPU 63 is different from that of the 77th embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the above-described seventy-seventh embodiment will be described. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the 77th embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 670 is a flowchart showing the main processing in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processing of steps SB101 to SB128 in the main processing is executed by using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

  First, a power-on initial setting process is executed (step SB101). In the power-on initialization process, for example, the process waits without advancing to the next process until a predetermined time for wait (specifically, one second) elapses after the main process is started. The operation start and the initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed in the predetermined period for the weight. Also, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted.

  Thereafter, an internal function register setting process is executed (step SB102). In the internal function register setting process, similarly to the 67th embodiment, the interrupt cycle of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638), which is a process started by interrupting the main process periodically, is set to the first interrupt cycle (FIG. 638). (Specifically, 4 milliseconds), and the interrupt cycle of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639), which is a process that is started by interrupting the main process periodically, is set to be longer than the first interrupt cycle. The second interrupt cycle (specifically, 2 milliseconds), which is a short cycle, is set.

  That is, in the present embodiment, similarly to the 67th embodiment, the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 639) are performed as the timer interrupt processing so that the interrupt cycle is relatively long. Exists. The first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639) are both started by interrupting the main process. The second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639) is started by interrupting the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638). On the other hand, the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) is not activated by interrupting the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 639). In a situation where both the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 639) are not executed, if both the first interrupt cycle and the second interrupt cycle have elapsed, the cycle is determined. Irrespective of the lapse order of the process, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639) is started first. In this regard, it can be said that the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639) is a process that is started prior to the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) may be started prior to the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 639).

  In the internal function register setting processing, the first interrupt cycle of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) is set in a predetermined register of the main CPU 63, and the second interrupt cycle of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 639) is mainly set. It is set in a specific register of the side CPU 63. Further, in the internal function register setting process, in addition to the setting of the first and second interrupt cycles, for example, a setting process of a numerical range of various counters such as a numerical range of the hit random number counter C1 is executed.

  After that, “1” is set to a start-up processing flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step SB103). As in the 67th embodiment, even if the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) is started, the power-out processing flag indicates the power failure among the various processings set in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638). While the processing for monitoring, updating the various counters, and performing the fraud monitoring is executed, it is determined that the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) should be ended without executing the processing for advancing the game. This flag is specified by the main CPU 63.

  The start-up processing flag is set to “1” when the processing (Step SB101 to Step SB122) at the start of the supply of the operation power is started in the main processing (FIG. 670), and the processing at the start of the supply of the operation power is performed. It is cleared to "0" before the end of (Step SB101 to Step SB122) and the start of the remaining process (Step SB125 to Step SB128). As in the 67th embodiment, in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638), when the start-up processing flag is set to “1”, the processing of steps S8907 to S8920 is not executed. In order to advance the game in a situation in which a setting confirmation process (FIG. 671) or a setting value update process (FIG. 672) to be described later among the processes (steps SB101 to SB122) at the start of the supply of the operating power is performed. Processing can be prevented from being executed. On the other hand, as described above, in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638), even if the start-up processing flag is set to “1”, the processing from step S8901 to step S8905 is executed, thereby reducing the operating power. The power failure monitoring is executed even when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 671) or the setting value update process (FIG. 672) described later among the processes at the start of supply (steps SB101 to SB122) is being executed. At the same time, the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the random number initial value counter CINI are updated, and fraud detection is further performed.

  In particular, even when the start-up processing flag is set to “1”, the power failure information storage processing (step S8901) is executed to start the operation power supply processing (steps SB101 to SB122). ), It is possible to execute the power failure process for a power failure even if a power failure occurs in a situation where a setting confirmation process (FIG. 671) or a setting value update process (FIG. 672) described later is being executed. In the process at the time of power failure, similarly to the 67th embodiment, the power failure flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to “1”, the checksum is calculated, and the calculated checksum is used for the specific control. Since the power is stored in the work area 221, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an abnormality in the main RAM 65 from being identified when the supply of the operating power is restarted. Accordingly, when a power failure occurs in the middle of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 671) or the setting value update process (FIG. 672), the fact that a power failure has occurred in the middle of these setting-related processes indicates that the next operation power supply. It can be specified at the start.

  Incidentally, in the situation where the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 671) or the setting value update processing (FIG. 672) is being executed, both the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 639) are performed. The interrupt is not prohibited and can be interrupted at an arbitrary timing. In this case, when the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638) or the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639) is started by interrupting the setting confirmation process (FIG. 671) or the set value updating process (FIG. 672), The information of the return address of the main process (FIG. 670) for returning after the completion of the timer interrupt process to be started is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control, and the timer interrupt process is started. The information of the various registers of the main CPU 63 immediately before is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control. Then, when the timer interrupt process to be started is completed, the process returns to the main process (FIG. 670) corresponding to the information of the return address saved in the stack area 222 for specific control, and The information saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is restored to various registers of the main CPU 63.

  After setting the startup processing flag to “1” in step SB103, it is determined whether or not “1” is set to the power failure flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step SB104). . When a power failure process is performed in the power failure information storage process (step S8901) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638), “1” is set in the power failure flag. The power failure flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the processing at the time of power failure was properly performed at the time of the previous power-off.

  If “1” is set in the power failure flag (step SB104: YES), it is determined whether or not the checksum is normal (step SB105). Specifically, first, a checksum is calculated for the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control. The method of calculating the checksum is the same as in the 65th embodiment. Thereafter, the work area 221 for the specific control and the work area 221 for the specific control calculated in the power outage process executed immediately before the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped and stored in the work area 221 for the specific control are described. The checksum of the stack area 222 is read, and the read checksum is compared with the checksum calculated as described above in the current main processing. Then, it is determined whether or not the checksums match.

  If the checksums match (step SB105: YES), is the setting value corresponding to the information stored in the setting reference area 341 (see FIG. 659) in the specific control work area 221 in a normal range? It is determined whether or not it is (Step SB106). The setting reference area 341 is a storage area in which information for specifying the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 by the main CPU 63 is stored as in the 77th embodiment. When the numerical information of “1” is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 1”. When the numerical information “2” is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 2”. When the numerical information “3” is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 3”. When the numerical information “4” is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 4”. When the numerical information “5” is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 5”. When the numerical information of “6” is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 6”. In step SB106, it is determined whether or not the information of the setting value stored in the setting reference area 341 is any of “1” to “6”.

  When an affirmative determination is made in all of Steps SB104 to SB106, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the setting update display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control (Step SB107). The setting update display flag is a flag for specifying by the main CPU 63 that the setting value update process (FIG. 672) is being executed as in the 67th embodiment, and “1” is set in the setting update display flag. When the setting is set, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 perform a display indicating that the setting value is being updated and a display indicating the setting value being updated. The setting update display flag is a flag that is set to “1” when the setting value updating process (FIG. 672) is started and is cleared to “0” when the setting value updating process (FIG. 672) is ended. In a situation where the setting value update processing (FIG. 672) is not executed, basically, the setting update display flag is not set to “1”. However, if the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped while the setting value updating process (FIG. 672) is being executed, the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started thereafter. , The setting update display flag is set to "1". The state in which the setting update display flag is set to “1” is maintained until the processing for clearing the setting update display flag to “0” is performed in the setting value update processing (FIG. 672).

  If a negative determination is made in step SB107 that the setting update display flag is not set to “1”, it is determined whether the reset button 68c is pressed (step SB108). That is, it is determined whether or not the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed while the reset button 68c is being pressed, and the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. Here, in the present embodiment, similar to the 67th embodiment, the main control device 60 is provided with the setting key insertion section 68a and the reset button 68c, but is not provided with the update button 68b. Further, the main control device 60 is provided with first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in the same manner as in the forty-third embodiment, instead of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c.

  If the reset button 68c has not been pressed (step SB108: NO), it is determined whether or not “1” has been set to the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control (step SB109). The game stop flag is a flag that is set to “1” when the power failure flag is not set to “1”, when the checksums do not match, or when the set value is abnormal. When the game stop flag is set to “1”, the processes of steps S8901 to S8905 are executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638), while an affirmative determination is made in step S8906 to perform steps S8907 to S8907. The processing of S8920 is not executed. Accordingly, if the power failure flag is not set to “1” because the power failure processing was not properly performed at the time of the previous power shutdown, the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 If at least one of the checksums does not match due to a change in the storage state of the information since the last power shutdown, or if the set value is abnormal, monitoring of power failure, updating of various counters, While processing for monitoring is executed, processing for advancing the game is not executed. When an affirmative determination is made in step SB109, processing in step SB121 and step SB122 described later is executed.

  When a negative determination is made in step SB109, it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a has been turned ON using the setting key (step SB110). When the setting key insertion section 68a is turned ON using the setting key (step SB110: YES), a setting confirmation process is executed (step SB112). Further, even when the setting key insertion section 68a is not turned ON using the setting key (step SB110: NO), the setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to “1”. Is set (step SB111: YES), a setting confirmation process is executed (step SB112).

  The setting confirmation display flag is a flag for specifying by the main CPU 63 that the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 671) is being executed as in the 67th embodiment, and “1” is set to the setting confirmation display flag. When the setting is set, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 perform a display indicating that the setting value is being checked and a display indicating the currently set value. . The setting confirmation display flag is a flag that is set to “1” when the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 671) is started and is cleared to “0” when the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 671) ends. In a situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 671) is not executed, basically, the setting confirmation display flag is not set to “1”. However, if the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped while the setting confirmation process (FIG. 671) is being executed, the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started thereafter. , The setting confirmation display flag is set to “1”. The state in which the setting confirmation display flag is set to “1” indicates whether the first RAM clearing process (step SB117) described later is executed, the setting value updating process (FIG. 672) described later is executed, or the setting confirmation is performed. This is maintained until the processing for clearing the setting confirmation display flag to “0” in the processing for use (FIG. 671) is executed.

  Not only when the reset button 68c is not pressed and the setting key insertion section 68a is turned ON (that is, when the “setting confirmation operation” is performed) as described above, the reset button 68c The setting confirmation process (FIG. 671) is executed by executing the setting confirmation process (FIG. 671) even when the pressing operation is not performed and the setting confirmation display flag is set to “1”. When the power failure process is performed in the situation where the power failure has been performed, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 671) is executed even if the “setting confirmation operation” is not performed when the supply of the operating power is resumed thereafter. Thereby, it is possible to continue to check the current set value of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, even if the power failure process is performed while the setting confirmation process (FIG. 671) is being performed, if the reset button 68c is pressed when the supply of the operating power is resumed thereafter, The processing corresponding to the operation performed when the supply of the operating power is resumed in the first RAM clear processing (step SB117) and the setting value update processing (FIG. 672) is executed without executing the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 671). Is done. This makes it possible to prioritize the execution of the first RAM clearing process (step SB117) or the setting value updating process (FIG. 672) over the setting confirmation process (FIG. 671).

  Here, the setting confirmation processing executed in step SB112 will be described. FIG. 671 is a flowchart showing the setting confirmation processing. Note that the processing of steps SB201 to SB207 in the setting confirmation processing is executed using the specific control program and the specific control data in the main CPU 63.

  First, interruption permission is set (step SB201). Thus, the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) is started by interrupting at the first interrupt cycle, and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 639) is started by interrupting at the second interrupt cycle.

  In the present embodiment, in the processing (Step SB101 to Step SB122) at the start of the supply of the operating power, the interruption of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) and the interrupt of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 639) are basically prohibited. In the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 671) and the setting value update processing (FIG. 672), an interrupt is permitted. Therefore, if the setting confirmation process (FIG. 671) and the set value update process (FIG. 672) are not executed in the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the start of the supply of the operating power, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638) and the execution of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 639) are prohibited, and the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) is performed in the state where the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 671) or the setting value update processing (FIG. 672) is being executed. ) And execution of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639) are permitted. However, in the situation where the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 671) or the setting value update processing (FIG. 672) is being executed, the start-up processing flag is set to “1”, and thus the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 671) is performed. 638) is started, among the various processes of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638), the processes for monitoring the power failure, updating the various counters, and monitoring the illegality are executed, while the processes for progressing the game are performed. The first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638) ends without executing the process.

  Thereafter, "1" is set to the setting confirmation display flag on condition that "1" is not set to the setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 221 for the specific control (step SB202). When the setting confirmation display flag is set to “1”, an affirmative determination is made in step S9005 of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 639), whereby the setting processing for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting confirmation is performed. (Step S9006) is executed. The content of the setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting confirmation is the same as that in the above-described seventy-seventh embodiment. Executing the processing, for example, as shown in an explanatory diagram of FIG. Is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  Thereafter, a confirmation start command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step SB203). Upon receiving the confirmation start command, the sound emission control device 81 recognizes the image indicating that the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 671) is being executed and the operation content for terminating the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 671). The display controller 82 controls the display so that an image for enabling the display is displayed on the symbol display device 41. This allows the manager of the gaming hall to recognize that the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being checked, and is necessary for ending the setting checking process (FIG. 671). It is possible for the manager of the gaming hall to recognize the details of the operation. Note that, in addition to or instead of performing the notification in the symbol display device 41, a configuration may be adopted in which at least one of the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 performs. Further, an external output indicating that the setting confirmation process (FIG. 671) is being executed may be performed on a device external to the pachinko machine 10, such as a management computer for a game hall.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a has switched from the ON state to the OFF state using the setting key (step SB204). Specifically, similarly to the setting confirmation process (FIG. 660) in the seventy-seventh embodiment, the reception state of the signal received from the detection sensor that detects the state of the setting key insertion unit 68a corresponds to the ON state. It is determined whether or not the receiving state has changed from the receiving state to the OFF state. Therefore, not only when the setting key insertion section 68a is maintained in the ON state, but also when the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 671) is started in a situation where the setting key insertion section 68a is in the OFF state, the OFF state is not changed. If it is maintained, a negative determination is made in step SB204. If it is not specified that the setting key insertion section 68a has switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step SB204: NO), the processing of step SB204 is repeated.

  When it is specified that the setting key insertion section 68a has been switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step SB204: YES), the setting confirmation display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step SB205). Accordingly, a negative determination is made in step S9005 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639), and the setting process (step S9006) for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting confirmation is not executed. Therefore, on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, a display indicating that the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being confirmed and a display indicating the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 are displayed. The state to be performed is released.

  After that, the setting of the interruption inhibition is performed (step SB206). Accordingly, when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 671) ends and the process returns to the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the start of the supply of the operating power in the main process (FIG. 670), the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638) and interruption of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 639) are prohibited.

  Thereafter, a return command at the time of confirmation is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step SB207). By receiving the return command at the time of confirmation, the sound emission control device 81 identifies that the processing at the start of the supply of the operation power (step SB101 to step SB122) has been completed in the main CPU 63, and determines the current operation power. It is specified that the setting confirmation process (FIG. 671) has been executed in the process at the start of supply (step SB101 to step SB122). Then, processing corresponding to the reception of the return command at the time of confirmation is executed. The contents of the process will be described later.

  As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the setting key insertion portion 68a being turned on by the setting key without pressing the reset button 68c, the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. Then, in a state where the main process (FIG. 670) is started and the reset button 68c is not pressed and the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned ON, the game proceeds in the main process (FIG. 670). The setting confirmation process (FIG. 671) is executed in a state in which the process at the time of starting the supply of the operating power, which is a status before the process in FIG. This makes it possible to confirm the set value in a situation where no game is being played.

  Returning to the description of the main process (FIG. 670), the case where the setting key insertion section 68a is not turned ON using the setting key and the setting confirmation display flag is not set to “1” (step SB110 and FIG. 670). Step SB111: NO), a normal return command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step SB113). Upon receiving the normal return command, the sound emission control device 81 specifies that the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) is completed in the main CPU 63 and starts the supply of the current operating power. In the processing at the time (step SB101 to step SB122), it is specified that none of the first RAM clear processing (step SB117), the processing for setting confirmation (FIG. 671), and the processing for updating the set value (FIG. 672) are executed. . Then, a process corresponding to the reception of the normal return command is executed. The contents of the process will be described later.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step SB108 that the reset button 68c has been pressed, the setting key insertion section 68a has been determined to have been turned on using the setting key (step SB108 and step SB114). : YES), or when it is determined in step SB107 that the setting update display flag is set to “1”, a setting value update process is executed (step SB115). Not only when the reset button 68c is pressed as described above and the setting key insertion section 68a is turned ON (that is, when the "setting change operation" is performed), but also when the reset button 68c is pressed. The setting value update process (FIG. 672) is also executed when the setting update display flag is set to "1" regardless of the presence or absence of the pressing operation and the ON operation of the setting key insertion unit 68a. If the power failure process is performed in a state where the process (FIG. 672) is being performed, the operation contents at the start of the supply of the operating power thereafter are “no operation”, “RAM clear operation”, and “setting change”. The setting value updating process (FIG. 672) is executed regardless of whether the operation is an “operation” or a “setting confirmation operation”. This makes it possible to prioritize the execution of the setting value update processing (FIG. 672).

  Here, the setting value updating process executed in step SB115 will be described. FIG. 672 is a flowchart showing the setting value update processing. Note that the processing of steps SB301 to SB314 in the setting value update processing is executed using the specific control program and the specific control data in the main CPU 63.

  First, interrupt permission is set (step SB301). Thus, the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) is started by interrupting at the first interrupt cycle, and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 639) is started by interrupting at the second interrupt cycle.

  In the present embodiment, in the processing (Step SB101 to Step SB122) at the start of the supply of the operating power, the interruption of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) and the interrupt of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 639) are basically prohibited. In the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 671) and the setting value update processing (FIG. 672), an interrupt is permitted. Therefore, if the setting confirmation process (FIG. 671) and the set value update process (FIG. 672) are not executed in the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the start of the supply of the operating power, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638) and the execution of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 639) are prohibited, and the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) is performed in the state where the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 671) or the setting value update processing (FIG. 672) is being executed. ) And execution of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639) are permitted. However, in the situation where the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 671) or the setting value update processing (FIG. 672) is being executed, the start-up processing flag is set to “1”, and thus the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 671) is performed. 638) is started, among the various processes of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638), the processes for monitoring the power failure, updating the various counters, and monitoring the illegality are executed, while the processes for progressing the game are performed. The first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638) ends without executing the process.

  After that, "1" is set to the setting update display flag on condition that "1" is not set to the setting update display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step SB302). When the setting update display flag is set to “1”, an affirmative determination is made in step S9003 of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 639), and the setting processing for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update is performed. (Step S9004) is executed. The content of the setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update is the same as that in the above-described seventy-seventh embodiment. By executing the process, for example, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 629 (a), a display indicating that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being updated and the pachinko machine 10 is selected as an update target The displayed set values are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  Thereafter, initial settings at the start are performed (step SB303). In the initial setting, the game stop flag provided in the specific control work area 221 is cleared to “0”. When the power failure flag is not set to “1” because the power failure processing was not properly performed at the time of the previous power-off (step SB104: NO), the game stop flag indicates the work area 221 for the specific control and If the checksums do not match for at least one of the stack areas 222 for specific control due to a change in the storage state of information since the last power-off (step SB105: NO), or the setting reference area 341 Is set in step SB119 of the main process (FIG. 670), when the set value corresponding to the information stored in is not in the normal range (step SB106: NO). When the game stop flag is set to “1”, the processes of steps S8901 to S8905 are executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638), while an affirmative determination is made in step S8906 to perform steps S8907 to S8907. The processing of S8920 is not executed. Accordingly, when the information abnormality of the main RAM 65 as described above occurs, the processing for monitoring the power failure, updating the various counters, and monitoring the illegality is executed, while the processing for advancing the game is executed. Will not be. By clearing the game stop flag to “0” in the process of step SB303, the state in which the occurrence of the information abnormality in the main RAM 65 is specified is released when the set value update process (FIG. 672) is executed. Becomes possible.

  Thereafter, “1” is set in the setting update area 342 (see FIG. 659) in the specific control work area 221 (step SB304). The setting update area 342 is a storage area in which information of the set value being updated in the set value update process (FIG. 672) is stored as in the 77th embodiment. When the numerical information “1” is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value of the update target (selection target or change target) is “setting 1”. When the numerical information “2” is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated is “setting 2”. When the numerical information of “3” is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated is “setting 3”. When the numerical information “4” is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated is “setting 4”. When the numerical information of “5” is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated is “setting 5”. When the numerical information of “6” is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated is “setting 6”.

  By setting “1” in the setting update area 342 in step SB304, the setting value to be updated becomes “setting 1”. That is, in the present embodiment, the set value to be updated is “setting 1” when the set value update process (FIG. 672) is started, regardless of the current set value of the pachinko machine 10.

  After that, an update start command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step SB305). Upon receiving the update start command, the sound emission control device 81 displays an image indicating that the set value update process (FIG. 672) is being executed, and an image for enabling the operation content for changing the set value to be recognized. , And the display control device 82 is controlled to display an image on the symbol display device 41 so that the operation content for ending the set value update process (FIG. 672) can be recognized. This allows the manager of the gaming hall to recognize that the setting value is being changed, and also provides an operation content and a setting value update process required to change the setting value (FIG. 672). Can be recognized by the administrator of the gaming hall. Note that, in addition to or instead of performing the notification in the symbol display device 41, a configuration may be adopted in which at least one of the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 performs. Further, an external output indicating that the set value updating process (FIG. 672) is being executed may be performed on a device external to the pachinko machine 10, such as a management computer for a game hall.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the information of the set value stored in the setting update area 342 is any of “1” to “6” (step SB306). If it is not one of "1" to "6" (step SB306: NO), "1" is set in the setting update area 342 (step SB307). Thereby, the setting value to be updated becomes “setting 1”.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step SB306 or when the process in step SB307 is performed, it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a has switched from the ON state to the OFF state using the setting key (step SB308). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the reception state of the signal received from the detection sensor that detects the state of the setting key insertion unit 68a has changed from the reception state corresponding to the ON state to the reception state corresponding to the OFF state. I do. Therefore, not only when the setting key insertion unit 68a is maintained in the ON state, but also when the setting value updating process is started in a situation where the setting key insertion unit 68a is in the OFF state, the OFF state is maintained. In this case also, a negative determination is made in step SB308.

  When a negative determination is made in step SB308, the value of the setting update area 342 is incremented by 1 on condition that the reset button 68c is pressed (step SB309: YES) (step SB310). Thus, each time the reset button 68c is pressed once, the set value is updated to the next higher level. When the reset button 68c is not pressed (step SB309: NO) or when the value of the setting update area 342 is incremented by 1, the process returns to step SB306. If it is determined that the value of area 342 is equal to or greater than 7, “1” is set in area 342 for setting update in step SB307. As a result, when the reset button 68c is pressed once in the situation of "Setting 6," the display returns to "Setting 1."

  When it is specified that the setting key insertion unit 68a has been switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step SB308: YES), the information of the setting value stored in the setting updating area 342 is overwritten on the setting reference area 341 ( Step SB311). As a result, the setting value information updated as a result of the current setting value updating process (FIG. 672) is set in the setting reference area 341 and the setting value corresponding to the set information is changed to the current setting value. The set value of the pachinko machine 10 is used.

  After that, the setting of the interruption inhibition is performed (step SB312). Thus, when the set value update process (FIG. 672) is terminated and the process returns to the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the start of the supply of the operating power in the main process (FIG. 670), the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638) and interruption of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 639) are prohibited.

  After that, a second RAM clearing process is executed (step SB313). In the second RAM clearing process, similarly to the RAM clearing process (step SA416) in the seventy-seventh embodiment, the area in which the information of the setting value indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the work area 221 for the specific control (that is, the area). Except for the setting reference area 341), the work area 221 for the specific control is cleared to “0” and the initial setting is executed. As a result, since the area indicating whether the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the high probability mode is cleared to “0”, the winning / rejecting lottery is performed regardless of the winning / rejecting lottery mode immediately before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. The mode is a low probability mode. In addition, the game is not executed, the opening / closing execution mode is not executed, and the general-purpose display unit 38a is not variably displayed, and the general electric functioning object 34a is in the closed state. Situation. In addition, since the hold storage area 65a and the ordinary power hold area 65c provided in the work area 221 for specific control are also cleared to "0", the hold information for the special figure display unit 37a is erased and the general figure display unit is cleared. The hold information for 38a is deleted. Further, the setting update display flag and the setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 221 for the specific control are cleared to “0”. The setting update area 342 provided in the specific control work area 221 is cleared to “0”. Further, the game stop flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to “0”. In the second RAM clearing process, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to “0” and the initialization is executed. In the second RAM clearing process, various registers of the main CPU 63 are also cleared to "0", and then the initial setting is executed. In this initial setting, processing similar to the internal function register setting processing in step SB102 is executed. Note that the process for clearing “0” and the process for performing initial setting are not executed for the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control.

  Thereafter, a return command at the time of updating is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step SB314). Upon receiving the update return command, the sound emission control device 81 specifies that the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power (step SB101 to step SB122) has been completed in the main CPU 63, and determines the current operating power. It specifies that the set value update process (FIG. 672) has been executed in the process at the start of supply (steps SB101 to SB122). Then, a process corresponding to the reception of the update return command is executed. The contents of the process will be described later.

  As described above, based on performing not only the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the reset button 68c but also the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 while the ON operation of the setting key insertion portion 68a by the setting key, A setting value update process (FIG. 672) is executed. In addition, as described above, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 671) is performed based on performing the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 while performing the ON operation of the setting key insertion unit 68a with the setting key without pressing the reset button 68c. Be executed. As a result, an ON operation for the setting key insertion unit 68a can be shared as an operation for executing the setting-related processing relating to the setting value. Therefore, it is possible to make the operation content for generating the setting-related process easy for the manager of the game hall to understand.

  In the case where the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on by the setting key and the pressing operation of the reset button 68c is not added, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 671) is performed. When the reset operation is performed and a pressing operation of the reset button 68c is added, a setting value update process (FIG. 672) is executed. This makes it possible to make the execution target process different from the setting confirmation process (FIG. 671) and the set value update process (FIG. 672) depending on whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed. Therefore, it is possible to make the operation content for executing the desired processing of the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 671) and the setting value update processing (FIG. 672) easy for the manager of the gaming hall to understand. In addition, by making the operation content for executing the setting value update processing (FIG. 672) more than the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 671), an act of illegally performing the setting value update processing (FIG. 672) is particularly performed. It becomes possible to make it difficult.

  Returning to the description of the main processing (FIG. 670), it is determined in step SB108 that the reset button 68c has been pressed, and the setting key insertion unit 68a has not been turned ON using the setting key. When it is determined (step SB114: NO), it is determined whether or not “1” is set to the game stop flag in the work area 221 for the specific control (step SB116). The game stop flag is a flag that is set to “1” when the power failure flag is not set to “1”, when the checksums do not match, or when the set value is abnormal. When the game stop flag is set to “1”, the processes of steps S8901 to S8905 are executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638), while an affirmative determination is made in step S8906 to perform steps S8907 to S8907. The processing of S8920 is not executed. Accordingly, if the power failure flag is not set to “1” because the power failure processing was not properly performed at the time of the previous power shutdown, the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 If at least one of the checksums does not match due to a change in the storage state of the information since the last power shutdown, or if the set value is abnormal, monitoring of power failure, updating of various counters, While processing for monitoring is executed, processing for advancing the game is not executed.

  If the game stop flag is not set to "1" (step SB116: NO), a first RAM clearing process is executed (step SB117). In the first RAM clearing process, similarly to the RAM clearing process (step SA416) in the seventy-seventh embodiment, an area in which the information of the setting value indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the work area 221 for specific control (that is, the area). Except for the setting reference area 341), the work area 221 for the specific control is cleared to “0” and the initial setting is executed. As a result, since the area indicating whether the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the high probability mode is cleared to “0”, the winning / rejecting lottery is performed regardless of the winning / rejecting lottery mode immediately before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. The mode is a low probability mode. In addition, the game is not executed, the opening / closing execution mode is not executed, and the general-purpose display unit 38a is not variably displayed, and the general electric functioning object 34a is in the closed state. Situation. In addition, since the hold storage area 65a and the ordinary power hold area 65c provided in the work area 221 for specific control are also cleared to "0", the hold information for the special figure display unit 37a is erased and the general figure display unit is cleared. The hold information for 38a is deleted. Further, the setting update display flag and the setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 221 for the specific control are cleared to “0”. The setting update area 342 provided in the specific control work area 221 is cleared to “0”. In the first RAM clearing process, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0" and the initial setting is executed. In the first RAM clearing process, initial settings are executed after various registers of the main CPU 63 are also cleared to "0". In this initial setting, processing similar to the internal function register setting processing in step SB102 is executed.

  Note that the process for clearing “0” and the process for performing initial setting are not executed for the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control. The processing contents of the first RAM clear processing (step SB117) are the same as the processing contents of the second RAM clear processing (step SB313) in the setting value update processing (FIG. 672), but a part of these processing contents is different. Configuration. For example, in the first RAM clearing process (step SB117), the area to be cleared and initialized may not be "0" cleared and initialized in the second RAM clearing process (step SB313). In the second RAM clearing process (step SB313), the area targeted for “0” clearing and initial setting may not be targeted for “0” clearing and initial setting in the first RAM clearing process (step SB117).

  Thereafter, a clearing return command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step SB118). By receiving the clearing return command, the sound emission control device 81 specifies that the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) has been completed in the main CPU 63, and determines the current operating power. It is specified that the first RAM clear processing (step SB117) has been executed in the processing at the start of supply (steps SB101 to SB122). Then, a process corresponding to the reception of the clearing return command is executed. The contents of the process will be described later.

  In the main process (FIG. 670), when a negative determination is made in any of steps SB104 to SB106, that is, when the power failure flag is not set to “1”, when the checksums do not match, or when the set value is abnormal. If so, the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SB119). As described above, when the game stop flag is set to “1”, the processing of steps S8901 to S8905 is executed in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638), while the affirmative determination is made in step S8906. Steps S8907 to S8920 are not executed. Accordingly, if the power failure flag is not set to “1” because the power failure processing was not properly performed at the time of the previous power shutdown, the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 If at least one of the checksums does not match due to a change in the storage state of the information since the last power shutdown, or if the set value is abnormal, monitoring of power failure, updating of various counters, While processing for monitoring is executed, processing for advancing the game is not executed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c has been pressed (step SB120). If the reset button 68c has not been pressed (step SB120: NO), an abnormal command indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the power failure flag, the checksum, or the set value at the start of the supply of the operating power is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. (Step SB121). Upon receiving the abnormal command, the sound light emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 to emit light in a manner corresponding to the information abnormality at the start of the supply of the operating power, and “change the setting from the speaker unit 54. Is output. In addition, a character image “Please change the setting.” Is displayed on the symbol display device 41. These notifications are maintained until the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and is terminated when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, even if the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is temporarily stopped, the above-described notification is made when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is restarted until the set value updating process (FIG. 672) is executed. It will be started again.

  Thereafter, an external output process at the time of abnormality is executed (step SB122). In the external output process at the time of abnormality, a process for externally outputting an abnormal signal to the management computer of the game hall is executed. In this case, the signal output of the abnormal signal is performed over a predetermined period (for example, 100 milliseconds). However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the game stop flag is set to “1”, the signal output of the abnormal signal is continued, and when the game stop flag is cleared to “0”, the abnormal signal is output. The signal output may be stopped. Further, the abnormality signal may be output when an abnormality different from the abnormality relating to the power failure flag, the checksum, and the set value occurs. For example, even when it is specified that the monitoring target has been fraudulently detected (illegal radio wave detection or fraudulent magnetism detection) in the fraud detection process (step S8905) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638), an abnormal signal is also output. External output. However, the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the abnormal signal is also used in this way, and a configuration may be adopted in which an abnormal signal dedicated to an abnormality relating to a power failure flag, a checksum, or a set value is externally output. An abnormality signal corresponding to each of the abnormality relating to the check sum, the abnormality relating to the checksum, and the abnormality relating to the set value may be externally output.

  If the reset button 68c is pressed (step SB120: YES), it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on using the setting key (step SB114). When the reset button 68c is pressed and the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on using the setting key (step SB114 and step SB120: YES), the setting value updating process is executed (step SB115). The processing content of the setting value update processing is as described above. That is, when the operating power is supplied to the main CPU 63 in a state where the “setting change operation” is being performed, a failure has occurred in the main RAM 65 and a negative determination is made in any of steps SB104 to SB106. Even when the determination is made, the setting value update processing (FIG. 672) is executed. Thus, it is possible to give priority to the change of the set value. In the setting value update processing (FIG. 672), the game stop flag is cleared to "0" by executing the initial setting at the start in step SB303 as described above. As a result, when the set value update process (FIG. 672) is executed, it is possible to eliminate the state in which the main RAM 65 is abnormal after the update of the set value is completed.

  On the other hand, when the reset button 68c is pressed and the setting key insertion section 68a is not turned on (step SB120: YES, step SB114: NO), the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to “1”. Is set (step SB116). In the process of step SB116 after the game stop flag is set to "1" in step SB119, the game stop flag is set to "1" as a matter of course. Therefore, an affirmative determination is made in step SB116. In this case, an abnormal command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 in step SB121, and an abnormal signal is externally output in step SB122.

  That is, when an abnormality related to the power failure flag, the checksum, and the set value occurs and a negative determination is made in any of steps SB104 to SB106, the operation to the main CPU 63 is performed in a situation where the “RAM clear operation” is being performed. Even if the supply of power is started, the first RAM clear processing (step SB117) is not executed. The first RAM clearing process is also performed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started while the game stop flag is set to “1” and the “RAM clear operation” is being performed. (Step SB117) is not executed. Thereby, even if the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started while the “RAM clear operation” is being performed, the state in which the game stop flag is set to “1” is not canceled. It becomes possible. On the other hand, when the “setting change operation” is performed, the set value updating process (FIG. 672) is executed regardless of whether the game stop flag is set to “1” and the setting is performed. The game stop flag is cleared to "0" in the initial setting (step SB303) at the start of the value update process (FIG. 672). As a result, in order to eliminate the state in which the game stop flag is set to “1”, it becomes necessary to execute the set value update process (FIG. 672). Therefore, when an information abnormality occurs in the work area 221 for specific control, not only the processing for initializing the work area 221 for the specific control but also resetting of the set value is required. .

  When the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started in a situation where the game stop flag is set to “1”, the “setting change operation” is not performed, that is, “the operation is not performed” In the case of or when the “RAM clear operation” or the “setting confirmation operation” is performed, an affirmative determination is made in step SB109 or step SB116, so that an abnormal command is transmitted in step SB121 and an abnormal command is transmitted in step SB122. Execute the external output process. As a result, when the game stop flag is set to “1”, regardless of the processing result of steps SB104 to SB106 in the subsequent main processing, unless the set value update processing (FIG. 672) is executed, the main side Each time the supply of the operating power to the CPU 63 is started, an abnormality notification in the pachinko machine 10 and an external output to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 when an abnormality occurs are performed. Therefore, it is possible to make the administrator of the gaming hall recognize that the set value should be changed.

  When the processing in step SB112 is performed, when the processing in step SB113 is performed, when the processing in step SB115 is performed, when the processing in step SB118 is performed, or when the processing in step SB122 is performed, Information corresponding to an initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in a check-in-progress counter provided in the work area 221 (step SB123). The value set in the counter during the check is decremented by one each time the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639) is started, similarly to the 67th embodiment. When a value of 1 or more is set in the check-in-progress counter, the check display is continued on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as in the 67th embodiment.

  According to the above configuration, when the supply of the operation power to the main CPU 63 is started, the processing at the start of the supply of the operation power (step SB101 to step SB122) is completed in the main CPU 63 and the remaining process is performed. Before (Step SB125 to Step SB128) is started, an initial check period is started. Accordingly, it is not necessary to control the initial check period in the situation where the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power is performed, so that the processing load in the situation where the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power is being performed is reduced. It becomes possible.

  The setting confirmation process (FIG. 671) and the setting value update process (FIG. 672) are executed as processes at the start of supply of operating power (step SB101 to step SB122), whereas the initial check period is This is started after the processing at the start of the supply of is completed. Thereby, even if the display for check is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 during the initial check period, the display of the set value using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is performed. It is possible to prevent the influence.

  After that, the start-up processing flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step SB124). When the start-up processing flag is cleared to “0”, a negative determination is made in step S8906 when the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) is activated, so that not only the processing in steps S8901 to S8905 is performed. The processing from step S8907 to step S8920 is executed, and the state in which the processing for advancing the game is not executed is released. In step SB124, the power failure flag in the work area 221 for specific control is also cleared to "0".

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to the remaining process of steps SB125 to SB128. That is, the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639). Will result in a residual time. The remaining time varies according to the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process. The remaining time of steps SB125 to SB128 is repeatedly executed using the irregular time. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining processes in steps SB125 to SB128 are irregular processes that are executed irregularly. In steps SB125 to SB128, the same processes as those in steps S113 to S116 of the main process (FIG. 514) in the 33rd embodiment are executed.

  Next, in the state where the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) is being executed, the interrupts of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 639) are permitted. The situation will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 673 (a) shows a period in which the power of the pachinko machine 10 is in the ON state, and FIG. 673 (b) shows a period in which the processing (step SB101 to step SB122) at the time of starting the supply of the operating power is executed. FIG. 673 (c) shows a period in which the start-up processing flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to “1”, and FIG. 673 (d) shows the remaining processing (steps SB125 to SB128). FIG. 673 (e) shows a period during which interrupts are permitted. FIG. 673 (f) shows a period during which the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) or the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 639) is performed. FIG. 673 (g) shows the period during which the set value updating process (FIG. 672) is being executed, and FIG. 673 (h) shows the period during which the setting confirmation process (FIG. 671) is being executed. To indicate the period it is.

  First, a case will be described in which both the setting confirmation process (FIG. 671) and the set value update process (FIG. 672) are not executed in the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the start of the supply of the operating power.

  At the timing of t1, the power-on operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed as shown in FIG. 673 (a). In this case, the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed in a state of “no operation” in which none of the “RAM clear operation”, the “setting change operation”, and the “setting confirmation operation” are performed. At the timing of the t1, the main CPU 63 starts the process (Step SB101 to Step SB122) at the start of the supply of the operating power as shown in FIG. 673 (b). In addition, as shown in FIG. 673 (c), a state is set in which the in-start-up flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1".

  Thereafter, at the timing of t2, the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) is completed as shown in FIG. 673 (b), and the remaining processing (step SB125) is performed as shown in FIG. 673 (d). Step SB128) is started. Also, at the timing of the t2, the start-up processing flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to “0” as shown in FIG. 673 (c). At the timing when the remaining process (steps SB125 to SB128) is started, an interrupt is not permitted as shown in FIG. 673 (e).

  Thereafter, at time t3, the remaining process (steps SB125 to SB128) ends as shown in FIG. 673 (d), and an interrupt is permitted as shown in FIG. 673 (e). This starts the timer interrupt processing as shown in FIG. 673 (f). In this case, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639) is executed first, and when the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639) ends, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638) is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) is executed first and the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) ends, the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 639) is executed. It may be configured to be executed.

  Next, a case where the set value updating process (FIG. 672) is executed in the process (Step SB101 to Step SB122) at the start of the supply of the operating power will be described.

  At the timing of t4, the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed as shown in FIG. 673 (a). In this case, the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed in a state where the “setting change operation” is performed. At the timing of t4, the main CPU 63 starts the process (Step SB101 to Step SB122) at the start of the supply of the operating power as shown in FIG. 673 (b). In addition, as shown in FIG. 673 (c), a state is set in which the in-start-up flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1".

  Thereafter, at time t5, the set value updating process (FIG. 672) is started as shown in FIG. 673 (g). In this case, an interrupt is permitted at the timing of t5 as shown in FIG. 673 (e). When the interruption is permitted, the timer interruption processing is started at the timing of t6 as shown in FIG. 673 (f). In this case, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639) is executed first, and when the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639) ends, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638) is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) is executed first and the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) ends, the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 639) is executed. It may be configured to be executed. Even if the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638) is executed, since the start-up process flag is set to "1" as shown in FIG. 673 (c), power failure monitoring, updating of various counters, The process for performing fraud monitoring is executed, but the process for advancing the game is not executed.

  The timer interrupt process ends at the timing of t7 as shown in FIG. 673 (f), and then the set value updating process (FIG. 672) ends at the timing of t8 as shown in FIG. 673 (g). Then, at the timing t8, the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power (step SB101 to step SB122) ends as shown in FIG. 673 (b), and the start-up processing flag is set as shown in FIG. 673 (c). "0" is cleared. In addition, the remaining process (step SB125 to step SB128) is started at the timing of t8, as shown in FIG. 673 (d).

  Next, a case will be described in which the process for setting confirmation (FIG. 671) is executed in the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the start of the supply of the operating power.

  As shown in FIG. 673 (a), the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed at the timing of t9. In this case, the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed while the “setting confirmation operation” is performed. At the timing t9, the main CPU 63 starts the process (Step SB101 to Step SB122) at the start of the supply of the operating power, as shown in FIG. 673 (b). In addition, as shown in FIG. 673 (c), a state is set in which the in-start-up flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1".

  Thereafter, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 671) is started at the timing of t10 as shown in FIG. 673 (h). In this case, an interrupt is permitted at the timing of the t10 as shown in FIG. 673 (e). When the interruption is permitted, the timer interruption processing is started at the timing of t11 as shown in FIG. 673 (f). In this case, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639) is executed first, and when the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639) ends, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638) is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) is executed first and the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) ends, the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 639) is executed. It may be configured to be executed. Even if the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638) is executed, since the start-up process flag is set to "1" as shown in FIG. 673 (c), power failure monitoring, updating of various counters, The process for performing fraud monitoring is executed, but the process for advancing the game is not executed.

  The timer interrupt process ends at the timing of t12 as shown in FIG. 673 (f), and thereafter the setting confirmation process (FIG. 671) ends at the timing of t13 as shown in FIG. 673 (h). Then, at the timing of the timing t13, the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power (step SB101 to step SB122) is completed as shown in FIG. 673 (b), and the start-up processing flag is set as shown in FIG. 673 (c). "0" is cleared. Also, at the timing of the time t13, the remaining process (step SB125 to step SB128) is started as shown in FIG. 673 (d).

  As described above, if the setting confirmation process (FIG. 671) and the set value update process (FIG. 672) are not executed in the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the start of the supply of the operating power, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 672) is executed. 638) and the execution of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 639) are prohibited, and the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 672) is performed in the state where the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 671) or the setting value update processing (FIG. 672) is being executed. 638) and execution of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639) are permitted. If the setting confirmation process (FIG. 671) and the set value update process (FIG. 672) are not executed, the timer interrupt process is interrupted during the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the start of the supply of the operating power so as not to be activated. By doing so, it is possible to complete the processing (step SB101 to step SB122) at the start of the supply of the operating power at an early stage.

  On the other hand, when the processing for setting confirmation (FIG. 671) and the processing for updating the set value (FIG. 672) are executed, the processing corresponding to the operation of the administrator of the game hall is executed. Becomes longer. In this case, if the interrupt of the timer interrupt processing is still prohibited even in the situation where the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 671) and the setting value update processing (FIG. 672) are being executed, the execution of the timer interrupt processing is started. Timing becomes extremely late. On the other hand, when the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 671) or the setting value update processing (FIG. 672) is executed, the interruption of the timer interruption processing is permitted. This makes it possible to prevent the execution start timing of the timer interrupt processing from being extremely delayed. Further, in a situation where the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 671) and the setting value update processing (FIG. 672) are being executed, processing for controlling the display of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is executed. The second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639) is interrupted and executed, so that the display related to the set value is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 using the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639). Can be performed.

  In addition, in the situation where the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 671) or the setting value update processing (FIG. 672) is being executed, “1” is set in the start-up processing flag. Therefore, even if the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638) is started while the setting confirmation process (FIG. 671) or the setting value update process (FIG. 672) is being executed, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638) is started. Among the various processes of 638), while the processes for monitoring the power failure, updating the various counters, and monitoring for fraud are executed, it is possible to prevent the processes for advancing the game from being executed.

  Next, the progress of the process when an abnormality related to the power failure flag, the checksum, or the set value occurs will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 674 (a) shows a period in which the power of the pachinko machine 10 is in the ON state, and FIG. 674 (b) shows a period in which the processing (step SB101 to step SB122) at the start of the supply of the operating power is executed. FIG. 674 (c) shows a period during which the remaining process (steps SB125 to SB128) is executed, and FIG. 674 (d) shows a first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638) or a second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639). ) Is executed, FIG. 674 (e) shows a period in which the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to “1”, and FIG. FIG. 674 (g) shows a period during which the set value updating process (FIG. 672) is being executed.

  As shown in FIG. 674 (a), the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed at the timing of t1. In this case, the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed in a state of “no operation” in which none of the “RAM clear operation”, the “setting change operation”, and the “setting confirmation operation” are performed. At the timing of the t1, the main CPU 63 starts the process (Step SB101 to Step SB122) at the start of the supply of the operating power as shown in FIG. 673 (b).

  After that, the occurrence of an abnormality related to any of the power failure flag, the checksum, and the set value is specified at the timing of t2, and the game stop flag in the work area 221 for the specific control is set to “ 1 "is set. Also, at the timing of the t2, the external output of the abnormal signal is started as shown in FIG. 674 (f). Thereby, it is possible to specify in the pachinko machine 10 that the management computer of the gaming hall has determined that an abnormality related to any of the power failure flag, the checksum, and the set value has occurred.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t3, the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power (step SB101 to step SB122) is completed as shown in FIG. 674 (b), and the remaining processing (step SB125 to step SB125) is performed as shown in FIG. 674 (c). SB128) is started. At the timing of t4, the external output of the abnormal signal is terminated as shown in FIG. 674 (f). When the external output of the abnormal signal is continued for a predetermined period (for example, 100 milliseconds) from timing t2 to timing t4, an abnormality regarding any of the power failure flag, the checksum, and the set value occurs in the pachinko machine 10. What has been done can be accurately specified on the management computer of the game hall. Further, since the period during which the external output of the abnormal signal is continued is constant for a predetermined period, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for performing the external output of the abnormal signal. Not only the external output of the abnormal signal, but also the abnormality notification in the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting section 53 and the speaker section 54 is executed.

  Thereafter, at time t5, the residual processing (step SB125 to step SB128) ends as shown in FIG. 674 (c). Then, the timer interrupt processing is executed as shown in FIG. 674 (d) from the timing t5 to the timing t6, and the remaining processing (as shown in FIG. 674 (c)) from the timing t6 to the timing t7. Steps SB125 to SB128) are executed, and a timer interrupt process is executed as shown in FIG. 674 (d) from timing t7 to timing t8. However, since the game stop flag is set to “1” as shown in FIG. 674 (e), even if the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) is executed, monitoring of power failure, updating of various counters, and illegal The process for monitoring is executed, but the process for advancing the game is not executed. At time t8, the power failure process is executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638), and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off as shown in FIG. 674 (a).

  Thereafter, at the timing of t9, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on again as shown in FIG. 674 (a), and the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) as shown in FIG. 674 (b) ) Is started. In this case, as shown in FIG. 674 (e), the game stop flag in the work area 221 for the specific control is set to “1”. Accordingly, the external output of the abnormal signal is performed as shown in FIG. 674 (f) from the timing t10 to the timing t12. As a result, it is possible to cause the management computer of the game hall to recognize again that the pachinko machine 10 has an abnormality related to any of the power failure flag, the checksum, and the set value. Not only the external output of the abnormal signal, but also the abnormality notification in the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting section 53 and the speaker section 54 is executed.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 674 (b), the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power (step SB101 to step SB122) ends at the timing of t11, and extends from the timing of t11 to the timing of t13. As shown in (1), the remaining process (step SB125 to step SB128) is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 674 (d), the timer interrupt processing is executed at the timing of t13. However, since the game stop flag is set to “1” as shown in FIG. 674 (e), even if the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) is executed, monitoring of power failure, updating of various counters, and illegal The process for monitoring is executed, but the process for advancing the game is not executed. At time t14, the power failure processing is executed in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638), and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off as shown in FIG. 674 (a).

  Thereafter, at the timing of t15, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on again as shown in FIG. 674 (a), and the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) as shown in FIG. 674 (b) ) Is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 674 (g), the set value updating process (FIG. 672) is executed from timing t16 to timing t17. Executing the set value update process (FIG. 672) not only changes the set value, but also clears the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control to “0” as shown in FIG. 674 (e). You. This eliminates the state in which the execution of the processing for advancing the game due to the occurrence of the information abnormality in the work area 221 for the specific control is prevented. Thereafter, the remaining processing (step SB125 to step SB128) is executed as shown in FIG. 674 (c) from the timing t17 to the timing t18, and the timer interrupt processing is executed at the timing t18 as shown in FIG. 674 (d). Is started.

  When an abnormality related to the power failure flag, the checksum, and the set value occurs as described above and a negative determination is made in any of steps SB104 to SB106 in the main process (FIG. 670), the game in the work area 221 for specific control is performed. When the stop flag is set to “1”, a situation occurs in which processing for advancing the game is not executed. Thus, it is possible to prevent the game from being played despite the information abnormality of the work area 221 for the specific control.

  The state in which the game stop flag is set to “1” is not eliminated unless the set value updating process (FIG. 672) is executed. As a result, in order to eliminate the state in which the game stop flag is set to “1”, it is necessary to execute the set value update processing (FIG. 672), and the occurrence of the information abnormality in the work area 221 for the specific control occurs. In this case, not only the process for initializing the work area 221 for the specific control but also the resetting of the set value can be required.

  Next, display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the supply of the operation power to the main CPU 63 is started will be described with reference to a time chart of FIG. FIG. 675 (a) shows a period during which the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) is executed, and FIG. 675 (b) shows the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power (steps SB101 to SB122). ) Shows the period during which the process after the end of the process is being executed, FIG. 675 (c) shows the initial check period, and FIG. 675 (d) shows the period during which the set value update process (FIG. 672) is being executed. 675 (e) shows a display indicating that the set values of the pachinko machine 10 are being updated and a display indicating the current set values of the pachinko machine 10 are the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. 675 (f) shows the period during which the setting confirmation process (FIG. 671) is being executed, and FIG. 675 (g) shows the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 for confirming the setting update period. hand Shows the setting confirmation during a display period which is performed a display indicating the current settings of the display and the pachinko machine 10 in the first to fourth notification display device 201 to 204 indicate a that situation.

  First, a case will be described in which both the setting confirmation process (FIG. 671) and the set value update process (FIG. 672) are not executed in the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the start of the supply of the operating power.

  As shown in FIG. 675 (a), the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power (step SB101 to step SB122) is performed from the timing t1 to the timing t2. Then, at the timing of t2, as shown in FIG. 675 (b), the processing after the start of the supply of the operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) is started. In this case, the initial check period is started by executing the check counter setting process at step SB122 in the main process (FIG. 670) at the timing of the time t2. Thus, the display for checking is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 (see FIG. 633 (b)). Even during the initial check period, the process for advancing the game is executed, so that the game can be performed in a state where the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are displaying the check. . Thereafter, at the timing of t3, the initial check period ends as shown in FIG. 675 (c). Thereby, the display of the base value is started in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  Next, a case where the set value updating process (FIG. 672) is executed in the process (Step SB101 to Step SB122) at the start of the supply of the operating power will be described.

  At the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 675 (a), the process (Step SB101 to Step SB122) at the start of the supply of the operating power is started. Then, the set value update process (FIG. 672) is executed as shown in FIG. 675 (d) from the timing t5 to the timing t6. In this case, as shown in FIG. 675 (e), the display period during the setting update is from timing t5 to timing t6.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t6, as shown in FIG. 675 (b), the processing after the start of the supply of the operating power (step SB101 to step SB122) is started. In this case, the initial check period is started by executing the setting process of the checking counter at step SB122 in the main process (FIG. 670) at the timing of t6. Thus, the display for checking is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 (see FIG. 633 (b)). Even during the initial check period, the process for advancing the game is executed, so that the game can be performed in a state where the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are displaying the check. . Thereafter, at the timing of t7, the initial check period ends as shown in FIG. 675 (c). Thereby, the display of the base value is started in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  Next, a case will be described in which the process for setting confirmation (FIG. 671) is executed in the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the start of the supply of the operating power.

  As shown in FIG. 675 (a), the process (Step SB101 to Step SB122) at the start of the supply of the operating power is started at the timing of t8. Then, a setting confirmation process (FIG. 671) is executed as shown in FIG. 675 (f) from timing t9 to timing t10. In this case, as shown in FIG. 675 (g), the display period during the setting confirmation is from timing t9 to timing t10.

  After that, at the timing of t10, as shown in FIG. 675 (b), the process after the start of the supply of the operation power (step SB101 to step SB122) is started. In this case, the initial check period is started by executing the setting process of the checking counter at step SB122 in the main process (FIG. 670) at the timing of t10. Thus, the display for checking is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 (see FIG. 633 (b)). Even during the initial check period, the process for advancing the game is executed, so that the game can be performed in a state where the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are displaying the check. . Thereafter, at the timing of t11, the initial check period ends as shown in FIG. 675 (c). Thereby, the display of the base value is started in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  According to the above configuration, when the supply of the operation power to the main CPU 63 is started, the processing at the start of the supply of the operation power (step SB101 to step SB122) is completed in the main CPU 63 and the remaining process is performed. Before (Step SB125 to Step SB128) is started, an initial check period is started. Accordingly, it is not necessary to control the initial check period in the situation where the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power is performed, so that the processing load in the situation where the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power is being performed is reduced. It becomes possible.

  The setting confirmation process (FIG. 671) and the setting value update process (FIG. 672) are executed as processes at the start of supply of operating power (step SB101 to step SB122), whereas the initial check period is This is started after the processing at the start of the supply of is completed. Thereby, even if the display for check is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 during the initial check period, the display of the set value using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is performed. It is possible to prevent the influence.

  Next, when the power failure process is performed in a state where the setting value updating process (FIG. 672) or the setting confirmation process (FIG. 671) is being performed, the main process (FIG. 670) will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG.

  In the case where the power failure process is performed in a state where neither the setting value update process (FIG. 672) nor the setting confirmation process (FIG. 671) is performed, the main process (FIG. 670) is performed when the supply of the operating power is resumed. First, the contents of the processing executed in ()) will be described.

  When the supply of the operation power is resumed in the “no operation” state, the first RAM clear processing (step SB117), the set value update processing (FIG. 672), and the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 671) are performed in the main processing (FIG. 670). ) Is not performed. When the supply of the operating power is resumed in the situation where the “RAM clear operation” is performed, the first RAM clear process (step SB117) is performed in the main process (FIG. 670), while the set value updating process ( 672) and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 671) are not executed. If the supply of the operating power is resumed in the situation where the “setting change operation” has been performed, the set value update process (FIG. 672) is executed in the main process (FIG. 670), while the first RAM clear process (step SB117) ) And the setting confirmation process (FIG. 671) are not executed. When the supply of the operating power is resumed in the situation where the “setting confirmation operation” has been performed, the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 671) is executed in the main processing (FIG. 670), while the first RAM clear processing (step SB117) ) And the set value update process (FIG. 672) are not executed.

  Next, when the power failure process is executed in a situation where the set value update process (FIG. 672) is being executed (that is, a situation where the setting update display flag is set to “1”), the subsequent supply of the operating power is performed. The contents of the processing executed in the main processing (FIG. 670) when resuming the operation will be described.

  When the supply of operating power is resumed in the "no operation" situation, when the supply of operating power is resumed in the situation where the "RAM clear operation" is performed, the operation is performed in the situation where the "setting change operation" is performed In both the case where the supply of power is restarted and the case where the supply of operating power is restarted in the state where the “setting confirmation operation” is performed, the setting value updating process (see FIG. 670) is performed in the main process (FIG. 670). 672) is executed, but the setting confirmation process (FIG. 671) is not executed. In other words, if the power failure process is executed in a state where the set value update process (FIG. 672) is being executed, the set value update is performed regardless of the operation content when restarting the supply of the operating power thereafter. The process (FIG. 672) is newly started.

  With the above configuration, when the supply of the operating power is stopped in the middle of the setting value update process (FIG. 672), the setting key insertion unit when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on when the supply of the operating power is restarted. The setting value update process (FIG. 672) can be newly started irrespective of the operation contents of the reset button 68c and the reset button 68c. Thereby, it is possible to reliably generate an opportunity to complete the update of the set value. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from starting even though the update of the set value has not been completed.

  When the supply of the operating power is stopped in the middle of the setting value updating process (FIG. 672), the setting value updating process (FIG. 672) is executed irrespective of the operation content when the supply of the operating power is restarted. By doing so, it is possible to achieve the above-described excellent effects while simplifying the processing configuration as compared with a configuration in which the processing content executed according to each operation content is changed.

  Next, when the power failure process is performed in a situation where the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 671) is being executed (ie, a situation where the setting confirmation display flag is set to “1”), the subsequent supply of operating power is performed. The contents of the processing executed in the main processing (FIG. 670) when resuming the operation will be described.

  When the supply of the operation power is resumed in the situation where the “RAM clear operation” is performed, the first RAM clear process (step SB117) is executed in the main process (FIG. 670), while the set value updating process (FIG. 672) is performed. Also, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 671) is not executed. In other words, even if the power failure process is executed in the situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 671) is being executed, if the “RAM clear operation” is performed when the supply of the operating power is resumed thereafter, the setting confirmation is performed. The first RAM clearing process (step SB117) is executed without newly executing the process for use (FIG. 671). This makes it possible to prioritize the execution of the first RAM clear processing (step SB117) for the “RAM clear operation”. The setting confirmation display flag is cleared to "0" by executing the first RAM clearing process (step SB117).

  When the supply of the operating power is resumed in the situation where the “setting change operation” is performed, the setting value updating process (FIG. 672) is executed in the main process (FIG. 670), while the setting confirmation process (FIG. 671). Is not executed. In other words, even if the power failure process is executed in the situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 671) is being executed, if the “setting change operation” is performed when the supply of the operating power is resumed thereafter, the setting confirmation is performed. The setting value updating process (FIG. 672) is executed without newly executing the use process (FIG. 671). This makes it possible to prioritize the execution of the setting value update process (FIG. 672) for the “setting change operation”. Even if the setting confirmation process (FIG. 671) is not executed in this way, the setting value to be updated is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204 by executing the setting value update process (FIG. 672). At the end of the setting value updating process (FIG. 672), the information of the setting value to be updated at that time is set in the setting reference area 341. 10 setting values can be confirmed. The setting confirmation display flag is cleared to "0" by executing the second RAM clearing process (step SB313) in the setting value updating process (FIG. 672).

  When the supply of the operating power is resumed in the situation where the “setting confirmation operation” is performed, the main processing (FIG. 670) is used to confirm the setting on condition that no abnormality has occurred in the power failure flag, the checksum, and the set value. The processing (FIG. 671) is executed. Thus, even if the power failure process is performed during the setting confirmation process (FIG. 671), the confirmation of the setting value can be resumed by performing the “setting confirmation operation” when the supply of the operating power is resumed. Becomes

  When the supply of the operation power is resumed in the “no operation” state, the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on in the main processing (FIG. 670) on condition that no abnormality has occurred in the power failure flag, the checksum, and the set value. The setting confirmation process (FIG. 671) is executed even if the ON operation has not been performed. Thus, even if the power failure process is executed during the setting confirmation process (FIG. 671) and the operation power supply is resumed afterwards, the setting value is confirmed even if the status is “no operation”. It is possible to restart.

  Next, processing executed by the sound emission control device 81 will be described. Prior to the description of the processing, the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device 81 will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG.

  The sound emission control device 81 includes a sound emission control board 351. A sound light side MPU 352 is mounted on the sound emission control board 351. The sound light MPU 352 includes a sound light ROM 354 and a sound light RAM 355 in addition to the sound light CPU 353 which is an arithmetic processing device including a control unit and a calculation unit. The sound-light-side MPU 352 includes, in addition to the above elements, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like.

  The sound-light-side ROM 354 is a memory such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory that does not require an external power supply for storing and storing data (that is, a nonvolatile storage unit), and is used as a read-only memory. The sound light ROM 354 stores various control programs executed by the sound light CPU 353 and fixed value data.

  The sound-light-side RAM 355 is a memory (such as a volatile storage unit) that requires an external power supply for storing and holding data, such as an SRAM and a DRAM, and is used for both reading and writing. The sound-light-side RAM 355 is capable of random access and has a shorter read time than the sound-light-side ROM 354 when compared with the same data capacity. The sound-light-side RAM 355 temporarily stores various data and the like when the control program stored in the sound-light-side ROM 354 is executed.

  The sound emission control board 351 has an RTC 356 and an RTC memory 357 mounted thereon in addition to the sound light side MPU 352. The RTC 356 is a real-time clock that constantly measures date / time information and time information, and outputs the measured date / time information and time information (hereinafter, also referred to as date / time information) according to an instruction from the sound-light side CPU 353. It is a configuration that can be performed. The RTC 356 is provided with a backup power supply, and can measure year / month / day information and time information even while the pachinko machine 10 is powered off. Further, the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which date and time information is measured in the RTC 356, but may be a configuration in which only time information is measured.

  The RTC memory 357 is a memory (such as a volatile storage unit) that requires an external power supply for storing and holding data, such as an SRAM and a DRAM, and is used for both reading and writing. The RTC memory 357 stores the date and time information of the RTC 356 in accordance with an instruction from the sound-light-side CPU 353. The date and time information stored in the RTC memory 357 is read by the sound-light-side CPU 353 as necessary. The sound-light-side CPU 353 grasps the reference time based on the date and time information stored in the RTC memory 357, and performs a time-related effect every time a predetermined time (for example, one hour) elapses based on the reference time. Is executed. The RTC memory 357 is configured to be supplied with backup power from a backup power supply provided for the RTC 356, and the date and time information is stored and held even while the pachinko machine 10 is powered off. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the RTC memory 357 may be an EEPROM or the like that does not require an external power supply to store and hold information.

  Next, the effect control processing executed by the sound light side CPU 353 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The effect control process is executed when the supply of the operating power to the sound-light side CPU 353 is started.

  When the update start command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step SB401: YES), the update notification process is executed (step SB402). The update start command is transmitted to the sound / light side CPU 353 when the main CPU 63 starts the set value update process (FIG. 672) as described above. In the setting process of the update notification, an image indicating that the setting value updating process (FIG. 672) is being executed, an image for enabling recognition of the operation content for changing the setting value, and a setting value updating process (FIG. 672). The display control device 82 is controlled so that an image for enabling the operation content for ending (FIG. 672) to be recognized is displayed on the symbol display device 41. This allows the manager of the gaming hall to recognize that the setting value is being changed, and also provides an operation content and a setting value update process required to change the setting value (FIG. 672). Can be recognized by the administrator of the gaming hall. Note that, in addition to or instead of performing the notification in the symbol display device 41, a configuration may be adopted in which at least one of the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 performs.

  If a confirmation start command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step SB403: YES), a setting process for notification at confirmation is executed (step SB404). The confirmation start command is transmitted to the sound light side CPU 353 when the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 671) is started in the main CPU 63 as described above. In the setting process of the notification at the time of confirmation, an image indicating that the process for setting confirmation (FIG. 671) is being executed and an image for enabling recognition of the operation content for ending the process for setting confirmation (FIG. 671) are displayed. The display control device 82 is controlled to be displayed on the symbol display device 41. This allows the manager of the gaming hall to recognize that the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being checked, and is necessary for ending the setting checking process (FIG. 671). It is possible for the manager of the gaming hall to recognize the details of the operation. Note that, in addition to or instead of performing the notification in the symbol display device 41, a configuration may be adopted in which at least one of the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 performs.

  When the processing of steps SB401 to SB404 has been executed, it is determined whether or not any of the normal return command, the clear return command, the check return command, and the update return command has been received from the main CPU 63 ( Step SB405). The normal return command is a process (Step SB101) at the time of starting the supply of the operating power without executing any of the first RAM clearing process (Step SB117), the setting confirmation process (FIG. 671), and the setting value updating process (FIG. 672). To Step SB122) is completed. The reset command at the time of clearing is transmitted when the first RAM clearing process (step SB117) is executed and the process at the start of supply of operating power (step SB101 to step SB122) is completed. The return command at the time of confirmation is transmitted when the processing for setting confirmation (FIG. 671) is executed and the processing at the start of supply of operating power (step SB101 to step SB122) is completed. The return command at the time of updating is transmitted when the setting value updating process (FIG. 672) is executed and the process (Step SB101 to Step SB122) at the start of the supply of the operating power ends.

  If these return commands have not been received (step SB405: NO), the process returns to step SB401. The main CPU 63 transmits one of the return commands to the sound-light CPU 353 when the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power (step SB101 to step SB122) ends. In this case, as described above, the sound-light-side CPU 353 does not execute the processing in step SB406 and subsequent steps until any of the return commands is received from the main-side CPU 63. This prevents the sound light side CPU 353 from starting the execution control of the normal effect while the main CPU 63 executes the processing at the time of starting the supply of the operating power (step SB101 to step SB122). It becomes possible.

  Further, in a situation where no return command has been received, an update start command or a confirmation start command may be received from the main CPU 63. When an update start command is received, the setting value update processing is performed as described above. The notification corresponding to the execution of (FIG. 672) needs to be performed, and when the confirmation start command is received, the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 671) is performed as described above. A corresponding notification needs to be made. In this case, the sound-light-side CPU 353 does not execute the processing of step SB406 and thereafter until receiving any one of the return commands from the main-side CPU 63. Can be suitably started.

  If any return command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step SB405: YES), it is determined whether the received return command is a normal return command (step SB406). As described above, the normal return command is used when the supply of the operating power is started without executing any of the first RAM clear processing (step SB117), the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 671), and the setting value update processing (FIG. 672). Is transmitted when the processing (steps SB101 to SB122) is completed. When the normal return command is received (step SB406: YES), the current date and time information of the RTC 356 is read, and the read date and time information is stored in the RTC memory 357 (step SB407). As a result, the time and date information serving as a reference when specifying the timing for executing the time-dependent effect is stored in the RTC memory 357.

  If the return command received this time is not a normal return command (step SB406: NO), but is a return command at the time of updating (step SB408: YES), an update end notification end process is executed (step SB409). The return command at the time of updating is transmitted to the sound-light-side CPU 353 when the setting value updating process (FIG. 672) is ended in the main-side CPU 63 as described above. In the update notification end process, the notification corresponding to the set value update process (FIG. 672) started in step SB402 is ended.

  If the return command received this time is not a return command at the time of updating (step SB408: NO), but is a return command at the time of confirmation (step SB410: YES), a termination process of the notification at the time of confirmation is executed (step SB411). The return command at the time of confirmation is transmitted to the sound-light side CPU 353 when the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 671) is terminated in the main CPU 63 as described above. In the confirmation end notification processing, the notification corresponding to the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 671) started in step SB404 is ended.

  When the processing of step SB407 is executed, when the processing of step SB409 is executed, when a negative determination is made in step SB410, or when the processing of step SB411 is executed, the processing for controlling the execution of the normal effect is performed. Execute. Specifically, it is first determined whether or not it is time to start a time-based effect (step SB412).

  The time-based effect is an effect that is executed every time a predetermined time (for example, one hour) elapses with reference to a reference time corresponding to date and time information stored in the RTC memory 357. In the time corresponding effect, the display light emitting unit 53 performs a light emitting effect corresponding to the time corresponding effect, the speaker unit 54 performs a sound output effect corresponding to the time corresponding effect, and the symbol display device 41 corresponds to the time corresponding effect. A display effect is performed.

  When the time-based effect is started in the situation where the game effect is being executed, the display light-emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 execute the time-based effect in preference to the game effect. On the other hand, in the symbol display device 41, the image display corresponding to the time-dependent effect is performed in a state where the image display corresponding to the effect for the game round is reduced and displayed on a part of the display surface of the symbol display device 41. In addition, when the time-based effect is started in a situation where the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is being executed, the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 execute the time-based effect in preference to the effect for the opening / closing execution mode. On the other hand, in the symbol display device 41, the image display corresponding to the time-responsive effect is performed in a state where the image display corresponding to the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is reduced and displayed on a part of the display surface of the symbol display device 41.

  The configuration is such that the time-dependent effect is executed each time a predetermined time (for example, one hour) elapses with reference to the reference time corresponding to the date and time information stored in the RTC memory 357. If the reference times of the pachinko machines 10 coincide with each other, it is possible to simultaneously start time-responsive effects on the plurality of pachinko machines 10. In the gaming hall, since the power of the plurality of pachinko machines 10 is simultaneously turned on, the reference times of the plurality of pachinko machines 10 basically match.

  In step SB412, the reference time is determined based on the date and time information stored in the RTC memory 357. Further, the current date and time information of the RTC 356 is read. Then, it is determined whether or not the difference between the reference time and the time corresponding to the current date and time information read from the RTC 356 is an integral multiple of a predetermined time. If an affirmative determination is made in step SB412, a setting process for a time-based effect is executed (step SB413). In the setting process of the time-based effect, the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 are set to execute the time-based effect, and a command for executing the time-based effect on the symbol display device 41 is displayed by the display control device. 82. The execution content of the time-dependent effect may be different depending on the number of executions of the time-dependent effect based on the reference time corresponding to the date and time information stored in the RTC memory 357.

  When a negative determination is made in step SB412 or when the process of step SB413 is performed, other processes are performed (step SB414). In other processes, when a command to start a game effect is received from the main CPU 63, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 start the game effect. If the setting is made and the effect for the game play is to be advanced, the settings for making the effect for the game play proceed with the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 are made. If it is a situation to end the effect for the game, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 are set to end the effect for the game. In other processes, when a command to start the opening / closing execution mode effect is received from the main CPU 63, the opening / closing execution mode effect is performed by the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting section 53, and the speaker section 54. When the setting for starting is performed and the effect for the open / close execution mode is to be advanced, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 are used to advance the effect for the open / close execution mode. When the setting is performed and the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is to be ended, the setting for ending the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is performed by the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54.

  Next, the operation corresponding to the content of the processing executed in the processing (steps SB101 to SB122) at the start of the supply of the operating power in the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG.

  The first RAM clearing process (step SB117), the setting confirmation process (FIG. 671), and the setting value updating process (FIG. 672) are all performed in the process (steps SB101 to SB122) when the main CPU 63 starts supplying the operating power. Is not executed, the main-side CPU 63 transmits a normal return command to the sound-light-side CPU 353 when the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) ends. When receiving the normal return command, the sound-light-side CPU 353 does not execute control related to the notification in response to the command. On the other hand, when receiving the normal return command, the sound-light-side CPU 353 stores the current date and time information measured by the RTC 356 in the RTC memory 357. As a result, information corresponding to the reference time referred to for specifying the execution trigger of the time-based effect is newly stored in the RTC memory 357.

  When the first RAM clear processing (step SB117) is executed in the processing (step SB101 to step SB122) at the start of the supply of the operation power in the main CPU 63, the processing at the start of supply of the operation power (step SB101 to step SB122) Is completed, the main CPU 63 transmits a clearing return command to the sound light CPU 353. When receiving the clearing return command, the sound-light side CPU 353 does not execute control related to notification in response to the command. Further, even if the sound-light-side CPU 353 receives the clearing return command, the current date and time information measured by the RTC 356 is not stored in the RTC memory 357. Since power for backup is supplied to the RTC memory 357, if new storage of date and time information does not occur in the RTC memory 357, the RTC memory is turned off before the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. The date and time information stored in 357 is stored and held as it is.

  When the set value updating process (FIG. 672) is executed in the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the start of the supply of the operation power in the main CPU 63, the process at the start of the supply of the operation power (steps SB101 to SB122) Is completed, the main CPU 63 transmits a return command at the time of updating to the sound light CPU 353. When receiving the update return command, the sound-light-side CPU 353 terminates the notification corresponding to the execution of the set value update process (FIG. 672). Further, even if the sound-light-side CPU 353 receives the update return command, it does not store the current date and time information measured by the RTC 356 in the RTC memory 357. Since power for backup is supplied to the RTC memory 357, if new storage of date and time information does not occur in the RTC memory 357, the RTC memory is turned off before the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. The date and time information stored in 357 is stored and held as it is.

  When the setting confirmation process (FIG. 671) is performed in the process (Step SB101 to Step SB122) at the start of the supply of the operation power in the main CPU 63, the process at the start of the supply of the operation power (Step SB101 to Step SB122) Is completed, the main CPU 63 transmits a return command for confirmation to the sound light CPU 353. When receiving the return command at the time of confirmation, the sound-light-side CPU 353 terminates the notification corresponding to the execution of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 671). Further, even if the sound-light side CPU 353 receives the return command at the time of confirmation, it does not store the current date and time information measured by the RTC 356 in the RTC memory 357. Since power for backup is supplied to the RTC memory 357, if new storage of date and time information does not occur in the RTC memory 357, the RTC memory is turned off before the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. The date and time information stored in 357 is stored and held as it is.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  When the set value update process (FIG. 672) is started, the set value is changed from a set value corresponding to a predetermined start. Thus, regardless of the set value of the use target before the start of the set value update process (FIG. 672), the setting value update process (FIG. 672) changes the set value from a set value corresponding to a fixed start in the set value update process (FIG. 672). Can be performed. Therefore, the work contents of the setting value changing operation are easy for the operator to understand.

  The setting value for the start is specifically “setting 1” having the lowest advantage. Therefore, when the setting value update process (FIG. 672) is started, the setting value is changed from “Setting 1” having the lowest advantage. Thereby, even if the manager of the game hall unintentionally ends the set value update process (FIG. 672) immediately after the start of the set value update process (FIG. 672), the set value having the lowest degree of advantage can be obtained. Therefore, even if a game is started in such a situation, it is possible to prevent an unintended disadvantage from occurring in the game hall.

  The specific control work area 221 is provided with a setting reference area 341 and a setting update area 342, and information corresponding to the setting value to be used is stored in the setting reference area 341 and the setting value update processing is performed. The information corresponding to the setting value that is being changed in the situation where (FIG. 672) is being executed is stored in the setting update area 342. As a result, while the information of the set value set before the start of the set value update process (FIG. 672) is stored and held in the setting reference area 341, the information to be updated in the set value update process (FIG. 672) is obtained. The set value can be changed.

  When the supply of the operating power is started, the main CPU 63 transmits a clear reset command when executing the first RAM clearing process (step SB117), and executes the set value updating process (FIG. 672). A return command at the time of updating is transmitted, and when a process for setting confirmation (FIG. 671) is executed, a return command at the time of confirmation is transmitted. If none of the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 671) has been executed, the normal return command is transmitted. This makes it possible to control not only the main CPU 63 but also the sound light CPU 353 in accordance with the type of start situation when the supply of the operating power is started.

  The sound-light-side CPU 353 makes an affirmative determination in step SB405 of the effect control process (FIG. 678) regardless of whether any of the normal return command, the clear return command, the update return command, and the return command for confirmation is received. , And the process of steps SB412 to SB414 is executed. On the other hand, when the normal return command is received, the write process to the RTC memory 357 is executed (step SB407), and when the update return command is received, the update time notification end process (step SB409) is executed. When the return command at the time of confirmation is received, the end processing of the notification at the time of confirmation (step SB411) is executed, and when the return command at the time of clear is received, the dedicated processing is not executed. Thus, while the processing corresponding to the progress of the game is started by the sound-light side CPU 353 upon reception of any one of the return commands among the return commands, the control corresponding to each return command is controlled by the sound light. This can be executed by the side CPU 353.

  After transmitting any one of the return commands, the main CPU 63 ends the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) and starts the processing for controlling the progress of the game (steps S8907 to S8920). When receiving any one of the return commands, the sound-light-side CPU 353 controls the execution of the effect corresponding to the progress of the game. Thus, after the processing for controlling the progress of the game is executed by the main CPU 63, the sound light CPU 353 controls the execution of the effect corresponding to the progress of the game. Becomes possible. In this case, the sound-light-side CPU 353 executes a process corresponding to each return command. Thus, the sound light side CPU 353 uses the plurality of return commands for differentiating the execution contents of the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power in the sound light side CPU 353 to start the effect execution control corresponding to the progress of the game. Can be recognized.

  Since the time-based effect is executed when the time-based effect is executed based on the date and time information stored in the RTC memory 357, the time-based effect is executed at a predetermined time. It becomes possible to. In this case, when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the first RAM clearing process (step SB117), the setting value updating process (FIG. 672), or the setting confirmation process (FIG. 671) is executed. Does not newly store the date and time information in the RTC memory 357, but executes any of the first RAM clearing process (step SB117), the setting value updating process (FIG. 672), and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 671). If not, the current date and time information measured by the RTC 356 is stored in the RTC memory 357. Thereby, according to the content of the processing executed by the main CPU 63 when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the situation in which the date and time information is newly stored in the RTC memory 357, A situation where date and time information is not newly stored in the memory 357 can be caused.

  When the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, when the “RAM clear operation” is performed, the first RAM clear processing (step SB117) is executed, and when the “setting change operation” is performed, , A setting value update process (FIG. 672) is executed, and when a “setting confirmation operation” is performed, a setting confirmation process (FIG. 671) is executed. On the other hand, when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started in the “no operation” state, the first RAM clearing process (step SB117), the setting value updating process (FIG. 672), and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 671) Neither is performed. In this case, when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started as described above, the first RAM clear processing (step SB117), the set value update processing (FIG. 672), or the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 671) is executed. In this case, while the date and time information is not newly stored in the RTC memory 357, any of the first RAM clearing process (step SB117), the setting value updating process (FIG. 672), and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 671) are performed. The current date and time information measured by the RTC 356 when the process is not executed is stored in the RTC memory 357. Thereby, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, whether the date and time information is newly stored in the RTC memory 357 or whether the date and time information is not newly stored in the RTC memory 357 is determined. Can be selected by the manager of the game hall.

  When the supply of the operation power to the main CPU 63 is started, the processing at the start of the supply of the operation power (step SB101 to step SB122) is completed in the main CPU 63, and the remaining processing (step SB125 to step SB125) is performed. Before SB128) is started, an initial check period is started. Accordingly, it is not necessary to control the initial check period in the situation where the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power is performed, so that the processing load in the situation where the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power is being performed is reduced. It becomes possible.

  The setting confirmation process (FIG. 671) and the setting value update process (FIG. 672) are executed as processes (steps SB101 to SB122) at the start of the supply of the operating power, whereas the supply of the operating power is performed during the initial check period. The process is started after the process at the time of the start is completed. Thereby, even if the display for check is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 during the initial check period, the display of the set value using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is performed. It is possible to prevent the influence.

  When the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, one of the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 671) and the setting value update processing (FIG. 672) is executed, and the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 671) and the setting value updating process (FIG. 672) are not executed, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 perform the check display. Thereby, it is possible to confirm whether the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal regardless of the situation when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started.

  In the main process (FIG. 670) of the main CPU 63, when either the setting confirmation process (FIG. 671) or the set value update process (FIG. 672) is executed, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 671) and the setting This is a process that is executed in common even when none of the value update processing (FIG. 672) is executed, and is one of the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 671) and the set value update processing (FIG. 672). If this is executed, check the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as a process whose execution order is later than the setting confirmation process (FIG. 671) and the setting value update process (FIG. 672). The process for starting the display is set. As described above, since the process for starting the display for checking on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is set as the common process, the above-described advantages are achieved while simplifying the processing configuration. It is possible to achieve the effect.

  Even in the situation where the display for check is being executed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the process for causing the main CPU 63 to proceed with the game can be started. Thereby, even if the display for checking is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 after the execution of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 671) or the setting value update process (FIG. 672), the game can be played. It is possible to prevent the start timing of the processing for proceeding from being delayed.

  In the process (Step SB101 to Step SB122) at the start of the supply of the operation power, which is executed when the supply of the operation power is started in the main CPU 63, it is determined whether or not the set value of the use target is within the normal range. A process for monitoring is executed. Then, when the set value of the use target is abnormal, a regulated state is set in which the processing for advancing the game is not started. This makes it possible to prevent the processing for advancing the game from being started even though the setting value of the use target is abnormal.

  The process for monitoring whether the set value of the use target is within the normal range is the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638) even after the process at the start of the supply of the operating power (step SB101 to step SB122) is completed. ) Is performed in step S8919. Thereby, even if the set value of the use target becomes abnormal in the course of the progress of the game, it is possible to deal with it.

  In the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the start of the supply of the operation power, which is executed when the supply of the operation power is started in the main CPU 63, it is determined whether or not the set value of the use target is within the normal range. In addition to monitoring, monitoring is performed to determine whether the power failure flag in the specific control work area 221 is set to “1”, and the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 are checked. Monitoring of whether the sum is normal is performed. When the power failure flag is not set to “1” or when the checksum is abnormal, a state is entered in which the process for advancing the game is not started. As a result, it is possible to prevent the processing for advancing the game from being started even though the information abnormality has occurred in the main RAM 65.

  The regulation state is restarted when the supply of the operating power is restarted even if the supply of the operating power is stopped. Thus, the state in which the execution of the processing for advancing the game is restricted due to the occurrence of the information abnormality in the main RAM 65 can be prevented from being released only by stopping the supply of the operation power. Become.

  The restricted state is released by executing the set value update process (FIG. 672). This makes it possible to newly set the set value of the use target when releasing the state in which the progress of the game is restricted due to the occurrence of the information abnormality in the main RAM 65.

  Even in the restricted state, power failure monitoring and various counter updating processes are executed. This makes it possible to ensure execution of necessary processing even in the state where the progress of the game is regulated as described above. In particular, by executing the power failure monitoring, it is possible to appropriately cope with a power failure occurring even when the progress of the game is restricted.

  When the above-mentioned restricted state is set, it is notified that the set value of the use target should be changed. Thus, when an information abnormality occurs in the main RAM 65, it is possible to urge the manager of the gaming hall to resolve the abnormality.

  When an information abnormality has occurred in the main RAM 65, an abnormality signal is externally output to the management computer of the game hall. Thus, when an information abnormality occurs in the main RAM 65, it is possible to urge the manager of the gaming hall to resolve the abnormality.

  An abnormality signal is externally output to the management computer of the game hall even when an abnormality occurs that is different from the case where the information abnormality has occurred in the main RAM 65. This makes it possible to share the configuration for performing external output.

  Even if the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped in the restricted state in which the progress of the game is restricted due to the occurrence of the information abnormality with respect to the main RAM 65, it is still regulated when the supply of the operating power is resumed. If the state is not released, the external output of the abnormal signal is performed again. As a result, in the regulated state, an abnormal signal is externally output each time the supply of the operating power is restarted. Therefore, it becomes easy for the manager of the gaming hall to recognize that the information abnormality has occurred in the main RAM 65.

  If the setting confirmation process (FIG. 671) and the setting value update process (FIG. 672) are not executed in the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the start of the operation power supply, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638) When the execution of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 639) is prohibited and the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 671) or the setting value update processing (FIG. 672) is executed, the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) and Execution of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639) is permitted. If the setting confirmation process (FIG. 671) and the set value update process (FIG. 672) are not executed, the timer interrupt process is interrupted during the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the start of the supply of the operating power so as not to be activated. By doing so, it is possible to complete the processing (step SB101 to step SB122) at the start of the supply of the operating power at an early stage.

  On the other hand, when the processing for setting confirmation (FIG. 671) and the processing for updating the set value (FIG. 672) are executed, the processing corresponding to the operation of the administrator of the game hall is executed. Becomes longer. In this case, if the interrupt of the timer interrupt processing is still prohibited even in the situation where the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 671) and the setting value update processing (FIG. 672) are being executed, the execution of the timer interrupt processing is started. Timing becomes extremely late. On the other hand, when the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 671) or the setting value update processing (FIG. 672) is executed, the interruption of the timer interruption processing is permitted. This makes it possible to prevent the execution start timing of the timer interrupt processing from being extremely delayed. Further, in a situation where the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 671) and the setting value update processing (FIG. 672) are being executed, processing for controlling the display of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is executed. The second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639) is interrupted and executed, so that the display related to the set value is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 using the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639). Can be performed.

  In addition, in the situation where the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 671) or the setting value update processing (FIG. 672) is being executed, “1” is set in the start-up processing flag. Therefore, even if the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638) is started while the setting confirmation process (FIG. 671) or the setting value update process (FIG. 672) is being executed, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638) is started. Among the various processes of 638), while the processes for monitoring the power failure, updating the various counters, and monitoring for fraud are executed, it is possible to prevent the processes for advancing the game from being executed.

  Note that when none of the first RAM clearing process (step SB117), the setting value updating process (FIG. 672), and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 671) are performed, new storage of date and time information in the RTC memory 357 occurs. Then, when any of the first RAM clear processing (step SB117), the set value update processing (FIG. 672), and the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 671) is executed, new storage of the date and time information in the RTC memory 357 is performed. It is not limited to a configuration that does not occur. For example, when none of the first RAM clear processing (step SB117), the setting value update processing (FIG. 672), and the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 671) are executed, or when the first RAM clear processing (step SB117) is executed In this case, a new storage of the date and time information in the RTC memory 357 may be performed. Also, when none of the first RAM clearing process (step SB117), the setting value updating process (FIG. 672) and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 671) are executed, or when the setting value updating process (FIG. 672) is executed In this case, a new storage of the date and time information in the RTC memory 357 may be performed. Further, when none of the first RAM clearing process (step SB117), the setting value updating process (FIG. 672), and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 671) are executed, or when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 671) is executed. In this case, a new storage of the date and time information in the RTC memory 357 may be performed.

  Also, if none of the first RAM clearing process (step SB117), the setting value updating process (FIG. 672) and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 671) are executed, or if the setting value updating process (FIG. 672) is executed, Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which the date and time information is newly stored in the RTC memory 357 when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 671) is executed. If none of the first RAM clearing process (step SB117), the setting value updating process (FIG. 672), and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 671) are performed, or if the first RAM clearing process (step SB117) is performed, Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which the date and time information is newly stored in the RTC memory 357 when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 671) is executed. If none of the first RAM clearing process (step SB117), the setting value updating process (FIG. 672), and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 671) are performed, or if the first RAM clearing process (step SB117) is performed, Alternatively, when the set value update process (FIG. 672) is executed, a new storage of the date and time information in the RTC memory 357 may be performed.

  Further, when the first RAM clearing process (step SB117) is executed, new storage of date and time information in the RTC memory 357 occurs, otherwise, new date and time information is stored in the RTC memory 357. It is good also as a structure which does not generate | occur | produce. Further, when the set value update process (FIG. 672) is executed, new storage of the date and time information in the RTC memory 357 occurs, and otherwise, a new date and time information is stored in the RTC memory 357. It is good also as a structure which does not generate | occur | produce. When the setting confirmation process (FIG. 671) is executed, new storage of the date and time information in the RTC memory 357 occurs. In other cases, the new date and time information in the RTC memory 357 is newly stored. It is good also as a structure which does not generate | occur | produce. Further, when the first RAM clear processing (step SB117) or the set value update processing (FIG. 672) is executed, a new storage of the date and time information in the RTC memory 357 occurs. A configuration in which new storage of date and time information in the memory 357 does not occur may be adopted. When the first RAM clear processing (step SB117) or the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 671) is executed, new storage of the date and time information in the RTC memory 357 occurs, otherwise, the RTC memory 357 It is possible to adopt a configuration in which new storage of date and time information does not occur. When the setting value update processing (FIG. 672) or the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 671) is executed, new storage of the date and time information in the RTC memory 357 occurs. A configuration in which new storage of date and time information in the memory 357 does not occur may be adopted.

  When the setting value updating process (FIG. 672) is executed, the entirety of the specific control work area 221 including the setting reference area 341 and the setting updating area 342 in the initial setting at the start (step SB303). The configuration may be such that the area is cleared to “0” and initialization is performed. In this case, the configuration may be such that the second RAM clear processing (step SB313) is not executed in the set value update processing (FIG. 672).

  Further, when the set value update process (FIG. 672) is started, the change of the set value may be started from a predetermined set value other than “Setting 1”. For example, a configuration in which the change of the set value is started from “Setting 2”, a configuration in which the change of the set value is started from “Setting 3”, or a change in the set value is started from “Setting 4” A configuration in which the change of the set value is started from “setting 5” or a configuration in which the change of the set value is started from “setting 6”.

  When the setting value updating process (FIG. 672) is started, the setting value information stored in the setting reference area 341 is overwritten on the setting updating area 342 as in the 77th embodiment. Thus, the configuration may be such that the change of the set value is started from the set value that has been set as the object to be used until then.

  Further, the processing for transmitting various return commands in the main processing (FIG. 670) may be set as processing before the start of the remaining processing (steps SB125 to SB128). In this case, if any one of the first RAM clearing process (step SB117), the setting value updating process (FIG. 672), and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 671) is executed, a flag corresponding to the process is set. In the process for transmitting various return commands, a configuration may be adopted in which a return command corresponding to the state of the flag is transmitted to the sound-light side CPU 353.

  Further, in addition to or instead of the configuration in which the time corresponding effect is executed each time a predetermined time elapses based on the date and time information stored in the RTC memory 357, the date and time information stored in the RTC memory 357 is referenced. It may be configured to monitor whether a predetermined abnormality has occurred every time a predetermined time elapses, and every time a predetermined time elapses based on the date and time information stored in the RTC memory 357. The configuration may be such that the notification of the base value is performed. In this case, the configuration may be such that the RTC 356 and the RTC memory 357 are provided on the main control board 61, and the main CPU 63 performs the abnormality monitoring or the notification of the base value. A plurality of pachinko machines 10 installed in the game hall simultaneously perform abnormality monitoring, and the result is reported on the symbol display device 41, for example, to periodically determine whether a predetermined abnormality has occurred. Monitoring can be performed on a plurality of pachinko machines 10 collectively. In addition, the base value is simultaneously notified on the symbol display device 41 or the like by the plurality of pachinko machines 10 set in the game hall, so that the regular monitoring of the base value is collected for the plurality of pachinko machines 10. Can be performed. Note that the above various notifications are not limited to the configuration performed by the pachinko machine 10 itself, and may be configured to be performed by an external output to the management computer of the gaming hall.

  Further, in the main processing (FIG. 670), when it is determined that “1” is not set in the power failure flag, when it is determined that the checksum is abnormal, or when the set value of the setting reference area 341 is abnormal. If it is determined, the setting value updating process (FIG. 670) may be forcibly executed regardless of whether the “setting change operation” is performed. This makes it possible to immediately change the set value when an information abnormality occurs in the main RAM 65.

<82nd embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the effect control processing executed by the sound-light side CPU 353 is different from that of the above-mentioned eighteenth embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the above-described eighteenth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the 81st embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 680 is a flowchart illustrating the effect control processing according to the present embodiment, which is executed by the sound-light-side CPU 353.

  In steps SB501 to SB505, the same processes as those in steps SB401 to SB405 of the effect control process (FIG. 678) in the eighteenth embodiment are executed. When any one of the normal return command, the clear return command, the check return command, and the update return command is received from the main CPU 63 (step SB505: YES), the return command received this time is other than the normal return command. It is determined whether the command is a return command (step SB506).

  When the return command received this time is one of the return command at the time of clearing, the return command at the time of confirmation, and the return command at the time of updating (step SB506: YES), the effect control processing (FIG. 678) in the 81st embodiment is performed. As in step SB407, the current date and time information of the RTC 356 is read, and the read date and time information is stored in the RTC memory 357 (step SB407). As a result, the time and date information serving as a reference when specifying the timing for executing the time-dependent effect is stored in the RTC memory 357.

  In steps SB508 to SB514, the same processes as those in steps SB408 to SB414 of the effect control process (FIG. 678) in the eighteenth embodiment are executed.

  FIG. 681 is an explanatory diagram for describing an operation corresponding to the content of the processing executed in the processing (steps SB101 to SB122) at the start of the supply of the operating power in the main CPU 63.

  As in the eighteenth embodiment, the first RAM clear processing (step SB117), the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 671), and the setting are performed in the processing (step SB101 to step SB122) when the supply of the operating power is started in the main CPU 63. If none of the value update processing (FIG. 672) has been executed, the main CPU 63 transmits a normal return command to the sound-light CPU 353, and if the first RAM clear processing (step SB117) has been executed, The side CPU 63 transmits a clearing return command to the light / light side CPU 353, and when the set value updating process (FIG. 672) is executed, the main CPU 63 transmits a refreshing time return command to the sound / light side CPU 353, When the setting confirmation process (FIG. 671) is executed, the main CPU 63 instructs the sound light CPU 353 to execute a return command at the time of confirmation. To send.

  The sound-light-side CPU 353 terminates the notification corresponding to the execution of the set value update process (FIG. 672) when the return command at the time of the update is received, as in the case of the eighteenth embodiment. When the return command is received, the notification corresponding to the execution of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 671) is ended. Similarly to the 81st embodiment, even if the sound-light-side CPU 353 receives the normal return command and the clearing return command, it does not execute the control related to the notification.

  When the sound-light-side CPU 353 receives any of the clearing return command, the update returning command, and the confirmation returning command, it stores the current date and time information measured by the RTC 356 in the RTC memory 357. As a result, information corresponding to the reference time referred to for specifying the execution trigger of the time-based effect is newly stored in the RTC memory 357. On the other hand, the sound-light-side CPU 353 does not store the current date and time information measured by the RTC 356 in the RTC memory 357 even when receiving the normal return command. Since power for backup is supplied to the RTC memory 357, if new storage of date and time information in the RTC memory 357 does not occur, the RTC memory 357 is turned off before the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. The date and time information stored in the memory 357 is stored and held as it is.

  According to the above configuration, any of the first RAM clearing process (step SB117), the set value updating process (FIG. 672), and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 671) in the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the start of the supply of the operating power. Is executed, the date and time information stored in the RTC memory 357 is rewritten to the current date and time information measured by the RTC 356, whereas the processing at the start of supply of the operating power (steps SB101 to SB101) If none of the first RAM clearing process (step SB117), the setting value updating process (FIG. 672), and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 671) are executed in step SB122), the data is stored in the RTC memory 357. Date and time information is not rewritten. Thus, even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is once turned off for maintenance and operation check of the pachinko machine 10 during the operation of the game hall, the operation is not performed when the supply of the operation power is resumed thereafter. By performing the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to prevent the date and time information stored in the RTC memory 357 from being rewritten. Therefore, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is once turned off during the operation of the gaming hall and the supply of the operating power is resumed, the reference time of the time-response effect is the same as that of the surrounding pachinko machine 10 in the gaming hall. However, the operability for restarting the supply of the operation power to the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  Further, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on in the “no operation” state, the date and time information stored in the RTC memory 357 is not rewritten, and the date and time information stored in the RTC memory 357 is not rewritten. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on so that the data is not rewritten, the first RAM clearing process (step SB117), the setting value updating process (FIG. 672), and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 671) are performed. It is possible to prevent the processing from being executed.

<83rd embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the main processing executed by the main CPU 63 is different from that of the 81st embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the above-described eighteenth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the 81st embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 682 is a flowchart showing the main processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processing of steps SB601 to SB630 in the main processing is executed by using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

  Steps SB601 to SB622 execute the same processing as steps SB101 to SB122 of the main processing (FIG. 670) in the eighteenth embodiment.

  When the processing of step SB612 is executed, when the processing of step SB613 is executed, when the processing of step SB615 is executed, when the processing of step SB618 is executed, or when the processing of step SB622 is executed, Information corresponding to the initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in a check-in-progress counter provided in the work area 221 (step SB623). The value set in the counter during the check is decremented by one each time the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639) is started, similarly to the 67th embodiment. When a value of 1 or more is set in the check-in-progress counter, the check display is continued on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as in the 67th embodiment.

  According to the above configuration, when the supply of the operation power to the main CPU 63 is started, the processing at the start of the supply of the operation power (steps SB601 to SB622) is completed in the main CPU 63 and the remaining processing is performed. Before (Step SB627 to Step SB630) is started, an initial check period is started. Accordingly, it is not necessary to control the initial check period in the situation where the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power is performed, so that the processing load in the situation where the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power is being performed is reduced. It becomes possible.

  Also, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 671) and the setting value update process (FIG. 672) are executed as the process (Step SB601 to Step SB622) at the time of starting the supply of the operation power, whereas the operation check is performed during the initial check period. This is started after the processing at the start of the supply of is completed. Thereby, even if the display for check is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 during the initial check period, the display of the set value using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is performed. It is possible to prevent the influence.

  After that, the interrupt permission is set (step SB624). Thus, the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) is started by interrupting at the first interrupt cycle, and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 639) is started by interrupting at the second interrupt cycle. When the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639) is started by interruption, the first to fourth notification display devices are displayed so that a check display is performed in a situation where a value of 1 or more is set in the checking counter. 201 to 204 are display-controlled.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the check-in-progress counter in the work area 221 for the specific control is “0” (step SB625). Then, it waits in step SB625 until the value of the check-in-progress counter becomes “0”. In this case, since the state where the start-up processing flag in the specific control work area 221 is set to “1” is maintained, even if the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) is interrupted and started, Among the various processes of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638), the processes for monitoring the power failure, updating the various counters, and monitoring the illegality are executed, while the processes for advancing the game are not executed. The first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) is terminated. Therefore, until the initial check period set in step SB623 elapses, the display for check is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in a state where the execution of the processing for advancing the game is prevented. Is continued.

  Thereafter, the start-up processing flag in the specific control work area 221 is cleared to "0" (step SB626). When the start-up processing flag is cleared to “0”, a negative determination is made in step S8906 when the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) is activated, so that not only the processing in steps S8901 to S8905 is performed. The processing from step S8907 to step S8920 is executed, and the state in which the processing for advancing the game is not executed is released. In step SB626, the power failure flag in the work area 221 for specific control is also cleared to "0".

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to the remaining process of steps SB627 to SB630. That is, the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639). Will result in a residual time. The remaining time varies in accordance with the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, and the remaining processes of steps SB627 to SB630 are repeatedly executed using the irregular time. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining processes of Steps SB627 to SB630 are irregular processes that are executed irregularly. In steps SB627 to SB630, the same processes as those in steps S113 to S116 of the main process (FIG. 514) in the 33rd embodiment are executed.

  According to the above configuration, the display for checking is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in a state where the execution of the processing for advancing the game is prevented. This makes it possible to check whether the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal in a situation where no game is played.

<84th embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the main processing executed by the main CPU 63 is different from that of the 81st embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the above-described eighteenth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the 81st embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 683 is a flowchart illustrating main processing according to the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processing of steps SB701 to SB734 in the main processing is executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

  In the main processing of this embodiment, unlike the eighteenth embodiment, the power-on initialization processing is not executed. Therefore, when the main processing is started, the processing after step SB701 is started without waiting for the elapse of the predetermined time for the wait. The power-on initialization process is not executed, but access to the main RAM 65 is permitted when the main process is started.

  In the main processing, first, the internal function register setting processing is executed (step SB701), similarly to step SB102 of the main processing (FIG. 670) in the 81st embodiment, and the steps of the main processing (FIG. 670) in the 81st embodiment are performed. As in the case of SB103, "1" is set in the start-up processing flag in the work area 221 for specific control (step SB702). Thereafter, “1” is set in the power failure flag, the checksum is normal, the setting value is normal, and “1” is not set in the setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control. On the condition (step SB703 to step SB705: YES, step SB706: NO), it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed (step SB707).

  If the reset button 68c has not been pressed (step SB707: NO), it is determined whether the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control has been set to "1" (step SB708). When the game stop flag is not set to "1" and the setting key insertion section 68a is turned ON using the setting key (step SB708: NO, step SB709: YES), or the game stop flag Is not set to “1” and the setting key insertion section 68a is not turned ON using the setting key, and “1” is set to the setting confirmation display flag in the work area 221 for specific control. If the setting has been performed (steps SB708 and SB709: NO, step SB710: YES), a setting confirmation process is executed (step SB711). In the setting confirmation processing (steps SB201 to SB202 and steps SB204 to SB207) in the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 671) in the eighteenth embodiment, the processing is executed.

  That is, the confirmation start command is not transmitted to the sound-light side CPU 353 in the setting confirmation processing of the present embodiment. Therefore, in the present embodiment, even if the setting confirmation processing is executed, notification corresponding to the setting confirmation processing is not executed by the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54. In the present embodiment, as described above, when the main processing is started, the processing after step SB701 is started without waiting for the elapse of the predetermined time for the wait, and the symbol is set at the timing when the setting confirmation processing is started. The operation start and the initial setting of the display device 41 may not be completed. On the other hand, by preventing the notification corresponding to the setting confirmation process from being executed on the symbol display device 41 as described above, the display control of the symbol display device 41 is started in a situation where the initial setting is not completed. It is possible to prevent it from happening. The notification corresponding to the setting confirmation process may be performed by the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54, but not performed by the symbol display device 41.

  After executing the setting confirmation process, the information corresponding to the initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the checking counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step SB712). The value set in the counter during the check is decremented by one each time the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639) is started, similarly to the 67th embodiment. When a value of 1 or more is set in the check-in-progress counter, the check display is continued on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as in the 67th embodiment. That is, when the setting confirmation process is performed in the process (Steps SB701 to SB729) at the start of the supply of the operating power, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 201 are provided after the setting confirmation process is completed. The display for checking is started at 204, and the display for checking is performed in a state where the progress of the process is not awaited.

  When the reset button 68c is not pressed and the game stop flag is not set to "1" and the setting key insertion unit 68a is not turned on using the setting key, the work for specific control is performed. When “1” is not set to the setting confirmation display flag in the area 221 (step SB707 to step SB710: NO), the initial check period (specifically, the check-in-progress counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control) (5 seconds) (step SB713). The value set in the counter during the check is decremented by one each time the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639) is started, similarly to the 67th embodiment. When a value of 1 or more is set in the check-in-progress counter, the check display is continued on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as in the 67th embodiment.

  After that, interrupt permission is set (step SB714). Thus, the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) is started by interrupting at the first interrupt cycle, and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 639) is started by interrupting at the second interrupt cycle. When the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639) is started by interruption, the first to fourth notification display devices are displayed so that a check display is performed in a situation where a value of 1 or more is set in the checking counter. 201 to 204 are display-controlled.

  Thereafter, a wait process is executed (step SB715). In the wait process, the process waits until the value of the checking counter in the work area 221 for specific control becomes “0”. In this case, since the state where the start-up processing flag in the specific control work area 221 is set to “1” is maintained, even if the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) is interrupted and started, Among the various processes of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638), the processes for monitoring the power failure, updating the various counters, and monitoring the illegality are executed, while the processes for advancing the game are not executed. The first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) is terminated. Therefore, until the initial check period set in step SB713 elapses, the display for check is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in a state in which the execution of the processing for advancing the game is prevented. Is continued. In addition, the operation start and the initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed in the waiting time in the wait processing. In other words, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 use the wait period for preventing execution of the process for advancing the game until the operation start and the initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed. It is possible to make the display for check. After the wait process (step SB715) is completed, a normal return command is transmitted to the sound-light side CPU 353 as in step SB113 of the main process (FIG. 670) in the eighteenth embodiment (step SB716).

  When the reset button 68c is pressed and the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned ON using the setting key (step SB707 and step SB717: YES), the setting value updating process is executed (step SB718). Also, regardless of whether the “setting change operation” is performed as described above, the setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to “1” (step SB706: YES) ), And executes a set value update process (step SB717). In the setting value updating process, the processes of steps SB301 to SB304 and steps SB306 to SB314 are executed in the setting value updating process (FIG. 672) in the eighteenth embodiment.

  That is, in the setting value update processing of the present embodiment, the update start command is not transmitted to the sound-light side CPU 353. Therefore, in the present embodiment, even if the set value update process is executed, the notification corresponding to the set value update process is not executed by the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54. In the present embodiment, as described above, when the main process is started, the process starts from step SB701 without waiting for the elapse of the predetermined time for the wait, and the symbol is set at the timing when the set value update process is started. The operation start and the initial setting of the display device 41 may not be completed. On the other hand, as described above, the notification corresponding to the setting value update processing is prevented from being executed by the symbol display device 41, so that the display control of the symbol display device 41 is started in a situation where the initial setting is not completed. It is possible to prevent it from happening. The notification corresponding to the setting value update processing may be performed by the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54, but may not be performed by the symbol display device 41.

  After executing the set value updating process, information corresponding to the initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in a check-in-progress counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step SB719). The value set in the counter during the check is decremented by one each time the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639) is started, similarly to the 67th embodiment. When a value of 1 or more is set in the check-in-progress counter, the check display is continued on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as in the 67th embodiment. That is, when the set value updating process is performed in the process (Steps SB701 to SB729) at the start of the supply of the operating power, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 201 are set after the set value updating process is completed. The display for checking is started at 204, and the display for checking is performed in a state where the progress of the process is not awaited.

  When the reset button 68c is pressed and the setting key insertion unit 68a is not turned on (step SB707: YES, step SB717: NO), the game stop flag in the specific control work area 221 is set to “1”. Is set (step SB720: NO), the first RAM clearing process is executed (step SB721). The processing content of the first RAM clearing process is the same as the first RAM clearing process (step SB117) of the main process (FIG. 670) in the 81st embodiment.

  Thereafter, information corresponding to the initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in a check-in-progress counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step SB722). The value set in the counter during the check is decremented by one each time the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639) is started, similarly to the 67th embodiment. When a value of 1 or more is set in the check-in-progress counter, the check display is continued on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as in the 67th embodiment.

  After that, the interrupt permission is set (step SB723). Thus, the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) is started by interrupting at the first interrupt cycle, and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 639) is started by interrupting at the second interrupt cycle. When the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639) is started by interruption, the first to fourth notification display devices are displayed so that a check display is performed in a situation where a value of 1 or more is set in the checking counter. 201 to 204 are display-controlled.

  Thereafter, a wait process is executed (step SB724). In the wait process, the process waits until the value of the checking counter in the work area 221 for specific control becomes “0”. In this case, since the state where the start-up processing flag in the specific control work area 221 is set to “1” is maintained, even if the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) is interrupted and started, Among the various processes of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638), the processes for monitoring the power failure, updating the various counters, and monitoring the illegality are executed, while the processes for advancing the game are not executed. The first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) is terminated. Therefore, until the initial check period set in step SB722 elapses, the display for checking is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in a state where the execution of the process for advancing the game is prevented. Is continued. In addition, the operation start and the initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed in the waiting time in the wait processing. In other words, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 use the wait period for preventing execution of the process for advancing the game until the operation start and the initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed. It is possible to make the display for check. After the wait process (step SB724) is completed, a clearing return command is transmitted to the sound-light side CPU 353 (step SB725), similarly to step SB118 of the main process (FIG. 670) in the eighteenth embodiment.

  When a negative determination is made in any of steps SB703 to SB705, after setting the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control to “1” (step SB726), it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed. Is determined (step SB727). When the reset button 68c is pressed and the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on using the setting key (step SB717 and step SB727: YES), the setting value updating process is performed in step SB718. At the same time, in step SB719, a check counter setting process is executed. The contents of these processes are as described above.

  If the reset button 68c has not been pressed (step SB727: NO), if it is determined in step SB720 that the game stop flag has been set to "1", or if the game stop flag has been set to "1" in step SB708. If it is determined that is set, the processing of step SB728 and step SB729 is executed. The processing contents of step SB728 and step SB729 are the same as step SB121 and step SB122 of the main processing (FIG. 670) in the 81st embodiment.

  When the processing in step SB712 is performed, when the processing in step SB716 is performed, when the processing in step SB719 is performed, when the processing in step SB725 is performed, or when the processing in step SB729 is performed, The start-up processing flag in the work area 221 is cleared to "0" (step SB730). When the start-up processing flag is cleared to “0”, a negative determination is made in step S8906 when the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) is activated, so that not only the processing in steps S8901 to S8905 is performed. The processing from step S8907 to step S8920 is executed, and the state in which the processing for advancing the game is not executed is released. In step SB730, the power failure flag in the work area 221 for specific control is also cleared to "0".

  After that, the process proceeds to the remaining process of Step SB731 to Step SB734. That is, the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639). Will result in a residual time. The remaining time varies depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process. The remaining time of step SB731 to step SB734 is repeatedly executed using the irregular time. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining processes in steps SB731 to SB734 are irregular processes that are executed irregularly. In Steps SB731 to SB734, the same processes as those in Steps S113 to S116 of the main process (FIG. 514) in the 33rd embodiment are executed.

  According to the above configuration, if the setting confirmation process (step SB711) and the set value updating process (step SB718) are not executed in the process (steps SB701 to SB729) at the start of the supply of the operating power, the process for the wait is performed. In the state of waiting for the processing to proceed, the display for checking is continued on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. As a result, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are utilized by using the wait period for preventing execution of the processing for advancing the game until the operation start and the initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed. Can be used to display a check. In addition, it is possible to secure an opportunity to check the display for checking on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 before the processing for proceeding the game is started.

  On the other hand, the setting confirmation processing (step SB711) or the setting value update processing (step SB718) does not end unless at least the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned off by the administrator of the game hall (step SB711). Alternatively, by the time the set value update process (step SB718) is completed, a time longer than the time required to start the operation of the symbol display device 41 and complete the initial setting has elapsed. In this case, when the setting confirmation processing (step SB711) or the setting value update processing (step SB718) is executed, the setting confirmation processing (step SB711) or the setting is prevented by not executing the wait processing. When the value update process (step SB718) is executed, it is possible to prevent the time required until the process for proceeding with the game from being started from becoming excessively long.

  When the setting confirmation process (step SB711) or the setting value updating process (step SB718) is performed, the first to the first after the setting confirmation process (step SB711) or the setting value updating process (step SB718) is completed. Check displays are performed on the four notification display devices 201 to 204. As a result, the check display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 without affecting the display of the set value using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It becomes possible.

<85th embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the main processing executed by the main CPU 63 is different from that of the 81st embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the above-described eighteenth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the 81st embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 684 is a flowchart showing the main processing in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processing of steps SB801 to SB826 in the main processing is executed by using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

  First, a power-on initial setting process is executed (step SB801). In the power-on initialization process, for example, the process waits without advancing to the next process until a predetermined time for wait (specifically, one second) elapses after the main process is started. The operation start and the initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed in the predetermined period for the weight. Also, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted.

  After that, an internal function register setting process is executed (step SB802). In the internal function register setting process, similarly to the 67th embodiment, the interrupt cycle of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638), which is a process started by interrupting the main process periodically, is set to the first interrupt cycle (FIG. 638). (Specifically, 4 milliseconds), and the interrupt cycle of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639), which is a process that is started by interrupting the main process periodically, is set to be longer than the first interrupt cycle. The second interrupt cycle (specifically, 2 milliseconds), which is a short cycle, is set.

  That is, in the present embodiment, similarly to the 67th embodiment, the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 639) are performed as the timer interrupt processing so that the interrupt cycle is relatively long. Exists. The first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639) are both started by interrupting the main process. The second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639) is started by interrupting the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638). On the other hand, the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) is not activated by interrupting the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 639). In a situation where both the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 639) are not executed, if both the first interrupt cycle and the second interrupt cycle have elapsed, the cycle is determined. Irrespective of the lapse order of the process, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639) is started first. In this regard, it can be said that the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639) is a process that is started prior to the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) may be started prior to the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 639).

  In the internal function register setting processing, the first interrupt cycle of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) is set in a predetermined register of the main CPU 63, and the second interrupt cycle of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 639) is mainly set. It is set in a specific register of the side CPU 63. Further, in the internal function register setting process, in addition to the setting of the first and second interrupt cycles, for example, a setting process of a numerical range of various counters such as a numerical range of the hit random number counter C1 is executed.

  After that, “1” is set to a start-up processing flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step SB803). As in the 67th embodiment, even if the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) is started, the power-out processing flag indicates the power failure among the various processings set in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638). While the processing for monitoring, updating the various counters, and performing the fraud monitoring is executed, it is determined that the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) should be ended without executing the processing for advancing the game. This flag is specified by the main CPU 63.

  The start-up processing flag is set to “1” when the processing (Steps SB801 to SB818, Steps SB823 to SB826) at the start of the supply of the operating power is started in the main processing (FIG. 670), and the operating power is set to “1”. Is cleared to "0" before the processing at the start of supply of the data is completed and before the residual processing (steps SB819 to SB822) is started. As in the 67th embodiment, in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638), when the start-up processing flag is set to “1”, the processing of steps S8907 to S8920 is not executed. In a situation in which a setting confirmation process (step SB810) or a setting value updating process (FIG. 686), which will be described later, is executed among the processes (steps SB801 to SB818 and steps SB823 to SB826) at the start of the supply of the operating power. It is possible to prevent the processing for advancing the game from being executed. On the other hand, as described above, in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638), even if the start-up processing flag is set to “1”, the processing in steps S8901 to S8905 is executed, thereby increasing the operating power. Even when the setting confirmation process (step SB810) or the setting value update process (FIG. 686), which will be described later, is performed among the processes (steps SB801 to SB818 and steps SB823 to SB826) at the start of the supply of The power failure monitoring is executed, the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the random number initial value counter CINI are updated, and fraud detection is further executed.

  In particular, even when the start-up processing flag is set to “1”, the power failure information storage processing (step S8901) is executed to start the operation power supply processing (steps SB801 to SB818). Even if a power failure occurs in a situation where a setting confirmation process (step SB810) or a setting value updating process (FIG. 686), which will be described later, in steps SB823 to SB826) is being performed, the power failure process is performed. It becomes possible. In the process at the time of power failure, similarly to the 67th embodiment, the power failure flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to “1”, the checksum is calculated, and the calculated checksum is used for the specific control. Since the power is stored in the work area 221, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an abnormality in the main RAM 65 from being identified when the supply of the operating power is restarted. Accordingly, when a power failure occurs during the setting confirmation processing (step SB810) or the setting value update processing (FIG. 686), the fact that a power failure has occurred during these setting-related processing is indicated by the supply of the next operating power. It can be specified at the start.

  Incidentally, in the situation where the setting confirmation processing (step SB810) or the setting value updating processing (FIG. 686) is being executed, both the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 639) are performed. The interrupt is not prohibited and can be interrupted at an arbitrary timing. In this case, when the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638) or the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639) is started by interrupting the setting confirmation process (step SB810) or the set value updating process (FIG. 686), The information of the return address of the main process (FIG. 684) for returning after the completion of the timer interrupt process to be started is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control, and the timer interrupt process is started. The information of the various registers of the main CPU 63 immediately before is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control. Then, when the timer interrupt process to be started is completed, the process returns to the main process (FIG. 684) corresponding to the information of the return address saved in the stack area 222 for specific control, and The information saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is restored to various registers of the main CPU 63.

  After setting the start-up processing flag to “1” in step SB803, it is determined whether or not “1” is set to the power failure flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step SB804). . When a power failure process is performed in the power failure information storage process (step S8901) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638), “1” is set in the power failure flag. The power failure flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the processing at the time of power failure was properly performed at the time of the previous power-off.

  If “1” is set in the power failure flag (step SB804: YES), it is determined whether or not the checksum is normal (step SB805). Specifically, first, a checksum is calculated for the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control. The method of calculating the checksum is the same as in the 65th embodiment. Thereafter, the work area 221 for the specific control and the work area 221 for the specific control calculated in the power outage process executed immediately before the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped and stored in the work area 221 for the specific control are described. The checksum of the stack area 222 is read, and the read checksum is compared with the checksum calculated as described above in the current main processing. Then, it is determined whether or not the checksums match.

  If the checksums match (step SB805: YES), is the setting value corresponding to the information stored in the setting reference area 341 (see FIG. 659) in the specific control work area 221 in a normal range? It is determined whether or not it is (step SB806). The setting reference area 341 is a storage area in which information for specifying the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 by the main CPU 63 is stored as in the 77th embodiment. When the numerical information of “1” is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 1”. When the numerical information “2” is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 2”. When the numerical information “3” is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 3”. When the numerical information “4” is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 4”. When the numerical information “5” is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 5”. When the numerical information of “6” is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 6”. In step SB806, it is determined whether the information of the setting value stored in the setting reference area 341 is any of “1” to “6”.

  When an affirmative determination is made in all of Steps SB804 to SB806, it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed (Step SB807). That is, it is determined whether or not the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed while the reset button 68c is being pressed, and the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. Here, in the present embodiment, similar to the 67th embodiment, the main control device 60 is provided with the setting key insertion section 68a and the reset button 68c, but is not provided with the update button 68b. Further, the main control device 60 is provided with first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in the same manner as in the forty-third embodiment, instead of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c.

  When the reset button 68c is not pressed (step SB807: NO), it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the game stop flag or the setting update display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control. (Step SB808).

  The game stop flag is a flag that is set to “1” when the power failure flag is not set to “1”, when the checksums do not match, or when the set value is abnormal. When the game stop flag is set to “1”, the processes of steps S8901 to S8905 are executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638), while an affirmative determination is made in step S8906 to perform steps S8907 to S8907. The processing of S8920 is not executed. Accordingly, if the power failure flag is not set to “1” because the power failure processing was not properly performed at the time of the previous power shutdown, the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 If at least one of the checksums does not match due to a change in the storage state of the information since the last power shutdown, or if the set value is abnormal, monitoring of power failure, updating of various counters, While processing for monitoring is executed, processing for advancing the game is not executed.

  The setting update display flag is a flag for specifying by the main CPU 63 that the setting value update process (FIG. 686) is being executed as in the 67th embodiment, and “1” is set in the setting update display flag. When the setting is set, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 perform a display indicating that the setting value is being updated and a display indicating the setting value being updated. The setting update display flag is a flag that is set to “1” when the setting value updating process (FIG. 686) is started and is cleared to “0” when the setting value updating process (FIG. 686) ends. When the setting value update process (FIG. 686) has not been executed, the setting update display flag is not basically set to "1". However, if the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped while the setting value updating process (FIG. 686) is being executed, the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started thereafter. , The setting update display flag is set to "1". The state in which the setting update display flag is set to “1” is maintained until the processing for clearing the setting update display flag to “0” is performed in the setting value update processing (FIG. 686).

  If a negative determination is made in step SB808 that the game stop flag and the setting update display flag are not set to “1”, it is determined whether the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned ON using the setting key. (Step SB809). When the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on using the setting key (step SB809: YES), a setting confirmation process is executed (step SB810). The processing content of the setting confirmation processing is the same as the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 671) in the 81st embodiment. In the present embodiment, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped during the execution of the setting confirmation processing, the setting confirmation is performed unless the “setting confirmation operation” is performed when the supply of the operating power is resumed. No processing is performed.

  If the setting key insertion section 68a has not been turned ON using the setting key (step SB809: NO), a normal return command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step SB811). The content of processing executed by the sound emission control device 81 when a normal return command is received is the same as that of the above-mentioned eighteenth embodiment.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step SB807 that the reset button 68c is pressed, the setting key insertion unit 68a is determined to have been turned ON using the setting key (steps SB807 and SB812). : YES), and executes a setting value update process (step SB813). That is, in the present embodiment, even if “1” is set to the setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control, the “setting change operation” is not performed when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. As long as the setting value update processing is not performed. Details of the setting value update processing will be described later.

  If it is determined in step SB807 that the reset button 68c has been pressed, and if it is determined that the setting key insertion unit 68a has not been turned on using the setting key (step SB812: NO), the identification is performed. It is determined whether or not “1” is set in the game stop flag or the setting update display flag in the control work area 221 (step SB814).

  If "1" is not set in both the game stop flag and the setting update display flag (step SB814: NO), the first RAM clearing process is executed (step SB815). In the first RAM clearing process, similarly to the RAM clearing process (step SA416) in the seventy-seventh embodiment, an area in which the information of the setting value indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the work area 221 for specific control (that is, the area). Except for the setting reference area 341), the work area 221 for the specific control is cleared to “0” and the initial setting is executed. As a result, since the area indicating whether the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the high probability mode is cleared to “0”, the winning / rejecting lottery is performed regardless of the winning / rejecting lottery mode immediately before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. The mode is a low probability mode. In addition, the game is not executed, the opening / closing execution mode is not executed, and the general-purpose display unit 38a is not variably displayed, and the general electric functioning object 34a is in the closed state. Situation. In addition, since the hold storage area 65a and the ordinary power hold area 65c provided in the work area 221 for specific control are also cleared to "0", the hold information for the special figure display unit 37a is erased and the general figure display unit is cleared. The hold information for 38a is deleted. Further, the setting update display flag and the setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 221 for the specific control are cleared to “0”. The setting update area 342 provided in the specific control work area 221 is cleared to “0”. In the first RAM clearing process, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0" and the initial setting is executed. In the first RAM clearing process, initial settings are executed after various registers of the main CPU 63 are also cleared to "0". In this initial setting, processing similar to the internal function register setting processing in step SB802 is executed. Note that the process for clearing “0” and the process for performing initial setting are not executed for the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control.

  After that, a clearing return command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step SB816). The content of processing executed by the sound emission control device 81 when a return command for clearing is received is the same as that of the above-mentioned eighteenth embodiment.

  When the process of step SB810 is executed, the process of step SB811 is executed, the process of step SB813 is executed, or the process of step SB816 is executed, The information corresponding to the initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the counter (step SB817). The value set in the counter during the check is decremented by one each time the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639) is started, similarly to the 67th embodiment. When a value of 1 or more is set in the check-in-progress counter, the check display is continued on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as in the 67th embodiment.

  According to the above configuration, when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the processing (Steps SB801 to SB818, Steps SB823 to SB826) at the start of the supply of the operating power is completed by the main CPU 63. The initial check period is started later and before the remaining process (steps SB819 to SB822) is started. Accordingly, it is not necessary to control the initial check period in the situation where the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power is performed, so that the processing load in the situation where the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power is being performed is reduced. It becomes possible.

  Also, the setting confirmation process (step SB810) and the setting value update process (FIG. 686) are executed as processes (steps SB801 to SB818, SB823 to SB826) at the start of supply of the operating power. The initial check period is started after the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power is completed. Thereby, even if the display for check is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 during the initial check period, the display of the set value using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is performed. It is possible to prevent the influence.

  Thereafter, the start-up processing flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step SB818). When the start-up processing flag is cleared to “0”, a negative determination is made in step S8906 when the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) is activated, so that not only the processing in steps S8901 to S8905 is performed. The processing from step S8907 to step S8920 is executed, and the state in which the processing for advancing the game is not executed is released. In step SB818, the power failure flag in the work area 221 for specific control is also cleared to "0".

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to the remaining process of Step SB819 to Step SB822. That is, the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639). Will result in a residual time. The remaining time varies in accordance with the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, but the remaining processes of steps SB819 to SB822 are repeatedly executed using the irregular time. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining processes in Steps SB819 to SB822 are irregular processes that are executed irregularly. In steps SB819 to SB822, the same processes as those in steps S113 to S116 of the main process (FIG. 514) in the thirty-third embodiment are executed.

  In the main process (FIG. 684), when a negative determination is made in any of steps SB804 to SB806, that is, when the power failure flag is not set to “1”, when the checksums do not match, or when the set value is abnormal. If so, the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SB823). As described above, when the game stop flag is set to “1”, the processing of steps S8901 to S8905 is executed in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638), while the affirmative determination is made in step S8906. Steps S8907 to S8920 are not executed. Accordingly, if the power failure flag is not set to “1” because the power failure processing was not properly performed at the time of the previous power shutdown, the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 If at least one of the checksums does not match due to a change in the storage state of the information since the last power shutdown, or if the set value is abnormal, monitoring of power failure, updating of various counters, While processing for monitoring is executed, processing for advancing the game is not executed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c has been pressed (step SB824). If the reset button 68c has not been pressed (step SB824: NO), an abnormal command indicating that an abnormality has occurred with respect to the power failure flag, the checksum, or the set value at the start of the supply of the operating power is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. (Step SB825). Upon receiving the abnormal command, the sound light emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 to emit light in a manner corresponding to the information abnormality at the start of the supply of the operating power, and “change the setting from the speaker unit 54. Is output. In addition, a character image “Please change the setting.” Is displayed on the symbol display device 41. These notifications are maintained until the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and is terminated when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, even if the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is temporarily stopped, the above-described notification is made when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is restarted until the set value updating process (FIG. 686) is executed. It will be restarted.

  Thereafter, an external output process at the time of abnormality is executed (step SB826). In the external output process at the time of abnormality, a process for externally outputting an abnormal signal to the management computer of the game hall is executed. In this case, the signal output of the abnormal signal is performed over a predetermined period (for example, 100 milliseconds). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in a situation where an event that triggers the execution of the process of step SB826 occurs, the signal output of the abnormal signal is continued, and an event that triggers the execution of the process of step SB826 occurs. A configuration may be adopted in which the output of the abnormal signal is stopped when the situation does not occur. Further, the abnormal signal is not output only in step SB826, but may be output by other processing. For example, even when it is specified that the monitoring target has been fraudulently detected (illegal radio wave detection or fraudulent magnetism detection) in the fraud detection process (step S8905) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638), an abnormal signal is also output. External output. However, the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the abnormal signal is also used as described above, and the configuration may be such that the abnormal signal dedicated to step SB826 is externally output.

  If the reset button 68c has been pressed (step SB824: YES), it is determined whether the setting key insertion section 68a has been turned ON using the setting key (step SB812). When the reset button 68c is pressed and the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on using the setting key (step SB812 and step SB824: YES), the setting value updating process is executed (step SB813). In other words, when the operating power is supplied to the main CPU 63 in a state where the “setting change operation” is being performed, a failure has occurred in the main RAM 65, so that a negative determination is made in any of steps SB804 to SB806. Even when the determination is made, the setting value update processing (FIG. 686) is executed. Thus, it is possible to give priority to the change of the set value.

  On the other hand, when the reset button 68c is pressed but the setting key insertion section 68a is not turned on (step SB824: YES, step SB812: NO), the game stop flag or the setting update in the work area 221 for specific control. It is determined whether or not “1” is set in the display flag (step SB814). In the process of step SB814 after the game stop flag is set to “1” in step SB823, the game stop flag is set to “1” as a matter of course, so an affirmative determination is made in step SB814. In this case, an abnormal command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 in step SB825, and an abnormal signal is externally output in step SB826. Thereafter, without executing the processing of step SB817 and step SB818, the processing shifts to the remaining processing of step SB819 to step SB822.

  That is, when an abnormality relating to the power failure flag, the checksum, and the set value occurs and a negative determination is made in any of steps SB804 to SB806, the operation to the main CPU 63 is performed in a situation where the “RAM clear operation” is being performed. Even if the supply of power is started, the first RAM clear processing (step SB815) is not executed. The first RAM clearing process is also performed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started while the game stop flag is set to “1” and the “RAM clear operation” is being performed. (Step SB815) is not executed. Thereby, even if the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started while the “RAM clear operation” is being performed, the state in which the game stop flag is set to “1” is not canceled. It becomes possible. On the other hand, when the “setting change operation” is being performed, the set value updating process (FIG. 686) is executed regardless of whether or not the game stop flag is set to “1”. As will be described later, the game stop flag is cleared to "0" by the initial setting at the start of the set value update process (FIG. 686). As a result, it is necessary to execute the set value update process (FIG. 686) in order to eliminate the state in which the game stop flag is set to “1”. Therefore, when an information abnormality occurs in the work area 221 for specific control, not only the processing for initializing the work area 221 for the specific control but also resetting of the set value is required. .

  Here, when it is determined in step SB807 that the reset button 68c has not been pressed, "1" is set in the game stop flag or the setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control in step SB808. If it is determined in step SB825, an abnormal command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 in step SB825, and an abnormal signal is externally output in step SB826. Then, after executing these processes, the process proceeds to the remaining processes of Step SB819 to Step SB822 without executing the processes of Step SB817 and Step SB818. When it is determined in step SB807 that the reset button 68c has been pressed, and in step SB812 it is determined that the setting key insertion unit 68a has not been turned ON (that is, when the “RAM clear operation” has been performed) ), If “1” is set in the game stop flag or the setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control, an affirmative determination is made in step SB814, and a sound emission is made in step SB825. An abnormal command is transmitted to control device 81, and an abnormal signal is externally output in step SB826. Then, after executing these processes, the process proceeds to the remaining processes of Step SB819 to Step SB822 without executing the processes of Step SB817 and Step SB818.

  Next, the state of the subsequent processing when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped while the setting value update processing (FIG. 686) is being executed will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. . FIG. 685 (a) shows a period in which the power of the pachinko machine 10 is in an ON state, and FIG. FIG. 685 (c) shows a period during which the processing after the start of the operation power supply (steps SB801 to SB818, steps SB823 to SB826) is completed, FIG. 685 (d) shows a period during which the set value updating process (FIG. 686) is being executed, and FIG. 684 (e) shows that the setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to “1”. FIG. 685 (f) shows that the start-up processing flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to “1”. Indicates how long are, FIG 685 (g) shows a period during which the abnormal signal is externally outputted.

  At the timing of t1, the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed as shown in FIG. 685 (a). In this case, the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed in a state where the “setting change operation” is performed. As shown in FIG. 685 (b), at the timing t1, the main CPU 63 starts processing (steps SB801 to SB818, step SB823 to step SB826) at the start of supply of operating power, and at the same time, as shown in FIG. As shown in (), “1” is set in the startup processing flag in the work area 221 for specific control.

  Thereafter, at time t2, the set value update processing (FIG. 686) is started as shown in FIG. 685 (d). In this case, “1” is set to the setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control at the timing of the t2 as shown in FIG. 685 (e).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 685 (d), the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off at the timing of t3, which is a state during the execution of the set value update processing (FIG. 686), and the main CPU 63 is notified. Is stopped. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 685 (b), the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power (step SB801 to step SB818, step SB823 to step SB826) is completed, and the setting value updating processing (step SB801 to step SB826) is completed as shown in FIG. 685 (d). FIG. 686) ends.

  Thereafter, the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed again at the timing of t4 as shown in FIG. 685 (a). In this case, the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed in a state where the “RAM clear operation” is performed. At the timing of the time t4, as shown in FIG. 685 (b), the processing (Step SB801 to Step SB818, Step SB823 to Step SB826) at the start of the supply of the operating power is started in the main CPU 63. Further, as shown in FIGS. 685 (e) and 685 (f), both the setting update display flag and the start-up processing flag in the specific control work area 221 continue to be “1” before the previous stop of the supply of the operating power. Is set.

  In this case, since the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed in the state where the “RAM clear operation” is performed while the setting update display flag is set to “1”, the first RAM clear processing (step SB815) ) Is performed, the external output of the abnormal signal is performed over a predetermined period (for example, 100 milliseconds) from timing t5 to timing t7 as shown in FIG. 685 (g). Further, at the timing of t5, the abnormality notification based on the transmission of the abnormality command is started.

  As shown in FIG. 685 (b), the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power (steps SB801 to SB818, SB823 to SB826) started at the timing of t4 ends at the timing of t6. Then, at the timing of the time t6, the processing after the start of the supply of the operating power (steps SB801 to SB818, SB823 to SB826) is started.

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 685 (f), since the startup processing flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to “1”, it is assumed that the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) is started. Also, while processes for monitoring power failure, updating various counters, and monitoring for fraud are executed, processes for advancing the game are not executed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 685 (a), the operation of turning off the power of the pachinko machine 10 is performed at the timing of t8, whereby the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped. Further, at the timing of the t8, the processing after the supply is completed as shown in FIG. 685 (c).

  Thereafter, the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed again at the timing of t9 as shown in FIG. 685 (a). In this case, the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed in a state where the “setting change operation” is performed. At the timing of the time t9, as shown in FIG. 685 (b), the process (Step SB801 to Step SB818, Step SB823 to Step SB826) at the start of the supply of the operating power is started in the main CPU 63. Further, as shown in FIGS. 685 (e) and 685 (f), both the setting update display flag and the start-up processing flag in the specific control work area 221 continue to be “1” before the previous stop of the supply of the operating power. Is set.

  Thereafter, the set value updating process (FIG. 686) is executed as shown in FIG. 685 (d) from timing t10 to timing t11. In this case, the setting value update processing (FIG. 686) ends normally. The setting update display flag is cleared to "0" at the timing t11 which is the end timing, as shown in FIG. 685 (e). Also, at the timing of the time t11, the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power (steps SB801 to SB818, steps SB823 to SB826) ends as shown in FIG. 685 (b). As a result, at the timing t11, the start-up processing flag is cleared to “0” as shown in FIG. 685 (f). Then, at the timing of the time t11, as shown in FIG. 685 (c), the processing after the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power (step SB801 to step SB818, step SB823 to step SB826) is started. In this case, since the start-up processing flag has already been cleared to “0”, when the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) is started, processing for monitoring power failure, updating various counters, and monitoring illegality is performed. In addition, a process for advancing the game is executed.

  When the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped in the situation where the setting value update process (FIG. 686) is being executed as described above, the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is restarted. Unless the “setting change operation” is performed, in the processing at the start of supply of the operating power (steps SB801 to SB818, SB823 to SB826), the transmission of the abnormal command to the sound emission control device 81 and the external output of the abnormal signal Is executed, the first RAM clearing process (step SB815) is not executed even if the “RAM clearing operation” is performed, and the setting confirmation process (step SB815) is performed even if the “setting checking operation” is performed. Step SB810) is not executed. Furthermore, when the transmission of the abnormal command to the audio emission control device 81 and the external output of the abnormal signal are executed, the process of clearing the start-up process flag in the work area 221 for specific control to “0” (step Since the remaining process (step SB819 to step SB822) is executed without executing step SB818), even if the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638) is started, power failure monitoring, updating of various counters, and illegal monitoring are performed. Is performed, while the process for advancing the game is not performed. Accordingly, when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped in the situation where the setting value update process (FIG. 686) is being executed, the main CPU 63 is not operated while the “setting change operation” is being performed. It is necessary to restart the supply of the operating power and execute the set value update processing (FIG. 686). Therefore, it is possible to reliably change the set value.

  Next, the setting value update process in this embodiment, which is executed in step SB813 of the main process (FIG. 684), will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 686. Note that the processing of steps SB901 to SB918 in the setting value update processing is executed using the specific control program and the specific control data in the main CPU 63.

  First, "1" is set to the OFF confirmation flag 361 (step SB901). The OFF confirmation flag 361 is provided in the work area 221 for specific control as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. Even in this embodiment, in the setting value updating process (FIG. 686), the value of the setting updating area 342 of the work area 221 for specific control, that is, the setting value to be updated is set to 1 every time the reset button 68c is pressed. Is added. In this case, when the reset button 68c is changed from the non-operation state to the operation state in order to add only the set value to be updated to “1” to one pressing operation of the reset button 68c, When the detection signal from the detection sensor that detects the operation of the reset button 68c switches from the operation non-detection state to the operation detection state, the value of the setting update area 342 is incremented by 1 to set the update target. Is added by 1.

  In this configuration, the OFF confirmation flag 361 determines whether or not it is the timing when the pressing operation of the reset button 68c is started in the case of confirming whether or not the pressing operation of the reset button 68c is performed in the setting value updating process (FIG. 686). This is a flag for confirmation. After executing the determination process (step SB910) of whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed by the setting value update process (FIG. 686), when it is determined that the reset button 68c is pressed, "1" Is set or the set state of "1" is maintained, and when it is determined that the reset button 68c is not pressed, "0" is cleared or the state of "0" is maintained.

  Here, the setting value update process (FIG. 686) is executed on condition that it is determined in step SB807 or step SB824 of the main process (FIG. 684) that the reset button 68c has been pressed, as described above. In step SB807 or step SB824, the main CPU 63 directly monitors an input port to which a detection signal is input from a detection sensor that detects the presence or absence of the pressing operation of the reset button 68c, thereby determining whether the reset button 68c is being pressed. Is determined. In this case, instead of checking the start timing and end timing of the pressing operation of the reset button 68c, it is checked whether or not the reset button 68c is being pressed. Therefore, in step SB807 or step SB824, an affirmative determination is made without confirming the OFF confirmation flag 361 when the signal corresponding to the pressing operation of the reset button 68c is input to the input port.

  However, in this configuration, the timing of ending the pressing operation of the reset button 68c at the time of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 for starting the set value update processing (FIG. 686) and the start timing of the set value update processing (FIG. 686) Depending on the relationship, there is a case where the pressing operation triggers the addition of the set value to be updated by one and a case where the pressing operation does not. Then, the manner of updating the set value to be updated changes according to the end timing of the pressing operation of the reset button 68c when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, and the operability is reduced. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reset button 68c has been pressed in a situation where the OFF confirmation flag 361 is set to “0”, the setting value update process is performed by adding 1 to the set value to be updated. When (FIG. 686) is started, “1” is set to the OFF confirmation flag 361 in step SB901 executed prior to the process of determining whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the set value to be updated from being incremented by 1 due to the pressing operation of the reset button 68c when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on.

  After the execution of the process of step SB901, the setting of interrupt permission is performed (step SB902). Thus, the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) is started by interrupting at the first interrupt cycle, and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 639) is started by interrupting at the second interrupt cycle. In the present embodiment, as in the eighteenth embodiment, the processes at the start of the supply of the operating power (steps SB801 to SB818, SB823 to SB826) are basically the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638) and the second process. The interrupt of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 639) is prohibited, and the interrupt is permitted in the setting confirmation process (step SB810) and the setting value update process (FIG. 686). Accordingly, in the situation where the processing for starting the supply of the operating power (step SB801 to step SB818, step SB823 to step SB826), the setting confirmation processing (step SB810) and the setting value update processing (FIG. 686) are not executed, The first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639) are prohibited from being executed, and the setting confirmation process (step SB810) or the set value update process (FIG. 686) is executed. Execution of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 638) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639) are permitted. However, in the situation where the setting confirmation processing (step SB810) or the setting value update processing (FIG. 686) is being executed, the start-up processing flag is set to “1”, so the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) is started, among the various processes of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638), the processes for monitoring the power failure, updating the various counters, and monitoring the illegality are executed, while the processes for progressing the game are performed. The first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638) ends without executing the process.

  Thereafter, "1" is set to the setting update display flag on condition that "1" is not set to the setting update display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step SB903). When the setting update display flag is set to “1”, an affirmative determination is made in step S9003 of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 639), and the setting processing for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update is performed. (Step S9004) is executed. The content of the setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update is the same as that in the above-described seventy-seventh embodiment. By executing the process, for example, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 629 (a), a display indicating that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being updated and the pachinko machine 10 is selected as an update target The displayed set values are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  Thereafter, initial settings at the time of start are performed (step SB904). In the initial setting, the game stop flag provided in the specific control work area 221 is cleared to “0”. When the power failure flag is not set to “1” because the power failure processing was not properly performed at the time of the previous power-off (step SB804: NO), the game stop flag indicates the work area 221 for the specific control and If the checksums do not match for at least one of the stack areas 222 for specific control due to a change in the storage state of information since the last power-off (step SB805: NO), or the setting reference area 341 If the set value corresponding to the information stored in is not within the normal range (step SB806: NO), "1" is set in step SB823 of the main process (FIG. 684). When the game stop flag is set to “1”, the processes of steps S8901 to S8905 are executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638), while an affirmative determination is made in step S8906 to perform steps S8907 to S8907. The processing of S8920 is not executed. Accordingly, when the information abnormality of the main RAM 65 as described above occurs, the processing for monitoring the power failure, updating the various counters, and monitoring the illegality is executed, while the processing for advancing the game is executed. Will not be. By clearing the game stop flag to “0” in the process of step SB904, the state in which the occurrence of the information abnormality in the main RAM 65 is specified is released when the set value update process (FIG. 686) is executed. Becomes possible.

  Thereafter, “1” is set in the setting update area 342 (see FIG. 659) in the specific control work area 221 (step SB905). The setting update area 342 is a storage area in which information of the setting value being updated in the setting value updating process (FIG. 686) is stored as in the 77th embodiment. When the numerical information “1” is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value of the update target (selection target or change target) is “setting 1”. When the numerical information “2” is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated is “setting 2”. When the numerical information of “3” is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated is “setting 3”. When the numerical information “4” is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated is “setting 4”. When the numerical information of “5” is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated is “setting 5”. When the numerical information of “6” is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated is “setting 6”.

  By setting “1” in the setting update area 342 in step SB905, the setting value to be updated becomes “setting 1”. That is, in the present embodiment, the set value to be updated is "setting 1" when the set value update process (FIG. 686) is started, regardless of the current set value of the pachinko machine 10.

  After that, an update start command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step SB906). Upon receiving the update start command, the sound emission control device 81 displays an image indicating that the set value update process (FIG. 686) is being executed, and an image for enabling the user to recognize the operation content for changing the set value. , And the display control device 82 is controlled so that an image for enabling recognition of the operation content for ending the setting value update process (FIG. 686) is displayed on the symbol display device 41. This allows the manager of the gaming hall to recognize that the setting value is being changed, and also provides the operation contents and the setting value updating process required for changing the setting value (FIG. 686). Can be recognized by the administrator of the gaming hall. Note that, in addition to or instead of performing the notification in the symbol display device 41, a configuration may be adopted in which at least one of the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 performs. Further, an external output indicating that the set value updating process (FIG. 686) is being performed may be performed on a device external to the pachinko machine 10, such as a management computer for a game hall.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the information of the setting value stored in the setting updating area 342 is any of “1” to “6” (step SB907). If it is not one of "1" to "6" (step SB907: NO), "1" is set in the setting update area 342 (step SB908). Thereby, the setting value to be updated becomes “setting 1”.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step SB907 or when the process in step SB908 is performed, it is determined whether the setting key insertion unit 68a has switched from the ON state to the OFF state using the setting key (step SB909). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the reception state of the signal received from the detection sensor that detects the state of the setting key insertion unit 68a has changed from the reception state corresponding to the ON state to the reception state corresponding to the OFF state. I do.

  If a negative determination is made in step SB909, it is determined whether the reset button 68c is pressed (step SB910). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c has been pressed by directly monitoring an input port to which a detection signal is input from a detection sensor that detects the presence or absence of the pressing operation of the reset button 68c. If the reset button 68c has not been pressed (step SB910: NO), the OFF confirmation flag 361 in the specific control work area 221 is cleared to "0" (step SB911), and the process returns to step SB907.

  If the reset button 68c is pressed (step SB910: YES), it is determined whether the value of the OFF confirmation flag 361 in the work area 221 for specific control is “0” (step SB912). When “1” is set to the OFF confirmation flag 361 (step SB912: NO), the present confirmation timing is not the start timing of the push operation of the reset button 68c, but the push operation of the reset button 68c is continued. In this case, the process returns to step SB907 without adding 1 to the set value to be updated.

  When the value of the OFF confirmation flag 361 is “0” (step SB912: YES), this means that the present confirmation timing is the start timing of the pressing operation of the reset button 68c. In this case, after "1" is set to the OFF confirmation flag 361 (step SB913), the value of the setting update area 342 is incremented by 1 (step SB914). Thus, each time the reset button 68c is pressed once, the set value is updated to the next higher level. When the reset button 68c is not pressed (step SB910: NO), when the OFF confirmation flag 361 is set to “1” (step SB912: NO), or when the value of the setting update area 342 is set to 1 If the value is added (step SB914), the process returns to step SB907. However, if the value of the setting update area 342 is determined to be 7 or more in step SB907, the setting update area is determined in step SB908. “1” is set in 342. As a result, when the reset button 68c is pressed once in the situation of "Setting 6," the display returns to "Setting 1."

  When it is specified that the setting key insertion unit 68a has been switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step SB909: YES), the information of the setting value stored in the setting updating area 342 is overwritten on the setting reference area 341 ( Step SB915). As a result, the setting value information updated as a result of the current setting value update process (FIG. 686) is set in the setting reference area 341. The setting value corresponding to the set information is the current setting value. The set value of the pachinko machine 10 is used.

  After that, the setting of the interruption inhibition is performed (step SB916). Accordingly, when the setting value updating process (FIG. 686) is ended and the process returns to the process (steps SB801 to SB818, steps SB823 to SB826) at the start of the supply of the operating power in the main process (FIG. 684), Interrupts of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639) are prohibited.

  After that, a second RAM clearing process is executed (step SB917). In the second RAM clearing process, similarly to the RAM clearing process (step SA416) in the seventy-seventh embodiment, the area in which the information of the setting value indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the work area 221 for the specific control (that is, the area). Except for the setting reference area 341), the work area 221 for the specific control is cleared to “0” and the initial setting is executed. As a result, since the area indicating whether the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the high probability mode is cleared to “0”, the winning / rejecting lottery is performed regardless of the winning / rejecting lottery mode immediately before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. The mode is a low probability mode. In addition, the game is not executed, the opening / closing execution mode is not executed, and the general-purpose display unit 38a is not variably displayed, and the general electric functioning object 34a is in the closed state. Situation. In addition, since the hold storage area 65a and the ordinary power hold area 65c provided in the work area 221 for specific control are also cleared to "0", the hold information for the special figure display unit 37a is erased and the general figure display unit is cleared. The hold information for 38a is deleted. Further, the setting update display flag and the setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 221 for the specific control are cleared to “0”. The setting update area 342 provided in the specific control work area 221 is cleared to “0”. Further, the game stop flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to “0”. In the second RAM clearing process, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to “0” and the initialization is executed. In the second RAM clearing process, various registers of the main CPU 63 are also cleared to "0", and then the initial setting is executed. In this initial setting, processing similar to the internal function register setting processing in step SB802 is executed. Note that the process for clearing “0” and the process for performing initial setting are not executed for the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control.

  After that, a return command at the time of updating is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step SB918). The content of processing executed by the sound emission control device 81 when a return command at the time of updating is received is the same as that of the above-mentioned eighteenth embodiment.

  Next, how the set value to be updated is updated will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 688 (a) shows a period during which the power of the pachinko machine 10 is ON, FIG. 688 (b) shows the operation status of the setting key insertion section 68a, and FIG. 688 (c) shows the operation of the reset button 68c. FIG. 688 (d) shows the period during which the set value update process (FIG. 686) is being executed, FIG. 688 (e) shows the setting status of the OFF confirmation flag 361, and FIG. 688 (f) shows the setting status Indicates the value update timing.

  First, a comparative example in which “1” is not set to the OFF confirmation flag 361 when the set value update process (FIG. 686) is started will be described.

  At the timing of t1, the setting key insertion section 68a is turned ON using the setting key as shown in FIG. 688 (b), and the reset button 68c is pressed as shown in FIG. 688 (c). Then, as shown in FIG. 688 (a), the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed at a timing t2 when the ON operation of the setting key insertion section 68a and the pressing operation of the reset button 68c are continued. In this case, since the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is being performed in a state where the “setting change operation” is performed, the setting value updating process (FIG. 688 (d)) is performed at the timing of t3. FIG. 686) is started.

  In the comparative example, since the OFF confirmation flag 361 is not set to “1” when the set value update processing (FIG. 686) is started, the value of the OFF confirmation flag 361 is set at the timing of t3 as shown in FIG. 688 (e). Is "0". Thereafter, at a timing t4 when the pressing operation of the reset button 68c at the time of the power ON operation is continued, the reset button 68c is pressed while the value of the OFF confirmation flag 361 is “0”. As a result, the set value to be updated is incremented by one as shown in FIG. At the timing of the t4, “1” is set to the OFF confirmation flag 361 as shown in FIG. 688 (e).

  In other words, in the comparative example, the pressing operation of the reset button 68c at the time of the power ON operation is continued even after the start of the setting value updating process (FIG. 686), so that the setting value to be updated becomes 1 Will be added. In this case, although the manager of the gaming hall does not intend to update the set value to be updated, the set value to be updated is updated.

  Next, a description will be given of the present embodiment in which “1” is set to the OFF confirmation flag 361 when the set value update process (FIG. 686) is started.

  At time t5, the setting key insertion section 68a is turned ON using the setting key as shown in FIG. 688 (b), and the reset button 68c is pressed as shown in FIG. 688 (c). Then, as shown in FIG. 688 (a), the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed at the timing t6 when the ON operation of the setting key insertion section 68a and the pressing operation of the reset button 68c are continued. In this case, since the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is being performed in the state where the “setting change operation” is performed, the setting value updating process (FIG. 688 (d)) is performed at the timing of t7. FIG. 686) is started. When the set value updating process (FIG. 686) is started, a process of setting “1” to the OFF confirmation flag 361 is executed in step SB901. Therefore, at the timing of t7, "1" is set in the OFF confirmation flag 361 as shown in FIG. 688 (e). Since the timing at which this OFF confirmation flag 361 is set to "1" is a timing before the timing for determining whether or not the reset button 68c has been pressed in the set value update processing (FIG. 686), FIG. As shown in (), even if the reset button 68c is continuously pressed when the power is turned on, the set value to be updated is not incremented by one. Thereafter, at time t8, the pressing operation of the reset button 68c is terminated as shown in FIG. 688 (c), and the OFF confirmation flag 361 is cleared to “0” as shown in FIG. 688 (e).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 688 (c), the reset button 68c is pressed at each of the timings t9 to t10, the timings t11 to t12, and the timings t13 to t14. In this case, the reset button 68c is pressed in a situation where the value of the OFF confirmation flag 361 is “0” at each of the timings t9, t11, and t13. As shown, the set value to be updated is incremented by one at each of these timings.

  Thereafter, the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned off at the timing of t15 as shown in FIG. 688 (b), whereby the setting value updating process (FIG. 686) is performed at the timing of t15 as shown in FIG. 688 (d). ) Ends.

  In the configuration in which the set value to be updated is incremented by 1 when it is determined that the reset button 68c is pressed in the situation where the OFF confirmation flag 361 is set to “0” as described above, If the step 686) is started, “1” is set to the OFF confirmation flag 361 in step SB901 executed prior to the process of determining whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed. This makes it possible to prevent the set value to be updated from being incremented by 1 due to the pressing operation of the reset button 68c when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  When the set value update process (FIG. 686) is started, the set value is changed from a set value corresponding to a predetermined start. Thus, in the setting value update process (FIG. 686), the operation of changing the set value from the set value corresponding to a certain start regardless of the set value of the use target before the start of the set value update process (FIG. 686). Can be performed. Therefore, the work contents of the setting value changing operation are easy for the operator to understand.

  The setting value for the start is specifically “setting 1” having the lowest advantage. Therefore, when the setting value update process (FIG. 686) is started, the setting value is changed from “Setting 1” having the lowest advantage. Thereby, even if the manager of the game hall unintentionally ends the set value update process (FIG. 686) immediately after the start of the set value update process (FIG. 686), the set value having the lowest advantage is determined. Therefore, even if the game is started in such a situation, it is possible to prevent unintended disadvantages from occurring in the game hall.

  The work area 221 for specific control is provided with a setting reference area 341 and a setting update area 342, and information corresponding to the setting value to be used is stored in the setting reference area 341 and the setting value update processing is performed. The information corresponding to the setting value that is being changed in the situation where (FIG. 686) is being executed is stored in the setting update area 342. Thereby, while the information of the set value set before the start of the set value update process (FIG. 686) is stored and held in the setting reference area 341, the update target of the set value update process (FIG. 686) is changed. The set value can be changed.

  If the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped while the setting value updating process (FIG. 686) is being executed, the game is played if the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is restarted thereafter. Is set in a regulated state in which the process for causing the process to proceed is not started. This makes it possible to prevent the processing for advancing the game from being started even though the setting value update processing (FIG. 686) has not been completed.

  Even if the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped while the set value updating process (FIG. 686) is being executed, the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is restarted thereafter When the “setting change operation” is performed in the above, the above-mentioned restriction state is not established. This makes it possible to prevent the execution of the process for advancing the game from being restricted until the setting value is changed.

  Even in the restricted state, power failure monitoring and various counter updating processes are executed. This makes it possible to ensure execution of necessary processing even in the state where the progress of the game is regulated as described above. In particular, by executing the power failure monitoring, it is possible to appropriately cope with a power failure occurring even when the progress of the game is restricted.

  The regulation state is restarted when the supply of the operating power is restarted even if the supply of the operating power is stopped. Accordingly, in a state where the setting value update process (FIG. 686) is being executed, the supply of the operation power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, and the execution of the process for causing the game to be restricted is restricted to the operation power. Can be prevented from being released only by stopping the supply of.

  In the configuration in which the set value to be updated is incremented by one when it is determined that the reset button 68c is pressed in a situation where the OFF confirmation flag 361 in the work area 221 for specific control is set to “0”. When the value update process (FIG. 686) is started, “1” is set to the OFF confirmation flag 361 in step SB901 executed before the process of determining whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed. It is a configuration to do. This makes it possible to prevent the set value to be updated from being incremented by 1 due to the pressing operation of the reset button 68c when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on.

  Note that this is a case where the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped in the middle of the setting value update process (FIG. 686), and the setting confirmation process ( When step SB810) is executed, the configuration update display flag may be cleared to “0” and the execution of the processing for advancing the game may not be restricted. By executing the setting confirmation process (step SB810), the current set value of the use target is notified, so that the manager of the game hall can grasp the set value of the use target. In such a case, even if the execution of the process for advancing the game is not restricted, the game does not proceed with the setting value that is not assumed by the administrator of the gaming hall.

  When the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped during the setting value updating process (FIG. 686), whether or not the “setting change operation” is performed when the supply of the operating power is resumed thereafter , The setting value update process (FIG. 686) may be forcibly executed. This makes it possible to forcibly change the set value.

  Further, when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped during the setting confirmation process (step SB810), the execution of the process for advancing the game when the supply of the operating power is resumed thereafter is restricted. It may be configured to be in a restricted state. In this case, when the setting confirmation process (step SB810) is executed when the supply of the operating power is restarted, the configuration may be such that the above-mentioned restricted state is not established. When the set value updating process (FIG. 686) is executed, the above-mentioned restricted state may not be set.

  Further, if the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped during the setting confirmation process (step SB810), it is determined whether the “setting confirmation operation” is performed when the supply of the operating power is resumed thereafter. The configuration confirmation process (step SB810) may be forcibly executed regardless of the setting. This makes it possible to forcibly confirm the set value.

  In the setting value update process (FIG. 686), it is specified that the reset button 68c is not pressed in the front process in two consecutive processes, and the reset button 68c is pressed in the rear process. Although the setting value of the selection target is changed when it is specified that the pressing operation is performed, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reset button 68c is used for each of a plurality of past consecutive processing times. Is determined not to be pressed, and the setting value of the selection target is changed when the pressing of the reset button 68c is specified in one processing cycle or a plurality of consecutive processing cycles in that situation. May be adopted. Even in this case, when the set value update process (FIG. 686) is started, the reset button 68c is pressed to store information regarding the confirmation history of the press operation of the reset button 68c in a plurality of past consecutive processes. The setting value to be selected is changed in the setting value updating process (FIG. 686) by the pressing operation of the reset button 68c for starting the setting value updating process (FIG. 686). It is possible to do not.

<86th Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the main processing executed by the main CPU 63 is different from that of the 85th embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the 85th embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the 85th embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 689 is a flowchart showing the main processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. The processing of steps SC101 to SC128 in the main processing is executed by using the specific control program and the specific control data in the main CPU 63.

  In steps SC101 to SC106, the same processes as those in steps SB801 to SB806 of the main process (FIG. 684) in the 85th embodiment are executed. When a positive determination is made in all of steps SC104 to SC106, it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed (step SC107). If the reset button 68c has not been pressed (step SC107: NO), it is determined whether the setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SC108). ). When the reset button 68c is not pressed and the setting update display flag is not set to “1” (step SC107 and step SC108: NO), the game stop flag in the specific control work area 221 is set to “1”. Is set (step SC109). If "1" is set in the game stop flag, an abnormal command is transmitted in step SC127, and an external output process at the time of abnormal is executed in step SC128.

  When the game stop flag is not set to "1" (step SC109: NO), the process proceeds to step SC110. In steps SC110 to SC112, the same processes as those in steps SB809 to SB811 of the main process (FIG. 684) in the 85th embodiment are executed.

  If it is determined in step SC107 that the reset button 68c has been pressed, or if it is determined in step SC108 that the setting update display flag has been set to "1", the setting key insertion section 68a is determined in step SC113. Is determined to be ON using the setting key. Then, when it is determined that the setting key insertion section 68a is ON-operated (step SC113: YES), after setting “1” to the OFF confirmation flag 361 in the work area 221 for specific control (step SC114), the setting is performed. A value update process is performed (step SC115). In steps SC116 to SC128, the same processes as those in steps SB114 to SB826 of the main process (FIG. 684) in the 85th embodiment are executed.

  That is, in the present embodiment, when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped during the execution of the setting value update process (step SC115), the situation of “no operation” or the “RAM clear operation” is performed. When the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is resumed in the situation, the situation in which the processing for advancing the game is blocked is continued as in the 85th embodiment, while the “setting change operation” is performed. The setting is performed not only when the supply of the operation power to the main CPU 63 is resumed in the situation where the operation is performed, but also when the supply of the operation power to the main CPU 63 is resumed in the situation where the “setting confirmation operation” is performed. A value update process (step SC115) is performed. Accordingly, when the supply of the operation power to the main CPU 63 is restarted after the supply of the operation power to the main CPU 63 is stopped during the execution of the set value update process (step SC115), the set value update process ( Step SC115) is easily executed.

  In particular, at the time of the "setting change operation", it is necessary to turn on the setting key insertion portion 68a using the setting key and press the reset button 68c, and at the time of the "setting confirmation operation", use the setting key. In a configuration in which the key insertion section 68a needs to be turned on, if the setting update display flag is set to "1", the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on even if the reset button 68c is not pressed. The setting value updating process (step SC115) is executed. Thus, the setting value updating process (step SC115) is started by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 in the situation where the “setting change operation” is performed, but, for example, the power off operation is erroneously performed in the middle of the process. Then, in order to quickly return to the ON state of the power supply, the setting key insertion section 68a is maintained in the ON state, and even if the reset button 68c is not pressed, the setting is performed. It is possible to execute the value update process (step SC115).

  In the present embodiment, when it is determined in step SC112 that the setting key insertion unit 68a has been turned ON, the work for specific control is performed in step SC114 before the setting value update process (step SC115) is started. “1” is set to the OFF confirmation flag 361 in the area 221. Thus, even if the process of setting the OFF confirmation flag 361 to “1” is not performed when the set value updating process (step SC115) is started, the pressing operation of the reset button 68c at the time of the power ON operation is triggered. It is possible to prevent the set value to be updated from being incremented by one. Incidentally, in the setting value updating process (step SC115) of the present embodiment, the processing of step SB902 to step SB918 is executed without executing the process of step SB901 in the setting value updating process (FIG. 686) of the 85th embodiment. Is done.

  In the setting value update process (step SC115), it is specified that the reset button 68c has not been pressed in the front process in two consecutive processes, and the reset button 68c is pressed in the rear process. Although the setting value of the selection target is changed when it is specified that the pressing operation is performed, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reset button 68c is used for each of a plurality of past consecutive processing times. Is determined not to be pressed, and the setting value of the selection target is changed when the pressing of the reset button 68c is specified in one processing cycle or a plurality of consecutive processing cycles in that situation. May be adopted. Even in this case, when the set value updating process (step SC115) is started, the reset button 68c is pressed to store information on the confirmation history of the pressing operation of the reset button 68c in a plurality of past consecutive processes. The setting value to be selected is changed in the setting value updating process (FIG. 686) by the pressing operation of the reset button 68c for starting the setting value updating process (FIG. 686). It is possible to make it not.

<87th embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the main processing executed by the main CPU 63 is different from that of the 81st embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the above-described eighteenth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the 81st embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 690 is a flowchart showing main processing in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. The processing of steps SC201 to SC230 in the main processing is executed by using the specific control program and the specific control data in the main CPU 63.

  First, a power-on initial setting process is executed (step SC201). In the power-on initialization process, for example, the process waits without advancing to the next process until a predetermined time for wait (specifically, one second) elapses after the main process is started. The operation start and the initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed in the predetermined period for the weight. Also, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted.

  Thereafter, an internal function register setting process is executed (step SC202). In the internal function register setting process, similarly to the 67th embodiment, the interrupt cycle of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638), which is a process started by interrupting the main process periodically, is set to the first interrupt cycle (FIG. 638). (Specifically, 4 milliseconds), and the interrupt cycle of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 693), which is a process that is started by periodically interrupting the main process, is set to be longer than the first interrupt cycle. The second interrupt cycle (specifically, 2 milliseconds), which is a short cycle, is set.

  That is, in the present embodiment, similarly to the 67th embodiment, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 693) are performed as timer interrupt processes so that the interrupt cycle is relatively long. Exists. Both the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 693) are started by interrupting the main process. The second timer interrupt process (FIG. 693) is started by interrupting the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638). On the other hand, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638) is not activated by interrupting the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 693). In a situation where both the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 693) have not been executed, if both the first interrupt cycle and the second interrupt cycle have elapsed, those cycles Irrespective of the lapse order of the second timer, the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 693) is started first. In this regard, it can be said that the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 693) is a process started with priority over the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638) may be started prior to the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 693).

  In the internal function register setting processing, the first interrupt cycle of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) is set in a predetermined register of the main CPU 63, and the second interrupt cycle of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 693) is mainly set. It is set in a specific register of the side CPU 63. Further, in the internal function register setting process, in addition to the setting of the first and second interrupt cycles, for example, a setting process of a numerical range of various counters such as a numerical range of the hit random number counter C1 is executed.

  After that, “1” is set to a start-up processing flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step SC203). As in the 67th embodiment, even if the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) is started, the power-out processing flag indicates the power failure among the various processings set in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638). While the processing for monitoring, updating the various counters, and performing the fraud monitoring is executed, it is determined that the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) should be ended without executing the processing for advancing the game. This flag is specified by the main CPU 63.

  The start-up processing flag is set to “1” when the processing (Step SC <b> 201 to Step SC <b> 223) at the start of the operation power supply is started in the main processing (FIG. 690), and the processing at the start of the operation power supply is performed. It is cleared to "0" before the end of (steps SC201 to SC223) and the start of the remaining processing (steps SC227 to SC230). As in the 67th embodiment, in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638), when the start-up processing flag is set to “1”, the processing of steps S8907 to S8920 is not executed. In the process at the start of the supply of the operating power (steps SC201 to SC223), the process for advancing the game in the situation where the process for setting confirmation (step SC213) or the process for updating the set value (step SC216) is being executed. It can be prevented from being executed. On the other hand, as described above, in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638), even if the start-up processing flag is set to “1”, the processing from step S8901 to step S8905 is executed, thereby reducing the operating power. The power failure monitoring is executed even in the situation where the setting confirmation processing (step SC213) or the setting value update processing (step SC216) is being executed among the processing (steps SC201 to SC223) at the start of the supply of The hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the random number initial value counter CINI are updated, and fraud detection is further performed.

  In particular, even when the start-up processing flag is set to “1”, the power failure information storage processing (step S8901) is executed, so that the processing at the start of the supply of the operation power (steps SC201 to SC223) ), Even if a power failure occurs in a situation in which the setting confirmation process (step SC213) or the set value update process (step SC216) is being performed, the power failure process can be executed. In the process at the time of power failure, similarly to the 67th embodiment, the power failure flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to “1”, the checksum is calculated, and the calculated checksum is used for the specific control. Since the power is stored in the work area 221, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an abnormality in the main RAM 65 from being identified when the supply of the operating power is restarted. Accordingly, when a power failure occurs during the setting confirmation process (step SC213) or the setting value updating process (step SC216), the fact that a power failure has occurred during these setting-related processes is indicated by the supply of the next operating power. It can be specified at the start.

  Incidentally, in the situation where the setting confirmation processing (step SC213) or the setting value update processing (step SC216) is being executed, both the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 693) are performed. The interrupt is not prohibited and can be interrupted at an arbitrary timing. In this case, if the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638) or the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 693) is started by interrupting the setting confirmation process (step SC213) or the set value updating process (step SC216), The information of the return address of the main processing (FIG. 690) for returning after the completion of the timer interrupt processing to be started is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control, and the timer interrupt processing is started. The information of the various registers of the main CPU 63 immediately before is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control. Then, when the timer interrupt processing to be activated ends, the process returns to the main processing (FIG. 690) corresponding to the information of the return address saved in the stack area 222 for specific control, and The information saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is restored to various registers of the main CPU 63.

  Thereafter, the display start flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step SC204). The display start flag specifies in the main CPU 63 that the display control of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a should be started after the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. This is the flag for

  Thereafter, in steps SC205 to SC225, the same processes as those in steps SB104 to SB124 of the main process (FIG. 670) in the eighteenth embodiment are executed. In this case, the processing content executed in the main process (FIG. 690) in relation to the combination of the situation at the time of the previous stop of the supply of the operation power and the operation content at the start of the supply of the operation power this time is the same as that of the 81st embodiment. The processing contents shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. For example, when the power failure process is executed in a state where neither the setting confirmation process (step SC213) nor the setting value update process (step SC216) is executed, or the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is executed. When the process at the time of a power failure is performed in a situation where the “RAM clear operation” is performed when the supply of the operating power is resumed thereafter, the first RAM clear process (step 690) is performed in the main process (FIG. 690). SC218) is executed. Further, if the power failure process is performed in a state where the set value update process (step SC216) is being performed, the set value update process ( When the second RAM clearing process (step SB313 in FIG. 672 in the 81st embodiment) is executed in step SC216), and the power failure process is executed in a state where the set value updating process (step SC216) is not executed However, if the "setting change operation" is performed when the supply of the operating power is resumed thereafter, the second RAM clearing process (step SB313 in FIG. 554 in the 81st embodiment in FIG. 554 in the 81st embodiment) is performed in the setting value updating process (step SC216). ) Is executed.

  In the first RAM clear processing and the second RAM clear processing, the clear target area 371 in the specific control work area 221 is cleared to “0” and the initial setting is executed, while the clear target area 372 in the specific control work area 221 is executed. Is not cleared to "0" and the initial setting is not executed. FIG. 691 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a clear target area 371 and a non-clear target area 372 provided in the work area 221 for specific control.

  In the present embodiment, as in the above-described thirty-third embodiment, even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped because the power of the pachinko machine 10 is in the OFF state, the power supply / emission control device Backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 from the power supply unit at the time of power failure provided at 78 as power for storing and storing. By supplying the backup power to the main RAM 65 in this way, the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are provided. Backup power is also supplied. Then, the backup power is supplied to the work area 221 for the specific control, so that the backup power is supplied to the clear target area 371 and the non-clear target area 372. As a result, even when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped because the power of the pachinko machine 10 is in the OFF state, the backup power is supplied to the clear target area 371 and the non-clear target area 372. The information is stored and held in the clear target area 371 and the non-clear target area 372.

  The clear target area 371 includes a second display data buffer 272, a fourth display data buffer 274, and a fifth display data buffer 275. The second display data buffer 272 is an area in which display data for causing the special figure suspension display section 37b to perform a predetermined display is set as in the 65th embodiment. When the hold information for the special figure display unit 37a is newly stored in the hold storage area 65a in the hold information acquisition processing (step S401) in the special figure special power control processing (FIG. 517), the first timer interrupt processing is performed. The display control means (step S8915) in FIG. 638 stores the display data corresponding to the number of pieces of suspension information for the special figure display section 37a stored in the suspension storage area 65a after the storage, in the second display data buffer 272. Is set to In addition, when the hold information for the special figure display unit 37a is consumed as an opportunity to execute the game in the data setting processing (step S502) in the special figure change start processing (FIG. 518), the first timer interrupt processing ( The display control means (step S8915) in FIG. 638) stores, in the second display data buffer 272, display data corresponding to the number of pieces of hold information for the special figure display section 37a stored in the hold storage area 65a after the digestion. Is set.

  The fourth display data buffer 274 is an area in which display data for causing the general-purpose display unit 38b to perform a predetermined display is stored, similarly to the 65th embodiment. In the case where the hold information for the general-purpose display section 38a is newly stored in the general-purpose hold area 65c in the general-purpose general-purpose control process (step S8914) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638), the first timer The display control means (step S8915) in the interruption process (FIG. 638) displays the fourth display data corresponding to the number of the hold information for the general-purpose display section 38a stored in the general-purpose power-reserve area 65c after the storage. It is set in the data buffer 274. In addition, the hold information for the general figure display unit 38a was exhausted as an opportunity to execute the variable display time of the general figure display unit 38a in the general figure general control process (step S8914) in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638). In this case, the display control means (step S8915) in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) corresponds to the number of the hold information for the general-purpose display section 38a stored in the general-purpose power-reserve area 65c after the digestion. Is set in the fourth display data buffer 274.

  The fifth display data buffer 275 is an area in which display data for causing the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 to perform a predetermined display is set, similarly to the 65th embodiment. The setting of the display data in the fifth display data buffer 275 is executed in step SC403, step SC405, and step SC406 in a second timer interrupt process (FIG. 693) described later.

  In the clear target area 371, in addition to the second display data buffer 272, the fourth display data buffer 274, and the fifth display data buffer 275, a hold storage area 65a for storing hold information for the special figure display unit 37a and a general storage area 65a are provided. It includes a general power hold area 65c in which the hold information for the figure display unit 38a is stored. Therefore, when the first RAM clear processing or the second RAM clear processing is executed, the hold information for the special figure display unit 37a and the hold information for the general figure display unit 38a are deleted. In this case, the clear display area 371 includes the second display data buffer 272 and the fourth display data buffer 274 as described above. Thus, when the hold storage area 65a is initialized and the hold information for the special figure display unit 37a becomes zero, the display content of the special figure hold display unit 37b is also changed to the hold state for the special figure display unit 37a. It is possible to set the display content to have zero information, and if the general information holding area 65c is initialized and the hold information for the general figure display unit 38a becomes zero, the general figure hold is performed. The display content of the display unit 38b can also be the display content in which the hold information for the general map display unit 38a is zero.

  In the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the base value is basically set after the processing at the start of the supply of the operation power (step SC201 to step SC223) is completed, as in the eighteenth embodiment. Is displayed, but if the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is executed in the process (steps SC201 to SC223) at the start of the supply of the operating power, the current settings of the pachinko machine 10 are set. When the value is displayed and the set value updating process (step SC216) is executed, the set value in the middle of the update is displayed, and the process at the start of the supply of the operating power (step SC201 to step SC223) ends. Displays a check display. That is, in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, when the supply of the operation power is restarted, information different from the information of the base value displayed before the supply of the operation power is stopped is displayed. Will be displayed. Therefore, even if the fifth display data buffer 275 is initialized when the first RAM clear processing or the second RAM clear processing is executed, no problem occurs as the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. .

  The clear target area 371 includes, in addition to the above-described areas, an area for special figure special power control and an area for normal figure general power control. Therefore, when the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is executed, the winning / rejecting lottery mode becomes the low probability mode regardless of the winning / rejecting lottery mode immediately before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. In addition, the game is not executed, the opening / closing execution mode is not executed, and the general-purpose display unit 38a is not variably displayed, and the general electric functioning object 34a is in the closed state. Situation. The setting update display flag and the setting confirmation display flag provided in the specific control work area 221 are cleared to “0”, and the setting update area 342 provided in the specific control work area 221 is cleared to “0”. Is done. In addition, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to “0”, and the initialization is performed. After the various registers of the main CPU 63 are also cleared to "0", the initial setting is executed. In this initial setting, processing similar to the internal function register setting processing in step SC202 is executed.

  Although the processing contents of the first RAM clear processing are the same as the processing contents of the second RAM clear processing in the setting value update processing, a configuration in which some of these processing contents are different may be adopted. For example, the area to be cleared and initialized in the first RAM clearing process may not be the object of the clearing and initial setting in the second RAM clearing process. The area to be cleared and initialized may not be set to “0” in the first RAM clear processing.

  The non-clear area 372 includes a first display data buffer 271, a third display data buffer 273, and an initial display completed flag 373. The first display data buffer 271 is an area for storing display data for causing the special figure display unit 37a to perform a predetermined display, as in the 65th embodiment. At step S513 in the special figure change start processing (FIG. 518), the processing for starting the change display of the picture in the special figure display unit 37a is executed, so that the display control means (FIG. 638) performs the first timer interrupt processing. In step S8915), the display data corresponding to the display at the start of the change of the special figure display unit 37a is set in the first display data buffer 271. In addition, in the special figure special power control processing (FIG. 517), the processing for updating the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a is performed in the special figure changing processing (step S407), so that the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638), the display control means (step S8915) sets the display data for causing the variation display of the picture on the special figure display section 37a to proceed in the first display data buffer 271. In the special figure special power control processing (FIG. 517), during the special figure finalizing processing (step S408), the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a are displayed in the current round of the game (step S504) and the distribution determination processing (step S504). By executing the processing for setting the display content corresponding to the processing result of step S506), the display control means (step S8915) in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) displays the current game on the special figure display section 37a. The display data for performing the display corresponding to the result of the round is set in the first display data buffer 271. The display data set in this case is the display data selected in step S507 or step S509 of the special figure change start process (FIG. 518) at the start of the current game round. In addition, the display data set in this case is stored and held in the first display data buffer 271 until a state in which a new game round is started in the special figure display unit 37a.

  The third display data buffer 273 is an area for storing display data for causing the general-purpose display unit 38a to perform a predetermined display, as in the 65th embodiment. In the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638), the process for starting the variation display of the picture is performed in the general-purpose display unit 38a in the general-purpose general-electricity control process (step S8914), whereby the first timer interrupt process ( The display control means (step S8915) in FIG. 638) sets the display data corresponding to the display at the start of the change of the general-purpose display section 38a in the third display data buffer 273. In addition, in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638), the process for updating the display content of the general-purpose display unit 38a is performed in the general-purpose general-purpose control process (step S8914), so that the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638). The display control means (step S8915) in FIG. 638) sets the display data for causing the variation display of the picture on the ordinary figure display unit 38a to proceed in the third display data buffer 273. Also, in the general-purpose general-purpose control process (step S8914) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638), the display content of the general-purpose display unit 38a is changed to the display content corresponding to the result of the general-purpose open lottery in the current variable display time. Is executed, the display control means (step S8915) in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) causes the general-purpose display section 38a to perform a display corresponding to the result of the current variable display times. Display data is set in the third display data buffer 273. In this case, the display data set in this case is stored and held in the third display data buffer 273 until a situation in which the general variable display section 38a starts a new variable display cycle.

  The initial display completed flag 373 is a flag used by the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the situation is after completion of the initial display on the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a at the factory shipment stage. Since the initial display completed flag 373 is included in the non-clearing area 372, once the initial display of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a at the factory shipment stage is once confirmed, the subsequent operation power is reduced. When the supply is restarted, the initial display can be prevented from being performed.

  Since the first display data buffer 271 and the third display data buffer 273 are included in the non-clear target area 372, even if the first RAM clear processing or the second RAM clear processing is executed, the supply of the operating power is restarted. The display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a when the display of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a start after the display contents are displayed before the supply of the operation power is stopped. Can be restored. Thereby, even if the player checks the special figure display section 37a and the general figure display section 38a after the supply of the operating power is resumed, it is determined whether the first RAM clear processing or the second RAM clear processing has been executed. You will not be able to do it.

  In particular, since the second RAM clear processing is executed in the set value update processing (step SC216) that enables the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 to be changed, the special figure display unit is executed when the second RAM clear processing is executed. If the display content of at least one of the display 37a and the general-purpose display unit 38a becomes the display content corresponding to the execution of the second RAM clearing process or is changed from the display content before the supply of the operation power is stopped, the display content By checking the special figure display section 37a or the ordinary figure display section 38a, it is possible to predict whether or not the set value of the pachinko machine 10 has been changed. On the other hand, even if the second RAM clearing process is executed, the special figure display unit 37a when the display of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a is started after the supply of the operation power is started. In addition, the display content of the general-purpose display unit 38a returns to the display content before the supply of the operation power is stopped. As a result, even if the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a are checked, it is possible to prevent the setting value update process (step SC216) from being specified.

  In addition, the non-clearing area 372 includes an area in which information of a setting value indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set (that is, the setting reference area 341), in addition to the above-described areas. Thereby, even if the first RAM clear processing or the second RAM clear processing is executed, the information of the set value indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is maintained as it is. The non-clear area 372 also includes a work area 223 for non-specific control and a stack area 224 for non-specific control.

  Incidentally, since backup power is not supplied to the RAMs of the audio light emission control device 81 and the display control device 82, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and the supply of operating power to the audio light emission control device 81 and the display control device 82 is stopped. When the operation is stopped, the information stored in the RAMs of the sound emission control device 81 and the display control device 82 is deleted. However, if the supply of the operating power is started and the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process are not executed, the main CPU 63 changes the execution state of the effect to the sound emission control device 81 and the supply of the operating power is stopped. When the command for returning to the state immediately before the operation is transmitted, the contents of the effect execution control in the audio light emission control device 81 and the display control device 82 return to the state immediately before the supply of the operation power is stopped. It will be.

  Returning to the description of the main process (FIG. 690), after executing the process of step SC225, a display start process is executed (step SC226). After that, the remaining process is executed in steps SC227 to SC230. The processing contents of steps SC227 to SC230 are the same as those of steps SB125 to SB128 of the main processing (FIG. 670) in the eighteenth embodiment.

  Next, the display start process executed in step SC226 of the main process (FIG. 690) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 692. Note that the processing of steps SC301 to SC305 in the display start processing is executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

  If “1” is not set in the initial display completed flag 373 (step SC301: NO), the initial display data for the special figure is set in the first display data buffer 271 (step SC302), and the initial display data for the general figure is set. The display data is set in the third display data buffer 273 (step SC303). Then, “1” is set to the initial display completed flag 373 (step SC304).

  By controlling the display of the special figure display unit 37a using the initial display data for the special figure stored in the first display data buffer 271, the initial display is performed on the special figure display unit 37a. The display content of the initial display in the special figure display unit 37a is arbitrary, but for example, a configuration may be adopted in which all of the plurality of light emitting units provided in the special figure display unit 37a are in a light emitting state. A configuration may be adopted in which some of the plurality of light emitting units provided emit light. When some of the light emitting units are in the light emitting state, the light emitting unit in the light emitting state and the light emitting unit maintained in the light off state may be alternately arranged in the arrangement order. The display of the general-purpose display unit 38a is controlled using the initial display data for the general-purpose figure stored in the third display data buffer 273, so that the initial display is performed on the general-purpose display unit 38a. The display content of the initial display on the general-purpose display unit 38a is arbitrary, but for example, a configuration in which all of the plurality of light-emitting units provided on the general-purpose display unit 38a may emit light may be used. A configuration may be adopted in which some of the plurality of light emitting units provided emit light. When some of the light emitting units are in the light emitting state, the light emitting unit in the light emitting state and the light emitting unit maintained in the light off state may be alternately arranged in the arrangement order.

  On the other hand, when “1” is set in the initial display completed flag 373 (step SC301: YES), the processing of step SC302 and step SC303 is not executed. Therefore, the first display data buffer 271 is in a state where the display data stored immediately before the supply of the operation power is stopped is stored as it is, and the third display data buffer 273 is stored immediately before the supply of the operation power is stopped. Is stored as it is. Further, as already described, since the first display data buffer 271 and the third display data buffer 273 are provided in the non-clear area 372, the first RAM clear processing and the second RAM clear processing are performed in the main processing (FIG. 690). Even if one of them is executed, the first display data buffer 271 is in a state where the display data stored immediately before the supply of the operation power is stopped is stored as it is, and the third display data buffer 273 is operated with the operation power. The display data stored immediately before the supply of data is stopped is stored as it is.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step SC301 or if the process of step SC304 is performed, “1” is set to the display start flag provided in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control (step SC305). . The display start flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not to start the display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure reservation display unit 38b. It is. When the value of the display start flag is “0”, the main CPU 63 does not perform the display control of the special figure display part 37a, the special figure reservation display part 37b, the general figure display part 38a, and the general figure reservation display part 38b. When the display start flag is set to "1", the main CPU 63 starts display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure reservation display unit 38b.

  As described above, the display start flag is cleared to "0" in step SC204 of the main process (FIG. 690). This processing timing is determined after the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, the general figure reservation display unit 38b, and the first to fourth. The timing is before the timing at which the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 693) for executing the display control of the notification display devices 201 to 204 is first executed. Then, as described above, the display start flag is set to “1” in the display start process (FIG. 692) executed after the process at the start of the supply of the operating power (step SC201 to step SC223) is completed. As a result, immediately after the supply of the operating power is resumed, the special-figure display section 37a, the special-figure reservation display section 37b, the general-figure display section 38a, and the general-figure reservation display section 38b are kept off, and the supply of the operation power is performed. After the start process (step SC201 to step SC223) is completed, the display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure reservation display unit 38b is started.

  Next, the second timer interrupt process in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 693. The processing of steps SC401 to SC415 in the second timer interrupt processing is executed by using the specific control program and the specific control data in the main CPU 63. Further, the second timer interrupt process is permitted when the setting confirmation process (step SC213) starts, and is prohibited when the setting confirmation process (step SC213) ends. The second timer interrupt process is permitted to interrupt when the set value update process (step SC216) is started, and is prohibited when the set value update process (step SC216) is completed. Further, in the second interrupt processing, an interrupt is performed from the setting of interrupt permission in step SC230 of the main processing (FIG. 690) to the setting of prohibition of interrupt in step SC227 of the main processing (FIG. 690). Allowed. The same applies to the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638).

  In steps SC401 to SC409, the same processes as those in steps S8401 to S8409 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 628) in the 65th embodiment are executed. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the type counter is “5” (step SC410). As in the 65th embodiment, the type counter specifies the transmission target of the display data in the first to fifth display data buffers 271 to 275 by the main CPU 63 in the current processing of the second timer interrupt processing. It is a counter for. When the value of the type counter is “1”, the display data of the first display data buffer 271 is to be transmitted, and when the value of the type counter is “2”, the display data of the second display data buffer 272 is to be transmitted. When the value of the type counter is “3”, the display data of the third display data buffer 273 is to be transmitted, and when the value of the type counter is “4”, the display data of the fourth display data buffer 274 is If the type data is to be transmitted and the value of the type counter is “5”, the display data in the fifth display data buffer 275 is to be transmitted.

  When the value of the type counter is one of "1" to "4", that is, any one of the special figure display part 37a, the special figure reservation display part 37b, the general figure display part 38a and the general figure reservation display part 38b is displayed. If the situation is that control is to be performed (step SC410: NO), it is determined whether or not “1” is set to the display start flag of the work area 221 for specific control (step SC411). When the value of the type counter is "5" (step SC410: YES), or when the value of the type counter is any of "1" to "4" and the display start flag is set to "1" (Step SC410: NO, Step SC411: YES), the processing of Step SC412 to Step SC414 is executed.

  In the process of steps SC412 to SC414, first, the type data corresponding to the value of the type counter is read from the main ROM 64 (step SC412). Specifically, when the value of the type counter is “1”, the type data corresponding to the first display circuit 261 is read from the main ROM 64, and when the value of the type counter is “2”, the second type is read. The type data corresponding to the display circuit 262 is read from the main ROM 64, and when the value of the type counter is "3", the type data corresponding to the third display circuit 263 is read from the main ROM 64, and the value of the type counter is read. When the value is "4", the type data corresponding to the fourth display circuit 264 is read from the main ROM 64, and when the value of the type counter is "5", the type data corresponding to the fifth display circuit 265 is read. Read from the side ROM 64.

  Thereafter, display data is read from the display data buffers 271 to 275 corresponding to the value of the type counter (step SC413). Specifically, when the value of the type counter is “1”, the display data is read from the first display data buffer 271, and when the value of the type counter is “2”, the display data is read from the second display data buffer 272. The display data is read, and if the value of the type counter is "3", the display data is read from the third display data buffer 273. If the value of the type counter is "4", the display data is read from the fourth display data buffer 274. The display data is read, and when the value of the type counter is “5”, the display data is read from the fifth display data buffer 275.

  Thereafter, transmission processing of various signals is executed (step SC414). In the transmission processing, a signal is output to the type data signal line LN1 and the type clock signal line LN2 so that the type data read in step SC412 is transmitted to the display IC 266. In the transmission process, a signal is output to the display data signal line LN3 and the display clock signal line LN4 so that the display data read in step SC413 is transmitted to the display IC 266.

  On the other hand, when the value of the type counter is any one of “1” to “4” and the display start flag is not set to “1” (step SC410 and step SC411: NO), the processing of step SC412 to step SC414 Do not execute. Thus, even if the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the special figure display section 37a, the special figure reservation display section 37b, and the general figure display section 38a are kept until the display start flag is set to "1". And the special figure display part 37a, the special figure reservation display part 37b, the general figure display part 38a, and the general figure reservation display part 38b are maintained in the unlit state without the display control of the general figure reservation display part 38b being started.

  If a negative determination is made in step SC411, or if the process in step SC414 is performed, interrupt permission is set to permit generation of the first timer interrupt process and the second timer interrupt process (step SC415).

  Next, the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a corresponding to the situation at the time of starting the supply of the operating power will be described. FIG. 694 is an explanatory diagram for describing the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a corresponding to the situation at the time of starting the supply of the operating power.

  Since “1” has not yet been set in the initial display completed flag 373 at the factory shipment stage, the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, and the display of the special figure display section 37a and the general figure display section 38a is changed. When it is started, initial display is started on the special figure display section 37a and the general figure display section 38a. The initial display in the special figure display unit 37a is such that when a game ball enters the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 and the start condition of the game round is satisfied, the picture is displayed on the special figure display unit 37a. Is continued until the start of the variable display. The initial display on the general-purpose display unit 38a is continued until a game ball enters the through gate 35 and the display of the pattern on the general-purpose display unit 38a starts to change.

  If it is not the factory shipment stage, that is, if “1” is already set in the initial display completed flag 373, the first RAM clearing process is performed in the process (Step SC201 to Step SC223) at the start of the supply of the operating power. The supply of the operating power is stopped regardless of whether the processing is executed, the setting value update processing is executed, the setting confirmation processing is executed, or the processing is not executed. The display of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a is controlled so that the display contents immediately before are displayed. As a result, even if the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a are checked, it is possible to prevent the setting value update process (step SC216) from being specified.

  In particular, the display contents when the display of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a is started, and the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped. Are the same. Thereby, the display contents of the special-figure display section 37a and the general-figure display section 38a immediately before the supply of the operation power is stopped are checked and memorized. Even if the display content displayed first on the display unit 38a is confirmed, it is possible to prevent the setting value update process (step SC216) from being specified.

  In addition, by setting the first display data buffer 271 and the third display data buffer 273 in the non-clear target area 372 which is not to be subjected to the first RAM clear processing and the second RAM clear processing in the work area 221 for specific control, The display contents when the display of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a is started are the same as the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a immediately before the supply of the operation power is stopped. It is the structure which does. In other words, no special processing is required so that it is not possible to identify whether or not the set value update processing (step SC216) has been executed even if the special figure display section 37a and the ordinary figure display section 38a are checked. . Therefore, it is possible to achieve the above-described excellent effects while suppressing an increase in the processing load.

  Note that the present invention is not limited to a configuration in which both the first display data buffer 271 and the third display data buffer 273 are provided in the non-clear target area 372, and the first display data buffer 271 is not included in the clear target area 372. Although provided, the third display data buffer 273 may be provided in the clear target area 371. In this case, when the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is executed when the supply of the operation power is started, the special figure display unit 37a displays the contents from the display contents before the supply of the operation power is stopped. Is started, but an initial display is performed on the general-purpose display unit 38a. Further, instead of this, the third display data buffer 273 is provided in the non-clearing area 372, but the first display data buffer 271 may be provided in the clearing area 371. In this case, if the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is executed when the supply of the operation power is started, the general-purpose display unit 38a displays the contents from the display content before the supply of the operation power was stopped. Is started, but the initial display is performed on the special figure display section 37a.

  Further, in a configuration in which a round display unit for notifying the number of round games generated in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by a jackpot result is provided as a display unit controlled by the main CPU 63. Alternatively, an area in which display data for causing the round display unit to perform display may be provided in the non-clearing area 372. In this case, the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is executed when the supply of the operation power is started when the supply of the operation power is stopped while the predetermined display is being performed on the round display unit. Thus, the predetermined display is restarted on the round display section.

  In addition, all the display units directly controlled by the main CPU 63, including the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure reservation display unit 38b, perform display. The area in which the display data is stored may not be initialized by the first RAM clear processing and the second RAM clear processing. In this case, any of the display units directly controlled by the main CPU 63 does not supply the operating power even if the first RAM clear processing or the second RAM clear processing is executed when the supply of the operating power is started. Will be displayed based on the display contents before the display is stopped. In this configuration, although the display based on the display contents before the supply of the operation power is temporarily stopped in the special figure reservation display unit 37b and the general figure reservation display unit 38b, the corresponding suspension information is set to 0 after that. The display content may be switched to the display content corresponding to the number.

  Further, an area in which display data for displaying on the special figure suspension display section 37b and the general figure suspension display section 38b is stored is initialized when the first RAM clear processing or the second RAM clear processing is executed. However, a configuration may be employed in which the special figure suspension display section 37b and the general figure suspension display section 38b are displayed in such a manner that the number of corresponding suspension information is difficult for the player to understand. In this case, by executing the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process, a display indicating that there is no corresponding suspension information is displayed on each of the special figure suspension display section 37b and the general figure suspension display section 38b. Even if it is, it is difficult for the player to understand that the display indicating that the hold information is 0 is performed. However, it is difficult to specify that the first RAM clear processing or the second RAM clear processing has been executed.

<Eighth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is restarted are different from those of the 87th embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the 87th embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the 87th embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 695 is an explanatory diagram for describing each area provided in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control.

  In the clear target area 371, a second display data buffer 272 in which display data for causing the special figure suspension display unit 37b to perform a predetermined display is stored, and a general display suspension display unit 38b for performing a predetermined display. Not only the fourth display data buffer 274 in which display data is stored, and the fifth display data buffer 275 in which display data for causing the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 to perform predetermined display are stored. A first display data buffer 271 storing display data for causing the special figure display unit 37a to perform a predetermined display, and a first display data buffer 271 storing display data for causing the general figure display unit 38a to perform a predetermined display. Three display data buffers 273 are provided. Therefore, when the first RAM clearing process (step SC218) is executed in the main process (FIG. 690) or when the second RAM clearing process of the set value updating process (step SC216) is executed, the supply of the operating power is performed. The display data corresponding to the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the ordinary figure display section 38a immediately before the stop is erased.

  In the clear target area 371, an initial display flag 375 is provided in addition to the first to fifth display data buffers 271 to 275. The initial display flag 375 is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not it is necessary to perform the initial display on the special figure display unit 37a and the ordinary figure display unit 38a. Since the initial display flag 375 is provided in the clear target area 371, when the first RAM clear processing or the second RAM clear processing is executed in the main processing (FIG. 690), the initial display flag 375 becomes “0”. "Will be cleared. Therefore, when the first RAM clear processing or the second RAM clear processing is executed in the main processing (FIG. 690), the special figure display is performed after the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power (step SC201 to step SC223) is executed. When the display of the section 37a and the general-purpose display section 38a is started, the initial display is performed on the special-figure display section 37a and the general-purpose display section 38a.

  FIG. 696 is a flowchart showing the display start processing according to the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. The processing of steps SC501 to SC511 in the display start processing is executed by using the specific control program and the specific control data in the main CPU 63.

  If "1" is not set in the initial display flag 375 (step SC501: NO), the initial display data for the special figure is set in the first display data buffer 271 (step SC502), and the initial display data for the general figure is set. The display data is set in the third display data buffer 273 (step SC503). Then, “1” is set to the initial display flag 375 (step SC504).

  By controlling the display of the special figure display unit 37a using the initial display data for the special figure stored in the first display data buffer 271, the initial display is performed on the special figure display unit 37a. The display content of the initial display in the special figure display unit 37a is arbitrary, but for example, a configuration may be adopted in which all of the plurality of light emitting units provided in the special figure display unit 37a are in a light emitting state. A configuration may be adopted in which some of the plurality of light emitting units provided emit light. When some of the light emitting units are in the light emitting state, the light emitting unit in the light emitting state and the light emitting unit maintained in the light off state may be alternately arranged in the arrangement order. The display contents of the initial display on the special figure display unit 37a are different from the display contents stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 37a to notify the game result of the game times. The display content of the initial display on the special figure display unit 37a is different from the display content displayed in the situation where the pattern is being changed and displayed on the special figure display unit 37a. Thus, it is possible to clearly specify that the initial display is being performed on the special figure display unit 37a.

  The display of the general-purpose display unit 38a is controlled using the initial display data for the general-purpose figure stored in the third display data buffer 273, so that the initial display is performed on the general-purpose display unit 38a. The display content of the initial display on the general-purpose display unit 38a is arbitrary, but for example, a configuration in which all of the plurality of light-emitting units provided on the general-purpose display unit 38a may emit light may be used. A configuration may be adopted in which some of the plurality of light emitting units provided emit light. When some of the light emitting units are in the light emitting state, the light emitting unit in the light emitting state and the light emitting unit maintained in the light off state may be alternately arranged in the arrangement order. The display content of the initial display on the general-purpose display unit 38a is different from the display content that is stopped and displayed on the general-purpose display unit 38a to notify the result of the vibrating release lottery in the variable display times. I have. Further, the display content of the initial display on the general-purpose display unit 38a is different from the display content displayed in a situation where the pattern is displayed on the general-purpose display unit 38a. As a result, it is possible to clearly specify that the initial display is being performed on the ordinary figure display unit 38a.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step SC501, by referring to the storage area in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control, which stores information indicating whether or not the game is being executed, It is determined whether or not the supply of the operating power is restarted after the supply of the operating power is stopped during the execution of (step SC505). The storage area stores information indicating that the game is being executed when the game is started, and information indicating that the game is being executed when the game is ended. Deleted from the area. Even if the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, if the backup power is supplied to the work area 221 for specific control, the information in the storage area is stored and held. Even when the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process are not executed when the power supply is restarted, the data is stored and held.

  Further, by referring to a storage area in the clear target area 371 of the specific control work area 221 in which information indicating whether or not the open / close execution mode is being executed is stored, the operating power during the execution of the open / close execution mode is referred to. It is determined whether or not the supply of the operating power is resumed after the supply of the power is stopped (step SC506). When the opening / closing execution mode is started, information indicating that the opening / closing execution mode is being executed is stored in the storage area, and when the opening / closing execution mode is ended, it indicates that the opening / closing execution mode is being executed. The information is deleted from the storage area. Even if the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, if the backup power is supplied to the work area 221 for specific control, the information in the storage area is stored and held. Even when the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process are not executed when the power supply is restarted, the data is stored and held.

  If the last stop of the supply of the operating power is neither during execution of the game round nor during execution of the opening / closing execution mode (step SC505 and step SC506: NO), the initial display data for the special figure is displayed as the first display data. The value is set in the buffer 271 (step SC507). By controlling the display of the special figure display unit 37a using the initial display data for the special figure stored in the first display data buffer 271, the initial display described above is performed on the special figure display unit 37a. On the other hand, if the last stop of the supply of the operating power was during the execution of the game times or during the execution of the opening / closing execution mode (step SC505 or step SC506: YES), the initial display data for the special figure is the Since the display data is not set in the first display data buffer 271, the display data stored before the supply of the operating power is stopped is stored in the first display data buffer 271 as it is. Therefore, when the display on the special figure display unit 37a is started, the display content on the special figure display unit 37a immediately before the supply of the operation power is stopped is restarted as it is.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step SC505, when an affirmative determination is made in step SC506, or when the process of step SC507 is performed, the variation of the general-purpose display unit 38a in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control is performed. By referring to the storage area in which information indicating whether or not the image is being displayed is stored, the supply of the operation power is restarted after the supply of the operation power is stopped during the variation display of the pattern on the general-purpose display unit 38a. It is determined whether or not the situation has occurred (step SC508). In the storage area, when the variation display of the pattern is started on the general-purpose display unit 38a, information indicating that the variation display of the pattern is being executed on the general-purpose display unit 38a is stored. When the variation display of the pattern is ended in the storage area, the information indicating that the variation display of the pattern is being executed in the general-purpose display unit 38a is deleted from the storage area. Even if the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, if the backup power is supplied to the work area 221 for specific control, the information in the storage area is stored and held. Even when the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process are not executed when the power supply is restarted, the data is stored and held.

  In addition, by referring to the storage area in the clear target area 371 of the specific control work area 221 in which information indicating whether or not the ordinary power release state is being executed is stored, during the execution of the ordinary power open state. It is determined whether the supply of the operation power is restarted after the supply of the operation power is stopped (step SC509). The storage area stores information indicating that the normal power release state is being executed when the normal power open state is started, and the information indicating that the normal power open state is being executed when the normal power open state is ended. The information indicating the existence is deleted from the storage area. Even if the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, if the backup power is supplied to the work area 221 for specific control, the information in the storage area is stored and held. Even when the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process are not executed when the power supply is restarted, the data is stored and held.

  If the last stop of the supply of the operating power is neither during the execution of the pattern change display on the ordinary figure display unit 38a nor during the execution of the ordinary electricity open state (step SC508 and step SC509: NO), the ordinary figure Is set in the third display data buffer 273 (step SC510). By controlling the display of the general-purpose display section 38a using the initial display data for the general-purpose figure stored in the third display data buffer 273, the initial display described above is performed on the general-purpose display section 38a. On the other hand, when the last stop of the supply of the operating power is either during execution of the change display of the pattern on the ordinary figure display unit 38a or during execution of the ordinary power open state (step SC508 or step SC509: YES), Since the initial display data for ordinary drawing is not set in the third display data buffer 273, the display data stored before the supply of the operation power is stopped is stored in the third display data buffer 273 as it is. . Therefore, when the display on the general-purpose display unit 38a is started, the display content on the general-purpose display unit 38a immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped is restarted as it is.

  When the processing of step SC504 is executed, when an affirmative judgment is made in step SC508, when an affirmative judgment is made in step SC509, or when the processing of step SC510 is executed, the clear target area of the work area 221 for specific control is used. “1” is set to the display start flag provided in 371 (step SC511). The display start flag determines whether or not to start the display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure reservation display unit 38b, as in the 87th embodiment. This is a flag specified by the CPU 63. When the value of the display start flag is “0”, the main CPU 63 does not perform the display control of the special figure display part 37a, the special figure reservation display part 37b, the general figure display part 38a, and the general figure reservation display part 38b. When the display start flag is set to "1", the main CPU 63 starts display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure reservation display unit 38b.

  As in the 87th embodiment, the display start flag is cleared to "0" in step SC204 of the main process (FIG. 690). This processing timing is determined after the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, the general figure reservation display unit 38b, and the first to fourth. The timing is before the timing at which the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 693) for executing the display control of the notification display devices 201 to 204 is first executed. Then, the display start flag is set to "1" in the display start process (FIG. 696) executed after the process at the start of the supply of the operating power (step SC201 to step SC223) is completed. As a result, immediately after the supply of the operating power is resumed, the special-figure display section 37a, the special-figure reservation display section 37b, the general-figure display section 38a, and the general-figure reservation display section 38b are kept off, and the supply of the operation power is performed. After the start process (step SC201 to step SC223) is completed, the display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure reservation display unit 38b is started.

  In particular, in the display start process (FIG. 696), as described above, even if both the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process are not executed in the main process (FIG. 690), the first display data buffer 271 is stored. In some cases, initial display data for a special figure is set and initial display data for a general figure is set in the third display data buffer 273 in some cases. In this case, assuming that the display control of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a is started immediately after the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit The initial display is started immediately after the display content immediately before the supply of the operation power is stopped in 38a is displayed. Then, the player who observes such a change in the display content starts the initial display on the special figure display unit 37a and the ordinary figure display unit 38a in a state where both the first RAM clear processing and the second RAM clear processing are not executed. You can understand what was done. On the other hand, when display data is set in the first display data buffer 271 and the third display data buffer 273 in the display start processing (FIG. 696), the display start flag is set after the processing for setting the display data is completed. Is set to "1", and the display of the special figure display section 37a and the general figure display section 38a is started. As a result, it is possible to prevent the display content from being changed as described above.

  Next, the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a corresponding to the situation at the time of starting the supply of the operating power will be described. FIG. 697 is an explanatory diagram for describing the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a corresponding to the situation at the time of starting the supply of the operating power.

  When the first RAM clearing process is performed in the process at the start of the supply of the operating power (steps SC201 to SC223) or the second RAM clearing process of the setting value updating process is performed, “1” is set to the initial display flag 375. Is not set, when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started and the display of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a is started, the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display The initial display is started in the section 38a. The initial display in the special figure display unit 37a is such that when a game ball enters the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 and the start condition of the game round is satisfied, the picture is displayed on the special figure display unit 37a. Is continued until the start of the variable display. The initial display on the general-purpose display unit 38a is continued until a game ball enters the through gate 35 and the display of the pattern on the general-purpose display unit 38a starts to change. Since the initial display flag 375 is not set to "1" even at the factory shipment stage, the initial display is started on the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a.

  Regardless of whether the first RAM clearing process is executed based on the “RAM clearing operation” as described above or the case where the second RAM clearing process of the set value updating process is executed based on the “setting change operation”, When the display of the special-figure display section 37a and the general-figure display section 38a starts, the initial display is performed on the special-figure display section 37a and the general-figure display section 38a. Even if the display contents of the display units 37a and 38a when the display is started on the diagram display unit 37a and the general-purpose display unit 38a are confirmed, it is determined which of the first RAM clear process and the set value update process has been executed. I can't figure out. Thereby, even if the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a when the supply of the operation power is started, it is not possible to specify whether or not the setting value update processing has been executed. It is possible to do.

  Even if the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process of the setting value updating process are not executed in the process (Step SC201 to Step SC223) at the time of starting the supply of the operating power, the situation in which the supply of the operating power is stopped is a game. If the state is neither during the execution of the cycle nor during the execution of the opening / closing execution mode, when the display is started on the special figure display unit 37a, the initial display is started on the special figure display unit 37a. Further, even if the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process of the setting value updating process are not executed in the process at the time of starting the supply of the operating power (step SC201 to step SC223), the situation in which the supply of the operating power is stopped. Is not in the state of executing the variation display of the picture on the ordinary figure display section 38a or in the state of opening the ordinary power open state, and when the display is started on the ordinary figure display section 38a, the ordinary figure display is performed. The initial display is started in the section 38a. Then, as described above, the special figure display unit 37a and the special figure display unit 37a are also executed when the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process of the set value updating process is performed in the process (step SC201 to step SC223) at the start of the supply of the operating power. Initial display is performed on the general-purpose display unit 38a. Thereby, even if it is confirmed that the initial display is being performed on the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a when the supply of the operating power is started, the first RAM clear processing and the second RAM clear processing are not performed. It is possible to make it impossible to specify that one of them has been executed.

  On the other hand, the state in which the supply of the operating power is stopped is either during the execution of the game round or during the execution of the opening / closing execution mode, and the first RAM is used in the processing (Step SC201 to Step SC223) when the supply of the operating power is started. If the clearing process and the second RAM clearing process are not executed, when the display is started on the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure display unit becomes the display content immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped. 37a is display-controlled. In addition, the situation in which the supply of the operating power is stopped is either during the execution of the variation display of the picture on the ordinary figure display unit 38a or during the execution of the open state of the ordinary power, and the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power (step SC201) If the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process are not executed in step SC223), the display contents immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped when the display is started on the general-purpose display unit 38a The display control of the general-purpose display unit 38a is controlled so that Accordingly, when the game situation immediately before the supply of the operation power is stopped is resumed when the supply of the operation power is resumed, the special figure display unit 37a and the general-purpose display unit 37a are arranged in a manner corresponding to the restart of the game situation. The display on the diagram display unit 38a can be started.

  Note that the contents of the initial display displayed on the special figure display unit 37a differ between the case where the first RAM clear processing is executed and the case where the second RAM clear processing is executed when the supply of the operating power is started. Configuration. Also, when the supply of the operating power is started, the contents of the initial display displayed on the general-purpose display unit 38a are different between the case where the first RAM clear processing is executed and the case where the second RAM clear processing is executed. Configuration.

  When the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is performed when the supply of the operating power is started, the initial display is performed on the special figure display unit 37a, whereas the general figure display unit 38a is displayed. In this configuration, the display content before the supply of the operation power is stopped may be displayed. Further, when the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is executed when the supply of the operating power is started, the initial display is performed on the ordinary figure display unit 38a, whereas the special figure display unit 37a is displayed. In this configuration, the display content before the supply of the operation power is stopped may be displayed.

  Also, there are a plurality of types of initial display of the special figure display unit 37a, and when the supply of the operation power is started, when the initial display is performed on the special figure display unit 37a, the initial display is selected by lottery. The initial display may be performed by the special figure display unit 37a. In addition, there are a plurality of types of initial display of the general-purpose display unit 38a, and when the supply of the operating power is started, when the initial display is performed on the general-purpose display unit 38a, the initial display is selected by lottery. The initial display may be performed on the general-purpose display unit 38a.

  Further, in a configuration in which a round display unit for notifying the number of round games generated in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by a jackpot result is provided as a display unit controlled by the main CPU 63. Indicates that either the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is performed when the supply of the operating power is started, or that both the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process are not performed. Even in such a case, the initial display may be performed on the round display unit. As a result, even if the round display section is checked, it is not possible to specify whether the first RAM clear processing or the second RAM clear processing has been executed.

  Further, all the display units directly controlled by the main CPU 63, including the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure reservation display unit 38b, supply the operating power. Is started, either when the first RAM clear processing or the second RAM clear processing is executed, or when both the first RAM clear processing and the second RAM clear processing are not executed, the initial display is performed. It is good also as a structure performed. In this configuration, although the initial display is started once in the special figure suspension display section 37b and the general figure suspension display section 38b, the display is switched to the display content corresponding to the fact that the corresponding suspension information is zero thereafter. It may be configured.

  When the first RAM clear processing is executed when the supply of the operating power is started, steps SC502 to SC503 of the display start processing (FIG. 696) are executed, while the second RAM clear processing is executed. In this case, the configuration may be such that steps SC502 to SC503 of the display start process (FIG. 696) are not executed. When the supply of the operating power is started and the second RAM clear processing is executed, steps SC502 to SC503 of the display start processing (FIG. 696) are executed, while the first RAM clear processing is executed. In this case, the configuration may be such that steps SC502 to SC503 of the display start process (FIG. 696) are not executed.

<89th embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the general figure display section 38a when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is restarted are different from those of the 88th embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the 88th embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the 88th embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 698 is a flowchart showing the display start processing in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. The processing of steps SC601 to SC605 in the display start processing is executed by using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63. Further, first to fifth display data buffers 271 to 275 and an initial display flag 375 are provided in a clear target area 371 in the work area 221 for specific control.

  If “1” is not set in the initial display flag 375 (step SC601: NO), the display data for the special figure is set in the first display data buffer 271 (step SC602), and the display for the general figure is made. The display data is set in the third display data buffer 273 (step SC603). Then, “1” is set to the initial display flag 375 (step SC604).

  If the result of the hit / fail determination processing (step S504) of the special figure change start processing (FIG. 518) is a deviation result, the deviation display data for the special figure is selected by the stop result setting processing for the deviation result (step S509). Display data to be displayed. In other words, the special map deviation display data is display data for causing the special figure display unit 37a to finally display a deviation in the game in which the result of the hit determination processing is a deviation result. Since only one type of out-of-position display data for a special figure is set, there is one type of out-of-line display in the special figure display unit 37a. Further, in the game times in which the result of the hit / fail determination processing is a winning result, a plurality of types of winning displays finally displayed on the special figure display unit 37a are set, but the out-of-range display is different from the plurality of types of winning display. It is displayed content.

  The special figure display unit 37a is controlled to be displayed using the special figure outside display data stored in the first display data buffer 271, so that the special figure display unit 37a performs the outside display. Although the display content of the off display is arbitrary, for example, only one of the plurality of light emitting units provided in the special figure display unit 37a may emit light, and the plurality of light emitting units emit light. It may be configured to be in a state.

  If the result of the general-purpose release lottery in the general-purpose general-electricity control process (step S8914) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638) is an out-of-order result, the general-purpose release lottery is executed. This is display data for causing the general-purpose display unit 38a to finally perform a departure display at the time of the variable display time of the general-purpose display unit 38a corresponding to. Since only one type of out-of-place display data is set for the ordinary figure, the type of out-of-place display in the ordinary figure display unit 38a is also one type. In addition, only one type of hit display that is finally displayed on the general figure display unit 38a in the variable display time of the general figure display unit 38a in which the result of the public telephone opening lottery is a winning result is set, but the off display is The display content is different from the hit display.

  By performing display control of the general-purpose display unit 38a using the general-purpose deviation display data stored in the third display data buffer 273, the general-purpose display unit 38a performs the off-state display. Although the display content of the off display is arbitrary, for example, only one of the plurality of light emitting units provided in the general-purpose display unit 38a may emit light, and the plurality of light emitting units emit light. It may be configured to be in a state.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step SC601 or when the process of step SC604 is performed, “1” is set to the display start flag provided in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control (step SC605). . The display start flag determines whether or not to start the display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure reservation display unit 38b, as in the 87th embodiment. This is a flag specified by the CPU 63. When the value of the display start flag is “0”, the main CPU 63 does not perform the display control of the special figure display part 37a, the special figure reservation display part 37b, the general figure display part 38a, and the general figure reservation display part 38b. When the display start flag is set to "1", the main CPU 63 starts display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure reservation display unit 38b.

  As in the 87th embodiment, the display start flag is cleared to "0" in step SC204 of the main process (FIG. 690). This processing timing is determined after the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, the general figure reservation display unit 38b, and the first to fourth. The timing is before the timing at which the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 693) for executing the display control of the notification display devices 201 to 204 is first executed. Then, the display start flag is set to "1" in the display start process (FIG. 698) executed after the process at the start of the supply of the operating power (steps SC201 to SC223) is completed. As a result, immediately after the supply of the operating power is resumed, the special-figure display section 37a, the special-figure reservation display section 37b, the general-figure display section 38a, and the general-figure reservation display section 38b are kept off, and the supply of the operation power is performed. After the start process (step SC201 to step SC223) is completed, the display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure reservation display unit 38b is started.

  In particular, in the display start process (FIG. 698), when either the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process is executed in the main process (FIG. 690) as described above, the special display is stored in the first display data buffer 271. The out-of-place display data is set in the third display data buffer 273, and the out-of-place display data is set in the third display data buffer 273. In this case, assuming that the display control of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a is started immediately after the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit At 38a, the display is started immediately after the display content immediately before the supply of the operation power is stopped is displayed. Then, the player who visually observes such a change in the display content starts the off-screen display on the special figure display unit 37a and the ordinary figure display unit 38a in a state where either the first RAM clear processing or the second RAM clear processing is executed. You can understand what was done. On the other hand, when display data is set in the first display data buffer 271 and the third display data buffer 273 in the display start processing (FIG. 696), the display start flag is set after the processing for setting the display data is completed. Is set to "1", and the display of the special figure display section 37a and the general figure display section 38a is started. As a result, it is possible to prevent the display content from being changed as described above.

  On the other hand, when “1” is set in the initial display flag 375 (step SC601: YES), the processing of step SC602 and step SC603 is not executed. Therefore, the first display data buffer 271 is in a state where the display data stored immediately before the supply of the operation power is stopped is stored as it is, and the third display data buffer 273 is stored immediately before the supply of the operation power is stopped. Is stored as it is. In this case, when the display start flag is set to “1” and the display of the special figure display unit 37a is started, the display data stored in the first display data buffer 271 immediately before the supply of the operation power is stopped. Is displayed on the special figure display section 37a. When the display start flag is set to “1” and the display on the general-purpose display unit 38a is started, the display data stored in the third display data buffer 273 immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped. A corresponding display is performed on the general-purpose display section 38a.

  Next, the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a corresponding to the situation at the time of starting the supply of the operating power will be described. FIG. 699 is an explanatory diagram for describing the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a corresponding to the situation at the start of the supply of the operating power.

  When the first RAM clearing process is performed in the process at the start of the supply of the operating power (steps SC201 to SC223) or the second RAM clearing process of the setting value updating process is performed, “1” is set to the initial display flag 375. Is not set, when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started and the display of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a is started, the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure Off display is started on the display unit 38a. The departure display in the special figure display unit 37a indicates that a game ball enters the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 and the start condition of the game round is satisfied, so that the pattern is displayed on the special figure display unit 37a. Is continued until the start of the variable display. The departure display on the general-figure display unit 38a is continued until a game ball enters the through gate 35 and the variation display of the picture on the general-figure display unit 38a is started. Since the initial display flag 375 is not set to "1" even at the factory shipment stage, the off-screen display is started on the special figure display section 37a and the general figure display section 38a.

  Regardless of whether the first RAM clearing process is executed as described above or the second RAM clearing process of the set value updating process is executed, the display of the special figure display unit 37a and the ordinary figure display unit 38a starts. In this case, the off-state display is performed on the special-figure display section 37a and the general-figure display section 38a, so that the supply of the operation power is started and the display is started on the special-figure display section 37a and the general-figure display section 38a. Even if the display contents of the display units 37a and 38a are checked, it is not possible to grasp which of the first RAM clear processing and the set value update processing has been executed. Thereby, even if the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a when the supply of the operation power is started, it is not possible to specify whether or not the setting value update processing has been executed. It is possible to do.

  If the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process of the setting value updating process are not executed in the process (steps SC201 to SC223) at the start of the supply of the operating power, the display is started on the special figure display unit 37a. In this case, the display on the special figure display section 37a is started with the display content immediately before the supply of the operation power is stopped, and the supply of the operation power is stopped when the display is started on the ordinary figure display section 38a. The display on the general-purpose display unit 38a is started with the display content immediately before the display. Here, during the business closing time of the game hall, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is almost always shut off in a state where neither the game round nor the opening / closing execution mode is executed, and furthermore, the general-purpose display unit 38a In most cases, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off in a state where neither the variable display time nor the normal power open state is executed. In other words, the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the ordinary figure display unit 38a immediately before the supply of the operation power is stopped are basically out-of-display. Then, as described above, the special figure display unit 37a and the special figure display unit 37a are also executed when the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process of the set value updating process is performed in the process (step SC201 to step SC223) at the start of the supply of the operating power. An off display is performed on the ordinary figure display unit 38a. Thereby, even if it is confirmed that the off display is performed on the special figure display unit 37a and the ordinary figure display unit 38a when the supply of the operation power is started, the first RAM clear processing and the second RAM clear processing are not performed. It is possible to make it impossible to specify that one of them has been executed.

  Note that, in a configuration in which a plurality of types of off-screen displays are present in the special figure display unit 37a, when the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is executed when the supply of the operating power is started, the plurality of types of out-of-range displays are displayed. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which one type of predetermined out-of-off display is performed in the special figure display section 37a. Further, in a configuration in which a plurality of types of out-of-order displays are present on the general-purpose display unit 38a, when the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is executed when the supply of the operating power is started, the plurality of types of out-of-range displays are displayed. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a predetermined type of out-of-office display among the out-of-office displays is performed on the general-purpose display unit 38a.

  When the first RAM clear processing is executed when the supply of the operating power is started, steps SC602 to SC603 of the display start processing (FIG. 698) are executed, while the second RAM clear processing is executed. In this case, the configuration may be such that steps SC602 to SC603 of the display start process (FIG. 698) are not executed. Also, when the supply of the operating power is started and the second RAM clear processing is executed, steps SC602 to SC603 of the display start processing (FIG. 698) are executed, while the first RAM clear processing is executed. In this case, the configuration may be such that steps SC602 to SC603 of the display start process (FIG. 698) are not executed.

<90th embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is restarted are different from those of the 87th embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the 87th embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the 87th embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 700 is an explanatory diagram for describing each area provided in the clear target area 371 and the non-clear target area 372 of the work area 221 for specific control.

  In the clear target area 371, a second display data buffer 272 in which display data for causing the special figure suspension display unit 37b to perform a predetermined display is stored, and a general display suspension display unit 38b for performing a predetermined display. Not only the fourth display data buffer 274 in which display data is stored, and the fifth display data buffer 275 in which display data for causing the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 to perform predetermined display are stored. A first display data buffer 271 storing display data for causing the special figure display unit 37a to perform a predetermined display, and a first display data buffer 271 storing display data for causing the general figure display unit 38a to perform a predetermined display. Three display data buffers 273 are provided. Therefore, when the first RAM clearing process (step SC218) is executed in the main process (FIG. 690) or when the second RAM clearing process of the set value updating process (step SC216) is executed, the supply of the operating power is performed. The display data corresponding to the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the ordinary figure display section 38a immediately before the stop is erased.

  In the clear target area 371, an initial display flag 375 is provided in addition to the first to fifth display data buffers 271 to 275. The initial display flag 375 is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not it is necessary to perform the off display as the initial display on the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a. Since the initial display flag 375 is provided in the clear target area 371, when the first RAM clear processing or the second RAM clear processing is executed in the main processing (FIG. 690), the initial display flag 375 becomes “0”. "Will be cleared. Therefore, when the first RAM clear processing or the second RAM clear processing is performed in the main processing (FIG. 690), the special figure display is performed after the processing at the start of supply of the operating power (step SC201 to step SC223) is performed. The off display is performed as the initial display on the unit 37a and the general-purpose display unit 38a.

  The non-clearing area 372 is provided with an initial display counter 381 for a special figure and an initial display counter 382 for a general figure. The special figure initial display counter 381 is used when a special figure display unit 37a starts displaying and when the special figure display unit 37a performs an off-display as an initial display, a plurality of special figure special display counters 381 are provided. Is a counter for determining, by lottery, which kind of special figure out of display is to be performed. The numerical range that the special display initial display counter 381 can take is “0 to 59”, but is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

  An initial display counter 382 for the general figure displays a plurality of types of the general figure when the display of the general figure display section 38a is started and when the general figure display section 38a performs the off display as the initial display. Is a counter for determining, by lottery, which kind of out-of-view display is to be performed. The value range that the ordinary display initial display counter 382 can take is "0-59", but is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

  The special figure initial display counter 381 and the general figure initial display counter 382 are provided in the clearing-free area 372 as described above. Accordingly, if the supply of the backup power to the main RAM 65 is continued in a state where the supply of the operation power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the first RAM clear processing or the first RAM clear processing is performed in the main processing (FIG. 690). Even when the 2RAM clear processing is executed, the initial display counter 381 for special figure and the initial display counter 382 for ordinary figure are stored in a state where the numerical information immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped without being initialized. Is maintained.

  The numerical information of the special figure initial display counter 381 and the numerical information of the ordinary figure initial display counter 382 are periodically updated by the first timer interrupt processing in a situation where activation of the first timer interrupt processing is permitted. Is done. FIG. 701 is a flowchart showing the first timer interrupt processing executed by the main CPU 63 in the present embodiment. Note that the processing of steps SC701 to SC722 in the first timer interrupt processing is executed using the specific control program and the specific control data in the main CPU 63.

  In steps SC705 to SC705, the same processes as those in steps S8901 to S8905 of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638) in the 67th embodiment are executed. After that, an initial display counter update process for a special figure is executed (step SC706). In the updating process, the current numerical information is read from the special figure initial display counter 381, and the read numerical information is added by 1. Then, the numerical information after the addition is overwritten on the special figure initial display counter 381. I do. In this case, when the counter value exceeds the maximum value (specifically, “59”), it is cleared to “0”.

  Thereafter, in step SC707, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in any of the game stop flag and the start-up processing flag in the work area 221 for specific control. If "1" is set in any of the flags (step SC707: YES), the first timer interrupt processing ends without executing the processing of steps SC708 to SC722. If “1” is not set in any of the flags (step SC707: NO), the CPU 21 executes an initial display counter update process for ordinary drawing (step SC708). In the update processing, the current numerical information is read from the general-purpose initial display counter 382, and the read numerical information is added by one. I do. In this case, when the counter value exceeds the maximum value (specifically, “59”), it is cleared to “0”. In steps SC709 to SC722, the same processes as those in steps S8907 to S8920 of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638) in the 67th embodiment are executed.

  Here, the special figure initial display counter update processing (step SC706) is set as processing executed regardless of whether the game stop flag or the start-up processing flag is set to “1”. On the other hand, the initial display counter update process for ordinary drawing (step SC708) is set as a process that is not executed when the game stop flag or the start-up process flag is set to “1”. This makes it possible to make the update frequency different between the initial display counter 381 for the special figure and the initial display counter 382 for the general figure. Can be prevented from being synchronized.

  FIG. 702 is a flowchart showing a display start process according to the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processing of steps SC801 to SC807 in the display start processing is executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

  If “1” is not set in the initial display flag 375 (step SC801: NO), a lottery process for special figure out-of-display data is executed (step SC802). In the lottery process of the special figure out-of-display data, the main figure ROM 64 refers to the special figure out-of-position display lottery table 383 stored in advance. FIG. 703 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the off-drawing lottery table 383 for a special figure. As shown in FIG. 703 (a), there are special figure first display data, special figure second out display data, and special figure third out display data as special figure out display data. ing.

  The first out-of-special display data for special figure, the second out-of-special display data for special figure, and the third out-of-specified display data for special figure are determined by the result of the hit / fail determination processing (step S504) of the tof figure change start processing (FIG. 518). This is display data that can be selected by lottery in the stop result setting process (step S509) for a miss result when the result is a miss. That is, the first to third deviation display data for the special figure is display data for finally performing the deviation display on the special figure display unit 37a in the game time in which the result of the hit determination processing is the deviation result. . The first deviation display data for the special figure is data for displaying the first deviation display for the special figure on the special figure display unit 37a, and the second deviation display data for the special figure is the second deviation display for the special figure. This is data for displaying the display on the special figure display unit 37a, and the third deviation display data for the special figure is data for displaying the third deviation display for the special figure on the special figure display unit 37a. The display contents of the first off display for special figure, the second off display for special figure, and the third off display for special figure are different from each other. In addition, a plurality of types of winning displays finally displayed on the special figure display section 37a in the game times in which the result of the hit / fail determination processing is a winning result are set. The display content is different from the plurality of types of hit display. In addition, in the stop result setting process for the deviation result (step S509), the deviation display to be displayed on the special figure display unit 37a using the initial display counter 381 for the special figure and the deviation display lottery table 383 for the special figure is used. The type is selected from the first to third out-of-order displays for special drawings.

  In the special figure outlier display lottery table 383, the numerical range of the special figure initial display counter 381 is set for each of the special figure first to third outlier display data. Specifically, the numerical range of the initial display counter 381 for the special figure of “0 to 19” is set for the first deviation display data for the special figure, and the second deviation display data for the special figure is set as the second deviation display data for the special figure. On the other hand, the numerical range of the special figure initial display counter 381 of "20 to 39" is set, and the special figure initial display counter of "40 to 59" is set for the third special display data for special figure. A numerical range of 381 is set. In other words, the selection probabilities of the first to-be-displayed data for special figure, the second to-be-displayed data for special figure, and the third to-be-displayed data for special figure in the lottery process of the to-be-figure out-of-display data are “1/3”. ].

  In the lottery process of the special figure out-of-display data, after reading the special figure out-of-display lottery table 383, the special figure initial display counter 381 provided in the non-clearing area 372 in the work area 221 for the specific control. Get the current numerical information of. Then, by comparing the obtained numerical information with the special figure out-of-position display lottery table 383, the display data to be displayed this time is the first special figure out-of-position display data and the special figure second out-of-order display data. A selection is made from the off-display data and the third off-display data for the special figure.

  The display data selected by the lottery process of the special display out-of-position display data is set in the first display data buffer 271 (step SC803). By controlling the display of the special figure display unit 37a using the display data stored in the first display data buffer 271, the special figure display unit 37a performs the off-display corresponding to the display data. That is, when the first display data for the special figure is set in the first display data buffer 271, the first display for the special figure is performed on the special figure display unit 37a, and the first display data buffer 271 is displayed. When the second out-of-special display data for the special figure is set, the second out-of-special display for the special figure is performed in the special figure display unit 37a, and the third out-of-spec for the special figure is displayed in the first display data buffer 271. When the display data is set, the special map display section 37a performs the third off-display for the special map.

  Thereafter, a lottery process for out-of-context display data for ordinary drawings is executed (step SC804). In the lottery processing of the general-purpose out-of-position display data, the main figure ROM 64 refers to the general-purpose out-of-position display lottery table 384 stored in advance. FIG. 703 (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the out-of-place display lottery table 384 for ordinary drawings. As shown in FIG. 703 (b), there are first off display data for general drawing, second off display data for general drawing, and third off display data for general drawing as off display data for general drawing. ing.

  The first out-of-place display data for the ordinary figure, the second out-of-place display data for the ordinary figure, and the third out-of-place display data for the ordinary figure are used in the first figure interrupt processing (FIG. 701) in the ordinary figure ordinary power control processing (step SC716). )), If the result of the general-purpose opening lottery executed using the general-purpose part opening counter C4 to determine whether or not the general-purpose part 34a is to be opened is out of order, This is display data for causing the general-purpose display unit 38a to finally perform the off-display for the general-purpose figure in the variable display time of the graphic display unit 38a. The first deviation display data for general drawing is data for displaying the first deviation display for general drawing on the general drawing display unit 38a, and the second deviation display data for general drawing is the second deviation display for general drawing. The display is data for displaying the general-purpose display unit 38a on the general-purpose display unit 38a, and the third deviation display data for the general-purpose diagram is data for displaying the third general deviation display for the general-purpose diagram on the general-purpose display unit 38a. The display contents of the first out-of-place display, the second out-of-place display for the ordinary figure, and the third out-of-place display for ordinary figure are different from each other. In addition, a plurality of types of winning displays finally displayed on the general-figure display unit 38a are set in the variable display times in which the result of the public telephone opening lottery is a winning result, but the first to third deviations for the general figure are set. The display has different display contents from these plural types of hit display. In addition, also in the ordinary figure ordinary power control processing (step SC716), the type of the off-state display to be displayed on the ordinary figure display unit 38a is determined using the initial display counter 382 for the ordinary figure and the off-state display lottery table 384 for the ordinary figure. Select from among the first to third out-of-place displays for ordinary drawings.

  In the out-of-place drawing lottery table 384 for general-purpose figure, the numerical range of the initial display counter 382 for in-place figure is set for each of the first to third out-of-position display data for in-place figure. Specifically, a numerical range of the initial display counter 382 for general drawing from “0 to 19” is set for the first deviation display data for general drawing, and the second deviation display data for general drawing is set. On the other hand, the value range of the general-purpose initial display counter 382 of “20 to 39” is set, and the general-purpose initial display counter of “40 to 59” is set for the third out-of-position display data for general illustration. A numerical range of 382 is set. That is, the selection probabilities of the first out-of-place display data, the second out-of-place display data for general-purpose, and the third out-of-place display data for general-purpose in the lottery process of out-of-place display data for ordinary figure are "1/3 ].

  In the lottery processing of the general-purpose out-of-display data, after reading the general-purpose out-of-position display lottery table 384, the initial display counter 382 for the general figure provided in the non-clearing area 372 in the work area 221 for the specific control. Get the current numerical information of. Then, by comparing the obtained numerical information with the out-of-place display lottery table 384 for ordinary figure, the display data to be displayed this time is the first out-of-place display data for ordinary figure and the second out display data for ordinary figure. Selection is made from the out-of-office display data and the third out-of-office display data for ordinary drawings.

  The display data selected by the lottery process for out-of-conventional display data is set in the third display data buffer 273 (step SC805). By controlling the display of the general-purpose display unit 38a using the display data stored in the third display data buffer 273, an off-screen display corresponding to the display data is performed on the general-purpose display unit 38a. In other words, when the first out-of-place display data for general-purpose is set in the third display data buffer 273, the first out-of-place display for general-purpose is performed on the general-purpose display section 38a, and the third display data buffer 273 is displayed. When the second out-of-place display data for general drawing is set, the second out-of-place display for general use is performed in the general view display section 38a, and the third out-of-place display for general use is displayed in the third display data buffer 273. When the display data is set, the third-round display for the ordinary figure is performed on the ordinary figure display unit 38a.

  After executing the processing of steps SC802 to SC805, “1” is set to the initial display flag 375 provided in the clear target area 371 in the work area 221 for specific control (step SC806).

  When an affirmative determination is made in step SC801 or when the process of step SC806 is performed, “1” is set to the display start flag provided in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control (step SC807). . The display start flag determines whether or not to start the display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure reservation display unit 38b, as in the 87th embodiment. This is a flag specified by the CPU 63. When the value of the display start flag is “0”, the main CPU 63 does not perform the display control of the special figure display part 37a, the special figure reservation display part 37b, the general figure display part 38a, and the general figure reservation display part 38b. When the display start flag is set to "1", the main CPU 63 starts display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure reservation display unit 38b.

  As in the 87th embodiment, the display start flag is cleared to "0" in step SC204 of the main process (FIG. 690). This processing timing is determined after the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, the general figure reservation display unit 38b, and the first to fourth. The timing is before the timing at which the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 693) for executing the display control of the notification display devices 201 to 204 is first executed. Then, the display start flag is set to "1" in the display start process (FIG. 702) executed after the process at the start of the supply of the operating power (step SC201 to step SC223) is completed. As a result, immediately after the supply of the operating power is resumed, the special-figure display section 37a, the special-figure reservation display section 37b, the general-figure display section 38a, and the general-figure reservation display section 38b are kept off, and the supply of the operation power is performed. After the start process (step SC201 to step SC223) is completed, the display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure reservation display unit 38b is started.

  In particular, in the display start process (FIG. 702), as described above, when either the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process is executed in the main process (FIG. 690), the special display is stored in the first display data buffer 271. Any of the first to third out-of-view display data is set, and any of the first to third out-of-place display data for general drawing is set in the third display data buffer 273. In this case, assuming that the display control of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a is started immediately after the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit At 38a, the display is started immediately after the display content immediately before the supply of the operation power is stopped is displayed. Then, the player who visually observes such a change in the display content starts the off-screen display on the special figure display unit 37a and the ordinary figure display unit 38a in a state where either the first RAM clear processing or the second RAM clear processing is executed. You can understand what was done. On the other hand, when display data is set in the first display data buffer 271 and the third display data buffer 273 in the display start processing (FIG. 702), the display start flag is set after the processing for setting the display data is completed. Is set to "1", and the display of the special figure display section 37a and the general figure display section 38a is started. As a result, it is possible to prevent the display content from being changed as described above.

  On the other hand, when “1” is set in the initial display flag 375 (step SC801: YES), the processing of steps SC802 to SC805 is not executed. Therefore, the first display data buffer 271 is in a state where the display data stored immediately before the supply of the operation power is stopped is stored as it is, and the third display data buffer 273 is stored immediately before the supply of the operation power is stopped. Is stored as it is. In this case, when the display start flag is set to “1” and the display of the special figure display unit 37a is started, the display data stored in the first display data buffer 271 immediately before the supply of the operation power is stopped. Is displayed on the special figure display section 37a. When the display start flag is set to “1” and the display on the general-purpose display unit 38a is started, the display data stored in the third display data buffer 273 immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped. A corresponding display is performed on the general-purpose display section 38a.

  As described above in detail, when the first RAM clear processing is executed in the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power (step SC201 to step SC223) or when the second RAM clear processing of the set value updating processing is executed, Since "1" is not set in the display flag 375, when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started and the display of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a is started, these special characters are used. Off display is started on the figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a. The departure display in the special figure display unit 37a indicates that a game ball enters the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 and the start condition of the game round is satisfied, so that the pattern is displayed on the special figure display unit 37a. Is continued until the start of the variable display. The departure display on the general-figure display unit 38a is continued until a game ball enters the through gate 35 and the variation display of the picture on the general-figure display unit 38a is started. Since the initial display flag 375 is not set to "1" even at the factory shipment stage, the off-screen display is started on the special figure display section 37a and the general figure display section 38a.

  Regardless of whether the first RAM clearing process is executed as described above or the case where the second RAM clearing process of the setting value updating process is executed, the display of the special figure display unit 37a and the ordinary figure display unit 38a is changed. When the operation is started, the off-state display is performed on the special-figure display section 37a and the general-figure display section 38a, so that the supply of the operating power is started and the display is performed on the special-figure display section 37a and the general-figure display section 38a. Even if the display contents of the display units 37a and 38a at the time of the start are confirmed, it is not possible to grasp which of the first RAM clear processing and the set value update processing has been executed. Thereby, even if the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a when the supply of the operation power is started, it is not possible to specify whether or not the setting value update processing has been executed. It is possible to do.

  If the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process of the setting value updating process are not executed in the process (steps SC201 to SC223) at the start of the supply of the operating power, the display is started on the special figure display unit 37a. In this case, the display on the special figure display section 37a is started with the display content immediately before the supply of the operation power is stopped, and the supply of the operation power is stopped when the display is started on the ordinary figure display section 38a. The display on the general-purpose display unit 38a is started with the display content immediately before the display. Here, during the business closing time of the game hall, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is almost always shut off in a state where neither the game round nor the opening / closing execution mode is executed, and furthermore, the general-purpose display unit 38a In most cases, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off in a state where neither the variable display time nor the normal power open state is executed. In other words, the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the ordinary figure display unit 38a immediately before the supply of the operation power is stopped are basically out-of-display. Then, as described above, the special figure display unit 37a and the special figure display unit 37a are also executed when the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process of the set value updating process is performed in the process (step SC201 to step SC223) at the start of the supply of the operating power. An off display is performed on the ordinary figure display unit 38a. Thereby, even if it is confirmed that the off display is performed on the special figure display unit 37a and the ordinary figure display unit 38a when the supply of the operation power is started, the first RAM clear processing and the second RAM clear processing are not performed. It is possible to make it impossible to specify that one of them has been executed.

  In particular, when the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process of the set value updating process is executed in a configuration in which a plurality of types of out-of-spec display for special figure exist, a lottery is selected from among the plurality of types of out-of-range displays. The specified type of departure display is performed on the special figure display unit 37a. Accordingly, whether the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process of the set value updating process is performed or not is determined based on the type of the off-state display first displayed on the special figure display unit 37a when the supply of the operating power is started. It is possible to make it difficult to do so even when trying to identify

  Similarly, when the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process of the set value updating process is executed in a configuration in which a plurality of types of out-of-place display for general drawing are present, a lottery is selected from among the plurality of types of out-of-range display. The indicated type of out-of-order display is performed on the general-purpose display unit 38a. As a result, when the supply of the operating power is started, whether or not one of the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process of the set value updating process is performed is determined based on the type of the off-state display first displayed on the general-purpose display unit 38a. It is possible to make it difficult to do so even when trying to identify

  It should be noted that the special-drawing first display data, the second special-display data, and the special-drawing display data in the special-drawing display data lottery process (step SC802) executed in the display start process (FIG. 702) are selected. The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the selection probabilities of the third off-line display data for the figures are the same, but may be slightly different but substantially the same configuration, or may be configurations having greatly different selection probabilities.

  Also, in the drawing start process (FIG. 702), the special figure first display data, the special figure second non-display data, and the special figure out of the special figure in the lottery processing (step SC802) of the special figure. The respective selection probabilities of the third out-of-view display data for the figure are the first out-of-special display data for the special figure, the second out-of-state display data for the special figure, and the third out-of-order display for the special figure in the game time that results in the out-of-game. Although the configuration is the same as the selection probability of each data, the present invention is not limited to this. The configuration may be substantially the same although slightly different, or may be a configuration having a significantly different selection probability.

  Further, the first out-of-place display data, the second out-of-place display data, and the out-of-place display data in the general-purpose out-of-place display data lottery process (step SC804) executed in the display start process (FIG. 702). The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the selection probabilities of the third out-of-range display data for the drawing are the same. The configuration may be slightly different but substantially the same, or may be the configuration in which the selection probabilities are greatly different from each other. Good.

  Further, the first out-of-place display data for ordinary figure, the second out-of-place display data for ordinary figure, and the out-of-place display data in the lottery process (step SC804) of out-of-place display data for general figure executed in the display start process (FIG. 702). The respective selection probabilities of the third out-of-view display data for the figure are the first out-of-place display data for the ordinary figure, the second out-of-order display data for the ordinary figure, and the third out-of-place for the ordinary figure in the variable display times resulting in the out-of-view. Although the configuration is the same as the selection probability of each of the display data, the present invention is not limited to this. The configuration may be substantially the same, though slightly different, or may be a configuration having a significantly different selection probability.

  If the first RAM clear processing is executed when the supply of the operating power is started, steps SC802 to SC805 of the display start processing (FIG. 702) are executed, while the second RAM clear processing is executed. In this case, the configuration may be such that steps SC802 to SC805 of the display start process (FIG. 702) are not executed. Further, when the supply of the operation power is started and the second RAM clear processing is executed, steps SC802 to SC805 of the display start processing (FIG. 702) are executed, while the first RAM clear processing is executed. In this case, the configuration may be such that steps SC802 to SC805 of the display start process (FIG. 702) are not executed.

  If the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is performed when the supply of the operation power is started, the first to third deviations for the special figure are performed in step SC802 of the display start process (FIG. 702). The display data is not limited to the configuration selected by lottery. Each time the processing of step SC802 is performed when the supply of the operating power is started, the first out-of-order display data for the special figure → for the special figure In a predetermined order, such as the second off display data for third view → the third off display data for special view → the first off display data for special view →... May be changed sequentially.

  If the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is performed when the supply of the operating power is started, the first to third deviations for general drawing are performed in step SC804 of the display start process (FIG. 702). The display data is not limited to the configuration selected by lottery. When the supply of the operating power is started, every time the process of step SC804 is executed, the first deviation display data for general drawing → for general drawing The predetermined order of the off-display data for general drawing to be selected, such as the second off-display data for third → the third off-display data for general drawing → the first off-display data for general drawing →. May be changed sequentially.

<The 91st embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is restarted are different from those of the 90th embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the 90th embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the 90th embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 704 is a flowchart showing a display start process according to the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processing of steps SC901 to SC907 in the display start processing is executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

  If “1” is not set to the initial display flag 375 (step SC901: NO), a lottery process of the special display initial display data is executed (step SC902). In the special drawing initial display data lottery process, the special figure initial display lottery table 385 stored in the main ROM 64 in advance is referred to. FIG. 705 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining an initial display lottery table 385 for a special figure. As shown in FIG. 705 (a), the special display first display data, the special map first non-display data, the special figure second non-display data, the special figure third non-display data, and the special figure are used as the special figure initial display data. There are first hit display data for the game, second hit display data for the special figure, and third hit display data for the special figure.

  The first out-of-special display data for special figure, the second out-of-special display data for special figure, and the third out-of-specified display data for special figure are determined by the result of the hit / fail determination processing (step S504) of the tof figure change start processing (FIG. 518). This is display data that can be selected by lottery in the stop result setting process (step S509) for a miss result when the result is a miss. In addition, the first hit display data for special figure, the second hit display data for special figure, and the third hit display data for special figure are determined in the hit / fail determination processing (step S504) of the special figure change start processing (FIG. 518). This is display data that can be selected by lottery in the stop result setting process for the big hit result (step S507) when the result is a hit result. That is, the first to third deviation display data for the special figure is display data for finally performing the deviation display on the special figure display unit 37a in the game time in which the result of the hit determination processing is the deviation result, The first to third hit display data for the special figure are display data for finally performing the hit display on the special figure display unit 37a in the game time in which the result of the hit determination processing is the hit result.

  The first deviation display data for the special figure is data for displaying the first deviation display for the special figure on the special figure display unit 37a, and the second deviation display data for the special figure is the second deviation display for the special figure. This is data for displaying the display on the special figure display unit 37a, and the third deviation display data for the special figure is data for displaying the third deviation display for the special figure on the special figure display unit 37a. The first hit display data for a special figure is data for displaying the first hit display for a special figure on the special figure display unit 37a, and the second hit display data for the special figure is the first hit display data for the special figure. The second hit display is data for displaying the special hit display on the special figure display unit 37a, and the third hit display data for the special figure is data for displaying the third hit display for the special figure on the special figure display unit 37a. . In the first hit display for the special figure, the result of the hit / fail determination processing (step S504) of the special figure change start processing (FIG. 518) is a hit result, and the result of the distribution determination processing (step S506) is a low-probability big hit result. It is finally displayed on the special figure display section 37a in a certain game time. In the second winning display for the special figure, the result of the hit / fail determination processing (step S504) of the special figure change start processing (FIG. 518) is a winning result, and the result of the distribution determination processing (step S506) is a low winning amount. It is finally displayed on the special figure display section 37a in the game round which is the winning result. In the third hit display for the special figure, the result of the hit / fail determination processing (step S504) of the special figure change start processing (FIG. 518) is a hit result, and the result of the distribution determination processing (step S506) is the most advantageous large hit. In the game round as a result, it is finally displayed on the special figure display section 37a. The first off-display for special figure, the second off-display for special figure, the third off display for special figure, the first hit display for special figure, the second hit display for special figure, and the second hit display for special figure The display contents of the third hit display are different from each other.

  The special figure initial display lottery table 385 includes special figure initial display counters 381 for each of the special figure first to third off display data and the special figure first to third hit display data. Is set. Specifically, the numerical range of the initial display counter 381 for the special figure of “0 to 9” is set for the first deviation display data for the special figure, and the second deviation display data for the special figure is set as the second deviation display data for the special figure. On the other hand, the numerical range of the special display initial display counter 381 of “10 to 19” is set, and the special display initial display counter of “20 to 29” for the third outlier display data for the special map is set. A numerical range of 381 is set, and a numerical range of the initial display counter 381 for special figures of “30 to 39” is set for the first hit display data for special figures, The numerical range of the special display initial display counter 381 of “40-49” is set for the two hit display data, and the special figure of “50-59” is set for the third hit display data for the special figure. The numerical range of the initial display counter 381 is set. That is, in the lottery process of the special display initial display data, the first deviation display data for the special figure, the second deviation display data for the special figure, the third deviation display data for the special figure, and the first deviation for the special figure The selection probabilities of the display data, the second hit display data for the special map, and the third hit display data for the special map are “1/6”, which are the same.

  In the special drawing initial display data lottery process, after reading the special display initial display lottery table 385, the special figure initial display counter 381 provided in the non-clearing area 372 in the work area 221 for specific control. Get the current numerical information of. Then, by comparing the acquired numerical information with the initial display lottery table 385 for the special figure, the display data to be displayed this time is the first off-display data for the special figure and the second display data for the special figure. It is selected from out-of-view display data, third out-of-view display data for a special figure, first hit display data for a special figure, second hit display data for a special figure, and third hit display data for a special figure.

  The display data selected in the special drawing initial display data lottery process is set in the first display data buffer 271 (step SC903). By controlling the display of the special figure display unit 37a using the display data stored in the first display data buffer 271, the special figure display unit 37a performs the off-state display or the hit display corresponding to the display data. . That is, when the first display data for the special figure is set in the first display data buffer 271, the first display for the special figure is performed on the special figure display unit 37a, and the first display data buffer 271 is displayed. When the second out-of-special display data for the special figure is set, the second out-of-special display for the special figure is performed in the special figure display unit 37a, and the third out-of-spec for the special figure is displayed in the first display data buffer 271. When the display data is set, the special map display section 37a performs the third off-display for the special map. In addition, when the first hit display data for special figure is set in the first display data buffer 271, the first hit display for special figure is performed in the special figure display unit 37 a, and the first display data buffer 271 is displayed. When the special hit second display data is set, the special figure display section 37a displays the special special second hit, and the first display data buffer 271 stores the special special third hit data. When the display data is set, the special figure display section 37a performs the special figure third hit display.

  After that, a lottery process of initial display data for ordinary drawing is executed (step SC904). In the drawing process of the initial display data for general drawing, the initial display lottery table 386 for general drawing stored in the main ROM 64 in advance is referred to. FIG. 705 (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the initial display lottery table 386 for ordinary drawings. As shown in FIG. 705 (b), the first display data for the general figure, the second display data for the general figure, the third display data for the general figure, and the third general display data as the initial display data for the general figure. Hit display data exists.

  The first out-of-place display data for the ordinary figure, the second out-of-place display data for the ordinary figure, and the third out-of-place display data for the ordinary figure are used in the first figure interrupt processing (FIG. 701) in the ordinary figure ordinary power control processing (step SC716). )), If the result of the general-purpose opening lottery executed using the general-purpose part opening counter C4 to determine whether or not the general-purpose part 34a is to be opened is out of order, This is display data for causing the general-purpose display unit 38a to finally perform the off-display for the general-purpose figure in the variable display time of the graphic display unit 38a. In addition, when the result of the above-mentioned general-purpose opening lottery is a winning result, the general-purpose hit display data is finally displayed on the general-purpose display unit 38a in the variable display time of the general-purpose display unit 38a. This is display data for performing a hit display.

  The first deviation display data for general drawing is data for displaying the first deviation display for general drawing on the general drawing display unit 38a, and the second deviation display data for general drawing is the second deviation display for general drawing. The display is data for displaying the general-purpose display unit 38a on the general-purpose display unit 38a, and the third deviation display data for the general-purpose diagram is data for displaying the third general deviation display for the general-purpose diagram on the general-purpose display unit 38a. In addition, the hit display data for the ordinary figure is data for displaying the hit display for the ordinary figure on the ordinary figure display unit 38a. The display contents of the first out-of-place display for the ordinary figure, the second out-of-place display for the ordinary figure, the third out-of-order display for the ordinary figure, and the hit display for the ordinary figure are different from each other.

  In the general display initial display lottery table 386, the numerical range of the general display initial display counter 382 is set for each of the first to third out-of-position display data and the general display hit display data for the general figure. Have been. Specifically, a numerical range of the initial display counter 382 for general drawing of "0 to 14" is set for the first deviation display data for general drawing, and the second deviation display data for general drawing is set as the second deviation display data for general drawing. On the other hand, the numerical range of the general-purpose initial display counter 382 of “15 to 29” is set, and the general-purpose initial display counter of “30 to 44” for the third out-of-place display data for general illustration. A numerical range of 382 is set, and a numerical range of the initial display counter 382 for "45 to 59" is set for the hit display data for general figure. That is, in the lottery process of the initial display data for general drawing, the first deviation display data for general drawing, the second deviation display data for general drawing, the third deviation display data for general drawing, and the hit display data for general drawing. Have the same selection probability of "1/4".

  In the lottery process of the general-purpose initial display data, after reading the general-purpose initial display lottery table 386, the general-purpose initial display counter 382 provided in the non-clearing area 372 in the work area 221 for specific control. Get the current numerical information of. Then, by comparing the obtained numerical information with the initial display lottery table 386 for general drawing, the display data to be displayed this time is the first out-of-position display data for general drawing, and the second display data for general drawing. Selection is made from out-of-office display data, third out-of-office display data for ordinary figure, and hit display data for ordinary figure.

  The display data selected by the lottery process of the initial display data for ordinary drawing is set in the third display data buffer 273 (step SC905). By controlling the display of the general-purpose display unit 38a using the display data stored in the third display data buffer 273, the off-center display or the hit display corresponding to the display data is performed on the general-purpose display unit 38a. . In other words, when the first out-of-place display data for general-purpose is set in the third display data buffer 273, the first out-of-place display for general-purpose is performed on the general-purpose display section 38a, and the third display data buffer 273 is displayed. When the second out-of-place display data for general drawing is set, the second out-of-place display for general use is performed in the general view display section 38a, and the third out-of-place display for general use is displayed in the third display data buffer 273. When the display data is set, a third out-of-place display for the ordinary figure is performed on the ordinary figure display unit 38a, and when the ordinary display hit data is set in the third display data buffer 273, the ordinary figure is displayed. A hit display for ordinary drawing is performed on the figure display unit 38a.

  After executing the processing of steps SC902 to SC905, “1” is set to the initial display flag 375 provided in the clear target area 371 in the work area 221 for specific control (step SC906).

  If an affirmative determination is made in step SC901 or if the process in step SC906 is performed, “1” is set to the display start flag provided in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control (step SC907). . The display start flag determines whether or not to start the display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure reservation display unit 38b, as in the 87th embodiment. This is a flag specified by the CPU 63. When the value of the display start flag is “0”, the main CPU 63 does not perform the display control of the special figure display part 37a, the special figure reservation display part 37b, the general figure display part 38a, and the general figure reservation display part 38b. When the display start flag is set to "1", the main CPU 63 starts display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure reservation display unit 38b.

  As in the 87th embodiment, the display start flag is cleared to "0" in step SC204 of the main process (FIG. 690). This processing timing is determined after the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, the general figure reservation display unit 38b, and the first to fourth. The timing is before the timing at which the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 693) for executing the display control of the notification display devices 201 to 204 is first executed. Then, "1" is set to the display start flag in the display start process (FIG. 704) executed after the process at the start of the supply of the operating power (step SC201 to step SC223) is completed. As a result, immediately after the supply of the operating power is resumed, the special-figure display section 37a, the special-figure reservation display section 37b, the general-figure display section 38a, and the general-figure reservation display section 38b are kept off, and the supply of the operation power is performed. After the start process (step SC201 to step SC223) is completed, the display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure reservation display unit 38b is started.

  In particular, in the display start process (FIG. 704), as described above, when either the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process is executed in the main process (FIG. 690), the special display is stored in the first display data buffer 271. Of the first to third out-of-view display data for display and the first to third hit display data for toku-zu, and the first to third out-of-view display data for general drawing are stored in the third display data buffer 273. Set any of the hit display data for ordinary maps. In this case, assuming that the display control of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a is started immediately after the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit At 38a, the off display or the hit display is started immediately after the display content immediately before the supply of the operation power is stopped is displayed. Then, the player who visually observes such a change in the display content may display a deviated display or a hit on the special figure display unit 37a and the ordinary figure display unit 38a in a state where either the first RAM clear processing or the second RAM clear processing is executed. It is possible to know that the display has started. On the other hand, when display data is set in the first display data buffer 271 and the third display data buffer 273 in the display start processing (FIG. 704), the display start flag is set after the processing for setting the display data ends. Is set to "1", and the display of the special figure display section 37a and the general figure display section 38a is started. As a result, it is possible to prevent the display content from being changed as described above.

  On the other hand, when “1” is set in the initial display flag 375 (step SC901: YES), the processing of steps SC902 to SC905 is not performed. Therefore, the first display data buffer 271 is in a state where the display data stored immediately before the supply of the operation power is stopped is stored as it is, and the third display data buffer 273 is stored immediately before the supply of the operation power is stopped. Is stored as it is. In this case, when the display start flag is set to “1” and the display of the special figure display unit 37a is started, the display data stored in the first display data buffer 271 immediately before the supply of the operation power is stopped. Is displayed on the special figure display section 37a. When the display start flag is set to “1” and the display on the general-purpose display unit 38a is started, the display data stored in the third display data buffer 273 immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped. A corresponding display is performed on the general-purpose display section 38a.

  Next, the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a corresponding to the situation at the time of starting the supply of the operating power will be described. FIG. 706 is an explanatory diagram for describing the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a corresponding to the situation at the start of the supply of the operating power.

  When the first RAM clearing process is performed in the process at the start of the supply of the operating power (steps SC201 to SC223) or the second RAM clearing process of the setting value updating process is performed, “1” is set to the initial display flag 375. Is not set, when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started and the display of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a is started, the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure Off display or hit display is started on the display unit 38a. The departure display or the hit display in the special figure display unit 37a is performed when a game ball enters the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 and the start condition of the game round is satisfied, and the special figure display unit 37a is displayed. Is continued until the variable display of the pattern is started. The off display or the hit display on the general-purpose display unit 38a is continued until a game ball enters the through gate 35 and the variation display of the picture on the general-purpose display unit 38a is started. Note that since the initial display flag 375 is not set to "1" even at the factory shipment stage, the out-of-order display or the hit display is started on the special figure display section 37a and the ordinary figure display section 38a.

  Regardless of whether the first RAM clear processing is executed as described above or the second RAM clear processing of the set value update processing is executed, the display of the special figure display unit 37a and the ordinary figure display unit 38a is changed. When the operation is started, the off display or the hit display is performed on the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a, so that the supply of the operation power is started and the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a are displayed. Even when the display contents of the display units 37a and 38a are checked when the display is started, it is not possible to grasp which of the first RAM clear processing and the set value update processing has been executed. Thereby, even if the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a when the supply of the operation power is started, it is not possible to specify whether or not the setting value update processing has been executed. It is possible to do.

  If the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process of the setting value updating process are not executed in the process (steps SC201 to SC223) at the start of the supply of the operating power, the display is started on the special figure display unit 37a. In this case, the display on the special figure display section 37a is started with the display content immediately before the supply of the operation power is stopped, and the supply of the operation power is stopped when the display is started on the ordinary figure display section 38a. The display on the general-purpose display unit 38a is started with the display content immediately before the display. That is, if the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process of the setting value updating process are not executed in the process at the start of the supply of the operating power (step SC201 to step SC223), the special figure display section 37a and the general The display contents of the display unit 38a depend on the situation at the timing when the supply of the operation power is stopped, and the display contents are various. On the other hand, when the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process of the set value updating process is executed in the process (Step SC201 to Step SC223) at the start of the supply of the operating power, the special figure display unit 37a and the normal The off display or the hit display is determined and displayed by lottery on the figure display unit 38a. Accordingly, even when the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process of the setting value updating process is performed in the process (Step SC201 to Step SC223) at the start of the operation power supply, the operation power supply is started. As in the case where the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process of the set value updating process are not executed in the processes (steps SC201 to SC223), the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a are changed. It can be diversified. Therefore, even when the supply of the operating power is started and the display of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a is started, even if the display is confirmed, either the first RAM clear processing or the second RAM clear processing is performed. It is possible to make it difficult to identify the execution.

  In addition, the special figure display unit 37a and the general map that can be selected when the first RAM clear processing or the second RAM clear processing of the setting value update processing is executed in the processing (step SC201 to step SC223) at the start of the supply of the operating power. The display data of the display unit 38a is display data that can be selected in a normal game. Thus, the first RAM clearing process or the process at the start of the supply of the operating power (steps SC201 to SC223) is performed without increasing the data capacity of the display data of the special figure display unit 37a and the ordinary figure display unit 38a. It is possible to diversify the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a when the second RAM clear processing of the set value update processing is executed.

  It should be noted that, in the lottery process (step SC902) of the special figure initial display data executed in the display start processing (FIG. 704), the first out-of-special display data for the special figure, the second out-of-color display data for the special figure, Limited to a configuration in which the selection probabilities of the third out-of-view display data for a figure, the first hit display data for a special figure, the second hit display data for a special figure, and the third hit display data for a special figure are the same. However, the configuration may be substantially the same, although slightly different, or may be a configuration having greatly different selection probabilities. As a configuration having greatly different selection probabilities, for example, a configuration in which the total selection probability of the first to third deviation display data for a special figure is higher than the total selection probability of the first to third hit display data for a special figure Or a low configuration.

  Also, in the drawing start process (FIG. 704), the general-drawing initial display data lottery process (step SC904), the first out-of-position display data for the general-purpose figure, the second out-of-range display data for the general-purpose figure, The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the selection probabilities of the third out-of-view display data for the figure and the hit display data for the ordinary figure are the same, and the configuration may be slightly different but substantially the same. It is good also as a structure which is a probability.

  Also, as display data selected in the special drawing initial display data lottery processing (step SC902) executed in the display start processing (FIG. 704), a display that is not included in the result of stopping the game times is performed. May be included. In addition, as the display data selected in the lottery process (step SC904) of the initial display data for general drawing executed in the display start process (FIG. 704), a display not included in the stop result of the variable display times is performed. May be configured to include display data for the display.

  If the first RAM clear processing is executed when the supply of the operating power is started, steps SC902 to SC905 of the display start processing (FIG. 704) are executed, while the second RAM clear processing is executed. In this case, the configuration may be such that steps SC902 to SC905 of the display start process (FIG. 704) are not executed. If the second RAM clear processing is executed when the supply of the operating power is started, steps SC902 to SC905 of the display start processing (FIG. 704) are executed, while the first RAM clear processing is executed. In this case, the configuration may be such that steps SC902 to SC905 of the display start process (FIG. 704) are not executed.

  If the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is performed when the supply of the operating power is started, the first to third deviations for the special figure are performed in step SC902 of the display start process (FIG. 704). The display data and the first to third hit display data for special drawings are not limited to the configuration selected by lottery, and each time the process of step SC902 is performed when the supply of the operating power is started. First off display data for special figure → second off display data for special figure → third off display data for special figure → first hit display data for special figure → second hit display data for special figure → The display data to be selected may be sequentially changed in a predetermined order, such as third hit display data for a special figure → first out-of-order display data for a special figure →.

  If the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is executed when the supply of the operating power is started, the first to third deviations for the general drawing are performed in step SC904 of the display start process (FIG. 704). The display data and the first to third hit display data for general drawing are not limited to the configuration selected by lottery, and each time the processing of step SC904 is performed when the supply of the operating power is started. First off display data for general drawing → second off display data for general drawing → third off display data for general drawing → hit display data for general drawing → first off display data for general drawing → ・ ・The display data to be selected may be sequentially changed in a predetermined order.

<92nd embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is restarted are different from those of the above-described 91st embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the above-described 91st embodiment will be described. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the above-described 91st embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 707 is a flowchart showing the display start processing according to the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processing of steps SD101 to SD115 in the display start processing is executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

  If “1” is not set in the initial display flag 375 (step SD101: NO), the processing of steps SD102 to SD106 is performed. The processing contents of steps SD102 to SD106 are the same as those of steps SC901 to SC906 of the display start processing (FIG. 704) in the nineteenth embodiment. Thus, when the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process of the setting value updating process is executed, the display of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a is started as in the ninth embodiment. In some cases, a miss display or a hit display is performed.

  When “1” is set in the initial display flag 375 (step SD101: YES), information indicating whether or not the game is being executed in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control is stored. By referring to the stored storage area, it is determined whether or not the supply of the operation power is restarted after the supply of the operation power is stopped during execution of the game (step SD107). The storage area stores information indicating that the game is being executed when the game is started, and information indicating that the game is being executed when the game is ended. Deleted from the area. Even if the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, if the backup power is supplied to the work area 221 for specific control, the information of the storage area is stored and held. If the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process are not executed when the power supply is restarted, the data is stored and held.

  In addition, by referring to a storage area in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control in which information indicating whether or not the open / close execution mode is being executed is stored, the operating power during the execution of the open / close execution mode is referred to. It is determined whether or not the supply of the operating power is resumed after the supply of the power is stopped (step SD108). When the opening / closing execution mode is started, information indicating that the opening / closing execution mode is being executed is stored in the storage area, and when the opening / closing execution mode is ended, it indicates that the opening / closing execution mode is being executed. The information is deleted from the storage area. Even if the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, if the backup power is supplied to the work area 221 for specific control, the information of the storage area is stored and held. If the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process are not executed when the power supply is restarted, the data is stored and held.

  If the last stop of the supply of the operating power is neither during the execution of the game times nor during the execution of the open / close execution mode (step SD107 and step SD108: NO), the lottery process of the initial display data for the special figure is executed. (Step SD109). The details of the lottery process for the special figure initial display data are the same as in step SD102, and more specifically, are the same as step SC902 in the display start process (FIG. 704) in the nineteenth embodiment. As a result, when the display of the special figure display unit 37a is started, the first special display figure data for the special figure and the special deviation display data for the special figure One of the second out display data, the third out display data for a special figure, the first hit display data for a special figure, the second hit display data for a special figure, and the third hit display data for a special figure is selected. Is done.

  The display data selected in the special drawing initial display data lottery process is set in the first display data buffer 271 (step SD110). By controlling the display of the special figure display unit 37a using the display data stored in the first display data buffer 271, the special figure display unit 37a performs the off-state display or the hit display corresponding to the display data. . That is, when the first display data for the special figure is set in the first display data buffer 271, the first display for the special figure is performed on the special figure display unit 37a, and the first display data buffer 271 is displayed. When the second out-of-special display data for the special figure is set, the second out-of-special display for the special figure is performed in the special figure display unit 37a, and the third out-of-spec for the special figure is displayed in the first display data buffer 271. When the display data is set, the special map display section 37a performs the third off-display for the special map. In addition, when the first hit display data for special figure is set in the first display data buffer 271, the first hit display for special figure is performed in the special figure display unit 37 a, and the first display data buffer 271 is displayed. When the special hit second display data is set, the special figure display section 37a displays the special special second hit, and the first display data buffer 271 stores the special special third hit data. When the display data is set, the special figure display section 37a performs the special figure third hit display.

  On the other hand, if the last stop of the supply of the operating power is either during execution of the game round or during execution of the opening / closing execution mode (step SD107 or step SD108: YES), the initial display data for the special figure is changed to the second display. Since the display data is not set in the first display data buffer 271, the display data stored before the supply of the operating power is stopped is stored in the first display data buffer 271 as it is. Therefore, when the display on the special figure display unit 37a is started, the display content on the special figure display unit 37a immediately before the supply of the operation power is stopped is restarted as it is.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step SD107, when an affirmative determination is made in step SD108, or when the process of step SD110 is performed, the fluctuation of the general-purpose display section 38a in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control By referring to the storage area in which information indicating whether or not the image is being displayed is stored, the supply of the operation power is restarted after the supply of the operation power is stopped during the variable display of the picture on the general-purpose display unit 38a. It is determined whether or not the situation has occurred (step SD111). In the storage area, when the variation display of the pattern is started on the general-purpose display unit 38a, information indicating that the variation display of the pattern is being executed on the general-purpose display unit 38a is stored. When the variation display of the pattern is ended in the storage area, the information indicating that the variation display of the pattern is being executed in the general-purpose display unit 38a is deleted from the storage area. Even if the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, if the backup power is supplied to the work area 221 for specific control, the information of the storage area is stored and held. If the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process are not executed when the power supply is restarted, the data is stored and held.

  In addition, by referring to the storage area in the clear target area 371 of the specific control work area 221 in which information indicating whether or not the ordinary power release state is being executed is stored, during the execution of the ordinary power open state. It is determined whether the supply of the operation power is resumed after the supply of the operation power is stopped (step SD112). The storage area stores information indicating that the normal power release state is being executed when the normal power open state is started, and the information indicating that the normal power open state is being executed when the normal power open state is ended. The information indicating the existence is deleted from the storage area. Even if the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, if the backup power is supplied to the work area 221 for specific control, the information of the storage area is stored and held. If the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process are not executed when the power supply is restarted, the data is stored and held.

  If the last stop of the supply of the operating power was neither during the execution of the change display of the pattern on the ordinary figure display unit 38a nor during the execution of the ordinary electricity open state (step SD111 and step SD112: NO), the ordinary figure Is executed (step SD113). The contents of the lottery process of the initial display data for ordinary drawing are the same as those in step SD104, and more specifically, the same as those in step SC904 of the display start process (FIG. 704) in the 91st embodiment. As a result, when the display of the general-figure display unit 38a is started, the first deviation display data for the general-figure and the display data for causing the general-figure display unit 38a to perform the off-state display or the hit display are displayed. One of the second off display data, the third off display data for general drawing, and the hit display data for general drawing is selected.

  The display data selected by the lottery process of the initial display data for ordinary drawing is set in the third display data buffer 273 (step SD114). By controlling the display of the general-purpose display unit 38a using the display data stored in the third display data buffer 273, the off-center display or the hit display corresponding to the display data is performed on the general-purpose display unit 38a. . In other words, when the first out-of-place display data for general-purpose is set in the third display data buffer 273, the first out-of-place display for general-purpose is performed on the general-purpose display section 38a, and the third display data buffer 273 is displayed. When the second out-of-place display data for general drawing is set, the second out-of-place display for general use is performed in the general view display section 38a, and the third out-of-place display for general use is displayed in the third display data buffer 273. When the display data is set, a third out-of-place display for the ordinary figure is performed on the ordinary figure display unit 38a, and when the ordinary display hit data is set in the third display data buffer 273, the ordinary figure is displayed. A hit display for ordinary drawing is performed on the figure display unit 38a.

  On the other hand, when the last stop of the supply of the operating power is either during the execution of the display of the change of the picture on the ordinary figure display unit 38a or during the execution of the ordinary electricity open state (step SD111 or step SD112: YES), Since the initial display data for ordinary drawing is not set in the third display data buffer 273, the display data stored before the supply of the operation power is stopped is stored in the third display data buffer 273 as it is. . Therefore, when the display on the general-purpose display unit 38a is started, the display content on the general-purpose display unit 38a immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped is restarted as it is.

  When the processing in step SD106 is executed, when an affirmative judgment is made in step SD111, when an affirmative judgment is made in step SD112, or when the processing in step SD114 is executed, the clear target area of the work area 221 for specific control “1” is set to the display start flag provided in 371 (step SD115). The display start flag determines whether or not to start the display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure reservation display unit 38b, as in the 87th embodiment. This is a flag specified by the CPU 63. When the value of the display start flag is “0”, the main CPU 63 does not perform the display control of the special figure display part 37a, the special figure reservation display part 37b, the general figure display part 38a, and the general figure reservation display part 38b. When the display start flag is set to "1", the main CPU 63 starts display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure reservation display unit 38b.

  As in the 87th embodiment, the display start flag is cleared to "0" in step SC204 of the main process (FIG. 690). This processing timing is determined after the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, the general figure reservation display unit 38b, and the first to fourth. The timing is before the timing at which the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 693) for executing the display control of the notification display devices 201 to 204 is first executed. Then, the display start flag is set to "1" in the display start process (FIG. 707) executed after the process at the start of the supply of the operating power (steps SC201 to SC223) is completed. As a result, immediately after the supply of the operating power is resumed, the special-figure display section 37a, the special-figure reservation display section 37b, the general-figure display section 38a, and the general-figure reservation display section 38b are kept off, and the supply of the operation power is performed. After the start process (step SC201 to step SC223) is completed, the display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure reservation display unit 38b is started.

  In particular, in the display start process (FIG. 707), as described above, even if both the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process are not executed in the main process (FIG. 690), the first display data buffer 271 is stored. In some cases, initial display data for a special figure is set and initial display data for a general figure is set in the third display data buffer 273 in some cases. In this case, assuming that the display control of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a is started immediately after the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit The initial display is started immediately after the display content immediately before the supply of the operation power is stopped in 38a is displayed. Then, the player who observes such a change in the display content starts the initial display on the special figure display unit 37a and the ordinary figure display unit 38a in a state where both the first RAM clear processing and the second RAM clear processing are not executed. You can understand what was done. On the other hand, when display data is set in the first display data buffer 271 and the third display data buffer 273 in the display start processing (FIG. 707), the display start flag is set after the processing for setting the display data is completed. Is set to "1", and the display of the special figure display section 37a and the general figure display section 38a is started. As a result, it is possible to prevent the display content from being changed as described above.

  Next, the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a corresponding to the situation at the time of starting the supply of the operating power will be described. FIG. 708 is an explanatory diagram for describing the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a corresponding to the situation at the start of the supply of the operating power.

  When the first RAM clearing process is performed in the process at the start of the supply of the operating power (steps SC201 to SC223) or the second RAM clearing process of the setting value updating process is performed, “1” is set to the initial display flag 375. Is not set, when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started and the display of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a is started, the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure Off display or hit display is started on the display unit 38a. The departure display or the hit display in the special figure display unit 37a is performed when a game ball enters the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 and the start condition of the game round is satisfied, and the special figure display unit 37a is displayed. Is continued until the variable display of the pattern is started. The off display or the hit display on the general-purpose display unit 38a is continued until a game ball enters the through gate 35 and the variation display of the picture on the general-purpose display unit 38a is started. Note that since the initial display flag 375 is not set to "1" even at the factory shipment stage, the out-of-order display or the hit display is started on the special figure display section 37a and the ordinary figure display section 38a.

  Regardless of whether the first RAM clear processing is executed as described above or the second RAM clear processing of the set value update processing is executed, the display of the special figure display unit 37a and the ordinary figure display unit 38a is changed. When the operation is started, the off display or the hit display is performed on the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a, so that the supply of the operation power is started and the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a are displayed. Even when the display contents of the display units 37a and 38a are checked when the display is started, it is not possible to grasp which of the first RAM clear processing and the set value update processing has been executed. Thereby, even if the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a when the supply of the operation power is started, it is not possible to specify whether or not the setting value update processing has been executed. It is possible to do.

  Even if the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process of the setting value updating process are not executed in the process (Step SC201 to Step SC223) at the time of starting the supply of the operating power, the situation in which the supply of the operating power is stopped is a game. If the display is started in the special figure display unit 37a when the state is neither the execution of the round nor the execution of the opening / closing execution mode, the off-screen display or the hit display is started on the special figure display unit 37a. Is done. Further, even if the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process of the setting value updating process are not executed in the process at the time of starting the supply of the operating power (steps SC201 to SC223), the situation in which the supply of the operating power is stopped. Is not in the state of executing either the change display of the picture on the ordinary figure display unit 38a or the execution of the ordinary electricity release state, the ordinary figure display is started when the display is started on the ordinary figure display unit 38a. The off display or the hit display is started in the section 38a. Then, as described above, the special figure display unit 37a and the special figure display unit 37a are also executed when the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process of the set value updating process is performed in the process (step SC201 to step SC223) at the start of the supply of the operating power. Missing display or hit display is performed on the ordinary figure display section 38a. Thereby, even if it is confirmed that the off-screen display or the hit display is performed on the special figure display section 37a and the ordinary figure display section 38a when the supply of the operating power is started, the first RAM clear processing and the second RAM are performed. This makes it impossible to specify that any of the clearing processes has been executed.

  On the other hand, the state in which the supply of the operating power is stopped is either during the execution of the game round or during the execution of the opening / closing execution mode, and the first RAM is used in the processing (Step SC201 to Step SC223) when the supply of the operating power is started. If the clearing process and the second RAM clearing process are not executed, when the display is started on the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure display unit becomes the display content immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped. 37a is display-controlled. In addition, the situation in which the supply of the operating power is stopped is either during the execution of the variation display of the picture on the ordinary figure display unit 38a or during the execution of the open state of the ordinary power, and the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power (step SC201) If the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process are not executed in step SC223), the display contents immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped when the display is started on the general-purpose display unit 38a The display control of the general-purpose display unit 38a is controlled so that Accordingly, when the game situation immediately before the supply of the operation power is stopped is resumed when the supply of the operation power is resumed, the special figure display unit 37a and the general-purpose display unit 37a are arranged in a manner corresponding to the restart of the game situation. The display on the diagram display unit 38a can be started.

  It should be noted that, in the drawing process (FIG. 707), the special drawing initial display data lottery processing (steps SD102 and SD109) is executed, and the special drawing first deviation display data and the special drawing second deviation display are performed. The selection probabilities of the data, the third out-of-order display data for the special figure, the first hit display data for the special figure, the second hit display data for the special figure, and the third hit display data for the special figure are the same. The present invention is not limited to the configuration. The configuration may be substantially the same, although slightly different, or may be a configuration having significantly different selection probabilities. As a configuration having greatly different selection probabilities, for example, a configuration in which the total selection probability of the first to third deviation display data for a special figure is higher than the total selection probability of the first to third hit display data for a special figure Or a low configuration.

  In addition, in the lottery processing (steps SD104 and SD113) of the initial display data for the general figure executed in the display start processing (FIG. 707), the first deviation display data for the general figure and the second deviation display for the general figure are displayed. The selection probabilities of the data, the third out-of-order display data for general drawing, and the hit display data for general drawing are not limited to the same configuration, but may be slightly different but substantially the same, A configuration having greatly different selection probabilities may be adopted.

  Also, as the display data selected in the special drawing initial display data lottery process (step SD102, step SD109) executed in the display start process (FIG. 707), a display not included in the game result stop result is displayed. It may be configured to include display data to be performed. In addition, as display data selected in the lottery process (step SD104, step SD113) of the initial display data for general drawing executed in the display start process (FIG. 707), the display data not included in the stop result of the variable display times is displayed. May be included.

  If the first RAM clear processing is executed when the supply of the operating power is started, steps SD102 to SD105 of the display start processing (FIG. 707) are executed, while the second RAM clear processing is executed. In this case, the configuration may be such that steps SD102 to SD105 of the display start process (FIG. 707) are not executed. If the second RAM clear processing is executed when the supply of the operating power is started, steps SD102 to SD105 of the display start processing (FIG. 707) are executed, while the first RAM clear processing is executed. In this case, the configuration may be such that steps SD102 to SD105 of the display start process (FIG. 707) are not executed.

<93rd embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the general figure display section 38a when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is restarted are different from those of the 88th embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the 88th embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the 88th embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 709 is a flowchart showing a display start process according to the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. The processing of steps SD201 to SD219 in the display start processing is executed by using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

  If “1” is not set in the initial display flag 375 (step SD201: NO), the lottery target counter provided in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control is provided in the special figure display part 37a. “7” corresponding to the number of the light-emitting units thus set is set (step SD202). The lottery target counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not it is necessary to execute the processing of steps SD203 to SD207 or the processing of steps SD211 to SD215.

  After that, a random number value is obtained from the special figure random number circuit corresponding to the value of the lottery target counter (step SD203). In this embodiment, the special control random number circuits are provided on the main control board 61 in a number corresponding to the number of light emitting units provided in the special figure display unit 37a. Specifically, the special figure display section 37a is provided with seven light emitting sections, so that seven special figure random number circuits are provided. When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, these seven special figure random number circuits have a relatively short period (for example, 1 microsecond to 7 microseconds) and hold themselves at different periods. In this configuration, the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped by supplying the backup power even in the situation where the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped. This is a configuration capable of storing and holding the random number value immediately before the operation.

  When the seven light emitting units of the special figure display unit 37a are the first to seventh light emitting units and the seven special figure random number circuits are the first to seventh special figure random number circuits, the first special figure The random number circuit for use corresponds to the first light emitting unit, the random number circuit for the second special figure corresponds to the second light emitting unit, the random number circuit for the third special figure corresponds to the third light emitting unit, The fourth special figure random number circuit corresponds to the fourth light emitting unit, the fifth special figure random number circuit corresponds to the fifth light emitting unit, and the sixth special figure random number circuit corresponds to the sixth light emitting unit. The seventh special figure random number circuit corresponds to the seventh light emitting unit. Also, when the value of the lottery target counter is “7”, it corresponds to the first light emitting unit and the first special figure random number circuit, and when the value of the lottery target counter is “6”, it corresponds to the second. It corresponds to the light emitting unit and the second special figure random number circuit, and when the value of the lottery target counter is "5", it corresponds to the third light emitting unit and the third special figure random number circuit, When the value of the counter is “4”, it corresponds to the fourth light emitting unit and the fourth special figure random number circuit, and when the value of the lottery target counter is “3”, the fifth light emitting unit and the fourth If the value of the lottery target counter is "2", it corresponds to the sixth light emitting unit and the sixth special figure random number circuit, and the value of the lottery target counter is "5". When it is “1”, it corresponds to the seventh light emitting unit and the seventh special figure random number circuit. The first to seventh special figure random number circuits have the same random number value range (for example, “0 to 255”).

  After that, a special drawing lighting lottery process is executed (step SD204). In the special drawing lighting lottery process, the special drawing lighting lottery table is read from the main ROM 64. In the lighting lottery table for the special figure, half of the random numbers that can be taken by the first to seventh special figure random number circuits are set as the winning random number value. Then, the random number value acquired in step SD203 is collated with the lighting drawing lottery table for the special figure.

  If the result of the special drawing lighting lottery process is a lighting winning (step SD205: YES), the lighting information is set in an area corresponding to the current value of the current lottery target counter in the clear target area 371 in the work area 221 for specific control. Is stored (step SD206). Each area provided corresponding to the lottery target counter is cleared to “0” when the process of step SD202 is executed.

  Thereafter, the value of the lottery target counter is decremented by one (step SD207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the lottery target counter after the decrement is "0" (step SD208). If a negative determination is made in step SD208, the processing of steps SD203 to SD207 is executed again.

  If a positive determination is made in step SD208, initial display data for a special figure is set in the first display data buffer 271 (step SD209). The special display initial display data is determined by the presence / absence of lighting information corresponding to each of the lottery target counter values “1” to “7”. For example, while the lighting information corresponding to the case where the value of the lottery target counter is “7”, “5”, and “1” is stored, the lighting information corresponding to other values of the lottery target counter is not stored. In this case, the first light emitting unit, the third light emitting unit, and the seventh light emitting unit of the special figure display unit 37a are in the light emitting state, and the second light emitting unit, the fourth light emitting unit, the fifth light emitting unit, and the sixth light emitting unit are in the light emitting state. Initial display data for a special figure enabling the initial display for the special figure to be turned off is set in the first display data buffer 271.

  By controlling the display of the special figure display unit 37a using the display data stored in the first display data buffer 271, an initial display corresponding to the display data is performed on the special figure display unit 37a. The display contents that can be displayed on the special figure display section 37a as the initial display include the display contents that can be displayed on the special figure display section 37a in a normal game and the display contents that are not displayed on the special figure display section 37a in a normal game. Contents are also included. In addition, the display content that can be displayed on the special figure display section 37a as an initial display and the display content that can be displayed on the special figure display section 37a in a normal game is the final display on the special figure display section 37a in the game round resulting in the departure. And the special figure hit display finally displayed on the special figure display section 37a in the special game display and the winning result game times.

  Thereafter, “7” corresponding to the number of light-emitting units provided in the general-purpose display unit 38a is set in a lottery target counter provided in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control (step SD210).

  After that, a random number value is obtained from the general-purpose random number circuit corresponding to the value of the lottery target counter (step SD211). In the present embodiment, the main control board 61 is provided with a number of general-purpose random number circuits corresponding to the number of light emitting units provided on the general-purpose display unit 38a. Specifically, since seven light-emitting units are provided in the general-purpose display unit 38a, seven general-purpose random number circuits are provided. When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, these seven general-purpose random number circuits have relatively short periods (for example, 1 microsecond to 7 microseconds) and hold themselves at different periods. In this configuration, the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped by supplying the backup power even in the situation where the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped. This is a configuration capable of storing and holding the random number value immediately before the operation.

  When the seven light emitting units of the general-purpose display unit 38a are first to seventh light-emitting units and the seven general-purpose random number circuits are first to seventh general-purpose random number circuits, the first general figure The random number circuit for use corresponds to the first light emitting unit, the second random number circuit for general use corresponds to the second light emitting unit, the third random number circuit for general use corresponds to the third light emitting unit, The fourth general-purpose random number circuit corresponds to the fourth light-emitting unit, the fifth general-purpose random number circuit corresponds to the fifth light-emitting unit, and the sixth general-purpose random number circuit corresponds to the sixth light-emitting unit. The seventh general-purpose random number circuit corresponds to the seventh light-emitting unit. Further, when the value of the lottery target counter is “7”, it corresponds to the first light emitting unit and the first general-purpose random number circuit, and when the value of the lottery target counter is “6”, it corresponds to the second. It corresponds to the light-emitting unit and the second general-purpose random number circuit, and when the value of the lottery target counter is "5", it corresponds to the third light-emitting unit and the third general-purpose random number circuit. When the value of the counter is “4”, it corresponds to the fourth light emitting unit and the fourth general-purpose random number circuit, and when the value of the lottery target counter is “3”, the fifth light emitting unit and the fourth 5 corresponds to the general-purpose random number circuit, and when the value of the lottery target counter is “2”, it corresponds to the sixth light emitting unit and the sixth general-purpose random number circuit, and the value of the lottery target counter is If it is “1”, it corresponds to the seventh light emitting unit and the seventh general-purpose random number circuit. Note that the first to seventh general-purpose random number circuits have the same random number range (for example, “0 to 255”).

  After that, a lighting lottery process for ordinary drawing is executed (step SD212). In the general drawing lighting lottery process, the general drawing lighting lottery table is read from the main ROM 64. In the general drawing lighting lottery table, half of the random numbers that can be taken by the first to seventh general-purpose random number circuits are set as the winning random number values. Then, the random number value obtained in step SD211 is collated with the lighting lottery table for ordinary drawing.

  If the result of the lighting drawing process for ordinary drawing is a lighting winning (step SD213: YES), the lighting information is stored in an area corresponding to the current value of the current lottery target counter in the clear target area 371 in the work area 221 for specific control. Is stored (step SD214). Each area provided corresponding to the lottery target counter is cleared to "0" when the process of step SD210 is executed.

  Thereafter, the value of the lottery target counter is decremented by one (step SD215), and it is determined whether or not the value of the lottery target counter after the subtraction is "0" (step SD216). If a negative determination is made in step SD216, the processes in steps SD211 to SD215 are executed again.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step SD216, initial display data for ordinary drawing is set in the third display data buffer 273 (step SD217). The initial display data for ordinary drawing is determined by the presence / absence of lighting information corresponding to the values of the lottery target counters of “1” to “7”. For example, while the lighting information corresponding to the case where the value of the lottery target counter is “7”, “5”, and “1” is stored, the lighting information corresponding to other values of the lottery target counter is not stored. In this case, the first light emitting unit, the third light emitting unit, and the seventh light emitting unit of the general-purpose display unit 38a emit light, and the second light emitting unit, the fourth light emitting unit, the fifth light emitting unit, and the sixth light emitting unit are turned on. The general display initial display data enabling the execution of the general display initial display which is turned off is set in the third display data buffer 273.

  By controlling the display of the general-purpose display unit 38a using the display data stored in the third display data buffer 273, an initial display corresponding to the display data is performed on the general-purpose display unit 38a. The display contents that can be displayed on the general graphic display unit 38a as the initial display include the display contents that can be displayed on the general graphic display unit 38a in a normal game and the display contents that are not displayed on the general graphic display unit 38a in a normal game. Contents are also included. In addition, the display content that can be displayed on the general-purpose display unit 38a as an initial display and the display content that can be displayed on the general-purpose display unit 38a in a normal game is the final display on the general-purpose display unit 38a in the variation display of the deviation result. The general-purpose hit display, which is finally displayed on the general-figure display unit 38a in the general-purpose out-of-display display and the variation display of the winning result, is included.

  After executing the processing of steps SD202 to SD217, "1" is set to the initial display flag 375 provided in the clear target area 371 in the work area 221 for specific control (step SD218).

  If an affirmative determination is made in step SD201 or if the process in step SD218 is performed, "1" is set to the display start flag provided in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control (step SD219). . The display start flag determines whether or not to start the display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure reservation display unit 38b, as in the 87th embodiment. This is a flag specified by the CPU 63. When the value of the display start flag is “0”, the main CPU 63 does not perform the display control of the special figure display part 37a, the special figure reservation display part 37b, the general figure display part 38a, and the general figure reservation display part 38b. When the display start flag is set to "1", the main CPU 63 starts display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure reservation display unit 38b.

  As in the 87th embodiment, the display start flag is cleared to "0" in step SC204 of the main process (FIG. 690). This processing timing is determined after the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, the general figure reservation display unit 38b, and the first to fourth. The timing is before the timing at which the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 693) for executing the display control of the notification display devices 201 to 204 is first executed. Then, "1" is set to the display start flag in the display start process (FIG. 709) executed after the process at the start of the supply of the operating power (step SC201 to step SC223) is completed. As a result, immediately after the supply of the operating power is resumed, the special-figure display section 37a, the special-figure reservation display section 37b, the general-figure display section 38a, and the general-figure reservation display section 38b are kept off, and the supply of the operation power is performed. After the start process (step SC201 to step SC223) is completed, the display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure reservation display unit 38b is started.

  In particular, in the display start processing (FIG. 709), as described above, when either the first RAM clear processing or the second RAM clear processing is executed in the main processing (FIG. 690), the special display is stored in the first display data buffer 271. The initial display data for general drawing is set in the third display data buffer 273 while the initial display data for general drawing is set. In this case, assuming that the display control of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a is started immediately after the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit The initial display is started immediately after the display content immediately before the supply of the operation power is stopped in 38a is displayed. Then, the player who visually observes such a change in the display content starts the initial display on the special figure display unit 37a and the ordinary figure display unit 38a in a state where either the first RAM clear processing or the second RAM clear processing is executed. You can understand what was done. On the other hand, when display data is set in the first display data buffer 271 and the third display data buffer 273 in the display start processing (FIG. 709), the display start flag is set after the processing for setting the display data is completed. Is set to "1", and the display of the special figure display section 37a and the general figure display section 38a is started. As a result, it is possible to prevent the display content from being changed as described above.

  On the other hand, when “1” is set to the initial display flag 375 (step SD201: YES), the processing of steps SD202 to SD218 is not executed. Therefore, the first display data buffer 271 is in a state where the display data stored immediately before the supply of the operation power is stopped is stored as it is, and the third display data buffer 273 is stored immediately before the supply of the operation power is stopped. Is stored as it is. In this case, when the display start flag is set to “1” and the display of the special figure display unit 37a is started, the display data stored in the first display data buffer 271 immediately before the supply of the operation power is stopped. Is displayed on the special figure display section 37a. When the display start flag is set to “1” and the display on the general-purpose display unit 38a is started, the display data stored in the third display data buffer 273 immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped. A corresponding display is performed on the general-purpose display section 38a.

  As described above in detail, when the first RAM clear processing is executed in the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power (step SC201 to step SC223) or when the second RAM clear processing of the set value updating processing is executed, Since "1" is not set in the display flag 375, when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started and the display of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a is started, these special characters are used. Initial display is started in the figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a. The initial display in the special figure display unit 37a is such that when a game ball enters the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 and the start condition of the game round is satisfied, the picture is displayed on the special figure display unit 37a. Is continued until the start of the variable display. The initial display on the general-purpose display unit 38a is continued until a game ball enters the through gate 35 and the display of the pattern on the general-purpose display unit 38a starts to change. Since the initial display flag 375 is not set to "1" even at the factory shipment stage, the off-screen display is started on the special figure display section 37a and the general figure display section 38a.

  Regardless of whether the first RAM clearing process is executed as described above or the case where the second RAM clearing process of the setting value updating process is executed, the display of the special figure display unit 37a and the ordinary figure display unit 38a is changed. When the operation is started, the initial display is performed on the special-figure display section 37a and the general-figure display section 38a, so that the supply of the operating power is started and the display is performed on the special-figure display section 37a and the general-figure display section 38a. Even if the display contents of the display units 37a and 38a at the time of the start are confirmed, it is not possible to grasp which of the first RAM clear processing and the set value update processing has been executed. Thereby, even if the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a when the supply of the operation power is started, it is not possible to specify whether or not the setting value update processing has been executed. It is possible to do.

  If the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process of the setting value updating process are not executed in the process (steps SC201 to SC223) at the start of the supply of the operating power, the display is started on the special figure display unit 37a. In this case, the display on the special figure display section 37a is started with the display content immediately before the supply of the operation power is stopped, and the supply of the operation power is stopped when the display is started on the ordinary figure display section 38a. The display on the general-purpose display unit 38a is started with the display content immediately before the display. That is, if the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process of the setting value updating process are not executed in the process at the start of the supply of the operating power (step SC201 to step SC223), the special figure display section 37a and the general The display contents of the display unit 38a depend on the situation at the timing when the supply of the operation power is stopped, and the display contents are various. On the other hand, when the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process of the set value updating process is executed in the process (Step SC201 to Step SC223) at the start of the supply of the operating power, the special figure display unit 37a and the normal The initial display is determined by lottery and displayed on the figure display unit 38a. Accordingly, even when the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process of the setting value updating process is performed in the process (Step SC201 to Step SC223) at the start of the operation power supply, the operation power supply is started. As in the case where the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process of the set value updating process are not executed in the processes (steps SC201 to SC223), the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a are changed. It can be diversified. Therefore, even when the supply of the operating power is started and the display of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a is started, even if the display is confirmed, either the first RAM clear processing or the second RAM clear processing is performed. It is possible to make it difficult to identify the execution.

  In particular, when the display content of the initial display is determined, the lighting lottery process is executed for each of the light emitting units in each of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a. This makes it possible to diversify the display contents that can be selected as the initial display.

  In addition, even when the first RAM clear processing and the second RAM clear processing are not executed when the supply of the operating power is started, the processing of steps SD202 to SD218 of the display start processing (FIG. 709) is executed. Is also good. In this case, even if the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a are checked when the supply of the operation power is started, the first RAM clear processing and the second RAM clear processing are performed when the supply of the operation power is started. It is possible to make it impossible to specify whether any of them has been executed. Also, in this configuration, immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped, the display is started when the variable display of the picture is being performed on the special figure display unit 37a or when the open / close execution mode is being performed. By not performing the processing of steps SD202 to SD209 of the processing (FIG. 709), the display of the display contents before the supply of the operation power is stopped may be restarted in the special figure display unit 37a. . In addition, immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped, if the display of the pattern is being changed on the general-purpose display unit 38a or if the general-electricity is being released, the display start process ( By not performing the processing of steps SD210 to SD217 in FIG. 709), the display of the display contents before the supply of the operation power is stopped may be restarted in the special figure display unit 37a.

  Further, in the lighting lottery process (step SD204) for the special figure of the display start processing (FIG. 709), a lottery is not performed to determine whether or not each of the light emitting units of the special figure display unit 37a is individually lit. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to light in a predetermined plurality of units such as two or three. Further, in the lighting lottery process for general drawing (step SD212) of the display start process (FIG. 709), a lottery for determining whether or not to light each of the light emitting units of the general graphic display unit 38a individually is performed. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to light in a predetermined plurality of units such as two or three.

  When the first RAM clear processing is executed when the supply of the operation power is started, steps SD202 to SD217 of the display start processing (FIG. 709) are executed, while the second RAM clear processing is executed. In this case, the configuration may be such that steps SD202 to SD217 of the display start process (FIG. 709) are not executed. When the supply of the operation power is started and the second RAM clear processing is executed, steps SD202 to SD217 of the display start processing (FIG. 709) are executed, while the first RAM clear processing is executed. In this case, the configuration may be such that steps SD202 to SD217 of the display start process (FIG. 709) are not executed.

<94th embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a when the supply of the operation power to the main CPU 63 is started are different from those of the 90th embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the 90th embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the 90th embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 710 is a flowchart showing the set value updating process in the present embodiment, which is executed in step SC216 in the main process (FIG. 690) of the main CPU 63. The processing of steps SD301 to SD316 in the setting value update processing is executed by using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

  First, interruption permission is set (step SD301). Thus, the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 701) is started by interrupting at the first interrupt cycle, and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 693) is started by interrupting at the second interrupt cycle.

  In the present embodiment, in the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power (steps SC201 to SC223), the interrupts of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 701) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 693) are basically prohibited. In the setting confirmation process (step SC213) and the setting value update process (FIG. 710), an interrupt is permitted. Therefore, if the setting confirmation process (step SC213) and the setting value update process (FIG. 710) are not executed in the process (steps SC201 to SC223) at the start of the supply of the operating power, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 701) and the execution of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 693) are prohibited, and the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 701) is performed in the state where the setting confirmation processing (step SC213) or the setting value update processing (FIG. 710) is being executed. ) And execution of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 693). However, in the situation where the setting confirmation process (step SC213) or the set value update process (FIG. 710) is being executed, the start-up process flag is set to “1”. Even if 701) is activated, among the various processing of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 701), processing for performing power outage monitoring, updating of various counters, and illegal monitoring is executed, while processing for progressing the game is performed. The first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 701) ends without executing the processing.

  Thereafter, "1" is set to the setting update display flag on condition that "1" is not set to the setting update display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step SD302). By setting “1” to the setting update display flag, an affirmative determination is made in step SC402 of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 693), and the setting processing for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update is performed. (Step SC403) is executed. The content of the setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update is the same as that in the above-described seventy-seventh embodiment. By executing the process, for example, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 629 (a), a display indicating that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being updated and the pachinko machine 10 is selected as an update target The displayed set values are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  Thereafter, initial settings at the start are performed (step SD303). In the initial setting, the game stop flag provided in the specific control work area 221 is cleared to “0”. If the power failure flag is not set to “1” because the power failure processing was not properly performed at the time of the previous power-off (step SC205: NO), the game stop flag indicates the work area 221 for specific control and If the checksums do not match for at least one of the stack areas 222 for specific control due to a change in the information storage state since the last power-off (step SC206: NO), or the setting reference area 341 When the set value corresponding to the information stored in is not within the normal range (step SC207: NO), this flag is set to “1” in step SC220 of the main process (FIG. 690). When the game stop flag is set to “1”, the processing of steps SC701 to SC706 is performed in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 701), while the affirmative determination is made in step SC707 to perform the steps SC708 to SC708. The processing of SC722 is not executed. Accordingly, when the information abnormality of the main RAM 65 as described above occurs, the processing for monitoring the power failure, updating the various counters, and monitoring the illegality is executed, while the processing for advancing the game is executed. Will not be. By clearing the game stop flag to “0” in the process of step SD303, the state in which the occurrence of the information abnormality in the main RAM 65 is specified is released when the set value update process (FIG. 710) is executed. Becomes possible.

  After that, “1” is set in the setting update area 342 (see FIG. 659) in the specific control work area 221 (step SD304). The setting update area 342 is a storage area in which information of the set value being updated in the set value update process (FIG. 710) is stored in the same manner as in the 77th embodiment. When the numerical information “1” is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value of the update target (selection target or change target) is “setting 1”. When the numerical information “2” is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated is “setting 2”. When the numerical information of “3” is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated is “setting 3”. When the numerical information “4” is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated is “setting 4”. When the numerical information of “5” is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated is “setting 5”. When the numerical information of “6” is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated is “setting 6”.

  By setting “1” in the setting update area 342 in step SD304, the setting value to be updated becomes “setting 1”. That is, in the present embodiment, the set value to be updated is "setting 1" when the set value update process (FIG. 710) is started, regardless of the current set value of the pachinko machine 10.

  Thereafter, an update start command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step SD305). Upon receiving the update start command, the sound emission control device 81 displays an image indicating that the set value update processing (FIG. 710) is being executed, and an image for enabling the user to recognize the operation content for changing the set value. , And the display control device 82 is controlled so that an image for enabling recognition of the operation content for ending the setting value update process (FIG. 710) is displayed on the symbol display device 41. This allows the manager of the gaming hall to recognize that the setting value is being changed, and also provides the operation contents and the setting value update process required to change the setting value (FIG. 710). Can be recognized by the manager of the gaming hall. Note that, in addition to or instead of performing the notification in the symbol display device 41, a configuration may be adopted in which at least one of the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 performs. An external output indicating that the set value updating process (FIG. 710) is being performed may be performed on a device external to the pachinko machine 10, such as a management computer for a game hall.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the information of the set value stored in the setting update area 342 is any of “1” to “6” (step SD306). If it is not one of "1" to "6" (step SD306: NO), "1" is set in the setting update area 342 (step SD307). Thereby, the setting value to be updated becomes “setting 1”.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step SD306 or when the process in step SD307 is performed, it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a has switched from the ON state to the OFF state using the setting key (step SD308). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the reception state of the signal received from the detection sensor that detects the state of the setting key insertion unit 68a has changed from the reception state corresponding to the ON state to the reception state corresponding to the OFF state. I do. Therefore, not only when the setting key insertion unit 68a is maintained in the ON state, but also when the setting value updating process is started in a situation where the setting key insertion unit 68a is in the OFF state, the OFF state is maintained. In this case also, a negative determination is made in step SD308.

  If a negative determination is made in step SD308, the value of the setting update area 342 is incremented by one on the condition that the reset button 68c is pressed (step SD309: YES) (step SD310). Thus, each time the reset button 68c is pressed once, the set value is updated to the next higher level. When the reset button 68c is not pressed (step SD309: NO) or when the value of the setting update area 342 is incremented by 1, the process returns to step SD306, but the setting is updated in step SD306. If it is determined that the value of the area 342 is 7 or more, “1” is set in the setting update area 342 in step SD307. As a result, when the reset button 68c is pressed once in the situation of "Setting 6," the display returns to "Setting 1."

  When it is specified that the setting key insertion unit 68a has been switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step SD308: YES), the setting value corresponding to the information stored in the setting updating area 342 is stored in the setting reference area 341. By determining whether or not the set value is equal to or more than the set value corresponding to the set information, the set value equal to or more than the advantage of the set value selected before the current set value update process (FIG. 710) is started. It is determined whether the current setting value updating process (FIG. 710) is selected (step SD311). If an affirmative determination is made in step SD311, "1" is set to the rising expectation flag provided in the clear target area 371 in the work area 221 for specific control (step SD312). The rising expectation flag determines whether or not a set value that is equal to or more than the advantage of the set value selected so far in the process (steps SC201 to SC223) at the start of the supply of the operating power is set on the main side. This is a flag specified by the CPU 63.

  When a negative determination is made in step SD311, or when the processing in step SD312 is performed, the information of the setting value stored in the setting update area 342 is overwritten on the setting reference area 341 (step SD313). Thus, the setting value information updated as a result of the current setting value updating process (FIG. 710) is set in the setting reference area 341. The setting value corresponding to the set information is the current setting value. The set value of the pachinko machine 10 is used.

  Thereafter, the setting of the interruption inhibition is performed (step SD314). Accordingly, when the setting value update process (FIG. 710) ends and the process returns to the process (steps SC201 to SC223) at the start of the supply of the operating power in the main process (FIG. 690), the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 701) and the interruption of the second timer interruption processing (FIG. 693) are prohibited.

  After that, a second RAM clear process is executed (step SD315). In the second RAM clear processing, similarly to the first RAM clear processing (step SC218) of the main processing (FIG. 690), the area provided in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" and the initial state is cleared. Execute the settings. The area in which the information of the setting value indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set (that is, the setting reference area 341) is provided not in the clear target area 371 but in the clear target area 372.

  Thereafter, a return command at the time of updating is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step SD316). By receiving the update return command, the sound emission control device 81 specifies that the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power (steps SC201 to SC223) has been completed in the main CPU 63, and determines the current operating power. It specifies that the set value update process (FIG. 710) has been executed in the process at the start of supply (steps SC201 to SC223). Then, similarly to the eighteenth embodiment, a process corresponding to the reception of the update return command is executed.

  FIG. 711 is a flowchart showing the display start processing in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. The processing of steps SD401 to SD413 in the display start processing is executed using the specific control program and the specific control data in the main CPU 63.

  If “1” is not set to the initial display flag 375 (step SD401: NO), it is determined whether “1” is set to the rising expectation flag of the clear target area 371 in the work area 221 for specific control. A determination is made (step SD402). If "1" is not set in the rising expectation flag (step SD402: NO), the first display distribution table 391 for special figure provided in the main ROM 64 is read out (step SD403), and "1" is set in the rising expectation flag. If "1" is set (step SD402: YES), the second display distribution table 392 for the special figure provided in the main ROM 64 is read (step SD404).

  FIG. 712 (a) is an explanatory diagram for describing the first display distribution table 391 for special figures, and FIG. 712 (b) is a description for describing the second display distribution table 392 for special figures. FIG. Both the first display distribution table for special figure 391 and the second display distribution table for special figure 392 include first initial display data for special figure and first display data for special figure as initial display data for special figure. There are second initial display data and third initial display data for a special figure.

  The first initial display data for the special figure is data for displaying the first initial display for the special figure on the special figure display unit 37a, and the second initial display data for the special figure is the second initial display data for the special figure. This is data for displaying the display on the special figure display unit 37a, and the third initial display data for the special figure is data for displaying the third initial display for the special figure on the special figure display unit 37a. The display contents of the first initial display for special figure, the second initial display for special figure, and the third initial display for special figure are different from each other.

  The first initial display data for the special figure, the second initial display data for the special figure, and the third initial display data for the special figure are used as the stop result setting processing for the jackpot result in the special figure change start processing (FIG. 518) (step 518). This is display data that is not selected in any of S507) and the stop result setting process for the departure result (Step S509). Therefore, the first initial display for the special figure, the second initial display for the special figure, and the third initial display for the special figure are different from the display contents that can be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 37a in the game time. ing. Furthermore, the first initial display for a special figure, the second initial display for a special figure, and the third initial display for a special figure are objects to be displayed in a case where a variation display of a pattern is performed on the special figure display unit 37a in the game time. The display content is not selected as. Thereby, the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, and when the display on the special figure display unit 37a is started, the first initial display for the special figure, the second initial display for the special figure, and the third initial display for the special figure are performed. If any of the initial displays has been performed, either the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process of the set value updating process is performed in the process (steps SC201 to SC223) at the start of the supply of the operating power this time. It is possible to grasp that the execution has been performed.

  As shown in FIGS. 712 (a) and 712 (b), the first display distribution table 391 for special figures and the second display distribution table 392 for special figures respectively have the first display distribution table 391 for special figures. The numerical range of the special display initial display counter 381 is set for each of the first to third initial display data. Since the special display initial display counter 381 is provided in the non-clearing area 372 as in the 90th embodiment, the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped. If the supply of the backup power is continued, even if the first RAM clear processing or the second RAM clear processing of the setting value update processing is executed, the numerical information immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped without being initialized. Is stored. Also, the numerical information of the special figure initial display counter 381 is updated in step SC706 in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 701) as in the 90th embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 712 (a), in the special display first display distribution table 391, the special figure initial display counter 381 of "0 to 39" is set for the special figure first initial display data. A numerical value range is set, and a numerical value range of the special display initial display counter 381 of "40 to 54" is set for the second initial display data for the special figure. The numerical range of the special display initial display counter 381 of “55-59” is set for the display data. In other words, in the first display distribution table for special figure 391, the selection probability of the first initial display data for special figure is 2/3, so that the selection probability is the highest, and the second initial display for special figure is used. When the data selection probability is 1/4, the selection probability is the second highest, and when the selection probability of the third initial display data for special figure is 1/12, the selection probability is the lowest.

  As shown in FIG. 712 (b), in the special display second display distribution table 392, the special figure initial display counter 381 of "0-9" is set for the special figure first initial display data. A numerical range is set, and a numerical range of the special display initial display counter 381 of “10 to 39” is set for the second initial display data for the special figure. A numerical range of the special display initial display counter 381 of “40 to 59” is set for the display data. That is, in the second display distribution table 392 for the special figure, the selection probability of the second initial display data for the special figure is １ ／, the selection probability is the highest, and the third initial display for the special figure is used. When the data selection probability is 1/3, the selection probability is the second highest, and when the selection probability of the first initial display data for special figure is 1/6, the selection probability is the lowest.

  Returning to the description of the display start processing (FIG. 711), after executing the processing of step SD403 or the processing of step SD404, a lottery processing of initial display data for a special figure is executed (step SD405). In the lottery process of the special figure initial display data, the current numerical information of the special figure initial display counter 381 is acquired. Then, the obtained numerical information is read from the main ROM 64 in step SD403 for the special figure first display distribution table 391 or the special figure second display distribution table read from the main ROM 64 in step SD404. By comparing with 392, the display data to be displayed this time is selected from the first initial display data for special figure, the second initial display data for special figure, and the third initial display data for special figure. select.

  The display data selected in the special drawing initial display data lottery process is set in the first display data buffer 271 (step SD406). By controlling the display of the special figure display unit 37a using the display data stored in the first display data buffer 271, an initial display corresponding to the display data is performed on the special figure display unit 37a. That is, when the first initial display data for a special figure is set in the first display data buffer 271, the first initial display for the special figure is performed on the special figure display unit 37a, and the first display data buffer 271 is displayed. When the second initial display data for the special figure is set, the second initial display for the special figure is performed in the special figure display section 37a, and the third initial data for the special figure is stored in the first display data buffer 271. When the display data is set, a third initial display for a special figure is performed on the special figure display unit 37a.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not “1” is set to the rising expectation flag of the clear target area 371 in the work area 221 for specific control (step SD407). If "1" is not set in the rising expectation flag (step SD407: NO), the first display distribution table 393 for the ordinary figure provided in the main ROM 64 is read out (step SD408), and the rising expectation flag is set. When "1" is set (step SD407: YES), the second display distribution table 394 for ordinary drawing provided in the main ROM 64 is read (step SD409).

  FIG. 712 (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first display distribution table 393 for ordinary drawing, and FIG. 712 (d) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second display distribution table 394 for ordinary drawing. FIG. In both the first display distribution table 393 for general drawing and the second display distribution table 394 for general drawing, the first initial display data for general drawing and the first initial display data for general drawing are used as initial display data for general drawing. There are second initial display data and third initial display data for general drawing.

  The first initial display data for the general figure is data for displaying the first initial display for the general figure on the general figure display unit 38a, and the second initial display data for the general figure is the second initial display data for the general figure. This is data for displaying the display on the ordinary figure display unit 38a, and the third initial display data for ordinary figure is data for displaying the third initial display for ordinary figure on the ordinary figure display unit 38a. The display contents of the first initial display for general drawing, the second initial display for general drawing, and the third initial display for general drawing are different from each other.

  The first initial display data for the ordinary figure, the second initial display data for the ordinary figure, and the third initial display data for the ordinary figure are used for the ordinary figure ordinary power control processing (step SC716) in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 701). )), When the result of the general-purpose opening lottery executed using the general-purpose part opening counter C4 in order to determine whether or not the general-purpose part 34a is to be opened is a result and a hit result. Is display data not selected in any of the cases. Therefore, the first initial display for general drawing, the second initial display for general drawing, and the third initial display for general drawing are display contents that can be finally stopped and displayed on the general figure display unit 38a in the variable display time. Is different. Furthermore, the first initial display for the general drawing, the second initial display for the general drawing, and the third initial display for the general drawing are displayed when the variable display of the picture is performed in the general display section 38a in the variable display time. The displayed content is not selected as a target. As a result, the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, and when the display on the general-purpose display section 38a starts, the first initial display for general-purpose, the second initial display for general-purpose, and the third initial display for general-purpose are used. If any of the initial displays has been performed, either the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process of the set value updating process is performed in the process (steps SC201 to SC223) at the start of the supply of the operating power this time. It is possible to grasp that the execution has been performed.

  As shown in FIGS. 712 (c) and 712 (d), the first display distribution table 393 for general drawing and the second display distribution table 394 for general drawing respectively include the first display distribution table for general drawing. The numerical range of the general-purpose initial display counter 382 is set for each of the first to third initial display data. Since the initial display counter 382 for ordinary drawing is provided in the non-clearing area 372 similarly to the 90th embodiment, the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped. If the supply of the backup power is continued, even if the first RAM clear processing or the second RAM clear processing of the setting value update processing is executed, the numerical information immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped without being initialized. Is stored. Also, the numerical information of the general-purpose initial display counter 382 is updated in step SC708 in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 701) as in the 90th embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 712 (c), in the first display distribution table 393 for general drawing, as shown in FIG. A numerical range is set, and a numerical range of the initial display counter 382 for general drawing of “30 to 49” is set for the second initial display data for general drawing. For the display data, a numerical range of the initial display counter 382 for general drawing of “50 to 59” is set. In other words, in the first display distribution table 393 for the ordinary figure, the selection probability of the first initial display data for the ordinary figure is 1/2, so that the selection probability is the highest, and the second initial display data for the ordinary figure is displayed. When the data selection probability is 1/3, the selection probability is the second highest, and when the selection probability of the third initial display data for ordinary drawing is 1/6, the selection probability is the lowest.

  As shown in FIG. 712 (d), in the second display distribution table 394 for general drawing, as shown in FIG. A numerical value range is set, and a numerical value range of the general display initial display counter 382 of “20 to 29” is set with respect to the second initial display data for general drawing. For the display data, a numerical range of the initial display counter 382 for ordinary drawings of “30 to 59” is set. In other words, in the second display distribution table 394 for the ordinary figure, the selection probability of the third initial display data for the ordinary figure is １ ／, the selection probability is the highest, and the first initial display for the ordinary figure is displayed. When the data selection probability is 1/3, the selection probability is the second highest, and when the selection probability of the second initial display data for ordinary drawing is 1/6, the selection probability is the lowest.

  Returning to the description of the display start process (FIG. 711), after executing the process of step SD408 or the process of step SD409, a lottery process of initial display data for general drawing is executed (step SD410). In the lottery process of the general-purpose initial display data, the current numerical information of the general-purpose initial display counter 382 is acquired. Then, the obtained numerical information is read out from the main ROM 64 at step SD408, and is used as the first display distribution table 393 for general drawing or the second display distribution table for general drawing read from the main ROM 64 at step SD409. By comparing with 394, the display data to be displayed this time is selected from among the first initial display data for general drawing, the second initial display data for general drawing, and the third initial display data for general drawing. select.

  The display data selected by the lottery process of the initial display data for ordinary drawing is set in the third display data buffer 273 (step SD411). By controlling the display of the general-purpose display unit 38a using the display data stored in the third display data buffer 273, an initial display corresponding to the display data is performed on the general-purpose display unit 38a. In other words, when the first initial display data for the ordinary figure is set in the third display data buffer 273, the first initial display for the ordinary figure is performed on the ordinary figure display unit 38a, and the third display data buffer 273 is displayed. When the second initial display data for the ordinary figure is set in the first time, the second initial display for the ordinary figure is performed in the ordinary figure display unit 38a, and the third initial data for the ordinary figure is stored in the third display data buffer 273. When the display data is set, a third initial display for the ordinary figure is performed on the ordinary figure display unit 38a.

  After executing the processing of steps SD402 to SD411, "1" is set to the initial display flag 375 provided in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control (step SD412).

  If an affirmative determination is made in step SD401 or if the processing in step SD412 is performed, "1" is set to the display start flag provided in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control (step SD413). . The display start flag determines whether or not to start the display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure reservation display unit 38b, as in the 87th embodiment. This is a flag specified by the CPU 63. When the value of the display start flag is “0”, the main CPU 63 does not perform the display control of the special figure display part 37a, the special figure reservation display part 37b, the general figure display part 38a, and the general figure reservation display part 38b. When the display start flag is set to "1", the main CPU 63 starts display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure reservation display unit 38b.

  As in the 87th embodiment, the display start flag is cleared to "0" in step SC204 of the main process (FIG. 690). This processing timing is determined after the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, the general figure reservation display unit 38b, and the first to fourth. The timing is before the timing at which the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 693) for executing the display control of the notification display devices 201 to 204 is first executed. Then, "1" is set to the display start flag in the display start process (FIG. 711) executed after the process at the start of the supply of the operating power (step SC201 to step SC223) is completed. As a result, immediately after the supply of the operating power is resumed, the special-figure display section 37a, the special-figure reservation display section 37b, the general-figure display section 38a, and the general-figure reservation display section 38b are kept off, and the supply of the operation power is performed. After the start process (step SC201 to step SC223) is completed, the display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure reservation display unit 38b is started.

  In particular, in the display start process (FIG. 711), as described above, when either the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process is executed in the main process (FIG. 690), the special display is stored in the first display data buffer 271. Any of the first to third initial display data is set in the third display data buffer 273, and any of the first to third initial display data is set in the third display data buffer 273. In this case, assuming that the display control of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a is started immediately after the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit The initial display is started immediately after the display content immediately before the supply of the operation power is stopped in 38a is displayed. On the other hand, when display data is set in the first display data buffer 271 and the third display data buffer 273 in the display start processing (FIG. 711), the display start flag is set after the processing for setting the display data is completed. Is set to "1", and the display of the special figure display section 37a and the general figure display section 38a is started. As a result, it is possible to prevent the display content from being changed as described above.

  On the other hand, when “1” is set in the initial display flag 375 (step SD401: YES), the processing of steps SD402 to SD412 is not executed. Therefore, the first display data buffer 271 is in a state where the display data stored immediately before the supply of the operation power is stopped is stored as it is, and the third display data buffer 273 is stored immediately before the supply of the operation power is stopped. Is stored as it is. In this case, when the display start flag is set to “1” and the display of the special figure display unit 37a is started, the display data stored in the first display data buffer 271 immediately before the supply of the operation power is stopped. Is displayed on the special figure display section 37a. When the display start flag is set to “1” and the display on the general-purpose display unit 38a is started, the display data stored in the third display data buffer 273 immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped. A corresponding display is performed on the general-purpose display section 38a.

  As described above in detail, when the first RAM clear processing is executed in the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power (step SC201 to step SC223) or when the second RAM clear processing of the set value updating processing is executed, Since "1" is not set in the display flag 375, when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started and the display of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a is started, these special characters are used. Initial display is started in the figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a. The initial display in the special figure display unit 37a is such that when a game ball enters the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 and the start condition of the game round is satisfied, the picture is displayed on the special figure display unit 37a. Is continued until the start of the variable display. The initial display on the general-purpose display unit 38a is continued until a game ball enters the through gate 35 and the display of the pattern on the general-purpose display unit 38a starts to change. Since the initial display flag 375 is not set to "1" even at the factory shipment stage, the initial display is started on the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a.

  Regardless of whether the first RAM clearing process is executed as described above or the case where the second RAM clearing process of the setting value updating process is executed, the display of the special figure display unit 37a and the ordinary figure display unit 38a is changed. When the operation is started, the initial display is performed on the special-figure display section 37a and the general-figure display section 38a, so that the supply of the operating power is started and the display is performed on the special-figure display section 37a and the general-figure display section 38a. Even if the display contents of the display units 37a and 38a at the time of the start are confirmed, it is not possible to grasp which of the first RAM clear processing and the set value update processing has been executed. Thereby, even if the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a when the supply of the operation power is started, it is not possible to specify whether or not the setting value update processing has been executed. It is possible to do.

  On the other hand, when the set value updating process (FIG. 710) is executed and a set value equal to or more than the advantage of the set value is selected in the set value update process (FIG. 710), the special figure display unit 37a When the second display distribution table 392 for a special figure is selected as a table for determining the initial display to be performed by the user, the setting value update process (FIG. 710) is not executed, or the setting value update is performed. In the process (FIG. 710), if a set value equal to or more than the advantage of the set value up to that point is not selected, a first table for the special figure is determined as a table for determining an initial display to be performed on the special figure display unit 37a. The display distribution table 391 is selected. The first display distribution table 391 for the special figure and the second display distribution table 392 for the special figure have different initial display selection modes. Thus, by confirming the contents of the initial display in the case where the supply of the operating power is started and the display of the special figure display unit 37a is started, a new set value equal to or more than the advantage of the set value up to that time is newly set. It is possible to predict whether or not it has been performed.

  Similarly, when the set value update process (FIG. 710) is executed and a set value that is equal to or more than the advantage of the previous set value is selected in the set value update process (FIG. 710), a general When the second display distribution table 394 for general drawing is selected as a table for determining the initial display to be performed on the display unit 38a, when the set value update process (FIG. 710) is not executed, or If a set value equal to or more than the set value is not selected in the set value update process (FIG. 710), the table for determining the initial display to be displayed on the general figure display unit 38a is used as a table for the general figure. The first display distribution table 393 is selected. The first display distribution table 393 for general drawing and the second display distribution table 394 for general drawing have different initial display selection modes. As a result, by confirming the contents of the initial display when the supply of the operating power is started and the display on the general-purpose display unit 38a is started, a new set value equal to or more than the advantage of the set value up to that time is newly set. It is possible to predict whether or not it has been performed.

  In addition, as described above, it is assumed that whether or not a set value equal to or more than the advantage of the set value is newly set is predicted based on the content of the initial display when the supply of the operation power is started and the display is started as described above. As display units that can be used, there are a plurality of display units such as a special figure display unit 37a and a general figure display unit 38a. This increases the amount of judgment in predicting whether or not a set value that is equal to or greater than the advantage of the set value up to that time is newly set, thereby increasing the accuracy of the prediction by the player. .

  In the setting value updating process (FIG. 710), when a setting value equal to or greater than the setting value up to that point is set, “1” is set in the rising expectation flag, and when drawing lots of initial display data, a special drawing The present invention is not limited to the configuration in which the second display distribution table 392 or the second display distribution table 394 for general drawing is referred to, and is more advantageous than the previous set values in the set value update process (FIG. 710). When the set value is set, “1” is set to the rising expectation flag, and the second display distribution table 392 for special figure or the second display distribution table 394 for general drawing is referred to at the time of the lottery of the initial display data. When the set value update process (FIG. 710) is executed, no matter which set value is newly set, the rising expectation flag is set to “1” and the initial display data is randomly selected. To Second display sorting table 394 for the second display sorting table 392 or Prussian diagram for JP diagram may be configured to be referenced.

  Also, initial display data for a special figure that can be selected when the first display distribution table 391 for a special figure is referred to, and special figure that can be selected when the second display distribution table 392 for a special figure is referred to. The configuration is not limited to a configuration in which the initial display data for the special figure completely matches the initial display data for the special figure and the initial display data for the special figure set in the first display distribution table 391 for the special figure. The configuration may be such that the initial display data for the special figure set in the second display distribution table 392 does not completely match. In this case, the display contents of the special figure display section 37a will be clearly different depending on whether or not the rising expectation flag is set to "1" in the setting value update processing (FIG. 710). Therefore, by confirming the display content of the special figure display unit 37a when the supply of the operation power is started, it is possible to clearly specify whether or not a set value equal to or more than the advantage of the set value up to that time is set. Becomes possible.

  In addition, although the initial display data for the special figure common to the first display distribution table 391 for the special figure and the second display distribution table 392 for the special figure is set, The first display distribution table 391 and the special display second display distribution table 392 may be configured to have special display initial display data that is set to one of them and not set to the other. In this case, when the initial display corresponding to the initial display data for the special figure set only in the first display distribution table 391 for the special figure is executed in the special figure display unit 37a, the setting up to that time is performed. It is possible to specify that a set value equal to or greater than the value advantage is not set. On the other hand, when the initial display corresponding to the initial display data for the special figure set only in the second display distribution table 392 for the special figure is executed in the special figure display unit 37a, the setting up to that time is performed. It is possible to specify that a set value equal to or greater than the value advantage is set.

  Further, initial display data for general drawing that can be selected when the first display distribution table 393 for general drawing is referred to, and general display data that can be selected when the second display distribution table 394 for general drawing is referred to. The configuration is not limited to a configuration in which the initial display data for general use completely matches the initial display data for general use and the initial display data for general use set in the first display distribution table 393 for general use. The configuration may be such that the initial display data for ordinary drawings set in the second display distribution table 394 does not completely match. In this case, the display contents of the general-purpose display unit 38a will be clearly different depending on whether or not the rising expectation flag is set to “1” in the setting value updating process (FIG. 710). Therefore, by confirming the display content of the general-purpose display unit 38a when the supply of the operating power is started, it is possible to clearly specify whether or not a set value equal to or more than the advantage of the set value up to that time has been set. Becomes possible.

  In addition, although common display initial display data is set for each of the first display distribution table 393 for general drawing and the second display distribution table 394 for general drawing, The first display distribution table 393 and the second display distribution table 394 for general drawing may be configured to have initial display data for general drawing which is not set to the other. In this case, if the initial display corresponding to the initial display data for the general figure set only in the first display distribution table 393 for the general figure is executed in the general figure display unit 38a, the setting up to that time is performed. It is possible to specify that a set value equal to or greater than the value advantage is not set. On the other hand, when the initial display corresponding to the initial display data for the general figure set only in the second display distribution table 394 for the general figure is executed in the general figure display unit 38a, the setting up to that time is performed. It is possible to specify that a set value equal to or greater than the value advantage is set.

  Further, the special display initial display data to be selected when the rising expectation flag is set to “1” is not limited to the configuration in which the special display initial display data is determined by lottery. Only one type, and only one type of initial display data for a special figure is selected when the rising expectation flag is not set to “1”, and the initial display data for each special figure is different. May be adopted. In this case, the display content of the special figure display unit 37a differs depending on whether or not a set value equal to or more than the advantage of the set value up to that time is set.

  Further, the initial display data for general drawing is not limited to the configuration determined by lottery, and the initial display data for general drawing selected when the rising expectation flag is set to “1” is one. Only one type, and only one type of general display initial display data is selected when the rising expectation flag is not set to "1". May be adopted. In this case, the display content of the general-purpose display unit 38a differs depending on whether or not a set value equal to or more than the advantage of the set value is set.

<95th embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is restarted are different from those of the above-described 94th embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the above-described ninety-fourth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the above-described ninety-fourth embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 713 is a flowchart showing a display start process according to the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. The processing of steps SD501 to SD514 in the display start processing is executed by using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

  If “1” is not set in the initial display flag 375 (step SD501: NO), a lottery process for initial display is executed (step SD502). In the initial display lottery process, the same processes as those in steps SD402 to SD411 of the display start process (FIG. 711) in the ninety-fourth embodiment are executed. Thereby, when the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process of the setting value updating process is executed, the display of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a is started similarly to the above-described 94th embodiment. The initial display is performed. Thereafter, "1" is set to the initial display flag 375 (step SD503).

  When “1” is set in the initial display flag 375 (step SD501: YES), information indicating whether or not the game is being executed in the clear target area 371 of the specific control work area 221 is stored. By referring to the stored storage area, it is determined whether or not the supply of the operating power is restarted after the supply of the operating power is stopped during the execution of the game (step SD504). The storage area stores information indicating that the game is being executed when the game is started, and information indicating that the game is being executed when the game is ended. Deleted from the area. Even if the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, if the backup power is supplied to the work area 221 for specific control, the information of the storage area is stored and held. If the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process are not executed when the power supply is restarted, the data is stored and held.

  In addition, by referring to a storage area in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control in which information indicating whether or not the open / close execution mode is being executed is stored, the operating power during the execution of the open / close execution mode is referred to. It is determined whether or not the supply of the operating power is resumed after the supply of the power is stopped (step SD505). When the opening / closing execution mode is started, information indicating that the opening / closing execution mode is being executed is stored in the storage area, and when the opening / closing execution mode is ended, it indicates that the opening / closing execution mode is being executed. The information is deleted from the storage area. Even if the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, if the backup power is supplied to the work area 221 for specific control, the information of the storage area is stored and held. If the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process are not executed when the power supply is restarted, the data is stored and held.

  If the last stop of the supply of the operating power is neither during the execution of the game time nor during the execution of the opening / closing execution mode (step SD504 and step SD505: NO), the first display vibration for the special figure is read from the main ROM 64. The minute table 391 is read (step SD506). Then, a lottery process of the special display initial display data is executed (step SD507). In the lottery process of the special figure initial display data, the current numerical information of the special figure initial display counter 381 is acquired. Then, by comparing the acquired numerical information with the first display distribution table 391 for the special figure read from the main ROM 64 in step SD506, the display data to be displayed this time is displayed for the special figure. A selection is made from the first initial display data, the second initial display data for a special figure, and the third initial display data for a special figure.

  The display data selected in the special drawing initial display data lottery process is set in the first display data buffer 271 (step SD508). By controlling the display of the special figure display unit 37a using the display data stored in the first display data buffer 271, an initial display corresponding to the display data is performed on the special figure display unit 37a. That is, when the first initial display data for a special figure is set in the first display data buffer 271, the first initial display for the special figure is performed on the special figure display unit 37a, and the first display data buffer 271 is displayed. When the second initial display data for the special figure is set, the second initial display for the special figure is performed in the special figure display section 37a, and the third initial data for the special figure is stored in the first display data buffer 271. When the display data is set, a third initial display for a special figure is performed on the special figure display unit 37a.

  On the other hand, if the last stop of the supply of the operating power is either during execution of the game round or during execution of the opening / closing execution mode (step SD504 or step SD505: YES), the initial display data for the special figure is displayed as the first display data. Since the display data is not set in the first display data buffer 271, the display data stored before the supply of the operating power is stopped is stored in the first display data buffer 271 as it is. Therefore, when the display on the special figure display unit 37a is started, the display content on the special figure display unit 37a immediately before the supply of the operation power is stopped is restarted as it is.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step SD504, when an affirmative determination is made in step SD505, or when the process of step SD508 is performed, the fluctuation of the general-purpose display unit 38a in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control is performed. By referring to the storage area in which information indicating whether or not the image is being displayed is stored, the supply of the operation power is restarted after the supply of the operation power is stopped during the variation display of the pattern on the general-purpose display unit 38a. It is determined whether or not the situation has occurred (step SD509). In the storage area, when the variation display of the pattern is started on the general-purpose display unit 38a, information indicating that the variation display of the pattern is being executed on the general-purpose display unit 38a is stored. When the variation display of the pattern is ended in the storage area, the information indicating that the variation display of the pattern is being executed in the general-purpose display unit 38a is deleted from the storage area. Even if the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, if the backup power is supplied to the work area 221 for specific control, the information of the storage area is stored and held. If the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process are not executed when the power supply is restarted, the data is stored and held.

  In addition, by referring to the storage area in the clear target area 371 of the specific control work area 221 in which information indicating whether or not the normal power release state is being executed is stored, during the execution of the normal power open state. It is determined whether or not the supply of the operating power is restarted after the supply of the operating power is stopped (step SD510). The storage area stores information indicating that the normal power release state is being executed when the normal power open state is started, and the information indicating that the normal power open state is being executed when the normal power open state is ended. The information indicating the existence is deleted from the storage area. Even if the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, if the backup power is supplied to the work area 221 for specific control, the information of the storage area is stored and held. If the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process are not executed when the power supply is restarted, the data is stored and held.

  If the last stop of the supply of the operating power is neither during the execution of the pattern change display on the ordinary figure display unit 38a nor during the execution of the ordinary electricity open state (step SD509 and step SD510: NO), the main ROM 64. Then, the first display distribution table 393 for ordinary drawings is read from (step SD511). Then, a lottery process is performed for the initial display data for ordinary drawing (step SD512). In the lottery process of the general-purpose initial display data, the current numerical information of the general-purpose initial display counter 382 is acquired. Then, by comparing the obtained numerical information with the first display distribution table 393 for general drawing read from the main ROM 64 in step SD511, the display data to be displayed this time is compared with the display data for general drawing. A selection is made from among the first initial display data, the second initial display data for general drawing, and the third initial display data for general drawing.

  The display data selected by the lottery process of the initial display data for ordinary drawing is set in the third display data buffer 273 (step SD513). By controlling the display of the general-purpose display unit 38a using the display data stored in the third display data buffer 273, an initial display corresponding to the display data is performed on the general-purpose display unit 38a. In other words, when the first initial display data for the ordinary figure is set in the third display data buffer 273, the first initial display for the ordinary figure is performed on the ordinary figure display unit 38a, and the third display data buffer 273 is displayed. When the second initial display data for the ordinary figure is set in the first time, the second initial display for the ordinary figure is performed in the ordinary figure display unit 38a, and the third initial data for the ordinary figure is stored in the third display data buffer 273. When the display data is set, a third initial display for the ordinary figure is performed on the ordinary figure display unit 38a.

  On the other hand, when the last stop of the supply of the operating power is either during the execution of the pattern change display on the ordinary figure display unit 38a or during the execution of the ordinary electricity open state (step SD509 or step SD510: YES), Since the initial display data for ordinary drawing is not set in the third display data buffer 273, the display data stored before the supply of the operation power is stopped is stored in the third display data buffer 273 as it is. . Therefore, when the display on the general-purpose display unit 38a is started, the display content on the general-purpose display unit 38a immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped is restarted as it is.

  When the processing in step SD503 is executed, when an affirmative judgment is made in step SD509, when an affirmative judgment is made in step SD510, or when the processing in step SD513 is executed, the clear target area of the work area 221 for specific control is obtained. “1” is set to the display start flag provided in 371 (step SD514). The display start flag determines whether or not to start the display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure reservation display unit 38b, as in the 87th embodiment. This is a flag specified by the CPU 63. When the value of the display start flag is “0”, the main CPU 63 does not perform the display control of the special figure display part 37a, the special figure reservation display part 37b, the general figure display part 38a, and the general figure reservation display part 38b. When the display start flag is set to "1", the main CPU 63 starts display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure reservation display unit 38b.

  As in the 87th embodiment, the display start flag is cleared to "0" in step SC204 of the main process (FIG. 690). This processing timing is determined after the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, the general figure reservation display unit 38b, and the first to fourth. The timing is before the timing at which the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 693) for executing the display control of the notification display devices 201 to 204 is first executed. Then, the display start flag is set to "1" in the display start process (FIG. 707) executed after the process at the start of the supply of the operating power (steps SC201 to SC223) is completed. As a result, immediately after the supply of the operating power is resumed, the special-figure display section 37a, the special-figure reservation display section 37b, the general-figure display section 38a, and the general-figure reservation display section 38b are kept off, and the supply of the operation power is performed. After the start process (step SC201 to step SC223) is completed, the display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure reservation display unit 38b is started.

  In particular, in the display start process (FIG. 707), as described above, even if both the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process are not executed in the main process (FIG. 690), the first display data buffer 271 is stored. In some cases, initial display data for a special figure is set and initial display data for a general figure is set in the third display data buffer 273 in some cases. In this case, assuming that the display control of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a is started immediately after the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit The initial display is started immediately after the display content immediately before the supply of the operation power is stopped in 38a is displayed. On the other hand, when display data is set in the first display data buffer 271 and the third display data buffer 273 in the display start process (FIG. 713), the display start flag is set after the process of setting the display data ends. Is set to "1", and the display of the special figure display section 37a and the general figure display section 38a is started. As a result, it is possible to prevent the display content from being changed as described above.

  According to the above configuration, even if the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process of the set value updating process are not executed in the process (Step SC201 to Step SC223) at the time of starting the supply of the operating power, the supply of the operating power is performed. If the stopped state is neither the execution of the game round nor the execution of the open / close execution mode, the display is started on the special figure display unit 37a. Display starts. Further, even if the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process of the setting value updating process are not executed in the process at the time of starting the supply of the operating power (step SC201 to step SC223), the situation in which the supply of the operating power is stopped. Is not in the state of executing the variation display of the picture on the ordinary figure display section 38a or in the state of opening the ordinary power open state, and when the display is started on the ordinary figure display section 38a, the ordinary figure display is performed. The initial display is started in the section 38a. Then, as described above, the special figure display unit 37a and the special figure display unit 37a are also executed when the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process of the set value updating process is performed in the process (step SC201 to step SC223) at the start of the supply of the operating power. Initial display is performed on the general-purpose display unit 38a. Thereby, even if it is confirmed that the initial display is being performed on the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a when the supply of the operating power is started, the first RAM clear processing and the second RAM clear processing are not performed. It is possible to make it impossible to specify that one of them has been executed.

  If the initial display is performed on the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a when the first RAM clear processing and the second RAM clear processing of the setting value update processing are not executed, the special figure is used in the lottery processing of the initial display data. The first display distribution table 391 and the first display distribution table 393 for ordinary drawings are referred to. Thus, only when the set value update process (FIG. 710) is executed and a set value that is equal to or more than the advantage of the set value up to that time is newly set, the special figure drawing process is performed in the lottery process of the initial display data. The second display distribution table 392 and the second display distribution table 394 for ordinary drawings can be referred to. Therefore, even if the configuration is such that it is not possible to specify that one of the first RAM clear processing and the second RAM clear processing has been executed as described above, the supply of the operating power is started and the special figure display unit is started. By confirming the contents of the initial display when the display of the display 37a and the general-purpose display section 38a is started, the player predicts whether or not a new set value equal to or more than the advantage of the set value up to that time is newly set. It is possible to do.

  On the other hand, the state in which the supply of the operating power is stopped is either during the execution of the game round or during the execution of the opening / closing execution mode, and the first RAM is used in the processing (Step SC201 to Step SC223) when the supply of the operating power is started. If the clearing process and the second RAM clearing process are not executed, when the display is started on the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure display unit becomes the display content immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped. 37a is display-controlled. In addition, the situation in which the supply of the operating power is stopped is either during the execution of the variation display of the picture on the ordinary figure display unit 38a or during the execution of the open state of the ordinary power, and the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power (step SC201) If the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process are not executed in step SC223), the display contents immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped when the display is started on the general-purpose display unit 38a The display control of the general-purpose display unit 38a is controlled so that Accordingly, when the game situation immediately before the supply of the operation power is stopped is resumed when the supply of the operation power is resumed, the special figure display unit 37a and the general-purpose display unit 37a are arranged in a manner corresponding to the restart of the game situation. The display on the diagram display unit 38a can be started.

<96th embodiment>
In this embodiment, the execution contents of the game are different from those of the 88th embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the 88th embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the 88th embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 714 is a front view of the game board 24 in the present embodiment.

  On the game board 24, an inner rail portion 401 and an outer rail portion 402 are attached so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. As a guide rail. The game balls fired from the game ball firing mechanism 27 (see FIG. 507) are guided to the upper part of the game area PA by the guide rail.

  The game board 24 has a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening has a general prize section 411, a first operation section 412, a second operation section 413, a through prize section 414, a distribution prize apparatus 415, a special electric prize apparatus 416, a variable display unit 421, a special figure unit 422, and a general drawing. A unit 423 and the like are provided. The general prize section 411 is provided in total of four, and each other is provided one by one.

  Even if a game ball enters the through winning unit 414, the payout of the game ball is not executed. On the other hand, when a game ball enters any one of the general winning section 411, the first operating section 412, the second operating section 413, the sorting prize apparatus 415, and the special electric prize apparatus 416, the player can use it. Payout of a predetermined number of game balls is executed to increase the number of game media. Specifically, when the game balls enter the general winning section 411, the payout of 10 game balls is executed, and the game balls enter the first operation section 412. When a game ball occurs, payout of three game balls is executed, and when a game ball enters the second operating portion 413, payout of one game ball is executed. When a game ball enters 415, payout of 15 game balls is executed, and when a game ball enters the special prize device 416, the game ball enters the distribution prize device 415. Payout of the same fifteen game balls as when a ball is generated is executed.

  The sorting winning device 415 is provided with a discharge passage region 445b and a V winning passage region 445c as described later, and the game balls that have entered the sorting winning device 415 have the discharging passage region 445b and the V winning passage. The game ball passes through any one of the areas 445c, and even if the game ball passes through any of the discharge passage area 445b and the V winning path area 445c, the same number of (specifically, 15) game balls are paid out. Is done. Further, the number of the prize balls may be arbitrarily set. For example, the first operation section 412 and the second operation section 413 may have the same number of prize balls. The configuration may be larger or smaller than the number of prize balls of the device 416.

  In addition, an out port 24a is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 24, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 24a. In addition, the game board 24 is provided with a large number of nails 24b for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the game ball and various members such as a windmill.

  The variable display unit 421 is provided so as to include the center of the game area PA. Since the periphery of the variable display unit 421 protrudes forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the surface of the game board 24, an area where the game balls fired in the game area PA can flow down is defined. Specifically, in the gaming area PA, an upper area PA1 which is an area above a predetermined height position of the variable display unit 421, and the lower area is continuous with the upper area PA1 below the upper area PA1 and is lower than the variable display unit 421. The left area PA2, which is the left area, the right area PA3, which is continuous with the upper area PA1 below and below the variable display unit 421, and the left area PA2 and the right area PA3, respectively. On the other hand, it is divided into a lower area PA <b> 4, which is an area below the variable display unit 421, which is continuous below the variable display unit 421.

  When the player operates the firing operation device 28 with a rotation amount in the first range that is less than the reference rotation amount as the first firing operation, the game ball is positioned leftward of the lateral center position in the upper area PA1. Flow down. In this case, the game balls flow down in the order of the upper area PA1, the left area PA2, and the lower area PA4. On the other hand, when the player operates the firing operation device 28 with the rotation amount in the second range that is equal to or more than the reference rotation amount as the second firing operation, the upper region PA1 is positioned rightward of the lateral center position. A game ball flows down. In this case, the game balls flow down in the order of the upper area PA1 → the right area PA3 → the lower area PA4. That is, the player can play the game so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2 of the left area PA2 and the right area PA3 by adjusting the amount of rotation operation of the firing operation device 28, and at the same time, adjusts the right operation area. A game can be played so that a game ball flows down PA3. Incidentally, when the firing operation device 28 is operated with the maximum rotation amount, the game ball flows down in the order of the upper area PA1 → the right area PA3 → the lower area PA4.

  The first operating section 412 is provided in the lower area PA4. The first operating portion 412 is opened upward, and no member such as an opening / closing member for preventing game balls from entering the first operating portion 412 is provided. Then, in a situation where the game balls are fired in the same manner, the winning probability to the first operating unit 412 is constant without depending on the game state. In other words, in the first operating unit 412, a game ball flowing down the game area PA toward the first operating unit 412 can always enter. The first operating unit 412 is disposed immediately below the stage 421a formed on the variable display unit 421, and is a game ball that has flowed onto the stage 421a via an induction passage formed on the variable display unit 421. Game balls discharged from the center of the stage 421a in the horizontal direction to the outside of the variable display unit 421 are easy to win the first operating portion 412. The first operation unit 412 is provided with a detection sensor 412a, and the detection sensor 412a detects a game ball that has won the first operation unit 412. The detection sensor 412a is electrically connected to the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, and the presence or absence of a prize in the first operating unit 412 is specified by the main CPU 63 based on the detection result of the detection sensor 412a.

  As described above, the first operating section 412 is provided in the lower area PA4. However, on the upstream side of the first operating section 412 toward the right area PA3, a game ball flowing down the right area PA3 is provided. A regulating nail 24c is provided so as to make it impossible to reach the one operating portion 412. Further, the entrance of the guide passage to the stage 421a is provided for the left area PA2, and is not provided for the right area PA3. With these configurations, when the firing operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2, it is possible to win the first operating portion 412, but the game ball flows down the right area PA3. When the firing operation device 28 is operated so as to perform the prize, it is impossible to win the first operation unit 412. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the regulation nail 24c is not provided or the entrance of the guide passage to the stage 421a is provided in the right area PA3, the game ball flows down the right area PA3. The first operating unit 412 may be configured to be able to win even if the firing operation device 28 is operated.

  The second operating unit 413 is provided in the right area PA3. In other words, the second operating portion 413 cannot win if the firing operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2, and the launch operation is performed so that the game ball flows down the right area PA3. Winning is possible when the device 28 is operated.

  The configuration of the second operation unit 413 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 715 (a) is a vertical cross-sectional view of the second operating portion 413 in a non-guide state. The second operating portion 413 includes a base unit 431 formed with a discharge passage 433 for discharging game balls flowing from the game area PA to the rear of the game board 24, and discharge paths 433 for game balls flowing down the game area PA. And a guiding unit 432 for guiding the user to the vehicle. The entrance 433a of the discharge passage 433 has an opening area equal to or more than one game ball, and is opened toward the front of the pachinko machine 10. A detection sensor 434 is provided on the exit portion 433b side of the discharge passage 433, and the detection sensor 434 detects a game ball that has won the second operating portion 413. The detection sensor 434 is electrically connected to the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, and based on the detection result of the detection sensor 434, the presence or absence of a prize in the second operating unit 413 is specified by the main CPU 63.

  The guiding unit 432 receives a game ball flowing down the area in front of the entrance 433 a in the game area PA from below, guides the received game ball into the discharge passage 433, and into the discharge passage 433. A guide driving unit 436 for displacing the guide member 435 between an initial position where the guide of the game ball is not allowed and a guide position where the guide is enabled, and a situation where the guide member 435 is disposed at the initial position. In the state where the guide member 435 is disposed at the blocking position where the inflow of the game ball to the discharge passage 433 is prevented and the guide member 435 is disposed at the guiding position, the game ball is disposed at the non-blocking position where the flow of the game ball to the discharge passage 433 is not blocked. And a blocking member 437. The guide member 435 and the blocking member 437 are opposed to each other at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction such that the guide member 435 is located below. A transmission unit 438 is provided to transmit the driving force of the guide driving unit 436 to the guide member 435 and the blocking member 437.

  When the guide driving section 436 is in the non-driving state, the guide member 435 is arranged at the initial position by the urging force of the urging means such as a spring (not shown), and the blocking member 437 is arranged at the blocking position. In this case, the guide member 435 and the blocking member 437 are entirely buried in the discharge passage 433 and do not protrude into the game area PA. As a result, the game balls flowing down the area in front of the entrance 433a of the discharge passage 433 in the game area PA are not guided into the discharge passage 433 by the guide member 435 and the blocking member 437, that is, the game balls are moved to the second position. The ball flows down the game area PA without entering the operation section 413. In addition, since the blocking member 437 is arranged at the blocking position, the substantial opening area of the entrance 433a of the discharge passage 433 is less than one game ball. Thereby, in the situation where the guide member 435 is arranged at the initial position, it is possible to reliably prevent the game ball from entering the second operating portion 413.

  When the guide driving section 436 is in the driving state, the guide member 435 and the blocking member 437 are displaced against the urging force of the urging means, and the guide member 435 is arranged at the guiding position and the blocking member 437 is not moved. It is located in the blocking position. FIG. 715 (b) is a vertical cross-sectional view of the second operating portion 413 in the case of the guidance state.

  When the guide member 435 is located at the guide position, the distal end side of the guide member 435 protrudes from the entrance 433a of the discharge passage 433 toward the game area PA. The amount of protrusion is such that a game ball flowing down the area in front of the entrance 433a in the game area PA can be received from below. Since the top surface of the guide member 435 is inclined downward toward the entrance 433 a of the discharge passage 433, the game ball received from below at the front end of the guide member 435 is The user rolls on the upper surface and is guided into the discharge passage 433. When the blocking member 437 is located at the non-blocking position, the blocking member 437 is displaced so that its tip is located above the blocking position. The sphere flows into the discharge passage 433 without interfering with the blocking member 437. As a result, the guide driving unit 436 is driven, so that a game ball flowing down the area in front of the entrance 433a in the game area PA enters the second operating unit 413. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the state in which the guide driving unit 436 is in the non-driving state, the guide member 435 is arranged in the initial position, and the blocking member 437 is arranged in the blocking position is referred to as the non-guiding state of the guiding unit 432 or the second operating unit. A state in which the guide driving unit 436 is in a driving state, the guide member 435 is located in the guiding position, and the blocking member 437 is located in the non-blocking position is a guiding state of the guiding unit 432 or the second operating unit. 413 is called an open state.

  The second operating portion 413 includes a cover member 439 provided so as to face the entrance 433 a of the discharge passage 433 from the front of the pachinko machine 10. The cover member 439 is formed in a gate shape so as to form a vertical passage 439a in a region in front of the entrance 433a in the game area PA, and one of the game balls passing through the region in front of the entrance 433a at the same time. The game ball is provided so as to restrict the movement of the game ball to the front and the lateral direction of the pachinko machine 10. This prevents a plurality of game balls from being simultaneously guided into the discharge passage 433 of the second operating portion 413 when the guiding unit 432 of the second operating portion 413 is in the guiding state, and the above-mentioned operation is prevented. In the guidance state, a game ball passing through the front area of the entrance 433a can be reliably guided into the discharge passage 433. The guide driving unit 436 is electrically connected to the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, and the main CPU 63 controls the driving of the guide driving unit 436.

  As shown in FIG. 714, a through winning section 414 is provided above the second operating section 413 in the right area PA3. That is, when the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2, the through winning unit 414 cannot win, and the launch operation device is set so that the game ball flows down the right area PA3. When 28 is operated, a prize can be won. The through winning portion 414 has a through hole penetrating in the vertical direction. A second operating portion 413 is provided at a position vertically below the through winning portion 414. Further, in the right area PA3, on the downstream side of the second operating portion 413, a special electric winning device 416 and a distribution winning device are provided. 415 are provided. Therefore, the game ball that has won the through winning unit 414 can win the second operating unit 413, the special power winning device 416, or the distribution winning device 415.

  The right side area PA3 in which the second operating part 413 and the through winning part 414 are collectively arranged is defined by the side wall 421b on the left of the variable display unit 421 bulging forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the board of the gaming board 24. The right side is defined by a regulating wall provided on the resin base 21 of the inner frame 13 and protruding forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the board surface of the game board 24. The right side area PA3 is set to have a smaller horizontal dimension than the lower area PA4, and the horizontal dimension is such that it is not possible to arrange the ball entry devices for the game balls in the horizontal direction at the same height position. It has become. As a result, it is possible to limit the flow path of the game ball flowing down the right area PA3 to a predetermined range, and it is easy for the game ball to enter the second operating section 413 and the through winning section 414. .

  In the right area PA3, the arrangement of the plurality of nails 24b on the upstream side of the through winning section 414 is set so as to guide game balls flowing down the right area PA3 to the through winning section 414. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the right side area PA3 easily enters the through winning section 414, and easily enters the second operating section 413 with the easy entry of the through winning section 414. I have. The through winning unit 414 is provided with a detection sensor 414a, and the detection sensor 414a detects a game ball that has won the through winning unit 414. The detection sensor 414a is electrically connected to the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, and the main CPU 63 determines whether or not a prize has entered the through prize unit 414 based on the detection result of the detection sensor 414a.

  The guidance unit 432 of the second operating unit 413 is switched from the non-guidance state to the guidance state based on the winning in the through winning unit 414. More specifically, an internal lottery is performed with a winning in the through winning unit 414 as a trigger, and a general-purpose display unit of a general-purpose unit 423 provided in a lower left corner of the game area PA where a game ball does not pass. At 423a, a variation display of the picture is performed. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is a winning in the guidance execution state, a stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and when the variable display of the pattern on the ordinary figure display unit 423a is ended, the state shifts to the guidance execution state. In the guidance execution state, the guidance unit 432 enters the guidance state in a predetermined manner.

  The general-purpose display unit 423a is configured by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner. In this case, it is impossible to perform a complicated display like the symbol display device 424 on the general symbol display unit 423a, but it is possible to reduce the processing load for controlling the display of the general symbol display unit 423a. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be constituted by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT or a dot matrix display device. In addition, as a pattern displayed on the ordinary figure display unit 423a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, or a plurality of types of colors May be displayed.

  In the general-purpose unit 423, a general-purpose holding display 423b is provided at a position adjacent to the general-purpose display 423a. The number of game balls that have won the through-prize unit 414 is retained up to a maximum of four, and the number of reserves is displayed by turning on the general-purpose reserve display unit 423b. The general-purpose display unit 423a and the general-purpose reserve display unit 423b are electrically connected to the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, and the main CPU 63 executes display control of the general-purpose display unit 423a and the general-purpose reserve display unit 423b. Is done.

  Incidentally, the display range of the ordinary figure display unit 423a is smaller than the display surface of the symbol display device 424. Furthermore, the display range for both the general-purpose display unit 423a and the general-purpose display unit 423b is narrower than the display surface of the symbol display device 424. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the symbol display device 424 more than the ordinary figure display unit 423a and the ordinary figure hold display unit 423b.

  In this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of modes are set as support modes so that the frequency of occurrence of the guidance state of the guidance unit 432 differs. Specifically, in the support mode, the frequency at which the guiding unit 432 is in the guiding state per unit time is relatively high when compared in a situation where the launch of the game ball is continued in the same manner with respect to the gaming area PA. The high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode are set so that the level becomes high and low.

  The high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode have the same probability (specifically, 4/5) of the guidance state winning in the guidance state lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the through winning unit 414. However, in the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the guidance unit 432 is in the guidance state when the guidance state is won is set to be larger than in the low-frequency support mode, and the guidance is performed in one execution of the guidance control. The upper limit guidance period in which the unit 432 is maintained in the guidance state is set long. In this case, when the guidance state is won in the high-frequency support mode and the guidance state of the guidance unit 432 occurs a plurality of times, the closing period from the end of one guidance state to the start of the next guidance state is Is set shorter than one upper limit induction period. Furthermore, the high-frequency support mode is more secure than the low-frequency support mode in that the minimum guide time (i.e., the general-purpose display unit) is ensured after one guidance state lottery is performed and then the next guidance state lottery is performed. 423a) is set to be short.

  As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize to the second operating unit 413 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, there is a higher probability of winning to the first operating unit 412 than in the second operating unit 413, but in the high frequency support mode, the second operating unit 412 is more likely to win. The probability that the winning in the section 413 will occur increases. In the case where a prize is generated in the second operating unit 413, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of balls so much. Can be.

  The configuration for increasing the frequency of the guidance state per unit time in the high frequency support mode to be higher than that in the low frequency support mode is not limited to the above. It is good also as a structure which makes the probability of becoming high. In addition, a securing time secured after one guiding state lottery is performed and then the next guiding state lottery is performed (for example, executed in the general-purpose display unit 423a based on winning in the through winning unit 414). In a configuration in which a plurality of types of (variable display time) are prepared, a shorter securing time is more easily selected in the high frequency support mode than in the low frequency support mode, or the average securing time is set shorter. Good. Further, increasing the number of times the guidance state is executed, lengthening the upper limit guidance period, and shortening the securing time secured after one guidance state lottery is performed after one guidance state lottery is performed. By shortening the average time of the securing time and increasing the winning probability, by applying any one condition or any combination of conditions, the advantage of the high frequency support mode with respect to the low frequency support mode is improved. Good.

  A winning lottery is performed based on the winning of the first operating unit 412 or the second operating unit 413. When the winning lottery is performed, the special figure unit 422 displays the variation of the picture, and finally, the result corresponding to the result of the winning lottery is displayed.

  The special figure unit 422 is provided at a lower right corner of the game area PA at a position where the game ball does not flow down in front. Further, the special figure unit 422 is provided at a position where the front door frame 14 can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 52 even when the front door frame 14 is disposed at the closed position. Therefore, the administrator of the gaming hall can view the display contents of the various display units 425 to 429 provided in the special figure unit 422 without having to open the gaming machine main body 12 and open the front door frame 14. Becomes

  FIG. 714 (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the special figure unit 422. More specifically, the special figure unit 422 is provided with a first special figure display section 425 and a second special figure display section 426. In the first special figure display unit 425, the winning pattern is displayed by performing a winning lottery based on the winning of the first operating unit 412, and finally a result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. Is done. Further, in the second special figure display unit 426, a winning lottery is performed based on the occurrence of a prize in the second operating unit 413, and a variation display of the pattern is performed, and finally a result corresponding to the lottery result. Is displayed. One of the first special figure display unit 425 and the second special figure display unit 426 starts the variation display of the pattern, and the variation display of the pattern displays a predetermined result and ends until one of the game times. Equivalent to times.

  The first special figure display unit 425 includes seven display segments 425a. Each of these display segments 425a is formed in a rod shape, and has a light emitting body such as an LED inside. These seven display segments 425a are arranged such that the first special figure display unit 425 becomes a so-called seven-segment display. The first special figure display unit 425 is electrically connected to the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, and the main CPU 63 individually controls lighting and extinguishing of each display segment 425a. Although it is impossible to perform a complicated display like the symbol display device 424 in the first special figure display unit 425, it is possible to reduce the processing load for controlling the display of the first special figure display unit 425. .

  Note that the display segments 425a may be formed in a circular shape, and the display segments 425a may be arranged in a linear or circular shape. Further, the first special figure display unit 425 may be configured by another type of display device such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT or a dot matrix display device. Also, as the pattern displayed on the first special figure display unit 425, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, or a plurality of types Is displayed.

  The second special map display section 426 includes seven display segments 426a. Each of these display segments 426a is formed in a rod shape, and has a light emitting body such as an LED inside. These seven display segments 426a are arranged so that the second special figure display unit 426 becomes a so-called seven-segment display. The second special figure display unit 426 is electrically connected to the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, and the main CPU 63 individually controls turning on and off of each display segment 426 a. Although it is impossible to perform a complicated display like the symbol display device 424 on the second special figure display unit 426, the processing load for controlling the display of the second special figure display unit 426 can be reduced. .

  Note that the display segments 426a may be formed in a circular shape, and the display segments 426a may be arranged in a linear or circular shape. Further, the second special figure display unit 426 may be configured by another type of display device such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT or a dot matrix display device. Further, as the pattern displayed on the second special figure display unit 426, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, or a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed Is displayed.

  In the special figure unit 422, a first special figure reservation display section 427 is provided at a position adjacent to the first special figure display section 425. The number of awarded game balls in the first operating unit 412 is reserved up to a maximum of four, and the number of the reserved balls is displayed by lighting the first special figure reserved display unit 427. In addition, a second special figure reserve display section 428 is provided at a position adjacent to the second special figure display section 426. The number of game balls winning in the second operation unit 413 is retained up to a maximum of four, and the retained number is displayed by turning on the second special figure reservation display unit 428. The first special figure reservation display section 427 and the second special figure reservation display section 428 are electrically connected to the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, and the first special figure reservation display section 427 and the second special figure reservation section are controlled by the main CPU 63. The display control of the hold display unit 428 is executed.

  In the special figure unit 422, a special display section 429 is provided at a position adjacent to the second special figure display section 426. When the open / close execution mode in which the special prize winning device 416 is opened is started, the special display unit 429 is display-controlled so as to be in a predetermined display state, the open / close execution mode ends and a new game starts. In such a case, the display of the special display unit 429 is controlled so that the predetermined display state ends and the light is turned off.

  The special display section 429 includes seven display segments 429a. Each of these display segments 429a is formed in a rod shape, and has a light emitting body such as an LED inside. These seven display segments 429a are arranged such that the special display portion 429 becomes a so-called seven-segment display. The special display unit 429 is electrically connected to the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, and the main CPU 63 individually controls lighting and extinguishing of each display segment 429a. Although it is impossible to perform a complicated display like the symbol display device 424 on the special display unit 429, the processing load for controlling the display of the special display unit 429 can be reduced.

  Note that the display segments 429a may be formed in a circular shape, and the display segments 429a may be arranged in a linear or circular shape. Further, the special display unit 429 may be configured by another type of display device such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT or a dot matrix display device. The contents displayed on the special display portion 429 include a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, or a plurality of types of colors. A configuration to be displayed can be considered.

  The display ranges of the first special figure display unit 425 and the second special figure display unit 426 are smaller than the display surface of the symbol display device 424. In addition, the entire display range of the first special figure display unit 425, the second special figure display unit 426, the first special figure reservation display unit 427, the second special figure reservation display unit 428, and the special display unit 429 is also displayed in a symbol pattern. The range is smaller than the display surface of the device 424. Thereby, the first special figure display unit 425, the second special figure display unit 426, the first special figure reservation display unit 427, the second special figure reservation display unit 428, and the game to the symbol display device 424 more than the special display unit 429. It is possible to increase the degree of attention of the person.

  In the case where the variation display of the pattern is performed on the first special figure display unit 425 or the second special figure display unit 426, that is, when the game round is being executed, the symbol display unit 424 provided in the variable display unit 421 adjusts to that. The display effect is performed. In addition, in the symbol display device 424, not only the display effect triggered by winning a prize to the first operating unit 412 or the second operating unit 413, but also the display effect during the opening / closing execution mode which shifts after a jackpot result or the like. A display effect or the like in the distribution execution mode, which is shifted after the small hit result, is performed. In addition, in the opening / closing execution mode, the distribution execution mode, and the high-frequency support mode, a right-hit notification image for notifying that the game ball should be fired aiming at the right area PA3 is displayed on the symbol display device 424. .

  The symbol display device 424 is configured as a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 82. The symbol display device 424 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, but may be another display device having a display surface such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, and may be a dot matrix display device. You may.

  The contents of the display effect performed by the symbol display device 424 during the execution of the game round will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 716 is an explanatory diagram for describing display contents of the symbol display device 424 when a game round is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 716 (a), on the display surface of the symbol display device 424, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 of an upper row, a middle row, and a lower row are set as a plurality of display areas. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is configured by arranging a main symbol and a sub symbol in a predetermined order. In other words, when the game round is executed, the symbol is fluctuated and displayed using the entire display surface of the symbol display device 424.

  FIG. 717 is an explanatory diagram for describing a main symbol and a sub symbol which are variably displayed in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. As shown in FIGS. 717 (a) to 717 (j), the pattern, which is a kind of pattern, includes nine types of main patterns to which numbers “1” to “9” are attached, and a shell-shaped pattern. And a sub-symbol consisting of More specifically, a main symbol is configured by attaching numbers “1” to “9” to nine types of character symbols such as an octopus.

  As shown in FIG. 716 (b), in the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in descending numerical order, and a sub symbol is one between each main symbol. Are arranged one by one. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and the main symbol “9” and the main symbol “1” are arranged. , A main symbol of “4” is additionally arranged, and one sub symbol is arranged between each of the main symbols. That is, only the middle symbol row Z2 is composed of 20 symbols with 10 main symbols arranged. Then, on the display surface, the symbols in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with a periodicity. The symbol display device 424 is configured to stop and display three symbols in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, and as a result, a total of nine (3 × 3) symbols are stopped and displayed. As shown in FIG. 716 (a), five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right down line L4, and a right up line L5 are set on the symbol display device 424. .

  When symbols are displayed on the display surface in a fluctuating manner based on the winning of the first operating unit 412 or the second operating unit 413, the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are scrolled in a predetermined direction with a periodicity. Is started to be displayed. Basically, the display is switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and finally a predetermined symbol is statically displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Is terminated. In addition, when the variation display of the symbol ends, if the result of the internal lottery is the 15R jackpot result described later, a combination of “7” symbols is formed on any of the activated lines, and the result of the internal lottery is described later. If the result is a 6R jackpot result, the same odd symbol combination other than the "7" symbol is formed on any of the activated lines, and the result of the internal lottery is one of the first to third small hit results described later. In the case of, the same combination of even symbols is formed on any of the activated lines.

  As described above, in the configuration in which the symbol variation is displayed in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the expected effect is set as the display effect of the symbol display device 424 when the game round is executed. The expected effect is a display state for causing the player to think that the variable display state is likely to be a jackpot result at a stage before the stop result is derived and displayed after the variable display of the symbol is started on the symbol display device 424. Say. Two types of expected effects are set: a reach display and a notice display for expecting the occurrence of the reach display and the occurrence of the jackpot at the stage before the reach display occurs.

  In the reach display, a combination of reach symbols is displayed by stopping and displaying the same type of symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 among the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the remaining middle symbols are displayed in that state. The display state in which the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the column Z2 is included. In addition, in the state where the combination of the reach symbols is displayed as described above, while performing the variation display of the symbols in the remaining symbol rows, and performing a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on the background screen, , A reach effect is displayed by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface after reducing or hiding the combination of the reach symbols. If it is a game time that results in a big hit result or a small hit result, a symbol of the same type as the symbol forming the combination of the reach symbols is stopped and displayed on the reach line in the middle symbol row Z2, and the big hit result and the small hit result are displayed. If it is a game time that does not become any of them, a symbol of a type different from the symbol forming the combination of the reach symbols is stopped and displayed on the reach line in the middle symbol row Z2.

  In the notice display, in the situation where symbols are variably displayed in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 after the symbol variable display is started in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, or in some symbol columns Z1 to Z3. In a situation where symbols are displayed variably in a plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 as Z3, a mode for displaying a character separately from the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is included. Further, the background screen may have a predetermined mode different from the previous mode, or the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 may have a predetermined mode different from the previous mode. Such a notice display may occur at any of the game times when the reach display is performed and when the reach display is not performed, but the display when the reach display is performed is higher than when the reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with probability.

  When either the 6R jackpot result or the 15R jackpot result is selected in the internal lottery executed based on the winning in the first operating unit 412 or the second operating unit 413, the game round corresponding to the jackpot result ends. Later, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode. In the open / close execution mode, it is possible to win a prize in the special power prize winning device 416. As shown in FIG. 714, the special electric winning device 416 is provided below the second operating portion 413 and above the sorting winning device 415 in the right area PA3. That is, the special power winning device 416 cannot win when the firing operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2, and the launch operation device is set so that the game ball flows down the right region PA3. When 28 is operated, a prize can be won.

  As shown in FIG. 714, the special winning award device 416 includes a large winning opening 416a formed to have a size that allows a game ball to pass therethrough, and a closed state in which a game ball cannot pass through the large winning opening 416a. And a special power-side opening / closing member 416b for switching to an open state through which game balls can pass. The special power side opening / closing member 416b is opened by being driven by a special power drive unit 416c through a link mechanism (not shown). The special prize winning device 416 is provided with a game ball passage so that the special winning opening 416a serves as an entrance portion. After being detected by 416d, it is discharged to the rear of the game board 24. The special power winning detection sensor 416d is electrically connected to the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, and the main CPU 63 determines whether or not the special power winning device 416 has won based on the detection result of the special power winning detection sensor 416d. The drive unit 416c for special power is electrically connected to the MPU 62 of the main controller 60, and the main CPU 63 controls the drive of the drive unit 416c for special power.

  In the opening / closing execution mode, a plurality of round games (specifically, 5, 6, 8, 14, or 16 times) are executed. The round game is continued until one of the following conditions is satisfied: the number of times of opening and closing the special power prize device 416 reaches the upper limit number, and the game balls of a predetermined upper limit prize number win the special power prize device 416. It is a game to play. In this embodiment, the opening and closing of the special power winning device 416 is performed once in one round game, and the open duration in each round game is set to 29 seconds. In addition, the upper limit winning number to the special power winning device 416 is set to ten. In the situation where the launch operation device 28 is operated by the player, the game ball launching mechanism 27 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area PA every 0.6 seconds. Is set to a time longer than the product of the launch cycle of the game ball and the upper limit winning number of one round game. Therefore, in each round game, it can be expected that more than the maximum number of winning balls will be won in the special winning device 416.

  When any one of the first small hit result to the third small hit result is selected by the internal lottery executed based on the winning in the second operation unit 413, after the game round corresponding to the small hit result is completed. Move to the distribution execution mode. In the distribution execution mode, it is possible to win the distribution prize device 415.

  As shown in FIG. 714, the distribution prize winning device 415 is provided at a position below the special power prize winning device 416 in the right area PA3. That is, the distribution prize device 415 cannot win when the firing operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2, and the launch operation is performed so that the game ball flows down the right area PA3. Winning is possible when the device 28 is operated.

  The configuration of the distribution winning device 415 will be described with reference to FIG. 718 in addition to FIG. FIG. 718 is a longitudinal sectional view for explaining the internal configuration of the sorting prize winning device 415.

  As shown in FIG. 714, the distribution prize winning device 415 includes a distribution entrance 441 large enough to allow a game ball to pass through, and a closed state where a game ball cannot pass through the distribution entrance 441. A distribution side opening / closing member 442 for switching to an open state in which a ball can pass is provided. The distribution side opening / closing member 442 is opened by being driven by a distribution entrance driving unit 443 through a link mechanism (not shown). The distribution entrance drive unit 443 is electrically connected to the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, and the main CPU 63 executes drive control of the distribution entrance drive unit 443.

  The game ball that has won the distribution entrance 441 is led out to a branch passage 445 formed in the base body 444 of the distribution winning device 415, as shown in FIG. The branch passage 445 includes an upstream passage region 445a in which the passage direction is inclined downward in the horizontal direction from an entrance portion of the branch passage 445 to an intermediate position of the branch passage 445, and the upstream passage region 445a. And a discharge passage area 445b which is continuous with the downstream end of the discharge passage area and is set so that the passage direction is vertically downward. And a V winning path area 445c for guiding the ball. In this case, since the dimension of the upstream passage area 445a in the direction orthogonal to the passage direction is equal to or more than one game ball and less than two game balls, the size in the direction orthogonal to the passage direction is reduced. The game balls are prevented from passing through the upstream passage area 445a in a state where a plurality of game balls are arranged. Therefore, a plurality of gaming balls are prevented from simultaneously reaching the branch position to the V winning passage area 445c in the discharge passage area 445b.

  A switching piece 446 for guiding a game ball flowing into the discharge passage area 445b to the V winning passage area 445c is provided at a branch point of the discharge passage area 445b to the V winning passage area 445c. The switching piece 446 is rotatably supported in a region opposite to the V winning passage region 445c on the basis of the discharge passage region 445b in the base body 444, and is entirely retracted outside the discharge passage region 445b. The position can be displaced between a position and a V guidance position protruding into the discharge passage area 445b. The driving force of the switching drive unit 447 is transmitted to the switching piece 446 through a transmission unit (not shown). When the switching drive unit 447 is in the non-drive state, the switching piece 446 is disposed at the retracted position by the urging force of an urging means such as a spring (not shown). The switching piece 446 is displaced against the urging force and is arranged at the V guidance position. The switching driving unit 447 is electrically connected to the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, and the main CPU 63 controls the driving of the switching driving unit 447.

  When the switching piece 446 is located at the evacuation position, the game ball that has flowed into the branch passage 445 flows down the discharge passage region 445b without being guided to the V winning passage region 445c. Then, the game ball is discharged to the rear of the game board 24 after being detected by the count detection sensor 448 provided downstream of the branch position by the switching piece 446 in the discharge passage area 445b. The count detection sensor 448 is electrically connected to the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, and based on the detection result of the count detection sensor 448, the presence or absence of detection of a game ball by the count detection sensor 448 is specified by the main CPU 63.

  On the other hand, when the switching piece 446 is located at the V guidance position, the game ball flowing into the branch passage 445 is received by the switching piece 446 from below. The upper surface of the switching piece 446 in a state where the switching piece 446 is located at the V guidance position is inclined downward toward the V winning path area 445c. Thus, the game ball received from below by the switching piece 446 flows into the V winning path area 445c by its own weight, and flows down the V winning path area 445c. Then, the game ball is discharged to the rear of the game board 24 after being detected by the V winning detection sensor 449 provided in the V winning passage area 445c. The V winning detection sensor 449 is electrically connected to the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, and the main CPU 63 determines whether or not a game ball passes through the V winning passage area 445c based on the detection result of the V winning detection sensor 449. Is done.

  When the distribution side opening / closing member 442 is in the open state, the period in which the distribution state is maintained in the open state is fixed at 10 seconds, which is a period longer than the firing cycle of the game balls, and the distribution is performed in the distribution execution mode. The upper limit winning number of game balls that can enter the winning device 415 is constant at 10. In a situation where the shooting operation device 28 is operated by the player, the driving of the game ball firing mechanism 27 is controlled so that one game ball is fired toward the game area PA in 0.6 seconds. The game ball flowing down the right area PA3 reaches the position of the distribution side opening / closing member 442 unless it enters the second operating portion 413 or the special electric winning device 416 on the way. Then, when the distribution side opening / closing member 442 is in the open state, if the launch of the game ball is continued so that the game ball flows down to the distribution prize device 415, the distribution prize device 415 has an upper limit. It becomes possible to make more game balls win.

  On the other hand, the switching piece 446 is disposed from the retracted position to the V guidance position at a timing two seconds after the timing at which the distribution side opening / closing member 442 is in the open state, and thereafter, is switched to the V guidance position for 12 seconds. Will be retained. Then, when 12 seconds have elapsed, the vehicle returns from the V guidance position to the retreat position. In this case, in the situation where the launch operation device 28 is operated by the player as described above, the game ball launching mechanism 27 controls the drive so that one game ball is launched toward the game area PA in 0.6 sec. Therefore, at the timing when the switching piece 446 is arranged at the V guiding position, the number of winnings to the distribution winning device 415 has not yet reached the upper limit number of winnings in the distribution execution mode, and the distribution side opening / closing member 442 has The open state is maintained. In addition, as described above, the game ball flowing down the right area PA3 reaches the location of the distribution side opening / closing member 442 unless the ball enters the second operating portion 413 or the special winning device 416 on the way. Therefore, when the distribution side opening / closing member 442 is in the open state, if the game balls are continuously fired so that the game balls flow down to the distribution prize winning device 415, the distribution side opening / closing member 442 becomes The switching piece 446 is located at the V guidance position at the timing when the game ball that has won the sorting prize winning device 415 reaches the position of the switching piece 446 two seconds after the opening state. Therefore, in the distribution execution mode, the game ball is basically detected by the V winning detection sensor 449.

  Regardless of whether a game ball is detected by the count detection sensor 448 or a game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 449, payout of the same number of prize balls corresponding to the sorting prize device 415 is executed. Is done. Further, when a game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 449 in the distribution execution mode, the open / close execution mode occurs after the distribution execution mode. On the other hand, when the distribution execution mode ends without the game ball being detected by the V winning detection sensor 449, the opening / closing execution mode does not occur.

  Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The main CPU 63 uses various kinds of counter information in the game to perform a winning lottery, a setting of the display of the special figure display units 425 and 426, a setting of the symbol display of the symbol display device 424, a setting of the display of the ordinary figure display unit 423a, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 719, a winning random number counter C1 used for a lottery of a hit occurrence, a type counter C2 used for determining a big hit type and a small hit type, a symbol display A reach random number counter C3 used for reach generation lottery when the device 424 deviates and fluctuates, a random number initial value counter CINI used for setting an initial value of the hit random number counter C1, a special figure display unit 425, 426, and a symbol display device 424. And a variation type counter CS for determining a display continuation period of the number of times of game. Further, a general-purpose accessory opening counter C4 used for a lottery to determine whether or not the guidance unit 432 of the second operating unit 413 is in the guidance execution state is used. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in various counter areas 65b of the main RAM 65.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value every time the counter is updated, and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals. The information corresponding to the hit random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the special figure holding area provided in the main RAM 65 when a prize occurs in the first operating unit 412 or the second operating unit 413. 451 is stored. The special figure reservation area 451 includes a first special figure reservation area 452, a second special figure reservation area 453, and a special figure execution area 454.

  The first special map reservation area 452 includes a first area 452a, a second area 452b, a third area 452c, and a fourth area 452d, and a winning random number counter C1, Each numerical information of the type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in any one of the areas 452a to 452d as the reservation information on the special figure side. In this case, the first area 452a, the second area 452b, the third area 452c, and the third area 452d are displayed in the first area 452a to the fourth area 452d when a winning in the first operating unit 412 occurs continuously plural times. Each piece of numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of the four areas 452d. Since the four areas 452a to 452d are provided in this manner, up to four winning histories of gaming balls in the first operating section 412 are stored on hold. It should be noted that the number that can be held in the first special figure holding area 452 is not limited to four and is arbitrary, and may be another number such as two, three or five or more. , May be singular.

  The second special map reservation area 453 includes a first area 453a, a second area 453b, a third area 453c, and a fourth area 453d, and a winning random number counter C1 according to a winning history of the second operation unit 413. Each numerical information of the type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in any of the areas 453a to 453d as the reservation information on the special figure side. In this case, the first area 453a, the second area 453b, the third area 453c, and the third area 453d are displayed in the first area 453a to the fourth area 453d when a winning in the second operating unit 413 occurs continuously plural times. Numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of the four areas 453d. By providing the four areas 453a to 453d in this manner, up to four winning histories of the game balls to the second operating unit 413 are held and stored. It should be noted that the number that can be held in the second special figure holding area 453 is not limited to four and is arbitrary, and may be another number such as two, three or five or more. , May be singular.

  The execution area 454 for the special figure is an area in which, when starting the variable display in any one of the special figure display units 425 and 426, the hold information of the target for performing the determination as to whether the special figure is correct or not or the type is stored. It is. Specifically, when the variable display of the first special figure display unit 425 is started, the hold information stored in the first area 452a of the first special figure hold area 452 moves to the special figure execution area 454. Is done. On the other hand, when the variable display of the second special figure display unit 426 is started, the suspension information stored in the first area 453a of the second special figure reservation area 453 is moved to the execution area 454 for the special figure. In the following description, the hold information stored in the first special figure holding area 452 and the hold information moved from the first special figure holding area 452 to the special figure execution area 454 are stored on the first special figure side. The hold information stored in the second special figure holding area 453 and the hold information moved from the second special figure holding area 453 to the execution area 454 for the special figure are called the second special figure side hold information. .

  The information corresponding to the general-purpose part opening counter C4 is stored in the general-purpose holding area 455 provided in the main RAM 65 when a prize is generated in the through prize part 414. The public figure holding area 455 includes a first area 455a, a second area 455b, a third area 455c, and a fourth area 455d. Is stored in one of the areas 455a to 455d as the reservation information on the general figure side. In this case, the first area 455a, the second area 455b, the third area 455c, and the fourth area 455a are provided in the first area 455a to the fourth area 455d in a case where a prize in the through prize section 414 is continuously generated plural times. Numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of the area 455d. By providing the four areas 455a to 455d in this manner, up to four winning histories of gaming balls in the through winning unit 414 are stored on hold. It should be noted that the number of items that can be held and stored in the ordinary figure holding area 455 is not limited to four, but may be any number, and may be another number such as two, three, or five or more. It may be.

  An execution area 456 for general drawing is provided in the general drawing holding area 455. The execution area 456 for general drawing indicates that when the variable display is started on the general figure display unit 423a, the holding information of the target for performing the guidance state lottery for determining whether the guidance unit 432 is to be in the guidance state is displayed. This is the area that is stored. Specifically, when the variable display on the general-purpose display section 423a is started, the hold information stored in the first area 455a of the general-purpose hold area 455 is moved to the general-purpose execution area 456.

  The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 will be described in detail.

  First, the general-purpose object opening counter C4 will be described. The general electric appliance open counter C4 is configured to be incremented by one in order within the range of 0 to 250, and to return to “0” after reaching the maximum value. The general-purpose item opening counter C4 is updated periodically, and is stored in the general-purpose holding area 455 of the main RAM 65 at the timing when the game ball wins in the through winning unit 414. Then, at a predetermined timing, a guidance state lottery for determining whether or not to control the guidance unit 432 to the guidance state based on the stored value of the general purpose electrical appliance opening counter C4 is performed. As described above, the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode are set as the support mode of the guidance unit 432 (that is, the support mode of the second operation unit 413), and the guidance state of the guidance unit 432 (the second operation unit 413) is set. Is controlled in a manner corresponding to the type of the support mode at that time.

  Next, the hit random number counter C1 will be described. The winning random number counter C1 is configured to be added one by one in the range of 0 to 9999, and to return to “0” after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the hit random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the hit random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the hit random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 9999). The winning random number counter C1 is updated periodically, and is stored in the special figure reservation area 451 of the main RAM 65 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating unit 412 or the second operating unit 413. Then, using the stored value of the hit random number counter C1, a hit / fail judgment process is performed.

  The value of the random number to be won at the time of the success / failure determination processing is stored in the main ROM 64 as a success / failure table. As a win / fail table, a win / fail table 461 for the first special figure is provided corresponding to the hold information on the first special figure side, and a win / fail table for the second special figure is provided corresponding to the hold information on the second special figure side. 462 are provided. Further, in the present embodiment, as the winning / rejecting lottery mode, there is not a plurality of types of modes in which the probability of the jackpot result is different, but the probability of the jackpot result is constant with the same setting value. One type of mode is set.

  FIG. 720 (a) is an explanatory view for explaining the hit / fail table 461 of the first special figure, and FIG. 720 (b) is an explanatory view for explaining the hit / fail table 462 of the second special figure.

  As shown in FIG. 720 (a) and FIG. 720 (b), the hit result of the hit determination process includes a big hit result, a small hit result, and a miss result. The jackpot result is an opportunity to shift to the opening and closing execution mode in which the special power winning device 416 is controlled to be opened and closed, and also to a success or failure result that can be an opportunity to shift to the support mode. The small hit result is a trigger for shifting to the distribution execution mode in which the distribution prize device 415 is controlled to be opened and closed. On the other hand, if no V prize is generated in the distribution execution mode, the result is a pass / fail result that does not trigger a shift between the open / close execution mode and the support mode. The departure result is a pass / fail result that does not trigger a shift to the opening / closing execution mode and the distribution execution mode, and also does not trigger a shift to the support mode.

  As shown in FIG. 720 (a), in the hit / fail table 461 of the first special figure, a big hit result and a miss result are set, but a small hit result is not set as the judgment result of the hit judgment processing. Further, the pachinko machine 10 has the setting states of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”, but the higher the setting value, the higher the probability of the jackpot result, and the higher the setting value, the lower the probability of the off-set result. It is set as follows.

  More specifically, 50 is set as the number of pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is a big hit result in the “setting 1” that is the lowest set value, and numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is a deviating result is set. Is set to 9950. Also, in the “setting 2” which is a setting value one step higher than the “setting 1”, 52 pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit result are set and the hit random number counter which is a deviating result is set. 9948 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of C1. In the "setting 3" which is a setting value which is one step higher than the "setting 2", 54 pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit result are set and the hit random number counter which is a deviating result is set. 9946 are set as the number of numerical information of C1. In the "setting 4" which is a setting value one step higher than the "setting 3", 56 pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit result are set, and a hit random number counter which is a result of a departure is set. 9944 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of C1. In the "setting 5" which is a setting value one level higher than the "setting 4", 58 pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit result are set, and the hit random number counter which is a result of a miss is set. 9942 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of C1. Further, in the “setting 6” which is the highest setting value, 60 pieces are set as the number of pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit result, and the number of pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a departure result is set. 9940 are set.

  In other words, the probability of a jackpot result in the “setting 1” triggered by the hold information on the first special figure side is 1/200. In the “setting 2”, the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the hold information on the first special map side is about 1/192. In “Setting 3”, the probability of a jackpot result being triggered by the hold information on the first special map side is about 1/185. In “Setting 4”, the probability of a jackpot result being triggered by the hold information on the first special map side is about 1/179. In “Setting 5”, the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the hold information on the first special map side is about 1/172. In “Setting 6”, the probability of a jackpot result being triggered by the hold information on the first special map side is about 1/167. The numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a jackpot result may be collectively set so as to be a serial number, and may be set so as to be dispersed so that at least part or all does not become a serial number. Configuration.

  As shown in FIG. 720 (b), a big hit result, a small hit result, and a miss result are set in the hit result table 462 of the second special map as the determination result of the hit determination process. Further, the pachinko machine 10 has the setting states of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”, but the higher the setting value, the higher the probability of the jackpot result, and the higher the setting value, the lower the probability of the off-set result. It is set as follows. On the other hand, the probability of the small hit result is set to be the same regardless of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”.

  Specifically, 50 is set as the number of pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit result in the “setting 1” which is the lowest set value, and the numerical value of the hit random number counter C1 which is a small hit result is set. 2000 is set as the number of pieces of information, and 7950 pieces are set as the number of pieces of numerical information of the random number counter C1 which is a departure result. In the “setting 2”, which is a setting value one level higher than the “setting 1”, 52 pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit result are set, and the hit random number which is a small hit result is set. The number of pieces of numerical information of the counter C1 is set to 2000, and the number of pieces of numerical information of the random number counter C1 that is a departure result is set to 7948. In the "setting 3" which is one step higher than the "setting 2", 54 pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit result are set, and the random number which is a small hit result is set. 2000 is set as the number of numerical information of the counter C1, and 7946 is set as the number of numerical information of the random number counter C1 as a hit result. In the “setting 4” which is a setting value one step higher than the “setting 3”, 56 pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit result are set, and the hit random number which is a small hit result is set. The number of pieces of numerical information of the counter C1 is set to 2000, and the number of pieces of numerical information of the random number counter C1 which is a departure result is set to 7944. In the “setting 5” which is a setting value one step higher than the “setting 4”, 58 pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit result are set, and the random number which is a small hit result is set. 2000 is set as the number of numerical information of the counter C1, and 7942 is set as the number of numerical information of the random number counter C1 which is a departure result. In the “setting 6” that is the highest setting value, 60 pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is a big hit result are set, and the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is a small hit result is set. Is set, and 7,940 pieces are set as the number of numerical value information of the random number counter C1 which is a departure result.

  In other words, the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side in “setting 1” is 1/200, which is the same as the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the hold information on the first special figure side. In the “setting 2”, the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the hold information of the second special figure side is about 1/192 which is the same as the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the hold information of the first special figure side. In “Setting 3”, the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the hold information of the second special figure side is about 1/185, which is the same as the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the hold information of the first special figure side. In "Setting 4", the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the hold information of the second special figure side is about 1/179, which is the same as the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the hold information of the first special figure side. In “Setting 5”, the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the hold information of the second special figure side is about 1/172 which is the same as the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the hold information of the first special figure side. In “Setting 6”, the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the hold information of the second special figure side is about 1/167, which is the same as the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the hold information of the first special figure side.

  The probability of the small hit result being triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side is 1/5, which is the same for any of "Setting 1" to "Setting 6". The probability of the small hit result is higher than the probability of the big hit result in any of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”. The numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a jackpot result may be collectively set so as to be a serial number, and may be set so as to be dispersed so that at least part or all does not become a serial number. Configuration. Further, the numerical value information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a small hit result may be collectively set so as to be a serial number, or at least a part or all may be set so as to be dispersed so as not to be a serial number. May be adopted.

  As described above, the higher the set value is, the higher the probability that the jackpot result will be obtained in the case where the hold information of the first special figure side and the case where the hold information of the second special figure side triggers. By being set, a higher set value is more advantageous for the player. In addition, the opening and closing execution mode is a period in which the amount of increase in the number of balls held by the player per unit time is the largest, and the probability of the jackpot result that triggers the transition of the opening and closing execution mode changes according to the set value, It is possible to increase the player's attention to the set value.

  In such a configuration in which the probability of a large hit result varies according to the set value, the probability of a small hit result is the same regardless of any of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”. As a result, it is possible for the player to limit the target to which the set value is to be estimated to the jackpot result, thereby making it difficult to estimate the set value.

  In addition, in the hit / reject table 462 of the second special map, no matter which setting value is set, the winning random number counter C1 assigned to the result deviates from the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 assigned to the small hit result. In the configuration in which the number of numerical information of the random number counter C1 is larger, the variation of the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 assigned to the big hit result due to the set value is changed by the numerical information of the random number counter C1 assigned to the departure result. Is absorbed by the variation in the number. From this point, it is possible to make it difficult to estimate the set value.

  Next, the type counter C2 will be described. The type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by one in order within the range of 0 to 29, and to return to “0” after reaching the maximum value. The type counter C2 is updated periodically, and is stored in the special figure reservation area 451 of the main RAM 65 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating unit 412 or the second operating unit 413. Then, a type determination process is performed using the stored value of the type counter C2.

  The type determination process using the type counter C2 is performed in each of a case where a big hit result and a small hit result are obtained in the hit / fail determination process. That is, in the present embodiment, a plurality of types of large hit results are set and a plurality of types of small hit results are set. Then, when the jackpot result is selected in the hit determination process, the type of the jackpot result is selected using the jackpot type table 463 and the type counter C2 stored in the main ROM 64 in advance. When the small hit result is selected in the hit / fail judgment processing, the type of the small hit result is selected using the type table 464 for small hits and the type counter C2 stored in the main ROM 64 in advance. Hereinafter, the types of the big hit results and the small hit results will be described.

  FIG. 721 (a) is referred to in order to sort the type of the big hit result when the big hit result is selected in the hit / fail judgment processing triggered by the hold information on the first special figure side or the hold information on the second special figure side. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the type table 463 for big hits. FIG. 721 (b) is an explanatory diagram for describing the contents of each of a plurality of types of jackpot results.

  The jackpot type table 463 is referred to when a jackpot result is selected in the hit determination processing triggered by the first special map hold information, and is determined by the second special map hold information. It is referred to when a jackpot result is selected in the processing. That is, the case where the jackpot result is selected in the hit determination process triggered by the hold information for the first special figure, and the case where the jackpot result is selected in the hit determination process triggered by the hold information for the second special figure. In any case, the same jackpot type table 463 is referred to.

  As shown in FIG. 721 (a), in the jackpot type table 463, a 6R jackpot result and a 15R jackpot result are set as the types of jackpot results. The numerical information of the type counter C2 of “0 to 26” corresponds to the 6R jackpot result, and the numerical information of the type counter C2 of “27 to 29” corresponds to the 15R jackpot result. That is, when a jackpot result is selected in the hit / fail judgment processing, a 6R jackpot result is selected with a probability of 9/10, and a 15R jackpot result is selected with a probability of 1/10.

  In the case of the 6R jackpot result, as shown in FIG. 721 (b), six round games occur in the subsequent opening / closing execution mode. After the open / close execution mode ends, the high-frequency support mode is set regardless of the support mode before the start of the open / close execution mode. In the high frequency support mode, when the hold information that triggered the occurrence of the 6R jackpot result is the hold information of the first special figure side, the game times triggered by the hold information of the second special figure side are activated. If it has been executed once, it ends and shifts to the low frequency support mode. As described above, the first to fourth areas 453a to 453d are provided in the second special figure holding area 453, and four pieces of the holding information on the second special figure side can be held and stored. Therefore, after the opening / closing execution mode ends, in the situation in which the first game round triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side is executed, there are four second operation units 413 controlled in the high frequency support mode. By entering the game ball, it becomes possible to execute the game five times triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side after the open / close execution mode ends.

  On the other hand, if the hold information that triggered the occurrence of the 6R jackpot result is the hold information on the second special figure side, the game times triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side have been executed five times. In this case, the process ends and shifts to the low frequency support mode. As described above, the first to fourth areas 453a to 453d are provided in the second special figure holding area 453, and four pieces of the holding information on the second special figure side can be held and stored. Therefore, in the situation where the fifth game round triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side is executed after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the second operating unit 413 controlled in the high frequency support mode in the situation where the fifth game round is executed. By entering the game balls, nine times of game times triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side can be executed nine times after the open / close execution mode ends.

  In the case of the 15R jackpot result, as shown in FIG. 721 (b), 15 round games occur in the subsequent opening / closing execution mode. Therefore, the 15R jackpot result is more advantageous than the 6R jackpot result at least in terms of the number of round game executions. After the open / close execution mode ends, the high-frequency support mode is set regardless of the support mode before the start of the open / close execution mode. In the high frequency support mode, even if the hold information that triggered the occurrence of the 15R jackpot result is either the hold information on the first special figure side or the hold information on the second special figure side, the second special figure side When the number of game times triggered by the hold information has been executed five times, the game ends and the mode is shifted to the low frequency support mode. As described above, the first to fourth areas 453a to 453d are provided in the second special figure holding area 453, and four pieces of the holding information on the second special figure side can be held and stored. Therefore, in the situation where the fifth game round triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side is executed after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the second operating unit 413 controlled in the high frequency support mode in the situation where the fifth game round is executed. By entering the game balls, nine times of game times triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side can be executed nine times after the open / close execution mode ends.

  FIG. 721 (c) shows a type table 464 for small hits which is referred to for sorting the types of the small hit results when the small hit result is selected in the hit / fail determination processing triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the method. FIG. 721 (d) is an explanatory diagram for describing the contents of each of a plurality of types of small hit results. As described above, the small hit result is not selected in the success / failure determination processing triggered by the hold information on the first special figure side, so that the small hits are not selected in the game round triggered by the hold information on the first special figure side. The hit type table 464 is not referred to.

  As shown in FIG. 721 (c), in the small hit type table 464, a first small hit result, a second small hit result, and a third small hit result are set as the types of the small hit results. The numerical information of the type counter C2 of “0 to 9” corresponds to the first small hit result, the numerical information of the type counter C2 of “10 to 19” corresponds to the second small hit result, The numerical information of the type counter C2 of “20 to 29” corresponds to the third small hit result. In other words, when the small hit result is selected in the hit / fail judgment processing, the first small hit result is selected with a probability of 1/3, the second small hit result is selected with a probability of 1/3, and 1/3 The third small hit result is selected with the probability of.

  Regardless of the first small hit result, the second small hit result, or the third small hit result, the distribution execution mode is first started as shown in FIG. 721 (d). In the distribution execution mode, the distribution winning device 415 is opened and closed once. The open state of the sorting prize winning device 415 is, as described above, when the opening continuation period of 10 seconds has elapsed, and when the number of game balls that have entered the sorting prize winning device 415 reaches the upper limit winning number of ten. In this case, the operation is continued until one of the conditions is satisfied. Then, in a situation where the distribution prize device 415 is kept open, the launch operation is continued so that the game ball flows down to the distribution prize device 415, and the ball enters the distribution prize device 415. A V prize in which a game ball is detected by the V prize detection sensor 449 occurs. Note that even if a plurality of game balls are detected by the V winning detection sensor 449 in one distribution execution mode, the number of occurrences of V winning is treated as one.

  The opening and closing execution mode occurs after the occurrence of the V winning. In this case, after the distribution execution mode triggered by the first small hit result, the opening / closing execution mode in which five round games are executed is performed, and the distribution execution mode is triggered by the second small hit result. For example, the opening / closing execution mode in which eight round games are executed is performed. In the case of the distribution execution mode triggered by the third small hit result, the opening / closing execution mode in which 14 round games are executed. Therefore, the second small hit result is more advantageous than the first small hit result, and the third small hit result is more advantageous than the second small hit result, at least in terms of the number of round game executions.

  When one of the first small hit result, the second small hit result, and the third small hit result is obtained, and a V prize occurs in the distribution execution mode and the open / close execution mode occurs, the open / close execution mode ends. Later, the high-frequency support mode is set regardless of the support mode before the start of the distribution execution mode. This high-frequency support mode is a game play mode triggered by the hold information on the second special map side, regardless of whether the first small hit result, the second small hit result, or the third small hit result is triggered. Is executed five times, the process is terminated and the mode is shifted to the low frequency support mode. As described above, the first to fourth areas 453a to 453d are provided in the second special figure holding area 453, and four pieces of the holding information on the second special figure side can be held and stored. Therefore, in the situation where the fifth game round triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side is executed after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the second operating unit 413 controlled in the high frequency support mode in the situation where the fifth game round is executed. By entering the game balls, nine times of game times triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side can be executed nine times after the open / close execution mode ends. Note that if no V prize occurs in the distribution execution mode triggered by one of the first small hit result, the second small hit result, and the third small hit result, the distribution execution mode is changed to After completion, the open / close execution mode does not occur, and the support mode before the start of the distribution execution mode is maintained.

  The flow of the game due to the setting of the hit / fail tables 461 and 462 and the type tables 463 and 464 as described above will be described. Basically, the support mode is the low-frequency support mode when the game hall is opened. In the low-frequency support mode, a firing operation is performed aiming at a prize in the first operation unit 412, and when a prize is generated in the first operation unit 412, the variation display of the pattern is displayed on the first special figure display unit 425. At the same time, a game round in which the symbol display is displayed by the symbol display device 424 is executed. When the big hit result is selected in the hit determination processing executed at the start of the game round, the open / close execution mode is generated after the end of the game round. In this open / close execution mode, the round game is executed six times if the 6R jackpot result occurs, and the round game is executed 15 times if the 15R jackpot result occurs.

  After the open / close execution mode ends, the high frequency support mode is set. In this case, the high-frequency support mode is ended when the game round in the second special figure display unit 426 is executed once if the jackpot result that triggered the occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode is the 6R jackpot result, If the jackpot result that triggered the occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode is the 15R jackpot result, the process ends when the game times on the second special figure display unit 426 have been executed five times. When the high frequency support mode is ended when the game time in the second special figure display unit 426 is executed once, the game time triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side can be executed five times. When the high frequency support mode is ended when the game times in the second special figure display unit 426 are executed five times, the game times triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side are executed nine times. Becomes possible.

  In the high-frequency support mode, a firing operation is performed aiming at a prize in the second operation unit 413, and when a prize is generated in the second operation unit 413, the variation display of the pattern is displayed on the second special figure display unit 426. At the same time, a game round in which the symbol display is displayed on the symbol display device 424 is executed. In the game times triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side, a small hit result is obtained with a high probability of 1/5. In the case of a small hit result, a distribution execution mode is set, and in this distribution execution mode, a V-prize is basically generated by continuing the firing operation aiming at winning in the distribution prize winning device 415. When a V winning occurs, an open / close execution mode occurs thereafter. In the opening / closing execution mode, the round game is executed five times when the first small hit result occurs, and the round game is executed eight times when the second small hit result occurs, and the third small hit result is obtained. If this occurs, the round game is executed 14 times. Then, after the open / close execution mode ends, the high frequency support mode is set regardless of whether the occurrence trigger is the first small hit result, the second small hit result, or the third small hit result. The process is ended when the number of game times in the second special figure display unit 426 has been executed five times. In this case, it is possible to execute nine game times triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side.

  In other words, when the shift to the high-frequency support mode occurs, the small hit result occurs in the game times triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side, so that the distribution execution mode and the opening / closing execution mode are generated. In addition to this, it is possible to execute nine game rounds triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side thereafter. Accordingly, the player expects that the transition to the high-frequency support mode will occur, and when the transition to the high-frequency support mode occurs, the player will be prompted to play the game based on the hold information on the second special map side. And expect a small hit. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. It should be noted that a jackpot result may occur in the game round triggered by the hold information on the second special map side, and when the jackpot result occurs, the opening / closing execution mode occurs. In addition, after the open / close execution mode ends, regardless of the type of the jackpot result that triggered the occurrence, the high frequency support mode is set, and the high frequency support mode is executed five times in the second special figure display unit 426. It is terminated when it is done.

  Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one, for example, in the range of 0 to 238, and to return to “0” after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is updated periodically, and is stored in the special figure reservation area 451 of the main RAM 65 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation unit 412 or the second operation unit 413. Then, using the stored value of the reach random number counter C3, it is determined whether or not the reach display is to be generated in the game that results in the departure.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10, an expected effect is set as a type of display effect on the symbol display device 424. The expected effect is provided with a symbol display device 424 capable of performing symbol variation display, and in a gaming machine in which a final stop result is an assignment-response result in a game time in which a big hit result or a small hit result is obtained, a symbol display. This is a display state for causing the player to think that the display is a variable display state that is likely to be the above-described provision result at a stage before the stop result is derived and displayed after the variable display of the symbol is started on the device 424. It should be noted that, specifically, the combination of symbols with the same numeral attached to one of the activated lines is stopped and displayed.

  Two types of expected effects are set: a reach display, and a preview display for expecting the occurrence of the reach display and the generation of the assignment correspondence result at a stage before the reach display occurs.

  In the reach display, a combination of reach symbols is displayed by stopping and displaying symbols in some of the symbol columns displayed on the display surface of the symbol display device 424, and the remaining symbols are displayed in that state. A display state in which a symbol is displayed in a variable manner in a column is included. In addition, in the state where the combination of the reach symbols is displayed as described above, while performing the variation display of the symbols in the remaining symbol rows, and performing a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on the background screen, , A reach effect is displayed by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface after reducing or hiding the combination of the reach symbols.

  In the notice display, a state in which the symbols are variably displayed in all the symbol rows after the symbol variability display is started on the display surface of the symbol display device 424, or a plurality of symbols in some symbol rows. In a situation where symbols are variably displayed in the symbol row, a mode in which a character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol row is included. Further, the background screen may have a predetermined mode different from the previous mode, and the symbol on the symbol row may have a predetermined mode different from the previous mode. Such a notice display may occur at any of the game times when the reach display is performed and when the reach display is not performed, but the display when the reach display is performed is higher than when the reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with probability.

  The reach display is executed irrespective of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game time in which the same symbol combination is finally stopped and displayed, that is, in the game time corresponding to the big hit result or the small hit result. In addition, the game time corresponding to the result of departure is executed when the reach random number counter C3 acquired at a predetermined timing with reference to the reach table stored in the main ROM 64 corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display. .

  On the other hand, the determination as to whether or not to display the advance notice is made not by the main control device 60 but by the sound emission control device 81. In this case, the sound emission control device 81 indicates that the notification display is more likely to occur in the game times corresponding to any one of the big hit results or the small hit results than in the game times corresponding to the departure result, and that the appearance rate is reduced. A lottery process for notice display is executed so as to satisfy at least one of the conditions that a low notice display is likely to occur. Incidentally, this lottery result is reflected when the effect for the game round is executed on the symbol display device 424.

  Next, the variation type counter CS will be described. The fluctuation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 198, and to return to “0” after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used when the main CPU 63 determines the display continuation period of the variable display of the symbols on the special figure display units 425 and 426 and the display continuation period of the variable display of the symbols on the symbol display device 424. The variation type counter CS is repeatedly updated, and is acquired at the time of starting the variation of the pattern in the special figure display units 425 and 426, and at the time of determining the variation pattern at the time of starting the variation of the symbol by the symbol display device 424.

<Public control control process>
Next, various processes executed by the main CPU 63 will be described. FIG. 722 is a flowchart showing a general-purpose power control process performed by the main CPU 63. It should be noted that the general-purpose power control process is executed in step S8914 in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638). In addition, the processing of steps SD601 to SD610 in the general-purpose power control processing is executed using the specific control program and the specific control data in the main CPU 63.

  First, the process of acquiring the hold information on the ordinary figure side is executed (step SD601). In the acquisition process, if a prize is received in the through prize winning unit 414 and furthermore, the upper limit number of the general figure side hold information has not been obtained in the general figure hold area 455, the general electric part unlock counter C4 Is stored in the general-purpose reservation area 455. In this case, the reservation information on the general-purpose side is stored in the order of the first area 455a → the second area 455b → the third area 455c → the fourth area 455d.

  Then, while reading out the numerical information of the general-purpose general-purpose counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step SD602), the general-purpose general-purpose address table provided in the main ROM 64 is read (step SD603). Then, a start address corresponding to the numerical information of the general-purpose general-purpose counter is obtained from the general-purpose general-purpose address table (step SD604), and the process jumps to a process indicated by the obtained start address (step SD605).

  The general-purpose general-purpose counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to know which of the processes in steps SD606 to SD610 in the general-purpose general-purpose control process should be executed. In the address table, a start address in a program for executing each processing of steps SD606 to SD610 is set in association with the numerical information of the general-purpose general-purpose counter. When the value of the general figure counter is "0", the process jumps to the general figure change start process of step SD606, and when the value of the general figure general purpose counter is "1", the figure change of step SD607 is performed. The process jumps to the middle process, and when the value of the general-purpose general-purpose counter is “2”, the process jumps to the process of determining the general-purpose general-purpose counter in step SD608, and when the value of the general-purpose general-purpose counter is “3”, The process jumps to the process during opening of ordinary power in step SD609, and jumps to the process during closing of ordinary power in step SD610 when the value of the general-purpose utility counter is "4".

  In the general figure change start process in step SD606, the general figure holding information stored in the general figure holding area 455 is held on condition that the general figure holding information is held in the general figure holding area 455. Is executed. Specifically, the hold information on the general figure side stored in the first area 455a of the general figure hold area 455 is shifted to the general figure execution area 456, and thereafter, the second area 455b → the first area 455a, The hold information on the general-purpose side is shifted so that the third area 455c → the second area 455b and the fourth area 455d → the third area 455c. Then, the guidance state lottery process is executed by using the reservation information of the general figure side newly shifted to the general-purpose execution area 456 as a lottery value. In the present embodiment, as described above, the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode exist as the support modes. However, the probability of winning the guidance state in the guidance state lottery process is the same in the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode (specifically, 4/5).

  In the general figure change start processing, when the guidance state lottery processing is executed, a processing for starting the change display of the picture on the general figure display unit 423a is executed. In this case, the information of the display continuation period in which the picture is variably displayed on the general-purpose display unit 423a is set in a general-purpose general-purpose timer counter provided in the main RAM 65. The value set in the general-purpose timer counter is decremented by one each time the timer update process (step S8910) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638) is executed. In this case, the display continuation period is shorter in the high frequency support mode than in the low frequency support mode. Specifically, the display continuation period is 1 second in the high frequency support mode, and 10 seconds in the low frequency support mode. Thereafter, after starting the variation display of the picture on the general-purpose display unit 423a, the value of the general-purpose general-purpose counter is updated from “0” to “1”. As a result, the process to be executed in the next process of the normal-figure normal power control process becomes the normal-fluctuating process.

  In the process of changing the general figure in step SD607, a process for updating the display of the picture on the general figure display unit 423a is executed. If the value set in the general-purpose general-purpose timer counter of the main-side RAM 65 is “0” in the general-purpose change start process, the information of the fixed period on the general-purpose side is stored in the main-side RAM 65. In addition to setting the general-purpose timer counter, a pattern corresponding to the result of the guidance state lottery process that has triggered the execution of the current pattern change display time on the general-purpose display unit 423a is stopped and displayed on the general-purpose display unit 423a. Execute the process. Then, the value of the normal figure counter is updated from "1" to "2". As a result, the process to be executed in the next process of the general-purpose normal power control process is the general-purpose fixed process.

  In the process of determining the general figure in the step SD608, when the value of the general figure timer counter is “0”, the result of the guidance state lottery process that has triggered the execution of the current pattern change display time is guided. It is determined whether or not the status has been won. If the guidance state has not been won, the value of the general figure counter is cleared to "0". As a result, the process to be executed in the next process of the general-purpose normal power control process is the general-purpose change start process.

  If the guidance state has been won, a process for setting the guidance unit 432 of the second operating unit 413 to the guidance state is executed. In this case, in the case of the high-frequency support mode, three times are set as the number of times the guidance unit 432 enters the guidance state, and the upper limit guidance period in the number of executions of each guidance state is set to 2 seconds. On the other hand, in the case of the low-frequency support mode, the number of times the guidance unit 432 enters the guidance state is set to one, and the upper limit guidance period in the number of times the guidance state is executed is set to 0.6 seconds. The information on the number of times the guidance state has been executed is set in a general power release counter provided in the main RAM 65, and the information on the upper limit guidance period is set in a general-purpose general-purpose timer counter. In both the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode, the upper limit winning number of game balls to the second operating unit 413 when the guidance state is won is ten. The information on the upper limit winning number is set in a general-purpose winning counter provided in the main RAM 65. When the value of the ordinary winning a prize counter becomes “0”, the execution of the guidance state triggered by the current winning of the guidance state is ended. In addition, by starting to output a driving signal to the guide driving unit 436, the guidance unit 432 is switched from the non-guidance state to the guidance state. After the setting for enabling the execution of the guidance state as described above, the value of the general-purpose electric power counter is updated from “2” to “3”. As a result, the process to be executed in the next process of the normal drawing normal power control process is the normal power opening process.

  In the normal power open process in step SD609, when a prize is generated in the second operating unit 413, the value corresponding to the winning number is subtracted from the value of the general power prize counter of the main RAM 65. Then, when the value of the normal winning a prize counter is “0”, the output of the drive signal to the guide driving unit 436 is stopped to switch the guidance unit 432 from the guidance state to the non-guidance state. Clear the value of the normal power counter to "0". As a result, the process to be executed in the next process of the general-purpose normal power control process is the general-purpose change start process. In addition, even if the value of the general winning a prize counter is not “0”, the output of the driving signal to the guide driving unit 436 is stopped when the value of the general public prize timer counter is “0”. As a result, the guidance unit 432 is switched from the guidance state to the non-guidance state, and the value of the ordinary power release counter is decremented by one. If the value of the general-purpose release counter is not “0”, the information of the non-guidance continuation period of the guidance unit 432 is set in the general-purpose general-purpose timer counter, and then the value of the general-purpose general-purpose counter is set to “3”. To “4”. As a result, the process to be executed in the next process of the normal-zu power control process is the normal-power closed process. If the value of the ordinary power release counter is “0”, the value of the ordinary power general counter is cleared to “0”. As a result, the process to be executed in the next process of the general-purpose normal power control process is the general-purpose change start process.

  In the process during normal power closing in step SD610, the guidance unit 432 is activated by starting output of a driving signal to the guide driving unit 436 on condition that the value of the general power timer counter is “0”. The state is switched from the non-guidance state to the guidance state, and the information on the upper limit guidance period is set in the general-purpose general-purpose timer counter. Then, the value of the normal figure counter is updated from "4" to "3". As a result, the process to be executed in the next process of the normal drawing normal power control process is the normal power opening process.

  As described above, by performing the general-purpose control process, a change in the picture is displayed on the general-purpose display unit 423a when the winning in the through-prize unit 414 occurs. Then, when the guidance state is won in the guidance state lottery process, the guidance unit 432 of the second operating unit 413 enters the guidance state. When the second operating unit 413 is in the guiding state, it is possible to win a game ball to the second operating unit 413, and when the game ball wins to the second operating unit 413, the hold information on the second special figure side is displayed. It is stored in the second special figure reservation area 453.

<Tokuzu Tokuden control processing>
FIG. 723 is a flowchart showing the special figure special power control processing executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the special figure special power control processing is executed in step S8913 in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638). In addition, the processing of steps SD701 to SD713 in the special figure special power control processing is executed using the specific control program and the specific control data in the main CPU 63.

  First, a process of acquiring hold information is executed (step SD701). In the process of acquiring the reservation information, when a prize has occurred in the first operating unit 412, the number of the reservation information on the first special figure side stored in the first special figure reservation area 452 is equal to the upper limit storage number (specifically, The storage processing of the hold information on the first special figure side is executed on condition that the number is less than 4). In the storage process, the numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are used as the reservation information on the first special figure side, and the first area 452a to the fourth area 452d of the first special figure reservation area 452 are stored. Is stored in the area in which the digestion order is earlier among the areas in which the hold information on the first special figure side is not stored. In addition, when the hold information on the first special figure side is acquired, the display content of the first special figure hold display unit 427 is updated in accordance with the increase in the number of the hold information on the first special figure side this time. Data settings to make sure. In addition, when the hold information on the first special figure side is acquired, a hold increase command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. As a result, the image for notifying the storage number of the hold information on the first special figure side in the symbol display device 424 is updated in correspondence with the new acquisition of the hold information on the first special figure side.

  When a prize has occurred in the second operation unit 413, the number of the second special figure side reserved information stored in the second special figure reserved area 453 is less than the upper limit storage number (specifically, four). The storage processing of the hold information on the second special figure side is executed on condition that In the storing process, the numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are used as the reservation information on the second special figure side, and the first area 453a to the fourth area 453d of the second special figure reservation area 453 are stored. Is stored in the area having the earliest digestion order among the areas in which the hold information of the second special figure is not stored. When the second special figure side hold information is acquired, the display content of the second special figure hold display unit 428 is updated in accordance with the increase in the number of the second special figure side hold information this time. Data settings to make it work. When the hold information on the second special figure side is acquired, a hold increase command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. As a result, the image for notifying the storage number of the hold information on the second special figure side in the symbol display device 424 is updated in correspondence with the new acquisition of the hold information on the second special figure side.

  After executing the process of acquiring the hold information, the special figure special telephone address table stored in the main ROM 64 is read (step SD702). Then, a start address corresponding to the numerical information of the special figure special power counter is acquired from the special figure special power address table (step SD703), and the process jumps to a process indicated by the acquired start address (step SD704).

  The special figure special power counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to know which of the processes in steps SD705 to SD713 in the special figure special power control processing should be executed. Indicates a start address in a program for executing each processing of steps SD705 to SD713 corresponding to the numerical information of the special figure special power counter. If the value of the special figure special power counter is "0", the process jumps to the special figure variation start process of step SD705. When the value of the special figure special power counter is "2", the processing jumps to the special figure special processing in step SD707, and when the value of the special figure special power counter is "3", the control proceeds to step SD708. The process jumps to the minute start process. If the value of the special figure special power counter is "4", the process jumps to the distribution process of step SD709. If the value of the special figure special power counter is "5", the process proceeds to step SD709. The process jumps to the special power starting process of SD710. If the value of the special power special counter is "6", the process jumps to the special power releasing process of step SD711, and if the value of the special power special counter is "7". Jump to electrically movable device control the closure during the processing of the step SD712, when the value of the special electrically movable device control counter is "8" jump to electrically movable device control termination processing of step SD713. Hereinafter, each processing of step SD705 to step SD713 will be individually described.

<Special figure change start processing>
First, the special figure change start processing in step SD705 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The processing of steps SD801 to SD818 in the special figure change start processing is executed by using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

  In the special figure change start processing, the data setting processing is executed (step SD802) on condition that the hold information on the first special figure side or the hold information on the second special figure side is stored (step SD801: YES). . In the data setting process, when the second special figure holding area 453 stores the second special figure holding information, the first special figure holding area 452 acquires the second special figure holding information before the second special figure holding information. Regardless of whether or not the obtained hold information on the first special figure side is acquired, the hold information on the second special figure side stored in the first area 453a of the second special figure hold area 453 is used for the game times. The object is moved to the execution area 454 for a special figure so as to be executed. Accordingly, it is possible to give priority to the hold information on the second special figure side as the execution trigger of the hit / fail determination processing over the hold information on the first special figure side, and to give priority to the execution timing of the game round. Become.

  If the second special figure holding information stored in the first area 453a of the second special figure holding area 453 is moved to the special figure execution area 454, then it is stored in the second special figure holding area 453. Then, a process of shifting the retained information on the second special figure side is executed. In this data shift processing, data stored in the first to fourth areas 453a to 453d is sequentially shifted to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of the second area 453b → the first area 453a, the third area 453c → the second area 453b, the fourth area 453d → the third area 453c, and the fourth area 453d. Is cleared to "0". In the data setting processing, data setting is performed so that the display content of the second special figure suspension display unit 428 is updated in accordance with the decrease in the number of the suspension information on the second special figure side. In the data setting process, a hold reduction command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. As a result, the image for notifying the number of pieces of hold information of the second special figure on the symbol display device 424 is updated in accordance with the decrease of the second special figure side of the hold information.

  On the other hand, in the data setting process, if the second special figure holding area 453 does not store the second special figure holding information, the data stored in the first area 452a of the first special figure holding area 452 is converted to the special figure. Move to the execution area 454 for use. After that, a process of shifting the data stored in the first special figure holding area 452 is executed. In this data shift processing, data stored in the first to fourth areas 452a to 452d is sequentially shifted to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of the second area 452b → the first area 452a, the third area 452c → the second area 452b, the fourth area 452d → the third area 452c, and the fourth area 452d. Is cleared to "0". In the data setting process, data setting is performed so that the display content of the first special figure suspension display unit 427 is updated in accordance with the decrease in the number of suspension information on the first special figure side. In the data setting process, a hold reduction command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. As a result, the image for notifying the number of holdings of the holding information on the first special figure side in the symbol display device 424 is updated in accordance with the decrease in the holding information on the first special figure side.

  After the execution of the data setting process, a success / failure determination process is executed (step SD803). In the success / failure determination process, if the first special figure side hold information is stored in the special figure execution area 454 and the current game time is triggered by the first special figure side hold information, the current pachinko machine is used. A read / write table 461 (see FIG. 720 (a)) of the first special map corresponding to the set value of the machine 10 is read from the main ROM 64. Then, the numerical information on the winning random number counter C1 is read out of the hold information on the first special figure side, which is the trigger of the start of the current game round, and the read numerical information is stored in the hit / fail table 461 of the first special figure. Then, it is determined whether the result of the current pass / fail determination processing is a jackpot result or a missed result.

  On the other hand, in the hit / fail determination processing, if the second special figure side hold information is stored in the special figure execution area 454 and the current game time is triggered by the second special figure side hold information, Of the second special figure corresponding to the set value of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 720 (b)) from the main ROM 64. Then, the numerical information on the winning random number counter C1 is read out of the hold information on the second special figure, which is the trigger of the start of the current game round, and the read numerical information is stored in the win / fail table 462 of the second special figure. Then, it is determined whether the result of the current success / failure determination process is a big hit result, a small hit result, or a missed result.

  If the result of the success / failure determination process is a jackpot result (step SD804: YES), a jackpot type determination process is executed (step SD805). In the big hit type determination process, the big hit type table 463 shown in FIG. Also, when the hold information on the first special figure side is the trigger of the current game round, the numerical information on the type counter C2 is read out of the hold information on the first special figure side, and the hold on the second special figure side is performed. If the information is the trigger of the current game round, the numerical information on the type counter C2 is read out of the hold information on the second special figure side. Then, it is determined which numerical value information of the read type counter C2 corresponds to the numerical range of the type of the jackpot result of the 6R jackpot result and the 15R jackpot result set in the jackpot type table 463. Identify.

  After executing the jackpot type determination process, "1" is set to the flag of the main RAM 65 corresponding to the type of the jackpot result specified in the type determination process (step SD806). The state of the flag in which "1" is set is cleared to "0" when the open / close execution mode ends.

  Thereafter, a stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed (step SD807). Specifically, the information on the stop mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed in the current game round on the side of the first special figure display unit 425 and the second special figure display unit 426 which is the execution target of the game round. Is determined from the jackpot result stop result table stored in the main ROM 64 in advance, and the specified information is stored in the main RAM 65. In the stop result table for the jackpot result, the type of the stop mode of the pattern stopped and displayed on the first special figure display unit 425 or the second special figure display unit 426 is set differently for each type of the big hit result. In step SD807, information on the pattern stop mode according to the type of the jackpot result specified in step SD805 is stored in the main RAM 65. In addition, the stop mode of the pattern may be set so as to correspond to each jackpot result on a one-to-one basis, and a plurality of types of pattern stop modes may be set for at least some of the jackpot results. The method of selecting a stop result for a jackpot result in which a plurality of types of pattern stop modes are set is arbitrary, but a configuration in which the stop result is selected according to, for example, the value of the type counter C2 may be employed.

  If the result of the hit determination process is a small hit result (step SD808: YES), a small hit type determination process is executed (step SD809). As described above, when the hit determination processing is performed on the hold information on the first special figure side, the small hit result is not selected, and the hit / fail determination is performed on the hold information on the second special figure side. When the determination process is performed, the small hit result can be selected. In the small hit type determination process, the small hit type table 464 shown in FIG. Further, numerical information on the type counter C2 is read out of the hold information on the second special figure side, which is the trigger of the current game round. Then, the numerical value information of the read type counter C2 is set to any one of the first small hit result, the second small hit result, and the third small hit result set in the small hit type table 464. Specify whether it corresponds to the numerical range of the hit result.

  After executing the small hit type determination processing, "1" is set to the flag of the main RAM 65 corresponding to the type of the small hit result specified in the type determination processing (step SD810). If the open / close execution mode does not occur after the end of the distribution execution mode, the state of the flag set to “1” is cleared to “0” when the distribution execution mode ends, and the end of the distribution execution mode When the open / close execution mode occurs later, the flag is cleared to “0” when the open / close execution mode ends.

  Thereafter, a stop result setting process for the small hit result is executed (step SD811). Specifically, the information of the stop mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed in the current game round on the second special figure display unit 426 is obtained from the stop result table for the small hit result stored in the main ROM 64 in advance. The specified information is stored in the main RAM 65. In the stop result table for the small hit result, the type of the stop mode of the pattern stopped and displayed on the second special figure display unit 426 is set differently for each type of the small hit result, and in step SD811 Then, the information of the pattern stop mode corresponding to the type of the small hit result specified in step SD809 is stored in the main RAM 65. In this case, the information on the pattern aspect selected is different from the information on the pattern aspect selected in the case of the jackpot result. In addition, the stop mode of the pattern may be set so as to correspond to each small hit result on a one-to-one basis, or a plurality of types of pattern stop modes may be set for at least some of the small hit results. . A method of selecting a stop result for a small hit result in which a plurality of types of pattern stop modes are set is arbitrary, but, for example, a configuration in which the stop result is selected according to the value of the type counter C2 may be employed.

  If the result of the success / failure determination process is neither the big hit result nor the small hit result (step SD804 and step SD808: NO), a stop result setting process for a miss result is executed (step SD812). Specifically, the information on the stop mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed in the current game round on the side of the first special figure display unit 425 and the second special figure display unit 426 which is the execution target of the game round. Is determined from the stop result table for the deviation result stored in the main ROM 64 in advance, and the specified information is stored in the main RAM 65. In this case, the information of the pattern aspect selected is different from the information of the pattern aspect selected in the case of the big hit result and the information of the pattern aspect selected in the case of the small hit result.

  After executing any one of the stop result setting processes, a process of grasping the display continuation period is executed (step SD813). In this process, numerical information of the variation type counter CS is obtained. In addition, it is determined whether or not reach display occurs on the symbol display device 424 in the current game round. Specifically, when the game times related to the start of the current fluctuation are any of the big hit results or any of the small hit results, it is determined that the reach display is generated. In addition, even if neither the big hit result nor the small hit result is obtained, the numerical information on the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area 454 for the special figure is the numerical information corresponding to the occurrence of the reach. In this case, it is determined that the reach display is generated.

  When it is determined that the reach display occurs, the display duration of the game corresponding to the numerical information of the current fluctuation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the reach generation duration table stored in the main ROM 64. I do. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the display of the game times corresponding to the numerical information of the current fluctuation type counter CS is performed by referring to the reach non-occurrence duration table stored in the main ROM 64. Get duration. Incidentally, the display duration of the game times that can be acquired by referring to the reach non-occurrence duration table is different from the display duration of the game times that can be acquired by referring to the reach occurrence duration table.

  After that, as a result of the current pass / fail determination processing and type determination processing, the type of the current support mode, and the variation command and the type command corresponding to the processing result of step SD813 are selected from the main ROM 64 (step SD814). Then, the selected variation command and type command are transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step SD815). The sound emission control device 81 executes control for executing an effect for a game corresponding to the received variation command and type command received.

  After that, the variation display of the pattern is started on the side of the first special figure display unit 425 and the second special figure display unit 426 which is the target of the current game round (step SD816). The first special figure display section 425 and the second special figure display section serve as tables referred to by the main CPU 63 when changing the design on the first special figure display section 425 or the second special figure display section 426. A variation display table for special drawings common to 426 is stored in the main ROM 64 in advance. When the variation display of the pattern is executed in the first special figure display unit 425 or the second special figure display unit 426, the same variation display table is used regardless of the result of the hit / fail determination processing and the result of the type determination processing. You. When the variation display of the pattern is performed on the first special figure display unit 425 or the second special figure display unit 426, the variation display of the pattern according to the predetermined pattern is repeated. The control data for one round in the variation display of the picture by the predetermined pattern is set. Therefore, when the variation display of the picture is performed on the first special figure display unit 425 or the second special figure display unit 426, the variation display table for the special figure until the display duration of the game times determined in step SD813 elapses. Will be used repeatedly.

  The contents of the variation display of the pattern in the first special figure display unit 425 and the second special figure display unit 426 are arbitrary. The display may be changed, or the display may be changed when some display segments 425a and 426a emit light in a predetermined order, such as two or three. The display of the pattern may be changed by blinking all the display segments 425a and 426a, and the display of the pattern may be changed by blinking of one or two display segments 425a and 426a. May be performed.

  After that, the process turns off the special display unit 429 (step SD817). In the special display unit 429, when the open / close execution mode occurs, information corresponding to the number of round games generated in the open / close execution mode is displayed. That is, when the opening / closing execution mode is triggered by the 6R jackpot result, when the opening / closing execution mode is started, a display corresponding to six round games is performed on the special display unit 429. Further, when the opening / closing execution mode is triggered by the 15R jackpot result, when the opening / closing execution mode is started, a display corresponding to 15 round games is displayed on the special display unit 429. In addition, when the opening / closing execution mode is generated due to the occurrence of the V prize in the distribution execution mode triggered by the first small hit result, the special display section 429 displays when the opening / closing execution mode is started. The display corresponding to the round game is performed. In addition, when the opening / closing execution mode occurs due to the occurrence of the V prize in the distribution execution mode triggered by the second small hit result, the special display unit 429 displays when the opening / closing execution mode is started. The display corresponding to the round game is performed. Further, when the opening / closing execution mode is generated due to the occurrence of the V prize in the distribution execution mode triggered by the third small hit result, the special display section 429 displays when the opening / closing execution mode is started. The display corresponding to the round game is performed. In the above configuration, the turn-off process of the special display unit 429 is performed in step SD817 of the special figure change start process, so that the number of round games in the special display unit 429 started when the open / close execution mode is started is corresponded. This display is ended when a new game start is started after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Then, the special display unit 429 is kept off until a new open / close execution mode occurs.

  Thereafter, the value of the special figure special power counter is incremented by 1 (step SD818). Since the value of the special figure special power counter when the special figure fluctuation start processing is executed is “0”, the value of the special figure special power counter targeted for the addition by adding 1 becomes the special figure fluctuation processing ( It becomes "1" corresponding to step SD706).

<Process during special figure fluctuation>
Next, the special figure changing processing executed in step SD706 of the special figure special power control processing (FIG. 723) will be described.

  If the current game time display continuation period has not elapsed and it is the update timing of the display contents of the special figure display units 425 and 426 which are the execution targets of the current game time, By referring to the fluctuation display table, data setting for updating the display contents of the special figure display units 425 and 426 is performed. As a result, the display contents of the symbols on the special figure display units 425 and 426, which are the execution targets of the current game, are updated to the display contents in the next order. The main RAM 65 stores a first display order counter referred to in order to derive the display contents of the pattern from the variable display table for the special figure when the timing of updating the pattern in the first special figure display unit 425 comes. Is provided. Further, the main RAM 65 stores a second display order counter referred to in order to derive the display contents of the pattern from the variable display table for the special figure when the timing of updating the pattern in the second special figure display unit 426 comes. Is provided.

  The mode at the start of the pattern variation display in the special figure display units 425 and 426, and the mode of updating the pattern variation display are performed in a certain mode regardless of the result of the hit / fail determination processing and the result of the type determination processing. It is performed in a fixed manner regardless of the contents of the effect for the game round on the symbol display device 424. For example, when a predetermined plurality of update timings occur, the display content of the picture goes around once and a display pattern in which the display order is a fixed order is repeatedly performed, and when the display duration of the game time has elapsed, Regardless of the order in which the display patterns are displayed, the stop result determined at the start of the game round is displayed. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration for controlling the display of the special figure display units 425 and 426.

  On the other hand, if the game continuation period has elapsed, the information of the pattern stop mode of the special figure display units 425 and 426 stored in the main RAM 65 at the start of the game round is read out, and the pattern stop mode is read. The display control of the special figure display units 425 and 426 which are the execution targets of the current game round is controlled so as to be as follows. As a result, the special figure display units 425 and 426, which are the execution targets of the current game round, display the pattern corresponding to the result of the success / failure determination process of the current game round and the result of the type determination process. The variable display is stopped. Regardless of whether the pattern is stopped and displayed in the special figure display units 425, 426, the next variation display of the pattern in the special figure display units 425, 426 is performed regardless of whether the mode is the distribution execution mode or the open / close execution mode. Maintained until started. Further, information of the final stop period (for example, 0.5 sec) is set in the timer counter of the main RAM 65. Thereby, the measurement of the final stop period is started.

  After that, a final stop command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. When receiving the final stop command from the main CPU 63, the sound emission control device 81 transmits the final stop command to the display control device 82. When the display control device 82 receives the final stop command from the sound emission control device 81, the display control device 82 reads a display pattern table for stopping and displaying the combination of the stop symbols in the current game round over the final stop period. As a result, the combination of the stop symbols corresponding to the current game time is stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 424 over the final stop period.

  Thereafter, the value of the special figure special power counter is incremented by one. Since the value of the special figure special power counter in the case where the special figure special processing is executed is "1", the value of the special figure special power counter corresponds to the special figure special processing (step SD707) by adding 1. It becomes "2".

<Process during special figure determination>
Next, the special figure in-determination processing executed in step SD707 of the special figure special power control processing (FIG. 723) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. Note that the processing of steps SD901 to SD915 in the special figure finalizing processing is executed using the specific control program and the specific control data in the main CPU 63.

  If the final stop period has elapsed and the current game time corresponds to the jackpot result (step SD901 and step SD902: YES), display start processing of the special display unit 429 is executed (step SD903). . In the display start process of the special display unit 429, if the current jackpot result is a 6R jackpot result, data setting for display control of the special display unit 429 is started so that display corresponding to six round games is started. I do. Further, in the display start process of the special display unit 429, when the current jackpot result is a 15R jackpot result, the display control of the special display unit 429 is performed so that the display corresponding to the 15 round games is started. Set the data. Thereafter, the value of the special figure special power counter is incremented by 3 (step SD904). Since the value of the special figure special power counter in the case where the special figure special processing is executed is “2”, the value of the special figure special power counter which is added by adding 3 is the special power start processing (step SD710). ) Is "5".

  If the final stop period has elapsed and the current game time does not correspond to the jackpot result (step SD901: YES, step SD902: NO), the support flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1". It is determined whether or not is set (step SD905). The support flag is a flag that is set to “1” when the mode is the high frequency support mode and is “0” when the mode is the low frequency support mode. Therefore, in step SD905, it is determined whether the support mode is the high frequency support mode.

  When the high frequency support mode is set and the support flag is set to "1" (step SD905: YES), it is determined whether or not the game time ended this time is a game time triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side. Is determined (step SD906). If the game time ended this time is a game time triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side (step SD906: YES), the value of the second special figure counter provided in the main RAM 65 is decremented by one, and (Step SD907) The value of the total counter provided in the main RAM 65 is decremented by one (Step SD908). On the other hand, if the game time ended this time is a game time triggered by the hold information on the first special figure side (step SD906: NO), the value of the first special figure counter provided in the main RAM 65 is decremented by one. At the same time (step SD909), the value of the total counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by one (step SD910). After executing the processing of step SD908 or step SD910, it is determined whether or not any one of the first special figure counter, the second special figure counter, and the total counter is “0” (step SD908). SD911). If an affirmative determination is made in step SD911, the support flag of the main RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step SD912). Thereby, the support mode shifts from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode.

  As described above, when the open / close execution mode ends, the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. This high-frequency support mode ends when the number of times of execution of the game times after the opening / closing execution mode ends has reached the end reference number, and shifts to the low-frequency support mode. The first special figure counter, the second special figure counter, and the total counter are all counters for the main CPU 63 to specify the end reference number. The first special figure counter is a counter for counting the number of game executions triggered by the hold information on the first special figure after the open / close execution mode ends, and the second special figure counter is used for opening / closing execution. The counter for counting the number of game executions triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side after the mode ends, and the total counter is the counter on the first special figure side after the open / close execution mode ends. This is a counter for counting the total number of executions of the game times triggered by the hold information and the game times triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side. Regardless of the type of the big hit result or the small hit result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode, “100” is set in the first special figure counter and the total counter when the opening / closing execution mode ends. Is done. On the other hand, in the second special figure counter, "1" is set in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the 6R jackpot result based on the hold information of the first special figure, and the opening / closing execution triggered by other than that is set. If the mode is set, "5" is set.

  As described above, in the case where a game round triggered by the hold information on the first special figure side is executed, the values of the first special figure counter and the total counter are respectively decremented by 1, and the second special figure side hold information Is executed, the value of each of the second special figure counter and the total counter is decremented by one. When the value of any of the first special figure counter, the second special figure counter, and the total counter becomes “0”, the mode is shifted from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the opening / closing execution mode ends when the number of executions of the game times triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side after the opening / closing execution mode ends is one or five. When the number of executions of the game times triggered by the hold information of the first special figure side becomes 100 later, or the game times triggered by the hold information of the first special figure side after the opening / closing execution mode ends The process is terminated when the total number of game times triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side reaches 100.

  However, in the high-frequency support mode, the shooting operation is basically performed such that the game ball flows down the right area PA3. Therefore, the high frequency support mode basically ends when the number of executions of the game times triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side after the opening / closing execution mode ends becomes one or five. Becomes In addition, when the number of times of execution of the game times triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side after the open / close execution mode ends is one, the end is defined as the first time after the open / close execution mode ends. 2 The high frequency support mode ends when the game round triggered by the hold information on the special map side ends. In addition, when the number of executions of the game times triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side after the opening and closing execution mode ends becomes five, the end is determined as the fifth time after the opening and closing execution mode ends. The high-frequency support mode ends when the game round triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step SD905, if a negative determination is made in step SD911, or if the process of step SD912 is executed, it is determined whether or not the current game round corresponds to the small hit result (step SD913). If the current game round does not correspond to the small hit result (step SD913: NO), the value of the special figure special power counter is cleared to “0” (step SD914). Thus, the value of the special figure special power counter becomes “0” corresponding to the special figure change start process (step SD705). On the other hand, when the current game time corresponds to the small hit result (step SD913: YES), the value of the special figure special power counter is incremented by 1 (step SD915). Since the value of the special figure special power counter in the case where the special figure special processing is executed is “2”, the value of the special figure special power counter which is added by 1 is added to the distribution start processing ( It becomes "3" corresponding to step SD708).

<Distribution start processing>
Next, the distribution start processing executed in step SD708 of the special figure special power control processing (FIG. 723) will be described.

  First, a distribution start command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. When receiving the distribution start command from the main CPU 63, the sound light emission control device 81 controls the light emission of the display light emission unit 53 and the sound of the speaker unit 54 so that an effect indicating that the distribution execution mode is being performed is executed. Execute output control. The sound emission control device 81 transmits a distribution start command to the display control device 82. When the display control device 82 receives the distribution start command from the audio light emission control device 81, a display effect indicating that the distribution execution mode has been started is executed, and then a display indicating that the distribution execution mode is being performed. The display of the symbol display device 424 is controlled so that the effect is executed.

  After that, “10” is set to the distribution winning counter provided in the main RAM 65. The distribution prize counter has an opportunity to switch the distribution prize device 415 from the open state to the closed state in relation to the number of game balls that have entered the distribution prize device 415 that is open in the distribution execution mode. This is a counter specified by the main CPU 63. Further, a setting process of the distribution release period is executed. In the setting process of the distribution opening period, the information corresponding to the 10 seconds is stored in the timer counter of the main RAM 65 so that the period during which the distribution prize device 415 is maintained in the open state is 10 seconds, which is the distribution opening period. set. Then, output of a drive signal to the distribution entrance drive unit 443 is started in order to open the distribution prize winning device 415.

  Thereafter, the value of the special figure special power counter is incremented by one. Since the value of the special figure special power counter in the case where the distribution start processing is executed is “3”, the value of the special figure special power counter corresponds to the distribution processing (step SD709) by adding “1”. 4 ".

<Distribution processing>
Next, the distribution processing executed in step SD709 of the special figure special power control processing (FIG. 723) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the processing of step SE101 to step SE118 in the distribution processing is executed using the specific control program and the specific control data in the main CPU 63.

  First, it is determined whether or not it is time to switch the switching piece 446 of the distribution prize device 415 from the retracted position to the V guidance position (step SE101). When two seconds have elapsed since the sorting prize device 415 was opened, an affirmative determination is made in step SE101. If an affirmative determination is made in step SE101, a drive signal is output to the switching drive unit 447 so that the switching piece 446 moves from the retracted position to the V guidance position (step SE102). As a result, the switching piece 446 is arranged at the V guiding position, and thereafter, the game ball reaching the position of the switching piece 446 is guided by the switching piece 446 to the V winning passage area 445c and detected by the V winning detection sensor 449. .

  When a game ball is detected by the V prize detection sensor 449 of the sorting prize device 415 (step SE103: YES), "1" is set to a V prize flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step SE104). The V winning flag is a flag used by the main CPU 63 to specify that a game ball has been detected by the V winning detection sensor 449. Further, a V winning command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step SE105). When receiving the V winning command from the main CPU 63, the sound emission control device 81 controls the light emission of the display light emitting unit 53 so as to execute an effect corresponding to the detection of the game ball by the V winning detection sensor 449. The sound output control of the speaker unit 54 is executed. The sound emission control device 81 transmits a V winning command to the display control device 82. When receiving the V winning command from the sound emission control device 81, the display control device 82 displays the symbol display device 424 so that a display effect indicating that the game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 449 is executed. Control.

  In the situation where the distribution prize winning device 415 is in the open state, it is determined whether or not the distribution opening period measured using the timer counter of the main RAM 65 has elapsed (step SE106). If the distribution opening period has not elapsed (step SE106: NO), distribution is determined by determining whether or not a game ball is detected by the count detection sensor 448 or the V prize detection sensor 449 of the distribution prize device 415. It is determined whether or not a winning has occurred in the winning device 415 (step SE107). When a prize has occurred in the distribution prize device 415 (step SE107: YES), the value of the distribution prize counter in the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step SE108). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the distribution winning counter after the subtraction of 1 is “0” (step SE109).

  If an affirmative determination is made in step SE106 or if an affirmative determination is made in step SE109, the closing condition of the sorting prize winning device 415 is satisfied, so that a drive signal is output to the sorting entrance drive unit 443. Is stopped, the distribution winning device 415 is closed (step SE110). Thereafter, in order to wait for the end of the distribution execution mode until there is no game ball in the distribution prize device 415, information corresponding to the standby period is set in the timer counter of the main RAM 65 (step SE111). . The standby period is set as a period longer than the longest time required for the game ball that has entered the sorting prize device 415 to be detected by either the count detection sensor 448 or the V prize detection sensor 449. Specifically, it is set to 4 seconds. By waiting for the end of the distribution execution mode until the standby period elapses in this manner, the game ball that has entered the distribution winning device 415 immediately before the distribution winning device 415 is closed is temporarily set to the V winning detection. When it is detected by the sensor 449, it can be treated as valid.

  When the standby period measured by the timer counter of the main RAM 65 has elapsed (step SE112: YES), the switching piece 446 is driven to the switching drive unit 447 so as to return from the V guidance position to the retracted position. The output of the signal is stopped (step SE113). As a result, the switching piece 446 returns to the retracted position.

  Thereafter, by determining whether or not “1” is set in the V winning flag of the main RAM 65, it is determined whether or not a game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 449 in the current distribution execution mode. (Step SE114). When "1" is set to the V winning flag (step SE114: YES), display start processing of the special display unit 429 is executed (step SE115). In the display start processing of the special display unit 429, when the current distribution execution mode is triggered by the first small hit result, the special display unit 429 is displayed so that the display corresponding to five round games is started. Make data settings for control. Also, in the display start process of the special display unit 429, if the current distribution execution mode is triggered by the second small hit result, the special display unit 429 is started so that display corresponding to eight round games is started. Data setting for display control is performed. Also, in the display start processing of the special display unit 429, when the current distribution execution mode is triggered by the third small hit result, the special display unit 429 is started so that the display corresponding to the 14 round games is started. Data setting for display control is performed. Thereafter, the value of the special figure special power counter is incremented by 1 (step SE116). Since the value of the special figure special power counter in the case where the distribution processing is executed is “4”, the value of the special figure special power counter which is added by adding 1 is the special power start processing (step SD710). Becomes "5" corresponding to. If an affirmative determination is made in step SE114, the V winning flag is cleared to "0".

  If "1" is not set in the V winning flag (step SE114: NO), a flag clear process is executed (step SE117). In the flag clearing process, a flag or the like for specifying the type of the small hit result is cleared to “0”. Thereafter, the value of the special figure special power counter is cleared to "0" (step SE118). Thus, the value of the special figure special power counter becomes “0” corresponding to the special figure change start process (step SD705).

<Tokuden start processing>
Next, the special power start processing executed in step SD710 of the special power special power control processing (FIG. 723) will be described.

  In the special power start process, the measurement of the opening period (for example, 4 seconds) is started and the opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 if the opening period is not started. When receiving the opening command, the sound light emission control device 81 executes light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 and sound output control of the speaker unit 54 so as to execute an opening effect. In addition, the sound emission control device 81 transmits an opening command to the display control device 82. When receiving the opening command, the display control device 82 controls the display of the symbol display device 424 so that the opening effect is executed.

  In the special power start process, when the opening period has elapsed, information corresponding to the number of times of execution of the round game in the current open / close execution mode is set in a round counter provided in the main RAM 65. The round counter is a counter for specifying the number of remaining round games in the open / close execution mode by the main CPU 63, and the value of the round counter is decremented by one each time the round game is executed once. In addition, information on the duration of the round game opening (specifically, 29 seconds) is set in a timer counter of the main RAM 65, and a special prize winning device 416 for one round game is set in a prize counter provided in the main RAM 65. (Specifically, “10”) corresponding to the maximum number of winnings for the game. Then, a special power release setting process is executed. In the opening setting process, the output of the drive signal to the driving unit for special power 416c is started so that the special power winning device 416 is in the open state. Thereafter, the value of the special figure special power counter is incremented by one. As a result, the value of the special figure special power counter becomes “6” corresponding to the special power open processing (step SD711).

<Treatment during special power release>
Next, the special power opening processing executed in step SD711 of the special figure special power control processing (FIG. 723) will be described.

  In the special power opening processing, the closing setting processing is executed when the opening continuation period of the special power prize device 416 has elapsed or when the special prize winning device 416 has a winning of the maximum number of game balls. In the closing setting process, the output of the drive signal to the driving unit for special power 416c is stopped so that the special power winning device 416 is closed. Thereafter, the value of the round counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by one.

  If the value of the round counter after subtraction by 1 is not “0”, information corresponding to the closing duration (specifically, 2 seconds) is set in the timer counter of the main RAM 65. Thereafter, the value of the special figure special power counter is incremented by one. Thereby, the value of the special figure special power counter becomes “7” corresponding to the special power closing process (step SD712).

  If the value of the round counter after subtraction by one is “0”, information corresponding to the ending period (specifically, 10 seconds) is set in the timer counter of the main RAM 65. Further, the ending command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. When receiving the ending command, the sound light emission control device 81 executes the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 54 so that the ending effect is executed. The sound emission control device 81 transmits an ending command to the display control device 82. When receiving the ending command, the display control device 82 executes the display control of the symbol display device 424 so as to execute the ending effect. Thereafter, the value of the special figure special power counter is added by two. Thereby, the value of the special figure special power counter becomes “8” corresponding to the special power end processing (step SD713).

<Treatment during closing of special electric train>
Next, the special power closing process executed in step SD712 of the special power special power control process (FIG. 723) will be described.

  If the closing continuation period has elapsed, information on the opening duration of the round game (specifically, 29 seconds) is set in the timer counter of the main RAM 65, and one round game is set in the winning counter of the main RAM 65. The information (specifically, "10") corresponding to the upper limit winning number in the special power winning device 416 in is set. Then, the special power winning device 416 is opened by executing the special power opening setting process. Thereafter, the value of the special figure special power counter is decremented by one. As a result, the value of the special figure special power counter becomes “6” corresponding to the special power open processing (step SD711).

<Tokuden end processing>
Next, the special power ending process executed in step SD713 of the special power special power control process (FIG. 723) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The processing of steps SE201 to SE209 in the special power ending processing is executed by using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

  If the ending period has elapsed (step SE201: YES), “100” is set to the total counter of the main RAM 65 (step SE202), and “100” is set to the first special figure counter of the main RAM 65. It is set (step SE203). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the current open / close execution mode is triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side (step SE204). If the current open / close execution mode is triggered by the hold information on the first special figure side (step SE204: NO), it is determined whether the current open / close execution mode is triggered by the 15R jackpot result (step SE204). SE205). If a positive determination is made in step SE204 or SE205, "5" is set in the second special figure counter of the main RAM 65 (step SE206), and a negative determination is made in both step SE204 and step SE205. Is set to "1" in the second special figure counter of the main RAM 65 (step SE207). The ending condition of the high frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends by the processing of steps SE202 to SE207 is set.

  When the processing of step SE206 or step SE207 is executed, “1” is set to the support flag of the main RAM 65 (step SE208). Thereby, the support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode becomes the high frequency support mode. Thereafter, the value of the special figure special power counter is cleared to "0" (step SE209). Thus, the value of the special figure special power counter becomes “0” corresponding to the special figure change start process (step SD705).

<Notification that setting-related processing is being executed>
Next, in the main process (FIG. 690) started when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the setting confirmation process (step SC213) or the set value updating process (step SC216) is executed. A configuration for notifying that the user is in a situation will be described.

  FIG. 728 is an explanatory diagram for describing each area provided in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control.

  In the clear target area 371, the first display data buffer 271, the second display data buffer 272, the third display data buffer 273, the fourth display data buffer 274, and the fifth display data buffer 275 are provided as in the 88th embodiment. Is provided. Further, in the clear target area 371, in addition to the first to fifth display data buffers 271 to 275, a sixth display data buffer 471, a seventh display data buffer 472, and an eighth display data buffer 473 are provided.

  The first display data buffer 271 stores display data for causing the first special figure display unit 425 to perform a predetermined display. At step SD816 in the special figure fluctuation start processing (FIG. 724), the processing for starting the fluctuation display of the picture in the first special figure display unit 425 is executed, so that the display control in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) is performed. By means (step S8915), display data corresponding to the display at the start of the change of the first special figure display unit 425 is set in the first display data buffer 271. In addition, in the special figure changing process (step SD706) in the special figure special power control processing (FIG. 723), the processing for updating the display content of the first special figure display unit 425 is executed, whereby the first timer interrupt processing is performed. The display control means (step S8915) in (FIG. 638) sets the display data for causing the variable display of the pattern on the first special figure display unit 425 to proceed in the first display data buffer 271. Also, in the special figure changing process (step SD706) in the special figure special power control process (FIG. 723), the display content of the first special figure display unit 425 is changed to the hit / non-permission determination process in the current game round (step SD803) and the big hit. By performing processing for setting display contents corresponding to the processing result of the type determination processing (step SD805), the first special figure display is performed by the display control means (step S8915) in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638). Display data for causing the unit 425 to perform a display corresponding to the result of the current game round is set in the first display data buffer 271. The display data set in this case is the display data selected in step SD807 or step SD812 of the special figure change start process (FIG. 724) at the start of the current game round. In addition, the display data set in this case is stored and held in the first display data buffer 271 until the first special figure display unit 425 starts a new game round. Note that a first display circuit 261 is provided corresponding to the first special figure display unit 425, and the display data stored in the first display data buffer 271 is supplied to the first display circuit 261 to display the display. The display corresponding to the data is performed on the first special map display unit 425.

  The second display data buffer 272 stores display data for causing the first special figure suspension display unit 427 to perform a predetermined display. When the hold information on the first special figure side is newly stored in the first special figure reservation area 452 in the reservation information acquisition processing (step SD701) in the special figure special power control processing (FIG. 723), the first timer The display control means (step S8915) in the interrupt process (FIG. 638) stores the display data corresponding to the number of the first special figure side reserved information stored in the first special figure reserved area 452 after the storage. It is set in the display data buffer 272. In addition, when the hold information on the first special figure side is consumed as an opportunity to execute the game times in the data setting processing (step SD802) in the special figure change start processing (FIG. 724), the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638), the display control means (step S8915) stores the display data corresponding to the number of the reservation information on the first special figure side stored in the first special figure reservation area 452 after the digestion in the second display data buffer 272. Is set to Note that a second display circuit 262 is provided corresponding to the first special figure suspension display unit 427, and the display data stored in the second display data buffer 272 is supplied to the second display circuit 262 so that The display corresponding to the display data is performed in the first special figure suspension display section 427.

  The third display data buffer 273 stores display data for causing the general-purpose display unit 423a to perform a predetermined display. The process for starting the variation display of the picture on the general figure display unit 423a is executed in the general figure change start processing (step SD606) of the general figure control process (FIG. 722), so that the first timer interrupt processing ( The display control means (step S8915) in FIG. 638) sets the display data corresponding to the display at the start of the change of the general-purpose display unit 423a in the third display data buffer 273. In addition, a process for updating the display content of the general-figure display unit 423a is performed in the general-figure changing process (step SD607) of the general-figure general control process (FIG. 722), whereby the first timer interrupt processing ( The display control means (step S8915) in FIG. 638) sets the display data for causing the variation display of the picture on the general-purpose display unit 423a to proceed in the third display data buffer 273. Further, the display contents of the general figure display unit 423a in the general figure changing process (step SD607) of the general figure general control process (FIG. 722) are changed to display contents corresponding to the result of the guidance state lottery in the current variable display time. Is performed by the display control means (step S8915) in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) to cause the universal figure display unit 423a to perform a display corresponding to the result of the current variable display times. Is set in the third display data buffer 273. In this case, the display data set in this case is stored and held in the third display data buffer 273 until a state in which the general variable display unit 423a starts a new variable display cycle. Note that a third display circuit 263 is provided in correspondence with the general-purpose display unit 423a, and the display data stored in the third display data buffer 273 is supplied to the third display circuit 263 so that the display data is The corresponding display is performed on the general-purpose display unit 423a.

  The fourth display data buffer 274 stores display data for causing the general-purpose reservation display unit 423b to perform a predetermined display. When the general-purpose side hold information is newly stored in the general-purpose side hold area 455 in the general-purpose side hold information acquisition process (step SD601) of the general-purpose side power control process (FIG. 722), the first The display control means (step S8915) in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) stores the display data corresponding to the number of the general-purpose-side hold information stored in the general-purpose hold area 455 after the storage in the fourth display data buffer. 274 is set. Also, in the case where the hold information of the general figure side is exhausted as the execution trigger of the variable display time of the general figure display unit 423a in the general figure change start processing (step SD606) of the general figure general control process (FIG. 722). In the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638), the display control means (step S8915) displays the display data corresponding to the number of the general-purpose holding information stored in the general-purpose holding area 455 after the digestion in the fourth timer. It is set in the display data buffer 274. It should be noted that a fourth display circuit 264 is provided so as to correspond to the general-purpose pending display section 423b, and the display data stored in the fourth display data buffer 274 is supplied to the fourth display circuit 264 so that the display data is displayed. Is displayed on the general-purpose-schedule display unit 423b.

  The fifth display data buffer 275 stores display data for causing the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 to perform predetermined display. The setting of the display data in the fifth display data buffer 275 is executed in step SE303, step SE307, and step SE310 in the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 729) described later. A fifth display circuit 265 is provided corresponding to the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and the display data stored in the fifth display data buffer 275 is supplied to the fifth display circuit 265. Accordingly, a display corresponding to the display data is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  The sixth display data buffer 471 stores display data for causing the second special figure display unit 426 to perform a predetermined display. At step SD816 in the special figure fluctuation start processing (FIG. 724), the processing for starting the fluctuation display of the picture in the second special figure display unit 426 is executed, so that the display control in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) is performed. By means (step S8915), the display data corresponding to the display at the start of the change of the second special figure display unit 426 is set in the sixth display data buffer 471. In addition, in the special figure changing process (step SD706) in the special figure special power control processing (FIG. 723), the processing for updating the display content of the second special figure display unit 426 is executed, whereby the first timer interrupt processing is performed. The display control means (step S8915) in (FIG. 638) sets the display data for causing the variable display of the picture on the second special figure display unit 426 to proceed in the sixth display data buffer 471. Also, in the special figure changing process (step SD706) in the special figure special power control process (FIG. 723), the display content of the second special figure display unit 426 is displayed in the current game round to determine whether or not it is a hit (step SD803). The display control in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) is performed by executing processing for setting display contents corresponding to the processing results of the type determination processing (step SD805) and the small hit type determination processing (step SD809). By means (step S8915), display data for causing the second special figure display unit 426 to perform display corresponding to the result of the current game round is set in the sixth display data buffer 471. The display data set in this case is the display data selected in step SD807, step SD811, or step SD812 of the special figure change start process (FIG. 724) at the start of the current game round. The display data set in this case is stored and held in the sixth display data buffer 471 until the second special figure display unit 426 starts a new game round. Note that a sixth display circuit is provided corresponding to the second special figure display unit 426, and the display data stored in the sixth display data buffer 471 is supplied to the sixth display circuit so that the display data is A corresponding display is performed on the second special figure display unit 426.

  The seventh display data buffer 472 stores display data for causing the second special figure suspension display unit 428 to perform a predetermined display. When the hold information on the second special figure side is newly stored in the second special figure holding area 453 in the obtaining processing (step SD701) of the hold information in the special figure special power control processing (FIG. 723), the first timer In the interrupt processing (FIG. 638), the display control means (step S8915) stores the display data corresponding to the number of the second special figure side hold information stored in the second special figure hold area 453 after the storage in the seventh control. It is set in the display data buffer 472. In addition, when the hold information on the second special figure side is consumed as an opportunity to execute the game in the data setting processing (step SD802) in the special figure change start processing (FIG. 724), the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638), the display data corresponding to the number of the second special figure side reserved information stored in the second special figure reserved area 453 after the digestion by the display control means (step S8915) is stored in the seventh display data buffer 472. Is set to Note that a seventh display circuit is provided in correspondence with the second special figure suspension display unit 428, and the display data stored in the seventh display data buffer 472 is supplied to the seventh display circuit so that the display data is displayed. Is displayed on the second special figure reservation display section 428.

  The eighth display data buffer 473 stores display data for causing the special display unit 429 to perform a predetermined display. If information on the number of round games is set in the display start processing (step SD903) of the special display unit 429 in the special figure finalizing processing (FIG. 725) in the game corresponding to the jackpot result, the first timer interrupt The display control means (step S8915) in the process (FIG. 638) stores the display data corresponding to the information of the number of round games in the eighth display data buffer 473. If the information on the number of round games is set in the display start processing (step SE115) of the special display unit 429 in the distribution processing (FIG. 726) by entering the distribution execution mode, the first timer Display data corresponding to the information on the number of round games is stored in the eighth display data buffer 473 by the display control means (step S8915) in the interruption processing (FIG. 638). Also, when the light-off process (step SD817) of the special display unit 429 is executed in the special figure change start process (FIG. 724), the display control means (step S8915) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638) is executed. Thus, the display data in the eighth display data buffer 473 is cleared to "0". Note that an eighth display circuit is provided corresponding to the special display portion 429, and the display data stored in the eighth display data buffer 473 is supplied to the eighth display circuit so that a display corresponding to the display data is provided. Is performed on the special display unit 429.

  Since the first to eighth display data buffers 271 to 275 and 471 to 473 are included in the clear target area 371, the first RAM clearing process (step SC218) of the main process (FIG. 690) or the setting value updating process (step When the second RAM clearing process of SC216) is executed, the display data set in the first to eighth display data buffers 271 to 275, 471 to 473 are cleared to "0". The clear target area 371 includes an area for special figure special electric power control and an area for ordinary figure general electric power control in addition to the first to eighth display data buffers 271 to 275 and 471 to 473. Therefore, when the first RAM clear processing or the second RAM clear processing is executed, the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode regardless of the support mode immediately before the supply of the operation power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. In addition, the game is not executed, the opening / closing execution mode is not executed, the general-purpose display unit 423a is not variably displayed, and the guidance unit 432 of the second operating unit 413 is turned off. It will be in the non-guided state. The setting update display flag and the setting confirmation display flag provided in the specific control work area 221 are cleared to “0”, and the setting update area 342 provided in the specific control work area 221 is cleared to “0”. Is done. In addition, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to “0”, and the initialization is performed. After the various registers of the main CPU 63 are also cleared to "0", the initial setting is executed.

  FIG. 729 is a flowchart showing the second timer interrupt processing executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processing of step SE301 to step SE317 in the second timer interrupt processing is executed using the specific control program and the specific control data in the main CPU 63. In the second timer interrupt processing, an interrupt is permitted when the setting confirmation processing (step SC213) of the main processing (FIG. 690) is started, and an interruption is performed when the setting confirmation processing (step SC213) is terminated. Is forbidden. In the second timer interrupt process, an interrupt is permitted when the set value update process (step SC216) of the main process (FIG. 690) is started, and is interrupted when the set value update process (step SC216) is ended. Is forbidden. Also, the second timer interrupt processing is interrupted from the setting of interrupt permission in step SC230 of the main processing (FIG. 690) to the setting of prohibition of interrupt in step SC227 of the main processing (FIG. 690). Is allowed. The same applies to the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638).

  First, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit the occurrence of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 729) (step SE301). By prohibiting the occurrence of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638), the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638) interrupts the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 729) even if the first interrupt cycle has elapsed. Can be prevented from being started. In addition, since the occurrence of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 729) is prohibited, even if the second interrupt cycle has elapsed during the execution of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 729), the second timer interrupt process is performed. It is possible to prevent the processing (FIG. 729) from being started redundantly.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control (step SE302). The setting update display flag is a flag for specifying by the main CPU 63 whether or not the setting value updating process (step SC216) is being executed by the main CPU 63. Similarly to the 88th embodiment, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 729) is started by interruption even in the situation where the set value update process (step SC216) is being executed. If an affirmative determination is made in step SE302, a setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update is executed (step SE303). In the setting process, similarly to the 65th embodiment, a display indicating that the set value of the pachinko machine 10 is being updated on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and the display of the pachinko machine 10 The display data for displaying the current set value is set in the fifth display data buffer 275. As a result, a display indicating that the set values of the pachinko machine 10 are being updated and a display indicating the current set values of the pachinko machine 10 are performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. . This display is continued while the set value updating process (step SC216) is being executed.

  Thereafter, a setting process for the first display data buffer 271 during the setting update is executed (step SE304). FIG. 730 (a) is a flowchart showing a setting process for the first display data buffer 271 during setting update. The processing of steps SE401 to SE405 in the setting processing for the first display data buffer 271 during the setting update is executed using the specific control program and the specific control data in the main CPU 63.

  In the setting process, in the situation where the set value updating process (step SC216) is being executed, the first variation of the pattern is displayed on the first special figure display unit 425 in the same manner as when the game is being executed. The processing of is performed. In the setting process, a special figure change display table and a special figure change display table used in the special figure changing process (step SD706) are used to cause the first special figure display unit 425 to perform the change display of the picture. One display order counter is used.

  Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not this time is the update timing of the display content of the first special map display unit 425 (step SE401). The cycle of updating the display content of the picture on the first special figure display unit 425 is the same as the cycle of updating the display content of the picture on the first special figure display unit 425 during the game. If it is the display content update timing (step SE401: YES), the value of the first display order counter of the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step SE402). When the value of the first display order counter after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value (for example, “20”) (step SE403: YES), the value of the first display order counter is cleared to “0” (step SE403). Step SE404). As described above, the first display order counter is a counter for specifying the display contents of the pattern to be derived from the special figure variable display table when the timing of updating the pattern in the first special figure display unit 425 has come. .

  If a negative determination is made in step E401, if a negative determination is made in step SE403, or if the process in step SE404 is performed, the display content of the picture corresponding to the current value of the first display order counter is used for special figures. The display data corresponding to the display content of the derived pattern is set in the first display data buffer 271 (step SE405). As a result, the picture corresponding to the display data is displayed on the first special figure display unit 425.

  With the above configuration, in a situation where the set value updating process (step SC216) is being executed, the display order is fixed in a fixed order, as in the case where the game times are being executed on the first special figure display unit 425. The variable display of the pattern by a certain display pattern is repeated in the first special figure display unit 425. In this case, the special display variable display table and the first display order counter used for performing the variable display of the pattern are used when the game number is executed in the first special figure display unit 425. Things. Thereby, it is possible to cause the first special figure display unit 425 to perform a variable display of the pattern while the set value update processing (step SC216) is being executed while suppressing an increase in the necessary storage capacity. Become.

  Returning to the description of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 729), after executing the setting process for the first display data buffer 271 during the setting update (step SE304), the process for the eighth display data buffer 473 during the setting update is executed. A setting process is executed (step SE305). In the setting process, display data for causing the special display unit 429 to perform a predetermined display is set in the eighth display data buffer 473. Specifically, the display setting corresponding to the number of executions of the round game when the 15R jackpot result is obtained in the display start processing (step SD903) of the special display unit 429 in the special figure finalizing processing (FIG. 725). In this case, the same display data as the display data set in the eighth display data buffer 473 is set in the eighth display data buffer 473. Thus, in the situation where the set value updating process (step SC216) is being executed, not only the variation display of the pattern is performed on the first special figure display unit 425 as in the case of the game times, but also the special display unit 429. As in the case where the 15R jackpot result is obtained, a display corresponding to the fact that the number of executions of the round game is 15 is displayed.

  The display data set in the first display data buffer 271 in step SE304 and the display data set in the eighth display data buffer 473 in step SE305 are executed when the set value update process (step SC216) ends. Is cleared to "0" in the second RAM clearing process (step SB313). Thus, when the set value updating process (step SC216) ends, the display of the variation of the pattern on the first special figure display unit 425 and the display corresponding to the fact that the number of round games executed is 15 on the special display unit 429 are performed. Can be terminated. Thereafter, the display start process (FIG. 696) is executed in step SC226 of the main process (FIG. 690), so that the initial display data for the special figure is set in the first display data buffer 271. Thus, the initial display is started in the first special figure display unit 425 as in the 88th embodiment. On the other hand, the special display unit 429 is kept off until the next opening / closing execution mode is started.

  Note that the display data set in the eighth display data buffer 473 in step SE305 is not limited to a configuration that is display data for performing display corresponding to the number of executions of the round game being 15. For example, as in the case of the 6R jackpot result, the display data may be display data for causing a display corresponding to the number of executions of the round game to be six, similar to the case of the first small hit result. May be display data for making a display corresponding to that the number of round games executed is five, and the number of round games executed is eight as in the case of the second small hit result. It may be display data for causing a display corresponding to a certain thing to be performed, and for performing a display corresponding to the number of executions of the round game being fourteen as in the case of the third small hit result. May be displayed. Even in these cases, when the opening / closing execution mode occurs, the set value updating process (step SC216) is performed using display data used to cause the special display unit 429 to perform a predetermined display. The special display unit 429 can notify the user of the situation.

  When a negative determination is made in step SE302, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SE306). The setting confirmation display flag is a flag for specifying by the main CPU 63 whether or not the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed by the main CPU 63. Similarly to the 88th embodiment, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 729) is started by interrupting even if the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed. When an affirmative determination is made in step SE306, a setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting confirmation is executed (step SE307). In the setting process, similarly to the 65th embodiment, a display indicating that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being checked on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and the display of the pachinko machine 10 The display data for displaying the current set value is set in the fifth display data buffer 275. As a result, a display indicating that the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being confirmed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and a display indicating the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are performed. . This display is continued while the processing for setting confirmation (step SC213) is being executed.

  Thereafter, a setting process for the sixth display data buffer 471 during the setting confirmation is executed (step SE308). FIG. 730 (b) is a flowchart showing a setting process for the sixth display data buffer 471 during setting confirmation. The processing of steps SE501 to SE505 in the setting processing for the sixth display data buffer 471 during the setting confirmation is executed using the specific control program and the specific control data in the main CPU 63.

  In the setting process, in the situation where the process for setting confirmation (step SC213) is being executed, the variation display of the pattern is performed in the same way as when the game round is executed on the second special figure display unit 426. Execute the processing of In addition, in the setting process, a special figure change display table used in the special figure change processing (step SD706) and the second A two display order counter is used.

  Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not this time is the update timing of the display content of the second special map display unit 426 (step SE501). The cycle of updating the display content of the pattern on the second special figure display unit 426 is the same as the cycle of updating the display content of the pattern on the second special figure display unit 426 in the game time. If it is the update timing of the display content (step SE501: YES), the value of the second display order counter of the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step SE502). When the value of the second display order counter after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value (for example, “20”) (step SE503: YES), the value of the second display order counter is cleared to “0” (step SE503). Step SE504). The second display order counter is a counter for specifying the display content of the pattern to be derived from the special figure variable display table when the timing of updating the pattern in the second special figure display unit 426 has been described above. .

  If a negative determination is made in step E501, if a negative determination is made in step SE503, or if the processing in step SE504 is performed, the display content of the picture corresponding to the current value of the second display order counter is changed to a special figure. The display data corresponding to the display contents of the derived picture is set in the sixth display data buffer 471 (step SE505). As a result, a picture corresponding to the display data is displayed on the second special figure display unit 426.

  With the above configuration, in the situation where the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed, the display order is fixed in a fixed order, as in the case where the game times are being executed on the second special figure display unit 426. The variable display of the pattern according to a certain display pattern is repeated in the second special figure display unit 426. In this case, the special display variable display table and the second display order counter used for performing the variable display of the picture are used when the game number is executed in the second special figure display unit 426. Things. Thereby, it is possible to cause the second special figure display unit 426 to perform a variation display of the pattern while the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being performed while suppressing an increase in the necessary storage capacity. Become.

  Returning to the description of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 729), after executing the setting process for the sixth display data buffer 471 during the setting confirmation (step SE308), the process proceeds to the eighth display data buffer 473 during the setting confirmation. A setting process is executed (step SE309). In the setting process, display data for causing the special display unit 429 to perform a predetermined display is set in the eighth display data buffer 473. Specifically, the display setting corresponding to the number of executions of the round game when the 6R jackpot result is obtained in the display start processing (step SD903) of the special display unit 429 in the special figure finalizing processing (FIG. 725). In this case, the same display data as the display data set in the eighth display data buffer 473 is set in the eighth display data buffer 473. Thus, in the situation where the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed, not only the variation display of the pattern is performed on the second special figure display unit 426 as in the case of the game round, but also the special display unit 429. In the same manner as in the case of the 6R jackpot result, a display corresponding to the execution number of the round game being six is displayed. The display content of the special display unit 429 is different from the display content of the special display unit 429 when the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed.

  The display data set in the sixth display data buffer 471 in step SE308 and the display data set in the eighth display data buffer 473 in step SE309 are set to “0” when the setting confirmation process (step SC213) ends. Is cleared. Thus, when the setting confirmation process (step SC213) ends, the display of the variation of the picture on the second special figure display unit 426 and the display corresponding to the fact that the number of executions of the round game is six on the special display unit 429 are performed. Can be terminated. Thereafter, the display start process (FIG. 696) is executed in step SC226 of the main process (FIG. 690), so that the initial display data for the special figure is set in the sixth display data buffer 471. Thus, the initial display is started in the second special figure display unit 426. On the other hand, the special display unit 429 is kept off until the next opening / closing execution mode is started.

  Note that the display data set in the eighth display data buffer 473 in step SE309 is not limited to a configuration that is display data for performing a display corresponding to the number of executions of the round game being six. For example, as in the case of a 15R jackpot result, display data for causing a display corresponding to the number of executions of a round game to be 15 may be performed, similar to the case of a first small hit result. May be display data for making a display corresponding to that the number of round games executed is five, and the number of round games executed is eight as in the case of the second small hit result. It may be display data for causing a display corresponding to a certain thing to be performed, and for performing a display corresponding to the number of executions of the round game being fourteen as in the case of the third small hit result. May be displayed. Even in these cases, when the open / close execution mode occurs, the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is performed using the display data used to cause the special display unit 429 to perform a predetermined display. The special display unit 429 can notify the user of the presence of the message.

  If a negative determination is made in step SE306, the process of step SE310 is performed. The processing content of Step SE310 is the same as that of Step S8406 of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 628) in the 65th embodiment.

  When the processing of step SE305, step SE309, or step SE310 is executed, the transmission state of the signal through the type data signal line LN1 and the type clock signal line LN2 is turned off as in the 65th embodiment (step SE311). ), The signal transmission state through the display data signal line LN3 and the display clock signal line LN4 is turned off (step SE312). Thereafter, the type counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control is updated (step SE313).

  The type counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the transmission target of the display data among the first to eighth display data buffers 271 to 275 and 471 to 473 in the current processing of the second timer interrupt processing. . When the type counter value is “1”, the display data of the first display data buffer 271 is to be transmitted, and when the type counter value is “2”, the display data of the second display data buffer 272 is to be transmitted. When the value of the type counter is “3”, the display data of the third display data buffer 273 is to be transmitted, and when the value of the type counter is “4”, the display data of the fourth display data buffer 274 is When the type counter value is “5”, the display data of the fifth display data buffer 275 is the transmission target, and when the type counter value is “6”, the display of the sixth display data buffer 471 is performed. If the data is to be transmitted and the value of the type counter is “7”, the display data in the seventh display data buffer 472 is to be transmitted and the type If the value of the data is "8", the display data of the eighth display data buffer 473 is transmitted. In the updating process of the type counter, the value of the type counter is incremented by one, and if the value of the type counter after the addition exceeds the upper limit value of “8”, the value of the type counter is set to “1”. . Thus, the transmission target of the display data is sequentially changed in the first to eighth display data buffers 271 to 275 and 471 to 473 each time the second timer interrupt processing is performed.

  After that, the type data corresponding to the value of the type counter is read from the main ROM 64 (step SE314). Specifically, when the value of the type counter is “1”, the type data corresponding to the first display circuit 261 is read from the main ROM 64, and when the value of the type counter is “2”, the second type is read. The type data corresponding to the display circuit 262 is read from the main ROM 64, and when the value of the type counter is “3”, the type data corresponding to the third display circuit 263 is read from the main ROM 64, and the value of the type counter is read. When the value is "4", the type data corresponding to the fourth display circuit 264 is read from the main ROM 64, and when the value of the type counter is "5", the type data corresponding to the fifth display circuit 265 is read. If the value of the type counter is "6", the type data corresponding to the sixth display circuit is read from the main ROM 64, and the value of the type counter is "7". In some cases read from the main side ROM64 the type data corresponding to the seventh display circuit, when the value of the type counter is "8" reads the type data from the main side ROM64, corresponding to the eighth display circuit.

  Thereafter, display data is read from the display data buffers 271 to 275, 471 to 473 corresponding to the value of the type counter (step SE315). Specifically, when the value of the type counter is “1”, the display data is read from the first display data buffer 271, and when the value of the type counter is “2”, the display data is read from the second display data buffer 272. The display data is read, and if the value of the type counter is "3", the display data is read from the third display data buffer 273. If the value of the type counter is "4", the display data is read from the fourth display data buffer 274. The display data is read, and if the value of the type counter is "5", the display data is read from the fifth display data buffer 275. If the value of the type counter is "6", the display data is read from the sixth display data buffer 471. The display data is read, and if the value of the type counter is “7”, the display data is read from the seventh display data buffer 472 and the type counter is read. If the value is "8" reads the display data from the eighth display data buffer 473.

  Thereafter, transmission processing of various signals is executed (step SE316). In the transmission processing, a signal is output to the type data signal line LN1 and the type clock signal line LN2 so that the type data read in step SE314 is transmitted to the display IC 266. In addition, in the transmission processing, a signal is output to the display data signal line LN3 and the display clock signal line LN4 such that the display data read in step SE315 is transmitted to the display IC 266.

  Thereafter, interruption permission is set to permit generation of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 729) (step SE317).

  Next, how the display contents of the first special figure display unit 425, the second special figure display unit 426, and the special display unit 429 change according to the state of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 731. . FIG. 731 (a) shows a period during which the setting value updating process (step SC216) is being executed, FIG. 731 (b) shows a period during which the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed, and FIG. 731 (c). ) Shows a period during which the pattern change display is executed on the first special figure display unit 425, and FIG. 731 (d) shows a period during which a predetermined pattern is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display unit 425. FIG. 731 (e) shows a period during which the pattern change display is being performed on the second special figure display unit 426, and FIG. 731 (f) shows that a predetermined pattern is stopped on the second special figure display unit 426. FIG. 731 (g) shows a period in which a predetermined display is being performed on the special display unit 429.

  First, a situation where the setting value updating process (step SC216) and the setting confirmation process (step SC213) are not executed will be described.

  At the timing of t1, the game is started to be triggered by the hold information on the first special figure side, so that the variation display of the picture starts on the first special figure display unit 425 as shown in FIG. 731 (c). Is done. Then, when the display duration of the game times elapses at the timing of t2, the variation display of the pattern in the first special figure display unit 425 is ended as shown in FIGS. 731 (c) and 731 (d), Display of a picture corresponding to the result of the hit / fail determination process and the type determination process in the game round is started in the first special figure display unit 425. In this case, the 15R jackpot result is selected in the game round. Therefore, at the timing of t2, the stop display of the picture corresponding to the 15R jackpot result is started in the first special figure display unit 425.

  Thereafter, when the final stop period of the stop display of the pattern elapses at the timing of t3, the game corresponding to the jackpot result ends, and the open / close execution mode is started. In this case, at the timing of the time t3, as shown in FIG. 731 (g), the display corresponding to the fact that the number of executions of the round game is 15 is started on the special display unit 429. Until the timing of t3, the special display unit 429 is turned off.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t4, the opening / closing execution mode ends, and the variation display of the picture is started on the second special figure display unit 426 as shown in FIG. 731 (e). In this case, the special display unit 429 is turned off at the timing of the t4 as shown in FIG. 731 (g). Then, when the display duration of the game times elapses at the timing of t5, the variation display of the pattern in the second special figure display unit 426 is terminated as shown in FIGS. The display of the picture corresponding to the result of the hit / failure determination process and the type determination process in the game round is started in the second special figure display unit 426. In this case, the first small hit result is selected in the game round. Therefore, at the timing of t5, the stop display of the picture corresponding to the first small hit result is started in the second special figure display unit 426.

  Thereafter, the distribution execution mode is started when the final stop period of the stop display of the picture has elapsed, and the distribution execution mode ends at the timing of t6. The opening / closing execution mode is started at the timing of t6 because the V prize is generated in the distribution execution mode. In this case, at the timing of the time t6, as shown in FIG. 731 (g), the display corresponding to the execution number of the round game being five is started on the special display unit 429. Until the timing of t6, the special display unit 429 is turned off. After that, although the opening / closing execution mode ends at the timing of t7, the display corresponding to the execution number of the round game of five times on the special display unit 429 is the first special figure display unit 425 or the second special figure display unit 426. Is continued until a new game round is started.

  When the game is being performed as described above, the display corresponding to the number of times the round game has been executed is displayed on the special display unit 429 in a situation where the pattern is displayed in a variable manner on the first special figure display unit 425. Similarly, in the situation where the display corresponding to the number of times of execution of the round game is being performed on the special display unit 429, the variation display of the pattern is not performed on the first special figure display unit 425. In addition, when the game is performed as described above, the display corresponding to the number of times the round game has been executed is displayed on the special display unit 429 in a situation where the pattern variation display is performed on the second special figure display unit 426. Is not performed, and similarly, in the situation where the display corresponding to the number of times of the round game is performed on the special display unit 429, the variation display of the pattern is not performed on the second special figure display unit 426. .

  Next, a situation in which the set value update process (step SC216) is being performed will be described.

  At time t8, the set value update process (step SC216) is started as shown in FIG. 731 (a). In this case, at the timing of the time t8, as shown in FIG. 731 (c), the first special figure display unit 425 switches from the light-off state to the state in which the pattern is displayed in a variable manner. Also, at the timing of the time t8, as shown in FIG. 731 (g), the special display unit 429 switches from the light-off state to a state in which a display corresponding to the number of executions of the round game is fifteen.

  After that, at the timing of t9, the setting value update processing (step SC216) ends as shown in FIG. 731 (a). As a result, at the timing of the t9, as shown in FIG. In this case, as shown in FIG. 731 (d), the first special figure display unit 425 starts the initial display. The contents of the initial display are the same as the contents of the initial display of the special figure display unit 37a in the 88th embodiment. Further, at the timing of the t9, the display corresponding to the fact that the number of times of execution of the round game is 15 in the special display section 429 is ended as shown in FIG. 731 (g). In this case, the special display unit 429 is turned off.

  Next, a situation in which the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being performed will be described.

  At the timing of t10, the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is started as shown in FIG. 731 (b). In this case, as shown in FIG. 731 (e), at the timing of the time t10, the second special figure display unit 426 switches from the unlit state to the state in which the pattern is displayed in a fluctuating manner. Also, at the timing of the time t10, as shown in FIG. 731 (g), the special display unit 429 switches from a light-off state to a state in which a display corresponding to the number of executions of the round game is six.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t11, the setting confirmation process (step SC213) ends as shown in FIG. 731 (b). Thus, at the timing of the time t11, the variation display of the pattern on the second special figure display unit 426 is ended as shown in FIG. 731 (e). In this case, as shown in FIG. 731 (f), the second special figure display unit 426 starts the initial display. The contents of the initial display are the same as the contents of the initial display of the special figure display unit 37a in the 88th embodiment. Further, at the timing of the t11, the display corresponding to the execution number of the round game of six times on the special display unit 429 is ended as shown in FIG. 731 (g). In this case, the special display unit 429 is turned off.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  In the situation where the set value updating process (step SC216) is being executed, the first special figure display unit 425 displays a change in the pattern, and the special display unit 429 displays a display corresponding to the number of round games executed. Will be When a game is being played, a display corresponding to the number of round games executed is not made on the special display unit 429 in a situation where the pattern of the pattern is changed and displayed on the first special figure display unit 425. . Therefore, the manager of the game hall confirms that the pattern change display is performed on the first special figure display unit 425 and that the display corresponding to the number of round games executed is performed on the special display unit 429. By doing so, it is possible to grasp that the setting value updating process (step SC216) is being executed.

  In particular, the first special figure display section 425 and the special display section 429 are provided in an area visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 52 without the need to open the gaming machine body 12 and the front door frame 14. By notifying that the setting value updating process (step SC216) is being executed on the first special figure display unit 425 and the special display unit 429, the setting value updating process (step SC216) ) Can be easily confirmed whether or not the situation is being executed.

  In addition, when the game is being played, the opening / closing execution mode occurs after the game has been executed, so that the special display 429 is displayed after the display of the pattern is changed on the first special figure display 425. A display corresponding to the number of executions of the round game is performed. In the situation where the setting value updating process (step SC216) is being performed, such display before and after the execution period is performed simultaneously, so that the setting value updating process (step SC216) is being performed. This can be clearly notified.

  A notification indicating that the setting value update process (step SC216) is being performed is performed based on a combination of the display contents of the first special figure display unit 425 and the special display unit 429. Accordingly, in order to illegally perform the notification indicating that the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed, the first special figure display unit 425 and the special display unit 429 must be provided. Need to be fraudulent. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to perform the wrongdoing.

  The first special figure display unit 425 and the special display unit 429 are display units used when a game is being executed. By performing notification indicating that the setting value update process (step SC216) is being performed using such a display unit, it is possible to perform the notification while suppressing complication of the configuration. Become.

  When a notification indicating that the setting value updating process (step SC216) is being performed is performed, the first special figure display unit 425 performs a variable display of the pattern, and the special display unit 429 performs the round game. The display corresponding to the number of times is performed. The variation display of the picture on the first special figure display unit 425 is a display content that occurs even when the game is executed, and the display corresponding to the number of round games executed on the special display unit 429 indicates that the game is executed. This is the display content that also occurs when there is Thus, it is possible to notify that the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed using the display content generated when the game is being executed.

  The first special figure display unit 425 and the special display unit 429 are provided as a special figure unit 422 in a predetermined range. Accordingly, it is possible to easily confirm the display contents of the first special figure display unit 425 and the special display unit 429.

  In a situation where a game is being executed, the special display 429 is opened / closed when a display corresponding to the number of round games executed is being displayed on the special display section 429. On the other hand, in the situation where the set value update processing (step SC216) is being executed, the special display unit 429 is displaying a state corresponding to the number of times of execution of the round game, and the special prize winning device 416 is in the closed state. Is maintained. Thereby, it is possible to notify that the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed.

  In the situation where the process for setting confirmation (step SC213) is being executed, the variation display of the pattern is performed on the second special figure display unit 426, and the display corresponding to the number of round game executions is performed on the special display unit 429. Is When the game is being played, the display corresponding to the number of times of the round game is not performed on the special display unit 429 in a situation where the pattern change is displayed on the second special figure display unit 426. . Therefore, the manager of the game hall confirms that the pattern change display is performed on the second special figure display unit 426 and that the display corresponding to the number of round games executed is performed on the special display unit 429. By doing so, it is possible to grasp that the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed.

  The special display unit 429 corresponds to the number of times the round game has been executed, regardless of whether the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed or the setting confirmation process (step SC213). In the situation where the setting value updating process (step SC216) is being executed, the pattern change display is performed on the first special figure display unit 425, whereas the setting confirmation process (step SC213). ) Is executed, the second special figure display unit 426 performs a variable display of the pattern. This allows the administrator of the game hall to clearly distinguish which of the setting value update processing (step SC216) and the setting confirmation processing (step SC213) is being executed.

  A change in each set value of the number of numerical information of the random number counter C1 determined to be a jackpot result in the hit / non-hold information on the second special figure side is determined as a hit / failure with the second special figure side hold information. It is absorbed by the variation in the number of numerical information of the random number counter C1 determined to be a departure result in the determination processing. Thereby, a big hit result is obtained in the hit / fail determination processing for the hold information on the second special figure side while not affecting the probability of a small hit result in the hit / fail determination processing for the hold information on the second special figure side. The probability can be changed.

  The number of pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 determined to be the small hit result in the hit / fail determination processing for the hold information on the second special figure side is the same regardless of the set value. This makes it possible to make the probability that the small hit result is selected in the hit determination processing for the hold information on the second special figure side constant for all the set values. Further, even if the probability that the small hit result is selected in the hit / non-hold information on the second special figure side is fixed in this way, the hit / non-OK determination processing on the hold information on the second special figure side can be performed. Since the variation of each set value of the probability that the jackpot result is selected is absorbed by the variation of the probability that the result is selected, the jackpot result is selected in the hit determination process for the hold information on the second special figure side. It is possible to set the probability of being performed as a probability according to the set value.

  The number of pieces of numerical information of the random number counter C1 determined to be an out-of-course result in the rejection determination processing for the hold information on the second special figure side is the largest regardless of each set value. As a result, the variation in each set value of the probability that the jackpot result is selected in the hit / fail determination processing for the hold information on the second special figure side is selected in the hit / fail determination processing for the hold information on the second special figure side. Even if it is configured to absorb the variation in the probability of occurrence, the probability that the result will deviate in the rejection determination processing for the hold information on the second special figure side does not cause a large variation between the set values in a plurality of stages. It is possible to do.

  Note that, instead of the configuration of the above-described embodiment, in a situation where the set value updating process (step SC216) is being executed, the first special figure display unit 425 displays the variation of the picture and the second special figure display unit. At 426, a configuration may be adopted in which the display of the pattern is changed. When a game is being played, if one of the first special figure display unit 425 and the second special figure display unit 426 is displaying a variable pattern, the other is displaying a variable pattern. It is a configuration that cannot be done. In this case, in the situation where the set value updating process (step SC216) is being performed as described above, the first special figure display unit 425 and the second special figure display unit 426 each perform a variable display of a pattern. This makes it possible to notify the administrator of the gaming hall that the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed. In the case of notifying that the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed in this configuration, the change display of the picture in each of the first special figure display unit 425 and the second special figure display unit 426 is performed. In addition, a variation display of the picture may be performed on the general figure display section 423a. In addition to the variation display of the picture in each of the first special figure display section 425 and the second special figure display section 426, a special display section 429 is provided. It is good also as composition which a predetermined display is performed by.

  Further, the display content displayed on the special display unit 429 in the situation where the set value update process (step SC216) is being performed is not limited to the configuration that is the display content corresponding to the number of times the round game has been executed. Although the display content does not correspond to the number of executions of the round game, a predetermined display may be performed when at least one display segment 429a in the special display unit 429 is in a light emitting state. When a game is being played, the special display unit 429 is in a non-display state in which all display segments 429a are in an unlit state when a pattern is being changed and displayed on the first special figure display unit 425. Therefore, the setting value updating process (step SC216) is executed because the special display unit 429 is not in the non-display state in a situation where the pattern is being changed and displayed on the first special figure display unit 425. It is possible to notify that the situation is present. In addition, in the situation where the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed, the variation display of the pattern is performed on the second special figure display unit 426, and the display corresponding to the number of round games executed on the special display unit 429. Alternatively, a predetermined display may be performed.

  In addition to or instead of the configuration of the above-described embodiment, a dedicated display unit for notifying that the setting value update process (step SC216) is being performed is provided by the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame. A configuration may be provided in an area that can be visually recognized through the window panel 52 from the front of the pachinko machine 10 without the need to open the 14.

  In addition to or instead of the configuration of the above-described embodiment, a dedicated display unit for notifying that the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being performed is provided by the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame. A configuration may be provided in an area that can be visually recognized through the window panel 52 from the front of the pachinko machine 10 without the need to open the 14.

  In addition to or in place of the configuration of the above-described embodiment, a dedicated display unit and a setting confirmation process (step SC213) for notifying that the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed are provided. Each of the dedicated display units for notifying that the situation is being executed can be visually recognized through the window panel 52 from the front of the pachinko machine 10 without having to open the gaming machine body 12 and the front door frame 14. A configuration provided in a region may be adopted.

  Further, in addition to or instead of the configuration of the above-described embodiment, a dedicated purpose for notifying that the setting value updating process (step SC216) and the setting confirmation process (step SC213) are being executed is performed. The display unit may be provided in an area that can be visually recognized through the window panel 52 from the front of the pachinko machine 10 without having to open the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14. In this case, the notification is performed on the same dedicated display unit regardless of whether the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed or the setting confirmation process (step SC213). . Further, in the configuration, the display content on the same dedicated display unit differs between the situation in which the setting value update processing (step SC216) is being executed and the situation in which the setting confirmation processing (step SC213) is being executed. Configuration.

  Further, instead of the configuration of the above-described embodiment, the same notification is issued regardless of whether the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed or the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed. It may be configured to be executed. Also, a configuration may be adopted in which one of the situation in which the setting value updating process (step SC216) is being executed and the situation in which the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed is reported, but the other is not reported.

  Further, in addition to or instead of the configuration of the above-described embodiment, even if the set value update process (step SC216) is executed as in the above-described 87th embodiment, the first power supply operation is performed after the process at the start of supply of the operating power is performed. In the configuration in which the display at the time of the previous power interruption is restarted on the special figure display unit 425, when the set value update process (step SC216) is started, the display data corresponding to the display at the time of the previous power interruption is displayed. From the first display data buffer 271, the main RAM 65 is evacuated to an area where the “0” clear and initialization are not executed when the second RAM clear processing is executed, and when the set value update processing (step SC 216) is completed, the evacuation is performed. The display data may be returned to the first display data buffer 271. Accordingly, in a situation where the set value updating process (step SC216) is being executed, the display corresponding to the setting value updating process (step SC216) is performed on the first special figure display unit 425, and after the set value updating process (step SC216) is completed. Can restart the display at the last power interruption.

  Further, in addition to or instead of the configuration of the above-described embodiment, a configuration may be provided in which a distribution execution-compatible display unit that performs a display indicating the distribution execution mode is provided in a situation of the distribution execution mode. Good. The display unit corresponding to the distribution execution is switched from a non-display state (that is, a completely unlit state) to a predetermined display state when the distribution execution mode is started, and a predetermined display state is displayed when the distribution execution mode ends. The state can be switched to the non-display state. In this configuration, when the set value update process (step SC216) is being executed, the display unit corresponding to the sorting execution has a predetermined display state, and the special display unit 429 has a predetermined display state. It is possible to notify that the value update process (step SC216) is being executed. Further, such a configuration regarding the notification may be applied to a situation in which the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being performed.

  Further, in addition to or in place of the configuration of the above-described embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which the small hit result can be selected even when the hold information on the first special figure side is subjected to the hit determination processing. Even in this case, the variation in each set value of the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 determined to be a big hit result when the hit determination processing is performed on the hold information on the first special figure side is performed. May be absorbed by a variation in the number of numerical information of the random number counter C1 determined to be an out-of-order result when the hit / non-permission determination process is performed on the hold information on the first special figure side. . In this case, the probability that the small hit result is selected when the success / failure determination process is performed on the hold information on the first special figure side may be the same for each set value. In addition, in the case where the success / failure determination process is performed on the hold information on the first special figure side instead of the above-described configuration, the change in the number of pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 determined to be a big hit result in each set value. The minute is absorbed by the fluctuation of the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, which is determined to be a small hit result when the success / failure determination process is performed on the hold information on the first special figure side. Is also good.

  In addition, instead of the configuration of the above-described embodiment, each of the numbers of the numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 determined to be the big hit result when the hit determination processing is performed on the hold information on the second special figure side is performed. The variation in the set value is absorbed by the variation in the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, which is determined to be a small hit result when the hit / fail determination processing is performed on the hold information on the second special figure side. May be adopted.

  Further, in addition to or instead of the configuration of the above-described embodiment, as a configuration in which a high probability mode and a low probability mode in which the probability of being determined as a jackpot result in the hit determination process is relatively high and low exist. Is also good. In addition, in this configuration, the small hit result can be selected even when the hit / fail judgment processing is performed on the hold information on the first special figure side, and the hit / fail judgment is performed on the hold information on the first special figure side. Whether the small hitting result is selected by executing the determination process or the small hitting result is selected by executing the hit / fail judgment process on the hold information on the second special figure side, the distribution is executed. It is good also as composition which changes to opening and closing execution mode instead of mode. In the opening / closing execution mode, the special opening prize device 416 is configured to execute the short opening of about 1 second twice or less. In the configuration as described above, as a type of the big hit result, in the open / close execution mode, the special power winning device 416 is opened in the same manner as in the case of the small hit result, and after the end of the open / close execution mode, the high probability mode is set. If the support mode before the start of the opening / closing execution mode is the low frequency support mode, the result may be a latent probability change jackpot result in which the low frequency support mode is maintained. In this case, in the case where the mode is the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, the short opening of about 1 second is executed twice as small as about 2 times in the special prize winning device 416 triggered by the hold information on the first special figure side. , It is possible to make the player predict which of the small hit result and the latent probability change big hit result has triggered. In addition, in this configuration, the probability that the small hit result is selected when the hit determination processing is performed on at least the hold information on the first special figure side is the same or the same regardless of the hit / reject lottery mode and the set value. By adopting a configuration that is substantially the same, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing not only the set value but also the winning / decreasing lottery mode from the occurrence frequency of the small hit result.

  In addition, in addition to or in place of the configuration of the above-described embodiment, when an open / close execution mode occurs due to a V winning in any of the allocation execution modes that have resulted in small hits, the already terminated allocation The execution mode may be set to one round, and a display corresponding to the number of round games executed on the special display unit 429 may be performed. In this case, in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the first small hit result, a display corresponding to six round games is displayed on the special display portion 429, and in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the second small hit result, nine times. Is displayed on the special display unit 429, and in the open / close execution mode triggered by the third small hit result, a display corresponding to 15 round games is displayed on the special display unit 429.

  Further, in addition to or in place of the configuration of the above-described embodiment, only one kind of small hit result exists, and when a V prize occurs in the sorting execution mode, the number of round games generated in the subsequent opening / closing execution mode is reduced. It is good also as composition determined by lottery. In this case, the player pays attention to the timing at which the V winning occurs.

  Further, in addition to or instead of the configuration of the above-described embodiment, a configuration may be employed in which the distribution probability of the type of the jackpot result varies according to the set value. In this case, the probability that the jackpot result is selected in the hit determination process may be changed according to the set value, and the probability that the jackpot result is selected in the hit determination process does not change according to the set value. The configuration may be constant.

<97th embodiment>
The present embodiment is different from the 96th embodiment in the processing configuration of the second timer interrupt processing. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the above-described 96th embodiment will be described. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the above-described 96th embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 732 is a flowchart showing the second timer interrupt processing in the present embodiment. Note that the processing of step SE601 to step SE615 in the second timer interrupt processing is executed using the specific control program and the specific control data in the main CPU 63.

  First, the setting of the interruption prohibition is performed as in step SE301 of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 729) in the 96th embodiment (step SE601). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the setting update display flag in the specific control work area 221 is set to "1" (step SE602). When “1” is set to the setting update display flag (step SE602: YES), the setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update is executed (step SE603). The content of the setting process is the same as that in step SE303 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 729) in the 96th embodiment.

  Thereafter, a setting process of the all-lit display during the setting update is executed (step SE604). In the setting process, all the display segments of the general-figure display unit 423a, all the light-emitting units of the general-figure hold display unit 423b, all the display segments 425a of the first special-figure display unit 425, and the second special-figure display unit 426, all the light-emitting parts of the first special-figure suspension display unit 427, all the light-emitting parts of the second special-figure suspension display unit 428, and all the display segments 429a of the special display unit 429. Light emission state. That is, all the display units that are display-controlled by the main CPU 63 and are visible through the window panel 52 without the need to open the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are set to the light emitting state. This full lighting state ends when the set value update process (step SC216) ends. The above all lighting state does not occur in other situations including the situation where a game is being played. Therefore, the administrator of the gaming hall can confirm whether or not the setting value update process (step SC216) is being performed by confirming whether or not the above-described all lighting state is being performed. .

  If a negative determination is made in step SE602, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the setting confirmation display flag (step SE605). When “1” is set in the setting confirmation display flag (step SE605: YES), the setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting confirmation is executed (step SE606). The processing content of the setting processing is the same as that in step SE307 of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 729) in the 96th embodiment.

  Thereafter, a setting process of the all-lit display during the setting confirmation is executed (step SE607). In the setting process, all display segments 425a of the first special figure display unit 425, all display segments 426a of the second special figure display unit 426, all light emitting units of the first special figure reservation display unit 427, (2) All the light-emitting portions of the special figure suspension display portion 428 and all the display segments 429a of the special display portion 429 are set to the light-emitting state. That is, among the display units controlled by the main CPU 63 and visible through the window panel 52 without the need to open the gaming machine body 12 and the front door frame 14, the general-purpose display units 423a and 423a are used. All of the display units other than the hold display unit 423b are set to emit light. This full lighting state ends when the setting confirmation processing (step SC213) ends. The above all lighting state does not occur in other situations including the situation where a game is being played. Therefore, the administrator of the gaming hall can confirm whether or not the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being performed by confirming whether or not the above-described all lighting state is being performed. .

  If a negative determination is made in step SE605, the processing of steps SE608 to SE615 is executed. When the processing of step SE604 or step SE607 is executed, the processing of step SE609 to step SE615 is executed. The processing contents of steps SE608 to SE615 are the same as those of steps SE310 to SE317 of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 729) in the 96th embodiment.

  According to the above configuration, during the execution of the set value update process (step SC216), the display unit controlled by the main CPU 63 needs to open the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14. All of the display units that can be visually recognized through the window panel 52 emit light. Such a full lighting state does not occur in other situations including the situation where a game is being played. Therefore, the administrator of the gaming hall can confirm whether or not the setting value update process (step SC216) is being performed by confirming whether or not the above-described all lighting state is being performed. . In addition, all of the display units that are display-controlled by the main CPU 63 and are visible through the window panel 52 without the need to open the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are in a light-emitting state. This makes it easy to specify whether the setting value updating process (step SC216) is being executed.

  Further, while the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed, the window panel 52 is a display unit that is display-controlled by the main CPU 63 and does not require opening operations of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14. All of the display units that can be visually recognized through the display except the general-purpose display unit 423a and the general-purpose display unit 423b emit light. Such a full lighting state does not occur in other situations including the situation where a game is being played. Therefore, the administrator of the gaming hall can confirm whether or not the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being performed by confirming whether or not the above-described all lighting state is being performed. .

  Note that the display unit in which all display segments emit light in the state where the set value updating process (step SC216) is being executed is performed by the window panel 52 without the need to open the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14. The configuration is not limited to the configuration of all the display units that can be visually recognized through the display, and may be a configuration of a part of the display units. For example, in a situation where the set value updating process (step SC216) is being executed, all the display segments 425a and 429a of the first special figure display unit 425 and the special display unit 429 may be in a light emitting state. Alternatively, all the display segments 425a and 426a of the first special figure display unit 425 and the second special figure display unit 426 may be configured to emit light, and the general figure display unit 423a and the special display unit 429 may be used. May be configured such that all of the display segments are in a light emitting state, and all of the display segments of the general-purpose display unit 423a, the second special figure display unit 426, and the special display unit 429 may be configured to be in a light-emitting state. Good. Further, the configuration may be applied as a configuration for notifying that the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed.

<98th embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the 96th embodiment in the processing configuration of the second timer interrupt processing and the setting value update processing. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the above-described 96th embodiment will be described. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the above-described 96th embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 733 is a flowchart showing the second timer interrupt processing in the present embodiment. Note that the processing of step SE701 to step SE715 in the second timer interrupt processing is executed by using the specific control program and the specific control data in the main CPU 63.

  First, interrupt prohibition is set as in step SE301 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 729) in the 96th embodiment (step SE701). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control (step SE702).

  When “1” is set in the setting update display flag (step SE702: YES), the setting processing for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update is executed (step SE703). The content of the setting process is the same as that in step SE303 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 729) in the 96th embodiment. Thereafter, a setting process for the first display data buffer 271 during the setting update is executed (step SE704). The processing content of the setting processing is the same as that in step SE304 of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 729) in the 96th embodiment. As a result, in the situation where the set value updating process (step SC216) is being performed, the first special figure display unit 425 performs a variable display of the pattern. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the processing of step SE305 of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 729) in the 96th embodiment is not executed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the situation where the setting value update process (step SC216) is being performed, the special display unit 429 does not perform a predetermined display and the light-off state is maintained.

  When a negative determination is made in step SE702, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the setting confirmation display flag (step SE705). If “1” is set to the setting confirmation display flag (step SE705: YES), the setting processing for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting confirmation is executed (step SE706). The processing content of the setting processing is the same as that in step SE307 of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 729) in the 96th embodiment. Thereafter, a setting process for the sixth display data buffer 471 during the setting confirmation is executed (step SE707). The processing content of the setting processing is the same as step SE308 of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 729) in the 96th embodiment. As a result, in the situation where the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed, the second special figure display unit 426 performs a variable display of the picture. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the processing of step SE309 of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 729) in the 96th embodiment is not executed. Accordingly, in the present embodiment, in the situation where the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being performed, the predetermined display is not performed on the special display unit 429, and the light-off state is maintained.

  If a negative determination is made in step SE705, the processing of steps SE708 to SE715 is executed. When the processing of step SE704 or step SE707 is executed, the processing of step SE709 to step SE715 is executed. The processing contents of steps SE708 to SE715 are the same as those of steps SE310 to SE317 of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 729) in the 96th embodiment.

  FIG. 734 is a flowchart showing the setting value update processing in this embodiment. The processing of steps SE801 to SE816 in the setting value update processing is executed using the specific control program and the specific control data in the main CPU 63.

  First, interrupt permission is set (step SE801). Thus, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638) is started by interrupting at the first interrupt period, and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 733) is started by interrupting at the second interrupt period.

  After that, the opening process of the special power winning device 416 is executed (step SE802). In the opening process, the output of the drive signal to the driving unit 416c for the special power provided in the special power winning device 416 is started. As a result, the special power winning device 416 is opened. After that, a process for updating the set value is executed in steps SE803 to SE812, an interrupt disable setting is performed in step SE813, a second RAM clear process is executed in step SE814, and an update is performed in step SE815. Send a return command. The processing contents of steps SE803 to SE815 are the same as steps SB302 to SB314 of the setting value update processing (FIG. 672) in the eighteenth embodiment.

  After that, the closing process of the special electric winning device 416 is executed (step SE816). In the closing process, the output of the drive signal to the driving unit 416c for the special power provided in the special power winning device 416 is stopped. Thereby, the special power winning device 416 is closed.

  With the above configuration, in the present embodiment, when the set value update process (step SC216) is being performed, the first special figure display unit 425 performs a variable display of the picture and the special power winning device 416 It becomes open. When the game is being played, the special winning combination device 416 is opened in a situation where the game corresponding to the jackpot result is executed and the picture corresponding to the jackpot result is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display unit 425. State. That is, when a game is being played, the special power winning device 416 does not go into an open state in a situation where the pattern display is being changed on the first special figure display unit 425. On the other hand, in a situation where the set value update process (step SC216) is being executed, the first special figure display unit 425 displays the change of the picture and the special special winning device 416 is opened. As a result, it is possible to use the first special map display unit 425 and the special power winning device 416 to notify that the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed.

  Further, in a situation where the set value updating process (step SC216) is being executed, the special display unit 429 is kept in the non-display state even though the special power winning device 416 is in the open state. When the game is being played, when the special power winning device 416 is in the open state, a display corresponding to the number of times the round game has been executed is displayed on the special display unit 429. Therefore, the administrator of the game hall sets the display by confirming that the display corresponding to the number of times the round game has been executed is not displayed on the special display unit 429 even though the special power winning device 416 is in the open state. It is possible to know that the value update process (step SC216) is being executed.

  In particular, in the situation where the set value updating process (step SC216) is being executed, all the display segments 429a of the special display unit 429 are kept off even though the special power winning device 416 is open. Then, the special display unit 429 is set to a non-display state. Thereby, the manager of the game hall checks whether or not any display is being performed on the special display unit 429 in a state where the special power winning device 416 is in the open state, and thereby the setting value updating process (step SC216). It is possible to clearly understand that the situation is being executed.

  Here, even in the situation where the setting confirmation processing (step SC213) is being executed, the special power winning device 416 is in the open state, similarly to the situation where the setting value updating processing (step SC216) is being executed. In addition, in the situation where the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being performed, the second special figure display unit 426 performs a variable display of the picture. When the game is being played, the game corresponding to the big hit result or the small hit result is executed, and the pattern corresponding to the big hit result or the small hit result is stopped and displayed on the second special figure display unit 426. In this situation, the special power winning device 416 is opened. In other words, when a game is being played, the special power winning device 416 does not go into an open state in a situation where the display of the pattern is being changed on the second special figure display unit 426. On the other hand, in the situation where the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed, the variation display of the picture is executed on the second special figure display unit 426, and the special electric winning device 416 is opened. As a result, it is possible to notify that the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed by using the second special map display unit 426 and the special power winning device 416.

  It is to be noted that, instead of the configuration of the above-described embodiment, it is notified that one of a situation in which the setting value updating process (step SC216) is being executed and a situation in which the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed. In order to do so, a variation display of the picture may be performed on the general-purpose display unit 423a, and the guidance unit 432 of the second operation unit 413 may be set to the guidance state. When a game is being played, a situation in which the pattern change display is performed on the general-purpose display unit 423a and a situation in which the guidance unit 432 of the second operating unit 413 is in the guidance state do not occur at the same time. Therefore, by simultaneously generating these situations, it is determined that one of the situation in which the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed and the situation in which the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed. It becomes possible to inform.

  Further, instead of the configuration of the above-described embodiment, it is notified that one of a situation in which the setting value update processing (step SC216) is being executed and a situation in which the setting confirmation processing (step SC213) is being executed. In order to do so, both the distribution prize winning device 415 and the special prize winning device 416 may be configured to be open. When the game is being played, there is no situation in which both the distribution prize device 415 and the special prize device 416 are in the open state, and therefore both the distribution prize device 415 and the special prize device 416 are in the open state. By doing so, it is possible to notify that one of the situation in which the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed and the situation in which the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed. .

  Further, instead of the configuration of the above-described embodiment, a plurality of special power-winning devices 416 that are open in the open / close execution mode are provided, and when a game is being played, the plurality of special power-winning devices 416 are simultaneously opened. In a configuration that does not result in the setting, the status update processing (step SC216) is executed, and the setting confirmation processing (step SC213) is executed. Alternatively, the plurality of special electric winning devices 416 may be simultaneously opened.

  Further, instead of the configuration of the above-described embodiment, it is notified that one of a situation in which the setting value update processing (step SC216) is being executed and a situation in which the setting confirmation processing (step SC213) is being executed. In order to do so, the special prize winning device 416 may be in an open state, but the degree of opening may be smaller than the open state in the case where a game is being played.

  Further, in addition to or instead of the configuration of the above-described embodiment, when the mode is the distribution execution mode, a display unit corresponding to distribution execution for performing a predetermined display is provided, and the set value update process (step SC216) is executed. The special display unit 429 is used in order to notify that the special power winning device 416 is in the open state, in order to notify that the current state is one of the state in which the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being performed and the state in which the setting confirmation process is being performed (step SC213). A configuration may be adopted in which both the display unit corresponding to the distribution execution and the distribution execution are turned off.

  In addition to or in place of the configuration of the above-described embodiment, this is one of a situation in which a setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed and a situation in which a setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed. In order to notify this, the special power winning device 416 may be opened and a display different from the display corresponding to the number of times the round game is executed may be performed on the special display unit 429.

<99th embodiment>
The present embodiment is different from the 96th embodiment in the processing configuration of the second timer interrupt processing. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the above-described 96th embodiment will be described. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the above-described 96th embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 735 is a flowchart showing the second timer interrupt processing in the present embodiment. Note that the processing of steps SE901 to SE915 in the second timer interrupt processing is executed by using the specific control program and the specific control data in the main CPU 63.

  First, the interruption prohibition is set as in step SE301 of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 729) in the 96th embodiment (step SE901). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not “1” is set to the setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control (step SE902).

  When “1” is set to the setting update display flag (step SE902: YES), the setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update is executed (step SE903). The content of the setting process is the same as that in step SE303 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 729) in the 96th embodiment.

  After that, the display data being updated is set in the first display data buffer 271 (step SE904). The display data during the setting update is kept stored in the first display data buffer 271 until the second RAM clear processing is executed in the set value update processing (step SC216), and the second RAM clear processing is executed. "0" is cleared.

  The setting update display data is display data for causing the first special figure display unit 425 to perform a setting update display. The display during the setting update is not included in the display contents displayed when the variation display of the pattern is performed on the first special figure display unit 425 in the game time, and furthermore, the result and the type of the hit / fail determination processing in the game time It is not included in the display content of the pattern stopped and displayed on the first special figure display unit 425 to notify the result of the determination process. In other words, the setting update display is a display content that is not displayed on the first special figure display unit 425 in a situation where the game is being executed. Further, the display during the setting update is a display content that is not displayed on the first special map display unit 425 when the setting value update process (step SC216) is not executed. Thus, by confirming whether or not the setting update display is being performed on the first special figure display unit 425, it is determined whether or not the setting value update process (step SC216) is being performed. It is possible to do.

  More specifically, the display content of the setting update display is a display content in which all display segments 425a of the first special figure display unit 425 are in a light emitting state. In other words, in the setting update display, the display segment 425a that can be in a light emitting state in a game being played is in a light emitting state, but the combination of the display segment 425a in a light emitting state is a state in which a game is being played. Are not selected. Note that the display content of the setting update display is not limited to the above, and may be a display content in which only the display segment 425a that does not emit light during the game is played.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the processing of step SE305 of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 729) in the 96th embodiment is not executed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the situation where the setting value update process (step SC216) is being performed, the special display unit 429 does not perform a predetermined display and the light-off state is maintained.

  If a negative determination is made in step SE902, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the setting confirmation display flag (step SE905). When “1” is set in the setting confirmation display flag (step SE905: YES), the setting processing for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting confirmation is executed (step SE906). The processing content of the setting processing is the same as that in step SE307 of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 729) in the 96th embodiment.

  After that, the display data under setting confirmation is set in the sixth display data buffer 471 (step SE907). The display data during the setting check is continuously stored in the sixth display data buffer 471 until the setting check processing (step SC213) ends, and is cleared to “0” when the setting check processing (step SC213) ends. You.

  The display data during setting confirmation is display data for causing the second special figure display unit 426 to perform a display during setting confirmation. The display during setting confirmation is not included in the display content displayed when the pattern is changed and displayed on the second special figure display unit 426 in the game time, and furthermore, the result and the type of the hit / fail determination processing in the game time It is not included in the display contents of the pattern stopped and displayed on the second special figure display unit 426 to notify the result of the determination processing. In other words, the setting confirmation display is a display content that is not displayed on the second special figure display unit 426 in a situation where the game is being executed. Further, the display during the setting check is a display content that is not displayed on the second special figure display unit 426 in a situation where the setting check process (step SC213) is not executed. In this way, by confirming whether or not the setting confirmation display is being performed on the second special figure display unit 426, it is ascertained whether or not the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed. It is possible to do.

  Specifically, the display contents of the display during the setting confirmation are display contents in which all display segments 426a of the second special figure display unit 426 emit light. In other words, in the setting confirmation display, the display segment 426a that can be in a light emitting state in a situation in which a game is being played becomes a light emitting state, but the combination of the display segments 426a in a light emitting state indicates that the game is being played. Are not selected. Note that the display content of the setting confirmation display is not limited to the above, and may be a display content in which only the display segment 426a that does not emit light in a situation where a game is being played emits light.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the processing of step SE309 of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 729) in the 96th embodiment is not executed. Accordingly, in the present embodiment, in the situation where the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being performed, the predetermined display is not performed on the special display unit 429, and the light-off state is maintained.

  If a negative determination is made in step SE905, the processing of steps SE908 to SE915 is executed. When the processing of step SE904 or step SE907 has been executed, the processing of step SE909 to step SE915 is executed. The processing contents of steps SE908 to SE915 are the same as steps SE310 to SE317 of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 729) in the 96th embodiment.

  According to the above configuration, when the setting value updating process (step SC216) is being executed, the first special figure display unit 425 has a dedicated display content indicating that the setting value updating process (step SC216) is being executed. Is displayed during the setting update. This makes it possible to notify whether or not the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed using the first special map display unit 425.

  In addition, in the situation where the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed, the setting, which is a dedicated display content indicating that the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed on the second special figure display unit 426. Confirmation display is performed. Thus, it is possible to notify whether or not the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed using the second special map display unit 426.

  In addition, in addition to or instead of the configuration of the above-described embodiment, this is one of a situation in which the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed and a situation in which the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed. In order to notify that, a special display that is not displayed when the game is being played on the special display unit 429 may be performed.

  In addition to or in place of the configuration of the above-described embodiment, this is one of a situation in which a setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed and a situation in which a setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed. In order to notify the user, a special display that is not displayed when a game is played on both the first special figure display unit 425 and the special display unit 429 may be performed.

  In addition to or in place of the configuration of the above-described embodiment, this is one of a situation in which a setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed and a situation in which a setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed. In order to notify that, a special display that is not displayed when the game is played on both the second special figure display unit 426 and the special display unit 429 may be performed.

  In addition to or in place of the configuration of the above-described embodiment, this is one of a situation in which a setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed and a situation in which a setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed. In order to notify the fact, a special display that is not displayed when a game is played on both the first special figure display unit 425 and the second special figure display unit 426 may be performed.

  In addition to or in place of the configuration of the above-described embodiment, this is one of a situation in which the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed and a situation in which the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed. In order to notify this, a special display that is not displayed when a game is played on the general-purpose display unit 423a may be performed.

<100th embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration for notifying that the setting value updating process (step SC216) is being executed and that the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed is the above-described 96th embodiment. It is different from the form. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the above-described 96th embodiment will be described. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the above-described 96th embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 736 (a) is an explanatory diagram illustrating the configuration of the special display unit 429 according to the present embodiment.

  The special display unit 429 is provided with four light emitting units 481 to 484 side by side so as to be at equal intervals. The leftmost light emitting portion 481 of the four light emitting portions 481 to 484 is a 15R display portion 481 for notifying that the round game is executed 15 times, and the display portion 482 on the right thereof has 9 round games. A 9R display unit 482 for notifying that the round game is executed, and a display unit 483 on the right thereof is a 6R display unit 483 for notifying that the round game is executed six times, and a display unit 484 at the right end. Is a small hit display unit 484 for notifying that the mode is the distribution execution mode.

  At a position adjacent to the 15R display unit 481 (specifically, a lower position), the number “15” is set as the 15R clear unit 485 indicating that the 15R display unit 481 corresponds to the execution of 15 round games. It is printed. At the position adjacent to the 9R display unit 482 (specifically, at the lower position), the number “9” is set as the 9R display unit 486 indicating that the 9R display unit 482 corresponds to the execution of nine round games. It is printed. At a position adjacent to the 6R display unit 483 (specifically, a lower position), the number “6” is used as the 6R display unit 487 indicating that the 6R display unit 483 corresponds to the execution of six round games. It is printed. On the other hand, at a position adjacent to the small hit display unit 484, no explicit unit is provided to indicate that the small hit display unit 484 corresponds to the execution of the distribution execution mode.

  When the result of the success / failure determination process and the type determination process is the 15R jackpot result and the open / close execution mode is started, the 15R display unit 481 changes from the light-off state to the light-emitting state. Then, while the open / close execution mode is being executed, the 15R display unit 481 is maintained in a light emitting state, and when the open / close execution mode is ended, the 15R display unit 481 is turned off from the light emitting state. Opening / closing execution mode in which 14 round games are executed when a V prize is generated in the distribution execution mode triggered by the result of the hit / fail determination processing and the type determination processing being the third small hit result. Is started, the 15R display unit 481 changes from the light-off state to the light-emitting state. Then, while the open / close execution mode is being executed, the 15R display unit 481 is maintained in a light emitting state, and when the open / close execution mode is ended, the 15R display unit 481 is turned off from the light emitting state.

  The opening / closing execution mode in which eight round games are executed by the occurrence of a V prize in the distribution execution mode triggered by the result of the hit / fail determination processing and the type determination processing being the second small hit result is started. In this case, the 9R display unit 482 changes from a light-off state to a light-emitting state. The 9R display unit 482 is maintained in a light emitting state while the open / close execution mode is being executed, and the 9R display unit 482 is turned off from the light emitting state when the open / close execution mode ends.

  When the result of the hit / failure determination process and the type determination process is a 6R jackpot result and the open / close execution mode is started, the 6R display unit 483 changes from the light-off state to the light-emitting state. Then, while the open / close execution mode is being executed, the 6R display unit 483 is maintained in the light emitting state, and when the open / close execution mode is ended, the 6R display unit 483 is turned off from the light emitting state. Opening / closing execution mode in which five round games are executed when a V prize occurs in the distribution execution mode triggered by the result of the hit / fail judgment processing and the type judgment processing being the first small hit result Is started, the 6R display unit 483 changes from the light-off state to the light-emitting state. Then, while the open / close execution mode is being executed, the 6R display unit 483 is maintained in the light emitting state, and when the open / close execution mode is ended, the 6R display unit 483 is turned off from the light emitting state.

  When the result of the success / failure determination process and the type determination process is one of the first small hit result, the second small hit result, and the third small hit result, and the distribution execution mode is started, the small hit display unit 484 is turned off. It becomes a light emitting state. Then, the small hit display unit 484 is maintained in the light emitting state while the distribution execution mode is being executed, and the small hit display unit 484 is turned off from the light emitting state when the distribution execution mode ends.

  With the above configuration, in a situation where a game is being played, a plurality of the display units 481 to 484 out of the 15R display unit 481, the 9R display unit 482, the 6R display unit 483, and the small hit display unit 484 simultaneously emit light. It will not be. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the 15R display unit 481, the 9R display unit 482, and the setting value update process (step SC216) are executed and the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is executed. A plurality of display units 481 to 484 out of the 6R display unit 483 and the small hit display unit 484 simultaneously emit light.

  FIG. 736 (b) shows the display contents of the 15R display unit 481, the 6R display unit 483, and the small hit display unit 484 when the setting value update processing (step SC216) or the setting confirmation processing (step SC213) is being executed. It is a time chart. FIG. 736 (b1) shows a period during which the set value update process (step SC216) is being executed, FIG. 736 (b2) shows a period during which the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed, and FIG. 736 (b3). ) Indicates a period during which the 15R display unit 481 is in a light emitting state, FIG. 736 (b4) indicates a period during which the 6R display unit 483 is in a light emitting state, and FIG. 736 (b5) indicates a period during which the small hit display unit 484 is in a light emitting state. This shows a period during which light is emitted.

  At time t1, the set value update process (step SC216) is started as shown in FIG. 736 (b1). In this case, at the timing of t1, the 15R display unit 481 switches from the unlit state to the light emitting state as shown in FIG. 736 (b3), and the small hit display unit 484 emits light from the unlit state as shown in FIG. 736 (b5). Switch to state. Then, the light emission state of the 15R display unit 481 and the small hit display unit 484 is continued while the set value update process (step SC216) is being executed.

  After that, at the timing of t2, the setting value update processing (step SC216) ends as shown in FIG. 736 (b1). As a result, at the timing t2, the 15R display unit 481 switches from the light emitting state to the light-off state as shown in FIG. 736 (b3), and the small hit display unit 484 turns off from the light emitting state as shown in FIG. 736 (b5). Switch to state.

  At the timing of t3, the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is started as shown in FIG. 736 (b2). In this case, at the time t3, the 15R display unit 481 switches from the light-off state to the light-emitting state as shown in FIG. 736 (b3), and the 6R display unit 483 changes from the light-off state to the light-emitting state as shown in FIG. 736 (b4). Switch to. The light emitting states of the 15R display unit 481 and the 6R display unit 483 are continued while the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed.

  Thereafter, at time t4, the setting confirmation process (step SC213) ends as shown in FIG. 736 (b2). Thus, at the timing of t4, the 15R display unit 481 switches from the light-emitting state to the light-off state as shown in FIG. 736 (b3), and the 6R display unit 483 changes from the light-emitting state to the light-off state as shown in FIG. 736 (b4). Switch to.

  According to the above configuration, in a situation where the set value updating process (step SC216) is being performed, both the 15R display unit 481 and the small hit display unit 484 are in a light emitting state. The situation where both the 15R display unit 481 and the small hit display unit 484 are in the light emitting state does not occur in the situation where the set value update process (step SC216) is not executed including the situation where the game is executed. Thus, it is possible to notify whether or not the setting value update process (step SC216) is being performed using the 15R display unit 481 and the small hit display unit 484.

  In a situation where the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being performed, both the 15R display unit 481 and the 6R display unit 483 are in a light emitting state. The situation where both the 15R display unit 481 and the 6R display unit 483 are in the light emitting state does not occur in the situation where the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is not executed including the situation where the game is being executed. This makes it possible to notify whether or not the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is being executed using the 15R display unit 481 and the 6R display unit 483.

<101st Embodiment>
The present embodiment is different from the above-described 64th embodiment in the execution contents of the game. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the above-described 96th embodiment will be described. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the above-described 96th embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 737 is a front view of the game board 24 in the present embodiment.

  Even in the present embodiment, the game board 24 is provided with the inner rail portion 401 and the outer rail portion 402 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail as guide means is configured by the rail section 402. The game board 24 has a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning section 411, a first operating section 412, a second operating section 413, a through winning section 414, a special electric winning apparatus 416, a variable display unit 421, a special figure unit 422, a general figure unit 423, and the like. Have been. The game area PA is partitioned by the variable display unit 421 into an upper area PA1, a left area PA2, a right area PA3, and a lower area PA4. The configuration of the general winning section 411, the first operating section 412, the second operating section 413, the through winning section 414, the special electric winning apparatus 416, the variable display unit 421, the special figure unit 422, and the general figure unit 423 are the same as those of the above-described 96th embodiment. The arrangement is the same and the arrangement position in the game area PA is the same as that of the above-mentioned 96th embodiment. However, in the present embodiment, the sorting prize winning device 415 in the above-described 96th embodiment is not provided.

  Even if a game ball enters the through winning unit 414, the payout of the game ball is not executed. On the other hand, when a game ball enters any of the general winning section 4111, the first operating section 412, the second operating section 413, and the special power winning apparatus 416, the number of game media usable by the player is increased. Payout of a predetermined number of game balls is executed as much as possible. Specifically, when the game balls enter the general winning section 411, the payout of 10 game balls is executed, and the game balls enter the first operation section 412. When the game ball occurs, the payout of three game balls is executed, and when the game ball enters the second operating portion 413, the payout of one game ball is executed, and the special electric prize winning device 416 is executed. When game balls enter the game, payout of 15 game balls is executed.

  A first guiding nail 491a that guides all the game balls flowing down the right area PA3 to the through winning section 414 is provided in an area above the through winning section 414 in the right area PA3. Since the first guide nail 491a is provided, all the game balls flowing down the right area PA3 pass through the through winning section 414. However, since the game ball that has won the through winning unit 414 continues to flow down the right area PA3, the second operating unit 413 and the special electric winning provided on the downstream side of the through winning unit 414 in the right area PA3. Wins to the device 416 may occur. In addition, the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which all the game balls flowing into the right area PA3 win the through-prize unit 414, and the game balls flowing into the right area PA3 have a high probability of winning, such as 9/10. A configuration for winning the portion 414 may be adopted.

  A second guiding nail 491b that guides all the game balls flowing down the right area PA3 to the second operating section 413 in an area below the through winning section 414 and above the second operating section 413 in the right area PA3. Is provided. By providing the second guide nail 491b, all the game balls flowing down the right area PA3 surely flow into the passage portion 439a formed by the cover member 439 of the second operating portion 413. Therefore, when the guiding unit 432 of the second operating unit 413 is in the guiding state, the game ball that has flowed into the right area PA3 and guided to the second operating unit 413 by the second guiding nail 491b is reliably connected to the second operating unit 413. Will enter the ball. On the other hand, when the guiding unit 432 of the second operating unit 413 is in the non-guiding state, the game ball that has flowed into the right area PA3 and is guided to the second operating unit 413 by the second guiding nail 491b is in the second operating unit 413. Although it flows into the passage portion 439a formed by the cover member 439, it does not enter the second operating portion 413. This game ball passes through the passage portion 439a and flows downstream from the second operating portion 413. For example, when the special power prize device 416 is in the open state, the game ball will enter the special power prize device 416 with a high probability. When the special prize device 416 is in an open state, the game ball may surely enter the special prize device 416.

  In the above configuration, the number of game balls to be paid out when a game ball enters the second operating unit 413 is one, so even if the ball enters the second operating unit 413 frequently, it is substantially The game balls owned by the player do not increase. On the other hand, when the guiding unit 432 of the second operating unit 413 is in the non-guiding state, even a game ball guided by the second guiding nail 491b does not enter the second operating unit 413. Therefore, even if the support mode is the high-frequency support mode and the guidance unit 432 is in the guidance state at a high frequency, as long as the opening / closing execution mode does not occur and the game balls enter the special power prize device 416, it does not occur. However, even if the number of game balls owned by the player is hard to decrease, the number does not increase.

  Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The main CPU 63 uses various kinds of counter information in the game to perform a winning lottery, a setting of the display of the special figure display units 425 and 426, a setting of the symbol display of the symbol display device 424, a setting of the display of the ordinary figure display unit 423a, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 738, the winning random number counter C1 used for the lottery of the winning occurrence, the type counter C2 used for determining the big hit type, and the symbol display device 424 are disconnected. Reach random number counter C3 used for reach generation lottery when fluctuating, random number initial value counter CINI used for initial value setting of hit random number counter C1, and special game display units 425, 426 and symbol display device 424 And a variation type counter CS for determining a display continuation period. Further, a general-purpose accessory opening counter C4 used for a lottery to determine whether or not the guidance unit 432 of the second operating unit 413 is in the guidance execution state is used. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in various counter areas 65b of the main RAM 65.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value every time the counter is updated, and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals. The information corresponding to the hit random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the special figure holding area provided in the main RAM 65 when a prize occurs in the first operating unit 412 or the second operating unit 413. 451 is stored. The special figure reservation area 451 includes a first special figure reservation area 452, a second special figure reservation area 453, and a special figure execution area 492.

  The first special map reservation area 452 includes a first area 452a, a second area 452b, a third area 452c, and a fourth area 452d, and a winning random number counter C1, Each numerical information of the type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in any one of the areas 452a to 452d as the reservation information on the special figure side. In this case, the first area 452a, the second area 452b, the third area 452c, and the third area 452d are displayed in the first area 452a to the fourth area 452d when a winning in the first operating unit 412 occurs continuously plural times. Each piece of numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of the four areas 452d. Since the four areas 452a to 452d are provided in this manner, up to four winning histories of gaming balls in the first operating section 412 are stored on hold. It should be noted that the number that can be held in the first special figure holding area 452 is not limited to four and is arbitrary, and may be another number such as two, three or five or more. , May be singular.

  The second special map reservation area 453 includes a first area 453a, a second area 453b, a third area 453c, and a fourth area 453d, and a winning random number counter C1 according to a winning history of the second operation unit 413. Each numerical information of the type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in any of the areas 453a to 453d as the reservation information on the special figure side. In this case, the first area 453a, the second area 453b, the third area 453c, and the third area 453d are displayed in the first area 453a to the fourth area 453d when a winning in the second operating unit 413 occurs continuously plural times. Numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of the four areas 453d. By providing the four areas 453a to 453d in this manner, up to four winning histories of the game balls to the second operating unit 413 are held and stored. It should be noted that the number that can be held in the second special figure holding area 453 is not limited to four and is arbitrary, and may be another number such as two, three or five or more. , May be singular.

  The execution area 492 for the special figure includes an execution area 493 for the first special figure and an execution area 494 for the second special figure. The execution area 493 for the first special figure is the first special figure side to be subjected to the hit / fail determination processing and the type determination processing for the special figure when starting the variation display of the pattern in the first special figure display unit 425. This is an area in which the hold information is stored. The execution area 494 for the second special figure is a second special figure side to be subjected to the hit / fail determination processing and the type determination processing for the special figure when the variation display of the pattern is started on the second special figure display unit 426. This is an area in which the hold information is stored. More specifically, when the variation display of the picture on the first special figure display unit 425 is started, the hold information of the first special figure side stored in the first area 452a of the first special figure hold area 452 is the first It is moved to the execution area 493 for one special map. On the other hand, when starting the variation display of the picture in the second special figure display unit 426, the hold information of the second special figure stored in the first area 453a of the second special figure hold area 453 is the second special figure. Is moved to the execution area 494.

  The information corresponding to the general-purpose part opening counter C4 is stored in the general-purpose holding area 455 provided in the main RAM 65 when a prize is generated in the through prize part 414. The public figure holding area 455 includes a first area 455a, a second area 455b, a third area 455c, and a fourth area 455d. Is stored in one of the areas 455a to 455d as the reservation information on the general figure side. In this case, the first area 455a, the second area 455b, the third area 455c, and the fourth area 455a are provided in the first area 455a to the fourth area 455d in a case where a prize in the through prize section 414 is continuously generated plural times. Numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of the area 455d. By providing the four areas 455a to 455d in this manner, up to four winning histories of gaming balls in the through winning unit 414 are stored on hold. It should be noted that the number of items that can be held and stored in the ordinary figure holding area 455 is not limited to four, but may be any number, and may be another number such as two, three, or five or more. It may be.

  An execution area 456 for ordinary drawing is provided in the ordinary drawing holding area 455. The execution area 456 for general drawing is a general drawing side for which a guidance state lottery for determining whether the guidance unit 432 is to be in the guidance state when starting the variable display on the general figure display unit 423a is performed. This is an area in which the hold information of is stored. Specifically, when the variable display of the general-figure display unit 423a is started, the hold information of the general-figure side stored in the first area 455a of the general-figure hold area 455 moves to the execution area 456 for the general-figure. Is done.

  Among the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4, the configuration relating to the reach random number counter C3, the random number initial value counter CINI, and the general purpose object opening counter C4 is the same as that of the 96th embodiment. On the other hand, the configuration related to the hit random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS is different from the above-described 96th embodiment. Hereinafter, the configurations related to the random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS will be described. In the present embodiment, the reach display does not occur on the symbol display device 424 in the game time corresponding to the small hit result, and the combination of the same symbols is not stopped and displayed after the symbol variation display.

  First, the hit random number counter C1 will be described. The winning random number counter C1 is configured to be added one by one in the range of 0 to 9999, and to return to “0” after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the hit random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the hit random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the hit random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 9999). The winning random number counter C1 is updated periodically, and is stored in the special figure reservation area 451 of the main RAM 65 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating unit 412 or the second operating unit 413. Then, the validity determination processing is performed using the stored numerical value information of the hit random number counter C1.

  The value of the random number to be won at the time of the success / failure determination processing is stored in the main ROM 64 as a success / failure table. As the success / failure table, first success / failure tables 495 and 496 are provided in association with the reservation information on the first special figure side, and second success / failure tables 497 and 498 are associated with the suspension information on the second special figure side. Is provided. In the present embodiment, there are a high-probability mode and a low-probability mode in which the probability of a jackpot result is relatively high or low as the winning / rejecting lottery mode.

  FIG. 739 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first probability table 495 at the time of low probability which is referred to when performing the success / failure determination process on the hold information on the first special figure side in the low probability mode. FIG. 7B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first probability table 496 at the time of a high probability, which is referred to when performing the success / failure determination processing on the hold information on the first special figure side in the high probability mode, and FIG. ) Is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second probability table 497 at the time of low probability, which is referred to when performing the success / failure determination process on the hold information on the second special figure side in the low probability mode, and FIG. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the 2nd success / failure table 498 at the time of a high probability referred when performing a success / failure determination process about the hold information of a 2nd special figure side in a high probability mode.

  As shown in FIGS. 739 (a) to 739 (d), as in the ninety-sixth embodiment, as a result of the hit / fail judgment processing, there are a big hit result, a small hit result, and a miss result. The jackpot result is a chance result that can be a trigger for shifting to the opening / closing execution mode in which a plurality of round games are executed, and can be a trigger for shifting between the success / failure lottery mode and the support mode. The small hit result is a result of the shift to the opening / closing execution mode in which the special power winning device 416 is controlled to be opened / closed, but not to the shift of the hit / fail lottery mode and the support mode. The departure result is a pass / fail result that does not trigger a shift in the opening / closing execution mode and also does not trigger a transition in the pass / fail lottery mode and the support mode.

  As shown in FIG. 739 (a), a large hit result, a small hit result, and a miss result are set in the first hit table 495 at the time of low probability as the result of the hit judgment processing. Further, the pachinko machine 10 has the setting states of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”, but the higher the setting value, the higher the probability of the jackpot result, and the higher the setting value, the lower the probability of the off-set result. It is set as follows. On the other hand, the probability of the small hit result is set to be the same regardless of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”.

  Specifically, 50 is set as the number of pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit result in “setting 1” which is the lowest set value, and the numerical value of the hit random number counter C1 which is a small hit result is set. 1000 pieces are set as the number of pieces of information, and 8950 pieces are set as the number of pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a departure result. Also, in the “setting 2” which is a setting value one step higher than the “setting 1”, 52 pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit result are set, and the hit random number which is a small hit result is set. The number of pieces of numerical information of the counter C1 is set to 1000, and the number of pieces of numerical information of the random number counter C1 which is a departure result is set to 8948. In the "setting 3" which is a setting value one level higher than the "setting 2", 54 pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit result are set, and the hit random number which is a small hit result is set. 1000 is set as the number of numerical information of the counter C1, and 8946 are set as the number of numerical information of the random number counter C1 as a hit result. In the “setting 4” which is a setting value one level higher than the “setting 3”, 56 pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit result are set, and the hit random number which is a small hit result is set. 1000 is set as the number of numerical information of the counter C1, and 8944 is set as the number of numerical information of the random number counter C1 which is a departure result. In the “setting 5” which is a setting value one level higher than the “setting 4”, 58 pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit result are set, and a random number which is a small hit result is set. The number of pieces of numerical information of the counter C1 is set to 1000, and the number of pieces of numerical information of the random number counter C1 which is a departure result is set to 8942. In the “setting 6” which is the highest setting value, 60 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit result, and the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a small hit result is set. Is set, and 8940 are set as the number of numerical value information of the random number counter C1 which is a departure result.

  As shown in FIG. 739 (b), the first success / failure table 496 at the time of high probability has a big hit result, a small hit result, and a miss result as the judgment results of the judgment of the success / failure. Further, the pachinko machine 10 has the setting states of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”, but the higher the setting value, the higher the probability of the jackpot result, and the higher the setting value, the lower the probability of the off-set result. It is set as follows. On the other hand, the probability of the small hit result is set to be the same regardless of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”.

  Specifically, in the "setting 1" which is the lowest setting value, 500 pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit result are set, and the numerical value of the hit random number counter C1 which is a small hit result is set. 1000 is set as the number of pieces of information, and 8500 pieces are set as the number of pieces of numerical information of the random number counter C1 which is a departure result. In the “setting 2” which is a setting value one level higher than the “setting 1”, 520 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit result. 1000 is set as the number of numerical information of the counter C1, and 8480 is set as the number of numerical information of the random number counter C1 as a hit result. In the “setting 3” which is a setting value one level higher than the “setting 2”, 540 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit result, and the hit random number which is a small hit result is set. 1000 is set as the number of numerical information of the counter C1, and 8460 is set as the number of numerical information of the random number counter C1 as a hit result. In addition, 560 pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit result are set in “setting 4” which is a setting value one level higher than “setting 3”, and a hit random number which is a small hit result is set. 1000 is set as the number of pieces of numerical information of the counter C1, and 8,440 is set as the number of pieces of numerical information of the random number counter C1 as a hit result. In the “setting 5” which is a setting value one level higher than the “setting 4”, 580 pieces are set as the number of pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit result. 1000 is set as the number of numerical information of the counter C1, and 8420 is set as the number of numerical information of the random number counter C1 as a hit result. In the “setting 6” that is the highest setting value, 600 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is a big hit result, and the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is a small hit result is set. Is set, and 8400 pieces are set as the number of numerical value information of the random number counter C1 which is a departure result.

  In the “setting 1”, the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the hold information on the first special map side is 1/200 in the case of the low probability mode and 1/20 of 10 times that in the case of the high probability mode. It is. In the “setting 2”, the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the hold information on the first special map side is about 1/192 in the case of the low-probability mode and about 1 times 10 times that in the case of the high-probability mode. /19.2. In the “setting 3”, the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the hold information on the first special map side is about 1/185 in the case of the low probability mode, and about 1 times 10 times that in the case of the high probability mode. /18.5. In the “setting 4”, the probability of the jackpot result being triggered by the hold information on the first special map side is about 1/179 in the case of the low probability mode and about 1 times 10 times that in the case of the high probability mode. /17.9. In the “setting 5”, the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the hold information on the first special map side is about 1/172 in the case of the low probability mode, and about 1 times 10 times that in the case of the high probability mode. /17.2. In the “setting 6”, the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the hold information on the first special map side is about 1/167 in the case of the low probability mode, and about 1 times 10 times that in the case of the high probability mode. / 16.7. That is, in any of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”, the probability of the jackpot result being triggered by the hold information on the first special figure side is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode. 10 times.

  On the other hand, the probability of a small hit result triggered by the hold information on the first special map side is 1/10, which is the same regardless of any one of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”. Further, the probability of a small hit result triggered by the hold information on the first special map side is 1/10 which is the same in both the low probability mode and the high probability mode. That is, the probability of the small hit result triggered by the hold information on the first special map side is constant regardless of the setting state and the success / failure lottery mode. Further, the probability of the small hit result triggered by the hold information on the first special map side is higher than the probability of the large hit result regardless of the setting state and the winning / rejecting lottery mode. However, when the hold information on the first special map side is used as an opportunity, the probability of a result of departure is the highest probability irrespective of the setting state and the success / failure lottery mode. More specifically, the probability of a missed result when triggered by the hold information on the first special map side is higher than the combined probability of the big hit result and the small hit result regardless of the setting state and the winning / rejecting lottery mode. .

  The numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a jackpot result may be collectively set so as to be a serial number, and may be set so as to be dispersed so that at least part or all does not become a serial number. Configuration. Further, the numerical value information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a small hit result may be collectively set so as to be a serial number, or at least a part or all may be set so as to be dispersed so as not to be a serial number. May be adopted.

  As shown in FIG. 739 (c), a large hit result, a small hit result, and a miss result are set in the second hit / fail table 497 when the probability is low, as the result of the hit determination processing. Further, the pachinko machine 10 has the setting states of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”, but the higher the setting value, the higher the probability of the jackpot result, and the higher the setting value, the lower the probability of the off-set result. It is set as follows. On the other hand, the probability of the small hit result is set to be the same regardless of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”.

  Specifically, 50 is set as the number of pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit result in the “setting 1” which is the lowest set value, and the numerical value of the hit random number counter C1 which is a small hit result is set. 9400 pieces are set as the number of pieces of information, and 550 pieces are set as the number of pieces of numerical information of the random number counter C <b> 1 which is a departure result. In the “setting 2”, which is a setting value one level higher than the “setting 1”, 52 pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit result are set, and the hit random number which is a small hit result is set. 9400 pieces are set as the number of pieces of numerical information of the counter C1, and 548 pieces are set as the number of pieces of numerical information of the random number counter C1 as a hit result. In the "setting 3" which is one step higher than the "setting 2", 54 pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit result are set, and the random number which is a small hit result is set. 9400 pieces are set as the number of pieces of numerical information of the counter C1, and 546 pieces are set as the number of pieces of numerical information of the random number counter C1 as a hit result. In the “setting 4” which is a setting value one step higher than the “setting 3”, 56 pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit result are set, and the hit random number which is a small hit result is set. 9400 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the counter C1, and 544 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the random number counter C1 which is a departure result. In the “setting 5” which is a setting value one step higher than the “setting 4”, 58 pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit result are set, and the random number which is a small hit result is set. 9400 pieces are set as the number of pieces of numerical information of the counter C1, and 542 pieces are set as the number of pieces of numerical information of the random number counter C1 which is a departure result. In the “setting 6” that is the highest setting value, 60 pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is a big hit result are set, and the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is a small hit result is set. Is set to 9400, and 540 is set as the number of pieces of numerical information of the random number counter C1 which is a departure result.

  As shown in FIG. 739 (d), a large hit result, a small hit result, and a miss result are set in the second hit / fail table 498 at the time of high probability as the result of the hit determination processing. Further, the pachinko machine 10 has the setting states of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”, but the higher the setting value, the higher the probability of the jackpot result, and the higher the setting value, the lower the probability of the off-set result. It is set as follows. On the other hand, the probability of the small hit result is set to be the same regardless of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”.

  Specifically, in the "setting 1" which is the lowest setting value, 500 pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit result are set, and the numerical value of the hit random number counter C1 which is a small hit result is set. 9400 pieces are set as the number of pieces of information, and 100 pieces are set as the number of pieces of numerical information of the random number counter C <b> 1 which is a departure result. In the “setting 2” which is a setting value one level higher than the “setting 1”, 520 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit result. 9400 pieces are set as the number of pieces of numerical information of the counter C1, and 80 pieces are set as the number of pieces of numerical information of the random number counter C1 which is a departure result. In the “setting 3” which is a setting value one level higher than the “setting 2”, 540 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit result, and the hit random number which is a small hit result is set. 9400 pieces are set as the number of pieces of numerical information of the counter C1, and 60 pieces are set as the number of pieces of numerical information of the random number counter C1 which is a departure result. In addition, 560 pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit result are set in “setting 4” which is a setting value one level higher than “setting 3”, and a hit random number which is a small hit result is set. 9400 pieces are set as the number of pieces of numerical information of the counter C1, and 40 pieces are set as the number of pieces of numerical information of the random number counter C1 which is a departure result. In the “setting 5” which is a setting value one level higher than the “setting 4”, 580 pieces are set as the number of pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit result. 9400 are set as the number of pieces of numerical information of the counter C1, and 20 are set as the number of pieces of numerical information of the random number counter C1 which is a departure result. Also, in the “setting 6” which is the highest setting value, 600 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit result, and the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a small hit result is set. Is set to 9400, and the number of pieces of numerical information of the random number counter C1 which is a departure result is 0.

  In the “setting 1”, the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the hold information on the second special map side is 1/200 in the case of the low probability mode and 1/20 of 10 times that in the case of the high probability mode. It is. In the “setting 2”, the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the hold information on the second special map side is about 1/192 in the case of the low probability mode, and about 1 times 10 times that in the case of the high probability mode. /19.2. In “Setting 3”, the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the hold information on the second special map side is about 1/185 in the case of the low probability mode, and about 1 times 10 times that in the case of the high probability mode. /18.5. In the “setting 4”, the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the hold information on the second special map side is about 1/179 in the case of the low-probability mode, and about 10 times that in the case of the high-probability mode. /17.9. In the “setting 5”, the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the hold information on the second special map side is about 1/172 in the case of the low probability mode and about 1 times 10 times that in the case of the high probability mode. /17.2. In the “setting 6”, the probability of the jackpot result being triggered by the hold information on the second special map side is about 1/167 in the case of the low probability mode and about 1 times 10 times that in the case of the high probability mode. / 16.7. In other words, in any of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”, the probability of a jackpot result being triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side is higher in the case of the high probability mode than in the case of the low probability mode. 10 times. Further, when the combination of the setting state and the winning / rejecting lottery mode is compared in the same combination, the probability of a jackpot result is triggered by the hold information of the first special figure and the hold information of the second special figure. Is the same as

  On the other hand, the probability of a small hit result triggered by the hold information on the second special map side is about 1 / 1.06, which is the same regardless of any of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”. Further, the probability of a small hit result triggered by the hold information on the second special map side is 1 / 1.06 which is the same in both the low probability mode and the high probability mode. In other words, the probability of a small hit result triggered by the hold information on the second special map side is constant regardless of the setting state and the success / failure lottery mode. The probability of the small hit result triggered by the second special figure side hold information is higher than the probability of the small hit result triggered by the first special figure side hold information. Further, the probability of the small hit result being triggered by the hold information on the second special map side is higher than the probability of the large hit result regardless of the setting state and the success / failure lottery mode. In addition, when the hold information on the second special map side is used as an opportunity, the probability of the small hit result is higher than the probability of the miss result regardless of the setting state and the winning / decreasing lottery mode. Furthermore, the probability of the small hit result when the hold information on the second special map side is triggered is higher than the combined probability of the big hit result and the miss result regardless of the setting state and the success / failure lottery mode. .

  The numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a jackpot result may be collectively set so as to be a serial number, and may be set so as to be dispersed so that at least part or all does not become a serial number. Configuration. Further, the numerical value information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a small hit result may be collectively set so as to be a serial number, or at least a part or all may be set so as to be dispersed so as not to be a serial number. May be adopted.

  As described above, the higher the set value is, the higher the probability that the jackpot result will be obtained in the case where the hold information of the first special figure side and the case where the hold information of the second special figure side triggers. By being set, a higher set value is more advantageous for the player. In addition, the opening and closing execution mode is a period in which the amount of increase in the number of balls held by the player per unit time is the largest, and the probability of the jackpot result that triggers the transition of the opening and closing execution mode changes according to the set value, It is possible to increase the player's attention to the set value.

  In addition, in a configuration in which the probability of a jackpot result in the high probability mode is higher than that in the low probability mode, the probability of a jackpot result in the high probability mode in any of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6” Is a certain number times (specifically, 10 times) higher than the probability of a jackpot result in the low probability mode, which is a number larger than “1”. This makes it possible to keep the rate of change in the probability of a jackpot result between the low probability mode and the high probability mode constant in any setting state.

  Further, when the combination of the setting state and the winning / rejecting lottery mode is compared in the same combination, the probability of a jackpot result is triggered by the hold information of the first special figure and the hold information of the second special figure. Is the same as This makes it possible to prevent a difference in occurrence probability of the jackpot result between a case triggered by the hold information on the first special figure side and a case triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side. .

  Further, when the hold information on the first special map side is triggered, the probability of the small hit result becomes the same regardless of any of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”, and the winning / rejecting lottery mode is set to the low probability mode and It is the same regardless of the high probability mode. Further, when the hold information on the second special map side is triggered, the probability of the small hit result becomes the same regardless of any of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”, and the winning / rejecting lottery mode is set to the low probability mode and It is the same regardless of the high probability mode. As a result, it is possible for the player to limit a target to which the set value is to be estimated to the jackpot result, thereby making it difficult to estimate the set value.

  On the other hand, the probability of the small hit result is higher when triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side than when triggered by the hold information on the first special figure side. Thereby, the frequency of occurrence of the small hit result in the case where the game round triggered by the hold information of the first special figure side is executed and the case where the game round triggered by the hold information of the second special figure side is executed Can be made different.

  Further, in the first hit / fail table 495, 496, the number of pieces of numerical information of the random number counter C1 assigned to the outlying result is larger than the number of pieces of numerical information of the random number counter C1 assigned to the small winning result. In the configuration, the variation in the probability of the jackpot result due to the set value is absorbed by the variation in the number of pieces of numerical information of the random number counter C1 assigned to the outlier. Then, the number of pieces of numerical information of the random number counter C1 assigned to the departure result is the largest. As a result, it is possible to reduce the probability variation of the out-of-order result by the set value for absorbing the probability variation of the jackpot result by the set value. Therefore, when the hold information on the first special figure side is used as an opportunity, it becomes possible for the player to limit the target of attention to the jackpot result in order to guess the set value, and it is difficult to guess the set value. It becomes possible.

  In the second success / failure tables 497 and 498, the number of numerical information of the random number counter C1 assigned to the outlier is smaller than the number of numerical information of the random number counter C1 assigned to the small hit result. In the configuration, the variation in the probability of the jackpot result due to the set value is absorbed by the variation in the number of numerical information of the random number counter C1 assigned to the outlier. Then, in the case where the combination probability of the big hit result and the small hit result is the highest, that is, “setting 6” and the high probability mode, the hit / fail determination processing is performed on the hold information on the second special map side. The probability of a missed result in the situation is 0%. Thereby, when the setting is “6” and the mode is the high probability mode, the combination probability of the big hit result and the small hit result in the situation where the hit / fail judgment processing is performed on the hold information on the second special figure side is preferably increased. It becomes possible.

  Next, the type counter C2 will be described. The type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by one in order within the range of 0 to 29, and to return to “0” after reaching the maximum value. The type counter C2 is updated periodically, and is stored in the special figure reservation area 451 of the main RAM 65 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating unit 412 or the second operating unit 413. Then, a type determination process is performed using the stored value of the type counter C2.

  The type determination process using the type counter C2 is performed when a big hit result is obtained in the hit determination process. On the other hand, if a small hit result is obtained in the hit / fail determination processing, the type determination processing is not performed. That is, in the present embodiment, a plurality of types of the big hit results are set, whereas only one type of the small hit results is set. When the jackpot result is selected in the hit determination process, the type of the jackpot result is selected using the type table 499 and the type counter C2 stored in the main ROM 64 in advance. Hereinafter, the contents of the big hit results and the small hit results of each type will be described.

  FIG. 740 (a) is referred to for sorting the type of the big hit result when the big hit result is selected in the hit / fail judgment processing triggered by the hold information on the first special figure side or the hold information on the second special figure side. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a type table 499. FIG. 740 (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the content of each of a plurality of types of big hit results and the content of one type of small hit result.

  The type table 499 is referred to when the jackpot result is selected in the hit determination processing triggered by the first special figure hold information, and is also determined in the hit determination processing triggered by the second special figure hold information. Referenced when the result is selected. That is, the case where the jackpot result is selected in the hit determination process triggered by the hold information for the first special figure, and the case where the jackpot result is selected in the hit determination process triggered by the hold information for the second special figure. In any case, the same type table 499 is referred to.

  As shown in FIG. 740 (a), in the type table 499, as the types of the jackpot results, a 6R normal jackpot result, a 6R high probability jackpot result, and a 16R high probability jackpot result are set. Then, the numerical information of the type counter C2 of “0 to 10” corresponds to the 6R normal jackpot result, the numerical information of the type counter C2 of “11 to 26” corresponds to the 6R high jackpot result, The numerical information of the type counter C2 of “27 to 29” corresponds to the 16R high-accuracy big hit result. In other words, when the jackpot result is selected in the hit / fail judgment processing, the 6R normal jackpot result is selected with a probability of 11/30, the 6R high-accuracy jackpot result is selected with a probability of 16/30, and the probability of 3/30 is selected. Selects the 16R high probability jackpot result.

  When the 6R normal jackpot result is obtained, six round games occur in the subsequent opening / closing execution mode as shown in FIG. 740 (b). In addition, after the open / close execution mode ends, the low probability mode is set regardless of the success / failure lottery mode before the start of the open / close execution mode, and the high frequency support mode is set regardless of the support mode before the start of the open / close execution mode. . However, this high frequency support mode ends when the total number of game times triggered by the hold information on the first special figure side and the game times triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side is 50 times. To low frequency support mode.

  In the round game, as in the above-described ninety-sixth embodiment, the number of times the special power winning device 416 is opened and closed is the maximum number of times, and a predetermined upper limit of the number of game balls winning the special power winning device 416. A game that continues until one of the conditions is met. In this embodiment, the opening and closing of the special power winning device 416 is performed once in one round game, and the open duration in each round game is set to 29 seconds. In addition, the upper limit winning number to the special power winning device 416 is set to ten. In the situation where the launch operation device 28 is operated by the player, the game ball launching mechanism 27 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area PA every 0.6 seconds. Is set to a time longer than the product of the launch cycle of the game ball and the upper limit winning number of one round game. Therefore, in each round game, it can be expected that more than the maximum number of winning balls will be won in the special winning device 416.

  In the case of the 6R high-accuracy jackpot result, as shown in FIG. 740 (b), six round games occur in the subsequent opening / closing execution mode. After the open / close execution mode ends, the high-probability mode is set regardless of the success / failure lottery mode before the start of the open / close execution mode and the high-frequency support mode is set regardless of the support mode before the start of the open / close execution mode. . These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode continue until the next round of the game that results in the jackpot ends. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode will end when the number of times of execution of the game reaches the end reference number, but the end reference number is a big hit result. The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode may be continued until the number of games, which is a very large number of times compared to the probability, substantially ends the next round of the jackpot.

  If the 16R high-accuracy jackpot result is obtained, 16 round games occur in the subsequent opening / closing execution mode as shown in FIG. 740 (b). Therefore, the 16R high-accuracy jackpot result is the most advantageous jackpot result at least in terms of the number of round game executions. After the open / close execution mode ends, the high-probability mode is set regardless of the success / failure lottery mode before the start of the open / close execution mode, and the low-frequency support mode is set regardless of the support mode before the start of the open / close execution mode. . The high-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode continue until the next round of the game that results in the jackpot ends. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode are ended when the number of executions of the game reaches the end reference number, but the end reference number is a big hit result. The high-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode may be continued until the number of games, which is an extremely large number of times compared to the probability, substantially ends the next round of the jackpot.

  When the small hit result is obtained, as shown in FIG. 740 (b), in the subsequent opening / closing execution mode, the special power winning device 416 is opened once. This one opening cycle ends when either one of the following conditions is satisfied: two seconds have elapsed, and the winning number in the special electric prize winning device 416 has reached ten. In this case, as described above, in the situation where the launch operation device 28 is operated by the player, the game ball launching mechanism 27 is set so that one game ball is launched toward the game area PA every 0.6 seconds. Since the drive control is performed, the opening duration of the opening cycle is set to a time shorter than the product of the firing cycle of the game balls and the upper limit winning number of the opening cycle. Therefore, in the opening times, basically, the special prize winning device 416 does not win more game balls than the upper limit winning number, and the special prize winning device 416 is closed when the opening duration of 2 seconds elapses. . Further, even if a small hit result occurs, the winning / rejection lottery mode and the support mode are maintained in the mode before the start of the opening / closing execution mode.

  As described above, the small hit result can be selected in the hit / fail determination processing in both the case where the first special figure side hold information is triggered and the case where the second special figure side hold information is triggered. However, there is a higher probability that the small hit result will be selected when triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side than when triggered by the hold information on the first special figure side. More specifically, when the hold information on the second special map side is used as a trigger, the probability that the small hit result is selected in the success / failure determination process is higher than the probability of combining the big hit result and the miss result. When the hold information on the first special map side is used as an opportunity, the probability of selecting an out-of-range result is higher than the probability of selecting a small hit result in the hit / fail determination processing. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode in which the winning frequency to the second operating unit 413 is higher, the probability of a small hit per unit firing number is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. However, the expected number of game balls in which a prize is generated to the special prize winning device 416 when the small hit result is triggered by the hold information on the second special map side is smaller in the low frequency support mode than in the high frequency support mode. Many. The reason why such an event occurs will be described below.

  FIG. 740 (c) is an explanatory diagram for describing the contents of the support mode. In either the low-frequency support mode or the high-frequency support mode, the probability that the guidance state will be won in the guidance state lottery for determining whether to control the guidance unit 432 of the second operating unit 413 to the guidance state is determined. It is the same at 95%. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The probability that the guidance state will be won may be substantially the same between the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode, and the high frequency support mode may be higher than the low frequency support mode. A configuration that has a high probability of winning the guidance state may be adopted.

  The display continuation period of the variation display of the pattern on the general-purpose display unit 423a executed when the guidance state lottery is executed is 4 seconds in the low frequency support mode, whereas the display continuation period is 4 seconds in the low frequency support mode. Is 0.1 second. The guidance unit 432 of the second operating unit 413 is in the guidance state while the picture variation display is being performed on the general figure display unit 423a, even if the general figure holding information is reserved and stored in the general figure holding area 455. Does not. When the guiding unit 432 of the second operating unit 413 is in the non-guiding state, the game ball that has flowed into the right area PA3 is located at the position of the special winning award device 416 existing downstream of the second operating unit 413. Can be reached.

  The execution state of the guidance state of the guidance unit 432 when the guidance state has been won is that the guidance unit 432 is in the guidance state only once for two seconds in the low-frequency support mode, whereas the guidance state is high. In the case of the frequency support mode, the guidance unit 432 is in the guidance state only once for 6 seconds. Note that the guidance state of the guidance unit 432 is also terminated when the number of winnings to the second operating portion 413 reaches the upper limit number of winnings, but as described above, the launch operation device 28 is operated by the player. Is operated in such a manner that one game ball is fired toward the game area PA every 0.6 seconds, so that the guidance unit is used in the low-frequency support mode. 432 is in the guiding state for 2 seconds, and in the high-frequency support mode, the guiding unit 432 is in the guiding state for 6 seconds.

  With the above configuration, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability that the guidance state of the guidance unit 432 will be won is as high as 95%, and the display duration of the design on the general map display unit 423a is 0.1 seconds. The firing unit 432 is in the guiding state for 6 seconds in the guiding state. As described above, the game ball flowing down the right area PA3 basically wins the through winning section 414 and basically wins the second operation section 413 if the guiding unit 432 is in the guiding state. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, when the launch of the game ball is continued so as to flow down the right area PA3, the guiding unit 432 is basically in the guiding state, and the prize to the second operating unit 413 is won. Due to the occurrence, the game ball does not flow downstream of the second operation unit 413. Therefore, in the case of the high frequency support mode, although a prize to the second operating unit 413 occurs frequently, a small hit result occurs due to the hold information on the second special map side, and the special power prize winning device 416 is activated. Even if it is in the open state, the game ball does not reach a position where it can enter the special power winning device 416, so that the winning in the special power winning device 416 does not basically occur. Incidentally, since the number of game balls to be paid out is one even if a prize is generated in the second operating part 413, even if a prize is generated in the second operating part 413 in the high frequency support mode at a high frequency, a game is performed. Game balls owned by the player do not increase.

  On the other hand, in the low-frequency support mode, the probability that the guidance unit 432 will win the guidance state is a high probability of 95%, and the display period of the pattern on the general map display unit 423a is 4 seconds longer than the launch period of the game ball. In the guidance state, the guidance unit 432 is in the guidance state for 2 seconds. As described above, the game ball flowing down the right area PA3 basically wins the through winning section 414 and basically wins the second operation section 413 if the guiding unit 432 is in the guiding state. Therefore, in the low frequency support mode, when the launch of the game ball is continued so as to flow down the right side area PA3, the guiding unit 432 is in the guiding state, so that a prize to the second operating unit 413 may occur. The game ball can reach the position of the special power winning device 416 on the downstream side of the second operating unit 413. Therefore, in the case of the low frequency support mode, although the winning frequency to the second operation unit 413 is lower than that of the high frequency support mode, the small hit result is triggered by the hold information on the second special map side. A prize may occur in the special power winning device 416 in the open state.

  In the low-frequency support mode, in the configuration in which a winning can occur in the special power winning device 416 that is open due to the small hit result triggered by the hold information on the second special map side, the second special map display By differentiating the display duration of the game times in the unit 426 between the case where the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the low probability mode and the case of the high probability mode, the right region in the situation where the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode are used. Even if the firing operation is performed so as to flow down PA3, the profit per unit time becomes extremely low, while the firing operation is performed so as to flow down the right area PA3 in the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode. If it is performed, the profit per unit time will be high. Hereinafter, the configuration will be described.

  The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 99, and to return to “0” after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS includes a display continuation period (ie, a symbol variation display period) of the symbol variation display on the special figure display units 425, 426, and a symbol display continuation period (ie, the symbol variation display period) on the symbol display device 424. Is used in the main CPU 63 (these display continuation periods are also referred to as game display continuation periods). The variation type counter CS is repeatedly updated and acquired at the time of starting the variation display on the special figure display units 425 and 426 and at the time of determining the variation pattern at the time of starting the symbol variation by the symbol display device 424. A setting mode of the display duration of the game times will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. The numbers “0 to 99” in FIG. 741 correspond to the values of the variation type counter CS.

  In the low probability mode, the setting mode of the display duration of the game times in the first special figure display unit 425 is the normal setting mode. In the normal setting mode, as shown in FIG. 741, if the result of the hit / fail judgment processing is a departure result and the departure is complete and no reach effect occurs, the upper limit number (specifically, When a new game round is started in a situation where the hold information of the first special figure side is stored, 2 seconds is selected as the game continuation display period, and the first special figure hold is performed. When a new game time is started in a state where the upper limit number of the hold information of the first special figure side is not stored in the area 452, any of 10 seconds, 20 seconds, and 30 seconds is used as the game time display continuation period. Is selected. In addition, in the normal setting mode, the result of the hit / fail judgment processing is an out-of-match result, but in the case of the out-of-reach reach in which the reach effect occurs, the result of the hit / fail judgment processing is a big hit result, and the result of the hit / fail judgment processing is a small hit result. In any of the cases, any one of 20 seconds, 30 seconds, 40 seconds, 50 seconds, 1 minute, 1 minute, 30 seconds and 2 minutes is selected as the display duration of the game times. In this case, it is easier to select a longer duration for the big hit result or the small hit result than for the off-reach time, and the average duration selected is also larger for the big hit result or the small hit result than for the out-reach time. It is getting longer.

  On the other hand, in the low probability mode, the setting mode of the game continuation display period in the second special figure display unit 426 is a long-term setting mode. In the long-term setting mode, the display duration of the selected game time is only one type, and the display continuation of the one type of game time is continued irrespective of the result of determining whether or not the target game time is correct or not. A period is selected. The display continuation period of the selected game time is 10 minutes. The display continuation period is longer than 2 minutes which is the display continuation period of the longest game time selected in the normal selection mode. Thereby, in the low probability mode, the execution frequency of the game times on the second special figure display unit 426 becomes lower than the execution frequency of the game times on the first special figure display unit 425.

  In the high probability mode, the setting mode of the display duration of the game times is different from that in the low probability mode. Specifically, in the high probability mode, the display duration of the game times in the first special figure display unit 425 is only one type regardless of whether or not a reach effect is generated when the result of determination as to whether or not a hit is out of order. Is a selection target, and only one type is a selection target when the result of the determination is a big hit result or a small hit result. In this case, the display duration of the game times in the case of the big hit result or the small hit result is set to be longer than the display duration of the game times in the case of the departure result, and specifically, in the case of the departure result. While the display duration of the game times is 10 seconds, the display duration of the game times in the case of a big hit result or a small hit result is 30 seconds.

  In the high probability mode, the display duration of the game times in the second special figure display unit 426 is set to 0.5 second with a probability of 9/10 when the result of the success / failure determination is a deviation result or a small hit result. One minute and 30 seconds are selected with a probability of 10. On the other hand, when the result is a jackpot result, only one type of 1 minute and 30 seconds is selected.

  In the case where the game time is executed in the second special figure display unit 426 in the high probability mode and a small hit result is obtained, the display duration of the game time becomes 0.5 second with a high probability, The total period of the game including the final stop period of the game is 1 second. On the other hand, in the low-frequency support mode, as described above, the display continuation period of the general-purpose display unit 423a is 4 seconds, and the guidance state of the guidance unit 432 is 2 seconds, and the second operation is performed. In the case where a winning has occurred in the section 413, a small hit result is obtained with a high probability, and a period during which the special power winning device 416 is in the open state in the open / close execution mode when the small hit result is obtained is 2 seconds. Then, in a situation where the mode is the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode, the launch operation of the game ball is performed so as to flow down the right area PA3, so that the special prize winning device 416 which is in the open state triggered by the small hit result is released. Wins occur more frequently than in other situations. The winning frequency is determined by the number of game balls owned by the player when the player operates the shooting ball to flow down the right area PA3 in the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode. The winning frequency is set to increase.

  The trigger that causes the situation of the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode is the 16R high probability jackpot result as described above. In addition, in the case of a 16R high-accuracy jackpot result, a situation in which the open / close execution mode in which 16 round games are performed is performed and then a high probability mode and a low-frequency support mode are performed until a new jackpot result is generated. Continue. Then, in the situation where the mode is the high-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode as described above, a special ball-winning prize which is in an open state triggered by a small hit result by performing a shooting operation of the game ball so as to flow down the right area PA3. The frequency of winning of the device 416 depends on the game possessed by the player when the game ball is fired so as to flow down the right area PA3 in the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode. The winning frequency is set so that the number of balls increases. Therefore, after the opening / closing execution mode ends with the 16R high-accuracy jackpot result, the larger the number of game times in the second special figure display unit 426 executed until the new jackpot result occurs, the more game balls owned by the player Will increase. Therefore, in this situation, the player expects that no jackpot result will occur.

  Even if a jackpot result occurs, if it is a 16R high-accuracy jackpot result, a situation in which the mode is the high-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode occurs again after the opening / closing execution mode in which 16 round games are performed is performed. It will be. Therefore, the player expects that the jackpot result does not occur, but expects the 16R high-accuracy jackpot result if the jackpot result is obtained.

  When the 6R high-accuracy jackpot result occurs, the opening / closing execution mode in which the round game occurs six times is performed, and then the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode are set. The situation will continue until a new jackpot result occurs. In this situation, as described above, the launching operation is performed such that the game ball flows down the right area PA3, so that the winning in the second operating unit 413 occurs frequently, but the small operating result triggers the opening state. The winning in the special electric winning device 416 basically does not occur. Therefore, in this situation, the next jackpot result can be generated while the number of game balls owned by the player cannot be increased, but not decreased. Therefore, in such a situation, the player expects the jackpot result to occur early.

  When the 6R normal jackpot result occurs, the open / close execution mode in which the round game occurs six times is performed, and then the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode are set. In this situation as well, the launch operation is performed so that the game ball flows down the right area PA3, and a prize to the second operating unit 413 is frequently generated. Winning to the device 416 basically does not occur. However, the winning / rejecting lottery mode is a low-probability mode and the number of executions of the game reaches 50, the high-frequency support mode ends, and the mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode. Therefore, in such a situation, the player expects that the next jackpot result will occur within a range in which the player can play the game while not reducing the number of game balls owned by the player too much.

  In the case of the low-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode, even if the shooting operation is performed so that the game ball flows down the right area PA3, the display duration of the game times in the second special map display unit 426 is extremely long. 10 minutes. In this case, even if the firing operation is performed so that the game ball flows down the right area PA3, the digestion efficiency of the game is deteriorated. Therefore, the player performs the firing operation so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2. Become. By performing the shooting operation so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2, the game time in the first special figure display unit 425 is executed. In this case, the display duration of the game times is in the normal setting mode as described above.

<First special figure special power control processing and second special figure special power control processing>
Next, the first special figure special power control processing and the second special figure special power control processing executed by the main CPU 63 will be described. In the present embodiment, unlike the above-described ninety-sixth embodiment, a game turn can be started on the second special figure display unit 426 even when the game turn is being executed on the first special figure display unit 425, Even in a situation where a game round is being executed on the special figure display unit 426, the game round can be started on the first special figure display unit 425. Accordingly, the first special figure special power control processing is set as the special figure special power control processing for the first special figure display unit 425, and the second special figure special power control processing is performed for the second special figure display unit 426. Special power control processing is set. The first special figure special power control processing and the second special figure special power control processing are executed instead of the special figure special power control processing in the 96th embodiment, and step S8913 in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638). It is executed in.

  FIG. 742 is a flowchart showing the first special figure special power control processing, and FIG. 743 is a flowchart showing the second special figure special power control processing. The processing of steps SF101 to SF111 in the first special figure special power control processing and the processing of steps SF201 to SF211 in the second special figure special power control processing are performed by the main-side CPU 63 for the specific control program and the specific control data. It is executed using.

  In the first special figure special power control processing (FIG. 742), first, the processing of acquiring the hold information on the first special figure side is executed (step SF101). In the acquisition process, when a prize has occurred in the first operating unit 412, the number of the first special figure side reserved information stored in the first special figure reserved area 452 becomes the upper limit storage number (specifically, On the condition that the number is less than 4), storage processing of the hold information on the first special figure side is executed. In the storage process, the numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are used as the reservation information on the first special figure side, and the first area 452a to the fourth area 452d of the first special figure reservation area 452 are stored. Is stored in the area in which the digestion order is earlier among the areas in which the hold information on the first special figure side is not stored. In addition, when the hold information on the first special figure side is acquired, the display content of the first special figure hold display unit 427 is updated in accordance with the increase in the number of the hold information on the first special figure side this time. Data settings to make sure. In addition, when the hold information on the first special figure side is acquired, a hold increase command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. As a result, the image for notifying the storage number of the hold information on the first special figure side in the symbol display device 424 is updated in correspondence with the new acquisition of the hold information on the first special figure side.

  In the second special figure special power control processing (FIG. 743), first, the processing for acquiring the hold information on the second special figure side is executed (step SF201). In the acquisition process, when a prize has occurred in the second operating unit 413, the number of the second special figure side reserved information stored in the second special figure reserved area 453 is equal to the upper limit storage number (specifically, 4), the storage processing of the hold information on the second special figure side is executed. In the storing process, the numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are used as the reservation information on the second special figure side, and the first area 453a to the fourth area 453d of the second special figure reservation area 453 are stored. Is stored in the area having the earliest digestion order among the areas in which the hold information of the second special figure is not stored. When the second special figure side hold information is acquired, the display content of the second special figure hold display unit 428 is updated in accordance with the increase in the number of the second special figure side hold information this time. Data settings to make it work. When the hold information on the second special figure side is acquired, a hold increase command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. As a result, the image for notifying the storage number of the hold information on the second special figure side in the symbol display device 424 is updated in correspondence with the new acquisition of the hold information on the second special figure side.

  Returning to the description of the first special figure special power control processing (FIG. 742) and the second special figure special power control processing (FIG. 743), after the execution of the hold information acquisition processing (step SF101 or step SF201), the main ROM 64 The stored special figure special power address table is read (step SF101, step SF202). Then, in the case of the first special figure special power control process (FIG. 742), the start address corresponding to the numerical information of the first special figure special power counter is acquired from the special figure special power address table (step SF103), and the acquired start address is obtained. The process jumps to the indicated process (step SF104). In the case of the second special figure special power control process (FIG. 743), the start address corresponding to the numerical information of the second special figure special power counter is acquired from the special figure special power address table (step SF203), and the acquired start address is obtained. The process jumps to the indicated process (step SF204).

  The first special figure special power counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to know which of the processes of steps SF105 to SF111 in the first special figure special power control processing (FIG. 742) should be executed. is there. The second special figure special power counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to know which of the processes of steps SF205 to SF211 in the second special figure special power control processing (FIG. 743) should be executed. is there. In the special figure special power address table, a start address in a program for executing each processing of steps SF105 to SF111 is set corresponding to the numerical information of the first special figure special power counter, and the second special figure special power counter is set. A start address in a program for executing each of the processes in steps SF205 to SF211 is set in correspondence with the numerical information.

  If the value of the first special figure special power counter or the second special figure special power counter is “0”, the process jumps to the special figure variation start processing of step SF105 or step SF205, and the first special figure special power counter or the second special figure counter is executed. When the value of the special power counter is "1", the process jumps to the special figure changing process in step SF106 or step SF206, and when the value of the first special power special counter or the second special power special counter is "2". Jumps to the special figure fixing process in step SF107 or step SF207, and when the value of the first special figure special power counter or the second special figure special power counter is "3", the special power starting processing in step SF108 or step SF208. If the value of the first special figure special power counter or the second special figure special power counter is "4", the processing proceeds to step SF109 or step SF2. 9, when the value of the first special figure special power counter or the second special figure special power counter is "5", the process jumps to the special power closing processing of step SF110 or step SF210 and the first If the value of the special figure special power counter or the second special figure special power counter is “6”, the process jumps to the special power ending process in step SF111 or step SF211. Hereinafter, each processing of step SF105 to step SF111 and step SF205 to step SF211 will be individually described.

<Special figure change start processing>
First, the special figure change start processing in step SF105 and step SF205 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The processing of steps SF301 to SF317 in the special figure change start processing is executed by using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

  In the special figure change start processing, first, it is determined whether or not the processing for the open / close execution mode is being executed on the side not corresponding to the current special figure special power control processing (FIGS. 742 and 743) (step SF301). As described above, even in a situation where the game time is being executed on one of the first special figure display unit 425 and the second special figure display unit 426, the game time can be executed on the other. In this case, step SF301 is executed, and if the processing for the open / close execution mode is executed on the side not corresponding to the current special figure special power control processing (FIGS. 742 and 743), the processing after step SF302 is executed. Instead, the start of a new game round is regulated. Thus, in a situation where the opening / closing execution mode is being executed in response to a game time in one of the first special figure display unit 425 and the second special figure display unit 426, the other game time is not newly started. Be regulated. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the open / close execution mode. If this time is the special figure change start processing in the first special figure special power control processing (FIG. 742), it is determined in step SF301 whether or not the value of the second special figure special power counter is 3 or more, and 3 or more is determined. In this case, the processing after step SF302 is not executed. If this time is the special figure variation start processing in the second special figure special power control processing (FIG. 743), it is determined in step SF301 whether or not the value of the first special figure special power counter is 3 or more, and 3 or more In this case, the processing after step SF302 is not executed.

  If a negative determination is made in step SF301, it is determined whether or not the corresponding suspended number is one or more (step SF302). If this time is the special figure change start processing in the first special figure special power control processing (FIG. 742), it is determined whether or not one or more first special figure side reserved information is stored in the first special figure reserved area 452. If this time is the special figure change start processing in the second special figure special power control processing (FIG. 743), it is determined whether or not one or more pieces of the second special figure holding information are stored in the second special figure holding area 453. Is determined.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step SF302, data setting processing is executed (step SF303). In the data setting process, if this time is the first special figure special power control processing (FIG. 742), the data stored in the first area 452a of the first special figure reservation area 452 is stored in the execution area 493 for the first special figure. Moving. After that, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first special figure reservation area 452 is executed. In this data shift processing, data stored in the first to fourth areas 452a to 452d is sequentially shifted to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of the second area 452b → the first area 452a, the third area 452c → the second area 452b, the fourth area 452d → the third area 452c, and the fourth area 452d. Is cleared to "0". In the data setting process, data setting is performed so that the display content of the first special figure suspension display unit 427 is updated in accordance with the decrease in the number of suspension information on the first special figure side. In the data setting process, a hold reduction command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. As a result, the image for notifying the number of holdings of the holding information on the first special figure side in the symbol display device 424 is updated in accordance with the decrease in the holding information on the first special figure side.

  In the data setting processing, if this time is the second special figure special power control processing (FIG. 743), the data stored in the first area 453a of the second special figure holding area 453 is stored in the execution area 494 for the second special figure. Moving. Thereafter, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second special figure holding area 453 is executed. In this data shift processing, data stored in the first to fourth areas 453a to 453d is sequentially shifted to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of the second area 453b → the first area 453a, the third area 453c → the second area 453b, the fourth area 453d → the third area 453c, and the fourth area 453d. Is cleared to "0". In the data setting processing, data setting is performed so that the display content of the second special figure suspension display unit 428 is updated in accordance with the decrease in the number of the suspension information on the second special figure side. In the data setting process, a hold reduction command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. As a result, the image for notifying the number of pieces of hold information of the second special figure on the symbol display device 424 is updated in accordance with the decrease of the second special figure side of the hold information.

  After executing the data setting process, a hit / fail judgment process is executed (step SF304). In the success / failure determination process, if the current game time is triggered by the hold information on the first special figure side, the first success / failure tables 495 and 496 corresponding to the current set values of the pachinko machine 10 and the success / failure lottery mode (FIG. 739 (a) and FIG. 739 (b)) from the main ROM 64. Then, the numerical information on the winning random number counter C1 is read out of the hold information on the first special figure side, which is the trigger of the start of this game round, and the read numerical information is stored in the first success / failure table 495, 496. By collation, it is specified whether the result of the current hit / fail judgment processing is a big hit result, a small hit result, or a miss result. On the other hand, in the win / fail determination processing, if the current game time is triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side, the second win / fail tables 497 and 498 corresponding to the current set values of the pachinko machine 10 and the win / fail lottery mode. (Refer to FIG. 739 (c) and FIG. 739 (d)). Then, the numerical information on the winning random number counter C1 is read out of the hold information on the second special figure side, which is the trigger of the start of the current game round, and the read numerical information is stored in the second win / fail tables 497 and 498. By collation, it is specified whether the result of the current hit / fail judgment processing is a big hit result, a small hit result, or a miss result.

  If the result of the success / failure determination process is a jackpot result (step SF305: YES), the type determination process is executed (step SF306). In the type determination process, the type table 499 shown in FIG. Also, when the hold information on the first special figure side is the trigger of the current game round, the numerical information on the type counter C2 is read out of the hold information on the first special figure side, and the hold on the second special figure side is performed. If the information is the trigger of the current game round, the numerical information on the type counter C2 is read out of the hold information on the second special figure side. Then, the numerical information on the read type counter C2 is set in the numerical range of any type of the jackpot result of any of the 6R normal jackpot result, the 6R high jackpot result, and the 16R high jackpot result set in the type table 499. Specify whether they are supported.

  After executing the type determination process, the flag of the main RAM 65 corresponding to the type of the jackpot result specified in the type determination process is set to “1” (step SF307). The state of the flag in which "1" is set is cleared to "0" when the open / close execution mode ends.

  Thereafter, a stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed (step SF308). Specifically, the information on the stop mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed in the current game round on the side of the first special figure display unit 425 and the second special figure display unit 426 which is the execution target of the game round. Is determined from the jackpot result stop result table stored in the main ROM 64 in advance, and the specified information is stored in the main RAM 65. In the stop result table for the jackpot result, the type of the stop mode of the pattern stopped and displayed on the first special figure display unit 425 or the second special figure display unit 426 is set differently for each type of the big hit result. In step SF308, the main RAM 65 stores information on the pattern stop mode according to the type of the jackpot result specified in step SF306. In addition, the stop mode of the pattern may be set so as to correspond to each jackpot result on a one-to-one basis, and a plurality of types of pattern stop modes may be set for at least some of the jackpot results. The method of selecting a stop result for a jackpot result in which a plurality of types of pattern stop modes are set is arbitrary, but a configuration in which the stop result is selected according to, for example, the value of the type counter C2 may be employed.

  If the result of the success / failure determination process is a small hit result (step SF309: YES), “1” is set to a flag of the main RAM 65 corresponding to the small hit result (step SF310). The state of the flag to which "1" is set is cleared to "0" when the open / close execution mode ends.

  Thereafter, a stop result setting process for the small hit result is executed (step SF311). Specifically, the information of the stop mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed in the current game round on the first special figure display section 425 or the second special figure display section 426 is read from the main ROM 64, and the read information is read. It is stored in the main RAM 65. In this case, the information on the pattern aspect selected is different from the information on the pattern aspect selected in the case of the jackpot result.

  If the result of the success / failure determination process is neither the big hit result nor the small hit result (step SF305 and step SF309: NO), a stop result setting process for a miss result is executed (step SF312). Specifically, the information on the stop mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed in the current game round on the side of the first special figure display unit 425 and the second special figure display unit 426 which is the execution target of the game round. Is determined from the stop result table for the deviation result stored in the main ROM 64 in advance, and the specified information is stored in the main RAM 65. In this case, the information of the pattern aspect selected is different from the information of the pattern aspect selected in the case of the big hit result and the information of the pattern aspect selected in the case of the small hit result.

  After executing any of the stop result setting processes, a process of grasping the display continuation period is executed (step SF313). In this processing, the numerical value information of the fluctuation type counter CS is obtained, and the information on the current status and the display continuation period corresponding to the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS is selected in the form shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG.

  After that, the result of the current pass / fail judgment process and the type judgment process, the type of the current pass / fail lottery mode, the type of the current support mode, and the variation command and the type command corresponding to the process result of step SF313 are selected from the main ROM 64. I do. Then, the selected variation command and type command are transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step SF314). The sound emission control device 81 executes control for executing an effect for a game corresponding to the received variation command and type command received.

  After that, the variation display of the pattern is started on the side of the first special figure display unit 425 and the second special figure display unit 426 which is the execution target of the current game round (step SF315). The first special figure display section 425 and the second special figure display section serve as tables referred to by the main CPU 63 when changing the design on the first special figure display section 425 or the second special figure display section 426. A variation display table for special drawings common to 426 is stored in the main ROM 64 in advance. When the variation display of the pattern is executed in the first special figure display unit 425 or the second special figure display unit 426, the same variation display table is used regardless of the result of the hit / fail determination processing and the result of the type determination processing. You. When the variation display of the pattern is performed on the first special figure display unit 425 or the second special figure display unit 426, the variation display of the pattern according to the predetermined pattern is repeated. The control data for one round in the variation display of the picture by the predetermined pattern is set. Therefore, when the pattern is fluctuated on the first special figure display section 425 or the second special figure display section 426, the special figure fluctuating display table is used until the display duration of the game times determined in step SF313 elapses. Will be used repeatedly.

  After that, the process turns off the special display unit 429 (step SF316). In the special display unit 429, when the open / close execution mode occurs, information corresponding to the number of round games generated in the open / close execution mode is displayed. That is, when the opening / closing execution mode is triggered by the result of the 6R normal jackpot result or the 6R high-accuracy jackpot result, when the opening / closing execution mode is started, the special display unit 429 displays six round games. A corresponding display is provided. When the opening / closing execution mode is triggered by the result of the 16R high-accuracy jackpot, when the opening / closing execution mode is started, a display corresponding to 16 round games is displayed on the special display unit 429. Is When the opening / closing execution mode is triggered by the small hit result, when the opening / closing execution mode is started, a display corresponding to the small hit result is performed on the special display unit 429. In the above-described configuration, the display on the special display unit 429 started when the opening / closing execution mode is started by executing the turning-off process of the special display unit 429 in step SF316 of the special figure change start process is displayed in the opening / closing execution mode. Is ended when a new game is started after the end of the game. Then, the special display unit 429 is kept off until a new open / close execution mode occurs.

  Thereafter, if the current processing corresponds to the first special figure special power control processing (FIG. 742), the value of the first special figure special power control counter is incremented by 1, and the current processing is the second special figure special power control processing (FIG. 742). If it corresponds to FIG. 743), the value of the second special figure special power counter is incremented by 1 (step SF317). Since the value of the special figure special power counter in the case where the special figure fluctuation start processing is executed is “0”, the value of the special figure special power counter targeted for the addition by adding 1 becomes the special figure fluctuation processing ( "1" corresponding to step SF106 and step SF206).

<Process during special figure fluctuation>
Next, the special figure changing process executed in step SF106 of the first special figure special power control processing (FIG. 742) and step SF206 of the second special figure special power control processing (FIG. 743) will be described.

  If the current game time display continuation period has not elapsed and it is the update timing of the display contents of the special figure display units 425 and 426 which are the execution targets of the current game time, By referring to the fluctuation display table, data setting for updating the display contents of the special figure display units 425 and 426 is performed. As a result, the display contents of the symbols on the special figure display units 425 and 426, which are the execution targets of the current game, are updated to the display contents in the next order. The main RAM 65 stores a first display order counter referred to in order to derive the display contents of the pattern from the variable display table for the special figure when the timing of updating the pattern in the first special figure display unit 425 comes. Is provided. Further, the main RAM 65 stores a second display order counter referred to in order to derive the display contents of the pattern from the variable display table for the special figure when the timing of updating the pattern in the second special figure display unit 426 comes. Is provided.

  The mode at the start of the pattern variation display in the special figure display units 425 and 426, and the mode of updating the pattern variation display are performed in a certain mode regardless of the result of the hit / fail determination processing and the result of the type determination processing. It is performed in a fixed manner regardless of the contents of the effect for the game round on the symbol display device 424. For example, when a predetermined plurality of update timings occur, the display content of the picture goes around once and a display pattern in which the display order is a fixed order is repeatedly performed, and when the display duration of the game time has elapsed, Regardless of the order in which the display patterns are displayed, the stop result determined at the start of the game round is displayed. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration for controlling the display of the special figure display units 425 and 426.

  On the other hand, if the game continuation period has elapsed, the information of the pattern stop mode of the special figure display units 425 and 426 stored in the main RAM 65 at the start of the game round is read out, and the pattern stop mode is read. The display control of the special figure display units 425 and 426 which are the execution targets of the current game round is controlled so as to be as follows. As a result, the special figure display units 425 and 426, which are the execution targets of the current game round, display the pattern corresponding to the result of the success / failure determination process of the current game round and the result of the type determination process. The variable display is stopped. The state of the pattern stopped and displayed on the special figure display units 425, 426 is maintained until the next variation display of the pattern on the special figure display unit 425, 426 is started, regardless of whether the mode is the open / close execution mode. Is done. Further, information of the final stop period (for example, 0.5 sec) is set in the timer counter of the main RAM 65. Thereby, the measurement of the final stop period is started.

  After that, a final stop command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. When receiving the final stop command from the main CPU 63, the sound emission control device 81 transmits the final stop command to the display control device 82. When the display control device 82 receives the final stop command from the sound emission control device 81, the display control device 82 reads a display pattern table for stopping and displaying the combination of the stop symbols in the current game round over the final stop period. As a result, the combination of the stop symbols corresponding to the current game time is stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 424 over the final stop period.

  Thereafter, if the current processing corresponds to the first special figure special power control processing (FIG. 742), the value of the first special figure special power control counter is incremented by 1, and the current processing is the second special figure special power control processing (FIG. 742). If it corresponds to FIG. 743), the value of the second special figure special power counter is incremented by one. Since the value of the special figure special power counter is "1" when the special figure special processing counter is executed, the value of the special figure special power counter which is added by 1 is added to the special figure finalizing processing ( "2" corresponding to step SF107 and step SF207).

<Process during special figure determination>
Next, the special figure fixing process executed in step SF107 of the first special figure special power control processing (FIG. 742) and step SF207 of the second special figure special power control processing (FIG. 743) is described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. I will explain while. The processing of steps SF401 to SF409 in the special figure determination processing is executed by using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

  If the final stop period has elapsed and the current game time corresponds to the jackpot result (step SF401 and step SF402: YES), a jackpot setting process is executed (step SF403). In the jackpot setting process, if the current jackpot result is the 6R regular jackpot result or the 6R high-accuracy jackpot result, the display control of the special display unit 429 is performed so that display corresponding to six round games is started. Data settings for Also, in the jackpot setting process, if the current jackpot result is a 16R high-accuracy jackpot result, data for controlling the display of the special display unit 429 so that display corresponding to 16 round games is started. Make settings.

  If the final stop period has elapsed and the current game time corresponds to the small hit result (step SF401 and step SF404: YES), a small hit setting process is executed (step SF405). In the setting process for the small hit, data setting for display control of the special display unit 429 is performed so that the display corresponding to the small hit result is started.

  When the processing of step SF403 or step SF405 is executed, the value of the special figure special power counter not corresponding to the current special figure special power control processing (FIGS. 742 and 743) is cleared to "0" (step SF406). Accordingly, even if the execution control of the game times is performed in the special figure special power control processing (FIGS. 742 and 743) on the side not corresponding to the current special figure special power control processing (FIGS. 742 and 743), the game is performed. The times are forcibly terminated. In other words, when one of the game rounds that results in a big hit or a small hit is completed in a situation where the game round is being executed on both the first special figure display unit 425 and the second special figure display unit 426, the other game round ends. The game round will also be completed halfway. After that, the other game round end processing is executed (step SF407). In the end processing, the special figure display units 425 and 426 on the side to which the game times are forcibly ended are displayed in accordance with the result of the departure.

  Thereafter, if the current processing corresponds to the first special figure special power control processing (FIG. 742), the value of the first special figure special power control counter is incremented by 1, and the current processing is the second special figure special power control processing (FIG. 742). If it corresponds to FIG. 743), the value of the second special figure special power counter is incremented by 1 (step SF408). Since the value of the special figure special power counter in the case where the special figure special processing is executed is "2", the value of the special figure special power counter which is added by adding 1 is the special power start processing (step SF108). , Step SF208).

  If the current game round is a result of the departure (step SF404: NO), if the current processing corresponds to the first special figure special power control processing (FIG. 742), the value of the first special figure special power counter is set to " "0" is cleared, and if the current process corresponds to the second special figure special power control processing (FIG. 743), the value of the second special figure special power counter is cleared to "0" (step SF409). Thus, the value of the special figure special power counter becomes “0” corresponding to the special figure change start process (step SF105, step SF205).

<Tokuden start processing>
Next, the special power starting process executed in step SF108 of the first special power special power control process (FIG. 742) and step SF208 of the second special power special power control process (FIG. 743) will be described.

  In the special power start process, the measurement of the opening period (for example, 4 seconds) is started and the opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 if the opening period is not started. When receiving the opening command, the sound light emission control device 81 executes light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 and sound output control of the speaker unit 54 so as to execute an opening effect. In addition, the sound emission control device 81 transmits an opening command to the display control device 82. When receiving the opening command, the display control device 82 controls the display of the symbol display device 424 so that the opening effect is executed.

  In the special power start process, when the opening period has elapsed, if this time is triggered by any of the jackpot results, the round counter provided in the main RAM 65 corresponds to the number of times of execution of the round game in the current open / close execution mode. Set the information to be performed. The round counter is a counter for specifying the number of remaining round games in the open / close execution mode by the main CPU 63, and the value of the round counter is decremented by one each time the round game is executed once. In addition, information on the duration of the round game opening (specifically, 29 seconds) is set in a timer counter of the main RAM 65, and a special prize winning device 416 for one round game is set in a prize counter provided in the main RAM 65. (Specifically, “10”) corresponding to the maximum number of winnings for the game. On the other hand, if this time is triggered by the small hit result, “1” is set to the round counter provided in the main RAM 65. In addition, information on the duration of opening the small hit result (specifically, 2 seconds) is set in a timer counter provided in the main RAM 65, and a special winning prize in the small hit result is set in a prize counter provided in the main RAM 65. Information (specifically, “10”) corresponding to the maximum winning number in the device 416 is set.

  After that, a special power release setting process is executed. In the opening setting process, the output of the drive signal to the driving unit for special power 416c is started so that the special power winning device 416 is in the open state. Thereafter, if the current processing corresponds to the first special figure special power control processing (FIG. 742), the value of the first special figure special power control counter is incremented by 1, and the current processing is the second special figure special power control processing (FIG. 742). If it corresponds to FIG. 743), the value of the second special figure special power counter is incremented by one. Since the value of the special figure special power counter in the case where the special power start processing is executed is “3”, the value of the special figure special power counter targeted for addition by adding 1 is the special power open processing (step SF109, It becomes "4" corresponding to step SF209).

<Treatment during special power release>
Next, the special power release processing executed in step SF109 of the first special figure special power control processing (FIG. 742) and step SF209 of the second special figure special power control processing (FIG. 743) will be described.

  In the special power opening processing, the closing setting processing is executed when the opening continuation period of the special power prize device 416 has elapsed or when the special prize winning device 416 has a winning of the maximum number of game balls. In the closing setting process, the output of the drive signal to the driving unit for special power 416c is stopped so that the special power winning device 416 is closed. Thereafter, the value of the round counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by one.

  If the value of the round counter after subtraction by 1 is not “0”, information corresponding to the closing duration (specifically, 2 seconds) is set in the timer counter of the main RAM 65. Thereafter, if the current processing corresponds to the first special figure special power control processing (FIG. 742), the value of the first special figure special power control counter is incremented by 1, and the current processing is the second special figure special power control processing (FIG. 742). If it corresponds to FIG. 743), the value of the second special figure special power counter is incremented by one. Since the value of the special figure special power counter in the case where the special power special open processing is executed is “4”, the value of the special special power special counter which is added by adding 1 is the special power closed processing (step SF110). , Step SF210).

  If the value of the round counter after subtraction by one is “0”, information corresponding to the ending period (specifically, 10 seconds) is set in the timer counter of the main RAM 65. Further, the ending command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. When receiving the ending command, the sound light emission control device 81 executes the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 54 so that the ending effect is executed. The sound emission control device 81 transmits an ending command to the display control device 82. When receiving the ending command, the display control device 82 executes the display control of the symbol display device 424 so as to execute the ending effect. Thereafter, if the current processing corresponds to the first special figure special power control processing (FIG. 742), the value of the first special figure special power counter is added by 2, and the current processing is the second special figure special power control processing (FIG. 742). If it corresponds to FIG. 743), the value of the second special figure special power counter is incremented by two. Since the value of the special figure special power counter when the special power special opening processing is executed is “4”, the value of the special figure special power counter which is added by adding 2 is the special power end processing (step SF111, It becomes "6" corresponding to step SF211).

<Treatment during closing of special electric train>
Next, the special power closing process executed in step SF110 of the first special power special power control process (FIG. 742) and step SF210 of the second special power special power control process (FIG. 743) will be described.

  If the closing continuation period has elapsed, information on the opening duration of the round game (specifically, 29 seconds) is set in the timer counter of the main RAM 65, and one round game is set in the winning counter of the main RAM 65. The information (specifically, "10") corresponding to the upper limit winning number in the special power winning device 416 in is set. Then, the special power winning device 416 is opened by executing the special power opening setting process. Thereafter, if the current processing corresponds to the first special figure special power control processing (FIG. 742), the value of the first special figure special power counter is decremented by 1, and the current processing is the second special figure special power control processing (FIG. 742). If it corresponds to FIG. 743), the value of the second special figure special power counter is decremented by one. Since the value of the special figure special power counter in the case where the special power closed processing is executed is "5", the value of the special figure special power counter which is subtracted by 1 is reduced during the special power open processing (step SF109). , Step SF209).

<Tokuden end processing>
Next, the special power ending processing executed in step SF111 of the first special figure special power control processing (FIG. 742) and step SF211 of the second special figure special power control processing (FIG. 743) will be described.

  If the ending period has elapsed, a transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode is executed. In the shift processing, if the opening / closing execution mode is triggered by the 6R normal jackpot result, the success / failure lottery mode is set to the low probability mode and the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode. When the total number of game times reaches 50, information for terminating the high frequency support mode is also set. If the opening / closing execution mode is triggered by the 6R high probability jackpot result, the winning / rejecting lottery mode is set to the high probability mode and the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode. If the opening / closing execution mode is triggered by the 16R high probability jackpot result, the winning / rejecting lottery mode is set to the high probability mode and the support mode is set to the low frequency support mode. On the other hand, if the trigger of the current open / close execution mode is a small hit result, the process for changing the success / failure lottery mode and the support mode from before the start of the open / close execution mode is not executed.

  Thereafter, if the current processing corresponds to the first special figure special power control processing (FIG. 742), the value of the first special figure special power control counter is cleared to "0", and the current processing is the second special figure special power control. If it corresponds to the process (FIG. 743), the value of the second special figure special power counter is cleared to "0". Thus, the value of the special figure special power counter becomes “0” corresponding to the special figure change start process (step SF105, step SF205).

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  A change in each set value of the number of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 determined to be a jackpot result in the hit / failure determination processing for the hold information on the first special figure side determines the hit / failure for the hold information on the first special figure side. It is absorbed by the variation in the number of numerical information of the random number counter C1 which is determined to be a deviation result in the processing. As a result, a big hit result is obtained in the hit / fail determination processing for the hold information on the first special figure side, without affecting the probability of the small hit result in the hit / fail determination processing for the hold information on the first special figure side. The probability can be changed.

  The number of pieces of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 determined to be a small hit result in the hit / fail determination processing for the hold information on the first special figure side is the same regardless of the set value. This makes it possible to make the probability that the small hit result is selected in the hit / non-permission determination process for the hold information on the first special figure side constant for all the set values. In addition, even if the probability that the small hit result is selected in the hit / non-hold information on the first special figure side is fixed in this way, the hit / non-OK determination processing on the hold information on the first special figure side can be performed. Since the variation of each set value of the probability that the jackpot result is selected is absorbed by the variation of the probability that the outlier is selected, the jackpot result is selected in the hit determination process for the hold information on the first special figure side. It is possible to set the probability of being performed as a probability according to the set value.

  The number of pieces of numerical information of the random number counter C1 determined to be an out-of-course result in the rejection determination process for the hold information on the first special figure side is the largest regardless of each set value. As a result, a variation in each set value of the probability that the jackpot result is selected in the hit / failure determination processing for the hold information on the first special figure side is selected in the hit / failure determination processing for the hold information on the first special figure side. Even if it is configured to absorb the fluctuation of the probability of occurrence, the probability that the result will deviate in the rejection determination processing for the hold information on the first special figure side does not cause a large fluctuation between the set values in a plurality of stages. It is possible to do.

  A change in each set value of the number of numerical information of the random number counter C1 determined to be a big hit result in the hit / non-hold information on the second special figure side is a hit / non-right judgment on the hold information on the second special figure side. It is absorbed by the variation in the number of numerical information of the random number counter C1 determined to be a deviation result in the processing. Thereby, a big hit result is obtained in the hit / fail determination processing for the hold information on the second special figure side while not affecting the probability of a small hit result in the hit / fail determination processing for the hold information on the second special figure side. The probability can be changed.

  The number of pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 determined to be the small hit result in the hit / fail determination processing for the hold information on the second special figure side is the same regardless of the set value. This makes it possible to make the probability that the small hit result is selected in the hit determination processing for the hold information on the second special figure side constant for all the set values. Further, even if the probability that the small hit result is selected in the hit / non-hold information on the second special figure side is fixed in this way, the hit / non-OK determination processing on the hold information on the second special figure side can be performed. Since the variation of each set value of the probability that the jackpot result is selected is absorbed by the variation of the probability that the result is selected, the jackpot result is selected in the hit determination process for the hold information on the second special figure side. It is possible to set the probability of being performed as a probability according to the set value.

  In a situation in which the setting value, which is the situation in which the probability of a jackpot result being the highest in the success / failure determination processing for the hold information on the second special figure side is “setting 6”, and the success / failure lottery mode is the high probability mode, The number of pieces of numerical information of the random number counter C1 determined to be an out-of-order result in the hit / fail determination processing for the hold information on the special figure side is zero. Thereby, the variation in each set value of the probability of being a big hit in the hit / fail determination processing for the hold information on the second special figure side is deviated by the hit / fail determination processing for the hold information on the second special figure side. In the configuration in which the fluctuation is absorbed, it is possible to maximize the probability of the jackpot result in the situation where the probability of the jackpot result is highest as described above.

  The probability of a small hit result in the hit / fail determination processing for the hold information on the first special figure side is the same regardless of the set value and the win / loss lottery mode. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing both the set value and the success / failure lottery mode from the probability of the small hit result.

  The probability of a small hit result in not only the hit / fail judgment processing for the hold information on the first special figure side but also the hit / fail judgment processing for the hold information on the second special figure side depends on the set value and the win / fail lottery mode. Are the same. In this way, in either of the hit / fail determination processing for the hold information on the first special figure side and the hit / fail determination processing for the hold information on the second special figure side, the setting value and the win / fail lottery mode are determined from the probability of the small hit result. It is possible to prevent the player from guessing both.

  The probability that the small hit result is selected in the hit / fail determination processing for the hold information on the first special figure side is different from the probability that the small hit result is selected in the hit / fail determination processing for the hold information on the second special figure side. I have. In this way, the probability of the small hit result in both the set value and the success / failure lottery mode is determined not only in the success / failure determination process for the hold information on the first special figure side but also in the success / failure determination processing for the suspension information on the second special figure side. Even in the same configuration, it is possible to cause a situation in which the probability of the small hit result is different.

  In addition, instead of the configuration of the above-described embodiment, each of the numbers of the numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 determined to be the big hit result when the hit determination processing is performed on the hold information on the first special figure side is performed. The fluctuation in the set value is absorbed by the fluctuation in the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, which is determined to be a small hit result when the hit / fail determination processing is performed on the hold information on the first special figure side. May be adopted.

  In addition, instead of the configuration of the above-described embodiment, each of the numbers of the numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 determined to be the big hit result when the hit determination processing is performed on the hold information on the second special figure side is performed. The variation in the set value is absorbed by the variation in the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, which is determined to be a small hit result when the hit / fail determination processing is performed on the hold information on the second special figure side. May be adopted.

  Further, the small hit result can be selected when the success / failure determination processing is executed on the hold information on the first special figure side. The configuration may be such that the small hit result is not selected when the success / failure determination processing is executed.

<Twenty-second embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the content of the hit / fail table referred to in the hit / fail judgment processing is different from that of the 101st embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the above-described 101st embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the 101st embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 746 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the low probability first pass / fail table 495 referred to when performing the pass / fail determination processing on the hold information on the first special figure side in the low probability mode. FIG. 746 (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first probability table 496 at the time of high probability which is referred to when performing the success / failure determination process on the hold information on the first special figure side in the high probability mode. ) Is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second success / failure table 501 at the time of low probability referred to when performing the success / failure determination processing on the hold information on the second special figure side in the low probability mode, and FIG. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the 2nd success / failure table 502 at the time of a high probability referred when performing the success / failure determination process about the hold information of a 2nd special figure side in a high probability mode.

  As shown in FIGS. 746 (a) and 746 (b), the contents of the first success / failure table 495 at the time of low probability and the first success / failure table 496 at the time of high probability are the same as those in the 101st embodiment. On the other hand, the contents of the second success / failure table 501 at the low probability shown in FIG. 746 (c) and the second success / failure table 502 at the high probability shown in FIG. 746 (d) are different from those of the 101st embodiment. The second success / failure table 501 at the time of low probability and the second success / failure table 502 at the time of high probability will be described below.

  As shown in FIG. 746 (c), a large hit result, a small hit result, and a miss result are set in the second hit / fail table 501 at the time of low probability as the judgment result of the hit judgment processing. Further, the pachinko machine 10 has the setting states of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”, but the higher the setting value, the higher the probability of the jackpot result, and the higher the setting value, the lower the probability of the off-set result. It is set as follows. On the other hand, the probability of the small hit result is set to be the same regardless of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”.

  Specifically, 50 is set as the number of pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit result in “setting 1” which is the lowest set value, and the numerical value of the hit random number counter C1 which is a small hit result is set. 9300 pieces are set as the number of pieces of information, and 650 pieces are set as the number of pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is a departure result. Also, in the “setting 2” which is a setting value one step higher than the “setting 1”, 52 pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit result are set, and the hit random number which is a small hit result is set. 9300 pieces are set as the number of pieces of numerical information of the counter C1, and 648 pieces are set as the number of pieces of numerical information of the random number counter C1 which is a departure result. In the "setting 3" which is one step higher than the "setting 2", 54 pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit result are set, and the random number which is a small hit result is set. 9300 pieces are set as the number of pieces of numerical information of the counter C1, and 646 pieces are set as the number of pieces of numerical information of the random number counter C1 which is a departure result. In the “setting 4” which is a setting value one step higher than the “setting 3”, 56 pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit result are set, and the hit random number which is a small hit result is set. 9300 pieces are set as the number of pieces of numerical information of the counter C1, and 644 pieces are set as the number of pieces of numerical information of the random number counter C1 which is a departure result. In the “setting 5” which is a setting value one step higher than the “setting 4”, 58 pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit result are set, and the random number which is a small hit result is set. 9300 are set as the number of pieces of numerical information of the counter C1, and 642 are set as the number of pieces of numerical information of the random number counter C1 which is a departure result. In the “setting 6” that is the highest setting value, 60 pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is a big hit result are set, and the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 that is a small hit result is set. Is set as 9300, and 640 is set as the number of numerical value information of the random number counter C1 as a hit result.

  As shown in FIG. 746 (d), a large hit result, a small hit result, and a miss result are set in the second hit table 502 at the time of high probability as the judgment results of the hit judgment processing. Further, the pachinko machine 10 has the setting states of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”, but the higher the setting value, the higher the probability of the jackpot result, and the higher the setting value, the lower the probability of the off-set result. It is set as follows. On the other hand, the probability of the small hit result is set to be the same regardless of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”.

  Specifically, in the "setting 1" which is the lowest setting value, 500 pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit result are set, and the numerical value of the hit random number counter C1 which is a small hit result is set. 9300 pieces are set as the number of pieces of information, and 200 pieces are set as the number of pieces of numerical value information of the random number counter C1 which is a departure result. In the “setting 2” which is a setting value one level higher than the “setting 1”, 520 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit result. 9300 pieces are set as the number of pieces of numerical information of the counter C1, and 180 pieces are set as the number of pieces of numerical information of the random number counter C1 which is a departure result. In the “setting 3” which is a setting value one level higher than the “setting 2”, 540 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit result, and the hit random number which is a small hit result is set. 9300 pieces are set as the number of pieces of numerical information of the counter C1, and 160 pieces are set as the number of pieces of numerical information of the random number counter C1 which is a departure result. In addition, 560 pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit result are set in “setting 4” which is a setting value one level higher than “setting 3”, and a hit random number which is a small hit result is set. 9300 pieces are set as the number of pieces of numerical information of the counter C1, and 140 pieces are set as the number of pieces of numerical information of the random number counter C1 as a hit result. In the “setting 5” which is a setting value one level higher than the “setting 4”, 580 pieces are set as the number of pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit result. 9300 pieces are set as the number of pieces of numerical information of the counter C1, and 120 pieces are set as the number of pieces of numerical information of the random number counter C1 which is a departure result. Also, in the “setting 6” which is the highest setting value, 600 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit result, and the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a small hit result is set. Is set to 9300, and 100 pieces are set as the number of numerical value information of the random number counter C1 as a hit result.

  In the “setting 1”, the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the hold information on the second special map side is 1/200 in the case of the low probability mode and 1/20 of 10 times that in the case of the high probability mode. It is. In the “setting 2”, the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the hold information on the second special map side is about 1/192 in the case of the low probability mode, and about 1 times 10 times that in the case of the high probability mode. /19.2. In “Setting 3”, the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the hold information on the second special map side is about 1/185 in the case of the low probability mode, and about 1 times 10 times that in the case of the high probability mode. /18.5. In the “setting 4”, the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the hold information on the second special map side is about 1/179 in the case of the low-probability mode, and about 10 times that in the case of the high-probability mode. /17.9. In the “setting 5”, the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the hold information on the second special map side is about 1/172 in the case of the low probability mode and about 1 times 10 times that in the case of the high probability mode. /17.2. In the “setting 6”, the probability of the jackpot result being triggered by the hold information on the second special map side is about 1/167 in the case of the low probability mode and about 1 times 10 times that in the case of the high probability mode. / 16.7. In other words, in any of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”, the probability of a jackpot result being triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side is higher in the case of the high probability mode than in the case of the low probability mode. 10 times. Further, when the combination of the setting state and the winning / rejecting lottery mode is compared in the same combination, the probability of a jackpot result is triggered by the hold information of the first special figure and the hold information of the second special figure. Is the same as

  On the other hand, the probability of a small hit result triggered by the hold information on the second special map side is about 1 / 1.08, which is the same regardless of any one of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”. Also, the probability of the small hit result triggered by the hold information on the second special map side is 1 / 1.08, which is the same in both the low probability mode and the high probability mode. In other words, the probability of a small hit result triggered by the hold information on the second special map side is constant regardless of the setting state and the success / failure lottery mode. The probability of the small hit result triggered by the second special figure side hold information is higher than the probability of the small hit result triggered by the first special figure side hold information. Further, the probability of the small hit result being triggered by the hold information on the second special map side is higher than the probability of the large hit result regardless of the setting state and the success / failure lottery mode. In addition, when the hold information on the second special map side is used as an opportunity, the probability of the small hit result is higher than the probability of the miss result regardless of the setting state and the winning / decreasing lottery mode. Furthermore, the probability of the small hit result when the hold information on the second special map side is triggered is higher than the combined probability of the big hit result and the miss result regardless of the setting state and the success / failure lottery mode. .

  The numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a jackpot result may be collectively set so as to be a serial number, and may be set so as to be dispersed so that at least part or all does not become a serial number. Configuration. Further, the numerical value information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a small hit result may be collectively set so as to be a serial number, or at least a part or all may be set so as to be dispersed so as not to be a serial number. May be adopted.

  According to the above configuration, the number of pieces of numerical information of the random number counter C1 assigned to a result outside the small random number counter C1 is smaller than the number of pieces of numerical information of the random number counter C1 assigned to the small hit result in the second success / failure tables 497 and 498. In the configuration having less number, the variation in the probability of the jackpot result due to the set value is absorbed by the variation in the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 assigned to the outlier. In this case, in the case where the combination probability of the big hit result and the small hit result is the highest and the setting is “6” and the mode is the high probability mode, the hit / fail determination processing is performed on the hold information on the second special figure side. The probability of a missed result is 1/100 even in a situation where the situation has been changed. With this, when the setting is “6” and the mode is the high probability mode, a deviation result can be selected even in a situation where a determination is made as to whether or not the hold information on the second special figure side is correct. It becomes possible.

<103rd embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the content of the hit / fail table referred to in the hit / fail judgment processing is different from that of the 101st embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the above-described 101st embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the 101st embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 747 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first success / failure table 495 at the time of low probability which is referred to when performing the success / failure determination processing on the hold information on the first special figure side in the low probability mode. FIG. 747 (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first success / failure table 496 at the time of a high probability which is referred to when performing the success / failure determination processing on the hold information on the first special figure side in the high probability mode. ) Is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second success / failure table 503 at the time of low probability, which is referred to when performing the success / failure determination processing on the hold information on the second special figure side in the low probability mode, and FIG. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the 2nd success / failure table 504 at the time of a high probability referred when performing the success / failure determination process about the hold information of the 2nd special figure side in the high probability mode.

  As shown in FIGS. 747 (a) and 747 (b), the contents of the first success / failure table 495 at the time of low probability and the first success / failure table 496 at the time of high probability are the same as those in the 101st embodiment. On the other hand, the contents of the second success / failure table 503 at low probability shown in FIG. 747 (c) and the second success / failure table 504 at high probability shown in FIG. 747 (d) are different from those of the 101st embodiment. The second success / failure table 503 when the probability is low and the second success / failure table 504 when the probability is high will be described below.

  As shown in FIG. 747 (c), a large hit result, a small hit result, and a miss result are set in the second hit / fail table 503 at the time of low probability as the determination results of the hit determination processing. Further, the pachinko machine 10 has the setting states of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”, but the higher the setting value, the higher the probability of the big hit result, and the higher the setting value, the lower the probability of the small hit result. It is set to be. On the other hand, the probability of the departure result is set to be the same in any of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”.

  Specifically, 50 is set as the number of pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit result in “setting 1” which is the lowest set value, and the numerical value of the hit random number counter C1 which is a small hit result is set. 9450 pieces are set as the number of pieces of information, and 500 pieces are set as the number of pieces of numerical information of the random number counter C1 which is a departure result. Also, in the “setting 2” which is a setting value one step higher than the “setting 1”, 52 pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit result are set, and the hit random number which is a small hit result is set. 9448 are set as the number of numerical information of the counter C1, and 500 are set as the number of numerical information of the random number counter C1 which is a departure result. In the "setting 3" which is a setting value one level higher than the "setting 2", 54 pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit result are set, and the hit random number which is a small hit result is set. 9446 are set as the number of pieces of numerical information of the counter C1, and 500 are set as the number of pieces of numerical information of the random number counter C1 which is a departure result. In the “setting 4” which is a setting value one level higher than the “setting 3”, 56 pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit result are set, and the hit random number which is a small hit result is set. 9444 are set as the number of pieces of numerical information of the counter C1, and 500 are set as the number of pieces of numerical information of the random number counter C1 which is a departure result. In the “setting 5” which is a setting value one level higher than the “setting 4”, 58 pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit result are set, and a random number which is a small hit result is set. 9442 are set as the number of the numerical information of the counter C1, and 500 are set as the number of the numerical information of the random number counter C1 which is a departure result. In the “setting 6” which is the highest setting value, 60 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit result, and the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a small hit result is set. Is set to 9440, and 500 pieces are set as the number of numerical value information of the random number counter C1 as a result of departure.

  As shown in FIG. 747 (d), a large hit result, a small hit result, and a miss result are set in the second hit table 504 at the time of high probability as the judgment result of the hit judgment processing. Further, the pachinko machine 10 has the setting states of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”, but the higher the setting value, the higher the probability of the big hit result, and the higher the setting value, the lower the probability of the small hit result. It is set to be. On the other hand, the probability of the departure result is set to be the same in any of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”.

  Specifically, in the "setting 1" which is the lowest setting value, 500 pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit result are set, and the numerical value of the hit random number counter C1 which is a small hit result is set. 9000 is set as the number of pieces of information, and 500 is set as the number of pieces of numerical information of the random number counter C <b> 1 which is a departure result. In the “setting 2” which is a setting value one level higher than the “setting 1”, 520 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit result. The number of pieces of numerical information of the counter C1 is set to 8,980, and the number of pieces of numerical information of the random number counter C1, which is a departure result, is set to 500. In the “setting 3” which is a setting value one level higher than the “setting 2”, 540 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit result, and the hit random number which is a small hit result is set. 8960 are set as the number of pieces of numerical information of the counter C1, and 500 are set as the number of pieces of numerical information of the random number counter C1 which is a departure result. In addition, 560 pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit result are set in “setting 4” which is a setting value one level higher than “setting 3”, and a hit random number which is a small hit result is set. 8940 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the counter C1, and 500 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the random number counter C1 as a hit result. In the “setting 5” which is a setting value one level higher than the “setting 4”, 580 pieces are set as the number of pieces of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit result. 8920 are set as the number of pieces of numerical information of the counter C1, and 500 are set as the number of pieces of numerical information of the random number counter C1 which is a departure result. Also, in the “setting 6” which is the highest setting value, 600 pieces are set as the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit result, and the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a small hit result is set. Is set to 8900, and the number of pieces of numerical information of the random number counter C1 which is a departure result is 500.

  In the “setting 1”, the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the hold information on the second special map side is 1/200 in the case of the low probability mode and 1/20 of 10 times that in the case of the high probability mode. It is. In the “setting 2”, the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the hold information on the second special map side is about 1/192 in the case of the low probability mode, and about 1 times 10 times that in the case of the high probability mode. /19.2. In “Setting 3”, the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the hold information on the second special map side is about 1/185 in the case of the low probability mode, and about 1 times 10 times that in the case of the high probability mode. /18.5. In the “setting 4”, the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the hold information on the second special map side is about 1/179 in the case of the low-probability mode, and about 10 times that in the case of the high-probability mode. /17.9. In the “setting 5”, the probability of a jackpot result triggered by the hold information on the second special map side is about 1/172 in the case of the low probability mode and about 1 times 10 times that in the case of the high probability mode. /17.2. In the “setting 6”, the probability of the jackpot result being triggered by the hold information on the second special map side is about 1/167 in the case of the low probability mode and about 1 times 10 times that in the case of the high probability mode. / 16.7. In other words, in any of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”, the probability of a jackpot result being triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side is higher in the case of the high probability mode than in the case of the low probability mode. 10 times. Further, when the combination of the setting state and the winning / rejecting lottery mode is compared in the same combination, the probability of a jackpot result is triggered by the hold information of the first special figure and the hold information of the second special figure. Is the same as

  Further, in the “setting 1”, the probability of the small hit result triggered by the hold information on the second special map side is about 1 / 1.582 in the case of the low-probability mode and about 1 / 1.0582 in the case of the high-probability mode. 1 / 1.111. In the “setting 2”, the probability of a small hit result triggered by the hold information on the second special map side is about 1 / 1.584 in the low probability mode and about 1 / 1.0584 in the high probability mode. 1.113. In the “setting 3”, the probability of the small hit result triggered by the hold information on the second special map side is about 1 / 1.586 in the low probability mode and about 1 / 1.0586 in the high probability mode. 1.116. In the “setting 4”, the probability of the small hit result triggered by the hold information on the second special map side is about 1 / 1.589 in the case of the low probability mode and about 1 / 1.0589 in the case of the high probability mode. 1.119. In “Setting 5”, the probability of a small hit result triggered by the hold information on the second special map side is about 1 / 1.0591 in the low probability mode and about 1 / 1.0591 in the high probability mode. 1.121. In “Setting 6”, the probability of the small hit result triggered by the hold information on the second special map side is about 1 / 1.593 in the low probability mode and about 1 / 1.0593 in the high probability mode. 1.124.

  The numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a jackpot result may be collectively set so as to be a serial number, and may be set so as to be dispersed so that at least part or all does not become a serial number. Configuration. Further, the numerical value information of the hit random number counter C1 which is a small hit result may be collectively set so as to be a serial number, or at least a part or all may be set so as to be dispersed so as not to be a serial number. May be adopted.

  According to the above configuration, in the first hit / fail table 495, 496, the number of values of the random number counter C1 assigned to the outlying result is larger than the number of values of the random number counter C1 assigned to the small hit result. In many configurations, the variation of the probability of the jackpot result due to the set value is absorbed by the variation of the number of numerical information of the random number counter C1 assigned to the outlier. Regardless of the set value, the number of pieces of numerical information of the random number counter C1 assigned to the deviation result is the largest. As a result, it is possible to reduce the probability variation of the out-of-order result by the set value for absorbing the probability variation of the jackpot result by the set value. Therefore, when the hold information on the first special figure side is used as an opportunity, it becomes possible for the player to limit the target of attention to the jackpot result in order to guess the set value, and it is difficult to guess the set value. It becomes possible.

  Further, the number of numerical information of the random number counter C1 assigned to the small hit result is larger than the number of numerical information of the random number counter C1 assigned to the outlier in the second success / failure tables 503 and 504. In the configuration, the variation of the probability of the big hit result due to the set value is absorbed by the change of the number of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 assigned to the small hit result. Regardless of the set value, the number of numerical value information of the hit random number counter C1 assigned to the small hit result is the largest. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the probability variation of the small hit result by the set value for absorbing the probability variation of the big hit result by the set value. Therefore, in the case where the hold information on the first special map side is used as an opportunity, it is possible for the player to limit the target to be focused on to the jackpot result in order to guess the set value, and it is difficult to guess the set value. It becomes possible.

<104th Embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the eighteenth embodiment in the processing configuration when the supply of the operating power is started. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the above-described eighteenth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the 81st embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 748 is a front view of the game board 24 in the present embodiment.

  Similar to the above-described thirty-third embodiment, the game board 24 is provided with an inner rail portion 25 and an outer rail portion 26 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. The outer rail portion 26 constitutes a guide rail as guide means. The game balls fired from the game ball firing mechanism 27 (see FIG. 507) are guided to the upper part of the game area PA by the guide rail. In the game area PA, as in the above-described thirty-third embodiment, a general winning opening 31, a special winning winning device 32, a first operating opening 33, a second operating opening 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, and a special figure unit 37 are provided. And a general drawing unit 38 and the like.

  Here, in the present embodiment, a movable body 512 is provided on a center frame 511 provided so as to surround the symbol display device 41 in the variable display unit 36. The movable body 512 is connected to the movable body drive unit 513 via a link mechanism (not shown), and is driven by the movable body drive unit 513 being in a state for displacement, and moves in a predetermined direction from the initial position. At the same time, the movable body drive unit 513 moves to return to the initial position by being in the state for return. The operation of the movable body 512 can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 52. That is, the state in which the movable body 512 operates can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 without having to open the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14.

  More specifically, the movable body 512 is movable between an initial position and a movement limit position, and is arranged in front of the display surface 41a by moving from the initial position toward the movement limit position. Thus, the range facing the display surface 41a in front of the display surface 41a is wider than in the case of the initial position. Specifically, at the initial position, the entirety thereof is located outside the display surface 41a and is disposed in the center frame 511. When the display surface 41a is viewed from the front, the movable body 512 is invisible or invisible. It has a difficult configuration. On the other hand, at the movement limit position, the entire body faces the display surface 41a from the front, and the visibility of the movable body 512 is improved as compared with the initial position, but the visibility of the display surface 41a is reduced. Become. The configuration is not limited to this, and the movable body 512 may be configured to be visible regardless of whether the movable body 512 is arranged at the initial position or the movement limit position.

  The movable body 512 is a movable decorative body having a decoration provided on a surface that is a surface that can be visually recognized by a player when the movable body 512 is located at the movement limit position (that is, a surface facing the front of the gaming machine), and has a predetermined character. (For example, “fish”), the specific form is arbitrary. The movement of the movable body 512 from the initial position to the movement limit position is performed in conjunction with the effect for game play on the display surface 41a, and returns to the initial position when a predetermined effect ends. As described above, the movement of the movable body 512 is used for performing an effect integrated with the image effect on the display surface 41a.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the movable body 512 is moved from the initial position in the middle of the effect for the game (for example, during the reach), the opening and closing execution mode is compared with the case where the movement is not performed. There is a high expectation for the transition to. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In addition to or in place of the above-described configuration, when the result of the success / failure determination that the probability of the success / failure lottery becomes a high probability after the opening / closing execution mode is the same in the production for the game round, In a configuration in which an effect as if a promotion to a high probability has occurred during the open / close execution mode is performed while stopping and displaying a result that does not explicitly indicate a high probability such as a combination of symbols with even numbers, the As an effect, the movable body 512 may be moved from an initial position.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the main control device 60 and the sound emission control device 81 will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 749.

  The main control device 60 is provided with a main control board 61 in the same manner as in the eighteenth embodiment, and the main control board 61 includes a main CPU 63, a main ROM 64, and a main ROM 64 as in the eighteenth embodiment. An MPU 62 having a built-in RAM 65 is provided. Further, the main control board 61 is provided with first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as in the 81st embodiment. The display contents displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are the same as those in the 67th embodiment. Therefore, in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the display for the check is performed over the initial check period, and thereafter, the base value is changed. A display for notification is performed.

  The first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are provided side by side on the element mounting surface of the main control board 61 as in the forty-third embodiment (see FIG. 558). Each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is a segment display in which seven LED display segments are arranged. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be a light emitting body, a liquid crystal display device, or an organic EL display. Each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is installed so that the display surface faces in the direction in which the element mounting surface of the main control board 61 faces, and is formed by the opposed wall portion 60b of the board box 60a. Covered. In this case, since the substrate box 60a is formed to be transparent, the display surfaces of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 housed in the substrate box 60a can be viewed from outside the substrate box 60a. It becomes possible. The main control device 60 is mounted on the rear surface of the resin base 21 so that the opposing wall portion 60b facing the element mounting surface of the main control substrate 61 in the substrate box 60a faces the rear of the pachinko machine 10. When the main body 12 is opened to the front of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the outer frame 11 and the back of the resin base 21 is exposed to the front of the pachinko machine 10, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 are provided through the facing wall portion 60b. To 204 can be visually observed.

  As shown in FIG. 749, the sound emission control device 81 includes a sound emission control board 351. A sound light side MPU 352 is mounted on the sound emission control board 351. The sound light MPU 352 includes a sound light ROM 354 and a sound light RAM 355 in addition to the sound light CPU 353 which is an arithmetic processing device including a control unit and a calculation unit. The sound-light-side MPU 352 includes, in addition to the above elements, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like.

  The sound-light-side ROM 354 is a memory such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory that does not require an external power supply for storing and storing data (that is, a nonvolatile storage unit), and is used as a read-only memory. The sound light ROM 354 stores various control programs executed by the sound light CPU 353 and fixed value data.

  The sound-light-side RAM 355 is a memory (such as a volatile storage unit) that requires an external power supply for storing and holding data, such as an SRAM and a DRAM, and is used for both reading and writing. The sound-light-side RAM 355 is capable of random access and has a shorter read time than the sound-light-side ROM 354 when compared with the same data capacity. The sound-light-side RAM 355 temporarily stores various data and the like when the control program stored in the sound-light-side ROM 354 is executed.

  The MPU 62 of the main control unit 60 is electrically connected to the input side of the sound light side MPU 352, and the display light emitting unit 53, the speaker unit 54, the display control unit 82, and the movable body are connected to the output side of the sound light side MPU 352. The drive unit 513 is electrically connected. The sound-light-side MPU 352 drives and controls the display light-emitting unit 53, the speaker unit 54, and the movable unit driving unit 513 based on various commands received from the MPU 62 of the main control unit 60, and also controls the display control unit 82. The display control device 82 performs display control of the symbol display device 41 based on the command received from the sound light side MPU 352. Thus, in the situation where the game round or the opening / closing execution mode is being executed, various effects and various notifications are executed by the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting section 53, the speaker section 54, and the movable body 512.

  Next, the main processing executed by the main CPU 63 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The processing of steps SF501 to SF529 in the main processing is executed by using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

  First, power-on initialization processing is executed (step SF501). In the power-on initialization process, for example, the process waits without advancing to the next process until a predetermined time for wait (specifically, one second) elapses after the main process is started. The operation start and the initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed in the predetermined period for the weight. Also, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted.

  After that, an internal function register setting process is executed (step SF502). In the internal function register setting process, similarly to the 67th embodiment, the interrupt cycle of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638), which is a process started by interrupting the main process periodically, is set to the first interrupt cycle (FIG. 638). (Specifically, 4 milliseconds), and the interrupt cycle of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639), which is a process that is started by interrupting the main process periodically, is set to be longer than the first interrupt cycle. The second interrupt cycle (specifically, 2 milliseconds), which is a short cycle, is set.

  That is, in the present embodiment, similarly to the 67th embodiment, the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 639) are performed as the timer interrupt processing so that the interrupt cycle is relatively long. Exists. The first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639) are both started by interrupting the main process. The second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639) is started by interrupting the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638). On the other hand, the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) is not activated by interrupting the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 639). In a situation where both the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 639) are not executed, if both the first interrupt cycle and the second interrupt cycle have elapsed, the cycle is determined. Irrespective of the lapse order of the process, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639) is started first. In this regard, it can be said that the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639) is a process that is started prior to the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) may be started prior to the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 639).

  In the internal function register setting processing, the first interrupt cycle of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) is set in a predetermined register of the main CPU 63, and the second interrupt cycle of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 639) is mainly set. It is set in a specific register of the side CPU 63. Further, in the internal function register setting process, in addition to the setting of the first and second interrupt cycles, for example, a setting process of a numerical range of various counters such as a numerical range of the hit random number counter C1 is executed.

  After that, “1” is set to a start-up processing flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step SF503). As in the 67th embodiment, even if the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) is started, the power-out processing flag indicates the power failure among the various processings set in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638). While the processing for monitoring, updating the various counters, and performing the fraud monitoring is executed, it is determined that the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) should be ended without executing the processing for advancing the game. This flag is specified by the main CPU 63.

  The start-up processing flag is set to “1” when the processing (steps SF501 to SF523) at the start of the supply of the operation power is started in the main processing (FIG. 750), and the processing at the start of the supply of the operation power is performed. “0” is cleared before the end of (Step SF501 to Step SF523) and the start of the remaining processing (Step SF526 to Step SF529). As in the 67th embodiment, in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638), when the start-up processing flag is set to “1”, the processing of steps S8907 to S8920 is not executed. In order to advance the game in a situation where a setting confirmation process (FIG. 751) or a setting value update process (FIG. 752), which will be described later, is executed among the processes (steps SF501 to SF523) at the start of the supply of the operating power. Processing can be prevented from being executed. On the other hand, as described above, in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638), even if the start-up processing flag is set to “1”, the processing from step S8901 to step S8905 is executed, thereby reducing the operating power. The power failure monitoring is executed even in the situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 751) or the set value update process (FIG. 752) described later among the processes (steps SF501 to SF523) at the start of the supply of the power supply are being executed. At the same time, the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the random number initial value counter CINI are updated, and fraud detection is further performed.

  In particular, even when the start-up processing flag is set to “1”, the power failure information storage processing (step S8901) is executed, thereby starting the operation power supply (steps SF501 to SF523). ), A power failure process can be executed even if a power failure occurs in a situation in which a setting confirmation process (FIG. 751) or a setting value update process (FIG. 752) described below is being executed. In the process at the time of a power failure, similarly to the 67th embodiment, the power failure flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to “1”, and a check sum calculation process (FIG. 758) is executed to calculate the same. Since the checked checksum is stored in the work area 221 for specific control, it is possible to prevent the main RAM 65 from being identified as having an abnormality when the supply of the operating power is restarted. Accordingly, if a power failure occurs during the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 751) or the setting value updating processing (FIG. 752), the fact that a power failure has occurred during these setting-related processing is indicated by the supply of the next operating power. It can be specified at the start.

  Incidentally, in the situation where the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 751) or the setting value updating processing (FIG. 752) is being executed, both the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 639) are performed. The interrupt is not prohibited and can be interrupted at an arbitrary timing. In this case, when the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638) or the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639) is interrupted and started in the setting confirmation process (FIG. 751) or the set value update process (FIG. 752), The information of the return address of the main processing (FIG. 750) for returning after the completion of the timer interrupt processing to be started is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control, and the timer interrupt processing is started. The information of the various registers of the main CPU 63 immediately before is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control. Then, when the timer interrupt process to be started is completed, the process returns to the main process (FIG. 750) corresponding to the information of the return address saved in the stack area 222 for specific control, and The information saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is restored to various registers of the main CPU 63.

  After setting the startup processing flag to “1” in step SF503, it is determined whether or not “1” is set to the power failure flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step SF504). . When a power failure process is performed in the power failure information storage process (step S8901) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638), “1” is set in the power failure flag. The power failure flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the processing at the time of power failure was properly performed at the time of the previous power-off.

  If “1” is set in the power failure flag (step SF504: YES), the checksum calculation process (FIG. 758) is executed (step SF505), as in the case of the power failure process, and the calculated checksum is calculated. Is normal or not (step SF506). Although details will be described later, in the process at the time of the power failure and the process of calculating the checksum in each of step SF505 (FIG. 758), the checksum is calculated for the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control. In step SF506, the specific control work area 221 and the specific control calculated in the power failure process executed immediately before the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped and stored in the specific control work area 221 The checksum for the stack area 222 is read, and the read checksum is compared with the checksum calculated in step SF505. Then, it is determined whether or not the checksums match.

  If the checksums match (step SF506: YES), is the set value corresponding to the information stored in the setting reference area 341 (see FIG. 659) in the specific control work area 221 in a normal range? It is determined whether or not it is (step SF507). The setting reference area 341 is a storage area in which information for specifying the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 by the main CPU 63 is stored as in the 77th embodiment. When the numerical information of “1” is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 1”. When the numerical information “2” is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 2”. When the numerical information “3” is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 3”. When the numerical information “4” is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 4”. When the numerical information “5” is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 5”. When the numerical information of “6” is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 6”. In step SF507, it is determined whether or not the information of the set value stored in the setting reference area 341 is any of “1” to “6”.

  When an affirmative determination is made in all of step SF504, step SF506, and step SF507, it is determined whether "1" is set in the setting update display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step SF508). . The setting update display flag is a flag for specifying by the main CPU 63 that the setting value update processing (FIG. 752) is being executed as in the 67th embodiment, and “1” is set in the setting update display flag. When the setting is set, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 perform a display indicating that the setting value is being updated and a display indicating the setting value being updated. The setting update display flag is a flag that is set to “1” when the setting value updating process (FIG. 752) is started and is cleared to “0” when the setting value updating process (FIG. 752) ends. In a situation where the set value update process (FIG. 752) is not executed, basically, the setting update display flag is not set to “1”. However, if the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped while the setting value updating process (FIG. 752) is being executed, the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started thereafter. , The setting update display flag is set to "1". The state in which the setting update display flag is set to “1” is maintained until the processing for clearing the setting update display flag to “0” is performed in the setting value update processing (FIG. 752).

  If the setting update display flag is not set to “1” and a negative determination is made in step SF508, it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed (step SF509). That is, it is determined whether or not the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed while the reset button 68c is being pressed, and the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. Here, in the present embodiment, similar to the 67th embodiment, the main control device 60 is provided with the setting key insertion section 68a and the reset button 68c, but is not provided with the update button 68b.

  If the reset button 68c has not been pressed (step SF509: NO), it is determined whether or not “1” has been set in the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control (step SF510). The game stop flag is a flag that is set to “1” when the power failure flag is not set to “1”, when the checksums do not match, or when the set value is abnormal. When the game stop flag is set to “1”, the processes of steps S8901 to S8905 are executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638), while an affirmative determination is made in step S8906 to perform steps S8907 to S8907. The processing of S8920 is not executed. Accordingly, if the power failure flag is not set to “1” because the power failure processing was not properly performed at the time of the previous power shutdown, the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 If at least one of the checksums does not match due to a change in the storage state of the information since the last power shutdown, or if the set value is abnormal, monitoring of power failure, updating of various counters, While processing for monitoring is executed, processing for advancing the game is not executed. When an affirmative determination is made in step SF510, the processing of step SF522 and step SF523 described later is executed.

  If a negative determination is made in step SF510, it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion section 68a has been turned ON using the setting key (step SF511). If the setting key insertion section 68a is turned ON using the setting key (step SF511: YES), a setting confirmation process is executed (step SF513). Even when the setting key insertion section 68a is not turned on using the setting key (step SF511: NO), the setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 221 for the specific control is set to “1”. Is set (step SF512: YES), a setting confirmation process is executed (step SF513).

  The setting confirmation display flag is a flag used by the main CPU 63 to specify that the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 751) is being executed, as in the 67th embodiment. When set, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 perform a display indicating that the setting value is being checked and a display indicating the currently set value. . The setting confirmation display flag is a flag that is set to “1” when the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 751) is started and is cleared to “0” when the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 751) ends. In a situation where the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 751) is not executed, basically, the setting confirmation display flag is not set to “1”. However, when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped while the setting confirmation process (FIG. 751) is being executed, the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started thereafter. , The setting confirmation display flag is set to "1". When the setting confirmation display flag is set to “1”, the RAM clear processing (FIG. 755) described later is executed, or the setting confirmation display flag is cleared to “0” in the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 751). It is maintained until the processing is executed.

  Not only when the reset button 68c is not pressed and the setting key insertion section 68a is turned ON (that is, when the “setting confirmation operation” is performed) as described above, the reset button 68c The setting confirmation process (FIG. 751) is also executed by executing the setting confirmation process (FIG. 751) even when the pressing operation is not performed and the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1". If the power failure process is executed in the situation where the power setting is performed, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 751) is executed even if the “setting confirmation operation” is not performed when the supply of the operating power is resumed thereafter. Thereby, it is possible to continue to check the current set value of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, even if the power failure process is executed in the situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 751) is being executed, if the reset button 68c is pressed when the supply of the operating power is resumed thereafter, The processing corresponding to the operation performed when the supply of the operating power is resumed in the RAM clear processing (FIG. 755) and the set value update processing (FIG. 752) is executed without executing the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 751). You. This makes it possible to prioritize the execution of the RAM clear processing (FIG. 755) or the setting value update processing (FIG. 752) over the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 751).

  Here, the setting confirmation process executed in step SF513 will be described. FIG. 751 is a flowchart showing the setting confirmation processing. The processing of steps SF601 to SF607 in the setting confirmation processing is executed using the specific control program and the specific control data in the main CPU 63.

  First, interruption permission is set (step SF601). Thus, the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) is started by interrupting at the first interrupt cycle, and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 639) is started by interrupting at the second interrupt cycle.

  In the present embodiment, in the processing (Step SF501 to Step SF523) at the start of the supply of the operating power, the interruption of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 639) are basically prohibited. In the setting confirmation process (FIG. 751) and the setting value update process (FIG. 752), an interrupt is permitted. Therefore, if the setting confirmation process (FIG. 751) and the set value update process (FIG. 752) are not executed in the process (steps SF501 to SF523) at the start of the supply of the operating power, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638) and the execution of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639) are prohibited, and the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638) is performed in the state where the process for setting confirmation (FIG. 751) or the process for updating the set value (FIG. 752) is being executed. ) And execution of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639) are permitted. However, in the situation where the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 751) or the setting value update processing (FIG. 752) is being executed, the start-up processing flag is set to “1”. 638) is started, among the various processes of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638), the processes for monitoring the power failure, updating the various counters, and monitoring the illegality are executed, while the processes for progressing the game are performed. The first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638) ends without executing the process.

  Thereafter, "1" is set to the setting confirmation display flag on condition that "1" is not set to the setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 221 for the specific control (step SF602). When the setting confirmation display flag is set to “1”, an affirmative determination is made in step S9005 of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 639), whereby the setting processing for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting confirmation is performed. (Step S9006) is executed. The content of the setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting confirmation is the same as that in the above-described seventy-seventh embodiment. Executing the processing, for example, as shown in an explanatory diagram of FIG. Is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  After that, a confirmation start command is transmitted to the sound-side MPU 352 (step SF603). By receiving the confirmation start command, the sound-light side CPU 353 can recognize the image indicating that the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 751) is being executed and the operation content for terminating the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 751). The display control device 82 controls the display so that the image for making the symbol display is displayed on the symbol display device 41. This allows the manager of the gaming hall to recognize that the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being checked, and is necessary for ending the setting checking process (FIG. 751). It is possible for the manager of the gaming hall to recognize the details of the operation. Note that, in addition to or instead of performing the notification in the symbol display device 41, a configuration may be adopted in which at least one of the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 performs. An external output indicating that the setting confirmation process (FIG. 751) is being executed may be performed on a device external to the pachinko machine 10, such as a management computer for a game hall.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a has switched from the ON state to the OFF state using the setting key (step SF604). Specifically, similarly to the setting confirmation process (FIG. 660) in the seventy-seventh embodiment, the reception state of the signal received from the detection sensor that detects the state of the setting key insertion unit 68a corresponds to the ON state. It is determined whether or not the receiving state has changed from the receiving state to the OFF state. Therefore, not only when the setting key insertion section 68a is maintained in the ON state, but also when the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 751) is started in a situation where the setting key insertion section 68a is in the OFF state, the OFF state is not changed. If it is maintained, a negative determination is made in step SF604. If it is not specified that the setting key insertion section 68a has switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step SF604: NO), the processing of step SF604 is repeated.

  When it is specified that the setting key insertion section 68a has been switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step SF604: YES), the setting confirmation display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step SF605). Accordingly, a negative determination is made in step S9005 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639), and the setting process (step S9006) for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting confirmation is not executed. Therefore, on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, a display indicating that the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being confirmed and a display indicating the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 are displayed. The state to be performed is released.

  After that, interrupt prohibition is set (step SF606). As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 751) is performed when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 751) ends and the process returns to the process (steps SF501 to SF523) at the start of the supply of the operating power in the main process (FIG. 750). 638) and interruption of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 639) are prohibited.

  Thereafter, a return command at the time of confirmation is transmitted to the sound-light-side MPU 352 (step SF607). By receiving the return command at the time of confirmation, the sound-light-side CPU 353 specifies that the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power (steps SF501 to SF523) is completed in the main-side CPU 63, and supplies the current operating power. In the processing at the start (steps SF501 to SF523), it is specified that the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 751) has been executed. Then, processing corresponding to the reception of the return command at the time of confirmation is executed. The contents of the process will be described later.

  As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the setting key insertion portion 68a being turned on by the setting key without pressing the reset button 68c, the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. When the main button (FIG. 750) is started and the reset button 68c is not pressed and the setting key insertion section 68a is turned ON, the game proceeds in the main processing (FIG. 750). The setting confirmation process (FIG. 751) is executed in a situation in which the processing at the time of starting the supply of the operating power, which is a situation before the execution of the processing in FIG. This makes it possible to confirm the set value in a situation where no game is being played.

  Returning to the description of the main processing (FIG. 750), when the setting key insertion unit 68a is not turned on using the setting key and “1” is not set in the setting confirmation display flag (steps SF511 and SF511). Step SF512: NO), a normal return command is transmitted to the sound-light-side MPU 352 (step SF514). By receiving the normal return command, the sound-light-side CPU 353 specifies that the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power (steps SF501 to SF523) has been completed in the main-side CPU 63, and determines at the start of the supply of the current operating power. (Step SF501 to step SF523), it is specified that none of the RAM clear processing (FIG. 755), the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 751), and the set value update processing (FIG. 752) have been executed. Then, a process corresponding to the reception of the normal return command is executed. The contents of the process will be described later.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the reset button 68c is being pressed, and the setting key insertion unit 68a is determined to have been turned on using the setting key (step SF509 and step SF515: YES), Alternatively, if it is determined in step SF508 that the setting update display flag has been set to "1", a setting value update process is executed (step SF516). Not only when the reset button 68c is pressed as described above and the setting key insertion section 68a is turned ON (that is, when the "setting change operation" is performed), but also when the reset button 68c is pressed. The setting value update process (FIG. 752) is also executed when the setting update display flag is set to “1” regardless of the presence or absence of the pressing operation and the ON operation of the setting key insertion unit 68a, thereby updating the setting value. If the process at the time of a power failure is executed in a state where the process (FIG. 752) is being executed, the operation contents at the start of the supply of the operating power thereafter are “no operation”, “RAM clear operation”, and “setting change”. The setting value update process (FIG. 752) is executed regardless of whether the operation is an “operation” or a “setting confirmation operation”. This makes it possible to prioritize the execution of the setting value update processing (FIG. 752).

  Here, the setting value update processing executed in step SF516 will be described. FIG. 752 is a flowchart showing the setting value update processing. Note that the processing of steps SF701 to SF714 in the setting value update processing is executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

  First, interrupt permission is set (step SF701). Thus, the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) is started by interrupting at the first interrupt cycle, and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 639) is started by interrupting at the second interrupt cycle.

  In the present embodiment, in the processing (Step SF501 to Step SF523) at the start of the supply of the operating power, the interruption of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 639) are basically prohibited. In the setting confirmation process (FIG. 751) and the setting value update process (FIG. 752), an interrupt is permitted. Therefore, if the setting confirmation process (FIG. 751) and the set value update process (FIG. 752) are not executed in the process (steps SF501 to SF523) at the start of the supply of the operating power, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638) and the execution of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639) are prohibited, and the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638) is performed in the state where the process for setting confirmation (FIG. 751) or the process for updating the set value (FIG. 752) is being executed. ) And execution of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639) are permitted. However, in the situation where the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 751) or the setting value update processing (FIG. 752) is being executed, the start-up processing flag is set to “1”. 638) is started, among the various processes of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638), the processes for monitoring the power failure, updating the various counters, and monitoring the illegality are executed, while the processes for progressing the game are performed. The first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638) ends without executing the process.

  After that, "1" is set to the setting update display flag on condition that "1" is not set to the setting update display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step SF702). When the setting update display flag is set to “1”, an affirmative determination is made in step S9003 of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 639), and the setting processing for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update is performed. (Step S9004) is executed. The content of the setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update is the same as that in the above-described seventy-seventh embodiment. By executing the process, for example, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 629 (a), a display indicating that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being updated and the pachinko machine 10 is selected as an update target The displayed set values are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  Thereafter, initial settings at the start are performed (step SF703). In the initial setting, the game stop flag provided in the specific control work area 221 is cleared to “0”. When the power failure flag is not set to “1” because the power failure processing was not properly performed at the time of the previous power-off (step SF504: NO), the game stop flag indicates the work area 221 for the specific control and If the checksums do not match for at least one of the stack areas 222 for specific control due to a change in the storage state of information since the last power-off (step SF506: NO), or the setting reference area 341 When the set value corresponding to the information stored in is not within the normal range (step SF507: NO), "1" is set in step SF520 of the main process (FIG. 750). When the game stop flag is set to “1”, the processes of steps S8901 to S8905 are executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638), while an affirmative determination is made in step S8906 to perform steps S8907 to S8907. The processing of S8920 is not executed. Accordingly, when the information abnormality of the main RAM 65 as described above occurs, the processing for monitoring the power failure, updating the various counters, and monitoring the illegality is executed, while the processing for advancing the game is executed. Will not be. By clearing the game stop flag to “0” in the processing of step SF703, the state in which the occurrence of the information abnormality in the main RAM 65 is specified is released when the set value update processing (FIG. 752) is executed. Becomes possible.

  Thereafter, “1” is set in the setting update area 342 (see FIG. 659) in the work area 221 for specific control (step SF704). The setting update area 342 is a storage area in which information of the setting value being updated in the setting value update process (FIG. 752) is stored as in the 77th embodiment. When the numerical information “1” is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value of the update target (selection target or change target) is “setting 1”. When the numerical information “2” is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated is “setting 2”. When the numerical information of “3” is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated is “setting 3”. When the numerical information “4” is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated is “setting 4”. When the numerical information of “5” is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated is “setting 5”. When the numerical information of “6” is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated is “setting 6”.

  By setting “1” in the setting update area 342 in step SF704, the setting value to be updated becomes “setting 1”. That is, in the present embodiment, the set value to be updated is “setting 1” when the set value update process (FIG. 752) is started, regardless of the current set value of the pachinko machine 10.

  After that, an update start command is transmitted to the sound-light-side MPU 352 (step SF705). Upon receiving the update start command, the sound-light-side CPU 353 displays an image indicating that the set value update process (FIG. 752) is being executed, an image for enabling the user to recognize the operation content for changing the set value, The display controller 82 controls the display so that the symbol display device 41 displays an image for enabling the user to recognize the operation content for ending the setting value update process (FIG. 752). This enables the manager of the gaming hall to recognize that the setting value is being changed, and also provides an operation content and a setting value update process required to change the setting value (FIG. 752). Can be recognized by the administrator of the gaming hall. Note that, in addition to or instead of performing the notification in the symbol display device 41, a configuration may be adopted in which at least one of the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 performs. Further, an external output indicating that the set value updating process (FIG. 752) is being executed may be performed on a device external to the pachinko machine 10, such as a management computer for a game hall.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the information of the set value stored in the setting update area 342 is any of “1” to “6” (step SF706). If it is not one of "1" to "6" (step SF706: NO), "1" is set in the setting update area 342 (step SF707). Thereby, the setting value to be updated becomes “setting 1”.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step SF706 or when the process in step SF707 is performed, it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a has switched from the ON state to the OFF state using the setting key (step SF708). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the reception state of the signal received from the detection sensor that detects the state of the setting key insertion unit 68a has changed from the reception state corresponding to the ON state to the reception state corresponding to the OFF state. I do. Therefore, not only when the setting key insertion unit 68a is maintained in the ON state, but also when the setting value updating process is started in a situation where the setting key insertion unit 68a is in the OFF state, the OFF state is maintained. In this case also, a negative determination is made in step SF708.

  If a negative determination is made in step SF708, the value of the setting update area 342 is incremented by 1 on condition that the reset button 68c is pressed (step SF709: YES) (step SF710). Thus, each time the reset button 68c is pressed once, the set value is updated to the next higher level. If the reset button 68c is not pressed (step SF709: NO) or if the value of the setting update area 342 is incremented by 1, the process returns to step SF706, but the setting is updated in step SF706. If it is determined that the value of the service area 342 is 7 or more, “1” is set in the setting update area 342 in step SF707. As a result, when the reset button 68c is pressed once in the situation of "Setting 6," the display returns to "Setting 1."

  When it is specified that the setting key insertion unit 68a has been switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step SF708: YES), the information of the setting value stored in the setting updating area 342 is overwritten on the setting reference area 341 ( Step SF711). As a result, the setting value information updated as a result of the current setting value updating process (FIG. 752) is set in the setting reference area 341, and the setting value corresponding to the set information becomes the current setting value. The set value of the pachinko machine 10 is used.

  Thereafter, the setting of the interruption inhibition is performed (step SF712). As a result, when the setting value updating process (FIG. 752) is completed and the process returns to the process (steps SF501 to SF523) at the start of the supply of the operating power in the main process (FIG. 750), the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638) and interruption of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 639) are prohibited.

  Thereafter, a RAM clear process is executed (step SF713). In the RAM clearing process, similarly to the RAM clearing process (step SA416) in the seventy-seventh embodiment, an area in which the information of the setting value indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the work area 221 for specific control (that is, the setting). Except for the reference area 341), the work area 221 for the specific control is cleared to “0” and the initial setting is executed. As a result, since the area indicating whether the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the high probability mode is cleared to “0”, the winning / rejecting lottery is performed regardless of the winning / rejecting lottery mode immediately before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. The mode is a low probability mode. In addition, the game is not executed, the opening / closing execution mode is not executed, and the general-purpose display unit 38a is not variably displayed, and the general electric functioning object 34a is in the closed state. Situation. In addition, since the hold storage area 65a and the ordinary power hold area 65c provided in the work area 221 for specific control are also cleared to "0", the hold information for the special figure display unit 37a is erased and the general figure display unit is cleared. The hold information for 38a is deleted. Further, the setting update display flag and the setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 221 for the specific control are cleared to “0”. The setting update area 342 provided in the specific control work area 221 is cleared to “0”. Further, the game stop flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to “0”. In the RAM clearing process, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0" and initialization is performed. In the RAM clearing process, initialization is performed after various registers of the main CPU 63 are also cleared to "0". In this initial setting, processing similar to the internal function register setting processing in step SF502 is executed. Note that the process for clearing “0” and the process for performing initial setting are not executed for the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control.

  Thereafter, a return command at the time of updating is transmitted to the sound-light-side MPU 352 (step SF714). Upon receiving the update command at the time of updating, the sound-light-side CPU 353 identifies that the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power (steps SF501 to SF523) is completed in the main-side CPU 63, and supplies the current operating power. It is specified that the set value update processing (FIG. 752) has been executed in the processing at the start (steps SF501 to SF523). Then, a process corresponding to the reception of the update return command is executed. The contents of the process will be described later.

  As described above, based on performing not only the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the reset button 68c but also the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 while the ON operation of the setting key insertion portion 68a by the setting key, A set value update process (FIG. 752) is executed. Further, as described above, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 751) is performed based on performing the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 while performing the ON operation of the setting key insertion portion 68a with the setting key without pressing the reset button 68c. Be executed. As a result, an ON operation for the setting key insertion unit 68a can be shared as an operation for executing the setting-related processing relating to the setting value. Therefore, it is possible to make the operation content for generating the setting-related process easy for the manager of the game hall to understand.

  When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on by the setting key, and the pressing operation of the reset button 68c is not added, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 751) is performed. When the reset operation is performed and a pressing operation of the reset button 68c is added, a set value updating process (FIG. 752) is executed. As a result, it is possible to make the execution target process different from the setting confirmation process (FIG. 751) and the set value update process (FIG. 752) depending on whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed. Therefore, it becomes possible for the administrator of the gaming hall to easily understand the operation content for executing the desired processing in the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 751) and the setting value updating processing (FIG. 752). In addition, by making the operation content for executing the setting value update processing (FIG. 752) more than the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 751), an act of illegally performing the setting value update processing (FIG. 752) is particularly performed. It becomes possible to make it difficult.

  Returning to the description of the main process (FIG. 750), it is determined in step SF509 that the reset button 68c has been pressed, and the setting key insertion unit 68a has not been turned ON using the setting key. When it is determined (step SF515: NO), it is determined whether or not “1” is set to the game stop flag in the work area 221 for the specific control (step SF517). The game stop flag is a flag that is set to “1” when the power failure flag is not set to “1”, when the checksums do not match, or when the set value is abnormal. When the game stop flag is set to “1”, the processes of steps S8901 to S8905 are executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638), while an affirmative determination is made in step S8906 to perform steps S8907 to S8907. The processing of S8920 is not executed. Accordingly, if the power failure flag is not set to “1” because the power failure processing was not properly performed at the time of the previous power shutdown, the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 If at least one of the checksums does not match due to a change in the storage state of the information since the last power shutdown, or if the set value is abnormal, monitoring of power failure, updating of various counters, While processing for monitoring is executed, processing for advancing the game is not executed.

  If the game stop flag is not set to "1" (step SF517: NO), a RAM clear process is executed (step SF518). The contents of the RAM clear processing are the same as the contents of the RAM clear processing in step SF713 in the set value update processing (FIG. 752).

  After that, a clearing return command is transmitted to the sound-light-side MPU 352 (step SF519). By receiving the clearing return command, the sound-light-side CPU 353 specifies that the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power (steps SF501 to SF523) is completed in the main-side CPU 63, and supplies the current operating power. It is specified that the RAM clear processing (step SF518) has been executed in a situation where the set value update processing (FIG. 752) has not been executed in the processing at the start (steps SF501 to SF523). Then, a process corresponding to the reception of the clearing return command is executed. The contents of the process will be described later.

  In the main processing (FIG. 750), when a negative determination is made in any of step SF504, step SF506, and step SF507, that is, when “1” is not set in the power failure flag, when the checksums do not match or when the checksum does not match If the value is abnormal, "1" is set to the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control (step SF520). As described above, when the game stop flag is set to “1”, the processing of steps S8901 to S8905 is executed in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638), while the affirmative determination is made in step S8906. Steps S8907 to S8920 are not executed. Accordingly, if the power failure flag is not set to “1” because the power failure processing was not properly performed at the time of the previous power shutdown, the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 If at least one of the checksums does not match due to a change in the storage state of the information since the last power shutdown, or if the set value is abnormal, monitoring of power failure, updating of various counters, While processing for monitoring is executed, processing for advancing the game is not executed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed (step SF521). If the reset button 68c has not been pressed (step SF521: NO), an abnormal command indicating that an abnormality has occurred with respect to the power failure flag, the checksum, or the set value at the start of the supply of the operation power is transmitted to the sound-side MPU 352. (Step SF522). Upon receiving the abnormal command, the sound-light-side CPU 353 causes the display light-emitting unit 53 to emit light in a manner corresponding to the information abnormality at the start of the supply of the operating power, and also “change the setting” from the speaker unit 54. Is output. In addition, a character image “Please change the setting.” Is displayed on the symbol display device 41. These notifications are maintained until the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and is terminated when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, even if the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is temporarily stopped, the above-described notification will be issued when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is restarted until the set value updating process (FIG. 752) is executed. It will be started again.

  Thereafter, an external output process at the time of abnormality is performed (step SF523). In the external output process at the time of abnormality, a process for externally outputting an abnormal signal to the management computer of the game hall is executed. In this case, the signal output of the abnormal signal is performed over a predetermined period (for example, 100 milliseconds). However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the game stop flag is set to “1”, the signal output of the abnormal signal is continued, and when the game stop flag is cleared to “0”, the abnormal signal is output. The signal output may be stopped. Further, the abnormality signal may be output when an abnormality different from the abnormality relating to the power failure flag, the checksum, and the set value occurs. For example, even when it is specified that the monitoring target has been fraudulently detected (illegal radio wave detection or fraudulent magnetism detection) in the fraud detection process (step S8905) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638), an abnormal signal is also output. External output. However, the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the abnormal signal is also used in this way, and a configuration may be adopted in which an abnormal signal dedicated to an abnormality relating to a power failure flag, a checksum, or a set value is externally output. An abnormality signal corresponding to each of the abnormality relating to the check sum, the abnormality relating to the checksum, and the abnormality relating to the set value may be externally output.

  When the reset button 68c is pressed (step SF521: YES), it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion section 68a has been turned ON using the setting key (step SF515). When the reset button 68c is pressed and the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on using the setting key (step SF515 and step SF521: YES), the setting value updating process is executed (step SF516). The processing content of the setting value update processing is as described above. In other words, if the operating power is supplied to the main CPU 63 while the “setting change operation” is being performed, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the main RAM 65 and one of the steps SF504, SF506, and SF507 has occurred. The setting value update process (FIG. 752) is executed even if a negative determination is made in. Thus, it is possible to give priority to the change of the set value. In the setting value update process (FIG. 752), the game stop flag is cleared to “0” by performing the initial setting at the start in step SF703 as described above. As a result, when the set value update process (FIG. 752) is executed, it is possible to eliminate the state in which an abnormality has occurred in the main RAM 65 after the update of the set value is completed.

  On the other hand, when the reset key 68c is pressed and the setting key insertion section 68a is not turned on (step SF521: YES, step SF515: NO), the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to “1”. Is set (step SF517). In the process of step SF517 after the game stop flag is set to “1” in step SF520, the game stop flag is set to “1” as a matter of course, so an affirmative determination is made in step SF517. In this case, an abnormal command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 352 in step SF522, and an abnormal signal is externally output in step SF523.

  In other words, when an abnormality related to the power failure flag, the checksum, and the set value occurs and a negative determination is made in any of step SF504, step SF506, and step SF507, the main CPU 63 determines that the "RAM clear operation" is being performed. Even if the supply of the operating power to the RAM is started, the RAM clear processing (step SF518) is not executed. Also, when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started while the game stop flag is set to “1” and the “RAM clear operation” is performed, the RAM clear processing ( Step SF518) is not executed. Thereby, even if the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started while the “RAM clear operation” is being performed, the state in which the game stop flag is set to “1” is not canceled. It becomes possible. On the other hand, when the “setting change operation” is performed, the setting value update process (FIG. 752) is executed regardless of whether the game stop flag is set to “1” and the setting is performed. The game stop flag is cleared to “0” in the initial setting (step SF703) at the start of the value update process (FIG. 752). As a result, in order to eliminate the state in which the game stop flag is set to “1”, it becomes necessary to execute the set value updating process (FIG. 752). Therefore, when an information abnormality occurs in the work area 221 for specific control, not only the processing for initializing the work area 221 for the specific control but also resetting of the set value is required. .

  When the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started in a situation where the game stop flag is set to “1”, the “setting change operation” is not performed, that is, “the operation is not performed” In the case of or when the “RAM clear operation” or the “setting confirmation operation” is performed, an affirmative determination is made in step SF510 or step SF517, so that an abnormal command is transmitted in step SF522 and an abnormal command is transmitted in step SF523. Execute the external output process. As a result, when the game stop flag is set to “1”, unless the set value update process (FIG. 752) is executed irrespective of the processing results of step SF504, step SF506, and step SF507 in the subsequent main process. Each time the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the abnormality notification in the pachinko machine 10 and the external output to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 when an abnormality occurs are performed. Therefore, it is possible to make the administrator of the gaming hall recognize that the set value should be changed.

  When the processing in step SF513 is executed, when the processing in step SF514 is executed, when the processing in step SF516 is executed, when the processing in step SF519 is executed, or when the processing in step SF523 is executed, the specific control Information corresponding to the initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in a check-in-progress counter provided in the work area 221 (step SF524). The value set in the counter during the check is decremented by one each time the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639) is started, similarly to the 67th embodiment. When the value of 1 or more is set in the check-in-progress counter, the process of step S9102 is executed in the normal setting process (FIG. 640) of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639), thereby obtaining the 67th timer. As in the embodiment, the display for checking is continued on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  According to the above configuration, when the supply of the operation power to the main CPU 63 is started, the processing at the start of the supply of the operation power (step SF501 to step SF523) is completed in the main CPU 63 and the remaining process is performed. Before (Step SF526 to Step SF529) is started, an initial check period is started. With this, it is not necessary to control the initial check period in a situation where the processing at the start of the supply of the operation power (steps SF501 to SF523) is performed, and thus the processing at the start of the supply of the operation power (steps SF501 to step SF523) It is possible to reduce the processing load in a situation where SF 523) is being executed.

  The setting confirmation process (FIG. 751) and the setting value update process (FIG. 752) are executed as the process at the start of the supply of the operation power (steps SF501 to SF523), whereas the operation check is performed during the initial check period. Is started after the processing at the start of supply (step SF501 to step SF523) is completed. Thereby, even if the display for check is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 during the initial check period, the display of the set value using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is performed. It is possible to prevent the influence.

  Thereafter, the start-up processing flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step SF525). When the start-up processing flag is cleared to “0”, a negative determination is made in step S8906 when the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) is activated, so that not only the processing in steps S8901 to S8905 is performed. The processing from step S8907 to step S8920 is executed, and the state in which the processing for advancing the game is not executed is released. In step SF525, the power failure flag in the specific control work area 221 is also cleared to "0".

  After that, the process proceeds to the remaining process of Step SF526 to Step SF529. That is, the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639). Will result in a residual time. The remaining time varies according to the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, but the remaining process of steps SF526 to SF529 is repeatedly executed using the irregular time. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining processes in Steps SF526 to SF529 are irregular processes that are executed irregularly. In steps SF526 to SF529, the same processes as those in steps S113 to S116 of the main process (FIG. 514) in the 33rd embodiment are executed.

  Next, a setting mode of each area in the main RAM 65 will be described with reference to an explanatory diagram of FIG. 753.

  As in the 47th embodiment, the main RAM 65 is provided with a work area 221 for specific control, a stack area 222 for specific control, a work area 223 for non-specific control, and a stack area 224 for non-specific control. ing. Also, in the main RAM 65, the address range of the work area 221 for specific control, the address range of the stack area 222 for specific control, the address range of the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the stack area for non-specific control 224 address ranges are clearly distinguished.

  The address ranges of these areas 221 to 224 will be described in detail. The address of the main RAM 65 is set as 2-byte data. For convenience of explanation, 2-byte address data will be described as 4-digit hexadecimal data. The area of each continuous address within the range of the starting address "0000" to Y (k-1) of the 2-byte data addresses is an unused address, and subsequently, the address Y (k ) To “00FF”, areas of consecutive addresses are set as work areas 221 for specific control. Addresses “0100” to Y (l−1) that are consecutive to addresses Y (k) to “00FF” are addresses of unused areas, and subsequently, addresses Y (l) to “01FF”. Are set as stack areas 222 for specific control. Addresses "0200" to "Y (m-1)" which are continuous with addresses Y (l) to "01FF" are addresses of unused areas, and subsequently addresses Y (m) to "02FF". Are set as work areas 223 for non-specific control. Addresses "0300" to Y (n-1) which are continuous with addresses Y (m) to "02FF" are addresses of unused areas, and subsequently addresses Y (n) to "03FF". Are set as the stack area 224 for non-specific control.

  The relationship between each area and the address as described above is set in both the physical address in the main RAM 65 and the logical address on the memory map recognized by the main CPU 63. Further, the address range (Y (k) to “00FF”) of the work area 221 for specific control, the address range (Y (l) to “01FF”) of the stack area 222 for specific control, and the Are different from the address range (Y (m) to “02FF”) of the work area 223 and the address range (Y (n) to “03FF”) of the stack area 224 for non-specific control. Specifically, the address range (Y (k) to “00FF”) of the work area 221 for specific control is the widest, and the address range (Y (m) to “02FF”) of the work area 223 for non-specific control is next. )), The address range (Y (l) to “01FF”) of the stack area 222 for specific control is wide, and the address range (Y (n) to “03FF”) of the stack area 224 for nonspecific control. ) Is the narrowest. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that the address ranges of the areas 221 to 224 are the same or substantially the same.

  As described above, since the work area 221 for the specific control and the work area 223 for the non-specific control are separately set, the main CPU 63 executes the specific control and the non-specific control. Thus, when executing various calculations, different areas of the main RAM 65 are used. As a result, when one of the specific control and the non-specific control is executed, it is possible to make it difficult to cause an event that information required in the main RAM 65 is erased on the other. Incidentally, when writing information to each of the work areas 221 and 223 and reading information from each of the work areas 221 and 223, the main CPU 63 issues a load instruction.

  Since the stack area 222 for the specific control and the stack area 224 for the non-specific control are set separately, the main CPU 63 performs both the specific control and the non-specific control. Different areas of the main RAM 65 are used when saving the information stored in the register of the side CPU 63 and when storing the information of the return address in the program. Thus, when the information stored in the register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the situation where one of the specific control and the non-specific control is being executed, and when the information of the return address on the program is stored, the other is used. It is possible to make it difficult to cause an event that information to be deleted is erased. Incidentally, when writing information to each of the stack areas 222 and 224, a push command is performed by the main CPU 63, and when reading information from each of the stack areas 222 and 224, a pop command is performed by the main CPU 63. When reading information from each of the stack areas 222 and 224, the order of writing to the stack areas 222 and 224 is a target to be read first after the subsequent information.

  When the main CPU 63 executes a process corresponding to the specific control, the main CPU 63 can write information to the work area 221 for the specific control and the stack area 222 for the specific control, and From the work area 221 and the stack area 222 for specific control. On the other hand, when the main CPU 63 executes the processing corresponding to the specific control, the main CPU 63 can read information from the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control. It is not possible to write information to the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control. This makes it possible to prevent the information used in the process corresponding to the non-specific control from being accidentally erased in the situation where the process corresponding to the specific control is being executed.

  When the main CPU 63 executes a process corresponding to the non-specific control, the main CPU 63 can write information to the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control, Information can be read from the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control. On the other hand, when the main CPU 63 executes the process corresponding to the non-specific control, the main CPU 63 can read information from the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control, Writing information to the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 is not possible. This makes it possible to prevent information used in the process corresponding to the specific control from being accidentally erased in the situation where the process corresponding to the non-specific control is being executed.

  The backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. The backup power is stored in the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, the non-specific control To the entire work area 223 and the stack area 224 for non-specific control. As a result, the information stored in the specific control work area 221, the specific control stack area 222, the non-specific control work area 223, and the non-specific control stack area 224 are stored in the power-off state of the pachinko machine 10. Even after that, the data is retained while the backup power is supplied.

  Here, the work area 221 for the specific control, the stack area 222 for the specific control, the work area 223 for the non-specific control, and the stack area 224 for the non-specific control are all lower-order if the end address is hexadecimal. Is set to be "FF", and if it is a binary number, the lower 8 bits (that is, the lower 1 byte) are all "1". On the other hand, the end addresses of the work area 221 for the specific control, the stack area 222 for the specific control, the work area 223 for the non-specific control, and the stack area 224 for the non-specific control are the upper two digits in hexadecimal. In the case of a binary number, the address is different as a whole because the upper 8 bits following the most significant bit (that is, the upper 1 byte) are different. That is, the work area 221 for the specific control, the stack area 222 for the specific control, the work area 223 for the non-specific control, and the stack area 224 for the non-specific control all have a lower predetermined range (lower side) in the end address. (1 byte) of address data is common to predetermined data.

  The main CPU 63 reads data from an area within a predetermined range of the main RAM 65, such as a RAM clear process (FIG. 755), a non-specific control clear process (FIG. 757), and a checksum calculation process (FIG. 758). In the case and when writing data to an area within a predetermined range of the main RAM 65 (hereinafter, data reading and data writing are collectively referred to as specific processing), first, a start address is set as a target address, and an area corresponding to the target address is set. The specific processing is executed for. After that, by adding “1” to the target address, the next address is set as the target address, and the specific processing is executed for the area corresponding to the target address. Then, by adding “1” to the target address, the next address is set as the target address, and the specific processing is executed for the area corresponding to the target address until the target address becomes the end address. continue.

  The main CPU 63 is provided with an address counter 515 as shown in FIG. FIG. 754 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the address counter 515. The address counter 515 is a counter for setting the address data of the target address. The main CPU 63 sets the address data of the start address in the address counter 515 when starting the specific process, and adds “1” to the address counter 515 when updating the target address. Then, the main CPU 63 grasps the target address by referring to the address counter 515.

  The address counter 515 has a 2-byte data capacity corresponding to the address of the main RAM 65 being set as 2-byte address data. That is, the address counter 515 includes an upper byte 515a consisting of one byte and a lower byte 515b consisting of one byte. When the address counter 515 adds "1" to update the target address, "1" is added to the lower byte 515b.

  The carry flag 516 is provided in the main CPU 63 as shown in FIG. 749. By adding “1” to the target address in a situation where the address data in the predetermined range on the lower side of the target address is the predetermined data, when the target address becomes the next address, “1” is added to the carry flag 516. Is set. Specifically, if the target address is a hexadecimal number, the lower two digits are “FF”, and if the target address is a binary number, the lower eight bits (that is, the lower byte 515b) are all “1”. By adding “1” to the target address, a carry to the two most significant digits occurs in the case of a hexadecimal number, and in the case of a binary number, the upper eight bits following the most significant bit When a carry to the upper byte 515a occurs, the carry flag 516 is set to "1".

  FIGS. 754 (b) to 754 (e) are explanatory diagrams for explaining how the carry flag 516 is set to “1” as a result of updating the target address.

  First, a case where “1” is not set in carry flag 516 when the target address is updated will be described. As shown in FIG. 754 (b), “1” is added to the lower byte 515b in order to update the target address in a situation where the lower byte 515b is not all “1” (ie, a situation where the lower byte 515b is not the maximum value). As a result, as shown in FIG. 754 (c), the address data of the lower byte 515b becomes address data increased by "1". In this case, since the lower byte 515b does not become all zero and no carry to the upper byte 515a occurs, the carry flag 516 is maintained at "0" and the address data of the upper byte 515a is maintained.

  Next, a case where “1” is set in carry flag 516 when the target address is updated will be described. As shown in FIG. 754 (d), "1" is added to the lower byte 515b in order to update the target address in a situation where the lower byte 515b is all "1" (that is, a situation where the lower byte 515b has the maximum value). As a result, the lower byte 515b becomes all zero as shown in FIG. 754 (e). In this case, the carry flag 516 is set to “1”, and the main CPU 63 recognizes that a carry to the upper byte 515 a has occurred by confirming that the carry flag 516 is set to “1”. Therefore, “1” is added to the upper byte 515a.

  That is, when “1” is added to the lower byte 515b and the lower byte 515b becomes all zeros, it is necessary to add “1” to the upper byte 515a, but “1” is added to the upper byte 515a. The carry flag 516 is provided for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not it is necessary to add. When "1" is not set in carry flag 516, "1" is not added to upper byte 515a, and when "1" is set in carry flag 516, the upper byte is not counted. "1" is added to the byte 515a.

  In such a configuration, as described above, the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are all on the lower side of the end address. The address data in the predetermined range is common to the predetermined data. Specifically, the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control all have a hexadecimal end address. The lower two digits are set to "FF", and if they are binary numbers, the lower eight bits (that is, the lower byte 515b) are all set to "1". As a result, the specific processing is performed on any of the specific control work area 221, the specific control stack area 222, the non-specific control work area 223, and the non-specific control stack area 224. In the case where the specific processing is completed for the area corresponding to the end address of the areas 221 to 224 where the specific processing is being executed and the target address is updated to the next address, the carry flag “1” is set to 516. Therefore, the main CPU 63 confirms whether or not “1” is set in the carry flag 516, and determines whether the area corresponding to the end address of the areas 221 to 224 for which the specific processing is being executed is executed. On the other hand, it is possible to specify whether or not the specific processing has been executed. Therefore, it is not necessary to execute the address comparison processing when determining whether or not each of the areas 221 to 224 is the end address, so that the processing load can be reduced.

  The process of setting the carry flag 516 to “1” when the above-mentioned carry occurs is a process for updating the target address by adding “1” to the target address (FIG. 756). It is executed in. In this case, the target address addition processing (FIG. 756) is set as a common subroutine in the specific control program, and the target address addition processing is performed regardless of which type of specific processing is executed as the specific control. When executing the processing, a common subroutine is called and executed. The addition processing of the target address is also set in the non-specific control program.

  As described above, the work area 221 for the specific control, the stack area 222 for the specific control, the work area 223 for the non-specific control, and the stack area 224 for the non-specific control have lower end addresses if the end address is hexadecimal. Is set to "FF", and if it is a binary number, the lower 8 bits (that is, the lower byte 515b) are set to be all "1". In this case, the address range is set so that the address data in the lower predetermined range becomes the predetermined data. On the other hand, the number of addresses of the area required for each of the areas 221 to 224 is less than 256. Therefore, the address range before the specific control work area 221 in the address order, the address range between the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222, the specific control stack area 222 An unused area exists in each of an address range between the work area 223 for non-specific control and an address range between the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control. ing.

  Next, the RAM clear processing executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The RAM clearing process is executed in step SF518 of the main process (FIG. 750) and is executed in step SF713 of the set value updating process (FIG. 752). The processing of steps SF801 to SF810 in the RAM clear processing is executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

  First, in the work area 221 for specific control, a clear start address which is a start address when executing the RAM clear processing is set as a target address (step SF801). In this case, address data corresponding to the current clear start address is set in each of the upper byte 515a and the lower byte 515b in the address counter 515 of the main CPU 63. That is, the upper 8 bits in the current clear start address are set in the upper byte 515a, and the lower 8 bits in the current clear start address are set in the lower byte 515b. The setting reference area 341 is set in an area corresponding to the start address of the specific control work area 221, and the clear start address is set to the next address with respect to the setting reference area 341. . As a result, the setting reference area 341 can be excluded from the execution target of the RAM clear processing. In step SF801, the carry flag 516 is cleared to "0" and the work completion flag provided in the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0". Thereafter, the area corresponding to the target address in the main RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step SF802). Then, an adding process of the target address is executed (step SF803).

  FIG. 756 is a flowchart showing the adding process of the target address. In the process of adding the target address, "1" is first added to the lower byte 515b in the address counter 515 of the main CPU 63 (step SF901). In this case, when “1” is added to the lower byte 515b in a situation where the 8 bits of the lower byte 515b are all “1”, the 8 bits of the lower byte 515b become all zeros. When the 8 bits of the lower byte 515b are all zero (step SF902: YES), "1" is set to the carry flag 516 of the main CPU 63 (step SF903).

  If a negative determination is made in step SF902 or if the processing in step SF903 is performed, it is determined in step SF904 whether the carry flag 516 of the main CPU 63 is set to "1". If "1" is set in carry flag 516 (step SF904: YES), "1" is added to upper byte 515a in address counter 515 of main CPU 63 (step SF905).

  Returning to the description of the RAM clear processing (FIG. 755), after executing the addition processing of the target address (step SF803), it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the carry flag 516 of the main CPU 63 (step SF804). ). If “1” is not set in the carry flag 516 (step SF804: NO), the target address clearing process (step SF802) and the target address adding process (step SF803) are executed again. If “1” is set in the carry flag 516 (step SF804: YES), it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the work completion flag provided in the main CPU 63 (step SF805). The work completion flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the clear processing for the work area 221 for the specific control has been completed.

  If the work completion flag is not set to “1” (step SF805: NO), after setting the work completion flag to “1” (step SF806), Y (Y) which is the start address of the stack area 222 for specific control is set. 1) is set as the target address (step SF807). In this case, address data corresponding to the current start address is set in each of the upper byte 515a and the lower byte 515b in the address counter 515 of the main CPU 63. That is, the upper 8 bits in the current start address are set in the upper byte 515a, and the lower 8 bits in the current start address are set in the lower byte 515b. In step SF807, the carry flag 516 is cleared to "0".

  Thereafter, the processing of steps SF802 to SF804 is repeated until “1” is set to the carry flag 516 in the addition processing of the target address in step SF803. When the carry flag 516 is set to “1” and the work completion flag is set to “1” (step SF804 and step SF805: YES), the main RAM 65 is initialized (step SF804). SF808). Thereafter, the various registers of the main CPU 63 are cleared to "0" (step SF809), and the various registers are initialized (step SF810). In this initial setting, processing similar to the internal function register setting processing in step SF502 in the main processing (FIG. 750) is executed.

  Next, a clear process for non-specific control executed by the main CPU 63 will be described.

  In the present embodiment, another monitoring process (step S6009) is executed in the management execution process (FIG. 599) as in the fifty-seventh embodiment. In the separate monitoring process, the monitoring process of the work area 223 for non-specific control and the monitoring process of the stack area 224 for non-specific control are executed. The processing content of the monitoring processing of the work area 223 for non-specific control is the same as that of step S5405 in the fifty-fourth embodiment, and the processing content of the monitoring processing of the stack area 224 for non-specific control is the same as that in the fifty-fourth embodiment. This is the same as S5407. When it is determined in these monitoring processes that there is an abnormality, a clear process for non-specific control is executed. FIG. 757 is a flowchart showing the non-specific control clear processing. Note that the processing of steps SG101 to SG107 in the non-specific control clear processing is executed using the non-specific control program and the non-specific control data in the main CPU 63.

  First, Y (m), which is the start address of the work area 221 for non-specific control, is set as a target address (step SG101). In this case, address data corresponding to the current start address is set in each of the upper byte 515a and the lower byte 515b in the address counter 515 of the main CPU 63. That is, the upper 8 bits in the current start address are set in the upper byte 515a, and the lower 8 bits in the current start address are set in the lower byte 515b. In step SG101, the carry flag 516 is cleared to "0" and the work completion flag provided in the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0".

  Thereafter, the area corresponding to the target address in the main RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step SG102). Then, an adding process of the target address is executed (step SG103). In this case, a subroutine for non-specific control stored in the main ROM 64 is called to execute the addition processing of the target address. The processing contents of the addition processing of the target address are the same as the processing contents of the flowchart shown in FIG. That is, "1" is added to the lower byte 515b of the address counter 515, and if the eight bits of the lower byte 515b become all zeros after the addition, the carry flag 516 of the main CPU 63 is set to "1". If “1” is set in carry flag 516, “1” is added to upper byte 515 a in address counter 515.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not carry flag 516 is set to “1” (step SG104). If “1” is not set in the carry flag 516 (step SG104: NO), the process of clearing the target address (step SG102) and the process of adding the target address (step SG103) are executed again. If "1" is set in carry flag 516 (step SG104: YES), it is determined whether "1" is set in the work completion flag provided in main CPU 63 (step SG105). The work completion flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the clear processing for the non-specific control work area 223 has been completed.

  If the work completion flag is not set to "1" (step SG105: NO), after setting the work completion flag to "1" (step SG106), Y which is the start address of the non-specific control stack area 224 is set. (N) is set as the target address (step SG107). In this case, address data corresponding to the current start address is set in each of the upper byte 515a and the lower byte 515b in the address counter 515 of the main CPU 63. That is, the upper 8 bits in the current start address are set in the upper byte 515a, and the lower 8 bits in the current start address are set in the lower byte 515b. In step SG107, carry flag 516 is cleared to "0".

  Thereafter, the processing of steps SG102 to SG104 is repeated until “1” is set to the carry flag 516 in the addition processing of the target address in step SG103. If “1” is set in the carry flag 516 and “1” is set in the work completion flag (step SG104 and step SG105: YES), the clear processing for the non-specific control is ended. .

  Next, the checksum calculation processing executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The process of calculating the checksum is executed in the process at the time of power failure, and is executed in step SF505 of the main process (FIG. 750). The processing of steps SG201 to SG208 in the checksum calculation processing is executed by using the specific control program and the specific control data in the main CPU 63.

  First, in the work area 221 for specific control, an addition start address, which is a start address at the time of executing a chuck sum calculation process, is set as a target address (step SG201). In this case, address data corresponding to the current addition start address is set in each of the upper byte 515a and the lower byte 515b in the address counter 515 of the main CPU 63. That is, the upper 8 bits in the current addition start address are set in the upper byte 515a, and the lower 8 bits in the current addition start address are set in the lower byte 515b. A setting reference area 341 is set in an area corresponding to the start address of the specific control work area 221, and a check sum calculation process in the process at the time of a power failure is set in an area of the next order address with respect to the area. The total counter at the time of power failure for storing the information of the checksum calculated in the above is set, and the area of the next order address to the area is calculated in the checksum calculation processing in the main processing. A power recovery total counter for storing checksum information is set. The addition start address is set to the next address in the total counter at the time of power recovery. This makes it possible to exclude the setting reference area 341, the total counter at the time of power failure, and the total counter at the time of power recovery from the calculation target of the checksum in the checksum calculation processing. In step SG201, the carry flag 516 is cleared to "0" and the work completion flag provided in the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0".

  Thereafter, the data of the target address in the main RAM 65 is read (step SG202), and the numerical information of the read data is read by the total counter (in the main processing (FIG. 750)) provided in the work area 221 for specific control in the main RAM 65. In the case of the checksum calculation process, the sum is added to the total counter at the time of power recovery, and in the case of the checksum calculation process in the process of power failure, it is added to the total counter at the time of power failure (step SG203). Then, an adding process of the target address is executed (step SG204). In this case, a common subroutine stored for the specific control in the main ROM 64 is called to execute the addition processing of the target address. The processing contents of the addition processing of the target address are the same as the processing contents of the flowchart shown in FIG. That is, "1" is added to the lower byte 515b of the address counter 515, and if the eight bits of the lower byte 515b become all zeros after the addition, the carry flag 516 of the main CPU 63 is set to "1". If “1” is set in carry flag 516, “1” is added to upper byte 515 a in address counter 515.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in carry flag 516 (step SG205). If “1” is not set in carry flag 516 (step SG205: NO), the processing of steps SG202 to SG204 is executed again. If “1” is set in carry flag 516 (step SG205: YES), it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the work completion flag of main CPU 63 (step SG206).

  If the work completion flag is not set to “1” (step SG206: NO), after setting the work completion flag to “1” (step SG207), Y (Y) which is the start address of the stack area 222 for specific control is set. 1) is set as the target address (step SG208). In this case, address data corresponding to the current start address is set in each of the upper byte 515a and the lower byte 515b in the address counter 515 of the main CPU 63. That is, the upper 8 bits in the current start address are set in the upper byte 515a, and the lower 8 bits in the current start address are set in the lower byte 515b. In step SG208, carry flag 516 is cleared to "0".

  Thereafter, the processing of steps SG202 to SG205 is repeated until “1” is set to the carry flag 516 in the addition processing of the target address in step SG204. If “1” is set in the carry flag 516 and “1” is set in the work completion flag (step SG205 and step SG206: YES), the checksum calculation process ends.

  Next, the effect control processing executed by the sound light side CPU 353 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The effect control process is executed when the supply of the operating power to the sound-light side CPU 353 is started.

  If the update start command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step SG301: YES), the update notification process is executed (step SG302). The update start command is transmitted to the sound light side CPU 353 when the main CPU 63 starts the set value update process (FIG. 752) as described above. In the update notification process, an image indicating that the set value update process (FIG. 752) is being executed, an image for enabling the user to recognize the operation content for changing the set value, and the set value update process (FIG. 752). The display control device 82 is controlled so that an image for enabling the user to recognize the operation content for terminating FIG. 752) is displayed on the symbol display device 41. This enables the manager of the gaming hall to recognize that the setting value is being changed, and also provides an operation content and a setting value update process required to change the setting value (FIG. 752). Can be recognized by the administrator of the gaming hall. Note that, in addition to or instead of performing the notification in the symbol display device 41, a configuration may be adopted in which at least one of the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 performs.

  If the confirmation start command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step SG303: YES), the confirmation-time notification setting process is executed (step SG304). The confirmation start command is transmitted to the sound light side CPU 353 when the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 751) is started in the main CPU 63 as described above. In the setting process of the notification at the time of confirmation, an image indicating that the process for setting confirmation (FIG. 751) is being executed and an image for enabling recognition of the operation content for ending the process for setting confirmation (FIG. 751) are displayed. The display control device 82 is controlled to be displayed on the symbol display device 41. This allows the manager of the gaming hall to recognize that the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being checked, and is necessary for ending the setting checking process (FIG. 751). It is possible for the manager of the gaming hall to recognize the details of the operation. Note that, in addition to or instead of performing the notification in the symbol display device 41, a configuration may be adopted in which at least one of the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 performs.

  If an abnormal command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step SG305: YES), an abnormal time notification setting process is executed (step SG306). The abnormality command is transmitted to the sound-light side CPU 353 when it is specified that an abnormality has occurred in the power failure flag, the checksum, or the set value at the start of the supply of the operation power as described above. In the setting process of the abnormal time notification, the display light emitting unit 53 is caused to emit light in a manner corresponding to the information abnormality at the start of the supply of the operating power, and the speaker unit 54 outputs a sound "Please change the setting." Further, the display control device 82 is controlled so that the character image "Please change the setting." Is displayed on the symbol display device 41. These notifications are maintained until the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and is terminated when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, even if the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is temporarily stopped, the above-described notification will be issued when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is restarted until the set value updating process (FIG. 752) is executed. It will be started again.

  When the processes of steps SG301 to SG306 are executed, it is determined whether or not any of the normal return command, the clearing return command, the confirmation returning command, and the update returning command has been received from the main CPU 63 ( Step SG307). The normal return command is a process at the time of starting supply of operating power (steps SF501 to SF501) without executing any of the RAM clearing process (step SF518), the setting confirmation process (FIG. 751), and the setting value updating process (FIG. 752). Sent when step SF523) ends. The clear reset command is transmitted when the RAM clear process (step SF518) is executed and the process (steps SF501 to SF523) at the start of the supply of the operating power is completed. The return command at the time of confirmation is transmitted when the processing for setting confirmation (FIG. 751) is executed and the processing at the start of supply of operating power (steps SF501 to SF523) ends. The return command at the time of updating is transmitted when the setting value updating process (FIG. 752) is executed and the process (Step SF501 to Step SF523) at the start of the supply of the operating power ends.

  If these return commands have not been received (step SG307: NO), the process returns to step SG301. The main CPU 63 transmits any of the return commands to the sound-light CPU 353 when the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power (steps SF501 to SF523) ends normally. In this case, as described above, the sound-light-side CPU 353 does not execute the processing after step SG308 until receiving any one of the return commands from the main-side CPU 63. Thus, while the processing (Step SF501 to Step SF523) at the time of starting the supply of the operating power is being executed by the main CPU 63, the sound light CPU 353 does not start the execution control of the normal effect. When the main CPU 63 does not normally end the processing (Steps SF501 to SF523) at the start of the supply of the operating power, the sound light-side CPU 353 does not start the execution control of the normal effect. It is possible to do so.

  Further, in a situation where no return command is received, an update start command, a confirmation start command, or an abnormal command may be received from the main CPU 63. The notification corresponding to the execution of the value update processing (FIG. 752) needs to be performed. When the confirmation start command is received, the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 751) is executed as described above. It is necessary to make the notification corresponding to the notification, and to receive the abnormality command as described above when an abnormal command is received. In this case, the sound-light-side CPU 353 does not execute the processing after step SG206 until receiving any of the return commands from the main-side CPU 63, so that when an update start command, a confirmation start command, or an abnormal command is received, The corresponding notification can be started appropriately.

  When any of the return commands is received from the main CPU 63 (step SG307: YES), information corresponding to a standby period (specifically, 2 seconds) is set in a standby counter provided in the sound-light RAM 355 (step SG307). SG308). The information of the standby period set in the standby counter is decremented by 1 in the interruption process periodically (specifically, 4 milliseconds) started in the sound-light side CPU 353.

  After that, a process corresponding to the type of the return command is executed (step SG309). Specifically, as in the eighteenth embodiment, when the normal return command is received, the current date and time information of the RTC 356 is read, and the read date and time information is stored in the RTC memory 357. As a result, the time and date information serving as a reference when specifying the timing for executing the time-dependent effect is stored in the RTC memory 357.

  If the return command received this time is a return command at the time of updating, the update notification end processing is executed. The return command at the time of updating is transmitted to the sound-light side CPU 353 when the setting value updating process (FIG. 752) is ended in the main CPU 63 as described above. In the update end process, the notification corresponding to the set value update process (FIG. 752) started in step SG302 is ended.

  If the return command received this time is the return command at the time of confirmation, end processing of the notification at confirmation is executed. The return command at the time of confirmation is transmitted to the sound-light side CPU 353 when the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 751) is completed in the main CPU 63 as described above. In the confirmation end process, the notification corresponding to the setting confirmation process (FIG. 751) started in step SG304 is ended.

  Thereafter, by determining whether or not the value of the standby counter of the sound-light RAM 355 is “0”, it is determined whether or not the standby period has elapsed (step SG310). If the value of the standby counter is not “0” (step SG310: NO), the process of step SG310 is executed again. This makes it possible to prevent the processing after step SG311 in the effect control processing (FIG. 757) from being executed until the standby period has elapsed. Note that, even when the process of step SG310 is repeatedly executed, when the execution timing of the interrupt process comes, the value of the standby counter is decremented by one.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step SG310, an initial operation process is executed (step SG311). In the initial operation processing, a drive signal is output to the movable body drive unit 513 so that the movable body 512 arranged at the initial position is moved to the movement limit position and then returned to the initial position. As a result, the movable body 512 moves from the initial position to the movement limit position, and thereafter returns to the initial position from the movement limit position. The administrator of the game hall can confirm whether the movable body 512 operates normally by checking the operation of the movable body 512.

  As described above, the sound-light-side CPU 353 executes the initial operation process (step SG311) when the standby period has elapsed from the timing when any of the return commands is received from the main-side CPU 63. As a result, the initial operation of the movable body 512 is performed after the standby period has elapsed after the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power (steps SF501 to SF523) is completed in the main CPU 63. Here, as described above, the main CPU 63 starts the display for checking on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the processing at the start of the supply of the operation power (step SF501 to step SF523) is completed. .

  On the other hand, as described above, the initial operation of the movable body 512 is started when the standby period has elapsed from the timing at which one of the return commands is received from the main CPU 63, and therefore the first to fourth notification is substantially performed. The initial operation of the movable body 512 is started after the display for checking is started in the display units 201 to 204 for display. Therefore, when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 and the sound light CPU 353 is started, first, after the processing at the time of starting the supply of the operating power (step SF501 to step SF523) is completed in the main CPU 63, the first first. The display for checking in the fourth to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is started, and after that, after the waiting period elapses, the movable body 512 starts the initial operation. Therefore, in checking the operation of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of shipment from the factory or the daily operation check of the pachinko machine 10 in the game hall, the game machine main body 12 is first opened to the front of the pachinko machine 10 and the game machine main body 12 is opened. After confirming whether the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 operate normally in a state where the back side is exposed, the game machine main body 12 is closed and the movable body 512 is set from the front side of the game machine main body 12. Can be confirmed as to whether or not operates normally.

  After executing the initial operation process (step SG311), other processes are repeatedly executed (step SG312). In other processes, when a command to start a game effect is received from the main CPU 63, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 start the game effect. If the setting is made and the effect for the game play is to be advanced, the settings for making the effect for the game play proceed with the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 are made. If it is a situation to end the effect for the game, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 are set to end the effect for the game. In this case, when the execution of the effect of operating the movable body 512 is instructed in the course of the game effect, the movable body 512 is moved from the initial position to the movement limit position and then returned to the initial position. Make the settings for In other processes, when a command to start the opening / closing execution mode effect is received from the main CPU 63, the opening / closing execution mode effect is performed by the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting section 53, and the speaker section 54. When the setting for starting is performed and the effect for the open / close execution mode is to be advanced, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 are used to advance the effect for the open / close execution mode. When the setting is performed and the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is to be ended, the setting for ending the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is performed by the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54. In this case, when the execution of the effect of operating the movable body 512 is instructed in the middle of the effect for the open / close execution mode, the movable body 512 is moved from the initial position to the movement limit position and then returned to the initial position. Make the settings for

  Next, when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 and the sound light CPU 353 is started, the display for checking is executed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and the movable body 512 The manner in which the initial operation is performed will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 760 (a) shows a period in which the main CPU 63 executes the process (steps SF501 to SF523) at the start of the supply of the operating power, and FIG. 760 (b) shows the setting confirmation process (FIG. 751) or the period during which the set value updating process (FIG. 752) is being executed, and FIG. 760 (c) shows the timing when the sound-light-side CPU 353 receives any one of the return commands transmitted from the main-side CPU 63. FIG. 760 (d) shows the execution period of the initial check period in which the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 execute the check display, and FIG. 760 (e) shows the standby state in the sound-light side CPU 353. FIG. 760 (f) shows a period during which the initial operation of the movable body 512 is being executed.

  First, in the process (Step SF501 to Step SF523) when the supply of the operating power is started, neither the RAM clear process (Step SF518), the process for setting confirmation (FIG. 751) nor the process for updating the set value (FIG. 752) is performed. Will be described.

  At time t1, the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 and the sound light CPU 353 is started. In this case, as shown in FIG. 760 (a), the processing (Step SF501 to Step SF523) at the start of supply of the operating power is started in the main CPU 63 at the timing of the t1. Note that the display of an image is started on the symbol display device 41 at the timing of the time t1. When the current supply of the operating power is started, none of the “RAM clear operation”, the “setting change operation”, and the “setting confirmation operation” are executed. Accordingly, the processing (step SF518) at the time of starting the supply of the operating power at the timing t2 without performing any of the processing for clearing the RAM (step SF518), the processing for confirming the setting (FIG. 751), and the processing for updating the set value (FIG. 752) SF501 to step SF523) end. In this case, at the timing of the t2, the display for checking is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as shown in FIG. 760 (d). Specifically, all display segments 321 to 324 of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are maintained in a light emitting state. However, a configuration may be adopted in which all display segments 321 to 324 of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are blinked and displayed as check displays.

  At time t2, a normal return command is transmitted from the main CPU 63 as shown in FIG. 760 (c), and the normal light return command is received by the sound light CPU 353. Upon receiving the normal return command, the sound-light-side CPU 353 starts measuring the standby period at the timing of t2 as shown in FIG. 760 (e). The waiting period elapses at time t3 during which the display for checking is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as shown in FIG. As shown in (f), the initial operation of the movable body 512 is started.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t4, the display for checking on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is ended as shown in FIG. 760 (d). At the subsequent timing of t5, the initial operation of the movable body 512 is ended as shown in FIG. 760 (f).

  Next, a description will be given of a case where a setting confirmation process (FIG. 751) or a setting value update process (FIG. 752) is executed in the process (Step SF501 to Step SF523) at the start of the supply of the operating power.

  At time t6, supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and the sound light CPU 353 is started. In this case, as shown in FIG. 760 (a), the processing (Step SF501 to Step SF523) at the start of supply of the operating power is started in the main CPU 63 at the timing of t6. The display of the image on the symbol display device 41 is started at the timing of t6. At the start of the supply of the operating power this time, a “setting change operation” or a “setting confirmation operation” is executed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 760 (b), the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 751) or the setting value update processing (FIG. 752) is executed from the timing t7 to the timing t8.

  At the timing of t8, as shown in FIG. 760 (b), the setting-related processing to be executed this time among the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 751) and the setting value updating processing (FIG. 752) is completed, and FIG. ), The processing at the start of the supply of the operating power (step SF501 to step SF523) ends. In this case, the check display is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 at the timing t8 as shown in FIG. 760 (d). Specifically, all display segments 321 to 324 of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are maintained in a light emitting state. However, a configuration may be adopted in which all display segments 321 to 324 of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are blinked and displayed as check displays.

  At time t8, a return command for confirmation or a return command for update is transmitted from the main CPU 63 as shown in FIG. 760 (c), and the return command is received by the sound-light CPU 353. Upon receiving the return command, the sound-light-side CPU 353 starts measuring the standby period at the timing of t8, as shown in FIG. 760 (e). The standby period elapses at time t9 during which the display for checking is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as shown in FIG. As shown in (f), the initial operation of the movable body 512 is started.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t10, the display for checking on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is ended as shown in FIG. 760 (d). At the subsequent timing of t11, the initial operation of the movable body 512 is ended as shown in FIG. 760 (f).

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  When the RAM clear processing (FIG. 755), the non-specific control clear processing (FIG. 756), and the checksum calculation processing (FIG. 757) are executed, the target addresses are sequentially updated, and the updated target is executed. "0" clear processing or checksum calculation processing is executed for the area of the main RAM 65 corresponding to the address (these processing is also referred to as specific processing hereinafter). As a result, it is possible to sequentially set a plurality of areas in the main RAM 65 as execution targets of the specific processing. In this case, if the updated target address becomes the reference address (specific address), “1” is set in the carry flag 516 of the main CPU 63, and “1” is set in the carry flag 516. In this case, the execution of the specific process is terminated. Thus, when specifying whether or not the execution of the specific processing has been completed for all the areas of the main RAM 65 to be executed, it is only necessary to specify whether or not “1” is set in the carry flag 516. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load for performing the identification.

  In a configuration in which a plurality of reference addresses exist, any of the reference addresses is updated in the carry flag 516 by updating the target address in a situation where the address immediately before the reference address is set as the target address. "1" is the address to be set. Accordingly, regardless of which reference address is used as a reference, it is possible to specify whether or not the execution of the specific process is completed by specifying whether or not “1” is set in the carry flag 516. Becomes possible.

  The target address is set in the address counter 515 of the main CPU 63. The address counter 515 has an upper byte 515a and a lower byte 515b. When the target address is updated, “1” is added to the lower byte 515b, but “1” is added to the lower byte 515b in a situation where all “1” is set as the maximum value in the lower byte 515b. Is added to the lower byte 515b, it is necessary to set the lower byte 515b to the minimum value of all zeros and add "1" to the upper byte 515a. In this case, when the lower byte 515b is changed from the maximum value to the minimum value, "1" is set in the carry flag 516, and therefore, it is specified whether or not "1" is set in the carry flag 516. This makes it possible to specify whether it is necessary to add “1” to the upper byte 515a. By specifying whether or not “1” is set in the carry flag 516 in this configuration, it is determined whether or not the execution of the specific processing has been completed for all the areas of the main RAM 65 to be executed. It is possible to do. Thus, by using the configuration for specifying whether or not “1” needs to be added to the upper byte 515a, the execution of the specific processing is performed on all the areas of the main RAM 65 to be executed. It is possible to specify whether or not the processing has been completed.

  The work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are all in the last sequential address in the address range of the main RAM 65. The lower byte 515b has the maximum value. Thus, by confirming whether the carry flag 516 of the main CPU 63 is set to “1” in each of the areas 221 to 224, it is possible to determine whether the execution of the specific processing is completed. Becomes possible. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load for specifying whether or not the execution of the specific processing has been completed.

  In the configuration in which the RAM clear processing (FIG. 755), the non-specific control clear processing (FIG. 756), and the checksum calculation processing (FIG. 757) are set as the specific processing, any of these specific processings is executed. Even in such a situation, it is possible to specify the end timing of the specific processing by specifying whether or not “1” is set in the carry flag 516 of the main CPU 63. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for specifying the end timing of the specific processing.

  Since the initial operation is performed in the movable body 512 when the supply of the operation power is started, it is possible to confirm whether the movable body 512 operates normally when the supply of the operation power is started. In this case, since the start timing of the initial operation in the movable body 512 is delayed, it is not necessary to confirm the initial operation immediately after the supply of the operation power is started, and the initial operation is confirmed with a margin. Can be performed.

  When the supply of the operating power is started, the display for checking is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and thus, when the supply of the operation power is started, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 201 are displayed. It is possible to confirm whether or not 204 operates normally. The first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 can be viewed by exposing the back side of the pachinko machine 10, whereas the movable body 512 can be viewed from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. In order to check the display for checking the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and the initial operation of the movable body 512, it is necessary to visually check the back side and the front side of the pachinko machine 10. In this case, the start timing of the initial operation in the movable body 512 is delayed. Thereby, after the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is exposed and the check displays on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are confirmed, the gaming machine main body 12 is closed and the initial operation of the movable body 512 is confirmed. It is possible to appropriately confirm each initial operation.

  By measuring the waiting period, the initial operation of the movable body 512 is delayed. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration for delaying the initial operation of the movable body 512.

  The standby period is measured based on the timing at which the return command transmitted from the main CPU 63 is received. This makes it possible to delay the initial operation of the movable body 512 based on the progress of control in the main CPU 63. Also, the main CPU 63 transmits a return command when the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power (steps SF501 to SF523) ends. This makes it possible to delay the initial operation of the movable body 512 with reference to the timing at which the processing (steps SF501 to SF523) at the start of the supply of the operating power in the main CPU 63 is completed.

  Since the main CPU 63 transmits different types of return commands according to the execution contents of the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power (steps SF501 to SF523), the sound-light CPU 353 starts the supply of the operating power in the main CPU 63. (Steps SF501 to SF523). In this case, no matter what kind of return command is transmitted, a standby period for delaying the initial operation of the movable body 512 is set. It is possible to delay the initial operation of the movable body 512 irrespective of the execution contents of (Step SF501 to Step SF523).

  The initial operation is performed by the movable body 512 after the sound-light-side CPU 353 receives the return command transmitted when the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power (steps SF501 to SF523) is executed in the main-side CPU 63. Accordingly, the initial operation can be performed by the movable body 512 after the main CPU 63 executes the processing at the time of starting the supply of the operation power (steps SF501 to SF523). Also, the main CPU 63 transmits a return command when the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power (steps SF501 to SF523) ends. Thereby, the initial operation can be performed by the movable body 512 with reference to the timing at which the processing (Step SF501 to Step SF523) at the start of the supply of the operating power in the main CPU 63 is completed.

  The update of the target address is not limited to the configuration in which the update is performed by the addition formula, and may be configured to be performed by the subtraction formula. In this case, when the target address is updated, the value of the lower byte 515b of the address counter 515 is decremented by "1". If the value of the lower byte 515b is decremented by "1" in a situation where the 8 bits of the lower byte 515b are all zero (that is, a situation where the numerical information of the lower byte 515b is the minimum value), the carry flag of the main CPU 63 “1” is set to 516, and the value of the upper byte 515a is subtracted by “1”. In this configuration, the lower byte in the last address in each address range of the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control The configuration in which the carry flag 515b is all zero specifies whether or not the carry flag 516 is set to “1”. Can be specified.

  Further, when the target address is updated, the update numerical value added or subtracted to the lower byte 515b is not limited to “1”, but may be “2”, and may be “3”. Or "4".

  Further, when the numerical information of the lower byte 515b is changed from one of the minimum value and the maximum value to the other, instead of the configuration in which the carry flag 516 is set to “1”, a value higher than the least significant bit of the upper byte 515a is used. The carry flag 516 may be set to “1” when the value of the predetermined bit on the side is changed. In this configuration, the last-order address in each address range of the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control is When the address of the last order is updated to the address of the next order, the address of the predetermined bit is changed. Thus, by specifying whether or not “1” is set in the carry flag 516, it is determined whether or not all the areas of the main RAM 65 to be executed have been subjected to the specific processing. It becomes possible.

  The address of the main RAM 65 is not limited to 2 bytes, but may be 1 byte, 3 bytes, 4 bytes or more. In the case of three bytes, the carry flag 516 may be set to “1” when a carry from the lower two bytes to the upper one byte occurs. In this configuration, the last sequential address in each address range of the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control is It is assumed that a carry from the lower 2 bytes to the upper 1 byte will occur when the address is updated from the last address to the next address. Thus, by specifying whether or not “1” is set in the carry flag 516, it is determined whether or not all the areas of the main RAM 65 to be executed have been subjected to the specific processing. It becomes possible.

  Further, in the case of one byte, “1” is set to the carry flag 516 when the numerical value of a predetermined bit higher than the least significant bit of the one byte is changed. In this configuration, the last-order address in each address range of the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control is When the address of the last order is updated to the address of the next order, the address of the predetermined bit is changed. Thus, by specifying whether or not “1” is set in the carry flag 516, it is determined whether or not all the areas of the main RAM 65 to be executed have been subjected to the specific processing. It becomes possible.

  Further, the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the specific processing is collectively executed in the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222, and the specific processing and the specific control for the specific control work area 221 are not performed. The specific processing for the stack area 222 may be performed separately. Even in this case, by specifying whether or not the carry flag 516 is set to “1” in each of the specific processes, it is possible to specify whether or not the execution of the specific process is completed. Become.

  Further, the present invention is not limited to a configuration in which the specific processing is executed collectively in the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control. The configuration may be such that the specific processing for the non-specific control stack area 224 is performed individually. Even in this case, by specifying whether or not the carry flag 516 is set to “1” in each of the specific processes, it is possible to specify whether or not the execution of the specific process is completed. Become.

  Further, the configuration is not limited to a configuration in which a blank area is set at an address between the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control in the main RAM 65, and the work area 221 for specific control is not limited. And the stack area 222 for specific control may be set to be a continuous address. In this case, the last address in the rear area of the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 is set to “1” in the carry flag 516 when updating to the next address. In the case where the specific processing is executed collectively for the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222, whether the carry flag 516 is set to “1” is determined. By specifying this, it is possible to specify whether or not the execution of the specific processing has been completed.

  Further, the present invention is not limited to a configuration in which a blank area is set at an address between the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control in the main RAM 65, but is not limited to this. The work area 223 and the non-specific control stack area 224 may be set to have continuous addresses. In this case, in the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control, the last address in the rear area is set to “1” in the carry flag 516 when updating to the next address. Is set, the carry flag 516 is set to “1” when the specific processing is collectively performed on the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control. By specifying whether or not the execution of the specific processing has been completed, it is possible to specify whether or not the execution of the specific processing has been completed.

  Further, the number of addresses assigned to the work area 221 for specific control may be 257 or more. In this case, not only the last order address but also the middle order address in the specific control work area 221 is an address in which the lower 8 bits are all "1". In this configuration, the number of times that carry flag 516 is set to “1” is measured, and the number of times of measurement is determined by the number of addresses in which the lower 8 bits are all “1” in work area 221 for specific control. When a certain end reference number is reached, it is configured to specify that the execution of the specific processing on the work area 221 for the specific control is completed. As a result, it is possible to use the carry flag 516 to specify the end timing of the specific processing.

  Instead of the configuration in which the main CPU 63 executes the process of adding the target address using the program (FIG. 756), the configuration may be such that the target address is updated by a dedicated circuit. In this case, when updating the target address by the dedicated circuit, if the lower byte 515b is changed from one of the minimum value and the maximum value to the other, "1" is set in the carry flag 516 and the upper byte 515a is set. Is updated. Thus, by specifying whether or not “1” is set in carry flag 516, it is possible to specify whether or not the execution of the specific processing has been completed.

  The last sequential address in the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control is such that the lower 8 bits are the largest. The configuration is not limited to a configuration in which the value is set to be a value, but may be a configuration in which the lower 8 bits are set to be the minimum value. In this case, if the last address is updated from the immediately preceding address to the last address, carry flag 516 is set to “1”. When it is specified that “1” is set, the specific processing is executed on the area of the target address at that time, and then the specific processing is terminated.

  Further, the configuration in which the special process is executed when “1” is set in the carry flag 516 is used to specify whether or not the specific process has been executed for all the areas of the target address. May be used.

  For example, in a configuration including a random number counter composed of a plurality of bytes, when the numerical information of the lower byte is changed from one of the minimum value and the maximum value to the other, “1” is set in the carry flag 516 and the carry flag 516 is set. Is set to “1”, the upper byte numerical information is updated. When the carry flag 516 is set to “1”, a random number counter different from the above random number counter is updated. It may be configured to be started. In this case, when updating a plurality of random number counters at the same time, the update start timing of the random number counter can be shifted at a constant interval, and when the trigger to shift at the constant interval is specified, only the carry flag 516 is checked. , The processing load can be reduced.

  For example, in a configuration including a timer counter composed of a plurality of bytes, when the numerical information of the lower byte is changed from one of the minimum value and the maximum value to the other, the carry flag 516 is set to “1” and the carry flag 516 is set to “1”. When "1" is set, the numerical information of the upper byte is updated. When "1" is set in the carry flag 516, the period is measured by a timer counter different from the timer counter. May be started. In this case, when measuring a plurality of periods using a plurality of timer counters, it is possible to shift the measurement start timing of each period at fixed intervals, and to specify the trigger for shifting at the fixed intervals, carry Since it is only necessary to check the flag 516, the processing load can be reduced.

  In addition, when the supply of the operating power is started, the start timing of the initial operation of the movable body 512 is delayed, so that the movable body 512 is movable after the display for checking on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is started. The initial operation in the movable body 512 is not limited to the configuration in which the initial operation in the body 512 is started, and the initial operation in the movable body 512 is delayed by delaying the start timing of the check display of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. After the start, the check display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 may be started.

  In addition, when the supply of the operating power is started, the start timing of the initial operation of the movable body 512 is delayed, so that the movable body 512 is movable after the display for checking on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is started. In the configuration in which the initial operation of the body 512 is started, the initial operation of the movable body 512 may be started after the timing when the display for checking on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 ends.

  Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the start timing of the initial operation of the movable body 512 is not delayed. That is, when the main CPU 63 executes the process (Step SF501 to Step SF523) at the time of starting the supply of the operation power and transmits the return command, the initial operation of the movable body 512 starts at the timing when the return command is received. May be adopted. In this case, although the start timing of the initial operation of the movable body 512 is not delayed, the initial operation of the movable body 512 is started at the timing when the processing (Steps SF501 to SF523) at the start of the supply of the operation power is completed by the main CPU 63. It is possible to do. In this configuration, it is determined whether the setting confirmation process (FIG. 751) or the set value update process (FIG. 752) is executed in the process (steps SF501 to SF523) at the start of the supply of the operating power of the main CPU 63. Accordingly, the timing at which the initial operation of the movable body 512 starts is different. That is, when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 751) and the setting value update process (FIG. 752) are not executed, the initial operation of the movable body 512 is started immediately when the supply of the operating power is started. When the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 751) or the setting value update processing (FIG. 752) is executed, the initial operation in the movable body 512 starts at a timing delayed from the timing at which the supply of the operating power is started. Is done.

  In addition, when the supply of the operation power is started, the start timing of the initial operation is delayed, or when the processing at the start of the supply of the operation power (steps SF501 to SF523) is completed in the main CPU 63, the initial operation is performed. Is not limited to the movable body 512, and is arbitrary. For example, in addition to or instead of the movable body 512, any one of the display light emitting unit 53, the speaker unit 54, and the symbol display device 41 may be used. In addition, for all control targets controlled by the sound-light side CPU 353, the start timing of the initial operation is delayed when the supply of the operation power is started, or the processing at the start of the supply of the operation power by the main CPU 63 ( The configuration may be such that the initial operation is performed when Steps SF501 to SF523) are completed.

<Tenth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing content of the effect control processing executed by the sound-light side CPU 253 is different from that of the above-described 104th embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the above-described 104th embodiment will be described. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the 104th embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 761 is a flowchart showing the effect control processing in the present embodiment.

  In steps SG401 to SG406, the same processes as those in steps SG301 to SG306 of the effect control process (FIG. 759) in the 104th embodiment are executed. When the processing of steps SG401 to SG406 has been executed, it is determined whether or not any of the normal return command, the return command for clearing, the return command for confirmation, and the return command for update has been received from the main CPU 63 ( Step SG407). If these return commands have not been received (step SG407: NO), the process returns to step SG401.

  If any return command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step SG407: YES), processing corresponding to the type of the return command is executed (step SG408). The processing content of this processing is the same as the processing of step SG309 in the effect control processing (FIG. 759) in the 104th embodiment.

  Thereafter, on condition that the return command received this time is a return command different from the normal return command, that is, one of the return command at the time of clearing, the return command at the time of confirmation, and the return command at the time of updating (step SG409: NO). Then, information corresponding to the standby period (specifically, 2 seconds) is set in a standby counter provided in the sound-light-side RAM 355 (step SG410). The information of the standby period set in the standby counter is decremented by 1 in the interruption process periodically (specifically, 4 milliseconds) started in the sound-light side CPU 353.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the standby counter of the sound-light RAM 355 is “0”, thereby determining whether or not the standby period has elapsed (step SG411). When the value of the standby counter is not “0” (step SG411: NO), the processing of step SG411 is executed again. Thus, when any of the clearing return command, the confirmation returning command, and the updating returning command is received from the main CPU 63, step SG412 in the effect control process (FIG. 761) is performed until the standby period elapses. It is possible to prevent the subsequent processing from being executed. Note that even if the process of step SG411 is repeatedly executed, the value of the standby counter is decremented by 1 when it is time to execute the interrupt process.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step SG409 or if an affirmative determination is made in step SG411, an initial operation process is executed (step SG412). In the initial operation processing, a drive signal is output to the movable body drive unit 513 so that the movable body 512 arranged at the initial position is moved to the movement limit position and then returned to the initial position. As a result, the movable body 512 moves from the initial position to the movement limit position, and thereafter returns to the initial position from the movement limit position. The administrator of the game hall can confirm whether the movable body 512 operates normally by checking the operation of the movable body 512.

  After that, other processing is executed (step SG413). The other processing contents are the same as the processing of step SG312 of the effect control processing (FIG. 759) in the 104th embodiment.

  According to the above configuration, the RAM clearing process (step SF518), the setting confirmation process (FIG. 751), and the setting value updating process (FIG. 752) in the process (step SF501 to step SF523) at the start of the supply of the operating power in the main CPU 63. Is executed, the initial operation of the movable body 512 is performed after the standby period is measured by the sound-light-side CPU 353, and the processing at the start of supply of the operating power in the main-side CPU 63 (steps SF501 to SF523) ), If none of the RAM clear processing (step SF518), the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 751), and the set value update processing (FIG. 752) are executed, the standby period is measured by the sound-light-side CPU 353. The initial operation of the movable body 512 is performed without any operation. When business is started in the gaming hall, the main power supply for supplying operating power to each pachinko machine 10 is switched from the OFF state to the ON state while the power of the pachinko machine 10 is ON. There is. When such a power ON operation is performed, the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started without opening the gaming machine main body 12. In such a situation, the RAM clearing process (step SF518), the setting confirmation process (FIG. 751), and the setting value updating process (step SF518) are performed in the process (step SF501 to step SF523) at the start of the supply of the operating power in the main CPU 63. Since none of FIG. 752) is executed, the initial operation of the movable body 512 is started without measuring the standby period. This makes it possible to immediately confirm the initial operation of the movable body 512.

  On the other hand, when any of the “RAM clear operation”, the “setting confirmation operation”, and the “setting change operation” is performed, the operation is performed with the gaming machine main body 12 opened. In such a situation, the RAM clearing process (step SF518), the setting confirmation process (FIG. 751), and the setting value updating process (step SF518) are performed in the process (steps SF501 to SF523) at the start of the supply of the operating power in the main CPU 63. Since any one of FIG. 752) is executed, the initial operation of the movable body 512 starts after the standby period is measured. Thus, the initial operation of the movable body 512 can be started after the gaming machine main body 12 is closed.

  In addition, the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the waiting period is measured in order to delay the start timing of the initial operation of the movable body 512, and the opening / closing detection sensor notifies that the gaming machine main body 12 has changed from the open state to the closed state. The configuration may be such that the initial operation of the movable body 512 is started on the condition that the initial operation of the movable body 512 is started, so that the start timing of the initial operation of the movable body 512 is delayed. In this case, the initial operation of the movable body 512 can be started after the gaming machine main body 12 is closed.

  Further, in this configuration, when the supply of the operating power is started in a state where the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closed state, the initial operation of the movable body 512 is not performed, but it is not limited to this. If the supply of the operating power is started in a state where the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closed state, the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power (steps SF501 to SF523) is terminated by the main CPU 63 and the return command is issued. Is transmitted, the initial operation of the movable body 512 may be started.

  Further, in the above configuration, even if the gaming machine main body 12 is changed from the open state to the closed state, the initial operation of the movable body 512 is not started when the return command is not received from the main CPU 63 at that time. Alternatively, the initial operation of the movable body 512 may be started after receiving the return command. That is, the initial operation of the movable body 512 is started when the return command is received from the main CPU 6363 and the gaming machine main body 12 is changed from the open state to the closed state.

  In the configuration of the above embodiment, the initial operation of the movable body 512 may not be performed when the normal return command is received. Thus, it is possible to prevent the initial operation of the movable body 512 from being performed at the start of the business of the gaming hall.

<Tenth embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the eighteenth embodiment in the processing configuration when the supply of the operating power is started. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the above-described eighteenth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the 81st embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 762 is a flowchart showing the main processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processing of steps SG501 to SG527 in the main processing is executed by using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

  First, a power-on initial setting process is executed (step SG501). In the power-on initialization process, for example, the process waits without advancing to the next process until a predetermined time for wait (specifically, one second) elapses after the main process is started. The operation start and the initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed in the predetermined period for the weight. Also, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted.

  Thereafter, an internal function register setting process is executed (step SG502). In the internal function register setting process, similarly to the 67th embodiment, the interrupt cycle of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638), which is a process started by interrupting the main process periodically, is set to the first interrupt cycle (FIG. 638). (Specifically, 4 milliseconds), and the interrupt cycle of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639), which is a process that is started by interrupting the main process periodically, is set to be longer than the first interrupt cycle. The second interrupt cycle (specifically, 2 milliseconds), which is a short cycle, is set.

  That is, in the present embodiment, similarly to the 67th embodiment, the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 639) are performed as the timer interrupt processing so that the interrupt cycle is relatively long. Exists. The first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639) are both started by interrupting the main process. The second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639) is started by interrupting the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638). On the other hand, the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) is not activated by interrupting the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 639). In a situation where both the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 639) are not executed, if both the first interrupt cycle and the second interrupt cycle have elapsed, the cycle is determined. Irrespective of the lapse order of the process, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639) is started first. In this regard, it can be said that the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639) is a process that is started prior to the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) may be started prior to the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 639).

  In the internal function register setting processing, the first interrupt cycle of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) is set in a predetermined register of the main CPU 63, and the second interrupt cycle of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 639) is mainly set. It is set in a specific register of the side CPU 63. Further, in the internal function register setting process, in addition to the setting of the first and second interrupt cycles, for example, a setting process of a numerical range of various counters such as a numerical range of the hit random number counter C1 is executed.

  After that, “1” is set to a start-up processing flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step SG503). As in the 67th embodiment, even if the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) is started, the power-out processing flag indicates the power failure among the various processings set in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638). While the processing for monitoring, updating the various counters, and performing the fraud monitoring is executed, it is determined that the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) should be ended without executing the processing for advancing the game. This flag is specified by the main CPU 63.

  The start-up processing flag is set to “1” when the processing (Step SG501 to Step SG521) at the start of the supply of the operation power is started in the main processing (FIG. 762), and the processing at the start of the supply of the operation power is set. “0” is cleared before the end of (Step SG501 to Step SG521) and the start of the remaining processing (Step SG524 to Step SG527). As in the 67th embodiment, in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638), when the start-up processing flag is set to “1”, the processing of steps S8907 to S8920 is not executed. In order to advance the game in a situation where a setting confirmation process (FIG. 763) or a setting value update process (FIG. 764) to be described later among the processes (steps SG <b> 501 to SG <b> 521) at the start of the supply of the operating power are being executed. Processing can be prevented from being executed. On the other hand, as described above, in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638), even if the start-up processing flag is set to “1”, the processing from step S8901 to step S8905 is executed, thereby reducing the operating power. The power failure monitoring is executed even in the situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 763) or the setting value update process (FIG. 764) described later among the processes at the start of supply (step SG501 to step SG521) is being executed. At the same time, the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the random number initial value counter CINI are updated, and fraud detection is further performed.

  In particular, even when the start-up processing flag is set to “1”, the power failure information storage processing (step S8901) is executed, thereby starting the operation power supply (steps SG501 to SG521). ), A power failure process can be executed even if a power failure occurs in a situation where a later-described setting confirmation process (FIG. 763) or a setting value update process (FIG. 764) is being executed. In the process at the time of a power failure, similarly to the sixty-sixth embodiment, the power failure flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to “1”, and a check sum calculation process is executed to execute the calculated checksum. Since the power is stored in the work area 221 for specific control, when the supply of the operating power is restarted, it is possible to prevent the main RAM 65 from being specified as having an abnormality. Accordingly, when a power failure occurs during the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 763) or the setting value update processing (FIG. 764), the fact that a power failure has occurred during these setting-related processing indicates that the next operation power supply. It can be specified at the start.

  Incidentally, in the situation where the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 763) or the setting value updating processing (FIG. 764) is being executed, both the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 639) are performed. The interrupt is not prohibited and can be interrupted at an arbitrary timing. In this case, if the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638) or the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639) is started by interrupting the setting confirmation process (FIG. 763) or the set value updating process (FIG. 764), The information of the return address of the main process (FIG. 762) for returning after the completion of the timer interrupt process to be started is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control, and the timer interrupt process is started. The information of the various registers of the main CPU 63 immediately before is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control. Then, when the timer interrupt process to be started is completed, the process returns to the main process (FIG. 762) corresponding to the information of the return address saved in the stack area 222 for specific control, and The information saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is restored to various registers of the main CPU 63.

  After setting the start-up processing flag to “1” in step SG503, it is determined whether or not “1” is set to the power failure flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step SG504). . When a power failure process is performed in the power failure information storage process (step S8901) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638), “1” is set in the power failure flag. The power failure flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the processing at the time of power failure was properly performed at the time of the previous power-off.

  If "1" is set in the power failure flag (step SG504: YES), a checksum is calculated as in the case of the process during power failure, and it is determined whether or not the checksum is normal (step SG505). . In each of the power failure process and step SG505, a checksum is calculated for the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222. In step SG505, the checksum calculated in the power failure process executed immediately before the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped and stored in the work area 221 for specific control is read, and the read checksum is read. By comparing the sum with the checksum calculated in step SG505, it is determined whether the checksums match.

  If the checksums match (step SG505: YES), is the set value corresponding to the information stored in the setting reference area 341 (see FIG. 659) in the specific control work area 221 in a normal range? It is determined whether or not it is (step SG506). The setting reference area 341 is a storage area in which information for specifying the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 by the main CPU 63 is stored as in the 77th embodiment. When the numerical information of “1” is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 1”. When the numerical information “2” is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 2”. When the numerical information “3” is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 3”. When the numerical information “4” is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 4”. When the numerical information “5” is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 5”. When the numerical information of “6” is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 6”. In step SG506, it is determined whether or not the information of the setting value stored in the setting reference area 341 is any of “1” to “6”.

  If a positive determination is made in all of step SG504, step SG505, and step SG506, it is determined whether "1" is set in the setting update display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step SG507). . The setting update display flag is a flag for specifying by the main CPU 63 that the setting value update process (FIG. 764) is being executed as in the 67th embodiment, and “1” is set in the setting update display flag. When the setting is set, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 perform a display indicating that the setting value is being updated and a display indicating the setting value being updated. The setting update display flag is a flag that is set to “1” when the setting value updating process (FIG. 764) is started and is cleared to “0” when the setting value updating process (FIG. 764) ends. In a situation where the setting value updating process (FIG. 764) is not being executed, basically, the setting update display flag is not set to “1”. However, when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped while the setting value update process (FIG. 764) is being executed, the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started thereafter. , The setting update display flag is set to "1". The state in which the setting update display flag is set to “1” is maintained until the processing for clearing the setting update display flag to “0” is performed in the setting value update processing (FIG. 764).

  When a negative determination is made in step SG507 because “1” is not set in the setting update display flag, it is determined whether the reset button 68c is pressed (step SG508). That is, it is determined whether or not the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed while the reset button 68c is being pressed, and the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. Here, in the present embodiment, similar to the 67th embodiment, the main control device 60 is provided with the setting key insertion section 68a and the reset button 68c, but is not provided with the update button 68b.

  If the reset button 68c has not been pressed (step SG508: NO), it is determined whether or not the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control has been set to "1" (step SG509). The game stop flag is a flag that is set to “1” when the power failure flag is not set to “1”, when the checksums do not match, or when the set value is abnormal. When the game stop flag is set to “1”, the processes of steps S8901 to S8905 are executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638), while an affirmative determination is made in step S8906 to perform steps S8907 to S8907. The processing of S8920 is not executed. Accordingly, if the power failure flag is not set to “1” because the power failure processing was not properly performed at the time of the previous power shutdown, the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 If at least one of the checksums does not match due to a change in the storage state of the information since the last power shutdown, or if the set value is abnormal, monitoring of power failure, updating of various counters, While processing for monitoring is executed, processing for advancing the game is not executed. When an affirmative determination is made in step SG509, the processing of step SG520 and step SG521 described later is executed.

  When a negative determination is made in step SG509, it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a has been turned ON using the setting key (step SG510). When the setting key insertion section 68a is turned ON using the setting key (step SG510: YES), a setting confirmation process is executed (step SG512). Further, even if the setting key insertion section 68a is not turned on using the setting key (step SG510: NO), the setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 221 for the specific control indicates “1”. Is set (step SG511: YES), a setting confirmation process is executed (step SG512).

  The setting confirmation display flag is a flag for specifying by the main CPU 63 that the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 763) is being executed as in the 67th embodiment, and “1” is set in the setting confirmation display flag. When set, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 perform a display indicating that the setting value is being checked and a display indicating the currently set value. . The setting confirmation display flag is a flag that is set to “1” when the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 763) is started and is cleared to “0” when the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 763) ends. In a situation where the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 763) is not being executed, basically, the setting confirmation display flag is not set to “1”. However, if the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped while the setting confirmation process (FIG. 763) is being executed, the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started after that. , The setting confirmation display flag is set to "1". When the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1", the RAM clear processing (FIG. 765) described later is executed, or the setting confirmation display flag is cleared to "0" in the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 763). It is maintained until the processing is executed.

  Not only when the reset button 68c is not pressed and the setting key insertion section 68a is turned ON (that is, when the “setting confirmation operation” is performed) as described above, the reset button 68c The setting confirmation process (FIG. 763) is executed by executing the setting confirmation process (FIG. 763) even when the pressing operation is not performed and the setting confirmation display flag is set to “1”. If the power failure process is executed in the situation where the power setting is performed, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 763) is executed even if the “setting confirmation operation” is not performed when the supply of the operating power is resumed thereafter. Thereby, it is possible to continue to check the current set value of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, even if the power failure process is performed while the setting confirmation process (FIG. 763) is being executed, if the reset button 68c is pressed when the supply of the operating power is resumed thereafter, The processing corresponding to the operation performed when the supply of the operating power is resumed in the RAM clear processing (FIG. 765) and the setting value update processing (FIG. 764) is executed without executing the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 763). You. This makes it possible to prioritize the execution of the RAM clearing process (FIG. 765) or the setting value updating process (FIG. 764) over the setting confirmation process (FIG. 763).

  Here, the setting confirmation processing executed in step SG512 will be described. FIG. 763 is a flowchart showing the setting confirmation processing. The processing of steps SG601 to SG607 in the setting confirmation processing is executed by using the specific control program and the specific control data in the main CPU 63.

  First, interrupt permission is set (step SG601). Thus, the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) is started by interrupting at the first interrupt cycle, and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 639) is started by interrupting at the second interrupt cycle.

  In the present embodiment, in the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power (steps SG501 to SG521), the interrupts of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 639) are basically prohibited. In the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 763) and the setting value update processing (FIG. 764), an interrupt is permitted. Therefore, if the setting confirmation process (FIG. 763) and the set value update process (FIG. 764) are not executed in the process (steps SG501 to SG521) at the start of the supply of the operating power, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638) and the execution of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639) are prohibited, and the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638) is performed in the situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 763) or the set value update process (FIG. 764) is being executed. ) And execution of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639) are permitted. However, in the situation where the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 763) or the setting value update processing (FIG. 764) is being executed, the start-up processing flag is set to “1”, so the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 763) is performed. 638) is started, among the various processes of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638), the processes for monitoring the power failure, updating the various counters, and monitoring the illegality are executed, while the processes for progressing the game are performed. The first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638) ends without executing the process.

  Thereafter, "1" is set to the setting confirmation display flag on condition that "1" is not set to the setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 221 for the specific control (step SG602). When the setting confirmation display flag is set to “1”, an affirmative determination is made in step S9005 of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 639), whereby the setting processing for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting confirmation is performed. (Step S9006) is executed. The content of the setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting confirmation is the same as that in the above-described seventy-seventh embodiment. Executing the processing, for example, as shown in an explanatory diagram of FIG. Is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  Thereafter, a confirmation start command is transmitted to the sound light side CPU 353 (step SG603). By receiving the confirmation start command, the sound-light side CPU 353 can recognize the image indicating that the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 763) is being executed and the operation content for terminating the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 763). The display control device 82 controls the display so that the image for making the symbol display is displayed on the symbol display device 41. This allows the manager of the gaming hall to recognize that the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being checked, and is necessary for ending the setting checking process (FIG. 763). It is possible for the manager of the gaming hall to recognize the details of the operation. Note that, in addition to or instead of performing the notification in the symbol display device 41, a configuration may be adopted in which at least one of the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 performs. Further, an external output indicating that the setting confirmation process (FIG. 763) is being executed may be performed on a device external to the pachinko machine 10, such as a management computer for a game hall.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a has switched from the ON state to the OFF state using the setting key (step SG604). Specifically, similarly to the setting confirmation process (FIG. 660) in the seventy-seventh embodiment, the reception state of the signal received from the detection sensor that detects the state of the setting key insertion unit 68a corresponds to the ON state. It is determined whether or not the receiving state has changed from the receiving state to the OFF state. Therefore, not only when the setting key insertion section 68a is maintained in the ON state, but also when the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 763) is started in a situation where the setting key insertion section 68a is in the OFF state, the OFF state is not changed. If it is maintained, a negative determination is made in step SG604. If it is not specified that the setting key insertion section 68a has switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step SG604: NO), the processing of step SG604 is repeated.

  When it is determined that the setting key insertion section 68a has been switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step SG604: YES), the setting confirmation display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step SG605). Accordingly, a negative determination is made in step S9005 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639), and the setting process (step S9006) for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting confirmation is not executed. Therefore, on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, a display indicating that the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being confirmed and a display indicating the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 are displayed. The state to be performed is released.

  After that, the setting of interrupt prohibition is performed (step SG606). Thus, when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 763) ends and the process returns to the process (steps SG501 to SG521) at the start of the supply of the operating power in the main process (FIG. 762), the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638) and interruption of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 639) are prohibited.

  Thereafter, a return command at the time of confirmation is transmitted to the sound-light side CPU 353 (step SG607). By receiving the return command at the time of confirmation, the sound-light-side CPU 353 specifies that the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power (steps SG501 to SG521) is completed in the main-side CPU 63, and supplies the current operating power. It specifies that the setting confirmation process (FIG. 763) has been executed in the process at the start (steps SG501 to SG521). Then, processing corresponding to the reception of the return command at the time of confirmation is executed. The contents of the process will be described later.

  As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the setting key insertion portion 68a being turned on by the setting key without pressing the reset button 68c, the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 starts. When the main process (FIG. 762) is started and the reset button 68c is not pressed and the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned ON, the game proceeds in the main process (FIG. 762). The setting confirmation process (FIG. 763) is executed in a state where the process at the time of starting the supply of the operating power, which is a status before the process of FIG. This makes it possible to confirm the set value in a situation where no game is being played.

  Returning to the description of the main processing (FIG. 762), the case where the setting key insertion section 68a has not been turned ON using the setting key and “1” has not been set in the setting confirmation display flag (steps SG510 and SG510). In step SG511, a normal return command is transmitted to the sound-light side CPU 353 (step SG513). By receiving the normal return command, the sound-light-side CPU 353 determines that the processing at the time of starting the supply of the operating power (steps SG501 to SG521) is completed in the main-side CPU 63, and at the time of starting the supply of the current operating power. (Steps SG501 to SG521), it is specified that none of the RAM clear processing (FIG. 765), the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 763), and the setting value update processing (FIG. 764) have been executed. Then, a process corresponding to the reception of the normal return command is executed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the reset button 68c is pressed, and the setting key insertion unit 68a is determined to have been turned on using the setting key (step SG508 and step SG514: YES), Alternatively, when it is determined in step SG507 that the setting update display flag is set to “1”, the setting value updating process is executed (step SG515). Not only when the reset button 68c is pressed as described above and the setting key insertion section 68a is turned ON (that is, when the "setting change operation" is performed), but also when the reset button 68c is pressed. The setting value update process (FIG. 764) is also executed when the setting update display flag is set to “1” regardless of the presence or absence of the pressing operation and the ON operation of the setting key insertion unit 68a. If the process at the time of power failure is executed in the state where the process (FIG. 764) is being executed, the operation contents at the start of the supply of the operating power thereafter are “no operation”, “RAM clear operation”, and “setting change”. The set value update process (FIG. 764) is executed regardless of whether the operation is an "operation" or a "setting confirmation operation". This makes it possible to prioritize the execution of the setting value update processing (FIG. 764).

  Here, the setting value update processing executed in step SG515 will be described. FIG. 764 is a flowchart showing the setting value update processing. The processing of steps SG701 to SG713 in the setting value update processing is executed by using the specific control program and the specific control data in the main CPU 63.

  First, interrupt permission is set (step SG701). Thus, the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) is started by interrupting at the first interrupt cycle, and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 639) is started by interrupting at the second interrupt cycle.

  In the present embodiment, in the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power (steps SG501 to SG521), the interrupts of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 639) are basically prohibited. In the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 763) and the setting value update processing (FIG. 764), an interrupt is permitted. Therefore, if the setting confirmation process (FIG. 763) and the set value update process (FIG. 764) are not executed in the process (steps SG501 to SG521) at the start of the supply of the operating power, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638) and the execution of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639) are prohibited, and the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638) is performed in the situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 763) or the set value update process (FIG. 764) is being executed. ) And execution of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639) are permitted. However, in the situation where the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 763) or the setting value update processing (FIG. 764) is being executed, the start-up processing flag is set to “1”, so the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 763) is performed. 638) is started, among the various processes of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638), the processes for monitoring the power failure, updating the various counters, and monitoring the illegality are executed, while the processes for progressing the game are performed. The first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638) ends without executing the process.

  Thereafter, "1" is set to the setting update display flag on condition that "1" is not set to the setting update display flag provided in the work area 221 for the specific control (step SG702). When the setting update display flag is set to “1”, an affirmative determination is made in step S9003 of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 639), and the setting processing for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update is performed. (Step S9004) is executed. The content of the setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update is the same as that in the above-described seventy-seventh embodiment. By executing the process, for example, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 629 (a), a display indicating that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being updated and the pachinko machine 10 is selected as an update target The displayed set values are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  Thereafter, initial settings at the time of start are performed (step SG703). In the initial setting, the game stop flag provided in the specific control work area 221 is cleared to “0”. When the power failure flag is not set to “1” because the power failure processing was not properly performed at the time of the previous power-off (step SG504: NO), the game stop flag indicates the work area 221 for the specific control and If the checksums do not match for at least one of the stack areas 222 for specific control due to a change in the storage state of information since the last power-off (step SG505: NO), or the setting reference area 341 Is a flag that is set to “1” in step SG 518 of the main process (FIG. 762) when the set value corresponding to the information stored in is not within the normal range (step SG506: NO). When the game stop flag is set to “1”, the processes of steps S8901 to S8905 are executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638), while an affirmative determination is made in step S8906 to perform steps S8907 to S8907. The processing of S8920 is not executed. Accordingly, when the information abnormality of the main RAM 65 as described above occurs, the processing for monitoring the power failure, updating the various counters, and monitoring the illegality is executed, while the processing for advancing the game is executed. Will not be. By clearing the game stop flag to “0” in the process of step SG703, the state in which the occurrence of the information abnormality in the main RAM 65 is specified is released when the set value update process (FIG. 764) is executed. Becomes possible.

  Thereafter, “1” is set in the setting update area 342 (see FIG. 659) in the specific control work area 221 (step SG704). The setting update area 342 is a storage area in which information of the set value being updated in the set value update process (FIG. 764) is stored as in the 77th embodiment. When the numerical information “1” is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value of the update target (selection target or change target) is “setting 1”. When the numerical information “2” is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated is “setting 2”. When the numerical information of “3” is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated is “setting 3”. When the numerical information “4” is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated is “setting 4”. When the numerical information of “5” is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated is “setting 5”. When the numerical information of “6” is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated is “setting 6”.

  By setting “1” in the setting update area 342 in step SG704, the setting value to be updated becomes “setting 1”. That is, in the present embodiment, no matter what the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is, if the setting value update process (FIG. 764) is started, the setting value to be updated is “setting 1”.

  Thereafter, an update start command is transmitted to the sound / light side CPU 353 (step SG705). Upon receiving the update start command, the sound-light-side CPU 353 displays an image indicating that the set value update process (FIG. 764) is being executed, an image for enabling the operation content for changing the set value to be recognized, The display controller 82 controls the display so that an image for enabling the user to recognize the operation content for ending the setting value update process (FIG. 764) is displayed on the symbol display device 41. This allows the manager of the game hall to recognize that the setting value is being changed, and also provides the operation contents and the setting value update process required for changing the setting value (FIG. 764). Can be recognized by the administrator of the gaming hall. Note that, in addition to or instead of performing the notification in the symbol display device 41, a configuration may be adopted in which at least one of the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 performs. Further, an external output indicating that the set value updating process (FIG. 764) is being executed may be performed on a device external to the pachinko machine 10, such as a management computer for a game hall.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the information of the setting value stored in the setting update area 342 is any of “1” to “6” (step SG706). If it is not one of "1" to "6" (step SG706: NO), "1" is set in the setting update area 342 (step SG707). Thereby, the setting value to be updated becomes “setting 1”.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step SG706 or when the process in step SG707 is executed, it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a has switched from the ON state to the OFF state using the setting key (step SG708). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the reception state of the signal received from the detection sensor that detects the state of the setting key insertion unit 68a has changed from the reception state corresponding to the ON state to the reception state corresponding to the OFF state. I do. Therefore, not only when the setting key insertion unit 68a is maintained in the ON state, but also when the setting value updating process is started in a situation where the setting key insertion unit 68a is in the OFF state, the OFF state is maintained. In this case also, a negative determination is made in step SG708.

  If a negative determination is made in step SG708, the value of the setting update area 342 is incremented by 1 on the condition that the reset button 68c is pressed (step SG709: YES) (step SG710). Thus, each time the reset button 68c is pressed once, the set value is updated to the next higher level. If the reset button 68c is not pressed (step SG709: NO) or if the value of the setting update area 342 is incremented by 1, the process returns to step SG706, but the setting is updated in step SG706. If it is determined that the value of the service area 342 is 7 or more, “1” is set in the setting update area 342 in step SG707. As a result, when the reset button 68c is pressed once in the situation of "Setting 6," the display returns to "Setting 1."

  When it is specified that the setting key insertion unit 68a has been switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step SG708: YES), the information of the setting value stored in the setting updating area 342 is overwritten in the setting reference area 341 ( Step SG711). Thus, the setting value information updated as a result of the current setting value updating process (FIG. 764) is set in the setting reference area 341 and the setting value corresponding to the set information is changed to the current setting value. The set value of the pachinko machine 10 is used.

  Thereafter, the setting of the interruption inhibition is performed (step SG712). Thus, when the setting value updating process (FIG. 764) is terminated and the process returns to the process (steps SG501 to SG521) at the start of the supply of the operation power in the main process (FIG. 762), the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638) and interruption of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 639) are prohibited.

  Thereafter, a RAM clear process is executed (step SG713). In the RAM clearing process, the specific control work area 221 is excluded except for the area in which the information of the setting value indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the specific control work area 221 (that is, the setting reference area 341). Is cleared to "0" and the initial setting is executed. In the RAM clearing process, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0" and initialization is performed. In the RAM clearing process, initialization is performed after various registers of the main CPU 63 are also cleared to "0". In this initial setting, processing similar to the internal function register setting processing in step SF502 is executed. Note that the process for clearing “0” and the process for performing initial setting are not executed for the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control. Details of the RAM clear processing will be described later.

  As described above, based on performing not only the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the reset button 68c but also the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 while the ON operation of the setting key insertion portion 68a by the setting key, A set value update process (FIG. 764) is executed. Further, as described above, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 763) is performed based on performing the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 while performing the ON operation of the setting key insertion portion 68a with the setting key without pressing the reset button 68c. Be executed. As a result, an ON operation for the setting key insertion unit 68a can be shared as an operation for executing the setting-related processing relating to the setting value. Therefore, it is possible to make the operation content for generating the setting-related process easy for the manager of the game hall to understand.

  In the case where the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on by the setting key and the pressing operation of the reset button 68c is not added, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 763) is performed. When the reset operation is performed and the pressing operation of the reset button 68c is added, the setting value update processing (FIG. 764) is executed. This makes it possible to make the execution target process different from the setting confirmation process (FIG. 763) and the set value update process (FIG. 764) depending on whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed. Therefore, it is possible to make the contents of the operation for executing the desired processing of the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 763) and the setting value updating processing (FIG. 764) easy for the manager of the gaming hall to understand. In addition, by making the operation content for executing the setting value update processing (FIG. 764) more than the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 763), an act of illegally performing the setting value update processing (FIG. 764) is particularly performed. It becomes possible to make it difficult.

  Returning to the description of the main processing (FIG. 762), it is determined in step SG508 that the reset button 68c has been pressed, and the setting key insertion unit 68a has not been turned ON using the setting key. When it is determined (step SG514: NO), it is determined whether the game stop flag in the work area 221 for the specific control is set to “1” (step SG516). The game stop flag is a flag that is set to “1” when the power failure flag is not set to “1”, when the checksums do not match, or when the set value is abnormal. When the game stop flag is set to “1”, the processes of steps S8901 to S8905 are executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638), while an affirmative determination is made in step S8906 to perform steps S8907 to S8907. The processing of S8920 is not executed. Accordingly, if the power failure flag is not set to “1” because the power failure processing was not properly performed at the time of the previous power shutdown, the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 If at least one of the checksums does not match due to a change in the storage state of the information since the last power shutdown, or if the set value is abnormal, monitoring of power failure, updating of various counters, While processing for monitoring is executed, processing for advancing the game is not executed.

  If the game stop flag is not set to "1" (step SG516: NO), a RAM clear process is executed (step SG517). The content of the RAM clear processing is the same as the content of the RAM clear processing in step SG713 in the setting value update processing (FIG. 764). That is, in step SG517 of the main processing (FIG. 762) and step SG713 of the setting value update processing (FIG. 764), the same subroutine is called to execute the RAM clear processing.

  FIG. 765 is a flowchart showing the RAM clear processing executed in step SG517 of the main processing (FIG. 762) and step SG713 of the setting value update processing (FIG. 764). The processing of steps SG801 to SG808 in the RAM clear processing is executed by using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

  First, in the work area 221 for specific control, a clear start address which is a start address when executing the RAM clear processing is set as a target address (step SG801). The setting reference area 341 is set in an area corresponding to the start address of the specific control work area 221, and the clear start address is set to the next address with respect to the setting reference area 341. . As a result, the setting reference area 341 can be excluded from the execution target of the RAM clear processing.

  Thereafter, a clearing process is executed (step SG802). In the clearing process in step SG802, the area corresponding to the current target address in the specific control work area 221 is cleared to “0”, and the target address is set to the next address in the specific control work area 221. . Then, the process of clearing to “0” and the process of updating the target address are executed until the next address in the work area 221 for specific control becomes the target address. As a result, since the area indicating whether the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the high probability mode is cleared to “0”, the winning / rejecting lottery is performed regardless of the winning / rejecting lottery mode immediately before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. The mode is a low probability mode. In addition, the game is not executed, the opening / closing execution mode is not executed, and the general-purpose display unit 38a is not variably displayed, and the general electric functioning object 34a is in the closed state. Situation. In addition, since the hold storage area 65a and the ordinary power hold area 65c provided in the work area 221 for specific control are also cleared to "0", the hold information for the special figure display unit 37a is erased and the general figure display unit is cleared. The hold information for 38a is deleted. Further, the setting update display flag and the setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 221 for the specific control are cleared to “0”. The setting update area 342 provided in the specific control work area 221 is cleared to “0”. Further, the game stop flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to “0”.

  Thereafter, the start address of the stack area 222 for the specific control is set to the target address (step SG803). Thereafter, a clearing process is executed (step SG804). In the clearing process in step SG804, the area corresponding to the current target address in the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0", and the target address is set to the next address in the stack area 222 for specific control. . Then, the process of clearing to “0” and the process of updating the target address are executed until the next address in the stack area 222 for specific control becomes the target address.

  Thereafter, an initial setting of the main RAM 65 is executed (step SG805). Further, the various registers of the main CPU 63 are cleared to "0" (step SG806), and the various registers are initialized (step SG807). In this initial setting, processing similar to the internal function register setting processing in step SG502 in the main processing (FIG. 762) is executed.

  Thereafter, a clear completion command is transmitted to the sound-light-side CPU 353 (step SG808). By receiving the clear completion command, the sound-light-side CPU 353 specifies that the processing at the time of starting the supply of the operating power (steps SG501 to SG521) has been completed in the main-side CPU 63, and at the time of starting the supply of the current operating power. (Steps SG501 to SG521), it is specified that the RAM clearing process of step SG517 or the RAM clearing process of step SG713 of the setting value updating process (FIG. 764) has been executed. Then, a process corresponding to the reception of the clear completion command is executed. The contents of the process will be described later.

  In the main processing (FIG. 762), if a negative determination is made in any of steps SG504, SG505, and SG506, that is, if "1" is not set in the power failure flag, or if the checksums do not match or are set. If the value is abnormal, "1" is set to the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control (step SG518). As described above, when the game stop flag is set to “1”, the processing of steps S8901 to S8905 is executed in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638), while the affirmative determination is made in step S8906. Steps S8907 to S8920 are not executed. Accordingly, if the power failure flag is not set to “1” because the power failure processing was not properly performed at the time of the previous power shutdown, the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 If at least one of the checksums does not match due to a change in the storage state of the information since the last power shutdown, or if the set value is abnormal, monitoring of power failure, updating of various counters, While processing for monitoring is executed, processing for advancing the game is not executed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c has been pressed (step SG519). If the reset button 68c has not been pressed (step SG519: NO), an abnormal command indicating that an abnormality has occurred with respect to the power failure flag, the checksum, or the set value at the start of the supply of the operating power is transmitted to the sound-light side CPU 353. (Step SG520). Upon receiving the abnormal command, the sound-light-side CPU 353 causes the display light-emitting unit 53 to emit light in a manner corresponding to the information abnormality at the start of the supply of the operating power, and also “change the setting” from the speaker unit 54. Is output. In addition, a character image “Please change the setting.” Is displayed on the symbol display device 41. These notifications are maintained until the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and is terminated when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, even if the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is temporarily stopped, the above-described notification will be made when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is restarted until the set value updating process (FIG. 764) is executed. It will be started again.

  Thereafter, an external output process at the time of abnormality is executed (step SG521). In the external output process at the time of abnormality, a process for externally outputting an abnormal signal to the management computer of the game hall is executed. In this case, the signal output of the abnormal signal is performed over a predetermined period (for example, 100 milliseconds). However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the game stop flag is set to “1”, the signal output of the abnormal signal is continued, and when the game stop flag is cleared to “0”, the abnormal signal is output. The signal output may be stopped. Further, the abnormality signal may be output when an abnormality different from the abnormality relating to the power failure flag, the checksum, and the set value occurs. For example, even when it is specified that the monitoring target has been fraudulently detected (illegal radio wave detection or fraudulent magnetism detection) in the fraud detection process (step S8905) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638), an abnormal signal is also output. External output. However, the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the abnormal signal is also used in this way, and a configuration may be adopted in which an abnormal signal dedicated to an abnormality relating to a power failure flag, a checksum, or a set value is externally output. An abnormality signal corresponding to each of the abnormality relating to the check sum, the abnormality relating to the checksum, and the abnormality relating to the set value may be externally output.

  When the reset button 68c is pressed (step SG519: YES), it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on using the setting key (step SG514). When the reset button 68c is pressed and the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on using the setting key (step SG514 and step SG519: YES), the setting value updating process is executed (step SG515). The processing content of the setting value update processing is as described above. In other words, when the operating power is supplied to the main CPU 63 while the “setting change operation” is being performed, one of steps SG504, SG505, and SG506 is determined because an abnormality has occurred in the main RAM 65. , The set value updating process (FIG. 764) is executed. Thus, it is possible to give priority to the change of the set value. In the set value update process (FIG. 764), the game stop flag is cleared to "0" by executing the initial setting at the start in step SG703 as described above. As a result, when the set value update process (FIG. 764) is executed, it is possible to eliminate the state in which an abnormality has occurred in the main RAM 65 after the update of the set value is completed.

  On the other hand, when the reset button 68c is pressed and the setting key insertion unit 68a is not turned on (step SG519: YES, step SG514: NO), the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to “1”. Is set (step SG516). In the process of step SG516 after the game stop flag is set to "1" in step SG518, the game stop flag is set to "1" as a matter of course, so an affirmative determination is made in step SG516. In this case, an abnormal command is transmitted to the sound-light side CPU 353 in step SG520, and an abnormal signal is externally output in step SG521.

  That is, when an abnormality related to the power failure flag, the checksum, and the set value occurs and a negative determination is made in any of step SG504, step SG505, and step SG506, the main CPU 63 determines that the "RAM clear operation" is being performed. Even if the supply of the operating power to the RAM is started, the RAM clear processing (step SG517) is not executed. Also, when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started while the game stop flag is set to “1” and the “RAM clear operation” is performed, the RAM clear processing ( Step SG517) is not executed. Thereby, even if the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started while the “RAM clear operation” is being performed, the state in which the game stop flag is set to “1” is not canceled. It becomes possible. On the other hand, when the “setting change operation” is performed, the set value updating process (FIG. 764) is executed regardless of whether the game stop flag is set to “1” and the setting is performed. The game stop flag is cleared to “0” in the initial setting (step SG703) at the start of the value update process (FIG. 764). As a result, it is necessary to execute the set value update process (FIG. 764) in order to eliminate the state in which the game stop flag is set to “1”. Therefore, when an information abnormality occurs in the work area 221 for specific control, not only the processing for initializing the work area 221 for the specific control but also resetting of the set value is required. .

  When the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started in a situation where the game stop flag is set to “1”, the “setting change operation” is not performed, that is, “the operation is not performed” In the case of, or when the “RAM clear operation” or the “setting confirmation operation” is performed, an affirmative determination is made in step SG509 or step SG516, so that an abnormal command is transmitted in step SG520 and an abnormal command is transmitted in step SG521. Execute the external output process of Thus, when the game stop flag is set to “1”, unless the set value update process (FIG. 764) is executed regardless of the processing results of steps SG504, SG505, and SG506 in the subsequent main process. Each time the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the notification of the abnormality in the pachinko machine 10 and the external output to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 when an abnormality occurs are performed. Therefore, it is possible to make the administrator of the gaming hall recognize that the set value should be changed.

  When the processing of step SG512 is executed, when the processing of step SG513 is executed, when the processing of step SG515 is executed, when the processing of step SG517 is executed, or when the processing of step SG521 is executed, Information corresponding to the initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in a check-in-progress counter provided in the work area 221 (step SG522). The value set in the counter during the check is decremented by one each time the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639) is started, similarly to the 67th embodiment. When the value of 1 or more is set in the check-in-progress counter, the process of step S9102 is executed in the normal setting process (FIG. 640) of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639), thereby obtaining the 67th timer. As in the embodiment, the display for checking is continued on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

  According to the above configuration, when the supply of the operation power to the main CPU 63 is started, the process at the start of the supply of the operation power (steps SG501 to SG521) is completed by the main CPU 63 and the remaining process is performed. Before (Step SG524 to Step SG527) is started, an initial check period is started. With this, it is not necessary to control the initial check period in a situation where the processing at the start of the supply of the operation power (steps SG501 to SG521) is performed, and thus the processing at the start of the supply of the operation power (steps SG501 to SG501) is not necessary. It is possible to reduce the processing load in the situation where SG521) is being executed.

  Also, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 763) and the set value update process (FIG. 764) are executed as the process (steps SG501 to SG521) at the start of the supply of the operation power, whereas the operation power Is started after the processing at the start of supply (steps SG501 to SG521) ends. Thereby, even if the display for check is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 during the initial check period, the display of the set value using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is performed. It is possible to prevent the influence.

  Thereafter, the start-up processing flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step SG523). When the start-up processing flag is cleared to “0”, a negative determination is made in step S8906 when the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 638) is activated, so that not only the processing in steps S8901 to S8905 is performed. The processing from step S8907 to step S8920 is executed, and the state in which the processing for advancing the game is not executed is released. In step SG523, the power failure flag in the work area 221 for specific control is also cleared to "0".

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to the remaining process of steps SG524 to SG527. That is, the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 639). Will result in a residual time. The remaining time varies in accordance with the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process. The remaining process of steps SG524 to SG527 is repeatedly executed using the irregular time. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining processes in steps SG524 to SG527 are irregular processes that are executed irregularly. In steps SG524 to SG527, the same processes as those in steps S113 to S116 of the main process (FIG. 514) in the 33rd embodiment are executed.

  Next, the open / close monitoring process executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The open / close monitoring process is executed as a part of the input state monitoring process (step S8912) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 638). The processing of steps SG901 to SG908 in the opening / closing monitoring processing is executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

  First, it is determined whether or not the opening operation of the gaming machine main body 12 has been performed (step SG901). In the present embodiment, a body opening sensor 96 is provided on the front surface of the back pack unit 15 as in the 33rd embodiment (see FIG. 507). In this case, in this embodiment, the detection result of the main body opening sensor 96 is input to the main CPU 63 instead of the payout CPU 92. When the gaming machine main body 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the main body opening sensor 96 transmits a closing detection signal to the main CPU 63, and the gaming machine main body 12 is open with respect to the outer frame 11. In this case, the body opening sensor 96 transmits an opening detection signal to the main CPU 63. The main CPU 63 determines that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closed state when receiving the closing detection signal from the main body opening sensor 96, and determines when the gaming machine main body 12 is receiving the opening detection signal from the main body opening sensor 96. It is specified that the main body 12 is in the open state. In step SG901, when it is specified that the close detection signal is received from the main body open sensor 96 in the open / close monitoring process (FIG. 766) in the previous process, the open / close monitor process in the current process (FIG. At 766), it is determined whether or not an opening detection signal is received from the body opening sensor 96.

  When it is determined that the opening operation of the gaming machine main body 12 has been performed (step SG901: YES), a main body opening command is transmitted to the sound light side CPU 353 (step SG902). The sound-light-side CPU 353 executes a process corresponding to the main body opening command upon receiving the body opening command. The contents of the process will be described later.

  In the open / close monitoring process, it is further determined whether or not the closing operation of the gaming machine main body 12 has been performed (step SG903). In step SG903, when it is specified that the opening detection signal is received from the main body opening sensor 96 in the opening / closing monitoring processing (FIG. 766) in the previous processing cycle, the opening / closing monitoring processing in the current processing cycle ( In FIG. 766), it is determined whether or not a close detection signal is received from the main body open sensor 96.

  When it is determined that the closing operation of the gaming machine main body 12 has been performed (step SG903: YES), a main body closing command is transmitted to the sound light side CPU 353 (step SG904). Upon receiving the main body closing command, the sound-light-side CPU 353 executes processing corresponding to the command. The contents of the process will be described later.

  In the open / close monitoring process, it is further determined whether or not the opening operation of the front door frame 14 has been performed (step SG905). In this embodiment, a front door opening sensor 95 is provided on the front surface of the inner frame 13 as in the 33rd embodiment (see FIG. 507). In this case, in this embodiment, the detection result of the front door opening sensor 95 is input to the main CPU 63 instead of the payout CPU 92. When the front door frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 13, the front door open sensor 95 transmits a close detection signal to the main CPU 63, and the front door frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 13. In this case, the front door opening sensor 95 transmits an opening detection signal to the main CPU 63. The main CPU 63 specifies that the front door frame 14 is in the closed state when receiving the closing detection signal from the front door opening sensor 95, and determines when the opening detection signal is received from the front door opening sensor 95. It is specified that the front door frame 14 is in the open state. In step SG905, when it is specified that the close detection signal has been received from the front door open sensor 95 in the open / close monitoring process (FIG. 766) in the previous process, the open / close monitor process ( In FIG. 766), it is determined whether or not an opening detection signal is received from the front door opening sensor 95.

  When it is determined that the opening operation of the front door frame 14 has been performed (step SG905: YES), a front door opening command is transmitted to the sound light side CPU 353 (step SG906). Upon receiving the front door opening command, the sound-light side CPU 353 executes a process corresponding thereto. The contents of the process will be described later.

  In the open / close monitoring process, it is further determined whether or not the closing operation of the front door frame 14 has been performed (step SG907). In step SG907, when it is specified that the opening detection signal is received from the front door opening sensor 95 in the opening / closing monitoring process (FIG. 766) in the previous process, the opening / closing monitoring process in the current process is performed. In (FIG. 766), it is determined whether or not a close detection signal is received from the front door open sensor 95.

  If it is determined that the closing operation of the front door frame 14 has been performed (step SG907: YES), a front door closing command is transmitted to the sound light side CPU 353 (step SG908). Upon receiving the front door closing command, the sound-light side CPU 353 executes processing corresponding to the command. The contents of the process will be described later.

  Next, processing executed by the sound emission control device 81 will be described. Prior to the description of the processing, the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device 81 will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG.

  The sound light emission control device 81 includes a sound light emission control board 351 as in the 81st embodiment. A sound light side MPU 352 is mounted on the sound emission control board 351. The sound light MPU 352 includes a sound light ROM 354 and a sound light RAM 355 in addition to the sound light CPU 353 which is an arithmetic processing device including a control unit and a calculation unit. The sound-light-side MPU 352 includes, in addition to the above elements, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like.

  The sound-light-side ROM 354 is a memory such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory that does not require an external power supply for storing and storing data (that is, a nonvolatile storage unit), and is used as a read-only memory. The sound light ROM 354 stores various control programs executed by the sound light CPU 353 and fixed value data.

  The sound-light-side RAM 355 is a memory (such as a volatile storage unit) that requires an external power supply for storing and holding data, such as an SRAM and a DRAM, and is used for both reading and writing. The sound-light-side RAM 355 is capable of random access and has a shorter read time than the sound-light-side ROM 354 when compared with the same data capacity. The sound-light-side RAM 355 temporarily stores various data and the like when the control program stored in the sound-light-side ROM 354 is executed.

  In the 81st embodiment, the RTC 356 and the RTC memory 357 are provided on the audio light emission control board 351, but in the present embodiment, the RTC 356 and the RTC memory 357 are not provided on the audio light emission control board 351.

  Here, as described above, the main CPU 63 sends a return command and a clear completion command at the time of confirmation (steps SG501 to SG521) to the sound-light CPU 353 in the processing (steps SG501 to SG521) at the start of the supply of the operating power in the main processing (FIG. 762). In addition, the main body opening command, the main body closing command, the front door opening command, and the front door closing command can be transmitted to the sound-light side CPU 353 in the opening / closing monitoring process (FIG. 766). When any of these commands is received, the sound-light side CPU 353 executes a process for causing the display light-emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 to execute notification corresponding to the received command. When performing these notifications, various notification tables 521 to 526 stored in the sound light ROM 354 in advance are used.

  The various notification tables 521 to 526 include a confirmation notification table 521 which is referred to when a return command at the time of confirmation is received from the main CPU 63 to execute a corresponding notification, and a clear completion command which is referred to by the main CPU 63. And a notification table 522 to be referred to for executing a corresponding notification when received from the main body, and a main body to be referred to for executing a corresponding notification when a main body release command is received from the main CPU 63. An opening notification table 523, a main body closing notification table 524 referred to for executing a corresponding notification when a main body closing command is received from the main CPU 63, and a front door opening command received from the main CPU 63. The front door opening notification table 5 referred to execute the notification corresponding to the case. 5, and the front door closing notification table 526 to be referred for executing the notification corresponding thereto upon receiving the front door closing command from the main side CPU63 are present.

  In these various notification tables 521 to 526, the light emission control data for controlling the light emission of the display light emitting unit 53 in a predetermined manner and the speaker unit 54 are provided in accordance with the respective update timings of the notification period. Sound output control data for sound output control in a mode is set. The data configuration of the various notification tables 521 to 526 will be described using the post-confirmation notification table 521 as an example. FIG. 768 is an explanatory diagram for describing the contents of the after-confirmation notification table 521.

  As shown in FIG. 768, a plurality of pieces of pointer information are set in the post-confirmation notification table 521 so as to correspond to each update timing of the notification content in the notification period. Also, a combination of the light emission control data and the sound output control data is set in correspondence with each of the plurality of pieces of pointer information. The plurality of pieces of pointer information are arranged as serial number information, and the pointer information to be referred to is updated to the next-order pointer information every time a preset update period of 40 ms elapses. Then, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 is performed using the light emission control data set in association with the pointer information of the reference target after the update, and the speaker unit 54 is used using the sound output control data. Is performed. The update cycle is not limited to 40 milliseconds, but is optional.

  When the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 54 are performed using the post-confirmation notification table 521, first, the light emission control data ( X (0)), light emission control of the display light-emitting unit 53 is performed, and sound output control data (Y (0)) set in association with the pointer information of “0” is used. Thus, the sound output of the speaker unit 54 is controlled. Thus, a notification after confirmation indicating that the setting confirmation process (FIG. 763) has been executed is started.

  Thereafter, each time the notification content update cycle of 40 milliseconds elapses, the pointer information of the reference target is updated to the next-order pointer information, and the pointer information is set in correspondence with the newly referenced pointer information. The light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 is performed using the light emission control data, and the sound output control of the speaker unit 54 is performed using the sound output control data. For example, in the situation where the pointer information of “0” is the reference target, the reference target is updated to the pointer information of “1” when the update cycle of 40 ms elapses, and the pointer information corresponding to the pointer information of “1” is corresponded. The light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 is performed using the light emission control data (X (1)) set as described above, and the sound output control set corresponding to the pointer information of “1”. The sound output of the speaker unit 54 is controlled using the application data (Y (1)). In addition, in the situation where the pointer information of “1” is the reference target, the reference target is updated to the pointer information of “2” after the update period of 40 ms elapses, and the pointer information corresponding to the pointer information of “2” is corresponded. The light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 is performed by using the light emission control data (X (2)) set as described above, and the sound output control set corresponding to the pointer information of “2”. The sound output of the speaker unit 54 is controlled using the application data (Y (2)). Then, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 is performed by using the light emission control data (X (k)) set in the post-confirmation notification table 521 in association with the pointer information of the last order “k”. By performing the sound output control of the speaker unit 54 using the sound output control data (Y (k)), the execution control of the notification using the after-confirmation notification table 521 is terminated, and the confirmation is performed. Post-notification will be terminated.

  That is, when the post-confirmation notification table 521 is to be used, the post-confirmation notification table 521 is used until the last-order pointer information set in the post-confirmation notification table 521 becomes a reference target. Maintained as a subject. Although details will be described later, the post-confirmation notification has a higher execution priority than other notifications that can be executed at the same time. Therefore, when the post-confirmation notification table 521 is to be used, the post-confirmation notification is continued until the notification period set corresponding to the post-confirmation notification table 521 elapses.

  The post-clear notification table 522, the main body opening notification table 523, the main body closing notification table 524, the front door opening notification table 525, and the front door closing notification table 526 also include light emission control data and sound output control data. Although the contents are different, the basic data configuration is the same as that of the post-confirmation notification table 521 shown in FIG. That is, in each of the various notification tables 521 to 526, a plurality of pieces of pointer information are set, and a combination of the light emission control data and the sound output control data is set corresponding to each piece of the pointer information. The update period of the pointer information is the same in any of the notification tables 521 to 526, but is not limited thereto, and the update of the pointer information is performed according to the type of the notification tables 521 to 526. The period may be different. The contents of the light emission control data and the sound output control data are different in each of the various notification tables 521 to 526. Accordingly, the post-confirmation notification executed using the post-confirmation notification table 521, the post-clear notification executed using the post-clear notification table 522, and the main body executed using the main body release notification table 523. Using the opening notification, the main body closing notification executed by using the main body closing notification table 524, the front door opening notification executed by using the front door opening notification table 525, and the front door closing notification table 526. The content of the front door closing notification executed is different from each other. Therefore, by confirming the light emission content of the display light emitting unit 53 and the sound output content from the speaker unit 54, it becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to know which type of notification is being executed.

  When the post-confirmation notification table 521 is to be used as described above, the post-confirmation notification table 521 is used until the last-order pointer information set in the post-confirmation notification table 521 becomes a reference target. When the notification execution control corresponding to the last-ordered pointer information is completed, the post-confirmation notification table 521 is released from the use target. As described above, the notification table which is maintained as a use target until the last-order pointer information becomes a reference target and is excluded from the use target when the execution control of the notification corresponding to the last-order pointer information is completed is In addition to the post-confirmation notification table 521, there are a post-clear notification table 522, a body closing notification table 524, and a front door closing notification table 526.

  On the other hand, when the main body opening notification table 523 and the front door opening notification table 525 are to be used, even if the last order pointer information set in the notification tables 523 and 525 is to be used as a reference target. If the predetermined use release condition is not satisfied, the reference target is returned to the pointer information in the first order, so that the notification tables 523 and 525 are maintained as the use targets. When the notification tables 523 and 525 are to be used, no matter which pointer information is to be referred to, if the predetermined use release condition is satisfied, the information is released from the use target. In detail, the predetermined use release condition is satisfied when the main body opening notification table 523 is set to be used and when the gaming machine main body 12 is changed from the open state to the closed state. As a result, the main body opening notification table 523 is released from the target of use. When the front door opening notification table 525 is set to be used, when the front door frame 14 changes from the open state to the closed state, it is determined that a predetermined use release condition is satisfied, and the front door opening notification is used. The table 525 is released from the use target.

  The various notification tables 521 to 526 are set as use targets by being read into various execution areas 531 to 533 provided in the sound light RAM 355. As various execution areas 531 to 533, a first execution area 531, a second execution area 532, and a third execution area 533 are provided. Each of these various execution areas 531 to 533 has a storage capacity capable of reading one type of notification table 521 to 526, but it is impossible to read a plurality of types of notification tables 521 to 526 at the same time. Storage capacity.

  Priorities are set in advance in the various execution areas 531 to 533 for control execution targets. Specifically, the first execution area 531 is set to the highest priority, the second execution area 532 is set to the second highest priority, and the third execution area 533 is set to the lowest priority. Is set. When the notification table to be used is set in each of the first execution area 531, the second execution area 532, and the third execution area 533, the update timing of the pointer information is set, and the first to third execution areas are set. Although the pointer information to be referred to in the notification table set in each of 531 to 533 is updated to the next pointer information, the light emission control data and the sound output control data are stored in the first execution area 531. The information is read from the set notification table, and is not read from the notification tables set in each of the second execution area 532 and the third execution area 533. Further, when a notification table to be used is set in each of the second execution area 532 and the third execution area 533, the update timing of the pointer information is set, so that the second and third execution areas 532 and 533 are updated. Although the pointer information to be referred to in the notification tables respectively set is updated to the next-order pointer information, the light emission control data and the sound output control data are set in the second execution area 532. The information is read from the notification table and is not read from the notification table set in the third execution area 533. Further, when the notification table to be used is set only in the third execution area 533, it becomes a reference target in the notification table set in the third execution area 533 when the pointer information is updated. The pointer information is updated to the next-order pointer information, and the light emission control data and the sound output control data are read from the notification table set in the third execution area 533.

  By providing the first to third execution areas 531 to 533 as described above, it is possible to simultaneously set a plurality of notification tables as objects to be used, and to set the priority among the plurality of notification tables. It is possible to execute the notification corresponding to the notification table having a high level of information.

  Further, even when the notification corresponding to the notification table with a high priority is being executed, if the notification timing of the notification table on the side with a low priority is also updated, the pointer information of the reference target is not updated. Be updated. Then, when the notification corresponding to the notification table with the higher priority ends, if the notification table on the side with the lower priority is still set as a use target, the notification on the side with the lower priority is not set. The light emission control data and the sound output control data corresponding to the current reference target pointer information are read out from the display table, and the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 54 are performed. This makes it possible to execute the notification corresponding to the notification table on the side with the lower priority at the timing when the notification corresponding to the notification table with the higher priority ends. In addition, during the execution period of the notification table on the non-high priority side, after the period from when the notification table is used to when the notification corresponding to the high priority notification table ends, For the remaining period of the notification, the notification corresponding to the notification table with the lower priority is executed, so that the notification corresponding to the notification table with the higher priority follows the notification corresponding to the notification table with the lower priority. It is possible to prevent the total period during which the notification is executed from becoming excessively long even when the notification corresponding to the use table is executed.

  In each of the various notification tables 521 to 526, the types of execution areas 531 to 533 to be read are predetermined. FIG. 769 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the various notification tables 521 to 526 and the types of execution areas 531 to 533 to be read.

  As shown in FIG. 769, the after-confirmation notification table 521 and the after-clear notification table 522 are read to the first execution area 531 having the highest priority. In this case, the post-confirmation notification table 521 is used when the main CPU 63 executes the setting confirmation process (FIG. 763), and the post-clear notification table 522 is subjected to the RAM clearing process (FIG. 763) by the main CPU 63. 765) is executed when executed. Neither the setting confirmation process (FIG. 763) nor the RAM clear process (FIG. 765) is executed in one main process (FIG. 762). When the supply of the operating power to the sound emission control device 81 is stopped, the information stored in the sound light side RAM 355 is deleted. Therefore, when one of the after-confirmation notification table 521 and the after-clear notification table 522 is set in the first execution area 531, the other is not set in the first execution area 531.

  The main body opening notification table 523 and the front door opening notification table 525 are read to the second execution area 532 having the second highest priority. In this case, the main body opening notification table 523 is used when the gaming machine main body 12 is changed from the closed state to the open state, and the front door opening notification table 525 is changed from the closed state to the open state of the front door frame 14. In this case, it will be used. Therefore, when both the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are in the open state, both the main body opening notification table 523 and the front door opening notification table 525 are to be read out to the second execution area 532. However, in this case, the open notification tables 523 and 525 that have been read at a later timing are read into the second execution area 532. Thus, it is possible to prevent a plurality of types of release notification tables 523 and 525 from being set in the second execution area 532 at the same time. In addition, even when only one of the opening notification tables 523 and 525 is set as described above, when the main body opening notification table 523 is to be used, the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state. When the front door opening notification table 525 is to be used, the front door opening notification indicating that the front door frame 14 has been opened is executed. Even if the opening notification tables 523 and 525 are set, it is possible to notify the administrator of the gaming hall that the opening / closing body that is basically closed is open.

  The main body closing notification table 524 and the front door closing notification table 526 are read to the third execution area 533 having the lowest priority. In this case, the main body closing notification table 524 is used when the gaming machine main body 12 changes from the open state to the closed state, and the front door closing notification table 526 changes from the open state to the closed state of the front door frame 14. It becomes a use object in the case. Therefore, when both the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are changed from the open state to the closed state, both the main body closing notification table 524 and the front door closing notification table 526 are moved to the third execution area 533. In this case, the closing notification tables 524 and 526 that have been read are read out to the third execution area 533 at a later timing. Thus, it is possible to prevent a plurality of types of closure notification tables 524 and 526 from being set in the third execution area 533 at the same time. In addition, even when only one of the closing notification tables 524 and 526 is set as described above, when the main body closing notification table 524 is to be used, the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closed state. When the front door closing notification table 526 is to be used, the front door closing notification indicating that the front door frame 14 has been closed is executed. Even if the closing notification tables 524 and 526 are set, it is possible to notify the manager of the gaming hall that the opening / closing body, which is basically closed, has changed from the open state to the closed state.

  Here, as described above, the after-confirmation notification table 521, the after-clear notification table 522, the main body closing notification table 524, and the front door closing notification table 526 are used until the pointer information in the last order becomes a reference target. When the execution control of the notification corresponding to the pointer information in the last order is maintained as the target and is completed, it is excluded from the use target. In other words, the period in which the notification tables 521, 522, 524, and 526 are used is a fixed period. The fixed period differs depending on the type of the notification tables 521, 522, 524, and 526. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 769, 30 seconds, which is a first fixed period (specific related period, first notification period), is set as a fixed period in the after-confirmation notification table 521 and the after-clear notification table 522. The main body closing notification table 524 and the front door closing notification table 526 have a fixed period of 33 seconds, which is a second fixed period (predetermined target related period, second notification period) longer than the first fixed period. Is set. It should be noted that the main body opening notification table 523 and the front door opening notification table 525 have no defined period of use, and the main body opening notification table 523 is closed after the gaming machine main body 12 is opened. And the front door opening notification table 525 is used until the front door frame 14 is opened and then closed.

  Next, the relationship between the notification after confirmation and the body closing notification and the relationship between the notification after clearing and the body closing notification will be described with reference to a time chart of FIG. FIG. 770 (a) shows a period in which the gaming machine body 12 is in the open state, FIG. 770 (b) shows a period in which the setting confirmation process (FIG. 763) is being executed, and FIG. 770 (c) FIG. 770 (d) shows a period in which the post-confirmation notification table 521 or the after-clear notification table 522 is set in the first execution area 531. FIG. 770 (e) shows a period in which the main body closing notification table 524 is set in the third execution area 533, FIG. 770 (f) shows a period in which the post-confirmation notification is executed, and FIG. ) Indicates the period during which the post-clear notification is being performed, and FIG. 770 (h) indicates the period during which the main body closing notification is being performed.

  First, the case where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 763) is executed will be described.

  At time t1, as shown in FIG. 770 (a), when the game machine main body 12 is opened, the setting key insertion portion 68a is exposed in front of the pachinko machine 10. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the exposed setting key insertion section 68a is turned on by the setting key, the main processing (FIG. 762) is started by the main CPU 63. 770, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 763) is started as shown in FIG. 770 (b). In addition, the main body opening notification for notifying that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state is specified by the opening / closing monitoring processing (FIG. 766) in the main CPU 63 that the gaming machine main body 12 has changed from the closed state to the open state. Therefore, even if the supply of the operating power is started while the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state, the main body opening notification is not executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the body opening notification is performed even in this situation.

  In the situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 763) is being executed, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 that can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 by opening the gaming machine main body 12. Displays the current setting. After that, at the timing of t3, the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 763) ends as shown in FIG. 770 (b). In this case, the return command at the time of confirmation is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the sound light CPU 353, and the post-confirmation notification table 521 is transmitted from the sound light ROM 354 at the timing t3 as shown in FIG. 770 (d). It is read out and written in the first execution area 531 of the sound-light side RAM 355. Thus, at the timing of the t3, the notification after confirmation is started by the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 as shown in FIG. 770 (f). The manager of the gaming hall can confirm the situation after the setting value is confirmed by confirming the notification after the confirmation.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 770 (a), the gaming machine main body 12 is changed from the open state to the closed state. In this case, by transmitting the main body closing command from the main CPU 63 to the sound light side CPU 353, the main body closing notification table 524 is read from the sound light side ROM 354 as shown in FIG. Then, it is written to the third execution area 533 of the sound-light side RAM 355. However, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 770 (f), the post-confirmation notification table 521 is still set in the first execution area 531 where the priority of the notification execution is high, as shown in FIG. 770 (d). Thus, the notification is continued after the confirmation, and the main body closing notification is not started as shown in FIG. 770 (h). On the other hand, even if the post-confirmation notification table 521 is set in the first execution area 531 where the priority of the notification execution is high, the pointer information of the reference target in the main body closing notification table 524 set in the third execution area 533 is set. Is updated each time the update timing comes.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t5, 30 seconds, which is the notification period of the notification after confirmation, elapses from the timing of t3. Therefore, at the timing of the time t5, the post-confirmation notification table 521 is deleted from the first execution area 531 as shown in FIG. 770 (d), and the post-confirmation notification is accordingly transmitted as shown in FIG. 770 (f). Will be terminated. At the timing of t5, since the notification period of the main body closing notification has not passed since the timing of t4, 33 seconds, the main body closing notification table 524 is stored in the third execution area 533 as shown in FIG. 770 (e). The set state is maintained. Accordingly, the main body closing notification is started at the timing of t5 as shown in FIG. 770 (h).

  The actual notification period of the main body closing notification is a period from the notification period of the main body closing notification (33 seconds) defined by the main body closing notification table 524 (33 seconds), in which the execution of the notification is suspended by the execution of the post-confirmation notification ( The period from the timing t4 to the timing t5) is obtained. The pointer information to be referred to in the main body closing notification table 524 set in the third execution area 533 is updated each time the update timing is reached even during the period from the timing t4 to the timing t5. Accordingly, by starting the execution control of the main body closing notification from the pointer information to be referred to at the timing of t5, the actual notification period of the main body closing notification naturally becomes the remaining period described above.

  At the timing of t6, a notification period of the main body closing notification of 33 seconds elapses from the timing of t4. Accordingly, the main body closing notification table 524 is deleted from the third execution area 533 as shown in FIG. 770 (e) at the timing of the time t6, and the main body closing notification is accordingly made as shown in FIG. 770 (h). Will be terminated.

  Here, when the processing for setting confirmation (FIG. 763) is executed, the main body 12 of the gaming machine changes from the open state to the closed state after the processing for setting confirmation (FIG. 763) ends. Therefore, after the confirmation notification table 521 is set in the first execution area 531, the main body closing notification table 524 is set in the third execution area 533. Therefore, the event that the post-confirmation notification starts immediately after the main body closing notification starts first does not occur.

  In addition, the notification period set in the main body closing notification table 524 having the lower notification execution priority is set in the post-confirmation notification table 521 having the higher notification execution priority. The period is longer than the notification period. After the confirmation notification table 521 is set in the first execution area 531 as described above, the main body closing notification table 524 is set in the third execution area 533. This makes it possible to execute the main body closing notification after the completion of the post-confirmation notification.

  When the main body closing notification is performed after the execution of the post-confirmation notification, the actual execution period of the main body closing notification is the main body closing notification notification period (33 seconds) determined by the main body closing notification table 524. Thus, the remaining period is obtained by subtracting the period in which the execution of the notification is suspended by the execution of the notification after confirmation (the period from timing t4 to timing t5). This makes it possible to prevent the total notification period of the post-confirmation notification and the main body closing notification from becoming excessively long when the main body closing notification is executed after the completion of the post-confirmation notification.

  Next, a case where the set value updating process (FIG. 764) is executed will be described.

  At time t7, as shown in FIG. 770 (a), when the game machine main body 12 is opened, the setting key insertion portion 68a is exposed to the front of the pachinko machine 10. Then, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on while the exposed setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on by the setting key and the reset button 68c is pressed, the main CPU 63 performs the main processing. (FIG. 762) is started, and the set value update process (FIG. 764) is started at the timing of t8, as shown in FIG. 770 (c). In addition, the main body opening notification for notifying that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state is specified by the opening / closing monitoring processing (FIG. 766) in the main CPU 63 that the gaming machine main body 12 has changed from the closed state to the open state. Therefore, even if the supply of the operating power is started while the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state, the main body opening notification is not executed.

  In the situation where the set value updating process (FIG. 764) is being executed, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 which can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 by opening the gaming machine main body 12 are set. Displays the setting value in the middle of updating. Thereafter, at the timing of t9, the setting value update processing (FIG. 764) ends as shown in FIG. 770 (c). In this case, when the clear completion command is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the sound light CPU 353, the post-clear notification table 522 is read from the sound light ROM 354 at the timing t9 as shown in FIG. 770 (d). Then, it is written to the first execution area 531 of the sound-light side RAM 355. As a result, at the timing of the time t9, as shown in FIG. The manager of the game hall confirms the notification after the clearing, thereby clearing the situation after the setting value update processing (FIG. 764) is performed or the processing of clearing the main RAM 65 without performing the setting value update processing (FIG. 764). It is possible to understand that the situation has been performed.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t10, the gaming machine main body 12 is changed from the open state to the closed state as shown in FIG. 770 (a). In this case, by transmitting the main body closing command from the main CPU 63 to the sound light side CPU 353, the main body closing notification table 524 is read from the sound light side ROM 354 at the timing of t10 as shown in FIG. Then, it is written to the third execution area 533 of the sound-light side RAM 355. However, at the timing of the time t10, the post-clear notification table 522 is still set in the first execution area 531 having a high notification execution priority as shown in FIG. Thus, the notification after clearing is continued, and the main body closing notification is not started as shown in FIG. 770 (h). On the other hand, even if the post-clear notification table 522 is set in the first execution area 531 having a higher notification execution priority, the pointer information of the reference target in the main body closing notification table 524 set in the third execution area 533 is set. Is updated each time the update timing comes.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t11, 30 seconds, which is the notification period of the post-clear notification, elapses from the timing of t9. Therefore, at the timing of the time t11, the post-clear notification table 522 is deleted from the first execution area 531 as shown in FIG. 770 (d), and accordingly, the post-clear notification is made as shown in FIG. 770 (g). Will be terminated. Further, at the timing of t11, since the notification period of the main body closure notification of 33 seconds has not elapsed from the timing of t10, the main body closure notification table 524 is provided in the third execution area 533 as shown in FIG. 770 (e). The set state is maintained. Therefore, the main body closing notification is started at the timing of t11 as shown in FIG. 770 (h).

  The actual notification period of the main body closing notification is a period during which the execution of the notification is suspended by the execution of the post-clearing notification from the main body closing notification notification period (33 seconds) defined by the main body closing notification table 524 ( The period from the timing t10 to the timing t11) is obtained. The update of the pointer information to be referred to in the main body closing notification table 524 set in the third execution area 533 is performed every time the update timing is reached even during the period from timing t10 to timing t11. Accordingly, by starting the execution control of the main body closing notification from the pointer information to be referred to at the timing of t11, the actual notification period of the main body closing notification naturally becomes the remaining period described above.

  At the timing of t12, the notification period of the main body closing notification of 33 seconds elapses from the timing of t10. Accordingly, the main body closing notification table 524 is deleted from the third execution area 533 as shown in FIG. 770 (e) at the timing of the time t12, and the main body closing notification is accordingly made as shown in FIG. 770 (h). Will be terminated.

  Here, when the set value updating process (FIG. 764) is executed, after the set value updating process (FIG. 764) ends, the gaming machine main body 12 changes from the open state to the closed state. Therefore, the main body closing notification table 524 is set in the third execution area 533 after the clearing notification table 522 is set in the first execution area 531. Therefore, an event such that the post-clear notification is started immediately after the main body closing notification is started first does not occur.

  In addition, the notification period set in the main body closing notification table 524 having the lower notification execution priority is set in the post-clear notification table 522 having the higher notification execution priority. The period is longer than the notification period. After the clear notification table 522 is set in the first execution area 531 as described above, the main body closing notification table 524 is set in the third execution area 533. This makes it possible to execute the main body closing notification after the completion of the post-clearing notification.

  When the main body closing notification is performed after the execution of the post-clearing notification, the actual execution period of the main body closing notification is the main body closing notification notification period defined by the main body closing notification table 524 (33 seconds). The remaining period is obtained by subtracting the period in which the execution of the notification is suspended by the execution of the notification after clearing (the period from timing t10 to timing t11). This makes it possible to prevent the total notification period of the post-clearing notification and the main body closing notification from being excessively long when the main body closing notification is continuously performed after the completion of the post-clearing notification.

  Next, the effect control processing executed by the sound-light side CPU 353 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 771. The effect control process is repeatedly executed at a relatively short cycle (for example, 5 milliseconds) when the supply of the operating power to the sound-light side CPU 353 is started.

  If the confirmation start command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step SH101: YES), a setting process of the notification at confirmation is executed (step SH102). The confirmation start command is transmitted to the sound light side CPU 353 when the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 763) is started in the main CPU 63 as described above. In the setting process of notification at the time of confirmation, an image indicating that the process for setting confirmation (FIG. 763) is being executed and an image for enabling recognition of the operation content for ending the process for setting confirmation (FIG. 763) are displayed. The display control device 82 is controlled to be displayed on the symbol display device 41. This allows the manager of the gaming hall to recognize that the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being checked, and is necessary for ending the setting checking process (FIG. 763). It is possible for the manager of the gaming hall to recognize the details of the operation. Note that, in addition to or instead of performing the notification in the symbol display device 41, a configuration may be adopted in which at least one of the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 performs.

  If the update start command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step SH103: YES), the update notification process is executed (step SH104). The update start command is transmitted to the sound-light side CPU 353 when the main CPU 63 starts the set value update process (FIG. 764) as described above. In the setting process of the update notification, an image indicating that the setting value updating process (FIG. 764) is being executed, an image for enabling the user to recognize the operation content for changing the setting value, and a setting value updating process (FIG. 764). The display control device 82 is controlled so that an image for enabling the user to recognize the operation content for ending (FIG. 764) is displayed on the symbol display device 41. This allows the manager of the game hall to recognize that the setting value is being changed, and also provides the operation contents and the setting value update process required for changing the setting value (FIG. 764). Can be recognized by the administrator of the gaming hall. Note that, in addition to or instead of performing the notification in the symbol display device 41, a configuration may be adopted in which at least one of the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 performs.

  When the return command at the time of confirmation has been received from the main CPU 63 (step SH105: YES), the termination processing of the notification at confirmation is executed (step SH106). The return command at the time of confirmation is transmitted to the sound-light side CPU 353 when the main-side CPU 63 terminates the setting confirmation process (FIG. 763) as described above. In the confirmation end process, the notification corresponding to the setting confirmation process (FIG. 763) started in step SH102 is ended. After that, the post-confirmation notification table 521 is read from the sound-light side ROM 354 and written into the first execution area 531 of the sound-light side RAM 355 (step SH107). As a result, notification after confirmation is started by the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54.

  If the clear completion command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step SH108: YES), the update notification end processing is executed (step SH109). As described above, the clear completion command ends when the main CPU 63 ends the set value update process (FIG. 764) or ends the clear process of the main RAM 65 without executing the set value update process (FIG. 764). In this case, it is transmitted to the sound light side CPU 353. In the update notification end process, if the update notification setting process has been executed in step SH104, the setting value update process started in the update notification setting process (FIG. 764). End the corresponding notification. Thereafter, the post-clear notification table 522 is read from the sound-light side ROM 354 and written into the first execution area 531 of the sound-light side RAM 355 (step SH110). As a result, the post-clear notification is started by the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54.

  If the main body opening command or the front door opening command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step SH111: YES), the opening notification tables 523 and 525 corresponding to the opening command received this time are read from the sound light side ROM 354 and sound light is read. The data is written in the second execution area 532 of the side RAM 355 (step SH112). Specifically, when the body opening command is received, the body opening notification table 523 is read from the sound light ROM 354 and written into the second execution area 532 of the sound light RAM 355. If the front door opening command has been received, the front door opening notification table 525 is read from the sound light side ROM 354 and written into the second execution area 532 of the sound light side RAM 355. Accordingly, on the condition that the notification tables 521 and 522 are not set in the first execution area 531, the notification corresponding to the open notification tables 523 and 525 set in the second execution area 532 is displayed and displayed by the display light emitting unit 53. And the speaker unit 54.

  If a main body closing command or a front door closing command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step SH113: YES), the closing notification tables 524 and 526 corresponding to the closing command received this time are read from the sound light side ROM 354 and sound light is read. The data is written into the third execution area 533 of the side RAM 355 (step SH114). Specifically, when the main body closing command is received, the main body closing notification table 524 is read from the sound light side ROM 354 and written into the third execution area 533 of the sound light side RAM 355. If the front door closing command has been received, the front door closing notification table 526 is read from the sound light side ROM 354 and written into the third execution area 533 of the sound light side RAM 355. Accordingly, on condition that the notification tables 521 and 522 are not set in the first execution area 531 and that the notification tables 523 and 525 are not set in the second execution area 532, the third execution area 533 is Notification corresponding to the set closing notification tables 524 and 526 is started by the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54.

  In the effect control process, in addition to the above processes, other processes are executed in step SH115, and a task process is executed in step SH116. In other processes, when a command to start a game effect is received from the main CPU 63, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 start the game effect. If the setting is made and the effect for the game play is to be advanced, the settings for making the effect for the game play proceed with the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 are made. If it is a situation to end the effect for the game, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 are set to end the effect for the game. In other processes, when a command to start the opening / closing execution mode effect is received from the main CPU 63, the opening / closing execution mode effect is performed by the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting section 53, and the speaker section 54. When the setting for starting is performed and the effect for the open / close execution mode is to be advanced, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 are used to advance the effect for the open / close execution mode. When the setting is performed and the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is to be ended, the setting for ending the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is performed by the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54.

  When the various effects are executed, the effect execution table referred to for executing the effect is read to the effect execution area 534 provided in the sound-light side RAM 355 (see FIG. 767). The effect execution area 534 is set as an area having a lower execution priority than the first execution area 531, the second execution area 532, and the third execution area 533. Therefore, in a situation where the effect corresponding to the effect execution table set in the effect execution area 534 is being executed by the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54, the first execution area 531, the second execution area 532, and the third When the notification tables 521 to 526 are set in any of the execution areas 533, the display corresponding to the notification tables 521 to 526 is executed in the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 in preference to the effect. Is done.

  On the other hand, the effect corresponding to the effect execution table set in the effect execution area 534 is also performed on the symbol display device 41, and the display effect on the symbol display device 41 is the notification corresponding to the notification tables 521 to 526. It is executed continuously even in a situation where it is executed with priority. Thereby, it is possible to prevent an event that all the effects are stopped from being executed with the execution of the notification corresponding to the notification tables 521 to 526.

  In addition, even in the situation where the notification corresponding to the notification tables 521 to 526 is executed prior to the effect, the pointer information of the reference target in the effect appearance table set in the effect execution area 534 is updated. It is executed every time the update timing comes. Therefore, when the notification that has been executed with priority ends and the execution of the effect on the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 is restarted, the effect corresponding to the display effect at that time on the symbol display device 41 is displayed and emitted. It is possible to restart with the unit 53 and the speaker unit 54.

  Next, the task processing executed in step SH116 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  When the after-confirmation notification table 521 or the after-clear notification table 522 is set in the first execution area 531 (step SH201: YES), a pointer update process of the first execution area 531 is executed (step SH202). In the pointer update process, on the condition that an update cycle of 40 milliseconds has elapsed since the pointer information to be referred to in the notification tables 521 and 522 set in the first execution area 531 was last updated. The pointer information to be referred to in the notification tables 521 and 522 is updated to the next-order pointer information. When the pointer information to be referred to exceeds the last-ordered pointer information in the notification tables 521 and 522 after updating the pointer information, the notification tables 521 and 522 are deleted from the first execution area 531.

  When a negative determination is made in step SH201 or when the process of step SH202 is performed, it is determined whether the main body opening notification table 523 or the front door opening notification table 525 is set in the second execution area 532. (Step SH203). If an affirmative determination is made in step SH203, a pointer update process of the second execution area 532 is executed (step SH204). In the pointer update process, on the condition that an update cycle of 40 milliseconds has elapsed since the pointer information to be referred to in the notification tables 523 and 525 set in the second execution area 532 was last updated. The pointer information to be referred to in the release notification tables 523 and 525 is updated to the next-order pointer information. When the pointer information to be referred to exceeds the last-ordered pointer information in the release notification tables 523 and 525 after updating the pointer information, the pointer information to be referred to is corrected to the first-ordered pointer information. . If the main body opening notification table 523 is set in the second execution area 532 and the main body closing command is received from the main CPU 63, the main body opening notification table 523 is transmitted from the second execution area 532. Is deleted, and if the front door opening notification table 525 is set in the second execution area 532, the front door closing command is received from the main CPU 63, and the front door is closed from the second execution area 532. The release notification table 525 is deleted.

  When a negative determination is made in step SH203 or when the process in step SH204 is performed, it is determined whether the main body closing notification table 524 or the front door closing notification table 526 is set in the third execution area 533. (Step SH205). When an affirmative determination is made in step SH205, a pointer update process of the third execution area 533 is executed (step SH206). In the pointer update process, a condition that an update cycle of 40 milliseconds has elapsed since the last update of the pointer information of the reference target in the closing notification tables 524 and 526 set in the third execution area 533 has been passed. The pointer information to be referred to in the closing notification tables 524 and 526 is updated to the next pointer information. When the pointer information to be referred to exceeds the last pointer information in the closing notification tables 524 and 526 after updating the pointer information, the notification tables 524 and 526 are deleted from the third execution area 533. .

  If a negative determination is made in step SH205 or if the process of step SH206 is performed, it is determined whether or not an effect execution table is set in the effect execution area 534 (step SH207). When an affirmative determination is made in step SH207, a pointer update process of the effect execution area 534 is performed (step SH208). In the pointer update process, the effect is determined on the condition that the update period of 40 milliseconds has elapsed since the pointer information to be referred to in the effect execution table set in the effect execution area 534 was last updated. The pointer information to be referenced in the execution table is updated to the next-order pointer information. If the pointer information to be referred to exceeds the last-ordered pointer information in the effect execution table after updating the pointer information, the effect execution table is deleted from the effect execution area 534.

  If a negative determination is made in step SH207, or if the process in step SH208 is performed, it is determined whether the post-confirmation notification table 521 or the post-clear notification table 522 is set in the first execution area 531 ( Step SH209). If an affirmative determination is made in step SH209, the display light-emitting unit 53 is turned on using the light-emission control data corresponding to the current reference target pointer information in the notification tables 521 and 522 set in the first execution area 531. The light emission is controlled, and the sound output of the speaker unit 54 is controlled using the sound output control data corresponding to the pointer information of the reference target (step SH210). After executing the processing of step SH210, the present task processing ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step SH209, it is determined whether the main body opening notification table 523 or the front door opening notification table 525 is set in the second execution area 532 (step SH211). If an affirmative determination is made in step SH211, the display light-emitting unit 53 is turned on using the light-emission control data corresponding to the current pointer information of the reference target in the notification tables 523 and 525 set in the second execution area 532. The light emission is controlled and the sound output of the speaker unit 54 is controlled using the sound output control data corresponding to the pointer information of the reference target (step SH212). After executing the processing in step SH212, the present task processing ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step SH211, it is determined whether the main body closing notification table 524 or the front door closing notification table 526 is set in the third execution area 533 (step SH213). If an affirmative determination is made in step SH213, the display light-emitting unit 53 is turned on using the light-emission control data corresponding to the current reference target pointer information in the notification tables 524 and 526 set in the third execution area 533. The light emission control is performed and the sound output of the speaker unit 54 is controlled using the sound output control data corresponding to the pointer information of the reference target (step SH214). After executing the processing in step SH214, the present task processing ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step SH213, it is determined whether an effect execution area is set in the effect execution area 534 (step SH215). If an affirmative determination is made in step SH215, the display light emitting unit 53 is controlled to emit light using the light emission control data corresponding to the current pointer information of the reference target in the effect execution table set in the effect execution area 534. At the same time, the sound output of the speaker unit 54 is controlled using the sound output control data corresponding to the pointer information of the reference target (step SH216). When a negative determination is made in step SH215 or after the processing in step SH216 is performed, the task processing ends.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  When the set value update processing (FIG. 764) is executed, the RAM clear processing (FIG. 765) is executed, and the initialization of each of the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 is performed. The area is initialized. Thus, when the set value update processing (FIG. 764) is executed, it is possible to start the game in a state where the area to be initialized has been initialized. Even when the initialization target area is initialized as described above, the setting reference area 341 in which the information of the current setting value is stored is excluded from the initialization target. This makes it possible to start the game in a situation where the area to be initialized has been initialized when the set value updating process (FIG. 764) is executed while keeping the set value from fluctuating. .

  When the set value update processing (FIG. 764) is executed and the RAM clear processing (FIG. 765) is executed, a clear completion command is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the sound light CPU 353, so that the post-clear notification is executed. You. The manager of the gaming hall can confirm that the post-clear notification has been executed, so that it is possible to know that the RAM clear processing (FIG. 765) has been executed, and to update the set value (FIG. 764). Can be grasped that the execution may have been performed.

  Since the notification after the clearing is executed by the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54, the administrator of the gaming hall can check the notification after the clearing without having to open the gaming machine body 12. Therefore, it becomes easier for the manager of the gaming hall to grasp that the RAM clear processing (FIG. 765) has been executed and also to grasp that the set value update processing (FIG. 764) may have been executed.

  Since the notification after clearing is executed until 30 seconds elapse after the setting value update process (FIG. 764) is executed, it becomes easier for the manager of the gaming hall to recognize that the notification after clearing is being executed.

  Since the process for proceeding with the game is executed even in the situation where the post-clear notification is being executed, it is possible to execute the post-clear notification while not hindering the progress of the game.

  If the power-on operation is performed while pressing the reset button 68c even when the setting key insertion section 68a is not turned on, the RAM is reset in a state where the setting value update process (FIG. 764) is not executed. The clear processing (FIG. 765) is executed. In this case, the RAM clear processing (FIG. 765) is executed in the case where the RAM clear processing (FIG. 765) is executed in the set value update processing (FIG. 764) and in the situation where the set value update processing (FIG. 764) is not executed. In any case, by calling the same subroutine, the initialization target areas of the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 are initialized, and the post-clear notification is executed. A process is performed to cause the error. This makes it possible to execute processing for initializing the area to be initialized and processing for executing post-clear notification in each of the above situations, while simplifying the processing configuration.

  In the configuration in which the setting value update process (FIG. 764) is executed by turning on the power while the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on while the reset button 68c is pressed while the gaming machine main body 12 is opened, The main body closing notification is executed based on the game machine main body 12 being changed from the open state to the closed state. Thus, after the gaming machine main body 12 is opened to illegally execute the set value updating process (FIG. 764), the gaming machine main body 12 does not actually perform the setting value updating process (FIG. 764) without illegally executing the setting value updating process (FIG. 764). Even in the case of the closed state, the main body closing notification is executed after the closed state, so that the manager of the gaming hall can grasp the presence or absence of the illegal act.

  The post-clear notification has a higher execution priority than the main body closing notification. Thus, it is possible to notify directly whether or not the set value update process (FIG. 764) has been performed, while enabling to notify whether or not the gaming machine body 12 has been changed from the open state to the closed state. Become.

  When the execution of the main body closing notification is not hindered due to the priority of the notification execution, in the configuration where the main body 12 is executed for 33 seconds after the gaming machine main body is in the closed state, the notification after the clearing is larger than the main body closing notification. If the post-clearing notification ends prior to the elapse of 33 seconds after the gaming machine body 12 is closed, the post-clearing notification is executed over the remaining 33 seconds. Is done. Thus, in a configuration in which the post-clearing notification has a higher execution priority than the main body closing notification, it is possible to execute the main body closing notification after the post-clearing notification ends. Even if the main body closing notification is executed after the post-clearing notification ends, the execution period is required until the post-clearing notification ends after the gaming machine main body 12 is closed. The remaining period is obtained by subtracting the period from 33 seconds. This makes it possible to prevent the total execution period of the notification from being excessively long when the main body closing notification is executed after the end of the post-clearing notification.

  The execution period of the main body closing notification is set to be longer than the execution period of the post-clear notification. Accordingly, even when the post-clearing notification is executed prior to the main body closing notification, it is possible to secure the execution period of the main body closing notification after the end of the post-clearing notification.

  When the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 763) is executed, the confirmation notification is transmitted by transmitting a confirmation return command from the main CPU 63 to the sound light CPU 353. The administrator of the game hall can confirm that the setting confirmation process (FIG. 763) has been executed by confirming that the notification has been executed after the confirmation.

  Since the notification after confirmation is executed by the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54, the administrator of the gaming hall can confirm the notification after confirmation without the need to open the gaming machine body 12. Therefore, it becomes easy for the manager of the gaming hall to recognize that the setting confirmation process (FIG. 763) has been executed.

  Since the notification after confirmation is executed until 30 seconds elapse after the processing for setting confirmation (FIG. 763) is executed, it becomes easier for the manager of the gaming hall to recognize that the notification after confirmation is being executed.

  Since the process for advancing the game is executed even in the situation where the post-confirmation notification is being executed, the post-confirmation notification can be executed without hindering the progress of the game.

  In a configuration in which the setting confirmation process (FIG. 763) is executed by turning on the power while the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on with the gaming machine main body 12 being in the open state, the gaming machine main body 12 is changed from the open state. The main body closing notification is executed based on the closed state. Thus, after the gaming machine main body 12 is opened to illegally execute the setting confirmation process (FIG. 763), the gaming machine main body 12 does not actually execute the setting confirmation process (FIG. 763). Even in the case of the closed state, the main body closing notification is executed after the closed state, so that the manager of the gaming hall can grasp the presence or absence of the illegal act.

  The execution priority of the notification after confirmation is set higher than that of the body closing notification. This makes it possible to directly notify that the setting confirmation process (FIG. 763) has been executed, while making it possible to inform whether or not the gaming machine body 12 has been changed from the open state to the closed state. .

  In the configuration in which the main body closing notification is executed for 33 seconds after the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closed state when the execution is not hindered due to the priority of the notification execution, the notification after confirmation is performed more than the main body closing notification. In the case where the notification is executed with priority and the notification after confirmation ends before 33 seconds elapse after the gaming machine body 12 is closed, the notification after confirmation is executed over the remaining period of the 33 seconds. Is done. Thus, in a configuration in which the post-confirmation notification has a higher execution priority than the main body closure notification, it is possible to execute the main body closure notification after the post-confirmation notification ends. Even if the main body closing notification is executed after the post-confirmation notification is completed, the execution period is required until the post-confirmation notification ends after the gaming machine main body 12 is closed. The remaining period is obtained by subtracting the period from 33 seconds. This makes it possible to prevent the total execution period of the notification from being excessively long when the main body closing notification is executed after the end of the notification after confirmation.

  The execution period of the main body closing notification is set to be longer than the execution period of the notification after confirmation. Thereby, even when the post-confirmation notification is executed prior to the main body closing notification, the execution period of the main body closing notification can be secured after the post-confirmation notification ends.

  Note that the configuration may be such that the RAM clearing process (FIG. 765) is also executed when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 763) is executed. In this case, when the setting value is confirmed and the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned off, the RAM clear processing (FIG. 765) is executed, thereby excluding the setting reference area 341 in the work area 221 for specific control. Are initialized, the stack area 222 for specific control is initialized, and a clear completion command is transmitted, so that the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 perform post-clear notification. In this configuration, the notification after confirmation is not executed because the notification after clearing is executed. In other words, in this configuration, a common notification is performed regardless of whether the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 763), the setting value update processing (FIG. 764), or the RAM clear processing (FIG. 765) is performed. Becomes

  In addition, a common post-clear notification is performed regardless of whether the set value update processing (FIG. 764) is executed or the RAM clear processing (FIG. 765) is executed alone. The present invention is not limited to this, and a different notification may be executed when the set value update process (FIG. 764) is executed and when the RAM clear process (FIG. 765) is executed.

  Further, the notification period of the main body closing notification is not limited to 33 seconds, and may be a period longer than 33 seconds or a period shorter than 33 seconds. Further, the notification period of the main body closing notification is not limited to a configuration longer than 30 seconds, which is the notification period of the notification after confirmation and the notification after clearing. The configuration may be the same as the notification period of the subsequent notification, or the configuration may be such that the notification period of the main body closing notification is shorter than the notification period of the notification after confirmation and the notification after clearing.

  Further, the notification period of the main body opening notification is not limited to the configuration in which the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state until the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closed state, and is set in advance after the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state. Alternatively, the body opening notification may be performed over a fixed period. In this case, the notification execution priority of the notification after confirmation and the notification after clearing is set higher than the notification of opening of the main body. If it remains, the main body opening notification is executed over the remaining period.

  When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the gaming machine body 12 is open, the pachinko machine 10 is opened while the gaming machine body 12 is opened. The main body opening notification may be performed even when the power ON operation is performed. In this case, even when the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 763) and the setting value update processing (FIG. 764) are being executed, the execution of the body opening notification by the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 is continued. Becomes Further, when it becomes a situation to execute the notification after confirmation or the notification after clearing, the main body opening notification is terminated due to the priority of the notification execution. If the gaming machine main body 12 is closed in a state where the notification after confirmation or the notification after clearing is being executed, the main body opening notification is not executed as it is. In this case, after the notification after confirmation or the notification after clearing ends, the main body closing notification is executed over the remaining period of the execution period of the main body closing notification. On the other hand, if the gaming machine main body 12 is not closed in a situation where the post-confirmation notification or the post-clear notification is being executed, the main body opening notification is restarted after the post-confirmation notification or the post-clear notification is completed.

  Further, in the setting value update process (FIG. 764), the RAM clear process (FIG. 765) is executed instead of the initial setting at the start (step SG703), so that the RAM clear process (FIG. 765) is not executed in step SG713. It may be. In this case, a clear completion command may be transmitted in the RAM clear processing (FIG. 765). In the RAM clear processing (FIG. 765), the clear complete command is not transmitted, and instead, in step SG708. A clear completion command may be transmitted after making a positive determination.

  When a return command for confirmation is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the sound light CPU 353, an external output corresponding to the execution of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 763) is sent to the management computer of the game hall. It is good also as a structure performed. Further, when a clear completion command is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the sound light CPU 353, an external output corresponding to the execution of the RAM clear processing (FIG. 765) is sent to the management computer of the game hall. It may be.

<Other embodiments>
The present invention is not limited to the description of the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, it may be changed as follows. Incidentally, the following different configurations may be individually applied to the configuration of the above embodiment, or may be applied in combination.

  (1) In the above-described thirty-third to forty-sixth embodiments, the number of occurrences of the opening / closing execution mode per unit game is calculated as the parameter indicating the frequency of occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode. In addition to or instead of this, Alternatively, the result of dividing the number of occurrences of the open / close execution mode by the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA may be calculated. Further, in addition to or instead of this, a configuration in which the number of times of the open / close execution mode is divided by the total number of the number of balls entering the first operating port 33 and the number of balls entering the second operating port 34 is calculated. It may be. In addition, the configuration may be applied to the 47th to 106th embodiments.

  (2) In the thirty-third to forty-sixth embodiments, as the parameter indicating the frequency of occurrence of the high-frequency support mode, the number of occurrences of the high-frequency support mode per unit game and the number of occurrences of the open / close execution mode Although the ratio of the number of occurrences is calculated, in addition to or instead of this, the result of dividing the number of occurrences of the high-frequency support mode by the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA may be calculated. . In addition to or instead of this, a result of dividing the number of occurrences of the high frequency support mode by the total number of the number of balls entering the first operation port 33 and the number of balls entering the second operation port 34 is calculated. It may be configured. In addition, the configuration may be applied to the 47th to 106th embodiments.

  (3) As a game result that triggers the opening / closing execution mode, not only the big hit result but also a small hit result may be provided. When the small hitting result is obtained, the open / close execution mode is generated, but the win / fail lottery mode and the support mode are not changed before and after the open / close execution mode. In addition, in the opening / closing execution mode in which the small hit results, the low frequency winning mode may be adopted. In this case, when a big hit result occurs, history information corresponding to the occurrence of the big hit result is stored in the history memory 117, and when a small hit result occurs, the history information corresponding to the occurrence of the small hit result is stored in the history. May be stored in the memory 117 for use. In this configuration, a parameter indicating the frequency of occurrence of the big hit result and a parameter indicating the frequency of occurrence of the small hit result may be calculated by using the history information stored in the history memory 117. In addition, the configuration may be applied to the 47th to 106th embodiments.

  In addition, a configuration in which the probability of winning the small hit result may be changed according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 or a configuration in which the probability does not change may be used. In the case of a configuration in which the probability of winning the small hit result changes according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the higher the set value, the higher the probability of winning the small hit result, and the higher the set value, the smaller the hit result. It is good also as a structure with a low probability.

  Further, in a configuration in which a small hit result exists, the hold information obtained when a game ball enters the first operation port 33 and the hold information obtained when a game ball enters the second operation port 34. In the case where the jackpot result is obtained with the hold information, the distribution ratio of the type of the jackpot result is different, and when aiming for the ball to enter the first operating port 33, the variable display unit 36 in the gaming area PA. Also, the shooting operation is performed so that the game ball flows down the left area, and when aiming to enter the second operating port 34, the game ball flows down the area to the right of the variable display unit 36 in the game area PA. And a configuration in which a small hitting result may be generated based on the hold information acquired when a game ball enters the first operating port 33.

In this configuration, the following fifty-first parameter may be present as a management result of the game history. Note that the normal period is a period obtained by adding the execution period of the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the small hit result based on the ball entering the first operating port 33 and the execution period of the low frequency support mode instead of the opening / closing execution mode. I do. Further, the number of balls entering the out-opening 24a during the normal period is referred to as the number of entered balls K51, and the number of balls entering the general winning opening 31 during the normal period is referred to as the number of entered balls K52. The number of entered balls is K53, the number of entered balls into the first operation port 33 during the normal period is K54, and the number of entered balls into the second operation port 34 during the normal period is K55.
The fifty-first parameter: the total number of game balls to be paid out during the normal period (K52 × “the number of prize balls for winning into the general winning opening 31” + K53 × “the number of prize balls for winning to the special electric prize device 32” + K54 × “first (The number of prize balls for winning in the operating port 33) + K55 × “the number of prize balls for winning in the second operating port 34”) / the ratio of the total number of game balls (K51 + K52 + K53 + K54 + K55) discharged from the game area PA during the normal period. In the configuration in which the 51st parameter is calculated, if the winning probability of the small hit result varies according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the normal value of the 51st parameter may vary according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. Becomes Therefore, it is preferable that the history information used for calculating the 51st parameter be deleted when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed. On the other hand, when the winning probability of the small hit result does not change according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the normal value of the 51st parameter does not change according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, it is preferable that the history information used to calculate the fifty-first parameter is not deleted even if the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed.

  (4) In the above thirty-third to forty-sixth embodiments, the history information corresponding to the occurrence of the open / close execution mode is stored in the history memory 117 regardless of the type of the jackpot result. Alternatively, the history information corresponding to the type of the jackpot result may be stored in the history memory 117. In this case, a configuration may be employed in which a parameter indicating the occurrence frequency is calculated for each type of the jackpot result. In addition, the configuration may be applied to the 47th to 106th embodiments.

  (5) In the 33rd to 46th embodiments, various parameters (first to eighth parameters, 11th to 18th parameters, 21st to 26th parameters, 31st parameters, and 41st to 42nd parameters are periodically updated). ) Is calculated, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA becomes the number of calculation triggers (for example, 10,000), various parameters are calculated. The configuration may be such that various parameters are calculated when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and the number of executions of the game becomes the number of calculation triggers (for example, 1000). May be configured to calculate various parameters. In this case, the configuration may be such that the history memory 117 is cleared to “0” at the timing when various parameters are calculated. In addition, the configuration may be applied to the 47th to 106th embodiments.

  (6) In the thirty-third to forty-sixth embodiments, the first to eighth parameters, the eleventh to eighteenth parameters, the twenty-first to twenty-sixth parameters, the thirty-first parameters, and the forty-first parameters each time the various parameters are calculated. Although the configuration is made such that all of the to the forty-second parameters are calculated, the present invention is not limited to this. At one calculation timing, only a part of the above various parameters becomes a calculation target, and every time the calculation timing is reached. The configuration may be such that the parameter groups to be operated are sequentially changed. For example, the first to eighth parameters are calculated at one calculation timing, the 11th to 18th parameters are calculated at the next calculation timing, the 21st to 26th parameters are calculated at the next calculation timing, and the next calculation is performed. At the timing, the 31st parameter and the 41st to 42nd parameters are calculated, and thereafter, the change of the calculation target in the above order may be repeated every time the calculation timing comes. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for calculating parameters when one calculation timing comes. In addition, the configuration may be applied to the 47th to 106th embodiments.

  (7) In the above-mentioned thirty-third to forty-sixth embodiments, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the calculation of various parameters using the history information of the history memory 117 is executed on condition that the game is being played. For example, the configuration may be such that calculation of various parameters is executed on condition that game balls are supplied to the game area PA. This makes it possible to prevent the calculation of various parameters from being uselessly repeated even when the game is not performed. In addition, the configuration may be applied to the 47th to 106th embodiments.

  (8) In the above thirty-third to forty-sixth embodiments, the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the management IC 66 is provided separately from the main CPU 63, and the function of the management IC 66 is performed by the main CPU 63. It may be. In this case, the correspondence information is stored in the main ROM 64 in advance. In addition, a history memory 117, a calculation result memory 131, and a separate storage memory 171 may be provided separately from the main RAM 65. In the main RAM 65, the history memory 117, the calculation result memory 131, and the The function of the storage memory 171 may be performed. In a configuration in which the functions of the history memory 117, the operation result memory 131, and the separate storage memory 171 are performed in the main RAM 65, when the main RAM 65 is cleared (step S <b> 105 and step S <b> 117), the history Some or all of the areas corresponding to the memory 117, the operation result memory 131, and the separate storage memory 171 may be cleared to "0", and the history memory 117, the operation result memory 131, and the separate storage The area corresponding to each of the memory 171 may be excluded from the target of “0” clear, and may be cleared to “0” when the corresponding clear condition in each of the above embodiments is satisfied. In the main RAM 65, an area corresponding to each of the history memory 117, the calculation result memory 131, and the separate storage memory 171 may be configured to have different manual operation contents for executing the clearing process between the other areas. Good. Further, the function of the management IC 66 may be performed by the sound emission control device 81.

  (9) In the above-described thirty-third to forty-sixth embodiments, when a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the history information in the history memory 117 is stored without being erased, while the calculation result is obtained. The configuration may be such that various parameters stored in the memory 131 are deleted. Thus, after a new setting of the setting state is performed, it is possible to prevent notification of various parameters calculated before the setting is performed. In addition, the configuration may be applied to the 47th to 106th embodiments.

  (10) In the above-described thirty-fifth to thirty-seventh embodiments, even if a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed (that is, even if the main CPU 63 executes the setting value updating process), the setting is not changed. If the set value has not been changed before and after, the clearing process of the history memory 117 may not be executed. This makes it possible to prevent the history information in the history memory 117 from being erased even though the set value has not been changed.

  In the present configuration, the area for storing the set values in the main RAM 65 is excluded from the target of “0” clear even if all clear processing (step S117) is executed, so that the set value update processing ( The main CPU 63 can specify whether or not the set value has been changed before and after step S118). In this case, when the main CPU 63 specifies that the set value has not been changed, a signal is output to the management CPU 112 so that the setting update recognition process is not executed by the management CPU 112, and the main CPU 63 When it is specified that the setting value has been changed in step (1), a signal may be output to the management-side CPU 112 so that the management-side CPU 112 executes the setting update recognition process.

  Further, when a signal indicating that a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been performed is received from the main CPU 63, the management CPU 112 refers to the history information stored in the history memory 117. It may be configured to specify whether or not the set value has been changed. In this case, when the management CPU 112 specifies that the set value has not been changed, the clear processing of the history memory 117 is not executed, and the management CPU 112 specifies that the set value has been changed. In this case, it is possible to execute the clearing process of the history memory 117.

  (11) In the above-described thirty-fifth to thirty-seventh embodiments, even if a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed (that is, even if the main CPU 63 executes the setting value update processing), the setting is not changed. If the set value is not changed before and after the above, the calculation processing of various parameters triggered by the new setting of the setting state may not be executed. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent various parameters from being calculated in response to a new setting of the setting state even though the setting value has not been changed.

  In the present configuration, the area for storing the set values in the main RAM 65 is excluded from the target of “0” clear even if all clear processing (step S117) is executed, so that the set value update processing ( The main CPU 63 can specify whether or not the set value has been changed before and after step S118). In this case, when the main CPU 63 specifies that the set value has not been changed, a signal is output to the management CPU 112 so that the setting update recognition process is not executed by the management CPU 112, and the main CPU 63 When it is specified that the setting value has been changed in step (1), a signal may be output to the management-side CPU 112 so that the management-side CPU 112 executes the setting update recognition process.

  Further, when a signal indicating that a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been performed is received from the main CPU 63, the management CPU 112 refers to the history information stored in the history memory 117. It may be configured to specify whether or not the set value has been changed. In this case, if the management CPU 112 specifies that the set value has not been changed, the calculation of various parameters triggered by the new setting of the current setting state is not executed, and the management CPU 112 sets the parameter. When it is determined that the value has been changed, it is possible to execute the calculation of various parameters triggered by the new setting of the current setting state.

  (12) In the thirty-fifth to thirty-seventh embodiments, when a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, various parameters are not calculated in various calculation processes (step S1807) at that time. The various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131 at that time are stored in the storage target area of the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 of the separate storage memory 171 and the calculation result is stored. The information stored in the memory 131 may be cleared to “0”. In this case, since it is not necessary to calculate various parameters under the situation where the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the storage of various parameters in the separate storage memory 171 can be completed early. Become.

  (13) In the thirty-fifth to thirty-seventh embodiments, the contents of the various parameters stored in the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 of the separate storage memory 171 may be changed by performing a predetermined display start operation. The display may be displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c or another display device. The predetermined display start operation may be performed by operating a dedicated operation unit, or a predetermined dedicated operation may be performed on an operation unit for performing another operation. Thus, various parameters stored in the separate storage memory 171 can be easily checked.

  (14) Although the out port 24a, the general prize port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operation port 33, and the second operation port 34 are all configured to store the history information (or the ball entry history). The configuration is such that only part of the out opening 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special winning winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34 is a storage target of the history information. It may be. For example, only the general winning opening 31, the special power winning device 32, and the second operating port 34 may be configured to store history information, and only the general winning opening 31 may be configured to store history information. Good. Even in this case, it is possible to grasp the entering state of the game ball in a predetermined period for the entering part for which the history information is stored.

  (15) A signal path for transmitting information corresponding to a ball entry result of a game ball in correspondence with each of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, and the third winning opening detection sensor 44a. Although the configuration is such that 118a to 118c are set, the present invention is not limited to this, and the information corresponding to the ball entry result for the same type of ball entry unit includes a plurality of the same type of ball entry unit. Even if there is a configuration in which a plurality of ball entry detection sensors exist in accordance therewith, the configuration may be such that the information is transmitted as one type of information. As a result, the number of types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 can be reduced.

  (16) In the above thirty-third to forty-sixth embodiments, the correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the type of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and each of the buffers 122a to 122o is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the correspondence information may be stored in the management IC 66 in advance. In this case, there is no need to execute a process for causing the management IC 66 to recognize the correspondence information, so that the processing load on the main CPU 63 can be reduced.

  (17) In the above thirty-third to forty-sixth embodiments, the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 of the correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the type of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and each of the buffers 122a to 122o. Is transmitted when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the main CPU 63 and the management IC 66 can perform bidirectional communication, and the management IC 66 When receiving a signal requesting transmission of the correspondence information from, the main CPU 63 may transmit the correspondence information to the management IC 66. In this case, the correspondence memory 116 is provided as a non-volatile memory and is used for both reading and writing. After the pachinko machine 10 is shipped, the correspondence information provided from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 is transmitted to the main CPU 63. Even when the supply of the operating power is stopped, the power is stored and held in the correspondence memory 116. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the frequency of transmitting the correspondence information.

  (18) In the thirty-third to forty-sixth embodiments, from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 of correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the type of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and each of the buffers 122a to 122o. Is transmitted using the signal paths 118a to 118g for transmitting the information of the detection results of each of the incoming ball detection sensors 42a to 48a, but the present invention is not limited to this. , A dedicated signal path for transmitting from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 may be provided. This allows the management IC 66 to know which type of information is being received from the main CPU 63 based on the types of the buffers 122a to 122o that receive that information.

  (19) In the 33rd to 46th embodiments, the information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66, but the information is not transmitted from the management IC 66 to the main CPU 63. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the information may be transmitted from the management IC 66 to the main CPU 63. For example, various parameters calculated by the management CPU 112 based on the history information may be transmitted to the main CPU 63. In this case, the main CPU 63 may be configured to directly execute the notification control of the notifying means so that the notification corresponding to the contents of the received various parameters is performed. By transmitting a command corresponding to the content of the parameter to the audio light emission control device 81, the notification corresponding to the content of the various parameters is executed using the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54. It is good also as composition which performs.

  (20) In the above-described thirty-third to forty-sixth embodiments, when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the main CPU 63 or the management CPU 112 performs the operations based on the history information stored in the history memory 117. Various parameters may be calculated, and the contents of the calculated various parameters may be notified using the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, the speaker unit 54, and the like. In this case, it is possible to confirm whether or not the entering state of the game balls in the game area PA on the immediately preceding business day at the start of the operation of the game hall is normal. In addition, the configuration may be applied to the 47th to 106th embodiments.

  (21) In the above-described thirty-third to forty-sixth embodiments, if various parameters calculated based on the history information stored in the history memory 117 are abnormal results, the pachinko machine 10 will continue to operate until the prohibition release operation is performed. May not be able to start the game. As a configuration in which the game cannot be started, for example, a configuration in which launching of a game ball may be prohibited or a configuration in which each of the incoming ball detection sensors 42a to 49a may be invalidated may be employed. Even if a prize occurs in the 33 or the second operation port 34, the winning / non-permission determination processing may not be performed. The prohibition releasing operation may be an operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 again while the reset button 68c is pressed, and can be operated when the gaming machine main body 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11. The operation of the operation means may be performed. This makes it possible to prevent the game from being played as it is in a situation where the entering state of the game ball in the game area PA is abnormal. Further, it is possible to prevent the game from being played as it is in a situation where the frequency of occurrence of the open / close execution mode is abnormal. In addition, the configuration may be applied to the 47th to 106th embodiments.

  (22) In the above-described thirty-third to forty-sixth embodiments, although the history information corresponding to the detection results of the incoming ball detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored in the history memory 117, the calculation of various parameters using the history information is mainly performed. The configuration may be such that it is not executed by any of the side CPU 63 and the management side CPU 112. In this case, the history information may be read by an external device electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d, and the operator of the reading operation may execute the calculation of various parameters using the read history information. Alternatively, the external device may be configured to execute calculation of various parameters using the read history information. In this case, the processing load on the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 can be reduced. In addition, the configuration may be applied to the 47th to 106th embodiments.

  (23) In the above-described thirty-third to forty-sixth embodiments, the management IC 66 is provided with a power supply separate from the main CPU 63, and even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the management IC 66 The configuration may be such that calculation of various parameters using the history information and information output of the history information or the various parameters can be performed. As a result, even when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the history information and various parameters can be read by the external device.

  (24) In the thirty-third to forty-sixth embodiments, the reading terminal 68d used for reading a program from the main ROM 64 is also used as a terminal used for reading history information or various parameters by an external device. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a terminal used for reading history information or various parameters by an external device is provided separately from a reading terminal 68d for reading a program from the main ROM 64. It is good also as a structure provided. In this case, the terminal used to read the history information or various parameters may be provided in the MPU 62 or may be provided in a position different from the MPU 62 on the main control board 61.

  (25) In the above thirty-third to forty-sixth embodiments, the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the correspondence memory 116, the history memory 117, and the operation result memory 131 are provided as nonvolatile storage means such as a flash memory. For example, any of the memories 116, 117, and 131 is provided as a volatile storage unit that requires power supply for storing and holding information, and the backup power is supplied to the memory, so that the main CPU 63 Information may be stored and held even when the supply of operating power to the power supply is stopped. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which a dedicated backup power device is provided for the memory, and a configuration is such that backup power is supplied to the memory from a power supply / emission control device 78 that supplies backup power to the main RAM 65. Is also good.

  (26) In the above-described thirty-third to forty-sixth embodiments, the management IC 66 includes the management-side CPU 112 as a general-purpose CPU, and executes storage processing of history information and arithmetic processing of various parameters based on programs and data stored in the management-side ROM 113. The configuration is not limited to this, and a configuration in which a hardware circuit designed to have these functions is formed in the management IC 66 may be employed. Specifically, for example, in the case of the thirty-third embodiment, when the hardware circuit receives a signal indicating that a game ball has been detected by any of the detection sensors 42a to 48a from the main CPU 63, The correspondence information corresponding to the buffer that has received the signal is stored from the correspondence memory 116 to the history memory 117, and the information of the RTC 115 at that time is stored in the history memory 117. . For example, in the case of the thirty-eighth embodiment, when the hardware circuit receives a signal indicating that a game ball has been detected by any of the detection sensors 42 a to 48 a from the main CPU 63, the hardware circuit receives the signal. Is incremented by one. Further, the hardware circuit calculates various parameters by using the history information at that time when a calculation trigger occurs in the thirty-third embodiment or the like. Further, when an external output trigger to the reading terminal 68d occurs, the hardware circuit externally outputs various parameters as operation results and history information.

  (27) In the above thirty-third to forty-sixth embodiments, the main CPU 63 and the management IC 66 may be provided as separate chips, or may be provided as separate boards, and may be provided as separate control devices. It is good also as a structure provided.

  (28) While the number of game balls entering the out port 24a is counted, the number of the game balls, such as the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34, is counted. History information including RTC information may be stored with respect to the entry of the ball into the bonus opportunity entry section which is the trigger of the prize ball payout or the winning / failing determination process. With this, it is possible to calculate the ball entry frequency of game balls to each privilege opportunity ball unit with respect to the total number of game balls discharged, while making it possible to extract the history of game balls entering the bonus opportunity ball unit. Become.

  (29) The predetermined event that triggers the storage of the history information may include a configuration other than that in the above embodiments. For example, at least one of the timing when the lower plate 56a becomes full, the timing when the full state is started, and the timing when the full state is released may be stored as history information. At least one of the timing of the absence of the ball, the timing of the start of the absence of the ball, and the timing of the release of the absence of the ball may be stored as history information, and the dispensing device 76 is in an abnormal state. At least one of the timing at which the abnormal state of the payout device 76 is started and the timing at which the abnormal state of the payout device 76 is released may be stored as history information. In this case, it is possible to grasp the occurrence frequency of these events.

  (30) In the thirty-third embodiment, the configuration is such that the sixteenth buffer 122p of the input port 121 in the management-side I / F 111 corresponds to the output instruction signal at the design stage of the management IC 66. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the fact that the 16th buffer 122p corresponds to the output instruction signal is also recognized by the management IC 66 by transmitting the type identification command from the main CPU 63. Is also good. In the thirty-third embodiment, the configuration is such that the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 in the management-side I / F 111 corresponds to the set value update signal at the design stage of the management IC 66 in advance. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the fact that the fifteenth buffer 122o corresponds to the set value update signal is also recognized by the management IC 66 by transmitting the type identification command from the main CPU 63. It may be. In this case, it is not necessary to previously set the correspondence between the buffers 122a to 122p and the types of signals input to the buffers 122a to 122p in the management IC 66 in advance.

  (31) In the above-described thirty-third to forty-sixth embodiments, the management IC 66 may be configured to transmit a normal operation signal to the main CPU 63 when operating normally. In this case, the main CPU 63 can monitor whether the management IC 66 is operating normally.

  (32) The display device that displays the set value being updated in the set value update process is not limited to the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and may be the symbol display device 41. It may be a dedicated display device. Further, the display device for displaying the set value in the setting confirmation process is not limited to the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and may be the symbol display device 41, and may be a dedicated display device. It may be.

  (33) The operation unit operated to update the set value in the set value update process is not limited to the update button 68b, but may be the reset button 68c. Further, positions corresponding to each of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6” are set as the rotation operation positions when the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion section 68a and the rotation operation is performed. The configuration may be such that a set value corresponding to the rotational operation position of the part 68a is set. Further, the setting key insertion portion 68a is configured to be capable of being further rotated than the ON position, and each time a rotating operation beyond the ON position is performed, the set value being updated is changed to the next set value. The configuration may be updated.

  (34) In the above-described thirty-third to forty-second and forty-seventh to fifty-third embodiments, the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c are arranged side by side, but are arranged vertically. A configuration may be adopted, a configuration may be arranged diagonally side by side, or a configuration may be arranged side by side so as to be two steps up and down. In the above-described 43rd to 46th and 54th to 106th embodiments, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are arranged side by side, but are arranged vertically. Or a configuration in which the components are arranged diagonally, or a configuration in which the components are arranged side by side in two steps. In the 47th to 53rd embodiments, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 may be used as display devices for displaying the management result of the game history.

  (35) In the 33rd to 46th embodiments, history information used for calculating a parameter whose normal value fluctuates according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, referred to as fluctuation target history information) And history information used for calculating a parameter whose normal value does not fluctuate according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter referred to as non-variation target history information) are stored in different areas in the history memory 117. It may be configured to be stored. In this case, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set or when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the area where the history information to be changed is stored in the history memory 117 is “0”. On the other hand, the area in which the history information of the non-variable object is stored in the history memory 117 may not be cleared to "0". Thereby, the calculation of the parameter whose normal value fluctuates according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be accurately performed even after the setting value is changed, and the normal value does not fluctuate according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. Accuracy of parameter calculation can be improved. In addition, the configuration may be applied to the 47th to 106th embodiments.

  (36) In the 47th to 53rd embodiments, the stack area 222 for specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control may not be specified in the main RAM 65 in advance. Even in this case, the area corresponding to the stack areas 222 and 224 is specified in the main RAM 65 at the stage of designing the pachinko machine 10, but the area is specified beyond the storage capacity of the area. When the information storage processing is executed, the originally unscheduled information is written in the originally unscheduled area. Therefore, the main RAM 65 may be cleared to “0”.

  (37) In the forty-seventh to fifty-third embodiments, when the clear processing of the main RAM 65 (steps S105 and S117) is executed, the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 are set to “0”. Is cleared, but the non-specific control work area 223 and the non-specific control stack area 224 are not cleared to “0”. Instead, the main RAM 65 is cleared (step S105, step S105). In S117), not only the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control but also the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control may be cleared to "0". In the clearing process of the main RAM 65 (steps S105 and S117), not only the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control but also the normal counter area 231, the open / close execution mode counter area 232, the high frequency The configuration may be such that the support mode counter area 233 is cleared to “0”, but the operation result storage area 234 is not cleared to “0”. In this case, it is possible to protect the information stored in the calculation result storage area 234.

  (38) In the above forty-seventh to fifty-seventh embodiments, the operation for clearing the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control to “0” and the work area 223 for non-specific control and the non-specific The operation for clearing the control stack area 224 to “0” may be different from the operation. For example, when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started while operating the reset button 68c, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are cleared to "0", and the update button 68b is reset. When the supply of the operation power to the pachinko machine 10 is started while operating, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control may be cleared to “0”. This makes it possible to selectively erase each piece of information. Further, in this configuration, when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started while operating both the update button 68b and the reset button 68c, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control Alternatively, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control may all be cleared to “0”. Thus, in the configuration in which the selective erasing is enabled as described above, it is possible to improve the workability when erasing the information of each of the areas 221 to 224 collectively.

  (39) In the 47th to 50th and 52nd embodiments, as in the 51st embodiment, when the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is set to the work area 223 for the non-specific control. And the information saved may be restored to the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 when returning to the process corresponding to the specific control. Thereby, even if the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 can be changed when the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started, the main side CPU 63 ends when the process corresponding to the non-specific control ends. It is possible to return the state of the stack pointer of the CPU 63 to the state before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started.

  (40) In the forty-seventh to fifty-seventh embodiments, processing for collecting game history information as processing corresponding to non-specific control, processing for calculating various parameters using the collected history information, and calculation for the same Although the process for notifying the result is executed, only a part of these processes is executed as the process corresponding to the non-specific control, and the other processes are executed as the process corresponding to the specific control. Is also good. Further, in addition to or instead of a process for collecting information on the game history, a process for calculating various parameters using the collected history information, and a process for notifying a result of the calculation, The processing may be executed as processing corresponding to the non-specific control. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which at least one of the unauthorized monitoring and the notification of the monitoring result is executed as a process corresponding to the non-specific control.

  (41) In the above forty-seventh to fifty-seventh embodiments, when returning to the processing corresponding to the specific control from the situation where the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is being executed by the main CPU 63, the flag register, the stack Neither the pointer nor the various registers are saved in the main RAM 65. Instead, the main CPU 63 returns to the processing corresponding to the specific control from the situation where the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is being executed. In this case, at least a part of the information of the flag register, the stack pointer, and the various registers of the main CPU 63 is saved in the main RAM 65, and the saved information is restarted for the process corresponding to the non-specific control. Alternatively, the main CPU 63 may be configured to return to the corresponding storage area. As a result, the information of the main CPU 63 used in the process corresponding to the non-specific control can be carried over and used.

  (42) In the forty-seventh to fifty-seventh embodiments, various parameters are calculated when the total number of game balls ejected from the game area reaches 6000, but this calculation is triggered. The total number of game balls may be more than or less than 6000. For example, various parameters may be calculated when the total number of game balls discharged from the game area reaches 60000. In this case, the storage capacity required to store the game history information increases, but the game history information is stored in the management RAM 241 external to the MPU 62 as in the 53rd embodiment. With this configuration, it is possible to flexibly cope with the increase in the storage capacity.

  (43) In the 47th to 57th embodiments, the 61st to 68th parameters are calculated as the management result of the game history, but in addition to or instead of the 31st parameter, the 31st parameter in the 33rd embodiment At least a part of the forty-first parameter and the forty-second parameter may be calculated.

  (44) In the 47th to 57th embodiments, when a process for newly setting the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is executed or when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the work area 221 for specific control and Not only the stack area 222 for specific control but also the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control may be cleared to “0”. In this case, when processing for newly setting the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is executed or when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the normal counter area 231, the open / close execution mode counter area 232, the high-frequency The support mode counter area 233 and the operation result storage area 234 are cleared to "0".

  In addition, when processing for newly setting the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is executed or when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, not only the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control but also The normal counter area 231, the open / close execution mode counter area 232, and the high-frequency support mode counter area 233 may be cleared to "0", but the operation result storage area 234 may not be cleared to "0". In this case, it is possible to protect the information stored in the calculation result storage area 234.

  In addition, when processing for newly setting the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is executed or when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are set to “0”. However, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control may be cleared but not cleared to "0". In this case, it is possible to protect the information stored in the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control.

  In the case where the configuration of the above (43) is provided, when the processing for newly setting the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is executed or when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the 33rd state is set. Although the history information for calculating the 31st parameter, the 41st parameter, and the 42nd parameter in the embodiment is deleted, the normal counter area 231, the open / close execution mode counter area 232, the high frequency support mode counter area 233, The operation result storage area 234 may not be cleared to “0”.

  (45) In the above thirty-third to sixty-sixth embodiments, instead of the configuration in which the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is used to calculate various parameters, the game supplied to the game area PA A configuration in which the total number of supplied balls is used may be used. In this case, for example, a detection sensor is provided so as to detect a game ball that has been fired from the game ball firing mechanism 27 and has reached the game area PA, and a game ball supplied to the game area PA is detected based on a detection result of the detection sensor. It may be configured to measure the number. In this configuration, since it is not necessary to measure the number of game balls discharged from the out port 24a, a configuration in which the out port detection sensor 48a is not provided may be employed.

  (46) In the 47th to 106th embodiments, at least a part of the information of the various registers and the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is loaded into the stack area 222 for specific control or the stack area 224 for non-specific control. It may be configured to be saved by an instruction. In this case, it is necessary to update the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 when saving the information to the stack areas 222 and 224. Alternatively, the information saved in the stack areas 222 and 224 may be restored to the corresponding storage area of the main CPU 63 by a load instruction. Also in this case, it is necessary to update the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 when returning the information from the stack areas 222 and 224.

  (47) When the set value updating process is executed in each of the above embodiments, the corresponding notification may be made by any of the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54. Thereby, the administrator of the gaming hall can clearly understand that the set value update process is being executed.

  (48) In each of the above embodiments, a history that a set value is newly set may be stored in the main RAM 65. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the history of the newly set values is stored in the RAM provided in the sound emission control device 81. In this case, every time the setting value updating process is completed, a command including information on the setting value set in the setting value updating process is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the audio emission control device 81, and the audio emission control device Each time the command 81 is received, information indicating that the set value is newly set and information indicating the set value at that time are cumulatively stored in the RAM of the sound emission control device 81. In this configuration, when a predetermined operation is performed, a configuration history of the setting values accumulated in the RAM of the sound emission control device 81 may be displayed on the symbol display device 41.

  (49) In the above embodiments, when the set value is newly set in the set value update process, the information indicating the number of game balls scheduled to be paid stored in the payout control device 77 is not deleted. However, instead of this, information indicating the number of the game balls to be paid out may be deleted. In addition, if the set value updating process is executed but the set value is not changed, the information indicating the number of game balls to be paid out is not deleted. The information indicating the number of game balls may be deleted.

  (50) In the above embodiments, when the set value updating process is executed but the set value is not changed, the areas 221 to 224 of the main RAM 65 are not cleared to “0”, and the set value is not changed. When changed, at least a part of each of the areas 221 to 224 of the main RAM 65 may be cleared to “0”. For example, when the set value is changed, an area other than the set value counter in the work area 221 for specific control may be cleared to “0”.

  (51) In the 54th to 106th embodiments, even when the main CPU 63 executes the process for confirming the set value in the process for confirming the setting (FIG. 592), the main CPU 63 is involved in the profit of the game. The operation of the movable object may be continued. For example, a V zone and a non-V zone are provided in the ball entry means that can enter the ball in the opening / closing execution mode, and the game balls entered in the ball entry means are distributed to either the V zone or the non-V zone. In a configuration provided with the distribution member, the configuration may be such that the operation of the distribution member is continued even in a situation where a process for confirming the set value is being performed in the setting confirmation process. In this case, it is possible to improperly generate a situation in which the process for confirming the set value is executed in the process for confirming the setting to stop the operation of the distribution member. In addition, in addition to the above-mentioned sorting member, a movable object that has entered the ball-entering means is a movable object whose operation is continued even in a situation where a process for confirming the set value is executed in the process for setting confirmation. Either a game ball that is used to generate a round game after the game ball enters the ball, or a discharge ball that discharges a game ball that has entered the ball entry means without entering the ball. A sorting member that sorts the data is conceivable.

  (52) In the 54th to 106th embodiments, at least one of the non-specific control work area 223 and the non-specific control stack area 224 may be configured not to be an information abnormality monitoring target. In this case, even if it is specified that the information abnormality has occurred in the work area 221 for the specific control and the stack area 222 for the specific control, the work area 223 for the non-specific control and the stack area for the non-specific control are determined. By making the configuration that 224 is not cleared to “0”, a situation in which the non-specific control work area 223 and the non-specific control stack area 224 are cleared to “0” based on the occurrence of the information abnormality is prevented. It is possible to do.

  (53) In the 54th to 106th embodiments, an information abnormality occurs in the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the monitoring of whether or not the process is performed is all executed in the process corresponding to the non-specific control. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which all processes for clearing each of the areas 221 to 224 to “0” when an information abnormality occurs are performed in processes corresponding to the non-specific control.

  (54) In each of the above embodiments, the main RAM 65 needs power supply to store and hold information, and backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is OFF. However, the main RAM 65 may be a non-volatile memory that does not require power supply for storing and holding information.

  (55) In each of the above embodiments, in the various types of clear processing of the main RAM 65, the processing of clearing the target area of the main RAM 65 to “0” and the processing of initial setting are executed to initialize the target area. Alternatively, the target area may be initialized by executing a process of initial setting without executing a process of clearing “0”.

  (56) In each of the above embodiments, when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, when the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned ON, the setting value updating process is executed without requiring another operation. May be adopted. Further, instead of the setting key insertion section 68a that is turned ON / OFF by the setting key, a setting switch that is directly turned ON / OFF by hand may be provided. Further, when the setting key insertion section 68a is not provided and the reset button 68c is pressed when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the setting value can be set without any other operation. The update processing may be performed. In this case, a cover member may be provided so as to be switchable between a closed state that covers the reset button 68c and an open state that does not cover the reset button 68c, and a locking device that locks the cover member in the closed position. May be provided.

  (57) Configuration in which the selected set value is fixed and the set value update process is terminated when the state in which the setting key insertion unit 68a has been operated to the OFF position in the set value update process is held for a predetermined period. It may be. Further, when an end reference period (for example, 5 minutes) has elapsed since the start of the set value update process, the selected set value may be automatically determined and the set value update process may be ended. When the update button 68b or the reset button 68c is pressed and held for more than the end reference period (for example, 10 seconds) in the setting value updating process, the setting value being selected is determined and the setting value updating process ends. It may be configured.

  (58) The setting key insertion section 68a can be rotated further than the ON position, and each time a rotation operation beyond the ON position is performed, the set value in the middle of updating is changed to the next set value. In the configuration where the setting key insertion section 68a is operated to the ON position, a setting confirmation process that enables the confirmation of the setting value is started when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. The setting confirmation process may be terminated when the setting key insertion section 68a is operated to the OFF position. In addition, when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started in a state where the update button 68b or the reset button 68c is pressed, a setting confirmation process for enabling the setting value to be confirmed is started. The configuration for confirming the setting may be terminated when the pressing operation is released. Also, in a configuration in which a setting switch that is directly turned on and off by hand is provided instead of the setting key insertion portion 68a that is turned on and off by the setting key, the main operation is performed when the setting switch is turned on. When the supply of the operating power to the side CPU 63 is started, a setting check process for enabling the setting value to be started is started, and when the setting switch is turned OFF or turned ON after the OFF operation, The configuration for finishing the setting confirmation process may be adopted. Also, in a configuration in which a setting switch that is directly turned on and off by hand is provided instead of the setting key insertion portion 68a that is turned on and off by the setting key, the main operation is performed when the setting switch is turned on. When the supply of the operating power to the side CPU 63 is started, the setting check process for enabling the setting value to be started is started, and when the reset button 68c is pressed, the setting check process is ended. Is also good.

  (59) When the setting confirmation processing or the setting value update processing is performed in each of the above embodiments, an image corresponding to the procedure may be performed by the symbol display device 41, and the configuration may be assisted. The sound corresponding to the procedure may be output from the speaker unit 54. For example, in the setting value updating process in the 65th embodiment, the setting value is changed by one step by pressing the reset button 68c, and the setting value updating process is terminated by turning off the setting key insertion unit 68a. May be notified. This makes it easier to update the set values. Since the display control of the symbol display device 41 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 54 are performed by the sound emission control device 81, when the setting confirmation process or the setting value update process is started, a command corresponding thereto is issued. When the setting confirmation processing or the setting value updating processing is transmitted from the main CPU 63 and completed, it is necessary to transmit a command corresponding to the processing from the main CPU 63.

  (60) In each of the above embodiments, the check display of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is not ended when the initial check period has elapsed, but is used to end the check display. The check display may be continued until the operation is performed. As the operation for ending, for example, the reset button 68c may be operated irrespective of whether any of the setting confirmation process and the setting value update process is performed, and an operation other than the reset button 68c may be performed. The unit may be operated. In this case, the check display is continued on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 until it is time to check the base value or the set value on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Therefore, it is possible to check the base value or the set value after checking whether the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal. In addition, since the check display is ended based on the operation of the operation unit, the check display can be ended at a desired timing.

  (61) In the above embodiments, when a predetermined operation unit such as the update button 68b or the reset button 68c is operated, regardless of whether the supply of the operating power is started or not, the first to fourth notification display devices. A configuration in which the display for check of 201 to 204 is started may be adopted. In this case, it is possible to start the check display at a desired timing when confirming the base value or the set value. Further, the display for check may be terminated when a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed in the configuration, and the predetermined operation unit operated to start the display for check or another predetermined operation unit different from the predetermined operation unit may be used. The configuration may be such that the display for checking is terminated when the operation unit is operated.

  (62) In the above embodiments, when supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started in a state where a specific operation unit other than the reset button 68c such as the update button 68b is operated, the first to fourth notification A configuration may be adopted in which the display for checking on the display devices 201 to 204 is started and the display for checking is not started when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started without operating the specific operation unit. . In this case, in a configuration in which the display for checking is performed when the supply of the operation power is started, it is possible to select whether or not to start the display for checking by an operation of the administrator of the game hall.

  (63) In the above embodiments, the base value is not displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 irrespective of whether or not the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state. The base value may be displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the open state of the device 12 is specified based on the detection result of the main body open sensor 96. In this case, when the gaming machine body 12 is in the open state, first, the display for checking the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is started, and thereafter, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are started. The base value may be displayed at 204. Thereby, before confirming the base value, it is possible to confirm whether the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal or not. Further, the display for check may be terminated when a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed in the configuration, and the predetermined operation unit operated to start the display for check or another predetermined operation unit different from the predetermined operation unit may be used. The configuration may be such that the display for checking is terminated when the operation unit is operated.

  (64) In the above embodiments, when the main processing is started in a state where the condition for executing the setting confirmation processing is satisfied, the display for checking on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is started. Instead, when the main process is started in a state where the condition for executing the setting confirmation process is not satisfied, the check display may be started. In this case, it is possible to prevent the check display from being performed when it is determined that the setting value is to be confirmed.

  (65) In the above embodiments, when the main processing is started in a state where the condition for executing the set value update processing is satisfied, the display for checking of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is started. Instead, when the main process is started in a state where the condition for executing the set value update process is not satisfied, the display for checking may be started. In this case, when it is determined that the setting value is to be updated, it is possible to prevent the display for checking from being performed.

  (66) In each of the above embodiments, when the main process is started in a state in which either the condition for executing the setting confirmation process or the condition for executing the setting value update process is started, the first to fourth notification is performed. The main display is started in a state where both the condition for executing the setting confirmation process and the condition for executing the setting value update process are not satisfied without the check display of the display units 201 to 204 being started. May be configured to start a check display. In this case, it is possible to prevent the display for checking from being performed when it is determined that the setting value is to be confirmed or the setting value is to be updated.

  (67) In the above-described embodiments, the display segments 321 to 324 in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are not maintained in the light-emitting state in the check display, but the first to fourth notification devices are maintained. Each of the display segments 321 to 324 in each of the notification display devices 201 to 204 may be configured to blink. In the display for checking, in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, each of the display segments 321 to 324 sequentially emits light one by one or a part of them, and the range of the initial check period Each of the display segments 321 to 324 may emit light at least once.

  (68) In each of the above embodiments, the process of causing the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 to perform the check display is not executed as the process corresponding to the specific control, but corresponds to the non-specific control. It may be configured to be executed as processing.

  (69) In each of the above embodiments, the display control of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 may be performed not by the main CPU 63 but by dedicated control means. 81 may be used, or the display control device 82 may be used. In this case, when the base values are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the base value to be notified is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the control means serving as the control subject, and the first When the set values are displayed on the fourth to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the set values to be notified are transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the control means serving as the control subject. Further, when the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power is performed in the main CPU 63, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are displayed in a state where the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power is being performed. Thus, the information corresponding to the start of the check display is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the control means serving as the control subject so that the check display is started.

  (70) In each of the above embodiments, when the power failure flag is not set to “1” or the checksums do not match, the game stop flag is set to “1” and the progress of the game is stopped. In each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, similarly to the check display, each display segment 321 to 324 may be configured to emit light, or each display segment 321 to 324 may be configured to blink. Good.

  (71) In the above embodiments, not only when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, but also when the setting change trigger occurs after the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power is completed, the setting value is set. The update processing may be performed. This makes it possible to eliminate the need to turn off and on the power of the pachinko machine 10 at the start of the setting value updating process.

  (72) In each of the above embodiments, the “setting change operation” and the “setting confirmation operation” may be in a reverse relationship. That is, when the reset button 68c is pressed and the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on, it is specified that the “setting confirmation operation” is performed, and the setting is performed when the reset button 68c is not pressed. A configuration may be adopted in which it is specified that the “setting change operation” is being performed when the key insertion unit 68a is turned on. In addition, the configuration may be such that the “setting change operation” and the “setting confirmation operation” do not overlap at all.

  (73) In each of the above embodiments, the setting value updating process is started based on the start of the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 while the reset button 68c is pressed, and the setting value updating process is performed. Does not change the setting value of the selection target every time the reset button 68c is pressed, but operates the operation unit operated to start the setting value updating process and the selection target in the setting value updating process. The configuration may be such that the operation unit operated to change the set value does not match.

  (74) In the 81st to 106th embodiments, after performing the processing of setting the information of the setting updating area 342 in the setting reference area 341 in the setting value updating processing, that is, the processing of setting the setting value to be used Although the configuration is such that the second RAM clearing process is executed, the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that the second RAM clearing process is executed before the process of setting the set value to be used. In this case, the second RAM clearing process may be executed instead of performing the initial setting at the start of the setting value updating process.

  Also, in the setting value updating process, both the initial setting at the start and the second RAM clearing process are not executed, so that even if the setting value to be used is set in the setting value updating process, the clear target area 371 is set. May not be executed. When this configuration is applied to the 87th to 95th embodiments, when the “RAM clear operation” is performed and the first RAM clear processing is performed, the clearing target area 371 is initialized, while When the setting value update processing is executed, the initialization of the clear target area 371 is not executed. Further, when the above configuration is applied to the 88th embodiment, the initial display may be performed on the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a even if the set value update process is executed. A configuration in which the initial display is not performed may be adopted. Further, when the above configuration is applied to the 89th to 90th embodiments, even when the set value update processing is executed, a deviated display is performed on the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a. It is good also as a structure which does not perform the said off display. In addition, when the above configuration is applied to the 91st to 92nd embodiments, even if the set value update processing is executed, the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a perform the off display or the hit display. A configuration may be adopted, and a configuration in which the out-of-off display or the hit display is not performed may be adopted. Further, when the above configuration is applied to the 93rd embodiment, even if the set value updating process is executed, lighting lottery is performed for each light emitting unit of the special figure display unit 37a and each light emitting unit of the general map display unit 38a. The configuration may be such that the processing is executed or the lighting lottery processing may not be executed. Further, when the above configuration is applied to the 94th to 106th embodiments, even if the setting value update process is executed, the lottery process of the initial display data in the display start process (FIGS. 711 and 713) (step SD405, Steps SD410 and SD502) may be executed, or the initial display data lottery process (steps SD405, SD410 and SD502) may not be executed.

  (75) Instead of the configuration in which the display data for causing the special figure display unit 37a to perform display in the 81st to 106th embodiments is stored in the main RAM 65 which requires power supply when storing and holding information. Alternatively, the display data may be stored in a memory that does not require power supply when storing and holding information and is used for both reading and writing. In this case, the display data stored in the memory may not be erased during the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process. The clearing area 371 is initialized during the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process. The display data stored in the memory may be deleted. Further, the configuration may be applied to display data for causing the general-purpose display unit 38a to perform display.

  (76) In the 87th to 106th embodiments, the special figure side holding information obtained by the winning of the first operating port 33 and the winning of the second operating port 34 are obtained. Alternatively, a configuration may be applied in which the reserved information on the special figure side is separately stored and the reserved information on the second operating port 34 side is preferentially digested. A configuration in which the hold information on the side is preferentially digested may be applied, or a configuration in which the retained information is digested in the acquisition order regardless of the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 may be applied. Good. Further, in the above configuration, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 may be arranged side by side instead of the plurality of operating ports being vertically arranged. The mouths may be arranged diagonally. Furthermore, according to the operation mode of the firing operation device 28, the two operation ports 33, 34 are arranged apart from each other so that only the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 can be won. It may be configured. In addition, the case where the hold information acquired due to the winning of the first operating port 33 becomes a target of the success / failure determination, and the case where the hold information acquired due to the winning of the second operating port 34 becomes the target. The profit obtained by the player may be different depending on whether or not the target is determined.

  Further, in the above configuration, as the special figure display unit 37a, the first special figure display unit that displays the result of the determination as to whether or not the hold information acquired based on the winning in the first operation port 33 is displayed. And a second special map display unit for displaying the result of the determination of the success or failure of the hold information acquired based on the winning of the game. In this case, before the hold information acquired based on the winning in the first operation port 33 becomes the target of the hit determination, or based on the fact that the hold information becomes the target of the hit determination, the pattern is displayed on the first special figure display unit. Is displayed and the stop result corresponding to the determination is displayed, and the fluctuation display of one game time is ended. In addition, prior to or based on the fact that the hold information acquired based on the winning in the second operating port 34 becomes the target of the hit determination, or based on the fact that the hold information is the target of the hit determination, the second special map display unit The fluctuation display is started, and the stop result corresponding to the determination of the success or failure is displayed, and the fluctuation display of one game time is ended.

  In the configuration in which the first special figure display unit and the second special figure display unit are provided as described above, the special figure display unit 37a when the supply of the operation power in the 87th to 95th embodiments is started. The configuration of the display content may be applied to each of the first special figure display unit and the second special figure display unit, or may be applied to only one of the first special figure display unit and the second special figure display unit. Is also good.

  In the configuration in which the first special figure display unit and the second special figure display unit are separately provided as described above, one of the first special figure display unit and the second special figure display unit is used to display a pattern in a variable manner. In the case where the target game round is being executed, a configuration may be adopted in which the other game round, in which the other one is subjected to the change display of the pattern, is not executed. In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which a game cycle in which the first special figure display unit is a target for variable display of a pattern and a game cycle in which the second special figure display unit is a target for variable display of a pattern are executed in an overlapping manner. In the configuration in which the game times can be repeatedly executed as described above, as a result of the game times in the second special figure display unit, the expected number of game balls to be won to the special power winning device 32 in the open / close execution mode is larger than the case of the big hit result. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the small hit result is set to be less and the winning probability of the small hit result is set higher than the big hit result. In this configuration, when the supply of the operating power is stopped, there is a high possibility that a hit display corresponding to one of the big hit result and the small hit result is performed on the special figure display unit 37a. Therefore, if the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is executed when the supply of the operating power is started, the first to third out-of-order display data and special feature data for the special figure as in the nineteenth embodiment are used. It is preferable that any one of the first to third hit display data for the drawing is selected.

  (77) A configuration in which the configuration of the characteristic display content when the supply of the operating power is started in the 87th to 106th embodiments is applied to both the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a. The present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to be applied to only one of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a. For example, the configuration of the characteristic display content when the supply of the operating power is started may be applied only to the special figure display unit 37a, or may be applied only to the general figure display unit 38a. Is also good.

  (78) In the 87th to 106th embodiments, even when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display are kept until the display start flag is set to “1”. Although the display of the unit 38a is not started, the present invention is not limited to this. The display start flag is not provided, and when the supply of the operation power to the main CPU 63 is started, the special drawing is started. The display unit 37a and the general-purpose display unit 38a may be configured to start displaying. In this case, if the first RAM clear processing or the second RAM clear processing is executed when the supply of the operating power is started, the supply of the operating power is stopped in the special figure display unit 37a and the ordinary figure display unit 38a. After the immediately preceding display is started, the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the ordinary figure display section 38a are switched to a display corresponding to the execution of the first RAM clear processing or the second RAM clear processing.

  (79) In each of the above embodiments, the display device on which the information of the base value is displayed requires the supply of operating power when rewriting the display content, such as electronic paper, and the operation power is required when storing and holding the display content. A display device that does not need to be supplied may be used. Accordingly, even in a state where the supply of the operation power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, it is possible to grasp the information of the base value by visually recognizing the display device.

  (80) Instead of a configuration in which the display control device 82 is controlled by the audio light emission control device 81 based on a command transmitted from the main control device 60, display control is performed based on a command transmitted from the main control device 60. The device 82 may be configured to control the sound emission control device 81. Further, instead of the configuration in which the sound emission control device 81 and the display control device 82 are separately provided, a configuration in which both control devices are provided as one control device may be adopted. May be integrated in the main control device 60, and both functions of the two control devices may be integrated in the main control device 60. The configuration of the command transmitted from the main control device 60 to the audio light emission control device 81 and the configuration of the command transmitted from the audio light emission control device 81 to the display control device 82 are also arbitrary.

  (81) A pachinko machine of another type different from the above embodiments, such as a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory is opened a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific region of a special device, or a game ball in a specific region of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that becomes a jackpot when a right enters and a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine equipped with another accessory, an arrangement ball machine, a sparrow ball and the like.

  In addition, a game machine that is not a ball-and-ball type, for example, includes a plurality of reels on which a plurality of types of symbols are provided in a circumferential direction, starts rotation of the reels by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. If a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols has been established on the activated line visible from the display window after the reel has stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed, a bonus such as payout of medals is provided to the player. The present invention can be applied to a slot machine.

  Further, the game machine main body supported to be openable and closable on the outer frame includes a storage unit and a capture device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are captured by the capture device. Accordingly, the present invention can be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, in which the rotation of a reel is started.

  When the present invention is applied to a slot machine or a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined, for example, the result of a lottery process of a role executed when one game is started based on an operation of a start lever is recorded as history information. It may be configured to calculate the actual winning probability of each role using the history information, and when a transition to a special game state such as a bonus game occurs, it is stored as history information, and the history is stored. The information may be used to calculate the actual transition probability to the special game state, or the ratio of the number of staying games in the special game state to the total number of consumed games may be calculated. The history information and various parameters may be readable by an external device, or a notification corresponding to the calculation results of the various parameters may be performed by the gaming machine itself. In addition, a configuration in which a plurality of stages of setting states exist, such as “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”, and a configuration in which the winning probability in the lottery process of winning combinations may be changed according to the setting state. In this case, the configuration in each of the above embodiments may be applied to handling of history information, calculation of various parameters, and handling of repeated changes when the setting of the setting state is newly set or when the setting value is changed. .

  (82) The characteristic configurations of the thirty-third to tenth embodiments may be mutually applied in any combination. For example, the characteristic configuration of the 33rd embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the 38th embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the 42nd embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the 62nd embodiment, The characteristic configuration of the 77th embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the 87th embodiment, and the characteristic configuration of the 96th embodiment may be combined, and the characteristic configuration of the 34th embodiment may be combined. The configuration, the characteristic configuration of the 36th embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the 40th embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the 43rd embodiment, and the characteristic configuration of the 65th embodiment The characteristic configuration of the 75th embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the 90th embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the 97th embodiment, and the characteristic configuration of the 106th embodiment. The characteristic configuration of the thirty-third embodiment may be combined with the forty-seventh embodiment. The characteristic configuration of the embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the 53rd embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the 61st embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the 66th embodiment, and the 81st embodiment , The characteristic configuration of the 92nd embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the 101st embodiment, and the characteristic configuration of the 104th embodiment may be combined. The characteristic configuration of the 34th embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the 48th embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the 54th embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the 67th embodiment, and the 71st The characteristic configuration of the embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the 85th embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the 94th embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the 103rd embodiment, and the 105th embodiment May be combined. In addition, a configuration in which the characteristic configurations of the above-described thirty-third to tenth embodiments are applied in a predetermined combination may be applied in any combination of the configurations in the above-described other embodiments.

  In the above-described embodiment, each command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, and the display is instructed from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. A command may be directly transmitted from the control device 110 to the display control device 114. In addition, an audio lamp control device may be connected to the display control device, and a command instructing the output of each sound and the lighting of the lamp from the display control device may be transmitted to the audio lamp control device. Further, the audio lamp control device and the display control device may be configured as one control device. By using these as one control device, the number of parts can be reduced, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine can be suppressed.

  In the above-described embodiment, in the command determination process (S911) executed by the audio lamp control device 113, the case where the stop start command is received and the change start flag is always set to ON has been described. When the stop type command is received in response to the above, the change start flag may be set to on. Accordingly, when a variation pattern command is not received and a stop type command is received, it is possible to suppress a strange variation effect from being executed.

  Further, the variation start flag may be set to ON at the timing when the variation pattern command is received. In this case, in the variation display process (S910) executed by the sound lamp control device 113, based on the fact that the variation start flag has been turned on, a display that notifies the display control device 114 of the variation pattern extracted by the variation pattern command. A variation pattern command may be generated and transmitted to the display control device 114. This allows the display control device 114 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute the variation effect based on the display variation pattern command without waiting for the sound lamp control device 113 to receive the stop type command. Can be. In this case, at the timing when the stop type command is received, the audio lamp control device 113 generates a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type extracted from the stop type command, You may make it transmit to the display control apparatus 114. Then, the display control device 114 may determine a stop symbol of the variable effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 based on the display stop type command.

  In the above embodiment, a case will be described in which the image controller 236 transmits the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at each display interval of one frame of image for which the drawing processing is completed (in the above embodiment, every 20 milliseconds). However, the image controller 236 may transmit this V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 each time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display an image for one frame. The driving of the third symbol display device 81 is performed so that an image for one frame is always displayed at equal time intervals (20 millisecond intervals). Therefore, a V interrupt signal is displayed every time an image for one frame is displayed. By transmitting, the time interval can be maintained accurately without timing.

  In the above embodiment, the demonstration effect may be one in which the third symbol composed of the main symbol without numbers “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed. Further, a third symbol composed of a main symbol with a number or a main symbol without a number may be stopped and displayed in a semi-transparent state. Further, only the back image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Further, a character or a back image completely different from the third symbol or the back image used in the variable display may be displayed.

  In the above embodiment, a continuous announcement effect may be executed by the third symbol display device 81 in which the variable effect is performed, or a fourth symbol display device different from the third symbol display device 81 is provided, and the third symbol display device is provided. The continuous announcement effect may be executed by displaying the fourth symbol on the fourth symbol display device together with the variable effect executed on the display device 81. In this case, the control of the fourth symbol display device may be performed by the display control device 114 or the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, a continuous announcement effect may be executed by providing an accessory that operates according to various effects in the pachinko machine 10 and operating the accessory in a predetermined manner together with the variable effect. In addition, under the control of the audio lamp control device 113, the continuous announcement effect may be executed by outputting the sound for the continuous announcement effect from the audio output device 226 of the pachinko machine 10, or the illumination unit of the pachinko machine 10 The continuous announcement effect may be executed by lighting or blinking 29 to 33 together with the variable effect.

  Thus, every time the variable effect is performed on the third symbol display device 81 (and the first symbol display device 37), symbols are continuously displayed on the fourth symbol display device, or the accessory is operated in a predetermined mode. By playing the sound, outputting sound from the sound output device 226, or lighting or blinking the illuminations 29 to 33, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation of a big hit. In addition, the player normally continues the game while watching the third symbol display device 81 in which the variable effect is performed, but the display of symbols by a fourth symbol display device different from the third symbol display device 81 is performed. The continuous announcement effect is performed by the operation of the accessory, the sound output from the sound output device 226, or the lighting / blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33, so that an unusual effect is performed on the player. Can be easily recognized. Further, the continuous announcement effect can be easily and continuously performed by a simple control such as display of a symbol by the fourth symbol display device, actuation of the accessory, audio output from the audio output device 226, or lighting / flashing of the illumination portions 29 to 33. A preview effect can be made.

  Further, if the continuous announcement effect is performed by audio output from the audio output device 226 or by lighting or blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33, the continuous announcement effect is controlled by the audio lamp control device 113. In the pachinko machine 10, the main controller 110 performs a lottery process at the time of start / stop judgment and the start of change, a continuous announcement effect is performed by the sound lamp control device 113, and a change effect is performed by the display control device 114. When performing a notice effect, each control device can share each process. Therefore, the load can be prevented from being concentrated on one control device, and the performance required for the MPU of each control device can be reduced.

  In addition, the display of the symbol for the continuous announcement effect on the third symbol display device 81, the display of the symbol for the continuous announcement effect on the fourth symbol display device, the operation of the accessory in a predetermined mode, the sound from the audio output device 226. The continuous announcement effect may be executed by combining at least two or more of the output and the lighting or blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33 and controlling them in conjunction with each other. As a result, it is possible to execute a variety of continuous announcement effects. In addition, the method of executing the continuous announcement effect (display by the third symbol display device 81, display by the fourth symbol display device, operation of the accessory, audio output from the audio output device 226, lighting or blinking of the illumination parts 29 to 33) , Or a combination thereof) to prepare a plurality of continuous announcement production modes that are selected according to the game state (15R probability variable jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, 15R regular jackpot, miss) after the end of the continuous announcement effect. Is also good.

  In addition, when a continuous announcement effect is performed, an image for a continuous announcement effect different from the variable effect may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or when the continuous announcement effect is completed. The stop symbols to be displayed may be displayed by displaying a so-called “chance eye” that is a combination of predetermined symbols. In this case, if it is determined in the command determination process (S1602 in FIG. 395 (c)) executed by the MPU 221 of the display control device 114 that the continuous advance command has been received, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the chance is turned on, and Alternatively, other stop symbol determination flags may be set to off. In the command determination processing, after the stop identification command processing, processing corresponding to the continuous advance command is executed in other command processing, so that the chance pattern is stopped instead of the stop symbol set by receiving the display stop identification command. It is set as a symbol. Therefore, the chance eyes can be definitely displayed when the fluctuation stops. If the third symbol display device 81 continuously displays the chance symbols as stop symbols for each variable effect, it is possible to give the player an expectation that a big hit will be finally obtained.

  In the above embodiment, when there is a prize (start prize) in the first start port 64a and the second start port 64b, the main control device 110 increases the number of retained balls added by “1” to the sound lamp control device 113. A description has been given of the case where the counter C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer along with the start winning prize and transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in response to the hold ball number command notified to The type of the counter included in the ball number command may be a part of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1, or may include the value of another counter. When the main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp controller 113 of the values of the respective counters acquired along with the winning prize, information indicating the values of the respective counters is included in the command for the number of reserved balls. Instead, information indicating the value of each counter may be included in a command different from the reserved ball number command, and these values may be notified to the sound lamp control device 113. As another command, a dedicated command for notifying the value of each counter acquired along with the start winning prize to the voice lamp control device 113 may be used, or another information such as a fluctuation pattern command or a stop symbol command may be voiced. The command for notifying the lamp control device 113 may be obtained by adding the value of each counter obtained with the start winning. As another command, when notifying the value of each counter acquired along with the start winning prize to the sound lamp control device 113, the value of each notified counter is added to the command in the variable effect corresponding to any number of holdings. Information indicating whether or not this is the case may be included. Thus, based on the information on the number of hold times included in the command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores, in one of the pre-read information first to fourth areas corresponding to the number of hold times, The value of the counter can be stored.

  In the above embodiment, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the ball count command, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 indicated by the ball count command may be stored in the RAM 223. , When the command of the number of reserved balls (or a command indicating the value of each counter) is received, based on the value of each counter indicated by the command, whether the jackpot is a jackpot, a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, In this case, a part or all of the outliers and the like are determined, and these determination results are replaced with the value of each counter indicated by the command, or combined with a part or all of the value of the counter, It may be stored in the RAM 223.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the main control device 110 calculates the number of retained balls by using one retained ball number counter 203a regardless of which of the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b receives a ball. The case of counting has been described. On the other hand, the reserved ball number counter for the first starting port corresponding to the first starting port 64a, the reserved ball number counter for the second starting port corresponding to the second starting port 64b, and the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 It is also possible to separately prepare and count the number of reserved balls associated with the start winning in the first starting port 64a and the number of reserved balls associated with the starting winning in the second starting port 64b.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which the maximum number of reserve balls that can be retained is set to “4” regardless of which of the first start port 64a and the second start port 64b a ball has won. The maximum number of reserved balls that can be retained with the start winning in the first starting port 64a and the maximum number of reserved balls that can be retained with the starting winning in the second starting port 64b are separately determined and managed. Is also good. For example, the maximum number of balls that can be held with the start winning in the first starting port 64a is "4", and the maximum number of balls that can be held in accordance with the starting winning in the second starting port 64b is "4". At a certain point in time, the number of retained balls retained with the start winning in the first starting port 64a is “4”, and the number of retained balls retained with the starting winning in the second starting port 64b Is "2", even if there is a further starting prize in the first opening 64a, the starting prize is not held, but if there is a starting prize in the second opening 64b, it is held. You may. As a result, the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b can be recognized by the player as being separate from each other, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  Further, for example, the variable effect based on the winning winning in the second starting port 64b may be performed in preference to the variable effect based on the winning winning in the first starting port 64a. Alternatively, the variable effect based on the winning winning in the first starting port 64a may be performed in preference to the variable effect based on the winning winning in the second starting port 64b. This allows the player to pay more attention to the starting port in which the variable effect is preferentially performed.

  In the above embodiment, a description will be given of a case where two starting ports, a first starting port 64a and a second starting port 64b, are provided on the game board 13 as starting ports from which a jackpot lottery is started when a ball is entered. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the number of starting ports may be one or three or more. When there are two or more starting ports, a corresponding reserved ball number counter is prepared in the RAM 203 for each starting port, and for each starting port, the reserved ball number retained with the winning in the corresponding starting port. The number may be counted. In addition, the maximum number of balls that can be held in association with the start winning in the corresponding opening may be set for each starting opening.

When there are two or more starting ports, the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 to notify that the holding has been performed in accordance with the winning in the starting port includes May be included to indicate whether a hold has been made due to winning of the starting port of the game.
Further, the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from main controller 110 to voice lamp controller 113 when the fluctuation is started may include information indicating which of the starting ports has the fluctuation effect suspended. Thereby, in the sound lamp control device 113, a reserved ball number counter is prepared for each starting port, and when the reserved ball number command is received, the reserved ball number counter for the starting port indicated in the reserved ball number command is received. Is set, and the variation pattern command is received. If the number of retained balls counter for the starting port indicated by the variation pattern command is reduced by 1, the number of retained balls can be counted for each starting port.

  When a plurality of starting ports are provided on the game board 13, the counter value acquired with each of the starting ports (winning winning) may be notified to the sound lamp control device 113. In this case, the command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the counter value acquired by the main control device 110 with the start winning is the one acquired with the start winning to any starting opening. Information indicating whether or not there is may be included. Further, the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 when the fluctuation is started may include information indicating which of the starting openings is a fluctuation effect associated with a start winning. . Further, in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113, a pre-reading information storage area is prepared for each start-up opening, and the respective counter values transmitted from the main control unit 110 in accordance with the start winning at the corresponding start-up opening are stored in the RAM 223. It may be stored in the prefetch information storage area. Thus, every time a variation pattern command is received, a shift process can be performed on the pre-reading information storage area corresponding to the starting opening that has detected the start winning that has triggered the execution of the variation effect indicated by the variation pattern command. it can. Therefore, the value of each counter corresponding to the fluctuating effect being held for each starting port can be held in the sound lamp control device 113 as well. Therefore, in the case where the probability of becoming a jackpot, the distribution probability of the jackpot type, the distribution probability of the outdated type, and the like are different depending on the starting opening that has won the start, in the pre-reading process, whether or not each variable effect will be a jackpot, The type of jackpot in the case of a jackpot, the type of a jackpot in the case of a miss, and the like can be correctly determined based on which starting port the start winning. In the case where the variable effect based on the start winning prize to one starting opening is performed in preference to the variable effect based on the starting winning prize to another starting opening, the change based on the starting winning prize to the first starting opening is performed. The pre-reading process can be performed in order from the value of the counter corresponding to the effect, and the number of suspensions of the variable effect that will be the most recent big hit can be correctly determined.

  When a plurality of starting openings are provided, the sound lamp control device 113 gives a continuous notice when the values of the respective counters obtained based on the winning start to the starting opening are received from the main control device 110 by a command. When the start of the effect is determined, the continuous announcement effect may be executed over all the variable effects (holding balls) held at that time, regardless of the starting port where the start prize has been won. Also, a plurality of starting ports are provided, and in a pachinko machine that performs a variable effect for a winning at one starting port with priority over a variable effect for a winning at another starting port, the The start of the continuous announcement effect may be determined only from the pre-read result of the counter value acquired for the winning at the starting opening where the variable effect is executed. As a result, the presence or absence of the setting of the execution of the continuous announcement effect is not determined for the variable effect corresponding to the winning in the starting port having a low priority, and the continuous announcement effect is not started for this variable effect. If a continuous announcement effect is started for a variable effect corresponding to winning in a low-priority starting opening, and if the variable effect is continuously held at a high-priority starting opening, the continuous announcement effect is easily terminated. There is a possibility that a situation will occur. On the other hand, in the present modified example, it is not determined whether or not the continuous announcement effect is set for the variable effect corresponding to the winning at the starting port with the lower priority. Is not started, so that such a situation can be suppressed.

  In the above-described embodiment, a case will be described where the value of the number of reserved balls stored in the RAM 223 is reduced by 1 (see S1107 in FIG. 394) when the sound ramp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the variation process (see FIG. 381) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the number of reserved balls of the main control device 110 is subtracted according to the setting of the variation pattern command by the variation start process (S307). The value of the counter 203a (N) (see S305 in FIG. 381) is set so that the main control device 110 transmits the value to the sound ramp control device 113. The command may be transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 together with the transmission of the command. Thus, the sound lamp control device 113 can more accurately grasp the number of balls retained in the main control device 110. In this case, S1107 in FIG. 394 is omitted. Further, the value (N) of the reserved ball number counter 203a after the subtraction may be included in the fluctuation pattern command. In this case, when the variation pattern command is received, the sound ramp control device 113 may extract the number of retained balls (N) included in the variation pattern command and set the number of retained balls to the number of retained balls stored in the RAM 223.

  In the above-described embodiment, the winning in the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b and the passage through the through gate 67 are each held up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is four. It is not limited, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). In addition, for the winning in the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b, the maximum number of reserved balls may be set separately for each starting port. And any number other than "." Further, the maximum number of reserved balls in each starting port does not necessarily have to be the same value, but may be different values. In addition, the number of retained balls of the variable display based on the winning in the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b can be changed in a part of the third symbol display device 81 by a number or an area divided into four. The display may be performed in a different manner (for example, color or lighting pattern) by the number of the retained balls, and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the light emitting member is used to display the retained balls. It may be configured to notify the number.

  Further, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to scrolling the symbol as the identification information on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in the vertical direction. The design may be performed by moving and displaying a symbol along a direction or a predetermined path such as an L-shape. The dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern. For example, one or a plurality of characters may be operated or changed and displayed in a variety of ways together with the pattern or separately from the pattern. It also includes the effect display that is performed. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

  In each of the above embodiments, when performing the fluctuation effect, a case was described in which the high-speed fluctuation in which all the symbols Z1 to Z3 were scrolled so fast that the player could not visually recognize it was used. Thus, all of the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed in a reduced size so as to be invisible, or all of the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as snow noise images in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed.

  The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a twice-rights item or a three-times rights item) that increases the jackpot expectation value until a jackpot condition occurs a plurality of times (for example, two or three times) including that. ). Further, after the big hit symbol is displayed, the game may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game for giving a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, a prize winning device having a special area such as a V zone may be provided, and the pachinko machine may be put into a special game state on condition that a ball is won in the special area. Furthermore, in addition to the pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as various game machines such as areaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, so-called game machines in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating an operation lever in a state where a symbol is inserted and a symbol valid line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating a stop button. Things. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is as follows: "a display device for variably displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided. The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on the condition that the combination of the identification information at the time is a specific one ". In this case, coins, medals, etc. are representative game media. As an example.

  In the slot machine, the ratio of the number of game media paid out by a bonus (combination) to the total number of game media (coins and medals) paid out during a predetermined period is the combination of bonuses. Therefore, the number of game media to be paid out when each winning combination is established is stored in the ROM of the main control device in place of the award ball count table 202e, and is equivalent to the bonus ratio management chip or the bonus ratio management chip. In the control device that executes the function, the number of winning combinations (patterns are aligned on the activated line) established in the non-bonus game period (normal period), the number of winning combinations established during the bonus game period, and established during the AT period The number of winning combinations may be counted to manage the bonus ratio or the continuous bonus ratio.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device for variably displaying a symbol row including a plurality of symbols and then displaying the symbols in a fixed manner is provided, and a handle for hitting a ball is provided. Not included. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called big hit symbol is generated. Is a method in which a large amount of balls are paid out to a lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a game value in a game hall, so it is a game value seen in a current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of gaming machines can be solved.

  The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a twice-rights item or a three-times rights item) that increases the jackpot expectation value until a jackpot condition occurs a plurality of times (for example, two or three times) including that. ). Further, after the big hit symbol is displayed, the game may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game for giving a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, a prize winning device having a special area such as a V zone may be provided, and the pachinko machine may be put into a special game state on condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, a combination of probabilities relating to the jackpot lottery (commonly referred to as setting) may be provided in a plurality of stages, and may be implemented as a pachinko machine configured so that the setting can be changed at the game store side. Further, in addition to the pachinko machines, the present invention may be implemented as various game machines such as areaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, so-called game machines in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined.

  As a pachinko machine provided with a plurality of settings, a combination of the jackpot probability (a combination of the jackpot probability in the low-probability state and the jackpot probability in the probable change state) may be set in any of a plurality of stages (for example, six stages). Can be set as a typical example, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of or in addition to the combination of jackpot probability, for example, implemented as a pachinko machine that can change the ratio of each jackpot symbol (each jackpot type) determined in the event of a jackpot, according to the setting You may. That is, the rate at which the jackpot of the type advantageous to the player is determined may be changed according to the setting, or the rate at which the jackpot of the type disadvantageous to the player may be determined may be changed. More specifically, for example, the ratio at which the jackpot with a large number of rounds (for example, 16 rounds) is determined is changed according to the setting, or the jackpot with a small number of rounds (for example, two rounds) is determined. By changing the ratio according to the setting, the degree of advantage for each setting may be changed. In addition, for example, the rate at which a large number of time savings (for example, 100 times) is given after the end of the big hit is determined according to the setting, or a large number of time savings (for example, 0 times) is given. May be varied according to the setting. Furthermore, the rate at which the jackpot that shifts to (or easily shifts to) an advantageous gaming state (for example, a probable change state) after the end of the jackpot is varied according to the setting, or a disadvantageous gaming state (for example, a normal state) ) May be changed according to the setting at which the jackpot determined (or easily shifted) is changed. In addition, a configuration in which a jackpot type in which the ratio determined only by a specific setting is significantly higher (almost not determined by other settings) may be provided. Specifically, for example, the setting is configured to be settable in six steps from 1 to 6, and the most advantageous setting is set as setting 6. In the setting 6, when the jackpot becomes a jackpot, the jackpot of the six rounds is determined at a rate of 2%, while in other settings, the jackpot of the six rounds is determined only at a rate of 0.01%. It may be configured. With this configuration, when the jackpot ends in six rounds, the possibility of the most advantageous setting 6 becomes extremely high, so that the player pays attention to the number of rounds of the jackpot and plays the game. be able to. Alternatively, or additionally, for example, in setting 6, a configuration may be such that the ratio of the jackpot type to which 66 time savings are given after the end of the jackpot is higher than other settings. With this configuration, a game can be played while paying attention to the number of times the time-saving state ends. Alternatively, or in addition, for example, during the execution of the jackpot game, the jackpot type in which the jackpot (or the inside of the jackpot) of the jackpot operates in an operation pattern different from other jackpot types. The jackpot type may be provided so as to be easily determined by a specific setting (the determination ratio is increased). In addition, when the combination of the jackpot probability is changed according to the setting, in the low probability state, the jackpot probability becomes higher as the setting is more advantageous to the player, while in the probability change state, the setting becomes disadvantageous to the player. It is good also as a structure which makes a big hit probability high. In this configuration, particularly, in the probable change state, as the number of special symbol lotteries increases, the number of possessed balls tends to increase (the number of award balls to be paid out tends to increase more than the number of game balls fired). It is effective for gaming machines. More specifically, for example, a configuration in which the probable change state is continued until the next big win is won, and in a probable change state, it is applied to a gaming machine of a type that has a small probability with a high probability, thereby achieving an advantage of a high setting. Sex can be further enhanced. That is, if the probability of a big hit in the probability change state is low, the number of lotteries until the next big hit is likely to increase, so that the chances of winning a small hit and obtaining a prize ball also increase. Therefore, in the probability change state, it becomes easier for the player to acquire more prize balls until the next big hit, which is advantageous for the player.

  In addition, the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating an operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and a symbol valid line is determined, and a symbol is stopped and determined by operating a stop button. Things. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is as follows: "a display device for variably displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided. The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on the condition that the combination of the identification information at the time is a specific one ". In this case, coins, medals, etc. are representative game media. As an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device for variably displaying a symbol row including a plurality of symbols and then displaying the symbols in a fixed manner is provided, and a handle for hitting a ball is provided. Not included. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called big hit symbol is generated. Is a method in which a large amount of balls are paid out to a lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a game value in a game hall, so it is a game value seen in a current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of gaming machines can be solved.

  Each of the embodiments described above may be configured by combining all or a part thereof.

  Hereinafter, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described. In addition, each concept of the various inventions described below may be obtained by adding a part or a plurality of parts of the configuration of another invention to the concept of the invention or a part or a plurality of the configuration of the other invention. The concept of the invention may be modified and replaced by replacing the parts.

<Feature A group> (The update timing of the number of times saved and the timing of discriminating the end of time saved are made different)
Determining means for performing a determination when a determination condition is satisfied; dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result of the determination means for a predetermined period; and the dynamic display means A bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game when the dynamically displayed identification information is stopped and displayed with specific identification information for indicating the specific determination result; a first game state; And a second gaming state different from the gaming state; and a gaming state setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of gaming states including at least a gaming state. Updating means for updating related first information, and end determining means for determining whether the first information updated by the updating means satisfies an ending condition, wherein the game state setting is performed. means When the end determination unit determines that the end condition is satisfied in a state where the first game state is set, the second game state is set, and the gaming machine includes: A gaming machine A1 wherein an update timing of the first information by the update means is executed differently from an end determination timing for determining whether or not the end condition is satisfied by the end determination means.

  In recent years, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on a game board surface, the success or failure of the game is determined by lottery, and a lottery result stopped and displayed after a predetermined fluctuation period is hit. If so, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player has been executed. Further, a plurality of game states can be set, and when a specific game state is set, an advantageous state in which game balls easily enter the starting port is set until the number of lotteries reaches the specific number. (For example, JP-A-2001-033569). In such a gaming machine, the player can play the game while expecting the first game state to be set, thereby increasing the player's willingness to play. Further, in the above-described gaming machine, the lottery result measurement (subtraction) processing during the advantageous state and the advantageous state end processing performed based on the fact that the number of lotteries reaches the specific number are stopped and the lottery result is stopped and displayed. This is configured so as to be executed at the timing that is performed, and to provide the set advantageous state to the player for a longer period of time. However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the lottery result is stopped and displayed, including the process of counting (subtracting) the number of lotteries during the advantageous state and the process of ending the advantageous state performed based on the fact that the number of lotteries has reached the specific number. Since it is configured to be executed at the timing of the execution, there is a problem that the processing executed at a predetermined timing (stop display timing of the lottery result) increases. An object of the above-described gaming machine is to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing a processing load by reducing a processing amount executed at the same timing.

  In recent years, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a game for executing a privilege game is configured to be able to be repeatedly executed (duplicate game is possible), and a lottery in the other game is performed in accordance with a game result of one game. There is a gaming machine configured to interrupt the subtraction of a fluctuation period for indicating a result (for example, JP-A-2015-12907). In such a game, a plurality of games can be executed in an overlapping manner, so that a game aiming to execute a privilege game can be efficiently executed. Furthermore, since the other game can be temporarily interrupted in accordance with the game result of one game, the privilege game is repeatedly executed by a plurality of games executed in an overlapping manner. On the other hand, it is possible to suppress execution of a privilege game that is difficult to understand.

  However, in the case where the above-described configuration in which the advantageous state can be set is used for the gaming machine capable of executing the overlapping game, the processing of counting (subtracting) the number of lotteries during the advantageous state and the number of lotteries reaching the specific number are performed. Since the end process of the advantageous state executed based on the lottery result is executed at the timing when the lottery result is stopped and displayed, for example, the lottery result in the other game based on the bonus game being given by one game In the case where the subtraction of the variable time for indicating the suspension is interrupted and the advantageous state is set by the awarded bonus game, the interrupted variable time subtraction is resumed and the lottery result is stopped and displayed. In such a case, there is a problem that the measurement (subtraction) processing of the number of lotteries is executed. In other words, since the lottery result executed in a state other than the advantageous state is stopped and displayed, the process of measuring (subtracting) the number of lotteries in the advantageous state is executed. There was a problem that it could not be suitably executed. In the above-described gaming machine, an object is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of the game by appropriately executing a game in an advantageous state to a player.

  According to the gaming machine A1, the updating of the first information by the updating unit and the determination of the end by the end determining unit can be executed at different timings. Therefore, when the first information is updated and the end condition is satisfied, the amount of processing executed at the same timing can be reduced, and the processing load can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine A1, the updating timing is a timing at which the determination is performed by the determination unit.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A1, the update timing of the first information related to the determination by the determination unit is the timing at which the determination is performed by the determination unit. There is an effect that information can be reliably updated. Further, since the first information can be updated by the updating unit by performing the determination by the determining unit, the player is interested in both the determination of the determining unit and the set game state. This has the effect that the interest in the game can be improved. Furthermore, when the determination is performed by the determination unit, the first information is updated by the update unit, so that it is possible to suppress an unnecessary execution of the update process and reduce the processing load. There is.

  In the gaming machine A3, the end determination timing in the gaming machine A1 or A2 is after the identification information is stopped and displayed.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1 or A2, the determination of the end condition is performed during a period in which the identification information is not dynamically displayed. It is possible to prevent the game state from changing while watching the dynamic display of the identification information. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand game.

  In the gaming machine A3, the discriminating means performs discrimination corresponding to the gaming state set by the gaming state setting means, and the end determination timing is determined after the identification information is stopped and displayed. Next, the gaming machine A4 is a period until the determination by the determination means is performed.

  According to the gaming machine A4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A1. That is, although the first information is updated by the updating means to the first information that can satisfy the termination condition, the determination by the determining means is performed before the second game state is set. Can be suppressed. Therefore, even if the update timing of the first information is different from the end determination timing, the determination performed by the determination unit can be performed properly.

  The gaming machine A5 according to any one of the gaming machines A2 to A4, wherein the first information is updated by the updating means based on the number of times of the determination performed by the determining means.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the first information is updated every time the determination unit performs the determination, so that the first information is updated to the player. Can be easily understood. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a situation in which the first game state is suddenly shifted to the second game state and the player is confused.

  In the gaming machine A5, the update unit updates the first information after the determination by the determination unit is performed and before dynamic display for indicating a determination result of the determination is performed. A gaming machine A6.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A5, the first information is not updated during the period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed, so that the processing load can be reduced.

  In the gaming machines A1 to A6, when the interruption condition is satisfied in a state where the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, the interruption means for interrupting the dynamic display, and the interruption is performed by the interruption means. A resuming unit that resumes the dynamic display when a resuming condition is satisfied; and the first information updated by the updating unit can be changed when the dynamic display is interrupted by the suspending unit. Gaming machine A7, characterized by having simple information variable means.

  According to the gaming machine A7, the following effects are obtained in addition to the effects of the gaming machines A1 to A6. That is, when dynamic display is interrupted, the first information may be changed by the information changing unit. Therefore, during the dynamic display of the identification information, in addition to the determination result of the determination means, the presence or absence of the interruption can be enjoyed for the player, and the interest of the game can be improved. .

  In the gaming machine A7, the information changing means changes the first information to variable first information in which the end condition is less likely to be satisfied than the first information.

  According to the gaming machine A8, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A7. That is, during the dynamic display of the identification information, it is possible to cause the player to play the game while expecting that the dynamic display is interrupted by the interrupting means, thereby improving the interest of the game. .

  In the gaming machine A7 or A8, the privilege game execution means may execute the privilege game even when a second condition different from a first condition that can be satisfied based on the result of the determination performed by the determination means is satisfied. A gaming machine A9 that can be executed, and wherein the interruption condition is satisfied based on the second condition being satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A7 or A8, the interruption condition can be satisfied when the second condition for enabling the bonus game to be executed without using the determination by the determination unit is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a game different from the determination by the determination means, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine A9, the game machine has a ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, and the second condition is satisfied when a game ball enters the ball entry means. A10.

  According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A9, as a game different from the discrimination by the discriminating means, it is possible to cause a game in which a game ball is made to enter the ball-entering means. There is an effect that it can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A10, a variable member that can be changed between a first state in which a game ball can enter the ball entry means and a second state in which the game ball is less likely to enter than the first state, Variable control means capable of performing a variable operation of changing a member to a first state for a predetermined period based on establishment of an execution condition, wherein the variable control means sets a state in which the first game state is set. The gaming machine A11 is characterized in that the variable operation is easier to execute than when the second gaming state is set.

  According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A10, the period during which the first gaming state is more likely to be satisfied than the second gaming state is continued based on the establishment of the second condition. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to play the game for satisfying the second condition.

<Characteristic B group> (Depending on the setting conditions, the rate at which the privilege is given by the winning ball is changed)
A variable ball-in means capable of changing between a first state in which game balls can enter and a second state in which game balls are less likely to enter than the first state, and the variable ball-in means based on establishment of execution conditions Variable control means for changing means from the second state to the first state for a predetermined period; a specific area through which game balls entering the variable ball-in means can pass; and a game ball entering the specific area Setting information discriminating means capable of discriminating setting information when the variable ball-in means is variably controlled by the variable control means in a gaming machine having a privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege based on the According to the setting information determined by the setting information determining means, the first state in which the game ball that has entered the variable ball-in means easily passes through the specific area, and the game ball which is less likely to pass than the first state. A switching unit that can be switched to a second state. Gaming machine B1, characterized in that it is intended to.

  In recent years, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on a game board surface, the success or failure of the game is determined by lottery, and a lottery result stopped and displayed after a predetermined fluctuation period is hit. If so, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player has been executed. Further, as a starting port, there is provided a variable ball input means provided with a variable member which can be changed between a first state in which game balls can enter and a second state in which the game balls are restricted, and the variable ball input means is provided with the variable ball input means. There is a gaming machine configured to be able to set an advantageous state that is easy to change to the first state and an unfavorable state that is hard to change to the first state than the first gaming state (for example, JP-A-2001-033569). Gazette). In such a gaming machine, the ease of entry of the game ball into the variable ball entry means is varied so that the player can actively play the game while expecting that the advantageous state is set. Although it was possible to do so, even if the disadvantaged state is set, if the game ball is entered into the variable ball entry means, the lottery will be executed, so the variable entry in the disadvantaged state There is a risk that the game may be played at the timing when the means enters the first state, and there is a problem that the player's willingness to set the advantageous state is reduced. In the above-described gaming machine, in the state where the disadvantage state is set, it is difficult to perform the lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the variable ball entry means, so that the player's motivation to play can be increased. It aims to provide a gaming machine.

  According to the gaming machine B1, it is possible to switch between the first state and the second state in accordance with the setting information. Therefore, the player is interested in the setting information at the time when the game ball enters the variable entering means. Can be provided. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B1, the game machine B1 has operation control means for controlling the operation of the switching means, and the switching means is configured such that a game ball having entered the variable ball-in means has a first flow path and the first flow path. A plurality of flow paths including a different second flow path, wherein the plurality of flow paths can be switched so as to flow down any one of the flow paths, and the operation control means is configured by the variable control means An operation control to the switching means is started based on the start of the control, and a game ball flowing down the first flow path by the switching means can pass through the specific area. Gaming machine B2.

  According to the gaming machine B2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B1. That is, based on the start of the control by the variable control means, the operation control means controls the operation of the switching means, and when the game ball entering the variable ball input means flows down the first flow path by the switching means, passes through the specific area. Can be done. Thereby, the variable control for facilitating the entry of the game ball into the variable ball entry means and the operation control of the switching means can be linked with each other. There is an effect that whether or not the vehicle passes through can be appropriately controlled.

  In the gaming machine B2, the game ball that has flowed down to the second flow path by the switching means is less likely to pass through the specific area than the game ball that has flowed down to the first flow path. Gaming machine B3.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B2, the game balls flowing down the second flow path can be made harder to pass through the specific area than the game balls flowing down the first flow path. There is an effect that it is possible to set the passing ratio of the game balls which have entered the variable ball entry means to the specific area only by controlling the operation of the switching means by the control means.

  In the gaming machine B2 or B3, the game machine B2 or B3 has a normal area through which the game ball entered the variable ball entry means can pass, and the normal area is the specific area of the game ball entered the variable ball entry means. Are formed so that the game balls that have not passed through the game area are passed, and the privilege is not given when the game balls pass through the normal area. Gaming machine B4.

  According to the gaming machine B4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B2 or B3. That is, if the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means passes through the normal area, no benefit is given. Therefore, even if a game ball excessively enters the variable ball entry means, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent a player from being provided with an excessive privilege. In addition, by providing a normal area in the variable ball entry means, a mechanism for suppressing game balls from entering the variable ball entry means is provided with an extra privilege to the player without providing a mechanism outside the variable ball entry means. Can be suppressed from being given, so that there is an effect that the area outside the variable ball entry means can be easily used for other purposes.

  In any one of the gaming machines B2 to B4, a game ball flowing down the first flow path is provided with a third flow path different from the second flow path, and different from the second flow path and the third flow path. And a fourth flow path, and a distribution means capable of being distributed to the fourth flow path, wherein the gaming machine has, as the specific area, a first ball into which a game ball distributed to the third flow path by the distribution means can enter. And at least a specific region, and a second specific region different from the first specific region into which game balls distributed to the fourth flow path by the distribution means can enter, and wherein the privilege granting means Is a game machine in which the content of the award is different between a case where a game ball enters the first specific region and a case where a game ball enters the second specific region. B5.

  According to the gaming machine B5, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines B2 to B4. That is, when the game ball that has flowed down to the first flow path by the switching means is distributed to the third flow path by the distribution means, it passes through the first specific area, and when it is distributed to the fourth flow path. It passes through the second specific flow path. Thereby, when a game ball enters the variable ball entry means according to the establishment condition of the setting condition, the ease with which the privilege is given by the privilege granting means is changed, and further, it is given by the distribution means. Benefits can be different. Therefore, whether or not the privilege is granted and the content of the privilege to be granted are determined in a stepwise manner. There is an effect that the period during which the game is enjoyed can be lengthened. In the case of using such a configuration, it is preferable to use a function of notifying information for indicating a flowing state of the game ball in the variable ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp the flowing state of the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means, and thus it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, it is preferable to use a function of notifying information for indicating that the setting condition is satisfied. This allows the player to understand that it is a situation in which some benefits are likely to be given by allowing the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means at the time before the game ball is entered into the variable ball entry means. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play the game with expectation.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the game machine has game state setting means capable of at least setting a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state. A gaming machine B6 characterized in that it is easier to switch to the first state when the first gaming state is set by the setting means than when the second gaming state is set.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the ease of switching to the first state can be changed according to the set gaming state. Thus, it is possible to make the player interested in the currently set game state, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the variable control means changes the variable ball-in means with a first variable pattern and a second variable pattern in which game balls are harder to enter than the first variable pattern. Wherein the switching means is switchable to at least the first state when the variable control means variably controls the variable ball entry means with the first variable pattern. Gaming machine B7.

  According to the gaming machine B7, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines B1 to B5. That is, when the second variable pattern is set by the variable control means, it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means than when the second variable pattern is set. . Then, the switching means can be switched to the first state when variably controlled by the first variable pattern. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a large number of game balls that cannot pass through the specific area are generated, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B7, the privilege granting means executes a specific game based on a game ball having entered the specific area, and the gaming machine executes the special game by the privilege granting means. A gaming machine B8 comprising a privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game when a result of the specified game performed is a predetermined result.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B7, if the result of the specific game executed when the game ball passes through the specific area is a predetermined result, the bonus game is executed. Since the game is executed, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to play a game for passing the game ball to the specific area.

<Feature C Group> (In a gaming machine capable of performing a plurality of games in an overlapping manner, an effect mode related to the other game is set in accordance with one of the fluctuation times)
Discriminating means for executing a discrimination when a discriminating condition is satisfied; dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result of the discriminating means; A dynamic display period determining unit that determines a dynamic display period of the displayed identification information based on the selection information; and the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display unit indicates the specific determination result. A bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game when stopped and displayed with specific identification information for identifying a specific game that can execute a specific game during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed. A game execution means, a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect related to the specific game, and an effect mode of the specific effect executed by the specific effect execution means to at least information corresponding to the selection information. Gaming machine C1, characterized in that those having a presentation mode setting means for setting Zui.

  In recent years, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a game for executing a privilege game is configured to be able to be repeatedly executed (duplicate game is possible), and a game result is shown for each game executed in an overlapping manner. (For example, JP-A-2011-45518). In such a game, in a case where a plurality of games are performed in an overlapping manner, each of the games can be grasped in an easily understandable manner by looking at each effect display executed in a duplicate manner. Since the effect mode of the effect display to be performed is determined based only on the content of the corresponding game, and it is not possible to execute an effect related to a plurality of games executed in duplicate, the effect display being executed Therefore, there is a problem that it is difficult to grasp the entirety of the game being repeatedly executed, and the effect of the effect is reduced. In the above-mentioned gaming machine, by providing an effect in which it is easy to comprehend the contents of a plurality of games to be executed in an overlapping manner, a staging effect is enhanced, and a gaming machine is provided in which a player can enthusiastically play a game. The purpose is to:

  According to the gaming machine C1, the effect mode of the specific effect can be determined based on the selection information. Therefore, an effect in which the dynamic display of the identification information that is repeatedly executed and the specific game are associated with each other is executed. This has the effect that the effect can be enhanced. In addition, since the production mode of the specific production can be determined based on the selection information, it is possible to make the player enthusiastically play a game in order to overlap a plurality of games in order to see various production modes. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine C1, the game machine C1 has a remaining period determination unit that can determine a remaining period of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display unit, and the effect mode setting unit is determined by the remaining period determination unit. The gaming machine C2, wherein the effect mode is set based on the remaining period.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C1, the effect mode of the specific effect is set based on the remaining period of the identification information. The effect mode of the specific effect can be changed accordingly. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can enthusiastically play the game at various timings in order to overlap a plurality of games in order to see various presentation modes.

  In the gaming machine C2, when an interruption condition is satisfied in a state where the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, an interruption means for interrupting the dynamic display, and the interruption is interrupted by the interruption means. Resuming means for resuming the dynamic display based on the end of the privilege game, wherein the interruption condition is that the game result of the specific game executed by the specific game execution means is a predetermined game result. A gaming machine C3 characterized by being established when:

  According to the gaming machine C3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C2. That is, the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display means can be interrupted by the interruption means. Therefore, not only in the effect to be executed but also in the actual game, the discrimination by the discriminating means and the specific game can be associated with each other, so that the effect of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine C3, there is provided a game state setting means capable of setting a first game state and a second game state in which a game more advantageous to the player is executed than the first game state, The means is for setting the first game state when a specific period has elapsed since the second game state was set, and the resuming means sets the second game state after the end of the privilege game. In this case, the suspended dynamic display is restarted as the dynamic display in the second game state, and the specific period is the remaining period of the identification information restarted by the restarting means. The effect mode setting means sets the effect mode based on the remaining period when the dynamic display is interrupted by the interrupting means. Machine C4.

  According to the gaming machine C4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C3. That is, the length of the specific period in which the second game state in which the game advantageous to the player is executed is set varies according to the remaining period of the dynamic display interrupted by the interrupting means. And it is set based on the length of the remaining period of the dynamic display when the production mode of the specific production is interrupted by the interruption means. Therefore, the degree of advantage of a game to be executed later can be grasped by the effect mode of the specific effect, and thus there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C4, the remaining period discriminating means capable of discriminating the remaining time of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and the remaining time discriminated by the remaining time discriminating means is Advantageous condition determining means for determining whether or not the advantageous condition is satisfied, wherein the effect mode setting means sets the effect mode based on the determination result of the advantageous condition determining means. Gaming machine C5.

  According to the gaming machine C5, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines C1 to C4. That is, it is determined by the advantageous condition determining means whether the remaining period satisfies the advantageous condition, and the effect mode of the specific effect is set based on the determination result. There is an effect that the player can be notified of the presence of the player in an easily understandable manner.

  In the gaming machine C5, the advantageous condition determining means determines that the advantageous condition is satisfied when the remaining period is longer than the first period.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C5, when the remaining period of the identification information being dynamically displayed is longer than the first period, it is determined that the advantageous condition is satisfied, and thus the processing is executed. There is an effect that the player can enthusiastically play the game to execute the specific game based on the specific effect.

  In the gaming machine C4 or C5, a ball-in means for allowing a game ball to enter, an acquisition means for acquiring information when a game ball enters the ball-in means, and the acquisition acquired by the acquisition means Storage means capable of storing information up to a predetermined number, wherein the determination means performs a determination based on the acquired information stored in the storage means when the determination condition is satisfied And a pre-determination unit that can pre-determine the obtained information stored in the storage unit before the determination based on the obtained information is executed by the determination unit. Means for determining in advance a dynamic display period of the identification information for indicating a result of the determination by the determination means based on at least the acquired information; Prejudice Gaming machine C6, characterized in that in which it is determined that meets the favorable condition is longer than the dynamic display period is determined by means.

  According to the gaming machine C6, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine C4 or C5. That is, the acquired information determined by the determining unit is stored in the storage unit up to a predetermined number, and the dynamic display period corresponding to the acquired information stored in the storage unit is determined in advance. Then, when it is determined that the remaining period of the active dynamic display is longer than the previously determined dynamic display period, it is determined that the advantageous condition is satisfied. Therefore, the game can be performed while predicting the dynamic display interruption timing that is advantageous to the player based on the specific effect to be executed, and thus there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine C6, the advantageous condition determining unit determines a determination result of the advance determining unit corresponding to the obtained information next determined by the determining unit among the obtained information stored in the storage unit. A gaming machine C7 for determining whether or not the object satisfies the advantageous condition.

  According to the gaming machine C7, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C6. That is, the advantageous condition is satisfied when the remaining period is longer than the dynamic display period corresponding to the acquired information for which the determination is performed next by the determination unit. The player can determine whether to suspend the target display or the next dynamic display to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player select a game, and it is possible to increase the desire to participate in the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C7, the gaming state setting unit may be configured such that the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display unit in a state where the first gaming state is set as the specific period. The first game state is set when a period until a predetermined number of times is stopped and displayed at least two or more times is set in advance, and the first game state is set. The period calculating unit calculates the specific period by adding a dynamic display period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display unit to the specific number of times as an upper limit. A game machine C8 comprising period mode display means capable of displaying a period mode for indicating the specific period calculated by the above.

  According to the gaming machine C8, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machines C1 to C7. That is, it is possible to grasp the game state in the second game state based on the effect mode of the specific effect, while observing the length of the specific period by looking at the period mode displayed by the period mode display means. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to gaze at various effects to be performed, and it is possible to enhance the effect.

<Characteristic D group> (The end condition of the winning game is made different depending on the operation on the operation means)
A variable ball entry means capable of changing between a first state in which game balls can enter and a second state in which game balls are less likely to enter than the first state, and a variable entry means when the first condition is satisfied; A specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game in which the ball entry means is changed from the second state to the first state for a predetermined period of time, the specific game being executed by the specific game execution means. The first ending condition that is satisfied when a predetermined number of game balls enter the variable ball entry means, and the period in which the variable ball entry means is changed to the first state has passed the predetermined period. Of a plurality of end conditions including a second end condition that is satisfied in the case, an end unit that ends when one end condition is satisfied, a first operation, a second operation different from the first operation, Operating means capable of executing Operation is better when is executed, the second than when the operation is executed, the gaming machine wherein the first end condition is one which easily obtained D1.

  In recent years, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on a game board surface, the success or failure of the game is determined by lottery, and a lottery result stopped and displayed after a predetermined fluctuation period is hit. If there is, a bonus game in which a game ball can be inserted into an attacker (specific winning opening) is executed, and a plurality of conditions for terminating the bonus game are set. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-45518). In such a gaming machine, generally, a time ending condition for ending a privilege game based on an elapsed time since execution of a privilege game and a number of gaming balls entering an attacker during the privilege game are based on A prize ending condition for ending the privilege game is set, and control for ending the privilege game is executed when any of the ending conditions is satisfied.

  However, since the same game is performed every time during the bonus game, even when a plurality of end conditions are set, basically, only one of the end conditions is easily satisfied. In other words, in a gaming machine configured so that a game ball can be easily won by an attacker during a bonus game, the winning end condition becomes easier to be established before the time end condition is established, and the attacker can enter the attacker during the bonus game. In a gaming machine configured such that it is difficult to win a game ball, the time end condition is more likely to be satisfied before the winning end condition is satisfied.

  In this way, even if a plurality of end conditions of the privilege game are set, if the end conditions that can be satisfied are almost specific end conditions, the advantage of setting a plurality of end conditions, that is, which end condition There is a problem that it is difficult to make it difficult for the player to be interested in a game during the privilege game by making it difficult to understand whether or not the privilege game is ended based on the establishment. In the above-described gaming machine, the player actively performs a game during the privilege game by suppressing that the fulfilled termination condition is biased toward a specific termination condition among a plurality of termination conditions for terminating the privilege game. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of performing the above.

  According to the gaming machine D1, it is possible to make the ending condition for ending the specific game being executed different depending on the content of the operation executed by the operation means, so that the player can actively play the game. There is an effect that can be.

  The gaming machine D1 includes a selection effect execution unit capable of executing a selection effect for causing a player to select whether to execute the first operation or the second operation on the operation unit. Gaming machine D2.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D1, the end condition can be selected based on the selection effect performed by the selection effect execution means, so that a game that is easy for the player to understand can be provided. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine D2, there is provided an effect mode setting means capable of setting an effect mode of the selected effect executed by the selected effect executing means, wherein the effect mode setting means is provided when the first end condition is satisfied; The gaming machine D3, wherein the effect mode is set differently when the privilege given after the end of the specific game is different from when the second end condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine D3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D2. In other words, the effect of the selected effect can be changed according to the privilege given after the end of the specific game, so that the player pays attention to the selected effect to be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that a staging effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine D3, determination means for performing a determination when a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied, and identification information for indicating a result of the determination by the determination means being dynamically displayed for a predetermined period. Can be executed when the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means is stopped and displayed with the specific identification information for indicating the specific determination result. A bonus game execution unit, and a period determination unit that can determine a period until the bonus game execution unit is executed based on a result of the determination by the determination unit. A game machine D4 for setting an effect mode of the selected effect based on a timing at which the effect is executed and a result of the judgment by the period judgment means.

  According to the gaming machine D4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D3. That is, the effect mode of the selected effect is set based on the execution timing of the specific game and the timing at which the privilege game is executed, and therefore, based on the selected effect performed, The game can be played while predicting whether the period from the end of the specific game to the execution of the privilege game can be shortened by satisfying the end condition. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased.

  In the gaming machine D4, the game machine D4 has a second variable ball entry means that is variable between a third state in which game balls can enter and a fourth state in which game balls are less likely to enter than the third state, The privilege game executing means is configured to vary the second variable ball-in means in a predetermined variable pattern between the third state and the fourth state for a predetermined period as the privilege game. The types of the privilege games to be executed include a first privilege type, and a second privilege type in which the period during which the second variable pitching means is in the fourth state during the privilege game is longer than the first privilege type. And a type setting unit for setting one privilege type among a plurality of privilege types including at least the special mode, wherein the effect mode setting unit executes at the end timing of the specific game based on the start timing of the specific game. The privilege play that can be done The case of the type which is the first award type, in the case of the second award type, game machine is characterized in that varying the representation embodiment D5.

  According to the gaming machine D5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D4. In other words, if the special game can be executed at the end timing of the specific game, the effect mode of the selected effect is set according to the type of the special game. The game can be performed while predicting which end condition is satisfied for the specific game to end the specific game in a more advantageous situation for the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased.

  In the gaming machine D5, the end timing of the specific game is the first situation in which the dynamic display of the identification information is being executed by the dynamic display means, or the privilege game is executed by the privilege game executing means. And a state determining means for determining whether the state is the second state, wherein the effect state setting means varies the effect state between the case of the first state and the case of the second state. A gaming machine D6.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D5, the effect of the selected effect is determined depending on whether the timing at which the specific game can be ended is during the dynamic display of the identification information or the execution of the privilege game. Since the mode can be made different, based on the selected effect to be executed, it is possible to end the specific game in a situation that is advantageous to the player if any of the end conditions is satisfied for the specific game being executed. The game can be performed while predicting whether it is possible. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased.

  The gaming machine D6 further includes a remaining period determining unit that determines a remaining period of the dynamic display at an end timing of the specific game when the situation determining unit determines the first situation. When the remaining period is equal to or longer than a predetermined period by the remaining period determining unit, the mode setting unit sets an effect mode different from the case where the remaining period is shorter than the predetermined period. Gaming machine D7.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D6, the effect of the selected effect is changed according to the length of the remaining period of the identification information dynamically displayed at the timing when the specific game can be ended. Therefore, based on the selected effect to be executed, it is better to satisfy any of the end conditions for the specific game being executed, and to shorten the period from the end of the specific game to the execution of the privilege game. The game can be played while predicting whether the game can be shortened. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased.

  In any of the gaming machines D4 to D7, a specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game when an execution condition is satisfied, and the specific game in a state where the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. And a resuming means for resuming the dynamic display suspended by the suspending means when the specific game is over. A gaming machine D8 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D4 to D7, the following effect is achieved. That is, while the specific game is being executed, the dynamic display can be interrupted, so that the duration of the dynamic display interruption period can be varied by changing the end condition for terminating the specific game. . Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to play the game.

  In the gaming machine D8, the game machine D8 has a specific area through which a game ball entering the variable ball entry means can pass, and the privilege game execution means executes the privilege game even when a game ball passes through the specific area. A gaming machine D9 characterized by being possible.

  According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D8, the bonus game can be executed even when the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means passes through the specific area. It is possible to provide a pleasure of selecting whether to play a game for satisfying the second end condition or to play a game for satisfying the first end condition with respect to a specific game, thereby improving the interest of the game. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine D8 or D9, a game state setting means capable of at least setting a first game state and a second game state in which a game more advantageous to the player than the first game state is executed as the game state. The game state setting means is configured to perform the first game when the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means is stopped and displayed a specific number of times in a state where the second game state is set. A gaming machine D10 for setting a state.

  According to the gaming machine D10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D8 or D9, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the second game state in which a game advantageous to the player is executed ends based on the number of times of dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display means, the dynamic display is interrupted during the second game state. Is effective when extending the duration of the second game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a pleasure for the player to select whether to perform a game for satisfying the second end condition or a game for satisfying the first end condition for the specific game. This has the effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

<Feature E group> (Navi display of the target of the hit game)
Variable ball entry means which can be changed between a first state in which game balls can enter and a second state in which game balls are less likely to enter than the first state, and a judgment is executed when a judgment condition is satisfied. Discriminating means, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result of the discriminating means, and the discrimination result of the discriminating means is identified by the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. A bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game in which the variable ball entry means is changed from the second state to the first state for a predetermined period of time when the display is stopped with the specific identification information indicating the result of the determination. And a display control means for displaying a display image indicating the variable ball-in means on a display means when the privilege game is executed in the gaming machine E1. .

  In recent years, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on a game board surface, the success or failure of a game is determined by lottery, and a lottery result stopped and displayed after a predetermined fluctuation period is hit. In some cases, as a bonus game that is advantageous to the player, a game for opening a ball entry means, in which a game ball is normally difficult to enter, has been executed. Further, there is a gaming machine in which the arrangement position of a starting port is different from the arrangement position of a ball entry means opened during a privilege game (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-45518). In such a game, the position at which a game ball is fired to a player is varied between a case where a player is aiming at a starting port and a case where a bonus game is performed. Was able to provide games that did not come.

  However, if the game for aiming at the starting port is continuously executed when the privilege game is executed, the ball cannot be put into the ball entry means during the privilege game, and the player loses money. May occur.

  In recent gaming machines, in order to enhance the interest of the game, a plurality of devices (variable from a state in which a ball is difficult to enter the ball to a state in which it is easy to enter the ball according to the game content) are set in a limited game area. Devices) are densely arranged. In such a gaming machine, it is difficult for the player to understand to which device the game ball should be fired, and there is a problem that the player plays an inappropriate game and loses the player. Was. In the above-mentioned gaming machine, an object is to provide a game which is easy for a player to understand.

  According to the gaming machine E1, a display image indicating the variable ball entry means is displayed on the display means by the display control means, so that when the privilege game is executed, it is determined where to aim and fire the game ball. Can be easily informed to the person. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand game.

  In the gaming machine E1, the display control means displays the display image on the display means at least during a period from when the specific identification information is stopped and displayed to when the variable ball input means is changed to the first state. A gaming machine E2 characterized by being displayed.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E1, the display image is displayed before the variable ball entry means is changed to the first state. In this case, a game ball can be made to enter the variable entering means. Therefore, there is an effect that a game that is easy to understand for the player can be provided.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, as the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means, a privilege game type selecting means capable of selecting one privilege game type from a plurality of privilege game types, and the display control means A display mode setting unit configured to set a display mode of the display image to be displayed on the display unit, wherein the display mode setting unit performs different display according to the privilege game type selected by the privilege game type selection unit. A gaming machine E3 characterized in that the mode can be set.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1 or E2, the display mode of the display image can be changed based on the jackpot type, so that the privilege game can be executed in an easily understandable manner and the privilege game can be executed. Can be suggested to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine E3, the award game execution means can execute the award game having a different value according to the award game type selected by the award game type selection means. .

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E3, a privilege game having a different value is executed according to the privilege game type, so that the player is gazed at the display mode of the display image displayed on the display means. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that a staging effect can be enhanced.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the variable ball input means has ball entry detection means capable of detecting that a game ball has entered, and the display mode setting means controls the display means by the display control means. A game machine E5 characterized by variably setting the display mode of the display image displayed on the basis of the detection of the incoming ball by the incoming ball detection means.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the display mode of the display image can be changed when the game ball enters the variable ball entry unit by the ball entry detection unit. Therefore, it is possible to inform the player of the progress of the privilege game in an easily understandable manner.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E5, the game device includes an operation unit that can be operated by a player, and an operation determination unit that can determine an operation performed on the operation unit. The gaming machine E6, wherein the display mode is variably set based on a determination result of the operation determining means.

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E5, the display mode of the display image can be changed by the player operating the operating means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to play can be improved.

  In the gaming machine E6, the display mode setting means can set a display mode in which the display image is enlarged or reduced based on the determination result of the operation determining means. .

  According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E6, the display image can be enlarged or reduced based on the operation on the operation means. With this, a player who does not need to display the display image when the bonus game is executed can display the display image in a small size, so that the display area formed on the display unit is used for another effect display. Becomes possible. Therefore, there is an effect that a suitable display can be executed by the player.

  In the gaming machine E6 or E7, the display mode setting unit can set a rotation display mode in which the display image is rotated from a first position to a second position based on a determination result of the operation determining unit. A gaming machine E8, which is characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E6 or E7, the display image can be rotated based on the operation on the operation means, so that the player can visually recognize the detailed configuration of the variable ball entry means. There is an effect that can be.

<Characteristic F group> (Time saving end timing is switched according to conditions)
Determining means for performing a determination when a determination condition is satisfied; dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result of the determination means for a predetermined period; and the dynamic display means A bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game when the dynamically displayed identification information is stopped and displayed with specific identification information for indicating the specific determination result; a first game state; A plurality of game states including at least a second game state different from the game state, a game state setting unit capable of setting any game state, an update unit capable of updating predetermined information, and the update unit. End determination means capable of determining whether the updated predetermined information satisfies an end condition, wherein the end determination means determines the end condition by the end determination means in a state where the first game state is set. Fulfillment A game machine capable of setting the second game state when it is determined that the end condition determination means has a switching means capable of switching the execution timing of the end condition determination means based on establishment of a switching condition. A gaming machine F1 characterized by the following.

  In recent years, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on a game board surface, the success or failure of the game is determined by lottery, and a lottery result stopped and displayed after a predetermined fluctuation period is hit. If so, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player has been executed. Further, a plurality of game states can be set, and when a specific game state is set, an advantageous state in which game balls easily enter the starting port is set until the number of lotteries reaches the specific number. (For example, JP-A-2001-033569). In such a gaming machine, the player can play the game while expecting the first game state to be set, thereby increasing the player's willingness to play. Further, in the above-described gaming machine, the lottery result measurement (subtraction) processing during the advantageous state and the advantageous state end processing performed based on the fact that the number of lotteries reaches the specific number are stopped and the lottery result is stopped and displayed. This is configured so as to be executed at the timing that is performed, and to provide the set advantageous state to the player for a longer period of time. However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the lottery result is stopped and displayed, including the process of counting (subtracting) the number of lotteries during the advantageous state and the process of ending the advantageous state performed based on the fact that the number of lotteries has reached the specific number. Since it is configured to be executed at the timing of the execution, there is a problem that the processing executed at a predetermined timing (stop display timing of the lottery result) increases. An object of the above-described gaming machine is to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing a processing load by reducing a processing amount executed at the same timing.

  In recent years, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a game for executing a privilege game is configured to be able to be repeatedly executed (duplicate game is possible), and a lottery in the other game is performed in accordance with a game result of one game. There is a gaming machine configured to interrupt the subtraction of a fluctuation period for indicating a result (for example, JP-A-2015-12907). In such a game, a plurality of games can be executed in an overlapping manner, so that a game aiming to execute a privilege game can be efficiently executed. Furthermore, since the other game can be temporarily interrupted in accordance with the game result of one game, the privilege game is repeatedly executed by a plurality of games executed in an overlapping manner. On the other hand, it is possible to suppress execution of a privilege game that is difficult to understand.

  However, in the case where the above-described configuration in which the advantageous state can be set is used for the gaming machine capable of executing the overlapping game, the processing of counting (subtracting) the number of lotteries during the advantageous state and the number of lotteries reaching the specific number are performed. Since the end process of the advantageous state executed based on the lottery result is executed at the timing when the lottery result is stopped and displayed, for example, the lottery result in the other game based on the bonus game being given by one game In the case where the subtraction of the variable time for indicating the suspension is interrupted and the advantageous state is set by the awarded bonus game, the interrupted variable time subtraction is resumed and the lottery result is stopped and displayed. In such a case, there is a problem that the measurement (subtraction) processing of the number of lotteries is executed. In other words, since the lottery result executed in a state other than the advantageous state is stopped and displayed, the process of measuring (subtracting) the number of lotteries in the advantageous state is executed. There was a problem that it could not be suitably executed. In the above-described gaming machine, an object is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of the game by appropriately executing a game in an advantageous state to a player.

  According to the gaming machine F1, the execution timing of the end condition determination means can be switched based on the establishment of the switching condition, so that it is difficult for the player to know at which timing the first gaming state ends. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine F1, the updating unit is capable of updating, as the predetermined information, at least first information based on the number of times the determination is performed by the determination unit, and the switching condition is updated by the updating unit. A gaming machine F2, which can be established when the first information obtained satisfies the end condition.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1, the switching condition can be satisfied when the number of determinations by the determination means satisfies the end condition. The player who has performed the determination by the determination means can be caused to play the game while pounding whether or not the first game state ends. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine F2, when the second determination condition is satisfied, a second determination unit that executes a second determination, and second identification information for indicating a result of the second determination by the second determination unit are moved for a predetermined period. Second dynamic display means capable of dynamic display, and the second identification information dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means, for indicating the specific second determination result. And a second privilege game executing means capable of executing a second privilege game when the information is stopped and displayed, wherein the switching condition is such that the result of the second determination by the second determination means is the second determination. A gaming machine F3, which can be established when it is a result.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F2, the switching condition can be satisfied based on the second determination performed by the second determination unit different from the determination unit, so that the end is achieved. When the determination by the determination means is performed until the condition is satisfied, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the switching condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the switching unit delays the execution timing of the end condition determination unit for a specific period, and the determination unit performs the first determination as the determination performed during the specific period. A gaming machine F4 for performing a determination corresponding to a gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the determination of the determining means executed during the specific period in which the execution timing of the end condition determining means is delayed by the switching means is determined by the first game. It can be executed as the determination during the state, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the game state display means includes a game state display means capable of displaying a display mode for indicating the game state set by the game state setting means on the display means, As a display mode for indicating that the first game state is set, a first display mode and a second display mode different from the first display mode can be displayed. The game machine F5 is displayed when the execution timing of the end condition determination means is switched by the switching means.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the execution timing of the end condition determination means is switched by the switching means as a display mode indicating a state in which the first gaming state is set. Since the second display mode displayed in such a case is configured to be displayable, there is an effect that the player can be notified of the current game state in an easily understandable manner.

<Characteristic G group> (The target device navigation display of the hit game is changed according to the progress of the game)
A first state in which a game ball can enter the first state, and a second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state; A first privilege game execution means capable of executing a first privilege game in which the first variable ball entry means is varied from the second state to the first state for a predetermined period of time. A second variable ball entry means capable of being changed to a third state in which a ball can be entered, a fourth state in which game balls are less likely to enter than the third state, and the first privilege game execution means. When the game result of the first privilege game is a predetermined game result, a second privilege game capable of performing a second privilege game in which the second variable ball entry means is changed from the fourth state to the third state for a predetermined period of time. A bonus game execution means, and the first variable ball entry means when the first privilege game is executed. A display control means for displaying a first display image on a display means and displaying a second display image indicating the second variable ball-in means on the display means when the second privilege game is executed. A gaming machine G1 characterized in that:

  In recent years, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on a game board surface, the success or failure of a game is determined by lottery, and a lottery result stopped and displayed after a predetermined fluctuation period is hit. In some cases, as a bonus game that is advantageous to the player, a game for opening a ball entry means, in which a game ball is normally difficult to enter, has been executed. Further, there is a gaming machine in which the arrangement position of a starting port is different from the arrangement position of a ball entry means opened during a privilege game (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-45518). In such a game, the position at which a game ball is fired to a player is varied between a case where a player is aiming at a starting port and a case where a bonus game is performed. Was able to provide games that did not come.

  However, if the game for aiming at the starting port is continuously executed when the privilege game is executed, the ball cannot be put into the ball entry means during the privilege game, and the player loses money. May occur.

  In recent gaming machines, in order to enhance the interest of the game, a plurality of devices (variable from a state in which a ball is difficult to enter the ball to a state in which it is easy to enter the ball according to the game content) are set in a limited game area. Devices) are densely arranged. In such a gaming machine, it is difficult for the player to understand to which device the game ball should be fired, and there is a problem that the player plays an inappropriate game and loses the player. Was. In the above-mentioned gaming machine, an object is to provide a game which is easy for a player to understand.

  According to the gaming machine G1, a display image indicating the variable ball entry means corresponding to the privilege game executed by the display control means is displayed on the display means, so that when the privilege game is executed, the game ball is aimed at. Can be notified to the player in a manner that is easy to understand. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand game.

  In the gaming machine G1, the display control means displays the first display image during the period from when the first execution condition is satisfied to when the first variable ball input means is changed to the first state. A gaming machine G2 that is displayed on display means.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G1, the display image is displayed before the first variable ball entry means is changed to the first state. When fired, the game ball can enter the first variable ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that a game that is easy to understand for the player can be provided.

  In the gaming machine G2, the display control means causes the display means to display at least a portion of the second display image when the first privilege game is executed by the first privilege game execution means. A gaming machine G3.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G2, during the execution of the first privilege game, the second display image showing the second variable ball entry means corresponding to the second privilege game that can be executed next. At least a part is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to grasp in advance the game method after the end of the first privilege game, and to provide an easy-to-understand game to the player.

  In the gaming machine G2 or G3, the display control means causes the display means to display at least a part of the first display image when the second privilege game is executed by the second privilege game execution means. A gaming machine G4.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G2 or G3, during the execution of the second privilege game, the first display image showing the first variable ball-in means corresponding to the already executed first privilege game. Is displayed at least in part. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can visually recognize the content of the privilege game executed in the past, and the player can easily understand the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the display control means may execute the first display image and the first display image before the first privilege game is executed based on the first execution condition being satisfied. A gaming machine G5 for displaying a second image in order.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines G1 to G4, when the first execution condition is satisfied, it is possible to notify the player of a flow of a plurality of privilege games that can be executed in the future. Therefore, it is possible to make the player know in advance a series of game methods. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand game.

<Characteristic H group> (executing a game that is likely to be the number of reserves in which the advantageous game can be executed and is unlikely to be a game)
An information acquisition unit that acquires information based on establishment of an acquisition condition, and a storage unit that can store the information acquired by the information acquisition unit up to a predetermined number as an upper limit until a determination condition for the information is satisfied; A determination unit that performs a determination based on the information stored in the storage unit when the determination condition is satisfied; and identification information for indicating a determination result of the determination unit is dynamically displayed on a display unit. Dynamic display means, and a specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game when the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means is stopped and displayed with specific identification information for indicating the specific determination result Wherein the number of the information stored in the storage means satisfies a predetermined condition, as compared with the case where the predetermined condition is not satisfied. Gaming machine H1, characterized in that those likely to perform a favorable game which is advantageous to the player.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, whether or not the game is successful is determined by a lottery. A gaming machine in which an advantageous privilege game is executed has been proposed (for example, JP-A-2012-217766). In addition, there has been a configuration in which when a game ball enters the starting port, a lottery right for executing a game lottery can be held and stored up to a predetermined number as an upper limit. By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, a game having the same advantage is executed regardless of the number of lottery rights held and stored, so that the game tends to be monotonous. In view of the above, it is an object of the above-described gaming machine to provide a gaming machine with an improved game interest.

  According to the gaming machine H1, the easiness of executing the advantageous game can be varied according to the number of information stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine H1, the gaming machine includes a first game in which the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means easily satisfies the predetermined condition, and a second game in which the predetermined condition is more difficult to satisfy than the first game. , A gaming machine H2.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H1, the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means in the first game can more easily satisfy the predetermined condition than in the second game. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play the game while expecting the first game to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine H2, the predetermined condition can be satisfied when the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means is a specific number smaller than the predetermined number, and the first game is stored in the storage device. The gaming machine H3, wherein when the number of pieces of information stored in the means is larger than the specific number, the number of pieces of information is more easily reduced than in the second game.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H2, when the number of information is larger than the specific number, when the first game is executed, the number of information is reduced than when the second game is executed. Since the number of pieces of information can be easily set, the number of pieces of information can be easily set to a specific number. Therefore, there is an effect that a player who is playing a game in a state where the number of pieces of information is larger than the specific number can be played while expecting the first game to be executed.

  In the gaming machine H2 or H3, the first game makes it easier to increase the number of pieces of information than the second game when the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means is smaller than the specific number. A gaming machine H4.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H2 or H3, when the number of information is smaller than the specific number, when the first game is executed, the number of information is reduced rather than when the second game is executed. Since the number of pieces of information can be easily increased, the number of pieces of information can be easily set to a specific number. Therefore, there is an effect that a player who is playing a game in a state where the number of pieces of information is smaller than the specific number can perform the game while expecting the first game to be executed.

  In any of the gaming machines H2 to H4, when the first condition is satisfied in a state where the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, a predetermined dynamic display period of the identification information is set. Having a forced stop means for forcibly stopping the dynamic display of the identification information until the time elapses, wherein the first game is capable of forcibly stopping the dynamic display of the identification information by the forced stop means The gaming machine H5, wherein the second game is more difficult to forcibly stop the dynamic display of the identification information by the forcible stopping means than the first game.

  According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines H2 to H4, the dynamic display of the identification information being executed can be forcibly stopped by the forcible stopping means. Thereby, the dynamic display of the identification information can be terminated without waiting for the identification information being executed to be dynamically displayed for the predetermined period. Therefore, the next determination by the determination means can be easily performed, and the game efficiency can be improved, and the interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine H5, when a second determination condition different from the determination condition is satisfied, the gaming machine H5 includes a second determination unit capable of executing a second determination different from the determination, and the first condition includes at least the second determination condition. A gaming machine H6, which can be established when the result of the second determination by the two determination means is a specific second determination result.

  According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine H4, the first condition can be easily satisfied when the result of the second determination by the second determining means is a specific second determination result. Therefore, by providing the novel playability of executing the second determination by the second determination means to forcibly stop the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means, the interest of the game is improved. There is an effect that can be.

<Characteristic I group> (a variable display in which the number of times saved is updated during the time reduction period and a variable display that is not updated are provided)
Discriminating means for executing a discrimination when a discriminating condition is satisfied; dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result of the discriminating means; A specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game when the displayed identification information is stopped and displayed with specific identification information for indicating the specific determination result; a first game state; and a first game state. A game state setting means capable of setting one game state from among a plurality of game states including a different second game state. A game machine comprising: updating means for updating the first information based on the dynamic display of the identification information to be performed; and limiting means for limiting the updating of the first information by the updating means. I1.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, whether or not the game is successful is determined by a lottery. An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which a time-saving game in which a lottery is easily performed after execution of a privilege game is executed for a predetermined period (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). By the way, in the above-described gaming machine, when the number of lotteries executed during the time-saving game reaches a predetermined number, the time-saving game ends, so that the remaining period of the time-saving game is easily predicted for the player. As a result, there is a problem that the willingness to play is reduced. In view of the above, it is an object of the above-described gaming machine to provide a gaming machine with an improved game interest.

  According to the gaming machine I1, even if the dynamic display of the identification information is executed in a state where the second gaming state is set, if the first condition is satisfied, the updating of the first information is restricted by the restricting means. can do. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine I1, the gaming state setting means sets the first gaming state when an end condition based on the first information is satisfied in a state where the second gaming state is set. A gaming machine I2 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine I1, by limiting the updating of the first information by the restricting means, it is possible to make it difficult to end the second gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand when the end condition of the second game state is satisfied, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine I2, it is preferable that the discriminating means perform the discrimination in the state where the second game state is set, rather than perform the discrimination in the state where the first game state is set. A gaming machine I3 characterized by executing a determination that is advantageous to the game machine I3.

  According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine I2, the second gaming state is a gaming state more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, so during the period in which the second gaming state is set. It is possible to cause the player to play a game while expecting the number of executed dynamic displays to be increased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine I3, the updating means can update, as the first information, the number of times of dynamic display of the identification information executed in a state where the second gaming state is set. Gaming machine I4.

  According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I3, the updating unit updates the number of times of dynamic display of the identification information as the first information, so that the game is executed in a state where the second gaming state is set. The second gaming state ends based on the number of times of dynamic display of the identification information. Therefore, it is possible to provide a case where the first information is not updated in spite of the fact that the dynamic display of the identification information is executed in accordance with the conditions that are satisfied, so that it is possible to provide the player with a surprising game. There is an effect that can be.

  In any of the gaming machines I2 to I4, when a special condition is satisfied in a state in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, a predetermined dynamic display period of the identification information is changed. A forcible stop means for forcibly stopping the dynamic display of the identification information until the passage of time, wherein the first condition can be satisfied when the forcible stop means forcibly stops the dynamic display of the identification information. A gaming machine I5, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines I2 to I4, when the dynamic display of the identification information is forcibly stopped by the forcible stopping means, the first condition is satisfied, and the updating is performed by the limiting means. Updating of the first information by the means is restricted. This can prevent the first information from being updated due to the dynamic display of the identification information that could not be normally dynamically displayed, so that the identification information is not displayed when the second game state is set. Has an effect that it is possible to prevent the second game state from ending without being able to normally and dynamically display and causing the player to feel uncomfortable.

  In the gaming machine I5, the forced stop means forcibly stops with the identification information indicating that the determination result of the determination means is other than the specific determination result, regardless of the determination result of the determination means corresponding to the identification information. A gaming machine I6,

  According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I5, when the identification information is forcibly stopped, the specific game is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second game state from being terminated without the identification information being normally displayed dynamically in the state where the second game state is set, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable. There is an effect that can be done.

  In the gaming machine I6, when a second determination condition different from the determination condition is satisfied, the gaming machine I6 has a second determination unit capable of executing a second determination different from the determination, and the specific game execution unit includes the second determination unit. The specific game is also executed when the result of the second determination by the second determination means is a specific second determination result, and the special condition is at least a result of the second determination by the second determination means. Is a predetermined second determination result different from the specific second determination result.

  According to the gaming machine I7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I6, if the second determination result of the second determination means capable of executing the specific game is a predetermined second determination result, the special condition is satisfied, and the forced stop is performed. The dynamic display of the identification information is forcibly stopped and displayed by the means. Thus, when the second determination by the second determination unit is performed to execute the specific game, even if the result of the predetermined second determination is earlier than the result of the specific second determination, the specific identification is performed. There is an effect that the dynamic display of the information is forcibly stopped and the first information is prevented from being updated.

  In the gaming machine I7, as the type of the specific game executed by the specific game execution means, a first specific game type and a second specification capable of executing a specific game more advantageous to the player than the first specific game type Game type determining means for determining one specific game type from a plurality of specific game types including a game type, wherein the game type determining means determines the specific second determination result by the second determining means. The gaming machine I8, characterized in that it is easier to determine the second specific game type than when the determination result is the specific determination result by the determination means.

  According to the gaming machine I8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I7, the second determination means is more likely to give a determination result advantageous to the player than the determination means, so that the second determination is positively performed on the player. Can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that the limiting effect by the limiting unit can be further enhanced.

  In the gaming machine I7 or I8, the second determination means is easier to execute the second determination when the second gaming state is set than when the first gaming state is set. A gaming machine I9.

  According to the gaming machine I9, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine I7 or I8, the second determination by the second determination means is performed when the second gaming state is set than when the first gaming state is set. Is easy to execute, the player can actively make the second determination in the state where the second game state is set. Therefore, there is an effect that the limiting effect by the limiting unit can be further enhanced.

<Characteristic J group> (When the condition for stopping the running variable display is satisfied halfway, the stop control content is switched based on the content of the running variable display.)
Discriminating means for executing a discrimination when a discriminating condition is satisfied; dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result of the discriminating means; A gaming machine having a specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game when the displayed identification information is stopped and displayed with the specific identification information for indicating the specific determination result. A dynamic display mode determining unit for determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by a unit, and a switching condition being satisfied in a state where the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display unit. A specific control unit capable of executing specific control for switching the dynamic display mode to a specific dynamic display mode in accordance with a condition satisfied by dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display unit; Having Gaming machine J1, characterized in that the at it.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, whether or not the game is successful is determined by a lottery. An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Further, a gaming machine capable of simultaneously changing a plurality of special symbols (a first special symbol and a second special symbol) has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-12907). In some gaming machines having the above-described configuration, when one lottery is won, the result of the other lottery is forcibly discarded. In this case, the other lottery result is forcibly discarded irrespective of the content of the other lottery result, which may be disadvantageous to the player in some cases, and gives a sense of distrust to the player. There was a problem. In view of the above, it is an object of the above-described gaming machine to provide a gaming machine with an improved game interest. The above-mentioned conventional problem is a problem in a gaming machine (so-called simultaneous fluctuation machine) that simultaneously (in parallel) performs a lottery (change) of a first special symbol and a lottery (change) of a second special symbol. As described above, the problem to be solved by the technical idea of the present feature group is not limited to the simultaneous variation machine, but a gaming machine other than the simultaneous variation machine (for example, a lottery of the first special symbol according to a winning order). Of course, the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine that executes (fluctuation) and a lottery (fluctuation) of the second special symbol.

  According to the gaming machine J1, when the switching condition is satisfied in a state where the identification information is dynamically displayed, the dynamic display mode is specified according to the condition that the dynamic display of the identification information being executed satisfies. Can be switched to a target display mode. Thereby, the dynamic display mode can be switched to the specific dynamic display mode corresponding to the dynamic display of the identification information being executed. Therefore, when switching the dynamic display mode, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrustful, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine J1, when executing the specific control, the specific control unit may execute a plurality of specific dynamic display modes according to a condition satisfied by dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display unit. A gaming machine J2 characterized by switching to any one of the specific dynamic display modes.

  According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J1, when the specific control is executed, the specific dynamic display mode can be made different depending on the condition that the dynamic display of the identification information satisfies. . Accordingly, the specific control corresponding to the dynamic display of the identification information can be determined, so that when performing the specific control for the dynamic display of the identification information, a game that is difficult for the player to understand is executed. Can be suppressed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine J1 or J2, when a second discriminating condition different from the discriminating condition is satisfied, a second discriminating means for executing a second discriminating different from the discriminating is provided, and the switching condition is the second discriminating. A gaming machine J3, which can be established when the result of the second determination by the means is a predetermined second determination result.

  According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J1 or J2, when the result of the second determination by the second determination means is a predetermined second determination result, the switching condition is satisfied, and the specific control is performed. Will be different. Therefore, the control content of the specific control is associated with both the result of the determination by the determining means and the result of the second determination by the second determining means, which has an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine J3, the specific game execution means may execute the specific game even when a result of the second determination by the second determination means is a specific second determination result different from the predetermined second determination result. A gaming machine J4 characterized by being executable.

  According to the gaming machine J4, since the specific game can be executed based on the second determination by the second determination unit, both the determination by the determination unit and the second determination by the second determination unit are performed on the player. Can be motivated. Therefore, there is an effect that the frequency at which the specific control is executed can be increased.

  In any of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the dynamic display mode determining means determines at least a dynamic display period of the identification information, and the switching condition is such that the longer the dynamic display period is, the shorter the dynamic display period is. A gaming machine J5 characterized by being more easily established.

  According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the longer the dynamic display period is, the easier the switching condition can be established, so that the dynamic display means dynamically displays. There is an effect that the player can be interested in the length of the dynamic display period of the identification information, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines J1 to J5, the game machine further includes a remaining period determining unit that can determine a remaining dynamic display period of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic displaying unit, and the switching condition includes the remaining period. A game J6 characterized in that the easiness of establishment is varied according to the length of the residual dynamic display period determined by the determination means.

  According to the gaming machine J6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines J1 to J5, the ease of establishing the switching condition can be changed according to the length of the residual dynamic display period. On the other hand, there is an effect that the user can be interested in the length of the residual information display period of the identification information.

<Feature K group> (increase or decrease the number of specific symbols displayed based on the pre-read result without synchronizing with the number of reservations)
Information acquisition means for acquiring information based on establishment of an acquisition condition, and storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the information acquisition means at least up to a predetermined number until an identification condition for the information is satisfied; A determination unit for performing a determination based on the information stored in the storage unit when the determination condition is satisfied, and identification information for indicating a determination result of the determination unit on a display unit; A specific game that can execute a specific game when the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means is stopped and displayed with specific identification information for indicating the specific determination result Executing means for performing a preliminary determination based on the information before the determination based on the information stored in the storage means is performed in the gaming machine having: And a specific symbol display means for displaying a predetermined number of specific symbols on the display means based on a result of the preliminary determination by the preliminary determination means, and a display number of the specific symbol displayed by the specific symbol display means. And a symbol number variable display means capable of variably displaying regardless of the number of pieces of information.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, whether or not the game is successful is determined by a lottery. Gaming machines in which advantageous privilege games are executed have been proposed. In addition, when a game ball enters the starting port, a lottery right for executing a game success / failure lottery can be held and stored up to a predetermined number, and the held lottery is stored. A proposal has been made in which the number of rights is displayed as a symbol, and the display mode of the symbol is varied based on a preliminary determination result obtained by previously determining a lottery result corresponding to the held lottery right (for example, JP 2013-223613 A). By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the result of the preliminary determination can be suggested to the player using the displayed symbol, but when the number of the lottery rights stored on hold is small, the display is performed. There was a problem that the number of symbols to be played was reduced, the effect of the effect was reduced, and the game was likely to be monotonous. In view of the above, it is an object of the above-described gaming machine to provide a gaming machine with an improved game interest.

  According to the gaming machine K1, the number of specific symbols to be displayed based on the result of the preliminary determination by the preliminary determination unit can be changed regardless of the number of information stored in the storage unit. Therefore, even when the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means is small, the number of specific symbols to be displayed can be variably displayed, and the player is interested in an effect that suggests a result of the preliminary determination. There is an effect that it can be provided.

  In the gaming machine K1, the specific symbol display means is capable of displaying the specific symbol with an upper limit of the number of pieces of information that can be stored in the storage means.

  According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K1, the upper limit display number of the specific symbol is set as the upper limit number of information that can be stored in the storage means, so that the specific symbol is stored in the storage means for the player. Can be thought of as indicating the number of pieces of information that

  In any of the gaming machines K1 and K2, when the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means is one or more, the symbol number variable means sets the number of the specific symbols in a range of one or more as the number of the specific symbols. A gaming machine K3 wherein the number of specific symbols to be displayed is variable.

  According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K1 or K2, while the information is stored in the storage means, the specific symbol can be continuously displayed. Indicates the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means.

  In one of the gaming machines K1 to K3, one gaming state is set among a plurality of gaming states including a first gaming state and a second gaming state which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. Possible game state setting means, wherein the game state setting means can set the first game state at least when an end condition is satisfied in a state where the second game state is set; The gaming machine K4, wherein the specific symbol display means is capable of displaying the specific symbol on the display means while the second game state is set.

  According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines K1 to K3, while the specific symbol is displayed on the display means, the second gaming state advantageous to the player is set. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player whether or not the second game state ends every time the number of displayed specific symbols changes. Therefore, there is an effect that a staging effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine K4, the symbol number changing means is capable of changing the number of the specific symbols displayed on the display means by two or more.

  According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K4, the number of specific symbols to be displayed can be greatly changed at a time, so that a surprising effect can be provided to the player, and the effect can be improved. There is an effect that it can be increased.

  In the gaming machine K5, the symbol number variable unit includes the information corresponding to the specific determination result in the information stored in the storage unit as a result of the preliminary determination by the preliminary determination unit. The gaming machine K6 is characterized in that it is easier to change the number of display of the specific symbols to increase when the information is displayed than when the information corresponding to the specific determination result is not included. .

  According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K5, it is easier to increase the number of display of the specific symbol when it is determined in advance that the information corresponding to the specific determination result is included, There is an effect that the player can be interested in the variable situation of the specific symbol and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine K6, the symbol number variable unit includes the information corresponding to the specific determination result in the information stored in the storage unit as a result of the preliminary determination by the preliminary determination unit. The gaming machine K7 is characterized in that the number of displayed specific symbols to be increased at one time is more likely to be increased in the case where the specific symbol is displayed than in the case where the information corresponding to the specific determination result is not included. .

  According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K6, the possibility that information corresponding to a specific discrimination result is included increases as the number of displayed specific symbols that increases at one time increases. This makes it possible for the player to be interested in how the number of displayed specific symbols increases, thereby improving the interest in the game.

  In the gaming machine K7, the symbol number variable means can execute a preparation variable display for decreasing the display number of the specific symbol before increasing the display number of the specific symbol to the specific number. Gaming machine K8.

  According to the gaming machine K8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K7, the number of specific symbols to be displayed can be reduced by the variable preparation display, so that the specific number of variable symbols is increased regardless of the current number of specific symbols to be displayed. Can be performed. Therefore, there is an effect that the degree of freedom of the effect of variably displaying the number of specific symbols displayed by the symbol number variable means can be increased.

<Characteristic L group> (By changing the winning rate of the electric chute on the upstream side, the ball entry rate to the starting port on the downstream side is changed)
A first determination unit that can execute the first determination when the first determination condition is satisfied; and a second determination different from the first determination when a second determination condition different from the first determination condition is satisfied. Executable second determination means, and when the result of the first determination by the first determination means is a specific first determination result, or when the result of the second determination by the second determination means is a specific first determination result. When the determination result is two, in a gaming machine having a specific game execution means capable of executing a corresponding specific game, a first flow path through which a game ball can flow, and a game flowing down the first flow path A first ball entry means capable of satisfying the first determination condition when a game ball enters, and a first state in which a game ball can enter the first ball entry means; And a variable means that can be changed to a second state that is more difficult to enter the ball than the first state; A variable control means capable of variably controlling the variable means in a predetermined variable pattern when standing up, and a variable control means capable of entering a game ball, wherein the second determination condition can be satisfied when the game ball enters. 2 ball entry means, and wherein the second ball entry means, among the game balls flowing down the first flow path, a game ball which could not enter the first ball entry means A gaming machine L1 which is provided at a position where it can be obtained.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, whether or not the game is successful is determined by a lottery. An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which a time-saving game in which a lottery is easily performed after execution of a privilege game is executed for a predetermined period (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). Further, there is a type in which a plurality of starting ports are provided, and one of the starting ports is provided with a variable member for facilitating the entry of a game ball during a time-saving game, thereby facilitating the execution of a lottery during the time-saving game. By the way, in the above-described gaming machine, when a game ball is fired toward a start port provided with a variable member, the game ball that does not enter the start port is wasted, and the game motivation is reduced. was there. In view of the above, it is an object of the above-described gaming machine to provide a gaming machine with an improved game interest.

  According to the gaming machine L1, the state in which the first determination is easily performed based on the game ball flowing down the first flow path is determined by the length of the period in which the variable means is changed to the first state by the variable control means, The state in which the second determination is easily performed can be switched. Thus, when a game ball flows down the first flow path, it is possible to provide a player with a pleasure of predicting which discrimination is to be performed, thereby improving the interest of the game. effective.

  In the gaming machine L1, as the variable pattern of the variable unit variably controlled by the variable control unit, a first variable pattern and a period in which the variable unit is in the second state longer than the first variable pattern may be used. A gaming machine L2 having variable pattern determination means for determining one variable pattern from a plurality of variable patterns including at least two variable patterns.

  According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L1, the variable means is variably controlled by the variable control means in accordance with the variable pattern determined by the variable pattern determining means. It is possible to switch between a state in which the first determination is easily performed and a state in which the second determination is easily performed based on the game balls flowing down the first flow path. Therefore, the player can be interested in the variable state of the variable means, which has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

  The gaming machine L2 has a determination unit that executes a predetermined determination when a determination condition is satisfied, and the variable control unit performs the variable control when the determination result by the determination unit is a specific determination result. A gaming machine L3 for variably controlling means.

  According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L2, the variable means is variably controlled based on the determination result of the determining means, so that the player is interested in the content of the determination by the determining means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine L3, dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the result of the determination by the determination means, and a dynamic display period of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means A dynamic display period determining means capable of determining one dynamic display period from a plurality of dynamic display periods of different lengths, wherein the dynamic display period determining means A gaming machine L4 for determining the dynamic display period based on a result of the determination.

  According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L3, the length of the dynamic display period until the determination result of the determining means is stopped and displayed can be varied, so that the variable control by the variable control means can be performed. A period that is not executed can be given to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  A gaming machine L5, characterized in that in any of the gaming machines L1 to L4, the second determination means performs a determination which is more advantageous to the player than the first determination means.

  According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines L1 to L4, the second discriminating means performs a discrimination more advantageous to the player than the first discriminating means. There is an effect that the game can be played while the player is interested in the behavior of the game ball flowing down the first flow path while expecting the ball to arrive.

  In the gaming machine L5, the game machine L5 has a detecting means capable of detecting a game ball flowing down the first flow path, and an effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect based on a detection result of the detecting means, The means, at least, a first detecting means capable of detecting a game ball flowing into the first flow path, and a game ball flowing down the first flow path, which did not enter the first ball input means. And a second detecting means capable of detecting a game ball, wherein the effect executed by the effect executing means is such that a ball flowing down the first flow path is transmitted to the second ball input means. A gaming machine L6 for indicating a degree of expectation to reach to a player.

  According to the gaming machine L6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L5, the flowing state of the gaming ball flowing down the first flow path can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner, so that the effect can be enhanced. There is.

<Characteristic AA group>
A first information acquisition unit capable of acquiring first information based on establishment of a first information acquisition condition, and a first information acquisition unit capable of executing a first determination based on the first information acquired by the first information acquisition unit. (1) first determination means, first dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying first identification information for indicating a first determination result by the first determination means on the display means, and the first dynamic display means A first dynamic display mode determining unit that can determine a first dynamic display mode of the first identification information that is dynamically displayed by the CPU, and obtains second information based on establishment of a second information obtaining condition. Possible second information acquisition means, second information storage means for storing the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means, and information based on the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means A second determining means capable of executing the second determination; Means for dynamically displaying second identification information for indicating a second determination result by the means on the display means, and the second dynamic display means dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means. (2) second dynamic display mode determining means capable of determining a second dynamic display mode of the identification information, and first identification information or the specific second determination result for indicating the specific first determination result A bonus game execution unit capable of executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when the second identification information for indicating the second identification information is stopped and displayed on the display unit. And the effect mode selecting means capable of selecting an effect mode executed by the effect mode executing means, and the effect mode selecting means. Stored in the second information storage means. Gaming machine AA1, characterized in that and selects the representation embodiment based on at least the number of the second information that.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, an effect mode for notifying the lottery result in the lottery based on the lottery result or the like as an effect for indicating the result of the lottery performed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening. There is one that determines a game and executes the determined effect to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

  However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage in the contents of the effect form.

  The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a player from getting tired of playing a game early.

  According to the gaming machine AA1, the effect mode executed during the dynamic display period of the second identification information is changed depending on the number of the stored second information, so that it can be executed thereafter. It is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the number of times of dynamic display of the second identification information, and even if the second identification information for indicating the specific second determination result is not displayed, continue the subsequent game. By making the player interested, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired of the game early.

  In the gaming machine AA1, the dynamic display of the second identification information is executed prior to the dynamic display of the first identification information. A gaming machine AA2 characterized by executing the above-mentioned effect mode when the target display mode is executed.

  According to the gaming machine AA2, by executing the specific second dynamic display mode, it is possible to motivate the storage of the second information, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player. .

  In the gaming machine AA1 or AA2, the effect mode is continuously executed after the period of the executed second dynamic display mode corresponding to the number of pieces of the second information stored is ended. A gaming machine AA3 characterized by being set in a period spanning the next dynamic display of the second identification information.

  According to the gaming machine AA3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AA1 or AA2, the effect form is configured to be executable over a dynamic display period of the second identification information that is continuously executed a plurality of times. Therefore, there is an effect that a plurality of second dynamic display modes can be made to look like the one dynamic display mode, and the interest can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines AA1 to AA3, a first ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, and a game ball in the second ball entry means. A variable member that can be changed between a first state in which a ball can enter and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter a game ball than the first state, and the second state based on the establishment of a specific condition for the variable member A variable control means for varying from the first state to the first state until a predetermined condition is satisfied, and prior determination means capable of determining in advance the establishment of the specific condition before the specific condition is satisfied, The gaming machine AA4, wherein the effect mode selecting means is configured to be able to select a specific effect mode based on at least a result of the preliminary determination means.

  According to the gaming machine AA4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines AA1 to AA3, a specific effect mode is selected based on a result of determining in advance that a specific condition that triggers easy acquisition of the second information is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that expectation can be given to the acquisition of the second information.

<Characteristics AB>
A first information acquisition unit capable of acquiring first information based on establishment of a first information acquisition condition, and a first information acquisition unit capable of executing a first determination based on the first information acquired by the first information acquisition unit. (1) first determination means, first dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying first identification information for indicating a first determination result by the first determination means on the display means, and the first dynamic display means A first dynamic display mode determining unit that can determine a first dynamic display mode of the first identification information that is dynamically displayed by the CPU, and obtains second information based on establishment of a second information obtaining condition. Possible second information acquisition means, second information storage means for storing the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means, and information based on the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means A second determining means capable of executing the second determination; Means for dynamically displaying second identification information for indicating a second determination result by the means on the display means, and the second dynamic display means dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means. (2) second dynamic display mode determination means capable of determining a second dynamic display mode of the identification information, and first identification information or the specific second determination result for indicating the specific first determination result A bonus game execution unit capable of executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when the second identification information for indicating the second identification information is stopped and displayed on the display unit. And the effect mode selecting means capable of selecting an effect mode executed by the effect mode executing means, and the effect mode selecting means. Stored in the second information storage means. Gaming machine AB1, wherein and selects the representation embodiment based on at least the number of the second information that.

  Here, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a lottery based on a lottery result based on a lottery result as an effect for indicating a result of a lottery performed based on a winning of a game ball to a starting winning prize port. There is a technique that determines an effect mode and executes the determined effect mode to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

  However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage in the contents of the effect form.

  The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a player from getting tired of playing a game early.

  According to the gaming machine AB1, the effect mode executed during the period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed in the first dynamic display mode determined at the start of the dynamic display is stored as the second information. Since the determination is made based on the number, not only the result of the first determination but also the information on the possibility that the second determination can be performed can be determined from the presentation mode, and the player can quickly enter the game. There is an effect that a tired trouble can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine AB1, the effect mode selection means selects the effect mode based on at least the number of the second information and the dynamic display mode of the first identification information dynamically displayed. A gaming machine AB2 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine AB2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AB1, the effect mode is selected based on the first dynamic display mode being executed and the number of pieces of the second information stored during the execution, so that various effects can be obtained. There is an effect that various production modes can be executed.

  In the gaming machine AB1 or AB2, the dynamic display of the second identification information is configured to be performed prior to the dynamic display of the first identification information, and the effect mode is performed thereafter. A gaming machine AB3, wherein an effect related to the dynamic display mode of the second identification information is executed.

  According to the gaming machine AB3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AB1 or AB2, if the second information is stored, after the executed first identification information ends, the second identification information is changed. Since the dynamic display is started and the effect mode related to the second dynamic display mode can be executed before the start of the dynamic display of the second identification information, the second mode executed preferentially is executed. There is an effect that the player can recognize early that the dynamic display of the identification information is started.

  In any of the gaming machines AB1 to AB3, a first ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, and a game ball in the second ball entry means. A variable member that can be changed between a first state in which a ball can enter and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter a game ball than the first state, and the second state based on the establishment of a specific condition for the variable member A variable control means for varying from the first state to the first state until a predetermined condition is satisfied, and prior determination means capable of determining in advance the establishment of the specific condition before the specific condition is satisfied, The gaming machine AB4, wherein the effect mode selection means is configured to be able to select a specific effect mode based on at least the result of the preliminary determination means.

  According to the gaming machine AB4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines AB1 to AB3, a specific effect mode is selected based on a result of previously determining whether a specific condition that triggers easy acquisition of the second information is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that expectation can be given to the acquisition of the second information.

<Characteristic AC group> (Using the special figure 1 fluctuation effect as a pseudo effect of the special figure 2 fluctuation)
First determining means for performing a first determination based on satisfaction of a first determination condition, and second determination performing a second determination based on satisfaction of a second determination condition different from the first determination condition Means, a first privilege game executing means for executing a first privilege game advantageous to the player based on a result of the discrimination of the first discriminating means being a predetermined first discrimination result; A second privilege game executing means for executing a first privilege game advantageous to the player based on a result of the discrimination of the second discriminating means being a predetermined second discrimination result; and the first discrimination is executed. A first effect execution means for executing a first effect for indicating a result of the first determination based on the result of the first determination; and a result of the second determination based on the execution of the second determination. Executing a second effect different from the first effect as an effect for indicating A second effect execution means, wherein the second effect execution means sets at least a specific effect mode that is easy to be executed in the effect period of the first effect when at least a predetermined condition is satisfied. A gaming machine AC1 characterized by being configured to be able to execute the second effect in an effect mode including:

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, an effect mode for notifying the lottery result in the lottery based on the lottery result or the like as an effect for indicating the result of the lottery performed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening. There is one that determines a game and executes the determined effect to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

  However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage in the contents of the effect form.

  The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a player from getting tired of playing a game early.

  According to the gaming machine AC1, the first effect can be executed as an effect for indicating the determination result of the second determination, so that there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine AC1, the second effect execution means is capable of executing the second effect in an effect mode including at least a display mode indicating a result of the first determination, as the effect mode of the first effect. A gaming machine AC2.

  According to the gaming machine AC2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AC1, the second effect using the display mode showing the determination result of the first determination can be executed, so that the interest in the gaming can be improved. effective.

  In the gaming machine AC2, the second effect execution means executes a second effect mode for indicating the determination result of the second determination and the effect mode in one effect indicating the determination result of the second determination. A gaming machine AC3.

  According to the gaming machine AC3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AC2, there is an effect that a more unexpected effect can be executed.

<Characteristic AD group>
A first determination unit capable of executing a first determination, and a first determination result by the first determination unit after dynamically displaying a plurality of first identification symbols on the display unit in a predetermined dynamic display mode. A first dynamic display unit capable of stopping and displaying a combination of the above, a second determination unit capable of executing the second determination, and a plurality of second identification symbols dynamically displayed on the display unit in a predetermined dynamic display mode. A second dynamic display unit that can be stopped and displayed in a combination for indicating the second determination result by the second determination unit after the display, and a first determination result specific to the display unit. When the first identification symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific combination of the above or when the second identification symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific combination for indicating the specific second determination result on the display means, Special benefits that can be And a granting means, wherein the privilege granting means grants a first privilege as the privilege when stopped and displayed in a combination of identification symbols corresponding to a first specific combination among the specific combinations. It is possible to provide a second privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege when stopped and displayed in a combination of identification symbols corresponding to a second specific combination different from the first specific combination. The gaming machine has a determining unit capable of determining a type of the privilege to be provided by the privilege providing unit, and the first dynamic display unit is configured to perform one of the following when a specific period is set. In a state where the first identification symbol is dynamically displayed, the remaining identification symbols are stopped at a combination that can be any one of the first specific combination and the second specific combination. Gaming machine AD1, characterized in that after displaying the plurality reach display mode that presents is the first identification symbols which are displayed in the specific combination.

  In the case of a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a result of a lottery performed based on winning of a game ball to a starting winning prize port is notified by a combination of a plurality of symbols, the result is given thereafter according to the type of the displayed symbol. There is a configuration in which amusement of a game is improved by configuring the benefits to be different (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

  However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, some symbols constituting a combination in which a privilege lower than the privilege desired by the player is not provided are stopped and displayed, so that the interest in the game can be enhanced before the result is notified. However, there is a problem that the temperature decreases.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the interest of a player.

  According to the gaming machine AD1, when the identification symbol is displayed in a specific combination during a specific period, a specific combination is displayed through a plurality of reach display modes, so that the combination corresponding to the first privilege and the second privilege are supported. There is an effect that the expectation that both of the combinations are displayed can be long, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  The gaming machine AD2 according to the gaming machine AD1, wherein the determining means determines the first privilege when the specific first determination result is obtained in the specific period.

  According to the gaming machine AD2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AD1, even in the specific period in which the first privilege is determined by the determining means, a specific combination is displayed via a plurality of reach display modes. In addition, there is an effect that it is easy to have a sense of expectation that the second privilege is provided even when the first determination is performed.

  In the gaming machine AD2, the determining means determines the second privilege when the result of the determination is the specific second determination in the specific time period, and the second dynamic display means sets a specific time period. In the case where the first identification symbol is dynamically displayed, the remaining identification symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination that can be any one of the two or more different second specific combinations in a state where the second identification symbol is dynamically displayed. The gaming machine AD3, wherein the second identification symbol is displayed in the specific combination after a special plural reach display mode to be displayed is displayed.

  According to the gaming machine AD3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AD2, it is possible to promptly recognize that the second benefit advantageous to the player is always given when the second benefit is a specific second determination result in the specific period. There is an effect that can be.

<Characteristic AE group> (Puncture ED control when probability changes)
Determination means capable of performing the determination, privilege game execution means capable of executing a bonus game advantageous to the player when the determination result by the determination means is a specific determination result, and execution by the bonus game execution means A bonus game type determining means capable of determining the type of the bonus game from a plurality of types, a specific area through which a game ball can pass when the specific bonus game is executed, and a game ball in the specific area. Setting means capable of setting an advantageous gaming state which is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state as a gaming state to be set after execution of the privileged game until the end condition is satisfied, and When the game is terminated, the suggestion mode execution means for executing a suggestion mode capable of suggesting the gaming state set after the execution of the privilege game is provided. An aspect and a second suggestion mode are configured in combination, and the second suggestion mode for suggesting the normal game state and the second suggestion mode for suggesting the advantageous game state are configured in the same period. A gaming machine AE1 configured in the suggested manner.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a result of a lottery performed based on a winning of a game ball to a starting winning prize hole is a hit, and a different hit game is executed depending on the hit type, and during a specific type of hit game, Is changed to a state in which a game ball can enter and a variable state is changed to a state in which the game ball can enter the ball. (For example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, even if a specific type of hit game is executed, a case may occur in which a game ball does not enter the variable entry area, thereby increasing the control load in the notification control in that case. There was a problem.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing a control load.

  According to the gaming machine AE1, by setting the second suggestion mode to be the same period, it is possible to set a mode that suggests based on the state of entering a specific area while suppressing a change in the period in which the suggestion mode is displayed. This has the effect of facilitating the notification control of the suggestion mode at the end of the bonus game and reducing the control load.

  In the gaming machine AE1, when the privilege game is executed, a suggestion mode setting unit configured to set the suggestion mode executed by the suggestion mode execution unit in accordance with a type of the bonus game to be executed; Switching the second suggestion mode to the second suggestion mode corresponding to other than the specific privilege game among the suggestion modes set when the game ball does not enter the specific area during the bonus game. A gaming machine AE2 comprising:

  According to the gaming machine AE2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AE1, the suggesting mode is displayed even when the suggesting mode is set at the start to suppress the control load from being concentrated at the end of the privilege game. Since the suggestion can be switched to the suggestion mode corresponding to the normal game state without changing the period for performing the suggestion, there is an effect that the control load can be suppressed and the correct suggestion can be executed.

<Characteristic AF group> (provide ED periods of different lengths depending on the jackpot type)
Discriminating means capable of executing discrimination, privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to a player based on a result of the discrimination of the discriminating means being a specific discrimination result, and the privilege game executing means. A privilege game type determining means capable of determining a type of the privilege game to be executed from a plurality of types; and terminating the privilege game based on a predetermined end condition being satisfied during execution of the privilege game. A gaming machine AF1 comprising: a period setting unit that sets a period corresponding to a type of the privilege game being executed as a period for indicating.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, an effect mode for notifying the lottery result in the lottery based on the lottery result or the like as an effect for indicating the result of the lottery performed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening. There is one that determines a game and executes the determined effect to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

  However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage in the contents of the effect form.

  The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a player from getting tired of playing a game early.

  According to the gaming machine AF1, different periods can be set in accordance with the type of privilege game, and thus there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  The gaming machine AF2, further comprising a specific effect execution unit capable of executing a specific effect using the period set by the period setting unit.

  According to the gaming machine AF2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AF1, the specific effect can be executed in different periods set according to the type of the bonus game, so that the interest of the game can be improved. effective.

  In the gaming machine AF1 or AF2, when the variable condition is satisfied during execution of the privilege game, the gaming machine AF1 or AF2 includes a period switching unit that can switch the length of the period set by the period setting unit to a different length. Gaming machine AF3 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine AF3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AF1 or AF2, the length of the period can be varied even when the variable condition is satisfied during execution of the bonus game, thereby improving the interest of the game. There is an effect that can be.

<Characteristic AG group> (variable ED period depending on presence or absence of V prize)
Discriminating means capable of executing discrimination, privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to a player based on a result of the discrimination of the discriminating means being a specific discrimination result, and during execution of the privilege game A game area that allows a player to set an advantageous game state that is advantageous to a player based on the fact that a game ball has passed through the specific area during execution of the privilege game. State setting means, and a specific period setting means for setting a specific period for indicating the end of the privilege game based on a predetermined end condition being satisfied during execution of the privilege game, The specific period setting means is configured to be able to set the specific period having a different length depending on whether or not a game ball passes through the specific area during execution of the privilege game. Gaming machine AG .

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, an effect mode for notifying the lottery result in the lottery based on the lottery result or the like as an effect for indicating the result of the lottery performed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening. There is one that determines a game and executes the determined effect to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

  However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage in the contents of the effect form.

  The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a player from getting tired of playing a game early.

  According to the gaming machine AG1, the specific period of a different length can be set depending on whether the game ball passes through the specific area during the execution of the privilege game or not, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be done.

  The gaming machine AG2, wherein the gaming machine AG1 has a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect during the specific period.

  According to the gaming machine AG2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AG1, a specific effect can be executed within a specific period, so that there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  The gaming machine AG3 in the gaming machine AG2, wherein the specific effect includes at least a notification mode for notifying a passing state of a game ball to the specific area during the bonus game.

  According to the gaming machine AG3, since the specific effect includes the notification mode, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game to the player.

<Characteristic BA group> (different playability depending on settings)
The state of the specific element relating to the degree of advantage of the player includes at least a first state corresponding to a first degree of advantage and a second state corresponding to a second degree of advantage higher than the first degree of advantage. Specific element setting means that can be set to one of a plurality of states, a first game state based on satisfaction of a predetermined setting condition, and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state And game state setting means for setting one of a plurality of game states including at least the second game state, wherein the second game state is more than the second state when the specific element is set to the second state. A gaming machine BA1 characterized in that it is configured to be more advantageous to a player when it is set to one state.

  Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a result of a lottery performed based on winning of a game ball to a starting winning prize port is a hit, the game machine shifts to a hit state. Some of such gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of winning types having different numbers of rounds, and some of them aim to improve the interest in winning by making different game values obtainable (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

  In addition, among the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, there is a gaming machine configured so that a gaming state after a hit state ends according to a hit type can be made different. There are also those that aim to improve the interest in.

  However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the game may be monotonous because the degree of advantage of each gaming state is fixed.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BA1, in the advantageous second gaming state, it is possible to realize a novel gaming property in which it is more advantageous to set the specific element to the first state having a lower degree of advantage. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine BA1, discriminating means for executing discrimination based on the satisfaction of the discriminating condition, and a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the discrimination result of the discriminating means being a predetermined specific discrimination result. A gaming machine BA2, wherein the first state is configured to have a lower probability of being the specific determination result than the second state.

  According to the gaming machine BA2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine BA1, in the advantageous second gaming state, it is possible to realize an extremely novel gaming property in which the lower the probability of a specific determination result being, the more advantageous it is. Since it is possible, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

  In the gaming machine BA2, a ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first position at which the game ball can easily enter the ball entry means, and a second position at which the game ball is less likely to enter than the first position. A variable means that can be changed to a position, and based on a result of the determination by the determination means being a second determination result different from the specific determination result, the variable means moves the first position from the second position to the first position. A variable game execution means for executing a variable game that is variable to a position for a predetermined period, and a privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on a game ball having entered the ball entry means, The gaming machine BA3, wherein the second gaming state is configured to be easier to give the predetermined privilege by the privilege granting unit than the first gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine BA3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BA2, in the second gaming state, a predetermined privilege is more likely to be given, so that when the second gaming state is set, the player's interest in the game is improved. There is an effect that can be made.

  In the gaming machine BA2 or BA3, the gaming state setting means is configured to be able to set the first gaming state based on the specific determination result in the second gaming state. Gaming machine BA4.

  According to the gaming machine BA4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BA2 or BA3, when a specific determination result is obtained in the second gaming state, the first gaming state having a lower degree of advantage than the second gaming state may be set. Therefore, in the second game state, it is possible to make the player want the bonus to be continuously provided as the second determination result rather than the specific determination result. Therefore, a novel game property that expects no specific discrimination result can be realized, and thus, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In any of the gaming machines BA2 to BA4, the second gaming state is configured to be maintained until the specific determination result is obtained.

  According to the gaming machine BA5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines BA2 to BA5, the second gaming state is maintained until the specific determination result is obtained, so that the first state having a low probability of the specific determination result is low. Is longer and the second game state is more likely to continue. In other words, the result of the second discrimination is more likely to be obtained, so that the number of times the predetermined privilege is provided tends to be increased. Therefore, in a state other than the second gaming state, it is possible to expect the second state, while in the second gaming state, the disadvantageous first state can be expected. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine BA2, the gaming state setting means includes one of a plurality of at least one of the first gaming state, the second gaming state, and a third gaming state having a higher degree of advantage than the second gaming state. The game state setting means is configured to be able to be set to the game state, and the game state setting means performs the predetermined number of discriminations after the second game state is set. A gaming machine BA6 characterized in that the third gaming state can be set based on the determination result.

  According to the gaming machine BA6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BA1 or BA2, the first state having a lower probability of being a specific determination result is more likely to have a determination result other than the specific determination result in the second gaming state. , It becomes easy to enter the advantageous third game state. Therefore, in the second game state, the novel game property of strongly expecting that the disadvantageous first state is set can be realized, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. effective.

  In any of the gaming machines BA2 to BA6, a launching means capable of launching a game ball, a first entering means capable of receiving a game ball fired by the launching means, and a game to the first entering means. Paying-out means for paying out at least a prize ball based on the ball having entered, wherein the first game state is a game in a firing direction in which the game ball easily enters the first ball-in means. A gaming machine BA7 characterized in that the number of game balls fired is likely to be larger than the number of prize balls paid out by the payout means when the ball is continuously fired. .

  According to the gaming machine BA7, in any one of the gaming machines BA2 to BA6, in the first gaming state, the number of possessed balls tends to decrease as a game ball is fired, so that the second state in which a specific determination result is likely to be obtained early is provided. We can strongly expect that it is set. Therefore, a novel gaming property of expecting the second state in the first gaming state while expecting the first state in the second gaming state can be realized, thereby improving the interest of the player in the game. There is an effect that can be made.

  In the gaming machine BA7, the second gaming state is configured such that the number of prize balls paid out by the payout means is more likely to be closer to the number of game balls fired than in the first gaming state. A gaming machine BA8.

  According to the gaming machine BA8, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BA7, the degree of advantage in the second gaming state can be further increased, so that the game is played with a stronger expectation of shifting to the second gaming state. There is an effect that can be.

<Characteristic BB group> (The easier the winning, the lower the degree of advantage.)
Discriminating means for executing discrimination based on the satisfaction of the discrimination condition; privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the discrimination result of the discriminating means being a specific discrimination result; A first probability state in which the specific determination result is obtained at a first probability in the determination by the determination means based on the establishment of the setting condition, and the specific determination is performed in a second probability different from the first probability. State setting means for setting one state from among a plurality of states including at least a second probability state as a result, wherein the first probability state is at least while a predetermined specific condition is satisfied. , The gaming machine BB1 is configured to have a higher degree of advantage for the player than the second probability state.

  Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a result of a lottery performed based on winning of a game ball to a starting winning prize port is a hit, the game machine shifts to a hit state. Some of such gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of winning types having different numbers of rounds, and some of them aim to improve the interest in winning by making different game values obtainable (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

  In addition, some of the conventional gaming machines described above have a configuration in which the winning lottery probability after a hit state ends according to the hit type can be made different, and the hit state ends. There are some that try to improve the enjoyment after doing this.

  However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem that if the hit probability is low, the player's motivation to play the game is reduced.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BB1, since the first probability state can be expected at least while the specific condition is satisfied, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved. .

  The gaming machine BB2, wherein in the gaming machine BB1, the first probability is configured with a lower probability than the second probability.

  According to the gaming machine BB2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BB1, it is possible to realize a novel gaming property in which it is more advantageous that the probability of a specific determination result being lower while the specific conditions are satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine BB1 or BB2, the state in which the specific condition is satisfied is configured to be terminated based on at least the specific determination result.

  According to the gaming machine BB3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BB1 or BB2, it is possible to realize a novel gaming property in which a game is performed while expecting that a specific determination result is not obtained while a specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines BB1 to BB3, a ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first position in which the game ball can easily enter the ball entry means, and a game ball entering from the first position. A variable means that can be changed to a second position where it is difficult to hit the ball, a variable means that can be changed to the second position, and based on a result of the determination by the determination means being a second determination result different from the specific determination result, A variable game executing means for executing a variable game changing from the second position to the first position; and a privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on a game ball having entered the ball entry means. The state in which the specific condition is satisfied is configured such that the predetermined privilege is more easily provided by the privilege providing means than the state in which the specific condition is not satisfied. A gaming machine BB4, which is characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine BB4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines BB1 to BB3, while the specific condition is satisfied, the predetermined privilege is easily given, so that the game is expected with the strong expectation that the specific condition is satisfied. There is an effect that it can be performed.

  In the gaming machine BB4, the discriminating unit performs discrimination based on establishment of a first discriminating condition, and discriminates based on establishment of a second discriminating condition different from the first discriminating condition. And a second determination unit that performs the second determination. The second determination unit is configured such that a ratio of the second determination result is higher than that of the first determination unit. The state where the specific condition is satisfied is configured such that the second determination condition is more easily satisfied than the state where the specific condition is not satisfied. A gaming machine BB5 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine BB5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BB4, while the specific condition is satisfied, the determination by the second determination means that is likely to be the second determination result is easily performed, so that the specific condition is satisfied. There is an effect that a game can be played with a strong expectation of that.

  In the gaming machine BB5, the first determination is performed while the specific condition is satisfied, as compared with a case where the determination result of the second determination unit is the specific determination result while the specific condition is satisfied. A gaming machine BB6 characterized in that, when the determination result of the means is the specific determination result, the specific condition is more likely to be satisfied after the end of the privilege game.

  According to the gaming machine BB6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BB5, when a specific determination result is obtained by the determination of the second determining means that is easily executed in a state where the specific condition is satisfied, the state where the specific condition is satisfied is terminated. Since the possibility of occurrence is high, it is possible to realize a novel game property that expects that a specific determination result is not obtained while the specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

  In the gaming machine BB5 or BB6, a launching means capable of launching a game ball, a first ball entry means provided at a position where the game ball fired in the first direction by the launching means is easy to enter, and A second ball entry means provided at a position where game balls fired in a second direction different from the first direction can easily enter the ball, and the game ball can easily enter the second ball entry means. A second position changer that can be changed to a third position and a third position where a game ball is difficult to enter the second ball entry unit; and the first determination condition is the first condition. It is configured such that it can be established based on a game ball entering the ball entry means, and the second determination condition is that a game ball enters the second ball entry means. It is configured to be able to be established based on the, the state that the specific conditions are satisfied, Serial as compared with the state specific conditions are not satisfied, the gaming machine and the second varying means is characterized in that which is constituted tends to be state of the variable in the third position BB7.

  According to the gaming machine BB7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BB5 or BB6, there is an effect that it is possible to give the player a pleasure of changing the firing direction of the game ball depending on whether or not the specific condition is satisfied. is there.

<Characteristic BC group> (varies the occurrence rate of a specific suggestion between the normal state after the setting change and the normal state after the end of the hit)
A gaming machine provided with an effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect, a first game state setting means for setting a predetermined specific game state based on establishment of a first setting condition; A second game state setting means for setting the specific game state based on establishment of a second setting condition different from the setting condition, wherein the effect execution means is provided by the first game state setting means. The case where a specific game state is set and the case where the specific game state is set by the second game state setting means are configured so that a predetermined specific effect is easy to execute. A gaming machine BC1 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a result of a lottery performed based on winning of a game ball to a starting winning prize port is a hit, the game machine shifts to a hit state. Some of such gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of winning types having different numbers of rounds, and some of them aim to improve the interest in winning by making different game values obtainable (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

  In addition, among the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, there is a gaming machine configured so that a gaming state after a hit state ends according to a hit type can be made different. There are also those that aim to improve the interest in.

  However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem that when the same gaming state continues for a long time, the gaming becomes monotonous.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BC1, even in the same specific gaming state, the specific effect is executed according to whether the setting is made by the first gaming state setting means or the second gaming state setting means. Since the easiness can be changed, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine BC1, discriminating means for executing discrimination based on the fulfillment of discriminating conditions, and a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the discrimination result of the discriminating means being a predetermined specific discrimination result. Privilege game execution means to be executed, wherein the first game state setting means is configured to be able to set the specific game state as a game state after the end of the privilege game, The second gaming state setting means is configured to be capable of setting the specific gaming state based on the initialization of the gaming machine being initialized. .

  According to the gaming machine BC2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BC1, the ease of execution of the specific effect can be varied in the gaming state set when initialized, so that the game becomes monotonous. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine BC1 or BC2, the effect execution means sets a predetermined discrimination result different from the specific discrimination result continuously for a predetermined number of discriminations after the specific game state is set. A gaming machine BC3 configured to be able to execute the specific effect on the basis of the fact that the game machine BC3 has become available.

  According to the gaming machine BC3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BC1 or BC2, there is an effect that it is possible to realize a novel gaming property in which a game is played in expectation of the continuation of the disconnection determination result.

  In the gaming machine BC3, the effect execution means can execute the specific effect based on a fact that the number of consecutive times of the disconnection determination result after the specific game state is set is a multiple of the specific number of times. A gaming machine BC4 characterized by being constituted.

  According to the gaming machine BC4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BC3, the specific effect is executed each time the consecutive number of the disconnection determination results becomes a multiple of the specific number, so that the game is continued until the specific number of times is reached. You can make me think. Therefore, there is an effect that the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines BC1 to BC3, the effect execution means may be set to the specific game state by the second game state setting means, as compared with the case where the specific game state is set by the first game state setting means. Is set so that the specific effect is more easily executed when is set.

  According to the gaming machine BC4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines BC1 to BC3, there is an effect that the operating rate in the specific gaming state set by the second gaming state setting means can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines BC1 to BC4, the specific element relating to the player's advantage is associated with a first state corresponding to the first advantage and a second advantage higher than the first advantage. A specific element setting unit that can be set to one of a plurality of states including at least a second state, and the first state is executed more than the second state as a type of the specific effect. A type that determines one type from among a plurality of types including at least a first specific effect having a higher ratio and a second specific effect having a higher ratio of the second state being executed than the first state. And a determining means.

  According to the gaming machine BC5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines BC1 to BC4, the state of the specific element can be suggested by the type of the specific effect, so that the player who wants to predict the state of the specific element is provided to the player. On the other hand, a game can be performed in expectation of a specific effect being performed in a specific game state. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines BC1 to BC5, at least the main control means for performing main control relating to the game and the effect executing means are provided, and the main control means performs control according to a command output from the main control means. Control means; and display means capable of displaying identification information, wherein the main control means performs a determination based on satisfaction of a determination condition, and a determination result of the determination means is a predetermined identification. A bonus game execution unit that executes a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the result of the determination, a dynamic display unit that dynamically displays the identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination unit, Type determining means for determining a dynamic display type in the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display means, and a type command for indicating the dynamic display type determined by the type determining means Command output means for outputting to the slave control means, and the slave control means comprises a command receiving means capable of receiving at least the type command, and the effect execution means is provided by the command receiving means Based on the reception of the type command, an effect corresponding to the received type command is configured to be executable, and the specific effect is a predetermined specific dynamic display type. A gaming machine BC6 comprising an effect that can be executed by the effect executing means as an effect in accordance with (1).

  According to the gaming machine BC6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines BC1 to BC5, the sub control means determines the type of the specific effect when a type command corresponding to the specific dynamic display type is received. Since only the processing load is required, the processing load on the slave control means can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine BC6, the main control means sets the specific game set by the first game state setting means as defined information in which information referred to when determining the dynamic display type is defined in advance. The first specified information referred to when determining the dynamic display type in the state, and the first specified information referred to when determining the dynamic display type in the specific game state set by the second game state setting means. Reference information storage means storing at least a plurality of pieces of definition information including at least second definition information, and a reference 1 for determining the dynamic display type based on the satisfaction of the determination condition. Regulation information specifying means for specifying the prescribed information from the prescribed information storage means, wherein the second prescribed information is easier to determine the specific dynamic display type than the second prescribed information. Gaming machine BC7, characterized in that so as to information is one that is defined.

  According to the gaming machine BC7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BC6, there is an effect that the ease of determination of a specific dynamic display type can be changed only by changing the reference information to be referred to.

  In the gaming machine BC7, when the predetermined condition is satisfied at the time when the determination condition is satisfied, the second dynamic information determines the specific dynamic display type more than the second specific information. If the specific condition is not satisfied, the information is defined such that the determination ratio of the specific dynamic display type is common to the second specified information. Gaming machine BC8.

  According to the gaming machine BC8, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BC7, the determination ratio of the specific dynamic display type can be changed according to whether or not the specific condition is satisfied. Can be. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic BD group> (Specific suggestions are more likely to occur in situations that are disadvantageous to the player)
Based on the establishment of a specific execution condition, a specific effect execution means for executing a predetermined specific effect, and a type of the specific effect executed by the specific effect execution means, as a specific element related to the degree of advantage of the player. A specific effect type determining means for determining one of a plurality of types including at least a first specific effect capable of suggesting a state to a player and a second specific effect in which the state of the specific element is not easily suggested; Game state setting means for setting one of a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state based on establishment of a setting condition; The gaming machine BD1, wherein the first game state is configured such that the first specific effect is more easily determined by the specific effect type determination means than in the second game state.

  Here, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are known gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. In this conventional gaming machine, a symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, so that a big hit game advantageous to the player is given. In addition, various images such as characters and landscapes are displayed on the display device in addition to the design, and a variety of entertainment effects are performed to improve the interest of the game (for example, JP-A-2003-325886). Gazette).

  In addition, some of such conventional gaming machines are capable of executing an effect mode indicating a degree of advantage for a player in a predetermined gaming state.

  However, there was a demand for further improvement in interest.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BD1, it is possible for a player who wants to know the state of the specific element to actively play a game in the first gaming state. Therefore, there is an effect that the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

  In the gaming machine BD1, the gaming machine BD2 is characterized in that the first gaming state is configured as a gaming state that is more disadvantageous to a player than the second gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine BD2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BD1, there is an effect that the operating rate in the disadvantageous first gaming state can be improved.

  In the gaming machine BD1 or BD2, the gaming state setting means includes a first gaming state, a second gaming state, and a third gaming state which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state and the second gaming state. And at least one of a plurality of game states including at least one of the plurality of game states, wherein the specific effect type determination unit determines that the game state after the end of the privilege game is other than the third game state. The first game state set in the situation of the specific number or more is more than the first game state set in the situation where the number of consecutive times set in the game state is less than the predetermined number of times. A gaming machine BD3 configured to easily determine a first specific effect.

  According to the gaming machine BD3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BD1 or BD2, as the disadvantageous situation in which the advantageous third gaming state is not set continues, the specific effect is more likely to be executed, so the disadvantageous situation continues. Even in this case, there is an effect that it is possible to make it difficult to lower the motivation of the player for the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines BD1 to BD3, a discriminating means for executing discrimination based on the satisfaction of a discriminating condition, and a player being notified based on the discrimination result of the discriminating means being a predetermined specific discrimination result Privilege game executing means for executing an advantageous privilege game, and a first probability, which is higher than the first probability, as the specific element, a probability of the specific determination result in the first game state being predetermined. And a specific element setting means for setting at least one of a plurality of probabilities including at least two probabilities, wherein the second game state has a higher probability of being the specific determination result than the first game state. A gaming machine BD4 configured in a state.

  According to the gaming machine BD4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines BD1 to BD3, in the specific effect, it is possible to cause the player to play a game with the expectation that the second probability is suggested. There is an effect that interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine BD4, the second game state is configured to be the specific determination result with a probability equal to or higher than a third probability higher than the second probability, and the first specific effect is: A first effect mode that is easier to be executed when the first probability is set than the second probability, and a second effect mode that is easier to be executed when the second probability is set than the first probability And at least one of a plurality of steps including at least one of the plurality of steps, wherein the specific effect is configured in an effect mode that suggests information according to a probability of being a specific determination result. Machine BD5.

  According to the gaming machine BD5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BD4, it is possible to expect that the second effect mode is executed when the specific effect is executed, thereby improving the interest of the player in the game. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine BD5, the specific element setting unit sets a probability of the specific determination result to the first probability by setting a predetermined first set value to a predetermined setting destination, By setting a second setting value different from the first setting value to a predetermined setting destination, a probability of the specific determination result is set to the second probability, and the first effect mode Is a numerical value indicating a probability less than or equal to the first probability, and is configured in an effect mode of notifying a numerical value indicating the first set value, the second effect mode is the A gaming machine BD6 characterized in that the gaming machine BD6 is configured to produce a numerical value indicating a probability equal to or less than the first probability and to notify a numerical value indicating the second set value.

  According to the gaming machine BD6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BD5, since the set value can be indicated by a numerical value in the first specific effect, there is an effect that an effect that can be easily understood by the player can be realized.

  In the gaming machine BD5 or BD6, the second specific effect is configured in an effect mode of reporting a numerical value indicating a probability that the probability of the specific determination result is equal to or more than the second probability and equal to or less than the third probability. A gaming machine BD7, which is characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine BD7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BD5 or BD6, the probability suggested by the second specific effect can be made equal to or less than the actual probability, so that the actual behavior of the gaming machine is specified by the second specification. It can be greater than or equal to the probability suggested by the means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the behavior of the gaming machine from being inconsistent with the content of the specific effect, and thus it is possible to achieve a more suitable effect mode.

  In any one of the gaming machines BD5 to BD7, the specific effect type determination means may include the first specific effect, the second specific effect, and the first gaming state set to the second probability, or the second game effect. A gaming machine BD8 characterized in that it is configured to be able to determine one of a plurality of types including at least a third specific effect having a content suggesting one of a gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine BD8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines BD5 to BD7, when the third specific effect is executed, it is possible to expect the player to be in the first gaming state. There is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine BD8, the third specific effect is configured in an effect mode of notifying a numerical value indicating a probability that the probability of the specific determination result is higher than the first probability and equal to or less than the second probability. A gaming machine BD9 characterized by being performed.

  According to the gaming machine BD9, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BD8, attention can be paid to the numerical value notified by the specific effect, so that there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic BE group> (varies the appearance rate of the chance zone according to the setting)
Discriminating means for executing a discrimination based on the satisfaction of the discriminating condition; privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on a first discrimination result obtained by the discriminating means; In the specific game state, based on the second determination result different from the first determination result, a special state that is advantageous to the player until the predetermined specific condition is satisfied is set. The special state setting means configured to be settable, and the specific element relating to the player's advantage to the first state corresponding to the first advantage, and the second advantage to a second advantage higher than the first advantage A corresponding second state, and state setting means that can be set to one of a plurality of states including at least the specific state, wherein the first state is more specific than the second state. Previous in state Gaming machine BE1, wherein are those constituted tends to be the second determination result.

  Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a result of a lottery performed based on winning of a game ball to a starting winning prize port is a hit, the game machine shifts to a hit state. Some of such gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of winning types having different numbers of rounds, and some of them aim to improve the interest in winning by making different game values obtainable (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

  In addition, among the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, there is a gaming machine configured so that a gaming state after a hit state ends according to a hit type can be made different. There are also those that aim to improve the interest in.

  However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the game may be monotonous because the degree of advantage of each gaming state is fixed.

  According to the gaming machine BE1, the first state having the lower degree of advantage is more likely to be set to the special state in the specific game state, so that the first state having the lower degree of advantage in the specific game state can be expected. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine BE1, the state setting means sets, as the specific element, a probability of being the first determination result at least in the specific game state, and the first state is a predetermined first state. The first state is configured to be the first determination result with a probability of 1, and the second state is configured to be the first determination result with a second probability higher than the first probability. A gaming machine BE2.

  According to the gaming machine BE2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BE1, it is possible to realize a novel gaming property that can expect a state in which the probability of being the first determination result is low in a specific gaming state. This has the effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine BE1 or BE2, when the special state is set in the specific game state, the specific game state is maintained at least until the special state ends. Gaming machine BE3.

  According to the gaming machine BE3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BE1 or BE2, in a specific gaming state, the degree of advantage can be changed without changing the gaming state, thereby improving the interest of the player in the game. There is an effect that can be.

  In any one of the gaming machines BE1 to BE3, the determination means performs first determination based on satisfaction of a first determination condition, and performs determination based on satisfaction of a second determination condition. And at least in the specific game state, the discrimination of the second discriminating means tends to be more advantageous to the player than the discrimination of the first discriminating means. The gaming machine BE4, wherein the special state is a state in which the determination by the second determination means is more easily performed than a state in which the special state is not set.

  According to the gaming machine BE4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines BE1 to BE3, in a special state, it is easy to perform an advantageous determination by the second determination means. Play games in Chia. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine BE4, the special state setting means is configured to be able to set the special state based on a result of the second determination by the first determination means. Machine BE5.

  According to the gaming machine BE5, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine BE4, a novel special state is set in which an advantageous special state is set when the second determination result is obtained by the first determination means having a low degree of advantage. There is an effect that can be realized.

  In the gaming machine BE4 or BE5, first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying first identification information for indicating the determination result of the first determination means, and second dynamic display means for indicating the determination result of the second determination means. Second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information, wherein the dynamic display of the first identification information and the dynamic display of the second identification information are configured to be able to be executed in an overlapping manner. A gaming machine BE6 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the gaming machine BE6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BE4 or BE5, there is an effect that the determination means can be efficiently determined.

  In the gaming machine BE6, the special state is at least constituted by a state during which the first identification information for indicating the second determination result is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. A gaming machine BE7, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine BE7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BE6, during the special state, only the advantageous determination of the second determination means can be executed, so that the special state can be more strongly expected. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine BE6 or BE7, the ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first position at which a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and the game ball cannot enter the ball entry means. And a variable means that can be changed to a second position based on the fact that the first determination result and the second determination result differ from the first determination result and the second determination result by the second determination means. A variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which the variable means changes from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period; and a predetermined privilege based on a game ball having entered the ball entry means. A gaming machine BE8 comprising:

  According to the gaming machine BE8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BE6 or BE7, there is an effect that a game can be played in expectation of the execution of the variable game.

  In any of the gaming machines BE1 to BE8, the special state setting means continuously obtains the second determination result over a predetermined number of times of determination by the determination means in the specific game state. In this case, the gaming machine BE9 is configured to be able to set the special state at a higher rate than when the number of consecutive times of the second determination result is less than the specific number of times.

  According to the gaming machine BE9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines BE1 to BE8, there is an effect that a novel gaming property that expects the second determination result to be continued for a specific number of times or more can be realized.

  In the gaming machine BE9, the special state setting means sets the special state at a predetermined first rate when the number of consecutive times of the second determination result is equal to or greater than the specific number, and When the number of consecutive times of the discrimination result is equal to or more than a second number that is greater than the specific number, the special state can be set at a second rate higher than the first rate. A gaming machine BE10 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine BE10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BE9, the special state is more likely to be set as the second determination result continues, so that the player's interest increases as the second determination result continues. There is an effect that can be.

<Characteristic BF group> (Based on the fact that the lottery result is purely off, a chance zone is formed without changing the game state)
Determining means for performing a determination based on the satisfaction of the determination condition; privilege game executing means for performing a bonus game advantageous to the player based on a result of the determination by the determination means being a specific determination result; Game state setting means for setting one game state from among a plurality of game states including at least a first game state in which the degree of advantage of the player becomes the first degree of advantage based on the establishment of the first condition; In the state, based on the determination result of the determination means being different from the specific determination result, the first game state is maintained until the predetermined specific condition is satisfied. A gaming machine BF1 comprising: an advantage level setting means capable of setting an advantage level to a second advantage level higher than the first advantage level.

  Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a result of a lottery performed based on winning of a game ball to a starting winning prize port is a hit, the game machine shifts to a hit state. Some of such gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of winning types having different numbers of rounds, and some of them aim to improve the interest in winning by making different game values obtainable (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

  In addition, among the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, there is a gaming machine configured so that a gaming state after a hit state ends according to a hit type can be made different. There are also those that aim to improve the interest in.

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the game state does not change unless the lottery result is a hit, and there is a problem that the player is discouraged every time the lottery result is out of order.

  According to the gaming machine BF1, a novel gaming property in which the degree of advantage is increased in the case of a departure determination result can be realized, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  The gaming machine BF1 includes dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a result of the determination by the determination means, and the advantage degree setting means includes means for displaying the departure determination result by the dynamic display means. The gaming machine BF2, wherein the advantage degree during the dynamic display of the identification information is set to the second advantage degree.

  According to the gaming machine BF2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BF1, it is possible to realize an extremely novel gaming property that is advantageous while the identification information for indicating the separation determination result is dynamically displayed. This has the effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine BF1 or BF2, the discriminating means performs a discrimination based on a first discrimination condition being satisfied, and a second discriminating condition which is different from the first discriminating condition. And a second discriminating means for executing the discriminating by the discriminating means. A gaming machine BF3 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine BF3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BF1 or BF2, there is an effect that the game can be played with a strong expectation that the determination by the second determination means will be executed.

  In the gaming machine BF3, the advantage degree setting means sets the second degree of advantage based on the result of the departure determination by the first determination means. Machine BF4.

  According to the gaming machine BF4, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine BF3, an extremely novel gaming property is realized in which the advantage is increased when the first discriminating means having a low advantage has a disadvantageous determination result. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine BF4, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a result of the discrimination by the discriminating means is provided. The length of the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of information is configured to be variable, and the advantage degree setting unit determines the first game state by the first determination unit in the first game state. A dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the determination result of the first determination unit is set to a length equal to or less than a predetermined first period until the determination result of the first determination unit is reached. The dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the determination result of the first determination unit is set to be longer than the first period based on the result of the determination by the first determination unit. Long second period The dynamic display means, at least in the first game state, as a dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the determination result of the second determination means, A gaming machine BF5 configured to dynamically display the identification information in a dynamic display period having a length equal to or shorter than the first period.

  According to the gaming machine BF5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BF3, the dynamic display period of the second period can be set when the first determination unit determines that the game device is out of range. Only the determination by the second determination means can be executed during the period. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines BF1 to BF5, the advantage degree setting means continuously obtains the departure determination result in the first game state over a first predetermined number of times determined by the determination means. The gaming machine BF6, wherein the second advantage degree can be set at a higher ratio than the case where the number of consecutive times of the departure determination result is less than the first number.

  According to the gaming machine BF6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines BF1 to BF5, it is possible to realize a novel gaming property that expects a continuous determination result over the first number of determinations. There is.

  In the gaming machine BF6, the advantage degree setting means sets the second advantage degree at a first rate when the number of consecutive times of the deviation determination result is equal to or greater than the first number, and sets the number of consecutive times of the deviation determination result. Is configured to be able to set the second degree of advantage at a second rate higher than the first rate when the number is equal to or greater than a second number greater than the first number. Gaming machine BF7.

  According to the gaming machine BF7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BF6, there is an effect that a novel gaming property can be realized in which the degree of expectation to be set to the second advantageous degree is improved as the result of the separation determination is continued.

<Characteristic BG group> (Lower setting with 1 type and 2 types makes it easier to hit with an accessory)
A ball entry unit into which a game ball can enter, a first region provided at a position where a game ball entered into the ball entry unit can flow, a second region different from the first region, A distributing means for distributing a game ball that has entered the ball entry means to the first area or the second area, based on a game ball having entered the first area; A privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player, and a first state corresponding to the first degree of advantage, based on establishment of a predetermined setting condition, And a second state corresponding to a second advantage degree different from the first advantage degree, and a state setting means for setting the state to any one of a plurality of states including at least the first state. , The game ball entering the ball entry means is more than the second state. Gaming machine BG1, characterized in that is configured to be easily distributed to the region.

  Here, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a ball entrance that can enter a ball when the electric accessory is opened (or movable), and the game ball enters the ball entrance. A game ball that enters the inside of a V winning device that is opened during a specific game (small hitting game or the like) executed based on a specific area (a winning switch or the like) provided in the V winning device. There has been proposed a pachinko machine that can provide a bonus game (winning game or the like) that is advantageous to a player by passing through the pachinko machine, and the fun of the player has been improved (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-2011). -010741).

  In addition, some of such conventional gaming machines may perform an effect indicating a degree of expectation as to whether or not a privilege game given when passing through a specific area during a specific game is an advantageous type. Some are configured to be possible. In such a conventional gaming machine, when it is suggested that the degree of expectation as a privilege game of an advantageous type is high, a game can be performed with a stronger expectation of passing through a specific area.

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, when the specific game is executed, since the ratio itself of the game balls passing through the specific area is common, it is suggested that the degree of expectation, which is an advantageous type, is high. However, there is a problem that it is difficult to improve the interest of the player.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BG1, the ease of distribution to the first area can be made different depending on whether the game machine is in the first state or the second state. There is an effect that can be improved.

  In the gaming machine BG1, the gaming machine BG2 is characterized in that the first degree of advantage is lower than the second degree of advantage.

  According to the gaming machine BG2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BG1, there is an effect that a novel gaming property can be realized in which a lower degree of advantage is more easily distributed to the first area by the distribution means.

  In the gaming machine BG1 or BG2, a variable position can be changed between a first position at which the game ball can enter the ball entry means and a second position at which the game ball becomes more difficult to enter than the first position. Means, discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring predetermined discrimination information based on establishment of an acquisition condition, discrimination means for executing discrimination using the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means, and discrimination means. A variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on a result of the determination being a specific determination result; Game state setting means for setting one of a plurality of game states including at least a first game state advantageous to a player as a game state after the game is completed, wherein the first state is the first state From two states In the period from when the first game state is set to when the determination using all the determination information acquired during the first game state is completed, the game ball that has entered the ball entry means is A gaming machine BG3 configured to be easily distributed to the first area.

  According to the gaming machine BG3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines BG1 or BG2, the setting of the first state makes it easier for the gaming balls to be distributed to the first area in the advantageous first gaming state. There is an effect that the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  The gaming machine BG3 further includes a second privilege game execution unit that executes the privilege game based on a result of the determination by the determination unit being a second determination result different from the specific determination result. The game state is based on the fact that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a different discrimination result different from the specific discrimination result and the second discrimination result, and the A gaming machine BG4 configured to be easily sorted into one area.

  According to the gaming machine BG4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BG3, it is possible to realize a novel gaming property that the game machine BG3 can be easily assigned to the first area when the result of the separation is determined in the first gaming state. effective.

  In the gaming machine BG4, the first state is configured to have a lower probability of the second determination result and a higher probability of the third determination result than the second state. A gaming machine BG5, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine BG5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BG4, the novel first gaming state is more advantageous when the first state having a low probability of being the second determination result is set. Since it is possible to realize a great amusement, there is an effect that a player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine BG4 or BG5, storage means capable of storing the discrimination information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined specific number of information as an upper limit until used for discrimination by the discrimination means, Dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the result of determination, and dynamic display period setting means for setting a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display means. Wherein the distributing means is configured to facilitate distributing the game ball to the first area when the game ball arrives at a predetermined first period cycle, A display period setting unit for dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating the specific determination result in a state where the one or more pieces of the determination information are stored in the storage unit in the first game state; When setting a dynamic display period in the variable game, it is configured to be able to set a dynamic display period in which the variable game is easily executed in the first period cycle, and the dynamic display period setting means, In the first game state, when setting a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the departure determination result, a length capable of acquiring the specific information number of the determination information. Gaming machine BG6, characterized in that a dynamic display period can be set.

  According to the gaming machine BG6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BG4 or BG5, it is possible to acquire the discrimination information of a specific number of information during the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the discrimination result. There is an effect that a game can be played in expectation of a determination result.

  In the gaming machine BG6, the dynamic display period setting means sets the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the specific determination result in the first gaming state. A dynamic display of a length that makes it difficult to obtain the discrimination information between the start of the dynamic display of the information and the end of the variable game executed after the end of the dynamic display of the identification information. A gaming machine BG7 characterized in that a period can be set.

  According to the gaming machine BG7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BG6, it is difficult to obtain the discrimination information only during the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the departure discrimination result. It is possible to play games with strong expectation of becoming. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic BHs>
A variable member that can be changed, a variable unit that changes the variable member, and based on that power has been supplied to the gaming machine, the variable member performs an input operation that is a predetermined operation. A turning-on control means capable of controlling the variable means, and the turning-on operation being executed when a predetermined specific condition is satisfied at the time when the power is turned on to the gaming machine. A gaming machine BH1 comprising: a suppression unit that suppresses the occurrence of a game machine.

  Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines include a variable member operated by a motor or the like. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine capable of performing various effect operations by operating a plurality of variable members (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-012194).

  Some conventional gaming machines determine whether or not the variable member can operate normally by causing the variable member to perform a predetermined insertion operation when power is supplied to the gaming machine. Some are configured to be able to do so.

  However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the insertion operation may be performed even in a situation where the insertion operation should not be performed.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BH1, there is an effect that the variable member can be suitably operated when the power is turned on.

  In the gaming machine BH1, when the specific condition is satisfied at the time when the power is supplied to the gaming machine, the suppression unit may perform at least until the specific condition is not satisfied. A gaming machine BH2 characterized in that it is configured to be able to suppress execution of a loading operation.

  According to the gaming machine BH2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BH1, there is an effect that the start timing of the insertion operation can be suitably set.

  In the gaming machine BH1 or BH2, when the specific condition and a second specific condition different from the specific condition are satisfied at the time when the power is supplied to the gaming machine, the specific condition is satisfied. A gaming machine BH3, comprising: a second control unit that controls the variable unit so as to perform the insertion operation on condition that the game machine is not in a state of being turned off.

  According to the gaming machine BH3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BH1 or BH2, the insertion operation can be performed in a state where the specific condition is not satisfied, so that the insertion operation can be performed more suitably. This has the effect.

  In the gaming machine BH3, the suppression means determines that the specific condition is satisfied when the specific condition is satisfied at the time when power is supplied to the gaming machine and the second specific condition is not satisfied. The gaming machine BH4 is characterized in that the insertion operation is prevented from being executed even after the game machine has not been set.

  According to the gaming machine BH3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BH4, the execution of the insertion operation when the second specific condition is satisfied can be suppressed, so that the variable member can be suitably operated. effective.

  In any one of the gaming machines BH1 to BH4, an operation means that can be operated by the operator, and power is supplied to the gaming machine in a state where the first operation content is operated on the operation means. , The state of the specific element relating to the player's advantage is defined as a first state corresponding to the first advantage, and a second state corresponding to the second advantage higher than the first advantage. And a special state setting means for setting a special state capable of being set to one of a plurality of states including at least, wherein the suppressing operation is performed while the special state is set. A gaming machine BH5 characterized in that execution is suppressed.

  According to the gaming machine BH5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines BH1 to BH4, the insertion operation is performed while the special state is set, and it becomes difficult to change the state of the specific element. This has the effect of suppressing

  In the gaming machine BH5, a display means capable of displaying information indicating a state of the specific element, and a state in which an operation of a second operation content different from the operation of the second operation content is performed on the operation means A second special state setting means for setting a second special state in which the state of the specific element is displayed on the display means based on the power being supplied to the gaming machine, and the suppression means comprises: If the second special state is set when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, it is configured to be able to suppress the execution of the turning-on operation even after the second special state is ended. A gaming machine BH6.

  According to the gaming machine BH6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BH5, the power of the gaming machine is turned on again simply to confirm the state of the specific element, and the power is turned on even though there is a high possibility that the turning-on operation is unnecessary. Since the execution of the operation can be suppressed, there is an effect that the operation of the variable member when the power is turned on can be suitably set.

  In the gaming machine BH6, the operation means includes at least a first operation means and a second operation means different from the first operation means, and the operation of the first operation content is The first operation means and the second operation means are both configured to operate, and the second operation content is configured to include only the first operation means. Gaming machine BH7 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine BH7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BH6, the operator can easily use the operation of the first operation content and the operation of the second operation content, so that the convenience of the operator is improved. There is an effect that it can be improved.

  In the gaming machine BH7, a game possible state setting means for setting a normal game possible state based on the fact that the first operation means is in a non-operation state in the special state and the second special state. A gaming machine BH8, comprising:

  According to the gaming machine BH8, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BH7, the gaming possible state can be easily set, so that there is an effect that the convenience for the operator can be improved.

<Characteristic BI group> (provided with a variation pattern that is likely to be determined when a lottery is executed based on a winning random number that is a hit in some settings and a hit in other settings)
Discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information based on satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition; discrimination means for performing discrimination using the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means; A bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player based on a specific determination result; and a determination using a predetermined specific determination information as the determination information is performed. A plurality of conditions including at least a first determination state that is a specific determination result and a second determination state that is a deviation determination result different from the specific determination result when the determination using the specific determination information is performed. A determination state setting means for setting one determination state from among the following; a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result of the determination means; and a dynamic display means for indicating the departure determination result. As a dynamic display type in dynamic display of different information, a first dynamic display type that is easily executed when the specific discrimination information is used for discrimination and results in the departure discrimination, and the specific discrimination information A dynamic display type determination for determining one of a plurality of dynamic display types including at least a second dynamic display type which is easily executed when different determination information is used for the determination and the deviation determination result is obtained. A game machine BI1 comprising:

  Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, display a symbol on a display means in a fluctuating manner to notify a result of a lottery performed based on a winning of a game ball to a starting winning port. In such a gaming machine, when the game is stopped and displayed in a predetermined specific symbol, the game machine shifts to a so-called hit state which is advantageous to the player. In this symbol variation, a plurality of patterns having different variation times are provided to improve the interest of the player in the game (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-230714).

  However, there is a demand for further improvement in interest.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BI1, it is possible to predict whether the state is the first determination state or the second determination state in accordance with the dynamic display type, thereby improving the interest of the player in the game. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine BI1, a specific effect execution unit that executes a specific effect while the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display unit, and the second dynamic display type A first effect mode that is more easily executed in the dynamic display of the identification information of the first dynamic display type than the dynamic display of the identification information, and a dynamic display of the identification information of the first dynamic display type. And a second effect mode that is easy to be executed in the dynamic display of the identification information of the second dynamic display type. Gaming machine BI2.

  According to the gaming machine BI2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BI1, whether the dynamic display of the identification information of the first dynamic display type is executed depending on the effect mode or the dynamic display of the identification information of the second dynamic display type is performed. Since it is easier to understand whether the display has been executed, there is an effect that the convenience for the player can be improved.

  In the gaming machine BI2, the first specific effect is configured in an effect mode that indicates the first determination state.

  According to the gaming machine BI3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BI2, there is an effect that when the first specific effect is executed, the player can be convinced that the game is in the first determination state.

  In any of the gaming machines BI1 to BI3, the first determination state is configured to be the specific determination result at a predetermined first probability, and the second determination state includes: The gaming machine BI4, wherein the specific determination result is obtained at a second probability lower than the first probability.

  According to the gaming machine BI4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines BI1 to BI3, when the first dynamic display type that is easily executed in the first determination state is determined, the probability of a specific determination result being high. Since the possibility of being in the discrimination state increases, it is possible to cause the player to play the game with a strong expectation that the first dynamic display type is determined. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine BI4, based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition, a plurality of games including at least a first game state and a second game state in which the probability of the specific determination result being higher than the first game state are higher. Game state setting means for setting one of the game states, wherein the first determination state is a state in which the probability of the specific determination result in the first game state is set to the first probability. The gaming machine BI5, wherein the second determination state includes a state in which the probability of the specific determination result in the first game state is set to the second probability.

  According to the gaming machine BI5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BI4, when the first determination state is set, it is specified in the first gaming state having a lower degree of advantage than when the second determination state is set. Is more likely to result, so that the player can play the game strongly expecting that the first determination state is set.

  In the gaming machine BI5, the first determination state is a state in which the probability of the specific determination result in the second game state is set to a third probability higher than the first probability, and The second determination state is a state in which the probability of the specific determination result in the second game state is set to a fourth probability higher than the second probability and lower than the third probability. A gaming machine BI6 characterized by being performed.

  According to the gaming machine BI6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BI5, in the first determination state, the probability of obtaining a specific determination result in both the first gaming state and the second gaming state increases, so the first determination is performed. The superiority in the state can be further improved. Therefore, there is an effect that a game can be played with a stronger expectation of being set to the first determination state.

  In any of the gaming machines BI1 to BI6, the discriminating state set by the discriminating state setting means can be maintained until the power of the gaming machine is cut off.

  According to the gaming machine BI7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines BI1 to BI6, since the discrimination state is not changed during the opening hours of the hall, it is strongly expected that an advantageous discrimination state is set, and the game is played. There is an effect that it can be performed.

  Any one of the gaming machines BI1 to BI7, comprising: an operation means operable by an operator; and an operation validity period setting means for setting an operation validity period for treating an operation on the operation means as valid. Sets the first determination state based on the operation of the first operation content performed on the operation means during the operation valid period, and performs the operation of the second operation content. The gaming machine BI8 is configured to be able to set the second determination state based on the above.

  According to the gaming machine BI8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines BI1 to BI7, the discriminating state can be set by operating the operation means, so that the desired discriminating state can be easily set. . Therefore, there is an effect that the convenience for the operator can be improved.

<Characteristic BJ group> (Change the appearance rate of chance zones according to conditions)
A special state setting means configured to be able to set a special state that is likely to be advantageous to the player based on the satisfaction of a predetermined specific condition, and a specific element relating to the degree of advantage of the player, the first degree of advantage State setting that can be set to one of a plurality of states including at least a first state corresponding to the first state and a second state corresponding to a second degree of advantage different from the first degree of advantage. Means, and wherein the first state is configured so that the specific condition is more easily satisfied than the second state.

  According to the gaming machine BJ1, since the ease with which the specific condition is satisfied varies depending on the state, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine BJ1, the special state setting means sets the special state based on the satisfaction of the specific condition in a predetermined specific gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine BJ2, there is an effect that a game can be played in the expectation that a specific condition will be satisfied in a specific game state.

  In the gaming machine BJ1 or BJ2, the gaming state at the time when the specific condition is satisfied is maintained from when the special state is set to when the special state ends, in the gaming machine BJ3. .

  According to the gaming machine BJ3, since the degree of advantage can be changed without changing the gaming state, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  The gaming machine BJ4, wherein the gaming state at the time when the specific condition is satisfied is maintained even after the special state is completed in the gaming machine BJ3.

  According to the gaming machine BJ4, since the degree of advantage can be changed without changing the gaming state before and after the special state, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines BJ1 to BJ4, a discriminating means for executing discrimination based on the satisfaction of a discriminating condition, and a privilege game advantageous to a player based on a discrimination result of the discriminating means being a specific discrimination result. The special state setting means, based on that the determination result of the determination means is a deviation determination result different from the specific determination result, as the specific condition, A gaming machine BJ5 configured to be able to set the special state.

  According to the gaming machine BJ5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines BJ1 to BJ4, a novel gaming property in which an advantageous special state is set based on a generally unfavorable departure determination result is provided. There is an effect that it can be realized.

<Characteristic BK group> (variable the degree of advantage in the case of deviation)
Discriminating means for executing a discrimination based on the satisfaction of the discriminating condition; privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the discrimination result of the discriminating means being the first discrimination result; Game state setting means for setting one game state from among a plurality of game states including at least a first game state in which a player's advantage becomes a first advantage based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition; An advantage that can be set to a second advantage degree higher than the first advantage degree based on the fact that the determination result of the determination means becomes the second determination result from the first determination result in a game state. A gaming machine BK1 comprising: degree setting means.

  According to the gaming machine BK1, a novel gaming property in which the degree of advantage is increased without execution of the privilege game can be realized, and thus there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  The gaming machine BK2 in the gaming machine BK1, wherein the advantage degree setting means is configured to be able to set the second advantageous degree while maintaining a gaming state in the first gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine BK2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine BK1, it is possible to realize a novel gaming property in which the degree of advantage can be changed without changing the gaming state. There is an effect that it can be improved.

  In the gaming machine BK1 or BK2, the gaming state setting means sets the first gaming state and a second gaming state in which a player has a third degree of advantage lower than the first degree of advantage. A gaming machine BK3 characterized in that one gaming state can be set from among at least a plurality of gaming states.

  According to the gaming machine BK3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BK1 or BK2, the second discrimination result is obtained in the relatively advantageous first gaming state, so that the degree of advantage is further improved. There is an effect that the interest of the player can be further improved in the case of the determination result of 2.

  In any of the gaming machines BK1 to BK3, it is more advantageous than the privilege game based on the fact that the discrimination by the discrimination means results in a third discrimination result different from the first discrimination result and the second discrimination result. A gaming machine BK4 comprising a specific game execution means for executing a specific game with a low degree.

  According to the gaming machine BK4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines BK1 to BK3, the novel gaming ability in which the degree of advantage is increased based on the second determination result having the lowest advantage among the determination results. Can be realized, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines BK1 to BK4, the determining means performs first determination based on satisfaction of a first determination condition, and performs determination based on satisfaction of a second determination condition different from the first determination condition. And a second discriminating means for performing discrimination by the second discriminating means. The second discriminating means is more advantageous to the player than the first discriminating means when the specific discrimination result is obtained. The advantage game of a type with a high degree is configured to be easily executed, and the advantage level setting means determines the second determination result in the first game state by the first determination means. The gaming machine BK5, characterized in that it can be set to the second advantage based on the fact that

  According to the gaming machine BK5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines BK1 to BK4, when the second determination result having the low advantage is low in the determination of the first determination means having the low degree of advantage, the degree of advantage is increased. Since novel game characteristics can be realized, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

(Issue 1)
The following gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, CC1 to CC3, CD1 to CD6, CE1 to CE3, CF1 to CF5, CG1 to CG3, CH1 to CH3, CI1 to CI4, CJ1 to CJ5, CK1 to CK5, CL1 To CL5, CM1 to CM6, CN1 to CN5, and CO1 are made to solve the following problems.

  That is, conventionally, a game medium is fired by a firing means to a game area provided with a plurality of winning ports, and when the gaming medium wins one of the winning ports, a predetermined value is set for the winning port. There are gaming machines in which a number of game media are paid out to players. Some of the winning openings are provided with an accessory, and the operation of the accessory may affect the winning of the game medium (for example, JP-A-2003-340046).

  By the way, some of the wrongdoers illegally actuate the role in the winning port provided with the role, or guide the game medium to win the role in the winning port, and the role is provided. Some attempt to increase the number of winnings in the winning opening. However, the measures for finding such misconduct are insufficient.

  The present technical idea has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably detecting illegal acts.

(Means and effects 1)
<CA group>
A game area provided with a plurality of winning ports including a first winning port having an accessory operated based on the game;
Launching means for launching a game medium to the gaming area;
A prize detecting means provided for each prize port and detecting a prize of the game medium to a corresponding prize port;
When the prize detecting means detects that the game medium fired by the shooting means has won one of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games are played with respect to the winning hole of the game medium. Means for paying out the medium,
Information related to the ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning port with respect to the number of the game media paid out by the payout unit is accumulated and stored in the storage unit. Storage control means for causing
An output unit for outputting at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage unit, the gaming machine CA1.

  According to the gaming machine CA1, the game medium is fired by the shooting means to a game area provided with a plurality of winning ports including a first winning port having an accessory operated based on the game. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detecting means for detecting a winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium fired by the firing means has won one of the winning openings, a predetermined number of game media are determined for the winning winning opening of the game medium. Is paid out by the paying means. Further, information relating to a ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout device is stored in the storage device by the storage control device. You. Then, a signal based on at least the information stored in the storage unit is output by the output unit. Thereby, based on the output signal, of the number of game media paid out in accordance with the winning of the winning opening, the ratio of the bonuses, which is the ratio of the one by the first winning opening (that is, the operation of the bonus). Has the effect of being able to analyze and to detect fraudulent acts based on the ratio of the characters.

In the gaming machine CA1,
When the prize detecting means detects that the game medium fired by the launch means has won any one of the winning holes, the payout is performed based on the winning hole of the game medium. A payout number setting means for setting the number of game media to be issued and notifying the payout means, and comprising a main control means for performing a main control of the game,
The gaming machine CA2, wherein the storage means, the storage control means, and the output means are provided in the main control means.

  According to the gaming machine CA2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine CA1. That is, when it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium fired by the prize detecting means and the firing means has won one of the winning holes, the payout is made based on the winning prize hole of the game medium. A payout number setting means for setting the number of game media and notifying the payout means, wherein the main control means for performing a main control of the game includes a first control unit for the number of game media paid out by the payout means. Storage means for accumulating and storing information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on a winning in a winning opening; storage control means for accumulating the information and storing the information in a storage means; Output means for outputting at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means. Thereby, the detection of the winning in the winning opening by the winning detecting means, the setting of the number of game media paid out based on the detection, based on the set number of payouts, the number of game media paid out by the payout means, The main control is performed by the storage of the information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning opening in the storage means and the output of the signal based on the information stored in the storage means. It can be done in the means. Therefore, even if a fraudster outputs fraudulent information from the output unit and tries to prevent the fraudulent act based on the ratio of belongings from being detected, the above configuration is completed by the main control unit. Difficult to enter. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress that the detection of the fraudulent act based on the ratio of the public goods is hindered by outputting the fraudulent information by the fraudulent person.

In the gaming machine CA2,
The gaming machine CA3, characterized in that the main control means is housed in a board box in which a box pace and a box cover covering an opening of the box base are connected so as not to be opened.

  According to the gaming machine CA3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine CA2. That is, since the main control means is housed in the board box in which the box pace and the box cover covering the opening of the box base are connected so as not to be opened, the wrongdoer can send illegal information to the output means. Is output to try to prevent the detection of fraudulent acts based on the ratio of characters, it becomes difficult to input fraudulent information. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably suppress the detection of the fraudulent activity based on the ratio of the accessory by the output of the fraudulent information by the fraudster.

In any of the gaming machines CA1 to CA3,
External device connection means connectable to an external device;
An external device connection detection unit that detects that the external device is connected to the external device connection unit,
The output unit is based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage unit for the external device, triggered by the detection of the connection of the external device by the external device connection detection unit. A gaming machine CA4 characterized by outputting a signal.

  According to the gaming machine CA4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines CA1 to CA3. That is, when an external device is connected to the external device connection means, the external device is detected by the external device connection means, and upon the detection, a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means is sent to the external device. Is output by the output means. Thus, simply by connecting the external device to the external device connection means of the gaming machine, the external device is paid out based on the winning in the first winning port for the number of game media paid out by the payout means. Since the signal based on the information related to the ratio of the number of the played game media is output from the gaming machine, it is possible to quickly and easily find a fraudulent act based on the accessory ratio.

In any of the gaming machines CA1 to CA4,
The output unit is configured to output a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage unit, and the number of game media to be paid out by the payout unit when a prize is won in the corresponding prize port at each prize port. A gaming machine CA5 which outputs at least a signal for indicating.

  According to the gaming machine CA5, the following effects are obtained in addition to the effects obtained by any of the gaming machines CA1 to CA4. That is, a signal based on at least the information stored in the storage means, and a signal indicating the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means when a prize is won in the corresponding prize port at each prize port. Output by Thereby, even if the device that receives the signal output from the output unit does not have information on the number of game media to be paid out when a prize is won for each winning port in the connected gaming machine, There is an effect that the accessory ratio can be easily analyzed on the basis of the signal output from.

In any of the gaming machines CA1 to CA5,
Second storage control means for storing information on a prize detected by the prize detection means in a second storage means;
Determining means for determining that the predetermined opportunity has been shifted,
The storage control unit is configured to, when the determination unit determines that the predetermined opportunity is out of order, determine the payout unit based on information on a prize detected by the prize detection unit stored in the second storage unit. Storing information relating to a ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning port to the number of the game media paid out by the storage means in a storage means. Machine CA6.

  According to the gaming machine CA6, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines CA1 to CA5. That is, the information on the winning detected by the winning detecting means is temporarily stored in the second storing means by the second storing control means. Then, when the determination means determines that the predetermined opportunity has been lost, the number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the information on the prize detected by the prize detection means stored in the second storage means. , Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning opening is accumulated and stored in the storage means by the storage control means. Thereby, by first storing the information relating to the prize detected by the prize detection means in the second storage means, it is possible to reflect the prize to the prize port in the information stored in the second storage means without being lost. . Then, based on the information stored in the second storage means, every time a predetermined opportunity is fulfilled, all prizes are reflected, and a prize in the first prize port with respect to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is reflected. The information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the information can be stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to output more accurate information as information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. There is an effect that can be.

In the gaming machine CA6,
The gaming machine CA7, wherein the output means outputs at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means and a signal based on the information stored in the second storage means.

  According to the gaming machine CA7, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine CA6. That is, the output means outputs not only a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, but also a signal based on the information stored in the second storage means. As a result, information relating to winning the latest prize hole stored in the second storage means, which is not reflected in the information stored in the storage means, is also output. There is an effect that the presence or absence can be determined.

In any of the gaming machines CA1 to CA7,
The first winning opening includes a second winning opening having an accessory that operates continuously based on a game,
The storage control means, the information relating to the ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on winning in the second winning opening, with respect to the number of the game media paid out by the payout means, Accumulate and store in the storage means,
The output unit is configured to store the game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning port with respect to the number of the game media paid out by the payout unit, which is accumulated and stored in the storage unit. Information relating to a ratio of numbers, and information relating to a ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the second winning opening with respect to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. And a game machine CA8.

  According to the gaming machine CA8, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines CA1 to CA7. That is, the first prize port provided in the game area includes a second prize port having an accessory that operates continuously based on the game, and the first prize port corresponding to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. Information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the second winning opening is also stored in the storage means by the storage control means. And information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the prize to the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout device, the information being cumulatively stored in the storage device. And information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning in the second winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. As a result, the ratio of the one receiving the signal output from the output means to the one due to the first winning opening (that is, the operation of the accessory) is the ratio of the number of the game media paid out according to the winning to the winning opening. In addition to the ratio of the bonus, the ratio of the continuous bonus, which is the ratio of the second winning opening (that is, the operation of the bonus when the bonus is continuously operated), can be analyzed. There is the effect that fraudulent acts can be more accurately detected based on the continuous character ratio.

In any of the gaming machines CA1 to CA8,
When the prize detecting means detects that the game medium fired by the launch means has won any one of the winning holes, the payout is performed based on the winning hole of the game medium. A payout number setting means for setting the number of game media to be issued and notifying the payout means, and comprising a main control means for performing a main control of the game,
The main control unit has an operation unit that executes an operation for performing main control of the game,
At least the gaming machine CA7, wherein at least the winning detection means, the payout number setting means, the storage control means, and the output means are realized by executing calculations by the calculation means.

  According to the gaming machine CA9, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines CA1 to CA8. That is, when it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium fired by the prize detecting means and the firing means has won one of the winning holes, the payout is made based on the winning prize hole of the game medium. A payout number setting means for setting the number of game media and notifying the payout means, wherein the main control means for performing the main control of the game includes an operation for performing an operation for performing the main control of the game. Means are provided. Then, at least the payout based on the winning in the first winning port with respect to the number of game media paid out by the payout means, which is accumulated and stored in the storage means, the winning detection means, the payout number setting means, and the storage means. The generation of the information related to the ratio of the number of game media performed and the output means for outputting at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means are realized by executing the calculation by the calculation means. Accordingly, the detection of a prize in the winning opening by the prize detecting means, the setting of the number of game media paid out based on the detection, the number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the set number of payouts, The storage control means stores information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in one winning opening in the storage means, and the output of a signal based on the information stored in the storage means, All can be performed by the arithmetic unit of the main control means. Therefore, even if a fraudster makes the output means output fraudulent information, and tries to prevent the fraudulent act from being discovered based on the accessory ratio, it becomes difficult to input fraudulent information. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably suppress the detection of the wrongdoing based on the ratio of the public belongings by the output of the wrongful information by the wrongdoer.

<CB group>
In any of the gaming machines CA1 to CA8,
Main control means for performing main control of the game is provided,
The main control unit includes an operation unit that executes an operation for performing main control of the game,
When the prize detecting means detects that the game medium fired by the launch means has won any one of the winning holes, the payout is performed based on the winning hole of the game medium. The number-of-payouts setting means for setting the number of game media to be issued and notifying the payout means is realized by execution of the calculation by the calculating means,
The gaming machine CB1, wherein the storage control means and the output means are provided on a different microchip from the effect means.

  According to the gaming machine CB1, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines CA1 to CA7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the main control unit that performs the main control of the game is provided with a calculation unit that performs a calculation for performing the control, and the winning detection unit and the game medium fired by the firing unit are provided. When the prize detecting means detects that a prize port has been won, the payout number setting means for setting the number of game media to be paid out based on the winning port of the game medium and notifying the payout means. , By the execution of the operation by the operation main means. On the other hand, storage control for accumulating and storing in the storage means information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. The means and the output means for outputting at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means are provided on a separate microchip from the arithmetic means. Thereby, the number of the game media paid out by the payout means to the first winning port can be changed without greatly rewriting the instruction (program) of the calculation executed by the calculation means only by providing another microchip. There is an effect that a signal based on information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning can be output. A calculating means for outputting a signal based on information relating to a ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the paying means. Thus, there is an effect that a large part of the processing capacity of the calculation means can be used for main control of the game.

In the gaming machine CB1,
The gaming machine CB2, wherein the microchip is provided in the main control unit.

  According to the gaming machine CB2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine CB1. That is, the microchip provided with the storage control means, the output means, and the effect means is provided in the main control means. Thereby, based on the set number of payouts, information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. The storage in the storage means and the output of a signal based on the information stored in the storage means are performed in the main control means. Therefore, even if the wrongdoer attempts to output the wrong information to the output means to prevent the detection of the wrongdoing based on the accessory ratio, the above-mentioned configuration is completed by the main control means. Information is difficult to enter. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress that the detection of the fraudulent act based on the ratio of the public goods is hindered by outputting the fraudulent information by the fraudulent person.

In the gaming machine CB1 or CB2,
The gaming machine CB3, wherein the main control means and the microchip are housed together in a board box in which a box pace and a box cover for covering an opening of the box base are connected so as not to be opened.

  According to the gaming machine CB3, the following effects are exerted in addition to the effects exerted by the gaming machines CB1 or CB2. That is, the main control means and the microchip are housed in a board box in which the box pace and the box cover covering the opening of the box base are connected in an unopenable manner. However, even if an attempt is made to output illegal information to prevent the detection of fraudulent acts based on the ratio of belongings, it is difficult to input the illegal information. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably suppress the detection of the fraudulent activity based on the ratio of the accessory by the output of the fraudulent information by the fraudster.

In any of the gaming machines CB1 to CB3,
The main control means includes:
At each winning opening, there is provided payout information storing means for storing information on the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means when there is a winning in the corresponding winning opening,
The arithmetic means executes a start-up process when power is turned on to the main control means,
The start-up processing, based on the storage of the payout information storage means, for each winning opening, when there is a winning in the corresponding winning opening, information indicating the number of game media paid out by the payout means, A gaming machine CB4, comprising a process for transmitting to the microchip.

  According to the gaming machine CB4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines CB1 to CB3. In other words, the payout information storage means stores information on the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means in the case where there is a prize in the corresponding prize port in each prize port. In the calculating means, a start-up process is executed when the main control means is turned on, and in the start-up process, a corresponding prize port is assigned to each prize port based on the storage of the payout information storage means. Information indicating the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means when there is a prize is transmitted to the microchip. Thereby, even if the information indicating the number of game media to be paid out for winning in each winning opening that differs for each type of gaming machine is not stored in the microchip in advance, the microchip is controlled by the main control when the power is turned on. Based on the information transmitted from the means, calculate the accessory ratio, or output a signal based on the information, to receive the signal output from the output means, the accessory ratio There is an effect that calculation can be performed.

In any of the gaming machines CB1 to CB4,
The gaming machine CB5, wherein the microchip includes a second calculation unit that performs a calculation for realizing the storage control unit and the output unit.

  According to the gaming machine CB5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines CB1 to CB4, the following effects are obtained. That is, the microchip is provided with the second arithmetic means, and the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is calculated. The storage control means for accumulating and storing related information in the storage means and the output means for outputting at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means are realized by the operation of the second operation means. . Thereby, by changing the operation command (program) of the second effect means, there is an effect that it is possible to flexibly cope with a function change or a specification change of the storage control means or the output means.

In any of the gaming machines CB1 to CB4,
The gaming machine CB6, wherein the microchip realizes the storage control unit and the output unit by wired logic.

  According to the gaming machine CB6, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines CB1 to CB4. That is, the microchip stores information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout device by wired logic. A storage control means for accumulating and storing the information, and an output means for outputting at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means. Thus, processing such as storage and output of information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout unit in the storage unit. Can be performed at high speed.

<CC group>
In any of the gaming machines CA1 to CA9 and CB1 to CB6,
The gaming machine CC1 wherein the storage means is configured to be able to retain the stored information even when the power is turned off.

  According to the gaming machine CC1, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines CA1 to CA9 and CB1 to CB6, the following effects are obtained. That is, information relating to the ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning port with respect to the number of the game media paid out by the payout device, stored in the storage means, It is maintained while the power is turned off. Thereby, regardless of whether the power of the gaming machine is turned on or not, the gaming medium paid out based on the winning in the first winning port with respect to the number of the gaming media paid out by the payout means over a long period of time. The information relating to the ratio of the numbers can be accumulated and stored in the storage means. Therefore, the player who receives the signal output from the output means can analyze the accessory ratio of the gaming machine over a long period of time, so that there is an effect that it is possible to detect past misconduct.

In the gaming machine CC1,
A second storage unit that cannot hold information while the power is off;
Second storage control means for storing information on a prize detected by the prize detection means in the second storage means;
Determining means for determining that the predetermined opportunity has been shifted,
The storage control unit is configured to, when the determination unit determines that the predetermined opportunity is out of order, determine the payout unit based on information on a prize detected by the prize detection unit stored in the second storage unit. Storing information relating to a ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning port to the number of the game media paid out by the storage means in a storage means. Machine CC2.

  According to the gaming machine CC2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine CC1. That is, the information on the winning detected by the winning detecting means is temporarily stored in the second storing means by the second storing control means. The second storage means cannot hold information while the power is turned off. Then, when the determination means determines that the predetermined opportunity has been lost, the number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the information on the prize detected by the prize detection means stored in the second storage means. , Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning opening with respect to the number of game media is accumulated and stored in the storage means by the storage control means. Thereby, by first storing the information relating to the prize detected by the prize detection means in the second storage means, it is possible to reflect the prize to the prize port in the information stored in the second storage means without being lost. . Then, every time a predetermined opportunity is fulfilled, based on the information stored in the second storage means, all prizes are reflected, and a prize in the first prize port with respect to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is provided. The information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the information can be stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to output more accurate information as information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. There is an effect that can be. Further, the storage means is configured to be able to retain the stored information even when the power is turned off, and generally requires a large amount of power for writing, takes a long time to write, Although the number of times of writing is limited from the viewpoint of performance, the configuration described above can reduce the number of times of writing to the storage unit, and can suppress the above-mentioned problem of the storage unit from becoming apparent.

In the gaming machine CC2,
The gaming machine CC3, wherein the output means outputs at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means and a signal based on the information stored in the second storage means.

  According to the gaming machine CC3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine CC2. That is, the output means outputs not only a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, but also a signal based on the information stored in the second storage means. As a result, information relating to winning the latest prize hole stored in the second storage means, which is not reflected in the information stored in the storage means, is also output. There is an effect that the presence or absence can be determined.

<CD group>
In any of the gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, CC1 to CC3,
The storage control means, as the information related to the ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on winning in the first winning opening, with respect to the number of the game media paid out by the payout means, A gaming machine CD1 characterized in that information indicating a winning detected by the winning detecting means is accumulated and stored in the storage means.

  According to the gaming machine CD1, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, and CC1 to CC3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the storage control means stores the information in the storage means as information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. The information indicating the winning opening for which a winning is detected by the winning detecting means is accumulated and stored. Then, a signal based on this information is output. Upon receiving the signal output from the output means, the number of the game media paid out by the payout means and the prize in the first prize port are determined based on the information indicating the prize port in which the prize is detected. It is possible to calculate the number of game media paid out and to analyze the accessory ratio from these numbers. Then, when a suspicious change is recognized in the accessory ratio, the cause can be deeply searched based on the information indicating the winning opening in which the winning is detected. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably detect a fraudulent act based on the ratio of the accessory.

In the gaming machine CD1,
Second storage control means for storing information on a prize detected by the prize detection means in a second storage means;
Determining means for determining that the predetermined opportunity has been shifted,
The storage control unit, when the determination unit determines that the predetermined opportunity has been deviated, pays out information related to a prize detected by the prize detection unit stored in the second storage unit by the payout unit. The information related to the ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning port with respect to the number of the game media issued is accumulated and stored in the storage means. Gaming machine CD2.

  According to the gaming machine CD1, the following effect is exhibited in addition to the effect exhibited by any of the gaming machine CD2. That is, the information on the winning detected by the winning detecting means is temporarily stored in the second storing means by the second storing control means. Then, when it is determined by the determination means that the predetermined opportunity has been lost, the information on the prize detected by the prize detection means stored in the second storage means is based on the number of game media paid out by the payout means. The storage control means accumulates and stores the information in the storage means as information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning opening. Thereby, by first storing the information relating to the prize detected by the prize detection means in the second storage means, it is possible to reflect the prize to the prize port in the information stored in the second storage means without being lost. . Then, every time a predetermined opportunity is met, the information stored in the second storage means reflecting all winnings is determined based on the winning in the first winning opening with respect to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. The information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out can be accumulated and stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to output more accurate information as information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. There is an effect that can be.

In the gaming machine CD2,
The gaming machine CD3, wherein the output means outputs at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means and a signal based on the information stored in the second storage means.

  According to the gaming machine CD3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine CD2. That is, the output means outputs not only a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, but also a signal based on the information stored in the second storage means. As a result, information relating to winning the latest prize hole stored in the second storage means, which is not reflected in the information stored in the storage means, is also output. There is an effect that the presence or absence can be determined.

In any of the gaming machines CD1 to CD3,
The output unit is configured to output a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage unit, and the number of game media to be paid out by the payout unit when a prize is won in the corresponding prize port at each prize port. A gaming machine CD4 for outputting at least a signal for indicating.

  According to the gaming machine CD4, the following effects are obtained in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines CD1 to CD3. That is, a signal based on at least the information stored in the storage means, and a signal indicating the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means when a prize is won in the corresponding prize port at each prize port. Output by Thereby, even if the device that receives the signal output from the output unit does not have information on the number of game media to be paid out when a prize is won for each winning port in the connected gaming machine, There is an advantage that the accessory ratio can be calculated and analyzed from the information on winnings output from the prize.

In any of the gaming machines CD1 to CD4,
Based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage unit, the number of the game media paid out by the payout unit, and the number of the game media paid out based on the prize in the first prize port. A ratio calculating means for calculating a ratio of numbers;
The gaming machine CD5, wherein the output means outputs a signal indicating the ratio calculated by the ratio calculation means as a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means.

  According to the gaming machine CD5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines CD1 to CD4. That is, based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is determined. , Calculated by the ratio calculating means. Then, a signal indicating the ratio calculated by the ratio calculation unit is output by the output unit as a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage unit. This eliminates the necessity for the signal that has been output by the output means to calculate the ratio (the accessory ratio), thereby facilitating the analysis of fraud. In addition, when an attempt is made to calculate an accessory ratio in a signal received by the output means, or when there is a prize in the corresponding prize port in each of the prize ports set incorrectly or incorrectly. There is a possibility that the accessory ratio may be calculated based on the number of game media paid out by the payout means. On the other hand, in the gaming machine CD5, since the accessory ratio is calculated and output by the ratio calculating means, there is an effect that the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio can be accurately calculated.

In the gaming machine CD5,
The output unit, as a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage unit, a signal indicating the information accumulated and stored in the storage unit, and the ratio calculated by the ratio calculation unit A gaming machine CD6, which outputs a signal indicating the game machine.

  According to the gaming machine CD6, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine CD5. That is, the signal indicating the information on the winning detected by the winning detecting means accumulated and stored in the storing means and the first game medium calculated by the ratio calculating means and the number of game media paid out by the paying out means. A signal indicating the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning in the winning opening is output by the output means. In this way, when there is a suspicious point in the above-mentioned ratio (accessory ratio) output from the output means, the cause is searched for from the information regarding the winning detected by the winning detecting means, which is also output. There is an effect that can be.

<CE group>
In any of the gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, CC1 to CC3,
Second storage control means for storing information on a prize detected by the prize detection means in a second storage means;
Determining means for determining that the predetermined opportunity has been shifted;
When the determination unit determines that the predetermined opportunity has been lost, the first storage unit determines whether the predetermined opportunity has fallen out of the game medium paid out by the payout unit based on the information stored in the second storage unit. Ratio calculating means for calculating a ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on the winning in the winning opening,
The gaming machine CE1, wherein the storage control means accumulates and stores information indicating the ratio calculated by the ratio calculation means in the storage means.

  According to the gaming machine CE1, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, and CC1 to CC3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the information on the winning detected by the winning detecting means is temporarily stored in the second storing means by the second storing control means. When it is determined by the determining means that the predetermined opportunity has been lost, the winning of the first winning port with respect to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is performed based on the information stored in the second storage means. The ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the ratio is calculated by the ratio calculating means. Then, information indicating the calculated ratio is accumulated and stored in the storage unit by the storage control unit. As a result, the calculated ratio (government ratio) is output, so that those who receive the signal output by the output means do not need to calculate the ratio (government ratio), and analyze the fraud. This has the effect of making it easier. In addition, when an attempt is made to calculate an accessory ratio by receiving a signal output by the output means, or when an incorrect or incorrectly set winning port has a corresponding winning port. There is a possibility that the accessory ratio may be calculated based on the number of game media paid out by the payout means, but since the accessory ratio is calculated and output by the ratio calculating means, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory The effect is that the ratio can be calculated. In addition, since the information indicating the accessory ratio is accumulated and stored in the storage unit, the amount of information stored in the storage unit can be reduced, and the storage capacity required for the storage unit can be prevented from increasing.

In the gaming machine CE1,
The gaming machine CE2, wherein the output unit outputs at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage unit and a signal based on the information stored in the second storage unit.

  According to the gaming machine CE2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine CE1. That is, the output means outputs not only a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, but also a signal based on the information stored in the second storage means. As a result, information relating to winning the latest prize hole stored in the second storage means, which is not reflected in the information stored in the storage means, is also output. There is an effect that the presence or absence can be determined. Further, while the information stored in the storage means is the accessory ratio, the information stored in the second storage means is the information on the prize detected by the prize detection means, so the information on the prize is used. This has the effect of enabling a deeper analysis of the cause of a suspected fraud situation.

In the gaming machine CE1 or CE2,
The output unit is configured to output a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage unit, and the number of game media to be paid out by the payout unit when a prize is won in the corresponding prize port at each prize port. A gaming machine CE3 that outputs at least a signal for indicating.

  According to the gaming machine CE3, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines CE1 or CE2. That is, a signal based on at least the information stored in the storage means, and a signal indicating the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means when a prize is won in the corresponding prize port at each prize port. Output by In this way, if there is a situation where the wrongdoing is suspected due to the analysis of the role item ratio, the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means at each winning opening when there is a prize at the corresponding winning opening is referred to. Therefore, there is an effect that the cause of the situation can be searched.

<CF group>
In any of the gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, CC1 to CC3,
Based on the detection by the prize detecting means, the number of game media that has won each prize port is counted for each prize port after a predetermined trigger is released and before the next predetermined trigger is stopped, and counted for each prize port. Second storage control means for storing information indicating the number of winning game media in the second storage means,
Determining means for determining that the predetermined opportunity has been shifted,
The storage control unit is configured to, when the determination unit determines that the predetermined opportunity is out of order, store the information stored in the second storage unit with respect to the number of the game media paid out by the payout unit. A gaming machine CF1 which is accumulated and stored in the storage means as information relating to a ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on a winning in the first winning port.

  According to the gaming machine CF1, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, and CC1 to CC3, the following effects are achieved. That is, based on the detection by the prize detecting means, the number of game media winning in each prize port from the time when the predetermined trigger is released to the time when the next predetermined trigger is stopped is counted by the second storage control means for each prize port. Then, information indicating the number of winning game media counted for each winning opening is stored in the second storage means. When the determining means determines that the predetermined opportunity has been lost, the payout means pays out the information, which is stored in the second storage means and which indicates the winning game media counted for each winning opening, by the payout means. The storage control means accumulates and stores the information in the storage means as information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning port with respect to the number of game media paid out. Thereby, first, the prize detected by the prize detecting means is counted by the second storage control means for each prize port, so that the prize to the prize port is not lost, and the information stored in the second storage means is stored. Can be reflected. Then, every time a predetermined opportunity is fulfilled, the information indicating the number of winning game media for each winning port, which is stored in the second storage means reflecting all winnings, is provided by the payout means. The information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning port with respect to the number of game media can be accumulated and stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to output more accurate information as information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. There is an effect that can be. In addition, the storage means stores the total number of game media for each winning port that has been won from the time when a predetermined opportunity is delayed to the time when the next predetermined opportunity is released, so that the storage capacity required for the storage means is reduced. There is an effect that the increase can be suppressed. Further, the second storage means also stores information indicating the number of game media that have won each winning opening from the time when the predetermined opportunity is delayed to the time when the next predetermined opportunity is released, so that the second storage means is required. There is an effect that an increase in storage capacity can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine CF1,
The gaming machine CF2, wherein the output unit outputs at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage unit and a signal based on the information stored in the second storage unit.

  According to the gaming machine CF2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine CF1. That is, the output means outputs not only a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, but also a signal based on the information stored in the second storage means. This also outputs information indicating the number of winning game media for each winning opening, including the winning of the latest winning opening, stored in the second storing unit, which is not reflected in the information stored in the storing unit. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to determine the presence or absence of impropriety, including the latest winning situation.

In the gaming machine CF1 or CF2,
The output unit is configured to output a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage unit, and the number of game media to be paid out by the payout unit when a prize is won in the corresponding prize port at each prize port. A gaming machine CF3 which outputs at least a signal for indicating.

  According to the gaming machine CF3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machines CF1 or CF2. That is, a signal based on at least the information stored in the storage means, and a signal indicating the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means when a prize is won in the corresponding prize port at each prize port. Output by Thereby, even if the device that receives the signal output from the output unit does not have information on the number of game media to be paid out when a prize is won for each winning port in the connected gaming machine, There is an advantage that the accessory ratio can be calculated and analyzed from the information on winnings output from the prize.

In any of the gaming machines CF1 to CF3,
Based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage unit, the number of the game media paid out by the payout unit, and the number of the game media paid out based on the prize in the first prize port. A ratio calculating means for calculating a ratio of numbers;
The gaming machine CF4, wherein the output means outputs a signal indicating the ratio calculated by the ratio calculation means as a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means.

  According to the gaming machine CF4, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines CF1 to CF3. That is, based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is determined. , Calculated by the ratio calculating means. Then, a signal indicating the ratio calculated by the ratio calculation unit is output by the output unit as a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage unit. This eliminates the necessity of calculating the ratio (government ratio) for those receiving the signal output from the output means, and has the effect of facilitating the analysis of fraud. In addition, when a signal output from the output means is received, if the attempt to calculate the accessory ratio is made, if there is a prize in the corresponding prize port at each prize port set incorrectly or incorrectly. May be calculated based on the number of game media paid out by the payout means. On the other hand, in the gaming machine CF4, since the accessory ratio is calculated and output by the ratio calculator, there is an effect that the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio can be accurately calculated.

In the gaming machine CF4,
The output unit, as a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage unit, a signal indicating the information accumulated and stored in the storage unit, and the ratio calculated by the ratio calculation unit A gaming machine CF5, which outputs a signal indicating the game machine CF5.

  According to the gaming machine CF5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine CF4. That is, as information accumulated and stored in the storage means, a signal indicating, for each winning port, the number of game media which has won each winning port after a predetermined trigger has elapsed and before the next predetermined trigger has stopped. And a signal indicating the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout device, calculated by the ratio calculating means. Is output by Accordingly, when there is a suspicious point in the ratio (actor-character ratio) output from the output means, the output of the predetermined trigger, which is also output, is delayed until the next predetermined trigger is stopped. The effect is that the cause can be found from the number of game media for each winning opening that has won each winning opening.

<CG group>
In any of the gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, CC1 to CC3,
Based on the detection by the prize detecting means, the number of game media that has won each prize port is counted for each prize port after a predetermined trigger is released and before the next predetermined trigger is stopped, and counted for each prize port. Second storage control means for storing information indicating the number of winning game media in the second storage means,
Determining means for determining that the predetermined opportunity has been shifted;
When the determination unit determines that the predetermined opportunity has been lost, the first storage unit determines whether the predetermined opportunity has fallen out of the game medium paid out by the payout unit based on the information stored in the second storage unit. Ratio calculating means for calculating a ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on the winning in the winning opening,
The gaming machine CG1, wherein the storage control means accumulates and stores information indicating the ratio calculated by the ratio calculation means in the storage means.

  According to the gaming machine CG1, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, and CC1 to CC3, the following effects are achieved. That is, based on the detection by the prize detecting means, the number of game media winning in each prize port from the time when the predetermined trigger is released to the time when the next predetermined trigger is stopped is counted by the second storage control means for each prize port. Then, information indicating the number of winning game media counted for each winning opening is stored in the second storage means. When it is determined by the determining means that the predetermined opportunity has been lost, the winning of the first winning port with respect to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is performed based on the information stored in the second storage means. The ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the ratio is calculated by the ratio calculating means. Then, information indicating the calculated ratio is accumulated and stored in the storage unit by the storage control unit. As a result, the calculated ratio (government ratio) is output, so that those who receive the signal output by the output means do not need to calculate the ratio (government ratio), and analyze the fraud. This has the effect of making it easier. In addition, when a signal output from the output means is received, if the attempt to calculate the accessory ratio is made, if there is a prize in the corresponding prize port at each prize port set incorrectly or incorrectly. There is a possibility that the accessory ratio may be calculated based on the number of game media paid out by the payout means. The effect is that the ratio can be calculated. In addition, since the information indicating the accessory ratio is accumulated and stored in the storage unit, the amount of information stored in the storage unit can be reduced, and the storage capacity required for the storage unit can be prevented from increasing. Further, the second storage means also stores information indicating the number of game media that have won each winning opening from the time when the predetermined opportunity is delayed to the time when the next predetermined opportunity is released, so that the second storage means is required. There is an effect that an increase in storage capacity can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine CG1,
The gaming machine CG2, wherein the output means outputs at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means and a signal based on the information stored in the second storage means.

  According to the gaming machine CG2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine CG1. That is, the output means outputs not only a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, but also a signal based on the information stored in the second storage means. This also outputs information indicating the number of winning game media for each winning opening, including the winning of the latest winning opening, stored in the second storing unit, which is not reflected in the information stored in the storing unit. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to determine the presence or absence of impropriety, including the latest winning situation. Further, while the information stored in the storage means is the accessory ratio, the information stored in the second storage means is stored in each winning port until a predetermined trigger is released after a predetermined trigger is released. Since the information indicates the number of winning game media, the use of the information has an effect that the cause of a situation suspected of cheating can be analyzed more deeply.

In the gaming machine CG1 or CG2,
The output unit is configured to output a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage unit, and the number of game media to be paid out by the payout unit when a prize is won in the corresponding prize port at each prize port. A gaming machine CG3 which outputs at least a signal for indicating.

  According to the gaming machine CG3, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine CG1 or CG2. That is, a signal based on at least the information stored in the storage means, and a signal indicating the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means when a prize is won in the corresponding prize port at each prize port. Output by As a result, when a signal received from the output unit is received, if there is a situation where suspected misconduct is analyzed by analyzing the accessory ratio, if there is a winning in the corresponding winning opening at each winning opening. There is an effect that the cause of the situation can be found by referring to the number of game media paid out by the payout means.

<CH group>
In any of the gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, CC1 to CC3, CD1 to CD6, CE1 to CE3, CF1 to CF5, and CG1 to CG3,
A second storage control unit that stores information on a prize detected by the prize detection unit in the second storage unit after a predetermined trigger has been released and before the next predetermined trigger has stopped, and
Determining means for determining that the predetermined opportunity has been shifted,
The storage control unit is configured to, when the determination unit determines that the predetermined opportunity is out of order, determine the payout unit based on information on a prize detected by the prize detection unit stored in the second storage unit. Storing information relating to a ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning port to the number of the game media paid out by the storage means in a storage means. Machine CH1.

  According to the gaming machine CH1, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, CC1 to CC3, CD1 to CD6, CE1 to CE3, CF1 to CF3, and CG1 to CG3, the following effects are obtained. . That is, the information on the winning detected by the winning detecting means from the time when the predetermined opportunity is released to the time when the next predetermined opportunity is released is temporarily stored in the second storage means by the second storage control means. Then, when the determination means determines that the predetermined opportunity has been lost, the number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the information on the prize detected by the prize detection means stored in the second storage means. , Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning opening is accumulated and stored in the storage means by the storage control means. Thereby, by first storing the information relating to the prize detected by the prize detection means in the second storage means, it is possible to reflect the prize to the prize port in the information stored in the second storage means without being lost. . Then, based on the information stored in the second storage means, every time a predetermined opportunity is fulfilled, all prizes are reflected, and a prize in the first prize port with respect to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is reflected. The information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the information can be stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to output more accurate information as information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. There is an effect that can be. Further, the second storage means stores only the information on the prize detected by the prize detection means from the time when the predetermined opportunity is released to the time when the next predetermined opportunity is released, so that the storage capacity of the second storage means is reduced. This has the effect that it can be kept small.

In the gaming machine CH1,
The gaming machine CH2, wherein the output unit outputs at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage unit and a signal based on the information stored in the second storage unit.

  According to the gaming machine CH2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine CH1. That is, the output means outputs not only a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, but also a signal based on the information stored in the second storage means. As a result, information relating to winning the latest prize hole stored in the second storage means, which is not reflected in the information stored in the storage means, is also output. There is an effect that the presence or absence can be determined.

In the gaming machine CH1 or CH2,
The gaming machine CH3, wherein the second storage means is configured to be able to retain the stored information even when the power is turned off.

  According to the gaming machine CH3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines CH1 and CH2, the following effects are achieved. In other words, the information on the prize, which is stored in the second storage means and is detected by the prize detecting means from the time when the predetermined opportunity is released to the time when the next predetermined opportunity is released, is retained even when the power is turned off. Thereby, when the power is cut off, it is possible to suppress the loss of the information on the winning that is stored in the second storage unit and has not yet been reflected in the storage in the storage unit, and the reliability of the output signal can be reduced. There is an effect that can be increased.

<CI group>
In any of the gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, CC1 to CC3, CD1 to CD6, CE1 to CE3, CF1 to CF5, CG1 to CG3, CH1 to CH3,
Second storage control means for storing information on a prize detected by the prize detection means in a second storage means;
Determining means for determining that the predetermined opportunity has been shifted;
Power-off detecting means for detecting that the power is off,
The storage control means stores the information in the second storage means when the determination means determines that the predetermined opportunity has been shifted and when the power-off detection means detects that power has been cut off. The game medium paid out based on a prize in the first prize port with respect to the number of the game media paid out by the payout means based on the information on the prize detected by the prize detection means. A gaming machine CI1 characterized by storing information related to the ratio of the numbers of the game machines in a storage means.

  According to the gaming machine CI1, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, CC1 to CC3, CD1 to CD6, CE1 to CE3, CF1 to CF5, CG1 to CG3, and CH1 to CH3, Has the effect of That is, the information on the winning detected by the winning detecting means is temporarily stored in the second storing means by the second storing control means. Then, when the determination means determines that the predetermined opportunity has been lost, the number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the information on the prize detected by the prize detection means stored in the second storage means. , Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning opening is accumulated and stored in the storage means by the storage control means. Further, even when the power-off detecting means detects that the power supply is cut off, the payout is performed by the payout means based on the information on the winning detected by the winning detecting means stored in the second storage means. The information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning port with respect to the number of game media played is accumulated in the storage means by the storage control means. Thereby, by first storing the information relating to the prize detected by the prize detection means in the second storage means, it is possible to reflect the prize to the prize port in the information stored in the second storage means without being lost. . Then, based on the information stored in the second storage means, every time a predetermined opportunity is stopped, and even when the power is cut off before the predetermined opportunity is stopped, the payout is performed by reflecting all winnings. Information relating to a ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the means can be stored in the storage means. Therefore, when the power is cut off, it is possible to suppress the loss of the information on the winning stored in the second storage unit and not yet reflected in the storage in the storage unit, and the gaming medium paid out by the payout unit There is an effect that more accurate information can be output as information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning port with respect to the number of game media.

In the gaming machine CI1,
At least for a predetermined period even after the power is cut off, comprising a power supply unit capable of supplying power,
The gaming machine CI2, wherein the power supply unit supplies the power to at least the storage control unit.

  According to the gaming machine CI2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine CI1. That is, at least the storage control unit is supplied with power by the power supply unit for at least a predetermined period after the power is turned off. Therefore, when the power-off detection means detects that the power is cut off, the storage control means uses the power to store the information on the prize detected by the prize detection means stored in the second storage means. The information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout device based on the payout device is reliably stored in the storage device. There is an effect that can be.

In the gaming machine CI2,
The gaming machine CI3, wherein the power supply unit supplies the power to the second storage unit.

  According to the gaming machine CI3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine CI2. That is, not only the storage control unit but also the second storage unit is supplied with power by the power supply unit for at least a predetermined period after the power is turned off. Thus, before the situation stored in the second storage means is deleted, the payout by the payout means is ensured based on the information on the prize detected by the prize detection means stored in the second storage means. There is an effect that information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning port with respect to the number of game media used can be stored in the storage means.

In any of the gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, CC1 to CC3, CD1 to CD6, CE1 to CE3, CF1 to CF5, CG1 to CG3, CH1 to CH3, CI1 to CI3,
Second storage control means for storing information on a prize detected by the prize detection means in a second storage means;
Determining means for determining that the predetermined opportunity has been shifted,
The second storage means is configured to be able to hold the stored information even when the power is turned off,
The prize detected by the prize detection unit stored in the second storage unit when the power is supplied and when the determination unit determines that the predetermined trigger has been lost. Storing information related to a ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning port to the number of the game media paid out by the paying out device based on the information on the A gaming machine CI4.

  According to the gaming machine CI4, any one of the gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, CC1 to CC3, CD1 to CD6, CE1 to CE3, CF1 to CF3, CG1 to CG3, CH1 to CH3, and CI1 to CI3 is played. In addition to the above, the following effects are obtained. That is, the information on the winning detected by the winning detecting means is temporarily stored in the second storing means by the second storing control means. The information stored in the second storage means is retained even when the power is turned off. Then, when the power is supplied and when the predetermined means is judged to be out of order by the determination means, the payout means is provided based on the information on the prize detected by the prize detection means stored in the second storage means. The information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning port with respect to the number of game media paid out is accumulated and stored in the storage device by the storage control device. . Thereby, by first storing the information relating to the prize detected by the prize detection means in the second storage means, it is possible to reflect the prize to the prize port in the information stored in the second storage means without being lost. . Then, based on the information stored in the second storage means, the number of game media paid out by the payout means by reflecting all winnings when power is supplied and every time a predetermined opportunity is stopped. The information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning port with respect to the number of game media can be stored in the storage means. Therefore, when the power is turned off, the information on the winning stored in the second storage unit and not yet reflected in the storage in the storage unit is surely reflected in the information stored in the storage unit after the power is supplied. And information stored in the second storage means can be prevented from being lost. Therefore, more accurate information can be output as information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. This has the effect. In addition, when it is detected that the power is cut off, if the information is stored in the storage unit based on the information stored in the second storage unit, the power may be stored during the storage of the information in the storage unit. There is a possibility that the supply may be interrupted and the information may not be stored in the storage unit by reflecting all the information stored in the second storage unit, or that strange information may be stored in the storage unit. Is supplied, the information is stored in the storage means based on the information stored in the second storage means, so that such an effect can be suppressed.

<CJ group>
In any of the gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, CC1 to CC3, CD1 to CD6, CE1 to CE3, CF1 to CF5, CG1 to CG3, CH1 to CH3, CI1 to CI4,
Second storage control means for storing information on a prize detected by the prize detection means in a second storage means;
Determining means for determining that the predetermined opportunity has been shifted,
The storage control unit is configured to, when the determination unit determines that the predetermined opportunity is out of order, determine the payout unit based on information on a prize detected by the prize detection unit stored in the second storage unit. Storing information relating to a ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning port to the number of the game media paid out by the storage means,
The gaming machine CJ1, wherein the predetermined trigger includes that the number of game media fired into the gaming area has reached a predetermined number.

  According to the gaming machine CJ1, the effect that any one of the gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, CC1 to CC3, CD1 to CD6, CE1 to CE3, CF1 to CF5, CG1 to CG3, CH1 to CH3, CI1 to CI4 is played. In addition to the above, the following effects are obtained. That is, the information on the winning detected by the winning detecting means is temporarily stored in the second storing means by the second storing control means. Then, when the determination means determines that the predetermined opportunity has been lost, the number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the information on the prize detected by the prize detection means stored in the second storage means. , Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning opening is accumulated and stored in the storage means by the storage control means. Thereby, by first storing the information relating to the prize detected by the prize detection means in the second storage means, it is possible to reflect the prize to the prize port in the information stored in the second storage means without being lost. . Then, based on the information stored in the second storage means, every time a predetermined opportunity is fulfilled, all prizes are reflected, and a prize in the first prize port with respect to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is reflected. The information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the information can be stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to output more accurate information as information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. There is an effect that can be. Also, since the predetermined opportunity includes that the number of game media fired into the game area has reached the predetermined number, the game medium paid out by the payout means while the predetermined game medium was fired is It is possible to calculate the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning port to the number (combination ratio). Therefore, since many game media win various prize holes and payouts can be calculated at the stage where the payout is performed, the averaged bonus material ratio can be calculated. Therefore, fluctuations of the accessory ratio in a short time in a normal game can be eliminated, and thus, it is possible to more easily analyze a fraudulent act in a signal received by the output means.

In any of the gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, CC1 to CC3, CD1 to CD6, CE1 to CE3, CF1 to CF5, CG1 to CG3, CH1 to CH3, CI1 to CI4, and CJ1,
Second storage control means for storing information on a prize detected by the prize detection means in a second storage means;
Determining means for determining that the predetermined opportunity has been shifted,
The storage control unit is configured to, when the determination unit determines that the predetermined opportunity is out of order, determine the payout unit based on information on a prize detected by the prize detection unit stored in the second storage unit. Storing information relating to a ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning port to the number of the game media paid out by the storage means,
The gaming machine CJ2, wherein the predetermined opportunity includes that a current time has reached a predetermined time.

  According to the gaming machine CJ2, any of the gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, CC1 to CC3, CD1 to CD6, CE1 to CE3, CF1 to CF5, CG1 to CG3, CH1 to CH3, CI1 to CI4, and CJ1. The following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved. That is, the information on the winning detected by the winning detecting means is temporarily stored in the second storing means by the second storing control means. Then, when the determination means determines that the predetermined opportunity has been lost, the number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the information on the prize detected by the prize detection means stored in the second storage means. , Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning opening is accumulated and stored in the storage means by the storage control means. Thereby, by first storing the information relating to the prize detected by the prize detection means in the second storage means, it is possible to reflect the prize to the prize port in the information stored in the second storage means without being lost. . Then, based on the information stored in the second storage means, every time a predetermined opportunity is fulfilled, all prizes are reflected, and a prize in the first prize port with respect to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is reflected. The information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the information can be stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to output more accurate information as information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. There is an effect that can be. In addition, since the predetermined opportunity includes that the current time has reached the predetermined time, even when the game has not been played, the predetermined time has arrived and the payout means has surely paid out the game. It is possible to calculate the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning port to the number of game media (combination ratio). Therefore, there is an effect that the one receiving the signal output from the output means can be surely analyzed for the presence or absence of a fraudulent act based on the reliably calculated accessory ratio.

In any of the gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, CC1 to CC3, CD1 to CD6, CE1 to CE3, CF1 to CF5, CG1 to CG3, CH1 to CH3, CI1 to CI4, CJ1, CJ2,
Second storage control means for storing information on a prize detected by the prize detection means in a second storage means;
Determining means for determining that the predetermined opportunity has been shifted,
The storage control unit is configured to, when the determination unit determines that the predetermined opportunity is out of order, determine the payout unit based on information on a prize detected by the prize detection unit stored in the second storage unit. Storing information relating to a ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning port to the number of the game media paid out by the storage means,
The gaming machine CJ3, wherein the predetermined opportunity includes that a cumulative time during which the game has been played has reached a predetermined time.

  According to the gaming machine CJ3, any of the gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, CC1 to CC3, CD1 to CD6, CE1 to CE3, CF1 to CF5, CG1 to CG3, CH1 to CH3, CI1 to CI4, CJ1, CJ2. In addition to the effect of the sword, the following effects are achieved. That is, the information on the winning detected by the winning detecting means is temporarily stored in the second storing means by the second storing control means. Then, when the determination means determines that the predetermined opportunity has been lost, the number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the information on the prize detected by the prize detection means stored in the second storage means. , Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning opening is accumulated and stored in the storage means by the storage control means. Thereby, by first storing the information relating to the prize detected by the prize detection means in the second storage means, it is possible to reflect the prize to the prize port in the information stored in the second storage means without being lost. . Then, based on the information stored in the second storage means, every time a predetermined opportunity is fulfilled, all prizes are reflected, and a prize in the first prize port with respect to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is reflected. The information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the information can be stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to output more accurate information as information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. There is an effect that can be. Further, the predetermined opportunity includes that the cumulative time during which the game has been played has reached the predetermined time. Here, the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means (actual material ratio) is essentially the ratio of game balls. This is calculated by performing a test firing test for 10 hours. Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the prize in the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is used to determine when the game time reaches a predetermined time. By storing it in the storage means, it is possible to calculate the accessory ratio close to the original definition. Therefore, there is an effect that the signal received from the output means can be analyzed using the accessory ratio close to the original definition.

In any of the gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, CC1 to CC3, CD1 to CD6, CE1 to CE3, CF1 to CF5, CG1 to CG3, CH1 to CH3, CI1 to CI4, CJ1 to CJ3,
Second storage control means for storing information on a prize detected by the prize detection means in a second storage means;
Determining means for determining that the predetermined opportunity has been shifted,
The storage control unit is configured to, when the determination unit determines that the predetermined opportunity is out of order, determine the payout unit based on information on a prize detected by the prize detection unit stored in the second storage unit. Storing information relating to a ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning port to the number of the game media paid out by the storage means,
The gaming machine CJ4, characterized in that the predetermined opportunity includes that the cumulative time during which power has been supplied has reached a second predetermined time.

  According to the gaming machine CJ4, any of the gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, CC1 to CC3, CD1 to CD6, CE1 to CE3, CF1 to CF5, CG1 to CG3, CH1 to CH3, CI1 to CI4, CJ1 to CJ3. In addition to the effect of the sword, the following effects are achieved.

  That is, the information on the winning detected by the winning detecting means is temporarily stored in the second storing means by the second storing control means. Then, when the determination means determines that the predetermined opportunity has been lost, the number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the information on the prize detected by the prize detection means stored in the second storage means. , Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning opening is accumulated and stored in the storage means by the storage control means. Thereby, by first storing the information relating to the prize detected by the prize detection means in the second storage means, it is possible to reflect the prize to the prize port in the information stored in the second storage means without being lost. . Then, based on the information stored in the second storage means, every time a predetermined opportunity is fulfilled, all prizes are reflected, and a prize in the first prize port with respect to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is reflected. The information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the information can be stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to output more accurate information as information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. There is an effect that can be. In addition, the predetermined opportunity includes the fact that the cumulative time during which the power has been supplied has reached the second predetermined time. As a result of the predetermined time of 2, the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the prize in the first winning port with respect to the number of game media paid out by the payout means (government ratio ) Can be calculated. Therefore, there is an effect that the one receiving the signal output from the output means can be surely analyzed for the presence or absence of a fraudulent act based on the reliably calculated accessory ratio.

In any of the gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, CC1 to CC3, CD1 to CD6, CE1 to CE3, CF1 to CF5, CG1 to CG3, CH1 to CH3, CI1 to CI4, CJ1 to CJ4,
Main control means for performing main control of the game is provided,
The main control unit includes an operation unit that executes an operation for performing main control of the game,
When the prize detecting means detects that the game medium fired by the launch means has won any one of the winning holes, the payout is performed based on the winning hole of the game medium. The number-of-payouts setting means for setting the number of game media to be issued and notifying the payout means is realized by execution of the calculation by the calculating means,
The storage control unit and the output unit are provided on a separate microchip from the production unit,
The microchip is
Second storage control means for storing information on a prize detected by the prize detection means in a second storage means;
Determining means for determining that the predetermined opportunity has been shifted,
The storage control unit is configured to, when the determination unit determines that the predetermined opportunity is out of order, determine the payout unit based on information on a prize detected by the prize detection unit stored in the second storage unit. Storing information relating to a ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning port to the number of the game media paid out by the storage means,
The main control means includes:
Comprising a predetermined opportunity information storage means for storing information indicating the predetermined opportunity,
The arithmetic means executes a start-up process when power is turned on to the main control means,
The gaming machine CJ5, characterized in that the start-up process includes a process for transmitting information indicating a predetermined trigger to the microchip based on the information stored in the predetermined trigger information storage means.

  According to the gaming machine CJ5, any of the gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, CC1 to CC3, CD1 to CD6, CE1 to CE3, CF1 to CF5, CG1 to CG3, CH1 to CH3, CI1 to CI4, CJ1 to CJ4. In addition to the effect of the sword, the following effects are achieved. That is, the main control unit that performs the main control of the game is provided with a calculation unit that performs a calculation for performing the control, and the winning detection unit and the game medium fired by the firing unit are provided. When the prize detecting means detects that a prize port has been won, the payout number setting means for setting the number of game media to be paid out based on the winning port of the game medium and notifying the payout means. , By the execution of the operation by the operation main means. On the other hand, storage control for accumulating and storing in the storage means information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. The means and the output means for outputting at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means are provided on a separate microchip from the arithmetic means. Thereby, the number of the game media paid out by the payout means to the first winning port can be changed without greatly rewriting the instruction (program) of the calculation executed by the calculation means only by providing another microchip. There is an effect that a signal based on information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning can be output.

  A calculating means for outputting a signal based on information relating to a ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the paying means. Thus, there is an effect that a large part of the processing capacity of the calculation means can be used for main control of the game. In the microchip, the information relating to the winning detected by the winning detecting means is temporarily stored in the second storing means by the second storing control means. Then, when the determination means determines that the predetermined opportunity has been lost, the number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the information on the prize detected by the prize detection means stored in the second storage means. , Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning opening is accumulated and stored in the storage means by the storage control means. Thereby, by first storing the information relating to the prize detected by the prize detection means in the second storage means, it is possible to reflect the prize to the prize port in the information stored in the second storage means without being lost. . Then, based on the information stored in the second storage means, every time a predetermined opportunity is fulfilled, all prizes are reflected, and a prize in the first prize port with respect to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is reflected. The information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the information can be stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to output more accurate information as information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. There is an effect that can be.

  On the other hand, in the main control unit, the predetermined trigger is stored in a predetermined trigger information storage unit. In the arithmetic means, a start-up process is executed when the main control means is turned on. In the start-up process, a predetermined trigger is generated based on the information stored in the predetermined trigger information storage means. The indicated information is transmitted to the microchip. Here, the storage of the information on the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the prize in the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means (government ratio) is stored in the property Because there is a physical limit on the storage capacity of the storage means that stores information about the ratio, the microchip does not fix the timing of the storage but considers the jackpot probability and the probability of change in the gaming machine It is preferable that it has been done. Therefore, by causing the main control means to store the predetermined trigger in the predetermined trigger information storage means and transmitting information indicating the predetermined trigger to the microchip every time the power is turned on, the microchip can play a game. The ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the prize to the first prize port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means at a predetermined opportunity that matches the jackpot probability and the probability of change in the machine ( There is an effect that the information on the (accessory ratio) can be stored in the storage means.

<CK group>
In any of the gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, CC1 to CC3, CD1 to CD6, CE1 to CE3, CF1 to CF5, CG1 to CG3, CH1 to CH3, CI1 to CI4, CJ1 to CJ5,
A third storage control unit that accumulates information indicating a gaming state of the gaming machine and stores the information in a third storage unit;
The gaming machine CK1, wherein the output means outputs information indicating a gaming state of the gaming machine stored in the third storage means.

  According to the gaming machine CK1, any of the gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, CC1 to CC3, CD1 to CD6, CE1 to CE3, CF1 to CF5, CG1 to CG3, CH1 to CH3, CI1 to CI4, CJ1 to CJ5. There are the following effects in addition to the effects achieved by KA. That is, the information indicating the gaming state of the gaming machine is accumulated by the third storage control means and stored in the third storage means. Information indicating the gaming state of the gaming machine stored in the third storage means is output by the output means. Thus, when a signal received from the output unit is received, it is possible to analyze the gaming state of the gaming machine and find out the cause when the situation is suspected of misconduct.

In the gaming machine CK1,
A door frame covering a front surface of the game area,
The gaming machine CK2, wherein the gaming state of the gaming machine stored as information in the third storage means includes a state in which the door frame is being opened.

  According to the gaming machine CK2, the following effects are obtained in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine CK1. That is, since the gaming state of the gaming machine stored as information in the third storage means includes a state in which the door frame covering the front surface of the gaming area is being opened, the one receiving the signal output from the output means In addition, there is an effect that it is possible to determine whether or not there is a possibility that an illegal act has been performed from the occurrence state of the state where the door frame is being opened.

In the gaming machine CK1 or CK2,
The gaming machine CK3, wherein the gaming state of the gaming machine stored as information in the third storage means includes an error state of the gaming machine.

  According to the gaming machine CK3, the following effects are obtained in addition to the effects of the gaming machine CK1 or CK2. That is, since the gaming state of the gaming machine stored as information in the third storage means includes the error state of the gaming machine, the signal received from the output means is the state of occurrence of the error state of the gaming machine. Therefore, it is possible to determine whether or not there is a possibility that the wrongdoing has been performed.

In any of the gaming machines CK1 to CK3,
The gaming machine CK4, wherein the gaming state of the gaming machine stored as information in the third storage means includes a hit state in which a predetermined gaming value is given to a player.

  According to the gaming machine CK4, the following effects are obtained in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines CK1 to CK3. That is, since the gaming state of the gaming machine stored as information in the third storage means includes a hit state in which a predetermined gaming value is given to the player, the one that receives the signal output from the output means There is an effect that it is possible to determine whether or not there is a possibility that an improper act has been performed from the occurrence state of the hit state of the gaming machine.

In any of the gaming machines CK1 to CK4,
The gaming state of the gaming machine stored as information in the third storage means includes a state in which a prize is detected in any one of the winning openings by the prize detecting means within a predetermined time. Gaming machine CK5.

  According to the gaming machine CK5, the following effects are obtained in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines CK1 to CK4. That is, the gaming state of the gaming machine stored as information in the third storage means includes a state in which the winning detection means detects that any one of the winning openings has been won within a predetermined time. Therefore, the one receiving the signal output from the output means determines whether or not there is a possibility that the wrongdoing has been performed, based on whether or not the state where the prize is won is included outside the business hours, for example, at midnight hours. This has the effect that it can be determined.

<CL group>
A gaming machine comprising lottery means for performing a winning lottery based on the establishment of a starting condition, and providing an advantageous game value to a player when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a win,
A game area provided with a plurality of winning ports including a first winning port having an accessory operated based on the game;
Launching means for launching a game medium to the gaming area;
A prize detecting means provided for each prize port and detecting a prize of the game medium to a corresponding prize port;
When the prize detecting means detects that the game medium fired by the shooting means has won one of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games are played with respect to the winning hole of the game medium. Means for paying out the medium,
Information related to the ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning port with respect to the number of the game media paid out by the payout unit is accumulated and stored in the storage unit. Storage control means for causing
Output means for outputting at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means,
Changing means for changing the probability of winning in the lottery by the lottery means,
A gaming machine CL1 comprising: erasing means for erasing all of the information accumulated and stored in the storage means when the probability is changed by the changing means.

  According to the gaming machine CL1, the game medium is fired by the shooting means to a game area provided with a plurality of winning ports including a first winning port having an accessory operated based on the game. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detecting means for detecting a winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium fired by the firing means has won one of the winning openings, a predetermined number of game media are determined for the winning winning opening of the game medium. Is paid out by the paying means. Further, information relating to a ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout device is stored in the storage device by the storage control device. You. Then, a signal based on at least the information stored in the storage unit is output by the output unit. Thereby, based on the output signal, of the number of game media paid out in accordance with the winning of the winning opening, the ratio of the bonuses, which is the ratio of the one by the first winning opening (that is, the operation of the bonus). Has the effect of being able to analyze and to detect fraudulent acts based on the ratio of the characters. On the other hand, in the lottery of the lottery means which triggers the provision of an advantageous game value to the player, if the winning probability is changed by the change means, the information accumulated and stored in the storage means is deleted by the deletion means. Are all erased. Here, if the winning probability changes, the ratio of the bonuses also changes. Therefore, if the information accumulated and stored in the storage means remains as it is before the probability of winning is changed, the change in the ratio of the accessory which can be analyzed based on the information accumulated and stored is the It is unclear whether this is due to a change in the probability of winning or due to fraud. On the other hand, when the probability of winning is changed, all the information accumulated and stored in the storage means is erased, thereby changing the probability of winning with the change of the probability of winning. This has the effect that it is possible to eliminate the remaining in the storage means.

In the gaming machine CL1,
The gaming machine CL2, wherein, when the probability is changed by the change unit, the storage control unit stores information indicating that the change has been made in the storage unit.

  According to the gaming machine CL2, the following effects are obtained in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine CL1. That is, when the winning probability is changed by the changing unit, information indicating that the change has been made is stored in the storage unit by the storage control unit. As a result, it is possible to grasp at the stage of analysis that the information stored in the storage means has been deleted due to the change in the probability of being hit, and it can be used as a reference for determining whether or not there has been fraud. There is.

In the gaming machine CL2,
When the probability is changed by the change unit, the storage control unit stores, in the storage unit, information indicating that the change has been performed, together with information indicating the date and time when the change has been performed. A gaming machine CL3 characterized by causing the game machine CL3.

  According to the gaming machine CL3, the following effects are obtained in addition to the effects of the gaming machine CL2. That is, when the probability of winning is changed by the change means, information indicating that the change has been made is stored in the storage means by the storage control means together with information indicating the date and time when the change was made. Is done. With this, it is possible to know at the stage of analysis that the information stored in the storage means has been deleted due to the change in the probability of hitting, and the change has been made (that is, the information has been deleted). Since the date and time can also be ascertained, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably determine whether or not there has been fraud.

In the gaming machine CL2 or CL3,
When the probability is changed by the change unit, the storage control unit stores, in the storage unit, information indicating that the change has been performed, together with information indicating a probability of winning after the change. A gaming machine CL4 characterized by causing the game machine CL4.

  According to the gaming machine CL4, the following effects are obtained in addition to the effects of the gaming machine CL2 or CL3. That is, when the winning probability is changed by the changing unit, the information indicating that the change has been performed is stored in the storage unit by the storage control unit together with the information indicating the winning probability after the change. Is done. This makes it possible to grasp at the analysis stage that the information stored in the storage means has been deleted due to the change in the probability of hitting, and also to understand the probability of hitting after the change. There is an effect that it is possible to more reliably determine whether or not fraud has occurred, while also suppressing the probability of a later hit.

In any of the gaming machines CL2 to CL4,
When the probability is changed by the change unit, the storage control unit stores, in the storage unit, information indicating that the change has been performed, together with information indicating a probability of hitting before the change. A gaming machine CL5 characterized by causing the game machine CL5.

  According to the gaming machine CL5, the following effects are obtained in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines CL2 to CL4. That is, when the winning probability is changed by the changing unit, information indicating that the change has been performed is stored in the storage unit by the storage control unit together with the information indicating the winning probability before the change. Is done. This makes it possible to grasp at the stage of analysis that the information stored in the storage means has been deleted due to the change in the probability of hitting, and also to understand the probability of hitting before the change. This has the effect that it is possible to more reliably determine whether or not there has been fraud, while also suppressing the probability of the previous hit.

<CM group>
A gaming machine comprising lottery means for performing a winning lottery based on the establishment of a starting condition, and providing an advantageous game value to a player when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a win,
A game area provided with a plurality of winning ports including a first winning port having an accessory operated based on the game;
Launching means for launching a game medium to the gaming area;
A prize detecting means provided for each prize port and detecting a prize of the game medium to a corresponding prize port;
When the prize detecting means detects that the game medium fired by the shooting means has won one of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games are played with respect to the winning hole of the game medium. Means for paying out the medium,
Information related to the ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning port with respect to the number of the game media paid out by the payout unit is accumulated and stored in the storage unit. Storage control means for causing
Output means for outputting at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means,
Changing means for changing the probability of winning in the lottery by the lottery means,
The gaming machine CM1 characterized in that the information accumulated and stored in the storage means is kept held even when the probability is changed by the change means.

  According to the gaming machine CM1, the game medium is launched by the launching means to the gaming area provided with a plurality of winning ports including the first winning port having an accessory operated based on the game. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detecting means for detecting a winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium fired by the firing means has won one of the winning openings, a predetermined number of game media are determined for the winning winning opening of the game medium. Is paid out by the paying means. Further, information relating to a ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout device is stored in the storage device by the storage control device. You. Then, a signal based on at least the information stored in the storage unit is output by the output unit. Thereby, based on the output signal, of the number of game media paid out in accordance with the winning of the winning opening, the ratio of the bonuses, which is the ratio of the one by the first winning opening (that is, the operation of the bonus). Has the effect of being able to analyze and to detect fraudulent acts based on the ratio of the characters. On the other hand, in the lottery of the lottery means that triggers the provision of an advantageous game value to the player, all information stored in the storage means is retained even if the probability of winning is changed by the change means. to continue. This has the effect that although the ratio of the bonuses changes with the change in the probability of winning, it is possible to analyze whether there has been fraud before the probability of winning changes.

In the gaming machine CM1,
The gaming machine CM2, wherein, when the probability is changed by the change unit, the storage control unit stores information indicating that the change has been made in the storage unit.

  According to the gaming machine CM2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine CM1, there are the following effects. That is, when the winning probability is changed by the changing unit, information indicating that the change has been made is stored in the storage unit by the storage control unit. Thereby, it is possible to grasp at the stage of analysis that the accessory ratio has changed due to the change in the probability of winning, and it is possible to use the information as a reference for determining whether or not there has been fraud.

In the gaming machine CM2,
When the probability is changed by the change unit, the storage control unit stores, in the storage unit, information indicating that the change has been performed, together with information indicating the date and time when the change has been performed. A gaming machine CM3, characterized in that it is a game machine.

  According to the gaming machine CM3, there are the following effects in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine CM2. That is, when the probability of winning is changed by the change means, information indicating that the change has been made is stored in the storage means by the storage control means together with information indicating the date and time when the change was made. Is done. As a result, the date and time when the probability of winning has been changed can be easily grasped. There is an effect that the judgment can be made easily.

In the gaming machine CM2 or CM3,
When the probability is changed by the change unit, the storage control unit stores, in the storage unit, information indicating that the change has been performed, together with information indicating a probability of winning after the change. A gaming machine CM4 characterized by causing the game machine CM4.

  According to the gaming machine CM4, the following effects are obtained in addition to the effects of the gaming machine CM2 or CM3. That is, when the winning probability is changed by the changing unit, the information indicating that the change has been performed is stored in the storage unit by the storage control unit together with the information indicating the winning probability after the change. Is done. This makes it possible to grasp the probability of a hit after the change, so that it is possible to more reliably determine whether there has been a fraud while suppressing the probability of the hit after the change.

In any of the gaming machines CM2 to CM4,
When the probability is changed by the change unit, the storage control unit stores, in the storage unit, information indicating that the change has been performed, together with information indicating a probability of hitting before the change. A gaming machine CM5 characterized in that it causes the game machine CM5.

  According to the gaming machine CM5, the following effects are obtained in addition to the effects of the gaming machines CM2 to CM4. That is, when the winning probability is changed by the changing unit, information indicating that the change has been performed is stored in the storage unit by the storage control unit together with the information indicating the winning probability before the change. Is done. This makes it possible to grasp the probability of winning before the change, and thus has an effect that it is possible to more reliably determine whether there has been fraud while suppressing the probability of winning before the change.

In any of the gaming machines CM1 to CM5,
Based on the information stored in the storage means, comprises a display means for displaying information related to the accessory ratio,
CM6, wherein, when the change is made by the change means, the display means displays information relating to the accessory ratio based only on the information stored after the change.

  According to the gaming machine CM6, the following effects are obtained in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines CM1 to CM5. That is, the display means displays information related to the accessory ratio based on the information stored in the storage means. At this time, when the probability is changed by the changing means, information relating to the accessory ratio is displayed based only on the information stored after the change. As a result, regarding the information relating to the accessory ratio displayed on the display means, it is possible to exclude a change in the accessory ratio due to the change in the hit probability, and it is possible to easily find an illegal act after the change in the hit probability. effective.

In any of the gaming machines CM1 to CM6,
The gaming machine CM7, wherein the storage control means accumulates and stores the information in the storage means for each of the probabilities that can be set by the change by the change means.

  According to the gaming machine CM7, there are the following effects in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines CM1 to CM6. That is, the information stored in the storage means is accumulated and stored in the storage means for each probability that can be set by the change by the change means. This makes it possible to easily determine, for each probability that can be set, the accessory ratio at the time that the probability is set from the information stored in the storage means. Therefore, there is an effect that the change of the accessory ratio due to the change of the probability of winning and the change of the accessory ratio due to the fraud can be clearly switched and analyzed.

<CN group>
A gaming machine comprising lottery means for performing a winning lottery based on the establishment of a starting condition, and providing an advantageous game value to a player when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a win,
A game area provided with a plurality of winning ports including a first winning port having an accessory operated based on the game;
Launching means for launching a game medium to the gaming area;
A prize detecting means provided for each prize port and detecting a prize of the game medium to a corresponding prize port;
When the prize detecting means detects that the game medium fired by the shooting means has won one of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games are played with respect to the winning hole of the game medium. Means for paying out the medium,
Information related to the ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning port with respect to the number of the game media paid out by the payout unit is accumulated and stored in the storage unit. Storage control means for causing
Output means for outputting at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means,
Changing means for changing the probability of winning in the lottery by the lottery means,
When the probability is changed by the change unit, the deletion unit deletes part of the information stored most recently from the information accumulated and stored in the storage unit. Gaming machine CN1.

  According to the gaming machine CN1, the game medium is fired by the shooting means to a game area provided with a plurality of winning ports including a first winning port having an accessory operated based on the game. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detecting means for detecting a winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium fired by the firing means has won one of the winning openings, a predetermined number of game media are determined for the winning winning opening of the game medium. Is paid out by the paying means. Further, information relating to a ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout device is stored in the storage device by the storage control device. You. Then, a signal based on at least the information stored in the storage unit is output by the output unit. Thereby, based on the output signal, of the number of game media paid out in accordance with the winning of the winning opening, the ratio of the bonuses, which is the ratio of the one by the first winning opening (that is, the operation of the bonus). Has the effect of being able to analyze and to detect fraudulent acts based on the ratio of the characters. On the other hand, in the lottery of the lottery means which is an opportunity to give an advantageous game value to the player, when the probability of winning is changed by the change means, the most recently stored information in the storage means The information is erased by the erasing means except for some stored information. Here, if the winning probability changes, the ratio of the bonuses also changes. Therefore, if the information accumulated and stored in the storage means remains as it is before the probability of winning is changed, the change in the ratio of the accessory which can be analyzed based on the information accumulated and stored is the It is unclear whether this is due to a change in the probability of winning or due to fraud. On the other hand, when the winning probability is changed, the information accumulated and stored in the storage means is deleted except for a part stored recently, thereby changing the winning probability. In this way, it is possible to eliminate as much as possible the effect of a change in the ratio of characters and actors from remaining in the storage means, and to analyze whether there is a possibility that a wrongdoing might have been performed before the probability of winning was changed There is an effect that it can be.

In the gaming machine CN1,
The gaming machine CN2, wherein when the probability is changed by the changing unit, the storage control unit stores information indicating that the change has been made in the storage unit.

  According to the gaming machine CN2, the following effects are obtained in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine CN1. That is, when the winning probability is changed by the changing unit, information indicating that the change has been made is stored in the storage unit by the storage control unit. By this, it is possible to grasp at the stage of analysis that the accessory ratio has changed due to the change in the hit probability, and the information stored in the storage means has been changed by the change in the hit probability. There is an effect that the fact that the data has been erased can be grasped at the stage of analysis, and can be used as a reference for judging whether or not fraud has occurred.

In the gaming machine CN2,
When the probability is changed by the change unit, the storage control unit stores, in the storage unit, information indicating that the change has been performed, together with information indicating the date and time when the change has been performed. A gaming machine CN3, characterized in that the gaming machine CN3 is operated.

  According to the gaming machine CN3, the following effects are obtained in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine CN2. That is, when the probability of winning is changed by the change means, information indicating that the change has been made is stored in the storage means by the storage control means together with information indicating the date and time when the change was made. Is done. By this, it is possible to grasp at the stage of the analysis that the role ratio has changed due to the change in the hit probability, and the information stored in the storage means is changed by the change in the hit probability. The fact that the data has been erased can be grasped at the analysis stage, and the date and time when the change has been made (that is, when the data has been erased) can also be grasped, so that it is possible to more reliably determine whether or not there has been fraud. This has the effect.

In the gaming machine CN2 or CN3,
When the probability is changed by the change unit, the storage control unit stores, in the storage unit, information indicating that the change has been performed, together with information indicating a probability of winning after the change. A gaming machine CN4 characterized by causing the game machine CN4.

  According to the gaming machine CN4, the following effects are obtained in addition to the effects of the gaming machine CN2 or CN3. That is, when the winning probability is changed by the changing unit, the information indicating that the change has been performed is stored in the storage unit by the storage control unit together with the information indicating the winning probability after the change. Is done. By this, it is possible to grasp at the stage of analysis that the accessory ratio has changed due to the change in the hit probability, and the information stored in the storage means has been changed by the change in the hit probability. It is possible to grasp at the stage of analysis that the erasure has been made, and also to know the probability of hitting after the change, so that the probability of hitting after the change is suppressed and the judgment on whether there has been fraud is more reliable. There is an effect that it can be performed.

In any of the gaming machines CN2 to CN4,
When the probability is changed by the change unit, the storage control unit stores, in the storage unit, information indicating that the change has been performed, together with information indicating a probability of hitting before the change. A gaming machine CN5,

  The gaming machine CN5 has the following effects in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines CN2 to CN4. That is, when the winning probability is changed by the changing unit, information indicating that the change has been performed is stored in the storage unit by the storage control unit together with the information indicating the winning probability before the change. Is done. By this, it is possible to grasp at the stage of analysis that the accessory ratio has changed due to the change in the hit probability, and the information stored in the storage means has been changed by the change in the hit probability. It is possible to grasp at the stage of analysis that the erasure has occurred, and also to know the probability of winning before the change, so that the probability of winning before the change is suppressed, and the determination of whether there has been fraud is more reliable. There is an effect that it can be performed.

<CO group>
A gaming machine comprising lottery means for performing a winning lottery based on the establishment of a starting condition, and providing an advantageous game value to a player when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a win,
A game area provided with a plurality of winning ports including a first winning port having an accessory operated based on the game;
Launching means for launching a game medium to the gaming area;
A prize detecting means provided for each prize port and detecting a prize of the game medium to a corresponding prize port;
When the prize detecting means detects that the game medium fired by the shooting means has won one of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games are played with respect to the winning hole of the game medium. Means for paying out the medium,
Information related to the ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning port with respect to the number of the game media paid out by the payout unit is accumulated and stored in the storage unit. Storage control means for causing
Output means for outputting at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means,
Display means for displaying information relating to the accessory ratio based on the information stored in the storage means,
Mode switching means for switching to a mode for changing the probability of winning in the lottery by the lottery means,
When the mode is switched to the mode to be changed by the mode switching unit, the display unit displays a value indicating the probability of the hit to be changed,
Setting means for setting the hit probability to be changed displayed on the display means as the hit probability when the mode for changing the hit probability is completed. Gaming machine CO1.

  According to the gaming machine CO1, the game medium is fired by the shooting means to a game area provided with a plurality of winning ports including a first winning port having an accessory operated based on the game. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detecting means for detecting a winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium fired by the firing means has won one of the winning openings, a predetermined number of game media are determined for the winning winning opening of the game medium. Is paid out by the paying means. Further, information relating to a ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout device is stored in the storage device by the storage control device. You. Then, a signal based on at least the information stored in the storage unit is output by the output unit. Thereby, based on the output signal, of the number of game media paid out in accordance with the winning of the winning opening, the ratio of the bonuses, which is the ratio of the one by the first winning opening (that is, the operation of the bonus). Has the effect of being able to analyze and to detect fraudulent acts based on the ratio of the characters. In addition, the display means displays information relating to the accessory ratio based on the information stored in the storage means. The effect is that it is possible to judge. On the other hand, when the mode switching means is switched to the mode for changing the probability of winning in the lottery by the lottery means, the display means displays a value indicating the probability of the winning to be changed. Then, when the mode for changing the probability of hitting ends, the probability of hitting to be changed displayed on the display means is set as the probability of hitting by the setting means. Thereby, the display means for displaying information relating to the accessory ratio can also be used as a display means for displaying the probability of winning which is desired to be changed when the probability of winning is changed. This has the effect of suppressing an increase in the number of display means mounted on the gaming machine.

(Issue 2)
The following gaming machines CP1 to CP5, CQ1 to CQ5, CR1 to CR5, CS1 to CS4, CT1, CT2, CU1, and CU2 have been made to solve the following problems.

  That is, the RAM (RANDOM ACCESS MEMRY) used in the main control means for controlling the game is stored in a first storage area used for processing for performing main control of the game and a second storage area used for other processing. 2. Description of the Related Art There has been known a gaming machine configured to protect information that is divided and used in main control of a game from being destroyed by other processing (for example, Japanese Patent No. 6154863).

  On the other hand, there is a demand for more appropriate protection of information used in processing for performing main control of a game from other processing.

  The present technical idea has been made in view of the above circumstances, and provides a gaming machine capable of suitably protecting information used in main control of a game.

(Means and effects 2)
<CP group>
In a gaming machine provided with main control means for controlling a game,
The main control means includes:
An operation means for performing an operation;
Multiple registers;
A first storage unit that stores, in a readable and writable manner, first information used when a first process for performing main control of a game is executed by the arithmetic unit;
A second storage unit that has a storage area different from that of the first storage unit, and stores, in a readable and writable manner, second information used when a second process different from the first process is performed by the arithmetic unit; When,
From the stage where the calculating means is executing the first processing using the first information stored in the first storage means, the second processing is executed when the calculating means is stored in the second storage means. Evacuation means for evacuation of the contents of the register to a predetermined area of the second storage means by a load instruction or a store instruction when shifting to the stage of executing the second processing using information;
From the stage where the calculating means is executing the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means, the first processing means stores the first processing stored in the first storage means. When returning to the step of executing the first process using information, a return unit that returns the contents of the register saved in the predetermined area of the second storage unit to a corresponding register; A gaming machine CP1 comprising:

  According to the gaming machine CP1, main control means for controlling a game is provided. In the main control means, when the first processing for performing the main control of the game is performed by the calculation means for performing the calculation, the first information used for the execution of the first processing is readable and writable by the first processing. It is stored in the storage means. Further, the storage area is different from that of the first storage means, and second information used when a second processing different from the first processing is executed by the arithmetic means is readable and writable in the second storage means. It is memorized. Then, from the stage where the arithmetic means executes the first processing using the first information stored in the first storage means, the arithmetic means uses the second information stored in the second storage means. When shifting to the stage of executing the second processing, the contents of the register are saved to a predetermined area of the second storage means by a saving instruction by a saving instruction. On the other hand, from the stage where the arithmetic means executes the second processing using the second information stored in the second storage means, the arithmetic means uses the first information stored in the first storage means. When returning to the stage of executing the first processing, the contents of the register saved in the predetermined area of the second storage means are restored to the corresponding register by the restoration means. As a result, the information stored in the register can be appropriately protected from information used in processing for performing main control of the game from other processing. Further, since the contents of the register are saved to a predetermined area of the second storage means by a load instruction or a store instruction, the location to be saved is fixed to the predetermined area as compared with the case of saving to the stack area. be able to. Therefore, during the second process, the program used to use the second storage means while clearly avoiding the predetermined area where the contents of the register are saved is used, and the register used in the first process is used. Content can be reliably protected. Therefore, there is an effect that the information used in the main control of the game can be suitably protected.

In the gaming machine CP1,
The second storage means includes a stack area for stacking information based on instructions to the arithmetic means, and a work area for storing information used based on instructions to the arithmetic means,
The gaming machine CP2, wherein the saving means saves the contents of the register to the predetermined area provided in the work area of the second storage means.

  According to the gaming machine CP2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine CP1. That is, the second storage means is provided with a stack area for stacking information based on an instruction to the arithmetic means and a work area for storing information used based on arithmetic to the arithmetic means. The contents of the register saved by the means are saved in a predetermined area provided in the work area of the second storage means. Therefore, there is an effect that the capacity required for the stack area can be reduced and a large capacity for the work area can be secured.

In the gaming machine CP2,
The arithmetic means is
Stack area designating means for designating a range of the stack area in advance;
When information is stacked in the stack area beyond the range specified by the stack area specifying means, storage clear for clearing at least all information stored in the second storage means provided with the stack area A gaming machine CP3.

  According to the gaming machine CP3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine CP2. That is, the calculating means specifies the range of the stack area in advance by the stack area specifying means. On the other hand, when information is stacked in the stack area beyond the specified range, at least the information stored in the second storage means provided with the stack area is cleared by the storage clear means. Here, from the stage where the arithmetic means executes the first processing using the first information stored in the first storage means, the arithmetic means uses the second information stored in the second storage means. When the process shifts to the stage of executing the second process, the contents of the register are saved in the work area instead of the stack area by the saving means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the information from being stacked beyond the specified range in the stack area by the saving, and to suppress the possibility that all the information stored in the second storage unit is cleared. is there.

In any of the gaming machines CP1 to CP3,
The gaming machine CP4, wherein the register whose contents are saved to the predetermined area by the saving means includes a register used when the arithmetic processing executes the second processing.

  According to the gaming machine CP4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines CP1 to CP3. In other words, the register including the register used when the arithmetic processing executes the second processing is a step in which the arithmetic means executes the first processing using the first information stored in the first storage means. When the operation shifts to the stage where the calculating means executes the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means, the evacuation means saves the data to a predetermined area of the second storage means. . Thus, the register used by executing the second process can be reliably restored to the content immediately before the execution of the second process, based on the content saved to the predetermined area.

  In the gaming machine CP4, the register whose contents are saved to the predetermined area by the saving means is a register used when the arithmetic processing executes the second processing. .

  According to the gaming machine CP5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine CP4. In other words, the register used when the arithmetic processing executes the second processing starts at the stage where the arithmetic means executes the first processing using the first information stored in the first storage means. When the unit shifts to the stage of executing the second process using the second information stored in the second storage unit, the unit is evacuated to a predetermined area of the second storage unit by the evacuating unit. Thus, there is an effect that only the minimum necessary registers are saved in a predetermined area, and the contents immediately before the execution of the second processing can be reliably restored.

<CQ group>
In a gaming machine provided with main control means for controlling a game,
The main control means includes:
An operation means for performing an operation;
Multiple registers;
A first storage unit that stores, in a readable and writable manner, first information used when a first process for performing main control of a game is executed by the arithmetic unit;
A second storage unit that has a storage area different from that of the first storage unit, and stores, in a readable and writable manner, second information used when a second process different from the first process is performed by the arithmetic unit; When,
From the stage where the calculating means is executing the first processing using the first information stored in the first storage means, the second processing is executed when the calculating means is stored in the second storage means. Evacuation means for evacuation of the contents of some of the plurality of registers to a predetermined area of the second storage means when the process proceeds to the step of executing the second processing using information;
From the stage where the calculating means is executing the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means, the first processing means stores the first processing stored in the first storage means. When returning to the step of executing the first process using information, a return unit that returns the contents of the register saved in the predetermined area of the second storage unit to a corresponding register; A gaming machine CQ1 comprising:

  According to the gaming machine CQ1, main control means for controlling a game is provided. In the main control means, when the first processing for performing the main control of the game is performed by the calculation means for performing the calculation, the first information used for the execution of the first processing is readable and writable by the first processing. It is stored in the storage means. Further, the storage area is different from that of the first storage means, and second information used when a second processing different from the first processing is executed by the arithmetic means is readable and writable in the second storage means. It is memorized. Then, from the stage where the arithmetic means executes the first processing using the first information stored in the first storage means, the arithmetic means uses the second information stored in the second storage means. When shifting to the stage for executing the second processing, the contents of some of the plurality of registers are saved to a predetermined area of the second storage means by the saving means. On the other hand, from the stage where the arithmetic means executes the second processing using the second information stored in the second storage means, the arithmetic means uses the first information stored in the first storage means. When returning to the stage of executing the first processing, the contents of the register saved in the predetermined area of the second storage means are restored to the corresponding register by the restoration means. As a result, the information stored in the register can be appropriately protected from information used in processing for performing main control of the game from other processing. In addition, since only a part of the registers is saved to a predetermined area of the second storage means, the storage capacity required for saving the contents of the registers can be reduced, and the memory capacity can be reduced. Or the area for storing such information can be enlarged. Therefore, there is an effect that the information used in the main control of the game can be suitably protected.

In the gaming machine CQ1,
The second storage means includes a stack area for stacking information based on instructions to the arithmetic means, and a work area for storing information used based on instructions to the arithmetic means,
The gaming machine CQ2, wherein the saving means saves the contents of the partial register to the predetermined area provided in the work area of the second storage means.

  According to the gaming machine CQ2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine CQ1. That is, the second storage means is provided with a stack area for stacking information based on an instruction to the arithmetic means and a work area for storing information used based on arithmetic to the arithmetic means. The contents of some registers saved by the means are saved in a predetermined area provided in the work area of the second storage means. Therefore, there is an effect that the capacity required for the stack area can be reduced and a large capacity for the work area can be secured.

In the gaming machine CQ2,
The arithmetic means is
Stack area designating means for designating a range of the stack area in advance;
When information is stacked in the stack area beyond the range specified by the stack area specifying means, storage clear for clearing at least all information stored in the second storage means provided with the stack area Means, a gaming machine CQ3.

  According to the gaming machine CQ3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine CQ2. That is, the calculating means specifies the range of the stack area in advance by the stack area specifying means. On the other hand, when information is stacked in the stack area beyond the specified range, at least the information stored in the second storage means provided with the stack area is cleared by the storage clear means. Here, from the stage where the arithmetic means executes the first processing using the first information stored in the first storage means, the arithmetic means uses the second information stored in the second storage means. When the process proceeds to the stage of executing the second process, the contents of some registers are saved by the saving means in the work area instead of the stack area. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the information from being stacked beyond the specified range in the stack area by the saving, and to suppress the possibility that all the information stored in the second storage unit is cleared. is there.

In any of the gaming machines CQ1 to CQ3,
The gaming machine CQ4, wherein the partial registers whose contents are saved to the predetermined area by the saving means include registers used when the arithmetic processing executes the second processing.

  According to the gaming machine CQ4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines CQ1 to CQ3. That is, some of the registers including the registers used when the arithmetic processing performs the second processing execute the first processing using the first information stored in the first storage means. When the operation unit shifts from the stage of executing to the stage of executing the second process using the second information stored in the second storage unit, the evacuation unit sets the storage unit to the predetermined area of the second storage unit. Will be evacuated. Thus, the register used by executing the second process can be reliably restored to the content immediately before the execution of the second process, based on the content saved to the predetermined area.

  In the gaming machine CQ4, the partial registers whose contents are saved to the predetermined area by the saving means are registers used when the arithmetic processing executes the second processing. Gaming machine CQ5.

  According to the gaming machine CQ5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine CQ4. That is, the register used when the arithmetic processing executes the second processing is a part of the register where the arithmetic means executes the first processing using the first information stored in the first storage means. When the operation unit shifts from the stage of executing to the stage of executing the second process using the second information stored in the second storage unit, the evacuation unit sets the storage unit to the predetermined area of the second storage unit. Will be evacuated. Thus, there is an effect that only the minimum necessary registers are saved in a predetermined area, and the contents immediately before the execution of the second processing can be reliably restored.

<CR group>
In a gaming machine provided with main control means for controlling a game,
The main control means includes:
An operation means for performing an operation;
Multiple registers;
A first storage unit that stores, in a readable and writable manner, first information used when a first process for performing main control of a game is executed by the arithmetic unit;
A second storage unit that has a storage area different from that of the first storage unit, and stores, in a readable and writable manner, second information used when a second process different from the first process is performed by the arithmetic unit; When,
From the stage where the calculating means is executing the first processing using the first information stored in the first storage means, the second processing is executed when the calculating means is stored in the second storage means. Evacuation means for evacuation of the contents of the register to a predetermined area of the second storage means by an individual instruction for each register when the process proceeds to the step of executing the second processing using information;
From the stage where the calculating means is executing the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means, the first processing means stores the first processing stored in the first storage means. When returning to the step of executing the first process using information, a return unit that returns the contents of the register saved in the predetermined area of the second storage unit to a corresponding register; A gaming machine CR1 comprising:

  According to the gaming machine CR1, main control means for controlling a game is provided. In the main control means, when the first processing for performing the main control of the game is performed by the calculation means for performing the calculation, the first information used for the execution of the first processing is readable and writable by the first processing. It is stored in the storage means. Further, the storage area is different from that of the first storage means, and second information used when a second processing different from the first processing is executed by the arithmetic means is readable and writable in the second storage means. It is memorized. Then, from the stage where the arithmetic means executes the first processing using the first information stored in the first storage means, the arithmetic means uses the second information stored in the second storage means. When shifting to the stage of executing the second processing, the contents of the register are saved to a predetermined area of the second storage means by the saving means by an individual instruction for each register. On the other hand, from the stage where the arithmetic means executes the second processing using the second information stored in the second storage means, the arithmetic means uses the first information stored in the first storage means. When returning to the stage of executing the first processing, the contents of the register saved in the predetermined area of the second storage means are restored to the corresponding register by the restoration means. As a result, the information stored in the register can be appropriately protected from information used in processing for performing main control of the game from other processing. In addition, the evacuation is performed to a predetermined area of the second storage means by an individual instruction for each register. Only necessary registers can be individually designated and saved. Therefore, there is an effect that the information used in the main control of the game can be suitably protected.

In the gaming machine CR1,
The second storage means includes a stack area for stacking information based on instructions to the arithmetic means, and a work area for storing information used based on instructions to the arithmetic means,
The gaming machine CR2, wherein the saving means saves the contents of the register to the predetermined area provided in the work area of the second storage means.

  According to the gaming machine CR2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine CR1. That is, the second storage means is provided with a stack area for stacking information based on an instruction to the arithmetic means and a work area for storing information used based on arithmetic to the arithmetic means. The contents of the register saved by the means are saved in a predetermined area provided in the work area of the second storage means. Therefore, there is an effect that the capacity required for the stack area can be reduced and a large capacity for the work area can be secured.

In the gaming machine CR2,
The arithmetic means is
Stack area designating means for designating a range of the stack area in advance;
When information is stacked in the stack area beyond the range specified by the stack area specifying means, storage clear for clearing at least all information stored in the second storage means provided with the stack area A gaming machine CR3 comprising:

  According to the gaming machine CR3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine CR2. That is, the calculating means specifies the range of the stack area in advance by the stack area specifying means. On the other hand, when information is stacked in the stack area beyond the specified range, at least the information stored in the second storage means provided with the stack area is cleared by the storage clear means. Here, from the stage where the arithmetic means executes the first processing using the first information stored in the first storage means, the arithmetic means uses the second information stored in the second storage means. When the process shifts to the stage of executing the second process, the contents of the register are saved in the work area instead of the stack area by the saving means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the information from being stacked beyond the specified range in the stack area by the saving, and to suppress the possibility that all the information stored in the second storage unit is cleared. is there.

In any of the gaming machines CR1 to CR3,
The gaming machine CR4, wherein the register whose contents are saved to the predetermined area by the saving means includes a register used when the arithmetic processing executes the second processing.

  According to the gaming machine CR4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines CR1 to CR3. In other words, the register including the register used when the arithmetic processing executes the second processing is a step in which the arithmetic means executes the first processing using the first information stored in the first storage means. When the operation shifts to the stage where the calculating means executes the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means, the evacuation means saves the data to a predetermined area of the second storage means. . Thus, the register used by executing the second process can be reliably restored to the content immediately before the execution of the second process, based on the content saved to the predetermined area.

  In the gaming machine CR4, the register whose contents are saved to the predetermined area by the evacuation means is a register used when the arithmetic processing executes the second processing. .

  According to the gaming machine CR5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine CR4. In other words, the register used when the arithmetic processing executes the second processing starts at the stage where the arithmetic means executes the first processing using the first information stored in the first storage means. When the unit shifts to the stage of executing the second process using the second information stored in the second storage unit, the unit is evacuated to a predetermined area of the second storage unit by the evacuating unit. Thus, there is an effect that only the minimum necessary registers are saved in a predetermined area, and the contents immediately before the execution of the second processing can be reliably restored.

<CS group>
In a gaming machine provided with main control means for controlling a game,
The main control means includes:
An operation means for performing an operation;
Multiple registers;
A first storage unit that stores, in a readable and writable manner, first information used when a first process for performing main control of a game is executed by the arithmetic unit;
A second storage unit having a storage area different from that of the first storage unit, the second storage unit storing, in a readable and writable manner, second information used when a second process relating to the accessory ratio is executed by the arithmetic unit;
From the stage where the calculating means is executing the first processing using the first information stored in the first storage means, the second processing is executed when the calculating means is stored in the second storage means. Evacuation means for evacuation of the contents of the register to a predetermined area of the second storage means when the process proceeds to the step of executing the second processing using information;
From the stage where the calculating means is executing the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means, the first processing means stores the first processing stored in the first storage means. When returning to the step of executing the first process using information, a return unit that returns the contents of the register saved in the predetermined area of the second storage unit to a corresponding register; A gaming machine CS1 comprising:

  According to the gaming machine CS1, main control means for controlling a game is provided. In the main control means, when the first processing for performing the main control of the game is performed by the calculation means for performing the calculation, the first information used for the execution of the first processing is readable and writable by the first processing. It is stored in the storage means. Also, the storage area is different from that of the first storage means, and the second information used when the second processing relating to the accessory ratio is executed by the calculation means is readable and writable and stored in the second storage means. . Then, from the stage where the arithmetic means executes the first processing using the first information stored in the first storage means, the arithmetic means uses the second information stored in the second storage means. When shifting to the stage of executing the second processing, the contents of the register are saved to a predetermined area of the second storage means by the saving means. On the other hand, from the stage where the arithmetic means executes the second processing using the second information stored in the second storage means, the arithmetic means uses the first information stored in the first storage means. When returning to the stage of executing the first processing, the contents of the register saved in the predetermined area of the second storage means are restored to the corresponding register by the restoration means. As a result, the information stored in this register can be appropriately protected from the information related to the accessory ratio with respect to the information used in the processing for performing the main control of the game. Therefore, there is an effect that the information used in the main control of the game can be suitably protected.

In the gaming machine CS1,
The gaming machine CS2, wherein the saving means saves the contents of the register to a predetermined area of the second storage means by a load instruction or a store instruction.

  According to the gaming machine CS2, the following effects are obtained in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine CS1. That is, since the contents of the register are saved to a predetermined area of the second storage means by a load instruction or a store instruction, the location to be saved is fixed to the predetermined area as compared with the case of saving to the stack area. There is an effect that can be.

In the gaming machine CS1 or CS2,
The gaming machine CS3, wherein the saving means saves the contents of some of the plurality of registers to a predetermined area of the second storage means.

  According to the gaming machine CS3, the following effects are obtained in addition to the effects of the gaming machine CS1 or CS2. In other words, only a part of the registers is saved to a predetermined area of the second storage means. Therefore, the storage capacity required for saving the contents of the registers can be reduced, and the memory capacity can be reduced. This has the effect that the area for storing such information can be enlarged.

In any of the gaming machines CS1 to CS3,
The gaming machine CS4, wherein the saving means saves the contents of the register to a predetermined area of the second storage means by an individual instruction for each register.

  According to the gaming machine CS4, the following effects are obtained in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines CS1 to CS3. That is, the evacuation is performed to a predetermined area of the second storage means by an individual instruction for each register. There is an effect that only necessary registers can be individually designated and saved.

<CT group>
In a gaming machine provided with main control means for controlling a game,
The main control means includes:
An operation means for performing an operation;
A first storage unit that stores, in a readable and writable manner, first information used when a first process for performing main control of a game is executed by the arithmetic unit;
A second storage unit that has a storage area different from that of the first storage unit, and stores, in a readable and writable manner, second information used when a second process different from the first process is performed by the arithmetic unit; When,
And a stack pointer,
The second processing is executed by a program read at a predetermined position of the first processing,
The main control means includes:
From the stage where the calculating means is executing the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means, the first processing means stores the first processing stored in the first storage means. A game machine CT1 comprising a stack pointer setting means for setting the stack pointer to a fixed value when returning to the step of executing the first processing using information.

  According to the gaming machine CT1, main control means for controlling a game is provided. In the main control means, when the first processing for performing the main control of the game is performed by the calculation means for performing the calculation, the first information used for the execution of the first processing is readable and writable by the first processing. It is stored in the storage means. Further, the storage area is different from that of the first storage means, and second information used when a second processing different from the first processing is executed by the arithmetic means is readable and writable in the second storage means. It is memorized. Here, the second processing is executed by a program read at a predetermined position in the first processing. Then, from the stage where the arithmetic means executes the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means, the arithmetic means uses the first information stored in the first storage means. When returning to the stage of executing the first processing, the stack pointer is set to a fixed value by the stack pointer setting means. Since the second process is a program read at a predetermined position of the first process, when the execution of the second process is started, the number of pieces of information stacked in the first process is always It is constant. Therefore, by simply setting a fixed value based on the number of pieces of stacked information in the stack pointer when returning from the stage of executing the second process to the stage of executing the first process, the execution is performed again. In the first process, the stacked information can be reliably read. Therefore, from the stage where the arithmetic means executes the first processing using the first information stored in the first storage means, the arithmetic means uses the second information stored in the second storage means. When shifting to the stage of executing the second process, it is not necessary to save the value of the stack pointer pointing to the stack area provided in the first storage means used in the first process, so Therefore, an increase in storage capacity can be suppressed. Therefore, there is an effect that the information used in the main control of the game can be suitably protected.

In the gaming machine CT1,
The arithmetic means includes: a main process; a loop process executed in the main process; and a timer allocation executed at a predetermined position in the loop process when a timer interrupt generated at predetermined time intervals is detected. And perform the
The gaming machine CT2, wherein the first processing and the second processing are processing executed in the timer interrupt processing.

  According to the gaming machine CT2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine CT1. That is, a main process, a loop process executed in the main process, and a timer interrupt process executed at a predetermined position in the loop process when a timer interrupt that occurs every predetermined time is detected. Is executed by the calculation means. Then, the first processing and the second processing are executed in the timer interrupt processing. Thus, when the execution of the second processing is started by the program read at the predetermined position of the first processing, the number of pieces of information stacked in the first processing always becomes a fixed number. Therefore, only by setting a fixed value based on the fixed number to the stack pointer when returning from the stage of executing the second process to the stage of executing the first process, the first value to be executed again is set. Has the effect that the stacked information can be reliably read.

<CU group>
In a gaming machine provided with main control means for controlling a game,
The main control means includes:
An operation means for performing an operation;
Multiple registers;
A first storage unit that stores, in a readable and writable manner, first information used when a first process for performing main control of a game is executed by the arithmetic unit;
A second storage unit that has a storage area different from that of the first storage unit, and stores, in a readable and writable manner, second information used when a second process different from the first process is performed by the arithmetic unit; When,
From the stage where the calculating means is executing the first process using the first information stored in the first storage means, the second means stored in the second storage means First fixed value storage means for storing a fixed value in a predetermined register when the process proceeds to the step of executing the second process using information;
From the stage where the calculating means is executing the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means, the first processing means stores the first processing stored in the first storage means. A gaming machine CU1 comprising: a second fixed value storage means for storing the fixed value in the predetermined register when returning to the step of executing the first processing using information.

  According to the gaming machine CU1, main control means for controlling a game is provided. In the main control means, when the first processing for performing the main control of the game is performed by the calculation means for performing the calculation, the first information used for the execution of the first processing is readable and writable by the first processing. It is stored in the storage means. Further, the storage area is different from that of the first storage means, and second information used when a second processing different from the first processing is executed by the arithmetic means is readable and writable in the second storage means. It is memorized. Then, from the stage where the arithmetic means executes the first processing using the first information stored in the first storage means, the arithmetic means uses the second information stored in the second storage means. When shifting to the stage of executing the second process, the first fixed value storage means stores a fixed value in a predetermined register. On the other hand, from the stage where the arithmetic means executes the second processing using the second information stored in the second storage means, the arithmetic means uses the first information stored in the first storage means. When returning to the stage of executing the first processing, the fixed value is stored in the predetermined register in which the fixed value is stored by the first fixed value storage means by the second fixed value storage means. Thus, from the stage where the arithmetic means executes the first processing using the first information stored in the first storage means, the arithmetic means uses the second information stored in the second storage means. When the operation means shifts to the stage of executing the second processing, and when the operation means executes the second processing using the second information stored in the second storage means, the operation means At the time of returning to the stage of executing the first processing using the first information stored in the storage means, the contents of the registers can be made identical at a glance. Therefore, it can be ensured that the first process for performing the main control of the game is not affected by the second process executed between the first and second processes. Therefore, there is an effect that the information used in the main control of the game can be suitably protected.

In the gaming machine CU1,
The gaming machine CU2, wherein the fixed value is 0.

According to the gaming machine CU2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine CU1. That is, from the stage in which the arithmetic means executes the first process using the first information stored in the first storage means, the arithmetic means uses the second information stored in the second storage means. When the operation proceeds to the step of executing the second processing, and when the operation means executes the second processing using the second information stored in the second storage means, the operation means executes the first storage. When returning to the stage of executing the first process using the first information stored in the means, 0 is stored as a fixed value of a predetermined register. Thereby, it can be grasped that this predetermined register has been cleared to 0 at a glance.
(Issue 3)
The following gaming machines CV1 to CV9, CW1 to CW7, and CX1 to CX6 have been made to solve the following problems.

  Conventionally, a game medium is fired to a game area provided with a plurality of winning ports by a launching means, and when the game medium wins one of the winning ports, a predetermined number of winning ports are determined for the winning ports. There is a gaming machine in which a game medium is paid out to a player (for example, JP-A-2003-340046).

  By the way, some cheating persons make it difficult for a game medium to win a predetermined winning opening, or conversely, guide the game medium to easily win a predetermined winning opening. However, the response to discover such misconduct was insufficient.

The present technical idea has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably detecting illegal acts.
(Means and effects 3)
<CV group>
A gaming area with a plurality of winning openings,
Launching means for launching a game medium to the gaming area;
A prize detecting means provided for each prize port and detecting a prize of the game medium to a corresponding prize port;
When the prize detecting means detects that the game medium fired by the shooting means has won one of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games are played with respect to the winning hole of the game medium. A payout means for paying out a medium,
Game performance information display means for displaying game performance information indicating the performance of a game executed in the gaming machine;
A gaming machine CV1 comprising: a confirmation display unit for performing a confirmation display for confirming whether or not normal display is possible on the game performance information display unit for a predetermined period.

  According to the gaming machine CV1, the game medium is fired by the firing means to a game area provided with a plurality of winning ports. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detecting means for detecting a winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium fired by the firing means has won one of the winning openings, a predetermined number of game media are determined for the winning winning opening of the game medium. Is paid out by the paying means. Game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in such a gaming machine is displayed on the game performance information display means. For the game performance display means, a confirmation display for confirming whether or not normal display is possible is performed by the confirmation display means for a predetermined period. Since it is possible to confirm whether or not normal display is possible on the game performance display means by this confirmation display, it is possible to determine whether or not the game performance information displayed on the game performance display means is normal. Thereby, since the presence or absence of a fraudulent act can be determined based on the game performance information determined to be normal, there is an effect that the fraudulent act can be suitably detected.

In the gaming machine CV1,
The gaming machine CV2, wherein the confirmation display means causes the game performance information display means to perform the confirmation display for a predetermined period when power is turned on.

  According to the gaming machine CV2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine CV1. That is, when the power is turned on, a confirmation display for confirming whether or not normal display is possible on the game performance display means is performed by the confirmation display means for a predetermined period. Thus, each time the power is turned on, it is possible to determine whether or not the display of the game performance display means is normal, so that it is possible to determine the presence or absence of an improper act based on the game performance information that is determined to be normal with higher accuracy. There is.

In the gaming machine CV1,
The gaming machine CV3, wherein the confirmation display means causes the game performance information display means to perform the confirmation display for a predetermined period when a predetermined operation is performed on a predetermined operation means.

  According to the gaming machine CV3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine CV1. That is, when a predetermined operation is performed on the predetermined operation means, a confirmation display for confirming whether or not normal display is possible on the game performance display means is performed by the confirmation display means for a predetermined period. Is Thereby, if a predetermined operation is performed on the predetermined operation means, it can be determined whether or not the display of the game performance display means is normal. Therefore, when making the determination, the user can make the determination by performing a predetermined operation on the predetermined operation means, so that there is an effect that a fraudulent activity can be suitably detected.

In the gaming machine CV1,
The gaming machine includes a new startup specifying unit for specifying that it is a new startup period,
The gaming machine CV4, wherein the display for confirmation causes the game performance information display to perform the display for a predetermined period when the new start-up period is reached.

  According to the gaming machine CV4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine CV1. That is, when the specifying unit specifies that the gaming machine is in the new startup period, the confirmation display for confirming whether or not a normal display is possible on the gaming performance display unit is a confirmation display. This is performed for a predetermined period by means. Thus, at least when the gaming machine is in the new startup period, it can be determined whether or not the display of the gaming performance display means is normal. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the shipment of the gaming machine in which the display of the gaming performance display means cannot be performed normally.

In any of the gaming machines CV1 to CV4,
A gaming machine CV5 comprising a stop means for stopping the progress of the game during the predetermined time.

  According to the gaming machine CV5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines CV1 to CV4, during the predetermined period during which the confirmation display is performed by the gaming performance information display by the confirmation display, the game performance is displayed. Since the progress is stopped by the stopping means, a display for confirmation is displayed on the game performance display means, and while the game performance information is not displayed, the game proceeds without being able to determine whether or not there is a fraud. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

In any of the gaming machines CV1 to CV4,
A gaming machine CV6 wherein the progress of the game is continued during the predetermined time.

  According to the gaming machine CV6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines CV1 to CV4, even during a predetermined period in which the confirmation display is performed by the gaming performance information display by the confirmation display, the game performance is displayed. Since the progress is continued, the display for confirmation is displayed on the game performance information display means, so that it is possible to suppress the waiting of the game.

In any of the gaming machines CV1 to CV6,
The game performance information display means includes a plurality of segment indicators configured with a plurality of segments, and for each segment indicator, displays information by lighting, blinking, or extinguishing individual segments,
The gaming machine CV7, wherein the confirmation display is a display in which all segments of the plurality of segment indicators are turned on.

  According to the gaming machine CV7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines CV1 to CV6, the following effect is achieved. That is, the game performance information display means includes a plurality of segment displays each including a plurality of segments, and displays information by lighting, blinking, or extinguishing individual segments on each segment display. . The confirmation display is a display in which all the segments of the plurality of segment indicators are turned on. Thereby, it is possible to confirm whether all the segments can be normally lit, and it is possible to easily determine whether or not the display of the game performance information display means is normally performed.

In any of the gaming machines CV1 to CV6,
The game performance information display means includes a plurality of segment indicators configured with a plurality of segments, and for each segment indicator, displays information by lighting, blinking, or extinguishing individual segments,
The gaming machine CV8, wherein the display for confirmation is a display in which all segments of the plurality of segment indicators are blinked.

  According to the gaming machine CV8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines CV1 to CV6, the following effect is achieved. That is, the game performance information display means includes a plurality of segment displays each including a plurality of segments, and displays information by lighting, blinking, or extinguishing individual segments on each segment display. . The confirmation display is a display in which all the segments of the plurality of segment indicators are blinked. Thereby, it is possible to confirm whether all the segments can be normally turned on and off, and it is possible to easily determine whether or not the display of the game performance information display means is normally performed.

  In any of the gaming machines CV1 to CV8, the gaming performance information displayed on the gaming performance information display means is provided when the gaming state is normal when the number of gaming media fired in the gaming area is 100. A gaming machine CV9, characterized in that the gaming machine CV9 has a base value that is the number of gaming media.

  According to the gaming machine CV9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines CV1 to CV8, the following effect is achieved. In other words, the game performance information display means displays, as the game performance information, a base value which is the number of game media paid out in a normal game state with respect to 100 game media launched into the game area. Is done. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to appropriately detect a fraudulent activity.

<CW group>
A gaming area with a plurality of winning openings,
Launching means for launching a game medium to the gaming area;
A prize detecting means provided for each prize port and detecting a prize of the game medium to a corresponding prize port;
When the prize detecting means detects that the game medium fired by the shooting means has won one of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games are played with respect to the winning hole of the game medium. A payout means for paying out a medium,
Game performance information display means for displaying game performance information indicating the performance of a game executed in the gaming machine;
New start-up specifying means for specifying that the gaming machine is in a new start-up period,
A special display mode display unit for displaying the game performance information display unit in a special display mode different from a normal mode when the new startup specifying unit specifies the new startup period. A gaming machine CW1 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the gaming machine CW1, a game medium is fired by the shooting means to a game area provided with a plurality of winning ports. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detecting means for detecting a winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium fired by the firing means has won one of the winning openings, a predetermined number of game media are determined for the winning winning opening of the game medium. Is paid out by the paying means. Game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in such a gaming machine is displayed on the game performance information display means. On the other hand, when the new start-up specifying unit specifies that the gaming machine is in the new start-up period, the special display mode display unit displays the game performance information display unit in a special display mode different from the normal mode. Is As a result, from the game performance information display means displayed in the special display mode, it is possible to indicate that a new start-up period is currently in progress, and to indicate that there is no information that can judge an improper act. There is an effect that can be.

In the gaming machine CW1,
The game performance information display means includes a plurality of segment indicators configured with a plurality of segments, and for each segment indicator, displays information by lighting, blinking, or extinguishing individual segments,
The gaming machine CW2, wherein the special display mode is a display mode in which all segments of the plurality of segment indicators are turned on or blinked.

  According to the gaming machine CW2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine CW1. That is, the game performance information display means includes a plurality of segment displays each including a plurality of segments, and displays information by lighting, blinking, or extinguishing individual segments on each segment display. . The special display mode is a display mode in which all segments of the plurality of segment indicators are turned on or blinked. Thereby, in the game performance information display means, all segments of the plurality of segment indicators are turned on or blinked, so that it is possible to easily indicate that a new start-up period is currently in progress.

In the gaming machine CW1 or CW2,
The game performance information display means,
A plurality of segment indicators configured with a plurality of segments are provided, and for each segment indicator, information is displayed by lighting, blinking or extinguishing the individual segments,
Some segment displays are used to display the game performance information, and other segment displays are used to identify the type of the game performance information displayed on the some segment displays. Is used to display information,
The special display mode is a display mode in which information other than identification information for identifying the type of the game performance information is lit or blinked on the other segment display. .

  According to the gaming machine CW3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine CW1 or CW2. That is, the game performance information display means includes a plurality of segment displays each including a plurality of segments, and displays information by lighting, blinking, or extinguishing individual segments on each segment display. . Some segment displays are used for displaying game performance information, and other segment displays are identification information for identifying the type of game performance information displayed on some segment displays. Is used to display. The special display mode is a display mode in which information different from the identification information for identifying the type of the game performance information is lit or blinked on another segment display. As a result, if information different from the identification information for identifying the type of the game performance information is lit or blinking displayed on the other segment display of the game performance information display means, it is during the new start-up period. Can be easily shown.

In the gaming machine CW3,
The gaming machine CW4, wherein the special display mode is a display mode in which game performance information indicating game performance measured in real time is lit or blinked on the partial segment display.

  According to the gaming machine CW4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine CW3. That is, the special display mode is a display mode in which game performance information indicating game performance measured in real time is lit or blinked on some segment displays. As a result, although the normal game performance of the gaming machine cannot be measured because the new start-up period is in progress, information indicating the game performance measured in real time can be shown as a reference.

The game performance information display means,
A plurality of segment indicators configured with a plurality of segments are provided, and for each segment indicator, information is displayed by lighting, blinking or extinguishing the individual segments,
Some segment displays are used to display the game performance information, and other segment displays are used to identify the type of the game performance information displayed on the some segment displays. Is used to display information,
The gaming machine CW5, wherein the special display mode is a display mode in which identification information for identifying the type of the game performance information is blinked on the other segment display.

  According to the gaming machine CW5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine CW1 or CW2. That is, the game performance information display means includes a plurality of segment displays each including a plurality of segments, and displays information by lighting, blinking, or extinguishing individual segments on each segment display. . Some segment displays are used for displaying game performance information, and other segment displays are identification information for identifying the type of game performance information displayed on some segment displays. Is used to display. The special display mode is a display mode in which the identification information for identifying the type of the game performance information blinks on another segment display. With this, when the identification information for identifying the type of the game performance information is blinkingly displayed on the other segment display of the game performance information display means, it is easy to indicate that a new start-up period is currently in progress. There is an effect that can be.

In the gaming machine CW5,
The gaming machine CW6, wherein the special display mode is a display mode in which information different from the game performance information is lit on the partial segment display.

  According to the gaming machine CW6, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine CW5. That is, the special display mode is a display mode in which information different from the game performance information is lit on some segment displays. Thus, there is an effect that it is possible to clearly indicate that the normal gaming performance of the gaming machine has not been measured because the new startup period is being started.

  In any of the gaming machines CW1 to CW6, the gaming performance information displayed on the gaming performance information display means is provided when the gaming state is normal when the number of gaming media fired in the gaming area is 100. A gaming machine CW7, characterized in that the gaming machine CW7 has a base value that is the number of gaming media.

  According to the gaming machine CW7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines CW1 to CW6, the following effect is achieved. In other words, the game performance information display means displays, as the game performance information, a base value which is the number of game media paid out in a normal game state with respect to 100 game media launched into the game area. Is done. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to appropriately detect a fraudulent activity.

<CX group>
A gaming area with a plurality of winning openings,
Launching means for launching a game medium to the gaming area;
A prize detecting means provided for each prize port and detecting a prize of the game medium to a corresponding prize port;
When the prize detecting means detects that the game medium fired by the shooting means has won one of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games are played with respect to the winning hole of the game medium. A payout means for paying out a medium,
For each predetermined period, during the predetermined period, a game performance information obtaining means for obtaining game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in the gaming machine,
For a plurality of predetermined periods, a game performance information storage unit that stores the game performance information acquired by the game performance acquisition unit,
A gaming machine CX1 comprising: game performance information display means for displaying game performance information stored for a plurality of predetermined periods stored in the game performance information storage means.

  According to the gaming machine CX1, the game medium is fired by the firing means to a game area provided with a plurality of winning ports. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detecting means for detecting a winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium fired by the firing means has won one of the winning openings, a predetermined number of game media are determined for the winning winning opening of the game medium. Is paid out by the paying means. Here, for each predetermined period, during the predetermined period, game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in such a gaming machine is obtained by the game performance information obtaining means, and each of the game performance information is It is stored in the performance information storage means. Then, the game performance information stored in the game performance information storage means and obtained for a plurality of predetermined periods is displayed on the game performance information display means. As a result, the game performance information for a plurality of predetermined periods is displayed, so that it is possible to more accurately determine whether or not a fraud has occurred, and it is also possible to predict to some extent the time at which the fraud has occurred. it can. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to appropriately detect a fraud.

In the gaming machine CX1,
The game performance obtaining means obtains game performance information indicating a performance of a game executed in the gaming machine in real time during the predetermined period,
The game performance information storage means stores the game performance information acquired in real time,
The game performance information display means displays the game performance information obtained in real time together with the game performance information stored for the plurality of predetermined periods stored in the game performance information storage means. A gaming machine CX2 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine CX2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine CX1. That is, the game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in the gaming machine in real time during the predetermined period is obtained by the game performance obtaining means, and the obtained game performance information is stored in the game performance information storage means. It is memorized. Then, the game performance information acquired in real time is displayed on the game performance information display means together with the game performance information acquired for a plurality of predetermined periods stored in the game performance information storage means. Thereby, since the game performance information acquired in real time is also indicated, there is an effect that it is possible to more accurately determine whether or not there has been an illegal act.

In the gaming machine CX1,
The game performance information storage means,
A first storage area for storing game performance information in a previous predetermined period;
A second storage area for storing game performance information in a predetermined period of two times before,
When the predetermined period has elapsed, the game performance information stored in the first storage area is shifted to the second storage area, and during the predetermined period obtained by the game performance obtaining means, A gaming machine CX3 wherein game performance information indicating the performance of the executed game is stored in the first storage area.

  According to the gaming machine CX3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine CX1. That is, the game performance information storage means is provided with at least a first storage area for storing game performance information in a previous predetermined period and a second storage area for storing game performance information in a predetermined period two times before. . Then, when the predetermined period has elapsed, the game performance information stored in the first storage area is shifted to the second storage area, and the game performance information is executed by the gaming machine during the predetermined period obtained by the game performance obtaining means. Game performance information indicating the performance of the game is stored in the first storage area. Thus, every time the predetermined period elapses, the newly acquired game performance information is stored in the game performance information storage means instead of the oldest acquired game performance information, and is displayed on the game performance information display means. You. Therefore, there is an effect that it can be more determined whether or not there has been an improper act based on the new game performance information.

In the gaming machine CX2,
The game performance information storage means,
A 0th storage area for storing, by overwriting, the game performance information acquired in real time during the predetermined period by the game performance acquisition means;
A first storage area for storing game performance information in a previous predetermined period;
A second storage area for storing game performance information in a predetermined period of two times before,
When the predetermined period has elapsed, the game performance information stored in the first storage area is shifted to the second storage area, and the game performance information stored in the zero storage area is shifted to the eleventh storage area. A gaming machine CX4 characterized by shifting.

  According to the gaming machine CX4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine CX2. That is, the game performance information storage means stores the 0th storage area for storing the game performance information acquired in real time in the middle of the predetermined period by the game performance acquisition means by overwriting, and the game performance information in the previous predetermined period. There is at least a first storage area for storing game performance information for a predetermined period two times before and a second storage area for storing game performance information. Then, when a predetermined period has elapsed, the game performance information stored in the first storage area is shifted to the second storage area, and the game performance information stored in the zero storage area is shifted to the first storage area. . Thus, every time the predetermined period elapses, the newly acquired game performance information is stored in the game performance information storage means instead of the oldest acquired game performance information, and is displayed on the game performance information display means. You. Therefore, there is an effect that it can be more determined whether or not there has been an improper act based on the new game performance information. The game performance information stored in the 0th storage area when the predetermined period has elapsed becomes the game performance information in the predetermined period. By shifting it to the first storage area as it is, there is an effect that the game performance information in the previous predetermined period can be easily stored in the first storage area.

In the gaming machine CX3 or CX4,
A gaming machine CX5 comprising shift processing means for executing a shift of game performance information between storage areas in the game performance information storage means using an LDIR instruction.

  According to the gaming machine CX5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machines CX3 or CX4. That is, the shift processing means shifts the game performance information between the respective storage areas in the game performance information storage means according to the LDIR command. Thus, there is an effect that the shift processing can be easily executed by one instruction.

  In any of the gaming machines CX1 to CX5, the gaming performance information displayed on the gaming performance information display means is provided when the gaming state is normal when the number of gaming media fired in the gaming area is 100. A gaming machine CX6, which is a base value that is the number of game media.

  According to the gaming machine CX6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines CX1 to CX5, the following effect is achieved. In other words, the game performance information display means displays, as the game performance information, a base value which is the number of game media paid out in a normal game state with respect to 100 game media launched into the game area. Is done. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to appropriately detect a fraudulent activity.

(Issue 4)
The following gaming machines a1 to a9, a1 to a7, c1 to c5, d1 to d3, o1, o2, k1, k2, and k1 to k3 are as follows. This was done to solve the problem.

  Conventionally, a game medium is fired to a game area provided with a plurality of winning ports by a launching means, and when the game medium wins one of the winning ports, a predetermined number of winning ports are determined for the winning ports. There is a gaming machine in which a game medium is paid out to a player (for example, JP-A-2003-340046).

  There are those who commit cheating on such games. However, the measures to suppress such misconduct were insufficient.

  The present technical concept has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can appropriately suppress improper conduct.

(Means and effects 4)
<Group A>
A gaming area with a plurality of winning openings,
Launching means for launching a game medium to the gaming area;
A prize detecting means provided for each prize port and detecting a prize of the game medium to a corresponding prize port;
When the prize detecting means detects that the game medium fired by the shooting means has won one of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games are played with respect to the winning hole of the game medium. A payout means for paying out a medium,
Game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in the gaming machine, game performance information display means capable of switching and displaying information other than the game performance information other than the game performance information,
The game performance information display means,
First display means for displaying the game performance information or the information outside the game performance information;
Second display means for displaying identification information indicating display content displayed on the first display means,
Means for hiding the display of the second display means when the information other than the gaming performance information is displayed on the first display means.

  According to the gaming machine 1, the game medium is fired by the shooting means to the game area provided with a plurality of winning ports. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detecting means for detecting a winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium fired by the firing means has won one of the winning openings, a predetermined number of game media are determined for the winning winning opening of the game medium. Is paid out by the paying means. Game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in such a gaming machine is displayed on the game performance information display means. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to preferably detect an illegal act from the game performance information displayed on the game performance information display means. By switching the display on the game performance information display means, information other than the game performance information other than the game performance information is also displayed. Here, game performance information or information other than game performance information is displayed on the first display means of the game performance information display means, and identification information indicating the display content displayed on the first display means is displayed on the second display means. Is done. When the information other than the game performance information is displayed on the first display means, the display on the second display means is not displayed. Thus, there is an effect that, by seeing that the display of the second display means is not displayed, it is possible to clearly grasp that the display content displayed on the first display means is information other than the game performance information.

In gaming machine A1,
A predetermined determination is performed in response to the establishment of the start condition, and a predetermined game value is provided to the player when the determination is a predetermined result,
Changing means for changing the probability of obtaining a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels,
When the probability of the predetermined result is changed among a plurality of levels by the change means, the game performance information display means is switched to display the level of the probability as the information other than the game performance information. And a display control means for displaying on the means.

  According to the gaming machine A2, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A1. That is, the gaming machine performs a predetermined determination when the start condition is satisfied, and when the determination is a predetermined result, gives a predetermined game value to the player. Is changed in a plurality of levels by the changing means. Then, when the probability that a predetermined result is obtained in the predetermined determination is changed by the change unit, the display of the game performance information display unit is switched by the display control unit, and the level of the probability is set as information outside the game performance information. Is displayed. When the probability level is displayed on the first display means, the display on the second display means is not displayed. Thereby, the effect that the display content displayed on the first display means can be clearly grasped to be the level of the probability of being changed by the change means by seeing that the display of the second display means is not displayed. There is.

In gaming machine A1 or A2,
Error detection means for detecting an error;
Error history storage means for storing a history of the type of error detected by the error detection means,
Error history display receiving means for receiving the display of the history of the error type,
When the display of the history is received by the error history display receiving means, the game performance information display means is switched, and the history of the error type is stored as information outside the game performance information based on the storage of the error history storage means. And a display control means for displaying the game performance information on the game performance information display means.

  According to the gaming machine A3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1 or A2. That is, when an error is detected by the error detection unit, the history of the error type is stored in the error history storage unit. When the display of the history of the error type is received by the error history display receiving means, the game performance information display means is switched by the display control means, and the history of the error type is stored in the error history storage means as information outside the game performance information. Is displayed on the game performance information display means based on the When the history of the error type is displayed on the first display means, the display on the second display means is not displayed. Thus, there is an effect that, by seeing that the display of the second display means is not displayed, it is possible to clearly grasp that the display content displayed on the first display means is the history of the error type.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A3,
The second display means includes a segment display composed of a plurality of segments, and displays information by lighting, blinking, or extinguishing the individual segments on the segment display,
The gaming machine a4, wherein the means for hiding the display of the second display means turns off all segments of the segment display.

  According to the gaming machine A4, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines A1 to A3. That is, the second display means includes a segment display composed of a plurality of segments, and information is displayed by turning on, blinking, or extinguishing individual segments on the segment display. When information other than game performance information is displayed on the first display means, all segments of the segment display of the second display means are turned off, and the display of the second display means is not displayed. Thus, there is an effect that the non-display can be performed with a simple control.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A4,
The first display means is configured to display a plurality of digits,
The gaming machine is
When the non-gaming performance information is displayed on the first display means, the level of the probability is displayed by using some of the plurality of digits, and the remaining digits are displayed by the gaming performance. A gaming machine (3) comprising means for performing display in a display mode not displaying information.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first display means is configured to be able to display a plurality of digits, and when displaying information other than the game performance on the first display means, the game performance is determined by using some of the plurality of digits. Outside information is displayed, and the remaining digits are displayed in a display mode that is not displayed in the display of the game performance information. This makes it possible to clearly determine whether the display content displayed on the first display means is game performance information or non-game performance information, based on the display contents of the remaining digits on the first display means. effective.

In gaming machine A5,
The gaming machine a6, further comprising means for displaying the gaming performance information using all of the plurality of digits when displaying the gaming performance information on the first display means.

  According to the gaming machine A6, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A5. That is, when the game performance information is displayed on the first display means, the game performance information is displayed using all of the plurality of digits. Thus, there is an effect that it is possible to more clearly determine whether the display content displayed on the first display means is game performance information or non-game performance information based on the display content of the remaining digits.

In gaming machine A5 or A6,
The gaming machine a7, wherein the means for performing the display of the remaining digits in a display mode not displayed in the display of the game performance information hides the display of the remaining digits.

  According to the gaming machine A7, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A5 or A6. That is, when the non-gaming performance information is displayed on the first display means, the non-gaming performance information is displayed using some of a plurality of digits, and the remaining digits are not displayed. . Thereby, the remaining digits are hidden, so that it is possible to more clearly determine whether the display content displayed on the first display means is the game performance information or the non-game performance information. is there.

In gaming machine A5 or A6,
The gaming machine a8, wherein the means for displaying the remaining digits in a display mode not displayed in the game performance information display fixedly displays the remaining digits in a predetermined display mode.

  According to the gaming machine A8, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A5 or A6. That is, when information other than gaming performance is displayed on the first display means, the probability level is displayed using some of the plurality of digits, and the remaining digits are fixedly displayed in a predetermined display mode. You. Thereby, the remaining digits are fixedly displayed in a predetermined display mode, so that it is more clear whether the display content displayed on the first display means is game performance information or non-game performance information. It has the effect of being able to judge.

In gaming machine A5 or A6,
The gaming machine a9, wherein the means for displaying the remaining digits in a display mode not displayed in the game performance information display blinks the remaining digits in a predetermined display mode.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A5 or A6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the non-gaming performance information is displayed on the first display means, the probability level is displayed using some of the plurality of digits, and the remaining digits are blinked in a predetermined display manner. You. Thus, the remaining digits are displayed in a blinking manner in a predetermined display mode, so that it is more clear whether the display content displayed on the first display means is game performance information or non-game performance information. It has the effect of being able to judge.

<Group A>
A gaming area with a plurality of winning openings,
Launching means for launching a game medium to the gaming area;
A prize detecting means provided for each prize port and detecting a prize of the game medium to a corresponding prize port;
When the prize detecting means detects that the game medium fired by the shooting means has won one of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games are played with respect to the winning hole of the game medium. A payout means for paying out a medium,
Game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in the gaming machine, game performance information display means capable of switching and displaying information other than the game performance information other than the game performance information,
The game performance information display means,
First display means for displaying the game performance information or the information outside the game performance information;
Second display means for displaying identification information indicating display content displayed on the first display means,
The first display means is configured to display a plurality of digits,
The gaming machine is
When the non-gaming performance information is displayed on the first display means, the level of the probability is displayed by using some of the plurality of digits, and the remaining digits are displayed by the gaming performance. A gaming machine (1) comprising means for performing display in a display mode not displaying information.

  According to the gaming machine I, the game medium is fired by the firing means to the game area provided with a plurality of winning ports. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detecting means for detecting a winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium fired by the firing means has won one of the winning openings, a predetermined number of game media are determined for the winning winning opening of the game medium. Is paid out by the paying means. Game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in such a gaming machine is displayed on the game performance information display means. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to preferably detect an illegal act from the game performance information displayed on the game performance information display means. By switching the display on the game performance information display means, information other than the game performance information other than the game performance information is also displayed. Here, game performance information or information other than game performance information is displayed on the first display means of the game performance information display means, and identification information indicating the display content displayed on the first display means is displayed on the second display means. Is done. The first display means is configured to be able to display a plurality of digits, and when the non-gaming performance information is displayed on the first display means, a part of the plurality of digits is used to display the non-gaming performance information. Is displayed, and the remaining digits are displayed in a display mode not displayed in the display of the game performance information. This makes it possible to clearly determine whether the display content displayed on the first display means is game performance information or non-game performance information based on the display contents of the remaining digits on the first display means. There is.

In gaming machine A1,
The gaming machine (2), further comprising: means for displaying the gaming performance information using all of the plurality of digits when displaying the gaming performance information on the first display means.

  According to the gaming machine A2, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A1. That is, when the game performance information is displayed on the first display means, the game performance information is displayed using all of the plurality of digits. Thus, there is an effect that it is possible to more clearly determine whether the display content displayed on the first display means is game performance information or non-game performance information based on the display content of the remaining digits.

In gaming machine I1 or I2,
A predetermined determination is performed in response to the establishment of the start condition, and a predetermined game value is provided to the player when the determination is a predetermined result,
Changing means for changing the probability of obtaining a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels,
When the probability of the predetermined result is changed among a plurality of levels by the change means, the game performance information display means is switched to display the level of the probability as the information other than the game performance information. A gaming machine a3, comprising: a display control means for causing the means to display.

  According to the gaming machine A3, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines A1 and A2. That is, the gaming machine performs a predetermined determination when the start condition is satisfied, and when the determination is a predetermined result, gives a predetermined game value to the player. Is changed in a plurality of levels by the changing means. Then, when the probability that a predetermined result is obtained in the predetermined determination is changed by the change unit, the display of the game performance information display unit is switched by the display control unit, and the level of the probability is set as information outside the game performance information. Is displayed. When the probability level is displayed on the first display means, the probability level is displayed using some of the plurality of digits, and the remaining digits are displayed in the display of the game performance information. It is performed in a display mode that is not performed. Thereby, it is possible to clearly determine whether the display content displayed on the first display means is game performance information or a probability level based on the display content of the remaining digits on the first display means. is there.

In any of the gaming machines a1 to a3,
Error detection means for detecting an error;
Error history storage means for storing a history of the type of error detected by the error detection means,
Error history display receiving means for receiving the display of the history of the error type,
When the display of the history is received by the error history display receiving means, the game performance information display means is switched, and the history of the error type is stored as information outside the game performance information based on the storage of the error history storage means. And a display control means for displaying the game performance information on the game performance information display means.

  According to the gaming machine A4, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines A1 to A3. That is, when an error is detected by the error detection unit, the history of the error type is stored in the error history storage unit. When the display of the history of the error type is received by the error history display receiving means, the game performance information display means is switched by the display control means, and the history of the error type is stored in the error history storage means as information outside the game performance information. Is displayed on the game performance information display means based on the When displaying the history of the error type on the first display means, the history of the error type is displayed using a part of the plurality of digits, and the display of the remaining digits is the display of the game performance information. Is performed in a display mode that is not displayed. Thereby, it is possible to clearly determine whether the display content displayed on the first display means is the game performance information or the error type history based on the display content of the remaining digits on the first display means. There is.

In any of gaming machines a1 to a4,
The gaming machine A5, wherein the means for performing the display of the remaining digits in a display mode not displayed in the display of the game performance information hides the display of the remaining digits.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the non-gaming performance information is displayed on the first display means, the non-gaming performance information is displayed using some of a plurality of digits, and the remaining digits are not displayed. . Thereby, the remaining digits are hidden, so that it is possible to more clearly determine whether the display content displayed on the first display means is the game performance information or the non-game performance information. is there.

In any of gaming machines a1 to a4,
The gaming machine A6, wherein the means for displaying the remaining digits in a display mode that is not displayed in the display of the gaming performance information displays the remaining digits in a predetermined display mode.

  According to the gaming machine A6, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines A1 to A4. That is, when information other than gaming performance is displayed on the first display means, the probability level is displayed using some of the plurality of digits, and the remaining digits are fixedly displayed in a predetermined display mode. You. Thereby, the remaining digits are fixedly displayed in a predetermined display mode, so that it is more clear whether the display content displayed on the first display means is game performance information or non-game performance information. It has the effect of being able to judge.

In any of the gaming machines a1 to a4,
The gaming machine A7, wherein the means for displaying the remaining digits in a display mode not displayed in the game performance information display blinks the remaining digits in a predetermined display mode.

  According to the gaming machine A7, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines A1 to A4. That is, when the non-gaming performance information is displayed on the first display means, the probability level is displayed using some of the plurality of digits, and the remaining digits are blinked in a predetermined display manner. You. Thus, the remaining digits are displayed in a blinking manner in a predetermined display mode, so that it is more clear whether the display content displayed on the first display means is game performance information or non-game performance information. It has the effect of being able to judge.

<Clusters>
A gaming area with a plurality of winning openings,
Launching means for launching a game medium to the gaming area;
A prize detecting means provided for each prize port and detecting a prize of the game medium to a corresponding prize port;
When the prize detecting means detects that the game medium fired by the shooting means has won one of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games are played with respect to the winning hole of the game medium. A payout means for paying out a medium,
Game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in the gaming machine, game performance information display means capable of switching and displaying information other than the game performance information other than the game performance information,
The game performance information display means,
First display means for displaying the game performance information or the information outside the game performance information;
Second display means for displaying identification information indicating display content displayed on the first display means,
When the information other than the game performance information is displayed on the first display means, the display on the second display means is performed in a display mode not displayed when the game performance information is displayed on the first display means. And c. Means.

  According to the gaming machine C1, the game medium is fired by the firing means to the game area provided with the plurality of winning ports. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detecting means for detecting a winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium fired by the firing means has won one of the winning openings, a predetermined number of game media are determined for the winning winning opening of the game medium. Is paid out by the paying means. Game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in such a gaming machine is displayed on the game performance information display means. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to preferably detect an illegal act from the game performance information displayed on the game performance information display means. By switching the display on the game performance information display means, information other than the game performance information other than the game performance information is also displayed. Here, game performance information or information other than game performance information is displayed on the first display means of the game performance information display means, and identification information indicating the display content displayed on the first display means is displayed on the second display means. Is done. When the information other than the game performance information is displayed on the first display means, the display on the second display means is performed in a display mode which is not displayed when the game performance information is displayed on the first display means. Thus, there is an effect that it is possible to clearly grasp whether the display content displayed on the first display means is the game performance information or the information other than the game performance information by looking at the display on the second display means.

In gaming machine c1,
A predetermined determination is performed in response to the establishment of the start condition, and a predetermined game value is provided to the player when the determination is a predetermined result,
Changing means for changing the probability of obtaining a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels,
When the probability of the predetermined result is changed among a plurality of levels by the change means, the game performance information display means is switched to display the level of the probability as the information other than the game performance information. A display control means for causing the means to display the information.

  According to the gaming machine C2, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine C1. That is, the gaming machine performs a predetermined determination when the start condition is satisfied, and when the determination is a predetermined result, gives a predetermined game value to the player. Is changed in a plurality of levels by the changing means. Then, when the probability that a predetermined result is obtained in the predetermined determination is changed by the change unit, the display of the game performance information display unit is switched by the display control unit, and the level of the probability is set as information outside the game performance information. Is displayed. Then, when the probability level is displayed on the first display means, the display on the second display means is performed in a display mode which is not displayed when the game performance information is displayed on the first display means. Thus, it is possible to clearly grasp whether the display content displayed on the first display means is the game performance information or the level of the probability of being changed by the change means, by looking at the display on the second display means. effective.

In gaming machine U1 or U2,
Error detection means for detecting an error;
Error history storage means for storing a history of the type of error detected by the error detection means,
Error history display receiving means for receiving the display of the history of the error type,
When the display of the history is received by the error history display receiving means, the game performance information display means is switched, and the history of the error type is stored as information outside the game performance information based on the storage of the error history storage means. A display control means for displaying the game performance information on the game performance information display means.

  According to the gaming machine U3, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine U1 or C2. That is, when an error is detected by the error detection unit, the history of the error type is stored in the error history storage unit. When the display of the history of the error type is received by the error history display receiving means, the game performance information display means is switched by the display control means, and the history of the error type is stored in the error history storage means as information outside the game performance information. Is displayed on the game performance information display means based on the When the history of the error type is displayed on the first display means, the display on the second display means is performed in a display mode which is not displayed when the game performance information is displayed on the first display means. Thus, there is an effect that the user can clearly grasp whether the display content displayed on the first display means is the game performance information or the history of the error type, by looking at the display on the second display means.

In any of gaming machines c1 to c3,
When the information other than the game performance information is displayed on the first display means, the display on the second display means is performed in a display mode not displayed when the game performance information is displayed on the first display means. The game machine c4, wherein the means fixedly displays the display of the second display means in a predetermined display mode.

  According to the gaming machine U4, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the non-game performance information is displayed on the first display means, the display of the second display means is fixedly displayed in a predetermined display mode. Thereby, there is an effect that it is possible to more clearly determine whether the display content displayed on the first display means is the game performance information or the non-game performance information.

In any of gaming machines c1 to c3,
When the information other than the game performance information is displayed on the first display means, the display on the second display means is performed in a display mode not displayed when the game performance information is displayed on the first display means. The means (5) blinks the display of the second display means in a predetermined display manner.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the following effects are provided. That is, when the non-gaming performance information is displayed on the first display means, the display of the second display means blinks in a predetermined display mode. Thereby, there is an effect that it is possible to more clearly determine whether the display content displayed on the first display means is the game performance information or the non-game performance information.

<D group>
A gaming area with a plurality of winning openings,
Launching means for launching a game medium to the gaming area;
A prize detecting means provided for each prize port and detecting a prize of the game medium to a corresponding prize port;
When the prize detecting means detects that the game medium fired by the shooting means has won one of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games are played with respect to the winning hole of the game medium. A payout means for paying out a medium,
Game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in the gaming machine;
Error detection means for detecting an error;
Error history storage means for storing a history of the type of error detected by the error detection means,
Error history display accepting means for accepting the display of the history of the error type;
When the display of the history is received by the error history display receiving means, the game performance information display means is switched, and the history of the error type is displayed based on the storage of the error history storage means. And a display control means for displaying the information on the game machine.

  According to the gaming machine D1, the game medium is fired by the shooting means to the game area provided with a plurality of winning ports. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detecting means for detecting a winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium fired by the firing means has won one of the winning openings, a predetermined number of game media are determined for the winning winning opening of the game medium. Is paid out by the paying means. Game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in such a gaming machine is displayed on the game performance information display means. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to preferably detect an illegal act from the game performance information displayed on the game performance information display means. Further, when an error is detected by the error detecting means, the history of the error type is stored in the error history storage means. When the display of the history of the error type is received by the error history display receiving means, the game performance information display means is switched by the display control means, and the history of the error type is displayed on the basis of the storage of the error history storage means. It is displayed on the display means. As a result, the history of the error type can be displayed by one game performance information display means, and an effect of detecting an improper act from the history of the error type can be obtained.

In gaming machine d1,
The gaming machine (2), wherein the display control means keeps displaying the game performance information on the game performance information display means when an error is detected by the error detection means.

  According to the gaming machine D2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D1. That is, when an error is detected by the error detection unit, the game performance information is continuously displayed on the game performance information display unit by the display control unit. Therefore, even if a fraudulent person intentionally generates an error, it is possible to reliably detect a fraudulent activity from the game performance information continuously displayed on the game performance information display means.

In gaming machine D1 or D2,
The display control means switches the game performance information display means and displays the game performance information on the game performance information display means when the reception of the history display by the error history display reception means is completed. 3. A gaming machine d.

  According to the gaming machine D3, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines D1 and D2. That is, when the reception of the display of the history of the error type by the error history display receiving means is completed, the game performance information display means is switched by the display control means, and the game performance information is displayed again on the game performance information display means. You. With this, even if the history of the error type is once displayed on the game performance information display means, the game performance information can be displayed again, so that it is possible to reliably detect an illegal act from the game performance information. There is an effect that can be.

<E group>
A gaming area with a plurality of winning openings,
Launching means for launching a game medium to the gaming area;
A prize detecting means provided for each prize port and detecting a prize of the game medium to a corresponding prize port;
When the prize detecting means detects that the game medium fired by the shooting means has won one of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games are played with respect to the winning hole of the game medium. Dispensing means for dispensing the medium,
A gaming machine that performs a predetermined determination when the start condition is satisfied, and provides a predetermined game value to the player when the determination is a predetermined result,
Storage means for storing information on a plurality of game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in the gaming machine,
Output means for outputting information on game performance information based on the information stored in the storage means,
Changing means for changing the probability of obtaining a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels,
When the probability is changed by the change unit, the information related to the game performance information affected by the probability is deleted from the information stored in the storage unit, and the information related to the game performance information not affected by the probability is deleted. A gaming machine (1) comprising: a storage control means for holding information.

  According to the gaming machine 1, the game medium is fired by the firing means to the game area provided with a plurality of winning ports. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detecting means for detecting a winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium fired by the firing means has won one of the winning openings, a predetermined number of game media are determined for the winning winning opening of the game medium. Is paid out by the paying means. Information relating to a plurality of game performance information indicating the performance of a game executed in such a gaming machine is stored in the storage means and output by the output means. Thereby, there is an effect that it is possible to preferably detect an illegal act from the information on the game performance information output from the output means. In addition, the gaming machine performs a predetermined determination when a start condition is satisfied, and when the determination is a predetermined result, gives a predetermined game value to the player. Is changed among a plurality of levels by the changing means. When the probability that a predetermined result is obtained in the predetermined determination is changed by the changing unit, the information related to the game performance information that is affected by the probability is erased from the information stored in the storage unit by the storage control unit. The information on the game performance information not affected by the probability is retained. Therefore, as for the information on the game performance information affected by the probability, the information on the game performance information is stored in the storage means at the newly set probability, so that the game performance information with high accuracy can be output. On the other hand, the information on the game performance information which is not affected by the probability is stored in the storage means. Therefore, even if the fraudster changes the probability in order to conceal the erasure of the fraud, the information is retained in the storage means. There is an effect that a fraudulent activity can be reliably detected based on the performed game performance information.

In gaming machine O1,
The gaming machine (2), wherein information on gaming performance information affected by the probability is stored in a predetermined area of the storage means.

  According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine O1, the information on the game performance information affected by the probability is stored in a predetermined area of the storage means, so that the probability is changed by the changing means. In such a case, by deleting the predetermined areas of the storage means all together, there is an effect that information on the game performance information which is easily affected by the probability can be easily deleted.

<Mosquito group>
A gaming area with a plurality of winning openings,
Launching means for launching a game medium to the gaming area;
A prize detecting means provided for each prize port and detecting a prize of the game medium to a corresponding prize port;
When the prize detecting means detects that the game medium fired by the shooting means has won one of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games are played with respect to the winning hole of the game medium. Dispensing means for dispensing the medium,
A gaming machine that performs a predetermined determination when the start condition is satisfied, and provides a predetermined game value to the player when the determination is a predetermined result,
Storage means for storing information on a plurality of game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in the gaming machine,
Output means for outputting information on game performance information based on the information stored in the storage means,
When the determination is not a predetermined result, a specific determination unit that determines whether the determination is a specific result,
When the determination is determined to be the specific result by the specific determination unit, the predetermined game value is not given, and an opening unit that opens the normally closed one winning port for a predetermined time,
Changing means for changing the probability of the specific result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels,
A gaming machine 1 comprising: storage control means for deleting information stored in the storage means when the probability is changed by the change means.

  According to the gaming machine 1, the game medium is fired by the firing means to a game area provided with a plurality of winning ports. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detecting means for detecting a winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium fired by the firing means has won one of the winning openings, a predetermined number of game media are determined for the winning winning opening of the game medium. Is paid out by the paying means. Information relating to a plurality of game performance information indicating the performance of a game executed in such a gaming machine is stored in the storage means and output by the output means. Thereby, there is an effect that it is possible to preferably detect an illegal act from the information on the game performance information output from the output means. In addition, the gaming machine performs a predetermined determination when the start condition is satisfied, and when the determination is a predetermined result, gives a predetermined game value to the player. If the result is not the predetermined result, the specific determination unit determines whether the determination is a specific result. When the specific determination means determines that the determination is a specific result, the predetermined game value is not given, and one closed winning port is normally opened by the opening means for a predetermined time. If a game medium wins in the opened winning opening, the payout of the game medium by the payout means is performed. Further, the probability that a specific result is obtained in the predetermined determination is changed among a plurality of levels by the changing unit. Then, when the probability is changed by the change unit, the information stored in the storage unit is deleted by the storage control unit. Therefore, the information relating to the game performance information is stored in the storage means at the newly set probability, so that there is an effect that accurate game performance information can be output.

In gaming machine 1
The gaming machine power 2, wherein the gaming performance information is a base value.

  According to the gaming machine 2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine 1, the gaming performance information is a base value. Since it is stored in the storage means, there is an effect that a precise base value can be output.

<K group>
A gaming area with a plurality of winning openings,
Launching means for launching a game medium to the gaming area;
A prize detecting means provided for each prize port and detecting a prize of the game medium to a corresponding prize port;
When the prize detecting means detects that the game medium fired by the shooting means has won one of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games are played with respect to the winning hole of the game medium. Dispensing means for dispensing the medium,
A gaming machine that performs a predetermined determination when the start condition is satisfied, and provides a predetermined game value to the player when the determination is a predetermined result,
Changing means for changing the probability of obtaining a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels,
Display means for displaying the level of the probability,
The gaming machine key 1 is characterized in that the display of the probability level on the display means is performed only when the power is turned on.

  According to the gaming machine key 1, the game medium is fired by the firing means to the game area provided with a plurality of winning ports. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detecting means for detecting a winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium fired by the firing means has won one of the winning openings, a predetermined number of game media are determined for the winning winning opening of the game medium. Is paid out by the paying means. In addition, the gaming machine performs a predetermined determination when a start condition is satisfied, and when the determination is a predetermined result, gives a predetermined game value to the player. Is changed among a plurality of levels by the changing means. The level of the probability is displayed on the display means. The display of the probability level on the display means is performed only when the power is turned on. As a result, the probability level set for the gaming machine is not displayed unless the power is turned on, so that it is difficult for the player to know the probability level set for the gaming machine, and it is preferable to suppress fraudulent acts. There is an effect that can be.

In gaming machine key 1,
The gaming machine key 2, wherein the display means is provided on a back side of the gaming machine.

  According to the gaming machine key 2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine key 1, the display means is provided on the back side of the gaming machine, so that the door of the gaming machine is opened and the back side of the gaming machine is not exposed. , The level of the probability displayed on the display means cannot be confirmed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is more difficult for the player to know the level of the probability set in the gaming machine.

In game machine key 2,
A door opening detecting means for detecting that the locked door of the gaming machine is unlocked and opened,
The display of the level of the probability on the display means is performed when the power is turned on, at least on condition that the opening of the door is detected by the door opening detecting means. .

  According to the gaming machine key 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine key 2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is detected by the door opening detecting means that the locked game machine door is unlocked and opened. The display of the probability level on the display means is performed on condition that at least the door opening is detected by the door opening detecting means when the power is turned on. Since the unlocking of the door is usually performed by a key managed by the hall, there is an effect that it is more difficult for the player to know the probability level set in the gaming machine.

(Issue 5)
The following gaming machines C1 to C3, C1 to C6, C1 to C5, C1, C2, C1, C2, C1, C2, C1, C2, S1, S2, T1, T2, T1, T2, T1 to T3, T1 to T3, T1, T2 are made to solve the following problems.

  Conventionally, a game medium is fired to a game area provided with a plurality of winning ports by a launching means, and when the game medium wins one of the winning ports, a predetermined number of winning ports are determined for the winning ports. There is a gaming machine in which a game medium is paid out to a player (for example, JP-A-2003-340046).

  There is a demand to change the winning probability for such a game. However, the measures for changing the probability of such a hit have been insufficient.

  The present technical idea has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the probability.

(Means and effects 5)
<K group>
A gaming area with a plurality of winning openings,
Launching means for launching a game medium to the gaming area;
A prize detecting means provided for each prize port and detecting a prize of the game medium to a corresponding prize port;
When the prize detecting means detects that the game medium fired by the shooting means has won one of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games are played with respect to the winning hole of the game medium. Dispensing means for dispensing the medium,
A gaming machine that performs a predetermined determination when the start condition is satisfied, and provides a predetermined game value to the player when the determination is a predetermined result,
Changing means for changing the probability of obtaining a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels,
Storage means for storing information used for controlling the game, and capable of holding the information even when the power is turned off;
Information erasure instructing means for instructing erasure of information stored in the storage means,
Permission means for permitting a change or confirmation of the level of the probability by being in a predetermined state,
A first state enabling the change unit to change the probability level when the power is turned on in a state where the permission unit is set to a predetermined state and the information erasure instruction unit is instructed to erase the information; First mode starting means for starting in a mode,
When the permission unit is set to a predetermined state and the power is turned on in a state where the information erasure instruction unit does not instruct the erasure of the information, a start-up in a second mode enabling the confirmation of the probability level is performed. When the power is turned on in a state where the two-mode start-up means and the permission means are not in a predetermined state and the information erasure instruction means has given an instruction to erase the information, the information stored in the storage means is deleted. Third mode starting means for starting in a third mode to be erased;
When the power is turned on in a state where the permission means is not in a predetermined state and the information erasure instructing means does not give an instruction to erase the information, a fourth mode is started in a fourth mode for performing a normal startup. A gaming machine 1 comprising upper means.

  According to the gaming machine 1, the game medium is fired by the shooting means to the game area provided with the plurality of winning ports. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detecting means for detecting a winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium fired by the firing means has won one of the winning openings, a predetermined number of game media are determined for the winning winning opening of the game medium. Is paid out by the paying means. In addition, the gaming machine performs a predetermined determination when a start condition is satisfied, and when the determination is a predetermined result, gives a predetermined game value to the player. Is changed among a plurality of levels by the changing means. Further, information used for controlling the game is stored in the storage means, and the information can be retained even when the power is turned off. There are provided information erasure instructing means for instructing the erasure of the information stored in the storage means, and permission means for permitting the change of the probability level or the probability by being set in a predetermined state. Then, when the power is turned on in a state where the permission means is set in a predetermined state and the information erasing instruction means instructs the information erasure, the change of the probability level by the changing means is performed by the first mode starting means. It is started up in a first mode that allows it. Further, when the permission unit is set to a predetermined state and the power is turned on in a state where there is no information erasure instruction by the information erasure instruction unit, the second mode start-up unit enables confirmation of the probability level. It can be launched in two modes. Further, when the power is turned on in a state where the permission means is not in the predetermined state and the information erasing instruction means has given an instruction to erase the information, the information stored in the storage means is read by the third mode starting means. It is started in the third mode for erasing. Further, when the power is turned on in a state where the permission means is not in the predetermined state and the information erasure instruction means does not give an instruction for erasing information, the fourth mode start-up means performs a normal start-up. Is launched. Thus, by combining the operations of the information erasure instructing means and the permission means, there is an effect that the start-up mode including the mode in which the probability level can be changed or confirmed can be set easily. Therefore, there is an effect that a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the probability can be provided.

In gaming machine k1,
A door opening detecting means for detecting that the locked door of the gaming machine is unlocked and opened,
The first mode start-up means detects that the door has been opened by the door open detection means, sets the permission means in a predetermined state, and instructs the information erasure instruction means to erase the information. When the power is turned on in a state, the power supply is started up in a first mode that enables the change of the probability level by the change unit,
The second mode start-up means detects that the door has been opened by the door open detection means, sets the permission means in a predetermined state, and does not receive an instruction to delete the information by the information deletion instruction means. A gaming machine (2) characterized in that, when the power is turned on in a state, the game machine is started up in a second mode that allows the probability level to be confirmed.

(Effects)
According to the gaming machine 2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 1. That is, when the door is detected by the door opening detecting means to open the door, the permission means is set in a predetermined state, and the power is turned on in a state where the information erasing instruction means instructs the information erasure, It is started in the first mode in which the probability level can be changed by the changing means by the one-mode starting means. Further, when the door opening detecting means detects that the door is opened, the permission means is set in a predetermined state, and the power is turned on in a state where the information erasing instruction means is not instructed to erase the information, the second operation is performed. The mode is started in the second mode in which the probability level can be confirmed by the mode starting means. Accordingly, since the change or confirmation of the probability level is not performed unless the door is opened, there is an effect that it is difficult for the player to change or confirm the probability level.

In the gaming machine K1 or K2,
The gaming machine (3), wherein the permission means is constituted by a key, and the predetermined state is a state where the permission means is rotated to a predetermined position by the key.

  According to the gaming machine ku3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ku1 or ku2. That is, the permission means is constituted by a key, and the predetermined state is a state where the permission means is rotated to a predetermined position by the key. Therefore, when starting up in the first mode or starting up in the second mode, it is necessary to rotate the permission means to a predetermined position by the key. Since the key is managed by the hall, there is an effect that it is difficult for the player to change or confirm the probability level.

<Group>
A gaming area with a plurality of winning openings,
Launching means for launching a game medium to the gaming area;
A prize detecting means provided for each prize port and detecting a prize of the game medium to a corresponding prize port;
When the prize detecting means detects that the game medium fired by the shooting means has won one of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games are played with respect to the winning hole of the game medium. Dispensing means for dispensing the medium,
A gaming machine that performs a predetermined determination when the start condition is satisfied, and provides a predetermined game value to the player when the determination is a predetermined result,
Changing means for changing the probability of obtaining a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels,
Confirming means for confirming whether or not the probability level is normal each time a predetermined timing arrives,
A game machine device 1 comprising: a process executing unit that executes a predetermined process when the probability level is not normal by the checking unit.

  According to the gaming machine 1, the game medium is fired by the shooting means to the game area provided with a plurality of winning ports. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detecting means for detecting a winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium fired by the firing means has won one of the winning openings, a predetermined number of game media are determined for the winning winning opening of the game medium. Is paid out by the paying means. In addition, the gaming machine performs a predetermined determination when a start condition is satisfied, and when the determination is a predetermined result, gives a predetermined game value to the player. Is changed among a plurality of levels by the changing means. In addition, whether or not the probability level is normal is confirmed each time a predetermined timing comes by the confirmation means, and if it is confirmed that the probability level is not normal, predetermined processing is executed by the processing execution means Is done. Thus, if the probability level is destroyed for some reason during the game, the probability level can be detected at an early stage, and some action can be taken. Therefore, there is an effect that a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the probability can be provided.

In gaming machine 1
The gaming machine ke 2, wherein the predetermined timing is a lapse of a predetermined time.

  According to the gaming machine 2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 1. That is, whether or not the probability level is normal is confirmed by the confirmation means every time a predetermined time elapses. Therefore, when the probability level is destroyed for some reason during the game, there is an effect that the probability level can be reliably detected.

In gaming machine 1
The gaming machine 3 characterized in that the predetermined timing is a start of dynamic display of identification information executed when the start condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine 3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 1. That is, whether or not the probability level is normal is confirmed by the confirmation means every time the dynamic display of the identification information is started. Therefore, if the probability level is destroyed for some reason during the game, there is an effect that the dynamic display of the identification information can be reliably detected before the start of the dynamic display.

In any of the gaming machines 1 to 3,
The gaming machine 4 characterized in that the predetermined process includes a process for notifying that the probability level is abnormal.

  According to the gaming machine 4, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines 1 to 3. That is, when it is confirmed that the probability level is not normal, a notification that the probability level is abnormal is performed, so that the player or the hall can immediately grasp the state.

In any of the gaming machines 1 to 4,
The gaming machine device 5, wherein the predetermined process includes a process for stopping a game.

  According to the gaming machine 5, the following effects are obtained in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines 1 to 4. That is, the game is stopped when it is confirmed that the probability level is not normal, so that there is an effect that the player can be prevented from being disadvantaged by playing at an abnormal probability level.

In any of the gaming machines 1 to 5,
The gaming machine 6 characterized in that the predetermined process includes a process for causing the change means to change a probability level.

  According to the gaming machine 6, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines 1 to 5. That is, when it is confirmed that the probability level is not normal, the changing means can change the probability level, so that it is possible to return to the game at the normal probability level.

<Group>
A gaming area with a plurality of winning openings,
Launching means for launching a game medium to the gaming area;
A prize detecting means provided for each prize port and detecting a prize of the game medium to a corresponding prize port;
When the prize detecting means detects that the game medium fired by the shooting means has won one of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games are played with respect to the winning hole of the game medium. Dispensing means for dispensing the medium,
A gaming machine that performs a predetermined determination when the start condition is satisfied, and provides a predetermined game value to the player when the determination is a predetermined result,
Changing means for changing the probability of obtaining a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels,
Checking means for checking whether the level of the probability is normal or not in a start-up process executed when the power is turned on,
A game machine co-1 comprising: a process execution unit that executes a predetermined process when the probability level is not normal by the checking unit.

  According to the gaming machine 1, the game medium is fired by the firing means to the game area provided with a plurality of winning ports. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detecting means for detecting a winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium fired by the firing means has won one of the winning openings, a predetermined number of game media are determined for the winning winning opening of the game medium. Is paid out by the paying means. In addition, the gaming machine performs a predetermined determination when a start condition is satisfied, and when the determination is a predetermined result, gives a predetermined game value to the player. Is changed among a plurality of levels by the changing means. Then, in the start-up process executed when the power is turned on, the confirmation means confirms whether or not the probability level is normal. Is executed by the processing execution means. As a result, if the probability level is destroyed when the power is turned on, the probability level can be reliably detected, and some countermeasure can be taken. Therefore, there is an effect that a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the probability can be provided.

In gaming machine co1,
The gaming machine co2, wherein the predetermined process includes a process for notifying that the probability level is abnormal.

  According to the gaming machine U2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine U1. That is, when it is confirmed that the probability level is not normal, a notification that the probability level is abnormal is performed, so that the player or the hall can immediately grasp the state.

In gaming machine co1 or co2,
The game machine co3, wherein the predetermined process includes a process of performing an infinite loop.

  According to the gaming machine U3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine U1 or U2, the following effects are achieved. That is, when it is confirmed that the probability level is not normal, an infinite loop is performed, so that there is an effect that the start-up process is terminated and the game is not performed with the abnormal probability level.

In any of the gaming machines Ko 1 to Ko 3,
The gaming machine device (4), wherein the predetermined process includes a process for causing the change means to change a probability level.

  According to the gaming machine U4, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines U1 to U3. That is, when it is confirmed that the probability level is not normal, the changing means can change the probability level, so that there is an effect that the start-up process can be completed at the normal probability level.

In any of the gaming machines Ko 1 to Ko 3,
The gaming machine co4, wherein the predetermined process includes a process for setting the probability level to one of normal levels.

  According to the gaming machine U5, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines U1 to U3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when it is confirmed that the probability level is not normal, the probability level is set to one of the normal levels, so that the startup process can be completed at the normal probability level. is there.

<Sa group>
A gaming area with a plurality of winning openings,
Launching means for launching a game medium to the gaming area;
A prize detecting means provided for each prize port and detecting a prize of the game medium to a corresponding prize port;
When the prize detecting means detects that the game medium fired by the shooting means has won one of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games are played with respect to the winning hole of the game medium. Dispensing means for dispensing the medium,
A gaming machine that performs a predetermined determination when the start condition is satisfied, and provides a predetermined game value to the player when the determination is a predetermined result,
Change processing execution means for executing processing of changing the probability of obtaining a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels,
Start-up means for executing processing by the change processing execution means, on condition that predetermined conditions are satisfied when the power is turned on,
The start-up means may be configured such that, if the processing is being executed by the change processing execution means when the power was last turned off, the predetermined condition is not satisfied when the power is turned on. A gaming machine 1 that executes processing by a change processing executing means.

  According to the gaming machine 1, a game medium is fired by the firing means to a game area provided with a plurality of winning ports. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detecting means for detecting a winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium fired by the firing means has won one of the winning openings, a predetermined number of game media are determined for the winning winning opening of the game medium. Is paid out by the paying means. In addition, the gaming machine performs a predetermined determination when a start condition is satisfied, and when the determination is a predetermined result, gives a predetermined game value to the player. Is changed in a plurality of levels by the process executed by the change process executing means. The process by the change process executing means is executed by the start-up means on condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on. In addition, if the processing by the change processing execution means is being executed when the power was last turned off, even if the predetermined condition is not satisfied when the power is turned on, the change processing execution means is executed by the start-up means. The processing by the means is executed. In this way, if the process is being executed by the change process executing means when the power was last turned off, the probability level can always be changed when the power is subsequently turned on, so that the probability level can be changed with confidence. Changes can be made. Therefore, there is an effect that a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the probability can be provided.

In the gaming machine 1
The start-up means may be configured such that, if the processing is being executed by the change processing execution means when the power is last turned off, the predetermined condition is not satisfied when the power is turned on. A gaming machine 2 wherein the processing by the change processing executing means is executed from the beginning.

  According to the gaming machine 2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 1. In other words, when the processing is being executed by the change processing executing means when the power was last turned off, even if the predetermined condition is not satisfied when the power is turned on, the change processing is executed by the start-up means. The processing by the means is executed from the beginning. As a result, the probability level can be reset from the beginning, so that there is an effect that the probability level can be changed with ease.

<Shi group>
A gaming area with a plurality of winning openings,
Launching means for launching a game medium to the gaming area;
A prize detecting means provided for each prize port and detecting a prize of the game medium to a corresponding prize port;
When the prize detecting means detects that the game medium fired by the shooting means has won one of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games are played with respect to the winning hole of the game medium. Dispensing means for dispensing the medium,
A gaming machine that performs a predetermined determination when the start condition is satisfied, and provides a predetermined game value to the player when the determination is a predetermined result,
Change processing execution means for executing processing of changing the probability of obtaining a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels,
Confirmation processing execution means for executing processing capable of confirming the set probability level;
When the predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on, the processing by the change processing execution unit is executed, and when the power is turned on, a second predetermined condition different from the predetermined condition is performed. A start-up unit that executes a process by the confirmation process execution unit on condition that the condition is satisfied,
When the power supply is turned on last time, the start-up means is configured to execute the change processing execution means when the power supply is turned on, and the second predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machine 1 also executes the processing by the change processing executing means.

  According to the gaming machine 1, the game medium is fired by the shooting means to the game area provided with a plurality of winning ports. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detecting means for detecting a winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium fired by the firing means has won one of the winning openings, a predetermined number of game media are determined for the winning winning opening of the game medium. Is paid out by the paying means. In addition, the gaming machine performs a predetermined determination when a start condition is satisfied, and when the determination is a predetermined result, gives a predetermined game value to the player. Is changed in a plurality of levels by the process executed by the change process executing means. Further, the set probability level can be confirmed by a process executed by the confirmation process executing means. Here, the processing by the change processing executing means is performed on condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on, and the processing by the confirmation processing executing means is performed when the power is turned on. It is executed by the start-up means on condition that a second predetermined condition different from the condition is satisfied. If the process is being executed by the change process executing means when the power was last turned off, even if the second predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on, the process is stopped. The processing by the change processing executing means is executed by the raising means. Thus, even if the power is turned on after the second predetermined condition is satisfied, if the process is being executed by the change process executing means when the power was last turned off, the probability level is always changed. , The probability level can be changed with confidence. Therefore, there is an effect that a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the probability can be provided.

In gaming machine 1,
The start-up unit is configured to execute the change process execution unit when the power is turned off last time, and when the power is turned on, the second predetermined condition is satisfied. , The processing by the change processing executing means is executed from the beginning.

  According to the gaming machine system 2, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine system 1. In other words, if the processing by the change processing execution means is being executed when the power was last turned off, even if the second predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on, the process is stopped. The processing by the change processing executing means is executed from the beginning by the raising means. As a result, the probability level can be reset from the beginning, so that there is an effect that the probability level can be changed with ease.

<Group>
A gaming area with a plurality of winning openings,
Launching means for launching a game medium to the gaming area;
A prize detecting means provided for each prize port and detecting a prize of the game medium to a corresponding prize port;
When the prize detecting means detects that the game medium fired by the shooting means has won one of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games are played with respect to the winning hole of the game medium. Dispensing means for dispensing the medium,
A gaming machine that performs a predetermined determination when the start condition is satisfied, and provides a predetermined game value to the player when the determination is a predetermined result,
Change processing execution means for executing processing of changing the probability of obtaining a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels,
First storage means for storing the original probability level when the probability level is changed by the processing by the change processing execution means;
2. A gaming machine 1 comprising: a second storage unit for storing a probability level changed by a process performed by the change process execution unit.

  According to the gaming machine 1, a game medium is fired by the shooting means to a game area provided with a plurality of winning ports. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detecting means for detecting a winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium fired by the firing means has won one of the winning openings, a predetermined number of game media are determined for the winning winning opening of the game medium. Is paid out by the paying means. In addition, the gaming machine performs a predetermined determination when a start condition is satisfied, and when the determination is a predetermined result, gives a predetermined game value to the player. Is changed in a plurality of levels by the process executed by the change process executing means. When the probability level is changed by the processing by the change processing execution means, the original probability level is stored in the first storage means, and the probability level changed by the processing by the change processing execution means is stored in the second storage means. You. With this, the original probability level is stored in the first storage means, and the change of the probability level is performed using the second storage means. The probability level can be changed again from the original probability level stored in the storage means. Therefore, since the probability level can be changed with a sense of security, there is an effect that a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the probability can be provided.

In gaming machine 1,
The gaming machine device (2), wherein the first storage means keeps storing the original probability level even when power is cut off.

  According to the gaming machine 2, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 1. That is, the original probability level stored in the first storage means is maintained even while the power is turned off. Therefore, even if the power is cut off during the execution of the process by the change processing execution means, the power level is not changed. After the input, the probability level can be changed again from the original probability level stored in the first storage means. Therefore, since the probability level can be changed with a sense of security, there is an effect that a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the probability can be provided.

<Group>
A gaming area with a plurality of winning openings,
Launching means for launching a game medium to the gaming area;
A prize detecting means provided for each prize port and detecting a prize of the game medium to a corresponding prize port;
When the prize detecting means detects that the game medium fired by the shooting means has won one of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games are played with respect to the winning hole of the game medium. Dispensing means for dispensing the medium,
A gaming machine that performs a predetermined determination when the start condition is satisfied, and provides a predetermined game value to the player when the determination is a predetermined result,
Change processing execution means for executing processing of changing the probability of obtaining a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels,
Start-up means for executing processing by the change processing execution means, on condition that predetermined conditions are satisfied when the power is turned on,
The start-up means may include a second predetermined condition, which is different from the predetermined condition when the power is turned on, when the process is being executed by the change processing execution means when the power was last turned off. Even if is established, the processing by the change processing execution means is executed,
The predetermined condition includes that the first operation means is in a first state,
The second predetermined condition includes that the first operation means is in a second state different from the first state,
The change processing execution means includes a detection means for detecting that the first operation means has changed from the first state to the second state, and the detection means detects the first operation of the first operation means. The gaming machine system 1, wherein when the change from the state to the second state is detected, the changed probability level is determined.

  According to the gaming machine set 1, the game medium is fired by the firing means to the game area provided with a plurality of winning ports. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detecting means for detecting a winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium fired by the firing means has won one of the winning openings, a predetermined number of game media are determined for the winning winning opening of the game medium. Is paid out by the paying means. In addition, the gaming machine performs a predetermined determination when a start condition is satisfied, and when the determination is a predetermined result, gives a predetermined game value to the player. Is changed in a plurality of levels by the process executed by the change process executing means. The process by the change process executing means is executed by the start-up means on condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on. Also, if the processing by the change processing execution means is being executed when the power was last turned off, the second predetermined condition different from the predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on. However, the start-up means executes the processing by the change processing executing means. Thus, if the process is being executed by the change process executing means when the power was last turned off, the probability level is set at the subsequent power-on even if the second predetermined condition is satisfied. Can be changed, so that the probability level can be changed with confidence. Therefore, there is an effect that a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the probability can be provided. The predetermined condition includes that the first operating means is in the first state, and the second predetermined condition includes that the first operating means is in the second state different from the first state. In. The change processing executing means has a detecting means for detecting that the first operating means has changed from the first state to the second state, and the detecting means detects the first state of the first operating means. When a change from to the second state is detected, the changed probability level is determined. Here, even if the change processing execution means is executed when the second predetermined condition is satisfied, the change processing execution means determines that the first operation means is in the second state and determines the probability of the change. Instead of determining the level, the detection means determines the probability level changed when the change of the first operation means from the first state to the second state is detected. Therefore, even if the change processing execution means is executed when the second predetermined condition is satisfied, there is an effect that the probability level can be surely changed.

In gaming machine center 1,
The gaming machine 2 wherein the first operation means is a key.

  According to the gaming machine set 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine set 1, the first operation means is a key, so that the probability level can be easily changed only by shifting the key from the first state to the second state. Has the effect of being able to determine

<Soviet group>
A gaming area with a plurality of winning openings,
Launching means for launching a game medium to the gaming area;
A prize detecting means provided for each prize port and detecting a prize of the game medium to a corresponding prize port;
When the prize detecting means detects that the game medium fired by the shooting means has won one of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games are played with respect to the winning hole of the game medium. Dispensing means for dispensing the medium,
A gaming machine that performs a predetermined determination when the start condition is satisfied, and provides a predetermined game value to the player when the determination is a predetermined result,
Change processing execution means for executing processing of changing the probability of obtaining a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels,
Start-up means for executing processing by the change processing execution means, on condition that predetermined conditions are satisfied when the power is turned on,
The start-up means, when the processing by the change processing execution means is being executed when the power was last turned off, when a second predetermined condition different from the predetermined condition is turned on when the power is turned on. A gaming machine so1 wherein an infinite loop state is established when the condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine S1, the game medium is fired by the firing means to the game area provided with a plurality of winning ports. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detecting means for detecting a winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium fired by the firing means has won one of the winning openings, a predetermined number of game media are determined for the winning winning opening of the game medium. Is paid out by the paying means. In addition, the gaming machine performs a predetermined determination when a start condition is satisfied, and when the determination is a predetermined result, gives a predetermined game value to the player. Is changed in a plurality of levels by the process executed by the change process executing means. The process by the change process executing means is executed by the start-up means on condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on. Further, in the case where the processing by the change processing execution means is being executed when the power was last turned off, and when the second predetermined condition different from the predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on, Is set to an infinite loop state. This allows the probability level to be changed by causing the predetermined condition to be satisfied and turning on the power, and executing the process by the change process executing means in the startup process, so that the probability level can be changed. You can change the level. Therefore, there is an effect that a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the probability can be provided.

In the gaming machine SO1,
The gaming machine So2, comprising: a notifying unit that issues a notification for instructing to turn on the power by establishing the predetermined condition when the infinite loop state is set.

  According to the gaming machine S02, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine S01. That is, when the initiating loop is set by the start-up means, a notification for giving an instruction to establish a predetermined condition and turn on the power is performed by the notification means. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to easily understand that it is sufficient to turn on the power while satisfying the predetermined condition.

<Ta group>
A gaming area with a plurality of winning openings,
Launching means for launching a game medium to the gaming area;
A prize detecting means provided for each prize port and detecting a prize of the game medium to a corresponding prize port;
When the prize detecting means detects that the game medium fired by the shooting means has won one of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games are played with respect to the winning hole of the game medium. Dispensing means for dispensing the medium,
A gaming machine that performs a predetermined determination when the start condition is satisfied, and provides a predetermined game value to the player when the determination is a predetermined result,
Change processing execution means for executing processing of changing the probability of obtaining a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels,
Confirmation processing execution means for executing processing capable of confirming the set probability level;
When the predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on, the processing by the change processing execution unit is executed, and when the power is turned on, a second predetermined condition different from the predetermined condition is performed. A start-up unit that executes a process by the confirmation process execution unit on condition that the condition is satisfied,
The starting means,
If the processing by the change processing execution means is being executed when the power was last turned off, even if the second predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on, Execute processing by the change processing execution means,
In the case where the processing by the change processing execution means is being executed when the power was last turned off, a third predetermined condition different from the predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition when the power is turned on. A gaming machine 1 wherein an infinite loop state is established when a condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine 1, a game medium is fired by the firing means to a game area provided with a plurality of winning ports. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detecting means for detecting a winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium fired by the firing means has won one of the winning openings, a predetermined number of game media are determined for the winning winning opening of the game medium. Is paid out by the paying means. In addition, the gaming machine performs a predetermined determination when a start condition is satisfied, and when the determination is a predetermined result, gives a predetermined game value to the player. Is changed in a plurality of levels by the process executed by the change process executing means. Further, the set probability level can be confirmed by a process executed by the confirmation process executing means. Here, the processing by the change processing executing means is performed on condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on, and the processing by the confirmation processing executing means is performed when the power is turned on. It is executed by the start-up means on condition that a second predetermined condition different from the condition is satisfied. If the process is being executed by the change process executing means when the power was last turned off, even if the second predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on, the process is stopped. The processing by the change processing executing means is executed by the raising means. Thus, even if the power is turned on after the second predetermined condition is satisfied, if the process is being executed by the change process executing means when the power was last turned off, the probability level is always changed. , The probability level can be changed with confidence. Therefore, there is an effect that a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the probability can be provided. Further, in a case where the processing by the change processing execution means is being executed when the power was last turned off, a third predetermined condition different from the predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition when the power is turned on. Is established, an infinite loop state is set. This allows the probability level to be changed by causing the predetermined condition to be satisfied and turning on the power, and executing the process by the change process executing means in the startup process, so that the probability level can be changed. You can change the level. Therefore, there is an effect that a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the probability can be provided.

In the gaming machine 1
The start-up unit includes a notification unit that issues a notification for instructing to turn on power by satisfying the predetermined condition or the second predetermined condition when the infinite loop state is set. Gaming machine 2

  According to the gaming machine 2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 1. That is, when the initiating loop state is set by the start-up means, a notification for instructing to turn on the power after satisfying the predetermined condition or the second predetermined condition is performed by the notification means. Thus, there is an effect that it is possible to easily grasp that the power supply is to be turned on while the predetermined condition or the second predetermined condition is satisfied.

<H group>
A gaming area with a plurality of winning openings,
Launching means for launching a game medium to the gaming area;
A prize detecting means provided for each prize port and detecting a prize of the game medium to a corresponding prize port;
When the prize detecting means detects that the game medium fired by the shooting means has won one of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games are played with respect to the winning hole of the game medium. Dispensing means for dispensing the medium,
A gaming machine that performs a predetermined determination when the start condition is satisfied, and provides a predetermined game value to the player when the determination is a predetermined result,
Change processing execution means for executing processing of changing the probability of obtaining a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels,
Start-up means for executing processing by the change processing execution means, on condition that predetermined conditions are satisfied when the power is turned on,
The predetermined condition includes that the first operation means is in a first state,
The change processing execution means includes detection means for detecting that the first operation means is changed from the second state to the first state, and the change of the first operation means from the second state to the first state. When the change of is detected, the probability level is changed,
The gaming machine is
A storage unit for storing a state of the first operation unit last time;
The detection means refers to the previous state of the first operation means stored in the storage means and the state of the first operation means at that time, and determines whether the first operation means is in the first state from the second state. To detect whether it has been changed to
The storage device stores the first state as the previous state of the first operation unit during a period from when the power is turned on until the detection unit performs the detection for the first time. .

  According to the gaming machine 1, the game medium is fired by the shooting means to the game area provided with the plurality of winning ports. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detecting means for detecting a winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium fired by the firing means has won one of the winning openings, a predetermined number of game media are determined for the winning winning opening of the game medium. Is paid out by the paying means. In addition, the gaming machine performs a predetermined determination when a start condition is satisfied, and when the determination is a predetermined result, gives a predetermined game value to the player. Is changed in a plurality of levels by the process executed by the change process executing means. The process by the change process executing means is executed by the start-up means on condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on. Here, the predetermined condition includes that the first operation means is in the first state. The change processing execution means includes detection means for detecting that the first operation means has changed from the second state to the first state, and the detection means detects the second state of the first operation means. When the change from to the first state is detected, the level of probability is changed. On the other hand, the previous state of the first operation means is stored in the storage means, and the detection means refers to the previous state of the first operation means stored in the storage means and the state of the first operation means at that time. Thus, it is detected whether or not the first operation means has changed from the second state to the first state. Then, the first state is stored in the storage unit as the previous state of the first operation unit during a period from when the power is turned on until the detection unit performs the detection for the first time. Thus, when the power is turned on, the first operating means is set to the first state in order to satisfy a predetermined condition, and the first operating means is kept in the first state until the detection is performed by the detecting means for the first time. However, the first state is stored in the storage means as the previous state of the first operation means from when the power is turned on until the detection is performed by the detection means for the first time. In the detection performed by the detection unit, it is possible to suppress the detection that the first operation unit is changed from the second state to the first state. Therefore, even if the first operation means is set to the first state in order to satisfy the predetermined condition, it is possible to suppress the probability level from being erroneously changed based on the first operation means. There is an effect that a machine can be provided.

In the gaming machine H1,
The storage means stores information used for controlling the game, and can hold the information even when the power is turned off,
The gaming machine (2), wherein the first operation means is for instructing erasure of information stored in the storage means when the first state is set.

  According to the gaming machine H2, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H1. That is, the storage means stores information used for controlling the game, and can hold the information even when the power is turned off. The first operation means stores the information when the first state is set. It is to instruct the erasure of the information. Thus, the probability level can be changed by using the first operation means for instructing the erasure of the information stored in the storage means. Therefore, the storage means can be changed without providing a dedicated operation means for changing the probability level. There is an effect that the probability level can be changed by using the first operation means for instructing the erasure of the information stored in the storage device.

<Group>
A gaming area with a plurality of winning openings,
Launching means for launching a game medium to the gaming area;
A prize detecting means provided for each prize port and detecting a prize of the game medium to a corresponding prize port;
When the prize detecting means detects that the game medium fired by the shooting means has won one of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games are played with respect to the winning hole of the game medium. Dispensing means for dispensing the medium,
A gaming machine that performs a predetermined determination when the start condition is satisfied, and provides a predetermined game value to the player when the determination is a predetermined result,
Change processing execution means for executing processing of changing the probability of obtaining a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels,
Start-up means for executing processing by the change processing execution means, on condition that predetermined conditions are satisfied when the power is turned on;
Storage means for storing information used for controlling the game, and capable of holding the information even when the power is turned off,
The start-up means, when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the information stored in the storage means, in an infinite loop state,
The gaming machine is
A gaming machine 1 comprising means for executing processing for monitoring power interruption even in the infinite loop state.

  According to the gaming machine 1, the game medium is fired by the shooting means to the game area provided with a plurality of winning ports. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detecting means for detecting a winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium fired by the firing means has won one of the winning openings, a predetermined number of game media are determined for the winning winning opening of the game medium. Is paid out by the paying means. In addition, the gaming machine performs a predetermined determination when a start condition is satisfied, and when the determination is a predetermined result, gives a predetermined game value to the player. Is changed in a plurality of levels by the process executed by the change process executing means. The process by the change process executing means is executed by the start-up means on condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on. The information used for controlling the game is stored in the storage means, and the information is held even when the power is turned off. Here, when the start-up means determines that the information stored in the storage means has an abnormality, an infinite loop state is set. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from being played at an abnormal probability level because the changed probability level before the power-off is not correctly held. Therefore, there is an effect that a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the probability can be provided. On the other hand, even in the case of the infinite loop state, the process of monitoring the power interruption is executed. Thereby, by performing the process related to the power-off properly, there is an effect that the operation of the gaming machine can be prevented from being further abnormal.

In gaming machine 1,
The gaming machine 2 further comprising means for executing a process of updating a random number used for the predetermined determination even in the infinite loop state.

  According to the gaming machine 2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 1. That is, even in the infinite loop state, the updating process of the random number used for the predetermined determination is executed. As a result, there is an effect that the random number updating process can be continued as long as the power is kept turned on.

In gaming machine Tu 1 or Tu 2,
The gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein said start-up means includes a notification means for issuing a notification for instructing to turn on power after satisfying said predetermined condition when said infinite loop state is set.

  According to the gaming machine 3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 1 or 2. That is, when the initiating loop is set by the start-up means, a notification for giving an instruction to establish a predetermined condition and turn on the power is performed by the notification means. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to make the user turn on the power supply while satisfying the predetermined condition.

<Te group>
A gaming area with a plurality of winning openings,
Launching means for launching a game medium to the gaming area;
A prize detecting means provided for each prize port and detecting a prize of the game medium to a corresponding prize port;
When the prize detecting means detects that the game medium fired by the shooting means has won one of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games are played with respect to the winning hole of the game medium. Dispensing means for dispensing the medium,
A gaming machine that performs a predetermined determination when the start condition is satisfied, and provides a predetermined game value to the player when the determination is a predetermined result,
Change processing execution means for executing processing of changing the probability of obtaining a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels,
Start-up means for executing processing by the change processing execution means, on condition that predetermined conditions are satisfied when the power is turned on,
The start-up means includes a means for performing a process for disabling the control relating to the game when it is determined that the game is in a predetermined state, and notifying the external device of the processing. Gaming machine te1.

  According to the gaming machine te 1, the game medium is fired by the firing means to the game area provided with a plurality of winning ports. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detecting means for detecting a winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium fired by the firing means has won one of the winning openings, a predetermined number of game media are determined for the winning winning opening of the game medium. Is paid out by the paying means. In addition, the gaming machine performs a predetermined determination when a start condition is satisfied, and when the determination is a predetermined result, gives a predetermined game value to the player. Is changed in a plurality of levels by the process executed by the change process executing means. The process by the change process executing means is executed by the start-up means on condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on. Here, when it is determined in the start-up means that the game is in a predetermined state, a process for disabling the control related to the game is performed, and the external device is notified of the process. Thereby, it can be suppressed that a game is played at an abnormal probability level due to the gaming machine being in a predetermined state. Therefore, there is an effect that a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the probability can be provided. On the other hand, since the fact is notified to the external device, there is an effect that the person in charge of the hall or the like can take some kind of countermeasure.

In gaming machine TE1,
The predetermined state is a state in which the second predetermined condition, which is different from the predetermined condition when the power is turned on, when the process is being performed by the change processing execution unit when the power is last turned off. A gaming machine te 2 characterized in that it is established.

  According to the gaming machine te 2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine te 1. That is, when the process is being executed by the change process execution unit when the power was last turned off, and when the second predetermined condition different from the predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on, Is executed to execute the control related to the game, and the external device is notified to that effect. Accordingly, in the case where the processing by the change processing execution means is being executed when the power was last turned off, and the second predetermined condition different from the predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on. Has the effect that it is possible to cause the user to turn on the power after satisfying a predetermined condition.

In the gaming machine TE1 or TE2,
Storage means for storing information used for controlling the game, and capable of holding the information even when the power is turned off,
The gaming machine te3, wherein the predetermined state is a state in which information stored in the storage means has an abnormality.

  According to the gaming machine te3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine te1 or te2. That is, the information used for controlling the game is stored in the storage means, and the information is retained even when the power is turned off. Then, when it is determined that the information stored in the storage unit has an abnormality, a process for not performing the control related to the game is performed, and the external device is notified of the process. With this, when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the information stored in the storage unit while the process is being performed by the change processing execution unit when the power supply was last shut down, some response to the abnormality is performed. Has the effect of being able to be driven.

<Group>
A gaming area with a number of winning openings,
Launching means for launching a game medium to the gaming area;
A prize detecting means provided for each prize port and detecting a prize of the game medium to a corresponding prize port;
When the prize detecting means detects that the game medium fired by the shooting means has won one of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games are played with respect to the winning hole of the game medium. Dispensing means for dispensing the medium,
A gaming machine that performs a predetermined determination when the start condition is satisfied, and provides a predetermined game value to the player when the determination is a predetermined result,
Change processing execution means for executing processing of changing the probability of obtaining a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels,
Confirmation processing execution means for executing processing capable of confirming the set probability level;
When the predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on, the processing by the change processing execution unit is executed, and when the power is turned on, a second predetermined condition different from the predetermined condition is performed. Start-up means for executing processing by the confirmation processing execution means on condition that the condition is satisfied;
Interrupt processing means for performing a process of monitoring at least whether or not the power is turned off, based on an interrupt generated every predetermined time;
An interrupt permitting means for permitting the interrupt while the processing by the change processing executing means is executed and while the processing by the confirmation processing executing means is executed. .

  According to the gaming machine 1, the game medium is fired by the firing means to the game area provided with a plurality of winning ports. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detecting means for detecting a winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium fired by the firing means has won one of the winning openings, a predetermined number of game media are determined for the winning winning opening of the game medium. Is paid out by the paying means. In addition, the gaming machine performs a predetermined determination when a start condition is satisfied, and when the determination is a predetermined result, gives a predetermined game value to the player. Is changed in a plurality of levels by the process executed by the change process executing means. Further, the set probability level can be confirmed by a process executed by the confirmation process executing means. Here, the processing by the change processing executing means is performed on condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on, and the processing by the confirmation processing executing means is performed when the power is turned on. It is executed by the start-up means on condition that a second predetermined condition different from the condition is satisfied. Further, at least a process of monitoring whether or not the power is turned off is performed by the interrupt processing unit based on an interrupt generated every predetermined time. Then, the interrupt is permitted by the interrupt permitting unit while the process by the change process executing unit is being executed and the process by the confirmation process executing unit is being executed. With this, it is possible to monitor whether or not the power has been turned off while the processing by the change processing execution means and the processing by the confirmation processing execution means are performed. Such processing can be performed. Therefore, when the power is turned on again, a process corresponding to a situation where the power is turned off is executed while the process by the change process execution unit is being executed or while the process by the confirmation process execution unit is being executed. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the probability can be provided.

In gaming machine 1,
A gaming machine (2) comprising: an interrupt prohibition unit that prohibits the interrupt when the processing by the change processing execution unit ends or the processing by the confirmation processing execution unit ends.

  According to the gaming machine G2, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine G1. That is, when the processing by the change processing executing means ends or the processing by the confirmation processing executing means ends, the interrupt is prohibited by the interrupt prohibiting means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress unnecessary execution of the interrupt processing by the interrupt processing means in the start-up means.

<Group I: Protective cover that covers the setting key when the inner frame is closed>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, the content of a game value (hit probability and / or hit type, etc., given to a player in accordance with a game result) in a control device provided on the back side of a gaming machine. Is provided in a plurality of stages (e.g., six stages of setting values "1" to "6") based on operation of the setting unit by a person related to the hall or the like. It is configured to be changeable.

  The setting means is provided so as to be exposed in the direction of the back of the gaming machine when the opening / closing body is closed with respect to the support. When rotated with respect to the body, the setting means is configured to be exposed to the front side of the gaming machine with the rotation of the support. With this configuration, when the hall-related person wants to change the settings of the gaming machine, it is possible to immediately insert the setting change key into the setting means by rotating the opening / closing body, The game machine is configured so that the setting change operation can be performed quickly.

  In the hall, an island facility having a built-in automatic ball supply device or the like is provided in a closed predetermined space, and a game machine support is attached to both sides of the island facility in the long side direction, thereby providing an island facility. It is configured such that a plurality of gaming machines can be installed therein. Then, the hall-related persons unlock the lock between the opening / closing body of each gaming machine installed in the island facility and the support outside the business hours of the hall, and open / close the support body (island facility). Open and perform setting change work and maintenance work for each gaming machine.

  However, if the setting means is configured to be exposed on the back side of the gaming machine, for example, in a situation where the gaming machine is installed on one long side of the island facility of the hall, the length of the gaming machine is set. If the opening / closing body of another gaming machine installed on the other long side that is not the side (that is, the back side of the gaming machine) is opened for some reason (for example, fraud, etc.), the gaming The setting means provided to be exposed on the back side of the machine can be directly operated. As a result, even if the opening / closing body of the gaming machine is not opened, the setting means of the gaming machine can be directly operated by opening the gaming machine on the back side of the gaming machine, The setting contents may be changed by unauthorized operation of, and an unexpected disadvantage may be caused in the hall.

  Here, as in a slot machine, a structure in which the entire back side of the gaming machine is covered with a housing structure to prevent improper operation of the setting means of the control device from the back side of the gaming machine can be considered. Unlike the slot machine, the gaming machine needs to supply the game balls from above the island facilities and discharge the discharge balls (out balls). Therefore, if the back side of the gaming machine is covered with a housing structure, a complicated structure for replenishing and discharging game balls is required, and the manufacturing cost increases due to the housing structure and the replenishing and discharging structure. There is a risk of doing it.

  In addition, in the island facilities, when the wiring connection with a card sand device arranged adjacent to the left side of the gaming machine and the connection wiring with the power supply are taken into consideration, the back surface structure of the gaming machine, in particular, the right side of the gaming machine when viewed from the back ( The structure (left side in front view) is desirably configured so as to be opened to some extent, and is easily wired and connected to the above-described device or the like.

  SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The inventions of the first group have been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the security performance of the gaming machine.

An opening / closing body (for example, the inner frame 12) supported to be openable and closable with respect to the support (for example, the outer frame 11);
A locking device (for example, a cylinder lock 20) for locking the opening / closing body and the support,
A game body (e.g., game board 13) having a game area provided with a ball entry means (e.g., the first starting port 64a) mounted on the opening / closing body and capable of entering a game ball;
Launching means (for example, a ball launching unit 112a) for launching a game ball toward the game area;
Lottery information acquisition means (for example, a reserved ball storage area 203B) for acquiring lottery information based on a game ball fired by the shooting means having entered the ball entry means;
Determining means for determining the lottery information obtained by the lottery information obtaining means (for example, a change start process (S307));
A gaming value providing means (for example, a large opening opening / closing process (S103)) for providing a predetermined game value to the player based on the specific determination result being derived by the determining means. ,
Setting means (for example, a setting key 501) capable of setting and changing a probability that the specific determination result is derived by the determining means;
The support is
When the opening / closing body is locked to the support by the locking device, the setting means is made difficult to operate, and when the opening / closing body is released from the support, the setting means is operable. The gaming machine 10 is provided with protection means (for example, a protection cover member 140).

  According to the gaming machine 10, the opening / closing body is supported so as to be able to open and close with respect to the support, and the opening / closing body and the support are locked by the locking device. Then, the game body is mounted on the opening / closing body, and a game area is formed in which the game body is provided with ball entry means capable of entering game balls. Further, the launching means launches a game ball toward the game area, and the lottery information acquiring means acquires lottery information based on the fact that the game ball launched by the launching means enters the ball entry means. The determination means determines the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means, and based on the fact that the specific determination result is derived by the determination means, provides a predetermined game value to the player by the game value provision means. Is done. Here, the setting means is configured so that the probability of deriving the specific determination result by the determining means can be changed. And, by the protection means provided on the support, when the opening and closing body is locked to the support by the locking device, while making the setting means difficult to operate, when the opening and closing body is opened from the support, The setting means is configured to be operable. Thereby, when the opening / closing body is opened from the support, the setting means is configured to be easily operable, and when the opening / closing body is locked to the support, it is difficult to operate the setting means by the protection means. Can be Therefore, there is an effect that the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine when the opening / closing body is locked to the support can be improved.

In game machine 1
The support is
Formed by combining multiple plates,
The protection means,
A gaming machine (1), wherein the gaming machine (1) is mounted in a cantilever manner on any one of the plates (for example, the right side plate (11d)).

  According to the gaming machine I1, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine I0. That is, a support is formed by combining a plurality of plate members, and the protection means is attached to any one of the plate members in a cantilever shape. As a result, it is possible to prevent improper acts against the setting means with a simple structure, and it is possible to improve the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine at low cost.

  The “cantilever beam shape” refers to a beam shape in which one end of the protection means is fixed and the other end is free without being fixed.

In gaming machine Ichi0 or Ichi1,
Control means for controlling the game (for example, main controller 110);
Storage means (for example, substrate box 100) for storing the control means,
The setting means,
Provided in the control means,
The storage means,
A setting unit (for example, a setting unit 100d) in which the setting unit is located;
An exposing portion that exposes a part of the setting unit from the setting unit toward the outside of the storage unit (for example, a portion where a keyhole of a setting key 501 in the setting unit 100d is exposed)
A concave portion (for example, a setting portion side wall 100e and a setting portion bottom surface 100f) for recessing the exposed portion from the outermost surface side of the storage means toward the control means side;
The protection means,
A gaming machine (1), comprising: a projection (for example, a cover-side projection (172)) that enters the recess when the opening / closing body is locked to the support.

  According to the gaming machine I2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I0 or Ichi1. That is, the control of the game is performed by the control means, the control means is stored by the storage means, and the setting means is provided in the control means. Here, the setting unit is located at the setting unit provided in the storage unit, a part of the setting unit is exposed from the setting unit to the outside of the storage unit by the exposure unit, and the exposed unit is formed by the concave unit. It is formed at a position recessed from the outermost surface toward the control means. Then, when the opening / closing body is locked with respect to the support, the protrusion provided on the protection means is configured to enter the recess. Thereby, when the opening / closing body is locked with respect to the support, the protrusion of the protection means enters into the recess of the storage means, and the setting means exposed from the storage means is covered by the protrusion, thereby opening and closing. At the time of locking the body, it is possible to make it difficult to access the setting means from the back side of the gaming machine. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent an improper act against the setting means with a simple structure, and it is possible to improve security performance on the back side of the gaming machine at low cost.

In gaming machine I2,
The protrusion is
A gaming machine (1), characterized in that it is formed so as to surround and close the setting means.

  According to the gaming machine I3, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine I2. That is, the projecting portion surrounds and closes the setting means. Accordingly, when the opening / closing body is locked with respect to the support, the protrusion of the protection means enters the recess of the storage means, and surrounds and closes the setting means exposed from the storage means. , It is possible to make it difficult to access the entire setting means from the back side of the gaming machine when locking the opening / closing body. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent an improper act against the setting means with a simple structure, and it is possible to improve security performance on the back side of the gaming machine at low cost.

In gaming machine Ichi2 or Ichi3,
The recess is
A concave side wall (e.g., setting section side wall 100e) formed to be concave from the outermost surface of the storage means;
A concave bottom surface (setting portion bottom surface 100f) extending from the concave portion side wall and constituting a bottom surface of the concave portion and having the exposed portion formed in a part thereof;
A concave-side protruding portion (for example, a case-side protruding portion 100g) protruding in a rectangular shape from the bottom surface of the concave portion toward the protection means side so as to surround the exposed portion;
The protrusion is
A gaming machine (1) characterized in that when the opening / closing body is locked with respect to the support, it enters a space formed by the concave side wall and the concave side projection.

  According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I2 or I3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the concave side wall of the concave portion is formed to be concave from the outermost surface of the storage means, and the concave bottom surface of the concave portion is also extended from the concave side wall to form the bottom surface of the concave portion, and an exposed portion is formed in a part thereof. Similarly, the recess-side projection of the recess is projected from the bottom surface of the recess toward the protection means side in a rectangular shape so as to surround the exposed portion. Then, when the opening / closing body is locked with respect to the support, the protrusion is configured to enter a space formed by the recess side wall and the recess-side protrusion. Accordingly, when the opening / closing body is closed, the portion provided with the setting means is closed by the recess-side projection of the storage means, thereby making it difficult to access the setting means. The projections make access to the setting means difficult. With this configuration, the security of the setting means is enhanced, and there is no room for wire or the like to enter, so that there is an effect that fraudulent acts on the setting means can be prevented.

In any of the gaming machines I2 to I4
The protection means,
An attaching portion (for example, a cover attaching portion 150) attached to the plate body;
An upright portion (e.g., upright portion 160) extending from the attachment portion to the back side of the gaming machine;
A cover portion (e.g., a cover portion 170) that is formed to extend from the upright portion to the setting unit side and has the protrusion portion formed thereon;
The upright portion,
A gaming machine (1), comprising: a bending portion (for example, a curved portion 154) capable of bending based on the impact when the impact is applied to the protection means.

  According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines I2 to I4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the protection means is attached to the plate body by the attachment part, an upright part is formed to extend from the attachment part to the back side of the gaming machine, and a cover part is formed to extend from the upright part to the setting means side. A protrusion is formed. The bending portion provided on the upright portion is configured to be able to bend based on the impact when an impact is applied to the protection means. Accordingly, when the opening / closing body is closed, even when the storage means or the like contacts the protection means due to the momentum at the time of closing and the shock is applied, the bending section bends and absorbs the shock, whereby the protection means is provided. There is an effect that damage can be prevented.

In game machine 1 5,
The cover part,
A gaming machine (1) characterized in that it comprises a rear protruding rib (for example, a cover outer rib (174)) projecting toward the back side of the gaming machine along at least the outer shape of the cover portion.

  According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the rear protruding rib of the cover portion protrudes toward the back side of the gaming machine at least along the outer shape of the cover portion. Thereby, the rear protruding ribs increase the rigidity of the cover portion, and when an illegal act is performed by wire from the back surface of the gaming machine, the wire is directed upward or downward from the back surface side of the cover portion. When the wire travels, the wire collides with the rear protruding rib, thereby preventing the wire from entering.

In game machine 1 6,
The rear protruding rib,
A gaming machine 7 provided on the back side of the gaming machine of the setting means.

  According to the gaming machine 17, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 1 6. That is, a rearwardly projecting rib is provided on the back side of the gaming machine of the setting means. Thus, by forming the rearward projecting rib on the cover portion at a position corresponding to the setting means, it is possible to make it difficult to form a hole or the like in the cover portion, and to improve the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine. There is an effect that can be.

In gaming machine 1 5 to 1 7,
The upright portion,
A gaming machine having at least a laterally protruding rib (for example, an upper outer cover portion 162B or a lower outer cover portion 163B) projecting to the side of the gaming machine along the outer shape of the upright portion. 8.

  According to the gaming machine 18, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines 1 to 5. That is, the side protruding ribs of the upright portion protrude toward the gaming machine side at least along the outer shape of the upright portion. Thus, the side protruding ribs increase the rigidity of the upright portion, and when an illegal act is performed by wire from the side of the gaming machine, the wire is moved upward or downward from the side surface of the upright portion. When the wire travels to the side, the wire collides with the laterally protruding rib, so that the wire can be prevented from entering.

In game machine 1 5 to 1 8,
The control means includes:
It is arranged below the central part of the gaming machine,
The upright portion and the cover portion,
An upper inner cover portion (e.g., upper inner cover portion 162a) extending from an upper portion of the upright portion and the cover portion toward the inside of the gaming machine;
A lower inner cover portion (e.g., a lower inner cover portion 163a) extending from the lower portion of the upright portion and the cover portion toward the inside of the gaming machine.
The lower inner cover portion,
A gaming machine (1), characterized in that it is formed with a larger area than the upper inner cover portion.

  According to the gaming machine 19, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines 1 to 8, the following effects are achieved. That is, the control means is disposed below the central portion of the gaming machine, the upper inner cover portion is formed extending from the upright portion and the upper portion of the cover portion toward the inside of the gaming machine, and the lower inner cover portion is formed. , From the upper portion of the upright portion and the cover portion to the inside of the gaming machine. The area of the lower inner cover is formed to be larger than the area of the upper inner cover.

  Conventionally, since the control means is disposed below the central portion of the gaming machine, when cheating is performed, it is easier to access the control means from above and below the gaming machine. Therefore, in many cases, a person who commits an illegal act to the control means performs an illegal act by causing a wire or the like to enter from a lower portion of the back surface of the gaming machine. Therefore, in order to prevent the above-mentioned misconduct, the area of the lower inner cover portion is formed to be large, and the gap between the control means and the protection means can be reduced as much as possible by the lower protective cover portion. There is an effect that the security performance on the side can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines I0 to I9,
The protection means,
A gaming machine 1 10 made of a transparent material or a translucent material.

  According to the gaming machine I10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines I0 to I9, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the protection means is formed of a transparent material or a translucent material. Thereby, when the opening / closing body is closed, it becomes possible to confirm the changing means from the back side of the gaming machine through the transparent or translucent protection means, and it is possible to early detect any injustice or trouble with the changing means, This has the effect.

<Group 2: A cover that protects the control means is configured to be non-removable from the back side>
Conventionally, on the back side of a gaming machine, setting means for performing various settings of a game is provided, and when the opening / closing body on which the setting means is mounted is closed, a player cannot contact the setting means. It is configured. On the other hand, the person in charge of the hall opens the opening / closing body outside the opening hours of the hall and executes various maintenance work and setting work for the setting means (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-024202)).

  However, even in such a gaming machine, even when the opening / closing body is closed, there is a possibility that an illegal act may be performed on the setting means from the back side of the gaming machine, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The inventions of the second group have been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing an illegal act on a setting means from the back side of the gaming machine.

An opening / closing body (for example, the inner frame 12) supported to be openable and closable with respect to the support (for example, the outer frame 11);
A locking device (for example, a cylinder lock 20) for locking the opening / closing body and the support,
Setting means (for example, a setting key 501) mounted on the opening / closing body to perform various game settings;
Protection means (for example, a protection cover member 140) for protecting the back side of the gaming machine of the setting means;
A means for making the protection means difficult to attach or detach from the gaming machine (for example, a fixing screw from the outside of the right side plate 11d with the mounting surface 151 of the protective cover member 140 abutting against the inner wall of the right side plate 11d). A gaming machine 20 characterized by comprising:

  According to the gaming machine 20, the opening / closing body is supported to be openable / closable with respect to the support, the opening / closing body and the support are locked by the locking device, and various settings of the game are set by the setting means mounted on the opening / closing body. Done. And the protection means protects the back side of the gaming machine of the setting means. Here, the protection unit is configured to be difficult to attach or detach from the gaming machine by the attachment / detachment unit. Thereby, the protection means for protecting the back side of the gaming machine of the setting means for performing various settings of the game is configured to be difficult to attach or detach from the gaming machine by the attachment / detachment means, and an unauthorized act on the setting means from the back side of the gaming machine. Can be prevented.

In gaming machine 20,
The protection means,
Attached to the support,
The detachment difficult means,
The gaming machine 21 wherein the protection means is configured to be difficult to attach or detach from the support when the opening and closing body and the support are locked by the locking device.

  According to the gaming machine 21, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 20, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the protection means is attached to the support and the opening / closing body and the support are locked by the locking device, the protection means is configured to be difficult to attach to or detach from the support by the attachment / detachment means.

  Conventionally, in a hall in which a gaming machine is installed, an island facility having a built-in game ball automatic supply device or the like is provided in a closed predetermined space. By attaching, a plurality of gaming machines can be installed on the island facility. Then, the hall-related persons unlock the lock between the opening / closing body of each gaming machine installed in the island facility and the support outside the business hours of the hall, and open / close the support body (island facility). Open and perform setting change work and maintenance work for each gaming machine.

  However, if the setting means is configured to be exposed on the back side of the gaming machine, for example, in a situation where the gaming machine is installed on one long side of the island facility of the hall, the length of the gaming machine is set. If the opening / closing body of another gaming machine installed on the other long side that is not the side (that is, the back side of the gaming machine) is opened for some reason (for example, fraud, etc.), the gaming The setting means provided to be exposed on the back side of the machine can be directly operated. As a result, even if the opening / closing body of the gaming machine is not opened, the setting means of the gaming machine can be directly operated by opening the gaming machine on the back side of the gaming machine, The setting contents may be changed by unauthorized operation of, and an unexpected disadvantage may be caused in the hall.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine 21, when the protection means is attached to the support and the opening / closing body and the support are locked by the locking device, the protection means is difficult to attach or detach from the support by the attachment / detachment means. It is configured to be non-detachable. Thereby, even if the gaming machine on the back side of the gaming machine is illegally opened, the setting means provided on the back side of the gaming machine is protected by the protection means, and when the opening / closing body is locked, the protection means is protected by the game. There is an effect that it is difficult or impossible to attach / detach from the back side of the machine, and it is possible to prevent an illegal act on the setting means.

In gaming machine 20 or 21,
The protection means,
A mounting portion (for example, mounting surface 151) that is mounted on the plate body,
The support is
A plurality of plate bodies (for example, upper plate 11a, lower plate 11B, left side plate 11c, and right side plate 11d) are formed in combination,
The plate body is
A side portion located on the side of the gaming machine,
A front portion extending toward the inside of the gaming machine at a front side of the gaming machine at the side portion;
A rear portion extending toward the inside of the gaming machine, on a rear side of the gaming machine on the side portion,
The mounting portion,
A gaming machine 22 which is attached to an inner wall of the side portion.

  According to the gaming machine 22, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 20 or 21. That is, the protection means is attached to the plate by the attachment portion of the protection means. Further, a support is formed by combining a plurality of plates. And, on the plate body, a side portion located on the side surface of the gaming machine, a front portion extending toward the inside of the gaming machine on the front side of the gaming machine on the side portion, and a gaming machine on the side portion On the rear side, a rear portion extending toward the inside of the gaming machine is provided. And the protection means is attached to the inner wall of the side part. Thereby, by attaching the mounting portion of the protection means to the inner wall of the portion surrounded by the front portion, the side portion, and the rear portion of the plate body, from the front of the game machine or from the rear side of the game machine to the mounting portion of the protection means And make it difficult to access. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make the protection unit difficult to attach or detach from the back side of the gaming machine, thereby preventing improper act on the setting unit.

In gaming machine 22,
Part or all of the plate body,
A gaming machine 23 characterized by being formed of a metal material having a higher hardness than wood (for example, aluminum).

  According to the gaming machine 23, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 22. That is, part or all of the plate body is formed of a metal material having a higher hardness than wood. Thereby, by attaching the mounting portion of the protection means to the inner wall of the portion surrounded by the front portion, the side portion, and the rear portion of the plate body formed of a metal material higher in height than wood, This makes it difficult to access the mounting portion of the protection means from the rear side of the machine. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make the protection unit difficult to attach or detach from the back side of the gaming machine, thereby preventing improper act on the setting unit.

In the gaming machine 22 or 23,
The side portions are
A fixing member (for example, a fixing screw 11g) capable of fixing the protection means to the support, a lateral insertion hole (for example, a cover mounting hole 11e or a cover lower mounting hole 11f),
The mounting portion,
A mounting insertion hole (for example, an upper mounting hole 152 or a lower mounting hole 153) provided corresponding to the side insertion hole and capable of inserting the fixing member,
The fixing member,
The gaming machine 24, wherein the gaming machine 24 is inserted into the side insertion hole and the attachment insertion hole from outside the gaming machine at the side portion.

  According to the gaming machine 24, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 22 or 23. That is, a fixing member capable of fixing the protection means to the support can be inserted into the side insertion hole provided in the side portion. Further, the fixing member can be inserted by the mounting insertion hole provided in the mounting portion corresponding to the side insertion hole. Then, the fixing member is inserted into the side insertion hole and the attachment insertion hole from outside the gaming machine at the side portion.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine is installed in an island facility of a hall without a gap so that a player cannot access a back side of the gaming machine from a front side of the gaming machine. In addition, a card sanding device that can insert a card storing the amount of money to be used for the game, etc. is provided beside the gaming machine installed in the island facility, and this card sanding device also has a gap with the gaming machine. It is not arranged.

  Therefore, by inserting the fixing member from the outside of the gaming machine to fix the plate body and the protection means, and installing the gaming machine in the island facility in that state, a gap is generated in a portion where the fixing member is installed. Can not be. Therefore, it is possible to prevent access to the fixing member that fixes the protection means to the game machine, to prevent the protection means from being detached from the game machine, and to improve security performance on the back side of the game machine. This has the effect.

In any of gaming machines 22 to 24,
The protection means,
An extending portion (for example, a curved portion 154) extending from the mounting portion to the rear side of the gaming machine,
The extension part,
A gaming machine (2) characterized in that the gaming machine (2) is formed in a shape following (abutting) the inner wall shape of the rear portion.

  According to the gaming machine 25, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machines 22 to 24. That is, the extending portion provided on the protection means extends from the mounting portion to the rear side of the gaming machine, and the shape of the extending portion is formed along (abuts on) the inner wall shape of the rear portion. You. Thereby, the mounting portion of the protection means is covered by the rear portion of the plate body from the back side of the gaming machine, and the extended portion is formed in a shape following (abutting) the inner wall shape of the rear portion. It is possible to prevent a gap from being generated between the side part on which the fixing member is mounted and the mounting part. Therefore, the protection means can be prevented from being detached from the gaming machine, and the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine can be improved.

In gaming machine 2,
The extension portion,
A gaming machine 26 comprising: a bending portion (for example, a bending portion 154 made of a resin having an elastic force) that can be elastically deformed when an impact is applied to the protection means.

  According to the gaming machine 26, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 25. That is, when an impact is applied to the protection means, the bending portion of the extension portion is configured to be elastically deformable. Thus, for example, when the opening / closing body is closed, even when a part of the opening / closing body comes into contact with the protection means due to the momentum at the time of closing and an impact is applied, the bending portion is bent by the elastic force to absorb the impact. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the protection means from being damaged.

In any of gaming machines 20 to 26,
A game body (e.g., game board 13) having a game area provided with a ball entry means (e.g., the first starting port 64a) mounted on the opening / closing body and capable of entering a game ball;
Launching means (for example, a ball launching unit 112a) for launching a game ball toward the game area;
Control means (for example, main controller 110) for controlling the game,
The control means includes:
Lottery information acquisition means (for example, a reserved ball storage area 203B) for acquiring lottery information based on a game ball fired by the shooting means having entered the ball entry means;
Determining means for determining the lottery information obtained by the lottery information obtaining means (for example, a change start process (S307));
Game value providing means (for example, a large opening opening / closing process (S103)) for providing a predetermined game value to the player based on the specific determination result being derived by the determining means,
The setting means,
A gaming machine 27 wherein the probability that the specific determination result is derived by the determination means can be changed.

  According to the gaming machine 27, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines 20 to 26. That is, a game area is formed in which the game body is mounted on the opening / closing body, and the game body is provided with a ball entry means capable of entering a game ball. A game ball is fired toward the game area by the firing means, and the control of the game is performed by the control means. Then, the lottery information is obtained by the lottery information obtaining means provided in the control means based on that the game ball fired by the firing means enters the ball-entering means. Then, the lottery information obtained by the lottery information obtaining means is determined by the determination means similarly provided in the control means, and the game value provided in the control means is determined based on the fact that the specific determination result is derived by the determination means. A predetermined game value is provided to the player by the providing means. Here, the setting means is configured so that the probability of deriving the specific determination result by the determining means can be changed. Thereby, the protection means which can change the probability of the specific determination result and protects the back side of the gaming machine of the setting means which influences the result of the game is configured to be difficult to attach or detach from the gaming machine by the attaching / detaching means. In addition, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent an improper act from the back side of the gaming machine with respect to the setting means such that the setting content of the gaming machine is illegally changed.

In any of gaming machines 20 to 27,
The protection means,
A gaming machine 28 characterized by being formed of a transparent material or a translucent material.

  According to the gaming machine 28, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machines 20 to 27. That is, the protection means is formed of a transparent material or a translucent material. Thereby, when the opening / closing body is closed, it becomes possible to confirm the changing means from the back side of the gaming machine through the transparent or translucent protection means, and it is possible to early detect any injustice or trouble with the changing means, This has the effect.

<Group: Settings can be changed and settings can be checked regardless of whether the inner frame is open>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, the content of a game value (hit probability and / or hit type, etc., given to a player in accordance with a game result) in a control device provided on the back side of a gaming machine. Is provided in a plurality of stages (e.g., six stages of setting values "1" to "6") based on operation of the setting unit by a person related to the hall or the like. It is configured to be changeable.

  In such a gaming machine, in order to improve security performance, when the opening / closing body equipped with the setting means is closed by the support, it is determined that the setting is impossible, and the opening / closing body is opened from the support, and the setting means is opened. If it is determined that the game machine can be operated from the front of the gaming machine, the setting by the setting means is permitted. With such a configuration, in a situation where the opening / closing body is closed with respect to the support, even if the setting means is improperly operated by an illegal act from the back side of the gaming machine, the setting of the gaming machine is performed. It cannot be changed (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-024202)).

  However, when determining whether or not the setting of the gaming machine can be changed based on the opening state of the opening / closing body, if the opening detection means for detecting opening of the opening / closing body cannot detect the opening state due to a failure or the like, the opening / closing body is opened. Setting cannot be changed on the basis of the above. Therefore, due to erroneous detection of the opening / closing body opening detection means, setting change or the like, which is an important game element of the gaming machine, cannot be performed, and there is a possibility that the business form assumed by the hall cannot be executed.

  The invention of the group of players has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and has an object to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the security performance of the gaming machine.

An opening / closing body (for example, the inner frame 12) supported to be openable and closable with respect to the support (for example, the outer frame 11);
A locking device (for example, a cylinder lock 20) for locking the opening / closing body and the support,
Opening / closing detecting means (for example, an inner frame opening switch 208g1) for detecting an opening / closing state of the opening / closing body with respect to the support;
First operating means (for example, a setting key 501) that can be operated from the front side of the gaming machine when the locking of the opening / closing body and the support by the locking device is released and the opening / closing body is in an open state. When,
Change enable / disable judging means for judging whether or not to shift to a change enable state in which the degree of advantage for the player can be changed when the first operation means is operated in a predetermined manner (for example, S4412 of start-up processing: YES); ,
The change availability determination means,
Regardless of the detection result of the opening / closing detection unit, when the first operation unit is operated by the predetermined operation, a changeable state transition unit that shifts to the changeable state (for example, S4407 of the startup process: YES) is provided. A gaming machine characterized by having 0.

  According to gaming machine 0, the opening / closing body is supported so as to be openable / closable with respect to the support, and the opening / closing body and the support are locked by the locking device. Then, the open / close state of the open / close body with respect to the support is detected by the open / close detection means. Further, when the locking of the opening / closing body and the support by the locking device is released and the opening / closing body is in the open state, the first operating means can be operated from the front side of the gaming machine. Then, when the first operating means is operated in a predetermined manner, the changeability determining means determines whether or not to shift to a changeable state in which the degree of advantage to the player can be changed. Here, regardless of the detection result of the opening / closing detecting means, when the first operating means is operated in a predetermined manner, the state is changed to the changeable state by the changeable state shifting means provided in the changeability determining means. That is, as a condition for shifting to the changeable state, it is possible to shift to the changeable state when a predetermined operation is performed on the first operation means without determining the detection result of the opening / closing detection means. Therefore, even if the opening detection means for detecting the opening of the opening / closing body cannot detect the opening state due to a failure or the like, it is possible to change the setting which is an important game element of the gaming machine, and it is assumed that the hall is assumed to be open. There is an effect that it is possible to surely execute the business mode.

An opening / closing body (for example, the inner frame 12) supported to be openable and closable with respect to the support (for example, the outer frame 11);
A locking device (for example, a cylinder lock 20) for locking the opening / closing body and the support,
Opening / closing detecting means (for example, an inner frame opening switch 208g1) for detecting an opening / closing state of the opening / closing body with respect to the support;
First operating means (for example, a setting key 501) that can be operated from the front side of the gaming machine when the locking of the opening / closing body and the support by the locking device is released and the opening / closing body is in an open state. When,
In the case where the first operation means is operated in a predetermined manner, confirmation possibility determination means for determining whether or not to shift to the advantage confirmability state in which the degree of advantage to the player can be confirmed (for example, S4408 of start-up processing: YES) ),
The confirmation possibility determination means,
Irrespective of the detection result of the opening / closing detection means, when the first operation means is operated by the predetermined operation, confirmable transition means which shifts to the advantage confirmable state (for example, S4407 of startup processing: NO), A gaming machine reference 1 comprising:

  According to the gaming machine 1, the opening / closing body is supported so as to be capable of opening and closing with respect to the support, and the opening / closing body and the support are locked by the locking device. Then, the open / close state of the open / close body with respect to the support is detected by the open / close detection means. Further, when the locking of the opening / closing body and the support by the locking device is released and the opening / closing body is in the open state, the first operating means can be operated from the front side of the gaming machine. Then, when the first operation means is operated in a predetermined manner, the confirmation possibility determination means determines whether or not to shift to the advantage confirmable state in which the degree of advantage to the player can be confirmed. Here, regardless of the detection result of the open / close detection means, when the first operation means is operated in a predetermined manner, the state is shifted to the advantage degree checkable state by the checkable shift means provided in the checkability determination means. That is, as a condition for shifting to the advantage confirmable state, the state can be shifted to the advantage confirmable state based on an operation on the first operation means without determining the detection result of the opening / closing detecting means. Therefore, even if the opening detection means for detecting the opening of the opening / closing body cannot detect the opening state due to a failure or the like, it is possible to confirm the setting status, which is an important game element of the gaming machine, and the setting is completed. There is an effect that the setting contents can be surely confirmed.

In gaming machine Gan 0 or Gan 1,
When the lock between the opening / closing body and the support by the locking device is released and the opening / closing body is in an open state, second operation means (for example, a RAM erasing switch 122) which can be operated from the front side of the gaming machine. ),
The changeable state transition means or the confirmable transition means,
2. A gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein when the second operation means is specially operated, the state shifts to the changeable state or the advantage degree checkable state.

  According to the gaming machine reference 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine reference 0 or the reference 1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the locking of the opening / closing body and the support by the locking device is released and the opening / closing body is in the open state, the second operating means is operable from the front side of the gaming machine. Then, when the second operation means is specially operated, the changeable state transition means or the confirmable state transition means transitions to the changeable state or the advantage degree confirmable state. That is, the condition for shifting to the changeable state or the advantage degree confirmable state is based on a predetermined operation on the first operation means and a special operation on the second operation means without determining the detection result of the open / close detection means. Thus, the state can be changed to the changeable state or the advantage degree confirmable state. Therefore, even if the opening detection means for detecting the opening of the opening / closing body cannot detect the opening state due to a failure or the like, the setting change or setting confirmation, which is an important gaming element of the gaming machine, can be performed, and the hall can be changed. Has the effect that the business form assumed by the company can be executed without fail. Further, in the control for shifting to the changeable state or the advantage checkable state, the process of detecting the opening of the opening / closing body becomes unnecessary, and the control load of the gaming machine shifting to the changeable state or the advantage checkable state is reduced. There is an effect that can be.

In any of the gaming machine Gan 0 to Gan 2,
When the locking of the opening / closing body and the support by the locking device is released and the opening / closing body is in an open state, a third operation means that can be operated from the front side of the gaming machine,
The third operation means includes:
When a specific operation is performed, a state where the power of the gaming machine is turned off is changed to a state where the power of the gaming machine is turned on,
The change availability determination means,
A gaming machine reference 3 characterized in that the gaming machine is executed in a startup process executed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on.

  According to the gaming machine 3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machines 0 to 2. That is, when the locking of the opening / closing body and the support by the locking device is released and the opening / closing body is in the open state, the second operating means provided in the specific detecting means can be operated from the front side of the gaming machine. Is done. Then, when the third operation means is specifically operated, an operation of changing from a state in which the power of the gaming machine is turned off to a state in which the power of the gaming machine is turned on corresponds, and the power of the gaming machine is turned on. In the start-up process executed in the case where the determination is made, the determination by the change availability determination unit is performed.

  Conventionally, when performing a process of determining whether or not to shift to a changeable state in a start-up process at the time of power-on, if a process of detecting the opening of the opening and closing body is performed, a process for detecting the opening of the opening and closing body is performed. In addition, the control required when the power is turned on becomes complicated, and the processing load on the gaming machine may increase.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine reference 3, when the setting of the gaming machine is changed, the setting can be changed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on in accordance with the operation of the third operation means provided on the back side of the gaming machine. It can be determined whether or not to shift to the state. Therefore, before the control of the game is executed, it is possible to determine whether or not to shift to the changeable state and set the gaming machine.

In gaming machine 3
The confirmation possibility determination means,
3. A gaming machine 4, which is executed in the start-up process.

  According to the gaming machine 4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 3. That is, similarly to the change possibility determination means, the determination by the confirmation possibility determination means is executed in the start-up processing executed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on.

  Conventionally, in performing a process of determining whether or not to shift to a state in which the advantage can be checked in a startup process at the time of power-on, if the process of detecting the opening of the opening / closing body is performed, the opening of the opening / closing body is detected. The control required at the time of turning on the power becomes complicated for the processing, and the processing load on the gaming machine may increase.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine reference 4, when the setting of the gaming machine is confirmed, when the power of the gaming machine is turned on in accordance with the operation of the third operation means provided on the back side of the gaming machine, the advantage is determined. It can be determined whether or not to shift to the checkable state. Therefore, before the control of the game is executed, it is possible to determine whether or not to shift to the state where the advantage can be checked, and to check the setting of the gaming machine.

In any of gaming machine 0 to gaming machine 4,
When the opening / closing body is locked to the support by the locking device, the first operation means is made difficult to operate. On the other hand, when the opening / closing body is released from the support, the first operation is performed. A gaming machine 5 comprising a protection means (for example, a protection cover member 140) for enabling the means to be operated.

  According to the gaming machine attendant 5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine attendants 0 to 4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the opening / closing body is locked to the support by the locking device, the first operating means is made difficult to operate by the protection means, and when the opening / closing body is released from the support, the first operating means is opened. Is configured to be operable. Accordingly, when the opening / closing body is opened from the support, the first operation means is configured to be easily operable, and when the opening / closing body is locked to the support, the first operation means is protected by the protection means. This has the effect of making the means difficult to operate and improving the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine when the opening / closing body is locked to the support. In addition, since the first operating means cannot be completely operated when the opening / closing body is closed by the protection means, even if the opening / closing body is not detected by the opening / closing detection means, the opening / closing body is inevitably open. For example, since the first operation means cannot be operated, it is not necessary to determine the detection result of the open / close detection means as a condition for shifting to the changeable state or the checkable state. Therefore, in the control for shifting to the changeable state or the checkable state, the process of detecting the opening of the opening / closing body is unnecessary, and the control load of the gaming machine shifting to the changeable state or the checkable state can be reduced. effective.

In gaming machine 5
The protection means,
A gaming machine 6, which is attached to the support.

  According to the gaming machine 6, the following effects are obtained in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 5. That is, when the opening / closing body is locked to the support by the locking device by the protection means attached to the support, the second operating means is made difficult to operate, while the opening / closing body is released from the support. In addition, the second operation means is configured to be operable. Accordingly, when the opening / closing body is opened from the support, the second operating means is configured to be easily operable. When the opening / closing body is locked to the support, the second operating means is protected by the protection means. This has the effect of making the means difficult to operate and improving the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine when the opening / closing body is locked to the support.

In gaming machine Gan 5 or Gan 6,
The protection means,
A gaming machine 7, which is formed of a transparent material or a translucent material.

  According to the gaming machine 7, the following effects are obtained in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 5 or 6. That is, the protection means is formed of a transparent material or a translucent material. Thereby, when the opening / closing body is closed, it becomes possible to confirm the changing means from the back side of the gaming machine through the transparent or translucent protection means, and it is possible to early detect any injustice or trouble with the changing means, This has the effect.

<Shishi group: If the front frame is open, it is not possible to change settings and check settings>
Conventionally, if the game machine is easily transitioned to a state where settings can be changed and settings can be checked, it is not possible to eliminate the possibility of unauthorized setting changes and settings confirmation. Alternatively, it is desirable to take a multi-step security measure for the gaming machine so as not to shift to a checkable state where the setting content can be checked.

  On the other hand, when a person involved in the hall performs maintenance work on a gaming machine, both the opening / closing body and the decorative body are released from the support (opening / closing body), and the maintenance work is performed in a hall having authority to change settings and confirm settings. It is general that an employee of a hall who does not have the authority to change settings or confirm settings performs the setting, instead of the responsible person (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-092371)).

  Here, if the employee enters the changeable state or the checkable state during the maintenance work by the employee who does not have the authority to change the setting or check the setting, if the employee enters the outside with an unauthorized person There is a possibility that information on the setting status of the gaming machine may be leaked to the unauthorized person.

  SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The invention of the group of shovels has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the security performance of the gaming machine.

An opening / closing body (for example, the inner frame 12) supported to be openable and closable with respect to the support (for example, the outer frame 11);
A decorative body (e.g., a front frame 14) on the front side of the opening / closing body that is openably and closably supported by the opening / closing body or the support;
First locking means (for example, a part of the cylinder lock 20) for locking the support and the opening / closing body,
Second locking means (for example, a part of the cylinder lock 20) for locking the decorative body and the support or the opening / closing body,
Opening / closing detecting means (for example, an inner frame opening switch 208g1) for detecting an opening / closing state of the opening / closing body with respect to the support;
Decoration opening / closing detection means (for example, a front frame opening switch 208g2) for detecting an opening / closing state of the decoration body with respect to the support or the opening / closing body;
When the locking of the opening / closing body and the support by the first locking means is released and the opening / closing body is in an open state, first operating means (for example, a power switch) which can be operated from the front side of the gaming machine, respectively. ) And a second operating means (for example, a setting key 501);
When the first operation means is operated in a predetermined manner and the second operation means is operated in a specific manner, a changeability determination means (for example, a changeability determination means for determining whether or not to shift to a changeable state in which the degree of advantage to a player can be changed) , Startup processing S4412: YES).
The change availability determination means,
When the second operating means is operated to perform the specific operation, the opening / closing detecting means detects opening of the opening / closing body, and the decorative opening / closing detecting means does not detect opening / closing of the decorative body, the state shifts to the changeable state. The game machine chain 0 is provided with change transition means (for example, S4453: YES and S4454: YES of the start-up process).

  According to the gaming machine shop 0, the opening / closing body is supported so as to be able to open and close with respect to the support, and the decorative body is supported at the front side of the opening / closing body so as to be able to open and close with respect to the opening / closing body or the support. Then, the opening and closing body and the support are locked by the first locking means, and the decorative body and the support or the opening and closing body are locked by the second locking means. Here, the opening / closing state of the opening / closing body with respect to the support is detected by the opening / closing detecting means, and the opening / closing state of the decorative body with respect to the supporting body or the opening / closing body is detected by the decoration opening / closing detecting means. Further, when the locking of the opening / closing body and the support by the first locking means is released and the opening / closing body is in an open state, the first operating means and the second operating means can be respectively operated from the front side of the gaming machine. Become. Then, when the first operation means is operated in a predetermined manner and the second operation means is operated in a specified manner, the changeability determination means determines whether or not to shift to a changeable state in which the degree of advantage to the player can be changed. You. Here, when the second operation means is specified and the opening / closing detecting means detects opening / closing of the opening / closing body, and the decorative opening / closing detecting means does not detect the opening / closing of the decorative body, the change provided in the changeability determination means is provided. The transition means transitions to a changeable state. That is, as conditions for shifting to the changeable state, a specific operation on the second operating means, detection of opening / closing of the opening / closing body by the opening / closing detecting means, and non-opening (that is, closing) of the decorative body by the decorative opening / closing detecting means. When the condition for detection is satisfied, the state can be changed to a changeable state. As a result, during maintenance work in which both the opening and closing body and the decorative body are open, the setting change cannot be performed, thereby making it difficult for an employee who does not have the authority to change the setting to change the setting. This has the effect of improving the security performance of the device.

In gaming machine shop 0,
Confirmation availability determination means for determining whether or not to shift to an advantage confirmability state in which an advantage for a player can be confirmed when the first operation means is operated in a predetermined manner and the second operation means is specifically operated. (For example, S4408 of start-up processing: YES),
The confirmation possibility determination means,
In the case where the second operation means is the specific operation, the opening / closing detecting means detects the opening of the opening / closing body, and the decorative opening / closing detecting means does not detect the opening / closing of the decorative body, the state in which the advantage can be confirmed. (For example, S4451: YES and S4452: YES of the start-up process).

  According to the gaming machine shop 1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine shop 0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first operation means is operated in a predetermined manner, and when the second operation means is operated in a specific manner, whether or not the confirmation possibility determination means shifts to a confirmable state in which the degree of advantage to the player can be confirmed. Is determined. Here, when the second operating means is operated in a specific manner, the opening / closing detecting means detects the opening of the opening / closing body, and the decorative opening / closing detecting means does not detect the opening / closing of the decorative body, the change provided in the confirmation possibility determining means is provided. The transition means transitions to a state in which the degree of advantage can be confirmed. That is, as the conditions for shifting to the state of being able to be set to the advantage nucleus, the specific operation on the second operation means, the detection of opening of the opening / closing body by the opening / closing detection means, and the non-opening of the decoration body by the decoration opening / closing detection means (ie, When the condition of detection of (closed) is satisfied, the state can be shifted to the state in which the advantage can be confirmed. As a result, during maintenance work in which both the opening and closing body and the decorative body are open, the configuration is configured so that setting confirmation cannot be performed. This has the effect of improving the security performance of the device.

In gaming machine Shio 0 or Shii 1,
A third operating means (for example, a RAM erase switch 122) which can be operated when the opening / closing body is opened;
Operating mode detecting means for detecting the operating mode of the third operating means (for example, detection of ON or OFF of the RAM erase switch 122),
The change availability determination means,
When the operation mode detection unit detects a first operation mode (for example, ON) of the third operation unit, it determines whether to shift to the changeable state,
The confirmation possibility determination means,
When the operation mode detection unit detects a second operation mode (for example, off) different from the first operation mode of the third operation unit, it is determined whether or not to shift to the advantage confirmable state. A gaming machine shop 2 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine shod 2, the following effects are exerted in addition to the effects of the gaming machine sho 0 or the shred 1. That is, when the opening / closing body is opened, the third operation means becomes operable, and the operation mode of the third operation means is detected by the operation mode detection means. Then, when the operation mode detecting unit detects the first operation mode of the third operating unit, the changeability determining unit determines whether or not to shift to the changeable state. When a second operation mode different from the first operation mode of the operation unit is detected, a determination is made by the confirmation availability determination unit as to whether or not the state shifts to the advantage confirmability state. Thereby, there is an effect that the state can be shifted to either the changeable state or the advantage degree confirmable state according to the operation mode of the third operation means.

  The “second operation mode” may be any operation mode as long as it is different from the first operation mode. For example, when the first operation mode is pressed, the second operation mode includes Operation modes other than pressing, that is, operation modes such as non-pressing, touching, and pulling, are applicable.

In any of the gaming machines Shi 0 to Shi 2
The predetermined operation of the first operation means includes:
This is an operation for changing from a state in which the power of the gaming machine is turned off to a state in which the power of the gaming machine is turned on,
The change availability determination means,
A game machine shop 3 which is executed in a start-up process executed when the power of the game machine is turned on.

  According to the gaming machine shop 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine shops 0 to 2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the predetermined operation of the first operation means corresponds to an operation of changing from a state in which the power of the gaming machine is turned off to a state in which the power of the gaming machine is turned on, and when the power of the gaming machine is turned on. In the startup process to be executed, the determination by the changeability determination unit is performed. Thereby, when the setting of the gaming machine is changed, whether or not to shift to the changeable state when the power of the gaming machine is turned on in response to the operation of the first operation means provided on the back side of the gaming machine. Can be determined. Therefore, before the control of the game is executed, it is possible to determine whether or not to shift to the changeable state and set the gaming machine.

In gaming machine shop 3,
The confirmation possibility determination means,
A gaming machine chain 4 which is executed in the start-up process.

  According to the gaming machine shod 4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine shod 3. That is, similarly to the change possibility determination means, the determination by the confirmation possibility determination means is executed in the start-up processing executed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on. Thereby, when the setting of the gaming machine is checked, when the power of the gaming machine is turned on in accordance with the operation of the first operation means provided on the back side of the gaming machine, whether the state shifts to the state in which the advantage can be confirmed. Can be determined. Therefore, before the control of the game is executed, it is possible to determine whether or not to shift to the state where the advantage can be checked, and to check the setting of the gaming machine.

In any of gaming machine shack 0 to gaming machine shack 4,
When the opening / closing body is locked to the support by the first locking means, the second operation means is made difficult to operate, and when the opening / closing body is released from the support, the second operation means is closed. (2) A gaming machine shop 5 provided with protection means (for example, a protection cover member 140) for enabling operation of the operation means.

  According to the gaming machine shod 5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine sho 0 to the shod 4. That is, when the opening / closing body is locked to the support by the first locking means by the protection means, the second operating means is made difficult to operate, and when the opening / closing body is released from the support, the second operating means is opened. The operation means is configured to be operable. Thus, when the opening / closing body is opened from the support and the decorative body is closed by the opening / closing body or the support, the opening / closing body is configured to be easily operable while the opening / closing body is connected to the support. When locked, the protection means makes the second operation means difficult to operate, and the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine when the opening / closing body is locked to the support can be improved. There is.

In the gaming machine shop 5,
The protection means,
A gaming machine chain 6, which is attached to the support.

  According to the gaming machine shod 6, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine shod 5. That is, when the opening / closing body is locked to the support by the first locking means by the protection means attached to the support, the second operating means is made difficult to operate, and the opening / closing body is released from the support. The second operating means is configured to be operable when there is. Thus, when the opening / closing body is opened from the support and the decorative body is closed by the opening / closing body or the support, the opening / closing body is configured to be easily operable while the opening / closing body is connected to the support. When locked, the protection means makes the second operation means difficult to operate, and the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine when the opening / closing body is locked to the support can be improved. There is.

In gaming machine sushi 5 to sushi 6,
The protection means,
A game machine 7 formed of a transparent material or a translucent material.

  According to the gaming machine shed 7, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine shed 5 or 6. That is, the protection means is formed of a transparent material or a translucent material. Thereby, when the opening / closing body is closed, it becomes possible to confirm the changing means from the back side of the gaming machine through the transparent or translucent protection means, and it is possible to early detect any injustice or trouble with the changing means, This has the effect.

<Group: Cover that protects parts that affect the game specifications>
Conventionally, on the back of the opening and closing body of a gaming machine composed of a support and an opening and closing body, a large number of influence means that affect the result of the game are arranged, and during the opening hours of the hall, While the opening / closing body is locked so that the influence means cannot be operated by the player, the maintenance work of the influence means is performed by opening the opening / closing body outside the opening hours of the hall (for example, Patent Document 1 Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-024202)).

  However, even in such a gaming machine, even when the opening / closing body is closed, there is a possibility that an illegal act may be performed on the influence means from the back side of the gaming machine, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The invention of the group of the present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing improper acts on the influence means from the back side of the gaming machine.

An opening / closing body (for example, the inner frame 12) supported to be openable and closable with respect to the support (for example, the outer frame 11);
A locking device (for example, a cylinder lock 20) for locking the opening / closing body and the support,
Influence means (for example, a setting key 501, a main control device 110, or a payout control device 111) mounted on the opening / closing body and affecting a result of a game by a player;
When the opening / closing body is locked to the support by the locking device, it covers a part or the entirety of the influencing means, and when the opening / closing body is released from the support, A gaming machine 0 that includes a protection means (for example, a protection cover member 140) that enables operation.

  According to the gaming machine 0, the opening and closing body is supported on the support so as to be openable and closable, the opening and closing body and the support are locked by the locking device, and the influence means mounted on the opening and closing body allows the player to play the game. The result is affected. The protection means covers a part or the entirety of the influencing means when the opening / closing body is locked to the support by the locking device, and operates the influencing means when the opening / closing body is released from the support. Is made possible. Thus, when the opening / closing body is opened from the support, the influence means is configured to be easily operable, and when the opening / closing body is locked to the support, a part of the influence means is protected by the protection means. Alternatively, there is an effect that it is difficult to perform operations for all of them, and the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine when the opening / closing body is locked to the support can be improved.

  In addition, "influencing the result of a game" is, for example, a case in which the effect is obtained by performing a main control of the game, or a case in which the setting is changed or determined so as to have an effect. For example, there is a case where the payment of the game value has an effect on the payout.

In gaming machine 0,
The influence means,
Main control means for controlling the game (for example, main control device 110);
Payout control means (for example, payout control) for performing control in accordance with a payout instruction of game media output from the main control means based on establishment of a predetermined prize condition (for example, winning of a ball into the first starting port 64a). Device 111), and
The protection means,
A gaming machine 1 which covers a part or all of the main control means and also covers a part or all of the payout control means.

  According to the gaming machine 5, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 5. That is, the game is controlled by the main control means provided as the influence means, and the game medium outputted from the main control means based on the establishment of the predetermined prize condition by the payout control means also provided as the influence means. Is controlled according to the payout instruction. Here, the protection means covers part or all of the main control means, and also covers part or all of the payout control means. With this configuration, when the opening and closing body is unlocked from the support, the main control unit and the payout control unit can be easily operated, and when the opening and closing body is locked to the support, The protection means can make it difficult to operate a part or all of the main control means and a part or all of the payout control means. Therefore, there is an effect that the security performance of the back side of the gaming machine when the opening / closing body is locked to the support body can be improved by one member (protection means).

In gaming machine 5,
The main control means includes:
A main control board (e.g., a main board) on which a microchip (e.g., MPU 201) for executing processing relating to a game is mounted;
Main storage means for storing the main control board (for example, the board box 100);
Main sealing means (for example, a sealing unit 100c) for sealing the main storage means so as to be difficult to open.
The protection means,
A gaming machine 2 which covers at least the main sealing means.

  According to the gaming machine 5, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 5. That is, a microchip for executing processing relating to a game is mounted on a main control board provided in the main control means, and the main control board is stored in the main storage means. Then, the main storage means is sealed by the main sealing means so as to be difficult to open. Here, the protection means covers at least the main sealing means.

  Conventionally, illegal actions such as unauthorized replacement of the main control board due to cutting of the main sealing means for sealing the main storage means storing the main control board in a difficult-to-open manner are performed, causing an unexpected disadvantage to the hall. There is a risk.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine 5, at least the main sealing means is covered by the protection means. Thereby, by covering the main sealing means of the main storage means, which houses the main control board on which the microchip for executing the processing relating to the game is mounted, with the protection means, it is possible to prevent improper actions such as unauthorized exchange of the main control board. However, when the opening / closing body is closed, there is an effect that the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine can be improved.

In gaming machine 5 or 5
The main control means includes:
A game value providing means for providing a predetermined game value to the player based on the game result (for example, a large opening opening / closing process (S103));
Setting means (for example, a setting key 501) capable of setting and changing the probability that the game value to be provided to the player by the game value providing means is derived.
The protection means,
A gaming machine 5 which covers at least the setting means.

  According to the gaming machine 53, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 5 or 5. That is, a predetermined game value is provided to the player by the game value provision means, and the setting means can change the probability of deriving the game value to be provided to the player by the game value provision means. Then, at least the setting unit is covered by the protection unit. With this, by covering the setting means capable of changing the probability of deriving the game value given to the player with the protection means, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as illegally changing the setting contents, and at the time of closing the opening / closing body Thus, the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine can be improved.

In any of gaming machines 5 to 5,
The main control means includes:
A wiring attaching section (for example, a connector attaching section 100h) to which a wiring is attached for outputting control information to other control means including the dispensing control means;
The protection means,
A gaming machine 4 which covers at least the wiring attachment portion.

  According to the gaming machine 54, in any one of the gaming machines 1 to 3, the wiring attachment portion of the main control means causes the wiring for outputting control information to the other control means including the payout control means. Is attached, and at least the wiring attachment portion is covered by the protection means. Thus, by covering the wiring attachment portion where the wiring for exchanging control information between the main control means and the other control means is attached with the protection means, it is possible to prevent improper actions such as attaching an incorrect board to the wiring. However, when the opening / closing body is closed, there is an effect that the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine can be improved.

In any of gaming machines 5 to 5,
The main control means includes:
Game performance information display means (for example, a base display device 401) for displaying game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in the gaming machine,
The protection means,
A gaming machine 5 wherein the gaming performance information display means is not covered.

  According to the gaming machine 5, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines 5-1. That is, the game performance information display means provided in the main control means displays game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in the gaming machine, and the protection means prevents the game performance information display means from being covered. Be composed. Thus, there is an effect that the game performance information can be always checked without the game performance information being unable to be checked by the protection means.

In any of gaming machines 5 to 5,
The payout control means,
A payout control board (e.g., a payout board) on which a microchip (e.g., the MPU 211) that executes processing related to a payout operation of a game medium is mounted;
Payout storage means (for example, a substrate box 101) for storing the payout control board;
Dispensing sealing means (for example, a sealing portion 111a) for sealing the dispensing storage means so as to be difficult to open;
The protection means,
A gaming machine 6 characterized by covering at least the payout sealing means.

  According to the gaming machine 56, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines 5 to 5. In other words, a payout control board provided in the payout control means is provided with a microchip for executing processing relating to the payout operation of the game medium, and the payout control board is stored in the payout storage means. Then, the dispensing storage means is sealed by the dispensing sealing means so as to be difficult to open. Here, at least the dispensing sealing means is covered with the protection means.

  Conventionally, improper actions such as improper replacement of the dispensing control board due to cutting of the dispensing and sealing means for sealing the dispensing storage means containing the dispensing control board so as to be difficult to open are performed, causing an unexpected disadvantage to the hall. There is a risk.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine 6, at least the payout sealing means is covered by the protection means. Thereby, by covering the payout sealing means of the payout storing means storing the payout control board mounting the microchip for executing the processing relating to the payout operation of the game medium with the protection means, the payout control board is illegally replaced. This has the effect of preventing fraud and improving the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine when the opening / closing body is closed.

In any of the gaming machines 5 to 6,
Storage means (for example, RAM 203) for storing game information related to the game being executed;
Erasing means (for example, a RAM erasing switch 122) for erasing the game information stored in the storage means by performing a predetermined operation (for example, a pressing operation when the power is turned on);
The protection means,
A gaming machine 7 covering at least the erasing means.

  According to the gaming machine 5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machines 5 to 6. In other words, the information relating to the game being executed is stored in the storage unit, and the game information stored in the storage unit is deleted by performing a predetermined operation on the deletion unit. Then, the erasing means is covered by the protection means. In this way, by covering the erasing means capable of erasing the game-related information with the protection means, it is possible to prevent improper operations such as illegally erasing the game-related information, etc. There is an effect that security performance can be improved.

In gaming machine 5,
The erasing means,
Deleting the information stored in the storage means when the first condition is satisfied;
A gaming machine (8), wherein the probability that the game value is derived is updated when a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine 8, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 7. That is, when the first condition is satisfied, the information stored in the storage device is deleted by the erasing device, and when the second condition different from the first condition is satisfied, the probability that the game value is derived is updated. You. Thus, the erasing unit can erase the storage unit and change the probability by the setting unit under different conditions, and perform various settings of the gaming machine with a small number of members, thereby reducing manufacturing costs. There is.

In any of gaming machines 5 to 8,
The support is
Formed by combining multiple plates,
The protection means,
A gaming machine 9 characterized by being mounted in a cantilever manner on any one of the plate bodies (for example, the right side plate 11d).

  According to the gaming machine 9, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines 5 to 8. That is, a support is formed by combining a plurality of plate members, and the protection means is attached to any one of the plate members in a cantilever shape. This has the effect that fraudulent acts on the influence means can be prevented with a simple structure, and the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine can be improved at low cost.

  The “cantilever beam shape” refers to a beam shape in which one end of the protection means is fixed and the other end is free without being fixed.

In any of gaming machines 0-5,
The protection means,
A gaming machine 10 characterized by being formed of a transparent material or a translucent material.

According to the gaming machine 10, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines 5 to 9.
That is, the protection means is formed of a transparent material or a translucent material. Thereby, when the opening / closing body is closed, it is possible to check the influence means from the back side of the gaming machine through the transparent or translucent protection means, and it is possible to early detect any injustice or malfunction with respect to the influence means, This has the effect.

<Land group: Connect the covers on the back side of the pachinko machine>
Conventionally, on the back side of a gaming machine, a plurality of control means for executing various settings and processing of a game are arranged, and when the opening / closing body equipped with each control means is closed, a player comes into contact with the control means. It is configured so that it cannot be done. On the other hand, the person in charge of the hall opens the opening / closing body outside the opening hours of the hall and performs various settings and maintenance work for the control means (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-024202)).

  However, even in such a game machine, even when the opening / closing body is closed, there is a possibility that an illegal act may be performed on the control means from the back side of the game machine, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The invention of the land group has been made in view of the above circumstances, and it is an object of the invention to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing an illegal act on a control means from the back side of the gaming machine.

An opening / closing body (for example, the inner frame 12) supported to be openable and closable with respect to the support (for example, the outer frame 11);
First control means (for example, the sound lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114) and second control means (for example, the main control device 110 or payout) which are mounted on the back side of the game machine and control the game. Control device 111);
First protection means (for example, a back pack 92) provided on the back side of the gaming machine of the opening / closing body and covering at least a part or the whole of the back side of the gaming machine of the first control means;
A second protection unit (for example, a protection cover member 140) that is provided on the support and covers at least a part or the entirety of the second control unit on the back side of the gaming machine;
A game machine land 0, wherein a part of the first protection means is formed so as to overlap with a part of the second protection means in a rear surface direction of the game machine.

  According to the gaming machine land 0, the opening / closing body is supported on the support so as to be openable and closable, and the first control means and the second control means for controlling the game are mounted on the back side of the gaming machine with respect to the opening / closing body. Then, at least a part or all of the first control means on the back side of the gaming machine is covered by the first protection means mounted on the back side of the gaming machine of the opening / closing body. Also, at least a part or all of the second control means on the back side of the gaming machine is covered by the second protection means provided on the support. Here, a part of the first protection means is formed so as to be in contact with a part of the second protection means in a superimposed manner in the back side of the gaming machine. This eliminates the gap between the first protection means and the second protection means that respectively cover the first control means and the second control means, and there is no room for wires or the like to enter the inside of the gaming machine from the back side of the gaming machine. There is an effect that the security performance on the back side of the machine can be improved. Also, when the first protection means provided on the opening / closing body is formed so as to overlap with the second protection means provided on the supporting body in the back direction of the gaming machine, the opening / closing body is released from the supporting body. However, since the first protection means of the opening and closing body and the second protection means of the support do not interfere with each other, the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine is improved without increasing extra work in maintenance work and the like. There is an effect that can be.

In gaming machine land 0,
The opening and closing body is
Installing the first control means above the second control means,
The first protection means includes:
A first protection unit that covers the back side of the gaming machine of the first control unit;
A first protruding portion (for example, a lower side protruding portion) that protrudes below the first protection portion and on the back side of the gaming machine,
The second protection means is
A second protection unit that covers a part or all of the second control unit on the back side of the gaming machine;
A second protruding portion (for example, an upper side protruding portion) that protrudes toward the front side of the gaming machine above the first protection portion,
The gaming machine land 1, wherein the first projecting portion is formed so as to overlap the second projecting portion in the up-down direction of the gaming machine.

  According to the gaming machine land 1, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine land 0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the opening / closing body, the first control means is disposed above the second control means. In addition, the back side of the gaming machine of the first control unit is covered by the first protection unit provided in the first protection unit, and the first protrusion provided below the first protection unit is moved to the back side of the gaming machine. Protruded. Further, the back surface of the game machine of the second control means is covered by the second protection portion provided on the first protection means, and the second projection provided above the second protection portion is moved to the front side of the game machine. Protruded. The first projection is formed so as to overlap the second projection in the up-down direction of the gaming machine. Thus, since the respective projections of the first protection means and the second protection means are formed so as to be folded in the vertical direction, a gap between the first protection means and the second protection means can be eliminated. Therefore, it is possible to effectively prevent wire or the like from entering from the back side of the gaming machine, and to improve security performance on the back side of the gaming machine.

In land machine 0 or land 1,
The support is
Formed by combining multiple plates,
The second protection means includes:
A gaming machine land 2 which is attached to one of the plate bodies (for example, the right side plate 11d) in a cantilever manner.

  According to the gaming machine land 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine land 0 or land 1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a support is formed by combining a plurality of plates, and the second protection means is attached to any one of the plates in a cantilever shape. This has the effect of preventing improper acts on the second control means with a simple structure, and improving the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine at low cost.

  The “cantilever beam shape” refers to a beam shape in which one end of the protection means is fixed and the other end is free without being fixed.

In gaming machine land 2,
The first protection means includes:
A game machine land 3, wherein at least one end and the other end of the first protection means are attached to the opening / closing body in a shape of a fixed beam at both ends.

  According to the gaming machine land 3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine land 2. That is, at least one end and the other end of the first protection means are attached to the opening / closing body in the form of fixed beams at both ends, respectively. Thus, even when an impact is applied to the second protection means attached to the support in a cantilever manner from the back side of the gaming machine, the first protection attached to the opening / closing body in the form of beams fixed at both ends. By means, the rigidity of the second protection means can be compensated. Therefore, even when an impact or the like is given from the back side of the gaming machine, the second protection means can be prevented from being damaged.

In any of land 0 to land 3,
A locking device (for example, a cylinder lock 20) for locking the opening / closing body and the support,
A game body (e.g., game board 13) having a game area provided with a ball entry means (e.g., the first starting port 64a) mounted on the opening / closing body and capable of entering a game ball;
Launching means (for example, a ball launching unit 112a) for launching a game ball toward the game area;
Lottery information acquisition means (for example, a reserved ball storage area 203B) for acquiring lottery information based on a game ball fired by the shooting means having entered the ball entry means;
Determining means for determining the lottery information obtained by the lottery information obtaining means (for example, a change start process (S307));
A game value providing means (for example, a large open / close processing (S103)) for providing a predetermined game value to the player based on the specific determination result being derived by the determining means;
Setting means (for example, a setting key 501) capable of setting and changing a probability that the specific judgment result is derived by the judging means,
The second protection means includes:
When the opening / closing body is locked to the support by the locking device, the setting means is made difficult to operate, and when the opening / closing body is released from the support, the setting means is operable. A gaming machine land 4 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine land 4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine land 0 to land 3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the opening / closing body and the support are locked by the locking device. Then, the game body is mounted on the opening and closing body, and a game area is formed in which the game body is provided with a ball entry means capable of entering a game ball. Further, the launching means launches the game ball toward the game area, and the lottery information acquiring means acquires lottery information based on the fact that the game ball fired by the launching means enters the ball entry means.
Then, the determination means determines the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means, and based on the fact that the specific determination result is derived by the determination means, a predetermined game value is provided to the player by the game value provision means. Is done. Here, the setting means is configured such that the probability of deriving the specific determination result by the determining means can be changed. The second protection means makes the setting means difficult to operate when the opening / closing body is locked to the support by the locking device, and operates the setting means when the opening / closing body is released from the support. It is configured to be possible. Accordingly, when the opening / closing body is opened from the support, the setting means is configured to be easily operable, and when the opening / closing body is locked to the support, the setting means is controlled by the second protection means. This has the effect of making operation difficult and improving the security performance of the back side of the gaming machine when the opening and closing body is locked to the support.

In any of land 0 to land 4,
When the opening / closing body is closed with respect to the support, there is provided an engagement means for engaging a part of the first protection means and a part of the second protection means. Gaming machine land 5.

  According to the gaming machine land 5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine land 0 to land 4. That is, when the opening / closing body is closed with respect to the support, a part of the first protection means and a part of the second protection means are engaged by the engagement means. Thereby, the first protection means and the second protection means are engaged when the opening / closing body is closed, so that a gap between the first protection means and the second protection means can be eliminated. Therefore, it is possible to effectively prevent wire or the like from entering from the back side of the gaming machine when the opening / closing body is closed, thereby improving security performance on the back side of the gaming machine.

In gaming machine land 5,
The locking device,
It is configured to be operable from the front of the gaming machine,
A game machine land 6 comprising an engagement releasing means for releasing the engagement of the first protection means and the second protection means by the engagement means by a predetermined operation.

  According to the gaming machine land 6, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine land 5. That is, the locking device is configured to be operable from the front side of the gaming machine, and is engaged with the first protection means and the second protection means by the engagement means by performing a predetermined operation by the engagement release means provided on the locking device. Is released. Thereby, the engagement between the first protection means and the second protection means can be released from the front side of the gaming machine, so that even when the opening / closing body is released from the support, the engagement from the front side of the gaming machine can be achieved. By releasing the engagement between the first protection means and the second protection means by performing a predetermined operation of the release means, there is an effect that the opening / closing body can be released from the support without any trouble.

In any of the land 0 to land 6,
The first protection means includes:
A game machine land 7 which is supported to be openable and closable with respect to the opening / closing body.

  According to the gaming machine land 7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine land 0 to land 6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first protection means is supported so as to be able to open and close with respect to the opening and closing body. As a result, a part of the first protection means overlaps with a part of the second protection means in the direction of the back of the gaming machine, thereby preventing the first protection means from being opened in the direction of the back of the gaming machine when the opening / closing body is closed. There is an effect that can be.

<Lacquer group: 2 versions of Ichi group>
An opening / closing body (for example, the inner frame 12) supported to be openable and closable with respect to the support (for example, the outer frame 11);
A locking device (for example, a cylinder lock 20) for locking the opening / closing body and the support,
A game body (e.g., game board 13) having a game area provided with a ball entry means (e.g., the first starting port 64a) mounted on the opening / closing body and capable of entering a game ball;
Launching means (for example, a ball launching unit 112a) for launching a game ball toward the game area;
Game value assigning means for assigning a predetermined game value to a player based on the game ball shot by the shooting means having entered the ball entry means (for example, a large opening opening / closing process (S103)); In a gaming machine equipped with
Setting means (for example, a setting key 501) capable of setting and changing the game value provided by the game value providing means,
The support is
When the opening and closing body is locked to the support by the locking device, the setting unit is made difficult to operate, and when the opening and closing body is released from the support, the setting unit is operable. A gaming machine lacquer 0 characterized by comprising protection means (for example, a protection cover member 140).

  According to the gaming machine lacquer 0, the opening and closing body is supported to be able to open and close with respect to the support, and the opening and closing body and the support are locked by the locking device. Then, the game body is mounted on the opening / closing body, and a game area is formed in which the game body is provided with ball entry means capable of entering game balls. In addition, a game ball is fired toward the game area by the firing means, and based on the game ball fired by the firing means entering the ball-in means, a predetermined game is given to the player by the game value providing means. Value is given. Here, the game value provided by the game value providing means can be set and changed by the setting means. And, by the protection means provided on the support, when the opening and closing body is locked to the support by the locking device, while making the setting means difficult to operate, when the opening and closing body is opened from the support, The setting means is configured to be operable. Thus, when the opening / closing body is opened from the support, the setting means is configured to be easily operable, and when the opening / closing body is locked to the support, it is difficult to operate the setting means by the protection means. In addition, there is an effect that the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine when the opening / closing body is locked to the support can be improved.

<Soul group: higher version of Ichi group>
Conventionally, a game medium is fired to a game area provided with a plurality of winning ports by a launching means, and when the game medium wins one of the winning ports, a predetermined number of winning ports are determined for the winning ports. There are gaming machines in which game media are paid out to players.

  Among the above-mentioned gaming machines, for example, there are gaming machines having a function of allowing a person involved in a hall to change game settings such as a condition for acquiring a game value to be given to a player and details of the acquisition (for example, Patent Document: JP-A-2005-024202).

  For such a gaming machine, there is a risk that the game settings may be changed due to fraud, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a change in game setting due to an illegal act.

An opening / closing body (for example, the inner frame 12) supported to be openable and closable with respect to the support (for example, the outer frame 11);
A locking device (for example, a cylinder lock 20) for locking the opening / closing body and the support,
A game body (e.g., game board 13) having a game area provided with a ball entry means (e.g., the first starting port 64a) mounted on the opening / closing body and capable of entering a game ball;
Launching means (for example, a ball launching unit 112a) for launching a game ball toward the game area;
A game value providing means (for example, a large opening opening / closing process (S103)) for providing a predetermined game value to a player when a game ball fired by the shooting means enters the ball entering means. Gaming machines
Setting means (for example, a setting key 501) capable of changing the setting of the degree of advantage to the player in a plurality of stages;
The support is
When the opening and closing body is locked to the support by the locking device, the setting unit is made difficult to operate, and when the opening and closing body is released from the support, the setting unit is operable. A gaming machine handling device comprising a protection means (for example, a protection cover member 140).

According to the gaming machine handling 0, the opening and closing body is supported so as to be able to open and close with respect to the support, and the opening and closing body and the support are locked by the locking device. Then, the game body is mounted on the opening and closing body, and a game area is formed in which the game body is provided with a ball entry means capable of entering a game ball. Further, when the game means launches a game ball toward the game area and the game ball fired by the fire means enters the ball entry means, the game value provision means provides the player with a predetermined game value. Is given. Here, the setting means is configured so that the degree of advantage for the player can be changed in a plurality of stages.
And, by the protection means provided on the support, when the opening and closing body is locked to the support by the locking device, while making the setting means difficult to operate, when the opening and closing body is opened from the support, The setting means is configured to be operable. Thereby, when the opening / closing body is opened from the support, the setting means is configured to be easily operable, and when the opening / closing body is locked to the support, it is difficult to operate the setting means by the protection means. Can be Therefore, there is an effect that the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine when the opening / closing body is locked to the support can be improved.

  The “degree of advantage to the player” refers to, for example, the jackpot probability of the first symbol, the selection probability of the jackpot symbol when the first symbol is hit, and a gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, a probability variation state). Transition probability to 1, the number of prize balls when winning in one winning opening, the driving time or driving mode of the movable role changing the flow mode of the game ball, the inclination mode of the member affecting the flow mode of the game ball, Any member or process that affects a situation that is advantageous to the player when the player plays the game, such as the inclination mode of the gaming machine itself, may be used.

<Kusu: Horizontal version of Group II>
Conventionally, on the back side of a gaming machine, setting means for performing various settings of a game is provided, and when the opening / closing body on which the setting means is mounted is closed, a player cannot contact the setting means. It is configured. On the other hand, the person in charge of the hall opens the opening / closing body outside the opening hours of the hall and executes various maintenance work and setting work for the setting means (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-024202)).

  However, even in such a gaming machine, even when the opening / closing body is closed, there is a possibility that an illegal act may be performed on the setting means from the back side of the gaming machine, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The invention of Ku group has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing an illegal act on a setting means from the back side of the gaming machine.

An opening / closing body (for example, the inner frame 12) supported to be openable and closable with respect to the support (for example, the outer frame 11);
A locking device (for example, a cylinder lock 20) for locking the opening / closing body and the support,
Setting means (for example, a setting key 501) mounted on the opening / closing body to perform various game settings;
Protection means (for example, a protection cover member 140) for protecting the setting means,
When the gaming machine is installed in a game arcade, the protection means is configured to be non-detachable (for example, the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the island facility without a gap by inserting a fixing screw 11g from the outside of the right side plate 11d). Gaming machine 0 characterized by the fact that:

  According to the gaming machine 0, the opening and closing body is supported to be able to open and close with respect to the support, the opening and closing body and the support are locked by the locking device, and various settings of the game are set by the setting means mounted on the opening and closing body. Done. Then, the setting means is protected by the protection means. Here, when the gaming machine is installed in the game arcade, the protection means is configured to be non-detachable. Thereby, in a state where the gaming machine is installed in the game arcade, the protection means for protecting the setting means for performing various settings of the game is configured to be difficult to attach or detach from the gaming machine, thereby preventing an illegal act on the setting means. There is an effect that can be.

An opening / closing body (for example, the inner frame 12) supported to be openable and closable with respect to the support (for example, the outer frame 11);
A locking device (for example, a cylinder lock 20) for locking the opening / closing body and the support,
Setting means (for example, a setting key 501) mounted on the opening / closing body to perform various game settings;
Protection means (for example, a protection cover member 140) for protecting the setting means,
When the opening / closing body and the support are locked by the locking device, the protection means is configured to be non-detachable (for example, in a state in which the mounting surface 151 of the protection cover member 140 is in contact with the inner wall of the right side plate 11d). A gaming machine 1 characterized in that a fixing screw 11g is inserted from the outside of the right side plate 11d).

  According to the gaming machine 1, the opening and closing body is supported to be able to open and close with respect to the support, the opening and closing body and the support are locked by the locking device, and various settings of the game are set by the setting means mounted on the opening and closing body. Done. Then, the setting means is protected by the protection means. Here, when the support and the opening / closing body are locked by the locking device, the protection means is configured to be non-detachable. Thus, in a state where the support and the opening / closing body are locked, the protection means for protecting the setting means for performing various settings of the game is configured to be difficult to attach or detach from the gaming machine, thereby preventing an illegal act on the setting means. There is an effect that can be.

In game machine Ku0 or Ku1,
The setting means,
Has a keyhole that can insert a predetermined key,
The keyhole is
A gaming machine (2) characterized in that when the supporter and the opening / closing body are locked by the locking device, the gaming machine faces the back side of the gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine 2, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 0 or 1. That is, it is configured such that a predetermined key can be inserted into a keyhole provided in the setting means, and is configured such that the keyhole faces the back side of the gaming machine when the support and the opening / closing body are locked by the locking device. .
As a result, there is an effect that the protection means for protecting the setting means for performing various settings of the game can prevent improper operation of the setting means from the back side of the gaming machine.

In game machine Ku0 or Ku1,
The setting means,
Has a keyhole that can insert a predetermined key,
The keyhole is
A gaming machine 3 characterized by facing the gaming machine side when the support and the opening / closing body are locked by the locking device.

  According to the gaming machine 2, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 0 or 1. That is, a predetermined key can be inserted into a keyhole provided in the setting means, and when the support and the opening / closing body are locked by the locking device, the keyhole is located on the side of the gaming machine (rightward or leftward). It is configured to face. As a result, there is an effect that the protection means for protecting the setting means for making various settings of the game can prevent the illegal operation of the setting means from the side of the gaming machine.

<Group: Lost big hits due to setting changes>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a game medium such as a game ball is fired toward a game area provided on a game board, and the game ball is directed to one of a plurality of entrances provided in the game area. Performs a winning or losing lottery based on the entry of a ball, and in the case of a winning or losing lottery in the applicable or not lottery, opens the normally closed variable ball-taking means to give a predetermined game value to the player. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-148264).

  However, in the above gaming machine, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, but there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  A group of inventions have been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

Determination information obtaining means (for example, main control device 110) for obtaining determination information (for example, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) based on satisfaction of a predetermined starting condition (for example, winning in the first starting port 64a);
Determining means for determining the determination information obtained by the determination information obtaining means (for example, special figure 1 change start processing (S5505));
Based on the first game result (for example, big hit) being derived by the determination means, a first game value giving means (for example, big hit game) capable of giving a predetermined first game value (for example, big hit game) to the player A special winning opening opening / closing control process (S5710));
A second game value (for example, a small hit game) that is different from the first game value to the player based on the fact that a second game result (for example, a small hit) is derived by the determination means. Game value providing means (for example, small winning opening opening / closing control processing (S5714));
A setting device (for example, S4121 of a setting change process (S4005)) capable of changing a probability that the first game result is derived by the determination device.
At least a first value (for example, a large random number value) corresponding to the first game result and a second value (for example, a small random number value) corresponding to the second game result are used for the determination by the determination means. And a storage unit (for example, special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1) for storing
The determining means includes:
When the determination information acquisition unit extracts the determination information that is a third value other than the first value or the second value (for example, a loss random number value), the game value is not given to the player. Composed,
The said pass / fail storage means,
Depending on the setting value set by the setting unit, the derivation probability of the first value is stored so as to be different in some cases,
The determination information acquisition means,
When the setting value is changed by the setting unit, the derivation probability of the third value is changed with the change of the derivation probability of the first value. The gaming machine 10 characterized in that the increase in the jackpot random number value is compensated for from the lost random number value).

  According to the gaming machine 10, the determination information is obtained by the determination information obtaining means based on the satisfaction of the predetermined starting condition, and the determination information obtained by the determination information obtaining means is determined by the determination means. Then, based on the fact that the first game result is derived by the determining means, a predetermined first game value may be provided to the player by the first game value providing means, and the second game result may be provided by the determining means. Is derived, the predetermined second game value may be provided to the player by the second game value provision means. Further, the probability that the first game result is derived by the determining means is configured to be changeable by the setting means. Here, at least a first value corresponding to the first game result and a second value corresponding to the second game result are stored in the hit / fail storage unit used for the determination by the determination unit. Further, when the determination information acquisition unit extracts the determination information that is the third value other than the first value or the second value, the determination unit is configured not to give a game value to the player. Depending on the setting value set by the setting means, the derivation probability of the first value may be stored in the hit / fail storage means so as to be different, and when the setting value is changed by the setting means, the first value may be changed. The determination information acquisition means is configured to change the derivation probability of the third value in accordance with the change in the derivation probability. With this, depending on the set value, the derivation probability between the first value at which the game value is given to the player and the third value at which the game value is not given to the player is provided with an inflection (brightness), and a variety of game variations is provided. Thus, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In gaming machine 10,
The said pass / fail storage means,
When the setting value is changed by the setting unit, the derivation probability of the second value is configured not to be changed (for example, the number of small hit random number values is maintained even when the setting value is changed). Gaming machines 11 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine 11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 10, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the setting value is changed by the setting unit, the derivation probability of the second value in the hit / fail storage unit is not changed.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in order to install a gaming machine in a gaming hall, it is necessary to pass a certification test conducted by a competent authority and obtain approval indicating that the gaming machine is within a specified range. For this reason, at the time of designing the gaming specification, the developer of the gaming machine continuously plays the game on the pachinko machine at all the set values of the gaming machine in order to pass the certification test and receive approval. A test is performed on the ratio of the number of balls obtained when the ball is played (the number obtained by dividing the number of paid-out balls (the number of safe balls) by the number of out-balls; so-called machine-divided. The first value and the second value need to be distributed so that the probability of deriving the first value and the second value in the determination means is an appropriate value so that the payout rate can be obtained in the test.

  However, in a gaming machine in which the set value can be changed, when the derivation probability of the first value is changed in accordance with the setting change, if the derivation probability of the second value is changed, the first value is changed for each set value. And the payout rate of the second game value based on the derivation probability of the second value need to be calculated separately, and the total payout rate for each set value needs to be calculated. The calculation of the ball rate becomes complicated, and there is a possibility that the man-hour at the time of designing the game specification may increase.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine 11, even if the derivation probability of the first value is changed in accordance with the setting change, the derivation probability of the second value is not changed. With this configuration, it is possible to calculate the payout rate for each set value by considering only the winning probability of the first game value (that is, only the appearance rate of the first game result). This has the effect of facilitating the calculation of the payout rate and suppressing an increase in man-hours when designing game specifications.

In the gaming machine 10 or 11,
The third value is
At a first setting value (for example, setting value “1”) with the lowest derivation probability of the first value, a second setting value (for example, setting value A gaming machine 12 characterized by being provided with an increment of the first value in "6").

  According to the gaming machine 12, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines 10 or 11, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the first setting value with the lowest derivation probability of the first value, the third value and the increment of the first value in the second setting value with the highest derivation probability of the first value are provided from the first setting value. ing. Thereby, in all the setting values, all the first values changed by the setting change can be changed from the third values. Therefore, it is possible to calculate the payout rate for each set value by considering only the increase in the winning probability of the first game value, thereby facilitating the calculation of the payout rate and designing the game specifications. This has the effect of suppressing an increase in man-hours at the time.

In any of the gaming machines 10 to 12,
The said pass / fail storage means,
At least three stages of step-by-step success / failure storage means (for example, a special figure 1 jackpot random number table for setting values “1” to “3”) in which the derivation probabilities of the first values are different for each of the setting values set by the setting means 272a1),
The stepwise success / failure storage means,
A gaming machine (13) characterized in that, when the setting value is changed stepwise by the setting means, the derivation probability of the first value is evenly increased.

  According to the gaming machine 13, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines 10 to 12, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the hit / fail judgment storage means is provided with at least three stepwise hit / fail judgment storage means having different derivation probabilities of the first value for each set value set by the setting means. Then, when the setting value is changed stepwise by the setting means, the stepwise success / failure storage means is configured so that the derivation probability of the first value is uniformly increased. This makes it possible to calculate the payout rate for each set value by considering only the increase in the winning probability of the first game value that is increased stepwise and evenly. There is an effect that it is easy to suppress an increase in man-hours at the time of designing game specifications.

  Note that “equally increase” means, for example, that the derivation probability that increases for each set value increases by the same value (for example, 1%) from the derivation probability one step lower, or the derivation probability that is one step lower On the other hand, a case in which the same ratio (for example, 5%) is increased by the same ratio is exemplified.

In any of the gaming machines 10 to 12,
The said pass / fail storage means,
At least three stages of step-by-step success / failure storage means (for example, a special figure 1 jackpot random number table for setting values “1” to “3”) in which the derivation probabilities of the first values are different for each of the setting values set by the setting means 272a1),
The stepwise success / failure storage means,
The gaming machine (14), wherein the derivation probability of the first value is increased at a predetermined rate when the setting value is changed stepwise by the setting means.

  According to the gaming machine 14, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines 10 to 12, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the hit / fail judgment storage means is provided with at least three stepwise hit / fail judgment storage means having different derivation probabilities of the first value for each set value set by the setting means. Then, when the setting value is changed stepwise by the setting means, the stepwise success / failure storage means is configured so that the derivation probability of the first value increases at a predetermined rate. This makes it possible to calculate the payout rate for each set value by considering only the increase in the winning probability of the first game value that increases stepwise and at a predetermined rate, and calculates the payout rate. And it is possible to suppress an increase in man-hours at the time of designing game specifications.

  Note that “increase at a predetermined rate” means, for example, that the derivation probability that increases for each set value increases proportionally (for example, 5%, 10%, 15%,...) Or an exponential function (For example, a case where the number increases to 2 times, 4 times, 8 times,... Based on the set value “1”) is exemplified.

In any of the gaming machines 10 to 14,
The said pass / fail storage means,
Storing the first value as a continuous value;
A gaming machine (15) characterized in that, when the setting value is changed by the setting means, a continuous range of the first value is changed.

According to the gaming machine 15, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machines 10 to 14. That is, the first value is stored as a continuous value by the hit / fail storage unit. Then, when the setting value is changed by the setting means, the range of the continuous first value is changed.
This makes it possible for the determining means to determine the first game value by determining the range from the beginning to the end of the first value. Therefore, even when the setting value is changed by the setting unit, it is not necessary to determine each changed first value in the validity determination, and the value to be determined is determined from the beginning of the first value. It can be determined by determining whether or not it is included up to the end. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load in the determination of success / failure can be reduced.

In any of the gaming machines 10 to 14,
The said pass / fail storage means,
Storing the first value as a discontinuous value;
A gaming machine (16) characterized in that the number of discontinuous first values is changed when the setting value is changed by the setting means.

According to the gaming machine 16, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines 10 to 14, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first value is stored as a discontinuous value by the hit / fail storage unit. Then, when the setting value is changed by the setting means, the number of discontinuous first values is changed.
Thus, the determination of the first game value by the determination means needs to be performed by determining whether each first value matches, but it is difficult to grasp the position (arrangement) of the first value in the hit / failure storage means. . Therefore, by making it difficult for the player to grasp the position (arrangement) of the first value, it is possible to suppress the illegal derivation of the first game value and to increase the security performance of the gaming machine. is there.

In any of the gaming machines 10 to 16,
Launching means (for example, a ball launching unit 112a) for launching a game ball;
A first ball entry means (for example, a first starting port 64a) into which a game ball fired by the firing means can enter;
A game ball fired by the firing means is capable of entering, and a second ball entry means (for example, a second starting port 64b) different from the first ball entry means,
The determination information acquisition means,
A first information acquisition unit (for example, a first reserved ball storage area 273d) for acquiring first determination information as the determination information based on a game ball having entered the first ball entry unit;
A second information acquisition unit (for example, a second reserved ball storage area 273e) for acquiring second determination information as the determination information based on a game ball having entered the second ball entry unit. ,
The determining means includes:
First determining means for determining the first determination information acquired by the first information acquiring means (for example, special figure 1 change start processing (S5505));
A second determination unit (for example, a special figure 2 change start process (S5508)) for determining the second determination information acquired by the second information acquisition unit;
The said pass / fail storage means,
At one predetermined set value (for example, set value "1") set by the setting means, the derivation probability of the first game result by the first determination means and the second determination means (for example, 0.5 %) Is equal to the first value, and
At the predetermined set value set by the setting means, the derivation probability of the second game result by the second determination means (from the derivation probability of the second game result by the first determination means (for example, 1%)) For example, the second value is stored so that
Storing the second value such that the derivation probability (for example, 1%) of the second game result by the first determination means is equal for all the setting values set by the setting means;
The second value is stored such that the derivation probability (for example, 94%) of the second game result by the second determination means is equal in all the setting values set by the setting means. Gaming machine 17 to do.

  According to the gaming machine 17, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines 10 to 16, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a game ball is fired by the firing means, and a game ball fired by the firing means is configured to be able to enter the first ball-in means, and a game ball fired by the fire means is also inserted in the first ball-in means. And a second ball entry means different from the above. Then, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entry means, the first determination information as the determination information is obtained by the first information acquisition means provided in the determination information acquisition means, Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means, the second determination information, which is the determination information, is obtained by the second information acquisition means provided in the determination information acquisition means. Also, the first determination information obtained by the first information obtaining means is determined by the first determining means provided in the determining means, and the second determination information obtained by the second information obtaining means is provided in the determining means. It is determined by the determined second determination means. At this time, at one predetermined set value set by the setting means, the hit / non-kill storage means stores the first game result by the first determination means and the second determination means so that the derivation probabilities are equal. While the first value is stored, the derivation probability of the second game result by the second determination means is higher than the derivation probability of the second game result by the first determination means at a predetermined set value set by the setting means. Then, the second value is stored in the success / failure storage means. In addition, for all the setting values set by the setting unit, the second value is stored in the hit storage unit so that the derivation probabilities of the second game result by the first determination unit are equal in the hit storage unit. In addition, the second value is stored in the hit storage unit so that the probability of derivation of the second game result by the second determination unit is equal in all the setting values set by the setting unit. . Accordingly, the calculation of the payout rate for each set value and each piece of determination information is performed by calculating the increase in the derivation probability of the first game value in the first determination unit and the second determination unit accompanying the setting change, and the first determination unit. The calculation can be performed by taking into account the change in the derivation probability of the second game result with the second determination means, thereby facilitating the calculation of the payout rate and suppressing an increase in man-hours when designing the game specifications. There is an effect that can be.

In the gaming machine 17,
The first game value providing means,
From the predetermined game state before the provision of the first game value (for example, “normal game state”), after the provision of the first game value, an advantageous game state different from the predetermined game state (for example, “super probability fluctuation state” or Game state changing means (for example, jackpot ending processing (S5712)) for changing the game state to "probability change state",
The predetermined game state is
By making it easier for the game ball to enter the first ball entry unit than the second ball entry unit, it is easy to obtain the first determination information from the second determination information,
The advantageous game state is
The first ball entry means allows the game ball to easily enter the second ball entry means, so that the second determination information is more easily obtained than the first determination information. Game machine 18.

  According to the gaming machine 18, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine 17. That is, the game state is changed from the predetermined game state before the first game value is provided to the advantageous game state different from the predetermined game state after the first game value is provided by the game state changing means provided in the first game value provision means. Be changed. Then, in the predetermined game state, the game ball is more likely to enter the first ball entry means than the second ball entry means, so that the first determination information is more easily obtained from the second determination information, and in the advantageous game state, Since the game ball is easier to enter the second ball entry device than the first ball entry device, the second determination information is more easily obtained than the first determination information. Thereby, the calculation of the payout rate for each set value, for each piece of determination information, and for each game state is determined by the increase in the derivation probability of the first game value in the first determination means and the second determination means accompanying the setting change. The approximate calculation can be performed by considering the change in the derivation probability of the second game result between the first determination unit and the second determination unit and the determination information that is easily obtained for each game state. This has the effect of facilitating the calculation of the ball rate and suppressing an increase in man-hours at the time of designing game specifications.

In the gaming machine 17 or 18
First dynamic display execution means (for example, first special display) for executing first dynamic display of first identification information on a display means (for example, special symbol display device 39) based on the judgment result of the first judgment means. Execution of dynamic display of symbols),
A second dynamic display execution unit (for example, a second special symbol) that executes a second dynamic display of second identification information different from the first identification information on the display unit based on the determination result of the second determination unit Execution of dynamic display), and
The display means,
The first dynamic display executed by the first dynamic display executing means and the second dynamic display executed by the second dynamic display executing means can be executed in parallel (simultaneously). Game machine nine.

  According to the gaming machine 19, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines 17 or 18. That is, based on the determination result of the first determination unit, the first dynamic display execution unit executes the first dynamic display of the first identification information on the display unit. In addition, based on the determination result of the second determination unit, the second dynamic display execution unit executes the second dynamic display of the second identification information different from the first identification information on the display unit. Then, the first dynamic display by the first dynamic display execution means and the second dynamic display by the second dynamic display execution means can be executed in parallel (simultaneously) by the display means.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine capable of executing the first dynamic display of the first identification information and the second dynamic display of the second identification information in parallel (simultaneous) progress, the execution time and the like in each dynamic display are considered. When it is necessary to calculate the payout rate, and when the payout rates and the like in the first game result and the second game result are combined and calculated for each set value, the man-hour at the time of designing the game specification becomes enormous. There is a possibility that it will.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine 19, in a gaming machine capable of performing the first dynamic display and the second dynamic display in parallel (simultaneously), the derivation probability of the second game result by the first determination means is set to a set value. And the derivation probability of the second game result in the second determination means is not changed for each set value. With this configuration, it is possible to calculate the payout rate for each set value by considering only the change in the derivation probability of the first game result. In a gaming machine capable of performing display, there is an effect that calculation of a payout rate can be facilitated, and an increase in man-hours at the time of designing game specifications can be suppressed.

In game machine 19,
The first determining means includes:
In a situation where the second game result can be derived in the first dynamic display by the first dynamic display execution means, the second dynamic display is being executed by the second dynamic display execution means, When the first game result or the second game result can be derived in the second dynamic display, and the execution time of the second dynamic display is longer than the execution time of the first dynamic display, A result changing means (for example, a special figure 2 changing process (S5520)) for deriving a game result other than the first game result or the second game result in the second dynamic display is provided. Gaming machine 110.

  According to the gaming machine 110, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine 19. That is, in a situation where the second game result can be derived in the first dynamic display by the first dynamic display execution means, the second dynamic display is being executed by the second dynamic display execution means, and 2 If the first game result or the second game result can be derived in the dynamic display and the execution time of the second dynamic display is longer than the execution time of the first dynamic display, the first determination means The result changing means provided is configured to derive a game result other than the first game result or the second game result in the second dynamic display. Thereby, while the second game value is provided based on the second game result based on the first dynamic display, the first game is provided based on the first game result based on the second dynamic display, or based on the second game result. Assignment of the second game value can be prevented from being performed, and it is possible to prevent an excessive game value from being paid out to the player due to the duplicated first game value or second game value. There is an effect that. Further, in calculating the payout rate, it is not necessary to consider the duplicated first game value or the second game value. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

In game machine 19,
The first determining means includes:
In a situation where the second game result can be derived in the first dynamic display by the first dynamic display execution means, the second dynamic display is being executed by the second dynamic display execution means, When the first game result or the second game result can be derived in the second dynamic display, and the execution time of the second dynamic display is longer than the execution time of the first dynamic display, The progress of the second dynamic display is temporarily stopped, and after the provision of the second game value based on the first dynamic display is completed, the temporarily stopped second dynamic display is advanced. A gaming machine (11) comprising: a result suspending means (for example, a modification 130) for deriving the first game result or the second game result.

  According to the gaming machine 11, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine 19. That is, in a situation where the second game result can be derived in the first dynamic display by the first dynamic display execution means by the result temporary suspension means provided in the first determination means, the second dynamic display execution means During the execution of the second dynamic display, the first game result or the second game result can be derived in the second dynamic display, and the execution time of the second dynamic display is the first dynamic display. If it is longer than the execution time of the target display, the progress of the second dynamic display is temporarily stopped, and after the provision of the second game value based on the first dynamic display ends, the second display temporarily stopped. The dynamic display is advanced to derive the first game result or the second game result. Thereby, while the second game value is provided based on the second game result based on the first dynamic display, the first game is provided based on the first game result based on the second dynamic display, or based on the second game result. Assignment of the second game value can be prevented from being performed, and it is possible to prevent an excessive game value from being paid out to the player due to the duplicated first game value or second game value. There is an effect that. Further, in calculating the payout rate, it is not necessary to consider the duplicated first game value or the second game value. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

In any of the gaming machines 18 to 11
When the first game result is derived, a first special ball entry means (for example, a special winning opening 65a) in which a game ball is driven to enter the ball,
When the second game result is derived, a second special ball entry means (for example, a small winning opening 72a) in which a game ball is driven so as to be able to enter,
Movable means (for example, the ordinary electric hand 64c) that can be displaced between a state where a game ball can enter the second ball entry means (for example, the second starting port 64b) and a state where entry is difficult or impossible. When,
A third ball entry means (for example, a through gate 67) which is capable of entering a game ball fired by the launching means and is different from the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means;
A third information acquisition unit (for example, a general-purpose reservation ball storage area 273i) for acquiring third determination information based on the game ball having entered the third ball entry unit;
A third dynamic execution unit that executes a third dynamic display of the third identification information based on the third determination information acquired by the third information acquisition unit (for example, a normal electric hand control process (S5104)) When,
A driving unit (for example, S5805 or S5807 of the ordinary electrical combination control process (S5104)) for driving the movable unit based on an execution result of the third dynamic execution unit,
The movable means,
In a state in which a game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter the second ball entry means, a closed-time rolling means (for example, a normal electric machine in the twenty-eighth embodiment) in which a game ball can roll on the upper part of the movable means. 64c).
The game state changing means,
When the first game value is given based on a predetermined first derivation result as the first game result (for example, a jackpot type of “probability change B” that gives “probability change state”), the game state is changed. Of the advantageous gaming states, the first advantageous transition means (for example, S5754 of the jackpot ending process (S5712) for shifting to a predetermined first advantageous gaming state (for example, the “probability variation state” of the twenty-eighth embodiment): YES) )When,
The first game value is provided based on a second derivation result different from the first derivation result as the first game result (for example, a jackpot type of “probability variation a” that provides a “super probability variation state”). In this case, the second advantageous shifting means for shifting the gaming state to a second advantageous gaming state different from the first advantageous gaming state (for example, “super-probability changing state” in the twenty-eighth embodiment) among the advantageous gaming states. (For example, S5751 of jackpot end processing (S5712): YES),
The third dynamic execution means,
In the first advantageous gaming state, the execution time of the third dynamic display is changed from one end (for example, right end) of the closing-time rolling means to the other end (for example, left end) of the game ball. A short-time pattern (for example, “0.5 seconds”) performed shorter than the rolling time (for example, “3 seconds”)
In the second advantageous gaming state, a long-time pattern (for example, “5 seconds”) in which the execution time of the third dynamic display is made longer than the rolling time,
The driving means,
In the first advantageous game state, the movable means is driven in an easy-to-enter pattern (for example, a normal symbol high probability state and open extension) in which a game ball easily enters the second entering means,
In the second advantageous game state, the movable means is provided in a ball entry pattern (for example, a low probability state of a normal symbol and a non-open extension) in which a game ball is difficult to enter the second entry means from the easy entry pattern. Drive,
The second special entering means,
A gaming machine provided at a position (for example, on the downstream side of the ordinary electric utility 64c) where a game ball rolled from one end to the other end of the closing-time rolling means easily enters the ball. 12.

  According to the gaming machine 112, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines 18 to 111. That is, when the first game result is derived, the first special ball entry means is driven to allow a game ball to enter, and when the second game result is derived, the second special ball entry means Is driven to allow a game ball to enter. The movable means is configured to be displaceable between a state in which a game ball can enter the second ball entry means and a state in which entry is difficult or impossible. Here, the third ball entry means different from the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means is configured so that game balls fired by the firing means can enter. Then, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the third ball entry means, third determination information is acquired by the third information acquisition means, and the third determination information acquired by the third information acquisition means is added to the third determination information. Based on the third dynamic execution means, the third dynamic display of the third identification information is executed, and the driving means drives the movable means based on the execution result of the third dynamic execution means. . Here, in a state in which the game ball cannot enter the second ball entry means or cannot enter the ball, the closing ball rolling means provided on the movable means enables the game ball to roll on the upper part of the movable means. You. Then, when the first gaming value is given as the first gaming result based on the predetermined first derivation result, the gaming state is changed to the advantageous gaming state by the first advantageous shifting means provided in the gaming state changing means. The game is shifted to a predetermined first advantageous gaming state. Also, when the first game value is given based on a second derivation result different from the first derivation result as the first game result, the game state is changed by the second advantageous transition means provided in the game state change means, A transition is made to a second advantageous gaming state different from the first advantageous gaming state among the advantageous gaming states. Here, in the first advantageous game state, the third dynamic execution means sets the third dynamic display based on the rolling time for the game ball to roll from one end to the other end of the closing rolling means. And a long time pattern in which the execution time of the third dynamic display is made longer than the rolling time in the second advantageous game state. In the first advantageous game state, the driving means drives the movable means in the easy-to-enter pattern in which game balls easily enter the second entering means, while in the second advantageous game state, the easy-to-enter pattern The movable means is driven in a ball entry pattern in which it is difficult for game balls to enter the second ball entry means. The second special ball entry means is provided at a position where the game balls rolled from one end to the other end of the closed-time rolling means easily enter the ball. That is, in the first advantageous game state, the execution time of the third dynamic display may be shorter than the time when the game ball can roll over the movable means, and the movable means is driven in the easy-to-enter pattern. From this, the game ball rolling on the upper part of the movable means is likely to enter the second ball entry means, and is difficult to enter the second special ball entry means. On the other hand, in the second advantageous game state, the execution time of the third dynamic display may be longer than the time in which the game ball can roll over the upper part of the movable means, and the movable means is not driven in the easy ball entry pattern. The game ball rolling on the upper part of the movable means does not enter the second ball entry means, but enters the second special ball entry means. Thereby, whether the game ball enters the second special ball entry means when the second game result is derived is made different between the first derived result and the second derived result as the first game result. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine 17 or 18
When the first game result is derived, a first special ball entry means (for example, a special winning opening 65a) in which a game ball is driven to enter the ball,
When the second game result is derived, a second special ball entry means (for example, a small winning opening 72a) in which a game ball is driven so as to be able to enter,
Movable means (for example, the ordinary electric hand 64c) that can be displaced between a state where a game ball can enter the second ball entry means (for example, the second starting port 64b) and a state where entry is difficult or impossible. When,
A third ball entry means (for example, a through gate 67) which is capable of entering a game ball fired by the launching means and is different from the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means;
A third information acquisition unit (for example, a general-purpose reservation ball storage area 273i) for acquiring third determination information based on the game ball having entered the third ball entry unit;
A third dynamic execution unit that executes a third dynamic display of the third identification information based on the third determination information acquired by the third information acquisition unit (for example, a normal electric hand control process (S5104)) When,
A driving unit (for example, S5805 or S5807 of the ordinary electrical combination control process (S5104)) for driving the movable unit based on an execution result of the third dynamic execution unit,
The movable means,
At least in a state in which a game ball can enter the second ball entry means, a protruding rolling means on which the game ball can roll on the upper part of the movable means (for example, the normal electric hand 64c in the twenty-ninth embodiment). Upper surface),
The driving means,
In the predetermined game state, the movable means has a difficult-to-enter or a non-enterable pattern (for example, the normal electric hand 64c has a protruding time of "0.1 second") in which the game ball enters the second entering means. Drive the
In the advantageous gaming state, the movable means is provided in a ball-enterable pattern (for example, the normal electric hand 64c has a projection time of "5 seconds") in which a game ball can enter the second ball entry means by the projecting rolling means. Driving means,
The said pass / fail storage means,
A first success / failure storage unit (for example, special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1) used in the first determination unit;
A second success / failure storage means (for example, special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2) used in the second determination means,
The first success / failure storage means,
Storing the first value while not storing the second value,
The second right / wrong storage means,
Storing the first value and the second value;
The second special entering means,
A fourth ball entry means (for example, a special area switch 208h) capable of entering a game ball flowing into the second special ball entry means,
The fourth ball entry means,
A gaming machine (13), wherein the first gaming value can be given when a gaming ball enters.

According to the gaming machine 13, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines 17 and 18.
That is, when the first game result is derived, the first special ball entry means is driven to allow a game ball to enter, and when the second game result is derived, the second special ball entry means Is driven to allow a game ball to enter. The movable means is configured to be displaceable between a state in which a game ball can enter the second ball entry means and a state in which entry is difficult or impossible. Here, the third ball entry means different from the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means is configured so that game balls fired by the firing means can enter. Then, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the third ball entry means, third determination information is acquired by the third information acquisition means, and the third determination information acquired by the third information acquisition means is added to the third determination information. Based on the third dynamic execution means, the third dynamic display of the third identification information is executed, and the driving means drives the movable means based on the execution result of the third dynamic execution means. . Here, at least in a state where the game ball can enter the second ball entry means, the projecting rolling means provided on the movable means is configured so that the game ball can roll on the upper part of the movable means. Further, the driving means drives the movable means in a predetermined game state in a difficult-to-enter pattern in which game balls are difficult or impossible to enter the second ball-in means. Accordingly, the movable means is driven in a ball-enterable pattern in which a game ball can enter the second ball-in means. Then, the first hit / fail storage means as the hit / fail storage means is used in the first determining means, and the second hit / fail storage means also as the hit / fail storage means is used in the second determining means. Here, the first value storage unit stores the first value, but does not store the second value, and the second value storage unit stores the first value and the second value. The fourth special ball entry means provided in the second special ball entry means allows the game balls flowing into the second special ball entry means to enter the ball, and the game balls enter the second ball entry means. In this case, the first game value can be provided. That is, in the hit determination by the first determination means, since the first value is not stored in the first hit storage means but the first value is stored, the first game result is derived and the first game value is determined. It becomes a playability of whether to get. On the other hand, in the success / failure determination in the second determination means, since the second value is stored in the second success / failure storage means together with the first value, the first game result is derived to obtain the first game value, or The second game result is derived, and further, a game ball is made to enter the fourth ball entry means so as to obtain the first game value. Thus, the pattern of the game value that can be given by the first determination means and the pattern of the game value that can be given by the second determination means can be made different. Therefore, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine 13,
The second right / wrong storage means,
A gaming machine (14), wherein the derivation probability of the second value is configured to be higher than the derivation probability of the first value.

  According to the gaming machine 114, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine 113. That is, the second probability storage means is configured such that the derivation probability of the second value is higher than the derivation probability of the first value. Thereby, in the determination by the second determination means, the second game result based on the extraction of the second value is configured to be generated more than the first game result and the like. Therefore, the pattern of the game value that can be given by the first determination means and the game value that can be given by the second determination means can be clearly different. Therefore, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Second group: Absorb big hits due to setting changes from other random numbers>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a game medium such as a game ball is fired toward a game area provided on a game board, and the game ball is directed to one of a plurality of entrances provided in the game area. Performs a winning or losing lottery based on the entry of a ball, and in the case of a winning or losing lottery in the applicable or not lottery, opens the normally closed variable ball-taking means to give a predetermined game value to the player. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-148264).

  However, in the above gaming machine, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, but there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The two groups of inventions have been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

Determination information obtaining means (for example, main control device 110) for obtaining determination information (for example, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) based on satisfaction of a predetermined starting condition (for example, winning in the first starting port 64a);
Determining means for determining the determination information obtained by the determination information obtaining means (for example, special figure 1 change start processing (S5505));
Based on the first game result (for example, big hit) being derived by the determination means, a first game value giving means (for example, big hit game) capable of giving a predetermined first game value (for example, big hit game) to the player A special winning opening opening / closing control process (S5710));
A second game value (for example, a small hit game) that is different from the first game value to the player based on the fact that a second game result (for example, a small hit) is derived by the determination means. Game value providing means (for example, small winning opening opening / closing control processing (S5714));
A setting device (for example, S4121 of a setting change process (S4005)) capable of changing a probability that the first game result is derived by the determination device.
At least a first value (for example, a large random number value) corresponding to the first game result and a second value (for example, a small random number value) corresponding to the second game result are used for the determination by the determination means. And a storage unit (for example, special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1) for storing
The determining means includes:
When the determination information acquisition unit extracts the determination information that is a third value other than the first value or the second value (for example, a loss random number value), the game value is not given to the player. Composed,
The said pass / fail storage means,
Depending on the setting value set by the setting unit, the derivation probability of the first value is stored so as to be different in some cases,
The determination information acquisition means,
When the setting value is changed by the setting unit, the higher the deriving probability is the higher of the deriving probability of the second value or the deriving probability of the third value in accordance with the change in the deriving probability of the first value. The gaming machine 20 is configured so that the derivation probability of the game is changed (for example, an increase in the jackpot random number value due to the setting change is compensated for from the lost random number value).

  According to the gaming machine 20, the determination information is obtained by the determination information obtaining means based on the establishment of the predetermined starting condition, and the determination information obtained by the determination information obtaining means is determined by the determination means. Then, based on the fact that the first game result is derived by the determining means, a predetermined first game value may be provided to the player by the first game value providing means, and the second game result may be provided by the determining means. Is derived, the predetermined second game value may be provided to the player by the second game value provision means. Further, the probability that the first game result is derived by the determining means is configured to be changeable by the setting means. Here, at least a first value corresponding to the first game result and a second value corresponding to the second game result are stored in the hit / fail storage unit used for the determination by the determination unit. Further, when the determination information acquisition unit extracts the determination information that is the third value other than the first value or the second value, the determination unit is configured not to give a game value to the player. Depending on the setting value set by the setting means, the derivation probability of the first value may be stored in the hit / fail storage means so as to be different, and when the setting value is changed by the setting means, the first value may be changed. With the change of the derivation probability, the determination information acquisition unit changes the derivation probability of the higher derivation probability among the derivation probabilities of the second value and the third value. Thereby, depending on the set value, the first value at which the game value is given to the player and the derivation probability of the combination with a high derivation probability are provided with inflection (enhancement), the variation of the game is abundant, and the interest of the game is enhanced. There is an effect that improvement can be achieved.

In the gaming machine 20,
The said pass / fail storage means,
Regardless of the setting value set by the setting means, the derivation probability of the lower derivation probability is not changed (for example, even if the setting value is changed, the small hit random number value is not changed). The gaming machine 21 characterized in that the number is maintained).

  According to the gaming machine 21, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine 20. That is, no matter which setting value is set by the setting means, the derivation storage means is configured so that the derivation probability of the value with the lower derivation probability is not changed. That is, even if the derivation probability of the first value is changed due to the setting change, the derivation probability of the value with the higher derivation probability is changed without changing the derivation probability of the value with the lower derivation probability. It is configured so that With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from seeing the set value of the gaming machine from the appearance rate of the hand corresponding to the value whose appearance rate is low. Therefore, the setting discriminating element is limited, and, for example, the ratio of the number of balls (the number of paid-out balls (the number of safe balls) obtained when the player continuously plays the game in the pachinko machine is divided by the number of out-balls) The number is a so-called machine split, which may be hereinafter referred to as a "ball rate". Even if the setting is low (i.e., the set value "1", etc.), it is difficult for the player to see the setting, and the game is played. There is an effect that the operation can be continued and the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

In the gaming machine 20 or 21,
The value with a high derivation probability is:
At a first setting value (for example, setting value “1”) having the lowest derivation probability of the first value, a second setting value (for example, setting value) having the highest derivation probability of the first value from the first setting value The gaming machine 22 characterized by being provided with an increase of the first value in "6").

  According to the gaming machine 22, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 20 or 21. In other words, at the setting value with the lowest derivation probability of the first value, a value with an increase of the first value at the setting value with the highest derivation probability of the first value from the setting value, and a value with a high departure probability are provided. Thereby, all the first values changed by the setting change can be changed from the value with the higher derivation probability. Therefore, since a value with a low derivation probability (a small number) is not changed for each setting, the appearance rate of a hand corresponding to the value with a low derivation probability is prevented from being seen by a player through the setting value of the gaming machine. be able to. Therefore, the setting discriminating element is limited, for example, even if the payout rate is low (that is, the set value “1” or the like), it is difficult for the player to find out the setting, and the game is continued. There is an effect that operation can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines 20 to 22,
The value with a high derivation probability is:
A gaming machine 23 characterized by the third value.

  According to the gaming machine 23, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machines 20 to 22. That is, the third value is provided as a value having a high derivation probability. That is, the derivation probability of the third value is set higher than the derivation probability of the second value.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in order to install a gaming machine in a gaming hall, it is necessary to pass a certification test conducted by a competent authority and obtain approval indicating that the gaming machine is within a specified range. For this reason, gaming machine developers can obtain certification in the certification test for the payout rate for all set values of the gaming machine in order to pass the certification test and receive approval when designing the game specifications It is necessary to distribute the first value and the second value such that the derivation probabilities of the first value and the second value in the determination means are appropriate values so that the payout rate is high.

  However, in a gaming machine in which the set value can be changed, when the derivation probability of the first value is changed in accordance with the setting change, if the derivation probability of the second value is changed, the first value is changed for each set value. And the payout rate of the second game value based on the derivation probability of the second value need to be calculated separately, and the total payout rate for each set value needs to be calculated. The calculation of the ball rate becomes complicated, and there is a possibility that the man-hour at the time of designing the game specification may increase.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine 23, when the derivation probability of the first value is changed due to the setting change, only the derivation probability of the third value is changed, and the derivation probability of the second value is not changed. I do. With such a configuration, it is possible to calculate the payout rate for each set value by considering only the winning probability of the first game value, thereby facilitating the calculation of the payout rate. This has the effect of suppressing an increase in man-hours at the time of designing the specifications.

In any of the gaming machines 20 to 23,
The said pass / fail storage means,
At least three stages of step-by-step success / failure storage means (for example, a special figure 1 jackpot random number table for setting values “1” to “3”) in which the derivation probabilities of the first values are different for each of the setting values set by the setting means 272a1),
The stepwise success / failure storage means,
A gaming machine 24 characterized in that, when the setting value is changed stepwise by the setting means, the derivation probability of the first value is evenly increased.

  According to the gaming machine 24, the following effects are obtained in addition to the effects of the gaming machines 20 to 23. That is, the hit / fail judgment storage means is provided with at least three stepwise hit / fail judgment storage means having different derivation probabilities of the first value for each set value set by the setting means. Then, when the setting value is changed stepwise by the setting means, the stepwise success / failure storage means is configured so that the derivation probability of the first value is uniformly increased. This makes it possible to calculate the payout rate for each set value by considering only the increase in the winning probability of the first game value that is increased stepwise and evenly. There is an effect that it is easy to suppress an increase in man-hours at the time of designing game specifications.

  Note that “equally increase” means, for example, that the derivation probability that increases for each set value increases by the same value (for example, 1%) from the derivation probability one step lower, or the derivation probability that is one step lower On the other hand, a case in which the same ratio (for example, 5%) is increased by the same ratio is exemplified.

In any of the gaming machines 20 to 23,
The said pass / fail storage means,
At least three stages of step-by-step success / failure storage means (for example, a special figure 1 jackpot random number table for setting values “1” to “3”) in which the derivation probabilities of the first values are different for each of the setting values set by the setting means 272a1),
The stepwise success / failure storage means,
The gaming machine (2), wherein the derivation probability of the first value is increased at a predetermined rate when the setting value is changed stepwise by the setting means.

  According to the gaming machine 25, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines 20 to 23. That is, the hit / fail judgment storage means is provided with at least three stepwise hit / fail judgment storage means having different derivation probabilities of the first value for each set value set by the setting means. Then, when the setting value is changed stepwise by the setting means, the stepwise success / failure storage means is configured so that the derivation probability of the first value increases at a predetermined rate. This makes it possible to calculate the payout rate for each set value by considering only the increase in the winning probability of the first game value that increases stepwise and at a predetermined rate, and calculates the payout rate. And it is possible to suppress an increase in man-hours at the time of designing game specifications.

  Note that “increase at a predetermined rate” means, for example, that the derivation probability that increases for each set value increases proportionally (for example, 5%, 10%, 15%,...) Or an exponential function (For example, a case where the number increases to 2 times, 4 times, 8 times,... Based on the set value “1”) is exemplified.

In any of the gaming machines 20 to 25,
The said pass / fail storage means,
Storing the first value as a continuous value;
The gaming machine (2), characterized in that, when the setting value is changed by the setting means, a continuous range of the first value is changed.

According to the gaming machine 26, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines 20 to 25. That is, the first value is stored as a continuous value by the hit / fail storage unit. Then, when the setting value is changed by the setting means, the range of the continuous first value is changed.
This makes it possible for the determining means to determine the first game value by determining the range from the beginning to the end of the first value. Therefore, even when the setting value is changed by the setting unit, it is not necessary to determine each changed first value in the validity determination, and the value to be determined is determined from the beginning of the first value. It can be determined by determining whether or not it is included up to the end. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load in the determination of success / failure can be reduced.

In any of the gaming machines 20 to 25,
The said pass / fail storage means,
Storing the first value as a discontinuous value;
The gaming machine (27), wherein, when the setting value is changed by the setting means, the number of discontinuous first values is changed.

According to the gaming machine 27, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machines 20 to 25. That is, the first value is stored as a discontinuous value by the hit / fail storage unit. Then, when the setting value is changed by the setting means, the number of discontinuous first values is changed.
Thus, the determination of the first game value by the determination means needs to be performed by determining whether each first value matches, but it is difficult to grasp the position (arrangement) of the first value in the hit / failure storage means. . Therefore, by making it difficult for the player to grasp the position (arrangement) of the first value, it is possible to suppress the illegal derivation of the first game value and to increase the security performance of the gaming machine. is there.

In any of the gaming machines 20 to 27,
Launching means (for example, a ball launching unit 112a) for launching a game ball;
A first ball entry means (for example, a first starting port 64a) into which a game ball fired by the firing means can enter;
A game ball fired by the firing means is capable of entering, and a second ball entry means (for example, a second starting port 64b) different from the first ball entry means,
The determination information acquisition means,
A first information acquisition unit (for example, a first reserved ball storage area 273d) for acquiring first determination information as the determination information based on a game ball having entered the first ball entry unit;
A second information acquisition unit (for example, a second reserved ball storage area 273e) for acquiring second determination information as the determination information based on a game ball having entered the second ball entry unit. ,
The determining means includes:
First determining means for determining the first determination information acquired by the first information acquiring means (for example, special figure 1 change start processing (S5505));
A second determination unit (for example, a special figure 2 change start process (S5508)) for determining the second determination information acquired by the second information acquisition unit;
The said pass / fail storage means,
At one predetermined set value (for example, set value "1") set by the setting means, the derivation probability of the first game result by the first determination means and the second determination means (for example, 0.5 %) Is equal to the first value, and
At the predetermined set value set by the setting means, the derivation probability of the second game result by the second determination means (from the derivation probability of the second game result by the first determination means (for example, 1%)) For example, the second value is stored so that
Storing the second value such that the derivation probability (for example, 1%) of the second game result by the first determination means is equal for all the setting values set by the setting means;
The second value is stored such that the derivation probability (for example, 94%) of the second game result by the second determination means is equal for all the setting values set by the setting means. Gaming machine 28

  According to the gaming machine 28, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines 20 to 27. That is, a game ball is fired by the firing means, and a game ball fired by the firing means is configured to be able to enter the first ball-in means, and a game ball fired by the fire means is also inserted in the first ball-in means. And a second ball entry means different from the above. Then, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entry means, the first determination information as the determination information is obtained by the first information acquisition means provided in the determination information acquisition means, Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means, the second determination information, which is the determination information, is obtained by the second information acquisition means provided in the determination information acquisition means. Also, the first determination information obtained by the first information obtaining means is determined by the first determining means provided in the determining means, and the second determination information obtained by the second information obtaining means is provided in the determining means. It is determined by the determined second determination means. At this time, at one predetermined set value set by the setting means, the hit / non-kill storage means stores the first game result by the first determination means and the second determination means so that the derivation probabilities are equal. While the first value is stored, the derivation probability of the second game result by the second determination means is higher than the derivation probability of the second game result by the first determination means at a predetermined set value set by the setting means. Then, the second value is stored in the success / failure storage means. In addition, for all the setting values set by the setting unit, the second value is stored in the hit storage unit so that the derivation probabilities of the second game result by the first determination unit are equal in the hit storage unit. In addition, the second value is stored in the hit storage unit so that the probability of derivation of the second game result by the second determination unit is equal in all the setting values set by the setting unit. . Accordingly, the calculation of the payout rate for each set value and each piece of determination information is performed by calculating the increase in the derivation probability of the first game value in the first determination unit and the second determination unit accompanying the setting change, and the first determination unit. The calculation can be performed by taking into account the change in the derivation probability of the second game result with the second determination means, thereby facilitating the calculation of the payout rate and suppressing an increase in man-hours when designing the game specifications. There is an effect that can be.

In gaming machine 28,
The first game value providing means,
From the predetermined game state before the provision of the first game value (for example, “normal game state”), after the provision of the first game value, an advantageous game state different from the predetermined game state (for example, “super probability fluctuation state” or Game state changing means (for example, jackpot ending processing (S5712)) for changing the game state to "probability change state",
The predetermined game state is
By making it easier for the game ball to enter the first ball entry unit than the second ball entry unit, it is easy to obtain the first determination information from the second determination information,
The advantageous game state is
The first ball entry means allows the game ball to easily enter the second ball entry means, so that the second determination information is more easily obtained than the first determination information. Gaming machine two 9.

  According to the gaming machine 29, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine 28. That is, the game state is changed from the predetermined game state before the first game value is provided to the advantageous game state different from the predetermined game state after the first game value is provided by the game state changing means provided in the first game value provision means. Be changed. Then, in the predetermined game state, the game ball is more likely to enter the first ball entry means than the second ball entry means, so that the first determination information is more easily obtained from the second determination information, and in the advantageous game state, Since the game ball is easier to enter the second ball entry device than the first ball entry device, the second determination information is more easily obtained than the first determination information. Thereby, the calculation of the payout rate for each set value, for each piece of determination information, and for each game state is determined by the increase in the derivation probability of the first game value in the first determination means and the second determination means accompanying the setting change. The approximate calculation can be performed by considering the change in the derivation probability of the second game result between the first determination unit and the second determination unit and the determination information that is easily obtained for each game state. This has the effect of facilitating the calculation of the ball rate and suppressing an increase in man-hours at the time of designing game specifications.

In gaming machines 28 or 29,
First dynamic display execution means (for example, first special display) for executing first dynamic display of first identification information on a display means (for example, special symbol display device 39) based on the judgment result of the first judgment means. Execution of dynamic display of symbols),
A second dynamic display execution unit (for example, a second special symbol) that executes a second dynamic display of second identification information different from the first identification information on the display unit based on the determination result of the second determination unit Execution of dynamic display), and
The display means,
The first dynamic display executed by the first dynamic display executing means and the second dynamic display executed by the second dynamic display executing means can be executed in parallel (simultaneously). Gaming machine two 10.

According to the gaming machine 210, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 28 or 29, the following effects are exhibited.
That is, based on the determination result of the first determination unit, the first dynamic display execution unit executes the first dynamic display of the first identification information on the display unit. In addition, based on the determination result of the second determination unit, the second dynamic display execution unit executes the second dynamic display of the second identification information different from the first identification information on the display unit. Then, the first dynamic display by the first dynamic display execution means and the second dynamic display by the second dynamic display execution means can be executed in parallel (simultaneously) by the display means.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine capable of executing the first dynamic display of the first identification information and the second dynamic display of the second identification information in parallel (simultaneous) progress, the execution time and the like in each dynamic display are considered. When it is necessary to calculate the payout rate, and when the payout rates and the like in the first game result and the second game result are combined and calculated for each set value, the man-hour at the time of designing the game specification becomes enormous. There is a possibility that it will.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine 210, in a gaming machine capable of performing the first dynamic display and the second dynamic display in parallel (simultaneously), the derivation probability of the second game result in the first determination means is set to a set value. And the derivation probability of the second game result in the second determination means is not changed for each set value. With this configuration, it is possible to calculate the payout rate for each set value by considering only the change in the derivation probability of the first game result. In a gaming machine capable of performing display, there is an effect that calculation of a payout rate can be facilitated, and an increase in man-hours at the time of designing game specifications can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine 210,
The first determining means includes:
In a situation where the second game result can be derived in the first dynamic display by the first dynamic display execution means, the second dynamic display is being executed by the second dynamic display execution means, When the first game result or the second game result can be derived in the second dynamic display, and the execution time of the second dynamic display is longer than the execution time of the first dynamic display, A result changing means (for example, a special figure 2 changing process (S5520)) for deriving a game result other than the first game result or the second game result in the second dynamic display is provided. Two gaming machines 11.

  According to the gaming machine 211, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 210, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in a situation where the second game result can be derived in the first dynamic display by the first dynamic display execution means, the second dynamic display is being executed by the second dynamic display execution means, and 2 If the first game result or the second game result can be derived in the dynamic display and the execution time of the second dynamic display is longer than the execution time of the first dynamic display, the first determination means The result changing means provided is configured to derive a game result other than the first game result or the second game result in the second dynamic display. Thereby, while the second game value is provided based on the second game result based on the first dynamic display, the first game is provided based on the first game result based on the second dynamic display, or based on the second game result. Assignment of the second game value can be prevented from being performed, and it is possible to prevent an excessive game value from being paid out to the player due to the duplicated first game value or second game value. There is an effect that. Further, in calculating the payout rate, it is not necessary to consider the duplicated first game value or the second game value. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine 210,
The first determining means includes:
In a situation where the second game result can be derived in the first dynamic display by the first dynamic display execution means, the second dynamic display is being executed by the second dynamic display execution means, When the first game result or the second game result can be derived in the second dynamic display, and the execution time of the second dynamic display is longer than the execution time of the first dynamic display, The progress of the second dynamic display is temporarily stopped, and after the provision of the second game value based on the first dynamic display is completed, the temporarily stopped second dynamic display is advanced. A gaming machine (12) comprising: a result suspending means (for example, a modified example (130)) for deriving the first game result or the second game result.

  According to the gaming machine 212, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine 210. That is, in a situation where the second game result can be derived in the first dynamic display by the first dynamic display execution means by the result temporary suspension means provided in the first determination means, the second dynamic display execution means During the execution of the second dynamic display, the first game result or the second game result can be derived in the second dynamic display, and the execution time of the second dynamic display is the first dynamic display. If it is longer than the execution time of the target display, the progress of the second dynamic display is temporarily stopped, and after the provision of the second game value based on the first dynamic display ends, the second display temporarily stopped. The dynamic display is advanced to derive the first game result or the second game result. Thereby, while the second game value is provided based on the second game result based on the first dynamic display, the first game is provided based on the first game result based on the second dynamic display, or based on the second game result. Assignment of the second game value can be prevented from being performed, and it is possible to prevent an excessive game value from being paid out to the player due to the duplicated first game value or second game value. There is an effect that. Further, in calculating the payout rate, it is not necessary to consider the duplicated first game value or the second game value. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

In any of the gaming machines 29 to 212,
When the first game result is derived, a first special ball entry means (for example, a special winning opening 65a) in which a game ball is driven to enter the ball,
When the second game result is derived, a second special ball entry means (for example, a small winning opening 72a) in which a game ball is driven so as to be able to enter,
Movable means (for example, the ordinary electric hand 64c) that can be displaced between a state where a game ball can enter the second ball entry means (for example, the second starting port 64b) and a state where entry is difficult or impossible. When,
A third ball entry means (for example, a through gate 67) which is capable of entering a game ball fired by the launching means and is different from the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means;
A third information acquisition unit (for example, a general-purpose reservation ball storage area 273i) for acquiring third determination information based on the game ball having entered the third ball entry unit;
A third dynamic execution unit that executes a third dynamic display of the third identification information based on the third determination information acquired by the third information acquisition unit (for example, a normal electric hand control process (S5104)) When,
A driving unit (for example, S5805 or S5807 of the ordinary electrical combination control process (S5104)) for driving the movable unit based on an execution result of the third dynamic execution unit,
The movable means,
In a state in which a game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter the second ball entry means, a closed-time rolling means (for example, a normal electric machine in the twenty-eighth embodiment) in which a game ball can roll on the upper part of the movable means. 64c).
The game state changing means,
When the first game value is given based on a predetermined first derivation result as the first game result (for example, a jackpot type of “probability change B” that gives “probability change state”), the game state is changed. Of the advantageous gaming states, the first advantageous transition means (for example, S5754 of the jackpot ending process (S5712) for shifting to a predetermined first advantageous gaming state (for example, the “probability variation state” of the twenty-eighth embodiment): YES) )When,
The first game value is provided based on a second derivation result different from the first derivation result as the first game result (for example, a jackpot type of “probability variation a” that provides a “super probability variation state”). In this case, the second advantageous shifting means for shifting the gaming state to a second advantageous gaming state different from the first advantageous gaming state (for example, “super-probability changing state” in the twenty-eighth embodiment) among the advantageous gaming states. (For example, S5751 of jackpot end processing (S5712): YES),
The third dynamic execution means,
In the first advantageous gaming state, the execution time of the third dynamic display is changed from one end (for example, right end) of the closing-time rolling means to the other end (for example, left end) of the game ball. A short-time pattern (for example, “0.5 seconds”) performed shorter than the rolling time (for example, “3 seconds”)
In the second advantageous gaming state, a long-time pattern (for example, “5 seconds”) in which the execution time of the third dynamic display is made longer than the rolling time,
The driving means,
In the first advantageous game state, the movable means is driven in an easy-to-enter pattern (for example, a normal symbol high probability state and open extension) in which a game ball easily enters the second entering means,
In the second advantageous game state, the movable means is provided in a ball entry pattern (for example, a low probability state of a normal symbol and a non-open extension) in which a game ball is difficult to enter the second entry means from the easy entry pattern. Drive,
The second special entering means,
A gaming machine provided at a position where a game ball rolled from one end of the closing-time rolling means to the other end is easy to enter (for example, downstream of the normal electric utility 64c). 13.

  According to the gaming machine 213, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machines 209 to 212. That is, when the first game result is derived, the first special ball entry means is driven to allow a game ball to enter, and when the second game result is derived, the second special ball entry means Is driven to allow a game ball to enter. The movable means is configured to be displaceable between a state in which a game ball can enter the second ball entry means and a state in which entry is difficult or impossible. Here, the third ball entry means different from the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means is configured so that game balls fired by the firing means can enter. Then, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the third ball entry means, third determination information is acquired by the third information acquisition means, and the third determination information acquired by the third information acquisition means is added to the third determination information. Based on the third dynamic execution means, the third dynamic display of the third identification information is executed, and the driving means drives the movable means based on the execution result of the third dynamic execution means. . Here, in a state in which the game ball cannot enter the second ball entry means or cannot enter the ball, the closing ball rolling means provided on the movable means enables the game ball to roll on the upper part of the movable means. You. Then, when the first gaming value is given as the first gaming result based on the predetermined first derivation result, the gaming state is changed to the advantageous gaming state by the first advantageous shifting means provided in the gaming state changing means. The game is shifted to a predetermined first advantageous gaming state. Also, when the first game value is given based on a second derivation result different from the first derivation result as the first game result, the game state is changed by the second advantageous transition means provided in the game state change means, A transition is made to a second advantageous gaming state different from the first advantageous gaming state among the advantageous gaming states. Here, in the first advantageous game state, the third dynamic execution means sets the third dynamic display based on the rolling time for the game ball to roll from one end to the other end of the closing rolling means. And a long time pattern in which the execution time of the third dynamic display is made longer than the rolling time in the second advantageous game state. In the first advantageous game state, the driving means drives the movable means in the easy-to-enter pattern in which game balls easily enter the second entering means, while in the second advantageous game state, the easy-to-enter pattern The movable means is driven in a ball entry pattern in which it is difficult for game balls to enter the second ball entry means. The second special ball entry means is provided at a position where the game balls rolled from one end to the other end of the closed-time rolling means easily enter the ball. That is, in the first advantageous game state, the execution time of the third dynamic display may be shorter than the time when the game ball can roll over the movable means, and the movable means is driven in the easy-to-enter pattern. From this, the game ball rolling on the upper part of the movable means is likely to enter the second ball entry means, and is difficult to enter the second special ball entry means. On the other hand, in the second advantageous game state, the execution time of the third dynamic display may be longer than the time in which the game ball can roll over the upper part of the movable means, and the movable means is not driven in the easy ball entry pattern. The game ball rolling on the upper part of the movable means does not enter the second ball entry means, but enters the second special ball entry means. Thereby, whether the game ball enters the second special ball entry means when the second game result is derived is made different between the first derived result and the second derived result as the first game result. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

In gaming machines 28 or 29,
When the first game result is derived, a first special ball entry means (for example, a special winning opening 65a) in which a game ball is driven to enter the ball,
When the second game result is derived, a second special ball entry means (for example, a small winning opening 72a) in which a game ball is driven so as to be able to enter,
Movable means (for example, the ordinary electric hand 64c) that can be displaced between a state where a game ball can enter the second ball entry means (for example, the second starting port 64b) and a state where entry is difficult or impossible. When,
A third ball entry means (for example, a through gate 67) which is capable of entering a game ball fired by the launching means and is different from the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means;
A third information acquisition unit (for example, a general-purpose reservation ball storage area 273i) for acquiring third determination information based on the game ball having entered the third ball entry unit;
A third dynamic execution unit that executes a third dynamic display of the third identification information based on the third determination information acquired by the third information acquisition unit (for example, a normal electric hand control process (S5104)) When,
A driving unit (for example, S5805 or S5807 of the ordinary electrical combination control process (S5104)) for driving the movable unit based on an execution result of the third dynamic execution unit,
The movable means,
At least in a state in which a game ball can enter the second ball entry means, a protruding rolling means on which the game ball can roll on the upper part of the movable means (for example, the normal electric hand 64c in the twenty-ninth embodiment). Upper surface),
The driving means,
In the predetermined game state, the movable means has a difficult-to-enter or a non-enterable pattern (for example, the normal electric hand 64c has a protruding time of "0.1 second") in which the game ball enters the second entering means. Drive the
In the advantageous gaming state, the movable means is provided in a ball-enterable pattern (for example, the normal electric hand 64c has a projection time of "5 seconds") in which a game ball can enter the second ball entry means by the projecting rolling means. Driving means,
The said pass / fail storage means,
A first success / failure storage unit (for example, special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1) used in the first determination unit;
A second success / failure storage means (for example, special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2) used in the second determination means,
The first success / failure storage means,
Storing the first value while not storing the second value,
The second right / wrong storage means,
Storing the first value and the second value;
The second special entering means,
A fourth ball entry means (for example, a special area switch 208h) capable of entering a game ball flowing into the second special ball entry means,
The fourth ball entry means,
The gaming machine (14), wherein the first gaming value can be given when a gaming ball enters.

According to the gaming machine 214, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machines 28 or 29.
That is, when the first game result is derived, the first special ball entry means is driven to allow a game ball to enter, and when the second game result is derived, the second special ball entry means Is driven to allow a game ball to enter. The movable means is configured to be displaceable between a state in which a game ball can enter the second ball entry means and a state in which entry is difficult or impossible. Here, the third ball entry means different from the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means is configured so that game balls fired by the firing means can enter. Then, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the third ball entry means, third determination information is acquired by the third information acquisition means, and the third determination information acquired by the third information acquisition means is added to the third determination information. Based on the third dynamic execution means, the third dynamic display of the third identification information is executed, and the driving means drives the movable means based on the execution result of the third dynamic execution means. . Here, at least in a state where the game ball can enter the second ball entry means, the projecting rolling means provided on the movable means is configured so that the game ball can roll on the upper part of the movable means. In addition, the driving means drives the movable means in the predetermined entering game state in a difficult-to-enter pattern in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter the second entering means. The movable means is driven by the means in a ball-enterable pattern in which a game ball can enter the second ball-in means. Then, the first hit / fail storage means as the hit / fail storage means is used in the first determining means, and the second hit / fail storage means also as the hit / fail storage means is used in the second determining means. Here, the first value storage unit stores the first value, but does not store the second value, and the second value storage unit stores the first value and the second value. The fourth special ball entry means provided in the second special ball entry means allows the game balls flowing into the second special ball entry means to enter the ball, and the game balls enter the second ball entry means. In this case, the first game value can be provided. That is, in the hit determination by the first determination means, since the first value is not stored in the first hit storage means but the first value is stored, the first game result is derived and the first game value is determined. It becomes a playability of whether to get. On the other hand, in the success / failure determination in the second determination means, since the second value is stored in the second success / failure storage means together with the first value, the first game result is derived to obtain the first game value, or The second game result is derived, and further, a game ball is made to enter the fourth ball entry means so as to obtain the first game value. Thus, the pattern of the game value that can be given by the first determination means and the pattern of the game value that can be given by the second determination means can be made different. Therefore, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine two 14,
The second right / wrong storage means,
The gaming machine 215, wherein the second value derivation probability is configured to be higher than the first value derivation probability.

  According to the gaming machine 215, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine 215. That is, the second probability storage means is configured such that the derivation probability of the second value is higher than the derivation probability of the first value. Thereby, in the determination by the second determination means, the second game result based on the extraction of the second value is configured to be generated more than the first game result and the like. Therefore, the pattern of the game value that can be given by the first determination means and the game value that can be given by the second determination means can be clearly different. Therefore, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Third group: Probable change machine, loss of more than high probability change & more than setting change exists>
In a conventional gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a ratio of the number of balls obtained when a player continuously plays a game in the pachinko machine (the number obtained by dividing the number of payout balls (the number of safe balls) by the number of out balls). A so-called machine splitting (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a "ball rate") is provided in a plurality of stages, and any one of the set values corresponding to the ball rate desired by a person involved in the hall or the like is set. In some cases, after the power of the pachinko machine is turned on and before the game is started by the player (before the game hall is opened), the hall-related personnel and the like can be set (changed or updated). Then, when the player plays a game with the pachinko machine, a win / fail lottery is performed based on the set value, so that the player can play the game at a payout rate according to the set value. (For example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-109085)).

  However, in the gaming machine, it is necessary to suppress an increase in man-hours at the time of designing game specifications, but there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The inventions of the third group have been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing an increase in man-hours at the time of designing game specifications.

Determination information obtaining means (for example, main control device 110) for obtaining determination information (for example, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) based on satisfaction of a predetermined starting condition (for example, winning in the first starting port 64a);
Determining means for determining the determination information obtained by the determination information obtaining means (for example, special figure 1 change start processing (S5505));
Based on the first game result (for example, big hit) being derived by the determination means, a first game value giving means (for example, big hit game) capable of giving a predetermined first game value (for example, big hit game) to the player A special winning opening opening / closing control process (S5710));
A second game value (for example, a small hit game) that is different from the first game value to the player based on the fact that a second game result (for example, a small hit) is derived by the determination means. Game value providing means (for example, small winning opening opening / closing control processing (S5714));
A setting device (for example, S4121 of a setting change process (S4005)) capable of changing a probability that the first game result is derived by the determination device.
Game state changing means (for example, a jackpot ending process) for changing a game state from a predetermined game state (for example, a “normal game state”) to an advantageous game state (for example, a “probability variation state”) that is advantageous to the player (S5712)),
Probability changing means for changing the derivation probability of the first game result when the predetermined game state is changed to the advantageous game state by the game state changing means (for example, S5516 of special figure 1 change start processing (S5505)). )When,
At least a first value (for example, a large random number value) corresponding to the first game result and a second value (for example, a small random number value) corresponding to the second game result are used for the determination by the determination means. (For example, special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1) for storing
The determining means includes:
When the determination information acquisition unit extracts the determination information that is a third value other than the first value or the second value (for example, a loss random number value), the game value is not given to the player. Composed,
The said pass / fail storage means,
Predetermined success / failure storage means used in the predetermined game state (for example, a special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 referred to in a low probability state of a special symbol);
Advantageous success / failure storage means (for example, special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 referred to in a special symbol high probability state) used in the advantageous game state,
The setting means,
At least a minimum setting value (for example, setting value “1”) that is most disadvantageous for the player and a maximum setting value (for example, setting value “6”) that is most advantageous for the player are configured to be settable.
The third value is
At least in the predetermined gaming state of the minimum set value, the number (for example, 50) of the first values stored in the predetermined correctness storage means at the minimum set value, and the advantageous suitability storage means at the highest set value The gaming machine 30 is provided with a number equal to or greater than the difference from the number (for example, 600) of the first values stored in the gaming machine.

  According to the gaming machine 30, the determination information is obtained by the determination information obtaining means based on the establishment of the predetermined starting condition, and the determination information obtained by the determination information obtaining means is determined by the determination means. Then, based on the fact that the first game result is derived by the determining means, a predetermined first game value may be provided to the player by the first game value providing means, and the second game result may be provided by the determining means. Is derived, the predetermined second game value may be provided to the player by the second game value provision means. Further, the probability that the first game result is derived by the determining means is configured to be changeable by the setting means. Further, the gaming state is changed by the gaming state changing means from a predetermined predetermined gaming state to an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player. Then, when the predetermined game state is changed to the advantageous game state by the game state changing means, the derivation probability of the first game result is changed by the probability changing means. Here, at least a first value corresponding to the first game result and a second value corresponding to the second game result are stored in the hit / fail storage unit used for the determination by the determination unit. Further, the predetermined success / failure storage means provided in the success / failure storage means is used in a predetermined game state, and the advantageous success / failure storage means similarly provided in the success / failure storage means is used in the advantageous game state. Further, the setting means is configured to be able to set at least a lowest setting value most disadvantageous to the player and a highest setting value most advantageous to the player. Then, the third values that are equal to or more than the difference between the number of first values stored in the predetermined validity storage means at the lowest set value and the number of first values stored in the advantageous validity storage means at the highest set value are: The minimum setting value is provided in the predetermined gaming state, that is, in all setting values, the number of first values accompanying the setting change is configured to be changeable from the third value, and any setting value may be used. When the number of first values is changed due to a change in the gaming state, the third value provided for the change can be changed. This makes it possible to calculate the payout rate of each set value and the derived probability by considering only the winning probability of the first game value, thereby facilitating the calculation of the payout rate, and This has the effect of suppressing an increase in man-hours at the time of designing.

In the gaming machine 30,
The said pass / fail storage means,
When the derivation probability of the first game result is changed by the probability changing means, the derivation probability of the second value is not changed (for example, even if the probability of the special symbol is changed, a small hit is made). A gaming machine 31 characterized by maintaining the number of random numbers).

  According to the gaming machine 31, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 30, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the derivation probability of the first game result is changed by the probability changing means, the derivation probability of the second value in the success / failure storage means is not changed. Thereby, even if the derivation probability of the first game result is changed, the derivation probability of the second value is not changed. With this configuration, it is possible to calculate the payout rate for each game state by considering only the winning probability of the first game value, and to facilitate the calculation of the payout rate, This has the effect of suppressing an increase in man-hours at the time of designing the specifications.

In the gaming machine 30 or 31,
The said pass / fail storage means,
When the setting value is changed by the setting unit, the derivation probability of the second value is configured not to be changed (for example, the number of small hit random number values is maintained even when the setting value is changed). Gaming machine three-two.

  According to the gaming machine 32, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machines 30 or 31. That is, when the setting value is changed by the setting unit, the derivation probability of the second value in the hit / fail storage unit is not changed. Thereby, even when the derivation probability of the first value is changed due to the setting change, the configuration is made so that the derivation probability of the second value is not changed. With such a configuration, it is possible to calculate the payout rate for each set value by considering only the winning probability of the first game value, thereby facilitating the calculation of the payout rate. This has the effect of suppressing an increase in man-hours at the time of designing the specifications.

In any of the gaming machines 30 to 32,
The said pass / fail storage means,
At least three stages of step-by-step success / failure storage means (for example, a special figure 1 jackpot random number table for setting values “1” to “3”) in which the derivation probabilities of the first values are different for each of the setting values set by the setting means 272a1),
The stepwise success / failure storage means,
A gaming machine (33) characterized in that, when the setting value is changed stepwise by the setting means, the derivation probability of the first value is evenly increased.

  According to the gaming machine 33, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machines 30 to 32. That is, the hit / fail judgment storage means is provided with at least three stepwise hit / fail judgment storage means having different derivation probabilities of the first value for each set value set by the setting means. Then, when the setting value is changed stepwise by the setting means, the stepwise success / failure storage means is configured so that the derivation probability of the first value is uniformly increased. This makes it possible to calculate the payout rate for each set value by considering only the increase in the winning probability of the first game value that is increased stepwise and evenly. There is an effect that it is easy to suppress an increase in man-hours at the time of designing game specifications.

  Note that “equally increase” means, for example, that the derivation probability that increases for each set value increases by the same value (for example, 1%) from the derivation probability one step lower, or the derivation probability that is one step lower On the other hand, a case in which the same ratio (for example, 5%) is increased by the same ratio is exemplified.

In any of the gaming machines 30 to 32,
The said pass / fail storage means,
At least three stages of step-by-step success / failure storage means (for example, a special figure 1 jackpot random number table for setting values “1” to “3”) in which the derivation probabilities of the first values are different for each of the setting values set by the setting means 272a1),
The stepwise success / failure storage means,
The gaming machine (34), wherein the derivation probability of the first value is increased at a predetermined rate when the setting value is changed stepwise by the setting means.

  According to the gaming machine 34, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machines 30 to 32. That is, the hit / fail judgment storage means is provided with at least three stepwise hit / fail judgment storage means having different derivation probabilities of the first value for each set value set by the setting means. Then, when the setting value is changed stepwise by the setting means, the stepwise success / failure storage means is configured so that the derivation probability of the first value increases at a predetermined rate. This makes it possible to calculate the payout rate for each set value by considering only the increase in the winning probability of the first game value that increases stepwise and at a predetermined rate, and calculates the payout rate. And it is possible to suppress an increase in man-hours at the time of designing game specifications.

  Note that “increase at a predetermined rate” means, for example, that the derivation probability that increases for each set value increases proportionally (for example, 5%, 10%, 15%,...) Or an exponential function (For example, a case where the number increases to 2 times, 4 times, 8 times,... Based on the set value “1”) is exemplified.

In any of the gaming machines 30 to 34,
The said pass / fail storage means,
Storing the first value as a continuous value;
A gaming machine (3) characterized in that, when the setting value is changed by the setting means, a continuous range of the first value is changed.

According to the gaming machine 35, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machines 30 to 34. That is, the first value is stored as a continuous value by the hit / fail storage unit. Then, when the setting value is changed by the setting means, the range of the continuous first value is changed.
This makes it possible for the determining means to determine the first game value by determining the range from the beginning to the end of the first value. Therefore, even when the setting value is changed by the setting unit, it is not necessary to determine each changed first value in the validity determination, and the value to be determined is determined from the beginning of the first value. It can be determined by determining whether or not it is included up to the end. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load in the determination of success / failure can be reduced.

In any of the gaming machines 30 to 34,
The said pass / fail storage means,
Storing the first value as a discontinuous value;
A gaming machine (36) characterized in that the number of discontinuous first values is changed when the setting value is changed by the setting means.

According to the gaming machine 36, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machines 30 to 34. That is, the first value is stored as a discontinuous value by the hit / fail storage unit. Then, when the setting value is changed by the setting means, the number of discontinuous first values is changed.
Thus, the determination of the first game value by the determination means needs to be performed by determining whether each first value matches, but it is difficult to grasp the position (arrangement) of the first value in the hit / failure storage means. . Therefore, by making it difficult for the player to grasp the position (arrangement) of the first value, it is possible to suppress the illegal derivation of the first game value and to increase the security performance of the gaming machine. is there.

In any of the gaming machines 30 to 36,
Launching means (for example, a ball launching unit 112a) for launching a game ball;
A first ball entry means (for example, a first starting port 64a) into which a game ball fired by the firing means can enter;
A game ball fired by the firing means is capable of entering, and a second ball entry means (for example, a second starting port 64b) different from the first ball entry means,
The determination information acquisition means,
A first information acquisition unit (for example, a first reserved ball storage area 273d) for acquiring first determination information as the determination information based on a game ball having entered the first ball entry unit;
A second information acquisition unit (for example, a second reserved ball storage area 273e) for acquiring second determination information as the determination information based on a game ball having entered the second ball entry unit. ,
The determining means includes:
First determining means for determining the first determination information acquired by the first information acquiring means (for example, special figure 1 change start processing (S5505));
A second determination unit (for example, a special figure 2 change start process (S5508)) for determining the second determination information acquired by the second information acquisition unit;
The said pass / fail storage means,
At one predetermined set value (for example, set value "1") set by the setting means, the derivation probability of the first game result by the first determination means and the second determination means (for example, 0.5 %) Is equal to the first value, and
At the predetermined set value set by the setting means, the derivation probability of the second game result by the second determination means (from the derivation probability of the second game result by the first determination means (for example, 1%)) For example, the second value is stored so that
Storing the second value such that the derivation probability (for example, 1%) of the second game result by the first determination means is equal for all the setting values set by the setting means;
The second value is stored such that the derivation probabilities (for example, 94%) of the second game result by the second determination means are equal in all the setting values set by the setting means. Gaming machine three seven.

  According to the gaming machine 37, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines 30 to 36. That is, a game ball is fired by the firing means, and a game ball fired by the firing means is configured to be able to enter the first ball-in means, and a game ball fired by the fire means is also inserted in the first ball-in means. And a second ball entry means different from the above. Then, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entry means, the first determination information as the determination information is obtained by the first information acquisition means provided in the determination information acquisition means, Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means, the second determination information, which is the determination information, is obtained by the second information acquisition means provided in the determination information acquisition means. Also, the first determination information obtained by the first information obtaining means is determined by the first determining means provided in the determining means, and the second determination information obtained by the second information obtaining means is provided in the determining means. It is determined by the determined second determination means. At this time, at one predetermined set value set by the setting means, the hit / non-kill storage means stores the first game result by the first determination means and the second determination means so that the derivation probabilities are equal. While the first value is stored, the derivation probability of the second game result by the second determination means is higher than the derivation probability of the second game result by the first determination means at a predetermined set value set by the setting means. Then, the second value is stored in the success / failure storage means. In addition, for all the setting values set by the setting unit, the second value is stored in the hit storage unit so that the derivation probabilities of the second game result by the first determination unit are equal in the hit storage unit. In addition, the second value is stored in the hit storage unit so that the probability of derivation of the second game result by the second determination unit is equal in all the setting values set by the setting unit. . Accordingly, the calculation of the payout rate for each set value and each piece of determination information is performed by calculating the increase in the derivation probability of the first game value in the first determination unit and the second determination unit accompanying the setting change, and the first determination unit. The calculation can be performed by taking into account the change in the derivation probability of the second game result with the second determination means, thereby facilitating the calculation of the payout rate and suppressing an increase in man-hours when designing the game specifications. There is an effect that can be.

In game machine three 7,
The predetermined game state is
By making it easier for the game ball to enter the first ball entry unit than the second ball entry unit, it is easy to obtain the first determination information from the second determination information,
The advantageous game state is
The first ball entry means allows the game ball to easily enter the second ball entry means, so that the second determination information is more easily obtained than the first determination information. Game machine three eight.

  According to the gaming machine 38, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine 37. That is, in the predetermined game state, the game ball is more likely to enter the first ball entry means than the second ball entry means, so that the first determination information is more easily obtained from the second determination information, and in the advantageous game state, Since the game ball is easier to enter the second ball entry device than the first ball entry device, the second determination information is more easily obtained than the first determination information. Thereby, the calculation of the payout rate for each set value, for each piece of determination information, and for each game state is determined by the increase in the derivation probability of the first game value in the first determination means and the second determination means accompanying the setting change. It is possible to calculate the payout rate by considering the change in the derivation probability of the second game result in the first determination means and the second determination means and the determination information which is easily obtained for each game state. This has the effect of facilitating the calculation and suppressing an increase in the number of steps when designing the game specifications.

In the gaming machine 37 or 38,
First dynamic display execution means (for example, first special display) for executing first dynamic display of first identification information on a display means (for example, special symbol display device 39) based on the judgment result of the first judgment means. Execution of dynamic display of symbols),
A second dynamic display execution unit (for example, a second special symbol) that executes a second dynamic display of second identification information different from the first identification information on the display unit based on the determination result of the second determination unit Execution of dynamic display), and
The display means,
The first dynamic display by the first dynamic display executing means and the second dynamic display by the second dynamic display executing means can be executed in parallel (simultaneously). Three gaming machines.

  According to the gaming machine 39, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines 37 or 38. That is, based on the determination result of the first determination unit, the first dynamic display execution unit executes the first dynamic display of the first identification information on the display unit. In addition, based on the determination result of the second determination unit, the second dynamic display execution unit executes the second dynamic display of the second identification information different from the first identification information on the display unit. Then, the first dynamic display by the first dynamic display execution means and the second dynamic display by the second dynamic display execution means can be executed in parallel (simultaneously) by the display means.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine capable of executing the first dynamic display of the first identification information and the second dynamic display of the second identification information in parallel (simultaneous) progress, the execution time and the like in each dynamic display are considered. When it is necessary to calculate the payout rate, and when the payout rates and the like in the first game result and the second game result are combined and calculated for each set value, the man-hour at the time of designing the game specification becomes enormous. There is a possibility that it will.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine 39, in a gaming machine capable of performing the first dynamic display and the second dynamic display in parallel (simultaneously), the derivation probability of the second game result in the first determination means is set to a set value. And the derivation probability of the second game result in the second determination means is not changed for each set value. With this configuration, it is possible to calculate the payout rate for each set value by considering only the change in the derivation probability of the first game result. In a gaming machine capable of performing display, there is an effect that calculation of a payout rate can be facilitated, and an increase in man-hours at the time of designing game specifications can be suppressed.

In game machine three 9,
The first determining means includes:
In a situation where the second game result can be derived in the first dynamic display by the first dynamic display execution means, the second dynamic display is being executed by the second dynamic display execution means, When the first game result or the second game result can be derived in the second dynamic display, and the execution time of the second dynamic display is longer than the execution time of the first dynamic display, A result changing means (for example, a special figure 2 changing process (S5520)) for deriving a game result other than the first game result or the second game result in the second dynamic display is provided. Three gaming machines.

  According to the gaming machine 310, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine 39. That is, in a situation where the second game result can be derived in the first dynamic display by the first dynamic display execution means, the second dynamic display is being executed by the second dynamic display execution means, and 2 If the first game result or the second game result can be derived in the dynamic display and the execution time of the second dynamic display is longer than the execution time of the first dynamic display, the first determination means The result changing means provided is configured to derive a game result other than the first game result or the second game result in the second dynamic display. Thereby, while the second game value is provided based on the second game result based on the first dynamic display, the first game is provided based on the first game result based on the second dynamic display, or based on the second game result. Assignment of the second game value can be prevented from being performed, and it is possible to prevent an excessive game value from being paid out to the player due to the duplicated first game value or second game value. There is an effect that. Further, in calculating the payout rate, it is not necessary to consider the duplicated first game value or the second game value. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

In game machine three 9,
The first determining means includes:
In a situation where the second game result can be derived in the first dynamic display by the first dynamic display execution means, the second dynamic display is being executed by the second dynamic display execution means, When the first game result or the second game result can be derived in the second dynamic display, and the execution time of the second dynamic display is longer than the execution time of the first dynamic display, The progress of the second dynamic display is temporarily stopped, and after the provision of the second game value based on the first dynamic display is completed, the temporarily stopped second dynamic display is advanced. A gaming machine 311 comprising: a result temporary stopping means (for example, a modified example 130) for deriving the first game result or the second game result.

  According to the gaming machine 311, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine 3 9. That is, in a situation where the second game result can be derived in the first dynamic display by the first dynamic display execution means by the result temporary suspension means provided in the first determination means, the second dynamic display execution means During the execution of the second dynamic display, the first game result or the second game result can be derived in the second dynamic display, and the execution time of the second dynamic display is the first dynamic display. If it is longer than the execution time of the target display, the progress of the second dynamic display is temporarily stopped, and after the provision of the second game value based on the first dynamic display ends, the second display temporarily stopped. The dynamic display is advanced to derive the first game result or the second game result. Thereby, while the second game value is provided based on the second game result based on the first dynamic display, the first game is provided based on the first game result based on the second dynamic display, or based on the second game result. Assignment of the second game value can be prevented from being performed, and it is possible to prevent an excessive game value from being paid out to the player due to the duplicated first game value or second game value. There is an effect that. Further, in calculating the payout rate, it is not necessary to consider the duplicated first game value or the second game value. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

In any of the gaming machines 38 to 311,
When the first game result is derived, a first special ball entry means (for example, a special winning opening 65a) in which a game ball is driven to enter the ball,
When the second game result is derived, a second special ball entry means (for example, a small winning opening 72a) in which a game ball is driven so as to be able to enter,
Movable means (for example, the ordinary electric hand 64c) that can be displaced between a state where a game ball can enter the second ball entry means (for example, the second starting port 64b) and a state where entry is difficult or impossible. When,
A third ball entry means (for example, a through gate 67) which is capable of entering a game ball fired by the launching means and is different from the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means;
A third information acquisition unit (for example, a general-purpose reservation ball storage area 273i) for acquiring third determination information based on the game ball having entered the third ball entry unit;
A third dynamic execution unit that executes a third dynamic display of the third identification information based on the third determination information acquired by the third information acquisition unit (for example, a normal electric hand control process (S5104)) When,
A driving unit (for example, S5805 or S5807 of the ordinary electrical combination control process (S5104)) for driving the movable unit based on an execution result of the third dynamic execution unit,
The movable means,
In a state in which a game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter the second ball entry means, a closed-time rolling means (for example, a normal electric machine in the twenty-eighth embodiment) in which a game ball can roll on the upper part of the movable means. 64c).
The game state changing means,
When the first game value is given based on a predetermined first derivation result as the first game result (for example, a jackpot type of “probability change B” that gives “probability change state”), the game state is changed. Of the advantageous gaming states, the first advantageous transition means (for example, S5754 of the jackpot ending process (S5712) for shifting to a predetermined first advantageous gaming state (for example, the “probability variation state” of the twenty-eighth embodiment): YES) )When,
As the first game result, the first game value is provided based on a second derived result different from the first derived result (for example, a jackpot type of “probability variation A” that provides “super probability variation state”). In this case, the second advantageous shifting means for shifting the gaming state to a second advantageous gaming state different from the first advantageous gaming state (for example, the “super-probability changing state” in the twenty-eighth embodiment) among the advantageous gaming states. (E.g., S5751 of jackpot end processing (S5712: YES)).
The third dynamic execution means,
In the first advantageous gaming state, the execution time of the third dynamic display is changed from one end (for example, right end) of the closing-time rolling means to the other end (for example, left end) of the game ball. A short-time pattern (for example, “0.5 seconds”) performed shorter than the rolling time (for example, “3 seconds”)
In the second advantageous gaming state, a long-time pattern (for example, “5 seconds”) in which the execution time of the third dynamic display is made longer than the rolling time,
The driving means,
In the first advantageous game state, the movable means is driven in an easy-to-enter pattern (for example, a normal symbol high probability state and open extension) in which a game ball easily enters the second entering means,
In the second advantageous game state, the movable means is provided in a ball entry pattern (for example, a low probability state of a normal symbol and a non-open extension) in which a game ball is difficult to enter the second entry means from the easy entry pattern. Drive,
The second special entering means,
A gaming machine characterized by being provided at a position (for example, on the downstream side of the ordinary electric utility 64c) where a game ball rolled from one end to the other end of the closing rolling means is easy to enter. 12.

  According to the gaming machine 312, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machines 38 to 311. That is, when the first game result is derived, the first special ball entry means is driven to allow a game ball to enter, and when the second game result is derived, the second special ball entry means Is driven to allow a game ball to enter. The movable means is configured to be displaceable between a state in which a game ball can enter the second ball entry means and a state in which entry is difficult or impossible. Here, the third ball entry means different from the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means is configured so that game balls fired by the firing means can enter. Then, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the third ball entry means, third determination information is acquired by the third information acquisition means, and the third determination information acquired by the third information acquisition means is added to the third determination information. Based on the third dynamic execution means, the third dynamic display of the third identification information is executed, and the driving means drives the movable means based on the execution result of the third dynamic execution means. . Here, in a state in which the game ball cannot enter the second ball entry means or cannot enter the ball, the closing ball rolling means provided on the movable means enables the game ball to roll on the upper part of the movable means. You. Then, when the first gaming value is given as the first gaming result based on the predetermined first derivation result, the gaming state is changed to the advantageous gaming state by the first advantageous shifting means provided in the gaming state changing means. The game is shifted to a predetermined first advantageous gaming state. Also, when the first game value is given based on a second derivation result different from the first derivation result as the first game result, the game state is changed by the second advantageous transition means provided in the game state change means, A transition is made to a second advantageous gaming state different from the first advantageous gaming state among the advantageous gaming states. Here, in the first advantageous game state, the third dynamic execution means sets the third dynamic display based on the rolling time for the game ball to roll from one end to the other end of the closing rolling means. And a long time pattern in which the execution time of the third dynamic display is made longer than the rolling time in the second advantageous game state. In the first advantageous game state, the driving means drives the movable means in the easy-to-enter pattern in which game balls easily enter the second entering means, while in the second advantageous game state, the easy-to-enter pattern The movable means is driven in a ball entry pattern in which it is difficult for game balls to enter the second ball entry means. The second special ball entry means is provided at a position where the game balls rolled from one end to the other end of the closed-time rolling means easily enter the ball. That is, in the first advantageous game state, the execution time of the third dynamic display may be shorter than the time when the game ball can roll over the movable means, and the movable means is driven in the easy-to-enter pattern. From this, the game ball rolling on the upper part of the movable means is likely to enter the second ball entry means, and is difficult to enter the second special ball entry means. On the other hand, in the second advantageous game state, the execution time of the third dynamic display may be longer than the time in which the game ball can roll over the movable means, and the movable means is not driven in the easy-to-enter pattern. Thus, the game ball rolling on the upper part of the movable means does not enter the second ball entry means, but enters the second special ball entry means. Thereby, whether the game ball enters the second special ball entry means when the second game result is derived is made different between the first derived result and the second derived result as the first game result. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine 37 or 38,
When the first game result is derived, a first special ball entry means (for example, a special winning opening 65a) in which a game ball is driven to enter the ball,
When the second game result is derived, a second special ball entry means (for example, a small winning opening 72a) in which a game ball is driven so as to be able to enter,
Movable means (for example, the ordinary electric hand 64c) that can be displaced between a state where a game ball can enter the second ball entry means (for example, the second starting port 64b) and a state where entry is difficult or impossible. When,
A third ball entry means (for example, a through gate 67) which is capable of entering a game ball fired by the launching means and is different from the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means;
A third information acquisition unit (for example, a general-purpose reservation ball storage area 273i) for acquiring third determination information based on the game ball having entered the third ball entry unit;
A third dynamic execution unit that executes a third dynamic display of the third identification information based on the third determination information acquired by the third information acquisition unit (for example, a normal electric hand control process (S5104)) When,
A driving unit (for example, S5805 or S5807 of the ordinary electrical combination control process (S5104)) for driving the movable unit based on an execution result of the third dynamic execution unit,
The movable means,
At least in a state in which a game ball can enter the second ball entry means, a protruding rolling means on which the game ball can roll on the upper part of the movable means (for example, the normal electric hand 64c in the twenty-ninth embodiment). Upper surface),
The driving means,
In the predetermined game state, the movable means has a difficult-to-enter or a non-enterable pattern (for example, the normal electric hand 64c has a protruding time of "0.1 second") in which the game ball enters the second entering means. Drive the
In the advantageous gaming state, the movable means is provided in a ball-enterable pattern (for example, the normal electric hand 64c has a projection time of "5 seconds") in which a game ball can enter the second ball entry means by the projecting rolling means. Driving means,
The said pass / fail storage means,
A first success / failure storage unit (for example, special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1) used in the first determination unit;
A second success / failure storage means (for example, special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2) used in the second determination means,
The first success / failure storage means,
Storing the first value while not storing the second value,
The second right / wrong storage means,
Storing the first value and the second value;
The second special entering means,
A fourth ball entry means (for example, a special area switch 208h) capable of entering a game ball flowing into the second special ball entry means,
The fourth ball entry means,
The gaming machine 313, wherein the first game value can be given when a game ball enters.

According to the gaming machine 313, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine 37 or 38, the following effect is achieved.
That is, when the first game result is derived, the first special ball entry means is driven to allow a game ball to enter, and when the second game result is derived, the second special ball entry means Is driven to allow a game ball to enter. The movable means is configured to be displaceable between a state in which a game ball can enter the second ball entry means and a state in which entry is difficult or impossible. Here, the third ball entry means different from the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means is configured so that game balls fired by the firing means can enter. Then, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the third ball entry means, third determination information is acquired by the third information acquisition means, and the third determination information acquired by the third information acquisition means is added to the third determination information. Based on the third dynamic execution means, the third dynamic display of the third identification information is executed, and the driving means drives the movable means based on the execution result of the third dynamic execution means. . Here, at least in a state where the game ball can enter the second ball entry means, the projecting rolling means provided on the movable means is configured so that the game ball can roll on the upper part of the movable means. In addition, the driving means drives the movable means in the predetermined entering game state in a difficult-to-enter pattern in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter the second entering means. The movable means is driven by the means in a ball-enterable pattern in which a game ball can enter the second ball-in means. Then, the first hit / fail storage means as the hit / fail storage means is used in the first determining means, and the second hit / fail storage means also as the hit / fail storage means is used in the second determining means. Here, the first value storage unit stores the first value, but does not store the second value, and the second value storage unit stores the first value and the second value. The fourth special ball entry means provided in the second special ball entry means allows the game balls flowing into the second special ball entry means to enter the ball, and the game balls enter the second ball entry means. In this case, the first game value can be provided. That is, in the hit determination by the first determination means, since the first value is not stored in the first hit storage means but the first value is stored, the first game result is derived and the first game value is determined. It becomes a playability of whether to get. On the other hand, in the success / failure determination in the second determination means, since the second value is stored in the second success / failure storage means together with the first value, the first game result is derived to obtain the first game value, or The second game result is derived, and further, a game ball is made to enter the fourth ball entry means so as to obtain the first game value. Thus, the pattern of the game value that can be given by the first determination means and the pattern of the game value that can be given by the second determination means can be made different. Therefore, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

In gaming machine three 13,
The second right / wrong storage means,
The gaming machine 314, wherein the derivation probability of the second value is configured to be higher than the derivation probability of the first value.

  According to the gaming machine 314, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 313. That is, the second probability storage means is configured such that the derivation probability of the second value is higher than the derivation probability of the first value. Thereby, in the determination by the second determination means, the second game result based on the extraction of the second value is configured to be generated more than the first game result and the like. Therefore, the pattern of the game value that can be given by the first determination means and the game value that can be given by the second determination means can be clearly different. Therefore, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Fourth group: If there are multiple roles other than the jackpot, increase both the jackpot and the small jackpot and compensate for the increase from other roles>
In a conventional gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the ratio of the number of balls (the number obtained by dividing the number of payout balls (the number of safe balls) by the number of out balls) when a player continuously plays a game with the pachinko machine. A so-called machine split, hereinafter sometimes referred to as a “payout rate”) is provided in a plurality of stages, and any one of the set values corresponding to the payout rate desired by a person in charge of the hall, etc. There is a configuration in which a person related to the hall or the like can set (change or update) the game after the power is turned on and before the game is started by the player (before the game hall is opened). Then, when the player plays a game with the pachinko machine, a win / fail lottery is performed based on the set value, so that the player can play the game at a payout rate according to the set value. (For example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-109085)).

  However, in the above gaming machine, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, but there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The inventions of the fourth group have been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

Determination information obtaining means (for example, main control device 110) for obtaining determination information (for example, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) based on satisfaction of a predetermined starting condition (for example, winning in the first starting port 64a);
Determining means for determining the determination information obtained by the determination information obtaining means (for example, special figure 1 change start processing (S5505));
Based on the first game result (for example, big hit) being derived by the determination means, a first game value giving means (for example, big hit game) capable of giving a predetermined first game value (for example, big hit game) to the player A special winning opening opening / closing control process (S5710));
A second game value (for example, a small hit game) that is different from the first game value to the player based on the fact that a second game result (for example, a small hit) is derived by the determination means. Game value providing means (for example, small winning opening opening / closing control processing (S5714));
Setting means capable of changing both the probability that the first game result is derived by the determination means and the probability that the second game result is derived by the determination means (for example, S4121 of the setting change process (S4005)) And in a gaming machine having
At least a first value (for example, a large random number value) corresponding to the first game result and a second value (for example, a small random number value) corresponding to the second game result are used for the determination by the determination means. And a storage unit (for example, special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1) for storing
The determining means includes:
When the determination information acquisition unit extracts the determination information that is a third value other than the first value or the second value (for example, a loss random number value), the game value is not given to the player. Composed,
The said pass / fail storage means,
Depending on the set value set by the setting means, the first value derivation probability and the second value derivation probability are stored so as to be sometimes different,
The determination information acquisition means,
When the setting value is changed by the setting unit, the derivation probability of the third value is changed with the change of the derivation probability of the first value and the derivation probability of the second value. (For example, an increase in the jackpot random number value and the small jackpot random value resulting from the setting change is compensated from the lost random number value).

  According to the gaming machine 40, the determination information is obtained by the determination information obtaining means based on the establishment of the predetermined starting condition, and the determination information obtained by the determination information obtaining means is determined by the determination means. Then, based on the fact that the first game result is derived by the determining means, a predetermined first game value may be provided to the player by the first game value providing means, and the second game result may be provided by the determining means. Is derived, the predetermined second game value may be provided to the player by the second game value provision means. The probability that the first game result is derived by the determining means and the probability that the second game result is derived by the determining means are both changeable by the setting means. Here, at least a first value corresponding to the first game result and a second value corresponding to the second game result are stored in the hit / fail storage unit used for the determination by the determination unit. Further, when the determination information acquisition unit extracts the determination information that is the third value other than the first value or the second value, the determination unit is configured not to give a game value to the player. Then, depending on the setting value set by the setting means, the derivation probability of the first value and the derivation probability of the second value may be stored in the hit / fail storage means so that the setting value is changed by the setting means. In this case, the derivation probability of the third value is changed with the change of the derivation probability of the first value and the derivation probability of the second value. Thus, depending on the set value, the derivation probability between the first value and the second value at which the game value is provided to the player and the third value at which the game value is not provided to the player is provided with an inflection (sharpness). There is an effect that it is possible to enhance the interest of the game by enriching the variations.

In the gaming machine 40,
The third value is
At a first set value (for example, set value “1”) in which the derivation probability of the first value and the second value is the lowest, the derivation probability of the first value and the second value is the lowest from the first set value. A gaming machine 41 characterized by being provided with an increase in the first value and the second value at a high second set value (for example, a set value “6”).

  According to the gaming machine 41, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 40, the following effects are exhibited. That is, at the first set value at which the derivation probabilities of the first value and the second value are the lowest, the first value and the second value at the second set value at which the derivation probabilities of the first value and the second value are the highest from the first set value. A third value is provided for an increment of two values. This makes it possible to change all the derivation probabilities of the first value and the derivation probability of the second value changed by the setting change from the third value. Therefore, since the appearance rate of the first game result and the appearance rate of the second game result both change for each setting, a setting difference between the appearance rate of the first game result and the appearance rate of the second game result hardly occurs. In addition, it is possible to make the setting determination difficult from the comparison between the appearance rate of the first game result and the appearance rate of the second game result. As a result, the setting discriminating elements are limited, making it difficult for the player to know the setting of the gaming machine, and setting the player even if the payout rate is low (ie, the set value “1” or the like). There is an effect that the game can be continued by making it hard to be seen by the player and the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

In the gaming machine 40 or 41,
The said pass / fail storage means,
At least three stages of pass / fail storage means (for example, setting values “1” to “3”) in which the derivation probability of the first value and the derivation probability of the second value are different for each of the setting values set by the setting means. , Special table 1 jackpot random number table 272a1),
The stepwise success / failure storage means,
When the setting value is changed stepwise by the setting means, the derivation probability of the first value, the derivation probability of the second value, or the derivation probability of the first value and the second value are equal. A gaming machine 42 characterized by being configured to increase in number.

  According to the gaming machine 42, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines 40 or 41, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the hit / fail storage means is provided with at least three stages of hit / fail storage means in which the derivation probability of the first value and the derivation probability of the second value are different for each set value set by the setting means. When the setting value is changed stepwise by the setting means, the stepwise success / failure storage means stores the derivation probability of the first value, the derivation probability of the second value, or the derivation of the first value and the second value. The probabilities are configured to increase evenly. Thereby, the calculation of the payout rate for each set value can be calculated by taking into account the increase in the winning probability of the first game value and / or the winning probability of the second game value, which is increased stepwise and evenly. This makes it possible to easily calculate the payout rate and suppress an increase in man-hours at the time of designing game specifications.

  Note that “equally increase” means, for example, that the derivation probability that increases for each set value increases by the same value (for example, 1%) from the derivation probability one step lower, or the derivation probability that is one step lower On the other hand, a case in which the same ratio (for example, 5%) is increased by the same ratio is exemplified.

In the gaming machine 40 or 41,
The said pass / fail storage means,
At least three stages of pass / fail storage means (for example, setting values “1” to “3”) in which the derivation probability of the first value and the derivation probability of the second value are different for each of the setting values set by the setting means. , Special table 1 jackpot random number table 272a1),
The stepwise success / failure storage means,
When the setting value is changed step by step by the setting means, the derivation probability of the first value, the derivation probability of the second value, or the derivation probability of the first value and the second value are set to a predetermined value. A gaming machine 43 characterized by being configured to increase at a rate.

According to the gaming machine 43, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 40 or 41, the following effects are exhibited. In other words, the pass / fail storage means is provided with at least three-stage pass / fail storage means having different derivation probabilities of the first value and the second value for each set value set by the setting means.
When the setting value is changed stepwise by the setting means, the stepwise success / failure storage means stores the derivation probability of the first value, the derivation probability of the second value, or the derivation of the first value and the second value. The probabilities are configured to increase at a predetermined rate. Thereby, the calculation of the payout rate for each set value is performed by considering only the increase in the winning probability of the first game value and / or the winning probability of the second game value, which increases stepwise and at a predetermined rate. This makes it possible to easily calculate the payout rate and suppress an increase in man-hours at the time of designing game specifications.

  Note that “increase at a predetermined rate” means, for example, that the derivation probability that increases for each set value increases proportionally (for example, 5%, 10%, 15%,...) Or an exponential function (For example, a case where the number increases to 2 times, 4 times, 8 times,... Based on the set value “1”) is exemplified.

In any of the gaming machines 40 to 43,
The said pass / fail storage means,
Storing the first value as a continuous value;
A gaming machine 44 characterized in that, when the setting value is changed by the setting means, a continuous range of the first value is changed.

According to the gaming machine 44, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machines 40 to 43. That is, the first value is stored as a continuous value by the hit / fail storage unit. Then, when the setting value is changed by the setting means, the range of the continuous first value is changed.
This makes it possible for the determining means to determine the first game value by determining the range from the beginning to the end of the first value. Therefore, even when the setting value is changed by the setting unit, it is not necessary to determine each changed first value in the validity determination, and the value to be determined is determined from the beginning of the first value. It can be determined by determining whether or not it is included up to the end. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load in the determination of success / failure can be reduced.

In any of the gaming machines 40 to 43,
The said pass / fail storage means,
Storing the first value as a discontinuous value;
A gaming machine (45) characterized in that the number of discontinuous first values is changed when the setting value is changed by the setting means.

According to the gaming machine 45, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machines 40 to 43. That is, the first value is stored as a discontinuous value by the hit / fail storage unit. Then, when the setting value is changed by the setting means, the number of discontinuous first values is changed.
Thus, the determination of the first game value by the determination means needs to be performed by determining whether each first value matches, but it is difficult to grasp the position (arrangement) of the first value in the hit / failure storage means. . Therefore, by making it difficult for the player to grasp the position (arrangement) of the first value, it is possible to suppress the illegal derivation of the first game value and to increase the security performance of the gaming machine. is there.

In any of the gaming machines 40 to 45,
The said pass / fail storage means,
Storing the second value as a continuous value;
The gaming machine (46), wherein when the setting value is changed by the setting means, the range of the continuous second value is changed.

  According to the gaming machine 46, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines 40 to 45. That is, the second value is stored as a continuous value by the hit / fail storage unit. Then, when the setting value is changed by the setting means, the range of the continuous second value is changed. This makes it possible for the determining means to determine the second game value by determining the range from the beginning to the end of the second value. Therefore, even when the setting value is changed by the setting means, it is not necessary to determine each changed second value in the determination of rejection, and the value to be determined is determined from the beginning of the second value. It can be determined by determining whether or not it is included up to the end. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load in the determination of the success or failure can be reduced.

In any of the gaming machines 40 to 45,
The said pass / fail storage means,
Storing the second value as a discontinuous value;
A gaming machine (47) wherein the number of discontinuous second values is changed when the setting value is changed by the setting means.

  According to the gaming machine 47, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machines 40 to 45. That is, the second value is stored as a discontinuous value by the hit / fail storage unit. Then, when the setting value is changed by the setting means, the number of discontinuous second values is changed. Accordingly, it is necessary for the determination means to determine the second game value, and to determine whether each second value matches, but it is difficult to grasp the position (arrangement) of the second value in the hit / failure storage means. . Therefore, by making it difficult for the player to grasp the position (arrangement) of the second value, it is possible to suppress the illegal derivation of the second game value and to enhance the security performance of the gaming machine. is there.

In any of the gaming machines 40 to 47,
Launching means (for example, a ball launching unit 112a) for launching a game ball;
A first ball entry means (for example, a first starting port 64a) into which a game ball fired by the firing means can enter;
A game ball fired by the firing means is capable of entering, and a second ball entry means (for example, a second starting port 64b) different from the first ball entry means,
The determination information acquisition means,
A first information acquisition unit (for example, a first reserved ball storage area 273d) for acquiring first determination information that is determination information based on a game ball having entered the first ball entry unit;
A second information acquisition unit (for example, a second reserved ball storage area 273e) for acquiring second determination information that is determination information based on a game ball having entered the second ball entry unit,
The determining means includes:
First determining means for determining the first determination information acquired by the first information acquiring means (for example, special figure 1 change start processing (S5505));
A second determination unit (for example, a special figure 2 change start process (S5508)) for determining the second determination information acquired by the second information acquisition unit;
The first game value providing means,
From the predetermined game state before the provision of the first game value (for example, “normal game state”), after the provision of the first game value, an advantageous game state different from the predetermined game state (for example, “super probability fluctuation state” or Game state changing means (for example, jackpot ending processing (S5712)) for changing the game state to "probability change state",
The predetermined game state is
By making it easier for the game ball to enter the first ball entry unit than the second ball entry unit, it is easy to obtain the first determination information from the second determination information,
The advantageous game state is
The first ball entry means allows the game ball to easily enter the second ball entry means, so that the second determination information is more easily obtained than the first determination information. Game machine 48.

  According to the gaming machine 48, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines 40 to 47. That is, a game ball is fired by the firing means, and a game ball fired by the firing means is configured to be able to enter the first ball-in means, and a game ball fired by the fire means is also inserted in the first ball-in means. And a second ball entry means different from the above. Then, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entry means, the first determination information as the determination information is obtained by the first information acquisition means provided in the determination information acquisition means, Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means, the second determination information, which is the determination information, is obtained by the second information acquisition means provided in the determination information acquisition means. Also, the first determination information obtained by the first information obtaining means is determined by the first determining means provided in the determining means, and the second determination information obtained by the second information obtaining means is provided in the determining means. It is determined by the determined second determination means. The game state changing means provided in the first game value providing means changes the game state from the predetermined game state before the first game value is provided to the advantageous game state different from the predetermined game state after the first game value is provided. You. Then, in the predetermined game state, the game ball is more likely to enter the first ball entry means than the second ball entry means, so that the first determination information is more easily obtained from the second determination information, and in the advantageous game state, Since the game ball is easier to enter the second ball entry device than the first ball entry device, the second determination information is more easily obtained than the first determination information. Thereby, the calculation of the payout rate for each set value, for each piece of determination information, and for each game state is determined by the increase in the derivation probability of the first game value in the first determination means and the second determination means accompanying the setting change. It is possible to calculate the payout rate by considering the change in the derivation probability of the second game result in the first determination means and the second determination means and the determination information which is easily obtained for each game state. This has the effect of facilitating the calculation and suppressing an increase in the number of steps when designing the game specifications.

In game machine 48,
First dynamic display execution means (for example, first special display) for executing first dynamic display of first identification information on a display means (for example, special symbol display device 39) based on the judgment result of the first judgment means. Execution of dynamic display of symbols),
A second dynamic display execution unit (for example, a second special symbol) that executes a second dynamic display of second identification information different from the first identification information on the display unit based on the determination result of the second determination unit Execution of dynamic display), and
The display means,
The first dynamic display executed by the first dynamic display executing means and the second dynamic display executed by the second dynamic display executing means can be executed in parallel (simultaneously). 4 gaming machines.

  According to the gaming machine 49, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine 48. That is, based on the determination result of the first determination unit, the first dynamic display execution unit executes the first dynamic display of the first identification information on the display unit. In addition, based on the determination result of the second determination unit, the second dynamic display execution unit executes the second dynamic display of the second identification information different from the first identification information on the display unit. Then, the first dynamic display by the first dynamic display execution means and the second dynamic display by the second dynamic display execution means can be executed in parallel (simultaneously) by the display means.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine capable of executing the first dynamic display of the first identification information and the second dynamic display of the second identification information in parallel (simultaneous) progress, the execution time and the like in each dynamic display are considered. When it is necessary to calculate the payout rate, and when the payout rates and the like in the first game result and the second game result are combined and calculated for each set value, the man-hour at the time of designing the game specification becomes enormous. There is a possibility that it will.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine 49, in a gaming machine capable of performing the first dynamic display and the second dynamic display in parallel (simultaneously), the derivation probability of the second game result by the first determination means is set to a set value. And the derivation probability of the second game result in the second determination means is not changed for each set value. With this configuration, it is possible to calculate the payout rate for each set value by considering only the change in the derivation probability of the first game result. In a gaming machine capable of performing display, there is an effect that calculation of a payout rate can be facilitated, and an increase in man-hours at the time of designing game specifications can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine 49,
The first determining means includes:
In a situation where the second game result can be derived in the first dynamic display by the first dynamic display execution means, the second dynamic display is being executed by the second dynamic display execution means, When the first game result or the second game result can be derived in the second dynamic display, and the execution time of the second dynamic display is longer than the execution time of the first dynamic display, A result changing means (for example, a special figure 2 changing process (S5520)) for deriving a game result other than the first game result or the second game result in the second dynamic display is provided. 4 gaming machines.

  According to the gaming machine 410, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine 4.9. That is, in a situation where the second game result can be derived in the first dynamic display by the first dynamic display execution means, the second dynamic display is being executed by the second dynamic display execution means, and 2 If the first game result or the second game result can be derived in the dynamic display and the execution time of the second dynamic display is longer than the execution time of the first dynamic display, the first determination means The result changing means provided is configured to derive a game result other than the first game result or the second game result in the second dynamic display. Thereby, while the second game value is provided based on the second game result based on the first dynamic display, the first game is provided based on the first game result based on the second dynamic display, or based on the second game result. Assignment of the second game value can be prevented from being performed, and it is possible to prevent an excessive game value from being paid out to the player due to the duplicated first game value or second game value. There is an effect that. Further, in calculating the payout rate, it is not necessary to consider the duplicated first game value or the second game value. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine 49,
The first determining means includes:
In a situation where the second game result can be derived in the first dynamic display by the first dynamic display execution means, the second dynamic display is being executed by the second dynamic display execution means, When the first game result or the second game result can be derived in the second dynamic display, and the execution time of the second dynamic display is longer than the execution time of the first dynamic display, The progress of the second dynamic display is temporarily stopped, and after the provision of the second game value based on the first dynamic display is completed, the temporarily stopped second dynamic display is advanced. A gaming machine 411 comprising: a result temporary stopping means (for example, a modified example 130) for deriving the first game result or the second game result.

  According to the gaming machine 411, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine 49. That is, in a situation where the second game result can be derived in the first dynamic display by the first dynamic display execution means by the result temporary suspension means provided in the first determination means, the second dynamic display execution means During the execution of the second dynamic display, the first game result or the second game result can be derived in the second dynamic display, and the execution time of the second dynamic display is the first dynamic display. If it is longer than the execution time of the target display, the progress of the second dynamic display is temporarily stopped, and after the provision of the second game value based on the first dynamic display ends, the second display temporarily stopped. The dynamic display is advanced to derive the first game result or the second game result. Thereby, while the second game value is provided based on the second game result based on the first dynamic display, the first game is provided based on the first game result based on the second dynamic display, or based on the second game result. Assignment of the second game value can be prevented from being performed, and it is possible to prevent an excessive game value from being paid out to the player due to the duplicated first game value or second game value. There is an effect that. Further, in calculating the payout rate, it is not necessary to consider the duplicated first game value or the second game value. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

In any of the gaming machines 48 to 411,
When the first game result is derived, a first special ball entry means (for example, a special winning opening 65a) in which a game ball is driven to enter the ball,
When the second game result is derived, a second special ball entry means (for example, a small winning opening 72a) in which a game ball is driven so as to be able to enter,
Movable means (for example, the ordinary electric hand 64c) that can be displaced between a state where a game ball can enter the second ball entry means (for example, the second starting port 64b) and a state where entry is difficult or impossible. When,
A third ball entry means (for example, a through gate 67) which is capable of entering a game ball fired by the launching means and is different from the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means;
A third information acquisition unit (for example, a general-purpose reservation ball storage area 273i) for acquiring third determination information based on the game ball having entered the third ball entry unit;
A third dynamic execution unit that executes a third dynamic display of the third identification information based on the third determination information acquired by the third information acquisition unit (for example, a normal electric hand control process (S5104)) When,
A driving unit (for example, S5805 or S5807 of the ordinary electrical combination control process (S5104)) for driving the movable unit based on an execution result of the third dynamic execution unit,
The movable means,
In a state in which a game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter the second ball entry means, a closed-time rolling means (for example, a normal electric machine in the twenty-eighth embodiment) in which a game ball can roll on the upper part of the movable means. 64c).
The game state changing means,
When the first game value is given based on a predetermined first derivation result as the first game result (for example, a jackpot type of “probability change B” that gives “probability change state”), the game state is changed. Of the advantageous gaming states, the first advantageous transition means (for example, S5754 of the jackpot ending process (S5712) for shifting to a predetermined first advantageous gaming state (for example, the “probability variation state” of the twenty-eighth embodiment): YES) )When,
As the first game result, the first game value is provided based on a second derived result different from the first derived result (for example, a jackpot type of “probability variation A” that provides “super probability variation state”). In this case, the second advantageous shifting means for shifting the gaming state to a second advantageous gaming state different from the first advantageous gaming state (for example, the “super-probability changing state” in the twenty-eighth embodiment) among the advantageous gaming states. (E.g., S5751 of jackpot end processing (S5712: YES)).
The third dynamic execution means,
In the first advantageous gaming state, the execution time of the third dynamic display is changed from one end (for example, right end) of the closing-time rolling means to the other end (for example, left end) of the game ball. A short-time pattern (for example, “0.5 seconds”) performed shorter than the rolling time (for example, “3 seconds”)
In the second advantageous gaming state, a long-time pattern (for example, “5 seconds”) in which the execution time of the third dynamic display is made longer than the rolling time,
The driving means,
In the first advantageous game state, the movable means is driven in an easy-to-enter pattern (for example, a normal symbol high probability state and open extension) in which a game ball easily enters the second entering means,
In the second advantageous game state, the movable means is provided in a ball entry pattern (for example, a low probability state of a normal symbol and a non-open extension) in which a game ball is difficult to enter the second entry means from the easy entry pattern. Drive,
The second special entering means,
A gaming machine which is provided at a position where a game ball rolled from one end to the other end of the closing-time rolling means easily enters (for example, downstream of the normal electric utility 64c). 12.

  According to the gaming machine 412, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines 48 to 411. That is, when the first game result is derived, the first special ball entry means is driven to allow a game ball to enter, and when the second game result is derived, the second special ball entry means Is driven to allow a game ball to enter. The movable means is configured to be displaceable between a state in which a game ball can enter the second ball entry means and a state in which entry is difficult or impossible. Here, the third ball entry means different from the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means is configured so that game balls fired by the firing means can enter. Then, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the third ball entry means, third determination information is acquired by the third information acquisition means, and the third determination information acquired by the third information acquisition means is added to the third determination information. Based on the third dynamic execution means, the third dynamic display of the third identification information is executed, and the driving means drives the movable means based on the execution result of the third dynamic execution means. . Here, in a state in which the game ball cannot enter the second ball entry means or cannot enter the ball, the closing ball rolling means provided on the movable means enables the game ball to roll on the upper part of the movable means. You. Then, when the first gaming value is given as the first gaming result based on the predetermined first derivation result, the gaming state is changed to the advantageous gaming state by the first advantageous shifting means provided in the gaming state changing means. The game is shifted to a predetermined first advantageous gaming state. Also, when the first game value is given based on a second derivation result different from the first derivation result as the first game result, the game state is changed by the second advantageous transition means provided in the game state change means, A transition is made to a second advantageous gaming state different from the first advantageous gaming state among the advantageous gaming states. Here, in the first advantageous game state, the third dynamic execution means sets the third dynamic display based on the rolling time for the game ball to roll from one end to the other end of the closing rolling means. And a long time pattern in which the execution time of the third dynamic display is made longer than the rolling time in the second advantageous game state. In the first advantageous game state, the driving means drives the movable means in the easy-to-enter pattern in which game balls easily enter the second entering means, while in the second advantageous game state, the easy-to-enter pattern The movable means is driven in a ball entry pattern in which it is difficult for game balls to enter the second ball entry means. The second special ball entry means is provided at a position where the game balls rolled from one end to the other end of the closed-time rolling means easily enter the ball. That is, in the first advantageous game state, the execution time of the third dynamic display may be shorter than the time when the game ball can roll over the movable means, and the movable means is driven in the easy-to-enter pattern. From this, the game ball rolling on the upper part of the movable means is likely to enter the second ball entry means, and is difficult to enter the second special ball entry means. On the other hand, in the second advantageous game state, the execution time of the third dynamic display may be longer than the time in which the game ball can roll over the movable means, and the movable means is not driven in the easy-to-enter pattern. Thus, the game ball rolling on the upper part of the movable means does not enter the second ball entry means, but enters the second special ball entry means. Thereby, whether the game ball enters the second special ball entry means when the second game result is derived is made different between the first derived result and the second derived result as the first game result. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

In game machine 48,
When the first game result is derived, a first special ball entry means (for example, a special winning opening 65a) in which a game ball is driven to enter the ball,
When the second game result is derived, a second special ball entry means (for example, a small winning opening 72a) in which a game ball is driven so as to be able to enter,
Movable means (for example, the ordinary electric hand 64c) that can be displaced between a state where a game ball can enter the second ball entry means (for example, the second starting port 64b) and a state where entry is difficult or impossible. When,
A third ball entry means (for example, a through gate 67) which is capable of entering a game ball fired by the launching means and is different from the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means;
A third information acquisition unit (for example, a general-purpose reservation ball storage area 273i) for acquiring third determination information based on the game ball having entered the third ball entry unit;
A third dynamic execution unit that executes a third dynamic display of the third identification information based on the third determination information acquired by the third information acquisition unit (for example, a normal electric hand control process (S5104)) When,
A driving unit (for example, S5805 or S5807 of the ordinary electrical combination control process (S5104)) for driving the movable unit based on an execution result of the third dynamic execution unit,
The movable means,
At least in a state in which a game ball can enter the second ball entry means, a protruding rolling means on which the game ball can roll on the upper part of the movable means (for example, the normal electric hand 64c in the twenty-ninth embodiment). Upper surface),
The driving means,
In the predetermined game state, the movable means has a difficult-to-enter or a non-enterable pattern (for example, the normal electric hand 64c has a protruding time of "0.1 second") in which the game ball enters the second entering means. Drive the
In the advantageous gaming state, the movable means is provided in a ball-enterable pattern (for example, the normal electric hand 64c has a projection time of "5 seconds") in which a game ball can enter the second ball entry means by the projecting rolling means. Driving means,
The said pass / fail storage means,
A first success / failure storage unit (for example, special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1) used in the first determination unit;
A second success / failure storage means (for example, special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2) used in the second determination means,
The first success / failure storage means,
Storing the first value while not storing the second value,
The second right / wrong storage means,
Storing the first value and the second value;
The second special entering means,
A fourth ball entry means (for example, a special area switch 208h) capable of entering a game ball flowing into the second special ball entry means,
The fourth ball entry means,
The gaming machine 413, wherein the first game value can be given when a game ball enters.

  According to the gaming machine 413, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine 48. That is, when the first game result is derived, the first special ball entry means is driven to allow a game ball to enter, and when the second game result is derived, the second special ball entry means Is driven to allow a game ball to enter. The movable means is configured to be displaceable between a state in which a game ball can enter the second ball entry means and a state in which entry is difficult or impossible. Here, the third ball entry means different from the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means is configured so that game balls fired by the firing means can enter. Then, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the third ball entry means, third determination information is acquired by the third information acquisition means, and the third determination information acquired by the third information acquisition means is added to the third determination information. Based on the third dynamic execution means, the third dynamic display of the third identification information is executed, and the driving means drives the movable means based on the execution result of the third dynamic execution means. . Here, at least in a state in which the game ball can enter the second ball entry means, the projecting rolling means provided on the movable means is configured so that the game ball can roll over the movable means. In addition, the driving means drives the movable means in the predetermined entering game state in a difficult-to-enter pattern in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter the second entering means. The movable means is driven by the means in a ball-enterable pattern in which a game ball can enter the second ball-in means. Then, the first hit / fail storage means as the hit / fail storage means is used in the first determining means, and the second hit / fail storage means also as the hit / fail storage means is used in the second determining means. Here, the first value storage unit stores the first value, but does not store the second value, and the second value storage unit stores the first value and the second value. The fourth special ball entry means provided in the second special ball entry means allows the game balls flowing into the second special ball entry means to enter the ball, and the game balls enter the second ball entry means. In this case, the first game value can be provided. That is, in the hit determination by the first determination means, since the second value is not stored in the first hit storage means but the first value is stored, the first game result is derived and the first game value is determined. It becomes a playability of whether to get. On the other hand, in the success / failure determination in the second determination means, since the second value is stored in the second success / failure storage means together with the first value, the first game result is derived to obtain the first game value, or The second game result is derived, and further, a game ball is made to enter the fourth ball entry means so as to obtain the first game value. Thus, the pattern of the game value that can be given by the first determination means and the pattern of the game value that can be given by the second determination means can be made different. Therefore, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

In gaming machine 413,
The second right / wrong storage means,
The gaming machine 414, wherein the derivation probability of the second value is configured to be higher than the derivation probability of the first value.

  According to the gaming machine 414, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine 413. That is, the second probability storage means is configured such that the derivation probability of the second value is higher than the derivation probability of the first value. Thereby, in the determination by the second determination means, the second game result based on the extraction of the second value is configured to be generated more than the first game result and the like. Therefore, the pattern of the game value that can be given by the first determination means and the game value that can be given by the second determination means can be clearly different. Therefore, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Fifth group: If there are multiple roles other than the jackpot, compensate for the jackpot increase from each role other than the jackpot>
In a conventional gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a ratio of the number of balls obtained when a player continuously plays a game in the pachinko machine (the number obtained by dividing the number of payout balls (the number of safe balls) by the number of out balls). A so-called machine splitting (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a "ball rate") is provided in a plurality of stages, and any one of the set values corresponding to the ball rate desired by a person involved in the hall or the like is set. In some cases, after the power of the pachinko machine is turned on and before the game is started by the player (before the game hall is opened), the hall-related personnel and the like can be set (changed or updated). Then, when the player plays a game with the pachinko machine, a win / fail lottery is performed based on the set value, so that the player can play the game at a payout rate according to the set value. (For example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-109085)).

  Specifically, for example, a game in which a first role (for example, a jackpot game) with a high obtained game value and a second role (for example, a small hit game) with a lower obtained game value than the first role can be randomly selected. In the machine, the value of the random number counter, the value of which is updated in a predetermined range, is obtained based on the starting winning, and the value of the obtained random number counter is determined by referring to the determination table provided for each set value, There is a configuration in which a winning or losing lottery of the first role or the second role is performed. In this determination table, the number of the first random numbers corresponding to the first combination, the number of the second random numbers corresponding to the second combination, and the random number corresponding to the third combination (for example, losing) to which the game value is not provided. The numbers are distributed (defined) so that the number of values differs for each set value. In some cases, the higher the set value, the more advantageous the payout rate for the player.

  Here, in order to install a gaming machine in a gaming hall, it is necessary to pass a certification test conducted by a competent authority and obtain approval indicating that the gaming machine is within a specified range. For this reason, when designing the game specifications, the gaming machine developer has a payout rate at which the certification can be obtained by the certification test at all the set values of the gaming machine in order to pass the certification test and receive the approval. As described above, it is necessary to allocate the first random number value and the second random number value in the determination unit.

  However, in a gaming machine in which the setting value can be changed, when the derivation probability of the first random number value is changed in accordance with the setting change, if the configuration is such that the first random number value is supplemented from a fixed one predetermined random number value, the first random number is lost. Due to the change in the derivation probability of the numerical value, it is necessary to secure the number of predetermined random numbers, which causes restrictions when designing game specifications, reduces the degree of freedom in designing game specifications, and reduces the interest in games. There is a possibility that it will.

  SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The fifth group of inventions has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

Determination information obtaining means (for example, main control device 110) for obtaining determination information (for example, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) based on satisfaction of a predetermined starting condition (for example, winning in the first starting port 64a);
Determining means for determining the determination information obtained by the determination information obtaining means (for example, special figure 1 change start processing (S5505));
Based on the first game result (for example, big hit) being derived by the determination means, a first game value giving means (for example, big hit game) capable of giving a predetermined first game value (for example, big hit game) to the player A special winning opening opening / closing control process (S5710));
A second game value (for example, a small hit game) that is different from the first game value to the player based on the fact that a second game result (for example, a small hit) is derived by the determination means. Game value providing means (for example, small winning opening opening / closing control processing (S5714));
A setting device (for example, S4121 of a setting change process (S4005)) capable of changing a probability that the first game result is derived by the determination device.
At least a first value (for example, a large random number value) corresponding to the first game result and a second value (for example, a small random number value) corresponding to the second game result are used for the determination by the determination means. And a storage unit (for example, special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1) for storing
The determining means includes:
When the determination information acquisition unit extracts the determination information that is a third value other than the first value or the second value (for example, a loss random number value), the game value is not given to the player. Composed,
The said pass / fail storage means,
Depending on the setting value set by the setting unit, the derivation probability of the first value is stored so as to be different in some cases,
The determination information acquisition means,
When the setting value is changed by the setting unit, the derivation probability of the second value and the derivation probability of the third value are respectively changed with the change of the derivation probability of the first value (for example, A gaming machine 50 characterized in that an increase in the jackpot random value resulting from the setting change is supplemented from each of the small hit random number and the lost random number.

  According to the gaming machine 50, the determination information is obtained by the determination information obtaining means based on the establishment of the predetermined starting condition, and the determination information obtained by the determination information obtaining means is determined by the determination means. Then, based on the fact that the first game result is derived by the determining means, a predetermined first game value may be provided to the player by the first game value providing means, and the second game result may be provided by the determining means. Is derived, the predetermined second game value may be provided to the player by the second game value provision means. Further, the probability that the first game result is derived by the determining means is configured to be changeable by the setting means. Here, at least a first value corresponding to the first game result and a second value corresponding to the second game result are stored in the hit / fail storage unit used for the determination by the determination unit. Further, when the determination information acquisition unit extracts the determination information that is the third value other than the first value or the second value, the determination unit is configured not to give a game value to the player. Then, depending on the setting value set by the setting unit, the derivation probability of the first value is stored in the hit / fail storage unit so that the first value may be different, and when the setting value is changed by the setting unit, the first value is changed. With the change of the derivation probability, the derivation probability of the second value and the derivation probability of the third value are respectively changed. This makes it possible to compensate for the change in the derivation probability of the first value from each of the second value and the third value based on the setting change. There is no need to supplement from a predetermined random number value. Therefore, it is not necessary to secure the number of the predetermined random numbers from the number of the predetermined random values of 1 by the change of the derivation probability of the first value. There is an effect that the degree of freedom can be increased and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine 50,
The second value and the third value are:
At a first setting value (for example, setting value “1”) having the lowest derivation probability of the first value, a second setting value (for example, setting value) having the highest derivation probability of the first value from the first setting value A gaming machine 51 characterized by being provided with an increment of the first value in "6").

  According to the gaming machine 51, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 50. That is, at the first set value with the lowest derivation probability of the first value, the increment of the first value, the second value, and the third value at the second set value with the highest derivation probability of the first value from the first set value Value is provided. Thereby, the change in the derivation probability of the first value is compensated from each of the second value and the third value based on the setting change, so that the change in the first value is changed from the fixed predetermined random number value of 1. There is no need to make up for it. Therefore, it is not necessary to secure the derivation probability of the predetermined random number value from the predetermined random number value of 1 by the change of the first value, so that there is no restriction at the time of designing the game specification, and the degree of freedom in designing the game specification is increased. This has the effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine 50 or 51,
The said pass / fail storage means,
At least three stages of step-by-step success / failure storage means (for example, a special figure 1 jackpot random number table for setting values “1” to “3”) in which the derivation probabilities of the first values are different for each of the setting values set by the setting means 272a1),
The stepwise success / failure storage means,
When the setting value is changed stepwise by the setting means, the first value derivation probability is configured to increase uniformly,
The gaming machine 52, wherein the second value and the third value are configured to decrease evenly as the derivation probability of the first value increases.

  According to the gaming machine 52, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines 50 or 51. That is, the hit / fail judgment storage means is provided with at least three stepwise hit / fail judgment storage means having different derivation probabilities of the first value for each set value set by the setting means. Then, when the setting value is changed stepwise by the setting means, the stepwise success / failure storage means is configured so that the derivation probability of the first value is uniformly increased. Also, the second value and the third value are configured to decrease evenly as the derivation probability of the first value increases. As a result, the calculation of the payout rate for each set value is performed in such a manner that the winning probability of the first game value, which increases stepwise and uniformly, and the decrease of the winning probability of the second game value, which decreases gradually and evenly, are calculated. In consideration of the above, the calculation can be performed, and the calculation of the payout rate can be facilitated, so that an increase in the number of steps when designing the game specification can be suppressed.

  Note that “equally increase” means, for example, that the derivation probability that increases for each set value increases by the same value (for example, 1%) from the derivation probability one step lower, or the derivation probability that is one step lower On the other hand, a case in which the same ratio (for example, 5%) is increased by the same ratio is exemplified.

In the gaming machine 50 or 51,
The said pass / fail storage means,
At least three stages of step-by-step success / failure storage means (for example, a special figure 1 jackpot random number table for setting values “1” to “3”) in which the derivation probabilities of the first values are different for each of the setting values set by the setting means 272a1),
The stepwise success / failure storage means,
When the setting value is changed stepwise by the setting means, the derivation probability of the first value is configured to increase at a predetermined rate,
The gaming machine 53, wherein the second value and the third value decrease at a predetermined rate with an increase in the derivation probability of the first value.

  According to the gaming machine 53, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine 50 or 51, the following effect is exhibited. That is, the hit / fail judgment storage means is provided with at least three stepwise hit / fail judgment storage means having different derivation probabilities of the first value for each set value set by the setting means. Then, when the setting value is changed stepwise by the setting means, the stepwise success / failure storage means is configured so that the derivation probability of the first value increases at a predetermined rate. In addition, the second value and the third value are configured to decrease at a predetermined rate as the derivation probability of the first value increases. Thereby, the calculation of the payout rate for each set value is performed by increasing the winning probability of the first game value that increases stepwise and at a predetermined rate and the winning probability of the second game value that decreases stepwise and at a predetermined rate. The calculation can be performed by considering the reduced amount, and the calculation of the payout rate can be facilitated, so that an increase in the number of steps when designing the game specification can be suppressed.

  Note that “increase at a predetermined rate” means, for example, that the derivation probability that increases for each set value increases proportionally (for example, 5%, 10%, 15%,...) Or an exponential function (For example, a case where the number increases to 2 times, 4 times, 8 times,... Based on the set value “1”) is exemplified.

In any of the gaming machines 50 to 53,
The said pass / fail storage means,
Storing the first value as a continuous value;
A gaming machine (54) characterized in that, when the setting value is changed by the setting means, a continuous range of the first value is changed.

According to the gaming machine 504, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines 50 to 53, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first value is stored as a continuous value by the hit / fail storage unit. Then, when the setting value is changed by the setting means, the range of the continuous first value is changed.
This makes it possible for the determining means to determine the first game value by determining the range from the beginning to the end of the first value. Therefore, even when the setting value is changed by the setting unit, it is not necessary to determine each changed first value in the validity determination, and the value to be determined is determined from the beginning of the first value. It can be determined by determining whether or not it is included up to the end. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load in the determination of success / failure can be reduced.

In any of the gaming machines 50 to 53,
The said pass / fail storage means,
Storing the first value as a discontinuous value;
A gaming machine 55 characterized in that the number of discontinuous first values is changed when the setting value is changed by the setting means.

According to the gaming machine 55, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines 50 to 53. That is, the first value is stored as a discontinuous value by the hit / fail storage unit. Then, when the setting value is changed by the setting means, the number of discontinuous first values is changed.
Thus, the determination of the first game value by the determination means needs to be performed by determining whether each first value matches, but it is difficult to grasp the position (arrangement) of the first value in the hit / failure storage means. . Therefore, by making it difficult for the player to grasp the position (arrangement) of the first value, it is possible to suppress the illegal derivation of the first game value and to increase the security performance of the gaming machine. is there.

In any of the gaming machines 50 to 55,
Launching means (for example, a ball launching unit 112a) for launching a game ball;
A first ball entry means (for example, a first starting port 64CA) into which a game ball fired by the firing means can enter;
A game ball fired by the firing means is capable of entering, and a second ball entry means (for example, a second starting port 64b) different from the first ball entry means,
The determination information acquisition means,
A first information acquisition unit (for example, a first reserved ball storage area 273d) for acquiring first determination information as the determination information based on a game ball having entered the first ball entry unit;
A second information acquisition unit (for example, a second reserved ball storage area 273e) for acquiring second determination information as the determination information based on a game ball having entered the second ball entry unit. ,
The determining means includes:
First determining means for determining the first determination information acquired by the first information acquiring means (for example, special figure 1 change start processing (S5505));
A second determination unit (for example, a special figure 2 change start process (S5508)) for determining the second determination information acquired by the second information acquisition unit;
The first game value providing means,
From the predetermined game state before the provision of the first game value (for example, “normal game state”), after the provision of the first game value, an advantageous game state different from the predetermined game state (for example, “super probability fluctuation state” or Game state changing means (for example, jackpot ending processing (S5712)) for changing the game state to "probability change state",
The predetermined game state is
By making it easier for the game ball to enter the first ball entry unit than the second ball entry unit, it is easy to obtain the first determination information from the second determination information,
The advantageous game state is
The first ball entry means allows the game ball to easily enter the second ball entry means, so that the second determination information is more easily obtained than the first determination information. 56 gaming machines.

  According to the gaming machine 56, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines 50 to 55, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a game ball is fired by the firing means, and a game ball fired by the firing means is configured to be able to enter the first ball-in means, and a game ball fired by the fire means is also inserted in the first ball-in means. And a second ball entry means different from the above. Then, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entry means, the first determination information as the determination information is obtained by the first information acquisition means provided in the determination information acquisition means, Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means, the second determination information, which is the determination information, is obtained by the second information acquisition means provided in the determination information acquisition means. Also, the first determination information obtained by the first information obtaining means is determined by the first determining means provided in the determining means, and the second determination information obtained by the second information obtaining means is provided in the determining means. It is determined by the determined second determination means. The game state changing means provided in the first game value providing means changes the game state from the predetermined game state before the first game value is provided to the advantageous game state different from the predetermined game state after the first game value is provided. You. Then, in the predetermined game state, the game ball is more likely to enter the first ball entry means than the second ball entry means, so that the first determination information is more easily obtained from the second determination information, and in the advantageous game state, Since the game ball is easier to enter the second ball entry device than the first ball entry device, the second determination information is more easily obtained than the first determination information. Thereby, the calculation of the payout rate for each set value, for each piece of determination information, and for each game state is determined by the increase in the derivation probability of the first game value in the first determination means and the second determination means accompanying the setting change. It is possible to calculate the payout rate by considering the change in the derivation probability of the second game result in the first determination means and the second determination means and the determination information which is easily obtained for each game state. This has the effect of facilitating the calculation and suppressing an increase in the number of steps when designing the game specifications.

In game machine 56,
First dynamic display execution means (for example, first special display) for executing first dynamic display of first identification information on a display means (for example, special symbol display device 39) based on the judgment result of the first judgment means. Execution of dynamic display of symbols),
A second dynamic display execution unit (for example, a second special symbol) that executes a second dynamic display of second identification information different from the first identification information on the display unit based on the determination result of the second determination unit Execution of dynamic display), and
The display means,
The first dynamic display by the first dynamic display executing means and the second dynamic display by the second dynamic display executing means can be executed in parallel (simultaneously). 57 gaming machines.

  According to the gaming machine 57, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 56. That is, based on the determination result of the first determination unit, the first dynamic display execution unit executes the first dynamic display of the first identification information on the display unit. In addition, based on the determination result of the second determination unit, the second dynamic display execution unit executes the second dynamic display of the second identification information different from the first identification information on the display unit. Then, the first dynamic display by the first dynamic display execution means and the second dynamic display by the second dynamic display execution means can be executed in parallel (simultaneously) by the display means.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine capable of executing the first dynamic display of the first identification information and the second dynamic display of the second identification information in parallel (simultaneous) progress, the execution time and the like in each dynamic display are considered. When it is necessary to calculate the payout rate, and when the payout rates and the like in the first game result and the second game result are combined and calculated for each set value, the man-hour at the time of designing the game specification becomes enormous. There is a possibility that it will.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine 57, in a gaming machine in which the first dynamic display and the second dynamic display can proceed in parallel (simultaneously), in a predetermined gaming state, the first ball-in means is shifted from the second ball-in means. The first determination information is easily obtained from the second determination information because the game ball easily enters the ball, and in the advantageous gaming state, the game ball enters the second ball entry unit from the first ball entry unit. It is configured such that the second determination information is more easily obtained than the first determination information. Thereby, the calculation of the payout rate for each set value, for each piece of determination information, and for each game state is determined by the increase in the derivation probability of the first game value in the first determination means and the second determination means accompanying the setting change. The approximate calculation can be performed by considering the change in the derivation probability of the second game result between the first determination unit and the second determination unit and the determination information that is easily obtained for each game state. This has the effect of facilitating the calculation of the ball rate and suppressing an increase in man-hours at the time of designing game specifications.

In gaming machine 57,
The first determining means includes:
In a situation where the second game result can be derived in the first dynamic display by the first dynamic display execution means, the second dynamic display is being executed by the second dynamic display execution means, When the first game result or the second game result can be derived in the second dynamic display, and the execution time of the second dynamic display is longer than the execution time of the first dynamic display, A result changing means (for example, a special figure 2 changing process (S5520)) for deriving a game result other than the first game result or the second game result in the second dynamic display is provided. 58 game machines.

  According to the gaming machine 58, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine 57. That is, in a situation where the second game result can be derived in the first dynamic display by the first dynamic display execution means, the second dynamic display is being executed by the second dynamic display execution means, and 2 If the first game result or the second game result can be derived in the dynamic display and the execution time of the second dynamic display is longer than the execution time of the first dynamic display, the first determination means The result changing means provided is configured to derive a game result other than the first game result or the second game result in the second dynamic display. Thereby, while the second game value is provided based on the second game result based on the first dynamic display, the first game is provided based on the first game result based on the second dynamic display, or based on the second game result. Assignment of the second game value can be prevented from being performed, and it is possible to prevent an excessive game value from being paid out to the player due to the duplicated first game value or second game value. There is an effect that. Further, in calculating the payout rate, it is not necessary to consider the duplicated first game value or the second game value. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

In gaming machine 57,
The first determining means includes:
In a situation where the second game result can be derived in the first dynamic display by the first dynamic display execution means, the second dynamic display is being executed by the second dynamic display execution means, When the first game result or the second game result can be derived in the second dynamic display, and the execution time of the second dynamic display is longer than the execution time of the first dynamic display, The progress of the second dynamic display is temporarily stopped, and after the provision of the second game value based on the first dynamic display is completed, the temporarily stopped second dynamic display is advanced. A gaming machine 59, comprising: a result pause means (for example, a modification 130) for deriving the first game result or the second game result.

  According to the gaming machine 59, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 57. That is, in a situation where the second game result can be derived in the first dynamic display by the first dynamic display execution means by the result temporary suspension means provided in the first determination means, the second dynamic display execution means During the execution of the second dynamic display, the first game result or the second game result can be derived in the second dynamic display, and the execution time of the second dynamic display is the first dynamic display. If it is longer than the execution time of the target display, the progress of the second dynamic display is temporarily stopped, and after the provision of the second game value based on the first dynamic display ends, the second display temporarily stopped. The dynamic display is advanced to derive the first game result or the second game result. Thereby, while the second game value is provided based on the second game result based on the first dynamic display, the first game is provided based on the first game result based on the second dynamic display, or based on the second game result. Assignment of the second game value can be prevented from being performed, and it is possible to prevent an excessive game value from being paid out to the player due to the duplicated first game value or second game value. There is an effect that. Further, in calculating the payout rate, it is not necessary to consider the duplicated first game value or the second game value. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

In any of the gaming machines 56 to 59,
When the first game result is derived, a first special ball entry means (for example, a special winning opening 65a) in which a game ball is driven to enter the ball,
When the second game result is derived, a second special ball entry means (for example, a small winning opening 72a) in which a game ball is driven so as to be able to enter,
Movable means (for example, the ordinary electric hand 64c) that can be displaced between a state where a game ball can enter the second ball entry means (for example, the second starting port 64b) and a state where entry is difficult or impossible. When,
A third ball entry means (for example, a through gate 67) which is capable of entering a game ball fired by the launching means and is different from the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means;
A third information acquisition unit (for example, a general-purpose reservation ball storage area 273i) for acquiring third determination information based on the game ball having entered the third ball entry unit;
A third dynamic execution unit that executes a third dynamic display of the third identification information based on the third determination information acquired by the third information acquisition unit (for example, a normal electric hand control process (S5104)) When,
A driving unit (for example, S5805 or S5807 of the ordinary electrical combination control process (S5104)) for driving the movable unit based on an execution result of the third dynamic execution unit,
The movable means,
In a state in which a game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter the second ball entry means, a closed-time rolling means (for example, a normal electric machine in the twenty-eighth embodiment) in which a game ball can roll on the upper part of the movable means. 64c).
The game state changing means,
When the first game value is given based on a predetermined first derivation result as the first game result (for example, a jackpot type of “probability change B” that gives “probability change state”), the game state is changed. Of the advantageous gaming states, the first advantageous transition means (for example, S5754 of the jackpot ending process (S5712) for shifting to a predetermined first advantageous gaming state (for example, the “probability variation state” of the twenty-eighth embodiment): YES) )When,
As the first game result, the first game value is provided based on a second derived result different from the first derived result (for example, a jackpot type of “probability variation A” that provides “super probability variation state”). In this case, the second advantageous shifting means for shifting the gaming state to a second advantageous gaming state different from the first advantageous gaming state (for example, the “super-probability changing state” in the twenty-eighth embodiment) among the advantageous gaming states. (E.g., S5751 of jackpot end processing (S5712: YES)).
The third dynamic execution means,
In the first advantageous gaming state, the execution time of the third dynamic display is changed from one end (for example, right end) of the closing-time rolling means to the other end (for example, left end) of the game ball. A short-time pattern (for example, “0.5 seconds”) performed shorter than the rolling time (for example, “3 seconds”)
In the second advantageous gaming state, a long-time pattern (for example, “5 seconds”) in which the execution time of the third dynamic display is made longer than the rolling time,
The driving means,
In the first advantageous game state, the movable means is driven in an easy-to-enter pattern (for example, a normal symbol high probability state and open extension) in which a game ball easily enters the second entering means,
In the second advantageous game state, the movable means is provided in a ball entry pattern (for example, a low probability state of a normal symbol and a non-open extension) in which a game ball is difficult to enter the second entry means from the easy entry pattern. Drive,
The second special entering means,
A gaming machine provided at a position where a game ball rolled from one end of the closing rolling means to the other end is easy to enter (for example, on the downstream side of the ordinary electric utility 64c). 10.

According to the gaming machine 510, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines 56 to 59.
That is, when the first game result is derived, the first special ball entry means is driven to allow a game ball to enter, and when the second game result is derived, the second special ball entry means Is driven to allow a game ball to enter. The movable means is configured to be displaceable between a state in which a game ball can enter the second ball entry means and a state in which entry is difficult or impossible. Here, the third ball entry means different from the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means is configured so that game balls fired by the firing means can enter. Then, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the third ball entry means, third determination information is acquired by the third information acquisition means, and the third determination information acquired by the third information acquisition means is added to the third determination information. Based on the third dynamic execution means, the third dynamic display of the third identification information is executed, and the driving means drives the movable means based on the execution result of the third dynamic execution means. . Here, in a state in which the game ball cannot enter the second ball entry means or cannot enter the ball, the closing ball rolling means provided on the movable means enables the game ball to roll on the upper part of the movable means. You. Then, when the first gaming value is given as the first gaming result based on the predetermined first derivation result, the gaming state is changed to the advantageous gaming state by the first advantageous shifting means provided in the gaming state changing means. The game is shifted to a predetermined first advantageous gaming state. Also, when the first game value is given based on a second derivation result different from the first derivation result as the first game result, the game state is changed by the second advantageous transition means provided in the game state change means, A transition is made to a second advantageous gaming state different from the first advantageous gaming state among the advantageous gaming states. Here, in the first advantageous game state, the third dynamic execution means sets the third dynamic display based on the rolling time for the game ball to roll from one end to the other end of the closing rolling means. And a long time pattern in which the execution time of the third dynamic display is longer than the rolling time in the second advantageous game state. In the first advantageous game state, the driving means drives the movable means in the easy-to-enter pattern in which game balls easily enter the second entering means, while in the second advantageous game state, the easy-to-enter pattern The movable means is driven in a ball entry pattern in which it is difficult for game balls to enter the second ball entry means. The second special ball entry means is provided at a position where the game balls rolled from one end to the other end of the closed-time rolling means easily enter the ball. That is, in the first advantageous game state, the execution time of the third dynamic display may be shorter than the time when the game ball can roll over the movable means, and the movable means is driven in the easy-to-enter pattern. From this, the game ball rolling on the upper part of the movable means is likely to enter the second ball entry means, and is difficult to enter the second special ball entry means. On the other hand, in the second advantageous game state, the execution time of the third dynamic display may be longer than the time in which the game ball rolls over the movable means, and the movable means is not driven in the easy ball entry pattern. Thus, the game ball rolling on the upper part of the movable means does not enter the second ball entry means, but enters the second special ball entry means. Thereby, whether the game ball enters the second special ball entry means when the second game result is derived is made different between the first derived result and the second derived result as the first game result. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

In game machine 56,
When the first game result is derived, a first special ball entry means (for example, a special winning opening 65a) in which a game ball is driven to enter the ball,
When the second game result is derived, a second special ball entry means (for example, a small winning opening 72a) in which a game ball is driven so as to be able to enter,
Movable means (for example, the ordinary electric hand 64c) that can be displaced between a state where a game ball can enter the second ball entry means (for example, the second starting port 64b) and a state where entry is difficult or impossible. When,
A third ball entry means (for example, a through gate 67) which is capable of entering a game ball fired by the launching means and is different from the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means;
A third information acquisition unit (for example, a general-purpose reservation ball storage area 273i) for acquiring third determination information based on the game ball having entered the third ball entry unit;
A third dynamic execution unit that executes a third dynamic display of the third identification information based on the third determination information acquired by the third information acquisition unit (for example, a normal electric hand control process (S5104)) When,
A driving unit (for example, S5805 or S5807 of the ordinary electrical combination control process (S5104)) for driving the movable unit based on an execution result of the third dynamic execution unit,
The movable means,
At least in a state in which a game ball can enter the second ball entry means, a protruding rolling means on which the game ball can roll on the upper part of the movable means (for example, the normal electric hand 64c in the twenty-ninth embodiment). Upper surface),
The driving means,
In the predetermined game state, the movable means has a difficult-to-enter or a non-enterable pattern (for example, the normal electric hand 64c has a protruding time of "0.1 second") in which the game ball enters the second entering means. Drive the
In the advantageous gaming state, the movable means is provided in a ball-enterable pattern (for example, the normal electric hand 64c has a projection time of "5 seconds") in which a game ball can enter the second ball entry means by the projecting rolling means. Driving means,
The said pass / fail storage means,
A first success / failure storage unit (for example, special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1) used in the first determination unit;
A second success / failure storage means (for example, special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2) used in the second determination means,
The first success / failure storage means,
Storing the first value while not storing the second value,
The second right / wrong storage means,
Storing the first value and the second value;
The second special entering means,
A fourth ball entry means (for example, a special area switch 208h) capable of entering a game ball flowing into the second special ball entry means,
The fourth ball entry means,
The gaming machine 511, wherein the first game value can be given when a game ball enters.

  According to the gaming machine 511, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine 5.6. That is, when the first game result is derived, the first special ball entry means is driven to allow a game ball to enter, and when the second game result is derived, the second special ball entry means Is driven to allow a game ball to enter. The movable means is configured to be displaceable between a state in which a game ball can enter the second ball entry means and a state in which entry is difficult or impossible. Here, the third ball entry means different from the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means is configured so that game balls fired by the firing means can enter. Then, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the third ball entry means, third determination information is acquired by the third information acquisition means, and the third determination information acquired by the third information acquisition means is added to the third determination information. Based on the third dynamic execution means, the third dynamic display of the third identification information is executed, and the driving means drives the movable means based on the execution result of the third dynamic execution means. . Here, at least in a state in which the game ball can enter the second ball entry means, the projecting rolling means provided on the movable means is configured so that the game ball can roll over the movable means. In addition, the driving means drives the movable means in the predetermined entering game state in a difficult-to-enter pattern in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter the second entering means. The movable means is driven by the means in a ball-enterable pattern in which a game ball can enter the second ball-in means. Then, the first hit / fail storage means as the hit / fail storage means is used in the first determining means, and the second hit / fail storage means also as the hit / fail storage means is used in the second determining means. Here, the first value storage unit stores the first value, but does not store the second value, and the second value storage unit stores the first value and the second value. The fourth special ball entry means provided in the second special ball entry means allows the game balls flowing into the second special ball entry means to enter the ball, and the game balls enter the second ball entry means. In this case, the first game value can be provided. That is, in the hit determination by the first determination means, since the second value is not stored in the first hit storage means but the first value is stored, the first game result is derived and the first game value is determined. It becomes a playability of whether to get. On the other hand, in the success / failure determination in the second determination means, since the second value is stored in the second success / failure storage means together with the first value, the first game result is derived to obtain the first game value, or The second game result is derived, and further, a game ball is made to enter the fourth ball entry means so as to obtain the first game value. Thus, the pattern of the game value that can be given by the first determination means and the pattern of the game value that can be given by the second determination means can be made different. Therefore, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

In gaming machine 511,
The second right / wrong storage means,
The gaming machine 512, wherein the derivation probability of the second value is configured to be higher than the derivation probability of the first value.

  According to the gaming machine 512, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 511. That is, the second probability storage means is configured such that the derivation probability of the second value is higher than the derivation probability of the first value. Thereby, in the determination by the second determination means, the second game result based on the extraction of the second value is configured to be generated more than the first game result and the like. Therefore, the pattern of the game value that can be given by the first determination means and the game value that can be given by the second determination means can be clearly different. Therefore, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Sixth group: Procurement of the jackpot increase from the role with the lowest profit level, and if it runs short, procurement from the role with the next lowest profit level>
In a conventional gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a ratio of the number of balls obtained when a player continuously plays a game in the pachinko machine (the number obtained by dividing the number of payout balls (the number of safe balls) by the number of out balls). A so-called machine splitting (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a "ball rate") is provided in a plurality of stages, and any one of the set values corresponding to the ball rate desired by a person involved in the hall or the like is set. In some cases, after the power of the pachinko machine is turned on and before the game is started by the player (before the game hall is opened), the hall-related personnel and the like can be set (changed or updated). Then, when the player plays a game with the pachinko machine, a win / fail lottery is performed based on the set value, so that the player can play the game at a payout rate according to the set value. (For example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-109085)).

  Specifically, for example, a game in which a first role (for example, a jackpot game) with a high obtained game value and a second role (for example, a small hit game) with a lower obtained game value than the first role can be randomly selected. In the machine, the value of the random number counter, the value of which is updated in a predetermined range, is obtained based on the starting winning, and the value of the obtained random number counter is determined by referring to the determination table provided for each set value, There is a configuration in which a winning or losing lottery of the first role or the second role is performed. In this determination table, the number of the first random numbers corresponding to the first combination, the number of the second random numbers corresponding to the second combination, and the random number corresponding to the third combination (for example, losing) to which the game value is not provided. The numbers are distributed (defined) so that the number of values differs for each set value. In some cases, the higher the set value, the more advantageous the payout rate for the player.

  Here, in order to install a gaming machine in a gaming hall, it is necessary to pass a certification test conducted by a competent authority and obtain approval indicating that the gaming machine is within a specified range. For this reason, when designing the game specifications, the gaming machine developer has a payout rate at which the certification can be obtained by the certification test at all the set values of the gaming machine in order to pass the certification test and receive the approval. As described above, it is necessary to distribute the numbers of the first random number value and the second random number value in the determination means.

  However, in a gaming machine in which the set value can be changed, if the number of the first random numbers is changed in accordance with the setting change, the configuration is such that the number of the first random numbers is compensated from the fixed number of the predetermined random number 1. Because of the change in the number of random values, it is necessary to secure a predetermined number of random values, which causes restrictions when designing game specifications, reduces the degree of freedom in designing game specifications, and reduces the interest in games. There is a possibility that it will.

  The inventions of the sixth group have been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

Determination information obtaining means (for example, main control device 110) for obtaining determination information (for example, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) based on satisfaction of a predetermined starting condition (for example, winning in the first starting port 64a);
Determining means for determining the determination information obtained by the determination information obtaining means (for example, special figure 1 change start processing (S5505));
Based on the first game result (for example, big hit) being derived by the determination means, a first game value giving means (for example, big hit game) capable of giving a predetermined first game value (for example, big hit game) to the player A special winning opening opening / closing control process (S5710));
A second game value (for example, a small hit game) that is different from the first game value to the player based on the fact that a second game result (for example, a small hit) is derived by the determination means. Game value providing means (for example, small winning opening opening / closing control processing (S5714));
A setting device (for example, S4121 of a setting change process (S4005)) capable of changing a probability that the first game result is derived by the determination device.
At least a first value (for example, a large random number value) corresponding to the first game result and a second value (for example, a small random number value) corresponding to the second game result are used for the determination by the determination means. And a storage unit (for example, special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1) for storing
The determining means includes:
When the determination information acquisition unit extracts the determination information that is a third value other than the first value or the second value (for example, a loss random number value), the game value is not given to the player. Composed,
The said pass / fail storage means,
Depending on the setting value set by the setting unit, the derivation probability of the first value is stored so as to be different in some cases,
The determination information acquisition means,
When the setting value is changed by the setting unit, a third change pattern (for example, a setting value “1”) in which the derivation probability of the third value is changed with a change in the derivation probability of the first value To “3”, the loss random number value decreases with an increase in the jackpot random number value) and a second change pattern in which the derivation probability of the second value is changed (for example, the jackpot at the set values “4” to “6”) The gaming machine 60 is characterized in that the random number value decreases as the random number value increases.

  According to the gaming machine 60, the determination information is obtained by the determination information obtaining means based on the establishment of the predetermined starting condition, and the determination information obtained by the determination information obtaining means is determined by the determination means. Then, based on the fact that the first game result is derived by the determining means, a predetermined first game value is provided to the player by the first game value providing means, and the second game result is derived by the determining means. Based on this, a predetermined second game value is provided to the player by the second game value provision means. Further, the probability that the first game result is derived by the determining means is configured to be changeable by the setting means. Here, a first value corresponding to the first game result and a second value corresponding to the second game result are stored in the hit storage unit used for the determination by the determination unit. Further, when the determination information acquisition unit extracts the determination information that is the third value other than the first value or the second value, the determination unit is configured not to give a game value to the player. Then, depending on the setting value set by the setting means, the derivation probability of the first value may be stored in the hit / fail storage means so that the first value may be different, and when the setting value is changed by the setting changing means, the first value may be changed. Are configured to have a third change pattern in which the derivation probability of the third value is changed and a second change pattern in which the derivation probability of the second value is changed according to the change of the derivation probability of. This makes it possible to compensate for the change in the first value derivation probability based on the setting change by changing the second value derivation probability or the third value derivation probability. Therefore, the change in the derivation probability of the predetermined random value can be realized by changing the derivation probabilities of a plurality of random values, and there is no restriction at the time of designing the game specification, thereby increasing the degree of freedom in designing the game specification. This has the effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine 60,
The determination information acquisition means,
The setting unit changes the derivation probability of the third value by the third change pattern when the setting value that is most disadvantageous for the player becomes the setting value that is advantageous for the one-step player from the setting value that is most disadvantageous for the player. A gaming machine 61 characterized by changing the number of first values.

  According to the gaming machine 61, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 60, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the determination information acquisition unit, when the setting unit changes the setting value that is most disadvantageous to the player to the setting value that is advantageous to the one-stage player, the third value change pattern changes the derivation probability of the third value. This changes the number of first values. That is, when the setting value that is most disadvantageous for the player changes to a setting value that is advantageous for the one-step player, the derivation probability of the third value is changed with the change in the number of the first values.

  Game information, which is a game result (for example, a losing role) corresponding to the third value stored in the hit / fail storage means, is output to the outside of the gaming machine, and, for example, a data lamp or the like which allows the player to refer to the game history and the like. Unlike the first game result and the second game result which are clearly (largely) displayed, there is a case where the data lamp (not shown) is not clearly (largely) displayed.

  Here, the number of the second values corresponding to the second game result clearly (largely) displayed on the data lamp is changed in accordance with the change of the setting and the derivation probability of the first value. In this case, the relationship in which the appearance rate of the first game result and the second game result is relatively changed for each setting (for example, the higher the setting, the higher the probability of the big hit game, while the smaller the probability of the small hit game) Decrease, etc.), the player glances (confirms) the appearance of the first game result and the second game result with the data lamp, thereby increasing the factors for estimating the setting contents of the gaming machine. I will. As a result, for example, if the setting of the gaming machine set to a low setting (for example, the setting value “1”) is discovered by the player, the player does not play the game with the gaming machine, Operation may be reduced.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine 61, when the setting value most disadvantageous to the player becomes the setting value advantageous to the one-step player, the derivation probability of the third value is changed with the change of the derivation probability of the first value. Is configured to be changed. That is, when the derivation probability of the first value is changed due to the setting change, the change is changed from the third value. With such a configuration, the setting discriminating element by the player is set at the most unfavorable setting value for the player or the setting value that is advantageous to the player from the most unfavorable setting value (i.e., low setting). Assuming only the appearance ratio of one game result, it is possible to make it difficult for the set value of the gaming machine to be seen from the appearance ratio of the second game result. Therefore, the setting discriminating element is limited, for example, even if the payout rate is low (that is, the set value “1” or the like), it is difficult for the player to find out the setting, and the game is continued. There is an effect that operation can be improved.

In the gaming machine 60 or 61,
The determination information acquisition means,
When the setting value is changed from the setting value disadvantageous to the player to the advantageous setting value and the third value is depleted (less), the second value is derived by the second change pattern. A gaming machine 62 wherein the derivation probability of the first value is changed by changing the probability.

  According to the gaming machine 62, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines 60 or 61. That is, in the determination information obtaining means, when the setting value changes from a disadvantageous setting value to an advantageous setting value by the setting means, when the third value is depleted (less), the second value is changed by the second change pattern. Is changed, the derivation probability of the first value is changed. That is, when the third value that can be changed first is exhausted (small) when the setting value changes from an unfavorable setting value to an advantageous setting value for the player, the second value is changed along with the change in the derivation probability of the first value. The derivation probability is changed. This makes it possible to compensate for the change in the derivation probability of the first value from each of the second value and / or the third value based on the setting change. Therefore, the change of the derivation probability of the predetermined random value can be realized by changing the derivation probabilities of a plurality of random values, and there is no restriction at the time of designing game specifications, thereby increasing the degree of freedom in designing game specifications. There is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines 60 to 62,
The said pass / fail storage means,
At least three stepwise success / failure storage means (for example, a special figure 1 jackpot random number table for setting values “1” to “6”) in which the derivation probabilities of the first values are different for each of the setting values set by the setting means 272a1),
The stepwise success / failure storage means,
A first-stage hit / fail storage means (for example, a special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 at a set value "1") which is the most disadvantageous for the player;
Second-stage hit / fail storage means (for example, special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 at setting value "3") which is more advantageous to the player than the first-step hit / fail storage means;
A third-stage hit / fail storage means (for example, a special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 at a set value "6") which is more advantageous to the player than the second-step hit / fail storage means;
The second stage pass / fail storage means comprises:
While the first-step hit / fail storage means has a higher derivation probability of the first value, the first-step hit / fail storage means and the derivation probability of the second value are configured to be equivalent,
The third stage pass / fail storage means comprises:
A gaming machine 63, wherein the second-step success / failure storage means has a higher derivation probability of the first value, but a lower derivation probability of the second value.

According to the gaming machine 63, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines 60 to 62. That is, the hit / fail judgment storage means is provided with at least three stepwise hit / fail judgment storage means having different derivation probabilities of the first value for each set value set by the setting means. Then, as the stepwise success / failure storage means, a first-stage success / failure storage means most disadvantageous for the player, a second-stage success / failure storage means more advantageous to the player than the first-stage success / failure storage means, and a second-stage success / failure storage means Third stage pass / fail storage means which is more advantageous to the player than the storage means is provided. Here, the second-stage pass / fail storage means has a higher derivation probability of the first value than the first-stage pass / fail storage means, while the first-step pass / fail storage means has the same derivation probability of the second value. In addition, the third-stage pass / fail storage means has a higher first-value derivation probability than the second-step pass / fail storage means, but has a lower second-value derivation probability.
That is, in the second-stage hit / fail storage means, the derivation probability of the first value is higher and the derivation probability of the second value is set equal to that in the first-step hit / fail storage device. Further, the second-stage hit / fail storage means is configured to have a higher first value derivation probability and a lower second-value derivation probability as compared to the second-step hit / fail storage device. Thereby, the change in the derivation probability of the first value is compensated from each of the second value and / or the third value based on the setting change, so that the change in the derivation probability of the first value is fixed to one. There is no need to supplement from a predetermined random number value. Therefore, the change of the derivation probability of the predetermined random value can be realized by changing the derivation probabilities of a plurality of random values, and there is no restriction at the time of designing game specifications, thereby increasing the degree of freedom in designing game specifications. There is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines 60 to 63,
The second value and the third value are:
At a first setting value (for example, setting value “1”) having the lowest derivation probability of the first value, a second setting value (for example, setting value) having the highest deriving probability of the first value from the first setting value (6)) The gaming machine (64), which is provided by the increment of the first value.

  According to the gaming machine 64, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines 60 to 63. That is, at the first set value with the lowest derivation probability of the first value, the increment of the first value, the second value, and the third value at the second set value with the highest derivation probability of the first value from the first set value Value is provided. Thereby, the change in the derivation probability of the first value is compensated from each of the second value and the third value based on the setting change, so that the change in the first value is changed from the fixed predetermined random number value of 1. There is no need to make up for it. Therefore, it is not necessary to secure the derivation probability of the predetermined random number value from the predetermined random number value of 1 by the change of the first value, so that there is no restriction at the time of designing the game specification, and the degree of freedom in designing the game specification is increased. This has the effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine 63 or 64,
The stepwise success / failure storage means,
When the setting value is changed stepwise by the setting means, the first value derivation probability is configured to increase uniformly,
The gaming machine 65, wherein the second value or the third value is configured to decrease evenly as the derivation probability of the first value increases.

  According to the gaming machine 65, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines 63 or 64. That is, when the setting value is changed stepwise by the setting means, the step-by-step success / failure storage means is configured so that the derivation probability of the first value is uniformly increased. In addition, the second value or the third value is configured to decrease uniformly as the derivation probability of the first value increases. As a result, the calculation of the payout rate for each set value is performed in such a manner that the winning probability of the first game value, which increases stepwise and uniformly, and the decrease of the winning probability of the second game value, which decreases gradually and evenly, are calculated. Alternatively, the calculation can be performed by considering the decrease in the appearance probability of the loss, thereby facilitating the calculation of the payout rate and suppressing an increase in the number of steps when designing the game specification. There is.

  Note that “equally increase” means, for example, that the derivation probability that increases for each set value increases by the same value (for example, 1%) from the derivation probability one step lower, or the derivation probability that is one step lower On the other hand, a case in which the same ratio (for example, 5%) is increased by the same ratio is exemplified.

In the gaming machine 63 or 64,
The stepwise success / failure storage means,
When the setting value is changed stepwise by the setting means, the derivation probability of the first value is configured to increase at a predetermined rate,
The gaming machine 66, wherein the second value or the third value decreases at a predetermined rate with an increase in the derivation probability of the first value.

  According to the gaming machine 66, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 63 or 64. That is, when the setting value is changed stepwise by the setting means, the step-by-step success / failure storage means is configured so that the derivation probability of the first value increases at a predetermined rate. Further, the second value or the third value is configured to decrease at a predetermined rate as the derivation probability of the first value increases. Thereby, the calculation of the payout rate for each set value is performed by increasing the winning probability of the first game value that increases stepwise and at a predetermined rate and the winning probability of the second game value that decreases stepwise and at a predetermined rate. It is possible to calculate by considering the decrease or the decrease in the appearance probability of the loss, it is possible to easily calculate the payout rate, and it is possible to suppress an increase in man-hours at the time of designing game specifications, This has the effect.

  Note that “increase at a predetermined rate” means, for example, that the derivation probability that increases for each set value increases proportionally (for example, 5%, 10%, 15%,...) Or an exponential function (For example, a case where the number increases to 2 times, 4 times, 8 times,... Based on the set value “1”) is exemplified.

In any of the gaming machines 60 to 66,
The said pass / fail storage means,
Storing the first value as a continuous value;
The gaming machine 67, wherein when the setting value is changed by the setting means, the range of the continuous first value is changed.

According to the gaming machine 67, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines 60 to 66. That is, the first value is stored as a continuous value by the hit / fail storage unit. Then, when the setting value is changed by the setting means, the range of the continuous first value is changed.
This makes it possible for the determining means to determine the first game value by determining the range from the beginning to the end of the first value. Therefore, even when the setting value is changed by the setting unit, it is not necessary to determine each changed first value in the validity determination, and the value to be determined is determined from the beginning of the first value. It can be determined by determining whether or not it is included up to the end. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load in the determination of success / failure can be reduced.

In any of the gaming machines 60 to 66,
The said pass / fail storage means,
Storing the first value as a discontinuous value;
The gaming machine 68, characterized in that, when the setting value is changed by the setting means, the number of discontinuous first values is changed.

  According to the gaming machine 68, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines 60 to 66. That is, the first value is stored as a discontinuous value by the hit / fail storage unit. Then, when the setting value is changed by the setting means, the number of discontinuous first values is changed. Thus, the determination of the first game value by the determination means needs to be performed by determining whether each first value matches, but it is difficult to grasp the position (arrangement) of the first value in the hit / failure storage means. . Therefore, by making it difficult for the player to grasp the position (arrangement) of the first value, it is possible to suppress the illegal derivation of the first game value and to increase the security performance of the gaming machine. is there.

In any of the gaming machines 60 to 68,
Launching means (for example, a ball launching unit 112a) for launching a game ball;
A first ball entry means (for example, a first starting port 64a) into which a game ball fired by the firing means can enter;
A game ball fired by the firing means is capable of entering, and a second ball entry means (for example, a second starting port 64b) different from the first ball entry means,
The determination information acquisition means,
A first information acquisition unit (for example, a first reserved ball storage area 273d) for acquiring first determination information based on a game ball having entered the first ball entry unit;
A second information acquisition unit (for example, a second reserved ball storage area 273e) for acquiring second determination information based on a game ball having entered the second ball entry unit,
The determining means includes:
First determining means for determining the first determination information acquired by the first information acquiring means (for example, special figure 1 change start processing (S5505));
A second determination unit (for example, a special figure 2 change start process (S5508)) for determining the second determination information acquired by the second information acquisition unit;
The first game value providing means,
From the predetermined game state before the provision of the first game value (for example, “normal game state”), after the provision of the first game value, an advantageous game state different from the predetermined game state (for example, “super probability fluctuation state” or Game state changing means (for example, jackpot ending processing (S5712)) for changing the game state to "probability change state",
The predetermined game state is
By making it easier for the game ball to enter the first ball entry unit than the second ball entry unit, it is easy to obtain the first determination information from the second determination information,
The advantageous game state is
The first ball entry means allows the game ball to easily enter the second ball entry means, so that the second determination information is more easily obtained than the first determination information. Game machine six nine.

  According to the gaming machine 69, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines 60 to 68. That is, a game ball is fired by the firing means, and a game ball fired by the firing means is configured to be able to enter the first ball-in means, and a game ball fired by the fire means is also inserted in the first ball-in means. And a second ball entry means different from the above. Then, the first determination information is obtained by the first information acquisition means provided in the determination information acquisition means based on the game ball having entered the first ball entry means, and the second entry ball The second determination information is obtained by the second information obtaining means provided in the determination information obtaining means based on the game ball having entered the means. Also, the first determination information obtained by the first information obtaining means is determined by the first determining means provided in the determining means, and the second determination information obtained by the second information obtaining means is provided in the determining means. It is determined by the determined second determination means. The game state changing means provided in the first game value providing means changes the game state from the predetermined game state before the first game value is provided to the advantageous game state different from the predetermined game state after the first game value is provided. You. Then, in the predetermined game state, the game ball is more likely to enter the first ball entry means than the second ball entry means, so that the first determination information is more easily obtained from the second determination information, and in the advantageous game state, Since the game ball is easier to enter the second ball entry device than the first ball entry device, the second determination information is more easily obtained than the first determination information. Thereby, the calculation of the payout rate for each set value, for each piece of determination information, and for each game state is determined by the increase in the derivation probability of the first game value in the first determination means and the second determination means accompanying the setting change. It is possible to calculate the payout rate by considering the change in the derivation probability of the second game result in the first determination means and the second determination means and the determination information which is easily obtained for each game state. This has the effect of facilitating the calculation and suppressing an increase in the number of steps when designing the game specifications.

In game machine sixty nine,
First dynamic display execution means (for example, first special display) for executing first dynamic display of first identification information on a display means (for example, special symbol display device 39) based on the judgment result of the first judgment means. Execution of dynamic display of symbols),
A second dynamic display execution unit (for example, a second special symbol) that executes a second dynamic display of second identification information different from the first identification information on the display unit based on the determination result of the second determination unit Execution of dynamic display), and
The display means,
The first dynamic display by the first dynamic display executing means and the second dynamic display by the second dynamic display executing means can be executed in parallel (simultaneously). Game machine six ten.

  According to the gaming machine 610, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine 6.9. That is, based on the determination result of the first determination unit, the first dynamic display execution unit executes the first dynamic display of the first identification information on the display unit. In addition, based on the determination result of the second determination unit, the second dynamic display execution unit executes the second dynamic display of the second identification information different from the first identification information on the display unit. Then, the first dynamic display by the first dynamic display execution means and the second dynamic display by the second dynamic display execution means can be executed in parallel (simultaneously) by the display means.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine capable of executing the first dynamic display of the first identification information and the second dynamic display of the second identification information in parallel (simultaneous) progress, the execution time and the like in each dynamic display are considered. When it is necessary to calculate the payout rate, and when the payout rates and the like in the first game result and the second game result are combined and calculated for each set value, the man-hour at the time of designing the game specification becomes enormous. There is a possibility that it will.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine 610, in a gaming machine capable of performing the first dynamic display and the second dynamic display in parallel (simultaneously), the first determination information is obtained from the second determination information in a predetermined gaming state. In the advantageous gaming state, the second determination information is more easily obtained than the first determination information. Thereby, the calculation of the payout rate for each set value, for each piece of determination information, and for each game state is determined by the increase in the derivation probability of the first game value in the first determination means and the second determination means accompanying the setting change. It is possible to calculate the payout rate by considering the change in the derivation probability of the second game result in the first determination means and the second determination means and the determination information which is easily obtained for each game state. This has the effect of facilitating the calculation and suppressing an increase in the number of steps when designing the game specifications.

In gaming machine 610,
The first determining means includes:
In a situation where the second game result can be derived in the first dynamic display by the first dynamic display execution means, the second dynamic display is being executed by the second dynamic display execution means, When the first game result or the second game result can be derived in the second dynamic display, and the execution time of the second dynamic display is longer than the execution time of the first dynamic display, A result changing means (for example, a special figure 2 changing process (S5520)) for deriving a game result other than the first game result or the second game result in the second dynamic display is provided. Gaming machine six 11.

  According to the gaming machine 611, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 610, the following effects are achieved. That is, in a situation where the second game result can be derived in the first dynamic display by the first dynamic display execution means, the second dynamic display is being executed by the second dynamic display execution means, and 2 If the first game result or the second game result can be derived in the dynamic display and the execution time of the second dynamic display is longer than the execution time of the first dynamic display, the first determination means The result changing means provided is configured to derive a game result other than the first game result or the second game result in the second dynamic display. Thereby, during the provision of the second game value based on the second game result by the first dynamic display, the provision of the first game value based on the first game result by the second dynamic display or the second game result The second game value based on the first game value or the second game value can be prevented from being paid out to the player due to the duplicated first game value or the second game value. It has the effect of being able to. Further, in calculating the payout rate, it is not necessary to consider the duplicated first game value or the second game value. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

In gaming machine 610,
The first determining means includes:
In a situation where the second game result can be derived in the first dynamic display by the first dynamic display execution means, the second dynamic display is being executed by the second dynamic display execution means, In the case where the first game result or the second game result can be derived in the second dynamic display and the execution time of the second dynamic display is longer than the execution time of the first dynamic display, The progress of the second dynamic display is temporarily stopped, and after the provision of the second game value based on the first dynamic display is completed, the temporarily stopped second dynamic display is advanced. The gaming machine 612, further comprising: a result suspending unit (for example, a modified example 130) for deriving the first game result or the second game result.

  According to the gaming machine 612, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 610, the following effects are achieved. That is, in a situation where the second game result can be derived in the first dynamic display by the first dynamic display execution means by the result temporary suspension means provided in the first determination means, the second dynamic display execution means During the execution of the second dynamic display, the first game result or the second game result can be derived in the second dynamic display, and the execution time of the second dynamic display is the first dynamic display. If it is longer than the execution time of the target display, the progress of the second dynamic display is temporarily stopped, and after the provision of the second game value based on the first dynamic display ends, the second display temporarily stopped. The dynamic display is advanced to derive the first game result or the second game result. Thereby, while the second game value is provided based on the second game result based on the first dynamic display, the first game is provided based on the first game result based on the second dynamic display, or based on the second game result. Assignment of the second game value can be prevented from being performed, and it is possible to prevent an excessive game value from being paid out to the player due to the duplicated first game value or second game value. There is an effect that. Further, in calculating the payout rate, it is not necessary to consider the duplicated first game value or the second game value. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

In any of the gaming machines 69 to 612,
When the first game result is derived, a first special ball entry means (for example, a special winning opening 65a) in which a game ball is driven to enter the ball,
When the second game result is derived, a second special ball entry means (for example, a small winning opening 72a) in which a game ball is driven so as to be able to enter,
Movable means (for example, the ordinary electric hand 64c) that can be displaced between a state where a game ball can enter the second ball entry means (for example, the second starting port 64b) and a state where entry is difficult or impossible. When,
A third ball entry means (for example, a through gate 67) which is capable of entering a game ball fired by the launching means and is different from the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means;
A third information acquisition unit (for example, a general-purpose reservation ball storage area 273i) for acquiring third determination information based on the game ball having entered the third ball entry unit;
A third dynamic execution unit that executes a third dynamic display of the third identification information based on the third determination information acquired by the third information acquisition unit (for example, a normal electric hand control process (S5104)) When,
A driving unit (for example, S5805 or S5807 of the ordinary electrical combination control process (S5104)) for driving the movable unit based on an execution result of the third dynamic execution unit,
The movable means,
In a state in which a game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter the second ball entry means, a closed-time rolling means (for example, a normal electric machine in the twenty-eighth embodiment) in which a game ball can roll on the upper part of the movable means. 64c).
The game state changing means,
When the first game value is given based on a predetermined first derivation result as the first game result (for example, a jackpot type of “probability change B” that gives “probability change state”), the game state is changed. Of the advantageous gaming states, the first advantageous transition means (for example, S5754 of the jackpot ending process (S5712) for shifting to a predetermined first advantageous gaming state (for example, the “probability variation state” of the twenty-eighth embodiment): YES) )When,
As the first game result, the first game value is provided based on a second derived result different from the first derived result (for example, a jackpot type of “probability variation A” that provides “super probability variation state”). In this case, the second advantageous shifting means for shifting the gaming state to a second advantageous gaming state different from the first advantageous gaming state (for example, the “super-probability changing state” in the twenty-eighth embodiment) among the advantageous gaming states. (E.g., S5751 of jackpot end processing (S5712: YES)).
The third dynamic execution means,
In the first advantageous gaming state, the execution time of the third dynamic display is changed from one end (for example, right end) of the closing-time rolling means to the other end (for example, left end) of the game ball. A short-time pattern (for example, “0.5 seconds”) performed shorter than the rolling time (for example, “3 seconds”)
In the second advantageous gaming state, a long-time pattern (for example, “5 seconds”) in which the execution time of the third dynamic display is made longer than the rolling time,
The driving means,
In the first advantageous game state, the movable means is driven in an easy-to-enter pattern (for example, a normal symbol high probability state and open extension) in which a game ball easily enters the second entering means,
In the second advantageous game state, the movable means is provided in a ball entry pattern (for example, a low probability state of a normal symbol and a non-open extension) in which a game ball is difficult to enter the second entry means from the easy entry pattern. Drive,
The second special entering means,
A gaming machine provided at a position where a game ball rolled from one end of the closing rolling means to the other end is easy to enter (for example, on the downstream side of the normal electric utility 64c). 13.

  According to the gaming machine 613, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machines 69 to 612. That is, when the first game result is derived, the first special ball entry means is driven to allow a game ball to enter, and when the second game result is derived, the second special ball entry means Is driven to allow a game ball to enter. The movable means is configured to be displaceable between a state in which a game ball can enter the second ball entry means and a state in which entry is difficult or impossible. Here, the third ball entry means different from the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means is configured so that game balls fired by the firing means can enter. Then, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the third ball entry means, third determination information is acquired by the third information acquisition means, and the third determination information acquired by the third information acquisition means is added to the third determination information. Based on the third dynamic execution means, the third dynamic display of the third identification information is executed, and the driving means drives the movable means based on the execution result of the third dynamic execution means. . Here, in a state in which the game ball cannot enter the second ball entry means or cannot enter the ball, the closing ball rolling means provided on the movable means enables the game ball to roll on the upper part of the movable means. You. Then, when the first gaming value is given as the first gaming result based on the predetermined first derivation result, the gaming state is changed to the advantageous gaming state by the first advantageous shifting means provided in the gaming state changing means. The game is shifted to a predetermined first advantageous gaming state. Also, when the first game value is given based on a second derivation result different from the first derivation result as the first game result, the game state is changed by the second advantageous transition means provided in the game state change means, A transition is made to a second advantageous gaming state different from the first advantageous gaming state among the advantageous gaming states. Here, in the first advantageous game state, the third dynamic execution means sets the third dynamic display based on the rolling time for the game ball to roll from one end to the other end of the closing rolling means. And a long time pattern in which the execution time of the third dynamic display is made longer than the rolling time in the second advantageous game state. In the first advantageous game state, the driving means drives the movable means in the easy-to-enter pattern in which game balls easily enter the second entering means, while in the second advantageous game state, the easy-to-enter pattern The movable means is driven in a ball entry pattern in which it is difficult for game balls to enter the second ball entry means. The second special ball entry means is provided at a position where the game balls rolled from one end to the other end of the closed-time rolling means easily enter the ball. That is, in the first advantageous game state, the execution time of the third dynamic display may be shorter than the time when the game ball can roll over the movable means, and the movable means is driven in the easy-to-enter pattern. From this, the game ball rolling on the upper part of the movable means is likely to enter the second ball entry means, and is difficult to enter the second special ball entry means. On the other hand, in the second advantageous game state, the execution time of the third dynamic display may be longer than the time in which the game ball can roll over the movable means, and the movable means is not driven in the easy-to-enter pattern. Thus, the game ball rolling on the upper part of the movable means does not enter the second ball entry means, but enters the second special ball entry means. Thereby, whether the game ball enters the second special ball entry means when the second game result is derived is made different between the first derived result and the second derived result as the first game result. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

In game machine sixty nine,
When the first game result is derived, a first special ball entry means (for example, a special winning opening 65a) in which a game ball is driven to enter the ball,
When the second game result is derived, a second special ball entry means (for example, a small winning opening 72a) in which a game ball is driven so as to be able to enter,
Movable means (for example, the ordinary electric hand 64c) that can be displaced between a state where a game ball can enter the second ball entry means (for example, the second starting port 64b) and a state where entry is difficult or impossible. When,
A third ball entry means (for example, a through gate 67) which is capable of entering a game ball fired by the launching means and is different from the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means;
A third information acquisition unit (for example, a general-purpose reservation ball storage area 273i) for acquiring third determination information based on the game ball having entered the third ball entry unit;
A third dynamic execution unit that executes a third dynamic display of the third identification information based on the third determination information acquired by the third information acquisition unit (for example, a normal electric hand control process (S5104)) When,
A driving unit (for example, S5805 or S5807 of the ordinary electrical combination control process (S5104)) for driving the movable unit based on an execution result of the third dynamic execution unit,
The movable means,
In a state where a game ball can enter the second ball entry means, a protruding rolling means on which the game ball can roll on the upper part of the movable means (for example, the upper surface of the ordinary electric hand 64c in the twenty-ninth embodiment). ,
The driving means,
In the predetermined game state, the movable means has a difficult-to-enter or a non-enterable pattern (for example, the normal electric hand 64c has a protruding time of "0.1 second") in which the game ball enters the second entering means. Drive the
In the advantageous gaming state, the movable means is provided in a ball-enterable pattern (for example, the normal electric hand 64c has a projection time of "5 seconds") in which a game ball can enter the second ball entry means by the projecting rolling means. Driving means,
The said pass / fail storage means,
A first success / failure storage unit (for example, special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1) used in the first determination unit;
A second success / failure storage means (for example, special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2) used in the second determination means,
The first success / failure storage means,
Storing the first value while not storing the second value,
The second right / wrong storage means,
Storing the first value and the second value;
The second special entering means,
A fourth ball entry means (for example, a special area switch 208h) capable of entering a game ball flowing into the second special ball entry means,
The fourth ball entry means,
The gaming machine 614, wherein the first game value can be given when a game ball enters.

  According to the gaming machine 614, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine 69. That is, when the first game result is derived, the first special ball entry means is driven to allow a game ball to enter, and when the second game result is derived, the second special ball entry means Is driven to allow a game ball to enter. The movable means is configured to be displaceable between a state in which a game ball can enter the second ball entry means and a state in which entry is difficult or impossible. Here, the third ball entry means different from the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means is configured so that game balls fired by the firing means can enter. Then, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the third ball entry means, third determination information is acquired by the third information acquisition means, and the third determination information acquired by the third information acquisition means is added to the third determination information. Based on the third dynamic execution means, the third dynamic display of the third identification information is executed, and the driving means drives the movable means based on the execution result of the third dynamic execution means. . Here, in a state in which the game ball can enter the second ball entry means, the projecting rolling means provided on the movable means allows the game ball to roll on the upper part of the movable means. In addition, the driving means drives the movable means in the predetermined entering game state in a difficult-to-enter pattern in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter the second entering means. The movable means is driven by the means in a ball-enterable pattern in which a game ball can enter the second ball-in means. Then, the first hit / fail storage means as the hit / fail storage means is used in the first determining means, and the second hit / fail storage means also as the hit / fail storage means is used in the second determining means. Here, the first value storage unit stores the first value, but does not store the second value, and the second value storage unit stores the first value and the second value. The fourth special ball entry means provided in the second special ball entry means allows the game balls flowing into the second special ball entry means to enter the ball, and the game balls enter the second ball entry means. In this case, the first game value can be provided. That is, in the hit determination by the first determination means, since the second value is not stored in the first hit storage means but the first value is stored, the first game result is derived and the first game value is determined. It becomes a playability of whether to get. On the other hand, in the success / failure determination in the second determination means, since the second value is stored in the second success / failure storage means together with the first value, the first game result is derived to obtain the first game value, or The second game result is derived, and further, a game ball is made to enter the fourth ball entry means so as to obtain the first game value. Thus, the pattern of the game value that can be given by the first determination means and the pattern of the game value that can be given by the second determination means can be made different. Therefore, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

In gaming machine 614,
The second right / wrong storage means,
The gaming machine 615, wherein the derivation probability of the second value is configured to be higher than the derivation probability of the first value.

  According to the gaming machine 615, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 614. That is, the second probability storage means is configured such that the derivation probability of the second value is higher than the derivation probability of the first value. Thereby, in the determination by the second determination means, the second game result based on the extraction of the second value is configured to be generated more than the first game result and the like. Therefore, the pattern of the game value that can be given by the first determination means and the game value that can be given by the second determination means can be clearly different. Therefore, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Seventh group: There are 2 special symbols, and the bonuses are increased from the role assigned to each special symbol>
In a conventional gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a ratio of the number of balls obtained when a player continuously plays a game in the pachinko machine (the number obtained by dividing the number of payout balls (the number of safe balls) by the number of out balls). A so-called machine splitting (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a "ball rate") is provided in a plurality of stages, and any one of the set values corresponding to the ball rate desired by a person involved in the hall or the like is set. In some cases, after the power of the pachinko machine is turned on and before the game is started by the player (before the game hall is opened), the hall-related personnel and the like can be set (changed or updated). Then, when the player plays a game with the pachinko machine, a win / fail lottery is performed based on the set value, so that the player can play the game at a payout rate according to the set value. (For example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-109085)).

  However, in the gaming machine, it is necessary to suppress an increase in man-hours at the time of designing game specifications, but there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The inventions of the seventh group have been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing an increase in man-hours at the time of designing game specifications.

Determination information obtaining means (for example, main control device 110) for obtaining determination information (for example, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) based on satisfaction of a predetermined starting condition (for example, winning in the first starting port 64a);
Determining means for determining the determination information obtained by the determination information obtaining means (for example, special figure 1 change start processing (S5505));
Based on the first game result (for example, big hit) being derived by the determination means, a first game value giving means (for example, big hit game) capable of giving a predetermined first game value (for example, big hit game) to the player A special winning opening opening / closing control process (S5710));
A second game value (for example, a small hit game) that is different from the first game value to the player based on the fact that a second game result (for example, a small hit) is derived by the determination means. Game value providing means (for example, small winning opening opening / closing control processing (S5714));
A setting device (for example, S4121 of a setting change process (S4005)) capable of changing a probability that the first game result is derived by the determination device.
Launching means (for example, a ball launching unit 112a) for launching a game ball;
A first ball entry means (for example, a first starting port 64a) into which a game ball fired by the firing means can enter;
A second ball entry means (for example, a second starting port 64b), which is capable of entering a game ball fired by the ejection means and is different from the first ball entry means;
At least a first value (for example, a large random number value) corresponding to the first game result and a second value (for example, a small random number value) corresponding to the second game result are used for the determination by the determination means. (For example, special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1) for storing
The determining means includes:
When the determination information acquisition unit extracts the determination information that is a third value other than the first value or the second value (for example, a loss random number value), the game value is not given to the player. Composed,
The determination information acquisition means,
A first information acquisition unit (for example, a first reserved ball storage area 273d) for acquiring first determination information as the determination information based on a game ball having entered the first ball entry unit;
A second information acquisition unit (for example, a second reserved ball storage area 273e) for acquiring second determination information as the determination information based on a game ball having entered the second ball entry unit. ,
The determining means includes:
First determining means for determining the first determination information acquired by the first information acquiring means (for example, special figure 1 change start processing (S5505));
A second determination unit (for example, a special figure 2 change start process (S5508)) for determining the second determination information acquired by the second information acquisition unit;
The said pass / fail storage means,
Depending on the setting value set by the setting unit, the derivation probability of the first value is stored so as to be different in some cases,
When the setting value is changed by the setting unit, the value of the value corresponding to the extracting combination that can be extracted by the first determining unit and the second determining unit together with the change of the derivation probability of the first value. A gaming machine 70 characterized in that the derivation probability is changed (for example, an increase in the jackpot random number value accompanying a setting change is compensated for from a lost random number value that is a common role).

  According to the gaming machine 70, the determination information is obtained by the determination information obtaining means based on the establishment of the predetermined starting condition, and the determination information obtained by the determination information obtaining means is determined by the determination means. Then, based on the fact that the first game result is derived by the determining means, a predetermined first game value may be provided to the player by the first game value providing means, and the second game result may be provided by the determining means. Is derived, the predetermined second game value may be provided to the player by the second game value provision means. Further, the probability that the first game result is derived by the determining means is configured to be changeable by the setting means. Here, a game ball is fired by the firing means, and a game ball fired by the firing means is configured to be able to enter the first ball-in means, and a game ball fired by the fire means is also a first ball-in It is configured to be able to enter the second ball entry means different from the means. Further, in the hit / fail storage means used for the determination by the determination means, a first value corresponding to the first game result and a second value corresponding to the second game result are stored. Further, when the determination information acquisition unit extracts the determination information that is the third value other than the first value or the second value, the determination unit is configured not to give a game value to the player. Then, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entry means, the first determination information as the determination information is obtained by the first information acquisition means provided in the determination information acquisition means, Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means, the second determination information, which is the determination information, is obtained by the second information acquisition means provided in the determination information acquisition means. Also, the first determination information obtained by the first information obtaining means is determined by the first determining means provided in the determining means, and the second determination information obtained by the second information obtaining means is provided in the determining means. It is determined by the determined second determination means. Here, depending on the setting value set by the setting means, the derivation probability of the first value may be stored in the hit / fail storage means so that the first value may be different. Is changed, the derivation probability of the value corresponding to the extracted combination that can be extracted by both the first determination means and the second determination means is changed. That is, when the derivation probability of the first value is changed by changing the setting, it is possible to compensate for the derivation probability of the value corresponding to the extracted combination common to the first determination unit and the second determination unit. With this, when the derivation probability of the first value is changed in accordance with the setting change, the common extracting combination in each determination unit can be changed. 1 It becomes possible to calculate by taking into account the change in the winning probability of the game value and the change in the appearance probability of the game value corresponding to the common extractor. This has the effect of suppressing an increase in man-hours when designing the specifications.

In the gaming machine 70,
The said pass / fail storage means,
A first success / failure storage unit (for example, special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1) used in the first determination unit;
A second success / failure storage means (for example, special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2) used in the second determination means,
The first matching storage means and the second matching storage means,
A gaming machine 71 characterized by being configured to store at least the first value and the third value.

  According to the gaming machine 71, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 70. That is, the first validity storage means as the validity storage means is used in the first determination means, and the second validity storage means also used as the validity storage means is used in the second determination means. Here, the first validity storage means and the second validity storage means are configured to store at least a first value and a third value. That is, when the derivation probability of the first value is changed by the setting change, the derivation probability of the value corresponding to the third value, which is a common extractor, can be supplemented by the first determination unit and the second determination unit. . Thereby, when the derivation probability of the first value is changed in accordance with the setting change, the derivation probability of the third value, which is a common extractor in each determination unit, can be changed. The payout rate can be calculated by considering the change in the winning probability of the first game value and the change in the appearance probability of the game value corresponding to the common extractor. Is simplified, and an increase in man-hours at the time of designing game specifications can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine 70 or 71,
The value corresponding to the extractor is
At a first setting value (for example, setting value “1”) having the lowest derivation probability of the first value, a second setting value (for example, setting value) having the highest derivation probability of the first value from the first setting value A gaming machine 72, which is provided for the increment of the first value in "6").

  According to the gaming machine 72, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 70 or 71, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the first setting value with the lowest derivation probability of the first value, an increase of the first value in the second setting value with the highest derivation probability of the first value from the first setting value, the value corresponding to the extraction combination Is provided. Thereby, all the first values changed by the setting change can be changed from the values corresponding to the common extractor. Therefore, the calculation of the payout rate for each set value can be calculated by considering the change in the winning probability of the first game value and the change in the appearance probability of the game value corresponding to the common extractor. This makes it possible to easily calculate the payout rate and suppress an increase in man-hours at the time of designing game specifications.

In any of the gaming machines 70 to 72,
The said pass / fail storage means,
At least three stages of step-by-step success / failure storage means (for example, a special figure 1 jackpot random number table for setting values “1” to “3”) in which the derivation probabilities of the first values are different for each of the setting values set by the setting means 272a1),
The stepwise success / failure storage means,
The gaming machine (73), wherein the derivation probability of the first value is evenly increased when the setting value is changed stepwise by the setting means.

  According to the gaming machine 73, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines 70 to 72. That is, the hit / fail judgment storage means is provided with at least three stepwise hit / fail judgment storage means having different derivation probabilities of the first value for each set value set by the setting means. Then, when the setting value is changed stepwise by the setting means, the stepwise success / failure storage means is configured so that the derivation probability of the first value is uniformly increased. Accordingly, the calculation of the payout rate for each set value is changed stepwise and evenly by the change in the winning probability of the first game value and the change in the appearance probability of the game value corresponding to the common extractor. In consideration of the above, the calculation can be performed, and the calculation of the payout rate can be facilitated, so that an increase in man-hours at the time of designing the game specification can be suppressed.

  Note that “equally increase” means, for example, that the derivation probability that increases for each set value increases by the same value (for example, 1%) from the derivation probability one step lower, or the derivation probability that is one step lower On the other hand, a case in which the same ratio (for example, 5%) is increased by the same ratio is exemplified.

In any of the gaming machines 70 to 72,
The said pass / fail storage means,
At least three stages of step-by-step success / failure storage means (for example, a special figure 1 jackpot random number table for setting values “1” to “3”) in which the derivation probabilities of the first values are different for each of the setting values set by the setting means 272a1),
The stepwise success / failure storage means,
The gaming machine (74), wherein the derivation probability of the first value is increased at a predetermined rate when the setting value is changed stepwise by the setting means.

  According to the gaming machine 74, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines 70 to 72, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the hit / fail judgment storage means is provided with at least three stepwise hit / fail judgment storage means having different derivation probabilities of the first value for each set value set by the setting means. Then, when the setting value is changed stepwise by the setting means, the stepwise success / failure storage means is configured so that the derivation probability of the first value increases at a predetermined rate. Accordingly, the calculation of the payout rate for each set value is changed stepwise and at a predetermined rate, with the change in the winning probability of the first game value and the change in the appearance probability of the game value corresponding to the common extractor. The calculation can be performed by considering the minute and minute, and the calculation of the payout rate can be facilitated, so that an increase in the man-hour at the time of designing the game specification can be suppressed.

  Note that “increase at a predetermined rate” means, for example, that the derivation probability that increases for each set value increases proportionally (for example, 5%, 10%, 15%,...) Or an exponential function (For example, a case where the number increases to 2 times, 4 times, 8 times,... Based on the set value “1”) is exemplified.

In any of the gaming machines 70 to 74,
The said pass / fail storage means,
Storing the first value as a continuous value;
A gaming machine (75) characterized in that, when the setting value is changed by the setting means, a continuous range of the first value is changed.

According to the gaming machine 75, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines 70 to 74, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first value is stored as a continuous value by the hit / fail storage unit. Then, when the setting value is changed by the setting means, the range of the continuous first value is changed.
This makes it possible for the determining means to determine the first game value by determining the range from the beginning to the end of the first value. Therefore, even when the setting value is changed by the setting unit, it is not necessary to determine each changed first value in the validity determination, and the value to be determined is determined from the beginning of the first value. It can be determined by determining whether or not it is included up to the end. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load in the determination of success / failure can be reduced.

In any of the gaming machines 70 to 74,
The said pass / fail storage means,
Storing the first value as a discontinuous value;
The gaming machine (76), wherein the number of discontinuous first values is changed when the setting value is changed by the setting means.

According to the gaming machine 76, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines 70 to 74. That is, the first value is stored as a discontinuous value by the hit / fail storage unit. Then, when the setting value is changed by the setting means, the number of discontinuous first values is changed.
Thus, the determination of the first game value by the determination means needs to be performed by determining whether each first value matches, but it is difficult to grasp the position (arrangement) of the first value in the hit / failure storage means. . Therefore, by making it difficult for the player to grasp the position (arrangement) of the first value, it is possible to suppress the illegal derivation of the first game value and to increase the security performance of the gaming machine. is there.

In the gaming machines 70 to 76,
The first game value providing means,
From the predetermined game state before the provision of the first game value (for example, “normal game state”), after the provision of the first game value, an advantageous game state different from the predetermined game state (for example, “super probability fluctuation state” or Game state changing means (for example, jackpot ending processing (S5712)) for changing the game state to "probability change state",
The predetermined game state is
By making it easier for the game ball to enter the first ball entry unit than the second ball entry unit, it is easy to obtain the first determination information from the second determination information,
The advantageous game state is
The first ball entry means allows the game ball to easily enter the second ball entry means, so that the second determination information is more easily obtained than the first determination information. Gaming machine seven.

  According to the gaming machine 77, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine 76. That is, the game state is changed from the predetermined game state before the first game value is provided to the advantageous game state different from the predetermined game state after the first game value is provided by the game state changing means provided in the first game value provision means. Be changed. Then, in the predetermined game state, the game ball is more likely to enter the first ball entry means than the second ball entry means, so that the first determination information is more easily obtained from the second determination information, and in the advantageous game state, Since the game ball is easier to enter the second ball entry device than the first ball entry device, the second determination information is more easily obtained than the first determination information. Thereby, the calculation of the payout rate for each set value, for each piece of determination information, and for each game state is determined by the increase in the derivation probability of the first game value in the first determination means and the second determination means accompanying the setting change. It is possible to calculate the payout rate by considering the change in the derivation probability of the second game result in the first determination means and the second determination means and the determination information which is easily obtained for each game state. This has the effect of facilitating the calculation and suppressing an increase in the number of steps when designing the game specifications.

In any of the seven gaming machines,
First dynamic display execution means (for example, first special display) for executing first dynamic display of first identification information on a display means (for example, special symbol display device 39) based on the judgment result of the first judgment means. Execution of dynamic display of symbols),
A second dynamic display execution unit (for example, a second special symbol) that executes a second dynamic display of second identification information different from the first identification information on the display unit based on the determination result of the second determination unit Execution of dynamic display), and
The display means,
The first dynamic display executed by the first dynamic display executing means and the second dynamic display executed by the second dynamic display executing means can be executed in parallel (simultaneously). Seventy eight gaming machines.

  According to the gaming machine 78, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 77. That is, based on the determination result of the first determination unit, the first dynamic display execution unit executes the first dynamic display of the first identification information on the display unit. In addition, based on the determination result of the second determination unit, the second dynamic display execution unit executes the second dynamic display of the second identification information different from the first identification information on the display unit. Then, the first dynamic display by the first dynamic display execution means and the second dynamic display by the second dynamic display execution means can be executed in parallel (simultaneously) by the display means.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine capable of executing the first dynamic display of the first identification information and the second dynamic display of the second identification information in parallel (simultaneous) progress, the execution time and the like in each dynamic display are considered. When it is necessary to calculate the payout rate, and when the payout rates and the like in the first game result and the second game result are combined and calculated for each set value, the man-hour at the time of designing the game specification becomes enormous. There is a possibility that it will.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine 78, in a gaming machine capable of performing the first dynamic display and the second dynamic display in parallel (simultaneously), in the normal gaming state, the first determination information is obtained from the second determination information. In the advantageous game state, the second determination information is more easily obtained than the first determination information. Thereby, the calculation of the payout rate for each set value, for each piece of determination information, and for each game state is determined by the increase in the derivation probability of the first game value in the first determination means and the second determination means accompanying the setting change. It is possible to calculate the payout rate by considering the change in the derivation probability of the second game result in the first determination means and the second determination means and the determination information which is easily obtained for each game state. This has the effect of facilitating the calculation and suppressing an increase in the number of steps when designing the game specifications.

In gaming machine seventy eight,
The first determining means includes:
In a situation where the second game result can be derived in the first dynamic display by the first dynamic display execution means, the second dynamic display is being executed by the second dynamic display execution means, When the first game result or the second game result can be derived in the second dynamic display, and the execution time of the second dynamic display is longer than the execution time of the first dynamic display, A result changing means (for example, a special figure 2 changing process (S5520)) for deriving a game result other than the first game result or the second game result in the second dynamic display is provided. Game machine seven nine.

  According to the gaming machine seventy-nine, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine seventy-eight. That is, in a situation where the second game result can be derived in the first dynamic display by the first dynamic display execution means, the second dynamic display is being executed by the second dynamic display execution means, and 2 If the first game result or the second game result can be derived in the dynamic display and the execution time of the second dynamic display is longer than the execution time of the first dynamic display, the first determination means The result changing means provided is configured to derive a game result other than the first game result or the second game result in the second dynamic display. Thereby, while the second game value is provided based on the second game result based on the first dynamic display, the first game is provided based on the first game result based on the second dynamic display, or based on the second game result. Assignment of the second game value can be prevented from being performed, and it is possible to prevent an excessive game value from being paid out to the player due to the duplicated first game value or second game value. There is an effect that. Further, in calculating the payout rate, it is not necessary to consider the duplicated first game value or the second game value. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

In gaming machine seventy eight,
The first determining means includes:
In a situation where the second game result can be derived in the first dynamic display by the first dynamic display execution means, the second dynamic display is being executed by the second dynamic display execution means, When the first game result or the second game result can be derived in the second dynamic display, and the execution time of the second dynamic display is longer than the execution time of the first dynamic display, The progress of the second dynamic display is temporarily stopped, and after the provision of the second game value based on the first dynamic display is completed, the temporarily stopped second dynamic display is advanced. A gaming machine (710), comprising: a result suspending means (for example, a modified example 130) for deriving the first game result or the second game result.

  According to the gaming machine 710, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 178. That is, in a situation where the second game result can be derived in the first dynamic display by the first dynamic display execution means by the result temporary suspension means provided in the first determination means, the second dynamic display execution means During the execution of the second dynamic display, the first game result or the second game result can be derived in the second dynamic display, and the execution time of the second dynamic display is the first dynamic display. If it is longer than the execution time of the target display, the progress of the second dynamic display is temporarily stopped, and after the provision of the second game value based on the first dynamic display ends, the second display temporarily stopped. The dynamic display is advanced to derive the first game result or the second game result. Thereby, while the second game value is provided based on the second game result based on the first dynamic display, the first game is provided based on the first game result based on the second dynamic display, or based on the second game result. Assignment of the second game value can be prevented from being performed, and it is possible to prevent an excessive game value from being paid out to the player due to the duplicated first game value or second game value. There is an effect that. Further, in calculating the payout rate, it is not necessary to consider the duplicated first game value or the second game value. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

In any of the gaming machines 78 to 710,
When the first game result is derived, a first special ball entry means (for example, a special winning opening 65a) in which a game ball is driven to enter the ball,
When the second game result is derived, a second special ball entry means (for example, a small winning opening 72a) in which a game ball is driven so as to be able to enter,
Movable means (for example, the ordinary electric hand 64c) that can be displaced between a state where a game ball can enter the second ball entry means (for example, the second starting port 64b) and a state where entry is difficult or impossible. When,
A third ball entry means (for example, a through gate 67) which is capable of entering a game ball fired by the launching means and is different from the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means;
A third information acquisition unit (for example, a general-purpose reservation ball storage area 273i) for acquiring third determination information based on the game ball having entered the third ball entry unit;
A third dynamic execution unit that executes a third dynamic display of the third identification information based on the third determination information acquired by the third information acquisition unit (for example, a normal electric hand control process (S5104)) When,
A driving unit (for example, S5805 or S5807 of the ordinary electrical combination control process (S5104)) for driving the movable unit based on an execution result of the third dynamic execution unit,
The movable means,
In a state in which a game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter the second ball entry means, a closed-time rolling means (for example, a normal electric machine in the twenty-eighth embodiment) in which a game ball can roll on the upper part of the movable means. 64c).
The game state changing means,
When the first game value is given based on a predetermined first derivation result as the first game result (for example, a jackpot type of “probability change B” that gives “probability change state”), the game state is changed. Of the advantageous gaming states, the first advantageous transition means (for example, S5754 of the jackpot ending process (S5712) for shifting to a predetermined first advantageous gaming state (for example, the “probability variation state” of the twenty-eighth embodiment): YES) )When,
As the first game result, the first game value is provided based on a second derived result different from the first derived result (for example, a jackpot type of “probability variation A” that provides “super probability variation state”). In this case, the second advantageous shifting means for shifting the gaming state to a second advantageous gaming state different from the first advantageous gaming state (for example, the “super-probability changing state” in the twenty-eighth embodiment) among the advantageous gaming states. (E.g., S5751 of jackpot end processing (S5712: YES)).
The third dynamic execution means,
In the first advantageous gaming state, the execution time of the third dynamic display is changed from one end (for example, right end) of the closing-time rolling means to the other end (for example, left end) of the game ball. A short-time pattern (for example, “0.5 seconds”) performed shorter than the rolling time (for example, “3 seconds”)
In the second advantageous gaming state, a long-time pattern (for example, “5 seconds”) in which the execution time of the third dynamic display is made longer than the rolling time,
The driving means,
In the first advantageous game state, the movable means is driven in an easy-to-enter pattern (for example, a normal symbol high probability state and open extension) in which a game ball easily enters the second entering means,
In the second advantageous game state, the movable means is provided in a ball entry pattern (for example, a low probability state of a normal symbol and a non-open extension) in which a game ball is difficult to enter the second entry means from the easy entry pattern. Drive,
The second special entering means,
A gaming machine provided at a position where a game ball rolled from one end of the closing rolling means to the other end is easy to enter (for example, downstream of the normal electric utility 64c). 11.

  According to the gaming machine 711, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machines 178 to 710. That is, when the first game result is derived, the first special ball entry means is driven to allow a game ball to enter, and when the second game result is derived, the second special ball entry means Is driven to allow a game ball to enter. The movable means is configured to be displaceable between a state in which a game ball can enter the second ball entry means and a state in which entry is difficult or impossible. Here, the third ball entry means different from the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means is configured so that game balls fired by the firing means can enter. Then, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the third ball entry means, third determination information is acquired by the third information acquisition means, and the third determination information acquired by the third information acquisition means is added to the third determination information. Based on the third dynamic execution means, the third dynamic display of the third identification information is executed, and the driving means drives the movable means based on the execution result of the third dynamic execution means. . Here, in a state in which the game ball cannot enter the second ball entry means or cannot enter the ball, the closing ball rolling means provided on the movable means enables the game ball to roll on the upper part of the movable means. You. Then, when the first gaming value is given as the first gaming result based on the predetermined first derivation result, the gaming state is changed to the advantageous gaming state by the first advantageous shifting means provided in the gaming state changing means. The game is shifted to a predetermined first advantageous gaming state. Also, when the first game value is given based on a second derivation result different from the first derivation result as the first game result, the game state is changed by the second advantageous transition means provided in the game state change means, A transition is made to a second advantageous gaming state different from the first advantageous gaming state among the advantageous gaming states. Here, in the first advantageous game state, the third dynamic execution means sets the third dynamic display based on the rolling time for the game ball to roll from one end to the other end of the closing rolling means. And a long time pattern in which the execution time of the third dynamic display is made longer than the rolling time in the second advantageous game state. In the first advantageous game state, the driving means drives the movable means in the easy-to-enter pattern in which game balls easily enter the second entering means, while in the second advantageous game state, the easy-to-enter pattern The movable means is driven in a ball entry pattern in which it is difficult for game balls to enter the second ball entry means. The second special ball entry means is provided at a position where the game balls rolled from one end to the other end of the closed-time rolling means easily enter the ball. That is, in the first advantageous game state, the execution time of the third dynamic display may be shorter than the time when the game ball can roll over the movable means, and the movable means is driven in the easy-to-enter pattern. From this, the game ball rolling on the upper part of the movable means is likely to enter the second ball entry means, and is difficult to enter the second special ball entry means. On the other hand, in the second advantageous game state, the execution time of the third dynamic display may be longer than the time in which the game ball can roll over the movable means, and the movable means is not driven in the easy-to-enter pattern. Thus, the game ball rolling on the upper part of the movable means does not enter the second ball entry means, but enters the second special ball entry means. Thereby, whether the game ball enters the second special ball entry means when the second game result is derived is made different between the first derived result and the second derived result as the first game result. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

In gaming machine seventy eight,
When the first game result is derived, a first special ball entry means (for example, a special winning opening 65a) in which a game ball is driven to enter the ball,
When the second game result is derived, a second special ball entry means (for example, a small winning opening 72a) in which a game ball is driven so as to be able to enter,
Movable means (for example, the ordinary electric hand 64c) that can be displaced between a state where a game ball can enter the second ball entry means (for example, the second starting port 64b) and a state where entry is difficult or impossible. When,
A third ball entry means (for example, a through gate 67) which is capable of entering a game ball fired by the launching means and is different from the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means;
A third information acquisition unit (for example, a general-purpose reservation ball storage area 273i) for acquiring third determination information based on the game ball having entered the third ball entry unit;
A third dynamic execution unit that executes a third dynamic display of the third identification information based on the third determination information acquired by the third information acquisition unit (for example, a normal electric hand control process (S5104)) When,
A driving unit (for example, S5805 or S5807 of the ordinary electrical combination control process (S5104)) for driving the movable unit based on an execution result of the third dynamic execution unit,
The movable means,
At least in a state in which a game ball can enter the second ball entry means, a protruding rolling means on which the game ball can roll on the upper part of the movable means (for example, the normal electric hand 64c in the twenty-ninth embodiment). Upper surface),
The driving means,
In the predetermined game state, the movable means has a difficult-to-enter or a non-enterable pattern (for example, the normal electric hand 64c has a protruding time of "0.1 second") in which the game ball enters the second entering means. Drive the
In the advantageous gaming state, the movable means is provided in a ball-enterable pattern (for example, the normal electric hand 64c has a projection time of "5 seconds") in which a game ball can enter the second ball entry means by the projecting rolling means. Driving means,
The said pass / fail storage means,
A first success / failure storage unit (for example, special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1) used in the first determination unit;
A second success / failure storage means (for example, special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2) used in the second determination means,
The first success / failure storage means,
Storing the first value while not storing the second value,
The second right / wrong storage means,
Storing the first value and the second value;
The second special entering means,
A fourth ball entry means (for example, a special area switch 208h) capable of entering a game ball flowing into the second special ball entry means,
The fourth ball entry means,
A gaming machine (712), wherein the first gaming value can be given when a game ball enters.

  According to the gaming machine 712, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 178. That is, when the first game result is derived, the first special ball entry means is driven to allow a game ball to enter, and when the second game result is derived, the second special ball entry means Is driven to allow a game ball to enter. The movable means is configured to be displaceable between a state in which a game ball can enter the second ball entry means and a state in which entry is difficult or impossible. Here, the third ball entry means different from the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means is configured so that game balls fired by the firing means can enter. Then, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the third ball entry means, third determination information is acquired by the third information acquisition means, and the third determination information acquired by the third information acquisition means is added to the third determination information. Based on the third dynamic execution means, the third dynamic display of the third identification information is executed, and the driving means drives the movable means based on the execution result of the third dynamic execution means. . Here, in a state in which the game ball can enter the second ball entry means, the projecting rolling means provided on the movable means allows the game ball to roll on the upper part of the movable means. In addition, the driving means drives the movable means in the predetermined entering game state in a difficult-to-enter pattern in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter the second entering means. The movable means is driven by the means in a ball-enterable pattern in which a game ball can enter the second ball-in means. Then, the first hit / fail storage means as the hit / fail storage means is used in the first determining means, and the second hit / fail storage means also as the hit / fail storage means is used in the second determining means. Here, the first value storage unit stores the first value, but does not store the second value, and the second value storage unit stores the first value and the second value. The fourth special ball entry means provided in the second special ball entry means allows the game balls flowing into the second special ball entry means to enter the ball, and the game balls enter the second ball entry means. In this case, the first game value can be provided. That is, in the hit determination by the first determination means, since the second value is not stored in the first hit storage means but the first value is stored, the first game result is derived and the first game value is determined. It becomes a playability of whether to get. On the other hand, in the success / failure determination in the second determination means, since the second value is stored in the second success / failure storage means together with the first value, the first game result is derived to obtain the first game value, or The second game result is derived, and further, a game ball is made to enter the fourth ball entry means so as to obtain the first game value. Thus, the pattern of the game value that can be given by the first determination means and the pattern of the game value that can be given by the second determination means can be made different. Therefore, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine seven 12,
The second right / wrong storage means,
The gaming machine VII, wherein the second value derivation probability is configured to be higher than the first value derivation probability.

  According to the gaming machine 713, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 712, the following effects are achieved. That is, the second probability storage means is configured such that the derivation probability of the second value is higher than the derivation probability of the first value. Thereby, in the determination by the second determination means, the second game result based on the extraction of the second value is configured to be generated more than the first game result and the like. Therefore, the pattern of the game value that can be given by the first determination means and the game value that can be given by the second determination means can be clearly different. Therefore, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Height group: Compensate for increased probability & changed settings between roles that generate game value>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a game medium such as a game ball is fired toward a game area provided on a game board, and the game ball is directed to one of a plurality of entrances provided in the game area. Performs a winning or losing lottery based on the entry of a ball, and in the case of a winning or losing lottery in the applicable or not lottery, opens the normally closed variable ball-taking means to give a predetermined game value to the player. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-148264).

  However, in the above gaming machine, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, but there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

Determination information obtaining means (for example, main control device 110) for obtaining determination information (for example, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) based on satisfaction of a predetermined starting condition (for example, winning in the first starting port 64a);
Determining means for determining the determination information obtained by the determination information obtaining means (for example, special figure 1 change start processing (S5505));
Based on the first game result (for example, big hit) being derived by the determination means, a first game value giving means (for example, big hit game) capable of giving a predetermined first game value (for example, big hit game) to the player A special winning opening opening / closing control process (S5710));
A second game value (for example, a small hit game) that is different from the first game value to the player based on the fact that a second game result (for example, a small hit) is derived by the determination means. Game value providing means (for example, small winning opening opening / closing control processing (S5714));
A setting device (for example, S4121 of a setting change process (S4005)) capable of changing a probability that the first game result is derived by the determination device.
At least a first value (for example, a large random number value) corresponding to the first game result and a second value (for example, a small random number value) corresponding to the second game result are used for the determination by the determination means. And a storage unit (for example, special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1) for storing
The determining means includes:
When the determination information acquisition unit extracts the determination information that is a third value other than the first value or the second value (for example, a loss random number value), the game value is not given to the player. Composed,
The said pass / fail storage means,
Depending on the setting value set by the setting unit, the derivation probability of the first value is stored so as to be different in some cases,
When the setting value is changed by the setting means, the derivation probability of the second value is changed in accordance with the change in the derivation probability of the first value (for example, an increase in the jackpot random number value due to the setting change). Is supplemented from a small random number value).

  According to the gaming machine 80, the determination information is obtained by the determination information obtaining means based on the establishment of the predetermined starting condition, and the determination information obtained by the determination information obtaining means is determined by the determination means. Then, based on the fact that the first game result is derived by the determining means, a predetermined first game value may be provided to the player by the first game value providing means, and the second game result may be provided by the determining means. Is derived, the predetermined second game value may be provided to the player by the second game value provision means. Further, the probability that the first game result is derived by the determining means is configured to be changeable by the setting means. Here, at least a first value corresponding to the first game result and a second value corresponding to the second game result are stored in the hit / fail storage unit used for the determination by the determination unit. Further, when the determination information acquisition unit extracts the determination information that is the third value other than the first value or the second value, the determination unit is configured not to give a game value to the player. Then, depending on the setting value set by the setting means, the derivation probability of the first value may be stored in the hit / fail storage means so that the first value may be different, and when the setting value is changed by the setting means, the first value may be changed. The derivation probability of the second value changes with the change of the derivation probability. That is, for each setting, the derivation probability of the first game result corresponding to the first value is changed, and the derivation probability of the second game result corresponding to the second value is changed. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to provide inflection (crispness) in the derivation probabilities of the first game result and the second game result for each setting, to enhance the variation of the game, and to improve the interest of the game. .

In the gaming machine 80,
The determination information acquisition means,
When the setting value is changed by the setting unit, the setting value is configured not to change the derivation probability of the third value (for example, even if the setting value is changed, The gaming machine 81 is characterized in that the number is maintained).

  According to the gaming machine 81, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 80. That is, when the setting value is changed by the setting means, the change of the setting value does not change the derivation probability of the third value in the determination information obtaining means. This makes it possible to calculate the payout rate for each set value by considering the difference between the win probability of the first game value and the win probability of the second game result. There is an effect that it is easy to suppress an increase in man-hours at the time of designing game specifications.

In gaming machine 80 or 81,
Game state changing means (for example, a jackpot ending process) for changing a game state from a predetermined game state (for example, a “normal game state”) to an advantageous game state (for example, a “probability variation state”) that is advantageous to the player (S5712)),
Probability changing means for changing the derivation probability of the first game result when the predetermined game state is changed to the advantageous game state by the game state changing means (for example, S5516 of special figure 1 change start processing (S5505)). ) And
The said pass / fail storage means,
Predetermined success / failure storage means used in the predetermined game state (for example, a special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 referred to in a low probability state of a special symbol);
Advantageous success / failure storage means (for example, special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 referred to in a special symbol high probability state) used in the advantageous game state,
The advantage advantage storage means,
When the derivation probability of the first game result is changed by the probability changing means, the derivation probability of the third value is changed along with the change of the derivation probability of the first value (for example, due to a change in probability). A gaming machine 82 characterized in that the increase in the jackpot random value is compensated for from the lost random value.

  According to the gaming machine 82, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines 80 or 81, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game state is changed from the predetermined game state to the advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player by the game state changing means. Then, when the predetermined game state is changed to the advantageous game state by the game state changing means, the derivation probability of the first game result is changed by the probability changing means. Further, the predetermined success / failure storage means provided in the success / failure storage means is used in the normal game state, and the advantageous success / failure storage means similarly provided in the success / failure storage means is used in the advantageous game state. Here, when the derivation probability of the first game result is changed by the probability changing means, the derivation probability of the third value is changed in the advantage / non-permission storage means in accordance with the change of the derivation probability of the first value. This makes it possible to calculate the payout rate for each game state by considering only the change in the winning probability of the first game value, and to calculate the payout rate for each set value. The calculation can be performed by considering the difference between the winning probability of the first game value and the winning probability of the second game value, and the calculation of the payout rate can be facilitated to increase the man-hour at the time of designing the game specification. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

In any of the gaming machines 80 to 82,
The second value is
At a first setting value (for example, setting value “1”) with the lowest derivation probability of the first value, a second setting value (for example, setting value (6)) The gaming machine (83), which is provided by an increment of the first value in (6)).

  According to the gaming machine 83, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines 80 to 82. That is, in the first set value with the lowest derivation probability of the first value, an increase of the first value from the first set value to the second set value with the highest derivation probability of the first value, and the second value are provided. ing. Thus, the derivation probabilities of the first value changed by the setting change can be changed from the second value for all the setting values. Therefore, it is possible to calculate the payout rate for each set value by considering the increase in the winning probability of the first game value and the decrease in the second game value. There is an effect that it is easy to suppress an increase in man-hours at the time of designing game specifications.

In any of the gaming machines 80 to 83,
The said pass / fail storage means,
At least three stages of step-by-step success / failure storage means (for example, a special figure 1 jackpot random number table for setting values “1” to “3”) in which the derivation probabilities of the first values are different for each of the setting values set by the setting means 272a1),
The stepwise success / failure storage means,
The gaming machine 84, wherein the derivation probability of the first value is evenly increased when the setting value is changed stepwise by the setting means.

  According to the gaming machine 84, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines 80 to 83, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the hit / fail judgment storage means is provided with at least three stepwise hit / fail judgment storage means having different derivation probabilities of the first value for each set value set by the setting means. Then, when the setting value is changed stepwise by the setting means, the stepwise success / failure storage means is configured so that the derivation probability of the first value is uniformly increased. As a result, the calculation of the payout rate for each set value considers the winning probability of the first game value that increases stepwise and evenly and the decrease of the winning probability of the second game value that decreases stepwise and evenly. By doing so, the calculation can be performed, and the calculation of the payout rate can be facilitated, so that an increase in the number of steps when designing the game specification can be suppressed.

  Note that “equally increase” means, for example, that the derivation probability that increases for each set value increases by the same value (for example, 1%) from the derivation probability one step lower, or the derivation probability that is one step lower On the other hand, a case in which the same ratio (for example, 5%) is increased by the same ratio is exemplified.

In any of the gaming machines 80 to 83,
The said pass / fail storage means,
At least three stages of step-by-step success / failure storage means (for example, a special figure 1 jackpot random number table for setting values “1” to “3”) in which the derivation probabilities of the first values are different for each of the setting values set by the setting means 272a1),
The stepwise success / failure storage means,
The gaming machine 85, wherein the derivation probability of the first value is increased at a predetermined rate when the setting value is changed stepwise by the setting means.

  According to the gaming machine 85, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines 80 to 83. That is, the hit / fail judgment storage means is provided with at least three stepwise hit / fail judgment storage means having different derivation probabilities of the first value for each set value set by the setting means. Then, when the setting value is changed stepwise by the setting means, the stepwise success / failure storage means is configured so that the derivation probability of the first value increases at a predetermined rate. Thereby, the calculation of the payout rate for each set value is determined by the winning probability of the first game value that increases stepwise and at a predetermined rate, and the decrease of the winning probability of the second game value that decreases stepwise and at a predetermined rate. Can be calculated by taking into account the above, there is an effect that the calculation of the payout rate can be facilitated, and an increase in man-hours at the time of designing game specifications can be suppressed.

  Note that “increase at a predetermined rate” means, for example, that the derivation probability that increases for each set value increases proportionally (for example, 5%, 10%, 15%,...) Or an exponential function (For example, a case where the number increases to 2 times, 4 times, 8 times,... Based on the set value “1”) is exemplified.

In any of the gaming machines 80 to 85,
The said pass / fail storage means,
Storing the first value as a continuous value;
The gaming machine 86, wherein when the setting value is changed by the setting means, the range of the continuous first value is changed.

According to the gaming machine 86, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines 80 to 85. That is, the first value is stored as a continuous value by the hit / fail storage unit. Then, when the setting value is changed by the setting means, the range of the continuous first value is changed.
This makes it possible for the determining means to determine the first game value by determining the range from the beginning to the end of the first value. Therefore, even when the setting value is changed by the setting unit, it is not necessary to determine each changed first value in the validity determination, and the value to be determined is determined from the beginning of the first value. It can be determined by determining whether or not it is included up to the end. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load in the determination of success / failure can be reduced.

In any of the gaming machines 80 to 85,
The said pass / fail storage means,
Storing the first value as a discontinuous value;
A gaming machine (8), wherein the number of discontinuous first values is changed when the setting value is changed by the setting means.

According to the gaming machine 87, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines 80 to 85, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first value is stored as a discontinuous value by the hit / fail storage unit. Then, when the setting value is changed by the setting means, the number of discontinuous first values is changed.
Thus, the determination of the first game value by the determination means needs to be performed by determining whether each first value matches, but it is difficult to grasp the position (arrangement) of the first value in the hit / failure storage means. . Therefore, by making it difficult for the player to grasp the position (arrangement) of the first value, it is possible to suppress the illegal derivation of the first game value and to increase the security performance of the gaming machine. is there.

In any of the gaming machines 80 to 87,
Launching means (for example, a ball launching unit 112a) for launching a game ball;
A first ball entry means (for example, a first starting port 64a) into which a game ball fired by the firing means can enter;
A game ball fired by the firing means is capable of entering, and a second ball entry means (for example, a second starting port 64b) different from the first ball entry means,
The determination information acquisition means,
A first information acquisition unit (for example, a first reserved ball storage area 273d) for acquiring first determination information based on a game ball having entered the first ball entry unit;
A second information acquisition unit (for example, a second reserved ball storage area 273e) for acquiring second determination information based on a game ball having entered the second ball entry unit,
The determining means includes:
First determining means for determining the first determination information acquired by the first information acquiring means (for example, special figure 1 change start processing (S5505));
A second determination unit (for example, a special figure 2 change start process (S5508)) for determining the second determination information acquired by the second information acquisition unit;
The first game value providing means,
From the predetermined game state before the provision of the first game value (for example, “normal game state”), after the provision of the first game value, an advantageous game state different from the predetermined game state (for example, “super probability fluctuation state” or Game state changing means (for example, jackpot ending processing (S5712)) for changing the game state to "probability change state",
The predetermined game state is
By making it easier for the game ball to enter the first ball entry unit than the second ball entry unit, it is easy to obtain the first determination information from the second determination information,
The advantageous game state is
The first ball entry means allows the game ball to easily enter the second ball entry means, so that the second determination information is more easily obtained than the first determination information. Game machine 88.

  According to the gaming machine 88, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines 80 to 87. That is, a game ball is fired by the firing means, and a game ball fired by the firing means is configured to be able to enter the first ball-in means, and a game ball fired by the fire means is also inserted in the first ball-in means. And a second ball entry means different from the above. Then, the first determination information is obtained by the first information acquisition means provided in the determination information acquisition means based on the game ball having entered the first ball entry means, and the second entry ball The second determination information is obtained by the second information obtaining means provided in the determination information obtaining means based on the game ball having entered the means. Also, the first determination information obtained by the first information obtaining means is determined by the first determining means provided in the determining means, and the second determination information obtained by the second information obtaining means is provided in the determining means. It is determined by the determined second determination means. The game state changing means provided in the first game value providing means changes the game state from the predetermined game state before the first game value is provided to the advantageous game state different from the predetermined game state after the first game value is provided. You. Then, in the predetermined game state, the game ball is more likely to enter the first ball entry means than the second ball entry means, so that the first determination information is more easily obtained from the second determination information, and in the advantageous game state, Since the game ball is easier to enter the second ball entry device than the first ball entry device, the second determination information is more easily obtained than the first determination information. Thereby, the calculation of the payout rate for each set value, for each piece of determination information, and for each game state is determined by the increase in the derivation probability of the first game value in the first determination means and the second determination means accompanying the setting change. It is possible to calculate the payout rate by considering the change in the derivation probability of the second game result in the first determination means and the second determination means and the determination information which is easily obtained for each game state. This has the effect of facilitating the calculation and suppressing an increase in the number of steps when designing the game specifications.

In the game machine 88,
First dynamic display execution means (for example, first special display) for executing first dynamic display of first identification information on a display means (for example, special symbol display device 39) based on the judgment result of the first judgment means. Execution of dynamic display of symbols),
A second dynamic display execution unit (for example, a second special symbol) that executes a second dynamic display of second identification information different from the first identification information on the display unit based on the determination result of the second determination unit Execution of dynamic display), and
The display means,
The first dynamic display executed by the first dynamic display executing means and the second dynamic display executed by the second dynamic display executing means can be executed in parallel (simultaneously). Game machine eighty nine.

  According to the gaming machine 89, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 88. That is, based on the determination result of the first determination unit, the first dynamic display execution unit executes the first dynamic display of the first identification information on the display unit. In addition, based on the determination result of the second determination unit, the second dynamic display execution unit executes the second dynamic display of the second identification information different from the first identification information on the display unit. Then, the first dynamic display by the first dynamic display execution means and the second dynamic display by the second dynamic display execution means can be executed in parallel (simultaneously) by the display means.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine capable of executing the first dynamic display of the first identification information and the second dynamic display of the second identification information in parallel (simultaneous) progress, the execution time and the like in each dynamic display are considered. When it is necessary to calculate the payout rate, and when the payout rates and the like in the first game result and the second game result are combined and calculated for each set value, the man-hour at the time of designing the game specification becomes enormous. There is a possibility that it will.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine 89, in a gaming machine in which the first dynamic display and the second dynamic display can proceed in parallel (simultaneously), in the normal gaming state, the first determination information is obtained from the second determination information. In the advantageous gaming state, the second determination information is more easily obtained than the first determination information. Thereby, the calculation of the payout rate for each set value, for each piece of determination information, and for each game state is determined by the increase in the derivation probability of the first game value in the first determination means and the second determination means accompanying the setting change. It is possible to calculate the payout rate by considering the change in the derivation probability of the second game result in the first determination means and the second determination means and the determination information which is easily obtained for each game state. This has the effect of facilitating the calculation and suppressing an increase in the number of steps when designing the game specifications.

In the game machine 89,
The first determining means includes:
In a situation where the second game result can be derived in the first dynamic display by the first dynamic display execution means, the second dynamic display is being executed by the second dynamic display execution means, When the first game result or the second game result can be derived in the second dynamic display, and the execution time of the second dynamic display is longer than the execution time of the first dynamic display, A result changing means (for example, a special figure 2 changing process (S5520)) for deriving a game result other than the first game result or the second game result in the second dynamic display is provided. Gaming machine eight ten.

  According to the gaming machine 810, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 809. That is, in a situation where the second game result can be derived in the first dynamic display by the first dynamic display execution means, the second dynamic display is being executed by the second dynamic display execution means, and 2 If the first game result or the second game result can be derived in the dynamic display and the execution time of the second dynamic display is longer than the execution time of the first dynamic display, the first determination means The result changing means provided is configured to derive a game result other than the first game result or the second game result in the second dynamic display. Thereby, while the second game value is provided based on the second game result based on the first dynamic display, the first game is provided based on the first game result based on the second dynamic display, or based on the second game result. Assignment of the second game value can be prevented from being performed, and it is possible to prevent an excessive game value from being paid out to the player due to the duplicated first game value or second game value. There is an effect that. Further, in calculating the payout rate, it is not necessary to consider the duplicated first game value or the second game value. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

In the game machine 89,
The first determining means includes:
In a situation where the second game result can be derived in the first dynamic display by the first dynamic display execution means, the second dynamic display is being executed by the second dynamic display execution means, In the case where the first game result or the second game result can be derived in the second dynamic display and the execution time of the second dynamic display is longer than the execution time of the first dynamic display, The progress of the second dynamic display is temporarily stopped, and after the provision of the second game value based on the first dynamic display is completed, the temporarily stopped second dynamic display is advanced. A gaming machine 811 comprising: a result suspending means (for example, a modified example 130) for deriving the first game result or the second game result.

  According to the gaming machine 811, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 89. That is, in a situation where the second game result can be derived in the first dynamic display by the first dynamic display execution means by the result temporary suspension means provided in the first determination means, the second dynamic display execution means During the execution of the second dynamic display, the first game result or the second game result can be derived in the second dynamic display, and the execution time of the second dynamic display is the first dynamic display. If it is longer than the execution time of the target display, the progress of the second dynamic display is temporarily stopped, and after the provision of the second game value based on the first dynamic display ends, the second display temporarily stopped. The dynamic display is advanced to derive the first game result or the second game result. Thereby, while the second game value is provided based on the second game result based on the first dynamic display, the first game is provided based on the first game result based on the second dynamic display, or based on the second game result. Assignment of the second game value can be prevented from being performed, and it is possible to prevent an excessive game value from being paid out to the player due to the duplicated first game value or second game value. There is an effect that. Further, in calculating the payout rate, it is not necessary to consider the duplicated first game value or the second game value. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

In any of the gaming machines 88 to 811,
When the first game result is derived, a first special ball entry means (for example, a special winning opening 65a) in which a game ball is driven to enter the ball,
When the second game result is derived, a second special ball entry means (for example, a small winning opening 72a) in which a game ball is driven so as to be able to enter,
Movable means (for example, the ordinary electric hand 64c) that can be displaced between a state where a game ball can enter the second ball entry means (for example, the second starting port 64b) and a state where entry is difficult or impossible. When,
A third ball entry means (for example, a through gate 67) which is capable of entering a game ball fired by the launching means and is different from the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means;
A third information acquisition unit (for example, a general-purpose reservation ball storage area 273i) for acquiring third determination information based on the game ball having entered the third ball entry unit;
A third dynamic execution unit that executes a third dynamic display of the third identification information based on the third determination information acquired by the third information acquisition unit (for example, a normal electric hand control process (S5104)) When,
A driving unit (for example, S5805 or S5807 of the ordinary electrical combination control process (S5104)) for driving the movable unit based on an execution result of the third dynamic execution unit,
The movable means,
In a state in which a game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter the second ball entry means, a closed-time rolling means (for example, a normal electric machine in the twenty-eighth embodiment) in which a game ball can roll on the upper part of the movable means. 64c).
The game state changing means,
When the first game value is given based on a predetermined first derivation result as the first game result (for example, a jackpot type of “probability change B” that gives “probability change state”), the game state is changed. Of the advantageous gaming states, the first advantageous transition means (for example, S5754 of the jackpot ending process (S5712) for shifting to a predetermined first advantageous gaming state (for example, the “probability variation state” of the twenty-eighth embodiment): YES) )When,
As the first game result, the first game value is provided based on a second derived result different from the first derived result (for example, a jackpot type of “probability variation A” that provides “super probability variation state”). In this case, the second advantageous shifting means for shifting the gaming state to a second advantageous gaming state different from the first advantageous gaming state (for example, the “super-probability changing state” in the twenty-eighth embodiment) among the advantageous gaming states. (E.g., S5751 of jackpot end processing (S5712: YES)).
The third dynamic execution means,
In the first advantageous gaming state, the execution time of the third dynamic display is changed from one end (for example, right end) of the closing-time rolling means to the other end (for example, left end) of the game ball. A short-time pattern (for example, “0.5 seconds”) performed shorter than the rolling time (for example, “3 seconds”)
In the second advantageous gaming state, a long-time pattern (for example, “5 seconds”) in which the execution time of the third dynamic display is made longer than the rolling time,
The driving means,
In the first advantageous game state, the movable means is driven in an easy-to-enter pattern (for example, a normal symbol high probability state and open extension) in which a game ball easily enters the second entering means,
In the second advantageous game state, the movable means is provided in a ball entry pattern (for example, a low probability state of a normal symbol and a non-open extension) in which a game ball is difficult to enter the second entry means from the easy entry pattern. Drive,
The second special entering means,
A gaming machine provided at a position where a game ball rolled from one end of the closing rolling means to the other end is easy to enter (for example, on the downstream side of the ordinary electric utility 64c). 12.

  According to the gaming machine 812, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines 8.8 to 811. That is, when the first game result is derived, the first special ball entry means is driven to allow a game ball to enter, and when the second game result is derived, the second special ball entry means Is driven to allow a game ball to enter. The movable means is configured to be displaceable between a state in which a game ball can enter the second ball entry means and a state in which entry is difficult or impossible. Here, the third ball entry means different from the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means is configured so that game balls fired by the firing means can enter. Then, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the third ball entry means, third determination information is acquired by the third information acquisition means, and the third determination information acquired by the third information acquisition means is added to the third determination information. Based on the third dynamic execution means, the third dynamic display of the third identification information is executed, and the driving means drives the movable means based on the execution result of the third dynamic execution means. . Here, in a state in which the game ball cannot enter the second ball entry means or cannot enter the ball, the closing ball rolling means provided on the movable means enables the game ball to roll on the upper part of the movable means. You. Then, when the first gaming value is given as the first gaming result based on the predetermined first derivation result, the gaming state is changed to the advantageous gaming state by the first advantageous shifting means provided in the gaming state changing means. The game is shifted to a predetermined first advantageous gaming state. Also, when the first game value is given based on a second derivation result different from the first derivation result as the first game result, the game state is changed by the second advantageous transition means provided in the game state change means, A transition is made to a second advantageous gaming state different from the first advantageous gaming state among the advantageous gaming states. Here, in the first advantageous game state, the third dynamic execution means sets the third dynamic display based on the rolling time for the game ball to roll from one end to the other end of the closing rolling means. And a long time pattern in which the execution time of the third dynamic display is made longer than the rolling time in the second advantageous game state. In the first advantageous game state, the driving means drives the movable means in the easy-to-enter pattern in which game balls easily enter the second entering means, while in the second advantageous game state, the easy-to-enter pattern The movable means is driven in a ball entry pattern in which it is difficult for game balls to enter the second ball entry means. The second special ball entry means is provided at a position where the game balls rolled from one end to the other end of the closed-time rolling means easily enter the ball. That is, in the first advantageous game state, the execution time of the third dynamic display may be shorter than the time when the game ball can roll over the movable means, and the movable means is driven in the easy-to-enter pattern. From this, the game ball rolling on the upper part of the movable means is likely to enter the second ball entry means, and is difficult to enter the second special ball entry means. On the other hand, in the second advantageous game state, the execution time of the third dynamic display may be longer than the time in which the game ball can roll over the movable means, and the movable means is not driven in the easy-to-enter pattern. Thus, the game ball rolling on the upper part of the movable means does not enter the second ball entry means, but enters the second special ball entry means. Thereby, whether the game ball enters the second special ball entry means when the second game result is derived is made different between the first derived result and the second derived result as the first game result. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine 88,
When the first game result is derived, a first special ball entry means (for example, a special winning opening 65a) in which a game ball is driven to enter the ball,
When the second game result is derived, a second special ball entry means (for example, a small winning opening 72a) in which a game ball is driven so as to be able to enter,
Movable means (for example, the ordinary electric hand 64c) that can be displaced between a state where a game ball can enter the second ball entry means (for example, the second starting port 64b) and a state where entry is difficult or impossible. When,
A third ball entry means (for example, a through gate 67) which is capable of entering a game ball fired by the launching means and is different from the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means;
A third information acquisition unit (for example, a general-purpose reservation ball storage area 273i) for acquiring third determination information based on the game ball having entered the third ball entry unit;
A third dynamic execution unit that executes a third dynamic display of the third identification information based on the third determination information acquired by the third information acquisition unit (for example, a normal electric hand control process (S5104)) When,
A driving unit (for example, S5805 or S5807 of the ordinary electrical combination control process (S5104)) for driving the movable unit based on an execution result of the third dynamic execution unit,
The movable means,
At least in a state in which a game ball can enter the second ball entry means, a protruding rolling means on which the game ball can roll on the upper part of the movable means (for example, the normal electric hand 64c in the twenty-ninth embodiment). Upper surface),
The driving means,
In the predetermined game state, the movable means has a difficult-to-enter or a non-enterable pattern (for example, the normal electric hand 64c has a protruding time of "0.1 second") in which the game ball enters the second entering means. Drive the
In the advantageous gaming state, the movable means is provided in a ball-enterable pattern (for example, the normal electric hand 64c has a projection time of "5 seconds") in which a game ball can enter the second ball entry means by the projecting rolling means. Driving means,
The said pass / fail storage means,
A first success / failure storage unit (for example, special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1) used in the first determination unit;
A second success / failure storage means (for example, special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2) used in the second determination means,
The first success / failure storage means,
Storing the first value while not storing the second value,
The second right / wrong storage means,
Storing the first value and the second value;
The second special entering means,
A fourth ball entry means (for example, a special area switch 208h) capable of entering a game ball flowing into the second special ball entry means,
The fourth ball entry means,
The gaming machine 813, wherein the first game value can be given when a game ball enters.

  According to the gaming machine 813, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 88. That is, when the first game result is derived, the first special ball entry means is driven to allow a game ball to enter, and when the second game result is derived, the second special ball entry means Is driven to allow a game ball to enter. The movable means is configured to be displaceable between a state in which a game ball can enter the second ball entry means and a state in which entry is difficult or impossible. Here, the third ball entry means different from the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means is configured so that game balls fired by the firing means can enter. Then, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the third ball entry means, third determination information is acquired by the third information acquisition means, and the third determination information acquired by the third information acquisition means is added to the third determination information. Based on the third dynamic execution means, the third dynamic display of the third identification information is executed, and the driving means drives the movable means based on the execution result of the third dynamic execution means. . Here, at least in a state in which the game ball can enter the second ball entry means, the projecting rolling means provided on the movable means is configured so that the game ball can roll over the movable means. In addition, the driving means drives the movable means in the predetermined entering game state in a difficult-to-enter pattern in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter the second entering means. The movable means is driven by the means in a ball-enterable pattern in which a game ball can enter the second ball-in means. Then, the first hit / fail storage means as the hit / fail storage means is used in the first determining means, and the second hit / fail storage means also as the hit / fail storage means is used in the second determining means. Here, the first value storage unit stores the first value, but does not store the second value, and the second value storage unit stores the first value and the second value. The fourth special ball entry means provided in the second special ball entry means allows the game balls flowing into the second special ball entry means to enter the ball, and the game balls enter the second ball entry means. In this case, the first game value can be provided. That is, in the hit determination by the first determination means, since the second value is not stored in the first hit storage means but the first value is stored, the first game result is derived and the first game value is determined. It becomes a playability of whether to get. On the other hand, in the success / failure determination in the second determination means, since the second value is stored in the second success / failure storage means together with the first value, the first game result is derived to obtain the first game value, or The second game result is derived, and further, a game ball is made to enter the fourth ball entry means so as to obtain the first game value. Thus, the pattern of the game value that can be given by the first determination means and the pattern of the game value that can be given by the second determination means can be made different. Therefore, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

In gaming machine eight 13
The second right / wrong storage means,
The gaming machine 814, wherein the derivation probability of the second value is configured to be higher than the derivation probability of the first value.

  According to the gaming machine 814, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 813. That is, the second probability storage means is configured such that the derivation probability of the second value is higher than the derivation probability of the first value. Thereby, in the determination by the second determination means, the second game result based on the extraction of the second value is configured to be generated more than the first game result and the like. Therefore, the pattern of the game value that can be given by the first determination means and the game value that can be given by the second determination means can be clearly different. Therefore, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Group 9: Random value changed by setting is different>
In a conventional gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a ratio of the number of balls obtained when a player continuously plays a game in the pachinko machine (the number obtained by dividing the number of payout balls (the number of safe balls) by the number of out balls). A so-called machine splitting (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a "ball rate") is provided in a plurality of stages, and any one of the set values corresponding to the ball rate desired by a person involved in the hall or the like is set. In some cases, after the power of the pachinko machine is turned on and before the game is started by the player (before the game hall is opened), the hall-related personnel and the like can be set (changed or updated). Then, when the player plays a game with the pachinko machine, a win / fail lottery is performed based on the set value, so that the player can play the game at a payout rate according to the set value. (For example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-109085)).

  Specifically, for example, a game in which a first role (for example, a jackpot game) with a high obtained game value and a second role (for example, a small hit game) with a lower obtained game value than the first role can be randomly selected. In the machine, the value of the random number counter, the value of which is updated in a predetermined range, is obtained based on the starting winning, and the value of the obtained random number counter is determined by referring to the determination table provided for each set value, There is a configuration in which a winning or losing lottery of the first role or the second role is performed. In this determination table, the number of the first random numbers corresponding to the first combination, the number of the second random numbers corresponding to the second combination, and the random number corresponding to the third combination (for example, losing) to which the game value is not provided. The numbers are distributed (defined) so that the number of values differs for each set value. In some cases, the higher the set value, the more advantageous the payout rate for the player.

  Here, for each gaming machine installed in the gaming hall, the number of wins of the first role and the second role to which the game value output from the gaming machine is given is totaled, and the totaled result is calculated by the player Is provided with a data lamp for displaying information. A player who plays a game may check this data lamp before playing a game, and, based on the display contents of the data lamp, refer to the day or the past game history of the gaming machine that will play the game from now on. Guess the settings and select a gaming machine to play the game. In this case, if the setting content is a game result that is easily discriminated (observed), the player selects a game with a good setting content (for example, the setting value “6”) in the gaming machine, and the setting content is bad. (For example, the setting value is “1”) By avoiding the game of the gaming machine, the operation of the gaming machine with the bad setting content may be reduced, and the profit of the gaming hall may be reduced.

  The inventions of the ninth group have been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine in which the setting status of the gaming machine is difficult to grasp.

Determination information obtaining means (for example, main control device 110) for obtaining determination information (for example, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) based on satisfaction of a predetermined starting condition (for example, winning in the first starting port 64a);
Determining means for determining the determination information obtained by the determination information obtaining means (for example, special figure 1 change start processing (S5505));
Based on the first game result (for example, big hit) being derived by the determination means, a first game value giving means (for example, big hit game) capable of giving a predetermined first game value (for example, big hit game) to the player A special winning opening opening / closing control process (S5710));
A second game value (for example, a small hit game) that is different from the first game value to the player based on the fact that a second game result (for example, a small hit) is derived by the determination means. Game value providing means (for example, small winning opening opening / closing control processing (S5714));
A setting device (for example, S4121 of a setting change process (S4005)) capable of changing a probability that the first game result is derived by the determination device.
At least a first value (for example, a large random number value) corresponding to the first game result and a second value (for example, a small random number value) corresponding to the second game result are used for the determination by the determination means. And a storage unit (for example, special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1) for storing
The determining means includes:
When the determination information acquisition unit extracts the determination information that is a third value other than the first value or the second value (for example, a loss random number value), the game value is not given to the player. Composed,
The said pass / fail storage means,
Depending on the setting value set by the setting unit, the derivation probability of the first value is stored so as to be different in some cases,
The determination information acquisition means,
When the setting value is changed by the setting unit, one of the second value derivation probability and the third value derivation probability is changed with the change of the first value derivation probability. (For example, there is a setting for compensating for an increase in the jackpot random number value due to a setting change from the lost random number value, and a setting for supplementing the increase from the small jackpot random value value). 0.

According to the gaming machine 90, the determination information is obtained by the determination information obtaining means based on the establishment of the predetermined starting condition, and the determination information obtained by the determination information obtaining means is determined by the determination means. Then, based on the fact that the first game result is derived by the determining means, a predetermined first game value may be provided to the player by the first game value providing means, and the second game result may be provided by the determining means. Is derived, the predetermined second game value may be provided to the player by the second game value provision means. Further, the probability that the first game result is derived by the determining means is configured to be changeable by the setting means. Here, at least a first value corresponding to the first game result and a second value corresponding to the second game result are stored in the hit / fail storage unit used for the determination by the determination unit. Further, when the determination information acquisition unit extracts the determination information that is the third value other than the first value or the second value, the determination unit is configured not to give a game value to the player. Then, depending on the setting value set by the setting means, the derivation probability of the first value may be stored in the hit / fail storage means so that the first value may be different, and when the setting value is changed by the setting means, the first value may be changed. With the change in the derivation probability, the determination information acquisition unit changes one of the second value derivation probability and the third value derivation probability.
That is, when the derivation probability of the first value is changed due to the setting change, the derivation probability of the second value may be changed or the derivation probability of the third value may be changed depending on the set value. The configuration is as follows. With such a configuration, it is possible to complicate the setting determining element by the player. Therefore, the setting discriminating element is limited, for example, even if the payout rate is low (that is, the set value “1” or the like), it is difficult for the player to find out the setting, and the game is continued. There is an effect that operation can be improved.

<Group 10: Big, medium and small hits, and with the change of the jackpot derivation probability, the medium or small hit derivation probability is changed>
In a conventional gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a ratio of the number of balls obtained when a player continuously plays a game in the pachinko machine (the number obtained by dividing the number of payout balls (the number of safe balls) by the number of out balls). A so-called machine splitting (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a "ball rate") is provided in a plurality of stages, and any one of the set values corresponding to the ball rate desired by a person involved in the hall or the like is set. In some cases, after the power of the pachinko machine is turned on and before the game is started by the player (before the game hall is opened), the hall-related personnel and the like can be set (changed or updated). Then, when the player plays a game with the pachinko machine, a win / fail lottery is performed based on the set value, so that the player can play the game at a payout rate according to the set value. (For example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-109085)).

  However, in the gaming machine, it is necessary to suppress an increase in man-hours at the time of designing game specifications, but there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing an increase in man-hours at the time of designing game specifications.

Determination information obtaining means (for example, main control device 110) for obtaining determination information (for example, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) based on satisfaction of a predetermined starting condition (for example, winning in the first starting port 64a);
Determining means for determining the determination information obtained by the determination information obtaining means (for example, special figure 1 change start processing (S5505));
Based on the first special game result (for example, big hit) being derived by the determination means, first special value giving means (for example, big hit game) that can give a predetermined first special value (for example, big hit game) to the player A special winning opening opening / closing control process based on the jackpot (S5710);
Based on the second special game result (for example, middle hit) different from the first special game result being derived by the determination means, a second special value (for example, medium) lower than the first special value is given to the player. Second special value providing means (for example, a special winning opening opening / closing control process (S5710) based on a medium hit) capable of providing a winning game);
Based on the fact that the third special game result (for example, a small hit) different from the first special game result or the second special game result is derived by the determination means, the player is given a third special game result lower than the second special value. A third special value providing means (for example, a small winning opening opening / closing control process (S5714)) which can provide 3 special values (for example, a small hit game);
A setting device (for example, S4121 of a setting change process (S4005)) capable of changing a probability that the first special game result is derived by the determination device.
At least a first value (for example, a big hit random value) corresponding to the first special game result and a second value (for example, medium hit random) corresponding to the second special game result are used for the determination by the determining means. Numerical value) and a third value (for example, a small random number value) corresponding to the third special game result, a hit / fail storage means (for example, a big hit random number table and / or a big hit type table),
The said pass / fail storage means,
Depending on the setting value set by the setting unit, the derivation probability of the first value is stored so as to be different in some cases,
The determination information acquisition means,
When the setting value is changed by the setting unit, the derivation probability of the second value is changed with the change of the derivation probability of the first value, and the derivation probability of the third value is changed. (For example, there is a case where the increase in the jackpot random value due to the setting change is compensated for from the medium random number and a case where it is compensated for from the small random number) A gaming machine characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine 100, the determination information is obtained by the determination information obtaining means based on the establishment of the predetermined starting condition, and the determination information obtained by the determination information obtaining means is determined by the determination means. Then, based on the fact that the first special game result is derived by the determining means, a predetermined first special value is provided to the player by the first special value providing means, and is different from the first special game result by the determining means. Based on the derivation of the second special game result, the second special value giving means gives the player a second special value lower than the first special value. Further, based on the fact that the determination means derives a third special game result different from the first special game result or the second special game result, the third special value providing means gives the player a third special game result lower than the second special value. 3 Special value is given. Further, the probability that the first special game result is derived by the determining means can be changed by the setting means. Here, in the success / failure storage means used for the determination by the determination means, a first value corresponding to the first special game result, a second value corresponding to the second special game result, and a third value corresponding to the third special game result. The three values are stored. Then, depending on the setting value set by the setting means, the derivation probability of the first value may be stored in the hit / fail storage means so that the first value may be different, and when the setting value is changed by the setting changing means, the first value may be changed. Are changed in accordance with the change of the derivation probability of the second value, and the case where the derivation probability of the third value is changed. This makes it possible to compensate for the change in the first value derivation probability based on the setting change by changing the second value derivation probability or the third value derivation probability. Therefore, a change in the derivation probability of one predetermined random value can be realized by changing the derivation probabilities of a plurality of random values, thereby increasing the degree of freedom in designing game specifications and improving the interest of the game. There is an effect that it can be done.

In the gaming machine 100,
The determination information acquisition means,
The setting means changes the derivation probability of the third value by changing the derivation probability of the third value when the set value that is most disadvantageous for the player becomes the set value that is advantageous for the one-step player from the setting value that is most disadvantageous for the player. A gaming machine 11 characterized by being changed.

  According to the gaming machine 11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 100, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the determination information acquisition means, when the setting means changes the setting value most disadvantageous to the player to a setting value advantageous to the one-step player, the derivation probability of the third value is changed to change the first value. The derivation probability is changed. That is, when the setting value that is the most disadvantageous for the player changes to the setting value that is advantageous for the one-step player, the derivation probability of the third value is changed with the change of the derivation probability of the first value. With this, with the change in the derivation probability of the first value from the setting value that is most disadvantageous to the player to the setting value that is advantageous to the one-step player, derivation of the third value having the lowest game value for the player Configure to change probabilities. With this configuration, the derivation probabilities of the first special game result and the third special game result at the most disadvantageous setting value for the player and the setting value advantageous for the one-step player from the setting value are determined. There is an effect that it is possible to provide intonation (sharpness), enrich the variation of the game, and improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine 100 or 11,
The determination information acquisition means,
The setting means changes the derivation probability of the second value when the third value is depleted (less) when the setting value that is disadvantageous to the player changes from the setting value that is disadvantageous to the player to the setting value that is advantageous. A gaming machine (12), wherein the derivation probability of the first value is changed.

  According to the gaming machine 12, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 100 or 11, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the determination information acquisition unit, when the setting value changes from an unfavorable setting value to an advantageous setting value, the derivation probability of the second value is changed when the third value is depleted (less). By doing so, the derivation probability of the first value is changed. That is, when the third value that can be changed first is exhausted (small) when the setting value changes from an unfavorable setting value to an advantageous setting value for the player, the second value is changed along with the change in the derivation probability of the first value. The derivation probability is changed. This makes it possible to compensate for the change in the derivation probability of the first value from each of the second value and / or the third value based on the setting change. Therefore, the change of the derivation probability of the predetermined random value can be realized by changing the derivation probabilities of a plurality of random values, and there is no restriction at the time of designing game specifications, thereby increasing the degree of freedom in designing game specifications. There is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines 100 to 12,
The said pass / fail storage means,
At least three stepwise success / failure storage means (for example, a special figure 1 jackpot random number table for setting values “1” to “6”) in which the derivation probabilities of the first values are different for each of the setting values set by the setting means 272a1),
The stepwise success / failure storage means,
A first-stage hit / fail storage means (for example, a special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 at a set value "1") which is the most disadvantageous for the player;
Second-stage hit / fail storage means (for example, special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 at setting value "3") which is more advantageous to the player than the first-step hit / fail storage means;
A third-stage hit / fail storage means (for example, a special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1 at a set value "6") which is more advantageous to the player than the second-step hit / fail storage means;
The second stage pass / fail storage means comprises:
While the first-step hit / fail storage means has a higher derivation probability of the first value, the first-step hit / fail storage means and the derivation probability of the second value are configured to be equivalent,
The third stage pass / fail storage means comprises:
A gaming machine (13), wherein the first value derivation probability is higher than the second stage pass / fail storage means, while the second value derivation probability is lower.

According to the gaming machine 13, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines 10 to 12. That is, the hit / fail judgment storage means is provided with at least three stepwise hit / fail judgment storage means having different derivation probabilities of the first value for each set value set by the setting means. Then, as the stepwise success / failure storage means, a first-stage success / failure storage means most disadvantageous for the player, a second-stage success / failure storage means more advantageous to the player than the first-stage success / failure storage means, and a second-stage success / failure storage means Third stage pass / fail storage means which is more advantageous to the player than the storage means is provided. Here, the second-stage pass / fail storage means has a higher derivation probability of the first value than the first-stage pass / fail storage means, while the first-step pass / fail storage means has the same derivation probability of the second value. In addition, the third-stage pass / fail storage means has a higher first-value derivation probability than the second-step pass / fail storage means, but has a lower second-value derivation probability.
That is, in the second-stage hit / fail storage means, the derivation probability of the first value is higher and the derivation probability of the second value is set equal to that in the first-step hit / fail storage device. Further, the second-stage hit / fail storage means is configured to have a higher first value derivation probability and a lower second-value derivation probability as compared to the second-step hit / fail storage device. Thereby, the change in the derivation probability of the first value is compensated from each of the second value and / or the third value based on the setting change, so that the change in the derivation probability of the first value is fixed to one. There is no need to supplement from a predetermined random number value. Therefore, the change in the derivation probability of the predetermined random value can be realized by changing the derivation probabilities of a plurality of random values, thereby reducing restrictions in designing game specifications and increasing the degree of freedom in designing game specifications. This has the effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines 100 to 13,
The second value and the third value are:
At a first setting value (for example, setting value “1”) with the lowest derivation probability of the first value, a second setting value (for example, setting value A gaming machine 14 characterized by being provided with an increase in the first value in "6").

  According to the gaming machine 14, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines 100 to 13. That is, at the first set value with the lowest derivation probability of the first value, the increment of the first value, the second value, and the third value at the second set value with the highest derivation probability of the first value from the first set value Value is provided. Thereby, the change in the derivation probability of the first value is compensated from each of the second value and the third value based on the setting change, so that the change in the first value is changed from the fixed predetermined random number value of 1. There is no need to make up for it. Therefore, it is not necessary to secure the derivation probability of the predetermined random number value from the predetermined random number value of 1 by the change of the first value, so that there is no restriction at the time of designing the game specification, and the degree of freedom in designing the game specification is increased. This has the effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine 13 or 14,
The stepwise success / failure storage means,
When the setting value is changed stepwise by the setting means, the first value derivation probability is configured to increase uniformly,
A gaming machine (10), wherein the second value or the third value is configured to decrease uniformly as the derivation probability of the first value increases.

  According to the gaming machine 15, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines 13 or 14. That is, when the setting value is changed stepwise by the setting means, the step-by-step success / failure storage means is configured so that the derivation probability of the first value is uniformly increased. In addition, the second value or the third value is configured to decrease uniformly as the derivation probability of the first value increases. Thereby, the calculation of the payout rate for each set value is performed in such a manner that the appearance probability of the first special game value that increases stepwise and uniformly and the appearance of the second special game value that decreases stepwise and evenly are calculated. It is possible to calculate by considering the decrease in the probability or the decrease in the appearance probability of the third special game value, thereby facilitating the calculation of the payout rate and increasing the man-hours when designing the game specification. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

  Note that “equally increase” means, for example, that the derivation probability that increases for each set value increases by the same value (for example, 1%) from the derivation probability one step lower, or the derivation probability that is one step lower On the other hand, a case in which the same ratio (for example, 5%) is increased by the same ratio is exemplified.

In the gaming machine 13 or 14,
The stepwise success / failure storage means,
When the setting value is changed stepwise by the setting means, the derivation probability of the first value is configured to increase at a predetermined rate,
The gaming machine (16), wherein the second value or the third value decreases at a predetermined rate with an increase in the derivation probability of the first value.

  According to the gaming machine 16, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines 13 or 14. That is, when the setting value is changed stepwise by the setting means, the step-by-step success / failure storage means is configured so that the derivation probability of the first value increases at a predetermined rate. Further, the second value or the third value is configured to decrease at a predetermined rate as the derivation probability of the first value increases. Thereby, the calculation of the payout rate for each set value is performed by increasing the appearance probability of the first special game value increasing stepwise and at a predetermined rate and calculating the second special game value decreasing stepwise and at a predetermined rate. The calculation can be performed by considering the decrease in the appearance probability or the decrease in the appearance probability of the third special game value. This facilitates the calculation of the payout rate, and reduces the man-hour at the time of designing the game specification. There is an effect that the increase can be suppressed.

  Note that “increase at a predetermined rate” means, for example, that the derivation probability that increases for each set value increases proportionally (for example, 5%, 10%, 15%,...) Or an exponential function (For example, a case where the number increases to 2 times, 4 times, 8 times,... Based on the set value “1”) is exemplified.

In any of the gaming machines 100 to 16,
The said pass / fail storage means,
Storing the first value as a continuous value;
A gaming machine (10), wherein, when the setting value is changed by the setting means, a continuous range of the first value is changed.

According to the gaming machine 17, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines 100 to 16. That is, the first value is stored as a continuous value by the hit / fail storage unit. Then, when the setting value is changed by the setting means, the range of the continuous first value is changed.
This makes it possible for the determination means to determine the first special game value by determining the range from the beginning to the end of the first value. Therefore, even when the setting value is changed by the setting unit, it is not necessary to determine each changed first value in the validity determination, and the value to be determined is determined from the beginning of the first value. It can be determined by determining whether or not it is included up to the end. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load in the determination of success / failure can be reduced.

In any of the gaming machines 100 to 16,
The said pass / fail storage means,
Storing the first value as a discontinuous value;
A gaming machine (10), wherein when the setting value is changed by the setting means, the number of discontinuous first values is changed.

  According to the gaming machine 18, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines 100 to 16. That is, the first value is stored as a discontinuous value by the hit / fail storage unit. Then, when the setting value is changed by the setting means, the number of discontinuous first values is changed. Thus, the determination of the first special game value by the determination means must be performed by determining the match of the individual first values, but it is difficult to grasp the position (arrangement) of the first value in the hit / failure storage means. it can. Therefore, by making it difficult for a player to grasp the position (arrangement) of the first value, it is possible to suppress the illegal derivation of the first special game value and to enhance the security performance of the gaming machine. There is.

In any of the gaming machines 100 to 18,
Launching means (for example, a ball launching unit 112a) for launching a game ball;
A first ball entry means (for example, a first starting port 64a) into which a game ball fired by the firing means can enter;
A game ball fired by the firing means is capable of entering, and a second ball entry means (for example, a second starting port 64b) different from the first ball entry means,
The determination information acquisition means,
A first information acquisition unit (for example, a first reserved ball storage area 273d) for acquiring first determination information based on a game ball having entered the first ball entry unit;
A second information acquisition unit (for example, a second reserved ball storage area 273e) for acquiring second determination information based on a game ball having entered the second ball entry unit,
The determining means includes:
First determining means for determining the first determination information acquired by the first information acquiring means (for example, special figure 1 change start processing (S5505));
A second determination unit (for example, a special figure 2 change start process (S5508)) for determining the second determination information acquired by the second information acquisition unit;
The first special value providing means includes:
From a predetermined game state before the first special game value is provided (for example, “normal game state”), after the first special game value is provided, an advantageous game state different from the predetermined game state (for example, “super probability fluctuation state”) ”Or“ probability change state ”), and a game state changing means (for example, a jackpot ending process (S5712)) for changing the game state,
The predetermined game state is
By making it easier for the game ball to enter the first ball entry unit than the second ball entry unit, it is easy to obtain the first determination information from the second determination information,
The advantageous game state is
The first ball entry means allows the game ball to easily enter the second ball entry means, so that the second determination information is more easily obtained than the first determination information. Game machine nineteen.

  According to the gaming machine 19, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines 10 to 18. That is, a game ball is fired by the firing means, and a game ball fired by the firing means is configured to be able to enter the first ball-in means, and a game ball fired by the fire means is also inserted in the first ball-in means. And a second ball entry means different from the above. Then, the first determination information is obtained by the first information acquisition means provided in the determination information acquisition means based on the game ball having entered the first ball entry means, and the second entry ball The second determination information is obtained by the second information obtaining means provided in the determination information obtaining means based on the game ball having entered the means. Also, the first determination information obtained by the first information obtaining means is determined by the first determining means provided in the determining means, and the second determination information obtained by the second information obtaining means is provided in the determining means. It is determined by the determined second determination means. The gaming state changing means provided in the first special value providing means changes the gaming state from a predetermined gaming state before the first special gaming value is provided to an advantageous gaming state different from the predetermined gaming state after the first special gaming value is provided. Be changed. Then, in the predetermined game state, the game ball is more likely to enter the first ball entry means than the second ball entry means, so that the first determination information is more easily obtained from the second determination information, and in the advantageous game state, Since the game ball is easier to enter the second ball entry device than the first ball entry device, the second determination information is more easily obtained than the first determination information. Thereby, the calculation of the payout rate for each set value, for each piece of determination information, and for each game state is performed by increasing the derivation probability of the first special game value in the first determination means and the second determination means according to the setting change. A change in the derivation probability of the second special game result between the first determination means and the second determination means, a change in the derivation probability of the third special game result between the first determination means and the second determination means, It is possible to calculate by taking into account judgment information that is easily obtained for each game state, thereby facilitating calculation of the payout rate and suppressing an increase in man-hours at the time of designing game specifications. There is.

In the gaming machine 19,
First dynamic display execution means (for example, first special display) for executing first dynamic display of first identification information on a display means (for example, special symbol display device 39) based on the judgment result of the first judgment means. Execution of dynamic display of symbols),
A second dynamic display execution unit (for example, a second special symbol) that executes a second dynamic display of second identification information different from the first identification information on the display unit based on the determination result of the second determination unit Execution of dynamic display), and
The display means,
The first dynamic display by the first dynamic display executing means and the second dynamic display by the second dynamic display executing means can be executed in parallel (simultaneously). Gaming machine 10.

  According to the gaming machine 1010, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine 19: That is, based on the determination result of the first determination unit, the first dynamic display execution unit executes the first dynamic display of the first identification information on the display unit. In addition, based on the determination result of the second determination unit, the second dynamic display execution unit executes the second dynamic display of the second identification information different from the first identification information on the display unit. Then, the first dynamic display by the first dynamic display execution means and the second dynamic display by the second dynamic display execution means can be executed in parallel (simultaneously) by the display means.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine capable of executing the first dynamic display of the first identification information and the second dynamic display of the second identification information in parallel (simultaneous) progress, the execution time and the like in each dynamic display are considered. When it is necessary to calculate the payout rate, and when the payout rates in the first special game result, the second special game result, and the third special game result are combined and calculated for each set value, a game specification design There is a possibility that the man-hour at the time becomes enormous.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1010, in a gaming machine capable of performing the first dynamic display and the second dynamic display in parallel (simultaneously), in a predetermined gaming state, the first determination information is obtained from the second determination information. In the advantageous game state, the second determination information is more easily obtained than the first determination information. Thereby, the calculation of the payout rate for each set value, for each piece of determination information, and for each game state is performed by increasing the derivation probability of the first special game value in the first determination means and the second determination means according to the setting change. A change in the derivation probability of the second special game result between the first determination means and the second determination means, a change in the derivation probability of the third special game result between the first determination means and the second determination means, It is possible to calculate by taking into account judgment information that is easily obtained for each game state, thereby facilitating calculation of the payout rate and suppressing an increase in man-hours at the time of designing game specifications. There is.

In the gaming machine 1010,
The first determining means includes:
In a situation where the third special game result can be derived in the first dynamic display by the first dynamic display executing means, the second dynamic display is being executed by the second dynamic display executing means. The first special game result, the second special game result, or the third special game result can be derived in the second dynamic display, and the execution time of the second dynamic display is the first special game result. If it is longer than the execution time of the dynamic display, the result changing means for deriving a game result other than the first special game result, the second special game result, or the third special game result in the second dynamic display (for example, A gaming machine 11 having a special figure 2 change process (S5520).

  According to the gaming machine 1011, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine 1010. That is, in a situation where the third special game result can be derived in the first dynamic display by the first dynamic display executing means, the second dynamic display is being executed by the second dynamic display executing means. In the second dynamic display, the first special game result, the second special game result, or the third special game result can be derived, and the execution time of the second dynamic display is the execution time of the first dynamic display. If it is longer, the result changing means provided in the first determining means derives a game result other than the first special game result, the second special game result or the third special game result in the second dynamic display. Be composed. Accordingly, while the third special value is provided based on the second special game result by the first dynamic display, the first special value is provided based on the first special game result by the second dynamic display, and the second special game result is provided. Of the second special value based on the third special game result or the third special value based on the result of the third special game can be prevented from being performed. Depending on the value, it is possible to prevent an excessive gaming value from being paid out to the player. Further, in calculating the payout rate, it is not necessary to consider the duplicated first special value, second special value, or third special value. Thus, there is an effect that an increase in the number of steps in can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine 1010,
The first determining means includes:
In a situation where the third special game result can be derived in the first dynamic display by the first dynamic display executing means, the second dynamic display is being executed by the second dynamic display executing means. The first special game result, the second special game result, or the third special game result can be derived in the second dynamic display, and the execution time of the second dynamic display is the first dynamic game result. If the execution time is longer than the target display time, the progress of the second dynamic display is temporarily stopped, and after the provision of the third special game value based on the first dynamic display ends, the temporary stop is performed. Result temporary stop means (for example, modified example 130) for advancing the second dynamic display to derive the first special game result, the second special game result, or the third special game result. A gaming machine 12 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the gaming machine 1012, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine 1010. That is, in a situation where the third special game result can be derived in the first dynamic display by the first dynamic display executing means by the result temporary stopping means provided in the first determining means, the second dynamic display executing means , The first special game result, the second special game result, or the third special game result can be derived in the second dynamic display, and the second dynamic display can be derived. If the execution time of the display is longer than the execution time of the first dynamic display, after the progress of the second dynamic display is temporarily stopped and the third special game value based on the first dynamic display has been given Then, the temporarily stopped second dynamic display is advanced to derive the first special game result, the second special game result, or the third special game result. Thus, while the second special value is being given based on the second special game result by the first dynamic display, the first special value is given based on the first special game result by the second dynamic display, and the second special game result is given. The second special value based on the third special game result or the third special value based on the result of the third special game can be prevented from being provided, and the duplicated first special value, second special value or third special value can be prevented. Depending on the value, it is possible to prevent an excessive gaming value from being paid out to the player. Further, in calculating the payout rate, it is not necessary to consider the duplicated first special value, second special value, or third special value. Thus, there is an effect that an increase in the number of steps in can be suppressed.

In any of the gaming machines 19 to 12,
A first special ball entry means (for example, a special winning opening 65a) in which a game ball is driven to enter when at least the first special game result is derived;
When the third special game result is derived, a second special ball entry means (for example, a small winning prize 72a) in which a game ball is driven so as to be able to enter;
Movable means (for example, the ordinary electric hand 64c) that can be displaced between a state where a game ball can enter the second ball entry means (for example, the second starting port 64b) and a state where entry is difficult or impossible. When,
A third ball entry means (for example, a through gate 67) which is capable of entering a game ball fired by the launching means and is different from the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means;
A third information acquisition unit (for example, a general-purpose reservation ball storage area 273i) for acquiring third determination information based on the game ball having entered the third ball entry unit;
A third dynamic execution unit that executes a third dynamic display of the third identification information based on the third determination information acquired by the third information acquisition unit (for example, a normal electric hand control process (S5104)) When,
A driving unit (for example, S5805 or S5807 of the ordinary electrical combination control process (S5104)) for driving the movable unit based on an execution result of the third dynamic execution unit,
The movable means,
In a state in which a game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter the second ball entry means, a closed-time rolling means (for example, a normal electric machine in the twenty-eighth embodiment) in which a game ball can roll on the upper part of the movable means. 64c).
The game state changing means,
When the first special value is given based on a predetermined first derivation result as the first special game result (for example, a jackpot type of “probability fluctuation B” giving “probability fluctuation state”), the game state To a predetermined first advantageous gaming state (for example, the “probability variation state” in the twenty-eighth embodiment) of the advantageous gaming states (S5754 of the jackpot ending process (S5712): YES)
The first special value is provided as the first special game result based on a second derived result different from the first derived result (for example, a jackpot type of “probability variation A” that provides “super probability variation state”). In this case, the game state shifts to a second advantageous game state different from the first advantageous game state (for example, a “super-probability changing state” in the twenty-eighth embodiment) among the advantageous game states. Means (for example, S5751 of jackpot end processing (S5712): YES),
The third dynamic execution means,
In the first advantageous gaming state, the execution time of the third dynamic display is changed from one end (for example, right end) of the closing-time rolling means to the other end (for example, left end) of the game ball. A short-time pattern (for example, “0.5 seconds”) performed shorter than the rolling time (for example, “3 seconds”)
In the second advantageous gaming state, a long-time pattern (for example, “5 seconds”) in which the execution time of the third dynamic display is made longer than the rolling time,
The driving means,
In the first advantageous game state, the movable means is driven in an easy-to-enter pattern (for example, a normal symbol high probability state and open extension) in which a game ball easily enters the second entering means,
In the second advantageous game state, the movable means is provided in a ball entry pattern (for example, a low probability state of a normal symbol and a non-open extension) in which a game ball is difficult to enter the second entry means from the easy entry pattern. Drive,
The second special entering means,
A gaming machine provided at a position where a game ball rolled from one end of the closing rolling means to the other end is easy to enter (for example, on the downstream side of the ordinary electric utility 64c). 13.

  According to the gaming machine 1013, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines 19 to 12, the following effects are exhibited. That is, at least when the first special game result is derived, the first special ball entry means is driven so as to be able to enter a game ball, and when the third special game result is derived, the second special game result is derived. The special ball entry means is driven so that game balls can be entered. The movable means is configured to be displaceable between a state in which a game ball can enter the second ball entry means and a state in which entry is difficult or impossible. Here, the third ball entry means different from the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means is configured so that game balls fired by the firing means can enter. Then, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the third ball entry means, third determination information is acquired by the third information acquisition means, and the third determination information acquired by the third information acquisition means is added to the third determination information. Based on the third dynamic execution means, the third dynamic display of the third identification information is executed, and the driving means drives the movable means based on the execution result of the third dynamic execution means. . Here, in a state in which the game ball cannot enter the second ball entry means or cannot enter the ball, the closing ball rolling means provided on the movable means enables the game ball to roll on the upper part of the movable means. You. Then, when the first special value is given as the first special game result based on the predetermined first derivation result, the gaming state is changed to the advantageous gaming state by the first advantageous transition means provided in the gaming state changing means. Of these, a transition is made to a predetermined first advantageous gaming state. Also, when the first special value is given as the first special game result based on the second derived result different from the first derived result, the gaming state is changed by the second advantageous transition means provided in the gaming state changing means. The game mode is shifted to a second advantageous gaming state different from the first advantageous gaming state among the advantageous gaming states. Here, in the first advantageous game state, the third dynamic execution means sets the third dynamic display based on the rolling time for the game ball to roll from one end to the other end of the closing rolling means. And a long time pattern in which the execution time of the third dynamic display is made longer than the rolling time in the second advantageous game state. In the first advantageous game state, the driving means drives the movable means in the easy-to-enter pattern in which game balls easily enter the second entering means, while in the second advantageous game state, the easy-to-enter pattern The movable means is driven in a ball entry pattern in which it is difficult for game balls to enter the second ball entry means. The second special ball entry means is provided at a position where the game balls rolled from one end to the other end of the closed-time rolling means easily enter the ball. That is, in the first advantageous game state, the execution time of the third dynamic display may be shorter than the time when the game ball can roll over the movable means, and the movable means is driven in the easy-to-enter pattern. From this, the game ball rolling on the upper part of the movable means is likely to enter the second ball entry means, and is difficult to enter the second special ball entry means. On the other hand, in the second advantageous game state, the execution time of the third dynamic display may be longer than the time in which the game ball can roll over the movable means, and the movable means is not driven in the easy-to-enter pattern. Thus, the game ball rolling on the upper part of the movable means does not enter the second ball entry means, but enters the second special ball entry means. Thereby, whether the game ball enters the second special ball entry means when the third special game result is derived, based on the first derived result and the second derived result as the first special game result. Can be different. Therefore, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine 19,
At least, when the first special game result is derived, a first special ball entry means (for example, a special winning opening 65a) in which a game ball is driven so as to be able to enter,
When the third special game result is derived, a second special ball entry means (for example, a small winning prize 72a) in which a game ball is driven so as to be able to enter;
Movable means (for example, the ordinary electric hand 64c) that can be displaced between a state where a game ball can enter the second ball entry means (for example, the second starting port 64b) and a state where entry is difficult or impossible. When,
A third ball entry means (for example, a through gate 67) which is capable of entering a game ball fired by the launching means and is different from the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means;
A third information acquisition unit (for example, a general-purpose reservation ball storage area 273i) for acquiring third determination information based on the game ball having entered the third ball entry unit;
A third dynamic execution unit that executes a third dynamic display of the third identification information based on the third determination information acquired by the third information acquisition unit (for example, a normal electric hand control process (S5104)) When,
A driving unit (for example, S5805 or S5807 of the ordinary electrical combination control process (S5104)) for driving the movable unit based on an execution result of the third dynamic execution unit,
The movable means,
In a state where a game ball can enter the second ball entry means, a protruding rolling means on which the game ball can roll on the upper part of the movable means (for example, the upper surface of the ordinary electric hand 64c in the twenty-ninth embodiment). ,
The driving means,
In the predetermined game state, the movable means has a difficult-to-enter or a non-enterable pattern (for example, the normal electric hand 64c has a protruding time of "0.1 second") in which the game ball enters the second entering means. Drive the
In the advantageous gaming state, the movable means is provided in a ball-enterable pattern (for example, the normal electric hand 64c has a projection time of "5 seconds") in which a game ball can enter the second ball entry means by the projecting rolling means. Driving means,
The said pass / fail storage means,
A first success / failure storage unit (for example, special figure 1 big hit random number table 272a1) used in the first determination unit;
A second success / failure storage means (for example, special figure 2 big hit random number table 272a2) used in the second determination means,
The first success / failure storage means,
Storing the first value while not storing the second value,
The second right / wrong storage means,
Storing the first value and the second value;
The second special entering means,
A fourth ball entry means (for example, a special area switch 208h) capable of entering a game ball flowing into the second special ball entry means,
The fourth ball entry means,
A gaming machine (10), wherein the first special value can be given when a game ball enters.

  According to the gaming machine 1014, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine 19: That is, at least when the first special game result is derived, the first special ball entry means is driven so as to be able to enter a game ball, and when the third special game result is derived, the second special game result is derived. The special ball entry means is driven so that game balls can be entered. The movable means is configured to be displaceable between a state in which a game ball can enter the second ball entry means and a state in which entry is difficult or impossible. Here, the third ball entry means different from the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means is configured so that game balls fired by the firing means can enter. Then, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the third ball entry means, third determination information is acquired by the third information acquisition means, and the third determination information acquired by the third information acquisition means is added to the third determination information. Based on the third dynamic execution means, the third dynamic display of the third identification information is executed, and the driving means drives the movable means based on the execution result of the third dynamic execution means. . Here, in a state in which the game ball can enter the second ball entry means, the projecting rolling means provided on the movable means allows the game ball to roll on the upper part of the movable means. In addition, the driving means drives the movable means in the predetermined entering game state in a difficult-to-enter pattern in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter the second entering means. The movable means is driven by the means in a ball-enterable pattern in which a game ball can enter the second ball-in means. Then, the first hit / fail storage means as the hit / fail storage means is used in the first determining means, and the second hit / fail storage means also as the hit / fail storage means is used in the second determining means. Here, the first value storage unit stores the first value, but does not store the second value, and the second value storage unit stores the first value and the second value. The fourth special ball entry means provided in the second special ball entry means allows the game balls flowing into the second special ball entry means to enter the ball, and the game balls enter the second ball entry means. In this case, the first special value can be given. That is, in the hit determination by the first determination means, since the first value is not stored in the first hit storage means but the first value is stored, the first special game result is derived to obtain the first special value. Or not. On the other hand, in the success / failure determination by the second determination means, since the second value is stored in the second success / failure storage means together with the first value, the first special game result is derived to obtain the first special value, or , The third special game result is derived, and further, the first special value is obtained by causing the fourth ball entry means to enter the game ball. Thus, the pattern of the game value that can be given by the first determination means and the pattern of the game value that can be given by the second determination means can be made different. Therefore, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

In gaming machine 14
The second right / wrong storage means,
A gaming machine (10), wherein the derivation probability of the second value or the derivation probability of the third value is configured to be higher than the derivation probability of the first value.

According to the gaming machine 1015, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine 1014. That is, the second probability storage means is configured such that the derivation probability of the second value or the derivation probability of the third value is higher than the derivation probability of the first value. Thereby, in the determination by the second determination means, the second special game result based on the extraction of the second value or the third special game result based on the extraction of the third value is the first game result. And so on.
Therefore, the pattern of the game value that can be given by the first determination means and the game value that can be given by the second determination means can be clearly different. Therefore, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines CA1 to CA9, the gaming machines CB1 to CB6, CC1 to CC3, CD1 to CD6, CE1 to CE3, CF1 to CF5, CG1 to CG3, CH1 to CH3, CI1 to CI4, CJ1-CJ5, CK1-CK5, CL1-CL5, CM1-CM6, CN1-CN5, CO1, CP1-CP5, CQ1-CQ5, CR1-CR5, CS1-CS4, CT1, CT2, CU1, CU2, CV1- CV9, CW1 to CW7, CX1 to CX6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to D3, O1, O2, C1, C2, C1 to C1 3, c 1 to c 3, c 1 to c 6, co 1 to co 5, sa 1, sa 2, si 1, si 2, su 1, su 2, se 1, se 2, so 1, so 2, Ta1, Ta2, Chi1, Chi2, Tu1 to Tu3, Te1 to Te3, To1, To2 0 ~ 10,20 ~ 28,30 ~ 7,7 ~ 7,0 ~ 9,0 ~ 0,7, lacquer 0, handling 0, ku0 ~ ku3,10 ~ 10 114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 90, 100 Alternatively, the configuration limited to any one of the above items 15 to 15 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines CB1 to CB6, the gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CC1 to CC3, CD1 to CD6, CE1 to CE3, CF1 to CF5, CG1 to CG3, CH1 to CH3, CI1 to CI4, CJ1-CJ5, CK1-CK5, CL1-CL5, CM1-CM6, CN1-CN5, CO1, CP1-CP5, CQ1-CQ5, CR1-CR5, CS1-CS4, CT1, CT2, CU1, CU2, CV1- CV9, CW1 to CW7, CX1 to CX6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to D3, O1, O2, C1, C2, C1 to C1 3, c 1 to c 3, c 1 to c 6, co 1 to co 5, sa 1, sa 2, si 1, si 2, su 1, su 2, se 1, se 2, so 1, so 2, T1, T2, C1, T2, T1 to T3, T1 to T3, T1, T2 0 ~ 10,20 ~ 28,30 ~ 7,7 ~ 7,0 ~ 9,0 ~ 0,7, lacquer 0, handling 0, ku0 ~ ku3,10 ~ 10 114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 90, 100 Alternatively, the configuration limited to any one of the above items 15 to 15 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines CC1 to CC3, the gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, CD1 to CD6, CE1 to CE3, CF1 to CF5, CG1 to CG3, CH1 to CH3, CI1 to CI4, CJ1-CJ5, CK1-CK5, CL1-CL5, CM1-CM6, CN1-CN5, CO1, CP1-CP5, CQ1-CQ5, CR1-CR5, CS1-CS4, CT1, CT2, CU1, CU2, CV1- CV9, CW1 to CW7, CX1 to CX6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to D3, O1, O2, C1, C2, C1 to C1 3, c 1 to c 3, c 1 to c 6, co 1 to co 5, sa 1, sa 2, si 1, si 2, su 1, su 2, se 1, se 2, so 1, so 2, Ta1, Ta2, Chi1, Chi2, Tu1 to Tu3, Te1 to Te3, To1, To2 0 ~ 10,20 ~ 28,30 ~ 7,7 ~ 7,0 ~ 9,0 ~ 0,7, lacquer 0, handling 0, ku0 ~ ku3,10 ~ 10 114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 90, 100 Alternatively, the configuration limited to any one of the above items 15 to 15 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines CD1 to CD6, the gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, CC1 to CC3, CE1 to CE3, CF1 to CF5, CG1 to CG3, CH1 to CH3, CI1 to CI4, CJ1-CJ5, CK1-CK5, CL1-CL5, CM1-CM6, CN1-CN5, CO1, CP1-CP5, CQ1-CQ5, CR1-CR5, CS1-CS4, CT1, CT2, CU1, CU2, CV1- CV9, CW1 to CW7, CX1 to CX6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to D3, O1, O2, C1, C2, C1 to C1 3, c 1 to c 3, c 1 to c 6, co 1 to co 5, sa 1, sa 2, si 1, si 2, su 1, su 2, se 1, se 2, so 1, so 2, T1, T2, C1, T2, T1 to T3, T1 to T3, T1, T2 0 ~ 10,20 ~ 28,30 ~ 7,7 ~ 7,0 ~ 9,0 ~ 0,7, lacquer 0, handling 0, ku0 ~ ku3,10 ~ 10 114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 90, 100 Alternatively, the configuration limited to any one of the above items 15 to 15 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines CE1 to CE3, the gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, CC1 to CC3, CD1 to CD6, CF1 to CF5, CG1 to CG3, CH1 to CH3, CI1 to CI4, CJ1-CJ5, CK1-CK5, CL1-CL5, CM1-CM6, CN1-CN5, CO1, CP1-CP5, CQ1-CQ5, CR1-CR5, CS1-CS4, CT1, CT2, CU1, CU2, CV1- CV9, CW1 to CW7, CX1 to CX6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to D3, O1, O2, C1, C2, C1 to C1 3, c 1 to c 3, c 1 to c 6, co 1 to co 5, sa 1, sa 2, si 1, si 2, su 1, su 2, se 1, se 2, so 1, so 2, T1, T2, C1, T2, T1 to T3, T1 to T3, T1, T2 0 ~ 10,20 ~ 28,30 ~ 7,7 ~ 7,0 ~ 9,0 ~ 0,7, lacquer 0, handling 0, ku0 ~ ku3,10 ~ 10 114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 90, 100 Alternatively, the configuration limited to any one of the above items 15 to 15 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines CF1 to CF5, the gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, CC1 to CC3, CD1 to CD6, CE1 to CE3, CG1 to CG3, CH1 to CH3, CI1 to CI4, CJ1-CJ5, CK1-CK5, CL1-CL5, CM1-CM6, CN1-CN5, CO1, CP1-CP5, CQ1-CQ5, CR1-CR5, CS1-CS4, CT1, CT2, CU1, CU2, CV1- CV9, CW1 to CW7, CX1 to CX6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to D3, O1, O2, C1, C2, C1 to C1 3, c 1 to c 3, c 1 to c 6, co 1 to co 5, sa 1, sa 2, si 1, si 2, su 1, su 2, se 1, se 2, so 1, so 2, T1, T2, C1, T2, T1 to T3, T1 to T3, T1, T2 0 ~ 10,20 ~ 28,30 ~ 7,7 ~ 7,0 ~ 9,0 ~ 0,7, lacquer 0, handling 0, ku0 ~ ku3,10 ~ 10 114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 90, 100 Alternatively, the configuration limited to any one of the above items 15 to 15 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines CG1 to CG3, the gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, CC1 to CC3, CD1 to CD6, CE1 to CE3, CF1 to CF5, CH1 to CH3, CI1 to CI4, CJ1-CJ5, CK1-CK5, CL1-CL5, CM1-CM6, CN1-CN5, CO1, CP1-CP5, CQ1-CQ5, CR1-CR5, CS1-CS4, CT1, CT2, CU1, CU2, CV1- CV9, CW1 to CW7, CX1 to CX6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to D3, O1, O2, C1, C2, C1 to C1 3, c 1 to c 3, c 1 to c 6, co 1 to co 5, sa 1, sa 2, si 1, si 2, su 1, su 2, se 1, se 2, so 1, so 2, T1, T2, C1, T2, T1 to T3, T1 to T3, T1, T2 0 ~ 10,20 ~ 28,30 ~ 7,7 ~ 7,0 ~ 9,0 ~ 0,7, lacquer 0, handling 0, ku0 ~ ku3,10 ~ 10 114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 90, 100 Alternatively, the configuration limited to any one of the above items 15 to 15 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines CH1 to CH3, the gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, CC1 to CC3, CD1 to CD6, CE1 to CE3, CF1 to CF5, CG1 to CG3, CI1 to CI4, CJ1-CJ5, CK1-CK5, CL1-CL5, CM1-CM6, CN1-CN5, CO1, CP1-CP5, CQ1-CQ5, CR1-CR5, CS1-CS4, CT1, CT2, CU1, CU2, CV1- CV9, CW1 to CW7, CX1 to CX6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to D3, O1, O2, C1, C2, C1 to C1 3, c 1 to c 3, c 1 to c 6, co 1 to co 5, sa 1, sa 2, si 1, si 2, su 1, su 2, se 1, se 2, so 1, so 2, Ta1, Ta2, Chi1, Chi2, Tu1 to Tu3, Te1 to Te3, To1, To2 0 ~ 10,20 ~ 28,30 ~ 7,7 ~ 7,0 ~ 9,0 ~ 0,7, lacquer 0, handling 0, ku0 ~ ku3,10 ~ 10 114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 90, 100 Alternatively, the configuration limited to any one of the above items 15 to 15 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines CH1 to CH3, the gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, CC1 to CC3, CD1 to CD6, CE1 to CE3, CF1 to CF5, CG1 to CG3, CI1 to CI4, CJ1-CJ5, CK1-CK5, CL1-CL5, CM1-CM6, CN1-CN5, CO1, CP1-CP5, CQ1-CQ5, CR1-CR5, CS1-CS4, CT1, CT2, CU1, CU2, CV1- CV9, CW1 to CW7, CX1 to CX6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to D3, O1, O2, C1, C2, C1 to C1 3, c 1 to c 3, c 1 to c 6, co 1 to co 5, sa 1, sa 2, si 1, si 2, su 1, su 2, se 1, se 2, so 1, so 2, Ta1, Ta2, Chi1, Chi2, Tu1 to Tu3, Te1 to Te3, To1, To2 0 ~ 10,20 ~ 28,30 ~ 7,7 ~ 7,0 ~ 9,0 ~ 0,7, lacquer 0, handling 0, ku0 ~ ku3,10 ~ 10 114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 90, 100 Alternatively, the configuration limited to any one of the above items 15 to 15 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines CI1 to CI4, the gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, CC1 to CC3, CD1 to CD6, CE1 to CE3, CF1 to CF5, CG1 to CG3, CH1 to CH3, CJ1-CJ5, CK1-CK5, CL1-CL5, CM1-CM6, CN1-CN5, CO1, CP1-CP5, CQ1-CQ5, CR1-CR5, CS1-CS4, CT1, CT2, CU1, CU2, CV1- CV9, CW1 to CW7, CX1 to CX6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to D3, O1, O2, C1, C2, C1 to C1 3, c 1 to c 3, c 1 to c 6, co 1 to co 5, sa 1, sa 2, si 1, si 2, su 1, su 2, se 1, se 2, so 1, so 2, T1, T2, C1, T2, T1 to T3, T1 to T3, T1, T2 0 ~ 10,20 ~ 28,30 ~ 7,7 ~ 7,0 ~ 9,0 ~ 0,7, lacquer 0, handling 0, ku0 ~ ku3,10 ~ 10 114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 90, 100 Alternatively, the configuration limited to any one of the above items 15 to 15 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines CJ1 to CJ5, the gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, CC1 to CC3, CD1 to CD6, CE1 to CE3, CF1 to CF5, CG1 to CG3, and CH1 to CH3, CI1 to CI4, CK1 to CK5, CL1 to CL5, CM1 to CM6, CN1 to CN5, CO1, CP1 to CP5, CQ1 to CQ5, CR1 to CR5, CS1 to CS4, CT1, CT2, CU1, CU2, CV1 CV9, CW1 to CW7, CX1 to CX6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to D3, O1, O2, C1, C2, C1 to C1 3, c 1 to c 3, c 1 to c 6, co 1 to co 5, sa 1, sa 2, si 1, si 2, su 1, su 2, se 1, se 2, so 1, so 2, Ta1, Ta2, Chi1, Chi2, Tu1 to Tu3, Te1 to Te3, To1, To2 0 ~ 10,20 ~ 28,30 ~ 7,7 ~ 7,0 ~ 9,0 ~ 0,7, lacquer 0, handling 0, ku0 ~ ku3,10 ~ 10 114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 90, 100 Alternatively, the configuration limited to any one of the above items 15 to 15 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines CK1 to CK5, the gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, CC1 to CC3, CD1 to CD6, CE1 to CE3, CF1 to CF5, CG1 to CG3, and CH1 to CH3, CI1 to CI4, CJ1 to CJ5, CL1 to CL5, CM1 to CM6, CN1 to CN5, CO1, CP1 to CP5, CQ1 to CQ5, CR1 to CR5, CS1 to CS4, CT1, CT2, CU1, CU2, CV1 CV9, CW1 to CW7, CX1 to CX6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to D3, O1, O2, C1, C2, C1 to C1 3, c 1 to c 3, c 1 to c 6, co 1 to co 5, sa 1, sa 2, si 1, si 2, su 1, su 2, se 1, se 2, so 1, so 2, T1, T2, C1, T2, T1 to T3, T1 to T3, T1, T2 0 ~ 10,20 ~ 28,30 ~ 7,7 ~ 7,0 ~ 9,0 ~ 0,7, lacquer 0, handling 0, ku0 ~ ku3,10 ~ 10 114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 90, 100 Alternatively, the configuration limited to any one of the above items 15 to 15 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines CL1 to CL5, the gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, CC1 to CC3, CD1 to CD6, CE1 to CE3, CF1 to CF5, CG1 to CG3, and CH1 to CH3, CI1 to CI4, CJ1 to CJ5, CK1 to CK5, CM1 to CM6, CN1 to CN5, CO1, CP1 to CP5, CQ1 to CQ5, CR1 to CR5, CS1 to CS4, CT1, CT2, CU1, CU2, CV1 CV9, CW1 to CW7, CX1 to CX6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to D3, O1, O2, C1, C2, C1 to C1 3, c 1 to c 3, c 1 to c 6, co 1 to co 5, sa 1, sa 2, si 1, si 2, su 1, su 2, se 1, se 2, so 1, so 2, Ta1, Ta2, Chi1, Chi2, Tu1 to Tu3, Te1 to Te3, To1, To2 0 ~ 10,20 ~ 28,30 ~ 7,7 ~ 7,0 ~ 9,0 ~ 0,7, lacquer 0, handling 0, ku0 ~ ku3,10 ~ 10 114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 90, 100 Alternatively, the configuration limited to any one of the above items 15 to 15 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines CM1 to CM6, the gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, CC1 to CC3, CD1 to CD6, CE1 to CE3, CF1 to CF5, CG1 to CG3, and CH1 to CH3, CI1 to CI4, CJ1 to CJ5, CK1 to CK5, CL1 to CL5, CN1 to CN5, CO1, CP1 to CP5, CQ1 to CQ5, CR1 to CR5, CS1 to CS4, CT1, CT2, CU1, CU2, CV1 to CV9, CW1 to CW7, CX1 to CX6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to D3, O1, O2, C1, C2, C1 to C1 3, c 1 to c 3, c 1 to c 6, co 1 to co 5, sa 1, sa 2, si 1, si 2, su 1, su 2, se 1, se 2, so 1, so 2, T1, T2, C1, T2, T1 to T3, T1 to T3, T1, T2 0 ~ 10,20 ~ 28,30 ~ 7,7 ~ 7,0 ~ 9,0 ~ 0,7, lacquer 0, handling 0, ku0 ~ ku3,10 ~ 10 114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 90, 100 Alternatively, the configuration limited to any one of the above items 15 to 15 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines CN1 to CN5, the gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, CC1 to CC3, CD1 to CD6, CE1 to CE3, CF1 to CF5, CG1 to CG3, CH1 to CH3, CI1 to CI4, CJ1 to CJ5, CK1 to CK5, CL1 to CL5, CM1 to CM6, CO1, CP1 to CP5, CQ1 to CQ5, CR1 to CR5, CS1 to CS4, CT1, CT2, CU1, CU2, CV1 to CV9, CW1 to CW7, CX1 to CX6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to D3, O1, O2, C1, C2, C1 to C1 3, c 1 to c 3, c 1 to c 6, co 1 to co 5, sa 1, sa 2, si 1, si 2, su 1, su 2, se 1, se 2, so 1, so 2, T1, T2, C1, T2, T1 to T3, T1 to T3, T1, T2 0 ~ 10,20 ~ 28,30 ~ 7,7 ~ 7,0 ~ 9,0 ~ 0,7, lacquer 0, handling 0, ku0 ~ ku3,10 ~ 10 114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 90, 100 Alternatively, the configuration limited to any one of the above items 15 to 15 may be applied.

  In addition, with respect to any configuration of the gaming machine CO1, the gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, CC1 to CC3, CD1 to CD6, CE1 to CE3, CF1 to CF5, CG1 to CG3, CH1 to CH3, CI1 to CI4, CJ1 to CJ5, CK1 to CK5, CL1 to CL5, CM1 to CM6, CN1 to CN5, CP1 to CP5, CQ1 to CQ5, CR1 to CR5, CS1 to CS4, CT1, CT2, CU1, CU2, CV1 CV9, CW1 to CW7, CX1 to CX6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, C1, C2, C1 to C1 3, C1 to C3, C1 to C6, C1 to C5, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2 Ta1, Ta2, Chi1, Chi2, Tu1 to Tu3, Te1 to Te3, To1, To2 0 ~ 10,20 ~ 28,30 ~ 7,7 ~ 7,0 ~ 9,0 ~ 0,7, lacquer 0, handling 0, ku0 ~ ku3,10 ~ 10 114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 90, 100 Alternatively, the configuration limited to any one of the above items 15 to 15 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines CP1 to CP5, the gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, CC1 to CC3, CD1 to CD6, CE1 to CE3, CF1 to CF5, CG1 to CG3, CH1 to CH3, CI1 to CI4, CJ1 to CJ5, CK1 to CK5, CL1 to CL5, CM1 to CM6, CN1 to CN5, CO1, CQ1 to CQ5, CR1 to CR5, CS1 to CS4, CT1, CT2, CU1, CU2, CV1 CV9, CW1 to CW7, CX1 to CX6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to D3, O1, O2, C1, C2, C1 to C1 3, c 1 to c 3, c 1 to c 6, co 1 to co 5, sa 1, sa 2, si 1, si 2, su 1, su 2, se 1, se 2, so 1, so 2, Ta1, Ta2, Chi1, Chi2, Tu1 to Tu3, Te1 to Te3, To1, To2 0 ~ 10,20 ~ 28,30 ~ 7,7 ~ 7,0 ~ 9,0 ~ 0,7, lacquer 0, handling 0, ku0 ~ ku3,10 ~ 10 114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 90, 100 Alternatively, the configuration limited to any one of the above items 15 to 15 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines CQ1 to CQ5, the gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, CC1 to CC3, CD1 to CD6, CE1 to CE3, CF1 to CF5, CG1 to CG3, and CH1 to CH3, CI1 to CI4, CJ1 to CJ5, CK1 to CK5, CL1 to CL5, CM1 to CM6, CN1 to CN5, CO1, CP1 to CP5, CR1 to CR5, CS1 to CS4, CT1, CT2, CU1, CU2, CV1 CV9, CW1 to CW7, CX1 to CX6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to D3, O1, O2, C1, C2, C1 to C1 3, c 1 to c 3, c 1 to c 6, co 1 to co 5, sa 1, sa 2, si 1, si 2, su 1, su 2, se 1, se 2, so 1, so 2, Ta1, Ta2, Chi1, Chi2, Tu1 to Tu3, Te1 to Te3, To1, To2 0 ~ 10,20 ~ 28,30 ~ 7,7 ~ 7,0 ~ 9,0 ~ 0,7, lacquer 0, handling 0, ku0 ~ ku3,10 ~ 10 114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 90, 100 Alternatively, the configuration limited to any one of the above items 15 to 15 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines CR1 to CR5, the gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, CC1 to CC3, CD1 to CD6, CE1 to CE3, CF1 to CF5, CG1 to CG3, CH1 to CH3, CI1 to CI4, CJ1 to CJ5, CK1 to CK5, CL1 to CL5, CM1 to CM6, CN1 to CN5, CO1, CP1 to CP5, CQ1 to CQ5, CS1 to CS4, CT1, CT2, CU1, CU2, CV1 CV9, CW1 to CW7, CX1 to CX6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to D3, O1, O2, C1, C2, C1 to C1 3, c 1 to c 3, c 1 to c 6, co 1 to co 5, sa 1, sa 2, si 1, si 2, su 1, su 2, se 1, se 2, so 1, so 2, T1, T2, C1, T2, T1 to T3, T1 to T3, T1, T2 0 ~ 10,20 ~ 28,30 ~ 7,7 ~ 7,0 ~ 9,0 ~ 0,7, lacquer 0, handling 0, ku0 ~ ku3,10 ~ 10 114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 90, 100 Alternatively, the configuration limited to any one of the above items 15 to 15 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines CS1 to CS4, the gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, CC1 to CC3, CD1 to CD6, CE1 to CE3, CF1 to CF5, CG1 to CG3, CH1 to CH3, CI1 to CI4, CJ1 to CJ5, CK1 to CK5, CL1 to CL5, CM1 to CM6, CN1 to CN5, CO1, CP1 to CP5, CQ1 to CQ5, CR1 to CR5, CT1, CT2, CU1, CU2, CV1 CV9, CW1 to CW7, CX1 to CX6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to D3, O1, O2, C1, C2, C1 to C1 3, c 1 to c 3, c 1 to c 6, co 1 to co 5, sa 1, sa 2, si 1, si 2, su 1, su 2, se 1, se 2, so 1, so 2, T1, T2, C1, T2, T1 to T3, T1 to T3, T1, T2 0 ~ 10,20 ~ 28,30 ~ 7,7 ~ 7,0 ~ 9,0 ~ 0,7, lacquer 0, handling 0, ku0 ~ ku3,10 ~ 10 114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 90, 100 Alternatively, the configuration limited to any one of the above items 15 to 15 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines CT1 and CT2, the gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, CC1 to CC3, CD1 to CD6, CE1 to CE3, CF1 to CF5, CG1 to CG3, and CH1 to CH3, CI1-CI4, CJ1-CJ5, CK1-CK5, CL1-CL5, CM1-CM6, CN1-CN5, CO1, CP1-CP5, CQ1-CQ5, CR1-CR5, CS1-CS4, CU1, CU2, CV1- CV9, CW1 to CW7, CX1 to CX6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to D3, O1, O2, C1, C2, C1 to C1 3, c 1 to c 3, c 1 to c 6, co 1 to co 5, sa 1, sa 2, si 1, si 2, su 1, su 2, se 1, se 2, so 1, so 2, Ta1, Ta2, Chi1, Chi2, Tu1 to Tu3, Te1 to Te3, To1, To2 0 ~ 10,20 ~ 28,30 ~ 7,7 ~ 7,0 ~ 9,0 ~ 0,7, lacquer 0, handling 0, ku0 ~ ku3,10 ~ 10 114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 90, 100 Alternatively, the configuration limited to any one of the above items 15 to 15 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines CU1 and CU2, the gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, CC1 to CC3, CD1 to CD6, CE1 to CE3, CF1 to CF5, CG1 to CG3, and CH1 to CH3, CI1-CI4, CJ1-CJ5, CK1-CK5, CL1-CL5, CM1-CM6, CN1-CN5, CO1, CP1-CP5, CQ1-CQ5, CR1-CR5, CS1-CS4, CT1, CT2, CV1- CV9, CW1 to CW7, CX1 to CX6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to D3, O1, O2, C1, C2, C1 to C1 3, c 1 to c 3, c 1 to c 6, co 1 to co 5, sa 1, sa 2, si 1, si 2, su 1, su 2, se 1, se 2, so 1, so 2, Ta1, Ta2, Chi1, Chi2, Tu1 to Tu3, Te1 to Te3, To1, To2 0 ~ 10,20 ~ 28,30 ~ 7,7 ~ 7,0 ~ 9,0 ~ 0,7, lacquer 0, handling 0, ku0 ~ ku3,10 ~ 10 114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 90, 100 Alternatively, the configuration limited to any one of the above items 15 to 15 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines CV1 to CV9, the gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, CC1 to CC3, CD1 to CD6, CE1 to CE3, CF1 to CF5, CG1 to CG3, and CH1 to CH3, CI1 to CI4, CJ1 to CJ5, CK1 to CK5, CL1 to CL5, CM1 to CM6, CN1 to CN5, CO1, CP1 to CP5, CQ1 to CQ5, CR1 to CR5, CS1 to CS4, CT1, CT2, CU1, CU2, CW1 to CW7, CX1 to CX6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to D3, O1, O2, C1, C2, C1 to C1 3, c 1 to c 3, c 1 to c 6, co 1 to co 5, sa 1, sa 2, si 1, si 2, su 1, su 2, se 1, se 2, so 1, so 2, T1, T2, C1, T2, T1 to T3, T1 to T3, T1, T2 0 ~ 10,20 ~ 28,30 ~ 7,7 ~ 7,0 ~ 9,0 ~ 0,7, lacquer 0, handling 0, ku0 ~ ku3,10 ~ 10 114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 90, 100 Alternatively, the configuration limited to any one of the above items 15 to 15 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines CW1 to CW7, the gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, CC1 to CC3, CD1 to CD6, CE1 to CE3, CF1 to CF5, CG1 to CG3, and CH1 to CH3, CI1 to CI4, CJ1 to CJ5, CK1 to CK5, CL1 to CL5, CM1 to CM6, CN1 to CN5, CO1, CP1 to CP5, CQ1 to CQ5, CR1 to CR5, CS1 to CS4, CT1, CT2, CU1, CU2, CV1 to CV9, CX1 to CX6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, C1, C2, C1 to C1 3, c 1 to c 3, c 1 to c 6, co 1 to co 5, sa 1, sa 2, si 1, si 2, su 1, su 2, se 1, se 2, so 1, so 2, Ta1, Ta2, Chi1, Chi2, Tu1 to Tu3, Te1 to Te3, To1, To2 0 ~ 10,20 ~ 28,30 ~ 7,7 ~ 7,0 ~ 9,0 ~ 0,7, lacquer 0, handling 0, ku0 ~ ku3,10 ~ 10 114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 90, 100 Alternatively, the configuration limited to any one of the above items 15 to 15 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines CX1 to CX6, the gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, CC1 to CC3, CD1 to CD6, CE1 to CE3, CF1 to CF5, CG1 to CG3, and CH1 to CH3, CI1 to CI4, CJ1 to CJ5, CK1 to CK5, CL1 to CL5, CM1 to CM6, CN1 to CN5, CO1, CP1 to CP5, CQ1 to CQ5, CR1 to CR5, CS1 to CS4, CT1, CT2, CU1, CU2, CV1 to CV9, CW1 to CW7, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to D3, O1, O2, C1, C2, C1 to C1 3, c 1 to c 3, c 1 to c 6, co 1 to co 5, sa 1, sa 2, si 1, si 2, su 1, su 2, se 1, se 2, so 1, so 2, Ta1, Ta2, Chi1, Chi2, Tu1 to Tu3, Te1 to Te3, To1, To2 0 ~ 10,20 ~ 28,30 ~ 7,7 ~ 7,0 ~ 9,0 ~ 0,7, lacquer 0, handling 0, ku0 ~ ku3,10 ~ 10 114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 90, 100 Alternatively, the configuration limited to any one of the above items 15 to 15 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines A1 to A9, the gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, CC1 to CC3, CD1 to CD6, CE1 to CE3, CF1 to CF5, CG1 to CG3, CH1 to CH3, CI1 to CI4, CJ1 to CJ5, CK1 to CK5, CL1 to CL5, CM1 to CM6, CN1 to CN5, CO1, CP1 to CP5, CQ1 to CQ5, CR1 to CR5, CS1 to CS4, CT1, CT2 CU1, CU2, CV1 to CV9, CW1 to CW7, CX1 to CX6, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, D1 to D3, O1, O2, C1, C2, C1 to C1 3, c 1 to c 3, c 1 to c 6, co 1 to co 5, sa 1, sa 2, si 1, si 2, su 1, su 2, se 1, se 2, so 1, so 2, T1, T2, C1, T2, T1 to T3, T1 to T3, T1, T2 0 ~ 10,20 ~ 28,30 ~ 7,7 ~ 7,0 ~ 9,0 ~ 0,7, lacquer 0, handling 0, ku0 ~ ku3,10 ~ 10 114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 90, 100 Alternatively, the configuration limited to any one of the above items 15 to 15 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any one of the gaming machines I1 to I7, the gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, CC1 to CC3, CD1 to CD6, CE1 to CE3, CF1 to CF5, CG1 to CG3 CH1 to CH3, CI1 to CI4, CJ1 to CJ5, CK1 to CK5, CL1 to CL5, CM1 to CM6, CN1 to CN5, CO1, CP1 to CP5, CQ1 to CQ5, CR1 to CR5, CS1 to CS4, CT1, CT2 CU1, CU2, CV1 to CV9, CW1 to CW7, CX1 to CX6, A1 to A9, U1 to U5, D1 to D3, O1, O2, C1, C2, C1 to C1 3, C1 to C3, C1 to C6, C1 to C5, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2 T1, T2, C1, T2, T1 to T3, T1 to T3, T1, T2 0 ~ 10,20 ~ 28,30 ~ 7,7 ~ 7,0 ~ 9,0 ~ 0,7, lacquer 0, handling 0, ku0 ~ ku3,10 ~ 10 114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 90, 100 Alternatively, the configuration limited to any one of the above items 15 to 15 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines C1 to C5, the gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, CC1 to CC3, CD1 to CD6, CE1 to CE3, CF1 to CF5, CG1 to CG3 CH1 to CH3, CI1 to CI4, CJ1 to CJ5, CK1 to CK5, CL1 to CL5, CM1 to CM6, CN1 to CN5, CO1, CP1 to CP5, CQ1 to CQ5, CR1 to CR5, CS1 to CS4, CT1, CT2 CU1, CU2, CV1 to CV9, CW1 to CW7, CX1 to CX6, A1 to A9, I1 to A7, D1 to D3, D1, D2, D1, D2, D1 3, C1 to C3, C1 to C6, C1 to C5, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2 Ta1, Ta2, Chi1, Chi2, Tu1 to Tu3, Te1 to Te3, To1, To2 0 ~ 10,20 ~ 28,30 ~ 7,7 ~ 7,0 ~ 9,0 ~ 0,7, lacquer 0, handling 0, ku0 ~ ku3,10 ~ 10 114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 90, 100 Alternatively, the configuration limited to any one of the above items 15 to 15 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any configuration of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, CC1 to CC3, CD1 to CD6, CE1 to CE3, CF1 to CF5, CG1 to CG3 CH1 to CH3, CI1 to CI4, CJ1 to CJ5, CK1 to CK5, CL1 to CL5, CM1 to CM6, CN1 to CN5, CO1, CP1 to CP5, CQ1 to CQ5, CR1 to CR5, CS1 to CS4, CT1, CT2 CU1, CU2, CV1 to CV9, CW1 to CW7, CX1 to CX6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, O1, O2, Ca1, Ca2, Ki1 to Ki 3, C1 to C3, C1 to C6, C1 to C5, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2 T1, T2, C1, T2, T1 to T3, T1 to T3, T1, T2 0 ~ 10,20 ~ 28,30 ~ 7,7 ~ 7,0 ~ 9,0 ~ 0,7, lacquer 0, handling 0, ku0 ~ ku3,10 ~ 10 114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 90, 100 Alternatively, the configuration limited to any one of the above items 15 to 15 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines O1 and O2, the gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, CC1 to CC3, CD1 to CD6, CE1 to CE3, CF1 to CF5, CG1 to CG3 CH1 to CH3, CI1 to CI4, CJ1 to CJ5, CK1 to CK5, CL1 to CL5, CM1 to CM6, CN1 to CN5, CO1, CP1 to CP5, CQ1 to CQ5, CR1 to CR5, CS1 to CS4, CT1, CT2 CU1, CU2, CV1 to CV9, CW1 to CW7, CX1 to CX6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to D3, C1, C2, C1 to C 3, c 1 to c 3, c 1 to c 6, co 1 to co 5, sa 1, sa 2, si 1, si 2, su 1, su 2, se 1, se 2, so 1, so 2, Ta1, Ta2, Chi1, Chi2, Tu1 to Tu3, Te1 to Te3, To1, To2 0 ~ 10,20 ~ 28,30 ~ 7,7 ~ 7,0 ~ 9,0 ~ 0,7, lacquer 0, handling 0, ku0 ~ ku3,10 ~ 10 114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 90, 100 Alternatively, the configuration limited to any one of the above items 15 to 15 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines CA1 and CA2, the gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, CC1 to CC3, CD1 to CD6, CE1 to CE3, CF1 to CF5, CG1 to CG3 CH1 to CH3, CI1 to CI4, CJ1 to CJ5, CK1 to CK5, CL1 to CL5, CM1 to CM6, CN1 to CN5, CO1, CP1 to CP5, CQ1 to CQ5, CR1 to CR5, CS1 to CS4, CT1, CT2 CU1, CU2, CV1 to CV9, CW1 to CW7, CX1 to CX6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, K1 to K 3, C1 to C3, C1 to C6, C1 to C5, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2 Ta1, Ta2, Chi1, Chi2, Tu1 to Tu3, Te1 to Te3, To1, To2 0 ~ 10,20 ~ 28,30 ~ 7,7 ~ 7,0 ~ 9,0 ~ 0,7, lacquer 0, handling 0, ku0 ~ ku3,10 ~ 10 114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 90, 100 Alternatively, the configuration limited to any one of the above items 15 to 15 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines K1 to K3, the gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, CC1 to CC3, CD1 to CD6, CE1 to CE3, CF1 to CF5, CG1 to CG3 CH1 to CH3, CI1 to CI4, CJ1 to CJ5, CK1 to CK5, CL1 to CL5, CM1 to CM6, CN1 to CN5, CO1, CP1 to CP5, CQ1 to CQ5, CR1 to CR5, CS1 to CS4, CT1, CT2 CU1, CU2, CV1 to CV9, CW1 to CW7, CX1 to CX6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, Ca1, Ka 2, 1, 2, 3, 1, 1, 2, 3, 1, 1, 2, 3, 1, T1, T2, C1, T2, T1 to T3, T1 to T3, T1, T2 0 ~ 10,20 ~ 28,30 ~ 7,7 ~ 7,0 ~ 9,0 ~ 0,7, lacquer 0, handling 0, ku0 ~ ku3,10 ~ 10 114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 90, 100 Alternatively, the configuration limited to any one of the above items 15 to 15 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, CC1 to CC3, CD1 to CD6, CE1 to CE3, CF1 to CF5, CG1 to CG3 CH1 to CH3, CI1 to CI4, CJ1 to CJ5, CK1 to CK5, CL1 to CL5, CM1 to CM6, CN1 to CN5, CO1, CP1 to CP5, CQ1 to CQ5, CR1 to CR5, CS1 to CS4, CT1, CT2 CU1, CU2, CV1 to CV9, CW1 to CW7, CX1 to CX6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, Ca1, Ka 2, K1-K3, C1-K6, K1-K5, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2 T1, T2, C1, T2, T1 to T3, T1 to T3, T1, T2 0 ~ 10,20 ~ 28,30 ~ 7,7 ~ 7,0 ~ 9,0 ~ 0,7, lacquer 0, handling 0, ku0 ~ ku3,10 ~ 10 114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 90, 100 Alternatively, the configuration limited to any one of the above items 15 to 15 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines 1 to 6, the gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, CC1 to CC3, CD1 to CD6, CE1 to CE3, CF1 to CF5, CG1 to CG3 CH1 to CH3, CI1 to CI4, CJ1 to CJ5, CK1 to CK5, CL1 to CL5, CM1 to CM6, CN1 to CN5, CO1, CP1 to CP5, CQ1 to CQ5, CR1 to CR5, CS1 to CS4, CT1, CT2 CU1, CU2, CV1 to CV9, CW1 to CW7, CX1 to CX6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, Ca1, Ka 2, K1-K3, C1-K3, K1-K5, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2 Ta1, Ta2, Chi1, Chi2, Tu1 to Tu3, Te1 to Te3, To1, To2 0 ~ 10,20 ~ 28,30 ~ 7,7 ~ 7,0 ~ 9,0 ~ 0,7, lacquer 0, handling 0, ku0 ~ ku3,10 ~ 10 114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 90, 100 Alternatively, the configuration limited to any one of the above items 15 to 15 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines CO1 to CO5, the gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, CC1 to CC3, CD1 to CD6, CE1 to CE3, CF1 to CF5, CG1 to CG3 CH1 to CH3, CI1 to CI4, CJ1 to CJ5, CK1 to CK5, CL1 to CL5, CM1 to CM6, CN1 to CN5, CO1, CP1 to CP5, CQ1 to CQ5, CR1 to CR5, CS1 to CS4, CT1, CT2 CU1, CU2, CV1 to CV9, CW1 to CW7, CX1 to CX6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, Ca1, Ka 2, K1-K3, C1-K3, K1-K6, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, SE2, SO1, SO2 Ta1, Ta2, Chi1, Chi2, Tu1 to Tu3, Te1 to Te3, To1, To2 0 ~ 10,20 ~ 28,30 ~ 7,7 ~ 7,0 ~ 9,0 ~ 0,7, lacquer 0, handling 0, ku0 ~ ku3,10 ~ 10 114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 90, 100 Alternatively, the configuration limited to any one of the above items 15 to 15 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines SA1 and SA2, the gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, CC1 to CC3, CD1 to CD6, CE1 to CE3, CF1 to CF5, CG1 to CG3 CH1 to CH3, CI1 to CI4, CJ1 to CJ5, CK1 to CK5, CL1 to CL5, CM1 to CM6, CN1 to CN5, CO1, CP1 to CP5, CQ1 to CQ5, CR1 to CR5, CS1 to CS4, CT1, CT2 CU1, CU2, CV1 to CV9, CW1 to CW7, CX1 to CX6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, Ca1, Ka 2, K1 to K3, C1 to C3, C1 to C6, C1 to C5, C1, C2, S1, S2, C1, C2, S1, S2 Ta1, Ta2, Chi1, Chi2, Tu1 to Tu3, Te1 to Te3, To1, To2 0 ~ 10,20 ~ 28,30 ~ 7,7 ~ 7,0 ~ 9,0 ~ 0,7, lacquer 0, handling 0, ku0 ~ ku3,10 ~ 10 114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 90, 100 Alternatively, the configuration limited to any one of the above items 15 to 15 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines S1 and S2, the gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, CC1 to CC3, CD1 to CD6, CE1 to CE3, CF1 to CF5, CG1 to CG3, CH1 to CH3, CI1 to CI4, CJ1 to CJ5, CK1 to CK5, CL1 to CL5, CM1 to CM6, CN1 to CN5, CO1, CP1 to CP5, CQ1 to CQ5, CR1 to CR5, CS1 to CS4, CT1, CT2 CU1, CU2, CV1 to CV9, CW1 to CW7, CX1 to CX6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, Ca1, Ka 2, K1-K3, K1-K3, K1-K6, K1-K5, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2 T1, T2, C1, T2, T1 to T3, T1 to T3, T1, T2 0 ~ 10,20 ~ 28,30 ~ 7,7 ~ 7,0 ~ 9,0 ~ 0,7, lacquer 0, handling 0, ku0 ~ ku3,10 ~ 10 114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 90, 100 Alternatively, the configuration limited to any one of the above items 15 to 15 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for one of the configurations of the gaming machines S1 and S2, the gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, CC1 to CC3, CD1 to CD6, CE1 to CE3, CF1 to CF5, CG1 to CG3, CH1 to CH3, CI1 to CI4, CJ1 to CJ5, CK1 to CK5, CL1 to CL5, CM1 to CM6, CN1 to CN5, CO1, CP1 to CP5, CQ1 to CQ5, CR1 to CR5, CS1 to CS4, CT1, CT2 CU1, CU2, CV1 to CV9, CW1 to CW7, CX1 to CX6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, Ca1, Ka 2, KI1 to KI3, KU1 to KU3, KE1 to KE6, KO1 to KO5, SA1, SA2, SI1, SI2, SE1, SE2, SO1, SO2 T1, T2, C1, T2, T1 to T3, T1 to T3, T1, T2 0 ~ 10,20 ~ 28,30 ~ 7,7 ~ 7,0 ~ 9,0 ~ 0,7, lacquer 0, handling 0, ku0 ~ ku3,10 ~ 10 114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 90, 100 Alternatively, the configuration limited to any one of the above items 15 to 15 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines C1 and C2, the gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, CC1 to CC3, CD1 to CD6, CE1 to CE3, CF1 to CF5, CG1 to CG3 CH1 to CH3, CI1 to CI4, CJ1 to CJ5, CK1 to CK5, CL1 to CL5, CM1 to CM6, CN1 to CN5, CO1, CP1 to CP5, CQ1 to CQ5, CR1 to CR5, CS1 to CS4, CT1, CT2 CU1, CU2, CV1 to CV9, CW1 to CW7, CX1 to CX6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, Ca1, Ka 2, K1-K3, K1-K3, K1-K6, K1-K5, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2 Ta1, Ta2, Chi1, Chi2, Tu1 to Tu3, Te1 to Te3, To1, To2 0 ~ 10,20 ~ 28,30 ~ 7,7 ~ 7,0 ~ 9,0 ~ 0,7, lacquer 0, handling 0, ku0 ~ ku3,10 ~ 10 114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 90, 100 Alternatively, the configuration limited to any one of the above items 15 to 15 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines SO1 and SO2, the gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, CC1 to CC3, CD1 to CD6, CE1 to CE3, CF1 to CF5, CG1 to CG3 CH1 to CH3, CI1 to CI4, CJ1 to CJ5, CK1 to CK5, CL1 to CL5, CM1 to CM6, CN1 to CN5, CO1, CP1 to CP5, CQ1 to CQ5, CR1 to CR5, CS1 to CS4, CT1, CT2 CU1, CU2, CV1 to CV9, CW1 to CW7, CX1 to CX6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, Ca1, Ka 2, K1 to K3, C1 to C3, C1 to C6, C1 to C5, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2 T1, T2, C1, T2, T1 to T3, T1 to T3, T1, T2 0 ~ 10,20 ~ 28,30 ~ 7,7 ~ 7,0 ~ 9,0 ~ 0,7, lacquer 0, handling 0, ku0 ~ ku3,10 ~ 10 114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 90, 100 Alternatively, the configuration limited to any one of the above items 15 to 15 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for one of the configurations of the gaming machines TA1 and TA2, the gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, CC1 to CC3, CD1 to CD6, CE1 to CE3, CF1 to CF5, CG1 to CG3 CH1 to CH3, CI1 to CI4, CJ1 to CJ5, CK1 to CK5, CL1 to CL5, CM1 to CM6, CN1 to CN5, CO1, CP1 to CP5, CQ1 to CQ5, CR1 to CR5, CS1 to CS4, CT1, CT2 CU1, CU2, CV1 to CV9, CW1 to CW7, CX1 to CX6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, Ca1, Ka 2, K1 to K3, C1 to C3, C1 to C6, C1 to C5, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2 So 1, So 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Tu 1-Tu 3, Te 1-Te 3, To 1, To 2, 0 ~ 10,20 ~ 28,30 ~ 7,7 ~ 7,0 ~ 9,0 ~ 0,7, lacquer 0, handling 0, ku0 ~ ku3,10 ~ 10 114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 90, 100 Alternatively, the configuration limited to any one of the above items 15 to 15 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines C1 and C2, the gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, CC1 to CC3, CD1 to CD6, CE1 to CE3, CF1 to CF5, CG1 to CG3 CH1 to CH3, CI1 to CI4, CJ1 to CJ5, CK1 to CK5, CL1 to CL5, CM1 to CM6, CN1 to CN5, CO1, CP1 to CP5, CQ1 to CQ5, CR1 to CR5, CS1 to CS4, CT1, CT2 CU1, CU2, CV1 to CV9, CW1 to CW7, CX1 to CX6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, Ca1, Ka 2, K1 to K3, C1 to C3, C1 to C6, C1 to C5, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2 S1, S2, T1, T2, T1 to T3, T1 to T3, T1, T2 0 ~ 10,20 ~ 28,30 ~ 7,7 ~ 7,0 ~ 9,0 ~ 0,7, lacquer 0, handling 0, ku0 ~ ku3,10 ~ 10 114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 90, 100 Alternatively, the configuration limited to any one of the above items 15 to 15 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any one of the gaming machines T1 to T3, the gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, CC1 to CC3, CD1 to CD6, CE1 to CE3, CF1 to CF5, CG1 to CG3 CH1 to CH3, CI1 to CI4, CJ1 to CJ5, CK1 to CK5, CL1 to CL5, CM1 to CM6, CN1 to CN5, CO1, CP1 to CP5, CQ1 to CQ5, CR1 to CR5, CS1 to CS4, CT1, CT2 CU1, CU2, CV1 to CV9, CW1 to CW7, CX1 to CX6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, Ca1, Ka 2, K1 to K3, C1 to C3, C1 to C6, C1 to C5, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2 S1, S2, T1, T2, T1, T2, T1 to T3, T1, T2 0 ~ 10,20 ~ 28,30 ~ 7,7 ~ 7,0 ~ 9,0 ~ 0,7, lacquer 0, handling 0, ku0 ~ ku3,10 ~ 10 114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 90, 100 Alternatively, the configuration limited to any one of the above items 15 to 15 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any configuration of the gaming machines TE1 to TE3, the gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, CC1 to CC3, CD1 to CD6, CE1 to CE3, CF1 to CF5, CG1 to CG3 CH1 to CH3, CI1 to CI4, CJ1 to CJ5, CK1 to CK5, CL1 to CL5, CM1 to CM6, CN1 to CN5, CO1, CP1 to CP5, CQ1 to CQ5, CR1 to CR5, CS1 to CS4, CT1, CT2 CU1, CU2, CV1 to CV9, CW1 to CW7, CX1 to CX6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, Ca1, Ka 2, K1 to K3, C1 to C3, C1 to C6, C1 to C5, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2 S1, S2, T1, T2, C1, C2, T1, T2, T1, T2, T2 0 ~ 10,20 ~ 28,30 ~ 7,7 ~ 7,0 ~ 9,0 ~ 0,7, lacquer 0, handling 0, ku0 ~ ku3,10 ~ 10 114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 90, 100 Alternatively, the configuration limited to any one of the above items 15 to 15 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines G1 and G2, the gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, CC1 to CC3, CD1 to CD6, CE1 to CE3, CF1 to CF5, CG1 to CG3 CH1 to CH3, CI1 to CI4, CJ1 to CJ5, CK1 to CK5, CL1 to CL5, CM1 to CM6, CN1 to CN5, CO1, CP1 to CP5, CQ1 to CQ5, CR1 to CR5, CS1 to CS4, CT1, CT2 CU1, CU2, CV1 to CV9, CW1 to CW7, CX1 to CX6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, Ca1, Ka 2, K1 to K3, C1 to C3, C1 to C6, C1 to C5, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2 So 1, So 2, Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Tu 1-Tu 3, Te 1-Te 3, 0 ~ 10,20 ~ 28,30 ~ 7,7 ~ 7,0 ~ 9,0 ~ 0,7, lacquer 0, handling 0, ku0 ~ ku3,10 ~ 10 114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 90, 100 Alternatively, the configuration limited to any one of the above items 15 to 15 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines 100 to 110, the gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, CC1 to CC3, CD1 to CD6, CE1 to CE3, CF1 to CF5, CG1 to CG3, CH1 to CH3, CI1 to CI4, CJ1 to CJ5, CK1 to CK5, CL1 to CL5, CM1 to CM6, CN1 to CN5, CO1, CP1 to CP5, CQ1 to CQ5, CR1 to CR5, CS1 to CS4, CT1, CT2 CU1, CU2, CV1 to CV9, CW1 to CW7, CX1 to CX6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, Ca1, Ka 2, K1 to K3, C1 to C3, C1 to C6, C1 to C5, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2 S1, S2, T1, T2, T1, T2, T1 to T3, T1 to T3 To1, To2, 2,0 ~ 2,8 ~ 0 ~ 7,7 ~ 0 ~ 7,7 ~ 0 ~ 9,9 ~ 0 ~ 7, Lushi 0, Handling 0, Ku0 ~ Ku3,10 ~ 114, 20 ~ 215, 30 ~ 314, 40 ~ 414, 50 ~ 512, 60 ~ 615, 70 ~ 713, 80 ~ 814, 90,10 A configuration limited to any one of 0 to 15 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines 20 to 28, the gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, CC1 to CC3, CD1 to CD6, CE1 to CE3, CF1 to CF5, CG1 to CG3 CH1 to CH3, CI1 to CI4, CJ1 to CJ5, CK1 to CK5, CL1 to CL5, CM1 to CM6, CN1 to CN5, CO1, CP1 to CP5, CQ1 to CQ5, CR1 to CR5, CS1 to CS4, CT1, CT2 CU1, CU2, CV1 to CV9, CW1 to CW7, CX1 to CX6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, Ca1, Ka 2, K1 to K3, C1 to C3, C1 to C6, C1 to C5, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2 So 1, So 2, Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Tu 1-Tu 3, Te 1-Te 3, 1, to 2, 1 to 1 10, 10, 0 to 7, 7 to 0, 7, 0 to 9, 9 to 0, 7, lacquer 0, handling 0, to 0 to 3, 3, 10 to 10 114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 90, 100 Alternatively, the configuration limited to any one of the above items 15 to 15 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines 0 to 7, the gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, CC1 to CC3, CD1 to CD6, CE1 to CE3, CF1 to CF5, CG1 to CG3 CH1 to CH3, CI1 to CI4, CJ1 to CJ5, CK1 to CK5, CL1 to CL5, CM1 to CM6, CN1 to CN5, CO1, CP1 to CP5, CQ1 to CQ5, CR1 to CR5, CS1 to CS4, CT1, CT2 CU1, CU2, CV1 to CV9, CW1 to CW7, CX1 to CX6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, Ca1, Ka 2, K1 to K3, C1 to C3, C1 to C6, C1 to C5, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2 S1, S2, T1, T2, T1, T2, T1 to T3, T1 to T3, 1, to 2, 10 to 10, 10, 20 to 28, 0 to 7, 7, 0 to 9, land 0 to 7, lacquer 0, handling 0, ku 0 to ku 3, 10 to 10 114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 90, 100 A configuration limited to any one of the above-described ten to fifteen may be applied.

  In addition, with respect to any of the above-described gaming machines SHI0 to SHI7, the gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, CC1 to CC3, CD1 to CD6, CE1 to CE3, CF1 to CF5, CG1 to CG3 CH1 to CH3, CI1 to CI4, CJ1 to CJ5, CK1 to CK5, CL1 to CL5, CM1 to CM6, CN1 to CN5, CO1, CP1 to CP5, CQ1 to CQ5, CR1 to CR5, CS1 to CS4, CT1, CT2 CU1, CU2, CV1 to CV9, CW1 to CW7, CX1 to CX6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, Ca1, Ka 2, K1 to K3, C1 to C3, C1 to C6, C1 to C5, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2 So 1, So 2, Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Tu 1-Tu 3, Te 1-Te 3, 1, to 2, 1 to 1, 10, 2 to 2, 8, 0 to 7, 7, 0 to 9, land 0 to 7, lacquer 0, handling 0, ku 0 to ku 3, 10 to 10 114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 90, 100 A configuration limited to any one of the above-described ten to fifteen may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines 5 to 9, the gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, CC1 to CC3, CD1 to CD6, CE1 to CE3, CF1 to CF5, CG1 to CG3 CH1 to CH3, CI1 to CI4, CJ1 to CJ5, CK1 to CK5, CL1 to CL5, CM1 to CM6, CN1 to CN5, CO1, CP1 to CP5, CQ1 to CQ5, CR1 to CR5, CS1 to CS4, CT1, CT2 CU1, CU2, CV1 to CV9, CW1 to CW7, CX1 to CX6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, Ca1, Ka 2, K1 to K3, C1 to C3, C1 to C6, C1 to C5, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2 So 1, So 2, Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Tu 1-Tu 3, Te 1-Te 3, 1, to 2, 1 to 1, 10, 2 to 2, 8, 0 to 7, 7, 0 to 7, land 0 to 7, lacquer 0, handling 0, ku 0 to ku 3, 10 to 10 114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 90, 100 A configuration limited to any one of the above-described ten to fifteen may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines land 0 to land 7, the gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, CC1 to CC3, CD1 to CD6, CE1 to CE3, CF1 to CF5, CG1 to CG3 CH1 to CH3, CI1 to CI4, CJ1 to CJ5, CK1 to CK5, CL1 to CL5, CM1 to CM6, CN1 to CN5, CO1, CP1 to CP5, CQ1 to CQ5, CR1 to CR5, CS1 to CS4, CT1, CT2 CU1, CU2, CV1 to CV9, CW1 to CW7, CX1 to CX6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, Ca1, Ka 2, K1 to K3, C1 to C3, C1 to C6, C1 to C5, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2 S1, S2, T1, T2, T1, T2, T1 to T3, T1 to T3, 1, to 2, 1 to 1, 10, 2 to 2, 8, 0 to 7, 7, 0 to 7, 7, 0 to 9, lacquer 0, handling 0, 0 to 3, 3, 10 to 10 114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 90, 100 A configuration limited to any one of the above-described ten to fifteen may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any configuration of the gaming machine lacquer 0, the gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, CC1 to CC3, CD1 to CD6, CE1 to CE3, CF1 to CF5, CG1 to CG3, and CH1 to CH3 , CI1 to CI4, CJ1 to CJ5, CK1 to CK5, CL1 to CL5, CM1 to CM6, CN1 to CN5, CO1, CP1 to CP5, CQ1 to CQ5, CR1 to CR5, CS1 to CS4, CT1, CT2, CU1, CU2 , CV1 to CV9, CW1 to CW7, CX1 to CX6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, D1 to D3, O1, O2, C1, C2, C 1, 2, 3, 1, 1, 2, 3, 1, 2, 1, 2, S2, Ta1, Ta2, Chi1, Chi2, Tu1 to Tu3, Te1 to Te3, To1, 2,1 ~ 0,10 ~ 2,2 ~ 2,8,0 ~ 7,7 ~ 0,7 ~ 0 ~ 9,9 ~ 0 ~ 9, Land 0 ~ L7, handling 0, Ku0 ~ Ku3,10 ~ 10 114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 90, 100 Alternatively, the configuration limited to any one of the above items 15 to 15 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machine handling 0, the gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, CC1 to CC3, CD1 to CD6, CE1 to CE3, CF1 to CF5, CG1 to CG3, CH1 to CH3 , CI1 to CI4, CJ1 to CJ5, CK1 to CK5, CL1 to CL5, CM1 to CM6, CN1 to CN5, CO1, CP1 to CP5, CQ1 to CQ5, CR1 to CR5, CS1 to CS4, CT1, CT2, CU1, CU2 , CV1 to CV9, CW1 to CW7, CX1 to CX6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, D1 to D3, O1, O2, C1, C2, C 1, 2, 3, 1, 1, 2, 3, 1, 2, 1, 2, S2, Ta1, Ta2, Chi1, Chi2, Tu1 to Tu3, Te1 to Te3, To1, 2,10 ~ 10,2 ~ 2,8,0 ~ 7,7 ~ 0,7 ~ 0,9 ~ 9, Land0 ~ L7, Lacquer0, Ku0 ~ Ku3,10 ~ 10 114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 90, 100 Alternatively, the configuration limited to any one of the above items 15 to 15 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any one of the gaming machines Ku0 to Ku3, the gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, CC1 to CC3, CD1 to CD6, CE1 to CE3, CF1 to CF5, CG1 to CG3 CH1 to CH3, CI1 to CI4, CJ1 to CJ5, CK1 to CK5, CL1 to CL5, CM1 to CM6, CN1 to CN5, CO1, CP1 to CP5, CQ1 to CQ5, CR1 to CR5, CS1 to CS4, CT1, CT2 CU1, CU2, CV1 to CV9, CW1 to CW7, CX1 to CX6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, Ca1, Ka 2, K1 to K3, C1 to C3, C1 to C6, C1 to C5, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2 S1, S2, T1, T2, T1, T2, T1 to T3, T1 to T3, 1, to 2, 1 to 1, 10, 2 to 2, 8, 0 to 7, 7, 0 to 7, 0 to 9, land 0 to 7, lacquer 0, handling 0, 10 to 10 114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 90, 100 Alternatively, the configuration limited to any one of the above items 15 to 15 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines 10 to 114, the gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, CC1 to CC3, CD1 to CD6, CE1 to CE3, CF1 to CF5, CG1 to CG3 CH1 to CH3, CI1 to CI4, CJ1 to CJ5, CK1 to CK5, CL1 to CL5, CM1 to CM6, CN1 to CN5, CO1, CP1 to CP5, CQ1 to CQ5, CR1 to CR5, CS1 to CS4, CT1, CT2 CU1, CU2, CV1 to CV9, CW1 to CW7, CX1 to CX6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, Ca1, Ka 2, K1 to K3, C1 to C3, C1 to C6, C1 to C5, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2 S1, S2, T1, T2, T1, T2, T1 to T3, T1 to T3 To1, To2, 10 to 10, 10, 20 to 2, 8, 0 to 7, 7, 0 to 7, 0 to 9, land 0 to 7, lacquer 0, handling 0, ku 0 -Ku3, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 90, 10 A configuration limited to any one of 0 to 15 may be applied.

  In addition, with respect to any of the configurations of the gaming machines 20 to 215, the gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, CC1 to CC3, CD1 to CD6, CE1 to CE3, CF1 to CF5, CG1 to CG3 CH1 to CH3, CI1 to CI4, CJ1 to CJ5, CK1 to CK5, CL1 to CL5, CM1 to CM6, CN1 to CN5, CO1, CP1 to CP5, CQ1 to CQ5, CR1 to CR5, CS1 to CS4, CT1, CT2 CU1, CU2, CV1 to CV9, CW1 to CW7, CX1 to CX6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, Ca1, Ka 2, K1 to K3, C1 to C3, C1 to C6, C1 to C5, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2 S1, S2, T1, T2, T1, T2, T1 to T3, T1 to T3 To1, To2, 10 to 10, 10, 20 to 2, 8, 0 to 7, 7, 0 to 7, 0 to 9, land 0 to 7, lacquer 0, handling 0, ku 0 -Ku3, 10-114, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 90,10 A configuration limited to any one of 0 to 15 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines 30 to 314, the gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, CC1 to CC3, CD1 to CD6, CE1 to CE3, CF1 to CF5, CG1 to CG3, CH1 to CH3, CI1 to CI4, CJ1 to CJ5, CK1 to CK5, CL1 to CL5, CM1 to CM6, CN1 to CN5, CO1, CP1 to CP5, CQ1 to CQ5, CR1 to CR5, CS1 to CS4, CT1, CT2 CU1, CU2, CV1 to CV9, CW1 to CW7, CX1 to CX6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, Ca1, Ka 2, K1 to K3, C1 to C3, C1 to C6, C1 to C5, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2 S1, S2, T1, T2, T1, T2, T1 to T3, T1 to T3 To1, To2, 10 to 10, 10, 20 to 2, 8, 0 to 7, 7, 0 to 7, 0 to 9, land 0 to 7, lacquer 0, handling 0, ku 0 -Ku3, 10-114, 20-215, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 90,10 A configuration limited to any one of 0 to 15 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines 40 to 414, the gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, CC1 to CC3, CD1 to CD6, CE1 to CE3, CF1 to CF5, CG1 to CG3 CH1 to CH3, CI1 to CI4, CJ1 to CJ5, CK1 to CK5, CL1 to CL5, CM1 to CM6, CN1 to CN5, CO1, CP1 to CP5, CQ1 to CQ5, CR1 to CR5, CS1 to CS4, CT1, CT2 CU1, CU2, CV1 to CV9, CW1 to CW7, CX1 to CX6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, Ca1, Ka 2, K1 to K3, C1 to C3, C1 to C6, C1 to C5, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2 S1, S2, T1, T2, T1, T2, T1 to T3, T1 to T3 To1, To2, 10 to 10, 10, 20 to 2, 8, 0 to 7, 7, 0 to 7, 0 to 9, land 0 to 7, lacquer 0, handling 0, ku 0 -Ku3, 10-114, 20-215, 30-314, 50-512, 600-615, 70-713, 80-814, 90,10 A configuration limited to any one of 0 to 15 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any configuration of the gaming machines 50 to 512, the gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, CC1 to CC3, CD1 to CD6, CE1 to CE3, CF1 to CF5, CG1 to CG3 CH1 to CH3, CI1 to CI4, CJ1 to CJ5, CK1 to CK5, CL1 to CL5, CM1 to CM6, CN1 to CN5, CO1, CP1 to CP5, CQ1 to CQ5, CR1 to CR5, CS1 to CS4, CT1, CT2 CU1, CU2, CV1 to CV9, CW1 to CW7, CX1 to CX6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, Ca1, Ka 2, K1 to K3, C1 to C3, C1 to C6, C1 to C5, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2 S1, S2, T1, T2, T1, T2, T1 to T3, T1 to T3 To1, To2, 10 to 10, 10, 20 to 2, 8, 0 to 7, 7, 0 to 7, 0 to 9, land 0 to 7, lacquer 0, handling 0, ku 0 -3,10-114,20-215,30-314,40-414,60-615,700-713,800-814,90,10 A configuration limited to any one of 0 to 15 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines 60 to 615, the gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, CC1 to CC3, CD1 to CD6, CE1 to CE3, CF1 to CF5, CG1 to CG3, CH1 to CH3, CI1 to CI4, CJ1 to CJ5, CK1 to CK5, CL1 to CL5, CM1 to CM6, CN1 to CN5, CO1, CP1 to CP5, CQ1 to CQ5, CR1 to CR5, CS1 to CS4, CT1, CT2 CU1, CU2, CV1 to CV9, CW1 to CW7, CX1 to CX6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, Ca1, Ka 2, K1 to K3, C1 to C3, C1 to C6, C1 to C5, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2 S1, S2, T1, T2, T1, T2, T1 to T3, T1 to T3 To1, To2, 10 to 10, 10, 20 to 2, 8, 0 to 7, 7, 0 to 7, 0 to 9, land 0 to 7, lacquer 0, handling 0, ku 0 -Ku3,10-114,20-215,30-314,40-414,50-512,700-713,800-814,90,10 A configuration limited to any one of 0 to 15 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines 70 to 713, the gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, CC1 to CC3, CD1 to CD6, CE1 to CE3, CF1 to CF5, CG1 to CG3 CH1 to CH3, CI1 to CI4, CJ1 to CJ5, CK1 to CK5, CL1 to CL5, CM1 to CM6, CN1 to CN5, CO1, CP1 to CP5, CQ1 to CQ5, CR1 to CR5, CS1 to CS4, CT1, CT2 CU1, CU2, CV1 to CV9, CW1 to CW7, CX1 to CX6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, Ca1, Ka 2, K1 to K3, C1 to C3, C1 to C6, C1 to C5, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2 S1, S2, T1, T2, T1, T2, T1 to T3, T1 to T3 To1, To2, 10 to 10, 10, 20 to 8, 8, 0 to 7, 7, 0 to 7, 0 to 9, land 0 to 7, lacquer 0, handling 0, ku 0 ~ Ku3,10 ~ 114,20 ~ 215,30 ~ 314,40 ~ 414,50 ~ 512,600 ~ 615,80 ~ 814,90,10 A configuration limited to any one of 0 to 15 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines 80 to 814, the gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, CC1 to CC3, CD1 to CD6, CE1 to CE3, CF1 to CF5, CG1 to CG3 CH1 to CH3, CI1 to CI4, CJ1 to CJ5, CK1 to CK5, CL1 to CL5, CM1 to CM6, CN1 to CN5, CO1, CP1 to CP5, CQ1 to CQ5, CR1 to CR5, CS1 to CS4, CT1, CT2 CU1, CU2, CV1 to CV9, CW1 to CW7, CX1 to CX6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, Ca1, Ka 2, K1 to K3, C1 to C3, C1 to C6, C1 to C5, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2 S1, S2, T1, T2, T1, T2, T1 to T3, T1 to T3 To1, To2, 10 to 10, 10, 20 to 8, 8, 0 to 7, 7, 0 to 7, 0 to 9, land 0 to 7, lacquer 0, handling 0, ku 0 -3,10-114,20-215,30-314,40-414,50-512,60-615,70-713,90,10 A configuration limited to any one of 0 to 15 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machine 90, the gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, CC1 to CC3, CD1 to CD6, CE1 to CE3, CF1 to CF5, CG1 to CG3, and CH1 to CH3 , CI1 to CI4, CJ1 to CJ5, CK1 to CK5, CL1 to CL5, CM1 to CM6, CN1 to CN5, CO1, CP1 to CP5, CQ1 to CQ5, CR1 to CR5, CS1 to CS4, CT1, CT2, CU1, CU2 , CV1 to CV9, CW1 to CW7, CX1 to CX6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, D1 to D3, O1, O2, C1, C2, C 1, 2, 3, 1, 1, 2, 3, 1, 2, 1, 2, S2, Ta1, Ta2, Chi1, Chi2, Tu1 to Tu3, Te1 to Te3, To1, 2,1 ~ 0,1 ~ 2,2 ~ 2,8,0 ~ 7,7 ~ 0,7 ~ 0,9 ~ 9, L0 ~ L7, lacquer 0, handling 0, Ku0 ~ Ku3, 10-114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 60-615, 70-713, 80-814, 100 A configuration limited to any one of the above-described ten to fifteen may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines 100 to 1015, the gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, CC1 to CC3, CD1 to CD6, CE1 to CE3, CF1 to CF5, CG1 to CG3 CH1 to CH3, CI1 to CI4, CJ1 to CJ5, CK1 to CK5, CL1 to CL5, CM1 to CM6, CN1 to CN5, CO1, CP1 to CP5, CQ1 to CQ5, CR1 to CR5, CS1 to CS4, CT1, CT2 CU1, CU2, CV1 to CV9, CW1 to CW7, CX1 to CX6, A1 to A9, I1 to I7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, Ca1, Ka 2, K1 to K3, C1 to C3, C1 to C6, C1 to C5, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2, S1, S2 S1, S2, T1, T2, T1, T2, T1 to T3, T1 to T3 To1, To2, 10 to 10, 10, 20 to 8, 8, 0 to 7, 7, 0 to 7, 0 to 9, land 0 to 7, lacquer 0, handling 0, ku 0 -Ku3, 10-114, 20-215, 30-314, 40-414, 50-512, 600-615, 70-713, 80-80 The configuration limited by any one of 14, 90 may be applied.

  In these cases, further effects due to the application of each configuration can be obtained.

  Gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, CC1 to CC3, CD1 to CD6, CE1 to CE3, CF1 to CF5, CG1 to CG3, CH1 to CH3, CI1 to CI4, CJ1 to CJ5, CK1 to CK5, CL1 to CL5, CM1 to CM6, CN1 to CN5, CO1, CP1 to CP5, CQ1 to CQ5, CR1 to CR5, CS1 to CS4, CT1, CT2, CU1, CU2, CV1 to CV9, CW1 to CW7, CX1 to CX6, A1 to A1 9, I1 to I7, C1 to C5, D1 to D3, O1, O2, C1, C2, C1 to C3, C1 to C3, C1 to C6, Co1 to co5, sa1, sa2, si1, si2, su1, su2, se1, se2, so1, so2, ta1, ta2, chi1, chi2, tsu1 Karatsu 3 and Te 1 3, to 1, to 2, 1 to 1 10, 2 to 2, 8, 0 to 7, 7 to 0, 7 to 0, 5 to 9, 9, 0 to 7, 7, lacquer, 0 Ku0 to ku3, 10 to 114, 20 to 215, 30 to 314, 40 to 414, 50 to 512, 60 to 615, 70 to 715, 80 Any one of the game machines CY1 to 814, 90, and 100 to 1015, wherein the game machine is a slot machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information is provided, which is used to operate a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. And a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the determined identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins and medals are typical examples of the game medium.

  Gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, CC1 to CC3, CD1 to CD6, CE1 to CE3, CF1 to CF5, CG1 to CG3, CH1 to CH3, CI1 to CI4, CJ1 to CJ5, CK1 to CK5, CL1 to CL5, CM1 to CM6, CN1 to CN5, CO1, CP1 to CP5, CQ1 to CQ5, CR1 to CR5, CS1 to CS4, CT1, CT2, CU1, CU2, CV1 to CV9, CW1 to CW7, CX1 to CX6, A1 to A1 9, I1 to I7, C1 to C5, D1 to D3, O1, O2, C1, C2, C1 to C3, C1 to C3, C1 to C6, Co1 to co5, sa1, sa2, si1, si2, su1, su2, se1, se2, so1, so2, ta1, ta2, chi1, chi2, tsu1 Karatsu 3 and Te 1 3, to 1, to 2, 1 to 1 10, 2 to 2, 8, 0 to 7, 7 to 0, 7 to 0, 5 to 9, 9, 0 to 7, 7, lacquer, 0 Ku0 to ku3, 10 to 114, 20 to 215, 30 to 314, 40 to 414, 50 to 512, 60 to 615, 70 to 715, 80 Any one of the game machine CY2 to the game machine CY2, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine, an operation handle is provided, and a ball is fired to a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is provided at an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. A requirement for winning (or passing through the operating port) is that identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (large winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined mode to enable the ball to win, and a value corresponding to the winning number is obtained. A value (including not only a prize ball but also data written on a magnetic card) is given.

  Gaming machines CA1 to CA9, CB1 to CB6, CC1 to CC3, CD1 to CD6, CE1 to CE3, CF1 to CF5, CG1 to CG3, CH1 to CH3, CI1 to CI4, CJ1 to CJ5, CK1 to CK5, CL1 to CL5, CM1 to CM6, CN1 to CN5, CO1, CP1 to CP5, CQ1 to CQ5, CR1 to CR5, CS1 to CS4, CT1, CT2, CU1, CU2, CV1 to CV9, CW1 to CW7, CX1 to CX6, A1 to A1 9, I1 to I7, C1 to C5, D1 to D3, O1, O2, C1, C2, C1 to C3, C1 to C3, C1 to C6, Co1 to co5, sa1, sa2, si1, si2, su1, su2, se1, se2, so1, so2, ta1, ta2, chi1, chi2, tsu1 Karatsu 3 and Te 1 3, to 1, to 2, 1 to 1 10, 2 to 2, 8, 0 to 7, 7 to 0, 7 to 0, 5 to 9, 9, 0 to 7, 7, lacquer, 0 Ku0 to ku3, 10 to 114, 20 to 215, 30 to 314, 40 to 414, 50 to 512, 60 to 615, 70 to 715, 80 To 814, 90, and 100 to 15, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: "variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string comprising a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, The game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display of the game, and many balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.

<Characteristic DA group>
Features DA1. Setting means (a function of executing a setting value updating process in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage;
History storage executing means (a function of executing a history setting process in the management-side CPU 112) for storing history information of a game corresponding to the predetermined event in the history storage means (history memory 117) when a predetermined event occurs by execution of the game )When,
An information erasing unit (35) for erasing at least a part of the history information stored in the history storage unit, with at least one condition that the setting of the setting value to be used by the setting unit is performed. In the embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S1809 in the management CPU 112, in the thirty-seventh embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S2109 in the management CPU 112, and in the thirty-eighth embodiment, the processing of steps S2306 to S2308 in the management CPU 112. (In the 40th embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S2608 in the management-side CPU 112).

  According to the feature DA1, since a setting value to be used is set from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage, the player can use a more advantageous setting value. That you expect. When a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to the event is stored in the history storage unit. As a result, information for managing the number of times or frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be stored and held in the gaming machine, and the management of the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event is preferable by using the managed information. Can be performed. Further, since the history information is stored in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the history information and unauthorized modification.

  In this case, at least a part of the history information stored in the history storage unit is erased under at least one condition that the setting of the set value to be used is newly performed. This makes it possible to adjust the contents of the history storage means so that the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event in the situation after the new setting of the setting value to be used can be appropriately managed. .

Feature DA2. Ball entry means (first operation port 33, second operation port 34) into which game balls flowing down the game area can enter;
An information acquisition unit (a function of executing the process of step S401 in the main CPU 63) for acquiring special information based on a game ball having entered the ball entry unit;
An addition determining unit (a function of executing the processes of steps S503 and S504 in the main CPU 63) for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to the additional information;
Privilege granting means (step in the main CPU 63) for granting a privilege (opening / closing execution mode) to the player based on the result of the provision that the special information corresponds to the provision information in the provision determination. S409 to a function of executing the processing of step S412).
The gaming machine according to Feature DA1, wherein the probability of the provision of the provision result in the provision determination varies according to the set value.

  According to the feature DA2, in a so-called pachinko machine, it is possible to change the probability of the provision result in accordance with the set value. In this case, the provision of the above-described feature DA1 enables the history storage unit to appropriately manage the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event in the situation after the probability of the provision result has been changed. The content can be adjusted.

  Features DA3. The information erasing unit may erase all of the history information stored in the history storage unit on at least one condition that the setting of the setting value to be used by the setting unit is performed. The gaming machine according to feature DA1 or DA2.

  According to the feature DA3, all the history information stored in the history storage unit is deleted when the setting of the setting value to be used is newly performed, so that the setting of the setting value to be used is set. Can specify the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event based on the newly performed timing.

  Feature DA4. The information erasing unit, as at least one condition that the setting of the setting value to be used by the setting unit has been performed, erases part of the history information stored in the history storage unit, The gaming machine according to Feature DA1 or DA2, wherein a part of the history information stored in the history storage unit is left.

  According to the feature DA4, when setting of a set value to be used is newly performed, history information unnecessary for management of the frequency of occurrence of the subsequent predetermined event is deleted, and management of the frequency of occurrence of the subsequent predetermined event is performed. Necessary history information can be left. This makes it possible to appropriately manage the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event after the setting of the setting value to be used is newly performed.

Feature DA5. The history information stored in the history storage means includes first history information (history indicating that the open / close execution mode has occurred, in which the occurrence probability of the predetermined event corresponding to the history information varies according to the set value. Information) and second history information (history information indicating that a game ball has been ejected from the game area DPDA) that does not change according to the set value,
The information erasing unit erases the first history information stored in the history storage unit as at least one condition that the setting of the setting value to be used by the setting unit is performed, The gaming machine according to Feature DA4, wherein the second history information stored in history storage means is left.

  According to the feature DA5, when a setting value to be used is newly set, the first history information corresponding to a predetermined event whose occurrence probability varies according to the setting value is deleted, and the occurrence probability is changed to the setting value. The second history information corresponding to the predetermined event that does not fluctuate according to is not deleted. Accordingly, when the first history information before the setting of the setting value to be used is newly performed is taken over after the setting of the setting value is newly performed, occurrence of a predetermined event corresponding to the first history information is generated. The first history information that is not preferable in specifying the frequency can be deleted when the setting of the set value is newly performed. On the other hand, the second history information is referred to when specifying the frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event corresponding to the second history information by not deleting the second history information even if a setting value to be used is newly set. Since it is possible to secure a large number of pieces of the second history information, it is possible to accurately specify the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event corresponding to the second history information.

Feature DA6. Ball entry means (first operation port 33, second operation port 34) into which game balls flowing down the game area can enter;
An information acquisition unit (a function of executing the process of step S401 in the main CPU 63) for acquiring special information based on a game ball having entered the ball entry unit;
An addition determining unit (a function of executing the processes of steps S503 and S504 in the main CPU 63) for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to the additional information;
Privilege granting means (step in the main CPU 63) for granting a privilege (opening / closing execution mode) to the player based on the result of the provision that the special information corresponds to the provision information in the provision determination. S409 to a function of executing the processing of step S412).
It is a configuration in which the probability of the assignment corresponding result in the assignment determination varies according to the set value,
The first history information includes information corresponding to the award of the privilege,
The gaming machine according to Feature DA5, wherein the second history information includes information corresponding to ejection of a game ball from the game area in a predetermined manner.

  According to the feature DA6, the privilege provision probability varies according to the set value. Therefore, the first history information is deleted when the set value to be used is newly set. Thus, it is possible to specify the frequency of granting the privilege under the situation of the newly set setting value. On the other hand, the frequency at which game balls are ejected from the game area does not fluctuate in accordance with the set value, so that the second history information is not deleted even if a set value to be used is newly set, It is possible to accurately specify the frequency at which game balls are discharged from the game area in a predetermined manner.

  Features DA7. The information erasing unit is configured to set at least the set value to be used by the setting unit, and to store at least a predetermined amount of the history information in the history storage unit when the history information is stored in the history storage unit. The gaming machine according to any one of features DA1 to DA6, wherein a part of the gaming machine is deleted.

  According to the feature DA7, when a predetermined amount of history information is not stored in the history storage unit in a predetermined amount or more, the history information is not deleted even if a new setting of a setting value to be used is performed. As a result, even if a new setting of the set value is repeated in a situation where the game is not performed, it is possible to prevent the deletion of the history information in the history storage unit from being repeated.

  Feature DA8. At least one condition that the setting of the setting value to be used by the setting unit has been performed is used as a condition to respond to a game result in a predetermined period by using the history information stored in the history storage unit. Information deriving means for deriving aspect information to be performed (the function of executing the processing of step S1807 in the management CPU 112 in the thirty-fifth embodiment, and the function of executing the processing of step S2107 in the management CPU 112 in the thirty-seventh embodiment). The gaming machine according to any one of features DA1 to DA7.

  According to the feature DA8, the configuration of the feature DA1 is provided, and at least a part of the history information stored in the history storage unit is set on the condition that a new setting of a setting value to be used is performed at least as one condition. In the configuration to be deleted, a mode corresponding to a result of a game in a predetermined period using history information stored in the history storage unit when a new setting of a setting value to be used is performed as an opportunity Information is derived. As a result, even if at least a part of the history information is deleted when the set value is changed, the management result of the game history such as the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event in the situation before the set value is changed can be grasped. It is possible to do.

  Features DA9. The gaming machine according to feature DA8, further comprising aspect information storage means (separate storage memory 171) for storing the aspect information derived by the information derivation means.

  According to the feature DA9, the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage unit when the setting value to be used is newly set as an opportunity Is derived, the aspect information is stored in the aspect information storage means. Thereby, even if the set value is changed, it is possible to grasp the management result of the game history in a situation before the set value is changed at an arbitrary timing thereafter.

  Features DA10. The gaming machine according to Feature DA9, wherein the aspect information storage means is capable of storing a plurality of the aspect information.

  According to the feature DA10, since a plurality of aspect information can be stored in the aspect information storage means, the management result of the game history in a plurality of periods is grasped based on the timing at which a new setting value is set. It is possible to do. Further, even if a new setting of the setting value is repeated in a situation where the game is not performed, the aspect information derived using the history information of the situation where the game is substantially played is stored in the aspect information storage unit. It is possible to increase the possibility that the information remains.

Features DA11. The aspect information storage means can store a predetermined number of the aspect information,
This gaming machine executes a special process when the setting value of the setting value to be used by the setting means is generated more than the predetermined number under a predetermined condition (in the thirty-fifth embodiment, the management CPU 112 The gaming machine according to Feature DA9 or DA10, further comprising a function of executing a change monitoring process, in the thirty-sixth embodiment, a function of executing a repetitive change monitoring process in the main CPU 63.

  According to the feature DA11, the setting value is set in a situation where the game is not performed so that the aspect information derived using the history information of the situation where the game is substantially played does not remain in the aspect information storage means. If the new setting is repeated, special processing is executed for it. Thereby, it is possible to cope with the act.

  Features DA12. The gaming machine according to any one of features DA8 to DA11, wherein the information deriving unit derives the aspect information when a predetermined amount or more of the history information is stored in the history storage unit. .

  According to the feature DA12, the mode information is derived when the predetermined history information is stored in the history storage unit in a predetermined amount or more, so that it is possible to prevent the mode information from being wastefully derived. .

  Features DA13. The information erasing unit erases the history information from when the setting value to be used by the setting unit is set to when the predetermined history information is stored in the history storage unit in a predetermined amount or more. Without setting the set value to be used by the setting unit, and before setting the set value when the predetermined history information is stored in the history storage unit in a predetermined amount or more after the setting value is set. The gaming machine according to any one of features DA1 to DA12, wherein the history information stored in the history storage unit is deleted.

  According to the feature DA13, until a specific amount of predetermined history information is newly stored in the history storage unit, even if a new setting of a setting value to be used is performed, the storage is performed before the setting is performed. The history information that has been deleted is not deleted. Thereby, even if a new setting of the set value is performed, it is possible to specify the management result of the game history in a predetermined period.

Features DA14. The history storage unit includes a first history storage unit (first history memory 191) and a second history storage unit (second history memory 192),
The history storage execution means,
When the predetermined event occurs during a predetermined period from when the setting value to be used by the setting unit is set to when the release condition is satisfied, the history information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the first history storage unit. Means for storing in both of the second history storage means (the function of executing the processing of step S2604 in the management-side CPU 112);
Means for storing the history information corresponding to the first history storage means and the second history storage means which are set as storage targets when the predetermined event occurs during a period other than the predetermined period. (A function of executing the process of step S2603 in the management-side CPU 112).
The information erasing unit, when the release condition is satisfied, erases the history information stored on the side of the first history storage unit and the second history storage unit which has been set as the storage object up to then. The gaming machine according to any one of features DA1 to DA13, wherein

  According to the feature DA14, until a specific amount of history information is newly stored in the history storage unit, even if a new setting of a setting value to be used is performed, the setting value is stored before the setting is performed. History information is not deleted. Thereby, even if a new setting of the set value is performed, it is possible to specify the management result of the game history in a predetermined period. In addition, it is possible to produce the effect only by appropriately changing the history storage unit for storing the history information between the first history storage unit and the second history storage unit.

  Features DA15. Using the history information stored on the side of the first history storage unit and the second history storage unit that is set as the storage target, derive mode information corresponding to a game result in a predetermined period using the history information The gaming machine according to feature DA14, further comprising an information deriving unit (a function of executing the process of step S2703 in the management-side CPU 112).

  According to the feature DA15, even when the history information is stored in both the first history storage unit and the second history storage unit by performing the new setting of the setting value, the mode using the history information is used. Information can be appropriately derived.

  Note that, with respect to the configuration of the features DA1 to DA15, the features DA1 to DA15, the features DB1 to DB7, the features DC1 to DC5, the features DD1 to DD10, the features DE1 to DE6, the features DF1 to DF3, the features DG1 to DG18, and the features DH1 to DH1. DH7, features DI1 to DI9, features DJ1 to DJ4, features DK1 to DK7, features DL1 to DL20, features DM1 to DM7, features DN1 to DN6, features DO1 to DO11, features DP1 to DP12, features DQ1 to DQ5, features DR1 to DR1. DR17, features DS1 to DS8, features DT1 to DT13, features DU1 to DU8, features DV1 to DV6, features DW1 to DW11, features DX1 to DX11, features DY1 to DY11, features DZ1 to DZ10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b1 b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e , Features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 15, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7. , Features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9. , Features z1 to z6, features αDA1 to αDA10, features αDB1 to αDB6, features αDC1 to αDC13, features αDD1 to αDD9, features αDE1 to αDE5, features αDF1 to αDF9, features αDG1 to αDG10, features αDH1 to αDH11, and features αDI1 to αDI8. , Feature αDJ1 to αDJ14, feature αDK1 to αDK8, feature αDL1 to αDL11, feature αDM1 to αDM8, feature αDN1 αDN6, features αDO1 to αDO7, features αDP1 to αDP7, features αDQ1 to αDQ9, features αDR1 to αDR8, features αDS1 to αDS3, features αDT1 to αDT4, features αDU1 to αDU10, features αDV1 to αDV5, features αDW1 to αDW9, and features αDX1. Any one or a plurality of configurations among αDX4, features αDY1 to αDY11, features αDZ1 to αDZ4, and features αa1 to αa3 may be applied. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

<Feature DB group>
Feature DB1. Setting means (a function of executing a setting value updating process in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage;
History storage executing means (a function of executing a history setting process in the management-side CPU 112) for storing history information of a game corresponding to the predetermined event in the history storage means (history memory 117) when a predetermined event occurs by execution of the game ) And
Before the setting of the setting value to be used by the setting means is performed, the predetermined history information stored in the history storage means is set to the setting value to be used by the setting means. A gaming machine characterized by being stored in the history storage means even after the game is completed.

  According to the feature DB1, since a setting value to be used is set from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage, the player can use a more advantageous setting value. That you expect. When a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to the event is stored in the history storage unit. As a result, information for managing the number of times or frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be stored and held in the gaming machine, and the management of the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event is preferable by using the managed information. Can be performed. Further, since the history information is stored in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the history information and unauthorized modification.

  In this case, even if the setting value to be used is newly set, the history information stored in the history storage unit is stored and not erased. As a result, even if the setting value to be used is set, the history information up to that time can be continuously stored in the history storage unit, and accumulated in the history storage unit over a long period of time. It is possible to specify the management result of the game history using the history information obtained.

  Feature DB2. The history storage executing means, when the setting value of the set value to be used by the setting means is set, stores the history information corresponding to the setting value in the history storing means. The gaming machine according to feature DB1, wherein the gaming machine has a function of executing the processing of step S1307 in the management-side CPU 112 in the embodiment, and a function of executing the processing of step S2408 in the management-side CPU 112 in the thirty-ninth embodiment.

  According to the feature DB2, the setting of the setting value to be used is newly performed in a configuration in which the history information is stored and held without being deleted even if the setting value to be used is newly set. History information corresponding to this is stored in the history storage means. This makes it possible to distinguish between the history information before the setting of the setting value to be used is newly performed and the history information after the setting is performed.

  Feature DB3. The setting execution storage means stores the information corresponding to the set value in the history storage means as the history information when the setting value of the setting object to be used is set by the setting means. The gaming machine described in the feature DB2.

  According to the feature DB 3, it is possible to specify the contents of the setting values set in the past by referring to the history information.

  Feature DB4. The history storage means includes a plurality of correspondence history storage means (history memories 181 to 186 for settings 1 to 6) corresponding to a plurality of types of set values which can be set by the setting means. The gaming machine according to any one of features DB1 to DB3.

  According to the feature DB 4, the correspondence history storage means is provided corresponding to each of the set values, so that the history information can be stored separately for each set value.

  Feature DB5. When the setting value to be used by the setting unit is set by the setting unit, the corresponding history storage unit corresponding to the set value to which the setting is performed is set as a storage target of the history information thereafter (management side The gaming machine according to feature DB4, further comprising a function of executing the process of step S2406 in the CPU 112).

  According to the feature DB5, when a setting value to be used is newly set, the corresponding history storage unit corresponding to the setting value is set as a storage target of subsequent history information. It is possible to store the history information separately.

  Feature DB6. An information deriving unit that derives mode information corresponding to a result of a game in a predetermined period by using the history information stored in the corresponding history storage unit to be stored (display output processing in the management CPU 112) The gaming machine according to the feature DB5, characterized in that the gaming machine includes:

  According to the feature DB 6, in the configuration in which the history information is stored separately for each set value, it is possible to derive the mode information corresponding to the currently set set value.

Feature DB7. Ball entry means (first operation port 33, second operation port 34) into which game balls flowing down the game area can enter;
An information acquisition unit (a function of executing the process of step S401 in the main CPU 63) for acquiring special information based on a game ball having entered the ball entry unit;
An addition determining unit (a function of executing the processes of steps S503 and S504 in the main CPU 63) for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to the additional information;
Privilege granting means (step in the main CPU 63) for granting a privilege (opening / closing execution mode) to the player based on the result of the provision that the special information corresponds to the provision information in the provision determination. S409 to a function of executing the processing of step S412).
The gaming machine according to any one of features DB1 to DB6, wherein a probability of the provision of the provision result in the provision determination varies according to the setting value.

  According to the feature DB 7, it is possible to vary the probability of the result of the provision of the response corresponding to the set value in a so-called pachinko machine.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features DB1 to DB7, the features DA1 to DA15, the features DB1 to DB7, the features DC1 to DC5, the features DD1 to DD10, the features DE1 to DE6, the features DF1 to DF3, the features DG1 to DG18, and the features DH1 to DH1. DH7, features DI1 to DI9, features DJ1 to DJ4, features DK1 to DK7, features DL1 to DL20, features DM1 to DM7, features DN1 to DN6, features DO1 to DO11, features DP1 to DP12, features DQ1 to DQ5, features DR1 to DR1. DR17, features DS1 to DS8, features DT1 to DT13, features DU1 to DU8, features DV1 to DV6, features DW1 to DW11, features DX1 to DX11, features DY1 to DY11, features DZ1 to DZ10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b1 b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9 Features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 15, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, Features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, Features z1 to z6, features αDA1 to αDA10, features αDB1 to αDB6, features αDC1 to αDC13, features αDD1 to αDD9, features αDE1 to αDE5, features αDF1 to αDF9, features αDG1 to αDG10, features αDH1 to αDH11, features αDI1 to αDI8, Features αDJ1 to αDJ14, Features αDK1 to αDK8, Features αDL1 to αDL11, Features αDM1 to αDM8, Features αDN1 to α DN6, features αDO1 to αDO7, features αDP1 to αDP7, features αDQ1 to αDQ9, features αDR1 to αDR8, features αDS1 to αDS3, features αDT1 to αDT4, features αDU1 to αDU10, features αDV1 to αDV5, features αDW1 to αDW9, and features αDX1. Any one or a plurality of configurations among αDX4, features αDY1 to αDY11, features αDZ1 to αDZ4, and features αa1 to αa3 may be applied. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

<Characteristic DC group>
Feature DC1. Setting means (a function of executing a setting value updating process in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage;
History storage executing means (a function of executing a history setting process in the management-side CPU 112) for storing history information of a game corresponding to the predetermined event in the history storage means (history memory 117) when a predetermined event occurs by execution of the game )When,
After setting the setting value to be used by the setting unit, and after the predetermined amount of the history information is stored in the history storage unit at least until a specific amount or more is set, the history information is not deleted. (A function of executing the processes of steps S2506 and S2605 to S2609 in the management CPU 112).

  According to the feature DC1, since the setting value to be used is set from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. That you expect. When a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to the event is stored in the history storage unit. As a result, information for managing the number of times or frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be stored and held in the gaming machine, and the management of the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event is preferable by using the managed information. Can be performed. Further, since the history information is stored in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the history information and unauthorized modification.

  In this case, until a specific amount of predetermined history information is newly stored in the history storage unit, even if a new setting of a setting value to be used is performed, the setting value is stored before the setting is performed. History information is not deleted. Thereby, even if a new setting of the set value is performed, it is possible to specify the management result of the game history in a predetermined period.

  Feature DC2. The post-setting correspondence unit is configured to set the set value when a predetermined amount of the history information is stored in the history storage unit after the setting of the set value to be used by the setting unit is performed in a predetermined amount or more. The gaming machine according to Feature DC1, wherein the history information stored in the history storage unit is erased before the execution is performed.

  According to the feature DC2, when a specific amount of history information that enables the management result of the game history to be specified for a predetermined period after the new setting of the setting value is stored in the history storage unit, Deletes the history information stored in the history storage unit before the new setting of the setting value is performed. This makes it possible to prevent unnecessary history information from being continuously stored in the history storage unit.

Feature DC3. The history storage unit includes a first history storage unit (first history memory 191) and a second history storage unit (second history memory 192),
The history storage execution means,
When the predetermined event has occurred, means for storing the history information corresponding to the one of the first history storage means and the second history storage means which is set as a storage object (step S2603 in the management CPU 112). Function to execute the process), and
After the setting of the setting value to be used by the setting unit is performed, the predetermined history information is stored on the side of the first history storage unit and the second history storage unit that is not set as the storage target. Means for storing the history information corresponding to the occurrence of the predetermined event in both the first history storage means and the second history storage means until the specified amount of information is stored until the specified amount is stored. A function of executing the process of step S2604 in).
The post-setting response means includes:
After the setting of the setting value to be used by the setting unit is performed, the predetermined history information is stored on a side of the first history storage unit and the second history storage unit that is not set as the storage target. Means for changing the storage object between the first history storage means and the second history storage means when the predetermined amount or more is stored (a function of executing the process of step S2607 in the management-side CPU 112);
After the setting of the set value to be used by the setting unit is performed, the predetermined history information is set on the side of the first history storage unit and the second history storage unit that is not set as the storage target. When the specified amount or more is stored, the history information on the side of the first history storage unit and the second history storage unit that has been set as the storage object up to that point (step S2608 in the management-side CPU 112). The function of executing the processing described in (1) and (2) above.

  According to the feature DC3, until a specific amount of history information is newly stored in the history storage means, even if a new setting of a setting value to be used is performed, the setting value is stored before the setting is performed. History information is not deleted. Thereby, even if a new setting of the set value is performed, it is possible to specify the management result of the game history in a predetermined period. In addition, it is possible to produce the effect only by appropriately changing the history storage unit for storing the history information between the first history storage unit and the second history storage unit.

  Feature DC4. Using the history information stored on the side of the first history storage unit and the second history storage unit that is set as the storage target, derive mode information corresponding to a game result in a predetermined period using the history information The gaming machine according to Feature DC3, further comprising an information deriving unit (a function of executing the process of Step S2703 in the management-side CPU 112).

  According to the feature DC4, even when the history information is stored in both the first history storage unit and the second history storage unit by performing the new setting of the setting value, the mode using the history information is used. Information can be appropriately derived.

Feature DC5. Ball entry means (first operation port 33, second operation port 34) into which game balls flowing down the game area can enter;
An information acquisition unit (a function of executing the process of step S401 in the main CPU 63) for acquiring special information based on a game ball having entered the ball entry unit;
An addition determining unit (a function of executing the processes of steps S503 and S504 in the main CPU 63) for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to the additional information;
Privilege granting means (step in the main CPU 63) for granting a privilege (opening / closing execution mode) to the player based on the result of the provision that the special information corresponds to the provision information in the provision determination. S409 to a function of executing the processing of step S412).
The gaming machine according to any one of features DC1 to DC4, wherein a probability of the provision of the provision result in the provision determination varies according to the setting value.

  According to the feature DC5, in a so-called pachinko machine, it is possible to change the probability of the result of the provision of the response in accordance with the set value.

  In addition, for the configuration of the features DC1 to DC5, the features DA1 to DA15, the features DB1 to DB7, the features DC1 to DC5, the features DD1 to DD10, the features DE1 to DE6, the features DF1 to DF3, the features DG1 to DG18, and the features DH1 to DH1. DH7, features DI1 to DI9, features DJ1 to DJ4, features DK1 to DK7, features DL1 to DL20, features DM1 to DM7, features DN1 to DN6, features DO1 to DO11, features DP1 to DP12, features DQ1 to DQ5, features DR1 to DR1. DR17, features DS1 to DS8, features DT1 to DT13, features DU1 to DU8, features DV1 to DV6, features DW1 to DW11, features DX1 to DX11, features DY1 to DY11, features DZ1 to DZ10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b1 b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9 Features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 15, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, Features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, Features z1 to z6, features αDA1 to αDA10, features αDB1 to αDB6, features αDC1 to αDC13, features αDD1 to αDD9, features αDE1 to αDE5, features αDF1 to αDF9, features αDG1 to αDG10, features αDH1 to αDH11, features αDI1 to αDI8, Features αDJ1 to αDJ14, Features αDK1 to αDK8, Features αDL1 to αDL11, Features αDM1 to αDM8, Features αDN1 to α DN6, features αDO1 to αDO7, features αDP1 to αDP7, features αDQ1 to αDQ9, features αDR1 to αDR8, features αDS1 to αDS3, features αDT1 to αDT4, features αDU1 to αDU10, features αDV1 to αDV5, features αDW1 to αDW9, and features αDX1. Any one or a plurality of configurations among αDX4, features αDY1 to αDY11, features αDZ1 to αDZ4, and features αa1 to αa3 may be applied. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

<Characteristic DD group>
Features DD1. Setting means (a function of executing a setting value updating process in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage;
Special execution means for executing a special process on the condition that the setting of the setting value to be used by the setting means has been executed in a special situation as at least one condition (in the thirty-fifth embodiment, a process of monitoring repetitive changes by the management CPU 112) 36. In the thirty-sixth embodiment, a function of executing a repetitive change monitoring process in the main CPU 63, and in the thirty-seventh embodiment, a function of making a negative determination in step S2106 in the management-side CPU 112). A gaming machine characterized by the following.

  According to the feature DD1, since the setting value to be used is set from the setting values in a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. That you expect. In this case, the special processing is executed on the condition that the new setting of the setting value to be used is executed in the special situation at least as one condition. This makes it possible to cope with a case where a new setting value is set in an unfavorable situation.

  Feature DD2. The special processing unit executes the special processing under at least one condition that the setting of the setting value to be used by the setting unit has been performed a specified number of times or more in the special situation. A gaming machine according to claim 1.

  According to the feature DD2, even if a new setting of a setting value to be used in a special situation is executed, the special processing is not executed if the number of times of execution is less than a specific number. This makes it possible to prevent the special process from being executed until the regular operator has executed a new setting of the set value less than the specified number of times in the special situation.

  Feature DD3. The special execution means may include, as the special situation, a situation in which a game has not been performed since the setting of the setting value to be used by the setting means is performed or a setting of the setting value to be used by the setting means. Performing the special processing on at least one condition that the setting of the setting value to be used by the setting unit has been performed in a situation in which a game equal to or more than a predetermined reference has not been performed since the game was performed. The gaming machine according to feature DD1 or DD2.

  According to the feature DD3, when a new setting of a set value to be used is performed in a situation where a game is not performed or a situation where a game is not substantially performed, a special process is performed. When the act is performed, it is possible to deal with it.

  Feature DD4. The gaming machine according to any one of features DD1 to DD3, wherein the special execution means executes a notification process as the special process.

  According to the feature DD4, the notification process is executed on the condition that a new setting of a setting value to be used has been executed in a special situation, as at least one condition. This makes it possible to prompt the user to deal with a case where a new setting value is set in an unfavorable situation.

Feature DD5. History storage executing means (a function of executing a history setting process in the management-side CPU 112) for storing history information of a game corresponding to the predetermined event in the history storage means (history memory 117) when a predetermined event occurs by execution of the game )When,
At least one condition that the setting of the setting value to be used by the setting unit has been performed is used as a condition for using the history information stored in the history storage unit to correspond to a game result in a predetermined period. Information deriving means (in the thirty-fifth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S1807 in the management CPU 112, and in the thirty-seventh embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S2107 in the management CPU 112). The gaming machine according to any one of features DD1 to DD4.

  According to the feature DD5, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to the event occurs is stored in the history storage unit. As a result, information for managing the number of times or frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be stored and held in the gaming machine, and the management of the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event is preferable by using the managed information. Can be performed. Further, since the history information is stored in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the history information and unauthorized modification.

  In this case, when the new setting of the setting value to be used is performed, using the history information stored in the history storage unit, the mode information corresponding to the game result in the predetermined period is used. Derived. Thereby, it is possible to grasp the management result of the game history such as the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event in the situation before the setting value is changed.

  Feature DD6. Deriving the aspect information by the information deriving means as the special processing, as at least one condition that the setting of the setting value to be used by the setting means has been executed in the special situation; The gaming machine according to feature DD5, wherein the game is not performed.

  According to the feature DD6, even when a new setting of a setting value to be used is performed, if the setting is performed in an unfavorable situation, the mode information is not derived. This makes it possible to prevent the mode information from being unnecessarily derived.

  Feature DD7. The gaming machine according to feature DD5 or DD6, further comprising aspect information storage means (separate storage memory 171) for storing the aspect information derived by the information derivation means.

  According to the characteristic DD7, the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period is utilized by using the history information stored in the history storage unit when the setting value to be used is newly set. Is derived, the aspect information is stored in the aspect information storage means. Thereby, even if the set value is changed, it is possible to grasp the management result of the game history in a situation before the set value is changed at an arbitrary timing thereafter.

  Feature DD8. The gaming machine according to Feature DD7, wherein the aspect information storage means is capable of storing a plurality of the aspect information.

  According to the feature DD8, since a plurality of aspect information can be stored in the aspect information storage means, the management result of the game history in a plurality of periods is grasped based on the timing at which the new setting value is set. It is possible to do. Further, even if a new setting of the setting value is repeated in a situation where the game is not performed, the aspect information derived using the history information of the situation where the game is substantially played is stored in the aspect information storage unit. It is possible to increase the possibility that the information remains.

Feature DD9. The aspect information storage means can store a predetermined number of the aspect information,
The special execution unit executes the special process when the setting of the setting value to be used by the setting unit occurs more than the predetermined number in the special situation. Or the gaming machine according to DD8.

  According to the feature DD9, in order to prevent the mode information derived using the history information of the status in which the game is being played substantially from remaining in the mode information storage means, the set value is set in a situation in which the game is not played. If the new setting is repeated, special processing is executed for it. Thereby, it is possible to cope with the act.

Feature DD10. Ball entry means (first operation port 33, second operation port 34) into which game balls flowing down the game area can enter;
An information acquisition unit (a function of executing the process of step S401 in the main CPU 63) for acquiring special information based on a game ball having entered the ball entry unit;
An addition determining unit (a function of executing the processes of steps S503 and S504 in the main CPU 63) for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to the additional information;
Privilege granting means (step in the main CPU 63) for granting a privilege (opening / closing execution mode) to the player based on the result of the provision that the special information corresponds to the provision information in the provision determination. S409 to a function of executing the processing of step S412).
The gaming machine according to any one of features DD1 to DD9, wherein the probability of the provision of the provision result in the provision determination varies according to the set value.

  According to the feature DD10, in a so-called pachinko machine, it is possible to change the probability of the result of providing the correspondence in accordance with the set value.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features DD1 to DD10, the features DA1 to DA15, the features DB1 to DB7, the features DC1 to DC5, the features DD1 to DD10, the features DE1 to DE6, the features DF1 to DF3, the features DG1 to DG18, and the features DH1 to DH1. DH7, features DI1 to DI9, features DJ1 to DJ4, features DK1 to DK7, features DL1 to DL20, features DM1 to DM7, features DN1 to DN6, features DO1 to DO11, features DP1 to DP12, features DQ1 to DQ5, features DR1 to DR1. DR17, features DS1 to DS8, features DT1 to DT13, features DU1 to DU8, features DV1 to DV6, features DW1 to DW11, features DX1 to DX11, features DY1 to DY11, features DZ1 to DZ10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b1 b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e , Features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 15, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7. , Features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9. , Features z1 to z6, features αDA1 to αDA10, features αDB1 to αDB6, features αDC1 to αDC13, features αDD1 to αDD9, features αDE1 to αDE5, features αDF1 to αDF9, features αDG1 to αDG10, features αDH1 to αDH11, and features αDI1 to αDI8. , Feature αDJ1 to αDJ14, feature αDK1 to αDK8, feature αDL1 to αDL11, feature αDM1 to αDM8, feature αDN1 αDN6, features αDO1 to αDO7, features αDP1 to αDP7, features αDQ1 to αDQ9, features αDR1 to αDR8, features αDS1 to αDS3, features αDT1 to αDT4, features αDU1 to αDU10, features αDV1 to αDV5, features αDW1 to αDW9, and features αDX1. Any one or a plurality of configurations among αDX4, features αDY1 to αDY11, features αDZ1 to αDZ4, and features αa1 to αa3 may be applied. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

<Characteristic DE group>
Features DE1. Setting means (a function of executing a setting value updating process in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage;
History storage executing means (a function of executing a history setting process in the management-side CPU 112) for storing history information of a game corresponding to the predetermined event in the history storage means (history memory 117) when a predetermined event occurs by execution of the game )When,
At least one condition that the setting of the setting value to be used by the setting unit has been performed is used as a condition for using the history information stored in the history storage unit to correspond to a game result in a predetermined period. Information deriving means (in the thirty-fifth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S1807 in the management CPU 112, and in the thirty-seventh embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S2107 in the management CPU 112). A gaming machine characterized by the following.

  According to the feature DE1, since a setting value to be used is set from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage, the player can use a more advantageous setting value. That you expect. When a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to the event is stored in the history storage unit. As a result, information for managing the number of times or frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be stored and held in the gaming machine, and the management of the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event is preferable by using the managed information. Can be performed. Further, since the history information is stored in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the history information and unauthorized modification.

  In this case, when the new setting of the setting value to be used is performed, using the history information stored in the history storage unit, the mode information corresponding to the game result in the predetermined period is used. Derived. Thereby, it is possible to grasp the management result of the game history such as the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event in the situation before the setting value is changed.

  Feature DE2. The gaming machine according to Feature DE1, further comprising a mode information storage unit (separate storage memory 171) for storing the mode information derived by the information deriving unit.

  According to the feature DE2, the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period is utilized by using the history information stored in the history storage unit when the setting value to be used is newly set. Is derived, the aspect information is stored in the aspect information storage means. Thereby, even if the set value is changed, it is possible to grasp the management result of the game history in a situation before the set value is changed at an arbitrary timing thereafter.

  Feature DE3. The gaming machine according to Feature DE2, wherein the aspect information storage means is capable of storing a plurality of the aspect information.

  According to the feature DE3, it is possible to store a plurality of pieces of aspect information in the aspect information storage means, so that the management result of the game history in a plurality of periods is grasped based on the timing at which a new setting value is set. It is possible to do. Further, even if a new setting of the setting value is repeated in a situation where the game is not performed, the aspect information derived using the history information of the situation where the game is substantially played is stored in the aspect information storage unit. It is possible to increase the possibility that the information remains.

Feature DE4. The aspect information storage means can store a predetermined number of the aspect information,
This gaming machine executes a special process when the setting value of the setting value to be used by the setting means is generated more than the predetermined number under a predetermined condition (in the thirty-fifth embodiment, the management CPU 112 The gaming machine according to Feature DE2 or DE3, further comprising a function of executing a change monitoring process, in the thirty-sixth embodiment, a function of executing a repetitive change monitoring process in the main CPU 63).

  According to the feature DE4, the setting value is set in a situation where the game is not performed so that the aspect information derived using the history information of the situation where the game is substantially played is not left in the aspect information storage means. If the new setting is repeated, special processing is executed for it. Thereby, it is possible to cope with the act.

  Feature DE5. The gaming machine according to any one of features DE1 to DE4, wherein the information deriving unit derives the aspect information when a predetermined amount or more of the history information is stored in the history storage unit. .

  According to the feature DE5, the mode information is derived when the predetermined amount of the predetermined history information is stored in the history storage unit, so that it is possible to prevent the mode information from being unnecessarily derived. Become.

Feature DE6. Ball entry means (first operation port 33, second operation port 34) into which game balls flowing down the game area can enter;
An information acquisition unit (a function of executing the process of step S401 in the main CPU 63) for acquiring special information based on a game ball having entered the ball entry unit;
An addition determining unit (a function of executing the processes of steps S503 and S504 in the main CPU 63) for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to the additional information;
Privilege granting means (step in the main CPU 63) for granting a privilege (opening / closing execution mode) to the player based on the result of the provision that the special information corresponds to the provision information in the provision determination. S409 to a function of executing the processing of step S412).
The gaming machine according to any one of features DE1 to DE5, wherein the probability of the provision of the provision result in the provision determination varies according to the set value.

  According to the feature DE6, in a so-called pachinko machine, it is possible to change the probability of being the provision result in accordance with the set value.

  In addition, for the configuration of the features DE1 to DE6, the features DA1 to DA15, the features DB1 to DB7, the features DC1 to DC5, the features DD1 to DD10, the features DE1 to DE6, the features DF1 to DF3, the features DG1 to DG18, and the features DH1 to DH1. DH7, features DI1 to DI9, features DJ1 to DJ4, features DK1 to DK7, features DL1 to DL20, features DM1 to DM7, features DN1 to DN6, features DO1 to DO11, features DP1 to DP12, features DQ1 to DQ5, features DR1 to DR1. DR17, features DS1 to DS8, features DT1 to DT13, features DU1 to DU8, features DV1 to DV6, features DW1 to DW11, features DX1 to DX11, features DY1 to DY11, features DZ1 to DZ10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b1 b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9 Features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 15, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, Features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, Features z1 to z6, features αDA1 to αDA10, features αDB1 to αDB6, features αDC1 to αDC13, features αDD1 to αDD9, features αDE1 to αDE5, features αDF1 to αDF9, features αDG1 to αDG10, features αDH1 to αDH11, features αDI1 to αDI8, Features αDJ1 to αDJ14, Features αDK1 to αDK8, Features αDL1 to αDL11, Features αDM1 to αDM8, Features αDN1 to α DN6, features αDO1 to αDO7, features αDP1 to αDP7, features αDQ1 to αDQ9, features αDR1 to αDR8, features αDS1 to αDS3, features αDT1 to αDT4, features αDU1 to αDU10, features αDV1 to αDV5, features αDW1 to αDW9, and features αDX1. Any one or a plurality of configurations among αDX4, features αDY1 to αDY11, features αDZ1 to αDZ4, and features αa1 to αa3 may be applied. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

  According to the invention relating to the feature DA group, the feature DB group, the feature DC group, the feature DD group, and the feature DE group, the following problem can be solved.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, in a pachinko machine, a dish storage section for storing game balls given to a player is provided on the front of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to a game ball launching device, It is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage unit, for example. Further, in a pachinko machine, a configuration including an upper dish storage section and a lower dish storage section as a dish storage section is also known. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper dish storage section is a game ball launching device. And the surplus game balls in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  Further, in the slot machine, when a new game is started by operating the start lever while a medal is bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation of the reel is started by the rotation start control being executed by the control means, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means executes the rotation start control. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation stop of the reels corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in the gaming machines such as those described above, it is necessary to appropriately manage the gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Characteristic DF group>
Feature DF1. Ball entry means (first operation port 33, second operation port 34) into which game balls flowing down the game area can enter;
An information acquisition unit (a function of executing the process of step S401 in the main CPU 63) for acquiring special information based on a game ball having entered the ball entry unit;
An addition determining unit (a function of executing the processes of steps S503 and S504 in the main CPU 63) for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to the additional information;
Privilege granting means (step in the main CPU 63) for granting a privilege (opening / closing execution mode) to the player based on the result of the provision that the special information corresponds to the provision information in the provision determination. A function of executing the processing from S409 to step S412);
Setting means (a function of executing a setting value update process in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage,
The assignment determining unit has a high-probability mode and a low-probability mode so that the probability of the assignment correspondence result is relatively high and low, as the mode of the assignment determination.
A gaming machine, wherein the probability of the provision of the provision result in at least the low probability mode varies according to the set value.

  According to the feature DF1, it is possible to change the probability of being the provision result in at least the low probability mode according to the set value in a so-called pachinko machine. As a result, even in the case of a single gaming machine, it is possible to generate a situation in which the probability of the provision result in the low probability mode is advantageous or disadvantageous. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Feature DF2. The gaming machine according to Feature DF1, wherein the probability of the provision result in the high probability mode does not change in accordance with the set value.

  According to the feature DF2, the probability of the provision result in the low probability mode is varied according to the set value, while the probability of the provision result in the high probability mode is not varied according to the set value. By doing so, it is possible to limit the influence of the set value to the situation in the low probability mode.

Feature DF3. There are multiple types of the benefits,
The gaming machine according to the feature DF1 or DF2, wherein the selection mode of the privilege does not change according to the set value.

  According to the feature DF3, the probability of the provision result in the low probability mode is changed in accordance with the set value, while the selection mode of the privilege is not changed in accordance with the set value. Can be restricted to situations in the low probability mode.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features DF1 to DF3, the features DA1 to DA15, the features DB1 to DB7, the features DC1 to DC5, the features DD1 to DD10, the features DE1 to DE6, the features DF1 to DF3, the features DG1 to DG18, and the features DH1 to DH1. DH7, features DI1 to DI9, features DJ1 to DJ4, features DK1 to DK7, features DL1 to DL20, features DM1 to DM7, features DN1 to DN6, features DO1 to DO11, features DP1 to DP12, features DQ1 to DQ5, features DR1 to DR1. DR17, features DS1 to DS8, features DT1 to DT13, features DU1 to DU8, features DV1 to DV6, features DW1 to DW11, features DX1 to DX11, features DY1 to DY11, features DZ1 to DZ10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b1 b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9 Features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 15, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, Features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, Features z1 to z6, features αDA1 to αDA10, features αDB1 to αDB6, features αDC1 to αDC13, features αDD1 to αDD9, features αDE1 to αDE5, features αDF1 to αDF9, features αDG1 to αDG10, features αDH1 to αDH11, features αDI1 to αDI8, Features αDJ1 to αDJ14, Features αDK1 to αDK8, Features αDL1 to αDL11, Features αDM1 to αDM8, Features αDN1 to α DN6, features αDO1 to αDO7, features αDP1 to αDP7, features αDQ1 to αDQ9, features αDR1 to αDR8, features αDS1 to αDS3, features αDT1 to αDT4, features αDU1 to αDU10, features αDV1 to αDV5, features αDW1 to αDW9, and features αDX1. Any one or a plurality of configurations among αDX4, features αDY1 to αDY11, features αDZ1 to αDZ4, and features αa1 to αa3 may be applied. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

  According to the invention relating to the feature DF group, the following problem can be solved.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, in a pachinko machine, a dish storage section for storing game balls given to a player is provided on the front of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to a game ball launching device, It is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage unit, for example. Further, in a pachinko machine, a configuration including an upper dish storage section and a lower dish storage section as a dish storage section is also known. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper dish storage section is a game ball launching device. And the surplus game balls in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  Further, in the slot machine, when a new game is started by operating the start lever while a medal is bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation of the reel is started by the rotation start control being executed by the control means, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means executes the rotation start control. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation stop of the reels corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in the gaming machines as exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic DG group>
Feature DG1. History storage executing means (a function of executing a history setting process in the management-side CPU 112) for storing history information of a game corresponding to the predetermined event in the history storage means (history memory 117) when a predetermined event occurs by execution of the game )When,
An information deriving unit that derives mode information corresponding to a game result in a predetermined period by using the history information stored in the history storage unit (in the thirty-third embodiment, steps S1402 to S1412 in the management CPU 112 A function of executing processing, a function of executing the processing of step S1807 in the management-side CPU 112 in the thirty-fifth embodiment, and a function of executing the processing of step S2107 in the management-side CPU 112 in the thirty-seventh embodiment).
The information display means (in the 33rd to 42nd embodiments, the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, and the 43rd to 46th displays) so that a display corresponding to the aspect information derived by the information derivation means is performed. In the embodiment, a first information display control unit (a function of executing a display process in the management-side CPU 112) that controls display of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204);
Second information display control means for controlling the display of the information display means so that a display corresponding to different information different from the aspect information is performed (in the 33rd to 42nd embodiments, steps S202 and S208 in the main CPU 63 are performed). The function of executing the processing, in the forty-third embodiment, the function of executing steps S3101, S3103, and S3109 in the main CPU 63, and in the forty-fourth embodiment, the steps S3201, S3202, S3204, and S3210 of the main CPU 63. (In the forty-fifth embodiment, a function of executing an abnormality display process in the main CPU 63).

  According to the feature DG1, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to the event occurs is stored in the history storage unit. As a result, information for managing the number of times or frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be stored and held in the gaming machine, and the management of the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event is preferable by using the managed information. Can be performed. Further, since the history information is stored in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the history information and unauthorized modification. Further, mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period is derived using the history information stored in the history storage unit. Then, a display corresponding to the aspect information is performed by the information display means. Thereby, it is possible to grasp the management result of the game history such as the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event. Further, in the information display means, not only a display corresponding to the mode information but also a display corresponding to another information is performed. This makes it possible to effectively use the information display means.

  Feature DG2. The feature DG1 is characterized in that a period during which display corresponding to the aspect information is performed on the information display means and a period during which display corresponding to the different information is performed on the information display means are distinguished. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature DG2, by grasping the state of the display on the information display means, which of the display corresponding to the aspect information and the display corresponding to the different information is performed on the information display means is determined. Can be specified.

  Feature DG3. The second information display control means controls the display of the information display means so as to have a display mode different from a display mode in a case where a display corresponding to the mode information is performed, so that a display corresponding to the different information is displayed. The gaming machine according to feature DG1 or DG2, wherein the game is performed.

  According to the feature DG3, by grasping the display mode of the information display unit, it is possible to specify which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the different information is being performed on the information display unit. It becomes possible.

  Feature DG4. As the information display means, individual information display means each capable of performing a plurality of types of display (first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c in the 33rd to 42nd embodiments, 43rd to 46th execution The gaming machine according to any one of features DG1 to DG3, which includes a plurality of first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in the embodiment.

  According to the feature DG4, various types of mode information can be displayed by performing display corresponding to mode information using a plurality of individual information display units. Further, the presence of the plurality of individual information display means makes it possible to greatly differ the display mode between the case where the display corresponding to the mode information is performed and the case where the display corresponding to the different information is performed. .

  Feature DG5. The second information display control means, when a display corresponding to the separate information is performed, a predetermined individual which is not in a non-display state when a display corresponding to the aspect information is performed among a plurality of individual information display means. Information display means (the first notification display device 69a and the second notification display device 69b in the 33rd to 42nd embodiments, the first notification display device 201, the second notification display device in the 11th and 44th embodiments) 202, the third notification display device 203, and in the forty-fifth embodiment, the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202) are set to a non-display state. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature DG5, the display is not in the non-display state when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed. The display is in the non-display state when the predetermined individual information display unit performs the display corresponding to the different information. With this, it is possible to clearly specify which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the different information is being performed simply by grasping the type of the individual information display unit in the non-display state. Becomes possible.

Feature DG6. The second information display control means, when causing the display corresponding to the different information to be performed, a specific individual information display means (a second one of the plurality of individual information display means, which is in a display state when the aspect information is displayed). In the 33rd to 42nd embodiments, the third notification display device 69c, in the 11th and 44th embodiments, the fourth notification display device 204, and in the 45th embodiment, the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device. 204) in the display state,
The display content of the specific individual information display means when the display corresponding to the different information is performed may be displayed on the specific individual information display means when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed. The gaming machine according to feature DG5.

  According to the feature DG6, in the specific individual information display means, the display content that can be displayed when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed can also be displayed when the display corresponding to the different information is performed. It is possible not to restrict the display contents when the display corresponding to the information is performed. Even if the specific individual information display means has the same display content as described above, it does not enter the non-display state when the display having the configuration of the feature DG5 and the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed. When the predetermined individual information display means performs display corresponding to the different information, the display is in the non-display state, so that it is possible to specify which display is being performed by the plurality of individual information display means.

  Feature DG7. The gaming machine according to claim DG5 or DG6, wherein said first information display control means sets each of said plurality of individual information display means to a display state when a display corresponding to said aspect information is performed.

  According to the feature DG7, when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed, each of the plurality of individual information display units is in the display state, so that the predetermined individual information display unit corresponds to the different information in the non-display state. This can be clearly distinguished from the case where the display is performed.

  Feature DG8. The first information display control means sequentially changes the display of the aspect information on the information display means. Even when the display of the aspect information is changed, the predetermined individual information display means is in a non-display state. The gaming machine according to any one of features DG5 to DG7, characterized in that the gaming machine is not maintained at the same time.

  According to the feature DG8, when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed, the predetermined individual information display unit is not maintained in the non-display state. This makes it possible to specify which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the different information is being performed on the plurality of individual information display units, regardless of the timing at which the plurality of individual information display units are confirmed. Becomes possible.

  Feature DG9. The second information display control means includes one specific individual information display means of the plurality of individual information display means (in the 33rd to 42nd embodiments, the third notification display device 69c, the 11th, the 44th In the embodiment, the display corresponding to the different information is performed on the fourth notification display device 204), and the remaining individual information display means is set to the non-display state. Any one of the features DG5 to DG8 A gaming machine according to claim 1.

  According to the feature DG9, when the display corresponding to the different information is performed, only one individual information display unit is in the display state, so that it is easy to grasp whether the display corresponding to the different information is performed. Become.

Feature DG10. The plurality of individual information display means are arranged in a predetermined direction,
The gaming machine according to Feature DG9, wherein the specific individual information display means is present at an end of the plurality of individual information display means arranged in the predetermined direction in the predetermined direction.

  According to the feature DG10, since one individual information display means for displaying information corresponding to another information is located at an end in a predetermined direction, it is determined whether or not the display corresponding to other information is being performed. Easier to do.

Feature DG11. The first information display control means is an individual information display means of a type display target which is a part of the plurality of individual information display means (in the 33rd to 42nd embodiments, the first notification display device 69a, the 43rd In the forty-sixth embodiment, the display corresponding to the type of the aspect information to be displayed is performed on the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202). Individual information display means of the result display target that is a part (the second notification display device 69b and the third notification display device 69c in the 33rd to 42nd embodiments, and the third notification display device in the 43rd to 46th embodiments) Display corresponding to the content of the aspect information to be displayed on the device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204).
The gaming machine according to any one of the features DG5 to DG10, wherein the predetermined individual information display means corresponds to the individual information display means of the type display target.

  According to the feature DG11, when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed, the display corresponding to the type of the aspect information to be displayed is performed by the individual information display means of the type display target, and the individual information display of the result display target is performed. The display corresponding to the content of the mode information to be displayed is performed by the means. This makes it easier to grasp the aspect information to be displayed. In this case, when the display corresponding to the different information is performed, the individual information display unit of the type display target is in the non-display state, so that the type display non-display state corresponds to the different information, It is easier to grasp when different information is displayed.

Feature DG12. The information display means has a plurality of unit light emitting units (display segments 201a to 201g, 202a to 202g), and performs a predetermined display by a combination of the unit light emitting units that are in a light emitting state among the plurality of unit light emitting units. It is a configuration that can
The second information display control unit responds to the different information by setting a unit light emitting unit, which can be set to a light emitting state when a display corresponding to the aspect information is performed, of the plurality of unit light emitting units to a light emitting state. The display is performed, and the combination of the unit light emitting units that emits light when the display corresponding to the separate information is performed does not exist when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of features DG1 to DG11, wherein the gaming machine is a combination.

  According to the feature DG12, the display corresponding to the different information is performed by setting the unit light emitting unit that can be in the light emitting state when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed to the light emitting state, thereby performing the display corresponding to the mode information It is possible to minimize the restrictions on the contents of the display corresponding to the aspect information in order to diversify the information. On the other hand, the combination of the unit light-emitting units that emits light when the display corresponding to the different information is performed is a combination that does not exist when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed. Thus, it is possible to grasp which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the different information is being performed by grasping the combination of the unit light-emitting units that are in the light-emitting state.

Feature DG13. There are a plurality of display modes of a display corresponding to the mode information in the information display unit,
The game according to Feature DG12, wherein the plurality of unit light-emitting units do not include a unit light-emitting unit that does not enter a light-emitting state even when all of the displays corresponding to the plurality of modes are displayed. Machine.

  According to the feature DG13, when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed, the unit light emitting units of an arbitrary combination are in a light emitting state, so that the display corresponding to the aspect information is diversified. It is possible to minimize restrictions on the contents of the display corresponding to the information.

Feature DG14. The specific individual information display means (the third notification display device 69c in the 33rd to 42nd embodiments, the 4th notification display device 204 in the 11th and 44th embodiments, and the 45th embodiment A plurality of individual information display means including the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204),
The second information display control means, when a display corresponding to the separate information is performed, a predetermined individual which is not in a non-display state when a display corresponding to the aspect information is performed among a plurality of the individual information display means. Information display means (the first notification display device 69a and the second notification display device 69b in the 33rd to 42nd embodiments, the first notification display device 201, the second notification display device in the 11th and 44th embodiments) 202 and the third notification display device 203, and in the forty-fifth embodiment, the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202) are set to a non-display state. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature DG14, the display is not in the non-display state when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed. The display is in the non-display state when the predetermined individual information display unit performs the display corresponding to the different information. With this, it is possible to clearly specify which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the different information is being performed simply by grasping the type of the individual information display unit in the non-display state. Becomes possible.

Feature DG15. Setting means (a function of executing a setting value update process in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage,
The gaming machine according to any one of features DG1 to DG14, wherein the second information display control means causes a display corresponding to the different information to be performed in a situation where the set value can be changed.

  According to the feature DG15, it is possible to also use the information display means for displaying the information corresponding to the aspect information as the display means for notifying that the setting value can be changed.

  Feature DG16. The gaming machine according to Feature DG15, wherein the second information display control means causes information corresponding to a set value currently selected as a display corresponding to the different information to be displayed.

  According to the feature DG16, it is possible to use the information display means for displaying the information corresponding to the aspect information as the display means for displaying the set value in the middle of the change.

  Feature DG17. The gaming machine according to any one of features DG1 to DG16, wherein the second information display control means causes a display corresponding to an abnormal state of the gaming machine to be performed as a display corresponding to the different information.

  According to the feature DG17, it is possible to also use the information display means for performing the display corresponding to the aspect information as the display means for performing the display corresponding to the abnormal state of the gaming machine.

  Feature DG18. The second information display control means, when performing a display corresponding to the abnormal state in a situation where the abnormal state does not occur, performs a display corresponding to the absence of the abnormal state. The gaming machine according to feature DG17.

  According to the feature DG18, it is possible to clearly specify whether or not an abnormal state has occurred by checking the information display means.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features DG1 to DG18, the features DA1 to DA15, the features DB1 to DB7, the features DC1 to DC5, the features DD1 to DD10, the features DE1 to DE6, the features DF1 to DF3, the features DG1 to DG18, and the features DH1 to DH1. DH7, features DI1 to DI9, features DJ1 to DJ4, features DK1 to DK7, features DL1 to DL20, features DM1 to DM7, features DN1 to DN6, features DO1 to DO11, features DP1 to DP12, features DQ1 to DQ5, features DR1 to DR1. DR17, features DS1 to DS8, features DT1 to DT13, features DU1 to DU8, features DV1 to DV6, features DW1 to DW11, features DX1 to DX11, features DY1 to DY11, features DZ1 to DZ10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b1 b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e , Features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 15, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7. , Features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9. , Features z1 to z6, features αDA1 to αDA10, features αDB1 to αDB6, features αDC1 to αDC13, features αDD1 to αDD9, features αDE1 to αDE5, features αDF1 to αDF9, features αDG1 to αDG10, features αDH1 to αDH11, and features αDI1 to αDI8. , Feature αDJ1 to αDJ14, feature αDK1 to αDK8, feature αDL1 to αDL11, feature αDM1 to αDM8, feature αDN1 αDN6, features αDO1 to αDO7, features αDP1 to αDP7, features αDQ1 to αDQ9, features αDR1 to αDR8, features αDS1 to αDS3, features αDT1 to αDT4, features αDU1 to αDU10, features αDV1 to αDV5, features αDW1 to αDW9, and features αDX1. Any one or a plurality of configurations among αDX4, features αDY1 to αDY11, features αDZ1 to αDZ4, and features αa1 to αa3 may be applied. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

<Characteristic DH group>
Feature DH1. History storage executing means (a function of executing a history setting process in the management-side CPU 112) for storing history information of a game corresponding to the predetermined event in the history storage means (history memory 117) when a predetermined event occurs by execution of the game )When,
An information deriving unit that derives mode information corresponding to a game result in a predetermined period by using the history information stored in the history storage unit (in the thirty-third embodiment, steps S1402 to S1412 in the management CPU 112 A function of executing processing, a function of executing the processing of step S1807 in the management-side CPU 112 in the thirty-fifth embodiment, and a function of executing the processing of step S2107 in the management-side CPU 112 in the thirty-seventh embodiment).
The information display means (in the 33rd to 42nd embodiments, the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, and the 43rd to 46th displays) so that a display corresponding to the aspect information derived by the information derivation means is performed. In the embodiment, a first information display control unit (a function of executing a display process in the management-side CPU 112) that controls display of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204);
Second information display control means for controlling the display of the information display means so that a display corresponding to different information different from the aspect information is performed (in the 33rd to 42nd embodiments, steps S202 and S208 in the main CPU 63 are performed). The function of executing the processing, the function of executing the processing of steps S3101, S3103, and S3109 in the main CPU 63 in the forty-third embodiment, and the steps S3201, S3202, S3204, and S3210 of the main CPU 63 in the forty-fourth embodiment. (In the forty-fifth embodiment, a function of executing an abnormality display process in the main CPU 63).
The information display means has a plurality of unit light emitting units (display segments 201a to 201g, 202a to 202g), and performs a predetermined display by a combination of the unit light emitting units that are in a light emitting state among the plurality of unit light emitting units. It is a configuration that can
The second information display control unit responds to the different information by setting a unit light emitting unit, which can be set to a light emitting state when a display corresponding to the aspect information is performed, of the plurality of unit light emitting units to a light emitting state. The display is performed, and the combination of the unit light emitting units that emits light when the display corresponding to the separate information is performed does not exist when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed. A gaming machine characterized by being a combination.

  According to the feature DH1, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to the event is stored in the history storage unit. As a result, information for managing the number of times or frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be stored and held in the gaming machine, and the management of the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event is preferable by using the managed information. Can be performed. Further, since the history information is stored in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the history information and unauthorized modification. Further, mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period is derived using the history information stored in the history storage unit. Then, a display corresponding to the aspect information is performed by the information display means. Thereby, it is possible to grasp the management result of the game history such as the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event. Further, in the information display means, not only a display corresponding to the mode information but also a display corresponding to another information is performed. This makes it possible to effectively use the information display means.

  In addition, the display corresponding to the different information is performed by setting the unit light emitting unit that can be in the light emitting state when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed to the light emitting state, thereby diversifying the display corresponding to the aspect information. In doing so, it is possible to minimize restrictions on the contents of the display corresponding to the aspect information. On the other hand, the combination of the unit light-emitting units that emits light when the display corresponding to the different information is performed is a combination that does not exist when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed. Thus, it is possible to grasp which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the different information is being performed by grasping the combination of the unit light-emitting units that are in the light-emitting state.

Feature DH2. There are a plurality of display modes of a display corresponding to the mode information in the information display unit,
The game according to Feature DH1, wherein the plurality of unit light-emitting units do not include a unit light-emitting unit that does not enter a light-emitting state even when all of the displays corresponding to the plurality of aspects of the aspect information are performed. Machine.

  According to the feature DH2, when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed, the unit light emitting units of an arbitrary combination are configured to emit light, so that the display corresponding to the aspect information is diversified. It is possible to minimize restrictions on the contents of the display corresponding to the information.

Feature DH3. The specific individual information display means (the third notification display device 69c in the 33rd to 42nd embodiments, the 4th notification display device 204 in the 11th and 44th embodiments, and the 45th embodiment A plurality of individual information display means including the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204),
The second information display control means, when a display corresponding to the separate information is performed, a predetermined individual which is not in a non-display state when a display corresponding to the aspect information is performed among a plurality of the individual information display means. Information display means (the first notification display device 69a and the second notification display device 69b in the 33rd to 42nd embodiments, the first notification display device 201, the second notification display device in the 11th and 44th embodiments) 202 and the third notification display device 203, and in the forty-fifth embodiment, the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202) are set to the non-display state. The described gaming machine.

  According to the feature DH3, when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed, the display is not in the non-display state. When the predetermined individual information display unit performs the display corresponding to the different information, the display is in the non-display state. With this, it is possible to clearly specify which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the different information is being performed simply by grasping the type of the individual information display unit in the non-display state. Becomes possible.

  Feature DH4. The gaming machine according to claim DH3, wherein the first information display control means sets each of the plurality of individual information display means to a display state when a display corresponding to the aspect information is performed.

  According to the feature DH4, when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed, each of the plurality of individual information display units is in the display state, and accordingly, the predetermined individual information display unit corresponds to another information in the non-display state. This can be clearly distinguished from the case where the display is performed.

  Feature DH5. The first information display control means sequentially changes the display of the aspect information on the information display means. Even when the display of the aspect information is changed, the predetermined individual information display means is in a non-display state. The gaming machine according to the feature DH3 or DH4, wherein the gaming machine is not maintained at the same time.

  According to the feature DH5, when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed, the predetermined individual information display unit is not maintained in the non-display state. This makes it possible to specify which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the different information is being performed on the plurality of individual information display units, regardless of the timing at which the plurality of individual information display units are confirmed. Becomes possible.

Feature DH6. Setting means (a function of executing a setting value update process in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage,
The gaming machine according to any one of features DH1 to DH5, wherein the second information display control means causes a display corresponding to the different information to be performed in a situation where the set value can be changed.

  According to the feature DH6, it is possible to use the information display means for displaying the information corresponding to the aspect information as a display means for notifying that the setting value can be changed.

  Feature DH7. The gaming machine according to the feature DH6, wherein the second information display control means displays information corresponding to a set value currently selected as a display corresponding to the different information.

  According to the feature DH7, it is possible to use the information display means for displaying the information corresponding to the aspect information as the display means for displaying the setting value in the middle of the change.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features DH1 to DH7, the features DA1 to DA15, the features DB1 to DB7, the features DC1 to DC5, the features DD1 to DD10, the features DE1 to DE6, the features DF1 to DF3, the features DG1 to DG18, and the features DH1 to DH1. DH7, features DI1 to DI9, features DJ1 to DJ4, features DK1 to DK7, features DL1 to DL20, features DM1 to DM7, features DN1 to DN6, features DO1 to DO11, features DP1 to DP12, features DQ1 to DQ5, features DR1 to DR1. DR17, features DS1 to DS8, features DT1 to DT13, features DU1 to DU8, features DV1 to DV6, features DW1 to DW11, features DX1 to DX11, features DY1 to DY11, features DZ1 to DZ10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b1 b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9 Features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 15, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, Features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, Features z1 to z6, features αDA1 to αDA10, features αDB1 to αDB6, features αDC1 to αDC13, features αDD1 to αDD9, features αDE1 to αDE5, features αDF1 to αDF9, features αDG1 to αDG10, features αDH1 to αDH11, features αDI1 to αDI8, Features αDJ1 to αDJ14, Features αDK1 to αDK8, Features αDL1 to αDL11, Features αDM1 to αDM8, Features αDN1 to α DN6, features αDO1 to αDO7, features αDP1 to αDP7, features αDQ1 to αDQ9, features αDR1 to αDR8, features αDS1 to αDS3, features αDT1 to αDT4, features αDU1 to αDU10, features αDV1 to αDV5, features αDW1 to αDW9, and features αDX1. Any one or a plurality of configurations among αDX4, features αDY1 to αDY11, features αDZ1 to αDZ4, and features αa1 to αa3 may be applied. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

<Characteristic DI group>
Features DI1. History storage executing means (a function of executing a history setting process in the management-side CPU 112) for storing history information of a game corresponding to the predetermined event in the history storage means (history memory 117) when a predetermined event occurs by execution of the game )When,
An information deriving unit that derives mode information corresponding to a game result in a predetermined period by using the history information stored in the history storage unit (in the thirty-third embodiment, steps S1402 to S1412 in the management CPU 112 A function of executing processing, a function of executing the processing of step S1807 in the management-side CPU 112 in the thirty-fifth embodiment, and a function of executing the processing of step S2107 in the management-side CPU 112 in the thirty-seventh embodiment).
First information display control means (management side) for controlling display of information display means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204) so that display corresponding to the aspect information derived by the information derivation means is performed. A function of executing display processing in the CPU 112);
Second information display control means (a function of executing an abnormality display process in the main CPU 63) for controlling display of the information display means so that a display corresponding to an abnormal state of the gaming machine is performed. A gaming machine characterized by:

  According to the feature DI1, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to the event occurs is stored in the history storage unit. As a result, information for managing the number of times or frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be stored and held in the gaming machine, and the management of the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event is preferable by using the managed information. Can be performed. Further, since the history information is stored in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the history information and unauthorized modification. Further, mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period is derived using the history information stored in the history storage unit. Then, a display corresponding to the aspect information is performed by the information display means. Thereby, it is possible to grasp the management result of the game history such as the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event. Further, in the information display means, not only the display corresponding to the mode information but also the display corresponding to the abnormal state of the gaming machine is performed. This makes it possible to effectively use the information display means.

  Feature DI2. The second information display control means, when performing a display corresponding to the abnormal state in a situation where the abnormal state does not occur, performs a display corresponding to the absence of the abnormal state. The gaming machine according to Feature DI1.

  According to the feature DI2, it is possible to clearly specify whether or not an abnormal state has occurred by checking the information display means.

  Feature DI3. The period in which the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed on the information display unit and the period in which the display corresponding to the abnormal state is performed on the information display unit are distinguished from each other. The gaming machine described.

  According to the characteristic DI3, by grasping the state of the display on the information display means, which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the abnormal state is performed on the information display means is determined. Can be specified.

  Feature DI4. The second information display control means controls the display of the information display means so as to have a display mode different from a display mode in a case where a display corresponding to the mode information is performed, so that a display corresponding to the abnormal state is displayed. The gaming machine according to feature DG1 or DG2, wherein the game is performed.

  According to the feature DI4, by grasping the display mode of the information display unit, it is possible to specify which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the abnormal state is being performed on the information display unit. It becomes possible.

  Feature DI5. Features DI1 to DI4 comprising a plurality of individual information display means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204) each capable of performing a plurality of types of display as the information display means. A gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims.

  According to the feature DI5, it is possible to display a wide variety of aspect information by performing display corresponding to the aspect information using a plurality of individual information display units. Also, the presence of the plurality of individual information display means makes it possible to greatly differ the display mode between the case where the display corresponding to the mode information is performed and the case where the display corresponding to the abnormal state is performed. .

  Feature DI6. When the display corresponding to the abnormal state is performed, the second information display control unit may be configured to perform a predetermined individual display among the plurality of individual information display units, the display unit not being in the non-display state when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed. The gaming machine according to Feature DI5, wherein the information display means (the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202) is set to a non-display state.

  According to the feature DI6, when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed, the display is not in the non-display state. When the predetermined individual information display unit performs the display corresponding to the abnormal state, the display is in the non-display state. By this, it is possible to clearly specify which of the display corresponding to the aspect information and the display corresponding to the abnormal state is being performed simply by grasping the type of the individual information display unit in the non-display state. Becomes possible.

Feature DI7. The second information display control means, when causing a display corresponding to the abnormal state to be performed, among the plurality of individual information display means, a specific individual information display means (displayed in a display state when the aspect information is displayed). The third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204) are displayed.
The display content of the specific individual information display unit when the display corresponding to the abnormal state is performed may be displayed on the specific individual information display unit when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed. The gaming machine according to Feature DI6.

  According to the feature DI7, in the specific individual information display means, the display content that can be displayed when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed can also be displayed when the display corresponding to the abnormal state is performed. It is possible not to restrict the display contents when the display corresponding to the information is performed. Even if the specific individual information display means has the same display content as described above, it does not enter the non-display state when the display corresponding to the aspect information is provided with the configuration of the characteristic DI7. When the display corresponding to the abnormal state is performed by the predetermined individual information display means, the display is in the non-display state, so that it is possible to specify which display is being performed by the plurality of individual information display means.

  Feature DI8. The gaming machine according to Feature DI6 or DI7, wherein the first information display control unit sets each of the plurality of individual information display units to a display state when a display corresponding to the aspect information is performed.

  According to the feature DI8, when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed, each of the plurality of individual information display units is in the display state, and therefore, corresponds to the abnormal state in which the predetermined individual information display unit is in the non-display state. This can be clearly distinguished from the case where the display is performed.

  Feature DI9. The first information display control means sequentially changes the display of the aspect information on the information display means. Even when the display of the aspect information is changed, the predetermined individual information display means is in a non-display state. The gaming machine according to any one of the features DI6 to DI8, wherein the gaming machine is not maintained at the same time.

  According to the feature DI9, when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed, the predetermined individual information display unit is not maintained in the non-display state. Thereby, regardless of the timing at which the plurality of individual information display units are confirmed, it is possible to specify which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the abnormal state is being performed on the plurality of individual information display units. Becomes possible.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features DI1 to DI9, the features DA1 to DA15, the features DB1 to DB7, the features DC1 to DC5, the features DD1 to DD10, the features DE1 to DE6, the features DF1 to DF3, the features DG1 to DG18, and the features DH1 to DH1. DH7, features DI1 to DI9, features DJ1 to DJ4, features DK1 to DK7, features DL1 to DL20, features DM1 to DM7, features DN1 to DN6, features DO1 to DO11, features DP1 to DP12, features DQ1 to DQ5, features DR1 to DR1. DR17, features DS1 to DS8, features DT1 to DT13, features DU1 to DU8, features DV1 to DV6, features DW1 to DW11, features DX1 to DX11, features DY1 to DY11, features DZ1 to DZ10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b1 b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9 Features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 15, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, Features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, Features z1 to z6, features αDA1 to αDA10, features αDB1 to αDB6, features αDC1 to αDC13, features αDD1 to αDD9, features αDE1 to αDE5, features αDF1 to αDF9, features αDG1 to αDG10, features αDH1 to αDH11, features αDI1 to αDI8, Features αDJ1 to αDJ14, Features αDK1 to αDK8, Features αDL1 to αDL11, Features αDM1 to αDM8, Features αDN1 to α DN6, features αDO1 to αDO7, features αDP1 to αDP7, features αDQ1 to αDQ9, features αDR1 to αDR8, features αDS1 to αDS3, features αDT1 to αDT4, features αDU1 to αDU10, features αDV1 to αDV5, features αDW1 to αDW9, and features αDX1. Any one or a plurality of configurations among αDX4, features αDY1 to αDY11, features αDZ1 to αDZ4, and features αa1 to αa3 may be applied. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

<Characteristic DJ group>
Features DJ1. History storage executing means (a function of executing a history setting process in the management-side CPU 112) for storing history information of a game corresponding to the predetermined event in the history storage means (history memory 117) when a predetermined event occurs by execution of the game )When,
An information deriving unit that derives mode information corresponding to a game result in a predetermined period by using the history information stored in the history storage unit (in the thirty-third embodiment, steps S1402 to S1412 in the management CPU 112 A function of executing processing, a function of executing the processing of step S1807 in the management-side CPU 112 in the thirty-fifth embodiment, and a function of executing the processing of step S2107 in the management-side CPU 112 in the thirty-seventh embodiment).
The information display means (in the thirty-third to twenty-second embodiments, the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, and the forty-third to forty-sixth information displays) so that a display corresponding to the aspect information derived by the information derivation means is performed. In the embodiment, a first information display control unit (a function of executing a display process in the management-side CPU 112) that controls display of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204) is provided.
The first information display control means is for sequentially changing the display corresponding to the aspect information on the information display means, and the information display means is not displayed even when the display corresponding to the aspect information is changed. A gaming machine characterized in that it is not maintained in a state.

  According to the feature DJ1, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to the event is stored in the history storage unit. As a result, information for managing the number of times or frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be stored and held in the gaming machine, and the management of the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event is preferable by using the managed information. Can be performed. Further, since the history information is stored in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the history information and unauthorized modification. Further, mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period is derived using the history information stored in the history storage unit. Then, a display corresponding to the aspect information is performed by the information display means. Thereby, it is possible to grasp the management result of the game history such as the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event. Further, when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed, the information display means is not maintained in the non-display state. Thus, it is possible to specify the display corresponding to the aspect information regardless of the timing at which the information display means is confirmed.

  Feature DJ2. As the information display means, individual information display means each capable of performing a plurality of types of display (first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c in the 33rd to 42nd embodiments, 43rd to 46th execution The gaming machine according to Feature DJ1, wherein the gaming machine includes a plurality of display devices 201 to 204 for the 33rd to fourth notifications in the embodiment.

  According to the feature DJ2, various types of aspect information can be displayed by performing display corresponding to the aspect information using a plurality of individual information display units.

  Feature DJ3. The gaming machine according to Feature DJ2, wherein the first information display control means causes each of the plurality of individual information display means to be in a display state when a display corresponding to the aspect information is performed.

  According to the feature DJ3, when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed, each of the plurality of individual information display units is in the display state, and the display state is changed even when the display corresponding to the aspect information is changed. Will be maintained. This makes it easier to grasp the aspect information.

  Feature DJ4. The first information display control means is an individual information display means of a kind display target which is a part of the plurality of individual information display means (in the 33rd to 42nd embodiments, the first notification display device 69a, the 43rd In the forty-sixth embodiment, the display corresponding to the type of the aspect information to be displayed is performed on the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202). Individual information display means that is a part of the result display target (the second notification display device 69b and the third notification display device 69c in the 33rd to 42nd embodiments, and the third notification display in the 43rd to 46th embodiments) The gaming machine according to any one of claims DJ2 and DJ3, wherein a display corresponding to the content of the aspect information to be displayed is performed on the device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204).

  According to the feature DJ4, when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed, the display corresponding to the type of the aspect information to be displayed is performed by the individual information display means of the type display target, and the individual information display of the result display target is performed. The display corresponding to the content of the mode information to be displayed is performed by the means. This makes it easier to grasp the aspect information to be displayed.

  In addition, for the configuration of the features DJ1 to DJ4, the features DA1 to DA15, the features DB1 to DB7, the features DC1 to DC5, the features DD1 to DD10, the features DE1 to DE6, the features DF1 to DF3, the features DG1 to DG18, and the features DH1 to DH1. DH7, features DI1 to DI9, features DJ1 to DJ4, features DK1 to DK7, features DL1 to DL20, features DM1 to DM7, features DN1 to DN6, features DO1 to DO11, features DP1 to DP12, features DQ1 to DQ5, features DR1 to DR1. DR17, features DS1 to DS8, features DT1 to DT13, features DU1 to DU8, features DV1 to DV6, features DW1 to DW11, features DX1 to DX11, features DY1 to DY11, features DZ1 to DZ10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b1 b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9 Features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 15, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, Features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, Features z1 to z6, features αDA1 to αDA10, features αDB1 to αDB6, features αDC1 to αDC13, features αDD1 to αDD9, features αDE1 to αDE5, features αDF1 to αDF9, features αDG1 to αDG10, features αDH1 to αDH11, features αDI1 to αDI8, Features αDJ1 to αDJ14, Features αDK1 to αDK8, Features αDL1 to αDL11, Features αDM1 to αDM8, Features αDN1 to α DN6, features αDO1 to αDO7, features αDP1 to αDP7, features αDQ1 to αDQ9, features αDR1 to αDR8, features αDS1 to αDS3, features αDT1 to αDT4, features αDU1 to αDU10, features αDV1 to αDV5, features αDW1 to αDW9, and features αDX1. Any one or a plurality of configurations among αDX4, features αDY1 to αDY11, features αDZ1 to αDZ4, and features αa1 to αa3 may be applied. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

<Characteristic DK group>
Features DK1. History storage execution means (a function of executing a history setting process in the management-side CPU 112) for storing history information of a game corresponding to the predetermined event in the history storage means (history memory 117) when a predetermined event occurs by execution of the game )
The history storage execution means is means for preventing the history information from being stored in the history storage means even if the predetermined event has occurred in the case of the restriction situation (function of making a negative determination in step S3501 in the main CPU 63). A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the feature DK1, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to the event occurs is stored in the history storage unit. As a result, information for managing the number of times or frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be stored and held in the gaming machine, and the management of the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event is preferable by using the managed information. Can be performed. Further, since the history information is stored in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the history information and unauthorized modification. Further, in the case of a restricted situation, history information is not stored even if a predetermined event occurs, so that it is possible to prevent the history information from being stored in a situation where it is not preferable to store the history information. .

  Feature DK2. The gaming machine according to claim DK1, wherein the restriction status can occur as a status from when the supply of the operation power to the history storage execution unit is started to when a restriction release event occurs.

  According to the feature DK2, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of the predetermined event due to the operation check immediately after the start of the supply of the operation power from being stored as the history information.

Feature DK3. Means for setting the restriction status when the supply of operating power to the history storage execution means is started and the restriction condition is satisfied (function of executing the processing of step S3610 in the main CPU 63); ,
Means for not setting the restriction status when the supply of operating power to the history storage execution means is started and the restriction condition is not satisfied (function of executing the process of step S3621 in main CPU 63) The gaming machine according to feature DK2, comprising:

  According to the feature DK3, there is a case where the restriction condition is set and a case where the restriction condition is not set depending on whether or not the restriction condition is satisfied. This makes it possible to prevent the restriction status from being set as necessary.

  Feature DK4. The restriction situation may occur as a situation from when the supply of the operating power to the history storage execution unit is started until the number of game balls discharged from the game area reaches a predetermined reference number or more. The gaming machine according to any one of DK1 to DK3.

  According to the feature DK4, it is possible to prevent the history information from being stored until the number of game balls discharged from the game area becomes equal to or more than the predetermined reference number after the supply of the operation power is started.

Feature DK5. When a predetermined event occurs due to execution of a game, the history information of the game corresponding to the event is stored in history storage means (normal counter area 231, open / close execution mode counter area 232, high frequency support mode counter area 233). History storage executing means for storing (a function of executing a normal ball entry management process in the main CPU 63, a ball entry management process in the open / close execution mode, and a ball entry management process in the high frequency support mode);
An information deriving unit (a function of executing the process of step S4208 in the main CPU 63) for deriving mode information corresponding to a game result in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage unit; With
A gaming machine characterized in that the information deriving means does not derive the aspect information in a restricted situation.

  According to the feature DK5, when a predetermined event has occurred, history information corresponding to the event is stored in the history storage unit. As a result, information for managing the number of times or frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be stored and held in the gaming machine, and the management of the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event is preferable by using the managed information. Can be performed. Further, since the history information is stored in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the history information and unauthorized modification. Further, mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period is derived using the history information stored in the history storage unit. Thereby, it is possible to grasp the management result of the game history such as the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event. In addition, in the case of the restricted situation, even if a predetermined event occurs, the aspect information is not derived, so that it is possible to prevent the aspect information from being derived in a situation where it is not preferable to derive the aspect information. .

  Feature DK6. The gaming machine according to claim DK5, wherein the restriction status can occur as a status from when the supply of the operation power to the history storage execution unit is started to when a restriction release event occurs.

  According to the feature DK6, it is possible to prevent the mode information using the history information based on the occurrence of the predetermined event by the operation check immediately after the start of the supply of the operation power from being derived.

  Features DK7. The restriction situation may occur as a situation from when the supply of the operating power to the history storage execution unit is started until the number of game balls discharged from the game area reaches a predetermined reference number or more. The gaming machine according to DK5 or DK6.

  According to the feature DK7, it is possible to prevent the mode information from being derived until the number of game balls discharged from the game area becomes equal to or more than the predetermined reference number after the supply of the operation power is started.

  In addition, for the configuration of the features DK1 to DK7, the features DA1 to DA15, the features DB1 to DB7, the features DC1 to DC5, the features DD1 to DD10, the features DE1 to DE6, the features DF1 to DF3, the features DG1 to DG18, and the features DH1 to DH1. DH7, features DI1 to DI9, features DJ1 to DJ4, features DK1 to DK7, features DL1 to DL20, features DM1 to DM7, features DN1 to DN6, features DO1 to DO11, features DP1 to DP12, features DQ1 to DQ5, features DR1 to DR1. DR17, features DS1 to DS8, features DT1 to DT13, features DU1 to DU8, features DV1 to DV6, features DW1 to DW11, features DX1 to DX11, features DY1 to DY11, features DZ1 to DZ10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b1 b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9 Features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 15, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, Features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, Features z1 to z6, features αDA1 to αDA10, features αDB1 to αDB6, features αDC1 to αDC13, features αDD1 to αDD9, features αDE1 to αDE5, features αDF1 to αDF9, features αDG1 to αDG10, features αDH1 to αDH11, features αDI1 to αDI8, Features αDJ1 to αDJ14, Features αDK1 to αDK8, Features αDL1 to αDL11, Features αDM1 to αDM8, Features αDN1 to α DN6, features αDO1 to αDO7, features αDP1 to αDP7, features αDQ1 to αDQ9, features αDR1 to αDR8, features αDS1 to αDS3, features αDT1 to αDT4, features αDU1 to αDU10, features αDV1 to αDV5, features αDW1 to αDW9, and features αDX1. Any one or a plurality of configurations among αDX4, features αDY1 to αDY11, features αDZ1 to αDZ4, and features αa1 to αa3 may be applied. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

  According to the inventions relating to the feature DG group, the feature DH group, the feature DI group, the feature DJ group, and the feature DK group, the following problems can be solved.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, in a pachinko machine, a dish storage section for storing game balls given to a player is provided on the front of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to a game ball launching device, It is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage unit, for example. Further, in a pachinko machine, a configuration including an upper dish storage section and a lower dish storage section as a dish storage section is also known. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper dish storage section is a game ball launching device. And the surplus game balls in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  Further, in the slot machine, when a new game is started by operating the start lever while a medal is bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation of the reel is started by the rotation start control being executed by the control means, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means executes the rotation start control. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation stop of the reels corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in the gaming machines such as those described above, it is necessary to appropriately manage the gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Characteristic DL group>
Feature DL1. A control unit (main CPU 63) for executing various processes and temporarily storing information in an internal storage unit (register of the main CPU 63) when executing the processes;
The control means,
A first predetermined process executing means for executing a first predetermined process of the various processes (a function of executing processes other than the management execution process by the main CPU 63 in the 47th to 53rd embodiments);
A second predetermined process executing means for executing a second predetermined process among the various processes (a function of executing a management execution process by the main CPU 63 in the 47th to 53rd embodiments);
In a case where the situation in which the first predetermined processing is being executed is changed to a situation in which the second predetermined processing is executed, or in a case where the second predetermined processing is executed, at least one of the information stored in the internal storage means is stored. Evacuation executing means (in the forty-seventh embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S3802 and S3902-S3907 in the main CPU 63 in the forty-seventh embodiment) In the embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S4402 in the main CPU 63, the function of executing the processing of steps S4502 to S4507 in the main CPU 63 in the forty-ninth embodiment, and the processing of step S4602 in the main CPU 63 in the fiftieth embodiment are described. Function to be executed. In the fifty-first embodiment, the main CPU 63 Processing of step S4701 and step S4703 and the function to execute) that,
When the second predetermined processing is completed or after the completion, the return execution means (in the 47th embodiment, steps S3804 and S3803 in the main CPU 63 in the 47th embodiment) for returning the predetermined information saved in the predetermined storage means to the internal storage means. A function of executing the processing of S3910 to step S3915, a function of executing the processing of step S4404 in the main CPU 63 in the forty-eighth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S4510 to S4515 in the main CPU 63 in the forty-ninth embodiment, The 50th embodiment has a function of executing the processing of step S4605 in the main CPU 63, and the 51st embodiment has a function of executing the processing of steps S4705 and S4706 in the main CPU 63). Gaming machine.

  According to the feature DL1, when the situation where the first predetermined processing is being executed is changed to the situation where the second predetermined processing is executed, or when the situation where the second predetermined processing is executed is stored, the information is stored in the internal storage means. At least a part of the information is saved in the predetermined storage means. Thus, when the second predetermined process is executed, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the internal storage unit from being rewritten when the first predetermined process is executed. Further, when or after the second predetermined processing is completed, the information saved in the predetermined storage means is returned to the internal storage means. Thus, when the second predetermined process is completed, it is possible to execute a process different from the second predetermined process from the state of the internal storage unit before the execution of the second predetermined process. As described above, various controls can be suitably performed.

  Feature DL2. The gaming machine according to Feature DL1, wherein the predetermined information is a part of information stored in the internal storage unit.

  According to the feature DL2, only a part of the information stored in the internal storage means is saved to the predetermined storage means, so that the storage capacity required for saving the information of the internal storage means in the predetermined storage means is reduced. It can be suppressed.

Feature DL3. The internal storage means includes a first storage area (WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register) and a second storage area (WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, Registers other than the IY register),
The second predetermined processing execution means is configured to store information in the first storage area in the second predetermined processing, but not to store information in the second storage area,
The gaming machine according to Feature DL2, wherein the retreat execution unit retreats the information stored in the first storage area to the predetermined storage unit.

  According to the feature DL3, when the situation where the first predetermined processing is being executed is changed to the situation where the second predetermined processing is executed, or when the situation where the second predetermined processing is executed is reached, the second predetermined processing is performed in the internal storage means. The information in the first storage area to be stored is saved in the predetermined storage means. Thus, when the second predetermined process is completed, it is possible to execute a process different from the second predetermined process from the state of the internal storage unit before the execution of the second predetermined process, It is possible to reduce the storage capacity required to save the information in the storage means.

Feature DL4. The predetermined storage means,
A first predetermined storage area (a work area 221 for specific control, a stack area 222 for specific control) in which information is stored when the first predetermined processing is executed;
A second predetermined storage area (a work area 223 for non-specific control, a stack area 224 for non-specific control) in which information is stored when the second predetermined processing is executed;
The gaming machine according to any one of features DL1 to DL3, wherein the save execution unit saves the predetermined information in the second predetermined storage area.

  According to the feature DL4, since the first predetermined storage area and the second predetermined storage area are provided in the predetermined storage means, the storage destination of the information in the predetermined storage means can be determined by the first predetermined processing and the second predetermined processing. It is possible to make a clear difference. This makes it possible to prevent information used in the other process from being erased when one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process is executed. In this case, when a situation where the second predetermined processing is executed from a situation where the first predetermined processing is executed or a situation where the second predetermined processing is executed is obtained, at least a part stored in the internal storage means is stored. Is saved in the second predetermined storage area. This makes it possible to save the information in the internal storage unit immediately before the start of the second predetermined processing, and to save the information without using the first predetermined storage area.

Feature DL5. The evacuation execution means,
In a case where the situation where the first predetermined processing is being executed is changed to a situation where the second predetermined processing is executed, the first predetermined information which is a part of the information stored in the internal storage means is used in the first predetermined processing. Means for saving to the first predetermined storage area (the function of executing the processing of step S3802 in the main CPU 63 in the forty-seventh embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S4402 in the main CPU 63 in the forty-eighth embodiment);
When the situation where the first predetermined process is being executed is changed to a situation where the second predetermined process is executed, the second predetermined information which is a part of information stored in the internal storage means is replaced with the second predetermined process. Means for saving to the second predetermined storage area (the function of executing the processing of steps S3902 to S3907 in the main CPU 63 in the 47th embodiment, and the processing of steps S4502 to S4507 in the main CPU 63 in the 49th embodiment) (The function of executing the processing of step S4602 in the main CPU 63 in the 50th embodiment, and the function of executing the processing of steps S4702 and S4703 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-first embodiment). The gaming machine according to feature DL4, wherein the gaming machine is characterized in that:

  According to the feature DL5, the first predetermined information, which is a part of the information stored in the internal storage means, is saved in the first predetermined storage area in the first predetermined processing, and the partial information stored in the internal storage means is stored. Is saved in the second predetermined storage area in the second predetermined process. This makes it possible to perform the saving at a timing suitable for each piece of information stored in the internal storage means, and to execute the processing for saving the information in a distributed manner between the first predetermined processing and the second predetermined processing. It becomes possible.

  Feature DL6. The gaming machine according to Feature DL5, wherein the first predetermined information is information of a flag register provided in the internal storage means.

  According to the feature DL6, it is possible to appropriately save the information of the flag register in a situation where the first predetermined process is being executed.

Feature DL7. The second predetermined storage area is:
A stack area (stack area 224 for non-specific control) in which information can be written by a push instruction and information can be read by a pop instruction;
A work area (a work area 223 for non-specific control) in which writing and reading of information can be performed by a load instruction.
The gaming machine according to any one of features DL4 to DL6, wherein the retreat execution unit retreats the predetermined information to one of the stack area and the work area.

  According to the feature DL7, when the situation where the first predetermined processing is being executed is changed to the situation where the second predetermined processing is executed, or when the situation where the second predetermined processing is executed is reached, the stack area in the second predetermined storage area is set. At least a part of the information stored in the internal storage means is saved in one of the work area and the work area. As a result, the save destinations of the information can be consolidated, and the processing configuration for saving and the processing configuration for restoring can be simplified.

  Feature DL8. The gaming machine according to Feature DL7, wherein the retreat execution unit retreats the predetermined information to the work area.

  According to the feature DL8, since the save destination of at least a part of the information stored in the internal storage means is the work area, the information can be saved without performing the cumulative change of the stack pointer. Become.

Feature DL9. The first predetermined storage area is capable of storing information and reading information when the first predetermined processing is performed, and is capable of reading information when the second predetermined processing is performed. Information cannot be stored,
The second predetermined storage area is capable of storing information and reading information when the second predetermined processing is performed, and is capable of reading information when the first predetermined processing is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of features DL4 to DL8, wherein information cannot be stored.

  According to the feature DL9, the first predetermined storage area can be treated as a dedicated storage area for the first predetermined processing, and the second predetermined storage area can be treated as a dedicated storage area for the second predetermined processing. Becomes

Feature DL10. The predetermined storage means,
A stack area (stack area 224 for non-specific control) in which information can be written by a push instruction and information can be read by a pop instruction;
A work area (a work area 223 for non-specific control) in which writing and reading of information can be performed by a load instruction.
The gaming machine according to any one of features DL1 to DL9, wherein the retreat execution unit retreats the predetermined information to one of the stack area and the work area.

  According to the feature DL10, the save destinations of the predetermined information can be aggregated, and the processing configuration for saving the predetermined information and the processing configuration for restoring the predetermined information can be simplified.

  Feature DL11. The gaming machine according to Feature DL10, wherein the retreat execution unit retreats the predetermined information to the work area.

  According to the feature DL11, since the save destination of the predetermined information is the work area, it is possible to save the information without performing the cumulative change of the stack pointer.

Feature DL12. The predetermined information is a part of information stored in the internal storage unit,
The evacuation execution unit is configured to execute the internal storage unit when the situation in which the first predetermined process is being executed is changed to a situation in which the second predetermined process is executed, or when the status in which the second predetermined process is executed is changed. The gaming machine according to feature DL11, further comprising a unit (a function of executing the process of step S3802 in the main CPU 63) of saving specific information, which is a part of information stored in the stack area, to the stack area. .

  According to the feature DL12, in the configuration in which the predetermined information is saved in the work area, the specific information is saved in the stack area. Thus, the information stored in the internal storage unit can be dispersed and saved in the work area and the stack area.

  Feature DL13. The gaming machine according to Feature DL12, wherein the predetermined information has a larger amount of information than the specific information.

  According to the feature DL13, the predetermined information having an information amount larger than the specific information is saved in the work area, so that a large amount of information is accumulated in the stack area when the information stored in the internal storage unit is saved. It is possible to prevent it from happening.

Feature DL14. In a case where the situation where the first predetermined processing is being executed is changed to a situation where the second predetermined processing is executed or a situation where the second predetermined processing is executed, information of a stack pointer provided in the internal storage means is provided. Is a fixed information structure.
The gaming machine according to any one of features DL1 to DL13, wherein information of a stack pointer provided in the internal storage unit is not a target of evacuation by the evacuation execution unit.

  According to the feature DL14, it is not necessary to secure a capacity for saving the information of the stack pointer in the predetermined storage means, so that the capacity of the predetermined storage means can be reduced. Further, even in the configuration in which the information of the stack pointer is not saved, the situation in which the first predetermined processing is being executed is changed to the situation in which the second predetermined processing is executed, or the situation in which the second predetermined processing is executed is changed. In this case, the information of the stack pointer becomes fixed information. Therefore, even if the information of the stack pointer is not saved as described above, it is possible to return to the information of the stack pointer before the start of the second predetermined process. It is possible.

  Feature DL15. Means for setting the fixed information in the stack pointer when or after ending the second predetermined process (the function of executing the process of step S3909 in the main CPU 63 in the forty-seventh embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S3909 in the forty-ninth embodiment) The gaming machine according to Feature DL14, further comprising a function of the main CPU 63 for executing the processing of Step S4509, and a function of executing the processing of Step S4604 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-fifth embodiment).

  According to the feature DL15, it is possible to return to the information of the stack pointer before the second predetermined process is started when or after the second predetermined process is completed.

  Feature DL16. When the situation where the first predetermined process is being executed is changed to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, or when the situation where the second predetermined process is executed is reached, the stack pointer is set to the second predetermined process. Means for setting the corresponding second response start information (the function of executing the processing of step S3901 in the main CPU 63 in the forty-seventh embodiment; the function of executing the processing of step S4501 in the main CPU 63 in the forty-ninth embodiment; The gaming machine according to Feature DL14 or DL15, which includes a function of executing the process of Step S4601 in the main CPU 63 in the embodiment.

  According to the feature DL16, when the second predetermined process is started, the second correspondence start information corresponding to the second predetermined process is set in the stack pointer, so that an appropriate address in the second predetermined process is set. Information can be stored in the stack area.

Feature DL17. The first predetermined process includes a process for controlling the progress of the game,
The gaming machine according to any one of features DL1 to DL16, wherein the second predetermined process includes a process for managing a game history.

  According to the feature DL17, the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and the process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process, thereby controlling the progress of the game. It is possible to prevent information used in the processing for managing the game history from being rewritten when executing the processing for the game.

Feature DL18. The predetermined storage means,
A first predetermined storage area (a work area 221 for specific control, a stack area 222 for specific control) in which information is stored when the first predetermined processing is executed;
A second predetermined storage area (a work area 223 for non-specific control, a stack area 224 for non-specific control) in which information is stored when the second predetermined processing is executed;
The second predetermined storage area is a history storage area (a normal counter area 231 and an open / close execution mode counter area 232) in which, when a predetermined event occurs due to execution of a game, history information of the game corresponding to the event is stored. The gaming machine according to feature DL17, further comprising a high-frequency support mode counter area 233).

  According to the feature DL18, when a predetermined event has occurred, history information corresponding to the event is stored in the history storage area. As a result, information for managing the number of times or frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be stored and held in the gaming machine, and the management of the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event is preferable by using the managed information. Can be performed. Further, since the history information is stored in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the history information and unauthorized modification. In addition, a process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and a process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process, so that the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed. During execution, it is possible to prevent information stored in the history storage area from being rewritten.

  Feature DL19. The second predetermined process executing means is an information deriving means (step S4208 in the main CPU 63) for deriving mode information corresponding to a game result in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage area. The gaming machine according to feature DL18, further comprising a function of executing the processing of (1).

  According to the feature DL19, by using the history information stored in the history storage area to derive the mode information corresponding to the game result in the predetermined period, the management of the game history such as the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event is performed. The result can be grasped.

  Feature DL20. The gaming machine according to Feature DL19, wherein the second predetermined storage area includes a mode information storage area (operation result storage area 234) for storing the mode information derived by the information deriving unit.

  According to the feature DL20, when the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period is derived using the history information, the mode information is stored in the mode information storage area. Thereby, it is possible to grasp the management result of the game history at an arbitrary timing. In addition, a process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and a process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process, so that the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed. At the time of execution, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the aspect information storage area from being rewritten.

  In addition, for the configuration of the features DL1 to DL20, the features DA1 to DA15, the features DB1 to DB7, the features DC1 to DC5, the features DD1 to DD10, the features DE1 to DE6, the features DF1 to DF3, the features DG1 to DG18, and the features DH1 to DH1. DH7, features DI1 to DI9, features DJ1 to DJ4, features DK1 to DK7, features DL1 to DL20, features DM1 to DM7, features DN1 to DN6, features DO1 to DO11, features DP1 to DP12, features DQ1 to DQ5, features DR1 to DR1. DR17, features DS1 to DS8, features DT1 to DT13, features DU1 to DU8, features DV1 to DV6, features DW1 to DW11, features DX1 to DX11, features DY1 to DY11, features DZ1 to DZ10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b1 b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e , Features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 15, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7. , Features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9. , Features z1 to z6, features αDA1 to αDA10, features αDB1 to αDB6, features αDC1 to αDC13, features αDD1 to αDD9, features αDE1 to αDE5, features αDF1 to αDF9, features αDG1 to αDG10, features αDH1 to αDH11, and features αDI1 to αDI8. , Feature αDJ1 to αDJ14, feature αDK1 to αDK8, feature αDL1 to αDL11, feature αDM1 to αDM8, feature αDN1 αDN6, features αDO1 to αDO7, features αDP1 to αDP7, features αDQ1 to αDQ9, features αDR1 to αDR8, features αDS1 to αDS3, features αDT1 to αDT4, features αDU1 to αDU10, features αDV1 to αDV5, features αDW1 to αDW9, and features αDX1. Any one or a plurality of configurations among αDX4, features αDY1 to αDY11, features αDZ1 to αDZ4, and features αa1 to αa3 may be applied. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

<Feature DM group>
Features DM1. A control unit (main CPU 63) for executing various processes and temporarily storing information in an internal storage unit (register of the main CPU 63) when executing the processes;
The control means,
A first predetermined process executing means for executing a first predetermined process of the various processes (a function of executing processes other than the management execution process by the main CPU 63 in the 47th to 53rd embodiments);
A second predetermined process executing means for executing a second predetermined process among the various processes (a function of executing a management execution process by the main CPU 63 in the 47th to 53rd embodiments);
In a case where the situation where the first predetermined processing is being executed is changed to a situation where the second predetermined processing is executed, or in a case where the situation where the second predetermined processing is executed is changed, at least one of the information stored in the internal storage means is stored. Evacuation executing means (a function for executing the processing of steps S3902 to S3907 in the main CPU 63 in the 47th embodiment, and a main function in the forty-ninth embodiment) for evacuation of the predetermined information which is the information of the unit in the predetermined storage means (main RAM 65). The function of the side CPU 63 for executing the processing of steps S4502 to S4507, the function of the main CPU 63 for executing the processing of step S4602 in the 50th embodiment, and the processing of steps S4701 and S4703 for the main CPU 63 in the fifty-first embodiment. Function to perform)
When the second predetermined processing is completed or after the second predetermined processing is completed, the return execution means for returning the predetermined information saved in the predetermined storage means to the internal storage means (in the 47th embodiment, steps S3910 to S3910 in the main CPU 63) The function of executing the processing of S3915, the function of executing the processing of steps S4510 to S4515 in the main CPU 63 in the forty-ninth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S4605 of the main CPU 63 in the fifty-fifth embodiment, the fifty-first embodiment In the embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function of executing the processing of steps S4705 and S4706).
The gaming machine, wherein the save execution means saves the predetermined information to the predetermined storage means by a load command.

  According to the feature DM1, when the situation in which the second predetermined processing is executed is changed from the situation in which the first predetermined processing is executed, or when the situation in which the second predetermined processing is executed is stored in the internal storage means. Predetermined information that is at least a part of the information is saved in a predetermined storage unit. Thus, when the second predetermined process is executed, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the internal storage unit from being rewritten when the first predetermined process is executed. When or after the second predetermined process is completed, the predetermined information saved in the predetermined storage unit is returned to the internal storage unit. Thus, when the second predetermined process is completed, it is possible to execute a process different from the second predetermined process from the state of the internal storage unit before the execution of the second predetermined process. In a case where the situation where the first predetermined processing is being executed is changed to a situation where the second predetermined processing is executed or a situation where the second predetermined processing is executed, the above-mentioned predetermined information is saved in the predetermined storage means by a load instruction. . This makes it possible to save the predetermined information without changing the stack pointer.

Feature DM2. The predetermined storage means,
A stack area (stack area 224 for non-specific control) in which information can be written by a push instruction and information can be read by a pop instruction;
A work area (a work area 223 for non-specific control) in which writing and reading of information can be performed by a load instruction.
The gaming machine according to Feature DM1, wherein the retreat execution unit retreats the predetermined information to the work area.

  According to the feature DM2, since the save area of the predetermined information, which is at least a part of the information stored in the internal storage unit, is the work area, the information is saved without cumulatively changing the stack pointer. It becomes possible.

Feature DM3. The predetermined information is a part of information stored in the internal storage unit,
The evacuation execution unit is configured to execute the internal storage unit when the situation in which the first predetermined process is being executed is changed to a situation in which the second predetermined process is executed, or when the status in which the second predetermined process is executed is changed. The gaming machine according to Feature DM2, further comprising a unit (a function of executing the processing of Step S3802 in the main CPU 63) for saving specific information, which is a part of information stored in the stack area, to the stack area. .

  According to the feature DM3, the specific information is saved in the stack area in the configuration in which the predetermined information is saved in the work area. Thus, the information stored in the internal storage unit can be dispersed and saved in the work area and the stack area.

  Feature DM4. The gaming machine according to Feature DM3, wherein the predetermined information has a larger amount of information than the specific information.

  According to the feature DM4, the predetermined information having an information amount larger than the specific information is saved in the work area, so that a large amount of information is accumulated in the stack area when the information stored in the internal storage unit is saved. It is possible to prevent it from happening.

Feature DM5. The work area is
A first work area (a work area 221 for specific control) in which information is stored when the first predetermined process is executed;
A second work area (a work area 223 for non-specific control) in which information is stored when the second predetermined processing is executed,
The gaming machine according to any one of features DM2 to DM4, wherein the retreat execution unit retreats the predetermined information to the second work area.

  According to the feature DM5, since the first work area and the second work area are provided in the work area, the storage destination of information in the work area is clearly different between the first predetermined processing and the second predetermined processing. It becomes possible. This makes it possible to prevent information used in the other process from being erased when one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process is executed. In this case, when a situation where the second predetermined processing is executed from a situation where the first predetermined processing is executed or a situation where the second predetermined processing is executed is obtained, at least a part stored in the internal storage means is stored. Is saved in the second work area. This makes it possible to save the information in the internal storage unit immediately before the start of the second predetermined processing, and to save the information without using the first work area.

Feature DM6. The first work area can store information and read information when the first predetermined process is performed, and can read information when the second predetermined process is performed. Information cannot be stored,
The second work area is capable of storing information and reading information when the second predetermined process is performed, and is capable of reading information when the first predetermined process is performed. The gaming machine according to Feature DM5, wherein information cannot be stored.

  According to the feature DM6, the first work area can be handled as a dedicated storage area for the first predetermined processing, and the second work area can be handled as a dedicated storage area for the second predetermined processing. .

Feature DM7. A control unit (main CPU 63) for executing various processes and temporarily storing information in an internal storage unit (register of the main CPU 63) when executing the processes;
The control means,
A first predetermined process executing means for executing a first predetermined process of the various processes (a function of executing processes other than the management execution process by the main CPU 63 in the 47th to 53rd embodiments);
A second predetermined process executing means for executing a second predetermined process among the various processes (a function of executing a management execution process by the main CPU 63 in the 47th to 53rd embodiments);
In a case where the situation where the first predetermined processing is being executed is changed to a situation where the second predetermined processing is executed, or in a case where the situation where the second predetermined processing is executed is changed, at least one of the information stored in the internal storage means is stored. Evacuation executing means (a function for executing the processing of steps S3902 to S3907 in the main CPU 63 in the 47th embodiment, and a main function in the forty-ninth embodiment) for evacuation of the predetermined information which is the information of the unit in the predetermined storage means (main RAM 65). The function of the side CPU 63 for executing the processing of steps S4502 to S4507, the function of the main CPU 63 for executing the processing of step S4602 in the 50th embodiment, and the processing of steps S4701 and S4703 for the main CPU 63 in the fifty-first embodiment. Function to perform)
When the second predetermined processing is completed or after the second predetermined processing is completed, the return execution means for returning the predetermined information saved in the predetermined storage means to the internal storage means (in the 47th embodiment, steps S3910 to S3910 in the main CPU 63) The function of executing the processing of S3915, the function of executing the processing of steps S4510 to S4515 in the main CPU 63 in the forty-ninth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S4605 of the main CPU 63 in the fifty-fifth embodiment, the fifty-first embodiment In the embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function of executing the processing of steps S4705 and S4706).
The predetermined storage means,
A stack area (stack area 224 for non-specific control) in which information can be written by a push instruction and information can be read by a pop instruction;
A work area (a work area 223 for non-specific control) in which writing and reading of information can be performed by a load instruction.
The gaming machine, wherein the retreat execution means retreats the predetermined information to one of the stack area and the work area.

  According to the feature DM7, when the situation where the first predetermined processing is being executed is changed to the situation where the second predetermined processing is executed, or when the situation where the second predetermined processing is executed is stored, the information is stored in the internal storage means. Predetermined information that is at least a part of the information is saved in a predetermined storage unit. Thus, when the second predetermined process is executed, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the internal storage unit from being rewritten when the first predetermined process is executed. When or after the second predetermined process is completed, the predetermined information saved in the predetermined storage unit is returned to the internal storage unit. Thus, when the second predetermined process is completed, it is possible to execute a process different from the second predetermined process from the state of the internal storage unit before the execution of the second predetermined process.

  Further, when the situation where the second predetermined processing is executed is changed from the situation where the first predetermined processing is executed or when the situation where the second predetermined processing is executed, one of the stack area and the work area in the predetermined storage means is provided. Then, the predetermined information is saved. As a result, the save destinations of the information can be consolidated, and the processing configuration for saving and the processing configuration for restoring can be simplified.

  In addition, for the configuration of the features DM1 to DM7, the features DA1 to DA15, the features DB1 to DB7, the features DC1 to DC5, the features DD1 to DD10, the features DE1 to DE6, the features DF1 to DF3, the features DG1 to DG18, and the features DH1 to DH1. DH7, features DI1 to DI9, features DJ1 to DJ4, features DK1 to DK7, features DL1 to DL20, features DM1 to DM7, features DN1 to DN6, features DO1 to DO11, features DP1 to DP12, features DQ1 to DQ5, features DR1 to DR1. DR17, features DS1 to DS8, features DT1 to DT13, features DU1 to DU8, features DV1 to DV6, features DW1 to DW11, features DX1 to DX11, features DY1 to DY11, features DZ1 to DZ10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b1 b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9 Features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 15, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, Features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, Features z1 to z6, features αDA1 to αDA10, features αDB1 to αDB6, features αDC1 to αDC13, features αDD1 to αDD9, features αDE1 to αDE5, features αDF1 to αDF9, features αDG1 to αDG10, features αDH1 to αDH11, features αDI1 to αDI8, Features αDJ1 to αDJ14, Features αDK1 to αDK8, Features αDL1 to αDL11, Features αDM1 to αDM8, Features αDN1 to α DN6, features αDO1 to αDO7, features αDP1 to αDP7, features αDQ1 to αDQ9, features αDR1 to αDR8, features αDS1 to αDS3, features αDT1 to αDT4, features αDU1 to αDU10, features αDV1 to αDV5, features αDW1 to αDW9, and features αDX1. Any one or a plurality of configurations among αDX4, features αDY1 to αDY11, features αDZ1 to αDZ4, and features αa1 to αa3 may be applied. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

<Characteristic DN group>
Features DN1. A control unit (main CPU 63) for executing various processes and temporarily storing information in an internal storage unit (register of the main CPU 63) when executing the processes;
The control means,
A first predetermined process executing means for executing a first predetermined process of the various processes (a function of executing processes other than the management execution process by the main CPU 63 in the 47th to 53rd embodiments);
A second predetermined process execution means (a function of executing a management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the forty-seventh to fifty-third embodiments) for executing a second predetermined process among the various processes,
When the situation where the first predetermined processing is being executed is changed to the situation where the second predetermined processing is executed, the information of the stack pointer provided in the internal storage means is fixed information. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature DN1, when the situation where the first predetermined processing is being executed is changed to the situation where the second predetermined processing is being executed, the information of the stack pointer provided in the internal storage means is fixed information. There is no need to save the information of the stack pointer when starting the predetermined processing. This eliminates the need to secure a storage area for saving the information of the stack pointer. Further, when the situation where the second predetermined processing is executed is changed from the situation where the first predetermined processing is being executed, the information of the stack pointer is fixed information, so that the information of the stack pointer is not saved as described above. However, it is possible to return to the information of the stack pointer before the start of the second predetermined process.

  Feature DN2. Means for setting the fixed information in the stack pointer when or after ending the second predetermined process (the function of executing the process of step S3909 in the main CPU 63 in the forty-seventh embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S3909 in the forty-ninth embodiment) The gaming machine according to Feature DN1, further comprising a function of executing the processing of Step S4509 in the main CPU 63, and a function of executing the processing of Step S4604 in the main CPU 63 in the fiftieth embodiment.

  According to the feature DN2, it is possible to return to the information of the stack pointer before the second predetermined process is started when or after the second predetermined process is completed.

  Feature DN3. Means (47) for setting the stack pointer to second correspondence start information corresponding to the second predetermined processing in a case where the situation where the first predetermined processing is being executed is changed to a situation where the second predetermined processing is executed. In the embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S3901 in the main CPU 63, in the forty-ninth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S4501 in the main CPU 63, and in the fifty embodiment, the processing of step S4601 in the main CPU 63 is executed. The gaming machine according to feature DN1 or DN2, wherein the gaming machine includes:

  According to the feature DN3, when the second predetermined process is started, the second correspondence start information corresponding to the second predetermined process is set in the stack pointer, so that an appropriate address in the second predetermined process is set. Information can be stored in the stack area.

Feature DN4. In a case where the situation in which the first predetermined processing is being executed is changed to a situation in which the second predetermined processing is executed, or in a case where the second predetermined processing is executed, at least one of the information stored in the internal storage means is stored. Evacuation executing means (in the forty-seventh embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S3802 and S3902-S3907 in the main CPU 63 in the forty-seventh embodiment) In the embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S4402 in the main CPU 63, the function of executing the processing of steps S4502 to S4507 in the main CPU 63 in the forty-ninth embodiment, and the processing of step S4602 in the main CPU 63 in the fiftieth embodiment are described. Function to be executed. In the fifty-first embodiment, the main CPU 63 Processing of step S4701 and step S4703 and the function to execute) that,
When the second predetermined processing is completed or after the completion, the return execution means (in the 47th embodiment, steps S3804 and S3803 in the main CPU 63 in the 47th embodiment) for returning the predetermined information saved in the predetermined storage means to the internal storage means. A function of executing the processing of S3910 to step S3915, a function of executing the processing of step S4404 in the main CPU 63 in the forty-eighth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S4510 to S4515 in the main CPU 63 in the forty-ninth embodiment, In the fiftieth embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function of executing the processing of step S4605, and in the fifty-first embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function of executing the processing of steps S4705 and S4706).
The gaming machine according to any one of claims DN1 to DN3, wherein information of a stack pointer provided in said internal storage means is not saved by said save execution means.

  According to the feature DN4, in a case where the situation where the first predetermined processing is being executed is changed to a situation where the second predetermined processing is executed, or when a situation where the second predetermined processing is executed is stored, the information is stored in the internal storage means. At least a part of the information is saved in the predetermined storage means. Thus, when the second predetermined process is executed, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the internal storage unit from being rewritten when the first predetermined process is executed. Further, when or after the second predetermined processing is completed, the information saved in the predetermined storage means is returned to the internal storage means. Thus, when the second predetermined process is completed, it is possible to execute a process different from the second predetermined process from the state of the internal storage unit before the execution of the second predetermined process. Further, since the information of the stack pointer is not to be saved, it is not necessary to secure a capacity for saving the information of the stack pointer in the predetermined storage means. Therefore, the capacity of the predetermined storage unit can be reduced. Further, even in the configuration in which the information of the stack pointer is not saved, the situation in which the first predetermined processing is being executed is changed to the situation in which the second predetermined processing is executed, or the situation in which the second predetermined processing is executed is changed. In this case, the information of the stack pointer becomes fixed information. Therefore, even if the information of the stack pointer is not saved as described above, it is possible to return to the information of the stack pointer before the start of the second predetermined process. It is possible.

Feature DN5. The predetermined storage means,
A first predetermined storage area (a work area 221 for specific control, a stack area 222 for specific control) in which information is stored when the first predetermined processing is executed;
A second predetermined storage area (a work area 223 for non-specific control, a stack area 224 for non-specific control) in which information is stored when the second predetermined processing is executed;
The gaming machine according to claim 4, wherein said evacuation execution means saves said predetermined information in said second predetermined storage area.

  According to the feature DN5, since the first storage area and the second storage area are provided in the predetermined storage means, the storage destination of the information in the predetermined storage means can be determined by the first predetermined processing and the second predetermined processing. It is possible to make a clear difference. This makes it possible to prevent information used in the other process from being erased when one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process is executed. In this case, when a situation where the second predetermined processing is executed from a situation where the first predetermined processing is executed or a situation where the second predetermined processing is executed is obtained, at least a part stored in the internal storage means is stored. Is saved in the second predetermined storage area. This makes it possible to save the information in the internal storage unit immediately before the start of the second predetermined processing, and to save the information without using the first predetermined storage area.

Feature DN6. The first predetermined storage area is capable of storing information and reading information when the first predetermined processing is performed, and is capable of reading information when the second predetermined processing is performed. It is impossible to memorize information of things,
The second predetermined storage area can store information and read information when the second predetermined processing is performed, and can read information when the first predetermined processing is performed. The gaming machine according to feature DN5, wherein information of the object cannot be stored.

  According to the feature DN6, the first predetermined storage area can be treated as a dedicated storage area for the first predetermined processing, and the second predetermined storage area can be treated as a dedicated storage area for the second predetermined processing. Becomes

  In addition, for the configuration of the features DN1 to DN6, the features DA1 to DA15, the features DB1 to DB7, the features DC1 to DC5, the features DD1 to DD10, the features DE1 to DE6, the features DF1 to DF3, the features DG1 to DG18, and the features DH1 to DH1. DH7, features DI1 to DI9, features DJ1 to DJ4, features DK1 to DK7, features DL1 to DL20, features DM1 to DM7, features DN1 to DN6, features DO1 to DO11, features DP1 to DP12, features DQ1 to DQ5, features DR1 to DR1. DR17, features DS1 to DS8, features DT1 to DT13, features DU1 to DU8, features DV1 to DV6, features DW1 to DW11, features DX1 to DX11, features DY1 to DY11, features DZ1 to DZ10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b1 b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9 Features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 15, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, Features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, Features z1 to z6, features αDA1 to αDA10, features αDB1 to αDB6, features αDC1 to αDC13, features αDD1 to αDD9, features αDE1 to αDE5, features αDF1 to αDF9, features αDG1 to αDG10, features αDH1 to αDH11, features αDI1 to αDI8, Features αDJ1 to αDJ14, Features αDK1 to αDK8, Features αDL1 to αDL11, Features αDM1 to αDM8, Features αDN1 to α DN6, features αDO1 to αDO7, features αDP1 to αDP7, features αDQ1 to αDQ9, features αDR1 to αDR8, features αDS1 to αDS3, features αDT1 to αDT4, features αDU1 to αDU10, features αDV1 to αDV5, features αDW1 to αDW9, and features αDX1. Any one or a plurality of configurations among αDX4, features αDY1 to αDY11, features αDZ1 to αDZ4, and features αa1 to αa3 may be applied. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

<Characteristic DO group>
Features DO1. A control unit (main CPU 63) for executing various processes and temporarily storing information in an internal storage unit (register of the main CPU 63) when executing the processes;
The control means,
A first predetermined process executing means for executing a first predetermined process of the various processes (a function of executing processes other than the management execution process by the main CPU 63 in the 47th to 53rd embodiments);
A second predetermined process executing means for executing a second predetermined process among the various processes (a function of executing a management execution process by the main CPU 63 in the 47th to 53rd embodiments);
In a case where the situation in which the first predetermined processing is being executed is changed to a situation in which the second predetermined processing is executed, or in a case in which the second predetermined processing is executed, at least a part of the storage in the internal storage means is performed. The first state setting means (steps S4803 to S4808 in the main CPU 63) for setting the state of a predetermined storage area (WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register) to a predetermined state. Function to perform)
When or after the second predetermined processing is completed, a second state setting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S4903 to S4908 in the main CPU 63) for setting the state of the predetermined storage area to the predetermined state; A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the feature DO1, when the situation where the first predetermined process is being executed is changed to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, or when the situation where the second predetermined process is executed is reached, the predetermined storage area of the internal storage means is set. Is set to the predetermined state, and when or after the second predetermined processing is completed, the state of the predetermined storage area is set to the predetermined state again. Thus, the state of the predetermined storage area can be set to the predetermined state before and after the second predetermined processing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the state of the predetermined storage area by one of the first predetermined processing and the second predetermined processing from affecting the other processing. As described above, various controls can be suitably performed.

  Feature DO2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the predetermined state is a state in which supply of operation power to the control unit is started.

  According to the feature DO2, the predetermined storage area is set as the predetermined state when operation power supply to the control unit is started, so that the processing configuration for setting the predetermined state is simplified. Becomes possible.

  Feature DO3. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the predetermined state is a state in which the predetermined storage area is cleared to “0”.

  According to the feature DO3, the predetermined storage area is set to the state where “0” has been cleared as the predetermined state, so that the processing configuration for setting the predetermined state can be simplified.

  Feature DO4. The gaming machine according to any one of features DO1 to DO3, wherein the predetermined storage area is a partial storage area in the internal storage unit.

  According to the feature DO4, since only a part of the storage area of the internal storage unit is set to the predetermined state, it is possible to reduce the processing load for setting the predetermined state.

Feature DO5. The internal storage means includes at least the predetermined storage area and another storage area (a register other than the WA register, the BC register, the DE register, the HL register, the IX register, and the IY register),
The second predetermined processing execution means is configured to store information in the predetermined storage area in the second predetermined processing, but not to store information in the separate storage area,
The gaming machine according to claim 4, wherein the first state setting means and the second state setting means do not change the state of the separate storage area.

  According to the feature DO5, when the situation where the first predetermined processing is executed is changed to the situation where the second predetermined processing is executed, or when the situation where the second predetermined processing is executed is reached, the second predetermined processing is performed in the internal storage means. , A predetermined storage area for storing information is set to a predetermined state. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the state of the predetermined storage area by the first predetermined processing from affecting the second predetermined processing. Also, since the state of the separate storage area is not changed, setting the predetermined state when the second predetermined processing is started may not affect the processing after the second predetermined processing is completed. It becomes possible.

  Feature DO6. The information on the predetermined storage area before the setting of the predetermined state is performed by the first state setting means is information that is not used after the second predetermined process is completed. A gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims.

  According to the feature DO6, even if the predetermined storage area is set to the predetermined state when the second predetermined processing is executed or when the second predetermined processing is executed, the second predetermined processing ends. It is possible not to affect the processing after the processing.

Feature DO7. When the situation in which the first predetermined processing is being executed is changed to a situation in which the second predetermined processing is executed, or when the situation in which the second predetermined processing is executed is reached, a part stored in the internal storage means. Evacuation execution means (a function of executing the processing of step S4802 in the main CPU 63) for evacuation of the predetermined information (information of the flag register) which is the information of the above in the predetermined storage means (main RAM 65);
When the second predetermined processing is completed or after the completion, the predetermined information saved in the predetermined storage means is returned to the internal storage means. The gaming machine according to any one of features DO1 to DO6, comprising:

  According to the feature DO7, when the situation where the first predetermined process is being executed is changed to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, or when the situation where the second predetermined process is executed is stored, the information is stored in the internal storage means. The predetermined information, which is a part of the information, is saved in the predetermined storage means. Thus, when the second predetermined process is executed, the information stored in the internal storage unit at the time of executing the first predetermined process and the information required at the time of executing the subsequent first predetermined process is rewritten. It is possible to make it not. When or after the second predetermined process is completed, the predetermined information saved in the predetermined storage unit is returned to the internal storage unit. Thus, when the second predetermined process is completed, it is possible to execute a process different from the second predetermined process from the state of the internal storage unit before the execution of the second predetermined process.

Feature DO8. The first predetermined process includes a process for controlling the progress of the game,
The gaming machine according to any one of features DO1 to DO7, wherein the second predetermined process includes a process for managing a game history.

  According to the feature DO8, the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and the process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process, thereby controlling the progress of the game. It is possible to prevent information used in the process for managing the game history from being rewritten when executing the process for the game.

Feature DO9. The predetermined storage means,
A first predetermined storage area (a work area 221 for specific control, a stack area 222 for specific control) in which information is stored when the first predetermined processing is executed;
A second predetermined storage area (a work area 223 for non-specific control, a stack area 224 for non-specific control) in which information is stored when the second predetermined processing is executed;
The second predetermined storage area is a history storage area (normal counter area 231, open / close execution mode counter area 232) in which, when a predetermined event occurs due to execution of a game, history information of the game corresponding to the event is stored. The gaming machine according to feature DO8, characterized by comprising: a high-frequency support mode counter area 233).

  According to the feature DO9, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to the event is stored in the history storage area. As a result, information for managing the number of times or frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be stored and held in the gaming machine, and the management of the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event is preferable by using the managed information. Can be performed. Further, since the history information is stored in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the history information and unauthorized modification. In addition, a process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and a process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process, so that the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed. During execution, it is possible to prevent information stored in the history storage area from being rewritten.

  Feature DO10. The second predetermined process executing means is an information deriving means (step S4208 in the main CPU 63) for deriving mode information corresponding to a game result in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage area. The gaming machine according to feature DO9, further comprising:

  According to the feature DO10, the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period is derived using the history information stored in the history storage area, thereby managing the game history such as the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event. The result can be grasped.

  Feature DO11. The gaming machine according to Feature DO10, wherein the second predetermined storage area includes a mode information storage area (operation result storage area 234) for storing the mode information derived by the information deriving unit.

  According to the characteristic DO11, when the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period is derived using the history information, the mode information is stored in the mode information storage area. Thereby, it is possible to grasp the management result of the game history at an arbitrary timing. In addition, a process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and a process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process, so that the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed. At the time of execution, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the aspect information storage area from being rewritten.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features DO1 to DO11, the features DA1 to DA15, the features DB1 to DB7, the features DC1 to DC5, the features DD1 to DD10, the features DE1 to DE6, the features DF1 to DF3, the features DG1 to DG18, and the features DH1 to DH1. DH7, features DI1 to DI9, features DJ1 to DJ4, features DK1 to DK7, features DL1 to DL20, features DM1 to DM7, features DN1 to DN6, features DO1 to DO11, features DP1 to DP12, features DQ1 to DQ5, features DR1 to DR1. DR17, features DS1 to DS8, features DT1 to DT13, features DU1 to DU8, features DV1 to DV6, features DW1 to DW11, features DX1 to DX11, features DY1 to DY11, features DZ1 to DZ10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b1 b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e , Features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 15, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7. , Features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9. , Features z1 to z6, features αDA1 to αDA10, features αDB1 to αDB6, features αDC1 to αDC13, features αDD1 to αDD9, features αDE1 to αDE5, features αDF1 to αDF9, features αDG1 to αDG10, features αDH1 to αDH11, and features αDI1 to αDI8. , Feature αDJ1 to αDJ14, feature αDK1 to αDK8, feature αDL1 to αDL11, feature αDM1 to αDM8, feature αDN1 αDN6, features αDO1 to αDO7, features αDP1 to αDP7, features αDQ1 to αDQ9, features αDR1 to αDR8, features αDS1 to αDS3, features αDT1 to αDT4, features αDU1 to αDU10, features αDV1 to αDV5, features αDW1 to αDW9, and features αDX1. Any one or a plurality of configurations among αDX4, features αDY1 to αDY11, features αDZ1 to αDZ4, and features αa1 to αa3 may be applied. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

<Characteristic DP group>
Features DP1. A control unit (main CPU 63) for executing various processes and temporarily storing information in an internal storage unit (register of the main CPU 63) when executing the processes;
The control means,
A first predetermined process executing means for executing a first predetermined process of the various processes (a function of executing processes other than the management execution process by the main CPU 63 in the 47th to 53rd embodiments);
A second predetermined process executing means for executing a second predetermined process among the various processes (a function of executing a management execution process by the main CPU 63 in the 47th to 53rd embodiments);
A first predetermined storage area (a work area 221 for specific control, a stack area 222 for specific control) in which information is stored when the first predetermined processing is executed;
A second predetermined storage area (a work area 223 for non-specific control, a stack area 224 for non-specific control) in which information is stored when the second predetermined processing is executed. Gaming machine to do.

  According to the feature DP1, the first predetermined storage area and the second predetermined storage area are provided, and the first predetermined storage area is treated as a storage area dedicated to the first predetermined processing, and the second predetermined storage area is stored in the first predetermined storage area. It is treated as a dedicated storage area for the second predetermined process. Thus, it is possible to make the storage destination of the information in the predetermined storage device clearly different between the first predetermined processing and the second predetermined processing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent information used in the other processing from being erased when one of the first predetermined processing and the second predetermined processing is executed.

Feature DP2. The first predetermined process includes a process for controlling the progress of the game,
The gaming machine according to Feature DP1, wherein the second predetermined process includes a process for managing a game history.

  According to the feature DP2, the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and the process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process, thereby controlling the progress of the game. It is possible to prevent information used in the process for managing the game history from being rewritten when executing the process for the game.

  Feature DP3. The second predetermined storage area is a history storage area (normal counter area 231, open / close execution mode counter area 232) in which, when a predetermined event occurs due to the execution of a game, history information of the game corresponding to the event is stored. The gaming machine according to Feature DP2, comprising: a high-frequency support mode counter area 233).

  According to the feature DP3, when a predetermined event has occurred, history information corresponding to the event is stored in the history storage area. As a result, information for managing the number of times or frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be stored and held in the gaming machine, and the management of the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event is preferable by using the managed information. Can be performed. Further, since the history information is stored in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the history information and unauthorized modification. In addition, a process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and a process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process, so that the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed. During execution, it is possible to prevent information stored in the history storage area from being rewritten.

  Feature DP4. The second predetermined process executing means is an information deriving means (step S4208 in the main CPU 63) for deriving mode information corresponding to a game result in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage area. The gaming machine according to feature DP3, further comprising:

  According to the feature DP4, the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period is derived using the history information stored in the history storage area, thereby managing the game history such as the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event. The result can be grasped.

  Feature DP5. The gaming machine according to Feature DP4, wherein the second predetermined storage area includes a mode information storage area (operation result storage area 234) for storing the mode information derived by the information deriving unit.

  According to the feature DP5, when the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period is derived using the history information, the mode information is stored in the mode information storage area. Thereby, it is possible to grasp the management result of the game history at an arbitrary timing. In addition, a process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and a process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process, so that the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed. At the time of execution, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the aspect information storage area from being rewritten.

Feature DP6. In a case where the situation in which the first predetermined processing is being executed is changed to a situation in which the second predetermined processing is executed, the first predetermined information, which is a part of the information stored in the internal storage means, is used in the first predetermined processing. First evacuation means for evacuation in the first predetermined storage area (the function of executing the processing of step S3802 in the main CPU 63 in the forty-seventh embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S4402 in the main CPU 63 in the forty-eighth embodiment) When,
When the situation in which the first predetermined process is being executed is changed to a situation in which the second predetermined process is executed, the second predetermined information, which is a part of the information stored in the internal storage means, is replaced with the second predetermined process. A second evacuation unit (in the 47th embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S3902 to S3907 in the main CPU 63, in the forty-ninth embodiment, a function of executing the processing in steps S4502 to S4507 in the main CPU 63) , The function of executing the processing of step S4602 in the main CPU 63 in the 50th embodiment, and the function of executing the processing of steps S4701 and S4703 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-first embodiment). The play according to any one of features DP1 to DP5, characterized in that Machine.

  According to the feature DP6, the first predetermined information, which is a part of the information stored in the internal storage means, is saved in the first predetermined storage area in the first predetermined processing, and the partial information stored in the internal storage means is stored. Is saved in the second predetermined storage area in the second predetermined process. This makes it possible to perform the saving at a timing suitable for each piece of information stored in the internal storage means, and to execute the processing for saving the information in a distributed manner between the first predetermined processing and the second predetermined processing. It becomes possible.

Feature DP7. When or after the second predetermined processing is completed, first return execution means (in the forty-seventh embodiment, on the main side, in which the first predetermined information saved in the first predetermined storage area is returned to the internal storage means) A function of the CPU 63 for executing the processing of step S3804, and a function of the main CPU 63 for executing the processing of step S4404 in the forty-eighth embodiment);
When the second predetermined processing is completed or after the second predetermined processing is completed, the second predetermined execution information for returning the second predetermined information saved in the second predetermined storage area to the internal storage means. The function of the CPU 63 to execute the processing of steps S3910 to S3915, the 49th embodiment executes the processing of the steps S4510 to S4515 in the main CPU 63, and the 50th embodiment executes the processing of step S4605 in the main CPU 63. The gaming machine according to feature DP6, further comprising a function of performing a process of steps S4705 and S4706 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-first embodiment.

  According to the feature DP7, when or after the second predetermined processing is completed, the first predetermined information saved in the first predetermined storage area is returned to the internal storage unit, and the first predetermined information saved in the second predetermined storage area is returned to the second predetermined storage area. (2) Since the predetermined information is returned to the internal storage means, it is possible to return the state of the internal storage means to a state before the second predetermined processing is started.

  Feature DP8. The gaming machine according to claim DP6 or DP7, wherein said first predetermined information includes information of a flag register provided in said internal storage means.

  According to the feature DP8, it is possible to appropriately save the information of the flag register in a situation where the first predetermined process is being executed.

  Feature DP9. The gaming machine according to any one of features DP6 to DP8, wherein the second predetermined information includes information of all registers of the internal storage unit.

  According to the feature DP9, since the information of all the registers of the internal storage means is saved collectively, there is no need to selectively save the information of the registers.

Feature DP10. The second predetermined storage area is:
A stack area (stack area 224 for non-specific control) in which information is written by a push instruction and information is read by a pop instruction;
A work area (a work area 223 for non-specific control) in which writing and reading of information are performed by a load instruction.
The gaming machine according to claim DP9, wherein the second retreat execution means retreats the second predetermined information to one of the stack area and the work area.

  According to the feature DP10, the information of all the registers of the internal storage means is saved in one of the stack area and the work area in the second predetermined storage area. As a result, the save destinations of the information of all the registers can be consolidated, and the processing configuration for saving and the processing configuration for restoring can be simplified.

  Feature DP11. The gaming machine according to claim DP10, wherein said second evacuation execution means evacuates said second predetermined information into said stack area.

  According to the feature DP11, it is possible to save information of all registers while not using the work area.

  Feature DP12. The gaming machine according to any one of features DP6 to DP11, wherein the second predetermined information includes information of a stack pointer of the internal storage unit.

  According to the feature DP12, it is possible to appropriately save the information of the stack pointer in the situation where the first predetermined process is being executed.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features DP1 to DP12, the features DA1 to DA15, the features DB1 to DB7, the features DC1 to DC5, the features DD1 to DD10, the features DE1 to DE6, the features DF1 to DF3, the features DG1 to DG18, and the features DH1 to DH1. DH7, features DI1 to DI9, features DJ1 to DJ4, features DK1 to DK7, features DL1 to DL20, features DM1 to DM7, features DN1 to DN6, features DO1 to DO11, features DP1 to DP12, features DQ1 to DQ5, features DR1 to DR1. DR17, features DS1 to DS8, features DT1 to DT13, features DU1 to DU8, features DV1 to DV6, features DW1 to DW11, features DX1 to DX11, features DY1 to DY11, features DZ1 to DZ10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b1 b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e , Features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 15, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7. , Features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9. , Features z1 to z6, features αDA1 to αDA10, features αDB1 to αDB6, features αDC1 to αDC13, features αDD1 to αDD9, features αDE1 to αDE5, features αDF1 to αDF9, features αDG1 to αDG10, features αDH1 to αDH11, and features αDI1 to αDI8. , Feature αDJ1 to αDJ14, feature αDK1 to αDK8, feature αDL1 to αDL11, feature αDM1 to αDM8, feature αDN1 αDN6, features αDO1 to αDO7, features αDP1 to αDP7, features αDQ1 to αDQ9, features αDR1 to αDR8, features αDS1 to αDS3, features αDT1 to αDT4, features αDU1 to αDU10, features αDV1 to αDV5, features αDW1 to αDW9, and features αDX1. Any one or a plurality of configurations among αDX4, features αDY1 to αDY11, features αDZ1 to αDZ4, and features αa1 to αa3 may be applied. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

  According to the inventions relating to the feature DL group, the feature DM group, the feature DN group, the feature DO group, and the feature DP group, the following problems can be solved.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine has a dish storage section for storing game balls given to a player on the front face of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to a game ball launching device, It is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage unit, for example. Further, in a pachinko machine, a configuration including an upper dish storage section and a lower dish storage section as a dish storage section is also known. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper dish storage section is a game ball launching device. And the surplus game balls in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  Further, in the slot machine, when a new game is started by operating the start lever while a medal is bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation of the reel is started by the rotation start control being executed by the control means, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means executes the rotation start control. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation stop of the reels corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in the gaming machine as exemplified above, it is necessary to appropriately perform various controls, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Characteristic DQ group>
Features DQ1. A control unit (MPU 62) for executing various processes and temporarily storing information in an internal storage unit (register of the main CPU 63) when executing the processes;
History storage means (management RAM 241) provided as a separate chip from the control means and capable of temporarily storing information;
The control means is a history storage execution means (when the predetermined event occurs by the execution of the game, the history information of the game corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the history storage means (normal entry management processing in the main CPU 63, A game machine having a function of executing a ball entry management process in the open / close execution mode and a ball entry management process in the high frequency support mode.

  According to the feature DQ1, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to the event occurs is stored in the history storage unit. As a result, information for managing the number of times or frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be stored and held in the gaming machine, and the management of the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event is preferable by using the managed information. Can be performed. Further, since the history information is stored in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the history information and unauthorized modification. Further, since the history storage unit is provided as a separate chip from the control unit, it is possible to increase the storage capacity for storing history information while using a general-purpose control unit.

  Feature DQ2. The gaming machine according to Feature DQ1, wherein said control means includes predetermined storage means (main RAM 65) for temporarily storing information when executing various processes.

  According to the feature DQ2, in a configuration in which not only the predetermined storage means provided in the control means but also the history storage means provided as a separate chip from the control means, the history information is stored in the history storage means. Many history information can be stored and held.

  Feature DQ3. The gaming machine according to claim DQ2, wherein said control means temporarily stores information in said predetermined storage means when executing a process relating to said history information.

  According to the feature DQ3, in a configuration in which the history storage means for storing the history information is provided as a separate chip from the control means, when processing relating to the history information is performed, the predetermined storage means provided in the control means is provided. Since the information is temporarily stored, it is possible to prevent the processing speed when executing the process regarding the history information from being extremely reduced.

  Feature DQ4. The control unit uses the history information stored in the history storage unit to derive mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period (the process of step S4208 in the main CPU 63 is executed). The gaming machine according to any one of features DQ1 to DQ3.

  According to the feature DQ4, the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period is derived by using the history information stored in the history storage unit, thereby managing the game history such as the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event. The result can be grasped.

  Feature DQ5. The gaming machine according to Feature DQ4, wherein the second predetermined storage area includes a mode information storage area (operation result storage area 234) for storing the mode information derived by the information deriving unit.

  According to the feature DQ5, when the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period is derived using the history information, the mode information is stored in the mode information storage area. Thereby, it is possible to grasp the management result of the game history at an arbitrary timing.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features DQ1 to DQ5, the features DA1 to DA15, the features DB1 to DB7, the features DC1 to DC5, the features DD1 to DD10, the features DE1 to DE6, the features DF1 to DF3, the features DG1 to DG18, and the features DH1 to DH1. DH7, features DI1 to DI9, features DJ1 to DJ4, features DK1 to DK7, features DL1 to DL20, features DM1 to DM7, features DN1 to DN6, features DO1 to DO11, features DP1 to DP12, features DQ1 to DQ5, features DR1 to DR1. DR17, features DS1 to DS8, features DT1 to DT13, features DU1 to DU8, features DV1 to DV6, features DW1 to DW11, features DX1 to DX11, features DY1 to DY11, features DZ1 to DZ10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b1 b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9 Features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 15, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, Features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, Features z1 to z6, features αDA1 to αDA10, features αDB1 to αDB6, features αDC1 to αDC13, features αDD1 to αDD9, features αDE1 to αDE5, features αDF1 to αDF9, features αDG1 to αDG10, features αDH1 to αDH11, features αDI1 to αDI8, Features αDJ1 to αDJ14, Features αDK1 to αDK8, Features αDL1 to αDL11, Features αDM1 to αDM8, Features αDN1 to α DN6, features αDO1 to αDO7, features αDP1 to αDP7, features αDQ1 to αDQ9, features αDR1 to αDR8, features αDS1 to αDS3, features αDT1 to αDT4, features αDU1 to αDU10, features αDV1 to αDV5, features αDW1 to αDW9, and features αDX1. Any one or a plurality of configurations among αDX4, features αDY1 to αDY11, features αDZ1 to αDZ4, and features αa1 to αa3 may be applied. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

  According to the invention relating to the above-described feature DQ group, the following problem can be solved.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, in a pachinko machine, a dish storage section for storing game balls given to a player is provided on the front of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to a game ball launching device, It is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage unit, for example. Further, in a pachinko machine, a configuration including an upper dish storage section and a lower dish storage section as a dish storage section is also known. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper dish storage section is a game ball launching device. And the surplus game balls in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  Further, in the slot machine, when a new game is started by operating the start lever while a medal is bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation of the reel is started by the rotation start control being executed by the control means, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means executes the rotation start control. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation stop of the reels corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in the gaming machines such as those described above, it is necessary to appropriately manage the gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Characteristic DR group>
Feature DR1. Setting means (a function of executing a setting value updating process in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage;
When the supply of the operating power to the control unit having the setting unit is started, the setting value to be used is changed based on the occurrence of a plurality of events including the first event and the second event. (A function of executing the processing of steps S5003 to S5006 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-fourth embodiment; steps S5503 to S5003 in the main CPU 63 in another embodiment) A gaming machine having a function of executing the processing of S5507, and a function of executing the processing of steps S5703 to S5705 and step S5715 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-fifth embodiment).

  According to the feature DR1, since a setting value to be used is set from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage, the player can use a more advantageous setting value. That you expect. In this case, in order to set the set value to be used, a plurality of events including the first event and the second event occur when the supply of the operating power to the control unit is started. Need to be. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to perform the setting of the setting value to be used by fraudulently.

Feature DR2. Open grasping means for grasping that the opening / closing body (front door frame 14) is in the open state (a function of executing the processing of step S5005 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-fourth embodiment, step S5505 in the main CPU 63 in another form). (The function of executing the processing of step S5703 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-fifth embodiment).
The condition generating means specifies that the first event has occurred based on the fact that the opening / closing body is in an open state by the opening grasping means. A gaming machine according to claim 1.

  According to the feature DR2, the opening / closing body needs to be in an open state in order to set the setting value to be used. As a result, when an act of illegally setting a setting value to be used is performed, it is possible to make the illegal act stand out, and as a result, the illegal act can be easily found. .

Feature DR3. Another opening grasping means (a function of executing the process of step S5006 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-fourth embodiment, a function of executing the processing in step S5006 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-fourth embodiment) (The function of executing the processing of step S5506, in the 55th embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S5704 in the main CPU 63).
The situation generating means specifies that the second event has occurred based on the fact that the separate opening / closing body is in an open state being grasped by the separate opening grasping means. The gaming machine according to Feature DR2.

  According to the feature DR3, in order to set the setting value to be used, it is necessary to open not only the open / close body but also the other open / close body. Accordingly, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an act of setting a setting value to be used due to fraud, and it is possible to make the fraudulent act conspicuous.

Feature DR4. The setting means sets at least one of the selection of the setting value to be used and the setting of the setting value to be used based on the operation of the predetermined operation means (the update button 68b and the reset button 68c). Configuration to perform,
The gaming machine according to feature DR2 or DR3, wherein the predetermined operation means is configured to be operable by opening another opening / closing body in an open state.

  According to the feature DR4, a setting value to be used cannot be set unless an opening / closing body different from another opening / closing body that is opened to enable operation of the predetermined operation unit is opened. Accordingly, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an act of setting a setting value to be used due to fraud, and it is possible to make the fraudulent act conspicuous.

Feature DR5. The opening and closing body defines the front side of the gaming machine in a gaming area where the gaming ball flows down,
The gaming machine according to any one of features DR2 to DR4, wherein the gaming area is opened forward of the gaming machine by setting the opening / closing body to an open state.

  According to the feature DR5, in order to set the setting value to be used, it is necessary to open the opening / closing body to open the game area in front of the gaming machine. Accordingly, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an act of setting a setting value to be used due to fraud, and it is possible to make the fraudulent act conspicuous.

  Feature DR6. The situation generating means specifies that one of the plurality of events has occurred, based on the fact that a predetermined operation is performed on the setting key insertion section (setting key insertion section 68a) using the setting key. The gaming machine according to any one of features DR1 to DR5.

  According to the feature DR6, in order to set the setting value to be used, it is necessary not only to perform a predetermined operation using the setting key for the setting key insertion unit but also to generate another event. is there. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to perform the setting of the setting value to be used by fraudulently.

  Feature DR7. The situation generating means generates a predetermined game event (operation of the firing operation device 28, entering the through gate 35) based on occurrence of a predetermined game event that occurs when the game is performed, and The gaming machine according to any one of features DR1 to DR6, wherein it is specified that one event has occurred.

  According to the feature DR7, in order for the setting value to be used to be set, it is not only necessary to generate a predetermined game event that occurs when a game is performed, but also separately from that. Must occur. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to perform the setting of the setting value to be used by fraudulently.

  Feature DR8. The situation generating means is based on the detection of the game ball by the ball detection means (gate detection sensor 49a) for detecting that the game ball has entered a predetermined ball portion provided in the game area. The gaming machine according to any one of features DR1 to DR7, wherein it is specified that one of the plurality of events has occurred.

  According to the feature DR8, in order to set a set value to be used, it is necessary to cause a game ball to enter a predetermined entry section and to generate another event. There is. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to perform the setting of the setting value to be used by fraudulently.

Feature DR9. A setting value notifying unit (a function of executing a setting confirmation process in the main CPU 63) for notifying the setting value to be used set by the setting unit by the notifying unit;
The set value notifying unit sends the set value to be used set by the setting unit to the notifying unit based on a plurality of events including the first event and the second event occurring. The gaming machine according to any one of the features DR1 to DR8, wherein the gaming machine is notified.

  According to the feature DR9, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an act of confirming a setting value due to fraud. In addition, the manager of the game hall can generate the first event and the second event regardless of whether to set the set value to be used or to check the set value. It becomes common and each work becomes easy to grasp.

Feature DR10. Setting means (a function of executing a setting value updating process in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage;
A plurality of events including both the fact that the predetermined operation with the setting key on the setting key inserting section (setting key inserting section 68a) is being performed and another event different from the predetermined operation with the setting key on the setting key inserting section are different. On the basis of the fact that the setting has occurred, the setting means sets the setting value to be used by the setting means so that the setting is possible. The function of executing the processing of S5003 to S5006, the function of executing the processing of steps S5503 to S5507 in the main CPU 63 in another embodiment, and the processing of steps S5703 to S5705 and the step S5715 of the main CPU 63 in the fifty-fifth embodiment. Function to execute). The gaming machine.

  According to the feature DR10, since a setting value to be used is set from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage, the player can use a more advantageous setting value. That you expect. In this case, in order to set the setting value to be used, it is necessary not only to perform a predetermined operation using the setting key for the setting key insertion unit but also to generate another event. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to perform the setting of the setting value to be used by fraudulently.

Feature DR11. Open grasping means for grasping that the opening / closing body (front door frame 14) is in the open state (a function of executing the processing of step S5005 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-fourth embodiment, step S5505 in the main CPU 63 in another form). (The function of executing the processing of step S5703 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-fifth embodiment).
The feature DR10 according to the feature DR10, wherein the situation generating means specifies that the different event has occurred based on the fact that the opening / closing body is in an open state being grasped by the opening grasping means. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature DR11, the opening / closing body needs to be in an open state in order to set the setting value to be used. As a result, when an act of illegally setting a setting value to be used is performed, it is possible to make the illegal act stand out, and as a result, the illegal act can be easily found. .

Feature DR12. Another opening grasping means (a function of executing the process of step S5006 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-fourth embodiment, a function of executing the processing in step S5006 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-fourth embodiment) (The function of executing the processing of step S5506, in the 55th embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S5704 in the main CPU 63).
The situation generating means determines that one of the plurality of events has occurred based on the fact that the separate opening / closing body is in an open state being grasped by the separate opening grasping means. The gaming machine according to Feature DR11, wherein

  According to the feature DR12, in order to set the setting value to be used, it is necessary to open not only the open / close body but also the other open / close body. Accordingly, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an act of setting a setting value to be used due to fraud, and it is possible to make the fraudulent act conspicuous.

Feature DR13. The setting means sets at least one of the selection of the setting value to be used and the setting of the setting value to be used based on the operation of the predetermined operation means (the update button 68b and the reset button 68c). Configuration to perform,
The gaming machine according to feature DR11 or DR12, wherein the predetermined operation means is configured to be operable by opening another opening / closing body.

  According to the feature DR13, a setting value to be used cannot be set unless an opening / closing body different from another opening / closing body that is opened to enable operation of the predetermined operation unit is opened. Accordingly, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an act of setting a setting value to be used due to fraud, and it is possible to make the fraudulent act conspicuous.

Feature DR14. The opening and closing body defines the front side of the gaming machine in a gaming area where the gaming ball flows down,
The gaming machine according to any one of features DR11 to DR13, wherein the gaming area is opened forward of the gaming machine by opening the opening / closing body.

  According to the feature DR14, in order to set the setting value to be used, it is necessary to open the opening / closing body to open the game area in front of the gaming machine. Accordingly, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an act of setting a setting value to be used due to fraud, and it is possible to make the fraudulent act conspicuous.

  Feature DR15. The situation generating means generates a predetermined game event (operation of the firing operation device 28, entering the through gate 35) based on occurrence of a predetermined game event that occurs when the game is performed, and The gaming machine according to any one of features DR10 to DR14, wherein the gaming machine specifies that one of the events has occurred.

  According to the feature DR15, in order to set a setting value to be used, not only a predetermined operation with a setting key on a setting key insertion unit but also a predetermined value generated when a game is performed is performed. Must be generated. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to perform the setting of the setting value to be used by fraudulently.

  Feature DR16. The situation generating means is based on the detection of the game ball by the ball detection means (gate detection sensor 49a) for detecting that the game ball has entered a predetermined ball portion provided in the game area. The gaming machine according to any one of features DR10 to DR15, wherein one of the plurality of events is identified as having occurred.

  According to the feature DR16, in order to set the setting value to be used, not only the predetermined operation with the setting key for the setting key insertion unit but also the insertion of the game ball into the predetermined ball entry unit is performed. You need to ball. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to perform the setting of the setting value to be used by fraudulently.

Feature DR17. A setting value notifying unit (a function of executing a setting confirmation process in the main CPU 63) for notifying the setting value to be used set by the setting unit by the notifying unit;
The setting value notifying unit is configured to execute the setting unit based on the fact that the predetermined operation is performed by the setting key on the setting key insertion unit and that a plurality of events including both the different events have occurred. The gaming machine according to any one of features DR10 to DR16, wherein the setting value to be used set by the notification device is notified by the notification means.

  According to the feature DR17, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an action of confirming a setting value due to fraud. In addition, the administrator of the gaming hall performs a predetermined operation using the setting key for the setting key insertion portion and generates another event regardless of whether the setting value to be used is set or the setting value is confirmed. Since it is sufficient to perform the work, the work is shared and each work becomes easy to grasp.

  In addition, for the configuration of the features DR1 to DR17, the features DA1 to DA15, the features DB1 to DB7, the features DC1 to DC5, the features DD1 to DD10, the features DE1 to DE6, the features DF1 to DF3, the features DG1 to DG18, and the features DH1 to DH1. DH7, features DI1 to DI9, features DJ1 to DJ4, features DK1 to DK7, features DL1 to DL20, features DM1 to DM7, features DN1 to DN6, features DO1 to DO11, features DP1 to DP12, features DQ1 to DQ5, features DR1 to DR1. DR17, features DS1 to DS8, features DT1 to DT13, features DU1 to DU8, features DV1 to DV6, features DW1 to DW11, features DX1 to DX11, features DY1 to DY11, features DZ1 to DZ10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b1 b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e , Features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 15, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7. , Features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9. , Features z1 to z6, features αDA1 to αDA10, features αDB1 to αDB6, features αDC1 to αDC13, features αDD1 to αDD9, features αDE1 to αDE5, features αDF1 to αDF9, features αDG1 to αDG10, features αDH1 to αDH11, and features αDI1 to αDI8. , Feature αDJ1 to αDJ14, feature αDK1 to αDK8, feature αDL1 to αDL11, feature αDM1 to αDM8, feature αDN1 αDN6, features αDO1 to αDO7, features αDP1 to αDP7, features αDQ1 to αDQ9, features αDR1 to αDR8, features αDS1 to αDS3, features αDT1 to αDT4, features αDU1 to αDU10, features αDV1 to αDV5, features αDW1 to αDW9, and features αDX1. Any one or a plurality of configurations among αDX4, features αDY1 to αDY11, features αDZ1 to αDZ4, and features αa1 to αa3 may be applied. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

  According to the invention relating to the feature DR group, the following problem can be solved.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, in a pachinko machine, a dish storage section for storing game balls given to a player is provided on the front of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to a game ball launching device, It is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage unit, for example. Further, in a pachinko machine, a configuration including an upper dish storage section and a lower dish storage section as a dish storage section is also known. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper dish storage section is a game ball launching device. And the surplus game balls in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  Further, in the slot machine, when a new game is started by operating the start lever while a medal is bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation of the reel is started by the rotation start control being executed by the control means, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means executes the rotation start control. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation stop of the reels corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in the gaming machines such as those described above, it is necessary to deal with fraud on the gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Characteristic DS group>
Feature DS1. Setting means (a function of executing a setting value updating process in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage;
A state generating means for setting a settable state in which the setting value to be used can be changed (in the fifty-fourth embodiment, the processing of steps S5003 to S5006 and steps S5401 to S5408 in the main CPU 63 is performed). A function to be executed, a function to execute the processing of steps S5503 to S5507 in the main CPU 63 in another embodiment, a function to execute the processing of steps S5703 to S5705 and step S5715 in the main CPU 63 in the 55th embodiment, a 56th embodiment In the embodiment, the function of the main CPU 63 to execute the processing of steps S5801 to S5804; in the fifty-seventh embodiment, the function of the main CPU 63 to execute the processing of steps S5901 to S5904);
Setting value grasping means for grasping whether or not the set value before the setting possible state is equal to the set value set by the setting means (in the fifty-fourth embodiment, steps S5017 and A gaming machine having a function of executing steps S5111 to S5112, in another embodiment, a function of executing steps S5611 to S5612 in the main CPU 63).

  According to the feature DS1, since a setting value to be used is set from a plurality of set values corresponding to the player's advantage, the player can use a more advantageous setting value. That you expect. In this case, it is determined whether or not the set value before the settable state is the same as the set value set in the settable state. This makes it possible to execute a process corresponding to whether or not the set values are the same with respect to the settable state. Therefore, when the setting value to be used is set, a favorable situation can be generated for the setting result, and the setting value setting operation can be performed appropriately.

  Feature DS2. Based on the fact that the set value before the settable state is the same as the set value set by the setting unit has been grasped by the set value grasping unit, the same time process corresponding thereto is performed. The same-time means to be executed (the function of executing the processing of step S5113 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-fourth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S5613 in the main CPU 63 in another embodiment). The gaming machine according to Feature DS1.

  According to the feature DS2, when the set values are the same with respect to the settable state, the same-time process is executed, whereby it is possible to generate a preferable situation for the set values being the same. Become.

  Feature DS3. The gaming machine according to claim DS2, wherein said same time means executes, as said same time process, a process for performing notification corresponding to the fact that said set value has not been changed.

  According to the feature DS3, it is possible to notify the manager of the gaming hall or the like that the set values are the same across the settable state.

  Feature DS4. Based on the fact that the set value is different from the set value before the settable state is reached by the set means, the corresponding non-identical processing is executed based on the fact that the set value grasp means has grasped the difference. (A function of executing the processing of step S5114 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-fourth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S5614 in the main CPU 63 in another embodiment). The gaming machine according to any one of features DS1 to DS3.

  According to the feature DS4, when the set values are not the same across the settable state, the non-identical process is executed, thereby making it possible to generate a favorable situation when the set value is changed. Becomes

  Feature DS5. The gaming machine according to DS4, wherein the non-identical means executes a process for performing notification corresponding to the change of the set value as the non-identical process. .

  According to the feature DS5, it is possible to notify the manager of the gaming hall or the like that the set value has been changed with the settable state in between.

  Feature DS6. The situation generating means, after the supply of the operating power to the control means having the setting means is started, based on the necessity of erasing the information in the storage means for storing the set value, The gaming machine according to any one of Features DS1 to DS5, wherein the gaming machine is set to be in a possible state.

  According to the feature DS6, when it becomes necessary to delete the information in the storage means for storing the set value, the setting is possible, so that the game is continued despite the information of the set value being deleted. It is possible to make it not. In this case, the configuration of the characteristic DS1 is provided, and it is determined whether or not the set value before the settable state is the same as the set value set in the settable state. This makes it possible to execute a process corresponding to whether or not the set values are the same with respect to the settable state.

  Feature DS7. The set value is not changed based on the fact that the set value grasped by the set value grasping means that the set value before the settable state is equal to the set value set by the setting means is not changed. (A function of executing the processing of step S5113 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-fourth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S5613 in the main CPU 63 in another embodiment). The gaming machine according to feature DS6, wherein

  According to the feature DS7, even if the settable situation is caused by erasing the information in the storage means, the set value is changed if the set value is the same with the settable situation interposed therebetween. A notification corresponding to the absence is provided. This enables the player to be notified that the set value has not been changed even if the setting is possible in the middle of the game, and the player is safe even if the setting is possible in the middle of the game. It is possible to continue the game with care.

Feature DS8. The situation generating means,
A first situation generating means (in the fifty-fourth embodiment, steps S5003 to S5003 in the main CPU 63) for making the setting possible based on the start of the supply of the operating power to the control means having the setting means. A function for executing the processing of S5006, a function for executing the processing of steps S5503 to S5507 in the main CPU 63 in another embodiment, and a function for executing the processing of steps S5703 to S5705 and step S5715 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-fifth embodiment. )When,
A second state in which the settable state is set based on the necessity of erasing the information in the storage unit that stores the set value after the supply of the operating power to the control unit is started. Generating means (a function of executing the processing of steps S5401 to S5408 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-fourth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S5801 to S5804 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-sixth embodiment, A function of executing the processing of steps S5901 to S5904 in the main CPU 63).
The setting value grasping unit may be configured to set the settable status before the settable status, regardless of the settable status generated by the first status generating unit or the settable status generated by the second status generating unit. The gaming machine according to any one of the features DS1 to DS7, wherein it is determined whether or not the set value is the same as the set value set by the setting unit.

  According to the feature DS8, when it becomes necessary to delete the information of the storage means for storing the set value, the setting is possible, so that the game is continued despite the information of the set value being deleted. It is possible to make it not. In this case, by using the same processing as in the case where the setting is possible based on the start of the supply of the operating power to the control unit, the setting possible is performed in accordance with the erasure of the information in the storage unit. In the case where the error has occurred, it is possible to execute processing corresponding to whether or not the set values are the same with the settable state interposed therebetween.

  In addition, for the configuration of the features DS1 to DS8, the features DA1 to DA15, the features DB1 to DB7, the features DC1 to DC5, the features DD1 to DD10, the features DE1 to DE6, the features DF1 to DF3, the features DG1 to DG18, and the features DH1 to DH1. DH7, features DI1 to DI9, features DJ1 to DJ4, features DK1 to DK7, features DL1 to DL20, features DM1 to DM7, features DN1 to DN6, features DO1 to DO11, features DP1 to DP12, features DQ1 to DQ5, features DR1 to DR1. DR17, features DS1 to DS8, features DT1 to DT13, features DU1 to DU8, features DV1 to DV6, features DW1 to DW11, features DX1 to DX11, features DY1 to DY11, features DZ1 to DZ10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b1 b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9 Features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 15, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, Features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, Features z1 to z6, features αDA1 to αDA10, features αDB1 to αDB6, features αDC1 to αDC13, features αDD1 to αDD9, features αDE1 to αDE5, features αDF1 to αDF9, features αDG1 to αDG10, features αDH1 to αDH11, features αDI1 to αDI8, Features αDJ1 to αDJ14, Features αDK1 to αDK8, Features αDL1 to αDL11, Features αDM1 to αDM8, Features αDN1 to α DN6, features αDO1 to αDO7, features αDP1 to αDP7, features αDQ1 to αDQ9, features αDR1 to αDR8, features αDS1 to αDS3, features αDT1 to αDT4, features αDU1 to αDU10, features αDV1 to αDV5, features αDW1 to αDW9, and features αDX1. Any one or a plurality of configurations among αDX4, features αDY1 to αDY11, features αDZ1 to αDZ4, and features αa1 to αa3 may be applied. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

  According to the invention relating to the above-described characteristic DS group, the following problem can be solved.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, in a pachinko machine, a dish storage section for storing game balls given to a player is provided on the front of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to a game ball launching device, It is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage unit, for example. Further, in a pachinko machine, a configuration including an upper dish storage section and a lower dish storage section as a dish storage section is also known. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper dish storage section is a game ball launching device. And the surplus game balls in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  Further, in the slot machine, when a new game is started by operating the start lever while a medal is bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation of the reel is started by the rotation start control being executed by the control means, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means executes the rotation start control. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation stop of the reels corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as the above-described example, when a setting value for determining the advantage of the gaming machine is set, it is necessary to generate a suitable situation for the setting value, and this point is still improved. There is room for

<Characteristic DT group>
Feature DT1. A control unit (main CPU 63) for executing various processes and temporarily storing information in an internal storage unit (register of the main CPU 63) when executing the processes;
The control means,
A first predetermined process executing means for executing a first predetermined process of the various processes (a function of executing a process other than the management execution process by the main CPU 63 in the 47th to 57th embodiments);
A second predetermined process executing means for executing a second predetermined process among the various processes (a function of executing a management execution process by the main CPU 63 in the 47th to 57th embodiments);
A first predetermined storage area (a work area 221 for specific control, a stack area 222 for specific control) in which information is stored when the first predetermined processing is executed;
A second predetermined storage area (a work area 223 for non-specific control, a stack area 224 for non-specific control) in which information is stored when the second predetermined processing is executed;
A first monitoring execution unit that monitors whether the first predetermined storage area is normal (a function of executing the processing of steps S5401 to S5404 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-fourth embodiment; The function of the CPU 63 for executing the processing of steps S5801 to S5804, the function of executing the processing of steps S5901 to S5904 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-seventh embodiment, and the function of executing the processing of steps S7701 to S7703 in the main CPU 63 in the sixty-fourth embodiment. Function to perform processing),
A second monitoring execution unit that monitors whether the second predetermined storage area is normal (the function of executing the processing of steps S5405 to S5408 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-fourth embodiment, the main processing in the fifty-sixth embodiment) The function of the CPU 63 for executing the processing of steps S5809, S5810, S5812, and S5813. In the fifty-seventh embodiment, the function of the main CPU 63 for executing the processing of steps S6101, S6102, S6105, and S6106. A function of executing the processes of steps S7706 to S7708 in the main CPU 63 in the embodiment).

  According to the feature DT1, the first predetermined storage area and the second predetermined storage area are provided, and the first predetermined storage area is treated as a storage area dedicated to the first predetermined processing, and the second predetermined storage area is stored in the first predetermined storage area. It is handled as a dedicated storage area for the second predetermined process. Thus, it is possible to make the storage destination of the information in the predetermined storage device clearly different between the first predetermined processing and the second predetermined processing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent information used in the other processing from being erased when one of the first predetermined processing and the second predetermined processing is executed. In addition, by monitoring whether the first predetermined storage area is normal and monitoring whether the second predetermined storage area is normal, the first predetermined processing and the second predetermined processing are performed. It is possible to specify whether or not each of the processes can be performed normally.

  Feature DT2. The game according to the feature DT1, wherein the monitoring by the first monitoring execution unit and the monitoring by the second monitoring execution unit are performed in one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process. Machine.

  According to the feature DT2, monitoring whether the first predetermined storage area is normal and monitoring whether the second predetermined storage area is normal are performed in one of the first predetermined processing and the second predetermined processing. Collectively executed. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration as compared with a configuration in which monitoring of each storage area is executed separately in the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process.

  Feature DT3. The gaming machine according to the feature DT1 or DT2, wherein the monitoring by the first monitoring executing means and the monitoring by the second monitoring executing means are executed in the first predetermined processing.

  According to the feature DT3, monitoring whether the first predetermined storage area is normal and monitoring whether the second predetermined storage area is normal can be collectively executed in the first predetermined processing. Becomes

  Feature DT4. A predetermined erasing unit (in the fifty-fourth embodiment, the main CPU 63) that deletes information in the first predetermined storage area based on the fact that the first predetermined storage area is abnormal by the first monitoring execution unit. , The function of executing steps S5806, S5811 and S5814 in the main CPU 63 in the 56th embodiment, and the steps S5906, S6103 and S6103 of the main CPU 63 in the fifty-seventh embodiment. The gaming machine according to any one of the features DT1 to DT3, which has a function of executing the process of S6107).

  According to the feature DT4, when the first predetermined storage area is abnormal, the information of the first predetermined storage area is deleted, so that the first predetermined processing is executed while the first predetermined storage area is in an abnormal state. It is possible to prevent it from happening.

  Feature DT5. The predetermined erasing means erases information of the first predetermined storage area based on the fact that the first predetermined storage area is abnormal by the first monitoring execution means, and deletes the information of the second predetermined storage area. The gaming machine according to Feature DT4, wherein information of the area is deleted.

  According to the feature DT5, when the first predetermined storage area is abnormal, not only the first predetermined storage area but also the second predetermined storage area is deleted. Accordingly, when there is a possibility that an abnormality has occurred in the second predetermined storage area, the information in the second predetermined storage area can be deleted regardless of the monitoring result by the second monitoring execution means.

  Feature DT6. The predetermined erasing means erases information of the second predetermined storage area based on the fact that the second monitoring area is determined to be abnormal by the second monitoring execution means. The gaming machine according to DT4 or DT5.

  According to the feature DT6, when the first predetermined storage area is abnormal, the information in the first predetermined storage area is deleted, so that the first predetermined processing is executed while the first predetermined storage area is in an abnormal state. It is possible to prevent it from happening.

  Feature DT7. The predetermined erasing means erases information in the second predetermined storage area based on the fact that the second predetermined storage area is abnormal by the second monitoring execution means, and deletes the first predetermined storage area. The gaming machine according to feature DT6, wherein information of the area is deleted.

  According to the feature DT7, when the second predetermined storage area is abnormal, not only the second predetermined storage area but also the first predetermined storage area is deleted. Accordingly, when there is a possibility that an abnormality has occurred in the first predetermined storage area, the information in the first predetermined storage area can be deleted regardless of the monitoring result by the first monitoring execution means.

  Feature DT8. The method according to any one of features DT4 to DT7, wherein the processing for erasing information by the predetermined erasing means is performed in one of the first predetermined processing and the second predetermined processing. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature DT8, the process of erasing information in each of the predetermined storage areas based on the fact that it is determined to be abnormal is collectively executed in one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration as compared with a configuration in which the erasure of the information in each storage area is executed separately in the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process.

  Feature DT9. The gaming machine according to any one of features DT4 to DT7, wherein a process for erasing information by the predetermined erasing means is executed in the first predetermined process.

  According to the feature DT9, it is possible to collectively execute the process of erasing the information of each predetermined storage area based on the fact that the abnormality has been specified in the first predetermined process.

Feature DT10. The first predetermined process includes a process for controlling the progress of the game,
The gaming machine according to any one of features DT1 to DT9, wherein the second predetermined process includes a process for managing a game history.

  According to the feature DT10, the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and the process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process, thereby controlling the progress of the game. It is possible to prevent information used in the processing for managing the game history from being rewritten when executing the processing for the game.

  Feature DT11. The second predetermined storage area is a history storage area (normal counter area 231, open / close execution mode counter area 232) in which, when a predetermined event occurs due to the execution of a game, history information of the game corresponding to the event is stored. The gaming machine according to feature DT10, comprising a high-frequency support mode counter area 233).

  According to the feature DT11, when a predetermined event has occurred, history information corresponding to the event is stored in the history storage area. As a result, information for managing the number of times or frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be stored and held in the gaming machine, and the management of the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event is preferable by using the managed information. Can be performed. Further, since the history information is stored in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the history information and unauthorized modification. In addition, a process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and a process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process, so that the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed. During execution, it is possible to prevent information stored in the history storage area from being rewritten.

  Feature DT12. The second predetermined processing executing means is an information deriving means (step S4208 in the main CPU 63) for deriving mode information corresponding to a game result in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage area. The gaming machine described in the feature DT11 characterized by having a function of executing the processing of (1).

  According to the feature DT12, by using the history information stored in the history storage area to derive mode information corresponding to a game result in a predetermined period, management of the game history such as the frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event is performed. The result can be grasped.

  Feature DT13. The gaming machine according to Feature DT12, wherein the second predetermined storage area includes a mode information storage area (operation result storage area 234) for storing the mode information derived by the information deriving unit.

  According to the feature DT13, when the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period is derived using the history information, the mode information is stored in the mode information storage area. Thereby, it is possible to grasp the management result of the game history at an arbitrary timing. In addition, a process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and a process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process, so that the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed. At the time of execution, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the aspect information storage area from being rewritten.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features DT1 to DT13, the features DA1 to DA15, the features DB1 to DB7, the features DC1 to DC5, the features DD1 to DD10, the features DE1 to DE6, the features DF1 to DF3, the features DG1 to DG18, and the features DH1 to DH1. DH7, features DI1 to DI9, features DJ1 to DJ4, features DK1 to DK7, features DL1 to DL20, features DM1 to DM7, features DN1 to DN6, features DO1 to DO11, features DP1 to DP12, features DQ1 to DQ5, features DR1 to DR1. DR17, features DS1 to DS8, features DT1 to DT13, features DU1 to DU8, features DV1 to DV6, features DW1 to DW11, features DX1 to DX11, features DY1 to DY11, features DZ1 to DZ10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b1 b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e , Features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 15, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7. , Features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9. , Features z1 to z6, features αDA1 to αDA10, features αDB1 to αDB6, features αDC1 to αDC13, features αDD1 to αDD9, features αDE1 to αDE5, features αDF1 to αDF9, features αDG1 to αDG10, features αDH1 to αDH11, and features αDI1 to αDI8. , Feature αDJ1 to αDJ14, feature αDK1 to αDK8, feature αDL1 to αDL11, feature αDM1 to αDM8, feature αDN1 αDN6, features αDO1 to αDO7, features αDP1 to αDP7, features αDQ1 to αDQ9, features αDR1 to αDR8, features αDS1 to αDS3, features αDT1 to αDT4, features αDU1 to αDU10, features αDV1 to αDV5, features αDW1 to αDW9, and features αDX1. Any one or a plurality of configurations among αDX4, features αDY1 to αDY11, features αDZ1 to αDZ4, and features αa1 to αa3 may be applied. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

<Characteristic DU group>
Feature DU1. A control unit (main CPU 63) for executing various processes and temporarily storing information in an internal storage unit (register of the main CPU 63) when executing the processes;
The control means,
A first predetermined process executing means for executing a first predetermined process among the various processes (a function of executing a process other than the management execution process by the main CPU 63 in the 47th to 66th embodiments);
A second predetermined process executing means for executing a second predetermined process among the various processes (a function of executing a management execution process by the main CPU 63 in the 47th to 66th embodiments);
A flag register provided in the internal storage means when the situation where the first predetermined processing is being executed is changed to the situation where the second predetermined processing is executed, or when the situation where the second predetermined processing is executed is changed. State setting means (in the fifty-eighth embodiment, a function of executing steps S6202 to S6204 and step S6211 in the main CPU 63, and in the fifty-ninth embodiment, a function of executing steps S6302 to S6302 in the main CPU 63) A function of executing steps S6307 and S6312).

  According to the feature DU1, when the situation where the first predetermined processing is being executed is changed to the situation where the second predetermined processing is executed, or when the situation where the second predetermined processing is executed is reached, the flag of the flag register of the internal storage means is set. The state is set to a specific state. This makes it possible to start the second predetermined process in a situation where the state of the flag register is a predetermined specific state. Therefore, various controls can be suitably performed.

  Feature DU2. The gaming machine according to claim DU1, wherein the specific state is a state when supply of operation power to the control unit is started.

  According to the feature DU2, the flag register is set as the specific state when operation power supply to the control unit is started, so that the processing configuration for setting the specific state can be simplified. It becomes possible.

  Feature DU3. The gaming machine according to the feature DU1 or DU2, wherein the specific state is a state in which the flag register is cleared to “0”.

  According to the feature DU3, the flag register is set to the state where “0” is cleared as the specific state, so that the processing configuration for setting to the specific state can be simplified.

  Feature DU4. Means for setting the state of the flag register to the specific state when or after ending the second predetermined process (in the fifty-eighth embodiment, a function for executing the processes of steps S6213 to S6218 in the main CPU 63) The gaming machine according to any one of features DU1 to DU3, which has a function of executing the processing of steps S6314 to S6322 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-ninth embodiment.

  According to the feature DU4, the second predetermined processing is performed not only when the first predetermined processing is executed but when the second predetermined processing is executed or when the second predetermined processing is executed. When the processing ends or when the processing ends, the state of the flag register is set to the specific state. Thus, the first predetermined process can be restarted in a situation where the state of the flag register is a predetermined specific state. Further, the state of the flag register can be set to the specific state before and after the second predetermined processing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the state of the flag register in one of the first predetermined processing and the second predetermined processing from affecting the other processing.

Feature DU5. A predetermined storage unit (main RAM 65) for temporarily storing information when the control unit executes processing;
The state setting means,
Means for setting the state of a predetermined storage area in the predetermined storage means to the specific state (the function of executing the processing of steps S6202 to S6204 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-eighth embodiment, the main side in the fifty-ninth embodiment) A function of executing the processing of steps S6302 to S6307 in the CPU 63);
Means for storing the information stored in the predetermined storage area in the flag register so that the state of the flag register becomes the specific state (in the fifty-eighth embodiment, the main CPU 63 executes the processing of step S6211) The gaming machine according to any one of features DU1 to DU4, comprising: a function of performing a process of step S6312 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-ninth embodiment).

  According to the feature DU5, even if the state of the flag register cannot be directly set to the specific state as a command of the control unit, the flag is written using the writing of information to the predetermined storage unit and the reading of the information. The state of the register can be set to a specific state.

Feature DU6. The predetermined storage means,
A stack area (specific control stack area 222) in which the control means can write information by a push command and the control means can read information by a pop command;
A work area (work area 221 for specific control) in which the control means can perform writing and reading of information by a load command;
The gaming machine according to Feature DU5, wherein the predetermined storage area is provided in the stack area.

  According to the feature DU6, even if the information stored in the work area cannot be directly written to the flag register, the state of the flag register is specified by using the writing of information to the stack area and the reading of the information. The state can be set.

Feature DU7. A predetermined register provided in the internal storage means, when the situation where the first predetermined processing is being executed is changed to the situation where the second predetermined processing is executed, or when the situation where the second predetermined processing is executed is changed. (A function of executing the processing of steps S6205 to S6210 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-eighth embodiment, and a processing of steps S6308 to S6311 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-ninth embodiment) Function to execute)
The state setting means may set the state of the flag register to the specific state after the state of the predetermined register is set to the predetermined state. Gaming machine.

  The state of the flag register can change each time various processes are executed in the control means. In this case, according to the feature DU7, since the state of the flag register is set to the specific state after the state of the predetermined register is set to the predetermined state, the flag register is set to the specific state immediately before the second predetermined processing is started. It is possible to make it.

Feature DU8. A control unit (main CPU 63) for executing various processes and temporarily storing information in an internal storage unit (register of the main CPU 63) when executing the processes;
The control means is means for setting the state of the flag register to a specific state (in the fifty-eighth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S6202 to S6204 and step S6211 in the main CPU 63; A gaming machine having a function of executing the processing of steps S6302 to S6307 and step S6312 in the side CPU 63).

  According to the feature DU8, the state of the flag register can be set to a specific state as necessary.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features DU1 to DU8, the features DA1 to DA15, the features DB1 to DB7, the features DC1 to DC5, the features DD1 to DD10, the features DE1 to DE6, the features DF1 to DF3, the features DG1 to DG18, and the features DH1 to DH1. DH7, features DI1 to DI9, features DJ1 to DJ4, features DK1 to DK7, features DL1 to DL20, features DM1 to DM7, features DN1 to DN6, features DO1 to DO11, features DP1 to DP12, features DQ1 to DQ5, features DR1 to DR1. DR17, features DS1 to DS8, features DT1 to DT13, features DU1 to DU8, features DV1 to DV6, features DW1 to DW11, features DX1 to DX11, features DY1 to DY11, features DZ1 to DZ10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b1 b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9 Features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 15, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, Features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, Features z1 to z6, features αDA1 to αDA10, features αDB1 to αDB6, features αDC1 to αDC13, features αDD1 to αDD9, features αDE1 to αDE5, features αDF1 to αDF9, features αDG1 to αDG10, features αDH1 to αDH11, features αDI1 to αDI8, Features αDJ1 to αDJ14, Features αDK1 to αDK8, Features αDL1 to αDL11, Features αDM1 to αDM8, Features αDN1 to α DN6, features αDO1 to αDO7, features αDP1 to αDP7, features αDQ1 to αDQ9, features αDR1 to αDR8, features αDS1 to αDS3, features αDT1 to αDT4, features αDU1 to αDU10, features αDV1 to αDV5, features αDW1 to αDW9, and features αDX1. Any one or a plurality of configurations among αDX4, features αDY1 to αDY11, features αDZ1 to αDZ4, and features αa1 to αa3 may be applied. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

<Characteristic DV group>
Features DV1. A control unit (main CPU 63) for executing various processes and temporarily storing information in an internal storage unit (register of the main CPU 63) when executing the processes;
The control means,
A first predetermined process executing means for executing a first predetermined process among the various processes (a function of executing a process other than the management execution process by the main CPU 63 in the 47th to 66th embodiments);
A second predetermined process executing means for executing a second predetermined process among the various processes (a function of executing a management execution process by the main CPU 63 in the 47th to 66th embodiments);
A flag register provided in the internal storage means when the situation where the first predetermined processing is being executed is changed to the situation where the second predetermined processing is executed or when the situation where the second predetermined processing is executed is changed (A function of executing the process of step S3802 in the main CPU 63 in the forty-seventh embodiment, and a process of step S4402 in the main CPU 63 in the forty-eighth embodiment). The function to be executed, the function to execute the processing of step S4802 in the main CPU 63 in the 52nd embodiment, the function to execute the processing in steps S6402 to S6405 in the main CPU 63 in the 60th embodiment, and the main side in the 61st embodiment The CPU 63 executes the processing of steps S6502 to S6509. And function),
When or after the second predetermined process is completed, the return execution unit (in the 47th embodiment, the step S3804 in the main CPU 63 in the main CPU 63 in which the information of the flag register saved in the predetermined storage unit is returned to the flag register). The function of executing the processing, the function of executing the processing of step S4404 in the main CPU 63 in the forty-eighth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S4810 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-second embodiment, the main CPU 63 in the sixtyth embodiment , The function of executing the processing of steps S6511 to S6415 in the first embodiment, and the function of executing the processing of steps S6511 to S6518 in the main CPU 63 in the sixty-first embodiment).

  According to the feature DV1, the information of the flag register is stored in a predetermined manner when the situation where the first predetermined processing is being executed is changed to the situation where the second predetermined processing is executed or when the situation where the second predetermined processing is executed is changed. Evacuated to means. Thus, when the second predetermined process is executed, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the flag register from being rewritten when the first predetermined process is executed. When or after the second predetermined process is completed, the information saved in the predetermined storage unit is returned to the flag register. Thus, when the second predetermined process is completed, it is possible to execute a process different from the second predetermined process from the state of the flag register before the execution of the second predetermined process. As described above, various controls can be suitably performed.

Feature DV2. The predetermined storage means,
A first predetermined storage area (a work area 221 for specific control, a stack area 222 for specific control) in which information is stored when the first predetermined processing is executed;
A second predetermined storage area (a work area 223 for non-specific control, a stack area 224 for non-specific control) in which information is stored when the second predetermined processing is executed;
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein said saving execution means saves the information of said flag register to said first predetermined storage area.

  According to the feature DV2, since the first storage area and the second predetermined storage area are provided in the predetermined storage means, the storage destination of the information in the predetermined storage means can be determined by the first predetermined processing and the second predetermined processing. It is possible to make a clear difference. This makes it possible to prevent information used in the other process from being erased when one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process is executed. In this case, when the situation where the second predetermined processing is executed is changed from the situation where the first predetermined processing is executed or the situation where the second predetermined processing is executed, the information of the flag register is stored in the first predetermined storage area. Evacuated to This makes it possible to save the information of the flag register immediately before the start of the second predetermined processing, and to save the information without using the second predetermined storage area.

Feature DV3. The first predetermined storage area is capable of storing information and reading information when the first predetermined processing is performed, and is capable of reading information when the second predetermined processing is performed. Information cannot be stored,
The second predetermined storage area is capable of storing information and reading information when the second predetermined processing is executed, and is capable of reading information when the first predetermined processing is executed. The gaming machine according to Feature DV2, wherein information cannot be stored.

  According to the feature DV3, the first predetermined storage area can be handled as a dedicated storage area for the first predetermined processing, and the second predetermined storage area can be handled as a dedicated storage area for the second predetermined processing. Becomes

Feature DV4. The predetermined storage means,
A stack area in which information can be written by a push instruction and information can be read by a pop instruction (stack area 222 for specific control);
A work area (a work area 221 for specific control) in which writing and reading of information can be performed by a load instruction.
The gaming machine according to any one of claims DV1 to DV3, wherein the save execution means saves information of the flag register to one of the stack area and the work area.

  According to the feature DV4, when the situation where the first predetermined process is being executed is changed to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, or when the situation where the second predetermined process is executed is reached, the stack area in the second predetermined storage area is set. The information of the flag register is saved in one of the work area and the work area. As a result, the save destinations of the information can be consolidated, and the processing configuration for saving and the processing configuration for restoring can be simplified.

  Feature DV5. The gaming machine according to claim 4, wherein said retreat execution means retreats information of said flag register to said work area.

  According to the feature DV5, since the save destination of the information of the flag register is the work area, it is possible to save the information without performing the cumulative change of the stack pointer.

Feature DV6. The evacuation execution means,
Means for storing the information of the flag register in a predetermined register provided in the internal storage means (the function of executing the processing of steps S6402 and S6403 in the main CPU 63 in the 60th embodiment, the function of the main CPU 63 in the 61st embodiment) Function for executing the processing of steps S6502 to S6505), and
Means for storing the information of the flag register stored in the predetermined register in the predetermined storage means (the function of executing the processing of step S6404 in the main CPU 63 in the 60th embodiment, the step in the main CPU 63 in the 61st embodiment) The gaming machine according to any one of features DV1 to DV5, comprising: (a function of executing the process of S6506).

  According to the feature DV6, even if the information of the flag register cannot be directly saved to the predetermined storage means as an instruction of the control means, the writing of the information to the predetermined register and the predetermined information of the information stored in the predetermined register are performed. Using the writing to the storage means, the information of the flag register can be saved to the predetermined storage means.

  In addition, for the configuration of the features DV1 to DV6, the features DA1 to DA15, the features DB1 to DB7, the features DC1 to DC5, the features DD1 to DD10, the features DE1 to DE6, the features DF1 to DF3, the features DG1 to DG18, and the features DH1 to DH1. DH7, features DI1 to DI9, features DJ1 to DJ4, features DK1 to DK7, features DL1 to DL20, features DM1 to DM7, features DN1 to DN6, features DO1 to DO11, features DP1 to DP12, features DQ1 to DQ5, features DR1 to DR1. DR17, features DS1 to DS8, features DT1 to DT13, features DU1 to DU8, features DV1 to DV6, features DW1 to DW11, features DX1 to DX11, features DY1 to DY11, features DZ1 to DZ10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b1 b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9 Features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 15, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, Features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, Features z1 to z6, features αDA1 to αDA10, features αDB1 to αDB6, features αDC1 to αDC13, features αDD1 to αDD9, features αDE1 to αDE5, features αDF1 to αDF9, features αDG1 to αDG10, features αDH1 to αDH11, features αDI1 to αDI8, Features αDJ1 to αDJ14, Features αDK1 to αDK8, Features αDL1 to αDL11, Features αDM1 to αDM8, Features αDN1 to α DN6, features αDO1 to αDO7, features αDP1 to αDP7, features αDQ1 to αDQ9, features αDR1 to αDR8, features αDS1 to αDS3, features αDT1 to αDT4, features αDU1 to αDU10, features αDV1 to αDV5, features αDW1 to αDW9, and features αDX1. Any one or a plurality of configurations among αDX4, features αDY1 to αDY11, features αDZ1 to αDZ4, and features αa1 to αa3 may be applied. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

<Characteristic DW group>
Feature DW1. A control unit (main CPU 63) for executing various processes;
The control means,
A first predetermined process executing means for executing a first predetermined process among the various processes (a function of executing a process other than the management execution process by the main CPU 63 in the 47th to 66th embodiments);
A second predetermined process executing means for executing a second predetermined process among the various processes (a function of executing a management execution process by the main CPU 63 in the 47th to 66th embodiments);
A first predetermined storage area (a work area 221 for specific control, a stack area 222 for specific control) in which information is stored when the first predetermined processing is executed;
A second predetermined storage area (a work area 223 for non-specific control, a stack area 224 for non-specific control) in which information is stored when the second predetermined processing is executed;
An abnormal event monitoring means (program monitoring unit 252) for monitoring whether or not an abnormal event has occurred;
On the basis of the fact that the abnormal event has been identified by the abnormal event monitoring means, it is possible to cause a situation in which the information erasing process is performed on at least the first predetermined storage area. A erasing state generating means (reset signal output unit 251).

  According to the feature DW1, the first predetermined storage area and the second predetermined storage area are provided, and the first predetermined storage area is treated as a storage area dedicated to the first predetermined processing, and the second predetermined storage area is provided. It is treated as a dedicated storage area for the second predetermined process. Thus, it is possible to make the storage destination of the information in the predetermined storage device clearly different between the first predetermined processing and the second predetermined processing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent information used in the other processing from being erased when one of the first predetermined processing and the second predetermined processing is executed. Further, based on the fact that the occurrence of the abnormal event has been specified, the information erasing process is performed on at least the first predetermined storage area. This makes it possible to prevent the first predetermined processing from being executed in a state where the information in the first predetermined storage area is held as it is even though an abnormal event has occurred.

Feature DW2. The control means includes:
Means for executing processing for storing power failure correspondence information when the supply of operating power to the control means is stopped (in the 62nd embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps S6709 and S6710 in the main CPU 63; In the sixty-fourth embodiment, the function of executing the processes of steps S7609 to S7611 in the main CPU 63)
In a situation where the power failure correspondence information is not stored, when the supply of the operating power to the control unit is started and the process at the time of starting the supply is executed, the information erasing process is performed on at least the first predetermined storage area. (The function of executing the process of step S6607 in the main CPU 63 in the 62nd embodiment, the function of executing the clearing process at the time of abnormality in the main CPU 63 in the 63rd embodiment, the 64th embodiment The main CPU 63 has a function of executing the processing of steps S7704, S7705, S7808, and S7810).
The erasure status generating unit is configured to start the supply by the control unit in a state where the power failure correspondence information is not stored based on the fact that the abnormal event monitoring unit specifies that the abnormal event has occurred. The gaming machine according to feature DW1, wherein the process at the time is executed.

  According to the feature DW2, when the supply of the operating power to the control unit is started and the process at the time of starting the supply is executed in a situation where the power failure handling information is not stored, at least the first predetermined process is performed. By being executed on the storage area, the information of the first predetermined storage area is held as it is when the supply of the operating power to the control unit is started in a situation where the processing at the time of the power failure is not properly performed. In this state, it is possible to prevent the first predetermined process from being executed. In this case, based on the fact that the occurrence of the abnormal event has been specified, the processing at the start of supply is executed by the control means in a situation where the power failure handling information is not stored. With this configuration, when the processing at the start of supply is executed by the control means in a situation where the power failure correspondence information is not stored, the information erasing process is performed, and the information is deleted when an abnormal event occurs. It is possible to execute the erasing process.

Feature DW3. The control means performs various processes when receiving a reset signal, and receives the reset signal from a situation where the reset signal is not received in a situation where operating power is supplied. The process at the time of starting the supply is started based on the fact that
The erasing state generating means, based on the fact that the abnormal event has occurred by the abnormal event monitoring means, based on the control means, after the reset means to the state that does not receive the reset signal, The gaming machine according to claim DW2, wherein the gaming machine receives the reset signal.

  According to the feature DW3, the above-described excellent effects can be obtained by switching the reception state of the reset signal.

Feature DW4. The control unit is configured to temporarily store information in an internal storage unit (a register and a program counter of the main CPU 63) at the time of executing a process, and stores the information stored in the internal storage unit in the first predetermined storage. It is a configuration that can be temporarily evacuated to the area,
The abnormal event monitoring means, as the abnormal event, monitors whether an abnormality has occurred in the information stored in the internal storage means,
The erasure status generating unit may generate a status in which the information erasure process is performed on at least both the first predetermined storage area and the internal storage unit. A gaming machine according to claim 1.

  According to the feature DW4, since the information stored in the internal storage means can be temporarily saved to the first predetermined storage area, if an abnormality occurs in the information stored in the internal storage means, There is a possibility that an abnormality has occurred in the information stored in the predetermined storage area. In this case, if an abnormality occurs in the information stored in the internal storage means, the information is deleted not only in the internal storage means but also in the first predetermined storage area. Thus, it is possible to prevent the first predetermined processing from being executed as it is, even though an abnormality has occurred in the information stored in the first predetermined storage area.

  Feature DW5. The erasure status generation means may prevent the information erasure process from being performed on the second predetermined storage area even if the abnormal event monitoring means specifies that the abnormal event has occurred. The gaming machine according to any one of features DW1 to DW4, characterized in that:

  According to the feature DW5, even if an abnormal event occurs, information can be stored and held in the second predetermined storage area.

  Feature DW6. The erasure status generation means may execute the erasure processing of the information based on the fact that the abnormal event has occurred by the abnormal event monitoring means. The gaming machine according to any one of features DW1 to DW4, wherein a situation is generated for both of the above.

  According to the feature DW6, the information erasing process is executed for both the first predetermined storage area and the second predetermined storage area based on the fact that the occurrence of the abnormal event is specified. This makes it possible to prevent the first predetermined processing from being executed in a state where the information of the first predetermined storage area is held as it is despite the occurrence of the abnormal event, and the occurrence of the abnormal event. Despite this, it is possible to prevent the second predetermined processing from being executed in a state where the information in the second predetermined storage area is held as it is.

  Feature DW7. The information erasing process for the first predetermined storage area is executed in the first predetermined process, and the information erasing process for the second predetermined storage area is executed in the second predetermined process. A gaming machine according to DW6.

  According to the feature DW7, regarding the information erasing process, the first predetermined storage area is treated as a dedicated storage area for the first predetermined processing, and the second predetermined storage area is treated as a dedicated storage area for the second predetermined processing. It is possible to be done.

Feature DW8. The first predetermined process includes a process for controlling the progress of the game,
The gaming machine according to any one of features DW1 to DW7, wherein the second predetermined process includes a process for managing a game history.

  According to the feature DW8, the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and the process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process, thereby controlling the progress of the game. It is possible to prevent information used in the processing for managing the game history from being rewritten when executing the processing for the game.

  Feature DW9. The second predetermined storage area is a history storage area (normal counter area 231, open / close execution mode counter area 232) in which, when a predetermined event occurs due to the execution of a game, history information of the game corresponding to the event is stored. The gaming machine according to feature DW8, further comprising a high-frequency support mode counter area 233).

  According to the feature DW9, when a predetermined event has occurred, history information corresponding to the event has been stored in the history storage area. As a result, information for managing the number of times or frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be stored and held in the gaming machine, and the management of the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event is preferable by using the managed information. Can be performed. Further, since the history information is stored in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the history information and unauthorized modification. In addition, a process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and a process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process, so that the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed. During execution, it is possible to prevent information stored in the history storage area from being rewritten.

  Feature DW10. The second predetermined process executing means is an information deriving means (step S4208 in the main CPU 63) for deriving mode information corresponding to a game result in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage area. The gaming machine according to feature DW9, further comprising:

  According to the feature DW10, the management of the game history such as the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event is performed by using the history information stored in the history storage area to derive the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period. The result can be grasped.

  Feature DW11. The gaming machine according to claim DW10, wherein the second predetermined storage area includes a mode information storage area (operation result storage area 234) for storing the mode information derived by the information deriving unit.

  According to the feature DW11, when the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period is derived using the history information, the mode information is stored in the mode information storage area. Thereby, it is possible to grasp the management result of the game history at an arbitrary timing. In addition, a process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and a process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process, so that the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed. At the time of execution, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the aspect information storage area from being rewritten.

  Note that, with respect to the configurations of the features DW1 to DW11, the features DA1 to DA15, the features DB1 to DB7, the features DC1 to DC5, the features DD1 to DD10, the features DE1 to DE6, the features DF1 to DF3, the features DG1 to DG18, and the features DH1 to DH1. DH7, features DI1 to DI9, features DJ1 to DJ4, features DK1 to DK7, features DL1 to DL20, features DM1 to DM7, features DN1 to DN6, features DO1 to DO11, features DP1 to DP12, features DQ1 to DQ5, features DR1 to DR1. DR17, features DS1 to DS8, features DT1 to DT13, features DU1 to DU8, features DV1 to DV6, features DW1 to DW11, features DX1 to DX11, features DY1 to DY11, features DZ1 to DZ10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b1 b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e , Features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 15, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7. , Features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9. , Features z1 to z6, features αDA1 to αDA10, features αDB1 to αDB6, features αDC1 to αDC13, features αDD1 to αDD9, features αDE1 to αDE5, features αDF1 to αDF9, features αDG1 to αDG10, features αDH1 to αDH11, and features αDI1 to αDI8. , Feature αDJ1 to αDJ14, feature αDK1 to αDK8, feature αDL1 to αDL11, feature αDM1 to αDM8, feature αDN1 αDN6, features αDO1 to αDO7, features αDP1 to αDP7, features αDQ1 to αDQ9, features αDR1 to αDR8, features αDS1 to αDS3, features αDT1 to αDT4, features αDU1 to αDU10, features αDV1 to αDV5, features αDW1 to αDW9, and features αDX1. Any one or a plurality of configurations among αDX4, features αDY1 to αDY11, features αDZ1 to αDZ4, and features αa1 to αa3 may be applied. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

<Characteristic DX group>
Features DX1. A control unit (main CPU 63) for executing various processes;
The control means,
A first predetermined process executing means for executing a first predetermined process among the various processes (a function of executing a process other than the management execution process by the main CPU 63 in the 47th to 66th embodiments);
A second predetermined process executing means for executing a second predetermined process among the various processes (a function of executing a management execution process by the main CPU 63 in the 47th to 66th embodiments);
A first predetermined storage area (a work area 221 for specific control, a stack area 222 for specific control) in which information is stored when the first predetermined processing is executed;
A second predetermined storage area (a work area 223 for non-specific control, a stack area 224 for non-specific control) in which information is stored when the second predetermined processing is executed;
The second predetermined process execution means is configured to execute an information erasure process on the second predetermined storage area as the second predetermined process based on occurrence of an erasure trigger. In the fifty-seventh embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S6103 and S6107 in the main CPU 63, in the sixty-second embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S7204 in the main CPU 63, and in the thirty-sixth embodiment, in step S7508 of the main CPU 63. (In the sixty-fourth embodiment, a function of executing steps S7808 and S7810 in the main CPU 63).

  According to the feature DX1, the first predetermined storage area and the second predetermined storage area are provided, and the first predetermined storage area is treated as a storage area dedicated to the first predetermined processing, and the second predetermined storage area is It is handled as a dedicated storage area for the second predetermined process. Thus, it is possible to make the storage destination of the information in the predetermined storage device clearly different between the first predetermined processing and the second predetermined processing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent information used in the other processing from being erased when one of the first predetermined processing and the second predetermined processing is executed.

  In addition, when an erasure trigger occurs, the information erasing process is performed on the second predetermined storage area, so that the second predetermined storage area may be irrespective of any abnormality occurring in the second predetermined storage area. Can be prevented from being executed in a state where the information is held as it is. Further, since the erasing process of the information is executed in the second predetermined process, it is possible to prevent the first predetermined process from being interposed in updating the information in the second predetermined storage area.

  Feature DX2. The erasure execution means executes the erasure process on the second predetermined storage area while preventing non-erasure target information (management monitoring flag, return address information, various register information) from being erased. The gaming machine according to Feature DX1.

  According to the feature DX2, the information erasing process for the second predetermined storage area is performed while preventing the non-erasure target information in the second predetermined storage area from being erased. This makes it possible to execute the information erasing process for the second predetermined storage area while preventing even the necessary information from being erased.

Feature DX3. The second predetermined process execution means is configured to execute the second predetermined process when the first predetermined process is executed or when the second predetermined process is executed. Storage execution means (mainly in the 62nd embodiment, main storage in the 62nd embodiment) for storing return correspondence information (return address information, information of various registers) required when returning to the situation where the first predetermined processing is executed; A function of the side CPU 63 for executing the processing of steps S7102 to S7107, a function of executing the processing of steps S7502 to S7507 in the main CPU 63 in the 63rd embodiment, and a step S7802 to step S7807 of the main CPU 63 in the 64th embodiment. Function to execute the process)
The game according to claim DX2, wherein said erasure execution means executes the information erasure process on said second predetermined storage area while preventing said return correspondence information from being erased as said non-erasure target information. Machine.

  According to the feature DX3, the second predetermined processing is performed while preventing even the return correspondence information necessary when returning from the state of executing the second predetermined processing to the state of executing the first predetermined processing from being deleted. It becomes possible to execute a process of deleting information from the storage area.

  Feature DX4. The storage execution unit may store, in the second predetermined storage area, information on a return address of a program when the second predetermined processing ends and returns to the first predetermined processing, as the return correspondence information. The gaming machine according to Feature DX3.

  According to the feature DX4, the information erasing process is performed on the second predetermined storage area while the information of the return address of the program when returning to the first predetermined processing is not erased. Even if the information erasing process is executed, the program can return to the predetermined program in the first predetermined process when the second predetermined process ends.

Feature DX5. The control unit is configured to temporarily store information in an internal storage unit (register of the main CPU 63) when executing the process.
The gaming machine according to claim DX3 or DX4, wherein said storage execution means stores information stored in said internal storage means as said return correspondence information in said second predetermined storage area.

  According to the feature DX5, the information erasing process is performed on the second predetermined storage area while preventing the information of the internal storage unit used in the first predetermined processing from being erased. On the other hand, even if the information erasing process is executed, the information used in the first predetermined process can be returned to the internal storage means when the second predetermined process is completed.

  Feature DX6. The erasure execution means causes the information erasure process to be performed on the second predetermined storage area based on the occurrence of an abnormality in the second predetermined storage area, as an occurrence of the erasure trigger. The gaming machine according to any one of features DX1 to DX5.

  According to the feature DX6, the information erasing process is performed on the second predetermined storage area based on the occurrence of the abnormality in the second predetermined storage area. It is possible to prevent the second predetermined processing from being executed in the state in which it is present.

  Feature DX7. The second predetermined processing execution means is means for monitoring whether or not the second predetermined storage area is normal as the second predetermined processing (in the 62nd embodiment, the processing of steps S7201 to S7203 in the main CPU 63) The functioning machine according to Feature DX6, further comprising:

  According to the feature DX7, not only the information erasing process for the second predetermined storage area but also the monitoring of whether the second predetermined storage area is normal is performed in the second predetermined processing without the first predetermined processing. Since the process is executed, it is possible to execute monitoring of whether the second predetermined storage area is normal and execution of information erasure processing for the second predetermined storage area as a series of processing in the second predetermined processing. .

Feature DX8. The first predetermined process includes a process for controlling the progress of the game,
The gaming machine according to any one of features DX1 to DX7, wherein the second predetermined process includes a process for managing a game history.

  According to the feature DX8, a process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and a process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process, thereby controlling the progress of the game. It is possible to prevent information used in the processing for managing the game history from being rewritten when executing the processing for the game.

  Feature DX9. The second predetermined storage area is a history storage area (normal counter area 231, open / close execution mode counter area 232) in which, when a predetermined event occurs due to the execution of a game, history information of the game corresponding to the event is stored. The gaming machine according to feature DX8, further comprising a high-frequency support mode counter area 233).

  According to the feature DX9, when a predetermined event has occurred, history information corresponding to the event is stored in the history storage area. As a result, information for managing the number of times or frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be stored and held in the gaming machine, and the management of the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event is preferable by using the managed information. Can be performed. Further, since the history information is stored in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the history information and unauthorized modification. In addition, a process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and a process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process, so that the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed. During execution, it is possible to prevent information stored in the history storage area from being rewritten.

  Feature DX10. The second predetermined process executing means is an information deriving means (step S4208 in the main CPU 63) for deriving mode information corresponding to a game result in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage area. The gaming machine according to feature DX9, further comprising:

  According to the feature DX10, by using the history information stored in the history storage area, mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period is derived, so that the management of the game history such as the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be managed. The result can be grasped.

  Feature DX11. The gaming machine according to Feature DX10, wherein the second predetermined storage area includes a mode information storage area (operation result storage area 234) for storing the mode information derived by the information deriving unit.

  According to the feature DX11, when the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period is derived using the history information, the mode information is stored in the mode information storage area. Thereby, it is possible to grasp the management result of the game history at an arbitrary timing. In addition, a process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and a process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process, so that the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed. At the time of execution, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the aspect information storage area from being rewritten.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features DX1 to DX11, the features DA1 to DA15, the features DB1 to DB7, the features DC1 to DC5, the features DD1 to DD10, the features DE1 to DE6, the features DF1 to DF3, the features DG1 to DG18, and the features DH1 to DH1. DH7, features DI1 to DI9, features DJ1 to DJ4, features DK1 to DK7, features DL1 to DL20, features DM1 to DM7, features DN1 to DN6, features DO1 to DO11, features DP1 to DP12, features DQ1 to DQ5, features DR1 to DR1. DR17, features DS1 to DS8, features DT1 to DT13, features DU1 to DU8, features DV1 to DV6, features DW1 to DW11, features DX1 to DX11, features DY1 to DY11, features DZ1 to DZ10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b1 b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e , Features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 15, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7. , Features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9. , Features z1 to z6, features αDA1 to αDA10, features αDB1 to αDB6, features αDC1 to αDC13, features αDD1 to αDD9, features αDE1 to αDE5, features αDF1 to αDF9, features αDG1 to αDG10, features αDH1 to αDH11, and features αDI1 to αDI8. , Feature αDJ1 to αDJ14, feature αDK1 to αDK8, feature αDL1 to αDL11, feature αDM1 to αDM8, feature αDN1 αDN6, features αDO1 to αDO7, features αDP1 to αDP7, features αDQ1 to αDQ9, features αDR1 to αDR8, features αDS1 to αDS3, features αDT1 to αDT4, features αDU1 to αDU10, features αDV1 to αDV5, features αDW1 to αDW9, and features αDX1. Any one or a plurality of configurations among αDX4, features αDY1 to αDY11, features αDZ1 to αDZ4, and features αa1 to αa3 may be applied. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

<Characteristic DY group>
Feature DY1. A control unit (main CPU 63) for executing various processes;
The control means,
A first predetermined process executing means for executing a first predetermined process among the various processes (a function of executing a process other than the management execution process by the main CPU 63 in the 47th to 66th embodiments);
A second predetermined process executing means for executing a second predetermined process among the various processes (a function of executing a management execution process by the main CPU 63 in the 47th to 66th embodiments);
A first predetermined storage area (a work area 221 for specific control, a stack area 222 for specific control) in which information is stored when the first predetermined processing is executed;
A second predetermined storage area (a work area 223 for non-specific control, a stack area 224 for non-specific control) in which information is stored when the second predetermined processing is executed;
A first calculating means for calculating first reference numerical value information corresponding to a plurality of pieces of information stored in the first predetermined storage area (a function for executing the processing of steps S6604 and S6710 in the main CPU 63 in the 62nd embodiment) The sixty-third embodiment has a function of executing the processing of step S7304 in the main CPU 63, and the sixty-fourth embodiment has a function of executing the processing of steps S7610 and S7701 in the main CPU 63). Gaming machine.

  According to the feature DY1, the first predetermined storage area and the second predetermined storage area are provided, and the first predetermined storage area is treated as a storage area dedicated to the first predetermined processing, and the second predetermined storage area is provided. It is handled as a dedicated storage area for the second predetermined process. Thus, it is possible to make the storage destination of the information in the predetermined storage device clearly different between the first predetermined processing and the second predetermined processing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent information used in the other processing from being erased when one of the first predetermined processing and the second predetermined processing is executed. In this case, first reference numerical value information corresponding to a plurality of pieces of information stored in the first predetermined storage area is calculated. By using the first reference numerical value information, it is possible to specify whether or not an information abnormality has occurred only in the first predetermined storage area.

  Feature DY2. An information erasing unit configured to execute an information erasing process on the first predetermined storage area on the basis of specifying that an abnormality has occurred in the first reference numerical information calculated by the first calculating unit; (In the 62nd embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S6607 in the main CPU 63, in the 63rd embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S7401 and S7402 in the main CPU 63, and in the 64th embodiment, the function of the main CPU 63 The gaming machine described in Feature DY1 characterized by having a function of executing the processing of S7704 and Step S7705).

  According to the feature DY2, when the occurrence of an abnormality is identified with respect to the first reference numerical information, the information erasing process is performed on the first predetermined storage area. The first predetermined processing can be prevented from being executed while the information of the first predetermined storage area is held as it is.

Feature DY3. The first calculating means includes:
A first power outage calculating means for calculating the first reference numerical value information when the supply of operating power to the control means is stopped (a function of executing the processing of step S6710 in the main CPU 63 in the 62nd embodiment; In the sixty-fourth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S7610 in the main CPU 63)
A first power-on calculation means for calculating the first reference numerical value information when the supply of operating power to the control means is started (a function of executing the processing of step S6604 in the main CPU 63 in the 62nd embodiment; The sixty-third embodiment has a function of executing the processing of step S7304 in the main CPU 63, and the sixty-fourth embodiment has a function of executing the processing of step S7701 in the main CPU 63).
The information erasing means is configured to determine whether the first reference numerical information calculated by the first power outage calculating means does not match the first reference numerical information calculated by the first power on calculating means. The gaming machine according to the feature DY2, wherein the information erasing process is performed on at least the first predetermined storage area.

  According to the feature DY3, it is possible to specify whether or not the information of the first predetermined storage area is stored and held with the situation where the supply of the operation power is stopped by calculating the first reference numerical information. Becomes Then, if the information in the first predetermined storage area is not stored and held across the state in which the supply of the operating power is stopped, the information erasing process is performed on the first predetermined storage area, so that the information abnormality occurs. It is possible to prevent the first predetermined processing from being executed in a state where the information of the first predetermined storage area is held as it is despite the occurrence of.

  Feature DY4. The information erasing unit may not execute the information erasing process on the second predetermined storage area even if an abnormality has been identified with respect to the first reference numerical information calculated by the first calculating unit. The gaming machine according to feature DY2 or DY3.

  According to the feature DY4, when the occurrence of an abnormality is specified for the first reference numerical information, the information erasing process is performed on the first predetermined storage area, while the information is erased on the second predetermined storage area. No action is taken. This makes it possible to prevent even the information in the second predetermined storage area from being erased in a situation where the information abnormality has occurred in the first predetermined storage area.

  Feature DY5. The gaming machine according to any one of features DY1 to DY4, wherein the first reference numerical information is information that does not change according to information stored in the second predetermined storage area.

  According to the feature DY5, in a configuration in which the first predetermined storage area and the second predetermined storage area exist, it is possible to individually specify the information abnormality relating to the first predetermined storage area using the first reference numerical information. It becomes possible.

  Feature DY6. A second calculating means (a function of executing the processing of steps S7611 and S7706 in the main CPU 63) for calculating second reference numerical value information corresponding to a plurality of pieces of information stored in the second predetermined storage area is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of features DY1 to DY5.

  According to the feature DY6, second reference numerical value information corresponding to a plurality of pieces of information stored in the second predetermined storage area is calculated. By using the second reference numerical information, it is possible to specify whether or not an information abnormality has occurred only in the second predetermined storage area.

  Feature DY7. Means for causing information erasure processing to be performed on at least the second predetermined storage area based on the fact that an abnormality has been identified with respect to the second reference numerical information calculated by the second calculation means ( The gaming machine according to feature DY6, further comprising a function of executing the processes of steps S7808 and S7810 in the main CPU 63.

  According to the characteristic DY7, when the occurrence of an abnormality is specified with respect to the second reference numerical information, the information erasing process is performed on the second predetermined storage area. It is possible to prevent the second predetermined processing from being executed while the information in the second predetermined storage area is held as it is.

Feature DY8. The first predetermined process includes a process for controlling the progress of the game,
The gaming machine according to any one of the features DY1 to DY7, wherein the second predetermined process includes a process for managing a game history.

  According to the feature DY8, the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and the process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process, thereby controlling the progress of the game. It is possible to prevent information used in the processing for managing the game history from being rewritten when executing the processing for the game.

  Feature DY9. The second predetermined storage area is a history storage area (normal counter area 231, open / close execution mode counter area 232) in which, when a predetermined event occurs due to the execution of a game, history information of the game corresponding to the event is stored. The gaming machine according to feature DY8, characterized by comprising a high-frequency support mode counter area 233).

  According to the feature DY9, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to the event is stored in the history storage area. As a result, information for managing the number of times or frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be stored and held in the gaming machine, and the management of the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event is preferable by using the managed information. Can be performed. Further, since the history information is stored in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the history information and unauthorized modification. In addition, a process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and a process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process, so that the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed. During execution, it is possible to prevent information stored in the history storage area from being rewritten.

  Feature DY10. The second predetermined process executing means is an information deriving means (step S4208 in the main CPU 63) for deriving mode information corresponding to a game result in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage area. The gaming machine according to feature DY9, further comprising a function of executing the processing of (1).

  According to the feature DY10, the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period is derived by using the history information stored in the history storage area, so that the management of the game history such as the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event is performed. The result can be grasped.

  Feature DY11. The gaming machine according to feature DY10, wherein the second predetermined storage area includes a mode information storage area (operation result storage area 234) for storing the mode information derived by the information deriving unit.

  According to the characteristic DY11, when the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period is derived using the history information, the mode information is stored in the mode information storage area. Thereby, it is possible to grasp the management result of the game history at an arbitrary timing. In addition, a process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and a process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process, so that the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed. At the time of execution, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the aspect information storage area from being rewritten.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features DY1 to DY11, the features DA1 to DA15, the features DB1 to DB7, the features DC1 to DC5, the features DD1 to DD10, the features DE1 to DE6, the features DF1 to DF3, the features DG1 to DG18, and the features DH1 to DH1. DH7, features DI1 to DI9, features DJ1 to DJ4, features DK1 to DK7, features DL1 to DL20, features DM1 to DM7, features DN1 to DN6, features DO1 to DO11, features DP1 to DP12, features DQ1 to DQ5, features DR1 to DR1. DR17, features DS1 to DS8, features DT1 to DT13, features DU1 to DU8, features DV1 to DV6, features DW1 to DW11, features DX1 to DX11, features DY1 to DY11, features DZ1 to DZ10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b1 b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e , Features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 15, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7. , Features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9. , Features z1 to z6, features αDA1 to αDA10, features αDB1 to αDB6, features αDC1 to αDC13, features αDD1 to αDD9, features αDE1 to αDE5, features αDF1 to αDF9, features αDG1 to αDG10, features αDH1 to αDH11, and features αDI1 to αDI8. , Feature αDJ1 to αDJ14, feature αDK1 to αDK8, feature αDL1 to αDL11, feature αDM1 to αDM8, feature αDN1 αDN6, features αDO1 to αDO7, features αDP1 to αDP7, features αDQ1 to αDQ9, features αDR1 to αDR8, features αDS1 to αDS3, features αDT1 to αDT4, features αDU1 to αDU10, features αDV1 to αDV5, features αDW1 to αDW9, and features αDX1. Any one or a plurality of configurations among αDX4, features αDY1 to αDY11, features αDZ1 to αDZ4, and features αa1 to αa3 may be applied. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

  According to the invention relating to the feature DT group, the feature DU group, the feature DV group, the feature DW group, the feature DX group, and the feature DY group, the following problems can be solved.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine has a dish storage section for storing game balls given to a player on the front face of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to a game ball launching device, It is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage unit, for example. Further, in a pachinko machine, a configuration including an upper dish storage section and a lower dish storage section as a dish storage section is also known. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper dish storage section is a game ball launching device. And the surplus game balls in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  Further, in the slot machine, when a new game is started by operating the start lever while a medal is bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation of the reel is started by the rotation start control being executed by the control means, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means executes the rotation start control. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation stop of the reels corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in the gaming machine as exemplified above, it is necessary to appropriately perform various controls, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Characteristic DZ group>
Feature DZ1. Setting means (a function of executing a setting value updating process in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage;
Status generating means (function for executing the processing of steps S7905, S7916 and S7917 in the main CPU 63) for setting a settable status in which the set value to be used can be changed;
In a situation where the supply of the operating power to the control means (main CPU 63) having the setting means is started and the processing at the time of the supply start is being executed, the setting value of the use target in a situation other than the situation where the setting is possible is performed. A gaming machine comprising: a setting notifying unit (a function of executing a setting confirmation process in the main CPU 63) for performing notification.

  According to the feature DZ1, since a setting value to be used is set from a plurality of set values corresponding to the player's advantage, the player can use a more advantageous setting value. That you expect. In this case, in order to confirm the set value set as the use target, it is necessary to temporarily stop the supply of the operating power to the control unit and then restart the supply of the operating power to the control unit. . As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to illegally check the set value. In addition, since the setting value is notified in the situation where the process at the time of the supply start is being executed, it is not necessary to notify the setting value in the situation where the game is interrupted. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately notify the set value.

  Feature DZ2. The gaming machine according to claim DZ1, wherein the status generating means sets the settable status in a status where the process at the time of the supply start is being executed.

  According to the feature DZ2, a settable situation in which a set value to be used can be set and a situation in which the set value of the use target is notified in a situation other than the settable situation are determined at the start of supply. It is possible to concentrate on the situation where the processing is being executed.

Feature DZ3. A first specifying unit (a function of executing the processes of steps S7912 and S7916 in the main CPU 63) for specifying the occurrence of the first trigger event;
The setting notifying unit may perform the setting based on a situation in which the process at the time of the supply start is being executed and a situation in which the occurrence of the first trigger event has been identified by the first identifying unit. The gaming machine according to feature DZ1 or DZ2, wherein the setting value of the use target is notified in a situation other than a situation.

  According to the feature DZ3, in order to notify the set value of the use target, it is necessary to not only start the supply of the operating power to the control means but also to generate a first trigger event. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to illegally check the set value.

  Feature DZ4. The gaming machine according to claim DZ3, wherein the first trigger event is that a predetermined operation is performed by a setting key on a setting key insertion section (setting key insertion section 68a).

  According to the feature DZ4, in order to notify the setting of the use target, it is necessary to perform a predetermined operation with the setting key for the setting key insertion unit. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to illegally check the set value.

Feature DZ5. The setting notifying unit is configured to determine that the notification condition is satisfied based on a situation in which the process at the time of the supply start is being executed and a situation in which the occurrence of the first trigger event has been identified by the first identifying unit. In such a case, the setting value of the use target is notified in a situation that is not the setting possible situation,
The condition generating means establishes a setting condition based on a situation in which the process at the time of the supply start is being executed and a situation in which the occurrence of the first trigger event has been identified by the first identifying means. In such a case, the setting possible status is set,
The gaming machine according to feature DZ3 or DZ4, wherein the notification condition and the setting condition are different.

  According to the feature DZ5, in either of the case where the settable state is generated and the case where the set value of the use target is notified, not only the supply of the operation power to the control unit is started but also the first trigger event is generated. Need to be generated. Accordingly, it is possible to make it difficult to perform any of an act of setting a setting value to be used due to fraud and an act of trying to confirm the setting value of the use target due to fraud. On the other hand, since the setting condition for generating the settable state and the notification condition for notifying the setting value of the use target are different, the setting condition and the setting value of the use target are notified. Can be generated independently.

Feature DZ6. A second specifying unit (a function of executing the process of step S7905 in the main CPU 63) for specifying the occurrence of the second trigger event;
The setting condition is a condition in which the occurrence of the first trigger event is specified by the first specifying means in a state where the process at the time of the supply start is being executed, and the second specifying means specifies the occurrence of the second trigger event. It is established based on the situation where the occurrence of the trigger event has been identified,
The notification condition is a condition in which the occurrence of the first trigger event is specified by the first specifying means in a state where the processing at the time of the supply start is being executed, and the second specifying means specifies the occurrence of the second trigger event. The gaming machine according to Feature DZ5, which is established based on a situation where occurrence of a trigger event has not been specified.

  According to the feature DZ6, in order to generate the settable state, it is necessary to start supplying the operating power to the control means and to generate not only the first trigger event but also the second trigger event. Thereby, in either case of setting the setting value to be used, or notifying the setting value of the use object, not only the supply of the operating power to the control unit is started, but also In a configuration in which it is necessary to generate the first trigger event, it is possible to further complicate the operation for generating the settable situation. Therefore, it is possible to more specifically prevent an act of illegally setting a setting value to be used.

  Feature DZ7. The gaming machine according to claim DZ6, wherein the second trigger event is that a predetermined operation means (reset button 68c) is operated.

  According to the feature DZ7, in order to generate the settable state, it is necessary to start the supply of the operating power to the control unit and not only to generate the first trigger event but also to operate the predetermined operation unit. As a result, it is possible to prevent an operation for generating a settable status from becoming excessively complicated while making it difficult to illegally set a setting value to be used. It becomes possible.

  Feature DZ8. An information erasing unit that executes an information erasing process based on a situation in which the occurrence of the second trigger event has been identified by the second identifying unit in a situation where the processing at the time of the supply start is being executed; The gaming machine according to feature DZ6 or DZ7, characterized by having a function of executing the processing of step S7915 in the main CPU 63).

  According to the feature DZ8, the condition for generating the settable situation and the set value of the use target in the situation other than the settable situation are utilized by using the second trigger event necessary for executing the information erasing process. It is possible to make the condition different from the condition for performing the notification.

  Feature DZ9. The gaming machine according to claim DZ8, wherein the information erasing means executes the information erasing process even when the settable situation occurs.

  According to the feature DZ9, it is possible to execute the information erasing process when the setting is possible.

  Feature DZ10. In the situation where the process at the time of the supply start is being executed, the occurrence of the second trigger event is specified by the second specifying means, and the occurrence of the first trigger event is specified by the first specifying means. The gaming machine according to the features DZ8 or DZ9, wherein when the situation is not set, the information erasing process is executed by the information erasing means, though the situation is not the settable situation.

  According to the feature DZ10, depending on whether the first trigger event is generated when the supply of the operating power to the control means is started, the information erasing process is executed and the information is settable, Can be selected when the erasing process is performed but the setting is not possible.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features DZ1 to DZ10, the features DA1 to DA15, the features DB1 to DB7, the features DC1 to DC5, the features DD1 to DD10, the features DE1 to DE6, the features DF1 to DF3, the features DG1 to DG18, and the features DH1 to DH1. DH7, features DI1 to DI9, features DJ1 to DJ4, features DK1 to DK7, features DL1 to DL20, features DM1 to DM7, features DN1 to DN6, features DO1 to DO11, features DP1 to DP12, features DQ1 to DQ5, features DR1 to DR1. DR17, features DS1 to DS8, features DT1 to DT13, features DU1 to DU8, features DV1 to DV6, features DW1 to DW11, features DX1 to DX11, features DY1 to DY11, features DZ1 to DZ10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b1 b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e , Features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 15, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7. , Features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9. , Features z1 to z6, features αDA1 to αDA10, features αDB1 to αDB6, features αDC1 to αDC13, features αDD1 to αDD9, features αDE1 to αDE5, features αDF1 to αDF9, features αDG1 to αDG10, features αDH1 to αDH11, and features αDI1 to αDI8. , Feature αDJ1 to αDJ14, feature αDK1 to αDK8, feature αDL1 to αDL11, feature αDM1 to αDM8, feature αDN1 αDN6, features αDO1 to αDO7, features αDP1 to αDP7, features αDQ1 to αDQ9, features αDR1 to αDR8, features αDS1 to αDS3, features αDT1 to αDT4, features αDU1 to αDU10, features αDV1 to αDV5, features αDW1 to αDW9, and features αDX1. Any one or a plurality of configurations among αDX4, features αDY1 to αDY11, features αDZ1 to αDZ4, and features αa1 to αa3 may be applied. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

<Characteristic a group>
Feature a1. Setting means (a function of executing a setting value updating process in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage;
Status generating means (function for executing the processing of steps S7905, S7916 and S7917 in the main CPU 63) for setting a settable status in which the set value to be used can be changed;
Information erasing means for executing information erasing processing (function of executing processing of step S7915 in main CPU 63);
Setting notifying means (a function of executing a setting confirmation process in the main CPU 63) for notifying the setting value of the use target in a situation other than the setting possible situation;
First specifying means for specifying the occurrence of the first trigger event (the function of executing the processing of steps S7912 and S7916 in the main CPU 63);
A second specifying unit (a function of executing the process of step S7905 in the main CPU 63) for specifying the occurrence of the second opportunity event;
The situation generating means specifies the occurrence of the first trigger event by the first specifying means in a state where the supply of the operating power to the control means having the setting means is started and the processing at the time of starting the supply is being executed. Based on the situation where the occurrence of the second trigger event has been identified by the second identifying means,
The information erasing unit is configured to execute the information erasing process based on a situation in which the occurrence of the second trigger event has been identified by the second identifying unit in a situation where the process at the time of the supply start is being executed. Run
In the situation where the process at the time of the supply start is being executed, the occurrence of the second trigger event is specified by the second specifying means, and the occurrence of the first trigger event is specified by the first specifying means. If it is a situation that has not been performed, the information erasing processing by the information erasing means is executed although it does not become the settable situation,
The setting notifying means is a state in which the occurrence of the first trigger event is specified by the first specifying means in a state in which the processing at the time of the supply start is being executed, and the second specifying means sets the second A gaming machine characterized in that, based on a situation in which the occurrence of a trigger event has not been specified, the setting value of the use target is notified in a situation that is not the settable situation.

  According to the feature a1, since a setting value to be used is set from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage, the player can use a more advantageous setting value. That you expect. Further, since the configuration is such that the information erasing process can be executed, it is possible to prevent a game from being performed even though an information abnormality has occurred. Further, since the configuration is such that the set value set as the use target can be notified, the set value can be confirmed.

  In this case, in order to confirm the set value set as the use target, it is necessary to start the supply of the operating power to the control means and to generate the first trigger event. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to illegally check the set value.

Further, in order to generate the settable state, it is necessary to start supplying the operating power to the control means and to generate not only the first trigger event but also the second trigger event.
Thereby, in either case of setting the set value to be used, or notifying the set value of the use target, not only is the supply of the operating power to the control means started, but also In a configuration in which it is necessary to generate the first trigger event, it is possible to further complicate the operation for generating the settable situation. Therefore, it is possible to more specifically prevent an act of illegally setting a setting value to be used.

  Further, using the second opportunity event required to execute the information erasing process, a condition for generating a settable situation and a setting value of a use target in a situation other than the settable situation are notified. It is possible to make the conditions for making this different.

  Further, depending on whether or not the first trigger event occurs when the supply of the operating power to the control means is started, the information erasing process is executed and the setting is possible, and the information erasing process is performed. It is possible to select the case where the setting is executed but the setting is not possible.

  Feature a2. The gaming machine according to feature a1, wherein the first trigger event is that a predetermined operation is performed by a setting key on a setting key insertion unit (setting key insertion unit 68a).

  According to the feature a2, in order to notify the setting of the use target, it is necessary to perform a predetermined operation using the setting key for the setting key insertion unit. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to illegally check the set value.

  Feature a3. The gaming machine according to features a1 or a2, wherein the second opportunity event is that a predetermined operation means (reset button 68c) is operated.

  According to the feature a3, in order to generate the settable state, it is necessary to start the supply of the operating power to the control unit and not only to generate the first trigger event but also to operate the predetermined operation unit. As a result, it is possible to prevent an operation for generating a settable status from becoming excessively complicated while making it difficult to illegally set a setting value to be used. It becomes possible.

  Note that, for the configurations of the features a1 to a3, the features DA1 to DA15, the features DB1 to DB7, the features DC1 to DC5, the features DD1 to DD10, the features DE1 to DE6, the features DF1 to DF3, the features DG1 to DG18, and the features DH1 to DH1. DH7, features DI1 to DI9, features DJ1 to DJ4, features DK1 to DK7, features DL1 to DL20, features DM1 to DM7, features DN1 to DN6, features DO1 to DO11, features DP1 to DP12, features DQ1 to DQ5, features DR1 to DR1. DR17, features DS1 to DS8, features DT1 to DT13, features DU1 to DU8, features DV1 to DV6, features DW1 to DW11, features DX1 to DX11, features DY1 to DY11, features DZ1 to DZ10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b1 b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 15, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αDA1 to αDA10, features αDB1 to αDB6, features αDC1 to αDC13, features αDD1 to αDD9, features αDE1 to αDE5, features αDF1 to αDF9, features αDG1 to αDG10, features αDH1 to αDH11, features αDI1 to αDI8, and features αDJ1 to αDJ14, features αDK1 to αDK8, features αDL1 to αDL11, features αDM1 to αDM8, features αDN1 to αDN 6, feature αDO1 to αDO7, feature αDP1 to αDP7, feature αDQ1 to αDQ9, feature αDR1 to αDR8, feature αDS1 to αDS3, feature αDT1 to αDT4, feature αDU1 to αDU10, feature αDV1 to αDV5, feature αDW1 to αDW9, and feature αDX1. Any one or a plurality of configurations among αDX4, features αDY1 to αDY11, features αDZ1 to αDZ4, and features αa1 to αa3 may be applied. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

  According to the invention relating to the above-mentioned feature DZ group and the above-mentioned feature a group, the following problems can be solved.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine has a dish storage section for storing game balls given to a player on the front face of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to a game ball launching device, It is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage unit, for example. Further, in a pachinko machine, a configuration including an upper dish storage section and a lower dish storage section as a dish storage section is also known. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper dish storage section is a game ball launching device. And the surplus game balls in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  Further, in the slot machine, when a new game is started by operating the start lever while a medal is bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation of the reel is started by the rotation start control being executed by the control means, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means executes the rotation start control. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation stop of the reels corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in the gaming machines such as those described above, there is a demand for a configuration capable of suitably checking a set value that determines the advantage of the gaming machine, and there is still room for improvement in this respect. .

<Characteristic b group>
Feature b1. Setting means (a function of executing a setting value updating process in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage;
Status generating means (function for executing the processing of steps S7905, S7916 and S7917 in the main CPU 63) for setting a settable status in which the set value to be used can be changed;
Setting monitoring means for executing setting monitoring processing for monitoring whether or not the setting value of the use target is abnormal (a function of executing the processing of step S8220 in the main CPU 63);
A game machine characterized in that the setting monitoring process is not included in the process at the time of starting the supply of operating power to the control unit having the setting unit when the supply of the operating power is started.

  According to the feature b1, since a setting value to be used is set from a plurality of set values corresponding to the player's advantage, the player can use a more advantageous setting value. That you expect. Further, since the setting monitoring process for monitoring whether the setting value of the use target is abnormal is executed, if the setting value of the use target is abnormal, it can be dealt with. Further, since the setting monitoring process is not included in the process at the start of supply, the above-described excellent effects can be achieved while preventing the processing load of the process at the start of supply from increasing.

  Feature b2. The gaming machine according to feature b1, wherein the situation generating means generates the settable situation in a situation where the processing at the time of starting the supply is being executed.

  According to the feature b2, a settable situation occurs in a situation in which the processing at the time of supply start is being performed, so that the set value of the use target can be set before the game is started. . In this case, since the set value to be used in the process at the start of supply is set, the processing load of the process at the start of supply increases accordingly. On the other hand, since the configuration of the feature b1 is provided and the setting monitoring process is not included in the process at the start of the supply, the processing load of the process at the start of the supply is prevented while further increasing the processing load. It is possible to monitor whether the set value is abnormal.

  Feature b3. The gaming machine according to feature b1 or b2, wherein the setting monitoring unit executes the setting monitoring process after the process at the time of starting the supply is completed.

  According to the feature b3, since the setting monitoring process is executed after the process at the start of supply is completed, the set value of the use target is abnormal while preventing the processing load of the process at the start of supply from increasing. It is possible to monitor whether or not.

  Feature b4. The gaming machine according to Feature b3, wherein the setting monitoring unit executes the setting monitoring process each time a monitoring trigger occurs after the process at the start of supply is completed.

  According to the feature b4, the setting monitoring process is executed each time a monitoring trigger occurs after the process at the start of supply is completed, so that it is easy to specify that the setting value of the use target is abnormal.

Feature b5. A means for executing interrupt processing that is started periodically (a function of executing first timer interrupt processing in the main CPU 63);
The gaming machine according to any one of features b1 to b4, wherein the setting monitoring process is included in the interrupt process.

  According to the feature b5, the setting monitoring process is executed every time the device is started periodically, so that it is possible to increase the execution frequency of monitoring whether the setting value of the use target is abnormal.

  Feature b6. The setting monitoring means controls the progress of the game based on the fact that the setting value of the use target is abnormal in the setting monitoring processing (steps S8207 and S8207 in the main CPU 63). The gaming machine according to any one of features b1 to b5, further comprising a function of executing the process of step S8302).

  According to the feature b6, when it is specified that the set value of the use target is abnormal, the progress of the game is regulated, so that the game is continued even though the set value of the use target is abnormal. It is possible to make it not.

  Feature b7. The setting monitoring unit is configured to notify the player that the setting possible state should be generated based on the fact that the setting value of the use target is abnormal in the setting monitoring process. The gaming machine according to any one of features b1 to b6, further comprising a unit for executing the function (a function of executing the process of step S8303 in the main CPU 63).

  According to the feature b7, when it is specified that the set value of the use target is abnormal, the notification that allows the player to recognize that the settable situation should be generated is executed. When the value becomes abnormal, it becomes possible to urge the manager of the gaming hall to eliminate the value.

  For the configurations of the features b1 to b7, the features DA1 to DA15, the features DB1 to DB7, the features DC1 to DC5, the features DD1 to DD10, the features DE1 to DE6, the features DF1 to DF3, the features DG1 to DG18, and the features DH1 to DH1. DH7, features DI1 to DI9, features DJ1 to DJ4, features DK1 to DK7, features DL1 to DL20, features DM1 to DM7, features DN1 to DN6, features DO1 to DO11, features DP1 to DP12, features DQ1 to DQ5, features DR1 to DR1. DR17, features DS1 to DS8, features DT1 to DT13, features DU1 to DU8, features DV1 to DV6, features DW1 to DW11, features DX1 to DX11, features DY1 to DY11, features DZ1 to DZ10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b1 b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 15, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αDA1 to αDA10, features αDB1 to αDB6, features αDC1 to αDC13, features αDD1 to αDD9, features αDE1 to αDE5, features αDF1 to αDF9, features αDG1 to αDG10, features αDH1 to αDH11, features αDI1 to αDI8, and features αDJ1 to αDJ14, features αDK1 to αDK8, features αDL1 to αDL11, features αDM1 to αDM8, features αDN1 to αDN 6, feature αDO1 to αDO7, feature αDP1 to αDP7, feature αDQ1 to αDQ9, feature αDR1 to αDR8, feature αDS1 to αDS3, feature αDT1 to αDT4, feature αDU1 to αDU10, feature αDV1 to αDV5, feature αDW1 to αDW9, and feature αDX1. Any one or a plurality of configurations among αDX4, features αDY1 to αDY11, features αDZ1 to αDZ4, and features αa1 to αa3 may be applied. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

  According to the invention relating to the feature b group, the following problem can be solved.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine has a dish storage section for storing game balls given to a player on the front face of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to a game ball launching device, It is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage unit, for example. Further, in a pachinko machine, a configuration including an upper dish storage section and a lower dish storage section as a dish storage section is also known. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper dish storage section is a game ball launching device. And the surplus game balls in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  Further, in the slot machine, when a new game is started by operating the start lever while a medal is bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation of the reel is started by the rotation start control being executed by the control means, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means executes the rotation start control. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation stop of the reels corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as the example described above, it is necessary to appropriately manage set values that determine the advantage of the gaming machine, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic c group>
Feature c1. Predetermined display means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204);
Predetermined display control means for displaying and controlling the predetermined display means (a function of executing a second timer interrupt process in the main CPU 63),
The predetermined display control means, based on the occurrence of the check trigger, causes the predetermined display means to perform a check display enabling the predetermined display means to confirm whether or not the predetermined display means is normal. A gaming machine having a function of executing the processing of step S9102 in the main CPU 63 in the embodiment, and a function of executing the processing of step S9602 in the main CPU 63 in the 70th embodiment.

  According to the feature c1, the check display is performed by the predetermined display means based on the occurrence of the check trigger. This makes it possible to confirm whether the predetermined display means is normal.

Feature c2. The predetermined display means has a plurality of light emitting units (display segments 321 to 324),
The gaming machine according to feature c1, wherein the check display is a display that allows confirmation that each of the plurality of light emitting units can be in a light emitting state.

  According to the feature c2, each of the plurality of light emitting units of the predetermined display unit is in the light emitting state as the check display. Thereby, it is possible to confirm whether or not each of the plurality of light emitting units of the predetermined display means is in a light emitting state.

  Feature c3. The gaming machine according to feature c1 or c2, wherein the check trigger occurs when supply of operation power is started.

  According to the feature c3, the check display is performed when the supply of the operation power is started, so that it is possible to quickly confirm whether the predetermined display unit is normal.

  Feature c4. The gaming machine according to any one of features c1 to c3, wherein the check trigger occurs each time supply of operation power is started.

  According to the feature c4, it is possible to confirm whether or not the predetermined display means is normal each time the supply of the operation power is started.

  Feature c5. The gaming machine according to any one of features c1 to c4, wherein the check trigger is generated without an operation for generating the check trigger when the supply of the operation power is started.

  According to the feature c5, when the supply of the operating power is started, the check display is performed without any special operation, so that it is easy to confirm whether the predetermined display means is normal. It is possible to do.

  Feature c6. The check control means, when the supply of the operating power is started and the check trigger is generated, causes the predetermined display means to perform the display for checking, and the supply of the operating power is started. The gaming machine according to any one of features c1 to c5, wherein the check display is not performed by the predetermined display means when the check trigger has not occurred.

  According to the feature c6, since the display for the check is performed when the supply of the operating power is started and the check trigger is generated, the predetermined display is performed before the game is started in the gaming machine. It is possible to confirm whether or not the means is normal. On the other hand, even when the supply of the operating power is started, the check display is not performed if the check trigger has not occurred, so the check display is performed in a situation where the check display does not need to be performed. It is possible to make it not.

Feature c7. Means for storing information in the use correspondence storage means (management start flag) based on the fact that the gaming machine has been used in a predetermined manner (a function of executing the processing of step S8606 in the main CPU 63);
The check control unit is configured to generate the check trigger when the operation power supply is started and the information stored in the use correspondence storage unit does not correspond to the use correspondence information; The display for check is performed by the predetermined display means, and when the supply of operating power is started and the information stored in the use correspondence storage means corresponds to the use correspondence information, The gaming machine according to feature c6, wherein the check display is not performed by the predetermined display means assuming that the check trigger has not occurred.

  According to the feature c7, the check display is performed by the predetermined display means when the supply of the operation power is started until the gaming machine is used in the predetermined mode, and the gaming machine is used in the predetermined mode. Even if the supply of the operating power is started based on this, the display for checking is not performed by the predetermined display means. Thus, for example, in the shipping stage of the gaming machine, when the supply of the operating power is started, the display for checking is performed by the predetermined display means, so that whether the predetermined display means is normal is determined. Confirmation is possible, and after the gaming machine has been installed in the gaming hall, it is possible to prevent the display for checking from being performed by the predetermined display means even if the supply of the operating power is started.

Feature c8. The check control means,
Display ending means (a function of executing the processing of step S9002 in the main CPU 63 and a function of making a negative determination in step S9101) for ending the display for checking in the predetermined display means based on the occurrence of an end trigger;
Canceling means for terminating the check display on the predetermined display means based on the occurrence of a cancellation trigger even in a situation where the end trigger has not occurred (the function of executing the process of step S9203 in the main CPU 63 and (A function of making a negative determination in step S9101, a function of executing the process of step S9308 in the main CPU 63, and a function of making a negative determination in step S9101). 2. The gaming machine according to item 1.

  According to the feature c8, since the check display is terminated based on the occurrence of the cancellation trigger even if the termination of the check display has not occurred, the state where the check display is performed in the predetermined display means. Even in this case, it is possible to end the check display and to display another display.

  Feature c9. The gaming machine according to Feature c8, wherein the cancellation trigger is generated based on an operation of a predetermined operation unit (reset button 68c).

  According to the feature c9, the cancellation trigger is generated based on the operation of the predetermined operation unit, so that the check display can be ended at an arbitrary timing.

Feature c10. The predetermined display control means performs another display control means (a function of executing the processes of steps S9004 and S9006 in the main CPU 63) for performing a different display different from the check display when the different display execution status is set. Prepare,
The gaming machine according to the feature c8 or c9, wherein the cancellation trigger is generated based on the different display execution status.

  According to the feature c10, the display for checking is ended when a cancellation trigger occurs based on the execution state of the separate display, so that the separate display can be prioritized over the display for check.

  Feature c11. Features c1 to c1 to c are provided with a unit (a function of executing the process of step S9406 in the main CPU 63) of waiting for the progress of the process while the predetermined display unit is executing the check display. The gaming machine according to any one of c10.

  According to the feature c11, the check display is performed by the predetermined display means in a state where the progress of the process is waiting, so that the check display can be performed while suppressing an increase in the processing load.

  Feature c12. The check control means causes the predetermined display means to start the display for the check before the processing for controlling the progress of the game is executed when the supply of the operation power is started. The gaming machine according to any one of c1 to c11.

  According to the feature c12, when the supply of the operation power is started, it is possible to confirm whether or not the predetermined display means is normal before the game is played on the gaming machine.

Feature c13. Setting means (a function of executing a setting value updating process in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage;
Means for executing processing at the start of supply of operating power based on the start of supply of operating power (in the 67th embodiment, a function of executing processing of steps S8801 to S8819 in main CPU 63, 68th embodiment Function for executing the processes of steps S9401 to S9420 in the main CPU 63).
A configuration in which predetermined setting-related processing (setting confirmation processing, setting value updating processing) related to the set value can be executed in a state where the processing at the time of starting the supply of the operation power is being executed;
The gaming machine according to claim c12, wherein the check control unit starts the check display on the predetermined display unit in a state where the process at the time of starting the supply of the operation power is being executed.

  According to the feature c13, since a setting value to be used is set from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage, the player can use a more advantageous setting value. That you expect. Further, in a situation where the process at the time of starting the supply of the operating power is being performed, the predetermined setting-related process regarding the set value can be performed. This makes it possible to execute the setting-related processing at a stage before the game is started. In this case, the display for checking is started by the predetermined display means in a situation where the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power is being executed. This makes it possible to integrate not only the processing related to the predetermined setting but also the processing for starting the display for checking on the predetermined display means with respect to the processing when the supply of the operating power is started.

  Feature c14. The check control unit starts the check display on the predetermined display unit before the timing at which the predetermined setting-related process can be executed (in the 67th embodiment, the steps S8804 and S8805 in the main CPU 63 are performed). The gaming machine according to feature c13, further comprising a function of executing processing, in the 68th embodiment, a function of executing steps S9404 and S9405 in the main CPU 63).

  According to the feature c14, it is possible to confirm whether the predetermined display means is normal before the predetermined setting-related processing is executed.

  Feature c15. The predetermined display control means is means for displaying the current setting value on the predetermined display means when the predetermined setting-related processing is executed (function of executing the processing of steps S9004 and S9006 in the main CPU 63). The gaming machine according to feature c13 or c14, comprising:

  According to the feature c15, the current setting value is displayed on the predetermined display means when the predetermined setting-related processing is executed. Therefore, the manager of the game hall checks the predetermined display means to change the current setting value. It becomes possible to grasp. In this case, since the configuration of the feature c13 is provided, the process for starting the supply of the operating power includes not only the process related to the predetermined setting but also the process for starting the display for checking on the predetermined display unit. The operation of checking the predetermined display means to determine whether the predetermined display means is normal and the operation of checking the predetermined display means to determine the current set value are performed at the time of starting the supply of the operating power. Can be performed collectively in a situation where is executed.

  In addition, when the configuration of the feature c14 is provided, the check display is started by the predetermined display before the current set value is displayed by the predetermined display, so that the predetermined display is normal. After confirming whether or not the current setting value can be confirmed using the predetermined display means. This makes it possible to accurately confirm the set value.

Feature c16. The check control means,
Means for starting the display for checking on the predetermined display means before the timing at which the predetermined setting-related processing can be executed (a function of executing the processing of steps S8804 and S8805 in the main CPU 63);
Means for ending the check display based on the occurrence of a cancel trigger in the predetermined setting-related processing in the state where the check display is being performed (function and step for executing the process of step S9203 in main CPU 63) The gaming machine according to feature c15, comprising: a function of making a negative determination in S9101, a function of executing the process of step S9308 in the main CPU 63, and a function of making a negative determination in step S9101). .

  According to the feature c16, since the check display is started on the predetermined display unit before the current set value is displayed on the predetermined display unit, after confirming whether or not the predetermined display unit is normal, It is possible to confirm the current setting value using the predetermined display means. This makes it possible to accurately confirm the set value. In addition, when a predetermined setting-related process is executed in a situation where the check display is being performed and a cancel trigger has occurred, the check display is ended. Accordingly, when the predetermined setting-related processing is performed, the check display can be ended and the current setting value can be displayed on the predetermined display means without waiting for the check display to be ended. It becomes possible. Therefore, it is possible to confirm the current set value at an early stage.

  Feature c17. The gaming machine according to feature c16, wherein the cancellation trigger is generated based on an operation of a predetermined operation unit (reset button 68c).

  According to the feature c17, the cancellation trigger is generated based on the operation of the predetermined operation unit, so that the check display can be ended at an arbitrary timing.

  Feature c18. As the predetermined setting-related processing, means for executing processing for setting a settable state in which the setting value to be used can be changed (step S8806 in the main CPU 63 in the 67th embodiment) , A function of making a positive determination in steps S8817 and S8818, and a function of making a positive determination in steps S9407, S9418, and S9419 of the main CPU 63 in the 68th embodiment). To the gaming machine according to any one of c17 to c17.

  According to the feature c18, not only the processing for setting the set value to be used but also the processing for starting the check display on the predetermined display means are integrated with the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power. It becomes possible.

Feature c19. The setting means updates the set value to be used based on an operation of a predetermined operation means (reset button 68c) in the settable state,
The check control means,
Means for starting the check display on the predetermined display means before the setting possible state (function of executing the processing of steps S8804 and S8805 in the main CPU 63);
Means for ending the check display based on the operation of the predetermined operation means in the setting possible state in the state where the check display is being performed (executes the process of step S9203 in the main CPU 63) And a function of making a negative determination in step S9101, a function of executing the process of step S9308 in the main CPU 63, and a function of making a negative determination in step S9101).
The predetermined display control means is means for displaying the current set value on the predetermined display means after the check display is completed in the settable state (executing the processing of steps S9004 and S9006 in the main CPU 63) The gaming machine according to feature c18, comprising:

  According to the feature c19, the check display is started on the predetermined display before the current setting value is displayed on the predetermined display, so that it is determined whether the predetermined display is normal or not. It is possible to confirm the current setting value using the predetermined display means. This makes it possible to accurately confirm the set value. In addition, in the state where the display for checking is being performed, the setting is made possible, and the display for checking is terminated based on the operation of the predetermined operation means, and the current set value is displayed. Thus, when the setting is possible, the check display can be ended and the current setting value can be displayed on the predetermined display unit without waiting for the check display to end. . Therefore, it is possible to confirm the current set value at an early stage.

  Furthermore, in the configuration in which the set value to be used is updated based on the operation of the predetermined operation means in the settable situation, the display for checking is displayed based on the operation of the predetermined operation means in the settable situation. Since the current setting value is displayed after the display is completed, it is not necessary to perform a dedicated operation for terminating the check display and displaying the current setting value. Therefore, it is possible to improve the workability of the work for updating the setting value to be used.

  Feature c20. As the predetermined setting-related processing, a means for executing processing for displaying a current setting value on the predetermined display means (a function of executing a setting confirmation processing in the main CPU 63) is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of features c13 to c19, wherein

  According to the feature c20, not only the process for confirming the current set value but also the process for starting the check display by the predetermined display means can be integrated with the process at the start of the supply of the operating power. It becomes possible.

  Feature c21. The predetermined display control means includes means for displaying information corresponding to the management result of the game history on the predetermined display means (the function of executing the processing of steps S8708, S8709 and S9107 in the main CPU 63). The gaming machine according to any one of features c1 to c20, characterized in that:

  According to the feature c21, the management result of the game history can be notified to the manager of the game hall. In this case, whether the display corresponding to the management result of the game history on the predetermined display means is correctly performed or not is provided by providing the configuration of the feature c1 and performing the display for checking on the predetermined display means. Can be confirmed.

  In addition, for the configuration of the features c1 to c21, the features DA1 to DA15, the features DB1 to DB7, the features DC1 to DC5, the features DD1 to DD10, the features DE1 to DE6, the features DF1 to DF3, the features DG1 to DG18, and the features DH1 to DH1. DH7, features DI1 to DI9, features DJ1 to DJ4, features DK1 to DK7, features DL1 to DL20, features DM1 to DM7, features DN1 to DN6, features DO1 to DO11, features DP1 to DP12, features DQ1 to DQ5, features DR1 to DR1. DR17, features DS1 to DS8, features DT1 to DT13, features DU1 to DU8, features DV1 to DV6, features DW1 to DW11, features DX1 to DX11, features DY1 to DY11, features DZ1 to DZ10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b1 b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, Features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 15, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, Features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, Features z1 to z6, features αDA1 to αDA10, features αDB1 to αDB6, features αDC1 to αDC13, features αDD1 to αDD9, features αDE1 to αDE5, features αDF1 to αDF9, features αDG1 to αDG10, features αDH1 to αDH11, features αDI1 to αDI8, Features αDJ1 to αDJ14, Features αDK1 to αDK8, Features αDL1 to αDL11, Features αDM1 to αDM8, Features αDN1 to αD N6, feature αDO1 to αDO7, feature αDP1 to αDP7, feature αDQ1 to αDQ9, feature αDR1 to αDR8, feature αDS1 to αDS3, feature αDT1 to αDT4, feature αDU1 to αDU10, feature αDV1 to αDV5, feature αDW1 to αDW9, feature αDX1. Any one or a plurality of configurations among αDX4, features αDY1 to αDY11, features αDZ1 to αDZ4, and features αa1 to αa3 may be applied. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

<Characteristic d group>
Feature d1. Predetermined display means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204);
Predetermined display control means for displaying and controlling the predetermined display means (a function of executing a second timer interrupt process in the main CPU 63),
The predetermined display control means checks whether or not the predetermined display means is normal before the processing for controlling the progress of the game is performed when the supply of the operating power is started. Check control means for causing the predetermined display means to perform the display for the user (the function of executing the processing of step S9102 in the main CPU 63 in the 67th embodiment, and the function of executing the processing of step S9602 in the main CPU 63 in the 70th embodiment) A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the feature d1, it is possible to confirm whether or not the predetermined display unit is normal by performing the check display by the predetermined display unit. In addition, when the supply of the operating power is started, the display for checking is started before the processing for controlling the progress of the game is executed. It is possible to confirm whether the predetermined display means is normal before the game is played.

Feature d2. Setting means (a function of executing a setting value updating process in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage;
Means for executing processing at the start of supply of operating power based on the start of supply of operating power (in the 67th embodiment, a function of executing processing of steps S8801 to S8819 in main CPU 63, 68th embodiment Function for executing the processes of steps S9401 to S9420 in the main CPU 63).
A configuration in which predetermined setting-related processing (setting confirmation processing, setting value updating processing) related to the set value can be executed in a state where the processing at the time of starting the supply of the operation power is being executed;
The gaming machine according to the feature d1, wherein the check control means starts the display for checking on the predetermined display means in a state where the processing at the start of the supply of the operation power is being executed.

  According to the feature d2, since a setting value to be used is set from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage, the player can use a more advantageous setting value. That you expect. Further, in a situation where the process at the time of starting the supply of the operating power is being performed, the predetermined setting-related process regarding the set value can be performed. This makes it possible to execute the setting-related processing at a stage before the game is started. In this case, the display for checking is started by the predetermined display means in a situation where the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power is being executed. This makes it possible to integrate not only the processing related to the predetermined setting but also the processing for starting the display for checking on the predetermined display means with respect to the processing when the supply of the operating power is started.

  Feature d3. The check control unit starts the check display on the predetermined display unit before the timing at which the predetermined setting-related processing can be executed (in the 67th embodiment, the steps S8804 and S8805 of the main CPU 63 are performed). The gaming machine according to feature d2, further comprising a function of executing a process, in the 68th embodiment, a function of executing the processes of steps S9404 and S9405 in the main CPU 63).

  According to the feature d3, it is possible to confirm whether the predetermined display means is normal before the predetermined setting-related processing is executed.

  Feature d4. The predetermined display control means is means for displaying the current setting value on the predetermined display means when the predetermined setting-related processing is executed (function of executing the processing of steps S9004 and S9006 in the main CPU 63). The gaming machine according to feature d2 or d3, comprising:

  According to the feature d4, when the predetermined setting-related processing is executed, the current setting value is displayed on the predetermined display means. Therefore, the administrator of the game hall checks the predetermined display means to change the current setting value. It becomes possible to grasp. In this case, since the configuration of the feature d2 is provided, the process for starting the supply of the operating power includes not only the process related to the predetermined setting but also the process for starting the display for checking on the predetermined display unit. The operation of checking the predetermined display means to determine whether the predetermined display means is normal and the operation of checking the predetermined display means to determine the current set value are performed at the time of starting the supply of the operating power. Can be performed collectively in a situation where is executed.

  When the configuration of the feature d3 is provided, the display for checking is started by the predetermined display before the current set value is displayed by the predetermined display, so that the predetermined display is normal. After confirming whether or not the current setting value can be confirmed using the predetermined display means. This makes it possible to accurately confirm the set value.

Feature d5. The check control means,
Means for starting the display for checking on the predetermined display means before the timing at which the predetermined setting-related processing can be executed (a function of executing the processing of steps S8804 and S8805 in the main CPU 63);
Means for ending the check display based on the occurrence of a cancel trigger in the predetermined setting-related processing in the state where the check display is being performed (function and step for executing the process of step S9203 in main CPU 63) The gaming machine according to feature d4, comprising: a function of making a negative determination in S9101, a function of executing the process of step S9308 in the main CPU 63, and a function of making a negative determination in step S9101). .

  According to the feature d5, the display for checking is started on the predetermined display before the current set value is displayed on the predetermined display. Therefore, after confirming whether the predetermined display is normal or not, It is possible to confirm the current setting value using the predetermined display means. This makes it possible to accurately confirm the set value. In addition, when a predetermined setting-related process is executed in a situation where the check display is being performed and a cancel trigger has occurred, the check display is ended. Accordingly, when the predetermined setting-related processing is performed, the check display can be ended and the current setting value can be displayed on the predetermined display means without waiting for the check display to be ended. It becomes possible. Therefore, it is possible to confirm the current set value at an early stage.

  Feature d6. The gaming machine according to feature d5, wherein the cancellation trigger is generated based on an operation of a predetermined operation unit (reset button 68c).

  According to the feature d6, the cancellation trigger is generated based on the operation of the predetermined operation unit, and thus the check display can be ended at an arbitrary timing.

  Feature d7. As the predetermined setting-related processing, means for executing processing for setting a settable state in which the setting value to be used can be changed (step S8806 in the main CPU 63 in the 67th embodiment) A function of making an affirmative determination in steps S8817 and S8818, and a function of making an affirmative determination in steps S9407, S9418 and S9419 of the main CPU 63 in the 68th embodiment). To a gaming machine according to any one of d6 to d6.

  According to the feature d7, for the process at the start of the supply of the operating power, not only the process for setting the set value to be used but also the process for starting the display for checking on the predetermined display unit are integrated. It becomes possible.

Feature d8. The setting means updates the set value to be used based on an operation of a predetermined operation means (reset button 68c) in the settable state,
The check control means,
Means for starting the check display on the predetermined display means before the setting possible state (function of executing the processing of steps S8804 and S8805 in the main CPU 63);
Means for ending the check display based on the operation of the predetermined operation means in the setting possible state in the state where the check display is being performed (executes the process of step S9203 in the main CPU 63) And a function of making a negative determination in step S9101, a function of executing the process of step S9308 in the main CPU 63, and a function of making a negative determination in step S9101).
The predetermined display control means is means for displaying the current set value on the predetermined display means after the check display is completed in the settable state (executing the processing of steps S9004 and S9006 in the main CPU 63) The gaming machine according to feature d7, comprising:

  According to the feature d8, the check display is started on the predetermined display unit before the current set value is displayed on the predetermined display unit. Therefore, after confirming whether the predetermined display unit is normal, It is possible to confirm the current setting value using the predetermined display means. This makes it possible to accurately confirm the set value. In addition, in the state where the display for checking is being performed, the setting is made possible, and the display for checking is terminated based on the operation of the predetermined operation means, and the current set value is displayed. Thus, when the setting is possible, the check display can be ended and the current setting value can be displayed on the predetermined display unit without waiting for the check display to end. . Therefore, it is possible to confirm the current set value at an early stage.

  Furthermore, in the configuration in which the set value to be used is updated based on the operation of the predetermined operation means in the settable situation, the display for checking is displayed based on the operation of the predetermined operation means in the settable situation. Since the current setting value is displayed after the display is completed, it is not necessary to perform a dedicated operation for terminating the check display and displaying the current setting value. Therefore, it is possible to improve the workability of the work for updating the setting value to be used.

  Feature d9. As the predetermined setting-related processing, a means for executing processing for displaying a current setting value on the predetermined display means (a function of executing a setting confirmation processing in the main CPU 63) is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of the features d2 to d8.

  According to the feature d9, not only the process for confirming the current set value but also the process for starting the check display on the predetermined display means can be integrated with the process at the start of the supply of the operating power. It becomes possible.

  Feature d10. The predetermined display control means includes means for displaying information corresponding to the management result of the game history on the predetermined display means (the function of executing the processing of steps S8708, S8709 and S9107 in the main CPU 63). The gaming machine according to any one of the features d1 to d9.

  According to the feature d10, the management result of the game history can be notified to the manager of the game hall. In this case, it is provided with the configuration of the feature d1 and the display for check is performed by the predetermined display means, so that the information corresponding to the management result of the game history on the predetermined display means is correctly displayed. Can be confirmed.

  For the configurations of the features d1 to d10, the features DA1 to DA15, the features DB1 to DB7, the features DC1 to DC5, the features DD1 to DD10, the features DE1 to DE6, the features DF1 to DF3, the features DG1 to DG18, and the features DH1 to DH1. DH7, features DI1 to DI9, features DJ1 to DJ4, features DK1 to DK7, features DL1 to DL20, features DM1 to DM7, features DN1 to DN6, features DO1 to DO11, features DP1 to DP12, features DQ1 to DQ5, features DR1 to DR1. DR17, features DS1 to DS8, features DT1 to DT13, features DU1 to DU8, features DV1 to DV6, features DW1 to DW11, features DX1 to DX11, features DY1 to DY11, features DZ1 to DZ10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b1 b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, Features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 15, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, Features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, Features z1 to z6, features αDA1 to αDA10, features αDB1 to αDB6, features αDC1 to αDC13, features αDD1 to αDD9, features αDE1 to αDE5, features αDF1 to αDF9, features αDG1 to αDG10, features αDH1 to αDH11, features αDI1 to αDI8, Features αDJ1 to αDJ14, Features αDK1 to αDK8, Features αDL1 to αDL11, Features αDM1 to αDM8, Features αDN1 to αD N6, feature αDO1 to αDO7, feature αDP1 to αDP7, feature αDQ1 to αDQ9, feature αDR1 to αDR8, feature αDS1 to αDS3, feature αDT1 to αDT4, feature αDU1 to αDU10, feature αDV1 to αDV5, feature αDW1 to αDW9, feature αDX1. Any one or a plurality of configurations among αDX4, features αDY1 to αDY11, features αDZ1 to αDZ4, and features αa1 to αa3 may be applied. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

  According to the invention relating to the feature c group and the feature d group, the following problem can be solved.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine has a dish storage section for storing game balls given to a player on the front face of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to a game ball launching device, It is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage unit, for example. Further, in a pachinko machine, a configuration including an upper dish storage section and a lower dish storage section as a dish storage section is also known. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper dish storage section is a game ball launching device. And the surplus game balls in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  Further, in the slot machine, when a new game is started by operating the start lever while a medal is bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation of the reel is started by the rotation start control being executed by the control means, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means executes the rotation start control. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation stop of the reels corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as the example described above, a configuration capable of confirming whether or not the display on the predetermined display means is correctly performed is required, and there is still room for improvement in this regard. is there.

<Characteristic e group>
Feature e1. History storage executing means (normal entry management processing in the main CPU 63) for storing, in a history storage means (normal counter area 231), history information of the game corresponding to a predetermined event caused by execution of the game. Function to execute)
Information deriving means for deriving mode information (base value) corresponding to the result of the game using the history information stored in the history storage means (the function of executing the processing of step S8601 in the main CPU 63);
Mode information storage means (operation result storage area 234) for storing the mode information derived by the information deriving means.
A gaming machine, wherein the aspect information storage means is capable of storing a plurality of the aspect information derived at different timings by the information derivation means.

  According to the feature e1, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to the event is stored in the history storage unit. By storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the history information and unauthorized modification. Further, the mode information corresponding to the result of the game is derived using the history information stored in the history storage unit, and the derived mode information is stored in the mode information storage unit. As a result, information for managing the number of times or frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be stored and held in the gaming machine, and the management of the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event is preferable by using the managed information. Can be performed. Further, the aspect information storage means can store a plurality of aspect information derived at different timings. This makes it possible to grasp the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event in a plurality of periods, so that the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be accurately grasped.

Feature e2. The aspect information storage means,
An immediate storage area (current area 311) for storing the latest aspect information derived by the information deriving means;
Past storage areas (first to third history areas 312 to 314) for storing the aspect information derived by the information deriving means before the aspect information stored in the latest storage area. The gaming machine according to feature e1, wherein:

  According to the feature e2, since the latest aspect information and the past aspect information derived before it are stored, the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event is grasped not only in the latest but also in the past. It becomes possible.

Feature e3. A period elapse specifying means (a function of executing the processing of steps S8605 and S8613 in the main CPU 63) for specifying that a predetermined period from the occurrence of the period start trigger to the occurrence of the period end trigger has elapsed;
A latest storage executing means (step in the main CPU 63) for storing the mode information derived by the information deriving means in the latest storage area in a situation where the elapse of the predetermined period is not specified by the period elapse specifying means. Function for executing the processing of S8602);
The predetermined period derived by the information deriving unit using the history information stored in the history storage unit based on the fact that the predetermined period has passed by the period elapse specifying unit. A past storage execution unit (a function of executing the processing of steps S8607 and S8614 in the main CPU 63) for storing the period information corresponding to the game result in the period in the past storage area. The gaming machine according to Feature e2.

  According to the feature e3, the mode information derived when the predetermined period has not elapsed has been stored in the latest storage area, and the mode information derived when the predetermined period has elapsed has been stored in the past storage area. Is done. As a result, it is possible to grasp the latest occurrence frequency of the predetermined event, and also to grasp the past occurrence frequency of the predetermined event in units of a predetermined period. Further, since the past storage area stores the mode information in units of a predetermined period, it is possible to reduce the number of mode information stored in the past storage area.

  Feature e4. Means for erasing the history information stored in the history storage means based on the fact that the predetermined period has elapsed by the time lapse specifying means (processing of steps S8608 and S8615 in the main CPU 63) The gaming machine according to feature e3, further comprising:

  According to the feature e4, since the history information in the history information storage unit is deleted after the predetermined period has elapsed, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the history information storage unit. Further, even if the history information is erased after the predetermined period has elapsed, the mode information derived using the history information in the predetermined period is stored in the past storage area. It is possible to grasp later the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event during the period.

  Feature e5. The gaming machine according to any one of features e2 to e4, wherein the past storage area is capable of storing a plurality of the pieces of aspect information having different derived timings.

  According to the feature e5, since a plurality of pieces of aspect information are stored in the past storage area, it is possible to compare the occurrence frequencies of the predetermined events corresponding to a plurality of periods.

Feature e6. Period elapse specifying means (a function for executing the processing of steps S8605 and S8613 in the main CPU 63) for specifying that a predetermined period from the occurrence of the predetermined period start trigger to the occurrence of the predetermined period end trigger has elapsed. )When,
The predetermined period derived by the information deriving unit using the history information stored in the history storage unit based on the fact that the predetermined period has passed is specified by the period elapse specifying unit. A past storage execution unit (a function of executing the processing of steps S8607 and S8614 in the main CPU 63) for storing the period information corresponding to the result of the game in the period in the mode information storage unit,
The game according to any one of features e1 to e5, wherein the aspect information storage unit is capable of storing a plurality of pieces of aspect information corresponding to each of the predetermined periods different from each other. Machine.

  According to the feature e6, since a plurality of pieces of past mode information derived in units of a predetermined period are stored, the number of pieces of mode information stored in the mode information storage unit can be reduced, It is possible to compare the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events.

  Feature e7. Means for erasing the history information stored in the history storage means based on the fact that the predetermined period has elapsed by the time lapse specifying means (processing of steps S8608 and S8615 in the main CPU 63) The gaming machine according to feature e6, further comprising:

  According to the feature e7, the history information in the history information storage unit is erased after the lapse of the predetermined period, so that it is possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the history information storage unit. Further, even if the history information is erased after the predetermined period has elapsed, the mode information derived using the history information in the predetermined period is stored in the past storage area. It is possible to grasp later the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event during the period.

  Feature e8. Means (main side) for controlling the notifying means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204) so that the notification corresponding to each of the plurality of pieces of the mode information stored in the mode information storage means is sequentially executed. The gaming machine according to any one of features e1 to e7, further comprising: a function of executing the processes of steps S8702 to S8709 in the CPU 63).

  According to the feature e8, the notification corresponding to the aspect information is performed by the notification unit. Thereby, it is possible to grasp the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event. In addition, since the notification corresponding to each of the plurality of aspect information is sequentially performed, it is possible to individually grasp the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event in a plurality of periods while suppressing the number of notification means.

Feature e9. The aspect information storage unit includes a first storage area (first history area 312) capable of storing the aspect information, and a second storage area (second history area 313) capable of storing the aspect information. ) And
The gaming machine shifts the mode information stored in the first storage area to the second storage area by an instruction including at least the DDLDDIDDR instruction when an information shift trigger occurs (step S8607 in the main CPU 63). And a function of executing the processing of step S8614).

  According to the feature e9, the shift between the storage areas of the aspect information can be performed with a simple processing configuration.

  Note that, for the configurations of the features e1 to e9, the features DA1 to DA15, the features DB1 to DB7, the features DC1 to DC5, the features DD1 to DD10, the features DE1 to DE6, the features DF1 to DF3, the features DG1 to DG18, and the features DH1 to DH1. DH7, features DI1 to DI9, features DJ1 to DJ4, features DK1 to DK7, features DL1 to DL20, features DM1 to DM7, features DN1 to DN6, features DO1 to DO11, features DP1 to DP12, features DQ1 to DQ5, features DR1 to DR1. DR17, features DS1 to DS8, features DT1 to DT13, features DU1 to DU8, features DV1 to DV6, features DW1 to DW11, features DX1 to DX11, features DY1 to DY11, features DZ1 to DZ10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b1 b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 15, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αDA1 to αDA10, features αDB1 to αDB6, features αDC1 to αDC13, features αDD1 to αDD9, features αDE1 to αDE5, features αDF1 to αDF9, features αDG1 to αDG10, features αDH1 to αDH11, features αDI1 to αDI8, and features αDJ1 to αDJ14, features αDK1 to αDK8, features αDL1 to αDL11, features αDM1 to αDM8, features αDN1 to αDN 6, feature αDO1 to αDO7, feature αDP1 to αDP7, feature αDQ1 to αDQ9, feature αDR1 to αDR8, feature αDS1 to αDS3, feature αDT1 to αDT4, feature αDU1 to αDU10, feature αDV1 to αDV5, feature αDW1 to αDW9, and feature αDX1. Any one or a plurality of configurations among αDX4, features αDY1 to αDY11, features αDZ1 to αDZ4, and features αa1 to αa3 may be applied. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

  According to the invention relating to the feature e group, the following problem can be solved.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, in a pachinko machine, a dish storage section for storing game balls given to a player is provided on the front of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to a game ball launching device, It is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage unit, for example. Further, in a pachinko machine, a configuration including an upper dish storage section and a lower dish storage section as a dish storage section is also known. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper dish storage section is a game ball launching device. And the surplus game balls in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  Further, in the slot machine, when a new game is started by operating the start lever while a medal is bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation of the reel is started by the rotation start control being executed by the control means, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means executes the rotation start control. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation stop of the reels corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in the gaming machines such as those described above, it is necessary to appropriately manage the gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Feature f group>
Feature f1. Means for executing processing at the start of supply of operating power based on the start of supply of operating power (function of executing processing of steps S8801 to S8819 in main CPU 63 in 67th embodiment, 68th embodiment In the main CPU 63, a function of executing the processing of steps S9401 to S9420) and
A power failure monitoring unit (a function of executing the processing of step S8901 in the main CPU 63) that enables the power failure monitoring processing for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure to be performed in a state where the processing at the start of the supply of the operation power is being performed. ), And a game machine comprising:

  According to the feature f1, the power outage monitoring process is executed even in the situation where the processing at the start of the supply of the operation power is executed. When it occurs, it is possible to appropriately cope with it.

Feature f2. A means for executing interrupt processing that is started periodically (a function of executing first timer interrupt processing in the main CPU 63);
The interruption process includes the power failure monitoring process,
The gaming machine according to feature f1, wherein the interrupt process can be interrupted and started in a situation where the process at the start of the supply of the operation power is being executed.

  According to the feature f2, even when the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power is executed, the interrupt processing is periodically interrupted and started, so that the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power is performed. Even in a situation, it is possible to periodically monitor the occurrence of a power failure.

  Feature f3. The interrupt process can be started by interrupting even after the process at the start of the supply of the operating power is completed and in a situation where post-processing (steps S8822 to S8825 in the main CPU 63) is being executed. The gaming machine according to Feature f2.

  According to the feature f3, the monitoring of the occurrence of the power outage is periodically performed in the situation where the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power is performed by using the interrupt processing which can be interrupted and started in the situation where the post-processing is being executed. It is possible to perform it.

Feature f4. The interruption process includes a progress handling process (steps S8907 to S8920 in the main CPU 63) executed to control the progress of the game,
If the interrupt process is interrupted and started in a situation where the process at the start of the supply of the operating power is being executed, the power failure monitoring process is executed, while the progress handling process is not executed,
If the interruption process is interrupted and started in a situation where the post-processing is being executed, both the power failure monitoring process and the progress handling process can be executed. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature f4, the monitoring of the occurrence of the power failure is periodically performed in the situation where the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power is performed by using the interrupt processing which can be interrupted and started in the situation where the post-processing is being executed. In such a configuration, even if the interrupt processing is interrupted and started in a situation where the processing at the time of starting the supply of the operation power is being executed, the progress corresponding processing for controlling the progress of the game is not executed. It is possible to do.

Feature f5. Setting means (a function of executing a setting value update process in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage,
Any one of the features f1 to f4, wherein, in a situation where the processing at the time of the start of the supply of the operation power is being performed, a settable situation in which the set value to be used can be changed can be obtained. A gaming machine according to claim 1.

  According to the feature f5, the power failure monitoring process is performed even when the setting value to be used is set, so that a power failure occurs while setting the setting value to be used. Even if it does, it will be possible to deal with it appropriately.

  Feature f6. If the supply of the operating power is stopped after the occurrence of the power failure is identified in the power failure monitoring process, and if the supply of the operating power is restarted, the supply of the operating power is set as a usage target before the supply of the operating power is stopped. The gaming machine according to Feature f5, wherein a game can be played with the set value.

  According to the feature f6, even if a power failure occurs in a situation where the setting value to be used is set, the occurrence of the power failure is identified by the power failure monitoring process, so that the supply of the operating power is restarted. In this case, it is possible to play the game in a situation where the set value selected at the time when the power failure occurs becomes the target of use. Thus, even if a power failure occurs in a state where the setting value to be used is set, it is not necessary to set the setting value again when the supply of the operating power is restarted.

  Note that, for the configurations of the features f1 to f6, the features DA1 to DA15, the features DB1 to DB7, the features DC1 to DC5, the features DD1 to DD10, the features DE1 to DE6, the features DF1 to DF3, the features DG1 to DG18, and the features DH1 to DH1. DH7, features DI1 to DI9, features DJ1 to DJ4, features DK1 to DK7, features DL1 to DL20, features DM1 to DM7, features DN1 to DN6, features DO1 to DO11, features DP1 to DP12, features DQ1 to DQ5, features DR1 to DR1. DR17, features DS1 to DS8, features DT1 to DT13, features DU1 to DU8, features DV1 to DV6, features DW1 to DW11, features DX1 to DX11, features DY1 to DY11, features DZ1 to DZ10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b1 b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 15, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αDA1 to αDA10, features αDB1 to αDB6, features αDC1 to αDC13, features αDD1 to αDD9, features αDE1 to αDE5, features αDF1 to αDF9, features αDG1 to αDG10, features αDH1 to αDH11, features αDI1 to αDI8, and features αDJ1 to αDJ14, features αDK1 to αDK8, features αDL1 to αDL11, features αDM1 to αDM8, features αDN1 to αDN 6, feature αDO1 to αDO7, feature αDP1 to αDP7, feature αDQ1 to αDQ9, feature αDR1 to αDR8, feature αDS1 to αDS3, feature αDT1 to αDT4, feature αDU1 to αDU10, feature αDV1 to αDV5, feature αDW1 to αDW9, and feature αDX1. Any one or a plurality of configurations among αDX4, features αDY1 to αDY11, features αDZ1 to αDZ4, and features αa1 to αa3 may be applied. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

  According to the invention relating to the feature f group, the following problem can be solved.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, in a pachinko machine, a dish storage section for storing game balls given to a player is provided on the front of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to a game ball launching device, It is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage unit, for example. Further, in a pachinko machine, a configuration including an upper dish storage section and a lower dish storage section as a dish storage section is also known. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper dish storage section is a game ball launching device. And the surplus game balls in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  Further, in the slot machine, when a new game is started by operating the start lever while a medal is bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation of the reel is started by the rotation start control being executed by the control means, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means executes the rotation start control. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation stop of the reels corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in the gaming machines as exemplified above, it is necessary to appropriately cope with the occurrence of a power failure, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Characteristic g group>
Feature g1. Setting correspondence storage area (first to sixth setting information storage areas in the seventy-first embodiment) for storing setting correspondence information (low probability mode success / failure table, high probability mode success / failure table) corresponding to the player's advantage. 325a to 325f, in the seventy-second embodiment, first to third setting information storage areas 326a to 326c, and a plurality of first predetermined number of setting correspondence storage means (the setting correspondence storage area 325 in the seventy-first embodiment, the 72nd execution). In the mode, the setting correspondence storage area 326)
Setting means for setting a set value to be used (a function of executing a set value update process in the main CPU 63);
Profit-related means for executing a profit-related process (step S504) related to the profit of the player by using the setting correspondence information stored in the setting correspondence storage area corresponding to the setting value set by the setting means. (A function of executing the special figure change start process in the main CPU 63).
A gaming machine, wherein the number of types of the set values that can be set by the setting means is smaller than the first predetermined number.

  According to the feature g1, since a setting value to be used is set from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage, the player can use a more advantageous setting value. That you expect. In this case, in the configuration in which the first predetermined number of setting correspondence storage areas for storing the setting correspondence information corresponding to the setting values are provided, the number of types of setting values to be used is larger than the first predetermined number. It is a small number. This makes it possible to share the configuration relating to the setting correspondence storage means with the gaming machine in which the number of types of setting values to be used is the first predetermined number, and to change the number of types of setting values in the gaming machine. Design work can be performed easily. As described above, it is possible to make the configuration relating to the set value suitable.

Feature g2. A correspondence information storage unit (a set value counter in the work area 221 for specific control) capable of storing correspondence information corresponding to each of the first predetermined number of the setting correspondence storage areas;
The setting means sets the set value to be used by changing the correspondence information stored and held in the correspondence information storage means based on a change operation,
The setting correspondence information of the setting value that can be set by the setting means is stored in at least one of the setting correspondence storage areas, and is a part of the first predetermined number and is a plurality of the setting correspondences. Since the same setting correspondence information is stored in a storage area, the setting correspondence information is stored in all of the first predetermined number of the setting correspondence storage areas. The gaming machine according to g1.

  According to the feature g2, the set value to be used is changed by changing the corresponding information stored in the corresponding information storage means based on the change operation, and the setting corresponding storage area corresponding to the changed corresponding information is changed. Is used in the profit-related processing, the profit-related processing is executed in a mode corresponding to the set value of the use target. In this case, the setting correspondence information of the setting value that can be set by the setting means is stored in at least one setting correspondence storage area, and is a part of the first predetermined number and is a plurality of setting correspondence storages. Since the same setting correspondence information is stored in the area, the setting correspondence information is stored in all of the first predetermined number of setting correspondence storage areas. Thus, while using the first predetermined number of setting correspondence storage areas as they are and using the configuration for determining the setting values to be used by using the correspondence information storage means, the number of types of setting values to be used is Can be reduced to a number smaller than the first predetermined number.

Feature g3. The profit-related means includes:
Means for reading the setting correspondence information from the setting correspondence storage area corresponding to the correspondence information stored and held in the correspondence information storage means (a function of executing a read / write table reading process in the main CPU 63);
A means for executing the profit-related process by using the read setting correspondence information (a function of executing the process of step S504 in the main CPU 63). Machine.

  According to the feature g3, even if the number of types of setting values to be used is a number smaller than the first predetermined number, the setting correspondence corresponding to the correspondence information stored and held in the correspondence information storage means. Since the profit-related processing may be executed using the setting correspondence information read from the storage area, the configuration for reading the setting correspondence information when executing the profit-related processing can be used as it is.

Feature g4. A predetermined display control for causing a predetermined display means (fourth notification display device 204) to perform a display corresponding to a current set value in a situation where the correspondence information stored and held in the correspondence information storage means can be changed; Means (the function of executing the processing of steps S9801 to S9804 in the main CPU 63),
The predetermined display control means includes:
Means for reading out display information of the setting value corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the setting correspondence storage area corresponding to the correspondence information of the correspondence information storage means (the processing of steps S9801 to S9803 in the main CPU 63) Function to perform)
Means g2 for causing the predetermined display means to perform a display corresponding to the display information of the read set value (the function of executing the process of step S9804 in the main CPU 63). The gaming machine according to g3.

  According to the feature g4, when the setting value to be used is changed, it is possible to perform the setting value changing operation while checking the display corresponding to the current setting value displayed on the predetermined display means. Become. In this case, even if the number of types of the setting values to be used is smaller than the first predetermined number, the setting correspondence information in the setting correspondence storage area corresponding to the correspondence information of the correspondence information storage means may be used. In this configuration, the display information of the corresponding set value is read, and a display corresponding to the read display information of the read set value is performed by a predetermined display unit. This makes it possible to use the configuration for reading out the display information of the set value when executing the display corresponding to the set value.

Feature g5. The number of types of the set value that can be set by the setting unit is a divisor of the first predetermined number and is different from the first predetermined number,
The gaming machine according to Feature g4, wherein the number of the setting correspondence storage areas in which the setting correspondence information corresponding to each setting value is stored is the same between the setting values.

  According to the feature g5, even if the number of types of the setting values to be used is a number smaller than the first predetermined number, the frequency at which the display corresponding to the setting values is performed by the predetermined display means is determined. It is possible to make the same between each set value.

  Feature g6. The setting correspondence storage area corresponding to the same setting value is stored in the setting correspondence storage area corresponding to the correspondence information in a continuous order in the change order of the correspondence information stored and held in the correspondence information storage means. The gaming machine according to feature g4 or g5, wherein the gaming machine is not provided.

  According to the feature g6, each time the change operation is performed once, it is possible to change the set value to be displayed on the predetermined display means. Thus, even if the number of types of setting values to be used is smaller than the first predetermined number, the operability of the change operation can be improved.

  For the configurations of the features g1 to g6, the features DA1 to DA15, the features DB1 to DB7, the features DC1 to DC5, the features DD1 to DD10, the features DE1 to DE6, the features DF1 to DF3, the features DG1 to DG18, and the features DH1 to DH1. DH7, features DI1 to DI9, features DJ1 to DJ4, features DK1 to DK7, features DL1 to DL20, features DM1 to DM7, features DN1 to DN6, features DO1 to DO11, features DP1 to DP12, features DQ1 to DQ5, features DR1 to DR1. DR17, features DS1 to DS8, features DT1 to DT13, features DU1 to DU8, features DV1 to DV6, features DW1 to DW11, features DX1 to DX11, features DY1 to DY11, features DZ1 to DZ10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b1 b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 15, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αDA1 to αDA10, features αDB1 to αDB6, features αDC1 to αDC13, features αDD1 to αDD9, features αDE1 to αDE5, features αDF1 to αDF9, features αDG1 to αDG10, features αDH1 to αDH11, features αDI1 to αDI8, and features αDJ1 to αDJ14, features αDK1 to αDK8, features αDL1 to αDL11, features αDM1 to αDM8, features αDN1 to αDN 6, feature αDO1 to αDO7, feature αDP1 to αDP7, feature αDQ1 to αDQ9, feature αDR1 to αDR8, feature αDS1 to αDS3, feature αDT1 to αDT4, feature αDU1 to αDU10, feature αDV1 to αDV5, feature αDW1 to αDW9, and feature αDX1. Any one or a plurality of configurations among αDX4, features αDY1 to αDY11, features αDZ1 to αDZ4, and features αa1 to αa3 may be applied. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

  According to the invention relating to the feature g group, the following problem can be solved.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine has a dish storage section for storing game balls given to a player on the front face of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to a game ball launching device, It is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage unit, for example. Further, in a pachinko machine, a configuration including an upper dish storage section and a lower dish storage section as a dish storage section is also known. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper dish storage section is a game ball launching device. And the surplus game balls in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  Further, in the slot machine, when a new game is started by operating the start lever while a medal is bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation of the reel is started by the rotation start control being executed by the control means, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means executes the rotation start control. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation stop of the reels corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in the gaming machine as exemplified above, it is necessary to make the configuration relating to the set value that determines the advantage of the gaming machine suitable, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Characteristic h group>
Feature h1. Display means (special figure display part 37a, special figure reservation display part 37b, general figure display part 38a, general figure reservation display part 38b, first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, first to fifth display circuits 261 265),
Display control means (main CPU 63) for transmitting display data (display data signal, display clock signal) corresponding to display contents to be displayed on the display means;
A display execution unit (display DIDC 266) for performing display setting on the display unit so that when the display data is transmitted by the display control unit, the display content corresponds to the display data. ,
Comprising a plurality of the display means,
The display control unit includes a sequential transmission unit (a function of executing a second timer interrupt process in the main CPU 63) for sequentially transmitting the display data corresponding to each of the plurality of display units to the display execution unit,
The display execution unit, when the display data is transmitted by the display control unit, a display unit corresponding to the display data, for a display unit that is a setting target of the display data among the plurality of display units. The display setting is performed so that
The transmission interval of the display data from the sequential transmission unit to the display execution unit is determined by the display execution unit for each display unit before the display corresponding to the display data cannot be maintained in each display unit. A gaming machine characterized by a transmission interval at which the display setting is made according to the following.

  According to the feature h1, display setting is performed on the display unit by the display execution unit in accordance with the display data transmitted from the display control unit, so that the display unit is display-controlled to have the display content corresponding to the display data. You. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load on the display control means. In this case, in a configuration in which a plurality of display means are provided, display execution means is not provided in one-to-one correspondence with the plurality of display means, but one display is provided for the plurality of display means. Execution means is also used. This makes it possible to increase the number of display units while suppressing an increase in the number of display execution units. The transmission interval of the display data from the display control means to the display execution means is set by the display execution means for each display means before the display corresponding to the display data cannot be maintained in each display means. Is set to the transmission interval at which the transmission is performed. Thus, even if one display execution unit is also used for a plurality of display units, it is possible to appropriately perform display corresponding to display data on each display unit. As described above, the configuration for controlling the display of the display means can be made suitable.

  Feature h2. When transmitting the display data to the display execution unit, the sequential transmission unit transmits identifiable information (type data signal, type clock signal) that can specify the type of the display unit for which the display data is to be set. The gaming machine according to feature h1, wherein the gaming machine transmits the display to the display execution unit.

  According to the feature h2, when the display data is transmitted from the display control means, the display execution means may set the display data to the display means corresponding to the identifiable information transmitted from the display control means. This makes it possible to simplify the configuration of the display execution unit even if one display execution unit is also used for a plurality of display units.

  Feature h3. The sequential transmission unit may be configured to repeat the update round when the plurality of display units are set once as the target of the display data once in a predetermined order as one update cycle. The gaming machine according to feature h1 or h2, wherein the gaming machine transmits display data.

  According to the feature h3, the display control means only has to change the display means to which the display data is to be transmitted according to a predetermined order, so that the processing configuration of the display control means can be simplified.

  Feature h4. The sequential transmission means, even if the content of the display data for one of the display means is the same as the content of the display data when previously transmitted to the display means as a transmission target, the display means and the transmission target The gaming machine according to any one of the features h1 to h3, wherein the display data is transmitted when the game data has become true.

  According to the feature h4, since the display data is transmitted even if the content of the display data to be transmitted is not changed, one display execution unit is also used for a plurality of display units. Also, the same display can be continued on the predetermined display means.

  Feature h5. The sequential transmission unit executes a process for transmitting the display data in a predetermined interrupt process (second timer interrupt process) that is started by interrupting in a state where the display control unit is executing a predetermined process. The gaming machine according to any one of features h1 to h4.

According to the feature h5, the process for transmitting the display data is performed in the predetermined interrupt process, and thus the cycle in which the display data is set in each display unit can be set to the predetermined cycle.
Therefore, even if one display execution unit is also used for a plurality of display units, before each display unit cannot maintain the display corresponding to the display data, each display unit must be Thus, the display data can be set by the display execution means.

  Feature h6. The process of transmitting the display data to the plurality of display units targeted for the display setting by the display execution unit is summarized in the predetermined interruption process. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature h6, it is possible to set the cycle at which the display data is set to each of the display units to be set for display by the display execution unit to be the same.

Feature h7. The display control unit includes a unit (a function of executing a first timer interrupt process in the main CPU 63) that interrupts and starts a specific interrupt process (first timer interrupt process) while the predetermined process is being executed. ,
The gaming machine according to feature h5 or h6, wherein an interruption cycle of the predetermined interruption processing is shorter than an interruption cycle of the specific interruption processing.

  According to the feature h7, the process of transmitting the display data to the display execution unit is performed in the predetermined interrupt process that is shorter than the interrupt cycle of the specific interrupt process. This makes it possible to transmit the display data in a shorter cycle than in a configuration in which the processing for transmitting the display data to the display execution unit is executed in the specific interrupt processing.

  Feature h8. The gaming machine according to feature h7, wherein processing for advancing the game is executed in the specific interruption processing.

  According to the feature h8, it is possible to achieve the above-described excellent effects while causing the specific interrupt process to be activated at an appropriate cycle in executing the process for advancing the game.

  Feature h9. The gaming machine according to feature h7 or h8, wherein the predetermined interrupt process is started by interrupting even in a situation where the specific interrupt process is being executed.

  According to the feature h9, the predetermined interrupt processing is interrupted and started even in the situation where the specific interrupt processing is being executed. Therefore, even if the specific interrupt processing is interrupted and started, the transmission cycle of the display data is not changed. It is possible to set a predetermined cycle.

  Feature h10. The features h7 to h9, wherein the interrupt of the specific interrupt process is prohibited when the predetermined interrupt process is started, and the interrupt of the specific interrupt process is permitted when the predetermined interrupt process is terminated. A gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims.

  According to the feature h10, it is possible to prevent the specific interrupt processing from being interrupted and executed in the situation where the predetermined interrupt processing is being executed. As a result, it is possible to give priority to the processing for transmitting the display data.

Feature h11. The display control unit is configured to execute processing at the time of starting the supply of the operating power when the supply of the operating power is started (in the 65th embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S7901 to S7918 in the main CPU 63, In the sixty-seventh embodiment, the function of the main CPU 63 to execute the processing of steps S8801 to S8819, in the sixty-eighth embodiment, the function of the main CPU 63 to execute the processing of steps S9401 to S9420, and in the sixty-ninth embodiment, the main CPU 63 , A function of executing the processing of steps S9901 to S9917 in the main CPU 63 in the seventy-fourth embodiment).
The gaming machine according to any one of features h5 to h10, wherein the predetermined interrupt process is started by interrupting even when the process at the time of starting the supply of the operation power is being executed.

  According to the feature h11, it is possible to control the display of the plurality of display units even in the situation where the process at the time of starting the supply of the operating power is being executed. Further, since the configuration is such that the predetermined interrupt processing is started by interrupting the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power, the supply of the operating power can be performed without complicating the processing configuration of the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power. It is possible to control the display of a plurality of display means in a situation where the process at the time of start is being executed.

Feature h12. Setting means (a function of executing a setting value update process in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage,
In a situation in which the process at the time of the start of the supply of the operating power is being performed, the configuration may be a settable situation where the setting value to be used can be changed,
The sequential transmission unit transmits the display data to the display execution unit so that a display corresponding to a current set value is performed on a predetermined display unit in the settable state. The gaming machine according to feature h11.

  According to the feature h12, since the current setting value is displayed on the predetermined display means in a situation where the setting value to be used is set, it is easy to set the setting value to be used. .

Feature h13. The display control means includes means for executing a progress handling process to control the progress of the game after the process at the start of the supply of the operating power is completed (a function of executing a first timer interrupt process in the main CPU 63). Prepare,
The sequential transmission means sends the display data to the display execution means so that the corresponding display corresponding to the execution result of the progress correspondence processing is performed on at least some of the plurality of display means. To send,
The gaming machine according to feature h11 or h12, wherein the predetermined interrupt process is started by interrupting even after the process at the time of starting the supply of the operation power is completed.

  According to the feature h13, by using the predetermined interrupt processing, a plurality of states can be obtained in both the situation where the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power is being executed and the situation after the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power is completed. Of the display means can be controlled.

  Note that, for the configurations of the features h1 to h13, the features DA1 to DA15, the features DB1 to DB7, the features DC1 to DC5, the features DD1 to DD10, the features DE1 to DE6, the features DF1 to DF3, the features DG1 to DG18, and the features DH1 to DH1. DH7, features DI1 to DI9, features DJ1 to DJ4, features DK1 to DK7, features DL1 to DL20, features DM1 to DM7, features DN1 to DN6, features DO1 to DO11, features DP1 to DP12, features DQ1 to DQ5, features DR1 to DR1. DR17, features DS1 to DS8, features DT1 to DT13, features DU1 to DU8, features DV1 to DV6, features DW1 to DW11, features DX1 to DX11, features DY1 to DY11, features DZ1 to DZ10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b1 b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, Features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 15, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, Features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, Features z1 to z6, features αDA1 to αDA10, features αDB1 to αDB6, features αDC1 to αDC13, features αDD1 to αDD9, features αDE1 to αDE5, features αDF1 to αDF9, features αDG1 to αDG10, features αDH1 to αDH11, features αDI1 to αDI8, Features αDJ1 to αDJ14, Features αDK1 to αDK8, Features αDL1 to αDL11, Features αDM1 to αDM8, Features αDN1 to αD N6, feature αDO1 to αDO7, feature αDP1 to αDP7, feature αDQ1 to αDQ9, feature αDR1 to αDR8, feature αDS1 to αDS3, feature αDT1 to αDT4, feature αDU1 to αDU10, feature αDV1 to αDV5, feature αDW1 to αDW9, feature αDX1. Any one or a plurality of configurations among αDX4, features αDY1 to αDY11, features αDZ1 to αDZ4, and features αa1 to αa3 may be applied. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

<Characteristic i group>
Feature i1. A first interrupt executing means (first timer interrupt processing in the main CPU 63) which interrupts the other processing and executes the first interrupt processing based on the elapse of the first interrupt cycle in a situation where another processing is being executed. Function to execute)
A second interrupt executing means (second timer interrupt processing in the main CPU 63) which interrupts the other processing and executes the second interrupt processing based on the elapse of the second interrupt cycle in a situation where another processing is being executed. Function to execute) and
The second interrupt cycle is a cycle shorter than the first interrupt cycle,
For controlling display of predetermined display means (special figure display part 37a, special figure reservation display part 37b, general figure display part 38a, general figure reservation display part 38b, first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204) A gaming machine, wherein the processing is executed in the second interrupt processing.

  According to the feature i1, the process for controlling the display of the predetermined display means is executed in the predetermined interrupt process which is shorter than the interrupt period of the specific interrupt process. This makes it possible to perform the display control of the predetermined display means in a shorter cycle than in a configuration in which the processing for controlling the display of the predetermined display means is executed in the specific interrupt processing.

  Feature i2. The gaming machine according to feature i1, wherein processing for advancing the game is executed in the first interrupt processing.

  According to the feature i2, it is possible to achieve the above-described excellent effects while causing the first interrupt processing to be activated at an appropriate cycle in executing the processing for advancing the game.

  Feature i3. The gaming machine according to feature i1 or i2, wherein the second interrupt processing is interrupted and started even in a situation where the first interrupt processing is being executed.

  According to the feature i3, since the second interrupt processing is interrupted and started even in the situation where the first interrupt processing is being executed, the predetermined display is performed even when the first interrupt processing is interrupted and started. The display control of the means can be performed at a predetermined cycle.

  Feature i4. When the second interrupt process is started, the interrupt of the first interrupt process is prohibited, and when the second interrupt process is ended, the interrupt of the first interrupt process is permitted. The gaming machine according to any one of i1 to i3.

  According to the feature i4, it is possible to prevent the first interrupt processing from being interrupted and executed in the situation where the second interrupt processing is being executed. Thereby, it is possible to give priority to the display control of the predetermined display means.

Feature i5. Means for executing processing at the start of supply of operating power when the supply of operating power is started (function of executing main processing in the main CPU 63);
The gaming machine according to any one of features i1 to i4, wherein the second interrupt process is started by interrupting even in a situation where the process at the time of starting the supply of the operation power is being executed.

  According to the feature i5, it is possible to control the display of the predetermined display means even in the situation where the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power is being executed. Further, since the second interrupt processing is started by interrupting the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power, the processing power at the start of the supply of the operating power can be reduced without complicating the processing configuration. In a situation where the process at the time of supply start is being executed, it is possible to control the display of the predetermined display means.

Feature i6. Setting means (a function of executing a setting value update process in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage,
In a situation in which the process at the time of the start of the supply of the operating power is being performed, the configuration may be a settable situation where the setting value to be used can be changed,
The second interrupt executing means executes a process for causing the predetermined display means to perform a display corresponding to a current set value in the settable state in the second interrupt process. The gaming machine according to feature i5, wherein

  According to the feature i6, since the current setting value is displayed on the predetermined display means in a situation where the setting value to be used is set, it becomes easy to set the setting value to be used. .

  Feature i7. The second interrupt execution means executes the second interrupt processing based on the lapse of the second interrupt cycle even after the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power is completed, wherein Or the gaming machine according to i6.

  According to the feature i7, by using the predetermined interrupt processing, the predetermined interrupt processing is performed in both the situation where the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power is being executed and the situation after the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power is completed. Of the display means can be controlled.

  Note that, for the configurations of the features i1 to i7, the features DA1 to DA15, the features DB1 to DB7, the features DC1 to DC5, the features DD1 to DD10, the features DE1 to DE6, the features DF1 to DF3, the features DG1 to DG18, and the features DH1 to DH1. DH7, features DI1 to DI9, features DJ1 to DJ4, features DK1 to DK7, features DL1 to DL20, features DM1 to DM7, features DN1 to DN6, features DO1 to DO11, features DP1 to DP12, features DQ1 to DQ5, features DR1 to DR1. DR17, features DS1 to DS8, features DT1 to DT13, features DU1 to DU8, features DV1 to DV6, features DW1 to DW11, features DX1 to DX11, features DY1 to DY11, features DZ1 to DZ10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b1 b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 15, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αDA1 to αDA10, features αDB1 to αDB6, features αDC1 to αDC13, features αDD1 to αDD9, features αDE1 to αDE5, features αDF1 to αDF9, features αDG1 to αDG10, features αDH1 to αDH11, features αDI1 to αDI8, and features αDJ1 to αDJ14, features αDK1 to αDK8, features αDL1 to αDL11, features αDM1 to αDM8, features αDN1 to αDN 6, feature αDO1 to αDO7, feature αDP1 to αDP7, feature αDQ1 to αDQ9, feature αDR1 to αDR8, feature αDS1 to αDS3, feature αDT1 to αDT4, feature αDU1 to αDU10, feature αDV1 to αDV5, feature αDW1 to αDW9, and feature αDX1. Any one or a plurality of configurations among αDX4, features αDY1 to αDY11, features αDZ1 to αDZ4, and features αa1 to αa3 may be applied. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

  According to the invention relating to the feature h group and the feature i group, the following problems can be solved.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine has a dish storage section for storing game balls given to a player on the front face of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to a game ball launching device, It is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage unit, for example. Further, in a pachinko machine, a configuration including an upper dish storage section and a lower dish storage section as a dish storage section is also known. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper dish storage section is a game ball launching device. And the surplus game balls in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  Further, in the slot machine, when a new game is started by operating the start lever while a medal is bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation of the reel is started by the rotation start control being executed by the control means, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means executes the rotation start control. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation stop of the reels corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as the one described above, it is necessary to make the structure for displaying on the display means suitable, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Characteristic j group>
Feature j1. Means for executing processing at the start of supply of operating power based on the start of supply of operating power (in the 65th embodiment, a function of executing processing of steps S7901 to S7918 in main CPU 63, 67th embodiment In the 68th embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S9401 to S9420 in the main CPU 63 is used in the 68th embodiment. A function of executing the processing of step S9518, a function of executing the processing of steps S9901 to S9917 in the main CPU 63 in the seventy-fourth embodiment),
A predetermined interrupt executing means for executing a predetermined interrupt process by interrupting the process at the start of the supply of the operating power (a function for executing a first timer interrupt process in the main CPU 63, a function for executing a second timer interrupt process in the main CPU 63) ), And a game machine comprising:

  According to the feature j1, even when the processing at the start of the operation power supply is being executed, the predetermined interrupt processing is interrupted and started, so that the setting is made as the predetermined interrupt processing even immediately after the start of the operation power supply. It is possible to give priority to the execution of the processing being performed. Further, since it is not necessary to set a process set as the predetermined interrupt process for the process at the start of the operation power supply, the operation can be performed without complicating the processing configuration at the start of the operation power supply. Even immediately after the start of the power supply, it is possible to give priority to the execution of the process set as the predetermined interrupt process. As described above, it is possible to suitably perform the processing when the supply of the operation power is started.

  Feature j2. The predetermined interrupt executing means includes predetermined display means (special figure display part 37a, special figure reservation display part 37b, general figure display part 38a, general figure reservation display part 38b, first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204). The gaming machine according to feature j1, wherein a process for controlling display is performed by the predetermined interrupt process.

  According to the feature j2, it is possible to cause the predetermined display to perform the predetermined display even immediately after the start of the supply of the operation power.

Feature j3. Setting means (a function of executing a setting value update process in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage,
In a situation in which the process at the time of the start of the supply of the operating power is being performed, the configuration may be a settable situation where the setting value to be used can be changed,
The predetermined interruption executing means performs processing for causing the predetermined display means (the fourth notification display device 204) to perform display corresponding to the current set value in the settable state in the predetermined interruption processing. The gaming machine according to feature j1 or j2, wherein the gaming machine is executed.

  According to the feature j3, the current setting value is displayed on the predetermined display means in a situation where the setting value to be used is set, so that it is easy to set the setting value to be used. .

  Feature j4. Wherein the predetermined interrupt execution means executes the predetermined interrupt processing based on a lapse of a predetermined interrupt cycle even after the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power is completed. 2. The gaming machine according to item 1.

  According to the feature j4, by using the predetermined interrupt processing, the predetermined interrupt processing is performed in both the situation where the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power is being executed and the situation after the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power is completed. The processing set as the interrupt processing can be executed.

  Feature j5. The gaming machine according to any one of features j1 to j4, wherein the predetermined interruption executing means executes a power failure monitoring process (step S8901) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure in the predetermined interruption process.

  According to the feature j5, the power outage monitoring process is executed even in the situation where the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power is performed. When it occurs, it is possible to appropriately cope with it.

Feature j6. The predetermined interruption process includes a progress handling process (steps S8907 to S8920 in the main CPU 63) executed to control the progress of the game,
If the predetermined interrupt processing is interrupted and activated in a situation where the processing at the time of the start of supply of the operation power is being executed, the power failure monitoring processing is executed, while the progress handling processing is not executed,
If the predetermined interrupt processing is interrupted and started in a state where the post-processing (steps S8822 to S8825 in the main CPU 63) is being executed after the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power is completed, the power failure monitoring is performed. The gaming machine according to Feature j5, wherein both the processing and the progress handling processing can be executed.

  According to the feature j6, the monitoring of the occurrence of the power failure in the situation where the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power is performed by using the predetermined interrupt processing which can be started by interrupting in the situation where the post-processing is being executed. In a configuration in which the process is periodically performed, even if a predetermined interrupt process is interrupted and activated in a situation where the process at the time of starting the supply of the operation power is being performed, the progress corresponding process for controlling the progress of the game is not performed. It is possible to do so.

  For the configurations of the features j1 to j6, the features DA1 to DA15, the features DB1 to DB7, the features DC1 to DC5, the features DD1 to DD10, the features DE1 to DE6, the features DF1 to DF3, the features DG1 to DG18, and the features DH1 to DH1. DH7, features DI1 to DI9, features DJ1 to DJ4, features DK1 to DK7, features DL1 to DL20, features DM1 to DM7, features DN1 to DN6, features DO1 to DO11, features DP1 to DP12, features DQ1 to DQ5, features DR1 to DR1. DR17, features DS1 to DS8, features DT1 to DT13, features DU1 to DU8, features DV1 to DV6, features DW1 to DW11, features DX1 to DX11, features DY1 to DY11, features DZ1 to DZ10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b1 b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 15, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αDA1 to αDA10, features αDB1 to αDB6, features αDC1 to αDC13, features αDD1 to αDD9, features αDE1 to αDE5, features αDF1 to αDF9, features αDG1 to αDG10, features αDH1 to αDH11, features αDI1 to αDI8, and features αDJ1 to αDJ14, features αDK1 to αDK8, features αDL1 to αDL11, features αDM1 to αDM8, features αDN1 to αDN 6, feature αDO1 to αDO7, feature αDP1 to αDP7, feature αDQ1 to αDQ9, feature αDR1 to αDR8, feature αDS1 to αDS3, feature αDT1 to αDT4, feature αDU1 to αDU10, feature αDV1 to αDV5, feature αDW1 to αDW9, and feature αDX1. Any one or a plurality of configurations among αDX4, features αDY1 to αDY11, features αDZ1 to αDZ4, and features αa1 to αa3 may be applied. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

  According to the invention relating to the feature j group, the following problem can be solved.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine has a dish storage section for storing game balls given to a player on the front face of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to a game ball launching device, It is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage unit, for example. Further, in a pachinko machine, a configuration including an upper dish storage section and a lower dish storage section as a dish storage section is also known. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper dish storage section is a game ball launching device. And the surplus game balls in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  Further, in the slot machine, when a new game is started by operating the start lever while a medal is bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation of the reel is started by the rotation start control being executed by the control means, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means executes the rotation start control. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation stop of the reels corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as the example described above, it is necessary to appropriately perform processing when supply of operating power is started, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Characteristic k group>
Feature k1. History storage executing means (normal entry management processing in the main CPU 63) for storing, in a history storage means (normal counter area 231), history information of the game corresponding to a predetermined event caused by execution of the game. Function to execute)
Information deriving means for deriving mode information (base value) corresponding to the result of the game using the history information stored in the history storage means (the function of executing the processing of step SA201 in the main CPU 63);
Aspect information display control means (main CPU 63) for controlling display of information display means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204) so that display corresponding to the aspect information derived by the information derivation means is performed. A function of executing a display process and a second timer interrupt process in
A predetermined corresponding display (pre-shift display) performed by the information display means before a display corresponding to the aspect information is newly started based on occurrence of a predetermined display trigger; A gaming machine comprising: control means (a function of executing a process of step SA320 and a second timer interrupt process in the main CPU 63).

  According to the feature k1, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to the event is stored in the history storage unit. By storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the history information and unauthorized modification. Further, the mode information corresponding to the result of the game is derived using the history information stored in the history storage unit, and the information display unit performs display corresponding to the derived mode information. Thereby, it is possible to grasp the management result of the game history such as the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event. Further, the predetermined display is performed by the information display means before the display corresponding to the aspect information is newly started based on the occurrence of the predetermined display trigger. Accordingly, when a predetermined display opportunity occurs, it is possible to cause the corresponding display corresponding to the predetermined display to be performed by the information display means in preference to the display corresponding to the mode information. It is possible to notify that a predetermined display opportunity has occurred.

Feature k2. A period elapse specifying means (a function of executing the process of step SA210 in the main CPU 63) for specifying that a predetermined period has elapsed from when a predetermined period start trigger occurs to when a predetermined period end trigger occurs. ,
The predetermined correspondence display control means determines that the predetermined display trigger has occurred when the time lapse specifying means has specified that the predetermined period has elapsed, and the predetermined correspondence display is performed by the information display means. The gaming machine according to feature k1, wherein the game is performed.

  According to the feature k2, when a predetermined period has elapsed, a predetermined correspondence display is performed by the information display means, and thereafter, a display corresponding to the mode information is newly started by the information display means. This makes it possible for the manager of the gaming hall to recognize that the mode information displayed on the information display means is after a predetermined period has elapsed.

Feature k3. The information deriving unit uses the history information corresponding to the predetermined event that occurs after the predetermined period based on the fact that the predetermined period has elapsed by the period elapse specifying unit. To derive the aspect information,
The predetermined correspondence display control means is configured to, based on the fact that the predetermined period has passed by the period elapse specifying means, specify the history information corresponding to the predetermined event occurring after the predetermined period. The predetermined corresponding display is performed by the information display unit before a display corresponding to the aspect information derived by the information derivation unit is performed by the information display unit. The gaming machine according to feature k2.

According to the feature k3, in the configuration in which the new derivation of the aspect information is performed on the basis of the lapse of the predetermined period, after the predetermined period has elapsed, the information display means performs the predetermined corresponding display. After a predetermined period has elapsed, a display corresponding to the newly derived mode information is performed.
This allows the manager of the gaming hall to know whether or not the display corresponding to the aspect information on the information display means is a display corresponding to the newly derived aspect information after a predetermined period has elapsed. Becomes

  Feature k4. Means for erasing the history information stored in the history storage means based on the fact that the predetermined period has elapsed by the time lapse specifying means (executes the process of step SA217 in the main CPU 63) The gaming machine according to feature k3, comprising:

  According to the feature k4, the history information in the history information storage unit is deleted after a predetermined period has elapsed, so that the storage capacity required in the history information storage unit can be reduced.

Feature k5. The predetermined period derived by the information deriving unit using the history information stored in the history storage unit based on the fact that the predetermined period has passed by the period elapse specifying unit. A storage executing means (a function for executing the processing of steps SA203 and SA216 in the main CPU 63) for storing the mode information corresponding to the game result in the period as the mode corresponding mode information in the mode information storing means (calculation result storage area 234); )
The aspect information display control means controls display of the information display means so that a display corresponding to the period corresponding aspect information stored in the aspect information storage means is performed,
The predetermined correspondence display control means, based on the fact that the predetermined time period has passed by the time lapse specifying means, has been stored by the storage execution means in the mode information storage means. The game according to any one of features k2 to k4, wherein the predetermined corresponding display is performed by the information display unit before the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed by the information display unit. Machine.

  According to the feature k5, the past mode information derived in units of a predetermined period is stored as the period corresponding mode information, and the display corresponding to the period corresponding mode information is performed by the information display unit. Thus, the manager of the gaming hall can grasp the past period corresponding mode information derived in units of the predetermined period by checking the information display means. When a predetermined period has elapsed, a predetermined correspondence display is performed by the information display means, and then a display corresponding to the period correspondence mode information newly derived due to the lapse of the predetermined period is performed. Thereby, the manager of the game hall determines whether or not the display corresponding to the period corresponding mode information on the information display means is a display corresponding to the period corresponding mode information newly derived based on the elapse of the predetermined period. Can be grasped.

Feature k6. The aspect information storage means can store a plurality of the period corresponding aspect information corresponding to each of the different predetermined periods,
The aspect information display control means controls display of the information display means so that display corresponding to each of the plurality of period corresponding aspect information stored in the aspect information storage means is performed. The gaming machine according to Feature k5.

  According to the feature k6, a plurality of past period corresponding mode information derived in units of a predetermined period are stored, and a display corresponding to the plurality of period corresponding mode information is performed by the information display means. It is possible to compare the frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event corresponding to a predetermined period.

  Feature k7. Before the display corresponding to the aspect information different from the aspect information from the situation in which the display corresponding to the aspect information is being performed, the information display unit is set to a state before switching (a state of non-display for intervals). The gaming machine according to any one of features k1 to k6, further comprising: means for executing a process of step SA316 and a second timer interrupt process in the main CPU 63.

  According to the feature k7, when the aspect information to be displayed is switched, the information display means is in the state before the switching, so that the manager of the gaming hall clearly indicates that the aspect information to be displayed is switched. It becomes possible to grasp. In this case, the configuration of the characteristic k1 is provided, and the predetermined display is performed by the information display means based on the occurrence of the predetermined display trigger. As a result, it is possible to notify that a predetermined display opportunity has occurred by using the information display means for performing display corresponding to different aspect information with the state before switching therebetween.

  Feature k8. The predetermined correspondence display control means, when the predetermined display opportunity occurs, the predetermined correspondence display is transmitted to the information display means even if the display continuation period of the display corresponding to the aspect information has not elapsed. The gaming machine according to any one of the features k1 to k7, wherein the gaming machine is started.

  According to the feature k8, when a predetermined display trigger occurs, the predetermined corresponding display is started even if the display corresponding to the mode information is in the middle. Thus, it is possible to notify early that a predetermined display opportunity has occurred.

  Feature k9. The predetermined correspondence display control means, when the predetermined display trigger occurs during the display continuation period of the display corresponding to the aspect information, the predetermined correspondence display is transmitted to the information display means after the lapse of the display continuation period. The gaming machine according to any one of the features k1 to k7, wherein the gaming machine is started.

  According to the feature k9, even if a predetermined display trigger occurs, the predetermined corresponding display is started after the display corresponding to the aspect information displayed at that time is completed. Thus, it is possible to notify that a predetermined display opportunity has occurred while not disturbing the display corresponding to the mode information already performed.

Feature k10. A mode information storage unit (operation result storage area 234) for storing the mode information derived by the information deriving unit;
The aspect information storage means stores a plurality of specific storage areas (current area 311, first history area 312) so as to be able to store each of the plurality of aspect information derived at different timings by the information derivation means. , A second history area 313, and a third history area 314).
The aspect information display control means controls the information display means so that display corresponding to each of the plurality of pieces of aspect information stored in the plurality of specific storage areas is sequentially executed in accordance with a predetermined display order. The gaming machine according to any one of features k1 to k9.

  According to the feature k10, the notification corresponding to each of the plurality of aspect information is sequentially executed, so that it is possible to individually grasp the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event in a plurality of periods while suppressing the number of information display units. Becomes In addition, since the display corresponding to each of the plurality of aspect information stored in the plurality of specific storage areas is sequentially executed in accordance with the predetermined display order, the manager of the game hall grasps the type of the aspect information to be displayed. Easier to do.

  Feature k11. The gaming machine according to feature k10, wherein a predetermined display order is determined in association with the plurality of specific storage areas.

  According to the feature k11, since the predetermined display order of the display corresponding to the aspect information is determined in association with the plurality of specific storage areas, when the display corresponding to one aspect information is newly started, the display target is determined. It is possible to simplify the processing configuration for specifying the type of the aspect information.

  Feature k12. The mode information display control unit, when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed by the information display unit after the predetermined corresponding display is performed by the information display unit, in the first order in the predetermined display order The gaming machine according to feature k10 or k11, wherein the game is started from a display corresponding to the corresponding aspect information.

  According to the feature k12, after the predetermined corresponding display is performed based on the occurrence of the predetermined display trigger, the display is started from the display corresponding to the mode corresponding to the first order in the predetermined display order. Thereby, when a predetermined display opportunity occurs, it is possible to confirm again the display corresponding to the mode information from the first order of the predetermined display order.

Feature k13. A period elapse specifying means (a function of executing the processing of step SA210 in the main CPU 63) for specifying that a predetermined period has elapsed from the generation of the predetermined period start trigger to the generation of the predetermined period end trigger;
The predetermined period derived by the information deriving unit using the history information stored in the history storage unit based on the fact that the predetermined period has passed is specified by the period elapse specifying unit. Storage execution means (a function of executing the processing of steps SA203 and SA216 in the main CPU 63) for storing the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the period as the period corresponding mode information in the plurality of specific storage areas. ,
Any one of the features k10 to k12, wherein the storage execution unit is configured to store the period corresponding mode information in the plurality of specific storage regions in accordance with the order derived by the information derivation unit. 2. The gaming machine according to 1.

  According to the feature k13, the period corresponding mode information can be confirmed in the derived order.

  Feature k14. The information deriving means executes an information deriving process for deriving the aspect information based on occurrence of a process execution trigger, and starts deriving the aspect information after starting deriving the aspect information. The gaming machine according to any one of features k1 to k13, wherein the information deriving process is executed a plurality of times until the process is completed.

  According to the feature k14, since the information derivation process is executed a plurality of times from the start of the derivation of the aspect information to the completion of the derivation of the aspect information, the derivation of the aspect information is completed by one information derivation process. The processing load for executing the information derivation process can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the information deriving process is performed.

Feature k15. A period elapse specifying means (a function of executing the processing of step SA210 in the main CPU 63) for specifying that a predetermined period has elapsed from the generation of the predetermined period start trigger to the generation of the predetermined period end trigger;
The predetermined period derived by the information deriving unit using the history information stored in the history storage unit based on the fact that the predetermined period has passed by the period elapse specifying unit. Storage executing means (function for executing the processing of steps SA203 and SA216 in the main CPU 63) for storing the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the period as the mode corresponding mode information in the mode information storing means (calculation result storage area 234) ) And
The aspect information display control means controls display of the information display means so that a display corresponding to the period corresponding aspect information stored in the aspect information storage means is performed,
The predetermined correspondence display control means determines that the predetermined display trigger has occurred when the predetermined period has elapsed by the time lapse specifying means, and the predetermined correspondence display is performed by the information display means. The gaming machine described in the feature k14, wherein the gaming machine is performed.

  According to the feature k15, past mode information derived in units of a predetermined period is stored as period corresponding mode information, and a display corresponding to the period corresponding mode information is performed by the information display unit. Thus, the manager of the gaming hall can grasp the past period corresponding mode information derived in units of the predetermined period by checking the information display means. When a predetermined period has elapsed, a predetermined correspondence display is performed by the information display means, and then a display corresponding to the period correspondence mode information newly derived due to the lapse of the predetermined period is performed. Thereby, the manager of the game hall determines whether or not the display corresponding to the period corresponding mode information on the information display means is a display corresponding to the period corresponding mode information newly derived based on the elapse of the predetermined period. Can be grasped. In addition, since the predetermined correspondence display can be performed during the period in which the period corresponding mode information is being derived, the predetermined period has elapsed and the period corresponding mode information is being derived. Nevertheless, it is possible to prevent the display corresponding to the period corresponding mode information from being performed irrespective of that.

  Feature k16. The predetermined correspondence display control means causes the information display means to perform the predetermined correspondence display over a period longer than a longest period required for deriving one piece of the aspect information by the information deriving means. The gaming machine according to feature k15, wherein

  According to the feature k16, when the predetermined period has elapsed and the period corresponding mode information is being derived, the predetermined display is performed by the information display unit.

  Note that, for the configurations of the features k1 to k16, the features DA1 to DA15, the features DB1 to DB7, the features DC1 to DC5, the features DD1 to DD10, the features DE1 to DE6, the features DF1 to DF3, the features DG1 to DG18, and the features DH1 to DH1. DH7, features DI1 to DI9, features DJ1 to DJ4, features DK1 to DK7, features DL1 to DL20, features DM1 to DM7, features DN1 to DN6, features DO1 to DO11, features DP1 to DP12, features DQ1 to DQ5, features DR1 to DR1. DR17, features DS1 to DS8, features DT1 to DT13, features DU1 to DU8, features DV1 to DV6, features DW1 to DW11, features DX1 to DX11, features DY1 to DY11, features DZ1 to DZ10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b1 b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, Features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 15, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, Features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, Features z1 to z6, features αDA1 to αDA10, features αDB1 to αDB6, features αDC1 to αDC13, features αDD1 to αDD9, features αDE1 to αDE5, features αDF1 to αDF9, features αDG1 to αDG10, features αDH1 to αDH11, features αDI1 to αDI8, Features αDJ1 to αDJ14, Features αDK1 to αDK8, Features αDL1 to αDL11, Features αDM1 to αDM8, Features αDN1 to αD N6, feature αDO1 to αDO7, feature αDP1 to αDP7, feature αDQ1 to αDQ9, feature αDR1 to αDR8, feature αDS1 to αDS3, feature αDT1 to αDT4, feature αDU1 to αDU10, feature αDV1 to αDV5, feature αDW1 to αDW9, feature αDX1. Any one or a plurality of configurations among αDX4, features αDY1 to αDY11, features αDZ1 to αDZ4, and features αa1 to αa3 may be applied. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

<Feature l group>
Feature l1. History storage executing means (normal entry management processing in the main CPU 63) for storing, in a history storage means (normal counter area 231), history information of the game corresponding to a predetermined event caused by execution of the game. Function to execute)
Information deriving means for deriving mode information (base value) corresponding to the result of the game using the history information stored in the history storage means (the function of executing the processing of step SA201 in the main CPU 63);
Mode information storage means (operation result storage area 234) for storing the mode information derived by the information deriving means;
Aspect information display control means (main side) for controlling display of information display means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204) so that display corresponding to the aspect information stored in the aspect information storage means is performed. A function of executing a display process and a second timer interrupt process in the CPU 63).
The aspect information storage means includes a plurality of specific storage areas (current area 311, first history area 312) so as to store each of the plurality of aspect information derived at different timings by the information derivation means. , A second history area 313, and a third history area 314).
The aspect information display control means controls the information display means so that display corresponding to each of the plurality of pieces of aspect information stored in the plurality of specific storage areas is sequentially executed in accordance with a predetermined display order. A gaming machine characterized by:

  According to the feature 11, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to the event is stored in the history storage unit. By storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the history information and unauthorized modification. Further, the mode information corresponding to the result of the game is derived using the history information stored in the history storage unit, and the information display unit performs display corresponding to the derived mode information. Thereby, it is possible to grasp the management result of the game history such as the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event.

  Further, in the aspect information storage means, a plurality of pieces of aspect information having different derived timings are stored, and the notification corresponding to each of the plurality of pieces of aspect information is sequentially executed. In addition, it is possible to individually grasp the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event in a plurality of periods. In addition, since the display corresponding to each of the plurality of aspect information stored in the plurality of specific storage areas is sequentially executed in accordance with the predetermined display order, the manager of the game hall grasps the type of the aspect information to be displayed. Easier to do.

  Feature l2. The gaming machine according to feature 11, wherein a predetermined display order is determined in association with the plurality of specific storage areas.

  According to the feature 12, since the predetermined display order of the display corresponding to the aspect information is determined in association with the plurality of specific storage areas, when the display corresponding to one aspect information is newly started, the display target is determined. It is possible to simplify the processing configuration for specifying the type of the aspect information.

Feature l3. A predetermined correspondence display (a pre-shift display) performed by the information display means before a display corresponding to the aspect information is newly started based on occurrence of a predetermined display trigger; Control means (a function of executing the processing of step SA320 and the second timer interrupt processing in the main CPU 63);
The aspect information display control means, when the information display means performs the display corresponding to the aspect information after the predetermined corresponding display is performed by the information display means, the first order in the predetermined display order The gaming machine according to feature 11 or 12, wherein the display is started from a display corresponding to the corresponding aspect information.

  According to the feature 13, after the predetermined corresponding display is performed based on the occurrence of the predetermined display trigger, the display is started from the display corresponding to the mode corresponding to the first order in the predetermined display order. Thus, when a predetermined display trigger occurs, it is possible to confirm again the display corresponding to the mode information from the first order of the predetermined display order.

Feature 14. A period elapse specifying means (a function of executing the processing of step SA210 in the main CPU 63) for specifying that a predetermined period has elapsed from the generation of the predetermined period start trigger to the generation of the predetermined period end trigger;
The predetermined period derived by the information deriving unit using the history information stored in the history storage unit based on the fact that the predetermined period has passed is specified by the period elapse specifying unit. Storage execution means (a function of executing the processing of steps SA203 and SA216 in the main CPU 63) for storing the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the period as the period corresponding mode information in the plurality of specific storage areas. ,
The storage execution unit may be configured to store the period corresponding mode information in the plurality of specific storage areas in accordance with the order derived by the information derivation unit, in any one of the features 11 to 13. 2. The gaming machine according to 1.

  According to the feature 14, it is possible to confirm the period corresponding mode information in the derived order.

  Feature 15. Before the display corresponding to the aspect information different from the aspect information from the situation in which the display corresponding to the aspect information is being performed, the information display unit is set to a state before switching (a state of non-display for intervals). The gaming machine according to any one of features l1 to l4, characterized in that the gaming machine has means (function of executing the process of step SA316 and the second timer interrupt process in the main CPU 63).

  According to the feature 15, when the aspect information to be displayed is switched, the information display means is in the state before switching, so that the manager of the gaming hall clearly indicates that the aspect information to be displayed is switched. It becomes possible to grasp.

  Note that, for the configurations of the features 11 to 15, the features DA1 to DA15, the features DB1 to DB7, the features DC1 to DC5, the features DD1 to DD10, the features DE1 to DE6, the features DF1 to DF3, the features DG1 to DG18, and the features DH1 to DH1. DH7, features DI1 to DI9, features DJ1 to DJ4, features DK1 to DK7, features DL1 to DL20, features DM1 to DM7, features DN1 to DN6, features DO1 to DO11, features DP1 to DP12, features DQ1 to DQ5, features DR1 to DR1. DR17, features DS1 to DS8, features DT1 to DT13, features DU1 to DU8, features DV1 to DV6, features DW1 to DW11, features DX1 to DX11, features DY1 to DY11, features DZ1 to DZ10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b1 b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 15, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αDA1 to αDA10, features αDB1 to αDB6, features αDC1 to αDC13, features αDD1 to αDD9, features αDE1 to αDE5, features αDF1 to αDF9, features αDG1 to αDG10, features αDH1 to αDH11, features αDI1 to αDI8, and features αDJ1 to αDJ14, features αDK1 to αDK8, features αDL1 to αDL11, features αDM1 to αDM8, features αDN1 to αDN 6, feature αDO1 to αDO7, feature αDP1 to αDP7, feature αDQ1 to αDQ9, feature αDR1 to αDR8, feature αDS1 to αDS3, feature αDT1 to αDT4, feature αDU1 to αDU10, feature αDV1 to αDV5, feature αDW1 to αDW9, and feature αDX1. Any one or a plurality of configurations among αDX4, features αDY1 to αDY11, features αDZ1 to αDZ4, and features αa1 to αa3 may be applied. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

<Characteristic m group>
Features m1. History storage executing means (normal entry management processing in the main CPU 63) for storing, in a history storage means (normal counter area 231), history information of the game corresponding to a predetermined event caused by execution of the game. Function to execute)
Information deriving means for deriving mode information (base value) corresponding to the result of the game using the history information stored in the history storage means (the function of executing the processing of step SA201 in the main CPU 63); With
The information deriving means executes an information deriving process for deriving the aspect information based on occurrence of a processing execution trigger, and starts deriving the aspect information after starting deriving the aspect information. A game machine that executes the information derivation process a plurality of times until the process is completed.

  According to the feature m1, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to the event is stored in the history storage unit. By storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the history information and unauthorized modification. Also, by using the history information stored in the history storage means to derive mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period, the management result of the game history such as the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event is grasped. It becomes possible. In addition, since the information derivation process is performed a plurality of times from the start of the derivation of the aspect information to the completion of the derivation of the aspect information, compared to a configuration in which the derivation of the aspect information is completed in one information derivation process Thus, the processing load for executing the information derivation process can be reduced.

Feature m2. A period elapse specifying means (a function of executing the processing of step SA210 in the main CPU 63) for specifying that a predetermined period has elapsed from the generation of the predetermined period start trigger to the generation of the predetermined period end trigger;
The predetermined period derived by the information deriving unit using the history information stored in the history storage unit based on the fact that the predetermined period has passed by the period elapse specifying unit. A storage executing means (a function for executing the processing of steps SA203 and SA216 in the main CPU 63) for storing the mode information corresponding to the game result in the period as the mode corresponding mode information in the mode information storing means (calculation result storage area 234); )When,
Aspect information display control means (display information control means for controlling display of information display means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204) such that display corresponding to the period corresponding aspect information stored in the aspect information storage means is performed. A function of executing a display process and a second timer interrupt process in the main CPU 63);
A predetermined correspondence display control means (step SA320 in the main CPU 63) for causing a predetermined correspondence display to be performed by the information display means based on the fact that the predetermined period has passed by the period elapse specifying means. (A function of executing a second timer interrupt process and a second timer interrupt process).

  According to the feature m2, past mode information derived in units of a predetermined period is stored as period corresponding mode information, and display corresponding to the period corresponding mode information is performed by the information display unit. Thus, the manager of the gaming hall can grasp the past period corresponding mode information derived in units of the predetermined period by checking the information display means. When a predetermined period has elapsed, a predetermined correspondence display is performed by the information display means, and then a display corresponding to the period correspondence mode information newly derived due to the lapse of the predetermined period is performed. Thereby, the manager of the game hall determines whether or not the display corresponding to the period corresponding mode information on the information display means is a display corresponding to the period corresponding mode information newly derived based on the elapse of the predetermined period. Can be grasped. In addition, since the predetermined correspondence display can be performed during the period in which the period corresponding mode information is being derived, the predetermined period has elapsed and the period corresponding mode information is being derived. Nevertheless, it is possible to prevent the display corresponding to the period corresponding mode information from being performed irrespective of that.

  Feature m3. The predetermined correspondence display control means causes the information display means to perform the predetermined correspondence display over a period longer than a longest period required for deriving one piece of the aspect information by the information deriving means. A gaming machine according to feature m2.

  According to the feature m3, when the predetermined period has elapsed and the period corresponding mode information is being derived, the predetermined corresponding display is performed by the information display means.

  For the configurations of the features m1 to m3, the features DA1 to DA15, the features DB1 to DB7, the features DC1 to DC5, the features DD1 to DD10, the features DE1 to DE6, the features DF1 to DF3, the features DG1 to DG18, and the features DH1 to DH1. DH7, features DI1 to DI9, features DJ1 to DJ4, features DK1 to DK7, features DL1 to DL20, features DM1 to DM7, features DN1 to DN6, features DO1 to DO11, features DP1 to DP12, features DQ1 to DQ5, features DR1 to DR1. DR17, features DS1 to DS8, features DT1 to DT13, features DU1 to DU8, features DV1 to DV6, features DW1 to DW11, features DX1 to DX11, features DY1 to DY11, features DZ1 to DZ10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b1 b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 15, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αDA1 to αDA10, features αDB1 to αDB6, features αDC1 to αDC13, features αDD1 to αDD9, features αDE1 to αDE5, features αDF1 to αDF9, features αDG1 to αDG10, features αDH1 to αDH11, features αDI1 to αDI8, and features αDJ1 to αDJ14, features αDK1 to αDK8, features αDL1 to αDL11, features αDM1 to αDM8, features αDN1 to αDN 6, feature αDO1 to αDO7, feature αDP1 to αDP7, feature αDQ1 to αDQ9, feature αDR1 to αDR8, feature αDS1 to αDS3, feature αDT1 to αDT4, feature αDU1 to αDU10, feature αDV1 to αDV5, feature αDW1 to αDW9, and feature αDX1. Any one or a plurality of configurations among αDX4, features αDY1 to αDY11, features αDZ1 to αDZ4, and features αa1 to αa3 may be applied. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

  According to the invention relating to the feature k group, the feature l group, and the feature m group, the following problem can be solved.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, in a pachinko machine, a dish storage section for storing game balls given to a player is provided on the front of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to a game ball launching device, It is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage unit, for example. Further, in a pachinko machine, a configuration including an upper dish storage section and a lower dish storage section as a dish storage section is also known. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper dish storage section is a game ball launching device. And the surplus game balls in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  Further, in the slot machine, when a new game is started by operating the start lever while a medal is bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation of the reel is started by the rotation start control being executed by the control means, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means executes the rotation start control. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation stop of the reels corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in the gaming machines such as those described above, it is necessary to appropriately manage the gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Characteristic n group>
Feature n1. Setting means (a function of executing the processing of step SA709 in the main CPU 63) for setting a set value to be used from among a plurality of set values corresponding to the player's advantage;
When the supply of the operating power is started, the setting value to be used is changed based on the fact that the first setting-related operation (the ON operation of the setting key insertion unit 68a and the pressing operation of the reset button 68c) is performed. (A function of making an affirmative determination in step SA412 of the main CPU 63 and step SA417 in the 77th embodiment). In the seventy-eighth embodiment, the function of making an affirmative determination in steps SA905 and SA916 and the function of making an affirmative determination in step SA917).
Based on the fact that the second setting-related operation (the ON operation of the setting key insertion unit 68a) has been performed when the supply of the operating power is started, the setting value to be used set by the setting unit is changed. Notification generating means (a function of executing a setting confirmation process in the main CPU 63) to be notified,
The situation generating means may be configured to perform the setting even if the second setting-related operation is performed when the supply of the operating power is stopped in the middle of the settable state and when the supply of the operating power is started thereafter. Post-start generation means for making a situation (the function of making an affirmative determination in step SA412 of the main CPU 63 in the 77th embodiment, and making an affirmative determination in steps SA905 and SA916 of the main CPU 63 in the 78th embodiment) A gaming machine characterized by having a function.

  According to the feature n1, since a setting value to be used is set from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage, the player can use a more advantageous setting value. That you expect. Further, in order to change the setting value to be used, it is necessary to perform the first setting-related operation when the supply of the operating power is started, and therefore, an act of illegally changing the setting value to be used. Is difficult to perform. In addition, when the supply of the operation power is started, the setting value of the use target is notified by performing the second setting-related operation, so that the manager of the game hall checks the set value of the use target as necessary. It becomes possible.

  Further, when the supply of the operating power is stopped in the middle of the settable state, and when the supply of the operating power is started thereafter, the settable state is set even if the second setting-related operation is performed. In this way, if the supply of operating power is stopped while changing the set value to be used, the setting of the use target is not performed when the supply of operating power is resumed, but rather than the notification of the set value of the use target. It is possible to give priority to the change of the value, and it is possible to prevent the game from being started even though the change of the set value of the use target is not actually completed.

  Feature n2. A status notifying means (a function of executing the processing of steps SA801 to SA803 in the main CPU 63 and a function of executing the second timer interrupt processing) for notifying the set value being changed in the settable state. The gaming machine according to feature n1, wherein:

  According to the feature n2, in the setting possible state, the setting value being changed is reported, so that the setting value changing operation can be performed while grasping the current setting value. In addition, the setting value being changed in the setting possible state is notified in this manner, so that the setting becomes possible even when the second setting related operation is performed when the supply of the operating power is started. Even if the value change operation is prioritized, the set value can be substantially confirmed.

  Feature n3. Each of the status notifying means and the notification generating means is configured to display target set values on predetermined display means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204). The gaming machine according to n2.

  According to the feature n3, the target setting value is displayed on the predetermined display means regardless of whether the setting value is changed or the setting value is confirmed. On the other hand, the predetermined display means can be used also. Further, even if the second setting-related operation is performed when the supply of the operating power is started, the setting is possible even if the second setting-related operation is performed. Is displayed, the manager of the gaming hall that has performed the second setting-related operation can check the set value by looking at the predetermined display means.

  Feature n4. The status notifying unit may cause the display corresponding to the set value in the middle of the change and the display corresponding to the settable status to be performed by the predetermined display unit. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature n4, in the case where the setting is possible, not only the display corresponding to the setting value being changed is performed on the predetermined display means, but also the display corresponding to the setting possible is performed. As a result, when the supply of the operating power is stopped in the middle of the settable state, and the supply of the operating power is started thereafter, the settable state is set in spite of the second setting-related operation being performed. In this case, it becomes easier for the manager of the gaming hall to know that the setting is possible.

  Feature n5. The post-start generation means, when setting the settable state, enables changing the set value from the set value selected when the supply of the operation power is stopped in the middle of the settable state. The gaming machine according to any one of features n1 to n4.

  According to the feature n5, even if the supply of the operation power is stopped in the middle of the settable state, when the supply of the operation power is restarted, the setting value is changed from the state immediately before the supply of the operation power is stopped. The operation can be performed continuously.

Feature n6. Setting correspondence storage means (setting reference area 341) for storing setting correspondence information corresponding to the set value set by the setting means;
Selection correspondence storage means (setting update area 342) for storing selection correspondence information corresponding to the setting value selected in the setting possible state,
The situation generating means changes the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means so that a set value to be selected is changed when a change trigger occurs in the settable situation. (The function of executing the processing of step SA708 in the main CPU 63).
The setting unit stores information corresponding to the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage unit as the setting correspondence information in the setting correspondence storage unit when an end trigger occurs in the setting possible state. By setting the set value that has been selected in the settable situation as a use target,
The post-start generation means, when the setting possible state, the setting corresponding to the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means when the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of the setting possible state The gaming machine according to any one of features n1 to n5, wherein the setting value can be changed from the value.

  According to the feature n6, the setting correspondence storage means for storing the setting correspondence information corresponding to the setting value to be used, and the selection correspondence storage means for storing the selection correspondence information corresponding to the setting value being changed in the settable situation. With the provision, it is possible to change the set value in the settable state while storing and holding the information of the set value that was set before the start of the settable state. In this case, when the supply of the operation power is restarted after the supply of the operation power is stopped in the middle of the settable state, the supply of the operation power is stored in the selection correspondence storage unit when the supply of the operation power is stopped. The setting value is changed from the setting value corresponding to the selection correspondence information. As a result, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped in the middle of the settable state, when the supply of the operating power is resumed, the operation of changing the set value is continued from a state immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped. It is possible to do it.

  Feature n7. The situation generating means, when the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of the settable situation, and when the first setting related operation is performed when the supply of operating power is started thereafter, Means for enabling the setting value to be changed from the setting value corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the setting correspondence storage means (in the 77th embodiment, the function of making an affirmative determination in step SA417 of the main CPU 63, The gaming machine according to feature n6, further comprising a function of making an affirmative determination in step SA917 of the main CPU 63 in the 78th embodiment).

  According to the feature n7, when the supply of the operation power is restarted after the supply of the operation power is stopped in the middle of the settable state, the supply of the operation power is stopped when the second setting related operation is performed. The change of the set value can be resumed from the set value that was the target of change before the operation was performed, but the supply of operating power was restarted after the supply of operating power was stopped in the middle of the settable state When the second setting-related operation is performed in such a case, the setting value is changed from the setting value corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the setting correspondence storage unit. This makes it possible to make the initial set value when the change of the set value is started to be different depending on the operation content when the supply of the operating power is restarted.

  Feature n8. The post-start generating means is configured to perform the first setting-related operation and the second setting-related operation when the supply of the operating power is stopped in the middle of the settable state and the supply of the operating power is started thereafter. The gaming machine according to any one of features n1 to n7, wherein the setting state can be set even when any operation is not performed.

  According to the feature n8, when the supply of the operation power is stopped in the middle of the settable state, when the supply of the operation power is started thereafter, both the first setting-related operation and the second setting-related operation are performed. If the operation power supply is stopped while the setting value is being changed, the setting value must be changed when the operation power supply is restarted, because the setting state may be possible even if it is not performed. It is possible to positively create a situation in which the situation is possible.

Feature n9. The first setting-related operation includes that the setting key insertion unit (setting key insertion unit 68a) is set to a predetermined corresponding state (a state where the ON operation is performed) by the setting key,
The situation generating means ends the settable situation based on the fact that the setting key insertion section has changed from the predetermined correspondence state to a specific correspondence state (a state where the operation has been operated OFF) by the setting key. The gaming machine according to any one of features n1 to n8, comprising means (a function of executing processing of steps SA709 and SA710 in the main CPU 63).

  According to the feature n9, since the setting key insertion section needs to be set to the predetermined corresponding state using the setting key in order to set the setting possible state, an act of illegally changing the setting value to be used is prohibited. This makes it difficult to perform. In this case, the setting possible state does not end only when the setting key insertion unit is in the specific correspondence state, but ends when the setting key insertion unit is changed from the predetermined correspondence state to the specific correspondence state. Thereby, even if the supply of the operation power is stopped in the middle of the setting possible state, and the supply of the operation power is started in a state where the setting key insertion unit is in the specific correspondence state thereafter, the setting possible state is immediately changed. Since the setting possible state is ended by changing the setting key insertion part from the specific corresponding state to the predetermined corresponding state after the setting key insertion part is changed from the specific corresponding state to the specific corresponding state, the administrator of the gaming hall It is possible to end the settable situation at a timing suitable for the user.

  Feature n10. The situation generating means, when the supply of the operating power is stopped while the notification of the set value of the use target is being performed by the notification generating means, and when the supply of the operating power is started thereafter, The gaming machine according to any one of features n1 to n9, wherein the setting possible state is set when the first setting-related operation is performed.

  According to the feature n10, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped during the notification of the set value of the use target, the first setting related operation is performed at the start of the supply of the operating power thereafter. Is settable. As a result, it is possible to prioritize the setting value changing operation over the setting value confirmation operation.

  In addition, for the configuration of the features n1 to n10, the features DA1 to DA15, the features DB1 to DB7, the features DC1 to DC5, the features DD1 to DD10, the features DE1 to DE6, the features DF1 to DF3, the features DG1 to DG18, and the features DH1 to DH1. DH7, features DI1 to DI9, features DJ1 to DJ4, features DK1 to DK7, features DL1 to DL20, features DM1 to DM7, features DN1 to DN6, features DO1 to DO11, features DP1 to DP12, features DQ1 to DQ5, features DR1 to DR1. DR17, features DS1 to DS8, features DT1 to DT13, features DU1 to DU8, features DV1 to DV6, features DW1 to DW11, features DX1 to DX11, features DY1 to DY11, features DZ1 to DZ10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b1 b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, Features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 15, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, Features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, Features z1 to z6, features αDA1 to αDA10, features αDB1 to αDB6, features αDC1 to αDC13, features αDD1 to αDD9, features αDE1 to αDE5, features αDF1 to αDF9, features αDG1 to αDG10, features αDH1 to αDH11, features αDI1 to αDI8, Features αDJ1 to αDJ14, Features αDK1 to αDK8, Features αDL1 to αDL11, Features αDM1 to αDM8, Features αDN1 to αD N6, feature αDO1 to αDO7, feature αDP1 to αDP7, feature αDQ1 to αDQ9, feature αDR1 to αDR8, feature αDS1 to αDS3, feature αDT1 to αDT4, feature αDU1 to αDU10, feature αDV1 to αDV5, feature αDW1 to αDW9, feature αDX1. Any one or a plurality of configurations among αDX4, features αDY1 to αDY11, features αDZ1 to αDZ4, and features αa1 to αa3 may be applied. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

<Feature o group>
Features o1. Means for executing the profit providing process in a manner corresponding to the set value set as the use target from the plurality of set values corresponding to the player's advantage (the processes of steps S503 and S504 in the main CPU 63) Function to execute)
Setting-related executing means for executing predetermined setting-related processing relating to the set value (function of executing setting value updating processing in main CPU 63, function of executing setting confirmation processing in main CPU 63);
On the basis of the fact that the supply of the operating power has been stopped before the completion of the predetermined setting-related processing, a halfway restart means () that restarts the predetermined setting-related processing from the middle after the supply of the operating power has been started thereafter. In the seventy-seventh embodiment, the function of making a positive determination in step SA412 in the main CPU 63 and the function of making a positive determination in step SA414 in the main CPU 63, and in the seventy-eighth embodiment, affirmation in steps SA905 and SA916 of the main CPU 63. A function of making a determination).

  According to the characteristic o1, since the setting value to be used is set from the setting values in a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. That you expect. In this case, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related processing is completed, the predetermined setting-related processing is restarted halfway when the supply of the operating power is restarted. Thus, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped during the predetermined setting-related processing, the predetermined setting-related processing can be continued when the supply of the operating power is restarted.

Feature o2. The setting-related execution means includes a predetermined setting-related operation (an ON operation of the setting key insertion unit 68a and a pressing operation of the reset button 68c if the predetermined setting-related processing is a setting value update processing); In the case of processing, the predetermined setting-related processing is executed based on the fact that the setting key insertion section 68a has been turned ON).
The gaming machine according to feature o1, wherein the halfway resuming unit restarts the predetermined setting-related processing from the middle even if the predetermined setting-related operation is not performed.

  According to the characteristic o2, when the supply of the operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related processing is completed, the predetermined setting-related processing is restarted from the middle even if the predetermined setting-related operation is not performed. Thus, it is possible to prioritize the restart from the middle of the predetermined setting-related processing.

Feature o3. The setting-related execution means executes the predetermined setting-related processing based on the fact that the predetermined setting-related operation has been performed when the supply of operating power is started,
The midway resuming means is for resuming the predetermined setting-related processing from the middle even if the predetermined setting-related operation is not performed when the supply of the operation power is started,
When the supply of the operating power is stopped before the completion of the predetermined setting-related processing, and when the supply of the operating power is started, and the predetermined setting-related operation is performed, The gaming machine according to feature o2, wherein the predetermined setting-related processing is not restarted from the middle, but the predetermined setting-related processing is newly started by the setting-related executing means.

  According to the characteristic o3, when the supply of the operation power is started, the predetermined setting-related operation is performed based on the fact that the predetermined setting-related operation is performed. Is difficult to perform. In this case, when the supply of the operating power is restarted after the supply of the operating power is stopped during the predetermined setting-related processing, the predetermined setting-related processing is not performed even if the predetermined setting-related operation is not performed. , It is possible to give priority to restarting in the middle of the predetermined setting-related processing. On the other hand, when the supply of the operation power is restarted after the supply of the operation power is stopped in the middle of the predetermined setting-related processing, the predetermined setting-related processing is performed when the predetermined setting-related operation is performed. Instead of being restarted, it is started anew. Accordingly, when the supply of the operation power is stopped during the predetermined setting-related processing, the predetermined setting-related processing is newly started depending on the presence or absence of the predetermined setting-related operation when the supply of the operation power is restarted. And restarting the predetermined setting-related processing in the middle.

Feature o4. The predetermined setting-related operation includes that the setting key insertion section (setting key insertion section 68a) is set to a predetermined corresponding state (a state in which an ON operation is performed) by the setting key,
The setting-related execution means is configured to execute the predetermined setting-related processing based on specifying that the setting key insertion unit has been changed from the predetermined corresponding state to a specific corresponding state (a state in which an OFF operation has been performed) by the setting key. (A function of executing the processing of step SA504 in the main CPU 63, and a function of executing the processing of steps SA709 and SA710 in the main CPU 63) of the main CPU 63. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature o4, in order to start the predetermined setting-related processing, it is necessary to set the setting key insertion unit to the predetermined corresponding state using the setting key. This makes it difficult to perform. In this case, the predetermined setting-related processing does not end only when the setting key insertion unit is in the specific correspondence state, but ends when the setting key insertion unit is changed from the predetermined correspondence state to the specific correspondence state. Thereby, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related process is completed, even if the supply of the operating power is started in a situation where the setting key insertion unit is in the specific corresponding state, the supply of the operating power is immediately started. The predetermined setting-related processing is not terminated, and the predetermined setting-related processing is terminated by changing the setting key insertion unit from the specific corresponding state to the predetermined corresponding state and then further changing from the predetermined corresponding state to the specific corresponding state. Therefore, it is possible to end the predetermined setting-related processing at a timing favorable for the manager of the gaming hall.

  Feature o5. The gaming machine according to any one of features o1 to o4, wherein the predetermined setting-related process is a process for changing a setting value to be used.

  According to the feature o5, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped while the setting value is being changed, when the supply of the operating power is restarted, the change of the set value is performed from the set value during the change. It is possible to restart. Thus, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped while the setting value is being changed, the operation of changing the setting value can be continued when the supply of the operating power is restarted.

Feature o6. The predetermined setting-related processing is processing for changing a setting value to be used,
Setting correspondence storage means (setting reference area 341) for storing setting correspondence information corresponding to a setting value to be used;
Selection correspondence storage means (setting update area 342) for storing selection correspondence information corresponding to the setting value selected in the predetermined setting-related processing.
The setting related execution means,
Means for changing the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means (main side) so that the setting value to be selected is changed when a change trigger occurs as the predetermined setting related processing. A function of executing the processing of Step SA708 in the CPU 63);
As the predetermined setting-related processing, by storing information corresponding to the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means as the setting correspondence information in the setting correspondence storage means when an end opportunity occurs, Means for setting the selected set value as a use target (a function of executing the process of step SA709 in the main CPU 63).
The midway resuming unit is configured to determine the setting value from the setting value corresponding to the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage unit when the supply of the operating power is stopped before completing the predetermined setting related processing. The gaming machine according to any one of the features o1 to o5, wherein the game machine can be changed.

  According to the feature o6, the setting correspondence storage means for storing the setting correspondence information corresponding to the setting value to be used, and the selection correspondence storage means for storing the selection correspondence information corresponding to the setting value being changed in the settable state. With the provision, it is possible to change the set value in the settable state while storing and holding the information of the set value that was set before the start of the settable state. In this case, when the supply of the operating power is restarted after the supply of the operating power is stopped during the change of the set value, the supply of the operating power is stored in the selection correspondence storage means when the supply of the operating power is stopped. The setting value is changed from the setting value corresponding to the selected correspondence information. As a result, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped while the setting value is being changed, when the supply of the operating power is restarted, the setting value is changed from the state immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped. The operation can be performed continuously.

Feature o7. The setting-related execution means executes the predetermined setting-related processing based on that a predetermined setting-related operation has been performed when the supply of the operation power is started,
The midway resuming means is for restarting the predetermined setting-related processing halfway based on the fact that the predetermined setting-related operation has not been performed when the supply of the operating power is started,
The setting-related execution unit may be configured to perform the predetermined setting-related operation when the supply of the operation power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related processing is completed, and when the supply of the operation power is started thereafter. Means for enabling the setting value to be changed from the setting value corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the setting correspondence storage means (the function of making an affirmative determination at step SA417 in the main CPU 63 in the 77th embodiment) The gaming machine according to feature o6, further comprising a function of making an affirmative determination in step SA917 in the main CPU 63 in the seventy-eighth embodiment.

  According to the feature o7, when the supply of the operation power is stopped after the supply of the operation power is stopped while the setting value is being changed, the operation power is determined based on the fact that the predetermined setting related operation is not performed. The change of the set value can be resumed from the set value that was the target of change before the supply of power was stopped, while the supply of operating power was stopped during the change of the set value In the case where the operation related to the predetermined setting is performed when the supply of the operation power is restarted, the setting value is changed from the setting value corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the setting correspondence storage unit. This makes it possible to make the initial set value when the change of the set value is started to be different depending on the operation content when the supply of the operating power is restarted.

  Note that, for the configurations of the features o1 to o7, the features DA1 to DA15, the features DB1 to DB7, the features DC1 to DC5, the features DD1 to DD10, the features DE1 to DE6, the features DF1 to DF3, the features DG1 to DG18, and the features DH1 to DH1. DH7, features DI1 to DI9, features DJ1 to DJ4, features DK1 to DK7, features DL1 to DL20, features DM1 to DM7, features DN1 to DN6, features DO1 to DO11, features DP1 to DP12, features DQ1 to DQ5, features DR1 to DR1. DR17, features DS1 to DS8, features DT1 to DT13, features DU1 to DU8, features DV1 to DV6, features DW1 to DW11, features DX1 to DX11, features DY1 to DY11, features DZ1 to DZ10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b1 b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 15, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αDA1 to αDA10, features αDB1 to αDB6, features αDC1 to αDC13, features αDD1 to αDD9, features αDE1 to αDE5, features αDF1 to αDF9, features αDG1 to αDG10, features αDH1 to αDH11, features αDI1 to αDI8, and features αDJ1 to αDJ14, features αDK1 to αDK8, features αDL1 to αDL11, features αDM1 to αDM8, features αDN1 to αDN 6, feature αDO1 to αDO7, feature αDP1 to αDP7, feature αDQ1 to αDQ9, feature αDR1 to αDR8, feature αDS1 to αDS3, feature αDT1 to αDT4, feature αDU1 to αDU10, feature αDV1 to αDV5, feature αDW1 to αDW9, and feature αDX1. Any one or a plurality of configurations among αDX4, features αDY1 to αDY11, features αDZ1 to αDZ4, and features αa1 to αa3 may be applied. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

<Characteristic p group>
Feature p1. Means for executing the profit providing process in a manner corresponding to the set value set as the use target from the plurality of set values corresponding to the player's advantage (the processes of steps S503 and S504 in the main CPU 63) Function to execute)
Predetermined setting-related operation (ON operation of setting key insertion unit 68a and pressing operation of reset button 68c if the predetermined setting-related process is a setting value updating process, setting key insertion if the predetermined setting-related process is a setting confirmation process Setting-related executing means (a function for executing a setting value updating process in the main CPU 63, a setting in the main CPU 63) for executing a predetermined setting-related process relating to the setting value based on the ON operation of the unit 68a. Function to execute a confirmation process).
If the supply of the operating power is stopped before completing the predetermined setting-related processing, the setting-related execution means may not perform the predetermined setting-related operation after the supply of the operating power is started thereafter. The post-supply execution means for executing the predetermined setting-related processing (the function of making a positive determination in step SA412 of the main CPU 63 in the 77th embodiment and the function of making a positive determination in step SA414 of the main CPU 63, 78th embodiment) In the embodiment, the main machine CPU 63 has a function of making an affirmative determination in steps SA905 and SA916).

  According to the feature p1, since the setting value to be used is set from the setting values in a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. That you expect. Further, by performing the predetermined setting-related operation, it is possible to execute the predetermined setting-related processing. In this case, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related processing is completed, the predetermined setting is performed even if the predetermined setting-related operation is not performed when the supply of the operating power is resumed. Related processing is executed. This makes it possible to prioritize the execution of the predetermined setting-related processing.

Feature p2. The setting-related execution means executes the predetermined setting-related processing based on the fact that the predetermined setting-related operation has been performed when the supply of operating power is started,
The gaming machine according to feature p1, wherein the post-supply execution means executes the predetermined setting-related processing even when the predetermined setting-related operation is not performed when the supply of the operating power is started. .

  According to the feature p2, when the supply of the operation power is started, the predetermined setting-related processing is performed based on the fact that the predetermined setting-related operation is performed. Is difficult to perform. In this case, when the supply of the operating power is restarted after the supply of the operating power is stopped during the predetermined setting-related processing, the predetermined setting-related processing is executed even if the predetermined setting-related operation is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to give priority to the execution of the predetermined setting-related processing.

Feature p3. The predetermined setting-related operation includes that the setting key insertion section (setting key insertion section 68a) is set to a predetermined corresponding state (a state in which an ON operation is performed) by the setting key,
The setting-related execution means is configured to execute the predetermined setting-related processing based on specifying that the setting key insertion unit has been changed from the predetermined corresponding state to a specific corresponding state (a state in which an OFF operation has been performed) by the setting key. (A function of executing the processing of step SA504 in the main CPU 63 and a function of executing the processing of step SA709 and step SA710 in the main CPU 63). Gaming machine.

  According to the feature p3, in order to start the predetermined setting-related processing, it is necessary to use the setting key to bring the setting key insertion unit into the predetermined corresponding state, so that the act of illegally executing the predetermined setting-related processing is performed. This makes it difficult to perform. In this case, the predetermined setting-related processing does not end only when the setting key insertion unit is in the specific correspondence state, but ends when the setting key insertion unit is changed from the predetermined correspondence state to the specific correspondence state. Thereby, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related process is completed, even if the supply of the operating power is started in a situation where the setting key insertion unit is in the specific corresponding state, the supply of the operating power is immediately started. The predetermined setting-related processing is not terminated, and the predetermined setting-related processing is terminated by changing the setting key insertion unit from the specific corresponding state to the predetermined corresponding state and then further changing from the predetermined corresponding state to the specific corresponding state. Therefore, it is possible to end the predetermined setting-related processing at a timing favorable for the manager of the gaming hall.

  Feature p4. Even if the supply of the operating power is stopped before completing the predetermined setting-related process, the execution unit after the supply performs the specific related operation when the supply of the operating power is started thereafter. The gaming machine according to any one of the features p1 to p3, wherein the predetermined setting-related process is not executed when the setting is performed.

  According to the feature p4, even if the supply of the operation power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related processing is completed, the supply of the operation power is started after that and the specific related operation is performed. Does not execute the predetermined setting-related processing. Thereby, even when the supply of the operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related processing is completed, the supply of the operating power is started when the predetermined setting-related processing does not need to be performed thereafter. In such a case, by performing the specific related operation, it is possible to prevent the predetermined setting related process from being executed.

  Feature p5. The gaming machine according to any one of features p1 to p4, wherein the predetermined setting-related process is a process for notifying a setting value to be used.

  According to the feature p5, when the supply of the operation power is stopped during the notification of the set value, the predetermined setting related operation is not performed when the supply of the operation power is started thereafter. Also, the notification of the set value is started again. Thereby, it is possible to give priority to the notification of the set value.

Feature p6. Setting means (a function of executing the processing of step SA709 in the main CPU 63) for setting a set value to be used from among a plurality of set values corresponding to the player's advantage;
When the supply of the operating power is started, the setting value to be used is changed based on the fact that the specific related operation (the ON operation of the setting key insertion unit 68a and the pressing operation of the reset button 68c) is performed. Status generating means (in the seventy-seventh embodiment, a function of making an affirmative determination in step SA412 of the main CPU 63 and a function of making a positive determination in step SA417). A function of making an affirmative determination, in the 78th embodiment, a function of making an affirmative determination in steps SA905 and SA916 of the main CPU 63 and a function of making an affirmative determination in step SA917).
Even if the supply of the operating power is stopped before completing the predetermined setting-related process, the post-supply execution means executes the specific related operation when the supply of the operating power is started thereafter. In the case that the predetermined setting-related processing is not performed,
Even if the supply of the operating power is stopped before completing the predetermined setting-related processing, the situation generating means performs the specific related operation when the supply of the operating power is started thereafter. The gaming machine according to the feature p5, wherein the setting possible state is set in the event that the setting is made.

  According to the feature p6, even when the supply of the operating power is stopped while the setting value is being notified, the specific related operation is performed when the supply of the operating power is started thereafter. , The setting value is not notified, but the setting value can be changed. Accordingly, when a specific related operation for setting a settable state in which the setting value can be changed is performed, it is possible to prioritize the occurrence of the settable state over the notification of the set value.

  Feature p7. The gaming machine according to any one of features p1 to p6, wherein the predetermined setting-related processing is processing for changing a setting value to be used.

  According to the feature p7, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped while the setting value is being changed, the setting value can be changed when the supply of the operating power is restarted. Thus, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped while the setting value is being changed, the operation of changing the setting value can be continued when the supply of the operating power is restarted.

  Note that, for the configurations of the features p1 to p7, the features DA1 to DA15, the features DB1 to DB7, the features DC1 to DC5, the features DD1 to DD10, the features DE1 to DE6, the features DF1 to DF3, the features DG1 to DG18, and the features DH1 to DH1. DH7, features DI1 to DI9, features DJ1 to DJ4, features DK1 to DK7, features DL1 to DL20, features DM1 to DM7, features DN1 to DN6, features DO1 to DO11, features DP1 to DP12, features DQ1 to DQ5, features DR1 to DR1. DR17, features DS1 to DS8, features DT1 to DT13, features DU1 to DU8, features DV1 to DV6, features DW1 to DW11, features DX1 to DX11, features DY1 to DY11, features DZ1 to DZ10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b1 b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 15, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αDA1 to αDA10, features αDB1 to αDB6, features αDC1 to αDC13, features αDD1 to αDD9, features αDE1 to αDE5, features αDF1 to αDF9, features αDG1 to αDG10, features αDH1 to αDH11, features αDI1 to αDI8, and features αDJ1 to αDJ14, features αDK1 to αDK8, features αDL1 to αDL11, features αDM1 to αDM8, features αDN1 to αDN 6, feature αDO1 to αDO7, feature αDP1 to αDP7, feature αDQ1 to αDQ9, feature αDR1 to αDR8, feature αDS1 to αDS3, feature αDT1 to αDT4, feature αDU1 to αDU10, feature αDV1 to αDV5, feature αDW1 to αDW9, and feature αDX1. Any one or a plurality of configurations among αDX4, features αDY1 to αDY11, features αDZ1 to αDZ4, and features αa1 to αa3 may be applied. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

<Characteristic q group>
Feature q1. Means for executing the profit providing process in a manner corresponding to the set value set as the use target from the plurality of set values corresponding to the player's advantage (the processes of steps S503 and S504 in the main CPU 63) Function to execute)
Setting-related executing means for executing a predetermined setting-related process relating to the set value (a function of executing a setting value updating process in the main CPU 63, a function of executing a setting confirmation process in the main CPU 63),
Even if the supply of the operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related processing is completed, the setting-related execution means performs a specific related operation (the predetermined setting-related processing) when the supply of the operating power is started thereafter. If the setting confirmation process is a RAM clear operation or a setting change operation, and if the predetermined setting-related process is a setting value updating process, a RAM clear operation is performed, the predetermined setting-related process is not executed. A gaming machine characterized by:

  According to the feature q1, since the setting value to be used is set from the setting values in a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. That you expect. In this case, even if the supply of the operation power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related processing is completed, the predetermined operation is performed when the supply of the operation power is started and the specific related operation is performed. Is not executed. Thereby, even when the supply of the operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related processing is completed, the supply of the operating power is started when the predetermined setting-related processing does not need to be performed thereafter. In such a case, by performing the specific related operation, it is possible to prevent the predetermined setting related process from being executed.

  Feature q2. The gaming machine according to feature q1, wherein the predetermined setting-related processing is processing for notifying a setting value to be used.

  According to the feature q2, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped during the notification of the set value, the setting is performed when the specific related operation is performed when the supply of the operating power is started thereafter. Notification of the value is not resumed. Accordingly, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped while the notification of the set value is being performed, if the notification of the set value does not need to be performed thereafter, the supply of the operating power is started. By performing the specific related operation, it is possible to prevent the setting value from being notified.

  Feature q3. The setting-related execution means includes a predetermined setting-related operation (an ON operation of the setting key insertion unit 68a and a pressing operation of the reset button 68c if the predetermined setting-related processing is a setting value update processing); In the case of processing, the predetermined setting-related processing is executed based on the fact that the setting key insertion section 68a has been turned ON), and before the predetermined setting-related processing is completed, the supply of operating power is performed. Even if the operation is stopped, the predetermined setting-related process is not executed when the specific-related operation is performed instead of the predetermined setting-related operation when the supply of the operating power is started thereafter. The gaming machine according to q1 or q2.

  According to the feature q3, it is necessary to perform a predetermined setting-related operation in order to perform the predetermined setting-related processing, and thus it is possible to make it difficult to perform an operation of illegally executing the predetermined setting-related processing.

  Feature q4. The setting-related execution means may not perform the specific-related operation when the supply of the operation power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related processing is completed and the supply of the operation power is started thereafter. Means for executing the predetermined setting-related processing even if the predetermined setting-related operation is not performed (in the 77th embodiment, the function of making an affirmative determination in step SA412 of the main CPU 63 and the step of the main CPU 63) The gaming machine according to feature q3, further including a function of making an affirmative determination in SA414).

  According to the feature q4, when the supply of the operation power is stopped before the predetermined setting related processing is completed, or when the specific related operation is performed when the supply of the operation power is started, the predetermined setting related operation is performed. It is possible to select whether or not to execute the predetermined setting-related processing without performing.

Feature q5. The predetermined setting-related operation includes that the setting key insertion section (setting key insertion section 68a) is set to a predetermined corresponding state (a state in which an ON operation is performed) by the setting key,
The setting-related execution means is configured to execute the predetermined setting-related processing based on specifying that the setting key insertion unit has been changed from the predetermined corresponding state to a specific corresponding state (a state in which an OFF operation has been performed) by the setting key. The gaming machine according to feature q4, further comprising means for terminating the process (a function of executing the processing of step SA504 in the main CPU 63 and a function of executing the processing of steps SA709 and SA710 in the main CPU 63). .

  According to the feature q5, in order to start the predetermined setting-related processing, it is necessary to use the setting key to bring the setting key insertion unit into the predetermined corresponding state, so that an act of illegally executing the predetermined setting-related processing is performed. This makes it difficult to perform. In this case, the predetermined setting-related processing does not end only when the setting key insertion unit is in the specific correspondence state, but ends when the setting key insertion unit is changed from the predetermined correspondence state to the specific correspondence state. Thereby, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related process is completed, even if the supply of the operating power is started in a situation where the setting key insertion unit is in the specific corresponding state, the supply of the operating power is immediately started. The predetermined setting-related processing is not terminated, and the predetermined setting-related processing is terminated by changing the setting key insertion unit from the specific corresponding state to the predetermined corresponding state and then further changing from the predetermined corresponding state to the specific corresponding state. Therefore, it is possible to end the predetermined setting-related processing at a timing favorable for the manager of the gaming hall.

  Feature q6. Another execution means for executing another process different from the predetermined setting-related process based on the fact that the specific-related operation has been performed when the supply of the operating power is started (the predetermined setting-related process is a In the case of processing, the main CPU 63 executes only the RAM clear processing and does not execute the set value update processing, or the main CPU 63 executes the RAM clear processing and the set value update processing, Any one of the features q1 to q5, wherein the update process includes a function of executing only the RAM clear process of the main CPU 63 and not executing the set value update process in the 77th embodiment. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature q6, when the supply of the operation power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related process is completed, the supply of the operation power is performed using the specific related operation performed to execute another process. When started, it is possible to prevent a predetermined setting-related process from being executed.

  Feature q7. Even if the supply of the operating power is stopped before completing the predetermined setting-related process, the separate execution unit may perform the specific related operation when the supply of the operating power is started thereafter. The gaming machine according to Feature q6, wherein the another process is performed based on the other process.

  According to the feature q7, even if the supply of the operation power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related processing is completed, the operation is stopped when the specific related operation is performed when the supply of the operation power is started thereafter. Can prioritize the execution of another process over the predetermined setting-related process.

  Feature q8. The predetermined setting related process is a process for notifying a setting value to be used, and the another process is a process for changing a setting value to be used. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature q8, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped during the notification of the set value, the setting is performed when the specific related operation is performed when the supply of the operating power is started thereafter. Notification of the value is not resumed. Accordingly, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped while the notification of the set value is being performed, if the notification of the set value does not need to be performed thereafter, the supply of the operating power is started. By performing the specific related operation, it is possible to prevent the setting value from being notified. Further, as an operation for preventing notification of the set value, a specific related operation for executing a process for changing the set value can be used.

  In addition, for the configuration of the features q1 to q8, the features DA1 to DA15, the features DB1 to DB7, the features DC1 to DC5, the features DD1 to DD10, the features DE1 to DE6, the features DF1 to DF3, the features DG1 to DG18, and the features DH1 to DH1. DH7, features DI1 to DI9, features DJ1 to DJ4, features DK1 to DK7, features DL1 to DL20, features DM1 to DM7, features DN1 to DN6, features DO1 to DO11, features DP1 to DP12, features DQ1 to DQ5, features DR1 to DR1. DR17, features DS1 to DS8, features DT1 to DT13, features DU1 to DU8, features DV1 to DV6, features DW1 to DW11, features DX1 to DX11, features DY1 to DY11, features DZ1 to DZ10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b1 b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 15, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αDA1 to αDA10, features αDB1 to αDB6, features αDC1 to αDC13, features αDD1 to αDD9, features αDE1 to αDE5, features αDF1 to αDF9, features αDG1 to αDG10, features αDH1 to αDH11, features αDI1 to αDI8, and features αDJ1 to αDJ14, features αDK1 to αDK8, features αDL1 to αDL11, features αDM1 to αDM8, features αDN1 to αDN 6, feature αDO1 to αDO7, feature αDP1 to αDP7, feature αDQ1 to αDQ9, feature αDR1 to αDR8, feature αDS1 to αDS3, feature αDT1 to αDT4, feature αDU1 to αDU10, feature αDV1 to αDV5, feature αDW1 to αDW9, and feature αDX1. Any one or a plurality of configurations among αDX4, features αDY1 to αDY11, features αDZ1 to αDZ4, and features αa1 to αa3 may be applied. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

<Character r group>
Feature r1. Setting means (a function of executing the processing of step SA709 in the main CPU 63) for setting a set value to be used from among a plurality of set values corresponding to the player's advantage;
A state generating means for setting a setting possible state (a state in which the setting value updating process is executed) in which the setting value to be used can be changed (in step 77412 in the main CPU 63 in the 77th embodiment) A function to make a positive determination in step SA417, a function to make a positive determination in step SA417, and a function to make a positive determination in step SA905 and step SA916 in the main CPU 63 and a function to make a positive determination in step SA917) in the 78th embodiment. ,
Setting correspondence storage means (setting reference area 341) for storing setting correspondence information corresponding to the set value set by the setting means;
Selection correspondence storage means (setting update area 342) for storing selection correspondence information corresponding to the setting value selected in the setting possible state,
The situation generating means changes the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means so that a set value to be selected is changed when a change trigger occurs in the settable situation. (The function of executing the processing of step SA708 in the main CPU 63).
The setting unit stores information corresponding to the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage unit as the setting correspondence information in the setting correspondence storage unit when an end trigger occurs in the setting possible state. A setting value set as a selection target in the setting possible state, as a use target.

  According to the feature r1, since a setting value to be used is set from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage, the player can use a more advantageous setting value. That you expect. In this case, setting correspondence storage means for storing setting correspondence information corresponding to the setting value to be used, and selection correspondence storage means for storing selection correspondence information corresponding to the setting value being changed in the settable state are provided. Accordingly, it is possible to change the set value in the settable state while storing and holding the information of the set value set before the start of the settable state.

  Feature r2. The situation generating means, when the settable situation is terminated before the end trigger occurs, in the settable situation that occurred after that in the settable situation that was previously stored in the selection correspondence storage means in the previous settable situation. The feature r1 further includes a first change execution unit (a function of making an affirmative determination in step SA701 in the main CPU 63) that enables the setting value to be changed from the setting value corresponding to the selection correspondence information. The gaming machine described.

  Feature r2. When the settable situation is started after the settable situation ends before the end trigger occurs, the set value is changed from the set value corresponding to the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means when the settable situation is started. . As a result, even if the settable status ends before the end trigger occurs, if the settable status is restarted, the setting value is changed from the last set value selected in the previous settable status. Can be continuously performed.

  Feature r3. The situation generating means, when the settable situation ends before the end trigger occurs, sets the setting corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the setting correspondence storage means in the settable situation generated thereafter. The gaming machine according to Feature r2, further including a second change execution unit (a function of making a negative determination in Step SA701 in the main CPU 63) that enables the set value to be changed from the value.

  According to the feature r3, when the settable situation is started after the settable situation ends before the end trigger occurs, the setting value is changed from the last set value selected in the previous settable situation. Not only can be resumed, but also corresponds to the setting correspondence information stored in the setting correspondence storage means when the setting possible situation is started after the setting possible situation ends before the end trigger occurs It is possible to change the set value from the set value to be performed. This makes it possible to change the initial set value when the change of the set value is started according to the situation when the settable situation is restarted.

  Feature r4. A setting value corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the setting correspondence storage means in the setting possible state that has occurred after the setting possible state ended by the occurrence of the end opportunity; The gaming machine according to feature r3, wherein the setting value can be changed from (i).

  According to the feature r4, in the normal setting possible state, the setting value is changed from the current setting value of the use target.

  Feature r5. The situation generating means is based on the fact that a specific related operation has been performed when the settable situation is started after the settable situation ends before the end opportunity occurs in the settable situation. A situation in which the setting value can be changed from a setting value corresponding to the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means, and a setting corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the setting correspondence storage means. A means (function of executing the processing of step SA405, step SA412, and step SA417 in the main CPU 63) for setting one of the situations in which the set value can be changed from the value is provided. The gaming machine according to feature r3 or r4.

  According to the feature r5, when the settable status is started after the settable status ends before the end trigger occurs, the set value of the set value selected from the last set value in the previous settable status is determined. The administrator of the game hall can select whether to restart the change or to start changing the set value from the current set value of the target of use.

  Feature r6. In the setting possible state, the display of the set value corresponding to the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means is performed by predetermined display means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204). The gaming machine according to any one of features r1 to r5, characterized in that the gaming machine has means (function for executing the processing of steps SA801 to SA803 in the main CPU 63).

  According to the feature r6, it is possible to perform the setting value changing operation while checking the setting value being changed in the setting possible state.

  Feature r7. The display of the setting value corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the setting correspondence storage means in a situation other than the setting possible situation is displayed on predetermined display means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204). The gaming machine according to any one of features r1 to r6, further comprising means for performing the processing (the function of executing the processing of steps SA601 to SA603 in the main CPU 63).

  According to the feature r7, it is possible to confirm the set value of the current use target as needed.

  Note that, for the configurations of the features r1 to r7, the features DA1 to DA15, the features DB1 to DB7, the features DC1 to DC5, the features DD1 to DD10, the features DE1 to DE6, the features DF1 to DF3, the features DG1 to DG18, and the features DH1 to DH1. DH7, features DI1 to DI9, features DJ1 to DJ4, features DK1 to DK7, features DL1 to DL20, features DM1 to DM7, features DN1 to DN6, features DO1 to DO11, features DP1 to DP12, features DQ1 to DQ5, features DR1 to DR1. DR17, features DS1 to DS8, features DT1 to DT13, features DU1 to DU8, features DV1 to DV6, features DW1 to DW11, features DX1 to DX11, features DY1 to DY11, features DZ1 to DZ10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b1 b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 15, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αDA1 to αDA10, features αDB1 to αDB6, features αDC1 to αDC13, features αDD1 to αDD9, features αDE1 to αDE5, features αDF1 to αDF9, features αDG1 to αDG10, features αDH1 to αDH11, features αDI1 to αDI8, and features αDJ1 to αDJ14, features αDK1 to αDK8, features αDL1 to αDL11, features αDM1 to αDM8, features αDN1 to αDN 6, feature αDO1 to αDO7, feature αDP1 to αDP7, feature αDQ1 to αDQ9, feature αDR1 to αDR8, feature αDS1 to αDS3, feature αDT1 to αDT4, feature αDU1 to αDU10, feature αDV1 to αDV5, feature αDW1 to αDW9, and feature αDX1. Any one or a plurality of configurations among αDX4, features αDY1 to αDY11, features αDZ1 to αDZ4, and features αa1 to αa3 may be applied. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

  According to the invention relating to the feature n group, the feature o group, the feature p group, the feature q group, and the feature r group, the following problems can be solved.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine has a dish storage section for storing game balls given to a player on the front face of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to a game ball launching device, It is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage unit, for example. Further, in a pachinko machine, a configuration including an upper dish storage section and a lower dish storage section as a dish storage section is also known. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper dish storage section is a game ball launching device. And the surplus game balls in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  Further, in the slot machine, when a new game is started by operating the start lever while a medal is bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation of the reel is started by the rotation start control being executed by the control means, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means executes the rotation start control. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation stop of the reels corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in the gaming machine as exemplified above, it is necessary to make the configuration relating to the set value that determines the advantage of the gaming machine suitable, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Feature s group>
Feature s1. Based on the fact that the predetermined key insertion section (setting key insertion section 68a) has been set to the predetermined corresponding state (the state of being turned ON) by the predetermined key, the predetermined corresponding processing (setting confirmation processing, setting value updating processing) is started. The predetermined correspondence start means (the function of making an affirmative determination in step SA413 of the main CPU 63 in the 77th embodiment and the function of making an affirmative determination in step SA417 of the main CPU 63; And the function of making a positive determination in step SA917).
A predetermined correspondence ending means (main means) for terminating the predetermined correspondence processing based on specifying that the predetermined key insertion section has been changed from the predetermined correspondence state to the specific correspondence state (OFF operation state) by the predetermined key; A function of executing the processing of steps SA709 and SA710 in the side CPU 63).

  According to the feature s1, in order to start the predetermined corresponding process, it is necessary to use the predetermined key to bring the predetermined key insertion unit into the predetermined corresponding state, and thus perform an act of illegally starting the predetermined corresponding process. It becomes possible to make it difficult. In this case, the predetermined correspondence processing does not end only when the predetermined key insertion unit is in the specific correspondence state, but ends when the predetermined key insertion unit is changed from the predetermined correspondence state to the specific correspondence state. Thus, even if the predetermined response processing is started in a situation where the predetermined key insertion unit is in the specific response state for some reason, the predetermined response processing is not immediately terminated, and the predetermined key insertion unit is moved out of the specific response state. Since the predetermined response processing is terminated by further changing from the predetermined response state to the specific response state after the change to the predetermined response state, it is possible to terminate the predetermined response processing at a timing favorable for the manager of the gaming hall.

  Feature s2. Another start means for starting the predetermined correspondence processing in a situation where the predetermined key insertion section is in the specific correspondence state based on the satisfaction of the specific start condition (in the seventy-seventh embodiment, step SA412 in the main CPU 63 is performed). And the function of making an affirmative determination in step SA414 in the main CPU 63, and the function of making an affirmative determination in steps SA905 and SA916 in the main CPU 63 in the 78th embodiment). The gaming machine according to feature s1.

  According to the feature s2, the predetermined response process is started even when the predetermined key insertion unit is in the specific response state based on the specific start condition being satisfied. It becomes possible to make it. However, in this configuration, the predetermined correspondence processing is started in a situation where the predetermined key insertion unit is in the specific correspondence state. Does not end the processing, but ends when the predetermined key insertion section is changed from the predetermined corresponding state to the specific corresponding state. As a result, even if the predetermined response processing is started in a situation where the predetermined key insertion section is in the specific response state, the predetermined response processing is not immediately terminated, and the predetermined key insertion section is moved from the specific response state to the predetermined response state. Since the predetermined response processing is terminated by further changing the predetermined response state from the predetermined response state to the specific response state, the predetermined response processing can be terminated at a timing suitable for the manager of the gaming hall.

Feature s3. The predetermined correspondence start unit starts the predetermined correspondence process based on the predetermined key insertion unit being in the predetermined correspondence state when the supply of the operating power is started,
The specific start condition is satisfied when the supply of the operation power is stopped and the supply of the operation power is restarted in a state where the predetermined corresponding process is being performed. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature s3, when the supply of the operating power is started, the predetermined corresponding process is started based on the fact that the predetermined key insertion unit is in the predetermined corresponding state, so that the predetermined corresponding process is illegally started. It is possible to make it difficult to perform the act. Further, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped in a situation where the predetermined corresponding process is being executed, when the specific start condition is satisfied when the supply of the operating power is resumed, the predetermined key insertion unit performs the predetermined corresponding operation. Even if it is not in the state, the predetermined corresponding process is started. This makes it possible to prioritize the start of the predetermined processing when the predetermined processing is completed in the middle.

Feature s4. Means for executing the profit providing process in a manner corresponding to the set value set as the use target from among the plurality of set values corresponding to the player's advantage (the processes of steps S503 and S504 in the main CPU 63) Function to execute)
The gaming machine according to any one of features s1 to s3, wherein the predetermined corresponding process is a process related to the set value.

  According to the feature s4, it is possible to achieve the above-described excellent effects regarding the processing related to the set value.

  Note that, for the configuration of the features s1 to s4, the features DA1 to DA15, the features DB1 to DB7, the features DC1 to DC5, the features DD1 to DD10, the features DE1 to DE6, the features DF1 to DF3, the features DG1 to DG18, and the features DH1 to DH1. DH7, features DI1 to DI9, features DJ1 to DJ4, features DK1 to DK7, features DL1 to DL20, features DM1 to DM7, features DN1 to DN6, features DO1 to DO11, features DP1 to DP12, features DQ1 to DQ5, features DR1 to DR1. DR17, features DS1 to DS8, features DT1 to DT13, features DU1 to DU8, features DV1 to DV6, features DW1 to DW11, features DX1 to DX11, features DY1 to DY11, features DZ1 to DZ10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b1 b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 15, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αDA1 to αDA10, features αDB1 to αDB6, features αDC1 to αDC13, features αDD1 to αDD9, features αDE1 to αDE5, features αDF1 to αDF9, features αDG1 to αDG10, features αDH1 to αDH11, features αDI1 to αDI8, and features αDJ1 to αDJ14, features αDK1 to αDK8, features αDL1 to αDL11, features αDM1 to αDM8, features αDN1 to αDN 6, feature αDO1 to αDO7, feature αDP1 to αDP7, feature αDQ1 to αDQ9, feature αDR1 to αDR8, feature αDS1 to αDS3, feature αDT1 to αDT4, feature αDU1 to αDU10, feature αDV1 to αDV5, feature αDW1 to αDW9, and feature αDX1. Any one or a plurality of configurations among αDX4, features αDY1 to αDY11, features αDZ1 to αDZ4, and features αa1 to αa3 may be applied. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

  According to the invention relating to the above-described feature s group, the following problem can be solved.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine has a dish storage section for storing game balls given to a player on the front face of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to a game ball launching device, It is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, when a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the game area, for example, a lottery process is performed by the control means to determine whether or not to generate a game state advantageous to the player.

  Further, in the slot machine, when a new game is started by operating the start lever while a medal is bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation of the reel is started by the rotation start control being executed by the control means, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means executes the rotation start control. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation stop of the reels corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in the gaming machines such as those described above, it is necessary that the processing in the control means be suitably performed, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Characteristic t group>
Feature t1. Setting means for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage (in the 33rd embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S205 to S207 in the main CPU 63; In the forty-third embodiment, the function of the main CPU 63 to execute the processing of steps S3106 to S3108, in the forty-fourth embodiment, the function of the main CPU 63 to execute the processing of steps S3207 to S3209, and in the fifty-fourth embodiment, the main CPU 63 , The function of executing the processing of step SB311 in the main CPU 63 in the eighteenth embodiment, and the function of executing the processing of step SB915 in the main CPU 63 in the eighty-fifth embodiment). ,
A state generating means for setting a setting possible state (a state in which the setting value updating process is executed) in which the setting value to be used can be changed (in the 33rd embodiment, step S103 in the main CPU 63 is executed). Affirmative determination in the fifty-fourth embodiment, a function of making affirmative determination in steps S5503 to S5507 in the main CPU 63, a function of making affirmative determination in step SB113 in the main CPU 63 in the eighty-first embodiment, In the embodiment, a function of making a positive determination in step SB812 in the main CPU 63);
In the case where the setting is possible, a start correspondence unit (in the 33rd embodiment, a function for executing the process of step S201 in the main CPU 63 in the 33rd embodiment) so that the set value is changed from a predetermined start correspondence set value. , In the forty-third embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S3102 in the main CPU 63, in the forty-fourth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S3203 in the main CPU 63, and in the fifty-fourth embodiment, of the processing of step S5601 in the main CPU 63. (The function of executing the processing of step SB304 in the main CPU 63 in the eighteenth embodiment, and the function of executing the processing of step SB905 in the main CPU 63 in the eighty-fifth embodiment). A gaming machine characterized by:

  According to the feature t1, since a setting value to be used is set from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage, the player can use a more advantageous setting value. That you expect. In this case, when the setting is possible, the setting value is changed from the predetermined setting value corresponding to the start. Accordingly, it is possible to perform an operation of changing the set value from a set value corresponding to a certain start in the settable state, regardless of the set value of the use target before the settable state. Therefore, the work contents of the setting value changing operation are easy for the operator to understand.

  Feature t2. The gaming machine according to feature t1, wherein the set value corresponding to the start is a set value with the lowest advantage (“set 1”).

  According to the feature t2, when the setting is possible, the setting value is changed from the setting value having the lowest advantage. As a result, even if the manager of the gaming hall unintentionally ends the settable situation immediately after the settable situation is reached, the set value has the lowest advantage. Even if the game is performed, it is possible to prevent an unintended disadvantage from being generated in the game hall.

Feature t3. Setting correspondence storage means (setting reference area 341) for storing setting correspondence information corresponding to the set value set by the setting means;
Selection correspondence storage means (setting update area 342) for storing selection correspondence information corresponding to the setting value selected in the setting possible state,
The situation generating means changes the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means so that a set value to be selected is changed when a change trigger occurs in the settable situation. (In the eighteenth embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function of executing steps SB307 and SB310, and in the 85th embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function of executing steps SB908 and SB914.)
The setting unit stores information corresponding to the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage unit as the setting correspondence information in the setting correspondence storage unit when an end trigger occurs in the setting possible state. By setting the set value that has been selected in the settable situation as a use target,
The game according to the feature t1 or t2, wherein the start correspondence unit stores the selection correspondence information corresponding to the set value of the start correspondence in the selection correspondence storage unit when the settable situation is reached. Machine.

  According to the feature t3, the setting correspondence storage means for storing the setting correspondence information corresponding to the setting value to be used, and the selection correspondence storage means for storing the selection correspondence information corresponding to the setting value being changed in the settable state. With the provision, it is possible to change the set value in the settable state while storing and holding the information of the set value set before the start of the settable state.

  Feature t4. In the setting possible state, the display of the set value corresponding to the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means is performed by predetermined display means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204). (The function of executing the processing of steps SA801 to SA803 in the main CPU 63).

  According to the feature t4, it is possible to perform a setting value changing operation while checking the setting value that is being changed in the setting possible state.

  Feature t5. The display of the setting value corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the setting correspondence storage means in a situation other than the setting possible situation is displayed on predetermined display means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204). The gaming machine according to feature t3 or t4, further comprising means for performing the processing (the function of executing the processing of steps SA601 to SA603 in the main CPU 63).

  According to the feature t5, it is possible to confirm the set value of the current use target as needed.

  Note that, for the configuration of the features t1 to t5, the features DA1 to DA15, the features DB1 to DB7, the features DC1 to DC5, the features DD1 to DD10, the features DE1 to DE6, the features DF1 to DF3, the features DG1 to DG18, and the features DH1 to DH1. DH7, features DI1 to DI9, features DJ1 to DJ4, features DK1 to DK7, features DL1 to DL20, features DM1 to DM7, features DN1 to DN6, features DO1 to DO11, features DP1 to DP12, features DQ1 to DQ5, features DR1 to DR1. DR17, features DS1 to DS8, features DT1 to DT13, features DU1 to DU8, features DV1 to DV6, features DW1 to DW11, features DX1 to DX11, features DY1 to DY11, features DZ1 to DZ10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b1 b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 15, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αDA1 to αDA10, features αDB1 to αDB6, features αDC1 to αDC13, features αDD1 to αDD9, features αDE1 to αDE5, features αDF1 to αDF9, features αDG1 to αDG10, features αDH1 to αDH11, features αDI1 to αDI8, and features αDJ1 to αDJ14, features αDK1 to αDK8, features αDL1 to αDL11, features αDM1 to αDM8, features αDN1 to αDN 6, feature αDO1 to αDO7, feature αDP1 to αDP7, feature αDQ1 to αDQ9, feature αDR1 to αDR8, feature αDS1 to αDS3, feature αDT1 to αDT4, feature αDU1 to αDU10, feature αDV1 to αDV5, feature αDW1 to αDW9, and feature αDX1. Any one or a plurality of configurations among αDX4, features αDY1 to αDY11, features αDZ1 to αDZ4, and features αa1 to αa3 may be applied. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

  According to the invention relating to the feature t group, the following problem can be solved.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine has a dish storage section for storing game balls given to a player on the front face of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to a game ball launching device, It is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage unit, for example. Further, in a pachinko machine, a configuration including an upper dish storage section and a lower dish storage section as a dish storage section is also known. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper dish storage section is a game ball launching device. And the surplus game balls in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  Further, in the slot machine, when a new game is started by operating the start lever while a medal is bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation of the reel is started by the rotation start control being executed by the control means, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means executes the rotation start control. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation stop of the reels corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in the gaming machine as exemplified above, it is necessary to make the configuration relating to the set value that determines the advantage of the gaming machine suitable, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Characteristic u group>
Features u1. First control means (MPU 62);
A second control means (sound-light-side MPU 352) for performing control corresponding to the information transmitted by the first control means,
The first control means includes:
A first transmission unit (the main CPU 63 in the eighteenth embodiment) that transmits first start correspondence information (return command at the time of updating) based on the first start situation when the supply of the operating power is started. , The function of executing the process of step SB918 in the main CPU 63 in the 85th embodiment),
A second transmission unit (81st transmission means) for transmitting second start correspondence information (a return command at the time of confirmation or a return command at the time of clearing) based on the second start situation when the supply of operating power is started; In the embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step SB118 or step SB207 in the main CPU 63, in the 83rd embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step SB618 in the main CPU 63, and in the 84th embodiment, the processing of step SB725 of the main CPU 63. , The function of executing the process of step SB816 in the main CPU 63 in the 85th embodiment, and the function of executing the process of step SC118 in the main CPU 63 in the 86th embodiment). A gaming machine.

  According to the feature u1, in the configuration in which the control corresponding to the information transmitted by the first control unit is executed by the second control unit, the first control unit performs the first start when the supply of the operation power is started. The first start correspondence information is transmitted based on the situation, and the second start correspondence information is transmitted based on the second start situation. This makes it possible for the control corresponding to the type of start situation when the supply of the operating power is started to be performed not only by the first control means but also by the second control means.

  Feature u2. The first control means performs processing at the time of starting the supply of the operating power in the first start situation and in the second start situation when the supply of the operating power is started (in the 81st embodiment, Steps SB101 to SB122, steps SB601 to SB622 in the 83rd embodiment, steps SB701 to SB729 in the 84th embodiment, steps SB801 to SB818 and steps SB823 to SB826 in the 85th embodiment, and 86th embodiment The gaming machine according to feature u1, wherein at least a part of the processing contents of steps SC101 to SC120 and steps SC125 to SC128) is different.

  According to the feature u2, when the supply of the operation power is started, at least a part of the processing at the start of the supply of the operation power in the first control unit depends on which one of the first start situation and the second start situation is present. Since the processing contents are different, it is possible for the first control means to execute the processing corresponding to the start situation as the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power.

Feature u3. The second control means includes:
Regardless of whether the first start correspondence information is received or the second start correspondence information is received, start correspondence execution means for executing a start correspondence process (affirmative determination is made in step SB405 in the sound-light side CPU 353). Function), and
When receiving one of the first start correspondence information and the second start correspondence information, a predetermined correspondence process is performed, and the other of the first start correspondence information and the second start correspondence information is executed. A predetermined correspondence execution unit (a function of executing the processing of steps SB407, SB409, and SB411 in the sound light side CPU 353) that does not execute the predetermined correspondence processing when the start correspondence information is received. The gaming machine according to feature u1 or u2.

  According to the feature u3, the second control means executes the start correspondence process regardless of whether the first start correspondence information or the second start correspondence information is received. The start correspondence process can be executed by the second control means when the information is transmitted. The second control means executes a predetermined correspondence process when receiving one of the first start correspondence information and the second start correspondence information, and executes a predetermined correspondence process when receiving the other start correspondence information. Do not execute the corresponding process. This makes it possible for the control corresponding to the type of start situation when the supply of the operating power is started to be performed not only by the first control means but also by the second control means.

Feature u4. One of the first start situation and the second start situation is that a predetermined start corresponding operation (RAM clear operation, setting change operation or setting confirmation operation) is performed when the supply of the operation power is started. Fired based on
The other of the first start situation and the second start situation is generated based on the fact that the predetermined start corresponding operation is not performed when the supply of the operating power is started, a characteristic u3. A gaming machine according to claim 1.

  According to the feature u4, the content of the control executed not only by the first control means but also by the second control means depending on whether or not a predetermined start corresponding operation is performed when the supply of the operation power is started. Can be made different.

Feature u5. A process for controlling the progress of the game after transmitting any one of a plurality of types of start correspondence information including the first start correspondence information and the second start correspondence information, (Steps S8907 to S8920).
The second control means is configured to execute processing (step SB412 to step SB414) corresponding to the progress of the game after receiving any one of the plurality of types of start correspondence information. The gaming machine according to feature u3 or u4.

  According to the feature u5, the first control means transmits any start correspondence information before starting the process for controlling the progress of the game, and the second control means transmits after receiving any start correspondence information. A process corresponding to the progress of the game is executed. Thereby, the process corresponding to the progress of the game is executed by the second control unit after the first control unit executes the process for controlling the progress of the game. It becomes possible. In this case, by providing the configuration of the above-described feature u3, the start of the process corresponding to the progress of the game is performed by using a plurality of pieces of start correspondence information that makes the second control unit perform or not to perform the predetermined correspondence process. It is possible to make the second control means recognize the opportunity.

Feature u6. The first control means includes:
Means for executing the common handling process in both the case where the first start situation and the case where the second start situation are established when the supply of the operating power is started (in the 81st embodiment, A function of the main CPU 63 for executing the processing of steps SB101 to SB103, the 83rd embodiment is a function of executing the processing of steps SB601 to SB603 in the main CPU 63, and the 84th embodiment is a step of executing the steps SB701 and SB701 of the main CPU 63. The function of executing the process of SB702, the function of executing the process of steps SB801 to SB803 in the main CPU 63 in the 85th embodiment, and the function of executing the process of steps SC101 to SC103 in the main CPU 63 in the 86th embodiment) When,
When the supply of the operating power is started, the specific corresponding process is executed based on the one of the first start situation and the second start situation being the start situation, and the supply of the operating power is started. Means that does not execute the specific correspondence processing based on the other of the first start situation and the second start situation in the case (step SB112, step SB115 in the main CPU 63 in the 81st embodiment). Or the function of executing the processing of step SB117, the function of executing the processing of step SB612, step SB615 or step SB617 in the main CPU 63 in the 83rd embodiment, and the step SB711, step SB718 or the step of the main CPU 63 in the 84th embodiment. Function for executing processing of SB721, eighth In the embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function of executing the processing of Step SB810, Step SB813, or Step SB815, and in the 86th embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function of executing the processing of Step SC111, Step SC115, or Step SC117). The gaming machine according to any one of features u1 to u5, wherein

  According to the feature u6, the first control means executes the common handling process in both the first start situation and the second start situation, while performing the first start situation and the second start situation. If one of the two start situations is the start situation, the specific correspondence process is executed. With this, the common control process is executed by the first control means regardless of the start situation, and the process corresponding to the type of the start situation is executed by the first control means. It is possible to do. In this case, the apparatus has the configuration of the above-described feature u1, and the first control means transmits the first start correspondence information based on the first start situation and performs the second start situation based on the second start situation. (2) Since the start correspondence information is transmitted, the control corresponding to the type of the start situation when the supply of the operating power is started can be performed not only by the first control means but also by the second control means. Become.

Feature u7. The first control means includes:
Setting means for setting a set value to be used from among a plurality of set values corresponding to the player's advantage (in the eighteenth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step SB311 in the main CPU 63, the eighty-fifth embodiment) The function for executing the process of step SB915 in the main CPU 63)
Based on the fact that the first setting-related operation (the ON operation of the setting key insertion unit 68a and the pressing operation of the reset button 68c) is performed when the supply of the operating power is started, it is determined that the first start situation is set. A first correspondence execution unit (in the 81st embodiment, a step in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting possible state (a state in which the setting value update process is executed) in which the setting value to be used can be changed; The function of making an affirmative determination in SB114, the function of making an affirmative determination in step SB614 of the main CPU 63 in the 83rd embodiment, the function of making an affirmative determination in step SB717 of the main CPU 63 in the 84th embodiment, the 85th embodiment In the embodiment, the function of making an affirmative determination in step SB812 of the main CPU 63, and in the 86th embodiment, the function of the main CPU 63 And function) to the affirmative determination at step SC113,
Based on the fact that the second setting-related operation (the ON operation of the setting key insertion unit 68a) has been performed when the supply of the operating power is started, the second setting state is set by the setting unit as the second start situation. And a second correspondence execution unit (a function of executing a setting confirmation process in the main CPU 63) for notifying the setting value to be used, which is used, of the features u1 to u6. A gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims.

  According to the feature u7, since a setting value to be used is set from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage, the player can use a more advantageous setting value. That you expect. Further, in order to change the setting value to be used, it is necessary to perform the first setting-related operation when the supply of the operating power is started, and therefore, an act of illegally changing the setting value to be used. Is difficult to perform. In addition, when the supply of the operation power is started, the setting value of the use target is notified by performing the second setting-related operation, so that the manager of the game hall checks the set value of the use target as necessary. It becomes possible. In this case, the apparatus has the configuration of the above-described feature u1, and the first control means transmits the first start correspondence information based on the first start situation and performs the second start situation based on the second start situation. Since the 2 start correspondence information is transmitted, it is possible to cause the second control unit to perform different control depending on whether the setting value is set or the setting value to be used is notified.

Feature u8. The first control means includes:
Means for executing the profit providing process in a manner corresponding to the set value set as the use target from the plurality of set values corresponding to the player's advantage (the processes of steps S503 and S504 in the main CPU 63) Function to execute)
A first correspondence execution means for executing a predetermined setting-related process relating to the set value based on the first start situation when the supply of the operating power is started (the set value updating process or the setting confirmation in the main CPU 63); Function to execute the process for
Second response execution means (in the eighteenth embodiment, the main CPU 63) that executes another response process different from the predetermined setting-related process based on the second start situation when the supply of the operating power is started. , The function of executing the processing of step SB617 in the main CPU 63 in the 83rd embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step SB721 in the main CPU 63 in the 84th embodiment, the 85th embodiment (The function of executing the processing of step SB815 in the main CPU 63, and the function of executing the processing of step SC117 in the main CPU 63 in the 86th embodiment). 2. The gaming machine according to 1.

  According to the feature u8, since a setting value to be used is set from a plurality of set values corresponding to the player's advantage, the player can use a more advantageous setting value. That you expect. In addition, when the supply of the operation power is started, a predetermined setting-related process related to the set value is performed based on the first start situation, and when the supply of the operation power is started, the second start situation is reached. Based on this, another corresponding process different from the predetermined setting-related process is executed. Accordingly, it is possible to cause a case where the predetermined setting-related process is executed and a case where the predetermined setting-related process is not executed according to the start situation when the supply of the operation power is started. In this case, the apparatus has the configuration of the above-described feature u1, and the first control means transmits the first start correspondence information based on the first start situation and performs the second start situation based on the second start situation. Since the second start correspondence information is transmitted, it is possible to cause the second control unit to perform different control depending on whether or not the predetermined setting-related process is executed by the first control unit. .

  Feature u9. The gaming machine according to claim u8, wherein said second response execution means executes processing for initializing a predetermined storage area provided in said first control means as said another response processing.

  According to the feature u9, there are a case where a predetermined setting related process is executed according to a start situation when the supply of the operation power is started and a case where a predetermined storage area of the first control unit is initialized. It is possible to do. In this case, the apparatus has the configuration of the above-described feature u1, and the first control means transmits the first start correspondence information based on the first start situation and performs the second start situation based on the second start situation. In order to transmit the 2 start correspondence information, different control is performed by the second control means when the predetermined setting-related processing is executed by the first control means and when the predetermined storage area is initialized. It becomes possible to.

Feature u10. The second control means includes:
When one of the first start correspondence information and the second start correspondence information is received, the time correspondence information measured by the time measuring means (DRDTDC356) that enables the time measurement is stored in the time correspondence storage. Means (the function of executing the process of step SB407 in the sound-light side CPU 353 in the 81st embodiment, and the function of executing the process of step SB507 in the sound-light side CPU 353 in the 82nd embodiment) When,
Means for executing a time corresponding process when the processing execution timing is based on the time corresponding information stored in the time corresponding storage means (in the 81st embodiment, the process of step SB413 in the sound light side CPU 353 is performed) The gaming machine according to any one of features u1 to u9, further comprising: a function (in the 82nd embodiment, a function of executing the process of step SB513 in the sound-light-side CPU 353).

  According to the feature u10, the second control unit executes the time corresponding process when the process execution timing is based on the time corresponding information stored in the time corresponding storage unit. , The time corresponding processing can be executed. In this case, when one of the first start correspondence information and the second start correspondence information is received, the time correspondence information measured by the time measurement means is stored in the time correspondence storage means. This makes it possible to select a situation where the time correspondence information is newly stored in the time correspondence storage unit and a situation where the time correspondence information is not newly stored.

  For the configurations of the features u1 to u10, the features DA1 to DA15, the features DB1 to DB7, the features DC1 to DC5, the features DD1 to DD10, the features DE1 to DE6, the features DF1 to DF3, the features DG1 to DG18, and the features DH1 to DH1. DH7, features DI1 to DI9, features DJ1 to DJ4, features DK1 to DK7, features DL1 to DL20, features DM1 to DM7, features DN1 to DN6, features DO1 to DO11, features DP1 to DP12, features DQ1 to DQ5, features DR1 to DR1. DR17, features DS1 to DS8, features DT1 to DT13, features DU1 to DU8, features DV1 to DV6, features DW1 to DW11, features DX1 to DX11, features DY1 to DY11, features DZ1 to DZ10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b1 b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, Features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 15, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, Features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, Features z1 to z6, features αDA1 to αDA10, features αDB1 to αDB6, features αDC1 to αDC13, features αDD1 to αDD9, features αDE1 to αDE5, features αDF1 to αDF9, features αDG1 to αDG10, features αDH1 to αDH11, features αDI1 to αDI8, Features αDJ1 to αDJ14, Features αDK1 to αDK8, Features αDL1 to αDL11, Features αDM1 to αDM8, Features αDN1 to αD N6, feature αDO1 to αDO7, feature αDP1 to αDP7, feature αDQ1 to αDQ9, feature αDR1 to αDR8, feature αDS1 to αDS3, feature αDT1 to αDT4, feature αDU1 to αDU10, feature αDV1 to αDV5, feature αDW1 to αDW9, feature αDX1. Any one or a plurality of configurations among αDX4, features αDY1 to αDY11, features αDZ1 to αDZ4, and features αa1 to αa3 may be applied. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

<Feature v group>
Feature v1. Time storage executing means (sound-light CPU 353 in the 81st embodiment) for storing time-corresponding information measured by time measuring means (DRDTDC 356) enabling time measurement in a time-corresponding storage means (DRDTDC memory 357). In the 82nd embodiment, the function of executing the process of step SB507 in the sound-light side CPU 353),
A time correspondence execution means for executing a time correspondence processing when the processing execution timing is based on the time correspondence information stored in the time correspondence storage means (in the 81st embodiment, the processing of step SB413 in the sound light side CPU 353) (In the 82nd embodiment, a function of executing the process of step SB513 in the sound light side CPU 353).
The time storage executing means is configured to execute the first start state when the supply of the operation power is started (in the eighteenth embodiment, when the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed in a state where no operation is performed, the 82nd embodiment) In this case, when the power on operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed while the RAM clear operation, the setting change operation, or the setting confirmation operation is performed), the time is measured by the time measuring unit. The time-corresponding information is stored in the time-corresponding storage means, and when the supply of the operating power is started, a second start situation (in the eighteenth embodiment, a situation in which a RAM clear operation, a setting change operation, or a setting confirmation operation is performed) In the 82nd embodiment, when the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed without the operation, the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. Gaming machine, characterized in that the time correspondence information that has been measured by the time measuring means is intended not to be stored in the time correspondence storage means based.

  According to the feature v1, since the time corresponding process is executed when the process execution timing is based on the time corresponding information stored in the time corresponding storage means, the time corresponding process is performed at a predetermined time. It can be executed. In this case, when the supply of the operation power is started and the first start situation is reached, the time correspondence information measured by the time measurement means is stored in the time correspondence storage means, and the supply of the operation power is started. In the case where the second start situation has been reached, the time correspondence information is not stored in the time correspondence storage means. This makes it possible to select a situation where the time correspondence information is newly stored in the time correspondence storage unit and a situation where the time correspondence information is not newly stored.

Feature v2. One of the first start situation and the second start situation is that a predetermined start corresponding operation (RAM clear operation, setting change operation or setting confirmation operation) is performed when the supply of the operation power is started. Fired based on
The feature v1 is characterized in that the other of the first start situation and the second start situation occurs based on the fact that the predetermined start corresponding operation has not been performed when the supply of the operating power is started. A gaming machine according to claim 1.

  According to the feature v2, depending on whether or not to perform a predetermined start corresponding operation when the supply of the operation power is started, a case where the time corresponding information is newly stored in the time corresponding storage unit and a case where the time corresponding information is not newly stored are described. Can be selected.

Feature v3. The second start situation is generated based on a predetermined start corresponding operation (RAM clear operation, setting change operation or setting confirmation operation) performed when the supply of the operation power is started,
The gaming machine according to the features v1 or v2, wherein the first start situation is generated based on the fact that the predetermined start corresponding operation is not performed when the supply of the operation power is started.

  According to the feature v3, when the supply of the operation power is started, if the predetermined start correspondence operation is not performed, the time correspondence information is newly stored in the time correspondence storage unit, and the supply of the operation power is started. In such a case, when a predetermined start correspondence operation is performed, the time correspondence information is not stored in the time correspondence storage means. Thus, when the supply of the operation power is started, the time correspondence information is basically newly stored in the time correspondence storage means, and the predetermined start correspondence operation is performed as necessary, so that the time correspondence information can be obtained. It is possible to prevent the correspondence information from being stored in the time correspondence storage means.

  Feature v4. When the supply of the operation power is started, the specific corresponding process is executed based on the one of the first start situation and the second start situation being started, and the supply of the operation power is started. Means that does not execute the specific correspondence processing based on the other of the first start situation and the second start situation in the case (step SB112, step SB115 in the main CPU 63 in the 81st embodiment). Or the function of executing the processing of step SB117, the function of executing the processing of step SB612, step SB615 or step SB617 in the main CPU 63 in the 83rd embodiment, and the step SB711, step SB718 or the step of the main CPU 63 in the 84th embodiment. Function for executing processing of SB721, eighth In the embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function of executing the processing of Step SB810, Step SB813, or Step SB815, and in the 86th embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function of executing the processing of Step SC111, Step SC115, or Step SC117). The gaming machine according to any one of features v1 to v3, characterized in that:

  According to the feature v4, the specific handling process is executed when the start status is one of the first start status and the second start status. In this case, the time corresponding information is newly stored in the time corresponding storage means based on the first start situation, and the time based on the second start situation is provided. The correspondence information is not stored in the time correspondence storage means. This makes it possible to associate the execution of the specific correspondence processing with the presence or absence of new storage of the time correspondence information.

  Feature v5. When the supply of the operating power is started, the specific correspondence process is performed based on the second start situation, and the first start situation is provided when the supply of the operating power is started. Means for not executing the specific correspondence processing based on the function (the function of executing the processing of step SB112, step SB115 or step SB117 in the main CPU 63 in the 81st embodiment, the steps SB612 and SB615 in the main CPU 63 in the 83rd embodiment) Alternatively, the function of executing the process of step SB617, the function of executing the process of step SB711, step SB718, or step SB721 in the main CPU 63 in the 84th embodiment, or the step SB810, step SB813, or the process of the main CPU 63 in the 85th embodiment. (The function of executing step SC815, step SC111, step SC115, or step SC117 of the main CPU 63 in the 86th embodiment). 2. The gaming machine according to 1.

  According to the feature v5, the specific handling process is executed when the first start situation and the second start situation are the second start situation. In this case, the time corresponding information is newly stored in the time corresponding storage means based on the first start situation, and the time based on the second start situation is provided. The correspondence information is not stored in the time correspondence storage means. This makes it possible to prevent the time correspondence information from being newly stored in the time correspondence storage unit when the specific correspondence processing is executed.

  Feature v6. Means for executing the common handling process in both the case where the first start situation and the case of the second start situation when the supply of the operating power is started (in the 81st embodiment, A function of the main CPU 63 for executing the processing of steps SB101 to SB103, the 83rd embodiment is a function of executing the processing of steps SB601 to SB603 in the main CPU 63, and the 84th embodiment is a step of executing the steps SB701 and SB701 of the main CPU 63. The function of executing the process of SB702, the function of executing the process of steps SB801 to SB803 in the main CPU 63 in the 85th embodiment, and the function of executing the process of steps SC101 to SC103 in the main CPU 63 in the 86th embodiment) Have The gaming machine according to the features v4 or v5, characterized and.

  According to the feature v6, the common handling process is executed in both the first start situation and the second start situation, while the first start situation and the second start situation are not changed. When the start status is one of the start statuses, the specific correspondence process is executed. This allows the common handling process to be executed regardless of the start situation, and allows the process corresponding to the type of the start situation to be executed.

Feature v7. Means for executing the profit providing process in a manner corresponding to the set value set as the use target from the plurality of set values corresponding to the player's advantage (the processes of steps S503 and S504 in the main CPU 63) Function to execute)
Setting-related executing means (a function of executing a setting value updating process or a setting confirmation process in the main CPU 63) for executing a predetermined setting-related process regarding the set value when the supply of the operating power is started,
The setting-related execution means executes the predetermined setting-related processing based on one of the first start situation and the second start situation being started when the supply of operating power is started. The gaming machine according to any one of features v1 to v6, wherein

  According to the feature v7, since a setting value to be used is set from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage, the player can use a more advantageous setting value. That you expect. Further, when the supply of the operating power is started, a predetermined setting-related process is executed based on one of the first start situation and the second start situation. This makes it possible to associate the execution of the predetermined setting-related processing with the presence or absence of new storage of the time correspondence information.

  Feature v8. When a supply of operating power is started, a predetermined storage area provided in the control unit is initialized based on one of the first start situation and the second start situation. Means (the function of executing the process of step SB117 in the main CPU 63 in the 81st embodiment, the function of executing the process of step SB617 in the main CPU 63 in the 83rd embodiment, and the function of executing the process of step SB721 in the main CPU 63 in the 84th embodiment. (The function of executing the process, the function of executing the process of step SB815 in the main CPU 63 in the 85th embodiment, and the function of executing the process of step SC117 in the main CPU 63 in the 86th embodiment). The gaming machine according to any one of the features v1 to v7.

  According to the feature v8, when the supply of the operating power is started, the predetermined storage area of the first control unit is initialized based on one of the first start situation and the second start situation. Be transformed into This makes it possible to associate the presence / absence of initialization of the predetermined storage area with the presence / absence of new storage of time correspondence information.

  Note that for the configurations of the features v1 to v8, the features DA1 to DA15, the features DB1 to DB7, the features DC1 to DC5, the features DD1 to DD10, the features DE1 to DE6, the features DF1 to DF3, the features DG1 to DG18, and the features DH1 to DH1. DH7, features DI1 to DI9, features DJ1 to DJ4, features DK1 to DK7, features DL1 to DL20, features DM1 to DM7, features DN1 to DN6, features DO1 to DO11, features DP1 to DP12, features DQ1 to DQ5, features DR1 to DR1. DR17, features DS1 to DS8, features DT1 to DT13, features DU1 to DU8, features DV1 to DV6, features DW1 to DW11, features DX1 to DX11, features DY1 to DY11, features DZ1 to DZ10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b1 b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 15, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αDA1 to αDA10, features αDB1 to αDB6, features αDC1 to αDC13, features αDD1 to αDD9, features αDE1 to αDE5, features αDF1 to αDF9, features αDG1 to αDG10, features αDH1 to αDH11, features αDI1 to αDI8, and features αDJ1 to αDJ14, features αDK1 to αDK8, features αDL1 to αDL11, features αDM1 to αDM8, features αDN1 to αDN 6, feature αDO1 to αDO7, feature αDP1 to αDP7, feature αDQ1 to αDQ9, feature αDR1 to αDR8, feature αDS1 to αDS3, feature αDT1 to αDT4, feature αDU1 to αDU10, feature αDV1 to αDV5, feature αDW1 to αDW9, and feature αDX1. Any one or a plurality of configurations among αDX4, features αDY1 to αDY11, features αDZ1 to αDZ4, and features αa1 to αa3 may be applied. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

  According to the invention relating to the feature u group and the feature v group, the following problem can be solved.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine has a dish storage section for storing game balls given to a player on the front face of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to a game ball launching device, It is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage unit, for example. Further, in a pachinko machine, a configuration including an upper dish storage section and a lower dish storage section as a dish storage section is also known. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper dish storage section is a game ball launching device. And the surplus game balls in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  Further, in the slot machine, when a new game is started by operating the start lever while a medal is bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation of the reel is started by the rotation start control being executed by the control means, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means executes the rotation start control. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation stop of the reels corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as the example described above, it is necessary to appropriately perform processing when supply of operating power is started, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Characteristic w group>
Features w1. Predetermined display means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204);
Predetermined display control means for displaying and controlling the predetermined display means (a function of executing a second timer interrupt process in the main CPU 63);
Means for executing the profit providing process in a manner corresponding to the set value set as the use target from the plurality of set values corresponding to the player's advantage (the processes of steps S503 and S504 in the main CPU 63) Function to execute)
Setting-related executing means (a function of executing a setting value updating process or a setting confirmation process in the main CPU 63) for executing a predetermined setting-related process regarding the set value when the supply of the operating power is started,
The predetermined display control means,
Means for causing the predetermined display means to display the setting value when the predetermined setting-related processing is executed (the function of executing the processing of steps S9004 and S9006 in the main CPU 63);
A check control unit (in the 69th embodiment, a main control unit) that causes the predetermined display unit to display a check for enabling confirmation of whether or not the predetermined display unit is normal after the predetermined setting-related process is executed. The function of the CPU 63 to execute the processing of step S9519, the function of the main CPU 63 to execute the processing of step SA419 in the 77th embodiment, the function of the main CPU 63 to execute the processing of step SA919 in the 78th embodiment, the 81st embodiment In the embodiment, the function of executing the processing of Step SB123 in the main CPU 63, the function of executing the processing of Step SB623 in the main CPU 63 in the 83rd embodiment, and the processing of Step SB712 and Step SB719 in the main CPU 63 in the 84th embodiment are described. Function to be executed, 85th embodiment Gaming machine, characterized in that is provided with a function of executing the processing of step SB817 in the main side CPU 63, and functions) for executing the processing of step SC119 in the main side CPU 63 in the 86th embodiment, the.

  According to the feature w1, since a setting value to be used is set from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage, the player can use a more advantageous setting value. That you expect. In addition, when the predetermined setting-related processing is executed, the display related to the setting value is performed on the predetermined display means, so that the administrator of the game hall can grasp the current setting value by checking the predetermined display means. Becomes Further, since the check display is performed by the predetermined display means, it is possible to confirm whether the predetermined display means is normal.

  In this case, when the supply of the operating power is started, a predetermined setting-related process is executed, and then a check display is performed by the predetermined display means. Thus, when the predetermined setting-related processing is executed, the display relating to the setting value when the predetermined setting-related processing is executed is not required, and the adjustment processing such as terminating the check display halfway is not required. Can be prioritized over the check display.

  Feature w2. The check control means may display the check display regardless of whether the supply of the operating power is started, the predetermined setting-related processing is executed, or the predetermined setting-related processing is not executed. The gaming machine according to feature w1, characterized in that the predetermined display means is performed.

  According to the feature w2, when the supply of the operation power is started, the check display is performed by the predetermined display unit regardless of whether the predetermined setting-related process is executed. Thus, it is possible to confirm whether or not the predetermined display means is normal regardless of the situation when the supply of the operating power is started.

Feature w3. As the process at the time of the supply start performed when the supply of the operation power is started, whether the predetermined setting-related process is executed or the predetermined setting-related process is not executed When the predetermined setting-related processing is executed, the common processing is executed in a later execution order than the predetermined setting-related processing.
The gaming machine according to feature w1 or w2, wherein a process for starting the display for check on the predetermined display means is set as the common process.

  According to the feature w3, when the supply of the operation power is started, the check display is performed by the predetermined display unit regardless of whether the predetermined setting-related processing is executed. Thus, it is possible to confirm whether or not the predetermined display means is normal regardless of the situation when the supply of the operating power is started. Further, since the process for starting the check display on the predetermined display means is set as the common process, it is possible to achieve the above-described excellent effects while simplifying the processing configuration.

Feature w4. A means for executing processing for advancing the game after the supply of the operating power is started and the processing at the time of starting the supply is completed (a function of executing the processing of steps S8907 to S8920 in the main CPU 63);
The gaming machine according to any one of features w1 to w3, wherein a process for advancing the game can be started even in a state where the display for check is being executed by the predetermined display means. .

  According to the feature w4, since the processing for advancing the game can be started even in the situation where the check display is being performed on the predetermined display means, the check is performed on the predetermined display means after the execution of the predetermined setting-related processing. It is possible to prevent the start timing of the processing for advancing the game from being delayed even when the display for the game is performed.

Feature w5. Delay execution means for executing a delay process that enables delaying the start of a process for advancing a game when the supply of operating power is started (executes the processes of steps SB715 and SB724 in the main CPU 63) Function),
If the predetermined setting-related processing is not performed when the supply of the operation power is started, the check control unit may cause the predetermined display unit to start the display for checking before the delay processing is started. The gaming machine according to any one of the features w1 to w4.

  According to the feature w5, when the supply of the operation power is started, the delay process that allows the start of the process for advancing the game to be delayed is executed, and thus the initial settings of various devices are completed. It is possible to start the process for proceeding the game later. In this case, if the predetermined setting-related processing is not executed when the supply of the operating power is started, the check display on the predetermined display means is started before the delay processing is started. As a result, it is possible to cause the display for checking to be performed using the period in which the start of the processing for advancing the game is delayed.

  Feature w6. The gaming machine according to claim w5, wherein the delay execution unit does not execute the delay process when the predetermined setting-related process is executed.

  According to the feature w6, when a predetermined setting-related process is executed, a predetermined period is required, so that it is possible to complete the initial setting of various devices before the process for proceeding with the game is started. Become. In this case, when the predetermined setting related processing is executed, the delay processing is not executed, so that the start of the processing for advancing the game in the situation where the predetermined setting related processing is executed is extremely low. It becomes possible not to be late.

Feature w7. The setting related execution means,
When the supply of the operating power is started, the setting value to be used is changed based on the fact that the first setting-related operation (the ON operation of the setting key insertion unit 68a and the pressing operation of the reset button 68c) is performed. (A function of making an affirmative determination in step SB114 of the main CPU 63 in the eighty-first embodiment, the 83rd embodiment) In the embodiment, the function of making a positive determination in step SB614 of the main CPU 63, in the 84th embodiment, the function of making a positive determination in step SB717, and in the 85th embodiment, the function of making a positive determination in step SB812 of the main CPU 63. In the 86th embodiment, an affirmative determination is made in step SC113 in the main CPU 63. And that function),
When the supply of the operation power is started, a notification is generated so that the setting value to be used is notified based on the fact that the second setting-related operation (the ON operation of the setting key insertion unit 68a) is performed. Means (a function of executing a setting confirmation process in the main CPU 63), the gaming machine according to any one of the features w1 to w6.

  According to the feature w7, it is necessary to perform the first setting-related operation when the supply of the operation power is started in order to change the setting value to be used, so that the setting value to be used is incorrectly changed. It becomes possible to make it difficult to perform the act of trying. In addition, when the supply of the operation power is started, the setting value of the use target is notified by performing the second setting-related operation, so that the manager of the game hall checks the set value of the use target as necessary. It becomes possible.

  Feature w8. The predetermined display control means includes means for displaying information corresponding to the management result of the game history on the predetermined display means (the function of executing the processing of steps S8708, S8709 and S9107 in the main CPU 63). The gaming machine according to any one of the features w1 to w7, characterized in that:

  According to the feature w8, the management result of the game history can be notified to the manager of the game hall. In this case, whether the display corresponding to the management result of the game history on the predetermined display means is correctly performed or not is provided by providing the configuration of the above-described feature w1 and performing the check display on the predetermined display means. Can be confirmed.

  Note that, for the configurations of the features w1 to w8, the features DA1 to DA15, the features DB1 to DB7, the features DC1 to DC5, the features DD1 to DD10, the features DE1 to DE6, the features DF1 to DF3, the features DG1 to DG18, and the features DH1 to DH1. DH7, features DI1 to DI9, features DJ1 to DJ4, features DK1 to DK7, features DL1 to DL20, features DM1 to DM7, features DN1 to DN6, features DO1 to DO11, features DP1 to DP12, features DQ1 to DQ5, features DR1 to DR1. DR17, features DS1 to DS8, features DT1 to DT13, features DU1 to DU8, features DV1 to DV6, features DW1 to DW11, features DX1 to DX11, features DY1 to DY11, features DZ1 to DZ10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b1 b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 15, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αDA1 to αDA10, features αDB1 to αDB6, features αDC1 to αDC13, features αDD1 to αDD9, features αDE1 to αDE5, features αDF1 to αDF9, features αDG1 to αDG10, features αDH1 to αDH11, features αDI1 to αDI8, and features αDJ1 to αDJ14, features αDK1 to αDK8, features αDL1 to αDL11, features αDM1 to αDM8, features αDN1 to αDN 6, feature αDO1 to αDO7, feature αDP1 to αDP7, feature αDQ1 to αDQ9, feature αDR1 to αDR8, feature αDS1 to αDS3, feature αDT1 to αDT4, feature αDU1 to αDU10, feature αDV1 to αDV5, feature αDW1 to αDW9, and feature αDX1. Any one or a plurality of configurations among αDX4, features αDY1 to αDY11, features αDZ1 to αDZ4, and features αa1 to αa3 may be applied. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

<Feature x group>
Feature x1. Predetermined display means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204);
Predetermined display control means for displaying and controlling the predetermined display means (a function of executing a second timer interrupt process in the main CPU 63);
Means for executing a process for advancing the game after the supply of the operating power is started and the situation after the start of the supply is completed (a function of executing the processes of steps S8907 to S8920 in the main CPU 63),
In the situation after the start of the supply, the predetermined display control means causes the predetermined display means to perform a check display for enabling confirmation of whether or not the predetermined display means is normal (in the 68th embodiment, (The function of executing the processing of step S9405 in the main CPU 63, and the function of executing the processing of steps SB713 and SB722 in the main CPU 63 in the 84th embodiment).
A delay situation in which it is possible to delay the start of the processing for advancing the game while the check display is being performed by the predetermined display means (in the 68th embodiment, a negative determination is made in step S9406). Gaming machine in the eighty-eighth embodiment in which the processes of steps SB715 and SB724 are executed by the main CPU 63).

  According to the feature x1, when the supply of the operation power is started, the display for checking is performed by the predetermined display means, so that it is possible to confirm whether or not the predetermined display means is normal. In this case, in a situation where the display for check is being performed, a delay situation may be generated that makes it possible to delay the start of the processing for advancing the game. This makes it possible to secure an opportunity to check the check display on the predetermined display means before the process for proceeding with the game is started. In addition, it is possible to complete the initial settings of various devices before the processing for advancing the game is started due to the occurrence of the delay situation. Then, it is possible to cause the display for checking to be performed by the predetermined display means using the delay status.

  Feature x2. Means for setting the delay state in the state where the check display is being performed on the predetermined display means (the function of executing the processing of step S9406 in the main CPU 63 in the 68th embodiment, the function of executing the processing in the 84th embodiment) The gaming machine according to Feature x1, further comprising a function of executing the processes of Step SB715 and Step SB724 in the main CPU 63.

  According to the feature x2, since the state where the check display is being performed is a delay situation, the process for proceeding with the game while the check display is being performed is not started. Becomes possible.

  Feature x3. When the supply of the operation power is started, the delay state is set in a state where the check display is being performed by the predetermined display means based on the first start state, and the supply of the operation power is started. The gaming machine according to feature x1 or x2, wherein the delay situation does not occur in a situation in which the check display is being performed by the predetermined display means based on the second start situation.

  According to the feature x3, in the case of the first start situation, the game progresses while the check display is being performed by being in a delay situation in a situation where the check display is being performed by the predetermined display means. Is not started, and in the case of the second start situation, it is possible to prevent a delay situation from occurring when the check display is being performed by the predetermined display means. It is possible to prevent the start timing of the processing for advancing the game from becoming extremely late.

Feature x4. Means for executing the profit providing process in a manner corresponding to the set value set as the use target from the plurality of set values corresponding to the player's advantage (the processes of steps S503 and S504 in the main CPU 63) Function to execute)
Setting-related executing means (a function of executing a setting value updating process or a setting confirmation process in the main CPU 63) for executing a predetermined setting-related process regarding the set value when the supply of the operating power is started,
The first start situation is a situation in which the predetermined setting-related processing is not performed in the situation after the start of supply,
The gaming machine according to Feature x3, wherein the second start situation is a situation in which the predetermined setting-related process is executed in the situation after the start of supply.

  According to the feature x4, when a predetermined setting-related process is performed, a predetermined period is required, so that it is possible to complete the initial setting of various devices before the process for proceeding with the game is started. Become. In this case, when the predetermined setting-related processing is executed, the predetermined setting-related processing is executed by preventing a delay state from occurring when the check display is being performed by the predetermined display means. In this situation, it is possible to prevent the start of the processing for advancing the game from being extremely delayed.

Feature x5. The setting related execution means,
When the supply of the operating power is started, the setting value to be used is changed based on the fact that the first setting-related operation (the ON operation of the setting key insertion unit 68a and the pressing operation of the reset button 68c) is performed. (A function of making an affirmative determination in step SB114 of the main CPU 63 in the eighty-first embodiment, the 83rd embodiment) In the embodiment, the function of making a positive determination in step SB614 of the main CPU 63, in the 84th embodiment, the function of making a positive determination in step SB717, and in the 85th embodiment, the function of making a positive determination in step SB812 of the main CPU 63. In the 86th embodiment, an affirmative determination is made in step SC113 in the main CPU 63. And that function),
When the supply of the operating power is started, a notification is generated so that the set value to be used is reported based on the fact that the second setting-related operation (the ON operation of the setting key insertion unit 68a) is performed. (A function of executing a setting confirmation process in the main CPU 63).

  According to the feature x5, in order to change the setting value to be used, it is necessary to perform the first setting-related operation when the supply of the operating power is started, so the setting value to be used is incorrectly changed. It becomes possible to make it difficult to perform the act of trying. In addition, when the supply of the operation power is started, the setting value of the use target is notified by performing the second setting-related operation, so that the manager of the game hall checks the set value of the use target as necessary. It becomes possible.

  Feature x6. The predetermined display control means includes means for displaying information corresponding to the management result of the game history on the predetermined display means (the function of executing the processing of steps S8708, S8709 and S9107 in the main CPU 63). The gaming machine according to any one of the features x1 to x5, characterized in that:

  According to the feature x6, the management result of the game history can be notified to the manager of the game hall. In this case, whether the display corresponding to the management result of the game history on the predetermined display means is correctly performed by the check display performed by the predetermined display means having the configuration of the characteristic x1 is performed. Can be confirmed.

  In addition, for the configuration of the features x1 to x6, the features DA1 to DA15, the features DB1 to DB7, the features DC1 to DC5, the features DD1 to DD10, the features DE1 to DE6, the features DF1 to DF3, the features DG1 to DG18, and the features DH1 to DH1. DH7, features DI1 to DI9, features DJ1 to DJ4, features DK1 to DK7, features DL1 to DL20, features DM1 to DM7, features DN1 to DN6, features DO1 to DO11, features DP1 to DP12, features DQ1 to DQ5, features DR1 to DR1. DR17, features DS1 to DS8, features DT1 to DT13, features DU1 to DU8, features DV1 to DV6, features DW1 to DW11, features DX1 to DX11, features DY1 to DY11, features DZ1 to DZ10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b1 b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 15, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αDA1 to αDA10, features αDB1 to αDB6, features αDC1 to αDC13, features αDD1 to αDD9, features αDE1 to αDE5, features αDF1 to αDF9, features αDG1 to αDG10, features αDH1 to αDH11, features αDI1 to αDI8, and features αDJ1 to αDJ14, features αDK1 to αDK8, features αDL1 to αDL11, features αDM1 to αDM8, features αDN1 to αDN 6, feature αDO1 to αDO7, feature αDP1 to αDP7, feature αDQ1 to αDQ9, feature αDR1 to αDR8, feature αDS1 to αDS3, feature αDT1 to αDT4, feature αDU1 to αDU10, feature αDV1 to αDV5, feature αDW1 to αDW9, and feature αDX1. Any one or a plurality of configurations among αDX4, features αDY1 to αDY11, features αDZ1 to αDZ4, and features αa1 to αa3 may be applied. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

  According to the invention relating to the feature w group and the feature x group, the following problem can be solved.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine has a dish storage section for storing game balls given to a player on the front face of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to a game ball launching device, It is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage unit, for example. Further, in a pachinko machine, a configuration including an upper dish storage section and a lower dish storage section as a dish storage section is also known. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper dish storage section is a game ball launching device. And the surplus game balls in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  Further, in the slot machine, when a new game is started by operating the start lever while a medal is bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation of the reel is started by the rotation start control being executed by the control means, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means executes the rotation start control. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation stop of the reels corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as the example described above, a configuration capable of confirming whether or not the display on the predetermined display means is correctly performed is required, and there is still room for improvement in this regard. is there.

<Characteristic y group>
Feature y1. Setting means for setting a set value to be used from among a plurality of set values corresponding to the player's advantage (in the eighteenth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step SB311 in the main CPU 63, the eighty-fifth embodiment) The function for executing the process of step SB915 in the main CPU 63)
A state generating means for setting a setting possible state (a state in which the setting value updating process is executed) in which the setting value to be used can be changed (in the 81st embodiment, the process proceeds to step SB114 of the main CPU 63). The function of making an affirmative determination in step 8314 of the main CPU 63 in the 83rd embodiment, the function of making an affirmative determination in step SB717 of the main CPU 63 in the 84th embodiment, and the 85th embodiment A function of making a positive determination in step SB812 of the main CPU 63, and a function of making a positive determination in step SC113 of the main CPU 63 in the 86th embodiment);
Setting monitoring means for executing setting monitoring processing for monitoring whether or not the setting value of the use target is abnormal (in the eighteenth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step SB106 in the main CPU 63, 83rd embodiment In the 84th embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step SB705 in the main CPU 63, in the 85th embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step SB806 in the main CPU 63, In the 86th embodiment, the main CPU 63 performs the process of step SC106).
The processing at the start of supply which is executed when the supply of the operating power to the control means having the setting means is started (steps SB101 to SB122 in the 81st embodiment, steps SB601 to SB622 in the 83rd embodiment, In the 84th embodiment, steps SB701 to SB729, in the 85th embodiment, steps SB801 to SB818 and steps SB823 to SB826, and in the 86th embodiment, steps SC101 to SC120 and steps SC125 to SC128). A gaming machine characterized by including:

  According to the feature y1, since the setting value to be used is set from the setting values in a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. That you expect. Further, since the setting monitoring process for monitoring whether the setting value of the use target is abnormal is executed, if the setting value of the use target is abnormal, it can be dealt with. Also, since the setting monitoring process is included in the process at the start of supply, it is possible to prevent the process for advancing the game from being started even if the set value of the use target is abnormal. Becomes

  Feature y2. The gaming machine according to feature y1, wherein the setting monitoring unit executes the setting monitoring process each time a monitoring trigger occurs even after the process at the time of the supply start ends.

  According to the feature y2, the setting monitoring process is executed each time a monitoring trigger occurs after the process at the start of supply is completed, and therefore, it is easy to specify that the setting value of the use target is abnormal.

Feature y3. A means for executing interrupt processing that is started periodically (a function of executing first timer interrupt processing in the main CPU 63);
The gaming machine according to Feature y2, wherein the setting monitoring process is included in the interrupt process.

  According to the feature y3, the setting monitoring process is executed each time the device is started periodically, so that it is possible to increase the frequency of monitoring whether or not the setting value of the use target is abnormal.

  Feature y4. The setting monitoring means sets a restricted state in which execution of a predetermined progress processing for advancing a game is restricted based on the fact that the setting value of the use target is abnormal in the setting monitoring processing. Restriction means (the function of executing the process of step SB119 in the main CPU 63 in the eighteenth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step SB619 in the main CPU 63 in the eighteenth embodiment, and the step SB726 of the main CPU 63 in the eighty-fourth embodiment. , The function of executing the process of step SB823 in the main CPU 63 in the 85th embodiment, and the function of executing the process of step SC125 in the main CPU 63 in the 86th embodiment). The gaming machine according to any one of features y1 to y3.

  According to the characteristic y4, when it is specified that the set value of the use target is abnormal, the execution of the predetermined progress processing for advancing the game is restricted. Regardless, the game can be prevented from being started.

  Feature y5. Means for releasing the restricted state based on the occurrence of the settable state (the function of executing the process of step SB303 in the main CPU 63 in the eighteenth embodiment, the process of step SB904 in the main CPU 63 in the eighty-fifth embodiment) The gaming machine according to feature y4, further comprising:

  According to the feature y5, it is possible to cause the setting value of the use target to be newly set when the situation where the setting value of the use target is abnormal is released.

  Feature y6. The restricting means is configured to enter the restricted state when the supply of the operating power is restarted even if the supply of the operating power is stopped in the state of the restricted state. A gaming machine according to claim 1.

  According to the feature y6, it is possible to prevent the state in which the execution of the predetermined progress processing is restricted due to the abnormal setting value of the use target from being canceled only by stopping the supply of the operation power.

  Feature y7. It is provided with a means for executing a non-restriction process different from the predetermined progress process even in the restriction state (a function of executing the processes of steps S8901 to S8905 in the main CPU 63). The gaming machine according to any one of y6.

  According to the feature y7, it is possible to execute the non-restriction processing even in a situation where the execution of the predetermined progress processing is restricted because the setting value of the use target is abnormal. Thus, it is possible to ensure execution of necessary processing even in the restricted state.

  Feature y8. The gaming machine according to Feature y7, wherein the non-regulatory processing includes a power outage monitoring process (Step S8901) for monitoring the occurrence of a power outage.

  According to the feature y8, the power failure monitoring process is executed even in the regulated state, so that it is possible to appropriately cope with a power failure occurring in the regulated state.

  Feature y9. The setting monitoring unit is configured to notify the player that the setting possible state should be generated based on the fact that the setting value of the use target is abnormal in the setting monitoring process. Means to be executed (the function of executing the process of step SB121 in the main CPU 63 in the 81st embodiment, the function of executing the process of step SB621 in the main CPU 63 in the 83rd embodiment, the main function of the 84th embodiment (The function of executing the process of step SB728 in the side CPU 63, the function of executing the process of step SB825 in the main CPU 63 in the 85th embodiment, and the function of executing the process of step SC127 in the main CPU 63 in the 86th embodiment). The gaming machine according to any one of the features y1 to y8, wherein

  According to the feature y9, when it is specified that the set value of the use target is abnormal, the notification that allows the player to recognize that the settable situation should be generated is executed. When the value becomes abnormal, it becomes possible to urge the manager of the gaming hall to eliminate the value.

  Note that, for the configurations of the features y1 to y9, the features DA1 to DA15, the features DB1 to DB7, the features DC1 to DC5, the features DD1 to DD10, the features DE1 to DE6, the features DF1 to DF3, the features DG1 to DG18, and the features DH1 to DH1. DH7, features DI1 to DI9, features DJ1 to DJ4, features DK1 to DK7, features DL1 to DL20, features DM1 to DM7, features DN1 to DN6, features DO1 to DO11, features DP1 to DP12, features DQ1 to DQ5, features DR1 to DR1. DR17, features DS1 to DS8, features DT1 to DT13, features DU1 to DU8, features DV1 to DV6, features DW1 to DW11, features DX1 to DX11, features DY1 to DY11, features DZ1 to DZ10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b1 b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 15, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αDA1 to αDA10, features αDB1 to αDB6, features αDC1 to αDC13, features αDD1 to αDD9, features αDE1 to αDE5, features αDF1 to αDF9, features αDG1 to αDG10, features αDH1 to αDH11, features αDI1 to αDI8, and features αDJ1 to αDJ14, features αDK1 to αDK8, features αDL1 to αDL11, features αDM1 to αDM8, features αDN1 to αDN 6, feature αDO1 to αDO7, feature αDP1 to αDP7, feature αDQ1 to αDQ9, feature αDR1 to αDR8, feature αDS1 to αDS3, feature αDT1 to αDT4, feature αDU1 to αDU10, feature αDV1 to αDV5, feature αDW1 to αDW9, and feature αDX1. Any one or a plurality of configurations among αDX4, features αDY1 to αDY11, features αDZ1 to αDZ4, and features αa1 to αa3 may be applied. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

  According to the invention relating to the feature y group, the following problem can be solved.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine has a dish storage section for storing game balls given to a player on the front face of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to a game ball launching device, It is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage unit, for example. Further, in a pachinko machine, a configuration including an upper dish storage section and a lower dish storage section as a dish storage section is also known. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper dish storage section is a game ball launching device. And the surplus game balls in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  Further, in the slot machine, when a new game is started by operating the start lever while a medal is bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation of the reel is started by the rotation start control being executed by the control means, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means executes the rotation start control. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation stop of the reels corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as the example described above, it is necessary to appropriately manage set values that determine the advantage of the gaming machine, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic z group>
Feature z1. A predetermined monitoring unit (in the 65th embodiment, which monitors whether or not a predetermined abnormality has occurred in information stored in a predetermined storage area (specific control work area 221) when the supply of operating power is started. A function of the main CPU 63 for executing the processing of steps S7906 and S7909, in the 67th embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S8807 and S8810 in the main CPU 63, and in the 68th embodiment, a step S9408 and steps of the main CPU 63. A function of executing the processing of S9411, a function of executing the processing of steps S9506 and S9509 in the main CPU 63 in the 69th embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S9905 and S9908 in the main CPU 63 of the 74th embodiment, In the 77th embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps SA406 and SA409 in the main CPU 63, in the 78th embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps SA907 and SA910 in the main CPU 63, and in the 81st embodiment, the function of the main CPU 63 is executed. The function of executing steps SB104 to SB106, the function of executing steps SB604 to SB606 in the main CPU 63 in the 83rd embodiment, and the processing of steps SB703 to SB705 in the main CPU 63 in the 84th embodiment. The function to be executed, the function to execute the processing of steps SB804 to SB806 in the main CPU 63 in the 85th embodiment, and the steps SC104 to SC in the main CPU 63 in the 86th embodiment Processing of-up SC106 and the ability to perform),
Based on the fact that the predetermined abnormality has been identified by the predetermined monitoring means, a restriction means (in the 65th embodiment, in which the execution of the predetermined progress processing for promoting the game is restricted) A function of executing the processing of step S7910 in the main CPU 63, a function of executing the processing of step S8811 in the main CPU 63 in the 67th embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S9412 in the main CPU 63 in the 68th embodiment, In the 69th embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S9510 in the main CPU 63, in the 74th embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S9909 in the main CPU 63, and in the 77th embodiment, the processing of step SA410 in the main CPU 63 is executed. The main CPU 6 in the seventy-eighth embodiment. In the eighteenth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step SB119 in the main CPU 63, in the eighteenth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step SB619 in the main CPU 63, In the 85th embodiment, the function of executing the process of step SB823 in the main CPU 63, and in the 86th embodiment, the function of executing the process of step SC125 in the main CPU 63. When,
Means for executing non-regulation processing different from the predetermined progress processing even in the restriction state (the function of executing the processing of steps S8201 to S8206 in the main CPU 63 in the 65th embodiment, the main processing in the 67th embodiment) A gaming machine comprising: a function of the CPU 63 for executing the processing of steps S8901 to S8905; in the seventy-fourth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps SA101 to SA106 in the main CPU 63).

  According to the feature z1, when it is specified that a predetermined abnormality has occurred with respect to the information stored in the predetermined storage area, the execution of the predetermined progress processing for advancing the game is restricted. It is possible to prevent the game from being started despite the occurrence. Further, even when the execution of the predetermined progress processing is restricted by the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality, it is possible to execute the non-restriction processing. Thus, it is possible to ensure execution of necessary processing even in the restricted state.

  Feature z2. The non-regulatory process includes a power outage monitoring process (step S8201 in the 65th embodiment, step S8901 in the 67th embodiment, and step SA102 in the 74th embodiment) for monitoring the occurrence of a power outage. The gaming machine described in Feature z1.

  According to the feature z2, the power failure monitoring process is executed even in the regulated state, so that it is possible to appropriately cope with a power failure occurring in the regulated state.

  Feature z3. The regulating means is configured to enter the regulated state when the supply of the operating power is restarted even if the supply of the operating power is stopped in the state of the restricted state, z1 or z2. A gaming machine according to claim 1.

  According to the feature z3, it is possible to prevent the state in which the execution of the predetermined progress processing is restricted due to the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality from being stopped only by stopping the supply of the operation power.

Feature z4. Setting means for setting a set value to be used from among a plurality of set values corresponding to the player's advantage (in the eighteenth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step SB311 in the main CPU 63, the eighty-fifth embodiment) The function for executing the process of step SB915 in the main CPU 63)
A state generating means for setting a setting possible state (a state in which the setting value updating process is executed) in which the setting value to be used can be changed (in the 81st embodiment, the process proceeds to step SB114 of the main CPU 63). The function of making an affirmative determination in step 8314 of the main CPU 63 in the 83rd embodiment, the function of making an affirmative determination in step SB717 of the main CPU 63 in the 84th embodiment, and the 85th embodiment (A function of making an affirmative determination in step SB812 in the main CPU 63, and a function of making an affirmative determination in step SC113 of the main CPU 63 in the 86th embodiment). 2. The gaming machine according to 1.

  According to the feature z4, since a setting value to be used is set from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage, the player can use a more advantageous setting value. That you expect. In this case, when a predetermined abnormality has occurred with respect to the information stored in the predetermined storage area, there is a possibility that an abnormality has also occurred with respect to the set value. On the other hand, when the configuration of the feature z1 is provided and it is specified that a predetermined abnormality has occurred with respect to the information stored in the predetermined storage area, the execution of the predetermined progress processing for advancing the game is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from starting even though there is a possibility that an abnormality has occurred in the set value.

  Feature z5. Means for causing the player to recognize that the settable situation should be generated based on the fact that the predetermined monitoring means has caused the predetermined abnormality to occur ( In the eighteenth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step SB121 in the main CPU 63, the function of executing the process of step SB621 in the main CPU 63 in the 83rd embodiment, and the process of step SB728 of the main CPU 63 in the eighty-fourth embodiment are described. (The function of executing the process of step SB825 in the main CPU 63 in the 85th embodiment, and the function of executing the process of step SC127 in the main CPU 63 in the 86th embodiment). The gaming machine according to z4.

  According to the feature z5, when it is determined that a predetermined abnormality has occurred, a notification is made to enable the player to recognize that a settable situation should be generated. It is possible to urge the manager of the game hall to set the set value.

  Feature z6. Means for releasing the restricted state based on the occurrence of the settable state (the function of executing the process of step SB303 in the main CPU 63 in the eighteenth embodiment, the process of step SB904 in the main CPU 63 in the eighty-fifth embodiment) The gaming machine according to feature z4 or z5, further comprising:

  According to the feature z6, it is possible to cause a new setting of the setting value of the use target when canceling the situation where the predetermined abnormality has occurred.

  In addition, for the configuration of the features z1 to z6, the features DA1 to DA15, the features DB1 to DB7, the features DC1 to DC5, the features DD1 to DD10, the features DE1 to DE6, the features DF1 to DF3, the features DG1 to DG18, and the features DH1 to DH1. DH7, features DI1 to DI9, features DJ1 to DJ4, features DK1 to DK7, features DL1 to DL20, features DM1 to DM7, features DN1 to DN6, features DO1 to DO11, features DP1 to DP12, features DQ1 to DQ5, features DR1 to DR1. DR17, features DS1 to DS8, features DT1 to DT13, features DU1 to DU8, features DV1 to DV6, features DW1 to DW11, features DX1 to DX11, features DY1 to DY11, features DZ1 to DZ10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b1 b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 15, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αDA1 to αDA10, features αDB1 to αDB6, features αDC1 to αDC13, features αDD1 to αDD9, features αDE1 to αDE5, features αDF1 to αDF9, features αDG1 to αDG10, features αDH1 to αDH11, features αDI1 to αDI8, and features αDJ1 to αDJ14, features αDK1 to αDK8, features αDL1 to αDL11, features αDM1 to αDM8, features αDN1 to αDN 6, feature αDO1 to αDO7, feature αDP1 to αDP7, feature αDQ1 to αDQ9, feature αDR1 to αDR8, feature αDS1 to αDS3, feature αDT1 to αDT4, feature αDU1 to αDU10, feature αDV1 to αDV5, feature αDW1 to αDW9, and feature αDX1. Any one or a plurality of configurations among αDX4, features αDY1 to αDY11, features αDZ1 to αDZ4, and features αa1 to αa3 may be applied. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

<Characteristic αDA group>
Features αDA1. A predetermined monitoring unit (in the eighty-first embodiment, which monitors whether or not a predetermined abnormality has occurred in information stored in a predetermined storage area (specific control work area 221) when the supply of operating power is started. The function of the main CPU 63 to execute the processing of steps SB104 to SB106, the 83rd embodiment is a function of executing the processing of steps SB604 to SB606 in the main CPU 63, and the 84th embodiment is the function of step SB703 to the steps of the main CPU 63. The function of executing the processing of SB 705, the function of executing the processing of steps SB804 to SB806 in the main CPU 63 in the 85th embodiment, and the function of executing the processing of steps SC104 to SC106 in the main CPU 63 in the 86th embodiment) When,
When the predetermined monitoring unit determines that the predetermined abnormality has occurred, the execution content of the process at the start of the supply of the operating power indicates that the predetermined abnormality has occurred by the predetermined monitoring unit. A restricting means (in the eighteenth embodiment, a function of executing the process of step SB119 in the main CPU 63, and in the eighteenth embodiment, a process of step SB619 in the main CPU 63 is executed). Function, the function of executing the process of step SB726 in the main CPU 63 in the 84th embodiment, the function of executing the process of step SB823 in the main CPU 63 in the 85th embodiment, and the function of executing the process of step SC125 in the main CPU 63 in the 86th embodiment. Function to perform processing),
A specific output unit that outputs a specific output to the outside of the gaming machine based on the fact that the predetermined abnormality has occurred by the predetermined monitoring unit (in the eighteenth embodiment, the processing of step SB122 in the main CPU 63 is performed). The function to be executed, the function of executing the process of step SB622 in the main CPU 63 in the 83rd embodiment, the function of executing the process of step SB729 in the main CPU 63 in the 84th embodiment, the process of the main CPU 63 in the 85th embodiment A gaming machine having a function of executing the process of SB826, and in the 86th embodiment, a function of executing the process of step SC128 in the main CPU 63).

  According to the feature αDA1, when it is specified that a predetermined abnormality has occurred with respect to the information stored in the predetermined storage area, when the execution content of the processing at the start of the supply of the operation power does not have the predetermined abnormality Since the execution contents are different from those described above, it is possible to prevent the processing from proceeding as usual despite the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality. Further, a specific output is performed outside the gaming machine based on the fact that the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality has been specified. Thereby, it becomes possible to urge the manager of the gaming hall to deal with the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality.

  Features αDA2. The gaming machine according to the feature αDA1, wherein the specific output unit outputs the specific output to the outside of the gaming machine even when it is determined that an event different from the predetermined abnormality has occurred.

  According to the feature αDA2, even when an event different from the predetermined abnormality occurs, the specific output is performed outside the gaming machine. This makes it possible to share the configuration for performing the specific output.

  Features αDA3. The specific output means is provided when the predetermined abnormality has occurred when the supply of the operation power is resumed even if the supply of the operation power is stopped in a situation where the predetermined abnormality has occurred. The gaming machine according to feature αDA1 or αDA2, wherein the specific output is performed externally.

  According to the characteristic αDA3, in a situation where a predetermined abnormality has occurred, it becomes possible to perform a specific output to the outside of the gaming machine every time the supply of the operating power is restarted. This makes it easier for the manager of the gaming hall to recognize that the predetermined abnormality has occurred.

  Features αDA4. The restricting means may be in a restricted state in which the execution of a predetermined progress process for advancing a game is restricted based on the fact that the predetermined abnormality has been identified by the predetermined monitoring means. The gaming machine according to any one of αDA1 to αDA3.

  According to the feature αDA4, when it is specified that a predetermined abnormality has occurred with respect to the information stored in the predetermined storage area, the execution of the predetermined progress processing for causing the game to proceed is regulated. It is possible to prevent the game from being started despite the occurrence.

  Features αDA5. Means for executing non-restriction processing different from the predetermined progress processing even in the restriction state (the function of executing the processing of steps S8201 to S8206 in the main CPU 63 in the 65th embodiment, the main side in the 67th embodiment) The game according to feature αDA4, wherein the CPU 63 has a function of executing the processing of steps S8901 to S8905, and in the seventy-fourth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps SA101 to SA106 in the main CPU 63). Machine.

  According to the feature αDA5, it is possible to execute the non-restriction processing even in a situation where the execution of the predetermined progress processing is restricted due to the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality. Thus, it is possible to ensure execution of necessary processing even in the restricted state.

  Features αDA6. The non-regulatory process includes a power outage monitoring process (step S8201 in the 65th embodiment, step S8901 in the 67th embodiment, and step SA102 in the 74th embodiment) for monitoring the occurrence of a power outage. A gaming machine according to feature αDA5.

  According to the feature αDA6, the power failure monitoring process is executed even in the regulated state, so that it is possible to appropriately cope with a power failure occurring in the regulated state.

  Features αDA7. The regulating means is configured to enter the regulated state when the supply of the operating power is restarted even if the supply of the operating power is stopped in the regulated state. A gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims.

  According to the feature αDA7, the state in which the execution of the predetermined progress processing is restricted due to the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality can be prevented from being canceled only by stopping the supply of the operation power.

Features αDA8. Setting means for setting a set value to be used from among a plurality of set values corresponding to the player's advantage (in the eighteenth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step SB311 in the main CPU 63, the eighty-fifth embodiment) The function for executing the process of step SB915 in the main CPU 63)
A state generating means for setting a setting possible state (a state in which the setting value updating process is executed) in which the setting value to be used can be changed (in the 81st embodiment, the process proceeds to step SB114 of the main CPU 63). The function of making an affirmative determination in step 8314 of the main CPU 63 in the 83rd embodiment, the function of making an affirmative determination in step SB717 of the main CPU 63 in the 84th embodiment, and the 85th embodiment (A function of making a positive determination in step SB812 of the main CPU 63, and a function of making a positive determination in step SC113 of the main CPU 63 in the 86th embodiment). 2. The gaming machine according to 1.

  According to the feature αDA8, since a setting value to be used is set from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage, the player can use a more advantageous setting value. That you expect. In this case, when a predetermined abnormality has occurred with respect to the information stored in the predetermined storage area, there is a possibility that an abnormality has also occurred with respect to the set value. On the other hand, when the configuration of the above-described feature αDA1 is provided, and it is specified that a predetermined abnormality has occurred with respect to the information stored in the predetermined storage area, the execution content of the processing at the start of the supply of the operation power is changed to the predetermined content. Since the execution content is different from the case where no error has occurred, it is possible to prevent processing from proceeding as usual despite the possibility that an error has occurred regarding the set value Become. In addition, since the specific output is performed outside the gaming machine based on the fact that the predetermined abnormality has been identified, the game is performed so as to cope with the possibility that the abnormality has occurred with respect to the set value. It is possible to prompt the manager of the hall.

  Features αDA9. Means for causing the player to recognize that the settable situation should be generated based on the fact that the predetermined monitoring means has caused the predetermined abnormality to occur ( In the eighteenth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step SB121 in the main CPU 63, the function of executing the process of step SB621 in the main CPU 63 in the 83rd embodiment, and the process of step SB728 of the main CPU 63 in the eighty-fourth embodiment are described. (The function of executing the process of step SB825 in the main CPU 63 in the 85th embodiment, and the function of executing the process of step SC127 in the main CPU 63 in the 86th embodiment). The gaming machine described in αDA8.

  According to the feature αDA9, when it is specified that a predetermined abnormality has occurred, a notification is made to enable the player to recognize that a settable situation should be generated. It is possible to urge the manager of the game hall to set the set value.

Features αDA10. The restricting means sets a restricted state in which execution of a predetermined progress process for advancing a game is restricted based on the fact that the predetermined abnormality has been identified by the predetermined monitoring means. ,
This gaming machine has means for canceling the restricted state based on the occurrence of the settable state (the function of executing the processing of step SB303 in the main CPU 63 in the eighteenth embodiment, the main CPU 63 in the eighty-fifth embodiment). The gaming machine according to feature αDA8 or αDA9, further comprising a function of executing the process of step SB904 in (1).

  According to the feature αDA10, it is possible to cause a new setting of the setting value of the use target when canceling the situation where the predetermined abnormality has occurred.

  Note that, for the configuration of the features αDA1 to αDA10, the features DA1 to DA15, the features DB1 to DB7, the features DC1 to DC5, the features DD1 to DD10, the features DE1 to DE6, the features DF1 to DF3, the features DG1 to DG18, and the features DH1 to DH7, features DI1 to DI9, features DJ1 to DJ4, features DK1 to DK7, features DL1 to DL20, features DM1 to DM7, features DN1 to DN6, features DO1 to DO11, features DP1 to DP12, features DQ1 to DQ5, features DR1 to DR1. DR17, features DS1 to DS8, features DT1 to DT13, features DU1 to DU8, features DV1 to DV6, features DW1 to DW11, features DX1 to DX11, features DY1 to DY11, features DZ1 to DZ10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b1 b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 15, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o1 o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y1 y9, features z1 to z6, features αDA1 to αDA10, features αDB1 to αDB6, features αDC1 to αDC13, features αDD1 to αDD9, features αDE1 to αDE5, features αDF1 to αDF9, features αDG1 to αDG10, features αDH1 to αDH11, and features αDI1 to αDI8, feature αDJ1 to αDJ14, feature αDK1 to αDK8, feature αDL1 to αDL11, feature αDM1 to αDM8, feature αDN To αDN6, features αDO1 to αDO7, features αDP1 to αDP7, features αDQ1 to αDQ9, features αDR1 to αDR8, features αDS1 to αDS3, features αDT1 to αDT4, features αDU1 to αDU10, features αDV1 to αDV5, features αDW1 to αDW9, and features αDX1. To αDX4, features αDY1 to αDY11, features αDZ1 to αDZ4, and features αa1 to αa3. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

<Characteristic αDB group>
Features αDB1. Means for starting processing when the supply of operating power is started when the supply of operating power is started (Steps SB101 to SB122 in the 81st embodiment, Steps SB601 to SB622 in the 83rd embodiment, and 84th embodiment Steps SB701 to SB729, steps SB801 to SB818 and steps SB823 to SB826 in the 85th embodiment, steps SC101 to SC120 and steps SC125 to SC128 in the 86th embodiment),
Means for executing interrupt processing periodically started (function of executing first timer interrupt processing in main CPU 63);
Means for executing the profit providing process in a manner corresponding to the set value set as the use target from the plurality of set values corresponding to the player's advantage (the processes of steps S503 and S504 in the main CPU 63) Function to execute)
As a part of the processing at the start of the supply of the operation power, a setting-related executing means (a function of executing a setting value updating process or a setting confirmation process in the main CPU 63) for executing a predetermined setting-related process relating to the set value. )When,
Permission setting means for setting the state in which the execution of the interrupt processing is prohibited to the state in which the execution of the interrupt processing is permitted when the predetermined setting-related processing is performed in the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power (The function of executing the processing of step SB201 or step SB301 in the main CPU 63 in the 81st embodiment, and the function of executing the processing of step SB901 in the main CPU 63 in the 85th embodiment). Gaming machine to do.

  According to the feature αDB1, since the setting value to be used is set from the setting values in a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. That you expect. Further, since the predetermined setting-related processing relating to the set value is executed as a part of the processing at the time of starting the supply of the operating power, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an act of trying to perform the predetermined setting-related processing illegally. It becomes possible.

  In this case, when the predetermined setting-related processing is executed in the processing at the time of starting the supply of the operation power, the state is changed from the state where the execution of the interrupt processing is prohibited to the state where the execution of the interrupt processing is permitted. That is, in the process at the start of the supply of the operating power, the execution of the interrupt process is basically prohibited, while the interrupt process can be started by interrupting the predetermined setting-related process. In the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power, basically, by prohibiting the execution of the interrupt processing, it is possible to reduce the time required until the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power is completed. On the other hand, in the predetermined setting-related processing, it is assumed that the processing related to the setting value is performed, so that it takes a long time to complete the processing. In such a situation where the predetermined setting-related processing is performed, By permitting the execution of the interrupt process, it is possible to make the execution mode of the process suitable.

  Feature αDB2. The gaming machine according to the feature [alpha] DB1, wherein the setting-related execution unit ends the predetermined setting-related processing based on an end trigger operation performed in the predetermined setting-related processing.

  According to the feature αDB2, the predetermined setting-related processing is continued until the end trigger operation is performed, so that the time required for completing the processing is likely to be long. In this case, the configuration of the feature αDB1 is provided, and the execution of the interrupt process is permitted in a situation where the predetermined setting-related process is being executed. Therefore, the execution mode of the process can be made suitable. .

  Feature αDB3. Prohibition setting means (in the eighteenth embodiment, a step in the main CPU 63 in which the execution of the interrupt processing is prohibited is set to a state in which the execution of the interrupt processing is prohibited when the predetermined setting-related processing ends). The gaming machine according to feature αDB1 or αDB2, which has a function of executing the processing of step SB206 or step SB312, and in the 85th embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step SB916 in the main CPU 63).

  According to the characteristic αDB3, when the predetermined setting-related processing ends, the execution of the interruption processing is prohibited again. This makes it possible to limit the period during which the execution of the interrupt process is permitted in the state where the process at the start of the supply of the operating power is being performed to the period during which the predetermined setting-related process is being performed.

  Feature αDB4. The gaming machine according to any one of features αDB1 to αDB3, wherein the interruption process includes a power failure monitoring process (Step S8901) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure.

  According to the feature αDB4, the power failure monitoring process is performed even in the situation where the predetermined setting-related process is being executed, so that the time required for completing the predetermined setting-related process can be long. Even if a power failure occurs in a situation where the predetermined setting-related processing is being performed, it is possible to appropriately cope with the power failure.

Feature αDB5. The interruption process includes a progress handling process (steps S8907 to S8920 in the main CPU 63) executed to control the progress of the game,
When the interrupt process is interrupted and activated in a situation where the predetermined setting-related process is being executed, the power failure monitoring process is executed, but the progress handling process is not executed,
If the interrupt process is interrupted and started after the process at the start of the supply of the operation power is completed, both the power failure monitoring process and the progress handling process can be executed. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature αDB5, in a configuration in which the occurrence of a power failure is periodically monitored in a situation where a predetermined setting-related process is being executed, an interrupt process is interrupted and activated when a predetermined setting-related process is being executed. Even if it is, it is possible to prevent the progress handling process for controlling the progress of the game from being executed.

Feature αDB6. The setting related execution means,
When the supply of the operation power is started, based on the fact that the first setting-related operation (the ON operation of the setting key insertion section 68a and the pressing operation of the reset button 68c) is performed, the use as the predetermined setting-related processing is performed. Means for executing a changeable process in which a target set value can be changed (a function of executing a set value update process in the main CPU 63);
Based on the fact that the second setting-related operation (ON operation of the setting key insertion unit 68a) is performed when the supply of the operating power is started, the setting value to be used is set as the predetermined setting-related processing as the predetermined setting-related processing. Means for executing a setting notification process to be notified (a function of executing a setting confirmation process in the main CPU 63),
The permission setting means sets the state in which the execution of the interrupt processing is prohibited to the state in which the execution of the interrupt processing is permitted when the changeable processing is executed in the processing at the start of the supply of the operation power. Setting the state where the execution of the interrupt processing is prohibited to the state where the execution of the interrupt processing is permitted when the setting notification processing is performed in the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power. The gaming machine according to any one of the features αDB1 to αDB5.

  According to the feature αDB6, it is necessary to perform the first setting-related operation when the supply of the operation power is started in order to change the setting value to be used, and thus the setting value to be used is incorrectly changed. It becomes possible to make it difficult to perform the act of trying. In addition, when the supply of the operation power is started, the setting value of the use target is notified by performing the second setting-related operation, so that the manager of the game hall checks the set value of the use target as necessary. It becomes possible.

  Note that, for the configuration of the features αDB1 to αDB6, the features DA1 to DA15, the features DB1 to DB7, the features DC1 to DC5, the features DD1 to DD10, the features DE1 to DE6, the features DF1 to DF3, the features DG1 to DG18, and the features DH1 to DH1. DH7, features DI1 to DI9, features DJ1 to DJ4, features DK1 to DK7, features DL1 to DL20, features DM1 to DM7, features DN1 to DN6, features DO1 to DO11, features DP1 to DP12, features DQ1 to DQ5, features DR1 to DR1. DR17, features DS1 to DS8, features DT1 to DT13, features DU1 to DU8, features DV1 to DV6, features DW1 to DW11, features DX1 to DX11, features DY1 to DY11, features DZ1 to DZ10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b1 b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e 9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 15, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y1 y9, features z1 to z6, features αDA1 to αDA10, features αDB1 to αDB6, features αDC1 to αDC13, features αDD1 to αDD9, features αDE1 to αDE5, features αDF1 to αDF9, features αDG1 to αDG10, features αDH1 to αDH11, and features αDI1 to αDI8, feature αDJ1 to αDJ14, feature αDK1 to αDK8, feature αDL1 to αDL11, feature αDM1 to αDM8, feature αDN1 αDN6, features αDO1 to αDO7, features αDP1 to αDP7, features αDQ1 to αDQ9, features αDR1 to αDR8, features αDS1 to αDS3, features αDT1 to αDT4, features αDU1 to αDU10, features αDV1 to αDV5, features αDW1 to αDW9, and features αDX1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of αDX4, features αDY1 to αDY11, features αDZ1 to αDZ4, and features αa1 to αa3 may be applied. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

  According to the invention relating to the feature z group, the feature αDA group, and the feature αDB group, the following problem can be solved.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine has a dish storage section for storing game balls given to a player on the front face of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to a game ball launching device, It is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage unit, for example. Further, in a pachinko machine, a configuration including an upper dish storage section and a lower dish storage section as a dish storage section is also known. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper dish storage section is a game ball launching device. And the surplus game balls in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  Further, in the slot machine, when a new game is started by operating the start lever while a medal is bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation of the reel is started by the rotation start control being executed by the control means, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means executes the rotation start control. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation stop of the reels corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as the example described above, it is necessary to appropriately perform processing when supply of operating power is started, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Characteristic αDC group>
Features αDC1. Means for executing the profit providing process in a manner corresponding to the set value set as the use target from the plurality of set values corresponding to the player's advantage (the processes of steps S503 and S504 in the main CPU 63) Function to execute)
A setting-related executing means (a function of executing a setting value updating process in the main CPU 63) for executing a predetermined setting-related process relating to the set value when the supply of the operating power is started;
When the supply of the operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related processing is completed, and when the supply of the operating power is started thereafter, the execution of the predetermined progress processing for causing the game to proceed is restricted. The regulating means for setting the state (the function of making an affirmative determination in step SB808 in the main CPU 63 in the 85th embodiment, and the function of making an affirmative determination in steps SC108 and SC116 in the 86th embodiment). A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the feature αDC1, since the setting value to be used is set from the setting values in a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. That you expect. In this case, when the supply of the operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related processing is completed, and when the supply of the operating power is restarted thereafter, the execution of the predetermined progress processing for advancing the game is restricted. You. This makes it possible to prevent the predetermined progress processing for performing the game from being executed even though the predetermined setting-related processing has not been completed.

  Feature αDC2. The control unit may execute the predetermined setting-related process even when the supply of the operating power is stopped after the supply of the operating power is stopped before the completion of the predetermined setting-related process. The gaming machine according to Feature αDC1, wherein the restricted state is not set in the case where the game is performed.

  According to the feature αDC2, it is possible to prevent the execution of the predetermined progress processing for advancing the game from being restricted until the predetermined setting-related processing is executed when the supply of the operation power is restarted. .

  Feature αDC3. The apparatus according to claim 1, further comprising a unit (a function of executing the processing of steps S8901 to S8905 in the main CPU 63) that executes a non-regulation process different from the predetermined progress process even in the regulation state. The gaming machine according to αDC2.

  According to the feature αDC3, it is possible to execute the non-restriction processing even in a situation where the execution of the predetermined progress processing is restricted. Thus, it is possible to ensure execution of necessary processing even in the restricted state.

  Feature αDC4. The gaming machine according to the feature [alpha] DC3, wherein the non-restriction processing includes a power failure monitoring processing (step S8901) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure.

  According to the feature αDC4, the power failure monitoring process is executed even in the regulated state, so that it is possible to appropriately cope with a power failure occurring in the regulated state.

  Feature αDC5. The regulating means is configured to enter the regulated state when the supply of the operating power is restarted even if the supply of the operating power is stopped in the state of the regulated state. ΑDC1 to αDC4 A gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims.

  According to the feature αDC5, it is possible to prevent the state in which the execution of the predetermined progress processing is restricted from being canceled only by stopping the supply of the operation power.

  Feature αDC6. Means for allowing a player to recognize that a situation in which the predetermined setting-related processing should be executed based on the fact that the restricted state has been executed is executed (mainly in the 85th embodiment, (The function of executing the process of step SB825 in the side CPU 63, in the 86th embodiment, the function of executing the process of step SC127 in the main CPU 63). Gaming machine.

  According to the feature αDC6, when the supply of the operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related processing is completed, it is possible to prompt the manager of the game hall to execute the predetermined setting-related processing again. Become.

  Feature αDC7. The restricting unit is configured to perform a specific related operation (the setting key insertion unit 68a) even when the supply of the operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting related process is completed and when the supply of the operating power is started thereafter. The gaming machine according to any one of the features αDC1 to αDC6, wherein the restricted state is not set based on the ON operation of the reset button 68c and the pressing operation of the reset button 68c).

  According to the feature αDC7, even when the supply of the operation power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related processing is completed, the game can be advanced by performing the specific related operation when the supply of the operation power is restarted. Can be prevented from being restricted.

  Feature αDC8. The gaming machine according to the feature [alpha] DC7, wherein the setting-related execution means executes the predetermined setting-related processing based on the specific related operation being performed when supply of operating power is started. .

  According to the feature αDC8, it is possible to prevent the execution of the predetermined progress processing for advancing the game from being restricted until the predetermined setting-related processing is executed when the supply of the operation power is restarted. .

Feature αDC9. The identification-related operation includes a setting key insertion portion (setting key insertion portion 68a) in a predetermined corresponding state (a state in which the setting key is turned on) by a setting key, and another predetermined operation (a pressing operation of the reset button 68c). ) Is being performed,
The regulating means may be configured such that when the supply of the operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related processing is completed, and when the supply of the operating power is started thereafter, the other predetermined operation is not performed. The gaming machine according to the feature αDC8, wherein the setting state is not set to the restricted state based on the setting key insertion section being in the predetermined corresponding state.

  According to the feature αDC9, even when the specific related operation is not performed when the supply of the operation power is restarted, the setting key insertion unit is in the predetermined corresponding state, and the predetermined progress processing for performing the game is performed. Can be prevented from being regulated. Thus, when the supply of the operating power is stopped during the execution of the predetermined setting-related processing, the setting key insertion unit is in a predetermined corresponding state, but performs a power ON operation without performing another predetermined operation. Even if there is, it is possible to prevent the execution of the predetermined progress processing from being restricted.

  Features αDC10. When the supply of the operation power is started, the setting key insertion unit is set to the predetermined corresponding state in a state where the other predetermined operation is not performed, and performs another related process regarding the setting value. The gaming machine according to feature αDC9, further comprising another related execution means (a function of executing a setting confirmation process in the main CPU 63).

  According to the feature αDC10, even when the supply of the operation power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related process is completed, the operation for executing another related process when the supply of the operation power is restarted is performed. It is possible to prevent the execution of the predetermined progress processing for advancing the game from being restricted.

  Features αDC11. When the supply of the operating power is stopped before completing the predetermined setting-related processing, and when the supply of the operating power is started thereafter, the setting key insertion unit is not operated in a situation where the other predetermined operation is not performed. The gaming machine according to the feature [alpha] DC10, wherein the predetermined setting-related processing is executed without executing the different-related processing based on the fact that the predetermined corresponding state is set.

  According to the feature αDC11, when the supply of the operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related processing is completed, and when the supply of the operating power is restarted, an operation for executing another related processing is performed. , A predetermined setting related process is executed instead of another related process. This makes it possible to prioritize the execution of the predetermined setting-related processing.

Feature αDC12. The predetermined setting-related processing is processing that enables the setting value to be used to be changed,
The gaming machine according to the feature [alpha] DC11, wherein the another related process is a process for notifying the set value to be used.

  According to the feature αDC12, when the supply of the operating power is stopped while the setting value to be used is being changed, when the supply of the operating power is restarted, the setting value to be used is notified. It is possible to prioritize the execution of the process for changing the setting value to be used over the process.

  Feature αDC13. The gaming machine according to any one of the features αDC1 to αDC12, wherein the predetermined setting-related process is a process that enables the setting value to be used to be changed.

  According to the feature αDC13, when the supply of the operation power is stopped in the middle of the process for changing the set value to be used, the game is advanced when the supply of the operation power is resumed thereafter. Execution of the predetermined progress processing is restricted. This makes it possible to prevent the execution of the predetermined progress processing for advancing the game even when the change of the set value is not completed.

  Note that, for the configuration of the features αDC1 to αDC13, the features DA1 to DA15, the features DB1 to DB7, the features DC1 to DC5, the features DD1 to DD10, the features DE1 to DE6, the features DF1 to DF3, the features DG1 to DG18, and the features DH1 to DH1. DH7, features DI1 to DI9, features DJ1 to DJ4, features DK1 to DK7, features DL1 to DL20, features DM1 to DM7, features DN1 to DN6, features DO1 to DO11, features DP1 to DP12, features DQ1 to DQ5, features DR1 to DR1. DR17, features DS1 to DS8, features DT1 to DT13, features DU1 to DU8, features DV1 to DV6, features DW1 to DW11, features DX1 to DX11, features DY1 to DY11, features DZ1 to DZ10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b1 b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 15, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o1 o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y1 y9, features z1 to z6, features αDA1 to αDA10, features αDB1 to αDB6, features αDC1 to αDC13, features αDD1 to αDD9, features αDE1 to αDE5, features αDF1 to αDF9, features αDG1 to αDG10, features αDH1 to αDH11, and features αDI1 to αDI8, feature αDJ1 to αDJ14, feature αDK1 to αDK8, feature αDL1 to αDL11, feature αDM1 to αDM8, feature αDN To αDN6, features αDO1 to αDO7, features αDP1 to αDP7, features αDQ1 to αDQ9, features αDR1 to αDR8, features αDS1 to αDS3, features αDT1 to αDT4, features αDU1 to αDU10, features αDV1 to αDV5, features αDW1 to αDW9, and features αDX1. To αDX4, features αDY1 to αDY11, features αDZ1 to αDZ4, and features αa1 to αa3. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

<Characteristic αDD group>
Features αDD1. Means for executing the profit providing process in a manner corresponding to the set value set as the use target from the plurality of set values corresponding to the player's advantage (the processes of steps S503 and S504 in the main CPU 63) Function to execute)
When the supply of the operating power is started, a predetermined setting-related process related to the set value is executed based on the fact that the specific related operation (the ON operation of the setting key insertion unit 68a and the pressing operation of the reset button 68c) is performed. Setting-related execution means (a function of executing a setting value update process in the main CPU 63);
When the supply of the operating power is started, based on a predetermined related operation (ON operation of the setting key insertion unit 68a) performed, another related execution means (mainly executing a predetermined different related process related to the set value) A function of executing a set value update process in the side CPU 63);
When the supply of the operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related processing is completed, and when the supply of the operating power is started thereafter, the execution of the predetermined progress processing for causing the game to proceed is restricted. The regulating means for setting the state (the function of making an affirmative determination in step SB808 in the main CPU 63 in the 85th embodiment, and the function of making an affirmative determination in steps SC108 and SC116 in the 86th embodiment). Prepared,
Even if the supply of the operating power is stopped before completing the predetermined setting-related process, the regulating unit may perform the specific related operation when the supply of the operating power is started thereafter. Even if the supply of the operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related processing is completed, the supply of the operating power is started even after the supply of the operating power is stopped. A gaming machine which does not enter the restricted state based on a predetermined related operation being performed.

  According to the feature αDD1, since the setting value to be used is set from the setting values in a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. That you expect. In this case, when the supply of the operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related processing is completed, and when the supply of the operating power is restarted thereafter, the execution of the predetermined progress processing for advancing the game is restricted. You. This makes it possible to prevent the predetermined progress processing for performing the game from being executed even though the predetermined setting-related processing has not been completed.

  Further, even when the supply of the operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related processing is completed, the execution of the predetermined progress processing is not restricted by performing the specific related operation when the supply of the operating power is restarted. Thus, it is possible to prevent the execution of the predetermined progress processing for causing the game to proceed until the predetermined setting-related processing is executed when the supply of the operation power is restarted.

  Further, even when the supply of the operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related processing is completed, the execution of the predetermined progress processing is restricted even when the predetermined related operation is performed when the supply of the operating power is restarted. Not done. This makes it possible to prevent the execution of the predetermined progress processing from being restricted when an operation for executing the processing related to the set value is performed.

  Features αDD2. If the supply of the operating power is stopped before completing the predetermined setting-related process, and the predetermined related operation is performed when the supply of the operating power is started thereafter, the another related process is performed. The gaming machine according to feature αDD1, wherein the predetermined setting-related processing is executed without executing the processing.

  According to the feature αDD2, when the supply of the operation power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related processing is completed, and when the supply of the operation power is restarted, the operation for executing another related processing is performed. , A predetermined setting related process is executed instead of another related process. This makes it possible to prioritize the execution of the predetermined setting-related processing.

Features αDD3. The identification-related operation includes a setting key insertion portion (setting key insertion portion 68a) in a predetermined corresponding state (a state in which the setting key is turned on) by a setting key, and another predetermined operation (a pressing operation of the reset button 68c). ) Is being performed,
The predetermined related operation includes that the setting key insertion unit is set to the predetermined corresponding state by the setting key, and does not include that the other predetermined operation is performed. A gaming machine according to claim 1.

  According to the feature αDD3, even when the specific related operation is not performed when the supply of the operation power is restarted, the setting key insertion unit is in the predetermined corresponding state, and the predetermined progress processing for performing the game is performed. Can be prevented from being regulated. Thus, when the supply of the operating power is stopped during the execution of the predetermined setting-related processing, the setting key insertion unit is in a predetermined corresponding state, but performs a power ON operation without performing another predetermined operation. Even if there is, it is possible to prevent the execution of the predetermined progress processing from being restricted.

Feature αDD4. The predetermined setting-related processing is processing that enables the setting value to be used to be changed,
The gaming machine according to any one of features αDD1 to αDD3, wherein the another related process is a process for notifying the set value to be used.

  According to the feature αDD4, when the supply of the operation power is stopped in the middle of the process for changing the set value to be used, the game is advanced when the supply of the operation power is restarted thereafter. Execution of the predetermined progress processing is restricted. This makes it possible to prevent the execution of the predetermined progress processing for advancing the game even when the change of the set value is not completed. Further, when the supply of the operating power is stopped while the setting value to be used is being changed, a process for enabling the setting value to be used to be changed when restarting the supply of the operating power is performed. The predetermined progress processing is performed not only when an operation for executing the operation is performed but also when an operation for notifying the setting value to be used is performed. Can be prevented from being restricted.

  Feature αDD5. Features αDD1 through αDD1 through which a means for executing non-regulation processing different from the predetermined progress processing even in the regulation state (the function of executing the processing of steps S8901-S8905 in the main CPU 63) is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of αDD4.

  According to the feature αDD5, it is possible to execute the non-restriction processing even in a situation where the execution of the predetermined progress processing is restricted. Thus, it is possible to ensure execution of necessary processing even in the restricted state.

  Feature αDD6. The gaming machine according to feature αDD5, wherein the non-restriction processing includes a power failure monitoring process (step S8901) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure.

  According to the feature αDD6, the power failure monitoring process is executed even in the restricted state, so that it is possible to appropriately cope with a power failure occurring in the restricted state.

  Feature αDD7. The regulating means is configured to enter the regulated state when the supply of the operating power is resumed even if the supply of the operating power is stopped in the state of the regulated state, wherein αDD1 to αDD6. A gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims.

  According to the feature αDD7, it is possible to prevent the state in which the execution of the predetermined progress processing is restricted from being canceled only by stopping the supply of the operation power.

  Feature αDD8. Means for allowing a player to recognize that a situation in which the predetermined setting-related processing should be executed based on the fact that the restricted state has been executed is executed (mainly in the 85th embodiment, (The function of executing the processing of step SB825 in the side CPU 63, the function of executing the processing of step SC127 in the main CPU 63 in the 86th embodiment). Gaming machine.

  According to the feature αDD8, when the supply of the operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related processing is completed, it is possible to prompt the manager of the gaming hall to execute the predetermined setting-related processing again. Become.

Feature αDD9. Means for executing the profit providing process in a manner corresponding to the set value set as the use target from the plurality of set values corresponding to the player's advantage (the processes of steps S503 and S504 in the main CPU 63) Function to execute)
When the supply of the operating power is started, a predetermined setting-related process related to the set value is executed based on the fact that the specific related operation (the ON operation of the setting key insertion unit 68a and the pressing operation of the reset button 68c) is performed. Setting-related execution means (a function of executing a setting value update process in the main CPU 63);
When the supply of the operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related processing is completed, and when the supply of the operating power is started thereafter, the execution of the predetermined progress processing for causing the game to proceed is restricted. The regulating means for setting the state (the function of making an affirmative determination in step SB808 in the main CPU 63 in the 85th embodiment, and the function of making an affirmative determination in steps SC108 and SC116 in the 86th embodiment). Prepared,
The specific related operation includes a first related operation (ON operation of the setting key insertion unit 68a) and a second related operation (press operation of the reset button 68c),
Even if the supply of the operating power is stopped before completing the predetermined setting-related processing, the regulating unit may perform the specific related operation when the supply of the operating power is started thereafter. Even if the supply of the operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related processing is completed, the supply of the operating power is started even after the supply of the operating power is stopped. A gaming machine wherein the restricted state is not set based on the execution of the first related operation among the first related operation and the second related operation.

  According to the feature αDD9, since a setting value to be used is set from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage, the player can use a more advantageous setting value. That you expect. In this case, when the supply of the operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related processing is completed, and when the supply of the operating power is restarted thereafter, the execution of the predetermined progress processing for advancing the game is restricted. You. This makes it possible to prevent the predetermined progress processing for performing the game from being executed even though the predetermined setting-related processing has not been completed.

  Further, even when the supply of the operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related processing is completed, the execution of the predetermined progress processing is not restricted by performing the specific related operation when the supply of the operating power is restarted. Thus, it is possible to prevent the execution of the predetermined progress processing for causing the game to proceed until the predetermined setting-related processing is executed when the supply of the operation power is restarted.

  Even if the supply of the operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related processing is completed, the execution of the predetermined progress processing is restricted if the first related operation is performed when the supply of the operating power is restarted. Not done. This makes it possible to prevent the execution of the predetermined progress processing from being restricted when a part of the operation for executing the predetermined setting-related processing is performed.

  In addition, for the configuration of the features αDD1 to αDD9, the features DA1 to DA15, the features DB1 to DB7, the features DC1 to DC5, the features DD1 to DD10, the features DE1 to DE6, the features DF1 to DF3, the features DG1 to DG18, and the features DH1 to DH1. DH7, features DI1 to DI9, features DJ1 to DJ4, features DK1 to DK7, features DL1 to DL20, features DM1 to DM7, features DN1 to DN6, features DO1 to DO11, features DP1 to DP12, features DQ1 to DQ5, features DR1 to DR1. DR17, features DS1 to DS8, features DT1 to DT13, features DU1 to DU8, features DV1 to DV6, features DW1 to DW11, features DX1 to DX11, features DY1 to DY11, features DZ1 to DZ10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b1 b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e 9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 15, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y1 y9, features z1 to z6, features αDA1 to αDA10, features αDB1 to αDB6, features αDC1 to αDC13, features αDD1 to αDD9, features αDE1 to αDE5, features αDF1 to αDF9, features αDG1 to αDG10, features αDH1 to αDH11, and features αDI1 to αDI8, feature αDJ1 to αDJ14, feature αDK1 to αDK8, feature αDL1 to αDL11, feature αDM1 to αDM8, feature αDN1 αDN6, features αDO1 to αDO7, features αDP1 to αDP7, features αDQ1 to αDQ9, features αDR1 to αDR8, features αDS1 to αDS3, features αDT1 to αDT4, features αDU1 to αDU10, features αDV1 to αDV5, features αDW1 to αDW9, and features αDX1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of αDX4, features αDY1 to αDY11, features αDZ1 to αDZ4, and features αa1 to αa3 may be applied. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

<Characteristic αDE group>
Features αDE1. Means for executing the profit providing process in a manner corresponding to the set value set as the use target from the plurality of set values corresponding to the player's advantage (the processes of steps S503 and S504 in the main CPU 63) Function to execute)
When the supply of the operation power is started, the setting possible state (setting value) in which the setting value to be used can be changed based on the specific related operation including the operation of the predetermined corresponding operation means is performed. A situation generating means (a function of making an affirmative determination in step SB812 in the main CPU 63 in the 85th embodiment, and an affirmative in step SC113 in the main CPU 63 in the 86th embodiment) so as to be in a state of executing the update processing. Function to judge)
An operation specifying unit (a function of executing the process of step SB910 in the main CPU 63) for specifying whether or not the predetermined corresponding operation unit is operated;
When it is specified by the operation specifying means that the predetermined corresponding operation means is not operated, the storage state becomes the non-operation corresponding state, and it is specified that the predetermined corresponding operation means is operated by the operation specifying means. Operation corresponding storage means (OFF confirmation flag 361) whose storage state becomes an operation corresponding state when
In the setting possible state, in the situation where the storage state of the operation correspondence storage unit is the non-operation correspondence state, the selection is performed based on the fact that the operation specifying unit specifies that the predetermined corresponding operation unit is operated. Selection target changing means (a function of executing the process of step SB914 in the main CPU 63) for changing a target set value,
In a configuration where the setting value to be selected is the setting value to be used when the end opportunity occurs in the setting possible state,
This gaming machine is characterized by state setting means for setting the storage state of the operation corresponding storage means to the operation corresponding state when the settable state is started or when the settable state is started (in the 85th embodiment, A gaming machine having a function of executing the process of step SB901 in the main CPU 63, and a function of executing the process of step SC114 in the main CPU 63 in the 86th embodiment.

  According to the characteristic αDE1, the setting value to be used is set from the setting values in a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage, so that the player can use the more advantageous setting value. That you expect. In addition, in order to generate a setting possible state in which a setting value to be used can be changed, it is necessary to perform a power ON operation in a state where a specific related operation including an operation of a predetermined corresponding operation unit is performed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to illegally change the setting value to be used. In addition, since the set value to be selected is changed based on the operation of the predetermined corresponding operation means operated to generate the settable state, the number of operation means required to change the set value is reduced. It can be suppressed. Further, in the setting possible state, the setting value to be selected is changed based on the fact that it is specified that the predetermined corresponding operation means is operated in the state where the storage state of the operation corresponding storage means is the non-operation corresponding state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the setting value to be selected from being changed a plurality of times for one operation of the predetermined corresponding operation means.

  In this case, when the settable situation is started or when the settable situation is started, the storage state of the operation correspondence storage unit is set to the operation correspondence state. As a result, when the operation of the predetermined corresponding operation means for generating the settable state is continued even after the start of the settable state, the setting value to be selected is changed by the operation of the predetermined corresponding operation means. It is possible to avoid doing so.

  Feature αDE2. When the detection state of the means for detecting an operation of the predetermined corresponding operation means is an operation detection state, the situation generating means determines that the predetermined corresponding operation means is operated regardless of the storage state of the operation corresponding storage means. The gaming machine according to feature αDE1, wherein the gaming machine is specified.

  According to the feature αDE2, when specifying whether or not the specific related operation has been performed, instead of specifying whether or not the predetermined corresponding operation unit has been switched from the state in which the predetermined corresponding operation unit has not been operated to the state in which the predetermined corresponding operation has been performed, the predetermined corresponding operation Since the configuration specifies whether or not the means is operated, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for specifying whether to generate a settable situation.

Feature αDE3. Setting correspondence storage means (setting reference area 341) for storing setting correspondence information corresponding to the setting value to be used;
Selection correspondence storage means (setting update area 342) for storing selection correspondence information corresponding to the setting value to be selected,
In the setting possible state, the selection target changing unit has specified that the predetermined corresponding operation unit is operated by the operation specifying unit in a state where the storage state of the operation corresponding storage unit is the non-operation corresponding state. And changing the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means so that the setting value to be selected is changed,
The situation generating means stores information corresponding to the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means as the setting correspondence information in the setting correspondence storage means when the end opportunity occurs in the settable situation. The gaming machine according to the feature αDE1 or αDE2, wherein the setting value set as a selection target in the settable state is set as a usage target.

  According to the feature αDE3, the setting correspondence storage means for storing the setting correspondence information corresponding to the setting value to be used, and the selection correspondence storage means for storing the selection correspondence information corresponding to the setting value being changed in the settable state. With the provision, it is possible to change the set value in the settable state while storing and holding the information of the set value that was set before the start of the settable state.

  Feature αDE4. Means (step SA801 in the main CPU 63) in which the set values to be selected in the settable state are displayed by predetermined display means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204). -The gaming machine according to any one of the features αDE1 to αDE3.

  According to the feature αDE4, it is possible to perform a setting value changing operation while checking a setting value that is being changed in a setting possible state.

Feature αDE5. Means for executing the profit providing process in a manner corresponding to the set value set as the use target from the plurality of set values corresponding to the player's advantage (the processes of steps S503 and S504 in the main CPU 63) Function to execute)
When the supply of the operation power is started, the setting possible state (setting value) in which the setting value to be used can be changed based on the specific related operation including the operation of the predetermined corresponding operation means is performed. A situation generating means (a function of making an affirmative determination in step SB812 in the main CPU 63 in the 85th embodiment, and an affirmative in step SC113 in the main CPU 63 in the 86th embodiment) so as to be in a state of executing the update processing. Function to judge)
An operation specifying unit (a function of executing the process of step SB910 in the main CPU 63) for specifying whether or not the predetermined corresponding operation unit is operated;
Selection target changing means (step SB914 in the main CPU 63) for changing the setting value to be selected based on the fact that the predetermined corresponding operation means is operated in the setting possible state by the operation specifying means. Function to execute the processing of), and
In a configuration where the setting value to be selected is the setting value to be used when the end opportunity occurs in the setting possible state,
In this gaming machine, the operation of the predetermined corresponding operation means when the supply of the operating power for generating the settable state is started is a trigger for changing a set value to be selected in the settable state. There is provided a means for preventing the operation from being handled as an operation (the function of executing the processing of step SB901 in the main CPU 63 in the 85th embodiment, and the function of executing the processing of step SC114 in the main CPU 63 in the 86th embodiment). A gaming machine characterized by that:

  According to the feature αDE5, since a setting value to be used is set from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage, the player can use a more advantageous setting value. That you expect. In addition, in order to generate a setting possible state in which a setting value to be used can be changed, it is necessary to perform a power ON operation in a state where a specific related operation including an operation of a predetermined corresponding operation unit is performed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to illegally change the setting value to be used. In addition, since the set value to be selected is changed based on the operation of the predetermined corresponding operation means operated to generate the settable state, the number of operation means required to change the set value is reduced. It can be suppressed.

  In this case, the operation of the predetermined corresponding operation means when the supply of the operating power for generating the settable situation is started is treated as an operation that triggers a change of a set value to be selected in the settable situation. Not to be. As a result, when the operation of the predetermined corresponding operation means for generating the settable state is continued even after the start of the settable state, the setting value to be selected is changed by the operation of the predetermined corresponding operation means. It is possible to avoid doing so.

  In addition, for the configuration of the features αDE1 to αDE5, the features DA1 to DA15, the features DB1 to DB7, the features DC1 to DC5, the features DD1 to DD10, the features DE1 to DE6, the features DF1 to DF3, the features DG1 to DG18, and the features DH1 to DH1. DH7, features DI1 to DI9, features DJ1 to DJ4, features DK1 to DK7, features DL1 to DL20, features DM1 to DM7, features DN1 to DN6, features DO1 to DO11, features DP1 to DP12, features DQ1 to DQ5, features DR1 to DR1. DR17, features DS1 to DS8, features DT1 to DT13, features DU1 to DU8, features DV1 to DV6, features DW1 to DW11, features DX1 to DX11, features DY1 to DY11, features DZ1 to DZ10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b1 b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e 9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 15, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y1 y9, features z1 to z6, features αDA1 to αDA10, features αDB1 to αDB6, features αDC1 to αDC13, features αDD1 to αDD9, features αDE1 to αDE5, features αDF1 to αDF9, features αDG1 to αDG10, features αDH1 to αDH11, and features αDI1 to αDI8, feature αDJ1 to αDJ14, feature αDK1 to αDK8, feature αDL1 to αDL11, feature αDM1 to αDM8, feature αDN1 αDN6, features αDO1 to αDO7, features αDP1 to αDP7, features αDQ1 to αDQ9, features αDR1 to αDR8, features αDS1 to αDS3, features αDT1 to αDT4, features αDU1 to αDU10, features αDV1 to αDV5, features αDW1 to αDW9, and features αDX1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of αDX4, features αDY1 to αDY11, features αDZ1 to αDZ4, and features αa1 to αa3 may be applied. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

  According to the feature αDC group, the feature αDD group, and the feature αDE group, the following problems can be solved.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine has a dish storage section for storing game balls given to a player on the front face of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to a game ball launching device, It is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage unit, for example. Further, in a pachinko machine, a configuration including an upper dish storage section and a lower dish storage section as a dish storage section is also known. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper dish storage section is a game ball launching device. And the surplus game balls in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  Further, in the slot machine, when a new game is started by operating the start lever while a medal is bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation of the reel is started by the rotation start control being executed by the control means, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means executes the rotation start control. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation stop of the reels corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in the gaming machine as exemplified above, it is necessary to make the configuration relating to the set value that determines the advantage of the gaming machine suitable, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Characteristic αDF group>
Features αDF1. Specific display means (special figure display unit 37a, general figure display unit 38a);
A display data setting unit (a function of executing the process of step S8915 in the main CPU 63) for setting display data in the display storage area (the first display data buffer 271, the third display data buffer 273);
A specific display control means for controlling the display of the specific display means so that a display corresponding to the display data stored in the display storage area is performed (a function of executing a process of steps SC412 to SC414 in the main CPU 63); ,
Initialization means for initializing a predetermined storage area (clearing area 371 in the 87th embodiment) based on the start of the supply of the operating power (the second RAM clearing process of the main CPU 63 in the 87th embodiment) Function to perform) and
The gaming machine, wherein the display storage area is not initialized by the initialization means.

  According to the feature αDF1, the predetermined storage area is initialized based on the start of the supply of the operation power, so that the game can be started in a state where the predetermined storage area is initialized. It becomes possible. In this case, even if the predetermined storage area is initialized, the display storage area in which the display data for causing the specific display means to perform display is not initialized by the initialization means. With this, the display content of the specific display unit when the supply of the operating power is started can be set to the operating power regardless of whether the predetermined storage area is initialized by the initializing unit or not. Can be displayed before the supply of data is stopped. Therefore, even when the player confirms the display content of the specific display means when the supply of the operation power is started, it is not possible to specify whether or not the initialization of the predetermined storage area has been performed by the initialization means. It becomes possible.

Feature αDF2. Setting means for setting a set value to be used from among a plurality of set values corresponding to the player's advantage in a settable state generated based on the start of supply of operating power (the 87th embodiment Function of executing the process of step SC216 of the main CPU 63 in the embodiment.
The initialization unit initializes the predetermined storage area when the setting value to be used by the setting unit is set or after the setting value to be used by the setting unit is set by the setting unit. The gaming machine described in the feature αDF1.

  According to the feature αDF2, when the supply of the operation power is started, a new setting of the setting value of the use target is performed, or when a new setting is performed, a predetermined storage area is initialized by the initialization unit. Thereby, when a new setting of a setting value to be used is performed, it is possible to start a game in a situation where a predetermined storage area has been initialized. In this case, even if the predetermined storage area is initialized by the initializing means accompanying the new setting of the setting value to be used, display data for causing the specific display means to perform display is set. The display storage area is not initialized by the initialization means. As a result, the display contents of the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started are changed when the setting value to be used is newly set and when the setting value to be used is newly set. In either case, the display content before the supply of the operation power is stopped can be obtained. Therefore, even when the player confirms the display content of the specific display means when the supply of the operation power is started, it cannot be specified whether or not a new setting of the set value to be used has been performed. Becomes possible.

Feature αDF3. When a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied when the supply of the operation power is started (the information abnormality regarding the main RAM 65 has not occurred, and the setting update display flag and the game stop flag are not set to “1”) In the case where the “RAM clear operation” is performed in the situation), the separate initialization means for initializing the predetermined storage area even when the setting value to be used by the setting means is not set ( (The function of executing the first RAM clearing process of the main CPU 63 in the 87th embodiment)
The gaming machine according to feature αDF2, wherein the display storage area is not initialized by the separate initialization unit.

  According to the feature αDF3, when the supply of the operating power is started, when the predetermined initialization condition is satisfied, even when the setting value to be used is not newly set, the predetermined storage area is used. Is initialized, it is possible to start a game in a situation where a predetermined storage area has been initialized even in a situation where a new setting of a setting value to be used is not performed. In this case, display data for causing the specific display means to perform display is set regardless of whether a new setting of a setting value to be used is performed or whether a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied. The display storage area is not initialized. Thus, when the supply of the operating power is started, the display content of the specific display means is reset to a predetermined value when a new setting of the setting value is performed, when a new setting of the setting value is not performed, Regardless of whether the condition is satisfied or the predetermined initialization condition is not satisfied, the display content before the supply of the operation power is stopped can be obtained. Therefore, even if the player checks the display content of the specific display means when the supply of the operation power is started, whether or not a new setting of the set value has been performed and whether or not a predetermined initialization condition has been satisfied Can not be specified.

  Feature αDF4. A power supply / emission control device that supplies backup power to the display storage area and the predetermined storage area in a state where operating power is not supplied to the specific display control means. The gaming machine according to any one of the features αDF1 to αDF3.

  According to the feature αDF4, even when the display storage area and the predetermined storage area need to be supplied with operating power to store and hold information, the operation is not performed when the specific display control unit is not supplied with operating power. Since backup power is supplied to the display storage area and the predetermined storage area, it is necessary to store and hold information in the display storage area and the predetermined storage area even when the operating power is not supplied to the specific display means. Becomes possible.

Feature αDF5. It is determined whether or not a privilege is to be granted to the player. When the privilege is to be granted to the player, the privilege grant information (the information of “1” set in the flag corresponding to the type of the jackpot result) is set to the predetermined value. Assignment determining means (a function of executing the process of step S508 in the main CPU 63) to be stored in the storage area;
A function for executing a process of steps S408 to S412 in the main CPU 63 for giving a privilege (open / close execution mode) to the player based on the fact that the privilege grant information is stored in the predetermined storage area. ) And
The display data setting means stores the display data (display data selected in step S507 or S509) corresponding to the determination result of the assignment determining means when the display timing of the determination result comes, in the display storage area. Set to
The specific display control unit controls the display of the specific display unit so that a display corresponding to the display data corresponding to the result stored in the display storage area is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of the features αDF1 to αDF4, wherein the display to be performed is performed by the specific display unit.

  According to the feature αDF5, the display corresponding to the result of determining whether or not to grant the privilege to the player is performed by the specific display means, so that the player pays attention to the specific display means. In this case, even if a predetermined storage area is initialized by the initializing means when the supply of the operating power is started by providing the configuration described in the feature αDF1, the display is performed on the specific display means. The display storage area in which display data to be set is set is not initialized by the initialization means. With this, the display content of the specific display unit when the supply of the operating power is started can be set to the operating power regardless of whether the predetermined storage area is initialized by the initializing unit or not. Can be displayed before the supply of data is stopped. Therefore, even when the player confirms the display content of the specific display means when the supply of the operation power is started, it is not possible to specify whether or not the initialization of the predetermined storage area has been performed by the initialization means. It becomes possible.

  Feature αDF6. Even when the privilege grant information is erased from the predetermined storage area by the initialization of the predetermined storage area by the initialization means, the display storage area is not initialized by the initialization means. The gaming machine according to feature αDF5.

  According to the feature αDF6, when the supply of the operation power is started, the privilege supply information is erased from the predetermined storage area when the predetermined storage area is initialized, so that the supply of the operation power is stopped. Even if the privilege providing information is stored in the predetermined storage area before the operation, if the supply of the operating power is restarted, the game can be started in a state where the privilege providing information is deleted. In this case, even when the privilege grant information is deleted from the predetermined storage area, the display storage area in which the display data for causing the specific display means to perform display is initialized by the initialization means. Is not converted. Thereby, even if the player confirms the display content of the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started, it is impossible to specify whether or not the initialization of the predetermined storage area has been performed by the initialization means. Can be given priority.

Feature αDF7. As the specific display means, a first specific display means (special figure display section 37a) and a second specific display means (general figure display section 38a) are provided,
A first display storage area (first display data buffer 271) and a second display storage area (third display data buffer 273) as the display storage area;
The display data setting means,
First display data setting means for setting display data in the first display storage area (a function of executing the process of step S8915 in the main CPU 63 with respect to the special figure display unit 37a);
Second display data setting means for setting display data in the second display storage area (a function of executing the process of step S8915 in the main CPU 63 with respect to the general view display unit 38a),
The specific display control means,
A first specific display control means for controlling display of the first specific display means so that a display corresponding to the display data stored in the first display storage area is performed (steps performed by the main CPU 63 with respect to the special figure display unit 37a). SC412 to perform the processing of step SC414);
Second specific display control means for controlling display of the second specific display means so that a display corresponding to the display data stored in the second display storage area is performed (steps performed by the main CPU 63 with respect to the general-purpose display unit 38a). SC412 to a function of executing the process of step SC414).
The gaming machine according to any one of features αDF1 to αDF6, wherein the first display storage area and the second display storage area are not initialized by the initialization unit.

  According to the feature αDF7, the display contents when the supply of the operating power is started for both the first specific display unit and the second specific display unit are displayed when the predetermined storage area is initialized by the initialization unit, and Regardless of the case where the initialization is not performed, the display content before the supply of the operation power is stopped can be obtained. Therefore, even if the player confirms the display content of either the first specific display means or the second specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started, the initialization of the predetermined storage area is performed by the initialization means. It is possible to make it impossible to specify whether or not the operation has been performed.

Feature αDF8. When the supply of the operation power is started, the processing at the start of the supply of the operation power is executed, and the processing of initializing the predetermined storage area by the initialization means is performed at the start of the supply of the operation power. Is included in the processing of
Wherein the specific display control means starts the display of the specific display means after the processing at the start of the supply of the operation power is completed, when the supply of the operation power is started, any of the features αDF1 to αDF7. 2. The gaming machine according to item 1.

  According to the feature αDF8, whether the predetermined storage area is initialized by the initialization means or not, the specific display means is provided at the timing after the processing at the start of the supply of the operation power is completed. Can be started.

Feature αDF9. Based on the start of the supply of the operating power, a setting possible state is set in which a setting value to be used can be set from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage. A status generating means (a function of executing the process of step SC216 of the main CPU 63 in the 87th embodiment),
The initialization means is configured to initialize the predetermined storage area when the settable situation occurs or after the settable situation occurs,
The gaming machine according to the feature αDF8, wherein the settable state occurs in a state where a process at the start of supply of the operation power is being performed.

  According to the feature αDF9, the display on the specific display means is started at the timing after the processing at the time of starting the supply of the operating power is completed, regardless of whether the settable situation occurs or not. It is possible to do.

  In addition, for the configuration of the features αDF1 to αDF9, the features DA1 to DA15, the features DB1 to DB7, the features DC1 to DC5, the features DD1 to DD10, the features DE1 to DE6, the features DF1 to DF3, the features DG1 to DG18, and the features DH1 to DH1. DH7, features DI1 to DI9, features DJ1 to DJ4, features DK1 to DK7, features DL1 to DL20, features DM1 to DM7, features DN1 to DN6, features DO1 to DO11, features DP1 to DP12, features DQ1 to DQ5, features DR1 to DR1. DR17, features DS1 to DS8, features DT1 to DT13, features DU1 to DU8, features DV1 to DV6, features DW1 to DW11, features DX1 to DX11, features DY1 to DY11, features DZ1 to DZ10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b1 b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e 9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 15, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y1 y9, features z1 to z6, features αDA1 to αDA10, features αDB1 to αDB6, features αDC1 to αDC13, features αDD1 to αDD9, features αDE1 to αDE5, features αDF1 to αDF9, features αDG1 to αDG10, features αDH1 to αDH11, and features αDI1 to αDI8, feature αDJ1 to αDJ14, feature αDK1 to αDK8, feature αDL1 to αDL11, feature αDM1 to αDM8, feature αDN1 αDN6, features αDO1 to αDO7, features αDP1 to αDP7, features αDQ1 to αDQ9, features αDR1 to αDR8, features αDS1 to αDS3, features αDT1 to αDT4, features αDU1 to αDU10, features αDV1 to αDV5, features αDW1 to αDW9, and features αDX1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of αDX4, features αDY1 to αDY11, features αDZ1 to αDZ4, and features αa1 to αa3 may be applied. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

<Characteristic αDG group>
Features αDG1. Specific display means (special figure display unit 37a, general figure display unit 38a);
A display data setting unit (a function of executing the process of step S8915 in the main CPU 63) for setting display data in the display storage area (the first display data buffer 271, the third display data buffer 273);
A specific display control means for controlling the display of the specific display means so that a display corresponding to the display data stored in the display storage area is performed (a function of executing a process of steps SC412 to SC414 in the main CPU 63); ,
Initializing means (the main CPU 63 in the 88th embodiment) for initializing a predetermined storage area (the clear target area 371 in the 88th embodiment) including the display storage area based on the start of the supply of the operating power. A function of executing the second RAM clearing process).
The display data setting means, when the supply of operating power is started, when the predetermined storage area is initialized by the initialization means, and when the supply of operating power is started, the initialization means Correspondence setting means (step SC502 in the main CPU 63) for setting the specific correspondence display data in the display storage area for causing the specific display means to perform the specific correspondence display in any case where the predetermined storage area is not initialized. , A function of executing steps SC503, SC507 and SC510).

  According to the feature αDG1, the predetermined storage area is initialized based on the start of the supply of the operation power, so that the game can be started in a state where the predetermined storage area is initialized. It becomes possible. In this case, the specific display means performs the specific correspondence display both when the predetermined storage area is initialized and when the supply of the operating power is started and when the predetermined storage area is not initialized. Thereby, even if the player checks the display content of the specific display means when the supply of the operation power is started, it is not possible to specify whether or not the predetermined storage area has been initialized by the initialization means. It is possible to do.

Feature αDG2. Setting means for setting a set value to be used from among a plurality of set values corresponding to the player's advantage in a settable state generated based on the start of the supply of the operation power (88th embodiment Function of executing the process of step SC216 of the main CPU 63 in the embodiment.
The initialization unit initializes the predetermined storage area when the setting value of the use target is set by the setting unit or after the setting value of the use target is set by the setting unit. The gaming machine according to feature αDG1, wherein:

  According to the feature αDG2, when the supply of the operation power is started, the setting value of the use object is set, or when the setting value is set, the predetermined storage area is initialized, and the use object is initialized. When a new setting of the set value is performed, the game can be started in a situation where the predetermined storage area has been initialized. In this case, the specific display is performed by the specific display means both when the predetermined storage area is initialized and when the predetermined storage area is not initialized accompanying the new setting of the setting value to be used. Accordingly, even when the player confirms the display content of the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started, it is not possible to specify whether or not a new setting of the setting value to be used has been performed. Becomes possible.

Feature αDG3. When a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied when the supply of the operation power is started (the information abnormality regarding the main RAM 65 has not occurred, and the setting update display flag and the game stop flag are not set to “1”) In the case where the “RAM clear operation” is performed in the situation), the separate initialization means for initializing the predetermined storage area even when the setting value to be used by the setting means is not set ( (The function of executing the first RAM clear process of the main CPU 63 in the 88th embodiment)
The correspondence setting means may set the specific correspondence display data in the display storage area even when the supply of operating power is started and the predetermined storage area is initialized by the separate initialization means. The gaming machine according to feature αDG2.

  According to the feature αDG3, when the supply of the operation power is started, when the predetermined initialization condition is satisfied, the predetermined storage area is initialized even if the setting value is not set. Even if a new setting of a set value is not performed, a game can be started in a state where a predetermined storage area is initialized. In this case, when a new setting of the setting value is performed, when a new setting of the setting value is not performed, when a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied, and when a predetermined initialization condition is not satisfied. In any case, the specific display is performed by the specific display means. Thereby, even if the player checks the display content of the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started, whether or not a new setting of the set value has been performed and whether the predetermined initialization condition has been satisfied It is possible to make it impossible to specify whether or not to do so.

  Feature αDG4. The correspondence setting unit is configured to supply the operating power in a predetermined regulation state (during the execution of the game round, during the execution of the opening / closing execution mode, during the execution of the variable display time on the general-purpose display unit 38a, and during the execution of the general-power release state). If the predetermined storage area is not initialized by the initialization means when the operation power supply is started after the operation is stopped, the specific correspondence display data is not set in the display storage area. The gaming machine according to any one of features αDG1 to αDG3.

  According to the feature αDG4, when the supply of the operating power is stopped in the predetermined regulation situation, and when the supply of the operating power is started thereafter, the predetermined storage area is not initialized, and the display storage area is displayed. Is not set in the display storage area, the display data when the supply of the operation power is stopped is stored and held as it is. Thereby, when the supply of the operating power is stopped in the predetermined regulation situation, and when the supply of the operating power is started thereafter, and the predetermined storage area is not initialized, the supply of the operating power is stopped. The display of the specific display unit can be started from the display content of the specific display unit when the display is stopped.

Feature αDG5. It is determined whether or not a privilege is to be granted to the player. When the privilege is to be granted to the player, the privilege grant information (the information of “1” set in the flag corresponding to the type of the jackpot result) is set to the predetermined value. Assignment determining means (a function of executing the process of step S508 in the main CPU 63) to be stored in the storage area;
A function for executing a process of steps S408 to S412 in the main CPU 63 for giving a privilege (open / close execution mode) to the player based on the fact that the privilege grant information is stored in the predetermined storage area. ) And
The display data setting means stores the display data (display data selected in step S507 or S509) corresponding to the determination result of the assignment determining means when the display timing of the determination result comes, in the display storage area. Set to
The specific display control unit controls the display of the specific display unit so that a display corresponding to the display data corresponding to the result stored in the display storage area is performed, so that the specific display control unit corresponds to the determination result of the assignment determination unit. The gaming machine according to any one of the features αDG1 to αDG4, wherein the display to be performed is performed by the specific display unit.

  According to the feature αDG5, the display corresponding to the result of determining whether or not to grant the privilege to the player is performed by the specific display means, so that the player pays attention to the specific display means. In this case, the provision of the configuration described in the above-described feature αDG1 makes it possible to initialize the predetermined storage area when the supply of the operation power is started and to initialize the predetermined storage area when the supply of the operation power is not started. The specific correspondence display is performed by the specific display means. Thereby, even if the player checks the display content of the specific display means when the supply of the operation power is started, it is not possible to specify whether or not the predetermined storage area has been initialized by the initialization means. It is possible to do.

Feature αDG6. The specific display control means is for controlling the display of the specific display means so that a display corresponding to the determination result of the giving determination means is performed after the variable display of the pattern is started,
The correspondence setting unit is configured to perform the initialization when the supply of the operating power is stopped in a situation where the pattern display is performed by the specific display unit and the supply of the operating power is started thereafter. The gaming machine according to feature αDG5, wherein when the predetermined storage area is not initialized by the means, the specific correspondence display data is not set in the display storage area.

  According to the feature αDG6, when the supply of the operating power is stopped in a situation where the pattern display is performed by the specific display means and the supply of the operating power is started thereafter, the predetermined storage area is determined. Is not initialized, the specific correspondence display data is not set in the display storage area, so that the display data when the supply of the operation power is stopped is stored and held in the display storage area as it is. Thereby, the predetermined storage area is initialized when the supply of the operating power is stopped in a situation where the pattern display is being performed on the specific display means, and thereafter, when the supply of the operating power is started. If not, it is possible to restart the variable display of the picture on the specific display means.

Features αDG7. The privilege granting means, when the privilege granting information is stored in the predetermined storage area, grants the privilege after a display corresponding to the granting of the privilege is performed on the specific display means. Things,
The correspondence setting unit may be configured to execute the initialization by the initialization unit when the supply of the operating power is stopped in a situation where the privilege is given by the privilege granting unit, and thereafter, when the supply of the operating power is started. The gaming machine according to feature αDG5 or αDG6, wherein when the predetermined storage area has not been initialized, the specific correspondence display data is not set in the display storage area.

  According to the feature αDG7, when the supply of the operation power is stopped in the situation where the privilege is granted, and when the supply of the operation power is started after that, when the predetermined storage area is not initialized. Since the specific correspondence display data is not set in the display storage area, the display data when the supply of the operation power is stopped is stored and held in the display storage area as it is. Thereby, if the supply of the operating power is stopped in the situation where the privilege is given, and if the predetermined storage area is not initialized when the supply of the operating power is started thereafter, the privilege It is possible to start the display of the specific display means from the display content corresponding to the situation where is given.

  Feature αDG8. In the case where the specific display is performed by the specific display when the supply of the operation power is started, the specific display control is performed after the specific display data is set in the display storage area. The gaming machine according to any one of features αDG1 to αDG7, wherein the display of means is started.

  According to the feature αDG8, when the supply of the operation power is started, the display content when the supply of the operation power is stopped before the specific correspondence display is performed is prevented from being performed by the specific display unit. It becomes possible.

Feature αDG9. When the supply of the operation power is started, the processing at the start of the supply of the operation power is executed, and the processing of initializing the predetermined storage area by the initialization means is performed at the start of the supply of the operation power. Is included in the processing of
The characteristic αDG8 according to the feature αDG8, wherein when the supply of the operation power is started, the specific display control unit starts the display of the specific display unit after the process at the start of the supply of the operation power is performed. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature αDG9, regardless of whether the predetermined storage area is initialized by the initialization means or not, the specific display means is provided at a timing after the processing at the start of the supply of the operation power is completed. Can be started.

Features αDG10. Setting means for setting a set value to be used from among a plurality of set values corresponding to the player's advantage in a settable state generated based on the start of the supply of the operation power (88th embodiment Function of executing the process of step SC216 of the main CPU 63 in the embodiment.
A configuration in which the initialization unit initializes the predetermined storage area when the setting value of the use target is set by the setting unit or after the setting value of the use target is set by the setting unit. And
The gaming machine according to the feature [alpha] DG9, wherein the setting of the set value of the use target by the setting unit occurs in a state where a process at the start of supply of the operating power is being performed.

  According to the feature αDG10, regardless of whether a new setting of a setting value to be used is performed or not, the specific display unit performs processing at the timing after the process of starting the supply of the operating power is completed. The display can be started.

  In addition, for the configuration of the features αDG1 to αDG10, the features DA1 to DA15, the features DB1 to DB7, the features DC1 to DC5, the features DD1 to DD10, the features DE1 to DE6, the features DF1 to DF3, the features DG1 to DG18, and the features DH1 to DH7, features DI1 to DI9, features DJ1 to DJ4, features DK1 to DK7, features DL1 to DL20, features DM1 to DM7, features DN1 to DN6, features DO1 to DO11, features DP1 to DP12, features DQ1 to DQ5, features DR1 to DR1. DR17, features DS1 to DS8, features DT1 to DT13, features DU1 to DU8, features DV1 to DV6, features DW1 to DW11, features DX1 to DX11, features DY1 to DY11, features DZ1 to DZ10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b1 b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 15, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o1 o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y1 y9, features z1 to z6, features αDA1 to αDA10, features αDB1 to αDB6, features αDC1 to αDC13, features αDD1 to αDD9, features αDE1 to αDE5, features αDF1 to αDF9, features αDG1 to αDG10, features αDH1 to αDH11, and features αDI1 to αDI8, feature αDJ1 to αDJ14, feature αDK1 to αDK8, feature αDL1 to αDL11, feature αDM1 to αDM8, feature αDN To αDN6, features αDO1 to αDO7, features αDP1 to αDP7, features αDQ1 to αDQ9, features αDR1 to αDR8, features αDS1 to αDS3, features αDT1 to αDT4, features αDU1 to αDU10, features αDV1 to αDV5, features αDW1 to αDW9, and features αDX1. To αDX4, features αDY1 to αDY11, features αDZ1 to αDZ4, and features αa1 to αa3. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

<Characteristic αDH group>
Features αDH1. Specific display means (special figure display unit 37a, general figure display unit 38a);
The display data setting means (in the 87th to 89th embodiments, the processing of step S8915 in the main CPU 63 is executed) for setting display data in the display storage areas (the first display data buffer 271 and the third display data buffer 273). Function, in the case of the 90th to 92nd embodiments, a function of executing the process of step SC717 in the main CPU 63);
A specific display control means for controlling the display of the specific display means so that a display corresponding to the display data stored in the display storage area is performed (a function of executing a process of steps SC412 to SC414 in the main CPU 63); ,
Setting means for setting a set value to be used from among a plurality of set values corresponding to the player's advantage in a settable state generated based on the start of supply of operating power (87th to 87th) (The function of executing the process of step SC216 of the main CPU 63 in the ninth embodiment).
When the supply of the operating power is started, the display content of the specific display means is that the setting value to be used by the setting means is set by the setting means when the supply of the operating power is started. A game machine characterized in that it is impossible to distinguish a predetermined situation where the setting value to be used by the setting means has not been set by the setting means when the supply of the setting is started.

  According to the feature αDH1, the setting value to be used is set in the setting possible state generated based on the start of the supply of the operating power, so that the setting value to be used is set. In this case, it becomes necessary to newly start the supply of the operation power, and even if the setting value to be used is incorrectly set, it becomes difficult to perform the setting. In this case, when the supply of the operation power is started, the display content of the specific display means is that the setting value to be used when the supply of the operation power is started is set and the supply of the operation power is performed. Is displayed, it is impossible to distinguish a predetermined situation in which a setting value to be used has not been set when is started. Thereby, even when the player checks the display content of the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started, it is possible to prevent the specification of the setting value to be used from being specified. It becomes possible.

Features αDH2. Specific display means (special figure display unit 37a, general figure display unit 38a);
A display data setting means for setting display data in the display storage area (first display data buffer 271, third display data buffer 273) (in the 88th to 89th embodiments, the process of step S8915 in the main CPU 63 is executed). Function, in the case of the 90th to 92nd embodiments, a function of executing the process of step SC717 in the main CPU 63);
A specific display control means for controlling the display of the specific display means so that a display corresponding to the display data stored in the display storage area is performed (a function of executing a process of steps SC412 to SC414 in the main CPU 63); ,
Setting means for setting a set value to be used from among a plurality of set values corresponding to the player's advantage in a settable state generated based on the start of supply of the operating power (88th to 88th) (The function of executing the process of step SC216 of the main CPU 63 in the ninth embodiment).
The display data setting unit is configured to perform the setting by the setting unit when the setting of the set value to be used by the setting unit is performed by the setting unit when the supply of the operating power is started and when the supply of the operating power is started. Correspondence setting means for setting, in the display storage area, specific correspondence display data for causing the specific display means to perform a specific correspondence display in any case where the setting of the setting value to be used is not performed. (The 88th embodiment has a function of executing the processing of steps SC502, SC503, SC507 and SC510 in the main CPU 63, the 89th embodiment has a function of executing the processing of steps SC602 and SC603 in the main CPU 63, In the 90th embodiment, steps SC802 to SC80 in the main CPU 63 are executed. The function of executing the processing of SC805, the function of executing the processing of steps SC902 to SC905 in the main CPU 63 in the ninth embodiment, the steps SD102 to SD105, the step SD109, and the step SD110 of the main CPU 63 in the ninth embodiment A game machine having a function of executing the processing of steps SD113 and SD114).

  According to the feature αDH2, the setting value to be used is set in the setting possible state generated based on the start of the supply of the operating power, so that the setting value to be used is set. In this case, it becomes necessary to newly start the supply of the operation power, and even if the setting value to be used is incorrectly set, it becomes difficult to perform the setting. In this case, the setting value to be used is set when the supply of the operation power is started, and the setting value to be used is not set when the supply of the operation power is started. In any of the predetermined situations, the specific display is performed by the specific display means. Thereby, even when the player checks the display content of the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started, it is possible to prevent the specification of the setting value to be used from being specified. It becomes possible.

Features αDH3. When the predetermined initialization condition is satisfied when the supply of the operation power is started (the information abnormality regarding the main RAM 65 has not occurred, and the setting update display flag and the game stop flag are not set to “1”) If the "RAM clear operation" is performed in the situation), another initialization means (the function of executing the first RAM clear processing of the main CPU 63 in the 88th to 92nd embodiments) for initializing the predetermined storage area is used. Prepared,
The correspondence setting unit is configured to perform the use by the setting unit when the predetermined storage area is initialized by the separate initialization unit when the supply of operation power is started and when the supply of operation power is started. The gaming machine according to feature αDH2, wherein the specific correspondence display data is set in the display storage area in any case where a target set value is set.

  According to the feature αDH3, when the supply of the operation power is started and the predetermined initialization condition is satisfied, the predetermined storage area is initialized, so that the game is performed in a state where the predetermined storage area is initialized. Can be started. In this case, when the supply of the operation power is started, both when the setting value of the use target is set and when the predetermined storage area is initialized, the specific display means displays the specific correspondence. Is performed. As a result, even if the player confirms the display content of the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started, any one of the new setting of the setting value to be used and the initialization of the predetermined storage area is performed. It is possible to make it impossible to distinguish whether or not you have been.

  Features αDH4. Initializing means for initializing the predetermined storage area when the setting value of the use target is set by the setting means or after the setting value of the use target is set by the setting means (88- The gaming machine described in the feature αDH2 or αDH3, further comprising a function of executing a second RAM clearing process of the main CPU 63 in the ninety-ninth embodiment.

  According to the characteristic αDH4, the setting of the setting value of the use target is performed when the supply of the operation power is started, or the predetermined storage area is initialized accompanying the setting of the setting value. When a new setting of the set value is performed, the game can be started in a situation where the predetermined storage area has been initialized. In this case, the setting value to be used is set when the supply of the operation power is started, and the setting value to be used is not set when the supply of the operation power is started. In any of the predetermined situations, the specific display is performed by the specific display means. Thereby, even when the player checks the display content of the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started, it is possible to prevent the specification of the setting value to be used from being specified. It becomes possible.

Features αDH5. It is determined whether or not a privilege is to be granted to the player. When the privilege is to be granted to the player, the privilege grant information (the information of “1” set in the flag corresponding to the type of the jackpot result) is set to the predetermined value. Assignment determining means (a function of executing the process of step S508 in the main CPU 63) to be stored in the storage area;
A function for executing a process of steps S408 to S412 in the main CPU 63 for giving a privilege (open / close execution mode) to the player based on the fact that the privilege grant information is stored in the predetermined storage area. ) And
The display data setting means stores the display data (display data selected in step S507 or S509) corresponding to the determination result of the assignment determining means when the display timing of the determination result comes, in the display storage area. Set to
The specific display control unit controls the display of the specific display unit so that a display corresponding to the display data corresponding to the result stored in the display storage area is performed, so that the specific display control unit corresponds to the determination result of the assignment determination unit. The gaming machine according to any one of the features αDH2 to αDH4, wherein the display to be performed is performed by the specific display unit.

  According to the feature αDH5, the display corresponding to the determination result of whether or not to grant the privilege to the player is performed by the specific display means, so that the player pays attention to the specific display means. In this case, by providing the configuration described in the feature αDH1, when the supply of the operation power is started, the setting of the set value to be used is performed, and the supply of the operation power is started. In any case where the setting of the setting value to be used is not performed in the case of the predetermined situation, the specific display means performs the specific correspondence display. Thereby, even when the player checks the display content of the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started, it is possible to prevent the specification of the setting value to be used from being specified. It becomes possible.

  Features αDH6. The gaming machine according to feature αDH5, wherein the specific correspondence display data is display data used as the result correspondence display data.

  According to the feature αDH6, when the supply of the operation power is started by using the display data corresponding to the result used for notifying the determination result of the assignment determining unit, the specific display is performed by the specific display unit. . As a result, while suppressing an increase in the capacity of the display data, the setting value to be used is set even if the player confirms the display content of the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started. It is possible to make it impossible to specify whether or not it has occurred.

  Features αDH7. The feature-corresponding display data is display data that is used when, in the result-corresponding display data, it is determined that the privilege is not to be granted to the player in the result-corresponding display data, The gaming machine described.

  When the game hall is closed, the power of the gaming machine is usually shut off in a state where the display content corresponding to the decision not to grant the privilege to the player is displayed on the specific display means by the grant determination means. . In this case, according to the feature αDH7, the setting value to be used when the supply of the operation power is started and the setting value to be used when the supply of the operation power is started In any of the predetermined situations where the setting is not performed, the display content of the specific display means is the display content corresponding to the determination that the bonus is not provided to the player by the provision determining means. Thereby, even when the player confirms the display content of the specific display means when the supply of the operation power is started, the display content is the display content that was displayed before the supply of the operation power was stopped. Can be recognized by the player, and it is possible to prevent the user from specifying whether the setting value to be used has been set.

Features αDH8. There are a plurality of types of the specific correspondence display data,
The correspondence setting unit sets the specific correspondence display data to be used from among a plurality of types of the specific correspondence display data in the display storage area, wherein any one of the features αDH2 to αDH7 is provided. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature αDH8, it is possible to diversify the display contents of the specific correspondence display of the specific display means when the supply of the operation power is started.

  Features αDH9. In the case where the specific display is performed by the specific display when the supply of the operation power is started, the specific display control is performed after the specific display data is set in the display storage area. The gaming machine according to any one of features αDH2 to αDH8, which starts displaying means.

  According to the feature αDH9, when the supply of the operation power is started, the display content when the supply of the operation power is stopped before the specific correspondence display is performed is prevented from being performed by the specific display means. It becomes possible.

Features αDH10. The setting means is for setting the setting value to be used in a situation where a process at the time of starting supply of operating power is being performed,
The feature αDH9 according to the feature αDH9, wherein when the supply of the operation power is started, the specific display control unit starts the display of the specific display unit after the process at the start of the supply of the operation power is performed. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature αDH10, the process at the start of the supply of the operation power is performed regardless of whether the setting value to be used is set or the setting value to be used is not set. It is possible to start the specific correspondence display on the specific display means at the timing after the end.

Features αDH11. When a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied when the supply of the operating power is started (the information abnormality regarding the main RAM 65 has not occurred, and the setting update display flag and the game stop flag are not set to “1”) In the case where the "RAM clear operation" is performed in the situation), the separate initialization means (the 88th to the 88th) for initializing the predetermined storage area even when the setting value is not set by the setting means. A function of executing the first RAM clearing process of the main CPU 63 in the 92nd embodiment)
The separate initialization unit is for initializing the predetermined storage area in a state where the processing at the time of starting the supply of the operation power is being performed,
The correspondence setting unit is configured to perform the setting by the setting unit when the supply of the operation power is started, when the predetermined storage area is initialized by the separate initialization unit, and when the supply of the operation power is started. In any case where the value is set, the specific correspondence display data is set in the display storage area,
Wherein the specific display control means starts the display of the specific display means after the processing at the start of the supply of the operation power is performed when the supply of the operation power is started. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature αDH11, when the supply of the operation power is started, the predetermined storage area is initialized when the predetermined initialization condition is satisfied, so that the setting value of the use target is newly set. Even if there is no such situation, the game can be started in a situation where the predetermined storage area has been initialized. In this case, when the supply of the operation power is started, both when the setting value of the use target is set and when the predetermined storage area is initialized, the specific display means displays the specific correspondence. Is performed. As a result, even if the player confirms the display content of the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started, any one of the new setting of the setting value to be used and the initialization of the predetermined storage area is performed. It is possible to make it impossible to distinguish whether or not you have been. Also, regardless of whether the setting value of the use target is set or the case where the predetermined storage area is initialized, the specific display means is provided at a timing after the processing at the start of the supply of the operation power is completed. Can be started.

  Note that, with respect to the configuration of the features αDH1 to αDH11, the features DA1 to DA15, the features DB1 to DB7, the features DC1 to DC5, the features DD1 to DD10, the features DE1 to DE6, the features DF1 to DF3, the features DG1 to DG18, and the features DH1 to DH7, features DI1 to DI9, features DJ1 to DJ4, features DK1 to DK7, features DL1 to DL20, features DM1 to DM7, features DN1 to DN6, features DO1 to DO11, features DP1 to DP12, features DQ1 to DQ5, features DR1 to DR1. DR17, features DS1 to DS8, features DT1 to DT13, features DU1 to DU8, features DV1 to DV6, features DW1 to DW11, features DX1 to DX11, features DY1 to DY11, features DZ1 to DZ10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b1 b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 15, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o1 o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y1 y9, features z1 to z6, features αDA1 to αDA10, features αDB1 to αDB6, features αDC1 to αDC13, features αDD1 to αDD9, features αDE1 to αDE5, features αDF1 to αDF9, features αDG1 to αDG10, features αDH1 to αDH11, and features αDI1 to αDI8, feature αDJ1 to αDJ14, feature αDK1 to αDK8, feature αDL1 to αDL11, feature αDM1 to αDM8, feature αDN To αDN6, features αDO1 to αDO7, features αDP1 to αDP7, features αDQ1 to αDQ9, features αDR1 to αDR8, features αDS1 to αDS3, features αDT1 to αDT4, features αDU1 to αDU10, features αDV1 to αDV5, features αDW1 to αDW9, and features αDX1. To αDX4, features αDY1 to αDY11, features αDZ1 to αDZ4, and features αa1 to αa3. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

<Characteristic αDI group>
Features αDI1. Specific display means (special figure display unit 37a, general figure display unit 38a);
It is determined whether or not a privilege is to be granted to the player, and when the privilege is to be granted to the player, the privilege grant information (information of “1” set in a flag corresponding to the type of the jackpot result) is stored in a predetermined storage. Assignment determining means (function of executing the processing of step S508 in the main CPU 63) to be stored in the area (the clear target area 371 in the 89th to 92nd embodiments);
Privilege granting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S408 to S412 in the main CPU 63) for granting a privilege (open / close execution mode) to the player based on the fact that the privilege grant information is stored in the predetermined storage area. )When,
When the display timing of the determination result comes, the display data (display data selected in step S507 or step S509) corresponding to the determination result of the assignment determining unit is stored in the display storage area (first display data buffer 271, The display data setting means (the function of executing the processing of step S8915 in the main CPU 63 in the 89th embodiment) set in the third display data buffer 273, and the steps in the main CPU 63 in the 90th to 92nd embodiments. A function of executing the process of SC717);
By controlling the display of the specific display means so that a display corresponding to the display data corresponding to the result stored in the display storage area is performed, the display corresponding to the determination result of the assignment determining means is changed to the specific display means. (A function of executing the processing of steps SC412 to SC414 in the main CPU 63)
Initializing means (89th to 92nd) for initializing a predetermined storage area (clearing area 371 in the 89th to 92nd embodiments) including the display storage area based on the start of the supply of the operating power. A function of executing a second RAM clearing process of the main CPU 63 in the embodiment).
The display data setting means, when the supply of operating power is started, when the predetermined storage area is initialized by the initialization means, the specific correspondence display data used as the display data corresponding to the result. Correspondence setting means for setting in the display storage area (the function of executing the processing of steps SC602 and SC603 in the main CPU 63 in the 89th embodiment, and executing the processing of steps SC802 to SC805 in the main CPU 63 in the 90th embodiment) Function, in the ninth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps SC902 to SC905 in the main CPU 63, and in the ninth embodiment, steps SD102 to SD105, step SD109, step SD110, step SD113 and step SD113 in the main CPU 63. Game machine characterized by comprising a function) for executing the processing of the SD114.

  According to the feature αDI1, the display corresponding to the determination result of whether or not to grant the privilege to the player is performed by the specific display means, so that the player pays attention to the specific display means. Further, the predetermined storage area is initialized based on the start of the supply of the operation power, so that the game can be started in a state where the predetermined storage area is initialized. In this case, if the predetermined storage area is initialized when the supply of the operation power is started, display data corresponding to the result used for notifying the determination result of the assignment determining means is set in the display storage area. Is done. Thereby, even if the predetermined storage area is initialized when the supply of the operating power is started, the display content of the specific display means is displayed when the determination result of the provision determination means is notified. Content. Therefore, even when the player confirms the display content of the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started, it is possible to prevent the specification of the initialization of the predetermined storage area from being specified. Become.

Feature αDI2. Setting means for setting a set value to be used from among a plurality of set values corresponding to the player's advantage in a settable state generated based on the start of supply of operating power The function of executing the process of step SC216 of the main CPU 63 in the ninth embodiment)
The initialization unit initializes the predetermined storage area when the setting value of the use target is set by the setting unit or after the setting value of the use target is set by the setting unit. The gaming machine according to feature αDI1, characterized in that:

  According to the characteristic αDI2, when the supply of the operating power is started, the setting value of the use target is set, or when the setting value is set, a predetermined storage area is initialized, and the use target is set. When a new setting of the set value is performed, the game can be started in a situation where the predetermined storage area has been initialized. In this case, when the predetermined storage area is initialized accompanying the new setting of the setting value of the use target, the display data corresponding to the result used for notifying the determination result of the assignment determining means is displayed and stored. Set to the area. Thereby, even if the predetermined storage area is initialized when the supply of the operating power is started, the display content of the specific display means is displayed when the determination result of the provision determination means is notified. Content. Therefore, even when the player confirms the display content of the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started, it is possible to prevent the user from specifying whether a new setting of the set value of the use target has been performed. It becomes possible.

Feature αDI3. When a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied when the supply of the operation power is started (the information abnormality regarding the main RAM 65 has not occurred, and the setting update display flag and the game stop flag are not set to “1”) In the case where the “RAM clear operation” is performed in the situation), another initialization means (the second initialization means) for initializing the predetermined storage area even when the setting value of the use target is not set by the setting means. (The function of executing the first RAM clearing process of the main CPU 63 in the 89th to 92nd embodiments)
The correspondence setting means may set the specific correspondence display data in the display storage area even when the supply of operating power is started and the predetermined storage area is initialized by the separate initialization means. A gaming machine according to feature αDI2.

  According to the feature αDI3, when the supply of the operating power is started, when the predetermined initialization condition is satisfied, the predetermined storage area is initialized even if the setting value of the use target is not set. Therefore, it is possible to start a game in a situation where a predetermined storage area has been initialized, even in a situation where a new setting of a setting value to be used is not performed. In this case, regardless of whether a new setting of a setting value to be used is performed or a case where a predetermined storage area is initialized by a predetermined initialization condition being satisfied, Display data corresponding to the result used to notify the determination result is set in the display storage area. Accordingly, the display of the specific display means is performed regardless of whether a new setting of the setting value to be used is performed or a case where a predetermined storage area is initialized due to a predetermined initialization condition being satisfied. The content is the display content displayed when the determination result of the assignment determination unit is reported. Therefore, even if the player confirms the display content of the specific display means when the supply of the operation power is started, whether or not a new setting of the set value to be used is performed and the predetermined initialization condition is satisfied It is possible to make it impossible to specify whether or not it has been done.

  Feature αDI4. The specific correspondence display data is display data used in the case where it is determined by the provision determining means that the privilege is not to be provided to the player among the display data corresponding to the result, wherein The gaming machine according to any one of αDI3.

  When the game hall is closed, the power of the gaming machine is usually shut off in a state where the display content corresponding to the decision not to grant the privilege to the player is displayed on the specific display means by the grant determination means. . In this case, according to the characteristic αDI4, if the predetermined storage area is initialized when the supply of the operation power is started, the display content of the specific display means must be given to the player by the giving determination means without giving the privilege to the player. The display contents correspond to the determination. Thereby, even when the player confirms the display content of the specific display means when the supply of the operation power is started, the display content is the display content that was displayed before the supply of the operation power was stopped. Can be recognized by the player, and it can be specified whether or not the predetermined storage area has been initialized.

Feature αDI5. There are a plurality of types of the specific correspondence display data,
The correspondence setting unit sets the specific correspondence display data to be used from among a plurality of types of the specific correspondence display data in the display storage area, wherein any one of the features αDI1 to αDI4 is provided. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature αDI5, it is possible to diversify the display contents of the specific correspondence display of the specific display means when the supply of the operation power is started.

  Feature αDI6. In the case where the specific display is performed by the specific display when the supply of the operation power is started, the specific display control is performed after the specific display data is set in the display storage area. The gaming machine according to any one of features αDI1 to αDI5, which starts displaying means.

  According to the characteristic αDI6, when the supply of the operation power is started, the display content when the supply of the operation power is stopped before the specific correspondence display is performed is prevented from being performed by the specific display means. It becomes possible.

Features αDI7. When the supply of the operation power is started, the processing at the start of the supply of the operation power is executed, and the processing of initializing the predetermined storage area by the initialization means is performed at the start of the supply of the operation power. Is included in the processing of
The characteristic αDI6 according to the feature αDI6, wherein when the supply of the operation power is started, the specific display control unit starts the display of the specific display unit after the process at the start of the supply of the operation power is performed. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature αDI7, regardless of whether the predetermined storage area is initialized by the initialization means or not, the specific display means is provided at a timing after the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power is completed. Can be started.

Features αDI8. Setting means for setting a set value to be used from among a plurality of set values corresponding to the player's advantage in a settable state generated based on the start of supply of operating power The function of executing the process of step SC216 of the main CPU 63 in the ninth embodiment)
A configuration in which the initialization unit initializes the predetermined storage area when the setting value of the use target is set by the setting unit or after the setting value of the use target is set by the setting unit. And
The gaming machine according to the feature [alpha] DI7, wherein the setting of the setting value of the use target by the setting unit occurs in a state where a process at the start of supply of the operating power is being performed.

  According to the feature αDI8, whether the new setting of the setting value to be used is performed or not is performed, the timing of the specific display means is changed at the timing after the process of starting the supply of the operating power is completed. The display can be started.

  Note that, for the configuration of the features αDI1 to αDI8, the features DA1 to DA15, the features DB1 to DB7, the features DC1 to DC5, the features DD1 to DD10, the features DE1 to DE6, the features DF1 to DF3, the features DG1 to DG18, and the features DH1 to DH1. DH7, features DI1 to DI9, features DJ1 to DJ4, features DK1 to DK7, features DL1 to DL20, features DM1 to DM7, features DN1 to DN6, features DO1 to DO11, features DP1 to DP12, features DQ1 to DQ5, features DR1 to DR1. DR17, features DS1 to DS8, features DT1 to DT13, features DU1 to DU8, features DV1 to DV6, features DW1 to DW11, features DX1 to DX11, features DY1 to DY11, features DZ1 to DZ10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b1 b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e 9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 15, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y1 y9, features z1 to z6, features αDA1 to αDA10, features αDB1 to αDB6, features αDC1 to αDC13, features αDD1 to αDD9, features αDE1 to αDE5, features αDF1 to αDF9, features αDG1 to αDG10, features αDH1 to αDH11, and features αDI1 to αDI8, feature αDJ1 to αDJ14, feature αDK1 to αDK8, feature αDL1 to αDL11, feature αDM1 to αDM8, feature αDN1 αDN6, features αDO1 to αDO7, features αDP1 to αDP7, features αDQ1 to αDQ9, features αDR1 to αDR8, features αDS1 to αDS3, features αDT1 to αDT4, features αDU1 to αDU10, features αDV1 to αDV5, features αDW1 to αDW9, and features αDX1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of αDX4, features αDY1 to αDY11, features αDZ1 to αDZ4, and features αa1 to αa3 may be applied. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

<Characteristic αDJ group>
Features αDJ1. Specific display means (special figure display unit 37a, general figure display unit 38a);
Display data setting means for setting display data in the display storage areas (first display data buffer 271, third display data buffer 273) (in the 90th to 92nd embodiments, the process of step SC717 in the main CPU 63 is executed) Function, in the case of the 93rd embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S8915 in the main CPU 63);
A specific display control means for controlling the display of the specific display means so that a display corresponding to the display data stored in the display storage area is performed (a function of executing a process of steps SC412 to SC414 in the main CPU 63); ,
Initializing means (90th to 93rd) for initializing a predetermined storage area (clearing target area 371 in the 90th to 93rd embodiments) including the display storage area based on the start of the supply of the operating power. A function of executing a second RAM clearing process of the main CPU 63 in the embodiment);
Correspondence setting means for setting the display contents of the specific display means to be a specific correspondence display when the predetermined storage area is initialized by the initialization means when the supply of operating power is started (90th embodiment) In the embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps SC802 to SC805 in the main CPU 63, the function of executing the processing of steps SC902 to SC905 in the main CPU 63 in the ninth embodiment, and the step SD102 of the main CPU 63 in the ninth embodiment. -A function of executing the processing of Step SD105, Step SD109, Step SD110, Step SD113, and Step SD114, and in the 93rd embodiment, a function of executing the processing of Step SD202 to Step SD217 in the main CPU 63).
A gaming machine, wherein a plurality of types of the specific correspondence display exist.

  According to the feature αDJ1, the predetermined storage area is initialized based on the start of the supply of the operation power, so that the game can be started in a state where the predetermined storage area is initialized. It becomes possible. In this case, the display content of the specific display means when the supply of the operation power is started becomes the specific correspondence display. Then, there are a plurality of types of the specific correspondence display. Thereby, the display content of the specific display means when the predetermined storage area is initialized is diversified. Therefore, even if the display content of the specific display means is checked when the supply of the operating power is started, it is possible to make it difficult to specify whether or not the predetermined storage area has been initialized.

Feature αDJ2. The correspondence setting means includes a specific correspondence display for causing the specific display means to perform the specific correspondence display when the initialization unit initializes the predetermined storage area when the supply of operating power is started. Setting data in the display storage area,
The gaming machine according to feature αDJ1, wherein a plurality of types of the specific correspondence display data exist.

  According to the feature αDJ2, when the supply of the operating power is started, when the predetermined storage area is initialized, any one of the plurality of types of the specific correspondence display data is stored in the display storage area. By setting, the specific display is performed by the specific display means. Thereby, it is possible to cause the specific display means to perform the specific corresponding display simply by selecting one type of the specific corresponding display data from the predetermined plurality of types of the specific corresponding display data and setting it in the display storage area. Therefore, it is possible to simplify a processing configuration for causing the specific display unit to perform one type of specific corresponding display of the plurality of types of specific corresponding displays.

Features αDJ3. It is determined whether or not a privilege is to be granted to the player. When the privilege is to be granted to the player, the privilege grant information (the information of “1” set in the flag corresponding to the type of the jackpot result) is set to the predetermined value. Assignment determining means (a function of executing the process of step S508 in the main CPU 63) to be stored in the storage area;
A function for executing a process of steps S408 to S412 in the main CPU 63 for giving a privilege (open / close execution mode) to the player based on the fact that the privilege grant information is stored in the predetermined storage area. ) And
The display data setting means stores the display data (display data selected in step S507 or S509) corresponding to the determination result of the assignment determining means when the display timing of the determination result comes, in the display storage area. Set to
The specific display control unit controls the display of the specific display unit so that a display corresponding to the display data corresponding to the result stored in the display storage area is performed. Display to be performed by the specific display means,
The gaming machine according to feature αDJ2, wherein the specific correspondence display data is display data used as the result correspondence display data.

  According to the feature αDJ3, the display corresponding to the result of determining whether or not to grant the privilege to the player is performed by the specific display means, so that the player pays attention to the specific display means. In this case, when the supply of the operation power is started using the display data corresponding to the result used for notifying the determination result of the assignment determining unit, the specific display is performed by the specific display unit. Thereby, while suppressing an increase in the capacity of the display data, whether or not the predetermined storage area has been initialized even if the player has confirmed the display content of the specific display means when the supply of the operation power is started. It is possible to make it difficult to specify whether or not to do so.

  Feature αDJ4. The specific correspondence display data is display data that is used when, in the result correspondence display data, it is determined that the privilege is not to be given to the player, in the result correspondence display data, The gaming machine described.

  When the game hall is closed, the power of the gaming machine is usually shut off in a state where the display content corresponding to the decision not to grant the privilege to the player is displayed on the specific display means by the grant determination means. . In this case, according to the feature αDJ4, even if the predetermined storage area is initialized when the supply of the operation power is started, the display content of the specific display unit does not give the privilege to the player in the assignment determination unit. Will be displayed corresponding to the determination. Thereby, even when the player confirms the display content of the specific display means when the supply of the operation power is started, the display content is the display content that was displayed before the supply of the operation power was stopped. Can be recognized by the player, and it is not possible to specify whether the predetermined storage area has been initialized.

  Features αDJ5. The specific correspondence display data is, among the result correspondence display data, display data used when it is determined that the privilege is not to be given to the player by the giving determination means, and is given to the player by the giving determination means. The gaming machine according to feature αDJ3, which includes both display data used when it is determined that the privilege is to be granted.

  According to the feature αDJ5, when the supply of the operation power is started, when the predetermined storage area is initialized, when the application determining means determines that the privilege is not to be provided to the player, the display and the application determining means One of the displays in the case where it is determined to give the privilege to the player is performed by the specific display means as the specific correspondence display. Thereby, even when the player confirms the display content of the specific display means when the supply of the operation power is started, the display content is the display content that was displayed before the supply of the operation power was stopped. Can be recognized by the player, and it is not possible to specify whether the predetermined storage area has been initialized.

Feature αDJ6. Setting means for setting a set value to be used from among a plurality of set values corresponding to the player's advantage in a settable state generated based on the start of the supply of the operation power (90th to 90th sets); A function of executing the process of step SC216 of the main CPU 63 in the 93rd embodiment)
The initialization unit initializes the predetermined storage area when the setting value of the use target is set by the setting unit or after the setting value of the use target is set by the setting unit. The gaming machine according to any one of features αDJ1 to αDJ5.

  According to the feature αDJ6, when the setting of the use target is set when the supply of the operation power is started, or when a predetermined storage area is initialized accompanying the setting, the use target is set. When a new setting of the set value is performed, the game can be started in a situation where the predetermined storage area has been initialized. In this case, when the predetermined storage area is initialized in association with the new setting of the setting value to be used, one of the plurality of types of specific correspondence displays is displayed by the specific display means. Done. As a result, the display content of the specific display means when a new setting of the use target setting value is performed is diversified, and when the supply of the operation power is started, the player can display the specific display means. Even if the content is confirmed, it is possible to prevent the user from specifying whether a new setting of the setting value to be used has been performed.

Features αDJ7. When a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied when the supply of the operation power is started (the information abnormality regarding the main RAM 65 has not occurred, and the setting update display flag and the game stop flag are not set to “1”) In the case where the "RAM clear operation" is performed in the situation), the separate initialization means (90th to 90th) for initializing the predetermined storage area even when the setting value is not set by the setting means. A function of executing the first RAM clearing process of the main CPU 63 in the 93rd embodiment)
The correspondence setting unit is configured to execute the use by the setting unit when the supply of operating power is started, when the predetermined storage area is initialized by the separate initializing unit, and when the supply of operating power is started. The gaming machine according to feature αDJ6, wherein the display content of the specific display means is a specific correspondence display in any case where a target set value is set.

  According to the feature αDJ7, when the supply of the operating power is started, when the predetermined initialization condition is satisfied, the predetermined storage area is initialized even if the setting value is not set. Even if a new setting of a set value is not performed, a game can be started in a state where a predetermined storage area is initialized. In this case, the specific correspondence display is performed by the specific display means regardless of whether a new setting of the set value is performed or whether a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied and a predetermined storage area is initialized. Done. Thereby, even if the player checks the display content of the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started, whether or not a new setting of the set value has been performed and whether the predetermined initialization condition has been satisfied It is possible to make it impossible to specify whether or not to do so.

  Feature αDJ8. The correspondence setting means may change the display content of the specific display means to the specific correspondence display even when the supply of the operating power is started and the predetermined storage area is not initialized by the initialization means. The gaming machine according to any one of the features αDJ1 to αDJ7.

  According to the feature αDJ8, the specific display is performed by the specific display means both when the predetermined storage area is initialized when the supply of the operation power is started and when the predetermined storage area is not initialized. Thereby, even if the player checks the display content of the specific display means when the supply of the operation power is started, it is not possible to specify whether or not the predetermined storage area has been initialized by the initialization means. It is possible to do.

  Features αDJ9. The correspondence setting unit is configured to supply the operating power in a predetermined regulation state (during the execution of the game round, during the execution of the opening / closing execution mode, during the execution of the variable display time on the general-purpose display unit 38a, and during the execution of the general-power release state). If the predetermined storage area is not initialized by the initialization means when the supply of the operating power is started after the operation is stopped, the specific correspondence display data for causing the specific correspondence display to be performed. Is not set in the display storage area, the gaming machine according to the feature αDJ8.

  According to the feature αDJ9, when the supply of the operating power is stopped in the predetermined regulation situation, and when the supply of the operating power is started thereafter, the display storage area is not initialized. Is not set in the display storage area, the display data when the supply of the operation power is stopped is stored and held as it is. Thereby, when the supply of the operating power is stopped in the predetermined regulation situation, and when the supply of the operating power is started thereafter, and the predetermined storage area is not initialized, the supply of the operating power is stopped. The display of the specific display unit can be started from the display content of the specific display unit when the display is stopped.

Features αDJ10. The specific display control means is for controlling the display of the specific display means so that a display corresponding to the determination result of the giving determination means is performed after the variable display of the pattern is started,
The correspondence setting unit is configured to perform the initialization when the supply of the operating power is stopped in a situation where the pattern display is performed by the specific display unit and the supply of the operating power is started thereafter. The gaming machine according to the feature αDJ8 or αDJ9, wherein when the predetermined storage area is not initialized by the means, the specific correspondence display data for performing the specific correspondence display is not set in the display storage area. .

  According to the feature αDJ10, when the supply of the operation power is stopped in a situation where the pattern display is being performed by the specific display means and the supply of the operation power is started thereafter, the predetermined storage area is determined. Is not initialized, the specific correspondence display data is not set in the display storage area, so that the display data when the supply of the operation power is stopped is stored and held in the display storage area as it is. Thereby, the predetermined storage area is initialized when the supply of the operating power is stopped in a situation where the pattern display is being performed on the specific display means, and thereafter, when the supply of the operating power is started. If not, it is possible to restart the variable display of the picture on the specific display means.

Features αDJ11. The privilege granting means, when the privilege granting information is stored in the predetermined storage area, grants the privilege after a display corresponding to the granting of the privilege is performed on the specific display means. Things,
The correspondence setting unit may be configured to execute the initialization by the initialization unit when the supply of the operating power is stopped in a situation where the privilege is given by the privilege granting unit, and thereafter, when the supply of the operating power is started. The game according to any one of the features αDJ8 to αDJ10, wherein when the predetermined storage area is not initialized, the specific correspondence display data for performing the specific correspondence display is not set in the display storage area. Machine.

  According to the feature αDJ11, when the supply of the operating power is stopped in the situation where the privilege is given, and when the predetermined storage area is not initialized when the supply of the operating power is started thereafter. Since the specific correspondence display data is not set in the display storage area, the display data when the supply of the operation power is stopped is stored and held in the display storage area as it is. Thereby, if the supply of the operating power is stopped in the situation where the privilege is given, and if the predetermined storage area is not initialized when the supply of the operating power is started thereafter, the privilege It is possible to start the display of the specific display means from the display content corresponding to the situation where is given.

  Features αDJ12. In the case where the specific display is performed by the specific display when the supply of the operating power is started, the specific display control starts the display of the specific display in a state where the specific display is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of the features αDJ1 to αDJ11.

  According to the feature αDJ12, when the supply of the operation power is started, the display content when the supply of the operation power is stopped before the specific corresponding display is performed is prevented from being performed by the specific display means. It becomes possible.

Features αDJ13. When the supply of the operation power is started, the processing at the start of the supply of the operation power is executed, and the processing of initializing the predetermined storage area by the initialization means is performed at the start of the supply of the operation power. Is included in the processing of
The characteristic αDJ12 according to the feature αDJ12, wherein, when the supply of the operation power is started, the specific display control unit starts the display of the specific display unit after the process at the start of the supply of the operation power is performed. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature αDJ13, regardless of whether the predetermined storage area is initialized by the initialization means or not, the specific display means is provided at the timing after the processing at the start of the supply of the operation power is completed. Can be started.

Features αDJ14. Setting means for setting a set value to be used from among a plurality of set values corresponding to the player's advantage in a settable state generated based on the start of the supply of the operation power (90th to 90th sets); A function of executing the process of step SC216 of the main CPU 63 in the 93rd embodiment)
A configuration in which the initialization unit initializes the predetermined storage area when the setting value of the use target is set by the setting unit or after the setting value of the use target is set by the setting unit. And
The gaming machine according to the feature αDJ13, wherein the setting of the setting value of the use target by the setting unit occurs in a state where a process at the time of starting supply of the operating power is being performed.

  According to the feature αDJ14, whether the setting value of the use target is newly set or not set, the specific display unit performs the operation at the timing after the process of starting the supply of the operation power ends. The display can be started.

  Note that, for the configuration of the features αDJ1 to αDJ14, the features DA1 to DA15, the features DB1 to DB7, the features DC1 to DC5, the features DD1 to DD10, the features DE1 to DE6, the features DF1 to DF3, the features DG1 to DG18, and the features DH1 to DH1 DH7, features DI1 to DI9, features DJ1 to DJ4, features DK1 to DK7, features DL1 to DL20, features DM1 to DM7, features DN1 to DN6, features DO1 to DO11, features DP1 to DP12, features DQ1 to DQ5, features DR1 to DR1. DR17, features DS1 to DS8, features DT1 to DT13, features DU1 to DU8, features DV1 to DV6, features DW1 to DW11, features DX1 to DX11, features DY1 to DY11, features DZ1 to DZ10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b1 b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 15, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o1 o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y1 y9, features z1 to z6, features αDA1 to αDA10, features αDB1 to αDB6, features αDC1 to αDC13, features αDD1 to αDD9, features αDE1 to αDE5, features αDF1 to αDF9, features αDG1 to αDG10, features αDH1 to αDH11, and features αDI1 to αDI8, feature αDJ1 to αDJ14, feature αDK1 to αDK8, feature αDL1 to αDL11, feature αDM1 to αDM8, feature αDN To αDN6, features αDO1 to αDO7, features αDP1 to αDP7, features αDQ1 to αDQ9, features αDR1 to αDR8, features αDS1 to αDS3, features αDT1 to αDT4, features αDU1 to αDU10, features αDV1 to αDV5, features αDW1 to αDW9, and features αDX1. To αDX4, features αDY1 to αDY11, features αDZ1 to αDZ4, and features αa1 to αa3. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

<Characteristic αDK group>
Features αDK1. Specific display means (special figure display unit 37a, general figure display unit 38a);
It is determined whether or not a privilege is to be granted to the player. When the privilege is to be granted to the player, the privilege providing information (information of "1" set in a flag corresponding to the type of the big hit result) is stored in a predetermined storage. An addition determining unit (a function of executing the processing of step S508 in the main CPU 63) to be stored in the area (the clear target area 371 in the 93rd embodiment);
Privilege granting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S408 to S412 in the main CPU 63) for granting a privilege (open / close execution mode) to the player based on the fact that the privilege grant information is stored in the predetermined storage area. )When,
When the display timing of the determination result comes, the display data (display data selected in step S507 or S509) corresponding to the determination result of the assignment determining unit is stored in the display storage area (first display data buffer 271, Display data setting means (a function of executing the process of step S8915 in the main CPU 63) to be set in the third display data buffer 273);
By controlling the display of the specific display means so that a display corresponding to the display data corresponding to the result stored in the display storage area is performed, the display corresponding to the determination result of the assignment determining means is changed to the specific display means. (A function of executing the processing of steps SC412 to SC414 in the main CPU 63)
Initializing means (the main CPU 63 in the 93rd embodiment) for initializing a predetermined storage area (the clear target area 371 in the 93rd embodiment) including the display storage area based on the start of the supply of the operating power. A function of executing the second RAM clearing process);
Correspondence setting means (main CPU 63) for setting the display content of the specific display means to a specific correspondence display when the predetermined storage area is initialized by the initialization means when the supply of operating power is started. A function of executing the processing of steps SD202 to SD217).
There are a plurality of types of the specific correspondence display,
The gaming machine, wherein the plurality of types of the specific correspondence display include display contents that are not selected as the display corresponding to the determination result of the assignment determining unit.

  According to the feature αDK1, a predetermined storage area is initialized based on the start of the supply of the operation power, so that the game can be started in a state where the predetermined storage area is initialized. It becomes possible. In this case, the display content of the specific display means when the supply of the operation power is started becomes the specific correspondence display. In addition, there are a plurality of types of the specific correspondence displays, and the plurality of types of the specific correspondence displays include display contents that are not selected as the displays corresponding to the determination results of the assignment determining unit. Thereby, the display content of the specific display means when the predetermined storage area is initialized is diversified. Therefore, even if the display content of the specific display means is checked when the supply of the operating power is started, it is possible to make it difficult to specify whether or not the predetermined storage area has been initialized.

  Features αDK2. The plurality of types of specific correspondence displays include display content that can be selected as a display corresponding to the determination result of the assignment determining unit, and display content that is not selected as a display corresponding to the determination result of the assignment determining unit. The gaming machine according to feature αDK1, wherein

  According to the feature αDK2, since a plurality of types of specific correspondence displays include both display contents that can be selected as the display corresponding to the determination result of the assignment determining unit and display contents that are not selected, the predetermined storage area is initially set. In this case, it is possible to diversify the display content of the specific display means.

Features αDK3. The specific display unit has a plurality of light emitting units,
The correspondence setting unit executes a lottery process (step SD204, step SD212) for individually setting a lighting state of each of the plurality of light emitting units, and a result of the lottery process for each of the plurality of light emitting units. The gaming machine according to the feature αDK1 or αDK2, wherein the specific correspondence display is performed by setting display data of a lighting pattern corresponding to the display pattern in the display storage area.

  According to the feature αDK3, a lottery process is performed to determine whether or not each of the plurality of light emitting units in the specific display unit is to be turned on, and the display content of the lighting pattern corresponding to the result of the lottery process is stored in a predetermined storage area. Is displayed on the specific display means as a specific correspondence display when the is initialized. This makes it possible to diversify the display content of the specific display means when the predetermined storage area is initialized, and to change the display content of the specific display means when the predetermined storage area is initialized. It becomes possible to make it regular.

Features αDK4. Setting means for setting a set value to be used from among a plurality of set values corresponding to the player's advantage in a settable state generated based on the start of supply of the operating power (the 93rd embodiment Function of executing the process of step SC216 of the main CPU 63 in the embodiment.
The initialization unit initializes the predetermined storage area when the setting value of the use target is set by the setting unit or after the setting value of the use target is set by the setting unit. The gaming machine according to any one of the features αDK1 to αDK3.

  According to the feature αDK4, when the setting of the use target is set when the supply of the operation power is started, or when a predetermined storage area is initialized accompanying the setting, the use of the use target is set. When a new setting of the set value is performed, the game can be started in a situation where the predetermined storage area has been initialized. In this case, when the predetermined storage area is initialized in association with the new setting of the setting value to be used, one of the plurality of types of specific correspondence displays is displayed by the specific display means. Done. As a result, the display content of the specific display means when a new setting of the use target setting value is performed is diversified, and when the supply of the operation power is started, the player can display the specific display means. Even if the content is confirmed, it is possible to prevent the user from specifying whether a new setting of the setting value to be used has been performed.

Features αDK5. When a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied when the supply of the operation power is started (the information abnormality regarding the main RAM 65 has not occurred, and the setting update display flag and the game stop flag are not set to “1”) In the case where the “RAM clear operation” is performed in the situation), another initialization means (the second initialization means) for initializing the predetermined storage area even when the setting value of the use target is not set by the setting means. A function of executing the first RAM clearing process of the main CPU 63 in the 93rd embodiment)
The correspondence setting unit is configured to perform the use by the setting unit when the predetermined storage area is initialized by the separate initialization unit when the supply of operation power is started and when the supply of operation power is started. The gaming machine according to feature αDK4, wherein the display content of the specific display means is a specific correspondence display in any case where a target set value is set.

  According to the feature αDK5, when the supply of the operation power is started, when the predetermined initialization condition is satisfied, the predetermined storage area is initialized even if the setting value is not set. Even if a new setting of a set value is not performed, a game can be started in a state where a predetermined storage area is initialized. In this case, the specific correspondence display is performed by the specific display means regardless of whether a new setting of the set value is performed or whether a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied and a predetermined storage area is initialized. Done. Thereby, even if the player checks the display content of the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started, whether or not a new setting of the set value has been performed and whether the predetermined initialization condition has been satisfied It is possible to make it impossible to specify whether or not to do so.

  Features αDK6. In the case where the specific display is performed by the specific display when the supply of the operating power is started, the specific display control starts the display of the specific display in a state where the specific display is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of the features αDK1 to αDK5.

  According to the feature αDK6, when the supply of the operation power is started, the display content when the supply of the operation power is stopped before the specific correspondence display is performed is prevented from being performed by the specific display unit. It becomes possible.

Features αDK7. When the supply of the operation power is started, the processing at the start of the supply of the operation power is executed, and the processing of initializing the predetermined storage area by the initialization means is performed at the start of the supply of the operation power. Is included in the processing of
The specific αDK6 according to the feature αDK6, wherein, when the supply of the operation power is started, the specific display control unit starts the display of the specific display unit after the process at the start of the supply of the operation power is performed. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature αDK7, regardless of whether the predetermined storage area is initialized by the initialization means or not, the specific display means is provided at the timing after the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power is completed. Can be started.

Features αDK8. Setting means for setting a set value to be used from among a plurality of set values corresponding to the player's advantage in a settable state generated based on the start of the supply of the operation power (88th embodiment Function of executing the process of step SC216 of the main CPU 63 in the embodiment.
A configuration in which the initialization unit initializes the predetermined storage area when the setting value of the use target is set by the setting unit or after the setting value of the use target is set by the setting unit. And
The gaming machine according to the feature [alpha] DK7, wherein the setting of the set value of the use target by the setting unit occurs in a state where a process at the time of starting supply of the operating power is being performed.

  According to the feature αDK8, regardless of whether a new setting of a setting value to be used is performed or not, the specific display unit performs processing at the timing after the processing at the time of starting the supply of the operation power ends. The display can be started.

  Note that, for the configuration of the features αDK1 to αDK8, the features DA1 to DA15, the features DB1 to DB7, the features DC1 to DC5, the features DD1 to DD10, the features DE1 to DE6, the features DF1 to DF3, the features DG1 to DG18, and the features DH1 to DH1 DH7, features DI1 to DI9, features DJ1 to DJ4, features DK1 to DK7, features DL1 to DL20, features DM1 to DM7, features DN1 to DN6, features DO1 to DO11, features DP1 to DP12, features DQ1 to DQ5, features DR1 to DR1. DR17, features DS1 to DS8, features DT1 to DT13, features DU1 to DU8, features DV1 to DV6, features DW1 to DW11, features DX1 to DX11, features DY1 to DY11, features DZ1 to DZ10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b1 b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e 9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 15, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y1 y9, features z1 to z6, features αDA1 to αDA10, features αDB1 to αDB6, features αDC1 to αDC13, features αDD1 to αDD9, features αDE1 to αDE5, features αDF1 to αDF9, features αDG1 to αDG10, features αDH1 to αDH11, and features αDI1 to αDI8, feature αDJ1 to αDJ14, feature αDK1 to αDK8, feature αDL1 to αDL11, feature αDM1 to αDM8, feature αDN1 αDN6, features αDO1 to αDO7, features αDP1 to αDP7, features αDQ1 to αDQ9, features αDR1 to αDR8, features αDS1 to αDS3, features αDT1 to αDT4, features αDU1 to αDU10, features αDV1 to αDV5, features αDW1 to αDW9, and features αDX1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of αDX4, features αDY1 to αDY11, features αDZ1 to αDZ4, and features αa1 to αa3 may be applied. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

  According to the inventions relating to the above-mentioned feature αDF group, the above-mentioned feature αDG group, the above-mentioned feature αDH group, the above-mentioned feature αDI group, the above-mentioned feature αDJ group, and the above-mentioned feature αDK group, the following problems can be solved.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine has a dish storage section for storing game balls given to a player on the front face of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to a game ball launching device, It is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage unit, for example. Further, in a pachinko machine, a configuration including an upper dish storage section and a lower dish storage section as a dish storage section is also known. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper dish storage section is a game ball launching device. And the surplus game balls in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  Further, in the slot machine, when a new game is started by operating the start lever while a medal is bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation of the reel is started by the rotation start control being executed by the control means, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means executes the rotation start control. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation stop of the reels corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in the gaming machine as exemplified above, it is necessary to make the operation at the start of the supply of the operating power suitable, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Characteristic αDL group>
Features αDL1. Specific display means (special figure display unit 37a, general figure display unit 38a);
A specific display control unit (a function of executing processing of steps SC412 to SC414 in the main CPU 63) for controlling display of the specific display unit;
Setting means for setting a set value to be used from among a plurality of set values corresponding to the player's advantage in a settable state generated based on the start of the supply of the operating power (94th to 94th) A function of executing the process of step SC216 of the main CPU 63 in the 95th embodiment).
The specific display control unit is configured to set the setting value to be used by the setting unit, and to set a value or operation that is equal to or more than the advantage of the setting value before the supply of operation power is stopped. Based on the fact that a setting value that is more advantageous than the setting value before the supply of power is stopped is set as the setting value to be used by the setting unit, which is one of the suggestion target situations. In the case where the supply of the operating power is started, the display content of the specific display means is determined in accordance with the suggestion target situation (a mode that refers to the second display distribution table 392 for a special figure, a mode for a general figure). (2) In the ninety-fourth embodiment, the processes of steps SD402 to SD411 in the main CPU 63 are executed by the 2nd display distribution table 394. Ability, the gaming machine characterized by comprising a function) for executing the process of step SD502 in the main side CPU63 in the 95th embodiment.

  According to the feature αDL1, by confirming the display content of the specific display unit when the supply of the operation power is started, a new setting of a setting value to be used is performed, or a setting to be used is set. It is possible to predict that the value advantage is equal to or higher than the previous value of the set value or higher than the previous value of the set value. This makes it possible for the player to make a prediction regarding the set value by using the display content of the specific display means, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Features αDL2. The aspect determining means may be a set value that is equal to or more than the advantage of the set value before the supply of the operation power is stopped or a set value that is more advantageous than the set value before the supply of the operation power is stopped. When the supply of the operating power is started based on the setting value set by the setting unit as a target to be used, the display content of the specific display unit is determined in a determination mode corresponding to the suggestion target situation, and the operation is performed. In the case where the supply of the operating power is started based on the setting value lower than the advantage of the setting value before the power supply is stopped being set by the setting unit as the setting value to be used. The display content of the specific display means is determined according to the non-suggesting target situation (a mode in which the first display distribution table 391 for special maps is referred to, a first display distribution table for ordinary drawings). The gaming machine according to the features αDL1, characterized by determining at 393 manner that reference).

  According to the feature αDL2, when the advantage of the set value to be used is equal to or more than the advantage of the set value up to that time or higher than the advantage of the set value up to that time, the determination mode corresponding to the suggestion target situation When the display content of the specific display means is determined at the same time, and the advantage of the setting value to be used becomes lower than the previous setting value, the specific display means is determined in a determination mode corresponding to the non-suggesting target situation. The display content is determined. This makes it easy to predict whether or not the advantage of the set value to be used is equal to or greater than the advantage of the set value up to that time or higher than the advantage of the set value up to that time.

  Features αDL3. The aspect determining means may display the display content of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started based on the fact that the setting value to be used by the setting means has not been set by the non-indicating target. The gaming machine according to feature αDL2, wherein the gaming machine is determined in a determination mode corresponding to a situation.

  According to the feature αDL3, even when the supply of the operation power is started, the supply of the operation power is started in a determination mode corresponding to the non-suggestion target situation even when a new setting of the set value to be used is not performed. When the display content of the specific display means is determined in a determination mode corresponding to the non-suggested target situation, the display content of the specific display means in the case of being determined is determined. This makes it impossible to identify whether the setting has not been performed or whether the setting value to be used has a lower advantage than before.

  Feature αDL4. The aspect determining means may determine the display content of the specific display means by lottery according to a lottery mode corresponding to the suggestion target situation when the suggestion target situation is present, wherein any one of the features αDL1 to αDL3 is provided. A gaming machine according to claim 1.

  According to the feature αDL4, it is possible to diversify the display content of the specific display means in the suggestion target situation. As a result, even if the specific display means is confirmed, it is possible to make it impossible to clearly specify whether or not the situation is a suggestion target situation.

  Features αDL5. The aspect determining means determines the display content of the specific display means by lottery according to a lottery mode corresponding to the non-suggesting target situation when the non-suggesting target situation is a non-suggesting target situation. The gaming machine according to feature αDL4.

  According to the feature αDL5, it is possible to diversify the display content of the specific display means in the non-suggestion target situation. As a result, even if the specific display means is confirmed, it is possible to make it impossible to clearly specify whether or not the situation is a non-suggestion target situation.

  Feature αDL6. A display content that can be selected by lottery of the display content of the specific display means in a lottery mode corresponding to the suggestion target situation and a display content of the specific display means that is selected by lottery in a lottery mode corresponding to the non-suggestion target situation Common display contents (first to third initial display for special figure, first to third initial display for general figure) are present in any of the display contents that can be performed, and the selection probability of the common display contents is low. The gaming machine according to feature αDL5, wherein a difference is made between a case of a lottery mode corresponding to the suggestion target situation and a case of a lottery mode corresponding to the non-suggestion target situation.

  According to the feature αDL6, since the common display content is displayed on the specific display means in any of the suggestion target situation and the non-suggestion target situation, it is clear which is the suggestion target situation or the non-suggestion target situation. Can not be specified. On the other hand, the selection probability of the common display contents differs between the case of the suggestion target situation and the case of the non-suggestion target situation. It is possible to predict whether there is.

Features αDL7. A display data setting unit (a function of executing the process of step S8915 in the main CPU 63) for setting display data in the display storage area;
The specific display control means controls the display of the specific display means so that a display corresponding to the display data stored in the display storage area is performed,
Initialization for initializing a predetermined storage area including the display storage area when the setting value of the use target is set by the setting unit or after the setting value of the use target is set by the setting unit. The gaming machine according to any one of features αDL1 to αDL6, comprising means (a function of executing a second RAM clear process of the main CPU 63 in the 94th to 95th embodiments).

  According to the feature αDL7, when the supply of the operating power is started, the setting value of the use target is set, or when the setting value is set, a predetermined storage area is initialized, thereby setting the use target. When a new setting of the set value is performed, the game can be started in a situation where the predetermined storage area has been initialized. In this case, by providing the configuration of the feature αDL1, the suggestion target situation is displayed by the display contents of the specific display means, utilizing the situation in which the display storage area is initialized with the initialization of the predetermined storage area. Can be predicted.

Features αDL8. When a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied when the supply of the operating power is started (the information abnormality regarding the main RAM 65 has not occurred, and the setting update display flag and the game stop flag are not set to “1”) If the "RAM clear operation" is performed in the situation), another initialization means (the function of executing the first RAM clear processing of the main CPU 63 in the 94th to 95th embodiments) for initializing the predetermined storage area is provided. Prepare,
When the predetermined storage area is initialized by the separate initialization means, the aspect determination means determines the display content of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started, in accordance with the non-suggestion target situation. The gaming machine according to Feature αDL7, wherein the gaming machine is determined in an aspect.

  According to the feature αDL8, when the supply of the operation power is started and the predetermined initialization condition is satisfied, the predetermined storage area is initialized, so that the game is performed in a state where the predetermined storage area is initialized. Can be started. In this case, when the predetermined storage area is initialized by the separate initialization unit, the display content of the specific display unit when the supply of the operation power is started is determined in a determination mode corresponding to the non-suggestion target situation. Therefore, it is easy to predict whether or not the situation is a suggestion target.

Features αDL9. It is determined whether or not a privilege is to be granted to the player. When the privilege is to be granted to the player, the privilege providing information (information of "1" set in a flag corresponding to the type of the big hit result) is stored in a predetermined storage. Assignment determining means (function of executing the process of step S508 in the main CPU 63) to be stored in the area;
A function for executing a process of steps S408 to S412 in the main CPU 63 for giving a privilege (open / close execution mode) to the player based on the fact that the privilege grant information is stored in the predetermined storage area. ) And
The gaming machine according to any one of the features αDL1 to αDL8, wherein the specific display control means causes the display corresponding to the determination result of the assignment determination means to be performed by the specific display means.

  According to the feature αDL9, the display corresponding to the determination result of whether or not to grant the privilege to the player is performed by the specific display means, so that the player pays attention to the specific display means. In this case, the provision of the configuration of the characteristic αDL1 makes it possible to achieve the above-described excellent effects by using the specific display unit.

  Features αDL10. The display content of the specific display means determined in the determination mode corresponding to the suggestion target situation is a display content that is not displayed when the display corresponding to the determination result of the assignment determination means is performed by the specific display means. The gaming machine according to feature αDL9.

  According to the feature αDL10, it is possible to distinguish the display content determined in the determination mode corresponding to the suggestion target situation from the display content corresponding to the determination result of the assignment determining unit.

  Features αDL11. The specific display control means, when the supply of the operating power is started, when the display according to the display content determined by the mode determining means is performed by the specific display means, the display content determined by the mode determining means The gaming machine according to any one of the features αDL1 to αDL10, wherein the display of the specific display means is started in a state where the display is performed.

  According to the feature αDL11, when the supply of the operation power is started, the display of the display content when the supply of the operation power is stopped before the display based on the display content determined by the mode determination unit is performed, is displayed on the specific display unit. Can be prevented from being performed.

  In addition, for the configuration of the features αDL1 to αDL11, the features DA1 to DA15, the features DB1 to DB7, the features DC1 to DC5, the features DD1 to DD10, the features DE1 to DE6, the features DF1 to DF3, the features DG1 to DG18, and the features DH1 to DH1. DH7, features DI1 to DI9, features DJ1 to DJ4, features DK1 to DK7, features DL1 to DL20, features DM1 to DM7, features DN1 to DN6, features DO1 to DO11, features DP1 to DP12, features DQ1 to DQ5, features DR1 to DR1. DR17, features DS1 to DS8, features DT1 to DT13, features DU1 to DU8, features DV1 to DV6, features DW1 to DW11, features DX1 to DX11, features DY1 to DY11, features DZ1 to DZ10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b1 b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 15, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o1 o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y1 y9, features z1 to z6, features αDA1 to αDA10, features αDB1 to αDB6, features αDC1 to αDC13, features αDD1 to αDD9, features αDE1 to αDE5, features αDF1 to αDF9, features αDG1 to αDG10, features αDH1 to αDH11, and features αDI1 to αDI8, feature αDJ1 to αDJ14, feature αDK1 to αDK8, feature αDL1 to αDL11, feature αDM1 to αDM8, feature αDN To αDN6, features αDO1 to αDO7, features αDP1 to αDP7, features αDQ1 to αDQ9, features αDR1 to αDR8, features αDS1 to αDS3, features αDT1 to αDT4, features αDU1 to αDU10, features αDV1 to αDV5, features αDW1 to αDW9, and features αDX1. To αDX4, features αDY1 to αDY11, features αDZ1 to αDZ4, and features αa1 to αa3. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

  According to the invention relating to the above-described feature αDL group, the following problem can be solved.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine has a dish storage section for storing game balls given to a player on the front face of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to a game ball launching device, It is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage unit, for example. Further, in a pachinko machine, a configuration including an upper dish storage section and a lower dish storage section as a dish storage section is also known. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper dish storage section is a game ball launching device. And the surplus game balls in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  Further, in the slot machine, when a new game is started by operating the start lever while a medal is bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation of the reel is started by the rotation start control being executed by the control means, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means executes the rotation start control. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation stop of the reels corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in the gaming machines as exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic αDM group>
Features αDM1. Setting means (a function of executing the process of step SB311 in the main CPU 63) for setting a set value to be used from among a plurality of set values corresponding to the player's advantage;
A corresponding operation control unit that sets a state of a predetermined area that can be visually recognized from the front of the gaming machine as a corresponding operation state in a state where predetermined setting-related processing (setting value update processing, setting confirmation processing) relating to the set value is being performed; (In the 96th embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps SE304, SE305, SE308, and SE309 in the main CPU 63; in the 97th embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps SE604 and SE607 in the main CPU 63; In the 98th embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps SE704, SE707, SE802, and SE816 in the main CPU 63, and in the 99th embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps SE904 and SE907 in the main CPU 63. Game machine characterized by comprising a, a function) for displaying control 15DR display unit 481,6DR display unit 483 and the small win display unit 484 in the main side CPU63 in the 100 embodiment.

  According to the feature αDM1, since a setting value to be used is set from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage, the player can use a more advantageous setting value. That you expect. In this case, in a situation where the predetermined setting-related processing relating to the set value is being executed, the state of the predetermined area that can be visually recognized from the front of the gaming machine is the corresponding operation state. As a result, the manager of the gaming hall can easily grasp whether or not the predetermined setting-related process is being executed.

Feature αDM2. Predetermined operation means provided in the predetermined area which can be visually recognized from the front of the gaming machine (in the 97th embodiment, a general-purpose display section 423a, a first special-figure display section 425, a second special-figure display section 426, and a special display section 429) In the ninety-ninth embodiment, a first special figure display unit 425 and a second special figure display unit 426) are provided.
In the situation where the predetermined setting-related processing is being executed, the corresponding operation control means sets the operation state of the predetermined operation means to an operation state that does not occur when a game is being executed, thereby setting the predetermined area to the predetermined state. The gaming machine according to Feature αDM1, wherein the state is the corresponding operation state.

  According to the feature αDM2, the operation state of the predetermined operation means is a state in which the operation does not occur when the game is being executed in a situation where the predetermined setting-related processing is being executed. Thus, it is possible to execute notification indicating that a predetermined setting-related process is being executed by using the predetermined operation means that operates when the game is being executed.

Features αDM3. A plurality of predetermined operation means (the first special figure display unit 425, the second special figure display unit 426, and the special display unit 429 in the 96th embodiment, and the common display unit in the 97th embodiment) Figure display section 423a, general figure reservation display section 423b, first special figure display section 425, second special figure display section 426, first special figure reservation display section 427, second special figure reservation display section 428, and special display section 429. , The 98th embodiment includes a special electric winning device 416, a first special figure display unit 425 and a second special figure display unit 426, and the 100th embodiment includes a 15DR display unit 481, a 6DR display unit 483, and a small hit display unit 484). ,
3. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the corresponding operation control means sets a combination of operation states of the plurality of predetermined operation means as the corresponding operation state.

  According to the feature αDM3, a notification indicating that a predetermined setting-related process is being executed is performed using a combination of the operation states of the plurality of predetermined operation units. Thus, it is possible to make it difficult to illegally perform notification that the predetermined setting-related process is being performed.

  Feature αDM4. The gaming machine according to feature αDM3, wherein the corresponding operation state is an operation state of a combination that does not occur when a game is being executed among combinations of operation states of the plurality of predetermined operation units.

  According to the feature αDM4, a notification indicating that a predetermined setting-related process is being executed by setting a combination of operation states of a plurality of predetermined operation means to a combination that does not occur when a game is being executed. Is executed. Thereby, it is possible to execute a notification indicating that a predetermined setting-related process is being executed by using a plurality of predetermined operation means operating when a game is being executed.

  Feature αDM5. Each individual operation state in the corresponding operation state of the plurality of predetermined operation means is an operation state that can occur when a game is executed, while those individual operation states occur simultaneously when a game is executed. The gaming machine according to feature αDM4, wherein the gaming machine is in an operation state in which the game machine does not perform the operation.

  According to the feature αDM5, each of the individual operation states in the corresponding operation state of the plurality of predetermined operation means is an operation state that can occur when the game is executed, and thus occurs when the game is executed. Using the obtained operation state, it is possible to execute notification indicating that the predetermined setting-related processing is being executed.

  Feature αDM6. The gaming machine according to any one of the features αDM3 to αDM5, wherein the first predetermined operation means of the plurality of predetermined operation means is a display means, and the second predetermined operation means is a movable means.

  According to the feature αDM6, the notification indicating that the predetermined setting-related process is being performed is performed by the combination of the individual operation states of the display unit and the movable unit, so that the predetermined setting-related process is executed. It is easy to grasp that the situation is being done.

Features αDM7. The corresponding operation control means,
In a situation in which a first setting-related process is being executed as the predetermined setting-related process, a first corresponding operation control unit that sets a combination of operating states of the plurality of predetermined operating units as the corresponding operation state to a first corresponding operation state. (In the 96th embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step SE304 and step SE305 in the main CPU 63, in the 97th embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step SE604 in the main CPU 63, and in the 98th embodiment, the function of the main CPU 63. SE704, a function of executing the processing of step SE802 and step SE816, and a function of controlling the display of the 15DR display unit 481 and the small hit display unit 484 in the main CPU 63 in the 100th embodiment);
In a situation where a second setting-related process is being executed as the predetermined setting-related process, a second corresponding operation control unit that sets a combination of operating states of the plurality of predetermined operating units as the corresponding operation state to a second corresponding operation state. (In the 96th embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps SE308 and SE309 in the main CPU 63, in the 97th embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step SE607 in the main CPU 63, and in the 98th embodiment, the function of the main CPU 63. (The function of executing the processing of SE707, step SE802, and step SE816, and the function of controlling the display of the 15DR display unit 481 and the 6DR display unit 483 in the main CPU 63 in the 100th embodiment). The play according to any one of αDM3 to αDM6 Technical machine.

  According to the feature αDM7, the fact that the first setting-related process is being executed and the second setting-related process are being executed using the combination of the operating states of the plurality of predetermined operation means. It is possible to execute each of the notification of the fact.

Feature αDM8. The first setting-related processing is processing that enables the setting unit to set the setting value to be used,
The gaming machine according to feature αDM7, wherein the second setting-related processing is processing for notifying the current setting value.

  According to the feature αDM8, it is notified that the process of enabling the setting of the setting value to be used by using the combination of the operation states of the plurality of predetermined operation means is being executed, and the object is to be used. It is possible to execute each of the notification that the process for making the setting value be notified is being performed.

  Note that, for the configuration of the features αDM1 to αDM8, the features DA1 to DA15, the features DB1 to DB7, the features DC1 to DC5, the features DD1 to DD10, the features DE1 to DE6, the features DF1 to DF3, the features DG1 to DG18, and the features DH1 to DH1. DH7, features DI1 to DI9, features DJ1 to DJ4, features DK1 to DK7, features DL1 to DL20, features DM1 to DM7, features DN1 to DN6, features DO1 to DO11, features DP1 to DP12, features DQ1 to DQ5, features DR1 to DR1. DR17, features DS1 to DS8, features DT1 to DT13, features DU1 to DU8, features DV1 to DV6, features DW1 to DW11, features DX1 to DX11, features DY1 to DY11, features DZ1 to DZ10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b1 b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e 9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 15, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y1 y9, features z1 to z6, features αDA1 to αDA10, features αDB1 to αDB6, features αDC1 to αDC13, features αDD1 to αDD9, features αDE1 to αDE5, features αDF1 to αDF9, features αDG1 to αDG10, features αDH1 to αDH11, and features αDI1 to αDI8, feature αDJ1 to αDJ14, feature αDK1 to αDK8, feature αDL1 to αDL11, feature αDM1 to αDM8, feature αDN1 αDN6, features αDO1 to αDO7, features αDP1 to αDP7, features αDQ1 to αDQ9, features αDR1 to αDR8, features αDS1 to αDS3, features αDT1 to αDT4, features αDU1 to αDU10, features αDV1 to αDV5, features αDW1 to αDW9, and features αDX1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of αDX4, features αDY1 to αDY11, features αDZ1 to αDZ4, and features αa1 to αa3 may be applied. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

<Characteristic αDN group>
Features αDN1. A first period generating means for generating a first period (game times) in a situation where the game is being executed (a function of executing the processing of steps SD815 and SD816 in the main CPU 63);
In the first period, the first predetermined operation means (the first special figure display unit 425 and the second special figure display unit 426) that controls the first predetermined operation unit so as to be in the first period corresponding state (the state in which the pattern change display is performed). 1 predetermined operation control means (function of executing the processing of step SD706 in main CPU 63);
A second period generating means (a function of executing the processing of steps SD904 and SE116 in the main CPU 63) for generating a second period (opening / closing execution mode) in a situation where the game is being executed;
Second predetermined operation control means (steps SD710 to SD712 in the main CPU 63) for controlling the second predetermined operation means (special winning device 416) so as to be in the second period corresponding state (open state) in the second period. Function to execute)
Setting means (a function of executing the process of step SB311 in the main CPU 63) for setting a set value to be used from among a plurality of set values corresponding to the player's advantage;
In a situation where predetermined setting-related processing (setting value update processing, setting confirmation processing) relating to the set value is being executed, the first predetermined operation means is in the first period corresponding state, and the second predetermined operation means is in the state corresponding to the first period. A game operation characterized by comprising a corresponding operation control means (function of executing the processing of step SE704, step SE707, step SE802 and step SE816 in the main CPU 63) to be in the second period corresponding state. Machine.

  According to the feature αDN1, since a setting value to be used is set from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage, the player can use a more advantageous setting value. That you expect. In this case, in a situation where the game is being executed, a first period in which the first predetermined operation means is in the first period corresponding state may occur, and a second period in which the second predetermined operation means is in the second period corresponding state may occur. In a configuration that can occur, the first predetermined operation means is in the first period corresponding state and the second predetermined operation means is in the second period corresponding state in a situation where the predetermined setting related processing relating to the set value is being executed. Thus, it is possible to use the first predetermined operation unit and the second predetermined operation unit that operate when the game is being executed to execute the notification indicating that the predetermined setting-related process is being executed. It becomes possible.

  Further, it is possible to execute a notification indicating that a predetermined setting-related process is being executed using a first period corresponding state and a second period corresponding state that can occur when a game is being executed. It becomes possible. Further, in the case where the notification indicating that the predetermined setting-related processing is being performed is to be performed fraudulently, it is necessary to perform fraud on both the first predetermined operation means and the second predetermined operation means. There is. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an act of illegally performing notification indicating that a predetermined setting-related process is being performed.

  Features αDN2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the second period generating means generates the second period after the first period.

  According to the feature αDN2, in the situation where the game is being played, the second period occurs after the first period, so that the first predetermined operation unit is in the first period corresponding state and the second predetermined operation unit is in the second period. In the case of the corresponding state, it is possible to give the manager of the gaming hall that the situation is a special situation different from the situation where the game is being played. This makes it possible for the administrator of the gaming hall to clearly recognize that the predetermined setting-related process relating to the setting value is being executed.

  Features αDN3. 3. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein one of the first predetermined operation means and the second predetermined operation means is a display means and the other is a movable means.

  According to the feature αDN3, the notification indicating that the predetermined setting-related process is being executed is performed based on the combination of the respective period corresponding states of the display unit and the movable unit, so that the predetermined setting-related process is executed. It is easy to grasp that the situation is being done.

Features αDN4. Means for executing a period lottery for determining whether or not to generate the second period after the first period (a function of executing a process of step SD803 in the main CPU 63);
The first predetermined operation control means is configured to notify the result of the period lottery after setting the first predetermined operation means in the first period corresponding state in the first period,
The second predetermined operation control means is configured to, when the result of the period lottery is a result of generating the second period, perform the second period corresponding state after the first period ends. 2. The gaming machine according to any one of the features αDN1 to αDN3, which controls a predetermined operation means.

  According to the feature αDN4, the first predetermined operation means for notifying the result of the period lottery and the second predetermined operation means which is in the second period corresponding state when the result of the period lottery is a winning result are determined. It is possible to execute a notification indicating that the setting-related process is being executed.

Features αDN5. The first predetermined operation means is a picture display means (first special figure display section 425, second special figure display section 426) for variably displaying a picture,
The second predetermined operation means is a variable pitching means (special winning device 416) provided to be switchable between an open state and a closed state,
The first predetermined operation control means causes the pattern display means to be in a state corresponding to the first period by causing the display of the pattern to be changed and displayed in the first period.
The gaming machine according to (αDN4), wherein the second predetermined operation control means sets the variable pitching means in a state corresponding to the second period by setting the variable entering means in the open state in the second period. .

  According to the feature αDN5, in a situation where the predetermined setting-related processing is being executed, the variable ball entry means is in an open state in a situation where the picture display means is performing the variable display of the picture. This makes it possible for the manager of the gaming hall to clearly recognize that the predetermined setting-related process is being executed.

  Features αDN6. The predetermined setting-related processing is processing for enabling the setting unit to set the setting value to be used or processing for notifying the current setting value. The gaming machine according to any one of the features αDN1 to αDN5.

  According to the feature αDN6, it is possible to notify the situation in which the process for enabling the setting of the setting value to be used is being executed or the current setting value while exhibiting the above-described excellent effects. Can be recognized by the administrator of the gaming hall.

  Note that, for the configuration of the features αDN1 to αDN6, the features DA1 to DA15, the features DB1 to DB7, the features DC1 to DC5, the features DD1 to DD10, the features DE1 to DE6, the features DF1 to DF3, the features DG1 to DG18, and the features DH1 to DH1. DH7, features DI1 to DI9, features DJ1 to DJ4, features DK1 to DK7, features DL1 to DL20, features DM1 to DM7, features DN1 to DN6, features DO1 to DO11, features DP1 to DP12, features DQ1 to DQ5, features DR1 to DR1. DR17, features DS1 to DS8, features DT1 to DT13, features DU1 to DU8, features DV1 to DV6, features DW1 to DW11, features DX1 to DX11, features DY1 to DY11, features DZ1 to DZ10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b1 b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e 9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 15, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y1 y9, features z1 to z6, features αDA1 to αDA10, features αDB1 to αDB6, features αDC1 to αDC13, features αDD1 to αDD9, features αDE1 to αDE5, features αDF1 to αDF9, features αDG1 to αDG10, features αDH1 to αDH11, and features αDI1 to αDI8, feature αDJ1 to αDJ14, feature αDK1 to αDK8, feature αDL1 to αDL11, feature αDM1 to αDM8, feature αDN1 αDN6, features αDO1 to αDO7, features αDP1 to αDP7, features αDQ1 to αDQ9, features αDR1 to αDR8, features αDS1 to αDS3, features αDT1 to αDT4, features αDU1 to αDU10, features αDV1 to αDV5, features αDW1 to αDW9, and features αDX1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of αDX4, features αDY1 to αDY11, features αDZ1 to αDZ4, and features αa1 to αa3 may be applied. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

<Characteristic αDO group>
Features αDO1. Predetermined display means (first special figure display unit 425, second special figure display unit 426) for performing a predetermined display in a situation where the game is being executed;
Setting means (a function of executing the process of step SB311 in the main CPU 63) for setting a set value to be used from among a plurality of set values corresponding to the player's advantage;
In a situation where the predetermined setting-related processing (setting value updating processing, setting confirmation processing) relating to the setting value is being executed, notification that the predetermined setting-related processing is being executed uses the predetermined display means. Execution notification control means (in the 96th embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps SE304 and SE308 in the main CPU 63, and in the 97th embodiment, the processing of steps SE604 and SE607 in the main CPU 63 is executed). Function to be executed, 98th embodiment has a function of executing the processing of steps SE704 and SE707 in the main CPU 63, 99th embodiment has a function of executing the processing of steps SE904 and SE907 in the main CPU 63, 100th embodiment Then, 1 in the main CPU 63 Gaming machine, characterized in that it comprises a function of displaying controls the DR display unit 481), the.

  According to the feature αDO1, the setting value to be used is set from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage, so that the player can use the more advantageous setting value. That you expect. In this case, in a configuration including a predetermined display unit that performs a predetermined display in a situation where a game is being executed, the predetermined display unit is used in a situation where a predetermined setting-related process relating to a set value is being executed. Then, notification that the predetermined setting-related processing is being executed is executed. This makes it possible for the manager of the game hall to recognize that the predetermined setting-related process is being executed, and that the notification can be made using the predetermined display means. .

  Features αDO2. The execution notification control means causes a specific display that does not occur in a situation where a game is being executed to be performed by the predetermined display means in a situation where a predetermined setting-related process relating to the set value is being executed. The gaming machine according to feature αDO1.

  According to the feature αDO2, a specific display that does not occur in a situation where a game is being executed by a predetermined display means is performed in a situation where a predetermined setting-related process is being executed. Thus, it is possible to clearly grasp from the display content of the predetermined display means that the predetermined setting-related process is being executed.

Features αDO3. Specific display means (special display section 429 in the 64th and 97th embodiments, 6DR display section 483 and small hit display section 484 in the 100th embodiment) for performing a specific display in a situation where the game is being executed,
The execution notification control means, in a situation where the predetermined setting-related processing relating to the set value is being executed, notifies the execution of the predetermined setting-related processing by the predetermined display means and the specific display means. The gaming machine according to feature αDO1 or αDO2, characterized in that the gaming machine is performed.

  According to the feature αDO3, when a notification indicating that a predetermined setting-related process is being executed is to be performed fraudulently, the fraudulent operation is performed on both the predetermined display unit and the specific display unit. Need to be applied. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an act of illegally performing notification indicating that a predetermined setting-related process is being performed.

  Features αDO4. The gaming machine according to feature αDO3, wherein the predetermined display means and the specific display means are arranged in a predetermined range (a special figure unit 422) visible from the front of the gaming machine.

  According to the feature αDO4, in the configuration in which the notification that the predetermined setting-related process is being executed is performed using a combination of the display content of the predetermined display means and the display content of the specific display means, It is possible to make it easy to confirm the display contents.

Features αDO5. The execution notification control means causes a predetermined correspondence display to be performed by the predetermined display means and a specific correspondence display to be performed by the specific display means in a situation where the predetermined setting-related processing relating to the set value is being executed. And
The predetermined corresponding display on the predetermined display means is a display content that can occur in a situation where a game is being executed,
The specific correspondence display in the specific display means is display content that can occur in a situation where a game is being executed,
The gaming machine according to any one of claims αDO3 and αDO4, wherein the predetermined correspondence display on the predetermined display means and the specific correspondence display on the specific display means do not occur simultaneously in a situation where a game is being executed.

  According to the feature αDO5, a situation in which a predetermined setting-related process is executed using a predetermined corresponding display on a predetermined display unit and a specific corresponding display on a specific display unit, which can occur when a game is being executed. Can be performed.

Features αDO6. Means for executing a shift lottery for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state to the predetermined gaming state (a function of executing the processing of step SD803 in the main CPU 63);
Means for controlling the display of the predetermined display means so that a stop result corresponding to the lottery result of the transfer lottery is displayed after the start of the variable display of the pattern (a function of executing the processing of step SD706 in the main CPU 63). When,
The case where the lottery result of the shift lottery is a result corresponding to the shift to the predetermined game state, and the stop result corresponding thereto is displayed on the predetermined display means, and then the game state changes to the predetermined game state. (The function of executing the processing of step SD904 and step SE116 in the main CPU 63);
Means for controlling the display of the specific display means so that the state corresponding display is performed in the predetermined game state (the function of executing the processing of step SD903 and step SE115 in the main CPU 63),
The gaming machine according to feature αDO5, wherein the predetermined corresponding display is a change display of the picture, and the specific corresponding display is the state corresponding display.

  According to the feature αDO6, in a situation where a predetermined setting-related process is being executed, a situation in which a predetermined display means is performing a variable display of a pattern indicates that a specific display means is in a predetermined gaming state. A state corresponding display is performed. This makes it possible for the manager of the gaming hall to clearly recognize that the predetermined setting-related process is being executed.

  Features αDO7. The predetermined setting-related processing is processing for enabling the setting unit to set the setting value to be used or processing for notifying the current setting value. The gaming machine according to any one of the features αDO1 to αDO6.

  According to the feature αDO7, the situation in which the process of enabling the setting of the setting value to be used is being executed or the current setting value is notified while exhibiting the above-described excellent effects. Can be recognized by the administrator of the gaming hall.

  In addition, for the configuration of the features αDO1 to αDO7, the features DA1 to DA15, the features DB1 to DB7, the features DC1 to DC5, the features DD1 to DD10, the features DE1 to DE6, the features DF1 to DF3, the features DG1 to DG18, and the features DH1 to DH1. DH7, features DI1 to DI9, features DJ1 to DJ4, features DK1 to DK7, features DL1 to DL20, features DM1 to DM7, features DN1 to DN6, features DO1 to DO11, features DP1 to DP12, features DQ1 to DQ5, features DR1 to DR1. DR17, features DS1 to DS8, features DT1 to DT13, features DU1 to DU8, features DV1 to DV6, features DW1 to DW11, features DX1 to DX11, features DY1 to DY11, features DZ1 to DZ10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b1 b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e 9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 15, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y1 y9, features z1 to z6, features αDA1 to αDA10, features αDB1 to αDB6, features αDC1 to αDC13, features αDD1 to αDD9, features αDE1 to αDE5, features αDF1 to αDF9, features αDG1 to αDG10, features αDH1 to αDH11, and features αDI1 to αDI8, feature αDJ1 to αDJ14, feature αDK1 to αDK8, feature αDL1 to αDL11, feature αDM1 to αDM8, feature αDN1 αDN6, features αDO1 to αDO7, features αDP1 to αDP7, features αDQ1 to αDQ9, features αDR1 to αDR8, features αDS1 to αDS3, features αDT1 to αDT4, features αDU1 to αDU10, features αDV1 to αDV5, features αDW1 to αDW9, and features αDX1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of αDX4, features αDY1 to αDY11, features αDZ1 to αDZ4, and features αa1 to αa3 may be applied. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

<Characteristic αDP group>
Features αDP1. First response state execution means for causing the first specific operation means (special display unit 429 in the 96th embodiment, special power winning device 416 in the 98th embodiment) to be in the first response state in a situation where a game is being executed. (In the 96th embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps SD903 and SE115 in the main CPU 63, and in the 98th embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps SD710 to SD712 in the main CPU 63)
In the situation where the game is being executed, if the first specific operation means is in the first corresponding state, the second specific operation means (special display unit 429 and second special figure display unit 426 in the 96th embodiment, In the 98th embodiment, the second corresponding state execution means (the function of executing the processing of step SD706 in the main CPU 63 in the 96th embodiment, and the main function in the 98th embodiment) for setting the special display section 429 to the second corresponding state. Function for executing the processing of steps SD903 and SE115 in the side CPU 63);
Setting means (a function of executing the process of step SB311 in the main CPU 63) for setting a set value to be used from among a plurality of set values corresponding to the player's advantage;
In a situation in which predetermined setting-related processing (setting value updating processing, setting confirmation processing) relating to the setting value is being performed, the first specifying operation means enters the first corresponding state, and the second specifying operation means A specific correspondence control unit for causing the state to be different from the second correspondence state (a function of executing the processing of step SE304, step SE305, step SE308, and step SE309 in the main CPU 63 in the 96th embodiment; the 98th embodiment A function of executing the processing of steps SE704, SE707, SE802 and SE816 in the main CPU 63).

  According to the feature αDP1, since the setting value to be used is set from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. That you expect. In this case, in a configuration in which the first specific operation means is in the first corresponding state when the game is being executed, the second specific operation means is in the second corresponding state. In a situation where the processing is being performed, the first specific operation means is in the first corresponding state, whereas the second specific operation means is in a state different from the second corresponding state. This makes it possible for the manager of the gaming hall to recognize that the predetermined setting-related process is being executed, and that the notification is made using the first specific operation means and the second specific operation means. Can be performed.

  Feature αDP2. The gaming machine according to the feature αDP1, wherein one of the first specific operation means and the second specific operation means is a display means and the other is a movable means.

  According to the feature αDP2, a notification indicating that the predetermined setting-related process is being executed is performed based on a combination of the respective states of the display unit and the movable unit, so that the predetermined setting-related process is executed. It is easy to grasp that the situation is.

Feature αDP3. The second specific operation means is a variable ball entry means (special electric winning device 416) which is switched between an open state and a closed state in a predetermined game state,
The second corresponding state is a state in which the second specific operation means is switched between an open state and a closed state,
The first specific operation means is a display means (special display section 429) for displaying a display indicating the predetermined gaming state by being in the first corresponding state in the predetermined gaming state,
The gaming machine according to claim αDP1, wherein the specific correspondence control means keeps the second specific operation means in the closed state in a situation where the predetermined setting-related processing is being executed.

  According to the feature αDP3, in the situation where the predetermined setting-related processing is being executed, the second specific operation means is not displayed even though the display indicating that the predetermined game state is being performed is performed by the first specific operation means. It is kept closed. This makes it possible for the manager of the gaming hall to clearly recognize that the predetermined setting-related process is being executed.

Feature αDP4. The first specific operation means is a variable ball entry means (special electric winning device 416) which is switched between an open state and a closed state in a predetermined game state,
The first corresponding state is the open state,
The second specific operation unit is a display unit (special display unit 429) that displays the predetermined gaming state by being in the second corresponding state in the predetermined gaming state. The gaming machine according to the feature αDP1 or αDP2.

  According to the feature αDP4, in a situation where the predetermined setting-related processing is being executed, the second specific operation means is in the predetermined game state even though the first specific operation means is in the open state. No display. This makes it possible for the manager of the gaming hall to clearly recognize that the predetermined setting-related process is being executed.

  Feature αDP5. The gaming machine according to claim αDP4, wherein the specific correspondence control unit sets the second specific operation unit to a non-display state in a state where the predetermined setting-related process is being performed.

  According to the feature αDP5, a display indicating that the second specific operation means is in the predetermined game state even though the first specific operation means is in the open state in the situation where the predetermined setting-related processing is being executed. Not only is not performed, but also becomes a non-display state. This makes it possible for the manager of the gaming hall to clearly recognize that the predetermined setting-related process is being executed.

Feature αDP6. Means for executing a shift lottery for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state to the predetermined gaming state (a function of executing the processing of step SD803 in the main CPU 63);
The second corresponding state execution means controls the display of the second specific operation means so that a stop result corresponding to the lottery result of the shift lottery is displayed after the change display of the pattern is started,
In this gaming machine, when the lottery result of the transition lottery is a result corresponding to the transition to the predetermined gaming state, the transition stop result corresponding to the transition result is the second specific operation means. Means for shifting the game state to the predetermined game state after being displayed (a function of executing the processing of step SD904 and step SE116 in the main CPU 63);
The first corresponding state execution means switches the first specific operation means between an open state and a closed state in the predetermined game state,
The first corresponding state is the open state,
The gaming machine according to the feature αDP1 or αDP2, wherein the second corresponding state is a state in which the shift stop result is displayed by the second specifying operation means.

  According to the feature αDP6, in a situation where the predetermined setting-related processing is being executed, the transition stop result is not displayed in the second specific operation means even though the first specific operation means is in the open state. This makes it possible for the manager of the gaming hall to clearly recognize that the predetermined setting-related process is being executed.

  Features αDP7. The predetermined setting-related processing is processing for enabling the setting unit to set the setting value to be used or processing for notifying the current setting value. The gaming machine according to any one of the features αDP1 to αDP6.

  According to the feature αDP7, the situation in which the process of enabling the setting of the setting value to be used is performed or the current setting value is notified while the excellent effect as described above is exhibited. Can be recognized by the administrator of the gaming hall.

  In addition, for the configuration of the features αDP1 to αDP7, the features DA1 to DA15, the features DB1 to DB7, the features DC1 to DC5, the features DD1 to DD10, the features DE1 to DE6, the features DF1 to DF3, the features DG1 to DG18, and the features DH1 to DH1. DH7, features DI1 to DI9, features DJ1 to DJ4, features DK1 to DK7, features DL1 to DL20, features DM1 to DM7, features DN1 to DN6, features DO1 to DO11, features DP1 to DP12, features DQ1 to DQ5, features DR1 to DR1. DR17, features DS1 to DS8, features DT1 to DT13, features DU1 to DU8, features DV1 to DV6, features DW1 to DW11, features DX1 to DX11, features DY1 to DY11, features DZ1 to DZ10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b1 b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e 9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 15, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y1 y9, features z1 to z6, features αDA1 to αDA10, features αDB1 to αDB6, features αDC1 to αDC13, features αDD1 to αDD9, features αDE1 to αDE5, features αDF1 to αDF9, features αDG1 to αDG10, features αDH1 to αDH11, and features αDI1 to αDI8, feature αDJ1 to αDJ14, feature αDK1 to αDK8, feature αDL1 to αDL11, feature αDM1 to αDM8, feature αDN1 αDN6, features αDO1 to αDO7, features αDP1 to αDP7, features αDQ1 to αDQ9, features αDR1 to αDR8, features αDS1 to αDS3, features αDT1 to αDT4, features αDU1 to αDU10, features αDV1 to αDV5, features αDW1 to αDW9, and features αDX1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of αDX4, features αDY1 to αDY11, features αDZ1 to αDZ4, and features αa1 to αa3 may be applied. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

<Characteristic αDQ group>
Features αDQ1. A variable ball entry means (special electric prize winning device 416) provided so that game balls flowing down the game area can enter and can be switched between an open state and a closed state;
Updating means (a function of executing the processing of step S8902 in the main CPU 63) for updating the update numerical information every time an update trigger occurs;
A predetermined acquisition unit (in the 96th embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step SD701 for the hold information of the second special figure side in the main CPU 63 in the 96th embodiment, To the 103rd embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step SF101 in the main CPU 63);
A predetermined shift determining means for performing a predetermined shift determination for determining whether the updated numerical information obtained by the predetermined obtaining means corresponds to numerical information corresponding to a shift to a predetermined gaming state (open / close execution mode) (In the 96th embodiment, the function of executing the process of step SD803 on the second special figure side hold information in the main CPU 63. In the 101st to 103rd embodiments, the first special figure side hold information in the main CPU 63. (A function of executing the processing of step SF304) for
Switching control means for switching the variable pitching means between the open state and the closed state in the predetermined game state (in the 96th embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps SD710 to SD712 in the main CPU 63; To the 103rd embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps SF108 to SF110 and steps SF208 to SF210 in the main CPU 63);
Based on the result of the predetermined shift determination being the first winning result (big hit result), the game is shifted to the predetermined game state, and the game mode affecting the advantage of the player is changed after the end of the predetermined game state. First transition means that can be changed before the start of the predetermined game state (in the 96th embodiment, processing of steps SD805 to SD807, step SD904, and steps SE202 to SE208 for the second special figure side hold information in the main CPU 63) Function for executing the processing of steps SF306 to SF308 and step SF403 for the hold information of the first special figure side in the main CPU 63 in the 101st to 103rd embodiments),
Based on the result of the predetermined shift determination being a second winning result (small hit result), the state is shifted to a state in which a transition trigger to the predetermined game state can occur, or the predetermined game state is shifted to the predetermined game state and Second transition means for continuing the game mode before the start of the predetermined game state after the end of the game state (in the 96th embodiment, the steps SD809 to SD811 and the steps SD809 to SD811 for the second special figure side hold information in the main CPU 63) A function of executing the processing of SD915, in the 101st to 103rd embodiments, a function of executing the processing of step SF310, step SF311 and step SF405 for the hold information on the first special figure side in the main CPU 63);
Setting means (a function of executing a process of step SB311 in the main CPU 63) for setting a set value to be used from among a plurality of set values corresponding to the player's advantage,
When the result of the predetermined transition determination is a deviation result, the transition to the predetermined game state does not occur,
Among the set values of the plurality of stages, a second set value (for example, “Setting 6”) is determined to be the first winning result in the predetermined shift determination than a first set value (for example, “Setting 1”). The number of the updated numerical information is larger than the first specific number,
The second set value is smaller than the first set value by a second specified number in the number of pieces of update numerical information determined to be the deviation result in the predetermined shift determination;
The gaming machine, wherein the second specific number is greater than or equal to the first specific number.

  According to the feature αDQ1, the game proceeds to the predetermined game state in which the variable entrance means is opened when the first winning result or the second winning result is obtained in the predetermined shifting determination. The game will be played while expecting two winning results. Further, since the state of the subsequent gaming state is different between the case where the first winning result is obtained and the case where the second winning result is obtained in the predetermined shift determination, the mode of shifting the gaming state is diversified. Becomes possible. In addition, since the setting value to be used is set from among the set values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage, the player is notified that the more advantageous setting value is to be used. You will expect it.

  In this case, a change in the number of pieces of updated numerical information determined to be the first winning result in the predetermined shift determination between the first set value and the second set value is a deviation result in the predetermined shift determination. Is absorbed by the variation in the number of pieces of updated numerical information determined as. Thereby, while not affecting the probability of the second winning result in the predetermined shift determination, the probability of the first winning result in the predetermined shift determination is changed between the first set value and the second set value. It can be varied.

  Features αDQ2. In all of the set values of the plurality of stages, the variation of the number of the updated numerical information determined to be the first winning result in the predetermined shift determination is determined to be the deviation result in the predetermined shift determination. The gaming machine according to feature αDQ1, wherein the updated numerical information is absorbed by a change in the number of pieces of updated numerical information.

  According to the feature αDQ2, the probability of the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination is changed while not affecting the probability of the second winning result in the predetermined transition determination for all of the set values in a plurality of stages. Becomes possible.

  Features αDQ3. The gaming machine according to the feature αDQ1 or αDQ2, wherein the number of the updated numerical information determined to be the second winning result in the predetermined shift determination is the same in all of the set values in the plurality of stages. .

  According to the feature αDQ3, it is possible to make the probability of the second winning result in the predetermined shift determination constant at all of the set values in a plurality of stages. Further, even in such a configuration in which the probability of the second winning result in the predetermined shift determination is constant, the variation of each set value of the probability of the first winning result in the predetermined shift determination is a deviation result. Therefore, the probability of the first winning result in the predetermined shift determination can be set as the probability according to the set value.

  Features αDQ4. Any one of the features αDQ1 to αDQ3 is characterized in that the number of pieces of update numerical information determined to be the deviation result in the predetermined shift determination is the largest even in any of the set values in the plurality of stages. A gaming machine according to claim 1.

  According to the feature αDQ4, in a configuration in which the number of pieces of updated numerical information determined to be a deviation result in the predetermined shift determination is the largest, regardless of each of the set values, the first shift result is determined in the predetermined shift determination. The variation of each set value of the number of pieces of updated numerical information determined to be is absorbed by the variation of the number of pieces of updated numeric information determined to be a departure result in the predetermined shift determination. Thereby, even if the variation in each set value of the probability of being the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination is absorbed by the variation of the probability of being a departure result in the predetermined transition determination, the predetermined transition determination may be used. With respect to the probability of a deviation result, it is possible to prevent a large variation between set values in a plurality of stages.

Features αDQ5. As the game mode, there are a high probability mode and a low probability mode in which the probability of the first winning result in the predetermined shift determination is relatively high and low,
In the situation where the probability of being the first winning result in the predetermined shift determination among the set values of the plurality of stages is the highest set value and the game mode is the high probability mode, the predetermined shift determination is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of features αDQ1 to αDQ4, wherein the number of pieces of update numerical information determined to be the result of the deviation is 0.

  According to the feature αDQ5, it is determined in the predetermined shift determination that the result is a deviation in the predetermined shift determination in the situation where the probability of being the first winning result is the highest in the predetermined shift determination and the mode is the high probability mode. The number of updated numerical information to be updated is 0. Accordingly, in a configuration in which the variation in each set value of the probability of being the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination is absorbed by the variation of the probability of being a departure result in the predetermined transition determination, the predetermined transition determination is performed as described above. Thus, in the situation where the probability of being the first winning result is highest, the probability of being the first winning result can be made as high as possible.

Feature αDQ6. As the game mode, there are a high probability mode and a low probability mode in which the probability of the first winning result in the predetermined shift determination is relatively high and low,
In the situation where the probability of being the first winning result in the predetermined shift determination among the set values of the plurality of stages is the highest set value and the game mode is the high probability mode, the predetermined shift determination is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of features αDQ1 to αDQ4, wherein the number of pieces of update numerical information determined to be the result of the deviation is one or more.

  According to the feature αDQ6, in the situation where the probability of being the first winning result in the predetermined shift determination is the highest and the mode is the highest setting value and the mode is the high probability mode, it is determined that the predetermined shift determination is a deviation result. The number of updated numerical information to be performed is one or more. Accordingly, in a configuration in which the variation in each set value of the probability of being the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination is absorbed by the variation of the probability of being a departure result in the predetermined transition determination, the predetermined transition determination is performed as described above. Therefore, even in a situation where the probability of being the first winning result is the highest, it is possible to select a deviating result in the predetermined shift determination.

Features αDQ7. A specific acquisition unit (in the 101st to 102nd embodiments, a function of executing the process of step SF201 in the main CPU 63) for acquiring the update numerical information when a specific acquisition trigger occurs;
Specific transition determination means (part 101 to 101) for performing specific transition determination for determining whether the updated numerical information acquired by the specific acquisition means corresponds to the numerical information corresponding to the transition to the predetermined game state. In the 102nd embodiment, the main CPU 63 performs a process of step SF304 on the hold information on the second special figure side).
The first shifting means shifts to the predetermined game state based on the result of the specific shift determination being the first winning result, and changes the game mode after the end of the predetermined game state to the predetermined game state. Can be changed before the start of
The second shifting means shifts to a state in which an opportunity to shift to the predetermined gaming state can occur based on the result of the specific shifting determination being the second winning result, or shifts to the predetermined gaming state After the end of the predetermined game state, the game mode before the start of the predetermined game state is continued,
When the result of the specific transition determination is the deviation result, the transition to the predetermined game state does not occur,
The variation due to the difference in the set value of the number of the updated numerical information determined to be the first winning result in the specific transition determination is determined to be the deviation result in the specific migration determination. The gaming machine according to any one of features αDQ1 to αDQ6, which is absorbed by a variation in the number of updated numerical information.

  According to the feature αDQ7, the probability of the first winning result is varied between the set values while not affecting the probability of the second winning result not only in the predetermined shift determination but also in the specific transition determination. It becomes possible.

  Features αDQ8. The gaming machine according to feature αDQ7, wherein the number of pieces of update numerical information determined to be the second winning result in the specific shift determination is the same in all of the set values in the plurality of stages.

  According to the feature αDQ8, it is possible to make the probability of the second winning result constant in all of the set values in a plurality of stages not only in the predetermined shift determination but also in the specific shift determination. In addition, even with such a configuration in which the probability of being the second winning result in the specific transition determination is constant, the variation of each set value of the probability of being the first winning result in the specific migration determination is a deviation result. Therefore, the probability of the first winning result in the specific transition determination can be set as the probability according to the set value.

  Features αDQ9. The game according to the feature αDQ7 or αDQ8, wherein the number of pieces of update numerical information determined to be the deviation result in the specific shift determination is the largest even in any of the plurality of set values. Machine.

  According to the feature αDQ9, in a configuration in which the number of pieces of updated numerical information determined to be a deviation result in the specific transition determination is the largest regardless of any of the set values, the result is the first winning result in the specific transition determination. The variation of each set value of the number of pieces of updated numerical information determined as is absorbed by the variation of the number of pieces of updated numeric information determined to be a departure result in the specific shift determination. Thereby, even if the variation in each set value of the probability of being the first winning result in the specific transition determination is absorbed by the variation of the probability of being a departure result in the specific transition determination, the specific transition determination may It is possible to prevent a large variation in the probability of a deviation result.

  Note that, for the configuration of the features αDQ1 to αDQ9, the features DA1 to DA15, the features DB1 to DB7, the features DC1 to DC5, the features DD1 to DD10, the features DE1 to DE6, the features DF1 to DF3, the features DG1 to DG18, and the features DH1 to DH1 DH7, features DI1 to DI9, features DJ1 to DJ4, features DK1 to DK7, features DL1 to DL20, features DM1 to DM7, features DN1 to DN6, features DO1 to DO11, features DP1 to DP12, features DQ1 to DQ5, features DR1 to DR1. DR17, features DS1 to DS8, features DT1 to DT13, features DU1 to DU8, features DV1 to DV6, features DW1 to DW11, features DX1 to DX11, features DY1 to DY11, features DZ1 to DZ10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b1 b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e 9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 15, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y1 y9, features z1 to z6, features αDA1 to αDA10, features αDB1 to αDB6, features αDC1 to αDC13, features αDD1 to αDD9, features αDE1 to αDE5, features αDF1 to αDF9, features αDG1 to αDG10, features αDH1 to αDH11, and features αDI1 to αDI8, feature αDJ1 to αDJ14, feature αDK1 to αDK8, feature αDL1 to αDL11, feature αDM1 to αDM8, feature αDN1 αDN6, features αDO1 to αDO7, features αDP1 to αDP7, features αDQ1 to αDQ9, features αDR1 to αDR8, features αDS1 to αDS3, features αDT1 to αDT4, features αDU1 to αDU10, features αDV1 to αDV5, features αDW1 to αDW9, and features αDX1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of αDX4, features αDY1 to αDY11, features αDZ1 to αDZ4, and features αa1 to αa3 may be applied. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

<Characteristic αDR group>
Features αDR1. A variable ball entry means (special electric prize winning device 416) provided so that game balls flowing down the game area can enter and can be switched between an open state and a closed state;
Updating means (a function of executing the processing of step S8902 in the main CPU 63) for updating the update numerical information every time an update trigger occurs;
A predetermined acquisition unit (in the 96th embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step SD701 for the hold information of the second special figure side in the main CPU 63 in the 96th embodiment, To the 103rd embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step SF101 in the main CPU 63);
A predetermined shift determining means for performing a predetermined shift determination for determining whether the updated numerical information obtained by the predetermined obtaining means corresponds to numerical information corresponding to a shift to a predetermined gaming state (open / close execution mode) (In the 96th embodiment, the function of executing the process of step SD803 on the second special figure side hold information in the main CPU 63. In the 101st to 103rd embodiments, the first special figure side hold information in the main CPU 63. (A function of executing the processing of step SF304) for
Switching control means for switching the variable pitching means between the open state and the closed state in the predetermined game state (in the 96th embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps SD710 to SD712 in the main CPU 63; To the 103rd embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps SF108 to SF110 and steps SF208 to SF210 in the main CPU 63);
First shifting means for shifting to the predetermined game state based on the result of the predetermined shift determination being the first winning result (big hit result) (in the 96th embodiment, the second special figure side hold in the main CPU 63) A function for executing the processing of steps SD805 to SD807, step SD904, and steps SE202 to SE208 for the information. In the 101st to 103rd embodiments, for the hold information of the first special figure side in the main CPU 63, steps SF306 to SF308 and Function for executing the processing of step SF403);
Setting means (a function of executing a process of step SB311 in the main CPU 63) for setting a set value to be used from among a plurality of set values corresponding to the player's advantage,
As a result of the predetermined shift determination, there are other winning results in addition to the departure result in which the shift to the predetermined gaming state does not occur and the first winning result,
Among the set values of the plurality of stages, a second set value (for example, “Setting 6”) is determined to be the first winning result in the predetermined shift determination than a first set value (for example, “Setting 1”). The number of updated numerical information is larger by a first predetermined number,
The number of pieces of update numerical information determined in the predetermined shift determination to be a predetermined target result (outlier result) different from the first winning result is the most in each of the first set value and the second set value. There are many configurations,
A configuration in which the number of pieces of the updated numerical information in which the second set value is determined to be the predetermined target result in the predetermined shift determination is smaller than the first set value by a second predetermined number,
The gaming machine, wherein the second predetermined number is greater than or equal to the first predetermined number.

  According to the feature αDR1, the game shifts to the predetermined game state in which the variable hitting means is opened when the first win result is obtained in the predetermined shift determination, so that the player expects the first win result. A game will be played. In addition, since the setting value to be used is set from among the set values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage, the player is notified that the more advantageous setting value is to be used. You will expect it.

  In this case, in a configuration in which the number of pieces of updated numerical information determined to be the predetermined target result in the predetermined shift determination is the largest, regardless of the first set value or the second set value, the first shift value is determined by the predetermined shift determination The updated numerical information in which the change in the number of updated numerical information determined to be one winning result between the first set value and the second set value is determined to be the predetermined target result in the predetermined shift determination Is absorbed by the variation of the number. Thereby, even if the variation in each set value of the probability of being the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination is absorbed by the variation in the probability of being the predetermined target in the predetermined transition determination, the predetermined transition determination As a result, it is possible to prevent the probability of the predetermined target result from fluctuating greatly. Therefore, while the set value can be predicted from the probability that the first winning result is selected in the predetermined shift determination, the predetermined target result whose probability varies according to the variation in the probability of the first winning result is selected. It is possible to make it difficult to predict the set value from the probability of being set.

Feature αDR2. The number of the update numerical information determined to be the predetermined target result in the predetermined shift determination is a configuration having the largest number of the set values of the plurality of stages,
In all of the setting values of the plurality of stages, the change in the number of the updated numerical information determined to be the first winning result in the predetermined shift determination is determined to be the predetermined target result in the predetermined shift determination. The gaming machine according to Feature αDR1, wherein the updated numerical information is absorbed by a change in the number of pieces of the updated numerical information.

  According to the feature αDR2, the variation in the probability of becoming the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination is absorbed by the relatively small variation in the probability of the predetermined target result having the highest selection probability in all of the setting values in the plurality of stages. It becomes possible.

Feature αDR3. There is a high probability mode and a low probability mode in which the probability of the first winning result in the predetermined shift determination is relatively high and low,
Even in the situation where the probability of being the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination among the set values of the plurality of stages is the highest setting value and the high probability mode is set, the predetermined transition determination is not performed. The gaming machine according to feature αDR1 or αDR2, wherein the number of pieces of update numerical information determined to be the predetermined target result is the largest.

  According to the feature αDR3, even if the state is the highest setting value in which the probability of being the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination is the highest and the state is the high probability mode, the predetermined target result is determined in the predetermined transition determination. Is the largest. Thereby, even if the situation is the highest setting value, which is the situation where the probability of being the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination is the highest, and the situation is the high probability mode, the probability of being the predetermined target result in the predetermined transition determination is made. It is possible to absorb a variation in the probability of being the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination by the variation in the probability of being the predetermined target result in the predetermined transition determination while preventing a large variation in the probability from occurring. Become.

Feature αDR4. A specific acquisition unit (in the 101st to 102nd embodiments, a function of executing the process of step SF201 in the main CPU 63) for acquiring the update numerical information when a specific acquisition trigger occurs;
Specific transition determination means (part 101 to 101) for performing specific transition determination for determining whether the updated numerical information acquired by the specific acquisition means corresponds to the numerical information corresponding to the transition to the predetermined game state. In the 102nd embodiment, the main CPU 63 performs a process of step SF304 on the hold information on the second special figure side).
The first shift means shifts to the predetermined game state based on a result of the specific shift determination being the first winning result,
As a result of the specific transition determination, there are other winning results in addition to the departure result in which the transition to the predetermined gaming state does not occur and the first winning result,
A specific target result (outlier result) exists as a lottery result that is not a lottery result that is most likely to be selected in the specific transition determination in each of the first setting value and the second setting value,
A configuration in which the number of pieces of update numerical information for which the second set value is determined to be the first winning result in the specific transition determination is greater than the first set value by a first specific number;
A configuration in which the number of the update numerical information in which the second set value is determined to be the specific target result in the specific migration determination is smaller than the first set value by a second specific number,
The gaming machine according to any one of the features αDR1 to αDR3, wherein the second specific number is equal to or greater than the first specific number.

  According to the feature αDR4, the variation in the probability of each set value that becomes the first winning result in the specific transition determination is absorbed by the variation in the probability of the specific target result that is not the highest selection probability in the specific transition determination. Thus, in the specific transition determination, the player can estimate the set value by using each of the selection probability of the first winning result and the selection probability of the specific target result.

  Feature αDR5. The gaming machine according to feature αDR4, wherein the specific target result is the predetermined target result.

  According to the feature αDR5, in the predetermined transition determination, it is difficult to estimate the setting value depending on the selection probability of the predetermined target result, while in the specific transition determination, the setting value is easily estimated based on the selection probability of the predetermined target result. Becomes possible.

Feature αDR6. The configuration is not a lottery result with the highest probability that the specific target result is selected in the specific transition determination in all of the plurality of set values,
In all of the set values of the plurality of stages, the change in the number of the updated numerical information determined to be the first winning result in the specific shift determination is determined to be the specific target result in the specific shift determination. The gaming machine according to feature αDR4 or αDR5, wherein the updated value information is absorbed by a change in the number of pieces of updated numerical information to be updated.

  According to the feature αDR6, it is possible to absorb the variation in the probability of being the first winning result in the specific transition determination due to the relatively large variation in the probability of the specific target result in all of the setting values in a plurality of stages. .

Feature αDR7. A specific acquisition unit (in the 103rd embodiment, a function of executing the process of step SF201 in the main CPU 63) for acquiring the update numerical information when a specific acquisition trigger occurs;
A specific transition determination unit (103th execution) that executes a specific transition determination to determine whether the updated numerical information acquired by the specific acquisition unit corresponds to the numerical information corresponding to the transition to the predetermined gaming state. In the embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function of executing the processing of step SF304 on the hold information on the second special figure side).
The first shift means shifts to the predetermined game state based on a result of the specific shift determination being the first winning result,
As a result of the specific transition determination, there are other winning results in addition to the departure result in which the transition to the predetermined gaming state does not occur and the first winning result,
The number of the updated numerical information determined in the specific shift determination to be a specific target result (small hit result) different from the first winning result is equal to each of the first set value and the second set value. The most common configuration,
A configuration in which the number of pieces of update numerical information for which the second set value is determined to be the first winning result in the specific transition determination is greater than the first set value by a first specific number;
A configuration in which the number of the update numerical information in which the second set value is determined to be the specific target result in the specific migration determination is smaller than the first set value by a second specific number,
The second specific number is equal to or greater than the first specific number,
The gaming machine according to any one of features αDR1 to αDR3, wherein the predetermined target result is different from the specific target result.

  According to the feature αDR7, even when the lottery result having the highest selection probability is different between the predetermined transition determination and the specific transition determination, the selection probability of the lottery result having the highest selection probability in each of the predetermined transition determination and the specific transition determination is determined. The variation between the set values of the selection probability of the first winning result is absorbed by the variation of. Accordingly, in both the predetermined transition determination and the specific transition determination, the set value can be estimated from the probability that the first winning result is selected, but the probability varies according to the variation in the probability of the first winning result. It is possible to make it difficult to guess the set value from the probability that a different lottery result will be selected.

Feature αDR8. The number of the updated numerical information determined to be the specific target result in the specific migration determination is the largest configuration regardless of any of the plurality of set values,
In all of the setting values of the plurality of stages, the specific shift determination determines that the variation in the number of the updated numerical information determined to be the first winning result is the specific target result in the specific shift determination. The gaming machine according to feature αDR7, wherein the updated numerical information is absorbed by a change in the number of pieces of updated numerical information to be performed.

  According to the feature αDR8, the first winning result is obtained by a relatively small variation in the lottery result having the highest selection probability in all of the set values in the plurality of stages, regardless of whether the predetermined shifting determination or the specific shifting determination is performed. It is possible to absorb the fluctuation in the probability.

  In addition, for the configuration of the features αDR1 to αDR8, the features DA1 to DA15, the features DB1 to DB7, the features DC1 to DC5, the features DD1 to DD10, the features DE1 to DE6, the features DF1 to DF3, the features DG1 to DG18, and the features DH1 to DH1. DH7, features DI1 to DI9, features DJ1 to DJ4, features DK1 to DK7, features DL1 to DL20, features DM1 to DM7, features DN1 to DN6, features DO1 to DO11, features DP1 to DP12, features DQ1 to DQ5, features DR1 to DR1. DR17, features DS1 to DS8, features DT1 to DT13, features DU1 to DU8, features DV1 to DV6, features DW1 to DW11, features DX1 to DX11, features DY1 to DY11, features DZ1 to DZ10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b1 b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e 9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 15, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y1 y9, features z1 to z6, features αDA1 to αDA10, features αDB1 to αDB6, features αDC1 to αDC13, features αDD1 to αDD9, features αDE1 to αDE5, features αDF1 to αDF9, features αDG1 to αDG10, features αDH1 to αDH11, and features αDI1 to αDI8, feature αDJ1 to αDJ14, feature αDK1 to αDK8, feature αDL1 to αDL11, feature αDM1 to αDM8, feature αDN1 αDN6, features αDO1 to αDO7, features αDP1 to αDP7, features αDQ1 to αDQ9, features αDR1 to αDR8, features αDS1 to αDS3, features αDT1 to αDT4, features αDU1 to αDU10, features αDV1 to αDV5, features αDW1 to αDW9, and features αDX1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of αDX4, features αDY1 to αDY11, features αDZ1 to αDZ4, and features αa1 to αa3 may be applied. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

<Characteristic αDS group>
Features αDS1. Updating means (a function of executing the processing of step S8902 in the main CPU 63) for updating the update numerical information every time an update trigger occurs;
A predetermined acquisition unit (in the 102nd embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step SF201 in the main CPU 63) for acquiring the update numerical information when a predetermined acquisition trigger occurs;
A predetermined shift determining means for performing a predetermined shift determination for determining whether the updated numerical information obtained by the predetermined obtaining means corresponds to numerical information corresponding to a shift to a predetermined gaming state (open / close execution mode) (In the 102nd embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step SF304 on the hold information on the second special figure side in the main CPU 63)
The predetermined game state is determined based on the result of the predetermined shift determination being a first winning result (a jackpot result in a case where the hold information on the second special figure side in the 102nd embodiment is subjected to the determination processing of the winning / rejecting). (In the 102nd embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps SF306 to SF308 and step SF403 for the second special figure side hold information in the main CPU 63 in the 102nd embodiment)
Setting means (a function of executing a process of step SB311 in the main CPU 63) for setting a set value to be used from among a plurality of set values corresponding to the player's advantage,
When the result of the predetermined transition determination is a deviation result, the transition to the predetermined game state does not occur,
There is a high probability mode and a low probability mode in which the probability of the first winning result in the predetermined shift determination is relatively high and low,
In the high-probability mode, a variation between the set values of the plurality of stages of the number of the updated numerical information determined to be the first winning result in the predetermined shift determination is determined by the predetermined shift determination. It is configured to be absorbed by a variation in the number of the updated numerical information determined to be the deviation result,
In the situation where the probability of being the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination among the set values of the plurality of stages is the highest setting value and the situation is the high probability mode, the deviation in the predetermined transition determination is performed. Among the set values of the plurality of stages, the set value having the lowest probability of being the first winning result in the predetermined shift determination is set so that the number of the updated numerical information determined to be the result is one or more. A gaming machine, wherein the number of pieces of updated numerical information determined to be the result of the deviation in the predetermined shift determination in a certain situation and the situation of the high probability mode is set.

  According to the feature αDS1, it is possible to shift to the predetermined game state by obtaining the first winning result in the predetermined shift determination, so that the player plays the game while expecting the first winning result. Become. In addition, since the setting value to be used is set from among the set values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage, the player is notified that the more advantageous setting value is to be used. You will expect it.

  In this case, in the high probability mode, the variation between the set values of the plurality of levels of the updated numerical information determined to be the first winning result in the predetermined shift determination in the predetermined shift determination is out of the predetermined shift determination result. Is absorbed by the variation in the number of pieces of updated numerical information determined to be. Then, in a situation where the probability of being the first winning result in the predetermined shift determination is the highest, and in the situation where the mode is the high probability mode and the mode is the high probability mode, the updated numerical value determined to be a deviation result in the predetermined shift determination The number of information becomes one or more. Accordingly, in a configuration in which the variation in each set value of the probability of being the first winning result in the predetermined transition determination is absorbed by the variation of the probability of being a departure result in the predetermined transition determination, the predetermined transition determination is performed as described above. Therefore, even in a situation where the probability of being the first winning result is the highest, it is possible to select a deviating result in the predetermined shift determination.

Feature αDS2. The predetermined game is determined based on the result of the predetermined shift determination being a second winning result (small hit result in a case where the hold information on the second special figure side in the 102nd embodiment is subjected to the determination processing of the win / fail). A second transition unit (102) that transitions to a state where a transition to a state can occur, or transitions to the predetermined game state and continues the game mode before the start of the predetermined game state after the end of the predetermined game state. In the embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function of executing the processing of step SF310, step SF311 and step SF405 for the hold information on the second special figure side,
In the high probability mode, the number of the updated numerical information determined to be the second winning result in the predetermined shift determination is the same among the set values in the plurality of stages. The gaming machine described in αDS1.

  According to the feature αDS2, it is possible to make the probability of the second winning result in the predetermined shift determination constant at all of the set values in a plurality of stages. Further, even in such a configuration in which the probability of the second winning result in the predetermined shift determination is constant, the variation of each set value of the probability of the first winning result in the predetermined shift determination is a deviation result. Therefore, the probability of the first winning result in the predetermined shift determination can be set as the probability according to the set value.

Feature αDS3. The predetermined game is determined based on the result of the predetermined shift determination being a second winning result (small hit result in a case where the hold information on the second special figure side in the 102nd embodiment is subjected to the determination processing of the win / fail). A second transition unit (102) that transitions to a state where a transition to a state can occur, or transitions to the predetermined game state and continues the game mode before the start of the predetermined game state after the end of the predetermined game state. In the embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function of executing the processing of step SF310, step SF311 and step SF405 for the hold information on the second special figure side,
In the high probability mode, the number of the updated numerical information determined to be the second winning result in the predetermined shift determination is the largest in each of the set values in the plurality of stages. The gaming machine according to αDS1 or αDS2.

  According to the feature αDS3, even in a configuration in which the second winning result is selected in the predetermined shift determination in the situation of the high probability mode, the probability of the first winning result in the predetermined shift determination is high. In the highest situation, it is possible to select a deviation result in the predetermined shift determination.

  In addition, for the configuration of the features αDS1 to αDS3, the features DA1 to DA15, the features DB1 to DB7, the features DC1 to DC5, the features DD1 to DD10, the features DE1 to DE6, the features DF1 to DF3, the features DG1 to DG18, and the features DH1 to DH1. DH7, features DI1 to DI9, features DJ1 to DJ4, features DK1 to DK7, features DL1 to DL20, features DM1 to DM7, features DN1 to DN6, features DO1 to DO11, features DP1 to DP12, features DQ1 to DQ5, features DR1 to DR1. DR17, features DS1 to DS8, features DT1 to DT13, features DU1 to DU8, features DV1 to DV6, features DW1 to DW11, features DX1 to DX11, features DY1 to DY11, features DZ1 to DZ10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b1 b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e 9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 15, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y1 y9, features z1 to z6, features αDA1 to αDA10, features αDB1 to αDB6, features αDC1 to αDC13, features αDD1 to αDD9, features αDE1 to αDE5, features αDF1 to αDF9, features αDG1 to αDG10, features αDH1 to αDH11, and features αDI1 to αDI8, feature αDJ1 to αDJ14, feature αDK1 to αDK8, feature αDL1 to αDL11, feature αDM1 to αDM8, feature αDN1 αDN6, features αDO1 to αDO7, features αDP1 to αDP7, features αDQ1 to αDQ9, features αDR1 to αDR8, features αDS1 to αDS3, features αDT1 to αDT4, features αDU1 to αDU10, features αDV1 to αDV5, features αDW1 to αDW9, and features αDX1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of αDX4, features αDY1 to αDY11, features αDZ1 to αDZ4, and features αa1 to αa3 may be applied. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

<Characteristic αDT group>
Features αDT1. A variable ball entry means (special electric prize winning device 416) provided so that game balls flowing down the game area can enter and can be switched between an open state and a closed state;
Updating means (a function of executing the processing of step S8902 in the main CPU 63) for updating the update numerical information every time an update trigger occurs;
A predetermined acquisition unit (in the 101st to 103rd embodiments, a function of executing the process of step SF101 in the main CPU 63) for acquiring the update numerical information when a predetermined acquisition trigger occurs;
A predetermined shift determining means for performing a predetermined shift determination for determining whether the updated numerical information acquired by the predetermined acquiring means corresponds to numerical information corresponding to a transition to a predetermined gaming state (open / close execution mode) (In the 101st to 103rd embodiments, the function of executing the process of step SF304 on the hold information on the first special figure side in the main CPU 63)
Switching control means for switching the variable ball entry means between the open state and the closed state in the predetermined game state (steps SF108 to SF110 and steps SF208 to SF210 in the main CPU 63 in the 101st to 103rd embodiments) Function to execute the process),
Based on the result of the predetermined shift determination being the first winning result (big hit result), the game mode is shifted to the predetermined game state, and the game mode affecting the advantage of the player is changed after the predetermined game state ends. First shifting means that can be changed before the start of the predetermined game state (in the 101st to 103rd embodiments, the processing of steps SF306 to SF308 and step SF403 is performed on the hold information of the first special figure side in the main CPU 63). Function),
Based on the result of the predetermined shift determination being a second winning result (small hit result), the game is shifted to a state in which an opportunity to shift to the predetermined game state can occur, or the game is shifted to the predetermined game state and Second transition means for continuing the game mode before the start of the predetermined game state after the end of the game state (in the 101st to 103rd embodiments, the main CPU 63 performs step SF310 for the hold information on the first special figure side, step SF311 and a function of executing the processing of step SF405);
Setting means (a function of executing a process of step SB311 in the main CPU 63) for setting a set value to be used from among a plurality of set values corresponding to the player's advantage,
When the result of the predetermined transition determination is a deviation result, the transition to the predetermined game state does not occur,
As the game mode, there are a high probability mode and a low probability mode in which the probability of the first winning result in the predetermined shift determination is relatively high and low,
The probability of being the second winning result in the predetermined shift determination is the same regardless of which of the set value to be used and the game mode set by the setting means. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature αDT1, since the transition to the predetermined game state in which the variable ball entry means is opened when the first winning result or the second winning result is obtained in the predetermined shift determination, the player can select the first winning result or the second winning result. The game will be played while expecting two winning results. Further, since the state of the subsequent gaming state is different between the case where the first winning result is obtained and the case where the second winning result is obtained in the predetermined shift determination, the mode of shifting the gaming state is diversified. Becomes possible. In addition, since the setting value to be used is set from among the set values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage, the player is notified that the more advantageous setting value is to be used. You will expect it.

  In this case, the probability of the second winning result in the predetermined shift determination is the same regardless of the set value and the game mode. This makes it possible to prevent the player from guessing both the set value and the game mode from the probability of the second winning result.

Feature αDT2. A specific acquisition unit (in the 101st to 102nd embodiments, a function of executing the process of step SF201 in the main CPU 63) for acquiring the update numerical information when a specific acquisition trigger occurs;
Specific transition determination means (part 101 to 101) for performing specific transition determination for determining whether the updated numerical information acquired by the specific acquisition means corresponds to the numerical information corresponding to the transition to the predetermined game state. In the 102nd embodiment, the main CPU 63 performs a process of step SF304 on the hold information on the second special figure side).
The first shifting means shifts to the predetermined game state based on the result of the specific shift determination being the first winning result, and changes the game mode after the end of the predetermined game state to the predetermined game state. Can be changed before the start of
The second shifting means shifts to a state in which an opportunity to shift to the predetermined gaming state can occur based on the result of the specific shifting determination being the second winning result, or shifts to the predetermined gaming state After the end of the predetermined game state, the game mode before the start of the predetermined game state is continued,
When the result of the specific transition determination is the deviation result, the transition to the predetermined game state does not occur,
In the specific shift determination, the probability of the second winning result is the same regardless of which of the set value to be used and the game mode set by the setting means. The gaming machine according to feature αDT1.

  According to the feature αDT2, the probability of the second winning result is the same not only in the predetermined transition determination but also in the specific transition determination, regardless of the set value or the game mode. This makes it possible to prevent the player from guessing both the set value and the game mode from the probability of being the second winning result in either the predetermined shift determination or the specific shift determination.

  Feature αDT3. The gaming machine according to feature αDT2, wherein a probability of the second winning result in the predetermined shift determination is different from a probability of the second winning result in the specific shift determination.

  According to the feature αDT3, in the configuration in which the probability of the second winning result is the same not only in the predetermined shifting determination but also in the specific shifting determination, regardless of the setting value and the game mode, the second winning result It is possible to cause a situation in which the probability of becomes variable.

Feature αDT4. A specific acquisition unit (in the 101st to 103rd embodiments, a function of executing the process of step SF201 in the main CPU 63) for acquiring the update numerical information when a specific acquisition trigger occurs;
A specific transition determination unit (101-101) that executes a specific transition determination for determining whether the updated numerical information acquired by the specific acquisition unit corresponds to the numerical information corresponding to the transition to the predetermined gaming state. In the 103rd embodiment, the main CPU 63 performs the process of step SF304 on the hold information on the second special figure side).
The first shifting means shifts to the predetermined game state based on the result of the specific shift determination being the first winning result, and changes the game mode after the end of the predetermined game state to the predetermined game state. Can be changed before the start of
The second shifting means shifts to a state in which an opportunity to shift to the predetermined gaming state can occur based on the result of the specific shifting determination being the second winning result, or shifts to the predetermined gaming state After the end of the predetermined game state, the game mode before the start of the predetermined game state is continued,
When the result of the specific transition determination is the deviation result, the transition to the predetermined game state does not occur,
The gaming machine according to feature αDT1, wherein the probability of the second winning result in the predetermined shift determination is different from the probability of the second winning result in the specific shift determination.

  According to the feature αDT4, it is possible to generate a situation where the probability of the second winning result varies.

  In addition, for the configuration of the features αDT1 to αDT4, the features DA1 to DA15, the features DB1 to DB7, the features DC1 to DC5, the features DD1 to DD10, the features DE1 to DE6, the features DF1 to DF3, the features DG1 to DG18, and the features DH1 to DH1. DH7, features DI1 to DI9, features DJ1 to DJ4, features DK1 to DK7, features DL1 to DL20, features DM1 to DM7, features DN1 to DN6, features DO1 to DO11, features DP1 to DP12, features DQ1 to DQ5, features DR1 to DR1. DR17, features DS1 to DS8, features DT1 to DT13, features DU1 to DU8, features DV1 to DV6, features DW1 to DW11, features DX1 to DX11, features DY1 to DY11, features DZ1 to DZ10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b1 b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e 9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 15, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y1 y9, features z1 to z6, features αDA1 to αDA10, features αDB1 to αDB6, features αDC1 to αDC13, features αDD1 to αDD9, features αDE1 to αDE5, features αDF1 to αDF9, features αDG1 to αDG10, features αDH1 to αDH11, and features αDI1 to αDI8, feature αDJ1 to αDJ14, feature αDK1 to αDK8, feature αDL1 to αDL11, feature αDM1 to αDM8, feature αDN1 αDN6, features αDO1 to αDO7, features αDP1 to αDP7, features αDQ1 to αDQ9, features αDR1 to αDR8, features αDS1 to αDS3, features αDT1 to αDT4, features αDU1 to αDU10, features αDV1 to αDV5, features αDW1 to αDW9, and features αDX1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of αDX4, features αDY1 to αDY11, features αDZ1 to αDZ4, and features αa1 to αa3 may be applied. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

  According to the invention relating to the above-mentioned feature αDM group, the above-mentioned feature αDN group, the above-mentioned feature αDO group, the above-mentioned feature αDP group, the above-mentioned feature αDQ group, the above-mentioned feature αDR group, the above-mentioned feature αDS group and the above-mentioned feature αDT group, the following problems are solved. It is possible to solve.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine has a dish storage section for storing game balls given to a player on the front face of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to a game ball launching device, It is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage unit, for example. Further, in a pachinko machine, a configuration including an upper dish storage section and a lower dish storage section as a dish storage section is also known. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper dish storage section is a game ball launching device. And the surplus game balls in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  Further, in the slot machine, when a new game is started by operating the start lever while a medal is bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation of the reel is started by the rotation start control being executed by the control means, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means executes the rotation start control. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation stop of the reels corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in the gaming machine as exemplified above, it is necessary to make the configuration relating to the set value that determines the advantage of the gaming machine suitable, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Characteristic αDU group>
Features αDU1. A specific storage unit (main-side RAM 65 in the 104th embodiment) having a plurality of storage areas associated with addresses and storing information;
Address specifying means (step SF801, step SF803, step SF807, step SG101, step SG103, step SG107, step SG201, step SG204 of the main CPU 63 in the 104th embodiment) for specifying a predetermined address in the specific storage means as a target address. And a function of executing the process of step SG208);
A specifying process executing unit that sets the storage area corresponding to the target address specified by the address specifying unit as an execution target of the specifying process (steps SF802, SG102, and SG202 of the main CPU 63 in the 104th embodiment) Function to perform) and
The addressing means includes:
Address updating means for updating the target address to an address in the next order with respect to the current target address when the execution of the specific processing by the specific processing executing means is completed (the 104th embodiment) Function of executing the processing of step SF901 of the main CPU 63);
The target address after being updated by the address updating means is a specific address (“0100” in hexadecimal if the work area 221 is for specific control, and “0200” in hexadecimal if it is the stack area 222 for specific control. If the work area 223 for non-specific control is “0300” in hexadecimal, and if the stack area 224 for non-specific control is “0400” in hexadecimal, the predetermined first information is used as the predetermined first information. Information setting means (a function of executing the processing of step SF903 of the main CPU 63 in the 104th embodiment) for setting in the storage area (carry flag 516),
A gaming machine, wherein the specific process execution means terminates the execution of the specific process when the predetermined first information is set in the predetermined first information storage area.

  According to the feature αDU1, the target address is sequentially updated, and the storage area corresponding to the updated target address is to be subjected to the specific processing. This makes it possible to sequentially execute the specific processing on the plurality of storage areas in the specific storage unit. In this case, when the updated target address is the specific address, the predetermined first information is set, and when the predetermined first information is set, the execution of the specific process ends. With this, it is only necessary to specify whether or not the predetermined first information is set when determining whether or not the execution of the specific processing has been completed for all of the storage areas to be executed. Can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately handle the information stored in the specific storage unit.

Features αDU2. The address is set as data of a plurality of bits,
The address updating means updates the target address by updating an update numerical value for the target address,
The information setting means is configured to change a value of a reference bit (high-order byte 515a) in the multi-bit data when the update numerical value is updated for the target address, so that the predetermined first information is changed. The gaming machine according to feature αDU1, wherein the predetermined first information is set in a storage area.

  According to the feature αDU2, the predetermined first information is set when the value of the reference bit is changed by updating the target address. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration for setting the predetermined first information.

Features αDU3. The address is set as data of a plurality of bits,
The address updating means updates the target address by adding an update numerical value to the target address,
The information setting means may change a value of a reference bit (upper byte 515a) different from a least significant bit in the data of the plurality of bits when the value for updating is added to the target address. The gaming machine according to any one of the features αDU1 and αDU2, wherein the predetermined first information is set in the predetermined first information storage area.

  According to the characteristic αDU3, the predetermined first information is set when a carry to the reference bit occurs due to the addition of the update numerical value to the target address. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration for setting the predetermined first information.

Features αDU4. There are a plurality of the specific addresses,
All of the plurality of specific addresses change the value of the reference bit when the update numerical value is updated for the target address in a situation where the immediately preceding address is set as the target address. The gaming machine according to the feature αDU2 or αDU3, wherein the address is a designated address.

  According to the feature αDU4, in a configuration in which a plurality of specific addresses exist, the target address is updated in a situation where the immediately preceding address is set as the target address for any of the specific addresses, so that the reference bit is updated. The value changes. Then, the predetermined first information is set by changing the value of the reference bit. Thus, even in a configuration in which a plurality of specific addresses exist, it is possible to set the predetermined first information at the same opportunity. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load for specifying the end timing of the specific processing.

Feature αDU5. An address information storage area (address counter 515) configured by a plurality of bytes and in which address information of the target address is set;
The address updating means,
A first update unit (step SF901 of the main CPU 63 in the 104th embodiment) for updating the target address by updating the first byte (lower byte 515b) of the address information storage area with the update numerical value. Function to perform processing),
When the numerical value information of the first byte is changed from one of the minimum value and the maximum value to the other by updating the update numerical value for the first byte, the second byte in the address information storage area is updated. (Updating upper byte 515a) (a function of executing the processing of step SF905 of the main CPU 63 in the 104th embodiment).
The specific address is updated in the first byte by updating the numerical value for update, whereby the numerical information of the first byte is changed from one of the minimum value and the maximum value to the other, and the second byte is updated. Address of the result
The information setting unit is configured to update the predetermined numerical value when the numerical value of the first byte is changed from one of the minimum value and the maximum value to the other by updating the update numerical value for the first byte. Setting the predetermined first information in one information storage area;
The second updating unit is configured to update the second byte when the predetermined first information is set in the predetermined first information storage area when the update numerical value is updated for the first byte. The gaming machine according to any one of features αDU1 to αDU4, which performs updating.

  When the numerical value of the first byte is changed from one of the minimum value and the maximum value to the other by updating the update numerical value for the first byte, the second byte needs to be updated. In this case, when the numerical information of the first byte is changed from one of the minimum value and the maximum value to the other, the predetermined first information is set. Therefore, it is specified whether or not the predetermined first information is set. This makes it possible to specify whether the second byte needs to be updated. In this case, according to the feature αDU5, it is determined whether or not the execution of the specific processing is completed for all of the storage areas to be executed by specifying whether or not the predetermined first information is set. It is possible to do. Thus, by using the configuration for determining whether the second byte needs to be updated, it is determined whether or not the execution of the specific processing has been completed for all the storage areas to be executed. It is possible to do.

Features αDU6. The specific processing execution means is for executing the specific processing on the storage area included in a specific range of addresses in the specific storage means when a specific execution opportunity occurs,
In the address of the specific range, the address which is the last order in the execution order of the specific processing is the specific address, or the address in the order immediately before the specific address (if the specific control work area 221 is used). “00DFDF” in hexadecimal, “01DFDF” in hexadecimal for stack area 222 for specific control, “02DFDF” in hexadecimal for work area 223 for non-specific control, stack area 224 for non-specific control The gaming machine according to any one of the features αDU1 to αDU5, wherein the address in the specific range is set so as to be “03DFDF” in hexadecimal.

  According to the feature αDU6, it is possible to specify whether or not the execution of the specific process on the storage area included in the address in the specific range is completed by specifying whether or not the predetermined first information is set. . Thereby, it becomes easy to specify whether or not the execution of the specific processing on the storage area included in the address in the specific range is completed.

  Features αDU7. The gaming machine according to feature αDU6, wherein an unused storage area is present in the storage area corresponding to an address in an order preceding the address in the specific range in the specific storage unit.

  According to the feature αDU7, the storage area included in the specific range of addresses in the specific storage unit is set so that it is easy to specify whether the execution of the specific processing on the storage area included in the specific range of addresses has been completed. It is possible to do.

Features αDU8. As the address of the specific range, an address of a first specific range (for example, an address range of the stack area 222 for specific control) and an address of a second specific range (for example, an address range of the stack area 224 for non-specific control) are used. Exists,
The specific process execution means executes the specific process on the storage area included in the address of the first specific range in the specific storage device when a first specific execution opportunity occurs, and generates a second specific execution opportunity. When the error occurs, the specific storage means executes the specific processing on the storage area included in the address of the second specific range,
As the specific address, at least a first specific address corresponding to the first specific range of addresses and a second specific address corresponding to the second specific range of addresses,
In the first specific range of addresses, the last order address in the execution order of the specific process is the first specific address or the last specific address with respect to the first specific address, An address in the first specific range is set;
In the address of the second specific range, the last address in the execution order of the specific processing is the second specific address or the address in the order immediately before the second specific address, The gaming machine according to feature αDU6 or αDU7, wherein the address in the second specific range is set.

  According to the feature αDU8, when it is determined whether or not the execution of the specific processing on the storage area included in the address of the first specific range is completed, and when the specific processing on the storage area included in the address of the second specific range is performed. In any case of specifying whether the execution has been completed, it is sufficient to specify whether the predetermined first information is set. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for specifying whether or not the execution of the specific processing has been completed.

  Features αDU9. The gaming machine according to any one of features αDU1 to αDU8, wherein a plurality of types of the specific processing exist.

  According to the feature αDU9, it is possible to specify the end opportunity by specifying whether or not the predetermined first information is set in any of the plurality of types of specifying processes.

  Features αDU10. The gaming machine according to any one of features αDU1 to αDU9, wherein the specifying process is a process for clearing information in the storage area corresponding to the target address.

  According to the feature αDU10, it is possible to reduce the processing load for specifying the end timing of the process of clearing the information of the storage area of the specific storage unit.

  Note that, for the configuration of the features αDU1 to αDU10, the features DA1 to DA15, the features DB1 to DB7, the features DC1 to DC5, the features DD1 to DD10, the features DE1 to DE6, the features DF1 to DF3, the features DG1 to DG18, and the features DH1 to DH1. DH7, features DI1 to DI9, features DJ1 to DJ4, features DK1 to DK7, features DL1 to DL20, features DM1 to DM7, features DN1 to DN6, features DO1 to DO11, features DP1 to DP12, features DQ1 to DQ5, features DR1 to DR1. DR17, features DS1 to DS8, features DT1 to DT13, features DU1 to DU8, features DV1 to DV6, features DW1 to DW11, features DX1 to DX11, features DY1 to DY11, features DZ1 to DZ10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b1 b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 15, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o1 o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y1 y9, features z1 to z6, features αDA1 to αDA10, features αDB1 to αDB6, features αDC1 to αDC13, features αDD1 to αDD9, features αDE1 to αDE5, features αDF1 to αDF9, features αDG1 to αDG10, features αDH1 to αDH11, and features αDI1 to αDI8, feature αDJ1 to αDJ14, feature αDK1 to αDK8, feature αDL1 to αDL11, feature αDM1 to αDM8, feature αDN To αDN6, features αDO1 to αDO7, features αDP1 to αDP7, features αDQ1 to αDQ9, features αDR1 to αDR8, features αDS1 to αDS3, features αDT1 to αDT4, features αDU1 to αDU10, features αDV1 to αDV5, features αDW1 to αDW9, and features αDX1. To αDX4, features αDY1 to αDY11, features αDZ1 to αDZ4, and features αa1 to αa3. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

  According to the invention relating to the above-mentioned feature αDU group, the following problems can be solved.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine has a dish storage section for storing game balls given to a player on the front face of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to a game ball launching device, It is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage unit, for example. Further, in a pachinko machine, a configuration including an upper dish storage section and a lower dish storage section as a dish storage section is also known. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper dish storage section is a game ball launching device. And the surplus game balls in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  Further, in the slot machine, when a new game is started by operating the start lever while a medal is bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation of the reel is started by the rotation start control being executed by the control means, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means executes the rotation start control. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation stop of the reels corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in the gaming machines such as those described above, there is a demand for a configuration capable of suitably executing a process for a specific storage unit for storing information, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic αDV group>
Features αDV1. A numerical information storage area (address counter 515) configured by a plurality of bytes and storing numerical information;
A first update unit (step SF901 of the main CPU 63 in the 104th embodiment) for updating the numerical information by updating the update numerical value for the first byte (lower byte 515b) in the numerical information storage area. Function to perform processing),
When the numerical value information for the first byte is changed from one of the minimum value and the maximum value to the other by updating the update numerical value for the first byte, the predetermined first information storage area (carry) is updated. Information setting means for setting predetermined first information in the flag 516 (function of executing the processing of step SF903 of the main CPU 63 in the 104th embodiment);
The second byte (upper byte) in the numerical information storage area when the predetermined first information is set in the predetermined first information storage area when the update numerical value is updated in the first byte. 515a) a second updating unit (the function of executing the processing of step SF905 of the main CPU 63 in the 104th embodiment),
Special processing execution means for executing special processing based on the setting of the first predetermined information in the first predetermined information storage area (steps SG805 to SG810, steps SF105 to SF105 of the main CPU 63 in the 104th embodiment) SF107 and a function of executing processing of steps SF206 to SF208).

  In the case where the numerical value information for the first byte is changed from one of the minimum value and the maximum value to the other by updating the update numerical value for the first byte, the second byte needs to be updated. In this case, when the numerical information of the first byte is changed from one of the minimum value and the maximum value to the other, the predetermined first information is set. Therefore, it is specified whether or not the predetermined first information is set. This makes it possible to specify whether the second byte needs to be updated. In this case, according to the feature αDV1, it is possible to specify whether or not the special process needs to be performed by specifying whether or not the predetermined first information is set. This makes it possible to specify the trigger for executing the special process by using the configuration for specifying the trigger for updating the numerical information of the second byte. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load for specifying the opportunity to execute the special processing.

Features αDV2. In the case where the update of the update numerical value is performed on the first byte, the predetermined first information is set in the predetermined first information storage area, and the update of the second byte is performed. The first situation (a situation targeting the work area 221 for the specific control and the stack area 222 for the particular control) and the second situation (the work area 223 for the non-specific control and the non- (A situation targeting the stack area 224 for specific control).
The special processing execution means may execute the special processing based on the setting of the predetermined first information in the predetermined first information storage area in any of the first situation and the second situation. The gaming machine according to feature αDV1.

  According to the feature αDV2, the special process is performed based on the setting of the predetermined first information regardless of the first situation and the second situation in which the numerical information of the second byte after the update is different. The processing load for executing the special processing in each of the first situation and the second situation can be reduced.

Features αDV3. A specific storage unit (main-side RAM 65 in the tenth embodiment) having a plurality of storage areas associated with addresses and storing information;
The numerical information stored in the numerical information storage area is information of a target address,
The present gaming machine is configured to execute a specific processing execution unit (the function of executing the processing of Step SF802, Step SG102, and Step SG202 of the main CPU 63 in the 104th embodiment) for setting the storage area corresponding to the target address as the execution target of the specific processing. The gaming machine according to feature αDV1 or αDV2, comprising:

  According to the feature αDV3, it is possible to reduce the processing load for executing the special processing when the special processing is executed accompanying the update of the target address.

  Features αDV4. The game according to the feature αDV3, wherein the special process execution means terminates execution of the specific process as the special process when the predetermined first information is set in the predetermined first information storage area. Machine.

  According to the feature αDV4, it is possible to specify whether or not the execution of the specific process is completed for all of the storage areas to be executed by specifying whether or not the predetermined first information is set. It becomes possible. Thus, by using the configuration for determining whether the second byte needs to be updated, it is determined whether or not the execution of the specific processing has been completed for all the storage areas to be executed. It is possible to do.

  Features αDV5. The gaming machine according to feature αDV4, wherein a plurality of types of the specific processing exist.

  According to the feature αDV5, it is possible to specify the end opportunity by specifying whether or not the predetermined first information is set in any of the plurality of types of specifying processes.

  Note that, for the configuration of the features αDV1 to αDV5, the features DA1 to DA15, the features DB1 to DB7, the features DC1 to DC5, the features DD1 to DD10, the features DE1 to DE6, the features DF1 to DF3, the features DG1 to DG18, and the features DH1 to DH1. DH7, features DI1 to DI9, features DJ1 to DJ4, features DK1 to DK7, features DL1 to DL20, features DM1 to DM7, features DN1 to DN6, features DO1 to DO11, features DP1 to DP12, features DQ1 to DQ5, features DR1 to DR1. DR17, features DS1 to DS8, features DT1 to DT13, features DU1 to DU8, features DV1 to DV6, features DW1 to DW11, features DX1 to DX11, features DY1 to DY11, features DZ1 to DZ10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b1 b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e 9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 15, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y1 y9, features z1 to z6, features αDA1 to αDA10, features αDB1 to αDB6, features αDC1 to αDC13, features αDD1 to αDD9, features αDE1 to αDE5, features αDF1 to αDF9, features αDG1 to αDG10, features αDH1 to αDH11, and features αDI1 to αDI8, feature αDJ1 to αDJ14, feature αDK1 to αDK8, feature αDL1 to αDL11, feature αDM1 to αDM8, feature αDN1 αDN6, features αDO1 to αDO7, features αDP1 to αDP7, features αDQ1 to αDQ9, features αDR1 to αDR8, features αDS1 to αDS3, features αDT1 to αDT4, features αDU1 to αDU10, features αDV1 to αDV5, features αDW1 to αDW9, and features αDX1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of αDX4, features αDY1 to αDY11, features αDZ1 to αDZ4, and features αa1 to αa3 may be applied. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

  According to the invention relating to the above-described feature αDV group, the following problems can be solved.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine has a dish storage section for storing game balls given to a player on the front face of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to a game ball launching device, It is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage unit, for example. Further, in a pachinko machine, a configuration including an upper dish storage section and a lower dish storage section as a dish storage section is also known. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper dish storage section is a game ball launching device. And the surplus game balls in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  Further, in the slot machine, when a new game is started by operating the start lever while a medal is bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation of the reel is started by the rotation start control being executed by the control means, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means executes the rotation start control. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation stop of the reels corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in the gaming machines such as those described above, there is a demand for a configuration capable of suitably executing the processing in the control means, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic αDW group>
Features αDW1. Predetermined operation means (movable body 512);
Predetermined operation control means (sound light side CPU 353) for controlling the operation of the predetermined operation means;
Initial operation control means for causing the predetermined operation means to perform an initial operation when the supply of the operation power is started (the function of executing the process of step SG311 of the sound light side CPU 353 in the 104th embodiment, the sound in the 105th embodiment) A function of executing the process of step SG412 of the optical side CPU 353);
Delay means for delaying the start timing of the initial operation (the function of executing the processing of step SG310 of the sound-light side CPU 353 in the 104th embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step SG411 of the sound-light side CPU 353 in the 105th embodiment) And a gaming machine comprising:

  According to the feature αDW1, the initial operation is performed by the predetermined operation means when the supply of the operation power is started. Therefore, when the supply of the operation power is started, it is determined whether or not the predetermined operation means operates normally. Becomes possible. In this case, since the start timing of the initial operation in the predetermined operation means is delayed, it is not necessary to confirm the initial operation immediately after the supply of the operation power is started, and the initial operation can be confirmed with a margin. Can be performed.

Feature αDW2. Specific operation means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204);
A specific operation control means (main CPU 63) for controlling the operation of the specific operation means;
Means for causing the specific operation means to perform an initial operation when the supply of operating power is started (a function of executing the processing of step SF524 of the main CPU 63 and a function of executing the second timer interrupt processing in the 104th embodiment) And
One of the specific operation means and the predetermined operation means is provided so as to be visible by exposing the back side of the gaming machine,
The gaming machine according to claim αDW1, wherein the other of the specific operation unit and the predetermined operation unit is provided so as to be visible from a front side of the gaming machine.

  According to the characteristic αDW2, the initial operation is performed by the specific operation unit when the supply of the operation power is started. Therefore, when the supply of the operation power is started, it is determined whether or not the specific operation unit normally operates. Becomes possible. Also, one of the specific operation means and the predetermined operation means becomes visible by exposing the back side of the gaming machine, while the other becomes visible from the front side of the gaming machine. In order to confirm the initial operation of each of the operation means, it is necessary to visually check each of the rear side and the front side of the gaming machine. In this case, the configuration of the characteristic αDW1 is provided, and the start timing of the initial operation in the predetermined operation means is delayed. Thus, after confirming the initial operation in the specific operation means, it is possible to confirm the initial operation in the predetermined operation means, and it is possible to suitably confirm each initial operation.

Features αDW3. Specific operation means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204) provided so as to be visible by exposing the back side of the gaming machine;
A specific operation control means (main CPU 63) for controlling the operation of the specific operation means;
Means for causing the specific operation means to perform an initial operation when the supply of operating power is started (a function of executing the processing of step SF524 of the main CPU 63 and a function of executing the second timer interrupt processing in the 104th embodiment) And
The gaming machine according to feature αDW1, wherein the predetermined operation means is provided so as to be visible from the front side of the gaming machine.

  According to the feature αDW3, the initial operation is performed by the specific operation unit when the supply of the operation power is started. Therefore, when the supply of the operation power is started, it is determined whether the specific operation unit normally operates. Becomes possible. In addition, while the specific operation means becomes visible by exposing the back side of the gaming machine, the predetermined operation means becomes visible from the front side of the gaming machine. In order to confirm the initial operation, it is necessary to visually check the back side and the front side of the gaming machine. In this case, the configuration of the characteristic αDW1 is provided, and the start timing of the initial operation in the predetermined operation means is delayed. Thus, after exposing the back side of the gaming machine and checking the initial operation in the specific operation means, it is possible to return to a normal state in which the front side of the gaming machine is visible and check the initial operation in the predetermined operation means. This makes it possible to suitably confirm each initial operation.

  Feature αDW4. The gaming machine according to any one of features αDW1 to αDW3, wherein the delay unit sets a standby period for delaying a start timing of the initial operation.

  According to the feature αDW4, since the initial operation of the predetermined operation unit is delayed by measuring the standby period, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for delaying the initial operation of the predetermined operation unit.

Feature αDW5. A progress control means (main CPU 63) for controlling the progress of the game,
The predetermined operation control means controls the operation of the predetermined operation means based on instruction information transmitted from the progress control means,
After the supply of the operating power is started, the delay means sends start reference information (normal return command, clear return command, confirmation return command, and update return command in the 104th embodiment) from the progress control means. The gaming machine according to claim αDW4, wherein in the 105th embodiment, the standby period is set when a clearing return command, a confirmation returning command, and a updating returning command are received.

  According to the characteristic αDW5, the measurement of the standby period is performed based on the timing at which the start reference information transmitted from the progress control unit is received. This makes it possible to delay the initial operation of the predetermined operation means based on the progress of the control in the progress control means.

Feature αDW6. The progress control means executes processing at the start of supply of operating power (steps SF501 to SF523 of the main CPU 63 in the 104th embodiment) when supply of operating power is started. It is to transmit different types of the start reference information according to the execution content of the process at the start of power supply,
The gaming machine according to the feature [alpha] DW5, wherein the delay unit sets the waiting period regardless of which type of the start reference information is received.

  According to the feature αDW6, the progress control means transmits different types of start reference information according to the execution content of the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power. It is possible to execute the control according to the execution contents of the process. In this case, no matter what kind of start reference information is transmitted, a standby period for delaying the initial operation of the predetermined operation unit is set. It is possible to delay the initial operation of the predetermined operation means irrespective of the execution contents of the processing.

Features αDW7. The progress control means executes processing at the start of supply of operating power (steps SF501 to SF523 of the main CPU 63 in the 104th embodiment) when supply of operating power is started. It is to transmit different types of the start reference information according to the execution content of the process at the start of power supply,
The delay means sets the waiting period when receiving predetermined types of the start reference information (a return command at the time of clearing, a return command at the time of confirmation, and a return command at the time of updating). The gaming machine according to feature αDW5, wherein the standby period is not set when the start reference information (normal return command) is received.

  According to the characteristic αDW7, the progress control means transmits different types of start reference information according to the execution contents of the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power. It is possible to execute the control according to the execution contents of the process. In this case, a standby period is set when a predetermined type of start reference information is transmitted, and a standby period is not set when start reference information other than the predetermined type is transmitted. Accordingly, it is possible to cause a situation where the initial operation of the predetermined operation means is delayed and a situation where the initial operation is not delayed according to the execution content of the process at the start of supply of the operation power in the progress control means.

  Features αDW8. When the supply of the operating power is started, the progress control means executes processing at the start of the supply of the operating power (steps SF501 to SF523 of the main CPU 63 in the 104th embodiment). The gaming machine according to any one of the features αDW5 to αDW7, wherein the start reference information is transmitted when the process at the start of power supply ends.

  According to the feature αDW8, it is possible to delay the initial operation of the predetermined operation unit with reference to the timing when the process of starting the supply of the operation power in the progress control unit is completed.

Features αDW9. The predetermined operation means is provided so as to be visible from the front side of the gaming machine,
The delay means delays the start timing of the initial operation when an operation for exposing the back side of the gaming machine is performed when the supply of the operation power is started, and when the supply of the operation power is started The gaming machine according to any one of features αDW1 to αDW8, wherein the start timing of the initial operation is not delayed when the operation of exposing the back side of the gaming machine is not performed.

  According to the characteristic αDW9, when the supply of the operation power is started and the operation of exposing the back side of the gaming machine is performed, the start timing of the initial operation of the predetermined operation means is delayed, so that In such a situation, it is possible to confirm the initial operation in the predetermined operation means after returning to the normal state in which the front side of the gaming machine is visible. On the other hand, when the supply of the operation power is started, if the operation of exposing the back side of the gaming machine is not performed, the start timing of the initial operation of the predetermined operation means is not delayed, so in such a situation, Immediately after the supply of the operating power is started, it is possible to confirm the initial operation in the predetermined operating means.

  In addition, for the configuration of the features αDW1 to αDW9, the features DA1 to DA15, the features DB1 to DB7, the features DC1 to DC5, the features DD1 to DD10, the features DE1 to DE6, the features DF1 to DF3, the features DG1 to DG18, and the features DH1 to DH1. DH7, features DI1 to DI9, features DJ1 to DJ4, features DK1 to DK7, features DL1 to DL20, features DM1 to DM7, features DN1 to DN6, features DO1 to DO11, features DP1 to DP12, features DQ1 to DQ5, features DR1 to DR1. DR17, features DS1 to DS8, features DT1 to DT13, features DU1 to DU8, features DV1 to DV6, features DW1 to DW11, features DX1 to DX11, features DY1 to DY11, features DZ1 to DZ10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b1 b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e 9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 15, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y1 y9, features z1 to z6, features αDA1 to αDA10, features αDB1 to αDB6, features αDC1 to αDC13, features αDD1 to αDD9, features αDE1 to αDE5, features αDF1 to αDF9, features αDG1 to αDG10, features αDH1 to αDH11, and features αDI1 to αDI8, feature αDJ1 to αDJ14, feature αDK1 to αDK8, feature αDL1 to αDL11, feature αDM1 to αDM8, feature αDN1 αDN6, features αDO1 to αDO7, features αDP1 to αDP7, features αDQ1 to αDQ9, features αDR1 to αDR8, features αDS1 to αDS3, features αDT1 to αDT4, features αDU1 to αDU10, features αDV1 to αDV5, features αDW1 to αDW9, and features αDX1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of αDX4, features αDY1 to αDY11, features αDZ1 to αDZ4, and features αa1 to αa3 may be applied. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

  According to the invention relating to the above-described feature αDW group, the following problem can be solved.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine has a dish storage section for storing game balls given to a player on the front face of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to a game ball launching device, It is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage unit, for example. Further, in a pachinko machine, a configuration including an upper dish storage section and a lower dish storage section as a dish storage section is also known. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper dish storage section is a game ball launching device. And the surplus game balls in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  Further, in the slot machine, when a new game is started by operating the start lever while a medal is bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation of the reel is started by the rotation start control being executed by the control means, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means executes the rotation start control. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation stop of the reels corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in the gaming machine as exemplified above, it is necessary to suitably confirm whether or not the predetermined operation means operates normally, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic αDX group>
Features αDX1. Progress control means (main CPU 63) for controlling the progress of the game;
Predetermined operation means (movable body 512);
Predetermined operation control means (sound-light-side CPU 353) for controlling the operation of the predetermined operation means based on instruction information transmitted from the progress control means,
The progress control means includes:
Means (Step SF501 to Step SF523 of the Main CPU 63 in the 104th Embodiment) for Performing Processing at the Start of Supply of Operating Power when Supply of Operating Power is Started (Step SF501 of the Main CPU 63 in the 104th Embodiment) To execute the process of step SF523);
When the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power is executed, start reference information (normal return command, return command at the time of clearing, return command at the time of confirmation and return command at the time of update in the 104th embodiment, 105th embodiment Now, a start transmission unit (step SF514, step SF519, step SF607, and step SF714 of the main CPU 63 in the 104th embodiment) for transmitting a normal return command, a return command for clearing, a return command for confirmation, and a return command for update. Function to execute the processing of), and
The gaming machine, wherein the predetermined operation control means causes the predetermined operation means to perform a predetermined operation (initial operation) after receiving the start reference information.

  According to the feature αDX1, the predetermined operation is performed by the predetermined operation unit after the predetermined operation control unit receives the start reference information transmitted when the process at the time of starting the supply of the operation power is performed by the progress control unit. Thus, the predetermined operation can be performed by the predetermined operation unit after the processing at the start of the supply of the operation power is performed by the progress control unit.

Feature αDX2. The start transmission unit transmits different types of the start reference information according to the execution content of the process at the start of the supply of the operation power,
The gaming machine according to (αDX1), wherein the predetermined operation control means causes the predetermined operation means to perform the predetermined operation regardless of which type of the start reference information is received.

  According to the feature αDX2, the predetermined operation is performed by the predetermined operation means regardless of which type of start reference information is transmitted. Irrespective of this, the predetermined operation can be performed by the predetermined operation means.

Feature αDX3. The start transmission unit transmits different types of the start reference information according to the execution content of the process at the start of the supply of the operation power,
The predetermined operation control means receives a predetermined type of the start reference information (a return command at the time of clearing, a return command at the time of confirmation, and a return command at the time of update) and the start reference information other than the predetermined type. The gaming machine according to any one of the features αDX1 and αDX2, wherein the control content of the predetermined operation unit is different from that when a normal return command is received.

  According to the feature αDX3, the progress control means transmits different types of start reference information in accordance with the execution contents of the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power. It is possible to execute the control according to the execution contents of the process. In this case, the control content of the predetermined operation means is different between when the predetermined type of start reference information is transmitted and when the start reference information other than the predetermined type is transmitted. Accordingly, it is possible to make the execution mode of the predetermined operation of the predetermined operation unit different depending on the execution content of the processing at the start of the supply of the operation power in the progress control unit.

  Feature αDX4. The gaming machine according to any one of the features αDX1 to αDX3, wherein the start transmitting unit transmits the start reference information when the process at the start of the supply of the operation power ends.

  According to the feature αDX4, it is possible to cause the predetermined operation means to perform the predetermined operation based on the timing at which the processing at the start of the supply of the operation power by the progress control means ends.

  In addition, for the configuration of the features αDX1 to αDX4, the features DA1 to DA15, the features DB1 to DB7, the features DC1 to DC5, the features DD1 to DD10, the features DE1 to DE6, the features DF1 to DF3, the features DG1 to DG18, and the features DH1 to DH1. DH7, features DI1 to DI9, features DJ1 to DJ4, features DK1 to DK7, features DL1 to DL20, features DM1 to DM7, features DN1 to DN6, features DO1 to DO11, features DP1 to DP12, features DQ1 to DQ5, features DR1 to DR1. DR17, features DS1 to DS8, features DT1 to DT13, features DU1 to DU8, features DV1 to DV6, features DW1 to DW11, features DX1 to DX11, features DY1 to DY11, features DZ1 to DZ10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b1 b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e 9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 15, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y1 y9, features z1 to z6, features αDA1 to αDA10, features αDB1 to αDB6, features αDC1 to αDC13, features αDD1 to αDD9, features αDE1 to αDE5, features αDF1 to αDF9, features αDG1 to αDG10, features αDH1 to αDH11, and features αDI1 to αDI8, feature αDJ1 to αDJ14, feature αDK1 to αDK8, feature αDL1 to αDL11, feature αDM1 to αDM8, feature αDN1 αDN6, features αDO1 to αDO7, features αDP1 to αDP7, features αDQ1 to αDQ9, features αDR1 to αDR8, features αDS1 to αDS3, features αDT1 to αDT4, features αDU1 to αDU10, features αDV1 to αDV5, features αDW1 to αDW9, and features αDX1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of αDX4, features αDY1 to αDY11, features αDZ1 to αDZ4, and features αa1 to αa3 may be applied. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

  According to the invention relating to the above-described feature αDX group, the following problems can be solved.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine has a dish storage section for storing game balls given to a player on the front face of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to a game ball launching device, It is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage unit, for example. Further, in a pachinko machine, a configuration including an upper dish storage section and a lower dish storage section as a dish storage section is also known. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper dish storage section is a game ball launching device. And the surplus game balls in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  Further, in the slot machine, when a new game is started by operating the start lever while a medal is bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation of the reel is started by the rotation start control being executed by the control means, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means executes the rotation start control. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation stop of the reels corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in the gaming machine as exemplified above, it is necessary to appropriately perform control for performing the predetermined operation by the predetermined operation means, and there is still room for improvement in this point.

<Characteristic αDY group>
Features αDY1. Specific information storage means having a setting correspondence storage area (setting reference area 341) for storing setting correspondence information corresponding to a setting value set as an object of use from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage. (Main RAM 65);
Means for executing a profit providing process in a mode corresponding to the setting correspondence information (a function of executing the processes of steps S503 and S504 in the main CPU 63);
Setting-related execution means for executing predetermined setting-related processing relating to the set value (function of executing processing of steps SG701 to SG712 of main CPU 63 in the 106th embodiment);
When the predetermined setting related processing is executed, a predetermined storage area (specific control work area 221 and specific control stack area 222) different from the setting corresponding storage area in the specific information storage unit is initialized. A gaming machine comprising: an initialization execution unit (a function of executing steps SG801 to SG807 of the main CPU 63 in the 106th embodiment) for executing an initialization process for performing the initialization.

  According to the feature αDY1, the setting value to be used is set from the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the degree of advantage of the player. Therefore, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. That you expect. In this case, when the predetermined setting-related processing is executed, the predetermined storage area in the specific information storage unit is initialized, and when the predetermined setting-related processing is executed, the predetermined storage area is initialized. The game can be started in the initialized state. Further, even when the predetermined storage area is initialized, the setting corresponding storage area is excluded from the target of the initialization, so that the predetermined setting-related processing is performed while keeping the setting value unchanged. Is executed, the game can be started in a state where the predetermined storage area has been initialized.

  Features αDY2. A specific-related notification execution unit that executes a specific-related notification process for executing the specific-related notification when the predetermined setting-related process is performed (the process of step SG808 of the main CPU 63 in the 106th embodiment). A gaming machine according to feature αDY1.

  According to the feature αDY2, when the predetermined setting-related processing is executed, the specific-related notification is executed when the predetermined setting-related processing is executed in the configuration in which the predetermined storage area is initialized when the predetermined setting-related processing is executed. By confirming that the specific related notification is being executed, the manager of the gaming hall can grasp that the predetermined setting related processing has been executed and that the predetermined storage area has been initialized.

  Features αDY3. The game according to feature αDY2, wherein the specific related notification is executed so that the specific relevant notification can be confirmed without requiring an opening operation of the gaming machine front body (the gaming machine main body 12). Machine.

  According to the feature αDY3, since the specific related notification is performed so that the confirmation can be performed without the need to open the front body of the gaming machine, the administrator of the gaming hall executes the predetermined setting related processing. And it becomes easy to grasp that the predetermined storage area has been initialized.

  Feature αDY4. The gaming machine according to the feature [alpha] DY2 or [alpha] DY3, wherein the specific related notification is performed until a specific relevant period elapses after the predetermined setting related process is performed.

  According to the feature αDY4, since the specific related notification is executed until the specific related period elapses after the predetermined setting related process is executed, the manager of the gaming hall recognizes that the specific related notification is being executed. It will be easier.

  Feature αDY5. The gaming machine according to any one of features αDY2 to αDY4, wherein a process for advancing a game is executed even in a situation where the specific related notification is being executed.

  According to the feature αDY5, since the process for advancing the game is executed even in the situation where the specific related notification is being executed, it is possible to execute the specific related notification while not obstructing the progress of the game. Becomes

  Feature αDY6. The initialization executing means, when the predetermined setting-related processing is executed, calls a predetermined aggregation processing (RAM clear processing in the 106th embodiment) including both the initialization processing and the specific relevant notification processing, Even when the predetermined setting-related processing is not executed, the initialization trigger (supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 in a state where the setting key insertion unit 68a is in the OFF state and the reset button 68c is pressed). The gaming machine according to any one of the features αDY2 to αDY5, wherein the predetermined aggregation process is called based on the occurrence of (i.).

  According to the characteristic αDY6, even when the predetermined setting-related processing is not executed, the predetermined storage area initialization processing and the specific related notification processing are executed based on the occurrence of the initialization trigger. In this case, regardless of whether the setting-related processing has been executed or the initialization trigger has occurred, initialization is performed by calling up the predetermined aggregation processing including both the initialization processing and the specific-related notification processing. Both the processing and the specific related notification processing are executed. This makes it possible to execute both the initialization processing and the specific-related notification processing in each of the above situations while simplifying the processing configuration.

Features αDY7. The setting-related execution means is configured to execute the predetermined operation based on the occurrence of a specific event (ON operation of the setting key insertion unit 68a) that occurs in a state where the opening / closing body (the gaming machine main body 12) is in an open state. Performs setting-related processing,
The gaming machine is configured to execute a closing correspondence notification based on the fact that the opening / closing body is changed from the open state to the closed state. The gaming machine according to any one of the features DY1 to DY6, which has a function of executing

  According to the characteristic αDY7, the predetermined setting-related processing is executed based on the occurrence of the specific event to be generated in the state where the opening / closing body is in the open state, so that the predetermined setting-related processing is executed. In such a case, the opening / closing body needs to be in an open state, and even if an attempt is made to execute a predetermined setting-related process fraudulently, it becomes difficult to perform the process. Further, since the closing response notification is executed based on the opening / closing body being changed from the open state to the closed state, the opening / closing body is actually opened after the opening / closing body is set to the open state in order to illegally execute a predetermined setting-related process. Even if the opening / closing body is closed without making the setting-related processing illegally executed, the closing correspondence notification is executed after the closing state. Therefore, it becomes possible for the manager of the gaming hall to know whether or not the wrongdoing has occurred.

Features αDY8. The setting-related execution means is configured to execute the predetermined operation based on the occurrence of a specific event (ON operation of the setting key insertion unit 68a) that occurs in a state where the opening / closing body (the gaming machine main body 12) is in an open state. Performs setting-related processing,
This gaming machine is
A specific-related notification execution unit that executes a specific-related notification process for executing the specific-related notification when the predetermined setting-related process is performed (the process of step SG808 of the main CPU 63 in the 106th embodiment). Function to execute)
A predetermined target notification execution for executing a predetermined target notification process for executing a predetermined target notification based on a predetermined target operation being one of an opening operation and a closing operation performed on the opening / closing body. (The function of executing the process of step SG904 of the main CPU 63 in the 106th embodiment).
The gaming machine according to any one of features αDY1 to αDY7, wherein the specific related notification has a higher execution priority set than the predetermined target notification.

  According to the feature αDY8, when the predetermined setting related processing is executed, the specific related notification is executed when the predetermined setting related processing is executed in the configuration in which the predetermined storage area is initialized when the predetermined setting related processing is executed. By confirming that the specific related notification is being executed, the manager of the gaming hall can grasp that the predetermined setting related processing has been executed and that the predetermined storage area has been initialized. In addition, since the predetermined setting-related processing is performed based on the occurrence of a specific event that occurs in a state where the opening and closing body is in the open state, the opening and closing body is required to execute the predetermined setting-related processing. Is required to be in an open state, and even if an attempt is made to illegally execute a predetermined setting-related process, it becomes difficult to perform the process. Further, since the predetermined target notification is performed based on the fact that the predetermined target operation has been performed on the opening / closing body, the opening / closing body may be opened to illegally perform the predetermined setting-related processing. The notification of the predetermined object is also performed on the notification. Therefore, it becomes possible for the manager of the gaming hall to know whether or not the wrongdoing has occurred. In addition, since the specific related notification has a higher execution priority than the predetermined target notification, it is possible to notify whether or not the predetermined target operation has been performed on the opening / closing body, It is possible to directly report that the setting-related processing is being performed.

Features αDY9. The predetermined target notification is configured to be executed until a predetermined target related period elapses after the predetermined target operation is performed on the opening / closing body,
The predetermined target notification execution means is configured to execute the predetermined target related period after the specific target notification is performed with higher priority than the predetermined target notification and the predetermined target operation is performed on the opening / closing body. The gaming machine according to the feature [alpha] DY8, wherein, when the specific related notification ends before the elapse, the predetermined target notification is performed over a remaining period of the predetermined target related period.

  According to the feature αDY9, in a configuration in which the specific related notification has a higher execution priority than the predetermined target notification, it is possible to execute the predetermined target notification after the specific relevant notification ends. Further, even when the predetermined target notification is executed after the specific relevant notification ends, the execution period is not changed until the specific relevant notification ends after the predetermined target operation is performed on the opening / closing body. The remaining period is obtained by subtracting the required period from the predetermined target related period. This makes it possible to prevent the total execution period of the notification from being excessively long when the predetermined target notification is executed after the end of the specific related notification.

Features αDY10. The specific related notification is configured to be executed until a specific related period elapses after the predetermined setting related processing is performed,
The gaming machine according to feature αDY9, wherein the predetermined target related period is set to a period longer than the specific related period.

  According to the feature αDY10, even when the specific related notification is executed with a higher priority than the predetermined target notification, the execution period of the predetermined target notification can be secured after the end of the specific related notification.

  Features αDY11. The gaming machine according to any one of the features αDY1 to αDY10, wherein the predetermined setting-related process is a process of changing the set value to be used.

  According to the feature αDY11, when the process of changing the setting value to be used is executed, the predetermined storage area in the specific information storage unit is initialized, thereby changing the setting value to be used. Is executed, the game can be started in a state where the predetermined storage area has been initialized. Further, even when the predetermined storage area is initialized, the setting corresponding storage area is excluded from the target of the initialization, so that the setting value to be used while the setting value is not changed is changed. When the process of changing the value is executed, the game can be started in a situation where the predetermined storage area has been initialized.

  In addition, for the configuration of the features αDY1 to αDY11, the features DA1 to DA15, the features DB1 to DB7, the features DC1 to DC5, the features DD1 to DD10, the features DE1 to DE6, the features DF1 to DF3, the features DG1 to DG18, and the features DH1 to DH1. DH7, features DI1 to DI9, features DJ1 to DJ4, features DK1 to DK7, features DL1 to DL20, features DM1 to DM7, features DN1 to DN6, features DO1 to DO11, features DP1 to DP12, features DQ1 to DQ5, features DR1 to DR1. DR17, features DS1 to DS8, features DT1 to DT13, features DU1 to DU8, features DV1 to DV6, features DW1 to DW11, features DX1 to DX11, features DY1 to DY11, features DZ1 to DZ10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b1 b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 15, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o1 o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y1 y9, features z1 to z6, features αDA1 to αDA10, features αDB1 to αDB6, features αDC1 to αDC13, features αDD1 to αDD9, features αDE1 to αDE5, features αDF1 to αDF9, features αDG1 to αDG10, features αDH1 to αDH11, and features αDI1 to αDI8, feature αDJ1 to αDJ14, feature αDK1 to αDK8, feature αDL1 to αDL11, feature αDM1 to αDM8, feature αDN To αDN6, features αDO1 to αDO7, features αDP1 to αDP7, features αDQ1 to αDQ9, features αDR1 to αDR8, features αDS1 to αDS3, features αDT1 to αDT4, features αDU1 to αDU10, features αDV1 to αDV5, features αDW1 to αDW9, and features αDX1. To αDX4, features αDY1 to αDY11, features αDZ1 to αDZ4, and features αa1 to αa3. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

  According to the invention relating to the above-mentioned feature αDY group, the following problems can be solved.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine has a dish storage section for storing game balls given to a player on the front face of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to a game ball launching device, It is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage unit, for example. Further, in a pachinko machine, a configuration including an upper dish storage section and a lower dish storage section as a dish storage section is also known. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper dish storage section is a game ball launching device. And the surplus game balls in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  Further, in the slot machine, when a new game is started by operating the start lever while a medal is bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation of the reel is started by the rotation start control being executed by the control means, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means executes the rotation start control. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation stop of the reels corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in the gaming machine as exemplified above, it is necessary to make the configuration relating to the set value that determines the advantage of the gaming machine suitable, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Characteristic αDZ group>
Features αDZ1. A first notification execution unit (step SG808 of the main CPU 63 in the 106th embodiment) configured to execute the first notification based on the occurrence of the first notification trigger (execution of the setting confirmation process). A function of executing processing and a function of executing the processing of step SH107 of the sound-light side CPU 353);
A second notification execution means (second notification unit) configured to execute the second notification over the second notification period based on the occurrence of the second notification trigger (the gaming machine body 12 is changed from the open state to the closed state). A function of executing the processing of step SG904 of the main CPU 63 and a function of executing the processing of step SH114 of the sound-light CPU 353 in the 106th embodiment).
The execution priority of the first notification is set higher than that of the second notification,
The second notification execution unit may be configured to execute the first notification prior to the second notification and perform the second notification before the second notification period elapses after the second notification trigger occurs. A game machine wherein, when one notification ends, the second notification is executed over the remaining period of the second notification period.

  According to the feature αDZ1, in a configuration in which the first notification has a higher execution priority than the second notification, it is possible to execute the second notification after the first notification ends. Further, even when the second notification is executed after the first notification ends, the execution period is determined by the period required until the first notification ends after the occurrence of the second notification. This is the remaining period subtracted from the two notification periods. This makes it possible to prevent the total execution period of the notifications from being excessively long when the second notification is executed after the end of the first notification.

Feature αDZ2. The first notification is configured to be executed until a first notification period elapses after the first notification trigger occurs,
The gaming machine according to claim αDZ1, wherein the second notification period is set to a longer period than the first notification period.

  According to the feature αDZ2, even when the first notification is executed prior to the second notification, the execution period of the second notification can be secured after the end of the first notification.

Features αDZ3. Means for executing the profit providing process in a mode corresponding to the set value set as the use target from among the plurality of set values corresponding to the player's advantage (the process of steps S503 and S504 in the main CPU 63 is executed). Function to perform)
Based on the occurrence of a specific event (ON operation of the setting key insertion unit 68a) that occurs in a state where the opening / closing body (the gaming machine main body 12) is in an open state, a predetermined setting-related process related to the setting value (A function of executing the processing of steps SG701 to SG712 of the main CPU 63 in the 106th embodiment),
When the predetermined setting-related processing is executed, the first notification trigger occurs,
The gaming machine according to any one of claims αDZ1 and αDZ2, wherein the second notification opportunity is generated based on a predetermined target operation that is one of an opening operation and a closing operation performed on the opening / closing body.

  According to the feature αDZ3, the first notification is executed when the predetermined setting-related processing is executed. Therefore, the administrator of the game hall confirms that the first notification is being executed, and thereby performs the predetermined setting. It is possible to know that the related processing has been executed. In addition, since the predetermined setting-related processing is performed based on the occurrence of a specific event that occurs in a state where the opening and closing body is in the open state, the opening and closing body is required to execute the predetermined setting-related processing. Is required to be in an open state, and even if an attempt is made to illegally execute a predetermined setting-related process, it becomes difficult to perform the process. Further, since the second notification is performed based on the fact that the predetermined target operation is performed on the opening / closing body, the opening / closing body is set to the open state in order to illegally execute the predetermined setting-related processing. Also, the second notification is executed in response thereto, so that the manager of the gaming hall can grasp the presence or absence of the illegal act. In addition, since the first notification has a higher execution priority than the second notification, it is possible to notify whether or not a predetermined target operation has been performed on the opening / closing body, It is possible to directly report that the setting-related processing is being performed.

  Features αDZ4. The gaming machine according to the feature [alpha] DZ3, wherein the setting-related execution means executes a process for notifying a current setting value as the predetermined setting-related process.

  According to the feature αDZ4, when the process for confirming the current set value is executed, the first notification is executed, so that the manager of the game hall can determine whether or not the set value has been confirmed. It is possible to confirm.

  In addition, for the configuration of the features αDZ1 to αDZ4, the features DA1 to DA15, the features DB1 to DB7, the features DC1 to DC5, the features DD1 to DD10, the features DE1 to DE6, the features DF1 to DF3, the features DG1 to DG18, and the features DH1 to DH1. DH7, features DI1 to DI9, features DJ1 to DJ4, features DK1 to DK7, features DL1 to DL20, features DM1 to DM7, features DN1 to DN6, features DO1 to DO11, features DP1 to DP12, features DQ1 to DQ5, features DR1 to DR1. DR17, features DS1 to DS8, features DT1 to DT13, features DU1 to DU8, features DV1 to DV6, features DW1 to DW11, features DX1 to DX11, features DY1 to DY11, features DZ1 to DZ10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b1 b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e 9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 15, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y1 y9, features z1 to z6, features αDA1 to αDA10, features αDB1 to αDB6, features αDC1 to αDC13, features αDD1 to αDD9, features αDE1 to αDE5, features αDF1 to αDF9, features αDG1 to αDG10, features αDH1 to αDH11, and features αDI1 to αDI8, feature αDJ1 to αDJ14, feature αDK1 to αDK8, feature αDL1 to αDL11, feature αDM1 to αDM8, feature αDN1 αDN6, features αDO1 to αDO7, features αDP1 to αDP7, features αDQ1 to αDQ9, features αDR1 to αDR8, features αDS1 to αDS3, features αDT1 to αDT4, features αDU1 to αDU10, features αDV1 to αDV5, features αDW1 to αDW9, and features αDX1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of αDX4, features αDY1 to αDY11, features αDZ1 to αDZ4, and features αa1 to αa3 may be applied. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

  According to the invention relating to the above-mentioned feature αDZ group, the following problems can be solved.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine has a dish storage section for storing game balls given to a player on the front face of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to a game ball launching device, It is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage unit, for example. Further, in a pachinko machine, a configuration including an upper dish storage section and a lower dish storage section as a dish storage section is also known. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper dish storage section is a game ball launching device. And the surplus game balls in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  Further, in the slot machine, when a new game is started by operating the start lever while a medal is bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation of the reel is started by the rotation start control being executed by the control means, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means executes the rotation start control. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation stop of the reels corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in the gaming machines as exemplified above, it is necessary to appropriately execute the notification, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Characteristic αa group>
Features αa1. Means for executing the profit providing process in a mode corresponding to the set value set as the use target from among the plurality of set values corresponding to the player's advantage (the process of steps S503 and S504 in the main CPU 63 is executed). Function to perform)
The current setting value is notified based on the occurrence of a specific event (ON operation of the setting key insertion unit 68a) that occurs in a state where the opening / closing body (the gaming machine main body 12) is in the open state. Means for executing a setting confirmation process for setting the function (a function of executing a setting confirmation process in the main CPU 63);
A first notification execution unit (a function for executing the processing of step SG808 of the main CPU 63 in the 106th embodiment and a function of the sound CPU 353) for executing the first notification when the setting confirmation processing is executed. A function of executing the processing of step SH107);
Second notification executing means (a main CPU 63 in the 106th embodiment) configured to execute a second notification when a predetermined target operation, one of an opening operation and a closing operation, is performed on the opening / closing body. A function of executing the processing of step SG904 and a function of executing the processing of step SH114 of the sound-light side CPU 353).
A gaming machine wherein the first notification has a higher execution priority than the second notification.

  According to the feature αa1, the first notification is executed when the setting confirmation processing is executed. Therefore, the administrator of the game hall confirms that the first notification is executed, and thereby performs the setting confirmation processing. Can be grasped that the execution has been performed. In addition, since the predetermined setting confirmation process is performed based on the occurrence of the specific event that occurs in the state where the opening and closing body is in the open state, the opening and closing body is required to execute the setting confirmation process. Is required to be in an open state, and it is possible to make it difficult to perform the setting confirmation process illegally. In addition, since the second notification is performed based on the operation of the predetermined object performed on the opening / closing body, even when the opening / closing body is set to the open state in order to illegally execute the setting confirmation process. In response, a second notification is performed. Therefore, it becomes possible for the manager of the gaming hall to know whether or not the wrongdoing has occurred. In addition, since the first notification has a higher execution priority than the second notification, it is possible to notify whether or not a predetermined target operation has been performed on the opening / closing body while checking the setting. It is possible to directly report that the application process is being performed.

Feature αa2. The second notification is configured to be executed until a predetermined target related period elapses after the predetermined target operation is performed on the opening / closing body,
The second notification execution means may be configured to execute the predetermined notification after the predetermined target operation is performed on the opening / closing body when the first notification is performed prior to the second notification. The gaming machine according to feature αa1, wherein, if the first notification is completed before the elapse, the second notification is executed over a remaining period of the predetermined target related period.

  According to the feature αa2, in a configuration in which the first notification has a higher execution priority than the second notification, it is possible to execute the second notification after the first notification ends. Even in the case where the second notification is executed after the first notification is completed, the execution period is not changed until the first notification is completed after the predetermined target operation is performed on the opening / closing body. The remaining period is obtained by subtracting the required period from the predetermined target related period. This makes it possible to prevent the total execution period of the notifications from being excessively long when the second notification is executed after the end of the first notification.

Feature αa3. The first notification is configured to be executed until a specific related period elapses after the setting confirmation process is executed,
The gaming machine according to feature αa2, wherein the predetermined target related period is set to a period longer than the specific related period.

  According to the feature αa3, even when the first notification is performed with priority over the second notification, it is possible to secure the execution period of the second notification after the end of the first notification.

  Note that, for the configuration of the features αa1 to αa3, the features DA1 to DA15, the features DB1 to DB7, the features DC1 to DC5, the features DD1 to DD10, the features DE1 to DE6, the features DF1 to DF3, the features DG1 to DG18, and the features DH1 to DH1. DH7, features DI1 to DI9, features DJ1 to DJ4, features DK1 to DK7, features DL1 to DL20, features DM1 to DM7, features DN1 to DN6, features DO1 to DO11, features DP1 to DP12, features DQ1 to DQ5, features DR1 to DR1. DR17, features DS1 to DS8, features DT1 to DT13, features DU1 to DU8, features DV1 to DV6, features DW1 to DW11, features DX1 to DX11, features DY1 to DY11, features DZ1 to DZ10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b1 b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, Features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 15, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, Features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, Features z1 to z6, features αDA1 to αDA10, features αDB1 to αDB6, features αDC1 to αDC13, features αDD1 to αDD9, features αDE1 to αDE5, features αDF1 to αDF9, features αDG1 to αDG10, features αDH1 to αDH11, features αDI1 to αDI8, Features αDJ1 to αDJ14, Features αDK1 to αDK8, Features αDL1 to αDL11, Features αDM1 to αDM8, Features αDN1 to α N6, feature αDO1 to αDO7, feature αDP1 to αDP7, feature αDQ1 to αDQ9, feature αDR1 to αDR8, feature αDS1 to αDS3, feature αDT1 to αDT4, feature αDU1 to αDU10, feature αDV1 to αDV5, feature αDW1 to αDW9, feature αDX1. Any one or a plurality of configurations among αDX4, features αDY1 to αDY11, features αDZ1 to αDZ4, and features αa1 to αa3 may be applied. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

  According to the invention relating to the above-described feature αa group, the following problem can be solved.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine has a dish storage section for storing game balls given to a player on the front face of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to a game ball launching device, It is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage unit, for example. Further, in a pachinko machine, a configuration including an upper dish storage section and a lower dish storage section as a dish storage section is also known. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper dish storage section is a game ball launching device. And the surplus game balls in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  Further, in the slot machine, when a new game is started by operating the start lever while a medal is bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation of the reel is started by the rotation start control being executed by the control means, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means executes the rotation start control. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation stop of the reels corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in the gaming machine as exemplified above, it is necessary to make the configuration relating to the set value that determines the advantage of the gaming machine suitable, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

  Hereinafter, a basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or applied to each of the features will be described.

  Pachinko machine: operation means operated by the player, game ball firing means for firing game balls based on the operation of the operation means, a ball passage for guiding the fired game balls to a predetermined game area, and a game area And a gaming machine provided with each of the gaming components arranged in the gaming machine, wherein a bonus is provided to the player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of the gaming components.

  Spinning-type gaming machines such as slot machines: provided with a picture display device for variably displaying a plurality of pictures, variably displaying the plurality of pictures is started by the operation of the start operation means, and caused by the operation of the stop operation means A gaming machine in which the variable display of the plurality of pictures is stopped after a predetermined time or a predetermined time has elapsed, and a privilege is given to the player according to the pictures after the stop.

  The gaming machine Z1 according to any one of the gaming machines described above, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine, an operation handle is provided, and a ball is fired to a predetermined game area in response to operation of the operation handle, and the ball is provided in an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning (or passing through the operating port), there is a case where the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined mode to enable the ball to win, and a value corresponding to the winning number is obtained. A value (including not only a prize ball but also data written on a magnetic card) is given.

  In any one of the gaming machines described above, the gaming machine is a slot machine, wherein the gaming machine Z2 is a slot machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information is provided, which is used to operate a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. And a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the determined identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins and medals are typical examples of the game medium.

  In any of the above-described gaming machines, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: "variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string comprising a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, The game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display of the game, and many balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.

  Note that the “ball” described in each of the above embodiments corresponds to the “game medium” or “game ball” in the claims, and the “accessory ratio” described in each of the above embodiments corresponds to the “ The ratio of the number of the game media paid out by the payout means to the number of the game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning port, and The “combination ratio” corresponds to the “ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the second winning opening to the number of game media paid out by payout means” in the claims. I do.

10. Pachinko machines (game machines)
1650a Variable member (variable means)
S458 Part of the discriminating means S485 Part of the discriminating means S1058 Part of the discriminating means S1331 Part of the discriminating means S1593 Privilege game executing means S1992 Game state setting means S3107 Specific element setting means S10853 Privilege game executing means S11607 Variable game executing means

Claims (5)

The state of the specific element relating to the degree of advantage of the player includes at least a first state corresponding to a first degree of advantage and a second state corresponding to a second degree of advantage higher than the first degree of advantage. Specific element setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of states;
Game state setting means for setting one of a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state based on establishment of a predetermined setting condition And
The second game state is characterized in that it is configured to be more advantageous to a player when the specific element is set to the first state than when the specific element is set to the second state. A gaming machine. Determining means for performing a determination based on satisfaction of a determination condition;
Bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player based on a result of the determination by the determination means being a predetermined specific determination result,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the first state is configured to have a lower probability of being the specific determination result than the second state. Ball entry means that game balls can enter,
A variable means that can be changed to a first position where a game ball easily enters the ball entry means and a second position where a game ball is less likely to enter the ball than the first position;
A variable game in which the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on a result of the determination by the determination means being a second determination result different from the specific determination result. Variable game execution means to execute;
A privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on a game ball having entered the ball entry means,
3. The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the second gaming state is configured to be more easily provided with the predetermined privilege by the privilege granting unit than the first gaming state. 4.   The said game state setting means is comprised so that the said 1st game state can be set based on becoming the said specific determination result in the said 2nd game state. Gaming machine.   The gaming machine according to any one of claims 2 to 4, wherein the second gaming state is configured to be maintained until the specific determination result is obtained.

Images